Skip to main content

Full text of "The E.S.C. quarterly"

See other formats 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 

LYRASIS  members  and  Sloan  Foundation 


http://www.archive.org/details/escquarterlyv912nort 


The  E.  S.C.  Quarterly 


VOLUME  9,  NO.  1-2 


Own 


WINTER-SPRING,  1951 


North  Carolina  Newspaper  Publishing  Has  Developed  Into 
Important  State  Industry;  Printing  Business  Expanding 


th  S~*-  jd  J? 


*.  .  .         L  ./..?  £* 


/  V 


1 


*^*   jL  Jfe> 


7{f#  //;;// 


|        >«^*«^ 


-———-I'"       Ill  l»  - t» — ' — '      ........~     -    ■         I      ... 


p<,  Pi-ribii..       y  «..:  fupplied  with  this  Paps*,   at  Fear  SbWwgs,   Pro  '•.:■:•■  •'    >    ■•'-.M.y,    .,v<<mmi 
;.  :",    by    ii;»  es.  j'nvisj    at  .-the  I*nnt«ng-Of|.cc  in  N&pk'rti't    x   ■  :•    ••  -     •  •  r  ci    .    •  '   •.' 

U  *    kj  £Jm:k~  ;im.  ii-  i   :•■■  don:  rtdcnubi)      Aov     r,     ;  h  x  k  Ms  ot  a  iiiu^Lratu  Lc^ch,  T; 

.,  aim  /  w^v^'.  <  ior  L-vcry  v.  a!;  Jur.  * 


c:..d     .  ;..-.?  &*>/'//  tfjfj  the  Orib  Week,  a 


tllPLE     ff    i; 


M  £  N*    A    V  i  s  i 


*x        j.v.-.^.roi  .  ..!  nn  Account  of  the  Mar-    ,:  ;>;,.:;  i ,  ,m  that  i  '..,,',:  .    h.UI.     :.!;-V.,.  s,-..-,i  ii 

/     %  s:--v   ..;■  .:rr:.:    i,      U   »en   Occurrences  of    a  whuc  Klui^nt  G^lTU  u,    ■  ril...:  vv*  • iui  wit! 

••        \  VI-    ■■<■    ■     :   i:-    .    .   .    ;    I,.,,-.;,;;,;,!    upon    t::u      (J,.,... 


i-i    «*     *    '    *    c    i,  in  the  io**v«v^«*    d^f§s  - 

.  v  T'hen  arporeel  ff!>>:!:b  in  the  Fi 


i   .  . 


ni 


mxnm  mtul* 


Photogi^aph  of  part  of  front  page  first  newspaper  published  in  North  Carolina  (See  in^  le  cover) 


PUBLISHED  BY 

Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALEIGH,  N.  C. 


PAGE  2 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 

(Formerly  The  U.C.C.  Quarterly) 


Volume  9,  Number  1-2 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


Issued  four  times  a  year  at  Raleigh,  N.  C,  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 

NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  Marion  W.  Heiss, 
Greensboro;  C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;  Bruce  E.  Davis,  Charlotte. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Col.  A.  L.  Fletcher,  Raleigh,  chair- 
man; Mrs.  Gaston  A.  Johnson,  High  Point;  W.  B.  Horton, 
Yanceyville;  C.  P.  Clark,  Wilson;  Dr.  Alphonso  Elder,  Dur- 
ham; Corbett  Scott,  Asheboro;  L.  L.  Ray,  Raleigh;  Joel  B. 
Leighton,  Rockingham;  J.  A.  Scoggins,  Charlotte. 


HENRY   E.   KENDALL Chairman 

BROOKS  PRICE __ .Deputy  Commissioner 

R.  FULLER  MARTIN Director 

Unemployment  Compensation  Division 

ERNEST  C.  McCRACKEN Director 

North  Carolina  State  Employment  Service  Division 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Informational  Service  Representative 

Cover  illustrations  represent  typical  North  Carolina 
industries  or  business  activities  under  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Program. 

Cover  for  Winter,  1951 — Photograph  shows  part  of  the  front 
page  of  the  North  Carolina  Gazette,  not  the  first  issue,  but 
the  oldest  known  issue  of  a  North  Carolina  newspaper.  It 
was  published  by  James  Davis  in  New  Bern  and  is  dated 
November  15,  1751.  Davis  was  the  first  printer  in  the  State 
and  published  the  State  Laws  for  many  years. — Photo  by 
Miss  Dorothy  D.  Reynolds,  Dept.  of  Archives  and  History. 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 

CONTENTS  ^7e 

North  Carolina  Publications 2 

Press  Association  Active  in  Promoting  State  Papers 3 

By  Henry  Belk 
Organization  and  Early  Days  of  N.  C.  Press  Association 4 

By  Clarence  Griffin 

Journalism  Foundation,  UNC,  Aids  School  in  Training 6 

Personal  Journalism,  Editor  Feuds,  Half  Century  Ago 7 

By  H.E.C.  Bryant 
Personalities  of  Past  Among  North  Carolina  Editors 10 

By  Roland  F.  Beasley 
Yesteryear  Editors  More  Vigorous  Than  Today's  Crop 12 

By  Dr.  Oscar  J.  Coffin 

Description  of  State  Newspapers  Written  28  Years  Ago 13 

Editor  Daniels  Distinguished  State  Citizen 15 

Printing  Industry  of  the  Carolinas,  Effective  Group 16 

By  Henry  L.  Weathers 

Press  Notes:   Interesting  Items  of  People  and  Papers 17 

N.  C.  Has  41  Daily  Newspapers;  7  Morning;  34  Afternoon  ....  22 

Thirty-Three  Semi-Weekly  Papers  Published  in  State  29 

North  Carolina  Is  Well  Supplied  with  133  Weekly  Papers..— 33 

Blum's  and  Turner's  Almanacs  Still  Printed  in  State 36 

'Yellow  Jacket',  Rural  Republican  Paper  with  a  Sting 37 

John  D.  Gold  Long  Publisher  of  Wilson  Times 38 

Heavy  Articles,  Wit  and  Humor  in  College  Publications 41 

Religious,  Professional,  Trade  and  Special  Publications 44 

N.C.  Newspapers  Fine  Training  Schools  for  High  Posts 47 

J.  Hampton  Rich,  Editor,  Adept  Promoter  and  Ink  Hound— 48 

Incident  Relating  to  Press  Institute,  Carolina,  Duke 48 

Progressive  Farmer,  Notable  Magazine 49 

Officers,  Meeting  Places  and  Times,  N.  C.  Press  Association__..49 
Study  Labor  Resources  for  N.  C.  Industrial  Expansion 50 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper 
Amendments  Extend  Coverage  of  Social  Security  Act    51 

By  M.  D.  Dewberry 
Analysis  of  Unemployed  Worker  Who  Exhaust  Benefits 53 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn 
Employment  Security  Compared;  11  Months,  1949  &  1950  ..... 54 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn 

Index  to  Volumes  7  and  8,  1949-50 ____ 57-62 

Note:  Articles  not  credited,  with  by-line,  written  by  M.  R.  Dun- 

nagan,  Editor. 


NORTH  CAROLINA  PUBLICATIONS 

North  Carolina  boasts  of  considerably  more  than 
300  periodical  publications,  about  100  of  which  are 
classed  as  trade,  church,  professional,  college,  or- 
phanage, labor  and  other  miscellaneous  publications. 
More  than  200,  our  count  207,  are  classed  as  news- 
papers. Of  these,  41  are  in  the  daily  field,  including 
seven  morning  and  34  afternoon  papers;  one  is  a 
tri- weekly;  33  are  semi-weeklies,  and  133  are  weekly 
papers.  The  State's  papers,  generally,  are  in  fine 
condition,  prosperous  going  concerns,  but  beset  by 
the  frequently  experienced  shortage  of  newsprint. 
Printing  firms  in  the  State  are  equally  prosperous 
money-makers. 

The  ESC  records  reveal  that  139  firms,  in  the  sec- 
ond quarter  of  1950,  engaged  in  printing,  publish- 
ing and  allied  activities  are  subject  to,  covered  by, 
the  Employment  Security  Law,  meaning,  normally, 
with  eight  or  more  employees.  Of  these,  66  were 
newspaper  publishers,  who  employed  an  average  of 
3380  workers  and  paid  wages  for  the  quarter  of 
$2,778,189.  This  was  an  average  of  $63.23  a  week, 
considerably  higher  than  the  State  average  of  $45.27. 
Commercial  printing  firms  numbered  67,  employing 
an  average  of  1756  workers,  with  a  quarterly  payroll 
of  $1,210,581,  or  an  average  wage  of  $53.21  a  week. 
In  other  classifications  are  three  engaged  in  pub- 
lishing periodicals,  including  two  in  publishing  books 
and  one  classed  as  miscellaneous. 

For  the  year  1949,  the  last  for  which  complete  fig- 
ures are  available,  the  record  shows  that  132  firms 
engaged  in  publishing  and  printing  were  subject  to 
the  Employment  Security  Law,  while  for  the  second 
quarter  of  1950,  the  number  was  139,  an  increase  of 
seven.  Also,  the  1949  figures  showed  average  em- 
ployment of  5010  workers,  against  5268  for  the  sec- 
ond quarter  of  1950,  a  gain  of  258  workers.  This  is 
a  sizable  increase,  indicating  the  increase  in  the 
number  and  size  of  firms  and  the  numbers  of  work 
ers  employed.  Gross  wages  in  1949  amounted  to 
$15,644,590,  an  average  weekly  wage  of  $60.05. 

As  is  generally  known,  the  maximum  in  payroll 
tax  is  3  percent  for  unemployment,  of  which  the 
State  collects  2.7  percent  and  the  Federal  Govern 
ment  0.3  percent.  Under  the  Employer  Experience 
Rating  Plan,  employers  may  earn  reduced  rates  after 
three  years  of  experience.  It  is  interesting  to  note 
that  12  firms  had  not  operated  long  enough  to  be 
considered  for  a  reduction  in  rates,  and  six  firms 
failed  to  earn  reductions.  On  the  other  hand,  one 
firm  was  paying  the  lowest  rate,  one-tenth  of  1  per 
cent  and  one  was  paying  two-tenths  of  one  percent. 

Between  these  rates,  14  firms  had  earned  the  2 
percent  rate;  10  the  1.5  percent  rate;  26  firms,  1 
percent ;  47  firms,  0.8  percent ;  12  firms,  0.6  percent 
and  three  firms,  0.4  percent.  It  is  also  interesting 
to  note  that  in  the  second  quarter  of  1950,  the  aver- 
age rate  paid  by  the  liable  publishing  and  printing 
firms  was  0.99  percent,  slightly  less  than  one  percent 
as  against  1.55  percent  for  all  liable  firms  in  tht 
State  for  that  period.  It  is  likely  that  the  rate  wil 
remain  close  to  one  percent  for  the  full  year. 

Less  than  one-third,  66  out  of  207  of  the  news 
papers  in  the  State  are  subject  to  the  ES  Law.  Tha' 
means  that  about  140  newspapers  operate  shop; 
employing  less  than  eight  workers,  exclusive  of  th< 
owner  (if  sole  owner,  and  not  a  corporation)  an( 
partners  or  minor  members  of  the  family. 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  3 


Press  Association  Active  in  Promoting  State  Papers 

By  Henry  Belk,  President,  N.  C.  Press  Association  and  Editor,  The  Neivs-Argus,  Goldsboro 


What  is  the  North  Carolina  Press  Association  ? 

It  is  an  association  whose  members  are  newspa- 
pers of  North  Carolina.  Associate  members  are 
members  of  allied  fields. 

Membership  in  the  Association  is  made  up  of  daily 
and  non-daily  publications.  Currently  each  of  the 
daily  papers  of  North  Carolina  is  a  member.  The 
100  percent  mark  for  dailies  was  reached  recently 
when  the  Kannapolis  Independent  joined.  Mem- 
bership in  the  non-daily  field  is  at  a  high  mark. 

The  Association  holds  two  meetings  a  year.  The 
annual  meeting  is  held  in  the  summer,  generally 
early  in  July,  at  the  mountains  one  year  and  at  the 
becah  the  next.  On  a  few  occasions  over  its  long 
history  the  Association  has  held  its  meetings  during 
a  sea  trip.  Some  of  the  long-time  members  still  re- 
call a  friendly  game  a  bunch  of  the  fellows  started 
during  a  convention  at  sea  only  to  have  a  dear  sister 
aboard  claim  the  total  fund  for  her  Community  Chest 
back  home. 

The  Press  Institute  is  held  annually  in  January 
with  the  University  of  North  Carolina  and  Duke 
University  as  co-sponsors.  Duke  annually  entertains 


the  Institute  at  a  dinner  meeting  on  Friday  evening 
of  the  Institute.  The  Institute  was  started  27  years 
ago  and  each  of  the  succeeding  sessions  has  featured 
timely  programs  with  special  sessions  for  shop  talk. 
The  Associated  Dailies  of  North  Carolina  regularly 
have  a  session  at  the  Institute  and  the  non-dailies 
have  a  separate  session  at  the  same  time.  Each  pre- 
sents a  program  of  interest  to  its  particular  group. 

High  spot  of  the  Institutes  is  the  award  of  prizes 
for  outstanding  newspaper  writing  or  pictures  of 
the  past  year.  Prizes  are  awarded  both  in  the  daily 
and  non-daily  fields.  This  year  a  new  high  in  entries 
in  the  daily  contests  has  been  reported  with  more 
than  400  submitted.  It  is  traditional  that  the  Gov- 
ernor of  North  Carolina  make  the  presentation  at 
the  dinner  at  Duke. 

The  Association  is  greatly  indebted  to  Miss  Bea- 
trice Cobb  of  Morganton  for  services  she  has  ren- 
dered as  secretary.  Many  state  press  associations 
hire  an  executive  secretary.  Miss  Cobb,  always  com- 
petent and  gracious,  has  given  the  Association  with- 
out cost  a  quality  of  devotion  and  service  which 
money  could  not  buy.    She  edits  the  "North  Carolina 


OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS  OF  N.  C.  PRESS  ASSOCIATION— Scene  at  Grove 
Park  Inn,  Asheville,  July  8,  1950,  as  retiring  President  R.  E.  Price,  Rutherford  County 
Neivs,  turns  over  gavel  to  new  President  Henry  Belk,  Goldsboro  Neivs-Argus.  Others, 
seated,  I.  to  r.  are:  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  Morganton  Neivs-Herald,  secretary-treasurer  for 
SO  years;  Mr.  Price,  Mr.  Belk;  B.  Arp  Lowrance,  Mecklenburg  Times,  vice-president. 
Back  row,  I.  to  r.:  J.  F.  Hurley,  Salisbury  Post,  and  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Smithfield  Herald, 
directors;  Clarence  Griffin,  Forest  City  Courier,  historian;  W.  Randall  Harris,  Asheville 
Citizen-Times,  and  Holt  McPherson,  Shelby  Daily  Star,  directors.  Directors  not  in  group: 
left,  Leslie  Thompson,  News  Reporter,  Whiteville ;  right,  Weimar  Jones,  Franklin  Press. 


PAGE  4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195 


Press,"  monthly  publication  of  the  Association,  and 
attends  to  multitudinous  details  with  an  unusual 
application.  She  gives  her  job  as  unpaid  secretary 
of  the  Association  the  same  capable  and  outstanding 
attention  that  has  distinguished  her  as  publisher  of 
The  News-Herald,  in  Morganton,  and  in  many  fields 
of  State  progress. 

Big  project  before  the  Association  now  (and 
should  be  for  some  years  ahead)  is  the  raising  of  a 
$100,000  fund  for  the  Journalism  Foundation.  The 
response  to  the  drive  for  the  Foundation  among 
papers  of  the  State  got  a  good  start  last  year.  A 
number  have  signified  intention  to  make  annual  con- 
tributions. The  Foundation  will  supplement  funds 
for  the  School  of  Journalism  at  Chapel  Hill.  Idea 
is  to  raise  the  School  to  accredited  status  as  soon  as 
possible.     Holt   McPherson,   of   Shelby,   heads   the 


Foundation  and  D.  Hiden  Ramsey,  of  Asheville,  is 
its  treasurer. 

Already  the  Foundation  has  proved  its  worth  by 
making  funds  available  to  secure  the  services  of  Jack 
Riley  for  the  Journalism  School.  A  special  appro- 
priation of  $500  to  supplement  Prof.  Riley's  salary 
was  made.  The  Journalism  School  funds  from  State 
sources  were  not  sufficient  to  secure  this  needed 
addition  to  the  School. 

As  President  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association  for 
the  year,  I  wish  to  extend  thanks  to  "Mike"  Dunna- 
gan  for  compiling  this  newspaper  issue.  For  the 
first  time  it  brings  together  a  great  wealth  of  mate- 
rial about  newspapers  and  newspaper  people  of 
North  Carolina.  I  predict  that  future  researchers 
into  the  history  of  the  North  Carolina  press  will 
make  use  of  material  in  this  edition. 


Organization  and  Early  Days  of  N.  C.  Press  Association 

By  Clarence  Griffin,  Forest  City  Courier,  Historian,  N.  C.  Press  Association 


Although  the  North  Carolina  Press  Association 
was  founded  in  1873,  there  were  no  printed  session 
minutes  of  the  Association  until  1888.  A  few  years 
ago  a  pamphlet,  giving  proceedings  of  the  Associa- 
tion from  1873  to  1887,  as  copied  from  contempo- 
rary newspapers,  was  prepared  to  supplement  the 
annual  session  proceedings,  which  have  been  pub- 
lished each  year  since. 

The  organizational  meeting  of  the  North  Carolina 
Press  Association  or  "Association  of  Editors",  was 
held  in  Goldsboro  on  May  14-15,  1873,  with  repre- 
sentatives present  from  29  of  the  State's  newspapers 
and  one  represented  by  proxy.  After  completing  a 
temporary  organization,  the  need  for  an  association 
was  discussed  extensively,  and  on  the  second  day  it 

TWO  RECORDS  OF  EARLY  ACTS 
OF  N.  C.  PRESS  ASSOCIATION 

The  committee,  evidently  named  by  J.  A.  Sharpe  or  J.  F. 
Hurley,  one  of  which  was  president  when  the  decision  was 
reached  to  compile  the  earlier  records  of  the  N.  C.  Press 
Association,  included  J.  B.  Sherrill,  Concord,  secretary  for 
3  2  years;  Josephus  Daniels,  Raleigh,  and  Francis  D.  Win- 
ston, Windsor.  The  record,  compiled  from  newspaper  re- 
ports by  Mr.  Sherrill,  was  printed  in  1920,  a  book  of  more 
than  100  pages.  This  is  in  short  supply  now,  although 
copies  may  be  found  among  the  books  of  members  active  30 
years  ago. 

When  the  association  held  its  50th  anniversary  celebra- 
tion July  26-28,  1922,  at  Cleveland  Springs  Hotel,  Shelby, 
with  President  Sherrill  presiding,  Mr.  Sherrill,  J.  A.  Rob- 
inson, oldest  member  of  the  Association;  T.  B.  Parker,  State 
Department  of  Agriculture;  Dr.  Edgar  W.  Knight,  of  the 
State  University;  M.  L.  Shipman,  Association  historian; 
Josephus  Daniels,  Raleigh  News  and  Observer;  David  Clark, 
of  the  Southern  Textile  Bulletin,  Charlotte;  H.  B.  Varner, 
Lexington  Dispatch;  Wade  H.  Harris,  Charlotte  Observer 
(read  by  J.  A.  Parham)  ;  John  Paul  Lucas,  Duke  Power  Co., 
Charlotte;  Governor  Cameron  Morrison,  and  others  address- 
ed the  meeting,  largely  on  the  50  years  of  development  since 
the  association  was  formed.  Clyde  R.  Hoey  welcomed  the 
guests  to  Shelby. 

Record  of  this  meeting,  the  speeches  and  proceedings,  was 
compiled  by  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  Morganton,  then  and  for 
30  years  secretary  of  the  Association.  This  anniversary 
record  is  in  larger  supply,  but  also  limited. 


was  voted  to  form  the  association.  A  permanent 
organization  was  set  up  and  a  constitution  and  by- 
laws was  adopted.  Despite  the  fact  that  the  con- 
stitution has  been  in  use  more  than  75  years,  it  is 
basically  the  same  as  adopted  on  that  May  day  in 
1873,  with  exceptions  of  a  few  amendments,  made 
from  time  to  time  to  meet  exigencies  of  changing 
conditions. 

The  members  were  faced  with  substantially  the 
same  problems  in  the  early  days  as  they  are  faced 
with  today.  The  main  concern  in  those  early  years 
was  advertising  rates,  prices  charged  for  job  print- 
ing, governmental  charges  for  postage  and  ethics 
in  general. 

One  of  the  primary  purposes  for  organizing  the 
N.  C.  Press  Association  was  to  improve  ethics  among 
members  of  the  fourth  estate  in  North  Carolina,  and) 
the   association    has   perhaps   had   greater   succes 
along  this  line  than  any  other. 

RESOLUTION  ON  ADV.  RATES 

At  the  first  meeting  it  was  urged  that  all  publish- 
ers adopt  a  published  list  of  advertising  rates,  anc 
that  each  one  adhere  strictly  to  this  published  rate 
or   else    "this   convention   will   discountenance   anj 
editor  who  may  deviate  from  the  same".    They  als( 
condemned  any  deviation  from  published  rates  foi 
national  advertising;  and  disapproved  of  any  dis 
crimination   "in   favor  of  any  advertising  agency 
North  or  South".     They  also  made  preparation  fo: 
publishing  the  first  newspaper  directory  of  Nort 
Carolina,  showing  name  of  paper,  publisher,  adver 
tising  rates,  size  of  page  and  classified  rates.    The 
condemned  the  practice  of  newspapers  having  "pat 
ent  insides  or  outsides  .  .  .  containing  advertising 
printed  outside  the  State,  and  urged  that  it  be  aban 
doned.     The  practice  of  accepting  subscriptions  oi 
credit  was  discountenanced.  A  resolution  was  adopt 
ed  favoring  more  immigration  into  North  Carolim 


WINTER-SPRING,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  5 


A  representative  group  of  newspaper  editors  and 
publishers  attended  the  second  meeting  held  in  the 
State  Capitol  in  Raleigh  on  May  13-14,  1874.  Forty- 
five  newspapers  were  represented  and  several  new 
members  were  taken  in  at  this  meeting.  A  resolution 
was  adopted  appointing  a  superintendent  to  investi- 
gate the  various  advertising  agencies  of  the  country, 
and  report  back  giving  information  on  which  of  the 
agencies  were  solvent  or  reliable.  A  number  of 
agencies  had  "swindled  and  defrauded  the  member" 
newspapers  by  placing  advertising  and  failing  to 
pay  for  same.  Steps  were  taken  to  systematize  rates 
for  legal  advertising,  define  legal  advertising  and 
determine  which  should  be  published.  Committees 
were  appointed  to  go  before  the  General  Assembly 
and  secure  passage  of  laws  defining  legal  advertis- 
ing, an  object  which  was  not  accomplished  until 
many  years  later. 

CENSURES  GENERAL  ASSEMBLY 

The  matter  of  sticking  by  published  rates  again 
came  up.  In  defense  of  cutting  rates,  one  member 
remarked  that  "we  cannot  always  stick  by  them,  for 
many  of  our  people  advertise  in  our  weeklies  from 
which  they  realize  but  little,  and  it  is  done  by  them 
to  sustain  their  paper  in  order  to  get  the  weekly 
current  news."  In  the  matter  of  agency  advertis- 
ing it  was  decided  that  "if  we  favor  anybody,  let's 
favor  our  own  North  Carolinians  .  .  .  We  will  get 
as  many  advertisements  and  just  as  many  dollars 
from  the  outside."  A  visit  was  then  made  to  the 
office  of  Governor  Todd  R.  Caldwell,  where  His  Ex- 
cellency "Unearthed  his  best  North  Carolina  drink- 
ables and  toasted  the  Press." 

At  the  third  annual  convention  held  in  Wilming- 
ton on  May  11-12,  1875,  a  resolution  of  censure  of 
the  North  Carolina  General  Assembly  was  adopted. 
Couched  in  rather  strong  terms,  the  resolution  con- 
demned the  General  Assembly  of  ignoring  their 
committee  on  legal  advertising,  and  at  the  same  time 
spending  several  thousands  of  dollars  for  advertis- 
ing in  New  York,  London  and  Scottish  newspapers, 
setting  forth  the  advantages  of  North  Carolina,  and 
ignoring  North  Carolina  newspapers. 

It  was  at  this  session  that  Scott  D.  Pool,  Jr.,  urged 
a  resolution  which  would  make  North  Carolina  news- 
papers free  and  independent  in  politics.  His  rous- 
ing speech  pointed  out  that  any  progressive  news- 
paper was  not  dependent  on  the  small  stipend  of 
legal  advertising,  and  that  the  old  system  of  "offi- 
cial" newspapers  be  abandoned.  He  advocated  each 
publisher  putting  out  a  newspaper  for  the  develop- 
ment of  his  own  community.  He  stressed  commun- 
ity service  above  politics.  This  was  the  first  radical 
departure  from  the  idea  that  a  newspaper  must  de- 
pend on  legal  advertising  as  an  official  newspaper, 
to  survive.  Consideration  of  his  resolution  was 
postponed,  as  too  many  editors  of  that  day  still 
looked  to  the  court  house  ring  for  sustenance  when 
the  going  was  hard.  But  later  in  the  session  the 
question  was  revived,  and  it  was  adopted  by  three 
votes  majority,  but  still  later,  after  much  parlia- 
mentary skirmishing,  it  was  laid  on  the  table.    The 


AFTERNOON  DAILIES  ASSOCIATION 

MAINTAINS  RALEIGH  NEWS  BUREAU 

The  North  Carolina  Association  of  Afternoon  Dailies,  Inc., 
is  an  organization  of  the  afternoon  newspapers  in  North 
Carolina,  the  primary  purpose  of  which  is  to  maintain  a 
news  bureau  in  Raleigh  to  supply  them  with  news  develop- 
ing in  the  Capital  City  of  State-wide  interest,  as  well  as 
localized  news  stories.  Members  pay  dues  which  are  de- 
voted almost  entirely  to  maintaining  the  news  bureau  in 
Raleigh.  G.  Lynn  Nisbet  has  been  correspondent  and  man- 
ager of  the  bureau  for  several  years. 

The  members  usually  hold  a  breakfast  meeting  in  con- 
nection with  the  summer  and  winter  meetings  of  the  N.  C. 
Press  Association  and  at  such  other  times  as  is  necessary 
to  handle  the  business  of  the  association.  The  association 
was  organized  about  25  years  ago,  and  was  incorporated  in 
1931. 

Officers  elected  at  the  January  meeting  in  Chapel  Hill 
are:  David  J.  Whichard,  Jr.,  publisher,  the  Daily  Reflector, 
Greenville,  president;  J.  F.  Hurley,  publisher,  Salisbury 
Evening  Post,  vice-president;  J.  P.  Huskins,  Statesville 
Daily  Record,  secretary-treasurer;  Additional  directors  are: 
Holt  McPherson,  Shelby  Daily  Star,  and  Floyd  Hendley, 
Greensboro  Record. 


resolution  condemning  the  use  of  patent  insides  or 
outsides  was  revived,  and  the  original  motion  was 
killed. 

The  meeting  of  1876,  scheduled  for  Goldsboro  and 
New  Bern,  was  a  failure,  due  to  the  appearance  of 
only  four  newspaper  representatives.  The  conven- 
tion was  re-scheduled  to  meet  in  Raleigh  on  June 
14th,  but  developed  into  a  social  gathering. 

FIRST  WESTERN  CONVENTION 

The  meeting  of  1880,  held  in  Asheville,  the  first 
western  North  Carolina  convention,  was  marred 
somewhat  by  a  general  protest  of  the  churches  of 
that  town  over  the  scheduled  ball,  which  was  part 
of  the  program.  Hon.  W.  W.  Holden,  former  Gov- 
ernor of  North  Carolina,  and  a  former  Raleigh  news- 
paper editor,  the  only  Governor  to  be  impeached, 
was  elected  the  association's  first  historian.  His  ap- 
pointment met  with  little  approval  throughout  the 
State,  and  the  NCPA  was  highly  criticized  for  his 
appointment. 

Substantially  the  same  subjects  continued  to  come 
up  for  the  next  few  years  and  were  discussed  at 
length  at  each  meeting.  By  1887,  when  the  conven- 
tion met  in  Hendersonville  in  July,  evidences  that 
it  was  becoming  a  social  organization  were  already 
apparent. 

However,  despite  the  fact  that  the  annual  conven- 
tions now  largely  represent  a  social  meeting,  with 
its  attendant  good  fellowship  of  other  editors  and 
publishers,  the  North  Carolina  Press  Association, 
across  the  years,  has  justified  itself.  Many  of  the 
improvements  in  the  profession,  the  high  standards 
of  ethics  and  the  daily  performances  of  newspapers 
in  North  Carolina  owe  to  the  NCPA  their  inception. 
Today,  unlike  1875,  the  NCPA  bears  weight,  and  its 
representatives  receive  a  quick  and  considerate  hear- 
ing among  the  lawmakers  of  North  Carolina.  Down 
the  years  the  association  has  done  much  to  improve 
ethics  among  its  members,  and  non-members  as 
well.  It  is  the  voice  of  the  fourth  estate  in  North 
Carolina,  and  that  voice  is  one  which  few  newspapers 
dare  to  disobey. 


PAGE  6 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


Journalism  Foundation,  UNC,  Aids  School  in  Traininj 


{Requested  Contribution) 


Not  long  ago  D.  Hiden  Ramsey,  general  manager 
of  the  Asheville  Citizen-Times,  who  serves  also  as 
treasurer  of  the  School  of  Journalism  Foundation 
of  North  Carolina,  Inc.,  received  from  an  anonymous 
donor  a  check  for  a  thousand  dollars  as  a  tribute 
to  Oscar  Jackson  Coffin,  dean  of  the  School  of  Jour- 
nalism at  the  University  of  North  Carolina.* 

It  came  from  a  former  student  of  "Skipper"  Cof- 
fin, who  took  that  way  to  articulate  his  interest  in 
the  Foundation  and  the  School  of  Journalism  head 
who,  working  together,  are  seeking  to  advance  the 
Chapel  Hill  journalism  school  to  a  foremost  position 
in  journalistic  educational  ranks  of  the  country. 

Established  in  1947,  the  Foundation  is  gathering 
an  endowment  of  $100,000,  income  from  which  will 
be  used  to  supplement  University  funds  available  to 
the  School  of  Journalism  for  teaching  salaries  and 
other  needed  expenses. 

TRIBUTES  TO  NEWS-PEOPLE 

The  tribute  gift  to  Skipper  Coffin  was  the  third 
such,  the  North  Carolina  Press  Association  having 
launched  the  fund  with  a  gift  of  $1,000  as  tribute 
to  its  long-time  secretary,  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  of 
Morganton,  and  The  Hickory  Daily  Record  having 
contributed  $1,000  as  a  memorial  to  Miss  Sara  Lee 
Gifford  who  was  fatally  injured  in  an  automobile 
accident  two  years  ago.  The  late  W.  C.  Dowd,  Jr., 
who  was  publisher  of  The  Charlotte  News  many 
years,  left  in  his  will  a  bequest  in  excess  of  $5,000 
to  the  Foundation,  and  there  have  been  numerous 
gifts  in  lesser  amounts  to  help  lift  the  total,  but  many 
more  are  needed  before  the  $100,000  minimum  fund 
will  be  complete  and  the  Foundation's  usefulness 
developed  as  its  projectors  hope  will  prove  the  case. 

The  Foundation  was  launched  as  a  child  of  the 
North  Carolina  Press  Association  with  15  charter 
members,  including  many  of  the  leaders  of  the  news- 
paper and  radio  business,  principally  in  North  Caro- 
lina, but  with  many  from  other  states.  The  U.  S. 
Treasury  approved  gifts  to  the  Foundation  as  de- 
ductible for  income  tax  purposes. 

Already  efforts  have  paid  off  by  advancing  from 
status  of  a  department  in  English  to  its  own  School 
with  Coffin  as  dean.  Plans  are  shaping  by  which 
it  will  before  much  longer  be  adequately  housed  in 
its  own  building,  where  expanded  facilities  will  en- 
hance its  usefulness. 

OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS 

Holt  McPherson,  Shelby  newspaper  and  radio  ex- 
ecutive, is  president  of  the  Foundation,  which  has 
Leslie  Thompson,  editor  of  The  Whiteville  News 
Reporter,  as  vice-president;  William  C.  Lassiter,  of 
Raleigh,  as  secretary  and  general  counsel ;  D.  Hiden 
Ramsey  as  treasurer;  Roy  Parker,  of  Ahoskie,  as 

•'Another  check  for  $1,000,  also  anonymously  presented,  was  announced 
at  the  meeting  of  the  chartering  members  of  the  Journalism  Foundation  in 
Chapel  Hill  January  19,  honoring  Professor  Phillips  Russell,  of  the  UNC 
school  of  Journalism  faculty  for  several  years.  The  total  receipts  then 
amounted  to   $14,505. — Editor. 


assistant  secretary,  and  Dr.  Clarence  Poe,  of  Raleigh, 
as  assistant  treasurer. 

Directors,  in  addition  to  the  officers,  are  Miss 
Beatrice  Cobb,  J.  E.  Dowd,  Jr.,  J.  L.  Home,  Jr.,  W. 
K.  Hoyt,  Richard  H.  Mason,  Frank  A.  Daniels,  John 
W.  Harden,  William  E.  Horner,  Thomas  J.  Lassiter, 
Steed  Rollins  and  Ed  M.  Anderson.    (Mr.  Anderson 


CHARTERING  MEMBERS  OF  THE 
UNC  JOURNALISM  FOUNDATION 

Founding  members  of  the  Journalism  Foundation,  UNC, 
are:  E.  H.  Abernethy,  Atlanta;  Walter  S.  Adams,  Asheville; 
Ed  M.  Anderson,  Brevard;  Dr.  C.  W.  Armstrong,  Salisbury; 
W.  J.  Arthur,  Jacksonville;  J.  W.  Atkins,  Gastonia;  J.  M. 
Bryan,  Greensboro;  F.  Grover  Britt,  Clinton;  Henry  Belk, 
Goldsboro;  Mrs.  James  Boyd,  Southern  Pines;  G.  W.  Brad 
ham,  Greensboro;  H.  Gait  Braxton,  Kinston;  *P.  H.  Batte, 
Charlotte; 

H.  C.  Bennett,  High  Point;  C.  H.  Crutchfield,  Charlotte; 
Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  Morganton;  H.  A.  Cecil,  Thomasville; 
Staley  A.  Cook,  Burlington;  Lenoir  Chambers,  Norfolk,  Va. ; 
Miss  Addie  Cooke,  Murphy;  *Curtis  B.  Johnson,  Charlotte; 
Douglas  Coxe,  Lumberton;  C.  C.  Council,  Durham;  E.  C. 
Daniels,  Jr.,  London;  H.  A.  Dennis,  Henderson;  O.  J.  Coffin, 
Chapel  Hill; 

Frank  A.  Daniels,  Raleigh;  Jonathan  Daniels,  Raleigh; 
M.  R.  Dunnagan,  Raleigh;  J.  E.  Dowd,  Charlotte;  C.  A. 
Eury,  New  Bern;  Gordon  Gray,  Chapel  Hill;  Louis  Graves 
Chapel  Hill;  Paul  Green,  Chapel  Hill;  Dr.  F.  P.  Graham, 
Chapel  Hill;  L.  C.  Gifford,  Hickory;  B.  S.  Griffith,  Char- 
lotte; John  W.  Harden,  Greensboro;  Clyde  R.  Hoey,  Shelby; 

W.  K.  Hoyt,  Winston-Salem;  J.  F.  Hurley,  Salisbury;  W. 
E.  Horner,  Sanford;  Mrs.  W.  C.  Hammer,  Asheboro;  P.  T. 
Hines,  Greensboro;  A.  W.  Huckle,  Rock  Hill,  S.  C;  Ray 
Hull,  Concord;  J.  L.  Home,  Jr.,  Rocky  Mount;  J.  P.  Huskins, 
Statesville;  John  B.  Harris,  Albemarle;  WT.  R.  Harris,  Ashe- 
ville; Gerald  W.  Johnson,  Baltimore;  C.  O.  Jeffress,  Greens- 
boro ; 

*Louis  I.  Jaffe,  Norfolk,  Va. ;  Dr.  T.  C.  Johnson,  Raleigh; 
Weimar  Jones,  Franklin;  E.  Z.  Jones,  Burlington;  H.  W. 
Kendall,  Greensboro;  Mrs.  Rena  Lassiter,  Smithfield;  J. 
Spencer  Love,  Washington,  D.  C;  H.  F.  Laffoon,  Elkin;  B.  Arp 
Lowrance,  Charlotte;  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Smithfield;  R.  M.  Lam 
beth,  Greensboro;  J.  D.  Langston,  Goldsboro;  Isaac  London, 
Rockingham ; 

Stahle  Linn,  Salisbury;  J.  Paul  Lucas,  Charlotte;  W.  W. 
Neal,  Atlanta;  Lynn  Nisbet,  Raleigh;  W.  M.  Oliver,  Reids- 
ville;  R.  B.  Page,  Wilmington;  John  A.  Park,  Raleigh;  Tal- 
bot Patrick,  Rock  Hill,  S.  C;  Edwin  Pate,  Laurinburg; 
W.  T.  Peacock,  Washington;  Roy  Parker,  Ahoskie;  Drew 
Pearson,  Washington,  D.  C;   Charles  J.  Parker,  Raleigh. 

Dr.  Clarence  Poe,  Raleigh;  R.  E.  Price,  Rutherfordton; 
C.  Knox  Massey,  Durham;  Holt  McPherson,  Shelby;  Mrs. 
E.  F.  McCulloch,  Elizabethtown;  Richard  H.  Mason,  Ral 
eigh ;  Spencer  Murphy,  Salisbury;  Mrs.  O.  C.  McQuage, 
Mocksville;  John  H.  Mebane,  Atlanta;  Santford  Martin 
Winston-Salem;  G.  C.  Munden,  Morehead  City;  Dr.  Fred 
Morrison,  Washington,  D.  C;  R.  W.  Madry,  Chapel  Hill; 

Steed  Rollins,  Durham;  Phillips  Russell,  Chapel  Hill;  D. 
A.  Rawley,  High  Point;  E.  A.  Resch,  Siler  City;  D.  Hiden 
Ramsey,  Asheville;  K.  Craige  Ramsey,  Salisbury;  W.  Curtis 
Russ,  Waynesville;  James  Street,  Chapel  Hill;  Don  Shoe- 
maker, Asheville;  Walter  Spearman,  Chapel  Hill;  Forrest 
H.  Shuford,  Raleigh;  Mrs.  E.  G.  Swindell,  Wilson;  Joe  S. 
Sink,  Lexington; 

J.  A.  Sharpe,  Jr.,  Lumberton;  W.  E.  Smith,  Albemarle; 
Bill  Sharpe,  Raleigh;  Leslie  Thompson,  Whiteville;  R.  B. 
Terry,  High  Point;  John  W.  Umstead,  Chapel  Hill;  Larry 
Walker,  Charlotte;  Miles  H.  Wolff,  Greensboro;  A.  L.  M. 
Wiggins,  Hartsville,  S.  C;  Capus  M.  Waynick,  Managua,  Nica- 
ragua; Tom  R.  Wolfe,  Albemarle;  Henry  Lee  Weathers, 
Shelby;  Lee  B.  Weathers,  Shelby;  Robert  M.  Wallace, 
Shelby. 

♦Deceased. 


Winter-Spring,  195 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  7 


was  elected  at  the  January  meeting  to  succeed  Curtis 
B.  Johnson,  deceased.  All  other  officers-directors 
were  re-elected.) 

The  Foundation  has  tremendous  potentialities  for 
usefulness.  Already  it  is  supplementing  the  salary 
of  a  much-needed  teacher  who  wouldn't  otherwise 
be  available  to  the  school,  and  it  is  the  purpose  to 
use  income  from  the  endowment  in  succeeding  years 
to  draw  to  the  School  of  Journalism  staff  the  best 
available  men  for  its  faculty.  The  program  is  and 
will  continue  to  be  adaptable  to  current  needs.  Its 
purpose  is  to  strengthen  the  training  of  young  people 
to  carry  on  the  newspaper  and  allied  radio  work  of 
North  Carolina  and  general  area. 

BETTER  TRAINED  JOURNALISTS 

Everything  that  contributes  to  better  training  of 
men  and  women  for  journalism  helps  the  business. 


Gifts  to  the  Journalism  Foundation  have  a  greater 
significance  than  mere  assistance  to  individuals.  A 
gift  to  the  Foundation  means  a  contribution  to  the 
training  of  those  who  will  operate  and  control  the 
press  of  the  future.  Those  trained  adequately  in  a 
good  journalism  school  will  be  the  best  insurance  for 
the  continuance  of  a  free  and  responsible  press  serv- 
ing the  state  and  nation.  Likewise,  a  free  and  re- 
sponsible press  will  be  the  safeguard,  not  only  for 
public  education  in  the  future,  but  also  for  all  the 
other  advantages  which  we  enjoy  under  our  demo- 
cratic form  of  government.  To  that  end  the  Jour- 
nalism Foundation  will  help  in  every  way  within  its 
means  to  advance  the  cause  of  journalistic  training 
— the  years  will  write  eloquent  testimonials  to  wise 
giving  thereto. 


Personal  Journalism,  Editor  Feuds,  Half  Century  Ago 

By  H.  E.  C.  (Red  Buck)  Bryant,  Route  1,  Matthews,  N.  C. 


Asked  to  contribute  a  story  for  the  magazine  of 
the  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Caro- 
lina, I  was  told :  "It  would  not  be  bad  to  compare 
newspapers  of  50  years  ago  with  those  of  today." 
That  would  be  a  difficult  task.  Yet,  I  do  not  mind 
pointing  out  some  differences  as  I  see  them. 

When  I  commenced  my  reporting  career  with  The 
Charlotte  Observer  in  the  summer  of  1895,  under  its 
able  editor,  Joseph  P.  Caldwell,  a  capable  man  or 
woman  with  a  few  hundred  dollars  could  have  estab- 
lished a  paper  and  maintained  it  by  industry  and 
good  judgment.  He  or  she  could  have  purchased  a 
few  cases  of  type  and  a  press  and  started  in  busi- 
ness. But,  today,  it  would  require  thousands  upon 
thousands  of  dollars  to  provide  the  machinery  for 
a  single  issue  of  a  paper ;  the  cost  of  production  has 
increased  tremendously.  As  a  result,  a  majority 
of  newspapers  are  run  from  the  business  office,  not 
the  editorial  sanctum. 

Fifty  odd  years  ago  readers  knew  more  about 
ditors  than  they  do  now,  and  editorials,  today,  are 
not  as  important  as  they  were  then. 

Personal  journalism  has  taken  a  back  seat. 

Once  I  wrote  a  letter  to  the  old  New  York  Sun, 
after  its  remarkable  editor,  Charles  A.  Dana,  had 
passed  away,  and  asked  who  had  written  a  certain 
editorial.  The  response  was :  "The  Sun."  Now- 
adays, there  is  very  little  curiosity  about  authorship 
)f  editorials.  The  Danas,  Greeleys,  Pulitzers,  Henry 
Wattersons,  J.  P.  Caldwells,  J.  C.  Hemphills,  and 
others  of  their  day  are  gone.  Here  and  there  a 
weekly  paper  has  an  outstanding  editor  whose  opin- 
ions attract  and  influence  readers,  but  they  are  few 
and  far  apart. 

Training  for  my  life  work  came  from  a  grand  man 
who  believed  that  "Nothing  but  the  truth  endures!" 
His  guidance  proved  a  blessing  to  me.  Throughout  a 
ong  and  interesting  career  I  have  never  had  to  un- 
earn  what  he  taught  me.     Today,  as  a  reader  of 


papers,  if  I  find  that  a  writer  colors  news  to  suit  the 
editorial  policy  of  his  employer,  I  lose  faith  in  him 
and  hesitate  to  read  after  him. 

PAPERS  MUST  WIN  ON  MERIT 

Mr.  Caldwell  studiously  refrained  from  putting 
himself  or  his  paper  under  obligations  to  anyone,  not 
even  a  friend.  Once,  when  his  business  manager 
went  out  and  rounded  up  an  extraordinary  group  of 
advertisers  by  an  appeal  that  they  owed  The  Ob- 
server something  for  its  great  service  to  the  com- 
munity, the  boss  said :  "No,  you  have  done  a  good 
job,  but  that  will  not  do;  we  cannot  afford  it.  We 
must  win  on  merit." 

The  spirit  of  absolute  independence  was  instilled 
into  me  and  all  other  members  of  The  Observer  staff. 

Fifty  years  ago  it  was  customary  to  single  out 
newspapers  and  newspaper  representatives  for  spe- 
cial favors,  give  them  lower  rates  at  hotels,  free 
tickets  to  shows,  and  railroad  passes.  In  Washing- 
ton, where  I  labored  for  the  greater  part  of  my  life, 
there  were  public  men  who  thought  it  proper,  or 
actually  necessary,  to  give  gratuities.  One  Congress- 
man did  not  like  it  because  I  declined  to  attend  an 
annual  dinner  he  had  for  "representatives  of  the 

EASTERN  N.  C.  ASSOCIATION 

HOLDS  SEMI-ANNUAL  MEETINGS 

The  Eastern  North  Carolina  Press  Association  is  the 
larger  of  the  three  area  groups  organized  under  and  as  units 
of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association.  It  covers  fully  half  of  the 
area  of  the  State,  from  Raleigh  eastward,  and  was  organized 
three  or  four  years  ago.  Meetings  are  held  twice  a  year, 
fall  and  spring.     The  last  meeting  was  at  Wilson. 

Officers  elected  at  that  meeting  include  Mrs.  Elizabeth 
Gold  Swindell,  Wilson  Daily  Times,  President;  Sam  Ragan, 
News  and  Observer,  Raleigh,  vice-president;  Mayon  Parker, 
Parker  Bros.,  Ahoskie,  secretary-treasurer  (permanent). 
Other  directors  are:  W.  C.  Manning,  Williamston  Enter- 
prise, immediate  past  president;  Grover  Britt,  Sampson  In- 
dependent, Clinton,  and  Josh  L.  Home,  Rocky  Mount  Tele- 
gram. 


PAGE  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


WESTERN  N.  C.  NEWSPAPER  GROUP 

MEETS  MONTHLY  IN  ASHEVILLE 

The  Western  North  Carolina  Press  Association  is  an 
active  unit  in  the  mountain  area  of  the  North  Carolina 
Press  Association,  meeting  monthly,  usually  in  Asheville, 
but  occasionally  at  other  points  in  the  area.  This  group  has 
been  organized  for  several  years. 

Present  officers  of  the  group  are:  Miss  Addie  Mae  Cooke, 
Cherokee  Scout,  Murphy,  president;  Noah  Hollowe.ll,  West- 
ern Carolina  Tribune,  Hendersonville,  vice-president;  Mrs. 
J.  A.  Gray,  Sylva  Herald,  secretary;  W.  Curtis  Russ,  Waynes- 
ville  Mountaineer,  reporter. 


press  who  had  to  write  about  him."  After  I  had 
turned  down  several  of  his  invitations,  he  asked  me 
why  I  did  not  accept. 

I  responded :  "In  the  first  place,  I  have  a  good  din- 
ner at  home  every  day;  in  the  second  place,  you  do 
not  owe  me  one,  and,  in  the  third  place,  you  may  do 
something  tomorrow  or  next  day  that  might  make 
a  story  you  would  not  like  to  see  in  print,  and  I  could 
not  write  it  as  I  should  with  my  stomach  full  of  your 
food." 

That  viewpoint  was  difficult  for  my  would-be  host 
to  see.  I  told  him  that,  if  he  would  invite  me  to  his 
home  with  others  than  reporters,  who  had  to  call  on 
him  daily  for  news,  I  could  accept  and  get  pleasure 
out  of  being  his  guest,  but  something  to  be  exclus- 
ively eaten  by  members  of  the  press  on  his  beat  did 
not  appeal  to  me. 

In  the  old  days  owners  of  papers  had  to  take  all 
sorts  of  things  for  pay.  A  cord  of  wood,  a  gallon 
of  home-made  molasses  or  liquor,  or  some  corn  for 
the  livestock  was  given  for  subscriptions.  But,  that 
day  has  passed.  Money  rolls  in  now.  Laws  prevent 
the  presenting  of  railroad  and  other  passes. 

FREE  RAILROAD  PASSES 

I  recall  an  editorial  written  by  Mr.  Caldwell  on 
the  subject  of  such  means  of  transportation.  It 
read :  "A  sub-committee,  representing  forty  railroad 
systems,  has  agreed  to  recommend  to  their  roads  the 
abolition  of  the  free  pass  system,  and  it  is  stated 
that  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  the  recommenda- 
tion will  be  adopted  and  that  after  the  first  of  Jan- 
uary next  the  pass  will  go.  It  should.  It  is  both  an 
injustice  and  an  evil.  Passes  are  generally  to  be 
found  in  the  pockets  of  those  who  are  best  able  to 
pay  fare,  and  they  are  not  there  without  reason,  but 
to  influence  those  who  hold  them.  The  railroads  haul 
an  immense  number  of  people  free.  If  all  who  ride 
free  were  made  to  pay,  railroad  fares  could  be  re- 
duced, the  railroads  still  make  as  much  money  or 
more,  and  they  would  discharge  with  more  equity 
their  function  as  common  carriers.  The  pass  is  not 
just,  and  it  'grinds'  a  poor  man  or  one  of  moderate 
means,  who  has  paid  for  his  ticket  to  see  a  money- 
bags across  the  aisle  pull  one  on  the  conductor — a 
money-bags  who  has  no  claim  to  free  transportation 
beyond  the  fact  that  he  is  supposed  to  have  'influ- 
ence.' The  railroads  ought  to  put  everybody  on  the 
same  level,  and  if  this  is  ever  done  it  must  be  done 
by  the  roads  themselves,  for  it  has  been  demonstrat- 
ed that  statute  law  is  inadequate  to  reach  the  free 


pass  evil.     There  are  all  sorts  of  ways  of  evading 
such  laws." 

I  rode  all  over  North  Carolina  on  assignments 
from  The  Observer,  but  never  on  a  free  pass;  Mr. 
Caldwell  saw  that  my  way  was  paid.  Two  interest- 
ing experiences  during  my  active  newspaper  service 
convinced  me  Mr.  Caldwell  was  right  in  his  desire 
for  independence.  It  was  intimated,  in  a  hot  State 
campaign,  that  my  stories  from  Washington  were 
biased  in  favor  of  Senator  F.  M.  Simmons.  I  was 
able  to  deny  that  with  emphasis.  I  had  never  accept- 
ed as  much  as  a  cigar  from  him.  The  intimation  was 
withdrawn,  and  an  apology  extended.  There  had 
been  a  veiled  suggestion  that  I  was  paid  to  help  the 
Senator.  That  could  have  resulted  in  the  spilling  of 
blood.  Senator  Simmons  might  have  favored  some 
newspaper  representatives  but  not  me.  All  I  asked 
of  him  was  news,  and  he  was  fair  about  that. 

MANY  EDITORIAL  CONFLICTS 

Controversies,  or  feuds,  between  editors  seem  to 
have  ceased.  In  my  early  days  there  were  sharp 
conflicts  over  prohibition,  the  Gold  Standard  and 
Free  Silver,  and  other  subjects.  Now  and  then  one 
editor  would  call  another  a  barroom  bum,  a  liar,  or 
worse.  Nowadays  newspaper  owners  frown  on  that 
sort  of  thing;  they  do  not  think  it  helps  a  paper  to 
succeed.  In  fact,  the  editorial  writers  of  one  paper 
ignore  those  of  a  competitor.  One  struggling  for 
existence  gets  no  free  advertising  from  its  more  suc- 
cussful  rivals.  In  the  old  days  Mr.  Caldwell,  of  The 
Charlotte  Observer,  and  Mr.  Josephus  Daniels,  of 
The  News  and  Observer,  were  in  conflict  much  of 
the  time.  Vile  names  were  used,  and  personal  en- 
counters threatened.  A  castigation  Mr.  Caldwell 
gave  the  Rev.  A.  J.  McKelway,  then  editor  of  a  lead- 
ing church  paper,  resulted  in  a  law  suit.  No  more 
scathing  article  has  ever  been  written  in  the  State 
than  the  one  directed  at  Mr.  McKelway.  It  attracted 
more  than  State-wide  attention  because  of  its  fierce- 
ness, and,  even  today,  requests  for  copies  of  it  are 
made.  There  have  been  duels  over  editorial  com- 
ment but  such  bitter  conflicts  are  unheard  of  now. 

An  interesting  feature  of  newspapers  in  the  nine- 
ties was  the  use  of  clippings  from  well-known  writ- 
ers. That  sort  of  enlightenment  is  of  the  past.  Just 
one  paper  I  see,  The  Laurinburg  Exchange,  devotes 
space  to  worthwhile  stories  from  other  publications, 
Papers  today  are  crowded  with  all  sorts  of  matter, 
and  have  no  room  for  bright  squibs  from  the  othei 
fellow's  print  shop. 

During  my  employment  by  the  Washington  Bureau 

MID- WESTERN  N.  C.  NEWSPAPER 

ASSOCIATION  MEETS  MONTHLY 

The  Mid-Western  North  Carolina  Press  Association,  one 
of  the  three  area  units  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association  covers 
roughly,  the  Piedmont  area  of  the  State.  It  has  been  or 
ganized  for  several  years.  Recently  the  group  came  to  life 
again  after  a  period  of  suspension.  Meetings  are  held  ai 
various  points  monthly  in  the  area. 

Present  officers  are:  Gordon  Tomlinson,  Mocksville  Enter 
prise,  president;  Richard  H.  Byrd,  Valdese  News,  secretary 
treasurer;  J.  P.  Huskins,  Statesville  Daily  Record,  vice 
president. 


Winter-Spring,  i 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  9 


N.  C.  PRESS  ASSOCIATION  HOLDS 

SESSIONS  FOR  DAILIES — WEEKLIES 

During  the  meetings  of  the  North  Carolina  Press  Asso- 
ciation, both  the  summer  convention  and  the  winter  Press 
Institute  members  divide  into  daily  and  weekly  field  groups 
for  sessions  to  deal  with  problems  relating  to  their  respect- 
ive fields. 

At  the  January  meeting  in  Chapel  Hill,  Mrs.  Elizabeth 
Gold  Swindell,  of  the  Wilson  Daily  Times,  presided  over  the 
daily  paper  session.  D.  J.  Germino,  Durham  Herald-Sun, 
has  been  secretary-treasurer  of  this  group  for  a  decade  or 
more. 

In  the  weekly  group  meeting  Bill  Arp  Lowrance,  Meck- 
lenburg Times,  Charlotte,  vice-president  of  the  State  Asso- 
ciation, presided.  Usually  the  president  or  the  vice-president 
of  the  association,  whichever  is  in  the  non-daily  group,  pre- 
sides at  these  sessions. 


of  the  old  New  York  World,  I  often  heard  it  said 
a  half  hundred  columns  or  more  were  thrown  away 
late  at  night  to  give  space  for  more  interesting 
news.  A  telegram  that  our  bureau  chief  got  once  or 
twice  a  week  read  like  this :  "Cut  copy  to  bone — we 
are  crowded !"  I  have  seen  good  stories  of  a  thou- 
sand words  reduced  to  200.  In  1912  I  was  sent 
through  Southern  States  to  get  affidavits  from  col- 
ored delegates  to  the  Republican  National  Conven- 
tion to  show  that  Theodore  Roosevelt  and  Howard  A. 
Taft  supporters  had  offered  money  for  votes  in  the 
contest  for  the  nomination  of  the  Republican  party 
for  President. 

REAMS  OF  COPY  THROWN  AWAY 

The  day  I  left  Washington  on  that  assignment  a 
leading  gambler  was  killed  in  New  York  City.  That 
proved  to  be  one  of  the  most  sensational  murders  in 
the  history  of  that  great  city,  and  the  newspapers 
were  full  of  stories  about  it  for  weeks.  I  went  as 
far  as  Natchez,  Miss.,  and  wired  a  story  of  a  thou- 
sand or  more  words  every  night.  The  trip  cost  The 
World  approximately  $1,500.00,  and  the  only  story 
of  mine  used  contained  500  words,  and  that  was  sent 
in  the  first  day  out.  Later,  as  the  day  of  the  elec- 
tion approached,  with  Roosevelt  running  as  the  big 
Bull  Moose,  I  was  asked  to  revise  my  stories  and 
hurry  them  over.  On  the  way  to  the  station  to  put 
them  on  a  train  I  saw  that  Mr.  Roosevelt  had  been 
shot  and  severly  wounded.*  Again,  my  affidavits 
were  held  up ;  they  never  were  published. 

A  frequent  saying  that  I  heard  in  my  cub-report- 
ing days  ran  like  this :  "Here  is  something  for  your 
paper — it  may  not  be  news,  but  it  will  help  to  fill 
up!" 

Now,  my  only  concern  is  over  the  use  of  the  blue 
pencil  or  a  pair  of  scissors.  With  bigger  things  hap- 
pening than  those  I  can  recall,  one  of  my  yarns  may 
be  cut  as  short  as  the  tail  of  one  of  my  fast  hounds 
who  lost  part  of  his  because  the  screw  worms  at- 
tacked it.    Space  fillers  are  not  needed. 

I  often  wonder  what  some  of  the  leading  maga- 
zines of  today  would  do  if  it  were  not  for  the  liquor 
advertisements  they  carry;  they  must  have  them  to 
prosper. 

*Thcodore  Roosevelt  was  shot  by  a  crank  and  slightly  wounded  (con- 
tinued his  campaign)  at  Milwaukee,  Wis.,  October  14,  1912,  less  than  a 
month   before  the  election   in   which   Woodrow  Wilson   was   elected    President. 


There  has  been  a  wonderful  improvement  in  the 
news  features  of  the  weekly  papers  of  the  State. 
Such  local  publications  are  remarkable  for  their 
appearance  and  the  character  of  their  printed  mat- 
ter. The  daily  papers  are  so  large  that  I  like  to  get 
a  weekly  with  its  brief  summary  of  the  news.  North 
Carolina  must  have  more  than  a  hundred  good  week- 
lies, some  of  them  twice-a-week  papers. 

I  often  think  of  a  request  I  had  forty-odd  years 
ago  to  return  from  Washington  for  help  to  start  a 
new  weekly  in  a  fine  old  county.  A  prominent  mer- 
chant of  the  county  seat  wrote  to  ask  me  to  join  him 
and  others  in  the  establishment  of  a  paper  that  stood 
for  progress.  He  was  evidently  very  angry  at  the 
editor  of  the  town  paper.  He  said  he  was  more  in- 
terested in  tearing  down  than  building  up ;  his  reason 
for  that  statement  was  a  story  printed  of  a  building 
under  construction  which  had  fallen  down.  The 
merchant  had  announced  a  three-  or  four-story  build- 
ing for  his  town,  and  at  that  time  his  structure  would 
have  been  the  "sky-scraper"  of  the  place.  No  such 
pretentious  building  had  been  contemplated  before 
that.  Plans  were  drawn  and  erection  commenced, 
and  after  the  walls  had  been  put  up  one  of  them  fell. 
My  friend  said  the  local  paper  had  a  column  or  more 
about  the  collapse  of  the  wall;  whereas,  he  had  just 
an  inch  about  the  announcement  of  the  project. 

I  was  told  that  a  committee  would  meet  me  at  the 
train  if  I  would  consent  to  come  and  help  them  with 
their  proposed  enterprise.  The  man  had  my  sym- 
pathy but  I  am  afraid  had  I  been  on  the  job  when 
the  wall  tumbled,  I  might  have  made  more  of  a  story 
than  the  editor  did.  New  buildings  are  erected  daily 
but  new  ones  seldom  fall. 

GREAT  TALKER— POOR  WRITER 

Some  weekly  newspapers  were  very  sorry  in 
former  years.  Their  editors  were  great  talkers  but 
indolent  workers.  News  features  were  neglected,  or 
actually  ignored,  but  editorials  were  caustic.  If  the 
editor  happened  to  be  a  bitter  partisan,  he  spent 
much  time  going  about  the  streets  abusing  fellow 
editors.    I  knew  of  a  case  of  that  kind. 

The  owner  and  editor  of  the  local  paper  took  great 
pride  in  denouncing  my  chief.  He  was  a  Bryanite 
when  Grover  Cleveland  was  concluding  his  last  year 
in  the  White  House.  He  denounced  Mr.  Caldwell 
daily  to  people  who  would  listen  to  him.  He  rarely 
devoted  time  to  his  office.  His  paper  evidenced  his 
lack  of  industry  in  the  sanctum.  Finally,  he  decided 
to  blow  the  "old  Gold  Bug"  of  The  Charlotte  Observer 
to  bits  with  a  two-column  editorial.  Busy  for  days 
on  his  masterpiece,  he  could  not  resist  the  tempta- 
tion to  sally  forth  several  times  a  day  to  warn  people 
he  met  on  the  streets  of  the  surprise  he  was  prepar- 
ing for  his  contemporary.  "Thirty"  written  to  his 
piece  he  turned  it  over  to  his  printer.  It  appeared 
in  due  time  full  of  mistakes,  framed  in  poor  type, 
and  errors  in  spelling.  But,  the  punch  was  there. 
Seeing  it,  Mr.  Caldwell  chopped  it  out  and  published 
it  word  for  word,  mistake  by  mistake,  just  as  it  ap- 
peared, and  wrote  this  line  of  comment  at  the  bot- 
tom of  it:  "When  you  hear  nothing,  say  nothing!" 


PAGE   10 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


The  irate  editor  had  not  prepared  his  friends  for 
that  terse  comment.  He  had  purchased  an  Observer 
daily  for  a  week  to  see  if  he  had  smashed  Mr.  Cald- 
well. To  make  a  long  story  short,  he  sold  his  paper 
and  hired  himself  out. 

As  a  Washington  correspondent,  I  kept  in  some 
sort  of  touch  with  the  State,  and  was  always  inter- 
ested in  its  newspapers.  Fifty  or  more  years  ago 
press  correspondents  had  a  free  hand.  Good  papers 
took  special  pride  in  their  representatives  there. 
They  were  anxious  to  keep  track  of  their  own  public 
men  in  that  capital  city.  Good  feature  stories  were 
sent  in  from  writers  of  ability.  Political  news  was 
far  more  important  than  it  is  today.  If  a  member  of 
Congress  made  a  mistake,  the  fact  was  published. 
Now,  Southern  papers  are  more  like  those  of  the 
North — they  pay  very  little  attention  to  their  Con- 
gressmen ;  a  good  member  gets  little  credit  for  what 
he  does  and  a  questionable  one  can  get  by  with  mur- 
der without  being  found  out.  Of  course,  weekly 
papers  were  not  expected  to  be  able  to  pay  much  for 
their  Washington  news  service.  Some  of  them  were 
fooled  into  employing  Tom,  Dick  or  Harry.  One 
Democratic  paper  of  fine  reputation  had  for  its  cor- 
respondent a  man  in  the  employ  of  the  Republican 
National  Committee.  That  sort  of  hireling  if  a  good 
news  man  would  be  all  right  if  fair,  and  the  readers 
would  never  know  about  his  political  faith. 

ASKED  TWICE  TO  COLOR  NEWS 

Twice  in  my  life  I  was  asked  to  color  news  to  fit 
the  editorial,  or  perhaps  the  financial  policy,  of  the 
paper  I  was  working  for.  I  was  never  asked  by  Mr. 
Caldwell  to  leave  out  news,  or  doctor  it.  News  was 
news  with  him. 


After  the  first  world  war,  Secretary  of  the  Treas- 
ury Andrew  W.  Mellon  proposed  a  plan  to  cut  taxes. 
Big  taxpayers  were  for  it,  hook,  line  and  sinker.  A 
feature  of  it  would  have  reduced  the  surtax  very 
substantially — that  suited  all  men  of  great  wealth. 
Our  special  tax  reporter  was  being  scooped  daily  on 
that  important  story.  I  was  asked  to  take  it.  I 
wrote  seven  front  page  stories  for  my  paper — The 
New  York  World — after  I  canvassed  the  field  thor- 
oughly for  facts  and  sentiment.  I  said  the  Mellon 
plan  would  have  to  be  changed — a  compromise  would 
be  the  result.  That  was  not  my  opinion  but  that  of 
the  members  of  Congress  who  would  have  the  fram- 
ing of  a  bill  to  be  enacted  into  law.  Our  bureau  got 
a  wire  saying  my  stories  were  "running  contrary" 
to  the  editorial  policy  of  the  paper.  That  was  the 
first  and  only  suggestion  of  the  kind  that  ever  came 
to  us  in  my  twenty  years  with  the  World.  My  chief, 
Charles  Michelson,  ignored  the  telegram,  told  me  to 
proceed  as  I  had  been  doing.  We  had  not  been  scoop- 
ed. I  wrote  three  additional  stories  and  was  then 
taken  off  the  job  by  instructions  from  the  New  York 
office.  I  resigned  in  a  huff.  Later,  when  the  paper 
realized  that  my  stories  stood  up,  I  was  rehired,  and 
remained  with  the  bureau  until  the  paper  was  sold. 

After  Mr.  Caldwell  died,  I  was  asked  to  refrain 
from  suggesting  in  my  Observer  reports  that  there 
might  be  a  candidate  against  one  of  our  Senators. 
Several  names  were  being  mentioned.  To  my  way 
of  thinking,  that  was  a  suppression  of  news.  That 
took  place  before  the  present  owners  bought  the 
paper — it  had  been  floundering  about  a  little,  and 
was  uncertain  what  course  to  pursue. 

No  other  North  Carolina  newspaper  ever  made 
such  a  suggestion  to  me. 


Personalities  of  Past  Among  North  Carolina  Editors 

By  Roland  F.  Beasley,  Editor,  The  Monroe  Journal 


My  entrance  into  the  field  of  journalism,  or  as  I 
still  prefer  to  call  it,  newspaper  work,  was  accidental 
and  by  way  of  the  back  door.  In  1881  my  brother, 
G.  M.  Beasley,  then  under  twelve  years  of  age,  be- 
came a  printer's  devil.  And  it  was  a  devil  of  a  job 
then.  No  genuine  printer's  devil  now  exists.  I 
heard  much  about  the  printing  office  from  him  and 
by  the  time  I  was  in  the  middle  teens  I  found  myself 
writing  "pieces  for  the  paper."  I  never  learned  the 
printer's  side.  My  brother  stuck  to  that,  and  I  con- 
tinued to  try  my  hand  at  writing. 

In  1894  while  I  was  graduating  at  Wake  Forest, 
he  and  I  jointly  started  the  Monroe  Journal.  We 
are  still  .both  working  on  it.  At  that  time  Mr.  Jose- 
phus  Daniels  was  coming  home  to  Raleigh  to  take 
over  the  News  and  Observer  and  "save  the  State," 
as  Dr.  Columbus  Durham,  the  belligerent  Baptist 
leader  of  that  time,  said.  Josephus  and  Durham 
were  on  different  sides  of  the  controversy  about  the 
support  of  the  University  and  the  supposed  injury  to 
the  denominational  colleges. 


Joseph  P.  Caldwell  had  not  long  been  come  to 
Charlotte  to  take  over  The  Charlotte  Observer.  He 
had  left  his  former  printer,  R.  R.  Clark,  to  take  over 
the  Statesville  Landmark,  the  weekly  on  which  Mr. 
Caldwell  had  made  his  reputation.  Mr.  Clark  be- 
came a  most  able  editor.     The  Charlotte  News  was 


N.  C.  ASSOCIATED  PRESS  CLUB 
INCLUDES  AP  STATE  MEMBERS 

The  North  Carolina  AP  Club,  composed  of  representa- 
tives of  newspapers  in  the  State  which  are  members  of  The 
Associated  Press  and  thus  receive  its  news  services,  has 
been  organized  in  this  State  for  10  or  15  years  and  holds 
its  meetings  in  connection  with  the  meetings  of  the  N.  C. 
Press  Association.  The  chief  of  the  Carolinas  Bureau  of  the 
AP,  located  in  Charlotte,  serves  as  secretary  of  the  club. 

Officers  elected  at  the  meeting  held  in  connection  with  the) 
Press  Institute  at  Chapel  Hill  in  January  follow:  Steed 
Rollins,  executive  editor,  Durham  Herald-Sun,  president;1 
Claude  S.  Ramsey,  executive  news  editor,  Asheville  Citizen- 
Times,  vice-president;  Paul  Hansell,  chief  of  the  AP  bureau 
in  the  Carolinas,  Charlotte,  secretary.  Additional  directorsH 
are:  Mrs.  Elizabeth  G.  Swindell,  business  manager,  Wilsor| 
Daily  Times;  Carl  O.  Jeffress,  general  manager,  Greensborq. 
News-Record;    Staley  Cook,  editor  Burlington  Times-News i1 


Winter-Spring,  1 951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1 


then  a  little  four-page  paper  gotten  out  by  Wade 
Harris  pretty  much  all  by  himself.  Carey  Dowd  had 
not  appeared.  However,  he  did  appear  shortly, 
bought  the  Mecklenburg  Times  from  Jerome  Dowd, 
and  in  a  short  time,  The  Charlotte  News,  from  Mr. 
Harris.  The  Charlotte  Observer  was  a  four-page, 
seven  column,  paper,  just  putting  in  the  first  linotype 
machine  in  the  State. 

In  Greensboro  Joe  Reece  and  Harp  Elam  were 
running  the  Daily  Record,  which  sometimes  had 
some  news  items  in  it  but  only  after  there  was  room 
to  get  in  all  the  ads.  Clem  Wright  was  about  to 
establish  the  Greensboro  Telegram  with  C.  P.  Sapp, 
a  very  brilliant  man,  as  editor.  Asheville,  Durham, 
and  Winston-Salem  were  in  about  the  same  condi- 
tions as  to  newspapers.  None  were  getting  any  tele- 
graphic news  except  a  little  snatchy  pony  service 
of  a  few  paragraphs.  No  paper  in  the  State  had 
over  2,500  circulation.  In  Goldsboro  Col.  Joe  Rob- 
inson was  running  the  Goldsboro  Argus  like  Joe 
Reece  was  running  the  Greensboro  Record,  a  few 
items  of  local  news,  if  they  were  not  crowded  out  by 
the  ads.  Joe  Caldwell  said  that  Col.  Joe  Robinson 
was  the  cleverest  man  in  North  Carolina  and  had  the 
sorriest  newspaper.  But  I  never  thought  he  beat  Joe 
Reece  and  Harp  Elam  in  Greensboro. 

In  Wilmington,  The  Star,  which  had  been  started 
right  after  the  Civil  War  by  Maj.  William  H.  Ber- 
nard, was  still  going  as  a  seven  column  four  page 
paper.  William  H.  Bonitz,  who  had  successfully 
operated  the  Goldsboro  Messenger  as  a  weekly  and 
made  money  out  of  it  some  way,  had  gone  to  Wil- 
mington and  started  a  second  or  third  daily.  He 
started  the  Wilmington  Messenger  and  hired  Dr. 
T.  B.  Kingsbury,  who  was  considered  the  leading 
editor  and  scholar  in  the  State,  to  edit  it.  He  had 
been  with  The  Star. 

Charles  A.  Dana  said  when  William  R.  Hearst 
began  to  sweep  things  with  his  New  York  Journal, 
that  its  success  was  due  to  the  fact  that  Hearst  had 
hired  all  the  World's  best  liars.  When  Bonitz  hired 
Dr.  Kingsbury,  it  was  supposed  that  The  Star  was 
done  for.  But  it  wasn't.  It  kept  right  on  shining  as 
brightly  as  it  had  and  eventually  outlived  the  Mes- 
senger. While  these  two  dailies  were  operating  in  a 
town  that  could  not  support  one  to  any  extent,  there 
was  a  third  paper.  This  was  the  Wilmington  Re- 
view, operated  by  Mr.  Josh  James,  who  must  have 
been  as  clever  a  man  as  he  was  a  sorry  editor.  The 
Review  was  four  pages,  five  or  six  columns.  I  have 
seen  many  copies  of  the  Review  and  I  would  make, 
oath  that  I  never  saw  two  news  items  come  out  in 
the  same  issue. 

Dr.  Kingsbury  was  a  scholar  in  the  classics,  in 
history,  and  theology.  I  think  everyone  around  Wil- 
mington agreed  that  he  was  the  greatest  editor  at 
all,  but  I  doubt  if  many  read  what  he  had  to  say.  It 
is  said  that  in  times  of  political  or  other  excitement 
the  doctor  was  so  detached  that  his  leading  editorial 
the  next  morning  might  be  a  discussion  of  who  wrote 
the  Junius  letters.  He  was  a  staunch  Southern 
champion  and  always  had  plenty  of  ammunition  to 


shoot  at  the  Yankees.  I  was  told  years  ago  that  his 
salary  was  $18  a  week,  which  was  considered  lib- 
eral. I  always  thought — following  J.  P.  Caldwell — 
that  the  test  of  whether  a  man  was  an  editor  or  just 
a  writer  was  whether  he  stayed  in  the  office  'til  the 
paper  was  "put  to  bed."  According  to  that  test  Dr. 
Kingsbury  was  not  closely  attached  to  the  paper, 
for  he  left  the  office  about  4  o'clock  in  the  afternoon 
and  went  home  and  enjoyed  himself  in  his  library. 

Such  was  the  newspaper  world  into  which  I  was 
born.  Joseph  Pulitzer  was  at  his  zenith ;  Charles  A. 
Dana,  "old  vitriol"  as  Mr.  Caldwell  called  him,  was 
spitting  brilliancy  and  venom;  James  Gordon  Ben- 
nett was  still  running  the  Herald  as  a  personal  organ 
that  would  never  print  the  name  of  a  person  Mr. 
Bennett  did  not  like;  W.  R.  Hearst  was  just  coming 
upon  the  scene  and  Adolf  Ochs  had  just  acquired  the 
New  York  Times.  Henry  Watterson  was  still  thun- 
dering loudly  in  the  Louisville  (Ky.)  Courier-Jour- 
nal. Henry  Grady  was  dead  but  he  left  hundreds  of 
boys  in  North  Carolina  and  all  over  the  South  with 
his  name.  The  Atlanta  Constitution  was  the  leading 
paper  of  the  South  and  Frank  L.  Stanton,  its  poetic 
and  humane  genius,  filled  his  column  of  verse  daily. 

Most  of  the  weekly  papers  still  used  Franklin  hand 
presses  and  I  myself  was  fairly  efficient  in  pulling 
the  lever  of  one.  I  considered  it  easier  than  the  job 
of  the  man  who  rolled  the  ink  over  the  forms.  When 
you  became  skillful  enough  to  run  off  one  hundred 
impressions  in  22  minutes,  you  were  doing  right 
well.  Then  the  papers  had  to  be  turned  and  run 
through  again  to  print  the  other  two  pages.  Thus 
two  men  turned  out  100  completed  four-page  papers 
in  22  minutes,  if  everything  went  well. 

The  dailies  and  some  of  the  weeklies  were  printed 
on  the  old  Campbell  cylinder  presses,  and  along  in 
the  nineties  the  dailies  began  to  get  duplex  presses 
such  as  the  weeklies  now  use. 

H.  E.  C.  Bryant  and  I  began  writing  about  the 
same  time,  he  on  The  Charlotte  Observer  and  I  on 
my  own  paper  in  1894.  I  am  now  writing  more  than 
I  ever  did.-  Mr.  Bryant,  though  having  retired  from 
regular  employment,  writes  for  his  own  amusement 
and  the  enjoyment  of  thousands  of  friends.  For 
over  ten  years  he  has  been  writing  a  column  weekly 
for  the  Monroe  Journal,  several  for  other  weeklies, 
and  a  Sunday  article  for  The  Charlotte  Observer. 
He  has  an  inexhaustible  fund  of  incidents  and  obser- 
vations running  from  the  grass  roots  of  Providence 
township  to  the  strongest  characters  in  the  United 
States  Senate  for  the  last  50  years. 

In  the  early  days  of  the  century  when  Bryant, 
Banks,  Avery,  McNeil,  and  Abernathy  were  inspired 
and  directed  by  Mr.  Caldwell,  they  made  what  might 
be  called  the  Periclean  age  in  the  Observer  history. 
Something  of  the  same  thing  had  taken  place  with 
the  News  and  Observer  under  Mr.  Daniels,  except 
that  his  staff  was  devoted  to  politics  exclusively, 
while  The  Observer  boys  roved  over  the  whole  field 
of  human  interest. 

The  creation  of  rural  mail  service  gave  the  week- 
lies their  first  impulse  to  growth,  and  the  motor 


PAGE  1  2 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


vehicle  later  did  the  same  thing  for  the  dailies.  Along 
with  this,  of  course,  was  the  general  increase  of 
trade  and  industry  and  the  necessity  for  advertising. 
Newspaper  publishing  now  is  little  more  than  a 
mechanical  industry.  With  the  general  trend  to- 
wards consolidation  and  centralization,  newspapers 
have  lost  their  individuality  and  become  more  and 
more  alike.     If  there  were  any  geniuses  left  they 


would  be  smothered  in  the  oceans  of  mediocrity  and 
rubbish  with  which  the  papers  are  crammed.  But 
newspapers,  like  radio,  colleges  and  pulpits,  run 
more  and  more  to  rubbish  as  a  means  of  attracting 
numbers.  There  are  no  intellectual  standards  which 
have  any  weight  and  newspaper  editorials  have  be- 
come little  more  than  a  part  of  the  hue  and  cry  for 
the  moment's  fad. 


Yesteryear  Editors  More  Vigorous  Than  Today's  Crop 

By  Dr.  Oscar  J.  Coffin,  Dean,  School  of  Journalism,  University  of  North  Carolina 


My  arm  having  been  twisted  by  one  M.  R.  (Mike) 
Dunnagan,  I  fumblingly  set  about  a  bit  of  a  survey 
of  newspapers  in  North  Carolina  as  they  were  when 
I  first  met  them  eye  to  eye  and  how  they  appear  now. 

Some  45  years  ago  when  I  was  busy  overcoming 
the  objections  of  the  late  William  Cicero  Hammer  to 
the  employment  of  what  he  was  wont  to  refer  to  as 
"an  honor  graduate  of  the  University  of  North  Caro- 
lina" at  $8  a  week,  Charlotte  had  three  daily  news- 
papers with  as  many  editors,  Greensboro  as  equally 
well  supplied,  and  Raleigh  was  just  recovering  from 
the  loss  of  a  third  one.  There  were  two  papers  in 
Asheville,  Durham,  Winston-Salem  and  Wilmington 
under  separate  management.  Salisbury,  Tarboro, 
High  Point,  Fayetteville,  Greenville,  Kinston,  Wilson 
and  Goldsboro  had  one  each.  I  recall  three  semi- 
weeklies,  one  at  Statesville,  two  at  Monroe,  and  there 
may  have  been  another  one  or  so  that  I  have  over- 
looked. What  with  the  number  of  small  towns  pub- 
lishing dailies — there  are  two  at  Statesville,  for  in- 
stance— the  number  of  dailies  has  increased  although 
there's  no  longer  a  city  with  three,  and  the  ownership 
has  been  consolidated  save  in  Raleigh  and  Charlotte. 
The  number  of  weeklies  is  approximately  the  same. 
For  though  several  towns  have  them  which  didn't, 
a  large  number  have  ceased  publication. 

EARLIER  EDITORS  AND  REPORTERS 

The  largest  circulation  of  any  daily  newspaper 
was  not  above  10,000,  but  I'm  inclined  to  think  that 
the  editors  were  more  widely  known  than  at  present. 
Journalism  was  much  more  of  a  personal  and  parti- 
san affair.  Josephus  Daniels,  Joseph  Pearson  Cald- 
well, Carey  Dowd,  and  Colonel  Joe  Robinson  figured 
far  more  prominently  in  public  and  private  conver- 
sation than  current  editors  of  the  News  and  Ob- 
server, Charlotte  Observer,  Charlotte  News  and 
Goldsboro  Argus.  Indeed,  Judge  Rufus  R.  Clark  of 
the  Statesville  Landmark;  Old  Man  Rights,  local 
editor  of  the  Union  Republican ;  Henry  Blount,  Wil- 
son correspondent,  and  Colonel  Risden  Tyler  Bennett 
of  Wadesboro  were  as  often  spoken  of  as  any  of  the 
State  officials  or  prominent  bankers  in  the  State. 
Red  Buck  Bryant  for  the  Charlotte  Observer  and 
Tom  Pence  of  the  News  and  Observer  as  Washing- 
ton correspondents  were  known  to  all  who  pretended 
to  read  the  papers,  and  the  public  was  becoming 
acquainted  with  Tom  Bost  and  Col.  Fred  Olds  at 


Raleigh.  Al  Fairbrother  had  Everything ;  Don  Laws 
with  his  Yellow  Jacket  was  stinging  at  will ;  D.  Scott 
Poole  was  providing  Facts  and  Figures ;  and  B.  Clay 
Ashcraft  and  Roland  Beasley  at  Monroe  and  J.  W. 
Noell  at  Roxboro  were  in  stride.  Of  these  are  left 
Roland  Beasley,  D.  Scott  Poole,  Tom  Bost  and  J.  W. 
Noell. 

Their  publications  were,  in  the  main,  poorly  print- 
ed but  far  better  spelled.  They  placed  as  much  em- 
phasis on  murder  although  they  were  no  psychia- 
trists. There  was  no  sex  to  speak  of,  but  all  hands 
were  reasonably  content  with  gender.  Weddings 
and  funerals  were  less  frequent  but  perhaps  more 
thoroughly  enjoyed.  Certainly  no  latter-day  bride 
received  the  tributes  accorded  her  by  Henry  Blount, 
and  no  patriot  is  gathered  to  his  reward  with  as 
eloquent  a  tribute  as  those  done  by  Col.  Bennett. 

Divorces  were  left  to  the  courts  pretty  much  and 
were  not  taken  lightly.  Mention  of  those  in  the 
family  way  was  confined  to  members  of  the  family. 

HAND-TO-MOUTH  PUBLISHERS 

Newspaper  men  more  or  less  just  happened.  They 
laid  no  more  claim  to  altruism,  but  they  talked  more 
about  trade  at  home.  Many  of  them  expected  a  sub- 
sidy from  the  party,  although  the  total  given  the 
whole  press  of  the  State  probably  would  not  equal 
the  advertising  receipts  of  a  present  daily  today 
from  the  friends  of  a  gubernatorial  or  senatorial  can- 
didate in  one  Democratic  primary.  Editors  were 
perhaps  held  in  greater  respect,  but  publishers  who 
lived  hand-to-mouth  and  met  payrolls  by  weekly 
collections  were  thoroughly  disesteemed. 

Now  the  editor  is  written  to  inform  him  how  little 
he  knows  and  how  poorly  he  thinks,  but  while  he  is 
not  made  a  member  of  the  Governor's  staff,  all  the 
civic  clubs  offer  him  membership,  and  a  successful 
publisher  is  almost  as  much  admired  as  the  proprie- 
tor of  a  drycleaning  establishment  or  a  funeral  home. 

Reporters,  when  I  began  reporting,  were  suspect- 
ed of  not  having  the  with  or  willingness  to  engage  in 
gainful  endeavor.  Most  of  them  became  reporters 
much  after  the  fashion  in  which  Randolph's  Rufe 
Betts  made  a  sale  of  a  coon  dog. 

"I  tried  him  for  possum,"  said  Rufe,  "and  he  run 
rabbits.  I  tried  him  for  foxes  and  he  wound  up  in 
the  hog  pen.  I  tried  him  for  squirrels  and  there  was 
nothing  doing.     I  'lowed  any  danged  dog  ought  to 


Winter-Spring,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  3 


be  good  for  something,  so  I  sold  him  for  a  coon  dog." 
I  don't  at  the  moment  recall  any  reporters  of  my 
vintage  who  actually  starved  to  death,  but  I  never 
met  one  whose  wife  was  wearing  a  3-carat  diamond. 
Many  of  them — perhaps  the  majority — found  some- 
thing more  lucrative,  and  some  of  them  even  became 
respectable  and  were  elected  to  public  office. 

REPORTING  MORE  OBJECTIVE 

They  all  had  one  thing  in  common,  however,  which 
I  wish  more  of  their  current  successors  had  inherit- 
ed— they  believed  in  the  papers  they  worked  for, 
swore  they  were  better  than  their  competitors,  sel- 
dom looked  at  the  clock,  and  wouldn't  have  accepted 
a  wristwatch  from  Santa  Claus.  Too,  I  think  re- 
porting of  the  yesteryears  was  more  objective.  To 
be  sure,  the  reporter  on  a  partisan  paper  was  not 
always  fair  to  the  political  opposition.  There  may 
have  been  more  unfounded  charges  made,  but  there 


was  less  space  given  to  rumors.  The  political  re- 
porter usually  spent  his  time  trying  to  get  a  politi- 
cian to  say  something  quotable  rather  than  explain- 
ing how  he  himself  shaped  the  rough-hewn  destinies 
of  incumbents  of  office. 

Way  back  yonder  there  were  few  news  photos.  A 
live  country-seat  semi-weekly  nowadays  will  print 
more  news  pictures  in  a  month  than  any  daily  in 
North  Carolina  produced  in  the  year  of  1910. 

Are  we  getting  better  ?  I  wouldn't  know.  A  news- 
paper meant  more  to  the  subscriber  than  now.  I 
think  it  meant  more  to  the  newspaper  men,  but  a 
bank  will  oblige  publisher  or  reporter  much  more 
quickly  than  aforetime,  and  newspaper  wives  more 
frequently  patronize  shoe  store  and  hairdressser. 
This,  I  think,  is  about  as  it  should  be. 

Writing  for  publication  is  done  for  two  reasons: 
pleasure  and  profit.  Doggone  little  pleasure  if  there 
ain't  some  profit. 


Description  of  State  Newspapers  Written  28  Years  Ago 


Since  the  day  on  which  James  Davis,  appointed 
postmaster  of  New  Bern  by  Benjamin  Franklin, 
started  the  North  Carolina  Gazette,  first  issued  in 
1751,  newspapers  in  the  "Tar  Heel  State"  have  had 
rough  sailing  and  many  of  them  have  perished  in 
shallow  waters.  Davis  made  four  attempts  to  estab- 
lish newspapers,  with  indifferent  success.  His  first 
was  published  for  about  seven  years.  In  1784  he 
made  a  second  attempt  with  "The  North  Carolina 
Magazine  or  Universal  Intelligencer",  which  soon 
stopped.  He  again  revived  the  Gazette  in  1768  and 
published  it  "intermittently"  for  over  ten  years. 
Then,  with  Robert  Keith,  he  established  "The  North 
Carolina  Gazette  or  Impartial  Intelligencer  and 
Weekly  General  Advertiser"  in  1783,  because  "there 
has  not  been  a  newspaper  in  North  Carolina  for  sev- 
eral years". 

Andrew  Stewart,  a  native  of  Belfast,  Ireland,  and 
for  some  time  a  printer  and  bookseller  in  Philadel- 
phia, was  the  second  man  to  establish  a  paper  in  this 
colony,  at  Wilmington,  in  1763  (or  '64).  His  bluff 
of  "Printer  to  the  King"  worked  for  a  time  and  se- 
cured for  him  some  of  the  public  printing,  but  his 
paper  was  suspended  in  1767  "for  lack  of  support". 
He  named  it  "The  North  Carolina  Gazette  and  Week- 
ly Post-Boy".  Later,  with  Stewart's  equipment, 
Adam  Boyd  began,  in  1769,  publishing  "The  Cape 
Fear  Mercury",  which,  although  a  poor  paper  from  a 
typographical  point  of  view,  lasted  until  the  Revolu- 
tion. 

These  early  efforts  are  related  for  a  purpose — to 
show  that  the  ups  and  downs  of  North  Carolina 
journalistic  efforts  have  continued  through  the  years 
and  that  these  ups  and  down  are  based  on  the  pecu- 
liar condition  of  the  population  of  the  State,  which 
also  explains  many  other  circumstances  in  its  his- 

Note:  This  article  was  prepared  early  in  1923  as  an  assignment  in  a 
course  in  "Development  of  Modern  Newspapers"  by  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  then  a 
student  in  the  Pulitzer  Sehool  of  Journalism,  Columbia  University,  New  York 
City. 


tory.  Without  seaport  facilities,  as  a  sand  bar  ex- 
tends from  the  northern  to  the  southern  boundaries 
of  the  State,  cutting  off  the  shore,  except  for  occa- 
sional breaks,  direct  settlement  was  impossible,  so 
North  Carolina  was  settled  by  migration  from  other 
states,  largely  in  groups  of  many  nationals. 

POPULATION  SCATTERED— CLANNISH 

Among  the  early  settlers  were  the  English  around 
Wilmington ;  the  Swiss  around  New  Bern ;  the  Mora- 
vians around  Salem;  the  Quakers  in  Guilford;  the 
Scotch  Presbyterian  in  Mecklenburg,  and  numbers  of 
other  groups  in  various  sections,  each  with  its  own 
modes  and  methods  and  each  a  law  unto  itself.  Most 
of  these  settlers  were  clannish  and  lived  for  many 
years  within  the  limits  of  their  territory  without 
intermingling  with  their  neighbors.  Later  scattered 
home-seekers  sought  intermediate  localities  and 
established  homes  in  mountains  or  coves  in  the  west- 
ern section,  on  the  plains  in  the  center  or  the  sands 
of  the  east.  As  a  result,  there  was  little  in  common 
and  for  many  years  a  glaring  lack  of  homogenity, 
the  welding  process  having  covered  a  long  period  of 
years. 

As  a  result  of  this  condition,  schools,  except  for 
those  able  to  provide  private  teaching,  were  un- 
known in  the  early  days,  because  of  the  scattered 
and  thinly  settled  population.  After  the  start  for  a 
public  school  system  made  by  Calvin  H.  Wiley,  the 
movement  was  taken  up  at  the  turn  of  the  century 
by  the  State's  "educational  governor",  Charles  B. 
Aycock,  whose  campaign  was  made  on  the  slogan  of 
placing  "a  schoolhouse  within  reach  of  every  boy  and 
girl  in  the  State,"  and  his  allies,  Alderman,  Mclver, 
Graham  and  other  practical  school  men.  Their  ef- 
forts are  bearing  a  rich  fruit,  as  may  be  seen  by 
the  census  reports,  which  placed  the  illiterate  whites 
in  the  State  in  1920  (over  ten  years  old)  at  8.2  per 
cent,  as  compared  with  12.3  per  cent  in  1910,  and 


PAGE  1  4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


illiterate  Negroes  at  24.8  per  cent,  against  31.9  per 
cent  ten  years  ago. 

This  background,  which  also  is  responsible  for 
lack  of  development  of  large  towns,  explains  the  un- 
stable careers  of  newspapers.  It  gives  additional 
insight  to  state  that  less  than  one-fifth  of  the  popula- 
tion lives  in  towns  of  over  2,500,  and  that  2,068,753 
are  classed  as  rural  and  490,370  as  urban.  Only 
two  of  the  largest  towns  can  be  placed  in  the  50,000 
population  class.  (1920  census). 

PAPERS  LOCAL  IN  TYPE 

It  will  be  seen  readily,  therefore,  that  newspapers 
are  restricted  in  circulation  and  that,  until  the  past 
decade,  such  a  term  as  "state  papers"  could  not  be 
applied.  To  revert  again  to  statistics,  it  is  seen  that 
there  are  290  papers  and  periodicals  published  in  the 
State.  Included  in  the  daily  list  are  40  papers,  all 
of  which,  except  about  a  dozen,  are  afternoon  papers, 
largely  in  towns  having  from  8,000  to  20,000  popu- 
lation. Twenty-nine  semi-weekly,  176  weekly,  28 
monthly  and  nine  quarterly  papers  complete  the  list, 
except  for  a  few  odd-period  publications. 

All  of  the  papers  in  North  Carolina,  broadly 
speaking,  have  been  conservative  and  devoted  largely 
to  the  interests  of  the  immediate  communities  in 
which  they  are  published.  Since  the  State  still  holds 
fifth  place  in  the  nation  as  an  agricultural  State 
(value  of  agricultural  products)  much  space  has 
been  devoted  to  the  farmers  and  their  interests.  The 
past  decade  has  seen  such  a  rapid  industrial  growth, 
in  which  North  Carolina  has  taken  first  place  in 
number  of  cotton  mills  and  is  second  only  to  Massa- 
chusetts in  value  of  textile  products,  and  has  taken 
first  place  in  tobacco  growing  and  manufacturing, 
trade  papers  have  been  established.  As  a  result  of 
industrial  development,  also,  and  the  subsequent  or- 
ganization of  the  workers,  labor  papers  are  now 
published  in  eight  or  ten  of  the  largest  industrial 
centers.  These  changes  have  been  reflected  in  the 
straight  newspapers,  likewise ;  in  fact,  have  followed 
the  lead  of  the  papers. 

WEEKLY  PAPERS  SUFFICIENT 

Weekly  papers  have  played  an  important  part  in 
the  life  of  the  State,  because  the  agricultural  pur- 
suits have  had  the  effect  of  retarding  extensive  read- 
ing and  the  weekly  survey  of  the  news  was  sufficient 
for  the  farmer.  The  oldest  of  these,  which  has  since 
become  an  afternoon  daily,  is  the  Fayetteville  Ob- 
server. Among  the  weekly  and  semi-weekly  publi- 
cations that  should  be  noted  in  passing  are  the  Eliza- 
beth City  Independent,  "all  that  the  name  implies" 
and  edited  by  a  very  clever  writer,  W.  O.  Saunders ; 
the  Western  Sentinel,  the  Robesonian,  of  Lumber- 
ton;  the  Lexington  Dispatch  and  the  Union  Repub- 
lican, which  is  the  nearest  approach  to  a  party  organ 
in  the  State.  (Later  reference  will  be  made  to  party 
organs). 

Before  leaving  the  weekly  field,  it  is  worth  while 
to  note  an  unusual  situation.  At  Moravian  Falls,  far 
back  in  the  mountains  of  Wilkes  County,  miles  from 
a  railroad,  has  developed  a  condition  unique  in  the 


SAVORY  LOVING  CUP  AWARD  WON 
BY  13  N.  C.  WEEKLY  NEWSPAPERS 

The  Savory  Loving  Cup,  a  trophy  presented  to  the  N.  C. 
Press  Association  in  1922  on  the  occasion  of  the  50th  anni- 
versary of  its  organization  by  Walter  H.  Savory,  for  many 
years  a  regular  attendant  at  the  conventions  as  Southern 
representative  of  the  Mergenthaler  Linotoype  Co.,  was 
awarded  to  newspapers  in  the  weekly  field  for  13  years, 
until  all  vacant  space  on  the  cup  was  occupied  by  the  names 
of  the  winners. 

Mr.  Savory,  popular  with  all  of  the  members,  decided  to 
offer  the  cup  in  North  Carolina  only  for  general  excellence 
of  newspapers.  The  award  was  made  at  each  annual  con- 
vention by  a  secret  committee  named  by  officers  of  the  asso- 
ciation. The  cup  was  kept  by  the  winner  during  the  ensuing 
year  and  was  returned  to  the  convention  for  re-award  each 
year.  The  cup  is  now  proudly  displayed  in  the  School  of 
Journalism  at  the  University  of  North  Carolina. 

The  Hertford  County  Herald,  Ahoskie,  won  the  cup  for 
two  years  in  succession  and  The  Elkin  Tribune  won  it  twice, 
with  an  interval  between. 

Inscription  on  one  side  of  the  cup,  dashes  ( — )  indicating 
ends  of  lines,  reads  as  follows: 

"Savory  Loving  Cup — presented  by — Walter  Harriman 
Savory — honorary  member — of  the — North  Carolina  Press 
Association — on  its — Fiftieth  Anniversary — July,  1922 — 
awarded  for  excellence  of  typography — make-up  and  general 
effectiveness — of  publication — 1 9  2  2'." 

Inscribed  on  the  other  side  are  the  names  of  winners  and 
years  won,  headed  by  the  word  "Awarded",  as  follows: 

The  Smithfield  Herald — 1922 

The  Pilot,  Vass,  N.  C. — 1923 

Hertford  County  Herald,  Ahoskie,  N.   C. — 19  24 

Heltford  County  Herald,   Ahoskie,  N.   C. — 1925 

The  Sun,  Rutherfordton,  N.  C. — 1926 

The  Roxboro  Courier,  Roxboro,  N.  C. — 1927 

The  Wilkes  Patriot,  Wilkesboro,  N.  C. — 1928 

The  Albemarle  Press,  Albemarle,  N.  C. — 19  29 

The  Cleveland  Star,  Shelby,  N.  C. — 1930 

Lenoir  News-Topic,  Lenoir,  N.  C. — 1931 

The  Elkin  Tribune,  Elkin,  N.  C. — 1932 

Rutherford  Co.  News,  Rutherfordton,  N.  C. — 1933 

The  Elkin  Tribune,  Elkin,  N.  C. — 1934 

(Thanks  to  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  Roy  Parker,  and  Prof. 
Jack  Riley  for  data.) 


newspaper  field.  Many  years  ago  R.  Don  Laws,  a 
brilliant  writer  and  bitter  partisan,  started  a  small, 
four-page  weekly  which  he  named  "The  Yellow 
Jacket".  It  is  a  Republican  paper  with  a  sting  for 
the  opposition  in  almost  every  line.  Although  not 
circulating  largely  in  the  State,  it  built  up  a  mailing 
list  that  ran  up  to  a  hundred  thousand  or  more.  So 
successful  was  the  paper  that  at  the  village  is  found 
one  of  the  best  equipped  newspaper  plants  in  the 
State.  Special  trucks  carry  each  issue  about  five 
miles  to  the  nearest  railroad  station.  At  the  same 
place  and  developing  later,  is  "The  Lash",  also  a 
weekly  paper  of  somewhat  similar  proportions, 
which  is  classed  as  an  independent,  but  also  has  the 
sting.  Its  circulation,  scattered  over  a  wide  terri- 
tory, is  given  as  30,000. 

DAILY  PAPERS  DEVELOPING 

In  the  afternoon  field,  passing  mention  should  be 
made  of  half  a  dozen  of  the  papers  published  at  the 
larger  towns,  including  the  Twin-City  Sentinel,  Win- 
ston-Salem, considered  the  most  attractive  paper  in 
the  State  in  make-up  and  typographically ;  the  Ral- 
eigh Times,  edited  by  an  exceedingly  brilliant,  versa- 
tile and,  at  times,  sarcastic  young  man ;  the  Charlotte 
News,  one  of  the  best  financial  successes  in  the  State ; 
the  Asheville  Times;  the  Greensboro  Record;  the 


Winter-Spring,  i 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  5 


Durham  Sun  and  the  Wilmington  Despatch,  the  lat- 
ter of  which  has  recently  changed  hands.  These 
papers  are  all  published  in  towns  that  have  morning 
papers  also,  some  of  them  suffering  from  the  compe- 
tition and  others  from  limited  territory  in  which  to 
circulate. 

The  morning  field  is  more  restricted,  but  the 
papers  offer  a  more  interesting  study.  Eliminating, 
for  the  present,  the  three  leading  morning  papers,  it 
is  proper  to  mention  half  a  dozen  others  that  are 
developing  rapidly,  in  most  instances,  although  all 
have  passed  through  their  perilous  stages.  The  Win- 
ston-Salem Journal,  published  at  the  largest  city  in 
the  State ;  the  Asheville  Citizen,  issued  in  one  of  the 
greatest  resort  cities  of  the  nation ;  the  Durham 
Herald,  in  the  city  made  famous  by  the  Dukes  and 
other  tobacco  manufacturers,  and  the  Wilmington 
Star,  published  at  the  State's  only  seaport  town  and 
at  the  place  at  which  the  State's  second  paper  was 
started,  are  included  in  this  class. 

THREE  LEADING  DAILIES 

And  now  comes  the  "triumvirate",  the  three  pa- 
pers that  have  come  to  be  known  as  State  papers, 
having  circulations  which  cover  the  entire  State, 
even  though  thin  in  places.  These  are  the  Raleigh 
News  and  Observer,  the  Charlotte  Observer  and  the 
Greensboro  News,  all  having  the  progress  and  de- 
velopment of  the  State  as  their  watchwords,  but  all 
pursuing  different  lines,  going  about  it  in  different 
ways,  each  jealous  of  the  other  and  frequently  taking 
advantage  of  opportunities  to  "strike  out"  at  the 
others.  While,  as  stated  before,  all  are  for  progress 
and  development,  if  "hobbies"  may  be  selected,  the 
News  and  Observer  stands  for  the  common  people, 
as  against  the  "interests" ;  the  Charlotte  Observer 
stresses  industrial  development;  the  Greensboro 
News  tends  toward  the  commercial  and,  as  an  inde- 
pendent in  politics,  serves  as  a  check  on  the  others. 
A  paragraph  on  each  of  these  papers  is  needed  to 
complete  the  story. 

The  News  and  Observer  is  Josephus  Daniels, 
former  Secretary  of  the  Navy.  After  running  a 
weekly  paper  in  a  smaller  town,  he,  as  a  young  man, 
went  to  Raleigh  and  became  associated  with  the  late 
Walter  Hines  Page  in  publishing  the  State  Chronicle. 
Later  he  took  over  the  paper  and  through  combina- 
tions, his  News  and  Observer,  in  the  early  '90's 
resulted.  Located  at  the  State  capital,  this  paper 
has  entered  into  the  fights  and  controversies  that 
have  developed,  fighting  for  prohibition  and  white 
supremacy  in  the  notable  campaigns  around  1900, 
education,  opposition  to  class  control  and  against 
the  "interests",  including  the  big  tobacco  and  cotton 
manufacturers,  power  companies  and  other  "big 
business"  activities.  Recent  fights  have  been  against 
legislation  exempting  stocks  in  corporations  outside 
the  State  from  taxes  and  against  issuing  bonds  for 
completing  the  State  highway  system.  The  paper 
claims  that  the  latter  fight  was  based  on  a  desire  to 
"see  the  end"  of  heavy  bond  issues,  while  it  has 
brought  forth  the  criticism  that  the  newspaper  is  an 
obstructionist  and  is  playing  politics.     Needless  to 


say,  the  News  and  Observer  is  a  strongly  partisan 
Democratic  paper. 

THE  OBSERVER  CONSERVATIVE 

The  Charlotte  Observer  has  been  classed  as  a  con- 
servative newspaper  practically  all  through  its  more 
than  half  a  century's  history.  Up  to  a  dozen  or  more 
years  ago,  it  was  edited  for  many  years  by  the  late 
J.  P.  Caldwell,  a  virile  and  able  editor  of  the  old 
school,  who  was  both  admired  and  feared.  He  was 
"wet"  and  one  of  the  bitterest  fights  in  the  history 
of  North  Carolina  journalism  was  between  him  and 
Mr.  Daniels,  into  which  personality  was  injected, 
without  check.  Passing  from  his  hands  into  those 
of  business  men,  not  newspaper  men,  this  paper  suf- 
fered a  relapse,  until  it  was  taken  over  a  few  years 
ago  and  put  on  a  business  basis.  Incidentally,  it  is 
probably  the  best  paying  newspaper  in  the  Carolinas 
today.  This  paper  plays  up  as  much  as  it  will  bear 
all  news  relating  to  industrial,  educational,  agricul- 
tural activities  and  good  roads  news  and  devotes  its 
editorial  columns  largely  to  such  progressive  move- 
ments. Politics,  of  course,  is  not  neglected,  this 
paper  also  being  in  the  aggressive  Democratic  col- 
umn. 


EDITOR  JOSEPHUS  DANIELS  WAS 

DISTINGUISHED  STATE  CITIZEN 

Josephus  Daniels,  who  became  one  of  North  Carolina's 
most  distinguished  citizens,  was  a  newspaper  man  for  al- 
most 70  years,  from  the  time  he  was  16  until  his  death  at 
8  5.  This  is  probably  a  record  in  span,  although  Mr.  Daniels 
was  away  from  his  editorial  desk  for  some  18  years.  As  a 
result,  numbers  of  North  Carolina  newspaper  men  have  had 
longer  continuous  and  unbroken  spans  at  the  desk  than  did 
Mr.  Daniels. 

Mr.  Daniels  started  a  little  paper,  The  Cornucopia,  at 
Wilson  in  1878  and  two  years  later  acquired  an  interest  in 
The  Wilson  Advance,  control  of  which  he  purchased  a  year 
later  and  operated  for  four  years.  It  was  while  here,  in 
1884,  that  he  was  elected  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  As- 
sociation, when  22  years  of  age.  He  attended  his  first  press 
meeting  at  Catawba  Springs  in  1879  as  one  of  half  a  dozen 
"boy  editors"  or  amateur  editors.  His  attendance  was  con- 
tinuous after  that. 

In  1885  Mr.  Daniels  moved  to  Raleigh  as  editor  of  The 
State  Chronicle.  He  had  his  ups  and  downs  and  in  1892  he 
was  appointed  chief  clerk  in  the  Interior  Department.  After 
two  years  he  returned  to  Raleigh  and  bought,  with  the  help 
of  100  friends  who  took  stock  with  him,  the  News  and  Ob- 
server, at  auction  for  $6,8  0  0.  Here  he  remained  and  re- 
turned from  periods  of  public  service,  until  his  death,  early 
in  1948. 

Mr.  Daniels  was  a  fighter,  slugging  away  with  his  stubby 
pencil  in  editorials  against  privilege  and  the  money  barons, 
corruption  in  high  or  low  places,  fighting  for  the  common 
people,  for  education,  for  church,  for  temperance  and  for 
the  Democratic  party.  It  was  his  political  activities  that 
resulted  in  his  first  clerkship  in  Washington;  his  service  for 
eight  years  as  Secretary  of  the  Navy  under  President  Wilson; 
his  service  under  his  former  assistant,  F.  D.  Roosevelt,  as 
Ambassador  to  Mexico  for  seven  years;  his  post  as  national 
committeeman  for  North  Carolina  for  20  years. 

He  was  the  stub  pencil  author  of  close  to  a  dozen  books, 
among  them  "Life  of  Ensign  Worth  Bagley";  "The  Navy 
and  the  Nation",  "Our  Navy  at  War",  "Life  of  Woodrow 
Wilson",  "Tar  Heel  Editor",  "Editor  in  Politics",  "The 
Wilson  Era"  (in  two  volumes),  "Shirtsleeve  Diplomat",  and 
had  started  "Life  Begins  at  7  5",  promising  another  book 
on  the  10  0th  anniversary  of  his  birth. 

Mr.  Daniels  was  a  Methodist  Church  lay  leader,  and  a 
leader  of  the  dry  forces  in  the  State.  He  studied  law  at 
the  State  University  around  1885  and  was  one  of  its  trustees 
for  46  years. 


PAGE  16 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  i  951 


The  Greensboro  News  is  a  later  addition  to  the 
trio.  Started  some  25  years  ago  as  a  Republican 
State  organ,  it  was  not  many  years  before  it  found 
itself  "on  the  rocks".  Later  reorganization  placed 
it  in  the  "independent"  category  and,  as  such,  with 
progressive  and  forward  looking  policies,  it  has 
reached  a  place  of  importance  in  the  State.  Many  of 
the  leading  Republicans  of  the  State  are  supporters 
of  this  publication,  while  it  finds  its  way  into  the 
homes  of  many  of  the  Democrats  who  are  not  strong 
in  their  partisanship.  One  feature,  which  is  passing 
off  the  page  of  so  many  papers,  is  the  editorial  para- 
graph, which  proves  an  attractive  feature  of  this 
paper. 

EFFECTIVE  ADVERTISING 

The  effect  of  the  new  era  in  North  Carolina  jour- 
nalism may  be  seen  in  no  better  way  than  to  give  two 
instances,  one  illustrating  the  value  of  news-pub- 
licity; the  other  of  advertising.  Six  months  before 
the  meeting  of  the  General  Assembly  of  two  years 
ago,  (1921),  T.  L.  Kirkpatrick,  president  of  the 
Citizens  Highway  Association  of  North  Carolina, 
suggested  and  began  a  fight  for  a  bond  issue  of 
$50,000,000  to  construct  a  hard-surfaced  system  of 
roads  connecting  every  county  seat  and  principal 
town.  He  was  laughed  at,  called  a  fanatic  and  even 
a  plain  fool.  He  perfected  his  organization  and 
delegated  the  writer  to  get  out  a  weekly  news  letter 


— propaganda — four  months  before  the  General  As- 
sembly's meeting.  From  25  to  100  papers  received 
this  service  weekly,  most  of  them  played  it  up  and 
added  to  it  and  before  the  Legislature  adjourned,  it 
had  done  what  was  considered  impossible.  More- 
over, at  the  session  just  ended,  (1923),  it  added 
$15,000,000  to  complete  the  highway  system.  Coun- 
ties in  the  State  have  added  probably  $40,000,000 
more  for  developing  the  roads  within  their  boun- 
daries. 

The  other  instance.  About  the  same  time,  two 
and  a  half  years  ago,  (1920),  the  institutions  of 
higher  education  realized  they  were  not  keeping  pace 
with  the  development  of  the  common  and  high  school 
systems  of  the  State  and  were  unable  to  accommo- 
date more  than  half  the  students  seeking  admission. 
A  loose  organization  was  formed  and  a  propaganda 
fund  of  several  thousand  dollars  was  raised  by 
alumni  and  friends.  This  was  used  to  give,  in  page 
advertisements  in  all  of  the  leading  daily  and  weekly 
papers  in  the  State,  the  status  of  the  institutions. 
The  institutions  asked  for  $47,000,000,  approxi- 
mately, for  seven-year  building  programs.  The  legis- 
lature, which  had  sadly  neglected  these  institutions 
in  the  past,  gave  its  proportional  part  of  the  amount 
asked,  for  a  two  year  program,  leaving  later  legis- 
latures to  make  the  appropriations  for  succeeding 
years. 


Printing  Industry  of  the  Carolinas,  Effective  Group 

By  Henry  L.  Weathers,  Shelby  Daily  Star,  President,  Printing  Industry  of  the  Carolinas,  Inc. 


The  Printing  Industry  of  the  Carolinas,  Inc.  is 
serving  effectively  the  printers  of  North  Carolina 
and  South  Carolina  today  because,  about  a  score  of 
years  ago,  far-seeing  and  persistent  members  of  the 
industry  had  the  vision  of  what  such  an  organization 
could  mean.  Though  the  association  comprises  two 
states,  this  article  primarily  concerns  the  North 
Carolina  industry  and  trade  organization. 

The  history  of  the  association  goes  back  many 
years,  to  the  early  part  of  1900,  when  the  heads  of 
several  of  the  larger  printing  firms  met  informally 
on  occasions  to  discuss  their  mutual  problems.  In 
late  1931  and  early  1932,  necessity  for  cooperation, 
the  depression  of  1929,  and  the  days  that  followed 
with  NRA,  brought  the  printers  together  in  an  organ- 
izational meeting.  An  association  was  formed  in 
which  they  could  exchange  information  and  opinions 
on  better  ways  of  accomplishing  their  aims  and  thus 
help  the  industry  as  a  whole.  At  that  time,  the  vol- 
ume and  prices  of  printing  had  dropped  to  a  low  level 
in  the  State:  In  October,  1932,  the  first  meeting  of 
the  Carolina  Master  Printers  Association  was  held 
in  Greensboro.  Mr.  A.  G.  Gordon  of  Winston-Salem 
was  elected  president. 

The  first  Board  of  Directors  meeting  was  held  in 
March,  1933,  consisting  of  such  outstanding  indi- 
viduals as  Banks  R.  Cates,  C.  G.  Harrison,  Jos.  H. 


Hardison,  Fred  E.  Little  and  W.  H.  Fisher.  These 
men  personally  subscribed  sufficient  funds  to  get  the 
association  financially  established.  Through  the 
years  many  others  have  contributed  to  the  growth 
and  progress  which  is  responsible  for  the  present 
strength  of  the  group.  Among  some  of  these  are 
W.  M.  Pugh,  who  served  the  association  for  four 
years  as  secretary-treasurer,  and  later  as  president 
for  three  years ;  Norman  Foust,  who  served  as  presi- 
dent for  two  years  during  the  second  World  War; 
Jos.  J.  Stone,  who  in  1941  was  made  an  honorary 


OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS  OF  THE 

PRINTING  INDUSTRY  OF  CAROLINAS 

Present  officers  and  directors  of  The  Printing  Industry  of 
The  Carolinas,  Inc.,  abbreviated  to  PICA,  composed  of 
printing  firms  of  North  and  South  Carolina,  are  as  follows: 

Officers:  Henry  L.  Weathers,  Star  Publishing  Co.,  Shelby, 
president;  Frank  R.  Kuhn,  Jr.,  Williams  Printing  Co.,  Spar- 
tanburg, S.  C,  vice-president;  Guy  B.  Bphland,  Alamance 
Printing  Co.,  Burlington,  secretary  and  treasurer;  James 
P.  Furlong,  John  J.  Furlong  &  Sons,  Charleston,  S.  C,  ex- 
officio;  Eugene  H.  Salmon,  Graphic  Knoll,  Columbia,  S.  C, 
executive  secretary. 

Directors:  Charles  E.  Stone,  Crowson-Stone  Printing  Co., 
Columbia,  S.  C;  Jord  H.  Jordan,  The  Herald  Press,  Char- 
lotte; Robert  A.  Little,  Wilmington  Printing  Co.,  Wilming- 
ton; F.  P.  Earle,  Greensboro  Printing  Co.,  Greensboro;  A. 
M.  Beck,  The  Graphic  Press,  Raleigh;  J.  Wilbur  Little, 
Electric  City  Printing  Co.,  Anderson,  S.  C. 


Winter-Spring,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  7 


member  for  life,  the  only  such  North  Carolina  mem- 
ber (In  1945  Mr.  Charlie  Band  of  Spartanburg,  S.  C, 
was  made  honorary  member)  ;  and  many  more  that 
space  does  not  permit  naming. 

In  1934  the  trade  group  was  incorporated  into  the 
"North  Carolina  Master  Printers  Association,  Inc." 
under  the  leadership  of  W.  H.  Fisher.  During  the 
next  few  years  interest  in  the  association  began  to 
lag  and  in  September,  1939,  it  found  itself  with  only 
20  members  and  a  bank  account  of  less  than  $100. 
Seeing  the  necessity  for  strengthening  the  organiza- 
tion, the  directors  then  approved  inviting  paper  and 
supply  firms  to  become  associate  members. 

The  State  was  divided  into  four  districts,  with  a 
vice  president  in  each.  A  drive  was  started  for  new 
members,  and  by  the  annual  meeting  in  July,  1940, 
at  Wrightsville  Beach  the  membership  had  grown  to 
fifty  and  a  budget  of  $8,000  was  adopted  and  raised. 
An  executive  secretary  was  employed,  and  new  life 
and  interest  in  the  association  was  manifested. 

In  1943  the  membership  approved  an  amendment 
to  allow  South  Carolina  printers  in  the  association, 
and  the  name  was  changed  to  the  "Carolinas  Master 
Printers  Association,  Inc.",  including  both  states. 
It  was  called  this  until  1946  when  the  name  was  re- 
vised making  it  what  it  is  today — the  "Printing  In- 
dustry of  the  Carolinas,  Inc."  A  plan  was  approved 
setting  up  several  regional  meetings  to  be  held  dur- 
ing the  year  in  key  cities,  throughout  the  Carolinas. 
J.  C.  Keys  of  South  Carolina  offered  it,  saying  it 
would  take  the  association  to  the  people  who  were 
not  able  to  attend  the  annual  meeting.  This  plan 
has  been  in  use  for  several  years  with  splendid  suc- 
cess. 

The  association  has  continued  to  grow  and  develop 
until  today  there  116  firms  which  are  members  and 
about  30  which  are  associate  members.  The  latter 
are  paper  houses,  ink  companies,  and  machinery 
manufacturers. 

PICA  has  done  much  to  promote  the  industry  and 
help  both  small  and  large  printers.  Since  World 
War  II,  many  of  the  printers  have  greatly  enlarged 
their  facilities  and  improved  the  type  and  quality  of 
their  work,  and  it  is  estimated  the  volume  of  printing 
in  North  Carolina  within  the  last  ten  years  has 
tripled.    There  are  a  number  of  large  and  outstand- 


ing printing  firms  doing  work  that  goes  into  every 
one  of  the  48  states. 

North  Carolina  should  be  proud  of  this  industry 
and  the  growth  it  has  made.  It  continues  to  bring 
new  printing  orders  to  the  State  and  our  organiza- 
tion is  recognized  as  one  of  the  best  in  the  South.  As 
an  industry,  it  is  on  top  in  its  wage  scale,  and  from 
an  unemployment  standpoint  it  is  close  to  the  bot- 
tom. The  records  will  show  that  there  is  very  little 
labor  turnover,  and  that  the  percentage  of  unem- 
ployed printers  and  claims  for  unemployment  com- 
pensation is  as  low  as  any  industry  in  the  State. 

In  1947  the  association  employed  a  paid  executive 
secretary.  He  was  Eugene  Salmon,  who  continues 
in  that  capacity.  He  is  widely  experienced  in  print- 
ing and  its  allied  branches.  This  year  the  PICA  be- 
came affiliated  with  the  Printing  Industry  of  Amer- 
ica, a  national  organization.  This  gives  all  North 
Carolina  printers  the  benefits  and  services  of  the 
national  trade  group,  which  is  one  of  the  best 
national  trade  associations  in  the  country. 

The  association  has  a  monthly  dues  schedule,  based 
on  the  individual  firm's  volume  of  business,  and  today 
is  financially  very  stable.  The  Board  of  Directors  is 
composed  of  the  officers,  plus  six  directors. 

PICA  has  grown  and  strengthened  so  that  today 
the  commercial  printers  of  North  Carolina  can  face 
the  future  with  more  confidence  than  ever  before, 
and  with  security  and  assurance  of  solving  its  prob- 
lems and  benefiting  its  members. 

The  following  have  served  the  association  as 
officers : 

Year  President  Secretary-Treasurer 

193  2' — A.  G.  Gordon '__ Noble  R.  Medearis 

1933 — W.  H.  Fisher C.  G.  Harrison 

1934 — W.  H.  Fisher C.  G.  Harrison 

1935 — W.  E.  Seeman W.  M.  Pugh 

1936 — Owen  G.  Dunn W.  M.  Pugh 

1937 — J.  A.  Kellenberger W.   M.   Pugh 

1938 — W.  B.  Hall W.  M.  Pugh 

1939 — W.   M.   Pugh Wallace   Seeman 

1940 — W.  M.  Pugh George  Moore,  Jr. 

1941 — W.  M.  Pugh Robt.  C.  CarmichaeJ 

1942 — Norman  W.  Foust E.  M.  Preston 

1943 — Norman  W.   Foust Vander  Liles 

1944 — Paul  Robinson W.  B.  Hall 

1945 — J.  H.  Hardison Frank  Bynum 

1946 — Claude  Rhodes James  P.  Furlong 

1947 — Robt.  C.  Carmichael Robt.  M.  Allgood 

1948 — Hanes  Lassiter Norman  W.  Foust 

1949 — James  P.  Furlong Claude  Rhodes 

1950 — Henry  L.  Weathers Guy  B.  Ephland 


a. 
(0 

i— 

-J 
0) 

J— 

i5 
Co 


Press  Notes:  Interesting  Items  of  People  and  Papers 


(0 

c 

1 

(0 


J? 

(TO 

Q6 


Publisher  Lee  B.  Weathers,  of  the  Shelby  Daily  Star,  has 
gathered  one  copy  each  of  at  least  12  papers  that  have  been 
published  in  Cleveland  County  since  its  formation  110 
years  ago,  has  them  framed  and  will  present  them  to  Gard- 
ner Webb  College  Library  at  Boiling  Springs. 

The  Thomasville  Tribune,  operated  by  H.  A.  Cecil,  Sr., 
formerly  with  The  High  Point  Enterprise,  and  H.  A.  Cecil, 
Jr.,  moved  into  a  modern  new  building  last  year,  at  which 
time  they  purchased  The  Thomasville  News-Times  and  merg- 
ed it  with  The  Tribune.  The  firm  also  operates  a  large 
office  supply  and  equipment  store. 

WILLIAMSTON   MANNINGS 

The  Williamston  Enterprise  has  been  operated  by  the 
Manning  family  since  1908.     W.  C.  Manning  was  editor  and 


publisher  until  his  death  in  1938.  Since  then  W.  C.  Man 
ning,  Jr.,  and  F.  M.  Manning  have  operated  with  W.  H. 
Booker  as  a  partner.  This  firm  also  publishes  The  Weekly 
Herald,  Robersonville,  and  The  Roanoke  Beacon,  Plymouth. 
W.  C.  Manning,  Jr.,  was  last  year's  president  of  the  Eastern 
N.  C.  Press  Association. 

The  Shelby  Daily  Star  probably  has  another  record:  only 
one  former  employee  has  filed  a  claim  for  unemployment 
compensation  since  the  Employment  Security  Law  was  enact- 
ed in  1936. 

AGED   WILMINGTON   STAR 

The  Wilmington  Morning  Star  was  established  about  two 
years  after  the  Civil  War  in  18  67  by  Major  William  H. 
Bernard  as  an  afternoon  newspaper,   becoming  a  morning 


O 


PAGE  1  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-spring,  1951 


paper  a  month  later.  It  has  the  distinction  of  being  the 
oldest  or  second  oldest  continuous  daily  newspaper  in  North 
Carolina  with  the  original  name.  Since  19  29  The  Star  has 
been  operated  by  R.  B.  Page,  who  acquired  The  Wilmington 
News  and  established  the  Sunday  Star-News. 

BEASLEY-BRYANT-NOELL 

Roland  F.  Beasley,  editor  of  the  Monroe  Journal,  and 
H.E.C.  (Red  Buck)  Bryant,  Route  1,  Matthews,  retired  (but 
still  writing)  Washington  newspaper  correspondent,  were 
the  center  of  attraction  at  the  Press  Institute  at  Chapel  Hill 
and  Duke  University  in  January.  Mr.  Beasley,  80,  has  edit- 
ed the  Monroe  Journal  for  more  than  57  years.  Mr.  Bryant, 
78,  has  been  writing  about  as  long,  first  for  The  Charlotte 
Observer,  for  many  years  in  Washington,  and  now  for  fun. 
Many  old-timers,  Ralph  Graves,  Oscar  Coffin,  Bob  Madry, 
your  reporter,  and  many  others  sat  at  their  feet  for  hours. 

But  even  they  take  off  their  hats  to  J.  W.  Noell,  editor 
of  the  Roxboro  Courier-Times,  8  9,  who  was  too  busy  to 
enter  into  the  Press  Institute  frivolities,  but  he  "sent  a 
hand,"  his  daughter,  Mrs.  Lee  B.  Weathers,  of  Shelby. 

W.  Thomas  Bost,  dean  of  Raleigh  correspondents,  is  the 
youngest  70-year-old  man  to  be  seen.  Coming  from  the 
Salisbury  area,  he  worked  in  that  city,  in  Durham,  in 
Greensboro,  and  for  around  one-third  of  a  century  he  has 
been  racing  around  Raleigh  as  correspondent,  sermon  writ- 
er, "blockade"  preacher,  anti-prohibition  teetotaler,  candy- 
maker,  debunker,  and  constructive  promoter. 

E.  A.  Resch,  Siler  City;  John  B.  Harris,  Albemarle,  and 
Carl  C.  Council,  Durham,  were  named  by  President  Henry 
Belk,  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association,  at  the  Chapel  Hill  meet- 
ing as  the  Nominating  Committee,  to  present  a  slate  of  offi- 
cers at  the  summer  press  meeting. 

Dr.  Samuel  M.  Holton  was  named  early  in  1951  as  editor 
of  "The  High  School  Journal,"  published  at  Chapel  Hill,  to 
succeed  Dr.  W.  Carson  Ryan. 

Harry  Wild  Hickey,  47,  telegraph  editor  and  editorial 
writer,  with  the  Fayetteville  Observer  since  1942,  died 
Feb.  14,  1951.  In  the  1920s  he  had  been  with  the  Asso- 
ciated Press  in  the  Raleigh  and  Columbia,  S.  C,  bureaus. 

HONORS   NEGRO   PRINTER 

Robert  S.  Jervay,  who  founded  the  R.  S.  Jervay  Printing 
Co.  in  Wilmington  50  years  ago  as  a  job  shop  and  printed  The 
Cape  Fear  Journal  until  his  death  in  1941,  was  honored  recently 
by  the  Wilmington  Housing  Authority  when  a  new  Negro 
housing  project  was  named  Robert  S.  Jervay  Place.  One 
of  his  sons  publishes  The  Wilmington  Journal  and  another 
publishes  The  Carolinian,  Raleigh,  and  The  Carolinian, 
Winston-Salem. 

Santford  Martin  has  been  editor  of  The  Winston-Salem 
Journal,  and  later  of  The  Twin  City  Sentinel,  since  1915, 
continuing  his  editorial  writing  even  while  private  secre- 
tary to  Governor  T.  W.  Bickett.  He  was  president  of  the 
N.  C.  Press  Association,  1917-18. 

The  Wilkes  Patriot,  Wilkesboro,  was  established  in  190  6 
and  edited  for  several  years,  until  consolidated  with  The 
Journal  in  North  Wilkesboro  as  The  Journal-Patriot,  by 
Charles  H.  Cowles,  former  Congressman,  State  Senator  and 
State  Representative.  Publisher  A.  N.  Critcher,  of  the 
Oxford  Public  Ledger,  was  with  The  Patriot  for  a  time 
until  the  consolidation  in  1932. 

The  Biblical  Recorder,  Raleigh,  was  established  in  18  35 
by  Thomas  Meredith  as  The  North  Carolina  Baptist  Inter- 
preter, started  by  Dr.  Meredith  in  1833  in  New  Bern.  The 
publication  was  moved  to  Raleigh  in  1838  and  is  said  to  be 
the  oldest  corporation  in  Raleigh,  and  has  a  circulation  of 
around  42,000.  It  is  the  organ  of  the  Baptist  State  Con- 
vention but  was  owned  privately  until  1939.  Former  prom- 
inent editors  were  Senator  Josiah  W.  Bailey,  Dr.  Hight  C. 
Moore  and  Dr.  Livingstone  Johnson. 

The  Carolinian,  Raleigh,  published  by  P.  R.  Jervay,  is 
one  of  the  three  North  Carolina  newspapers  in  which  this 
publisher  is  interested.  The  Winston-Salem  Carolinian  is  an 
affiliated  publication,  and  the  Raleigh  print  shop  prints  The 
Wilmington  Journal. 

North  Carolina  Education,  Raleigh,  organ  of  the  North 
Carolina  Education  Association,  was  founded  in  1906  by 
Dr.  E.  C.  Brooks  and  H.  E.  Seeman,  for  the  State  Department 
of  Education.  Former  editors  and  publishers  have  been 
Dr.  Brooks,  W.  F.  Marshall,  Dr.  A.  T.  Allen,  M.  R.  Travue, 
M.  L.  Wright,  Jule  B.  Warren,  Fred  W.  Greene  and  Mrs. 
Ethel  Perkins  Edwards,  present  editor.  John  Bikle  has 
been  business  manager  some  2  5  years. 


The  State,  Raleigh,  is  an  unusual  type  of  publication, 
established  in  1933  and  still  edited  and  published  by  Carl 
Goerch,  former  Washington,  N.  C,  newspaper  publisher. 
This  magazine,  with  a  circulation  exceeding  21,0  00,  carries 
the  usual  as  well  as  unusual  incidents,  past  and  present,  of 
the  State  of  North  Carolina. 

The  Raleigh  Times,  established  in  1879  as  The  Evening 
Visitor,  has  been  connected  with  several  other  Raleigh  pub- 
lications, including  The  Daily  Press,  The  Press-Visitor,  The 
Tim'es-Visitor  and  The  Raleigh  Evening  Times.  John  A. 
Park  has  been  editor  and  publisher  since  1911.  Three  sons 
are  now  on  the  staff,  John,  Jr.,  Ben,  and  Albert  Park. 

W.  E.  Rutledge  has  been  editor  and  publisher  of  The  Yad- 
kin Ripple,  Yadkinville,  for  41  years.  He  is  now  assisted 
by  his  son,  W.  E.  Rutledge,  Jr.  Mrs.  Mattie  Johnson  Hall, 
who  established  the  paper  at  East  Bend  in  1892,  died  last 
January  in  Winston-Salem,  age  88. 

Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  secretary,  N.  C.  Press  Association, 
assumed  publication  of  The  Morganton  News-Herald  when 
her  father,  T.  G.  Cobb,  died  in  1916.  She  established  The 
Valdese  News  in  1939. 

SHARPES  OF  LUMBERTON 

The  Lumberton  Robesonian,  established  in  1870  by  W.  S. 
McDiarmid  and  later  edited  by  his  brother,  W.  W.  McDiar 
mid,  for  many  years,  was  published  for  40  years  by  J.  A. 
Sharpe  until  his  death  in  1947.  J.  A.  Sharpe,  Jr.,  is  the 
present  editor.  An  asosciate  editor  in  its  earlier  days  was 
Hamilton  McMillan,  who  helped  get  the  Pembroke  Normal 
School  for  the  Indians  of  Robeson  County.  One  of  the  old 
est  businesses  in  Robeson  County,  The  Robesonian  has  been 
a  weekly,  semi-weekly,  tri-weekly  and  became  a  five-day 
daily  in  1940. 

J.  B.  Benton,  former  legislator,  published  The  Benson 
Review  for  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  century  until  his  deatb 
last  year.  His  daughter,  Mrs.  Margaret  B.  Smith,  continues 
the  publication. 

Duke  University  Archive  (Trinity  Archive)  is  said  to  be 
the  oldest  continuous  literary  publication  in  the  South.  In 
1943,  due  to  war  conditions,  it  was  consolidated  with  The 
Duke  and  Duchess,  humor  magazine,  but  the  two  were  sep 
arated  again  in  1945. 

Todd  Caldwell  was  connected  with  The  Moore  County 
News,  Carthage,  The  Benson  Review,  The  Kannapolis  Inde- 
pendent and  The  Dunn  Dispatch  before  establishing  The 
Independent  at  Fuquay  Springs  in  1935. 

Allen  J.  Maxwell,  late  State  Commissioner  of  Revenue  and 
candidate  for  Governor,  worked  on  The  Wilmington  Star 
around  the  turn  of  the  century  and  purchased  and  operated 
The  Columbus  News  (now  News-Reporter)  at  Whiteville 
for  several  years. 

D.  M.  Spurgeon,  publisher  of  The  Avery  Scenic  Press 
Newland,  with  Carl  D.  Osborne  as  editor  and  manager,  has 
installed  one  of  the  most  complete  and  modern  small  prinl 
shops  in  the  State.  Mr.  Spurgeon  publishes  two  other  news 
papers,  one  in  Virginia  and  one  in  Mountain  City,  Tenn. 

A.  C.  Huneycutt,  Albemarle,  established  The  Kernersville 
News  as  successor  to  The  Leader  in  1937  with  Fred  P.  Cartel 
as  managing  editor.  Soon  afterward  Mr.  Carter  purchased  anc 
has  since  published  The  News.  Mr.  Huneycutt  is  a  forme) 
president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association  but  abandoned  nub 
lishing  to  practice  law.  He  formerly  published  several  week 
ly  papers. 

The  Dunn  Dispatch,  established  in  1914  by  L,  Busbe< 
Pope,  former  legislator,  has  published  this  paper  as  a  week 
ly,  semi-weekly  and  tri-weekly.  During  the  past  four  year; 
it  has  been  published  by  his  sons,  L.  B.  Pope,  Jr.,  and  Wil 
liam  H.  Pope,  and  Hoover  Adams,  under  lease  from  th< 
owner. 

TRAINS   AD.    EXECUTIVES 

Furniture  South,  High  Point,  is  the  only  Southern  pub 
lication  devoted  to  the  important  manufacturing  and  re 
tailing  furniture  interests.  It  was  purchased  in  1947  b: 
N.  I.  Bienenstock,  publisher  of  Furniture  World.  Formei 
editors  include  Noble  T.  Praigg,  executive  secretary  of  As) 
sociated  Industries,  Inc.,  High  Point;  Harold  C.  Bennett 
president  of  Bennett,  Inc.,  High  Point,  handling  the  State': 
advertising  program;  and  C.  B.  Houck,  head  of  Houck  Ad 
vertising  Agency,  Roanoke,  Virginia. 

NEW  MOUNTAIN  RATTLER 

Game  Fowl  News,  Asheville,  devoted  to  game  chicken: 
and   circulated   over   North   America,   was   sold   recently   b; 


Winter-Spring,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  19 


R.  S.  Meroney  to  northern  interests  and  will  be  published 
elsewhere.  However,  Mr.  Meroney  has  plans  for  a  small 
unusual  publication  starting  early  this  year  to  be  known  as 
The  Mountain  Rattler,  described  as  a  non-profit  enterprise 
without  advertising,  with  no  subscription  price,  "Agin'  ev- 
erything and  everybody."  A  rattlesnake  adorns  the  mast- 
head. 

The  Southern  Pines  Pilot  is  edited  and  published  by  Mrs. 
Katharine  Boyd,  distinguished  widow  of  the  distinguished 
author,  James  Boyd.  Other  noted  former  editors  were  Bion 
H.  Butler,  Nelson  A.  Hyde  and  Carl  Thompson. 

The  Jones  County  Journal,  Trenton,  is  a  new  weekly  pub- 
lication established  in  19  49,  edited  and  published  by  Wilbur 
J.  and  Muriel  G.  Rider. 

American  Newspaper  Boy,  Winston-Salem,  is  an  unusual 
monthly  publication  established  by  Bradley  Welfare,  its 
editor  and  publisher,  in  1927.  It  is  sold  in  bulk  to  approx- 
imately 200  daily  newspapers  in  the  United  States  and  Can- 
ada and  is  distributed  free  by  them  to  their  carrier  boys. 

Asheville  News,  formerly  West  Asheville  News,  estab- 
lished in  1926  by  Oscar  Barrett  as  The  Asheville  Advocate, 
now  is  operated  by  Frederick  Severance  as  a  Republican 
newspaper.  Walter  A.  Ward  was  publisher  for  several 
years,  and  an  earlier  publisher,  Harold  Thorns,  is  now  presi- 
dent of  Radio  Station  WISE,  Asheville,  and  WAYS,  Char- 
lotte. 

The  Carolina  Quarterly,  U.N.C.  College  literary  publica- 
tion, was  established  in  1948  by  students,  as  a  successor  to 
The  Carolina  Magazine,  established  in  18  44.  Local  area 
sponsors  include  John  Sprunt  Hill,  Betty  Smith,  Paul  Green, 
Dr.  Norman  Foerster,  Josephina  Niggle,  William  M.  Prince 
and  others.  Faculty  advisers  include  Dr.  Lyman  Cotten, 
Walter  Spearman,  Charles  Eaton,  Phillips  Russell  and  Dr. 
Harry  Russell. 

CHARLOTTE  OBSERVER  LARGEST 

The  Charlotte  Observer  in  1916,  when  it  was  purchased 
by  Curtis  B.  Johnson  and  Walter  B.  Sullivan,  had  a  circulation 
of  about  13,000  daily.  Last  year  the  circulation  was  138,000 
daily  and  145,000  Sunday — the  largest  in  North  Carolina. 
James  A.  Parham  has  been  managing  editor  and  associate 
editor  for  34  years.  Mr.  Parham,  Ernest  B.  Hunter,  man- 
aging editor  since  19  41,  and  Rupert  Gillett,  both  with  the 
paper  since  1929,  form  the  editorial  board.  Former  noted 
editors  were  Joseph  P.  Caldwell,  Wade  H.  Harris  and  Dr. 
Julian  S.  Miller. 

The  Carolina  Journal  of  Pharmacy,  Chapel  Hill,  establish- 
ed in  1915  by  the  N.  C.  Pharmaceutical  Association,  was 
edited  from  its  beginning  until  1940  by  the  late  Dean  John 
Grover  Beard  and  since  that  time  by  W.  J.  Smith.  Miss 
Alice  Noble  produced  most  of  the  copy  used  for  20  years. 
1920-40. 

PROMINENT  PEOPLE  ON  N.  &  O. 

The  News  and  Observer,  Raleigh,  established  in  18  65  as 
The  Sentinel,  by  William  Pell,  has  had  many  prominent 
names  associated  with  it  since  that  time.  Josiah  Turner 
succeeded  Mr.  Pell.  The  News  was  established  in  1872  by 
Jordan  Stone  and  W.  H.  Uzzell;  The  Observer  in  1876  as  a 
successor  to  The  Sentinel.  It  became  The  News  and  Ob- 
server in  1880  with  Captain  Samuel  A.  Ashe  as  editor  and 
Fred  A.  Olds  as  assistant  editor. 

Josephus  Daniels,  who  came  to  Raleigh  from  Wilson  as 
editor  of  The  Chronicle  in  1885,  bought  The  News  and  Ob- 
server in  18  94  and  was  editor  and  publisher  until  his  death 
54  years  later  in  1948.  His  son,  Jonathan  Daniels,  has  since 
been  editor.  Other  papers  absorbed  by  The  News  and  Ob- 
server, or  dropped,  included  The  Conservative,  The  State 
Chronicle,  The  Intelligencer,  The  Farmer  and  Mechanic, 
The  North  Carolinian,  The  Daily  Call  and  The  Carolinian. 

Distinguished  people  connected  with  the  paper  were 
Leonadus  L.  Polk,  Walter  Hines  Page,  Edward  A.  Oldham, 
Hal  W.  Ayer,  Randolph  A.  Shotwell,  D.  H.  Browder,  Thomas 
R.  Jernigan,  John  Wilbur  Jenkins,  Ben  Dixon  McNeill, 
Frank  Smethurst,  John  Livingstone,  and  numerous  others. 

William  E.  Horner,  editor  and  publisher  of  The  Sanford 
Herald  for  20  years,  has  represented  his  county  in  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  and  was  twice  candidate  for  Congress.  He  is 
a  former  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association. 

SHELBY  STAR  STARS 

The  Shelby  Daily  Star  has  set  some  kind  of  a  record  for 
prominence  of  its  staff.  It  was  established  as  a  weekly 
paper  by  the  present  U.  S.  Senator  Clyde  R.  Hoey.     Its  pub- 


lisher, Lee  B.  Weathers,  has  been  State  Senator  for  four 
consecutive  terms.  Its  managing  editor,  Holt  McPherson, 
is  president  of  the  Journalism  Foundation  of  the  U.  N.  C. 
School  of  Journalism  and  a  director  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Asso- 
ciation. Its  business  manager,  Henry  Lee  Weathers,  son 
of  the  publisher,  is  president  of  the  Printing  Industry  of 
the  Carolinas,  Inc.,  (two  states).  Earlier  staff  members  have 
included  Johnny  and  Pete  McKnight;  H.  W.  Kendall,  editor, 
Greensboro  Daily  News;  O.  L.  Moore,  publisher,  Laurinburg 
Exchange;  Ben  Roberts,  Durham  banker;  Cameron  Shipp, 
noted  writer,  and  others. 

THAT  LASSITER  FAMILY 

Lassiters  have  been  connected  with  the  operation  of  The 
Smithfield  Herald  for  55  years.  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Sr.,  became 
a  partner  in  1895,  was  editor  for  25  years  until  his  death  in 
19  20.  Mrs.  Lassiter  continued  in  the  partnership.  Her  two 
sons  entered  the  plant  as  they  grew  up  and  are  now  partners 
with  their  mother.  W.  C.  Lassiter  is  Raleigh  city  attorney 
and  attorney  for  the  N.  C.  Press  Association.  T.  J.  Lassiter, 
Jr.,  editor  and  publisher,  is  a  former  president  of  the  East- 
ern N.  C.  Press  Association  and  former  instructor  in  jour- 
nalism at  Carolina. 

Mrs.  Stella  H.  Anderson,  associate  publisher  and  editor 
of  the  Skyland  Post,  West  Jefferson,  and  the  Alleghany 
News,  Sparta,  is  president  of  the  State  Federation  of  Wo- 
men's Clubs. 

Victor  Meekins,  former  sheriff  of  Dare  County,  is  pub- 
lisher of  The  Coastland  Times  at  Manteo,  The  Hyde  County 
Herald  at  Sv/an  Quarter,  and  The  Belhaven  Pilot.  Mrs. 
Meekins  was  the  daughter  of  the  late  Harry  P.  Deaton,  for 
many  years  publisher  of  The  Mooresville  Enterprise. 

The  Atlantic  Publishing  Co.,  Tabor  City,  owned  by  W. 
Horace  Carter  and  Mark  C.  Garner,  publishes  The  Tabor 
City  Tribune  and  two  South  Carolina  papers,  The  Myrtle 
Beach  Sun  and  The  Ocean  Beach  News  at  Ocean  Drive,  print- 
ing these  papers  in  the  Tabor  City  shop. 

The  Reidsville  Review  has  been  in  the  Oliver  family  since 
it  was  established  in  1888  by  R.  J.  Oliver,  Manton  Oliver  and 
John  T.  Oliver,  all  deceased.  Present  editors  of  the  second 
generation  are  C.  R.  and  W.  M.  Oliver. 

The  Rockingham  Post-Dispatch  has  been  published  since 
1917  by  Isaac  S.  London,  who  bought  and  consolidated  The 
Post,  established  in  1909,  and  The  Dispatch,  established  in 
1916,  and,  the  editor  admits,  is  still  going  strong.  Earlier 
he  published  the  Siler  City  Grit. 

The  Rocky  Mount  Telegram  was  established  in  1910  as 
The  Morning  Telegram,  but  after  four  months  shifted  to  the 
afternoon  field.  Josh  L.  Horne,  Jr.,  is  editor  and  president 
of  The  Rocky  Mount  Publishing  Co.,  owner.  The  paper 
started  on  a  seven-day  schedule  with  a  Sunday  morning 
paper  in  1949. 

NOELL  EDITOR  65  YEARS 

In  188  6  the  two  Noells,  J.  A.  and  J.  W.,  purchased  The 
Roxboro  Courier,  established  five  years  before.  J.  W.  Noell 
purchased  the  interest  of  his  brother,  John  A.  Noell,  in  1920. 
The  Roxboro  Courier  and  The  Person  County  Times  were 
consolidated  in  1944.  So  J.  W.  Noell  has  been  dishing  out 
information  to  the  Person  County  citizenship  for  64  years. 
He  has  also  represented  his  district  in  the  State  Senate. 

The  Rutherford  County  News,  established  by  R.  E.  Price 
and  associates,  celebrated  its  25th  anniversary  last  year 
and  the  fifth  year  of  the  full  ownership  by  Mr.  Price.  He 
served  as  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association  for  the 
year  1949-50. 

J.  F.  Hurley,  who  established  The  Concord  Tribune  in 
1900  and  sold  it  to  John  B.  Sherrill  ten  years  later,  pur- 
chased The  Salisbury  Post  and  was  editor  and  publisher 
until  his  death  in  1936.  Since  that  time  his  son,  J.  F.  Hur- 
ley, Jr.,  has  been  publisher  and  Spencer  Murphy  has  been 
editor. 

WHEREVER  THE  SUN  SHINES 

The  Sanatorium  Sun,  published  monthly  by  the  Extension 
Department  of  North  Carolina  Sanatorium  and  devoted  to 
tuberculosis  and  health,  has  subscribers  in  Ireland,  Europe, 
Canada,  South  America,  Mexico,  China  and  Hawaii,  in  addi- 
tion to  many  of  the  United  States. 

John  M.  Gibson,  former  editor,  is  director  of  the  Division 
of  Public  Health  Education  in  Alabama  and  author  of  "Phy- 
sician to  the  World:  The  Life  of  General  William  C.  Gor- 
gas,"  published  by  Duke  University  Press  last  November. 

North  Carolina  Law  Review,  Chapel  Hill,  published  quar- 
terly by  the  University  School  of  Law,   was  established  in 


PAGE  20 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


1923  by  Dean  Maurice  T.  VanHeck,  who  was  its  first  editor. 
Since  193  9  it  has  been  edited  by  top  ranking  law  students 
with  faculty  advice. 

GOLF  WORLD  GOES  PLACES 

Golf  World,  weekly,  established  in  1947  by  Robert  E. 
Harlow  at  Pinehurst,  has  a  circulation  of  more  than  7,000 
copies  going  to  leading  golf  players  in  every  state  and  more 
than  30  foreign  nations  and  territories.  This  year  the  pub- 
lication will  go  on  news  stands  for  the  first  time.  Mr.  Har- 
low, publisher  of  The  Pinehurst  Outlook  for  15  years,  sold 
that  paper  and  plant  last  year  to  devote  full  time  to  Golf 
World,  setting  up  a  new  plant  to  print  it.  He  was  former 
manager  for  Walter  Hagen,  nationally  known  golfer,  and 
worked  for  newspapers  and  news  agencies  for  several  years 
and  has  been  publicity  man  for  Pinehurst,  Inc. 

Gordon  H.  Greenwood,  editor  of  The  Black  Mountain 
News,  is  a  graduate  of  the  University  of  Illinois  School  of 
Journalism  and  was  formerly  with  The  Champaign  (111.) 
News-Gazette.  He  was  a  psychologist  with  96th  General 
Hospital  in  the  European  Theatre  in  World  War  II. 

NEWS  FOR  WALDENSIANS 

The  Valdese  News,  published  by  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb  and 
edited  by  Richard  H.  Byrd,  is  the  semi-official  publication 
of  the  Waldensian  people  who  migrated  from  the  Cotian 
Alps  (Italy)  in  1893  and  formed  the  settlement  at  Valdese. 
The  Valdese  News  is  probably  one  of  the  most  localized 
papers  in  the  State,  devoted  almost  entirely  to  the  interests 
of  the  Waldensian  community  it  serves.  A  former  editor, 
Marcel  Tron,  was  a  native  Waldensian  and  the  paper  is 
replete  with  Waldensian  names  and  reflects  the  native  ways, 
manners  and  thoughts  of  the  Waldensian  people. 

Alfred  E.  Whitmore,  who  published  the  Williamston  En- 
terprise for  18  years  around  the  turn  of  the  century,  and 
who  brought  the  first  two-revolution  flatbed  printing  press 
to  Martin  County,  patented  the  coupon  book  system  for 
charge  accounts.     He  died  not  long  ago  in  Virginia. 

The  Mr.  Dail  who  established  the  Williamston  Enterprise 
in  1889  is  said  to  have  cut  the  masthead  of  the  paper  out 
of  a  piece  of  hardwood. 

The  composing  stone  used  in  publishing  The  Outlook  at 
Yadkinville,  started  in  1886  by  a  Mr.  Henry  and  later  sus- 
pended, was  made  into  a  headstone,  properly  engraved,  and 
still  marks  the  grave  of  Mrs.  Spencer,  a  cultured  woman,  in 
the  Yadkinville  cemetery. 

OUR  "MOTHER  OF  THE  YEAR" 

Mrs.  E.  F.  McCulloch,  editor  of  The  Bladen  Journal,  Eliza- 
bethtown,  last  year  was  selected  as  "Mother  of  the  Year" 
by  the  Golden  Rule  Foundation  on  recommendation  of  a 
State  committee,  of  which  Mrs.  Stella  H.  Anderson,  editor 
of  The  Skyland  Post,  West  Jefferson,  and  president  of  the 
State  Federation  of  Women's  Clubs,  was  chairman. 

Edward  J.  Hale,  publisher  of  The  Fayetteville  Observer, 
the  State's  oldest  newspaper,  served  as  Ambassador  to  one 
of  the  South  American  countries  for  several  years  around 
the  turn  of  the  century. 

Weimar  Jones,  publisher  of  The  Franklin  Press,  was 
State  director  of  the  Office  of  War  Information  for  a  year 
or  two  during  World  War  II.  Previously  he  had  been  on 
The  Asheville  Citizen  for  18  years. 

Robert  L.  Gray,  Jr.,  for  several  years  editor  of  The  Fay- 
etteville Observer,  is  now  in  service  in  the  Korean  area.  He 
also  served  in  World  War  II. 

The  Weekly  Southerner,  Tarboro,  is  described  in  "Non- 
nulla,"  a  book  written  in  1930  by  Bishop  J.  B.  Cheshire  and 
published  by  Edwards  and  Broughton,  Raleigh. 

W.  J.  McMurray,  publisher  of  Racing  Form  for  many 
years,  purchased  The  Durham  Sun  and  The  Fayetteville 
Observer  in  19  23  for  his  son-in-law.  Soon  after  the  pur- 
chases the  son-in-law  was  killed  in  an  accident. 

BIG  BOYS  ON  THE  DISPATCH 

The  Lexington  Dispatch  has  been  owned,  edited,  pub- 
lished and  written  for  by  many  prominent  citizens.  T.  V. 
Eldridge,  who  established  it,  was  later  mayor  of  Raleigh. 
H.  B.  Varner,  its  publisher  for  many  years,  also  published 
a  magazine,  "Good  Roads,"  and  served  as  State  Commis- 
sioner of  Labor  and  Printing  for  two  years.  Col.  A.  L. 
Fletcher,  Raleigh;  S.  R.  Winters,  later  radio  special  writer, 
Washington,  and  George  B.  Cochran  were  editors.  Gerald 
Johnson,  noted  author,  was  a  reporter.  E.  E.  Witherspoon 
has  been  editor  for  some  3  5  years.      Fred  O.   Sink  and  his 


sons  have  been  publishers  for  more  than  30  years. 

The  name  Myrover  has  long  been  associated  with  The 
Fayetteville  Observer.  John  R.  Myrover  and  George  G. 
Myrover,  Sr.,  were  publishers  before  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury.    George  G.  Myrover,  Jr.,  is  now  managing  editor. 

Parker  Brothers,  J.  Roy,  former  UNC  Journalism  pro- 
fessor, and  Mayon,  perennial  secretary  of  the  Eastern  N.  C. 
Press  Association,  operates  one  of  the  real  modern  news- 
paper and  printing  plants  in  the  State  at  Ahoskie.  Here  are 
printed  their  four  weekly  papers:  Hertford  County  Herald, 
Ahoskie;  Bertie  Ledger-Advance,  Windsor;  Northampton 
County  News,  Jackson,  and  Gates  Index,  Gatesville;  also 
the  North  Carolina  Farm  Bureau  News,  for  N.  C.  Farm 
Bureau,  and  a  lot  of  commercial  job  printing. 

Thomas  Wolfe,  author  of  "Look  Homeward,  Angel",  etc., 
was  editor  of  the  Daily  Tar  Heel  at  Chapel  Hill  while  a 
student  there.  So  was  Orville  Campbell,  owner  of  the 
Colonial  Press,  who  has  written  several  songs,  including 
"All  the  Way,  Choo  Choo"  (Charlie  Justice).  Rolfe  Neill 
is  managing  editor. 

The  1300  issues  of  the  UNC  News  Letter  constitute  the 
greatest  body  of  knowledge  about  North  Carolina  to  be 
found  in  any  State  in  the  Union,  Dr.  S.  H.  Hobbs,  Jr.,  editor, 
believes.    It  goes  to  about  11,000  persons  fortnightly. 

LOUIS  GRAVES  AND  WEEKLY 

Louis  Graves,  Chapel  Hill  native,  for  a  number  of  years  a 
successful  reporter  on  some  of  the  larger  New  York  news- 
papers, returned  home  around  19  20  and  after  a  few  years 
as  head  of  the  Journalism  Department  of  the  University, 
started  the  Chapel  Hill  Weekly  March  1,  192"3. 

The  Weekly,  a  folksy,  down-to-earth  community  sheet,  is, 
as  the  New  York  Times  once  said:  "unique  in  American 
journalism".  The  New  York  Herald-Tribune  said:  "What 
this  country  needs  is  more  papers  like  the  Chapel  Hill 
Weekly".  Louis  Graves  decided  not  to  wear  himself  out  in 
New  York  reporting  and  editing,  but  gets  a  whale  of  a  kick 
out  of  his  Weekly — as  do  all  of  his  many  readers. 

David  Clark,  Charlotte,  editor  and  publisher  of  the  Tex- 
tile Bulletin,  also  publishes  The  Knitter,  and  the  Clark- 
Smith  Publishing  Co.  publishes  Southern  Hospitals  and 
Southern  Optometrist. 

Bill  Arp  Lowrance,  Charlotte,  editor  and  publisher  of  the 
Mecklenburg  Times,  is  also  publisher  of  the  Belmont  Banner 
and  the  Mount  Holly  News,  both  edited  by  Bill  Barrett. 

SOUTHERN  MEDICINE  AND  SURGERY 

Southern  Medicine  and  Surgery,  Charlotte,  established  in 
18  56  by  the  N.  C.  Medical  Society  as  the  North  Carolina 
Medical  Journal,  is  probably  the  oldest  such  organ  in  the 
State.  It  absorbed  the  Wilmington  Medical  Journal  and 
the  Charlotte  Medical  Journal  along  the  way.  For  the  past 
30  years  it  has  been  the  official  journal  of  the  Tri-State 
Medical  Association  of  the  Carolinas  and  Virginia,  during 
which  period  Dr.  J.  M.  Northington  has  been  editor  and 
publisher. 

Former  editors  have  been  Dr.  Thomas  F.  Wood,  Dr.  Rob-i 
ert  Jewett,  Dr.  W.  H.  Wakefield,  Dr.  E.  C.  Register,  Dr.  J.| 
C.  Montgomery  and  Dr.  M.  L.  Townsend;  and  Department 
Editors:  Dr.  E.  J.  Wood,  Dr.  J.  K.  Hall,  Dr.  H.  J.  Crowell, 
Dr.  Wingate  M.  Johnson,  Dr.  Hubert  A.  Royster,  Dr.  Robert! 
F.  Lafferty,  Dr.  Paul  Ringer,  Dr.  William  Allan,  Dr.  O.  L. 
Miller,  Dr.  C.  C.  Orr. 

The  Cherry ville  Eagle  has  been  in  the  same  family  45 
years,  L.  H.  J.  Houser,  editor  and  publisher  until  his  death, 
and  then  his  son,  Fred  K.  Houser. 

The  Caucasian,  edited  by  Marion  Butler,  later  U.  S.  Sena- 
tor, was  a  noted  paper  published  in  Clinton  many  years  ago. 
It  later  moved  to  Raleigh  and  was  suspended. 

The  Sampson  Independent,  Clinton,  has  been  published 
by  F.  Grover  Britt  for  around  a  quarter  of  a  century.  O.  J. 
Peterson,  long  well-known  newspaper  man,  and  L.  A.  Be- 
thune  were  former  editors. 

The  Concord  Tribune  was  established  50  years  ago  by 
J.  P.  Hurley,  who  later  established  The  Salisbury  Post.  In 
1910  The  Tribune  was  acquired  by  J.  B.  Sherrill,  for  32 
years  secretary-treasurer  and  for  two  years  president  of  the 
N.  C.  Press  Association,  who  published  it  until  his  death 
His  son,  William  M.  Sherrill,  was  editor  for  several  years 
A.  W.  Huckle,  a  South  Carolina  publisher,  but  well-known 
to  N.  C.  newspaper  folk,  is  now  publisher. 

The  Danbury  Reporter,  established  78  years  ago  by  Dr 
John  Pepper,  is  now  in  its  fourth  generation  of  Peppers 
never  having  missed  an  issue.     N.  E.  Pepper,  long  publisher 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  21 


and  E.  Vance  Pepper,  are  editors  and  publishers  now. 

The  Durham  Sun,  established  in  1889  by  James  Robin- 
son, was  consolidated  in  1929  with  the  Durham  Herald, 
established  in  18  94  by  E.  T.  Rollins,  long  its  publisher,  and 
J.  H.  King.  Carl  C.  Council,  a  former  carrier  boy,  is  presi- 
dent of  the  company  and  Steed  Rollins  is  vice-president  and 
executive  editor. 

The  South  Atlantic  Quarterly,  literary  and  historical, 
established  in  190  2  at  Trinity  College  (Duke  University), 
has  had  some  distinguished  editors,  including  John  Spencer 
Bassett,  Dr.  Edwin  Mims,  Dr.  W.  P.  Few,  Dr.  W.  H.  Gleason, 
Dr.  W.  K.  Boyd,  Dr.  W.  H.  Wannamaker,  Henry  R.  Dwire, 
and  for  many  years  now,  Dr.  W.  T.  Laprade. 

The  Elizabeth  City  Independent,  made  famous  years  ago 
by  the  colorful  W.  O.  Saunders,  was  published  as  a  weekly, 
semi-weekly  and  as  a  morning  daily  (in  1948-49)  by  George 
W.  Haskett.  It  was  sold  by  his  son,  W.  F.  Haskett,  UNC 
Journalism  graduate,  who  started  the  Albemarle  Star  in  its 
place  in  April,  1950.  About  six  months  later  Mr.  Haskett 
joined  the  armed  forces  and  A.  J.  and  Maud  McCleland  are 
general  manager  and  editor,  respectively  . 

ED  ANDERSON  PAPERS 

Ed  M.  Anderson,  former  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  As- 
sociation, is  publisher  of  five  weekly  newspapers  in  the 
mountain  area.  These  include  Transylvania  Times,  Brevard, 
with  John  Anderson  in  charge;  Forest  City  Courier  and 
Spindale  Sun,  Clarence  Griffin  editor  and  general  manager, 
and  the  Skyland  Post,  West  Jefferson,  and  the  Alleghany 
News,  Sparta,  Mrs.  Ed  Anderson,  associate  publisher  and 
editor. 

Associates  of  Col.  Joseph  E.  Robinson  in  founding  the 
Goldsboro  Argus  in  1885  were  Charles  B.  Aycock,  later 
Governor,  and  B.  W.  Nash.  Col.  John  D.  Langston  and 
associates  founded  the  Goldsboro  News  in  1922,  consolidated 
with  The  Argus  to  form  The  News-Argus  in  19  29  by  Talbot 
Patrick,  publisher. 

The  Henderson  Gold  Leaf,  weekly,  established  in  1881 
by  Thad  R.  Manning,  deceased,  was  published  for  many 
years  by  the  Henderson  Dispatch  Co.,  Henry  Dennis,  editor, 
has  been  suspended,  at  least  temporarily. 

The  Hendersonville  Time-News  is  the  successor  to  all 
papers  published  in  that  city  for  the  past  75  or  80  years. 
Specifically,  it  was  a  consolidation  of  The  Times  and  The 
News,  weeklies,  semi-weeklies  and  then  dailies,  consolidated 
in  1926  by  J.  T.  Fain,  still  editor.  A  newer  weekly  is  The 
Western  Carolina  Tribune,  published  by  Noah  Hollowell. 

Capus  M.  Waynick,  now  ambassador  to  Nicaragua,  former 
chairman  of  the  State  Highway  Commission  and  first  acting 
director  of  President  Truman's  Point  Four  Program,  is  a 
former  editor  of  the  High  Point  Enterprise,  established  in 
1885  and  becoming  a  daily  in  1905. 

The  Daily  Independent,  Kannapolis  in  a  modern  home 
and  with  50  employees,  was  started  in  19  27  by  James  L. 
Moore,  present  publisher,  with  an  investment  of  $37.50  on 
credit — for  a  typewriter.     It  became  a  daily  in  1938. 

The  Kinston  Daily  Free  Press  was  established  in  1882  as  a 
weekly  by  the  late  Josephus  Daniels  and  his  brother,  Charles 
C.  Daniels,  and  was  issued  from  Wilson  for  a  short  time. 
H.  Gait  Braxton,  a  former  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  As- 
sociation, has  been  editor  and  publisher  since  1914.  It 
became  a  daily  with  the  start  of  the  Spanish-American  War 
in  1898.     (C.  C.  Daniels,  86,  died  March  20,  1951.) 

Archibald  Johnson,  for  many  years  noted  editor  of  Char- 
ity and  Children,  Baptist  Orphanage  paper  and  father  of 
Gerald  Johnson,  widely  known  writer  and  author,  was 
editor  of  The  Laurinburg  Exchange  before  the  turn  of  the 
century,  while  it  was  owned  by  R.  D.  Phillips,  father  of 
Judge  Donald  Phillips,  Rockingham.  O.  L.  Moore,  several 
times  legislator,  has  been  editor  and  publisher  since  1919. 

LEAKSVILLE  NEWS  CARRIERS 

The  Leaksville  News,  published  and  edited  by  J.  S.  and 
Richard  Robertson,  for  the  textile  communities  of  Leaks- 
ville-Spray-Draper  and  environs,  is  delivered  primarily  by 
carrier  boy,  plus  newsstand  sales,  with  a  portion  by  mail, 
of  the  4,500  copies  weekly.  The  News  is  printed  in  a  mod- 
ern new  plant  with  an  up-to-date  print  shop,  which  also 
prints  three  periodicals:  The  Mill  Whistle,  each  two  weeks, 
house  organ  of  Fieldcrest  Mills;  Cub  Reporter,  monthly,  for 
Leaksville  High  School;  The  Tattler,  monthly,  for  Draper 
High  School. 

The  Harnett  County  News,  Lillington,  has  gone  serenely 
on  under  the  direction   of  Henderson   Steele  for   31   years 


while  numbers  of  publications  started,  flourished  and  folded. 
His  son,  Frank  Steele,  joined  him  as  co-publisher  in  1947. 

George  S.  Baker,  founder  of  the  Louisburg  Courier  (now 
Franklin  Times)  in  18  70,  was  a  charter  member  of  the 
N.  C.  Press  Association  in  1873.  J.  A.  Thomas  operated 
from  1875  to  1910,  and  40  years  ago  A.  F.  Johnson  took 
over  and  is  still  going  strong.  His  son,  A.  F.  Johnson,  Jr., 
a  UNC  School  of  Journalism  product,  joined  him  recently, 
but  is  back  in  the  U.  S.  Navy  now. 

The  Madison  Messenger  is  operated  by  an  experienced 
crew.  Russell  M.  Spear,  native  of  Amherst,  Mass.,  graduate 
of  Amherst  College,  19  27,  in  advertising  work  in  Chicago, 
and  wife,  Marion  A.  Spear,  Univ.  of  Chicago  product  and 
daughter  of  Sherwood  Anderson,  noted  novelist,  bought  the 
paper  in  1934.  Charles  E.  Brown,  native  Madisonian,  10 
years  with  Burlington  Times-News,  joined  the  partnership 
in  1947. 

The  Marshville  Home  (then  Our  Home)  was  established 
in  1892  by  J.  Z.  Greene,  who  was  a  prominent  farm  organ- 
ization leader  after  the  turn  of  the  century.  L.  E.  Huggins 
joined  Greene  in  its  early  days  and  continued  publication 
for  many  years.  In  1948  George  W.  Downes  and  Don  L. 
Garver  bought  the  plant  and  the  next  year  incorporated, 
bringing  Mr.  Huggins  out  of  retirement  as  an  active  official. 
A  modern  printing  plant  was  installed  in  1950.  The  paper 
operates  a  photographic  department. 

Charles  S.  Parnell,  long  secretary  of  the  Six-County  Fair, 
Mebane,  published  The  Mebane  Enterprise  16  years  or  more, 
until  his  death  in  1938.  His  widow,  Mrs.  Lottie  Parnell, 
has  continued  publication.  Their  son,  C.  L.  Parnell,  was 
editor  for  about  four  years. 

Members  of  the  Ashcraft  family  have  been  publishers  and 
associates  in  publication  of  The  Monroe  Enquirer,  estab- 
lished in  18  7  2  by  W.  C.  Wolfe  and  later  published  by  J.  W. 
Boylin,  since  1903,  when  B.  C.  and  Eugene  Ashcraft  pur- 
chased the  paper.  Eugene's  son,  John  B.  Ashcraft,  is  now 
editor.     It  has  been  a  semi-weekly  for  many  years. 

George  M.  and  Roland  F.  Beasley,  brothers,  have  been 
publishing  The  Monroe  Journal  since  they  founded  it  in 
1894,  nearly  all  of  the  time  as  a  semi-weekly.  Roland  is 
editor  and  George  is  Publisher.  R.  F.  Beasley,  Jr.,  is  with 
The  Journal,  while  two  sons  of  George  are  publishers,  G.  M., 
Jr.,  of  the  Montgomery  Herald,  and  John  Beasley,  of  the 
Moore  County  News,  Carthage.  John  was  the  first  State 
Commander  of  The  American  Legion. 

The  Mount  Airy  News,  established  by  T.  J.  Lowery  in 
1880,  has  been  operated  by  Johnsons  since  1904,  when  J.  E. 
Johnson  and  son,  Wm.  M.  Johnson,  purchased  the  paper. 
W.  M.  Johnson,  managing  editor  and  James  E.  Johnson, 
advertising  manager,  have  been  associated  with  their  father 
for  many  years. 

The  late  Homer  Brock  published  the  Mount  Olive  Tribune 
for  about  34  years,  until  his  death  in  1949.  Since  then 
Mrs.  Brock  has  been  publisher;  Cletus  Brock  editor  and 
Elmer  Brock  business  manager.  It  is  the  only  paper  in  the 
State  operating  its  own  home-made  photoengraving  plant 
and  makes  engravings  for  some  25  eastern  N.  C.  weekly 
and  daily  papers. 

The  Pinehurst  Outlook,  weekly  but  seasonal  daily,  pub- 
lished by  Robert  E.  Harlow  for  a  long  time,  is  now  owned 
by  three  brothers,  Paul,  Joseph  and  Thomas  Wilson.  Har- 
low now  edits  and  publishes  The  Golf  World,  printed  in 
Pinehurst  and  circulated  internationally.  Thomas  Wilson, 
UNC  journalism  product,  is  editor  and  publisher  of  the  Nash- 
ville Graphic,  established  by  M.  W.  Lincke  in  189  5  and 
published  by  him  and  members  of  his  family  many  years. 

PETTICOAT  PUBLISHERS 

Three  women  have  been  handling  for  several  years  the 
business  and  editorial  end  of  the  Catawba  News-Enterprise, 
published  as  The  Newton  Enterprise  and  consolidated  with 
the  Catawba  County  News  in  1919  by  Charles  H.  Mebane, 
father  of  the  two  co-publishers,  Mrs.  Evelyn  Mebane  Odum 
and  Mrs.  lone  Mebane  Mann.  Mrs.  Helen  Ross,  on  the  staff, 
prominent  in  State  YDC  politics,  joined  the  staff  of  Senator 
Willis  Smith  in  Washington  recently.  G.  Weaver  Mann, 
husband  of  Mrs.  Mann,  was  editor  for  16  or  more  years,  un- 
til his  death  in  194  6. 

CHARLES  H.  MEBANE  VERSATILE 

Charles  H.  Mebane  (1862-1926),  editor  and  publisher  of 
the  Catawba  News-Enterprise  for  2'2  years,  was  probably 
one  of  the  most  versatile  of  editors  in  the  State's  history. 
Graduating  from  Catawba  College  and  UNC  Law  School,  Mr. 


PAGE  22 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


Mebane  was  a  teacher,  State  Supt.  of  Schools  (1896-1900), 
president  of  Catawba  College  (1900-04),  supt.,  Catawba 
County  Schools,  editor  Greensboro  Patriot,  Catawba  County 
News,  Catawba  News-Enterprise,  trustee  of  WC  of  UNC  for 
30  years,  judge  of  Catawba  County  Recorder's  Court,  State 
director  of  prohibition  drive,  etc.,  etc.  His  son,  C.  H.  Meb- 
ane, Jr.,  succeeded  him,  but  later  established  in  193  3  the 
Newton  Observer,  which  he  has  since  edited  and  published. 

NINE  ASSOCIATION  SECRETARIES 

The  N.  C.  Press  Association  has  had  only  nine  secretaries 
in  the  78  years  since  it  was  organized  in  1873  in  Goldsboro. 
Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  Morganton,  is  about  to  overtake  the 
record  made  by  J.  A.  Sherrill,  Concord,  who  served  3  2 
years.  Miss  Cobb  is  serving  her  30th  year.  In  between 
their  services,  Edwin  B.  Jeffress,  Greensboro,  served  one 
year,   1920-21. 

First  secretary  was  Julius  A.  Bonitz,  Goldsboro,  who 
with  John  Spelman,  Raleigh,  were  appointed  secretaries  at 
the  organization  meeting.  Mr.  Bonitz  was  elected  recording 
secretary  and  William  S.  Ball,  Greensboro,  was  elected  cor- 
responding secretary  for  the  first  year.  Then  Major  R.  T. 
Fulghum,  Goldsboro,  served  three  years;  Wm.  A.  Davis, 
Oxford,  served  two  years;  Jordan  Stone,  Raleigh,  served  five 
years;  J.  A.  Robinson,  Winston,  served  one  year,  and  J.  H. 
Lindsay,  Kernersville,  served  three  years,  until  Mr.  Sherrill's 
3  2-year  span  began  in  18  88. 

ASSOCIATION  PRESIDENTS 

In  its  beginning  years  the  N.  C.  Press  Association  followed 
a  plan  of  re-electing  a  president  to  another  term,  but  that 
has  not  happened  but  twice  since  the  turn  of  the  century. 
The  organization  meeting,  12  o'clock,  May  14,  1873,  in  the 
Court  House,  Goldsboro,  was  called  to  order  by  William 
Biggs,  Tarboro.  Major  Joseph  A.  Englehard,  Wilmington, 
was  called  to  the  chair,  elected  president.  He  was  re-elected 
for  a  second  term.  Col.  John  D.  Cameron,  Hillsboro,  was 
elected  for  two  years,  as  were  Col.  W.  L.  Saunders,  Raleigh, 
and  Dorsey  Battle,  Tarboro.  Then,  in  1881  presidents 
served  only  one  year.  J.  A.  Thomas,  Louisburg,  was  elected 
president  in  1891  and  again  in  1908.  H.  B.  Varner,  Lexing- 
ton, was  elected  in  1903  and  succeeded  himself.  The  last 
time  that  happened  was  in  1921  and  19  22,  when  J.  B.  Sher- 
rill, Concord,  secretary  for  3  2  years,  was  elected  and  re- 
elected to  succeed  himself  as  president. 

THREE  KITCHIN  CONGRESSMEN 

Two  very  prominent  North  Carolina  families  were  editors 
and  publishers  of  The  Scotland  Neck  Commonwealth  for 
many  years  before  Eric  W.  Rodgers  became  publisher  15  or 
18  years  ago.  W.  H.  Kitchin  was  its  founder  and  a  mem- 
ber of  Congress.  Two  of  his  sons  who  worked  on  the  paper, 
W.  W.  Kitchin  and  Claude  Kitchin,  were  also  members  of 
Congress.  Claude  was  chairman  of  the  House  Ways  and 
Means  Committee  during  World  War  I.  W.  W.  Kitchin  was 
also   Governor  of  North   Carolina.      Later,   members   of  the 


Madry  family  edited  and  published  The  Commonwealth. 
J.  T.  Madry  was  editor.  Robert  W.  Madry,  news  director  at 
the  State  University,  got  his  basic  training  in  The  Common- 
wealth office.  Norfleet  Smith  was  publisher  of  The  Com- 
monwealth for  a  decade  or  more  between  the  periods  rep- 
resented by  operation  by  the  Kitchin  and   Madry  families. 

Carl  O.  Jeffress,  son  of  the  principal  owner  of  the  Greens- 
boro Daily  News  and  the  Greensboro  Record,  E.  B.  Jeffress, 
became  general  manager  of  these  newspapers  January  1, 
succeeding  P.  T.  Hines,  resigned,  but  retained  as  consultant. 

William  K.  Hoyt,  with  the  Winston-Salem  Journal  and 
later  the  Twin  City  Sentinel  for  2  5  years,  has  been  named 
publisher  of  these  newspapers  by  the  directors  of  the  Pied- 
mont Publishing  Co.  He  succeeds  Gordon  Gray,  former 
secretary  of  the  Army,  now  president  of  the  Consolidated 
University  of  North  Carolina. 

The  Gastonia  Gazette  observed  two  70th  anniversaries 
October  17,  last,  with  a  big  special  edition.  One  was  the 
7  0th  anniversary  of  the  founding  of  the  paper;  the  other 
the  70th  anniversary  of  the  birth  of  the  publisher,  J.  W. 
Atkins.  Mr.  Atkins  relinquished  active  duties  on  the  paper 
to  his  two  sons,  Ben  and  Stewart  Atkins. 

Renn  B.  Pharr,  71,  co-publisher  with  his  brother,  W.  E. 
Pharr,  of  the  North  Wilkesboro  Hustler  for  45  years,  died 
in  the  Wilkes  Hospital  in  North  Wilkesboro  October  20, 
1950. 

In  the  November,  19  50,  issue  of  The  North  Carolina  Press, 
issued  monthly  by  the  N.  C.  Press  Association,  Miss  Beatrice 
Cobb,  secretary-treasurer,  announced  that  the  Association 
then  had  a  100%  membership  of  all  daily  newspapers  in  the 
State  and  a  high  percentage  of  those  in  the  weekly  field. 

NEW  DUNN  DAILY  RECORD 

The  Daily  Record  of  Dunn  made  its  official  appearance 
as  a  new  daily  newspaper  January  1,  with  Hoover  Adams, 
veteran  Dunn  newspaper  man,  as  editor.  Adams,  native  of 
Dunn,  has  been  reporter,  editor  and  co-publisher  of  the  Dunn 
Dispatch  from  youth,  except  for  intervals  of  military  and 
public  relations  work.  The  first  issue  of  the  five-day  paper, 
Mondays  through  Fridays,  was  actually  issued  December 
6,  last. 

OBSERVER   EMPLOYEES   BENEFICIARIES 

Following  the  death  of  Curtis  B.  Johnson,  publisher  and 
principal  stockholder  of  The  Charlotte  Observer,  last  fall, 
his  interests  were  left  to  his  widow,  with  provision  for  them 
to  go  to  nephews  and  nieces  later.  He  left  $5,000  to  each 
of  several  heads  of  departments;  $1,000  to  each  employee 
of  20  years  or  more,  and  $100  to  those  with  10  years  or 
more  of  service.  Mr.  Johnson  owned  51V2%  of  the  stock, 
the  remainder  belonging  to  the  estate  of  Walter  B.  Sullivan, 
his  partner  in  the  purchase  of  The  Observer  some  3  5  years 
ago. 

G.  E.  Isaacs,  Durham  publisher,  also  publishes  The  Frank- 
lin Post,  Franklinton,  and  The  Times,  at  Hillsboro. 


N.  C.  Has  41  Daily  Newspapers;  7  Morning;  34  Afternoon 


North  Carolina  now  boasts  of  41  daily  newspapers, 
seven  morning  and  34  afternoon  or  evening  news- 
papers. The  seven  morning  newspapers  have  Sun- 
day morning  editions,  while  five  of  the  afternoon 
papers  also  issue  Sunday  morning  papers.  After- 
noon papers  are  published  in  all  of  the  cities  in  which 
morning  newspapers  appear,  and  in  six  cities  the 
morning  and  afternoon  papers  are  owned  by  the 
same  firms.  The  exceptions  are  in  Charlotte  and 
Raleigh,  in  which  the  afternoon  papers  are  owned 
by  separate  firms. 

(NR)  means  that  no  definite  information  was  re- 
ceived direct  from  editors  or  publishers  in  the  list 
of  daily  papers,  with  accompanying  data,  as  follows : 

AHOSKIE — Daily  Roanoke-Chowan  News,  published  eve- 
nings except  Saturday  and  Monday.     Non-partisan.     Estab- 


lished 1944,  by  The  Daily  News  Co.;   F.  Roy  Johnson,  pub- 
lisher. 

This  paper  was  published  for  several  years  as  a  weekly 
and  not  long  ago  became  a  small-size  daily.  It  is  published 
in  connection  with  The  Northeastern  Carolina  News,  Mur- 
freesboro.      (NR) 

ASHEVILLE — Asheville  Citizen,  published  Mornings, 
Independent  Democratic,  Established  1870  by  Randolph  A. 
Shotwell;   Don  C.  Shoemaker,  Editor. 

Asheville  Times,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday,  In- 
dependent Democratic,  Established  18  96,  by  J.  M.  and  Fred 
A.  Johnson  and  James  E.  Norton;  W.  S.  Adams,  Editor. 

Citizen-Times,  published  Sunday,  Established  1930;  C.  K. 
Robinson,  Editor. 

All  three  published  by  Asheville  Citizen-Times  Co. 

Former  publishers  and  editors  of  The  Citizen  include 
Captain  Nat  Atkinson,  Robert  M.  Furman,  Colonel  John  D. 
Cameron,  Captain  Thomas  W.  Patton,  W.  F.  Randolph,  John 
P.  Kerr,  Frank  E.  Robinson,  Julius  C.  Martin,  James  H. 
Caine,  Robert  S.  Jones,  Robert  Lathan,  George  Stephens 
and  Charles  A.  Webb. 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  23 


SEVERAL  PAPERS  FAILED  TO  GIVE 

DATA  REQUESTED  AFTER  THIRD  PLEA 

As  a  preliminary  move  toward  getting  as  complete  in- 
formation as  possible  from  all  newspapers  and  periodicals 
in  North  Carolina  for  this  issue,  letters  were  sent  November 
3  to  all  publications  of  which  the  editor  had  knowledge,  in- 
cluding all  listed  in  Ayer's  Newspaper  Directory  for  North 
Carolina  and  any  others  heard  about.  Accompanying  these 
letters  were  blanks  which  gave  the  data  included  in  the  1950 
Ayer's  and  indicating  the  types  of  data  desired  for  this 
issue.     Probably  between  40  and  50  percent  responded. 

A  second  letter  and  plea  for  response  was  sent  out  De- 
cember 1,  also  containing  another  blank.  Another  10  or  15 
percent  responded.  Then,  on  December  29  a  third  letter 
— a  begging  letter — was  sent  out  to  all  who  had  not  re- 
sponded. Another  small  batch  of  responses  followed  this 
request.  The  editor  then  attended  the  Press  Institute  Jan- 
uary 18-19  and  secured  information  on  a  few  other  papers. 

As  a  result  of  lack  of  responses,  a  check  shows  that  ap- 
proximately 65  newspapers  and  periodicals  did  not  supply 
information,  including  approximately  six  dailies,  two  semi- 
weeklies,  35  weeklies  and  22  other  types  of  periodicals, 
trade,  college,  etc.  Data  is  being  given  on  these  publica- 
tions, but  is  limited  to  that  supplied  by  Ayer's,  or  that  and 
such  other  information  as  was  known  to  the  editor  or  secured 
from  other  sources. 

Therefore,  data  used  on  the  publications  may  not  be  accu- 
rate. Some  of  them  may  have  stopped  publication — Press 
Institute  checking  resulted  in  finding  two  such — and  there 
may  be  others.  Papers  may  have  changed  hands,  names 
may  have  changed,  editors  or  publishers  may  have  changed. 
The  information  given  is  complete,  as  far  as  the  editor 
could  learn. 

(NR)  was  adopted  as  a  symbol  and  placed  at  the  end  of 
the  information,  indicating  that  direct  information  was  not 
received  from  the  editors  or  publishers.  This  is  not  to  "show 
up"  those  who  failed  to  respond,  but  to  indicate  that  such 
information  may  not  be  entirely  accurate.  And,  to  the 
extent  of  these  failures  to  respond,  this  issue  is  not  as  com- 
plete and  as  accurate  as  hoped  and  desired. 


Former  publishers  and  editors  of  The  Times,  started  as 
The  Gazette,  consolidated  with  The  News  in  190  3  and  chang- 
ed to  The  Times  in  1916,  include  George  L.  Hackney,  Walter 
A.  Hildebrand,  Charles  A.  Webb,  Charles  J.  Harris,  D.  Hiden 
Ramsey,  P.  M.  Burdette  and  Gray  Gorham,  who  sold  it  in 
192'5  to  Don  S.  Elias. 

The   Citizen   and   Times   were   consolidated   by   publishers 

Charles  A.  Webb  and  Don  S.  Elias  in   1930.      Don  Elias  is 

president;    D.    Hiden    Ramsey,    vice-president    and    general 

manager;   W.   Randall  Harris,  treasurer  and  assistant  gen- 

ral  manager,  and  Claude  S.  Ramsey,  executive  news  editor. 


Ittractive  glass-brick  and  concrete  home  of  The  Asheville 
Htizen,  The  Asheville  Times,  the  Sunday  Citizen-Times,  The 
Engraving  Plant  and  Radio  Station  WWNC.  One  of  the  most 
todern  neicspaper  -plants  in  the  Southeast. 


Showing  the  five-unit  superduty  Duplex  Press  of  the 
Charlotte  News,  afternoon 

BURLINGTON — Times-News,  published  Evenings,  except 
Sunday,  Independent,  Established  in  the  early  1930's,  by 
Times-News  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.;  R.  B.  Terry  and  D.  A. 
Rawley,  Publishers.  Staley  A.  Cook,  editor  and  general 
manager,  and  Rudy  M.  Fonville,  advertising  director  and 
business  manager,  are  stockholders  in  the  business. 

The  Times-News  grew  out  of  The  Burlington  Times,  week- 
ly and  semi-weekly  paper,  published  for  many  years  by 
C.  F.  Crowson.  It  started  in  18  95.  Fire  destroyed  the  plant 
in  1930,  and  O.  F.  Crowson,  son  of  the  earlier  publisher, 
operated  the  paper  for  a  short  time.  A  paper  published  by 
Zeb  Waller  was  included  in  the  consolidation. 

CHARLOTTE — News,  published  Evenings,  except  Sunday, 
Democratic,  Established  18  88,  by  Wade  H.  Harris;  C.  A. 
McKnight,  Editor;  Thos.  L.  Robinson,  Publisher;  J.  E. 
Dowd,  general  manager;  B.  S.  Griffith,  executive  editor; 
R.  J.  Alander,  advertising  director;  W.  W.  Sirmon,  circula- 
tion manager. 

In  189  2  W.  C.  Dowd  purchased  The  News,  published  it 
until  1927,  after  which  his  son,  W.  Carey  Dowd,  Jr.,  was 
publisher  until  1947  when  it  was  purchased  by  a  new  com- 
pany, Thomas  L.  Robinson,  president  and  treasurer;  J.  E. 
Dowd,  vice-president  and  secretary.  At  that  time  the  late 
W.  C.  Dowd,  Jr.,  retained  the  printing  business  as  the  Dowd 
Press,  still  in  operation. 

In  1914  The  Charlotte  News  purchased  and  absorbed  The 
Charlotte  Evening  Chronicle. 

Observer,  published  every  Morning,  Independent  Demo- 
cratic, Established  18  69,  by  Smith  Watson  &  Co.,  printers; 
Observer  Co.,  Publishers;  Associate  editors  J.  A.  Parham, 
long  managing  editor,  and  Rupert  Gillett,  with  Ernest  B. 
Hunter,  managing  editor,  form  the  editorial  board.  H.  A. 
Allen  is  secretary-treasurer  of  the  company;  O.  A.  Robinson 
is  advertising  director;  J.  G.  Ward  is  circulation  manager, 
and  John  P.  White  is  production  manager. 

In  the  early  days  "Daily"  appeared  in  the  name,  was 
shifted  and  then  dropped.  For  a  period  it  was  known  as 
The  Charlotte  Chronicle.  In  1892,  previously  suspended 
for  a  period,  it  was  purchased  by  Daniel  A.  Tompkins  and 
Joseph  P.  Caldwell,  the  latter  editor  until  his  last  illness, 
about  1910.  Word  H.  Wood  and  George  Stephens  purchased 
and  operated  the  paper  for  a  few  years,  selling  it  in  1916 
to  Curtis  B.  Johnson  and  Walter  B.  Sullivan.  Mr.  Sullivan 
died  and  some  years  later  Mr.  Johnson  sold  his  Knoxville 
(Tenn.)  Sentinel  and  became  active  publisher  of  The  Ob- 
server. He  died  last  year.  Wade  H.  Harris  and  Dr.  Julian 
S.  Miller  were  editors,  respectively,  for  a  number  of  years. 

CONCORD — Tribune,  published  Evenings  except  Saturday 
and  Sunday,  Sunday  morning,  Independent  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1900,  by  J.  F.  Hurley;  E.  Ray  King,  business  man- 
ager; The  Concord  Tribune,  Inc.,  Publisher;  A.  W.  Huckle, 
president;   Ray  Hull,  editor. 

In  1910  John  B.  Sherrill  acquired  The  Tribune,  publish- 
ing it  until  his  death  in  1934.  His  son,  W.  M.  Sherrill,  was 
editor-publisher  until  his  death  about  a  decade  ago.     The 


PAGE  24 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


Modern  home  of  The  Charlotte  Observer,  State's  largest  news- 
paper. Recent  extensive  renovation  and  equipment  cost  in 
excess  of  a  million  dollars.  Further  enlargement  of  the  build- 
ing is  planned 

Tribune  is  now  owned  by  a  corporation  of  local  people,  with 
a  daily  circulation  of  8,750.  The  Tribune  absorbed  The 
Herald-Observer,  a  morning  daily,  in  193  8. 

DURHAM — Herald,  published  Mornings  and  Sunday,  Non- 
partisan, Established  1894,  by  B.  T.  Rollins  and  J.  H.  King; 
Steed  Rollins,  Editor. 

Sun,  published  evenings  except  Sunday,  Non-partisan,  Es- 
tablished 1889,  by  James  Robinson;  J.  R.  Barry  Editor. 

Durham  Herald  Co.,  Inc.,  Publisher  of  both  morning  and 
afternoon  dailies,  Carl  C.  Council,  president,  and  Steed  Rol- 
lins, vice-president  and  executive  editor. 

Mr.  Rollins  purchased  Mr.  King's  interest  a  few  years 
after  The  Herald  was  established,  continuing  publication 
until  his  death  some  18  or  20  years  ago.  His  estate  is  the 
principal  owner  of  the  corporation.  Among  its  editors  have 
been  Walter  N.  Keener,  L.  S.  Laprade,  and  Dr.  Sylvester 
Greene. 

The  Sun  was  published  by  Mr.  Robinson,  "Old  Hurry- 
graph,"  until  around  1910.  It  passed  through  several  hands 
until  it  was  purchased  in  1929  by  The  Durham  Herald  Co. 
Since  then  both  papers  have  been  published  in  the  same 
plant.  Earlier  members  of  its  editorial  staff  were  Robert 
L.  Gray  and  Irving  Cheek,  both  later  with  The  Raleigh 
Times,  and  Howard  Branch,  former  Raleigh  Chamber  of 
Commerce  secretary. 

ELIZABETH  CITY — Advance,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1911;  Edwin 
Moss  Williams,  Editor;   Elizabeth  City  Advance,   Publisher. 

The  Advance  was  edited  and  published  for  many  years 
by  Herbert  Peele,  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association 
1946-47.  Mr.  Williams  purchased  the  paper  about  two 
years  ago.  He  also  purchased  and  suspended  publication 
of  The  Independent,  published  for  several  years  by  George 
W.  Haskett  and  previously  by  the  dynamic  W.  O.  Saunders. 

FAYETTEVILLE — Observer,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Independent,  Established  1817,  by  Emanuel  Bing- 
ham; Fayetteville  Publishing  Co.;  R.  H.  Lilly,  Business 
Manager;   George  G.  Myrover,  Managing  Editor. 

The  Fayetteville  Observer,  oldest  newspaper  in  North 
Carolina,  was  started  as  The  Carolina  Observer.  After 
changing  hands  several  times,  John  McRae  sold  it  in  18  25 
to  Edward  J.  Hale,  who  changed  its  name  to  The  Fayette- 
ville Observer.  In  1883  his  son,  Edward  J.  Hale,  Jr.,  be- 
came publisher  and  headed  The  Observer  until  1919,  except 
for  eight  years.  In  this  period,  1885-92,  publishers  in- 
cluded: Robert  Bryan,  John  R.  Myrover,  George  G.  Myrover, 
Sr.,  George  H.  Haigh  and  Z.  W.  Whitehead. 

Briefly,  in  1919-2'0,  a  stock  company  of  Fayetteville  citi- 
zens published  The  Observer.  It  was  purchased  by  John  A. 
Park,  Raleigh  publisher,  who  sold  it  in  1921  to  David  B. 
Lindsay,  Marion,  Indiana,  who  sold  it  in  1923  to  W.  J.  Mc- 
Murray,  New   York   City.      The  Fayetteville   Publishing   Co. 


was  formed,  with  C.  R.  Wilson  as  publisher.  Mr.  Wilcon 
died  in  19  49,  at  which  time  his  son-in-law,  R.  M.  Lilly,  be- 
came publisher.  The  Fayetteville  Observer  is  a  member  of 
the  American  Press  Century  Club. 

GASTONIA — Gazette,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday, 
Independent  Democratic,  Established  18  80,  by  George  W. 
Chalk;  James  W.  Atkins,  Editor;  Gazette  Publishing  Co.. 
Inc.  The  Gazette  started  as  a  weekly  paper,  has  been  owned 
by  the  Atkins  family  for  about  45  of  its   7  0  years. 

Early  publishers  and  editors  were  James  E.  Page,  G.  W. 
Chalk,  John  T.  Bigham,  W.  M.  Grier,  Jr.,  and  W.  F.  Mar- 
shall, later  of  Raleigh.  In  190  6  Prof.  Ben  E.  Atkins  and 
his  two  sons,  James  W.  and  Emmett  D.  Atkins,  formed  The 
Gazette  Publishing  Co.,  purchased  the  plant  and  began 
publishing  a  thrice-a-week  paper,  the  first  in  the  State.  Hugh 
A.  Querry  became  editor.  It  was  changed  into  a  daily  in 
1919. 

Last  fall  The  Gazette  issued  a  large  special  edition  cele- 
brating its  70th  year  and  the  70th  year  of  its  editor  and 
publisher,  James  W.  Atkins.  Mr.  Atkins  is  easing  up  and 
his  sons  are  taking  over.  Stewart  Atkins  is  vice-president 
and  advertising  director,  and  Ben  Atkins  is  secretary  and 
business  manager.  Fourth  generation  Atkins  boys  are  part- 
time  workers  while  out  of  college. 

GOLDSBORO — News-Argus,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Independent,  Established  18  8  5,  by  Col.  Joseph  E. 
Robinson;    Henry  Belk,  Editor;    Talbot  Patrick,   Publisher; 

A.  S.  Brown,  Business  Manager;  Goldsboro  Publishing  Co. 
Mr.  Belk  is  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association. 

Partners  with  Col.  Robinson  in  establishing  The  Golds- 
boro  Argus   were   Charles   B.   Aycock,   later   Governor,   and 

B.  W.  Nash.  The  Goldsboro  News  was  founded  in  1922  by 
Col.  John  D.  Langston  and  others.  After  Mr.  Patrick  pur- 
chased The  Argus,  he  also  purchased  The  News  in  19  29  and 
consolidated  these  papers. 

Former  Goldsboro  papers  included  The  Weekly  Tran- 
script and  Messenger,  J.  A.  Bonitz,  editor,  in  the  1880's. 
Marion  Butler,  later  U.  S.  Senator,  once  printed  The  Cau- 
casian in  Goldsboro.  Nash  brothers  in  the  1880s  did  a  large 
book  and  periodical  publishing  business.  Nash  Printery, 
B.  G.  Pinckney,  owner,  continues  the  name  today.  The 
Weekly  Headlight,  A.  Roscower,  publisher,  was  discontinued 
about  1915. 

GREENSBORO — Daily  News,  published  daily  and  Sunday, 
Independent,  Established  190  5,  by  The  Industrial  News  Co.; 
H.  W.  Kendall,  Editor;  Carl  O.  Jeffress,  General  Manager; 
Greensboro  News  Co.,  Publisher. 

Started  by  Spencer  Blackburn,  one-time  Republican  Con- 
gressman, as  Editor  and  Thomas  S.  Rollins,  publisher,  as  a 
State  Republican  organ,  The  Industrial  News  failed  and  was 
sold  and  reorganized.  It  developed  into  an  independent 
paper  with  Democratic  leanings.  In  1911  W.  A.  Hilde- 
brand  purchased  the  paper,  and  E.  B.  Jeffress  later  that  year 


Renovated  and  modern  home  of  the  Durham  Herald-Sun  Pa- 
pers. Recently  acquired  annex  to  the  right  houses  Business 
and  Circulation  Departments.  Engraving  Department  occupies 
a  fourth  floor  at  the  rear 


Winter-Spring,  i  95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  15 


Home  of  The  Gazette,  Gastonia's  afternoon  newspaper 

became  part  owner  and  business  manager.  Earl  Godbey 
and  A.  L.  Stockton,  from  Asheville,  became  editor  and  man- 
aging editor,  respectively.  In  1918  Mr.  Hildebrand  sold 
his  interest  to  Mr.  Godbey,  Mr.  Stockton  and  Archie  B.  Joy- 
ner,  advertising  manager,  Mr.  Jeffress  retaining  his  half 
interest.  Mr.  Joyner  died  in  19  23,  Mr.  Stockton  in  1936  and 
Mr.  Godbey  in  1942. 

Mr.  Jeffress  became  ill  in  1934  and  has  since  been  in- 
active. Mr.  Kendall  succeeded  Mr.  Godbey  as  editor  in 
1942  and  James  Polk  later  became  associate  editor.  In 
1911  The  Greensboro  News  Co.  bought  and  merged  The 
Greensboro  Telegram,  a  small  morning  paper,  with  The 
Daily  News. 

The  Greensboro  News  Co.  operates  Radio  Station  WFMY 
and  Television  Station  WFMY-TV,  the  first  newspaper-owned 
television  station  to  begin  operations  in  North  Carolina. 

Daily  Record,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  18  90,  by  Harper  Elam,  Col.  Joe  Reece 
and  John  Benson;  Colvin  Leonard,  Editor;  Greensboro  News 
Co.,  Publisher. 

The  Daily  Record,  Greensboro's  oldest  daily  newspaper, 
was  purchased  entirely  after  a  few  years  by  Col.  Reece,  who 
was  editor  and  publisher  for  a  long  time.  After  his  death, 
Col.  Al  Fairbrother  bought  The  Record  and  operated  it  for 
several  years,  selling  it  to  Julian  Price  and  Parker  Ander- 
son. Mr.  Price,  his  daughter,  Mrs.  Kathleen  Price  Bryan, 
and  Edney  Ridge  later  became  owners,  with  Mr.  Ridge  as 
operator.  The  Record  was  purchased  by  Bryan-Thompson, 
Inc.,  an  out-of-state  firm,  in  1927,  who  operated  it  for  about 
three  years.  In  19  30  Mr.  Price  again  purchased  the  paper 
and  arranged  a  merger  with  the  owners  of  The  Greensboro 
Daily  News.  Capus  M.  Waynick,  now  Ambassador  to  Nica- 
ragua, was  editor  for  a  period.  A.  D.  Jones  was  editor  for 
many  years  until  his  death  in  19  48,  when  Mr.  Leonard  be- 
came editor. 

GREENVILLE — Reflector,  published  Evenings  except  Sun- 
day, Local,  Established  1882;  Eh  J.  Whichard,  Jr.,  Editor 
and  Publisher;  published  for  many  years  by  the  father  of 
the  present  publisher,  whose  son,  David  J.  Whichard,  is  an 
associate. 

The  Reflector  was  operated  for  many  years  in  the  weekly 
field  but  has  been  a  daily  for  a  long  time.  Mr.  Whichard  is 
president  of  the  North  Carolina  Association  of  Afternoon 
Dailies,  Inc.   (NR) 

HENDERSON — Dispatch,  published  Evenings  except  Sun- 
day, Democratic,   Established   1914,   by  local  businessmen; 


Henry  A.  Dennis,  Editor;  Henderson  Dispatch  Co.,  Inc.,  Pub- 
lisher. 

The  Daily  Dispatch  was  launched  by  the  owning  company 
in  the  plant  of  the  Henderson  Gold  Leaf,  a  weekly  paper,  in 
1914.  Mr.  Dennis  joined  the  staff  in  1915  and  in  1922  he 
and  M.  L.  Finch  purchased  the  paper.  Mr.  Dennis  is  presi- 
dent and  editor,  and  Mr.  Finch  secretary-treasurer  and  busi- 
ness manager. 

Fire  completely  destroyed  the  plant  except  for  the  press 
late  in  19  46.  The  plant  was  rebuilt,  fully  equipped  and  re- 
occupied  in  May,  1947.  The  Dispatch  was  issued  from  The 
Raleigh  Times  plant  during  the  five  month  interval.  The 
Gold  Leaf  has  been  suspended  temporarily. 

HENDERSONVILLE — Times-News,  published  Evenings, 
except  Sunday,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1925, 
by  J.  T.  Fain;  J.  T.  Fain,  Editor;  G.  M.  Ogle,  general  man- 
ager; published  by  The  Times-News  Co.,  Inc. 

The  Times-News  is  a  consolidation,  in  19  26,  of  The  Hen- 
dersonville  Times  and  The  Hendersonville  News.  Both  pa- 
pers originally  were  weeklies,  then  ssmi-weeklies  before 
becoming  dailies.  The  Times-News  is  successor  to  all  of 
several  papers  published  in  Hendersonville  up  to  the  time 
of  consolidation.  The  plant  is  modern  and  entirely  up-to- 
date,  and  the  circulation  approaches  6,000  daily. 

HICKORY — Daily  Record,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1915,  by  the 
late  J.  C.  Miller,  general  manager,  and  the  late  Sam  H. 
Farabee,  editor,  with  a  group  of  Hickory  business  men;  L. 
C.  Gifford,  Editor  and  Publisher. 

The  Daily  Record  was  organized  and  brought  about  the 
consolidation  and  absorption  of  weekly  newspapers  publish- 
ed in  Hickory  about  that  time.  Editor  Farabee  had  been 
editor  of  the  Winston-Salem  Journal  and  later  edited  a 
paper  in  Florida.  A  small  "sheet,"  The  Daily  Cricket  was 
published  for  a  short  time  around  1880  but  never  became 
firmly  established. 

Earlier  publishers  of  Hickory  newspapers  included  Dr. 
J.  R.  Ellis,  who  established  The  Press  and  Carolinian  in 
1870;  J.  F.  Click,  H.  H.  Crowson,  John  F.  Mullen,  W.  C. 
Dowd,  A.  Y.  Sigmon  and  Hugh  Murrell.  Among  the  papers 
were:  The  Mercury,  The  Democrat,  The  Times  and  The 
Press. 

HIGH  POINT — Enterprise,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Sunday  morning,  Independent,  Established  1885; 
Robert  Thompson,  Editor;  R.  B.  Terry  and  D.  A.  Rawley, 
Publishers. 

The  Enterprise,  formerly  in  the  weekly  field,  became  a 
daily  in  190  5.  Among  its  noted  former  editors  was  Capus 
M.  Waynick,  later  chairman  of  the  N.  C.  Highway  Commis- 
sion and  at  present  Ambassador  to  Nicaragua. 

KANNAPOLIS — Daily  Independent,  published  Evenings 
and  Sunday  (except  Saturday),  Independent,  Established 
19  27,  by  J.  L.  Moore;  J.  L.  Moore,  Publisher;  T.  H.  Wingate. 
Editor. 

Mr.  Moore  started  The  Independent  without  a  shoestring; 


Where  The  Greensboro  Daily  News  and  The  Greensboro 
Record  are  edited  and  published 


PAGE  26 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


he  borrowed  $37.50  to  purchase  a  typewriter.  It  started  as 
The  Kannapolis  Towler,  issued  from  a  spare  room  of  the 
Moore  home.  A  few  years  later  Publisher  Moore  attended 
college,  forming  The  Kannapolis  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  on  his 
return.  It  then  became  a  tri-weekly  paper  and  a  year  later, 
in  1938,  became  a  morning  daily,  The  Daily  Independent. 

KINSTON — Free  Press,  published  Evenings  except  Sun- 
day, Independent  Democratic,  Established  1882,  by  Josephus 
Daniels;  H.  Gait  Braxton,  Editor;  Kinston  Free  Press  Co., 
Inc.,  Publisher. 

The  Free  Press  started  as  a  weekly  paper  and  operated 
for  a  short  time  from  Wilson.  Mr.  Daniels  sold  his  interest 
to  his  associate  and  brother,  Charles  C.  Daniels.  Other 
editors  were  James  Herbert  and  D.  T.  Edwards.  The  Free 
Press  became  a  semi-weekly  paper,  and  in  18  98,  during  the 
Spanish-American  War,  became  a  daily.  The  semi-weekly 
edition  continued  for  several  years.  Mr.  Braxton  purchased 
the  paper  in  1914  and  has  since  been  its  editor  and  pub- 
lisher.   (C.  C.  Daniels,  86,  N.  Y.  atty.,  died  Mar.  20,  1951.) 

Several  weekly  papers  were  published  in  Kinston  at  dif- 
ferent times  and  folded  up.  One  morning  daily,  The  Kin- 
ston News,  operated  from  1914  to  1926-28. 

LENOIR — News-Topic,  published  Evenings  except  Sun- 
days, Independent  Democratic,  Established  187  5,  by  James 
C.  Nutty,  Roy  R.  Wallis,  Editor;  Lenoir  News-Topic,  Inc., 
Publisher. 

The  News-Topic  was  established  as  The  Caldwell  Messen- 
ger and  became  The  Lenoir  Topic  two  years  later.  In  1919 
through  consolidation  it  took  its  present  name.  The  News- 
Topic  operated  as  a  semi-weekly  until  1947  when  it  became 
an  afternoon  daily.  Mr.  Wallis  has  been  editor  for  15  or 
more  years.  The  Caldwell  Record,  established  in  1931,  was 
consolidated  with  The  News-Topic  in  1937.  Photo  News, 
established  in  193  8,  was  suspended  one  year  later. 

LEXINGTON — The  Dispatch,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  in  1882,  by 
T.  B.  Eldridge;  E.  E.  Witherspoon,  Editor;  The  Dispatch 
Publishing  Co.;  Fred  O.  Sink  Estate,  owner. 

The  Dispatch  was  started  by  Publisher  Eldridge  as  a 
weekly  paper,  became  a  semi-weekly  some  20  years  ago  and 
was  changed  to  a  daily  about  two  years  ago.  H.  B.  Varner, 
good-roads  advocate,  bought  it  in  the  early  1890s  and  con- 
tinued publication  for  18  or  20  years,  with  Fred  O.  Sink  as 
general  manager.  An  Ohio  firm  bought  and  published  the 
paper  for  about  two  years,  and  in  the  early  lg^Os  it  was 
bought  by  Mr.  Sink  and  Walter  H.  Mendenhall.  Mr.  Sink 
acquired  his  partner's  interest  and  continued  publication 
until  his  death.  Mr.  Witherspoon  has  been  editor  for  about 
3  5  years. 


Attractive  home  of  The  Enterprise,  High  Point's 
afternoon  newspaper 


For  many  years  the  home  of  "The  Old  Reliable",  The 
Raleigh  News  and  Observer 

Former  editors  and  reporters  include:  George  B.  Cochran, 
S.  R.  Winters,  A.  L.  Fletcher,  and  Gerald  Johnson. 

LUMBERTON — Robesonian,  published  Evenings  except 
Saturday  and  Sunday,  Democratic,  Established  18  70,  by  Rev. 
W.  S.  McDiarmid;  Robesonian,  Inc.,  Publisher;  Jack  Sharpe, 
Editor. 

The  Robesonian  was  started  as  a  weekly  paper,  became  a 
semi-weekly  about  1900,  a  tri-weekly  in  1926  and  became 
a  five-day  daily  in  1940.  The  late  J.  A.  Sharpe  acquired  the 
paper  in  1907  and  continued  as  editor  and  publisher  until 
his  death  in  19  47.  Since  that  time  his  son  has  edited  the 
paper.  The  Robesonian  is  the  oldest  newspaper  in  Robeson 
County  and  is  probably  the  oldest  business  in  the  county 
retaining  the  same  firm  name.  The  circulation  is  now 
6,500.     The  print  shop  was  discontinued  in  1949. 

Two  earlier  papers  have  been  absorbed  by  The  Robeson- 
ian: The  Lumberton  Times,  started  in  18  80  by  James  Bon- 
ner, and  The  Lumberton  Argus,  established  about  1900. 
Another,  published  in  Lumberton  by  A.  S.  Johnston,  started 
in  Rowland  and  later  moved  to  Clarkton. 

NEW  BERN — Sun-Journal,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Independent,  Established  1876;  T.  M.  Diggs,  Editor; 
Sun-Journal,  Inc.,  Publisher.  C.  A.  Eury  has  operated  The 
Sun-Journal  for  many  years.  He  is  a  former  president  of  the 
Eastern  N.  C.  Press  Association. 

When  Mr.  Eury  acquired  The  Sun-Journal  a  dozen  or 
more  years  ago,  The  New  Bernian  was  being  issued  as  a 
morning  daily.  After  its  suspension,  Mr.  Eury  issued  an 
early  morning  edition  of  The  Sun-Journal.   (NR) 

The  New  Bern  Tribune  was  published  as  a  morning  daily 
for  a  short  time  several  years  ago  by  N.  G.  Gooding.  The 
New  Bern  Times,  weekly,  edited  by  H.  I.  Crumpler,  was  pub- 
lished by  H.  C.  Waldrop  for  a  number  of  years,  until  it  was 
discontinued  a  year  or  two  ago. 


Small  picture  of  the  mod- 
ern home  of  The  Kannap- 
olis Independent,  which 
started  small  with  a  type- 
writer bought  with  a  bor- 
roived  $37.50. 


Winter-Spring,  i 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  27 


RALEIGH — News  and  Observer,  published  every  Morning, 
Democratic,  Established  18  65,  by  William  Pell;  Jonathan 
Daniels,  Editor;  Frank  A.  Daniels,  general  manager,  Jose- 
phus  Daniels,  Jr.,  business  manager;  R.  E.  Williams,  asso- 
ciate editor;  News  and  Observer  Publishing  Co.,  Inc. 

The  News  and  Observer  was  a  consolidation  of  several 
Raleigh  newspapers  including  The  Sentinel,  started  and 
edited  by  William  Pell  and  later  edited  by  Josiah  Turner. 
The  News  was  established  in  1872  by  Jordan  Stone  and  W. 
H.  Uzzell.  Iu  1876  The  Sentinel  was  sold  to  George  A. 
Smith  and  W.  P.  Batchelor  and  later  was  sold  to  Peter  M. 
Hale  and  W.  L.  Saunders,  who  named  it  The  Observer.  The 
News  and  The  Observer  were  consolidated  in  1880,  taking 
the  present  name,  with  Capt.  Samuel  A.  Ashe  as  editor  and 
Fred  A.  Olds  as  city  editor.  Josephus  Daniels  came  to  Ral- 
eigh from  Wilson  as  editor  of  The  Chronicle  in  1885  and 
bought  The  News  and  Observer  in  18  94,  serving  as  editor 
and  publisher  until  his  death  in  1948.  His  son,  Jonathan 
Daniels,  then  became  editor. 

Other  newspapers  absorbed  by  The  News  and  Observer 
or  suspended  included:  The  Conservative,  The  State  Chron- 
icle, The  Intelligencer,  The  Farmer  and  Mechanic,  The  North 
Carolinian,  The  Daily  Call  and  The  Carolinian.  Among  per- 
sons associated  with  these  papers  were  L.  L.  Polk,  Walter 
Hines  Page,  Edward  A.  Oldham,  Hal  W.  Ayer,  Randolph  A. 
Shotwell,  D.  H.  Browder  and  Thomas  R.  Jernigan. 

Times,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday,  Independent, 
Established  1879,  by  Charles  A.  Brown  and  William  M. 
Utley;  John  A.  Park,  Editor  and  Publisher. 

The  Times  started  as  The  Evening  Visitor  and  has  suc- 
ceeded or  was  consolidated  with  several  papers,  including 
The  Evening  Visitor,  The  Daily  Press,  The  Press  Visitor, 
The  Times  Visitor  and  The  Raleigh  Evening  Times.  Mr. 
Park  purchased  the  paper  in  1911  and  has  since  been  its 
editor  and  publisher.  His  three  sons,  John,  Jr.,  Ben  and 
Albert,  are  associated  with  him.  Former  editors  of  The 
Times  and  its  predecessors  were  John  Wilbur  Jenkins,  Rob- 
ert L.  Gray,  O.  J.  Coffin,  Jule  B.  Warren,  Thomas  J.  Pence, 
Fred  A.  Olds,  Nell  Battle  Lewis,  A.  L.  Fletcher,  Greek  O. 
Andrews  and  Willis  G.  Briggs. 

REIDSVILLE — Review,  published  Evenings  except  Satur- 
day and  Sunday,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1888, 
by  R.  J.  Oliver,  Manton  Oliver  and  John  T.  Oliver  (all  de- 
ceased) ;  C.  R.  and  W.  M.  Oliver,  Editors;  Review  Co., 
Publisher. 

The  Review  has  been  published  by  members  of  the  Oliver 
family  since  it  was  founded  62  years  ago.  John  T.  and 
Manton  M.  Oliver  were  former  editors.,  and  present  editors 
are  second  generation  Olivers. 

ROANOKE  RAPIDS — Herald,  published  Evenings  except 
Saturday  and  Sunday,  Sunday  Morning,  Democratic,  Estab- 
lished 1914;  Herald,  Publisher;  James  Wick  and  Don  Hali 
are   key   men;    published   as   a   weekly   for   many   years   by 


Looking  down  on  the  front  of  The  Winston-Salem  Journal  and 
The  Twin  City  Sentinel,  with  Radio  Station  WSJS  at  rear. 
More  mailing  room  space  has  been  provided  by  an  addition  at 
left  (under  construction) 


Modern  plant  housing  modern  equipment  of  the 
Rocky  Mount  Telegram 

Carroll  L.  Wilson  until  four  or  five  years  ago;   changed  to 
a  daily  three  or  four  years  ago.  (NR) 

ROCKY  MOUNT — Telegram,  published  Evenings  and  Sun- 
day Morning,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1910,  by 
Josh  L.  Home,  Jr.,  its  editor  and  president  of  the  Rocky 
Mount  Publishing  Co.,  owners. 

The  Telegram  started  as  a  morning  newspaper  but  shifted 
to  the  afternoon  field  in  about  four  months.  The  Sunday 
morning  edition  was  started  in  194  9.  Former  editors  and 
staff  members  include:  Henry  A.  Dennis,  publisher,  Hender- 
son Dispatch;  H.  Wiseman  Kendall,  editor  Greensboro  Daily 
News,  and  Anthony  J.  McKelvin  (deceased),  former  manag- 
ing editor  of  The  News  and  Observer.  The  building  and 
plant  are  modern,  earning  a  minimum  insurance  rate. 

SALISBURY — Post,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday, 
Sunday  Morning,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1905, 
by  John  Julian;  Spencer  Murphy,  Editor;  J.  F.  Hurley,  Jr., 
Publisher;  P.  G.  Laughridge,  Advertising  Director;  George 
Raynor,  Managing  Editor;  R.  H.  Bellis,  Circulation  Man- 
ager. 

The  Post  was  burned  out  in  1912  and  was  purchased  and 
re-established  by  J.  F.  Hurley  who  edited  and  published  the 
paper  until  his  death  in  1936.  His  son,  J.  F.  Hurley,  Jr., 
has  since  been  publisher,  with  Spencer  Murphy  as  editor. 
The  Yadkin  Valley  Herald  was  published  semi-weekly  until 
19  20,  successor  to  the  semi-weekly  Post. 

The  Western  Carolinian,  first  known  publication  in  Salis- 
bury, started  soon  after  Revolutionary  War  days,  continuing 
until  after  the  Civil  War.  The  Carolina  Watchman  was 
started  in  1832,  continuing  until  1937.  Other  early  publi- 
cations include:  The  Herald,  dating  from  around  1885;  The 
Sun,  and  The  Truth  Index. 

SHELBY — Star,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday,  In- 
dependent Democratic,  Established  1894,  by  U.  S.  Senator 
Clyde  R.  Hoey;  Holt  McPherson,  Editor;  Lee  B.  Weathers, 
Publisher. 

The  Shelby  Daily  Star  operated  in  the  weekly  field  until 
193  6  when  it  became  a  daily.  Lee  B.  Weathers  has  been 
publisher  for  40  years,  since  January  1,  1911.  Occupying 
a  modern  new  building,  The  Star  has  a  thoroughly  up-to- 
date  and  high-type  commercial  print  shop.     Henry  Weathers, 


PAGE  28 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1 951 


son  of  the  publisher,  manages  the  print  shop.     He  is  presi- 
dent of  the  Printing  Industry  of  the  Carolinas,  Inc. 

STATESVILLE — Daily,  published  evenings  except  Sun- 
day, Independent,  Established  19  20,  by  Pegram  A.  Bryant, 
editor  and  publisher.  Mr.  Bryant  also  publishes  The  Land- 
mark, semi-weekly,  one  of  the  older  papers  of  the  State, 
in  whose  plant  he  established  The  Statesville  Daily.  Among 
his  helpers  were  Mr.  Moore  and  Ben  Scronce. 

Daily  Record,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1930;  J.  P.  Huskins,  Publisher.  The 
Record  was  started  as  a  weekly  and  was  made  a  semi-weekly 
by  J.  R.  McCarthy,  publisher  for  several  years.  C.  E.  Mid- 
dlesworth  purchased  it  and  changed  it  into  a  daily  about 
a  decade  ago.  Following  his  death,  Mrs.  Middlesworth  con- 
tinued operations,  Mr.  Huskins  joining  in  the  publication. 
Ben  Scronce  was  a  former  editor.   (NR) 

TARBORO — Daily  Southerner,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Democratic,  Established  1889,  B.  M.  Bass,  Jr., 
Editor;  H.  C.  Bourne,  V.  H.  Creech,  Jr.,  Business  Manager, 
and  J.  Creech,  Publishers;  printed  by  The  Tarboro  Printing 
Co. 

The  Southerner  was  started  as  a  weekly  in  18  24  in  Hali- 
fax by  George  Howard,  who  moved  it  to  Tarboro  two  years 
later.  The  Weekly  Southerner  is  still  published  by  the 
publishers  of  the  Daily  Southerner.  Former  editors  in- 
clude: Frank  Powell,  Paul  Jones,  Bertham  Brown,  Aubrey 
Shackell,  P.  G.  Shackell,  Robert  Weitick  and  R.  H.  Davis. 

TRYON — Bulletin,  published  Evenings  except  Saturday 
and  Sunday,  Independent,  Established  1928;  S.  M.  Vining, 
Editor  and  Publisher. 

The  Bulletin  is  an  unusual  newspaper,  miniature  in  size 
and  attractive  in  make-up.  It  has  been  a  publication  of 
interest  and  wide  comment  during  its  2  2  years  of  existence. 
Mr.  Vining  also  has  published  The  Polk  County  News,  week- 
ly, acquired  some  15  years  ago.   (NR) 

WASHINGTON — News,  published  Evenings  except  Sun- 
day, Democratic,  Established  190  9,  by  J.  L.  Mayo;  Ashley 
B.  Futrell,  Editor;  Washington  News,  Publisher.  The  News 
started  in  the  weekly  field  and  became  an  afternoon  daily 
in  1909.  Former  editors  include:  J.  L.  Mayo,  W.  D.  W. 
Bishop,  Frank  Pearson,  Charles  Thompson,  Paul  McEvoy, 
Carl  Goerch,  W.  A.  Osborn,  and  Fred  Pendleton. 

WILMINGTON — News,  published  Evenings  except  Satur- 
day and  Sunday,  Independent,  Established  1896,  by  R.  P. 
McClammy  and  others;  Al  G.  Dickson,  Editor. 

Star,  published  Mornings  except  Sunday,  Independent, 
Established  1867,  by  Mayor  William  H.  Bernard;  John  E. 
Hope,  Editor. 

Star-News,  published  Sunday,  Independent,  Established 
1929,  by  R.  B.  Page;  Al  G.  Dickson,  Editor;  R.  B.  Page, 
Publisher,  and  publisher  of  The  Star  and  The  News. 

The  Star  started  as  an  afternoon  paper  but  a  month  later 
entered  the  morning  field  and  has  thus  become  North  Caro- 
lina's second  oldest  daily  with  continuous  publication  under 
the  original  name.  Former  editors  include:  Dr.  T.  B.  Kings- 
berry,  Major  Patrick  F.  Duffy,  Col.  Thomas  W.  Clawson, 
Robert  L.  Gray.  The  Star  changed  hands  in  1919  and  in 
1927  the  paper  was  acquired  by  the  R.  W.  Page  Corporation, 
and  R.  B.  Page,  member  of  the  firm,  became  publisher.  Two 
years  later  this  firm  acquired  The  News  Dispatch,  consolidat- 
ing the  morning  and  afternoon  papers  and  establishing  the 
Sunday  Star-News.  In  19  40  R.  B.  Page  purchased  the  group 
and  has  since  been  publisher.  His  son,  R.  B.  Page,  Jr.,  is 
co-publisher,  and  J.  Walter  Webb  is  general  manager  of 
the  combined  papers. 

The  News  began  as  The  Evening  Dispatch,  owned  and 
edited  by  four  men,  James  F.  Perry,  Clayton  C.  Redd,  George 
W.  Cameron  and  R.  P.  McClammy.  Other  editors  and  pub- 
lishers included:  R.  L.  Bryan,  Robert  M.  Haywood,  George 
W.  Brunson,  James  Cowan  and  Louis  T.  Moore.  In  1916 
The  Dispatch  was  acquired  by  C.  C.  Bellamy,  J.  R.  Thomp- 
son and  Josh  L.  Home.  The  Dispatch  ceased  publication  in 
1923,  and  The  News  was  established  as  the  evening  edition 
of  The  Star.  The  Dispatch  was  revived  and  later  in  1923 
the  two  papers  merged,  becoming  The  News-Dispatch.  It 
was  purchased  by  the  Page  interest  in  19  29  and  became  The 
News. 

An  early  competitor  was  The  Evening  Review,  and  later 
1944-48,  The  Wilmington  Post  was  published  by  General 
Newspapers,  Inc. 


WILSON — The  Daily  Times,  published  Evenings  except 
Sunday,  Democratic,  Established  1902',  by  John  D.  Gold; 
John  D.  Gold,  Editor;  P.  D.  Gold  Publishing  Co.;  Herbert 
D.  Brauff,  Publisher;  Elizabeth  Gold  Swindell,  Business 
Manager;  Paul  G.  Liles,  Advertising  Manager;  Jim  Ful- 
ghum,  City  Editor. 

The  Wilson  Daily  Times  was  started  as  a  weekly  paper, 
later  becoming  a  semi-weekly,  in  the  shop  of  the  P.  D.  Gold 
Publishing  Co.  The  print  shop  was  started  by  Elder  P.  D. 
Gold,  Primitive  Baptist  minister,  in  1867.  The  Daily  Times 
was  started  in  190  2,  and  the  semi-weekly  Times  was  dis- 
continued in  1945.  John  D.  Gold,  founder,  continued  as 
publisher  until  1947  when  his  firm  leased  the  plant  to 
Herbert  D.  Brauff,  publisher.  Mr.  Gold  is  still  listed  as 
editor,  but  his  declining,  health  does  not  allow  full  partici- 
pation. The  publication  has  erected  new  buildings,  installed 
modern  equipment  and  increased  the  circulation  to  more 
than  10,000. 

Earlier  publications  in  Wilson  include:  The  North  Caro- 
linian, published  by  Major  William  A.  Hearne  in  the  early 
180  0s;  The  Wilson  Ledger,  started  in  188  5  by  John  T.  Al- 
britton;  The  Wilson  Advance,  later  acquired  and  published 
by  Josephus  Daniels;  The  Mirror,  published  by  Jeff  Cara- 
way; The  Wilson  Plain  Dealer,  a  colorful  paper  edited  by 
Col.  R.  W.  Singletary,  and  The  Sentinel,  edited  by  Prof. 
Keenan. 

In  the  spring  of  1860  Dr.  J.  J.  Lawrence  started  The  Star 
of  Freedom,  purchased  later  that  year  by  John  C.  Gorman. 
In  that  year  H.  Prentice  Tuck  acquired  The  Ledger.  These 
two  papers  were  consolidated.  In  the  early  18  80's  D.  S. 
Caraway  and  Co.  published  The  Wilson  Shif tings.  In  1925 
Carl  Goerch  attempted  to  revive  The  Mirror  but  his  efforts 
failed.  It  was  published  briefly  as  Wilson's  first  and  only 
morning  daily. 

WINSTON-SALEM — Journal,  published  Mornings  except 
Sunday,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  18  97,  by 
Charles  Landon  Knight. 

Journal  and  Sentinel,  published  Sundays,  Independent 
Democratic,  Established  190  2,  by  D.  W.  Fawcett  and  W. 
Lannes  Foy. 

Twin  City  Sentinel,  published  Evenings  except  Sunday, 
Independent  Democratic,  Established  188  5,  by  Z.  W.  White- 
head and  Peter  Doub. 

The  two  daily  newspapers  and  the  Sunday  paper  are  pub- 
lished by  The  Piedmont  Publishing  Co.,  Gordon  Gray,  presi- 
dent, with  Santford  Martin,  editor,  and  William  K.  Hoyt, 
publisher. 

The  Twin  City  Sentinel  was  established  as  The  Twin  City 
Daily.  In  18  90  it  acquired  the  weekly  Western  Sentinel, 
and  its  name  became  The  Twin  City  Daily  Sentinel.  Later 
the  "Daily"  was  dropped.  A  son  of  Luther  Burbank,  noted 
naturalist,  acquired  and  published  The  Twin  City  Sentinel 
for  a  period  in  the  early  1900s.  Later  it  was  acquired  and 
published  by  a  firm  owned  primarily  by  Rufus  A.  Shore, 
Henry  R.  Dwire  and  Bradley  Welfare,  with  Robert  C.  Car- 
michael  as  local  editor  for  many  years.  In  1927  it  was 
purchased  by  Owen  G.  Moon,  then  publisher  of  The  Winston- 


One  of  the  most  modem  and  completely  equipped  neicspaper 
and  commercial  printing  plants  in  smaller  cities  of  the  Nation, 
that  of  Star  Publishing  Co.,  publisher  of  the  Shelby  Daily 
Star.   Job  Department  is  on  third  floor. 


Winter-Spring,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  29 


Salem  Journal.  Previously  Mr.  Moon  had  established  and 
operated  briefly  a  competing  afternoon  paper,  The  Star. 

The  Western  Sentinel  was  established  in  IS 56  by  James 
Collins  and  Francis  Eugene  Boner.  It  absorbed  The  People's 
Press  in  1892  and  became  a  semi-weekly  in  1907.  It  was 
discontinued  by  The  Twin  City  Sentinel  in  1926.  It  was 
edited  for  many  years  by  John  G.  Sterling.  Earlier  prede- 
cessor and  merged  newspapers  in  Winston-Salem  included: 
The  Weekly  Gleaner,  established  in  18  29;  The  Farmers' 
Reporter,  established  in  183  2;  The  People's  Press,  estab- 
lished in  1851,  and  The  Winston  Leader,  established  1879. 

The  Journal  was  established  as  an  afternoon  newspaper, 
but  after  about  five  years,  in  1902,  it  shifted  to  the  morning 
field  and  the  Sunday  edition  was  started.     For  many  years 


this  paper  was  published  by  a  local  stock  company  in  which 
the  late  Henry  E.  Fries  was  the  principal  stockholder. 
Among  its  editors  have  been  John  Paul  Lucas,  later  of 
Duke  Power  Co.;  Sam  H.  Farabee,  later  editor  of  The  Hick- 
ory Daily  Record;  Herbert  B.  Gunter,  later  vice-president, 
Pilot  Life  Insurance  Co.,  and  Frank  Page,  son  of  Walter 
Hines  Page.  In  1925  The  Journal  was  purchased  by  Owen 
G.  Moon,  its  publisher  for  several  years,  who  built  a  mod- 
ern publishing  plant  and  consolidated  the  two  daily  papers. 
He  sold  the  business  to  The  Piedmont  Publishing  Co.  in 
19  27.  Santford  Martin  has  been  editor  of  The  Journal 
since  1915  and  also  editor  of  The  Sentinel  since  the  consoli- 
dation, with  time  out  to  serve  as  private  secretary  to  Gov- 
ernor T.  W.  Bickett,  1916-20. 


Thirty-three  Semi- Weekly  Papers  Published  in  State 


North  Carolina  boasts  of  33  strong  semi-weekly 
newspapers,  in  most  cases  the  first  issue  comes  out 
on  Mondays  or  Tuesdays  and  the  second  on  Thurs- 
days or  Fridays.  Exceptions  are  found  in  a  few  in- 
stances. Usually  these  papers  are  found  in  com- 
munities which  are  large  enough  to  support  more 
than  one  paper  a  week,  and  yet  not  large  enough  to 
support  a  daily  newspaper. 

Most  of  the  present  semi-weekly  papers  were 
weekly  papers  in  the  beginning,  but  a  few  probably 
started  in  the  semi-weekly  field.  Many  former  week- 
ly and  semi-weekly  papers  have  graduated  into  the 
daily  field,  only  a  few  of  the  present  daily  papers 
having  started  as  such.  Several  passed  through  the 
tri-weekly  stage,  but  only  one  paper  in  the  State  is 
now  published  tri-weekly.  (See  item  top  of  next 
column). 

Only  two  of  the  semi-weekly  newspapers  in  the 
State  failed  to  respond  to  requests  for  information. 
These  are  indicated  by  the  symbol  (NR),  meaning 
that  no  report  was  received  from  them  directly  and 
that  data  given  may  not  be  accurate  or  up-to-date. 
Information  on  these  33  semi- weekly  papers  follows : 

AHOSKIE — Hertford  County  Herald,  published  Tuesdays 
and  Thursdays,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  190  9, 
by  W.  G.  Smith;  Brooks  Kiser,  Editor;  Parker  Bros.,  Pub- 
lishers. 


Home  of  the  printing  plant  of  Parker  Brothers,  Ahoskie,  in 
which  is  printed  their  Hertford  County  Herald,  semi-iveekly ; 
their  three  other  iveekly  papers:  Bertie  Ledger  Advance, 
Windsor;  The  Jackson  Nerus,  and  The  Gates  County  Index, 
Gatesinlle,  as  well  as  other  newspapers  and  commercial  print- 
ing.— Photo  by  Jensen  Hill 


ONLY  ONE  TRI-WEEKLY  NEWSPAPER 

IS  PUBLISHED  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA 

DUNN — The  Dispatch,  Published  Mondays,  Wednesdays, 
Fridays;  Independent;  Established  in  1914  by  L.  Busbee 
Pope;  L.  Busbee  Pope,  Publisher;  operates  commercial  well- 
equipped  print  shop. 

The  Dispatch  was  started  as  a  weekly,  operating  as  such 
until  19  20,  when  it  became  a  semi-weekly  until  1945.  At 
that  time  about  all  of  the  boys  entered  the  service  and  Mr. 
Pope  returned  to  weekly  issues.  When  the  boys  returned 
from  service  in  194  6  it  became  a  semi-weekly,  entering  the 
tri-weekly  field  in  1948.  During  the  past  four  years  The 
Dispatch  has  been  operated  under  lease  from  Mr.  Pope, 
owner,  by  his  two  sons,  L.  B.  Pope,  Jr.,  and  William  H.  Pope, 
and  Hoover  Adams,  until  Mr.  Adams  entered  the  daily  field 
as  of  January  1,  last.  The  Dispatch  has  been  an  influential 
and  progressive  newspaper.  Its  publisher  represented  Har- 
nett County  in  the  General  Assembly.  (See  item  on  news- 
papers as  training  schools  for  former  employees). 

The  Central  Times  was  Harnett  County's  first  newspaper. 
The  Daily  Bulletin  was  published  for  a  period.  The  Weekly 
Guide  was  published  for  several  years  by  J.  P.  Pittman,  but 
was  suspended  in  1917,  following  his  death.  Other  news- 
papers were  published  for  short  periods. 


J.  Roy  Parker,  former  UNC  Journalism  teacher,  and 
Mayon  Parker,  secretary-treasurer,  Eastern  N.  C.  Press  As- 
sociation, have  built  a  splendid  printing  and  publishing 
plant  in  Ahoskie  since  J.  Roy  Parker  purchased  half  interest 
in  the  paper  in  1915.  They  now  operate  a  large  commercial 
business  in  the  plant,  which  also  prints  three  other  news- 
papers in  the  Roanoke-Chowan  area:  Bertie  Ledger  Ad- 
vance, Windsor;  The  Jackson  News,  Jackson,  and  The  Gates 
County  Index,  Gatesville,  which  Parker  Brothers  publish; 
also  print  The  North  Carolina  Farm  Bureau  News,  pub- 
lished by  the  North  Carolina  Farm  Bureau.  Roy  Parker  is 
president  of  the  firm  and  writes  a  weekly  column  for  the 
four  papers;  Mayon  Parker  is  general  manager,  and  John 
J.  Hill  is  vice-president  and  mechanical  superintendent  of 
the  plant. 

ALBEMARLE — Albemarle  Enterprise,  published  Wednes- 
days and  Saturdays,  Independent,  Established  1946,  by 
Charles  A.  Reap;  Charles  A.  Reap,  Editor;  Albemarle-Enter- 
prise,  Publisher;  operates  its  own  print  shop.  This  paper 
was  started  by  Mr.  Reap,  former  county  school  superintend- 
ent, as  a  weekly;  recently  became  a  semi-weekly.   (NR) 

Stanly  News  and  Press,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fridays, 
Independent  Democratic,  Established  1880,  by  Dr.  P.  W. 
Wooley;  John  B.  Harris,  Editor;  Press  Printing  Co.,  Inc., 
Publisher. 

The  Stanly  News  and  Press  is  the  result  of  several  prede- 
cessor and  consolidated  newspapers.  Dr.  Wooley's  paper, 
The  Second  Century,  was  succeeded  by  The  Stanly  Observer, 
the  late  John  R.  Elkins,  owner  and  editor.  In  1890  The 
Stanly  News,  a  successor  to  these  papers,  was  purchased  by 
the  late  J.  D.  Bivens,  who  continued  his  connection  with 
Stanly  County  papers  until  his  death  in  1943.  The  Stanly 
News  was  succeeded  by  The  Stanly  Enterprise  and  later  by 
The  Albemarle   Enterprise.      As  a  result  of  consolidations, 


PAGE  30 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  i 951 


Recently  completed  and  modern  home  of  The  McDowell  News, 

Marion,  ivhich  also  recently  moved  from  the  weekly 

to  the  semi-ioeekly  field 

The  Stanly  News-Herald  was  started  around  1920,  with  A. 
C.  Huneycutt  as  owner  and  editor  and  became  a  semi-weekly 
paper. 

In  1922  Mr.  Bivens  bought  the  Piedmont  Press,  a  Repub- 
lican paper,  edited  by  the  late  A.  Selders,  and  changed  the 
name  to  The  Albemarle  Press.  John  B.  Harris  and  S.  R. 
Andrew  became  part  owners  of  The  Albemarle  Press  in 
1927,  and  in  that  year  The  Press  Printing  Co.,  of  which 
Mr.  Bivens,  Mr.  Harris  and  Mr.  Andrew  were  principal  stock- 
holders, bought  The  Stanly  News-Herald  from  Mr.  Honey- 
cutt,  consolidating  them  into  The  Stanly  News  and  Press. 
Mr.  Harris  and  Mr.  Andrew  purchased  Mr.  Bivens'  stock 
following  his  death  in  1943. 

The  Stanly  News  and  Press  has  a  circulation  exceeding 
7,000,  said  to  be  the  largest  of  any  semi-weekly  in  the 
southeast.  The  company  has  erected  a  modern  press  room 
and  has  installed  a  32-page  Hoe  stereotype  press,  already 
or  soon  to  be  in  operation. 

ASHEBORO — Courier-Tribune,  published  Mondays  and 
Thursdays,  Independent,  Established  1924;  Roy  Cox,  Editor 
and  Publisher. 

The  Courier  was  published  for  many  years  by  the  late 
William  C.  Hammer,  Congressman,  and  members  of  his 
family;  purchased  by  Mr.  Cox  and  consolidated  with  his 
The  Tribune  some  10  years  ago.   (NR) 

ELKIN — Tribune,  published  Mondays  and  Thursdays,  In- 
dependent Democratic,  Established  1911,  by  W.  E.  and  H. 
G.  Nichols;  H.  F.  Laffoon,  Editor;  Elk  Printing  Co.,  Pub- 
lisher; Alan  Browning,  Jr.,  Associate  Editor.  The  Tribune 
has  won  many  State  and  National  awards  for  excellence. 
Publisher  Laffoon  was  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Associa- 
tion, 1945-46. 

H.  G.  Nichols  has  been  with  The  Morganton  News-Herald 
for  many  years,  and  W.  E.  Nichols  was  with  The  Journal- 
Patriot,  North  Wilkesboro,  for  many  years  until  his  death 
a  few  years  ago.  The  paper  operates  a  modern  and  com- 
plete job  printing  plant,  printing  on  contract  The  Yadkin 
Ripple,  Yadkinville,  The  Chatham  Blanketeer,  mill  house 
organ,  and  other  publications.  Former  editors  include:  Dr. 
Joseph  H.  Carter,  pastor,  First  Presbyterian  Church,  New- 
ton, and  Franklin  Hildebrand,  Jennings,  La. 

The  Elkin  Times,  a  Republican  newspaper,  suspended 
publication  after  The  Tribune  was  started  in  1911. 

HAMLET — News-Messenger,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fri- 
days, Independent  Democratic,  Established  1907;  A.  L. 
Way,  Jr.,  Editor;  Chester  A.  Martin,  Publisher;  Virginia 
McC.  Martin,  Business  Manager;  Emily  B.  Way,  Society 
Editor;  J.  D.  Snyder,  Shop  Foreman;  Harold  F.  Brown, 
foreman  of  the  print  shop. 

The  Hamlet  News-Messenger  is  the  result  of  the  consoli- 
dation in  1920  of  The  Hamlet  Messenger,  established  in 
1907,   and  The   Hamlet  News,   established   by  Ralph   Smith 


in  1918.  The  paper  suffered  two  destructive  fires  in  1939 
and  1945.  Cadieu  brothers  operated  this  paper  for  several 
years.  Former  personnel  include:  Robert  C.  Ruark,  inter- 
nationally known  columnist  who  wrote  a  column,  "The  Back 
Door,"  and  Lynn  Nisbett,  Raleigh  correspondent  for  after- 
noon newspapers.  Mr.  Martin  also  publishes  The  East  Rock- 
ingham News. 

The  Sandhill  News  was  published  weekly  in  Hamlet  in 
1946-48  by  J.  W.  Aldridge. 

JACKSONVILLE — Onslow  County  News  and  Views,  pub- 
lished Tuesdays  and  Fridays,  Independent  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1938,  by  J.  Parsons  Brown;  Billy  Arthur,  Editor 
and  Publisher. 

News  and  Views  was  purchased  soon  after  it  was  estab- 
lished by  Mr.  Arthur,  diminutive  editor,  now  a  proud  father, 
who  has  developed  a  splendid  newspaper  and  job  printing 
plant.  In  1947  he  purchased  and  abolished  The  Jackson- 
ville Record,  formerly  The  Onslow  Record.  The  Globe, 
weekly  tabloid  publication  of  U.  S.  Marines  of  Camp  Lejeune, 
is  printed  in  this  plant. 

LAURINBURG — Exchange,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fri- 
days, Independent  Democratic,  Established  188  2,  by  J.  D. 
Bundy  and  T.  T.  Covington;  O.  L.  Moore,  Editor;  Exchange 
Publishing  Co.,  Inc.;  operates  large  job  printing  plant. 

After  a  year  Mr.  Bundy  bought  Mr.  Covington's  interest 
and  published  The  Exchange  until  about  1890,  when  it  was 
bought  by  R.  D.  Phillips,  father  of  Judge  Donald  Phillips, 
who  employed  Archibald  Johnson  as  editor.  Mr.  Johnson 
left  The  Exchange  to  become  editor  of  Charity  and  Children, 
Baptist  Orphanage  paper,  at  Thomasville,  in  which  he  at- 
tained great  distinction.  Other  former  editors  include:  the 
late  J.  P.  Wiggins,  Maxton  and  Fairmont;  Frank  T.  Bizzell, 
Mac  Cameron,  E.  J.  Tillman  and  John  L.  James,  Laurinburg. 
Mr.  Moore  acquired  the  property  in  1919,  and  other  stock- 
holders are  Mrs.  Moore  and  C.  A.  Trolinger,  plant  superin- 
tendent. The  Exchange  was  published  weekly  until  1948 
when  it  became  a  semi-weekly. 

Laurinburg  had  two  or  three  papers  prior  to  the  begin- 
ning of  The  Exchange.  Among  them  was  a  paper  published 
years  before  by  Duncan  McNeill,  father  of  the  noted  poet, 
John  Charles  McNeill. 

LINCOLNTON — Lincoln  County  News,  published  Mondays 
and  Thursdays,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1873; 
Lincoln  County  News,  Inc.,  Publisher;  published  for  many 
years  by  J.  D.  Bivens  and  later  by  his  son-in-law,  A.  B. 
Claytor.   (NR) 

LINCOLNTON — Lincoln  Times,  published  Mondays  and 
Thursdays,  Independent,  Established  1907;  Maude  R.  Mul- 
len, Editor;  Western  Carolina  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.   (NR) 

MARION — McDowell  News,  published  Mondays  and 
Thursdays,  Independent,  Established  1929,  by  F.  A.  Slate; 
John  W.  Setzer,  Publisher;  Mrs.  Rosamond  L.  Braly,  Editor; 
Miss  Pat  Nesbitt,  Societly  Editor;  Oren  Barkley,  Sports  and 
Photography. 

The  McDowell  News  grew  out  of  The  Marion  Star,  started 
in  1926  by  Mr.  Slate  and  later  edited  by  John  Samsey.  Mr. 
Setzer  bought  the  paper  in  1944.  Last  spring  the  plant  was 
moved  into  a  new  modern  building,  erected  and  equipped 
for  the  publication.  The  occasion  was  celebrated  by  issuing 
a  special   edition   of   10  4   pages  containing   a   complete   his- 


Modern  and  new  home  of  The  Thomasville  Tribune,  with  its 

newspaper  and  job  printing  plant  and  office  supply 

and  equipment  business 


Winter-Spring,  i 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  3 1 


tory  of  McDowell  County.     Mr.   Setzer  formerly  was  with 
The  Charlotte  News  and  The  Columbia  (S.C.)  Record. 

MONROE — Enquirer,  published  Mondays  and  Thursdays, 
Democratic,  Established  1872,  by  W.  C.  Wolfe;  John  B. 
Ashcraft,  Editor;  Enquirer  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.;  operates 
commercial  job  printing  shop. 

The  Enquirer  was  published  for  several  years  by  Mr. 
Wolfe  and  then  was  sold  to  J.  W.  Boylan,  who  later  sold  it 
in  190  3  to  B.  C.  and  Eugene  Ashcraft.  After  B.  C.  Ash- 
craft's  death  in  1921,  Eugene  Ashcraft  entered  into  the 
partnership  with  W.  C.  Correll,  H.  M.  Smith  and  L.  E.  Hart. 
After  Eugene  Ashcraft's  death  in  1936,  his  son,  John  B. 
Ashcraft,  entered  the  business,  which  at  that  time  was  in- 
corporated under  the  present  name. 

Journal,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fridays,  Democratic, 
Established  1894,  by  G.  M.  and  R.  F.  Beasley;  R.  F.  Beasley, 
Editor;  G.  M.  Beasley  &  Co.,  Publishers,  operates  a  job 
printing  shop. 

The  Journal  is  one  newspaper  that  is  still  operated  by 
the  same  key  personnel,  the  Beasley  brothers,  with  which 
it  started  55  years  ago.  George  M.  Beasley  handles  the 
business  and  mechanical  end,  and  Roland  F.  Beasley  is  one 
of  the  most  versatile  and  most  quoted  editors  in  the  State. 
He  is  a  former  member  of  the  N.  C.  General  Assembly  and 
was  the  State's  first  Commissioner  of  Public  Welfare.  R.  F. 
Beasley,  Jr.,  has  grown  up  in  the  plant.  George  M.  Beasley. 
Jr.,  is  publisher  of  The  Montgomery  Herald,  at  Troy,  and 
John  Beasley,  a  brother,  is  publisher  of  The  Moore  County 
News,  at  Carthage. 

MOREHEAD  CITY — Carteret  Co.  News-Times,  published 
Tuesdays  and  Fridays,  Independent,  Established  1912,  by 
Lockwood  Phillips;  Lockwood  Phillips,  Editor;  Ruth  Leckey 
Peeling,  Executive  Editor;  Carteret  Publishing  Co.,  Inc., 
Lockwood  Phillips,  President;  Eleanore  Dear  Phillips,  sec- 
retary-treasurer; operates  commercial  printing  plant.  (See 
special  item  on  Beaufort-Morehead  papers.) 

MORGANTON — News-Herald,  published  Mondays  and 
Wednesdays,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  1885,  by 
R.  A.  Cobb  and  T.  G.  Cobb;  Beatrice  Cobb,  Editor  and  Pub- 
lisher, operates  modern  commercial  print  shop. 

The  News-Herald's  immediate  predecessor  was  The  Mor- 
ganton  Star,  which  was  purchased  by  and  merged  with  The 
Morganton  Herald  in  18  90.  It  was  edited  by  W.  C.  Ervin 
for  the  next  seven  years.  In  1901  a  merger  of  The  Herald 
and  The  Burke  County  News  established  The  News-Herald. 
The  Burke  County  News  had  been  established  by  T.  G.  Cobb, 
who  had  been  editor-publisher  of  The  Morganton  Star  and 
on  the  staff  of  The  Morganton  Herald,  and  continued  as 
editor-publisher  of  The  News-Herald  until  his  death  in 
1916.  His  daughter,  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb,  succeeded  him 
and  has  been  editor  and  publisher  for  the  past  3  5  years. 
Also,  Miss  Cobb  has  been  secretary-treasurer  of  the  North 
Carolina  Press  Association  for  30  years.  In  1939  she 
established  and  has  since  been  owner-publisher  of  The  Val- 
dese  News. 

MOUNT  OLIVE — Tribune,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fri- 
days, Independent,  Established  1904,  by  Fred  R.  Mintz; 
Cletus  Brock,  Editor;  Mrs.  Homer  Brock,  Publisher;  Elmer 
Brock,  Business  Manager. 

The  Tribune  was  purchased  in  1916  by  Homer  Brock, 
who  continued  its  publication  until  his  death  in  1949.  Mem- 
bers of  his  family  continue  its  operation.  This  is  said  to 
be  the  only  newspaper  in  North  Carolina  operating  its  own 
home  made  photo-engraving  plant.  It  also  makes  engrav- 
ings for  some  25  eastern  North  Carolina  newspapers,  includ- 
ing several  dailies. 

NEWTON — Catawba  News-Enterprise,  published  Tues- 
days and  Fridays,  Independent  Democratic,  Established 
1879;  Mrs.  Evelyn  Mebane  Odum,  Editor  and  General 
Manager;  Mrs.  lone  Mebane  Mann,  Bookkeeping,  Advertis- 
ing and  Circulation;  News-Enterprise  Publishing  Co.,  ope- 
rates job  printing  plant;  prints  Southern  Synod  Standard, 
semi-monthly  official  publication  of  N.  C.  Synod  of  Evan- 
gelical and  Reformed  Church. 

The  News-Enterprise  resulted  from  the  consolidation  of 
The  Newton  Enterprise,  established  in  1879,  and  The  Ca- 
tawba County  News,  established  in  1903.  Charles  H.  Meb- 
ane, father  of  the  present  co-publishers,  consolidated  the 
papers  in  1919  and  published  the  paper  until  his  death.  His 
son-in-law,  G.  Weaver  Mann,  husband  of  Mrs.  lone  Mebane 
Mann,  was  editor  until  his  death  from  a  heart  attack  in  the 
office  in  1946.     He  was  succeeded  by  Mrs.  Odom,  assistant 


Home  of  The  Mountaineer  at  Waynesville,  containing  modern 
and  complete  newspaper  and  commercial  printing  plant 

and  co-publisher  since  193  2.  A  three-woman  organization 
operated  the  paper  until  late  last  year,  when  Mrs.  Helen 
Ross,  news  editor,  joined  the  Washington  staff  of  Senator 
Willis  Smith.  Marion  H.  McGinnis,  shop  foreman,  started 
as  printer's  devil  many  years  ago  under  Mr.  Mebane.  Addi- 
tional modern  equipment  was  added  last  year. 

Newton's  first  paper  was  The  Enterprise,  started  in  1879 
by  George  Warlick  and  Judge  W.  B.  Gaither.  F.  M.  Wil- 
liams was  publisher  for  many  years,  with  B.  J.  Summerrow 
as  editor,  until  the  consolidation  in  1919.  Mr.  Mebane  had 
acquired  The  Catawba  County  News  in  190  5,  publishing  it 
until  he  consolidated  The  News  with  The  Enterprise. 

Observer,  published  Mondays  and  Wednesdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1933,  by  Charles  H.  Mebane;  C.  H.  Mebane, 
Editor  and  Publisher,  operates  its  own  print  shop. 

The  Observer  became  a  semi-weekly  publication  early  in 
1950.  Mr.  Mebane,  publisher,  is  the  son  of  the  late  C.  H. 
Mebane,  long  editor  of  The  Catawba  News-Enterprise, 
former  State  Superintendent  of  Public  Instruction,  judge, 
college  president  and  recognized  State  leader. 

NORTH  WILKESBORO — Journal  Patriot,  published  Mon- 
days and  Thursdays,  Non-partisan,  Established  1906,  by 
Charles  H.  Cowles;  Mrs.  H.  L.  Carter  and  Julius  C.  Hub- 
bard, Publishers,  operates  modern  job  printing  plant. 

The  Journal  Patriot  is  the  result  of  the  consolidation  of 
The  Wilkes  Patriot,  in  Wilkesboro,  operated  for  many  years 
by  Mr.  Cowles,  former  Republican  Congressman,  and  The 
Wilkes  Journal,  established  in  the  print  shop  of  D.  J.  Carter 
some  30  years  ago.  Mr.  Hubbard  acquired  an  interest  in 
The  Journal,  and  in  1932  this  paper  purchased  and  ab- 
sorbed The  Patriot.  Mrs.  Carter  took  over  her  husband's 
interest  after  his  death  a  few  years  ago.  The  paper,  mod- 
ern and  progressive,  became  a  semi-weekly  several  years 
ago. 

OXFORD — Public  Ledger,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fri- 
days, Independent,  Established  1881,  by  J.  T.  Britt  (?); 
Tom  W.  Johnson,  Editor;  A.  N.  Critcher,  Publisher,  ope- 
rates its  own  print  shop.  Publisher  Critcher  was  former 
publisher  of  The  Wilkes  Patriot,  Wilkesboro,  consolidated 
with  The  Wilkes  Journal  in  193  2.  Among  earlier  publica- 
tions in  Oxford  was  The  Torchlight. 

ROCKINGHAM — East  Rockingham  News,  published  Tues- 
days and  Fridays,  Independent,  Established  194  9,  by  Chester 
A.  Martin;  Leverne  Prosser,  Editor;  Chester  A.  Martin,  Pub- 
lisher. Mr.  Martin  is  also  publisher  of  The  Hamlet  News- 
Messenger. 

Richmond  County  Journal,  published  Mondays  and  Thurs- 
days, Independent,  Established  1931,  by  Scott  M.  Thomas; 
J.  Neal  Cadieu,  Editor  and  Publisher,  operates  modern  com- 
mercial printing  plant. 


PAGE  32 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1 951 


Mr.  Cadieu,  former  publisher  of  The  Hamlet  News-Messen- 
ger, purchased  The  Journal  from  Mr.  Thomas  in  193  7  and 
in  1939  converted  it  to  a  semi-weekly.  In  1948  The  Journal 
purchased  and  absorbed  The  Sandhill  News,  of  Hamlet.  The 
Journal  was  the  third  non-daily  paper  in  the  State  to  join 
the  Audit  Bureau  of  Circulations,  in  1942,  and  the  first 
in  the  State  to  be  accepted  as  a  Greater  Weekly,  of  which 
there  are  only  265  in  the  nation. 

ROXBORO — Courier-Times,  published  Mondays  and  Thurs- 
days, Independent,  Established  1881,  by  D.  W.  Whitaker; 
J.  W.  Noell,  Editor;  Courier-Times  Publishing  Co.;  printed 
in  its  own  shop. 

The  Courier,  older  of  the  consolidated  papers,  was  owned 
in  188  3  by  E.  C.  Hackney,  Durham.  He  employed  John  A. 
Noell,  formerly  with  The  Alamance  Gleaner,  to  take  charge 
and  operate  the  paper.  In  188  6  Mr.  Noell  and  his  brother, 
Joseph  W.  Noell,  who  also  worked  on  The  Alamance  Gleaner, 
purchased  the  plant,  and  J.  A.  Noell  continued  its  operation. 
J.  W.  Noell  joined  his  brother  in  operation  of  the  plant  in 
1890.  In  1920  John  A.  Noell,  senior  partner,  died  and  J. 
W.  Noell  purchased  his  interest.  (Mr.  Noell  is  still  going 
strong  after  60  years  of  newspaper  publishing  and  editing 
in  Roxboro — and  is  an  avid  bridge  player  with  the  Rox- 
boro  widows.)  He  is  a  former  president  of  the  N.  C.  Press 
Association.  In  1944  The  Courier  and  The  Person  County 
Times,  long  competitors,  were  consolidated  .as  The  Courier- 
Times. 

SANFORD — Herald,  published  Mondays  and  Thursdays, 
Independent  Democratic,  Established  192'0;  W.  E.  Horner, 
Editor;  Herald  Publishing  Co.,  Publisher. 

In  1930  Mr.  Horner,  former  Representative  in  the  N.  C. 
General  Assembly  and  candidate  for  Congress,  purchased 
The  Sanford  Journal,  changed  its  name  to  The  Herald  and 
made  it  a  semi-weekly.  He  is  a  former  president  of  the 
N.  C.  Press  Association. 

The  Sanford  Express,  published  by  Mr.  St.  Clair,  was 
discontinued  in  1937.  An  earlier  Sanford  newspaper  was 
The  Carolina  Banner. 

SHELBY — Cleveland  Times,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fri- 
days, Independent,  Established  1941,  by  The  Cleveland 
Times  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.;  Ed  Post,  Jr.,  Editor,  operates 
commercial  print  shop;  corporation  owners  include:  Ed 
Post,  Jr.,  C.  C.  McMurry,  Jr.,  and  Paul  B.  Arrowood. 

The  Times  was  founded  by  Will  Arey,  Jr.,  now  in  foreign 
service  of  U.  S.  State  Dept.  in  Bogota,  Colombia,  and  Rush 
Hamrick,  Jr.,  now  associated  with  his  father  in  Kendall 
Medicine  Co.,  Shelby.  During  World  War  I  both  were  in 
military  service,  and  Mrs.  Hamrick  operated  the  paper. 
Former  editors  and  publishers  include:  J.  D.  Fitz,  now 
managing  editor,  Morganton  News-Herald,  and  G.  Norman 
Benjamin,  manager,  Arlington  (Va. )  Sun.  Editor  Post 
was  in  the  U.  S.  Navy  during  World  War  II,  separated  as 
lieutenant. 

SMITHFIELD — Herald,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fridays, 
Democratic,  Established  1882;  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Jr.,  Editor 
and  Publisher;  owned  by  a  partnership,  including  Mrs.  T.  J. 
Lassiter,  Sr.,  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Jr.,  and  W.  C.  Lassiter. 

The  Herald  was  acquired  by  J.  M.  Beaty  about  1890,  and 
in  1895  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Sr.,  became  a  partner.  Mr.  Lassiter 
was  editor  for  about  20  years  until  his  death  in  1920.  Mrs. 
Lassiter  and  W.  M.  Gaskin  published  the  paper  until  1934, 
when  T.  J.  Lassiter,  Jr.,  joined  the  firm,  purchasing  the 
Gaskin  interest.  T.  J.  Lassiter,'  Jr.,  is  a  former  UNC  Jour- 
nalism instructor  and  former  president  of  the  Eastern  N.  C. 
Press  Association.  W.  C.  Lassiter,  Raleigh,  is  attorney  for 
the  N.  C.  Press  Association. 

The  Johnston  Courier  was  published  in  Smithfield  in  the 
18  70s.  The  Smithfield  Journal,  The  Smithfield  Observer 
and  The  Johnston  County  Record  were  published  in  Smith- 
field  after  the  turn  of  the  century. 

STATESVILLE — The  Landmark,  published  Mondays  and 
Thursdays,  Independent,  Established  1874,  by  J.  B.  Hussey; 
Pegram  A.  Bryant,  Publisher.  Mr.  Bryant  acquired  The 
Landmark  many  years  ago,  and  in  19  20  began  publication  of 
The  Statesville  Daily,  evening  paper,  in  the  same  plant. 

Among  its  former  prominent  editors  were  Joseph  P.  Cald- 
well, later  editor  of  The  Charlotte  Observer,  and  R.  R. 
Clark. 

The  Mascot  was  established  before  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury and  published  for  several  years  by  the  late  Col.  A.  D. 
Watts.  When  he  became  secretary  to  Senator  Simmons,  he 
sold  The  Mascot,  which  was  later  suspended. 


THOMASVILLE — The  Tribune,  published  Tuesdays  and 
Thursdays,  Established  188  7;  Thomas  J.  Shaw,  Editor; 
The  Thomasville  Tribune,  Inc.,  Publisher,  H.  A.  Cecil,  Sr., 
president;  H.  A.  Cecil,  Jr.,  secretary-treasurer;  operates 
modern  commercial  print  shop  and  office  supply  store. 

The  Tribune  is  the  result  of  several  consolidations  and 
absorptions.  The  Thomasville  Times  was  founded  in  1887 
and  The  Chairtown  News  started  in  1920.  A  consolidation 
of  these  two  in  193  2  resulted  in  The  News-Times,  published 
for  many  years  by  W.  G.  Greene.  The  Thomasville  Tribune 
was  founded  in  193  9  and  operated  by  H.  A.  Cecil,  Jr.  Later 
his  father,  formerly  with  the  High  Point  Enterprise,  joined 
the  firm.  About  a  year  ago  the  Cecils  purchased  The  News- 
Times  from  Mr.  Greene  and  merged  it  with  The  Tribune. 
At  the  same  time  the  Thomasville  Tribune  moved  into  a 
modern  new  home,  one  of  the  best  semi-weekly  newspaper 
plants  in  the  State. 

WALLACE — Enterprise,  published  Mondays  and  Thurs- 
days, Democratic;  Established  1923;  H.  L.  Oswald,  Editor  and 
Publisher. 

The  Enterprise  operates  one  of  the  most  modern  com- 
mercial printing  plants  in  the  State.  In  it  the  publisher 
prints  two  other  weekly  newspapers,  The  Warsaw-Faison 
News  and  The  Pender  Chronicle,  Burgaw,  of  which  he  is 
also  publisher. 

WAYNESVILLE — Mountaineer,  published  Tuesdays  and 
Fridays,  Independent,  Established  1884;  W.  C.  Russ,  Editor; 
Waynesville  Printing  Co.,  Publisher;  operates  modern  news- 
paper and  commercial  printing  plant,  printing  college  pe- 
riodicals. 

In  1931  Mr.  Russ  purchased  The  Mountaineer  from  Thom- 
as M.  Seawell,  and  in  1934  M.  T.  Bridges,  mechanical  super- 
intendent, became  a  partner  in  the  business.  Machinery 
and  equipment  have  been  added  each  year  until  it  now  has 
the  most  complete  print  shop  in  the  Asheville-Knoxville- 
Greenville,  Georgia  area.  The  plant  is  one  of  the  few  in 
the  weekly  field  doing  four-color  commercial  printing.  The 
Mountaineer  became  a  semi-weekly  several  years  ago.  It 
occupies  two  floors  of  its  three-story  building. 

WHITEVILLE — The  News  Reporter,  published  Mondays 
and  Thursdays,  Democratic,  Established  1895,  by  a  Rev. 
Mr.  Smith;  Willard  G.  Cole,  Editor;  Leslie  S.  Thompson, 
owner-publisher;   operates  commercial  print  shop. 

The  News  Reporter  is  the  descendant  of  The  Columbus 
News,  founded  by  a  Baptist  minister,  at  Fair  Bluff,  probably 
before  18  95.  Around  the  turn  of  the  century  it  was  pur- 
chased by  Allen  J.  Maxwell,  who  moved  it  to  Whiteville. 
Local  politicians,  who  owned  The  Trucker's  Reporter,  at 
Chadbourn,  purchased  it  and  combined  the  two  papers  as 
The  News  Reporter.  It  changed  hands  several  times  in 
the  early  1900s.  One  brief  owner  was  Roland  F.  Beasley, 
editor  of  The  Monroe  Journal,  and  for  several  years  it  was 
published  by  W.  B.  Keziah,  of  Southport.  Mayon  Parker, 
of  Parker  Bros.,  Ahoskie,  was  editor  for  a  few  years.  In 
1938  J.  A.  Sharpe,  Sr.,  of  The  Lumberton  Robesonian,  and 
Leslie  S.  Thompson  bought  the  paper,  Mr.  Thompson  pur- 
chasing Mr.  Sharpe's  interest  in  19  44.  It  became  a  semi- 
weekly  in  193  6.  James  A.  Rogers,  a  former  editor,  became 
editor  of  The  Florence  (S.C.)  Morning  News.  Mr.  Thomp- 
son is  also  co-owner  of  The  State  Port  Pilot,  Southport. 

WILLIAMSTON — Enterprise,-  published  Tuesdays  and 
Thursdays,  Independent,  Established  18  99,  by  a  Mr.  Dail; 
F.  M.  Manning,  Editor;  W.  C.  Manning,  Jr.,  General  Man- 
ager; Enterprise  Publishing  Co.,  owned  by  W.  C.  Manning, 
Jr.,  W.  H.  Booker  and  F.  M.  Manning;  operates  commercial 
printing  plant. 

After  a  year  Mr.  Dail  sold  the  paper  to  Alfred  E.  Whit- 
more,  who  published  it  until  1908.  Then  it  was  bought  by 
W.  C.  Manning,  editor  and  publisher,  until  his  death  in 
1938.  The  business  was  then  taken  over  by  his  two  sons, 
W.  C.  Manning,  Jr.,  and  F.  M.  Manning,  and  W.  H.  Booker, 
who  also  edit  and  publish  The  Weekly  Herald,  Roberson- 
ville,  and  The  Roanoke  Beacon,  Plymouth. 

The  first  paper  in  Martin  County  was  The  Democrat  Ban- 
ner, published  in  Williamston  in  18  56.  Other  early  publica- 
tions were  The  Williamston  Mercury,  The  Williamston  Echo, 
The  Eastern  Carolinian,  The  Martin  County  Sun  and  The 
Expositor. 

ZEBULON — Record,  published  Tuesdays  and  Fridays,  In- 
dependent Democratic,  Established  1923;  Barrie  S.  Davis, 
Editor;    James  M.   Potter,   Jr.,   Publisher;    operates   modern 


Winter-Spring,  )<?5 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  33 


and  complete  commercial  print  shop.  Also  prints  the  North 
Carolina  Catholic  for  Nazareth  Orphanage,  Raleigh,  The 
Gold  Leaf  Farmer,  Wendell,  and  The  Wake  Weekly,  Wake 
Forest. 

The  Record  Publishing  Co.,  operated  by  Theo.  B.  Davis, 
Sr.,  published  The  Record  until  1945,  when  it  became  Theo. 
Davis   Sons,   purchased   by  Barrie  and   Ferd   Davis  on   their 


release  from  the  Air  Force.  James  M.  Potter,  Jr.,  pur- 
chased a  one-third  interest  in  the  business  last  year.  Ferd 
L.  Davis  was  editor  until  he  entered  Army  service  last  year, 
when  Barrie  Davis  became  editor.  The  three  owners  are 
all  officers  of  the  N.  C.  National  Guard.  Theo.  Davis  Sons 
owns  controlling  interests  in  The  Gold  Leaf  Farmer  Pub- 
lishing Co.,  Inc.,  Wendell,  of  which  Ferd  Davis  is  president. 


North  Carolina  is  Well  Supplied  With  133  Weekly  Papers 


North  Carolina  is  very  well  supplied  with  133  news- 
papers in  the  weekly  field.  This  does  not  include 
numbers  of  other  weekly  publications  in  trade  or 
other  fields  which  are  not  newspapers  in  the  accepted 
sense  of  the  word.  The  State  thus  has  an  average 
of  about  one  and  one-third  weekly  newspapers  for 
every  one  of  the  100  counties.  Some  counties  have 
other  frequency  papers,  of  course,  but  even  then  four 
or  five  counties  in  the  State  have  no  newspapers. 
They  are  supplied  with  their  newspaper  needs  by 
nearby  or  adjoining  county  newspapers. 

Generally  speaking,  the  State  weekly  newspapers 
are  now  strong  and  prosperous,  a  condition  which 
has  not  existed  always.  Many  of  them  have  strug- 
gled through  lean  years.  Even  now,  they  are  plagued 
with  scarcity  of  newsprint,  as  are  all  newspapers. 

Of  the  133  weekly  papers,  35  did  not  respond  to 
requests  for  information.  A  few  of  them  may  have 
suspended  and,  in  other  cases,  new  editors  or  pub- 
lishers may  have  taken  charge.  The  symbol  (NR) 
indicates  no  direct  report  and  information  given  may 
not  be  entirely  complete  or  correct.  The  list,  pri- 
marily from  Ayer's  Newspaper  Directory,  supple- 
mented in  some  cases,  is  as  follows : 

ABERDEEN — Sandhill  Citizen,  published  Thursdays. 
Democratic,  Established  1993;  H.  Clifton  Blue,  Editor  and 
Publisher,  operates  Captain  Print  Shop,  job  printing".  Mr. 
Blue  has  twice  represented  Moore  County  in  the  General 
Assembly. 

ASHEVILLE — Asheville  News,  published  Fridays,  Repub- 
lican, Established  1926,  by  Oscar  Barrett;  Frederick  Sev- 
erance, Editor  and  Publisher.  This  paper  was  formerly 
The  West  Asheville  News,  Walter  A.  Ward,  former  publish- 
er, and  Rom  Reid,  former  editor. 

Southern  News,  (Negro),  published  Saturdays,  Non-parti- 
san, Established  1936;  Eugene  Smith,  Editor  and  Publish- 
er.   (NR) 

AYDEN — Ayden  Dispatch,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1914;  Andrews  Printing  Co.,  Inc.,  Pub- 
lisher; operated  for  many  years  by  the  late  J.  C.  Andrews: 
continued  by  his  estate.    (NR) 

BAYBORO — Herald,  published  Fridays,  Independent,  Es- 
tablished 1931,  by  J.  M.  Reel;  Dallas  Mallison,  Editor  and 
Publisher.  After  Mr.  Reel  retired,  the  paper  was  operated 
by  Murry  W.  Munns  until  1948.  B.  B.  Ross,  Washington, 
was  publisher  for  a  time,  with  Russ  Miller  as  editor.  Last 
year  Mrs.  Mayona  T.  Noble  and  son,  Richard  V.  Noble, 
operated  the  paper  for  a  few  months.  The  son  entered 
military  service  last  fall,  and  Mr.  Mallison  became  owner 
as  of  January  1,  1951. 

BELHAVEN — Pilot,  published  Thursdays,  Independent, 
Established  1948,  by  Victor  Meekins  and  printed  in  his 
Coastland  Times  office  at  Manteo;  Thomas  E.  Spence,  editor 
and  manager.  Mrs.  Harriet  Brown  Harris  was  formerly 
news  editor. 

The  Belhaven  Times,  later  The  Belhaven  Times  and  Hyde 
County  Record,  was  discontinued  in  the  early  1930s. 

BELMONT — Banner,  published  Wednesdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1936;  W.  O.  Barrett,  Editor;  B.  A.  Low- 
rance,  Publisher;   printed  in  connection  with  The  Mecklen- 


burg Times  and  The  Mount  Holly  News,  B.  Arp  Lowrance, 
Publisher. 

BENSON — Review,  published  Thursdays,  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1911;  Mrs.  Margaret  Benton  Smith,  Editor;  Ben- 
son Printing  Co.,  Publisher.  J.  B.  Benton,  editor  of  the 
Mebane  Enterprise  in  1921-22,  acquired  The  Review  soon 
after  and  operated  it  until  his  death  in  March,  1950,  when 
Mrs.  Smith,  who  had  been  assistant  and  operator  during  his 
illness,  became  editor.     The  paper  operates  a  print  shop. 

BLACK  MOUNTAIN — News,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1945,  by  J.  C.  Cornelius;  Gordon  H. 
Greenwood,  Editor;   Greenwood  and  Dougherty,  Publishers. 

BOONE — Watauga  Democrat,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1888,  by  Robert  C.  Rivers  (Sr.);  R. 
C.  Rivers,  Editor  and  Publisher;  operates  job  print  shop. 
Founder  Rivers  published  The  Democrat  for  around  40 
years.  He  represented  his  country  in  the  General  Assembly. 
His  son  is  carrying  on  as  publisher.  (NR) 

BREVARD — Transylvania  Times,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  1896;  Ed  M.  Anderson,  Publisher; 
John  I.  Anderson,  Editor;  Ira  B.  Armfield,  Business  Man- 
ager. 

This  is  one  of  the  several  weekly  papers  published  by 
Ed  Anderson  in  the  mountain  counties.  The  Transylvania 
News  was  established  in  1896;  The  Times  was  established 
in  1931,  and  in  193  2'  these  two  papers  were  consolidated  as 
The  Times. 

BRYSON  CITY — Times,  published  Fridays,  Independent, 
Established  1897;  Leroy  Sossamon,  Editor  and  Publisher; 
operates  job  print  shop;  published  for  several  years  by 
J.  A.  Gray  and  J.  M.  Byrd;  purchased  a  few  years  ago  by 
Mr.  Sossamon.      (NR) 

BURGAW — Pender  Chronicle,  published  Thursdays,  Dem- 
ocratic, Established  1896;  W.  W.  Williams,  Jr.,  Editor;  H. 
L.  Oswald,  Publisher.  This  is  one  of  the  three  papers  pub- 
lished by  Mr.  Oswald,  the  others  being  The  Warsaw-Faison 
News   and   The  Wallace   Enterprise.     All   are   printed   in   the 


Attractive  snow-covered   home  of  The   Watauga  Democrat  in 

the  summer  resort  town  of  Boone  in  Northivestern 

North  Carolina 


PAGE  34 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1 951 


modern,  new  brick  building  constructed  in  1947  and  con- 
taining one  of  the  most  up-to-date  printing  plants  in  this 
State. 

BURNSVILLE — Yancey  Record,  published  Thursdays,  In- 
dependent, Established  1936,  by  Dr.  R.  Fouts,  B.  B.  Penland, 
C.  M.  Bailey  and  Mrs.  C.  R.  Hamrick;  Arney  C.  Fox,  Editor 
and  Publisher.  Mrs.  Hamrick  was  editor  until  last  July 
when  Mr.  Fox  purchased  and  has  since  published  the  paper. 
The  paper  operates  a  small  print  shop. 

The  Burnsville  Eagle  was  established,  edited  and  pub- 
lished for  several  years  by  J.  M.  Lyon  and  O.  R.  Lewis.  Mr. 
Lewis  still  lives  in  Burnsville,  and  Mr.  Lyon,  90,  now  lives 
in  Knoxville,  Tenn.  They  sold  their  paper  in  193  6  to  S.  T. 
Henry,  publisher  of  the  Tri-County  News,  Spruce  Pine. 

CANTON — Enterprise,  published  Thursdays,  Independent, 
Established  1904;  Lura  Wright,  Editor;  Harley  E.  Wright, 
Publisher.  Present  owners  have  operated  The  Enterprise 
since  192  2.     The  plant  operates  a  job  print  shop. 

CAROLINA  BEACH — Sim,  published  Saturdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1939;  issued  only  during  summer 
season;   Foster  Edwards,  Editor  and  Publisher.    (NR) 

CARTHAGE — Moore  County  News,  published  Thurs- 
days, Independent  Democratic,  Established  1877;  John 
Beasley,  Editor  and  Publisher;  printed  in  connection  with 
Montgomery  Herald.  J.  B.  Benton,  later  of  the  Benson 
Review,  was  a  former  publisher.    (NR) 

CHADBOURN — Columbus  County  News,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  1928;  B.  G.  Lewis,  Editor  and 
Publisher.   (NR) 

CHAPEL  HILL — Weekly,  published  Fridays,  Non-parti- 
san, Established  1923,  by  Louis  Graves;  Louis  Graves,  Edi- 
tor and  Publisher;  Joe  Jones,  Assistant  Editor.  It  is  printed 
in  its  own  shop,  a  modern  job  printing  plant. 

The  Chapel  Hill  Weekly  is  a  homey,  folksy  type  of  paper 
reflecting  the  attitude  of  its  editor.  Ordinary  and  everyday 
incidents  are  handled  in  an  intensely  interesting  way.  Its 
articles  and  editorials  are  probably  quoted  more  often  by 
the  papers  in  the  State  than  from  any  other  newspaper. 
Readers  devour  avidly  every  item.  The  New  York  Times 
described  it  as  "Unique  in  American  journalism"  and  the 
New  York  Herald  Tribune  once  announced  "What  the  coun- 
try needs  is  more  papers  like  the  Chapel  Hill  Weekly." 
Editor  Louis  Graves  made  an  enviable  reputation  as  a  re- 
porter on  leading  New  York  papers.  He  headed  the  UNC 
School  of  Journalism  for  a  few  years,  then  decided  to  lead 
an  unhurried  life  in  the  weekly  newspaper  field. 

CHARLOTTE — Mecklenburg  Times,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  19  24,  by  J.  Z.  Green  and  B.  Arp 
Lowrance;  B.  Arp  Lowrance,  Editor;  The  Mecklenburg- 
Times,  Publisher. 

In  1927  Mr.  Lowrance  bought  Mr.  Green's  interest  and  in 
1945  purchased  Beasley's  Farm  and  Home  Weekly,  con- 
solidating it  with  The  Times.  Mr.  Lowrance  also  is  pub- 
lisher of  The  Belmont  Banner  and  The  Mount  Holly  News. 
He  is  vice-president  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association. 

Post,  (Negro),  published  Saturdays,  Independent,  Estab- 
lished 1920;  H.  Houston,  Editor  and  Publisher.   (NR) 

Southern  Textile  News,  published  Saturdays,  Textile,  Es- 
tablished 1945,  by  John  M.  Mullen;  John  M.  Mullen,  Editor; 
Mullen  Publications,  Inc.   (NR) 

CHERRYVILLE — Eagle,  published  Wednesdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1906,  by  L.  H.  J.  Houser;  Fred  K.  Hous- 
er,  Editor  and  Publisher.  The  Eagle,  established  by  the 
present  editor's  father,  has  been  in  the  Houser  family  for 
45  years. 

CLAYTON — News,  published  Thursdays,  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1912;  J.  Melson  Pittman,  Editor;  Clayton  News, 
Inc.,  Publisher.    (NR) 

CLINTON — Sampson  Independent,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  1914;  F.  Grover  Britt,  Editor; 
Clinton  Publishing  Co.,  Inc. 

The  Independent  was  established  as  The  Sampson  Demo- 
crat in  1893  and  was  edited  for  many  years  by  L.  A.  Be- 
thune  and  Oscar  J.  Peterson.  The  Democrat  and  The  News 
Dispatch  were  consolidated  in  1924  and  the  name  changed 
to  The  Independent.  In  1929  The  Independent  purchased, 
absorbed  and  discontinued  publication  of  The  Sampson  Ob- 
server. An  earlier  Clinton  paper  was  The  Caucasian,  estab- 
lished many  years  before  and  edited  for  several  years  by 


Marion  Butler,  later  U.  S.  Senator. 

Sampson  News,  published  Thursdays,  Republican,  Estab- 
lished 19  29,  by  H.  N.  McKenzie;  James  H.  Silvertsen,  Editor; 
Sampson  Publishing  Co. 

In  1941  Mr.  Silvertsen  purchased  The  News  and  organ- 
ized The  Sampson  Publishing  Co.  He  also  publishes  The 
Roseboro  News,  which  is  printed  in  the  shop  at  Clinton. 

COOLEEMEE — Journal,  published  Thursdays,  Democrat- 
ic, Established  1906;  Mrs.  J.  C.  Sell,  Editor;  Cooleemee 
Journal,   Publisher;    printed  under  contract.    (NR) 

DANBURY — Reporter,  published  Thursdays,  Democratic, 
Established  1872,  by  Dr.  John  Pepper;  N.  E.  Pepper  and 
E.  Vance  Pepper,  Editors  and  Publishers.  The  Reporter 
has  been  published  continuously,  never  missing  an  issue  in 
its  7  4  years  of  operation.  It  is  now  in  its  fourth  generation 
of  Peppers. 

DENTON — Davidson  Record,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1939,  by  John  O.  Garner;  John  O. 
Garner,  Editor;   Denton  Publishing  Co. 

This  paper  was  first  printed  on  contract  by  The  News- 
Times,  Thomasville.  The  firm  was  incorporated  in  1943 
and  established  its  own  plant  with  job  printing  equipment, 
at  Denton. 

DURHAM — Carolina  Times,  (Negro),  published  Satur- 
days, Independent,  Established  1919;  L.  E.  Austin,  Editor; 
Carolina  Times  Publishing  Co.     (NR) 

News  Journal,  published  Thursdays,  Independent,  Estab- 
lished 1920;  Mattie  W.  Thaxton,  Editor;  News  Journal,  Pub- 
lisher; G.  E.  Isaacs,  owner,  also  publishes  Franklinton  Post 
and  Orange  County  Times,  Hillsboro.   (NR) 

The  Public  Appeal,  published  Fridays,  tabloid  form,  inde- 
pendent, established  in  1950  by  "Wimpy"  Jones;  "Wimpy" 
Jones,  editor  and  publisher;  printed  by  Union  Printers,  Inc. 
The  Public  Appeal  was  started  in  April,  1950,  but  was  issued 
intermittently  earlier  as  The  Law  Enforcement  Journal. 
(Incomplete  report.) 

EDENTON — Chowan  Herald,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1934,  by  J.  E.  Bufflap  and  Hector  Lup- 
ton;  J.  E.  Bufflap,  Editor;  The  Chowan  Herald,  Publisher; 
operates  a  job  printing  shop. 

The  Edenton  Daily  News  published  for  a  short  time  with 
John  C.  Sykes  as  editor,  suspended  publication  in  the  early 
1930s. 

ELIZABETH  CITY — The  Albemarle  Star,  published 
Thursdays,  Independent  Democratic,  Established  April, 
1950,  by  William  F.  Haskett;  W.  F.  Haskett,  owner  and 
Publisher;  A.  J.  McClelland,  General  Manager;  Maud  Mc- 
Clelland, Editor. 

The  Albemarle  Star  is  a  successor  to  The  Independent, 
established  in  1908  and  edited  and  published  for  many 
years  by  George  W.  Haskett,  father  of  the  present  owner. 
It  operated  as  a  weekly,  then  as  a  semi-weekly,  and  in 
19  48-49  as  a  morning  daily.  This  paper  was  sold  January 
1,  1950,  and  closed  out.  Mr.  Haskett  entered  service  in  the 
U.  S.  Army  in  September,  1950. 

ELIZABETHTOWN — Bladen  Journal,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  1907,  by  John  H.  Clark, 
Clarkton;  Mrs.  E.  F.  McCulloch,  Editor;  Norman  McCulloch, 
Associate;  Clinton  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.;  printed  in  The 
Sampson  Independent  office.  F.  Grover  Britt,  Editor,  The 
Independent,  is  part  owner  of  The  Bladen  Journal.  Mrs. 
McCulloch  has  been  editor  for  20  years. 

ENFIELD — Progress,  published  Fridays,  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1905;  Eric  W.  Rodgers,  Publisher;  James  Bate- 
man,  Managing  Editor;  printed  in  the  office  of  the  Scotland 
Neck  Commonwealth,  also  published  by  Mr.  Rodgers. 

FAIRMONT — Times-Messenger,  published  Thursdays,  In- 
dependent, Established  1935,  by  J.  P.  Wiggins;  Mrs.  Alex 
McDaniels,  Jr.,  Editor;  Dougald  Coxe,  Publisher;  printed  in 
the  plant  of  The  Lumberton  Post. 

FARMVILLE — Enterprise,  published  Fridays,  Democrat- 
ic, Established  1910;  James  B.  Hockaday,  Editor;  Rouse 
Printery,  Publisher.   (NR) 

FAYETTEVILLE — People's  Advocate,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  1922;  Mrs.  Fred  W.  Vaughan, 
Editor  and  Publisher.  (NR) 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  35 


FOREST  CITY — Courier,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1918,  by  Treylon  Brown;  Clarence  Griffin, 
Editor-General  Manager;  Ed  M.  Anderson,  Publisher. 

The  Courier  has  won  several  awards  for  excellence  from 
the  N.  C.  Press  Asosciation.  It  operates  a  modern  print 
shop,  in  which  is  printed  The  Spindale  Sun,  also  an  Ed  An- 
derson publication.  Former  editors  and  publishers  include: 
Gary  Hiott,  J.  L.  O.  Thompson,  Howard  C.  Hull,  Clarence  E. 
Alcock,  who  sold  the  paper  to  Anderson  and  Griffin  in  1942'. 

Forest  City's  first  newspaper  was  The  News,  established 
by  Columbus  C.  Erwin  in  1885.  After  it  was  burned  out, 
another  paper,  also  The  News,  was  started  in  1887  by  Prof. 
E.  O.  Thompson.  Later  it  was  operated  by  Charles  Scott, 
who  suspended  publication  in  18  8  9.  The  Forest  City  Leader 
was  established  that  year  by  J.  C.  Green,  now  of  Thomas- 
ville.  Prof.  J.  W.  Griffin  was  editor  for  several  years.  Z. 
M.  McKinney  published  The  Ledger  about  a  year  and  sus- 
pended it.  Late  in  1898  The  Forest  City  Press  appeared, 
with  Forrest  J.  Reid  as  editor  and  publisher,  changing  the 
name  to  The  Leader-Vidette  and  still  later  to  The  Enquirer. 
It  suspended  in  1899. 

Other  Forest  City  papers  include:  The  Forest  City  Weekly 
Times,  started  in  1901  by  Mrs.  Jennie  S.  Davis;  The  Forest 
City  Progress,  Dan  Kanipe,  publisher,  started  in  190  2,  de- 
stroyed by  fire  in  1903;  Forest  City  Herald,  Z.  V.  Fowles 
and  Gary  Hiott,  editors  and  publishers,  started  in  1908, 
purchased  by  J.  V.  Ware  in  1912  with  B.  Arp  Lowrance  as 
editor.  It  was  sold  to  Fred  W.  Amos  later  that  year.  It 
became  The  Free  Press,  published  by  Broadus  DePriest  in 
1914  and  was  leased  to  Walter  S.  Crocker,  with  Bert  H. 
Bridges  as  editor.  The  Free  Press  was  suspended  in  1918, 
and  later  that  year  The  Courier  was  established. 

FRANKLIN — Franklin    Press    and    Highland    Maconian, 

published  Thursdays,  Independent,  Established  188  6,  by 
Leon  Siler;  Weimar  Jones,  Editor  and  Publisher;  Bob 
Sloan,  Business  Manager;  operates  commercial  print  shop. 

The  Franklin  Press  absorbed  and  continues  to  use  as  a 
part  of  its  name  The  Highlands  Maconian,  established  and 
operated  by  J.  J.  Moore  for  about  two  years  in  the  early 
1930s.  Mr.  Jones  purchased  the  paper  in  1945  and  in  1948 
took  in  Mr.  Sloan  as  a  partner.  This  is  the  oldest  paper 
west  of  Waynesville  and  the  oldest  establishment  in  Frank- 
lin. Former  editors  and  publishers  include:  W.  A.  Curtis 
and  his  son,  W.  E.  Curtis,  S.  H.  Lyle,  Jr.,  J.  B.  Lyle,  S.  A. 
Harris,  Mrs.  J.  W.  C.  Johnson  and  son,  Blackburn  W.  John- 
son. 

FRANKLINTON — Post,  published  Thursdays,  Democratic, 
Established  193  9;  Lucy  B.  Holding,  Editor;  G.  E.  Isaacs, 
Publisher.   (NR) 

FUQUAY  SPRINGS — Independent,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  193  5,  by  Todd  Caldwell;  Todd 
Caldwell,  Editor  and  Publisher;  Jack  Ragsdale,  Shop  Fore- 
man and  Advertising  Manager. 

The  Independent  was  printed  for  a  period  in  The  Dunn 
Dispatch  office,  then  established  its  own  shop,  which  also 


PUBLICATIONS  IN  N.  C.  ON  WHICH 

LITTLE  DATA  SECURED;   REFERENCE 

A  few  publications,  about  which  some  information  has 
been  received  but  not  enough  for  a  complete  record,  are 
being  issued  in  North  Carolina.  Among  them  are  the  fol- 
lowing : 

Eastern  Searchlight,  published  by  Laurinburg  Institute 
(colored) . 

Wingate  Junior  College  students  publish  monthly  tabloid 
paper. 

Southern  Synod  Standard,  Newton,  semi-monthly  official 
publication  of  N.  C.  Synod  of  Evangelical  and  Reformed 
Church;  printed  by  News-Enterprise  Publishing  Co. 

The  Pinehurst  Book  Seller,  issued  by  the  Pinehurst  Print- 
ing Co.,  publishers  of  The  Pinehurst  Outlook. 

Wake  Farm  News,  Raleigh,  published  by  the  Wake  Farm- 
ers Cooperative. 

Wake  Forest  Student,  monthly,  established  in  188  2,  edited 
and  published  by  students. 

The  North  Carolina  Catholic,  Nazareth,  N.  C.  (near  Ral- 
eigh), Father  Frederick  Coch,  editor. 

Glimpses,  Greensboro,  published  spasmodically,  Chamber 
of  Commerce,  Greensboro  Chamber  of  Commerce,  Publisher; 
mimeographed  sheet. 

The  Tar  Heel  Amvet,  Durham. 


does  job  printing.  Editor  Caldwell  formerly  worked  on  The 
Moore  County  News,  Carthage;  The  Benson  Review,  The 
Kannapolis  Independent  and  The  Dunn  Dispatch. 

Former  papers  include  Fuquay  Gold  Leaf,  edited  briefly 
by  A.  J.  Fletcher,  Raleigh  attorney,  and  Walter  Prince. 
Lynn  Nisbet,  Raleigh  afternoon  newspaper  correspondent, 
operated  The  Courier-Journal  at  Fuquay  Springs  in  the 
early  1930s. 

GATESVILLE — Gates  County  Index,  published  Wednes- 
days, Independent  Democratic,  Established  193  2,  by  Parker 
Brothers,  Inc.;  Carleton  Morris,  Editor;  Parker  Bros.,  Ahos- 
kie,  Publishers.  Miss  Addie  Mae  Cooke,  now  publisher  of 
Cherokee  Scout,  Murphy,  was  first  editor  and  remained  with 
the  paper  for  ten  years. 

GOLDSBORO — Record,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1905;  J.  E.  Brown,  Editor;  C.  A.  and  G.  W. 
Brown  Estate,  Publisher.      (NR) 

GRAHAM — Alamance  News,  published  Fridays,  Independ- 
ent Democratic,  Established  19  24;  Ed  Hamlin,  Editor  and 
Publisher;  Thos.  I.  Davis,  General  Manager.  The  Alamance 
News  was  formerly  the  Alamance  County  News  and  the  Bur- 
lington Journal,  published  by  H.  A.  Oliver.  It  was  purchased 
by  Roy  Parker,  and  Mr.  Hamlin  bought  it  in  1948,  changing 
the  name. 

Alamance  Gleaner,  published  Thursdays,  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1875,  by  Capt.  E.  S.  Parker;  Alamance  Gleaner, 
Publisher;  J.  D.  Kernodle,  Jr.,  Editor  and  Publisher.  It 
operates  its  own  print  shop. 

The  Gleaner,  the  oldest  newspaper  in  Alamance  County, 
was  bought  around  1880  by  J.  D.  Kernodle  and  T.  B.  Eld- 
ridge.  Mr.  Kernodle  bought  Mr.  Eldridge's  interest  about 
1885  and  published  the  paper  until  his  death  in  1943.  His 
son  acquired  the  paper  following  his  death  and  has  since 
published  it. 

Other  Graham  papers  were  The  Tribune,  started  around 
18  97  and  edited  for  several  years  by  R.  G.  Foster,  and  The 
Messenger,  published  around  1925-1930  by  F.  A.  Slate,  now 
of  Leaksville. 

GREENSBORO — Democrat,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent Democratic,  Established  1941,  by  Carson  C.  Deal; 
Larry  T.  Queen,  Editor;  Walter  W.  Sutton,  Advertising 
Manager;  Southern  Publishers,  Inc. 

Mr.  Queen,  former  reporter  on  The  Democrat  and  UNC 
Journalism  graduate,  recently  became  editor,  succeeding 
Paige  Holder.  Mr.  Sutton  is  a  former  editor  of  The  Greens- 
boro Record  and  The  Greensboro  Patriot.  Former  editors 
include:  Enoch  Price,  Charles  Pratt  and  Charlie  Brown. 

Free  Press,  published  Thursdays,  Independent,  Establish- 
ed 1945;  Thos.  E.  Wagg,  Editor;  E.  D.  Broadhurst,  Jr., 
Business  Manager  and  Associate  Editor;  Paige  C.  Holder, 
Advertising  Manager;  Robert  L.  Gray,  Circulation  Manager; 
Mrs.  Thelma  Long  Wagg,  Cashier;  E.  D.  Broadhurst,  Sr., 
Publisher. 

The  Free  Press  is  the  result  of  the  consolidation  in  1949 
of  Greensboro  This  Week,  a  free  distribution  newspaper, 
and  The  Greensboro  Sun,  a  tabloid  weekly.  Greensboro  This 
Week  purchased  The  Greensboro  Sun  and  then  adopted  the 
new  name.  The  Free  Press  has  built  up  a  circulation  of 
9,600  in  Guilford  County  and  was  preparing  to  increase  Ihe 
frequency  of  publication  early  this  year.  The  Greensboro 
Sun  started  as  The  Greensboro  Beacon.  The  Free  Press 
operates  a  modern  print  shop. 

HENDERSONVILLE — Mountain  News  (Negro),  publish- 
ed Fridays,  Non-partisan,  Established  1939;  Alberta  J. 
Mooney,  Editor  and  Publisher.    (NR) 

Western  Carolina  Tribune,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1930;  Noah  Hollowell,  Editor  and  Pub- 
lisher.     (NR) 

HERTFORD — Perquimans  Weekly,  published  Fridays, 
Democratic,  Established  1934,  by  J.  E.  Bufflap  and  Hector 
Lupton;  Max  Campbell,  Editor  and  Publisher. 

A  few  years  after  The  Weekly  was  established  it  was 
purchased  and  has  since  been  published  by  Mr.  Campbell. 
Former  publications  include:  The  Hertford  Herald,  suspend- 
ed about  1928-29,  and  The  Hertford  News,  suspended  about 
1932. 

HIGH   POINT — The  Beacon,   published   Thursdays,   Inde- 
pendent and  Iconoclastic,  Established  1942,  by  Wade  Ren 
frow;    Wade   Renfrow,   Editor   and   Publisher.      This   paper 
slashes  out  at  crime  and  corruption.      "They  wait  on  the 
streets  to  buy  it  on  publication  days."     Mr.  Renfrow  estab- 


PAGE  36 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


lished  The  Beacon  in  Greensboro  in  194  6,  selling  his  interest 
to  Greensboro  people  later. 

HILLSBORO — Orange  County  Times,  published  Thurs- 
days, Independent,  Established  1943;  Mattie  W.  Thaxton, 
Editor;  G.  E.  Isaacs,  Publisher.   (NR) 

News  of  Orange  County,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  18  93,  by  W.  D.  Thompson;  Edwin  J.  Ham- 
lin, Editor;   The  News,  Inc.,  Publisher. 

News  of  Orange  County  was  started  in  Chapel  Hill  as  The 
Chapel  Hill  News.  It  was  moved  to  Hillsboro  and  pur- 
chased in  1944  by  Roy  Parker.  Mr.  Hamlin  bought  the 
paper  in  19  48.  He  also  publishes  The  Alamance  News,  Gra- 
ham. 

JACKSON — Northampton  County  News,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  19  25;  Leonard  Dudley,  Edi- 
tor; Parker  Bros.,  Publishers;  printed  in  The  Hertford 
County  Herald  plant  at  Ahoskie;  former  editor,  James  Bate- 
man,  now  of  The  Enfield  Progress. 

JACKSONVILLE — The  Globe,  weekly  tabloid,  edited  and 
published  by  the  U.  S.  Marine  Corps  at  Camp  Lejeune;  print- 
ed in  The  News  and  Views  plant  at  Jacksonville. 

KENANSVILLE — Duplin  Times,  published  Fridays,  Dem- 
ocratic, Established  193  2,  by  O.  G.  Carroll;  J.  R.  Grady, 
Editor;  operates  modern  job  printing  plant  in  its  own  brick 
home;   Grady  Publishing  Co. 

In  193  5  Mr.  Grady  purchased  The  Duplin  Times  and 
printed  it  for  a  period  in  his  Roanoke  News  plant,  at  Weldon, 
until  he  sold  the  Weldon  paper  and  moved  the  plant  to 
Kenansville.  The  Duplin  Times  was  being  published  in 
Warsaw  and  was  moved  to  Kenansville  early  in  1935.  Mr. 
Grady  also  owned  and  published  The  Pender  Chronicle  for 
a  period,  selling  it  to  his  former  editor,  the  late  Mrs.  Sudie 
P.  Miller.  Miss  Jacqueline  Burk,  of  Pink  Hill,  UNC  Jour- 
nalism graduate,  assists  him  in  the  advertising  department. 
In  1938  The  Duplin  Times  took  over  The  Warsaw  Duplin 
Herald,  and  a  few  months  later  consolidated  it  with  The 
Duplin  Times,  which  continues  to  serve  the  Warsaw  area. 

KERNERSVILLE — NeWs,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1938,  by  A.  C.  Huneycutt;  Fred  P.  Carter, 
Editor  and  Publisher. 

In  193  9  The  News  was  purchased  by  Mr.  Carter,  who  had 
started  as  managing  editor.  The  paper  was  printed  in  an 
out-of-town  plant  until  19  40  when  the  newspaper  and  job 
printing  plant  was  established  in  Kernersville.  The  Leader 
was  published  for  about  a  year  but  suspended  before  The 
News  started.  T.  A.  Lyon  published  another  Kernersville 
News  in  the  1880s. 

KINGS  MOUNTAIN — Herald,  published  Fridays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1889;  Martin  Harmon,  Editor;  Herald 
Publishing  House.   (NR) 

KINSTON — Lenoir  County  News,  published  Wednesdays, 
Democratic,  Established  19  48;  Wilbur  Jackson  Rider  and 
Muriel  G.  Rider,  Editors  and  Publishers;  Lenoir  County 
News  Co.,  Inc.  The  Riders  were  the  founders  and  are  still 
the  majority  owners  of  the  corporation  which  publishes  The 
News  and  The  Jones  County  Journal  in  its  Kinston  plant. 
Stockholders  in  this  corporation  include  7  7  prominent  citi- 
zens of  Lenoir  and  Jones  Counties. 


BLUM'S  AND  TURNER'S  ALMANACS 
STILL  PRINTED  AND  SOLD  IN  N.  C. 

Almanacs,  musts  for  most  homes  in  North  Caro- 
lina, particularly  in  the  rural  areas,  in  the  early 
days,  are  still  published  and  distributed  to  many 
North  Carolina  homes,  even  though  they  have  lost 
some  of  their  importance  in  modern  times.  Even 
now,  a  leading  bookstore  reports,  "every  home  should 
have  one"  for  the  valuable  information  given. 

Blum's  Farmers  and  Planters  Almanac,  started  in 
old  Salem  much  more  than  a  hundred  years  ago,  and 
Turner's  Carolina  Almanac,  started  in  Raleigh  by 
Josiah  Turner,  noted  publisher  of  80  to  90  years 
ago,  are  both  going  strong.  Both  are  now  published 
in  Winston-Salem  by  the  Blum's  Almanac  Syndicate. 
These  publications  are  issued  by  J.  B.  Goslin,  Win- 
ston-Salem, also  for  many  years  publisher  of  The 
Union  Republican.  Several  requests  for  information 
on  both  publications  brought  no  details. 

In  addition  to  a  prediction  of  the  weather  each  day 
of  the  year,  accuracy  of  which  may  be  questioned, 
these  almanacs  carry  a  vast  amount  of  valuable  in- 
formation, as  well  as  plenty  of  wit,  humor  and  philos- 
ophy, a  la  Poor  Richard's  Almanac,  issued  by  Ben- 
jamin Franklin.  Signs  of  the  zodiac,  changes  of  the 
moon,  weather,  planting  time  for  most  vegetables, 
crops  and  fruit  trees,  home  remedies  for  all  ailments, 
information  on  cooking,  canning,  preserving  and 
drying  fruits  and  vegetables,  measurements,  weights, 
— in  fact,  a  huge  mass  of  information  frequently 
needed  in  the  home  and  on  the  farm  is  readily  avail- 
able. 

So  far  as  is  known,  Blum's  and  Turner's  are  the 
only  two  almanacs  published  in  North  Carolina  now, 
but  most  bookstores  stock  them  when  they  come  out 
late  one  year  for  the  next,  and  they  are  ready  sellers 
— and  repeat  orders  are  frequent. 


LEAKSVILLE — News,  published  Thursdays,  Independent, 
Established  19  24,  by  J.  S.  Robertson  and  others;  Richard 
H.  Robertson,  Editor;  J.  S.  Robertson,  Publisher  and  Busi- 
ness Manager;  operates  modern  well-equipped  print  shop 
and  office  supply  store. 

Circulation  of  The  News,  4,500  copies,  is  delivered  almost 
entirely  by  carrier  boys,  while  less  than  1,000  copies  each 
are  distributed  through  newsstands  and  by  mail.  The  News 
occupies  a  modern  brick  building.      The  publication  is  dis- 


horn e  of  The  Leaks- 
ville  News,  containing 
modern  newspaper 
and  commercial  print- 
ing plant,  printing 
several  school  and 
mill  newspapers  and 
periodicals. 


Winter-Spring,  i 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  37 


tributed  primarily  to  several  textile  communities  in  Rock- 
ingham County.  Former  editors  include:  E.  M.  Ezell,  W. 
M.  Hundley,  E.  M.  Anderson,  Garry  Willard  and  David 
Moore.  The  News  plant  prints  The  Mill  Whistle,  house 
organ  for  Fieldcrest  Mills;  Cub  Reporter,  for  Leaksville 
High  School,  and  The  Tattler,  for  Draper  High  School. 

LILLINGTON — Harnett  County  News,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  1919,  by  Henderson  Steele; 
Henderson  Steele,  Editor  and  Publisher;  operates  a  job 
printing  plant. 

The  News  was  Lillington's  first  and  only  newspaper  ex- 
cept for  occasional  attempts  to  establish  competitors.  Mr. 
Steele  is  still  going  strong  after  3  2  years  as  editor  and  pub- 
lisher. In  1947  his  son,  Frank  Steele,  became  associated 
with  him  and  continues  as  co-publisher. 

LOUISBURG — Franklin  Times,  published  Fridays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1870,  by  George  S.  Baker;  A.  F.  John- 
son, Editor  and  Publisher;  operates  its  own  print  shop. 

The  Times  was  established  as  The  Louisburg  Courier. 
After  five  years  it  was  acquired  by  J.  A.  Thomas,  who  con- 
tinued its  operation  until  1910.  At  that  time  it  was  acquir- 
ed by  Mr.  Johnson,  who  has  continued  its  operation  for  40 
years.  For  a  year  or  two  he  was  assisted  by  his  son,  A.  F. 
Johnson,  Jr.,  who  re-entered  navy  service  last  fall.  No  other 
paper  has  been  published  in  Louisburg  since  1905. 

LUMBERTON — Post,  published  Thursdays,  Established 
1935,  by  O.  J.  Peterson;  F.  P.  Gray,  Editor;  Dougald  Coxe, 
Publisher.  Mr.  Peterson  started  The  Post  as  The  Robeson 
Voice.  Later  published  by  J.  P.  Wiggins,  it  became  The 
Lumberton  Voice,  and  Mr.  Coxe  changed  the  name  to  The 
Lumberton  Post.  Mr.  Coxe  also  publishes  The  Red  Springs 
Citizen,  The  Scottish  Chief  Maxton,  and  The  Fairmont  Times- 
Messenger,  all  printed  in  the  Lumberton  Post  plant. 

MADISON — Messenger,  published  Thursdays,  Democratic, 
Established  1915,  by  J.  T.  Robertson;  R.  M.  Spear,  Editor; 
Marion  A.  Spear,  Business  Manager;  Madison  Publishing 
Co.;  operates  splendid  print  shop. 

The  Messenger  was  purchased  in  1934  by  Russell  M.  and 
Marion  A.  Spear,  who  operated  it  until  19  47  when  a  three- 
way  partnership  was  formed  by  the  sale  of  an  interest  to 
Charles  E.  Brown,  who  joined  the  staff  as  sports  editor  and 
production  man. 

MANTEO — The  Coastlaiul  Times,  published  Fridays,  In- 
dependent, Established  193  5,  by  Victor  Meekins;  Victor 
Meekins,  Editor;  Mrs.  Catherine  D.  Meekins,  Secretary- 
Treasurer;   Times  Printing  Co.,  Inc.,  Publisher. 

The  Coastland  Times  was  started  as  The  Dare  County 
Times,  and  Editor  Meekins,  long  sheriff  of  Dare  County, 
changed  its  name  some  years  later  to  embrace  a  larger  coast 
area.  Sheriff  Meekins'  two  other  papers,  The  Belhaven 
Pilot  and  The  Hyde  County  Herald,  Swan  Quarter,  are 
printed  in  his  Manteo  print  shop. 

MARION — Progress,  published  Thursdays,  Independent 
Democratic,  Established  1896;  S.  E.  Whitten,  Publisher; 
Miss  Elizabeth  Whitten,  News  Editor;  operates  its  own  print 
shop. 

The  Progress  was  started  as  The  McDowell  Democrat  but 
the  name  was  changed  in  1909,  when  Mr.  Whitten  became 
sole  owner.     He  started  as  an  apprentice  in   190  2  and  has 


THE  YELLOW  JACKET,  A  RURAL 
REPUBLICAN  PAPER  WITH  STING 

"The  Yellow  Jacket,"  a  small  monthly  newspaper, 
published  in  the  secluded  village  of  Moravian  Falls, 
about  seven  miles  south  of  North  Wilkesboro,  its 
nearest  railroad  station,  issued  for  more  than  55 
years  by  82-year-old  Dan  R.  Laws,  is  unique,  unusual, 
living  up  to  its  initial  announcement  that  it  is  the 
only  thing  of  its  kind  on  earth. 

The  Yellow  Jacket  is  classified  as  Republican  and 
iconoclastic.  It  carries  a  motto  of  "One  flag,  one 
school,  one  people,  America  for  Americans"  and 
gives  as  its  aim  "To  swat  liars  and  leeches,  hypo- 
crites and  humbugs,  demagogues  and  dastards".  It 


carries  a  column  of  "Stingers,"  but  just  about  every 
item  carries  many  stings,  most  of  them  directed  at 
Democrats  and  the  Democratic  Party.  It  claims 
the  "Widest  paid  circulation  of  any  political  paper 
published  monthly  25c  a  year."  (That  sentence  needs 
a  comma  or  two,  but  where?) 

Although  Publisher  Laws  carried  the  first  issue 
of  "The  Yellow  Jacket"  to  the  postoffice  in  his  coat 
pocket,  back  in  June,  1895,  the  circulation  grew 
phenomenally  and  has  reached  as  high  as  250,000 
copies,  going  into  every  state  and,  it  is  claimed,  to 
every  postoffice  in  the  Nation.  Large  trucks  are 
used  to  transport  an  issue  from  Moravian  Falls  to 
the  station  at  North  Wilkesboro  each  publication 
day.  The  paper  carries  no  advertising ;  only  reading 
matter. 

The  publication  is  of  unusual  size,  18x12  inch 
pages.  It  contained  eight  pages  prior  to  the  1918 
newsprint  shortage,  but  since  then  has  been  four 
pages,  and  probably,  on  occasions,  only  two  pages — 
one  sheet.  The  paper  is  printed  on  a  Hoe  web  press, 
made  in  London  for  William  Jennings  Bryan  and  on 
which  was  printed  "The  Great  Commoner's"  news- 
paper "The  Silver  Night  Watchman." 

On  February  7,  1943,  the  entire  plant  went  up  in 
flames,  but  the  paper  continued  publication,  issued 
for  a  period  by  the  Commercial  Printing  Co.  in  North 
Wilkesboro,  but  mailed  from  Moravian  Falls.  The 
plant  was  rebuilt,  but  on  a  smaller  scale.  An  inter- 
esting note  is  that  former  President  Herbert  Hoover 
sent  Editor  Laws  a  check  (they  say  a  large  one)  as  a 
contribution  toward  rebuilding  the  plant  following 
this  fire. 

Editor  Laws,  then  a  rural  school  teacher  who  grew 
up  as  a  farmer  and  had  a  fling  as  a  railroad  construc- 
tion hand,  decided  to  launch  his  paper,  published  the 
first  issue  in  June,  1895,  and  has  continued  editing 
and  publishing  for  more  than  55  years.  He  is  now 
82  years  old.  Last  March  his  leg  had  to  be  ampu- 
tated and  he  was  critically  ill  for  a  couple  of  months. 
Mr.  Laws  is  now  breaking  in  a  new  artificial  leg  and 
while  a  bit  awkward,  is  still  going  strong.  He  had 
never  missed  a  day  from  his  office  because  of  illness 
until  his  leg  trouble  developed.  His  right-hand-man 
is  now  his  daughter,  Miss  Thelma  Laws,  whose  writ- 
ing also  carries  a  sting. 

This  publication  has  had  several  contributors  to 
its  columns.  One  of  the  most  noted  was  Rev.  Dr. 
Arthur  Talmadge  Abernathy,  of  Rutherford  College, 
who  was  a  columnist  for  the  paper  through  most  of 
its  history,  up  to  about  a  year  ago. 

Editor  Laws'  brother,  L.  B.  Laws,  edited  and  pub- 
lished another  paper  with  some  of  the  same  qualities 
for  a  few  years  in  the  early  1900s.  This  he  called 
"The  Lash." 

James  Larkin  Pearson,  since  become  a  noted  North 
Carolina  poet  and  operating  a  printshop  at  Guilford 
College,  published  a  fun-paper  for  a  few  years 
around  1925.     This  was  "The  Fool-Killer." 

"The  Hornet,"  a  Democratic  newspaper,  some- 
what along  the  lines  of  "The  Yellow  Jacket,"  was 
published  by  W.  Henry  Davis  at  Fork  Church,  Davie 
County,  for  a  few  years  around  1910. 


PAGE  38 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


thus  been  connected  with  this  paper  for  49  years,  41  years 
as  editor  and  publisher.    His  daughter  is  his  chief  assistant. 

MARSHALL — News-Record,  published  Thursdays,  Non- 
partisan, Established  1901;  Jim  Story,  Editor;  H.  L.  Story, 
Publisher;  operates  commercial  print  shop,  prints  school 
papers. 

The  News-Record  is  the  result  of  the  consolidation  of  The 
French  Broad  News  and  The  Madison  Record.  Mr.  Story 
acquired  the  paper  in  19  24,  and  in  1946  his  son,  Jim  Story, 
became  editor. 

MARSHVILLE — Home,  published  Wednesdays,  Democrat- 
ic, Established  1892,  by  J.  Z.  Greene;  George  W.  Downes, 
Editor;  L.  E.  Huggins,  Advertising  Manager;  Mrs.  Atha  E. 
Downes,  Society  Editor;  published  by  Marshville  Home  Pub- 
lishing Corp.,  Mr.  Downes,  president;  Mr.  Huggins,  vice- 
president;  Mrs.  Downes,  secretary;  installed  modern  news- 
paper plant  and  equipment  early  last  year;  operates  its  own 
photographic  department;  prints  the  monthly  tabloid  paper 
for  Wingate  Junior  College. 

MAXTON — Scottish  Chief,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  188  4;  Ottis  Layton,  Editor;  Dougald 
Coxe,  Publisher;  published  for  several  years  by  Marshall  A. 
Thompson.  Printed  in  The  Lumberton  Post  plant  of  Pub- 
lisher Coxe. 

MEBANE — Enterprise,  published  Thursdays,  Non-parti- 
san, Established  1919,  by  W.  B.  Miller;  M.  H.  Johnson,  Edi- 
tor; Mrs.  Lottie  Parnell,  Publisher  and  Business  Manager; 
operates  job  printing  plant.  Mr.  Miller  purchased  The  Meb- 
ane  Leader  in  19  20  and  consolidated  it  with  The  Enterprise. 
It  was  owned  and  operated  for  a  year  or  two  each  by  J.  B. 
Johnston  and  J.  B.  Benton,  later  publisher  of  The  Benson 
Review.  In  1922  Charles  S.  Parnell  purchased  the  paper 
and  operated  it  until  his  death  in  1938.  Mrs.  Parnell  has 
published  the  paper  since  his  death.  Their  son,  C.  L.  Par- 
nell, was  editor  for  a  few  years,  as  was  P.  N.  Thompson,  Jr. 
M.  H.  Johnson  has  been  editor  since  1943. 

MOCKSVILLE — Davie  Record,  published  Wednesdays, 
Republican,  Established  1899,  by  E.  H.  Morris;  C.  Frank 
Stroud,  Editor  and  Publisher.  Mr.  Stroud  purchased  The 
Record  in  1907  and  has  thus  been  its  editor  and  publisher 
for  4  4  years. 

Enterprise,  published  Fridays,  Independent,  Established 
1879;  Mocksville  Enterprise,  Publisher;  published  for  sev- 
eral years  by  O.  L.  McQuage,  continued  after  his  death  a 
few  years  by  Mrs.  McQuage;  Gordon  Tomlinson,  Associate; 
operates  commercial  printing  plant;  prints  The  Renfro 
Herald,  Yadkinville. 

MOORESVILLE — Tribune,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1933,  by  T.  M.  McKnight;  T.  M.  Mc- 
Knight,  Editor  and  Publisher. 

MOUNT  AIRY — News,  published  Fridays,  Democratic,  Es- 
tablished 1880,  by  T.  J.  Lowery;  W.  M.  Johnson,  Editor  and 
Publisher;  William  H.  Johnson,  Managing  Editor;  James  E. 
Johnson,  Advertising  Manager;  operates  modern  commercial 
printing  plant. 

The  News  was  purchased  in  1904  from  Mr.  Lowery  by 
J.  E.  Johnson  and  son,  W.  M.  Johnson,  who  have  since 
operated  the  business.  Associated  with  Publisher  Johnson 
are  his  two  sons,  William  H.  and  James  E.  Johnson,  third 
generation  operators.  About  a  year  ago  The  News  installed 
a  modern  press  and  other  equipment. 

Times,  published  Fridays,  Independent,  Established  1880; 
R.  E.  Ashby  and  W.  J.  Seigler,  Jr.,  Editors;  Times  Publish- 
ing Co.,  Inc.;  published  by  members  of  the  Ashby  family 
for  many  years.   (NR) 

MOUNT  HOLLY — News,  published  Fridays,  Independent, 
Established  1923;  W.  O.  Barrett,  Editor;  B.  Arp  Lowrance, 
Publisher;  published  in  connection  with  The  Belmont  Ban- 
ner and  The  Mecklenburg  Times,  B.  Arp  Lowrance,  Pub- 
lisher; operates  print  shop,  printing  all  three  papers. 

MURFREESBORO — Northeastern  Carolina  News,  pub- 
lished Thursdays,  Non-partisan,  Established  1937;  F.  R. 
Johnson,  Editor;  Herald-News  Co.,  Publisher.  This  paper 
is  published  in  connection  with  The  Daily  Roanoke-Chowan 
News,  Ahoskie.   (NR) 

MURPHY — Cherokee  Scout,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1887;  Addie  Mae  Cooke,  Editor  and 
Publisher. 

The  Scout  has  been  in  continuous  operation  for  more  than 


HH  D.  GOLD  LONG  PUBLISHER  OF 
WILSON  TBMES  &  ZION'S  LANDMARK 

The  P.  D.  Gold  Publishing  Co.,  established  in  1867 
by  Elder  P.  D.  Gold,  is  one  of  the  oldest  publishing 
houses  in  the  State  and  is  the  same  age  as  John  D. 
Gold,  son  of  the  founder  and  connected  with  the  busi- 
ness, including  publication  of  The  Wilson  Daily 
Times,  for  three  quarters  of  a  century.  Elder  Gold 
was  pastor  of  the  Wilson  Primitive  Baptist  Church 
and  was  living  at  Scotland  Neck  at  the  time  he  estab- 
lished the  print  shop,  in  which  he  founded  Zion's 
Landmark,  official  publication  of  the  Primitive  Bap- 
tist Church,  in  1870.  During  that  year  Elder  Gold 
moved  his  family  to  Wilson,  and  a  few  years  later, 
as  a  youth,  his  son  began  working  in  the  shop,  includ- 
ing setting  type  for  The  Landmark. 

In  1896  John  D.  Gold  began  publication  of  The 
Wilson  Times,  first  as  a  weekly,  then  as  a  semi- 
weekly.  This  paper  was  discontinued  in  1945.  John 
D.  Gold  in  1902  established  The  Wilson  Daily  Times, 
published  every  afternoon  except  Sunday  since  that 
time.  Due  to  Mr.  Gold's  declining  health,  on  January 
1,  1947,  The  P.  D.  Gold  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  leased 
its  publishing  and  printing  business,  including  The 
Wilson  Daily  Times,  Zion's  Landmark  and  the  job 
shop  to  Herbert  D.  Brauff,  of  Vandergrift,  Penna., 
who  has  been  publisher  since  that  time.  In  addition 
to  Mr.  Brauff,  the  staff  includes  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Gold 
Swindell,  daughter  of  the  founder,  business  man- 
ager; Paul  Liles,  advertising  manager;  Jim  Ful- 
ghum,  city  editor ;  Karl  Fleming,  sports  editor ;  Miss 
Verdalee  Norris,  Y  editor;  Miss  Elizabeth  Peele, 
society  editor,  and  Vernon  Morton,  farm  editor.  Mr. 
Gold  is  still  listed  as  editor  and  recently  was  doing 
part  of  the  editorial  writing. 

During  the  four  years  since  Mr.  Brauff  took 
charge,  the  publication  has  purchased  a  new  build- 
ing, erected  an  adjoining  building  to  house  the  com- 
posing room  and  the  recently  installed  24-page  press, 
enlarged  the  personnel  and  increased  the  circulation 
from  less  than  6,400  to  more  than  10,000.  The  Wil- 
son Daily  Times  is  the  only  newspaper  published  in 
Wilson  County. 

The  first  Wilson  paper,  The  North  Carolinian,  was 
established  in  the  early  1800s  but  it  was  short-lived. 
Major  Hearne  moved  to  Raleigh  to  join  a  larger  pub- 
lication. 

Josephus  Daniels,  for  many  years  editor  of  The 
News  and  Observer,  and  son  of  Wilson's  postmis- 
tress, bought  an  interest  in  the  Wilson  Advance, 
published  by  James  A.  Williams,  in  1880.  When 
Mr.  Williams  died,  John  E.  Woodard,  Wilson  attor- 
ney, purchased  his  interest,  later  selling  it  to  Mr. 
Daniels  and  Frank  Connor,  a  printer.  Mr.  Daniels 
later  bought  out  his  partner.  During  this  period 
Jeff  Caraway  published  The  Mirror,  which  came  out 
earlier  in  the  week.  One  of  Wilson's  most  colorful 
weeklies  during  that  period  was  The  Wilson  Plain 
Dealer,  published  by  Col.  R.  W.  Singeltary.     Mr. 


Winter-Spring,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  39 


Daniels  often  remarked  that  he  would  like  to  "be  a 
good  editor  like  Col.  Singeltary." 

One  of  Wilson's  first  weeklies  was  The  Wilson 
Ledger,  published  by  John  T.  Albritton,  a  printer 
and  former  Baptist  minister,  started  in  1855.  Later 
a  Prof.  Keenan  published  The  Sentinel.  During  the 
spring  of  1860  Dr.  J.  J.  Lawrence  established  The 
Star  of  Freedom.  In  that  year  H.  Prentice  Tucke 
took  over  The  Ledger  and  John  C.  Gorman  pur- 
chased The  Star  of  Freedom.  The  two  papers  were 
consolidated. 

Another  early  Wilson  paper  was  The  Wilson  Sniff- 
ings, published  by  D.  S.  Carraway  and  Co.,  with  A. 
W.  Rowland  as  local  editor.  One  copy  of  The  Shift- 
ings,  dated  in  1882,  indicates  that  it  and  The  Ad- 
vance were  being  published  about  the  same  time. 
Carraway  published  four  other  papers  elsewhere, 
The  Star,  The  Herald,  The  Observer  and  The  Mes- 
senger. Carl  Goerch  attempted  to  revive  The  Mirror 
in  1925  but  his  efforts  failed.  He  published  Wilson's 
first  and  only  daily  morning  newspaper. — Informa- 
tion furnished  by  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Gold  Swindell. 


60  years  but  never  owned  its  home  until  after  Miss  Cooke 
purchased  the  equipment  about  a  decade  ago.  Miss  Cooke 
erected  a  modern  building  and  has  complete  equipment  for 
newspaper  and  commercial  job  printing.  Miss  Cooke  was 
former  editor  of  The  Gates  County  Index,  Gatesville.  Earlier 
editors  and  publishers  included:  Townes  and  Meroney,  C. 
W.  Bailey,  B.  W.  Sipe,  L.  A.  Lee,  and  Victor  Olmsted. 

NASHVILLE — Graphic,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1895,  by  M.  W.  Lincke;  Thomas  Wilson, 
Editor  and  Publisher;  operates  commercial  print  shop. 

The  Graphic  was  operated  for  many  years  by  Mr.  Lincke 
and  following  his  death  by  members  of  his  family.  The 
business  was  taken  over  several  years  ago  by  Mr.  Wilson, 
UNC  Journalism  graduate  and  former  news  editor  of  The 
Elkin  Tribune.  Mr.  Wilson  and  two  of  his  brothers,  Paul 
and  Joseph  Wilson,  about  a  year  ago  purchased  and  are 
operating  The  Pinehurst  Outlook.  A  former  editor  is  Jack 
Riley,  former  Sunday  editor  of  The  News  and  Observer  and 
now  UNC  Journalism  instructor. 

NEWLAND — Avery  Scenic  Press,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  1940,  by  D.  M.  Spurgeon,  Pub- 
lisher; Carl  D.  Osborne,  Editor  and  Manager;  operates  com- 
plete and  modern  small  print  shop. 

The  Press  has  been  developed  into  a  well-printed  and  at- 
tractive home-county  newspaper.  Publisher  Spurgeon  ope- 
rates two  other  newspapers,  one  in  Virginia  and  one  in 
Mountain  City,  Tenn.,  with  commercial  plant  specializing 
in  church  and  school  publications.  Many  years  ago  a  Mr. 
Schumann  started  and  published  for  a  long  time  The  Avery 
Herald,  a  hand  product.  He  sold  the  plant  to  K.  L.  Haga, 
who  published  The  Herald  for  several  years,  then  suspended 
publication.  The  present  management  took  over  and  ex- 
panded the  equipment,  changing  the  name  of  the  paper. 

NORTH  WILKESBORO — Hustler,  published  Wednesdays, 
Democratic,  Established  1896;  W.  E.  Pharr,  Editor  and 
Publisher.  The  Pharr  brothers  have  published  The  Hustler 
for  many  years.     R.  B.  Pharr  died  last  year.   (NR) 

PEMBROKE — Progress,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1947;  Maurice  C.  Giraldi,  Editor;  printed 
in  Martin's  Print  Shop,  Hamlet. 

Formerly  The  Progress  was  published  by  Dougald  Coxe 
and  printed  in  his  shop  at  Lumberton.  Early  in  1950  it  be- 
came an  independent  newspaper.  Former  editors  were  Lewis 
Barton  and  Mrs.  Ira  Pate  Lowry. 

PILOT  MOUNTAIN — News,  published  Fridays,  Democrat- 
ic, Established  1941;  Viola  Edwards,  Editor  and  Publisher. 
(NR) 

PINEHURST — Outlook,  published  Fridays,  Independent, 
Established  1897;  Miss  Virginia  Simpkins,  Editor;  Paul  S. 
Wilson,  Publisher;  Pinehurst  Printing  Co.;  operates  a  mod- 


ern printing  plant,  publishing  monthly  The  Pinehurst  Book- 
seller. 

The  Outlook  was  edited  and  published  for  15  years  by 
Robert  E.  Harlow,  publicity  man  for  Pinehurst,  Inc.,  who 
sold  his  publication  last  year  to  establish  The  Golf  World. 

The  business  was  purchased  by  three  brothers,  Paul  S., 
Joseph  and  Thomas  Wilson,  the  latter  publisher  of  The 
Graphic,  Nashville. 

PITTSBORO — Chatham  Record,  published  Thursdays, 
Non-partisan,  Established  1878,  by  Henry  A.  London;  Mrs. 
W.  B.  Morgan,  Editor;  Chatham  News  Publishing  Co.,  Siler 
City,  E.  A.  Resch,  president;  printed  in  The  Chatham  News 
Publishing  Co.  plant  at  Siler  City. 

Among  the  former  prominent  editors  and  publishers  were 
Oscar  J.  Peterson,  prolific  old-time  writer,  and  Stacy  Brewer. 

PLYMOUTH — Roanoke  Beacon,  published  Thursdays,  In- 
dependent, Established  18  89;  F.  M.  Manning,  Editor;  Roan- 
oke Beacon  Publishing  Co. ;  operates  commercial  print  shop. 

The  Roanoke  Beacon  is  owned  and  published  by  W.  C. 
Manning,  Jr.,  W.  H.  Booker  and  F.  M.  Manning,  of  William- 
ston,  who  edit  and  publish  The  Enterprise,  Williamston,  and 
The  Weekly  Herald,  Robersonville. 

RAEFORD — News-Journal,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1911;  Paul  Dickson,  Editor  and  Publish- 
er.  (NR) 

RALEIGH — The  Carolinian  (Negro),  published  Satur- 
days, Independent,  Established  1941,  by  P.  R.  Jervay;  P.  R. 
Jervay,  Publisher;  printed  in  its  own  modern  newspaper 
and  job  printing  plant  in  Raleigh,  which  also  publishes  The 
Winston-Salem  Carolinian  and  prints  The  Wilmington  Jour- 
nal. 

The  Carolinian  is  a  successor  to  The  Carolina  Tribune, 
established  in  19  20  by  Claude  E.  Whitaker,  publisher  for 
some  13  years.  It  was  operated  during  the  period  1933-40 
by  H.  I.  Fontellio-Nanton.  P.  R.  Jervay  then  purchased  the 
plant  and  changed  the  paper's  name. 

RANDLEMAN — The  Randolphian,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  1945;  Carol  Fleming,  Editor;  Jack 
Abernathy,  Publisher.   (NR) 

RED  SPRINGS — Citizen,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1896,  by  Archibald  Johnson;  Dougald  Coxe, 
Editor  and  Publisher;  printed  in  office  of  Lumberton  Post. 

RICH  SQUARE — Roanoke-Chowan  Times,  published 
Thursdays,  Democratic,  Established  1892,  by  A.  J.  Conner; 
Esther  Conner,  Editor  and  Publisher;  printed  in  Rich 
Square.  The  Times  has  been  in  the  Conner  family  during 
the  more  than  half  a  century  of  its  publication,  father  and 
daughter. 

ROBBINSVILLE — Mountain  Lake  News,  published  Thurs- 
days, Independent,  Established  1947;  Lucile  Mulkey,  Editor; 
Mountain  Lake  News,  Publishers.   (NR) 

ROBERSONVILLE — Herald,  published  Wednesdays,  In- 
dependent, Established  1914;  F.  M.  Manning,  Editor;  Her- 
ald Publishing  Co.,  Williamston.  The  Herald  is  published 
by  the  publisher  of  The  Williamston  Enterprise  and  is  print- 
ed in  its  shop. 

ROCKINGHAM — Post-Dispatch,  published  Wednesdays, 
Democratic,  Established  1917;  Isaac  S.  London,  Editor  and 
Publisher;   printed  in  its  own  shop. 

The  Post  was  established  in  190  9  and  The  Dispatch  in 
1916.  Isaac  S.  London,  former  publisher  of  The  Siler  City 
Grit,  purchased  these  papers  and  consolidated  them  as  The 
Post-Dispatch  in  1917  and  is  still  going  strong  after  33 
years  there. 

ROCKY  MOUNT — News,  published  Fridays,  Independent 
Democratic,  Established  1910,  by  Rocky  Mount  Publishing 
Co.;  J.  L.  Home,  Jr.,  Editor.  The  News  is  issued  from  the 
plant  of  The  Rocky  Mount  Telegram,  also  edited  and  pub- 
lished by  Mr.  Home. 

ROSEBORO — News,  published  Thursdays,  Independent, 
Established  1941,  by  H.  N.  McKenzie;  J.  H.  Silvertsen, 
Editor;  printed  by  Sampson  Publishing  Co.,  Clinton. 

The  Roseboro  News  was  established  by  Mr.  McKenzie 
while  he  was  publishing  The  Sampson  News,  Clinton,  and 
was  sold  with  The  Sampson  News  later  that  year  to  Mr. 
Silvertsen. 

RUTHERFORDTON — Rutherford  Co.  News,  published 
Thursdays,   Independent  Democratic,   Established   1926,   by 


PAGE  40 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-spring,  1951 


R.  E.  Price  and  associates;  R.  E.  Price,  Editor;  Rutherford 
County  News,  Publisher;  operates  a  commercial  printing- 
plant. 

Last  year  Mr.  Price  celebrated  his  2  5th  anniversary  of 
operation  and  his  fifth  year  as  sole  owner  of  The  News,  dur- 
ing which  time  he  has  doubled  the  size  of  the  paper  and  the 
staff.  Mr.  Price  has  been  active  in  work  of  the  N.  C.  Press 
Association  and  served  as  its  president  19  49-50. 

SAINT  PAULS — Review,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  19  22;  Julia  McNeill,  Editor  and  Publisher. 

SCOTLAND  NECK — Commonwealth,  published  Fridays, 
Independent  Democratic,  Established  188  2,  by  W.  H.  Kit- 
chin;  E.  W.  Rodgers,  Editor;  Commonwealth  Publishing 
Co.;  operates  commercial  print  shop;  prints  Enfield  Prog- 
ress, also  published  by  Mr.  Rodgers.  The  Commonwealth 
absorbed  The  Scotland  Neck  News  in  19  29. 

The  Commonwealth  was  published  for  many  years  by 
members  of  the  prominent  Kitchin  family,  including  its 
founder,  W.  H.  Kitchin,  Congressman,  and  two  of  his  sons, 
W.  W.  Kitchin,  Congressman  and  Governor,  and  Claude 
Kitchin,  Congressman  Another  prominent  family,  the 
Madrys,  published  The  Commonwealth  for  several  years. 
J.  T.  Madry  was  editor.  Between  these  families,  Norfleet 
Smith  was  publisher  for  a  decade  or  more. 

SELMA — Jbhnstoni&n-Sun,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1916;  Jack  Honrine,  Editor  and  Pub- 
lisher; operates  the  only  job  printing  business  in  Selma. 

This  paper  was  published  for  many  years  by  M.  L.  Standi 
and  members  of  his  family.  It  was  purchased  in  194  6  by 
Mr.  Honrine,  former  New  Bern  printer. 

SILER  CITY — Chatham  News,  published  Thursdays,  Non- 
partisan, Established  1923,  by  J.  B.  Whitley;  E.  A.  Resch, 
Editor;  Chatham  News  Publishing  Co.;  operates  modern 
commercial  print  shop. 

The  News  was  the  successor  to  The  Siler  City  Grit,  pub- 
lished until  1917  by  Isaac  S.  London,  Rockingham  Post- 
Dispatch.  Later  publishers  were  P.  H.  Elkins  and  H.  A. 
Oliver.  It  was  purchased  some  15  years  ago  by  Mr.  Resch, 
formerly  of  the  Winston-Salem  papers  and  president  of  the 
N.  C.  Press  Association,  1947-48. 

SNOW  HILL — Standard-Laconic,  published  Fridays,  Dem- 
ocratic, Established  190  6,  by  Joseph  Eppye  Debnam;  Mrs. 
J.  E.  Debnam,  Local  Editor;  Mrs.  John  C.  Andrews,  Pub- 
lisher; printed  in  The  Ayden  Dispatch  office. 

The  late  J.  E.  Debnam,  founder,  was  school  superintend- 
ent in  Greene  County  for  20  years  and  Mrs.  Debnam  con- 
tinued operation  of  the  paper  after  his  death,  although  the 
plant  was  purchased  by  the  late  John  C.  Andrews.  W.  E. 
Debnam,  well-known  Raleigh  radio  news  commentator,  son 
of  the  founder,  received  his  early  newspaper  training  on  The 
Standard-Laconic  and  was  its  editor  for  a  few  years. 

SOUTHERN  PINES — Pilot,  published  Fridays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1922;  Katharine  Boyd,  Editor;  The  Pilot, 
Inc.,  Publisher;  operates  a  commercial  print  shop;  Dan  P. 
Ray,  Manager-printer;   Valerie  Nicholson,  Assistant  Editor. 

Earlier  prominent  editors  and  publishers  included:  Bion 
H.  Butler,  Nelson  A.  Hyde,  Carl  Thompson  and  James  Boyd. 

The  Sandhills  Daily  News  was  published  at  Southern 
Pines  around  the  1930-40  period. 

SOUTHPORT — State  Port  Pilot,  published  Wednesdays, 
Independent,  Established  1928;  J.  M.  Harper,  Jr.,  Editor; 
News  Reporter  Co.,  Inc.,  Whiteville,  Publisher;  Leslie  S. 
Thompson,  Whiteville,  owns  half  interest.  A  former  pub- 
lisher was  W.  B.  Keziah,  Southport. 

SPARTA — Alleghany  News,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1889;  Howard  Sexton,  News  Editor; 
Ed  M.  Anderson,  Publisher;  Mrs.  Ed  Anderson,  Associate 
Publisher. 

The  News,  Alleghanv  County's  only  newspaper,  absorbed 
The  Star-Times  in  1941. 

SPINDALE — Sun,  published  Thursdays,  Independent,  Es- 
tablished 19  40,  by  Clarence  Griffin,  General  Manager;  Glenn 
James,  Editor;  Ed  M.  Anderson,  Publisher;  printed  in  The 
Forest  City  Courier  plant.  The  Spindale  Sun  is  owned  by 
the  Rutherford  County  Publishing  Co.,  Forest  City,  Ed  M. 
Anderson,  president;  Clarence  Griffin,  secretary-treasurer 
and  general  manager,  also  publishing  the  Forest  City 
Courier.  The  Sun  won  the  National  Editorial  Association's 
general  excellence  award  in  1944. 


SPRING  HOPE — Enterprise,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1946,  by  R.  B.  Davis  and  Allen  Bar- 
bee;  Allen  Barbee,  Editor;  Spring  Hope  Enterprise,  Pub- 
lisher. The  Nash  County  News,  formerly  published  in 
Spring  Hope,  was  discontinued  in  1944. 

SPRUCE  PINE — Tri-County  News,  published  Thursdays: 
Independent;  Established  in  193  5  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  S.  T. 
Henry,  who  are  co-editors;  operates  modern  newspaper 
print  shop,  but  does  not  do  commercial  printing.  Mr.  Henry 
was  in  business  paper  publishing  for  more  than  40  years, 
most  of  the  time  as  an  executive  with  McGraw-Hill  Publish- 
ing Co.  and  its  predecessor,  McGraw  Publishing  Co. 

The  Tri-County  News  resulted  from  consolidation  of  the 
Spruce  Fine  News  (1928)  and  The  Burnsville  Eagle  (1896) 
and  serves  the  three  counties  of  Avery,  Mitchell  and  Yancey. 
In  this  area,  The  Mitchell  County  Banner  was  published  at 
Bakersville  for  many  years  by  J.  B.  Craigmiles,  from  around 
1900  until  it  was  suspended  around  1938,  following  his 
death. 

SWAN  QUARTER — Hyde  County  Herald,  published  Thurs- 
days, Independent,  Established  1939,  by  Victor  Meekins; 
Thomas  E.  Spencer,  Editor;  Times  Printing  Co.,  Inc.,  Pub- 
lisher ;   printed  in  The  Coastland  Times  shop  at  Manteo. 

The  Herald  was  consolidated  with  The  Coastland  Times, 
Manteo,  in  1947  and  was  re-established  in  1948.  Former 
editors  include:  Charles  Bond,  Mrs.  Nell  Wise  Wecter  and 
Carlton  Morris,  now  editor  of  The  Gates  County  Index, 
Gatesville.  The  Hyde  County  Record  was  consolidated  later 
with  The  Belhaven  Times.  The  Hyde  County  Messenger, 
Baptist  church  monthly,  issued  for  about  ten  years,  Rev. 
E.  R.  Stewart,  editor  and  publisher,  was  discontinued  about 
1941. 

SYLVA — Herald-Ruralite,  published  Thursdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  192'6,  by  E.  E.  Brown;  J.  A.  Gray  and 
J.  M.  Bird,  Publishers;  operates  job  print  shop. 

The  Ruralite  was  purchased  by  Curtis  Russ  in  19  43  and 
named  The  Herald-Ruralite.  In  19  44  Gray  and  Bird,  former 
publishers  of  The  Bryson  City  Times,  purchased  The  Herald- 
Ruralite  and  continue  its  publication. 

The  Jackson  County  Journal,  published  for  many  years  by 
the  late  Dan  Tompkins,  was  discontinued  in  1944. 

TABOR  CITY — Tribune,  published  Wednesdays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  1946,  by  W.  Horace  Carter;  W.  Horace 
Carter,  Editor;  Atlantic  Publishing  Co.,  owned  by  W.  Horace 
Carter  and  Mark  C.  Garner;  operates  commercial  print  shop, 
in  which  are  also  printed  The  Myrtle  Beach  (S.C.)  Sun  and 
The  Ocean  Beach  News,  Ocean  Drive,  S.  C,  published  by 
the  same  firm.  Billy  Whitted  and  Lawrence  Ashby  formerly 
edited  The  Tribune  under  lease.  A  former  newspaper,  The 
Tabor  City  Times,  was  operated  for  a  few  years,  closing  out 
during  World  War  II. 

TARBORO — The  Weekly  Southerner,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  18  24,  by  George  Howard; 
B.  M.  Bass,  Jr.,  Editor;  Tarboro  Printing  Co.,  Publisher; 
owned  by  H.  C.  Bourne,  V.  H.  Creech,  Jr.,  and  J.  Creech, 
who  also  publish  The  Daily  Southerner. 

The  Southerner  was  first  published  in  Halifax  in  1824 
but  was  moved  to  Tarboro  by  Editor  Howard  in  18  26. 
Former  editors  include:  Frank  Powell,  Paul  Jones,  Bertham 
Brown,  Aubrey  Shackell,  P.  G.  Shackell,  Robert  Weitick  and 
R.  H.  Davis. 

TAYLORSVILLE — Times,  published  Thursdays,  Independ- 
ent, Established  1887,  by  J.  W.  Babington;  R.  L.  Teague, 
Editor;  Conway  Sharpe  and  R.  L.  Teague,  Publishers;  ope- 
rates newspaper  and  commercial  printing  plant. 

The  Times  was  started  as  The  Mountain   Scout  and  was 
published  as  such  until  1920.     Former  editors  and  publish-, 
ers  include:   J.  W.  Babington,  Thomas  Smith,  John  Mullen 
and  John  Hart.      Teague  and  Sharpe  have  been  publishing 
the  paper  for  many  years. 

TRENTON — Jones  County  Journal,  published  Thursdays, 
Democratic,  Established  1949,  by  Wilbur  J.  and  Muriel  G. 
Rider;  Wilbur  J.  Rider,  Editor  and  Publisher;  Muriel  G. 
Rider,  Business  Manager;  printed  in  the  Kinston  office  of 
The  Lenoir  County  News;  published  by  The  Lenoir  County 
News  Co.,  Inc.,  owned  by  W.  J.  and  Muriel  G.  Rider. 

TROY — Montgomery  Herald,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1893;  George  M.  Beasley,  Jr.,  Editor; 
Beasley  Newspapers,  Publishers.   (NR) 

The  Serviceman,  published  Wednesdays,  Independent,  Es- 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  41 


tablished  1943;   Charles  H.  Manning,  Editor  and  Publisher. 
(NR) 

TRYON — Folk  County  News,  published  Fridays,  Inde- 
pendent, Established  18  90;  Seth  M.  Vining,  Editor  and  Pub- 
lisher. 

The  News  was  published  for  more  than  40  years  before 
it  was  acquired,  probably  15  years  ago,  by  Mr.  Vining,  pub- 
lisher of  the  unique  miniature  daily  newspaper,  The  Bulle- 
tin.  (NR) 

VALDESE — News,  published  Wednesdays,  Independent, 
Established  1938,  by  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb;  Richard  H.  Byrd, 
Editor;  Beatrice  Cobb,  Publisher;  printed  in  the  Morgan- 
ton  News-Herald  office.  Marcel  Tron,  native  of  this  Wal- 
densian  community,  was  a  former  editor,  as  was  Marse 
Grant,  now  editor  of  Charity  and  Children,  Thomasville. 

WADESBORO — Messenger  and  Intelligencer,  published 
Thursdays,  Democratic,  Established  1881;  R.  B.  Boylin, 
Editor;  Estate  of  J.  G.  Boylin,  Publisher.  (NR) 

WAKE  FOREST— Wake  Weekly,  published  Fridays:  Gid- 
eon V.  Barbee,  publisher;  printed  in  The  Zebulon  Record 
shop;  a  college  community  publication,  formerly  a  farm 
paper.   (NR) 

WALNUT  COVE — Stokes  Record,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  1932;  Robert  J.  H.  Duncan,  Editor 
and  Publisher;  Mrs.  Sallie  F.  Pepper  and  Fred  Pepper 
former  editors.   (NR) 

WARRENTON — Warren  Record,  published  Fridays,  Dem- 
ocratic, Established  1890,  by  Howard  F.  Jones;  Bignall 
Jones,  Editor;  Record  Publishing  and  Supply  Co.  Three 
sons  of  the  founder,  long  secretary  to  Congressman  John  H. 
Kerr,  have  operated  the  paper,  including  Brodie  and  How- 
ard, both  deceased.  Another  brother,  Duke  Jones,  operates 
the  supply  shop.   (NR) 

WARSAW — Warsaw-Faison  News,  published  Thursdays, 
Democratic,  Established  1947;  William  S.  Leinbach,  Editor; 
H.  L.  Oswald,  III,  Publisher;  printed  in  The  Wallace  Enter- 
prise shop. 

The  Warsaw-Faison  News  was  formerly  The  Duplin  Citi- 
zen, owned  and  operated  by  O.  O.  Phillips.  It  was  pur- 
chased by  the  Oswald  interests  and  the  name  was  changed 
last  year.  W.  W.  Williams,  Jr.,  now  editor  of  The  Pender 
Chronicle,  Burgaw,  was  a  former  editor. 

WASHINGTON — Progress,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1909,  by  W.  K.  Jacobson;  Ashley  B.- 
Futrell,  Editor;  News  Publishing  Co.;  also  publisher  of  The 
Washington  Daily  News. 

Former  editors  include:  Garl  Goerch,  publisher  of  The 
State,  Raleigh,  and  Fred  Pendleton  of  the  Elizabeth  City 
Advance.  A  former  Washington  newspaper  was  The  Beau- 
fort County  Record,  suspended  about  two  years  ago. 

WELDON — Roanoke  News,  published  Thursdays,  Demo- 
cratic, Established  1866;  B.  F.  Turner,  Editor;  Roanoke 
News  Publishing  Co.  J.  R.  Grady,  publisher  of  Duplin 
Times,  Kenansville,  was  a  former  publisher.   (NR) 

WENDELL — Gold  Leaf  Farmer,  published  Thursdays, 
Democratic,  Established  1911;  published  by  The  Gold  Leaf 
Farmer  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  Ferd  Davis,  president.  Con- 
trolling interest  in  this  firm  is  owned  by  Theo.  Davis  Sons, 
publisher  of  The  Zebulon  Record.  The  Gold  Leaf  Farmer  is 
printed  in  The  Zebulon  Record  office. 

WEST  JEFFERSON — Skyland  Post,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Established  1930,  by  Miss  Ruth  Reeves;  Mrs. 
Ed  M.  Anderson,  Editor;  Ed  M.  Anderson,  Publisher;  ope- 
rates well-equipped  newspaper  and  job  shop,  in  which  The 
Alleghany  News,  Sparta,  is  printed. 

The  Skyland  Post  has  been  owned  and  operated  by  the 
Andersons  for  the  past  12  years,  during  which  time  it  has 
won  several  State  and  National  awards  for  excellence.    The 


Post  is  a  successor  to  The  Northwestern  Herald,  published 
by  a  stock  company,  started  in  the  early  19  20s.  D.  C.  Nance 
was  editor  for  about  five  years,  and  a  Mr.  Campbell  later, 
until  Miss  Reeves  acquired  it  and  changed  the  name.  The 
Herald  starred  at  Jefferson  but  soon  moved  to  West  Jeffar- 
son.  The  Ashe  Recorder  was  published  for  several  years 
by  Mr.  Campbell,  with  Walter  Johnson  as  editor,  but  sus- 
pended around  1927  when  Mr.  Campbell  went  with  The 
Herald. 

WILMINGTON — Journal  (Negro),  published  Saturdays, 
Independent,  Established  1945,  by  T.  C.  Jervay;  T.  C.  Jer- 
vay,  Editor  and  Publisher;  R.  S.  Jervay  Printing  Co.;  print- 
ed by  The  Carolinian  shop  in  Raleigh. 

The  R.  S.  Jervay  Printing  Co.  was  established  50  yeavs 
ago  by  R.  S.  Jervay,  father  of  T.  C.  Jervay  and  P.  R.  Jervay, 
publisher  of  The  Carolinian  in  Raleigh  and  in  Winston- 
Salem. 

The  Cape  Fear  Journal  was  published  for  several  years 
in  Wilmington  by  P.  R.  and  T.  C.  Jervay  and  Thomas  Smith. 

WINDSOR — Bertie  Ledger-Advance,  published  Thursdays, 
Independent,  Democratic,  Established  188  7;  H.  D.  Cuilen, 
Editor;  Parker  Bros.,  Publishers;  printed  in  the  Ahoskie 
plant.  This  is  one  of  the  four  papers  in  the  weekly  field 
published  by  Parker  Bros. 

WINSTON-SALEM — The  Carolinian  (Negro),  Established 
1950;  Curtis  Todd,  Editor;  published  by  and  printed  in  the 
shop  of  The  Carolinian,  Raleigh,  P.  R.  Jervay,  owner. 

YADKINVILLE — Renfro  Herald,   published  Wednesdays, 
Democratic,    Established    1938,    by   Williams    Printing   Co.; 
Mrs.  Virginia  White  Transou,  Editor;    Renfro  Herald  Pub 
lishing  Co.,  Inc.;  printed  in  The  Mocksville  Enterprise  shop. 

The  Renfro  Herald  is  a  Democratic  paper  in  a  Repub- 
lican county.  The  company  is  owned  by  15  citizens,  largely 
of  Yadkinville  and  Boonville.  It  was  published  briefly  by 
the  late  O.  C.  McQuage  of  The  Mocksville  Enterprise  and 
sold  to  the  present  company.  Former  editors  were:  Mrs. 
Kate  Mackie  Waynick  and  R.  Allen  Jessup.  Mrs.  Transou, 
former  Hertford  bureau  manager  for  The  Daily  Advance, 
Elizabeth  City,  became  editor  about  two  years  ago. 

Yadkin  Ripple,  published  Thursdays,  Republican,  Estab- 
lished 1892  by  Mrs.  Mattie  Johnson  Hall;  W.  E.  Rutledge, 
Editor  and  Publisher;  W.  E.  Rutledge,  Jr.,  Assistant;  print- 
ed by  The  Elkin  Tribune  shop. 

The  Yadkin  Ripple  was  started  at  East  Bend,  near  the 
Yadkin  River,  and  a  few  years  later  was  purchased  by  E.  D. 
Stanford,  attorney,  and  moved  to  Yadkinville.  Later  owners 
were  H.  B.  Nelson,  Rev.  C.  M.  Warden  and  Attorney  S.  C. 
Williams.  Editor  Rutledge  purchased  the  paper  in  1910 
and  has  since  published  it.  Of  the  former  editors,  only  the 
founder,  Mrs.  Hall  of  Winston-Salem,  survives.  (Mrs.  Hall, 
88,  died  in  January,  1951.)  Former  employees  included 
Santford  Martin,  editor  of  the  Winston-Salem  Journal  and 
Sentinel,  and  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  of  The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly. 
The  Ripple  purchased  and  absorbed  The  Yadkin  Valley  Pilot, 
operated  briefly  around  1915  at  East  Bend  by  Charles  E. 
Jenkins,  a  printer  who  perished  when  the  S.  S.  Titanic  sank. 

The  Outlook,  started  in  188  6  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Henry, 
suspended  after  a  few  years.  The  Jonesville  Enterprise,  at 
Jonesville  in  Yadkin  County,  established  around  1850,  was 
one  of  the  first  weeklies  in  northwestern  North  Carolina.  It 
was  published  for  several  years  by  Mumford  Bacon. 

YANCEYVILLE — Caswell  Messenger,  published  Thurs- 
days, Democratic,  Established  1926,  by  W.  C.  Jones;  Erwin 
D.  Stephens,  Editor  and  Publisher;  operates  general  job 
printing  plant.  Mr.  Jones  continued  operation  of  the  paper 
until  1934  when  it  was  taken  over  by  Mr.  Stephens,  who 
continues  as  editor  and  publisher. 

The  Caswell  Democrat  was  published  by  A.  Y.  Kerr  in 
Yancey ville  for  40  years  or  more,  until  it  was  suspended 
in  1941. 


Heavy  Articles,  Wit  and  Humor  in  College  Publications 


BOONE — Appalachian,  published  Fridays,  College,  Estab- 
lished 183  5,  by  students  Appalachian  State  Teachers  Col- 
lege, Editors  and  Publishers,  printed  by  Rivers  Printing 
Co. 

Former  editors  include:   H.  G.  Jones,  history  teacher  at 


Oak  Ridge  Institute;  Sloan  Hill,  news  editor,  Carroll  County 
Georgian,  Carrollton,  Ga.  (These  two  publish  The  Blowing 
Rocket,  summer  publication,  at  Blowing  Rock)  ;  Rogers 
Whitener,  English  instructor,  Florida  Southern  College,  at 
Lakeland,  Fla. 


PAGE  42 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


CHAPEL  HILL — Alumni  Review,  published  Monthly,  Col- 
lege Alumni,  Established  1912,  by  Alumni  of  UNC;  J. 
Maryon  Saunders,  Editor;  General  Alumni  Association  of 
the  University  of  North  Carolina,  Publisher;  official  alumni 
organ;   printed  by  Orange  Print  Shop,  Chapel  Hill. 

The  Alumni  Review  is  printing  9,200  copies  each  of  ten 
months  in  a  year,  approximately  60  %  going  to  alumni  in 
North  Carolina,  but  4  4  states  and  3  5  foreign  countries  are 
represented.  Additional  weekly  issues  are  distributed  dur- 
ing the  fall.  Dr.  L.  R.  Wilson,  librarian,  was  editor  for 
many  years;  Daniel  L.  Grant,  1924-27,  and  Mr.  Saunders 
since  1927. 

Carolina  Journal  of  Pharmacy,  published  Monthly,  Phar- 
maceutical, Established  1915,  by  the  William  Simpson  Phar- 
maceutical Society  of  the  UNC  School  of  Pharmacy;  W.  J. 
Smith,  Editor;  North  Carolina  Pharmaceutical  Association, 
Publisher. 

After  appearing  as  a  quarterly  for  three  years,  this  pub- 
lication was  abandoned  but  was  re-established  as  a  monthly 
in  September,  19  2*2,  published  by  N.  C.  Pharmaceutical  Assn. 
John  Grover  Beard,  late  dean  of  the  UNC  School  of  Phar- 
macy, was  editor  from  the  start  until  1940,  when  Mr.  Smith 
took  over  the  publication.  Miss  Alice  Noble  was  assistant 
editor  for  about  20  years,  19  20-40. 

Carolina  Quarterly,  College  Literary,  Established  1844, 
by  the  Dialectic  and  Philanthropic  Literary  Societies  as  The 
Carolina  Magazine;  Students  of  University  of  North  Caro- 
lina, Editors  and  Publishers. 

The  Carolina  Quarterly  was  established  in  19  48  by  stu- 
dents of  the  State  University.  Present  editor  is  Miss  Lyn 
Miller,  and  it  is  printed  by  the  Colonial  Press,  Chapel  Hill. 
Sponsors  in  this  area  include:  John  Sprunt  Hill,  Betty  Smith, 
Paul  Green,  Dr.  Norman  Foerster,  Josephina  Niggli,  Wil- 
liam M.  Prince  and  others.  Roy  Moose,  William  Sessions, 
Harry  Snowden,  Dr.  Lyman  Cotten,  Walter  Spearman,  Phil- 
lips Russell,  Charles  Eaton  and  Dr.  Harry  Russell,  all  mem- 
bers of  the  Advisory  Board,  are  UNC  faculty  members. 

High  School  Journal,  published  eight  times  a  year,  Edu- 
cational, Established  1918,  by  the  School  of  Education  of 
UNC;  W.  Carson  Ryan,  Editor;  University  of  North  Carolina 
Press,  Publisher.  Until  last  year  this  journal  was  published 
five  times  a  year,  shifting  to  eight  times  a  year  last  October, 
October  through  May. 

North  Carolina  Law  Review,  published  Quarterly,  Legal, 
Established  19  23,  by  the  School  of  Law,  UNC;  Univeristy 
of  North  Carolina  Press,  School  of  Law.  Prof.  Maurice  T. 
Van  Hecke,  later  dean,  was  the  first  editor.  It  was  edited 
by  Law  faculty  members,  with  student  assistance,  1923-39, 
and  has  since  been  edited  by  top  ranking  students,  with 
faculty  advice.     It  is  printed  by  Seeman  Printery,  Durham. 

Popular  Government,  published  Monthly,  N.  C.  Govern- 
ment, Established  193  3,  by  Albert  Coates;  Albert  Coates, 
Editor;  Institute  of  Government,  University  of  N.  C,  Pub- 
lisher.  (NR) 

Southern  Economic  Journal,  published  Quarterly,  Eco- 
nomics, Established  1933,  by  Southern  Economic  Assn.; 
Southern  Economic  Assn.  and  the  University  of  North  Caro- 
lina, Publishers;  G.  T.  Schwenning,  UNC,  managing  editor; 
Board  of  Editors:  T.  C.  Bigham,  University  of  Florida;  L. 
K.  Brandt,  University  of  Mississippi;  A.  S.  Keister,  The 
Woman's  College  of  UNC;  F.  E.  McVay,  N.  C.  State  College; 
and  H.  D.  Wolf,  UNC. 

Tar  Heel,  published  Mornings  except  Monday,  College, 
Established  1892,  by  student  groups;  present  Managing 
Editor,  Rolfe  Neill;  published  by  UNC  students;  printed 
by  Colonial  Press,  Carrboro. 

The  Tar  Heel  claims  to  be  the  oldest  college  daily  in  the 
South;  only  collegiate  paper  in  the  world  with  two  full  wire 
facilities;  is  Chapel  Hill  Bureau  for  the  Associated  Press; 
rated  Ail-American  for  seven  years;  completely  student- 
produced,  including  linotype  and  composition,  everything 
except  pressroom. 

Former  editors  include:  Thomas  Wolf,  famous  author, 
and  Orville  Campbell,  owner  of  the  print  shop,  who  has 
written  several  songs,  including  "All  the  Way,  Choo,  Choo." 

University  of  North  Carolina  News  Letter,  published  Fort- 
nightly (Wed.),  Educational,  Economic  and  Sociological, 
Established  1914,  by  Dr.  E.  C.  Branson;  University  of  North 
Carolina,  Extension  Division,  Publisher.  Dr.  S.  H.  Hobbs, 
Jr.,  succeeded  Dr.  Branson  as  editor  in  1923,  continuing 
until  the  present;  printed  by  Colonial  Press. 

The  News  Letter  is  a  fact-reporting  sheet  dealing  with 
all   phases   of  economic   and   social   life   of   North   Carolina. 


CAROLINIAN,  WOMAN'S  COLLEGE, 
TRAINS  MANY  LEADING  WRITERS 

The  Carolinian,  weekly  publication  of  the  Woman's  Col- 
lege, University  of  North  Carolina,  Greensboro,  has  been 
something  of  a  training  sheet  to  prepare  its  staff  members 
for  splendid  jobs  with  newspapers  and  in  other  activities. 
In  fact,  perusal  of  former  editors  gives  something  of  a 
"Who's  Who"  among  leading  women,  as  supplied  by  Miss 
Tempe  Hughes,  present  editor-in-chief.  Brief  notes  about 
some  of  them  follow: 

Ann  Cantrell,  Mrs.  Ben  N.  White,  Jr.,  society  editor 
Greensboro  News  Record. 

Nell  Craig,  Mrs.  Bruce  Strowd,  Chapel  Hill,  director  Wo- 
man's College  News  Bureau,  1942-45. 

Eleanor  Vanneman,  Mrs.  Chase  H.  Benson,  Greensboro, 
politics  and  civic  activities. 

Blanche  Armfield,  Washington,  D.  C,  working  on  medical 
history  of  World  War  II  in  office  of  Surgeon  General,  Dept. 
of  Army. 

Frances  M.  Gibson,  Mrs.  Boydston  Satterfield,  Atlanta, 
Ga.,  free  lance  writer  for  trade  journals,  formerly  with 
Women's  Division,  Democratic  National  Committee. 

Mattie  Moore  Taylor,  Mrs.  R.  G.  G.  Stanton,  journalist  in 
Hong  Kong,  China,  at  last  reports;  formerly  with  Wisconsin 
State  Journal  and  publicity  director,  Community  Union, 
Madison,  Wis. 

Betty  Brown,  Mrs.  Carlton  Jester,  Jr.,  Greensboro,  former 
executive  secretary,  Woman's  College  Alumni  Asso. 

Margaret  Kernodle,  Washington,  D.  C,  Associated  Press 
correspondent. 

Elizabeth  Yates,  Mrs.  Walter  King,  Jr.,  Greensboro,  works 
for  Life  Magazine. 

Kate  Urquhart,  New  York  City,  active  executive  in  public 
relations;  formerly  with  advertising  agency;  formerly  asso- 
ciated with  U.  S.  Camera  Annual,  associate  editor,  Traveling 
Camera  magazine. 

Maxine  Garner,  Aberdeen  Scotland,  doing  graduate  work 
on  Fulbright  scholarship;  former  director  of  religious  activ- 
ities, Woman's  College. 

Peggy  Dean,  Raleigh,  continuity  script  writer,  Radio  Sta- 
tion WPTF. 

Frances  Newsome,  Mrs.  Latham  L.  Miller,  Raleigh  mem- 
ber UNC  board  of  trustees;  former  News  &  Observer 
reporter. 

Hal  March,  Mrs.  Bernard  Scheffler,  for  several  years  exec- 
utive secretary,  Phi  Beta  Kappa  edition,  The  Scholar. 

Betty  Anne  Ragland,  works  for  Salisbury  Post. 

Sarah  Denny,  Raleigh,  associate  editor,  Carolina  Co-opera- 
tor. 

Ellen  Metz,  New  York  City,  secretary,  Oxford  Press,  NYC. 

Katherine  Taylor,  dean  of  women  at  Woman's  College 
since  1943. 


Each  issue  is  devoted  to  a  central  topic  of  timely  interest 
to  the  people  of  the  State.  The  publication  goes  to  11,000 
persons.  The  approximately  1,300  issues  so  far  constitute 
the  greatest  body  of  important  information  about  this  State 
to  be  found  in  any  State  in  the  Union. 

CHARLOTTE — Quarterly  Review  of  Higher  Education 
Among  Negroes  (Negro),  published  Quarterly,  Educational 
(Negro),  Established  193  3,  by  Johnson  C.  Smith  University; 
Hardy  Liston,  Editor;  T.  E.  McKinney,  Managing  Editor; 
Johnson  C.  Smith  University,  Publisher.  This  publication 
is  a  contribution  to  the  promotion  of  education  by  the  Uni- 
versity. Dr.  H.  L.  McCrorey,  President-Emeritus,  was  form- 
er editor. 

Queens  Blues,  published  Bi-monthly,  College,  Established 
1922,  by  Students  of  Queens  College,  Editors  and  Publishers. 

CULLOWHEE — Western  Carolinian,  published  Semi- 
monthly, College,  Established  1933,  by  Faculty  and  students 
of  Western  Carolina  Teachers  College,  Publishers. 

This  paper  resumed  publication  in  January  after  suspen- 
sion for  several  weeks  due  to  resigning  of  the  editor;  printed 
by  the  Waynesville  Mountaineer  Print  Shop. 

DAVIDSON — Davidsonian,  published  Fridays,  College,  Es- 
tablished 1915,  by  Students  of  Davidson  College,  Editors  and 
Publishers.   (NR) 

Scripts  'n'  Pranks,  published  four  times  a  year,  College 
Literary  and  Humor,  Established  1930,  by  Students  of  Dav- 
idson College,  Editors  and  Publishers. 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  43 


This  publication  was  the  successor  to  two  former  college 
publications — Yowl,  a  humor  magazine  published  until  1930, 
when  it  was  banned  for  pornography,  and  The  Chameleon, 
a  literary  magazine  published  until  1930,  when  it  died  a 
natural  death.  Scripts  'n'  Pranks  is  well  censored.  It  is 
printed  by  The  Herald  Press,  Charlotte.  Former  editors 
include:  David  H.  Gambrell,  now  at  Harvard  University; 
David  C.  Hamilton,  present  editor,  both  soon  to  be  in  U.  S. 
Army,  and  William  J.  Hamilton,  now  in  U.  S.  Air  Corps. 

DURHAM — Character  and  Personality,  published  Quar- 
terly, Psychology,  Established  193  2,  by  Dr.  Karl  Zener, 
Editor;  Duke  University  Press,  Publisher.    (NR) 

Chronicle,  published  Fridays,  College,  Established  190  5, 
by  Trinity  College;  Duke  University  Publications  Board, 
Publisher;  printed  by  Christian  Printing  Co.,  Durham.  This 
publication  was  started  as  The  Trinity  Chronicle  and  the 
"Trinity"  was  dropped  when  the  name  of  Trinity  College 
was  changed  to  Duke  University. 

Duke  Mathematical  Journal,  published  Quarterly,  Mathe- 
matical, Established  1935;  John  H.  Roberts,  Managing  Edi- 
tor; Duke  University  Press,  Publisher  and  Printer. 

This  journal  publishes  original  research  papers  in  the 
field  of  mathematics.  Former  editors  include  Joseph  Miller 
Thomas  and  Leonard  Carlitz. 

Duke  'n'  Duchess  Magazine,  published  Monthly,  College 
Humor,  Established  1935,  by  Students  of  Duke  University, 
Editors  and  Publishers.  (NR) 

Duke  University  Alumni  Register,  published  Monthly, 
College  Alumni,  Established  1915,  by  the  alumni  of  Trinity 
College;  Charles  A.  Dukes,  Editor;  Alumni  Assn.  of  Duke 
University,  Publisher;  Seeman  Printery,  Inc.,  Durham, 
Printer. 

The  name  of  this  publication  was  changed  from  Trinity 
Alumni  Register  in  19  25  when  the  name  Trinity  College 
was  changed  to  Duke  University. 

Duke  University  Archive,  published  Quarterly,  College 
Literary,  Established  1888,  by  Trinity  College;  Duke  Uni- 
versity Publication  Board,  Editors  and  Publishers;  Chris- 
tian Printing  Co.,  Durham,  Printer. 

The  Archive  is  said  to  be  the  oldest  continuous  literary 
publication  in  the  South  and  was  the  sole  publication  at 
Trinity  College  until  1905,  when  The  Chronicle  appeared. 
It  was  published  first  by  the  senior  class  of  Trinity  College. 

In  1943,  due  to  war  conditions,  The  Archive  was  com- 
bined with  the  humor  magazine,  Duke  'n'  Duchess,  but  in 
1945  the  two  publications  were  separated  again. 

Ecology,  published  Quarterly,  Scientific,  Established  1920, 
by  The  Ecological  Society  of  America;  Donald  B.  Lawrence 
and  E.  S.  Deevey,  Editors;  Duke  University  Press,  Publish- 
er; printed  by  the  Lancaster  Press. 

Ecology  is  affiliated  with  "Bulletin  of  the  Ecological  So- 
ciety of  America,"  (Quarterly)  edited  by  the  secretary,  and 
"Ecological  Monographs,"  published  quarterly,  scientific, 
established  in  1931;  H.  J.  Oosting  and  W.  J.  Hamilton,  Jr., 
editors;  Duke  University  Press,  publisher;  Seeman  Printery, 
Durham,  Printer. 

Journal  of  Parapsychology,  published  Quarterly,  Scientific, 
Established  1937,  by  Prof.  William  McDougald  and  Dr.  J. 
B.  Rhine;  Duke  University  Press,  Publisher;  printed  by 
Seeman  Printery,  Durham;  edited  for  three  years  by  Dr. 
Gardner  Murphy,  then  of  Columbia  University,  now  head, 
Dept.  of  Psychology,  College  of  the  City  of  New  York. 

The  Parapsychology  Bulletin  is  published  quarterly  and 
sent  to  subscribers  of  The  Journal  but  may  be  acquired  sep- 
arately; Dorothy  H.  Pope,  Parapsychology  Laboratory,  Duke 
University,  Editor. 

Journal  of  Personality,  published  Quarterly,  Psychology, 
Established  1932;  D.  Karl  Zener,  Editor;  Duke  University 
Press,  Publisher.    (NR) 

South  Atlantic  Quarterly,  published  Quarterly,  Lit.  &  His- 
toric, Established  1902,  by  9019  Scohlarship  Society  of 
Trinity  College;  Wm.  T.  Laprade,  Editor;  Duke  University 
Press,  Publisher;  printed  at  Seeman  Printery,  Durham. 

The  Quarterly  was  published  by  the  South  Atlantic  Pub- 
lishing Co.  until  the  Duke  University  Press  was  established 
in  1925.  Former  editors  include:  John  Spencer  Bassett, 
Dr.  Edwin  Mims,  Dr.  W.  P.  Few,  Dr.  W.  H.  Glosson,  Dr. 
W.  K.  Boyd,  Dr.  W.  H.  Wannamaker  and  Henry  S.  Dwire. 

The  Hispanic  American  Historical  Review,  published  Quar- 
terly, Latin-American  History,  Established  1918,  by  Ameri- 
can Historical  Assn.;  Dr.  Charles  C.  Griffin  (Vassar  Col- 
lege, Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.),  Editor;  Duke  University  Press, 
Publisher;  printed  by  Seeman  Printery,  Durham. 


The  Review  was  suspended  in  1921  and  in  1926  was  taken 
over  and  continues  to  be  owned  and  published  by  Duke 
University  Press. 

ELON  COLLEGE — Maroon  and  Gold,  published  Bi-month- 
ly (Fridays),  College,  Established  1919,  by  Students  of 
Elon  College,  Editors  and  Publishers.    (NR) 

GREENSBORO — Carolinian,  published  Fridays,  College, 
Established  1918,  by  Student  Government  Association  of  the 
Woman's  College  of  University  of  North  Carolina,  Publish- 
ers; Tempe  Hughes,  current  Editor-in-chief;  printed  by 
McCulloch  Press,  Greensboro. 

The  Carolinian  uses  inter-collegiate  and  national  ACP 
releases;  member  of  N.  C.  Collegiate  Press  Assn.  and  Asso- 
ciated College  Press,  distributor  of  Collegiate  Digest.  (See 
Press  Notes  for  former  editors.) 

Coraddi,  published  Quarterly,  College  Literary,  Estab- 
lished 1897,  by  Student  Literary  Societies,  Woman's  College 
of  University  of  North  Carolina,  Publisher;  student  editors; 
printed  by  McCulloch  Press,  Greensboro. 

Coraddi  was  formerly  known  as  State  Normal  Magazine 
(1897-1919),  was  published  by  a  board  of  editors,  elected 
from  literary  societies  under  the  direction  of  a  managing 
editor,  chosen  by  the  faculty  until  190  7.  Since  1914  it  has 
been  published  entirely  by  a  student-elected  staff,  no  longer 
connected  with  literary  societies  and  independent  of  the 
faculty.  It  has  been  a  splendid  training  school  for  editors 
and  authors.      (See  Press  Notes.) 

GREENVILLE — Teco  Echo,  published  Fridays,  College, 
Established  192'5,  by  Students  of  East  Carolina  Teachers 
College,  Editors  and  Publishers. 

Teco  Echo  is  a  modern  weekly  paper  distributed  to  stu- 
dents, faculty  and  alumni.  Last  year  it  was  awarded  high- 
est ratings  for  newspapers  published  by  teachers  colleges, 
by  the  Columbia  Scholastic  Press  Association  of  Columbia 
University.  It  is  printed  by  the  Renfrew  Printing  Co., 
Greenville.  This  year's  editor  is  Rexford  E.  Piner.  Former 
editors  include:  James  A.  Whitfield,  state  editor  of  The 
News  and  Observer,  and  Bernice  Jenkins,  managing  editor, 
Wilmington  News.     The  Tecoan  is  the  college  yearbook. 

GUILFORD  COLLEGE — Guilfordian,  published  Bi-month- 
ly, College,  Established  19  20,  by  Literary  Societies  of  Guil- 
ford College,  Editors  and  Publishers.    (NR) 

HICKORY — Lenoir-Rhynean,  published  Fridays,  College, 
Established  1910,  by  Students  of  Lenoir-Rhyne  College, 
Editors  and  Publishers.  Editors  and  business  managers  are 
elected  annually  by  the  student  body,  the  editor  receiving 
a  $100  scholarship.  It  is  printed  by  the  Hickory  Printing 
Co.  The  Tracer,  a  former  humor  magazine,  was  suspended 
due  to  faculty  pressure. 

HIGH  POINT — Hi-Po,  published  Bi-weekly,  College,  Es- 
tablished 1924,  by  Students  of  High  Point  College,  Editors 
and  Publishers.    (NR) 

MARS  HILL — Hilltop,  published  Semi-monthly,  College, 
Established  1925,  by  Students  of  Mars  Hill  College,  Editors 
and  Publishers;   printed  by  the  Biltmore  Press,  Asheville. 

The  Hilltop  took  the  place  of  The  Laurel,  a  student  lit- 
erary publication  whose  name  was  transferred  to  the  college 
annual. 

Mars  Hill  College  Quarterly,  published  quarterly  by  Mars 
Hill  College.  It  carries  news  of  the  college  and  items  of 
interest  to  the  alumni  and  constituency. 

RALEIGH — Rural  Sociology,  published  Quarterly,  Rural 
Sociology,  Established  193  6;  Howard  W.  Beers,  University 
of  Kentucky,  Editor;  Selz  C.  Mayo,  Managing  Editor;  North 
Carolina  State  College,  Publisher;  printed  at  N.  C.  State 
Print  Shop. 

Rural  Sociology  is  the  official  organ  of  the  Rural  Socio- 
logical Society,  devoted  to  publishing  research  relative  to 
the  scientific  study  of  rural  life.  This  journal  is  used  by 
educational  institutions  in  their  study  of  rural  life.  It  was 
published  for  five  years  by  Louisiana  State  University,  with 
T.  Lynn  Smith  as  managing  editor  after  it  began  in  193  6. 
N.  C.  State  College  has  published  it  during  the  last  ten 
years. 

State  College  News,  published  Monthly,  College  Alumni, 
Established  19  28,  by  General  Alumni  Assn.  of  North  Caro- 
lina State  College  of  Agriculture  and  Engineering;  H.  W. 
(Pop)   Taylor,  Editor;   printed  under  contract. 

This  magazine  is  devoted  to  acquainting  former  students 
with   activities  and  services  of   the   college  and   to   helping 


Page  44 


THE  E.  $.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


alumni  keep  in  touch  with  one  another,  and  is  sent  to  all 
dues-paying  members.  Mr.  Taylor  is  executive  secretary  of 
the  Association. 

Technician,  published  Fridays,  College,  Established  1920, 
by  Students  of  North  Carolina  State  College,  Editors  and 
Publishers.    (NR) 

Twig,  published  Semi-monthly,  College,  Established  1907, 
by  Students  of  Meredith  College,  Editors  and  Publishers. 
(NR) 

RED  SPRINGS — Pine  and  Thistle,  published  Quarterly, 
College,  Established  1898,  by  Zetesian  and  Epsilon  Literary 
Societies;  Students  of  Flora  MacDonald  College  for  Women, 
Editors  and  Publishers;  present  editor,  Amanda  Smith; 
Carolyn  Huneycutt,  Business  Manager;  printed  by  Edwards 
and  Broughton,  Raleigh;  Dr.  Eleanor  B.  Scott,  Faculty  Ad- 
viser. 

This    magazine    began    as 
printed  after  the  first  year, 
by  the  general  student  body. 


a   handwritten    sheet    but    was 

In  the  19  30s  it  was  taken  over 

Its  name  comes  from  the  type 


of  section  and  the  Scottish  heritage. 

SALISBURY — Pioneer,  published  Fortnightly  (Sat.),  Col- 


lege,   Established    1925,    by    Students    of    Catawba    College, 
Editors  and  Publishers.   (NR) 

WAKE  FOREST — Old  Gold  and  Black,  published  Mon- 
days, College,  Established  1916,  by  college  students;  Stu- 
dents of  Wake  Forest  College,  Editors  and  Publishers; 
present  staff,  Miss  Carol  Oldham  and  Dave  Clark,  Co-editors; 
Bob  Holloman,  Business  Manager;  printed  by  the  Progres- 
sive Printing  Co.,  Durham. 

This  year  Old  Gold  and  Black  increased  its  size  to  seven 
columns  by  20  inches,  six  pages.  It  deals  with  student 
activities  and  2100  copies  are  mailed  weekly.  Former  edi- 
tors include:  Dr.  E.  E.  Folk;  Robert  L.  Humber,  Greenville 
attorney,  and  World  Federation  promoter;  and  Carroll  C. 
Weathers,  Raleigh  attorney. 

WILSON — Torchlight,  published  Monthly,  College,  Estab- 
lished 19  28,  by  Students  of  Atlantic  Christian  College,  Edi- 
tors and  Publishers.   (NR) 

WINSTON-SALEM — Salemite,  published  Fridays,  College, 
Established  19  21,  by  Students  of  Salem  College,  Editors 
and   Publishers.    (NR) 


Religious,  Professional,  Trade  and  Special  Publications 


RELIGIOUS 

CHARLOTTE — Star  of  Zion  (Negro),  published  Thurs- 
days, A.M.E.  Zion,  Established  1876;  Rev.  W.  R.  Lovell, 
Editor;  A.M.E.  Zion  Publishing  House.    (NR) 

GREENSBORO — American  Jewish  Times-Ontlook,  pub- 
lished Monthly,  Religion  &  Democratic,  Established  1934, 
by  Harry  Sabel  and  David  Bernstein;  Irving  A.  Weisler, 
Editor;  David  Bernstein,  Manager;  Nathan  Kessler,  Rich- 
mond Office  Manager;  Mrs.  Min  Klein,  Carolinas  News  Edi- 
tor; Mrs.  Florence  Byers,  Virginia  News  Editor;  printed  by 
McCulloch  Press,  Greensboro;  published  by  the  American 
Jewish  Times-Outlook,  Inc. 

The  American  Jewish  Times,  Greensboro,  and  The  Ameri- 
can Jewish  Outlook,  of  Virginia,  were  consolidated  in  Aug- 
ust, 19  50.  Mr.  Sabel  was  owner  until  his  death  in  April, 
1950,  of  The  Times,  which  was  bought  then  by  David  Bern- 
stein. Mr.  Sabel  and  David  Bernstein  organized  The  Out- 
look in  Virginia  in  1945,  and  Harry  N.  Bernstein  bought 
Mr.  Sabel's  stock  in  1947.  Former  editors  include:  Harry 
Bernstein,  Mr.  Sabel  and  Marvin  Caplan,  in  Virginia,  and 
Chester  B.  Brown,  in  Greensboro.  The  publication  dissem- 
inates current  international,  national,  sectional,  organiza- 
tional and  social  news  of  interest  to  the  Jewry  of  the  South- 
east. 

North  Carolina  Christian  Advocate,  published  Thursdays, 
Methodist,  Established  1855,  by  the  Methodist  Church  of 
North  Carolina;  C.  W.  Robbins,  Editor;  Methodist  Board  of 
Publications,  Inc. 

The  Christian  Advocate  is  the  result  of  the  merger  of  the 
Raleigh  Christian  Advocate,  the  North  Carolina  Christian 
Advocate  and  the  former  Methodist  Protestant  publication. 
It  is  printed  by  the  Piedmont  Press,  owned  by  the  two 
North  Carolina  Methodist  Conferences.  Former  editors  in- 
clude: Dr.  H.  C.  Sprinkle,  Jr.,  Drs.  M.  T.  and  A.  W.  Plyler, 
twins,  T.  A.  Sykes  and  Dr.  Gilbert  T.  Rowe. 

JEFFERSON — Ashe  Presbyterian,  published  Quarterly, 
Presbyterian,  Established  19  20,  by  Rev.  R.  H.  Stone;  John 
W.  Luke,  Editor;  The  Ashe  Presbyterian,  Publisher;  printed 
by  the  Skyland  Post,  West  Jefferson. 

This  publication  is  dedicated  to  home  mission  work,  pri- 
marily in  Ashe  County,  and  contributors  include  Presbyte- 
rian ministers  and  lay  leaders  in  the  county.  Former  editors 
include  Rev.  R.  H.  Stone  and  Miss  Kathryn  Hunt,  both  of 
Jefferson. 

KINSTON — Mission  Herald,  published  Monthly,  Protes- 
tant Episcopal,  Established  1886;  Rev.  J.  R.  Rountree, 
Editor;   Diocese  of  East  Carolina,  Publisher.   (NR) 

RALEIGH — Baptist  Informer,  published  Monthly,  Bap- 
tist, (Negro),  Established  1878,  by  General  Baptist  Con- 
vention of  North  Carolina,  Inc.;  Otis  L.  Hairston,  Editor; 
General  Baptist  Convention  of  N.  C,  Publishers;  printed  by 
the  Capital  Printing  Co.,  Raleigh. 

This  is  the  official  organ  of  the  General  Baptist  Conven- 


tion devoted  to  publicizing  the  work  of  some  1700  affiliated 
churches  and  national  religious  activities  and  trends.  The 
name  of  the  publication  has  been  changed  six  times  in  the 
more  than  7  0  years  of  publication,  including  African  Exposi- 
tor, The  Eaptist  Highlight,  The  Chowan  Pilot,  Baptist  Sen- 
tinel, Union  Reformer,  and  the  present  name,  Baptist  In- 
former, was  given  the  publication  in  19  43  by  its  present 
editor,  Otis  L.  Hairston. 

Biblical  Recorder,  published  Saturdays,  Baptist,  Estab- 
lished 1835,  by  Thomas  Meredith;  Dr.  L.  L.  Carpenter, 
Editor;  Biblical  Recorder,  Inc.,  Publisher;  printed  by  the 
Bynum  Printing  Co.,  Raleigh. 

The  Biblical  Recorder  was  established  as  the  North  Caro- 
lina Baptist  Interpreter  at  New  Bern  in  1833  by  Dr.  Mere- 
dith, for  whom  Meredith  College  was  named.  It  became 
The  Biblical  Recorder  in  18  3  5  and  in  18  38  it  moved  to 
Raleigh.  Although  the  official  organ  of  the  State  Baptist 
Convention,  it  was  privately  owned  until  1939  when  it  be- 
came the  property  of  the  Convention.  Present  circulation 
is  approximately  42,000.  The  Biblical  Recorder  is  said  to 
be  the  oldest  corporation  in  Raleigh  and  is  probably  the 
oldest  publication  in  the  State.  Dr.  Carpenter  has  been 
editor  since  1942  and  recent  editors  were:  J.  S.  Farmer, 
John  C.  Slemp  and  Eugene  Olive.  Earlier  nationally- 
known  editors  were:  Josiah  William  Bailey,  later  U.  S. 
Senator;  Dr.  Hight  C.  Moore,  later  editorial  secretary  of 
the  Southern  Baptist  Sunday  School  Board,  and  Dr.  Living- 
ston Johnson,  editor  for  14  years. 

WEAVERVILLE — Southern  Presbyterian  Journal,  pub- 
lished Weekly,  Presbyterian,  Established  1941,  by  the 
Southern  Presbyterian  Journal,  Inc.,  Publisher;  Rev.  Henry 
B.  Dendy,  D.D.,  Editor;  Dr.  L.  Nelson  Bell,  Associate  Editor; 
A.  Douglas  Reid,  Associate  and  Business  Manager;  printed 
by  the  Biltmore  Press,  Asheville. 

The  Journal  is  the  publication  of  the  Southern  Presbyte- 
rian Church  and  has  a  circulation  in  excess  of  15,000. 

WILMINGTON — Mission  Herald,  published  Monthly, 
Prot.  Episc,  (Not  issued  during  July  and  August),  Estab- 
lished 1886;  Rev.  W.  R.  Noe,  Editor;  Diocese  of  East  Caro- 
lina, Publisher.    (NR) 

WILSON — Zion's  Landmark,  published  Weekly,  Estab- 
lished 18  70,  by  Elder  P.  D.  Gold,  Primitive  Baptist  minister; 
Herbert  D.  Brauff,  Publisher;  organ  of  State  Primitive  Bap- 
tist Church. 

Zion's  Landmark,  published  several  years  by  Elder  Gold, 
was  published  for  many  years  by  John  D.  Gold,  long  pub- 
lisher of  the  Wilson  Daily  Times  and  The  Times,  semi- 
weekly,  until  the  plant  was  leased  to  Mr.  Brauff  in  1947. 

WINSTON-SALEM  —  Wachovia  Moravian,  published 
Monthly,  Moravian,  Established  18  93,  by  Moravian  Church; 
Rev.  Walser  Allen,  Editor;  Moravian  Church,  Southern 
Province,  Publisher.  (NR) 


Winter-Spring,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  45 


PROFESSIONAL 

CHARLOTTE — Southern  Hospitals,  published  Monthly, 
Hospitals,  Established  1932;  Andrew  Hewitt,  Editor;  Junius 
Smith,  Business  Manager;  Clark-Smith  Publishing  Co.,  Da- 
vid Clark,  president,  printed  in  its  shop. 

This  is  the  official  publication  of  14  state  hospitals  asso- 
ciations in  the  South  and  is  unique  as  a  regional  publica- 
tion. Although  devoted  primarily  to  southern  institutions, 
material  of  universal  interest  is  carried.  The  publication 
goes  to  approximately  3,000  hospitals  administrators  and 
department  heads. 

Southern  Medicine  and  Surgery,  published  Monthly,  Medi- 
cine &  Surgery,  Established  1856,  by  Medical  Society  of  the 
State  of  North  Carolina;  J.  M.  Northington,  M.  D.,  Editor 
and  Publisher. 

This  is  the  official  journal  of  the  Tri-state  Medical  Asso- 
ciation, embracing  the  Carolinas  and  Virginia,  for  the  past 
20  years.  It  was  successor  to  the  North  Carolina  Medical 
Journal,  Wilmington  Medical  Journal  and  Charlotte  Med- 
ical Journal.  Dr.  Northington  has  been  editor  for  some  30 
years.  Among  former  editors  were:  Drs.  Thomas  P.  Wood, 
Robert  Jewett,  W.  H.  Wakefield,  E.  C.  Register,  J.  C.  Mont- 
gomery, M.  L.  Townsend,  and  department  editors:  Drs.  E. 
J.  Wood,  J.  K.  Hall,  A.  J.  Crowell,  Wingate  Johnson,  Hubert 
A.  Royster,  Robert  F.  Lafferty,  Paul  Ringer,  William  Allan, 
Oscar  L.  Miller  and  C.  C.  Orr. 

The  Southern  Optometrist,  published  Monthly,  Establish- 
ed 1947,  by  Clark-Smith  Publishing  Co.,  printed  in  its  shop;' 
David  Clark,  President;  Andrew  Hewitt,  Editor;  Junius 
Smith,  Business  Manager. 

This  publication  is  devoted  to  the  optometric  profession 
and  embraces  14  state  optometric  associations  in  the  South. 

McCAIN — Sanatorium  Sun,  published  Monthly,  Tubercu- 
losis and  Health,  Established  1925,  by  Extension  Dept.,  N. 
C.  Sanatorium;  Verniece  N.  Hatos,  Editor;  printed  by  Sand- 
hill Citizen,  Aberdeen. 

The  Sun  is  devoted  to  prevention  and  cure  of  tuberculosis 
and  the  promotion  of  health.  It  is  distributed  in  North 
America  and  several  foreign  countries.  John  M.  Gibson, 
former  editor,  is  director,  Division  of  Public  Health  Edu- 
cation in  Alabama,  and  author  of  "Physician  To  The  World: 
The  Life  of  General  William  C.  Gorgas,"  published  by  Duke 
University  Press  in  1950. 

RALEIGH — North  Carolina  Education,  published  Month- 
ly, Educational,  Etsablished  1906;  Mrs.  Ethel  Perkins  Ed- 
wards, Editor;  W.  Amos  Abrams,  Associate  Editor;  John 
G.  Bikle,  Advertising  Manager;  published  by  the  North  Caro- 
lina Education  Association,  printed  by  Edwards  and  Brough- 
ton. 

The  North  Carolina  Education  Association  was  started 
by  Dr.  E.  C.  Brooks  and  H.  E.  Seeman,  directed  by  an  ad- 
visory board  representing  the  State  Department  of  Public 
Instruction,  the  State  superintendents  and  teachers. 

This  magazine,  official  publication  of  the  N.  C.  Education 
Association,  is  published  monthly  during  the  school  year 
and  is  devoted  to  promoting  the  interest  of  State  teachers. 
Former  editors  and  publishers  include:  E.  C.  Brooks,  editor; 
H.  E.  Seeman,  publisher;  W.  F.  Marshall,  editor  and  pub- 
lisher; A.  T.  Allen,  contributing  editor;  M.  R.  Trabue  and 
M.  L.  Wright,  editors;  Jule  B.  Warren,  business  manager, 
publisher  and  editor;  Fred  W.  Greene,  editor,  and  Alice 
Paulukas,  asosciate  editor. 

North  Carolina  Historical  Review,  published  Quarterly, 
Historical,  Established  192'4,  by  North  Carolina  Historical 
Commission,  now  the  State  Department  of  Archives  and  His- 
tory; D.  L.  Corbett,  Managing  Editor;  N.  C.  State  Dept.  of 
Archives  and  History,  Publisher;  printed  under  State  con- 
tract. 

The  Historical  Review  is  devoted  to  publishing  original 
articles  dealing  with  the  history  of  the  State  and  is  pub- 
lished in  January,  April,  July  and  October  of  each  year. 
Secretaries  of  the  Archives  and  History  Dept.  have  served 
as  managing  editors,  including  Dr.  R.  B.  House,  chancellor 
of  the  State  University,  and  Dr.  A.  R.  Newsome,  now  head 
of  the  History  Dept.  of  the  State  University.  Dr.  Crittenden 
was  designated  as  editor  in  193  6. 

Southern  City,  published  Monthly,  Municipal,  Established 
1937,  by  the  N.  C.  League  of  Municipalities;  Mrs.  Davetta 
Steed,  Editor;  Southern  Municipal  News  Publishing  Co., 
Inc.;  printed  by  Edwards  and  Broughton,  Raleigh. 

This  publication  is  devoted  to  the  interests  of  municipal 
governments,  specifically  in  North  Carolina  and  in  the 
southern  states  in  general.     Former  editors  include:  Colvin 


E.  Leonard,  editor  of  the  Greensboro  Record,  and  C.  A.  Up- 
church,  Jr.,  of  the  State  Alcoholic  Beverage  Control  Board. 
Mrs.  Steed,  League  secretary,  has  been  editor  in  recent 
years. 

Tarheel  Banker,  published  Monthly,  Established  1922,  by 
N.  C.  Bankers  Assn.;  Joseph  H.  Wolfe,  Editor;  Jane  Las- 
siter,  Associate  Editor;  North  Carolina  Bankers  Assn.,  Pub- 
lisher; printed  by  Edwards  and  Broughton,  Raleigh. 

This  magazine  is  published  in  the  promotion  of  banking 
in  the  State  and  other  promotional  activities  in  which  they 
engage.  It  is  distributed  to  all  of  the  4  20  banks  in  this 
State  and  their  branches,  to  associate  members  and  to  inter- 
ested bankers  throughout  the  nation.  Editors  have  been 
secretaries  of  the  State  association,  including  Alan  T.  Bow- 
ler, Paul  P.  Brown,  Eddie  Wayne,  LeRoy  Lewis  and  Fred 
W.  Greene.  The  Association  also  publishes  Trends  in  Bank- 
ing and  Conference  Catalog,  published  each  July  covering 
the  Bankers  Conference  held  annually  at  Chapel  Hill. 

WINSTON-SALEM — North  Carolina  Medical  Journal,  pub- 
lished Monthly,  Medical,  Established  1940,  by  the  Medical 
Society  of  the  State  of  North  Carolina,  Publisher;  Dr.  W.  M. 
Johnson,  Editor;  printed  by  Carmichael  Printing  Co.,  Win- 
ston-Salem. This  is  the  official  organ  of  and  is  distributed 
to  members  of  the  State  Medical  Society. 

TRADE  PAPERS 

ASHEVILLE — Farmers  Federation  News,  published 
Monthly  Agricultural,  Established  1920;  E.  M.  Ball,  Edi- 
tor; Farmers  Federation  News,  Inc.,  Publisher,  devoted  to 
farming  in  the  mountain  counties. 

Former  editors  have  been:  James  G.  K.  McClure,  organ- 
izer and  head  of  Farmers  Federation;  Blackburn  W.  John- 
son, editor  of  N.  C.  Agricultural  Department  publications; 
James  McC.  Clarke  and  Robert  J.  Brown. 

CHARLOTTE — Carolina  Food  Dealer,  published  Monthly, 
Food  Dealers,  Established  1938,  by  N.  C.  Food  Dealers 
Assn.,  Inc.;  J.  B.  Vogler,  Editor;  N.  C.  Food  Dealers  Assn., 
Inc.;  printed  by  the  Dowd  Press,  Charlotte. 

This  publication  is  devoted  to  the  interest  of  the  retail 
and  wholesale  trade  in  North  Carolina.  It  is  a  member  of 
the  Food  Trade  Press  of  America. 

"Go",  published  Bi-monthly,  Motoring  and  Travel,  Estab- 
lished 1922,  by  Coleman  W.  Roberts,  president,  Carolina 
Motor  Club;  Thomas  H.  Broughton,  Editor;  T.  E.  Pickard, 
Jr.,  Associate  Editor;  Carolina  Motor  Club,  Publisher.  Pub- 
lication offices  are  located  at  The  Carolina  Motor  Club  head- 
quarters, 701  South  Tryon  St. 

Knitter,  published  Monthly,  Knitting  Industry,  Establish- 
ed 1937,  by  Clark  Publishing  Co.;  David  Clark,  Editor; 
Clark  Publishing  Co.,  printed  by  Washburn  Printing  Co. 
Affiliated  publications  are:  The  Textile  Bulletin,  Southern 
Hospitals  and  Southern  Optometrist. 

Southern  Textile  News,  published  Saturdays,  Textile,  Es- 
tablished 1945,  by  John  M.  Mullen;  John  M.  Mullen,  Editor; 
Mullen  Publications,  Inc.   (NR) 

Textile  Bulletin,  published  Monthly,  Textile,  Established 
1911,  by  David  Clark,  Editor;  Clark  Publishing  Co.;  printed 
by  Washburn  Printing  Co.  Affiliated  publications  include 
The  Knitter  and  two  Clark-Smith  Publishing  Co.  publica- 
tions, Southern  Hospitals  and  Southern  Optometrist. 

GREENSBORO — Patriot  Farmer,  published  Semi-month- 
ly, Agriculture,  Established  1826;  Eugene  S.  Knight,  Editor; 
Patriot  Publishing  Co.    (NR) 

RALEIGH — Carolina  Co-operator,  published  Monthly,  Ag- 
ricultural, Established  1922,  by  N.  C.  Cotton  Growers  Coop- 
erative Association;  M.  G.  Mann,  Jr.,  Editor;  Carolina  Co- 
operator  Publishing  Co.;  printed  by  Graphic  Press,  Inc., 
Raleigh. 

Carolina  Co-operator  was  started  in  1922  as  North  Caro- 
lina Cotton  Grower.  The  name  was  changed  in  193  5,  when 
the  format  was  changed  from  newspaper  to  magazine.  A 
former  editor  was  Roy  H.  Park,  now  editor  of  The  Co-op 
Digest,  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

Carolina  Farmer,  published  Monthly,  Agricultural,  Estab- 
lished 1946,  by  J.  E.  Nicholson;  J.  E.  Nicholson,  Editor;  The 
Carolina  Farmer  Publishing  Co.;  printed  by  the  Graphic 
Press,  Raleigh. 

The  Carolina  Farmer  is  the  official  organ  of  the  North 
Carolina  Rural  Electric  Cooperative  Association.  Formerly 
it  was  printed  in  Greensboro  but  moved  to  Raleigh  October 
1,  1949,  due  to  need  for  better  printing  facilities.  It  is 
printed  in  magazine  form. 


Page  46 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


The  Retailer,  published  Monthly,  Merchants  and  Manufac- 
turers, Established  1923,  by  Paul  Leonard;  Thompson 
Greenwood,  Editor;  N.  C.  Merchants  Assn.,  Publisher; 
printed  by  Capital  Printing  Co.,  Raleigh. 

The  Retailer,  formerly  the  Carolina-Virginia  Retailer,  is 
the  official  organ  of  the  North  Carolina  Merchants  Associa- 
tion. Started  by  Mr.  Leonard  while  he  was  secretary  of  the 
Association,  it  was  privately  owned  until  1927.  Willard 
G.  Dowell,  Association  secretary,  was  editor  from  1927  until 
19  50  when  he  retired,  and  was  succeeded  by  Mr.  Greenwood. 
The  Retailer  has  a  circulation  of  7,000. 

N.  C.  Farm  Bureau  News,  published  Monthly,  Agriculture, 
Established  193  6,  by  North  Carolina  Farm  Bureau;  Joseph 
W.  Kilgallen,  Editor;  N.  C.  Farm  Bureau  News,  Publisher; 
Roy  H.  Park,  Business  Manager;  L.  C.  Rights,  Advertising 
Manager;  printed  by  Parker  Bros.,  Ahoskie.  This  publica- 
tion, located  in  the  Raleigh  Building,  Raleigh,  is  the  official 
organ  of  the  North  Carolina  Farm  Bureau  Federation. 

The  Progressive  Farmer,  published  Monthly,  Agricultural, 
Established  1886,  by  L.  L.  Polk;  Dr.  Clarence  Poe,  Editor; 
W.  C.  LaRue,  Associate  Editor;  William  D.  Poe,  Business 
Manager  Carolinas-Virginia  edition;  Progressive  Farmer 
Co.,  Publisher;  principal  office  and  printing  plant,  Birming- 
ham, Ala.;  issues  five  editions:  Carolinas  and  Virginia; 
Texas;  Mississippi,  Arkansas  and  Louisiana;  Georgia,  Flor- 
ida and  Alabama;  and  Kentucky,  Tennessee  and  West  Vir- 
ginia; magazine  type  of  paper  in  colors.  Issues  contain 
from  80  to  150  pages. 

The  Progressive  Farmer  was  started  and  published  for 
two  years  in  Winston- ( Salem ) ,  then  moved  to  Raleigh.  Col. 
Polk,  its  founder  and  editor  until  his  death  in  1892,  became 
president  of  the  National  Farmers  Alliance.  J.  L.  Ramsey 
was  editor  for  seven  years,  and  Dr.  Poe  has  been  editor 
since  189  9 — 51  years.  During  the  years  Dr.  Poe  and  his 
associates  have  absorbed  and  consolidated  other  farm  papers 
until  the  five  editions  cover  13  southern  states. 

WINSTON-SALEM — American  Newspaper  Boy,  published 
Monthly,  Newspaper  Boys,  Established  1927,  by  Bradley 
Welfare;  Bradley  Welfare,  Editor  and  Publisher;  printing 
done  by  Carmichael  Printing  Co.,  Winston-Salem. 

The  American  Newspaper  Boy  is  published  for  sale  in  bulk 
to  circulation  departments  of  daily  newspapers  in  the  United 
States  and  Canada.  Approximately  2"00  newspapers  dis- 
tribute it  to  their  carrier  boys  free  each  month. 

Southern  Tobacco  Journal,  published  Monthly,  Tobacco, 
Established  188  6;  R.  C.  Carmichael,  Editor;  Jackson  Pub- 
lishing Co.   (NR) 

ORPHANAGE  PAPERS 

OXFORD — Orphans'  Friend  and  Masonic  Journal,  pub- 
lished Semi-monthly,  Masonic  and  Orphanage;  Established 
1872,  by  Oxford  Orphanage;  Leon  Godown,  Editor;  Oxford 
Masonic  Orphanage,  Publisher;  operates  modern,  large  com- 
mercial printing  plant. 

This  was  a  weekly  newspaper  type  of  publication  until 
1928,  when  it  became  a  semi-monthly  publication,  now  an 
eight-page  magazine  type,  printed  on  book  paper.  J.  H. 
Landrum  has  been  print  shop  manager  and  printing  instruc- 
tor for  24  years.  He  gives  training  daily  to  an  average  of 
16  boys,  working  in  two  shifts,  and  attending  school  half- 
a-day.  They  receive  school  credit  for  the  print  shop  work. 
The  normal  press  run  exceeds  19,000  copies.  John  H.  Mills 
was  the  first  editor;  others  have  been  Miss  Kate  Herring, 
D.  S.  Kennedy  and  Frank  M.  Pinnix.  Mr.  Pinnix  retired  last 
year  and  was  succeeded  by  Mr.  Godown. 

BARIUM  SPRINGS — Barium  Messenger,  Presbyterian  Or- 
phanage, Published  monthly;  established  in  1891  by  the 
Barium  Springs  Orphanage,  publisher;  Rev.  Albert  B.  Mc- 
Clure,  editor;  operates  its  own  commercial  job  shop.  Barium 
Messenger  is  a  small  four-page  newspaper,  devoted  to  the 
interests  of  the  orphanage  and  the  280  children  cared  for. 
The  print  shop  is  a  place  of  training  the  children  in  the 
varied  arts  and  trades  of  writing  and  printing. 

THOMASVILLE — Charity  and  Children,  Baptist  Orphan- 
age; Published  weekly;  Established  in  1887  by  John  H. 
Mills;  Published  by  The  Mills  Home;  Marse  Grant,  Editor. 
Mr.  Mills,  for  whom  the  home  was  named,  was  editor  most 
of  the  time  from  the  beginning  until  18  95,  with  J.  W.  Oliver 
as  interim  editor.  Dr.  Archibald  Johnson  became  famous 
as  able  and  vigorous  editor  for  40  years,  1895-1935.  John 
Arch  McMillan  starting  as  associate  editor  in  19  29,  became 
editor  in  1935,  continuing  until  his  death  in  1949.  His 
daughter,    Louise    Faye    McMillan    was    acting    editor    until 


some  months  ago,  when  Mr.  Grant  became  editor. 

Doubtless  other  orphanage  papers  are  published,  on  which 
information  was  not  received. 

LABOR  PAPERS 

SALISBURY — The  North  Carolina  Federationist,  Publish- 
ed monthly,  Labor;  Established  in  1938  by  N.  C.  State  Fede- 
ration of  Labor;  official  organ  of  Federation;  C.  A.  Fink, 
managing  editor;  E.  A.  Tarver,  publisher  and  business  man- 
ager; printed  by  Rowan  Printing  Co. 

Mr.  Fink,  president  of  the  N.  C.  State  Federation  of 
Labor  for  many  years,  has  been  chief  editor  of  The  Federa- 
tionist, although  at  the  beginning  the  publication  was  under 
contract.  The  vice-president,  the  secretary-treasurer,  and 
the  18  regional  vice-presidents  of  the  State  Federation,  are 
associate  editors.     The  publication  is  in  magazine  form. 

CHARLOTTE — Charlotte  Labor  Journal  and  Dixie  Farm 
News,  Labor,  published  weekly;  established  1931;  H.  A. 
Stalls,  editor  and  publisher;  W.  M.  Witter,  associate  editor 
and  for  many  years  editor  and  publisher;  Charlotte  Central 
Labor  Council,  A  F  of  L,  connection. 

Carolina  Labor  Journal,  published  monthly,  Labor;  H.  A. 
Stalls,  editor  and  publisher. 

DURHAM — Durham  Labor  Journal,  published  Thursdays, 
Labor,  established  in  1944  by  Tobacco  Workers  Local  Un- 
ions, Numbers  17  6-183;  E.  R.  Williamson,  Editor;  owned 
by  Progressive  Printing  &  Publishing  Co.,  stock  in  hands 
of  Durham  A  F  of  L  labor  unions;  official  organ  of  Durham 
Central  Labor  Council,  A  F  of  L.  Originally  it  was  named 
Durham  Tobacco  Workers  Journal.  A.  C.  Simpson  was 
formerly  editor. 

ASHEVILLE — Asheville  Advocate,  published  monthly, 
Labor;  A.  Liston  Sams,  editor  and  publisher;  Asheville 
Central  Labor  Council,  A  F  of  L,  connection.  This  is  a 
magazine  size  publication. 

The  CIO  does  not  have  a  publication  in  North  Carolina  at 
present.  For  a  few  years  around  the  middle  of  the  last 
decade  The  News  Digest,  established  in  194  2,  and  with 
CIO  connections,  was  published  weekly,  Mondays,  by  the 
Wilmington  News  Digest. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

ASHEVILLE — The  Mountain  Rattler,  published  Monthly, 
due  to  be  started  Jan.,  1951,  by  R.  S.  Meroney;  R.  S.  Me- 
roney,  Editor  and  Publisher;  a  small  8%xll  inch  sheet, 
iconoclastic  and  "Agin'  everything  and  everybody." 

MORAVIAN  FALLS — Yellow  Jacket,  published  Monthly, 
Republican  &  Iconoclastic,  Established  189  5,  by  R.  Don 
Laws;  R.  Don  Laws,  Editor  and  Publisher.  (See  special 
item  on  "The  Yellow  Jacket"  in  this  issue.) 

PINEHURST — The  Golf  World,  published  Weekly,  Golf, 
Established  in  1947,  by  Robert  E.  Harlow;  Robert  E.  Har- 
low, Editor  and  Publisher;  printed  in  its  own  shop  at  Pine- 
hurst. 

Mr.  Harlow,  publicity  man  for  Pinehurst,  Inc.,  golf  cor- 
respondent for  national  newspapers  and  press  associations 
and  editor  and  publisher  of  the  Pinehurst  Outlook  for  15 
years  until  last  year,  started  The  Golf  World  in  19  47.  This 
publication,  devoted  to  professional  and  amateur  golf,  has 
a  circulation  of  more  than  7,000  throughout  this  country 
and  in  3  0  foreign  countries  and  territories.  The  cover  is 
printed  in  colors  and  the  publication  is  going  on  newstands 
for  the  first  time  this  year. 

RALEIGH — The  State,  published  Saturdays,  State  News, 
Established  1933,  by  Carl  Goerch;  Carl  Goerch,  Editor; 
The  State,  Publisher;  printed  by  Edwards  and  Broughton, 
Raleigh. 

This  magazine  is  devoted  to  publishing  articles  of  interest 
about  people,  places  and  conditions  in  North  Carolina.  More 
than  21,000  copies  are  distributed,  many  going  to  former 
residents,  now  in  other  states  and  countries. 

We  The  People,  published  Monthly,  Economic,  Established 
1944,  by  Citizens  Association  of  North  Carolina,  Inc.;  Lloyd 
Griffin,  Executive  Vice-President;  Jule  B.  Warren,  Editor; 
Printed  by  Edwards  and  Broughton,  Raleigh. 

We  The  People  carries  special  articles  on  government, 
taxation,  conservation,  industry  and  general  feature  articles 
relating  to  North  Carolina,  her  organization  and  her  people. 

CHARLOTTE — North  Carolina  Legion  News,  published 
Monthly,  American  Legion,  Established  1934,  by  N.  C.  De- 
partment of  American  Legion;  B.  S.  Griffith,  Editor;  Nash 
McKee,  News  Editor;  Wiley  M.  Pickens,  Business  Manager; 
official  publication  of  the  N.  C.  Dept.,  American  Legion. 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  47 


N.  C.  Newspapers  Fine  Training  Schools  for  High  Posts 


Newspapers  in  North  Carolina,  particularly  those 
in  the  weekly  field,  have  been  proving  grounds  and 
training  units  for  many  men  and  women  who  have 
later  achieved  prominence  and  importance  in  news- 
paper fields  and  in  many  related  and  unrelated  activ- 
ities. This  "school  of  hard  knocks"  has  tended  to 
bring  out  abilities  which  have  been  demonstrated 
in  many  and  divergent  fields  of  activity.  Some  of 
these  are  listed  below,  along  with  the  papers  on 
which  they  served. 

The  Robesonian,  Lumberton — David  J.  Whichard,  Green- 
ville Daily  Reflector;  C.  H.  Hines,  Greensboro  Daily  News; 
A.  P.  McAllister,  Lumberton;  Pegram  A.  Bryant,  States- 
ville  Daily;  Hamilton  McMillan,  Red  Springs. 

The  Independent,  Red  Springs — Hoover  Adams,  Dunn 
Daily  Record.  With  the  earlier  Fuquay  Gold  Leaf — A.  J. 
Fletcher,  Raleigh  attorney;  Walter  Prince,  Louisville,  Ky., 
publisher  of  The  Courier-Journal;  Lynn  Nisbet,  Raleigh 
writer  for  afternoon  papers. 

News  Reporter,  Whiteville — Allen  J.  Maxwell,  former 
State  Commissioner  of  Revenue;  Joe  and  Fred  Little,  Wil- 
mington; Roland  F.  Beasley,  Monroe  Journal;  W.  B.  Keziah, 
"One-Man  Chamber  of  Commerce,"  Southport;  Richard, 
Rone  H.  and  B.  Gordon  Lewis;  Mayon  Parker,  Ahoskie, 
Parker  Bros.,  publishers  and  printers;  J.  A.  Sharp,  Sr.,  Lum- 
berton; James  A.  Rodgers,  editor,  Florence  (S.  C.)  Morning 
News. 

Standard-Laconic,  Snow  Hill — W.  E.  Debnam,  Raleigh, 
radio  news  commentator. 

Southern  City,  Raleigh — Municipal,  C.  E.  Leonard, 
Greensboro  Record;  C.  A.  Upchurch,  Jr.,  Raleigh,  ABC 
Director. 

Cleveland  Times,  Shelby — Will  Arey,  Jr.,  in  foreign  serv- 
ice, U.  S.  State  Department  in  Bogota,  Colombia;  Rush  Ham- 
rick,  Jr.,  Kendall  Medicine  Co.,  Shelby;  J.  D.  Fitz,  manag- 
ing editor,  Morganton  News-Herald;  G.  Norman  Benjamin, 
manager,  Arlington   (Va.)  Sun. 

Farmers  Federation  News,  Asheville — James  L.  McClure; 
Blackburn  W.  Johnson,  public  relations,  State  Department 
of  Agriculture. 

The  Appalachian,  Boone — H.  C.  Jones,  teacher.  Oak 
Ridge  Institute;  Sloan  Hill,  news  editor,  Carroll  County 
Georgian,  Carrollton,  Georgia;  Rogers  Whitener,  English 
instructor,  Florida  Southern  College,  Lakeland,  Fla. 

The  Dispatch,  Dunn — Byron  Ford,  Myron  Green,  Monroe, 
(both  deceased)  ;  Miss  Flora  McQueen,  Dunn;  O.  J.  Peterson, 
Sampson  and  Chatham  County  publisher  (deceased)  ;  Jack 
Riley,  U.N.C.  Journalism  professor;  George  A.  Penny,  re- 
porter, News  and  Observer;  Wade  Lucas,  Raleigh  corre- 
spondent; Hoover  Adams,  Dunn;  J.  Shepard  Bryan,  Dunn 
attorney. 

The  Pilot,  Southern  Pines — Bion  H.  Butler;  Nelson  A. 
Hyde;  Carl  Thompson;  James  Boyd. 

Asheville  News,  Asheville  (Asheville  Advocate) — Harold 
Thorns,  president  Radio  Stations  WISE,  Asheville,  and 
WAYS,  Charlotte. 

The  Observer,  Charlotte — Isaac  Erwin  Avery  and  John 
Charles  McNeill,  poets;  O.  J.  Coffin,  U.N.C.  Dean  of  Jour- 
nalism;  H.  E.  C.  Bryant. 

Hertford  County  Herald,  Ahoskie,  and  its  four  affiliated 
newspapers — Miss  Addie  Mae  Cooke,  publisher,  Cherokee 
Scout;  W.  J.  Kelly,  Wauchula,  Fla.,  publisher  of  two  weekly 
papers;  Rev.  C.  W.  Bazemore,  assistant  manager  and  editor 
of  The  Biblical  Recorder;  Tommy  Davis,  manager  Alamance 
News,  Graham. 

Stanly  News  and  Press,  Albemarle — J.  D.  Bivens,  A.  C. 
Huneycutt. 

The  Citizen,  Asheville — Thomas  Wolfe  (carrier  boy)  ; 
Captain  Natt  Atkinson;  Robert  M.  Furman;  Colonel  John 
D.  Cameron;  Captain  Thomas  W.  Patton;  W.  F.  Randolph; 
John  P.  Kerr;  Frank  E.  Robinson;  Julius  C.  Martin;  James 
H.  Caine;  Robert  S.  Jones;  George  Stephens;  Robert  Lathan; 
Charles  A.  Webb;  W.  G.  (Billy)  Bourne;  Pat  M.  Burdette; 
Donald  Gillis. 

News,  Charlotte — Wade  H.  Harris,  later  editor  Charlotte 
Observer;  W.  Carey  Dowd,  Speaker  House  of  Representa- 
tives; W.  Carey  Dowd,  Jr. 


The  Tribune,  Concord — J.  F.  Hurley;  J.  B.  Sherrill;  W. 
M.  Sherrill. 

The  Tribune,  Elkin — Dr.  Joseph  H.  Carter,  Newton  Pres- 
byterian pastor;   Franklin  Hildebrand,  Jennings,  La. 

The  Times,  Raleigh—John  Wilbur  Jenkins;  Robert  L. 
Gray;  O.  J.  Coffin;  Jule  B.  Warren;  Thomas  J.  Pence;  Col- 
onel Fred  A.  Olds;  Nell  Battle  Lewis;  Colonel  A.  L.  Fletcher; 
Greek  O.  Andrews;   WTillis  G.  Briggs. 

The  Telegram,  Rocky  Mount — Henry  A.  Dennis,  publish- 
er, Henderson  Daily  Dispatch;  H.  Wiseman  Kendall,  editor, 
Greensboro  Daily  News;  Anthony  J.  McKelvin  (deceased), 
former  sports  and  managing  editor  News  and  Observer. 

Coraddi,  Greensboro,  monthly,  student  body,  Woman's 
College,  UNC — Jean  Johnson,  asst.  dir.  Contemporary  Arts, 
NYC,  and  Div.  Asst.,  International  Exchange  of  Arts  and 
Exhibits,  U.  C.  Dept.  of  State;  Carolyn  Coker  (Mrs.  Warren 
Brandt),  asst.  to  editor  of  Encore  magazine  and  instructor, 
Washington  Univ.;  Margaret  L.  Coit,  author  of  John  C.  Cal- 
houn: An  American  Portrait,  and  articles  in  Look;  Susanne 
Ketcham  (Mrs.  Roger  Sherman),  designer  of  costumes  for 
The  Common   Glory;   Julia  Blauvelt    (McGrane),   author  of 


SEVERAL  NEWSPAPERS  SUSPENDED 
OPERATIONS  DURING  RECENT  YEARS 

Several  North  Carolina  newspapers  and  periodicals  have 
gone  out  of  business  or  suspended  operations  during  the 
past  three  or  four  years.  A  check  of  available  sources  show 
definitely  that  16  newspapers  and  other  periodicals  published 
a  few  years  ago  are  not  now  operating.  This  list  is  prob- 
ably not  complete. 

At  least  50  listed  newspapers  failed  to  answer  three  suc- 
cessive letters  and  furnish  information  requested.  It  is 
possible  that  at  least  a  few  of  these  are  not  now  being  pub- 
lished. 

The  list  of  those  definitely  out  of  business  or  suspended 
follows: 

The  Beaufort  County  Record,  Washington,  suspended 
publication  about  two  years  ago. 

The  Union  Republican,  Winston-Salem,  established  in 
1872,  and  published  for  many  years  by  J.  B.  Goslin,  was 
sold  a  few  years  ago  and  about  two  years  ago  suspended 
publication. 

The  Independent,  Elizabeth  City,  was  published  for  many 
years  by  the  late  and  widely  known  W.  O.  Saunders.  George 
W.  Haskett  was  publisher  until  about  two  years  ago,  when 
the  plant  was  purchased  by  The  Elizabeth  City  Advance  and 
publication  suspended. 

The  Times,  New  Bern;  H.  C.  Waldrop  was  publisher  and 
H.  I.  Crumpler  (deceased),  editor. 

Tri-City  News,  Davidson;  Thomas  H.  McKnight,  editor 
and  publisher. 

Southern  Association  Quarterly,  Durham;  Dr.  Holland 
Holton,  editor,  suspended  after  his  death  in  1947. 

Clay  County  News,  Hayesville;  Mrs.  J.  Guy  Padgette, 
former  editor  and  publisher. 

NCSG  Magazine,  High  Point,  establishedl  1945;  Sgt.  C. 
A.  Pierce,  former  editor. 

Headlight,  Norlina;  J.  C.  Hardy,  editor  and  publisher, 
deceased. 

Square  Deal,  Snow  Hill;  G.  A.  Jones,  former  editor  and 
publisher. 

The  News,  Spencer;  A.  W.  Hicks,  former  editor  and  pub- 
lisher. 

The  Journal,  Sylva,  discontinued  in  1944.  Dan  Tomp- 
kins, editor  and  publisher,  died  last  year. 

The  News-Times,  Thomasville,  edited  by  R.  W.  Green; 
purchased  by  and  consolidated  with  The  Thomasville  Trib- 
une. 

Henderson  Gold  Leaf,  weekly;  Henry  A.  Dennis,  editor; 
suspended  temporarily. 

Game  Fowl  News,  Asheville,  published  monthly  by  R.  S. 
Meroney  since  1925,  for  game  chicken  fanciers  in  this 
continent  and  foreign  countries,  was  sold  recently  to  New 
York  interests  and  was  to  start  publication  the  first  of  this 
year  in  Connecticut. 

Union  Herald,  Raleigh,  formerly  published  Thursdays, 
Labor,  established  1918,  by  Charles  Ruffin;  Charles  Ruff  in, 
Editor;  Capital  Printing  Co.,  Publisher;  affiliate  A.  F.  of  L. 


Page  48 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


poems  appearing  in  The  Saturday  Review  of  Literature,  At- 
lantic Monthly,  Harper's,  etc.;  Edith  Russell,  author  of  plays 
and  poems;  Laura  B.  Weill  (Mrs.  Julius  Cone),  author  WC 
college  song  and  member,  ex.  com.,  UNC  board  of  trustees; 
Mebane  Holoman  Burgwyn,  author  of  children's  books, 
"River  Treasure"  and  "Lucky  Mischief". 

News-Messenger,  Hamlet — Robert  C.  Ruark,  noted  war 
correspondent  and  columnist;  Lynn  Nisbet,  Raleigh  corre- 
spondent for  afternoon  newspapers. 

The  Daily  Independent,  Kannapolis — Todd  Caldwell,  pub- 
lisher, Fuquay  Springs  Independent. 

The  Exchange,  Laurinburg — Archibald  Johnson,  long  edi- 
tor of  Charity  and  Children;  late  J.  P.  Wiggins,  Maxton  and 
Fairmont  publisher. 

News-Topic,  Lenoir — Mark  Squires,  attorney;  Johnston 
Avery,  Fred  S.  May. 

Graphic,  Nashville — Jack  Riley,  UNC  journalism  teacher, 
former  Sunday  editor,  News  and  Observer. 

Biblical  Recorder,  Raleigh — Josiah  W.  Bailey,  later  U.  S. 


Senator;  Dr.  Livingston  Johnson,  Dr.  Hight  C.  Moore,  later 
editorial  secretary,  Southern  Baptist  S.  S.  Board. 

The  Star,  Shelby — Johnny  and  Pete  McKnight;  H.  W 
Kendall,  editor,  Greensboro  Daily  News;  O.  L.  Moore,  pub- 
lisher, Laurinburg  Exchange;  Ben  Roberts,  Durham  banker. 

Hyde  County  Herald,  Swan  Quarter — Thomas  E.  Spencer, 
later  with  Washington  Daily  News;  Mrs.  Nell  Wise  Wecter, 
Stumpy  Point,  newspaper  writer;  Carleton  Morris,  editor, 
Gates  County  Index. 

The  News,  Valdese — Marse  Grant,  editor  of  Charity  and 
Children. 

The  News,  Washington — Carl  Goerch,  publisher,  The 
State;  Fred  Pendleton. 

The  Daily,  Statesville — Joseph  P.  Caldwell,  later  famous 
editor  of  The  Charlotte  Observer,  and  R.  R.  Clarke. 

Alamance  Gleaner,  Graham — Junius  Parker,  noted  New 
York  attorney;  E.  S.  Parker,  Jr.,  prominent  Greensboro 
attorney;  Joseph  A.  and  John  W.  Noell,  later  publishers 
of  The  Roxboro  Courier- (Times). 


J.  Hampton  Rich,  Editor,  Adept  Promotor  and  Ink  Hound 


One  of  the  most  interesting,  if  also  one  of  the  most  annoy- 
ing and  aggravating  newspaper  publishers  and  editors,  if  he 
may  be  so  called,  to  operate  in  North  Carolina  in  many  years 
was  the  late  Joseph  Hampton  Rich,  native  of  Davie  County, 
resident  of  Winston-Salem  and  Chapel  Hill,  promoter  of 
Daniel  Boone  trails  and  Davey  Crockett  tours,  national  and 
international  traveler,  visitor  to  practically  every  news- 
paper office  in  the  State  and  a  perennial  attendant  at  the 
Press  Institute  sessions  in  Chapel  Hill. 

J.  Hampton  Rich,  as  he  used  it;  "J.  Hamp.",  according 
to  Dr.  O.  J.  Coffin's  usual  use,  once  edited  and  published, 
spasmodically  and  intermittently,  a  newspaper  which,  as  I 
recall,  he  called  "The  Mocksville  Herald",  although  it  was 
printed,  at  least  in  its  latter  and  weakening  years,  in  Win- 
ston-Salem. His  shop  for  a  time  was  located  on  North  Main 
St.  in  the  rear  of  the  Elks  Auditorium.  The  owner  of  the 
lease  had  sub-let  the  small  space  and  a  few  pieces  of  print- 
ing equipment  were  installed. 

J.  Hampton  didn't  keep  up  with  the  rent,  and  the  lease 
holder  finally  secured  a  court  order  and  dumped  his  equip- 
ment on  the  sidewalk.  Then  J.  Hampton  found  a  vacant 
store  room  on  the  other  end  of  Main  Street  in  Salem  and 
moved  in.  This  was  not  far  from  the  home  of  the  man  who 
had  dispossessed  him,  and  J.  Hampton  was  frequently  tell- 
ing the  man  what  he  thought  of  him.  One  day,  the  man, 
having  enough,  opened  up  and  called  J.  Hampton  just  about 
everything  in  the  profane  language. 

That  was  what  J.  Hampton  wanted.  He  hastened  to  police 
headquarters  and  swore  out  a  warrant  against  the  man — 
the  charge  was  public  nuisance,  using  profanity  in  a  public 
place,  or  some  such  charge.  J.  Hampton  made  it  a  point 
to  visit  the  editor  of  the  morning  paper  and  asked  him  to 
be  sure  to  have  a  reporter  in  Recorder's  Court  the  next 
morning — that  he  would  get  a  good  story.  The  next  morn- 
ing the  paper  had  this  type  of  item  in  the  court  report: 

"(Man's  name)  was  taxed  with  the  costs  for  cussing  out 
J.  Hampton  Rich".  The  man  reported  later  that  many 
people  called  to  congratulate  him. 

Newsprint,  then,  as  now,  was  scarce,  especially  for  J. 
Hampton.  On  one  occasion  he  took  the  contract  for  deliv- 
ering several  hundred  page  ad  sheets  for  one  of  the  large 
department  stores,  Efird's,  I  believe,  from  door  to  door.  It 
was  a  reprint  from  one  of  the  daily  papers.  Before  dis- 
tributing the  sheets  he  printed  on  the  other  side  the  then 
current  issue  of  his  newspaper  and  had  a  group  of  boys  de- 
liver the  sheets,  street  by  street. 

He  was  given  credit  for  selling  an  ad,  setting  it  up,  in- 
serting it  in  a  page  already  made  up,  change  the  date  and 
run  off  a  few  copies,  including  a  few  copies  which  he 
mailed.  He  would  carry  copies  to  advertisers  as  proof  of 
insertion,  and,  when  asked  about  the  extent  of  circulation, 
would  produce  a  receipt  from  the  postoffice.  And,  he  would 
accept  meal  tickets  or  other  trade  in  exchange  for  the  price 
of  an  ad. 

Also,  he  had  the  reputation  of  watching  items  in  one  of 
the  daily  papers.     When  he  saw  something  he  would  like 


AN  INCIDENT  RELATING  TO  PRESS 
INSTITUTE,  CAROLINA  AND  DUKE 

After  the  election  of  officers  at  the  annual  meeting  of 
the  North  Carolina  Press  Association  in  Hickory  in  1926, 
I  happened  to  be  in  a  car  with  President  A.  C.  Huneycutt, 
Albemarle,  new  president,  and  three  other  officers  and  new 
members  of  the  Board  of  Directors.  The  matter  of  the  mid- 
Winter  Press  Institute  at  the  State  University,  started  in 
1925,  was  under  discussion.  The  suggestion  was  made  that 
the  Institute  might  be  shifted  to  Duke  University,  probably 
temporarily. 

The  result  was  that  the  group  asked  me,  then  manager 
of  the  Durham  News  Bureau,  to  check  with  Dr.  W.  P.  Few, 
then  president  of  Duke,  and  see  what  Duke  would  be  willing 
to  offer.  I  was  asked  to  get  the  data  and  to  report  at  the 
next  meeting  of  the  Board  of  Directors.  That  meeting  was 
later  scheduled  for  Charlotte.  I  was  invited  to  be  present 
to  report. 

When  my  report  was  asked  for,  I  reported  that  Dr.  Few 
had  said  that  Duke  would  have  a  new  building  completed 
and  furnished,  but  not  occupied,  at  that  time,  and  the  mem- 
bers could  occupy  rooms  in  the  building  free;  that  they 
could  eat  at  the  Union  at  student  rates;  that  Duke  would 
arrange  and  pay  expenses  for  an  important  nationally- 
known  speaker  for  the  meeting,  and  that  Duke  would  con- 
tribute a  sum  of  money,  $400,  as  I  recall,  toward  the  ex- 
penses of  the  Institute.     These  were  the  principal  items. 

After  my  report,  Russell  M.  Grumman,  then  assistant 
director,  soon  after  and  since  effective  and  popular  director 
of  the  University's  Extension  Division,  stated  that  the  In- 
stitute had  been  started  at  Carolina  with  a  view  of  having  it 
there  permanently  and  enumerated  steps  taken  to  make  it 
a  success.  A.  L.  Stockton,  Greensboro,  then  vice-president, 
and  W.  Carey  Dowd,  Jr.,  Charlotte,  then  a  director,  objected 
to  moving  the  Institute,  saying  Wake  Forest,  Davidson  and 
other  colleges  would  be  wanting  to  entertain  the  group,  and 
that  it  would  have  no  permanent  home. 

That  view  prevailed.  It  left  me  in  an  improper  light, 
however,  as  if  I  were  instigator  of  a  movement  to  shift  the 
Institute  from  my  Alma  Mater  to  Duke.  I  explained  that  I 
had  merely  been  a  messenger  and  had  acted  at  the  request 
of  four  of  the  seven  officers  and  board  members. 

That  incident,  however,  was  undoubtedly  the  forerunner 
of  the  later  development,  the  provision  of  holding  one  ses- 
sion— the  annual  dinner — at  Duke  University,  which  was 
inaugurated  in  1933.  Since  that  time  these  dinners  have 
been  one  of  the  delightful  features  of  the  annual  Press  In- 
stitute at  Chapel  Hill,  for  several  years  under  direction  of 
Henry  R.  Dwire,  formerly  editor  of  the  Twin-City  Sentinel, 
Winston-Salem,  then  a  vice-president  and  public  relations 
man  at  Duke,  and  since  his  death  under  the  leadership  of 
Charles  Jordan  and  Charles  A.  Dukes,  of  the  Duke  Univer- 
sity staff. — M.R.D. 


Winter-Spring,  195 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  49 


to  use  in  his  paper,  he  visited  the  plant  and  borrowed  the 
type  from  the  still  standing  forms. 

A  new  cub  reporter  on  one  of  the  dalies  told  his  city 
editor  that  he  had  a  nice  little  item,  started  to  tell  him 
something   relating   to   J.    Hampton   Rich.      "Don't   write   a 

d line  about  J.  Hampton  Rich,"  he  exploded.     Later  the 

reporter  learned  why  the  heat. 

J.  Hampton  had  appeared  one  night — that  was  some  40 
years  ago — and  gave  the  city  editor  an  account  of  a  meeting 
held  that  night  of  automobile  owners,  scarce  at  that  time, 
who  had  organized  the  Winston  Automobile  Club.  In  addi- 
tion to  five  or  six  directors,  Mr.  Rich  gave  the  list  of  offi- 
cers: James  A.  Gray,  Jr.,  (later  president  of  the  R.  J.  Rey- 
nolds Tobacco  Co.),  president;  John  Gilmer,  (later  vice- 
president  of  the  Greyhound  (Bus)  Lines),  vice-president; 
J.  Hampton  Rich,  secretary-treasurer  and  general  manager. 
Object  of  the  organization  was  to  enroll  every  automobile 
owner  as  a  member,  at  so  much  per. 

Early  the  next  morning  the  paper's  telephone  lines  were 
busy.  All  officers  and  directors,  except  Mr.  Rich,  called  in 
to  find  the  source  of  the  item.  All  reported  they  had  at- 
tended no  such  meeting — and  were  they  mad!  So  was  the 
city  editor  when  he  learned  of  the  calls  and  that  no  meeting 
was  held — except  in  Mr.  Rich's  fertile  brain. 

Mr.  Rich  appeared  in  a  daily  newspaper  office  on  one 
occasion  with  written  material  and  pictures  for  a  Sunday 
feature  page  for  the  University  of  North  Carolina.  The 
editor  liked  it  and  used  it.  A  week  or  two  later  he  submit- 
ted similar  material  for  a  page  on  the  present  Woman's 
College  of  UNC.  It  also  was  used.  Soon  he  appeared  with 
a  page  for  Horner  Military  School,  then  in  Asheville.  The 
editor  demurred  and  declined,  since  it  was  a  private  insti- 
tution. It  developed  that  Mr.  Rich  spent  a  week  or  two  at 
Chapel  Hill,  an  eating  and  sleeping  guest  of  the  University. 
It  also  developed  that  Woman's  College  had  paid  him  for  the 
"page  ad"  carried  in  the  paper  as  a  feature. 

J.  Hampton  Rich  had  a  plausible  approach,  addressed 
many  civic  luncheon  and  other  clubs  in  the  State,  had  many 
reams  of  publicity  wangled  out  of  newspapers  for  his  proj- 
ects; and  was  a  colorful  character.  He  got  in  to  see  Presi- 
dent Wilson  during  World  War  I  and  they  have  not  yet  de- 
termined how  he  gained  entrance  to  one  of  the  famous 
Gridiron  Club  dinners  in  Washington.  Many  editors  could 
add  many  incidents. 

Probably  all  would  agree  that  he  got  by  Saint  Peter  at 
the  Pearly  Gate,  following  his  death  in  Chapel  Hill  last  year. 
— M.R.D. 


PROGRESSIVE  FARMER,  1,150,000 
SUBSCRIBERS,   NOTABLE  MAGAZINE 

The  Progressive  Farmer,  a  monthly  agricultural  maga- 
zine, with  a  circulation  of  1,150,000  copies  in  its  five  edi- 
tions for  as  many  groups  of  13  Southern  States,  is  a  remark- 
able publication  with  an  intensely  interesting  history 
through  its  6  5  years  of  operation. 

The  Progressive  Farmer  was  founded  February  10,  1886, 
by  Col.  Leonidas  L.  Polk,  in  the  then  small  community  of 
Winston.  After  two  years  it  was  moved  to  Raleigh  and  in 
1911  the  printing  plant  was  moved  to  Birmingham,  Ala., 
where  all  five  of  the  editions  are  printed.  During  its  his- 
tory it  has  absorbed  several  other  Southern  farm  publica- 
tions. Its  five  editions  are  those  for  the  Carolinas  and 
Virginia;  Texas;  Kentucky,  Tennessee  and  West  Virginia; 
Mississippi,  Arkansas  and  Louisiana,  and  Georgia,  Alabama 
and  Florida.     It  has  had  only  three  editors  in  its  65  years. 

Colonel  Polk,  in  the  period  around  1875,  was  publishing 
a  small  weekly  newspaper,  The  Ansonian,  at  Polkton,  Anson 
County.  He  had  been  a  Confederate  officer,  farmer,  legis- 
lator, farm  organization  leader,  orator  and  was  North  Caro- 
lina's first  Commissioner  of  Agriculture.  He  became  presi- 
dent of  the  National  Farmers'  Alliance,  with  2,000,000  mem- 
bers, and  was  a  powerful  agricultural  organization  leader. 
He  died  in  1892,  while  still  editor  of  The  Progressive  Farm- 
er. His  associate,  J.  L.  Ramsey,  became  editor,  serving  until 
1899. 

Dr.  Clarence  Poe,  who  had  served  a  year  or  more  as  asso- 
ciate editor,  became  editor  July  4,  1899,  and  has  since 
guided  the  publication.  Late  in  1903,  Dr.  Poe  brought  in 
as  associates  T.  B.  Parker,  Dr.  B.  W.  Kilgore,  Dr.  C.  W. 
Burkett  and  Josiah  W.  Bailey  in  organizing  The  Agricul- 
tural Publishing  Co.,  later  renamed  the  Progressive  Farmer 
Co.  Dr.  Poe  became  president  of  this  company,  a  position 
he  still  holds.  In  1908  Dr.  Tait  Butler  and  John  S.  Pearson 
bought  the  Bailey,  Burkett  and  Parker  stock,  Dr.  Butler 
becoming  vice-president  of  the  company  and  editor  of  the 
"Mississippi  Valley  Edition",  and  Mr.  Pearson,  secretary- 
treasurer  of  the  company.  Dr.  Kilgore  retained  his  stock 
and  directorate  until  his  death. 

The  Progressive  Farmer,  in  1933,  during  the  depression, 
adopted  colored  covers  and  became,  in  reality,  a  farm  maga- 
zine, rather  than  a  farm  paper.  The  Carolina-Virginia 
edition  has  a  circulation  of  277,000  and  in  North  Carolina 
it  has  146,000  subscribers.  The  price  was  increased  re- 
cently to  $1  for  two  years  (was  five  years).  All  issues  run 
from  8  0  to  150  pages.  William  Poe,  son  of  the  editor,  is 
advertising  manager  for  the  Carolinas-Virginia  edition. 


Officers,  Meeting  Places  and  Times  of  N.  C.  Press  Association 


YEAR 


1873 
1874 
1875 
1876 
1877 
1878 
1879 
1880 
1881 
1882 
1883 
1884 
1885 
1886 
1887 
1888 
1889 
1890 
1891 
1892 
1893 
1894 
1895 
1896 
1897 
1898 
1899 
1900 
1901 
1902 
1903 
1904 


PRESIDENT 


Joseph  A.  Englehard,  Wilmington 

Joseph  A.  Englehard,  Wilmington 

J.  D.  Cameron,  Hillsboro 

J.  D.  Cameron,  Hillsboro 

W.  L.  Saunders,  Raleigh 

W.  L.  Saunders,  Raleigh 

Dossey  Battle,  Tarboro 

Dossey  Battle,  Tarboro 

Capt.  S.  A.  Ashe,  Raleigh 

G.  S.  Bradshaw,  Greensboro 

H.  A.  London,  Pittsboro 

Josephus  Daniels,  Wilson  (Raleigh) _._ 

J.  A.  Robinson,  Durham 

J.  I.  McRee,  Raleigh ... 

T.  B.  Eldridge,  Lexington 

Thad  R.  Manning,  Henderson 

W.  W.  McDiarmid,  Lumberton 

J.  P.  Caldwell,  Statesville  (Charlotte). 

J.  A.  Thomas,  Louisburg 

E.  E.  Hilliard,  High  Point 

Jerome  Dowd,  Charlotte 

W.  C.  Ervin,  Morganton 

C.  L.  Stevens,  New  Bern 

R.  R.  Clark,  Statesville 

J.  B.  Vhitaker,  Jr.,  Winston 

W.  C.  Dowd,  Charlotte 

D.  J.  Whichard,  Greenville 

Rev.  T.  N.  Ivey,  D.D.,  Greensboro... 

J.  G.  Boylin,  Wadesboro 

W.  F.  Marshall,  Gastonia... 

H.  B.  Varner,  Lexington 

H.  B.  Varner,  Lexington 


VICE-PRESIDENTS 


Jordan  Stone,  J.  C.  Mann,  P.  F.  Duffy.. 

C.  N.  B.  Evans,  P.  F.  Duffy,  Geo.  W.  Nason,  Jr._ 


W.  A.  Davis,  P.  F.  Duffy,  W.  L.  Saunders 

Chas.  R.  Jones,  Dossey  Battle,  J.  S.  Tomlinson 

R.  M.  Furman,  W.  W.  McDiarmid,  R.  B.  Creecy 

R.  B.  Creecy,  R.  M.  Furman,  H.  A.  London 

C.  B.  Green,  J.  W.  Goslen,  R.  B.  Creecy 

R.  B.  Creecy,  G.  S.  Bradshaw,  J.  W.  Goslen 

R.  B.  Creecy,  Frank  Powell,  J.  W.  Goslen .... 

J.  A.  Robinson,  Dr.  Palemon  John,  Josephus  Daniels. 

E.  C.  Hackney,  E.  G.  Harrell,  Chas.  R.  Jones 

H.  C.  Wall,  R.  K.  Bryan,  G.  A.  Frick 

T.  B.  Eldridge,  H.  C.  Wall,  George  A.  Frick 

Thad  R.  Manning,  H.  C.  Wall,  J.  A.  Thomas 

J.  A.  Thomas,  C.  F.  Crutchfield,  W.  W.  McDiarmid.. 

D.  J.  Whichard,  J.  D.  Kernodle,  D.  F.  St.  Clair 

S.  A.  Ashe,  W.  W.  Scott,  Robert  Haydn 

E.  E.  Hilliard,  Jerome  Dowd,  R.  A.  Deal. 

Jerome  Dowd,  H.  A.  Latham,  F.  M.  Williams 

Z.  W.  Whitehead,  W.  F.  Burbank,  R.  A.  Deal 

C.  L.  Stevens,  W.  F.  Marshall,  W.  C.  Dowd 

W.  F.  Marshall,  W.  W.  McDiarmid,  W.  K.  Jacobson. 

J.  B.  Whitaker,  J.  T.  Britt,  W.  A.  Curtis 

J.  T.  Britt,  W.  A.  Curtis,  W.  S.  Herbert 

W.  S.  Herbert,  D.  J.  Whichard,  J.  D.  Boone 

Rev.  T.  N.  Ivey,  D.  D.  Benj.  BeU,  H.  S.  Blair 

J.  G.  Boylin,  G.  L.  Hackney,  J.  A.  Robinson 

J.  A.  Thomas,  H.  C.  Martin,  W.  S.  Herbert 

M.  L.  Shipman,  Rev.  J.  0.  Atkinson,  J.  J.  Farriss 

Benj.  Bell,  Rev.  P.  R.  Law,  J.  D.  Bivins 

M.  L.  Shipman,  R.  M.  Phillips,  J.  C.  Caddell 


SEC  &  TREAS 

J.  A.  Bonitz 

R.  T.  Fulghum 

R.  T.  Fulghum 

R.  T.  Fulghum 

W.  A.  Davis 

W.  A.  Davis 

Jordan  Stone 

Jordan  Stone 

Jordan  Stone , 

Jordan  Stone 

Jordan  Stone 

J.  A.  Robinson 

J.  H.  Lindsay 

J.  H.  Lindsay.. 

J.  H.  Lindsay 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  SherriU 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  Sherrill 

J.  B.  SherriU 


MEETING  PLACE 


Goldsboro 

Raleigh 

Wilmington 

New  Bern 

Charlotte 

Catawba  Springs 

Goldsboro 

Asheville 

Winston 

Elizabeth  City 

Waynesville 

Raleigh 

Smithville 

Morehead  City 

Hendersonville 

Morehead  City 

Lenoir 

Durham 

Winston 

Charlotte 

New  Bern 

Morganton 

Greensboro 

Wilmington 

Morehead  City 

Waynesville 

CaroUna  Beach 

Asheville 

Greensboro 

Hendersonville 

Wrightsville 

Morehead  City 


PAGE  50 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


YEAR 


1905 
1906 
1907 
1908 
1909 
1910 
1911 
1912 
1913 
1914 
1915 
1916 
1917 
1918 
1919 
1920 
1921 
1922 
1923 
1924 
1925 
1926 
1927 
1928 
1929 
1930 
1931 
1932 
1933 
1934 
1935 
1936 
1937 
1938 
1939 
1940 
1941 
1942 
1943 
1944 
1945 
1946 
1947 
1948 
1949 
1950 


PRESIDENT 

R.  M.  Phillips,  Greensboro 

T.  J.  Lassiter,  Smithfield 

Archibald  Johnson,  Thornasville 

J.  A.  Thomas,  Louisburg 

Rev.  J.  O.  Atkinson,  D.  D.,  Elon  College 

M.  L.  Shipman,  Hendersonville 

J.  J.  Farriss,  High  Point 

J.  H.  Caine,  Asheville 

Clarence  Poe,  Raleigh 

W.  C.  Hammer,  Asheboro 

J.  H.  Cowan,  Wilmington 

E.  E.  Britton,  Raleigh 

Santford  Martin,  Winston-Salem 

Z.  W.  Whitehead,  Wilmington 

J.  A.  Sharp,  Lumberton 

J.  F.  Hurley,  Salisbury 

J.  B.  Sherrill,  Concord 

J.  B.  Sherrill,  Concord 

C.  A.  Webb,  Asheville _, 

H.  Gait  Braxton,  Kinston 

J.  W.  Atkins,  Gastonia 

A.  C.  Huneycutt,  Albemarle 

A.  L.  Stockton,  Greensboro _. 

Lee  B.  Weathers,  Shelby 

W.  C.  Dowd,  Jr.,  Charlotte ... 

J.  W.  Noell,  Roxboro 

J.  L.  Home,  Jr.,  Rocky  Mount 

John  A.  Park,  Raleigh 

J.  Roy  Parker,  Ahoskie 

D.  Hiden  Ramsey,  Asheville 

F.  Grover  Britt,  Clinton 

C.  C.  Council,  Durham... 

W.  Curtis  Russ,  Waynesville 

Talbot  Patrick,  Goldsboro 

W.  E.  Horner,  Sanford 

L.  C.  Gifford,  Hickory 

Ed  M.  Anderson,  Brevard 

W.  K.  Hoyt,  Winston-Salem 

John  B.  Harris,  Albemarle 

Julian  S.  Miller,  Charlotte 

Harvey  F.  Laffoon,  Elkin 

Herbert  Peele,  Elizabeth  City 

E.  A.  Resch,  Siler  City 

Frank  A  Daniels,  Raleigh 

R.  E.  Price,  Rutherfordton 

Henry  Belk,  Goldsboro 


VICE-PRESIDENTS 

T.  J.  Lassiter,  Clvde  R.  Hoey,  W.  B.  Westlake 

J.  C.  Hardy,  W.  B.  Cochran,  H.  R.  Kinlaw 

J.  A.  Thomas,  W.  J.  Jordan,  A.  S.  Carson 

W.  C.  Dowd,  J.  Z.  Green,  Rev.  J.  O.  Atkinson,  D.  D.  . 

M.  L.  Shipman,  J.  R.  Swann,  W.  K.  Jacobson 

J.  J.  Farriss,  J.  H.  Caine,  T.  G.  Cobb..- ... 

J.  H.  Caine,  H.  C.  Martin,  J.  T.  Fain 

W.  C.  Hammer,  A.  J.  Conner,  D.  L.  St.  Clair 

W.  C.  Hammer,  J.  H.  Cowan,  D.  L.  St.  Clair     .. 
J.  H.  Cowan,  Bion  H.  Butler,  E.  E.  Britton   ... 

E.  E.  Britton,  Santford  Martin,  W.  B.  Harker 

Santford  Martin,  R.  F.  Beasley,  Z.  W.  Whitehead 

J.  A.  Sharp,  Z.  W.  Whitehead,  R.  T.  Wade 

R.  T.  Wade,  Isaac  S.  London,  Miss  Beatrice  Cobb 

R.  T.  Wade,  J.  F.  Hurley,  Parker  R.  Anderson 

Mrs.  W.  C.  Hammer,  A.  W.  Burch,  H.  G.  Braxton.. 
R.  T.  Wade,  S.  H.  Farabee,  Mrs.  W.  C.  Hammer. 

R,  F.  Beasley,  Lee  B.  Weathers,  Chas.  A.  Webb 

A.  C.  Honeycutt,  H.  Gait  Braxton,  Mrs.  T.  J.  Lassiter 

Mrs.  T.  J.  Lassiter,  J.  T.  Perkins,  Stacy  Brewer 

Lee  B.  Weathers,  Shelby 

A.  L.  Stockton,  Greensboro 

J.  W.  Noell,  Roxboro 

J.  L.  Home,  Jr.,  Rocky  Mount 

Herbert  Peele,  Elizabeth  City 

John  A.  Park,  Raleigh 

I.  S.  London,  Rockingham 

R.  E.  Price,  Rutherfordton 

C.  C.  Council,  Durham _ 

F.  Grover  Britt,  Clinton 

L.  C.  Gifford,  Hickory... 

W.  Curtis  Russ,  Waynesville 

H.  A.  Cecil,  High  Point,  Thornasville 

Mrs.  E.  F.  McCulloch,  Elizabethtown 

Julian  S.  Miller,  Charlotte _ 

W.  C.  Manning,  Williamston 

Herbert  Peele,  Elizabeth  City.. 

John  B.  Harris,  Albemarle. 

Frank  Daniels,  Raleigh 

Harvey  F.  Laffoon,  Elkin 

Mrs.  Elizabeth  Gold  Swindell,  Wilson 

E.  A.  Resch,  Siler  City 

P.  T.  Hines,  Greensboro 

Leslie  S.  Thompson,  Whiteville 

W.  Randall  Harris,  Asheville 

B.  Arp  Lowrance,  Charlotte 


J.  B. 
J.  B. 
J.  B. 
J.  B. 
J.  B. 
J.B. 
J.  B. 
J.B. 
J.  B. 
J.B. 
J.B. 
J.B. 
J.B. 
J.B. 
J.B. 
E.  B. 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 
Miss 


SEC  &  TREAS 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill.. 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Sherrill 

Jeffress 

Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Bea trice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Beatrice  Cobb.. 
Bea trice  Cobb.. 


MEETING  PLACE 


Asheville 
Chase  City,  Va. 
Morehead  City 
Charlotte 
Hendersonville 
Wrightsville  Beach 
Lenoir 

Morehead  City 
Asheville 

Wrightsville  Beach 
Montreal 
Durham 
Morehead  City 
Asheville 

Wrightsville  Beach 
Waynesville 
Morehead  City 
Shelby 

Blowing  Rock 
Morehead  City 
Asheville 
Hickory 
Morehead  City 
Sedge  field 
Elizabeth  City 
Blowing  Rock 
Morehead  City 
Linville 
Manteo 
Banner  Elk 
Norfolk-Boston 
Waynesville 
Elizabeth  City 
Blowing  Rock 
Wrightsville  Beach 
Hendersonville 
Charlotte 
Asheville 
Winston-Salem 
High  Point 
Raleigh 
Asheville 
Atlantic  Beach 
Fontana  Village 
Nags  Head 
Asheville 


Study  Labor  Resources  for  N.  C.  Industrial  Expansion 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper,  Director,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


As  the  planning  for  defense  production  progresses, 
the  subject  of  labor  availability  comes  more  and 
more  to  the  forefront. 

The  collection,  preparation  and  dissemination  of 
labor  market  information  is  a  basic  responsibility  of 
all  levels  of  employment  security  operations.  The 
Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 
is  aware  of  this  responsibility,  and  constantly  is  fit- 
ting its  program  to  meet  the  needs  of  the  State  in  its 
effort  to  make  known  the  vast  labor  potentials  await- 
ing new  industry. 

As  a  contribution  to  the  work  of  these  agencies 
promoting  the  industrial  expansion  of  our  State,  the 
Employment  Security  Commission  is  inaugurating  a 
study  of  the  recruitable  labor  to  be  found  in  the  State. 
These  data  will  serve  to  show  to  industrialists,  locat- 
ing engineers,  and  other  interested  parties  in  gen- 
eral terms  something  of  the  potential  supply  avail- 
able and  its  broad  characteristics,  e.g.,  degree  of 
skill,  color,  sex  and  other  related  factors. 

These  estimates  of  the  recruitable  labor  in  the 
State  will  include  such  groups  as  housewives  that 
would  join  the  labor  force  should  a  new  industry  pay 
wages  at  or  above  the  pattern  now  prevailing  in  the 
area.  Also  included,  as  such  other  groups  as  work- 
ers now  commuting  to  other  areas  but  who  would 
likely  choose  local  employment;  youths  who  would 
be  drawn  into  employment;  older  employables  that 
are  deemed  able  to  work  but  currently  are  not  readily 


absorbed ;  minority  groups  that  would  accept  regu- 
lar employment;  new  groups  transferring  from 
agricultural  to  industrial  employment  because  of 
recent  crop  failures ;  and  other  smaller  segments 
deemed  recruitable. 

Particular  attention  is  given  to  the  availability  of 
the  "trainable"  portion  of  the  unskilled  supply,  since 
to  the  new  industry  that  is  looking  for  a  permanent 
location,  the  segment  of  workers  that  can  develop 
into  skilled  operatives  is  of  most  importance.  Few 
industries  today  expect  to  find  a  sizeable  nucleus  of 
trained  workers. 

These  data  will  be  released  bi-monthly  in  a  two- 
page  release  consisting  of  a  shaded  map  giving  in 
broad  size  groupings  the  distributions  by  county  of 
the  estimated  recruitable  labor.  Accompanying  the 
map  will  be  a  table  giving  by  county  the  broad  gen- 
eral characteristics  of  the  labor  supply. 

Naturally,  more  detailed  data  would  be  required 
by  any  industry  making  a  final  selection  of  a  loca- 
tion, but  it  is  believed  that  these  data  will  direct  the 
interest  of  locating  firms  to  areas  where  the  greatest 
labor  supply  exists. 

The  map  below  was  prepared  to  reflect  the  labor 
supply  situation  in  the  State  as  of  January  15,  1951. 
You  will  note  that  the  estimate  for  a  number  of  areas 
exceeds  3,500  workers,  and  conversely  other  areas 
have  a  rather  small  supply  of  recruitable  labor  to 
offer  new  industry.    (See  map  next  page) . 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  5 1 


EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 

REaiNTABLS  LABOR  FOR  INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  BY  COUNTY 

JANUARY  15,  1951 


££Q£  A2> 

jj|  3,500  §  UP 

750-1,499 

2,500-3,499 

250-749 

■** :* 

1,500-2,499 

0-249 

Amendments  Extend  Coverage  of  Social  Security  Act 

By  M.  D.  Dewberry,  Regional  Representative,  Region  III,  Social  Security  Administration,  Washington,  D.  C. 


On  the  first  of  January,  Federal  Social  Security 
entered  upon  a  new  and  greatly  broadened  phase  of 
service  to  the  American  worker.  With  the  advent 
of  1951,  in  addition  to  other  amendments  to  the 
Social  Security  law,  old-age  and  survivors  insurance 
protection  was  made  available  to  approximately  ten 
million  more  of  the  gainfully  employed  and  to  their 
dependent  families. 

This  does  not  imply  that  this  Federal  system  for 
family  insurance  has  gained  full  stature.  Even  to- 
pay,  it  would  be  extravagant  to  proclaim  it  as  the 
iall-encompassing  social  legislation  its  advocates  con- 
ceived and  its  sponsors  hoped  for. 

Social  Security,  like  every  other  kind  of  social  or 
pconomic  legislation,  is  the  product  of  evolution  in 
jpublic  thinking.  A  century  ago  there  was  little  or- 
ganized thought  along  this  line.  Not  until  1875 
was  a  single  pension  fund  inaugurated  in  American 
Industry.  We  had  turned  the  century  without  de- 
veloping any  public  insurance  retirement  system, 
tt  was  1911  before  the  impact  of  slowly  strengthen- 
ing public  opinion  on  state  legislatures  brought  the 
!irst  workmen's  compensation  law  into  being. 

You  may  ask  why  the  long  delay  in  the  enactment 
pf  this  legislation.  The  answer  is  a  lack  of  public 
ijlemand.  To  understand  the  reason  for  this  apathy 
jve  must  refer  to  the  past  once  more.  People  were 
oo  occupied  with  the  materialistic  opportunities 
)ffered  on  every  hand  to  give  thought  to  the  prob- 
lems changes  were  creating.  In  place  of  a  prepon- 
derantly agrarian  economy  we  now  had  an  industrial 
ystem.    The  farm  with  the  farm  home  was  no  longer 


SOCIAL  SECURITY  OFFICES  LOCATED 
IN   13  NORTH  CAROLINA  COMMUNITIES 

The  Social  Security  Administration  has  480  field  offices 
located  in  the  United  States,  Alaska,  Hawaii  and  Puerto 
Rico.  These  offices  issue  Social  Security  numbers,  accept 
and  process  claims,  reconcile  wage  records  and  inform  the 
public  about  the  program.  Thirteen  offices  are  located  in 
North  Carolina,  the  cities,  street  locations  and  managers 
being   as   follows: 

Asheville — 20  Battery  Park  Avenue Don  W.  Marsh 

Charlotte — 122'  E.  Third  Street Lone  T.  Proctor 

Durham — Post  Office  Building Mrs.  Nina  H.  Matthews 

Payetteville — 305  Huske  Building Vernon  D.  Herbert 

Gastonia — Post  Office  Building Miss  Margaret  Lowder 

Greensboro — 330  S.  Greene  Street W.  L.  O'Brien 

Hickory — Harris-Arcade  Building Glenn  H.   Pittinger 

High  Point — Post  Office  Building E.  Clyde  Thomas 

Raleigh — 16  W.  Martin  Street John  H.  Ingle 

Rocky  Mount — Post  Office  Building Marshal  H.  Barney 

Salisbury — Post  Office  Building Louis  H.  Clement 

Wilmington — Custom  House  Building Nicholas  A.  Avera 

Winston-Salem — Nissen  Building Warkell  K.   White 

Norfolk,  Va. — Flatiron  Building Joe  Morrison 

(Last    named    serves    seven    northeastern    North    Carolina 
Counties. ) 


the  seat  and  the  security  of  the  average  American 
family.  A  self-sustaining  life,  with  basic  necessi- 
ties home-produced,  gave  way  to  a  wage  economy. 
The  financial  security  of  a  steadily  increasing  num- 
ber of  people  came  to  depend  upon  the  stability  of 
the  job  and  their  ability  to  continue  in  that  job. 

The  agrarian  economy  was  a  fading  memory  with 
large  numbers  of  American  wage  earners  long  be- 
fore they  became  aware  of  the  problems  brought  into 
their  lives  by  the  expanding  industrial  system  and 


Page  52 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


the  urban  way  of  life.  There  still  were  wide  fron- 
tiers to  conquer,  however,  and  rapidly  growing  cities 
afforded  generous  opportunities  for  the  man  of  en- 
terprise. Even  the  recurrent  periods  of  depression 
left  few  enduring  scars.  Industrially,  growth  was 
spectacular.  There  were  few  serious  barriers  im- 
peding the  progress  of  the  truly  industrious,  the 
thrifty,  and  the  ambitious. 

With  the  surge  of  industry,  however,  the  pattern 
of  individual  and  family  life  changed.  Cities,  which 
to  many,  had  been  places  to  visit,  became  places  in 
which  they  must  live.  Suburban  transportation 
was  in  its  infancy;  urban  congestion  was  an  ever- 
increasing  problem.  Unrestricted  immigration  was 
a  contributing  cause. 

The  rural  homestead,  long  an  anchor  of  family 
security,  no  longer  safeguarded  the  average  worker 
and  his  dependents  against  the  varying  tides  and 
currents  that  threatened  his  new  way  of  life.  Sociol- 
ogists quickened  to  the  dangers,  and  humanitarians 
labored  to  thwart  them.  In  the  spirit  of  the  era, 
however,  their  efforts  were  largely  directed  to  the 
moral  aspects  of  the  situation.  The  complexity  of 
altered  society,  that  was  increasingly  to  threaten 
the  individual's  financial  security,  was  not  yet  con- 
sidered a  major  problem.  The  true  impact  of  wage 
economy  on  family  well-being  was  not  fully  under- 
stood. 

Changes  in  economy  outdistanced  changes  in  pub- 
lic thinking.  A  century  had  ended,  a  quarter  of  a 
new  one  was  history,  before  opinion  on  this  subject 
began  to  crystallize.  As  recently  as  1925,  authori- 
ties in  finance  and  industry  did  not  hesitate  to  pro- 
claim openly  that  the  frontiers  of  our  economic  ex- 
pansion were  limitless,  and  the  wells  of  universal 
prosperity  would  never  go  dry. 

In  retrospect,  the  tragedy  of  their  errors  are  all 
too  apparent.  It  is  wrong,  however,  to  attribute  the 
disaster  that  overwhelmed  the  worker  to  the  wide 
belief  in  an  eternal  boom.  You  will  hear  people  say 
that  the  speculative  mania  of  the  late  Twenties  and 
the  financial  collapse  of  the  early  Thirties  created 
the  need  for  the  family's  greater  economic  security. 
These  two  equally  deplorable  events  didn't  create  the 
need ;  they  pointed  up  an  existing  need. 

Today  it  is  hard  to  believe  that  the  nation  for  so 
long  failed  to  see  the  serious  implications  for  indi- 
viduals of  the  changing  economy.  Today  it  is  com- 
monly understood  that  old-age  dependency  is  by  and 
large  an  outgrowth  of  modern  industrial  develop- 
ment and  that  the  wage  system  inherent  in  that  de- 
velopment has  made  economic  security  depend  large- 
ly upon  the  stability  of  the  job.  Moreover,  the  de- 
velopment of  industry  while  constantly  creating  new 
jobs,  involves  changes  in  techniques  that  frequently 
abolish  existing  jobs  and  leave  the  former  incum- 
bents ill-equipped  to  find  new  ones.  Industrial  com- 
petition has  made  necessary  greater  industrial 
efficiency.  This,  in  turn,  had  often  imposed  age 
restrictions  on  personnel,  while  increasing  life  ex- 
pectancy of  the  individual  is  steadily  augmenting 
the  non-employable  age  group.  These  are  conditions 
that   Federal  old-age  and   survivors   insurance,   as 


established  by  the  Social  Security  Act,  is  designed 
in  some  measure  to  ameliorate. 

"Some  measure"  is  used  advisedly.  Those  who 
participate  in  administering  this  important  legisla- 
tion have  no  illusions  about  its  limitations.  In  their 
enthusiasm  for  the  Act  as  a  principle,  they  do  not 
consider  it  an  elixir  to  bring  full  economic  health  to 
the  American  family.  As  a  people,  we  are  still  a 
long  way  from  solving  the  insufficiency  of  income 
and  the  insufficiency  of  material  things.  Through 
old-age  and  survivors  insurance,  however,  the  spec- 
tre of  dire  want  in  old  age  and  abject  poverty  among 
survivors  of  the  wage  earner,  is  made  less  fearsome 
— its  haunting  of  the  family  home  a  diminished 
threat. 

While  the  1950  amendments  to  the  Social  Security 
Act  do  not  assure  the  average  family  the  standard 
of  living  most  people  would  like  to  maintain,  they  do 
lessen  the  threat  of  penury,  and  lighten  the  burden 
of  charity.  Over  three  million  present  beneficiaries 
and  survivors  have  received  increased  monthly  in- 
surance payments  ranging  from  40  per  cent  to  100 
per  cent  over  their  old  payments. 

Largest  of  the  new  groups  to  which  old-age  and 
survivors  insurance  was  extended  in  January  is  the 
self-employed.  Approximately  4,700,000  self-em- 
ployed persons,  excluding  farm  operators  and  cer- 
tain professional  groups  now  have  Social  Security 
coverage.  The  amended  law  gives  Social  Security 
protection  also  to  household  employees  regularly  em- 
ployed in  one  household.  It  is  estimated  that  a  mil- 
lion workers  in  this  class  will  be  covered  for  retire- 
ment and  survivors  benefits.  The  third  largest  group 
to  which  social  security  was  extended  on  the  first  of 
the  year  is  the  regular  farm  worker.  About  650,000 
regular  workers  on  farms  and  200,000  employees 
engaged  in  food  processing  and  other  "borderline" 
jobs  have  Social  Security  protection  under  the  new 
law.  In  addition,  workers  for  nonprofit  organiza- 
tions may  now  have  Social  Security  coverage  by 
employer-employee-Federal  Government  arrange- 
ment. States,  too,  may  now  negotiate  agreements 
with  the  Federal  Government  whereby  State  and 
local  government  employees  will  come  under  the 
OASI  program. 

The  new  law,  moreover,  provides  wage  credits  for 
World  War  II  servicemen.  This  provision  of  the 
amended  act  will  enable  many  veterans  to  regain 
insured  status  lost  during  the  period  of  service.  The 
veteran  who  was  not  in  employment  covered  by  the 
act  before  the  war  will  now  gain  insured  status  more 
quickly  because  of  having  service-connected  wage 
credits. 

A  reduction  in  the  length  of  the  work  period  re 
quired  to  qualify  for  OASI  benefits  permits  pay 
ments  immediately  or  in  the  near  future  to  many 
workers  now  at  or  approaching  the  retirement  age 
Survivors  of  married  women  are  now  more  frequent- 
ly eligible  for  benefits,  as  a  result  of  changes  in  the 
definition  of  dependency  of  children  and  the  new 
provisions  for  dependent  aged  husbands  and  widow- 
ers. Benefit  payments  to  dependent  parents  have 
been  increased.     The  amended  law  provides  benefit 


Winter-Spring,  i 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  53 


payments  for  a  retired  worker's  wife  under  65,  if  she 
has  a  child  in  her  care. 

Under  the  new  formula  the  following  benefit 
amounts  will  be  paid.  However,  the  total  payment 
to  any  one  family  group  may  not  exceed  $150  a 
month  or  80%  of  the  average  monthly  wage  which- 
ever is  the  least: 


Average 
Monthly  Wage 


$  50.00 
100.00 
150.00 
200.00 
250.00 
300.00 


Wage  earner  at  age  65 

Primary  insurance 

amount 


25.00 
50.00 
57.50 
65.00 
72.50 
80.00 


Wife  at  age  65  or 
with  child  under  18; 

child  under  18; 
dependent  husband 


S  12.50 
25.00 
28.80 
32.50 
36.30 
40.00 


Widow  with  children 

under  18;  widow  at 

age  65;  dependent 

parents:  dependent 

widower 


S  18.80 
37.50 
43.20 
48.80 
54.40 
60.00 


An  additional  14  of  the  primary  insurance  amount 
is  payable  to  one  child  or  is  equally  divided  among 
all  the  children  where  the  wage  earner  has  died. 


As  has  already  been  pointed  out  in  this  article, 
Social  Security  is  the  product  of  evolution  in  public 
thinking.  A  decade  and  a  half  has  elapsed  since  it 
was  just  a  movement,  a  hope  and  an  aspiration.  In 
this  connection,  one  is  reminded  of  a  passage  in  the 
preface  of  I.  M.  Rubinow's  "The  Quest  for  Security." 
Writing  in  1934,  he  said : 

"Knowledge  and  understanding  is  necessary  before  in- 
telligent action  may  be  expected — knowledge  and  un- 
derstanding not  only  on  the  part  of  an  academic  hand- 
ful but  of  that  larger  intelligent  public  whose  judg- 
ment, according  to  our  American  traditions,  should  and 
sometimes  does  rule  the  destinies  of  the  people." 

Today  it  can  be  said  that  the  people  do  have 
knowledge  and  understanding  of  the  need  for  Social 
Security.  The  people's  judgment  impelled  the  intel- 
ligent action  that  gave  them  the  original  Social  Se- 
curity Law  in  1935  and  the  amendments  of  1939, 
1946,  1947  and  1950.  By  these  progressive  steps  in 
the  development  of  family  insurance  protection  for 
greater  economic  security,  the  people  rule  their  des- 
tiny in  the  traditional  American  way. 


Analysis  of  Unemployed  Workers  Who  Exhaust  Benefits 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn,  Supervisor,  Reports  and  Analysis,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


Around  July  1,  1950,  questionnaires  were  mailed 
to  3,489  unemployment  compensation  claimants  who 
had  exhausted  their  unemployment  benefit  rights 
during  January  and  February,  1950,  referred  to  in 
this  item  as  "exhaustees." 

The  questionnaire  covered  information  regarding : 
personal  characteristics,  such  as  sex,  color,  age  and 
marital  status ;  industry  in  which  regularly  employ- 
ed; work  status,  at  time  of  questionnaire;  if  then 

'employed,  whether  work  was  in  customary  industry; 

(type  of  work,  if  any,  obtained  since  drawing  last 
benefit  check;  number  of  months  since  last  check 
before  getting  first  regular  job;  if  still  unemployed, 
whether  again  drawing  unemployment  benefits ;  and, 
if  still  unemployed,  the  specific  reason  in  the  former 
claimant's  own  thinking  for  the  continued  unem- 
ployment.    Returns,  including  a  local  office  follow- 

|up  of  a  sample  of  non-respondants,  were  received 

1  from  over  95  percent  of  the  January-February  1950 
exhaustees,  specifically  3,150  exhaustees,  a  very  high 

J  response. 

A  worker,  who  receives  a  qualifying  amount  of 

J  wages  from  an  employer  (s)  covered  by  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Law  during  a  specific  12-month  base 
period,  is  entitled  to  a  specified  amount  of  unemploy- 
ment benefits  in  weekly  payments  for  a  fixed  period 

I  so  long  as  he  is  "partially"  or  totally  unemployed, 
provided  he  meets  certain  defined  requisites.  It  is 
obvious,  therefore,  that  the  worker  must  experience 
unemployment  for  an  extended  period  of  time  (old 
formula:  a  minimum  of  16  weeks;  current  formula, 
effective  in  March,  1949 :  20  weeks)  before  all  bene- 
fits can  be  exhausted.  Thus,  a  study  of  exhaustees 
is  a  study  of  the  critically  unemployed  workers. 


Who  are  the  exhaustees  ?  What  are  their  physical 
characteristics?  What  are  their  customary  indus- 
tries of  employment?  What  happens  to  them  during 
the  period  immediately  following  the  exhaustion  of 
their  benefits?  How  many  establish  new  benefit 
years  promptly  after  exhausting  their  old  year's 
benefits?  How  long  do  the  claimants  draw  claims 
before  exhausting?  Does  marital  status  influence 
the  degree  of  exhaustion?  Is  there  any  correlation 
between  the  level  of  weekly  benefit  amount  and  the 
subsequent  employment  status  of  the  exhaustee? 
These  are  only  a  few  of  the  questions  for  which 
answers  were  sought  in  this  study. 

HIGHLIGHTS  FROM  STUDY 

About  two-thirds  of  all  exhaustees  are  women. 

Female  exhaustees  are  younger  than  male  ex- 
haustees because  male  workers  remain  in  the  labor 
force  longer. 

White  and  nonwhite  females  account  for  a  dis- 
proportionate number  of  exhaustions,  considering 
the  relative  size  of  these  respective  groups  in  the 
labor  force  .  .  .  both  white  and  nonwhite  males  had 
low  exhaustion  rates. 

Married  exhaustees,  with  a  preponderance  of  fe- 
males, account  for  a  disproportionate  number  of  all 
exhaustions. 

Single  and  married  female  exhaustees  remain  un- 
employed longer  and  a  larger  proportion  establish 
new  benefit  years  and  draw  benefits  again  than  do 
the  respective  male  groups  .  .  .  greater  job  respon- 
sibility of  males. 

Of  those  groups  of  exhaustees  still  unemployed 
five  months  after  exhausting  their  benefits,  a  rela- 


PAGE  54 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


tively  low  proportion  of  married  females  and  a  rela- 
tively high  percent  of  married  males  reported  that 
"employers  turned  me  down  because  of  my  age" 
.  .  .  which  emphasizes  the  more  advanced  age  of 
married  male  exhaustees  who  seek  employment 
longer.  A  proportionately  larger  number  of  single 
male  exhaustees  reported  "my  qualifications  do  not 
meet  employer's  needs"  as  the  reason  for  their  con- 
tinued unemployment  five  months  after  exhausting 
their  benefits  .  .  .  principally  because  they  are  less 
experienced. 

AGING  EXHAUST  FIRST 

A  greater  proportion  of  the  single  and  married 
female  groups  reported  "expect  to  be  recalled  to  old 
jobs"  as  the  reason  for  continued  unemployment 
after  exhaustion  .  .  .  due  in  part  to  the  large  num- 
ber of  out-of-season  tobacco  processing  female  work- 
ers included  in  the  sample. 

About  twice  as  many  married  female  exhaustees 
reported  that  they  were  no  longer  interested  in  an- 


other job  (in  school,  keeping  house,  etc.)  as  did  the 
other  three  groups. 

As  the  age  level  rises,  a  diminishing  proportion  of 
the  exhaustees  found  regular  new  employment  with- 
in five  months  after  exhausting  and  an  increasing 
proportion  established  new  benefit  years  and  were 
drawing  benefits  again. 

Exhaustees  from  their  customary  employment  in 
manufacturing  establishments,  particularly  in  the 
tobacco  and  textile  industries,  accounted  for  a  dis- 
proportionate number  of  all  exhaustions  .  .  .  public 
utilities  and  trade  establishments  had  the  smallest 
relative  exhaustions. 

One  out  of  every  two  exhaustees  used  up  all  their 
benefits  with  little  or  no  intervening  employment 
while  drawing  .  .  .  the  higher  the  age  level,  the 
quicker  they  exhausted. 

The  higher  the  earnings,  the  better  the  reemploy- 
ment experiences  subsequent  to  exhausting  and  the 
few  establishing  a  new  benefit  year  for  additional 
unemployment  benefits. 


Employment  Security  Compared;  11  Months  1949  &  1950 

■    By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn,  Supervisor,  Reports  and  Analysts,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


Employment  conditions,  a  direct  reflection  of  busi- 
ness generally,  have  been  unusually  favorable  during 
1950,  particularly  in  the  manufacturing  field.  Em- 
ployment was  on  the  rebound  at  the  start  of  1950 
following  the  general  upturn  in  business  around 
July  1949  which  marked  the  approximate  end  of  a 
six  to  eight  months  recessionary  period.  Of  course 
by  mid-year  1950  some  industries'  employment  had 
declined  seasonally,  but  construction  was  at  a  new 
high  level  and  general  trade  was  good  because  of 
volume  sales  of  durable  goods,  particularly  automo- 
biles and  home  appliances. 

News  of  the  invasion  of  South  Korea  came  June 
25  and  immediately  thereafter  there  was  a  scramble 
for  goods  likely  to  become  scarce  later  in  a  war 
economy ;  and  manufacturing  establishments  stepped 
up  their  employment  to  meet  increased  civilian  and 
defense  demands.  In  view  of  the  steady  improve- 
ment in  employment  in  1950,  it  is  obvious  that  the 
first  eleven  months  of  1950  were  much  more  favor- 
able for  local  office  accomplishments  than  the  com- 
parable period  in  1949. 

The  greater  1950  accomplishments  of  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Commission  are  reflected  in  the  ac- 
companying table,  the  highlights  of  which  follow : 

A.   Local   office   activities   which   reflect   increasing   employ- 
ment: 

1.  Covered  employers  under  ESC  numbered  15,021  as- 
of  November  30,  19  50,  which  was  a  4.1  percent  in- 
crease over  the  number  covered  one  year  before. 

2.  Average  monthly  covered  employment  during  the 
first  half  of  1950   (latest  available)  was  630,310,  or 


5.2  percent  greater  than  the  coverage  in  the  1949 
comparable  period,  and  this  increase  does  not  reflect 
the  impetus  to  rising  employment  following  the  start 
of  the  Korean  War. 

3.  Job  openings  received  during  the  first  11  months  of 
1950  were  32.4  percent  more  numerous  than  in  the 
like  period  of  1949. 

4.  In  response  to  increased  job  openings,  nonagricul- 
tural  placements  increased  31.1  percent  over  1949. 

B.   Local  office  activities  which  reflect  declining  unemploy- 
ment: 

1.  Registration  of  new  applicants  for  jobs  dropped  17.2 
percent  as  jobs  became  more  plentiful  and  fewer 
workers  remained  unemployed. 

2.  The  total  active  file  count  of  registered  applicants! 
seeking  employment  was  21.3  percent  smaller  as  of 
November  2  5  than  one  year  earlier. 

3.  Total  weeks  of  unemployment  for  which  unemploy- 
ment compensation  claims  were  filed,  declined  19.6 
percent  in  1950  from  1949:  11  months  in  1950, 
1,307,500;   11  months  in  1949,  1,626,075. 

4.  New  claims  taken,  indicative  of  first  unemployment, 
declined  one-third. 

EMPLOYMENT   SECURITY   PROGRAM   ACTIVITY   HIGH- 
LIGHTS, JANUARY-NOVEMBER   1950 


1950 

Liable  Employers  in  Active  Status  as  of  November  30th.._        15,021 
Average  Monthly  Covered  Employment  during  first  half..      630,310 

Workers  with  Wage  Credits  in  1949— Estimated INA 

Fund  Balance  as  of  November  30  (000  omitted) $  161,784 

Average  Contribution  Rate (est.)  1.55  ;, 


1949 


14,429 

599,370 

899,000 

154,694 

1.36H 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  55 


OTHER  ACTIVITY  MEASURES  BY  QUARTER  FOR 
ELEVEN  MONTHS  OF  1949  AND  1950 


TESTING  ACTIVITIES 


EMPLOYMENT  SERVICE 


Personal  Visits  to  Local  Offices 

New  Registrations  of  Job  Seekers 

Job  Openings  Received -  . . 

Total  Placements  Made 

Placements  on  Jobs — All  Non- 
agricultural 

Placements  on  Jobs — Handicapped- .. 

Other  Placements — Farm  Workers 

Counseling  Interviews 

Visits  to  Employers — Nonagricultural. 
Applications  on  File  as  of  Novem- 
ber 25th 


1950 


Jan-Sept. 


,155,950 
102,925 
144,275 
268,625 

112,275 

3,725 

156,350 

24,600 

39,075 


Oct.-Nov. 


361,200 
21,000 
35,400 
56,175 

28,375 
1 ,  350 

27,800 
5,050 
8,275 


Cumulative  through 


Nov.  1950       Nov.  1949 


2,517,175 
123,925 
179,675 
324,800 

140,650 
5,075 

184,150 
29,650 
47,350 

38,375 


2,778,925 
149,750 
135,700 
296,125 

107,325 

4,275 

188,800 

21,500 

42,450 

48,750 


UNEMPLOYMENT  COMPENSATION 


All  Weeks  of  Unemployment  Re- 
ported   

All  Weeks  Paid 

Amount  of  Payment  Issued 

Average  Weekly  Number  of 
Claimants  Paid 

New  Claims  Taken — First  Unemploy- 
ment  

First  Payment  to  Newly  Unemployed 

Number  Exhausting  All  Benefit 
Rights 

Hearings  Conducted  on  Contested 
Claims 


1,191,850 

115,650 

1,307,500 

994,775 

95,825 

1,090,600 

$14,585,700 

$  1,383,800 

$15,969,500 

25,500 

11,050 

22,875 

100,425 

9,800 

110,225 

75,300 

5,550 

80,850 

28,450 

4,025 

32,475 

30,850 

4,650 

35,500 

1,626,075 

1,317,400 

$18,010,300 

27,650 

164,150 
120,050 

31,475 

46,925 


TESTING  ACTIVITIES 

Although  it  is  granted  that  a  real  factor  in  the 
greater  accomplishments  in  1950  has  been  the  steady 
I  improvement  in  employment  conditions,   neverthe- 
j  less,  another  factor  should  not  be  overlooked,  namely, 
i  the    continuing    endeavor    of    the    ESC    to    render 
j  a  greater  service  in  the  placement  field,  and,  in  the 
i  absence  of  jobs,  in  the  unemployment  compensation 
j  field.     Indicative   of   this   effort   is   the   increasing 
|  importance  of  testing  activities  in  local  office  opera- 
!  tions.    An  increasing  number  of  employers  in  more 
diversified  industries  are  turning  to  the  ESC  to  test 
their  prospective  workers  before  hiring  them.    Em- 
I  ployers  are  learning  that  applicants,  who  possess 
j  aptitudes  which  are  likely  to  enable  them  to  be  suc- 
cessful in  specific  jobs,  are  actually  "panning  out" 
to  be  the  most  successful  new  hires.     By  using  the 
]  testing  facilities  of  the  ESC,  many  employers  are 
;  reducing  their  cost  of  labor  turnover — that  is,  the 
j  cost  of  excessive  training  of  new  workers  and  the 
i  cost  of  interruptions  and  impediments  to  production 
|  that  usually  occur  when  a  vacancy  arises  and  is  filled. 
The  figures  below  point  up  the  steady  progress 
being  made  in  the  general  testing  program.     No 
doubt,  in  the  not  too  distant  future,  a  major  portion 
of  all  hires  will  be  made  through  Employment  Se- 
curity local  offices  if  for  no  other  reason  than  that, 
through  testing,  local  office  personnel  are  in  a  better 
position  to  refer  those  applicants  out  of  a  larger 
group    who    have    aptitudes    which    promote    their 
chances  of  success  in  specific  jobs. 


ITEM 


Individuals  tested 

Aptitude  tests 

Proficiency  tests.. 


Testing  Activities 


Percent 

Increase 

in  1950 

Over  1949 


43 
41 
50 


January-November 
Accomplishments 


1950 


12,886 
10,323 
2,563 


1949 


9,010 
7,035 
1,705 


UNEMPLOYED  EXHAUSTING  BENEFITS 

Much  can  be  said  about  the  greater  accomplish- 
ments in  1950  that  reflect  more  placements,  more 
jobs,  more  testing,  etc.,  and  less  unemployment,  less 
unemployment  compensation  payments,  less  job  ap- 
plicants, etc.  However,  there  is  one  activity  that 
has  gone  contrary  to  basic  economic  trends,  namely, 
the  trend  of  the  number  of  claimants  exhausting 
their  benefits.  While  total  weeks  of  unemployment 
reported  for  benefits  declined  19.6  percent  in  the 
first  eleven  months  of  1950  below  the  comparable 
1949  volume;  actual  weeks  paid  declined  17.2  per- 
cent; and  first  payments  to  the  newly  unemployed 
declined  32.7  percent,  exhaustions  increased  3.2  per- 
cent. A  total  of  32,475  claimants  exhausted  their 
benefits  the  first  eleven  months  of  1950  as  compared 
with  only  31,475  during  the  same  period  in  1949. 

Much  could  have  been  said  to  explain  the  reasons 
for  a  decline;  for  example,  improved  employment; 
more  men  being  drafted  into  the  armed  forces,  who 
may  have  been  drawing  benefits  but  had  not  yet 
exhausted ;  and  extension  of  the  benefit  duration 
period  from  16  to  20  weeks  in  March  1949  which 
enabled  most  1950  claimants  to  look  four  weeks 
longer  for  work,  which,  if  found,  would  have  pre- 
vented their  exhausting. 

One  factor,  nevertheless,  would  tend  to  make  1950 
exhaustions  higher  and  accounts,  at  least  in  part,  for 
the  increase,  namely,  the  new  minimum  wage  law 
that  became  effective  in  January  1950.  No  one, 
however,  would  have  expected  this  factor  to  exert 
such  a  heavy  influence  on  the  exhaustion  load.  Still, 
it  should  be  recognized  that  a  number  of  workers 
did  lose  their  jobs  when  the  new  minimum  wage  went 
into  effect  because  they  were  not  able  to  meet  re- 
quired production  standard  commensurate  with  in- 
creased pay.  No  doubt  the  workers  in  the  older  age 
groups  were  affected  the  most  and  were  the  most 
difficult  to  replace  in  jobs.  The  influence  of  the 
minimum  wage  factor  will  naturally  diminish  during 
the  months  to  come,  as  an  increasing  portion  of  these 
marginal  workers  will  either  find  suitable  new  em- 
ployment or  will  no  longer  be  eligible  for  additional 
benefits  because  of  insufficient  wage  credits. 

UNEMPLOYMENT  COMPENSATION  FUND 

The  Unemployment  Compensation  Fund  balance 
had  grown  to  approximately  162  million  dollars  as 
of  November  30,  1950,  an  increase  of  about  7  million 
dollars,  or  4.6  percent,  during  the  previous  twelve 


! 


PAGE  56 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1951 


months  period.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  this  fund  has 
grown  steadily  from  the  beginning  of  the  program 
while  at  the  same  time  meeting  all  withdrawals 
adequately,  even  during  recessional  periods  like  1949. 
Furthermore,  the  Fund,  together  with  interest  and 
additions  thereto,  appear  ample  to  meet  foreseeable 
future  contingencies,  particularly  in  view  of  the 
high  level  of  employment  necessary  for  defense  dur- 
ing the  next  few  years. 


BEAUFORT-MOREHEAD  CITY  NEWS- 
PAPERS OF  THE  PAST  AND  TODAY 

The  Beaufort  Look  Out,  published  around  the  turn  of  the 
century,  became  The  Beaufort  News  in  1912,  when  it  was 
purchased  by  Frederick  Ostermeyer  and  J.  A.  Wright,  from 
Crothersville,  Indiana.  In  the  early  1920s  W.  Giles  Mebane 
bought  the  paper  and  published  it  until  his  death  in  193  4. 
William  Hatsell  was  publisher  for  almost  a  decade,  selling 
the  paper  to  Lockwood  Phillips.  During  this  period  Aycock 
Brown  was  editor  for  about  five  years,  and  Miss  Amy  Muse 
was  editor  when  Mr.  Phillips  bought  the  paper. 

Over  in  Morehead  City  The  Morehead  City  Coaster  was 
bought  around  19  24  by  F.  C.  Salisbury,  who  changed  the 
name  to  The  Carteret  County  Herald,  purchased  in  193  5  by 
Herbert  Utley.  In  193  6  Mr.  Utley  went  to  a  five-day-a-week 
paper,  The  Twin  City  Daily  Times.  This  paper  in  1946  was 
purchased  by  P.  T.  Hines,  general  manager  of  the  Greens- 
boro daily  papers,  and  James  McEwen,  son  of  the  late  J.  H. 
McEwen,  Burlington  textile  executive. 

The  Carteret  Publishing  Co.,  Inc.,  purchased  this  dailv 
paper  in  1947,  changing  it  to  a  weekly  paper.  The  next 
year  Mr.  Phillips  merged  The  Twin  City  Times  and  The 
Beaufort  News  into  The  Carteret  County  News-Times,  pub 
lished  on  Tuesdays  and  Fridays.  Soon  after  the  merger 
Mr.  Phillips  built  a  modern  steel  and  concrete  building  in 
Morehead  City  and  equipped  the  plant  with  the  most  mod- 
ern machinery  and  has  greatly  expanded  the  circulation  and 
influence  of  the  paper. 


PRESS  ASSOCIATION  PRESIDENTS— Pictured  are  19  of  the 
26  living  former  presidents  of  the  N.  C.  Press  Association, 
those  who  attended  the  "President's  Breakfast'"  Saturday  morn- 
ing, January  20,  in  the  Carolina  Inn,  Chapel  Hill,  a  permanent 
feature  of  the  Press  Institute.  Seated,  I.  to  r.,  are  Roy  Parker, 
Ahoskie;  Dr.  Clarence  Poe,  Raleigh;  R.  E.  Price,  Rutherford- 
ton;  Henry  Belk,  Goldsboro  (present  president)  ;  H.  Gait  Brax- 
ton, Kinston;  John  B.  Harris,  Albemarle;  L.  C.  Gifford,  Hick- 
ory; Talbot  Patrick,  Goldsboro  and  Rock  Hill,  S.  C;  Standing, 
I.  to  ?.,  Josh  L.  Home,  Rocky  Mount;  Ed  M.  Anderson,  Brevard ; 
Frank  A.  Daniels,  Raleigh;  D.  Hiden  Ramsey,  Asheville;  Wm. 
K.  Hoyt,  Winston-Salem ;  Lee  B.  Weathers,  Shelby;  E.  A. 
Resch,  Siler  City;  W.  Curtis  Russ,  Hendersonville ;  F.  Grover 
Britt,  Clinton;  Harvey  F.  Laffoon,  Elkin;  Wm.  E.  Horner, 
Sanford.  Seven  other  former  presidents,  living  but  not  present, 
are:  Santford  Martin,  Winston-Salem ;  J.  W.  Atkins,  Gastonia; 
A.  C.  Huneycntt,  Albemarle;  J.  W.  No  ell,  Roxboro;  John  A. 
Park.  Raleigh;  Carl  C.  Council,  Durham,  and  Herbert  Peele, 
Elizabeth  City. — Picture  by  UNC  Photo  Lab. 


MORE  PRESS  NOTES 

SCOOPED — AND  ALMOST  FIRED:  The  people  of  Elkin 
held  a  big  celebration  on  July  4,  1910 — commemorating 
the  completion  of  the  first  mile  of  the  Elkin  &  Alleghany 
Railroad  in  Elkin.  The  road  was  completed  later  for 
several  miles  toward  Alleghany  County,  to  Doughton  and 
Thurmond,  and  operated  for  several  years  as  a  short-line 
road.  As  a  reporter  for  the  Winston-Salem  Journal,  I  was 
assigned  to  cover  the  event,  and  was  a  guest  overnight  at  the 
home  of  the  late  Hugh  G.  Chatham.  Also  a  guest,  and  my 
roommate,  was  R.  W.  Vincent,  then  managing  editor  of  the 
Greensboro  Daily  News. 

On  the  afternoon  of  July  3  a  terrific  thunder  and  rain 
storm  hit  the  area.  It  played  havoc  with  the  decorations  in 
Elkin.  Also,  it  hit  heavy  at  Roaring  Gap,  where  Mrs. 
Chatham  and  children,  Thurmond  and  DeWitt,  now  Mrs. 
Ralph  Hanes,  were  staying.  Around  dark,  Mr.  Chatham 
received  a  telephone  call  that  his  daughter,  DeWitt,  had 
been  struck  by  lightning  and  had  been  knocked  unconscious, 
but  for  a  short  time  only,  apparently  not  seriously  hurt. 

After  supper  Mr.  Vincent  and  I  walked  down  to  the  busi- 
ness section  and  separated.  I  hotfooted  it  to  the  telephone 
exchange.  The  wires  were  down,  they  said,  no  connections 
east.  I  hastened  to  the  telegraph  office  at  the  railroad  sta- 
tion.    All  wires  down,  no  communication  with  the  east.     In 


INDEX 

VOLUMES  7  AND  8,  YEARS  19491 950 

The  Index  on  the  following  pages  is  so  arranged  that 
the  pages  may  be  clipped  out,  stapled  together  and 
kept  separately  for  future  reference. 


fact,  all  lights  in  Elkin  were  out.  I  relaxed  and  visited 
friends.  Then  went  to  the  Chatham  residence.  Mr.  Vincent 
came  in  later. 

"You're  fired"  was  the  greeting  City  Editor  Herbert  B. 
Gunter  gave  me  when  I  appeared  at  The  Journal  office  the 
next  afternoon  with  a  good  story,  I  thought,  on  the  celebra- 
tion. Then  he  showed  me  a  copy  of  The  Greensboro  News, 
carrying  on  the  front  page  a  black  box,  giving  the  informa- 
tion of  Miss  Chatham's  encounter  with  lightning.  I  was 
dumbfounded.  Then  I  related  my  efforts  to  get  the  item  to 
The  Journal.     I  was  forgiven  and  the  firing  withdrawn. 

It  developed  that  the  telegraph  wires  were  repaired  late 
the  night  before,  and  that  Mr.  Vincent  had  written  the  item! 
and  held  matches,  one  after  the  other,  so  the  operator  could 
read  and  send  the  message.     But  it  was  a  close  squeak  for| 
me — and  a  big  scoop  for  him. 

NO  WEDDING;  SO,  NO  NEWS:  Some  30  years  ago  a 
new  reporter  was  added  to  the  staff  of  one  of  the  Wilming- 
ton newspapers.  After  very  brief  experience,  it  fell  to  his 
lot  and  he  was  thus  assigned  to  cover  a  wedding.  He  fared 
forth.  After  half  an  hour  he  returned,  but  the  city  editor 
noticed  he  was  not  writing  the  story.     He  inquired  why. 

"No  story  to  it,"  responded  the  reporter  in  disgust.  "The 
bridegroom  didn't  show  up." 

EDDIE  WOULD  GET  EVEN:  Eddie  Brietz  was  a  well- 
known  North  Carolina  newspaper  man.  He  started  in  his 
native  city  of  Winston-Salem,  worked  in  Charlotte,  Ashe- 
ville, Wilmington,  High  Point  and  other  cities  in  this  and 
other  states,  before  he  joined  the  staff  of  the  Associated 
Press  and  went  high  in  position,  primarily  as  a  nation-wide 
sports  writer.  In  conversation  one  day,  Eddie  remarked 
that  three  men  had  done  him  wrong  and  that  he  intended  to 
get  even  with  them. 

"One  is  John  Smith;  another  is  Bill  Jones  (not  actual 
names)  and  the  third — I  just  can't  remember  who  that  is 
right  now,  but  I'll  get  even  with  him,  too." 


SUPPLEMENT  TO  "THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY",  VOL.  9,  NO.  1  -2,  WINTER-SPRING,  1 951 

Index  to  Volumes  7  and  8,  1949-1950 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 

Compiled  by  Mrs.  Angie  W.  Wall,  Secretary,  Office  of  Informational  Service 

Published  by 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 

(Issues  from  Vol.  1,  No.  1,  Summer,  1942,  through  Vol.  4,  No.  4,  Fall,  1946,  were  designated  as  "The  U.  C.  C. 
Quarterly".  When  the  name  of  the  agency  was  changed  April  1,  1947,  the  name  of  this  magazine  was  chang- 
ed also.) 

Vol.      No.   Page  Vol.      No.   Page 

AGRICULTURE:  CHADWICK,  JAMES: 

Plant    Food    Institute    Aids    Better    Crops,  A  Poem — North  Carolina 7           3-4       138 

More  Economy  _.  7            2           56             CHARLOTTE     BRANCH,     FEDERAL     RE- 

Plant  Food  Council  Promotes  Improvement  SERVE  BANK  OF  RICHMOND       7            1           16 

in  Farming  7           2          58                   First  officers  and  Directors 

National  Association  Helps  in  Agricultural  Directors  of  Varied  Interests 

Research 7            2           59                    Territory  Enlarged 

ALLEN,  EVERETT:  Big  Increase  in  Activities 

Hotels  Defined:   N.  C.  Chains;   Investment:  Modern  New  Building 

New  Fire  Laws  8           1-2         74                    See  Banking 

ALLEN,  JOHN  G.:  CLINARD,  J.  WESTON: 

Incidents  in  15-Year  Banking  Span 7            1           18                Hickory  Named  for  Tavern... 8           1-2         53 

Closed  and  Reopened— Late  COLLINS,  DR.  E.  R.: 

First  in  Banking  Conferences  Fertilizer    Increases    Production    of    Major 

Largest  Negro  Bank  in  World  Field  Crops                                                            7            2           51 

Two  Unusual  Presidents  Corn  Responds  to  Fertilizer 

Verifies  Assets  and  Liabilities  Soybean  Yields  are  Increased 

See  Banking  Cotton  Shows  Economic  Response 

ASSOCIATIONS:  Tobacco  Yields  are  Larger 

See  Dowell,  Willard  L.  See  Fertilizer 

See  Yarbrough,  E.  S.  nmTR4m   n   Q  . 

See  Ballentine,  Mrs.  Bessie  B.  ^T   f .,.        '^7'  ?" ' ,    -c         „•      t..    ■ -,     A     . 

See  Pitts,  H.  Preston  Fertilizer   Control   Pays   Big   Dividends   to 

See  Melvin   M   M  Growers .....     7            2           46 

Most  Producers  Meet  Guarantee 

BALLENTINE,  MRS.  BESSIE  B.:  Grade  Numbers  Reduced 

N.  C.  Automobile  Dealer  Group  Most  Act-  Increase  Plant  Food  Units 

ive  in  Nation 7           3-4       135                    See  Fertilizer 

BALLENTINE,  L.  Y.:  COLWELL    DR    W    E  • 

Fertilizer  Centennial   Marks   State's   Great  ^     ....      'm,.*,"       '   ™«     /->     ^■^.        *   /v 

PrnQ.„„oa  7            9           ao                Fertilize   Tobacco   With   Quality   of   Cigar- 

j-rogress ^                    ........  7           l          43                     tt     .      Mi  d ?           2          4g 

Lawes  Started  in  England  0             .    .-.    ,T.     .. 

Seafowls  Furnished  Guano  ?Xlndlatf  Amounts 

Manufacturing  in  U.  S.  Starts  ^ s.,  ^aicate  Amounts 

Ruffin  Developed  Marl  Use  Limits  in  Yield,  Quality 

±tumn  ueveiopea  Man  use  g  n  T         important 

Farmers  Journal  Supports  Use  Cranh- 

Emmons  Discovered  Deposits  „?    '       TT         XT..               t                    ., 

Polk  Starts  Analyses  Sh™s.  H™    Nltr°gen    Increases    the 

Industry  Needs  Historian  See  ™ii°zer                " 

See  Fertilizer  bee  *  ertllizer 

BANKING:  CONSTABLE,  DR.  E.  W. : 

Beginning  of  Banking  in  N.  C.  7            1             3                Chemical  Qualifications  of  Commercial  Fer- 

.  N.  C.  Shares  in  Nation's  Banking  Progress  .  7            16                tilizer 7            2           49 

N.  C.  Bankers  Asso.  Active  Since  Formed  7            18                    Chemical  Analysis  Gives  Content 

State  Bank  Supervision  Since  1887 7            1           11                Twenty-one  Chemists  Busy 

Notable  Progress  Made  in  Trust  Business  7            1           13                    40,000  Analyses  Annually 

Charlotte    Branch,    Federal    Reserve    Bank  Usually  Plant  Food  Excess 

of  Richmond  7            1           16                    Earlier  Adulteration  Cases 

Incidents  in  15-Year  Banking  Span  ."".".I""".  7            1           18                    Progress  Under  Control  Methods 

Bankers    Earn    National    Honors    in   Agri-  See  Fertilizer 

cultural  Work   7            1           20            CUMMINGS,  DR.  RALPH  W.: 

Banking   is   $2,000,000,000   Business. 7            1           21                Why  N.  C.  Farmers  Use  So  Much  Commer- 

Industrial  Banking  History  and  Activities  7            1           37                    cial  Fertilizer  _.                                                   7            2           48 

BRYANT,  H.  E.  C:  Nitrogen  and  Minerals  Needed 

N.  C.  Hotels  50  Years  Ago — Reminiscences  Nitrogen  for  Quick  Growth 

of  Oldtimer  8           1-2           7                    Greater  Use  Profitable 

What  Manner  of  Man  See  Fertilizer 

CHACE,  W.  E.:  DOWELL,  WILLARD  L.: 

National   Asso.   Helps   in  Agricultural   Re-  Retail   Merchants  Have  Large  and   Effect- 
search  7            2           59                    ive  Association   7           3-4       132 

Producer  of  Quality  Crops  Retailing  Then  and  Now 

Pamphlets  Promote  Better  Crops  Association  Objectives 

Gov.  Scott  Accepts  Challenge  Categories  of  Service 

See  Agriculture  Seven  Thousand  Members 


Page  2 


index  to  Volumes  7  and  6,  1 949-1 950 — the  e.  s.  C.  Quarterly 


(PAGE  58) 


Vol. 
List: 

Convention  Cities  and  Presidents,  N.  C. 
Merchants   Association   7 

DUNNAGAN,  M.  R.: 

Silas  F.  Campbell  Dies 7 

Midyette,  Jackson,  New  Commissioner 7 

Charlotte   Mint   Coined   More   than   $5,000,- 

000  in  Gold 7 

Banking  is  $2,000,000,000  Business.-. 7 

Wachovia  Bank  and  Trust  Co 7 

Wachovia  is  from  Wachau 
Official's  Home  Safer  than  Iron  Safe 

American  Trust  Co 7 

Word  Wood   Started  Banking  as  Run- 
ner, Without  Salary 
George      Stephens,      American      Trust 
Founder,  Big  Builder 

First  Citizens  Bank  &  Trust  Co 7 

Branch  Banking  &  Trust  Co 7 

Security  National  Bank..... 7 

The  Commercial  National  Bank 7 

The  Northwestern  Bank 7 

The  Union  National  Bank 7 

Cabarrus  Bank  &  Trust  Co 7 

Guaranty  Bank  and  Trust  Co _._     7 

The  Fidelity  Bank 7 

All   Banks   in   State..... 7 

Lists: 

State  Commercial  Banks .-. 7 

National  Banks  in  State 7 

State  Industrial  Banks 7 

See  Banking 
Raper  Succeeds  Campbell  as  head  of   Sta- 
tistical Bureau  7 

Mechanics  and  Farmers,  Durham,  Largest 

Negro  Bank  in  Nation 7 

N.  C.  Largest  Fertilizer  User _     7 

Fertilizer   Makers   Operating   in   and    Sup- 
plying State  7 

Home  Offices  in  State 
Offices  Outside,  Plants  in  State 
Offices  and  Plants  Outside  State 
Modern  Operations  in  Making  Ingredients 

and  Mixing  7 

Superphosphate  Basic  Material 
Sulphur  Valuable  Plant  Food 
Modern  Hopper  System 
See  Fertilizer 

Merchandising   in   State 7 

Kendall   Reappointed;    New   Members;    In- 
tegrate Services  7 

Price  Deputy  Commissioner 
N.    C.   Retail   Trade    Exceeds    Two    Billion 

Dollars  a  Year 7 

Tables: 

Analysis     of     Collections     and     Retail 

Sales  by  Counties,  1948-9 7 

Analysis  of  Collections  and  Retail  Sales 

by  Types  of  Business,  1948-9 7 

Analysis  of  Collections  and  Retail  Sales 

by  Large  Cities,  1948-9 7 

N.  C.  Home  Base,  Large  Department  Stores     7 

Belk    Stores    7 

Efird's  Department  Stores 7 

J.  B.  Ivey  &  Co 7 

Johnson  Cotton  Co.,  Inc _..     7 

Leder   Brothers,   Inc 7 

The  Spainhour  Stores 7 

White's  Stores,  Inc 7 

B.  C.  Moore  &  Sons,  Inc 7 

N.  C.  Has  42  Variety  Chain  Groups  Owning 

250  Stores  7 

Rose's  5-10-25^   Stores,  Inc 7 

List: 

Variety  Chain  Stores  Owned  and  Ope- 
rated by  North  Carolinians. 7 

Eagle  Stores  Co 7 

Wood's  5  &  lOtf  Stores,  Inc 7 

Macks  5-10-25 $  Stores,  Inc 7 

Williams'  5  &  lOtf  Stores,  Inc 7 

Pope's  5 ^-$5.00  Stores 7 

Chandler's    Inc 7 


No. 

Page 

3-4 

132 

1 

2 

1 

15 

1 

19 

1 

21 

1 

21 

3-4 
3-4 

3-4 


23 


1 

25 

1 

26 

1 

27 

1 

28 

1 

29 

1 

30 

1 

31 

1 

31 

1 

32 

1 

33 

1 

33 

1 

35 

1 

36 

38 
42 

62 


63 

82 
83 

85 


3-4 

85 

3-4 

86 

3-4 

87 

3-4 

90 

3-4 

90 

3-4 

92 

3-4 

94 

3-4 

96 

3-4 

96 

3-4 

96 

3-4 

97 

3-4 

97 

3-4 

9S 

3-4 

98 

3-4 

98 

3-4 

100 

3-4 

100 

3-4 

101 

3-4 

101 

3-4 

101 

3-4 

102 

Vol.  No. 

Nation-wide  Variety  Store  Chains 

Operating  in  State 7  3-4 

F.  W.  Woolworth  Co.- 7  3-4 

S.  H.  Kress  &  Co 7  3-4 

McLellan  Stores  Co 7  3-4 

W.  T.  Grant  Co.. ..". 7  3-4 

H.  L.  Green  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Department  Store: 

J.  C.  Penney  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Eight  Wholesale  Drug  Firms,  Long,  Pros- 
perous  Records   7  3-4 

Dr.  T.  C.  Smith  Co 7  3-4 

Robert  T.  Bellamy  &  Son,  Inc 7  3-4 

Burwell  &  Dunn  Co 7  3-4 

Scott    Drug   Co 7  3-4 

O'Hanlon-Watson    Drug    Co 7  3-4 

Justice  Drug  Co 7  3-4 

The  W.  H.  King  Drug  Co 7  3-4 

Peabody   Drug   Co 7  3-4 

Wholesale  Distributors  Have  $1,290,000,000 

Business 7  3-4 

J.  G.  Ball  Co . 7  3-4 

The  Thomas  &  Howard  Co 7  3-4 

Atlantic  Tobacco  Co 7  3-4 

Job  P.  Wyatt  &  Sons  Co 7  3-4 

Barnes-Sawyer  Grocery  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Bennett-Lewallen  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

J.  M.  Mathes  Co.,  Inc. 7  3-4 

Thomas  H.  Briggs  &  Sons,  Inc.. 7  3-4 

N.  L.  Stedman  &  Co 7  3-4 

Gray  &  Oglesby _'. 7  3-4 

Lexington   Grocery  Co - 7  3-4 

C.  W.  Howard  &  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Simpson-Peacock  Co.  7  3-4 

Harvey  C.  Hines  Co . 7  3-4 

J.  T.  Hobby  &  Son 7  3-4 

George  S.  Edwards  &  Co _  7  3-4 

Sandlin  &  Co 7  3-4 

Bilbro   Wholesale    Co 7  3-4 

Wayne  Wholesale  Grocery  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Munn,  Griffin  &  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Garland  C.  Norris  Co 7  3-4 

Egerton  Wholesale  Co 7  3-4 

W.  G.  Weeks  &  Co 7  3-4 

A.   L.   Raynor 7  3-4 

Charles  L.  Gray  Co... 7  3-4 

Two     Big     Machinery     Equipment     Firms 

Started  in  Raleigh ___.._.  7  3-4 

Dillon  Supply  Co 7  3-4 

North  Carolina  Equipment  Co 7  3-4 

Ancient,  Odd,  Interesting  Retail  Firms  in 

Operation 7  3-4 

J.  C.  Blanchard  &  Co..  Inc 7  3-4 

A.  V.  Wray  &  6  Sons 7  3-4 

Alfred  Williams  &  Co...... 7  3-4 

James  H.  Clark  &  Co.,  Inc 7  3-4 

Lazarus   Brothers  7  3-4 

Memory  Company  7  3-4 

Ramsey-Bowles  Co.  _..  7  3-4 

Oliver   Oscho   Rufty 7  3-4 

Glenn  Ketner  7  3-4 

Food  &  Drugs  Handled  by  Large  National 

&  Local  Firms 7  3-4 

Colonial   Stores   Incorporated 7  3-4 

Great  Atlantic  &  Pacific  Tea  Co 7  3-4 

National  Food  Stores,  Inc 7  3-4 

Progressive  Stores,  Inc 7  3-4 

Milner  Stores  Co.... 7  3-4 

Stedman  Stores,  Inc 7  3-4 

Drug  Stores: 

Walgreen   Drug   Stores 7  3-4 

Eckerd  Drugs,  Inc 7  3-4 

Clothing,  Furnishings,  Apparel,  Shoe,  Fur- 
niture  Stores  7  3-4 

Winner's  Inc.  7  3-4 

Larkins  Clothing  Stores 7  3-4 

Roscoe  Griffin  Shoe  Co 7  3-4 

Merit   Shoe  Co.,   Inc 7  3-4 

Glamor   Shops,    Inc 7  3-4 

Heilig-Meyers  Co.  7  3-4 

Heilig-Levine  of  Raleigh,  Inc I...  7  3-4 

N.  C.  Hotels  and  Restaurants . 8  1-2 


3AGE  59) 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  7  AND  8,   1  949-1  950 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  3 


Vol. 


Grand  Hotels  in  Ghost  Towns,  Sneedsbor- 

ough  and  Parkwood 

Hotels   Named   for   Noted   People,   Famous 

Events,  Places  

Fleetwood   Hotel   Skeleton  Overawed  Area 

Twelve  Years  _ 

Group    of    Oldtimers    in    Operating    N.    C. 

Hotels 

Everett  I.  Bugg 

Virgil  St.  Cloud 

W.  G.  Tennille 

T.  R.  Williams 

A.  N.  Barnett 

Wilbur  Devendorf 

W.  David  Turner 

J.  F.  Somers 

Joseph  B.  McCoy 

P.  A.  Rasberry 
Bluffs  Offer  Mountain  Haven  High  on  Blue 

Ridge  Parkway  . 

Halfway  House,  Dismal  Swamp 

Many  Famous  Hotels  Operated  in  State  in 

Yesteryears 

Yarborough  Hotel 

Atlantic  Hotel 

Old  Battery  Park 

Salem  Tavern 

Raliroad  Hotel 
Mineral  Springs  Hotels  Operated 

Springs  Hotels  Still  Operating 

Former  Springs  Resort  Hotels 
Trains    Halted    While    Passengers    Ate    at 

Famous   Rail-side   Hotels 

Religious   Assembly   Grounds    Attract   Big 

Summer   Groups   ._ 

Lake  Junaluska 

Montreat 

Kanuga  Lake 

Park  Hill  Hotel 

Bon  darken 

Y.M.C.A. 

Fruitland  Assembly 

Methodist  Youth  Camp 

Fort  Caswell 

Vade  Mecum 
Woodfield's    Inn   at   Flat   Rock   is   Century 

Old  This  Year 

S  &  W  Cafeterias   State's  Fine  Home-Boy 

Eating  System  

Toddle  House  System 

Bus  Terminal  Restaurants  Co. 

Minute  Grill 

Hot  Shoppes,  Inc. 
Hotels  in  Central  Area  Serve  Capital  and 

Winter  Guests  .... 

Raleigh ... - 

Wake  Forest 
Fuquay  Springs 

Pinehurst 

Southern  Pines  

Aberdeen 
Lake  View 
Carthage 
Vass 

Durham 

Rocky  Mount  

Goldsboro 

Fayetteville 

Sanford 

Henderson- 

Chapel  Hill  ., 

Dunn  _.... 

Oxford 

Hillsboro 

Tarboro 

Warrenton.. 

Norlina 

Hamlet 

Rockingham.- 

Troy 

Candor 
Mt.  Gilead 


No.  Page 

1-2  8 

1-2  9 

1-2  10 

1-2  11 


Vol. 


1-2 
1-2 

1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


13 
13 

14 


1-2         18 

1-2         21 
1-2         22 


23 
23 


25 
25 


27 
28 


1-2 

28 

1-2 

29 

1-2 

30 

1-2 

30 

1-2 

31 

1-2 

32 

1-2 

32 

1-2 

33 

1-2 

33 

1-2 

34 

1-2 

34 

1-2 

34 

1-2 

34 

1-2 

35 

1-2 

35 

Biscoe 

Star 

Laurinburg 

Raeford 

Wadesboro .__. ___. 

Ansonville 

Lillington 

Clinton 

Nashville 

Louisburg 

Youngsville 

Franklinton 
Smithfield 

Clayton 

Selma 

Benson 
Pittsboro... _ 

Siler  City 

Moncure 

Roxboro 

Yancey  ville _ 

Milton 

Leasburg 
Piedmont  Area  Hotels  Large  Commercial, 

Business  Types  ..... 

Charlotte 

Huntersville 
Winston-Salem 

Kernersville 

Greensboro  

Sedgefield 

High  Point  

Burlington 

Salisbury 

Gastonia . 

Belmont 

Dallas     . 

Lincolnton 

Concord 

Shelby 

Reidsville _ 

Wentworth 

Leaksville 

Spray 

Madison 

Mayodan 

Ruffin 
Statesville 

Mount  Mourne 
Lexington  

Thomasville 

Albemarle 

Monroe 

Asheboro '. 

Ramseur 

New  Market 

Randleman 

Mount  Airy  

Elkin  

Dobson 

Rockford 

Mocksville 

Yadk  inville _ 

East  Bend 

Boonville 

Jonesville 
Danbury 

Walnut  Cove 

Germanton 
Graham 

Haw  River 
Mountain  Region  Lures  Vacationists  with 

Finest  Hotels  

Asheville 

Grove  Park  Inn,  Massive  and  Majestic 

Black  Mountain 

Hendersonville 

Hickory 

Newton 

Morganton 

Blowing  Rock  

Waynesville 

Burnsville... 


No. 

Page 

1-2 

35 

1-2 

35 

1-2 

35 

1-2 

36 

1-2 

36 

1-2 

36 

1-2 

37 

1-2 


1-2 


1-2 


37 


1-2         38 


1-2 

38 

1-2 

38 

1-2 

38 

1-2 

39 

1-2 

40 

1-2 

42 

1-2 

42 

1-2 

43 

1-2 

43 

1-2 

43 

1-2 

44 

1-2 

44 

1-2 

44 

1-2 

45 

1-2 

45 

1-2 

46 

1-2 

46 

1-2 

46 

1-2 

46 

1-2 

47 

1-2 

47 

1-2 

48 

1-2 

48 

1-2 

48 

1-2 

48 

49 


49 


1-2 

49 

1-2 

50 

1-2 

50 

1-2 

52 

1-2 

53 

1-2 

54 

1-2 

54 

1-2 

54 

1-2 

55 

PAGE  4 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  7  AND  8,   1  949-1  950 THE  E.  S.  C    QUARTERLY 


(PAGE  60) 


Vol. 


North  Wilkesboro  

Wilkesboro 

Boone 

Graystone  Inn,  Roaring  Gap. 

Lake  Lure  

Chimney  Rock  - 

Tryon 

Saluda 
Rutherfordton 

Forest  City 

Thermal  City 

Lenoir 

Marion 

Old  Fort 

Round  Knob 

Point  Lookout 

Little  Switzerland 

Wild  Acres 

Robbinsville 

Murphy 

Andrews 
Newland 

Banner  Elk 
Brevard 

Sapphire 

Lake  Toxaway 
Sylva 

Cashiers 

Whittier 
Franklin 

Highlands 

Hayesville 

Bryson   City  

Cherokee 

Jefferson . 

West  Jefferson  

Taylorsville 


Coastal    Plain   Hotels   on    Shipping   Lanes, 

in  Beach  Areas  

Wilmington 

Wrightsville  Beach  

Carolina  Beach  

Wilmington  Beach 
Morehead  City  

Sanitary  Fish  Market 

Atlantic  Beach 

Newport 
Beaufort 

Harkers  Island 
Manteo _. 

Nags  Head 

Kill  Devil  Hill  Beaches 

Kitty  Hawk  Beach 

Hatteras 

Buxton 

Elizabeth  City  

Edenton 

New  Bern  

Kinston. __ 

LaGrange 
Wilson '. 

Elm  City 

Greenville ._ ___ 

Washington 

Bath 

Bayview 
Whiteville.. 

Lake  Waccamaw 

Chadbourn 

Fair  Bluff 
Lumberton 

Maxton 

Fairmont 

Pembroke 
Halifax 

Enfield 

Weldon 

Littleton 

Scotland  Neck 

Roanoke  Rapids 
Plymouth— 

Mackey's 
Williamston... 


No. 

Page 

1-2 

55 

1-2 

56 

1-2 

56 

1-2 

56 

1-2 

56 

1-2 

57 

1-2 

57 

1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


1-2 


1-2 


1-2 

1-2 
1-2 


1-2 


1-2 


1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


57 


58 
58 


1-2 

59 

1-2 

59 

1-2 

59 

1-2 

59 

60 


60 


1-2 

60 

1-2 

60 

1-2 

60 

1-2 

61 

1-2 

61 

1-2 

61 

1-2 

62 

1-2 

63 

1-2 

63 

63 

64 
65 


8 

1-2 

65 

8 

1-2 

66 

8 

1-2 

66 

8 

1-2 

67 

8 

1-2 

68 

8 

1-2 

68 

8 

1-2 

68 

69 


69 


70 


70 
71 


Vol. 

Windsor 8 

Lewiston 

Woodville 

Jacksonville 8 

Swansboro 

Holly  Ridge 

Richlands 

Bayboro ___ 8 

Oriental 

Vandemere 

Columbia 8 

Swan  Quarter  __  8 

New  Holland 

Fairfield 

Engelhard 

Belhaven 

Ocracoke 

Winton 8 

Ahoskie 

Murfreesboro 

Hertford 8 

Jackson  8 

Rich   Square 

Elizabethtown  — 8 

White  Lake 

Gatesville 8 

Burgaw 8 

Kenansville 8 

Warsaw 

Faison 

Beulaville 

Wallace 

Southport 8 

Trenton ____  8 

Pollocksville 

Maysville 
Fontana  Village  Unique  and  Popular  Sum- 
mer Resort  Area 8 

N.  C.  Flour,  Meal,  Feed  Milling 8 

Wind  and  Water,  Power  for  Grist  Mills.—  8 
Meadows  Mill  Co.  Manufactures  Meal  and 

Feed  Mills  8 

Millstones  Caused  Boom  and  Bust  of  Park- 
wood _.  8 

Flour,  Feed  and  Meal  Mills .8 

Articles  on  100  Flour,  Feed  and  Meal  Mills  8 

Statesville  Flour  Mills  Co 8 

Interstate  Milling  Co 8 

Siler  City  Mills,  Inc 8 

Laurinburg   Milling   Co 8 

Earle-Chesterfield  Mill  Co 8 

Ralston   Purina   Co 8 

Farmers   Mutual,   Inc 8 

Goldsboro  Milling  Co 8 

W.  A.  Davis  Milling  Co... 8 

The  Randolph  Mills,  Inc 8 

Austin-Heaton   Co.   __  8 

Southern  Flour  Mills,  Inc 8 

Eagle  Roller  Mill  Co...... 8 

Acme  Feed  Mills,  Inc 8 

Cooperative  Mills,  Inc.,  of  N.  C 8 

J.  F.  Bess  and  Co 8 

Mocksville  Flour  Mills,  Inc _  8 

Henderson  Roller  Mills  Co 8 

Southern  Crown  Milling  Co 8 

Clinard  Milling  Co.,  Inc _ 8 

Griffin  Implement  and  Milling  Co 8 

Gurley  Milling  Co 8 

Mount  Ulla  Flour  Mills -_ 8 

John  W.  Eshelman  &  Sons,  Inc.. 8 

Watson  Feed  Co ;....  8 

Piedmont  Feed  Mills,  Inc 8 

North  State  Milling  Co... 8 

Upchurch  Milling  and  Storage  Co 8 

Cole  Milling  Co - 8 

Graino   Feed   Mills 8 

New  Bern  Oil  and  Fertilizer  Co 8 

Sanford  Milling  Co.,  Henderson 8 

Lewisville  Roller  Mills 8 

J.  P.  Green  Milling  Co...... 8 

Mooresville  Flour  Mills,  Inc 8 

Davis  Mills  8 

Leco  Feed  Mills,  Inc 8 


1-2 


1-2 

1-2 

1-2 

1-2 
1-2 
1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


1-2 

3-4 

3-4 

3-4 

3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 


3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 


(PAGE  61) 


Index  to  Volumes  7  and  8,  1 949-1 950 — the  e.  s.  C.  Quarterly 


page  5 


Vol. 

Pilot  Milling  Co 8 

Lassiter's  Milling  Co — .  8 

Wake  Farmers  Cooperative,  Inc.. 8 

Grimes  Bros.  Milling  Co 8 

John  H.  Moss  Industries 8 

J.  M.  Ostwalt  and  Sons  - 8 

House   Milling   Co 8 

Clemmons  Milling  Co -  8 

Lillington  Roller  Mills,  Inc 8 

Raines  Milling  Co 8 

Hinkle  Milling  Co 8 

Lincoln  Milling  Co 8 

Wheeler  Industries  8 

Broadway  Roller  Mills 8 

Autry  Bros  Mill 8 

Kinston    Milling    Co 8 

Cross  Creek  Milling  Co 8 

Lakeside  Mills  8 

Lee  Milling  Co 8 

R.   B.   Williams 8 

China  Grove  Roller  Mills 8 

Cole's  Milling  Co 8 

Reitzel  Milling  Co --  8 

Banner  Roller   Mills,   Inc 8 

Richfield  Milling  Co 8 

T.  J.  Smith's  Mill 8 

Rockwell  Milling  Co.,  Inc 8 

Mount  Pleasant  Milling  Co 8 

Rocky  Creek  Mills 8 

Grimes  Milling  Co 8 

Rice  and  Ratledge 8 

Hickory  Flour   Mills 8 

Dennis  Bros.  8 

River  View  Milling  Co 8 

Stegall  Milling  Co 8 

Hunting  Creek  Milling  Co 8 

McLamb  Supply  Co 8 

Honeycutt   Milling   Co 8 

Yadkinville   Roller   Mill   Co.„_._ 8 

Guilford  College  Milling  Co 8 

Reidsville  Flour  Mills 8 

S.  and  S.  Roller  Mills 8 

Crescent  Milling  Co _.  8 

Henderson  Milling  Co 8 

Dixie  Feed  Mill 8 

Oxford  Milling  Co 8 

White  Milling  Co 8 

Walker   Milling   Co.. 8 

Harmony   Milling   Co 8 

Carolina  Feed  Store 8 

Maiden  Flour  Mill — -  8 

Rowan  Milling  Co 8 

Greenville  Feed  Mills 8 

Blount-Midyette  and  Co 8 

C.  T.  Hupp  Feed  Mill 8 

Whitley  Milling  Co 8 

Montague  Feed  and  Milling  Co 8 

Murray  Supply  Co 8 

Mebane  Flour  and  Feed  Mills 8 

Longtown  Milling  Co 8 

Elkin  Roller  Mills 8 

Olive  Branch  Milling  Co 8 

Marshville  Milling  Co 8 

Tarlton  Milling  Co 8 

Life  Guard  Warehouse,  Inc 8 

Four  N.  C.  Mills  Burn 8 

Star  Milling  Co. 
Wilkes  Milling  Co. 
Neal  Milling  Co. 
Germanton  Flour  Mills 

Biltmore  Wheathearts  Corp 8 

EMPLOYMENT: 
See  Raper,  Hugh  M. 

FERTILIZER: 

Fertilizer  Centennial   Marks   State's   Great 

Progress 7 

Fertilize  Tobacco  With  Quality  of  Cigar- 
ette in  Mind —  7 

Fertilizer   Control   Pays   Big   Dividends   to 

Growers 7 

Why  N.  C.  Farmers  Use  So  Much  Commer- 
cial  Fertilizer   7 


No. 

Page 

3-4 

103 

3-4 

103 

3-4 

104 

3-4 

104 

3-4 

105 

3-4 

105 

3-4 

106 

3-4 

106 

3-4 

107 

3-4 

107 

3-4 

107 

3-4 

107 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

109 

3-4 

109 

3-4 

109 

3-4 

109 

3-4 

110 

3-4 

110 

3-4 

110 

3-4 

111 

3-4 

111 

3-4 

111 

3-4 

111 

3-4 

111 

3-4 

112 

3-4 

112 

3-4 

112 

3-4 

113 

3-4 

113 

3-4 

113 

3-4 

113 

3-4 

114 

3-4 

114 

3-4 

114 

3-4 

114 

3-4 

114 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

116 

3-4 

116 

3-4 

116 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

117 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

119 

3-4       119 


2 

43 

2 

45 

2 

46 

2 

48 

Vol. 
Chemical  Qualifications  of  Commercial  Fer- 
tilizer      7 

Fertilizer    Increases    Production    of    Major 

Field  Crops  7 

Soil  Testing  Basic  for  Efficient  Fertilizer 

Usage 7 

Early    Practices    in    State,    Fertilizer    Sale 

and  Use  7 

Fertilizer   Makers   Operating   in   and   Sup- 
plying State  7 

Modern  Operations  in  Making  Ingredients 

and  Mixing  7 

FLOYD,  E.  Y.: 

Plant    Food    Institute    Aids    Better    Crops, 

More  Economy  7 

Distributes  Scientific  Facts 

Sponsors  Crop  Diversification 

Officers  and  Directors 

See  Agriculture 
FRONT  COVER  PICTURES: 

State  Bank  of  North  Carolina,  Erected  1818     7 
Shows  Value  of  Use  and  Non-use  of  Fertil- 
izer on  Corn 7 

Ivey's  Department  Store,  Charlotte 7 

Carolina  Hotel,  Pinehurst 8 

Ancient  Bowl  and  Pestle 8 

HANES,  ROBERT  M.: 

N.  C.  Shares  in  Nation's  Banking  Progress     7 

Growth  Exceeds  National  Gain 

Strong  Capital  Structure 

Better  Balanced  Agriculture 

Hold  Industrial  Leadership 

Favorable  Trade  Balance 

Banks  Improving  Services 

See  Banking 
HOLOMAN,  W.  D.: 

Legislative  Changes  in  N.  C.  Employment 

Security  Law  7 

N.  C.  Has  Greatest  Solvency 

Formula  Change  Boosts  Benefits 

Redefines  'Employment' 

Some  Classes  Eliminated 

Protected  More  Workers 

Back  to  'Master  and  Servant' 

HONEYCUTT,  ALDEN  P.: 

ES   Peaks  and   Troughs 7 

NRS  Group  in  1934 7 

HOOD,  GURNEY  P.: 

State  Bank  Supervision  Since  1887 7 

Banking  Department  Created 

Early  Bank  Examiners 

Wood  and  Hood  Commissioners 

Provides  Banking  Commission 

State's  Smallest  Bank  Building 
Industrial  Banking  History  and  Activities     7 

See  Banking 

HOTELS  OPERATED  IN  YESTERYEARS: 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 
HOTELS  AND  RESTAURANTS: 

Organization   and   Activities,    N.    C.    Hotel 

Association 8 

Eating  Places  Attain  High  Food  and  Serv- 
ice Standards  8 

Hotels — Builders  of  Good  Will;    Historical 

Background 8 

Duncan  Hines  Finds  31  Fine  Eating  Places 

in  Tarheelia  8 

N.  C.  Hotels  50  Years  Ago 8 

Hotels  Defined:  N.  C.  Chains;   Investment: 

New  Fire  Laws 8 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 
INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  5  AND  6,  1947-1948..     7 
LASSITER,  MISS  MARY  V.: 

Millers'  Problems  Aired  at  Meetings 8 

LEGISLATIVE  CHANGES: 

See  Holoman,  W.  D. 
LETTERS    ON    HOTEL-RESTAURANT    IS- 
SUE OF  THE  ESC  QUARTERLY 8 

MARCH,  MRS.  VIOLA  T.: 

N.  C.  Readjustment  Allowance  Program 7 


No. 

Page 

2 

49 

2 

51 

2 

53 

2 

54 

2 

62 

2 

63 

56 


2 

41 

3-4 

81 

1-2 

1 

3-4 

77 

65 


60 
61 

11 


37 


1-2 

3 

1-2 

4 

1-2 

5 

1-2 

7 

1-2 

7 

1-2 

75 

2 

71-78 

3-4 

81 

3-4       120 
3-4       136 


PAGE  6 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  7  AND  8,  1949-1950 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


(Page  62) 


Vol.      No.   Page 

Eligibility-Disqualifications 

Unemployed  and  Self-employed 

Penalties  in  Fraud  Cases 

N.  C.  Veterans  Get  $94,523,000 

30  %  Exhaust  Benefits 

Peak  Reached  in  1946 

Tables: 

Benefits   Paid  Unemployed  Veterans ....     7  3-4       138 

Benefits  Paid  Self-employed  Veterans-..     7  3-4       138 

MAXWELL,  J.  W. : 

Research  in  Improving  Feeds 8  3-4         80 

McNAIR,  JOHN  F.,  JR.: 

N.  C.  Bankers  Asso.  Active  Since  Formed—.     7  18 

First  Association  Officers 
General  Organization 
Many  Association  Activities 
Meetings 

Agricultural  Program 
The  Carolinas  Bankers  Conference 
Issues  Monthly  Magazine 
Publication 
Insurance 
Officials,  Committees  N.  C.  Bankers 
Bankers  Standing  Committees  for  1948-49 
See  Banking 

MELVIN,  M.  M.: 

Eating  Places  Attain  High  Food  and  Serv- 
ice Standards  8  1-2  4 

North  Carolina  Leads  in  Sanitation 
Officers,  Directors,  N.  C.  Restaurant 

MERCHANDISING: 
See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

MILLING— FLOUR,  FEED  AND  MEAL: 

Research  in  Improving  Feeds 8  3-4         80 

Millers'  Problems  Aired  at  Meetings 8  3-4         81 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

MISCELLANEOUS: 

Manager  Not  Studying  Boss,  Boss  Bounced 
Him  Out  on  Ear 7 

New  State  Advisory  Council  of  E.  S.  Coram.     7 

Large   Lard   Cans   Full   of   Sand   Good   for 
Inventory — Not  Long 7 

Poem,  by  James  Chadwick: 

North   Carolina  7 

Duncan  Hines  Finds  31  Fine  Eating  Places 
In  Tarheelia  8 

Cornell  Graduates  8 

Hard  Hotel  Rules 8 

Uncle  Tom  Martin,  Greensboro  Waiter,  Had 
Wonderful   Memory  8 

Carolina  City  Hotel  Withered  After  More- 
head  City  Started 8 

Former   County   Seats 8 

Old  Davis  Mill  Site  Again  Hums  in  Meal- 
Feed  Grinding  8 

Couldn't      Get      Customer's      Meal      Fine 
Enough;    Sand   Fixed   Him 8 

Martin's  Mill  Probably  Smallest  Operating 
in  State  8 

Hushpuppy  Meal   Mix 8 

MOEN,  MRS.  GRACE  Z.: 

Measurement-Significance    of    Labor    Turn- 
over in  Industry 8 

NOTABLE  PROGRESS  MADE  IN  TRUST 

BUSINESS 7 

Trust  Legislation 

OLDTIMERS  IN  HOTEL  BUSINESS: 
See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

PERRY,  LAWSON  E.: 

That   Social   Security  Number ._     7  2  67 

Records  by  S.  S.  Numbers 
Change  When  Woman  Marries 
Smiths  First — Williams  Next 
Can't  Disclose  Information 

PITTS,  H.  PRESTON: 

Organization    and    Activities,    N.    C.    Hotel 

Association 8  1-2  3 

Officers,  Board  of  Directors,  N.  C.  Hotel 
Association 


3-4 

125 

3-4 

131 

3-4 

131 

3-4 

138 

1-2 

7 

1-2 

10 

1-2 

13 

1-2 

24 

1-2 

63 

1-2 

75 

3-4 

110 

3-4 

113 

3-4 

116 

3-4 

128 

3-4 

126 

1 

13 

Vol.      No.   Page 
POWELL,  WILLIAM  S.: 

Beginning  of  Banking  in  N.  C,  1804-1860....     7  1 

Cape  Fear,  New  Bern  Banks 
State  Bank  Chartered 
N.  C.  Notes  in  Many  States 
'Monopoly"  and  "Aristocracy" 
Condition  of  Banks  in  1835 
State  Bank's  Name  Changed 
All  Banks  Closed  by  War 
Tables: 

Banks  Capital  Stock,  Deposits  and  Note 

Circulation,   1835-1860   .....     7  1 

Banks    Capital    and    Note    Circulation, 

1830,  1856,  1861. 7  1 

See  Banking 
Trading  Paths,  Packs,  in  Early  Merchan- 
dising in   State 7  3-4        87 

Trade  with  Virginia-England 
Eastern  N.  C.  Merchants 
Indian  Trade  Caravans 
Store  on  Roanoke  River 
Merchants  in  Other  Activities 
Early  Stores  Were  Crude 
Salem  Store  Prospered 
Every  Teamster  a  Trader 
Country  Store  Develops 

PRINTING  FUNDS: 

See  Why  "The  E.S.C.  Quarterly" 

RAPER,  HUGH  M.: 

N.  C.  Covered  Employment  and  Wages  3rd 

Quarter,  1948  7  2  68 

Eliminate  Overtime  Work 
Mountain  Area 

Employment  Chart 
Piedmont  Area 

Employment  Chart 
Coastal  Area 

Employment  Chart 
Trends  by  Industry  Groups 
Largest  Increase  in  Trade 
Employment  Security  in  North  Carolina 8  3-4       124 

REED,  DR.  J.  FIELDING: 

Soil  Testing  Basic  for  Efficient  Fertilizer 

Usage 7  2  53 

See  Fertilizer 

RELIGIOUS  ASSEMBLY  GROUNDS: 
See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

SPRINGS  HOTELS: 
See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

ST.  CLOUD,  VIRGIL: 

Hotels — Builders  of  Good  Will;    Historical 

Background 8  1-2 

TAYLOR,  ROSSER  H: 

Early    Practices    in    State,    Fertilizer    Sale 

and  Use  7  2  I> 

Guano  Use  Experimental 

Required  in  Post-War  Era 

Credit  in  Cash  Crops  Only 

Hard  Terms  for  Growers 

Cheaper,  Better — Inspection 

Fertilizer  Without  Filler 
See  Fertilizer 

VETERANS: 

See  March,  Mrs.  Viola  T. 

WHY  "THE  E.S.C.   QUARTERLY"— Whence 

Printing  Funds?  8  3-4       122 

WOODRUM,  CLIFTON  A.: 

Plant  Food  Council  Promotes  Improvement 

in  Farming  7  2 

Purposes  of  the  Council 
Promotes  Improved  Farming 
Notable  Contributors 
More,  Better  Fertilizer 
See  Agriculture 

YARBROUGH,  E.  S.: 
Wholesale  Asso.   Promotes   Interest,   Mem- 
bers      7  3-4       134 


ublicalions  of  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

(FORMERLY  "UNEMPLOYMENT  COMPENSATION  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA") 


Biennial  Report,  1936-1938. 

Biennial  Report,  1938-1940. 

Biennial  Report,  1940-1942. 

Biennial  Report,  1942-1944. 

Biennial  Report,  1944-1946. 

Biennial  Report,  1946-1948. 

Biennial  Report,  1948-1950. 

Annual  Report,  1937.  (Mimeographed.)  Out  of 
print. 

Annual  Report,  1938.  (Mimeographed.)  Out  of 
print. 

Annual  Report,  1939.     (Mimeographed.) 

Annual  Report,  1940.     (Mimeographed.) 

Annual  Report,  1941.  (Mimeographed.)  Out  of 
print. 

Employment  Security  Law  as  amended  (1949). 

Employment  Security  Neivs  (mimeographed — 
weekly),  started  in  1936  by  the  North 
Carolina  State  Employment  Service.  Not 
issued  during  Calendar  year  1945. 

North  Carolina  Employment  Security  Informa- 
tion, Volume  I,  Numbers  1-12,  1941.  (Dis- 
continued.) 

The  U.  C.  C.  Quarterly 

Vol.  1,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1942-43) 
Vol.  2,  Nos.  1,2,3  (1944) 

(No.  4  not  issued) 
Index  to  Vols.  1  and  2  (1942-44) 
Vol.  3,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1945) 
Vol.  4,  Nos.  1-2,  3,  4  (1946) 
Index  to  Vols.  3  and  4  (1945-46) 
(Included  in  Vol.  5,  No.  2-3) 

The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly  (Name  changed  April  1, 
1947) 

Vol.  5,  Nos.  1,  2-3,  4  (1947) 
Vol.  6,  No.  1,  2-3,  4  (1948) 
Index  to  Vols.  5  and  6  (1947-48) 

(Included  in  Vol.  7,  No.  2) 
Vol.  7,  No.  1,  2,  3-4  (1949) 
Vol.  8,  No.  1-2  &  3-4  (1950) 
Index  to  Vols.  7  and  8  (1949-50) 
(Included  in  Vol.  9,  No.  1-2) 
Vol.  9,  No.  1-2  (1951) 
Rules  and  Regulation.  Amended  June  14,  1949. 
Index  and  Digest  of  Commission  Decisions  1-600. 


CIRCULARS  AND  FOLDERS: 

Benefit  Payments  for  Partial  Unemployment. 
Employer  Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina. 
Information  for  Workers  about    Unemployment 
Compensation. 


POSTERS: 

Employer's  Certificate  of  Coverage  and  Notice  to 
Workers. 

Notice  to  Workers — Partial  Benefits. 
Are  You  Protected? 


STATISTICAL  STUDIES  BY  BUREAU  OF 
RESEARCH  &  STATISTICS: 

(Current  series,  mimeographed.) 

Unemployment  Compensation  Trends  (monthly). 
This  report  began  with  June  1943,  and  suc- 
ceeds three  of  the  former  monthly  series 
reports : 

(1)  Summary  of  Claims  Activity 

(2)  Summary  of  Local  Office  Operations 

(3)  Number  and  Amount  of  Benefit  Pay- 
ments, by  Office  (monthly). 

(Special  Studies,  1944-1945-1946  by  Bureau  of 
Research  and  Statistics) 

Changes  in  Covered  Employment  1939-1942-1944, 
by  Industry 

Experience  Rating  in  N.  C,  1946  and  1947 

Experience  Rating  in  N.  C,  1948  (out  of  print) 

Experience  Rating  in  N.  C,  1949  and  1950 

Measurements  of  Industrialization  and  Employ- 
ment Stability 

Special  Survey  of  Veterans  Readjustment  Al- 
lowances 

Trends  in  Covered  Employment  and  Weekly 
Wages  1942-1945 

Intrastate  Labor  Shifts  1942-1945  By  Industry 

The  Effect  of  War  and  Demobilization  on  Industry 
Turn-over  in  N.  C. 

Evaluation  of  Local  Employment  Office  and  Per- 
sonnel Performance  1946 

Trends  in  Employment  and  Wages  1945-1946-1947 

The  March  of  Industrialization 

Trends  in  Manufacture  1945-1946 

Trends  in  Employment  by  Size  of  Firm  1945-1946 

Analysis  of  Claims  With  Benefit  Years  Ending  in 
1947. 

N.  C.  Employment  and  Labor  Force,  1947. 

Labor  Resources  in  North  Carolina  for  Industrial 
Development — Bimonthly  release  begin- 
ning January  15,  1951 

Employment  and  Wages  by  County  and  Industry, 
3rd  Qtr.  1947  to  1st  Qtr.  1950,  Inc. 

Labor  Market  Information  Brief  by  Industry  and 
Area 

The  Course  of  Inflation 

Economic  Disorder  Produces  Economic  Insecurity 

The  Influence  of  Industry  on  Population  Change 

Industry  Turn-Over,  1946-1947 

Research  in  the  Employment  Security  Program 

Measurements  of  Employment  Instability 


E.  S.  COMMISSION 
Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 


Official  Business 


_TO  _ 

MISC  ELIZABETH  HOUSE 
LIBRARY  COMMISSION 
RALEIGH  jj  N.  C. 

Employment  Security  Mail 

UNITED    STATES    POSTAGE    ACCOUNTED 
FOR    UNDER    ACT    OF    CONGRESS 
(Sec.  35.4  (P)    (I),  P.  L.  &  R.) 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 


VOLUME  9,  NO.  3-4 


SUMMER-FALL,  1951 


Vorth  Carolina  Manufactures  More  Tobacco  Products  Than 
\11  Other  States  Combined;  Grows  67.6%    of  Bright  Leaf 


These  are  'principal  tobacco  products  manufactured  in  North  Carolina  (See  list,  inside  cover  page.) 


PUBLISHED  BY 


— wnrrawfl  from — 

EMORY  L      :n5i7Y  LIBRARY 


v 


Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALEIGH,  N.  C. 


PAGE  66 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,  195 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 

(Formerly  The  U.C.C.  Quarterly) 

Volume  9,  Numbers  3-4  Summer-Fall,  1951 

Issued  four  times  a  year  at  Raleigh,  N.  C,  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  Marion  W.  Heiss, 
Greensboro;  C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;  Bruce  E.  Davis,  Charlotte. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Col.  A.  L.  Fletcher,  Raleigh,  chair- 
man; Mrs.  Gaston  A.  Johnson,  High  Point;  W.  B.  Horton, 
Yanceyville;  C.  P.  Clark,  Wilson;  Dr.  Alphonso  Elder,  Dur- 
ham; Corbett  Scott,  Asheboro;  L.  L.  Ray,  Raleigh;  Joel  B. 
Leighton,  Rockingham;  J.  A.  Scoggins,  Charlotte. 

HENRY   E.   KENDALL Chairman 

BROOKS  PRICE Deputy  Commissioner 

R.  FULLER  MARTIN Director 

Unemployment  Compensation  Division 

ERNEST  C.  McCRACKEN Director 

North  Carolina  State  Employment  Service  Division 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Informational  Service  Representative 

Cover  illustrations  represent  typical  North  Carolina 
industries  or  business  activities  under  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Program.  (See  next  column.) 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  G. 

CONTENTS  ~p~a~a* 

N.  C.  Tobacco  Priority — N.  C.  Tobacco  Products 66 

N.  C.  Tobacco  Products  Top  Total  of  All  Other  States 67 

Factory  Payrolls   $56,000,000;    Low   Contribution   Rates 68 

Accident  Started  N.   C.   on  Road  to  Tobacco   Supremacy 68 

N.   C.  Takes  Tobacco  Growing  and  Manufacturing  Lead,   1850-1900 69 

Period  of  'The  Trust' — Duke  and  Group  Form  American,  1890-1911 71 

Reynolds  Leads  in  Tobacco  Production  in  North   Carolina 75 

How  the  Camel  Got  on  the  Pack 79 

Ecusta   Paper   Corp.   Produces   95%   of  U.    S.   Cigarette   Papers 81 

American  Has  Large  Tobacco  Plants  in  Two  N.   C.   Cities 82 

Liggett  &  Myers  Has  Ultra  Modern  Durham  Tobacco  Plant 86 

Brown  &  Williamson  Produces  Chewing  and  Snuff  in   State 89 

Taylor  Brothers  State's  Only  Chewing  Plant  Exclusively 91 

Cigar    Production    Limited — Greensboro    Leads — El    Moro 92 

Earlier    Tobacco    Manufacturing    in    N.    C.    Communities 93 

Durham,   Winston-Salem,   Reidsville,   Greensboro,    Statesville,   Wilson, 

Rocky  Mount,  Raleigh,  Kittrell,  Yadkin,  Stokes,  Surry,  Davie  Counties 

N.   C.   Developed  Tobacco  Machinery,  equipment,    Supplies 100 

American  Machine   Produces  Tobacco  Industry   Equipment 101 

By  William  N.  McDonald,  III 
Wright   Machinery   Co.    Makes    Tobacco   Industry    Machinery 103 

By  John  L.  Moorhead 

Golden  Belt  Makes  Tobacco  Bags,  Print  Cloth  in  Durham 103 

Directory  Lists  295  N.  C.  Tobacco  Factories  in  1881-82 104 

State   College   Helps   Tobacco   Grower   in   Principal   Crop.../ 105 

By  R.  R.  Bennett  and  S.  N.  Hawks 
Marketing    Requires    Skill,    Experience ;    Specialists    Aid 106 

By  J.  H.  Cyrus 
Stabilization   Group   Holds   Price   to   90%    of   Parity 107 

By  L.  T.  Weeks 
N.  C.  Man  Started  Acre  Allotments,  Marketing  Quotas 108 

By  G.  T.  Scott 
Wider  Markets  Developed  by  Leaf  Tobacco  Exporters 109 

By  J.  C.  Lanier 
Tobacco  Associates  Expand  Flue-Cured  Weed  Markets 110 

By  M.  A.  Morgan 
Association    Regulates    Marketing    of    Flue-Cured    Tobacco 112 

By  Fred  S.  Royster 

300   Tobacco   Auction   Warehouses 112 

About  100  Leaf  Processing  Plants  in  N.  C.  Market  Towns 113 

Amendments  in   1951  Increase  Benefits,  Reduce  Taxes 114 

By  W.  D.  Holoman 
Experience  Rating  Gives  Added  Savings  of  $3,500,000 116 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper 
ESC   Seeks  Fill-in  Work  for   Seasonal  Tobacco  Workers 118 

By  Blanche  Lancaster 
N.  C.  Has  Ample  Labor  Reserves  for  Industrial  Needs ....  119 

By  Mrs.  Edith  D.  Hutchins 
Female  Employment  Should  Continue  Gain  in  N.   C,   1951 120 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn 

Bull  Durham  Plant  Capacity  Exceeds   400  Million  Bags 121 

Duke   Endowment  Aids   Health,   Education,   Religion 122 

One  Firm  Produces  Snuff;  Started  in  N.  C.  80  Years  Ago 122 

Changes — Additions — Corrections,    to    Publishing    Issue ..   122 

NOTE  :  Articles  not  credited,  with  by-line,  written   by  M.   R.   Dunnagan, 

Editor,  some  with  help  of  employer  representatives. 


H.  C.  TOBACCO  PRIORITY 

Within  her  borders  North  Carolina  has  only  thre 
cigarette  manufacturing  companies.  They  are  Rey 
nolds  in  Winston-Salem,  American  in  Durham  an. 
Reidsville,  and  Liggett  &  Myers  in  Durham.  Thes 
three  firms  in  North  Carolina  manufacture  55.2  per 
cent  of  the  nation's  cigarettes  (Based  on  tobacc 
tax  stamps  sold).  These  three  firms  manufactur 
smoking  tobacco  in  the  State.  One  of  these  and  tw 
others,  all  in  Winston-Salem,  manufacture  chewin 
tobacco — Reynolds,  Brown  &  Williamson  and  Taylol 
Brothers.  One  firm  manufactures  snuff — Brown  J 
Williamson.  But,  within  this  State  these  five  firm! 
manufacture  34.8  percent  of  the  nation's  smokinl 
and  chewing  tobacco  and  snuff.  One  firm,  El  Morj 
in  Greensboro,  manufactures  cigars  in  North  Caro- 
lina (with  three  or  four  other  firms  with  less  thai 
eight  employees) .  Cigar  stamp  taxes  in  North  Care 
lina  amount  to  only  one-third  of  one  percent  of  thi 
nation's  total. 

Yet,  with  such  a  small  amount  of  cigars  and  a  re][ 
atively  small  amount  of  snuff,  North  Carolina  manuj 
facturers  produce  enough  cigarettes,  smoking  an 
chewing  tobacco  to  give  this  State  the  distinction  oi 
manufacturing  more  tobacco  products  than  all  ol 
the  other  47  states  combined — 52.8  percent  of  th 
nation's  total.    Last  fiscal  year  North  Carolina  mar 
ufacturers    paid    Uncle    Sam    $701,593,907.64    foS 
stamps  to  place  on   its  tobacco   products,   agains 
$1,328,464,346.23  paid  by  all  manufacturers  in  a 
of  the  48  states  combined.   This  all  refers  to  tobacc 
products  sold  within  the  boundaries  of  the  Unite 
States.     Products  sold  in  foreign  countries  do  ncL 
require  the  stamp  tax. 

And,  North  Carolina  grows  more  than  two-thirdJ 
67.6  percent,  of  all  the  bright  leaf  grown  in  th 
United  States — the  favorite  type  for  cigarettes  an 
an  ingredient  for  chewing  and  smoking  tobaccos. 

Verily — the  Golden  Weed  is  a  broad  Golde  j 
Stream  in  North  Carolina's  economy. 

FRONT  COVER  PICTURE 

N.   C.   TOBACCO  PRODUCTS 

North  Carolina  produces  a  majority  of  the  popular  branch  j 
of  cigarettes,  chewing  and  smoking  tobaccos  and  other  t<  j 
bacco  products  including  snuff  and  cigars.  The  front  pag  \ 
picture  shows  samples  of  the  principal  brands  manufactui  j 
ed  in  this  State  as  included  in  the  following  list: 

R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co. — Cigarettes — Camel,  Cavalieiil 
Smoking  Tobaccos — Prince  Albert,  George  Washington,  Oiil 
Advertiser,  Stud,  and  Top;  Chewing  Tobaccos — Cash  Valv  I 
(scrap) — plug — Brown's  Mule,  Days  Work,  Apple  Sun  Cull 
ed,  Reyynolds1  Natural  Leaf,  Reynolds'  Sun  Cured,  Cujjl 
Schnapps,  Honey  Cut,  Top — twists — Winesap,  Micky  Twisll 
Strater's  Natural  Leaf  Twist. 

American  Tobacco  Co. — Cigarettes — Lucky  Strike,  Pal  I 
Mall,  Herbert  Tareyton,  Johnnie  Walker,  Sweet  Caporal  j 
Omar,  Lord  Salisbury,  Melachrino,  Sovereign,  One  Elever  I 
Smoking  Tobaccos — Bull  Durham,  Drum,  Victory,  Marylanj  | 
Club. 

Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co. — Cigarettes — Cliesterfiel<J| 
Patima,  Piedmont,  Homerun,  Picayune,  Coupon;  Smokin  1 
Tobaccos — Duke's  Mixture,  Country  Gentleman  and  BuffaL  1 

Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Co. — Chewing  Tobaccos-  I 
Bloodhound,  Red  Juice,  Sun  Cured;  Snuff — Tube  Rose. 

Taylor  Bros. — Chewing  Tobaccos — Taylor's  Natural  Lea  J 
Taylor  Made,  Black  Maria,  Red  Coon,  Ripe  Peaches,  Peac \\ 
&  Honey,  Bull  of  the  Woods,  Bohannon's  Favorite,  Foo  I 
prints,  Lucky  Joe,  Ram's  Horn,  Taylor's  Best  and  Old  Taylc  j 
Twist.    (Some  by  tags  and  brands  only). 

El  Moro  Cigar  Company — Cigars — El  Moro,  El-Rees-S  I 
Spanish  Maid  Crooks,  Robert  Fulton. 

(Arranged  by  Mabel  F.  LaBarr — Photo  by  Robert  M.  <3 
Bruyne). 


UMMER-FALL,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  67 


N.  C.  Tobacco  Products  Top  Total  of  All  Other  States 


North  Carolina,  again,  has  achieved  the  enviable 
istinction  of  manufacturing  more  tobacco  products 
lan  all  of  the  other  47  states  in  the  Nation  combin- 
I.  This  superiority  is  indicated  in  the  amount  of 
samp  sales  made  by  Uncle  Sam  in  the  fiscal  year 
nded  June  30,  1950,  and  includes  only  that  part  of 
le  manufactured  tobacco  products  which  are  sold 
l  the  United  States.  Tobacco  products  sold  in  for- 
ign  countries  do  not  require  the  Federal  stamp  and 
re  not  subject  to  the  Federal  tax. 

North  Carolina  manufacturers  paid  Uncle  Sam 
701,593,907.64  for  the  fiscal  year  ended  June  30, 
950.  Manufacturers  throughout  the  nation,  includ- 
lg  those  in  North  Carolina,  paid  $1,328,464,346.23, 
y  which  it  is  seen  that  North  Carolina  paid  more 
nan  52.8  percent  of  the  total  amount  paid  in  the 
Inited  States.  This  also  shows  that  North  Carolina 
roducers  paid  nearly  $75,000,000  more  than  the 
ther  47  states  combined,  their  total  being  $626,- 
70,438.57.  (The  $700,721,441.14  shown  for  North 
larolina  in  the  table  below  which  gives  52.2  percent 
f  the  nation's  total  was  arrived  at  by  combining 
everal  kinds  of  tobacco  taxes,  but  evidently  does  not 
iclude  some  small  items  ($772,466.50)  which  shows 
p  in  the  total.) 

UGARETTES  PRINCIPAL  ITEM 

Cigarettes,  of  course,  made  the  big  item  for  North 
Carolina  in  stamp  taxes  last  fiscal  year.  This  State's 


ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 

Information  has  been  secured  for  this  issue  from  many  sources,  including 
few  copyrighted  publications,  from  which  special  permission  has  been  se- 
jred,  as  well  as  newspapers,  individuals  and  other  sources.  Credit  in  many 
f  the  items  is  given  those  who  supplied  the  information.  Thanks  are  extended 
i  all  who  have  contributed  and  cooperated. 

THE    BRIGHT-TOBACCO    INDUSTRY,    1860-1929,   by    Nannie    May   Tilley, 
opyright  1948,  The  University  of  North  Carolina  Press,  Chapel  Hill. 

HISTORY  OF  DURHAM,  by  Dr.  W.  K.   Boyd,  Copyright,   1925,   Duke  Uni- 
srsity  Press,  Durham. 

THE  STORY  OF  TOBACCO  IN  AMERICA,  by  Joseph  C.  Robert,  Copyright 
949,  Alfred  A.  Knopf,  Inc.,  New  York. 

TOBACCO  TYCOON— THE  STORY  OF  JAMES  BUCHANAN   DUKE,  Copy- 
ight  by  John  K.  Winkler,  1942,  Random  House,  New  York. 

THE  TOBACCO  KINGDOM,  by  Joseph  Clarke  Robert,  Copyright  1938,  Duke 
niversity  Press,  Durham. 

Reynolds   Feature  Articles,   by  Chester  S.   Davis,   in   May  7  and    14,    1950, 
.sues  of  Winston-Salem  Journal  and  Sentinel. 

Edwin   Gill,   Collector    Internal    Revenue,    Dist.   of   N.   C,    Greensboro,   and 
harles  J.  Valaer,  Deputy  Commissioner,   Bureau  of  Internal  Revenue,  Wash-  ■, 
igton,  D.  C.  j  f. 


three  big  manufacturers  paid  Uncle  Sam  $685,816,- 
639.11,  or  55.2  percent  of  the  national  total  of  $1,- 
242,844,931.81  in  cigarette  stamp  taxes.  All  of  the 
other  47  states  paid  44.8  percent  of  the  nation's  total, 
or  $557,028,292.70.  (This  is  for  regular  sized  cigar- 
ettes, not  including  a  negligible  amount — $5,861.43 
in  the  nation — for  over-sized  cigarettes) . 

In  smoking  and  chewing  tobaccos  and  snuff  (lump- 
ed together  for  tax  purposes) ,  North  Carolina  manu- 
facturers produce  more  than  one-third  of  the  na- 
tion's total,  stamp  taxes  amounting  last  year  to 
$14,762,680.30.  This  is  34.8  per  cent  of  the  nation's 
total— $42,457,282.20.  Since  this  State  has  only  one 
snuff  manufacturer,  a  relatively  small  percentage  of 
the.  total,  the  percentages  of  smoking  and  chewing 
tobacco  presumably  are  larger  than  for  all  three. 

And,  North  Carolina  maintains  this  supremacy 
with  a  very  minor  contribution  from  cigar  stamp 
taxes,  which,  nation-wide,  is  almost  as  large  as  smok- 
ing, chewing  and  snuff  combined.  North  Carolina 
cigar  manufacturers,  with  only  one  firm  of  any  size, 
paid  only  $141,869.73  in  cigar  stamp  taxes  last  fiscal 
year,  which  is  almost  exactly  one-third  of  one  per- 
cent of  the  nation's  total  of  $42,457,282.20. 

North  Carolina  has  manufactured  more  than  half 
of  the  nation's  tobacco  products  before.  In  1930, 
this  State  paid  56.9  percent  of  the  nation's  stamp 
taxes.  In  1935  the  percentage  of  the  nation's  total 
was  50.2.  And,  although  records  are  readily  avail- 
able to  us  in  5-year  periods  only,  the  total  must 
have  been  above  50  percent  for  North  Carolina  for 
other  years  before  and  during  that  five-year  period, 
1935-40.  But  the  ratio  dropped  to  the  upper  40's 
for  a  few  years.  Then  it  went  ahead  of  the  nation 
again,  52.8  percent  last  fiscal  year. 

START  FROM  SCRATCH,  1910 

Before  the  turn  of  the  century  North  Carolina  was 
producing  a  normal  share  of  the  nation's  cigarettes. 
In  1900  this  State  produced  8.7  percent  of  the  na- 
tion's" stamp' tax  revenue,  or  $312,745.25.  The  per- 
centage continued  to  gain,  but  the  national  produc- 
tion dropped  in  the  next  decade.  In  1910  North 
Carolina  manufacturers  paid  only  $3,510.00  in  cig- 


robacco  Products  manufactured  in  North  Carolina,  including  cigars,  cigarettes,  chewing  and  snuff,  total  for  State,  total  for 
lation,  and  State's  percentage  of  nation's  total  from  1900  to  1950  (fiscal  years)  at  five  year  intervals  as  compiled  from  annual 
eports  of  the  Commissioner  of  Internal  Revenue. 


Year  Cigars  Cigarettes  Chewing-Snuff  Total-N.  C.  Total-U.  S.                   N.  C.  %  of  U.  S. 

900 $        51,309.79  $                312,745.25  $             4,798,529.80           S  5,162,584.84            S  59,355,084.27  8.7 

905 48,418.93  96,444.00  4,113,332.43  4,258,496.61  45,659,910.50  9.3 

910 41,478.45  3,510.00  5,728,317.66  5,773,306.11  58,118,457.03  9.9 

915 45,249.01  4,541,250.00  8,436,626.52  13,023,125.53  79,957,373.54  16.3 

920 208,754.51  86,296.125.00  21,637,787.40  108,142,666.91  295,809,355.44  36.6 

325 108,357.68  125,289,858.54  21,278,444.54  146,735,190.76  345,247,210.96  42.5 

330 26,103.88  233,164,412.19  23,100,937.41  256,332,770.98  450,339,060.50  56.9 

)35 52,717.40  209,163,779.03  21,497,622.75  230,773,231.58  459,178,625.46  50.2 

)40.__ 76,523.78  262,611,793.80  22,484,147.75  285,184,784.53  608,518,443.59  46.9 

145 140,676.19  399,952,771.58  20,754,842.09  420,848,709.86  932,144,822.32  45.1 

'50 141,869.73  £85,816,639.11  14,762,680.30  700,721,441.14  1,328,464,346.23  52.2 

Note :    Cigars  are  those  weighing  more  than  three  pounds  per  1000 — smaller  cigars  negligible ;   cigarettes  are  those  weighing  not  more  than  three  pounds  per 

)00 — larger  cigarettes  negligible.  Small  cigars  and  large  cigarettes  included  in  totals. 


PAGE  68 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


arette  stamp  taxes.  The  Federal  rate  of  taxes  had 
been  reduced  and  that  was  a  period  of  low  produc- 
tion, yet  this  State's  manufacturers  paid  9.9  percent 
of  the  nation's  total  that  year.  In  1915  a  huge  jump 
was  shown.  N.  C.  cigarette  taxes  went  above  $4,- 
500,000.  Camels  had  made  their  appearance  and 
Chesterfields  and  Lucky  Strikes  were  then  being 
produced  in  the  State. 

The  jump  from  1915  to  1920  was  from  $4,540,000 
to  $86,000,000.  In  the  30  years  from  1920  to  1950, 
the  increase  was  more  than  150-fold  in  cigarette 
stamp  taxes  in  North  Carolina. 

On  the  agricultural  end,  North  Carolina  farmers 
grow  more  than  two-thirds  of  the  bright  leaf  (67.6 


percent  last  year)  which  is  the  principal  ingredient 
of  cigarettes  and  an  important  part  of  smoking  and 
chewing  tobaccos. 

Virginia,  still,  is  North  Carolina's  closest  competi 
tor.  Last  year  Virginia  paid  Uncle  Sam  $321,912, 
712.38  in  tobacco  stamp  taxes,  less  than  half  of  North 
Carolina's  $701,593,907.64.  Kentucky,  last  year 
paid  $189,878,389.65  in  stamp  taxes,  more  than  hall 
of  Virginia's  amount. 

In  fact,  the  three  states  of  North  Carolina,  Vir- 
ginia and  Kentucky  paid  last  year  $1,213,385,009.67 
or  91.3  percent  of  the  nation's  entire  tobacco  stamj 
tax  of  $1,328,464,346.23. 


Factory  Payrolls  $56,000,000;  Low  Contribution  Rates 


Six  North  Carolina  tobacco  manufacturers  paid 
their  employees  a  total  of  $55,924,354.93  for  work 
in  this  State  in  1950,  or  an  average  weekly  wage  of 
$51.56  to  the  average  of  20,859  workers  employed. 
These  include  Reynolds,  manufacturing  cigarettes, 
chewing  and  smoking  tobaccos ;  American,  producing 
cigarettes  and  smoking  tobaccos;  Liggett  &  Myers, 
making  cigarettes  and  smoking  tobaccos;  Brown  & 
Williamson,  chewing  tobacco  and  snuff;  Taylor 
Brothers,  chewing  tobacco  only,  and  El  Moro  Cigar 
Co.,  cigars  only. 

The  figures  mean  that  the  average  weekly  wage 
of  tobacco  workers  of  $51.56  is  12.2  percent  higher 
than  the  average  weekly  wage  of  all  North  Carolina 
workers  covered  by  the  State's  Employment  Security 
Law  which  last  year  was  $46.80. 

These  figures,  however,  are  a  bit  confusing,  due 
to  reporting  methods  of  the  various  firms  involved. 
One  or  two  companies  have  their  tobacco  buying 
firm,  so  that  no  buying  and  processing  workers  are 
included  in  their  reports  to  the  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission.  Other  large  firms  count  their 
processing  workers  with  manufacturing  workers. 


The  processing  workers   (stemming  and  redrying) 
are  seasonal  workers,  employed  less  than  six  month;  I 
in  the  year.    So,  at  a  guess,  probably  an  average  o: ! 
10  percent  of  the  average  number  of  the  worker.';] 
reported  are  seasonal  workers. 

Seasonal  workers  also  influence  the  rate  of  contrilj 
butions  paid  to  the  Commission  under  the  Employe:  I 
Experience  Rating  Plan.  Many  of  them  file  claim;) 
for  unemployment  benefits  when  the  season  ends: 
thus  increasing  the  amount  of  benefits  paid  and  tend  I 
ing  to  increase  the  rates  of  contributions  the  tobacajj 
firms  are  required  to  pay  under  the  formula  used.  I 

The  six  tobacco  firms  last  year  had  taxable  pay  1 
rolls,  under  the  E.S.  Law,  of  $49,909,753.85  (amoun  I 
of  salaries  and  wages  above  $3,000.00  a  year  is  no  f 
subject  to  the  tax)    and  paid  to  the   CommissioJ 
$659,474.02.   This  is  at  a  composite  rate  of  1.3  per 
cent  of  payrolls,  which  is  appreciably  lower  thai: 
the  average  1950  State-wide  rate  on  all  liable  em 
ployers  of  1.59.     So,  even  with  the  payments  tfj 
seasonal  workers  during  off-season  periods,  thest 
tobacco  manufacturers  have  earned  a   rate  lowe[ 
than  the  State  average. 


Accident  Started  N.  C.  on  Road  to  Tobacco  Supremacy 


An  accident  started  a  series  of  several  events 
which  allowed  North  Carolina  to  surpass  Virginia, 
both  in  growing  and  in  manufacturing  tobacco,  thus 
becoming  a  national  leader  in  growing  bright  leaf 
and  in  manufacturing  tobacco  products.  Virginia, 
with  her  aristocratic  plantation  owners,  had  domi- 
nated tobacco  growing  from  the  founding  of  James- 
town, in  which  laws  were  passed  prohibiting  citizens 
from  growing  tobacco  in  the  streets  and  on  public 
lots.  The  Albemarle  section  of  northeastern  North 
Carolina  was  known  to  Virginians  as  Rogue's  Har- 
bor and  the  Virginia  Colonial  Assembly  enacted  laws 
which  prohibited  shipment  of  the  so-called  inferior 
tobaccos  from  this  area  into  Virginia — except  in  ,. 


payment  of  debts  owed  Virginians  by  North  Car(j 
lina  growers.  This  continued  until  an  accident  star* 
ed  turning  the  tide. 

This  accident  occurred  in  1856  on  the  farm  c 
Elisha  Slade  in  Caswell  County,  five  miles  north  c 
Yanceyville  and  only  some  10  miles  from  the  Virgini; 
line.  Stephen,  a  Slade  slave,  was  curing  tobaccj 
in  the  old  manner  by  maintaining  a  wood  fire  on  trJ 
ground  in  the  tobacco  barn.  He  fell  asleep  and  tti 
fire  burned  down  to  a  few  coals.  The  wood  was  tcj 
wet  to  catch  readily,  so  Stephen  ran  to  the  charcoij 
pit  at  the  nearby  blacksmith  shop,  got  a  sack  (| 
charcoal  and  put  it  on  the  fire.  It  caught  readilj 
and  he  continued  to  use  it.    He  and  his  owner  noticej 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  69 


;hat  the  tobacco  was  curing  up  a  bright  yellow  in- 
stead of  the  usual  dark  brown  color.  They  were 
leased  and  continued  using  charcoal. 

3RIGHT  LEAF  BEGINNING 

That  was  the  beginning  of  the  bright  leaf  and  gave 
ts  name  to  the  Bright  Leaf  Belt.  In  half  a  dozen 
>r  more  North  Carolina  counties  and  two  or  three  in 
/irginia  in  the  next  few  years,  tobacco  curing  was 
•evolutionized  by  this  method.  Later,  of  course, 
lues  were  built  in  tobacco  barns  to  prevent  smoke 
rom  reaching  the  tobacco  leaves.  Previously  all 
obacco  had  turned  dark,  was  heavy  and  gummy 
md  was  grown  in  rich  dark  soil.  It  was  found  that 
obacco  grown  on  the  poor  sandy  clay  soil  in  North 
Carolina  lent  itself  readily  to  the  new  curing  process 
,nd  a  brighter  and  lighter  leaf  was  produced.  It 
vas  also  found  that  the  use  of  commercial  fertilizer 
>n  the  poorer  land  gave  the  tobacco  plant  the  plant 
ood  needed  for  this  type  of  tobacco. 

It  was  then  that  North  Carolina  began  wresting 
rom  Virginia  her  long  held  supremacy  in  tobacco 
Towing.  Other  improvements,  such  as  the  use  of 
anvas  over  the  tobacco  plant  beds  and  finally  prim- 
ng  tobacco,  that  is,  stripping  it  from  the  stalk  as 
t  ripens  in  the  field,  by  which  means  lower  degrees 
f  temperature  would  cure  the  leaf  and  the  stem 
without  having  to  cure  the  stalk,  added  impetus  to 
obacco  growing. 

Along  with  improvements  in  handling  leaf  tobacco 
ame  the  urge  of  many  growers  to  transform  their 
2af  into  chewing  and  smoking  products.  Within 
0  years  of  the  accident  which  gave  bright  leaf,  at 
jast  350  factories  were  or  had  been  in  operation  in 
Torth  Carolina.  In  fact,  a  directory  of  manufac- 
turers, compiled  in  1881-82  and  published  in  the 
Jnited  States  Tobacco  Journal,  listed  295  individual 
aanufacturers.  It  seems  certain  that  fully  400  dif- 
erent  firms  had  been  engaged  in  tobacco  manufac- 
turing during  the  last  half  of  the  last  century  and  a 
ew  years  at  the  beginning  of  the  present  century. 

ION SOLID  A  TION— DISSOLUTION 

Around  1900,  following  the  organization  of  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.  by  James  B.  Duke  and  other 
arge  manufacturers,  the  era  of  consolidation  and 
limination  was  ushered  in.  Promising  firms  and 
rands  of  tobacco  were  purchased  by  the  larger 
rms,  practically  all  of  which  in  the  process  became 


units  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  These  included 
W.  Duke  &  Sons  Co.  and  Blackwell  Tobacco  Co.  in 
Durham,  the  F.  R.  Penn  Tobacco  Co.  in  Reidsville 
and  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  in  Winston- 
Salem.  These  and  other  larger  firms  also  had  their 
periods  of  buying  up  smaller  firms  and  brands  in 
their  areas. 

As  the  result  of  the  dissolution  of  the  American 
Tobacco  Co.  in  1911  by  the  Supreme  Court  of  the 
United  States  on  the  ground  that  it  was  a  combina- 
tion in  restraint  of  trade  in  violation  of  the  Sherman 
Anti-Trust  Law,  three  large  tobacco  corporations 
were  established  in  North  Carolina  and  are  still 
growing  and  prospering.  These  are  the  American 
Tobacco  Co.,  with  plants  in  Durham  and  Reidsville ; 
Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.,  with  plants  in  Dur- 
ham, and  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  with  all  of  its 
manufacturing  operations  centered  in  Winston- 
Salem.  One  relatively  large  firm,  Brown  &  William- 
son Tobacco  Co.,  survived  until  1927,  when  it  was 
purchased  by  the  British-American  Tobacco  Co.  and 
was  reorganized  as  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco 
Corp.  It  still  manufactures  several  chewing  tobacco 
brands  and  snuff  in  Winston-Salem,  but  its  cigarette 
and  smoking  tobacco  activities  have  been  transfer- 
red to  plants  in  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  Petersburg,  Va. 

TAYLOR  BROS.  SURVIVES 

The  only  surviving  independent  tobacco  manu- 
facturing firm  in  North  Carolina,  other  than  a  few 
cigar  plants,  is  Taylor  Brothers,  Inc.,  of  Winston- 
Salem,  which  continues  to  manufacture  plug  and 
twist  chewing  tobacco  exclusively.  This  firm  has 
bought  up  about  a  dozen  or  more  smaller  tobacco 
firms.  A  few  other  firms  weathered  the  competi- 
tion until  recent  years,  including  F.  M.  Bohannan 
&  Co.,  purchased  in  1942,  and  Whitaker-Harvey  To- 
bacco Co.,  purchased  in  1912,  both  by  Taylor  Bros. ; 
R.  P.  Richardson,  Jr.,  &  Co.,  Reidsville,  purchased 
in  1926,  and  J.  G.  Flynt  Tobacco  Co.,  purchased  in 
1923,  both  by  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Co. ; 
J.  H.  McElwee,  Statesville,  which  manufactured 
smoking  tobacco  until  around  1933  when  the  firm 
suspended  operations;  L.  Ash,  Statesville,  manufac- 
tured chewing  tobacco  45  years  until  1935  and  the 
firm  is  still  manufacturing  by  contract  now  outside 
the  State.  Its  popular  surviving  brand  is  Full 
Bloom. 


N.  C.  Takes  Tobacco  Growing  and  Manufacturing  Lead 

1850-1900 


For  many  years  during  the  first  half  of  the  19th 
entury  Virginia  was  the  principal  tobacco  growing 
nd  manufacturing  state.  In  only  a  few  places  was 
obacco  manufacturing  started  in  North  Carolina 
»y  1850.  Milton,  within  a  few  miles  of  the  Virginia 
ine  in  northeastern  Caswell  County,  and  Henderson, 


some  25  miles  south  of  the  Virginia  line,  are  two 
points  mentioned  around  the  middle  of  the  century 
as  having  tobacco  manufacturing  plants.  Before 
1850  and  for  several  years  thereafter  numbers  of 
farmers  established  small  plants  to  manufacture 
their  own  tobacco  and  sometimes  that  of  neighbors. 


PAGE  70 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,  1951 


Before  and  after  the  middle  of  the  century  many 
growers  would  prepare  their  own  chewing  tobacco 
in  crude  but  effective  manner.  They  would  take  a 
green  maple,  poplar,  birch,  elm  and  other  types  of 
logs  containing  a  sweet  sap,  bore  numerous  auger 
holes  in  them,  fill  these  holes  with  leaf  tobacco,  tamp 
it  in  close  and  drive  a  blunt-nosed  peg  into  the  top 
of  the  hole,  packing  the  tobacco  still  closer.  After 
a  month  or  two,  the  log  would  be  split  open  and 
these  hunks  of  sap-sweetened  tobacco  taken  out  and 
stored  for  the  family  chewing. 

Around  1850  small  factories  began  to  operate  in 
villages  and  rural  areas  and  increased  in  number 
during  the  decade.  Operation  of  the  North  Carolina 
Railroad  in  the  middle  1850s  gave  impetus  to  the 
infant  industry  providing  a  method  of  shipping  in 
leaf  tobacco  and  shipping  out  the  tobacco  products. 
The  war  halted  this  activity  but  also  increased  the 
demand  for  tobacco  products  for  the  men  in  military 
service.  A  small  plant  in  Durham,  robbed  of  smok- 
ing tobacco  by  northern  soldiers,  recovered  rapidly 
when  these  same  soldiers  ordered  this  type  of  smok- 
ing tobacco  after  they  had  reached  home.  By  1870 
numbers  of  small  rural  plants  had  been  established 
for  manufacturing  the  principal  product,  chewing 
tobacco. 

CRUDE  PLANTS— WAGON  SALES 

The  machinery  used  in  that  period  was  crude  and 
the  process  was  slow.  The  leaf  tobacco  was  flavored 
with  a  mixture  of  licorice,  molasses  and  sometimes 
heavy  sugar  concentrates  in  water  with  which  the 
leaf  was  sprinkled  or  into  which  it  was  dipped.  The 
leaf  was  then  stemmed  and  rolled  into  lumps  which 
were  capped  with  bright  unsweetened  leaves.  These 
lumps  were  spread  on  dryers  and  dried,  usually  in 
the  sun  or  in  a  dry  house  by  fire  on  cloudy  or  wet 
days.  They  were  then  packed  away  to  allow  them 
to  come  to  order.  Then  the  lumps  were  placed  in 
wooden  frames  with  wooden  sinkers  and  pressure 
was  applied,  usually  by  the  screw  or  lever  process, 
later  by  hydraulic  pressure,  to  flatten  them  and  pro- 
duce the  plug.  These  plugs  were  then  packed  in 
wooden  boxes  and  pressure  was  again  applied.  The 
boxes  remained  under  pressure  for  a  period  to  pre- 
vent puffing  and  then  were  nailed  up.  After  a  few 
weeks  they  were  ready  for  the  market.  Because 
these  wooden  frames  would  split  and  get  out  of 
shape  under  pressure,  steel  frames  with  flat  metal 
surfaces  on  the  sinkers  were  developed  and  proved 
much  more  satisfactory.  Hydraulic  presses  were 
also  developed,  making  the  prizing  process  easier. 

Before  the  days  of  railroads  and  even  afterward 
for  several  years,  the  principal  method  of  market- 
ing was  by  team  and  covered  wagon.  A  load  of  this 
boxed  tobacco,  1,000  to  1,500  pounds  usually,  was 
stamped  and  loaded.  The  salesman,  with  a  boy  as 
driver-cook,  started  out  and  would  call  on  rural 
merchants  along  the  route.  These  wagons  were 
equipped  with  feed  boxes  for  feeding  and  buckets 
for  watering  the  stock.  In  the  front  of  the  wagon 
was  a  provision  box,  also  used  as  a  seat  for  the 


salesman  and  the  driver.  It  contained  sections  for 
salt,  sugar,  flour,  meal,  skillets,  tin  plates  and  cups, 
knives  and  forks,  along  with  meat,  eggs  and  other 
edibles.  The  food  could  be  replenished  at  stores 
along  the  route.  When  night  came,  the  wagon  would 
be  pulled  to  a  campsite  on  the  side  of  the  road,  the 
horses  fed  and  watered,  and  the  driver  prepared  thef 
evening  meal.  The  two  would  sleep  on  quilts  on 
top  of  the  load  of  tobacco. 

FORGES  AHEAD  OF  VIRGINIA 

As  a  result  of  North  Carolina's  breaking  Vir 
ginia's  monopoly  in  growing  tobacco  by  the  discov- 
ery of  the  bright  leaf  method  of  curing  tobacco 
North  Carolina  also  made  extensive  inroads  in  to- 
bacco manufacturing  and  finally  forged  ahead  oi 
Virginia.  It  is  a  bit  ironic  that  many  of  the  Nortr 
Carolina  leaders  in  tobacco  manufacturing  came  tc 
this  State  from  Virginia.  These  included  Reynolds 
Penn  and  many  others.  In  Durham  the  Dukes  wert 
native  sons,  but  in  the  main,  Virginians  blazed  the 
tobacco  manufacturing  trail  in  North  Carolina. 

Early  factories  were  established  in  the  first  tiei 
of  North  Carolina  counties  south  of  the  Virginit 
line.  These  included  Surry,  Stokes,  Rockingham 
Caswell,  Person,  Granville  and  Vance.  The  seconc 
tier  in  which  the  larger  plants  were  established  in 
eluded  Durham,  Orange,  Alamance,  Guilford,  For 
syth,  Yadkin  and  even  Wilkes.  Later  manufacturer! 
established  plants  in  Wilson,  Wake,  Davie,  Rowan 
Iredell  and  went  on  westward  into  Catawba,  Cald 
well,  and  Buncombe  counties.  Only  a  few  plant; 
were  ever  established  outside  of  these  counties. 

By  1881-82  North  Carolina  had  listed  295  tobacc< 
manufacturing  plants.  This  listing  was  made  b} 
Oscar  Hammerstein,  editor  of  the  United  States  To 
bacco  Journal. 

This  directory  with  corrections  and  counties  ia 
which  the  plants  were  located  in  "The  Bright! 
Tobacco  Industry,  1860-1929"  by  Nannie  May  Tille| 
and  published  by  the  University  of  North  Carolin;i 
Press,  shows  many  interesting  facts.  It  reveals  thai 
these  295  factories  were  located  in  35  North  Carot 
lina  counties.  Davie  County  topped  the  list  with  2!j 
factories.  Forsyth  and  Rockingham  had  27  eachj 
Surry  and  Vance  had  25  each,  while  Granville  ant 
Stokes  had  22  each.  In  order  Yadkin  had  16  plants 
Durham  12,  Catawba  10,  Iredell  9,  Orange,  Persois 
and  Buncombe,  7  each ;  Guilford  and  Rowan  6  eachj 
Wilkes  5,  Mecklenburg,  Alamance  and  Caswell,  1 
each ;  Cleveland  and  Caldwell,  3  each ;  Franklin  an! 
Wake,  2  each ;  while  one  plant  each  was  located  in  thj 
following  counties :  Cumberland,  Robeson,  New  Harj 
over,  Davidson,  Randolph,  Halifax,  Craven,  Her1 
ford,  Lenoir,  Greene,  and  Rutherford. 

PLANTS  INCREASE— DECREASE 

It  is  entirely  possible  that  in  the  20  years  whic 
followed  that  this  number  reached  500.  Certain! 
it  must  have  exceeded  400.  This  is  indicated  by  th 
facts  as  given  for  one  county.  When  this  director 
was  compiled,  Forsyth  County  was  shown  to  hav 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  71 


lad  27  factories.  In  1894  another  directory  showed 
;hat  Winston-Salem  alone  had  37  and  this  list  does 
lot  include  the  names  of  some  few  dozen  factories 
mown  to  have  been  operating  in  the  period  following 
;he  time  of  that  enumeration.  It  is  evident,  there- 
fore, that  Winston-Salem  had  between  80  and  85  fac- 
;ories  up  to  the  period  around  the  turn  of  the  century, 
ncluding  combinations  and  successors. 

After  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  was  organized 
md  began  its  policy  of  buying  up  or  eliminating 
smaller  plants  by  competition,  the  number  began  to 


dwindle.  Other  prosperous  manufacturers  followed 
a  similar  policy.  The  result  is  that  North  Carolina 
has  only  three  cigarette  manufacturing  firms  in 
three  North  Carolina  cities,  two  smoking  and  chew- 
ing tobacco  firms  in  two  of  the  same  cities  and  only 
two  cigar  manufacturing  firms  that  have  as  many 
as  eight  employees  while  45  tobacco  processing  firms 
are  in  operation  in  North  Carolina.  Many  firms, 
however,  have  grown  to  such  an  extent  that  North 
Carolina  took  the  lead  from  Virginia  about  half  a 
century  ago  and  has  continued  to  hold  that  suprem- 
acy against  any  state  in  the  nation. 


Period  of  'The  Trust' — Duke  and  Group  Form  American 

1890-1911 


After  extensive  conferences  arranged  by  James 
3uchanan  Duke  with  other  leading  tobacco  manufac- 
;urers  in  the  nation,  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  was 
>rganized  late  in  1889  and  was  incorporated  under 
Sew  Jersey  laws  as  of  January  31,  1890.  For 
;wenty-one  years,  until  its  dissolution  by  order  of 
;he  United  States  Supreme  Court,  the  American  To- 
Dacco  Co.  dominated  tobacco  manufacturing  and  dis- 
;ribution  throughout  the  United  States.  The  cor- 
poration was  capitalized  at  $25,000,000.  This  cor- 
joration  acquired  all  of  the  plants,  brands,  good  will, 
chattels  and  other  interests  owned  by  the  individual 
mits  in  the  consolidation. 

Ten  individuals  worked  out  the  consolidation 
3lans.  These  included  James  B.  Duke,  Benjamin  N. 
Duke  and  George  W.  Watts  of  W.  Duke  Sons  &  Co. ; 
Lewis  Ginter,  John  Polk  and  George  Arients  of  Allen 
&  Ginter ;  F.  S.  Kinney  and  W.  H.  Butler  of  Kinney 
robacco  Co.;  William  S.  Kimbell  of  W.  S.  Kimbell 
&  Co.  and  Charles  G.  Emery  of  Goodwin  &  Co.  J.  B. 
Duke  was  elected  president,  John  Polk  and  W.  S. 
Kimbell,  vice-presidents,  W.  H.  Butler,  secretary, 
and  Charles  G.  Emery,  treasurer.  When  New  York 
iawyers  advised  that  certain  legal  proposals  could 
not  be  accomplished,  Mr.  Duke  advised  that  he  would 
bring  a  lawyer  to  New  York  who  could  accomplish 
them.  This  man  was  Williamson  Whitehead  Fuller, 
Durham  attorney,  who  handled  legal  details  for  the 
corporation  from  the  beginning  and  for  20-odd  years 
afterwards. 

DUKE'S  MODEST  BEGINNING 

J.  B.  Duke,  founder  and  president  of  the  Ameri- 
can Tobacco  Co.,  through  his  first  21  years  as  presi- 
dent, developed  into  the  greatest  tobacco  manufac- 
turing, distributing  and  organizing  genius  that  has 
moved  across  the  American  stage.  James  B.  Duke 
was  born  December  13,  1856,  on  the  farm  operated 
by  his  father,  Washington  Duke,  a  few  miles  north 
of  Durham.  He  had  one  older  half  brother,  Brodie 
Lawrence  Duke,  born  September  17,  1846,  and  an 
older  full  brother,  Benjamin  Newton  Duke,  born 
early  in  1855.    Washington  Duke's  second  wife  died 


while  her  children  were  young  and  they  were  brought 
up  by  their  Aunt  Elizabeth  Roney. 

When  Washington  Duke,  45,  returned  from  service 
in  the  War  Between  the  States,  he  had  a  300  acre 
farm,  two  blind  mules,  a  quantity  of  leaf  tobacco  and 
50/  in  good  money.  He  gathered  his  children  to- 
gether, sold  his  farm  and  rented  a  part  of  it  on 
which,  to  raise  a  crop.  .  Meanwhile,  he  thrashed  out 
his  leaf  tobacco,  sifted,  sacked  and  carried  it  by 
wagon  on  a  trip  to  the  eastern  part  of  the  State.  He 
bartered  the  tobacco  successfully,  returned  home,  and 
decided  to  continue  and  enlarge  his  production.  In 
1866  he  manufactured  15,000  pounds,  selling  it  at 
30/  to  40/'  a  pound.  Six  years  later,  in  1872,  he  and 
his  sons  produced  125,000  pounds  of  tobacco. 

At  14  years  of  age,  in  1870,  J.  B.  Duke  was  super- 
intendent of  the  home  factory.  He  entered  Guilford 
College,  but  soon  afterwards  stopped.  Later  he  at- 
tended Eastman  National  School  of  Business  at 
Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  completing  the  bookkeeping 
and  accounting  courses  in  six  months  when  18  years 
old.  He  returned  home  and  installed  a  double  entry 
bookkeeping  method  in  the  plant.  In  1874  Washing- 
ton Duke  and  two  sons  moved  to  Durham  and  built 
a  new  tobacco  factory.  The  older,  Brodie,  who  had 
started  producing  tobacco  in  Durham  in  1869,  occu- 
pied a  part  of  the  new  building.  Four  years  later, 
a  formal  partnership  was  arranged,  George  W. 
Watts  buying  an  interest  with  the  four  Duke  mem- 
bers of  the  firm.  In  1880  R.  H.  Wright  bought  Wash- 
ington Duke's  interest  and  became  outside  salesman. 
J.  B.  Duke  had  charge  of  manufacturing,  the  other 
members  of  the  firm  handling  the  other  duties. 

STARTS  MAKING  CIGARETTES 

Although  the  firm  was  meeting  success,  J.  B.  Duke 
was  not  satisfied.  He  felt  that  they  could  not  com- 
pete with  Bull  Durham,  manufactured  by  W.  T. 
Blackwell  Tobacco  Co.  He  decided  to  enter  a  new 
field,  the  manufacture  of  cigarettes,  which  had  been 
produced  in  the  nation  by  other  manufacturers  for 
about  12  years.  He  established  a  cigarette  depart- 
ment, employed  J.  M.  Seigel  to  handle  it  and  brought 


PAGE  71 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1 951 


about  300  Jews  to  Durham  to  do  the  work  by  hand. 
In  1884  he  installed  Bonsake  cigarette  making  ma- 
chines and  improved  their  operation  in  his  plant. 

The  cost  of  producing  cigarettes  was  thus  reduced 
to  less  than  half  of  the  hand  production  cost.  A 
heavy  reduction  was  made  about  this  time  in  the 
Federal  tax  on  cigarettes  and  the  price  of  a  package 
of  ten  cigarettes  was  reduced  from  10^  to  5^.  In 
1884  a  new  brick  plant  was  erected,  later  the  Liggett 
&  Myers  plant.  With  J.  B.  Duke's  manufacturing 
ability  and  R.  H.  Wright's  salesmanship  cigarettes 
soon  became  popular  throughout  this  country  and 
were  sold  in  large  quantities  on  three  eastern  hemi- 
sphere continents.  But  there  was  a  fly  in  the  oint- 
ment. The  Blackwell  firm  also  started  manufac- 
turing cigarettes  and  continued  a  strong  competitor. 

About  that  time  J.  B.  Duke  was  looking  for  wider 
horizons  and  was  seeing  visions  of  a  huge  tobacco 
manufacturing  and  distributing  organization.  He 
held  several  conferences  with  various  of  his  com- 
petitors. Some  of  them  joined  in  his  plan  readily, 
others  held  out.  Finally  ten  men  of  five  large  cor- 
porations agreed  on  his  plan  and  formed  the  Ameri- 
can Tobacco  Co.  Practically  all  of  the  larger  firms 
entered  the  corporation  later,  either  voluntarily  or 
after  persuasion  and  pressure.  The  head  office  was 
moved  to  New  York  City. 


James  Buchanan  Duke,  native  of  North  Carolina,  founder  and 

president  for  many  years  of  the  American  Tobacco  Go. 

and  other  important  tobacco  organizations. 


ACQUIRES  BULL  DURHAM  PLANT 

In  1898  the  Continental  Tobacco  Co.  was  charter- 
ed in  New  Jersey  with  an  authorized  capital  of  $75,- 
000,000  and  J.  B.  Duke  became  president  at  a  salary 
of  $50,000  a  year.  In  that  same  year  the  National 
Cigarette  and  Tobacco  Co.,  which  had  been  purchas- 
ed in  1896  by  Thomas  Fortune  Ryan,  Wall  Street 
financier,  and  his  associates,  had  bought  control  of 
Blackwell's  Bull  Durham  plant.  Ryan  and  associ- 
ates consolidated  these  firms  into  the  Union  Tobacco 
Co.  of  America  with  a  capital  stock  of  $22,000,000. 
Ryan,  also  in  1899,  got  an  option  to  buy  Liggett  & 
Myers  Tobacco  Co.  for  $11,000,000  for  the  purpose 
of  fighting  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  However,  Mr. 
Duke  came  to  terms  with  Mr.  Ryan,  resulting  in  an 
agreement  by  which  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
bought  Union  and  also  took  up  the  option  in  the 
purchase  of  Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.  In  these 
trades,  Ryan  and  his  associates  made  a  clear  profit 
of  $20,000,000  in  a  few  months. 

After  a  few  years  in  Durham  and  in  the  Ware- 
Kramer  Tobacco  Co.  in  Wilson,  Percival  Smith  Hill, 
Philadelphia,  who  later  was  to  become  an  important 
figure  in  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  after  the  disso- 
lution, was  made  a  vice-president  of  the  American 
and  put  in  charge  of  sales  throughout  the  nation. 
Rufus  Lenoir  Patterson,  native  of  Salem,  who  was 
principal  inventor  of  an  automatic  Packing  and  La- 
beling Machine  in  Durham  in  1896,  was  made  a 
vice-president  of  the  American  at  27  years  of  age. 
Later  he  organized  and  headed  the  American  Ma- 
chine and  Foundry  Co.  which  was  engaged  in  manu- 
facturing machinery  used  in  manufacturing  tobacco 
and  which  became  a  subsidiary  of  the  American  To- 
bacco Co.  Today  under  direction  of  the  founder's 
son,  Morehead  Patterson,  this  company  is  continu- 
ing independently  the  production  and  development 
of  tobacco  manufacturing  machinery.  Recently  this 
firm  established  a  laboratory  in  Raleigh  for  work  in 
developing  further  cigarette  and  tobacco  curing  ma-J 
chinery. 

R.  J.  REYNOLDS  'UNDIGESTED' 

R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  proved  one  of  the  hard-f 
est  of  the  independent  firms  for  the  American  To 
bacco  Co.  to  acquire,  and  remained  undigested.! 
Earlier  R.  J.  Reynolds  had  sided  with  the  tobacco 
farmers  in  their  opposition  to  "The  Trust".  He  hadj 
made  the  statement  that  "if  Buck  Duke  tries  to  swai 
low  me,  he'll  have  the  bellyache  for  the  rest  of  hisf 
life".  At  that  time  Reynolds  was  making  5,000,000 
pounds  of  chewing  tobacco  a  year.  Finally  Reynolds 
succumbed  and  the  corporation  was  re-organized  in 
1898  under  a  New  Jersey  charter.  American  in- 
terests owned  a  control  of  the  stock.  Mr.  Reynolds 
explained  that  he  had  joined  the  opposition  in  order 
to  find  out  what  was  being  done  and  to  get  in  some 
licks  on  the  inside.  It  is  definite  that  Mr.  Duke 
stood  in  awe  of  the  independent  Reynolds  and  allow- 
ed him  to  operate  without  interference. 

By  the  end  of  1900  the  Duke  interests  were  manu- 
facturing 92.7%  of  the  cigarettes,  62%  of  the  chew- 


. 


UMMER-FALL,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  73 


lg  tobacco  and  59.2%  of  the  smoking  tobacco  pro- 
need  in  the  United  States.  Thus  the  American's 
mtrol  had  extended  to  all  tobacco  products  except 
gars.  The  next  year  the  American  Cigar  Co.  was 
icorporated  with  a  capital  stock  of  $10,000,000  and 
Dught  up  cigar  firms  producing  one-sixth  of  the 
ational  output.  Mr.  Duke  was  elected  president, 
l  that  year  the  American  firms  did  a  business  of 
125,000,000  and  had  approximately  100,000  em- 
loyees. 

UKE  ENTERS  RETAIL  FIELD 

The  United  Cigar  Stores  Co.  was  organized  in 
900  by  J.  B.  Duke  and  associates  who  bought  up 
id  established  hundreds  of  retail  stores  in  principal 
ties  of  the  country,  driving  out  the  smaller  units. 
rithin  five  years  500  such  stores  were  operating 
id  annual  business  had  reached  $12,000,000  a  year, 
efore  the  1929  crash,  this  organization  had  2,500 
;ores  and  was  doing  a  business  of  $2,000,000  a 
eek.  The  American  set  up  plants  in  Australia, 
ew  Zealand,  Canada,  Germany,  China  and  Japan, 
ames  A.  Thomas,  from  Orange  and  Rockingham 
imilies,  was  handling  China  and  developed  a  tre- 
mendous business  in  that  country.  George  Garland 
lien,  native  of  Warrenton,  N.  C,  handled  the  ex- 
3rt  business. 

About  this  time  Mr.  Duke  and  his  Wall  Street 
nancial  associates  decided  to  invade  England.  With 
vo  men,  W.  R.  Harris  and  Caleb  C.  Dula,  accom- 
anying  him,  Mr.  Duke  landed  in  London  in  Septem- 
ir,  1901.  Within  two  weeks  he  had  bought  the  old 
itablished  firm  of  Ogden,  Ltd.,  Liverpool,  for  $5,- 
30,000. 

Frightened,  thirteen  British  tobacco  houses  or- 
anized  and  formed  the  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  a 
75,000,000  corporation,  to  fight  Duke  and  his  asso- 
ates.  A  terrific  struggle  followed.  The  Duke  cor- 
Dration  adopted  a  very  bold  policy  of  allowing  Brit- 
h  retail  outlets  extensive  concessions  and  profits, 
hey  were  making  large  inroads  into  the  British 
usiness.  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.  officials  began 
taking  overtures.  Finally  Mr.  Duke,  accompanied 
y  Thomas  J.  Ryan,  went  to  England  in  1902  for 
mferences.  Mr.  Duke  called  in  two  of  his  trusted 
eutenants,  W.  W.  Fuller,  attorney  for  the  American, 
ad  James  A.  Thomas,  his  far  eastern  manager. 

>UKE  FORMS  BRITISH— AMERICAN 

After  a  few  weeks  of  negotiations,  a  treaty  was 
gned.  By  its  terms  Ogden's  was  sold  to  the  Impe- 
ial  for  $7,500,000.  The  British-American  Tobacco 
o.  was  then  formed  and  it  and  the  Imperial,  in 
feet,  divided  the  entire  world  for  tobacco  exploita- 
on.  Outside  of  the  United  States,  where  the  Ameri- 
an  continued  to  dominate  the  field,  British-Ameri- 
an  was  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the  remaining 
rorld  and  the  Imperial  the  remaining  one-third,  each 
ominant  within  its  area.  J.  B.  Duke  was  elected 
resident  of  the  British-American,  a  $30,000,000 
)int  stock  corporation. 

Thus  within  the  short  period  of  28  years,  J.  B. 


Richard  Joshua  Reynolds,  founder  and  president  for  43  years 

of  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  largest  tobacco  firm 

operating  exclusively  in  North  Carolina. 

Duke,  Durham  County  boy,  had  risen  from  superin- 
tendent of  a  small  country  factory  to  the  head  of 
tobacco  organizations  which  dominated  the  major 
part  of  the  entire  world.  His  new  corporation  was 
the  closest  approach  to  a  world  trust  that  had  ever 
been  organized. 

AMERICAN  DOMINATES  INDUSTRY 

American  Tobacco  Co.  earnings  in  1902  were  $13,- 
000,000,  while  Continental  earnings  were  even  larg- 
er. In  January,  1903,  these  two  corporations  were 
consolidated  and  the  directors  declared  a  20%  divi- 
dend, amounting  to  $16,000,000.  Then  on  October 
10,  1904,  the  American  was  greatly  enlarged  and 
reorganized  with  an  authorized  capital  stock  of 
$100,000,000  and  $80,000,000  in  preferred  stock. 
Total  capital  obligations  amounted  to  $225,000,000. 
Mr.  Duke  continued  as  president  with  John  B.  Cobb, 
Caleb  C.  Dula,  Charles  C.  Halliwell,  William  R.  Har- 
ris and  Percival  S.  Hill  as  vice-presidents. 

By  1906  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  controlled  four- 
fifth  of  the  tobacco  industries,  except  for  cigars.  A 
break-down  shows  that  the  firm  manufactured  82% 
of  all  cigarettes,  71%  of  smoking  tobacco,  81%  of 
fine  cut  tobaccos  and  96%  of  all  snuff  produced  in 
the  United  States.  During  that  year  component 
parts  of  American  used  400,000,000  pounds  of  leaf 
tobacco.     Up  to  that  time  it  had  absorbed  between 


PAGE  74 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 1 


200  and  300  smaller  tobacco  firms,  some  of  which 
continued  operation  under  their  own  names.  During 
the  five  year  period  1903-08  the  American  earned 
an  average  profit  of  19%,  or  $31,200,000,  annually. 

James  B.  Duke,  with  profits  rolling  in  in  a  great 
stream,  purchased  Veghte  farm,  Somerville,  N.  J. 
This  became  the  Duke  farm  with  2,200  acres,  one 
mile  wide  and  three  miles  long.  This  he  developed 
into  one  of  the  most  magnificent  estates  in  the  entire 
world  at  a  cost  probably  in  excess  of  $10,000,000. 
On  it  he  built  a  mansion  containing  50  rooms.  Sev- 
eral years  later  he  was  to  take  over  the  Taylor  home 
in  the  restricted  residential  area  of  Myers  Park,  now 
a  part  of  Charlotte,  and  develop  it  into  one  of  the 
nicest  homes  in  North  Carolina,  but  occupied  it  only 
on  rare  occasions. 

PROTESTS  AGAINST  'THE  TRUST 

Meanwhile  the  trickle  of  criticism  against  the 
three  almost  interchangable  objectives — the  Ameri- 
can Tobacco  Co.,  "the  trust",  and  J.  B.  Duke — was 
rising  to  a  mighty  torrent.  Many  independent  to- 
bacco manufacturers,  who  claimed  they  were  forced 
out  of  business  by  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  policies, 
were  full  of  resentment.  Many  Southern  tobacco 
growers,  who  felt  that  "the  trust"  was  forcing  down 
the  prices  of  leaf  tobacco,  railed  against  the  low 
prices  they  were  receiving.  In  fact,  this  resent- 
ment took  the  form  in  Kentucky  of  organizing  night 
riders  who  voluntarily  burned  to  the  ground  many 
warehouses  stocked  with  leaf  tobacco.  In  North 
Carolina  indignation  meetings  were  held  frequently. 
Two  North  Carolina  publications,  Josephus  Daniels' 
News  and  Observer  and  John  R.  Webster's  Weekly 
in  Reidsville,  were  continually  firing  vitriolic  shots 
at  "the  trust". 

They  were  supported  quietly  and  effectively  by 
that  rugged  individualist,  R.  J.  Reynolds,  whose  com- 
pany in  Winston-Salem  had  been  swallowed  finally 
but  never  completely  digested  by  the  American  To- 
bacco Co.  Mr.  Reynolds  had  told  Josephus  Daniels, 
the  independent  leader,  that  he  had  not  quit  but  had 
joined  hands  with  "the  trust"  to  keep  it  from  ruin- 
ing him  and  to  get  an  under  hold  and  that  he  was 
fighting  from  the  inside.  "You  will  never  see  the 
day,"  he  affirmed,  "that  Dick  Reynolds  will  eat  out 
of  Buck  Duke's  hand".  These  two  strong  personal- 
ities clashed  several  times  soon  after  the  American 
had  secured  control  of  the  Reynolds  firm  in  1898,  but 
after  that  Mr.  Reynolds  was  given  almost  complete 
authority  over  his  firm.  He  too  bought  smaller  com- 
peting firms  both  before  and  after  the  period  of 
control  by  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 

AMERICAN  ORDERED  DISSOLVED 

As  was  the  case  with  other  big  businesses  through- 
out the  United  States,  J.  B.  Duke  feared  President 
Theodore  Roosevelt  with  his  "big  stick".  By  1907 
the  flood  of  criticism  against  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.  had  grown  so  great  that  the  United  States  gov- 
ernment sued  through  the  Circuit  Court  of  Appeals, 
N.  Y.  for  a  dissolution  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 


on  the  ground  that  it  was  a  combination  in  restraint 
of  trade  in  violation  of  the  Sherman  Anti-Trus1 
Law. 

The  suit  reached  the  United  States  Supreme  Courl 
in  1910  and  in  1911  that  body  ordered  a  dissolutior. 
of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  The  order  was  to  hi 
carried  out  under  the  direction  of  and  with  the  ap- 
proval of  the  Circuit  Court  of  Appeals  of  New  York 
During  the  trial  of  this  case,  Mr.  Duke,  from  a  sicl 
bed  at  his  home,  gave  testimony  for  three  days  irj 
February,  1908.  He  denied  coercion  and  unfaii 
practices,  contending  that  he  had  never  threatenec 
any  firm  and  had  never  depressed  the  prices  of  lealj 
tobacco.  He  contended  that  various  firms  were  pur 
chased  in  order  to  round  out  the  business  and  tha 
the  success  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  was  du< 
to  the  push,  drive  and  advertising  of  the  individual; 
making  up  the  corporation. 

DUKE  'UNSCRAMBLES'  AMERICAN 

It  was  properly  admitted  that  the  only  persoi 
capable  of  working  out  the  dissolution  of  the  Ameri 
can  Tobacco  Co.  was  the  man  who  had  developed  i 
in  the  first  place — James  B.  Duke.  He,  a  group  o: 
lawyers,  and  the  court  worked  on  the  proposal  fo: 
several  months  during  the  middle  of  1911.  He  pro 
posed  two  or  three  plans  which  were  not  accepted  ty 
the  court.  Then  one  night  while  in  bed  his  activij 
brain  devised  a  method.  This  was  submitted  to  tbi 
court  and  accepted. 

It  provided  for  independent  operation  of  several 
of  the  auxiliary  firms,  such  as  the  American  Machin  1 
and  Foundry  Co  and  other  firms  engaged  in  supply U 
ing  pipes,  licorice,  insecticides,  fertilizers,  tin  foil 
boxes,  bags  and  other  supplies  for  the  tobacco  inl 
dustries.  The  American  Cigar  Co.  was  to  be  oni 
unit  and  five  others  were  to  be  formed  out  of  thl 
existing  American  Tobacco  Co.  These  were  to  b  1 
the  American,  Liggett  &  Myers  and  P.  Lorillarcl 
which  were  to  be  separate  corporations,  the  Unite! 
Cigar  Stores  Co.,  and  that  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tel 
bacco  Co.  was  to  be  restored  to  its  former  owners  J 
It  was  then  that  R.  J.  Reynolds  remarked  gleefully! 
"Now  watch  me  give  Buck  Duke  hell". 

DUKE  MEETS  PAGE  AGAIN 

Although  there  was  more  rumbling  against  thl 
dissolution  plan  when  it  was  learned  that  it  hal 
been  engineered  by  J.  B.  Duke,  plans  for  the  ne^l 
set-up  were  carried  through  as  scheduled.  The  wifl 
dom  of  J.  B.  Duke  was  again  displayed.  The  unit  i 
into  which  the  American  was  divided  each  has  bel 
come  a  growing  successful  corporation  and  the  prir 
cipal  ones  are  now  larger  and  more  extensive  tha 
the  original  American  Tobacco  Co. 

After  the  dissolution  Mr.  Duke  was  invited  to  b( 
come  executive  head  of  the  British-American  Tc 
bacco  Co.  which  he  had  formed  a  decade  before.  H 
went  to  London  and  took  charge  of  another  of  hi 
great  brain  children.  After  several  months  the  wa 
in  Europe  broke  and  it  was  only  through  the  hel 
of  Walter  Hines  Page,  native  of  Wake  County,  th 


UMMER-FALL,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  75 


mbassador  to  England,  that  Mr.  Duke  was  able  to 
acure  his  passage  to  New  York.  Mr.  Duke  was 
reatly  displeased  when  he  returned  home,  feeling 
lat  the  entire  bottom  had  dropped  out  and  that  his 
xtensive  holding  would  be  wiped  out. 

TARTS  POWER  DEVELOPMENT 

However,  Mr.  Duke  was  not  long  in  the  doldrums, 
/liile  having  trouble  with  his  feet,  he  consulted  an 
ninent  physician  of  New  York  and  South  Carolina, 
>r.  W.  Gill  Wylie.  Dr.  Wylie  owned  a  small  elec- 
*ic  plant  in  South  Carolina.  He  talked  to  Mr.  Duke 
bout  it  and  interested  him  in  electric  power  devel- 
pment.  W.  States  Lee,  an  engineer,  worked  out 
lans  for  small  electric  power  developments  and 
[r.  Duke  gave  him  $50,000  to  buy  a  site  on  the 
/ateree  River  near  Camden,  S  C,  and  developed  a 
lant.  This  was  the  beginning  of  the  Southern  Pow- 
i  Co.,  later  to  become  the  powerful  Duke  Power 
o.,  serving  the  Piedmont  area  of  North  and  South 
arolina  and  with  assets  which  reached  $350,000,000 


around  the  time  of  Mr.  Duke's  death,  October  10, 
1925.  The  story  of  this  latest  major  development 
of  the  Durham  County  farm  boy  is  well  known  to 
North  Carolinians. 

Meanwhile,  J.  B.  Duke  became  interested  in  devel- 
oping power  at  Saguenay  Falls  in  northern  Quebec, 
Canada,  and  spent  many  millions  of  dollars  in  erec- 
tion of  two  huge  plants.  George  Garland  Allen,  the 
Warrenton,  N.  C,  man  who  became  head  of  all  of  the 
Duke  organizations  after  Mr.  Duke's  death,  was 
president  of  the  Duke  Canadian  interest,  the  Quebec 
Development  Co.  and  the  Quebec  Aluminum  Co.  It 
was  then  that  Andrew  Mellon  and  his  Aluminum 
Co.  of  America  became  interested  in  this  develop- 
ment. He  sought  to  ward  off  competition.  Finally 
he  bought  the  Canadian  properties  and  Mr.  Duke 
received  in  exchange  a  hefty  share  of  the  stock  in 
the  Aluminum  Co.  of  America  worth  $12,500,000. 

Formation  of  the  Duke  Endowment  by  Mr.  Duke 
and  its  distribution  of  funds  in  the  Carolinas  is 
treated  in  another  item  in  this  issue. 


Reynolds  Leads  in  Tobacco  Production  in  North  Carolina 


The  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Company,  Winston- 
alem,  now  one  of  the  largest  tobacco  manufactur- 
ig  organizations  in  the  world,  had  its  beginning  in 
375  when  Richard  Joshua  Reynolds  erected  a  small 
lant  in  Winston  at  the  cost  of  $2400  and  invested 
le  remainder  of  $7400  in  leaf  tobacco  and  in  wages 
|  about  a  dozen  employees — most  of  whom  were 
nployed  on  a  part-time,  seasonal  basis.  Today  this 
rm  has  assets  of  $550,000,000,  annual  sales  of 
760,000,000  and  manufactures  three  world  leading 
)bacco  products:  Camel  cigarettes,  Prince  Albert 
noking  tobacco,  and  Days  Work  chewing  tobacco. 
Mr.  Reynolds  was  a  native  of  the  No  Business 
[ountain  section    (near  the  community  of  Critz) 

of  Patrick  County, 
Va.  His  father,  Har- 
din Reynolds,  was  a 
large  tobacco  grow- 
er and  began  manu- 
facturing tobacco 
that  he  and  some  of 
his  neighbors  rais- 
ed. At  that  time  to- 
bacco was  marketed 
by  wagons  which 
carried  the  product 
to  the  rural  and 
small  town  mer- 
chants. As  a  boy 
Richard  Reynolds 
had  valuable  experi- 
ence in  growing, 
manufacturing,  and 

,Loa    a    n         *  ■-,         selling  tobacco.    He 

imes   A.    Gray,    former   president  ,         ,     .    „ 

now  chairman  of  Board  of  R.  J.         spent    a    brief    peri- 
Reynolds  Tobacco  Go.  od      at      Emory      & 


Henry  College  in  Virginia  and  later  he  attended 
Bryant  &  Stratton's  Business  College  in  Baltimore, 
where  his  agile  mind  was  quick  to  grasp  business 
methods.  The  sixth  child  in  a  large  family  he  struck 
out  on  his  own  at  24  years  of  age,  riding  a  sorrel 
horse  50  miles  to  Winston  in  1874. 

FIRST  PLANT  TENNIS  COURT  SIZE 

The  first  Reynolds  plant  covered  an  area  equiva- 
lent to  that  occupied  by  a  tennis  court,  was  two  sto- 
ries high  and  soon  after  its  erection  was  painted  a 
bright  red.  Mr.  Reynolds  had  his  living  quarters  in 
the  upper  story  of  the  building.  Tobacco  manufac- 
turing at  that  time  was  conducted  for  six  months 
during  the  warmer  part  of  the  year  and  the  winter 
months  were  devot-  — 
ed  to  purchasing 
leaf  for  the  next 
year's  operations. 
Manufacturing 
chewing  tobacco, 
Mr.  Reynolds  was 
successful  from  tne 
beginning.  Due  to 
his  youthful  appear- 
ance, Mr.  Reynolds 
grew  a  beard  and 
had  his  picture  re- 
produced on  num- 
bers of  the  boxes  in 
which  the  tobacco 
was  packed  for  sell- 
ing.    His  small  f ac- 

.  John  C.  Whitaker,  president  of  the 

tory    was    on    a    Site  r.  j.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Go. 


PAGE   76 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1 95 1 


now  covered  by  one  of  the  more  than  200  large 
buildings  in  which  operations  are  now  carried  on. 

Winston,  with  its  800  people,  and  Salem,  its  older 
neighbor,  formed  a  splendid  location  for  this  infant 
industry.  The  railroad  had  just  been  constructed 
from  Greensboro  where  it  tapped  the  North  Caro- 
lina Railroad  and  it  was  only  a  few  years  until  a 
branch  line  was  built  to  North  Wilkesboro.  These 
lines  and  others  built  later  supplemented  and  finally 
almost  supplanted  the  wagon  as  a  means  of  getting 
leaf  tobacco  to  the  market  and  transporting  tobacco 
products  to  their  users.  Winston  also  had  a  leaf 
tobacco  auction  warehouse. 

Mr.  Reynolds  was  individual  owner  of  the  busi- 
ness during  the  first  13  years.  In  1888  he  formed  a 
partnership  taking  in  with  him  his  brother,  William 
Neal  Reynolds,  and  Henry  Roan.  This  partnership 
under  the  name  of  R.  J.  Reynolds  &  Co.,  was  con- 
tinued until  1890  when  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco 
Co.  was  incorporated  under  the  State  laws  with  cap- 
ital stock  of  $190,000.  In  1899  when  the  R.  J.  Rey- 
nolds Tobacco  Co.  became  an  undigested  unit  of  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.,  the  firm  was  incorporated 
under  the  laws  of  New  Jersey  and  has  since  con- 
tinued its  organization  under  this  charter.  The  capi- 
tal was  increased  to  $2,100,000.  In  1895  the  Rey- 
nolds Company  won  the  highest  award  on  chewing 
tobacco  at  the  big  Cotton  States  &  International  Con- 
vention in  Atlanta,  Georgia. 

SMOKING  TOBACCO  STARTED 

In  the  same  year,  this  company  began  to  manufac- 
ture smoking  tobacco.  The  first  smoking  tobacco 
brands  were  Our  Advertiser,  which  is  still  manufac- 


tured, and  Split  Silk,  with  which 
were  supplied  papers  to  roll- 
your-own,  and  Razor  Back.  Al- 
though the  volume  of  smoking 
tobacco  gradually  increased, 
chewing  tobacco  continued  to  ac- 
count for  the  bulk  of  the  busi- 
ness. For  example,  from  1900 
through  1906  chewing  tobacco 
made  up  98%  of  the  sales. 
Whereas  sales  of  the  company  in 
the  middle  'eighties  amounted  to 
about  $200,000  a  year,  Reynolds 
production  was  running  behind 
production  by  P.  H.  Hanes  &  Co. 
and  Brown  Bros.  Sales  had 
reached  almost  one-half  million 
dollars  a  decade  later. 

In  1897  Winston  was  the  third 
largest    tobacco    manufacturing 
city  in  the  United  States,  only 
St.  Louis  and  Louisville  topping 
her.    Principal  Reynolds  brands  about  this  time  weil 
(chewing)  :  RJR,  R.  J.  Reynolds'  Level  Best,  NatuJ 
ally  Sweet,  RJR  Red,  White  and  Blue,  Strawberr 
Twist,   Belle  of  North  Carolina,   Maid  of  Athen 
Caromel,  Our  Advertiser  and  Schnapps;  (smoking); 
Split  Silk,  Our  Advertiser  and  Razor  Back. 

Bird's-eye  view  of  the  principal  manufacturing  plants  of  t'M 
R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Go.  in  Winston-Salem,  forming  the  laru 
est  tobacco  manufacturing  plant  in  any  city  in  the  xoorl\ 
Reynolds  buildings  are  darkened  purposely  in  picture.  Upp\ 
left  is  Reynolds  Office  Building.  Upper  center  is  Reynolf 
Power  Plant.  Reynolds  pays  Uncle  Bam  more  than  a  milli\ 
dollars  a  day  for  each  day  of  five  day  ivork  week. 


R.  J.  Reynolds,  25 
when  he  established 
his  tobacco  plant  i\ 
Winston  in  1875. 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   77 


In  1890  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  was  organized 
by  James  B.  Duke  and  other  large  manufacturers 
in  states  north  of  North  Carolina.  Soon  after  this 
organization  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  began  its 
alleged  plan  of  buying  up  all  promising  independent 
companies  it  could  acquire  and  of  allowing  smaller 
and  less  aggressive  companies  to  die  on  the  vine 
through  competition.  R.  J.  Reynolds,  a  rugged  indi- 
vidualist, continued  his  independent  operations  until 
1899.  He  had  been  quoted  as  saying :  "I  don't  intend 
to  be  swallowed  by  Buck  Duke.  If  Buck  Duke  tries 
to  swallow  me,  he  will  have  the  bellyache  the  balance 
of  his  life." 

ABSORBED  BY  AMERICAN 

However,  pressure  was  so  great  that  Mr.  Reynolds 
joined  "the  trust",  but  told  the  late  Josephus  Daniels 
that  he  had  joined  in  order  to  get  in  some  licks  on 
the  inside.  But,  it  is  of  record  that  Mr.  Duke  stood 
in  awe  of  this  independent  manufacturer  in  Winston. 
Evidence  indicates  that  after  they  had  locked  horns 
on  a  few  issues,  Mr.  Duke  had  played  hands  off  and 
had  allowed  Mr.  Reynolds  to  conduct  his  business 
in  his  own  way,  even  though  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.  had  purchased  the  majority  stock  in  the  Rey- 
nolds Company  and  for  a  period,  from  1899  to  1905, 
Benjamin  Newton  Duke,  older  brother  of  J.  B.  Duke, 
was  first  vice-president  of  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  To- 
bacco Company. 

As  the  rumbling  against  "the  trust"  increased  in 
the  early  1900s  Mr.  Reynolds  must  have  taken  time 
out  occasionally  to  enjoy  himself.  The  rumblings 
and  complaints  of  tobacco  growers  throughout  the 
South  grew  stronger  and  louder.  In  Kentucky,  for 
example,  it  took  the  form  of  night  riders  who  would 
pounce  upon  and  burn  large  stores  of  leaf  tobacco. 
In  North  Carolina  growers  held  indignation  meet- 


\m 


Tiny  red  tins  are  being  made  in  this  department  for  Prince 
Albert,  America's  largest  selling  smoking  tobacco.  Conveyor 
belt,  left,  is  carrying  new  tins  to  manufacturing  department 
above  where  other  machines  fill  them  with  Prince  Albert. 
These  are  popular  departments  for  visitors  taking  the  Rey- 
nolds guided  tours. 


Inspector  at  one  of  hundreds  of  modem  machines  making 
Camels,,  Americas  largest  selling  cigarette.  Each  machine 
costs  more  than  twice  the  money  with  tohich  R.  J.  Reynolds 
started  business  in  1875.    Visitors  linger  here. 

ings  and  railed  against  the  low  prices  they  charged 
"the  trusts"  with  paying  them  for  their  tobacco. 

REYNOLDS  AGAIN  INDEPENDENT 

These  rumblings  came  to  a  head  by  1907  when 
the  Federal  Government  brought  charges  against  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.  for  operating  a  monopoly  in 
restraint  of  trade  in  violation  of  the  Sherman  Anti- 
Trust  Law.  Under  the  leadership  of  President  Theo- 
dore Roosevelt,  who  shook  his  "big  stick"  at  big 
business,  the  case  was  prosecuted  with  vigor  by  At- 
torney General  George  W.  Wickersham  with  James 
C.  McReynolds  prosecuting  the  case.  In  1911  the 
courts  held  that  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  had  vio- 
lated the  Sherman  Law  and  ordered  its  dissolution, 
to  be  carried  out  under  direction  of  the  Circuit  Court 
of  Appeals  of  the  State  of  New  York. 

It  was  an  admitted  fact  that  the  only  man  who 
could  unscramble  the  corporation  was  the  man  who 
had  built  it  up.  J.  B.  Duke  offered  one  or  two  plans 
of  dissolution  and  finally  worked  out  the  plan  adopt- 
ed. This  was  a  breaking  down  of  all  of  the  com- 
panies producing  various  supplies  and  equipment 
such  as  tobacco  machinery,  packages,  boxes,  bags, 
tin  foil,  paper  and  other  requirements  for  the  trade 
and  splitting  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  into  four 
corporations:  The  American  Tobacco  Co.,  Liggett 
&  Myers  Tobacco  Co.,  P.  Lorillard,  and  allowing  R. 
J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  to  assume  and  to  continue 
its  former  status. 

Whereas  Mr.  Duke  had  planned  to  segregate  the 
manufacture  of  chewing  tobacco  in  the  R.  J.  Rey- 
nolds Tobacco  Co.,  Mr.  Reynolds  had  gone  about  a 
plan  of  developing  a  new  type  of  smoking  tobacco. 
At  that  time  chewing  tobacco  sales  continued  to 
dominate  the  field.  In  1906  the  Reynolds  firm  was 
manufacturing  59  brands  of  flat  plug  and  14  brands 
of  twist  chewing  tobacco,  but  numerous  tests  had 
been  conducted  in  the  development  of  a  new  type  of 
smoking  tobacco. 

PRINCE  ALBERT  BIG  SUCCESS 

Prince  Albert  smoking  tobacco  hit  the  market  soon 
after  the  process  was  patented  on  July  30,  1907, 
about  the  time  the  suit  against  "the  trusts"  was 
started,  and  probably  was  a  bit  disconcerting  to  Mr. 
Duke,  who  had  other  plans  for  the  Reynolds  firm. 


PAGE   78 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  951 


Prince  Albert,  which  resulted  from  several  years 
of  experimenting,  was  produced  under  a  new  pat- 
ented process  based  on  fine  burley  leaf.  It  was  pack- 
ed in  a  pocket  size  tin  box,  on  the  front  of  which 
appeared  an  illustration  of  a  man  somewhat  resem- 
bling King  Edward  VII  in  the  style  of  coat  which 
took  its  name  from  this  popular  monarch — Prince 
Albert — and  by  which  name  he  was  known  until  he 
ascended  the  British  throne  in  1901.  Under  this 
picture  were  the  words  "Now  King".  When  King 
Edward  VII  died  in  1910  these  words  were  elimi- 
nated, and  "Crimp  Cut"  (which  previously  had 
appeared  immediately  under  the  brand  name)  was 
placed  in  that  spot  on  the  tin. 

Earlier  brands  of  tobaccos,  both  chewing  and 
smoking,  had  been  local  in  their  use,  but  Mr.  Rey- 
nolds inaugurated  a  nation-wide  advertising  cam- 
paign in  promotion  of  this  new  smoking  tobacco.  So 
strong  was  this  advertising  campaign  and  so  popu- 
lar was  Prince  Albert,  that  it  captured  the  public 
fancy  and  within  a  few  years  it  had  become  the 
nation's  largest-selling  smoking  tobacco — a  position 
it  has  continued  to  hold  in  the  40  years  that  have  fol- 
lowed. 

But  Mr.  Reynolds  had  still  a  greater  surprise 
coming.  He  realized  that  chewing  tobacco  had  about 
reached  its  crest  and  that  people  were  turning  more 
and  more  to  smoking.  If  he  had  created  a  sensation 
by  developing  and  marketing  Prince  Albert  smoking 
tobacco,  probably  also  opposed  by  J.  B.  Duke,  he  had 
a  still  greater  sensation  which  broke  on  the  world 
some  two  years  after  the  dissolution  of  the  American 
Tobacco  Co.  The  staff  experimented  with  various 
types  of  blends. 

"THE  CAMELS  ARE  COMING" 

Then  on  October  19,  1913,  he  began  the  manufac- 
ture of  Camel  cigarettes.  After  trying  many  blends 
and  making  many  tests,  he  and  his  staff  reached  the 
agreement  "this  is  it". 


'  mad  :  i 


Section  in  which  Camel  cigarettes  are  put  in  packages.  Any 
of  the  hundreds  of  packing  machines  can  form  and  complete 
an  entire  Camel  package  in  less  than  a  second — faster  than 
a  wink. 


Kernersville  group  of  huge  leaf  storage  warehouses  in  which 
leaf  tobacco  is  slowly  aging  for  use  in  Reynolds  products. 

Camels  were  the  first  of  the  modern  type  blends 
and  other  cigarettes  of  the  popular  types  have  fol-j 
lowed  Camel's  lead.  The  Reynolds  staff  had  worked 
out  a  blend  of  bright  leaf  with  burley,  and  Turkish, 
with  the  Maryland  type  tobaccos  added  later.  Other 
cigarettes  were  offering  coupons,  pictures  and  other 
inducements  to  help  carry  the  sales.  Reynolds  broke 
away  from  this  practice  and  boldly  announced  on  the 
back  of  the  pack :  "Don't  look  for  premiums  or  cou- 
pons, as  the  cost  of  the  tobaccos  blended  in  Camel 
Cigarettes  prohibits  the  use  of  them".  On  the  front 
of  the  pack  the  picture  selected  was  that  of  a  tall 
Arabian  Camel.  The  oriental  theme  was  carried  out 
with  a  background  of  pyramids  and  palm  trees  on 
the  front  and  with  moslem  structures  and  palms  on 
the  back. 

Never  before  had  any  tobacco  manufacturer  inau- 
gurated such  an  advertising  campaign  as  was  plan- 
ned and  carried  out  for  Camels.  In  advance  of  the 
day  Camels  were  to  go  on  the  market  in  a  particular 
city,  newspaper  teaser  display  advertisements  an- 
nounced simply  "The  Camels  Are  Coming".  On  the 
day  before  Camels  hit  the  market,  the  advertisement 
announced  "Tomorrow  there'll  be  more  Camels  in 
this  town  than  in  all  Asia  and  Africa  combined". 
At  that  time  practically  all  cigarettes  were  made  for 
local  or  area  consumption  as  were  smoking  and  chew-f| 
ing  tobaccos. 

The  Reynolds  Company  decided  to  make  Camels!  i 
nation-wide  and  during  the  first  year  spent  several}] 
hundred  thousand  dollars  in  advertising.  Camels|i 
were  an  immediate  success.  In  a  very  short  time 
they  sky-rocketed  to  first  place  in  the  nation's  salea 
and  today  Camels  lead  any  other  brand  by  billions,; 
World  War  I  gave  Camels  the  opportunity  to  seefcji 
world-wide  markets.  The  dough-boys  popularized! 
them  throughout  Europe. 

CAVALIERS  HIT  THE  MARKET 

R.  J.  Reynolds,  the  late  Josephus  Daniels  wrote 
later,  had  "a  tremendous  interest  in  getting  rich" 
Prince  Albert  and  Camels  put  him  well  on  the  wajj 
to  realizing  that  ambition.  In  1913  Camels  consti 
tuted  less  than  1  %  of  the  total  business  of  the  com 
pany.  In  1918,  at  the  time  of  his  death,  Camel! 
accounted  for  more  than  50%  of  the  company's  busi 
ness  and  in  1921,  more  than  65%.  In  1910,  aftei 
the  modest  beginning,  the  Reynolds  firm  did  a  busi 
ness  of  $12,000,000  a  year;  for  1919  this  busines: 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   79 


reached  $188,000,000  and  in  1923  it  was  $233,000,- 
D00  a  year.  Instead  of  the  dozen  employees,  mainly 
seasonal,  in  the  first  Reynolds  plant  in  1875,  the  com- 
pany now  has  approximately  12,000  regular,  full- 
;ime  employees  and  about  4,500  additional  seasonal 
workers. 

In  1949  the  Reynolds  Company  brought  out  an- 
ther cigarette.  Cavaliers  were  produced  and  mar- 
keted in  selected  areas  for  a  period  without  any  in- 
formation on  the  package  as  to  their  origin.  They 
ire  the  long,  king-size  cigarettes  advertised  as  made 
)f  extremely  mild  tobaccos  of  the  original  colonial 
;ype.  Cavaliers  caught  on  and  are  proving  a  popu- 
ar  type  of  cigarette. 

Now  Reyno  and  Red  Kamel  cigarettes,  manufac- 
;ured  in  the  earlier  days,  have  disappeared.  Only 
Camels  and  Cavaliers  are  produced.  Several  early 
grands  of  smoking  tobaccos  have  also  disappeared, 
;he  chief  brands  now  being  Prince  Albert,  George 
tVashington,  Our  Advertiser,  Stud  and  Top.  As 
igainst  73  brands  of  chewing  tobacco  manufactured 
n  1906  the  principal  Reynolds  brands  now  are 
3rown's  Mule,  Days  Work,  Apple  Sun  Cured,  Rey- 
lolds'  Natural  Leaf,  Reynolds'  Sun  Cured,  Cup, 
Schnapps,  Honey  Cut,  Strater's  Natural  Leaf  Twist, 
iVinesap,  Micky  Twist,  Cash  Value  and  Top. 

1EADED  FIRM  FOR  US  YEARS 

Mr.  Reynolds  directed  the  destinies  of  his  com- 
)any  for  43  years  until  his  death  at  68  years  of  age 
luly  29,  1918.  Following  his  death  his  brother,  Wil- 
iam  N.  Reynolds,  was  elected  president  and  served 
mtil  1924  when  he  became  chairman  of  the  board 
)f  directors.  In  1931  he  was  elected  chairman  of  the 
executive  committee  and  retired  in  1942.  He  had 
served  as  second  vice-president  and  later  as  first  vice- 
)resident  from  1899  until  he  was  elected  president 
n  1918.  At  a  ripe  old  age,  he  enjoys  his  standard 
)red  race  horses  and  farming. 

Bowman  Gray,  who  had  been  with  the  company 
;or  many  years  and  had  been  vice-president  since 
L912,  was  elected  president  in  1924  to  succeed  Wil- 
iam  N.  Reynolds.  He  was  elected  chairman  of  the 
)oard  in  1931  continuing  in  that  office  until  his 
leath  in  1935.  S.  Clay  Williams,  in  the  Legal  De- 
partment, who  had  served  as  vice-president  since 
L924,  was  elected  president  in  1931,  continuing  as 
;uch  until  1934  when  he  was  elected  vice-chairman 
)f  the  board,  becoming  chairman  of  the  board  the 
lext  year.  He  became  chairman  of  the  executive 
committee  in  1943,  serving  as  such  until  1946  and  as 
chairman  of  the  board  until  his  death  in  1949. 

1RAY  AND  WHITAKER  CHIEFS 

James  A.  Gray,  who  had  been  elected  a  vice-presi- 
lent  in  1919  and  placed  in  charge  of  the  finances  of 
;he  company,  was  elected  president  in  1934.  In  1946 
le  was  elected  chairman  of  the  executive  committee 
md  in  1949  as  chairman  of  the  board  of  directors 
md  continues  to  serve  in  both  of  these  capacities. 
F.  W.  Glenn,  who  had  been  elected  a  vice-president 


#*Jffp 


Original  picture  of  Old  Joe,  Barnum  &  Bailey  Circus  camel 
from  which  the  picture  on  the  pack  ivas  derived. 

in  1937,  was  elected  president  in  1946  serving  as  such 
until  his  retirement  in  1948. 

John  C.  Whitaker,  who  had  handled  the  Manufac- 
turing and  Personnel  Departments  for  many  years 
and  had  been  vice-president  since  1937,  was  elected 
president  to  succeed  Mr.  Glenn  in  1948  and  continues 
to  hold  that  position. 

Vice-presidents  of  the  Reynolds  Company  who  did 
not  become  presidents  include  Benjamin  N.  Duke, 
elected  first  vice-president  in  1899  when  the  Rey- 
nolds Company  became  a  part  of  the  American  To- 
bacco Co.  and  served  until  his  resignation  in  1905. 
R.  S.  Reynolds,  a  nephew  of  R.  J.  Reynolds,  was  elect- 
ed second  vice-president  in  1911  resigning  the  next 
year.     Percy   C.   Masten  was   vice-president   from 

HOW  THE  CAMEL  GOT  ON  THE  PACK 

R.  J.  Reynolds  wanted  a  camel  picture  for  use  on  the 
package  of  his  new  cigarette. 

When  the  Barnum  &  Bailey  Circus  came  to  Winston-Salem 
in  the  early  autumn  of  1913  Roy  C.  Haberkern,  then  ste- 
nographer for  R.  J.,  Walter,  and  W.  N.  Reynolds,  and  now 
a  vice-president  of  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  went  to  the 
circus  to  study  camels.  He  contacted  John  Patterson,  head 
of  the  circus  animals,  and  asked  permisison  to  photograph 
some  of  the  camels.  Mr.  Patterson  told  him  in  "mule  skin- 
ner" language  that  no  hick-town  tobacco  firm  could  photo- 
graph his  camels.  Finally,  however,  he  agreed,  if  Mr. 
Haberkern  would  present  a  letter  from  the  company  to  the 
effect  that  the  name  Barnum  &  Bailey  would  not  appear  in 
the  advertising. 

The  Reynolds  firm  was  observing  a  holiday  for  the  circus 
and  Mr.  Haberkern  knew  the  office  was  closed,  but  he  hur- 
ried back,  forced  open  a  window,  typed  the  required  letter 
and  boldly  signed  the  name  of  R.  J.  Reynolds  to  it.  On 
the  way  back  he  picked  up  J.  A.  Farrell,  a  photographer 
(whose  son,  Charles  Farrell,  is  now  a  photographer  in 
Greensboro).  Trainer  Patterson  led  out  his  camels  and 
Photographer  Farrell  took  two  exposures,  one  of  a  two- 
humped  bactrian — extremely  ugly — and  the  other  an  Arab- 
ian camel  with  one  hump. 

This  camel  was  known  as  Old  Joe  and  Mr.  Patterson  said 
he  was  the  finest  ever  brought  to  the  United  States.  The 
picture  was  taken  in  the  rain  with  a  trainer  wearing  a  rain- 
coat holding  the  camel's  leash.  This  trainer  and  the  back- 
ground of  the  picture  were  eliminated  in  the  reproduction 
prepared  by  a  Richmond  lithographer  for  use  on  the  Camel 
Cigarette  package.  Palm  trees  and  pyramids  were  placed 
in  the  background. 

And  Old  Joe  is  the  camel  on  the  front  of  the  pack  han- 
dled by  so  many  millions  of  people  daily. 


PAGE  80 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


1912  to  1914,  when  he  resigned.  C.  A.  Kent  was 
vice-president  from  1914  until  his  resignation  in 
1919.  Walter  R.  Reynolds,  also  a  brother  of  R.  J. 
Reynolds,  was  elected  vice-president  in  1918  and 
served  until  his  death  in  1921.  T.  H.  Kirk  served  as 
vice-president  from  1923  until  his  resignation  in 
1937.  R.  E.  Lasater  served  as  vice-president  from 
1931  until  his  retirement  in  1947.  C.  W.  Harris  was 
elected  vice-president  in  1931  serving  until  his  death 
in  1937. 

DIRECTORS  ALL  EMPLOYEES 

Present  directors  of  the  company,  in  addition  to 
Mr.  Gray,  chairman  of  the  executive  committee  and 
of  the  board  of  directors,  and  John  C.  Whitaker, 
president,  are  five  vice-presidents :  R.  C.  Haberkern, 
P.  Frank  Hanes  and  E.  A.  Darr,  all  elected  in  1946 ; 
H.  N.  Hardy  and  Bowman  Gray,  elected  in  1949 ;  A. 
H.  Galloway,  who  succeeded  the  late  F.  S.  Hill,  treas- 
urer; W.J.  Conrad,  secretary;  W.  T.  Smither,  man- 
ager, advertising  department ;  R.  G.  Vallandingham, 
superintendent  of  leaf  buying;  H.  H.  Ramm,  solici- 
tor and  assistant  to  chairman  of  the  board;  H.  S. 
Kirk,  superintendent  of  manufacturing ;  S.  M.  Scott, 
comptroller;  S.  B.  Hanes,  Jr.,  superintendent  of 
leaf  processing. 

These  officers  constitute  the  board  of  directors. 
An  interesting  note  is  that  from  the  beginning  prac- 
tically every  officer  and  member  of  the  board  of 
directors  has  been  an  employee  of  the  company  and 
only  on  rare  occasions  has  the  company  had  a  direc- 
tor who  was  not  on  its  payroll.  In  only  three  in- 
stances has  this  been  broken.  One  was  when  B.  N. 
Duke  served  as  vice-president  for  a  few  years  around 
the  turn  of  the  century,  another  when  R.  J.  Reynolds, 
Jr.,  served  as  director  for  a  few  years  several  years 
ago,  and  when  there  was  for  a  period  a  statutory 
requirement  that  one  director  be  a  resident  of  the 
State  of  New  Jersey. 

U.  S.  TAXES  MILLION  A  DAY 

Many  years  ago  in  attempting  to  show  the  extent 
of  the  taxes  paid  to  the  Federal  Government  by  the 
R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  it  was  related  that  the 
amount  was  sufficient  in  one  week  to  erect  the  Fed- 
eral Building  in  Winston-Salem.  That  week  kept 
moving  down  until  it  is  considerably  less  than  one 
working  day.  In  fact  the  Federal  Government's 
take  in  stamps  in  one  day  now  is  more  than  was  re- 
ceived for  the  entire  tobacco  industry  in  the  United 
States  in  1875  when  the  company  was  founded.  Ex- 
pressed in  other  terms,  every  day  of  the  five-day 
work  week  this  firm  pays  the  Federal  Government 
well  over  a  million  dollars  for  stamps  used  on  its 
products.  Specifically,  the  company's  total  of  taxes, 
of  all  types,  in  1950  was  over  $398,000,000 — a  valu- 
able contribution  to  all  forms  of  government.  Ex- 
tent of  operations  is  shown  in  two  other  ways.  The 
company's  shipments  in  and  out  of  Winston-Salem 
require  more  than  a  mile  of  freight  cars  and  highway 
express  trucks  on  an  average  for  every  working  day. 
The  conveyor  systems  in  the  Reynolds  plant  include 


chains,  belts,  chutes  and  the  like,  and  are  more  than 
30  miles  in  length. 

Mr.  Reynolds  in  the  earlier  days  of  operation  is 
accused  somewhat  facetiously  of  bludgeoning  his! 
associates  and  employees  into  buying  stock  in  hisj 
company.  It  is  a  fact  that  he  encouraged  thoseii 
working  with  and  for  him  to  save  a  part  of  their); 
earnings  and  put  it  in  stock  of  the  R.  J.  Reynolds! 
Tobacco  Co. 

Of  the  approximately  12,000  of  the  regular  em-p 
ployees  of  the  Reynolds  Company  more  than  40001 
have  service  records  of  20  years  or  longer  and  morej 
than  one-half,  over  6000,  have  service  records  of  101; 
or  more  years.     All  regular  employees  of  the  com-] 
pany  have  benefits  of  a  group  life,  health  and  acci- 1 
dent  insurance  plan,  an  employee's  retirement  plan, 
a  hospital  and  surgical  service  plan,  a  jury  service! 
plan,  a  vacation  plan  and  paid  holidays.  In  Winston-; 
Salem  where  the  bulk  of  the  employees  are  centered,? 
the  company  maintains  for  them  a  modern  medical 
department,  cafeterias,  parking  lots,  the  confidential' 
assistance  of  a  legal  counselor  and  a  pastor-counsel- 
or.    A  small  private  chapel  has  been  completed  om 
the  mezzanine  floor  of  the  Company's  office  building.il 
for  use  by  the  pastor-counselor  in  his  work  with 
employees  who  ask  for  his  services.    It  is  also  avail- 
able during  the  working  day  to  individuals  seeking] 
a  haven  for  private  meditation  and  prayer. 

VISITORS  ARE  WELCOMED 

The  Reynolds  Company  has  for  more  than  30  yean  I 
made  guided  tours  in  its  plants  available  to  the  pub  1 
lie.  During  the  year  1950  more  than  21,700  visitors 
from  all  48  states  and  42  foreign  countries  went  orl 
one  of  these  tours.  Since  1931  a  quarter-million] 
visitors  have  come  to  see  how  its  products  are  made  I 
The  tours  are  conducted  by  experienced  employees! 
every  working  day,  any  time  from  8  to  11  in  thai 
morning,  and  from  1 :30  to  3  in  the  afternoon.  This  | 
welcoming  of  visitors  has  not  been  the  case  with  all 
tobacco  manufacturers. 

From  the  one  building  in  1875  the  Reynolds  Comfl 
pany  has  enlarged  practically  every  year.     By  190(11 
the  plant  consisted  of  seven  buildings.     In  years  I 
past  the  Reynolds  Company  has  operated  a  few  faci  J 
tories  in  other  states  such  as  one  in  Richmond,  Va.j] 
one  in  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  one  in  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 
but  even  then  the  bulk  of  the  manufacturing  wasjl 
done  in  Winston-Salem.     However,  some  20  year! 
ago  the  company  centered  its  manufacturing  entirely  j 
in  Winston-Salem.    It  now  has  more  than  200  build! 
ings — all  the  manufacturing  plants  and  a  numbe^ 
of  buildings  for  preliminary  leaf  processing  (includ! 
ing  two   leaf  handling  and  redrying  plants),   ancj 
many    leaf   storage    warehouses — are    at   Winstonj 
Salem.    A  leaf  handling  and  redrying  plant  is  local 
ed  in  Greensboro;  near  Kernersville  are  additional 
leaf  storage  warehouses ;  a  leaf  handling  plant  is  ii 
each  of  the  following  cities :   Durham,   Fairmont! 
Greenville,     Henderson,     Kinston,     Oxford,     Rock? 
Mount  and  Wilson.    In  11  Kentucky  cities  and  townil 
the  company  has  other  leaf  handling  plants  and  als<  j 


SUMMER-FALL,  1  951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  81 


has  leaf  storage  warehouses  in  or  near  Lexington, 
Louisville  and  Maysville.  Two  leaf  handling  plants 
are  operated  in  South  Carolina,  one  in  Tennessee, 
and  in  Virginia  are  one  leaf  handling  plant  (at  South 
Boston),  and  a  redrying  plant  and  a  group  of  leaf 
storage  warehouses  (at  Danville). 

SALES  1950  EXCEED  $750,000,000 

Annual  sales  of  the  Reynolds  Company  last  year 
were  in  excess  of  $750,000,000.  From  a  capital  of 
about  $7400  at  the  beginning,  75  years  ago,  the  assets 
now  are  in  excess  of  $500,000,000.  In  a  division 
chart  it  is  shown  that  in  1950  the  company  paid 
$645,638,977,  or  84.87%  of  its  total  income  for  leaf 
tobacco,  wages,  revenue  stamps,  supplies,  freight 
and  other  manufacturing  costs.  Portion  retained  for 
requirements  of  the  business  amounted  to  $17,609,- 
254,  or  2.31  %  of  the  total  income.  Selling,  advertis- 
ing, administrative,  interest  and  other  expenses  ac- 
counted for  $37,117,017,  or  4.88%  of  the  total.  Divi- 
dends to  stockholders  amounted  to  $22,648,748,  or 
2.98%  of  the  income,  while  taxes  on  income  amount- 
ed to  $37,720,890,  or  4.96%.  of  the  income. 

A  recent  encouraging  note  was  sounded  in  the  an- 
nual meeting  of  the  stockholders  of  the  R.  J.  Reynolds 
Tobacco  Co.,  held  April  5,  1951.  The  report  of  Chair- 
man of  the  Board  James  A.  Gray  showed  that  the 
dollar  sales  of  the  company,  the  unit  sales  of  cigar- 
ettes and  net  earnings  showed  a  splendid  increase  in 
the  first  three  months  of  this  year  as  compared  with 
the  corresponding  period  last  year. 

TRIBUTE  BY  C.  OF  C.  OF  U.  S. 

The  Chamber  of  Commerce  of  the  United  States 
at  its  38th  Annual  Meeting  in  Washington,  D.  C,  on 
May  1,  1950,  with  programs  at  the  Statler  Hotel  and 
the  Mayflower  Hotel  honored  and  saluted  the  R.  J. 
Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  in  its  celebration  of  its  75th 
year  of  business.  Laurence  F.  Lee,  vice-president  of 
the  Chamber  and  president  of  the  Occidental  Life 
Insurance  Co.,  Raleigh,  presided  over  the  division 
held  at  the  Mayflower  Hotel.  Such  recognition  is 
given  each  year  by  this  organization  to  a  unit  of 
American  business,  chosen  as  a  symbol  of  achieve- 
ment. The  special  tribute  included  reference  to  the 
longevity,  growth  and  service  of  the  R.  J.  Reynolds 
Tobacco  Co.,  but  added: 

"We  are  honoring  this  firm  for  the  fine  way  in  which 
it  has  always  recognized,  accepted  and  fulfilled  its  re- 
sponsibilities to  its  community  down  through  three 
quarters  of  a  century." 

The  Tribute  includes  a  resolution  adopted  by  the 
Board  of  Directors  of  the  Winston-Salem  Chamber 
of  Commerce  in  which  recognition  was  given  to  the 
vital  role  played  by  the  company  in  the  growth  and 
development  of  Winston-Salem.  Bowman  Gray,  a 
vice-president  of  the  Reynolds  Company  and  son  of  a 
former  Chairman  of  the  Board  and  nephew  of  the 
present  Chairman,  acknowledged  the  tribute. 


ECUSTA  PAPER  CORP.  PRODUCES 
95r;   OF  U.  S.  CIGARETTE  PAPERS 

Establishment  of  the  Ecusta  Paper  Co.  at  Pisgah  Forest, 
near  Brevard,  proved  to  be  one  of  the  most  important  steps 
taken  in  many  years  as  an  adjunct  to  the  vital  cigarette 
industry  in  the  United  States  as  well  as  provided  a  large 
new  industry  in  North  Carolina.  The  industry  started  pro- 
ducing paper  in  1939,  about  two  years  before  the  United 
States  became  involved  in  World  War  II,  and  practically 
saved  the  cigarette  industry  in  this  and  other  states.  It 
was  organized  by  Harry  H.  Straus  who  had  represented 
firms  in  France  in  handling  cigarette  paper  for  manufac- 
turers in  the  United  States.  Mr.  Straus  realized  the  calam- 
ity to  manufacturers  in  this  country  if  war  eliminated  the 
transportation  of  paper  across  the  Atlantic. 

Cigarette  manufacturers  in  the  United  States  also  real- 
ized what  could  happen — they  too  remembered  the  situa- 
tion during  World  War  I  when  satisfactory  cigarette  paper 
was  not  available  and  inferior  substitutes  had  to  be  used. 
They  were  ready  for  Mr.  Straus'  suggestion  of  a  huge  plant 
in  this  country.  After  huge  sums  of  money  had  been  spent 
in  research  and  tests,  it  was  found  that  the  flax  straw  fiber, 
a  waste  substance  grown  in  quantities  in  Minnesota,  Cali- 
fornia and  other  states,  produced  a  splendid  cigarette  paper. 
Now  Ecusta  produces  fully  95%  of  the  cigarette  paper  used 
in  this  country  in  the  production  of  around  500  billion  cig- 
arettes yearly,  as  well  as  paper  for  roll-your-own  cigarettes. 

Recently  plans  have  been  made  for  a  $20,000,000  addition 
to  the  Ecusta  plant  in  which  cellophane  will  be  manufac- 
tured under  the  du  Pont  patent. 

In  addition  to  the  1400  workers  employed  in  making  cig- 
arette paper,  about  500  workers  will  be  engaged  in  the 
manufacture  of  cellophane,  much  of  which  will  go  into  the 
cigarette  manufacturing  industry  as  wrappers  for  cigarette 
packages. 

John  W.  Hanes,  native  of  Winston-Salem,  a  former  under- 
secretary of  the  U.  S.  Treasury,  was  elected  president  of  the 
Ecusta  Paper  Corp.  following  the  death  of  Mr.  Straus  on 
February  27  of  this  year.  Mr.  Hanes  is  a  son  of  the  late 
J.  W.  Hanes,  who  was  a  partner  in  the  firm  of  P.  H.  Hanes 
&  Co.,  the  largest  tobacco  manufacturing  firm  in  Winston 
prior  to  and  around  the  turn  of  the  century,  and  a  younger 
brother  of  Robert  M.  Hanes,  president  of  the  Wachovia 
Bank  &  Trust  Co.,  Winston-Salem. 


TOBACCO  CAUSED  REBELLION 

Tobacco  grown  in  Virginia  and  North  Carolina 
was  the  cause  of  at  least  two  rebellions  and  was  an 
important  factor  leading  up  to  the  Revolutionary 
War  and  American  independence  from  Great  Brit- 
ain. England  restricted  or  prohibited  shipments 
to  other  countries  and  levied  heavy  taxes  on  the 
bulk  of  the  crops  which  she  manufactured.  Low 
prices  paid  in  the  1870s  brought  on  Bacon's  Rebel- 
lion in  Virginia.  In  1879  the  Virginia  Assembly 
prohibited  shipment  of  tobacco  into  Virginia  from 
Rogue's  Harbor  (Albemarle  section)  which  led  to 
the  Culpepper  Rebellion.  Aristocratic  Virginia 
planters  looked  down  their  noses  at  North  Carolina 
grown  tobaccos.  Yet  under  English  monopoly  they 
were  constantly  and  increasingly  going  into  debts 
to  English  firms  for  fine  clothing  and  expensive 
items.  As  these  debts  mounted,  dissatisfaction  of 
the  colonists  increased  and  this  situation  contribut- 
ed much  toward  events  leading  to  the  Revolutionary 
War.  Many  Virginia  planters  fought  in  that  war  to 
relieve  them  of  the  debts  they  owed  British  firms. 


PAGE  82 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL.  1951 


American  Has  Large  Tobacco  Plants  in  Two  N.  C.  Cities 


The  American  Tobacco  Co.,  Executive  offices  at 
111  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City,  and  with  two  of 
its  principal  manufacturing  units  at  Durham  and 
Reidsville,  N.  C,  established  a  sales  volume  of  more 
than  $871,000,000  for  the  year  1950,  second  largest 
ever  recorded  in  the  tobacco  industry,  being  exceeded 
only  by  American  Tobacco  Co.  sales  of  $873,000,000 
in  1948.  This  record  was  achieved  in  a  highly  com- 
petitive industry,  based  on  sales  of  Lucky  Strikes, 
manufactured  in  both  of  its  North  Carolina  plants, 
and  several  hundred  other  brands  of  tobacco  prod- 
ucts manufactured 
here  and  in  other 
plants  operated  by 
the  company  outside 
the  State. 

This  is  a  far  cry 
from  this  firm's  be- 
ginning in  the  mid- 
dle 1860's  when 
Washington  Duke 
began  the  hand  pro- 
duction of  "Pro 
Bono  Publico  "smok- 
ing tobacco  on  a 
farm  in  Durham 
County  and  then 
erected  a  log  build- 
ing, 20  by  30  feet, 
in  which  to  produce 
that  brand.  He  was 
assisted  by  his  two 
sons,  Benjamin  Newton  Duke  and  James  Buchanan 
Duke,  the  latter  of  whom  went  on  to  form  the  Amer- 
ican Tobacco  Co.,  which  became  one  of  the  nation's 
greatest  industrial  enterprises. 

Early  operations  of  the  American's  predecessor, 
W.  Duke  Sons  &  Co.,  of  Durham,  are  recounted  in 
an  article  in  this  issue  on  the  early  days  of  tobacco 
manufacturing  in  Durham.  Operations  of  the  form- 
er American  Tobacco  Co.  during  its  first  21  years, 

following  its  organ- 
ization on  January 
31,  1890,  by  James 
B.  Duke  and  other 
manufacturers,  are 
related  in  still  an- 
other article  in  this 
issue.  This  article 
deals  with  the  Amer- 
ican Tobacco  Co. 
during  the  past  40 
years,  during  which 
it  has  continued  as 
the  leader  in  the  to- 
bacco manufactur- 
ing industry  in  this 
nation.  This  article, 
too,  is  primarily  de- 


Paul  M.  Hahn,  president  of  the 
American  Tobacco  Co. 


i**»<#-* 


This  log  cabin,  a  few  miles  north  of 
Durham,  was  the  first  tobacco  fac- 
tory operated  by  Washington  Duke 
and,  eventually,  developed  into  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.,  largest  to- 
bacco organization  in  the  nation. 
Original  picture  in  Duke  University 
Library. 


voted  to  this  firm's 
operations  in  North 
Carolina. 

DUKE  GREAT 

TOBACCO 

GENIUS 

James  B.  Duke, 
native  of  Durham 
County,  who  gained 
the  description  as 
the  greatest  tobacco 
organizer,  manufac- 
turer and  salesman 
the  world  has  pro- 
duced, continued  as 
president  of  the  for- 
mer American  To- 
bacco Co.  and  its 
successor  of  the 
same  name  through 
its  merger  with  the 
Consolidated  Tobacco  Co.  and  the  Continental  Tobac- 
co Co.  on  October  19,  1904,  and  through  its  dissolu- 
tion in  1911.  He  resigned  February  14,  1912, 
leaving  direction  of  the  company  to  the  efficient 
group  of  associates  he  had  selected  and  trained.  Mr. 
Duke  soon  turned  his  genius  to  developing  electric 
power,  resulting  in  the  formation  of  the  Duke  Power 
Co.,  operating  in  North  and  South  Carolina.  His 
formation  of  the  Duke  Endowment,  devoted  to  edu 
cational,  religious  and  health  promotion  in  these  two 
states,  is  related  elsewhere  in  this  issue 

Following  Mr.  Duke's  resignation,  Percival  Smith 
Hill,  a  former  vice-president,  was  elected  president 


J.  F.  Strickland,  recently  elected 
president  of  the  American  Suppliers, 
Inc.  His  headquarters  has  been  Dur 
ham  for  22  years. 


Preston  L.  Fowler,  vice-presi- 
dent and  chief  of  manufac- 
ture of  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.   His   official   residence 
is  Durham. 


W.  H.  Ogsbury,  director  and 
assistant  chief  of  manufac- 
ture, American  Tobacco  Co., 
in  charge  of  Durham,  Reids- 
ville, Richmond,  Louisville 
plants.   Resident  of  Durham. 


.UMMER-FALL,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  83 


V.  D.  Hager,  manager  of  Dur- 
ham plant  of  the  American 
Tobacco  Go. 


J.  W.  Williams,  manager  of 
Durham  Division,  Ameri- 
can Suppliers,  Inc. 


>f  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  Mr.  Hill,  native  of 
Philadelphia,  became  associated  with  the  American 
robacco  Co.,  as  a  young  man  and  gained  his  tobacco 
sxperience  in  two  North  Carolina  plants.  He  was 
vith  the  Bull  Durham  plant  in  Durham  for  a  few 
rears  and  also  an  official  of  the  Wells-Whitehead 
robacco  Co.  in  Wilson  for  a  period.  He  served  as 
resident  of  American  until  his  death  late  in  1925, 
ifter  which  his  son,  George  W.  Hill,  a  former  vice- 
resident,  was  elected  to  succeed  him  and  served 
mtil  his  death,  Sept.  13,  1946.  Vincent  Riggio  suc- 
;eeded  Mr.  Hill,  serving  until  April  7,  1950. 

1AHN  PRESENT  PRESIDENT 

Paul  M.  Hahn,  who  became  president  of  the  Amer- 
can  Tobacco  Co.  last  year,  is  55  years  of  age,  a 


D.  J.  Anderson,  manager  of     R.  W.  Sands*  manager  of  the 

the  Reidsville  plant  of  the         Reidsville  Division   of  the 

American  Tobacco  Co.  American  Suppliers,  Inc. 

native  New  Yorker,  graduate  of  the  College  of  the 
City  of  New  York  and  law  graduate  of  the  Colum- 
bia University  Law  School  in  1917.  He  practiced 
law  in  New  York  City  until  1931,  when  he  joined 
the  American  as  a  director  and  assistant  to  Presi- 
dent Hill.  Mr.  Hahn,  particularly  active  in  develop- 
ing the  sales  of  Lucky  Strike  cigarettes,  was  elected 
vice-president  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  in  1932 
and,  in  addition,  in  1940,  was  elected  president  of 

Aerial  vieio  of  American  Tobacco  Co.  buildings  in  Durham. 
White  building,  center  front,  contains  Durham  offices  and 
wrapping  material  storage.  Toward  left  are  Lucky  Strike 
plant,  a  stemmery,  the  redrying  plant  and  at  upper  left  the 
Bull  Durham  factory.  Back  of  these  buildings  are  another 
stemmery  and  the  Pall  Mall  group  of  factories. 


PAGE  84 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


the  American's 
principal  subsid- 
iary, the  Ameri- 
can Cigarette  & 
Cigar  Co.  This 
firm  produces  Pall 
Mall  cigarettes 
and  in  11  years  of 
Mr.  Hahn's  pres- 
idency this  cigar- 
ette increased  its 
volume  12  -  fold, 
now  holding  fifth 
place  among  the 
popular  brands. 

The  American 
has  five  vice-presidents,  including  Preston  L. Fowler, 
Richard  J.  Boylan,  James  R.  Coon,  John  A.  Crowe 
and  Edmund  A.  Harvey. 

Mr.  Fowler,  still  officially  a  resident  of  Durham, 
is  chief  of  manufacture,  as  well  as  vice-president. 
He  has  been  in  the  tobacco  industry  more  than  40 
years,  joining  the  present  American  Tobacco  Co.  in 
1930.  In  1931  Mr.  Fowler  was  made  manager  of 
the  Durham  Branch,  continuing  as  such  for  ten 
years,  until  he  went  to  New  York  as  chief  of  manu- 
facture. He  became  a  director  in  1941  and  was 
elected  as  a  vice-president  in  1945. 

OGSBURY  MANUFACTURING  CHIEF 

W.  H.  Ogsbury,  assistant  chief  of  manufacture, 
joined  the  company  in  1923  and  has  resided  in  Dur- 
ham since  1930,  serving  first  as  plant  manager  until 
1932,  when  he  was  appointed  as  an  assistant  to  the 
vice-president  in  charge  of  manufacture.  Mr.  Ogs- 
bury  supervises   manufacturing   operations   in   the 

».,.i.itminniij(* 

•«■■*' 


Leaf  storage  warehouses  of  the  American  Tobacco   Co. 
near  Durham. 


Lucky  Strike  plant  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  in  Reidsville. 
White  building,  center  front,  is  the  Reidsville  office.    Toward  | 
left  are  stemmery,  redrying  plant,  power  plant,  garages,  leafi 
storage  and  leaf  and  wrapping  material  storage.     Back  of  them 
office  is  another  cigarette  factory. 

Durham,  Reidsville,  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  Richmond, 
Va.,  branches  and  has  been  a  director  of  the  com- 
pany since  1930. 

V.  D.  Hager,  manager  of  American's  Durham!) 
branch,  has  been  with  the  company  for  21  years, I 
his  first  job  having  been  with  the  American  Cigarette  ] 
&  Cigar  Co.  in  Louisville,  Ky.  He  went  to  Rich-|j 
mond,  Va.,  in  1931  and  was  connected  with  the  re-fj 
search  laboratory  and  with  cigarette  manufacture.'! 
Since  moving  to  Durham  in  1933,  Mr.  Hager  hasjl 
been  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  cigarettes  and  I 
smoking  tobacco.  He  was  appointed  branch  man-  J 
ager  in  1941. 

D.  J.  Anderson,  manager  of  American's  Reidsvillej 
Branch,  has  been  with  the  company  since  1909,  serv-I 
ing  for  several  years  in  the  Durham  Branch.     Hej 
has  been  in  the  Reidsville  Branch  since  December,}! 
1931. 

STRICKLAND  HEADS  SUPPLIERS 

American  Suppliers,  Inc.,  is  the  subsidiary  which! 
buys,  processes,  stores  and  otherwise  handles  the 
leaf  tobacco  and  other  supplies  required  by  the! 
American  Tobacco  Co.  in  its  manufacture  of  tobacccj 
products. 

J.  F.  Strickland,  who  was  elected  President  m 
American  Suppliers  on  May  29,  1951  has  been  irj 
charge  of  the  company's  eastern  leaf  operations! 
with  headquarters  in  Durham,  for  the  past  22  years! 
He  started  with  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  30  yeartj 
ago,  spending  eight  years  in  Louisville,  Ky.,  befor<| 
locating  in  Durham.  Mr.  Strickland  has  been  i\ 
director  of  American  Tobacco  Co.  since  1946. 

R.  W.  Sands,  manager  of  the  Reidsville  Divisioi 
of  American  Suppliers,  joined  the  American  Tobacc< 
Co.  at  Greensboro  in  August,  1913.  He  became  ; 
buyer  on  the  Mount  Airy  market  in  1916  and  late 
was  buyer  or  head  buyer  on  the  Fairmont,  Wilson 
Kinston,  Richlands,  Smithfield,  Durham  and  Win 
ston-Salem  markets,  as  well  as  on  markets  in  Soutl 
Carolina,    Virginia,    Georgia,    Tennessee   and   Ken 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  85 


tucky.  He  has 
headed  the  Reids- 
ville  Division 
since  May,  1932. 

J.  W.  Williams, 
manager  of  the 
Durham  Division 
of  American  Sup- 
pliers, joined  the 
American  Tobac- 
20  Co.  in  1922  and 
was  associated 
with  the  Reids- 
rille  Stemmery  in  1924-25.  After  about  a  year  in 
Richmond,  Va.,  he  returned  to  Reidsville.  He  has 
oeen  located  in  Durham  since  1928  and  became  man- 
ager of  the  Durham  Division  in  1939. 

DURHAM— REIDSVILLE  PLANTS 

The  Durham  plant  of  the  American  is  located  on 
a  plot  of  about  14  acres  in  the  heart  of  Durham's 
industrial  area,  an  enlargement  of  the  site  of  a 
former  Bull  Durham  plant,  and  near  the  railroad 
lines.  On  its  storage  area  of  about  116  acres,  some 
;hree  miles  from  the  plant,  are  located  some  48  ware- 
houses for  storage  of  leaf  tobacco. 

The  Reidsville  plant,  in  which  Lucky  Strike  cig- 
arettes are  the  exclusive  product,  is  on  a  plot  of  about 
iy%  acres,  an  enlargement  of  the  former  F.  R.  Penn 
robacco  Co.  plant.  The  storage  area,  about  two 
niles  away,  contains  107  acres  on  which  56  leaf 
storage  warehouses  are  located. 

Lucky  Strike  cigarettes,  the  firm's  most  popular 
3rand,  are  manufactured  in  Durham,  as  well  as  in 
Reidsville,  and  also  in  the  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  Rich- 
mond, Va.,  plants.  Other  popular  cigarettes  manu- 
factured in  the  Durham  plant  include  Pall  Mall, 
Herbert  Tareyton,  Johnnie  Walker,  Sweet  Caporal, 
Lord  Salisbury,  Melachrino,  Sovereign  and  One 
Eleven  (111 — for  the  New  York  headquarters  ad- 
dress— 111  Fifth  Avenue). 

Bull  Durham  smoking  tobacco,  of  course,  had  its 
Deginning  as  such  in  Durham  soon  after  the  end  of 
;he  Civil  War.  John  Ruffin  Green,  whose  plant  had 
3een  raided  by  Federal  soldiers  stationed  nearby  in 
:he  winter  and  spring  of  1865  and  who  recovered 
from  apparent  ruin  when  those  same  soldiers  began 
ordering  "That  good  Durham  tobacco"  in  letters  to 
:he  mayor,  the  postmaster,  the  station  agent  and 
Dthers,  was  making  the  bright  yellow  leaf  into  smok- 
ing tobacco.  John  Y.  Whitted,  a  friend,  is  said  to 
have  pointed  to  a  jar  of  Coleman's  Mustard,  made 
in  Durham,  England,  and  bearing  the  picture  of  a 
bull,  suggesting  that  Green  have  a  picture  made  of  a 
bull  with  Green  sitting  on  his  back  and  use  that  as 
a  brand  for  his  smoking  tobacco. 

KORNER  SPREADS  THE  BULL 

The  suggestion  was  followed,  minus  Green  on  the 
bull's  back.  That  bull  was  painted  on  sheet  iron 
by  James  E.  Berry,  a  refugee  painter  and  buggy 
maker  from  New  Bern.     The  bull  was  facing  east. 


Leaf  storage  warehouses  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
near  Reidsville. 

General  Julian  S.  Carr,  Durham  industrialist  and 
partner  in  the  Bull  Durham  firm,  had  another  bull 
painted,  looking  west.  It  was  this  bull  that  J.  Gil- 
mer Korner,  of  Kernersville,  N.  C,  under  the  pseu- 
donym of  "Reuben  Rink",  with  crews  of  assistants 
pasted  big  and  little  sheets  on  thousands  of  barns, 
fences,  trees  and  other  points  of  vantage  through- 
out the  United  States  and  foreign  countries,  and  even 
plastered  it  on  the  Pyramids  of  Egypt. 

Bull  Durham,  which  topped  all  smoking  tobaccos 
manufactured  and  was  copied  by  other  producers 
for  many  years,  is  manufactured  today  in  Durham 
and  near  the  site  where  it  had  its  beginning.  And 
it  was  Bull  Durham  that  did  most  to  make  "Durham 
Renowned  the  World  Around".  Other  smoking  to- 
baccos manufactured  in  Durham  by  the  American 
are  Drum,  Victory  and  Maryland  Club,  all  popular 
brands.  Other  principal  and  popular  brands  of 
smoking  tobacco  manufactured  by  the  American  in 
its  plants  in  other  states  include  Half  and  Half, 
Tuxedo,  Cutty  Pipe,  Five  Bros.,  Peerless,  Ivanhoe, 
Liberty  and  Honest  Long  Cut,  and  such  high  grade 
smoking  tobaccos  as  Blue  Boar,  Old  English  Curve 
Cut,  Pinkussohn's  Pot  pourri,  Herbert  Tareyton  and 
Serene.  Popular  chewing  brands  include  Cotton 
Boll,  Penn's  Natural  Leaf,  Ivy,  Piper  Heidsieck, 
Yellow  Tag  and  Spearhead.  Many  of  these  brands 
have  been  popular  for  several  generations. 

MAKES  LEADING  CIGAR  BRAND 

The  cigar  business  of  the  American  has  been 
equally  successful  and  the  company  produces  many 
of  the  nation's  leading  cigar  brands.  La  Corona  con- 
tinues as  a  standard  of  excellence  in  Havana  cigars. 
Almost  an  equal  reputation  is  enjoyed  by  the  Antonio 
y  Cleopatra  brand.  In  the  popular  priced  field  El 
Roi  Tan  is  one  of  the  leaders  in  the  industry  in  vol- 
ume of  sales. 

In  addition  to  the  plants  in  Durham  and  Reidsville, 
the  American  Tobacco  Co.  operates  plants  located  in 
Richmond,  Va.,  Charleston,  S.  C,  Nashville,  Tenn., 
Louisville,  Ky.,  Trenton,  N.  J.,  and  in  Philadelphia, 
Scranton,  Wilkes-Barre  and  Ashley  in  Pennsylvania. 
In  these  ten  plants  the  company  manufactures  sev- 
eral hundred  brands  of  cigarettes,  smoking  tobacco, 
plug  and  twist  chewing  tobacco,  cigars  and  other 
types  of  tobacco  products. 


PAGE  86 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


OPERATING  PROFITS  $86,617,000 

Indicative  of  the  continuing  success  of  the  Ameri- 
can Tobacco  Co.  are  the  figures  shown  in  its  Annual 
Report  for  the  year  1950.  Total  company  receipts 
in  1950  amounted  to  $872,663,000.  Operating  profit 
during  the  year  amounted  to  $86,617,000.  Income 
before  taxes  in  1950  amounted  to  $76,724,000  and 
net  income,  after  State  and  Federal  income  taxes 
and  Federal  excess  profit  taxes  had  been  paid  and 
other  adjustments  made,  amounted  to  $41,732,716. 
Net  income  for  the  year  thus  reached  $7.17  per  share 
of  common  stock,  a  slight  reduction  from  the  rate 
in  1949,  due  to  increased  income  and  excess  profits 
taxes.  Dividends  distributed  among  the  64,565  com- 
mon stockholders  at  $4.00  and  the  8,588  preferred 
stockholders  at  $6.00  per  share  amounted  to  $24,- 
676,000  in  1950.  Federal  and  State  income  taxes 
paid  by  the  American  amounted  to  $6.96  per  common 
share. 

The  American  Tobacco  Co.  increased  its  authoriz- 
ed common  capital  stock  at  its  1951  annual  meeting 
from  6,000,000  to  10,000,000  shares.  Only  5,472,138 
shares  of  common  stock  had  been  issued  by  the  end 
of  last  year.  The  authorized  preferred  capital  stock 
is  540,106  shares,  of  which  526,997  had  been  issued 
up  to  December  31,  1950. 

A  breakdown  of  the  receipts  and  expenditures  of 
the  American  Tobacco  Co.  for  last  year  reveals  in- 
teresting information.  Company  receipts  in  1950  of 
$872,663,000  included  $871,621,000  in  goods  sold  and 
$1,042,000  from  dividends,  interest  and  other 
sources.  This  total  was  used  or  was  set  aside  for 
the  following  purposes:  revenue  stamps  and  taxes, 
$453,453,000;  tobacco,  with  applicable  expenses, 
$238,529,000 ;  wages,  goods,  services,  etc.,  $127,249,- 


000 ;  depreciation,  $2,902,000 ;  bond  and  bank  inter- 
est, $8,797,000 ;  dividends  to  stockholders,  $24,676,- 
000;  addition  to  surplus  for  future  needs,  $17,057,- 
000. 

EMPLOYEE  BENEFIT  PLANS 

The  American  Tobacco  Co.  operates  a  retirement 
plan  for  all  of  its  employees  by  which  they  receive 
compensation  after  retirement  on  the  basis  of  length 
of  service  and  salary  rates.  This  supplements  the 
amount  received  from  the  Federal  Old  Age  and  Sur- 
vivor's Insurance  Plan. 

In  addition,  provision  is  made  for  retirement  in 
the  event  of  disability.  Each  employee  receives  two 
weeks  vacation  and  six  paid  holidays  annually.  The 
company  provides  and  pays  for  a  Group  Life  Insur- 
ance Policy  for  each  employee,  maintains  doctors  and 
extensive  medical  facilities  at  its  plants  and  has 
in  effect  a  plan  which  provides  benefits  in  case  of 
sickness. 

The  American  Tobacco  Co.  is  one  of  the  country's 
largest  national  advertisers,  promoting  the  sale  of 
its  products  through  newspapers  and  magazines, 
billboards,  on  radio  and  television  shows  and  in  many 
other  forms.  Particularly  does  the  company  push 
the  sale  of  Lucky  Strike  cigarettes,  introduced  to  the 
public  in  1916  and  one  of  the  increasingly  popular 
brands  in  the  nation.  Advertising  campaigns  have 
included  such  well-known  phrases  for  Lucky  Strike 
cigarettes  as  "It's  Toasted",  "Reach  for  a  Lucky", 
"L.S./M.F.T.  (Lucky  Strike  Means  Fine  Tobacco)", 
and  the  present  slogan  "Be  Happy — Go  Lucky". 
By  the  quality  of  its  products  and  its  promotion  the 
company  has  continued  to  supply  a  large  share  of 
popular  brands  of  tobacco  products  during  the  40- 
odd  years  of  its  operations. 


Liggett  &  Myers  Has  Ultra  Modern  Durham  Tobacco  Plant; 


Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.,  with  headquarters 
at  630  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City,  is  one  of  the 
three  or  four  larger  tobacco  companies  operating  in 
the  United  States.  One  of  its  three  principal  tobacco 
plant  cities  is  Durham  and  among  its  most  popular 
brands  are  Chesterfield  and  Fatima  (King  size)  cig- 
arettes and  Velvet  and  Granger  smoking  tobaccos 
which  are  among  the  leading  brands  in  the  popular 
priced  field. 

Although  not  originally  a  North  Carolina  firm, 
Liggett  &  Myers  has  a  definite  North  Carolina  flavor. 
During  the  past  forty  years  of  its  operation  as  now 
organized  two  of  its  four  presidents  have  been  na- 
tives of  North  Carolina  and  another  educated  and 
developed  in  this  State.  In  addition,  several  of  its 
vice-presidents,  one  chairman  of  the  board  and  num- 
bers of  other  high  officials  were  and  are  natives  of 
North  Carolina. 

Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.  was  organized  in 
St.  Louis,  Mo.,  around  the  Civil  War  period  and  dui- 


ing  its  40  years  became  one  of  the  largest  chewing! 
tobacco  manufacturing  firms  in  the  nation. 

Christopher  Foulks  was  a  tobacco  manufacturer! 
in  St.  Louis.  His  daughter,  Elizabeth  Foulks,  mar-j 
ried  George  Liggett  who  had  come  from  London-1; 
derry,  Ireland.  Their  son,  John  Edward  Liggett,! 
entered  the  plant  of  his  Grandfather  Foulks  at  181 
years  of  age  and  later  became  a  junior  partner.' 
Later  his  brother,  W.  C.  L.  Liggett,  bought  into  the; 
firm  which  then  became  J.  E.  Liggett  &  Bro.  Later! 
Henry  Dausnon  bought  the  brother's  share  and  the* 
firm  then  became  Liggett  &  Dausnon.  Still  later;, 
George  S.  Myers  bought  Dausnon's  interest  and  tha 
firm  became  Liggett  &  Myers. 

RESISTS,  BUT  JOINS  AMERICAN 

By  1884  Liggett  &  Myers  was  one  of  the  big  three 
chewing  tobacco  manufacturers  in  the  nation.  Dur- 
ing that  year  it  produced  27,000,000  pounds  of  to 
bacco,  the  chief  brand  of  which  was  Star.  During 
the  15  years  that  followed  it  resisted  combinations 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  87 


Benjamin  F.  Few,  recently  elected 
president  of  Liggett  &  Myers  Tobac- 
co Go.  Native  of  Grier,  S.  G.;  edu- 
cated and  trained  in  Durham. 


of  tobacco  manufac- 
turers and  during 
the  last  half  of  that 
period  the  firm  was 
fighting  absorption 
by  the  American  To- 
bacco Co. 

Meanwhile,  Thom- 
as Fortune  Ryan 
and  his  Wall  Street 
associates  had  or- 
ganized the  Union 
Tobacco  Company 
of  America  and  ab- 
sorbed two  large 
firms,  one  manufac- 
turing smoking  to- 
bacco and  the  other 
cigarettes.  In  1899 
Mr.  Ryan  informed 
James  B.  Duke, 
president  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.,  that  he 
had  paid  $200,000  for  an  option  to  buy  Liggett 
&  Myers  for  $11,000,000.  He  had  thus  secured  plants 
to  manufacture  the  three  main  tobacco  products — 
cigarettes,  smoking  and  chewing — with  which  to 
fight  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  and  Mr.  Duke.  Mr. 
Duke  had  tried  every  way  possible  to  bring  Liggett 
&  Myers  into  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  and  this  in- 
formation was  very  distressing  to  him.  Mr.  Duke 
and  Mr.  Ryan  were  at  dagger  points.  However,  they 
finally  came  to  terms,  under  which  Liggett  &  Myers 
became  a  part  of  the  American.  When  the  American 
Tobacco  Co.  was  dissolved  in  1911,  Liggett  &  Myers 
became   one   of  the 

five  independent  to-  /  f        / 

bacco    manuf  actur-      •-.../  /       /  V> 

ing  units.  /  /      /  //// 

DULA  OF  LENOIR 
PRESIDENT 

Caleb  C.  Dula  who, 
with  his  brother,  R. 

B.  Dula,  had  been 
with  the  Hammond 
Tobacco  Co.  in  St. 
Louis,  Mo.,  became 
the  first  president  of 
the  reorganized  Lig- 
gett n:  Myers  Tobac- 
co Co.  Mr.  Dula,  a 
native  of  Lenoir,  N. 

C,  had  demonstrat- 
ed his  fine  executive 
ability  to  Mr.  Duke. 
He  had  been  one  of 
the  men  to  accom- 
pany Mr.  Duke  to 
London  in  1901,  as 
a  result  of  which 
trip     the     British- 


American  Tobacco  Co.  was  formed.  By  1904  Mr. 
Dula  had  become  vice-president  of  the  American  To- 
bacco Co.,  a  position  he  held  until  its  dissolution.  He 
continued  as  president  of  Liggett  &  Myers  for  about 
15  years. 

Clinton  White  Toms,  one  of  the  three  superin- 
tendents of  the  Durham  City  Schools  to  become  high 
officials  of  Liggett  &  Myers,  was  the  second  presi- 
dent. Mr.  Toms  joined  the  Durham  plant  in  1904 
and  in  1911,  following  the  dissolution  of  the  Ameri- 
can, he  became  vice-president  of  Liggett  &  Myers 
and  was  made  president  succeeding  Mr.  Dula.  He 
served  as  president  until  his  death  in  1936.  James 
W.  Andrews  succeeded  him  as  president,  serving 
until  this  year  when  he  retired  on  January  31. 

B.F.  FEW  NEW  PRESIDENT 

Benjamin  F.  Few,  native  of  Grier,  S.  C,  was 
elected  president  of  Liggett  &  Myers  to  succeed  Mr. 
Andrews.  Mr.  Few,  a  nephew  of  Dr.  William  P. 
Few,  for  many  years  president  of  Duke  University 
(Trinity  College),  received  his  AB  and  MA  degrees 
from  that  Durham  institution.  Following  his  grad- 
uation in  1916,  he  started  in  the  Durham  cigarette 
factory  and  later  represented  the  company  in  the 
Orient.  He  returned  to  the  New  York  office,  became 
a  director  of  the  company  and  later  vice-president  in 
charge  of  advertising.  He  was  senior  vice-president 
at  the  time  of  his  promotion  to  president. 

At  the  same  time  the  directors  elected  Zach  Toms, 
son  of  the  former  president,  C.  W.  Toms,  as  vice- 
president  of  the  company.    He  had  been  with  Liggett 

Recently  completed  plant  of  Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.  in 

Durham.    Said  to  be  the  most  modern  tobacco 

factory  in  the  world. 


PAGE  88 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall.  1951 


J.    Camden    Hundley,    director  James    E.    Farley,    director    in 

and    manager    of    the    Durham  charge  of  leaf  buying  for  Lig- 

j)lant   of  Liggett   &   Myers    To-  gett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.    Na- 

bacco    Co.     Native    of    Oxford;  tive  of  Person  County ;  resident 

long  a  resident  of  Durham.  of  Durham. 

&  Myers  since  1922,  a  director  since  1945  and  secre- 
tary since  1947.  He  continues  as  secretary.  Loy 
D.  Thompson,  son  of  Rev.  L.  D.  Thompson,  of  the 
Western  North  Carolina  Methodist  Conference,  who 
had  been  with  the  company  since  1930  and  had  been 
head  of  its  purchasing  department  for  several  years, 
was  elected  as  a  director. 

N.  C.  OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS 

In  fact,  three  of  the  vice-presidents  of  Liggett  & 
Myers,  one  of  them  also  secretary,  the  treasurer, 
and  seven  of  the  11  directors,  exclusive  of  President 
Few,  are  North  Carolinians.  W.  A.  Blount,  Wash- 
ington, N.  C,  a  director  and  vice-president,  in  charge 
of  sales,  was  superintendent  of  manufacture  in  the 
Durham  plant  for  several  years  and  went  to  New 
York  around  1930  as  assistant  to  William  W.  Flow- 
ers. Hugh  E.  White,  native  of  Warrenton,  who  join- 
ed the  firm  in  1911,  is  a  director  and  vice-president, 
in  charge  of  finance,  and  William  L.  Perry,  native 
of  Missouri,  but  former  resident  of  North  Carolina, 
is  director  and  treasurer.  As  noted,  Zach  Toms  is 
vice-president  and  secretary,  and  Loy  D.  Thompson 
is  a  director. 


J.  C.  Hundley,  also  a  director,  is  in  charge  of  the 
Durham  plant.  He  is  a  native  of  Oxford,  but  long 
a  resident  of  Durham.  He  is  a  younger  brother  of 
the  late  George  W.  Hundley,  for  many  years  presi- 
dent of  the  Golden  Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  of  Dur- 
ham. 

J.  E.  Farley,  a  director  in  charge  of  leaf  buying, 
is  a  native  of  Woodsdale,  Person  County,  and  joined 
Liggett  &  Myers  in  1911. 

FORMER  TAR  HEEL  OFFICERS 

T.  Curtis  Gary  was  president  of  the  Gary  Tobacco 
Co.,  Turkish  buying  organization  of  Liggett  &  Myers 
until  his  retirement.  He  now  lives  in  Spring  Lake, 
N.  J.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  brother,  Charles  B. 
Gary,  who  also  became  a  director.  He  died  in  1949. 
Both  were  born  in  Hudson,  Caldwell  County. 

Charles  A.  Livengood,  native  of  Davie  County  and 
graduate  of  Duke  University,  went  to  work  for  the 
former  American  Tobacco  Co.  in  Durham  in  1904. 
He  worked  up  through  the  ranks  and  became  man- 
ager of  the  Durham  plant  of  Liggett  &  Myers  in 
1925,  succeeding  W.  D.  Carmichael.  He  continued 
as  manager  for  20  years  until  he  retired  in  1945 
and  continues  to  live  in  Durham. 

Previously,  W.  W.  Flowers,  native  of  Taylorsville, 
former  Durham  school  superintendent  and  older 
brother  of  Dr.  Robert  L.  Flowers,  recently  retired 
president  of  Duke  University,  was  manager  of  the 
Durham  plant  for  several  years.  He  went  to  New 
York  as  secretary  to  the  executive  committee,  serv- 
ed as  vice-president  for  the  period  around  1920-30, 
and  as  chairman  of  the  board  until  his  death  about 
1940. 

W.  D.  Carmichael,  also  a  Durham  school  head, 
joined  the  tobacco  firm  around  1912  as  assistant  to 
Mr.  Flowers  and  succeeded  him  as  manager  of  the 
Durham  plant.  Mr.  Carmichael  also  went  to  New 
York  around  1925  as  director  and  later  became  vice- 
president  in  charge  of  advertising.  He  retired 
around  1944  and  is  now  enjoying  life  at  Chapel  Hill. 
His  son,  W.  D.  Carmichael,  Jr.,  is  controller  of  the 
Consolidated  University  of  North  Carolina. 

SALES  EXCEEDED  $305,000,000 

Continuing  success  of  Liggett  &  Myers  is  indi- 
cated, as  shown  in  the  1951  annual  report  to  the 


New  and  thoroughly  modern  laboratory  building  of  Liggett  dc 
Myers  Tobacco  Co.  in  Durham 


Cigarette  making  machine  in  the  Durham  plant  of 
Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co. 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  89 


Cigarette  packing  machine  in  the  Durham  plant  of 
Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co. 

stockholders,  by  the  fact  that  the  1950  net  value  of 
sales  of  its  products  amounted  to  $305,547,000,  con- 
siderably more  than  twice  the  amount  shown  for 
the  year  1940.  Stability  is  shown  by  the  fact  that 
the  current  assets  at  the  end  of  1950  reached  $414,- 
588,000,  which  was  at  a  ratio  of  five  to  one  of  its 
current  liabilities — $82,841,000.  Earned  surplus  at 
the  end  of  1950,  to  which  was  added  slightly  more 
than  $8,000,000  in  earned  surplus  for  the  year  1950, 
amounted  to  $103,558,000. 

Liggett  &  Myers  in  1950  showed  profits  from  ope- 
ration of  $59,754,000,  which,  plus  other  income  and 
minus  interest  paid,  amounted  to  net  profits  of  $55,- 
550,000.  This  amount  was  reduced  by  provision  for 
Federal  income  and  excess  profits  taxes  and  State 
income  and  franchise  taxes  amounting  to  $26,492,- 
000,  leaving  a  net  income  for  1950  of  $29,058,000. 
Slightly  more  than  $8,000,000  of  this  was  added  to 
the  earned  surplus,  after  $21,018,800  had  been  paid 
in  dividends  to  stockholders.  Dividends  included 
$1,461,000  to  holders  of  7%  cumulative  preferred 
shares,  and  $19,557,000,  or  5%,  to  holders  of  com- 
mon shares.  The  stock  is  held  by  approximately 
31,600  shareholders. 


Total  capital  stock  of  Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco 
Co.  is  $118,662,125.  This  is  embraced  in  3,911,521 
shares  of  common  stock  issued,  of  the  5,000,000  au- 
thorized, par  value  $25,  and  in  225,141  shares  of 
7%  cumulative  preferred  shares  issued,  of  341,398 
authorized,  par  value  $100. 

The  three  Liggett  &  Myers  units  in  Durham,  St. 
Louis  and  Richmond  employ  approximately  8,200 
regular  employees,  in  addition  to  hundreds  of  sea- 
sonal workers  in  its  stemming,  redrying  and  packing 
plants  and  storage  warehouse  operations.  The  com- 
pany maintains  a  retirement  system  for  its  em- 
ployees, supplementing  retirement  benefits  accumu- 
lated under  the  Federal  Old  Age  and  Survivors'  In- 
surance plan. 

CHESTERFIELDS— FATIM AS  POPULAR 

Chesterfields,  leading  cigarette  brand  of  Liggett 
&  Myers,  was  put  on  the  market  in  1912.  Later  it 
was  built  up  on  a  blend  of  Bright  Leaf,  Burley  and 
Maryland  tobaccos  with  a  dash  of  Turkish  tobacco 
and  became  one  of  the  best  sellers  among  the  na- 
tion's leading  brands.  Chesterfields,  along  with  Fa- 
timas  (King  size),  Piedmont,  Home  Run,  Picayune 
and  Coupon  cigarettes,  as  well  as  Duke's  Mixture, 
Country  Gentleman  and  Buffalo  smoking  tobaccos 
are  all  manufactured  in  the  Durham  plant  of  Lig- 
gett &  Myers. 

These  and  other  popular  brands  manufactured  in 
other  plants  of  the  firm  in  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  and  Rich- 
mond, Va.,  include  Spur  and  Cycle  cigarettes;  Vel- 
vet, Granger,  Buck  Horn,  Corn  Cake,  Dinner  Bell, 
Everyday  Smoke,  Harmony,  King  Bee,  Masterpiece, 
Plow  Boy,  S  &  M,  Summertime,  Sweet  Tip  Top  and 
Virginia  Extra  smoking  tobaccos ;  Spark  Plug,  Star, 
Horse  Shoe,  Drummond  Natural  Leaf,  Fish  Hook, 
J.  T.,  King  Pin,  Masterpiece,  Pick,  Tinsley's  Natural 
Leaf,  Uncle  Sam,  W.  M.  T.  Natural  Leaf  and  Union 
Standard  plug  tobaccos ;  Red  Horse,  Pay  Car  and 
Red  Man  scrap  tobaccos,  Sterling  Sweet  Burley  and 
Sweet  Cuba  fine  cut  tobaccos;  Granger,  Honey  Dip 
and  Picnic  twists  and  Recruit  little  cigars. 


Brown  &  Williamson  Produces  Chewing  and  Snuff  in  State 


Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Corp.,  organized  as 
Brown  &  Williamson,  began  manufacture  of  chew- 
ing tobacco  in  Winston  (-Salem)  in  a  rented  build- 
ing on  February  1,  1894.  This  firm  was  incorporat- 
ed as  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Co.  in  1906  and 
in  1927  it  was  reorganized  as  Brown  &  Williamson 
Tobacco  Corp.  The  new  corporation  acquired  and 
erected  new  plants  in  Louisville,  Ky.,  moved  its  cig- 
arette manufacturing  into  the  new  plants  and  to  a 
plant  in  Petersburg,  Va.  In  January,  1929,  the  main 
office  was  moved  from  Winston-Salem  to  Louisville. 
Smoking  tobacco  manufacturing  was  later  moved  to 
the  Louisville  plant. 

In  Winston-Salem  chewing  tobacco  and  snuff  are 
still  manufactured  in  some  of  the  earlier  buildings 


but  most  of  the  activities  are  now  carried  on  in  Louis- 
ville and  Petersburg.  Principal  chewing  brands 
manufactured  in  Winston-Salem  are  Bloodhound, 
Red  Juice  and  Sun  Cured.  Tube  Rose  is  the  princi- 
pal brand  of  snuff  manufactured  in  Winston-Salem 
and  is  one  of  the  leading  snuff  brands  in  the  nation. 
In  the  plants  in  Louisville  and  Petersburg  of  Brown 
&  Williamson,  Raleighs,  Kools,  Viceroy,  Wings, 
Avalon  and  Life  cigarettes  and  Sir  Walter  Raleigh, 
Golden  Grain,  Old  North  State,  Target,  Bugler  and 
Kite  smoking  tobaccos  are  manufactured.  Most  of 
these  cigarettes  and  smoking  tobaccos  had  their  ori- 
gin in  Winston-Salem  with  the  earlier  Brown  &  Wil- 
liamson Tobacco  Co.  or  were  acquired  by  this  com- 


PAGE   90 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  i  951 


George  T.  Brown,  organizer  and  for 
several  years  president  of  Brown  & 
Williamson  Tobacco  Go.  He  died  in 
1916. 


pany  through  the 
purchase  of  local  to- 
bacco manufactur- 
ing firms. 

Organization  of 
the  original  Brown 
&  Williamson  firm 
in  1894  followed  the 
panic  of  1893. 
George  T.  Brown, 
with  $10,000  given 
him  by  his  father, 
had  purchased  some 
100,000  pounds  of 
leaf  tobacco  in  South 
Boston,  Va.,  for 
speculative  purpos- 
es. Robert  L.  Wil- 
liamson had  worked 
in  his  father's  plants 
both  in  Yanceyville 
and  in  Winston  and 
had  held  a  job  as  superintendent  of  the  plant  of  T.  L. 
Vaughn  &  Co.  These  two  men,  one  with  the  capital 
and  the  other  with  the  know-how,  got  together  and 
formed  a  partnership.  During  their  first  year  of 
seasonal  operation  they  made  a  clear  profit  of  $10,- 
000. 

Mr.  Brown  was  the  son  of  R.  D.  Brown  and  nephew 
of  Dr.  William  Brown,  who  had  operated  a  small  fac- 
tory in  Mocksville  and  around  1875  moved  their 
business  to  Winston,  operating  as  Brown  Bros.  Mr. 
Williamson  had  worked  in  his  father's  small  plant 
near  Yanceyville  and  his  father,  T.  L.  Williamson, 
also  moved  to  Winston  and  opened  up  a  plant  there. 

Brown  &  Williamson  began  business  in  a  small 
plant  rented  from  Harbour  H.  Reynolds  which  the 
firm  purchased  two  years  later.  The  business  ope- 
rated by  Mr.  Williamson's  father,  the  T.  F.  William- 
son Tobacco  Co.,  was  taken  over  during  the  first 
year  of  operation.  With  it  they  secured  the  trade- 
mark brands  of  Golden  Grain,  Red  Juice  and  Red 
Crow.  Meantime  they  had  started  brands  of  their 
own  including  Bugler,  Bloodhound,  Kite  and  Shot. 

In  1906  the  business  was  incorporated  under  North 
Carolina  laws  as  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Co. 
with  Mr.  Brown  as  president  and  Mr.  Williamson 
as  vice-president.  During  the  next  year  the  firm 
began  the  manufacture  of  snuff  under  the  direction 
of  a  Mr.  Miller  under  the  brand  names  of  Tube  Rose, 
Granny  and  Polly.  Tube  Rose  is  still  manufactured 
in  the  same  plant. 

Brown  &  Williamson  purchased  several  small  to- 
bacco firms.  Casey  &  Wright  was  purchased  in 
1904.  The  J.  G.  Flynt  Tobacco  Co.,  which,  with  its 
predecessors,  had  been  in  business  since  1884,  was 
acquired  in  1925.  With  this  business  came  the  trade- 
marks, Sir  Walter  Raleigh,  part  of  which  name  is 
given  to  Raleigh  cigarettes;  Ox,  Pride  of  Winston 
and  Black  Jack.  Again  in  April,  1926,  the  firm  pur- 
chased the  brands  of  R.  P.  Richardson,  Jr.,  &  Co., 
of  Reidsville,  an  old  firm,  and  acquired  with  it  the 


Old  North  State  brand  of  smoking  tobacco  which 
dates  back  to  1873. 

A  year  after  the  reorganization  of  the  firm  in  1927 
as  the  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Corp.,  the  firm 
introduced  the  well-advertised  and  well-known  Ral- 
eigh cigarettes  (again  "with  a  coupon  on  the  back") . 
Bugler,  the  half -century  old  trademark,  was  revised 
for  use  as  a  roll-your-own  tobacco,  as  was  the  fifteen- 
year-old  Target.  Kool  cigarettes,  inseparably  asso- 
ciated with  the  performing  Penguin,  indicating  cool- 
ness, appeared  in  1931. 

Due  to  its  location  near  the  center  of  population 
of  the  country  and  its  consequent  shipping  advan- 
tages, Louisville  was  selected  as  a  point  for  addi- 
tional plants  and  as  the  location  of  the  head  office. 
Cigarette  manufacturing  was  transferred  to  Louis- 
ville and  Petersburg  and  later  smoking  tobacco  man- 
ufacturing was  transferred  to  Louisville,  leaving 
chewing  and  snuff  manufacturing  activities  exclus- 
ively in  the  Winston-Salem  plant. 

Mr.  Brown,  one  of  the  organizers  and  first  presi- 
dent, continued  to  buy  tobacco  and  look  after  the 
business  end  of  the  firm  until  his  death  in  1916.  Mr. 
Williamson,  vice-president  and  brother-in-law  of  Mr. 
Brown,  continued  to  superintend  the  manufacturing, 
succeeding  Mr.  Brown  as  president  of  the  firm. 
After  Mr.  Williamson  and  his  associates  sold  the 
bulk  of  the  business  in  1927,  he  continued  as  vice- 
president  and  general  manager  of  the  plant  for 
about  two  years.  He  died  in  1938.  Robert  Barton, 
brother  of  Bruce  Barton  of  advertising  firm  fame, 
was  manager  of  the  plant  for  about  two  years  while 
Mr.  Williamson  was  still  active. 

J.  H.  White,  who  had  been  with  Brown  &  William- 
son in  an  earlier  period,  returned  to  Winston-Salem 
in  1927  as  assistant  manager.  In  1929  he  was  made 
manager  of  the  plant  and  continued  as  such  until 
1948  when  he  was  made  general  leaf  supervisor  for 
the  corporation.  Mr.  White  retired  in  1950.  He 
is  a  native  of  Greenville,  N.  C,  and  had  engaged  in 
tobacco  activities 
for  varying  periods 
in  Greenville,  Pe- 
tersburg, Va.,  Can- 
ada, Mexico,  Jamai- 
ca, Venezuela  and 
other  Central  and 
South  American 
countries.  He  con- 
tinues to  reside  in 
Winston-Salem. 

Charles  R.  Frost, 
who  succeeded  Mr. 
White  as  manager, 
is  a  native  of  West 
Virginia.  He  start- 
ed in  Richmond,  Va. 
with  the  Export 
Leaf  Tobacco  Co.  as 
a  buyer.  Mr.  Frost 
snpnt  a  fpw  vpars  Charles  R.  Frost,  general  manager, 
bpenu  d  iew  yectib  Winston-Salem  branch  of  Brown  & 
each  in  Oxford  and      Williamson  Tobacco  Corp. 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  91 


Tarboro  and  joined  Brown  &  Williamson  in  1932. 
In  1940  he  was  transferred  to  Louisville  as  assist- 
ant manager  of  the  leaf  department.  After  a  tour 
of  duty  in  the  Army,  he  returned  to  the  Winston- 
Salem  plant  in  1945  as  assistant  manager  and  was 
appointed  manager  March  1,  1948. 

With  the  beginning  of  operations  of  Brown  & 
Williamson  in  1894,  Walter  Leak,  brother-in-law  of 
Mr.  Williamson,  became  treasurer,  continuing  in  that 
position  until  about  1925.  He  "was  succeeded  by  C. 
A.  Kent,  who  was  treasurer  until  around  1930.  Wil- 
son Gray,  of  the  present  firm  of  Gray  &  Creech,  was 
secretary  from  around  1910  until  about  1925. 

R.  J.  Parrish,  who  was  with  Taylor  Bros,  as  a 
young  man,  joined  Brown  &  Williamson  on  the  sec- 
ond day  of  operation,  February  2,  1894,  and  was 
placed  in  charge  of  the  rolling  room.  Later  he  was 
made  assistant  superintendent  and  in  1907  was  pro- 


moted to  superintendent  and  became  a  director  in 
charge  of  manufacturing.  Early  in  1930  Mr.  Par- 
rish was  transferred  to  the  Louisville  plant  where 
he  directed  the  manufacture  of  Sir  Walter  Raleigh 
and  other  brands  of  smoking  tobacco  for  a  few  years. 
He  was  a  director  until  he  retired  January  1,  1942, 
and  lives  in  Winston-Salem. 

The  Winston-Salem  plant  has  had  and  still  em- 
ploys workers  who  started  their  careers  with  the 
firm  in  its  earlier  days.  Mr.  Parrish  was  an  em- 
ployee, official  and  director  for  48  years.  Mr.  Leak 
was  treasurer  for  31  years.  Mr.  White  was  plant 
manager  for  21  years.  C.  W.  Hutchins,  chief  ship- 
ping clerk,  has  been  with  the  firm  for  34  years.  Ed 
N.  Ellis,  general  utility  man,  started  work  with  the 
plant  when  he  was  eight  years  old,  has  never  missed 
a  pay  day  in  57  years,  and  is  still  going  strong  at  64 
years  of  age.  Many  other  employees  have  served 
Brown  &  Williamson  for  25  years  or  more. 


Taylor  Brothers  State's  Only  Chewing  Plant  Exclusively 


Taylor  Bros.,  Inc.,  Winston-Salem,  manufacturer 
of  chewing  tobacco,  is  the  only  relatively  small  inde- 
pendent tobacco  manufacturing  firm  still  in  opera- 
tion in  North  Carolina.  It  is  one  of  the  few  firms 
surviving  the  "trust"  days  around  the  turn  of  the 
century  and  the  only  one  that  has  lasted  until  now. 
Although  this  firm  passed  through  bad  years  when 
cigarettes  were  replacing  chewing  tobacco,  it  man- 
aged to  pull  through  and  continues  to  be  a  success- 
ful and  fairly  stabilized  producer. 

A  striking  example  of  this  independence  was  dem- 
onstrated by  the  late  William  B.  Taylor,  one  of  the 
founders,  when  he  was  approached  by  the  late  R.  J. 
Reynolds,  founder  and  long  president  of  the  R.  J. 
Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  on  the  subject  of  a  merger. 
The  story  goes  that  "Old  Man  Bill"  asked  "Old  Man 
Dick,"  as  they  were  generally  known  at  the  time, 
"Dick,  if  I  come  in,  who's  going  to  be  boss,  me  or 
you?"  Old  Man  Dick  replied,  "Well,  Bill,  I'd  be  the 
boss  here."  "I  won't  join.  I'll  stay  boss  in  my  little 
puddle,"  said  Old  Man  Bill  firmly  and  decisively, 
and  he  did. 

W.  B.  Taylor,  principal  founder  of  Taylor  Broth- 
ers, was  a  native  of  Virginia,  near  Richmond.  As  a 
young  man  he  was  plant  manager  for  Cameron  and 
Cameron  in  Richmond.  Before  long  he  went  to  Aus- 
tralia to  buy  and  install  tobacco  manufacturing  ma- 
chinery for  an  English  firm.  After  a  year  he  re- 
turned to  Virginia  to  marry  Miss  Elizabeth  McCaw 
Boggs.  He  had  planned  to  return  to  Australia  but 
decided  to  enter  into  a  partnership  with  Col.  Graves 
in  Bedford,  where  they  manufactured  plug  tobacco 
for  several  years.  Then  he  moved  to  Lynchburg, 
forming  a  five-year  partnership  with  a  Mr.  Gish. 
In  their  first  year  they  earned  $22,000  and  reinvested 
it  in  tobacco,  which  was  lost  in  a  fire.  Their  contract 
was  dissolved. 

In  1883,  Mr.  Taylor  decided  to  move  to  Winston. 


He  raised  $10,000 
and  started  his  long 
career  as  a  tobacco 
manufacturer  in 
that  city.  He  brought 
in  as  a  partner  his 
brother,  Jacquelin 
P.  Taylor,  who  had 
attended  Richmond 
College  and  was  well 
equipped  to  handle 
the  office.  W.B.  Tay- 
lor devoted  his  ener- 
gies to  buying  and 
manufacturing. 

In  the  same  block 
in  which  the  Taylor 
Brothers  plant  was 
located,     on     First 
Street  at  Patterson 
Avenue,    were    two 
other  tobacco  facto- 
ries operated  by  Kerner  Bros,   and  W.   B.   Clary. 
These  three  buildings  are  now  embraced  in  the  plant 
of  Taylor  Brothers. 

In  1916,  J.  P.  Taylor  died  and  in  1921  his  sons 
retired  from  the  business.  In  1921,  also,  the  business 
was  incorporated  under  its  former  partnership 
name.  W.  B.  Taylor  continued  its  operation,  bring- 
ing into  the  business  his  two  sons,  Harry  Taylor 
and  Arch  B.  Taylor.  In  1933  the  founder  of  the 
business  died  and  Harry  Taylor  became  president, 
serving  as  such  until  1947,  when  he  died.  Arch  Tay- 
lor, who  had  been  secretary  and  assistant  treasurer 
and  later  vice-president,  became  president  and  sec- 
retary of  the  corporation.  He  continues  as  presi- 
dent and  secretary.  F.  D.  Pfaff  is  vice-president  and 
Miss  Flora  Murray  treasurer. 


Arch  B.  Taylor,  son  of  founder,  W. 
B.  Taylor,  and  second  generation 
president  of  Taylor  Bros.,  Inc.,  Win- 
ston-Salem. 


PAGE   92 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


Taylor  Brothers  employs  approximately  200  work- 
ers and  has  enjoyed  a  stable  and  steady  growth  dur- 
ing the  past  decade  or  more.  This  firm  advertises 
that  it  produces  chewing  tobacco  for  people  in  field, 
factory,  forest  and  mine. 

Principal  chewing  tobacco  brands  originally  man- 
ufactured by  Taylor  Brothers  include  such  popular 
brands  as  Taylor's  Natural  Leaf,  Taylor's  Best,  Tay- 
lor Made,  Ram's  Horn  Twist,  Black  Maria,  Old  Tay- 
lor Twist  and  others.  In  1912,  Taylor  Brothers 
bought  out  the  Whitaker-Harvey  Tobacco  Co.,  tak- 
ing over  its  leaf  supply  and  brands,  continuing  Red 
Coon,  Ripe  Peaches,  Peach  and  Honey  and  Bull  of 
the  Woods.  In  1942,  Taylor  Brothers  purchased  the 
stock  and  brands  of  F.  M.  Bohannon,  continuing  the 
manufacture  of  Bohannon's  Favorite,  Foot  Prints, 
Lucky  Joe  and  others. 

Taylor  Brothers  today  continues  the  fine  spirit  in 
its  organization  which  has  marked  it  from  the  be- 
ginning. As  W.  B.  Taylor,  through  his  long  life, 
knew  the  names  and  characteristics  of  each  of  his 
employees,  so  does  Arch  Taylor  today.  This  close 
alliance  between  owners  and  employees  has  resulted 
in  close  cooperation  with  a  minimum  of  friction. 
Many  of  the  present  Taylor  Brothers  employees  have 


spent  the  most  of  a  lifetime  in  the  service  of  the 
firm.  Many  employee  benefits  are  included  in  the 
plan  of  organization. 

The  founders  of  Taylor  Brothers  were  deeply  re- 
ligious men  of  the  Presbyterian  faith,  extending 
their  independence  and  outspoken  attitudes  into  their 
church  activities.  An  interesting  note  is  that  early 
in  the  days  of  Taylor  Brothers  they  inaugurated  a 
plan  of  beginning  work  each  day  with  a  brief  reli- 
gious service.  This*  included  brief  talks,  songs  and 
prayers  led  by  one  of  the  Taylor  brothers  or  their 
employees.  These  services  usually  lasted  ten  min- 
utes, but  were  extended  to  20  or  even  30  minutes 
when  visiting  ministers  or  religious  leaders  came  in 
to  conduct  services.  This  ritual  is  continued  until 
today,  but  the  time  has  been  changed  to  the  period 
just  before  the  lunch  hour. 

An  interesting  incident  is  related  of  the  earlier 
days.  An  old  Negro  was  offering  a  fervent  prayer. 
In  it  he  said,  "And,  Oh  Lord,  touch  the  hearts  of  Mr. 
Bill  and  Mr.  Jack  and  cause  them  to  pay  us  more 
wages."  One  version  had  Mr.  Bill  vigorously  stat- 
ing, "That's  enough.  That's  enough.  Time  to  go 
to  work  now." 


Cigar  Production  Limited  in  State  -  Greensboro  Leads 


North  Carolina  has  never  engaged  extensively  in 
the  manufacture  of  cigars,  cheroots  and  little  cigars, 
due  primarily  to  the  fact  that  cigar  tobacco  has  never 
been  grown  in  any  quantity  in  this  State.  However, 
cigars  have  been  produced  in  a  dozen  or  more  North 
Carolina  communities  in  the  past  and  one  city, 
Greensboro,  had  continued  for  more  than  50  years 
as  the  center  of  the  cigar  making  industry  in  North 
Carolina.  One  large  and  one  small  cigar  plant  are 
now  operating  in  that  city  while  two  or  three  other 
small  ones  are  producing  handmade  cigars  in  other 
communities. 

Raleigh  formerly  boasted  of  at  least  three  cigar 
manufacturing  plants  at  different  times.  One  of 
these  was  Plumadore  &  Green,  who  operated  proba- 
bly briefly  in  the  early  1880s.  Another  firm  operat- 
ing for  several  years  in  Raleigh  was  J.  M.  Norwood, 
cigar  manufacturer  in  the  period  around  1900-1910. 
This  was  in  a  small  backyard  building.  Briefly,  in 
1925-26,  Frank  Garcia,  a  Cuban,  operated  a  cigar 
plant  in  the  Lightner  Building,  a  few  employees 
making  hand-made  cigars. 

Durham,  in  the  1870s  and  1880s,  had  four  firms 
manufacturing  cigars  and  cheroots.  They  were 
Samuel  Kramer  &  Co.,  Mallory  Cheroot  Co.,  W.  P. 
Henry  &  Co.,  and  Lyon  &  Reed. 

Records  indicate  that  a  small  cigar  plant  was  ope- 
rated in  Wilson  in  the  early  1880s  for  a  few  years. 
Another  cigar  manufacturer  was  Thomas  Sullivan, 
forerunner  of  N.  D.  Sullivan  &  Co.  and  Sullivan  & 
Booe,  who  began  the  manufacture  of  tobacco,  includ- 
ing cigars,  in  a  small  plant  at  Sullivantown,  about 


two    miles    northeast    of    Walkertown    in    Forsyth 
County. 

References  indicate  that  cigars  were  manufactur- 
ed in  probably  half  a  dozen  other  communities  in  the 
State  but  all  were  small  operations. 

EL  MORO  CIGAR  COMPANY 

Greensboro,  N.  C. 

El  Moro  Cigar  Co.,  plant  at  Greene  and  Edwards 
Streets,  office  337  S.  Greene  St.,  Greensboro,  had  its 
beginning  in  1915  when  John  T.  Rees  began  to  man 
ufacture  cigars  by  hand.  The  firm's  name  at  that 
time  was  El-Rees-So  Cigar  Co.  Mr.  Rees  operated 
the  plant  for  several  years  and  the  El-Rees-So  Cigar 
Co.  was  taken  over  by  Pennsylvania  people  and 
continued  operation  until  1932  when  the  business 
closed. 

Meantime  Mr.  Rees  operated  the  Rees-Mitchell 
Cigar  Co.  from  the  early  1920s  until  1926.  At  that! 
time,  he  organized  the  El  Moro  Cigar  Co.,  a  $15,000 
corporation,  with  John  T.  Rees  as  president  and 
treasurer,  J.  C.  McDowell,  Mrs.  Rees'  father,  vice-j 
president,  and  Mrs.  Rees  as  secretary.  Taking  stocil 
in  the  new  corporation  were  R.  B.  Lloyd  and  F.  W 
Lloyd,  brothers,  who  were  engaged  in  the  wholesak 
tobacco  business  and  supplied  the  tobaccos  going 
into  the  cigars. 

Following  the  death  of  Mr.  Rees  a  few  years  ago 
R.  B.  Lloyd  was  elected  president  of  the  corporation 
C.  W.  Lloyd,  son  of  the  other  of  these  brothers,  be 
came  executive  vice-president;  D.  L.  Webster,  vice 
president  in  charge  of  production;  R.  B.  Lloyd,  Jr. 


Summer-fall,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  93 


vice-president  and  general  counsel;  J.  I.  Lloyd,  son 
of  R.  B.  Lloyd,  treasurer;  and  Mrs.  Rees  continues 
as  secretary.  These  officers  are  the  principal  stock- 
holders in  the  company. 

El  Moro  Cigar  Co.  has  increased  its  authorized 
capital  stock  to  $150,000  with  paid  in  capital  of 
$105,000.  In  1933  the  firm  installed  machinery  for 
a  part  of  its  operations  and  in  1948  machinery  was 
installed  to  do  all  of  the  processing  business  in  a 
cigar  plant.  The  firm  now  has  16  cigar  making  Pat- 
terson machines  operated  on  a  rental  basis  from  the 
International  Cigar  Machinery  Co.,  a  subsidiary  of 
American  Machine  and  Foundry  Co. 

In  its  three  story  building  containing  18,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space,  El  Moro  Cigar  Co.  pro- 
duces approximately  150,000  cigars  daily.  The  plant 
employs  135  workers  working  in  two  shifts  and 
has  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $225,000. 

Principal  brands  are  El  Moro  cigars  priced  at 
two  for  15^,  El-Rees-So  cigars  sell  for  5<f: ;  Robert 
Fulton  and  Spanish  Maid  crooks  are  other  popular 
5^  brands.  The  firm  also  produces  other  brands 
popular  in  certain  of  its  trade  areas.  Cigars  are 
distributed  largely  in  about  ten  of  the  Southeastern 
states.  Wrappers  for  the  cigars  are  secured  from 
certain  areas  in  Florida  while  the  fillers  are  a  blend 
of  foreign  and  domestic  tobaccos  purchased  from 
Puerto  Rico,  Ohio,  Wisconsin,  Pennsylvania,  and 
other  points. 

An  interesting  fact  in  connection  with  manufac- 
turing cigars  by  machinery  is  that  the  machines  are 
rights  and  lefts.  That  is,  one  machine  uses  the  left 
half  of  the  wrapper  leaf  and  the  other  the  right  half 
after  the  "bunch"  has  been  prepared  and  wrapped 
in  a  rough  leaf  by  another  machine.  The  rights  and 
lefts  are  used  in  order  to  allow  the  fibers  in  the  leaf 
to  extend  up  and  down  the  cigar,  rather  than  around 
the  cigar.  The  cigars  are  wrapped  in  cellophane  and 
the  label  applied,  after  which  they  are  placed  in 
the  boxes.  These  boxes  are  placed  under  screw 
pressure  where  they  are  allowed  to  remain  for  a 
sufficient  time  to  prevent  puffing. 

A  member  of  the  El  Moro  firm  owns  and  operates 
the  Greensboro  Cigar  Box  Co.  which  manufactures 
cigar  boxes  for  it  and  other  cigar  manufacturers. 


GUILFORD  CIGAR  COMPANY 

Greensboro,  N.  C. 

Guilford  Cigar  Co.,  Lee  Street,  Greensboro,  has 
been  in  operation  for  ten  or  15  years,  owned  and 
operated  by  Swannie  Ingold.  This  plant  is  hand 
operated  entirely.  Principal  brands  are  Big  Henry 
and  OK-Crooks. 

Former  Greensboro  Plants 

Dixie  Cigar  Co.  was  operated  in  Greensboro  for 
ten  years  or  more  by  H.  E.  Holderfield  and  ceased 
activities  about  a  year  ago,  following  Mr.  Holder- 
field's  death.  This  firm  was  hand  operated  during 
most  of  its  life,  but  machinery  was  installed  a  short 
time  before  Mr.  Holderfield's  death.  Principal  brands 
were  El  Necco,  Rum-O-Crooks  and  Van-Tampa. 

Foster  Cigar  Co.  was  in  business  for  about  five 
years,  around  the  1941-46  period,  owned  and  operat- 
ed by  Thomas  Foster.  This  firm  also  produced  hand 
made  cigars.  Its  principal  brands  were  Van-Tampa 
and  El  Necco,  which  brands  were  taken  over  by  the 
Dixie  Cigar  Co.  when  the  Foster  brand  went  out  of 
business. 

Clegg  Cigar  Co.,  operated  by  W.  F.  Clegg  was 
another  popular  cigar  manufacturing  firm  for  25 
years  or  more.  The  plant  closed  in  the  early  1930s. 
One  of  its  popular  brands  was  Brown  Betty. 

Also  in  the  earlier  days  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
through  its  subsidiary,  the  American  Cigar  Co., 
operated  a  large  plant  in  Greensboro.  The  plant 
started  around  1900  and  closed  out  in  1929. 

Henry  Wellington  Cobb,  known  as  "Welly",  a  to- 
bacco manufacturer  in  Greensboro,  also  had  an  in- 
terest in  this  cigar  plant.  Mr.  Cobb  was  a  brother 
of  John  B.  (Jack)  Cobb  who  was  one  of  J.  B.  Duke's 
right-hand  men  in  organization  and  operation  of  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.  during  the  first  quarter  of 
the  century. 

Richlands — Sal  Aragona,  formerly  a  Greensboro 
restaurant  operator,  opened  up  a  cigar  plant  in 
Richlands,  Onslow  County,  not  long  ago  and  re- 
ports are  that  he  is  operating  the  industry  satisfac- 
torily and  successfully. 


Earlier  Tobacco  Manufacturing  in  N.  C.  Communities 


DURHAM 

Durham,  "Renowned  the  world  around",  primarily  as  the 
home  base  of  James  Buchanan  Duke,  probably  the  greatest 
tobacco  genius  in  the  history  of  the  world,  and  also  as 
the  home  city  of  Bull  Durham  smoking  tobacco,  was  the 
earliest  of  the  North  Carolina  communities  to  win  distinc- 
tion as  a  tobacco  manufacturing  center.  Although  tobacco 
manufacturing  of  a  type  was  carried  on  in  isolated  commun- 
ities in  North  Carolina,  probably  in  advance  of  Durham's 
start,  the  "bull  city"  soon  became  the  best  known  of  the 
tobacco  mafnufaturing  centers  in  the  State.  Many  of  Dur- 
ham's earlier  tobacco  manufacturers  shifted  from  one  firm 
to  another,  and  although  Durham  started  manufacturing 
tobacco  some  15  years  ahead  of  Winston,  it  never  had  any- 
thing like  as  many  manufacturing  plants  as  were  operat- 


ing in  Winston  up  to  and  around  the  turn  of  the  century. 

In  fact  most  of  the  early  firms  that  later  moved  to  Dur- 
ham started  in  rural  areas  largely  in  Durham  and  Orange 
counties.  A  small  plug  tobacco  factory  was  operating  in 
18  50  at  Round  Hill  in  rural  Durham  County  and  between 
1850  and  1860,  plug  and  smoking  tobacco  manufacturing 
was  conducted  on  small  farms  and  plantations.  Comple- 
tion of  the  North  Carolina  railroad  to  Durham  in  1854 
served  to  strengthen  that  community  and  to  develop  it  as 
a  tobacco  manufacturing  center. 

In  18  58  Robert  F.  Morris  moved  to  Durham,  and  there 
he  and  his  son  began  manufacturing  tobacco  in  a  small 
house  on  the  present  site  of  the  Bull  Durham  factory.  Soon 
afterwards,  W.  A.  Wright  moved  from  Virginia  to  Durham 
and  joined  Morris  in  the  firm  of  Morris  &  Wright.  They 
produced    "Best    flavored    Spanish    smoking    tobacco".     In 


PAGE  94 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


1861  Mr.  Wright  withdrew  from  the  firm  and  started  a 
small  plant  a  short  distance  east  of  Durham,  but  entered 
the  army  later  that  year.  Around  18  60  Dr.  Richard  Black- 
nail  moved  from  Rougemont  to  Durham,  and  about  two 
years  later  joined  Morris,  forming  the  firm  of  Morris  & 
Blackmail.  Soon  they  sold  out  to  John  Ruffin  Green  from 
Person  County  and  W.  A.  Ward  from  eastern  North  Caro- 
lina.    Ward  soon  sold  out  to  Green. 

BULL,  DURHAM  APPEARS 

It  was  Green's  factory  near  Durham  that  was  raided  by 
both  Confederate  and  Federal  soldiers  in  1865  to  the  extent 
that  Green  felt  that  he  had  been  completely  ruined.  It 
was  not  long,  however,  until  letters  began  to  arrive,  ad- 
dressed to  the  mayor,  the  postmaster  or  other  public  offi- 
cials, inclosing  money  and  asking  for  more  of  that  good 
smoking  tobacco.  A  friend  suggested  to  Green  that  he  use 
the  picture  of  a  bull  on  his  label,  and  this  suggestion  was 
adopted. 

In  1867  William  T.  Blackwell,  native  of  Person  County, 
who  had  made  and  peddled  smoking  tobacco,  moved  to 
Durham  and  became  Green's  partner.  He  bought  Green's 
interest  for  about  $2,000  some  two  years  later,  after  Green's 
death.  Blackwell  took  in  as  a  partner  James  R.  Day  in 
1871,  and  soon  afterwards  admitted  General  Julian  S.  Carr 
as  a  partner.  After  law  suits  over  the  name  of  the  smoking 
tobacco  brand  against  the  successor  to  W.  A.  Wright,  former 
partner  of  Green,  and  against  J.  H.  McBlwee  in  Statesville 
in  1879,  with  the  attendant  publicity,  Bull  Durham  tobacco 
became  very  popular.  It  won  a  gold  medal  and  Certificate 
of  Merit  at  the  Pennsylvania  Centennial  Exhibition  in  187  6. 

J.  Gilmer  Korner  of  Kernersville,  as  "Reuben  Rink",  set 
several  crews  operating  throughout  the  country  plastering 
Bull  Durham  on  every  available  space.  In  fact  Mr.  Korner 
went  into  foreign  countries  and  incidentally  spread  the  Bull 
Durham  on  the  pyramids  of  Egypt.  Sales  increased  rap- 
idly and  production  was  pushed  to  meet  the  growing  demand. 

FIRST  TOBACCO  WAREHOUSE 

In  1871  Blackwell  &  Co.  opened  the  first  warehouse  for 
the  sale  of  leaf  tobacco  in  Durham.  Within  a  few  years 
eight  or  nine  such  warehouses  had  been  opened.  Mean- 
while several  tobacco  producing  firms  began  operation,  in- 
cluding Kramer  &  Webb  (later  Albert  Kramer),  Pinnix 
&  Walker,  H.  J.  Bass,  Thomas  H.  Martin,  and  Thomas  D. 
Jones. 

General  Carr  learned  that  a  machine  had  been  invented 
to  shred  and  grind  smoking  tobacco.  He  soon  had  one  in 
the  Bull  Factory.  William  H.  Kerr,  backed  by  General 
Carr,  invented  a  bag  machine  which  would  bag  25,000  bags 
a  day.  This  machine  is  still  used.  The  Golden  Belt  Manu- 
facturing Co.  was  then  formed,  making  tobacco  bags.  In 
1896  Rufus  L.  Patterson  of  Salem  joined  Kerr  and,  after 
Kerr's  death  by  drowning,  completed  the  manufacture  of  a 
tobacco  bagging  machine  known  as  the  "Automatic  Bagging 
and  Labeling  Machine"  which  would  bag  25  bags  a  minute. 
This  machine  was  perfected  in  the  Bull  Factory — and  that 
was  the  beginning  of  the  American  Machine  and  K'oundry 
Co.,  organized  later  by  Mr.  Patterson  and  still  in  the  Pat- 
terson family. 

Blackwell  &  Company's  assets  in  18  71  were  less  than 
$30,000.  In  1874  the  east  wing  of  the  present  Bull  factory 
was  built,  and  in  1886  the  present  west  wing  was  erected. 
In  that  year  Mr.  Day  retired.  Three  years  later  E.  M.  Mc- 
Dowell &  Co.,  Philadelphia,  succeeded  Blackwell  and  in- 
corporated as  Blackwell's  Durham  Tobacco  Co.  with  capital 
stock  of  $500,000.  Blackwell  and  General  Carr  sold  out 
to  this  corporation,  but  General  Carr  bought  new  stock  and 
became  president  of  the  company.  In  1887  the  firm  was  re- 
chartered  as  Blackwell's  Durham  Corporated  Tobacco  Co. 
with  capital  stock  of  $2,000,000,  soon  increased  to  $4,000,- 
000.  In  1891  it  returned  to  the  former  name  of  Blackwell's 
Durham  Tobacco  Co. 

STARTS   SNUFF  MAKING 

In  18  67  Robt.  F.  Morris  was  manufacturing  Euroka  smok- 
ing tobacco,  and  a  few  years  later  had  snuff  manufacturing- 
equipment,  producing  Ladies'  Choice  Scotch  Snuff.  W.  H. 
Willard  and  S.  F.  Tomlinson  purchased  this  business  in 
1872  and  continued  it  until  1903  when  it  was  sold  to  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.  Eureka  smoking  tobacco  is  still 
made  by  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  and  Ladies'  Choice 
Scotch  Snuff  is  still  made  by  the  American  Snuff  Co. 


Z.  I.  Lyon  &  Co.  (his  son,  J.  Ed  Lyon)  started  a  smoking 
tobacco  plant  near  Durham  producing  Pride  of  Durham 
smoking  tobacco.  The  plant  was  moved  to  Durham  the  next 
year,  and  a  few  years  later  the  business  was  purchased  by 
Edward  J.  Parrish.  J.  Ed  Lyon  later  joined  John  R.  Green. 
Also  in  1869  John  S.  Lockhart  began  manufacturing  tobacco 
and  in  1871  R.  W.  Faucette  started  making  smoking  to- 
bacco, continuing  until  1881.  Other  plants  started  soon 
included  W.  R.  Hughes  &  Co.,  Hughes  &  Link,  W.  H.  Pat- 
terson, and  Lucius  Green,  son  of  John  R.  Green,  who  was 
manufacturing  Indian  Girl  smoking  tobacco.  In  1875  R. 
H.  Wright  &  Co.  was  manufacturing  Orange  of  Durham 
smoking  tobacco  and  by  1880  this  was  one  of  the  largest 
plants  in  Durham.  Several  firms  were  producing  cigars 
and  cheroots  in  the  1870s  and  1880s  including  Samuel 
Kramer  &  Co.,  Mallory  Cheroot  Co.,  W.  P.  Henry  &  Co., 
and  Lyon  &  Reed. 

Hillsboro  in  1872  had  five  tobacco  factories,  but  Hillsboro 
was  too  aristocratic  to  encourage  such  activities.  Here,  as 
at  other  places,  tobacco  factory  owners  also  owned  general 
stores,  and  since  money  was  scarce,  they  tried  to  pay  for 
supplies  and  work  with  due  bills  honored  at  their  stores. 
When  the  road  to  Durham  had  been  completed,  growers 
continued  on  to  that  city.  Tobacco  plants  either  moved  to 
Durham  or  suspended  operations.  In  18  75  Webb  &  Roulhac 
moved  to  Durham  and  was  later  sold  to  W.  L.  Lipscomb. 
The  next  year,  E.  H.  Pogue  moved  his  plant  to  Durham  and 
began  manufacturing  tobacco.  Sitting  Bull  was  his  main 
brand.     J.  Y.  Whitted  also  moved  to  Durham  in  1884. 

W.  DUKE  AND  TWO  SONS  START 

Meanwhile,  after  the  surrender  in  1865,  Washington  Duke, 
then  4  5  years  old  and  a  widower  with  several  children,  was 
released  from  the  army  in  New  Bern  and  walked  137  miles 
to  his  home  a  few  miles  north  of  Durham.  He  gathered 
his  children  together,  including  Brodie  Duke,  who  had  also 
been  in  the  army,  and  his  two  younger  half  brothers,  Ben- 
jamin Newton  and  James  Buchanan  Duke.  He  sold  his  300 
acre  farm  and  then  rented  part  of  it  to  raise  a  crop.  AddL 
tional  capuital  included  50^  in  good  money  and  two  blind 
mules  and  a  small  stock  of  leaf  tobacco.  This  tobacco  was 
beaten  and  sifted  into  smoking  tobacco  and  put  in  bags 
labeled  Pro-Bono-Publico.  This  and  200  pounds  of  flour 
were  loaded  on  a  wagon  and  taken  into  the  eastern  part 
of  the  State.  In  exchange  Washington  Duke  received  bacon 
and  20  0  pounds  of  cotton  which  he  sold  in  Raleigh. 

On  his  land,  he  and  his  two  sons,  B.  N.  and  J.  B.  Duke, 
decided  to  continue  manufacturing  and  selling  tobacco. 
They  built  a  small  factory  of  logs,  20  x  30  ft.,  producing 
about  400  pounds  a  day.  In  1866  they  processed  about 
15,000  pounds,  which  sold  from  30^  to  40^  a  pound.  By 
1872  they  were  producing  125,000  pounds  a  year.  Mean- 
while Brodie  Duke  had  raised  a  crop  on  land  rented  from 
his  uncle,  William  Duke.  His  profits  were  so  small  that 
he  became  discouraged  and  joined  his  father  and  brothers. 
Then  in  18  69  Brodie  Duke  moved  to  Durham  and  bought 
an  old  building  containing  two  rooms,  one  over  the  other. 
He  lived  and  kept  his  supplies  in  the  upper  room  and  start- 
ed manufacturing  smoking  tobacco  on  the  first  floor.  His 
chief  brand  was  Semper  Idem  and  later  he  added  Duke  of 
Durham.  Meanwhile  Pro-Bono-Publico  was  finding  a  ready 
sale. 

Then  in  18  74  Washington  Duke  and  his  two  sons,  Ben 
and  Buck,  moved  to  Durham  and  bought  a  factory  on  the 
lot  later  occupied  as  the  east  wing  of  the  Liggett  &  Myers 
factory.  Brodie  operated  in  a  part  of  this  building  sep- 
arate from  his  father  and  brothers.  Later  as  business 
prospered,  two  buildings  were  erected,  one  for  Brodie  and 
the  other  for  Washington  Duke  and  his  two  sons. 

DUKE  STARTS  CIGARETTES 

W.  Duke  &  Sons  Co.,  the  first  formal  partnership,  was 
formed  in  18  78,  consisting  of  Washington  Duke  and  his 
three  sons  and  George  W.  Watts,  whose  father  bought  for 
him  an  interest  which  furnished  the  first  outside  capital. 
Two  years  later  R.  H.  Wright,  who  had  been  successful  in 
the  manufacture  of  Orange  of  Durham  smoking  tobacco, 
joined  the  firm  by  purchasing  Washington  Duke's  share. 
Mr.  Wright,  a  natural  salesman,  handled  the  outside  distri- 
bution. J.  B.  Duke  had  charge  of  the  manufacturing.  B. 
N.  Duke  handled  the  office  and  correspondence  and  Mr. 
Watts  was  treasurer,  handling  the  financial  affairs.  Al- 
though  reasonably   successful,   the   Duke   brands   could   not 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  95 


compete  with  Bull  Durham.  J.  B.  Duke,  dissatisfied,  stated, 
"My  company  is  up  against  a  stone  wall.  I  cannot  compete 
with  the  bull.  As  for  me,  I  am  going  into  the  cigarette 
business". 

So,  in  1881  cigarette  manufacturing  was  started  in  Dur- 
ham. Their  manufacture  had  started  in  Europe  around 
1860  and  by  1869  their  production  had  been  started  in 
.the  United  States.  They  were  still  made  entirely  by  hand 
and  to  produce  them,  300  Jews  were  brought  to  Durham 
by  W.  Duke,  Sons  &  Co.  J.  M.  Seigel,  Russian,  was  put  in 
charge  of  the  cigarette  department,  and  within  a  very  short 
time  Blackwell's  firm  had  employed  his  brother,  David  Sei- 
gel to  head  its  cigarette  department.  Two  years  later  these 
brothers  established  their  own  plant  and  began  manufac- 
turing cigarettes,  the  chief  brand  being  Cablegram. 

INSTALL  CIGARETTE  MACHINES 

In  1884  the  Duke  firm  installed  two  cigarette  making 
machines  which  had  been  invented  by  James  Bonsake. 
These  were  not  too  efficient,  but  William  T.  O'Brien,  Bon- 
sake mechanic,  was  employed  to  make  improvements  and 
changes.  As  a  result,  the  cost  of  producing  cigarettes  was 
reduced  from  80^  to  30 4  per  1000  cigarettes.  A  little  later 
the  tax  on  cigarettes  was  reduced  from  $1.75  to  50<£  per 
1000.  Due  to  these  reductions  in  cost  and  because  the 
Duke  plant  was  over-producing,  the  cost  of  Duke  of  Dur- 
ham cigarettes  was  reduced  from  10^  to  5^  for  a  package 
of  10.  J.  B.  Duke  had  worked  out  a  sliding  cardboard 
package  for  these  cigarettes. 

Meanwhile  to  dispose  of  this  large  production  Mr.  Wright 
had  taken  to  the  field  and  used  many  novel  methods  in 
introducing  and  popularizing  cigarettes.  He  also  visited 
27  large  foreign  cities  in  19  months  promoting  the  sale  of 
cigarettes,  and  by  1889  the  Duke  market  extended  well 
into  Europe,  Asia  and  Africa,  and  cigarettes  were  shipped 
to  more  than  35  foreign  cities.  Due  to  expansion  needs,  a 
new  brick  plant  was  erected  in  1884,  later  the  Liggett  & 
Myers  plant.  In  188  5  Wright  sold  his  interest  to  Washing- 
ton Duke,  and  the  firm  was  incorporated  as  W.  Duke  & 
Sons  Co. 

DUKE  FORMS  AMERICAN 

James  B.  Duke,  in  1890,  following  extensive  conferences, 
joined  with  four  rivals  in  states  north  of  North  Carolina 
and  formed  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  with  a  capital  stock 
of  $25,000,000.  This  was  the  beginning  of  an  organization 
which  dominated  tobacco  manufacturing  in  the  United  States 
for  21  years  and  came  to  be  known  somewhat  odorously  as 
"the  trust".  The  American  Tobacco  Co.  purchased  the 
more  promising  of  the  small  tobacco  firms  and  left  others 
to  die  on  the  vine  through  competition.  In  1898  the  Black- 
well  Company,  with  its  popular  Bull  Durham  brand,  was 
sold  to  the  Union  Tobacco  Co.,  owned  principally  by  Wall 
Street  financiers.  And  in  a  short  time  the  American  To- 
bacco Co.  took  it  over. 

The  21  years  of  operation  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
forms  another  interesting  chapter  in  the  history  of  tobacco 
in  North  Carolina  and  the  nation. 

WEVSTON-SALEM 

Winston,  the  younger  and  more  vigorous  of  the  two 
municipalities  which  joined  in  1913  to  become  Winston- 
Salem,  started  on  its  career  as  a  tobacco  manufacturing 
center  around  1870  and  in  the  40  years  that  followed,  was 
the  site  of  close  to  85  individual  tobacco  manufacturing 
firms.  Unlike  Durham,  its  strongest  competitor,  Winston 
went  in  for  numbers  of  firms.  Durham  centered  around 
two  or  three  large  firms,  never  had  one-fifth  as  many  differ- 
ent manufacturers  as  did  Winston. 

Tobacco  growing  started  in  Forsyth  County  in  1855  when 
Mr.  Loesch  and  Mr.  Banner  bought  "a  couple  of  hundred 
tobacco  plants".  By  1858,  nine  years  after  Winston  was 
incorporated,  several  farmers  were  growing  the  yellow  leaf. 
In  1870  almost  2'50,000  pounds  were  grown  in  the  county. 
The  first  tobacco  factory  of  record  was  operating  in  this 
community  of  300  to  400  people  in  1870.  Major  Hamilton 
Scales  had  converted  a  small  carriage  house'  into  a  tobacco 
plant.  Two  years  later  Major  T.  J.  Brown  added  a  skylight 
to  an  old  frame  stable  and  opened  up  as  the  first  tobacco 
sales  warehouse  in  Winston. 

In  that  same  year,  1872,  two  Davie  County  brothers, 
Pleasant  Henderson  Hanes  and  John  Wesley  Hanes,  started 
a  small  factory  in  Winston.     This,  P.  H.  Hanes  &  Co.,  devel- 


WINSTON-SALEM  TOBACCO  FIRMS 
1884-1951 

Tobacco  firms  that  have  operated  in  Winston-Salem  from 
1884  to  1951  as  remembered  by  R.  J.  Parrish,  retired  offi- 
cial and  director  of  Brown  &  Williamson  Corporation,  in- 
clude 3  6  firms.  These  with  notes  about  some  of  them  are 
as  follows: 

R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.   (State's  largest) 

P.  H.  Hanes  &  Co.  (Sold  to  R.  J.  Reynolds — shifted  to 
textiles) 

Brown  Bros.  (Fathers  of  George  T.  Brown  (Rufus  D. 
Brown)  and  William  Brown   (Dr.  William  T.  Brown) 

Taylor  Bros.  (Started  in  1885  by  W.  B.  &  J.  P.  Taylor- 
still  operated  by  second  generation) 

F.  M.  Bohannon  (Bought  by  Taylor  Bros,  in  1942) 

Bailey  Bros.  (M.  D.  &  P.  S.  Bailey — suspended  in  1920s 
after  a  cigarette  bubble) 

T.  F.  Williamson  (Father  of  R.  L.  Williamson  of  the 
Brown  &  Williamson) 

S.  A.  Ogburn   (Bought  by  Taylor  Bros.) 

Ogburn,  Hill  &  Co. 

Lockett-Vaughn  &  Co. 

R.  L.  Candler  &  Co. 

Leake,  Beall  &  DeVaughn 

W.  A.  Whitaker  &  Co.  (Later  Whitaker  &  Harvey  Tobacco 
Co.,  bought  in  1912  by  Taylor  Bros. — -Father  of  president  of 
R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  John  C.  Whitaker) 

Frank  Butner  (Father  of  General  Butner — Camp  Butner) 

W.  W.  Wood  &  Co.  (Father  of  Word  H.  Wood,  long  head 
of  American  Trust  Co.,  Charlotte) 

Will  Reid  (Father  of  Will  Reid,  men's  clothing  merchant) 

Casey  &  Wright  (Sold  in  1904  to  Brown  &  Williamson) 

J.  L.  Casper  Co.    (Shifted  to  whiskey  manufacturing) 

W.  B.  Ellis  (Father  of  William  B.  Ellis,  Duke  Power  Co., 
manager  in  Greenville,  S.  C.) 

W.  S.  Clary  (Sold  to  Taylor  Bros.) 

B.  F.  Hanes  &  Co.  (Associate,  Philip  Hanes — brothers  of 
P.  H.  Hanes,  Sr.,  and  John  W.  Hanes,  Sr. ) 

W.  T.  Gray  (Smoking) 

Harbour  H.  Reynolds  (Brother  of  R.  J.  Reynolds) 
W.  S.  Scales   (Member  of  firm  of  Liipfert-Scales  Tobacco 
Co.) 

T.  L.  Vaughn  &  Co. 

C.  A.  Reynolds  (Republican  Lieutenant  Governor  of  N. 
C.  in  Russell  Administration) 

Kerner  Bros. 
H.  B.  Ireland  &  Co. 
J.  L.  Newton  &  Co. 
Bynum  &  Cotton 

Brown  &  Williamson  Tob.  Co.    (Still  operating) 
Liipfert-Scales  &  Co.  (Sold  to  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.) 
P.  W.  Dalton  &  Co. 

Hamilton  Scales  (First  Winston  manufacturer,  started 
in  1872) 

Ebert  Payne  &  Co. 

Walker  Bros. 

B.  J.  Gladstone  (On  Hollow  Road,  near  Winston) 

N.  D.  Sullivan  (Walkertown,  near  Winston) 


oped  into  the  largest  tobacco  manufacturing  firm  in  the 
community  in  the  18  80s.  In  18  91  the  firm  was  sold  to  R.  J. 
Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  and  the  Hanes  Brothers  entered  the 
textile  field.  In  that  year,  too,  a  branch  railroad  line  was 
completed  to  Salem  from  Greensboro  where  it  tapped  the 
North  Carolina  Railroad.  This,  and  an  extension  of  this 
line  a  few  years  later  to  what  is  now  North  Wilkesboro, 
added  extensively  to  the  growth  of  the  community  and  the 
expansion  of  the  tobacco  industry. 

HAD  37  PLANTS  IN   1894 

R.  J.  Reynolds,  then  24  years  old,  rode  a  horse  sixty 
miles  to  Winston  in  1874  and  opened  in  18  75  the  first  small 
unit  of  the  present  far-flung  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co. 

By  1894  thirty-seven  factories  were  listed  in  a  directory 
as  operating  in  Winston  (one  in  Salem).  All  except  one  of 
these  plants  were  manufacturing  chewing  tobacco,  most  of 
it  flat  plug,  but  some  twist,  and  about  ten  plants  also  pro- 
duced smoking  tobacco.  Two  of  them  produced  nothing 
but  smoking  tobacco.  Only  one  plant,  W.  F.  Smith  &  Son, 
was  listed  as  manufacturing  cigarettes  as  well  as  smoking 


PAGE   96 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


tobacco.      These    firms    listed    in    18  94    alphabetically    and 
with  the  types  of  tobacco  produced  are  as  follows: 

Bailey  Bros.,  plug;  George  H.  Beal  &  Co.,  plug,  twist; 
Bitting  &  Hay,  plug;  Blackburn,  Dalton  &  Co.,  plug; 
Brown  Bros.,  plug,  twist,  smoking;  Brown  &  Williamson, 
plug,  twist;  S.  Byerly  &  Son,  smoking;  Bynum,  Cotten  & 
Co.,  plug,  twist;  R.  L.  Candler  &  Co.,  plug,  twist,  smoking; 
W.  S.  Clary  &  Co.,  plug,  twist;  Elbert  Payne  &  Co.,  plug, 
twist;  W.  B.  Ellis  &  Co.,  plug,  twist,  smoking;  Hamlen 
Liipfert  &  Co.,  plug,  twist,  smoking;  B.  F.  Hanes,  plug, 
twist;  P.  H.  Hanes  &  Co.,  plug,  twist;  Harvey  &  Rintels, 
plug,  twist;  Hodgin  Bros.  &  Lunn,  plug,  smoking;  Jones, 
Cox  &  Co.,  plug;  Kerner,  Newton  &  Co.,  plug,  twst;  T.  P. 
Leak  Tobacco  Co.,  smoking;  Lockett,  Vaughn  &  Co.,  plug, 
twist;  Ogburn,  Hill  &  Co.,  plug;  M.  L.  Ogburn,  plug;  S.  A. 
Ogburn,  plug,  twist;  Reynolds  Bros.,  plug;  H.  H.  Reynolds, 
plug,  twist,  smoking;  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  plug, 
twist;  W.  F.  Smith  &  Son,  smoking,  cigarettes;  Taylor 
Brothers,  plug,  twist,  smoking;  T.  L.  Vaughn  &  Co.,  plug, 
twist;  Walker  Brothers,  plug;  W.  A.  Whitaker,  plug,  twist, 
smoking;  T.  F.  Williamson  &  Co.,  plug,  twist;  Williamson 
Tobacco  Co.,  plug;  N.  S.  &  J.  J.  Wilson,  plug;  W.  W.  Wood, 
&  Co.,  plug,  twist;  J.  S.  Nissen,  plug,  twist,  smoking 
(Salem). 

BUYING  AND  EXPORTING  FIRMS 

Soon  after  the  turn  of  the  century  several  large  buying, 
processing  and  exporting  firms  established  offices  and  plants 
in  Winston  and  have  continued  operations  through  the 
years.  Among  these  were  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.  of  Great 
Britain,  which  began  operations  there  in  1904;  the  Export 
Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Richmond,  Va.,  established  a  plant  in 
1912.  In  1914  the  Piedmont  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.  (starting 
earlier  as  Wright-Hughes)  was  incorporated  and  in  19  21 
the  Winston  Leaf  and  Storage  Co.  was  organized  and  began 
operations.  Around  1910  only  four  tobacco  warehouses 
were  being  operated  in  Winston.  These  were:  Brown's, 
operated  by  Major  T.  J.  Brown,  later  by  Simpson  &  Glenn 
and  others;  Star  warehouse,  operated  by  Robert  M.  and 
Peter  A.  Gorrell,  Rex  Gass  and  others;  Former's,  operated 
by  the  Gorrells  and  others;  Piedmont  operated  by  James 
K.,  George  S.  and  Charles  M.  Norfleet.  Now  the  Twin-City 
has  11  warehouses. 

An  interesting  sidelight  is  that  in  Durham  in  the  1880s 
the  Southern  Tobacco  Journal  was  being  issued  by  E.  C. 
Hackney.  Some  two  years  later  this  publication  was  moved 
to  Winston.  For  many  years  there  it  was  edited  and  pub- 
lished by  Garland  E.  Webb  who  had  started  as  a  young 
man  as  a  tobacco  auctioneer  in  Danville,  soon  moved  to  Dur- 
ham and  a  few  years  later  took  up  his  residence  in  Winston. 
Col.  Webb,  as  he  was  known,  may  have  carried  this  pub- 
lication with  him  to  Winston.  He  continued  its  operation 
until  about  the  time  of  his  death  in  1932.  Since  that  time 
R.  C.  Carmichael  has  been  editor  and  continues  its  publica- 
tion. 

From  the  turn  of  the  century  the  process  of  consolidating 
tobacco  firms  and  the  elimination  of  others  proceeded  rap- 
idly in  Winston.  The  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  absorbed 
P.  H.  Hanes  &  Co.  and  Brown  Bros.,  two  of  the  larger  firms, 
later  bought  Liipfert-Scales  Tobacco  Co.  and  other  firms. 

Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Co.  absorbed  Casey  & 
Wright  around  1904;  J.  G.  Flynt  &  Co.,  with  its  Sir  Walter 
Raleigh  smoking  tobacco,  was  purchased  in  1923  and  in 
1926  R.  P.  Richardson,  Jr.,  &  Co.,  of  Reidsville,  with  its 
Old  North  State  smoking  tobacco,  was  bought. 

Taylor  Bros,  took  over  and  continues  to  operate  as  a  part 
of  the  firm's  plant,  the  buildings  operated  in  the  same  block 
by  Kerner  Bros,  and  W.  B.  Clary  &  Co.  In  1912  Taylor  Bros, 
bought  the  Whitaker-Harvey  Tobacco  Co.  and  in  194  2  pur- 
chased the  F.  M.  Bohannon  brands. 

R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  operating  the  largest  tobacco 
business  in  the  State,  has  all  of  its  manufacturing  activities 
centered  in  Winston-Salem.  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco 
Co.  was  purchased  in  19  27  by  the  British-American  Tobacco 
Co.  and  reorganized  as  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Cor- 
poration. Only  its  chewing  tobacco  and  snuff  operations 
are  now  carried  on  in  Winston-Salem.  Its  cigarette  and 
smoking  tobacco  activities  are  in  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  Peters- 
burg, Va.  Taylor  Brothers,  Inc.,  manufacturing  chewing 
tobacco  exclusively,  is  the  only  one  of  the  smaller  inde- 
pendent tobacco  firms  to  survive  in  Winston-Salem  and  in 
the  State. 


Kernersville,  in  Forsyth  County,  on  the  Winston-Salem- 
Greensboro  highway,  was  once  an  important  tobacco  manu- 
facturing center,  boasting  half  a  dozen  plants  in  the  25 
years  up  to  the  turn  of  the  century.  Around  1900  they 
shifted  from  tobacco  to  textiles,  largely  knitting  mills.  One 
tobacco  factory  became  a  textile  mill  and  is  now  a  unit  of 
the  Burlington  Mills.  Another  textile  mill  started  around 
that  time  is  now  a  unit  of  Adams-Miliis  Corp. 

Probably  the  first  tobacco  plant  was  Leak  Brothers,  start- 
ed by  William  Leak  in  his  backyard,  soon  after  1875.  After 
a  few  years  a  factory  was  built  on  Main  Street  and  operated 
until  around  1895.  Part  of  the  time  it  was  Leak  Bros.  & 
Hastings,  John  Hastings. 

Another,  started  around  1880  was  operated  by  B.  A. 
Brown.  After  some  15  years  of  operation  he  shifted  into 
textiles,  operating  the  Vance  Mill,  now  a  Burlington  Mills 
unit. 

Kerner  &  Greenfield,  Theodore  E.  Kerner  and  John  M. 
Greenfield,  started  a  factory  in  the  Philip  Kerner  home, 
later  erecting  a  brick  building,  now  the  Crawford  Machine 
Shop  site.  When  Mr.  Kerner  died,  Robert  Galloway  took 
his  place  in  the  firm,  named  Greenfield  &  Galloway.  Later 
Mr.  Greenfield  operated  alone,  until  around  1900.  His 
son,  Kohler  Greenfield,  now  operates  a  feed  store  in  Ker- 
nersville. 

W.  A.  Lowery  &  Son,  Will  and  Will,  Jr.,  operated  a  to- 
bacco plant  from  around  1885  to  1900,  a  frame  building 
with  a  brick  foundation. 

Adkins  &  Shore,  James  P.  Adkins  and  Henry  E.  Shore, 
operated  a  tobacco  factory  in  Kernersville  for  about  a 
decade,  roughly,   1890  to   190  0. 

Beard  &  Roberts  (James  Beard,  father  of  the  late  Dean 
John  Grover  Beard,  UNC  Pharmacy  School,  and  J.  C.  Rob- 
erts) manufactured  tobacco  there  from  around  18  8  5  to 
19  00.  John  G.  Kerner  bought  the  plant  and  changed  it 
into  a  knitting  mill. 

Also,  in  Kernersville,  lived  the  redoubtable  Julius  Gilmer 
Korner  (spelling  changed  along  the  line),  artist,  painter, 
who,  under  contract  for  W.  T.  Blackwell  &  Co.,  plastered 
the  picture  of  Bull  Durham  on  almost  every  wall  and 
signboard  in  this  country,  also  taking  this  noted  animal 
picture  to  the  Rock  of  Gibraltar,  the  Pyramids  of  Egypt, 
and  many  other  far-away  places.  His  home,  named  "Kor- 
ner's  Folly"  because  every  floor  is  on  a  different  level  and 
every  door  a  different  kind,  still  stands  as  the  chief  Kerners- 
ville show  place. 

Large  tobacco  storage  plants  are  now  operated  in  Kerners- 
ville by  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co. 

WaLkertown — Thomas  Sullivan  began  the  manufacture 
of  tobacco  around  18  50  in  a  log  building  in  Sullivantown, 
about  two  miles  northeast  of  Walkertown,  Forsyth  County. 
He  also  manufactured  cigars  later.  Nat  D.  Sullivan,  a  son, 
later  operated  a  tobacco  factory  about  one-fourth  of  a  mile 
away.  His  daughter,  Sally  Sullivan,  married  Phillip  Booe 
and  Booe  became  a  partner,  the  firm  operating  as  Sullivan 
&  Booe.  W.  N.  Poindexter  married  Elizabeth  Sullivan,  an- 
other daughter  of  N.  D.  Sullivan,  and  became  a  partner  in 
the  business  also,  the  firm's  name  becoming  N.  D.  Sullivan 
&  Co.  Sullivan's  Best  was  one  of  the  chewing  brands 
manufactured. 

Earlier  M.  C.  Crews  of  Kernersville  had  married  Sally 
Sullivan,  daughter  of  Thomas  Sullivan.  Their  two  sons, 
Thomas  A.  Crews  and  James  W.  Crews,  formed  a  partner- 
ship as  the  Crews  Manufacturing  Co.  and  manufactured 
tobacco  in  Walkertown.  This  firm  manufactured  one  well 
known  brand,  Yellow  Jacket.  This  brand  and  probably 
some  of  the  equipment  was  purchased  by  Liipfert-Scales 
Tobacco  Co.  in  Winston-Salem  and  in  turn  this  company  was 
taken  over  by  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  which  com- 
pany still  manufactures  Yellow  Jacket.  The  Crews  brothers 
later  started  a  knitting  mill  in  Kernersville. — Data  from 
Thomas  A.  Crews,  Winston-Salem. 

Iiethania — In  this  Forsyth  County  community,  then 
called  Hausertown,  a  tobacco  factory  was  operated  around 
190  0  by  O.  J.  Lehman,  John  Kapp,  of  Kapps  Mill,  Surry 
County,  and  Frank  Butner,  (father  of  General  Butner,  for 
whom  Camp  Butner  was  named).  Part  of  this  factory  is 
now  used  as  the  Bethania  postoffice. 

REIDSVILLE 

Reidsville,  home  of  the  Lucky  Strike  cigarette  plant  of 
the  American  Tobacco  Co.,  the  only  tobacco  product  manu- 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  97 


factured  in  that  city  now,  has  been  engaged  in  tobacco 
manufacturing  for  almost  a  century.  Among  its  well-known 
products  have  been  Old  North  State  smoking  tobacco,  and 
its  fellow-product,  Old  North  State  cigarettes,  still  manu- 
factured by  the  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Corp.  at  its 
Louisville,  Ky.,  plant,  and  Pride  of  Reidsville  smoking 
tobacco. 

Probably  the  first  Reidsville  tobacco  manufacturer  was 
William  Lindsey,  who  owned  at  one  time  about  half  the 
land  on  which  Reidsville  is  located.  His  was  a  going  firm 
in  1858,  and  probably  a  few  years  before.  He  produced 
"Lindsey's  Level  Best",  a  chewing  tobacco,  which  brand 
a  Winston  firm  disputed  his  right  to  use.  He  showed  that 
he  was  producing  this  brand  in  18  58  and  continued  opera- 
tion until  his  death,  when  his  sons,  William  and  Josef  Lind- 
sey took  over  and  continued  the  business  for  several  years. 

Apparently  Robert  P.  Richardson  started  tobacco  manu- 
facturing, probably  on  a  small  scale,  around  the  end  of  the 
War  Between  the  States.  His  son  continued  as  R.  P.  Rich- 
ardson, Jr.,  &  Co.  and  started  the  "Old  North  State"  brand 
of  smoking  tobacco.  The  factory  burned  in  1917.  In  1926 
the  brand  "Old  North  State"  and  equipment  and  supplies 
was  bought  by  Brown  &  Williamson  in  Winston—Salem, 
which  firm  continued  the  smoking  tobacco  and  started  a 
brand  of  cigarettes  by  the  same  name,  still  manufactured 
in  Louisville.  R.  B.  Williamson  III  joined  the  Brown  & 
Williamson  firm  and  directed  production  of  the  smoking 
tobacco  for  a  time.  He  is  a  substantial  citizen  of  Reidsville 
now. 

Major  Mortimer  Oaks,  who  superintended  construction 
and  was  an  official  of  the  Piedmont  Air  Line  Railroad,  Dan- 
ville, Va.,  to  Greensboro,  via  Reidsville,  in  18  63,  bought 
100  acres  of  land  from  William  Lindsey  in  18  70,  moved 
to  Reidsville  and  became  active.  The  next  year  he  and 
Captain  James  Dalton  began  the  manufacture  of  plug  to- 
bacco in  a  small  building.  Buying  leaf  from  the  barns  was 
inconvenient,  so  Major  Oaks  decided  to  do  something  about 
it.  Early  in  187  2'  he  and  James  Allen  opened  the  first  ware- 
house in  Reidsville,  the  Piedmont,  soon  followed  by  four  or 
five  others,  for  the  sale  of  leaf  tobacco. 

Decatur  Barnes  and  Bedford  Crafton,  in  mid-18  71,  built 
a  factory,  3  4x5  2  feet,  and  began  manufacturing  tobacco. 
Their  capacity,  on  a  seasonal  basis,  was  50,000  pounds  a 
year. 

Then,  in  1874,  S.  C.  Penn,  from  Penn's  Store,  Va.,  came 
to  spy  out  the  land,  was  soon  joined  by  his  older  brother, 
Prank  R.  Penn,  and  in  a  small  frame  building,  they  launched 
the  P.  R.  Penn  Tobacco  Co.,  destined  to  become  an  impor- 
tant Reidsville  industry.  It  was  a  success  from  the  start. 
This  firm  made  plug  tobacco,  probably  a  leading  brand, 
Penn's  No.  1.  During  the  early  years  John  N.  Watt,  Reids- 
ville, a  cousin  of  the  Penn  brothers,  became  asosciated  with 
the  firm,  and  a  smoking  tobacco  department  was  added. 

Under  the  firm  name  of  Watt,  Penn  &  Co.  the  plant  pro- 
duced two  brands  of  smoking  tobacco,  Gold  Crumbs,  an 
expensive  product,  and  Queen  Quality,  popular  priced,  which 
was  a  competitor  of  Bull  Durham.  One  of  the  popular  and 
heavy  sellers  was  Red  J  chewing  tobacco.  After  a  number 
of  years  Mr.  Watt  sold  his  interest  to  the  Penns  and  again 
the  firm  name  became  F.  R.  Penn  Tobacco  Co.,  continuing 
as  such  until  it  was  sold  in  1911  to  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.,  a  short  time  before  its  dissolution.  Charles  A.  Penn, 
of  the  second  generation,  became  a  vice-president  of  the 
American  Tobacco  Co.,  serving  until  his  death  in  1941.  His 
brother,  Jefferson  Penn,  who  died  in  1945,  was  with  the 
Reidsville  firm. 

In  the  late  1870s  or  early  1880s  another  important  firm 
was  organized,  Robert  Harris  &  Bro.,  H.  C.  Harris.  This 
firm  manufactured  the  popular  Pride  of  Reidsville  smoking 
tobacco,  a  strong  competitor  in  the  granulated  field.  Due 
to  the  death  of  H.  C.  Harris  and  poor  health  of  Robert  Har- 
ris, the  firm  was  dissolved  in  the  early  1900s. 

The  A.  H.  Motley  Co.  operated  for  many  years  in  Reids- 
ville and  developed  an  important  export  trade,  particularly 
in  China.  Its  principal  smoking  tobacco  was  Dixie  Queen, 
which  was  a  strong  competitor  of  Penn's  Queen  Quality  and 
other  popular  brands.  The  Penn  firm  bought  the  brand 
and  suppressed  it.  The  Motley  firm  went  out  of  business 
not  long  after  this  sale. 

Other  firms  that  operated  for  varying  periods  in  the  18  70s 
and  1880s  in  Reidsville  were  O.  L.  Bailey  &  Co.,  R.  A.  El- 
lington &  Sons,  and  Denny-Lyle  &  Co.,  the  latter  manufac- 
turing  smoking  tobacco. — Most   of   data   supplied   by   Mrs. 


Bettie  Sue  Gardner,  deputy  collector,  Internal  Revenue, 
Reidsville. 

Stoneville — R.  T.  Stone,  who  had  been  a  member  of  the 
tobacco  manufacturing  firm  of  Joyce,  Garrett  &  Stone  (R. 
P.  Joyce,  T.  J.  Garrett)  at  Price  (Grogansville) ,  just  inside 
the  N.  C— Va.  line  in  Rockingham  County  in  the  period 
1885-96,  moved  to  Stoneville  and  organized  the  firm  of  R. 
T.  Stone  &  Co.  (his  brother,  R.  L.  Stone,  a  partner)  and 
manufactured  chewing  tobacco  from  1896  to  1905.  The 
plant  was  converted  to  a  warehouse,  now  operated  as  the 
Stone  wholesale  grocery  firm  by  Clarence  T.  Stone.  W.  P. 
Grogan  &  Co.  was  engaged  in  tobacco  manufacturing  at 
Price  in  those  early  years. 

Madison — Penn  &  Pegram  (Harry  J.  Penn,  related  to 
Reidsville  Penns)  manufactured  tobacco  in  Madison  around 
the  period  1885-1903.  The  plant  burned  in  later  years. 
Also  a  Mr.  Mangrum  operated  a  tobacco  factory  in  Madison 
around  the  period  1890-95.  The  factory  was  later  used  as 
a  leaf  house. 

Yanceyville — C.  D.  Vernon  &  Co.  operated  a  factory  pro- 
ducing chewing  and  smoking  tobacco  in  Yanceyville  around 
the  period  1880-90.  It  was  located  in  front  of  a  Baptist 
church.  The  plant  was  torn  down  and  moved  to  Milton 
and  there  used  as  a  distillery.  J.  A.  Poteat,  father  of  Dr. 
W.  L.  Poteat,  long  president  of  Wake  Forest  College,  also 
manufactured  tobacco  in  Yanceyville  before  the  turn  of  the 
century.  T.  L.  Williamson  operated  a  small  chewing  to- 
bacco plant  near  Yanceyville,  probably  in  the  1880s.  He 
moved  to  Winston  and  operated  there  until  1894,  when  his 
plant  was  taken  over  by  Brown  &  Williamson  which  was 
organized  that  year  with  his  son,  Robert  L.  Williamson,  as 
a  partner.  Still  further  back,  a  tobacco  plant  was  operated, 
probably  before  the  War  Between  the  States,  near  Yancey- 
ville by  either  the  Longs  or  the  Lees. — Data  from  Sterling 
Graves,  Yanceyville. 

Milton — This  village  was  once  a  thriving  tobacco  manu- 
facturing community.  Three  plants  are  listed  as  having 
been  in  operation  there  in  the  early  1880s:  Thomas  E.  Cobb, 
Ottaway  Hatcher,  and  R.  E.  Withers.  A  little  later  Reuben 
Miles  Oliver,  grandfather  of  Charles  R.  Oliver,  of  Reids- 
ville Review,  was  manufacturing  tobacco  at  Milton.  Along 
then  or  soon  afterwards  Winsted  &  Winsted  (Ed  Winsted 
and  his  uncle)  were  manufacturing  tobacco  in  Milton  in 
a  five-story  building.  During  that  period  one  factory  was 
moved  from  Milton  to  Yanceyville  and  continued  operation 
for  a  period. 

GREENSBORO 

Greensboro  around  the  turn  of  the  century,  was  a  thriv- 
ing tobacco  market  and  manufacturing  center,  producing 
plug  tobacco,  cigars  and  snuff,  industries  which  date  back 
to  around  1845.  The  plug  and  snuff  activities  disappeared 
completely,  sales  warehouses  also  disappeared  for  a  number 
of  years,  to  be  revived  during  the  past  decade.  Cigars,  how. 
ever,  continue  to  be  an  important  tobacco  item  in  Greens- 
boro, the  only  city  in  North  Carolina  in  which  cigar  making 
continues  in  force.  Only  a  few  cigar  plants,  all  small,  are 
operated  elsewhere  in  the  State. 

Reuben  Dick  was  the  first  man  recorded  as  a  tobacco 
manufacturer  in  Greensboro,  operating  a  plant  producing 
cigars,  snuff  and  plug  tobacco  on  a  site  near  the  First  Pres- 
byterian Church.  In  18  59  Col.  E.  P.  Jones,  from  Yancey- 
ville, settled  in  Greensboro  and  began  manufacturing  plug 
tobacco  in  South  Greensboro.  He  bought  leaf  from  the 
few  growers  in  Guilford  County,  among  them  Col.  D.  G. 
Neeley  and  Thomas  Buchanan.  Col.  Jones  manufactured 
about  250,000  pounds  of  tobacco  in  1860,  the  first  man  to 
ship  the  product  from  Greensboro.  In  18  61,  he  had  on 
hand  more  than  10,000  pounds,  which  the  Confederate 
Government  took  over  for  the  Army,  paying  him  in  bonds. 
This  halted  the  activity,  since  no  tobacco  was  grown,  the 
few  farmers  left  raising  foods  needed  by  the  Army. 

Again  in  18  74  Col.  Jones  opened  a  plant  in  the  old  Cald- 
well Institute  and  later  in  a  brick  building  where  the  Gate 
City  Laundry  stands  (or  stood  in  1904).  He  also  operated 
a  warehouse  in  which  Col.  Neeley,  Mr.  Buchanan  and  Thomas 
Donnell  were  the  first  to  sell  tobacco.  In  187  6  Eugene 
Morehead  built  a  large  warehouse  on  Ashe  Street,  about 
opposite  Buchanan  Street,  but  it  was  not  a  success  and 
sales  were  discontinued.  W.  E.  Bevill,  in  1882,  built  the 
Farmers  Warehouse  and  developed  a  good  business  which 
continued  well  beyond  the  turn  of  the  century. 


PAGE  96 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


James  W.  Albright  and  David  Scott  opened  the  Star  Ware- 
house in  1883  in  the  old  Patriot  office  which  stood  where 
Rankin  Brothers'  store  stands  (stood  in  1904)  on  South 
Elm  Street.  Houston  Brothers  bought  this  property  and 
built  a  nice  warehouse  on  the  back  lot  on  Davie  Street, 
which  continued  for  several  years  until  it  burned.  Banner 
Warehouse  was  built  on  West  Market  Street  in  1885  by  J. 
Henry  Gilmer  &  Co.,  operating  successfully  for  several 
years  under  different  managements.  Mr.  Hagan  built  Plant- 
ers Warehouse  at  East  Washington  and  Davie  Streets. 

Henry  Wellington  (Welly)  Cobb,  brother  of  John  B. 
(Jack)  Cobb,  a  vice-president  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co., 
was  manufacturing  tobacco  in  Greensboro  before  the  turn 
of  the  century,  one  factory,  probably  his,  having  been  on 
the  site  of  the  O.  Henry  Hotel  annex.  He  developed  a  hunt- 
ing lodge  later  to  become  Sedgefield  Inn. 

A  cigar  factory  operating  in  Greensboro  was  purchased 
around  190  0  by  the  American  Cigar  Co.,  subsidiary  of 
American  Tobacco  Co.,  and  continued  large  operations  un- 
til 19  29,  when  it  was  closed  out.  H.  W.  Cobb  also  had  an 
interest  in  this  plant.  Other  leaders  in  the  tobacco  indus- 
try in  Greensboro  around  that  period  and  before  were  J.  L. 
King,  J.  H.  Whitt,  J.  F.  Jordan,  John  Parker,  Bray  Brothers 
and  W.  E.  Bevill. 

In  the  190  5-10  period  W.  P.  Clegg  started  the  Clegg  Cigar 
Co.,  operating  for  about  25  years,  until  the  early  1930s. 
One  of  his  popular  brands  was  "Brown  Betty".  In  1915, 
John  T.  Rees  started  the  El-Rees-So  Cigar  Co.,  operating 
it  for  a  few  years.  It  had  hard  sledding,  went  into  bank- 
ruptcy and  later  was  bought  by  Pennsylvania  interests, 
operating  until  193  2,  when  it  closed  out.  Meanwhile,  Mr. 
Rees    organized   the    Rees-Mitchell    Cigar    Co.    in    the    early 

19  20s,  continuing  until  1926.  Then  Mr.  Rees  formed  the 
El  Moro  Cigar  Co.,  with  Mrs.  Rees  and  R.  B.  and  F.  W. 
Lloyd,  operating  a  wholesale  tobacco  sales  firm,  as  mem- 
bers of  the  firm.  The  two  Lloyd  families  and  Mrs.  Rees  are 
still  operating  the  industry  satisfactorily.  (See  El  Moro 
item  in  this  issue) . 

Another  small  but  going  firm  is  the  Guilford  Cigar  Co., 
operated  by  Swannie  Ingold  for  the  past  10  or  15  years. 
Principal  brands  are  "Big  Henry"  and  "OK-Crooks",  all 
hand-made  by  a  few  employees.     A  successful  business  for 

20  years  or  more  was  the  Dixie  Cigar  Co.,  owned  by  H.  E. 
Holderfield.  Products  were  "El  Necco",  "Van-Tampe"  and 
"Rum-O-Crooks"  cigars.  Mr.  Holderfield  hand-made  his 
cigars,  putting  in  some  machines  two  or  three  years  ago. 
He  died  a  year  or  more  ago  and  the  business  was  suspended. 
Foster  Cigar  Co.,  owned  by  Thomas  Foster,  made  Van-Tampa 
and  El  Necco  cigars,  brands  later  taken  over  by  Dixie  Cigar 
Co.  The  firm  operated  for  about  five  years,  1941-46. — Most 
data  taken  from  "Greensboro  1808-1904"  by  James  W. 
Albright,  Atty.  R.  D.  Douglas  and  El  Moro  folks. 

STATESVILLE 

Statesville  became  famous  for  its  tobacco  manufacturing 
plants  in  the  last  25  years  of  the  last  century  primarily  as 
a  result  of  the  manufacture  of  Anti-Bellum  smoking  tobacco 
by  J.  H.  McElwee,  as  well  as  through  the  activities  of  half 
a  dozen  or  more  important  firms.  In  fact  Statesville,  even 
if  in  name  only,  still  manufactures  tobacco  by  proxy. 

J.  H.  McElwee  started  manufacturing  tobacco  in  the 
1870s  and  continued  until  around  1933.  In  fact  his  firm 
was  involved  in  a  law  suit  with  Durham  manufacturers  over 
the  use  of  a  bull  on  the  label  of  Anti-Bellum  smoking  to- 
bacco. This  brand  was  in  strong  competition  with  Bull 
Durham  and  other  popular  brands  for  many  years.  Mr. 
McElwee  also  manufactured  Indian  Girl,  a  cheaper  grade 
of  smoking  tobacco,  which  was  started  around  1925,  and 
a  few  years  before  the  plant  closed,  the  firm  was  also  manu- 
facturing Indian  Girl  Cigarettes.  In  fact  cost  of  equipment 
for  cigarette  manufacturing  was  probably  one  of  the  reasons 
why  the  plant  closed  a  few  years  later.  Most  of  the  time 
the  business  was  handled  largely  by  Mr.  McElwee's  son, 
Thomas  N.  McElwee. 

L.  Ash  (Ludwig,  called  Lou)  operated  a  rather  large 
plug  tobacco  manufacturing  plant  for  a  period  of  about  45 
years,  1890-1935.  He  had  a  large  four  story  brick  build- 
ing and  produced  probably  100,000  pounds  of  tobacco  a 
year  in  his  seasonal  operation  for  six  or  eight  months. 
Among  his  brands  were  Full  Bloom,  Choice,  Select  and 
Good  Chew.  His  son  continued  the  business  until  about 
15  years  ago.  In  fact  members  of  the  family  still  have  Full 
Bloom    manufactured    by   contract.      Taylor    Bros,    in    Win- 


ston-Salem did  this  job  by  contract  for  several  years. 

Adams-Powell  Co.  purchased  the  plant  operated  by  Alf 
Turner,  who  had  moved  the  plant  to  Statesville  from  River 
Hill.  This  firm,  operating  in  a  four  story  brick  building, 
probably  manufactured  as  much  as  150,000  pounds  a  year 
during  most  of  the  period  from  1900  to  1925.  The  build- 
ing is  still  standing.  Benjamin  Ash  &  Sons  operated  for 
several  years  before  the  turn  of  the  century,  producing 
probably  100,000  pounds  of  chewing  tobacco  a  year  in  a 
three-story  frame  building. 

Irvin  &  Poston  (George  Irvin  and  Calvin  Poston)  operated 
in  the  1890s  a  chewing  tobacco  plant  in  a  four-story  brick 
building,  now  a  furniture  plant. 

Iredell  Tobacco  Co.,  operated  by  a  Mr.  Charles,  manufac- 
tured chewing  tobacco  for  a  period  in  a  three-story  brick 
building.  One  of  its  brands  was  Iredell's  Best.  L.  Harrill 
operated  for  a  short  time  in  the  late  1880s,  selling  his  plant 
to  L.  Ash.  J.  Stephany  manufactured  tobacco  for  a  short 
time  in  the  18  90s.  H.  Clark  &  Sons  operated  a  chewing  to- 
bacoc  plant  in  the  late  18  90s  and  early  1900s. — Data  from 
M.  E.  Ramsey. 

Mocksville — Brown  Bros.,  composed  of  Rufus  D.  and  Dr. 
William  T.  Brown,  started  the  manufacture  of  tobacco  in 
Mocksville  in  a  plant  in  which  the  firm  also  operated  a  tan- 
nery. Later  this  firm  moved  to  Winston  and  at  one  time 
in  the  1880s  was  manufacturing  more  tobacco  than  was 
produced  by  the  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co. 

M.  D.  Bailey  and  his  brother,  R.  P.  Bailey,  were  natives 
and  residents  of  Mocksville  but  moved  to  Winston  and  start- 
ed Bailey  Bros.,  a  successful  tobacco  manufacturing  firm 
for  many  years. 

WILSON 

Wilson  did  not  remain  long  above  the  North  Carolina 
tobacco  manufacturing  horizons,  but  this  community  cut 
a  wide  swath  for  a  very  few  years  soon  after  the  turn  of 
the  century.  Due  to  the  personalities,  incidents,  produc- 
tions and  other  factors  this  community  was  in  the  spotlight 
for  a  brief  period  before  all  manufacturing  stopped  and 
Wilson  developed  into  one  of  the  largest  tobacco  markets 
and  processing  communities  in  the  State.  Only  two  local 
firms  were  involved  in  these  events  and  they  were  the  only 
tobacco  manufacturers  ever  to  operate  in  Wilson,  except 
for  a  small  cigar  hand  plant  operated  for  a  brief  period 
around  the  18  80s. 

The  Wells-Whitehead  Tobacco  Co.  was  organized  around 
1901-0  2  on  the  proverbial  shoestring  but  within  a  year  had 
attained  extensive  fame  for  its  brand  of  Carolina  Brights 
cigarettes  and  to  a  larger  extent  for  its  Carolina  Bright  and 
Coaxer  smoking  tobacco.  The  firm  consisted  of  Stephen  C. 
Wells  and  his  brother,  R.  S.  Wells,  and  H.  G.  Whitehead. 
The  leaf  stock  and  the  organizing  capital  was  only  $15,000, 
but  with  this  start  they  bought  one  small  cigarette  machine 
and  by  pooling  additional  funds,  secured  two  or  three  others. 

By  its  second  year,  the  business  was  eminently  success- 
ful and  by  the  end  of  that  year,  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
had  cast  its  eyes  on  the  firm  and  soon  after  purchased  con- 
trol and  the  business  for  $150,000.  The  sale  was  kept 
secret  and  continued  under  its  original  name.  All  mail  was 
handled  addressed  in  plain  envelopes  to  a  fictitious  name 
at  a  specified  address  in  New  York  City.  H.  G.  Whitehead, 
at  about  25  years  of  age,  was  president  of  the  company, 
S.  C.  Weeks  was  secretary-treasurer,  and  W.  M.  Carter  was 
manager  of  the  plant.  Whitehead  and  Carter  had  estab- 
lished a  few  years  before  and  were  operating  a  leaf  to- 
bacco buying  and  processing  firm,  and  decided  that  Wilson 
should  also  receive  some  of  the  profits  from  the  manufac- 
turing process. 

However,  the  chief  promoter  of  the  business  was  Frank 
D.  Ware.  Mr.  Ware,  a  promoter  type  of  man  with  some 
tobacco  experience  and  ambitious  ideas,  probably  came  from 
Virginia.  For  a  time  he  was  in  Winston  and  while  there 
attempted  to  organize  a  tobacco  manufacturing  firm  in 
nearby  Thomasville.  This  effort  failed  and  he  visited  Wil- 
son and  struck  fertile  soil.  When  the  Wells-Whitehead 
Tobacco  Co.  resulted,  he  became  factory  manager  and  cig- 
arette producer.  Probably  a  year  after  this  business  start- 
ed, he  pulled  out  and  carried  with  him  a  former  salesman 
of  the  company  to  form  the  Ware-Kramer  Tobacco  Co.  They 
produced  another  popular  brand  of  cigarettes  in  that  period 
— White  Rolls.  Some  time  after  this  firm  started  and  stop- 
ped, Ware  brought  suit  against  the  American  Tobacco  Co 
charging   unfair   methods   of   competition.      The   Ware-Kra- 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  99 


mer  firm  was  awarded  nominal  damages.  Before  the  Amer- 
ican Tobacco  Co.  had  bought  Wells-Whitehead  Tobacco  Co., 
it  had  begun  to  smart  under  the  competition  offered  by 
Carolina  Brights  and  tried  to  overcome  it  by  starting  an- 
other brand,  Virginia  Brights,  manufactured  in  Virginia. 

Soon  the  American  closed  up  Wells-Whitehead  Tobacco 
Co.  and  withdrew  from  that  area.  Meanwhile,  the  Ware- 
Kramer  Tobacco  Co.  was  sold  and  soon  folded  up.  Mr.  Ware 
later  went  to  some  of  the  West  Indies  Islands,  probably 
Jamaica.  Mr.  Whitehead,  the  more  active  of  the  Wells- 
Whitehead  owners,  turned  again  to  buying  and  processing 
leaf  tobacco  and  continues  to  operate  as  such  under  the 
firm  name  of  Whitehead  &  Anderson.  Wilson  today  is  one 
of  the  largest  centers  in  the  State  for  sales  warehouses  and 
processing  plants  including  one  or  both  of  stemming  and 
redrying  operations. 

An  interesting  incident  in  connection  with  the  Wells- 
Whitehead  Tobacco  Co.  is  that  about  the  time  it  was  pur- 
chased by  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  Percival  Smith  Hill 
was  sent  to  Wilson  to  look  after  the  interest  of  the  Ameri- 
can. Previously  he  had  handled  certain  phases  of  operation 
of  the  Bull  Durham  plant  which  the  American  finally  secured 
after  it  had  passed  through  other  hands.  Mr.  Duke  later 
claimed  that  Mr.  Hill  was  his  "find".  It  was  not  long  before 
Mr.  Hill  was  made  vice-president  of  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.  and  after  its  dissolution  in  1911  became  and  remained 
president  of  the  American  for  many  years.  He  was  succeed- 
ed as  such  by  his  son,  George  Washington  Hill. — -Data  from 
H.  G.  Whitehead,  president  of  the  company. 

Wilson,  one  of  the  early  markets  in  the  New  Bright  Belt, 
began  tobacco  sales  in  1890,  when  the  first  warehouse  was 
built  and  operated  by  Woodard  &  Bobbitt,  later  enlarged 
and  still  in  operation.  Since  then  it  reached  the  point  of 
asserting  that  it  is  "the  greatest  tobacco  market  in  the 
world".  Within  its  limits  are  some  18  tobacco  warehouses 
and  some  10  or  12  processing  plants,  operated  by  the  prin- 
cipal buyers  and  numbers  of  smaller  dealers. 

Rocky  Mount — Amelia  Stone,  owner  of  Stone  Tobacco  Co., 
Rocky  Mount,  manufactured  both  chewing  and  smoking  to- 
bacco for  several  years  around  the  turn  of  the  century.  His 
chief  smoking  brand  was  "Stone's  Mixture". 

KALEIGH 

The  Capital  City  did  not  go  in  strong  for  tobacco,  but 
did  have  a  few  manufacturers  and  also  operated  three  or 
four  warehouses  for  leaf  sales  from  188  4  until  after  the 
turn  of  the  century.  Fuquay-Varina  and  Wendell  have 
operated  sales  warehouses  for  many  years,  as  did  Zebulon 
until  the  market  closed  in  1932'. 

James  E.  Pogue,  who  was  operating  a  factory  in  Hender- 
son in  1881-2,  moved  his  plant  to  Raleigh  later  and  operated 
it  for  many  years,  until  his  death.  Three  cigar  manufac- 
turers operated  in  Raleigh  for  varying  periods.  Plumadore 
&  Green  operated  in  the  early  1880s,  probably  briefly.  J.  M. 
Norwood  made  cigars  by  hand  with  a  few  workers  for  sev_ 
eral  years,  around  the  190  0-10  period  in  a  small  backyard 
building.  Garcia  Cigar  Co.  operated  by  a  Cuban,  ran  for 
a  year  or  two,  1925-26,  in  the  Lightner  Building. 

Raleigh  became  a  tobacco  market  Sept.  26,  1884,  when 
the  Pioneer  Warehouse  was  opened  by  W.  C.  Stronach  & 
Co.  at  formal  ceremonies  at  which  Governor  Jarvis  spoke 
and  hundreds  of  visitors  were  present.  It  was  successful. 
A  second,  Capital  Warehouse,  was  opened  by  T.  N.  Jones 
&  Co.  less  than  two  months  later.  Two  days  before  Christ- 
mas, 1884,  the  third  was  built  at  Bloodworth  and  Davie 
Streets  by  Capt.  T.  L.  Love  and  leased  to  Moore  &  Proctor. 
This  lease  was  sold  later  to  E.  R.  and  W.  H.  Aiken,  from 
Granville   County.      This   was   Farmers   Warehouse. 

In  April,  1885,  W.  C.  Stronach  built  a  larger  and  finer 
warehouse  and  it  was  operated  for  a  few  months,  then 
closed.  It  was  opened  and  operated  by  O.  H.  Poster  &  Co. 
as  Foster's  Warehouse.  Again  it  closed,  and  then  an  ex- 
perienced tobacco  man,  Thomas  B.  Moseley,  from  Durham, 
took  it  over  and  operated  it  successfully  as  Stronach's.  The 
Raleigh  market  then  was  handling  about  3,000,000  pounds 
of  leaf.  One  prize  house,  built  by  Latta  &  Myatt,  was 
operated  by  Reid  &  McGee.  Lipscomb  &  Faison,  tobacco 
buyers,  filled  several  buildings  and  floors  with  leaf. 

The  prediction  in  1887  that  Raleigh  would  become  "the 
greatest  tobacco  centre  on  earth"  failed,  and  all  sales  and 
processing  of  leaf  finally  disappeared. 

Kittrell — This  former  metropolis,  now  a  mere  shadow  of 


its  former  self,  once  had  15  different  tobacco  factories.  That 
number  was  listed  in  an  1881-2  directory.  Probably  about 
the  same  time  the  Kittrell  Springs  Hotel  was  flourishing  and 
the  community  was  a  gathering  place  for  the  well-to-do  for 
rest  and  diversion.  Kittrell  even  had  more  tobacco  plants 
than  its  present  thriving  neighbor,  Henderson,  which  had 
nine  factories.  Sales  warehouses  and  tobacco  processing 
plants  are  operating  in  Henderson  now. 

Yadkin  County  had  more  than  20  factories  in  the  last 
quarter  of  the  last  century,  extending  up  into  the  present 
century,  most  of  them  small,  working  from  10  to  as  many 
as  50  employees,  and  all  operating  six  to  eight  months  in 
the  year.  A  directory  in  1881-2  showed  16  plants,  two 
in  Yadkinville,  four  in  Huntsville,  two  in  Jonesville,  four 
in  East  Bend,  and  one  each  at  Richmond  Hill,  Boonville, 
Mount  Nebo  and  Hamptonville. 

Two  of  the  Huntsville  manufacturers  later  moved  to 
Yadkinville.  J.  D.  Hamlin  moved  in  the  mid-1 8 80s  and 
later  the  firm  became  Hamlin  &  Dunnagan,  operating  until 
about  1905.  Chewing  and  smoking  tobacco  were  produced, 
"Bachelor's  Delight"  the  principal  smoking  brand.  W.  L. 
Kelly  also  moved  to  Yadkinville,  continuing  his  plant  until 
the  early  1900s.  Hauser  Bros,  operated  a  small  plant  at 
Yadkinville  around  the  turn  of  the  century-  J-  E.  Zachary 
built  and  operated  a  small  plant  for  several  years,  until 
around  1910,  in  Yadkinville. 

At  Jonesville,  Gwyn,  Wood  &  Co.  and  J.  F.  Bryan  had 
plants.  Warwick  W.  Wood  manufactured  a  chewing  to- 
bacco, named  "Old  Oaken  Bucket",  and  packed  in  a  bucket- 
shaped  container.  He  later  moved  to  Winston  and  operated 
as  W.  W.  Wood  &  Co.,  selling  later  to  R.  J.  Reynolds  To- 
bacco Co.  He  was  the  father  of  Word  H.  Wood,  long  head 
of  the  American  Trust  Co.,  Charlotte.  William  Reeves  later 
operated  a  plant  in  Jonesville,  probably  taking  over  the 
Gwynn,  Wood  building. 

In  1881-2  at  East  Bend  four  firms  were  listed,  A.  Home, 
J.  Henry  Jenkins,  Martin  &  Glenn  and  William  Y.  Poindex- 
ter.  Mr.  Jenkins,  operating  around  1880  to  1889,  sold  his 
plant  to  John  A.  Martin.  His  sons,  James  and  Robert 
Jenkins,  formed  Jenkins  Bros.  Shoe  Co.,  Winston-Salem, 
now  the  Alexander  Apartments  building.  Otis  Wade  ope- 
rated a  small  smoking  tobacco  plant  and  Morse  &  Wade 
(Thomas  E.  Morse)  operated  a  tobacco  bag  stringing  agency 
and  also  manufactured  a  smoking  tobacco  packing  machine. 
Later  Mr.  Wade  moved  to  South  Carolina  and  continued 
to  make  smoking  tobacco  for  several  years. 

Boonville  had  two  tobacco  plants.  Abner  Davis  &  Co. 
operated  a  plant  for  several  years,  starting  in  the  early 
1880s.  Around  18  90  Isaac  Shugar  started  manufacturing 
tobacco  continuing  for  about  a  decade.  Both  produced 
chewing  tobacco. 

Stokes  County — Stokes  County  had  2  2  factories  in  18  81- 
8  2.  Some  later  W.  W.  Dodd,  at  King,  manufactured  a  chew- 
ing tobacco  brand  he  called  "Dodd's  Damdest". 

Surry  County — Surry  boasted  2  5  factories  in  1881-2. 
Sparger  Bros,  had  a  large  plant  in  Mount  Airy,  and  three 
miles  away  at  Green  Hill  was  the  Patterson  Tobacco  Co. 
plant,  a  four-story  building  later  used  by  H.  O.  Woltz  for 
storing  two  million  gladiola  bulbs.  Henry  Snow  had  a 
plant  in  Dobson  in  the  1890s. 


TOBACCOLANI),  U.  S.  A. 

"Tobaccoland,  U.S.A."  artistic  publication  of  Lig- 
gett &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.,  was  first  issued  in  large 
magazine  form  in  1940.  The  current  issue  is  the 
14th  edition.  In  colors,  it  depicts  the  activities  in 
raising,  priming,  curing,  sorting,  marketing,  proc- 
essing, packing  and  manufacturing  the  leaf  into 
its  various  products,  cigarettes,  smoking  and  chew- 
ing and  others.  Pictures  are  numerous,  including 
the  modern  Liggett  &  Myers  plants  and  laborato- 
ries. The  publication  announces  that  it  is  used  in 
the  Library  of  Congress  and  as  a  textbook  in  schools 
and  colleges  and  for  study  and  research  in  agricul- 
ture, geography,  political  economy  and  other  sub- 
jects. 


PAGE  1 00 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


N.  C.  Developed  Tobacco  Machinery,  Equipment,  Supplies 


Important  machinery,  equipment  and  supplies  for 
the  tobacco  industry  have  been  developed  in  North 
Carolina  through  the  inventive  genius  and  organizing 
capacity  of  many  North  Carolina  citizens.  As  a 
result  of  such  activities  several  large  auxiliary  firms 
have  been  organized  and  developed  and  many  con- 
tributions have  been  made  to  inventions  developed 
in  this  state  for  producing,  packing  and  shipping  to- 
bacco products. 

Chief  among  the  corporations  is  the  American  Ma- 
chine &  Foundry  Co.  in  New  York  and  chief  among 
the  inventors  was  Rufus  Lenoir  Patterson,  a  young 
man  from  Salem,  N.  C,  who  founded  this  firm  and 
made  millions  of  dollars  out  of  the  machinery  he 
invented,  developed  and  marketed  to  aid  in  the  manu- 
facture of  tobacco  products.  Mr.  Patterson  com- 
pleted the  development  started  by  him  and  William 
H.  Kerr  of  Concord  of  the  "Automatic  Packing  and 
Labeling  Machine"  in  the  Bull  Durham  plant  in  Dur- 
ham around  1880.  Later  he  invented  and  developed 
an  automatic  cigarette  packing  machine  and  still 
later  perfected  a  workable  cigar  making  machine. 
Mr.  Patterson's  research  and  study  had  been  under- 
written by  General  Julian  S.  Carr  of  W.  T.  Blackwell 
&  Co.,  Durham,  but  after  a  short  time,  as  his  achieve- 
ments became  known,  James  B.  Duke  secured  his 
services  and  entered  into  an  organization  which 
meant  millions  of  dollars  for  them  and  many  million 
of  dollars  saved  and  made  for  the  tobacco  industry 
of  the  country.  At  27  years  of  age  Mr.  Patterson 
became  vice-president  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
—  (See  article  on  American  Machine  and  Foundry 
Co.  next  page.) 

Richard  H.  Wright,  an  important  tobacco  figure  in 
Durham,  established  the  Wright  Machinery  Co. 
there  in  1893,  producing  tobacco  packing  machines. 
He  had  been  engaged  in  tobacco  manufacturing  for 
several  years.  In  1875  he  was  producing  Orange  of 
Durham  smoking  tobacco  and  by  1880  had  one  of 
the  largest  plants  in  Durham.  During  that  year  he 
bought  Washington  Duke's  interest  in  W.  Duke  & 
Sons  Co.,  a  partnership,  and  became  outside  sales- 
man. Mr.  Wright  worked  out  novel  advertising 
stunts,  visited  27  foreign  cities  in  19  months,  and 
popularized  the  new  cigarette  made  by  his  firm.  In 
1885  he  sold  his  interest  to  its  former  owner,  Wash- 
ington Duke.  Soon  Mr.  Wright  turned  his  attention 
to  smoking  tobacco  machinery  and  organized  the 
firm  which  his  nephews,  Richard  and  Thomas,  en- 
larged and  expanded.  Recently  it  was  sold  to  The 
Sperry  Corporation.   (See  article  page  103). 

John  L.  Jones,  Oxford,  was  one  of  many  other 
North  Carolinians  making  contributions  to  machin- 
ery for  tobacco  manufacturing.  Early  in  1873  he 
patented  a  machine  for  making  plug  tobacco  on  the 
endless  chain  principle.  Warrick  W.  Wood,  Winston 
manufacturer,  soon  afterwards,  announced  the  in- 
vention of  a  machine  for  packing  plug  tobacco.  La- 
fayette and  James   B.   Smith  of  Danbury,   Stokes 


County,  contributed  much  to  the  industry  by  invent- 
ing and  patenting  iron  "shapes"  for  manufacturing 
plug  tobacco.  Henry  C.  Hatcher,  Milton  tobacco 
manufacturer,  invented  a  better  plug  shaping  ma- 
chine in  the  1880s  which  was  generally  used  in  the 
1890s.  Around  1880  James  R.  Lawrence  of  W.  T. 
Blackwell  &  Co.  invented  a  "Smoking  Tobacco  Pack- 
er" which  proved  an  important  step  in  the  produc- 
tion and  success  of  Bull  Durham  smoking  tobacco. 
This  machine  was  manufactured  and  sold  by  (J.  R.) 
Lawrence  &  (S.  R.)  Carrington  in  Durham. 

After  Elisha  Slade  and  his  young  negro  slave, 
Stephen,  accidentally  discovered  a  method  of  curing 
tobacco  with  charcoal  which  gave  a  bright  yellow 
color  to  the  leaf  on  his  farm  in  Caswell  County  in 
1856  thus  starting  this  method  of  curing  in  the 
Bright  Belt,  many  improvements  were  made  in  pro- 
cessing tobacco  on  the  farm.  Soon  after  the  flue 
system  was  developed.  Upton  Thomas  Bowden  from 
South  Boston,  Va.,  moved  to  Caswell  County  in  1871 
and  soon  moved  to  Oxford  where,  in  1872,  he  received 
a  patent  for  the  "Bowden  Flue".  Apparently  this 
flue  was  manufactured  later  in  Company  Shop  (Bur- 
lington). James  Morgan  Smith  of  Milton,  Caswell 
County,  patented  a  "tobacco  dryer"  in  1873  which 
was  an  improvement  on  Bowden's  and  soon  was  used 
generally.  T.  B.  Lyon,  Jr.,  Durham,  became  an  im- 
portant flue  producer  around  1875  and  "Dick's  Pat- 
ented Flue  Furnace"  eventually  was  manufactured 
in  Greensboro. 

An  important  step  in  growing  tobacco  was  reach- 
ed in  the  early  1880s  when  it  was  discovered  that 
canvas  stretched  over  the  tobacco  plant  bed  saved 
the  small  plants  from  the  flea  beetle  or  fly  and  also 
protected  them  from  late  frost.  In  the  early  1880s 
Samuel  Garard,  a  planter  near  Durham,  secured 
patent  rights  on  such  a  plant  protector.  Later,  J.  W. 
Tatem,  a  Durham  merchant,  secured  patent  rights 
and  sought  a  monopoly  in  the  production  of  this 
plant  bed  canvas.  For  his  activities,  he  was  given 
the  title  of  "Bug  Tatem",  by  which  name  he  was 
called  the  rest  of  his  life.  E.  J.  Parrish,  Durham, 
was  another  producer  of  plant  bed  cloth. 

Another  side  industry  which  developed  in  connec- 
tion with  the  manufacture  of  smoking  tobacco  was 
the  production  of  tobacco  bags  in  which  to  pack  it. 
This  activity  was  carried  on  for  several  years  as  a 
department  of  the  factory.  In  1899,  however,  the 
Golden  Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  was  organized  in 
Durham  and  began  manufacturing  bags  as  well  as 
the  print  cloth  from  which  the  bags  were  made. 
This  firm  also  produced  bags  for  shipping  small 
machinery  parts.  Also  it  now  prints  the  brands  and 
other  data  on  the  paper  from  which  the  cigarette 
packages  are  made. 

An  important  recent  addition  to  a  side  industry 
was  the  organization  in  the  years  before  World  War 
II  of  the  Ecusta  Paper  Corp.  at  Pisgah  Forest.  (See 
article  on  Ecusta  page  81). 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  101 


>, 

mm  mam   \ 
§M           1    % 

:f3m 

mm    ™li 

&J&E^ftJWrJm\ 

W-':  \*\  Jf**^,Ml~  " 

Wtv4^Em 

-           J 

>m 

{  .  '-'-jBi'"! 

^ffJfL/ 

P&m 

American  Machine  Produces  Tobacco  Industry  Equipment 

By  William  N.  McDonald,  III,  Public  Relations  Assistant  to  the  Vice 
President,  American  Machine  and  Foundry  Co. 

Recently  American  Machine  and  Foundry  Co., 
world's  largest  manufacturer  of  tobacco  machinery, 
established  an  engineering  research  laboratory  in 
Raleigh  to  bring  about  closer  cooperation  with  cig- 
arette manufacturers  in  the  design  and  testing  of 
new  processing  equipment. 

While  today  creating  and  producing  electronic 
and  mechanical  products  for  a  number  of  industries 
and  the  Armed  Forces,  AMF  still  considers  the  to- 
bacco industry  its  prime  customer  and  chief  bene- 
ficiary of  its  engi- 
neering. The  setting 
up  of  the  new  re- 
search laboratory  is 
another  step  in  this 
scheme. 

In  the  words  of 
Morehead  Patter- 
son, chairman  o  f 
AMF's  board  of  di- 
rectors and  presi- 
dent 0  f  t  h  e  com- 
pany, the  labora- 
tory is  an  "on  the 
spot"  operation  in 
the  heart  of  the  to- 
bacco products'  re- 
gion t  o  facilitate 
better  field  test 
study  of  new  devel- 
opments for  the  in- 
dustry before  the 
production  design  stage.  "Closer  association  with 
operating  personnel  of  the  manufacturers,"  he  says 
"will  also  serve  to  step  up  research  into  all  aspects 
of  instrumentation  and  electrical  control  in  the  manu- 
facture of  cigarettes." 


R.  L.  PATTERSON,  INVENTOR 

First  president  of  American  Machine  and  Foundry 
Company  and  one  of  its  founders  in  1900  was  Rufus 
Lenoir  Patterson  II.    He  was>born  in  Salem,  N.  C, 

on  June  11,  1872, 
the  son  of  a  North 
Carolina  lawyer- 
planter.  Mr.  Patter- 
son gave  up  formal 
schooling  at  the  age 
of  15,  worked  a 
short  while  for  a 
railroad,  then  spent 
a  year  studying 
science  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  North 

Latest  model  AMF  Cigarette  Packer      Carolina. 

packs  135  packs  a  minutes.  He    left   the    Uni- 


Catcher  end  of  cigarette  machine 
showing  location  of  measuring  elec- 
trodes. Machine  is  making  cigar- 
ettes and  microfeed  regulator  is 
weighing  and  kicking  out  ofj-ioeight 
cigarettes. 


Rufus  L.  Patterson  Morehead  Patterson 

Father,  left,  founder  and  president  for  many  years  of  American 
Machine  &  Foundry  Co..  and  son,  right,  present  president  of 
this  far-flung  tobacco  machinery  organization.  Father  native 
of  Salem;  son  native  of  Durham. 

versity  to  associate  himself  with  a  North  Carolina 
inventor,  William  H.  Kerr,  who  manufactured  a 
machine  to  make  tobacco  bags.  In  1891,  Mr.  Patter- 
son went  to  England  to  introduce  the  Kerr  machine, 
and  he  remained  there  two  years  studying  machine 
design. 

On  his  return,  he  began  to  experiment  with  to- 
bacco handling  machinery.  At  the  age  of  26,  he  per- 
fected a  complicated  new  machine  which  did  auto- 
matically what  had  previously  required  four  sepa- 
rate machines.     The  new  machine,  known  as  the 


Installation  of  latest  model  AMF  Standard  Cigarette  machines, 
each  capable  of  making  1250  cigarettes  a  minute. 


PAGE  1  02 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1 95 1 


Battery  of  AMF  leaf  stemmers,  sep- 
arators and  stemmer-separators. 


Patterson  Packer, 
weighed,  packed, 
labeled  and  stamped 
smoking  tobacco. 

FOUNDER  AND 
PRESIDENT 

By  the  time  he 
was  28,  Rufus  Pat- 
terson was  the  fore- 
most authority  on 
tobacco  machinery 
in  the  United  States. 
His     leadership     in 


the  field  made  him  the  logical  choice  for  president  of 
American  Machine  and  Foundry  Co.  The  new  firm 
was  organized  under  the  laws  of  the  State  of  New 
Jersey  on  March  26,  1900. 

AMF's  contributions  to  the  technological  progress 
of  the  tobacco  industry  have  been  important  and 
manifold.  The  year  1908  was  a  major  milestone  in 
AMF  history,  for  it  saw  the  introduction  of  three 
important  items  of  automatic  tobacco  processing 
equipment.  One  was  the  Standard  Tobacco  Stem- 
mer,  which  performed  mechanically  the  heretofore 
laborious  and  costly  manual  operation  of  removing 
the  stems  from  leaf  tobacco. 

Also  that  year  AMF  made  what  has  perhaps  been 
its  greatest  contribution  to  the  cigarette  industry  in 
the  Standard  Cigarette  Machine.  This  machine 
manufactured  cigarettes  in  an  endless  rod  of  paper- 
wrapped  tobacco,  cutting  it  into  standard  cigarette 
lengths  at  the  then  rapid  rate  of  300  cigarettes  a 
minute.  Today's  model  of  this  machine  produces 
cigarettes  at  the  rate  of  1,250  a  minute. 

CIGAR-CIGARETTE  MACHINES 

Almost  simultaneously  with  the  cigarette  machine, 
the  company  put  on  the  market  the  Cigarette  Pouch 
Packer  which,  for  the  first  time,  packaged  cigarettes 
automatically.  Its  output  was  45  packs  a  minute. 
The  1951  AMF  Standard  Cigarette  Packer  operates 
at  a  speed  of  135  packs  a  minute. 

The  ingenuity  of  Rufus  Patterson  brought  about 
the  mechanization  of  the  cigar  industry  in  1918 
after  years  of  trial  and  error  in  the  development  of 
a  machine  which  would  automatically  manufacture 
cigars.  While  the  tobacco  stemmer  and  cigarette 
machines  were  being  developed  in  the  early  years 
of  the  century,  AMF  was  concurrently  working  for 
International  Cigar  Machinery  Co.  on  a  machine 
which  many  tobacco  men  declared  to  be  an  outright 
impossibility — a  machine  to  make  cigars. 

On  January  14,  1901,  International  Cigar  Machin- 
ery Co.  was  organized  to  specialize  in  the  develop- 
ment of  machinery  for  the  cigar  industry.  The  late 
Rufus  Patterson  was  elected  head  of  the  company 
which  eventually  became  an  AMF  subsidiary. 

IMPROVED  STEMMING  MACHINE 

This  development  process  took  years  of  difficult 
experimentation  and  the  expenditure  of  $8,000,000. 


Finally,  on  November  19,  1918,  six  newly-developed 
long  filler  cigar  machines  were  installed  in  the  plant 
of  the  Puerto  Rican-American  Tobacco  Co.  for  test- 
ing. The  machines  were  successful  and  today  more 
than  5,000  cigar  machines  are  in  operation.  Machine 
speed  of  today's  long-filler  cigar  machine  is  13  cigars 
per  minute.  The  machine  can  be  adapted  to  manu- 
facture several  hundred  types  and  sizes  of  cigars 
by  modification  of  operating  elements. 

Through  the  years  AMF  added  other  equipment 
to  make  other  contributions  to  improving  further 
the  processing  of  tobacco.  Its  present-day  4-16  Stem- 
ming Machine  handles  a  continuous  flow  of  whole 
leaf  and  can  stem  more  than  6,500  pounds  of  U.  S. 
leaf  in  eight  hours.  The  AMF  4-18  Standard  Sepa- 
rator achieves  separation  of  tobacco  strips  of  any 
size  at  a  rate  of  from  1,000  to  2,500  pounds  per  hour. 
Combined  stemming  and  separating  within  a  single 
unit,  the  new  AMF  4-19  Standard  Stemmer-Separa- 
tor  produces  a  high  yield  of  clean  strip  while  auto- 
matically collecting  and  discharging  all  dust  and 
sand. 

NEW  TYPE  TOBACCO  CURER 

Two  years  ago  AMF  brought  on  the  market  a  new 
type  of  tobacco  curer  known  as  the  AMF  Jet  Tobacco 
Curer.  Employing  the  basic  principles  of  jet  com- 
bustion, it  enables  the  tobacco  farmer  to  cure  his 
tobacco  at  less  cost  since  it  uses  home-type  fuel  oil 
as  against  higher-priced  kerosene  consumed  by  most 
other  tobacco  curers. 

AMF's  most  current  development  for  the  tobacco 
industry  is  an  item  of  electronic  equipment  known 
as  the  Microfeed  Regulator  and  Rejector.  Designed 
to  serve  as  an  attachment  to  the  AMF  Standard  Cig- 
arette Machine,  the  new  product  controls  cigarette 
weights  electronically  thereby  permitting  the  manu- 
facturer to  get  better  uniformity  in  cigarette  pro- 
duction. 

MOREHE AD-PATTERSON  TOWER 

Widow  of  the  late  Rufus  Patterson,  Mrs.  Patter- 
son, now  living  in  New  York,  was  Miss  Margaret 
W.  Morehead  of  Durham,  N.  C.  A  memorial  to  the  I 
Morehead  and  Pat- 
terson families,  the 
bell  tower  on  the 
campus  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  North 
Carolina  at  Chapel 
Hill,  was  presented 
jointly  by  the  late 
Mr.  Patterson  and 
John  Motley  More- 
head,  cousin  of  Mrs. 
Patterson.  Mr.  Pat- 
terson also  gave  a 
wing  of  the  Three 
Sisters  building  at  Jet  tobacco  curer  of  AMF  installed 
Salem  Academy  in  outside  a  n.  c.  tobacco  bam.  its 
memorv  of  his  iet  combustion  fires  from  No.  2  oil 
^  are  said  to  save  30  percent  of  cur- 

(Cont.  on  page  111)      %ng  cost. 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  103 


Wright  Machinery  Co.  Makes  Tobacco  Industry  Machinery 

By  John  L.  Moorhead,  Harvey-Massengale  Co.,  Inc.,  Durham 


R.  H.  Wright,  founder  in  1893  of 
Wright  Machinery  Co.,  Durham,  Im- 
portant Maker  of  Machinery  for  To- 
bacco Industry. 


Wright  Machinery 
Co.,  of  Durham,  one 
of  the  nation's  oldest 
suppliers  of  auto- 
matic packaging 
machinery  for  the 
tobacco  industry, 
was  founded  in  1893 
by  the  late  R.  H. 
Wright. 

Wright  established 
the  company  for  the 
purpose  of  introduc- 
ing in  America  a 
machine  which  auto- 
matically packaged 
smoking  tobacco. 
Success  of  the  ini- 
tial installations  led 
to  the  machine's 
general  acceptance  and  soon  practically  every  smok- 
ing tobacco,  except  granulated  types  which  could  re- 
main fresh  in  a  bag,  was  being  sold  in  machine- 
wrapped  packets. 

Meantime,  Wright  and  his  associates  continued  to 
seek  improvements  on  the  original  machine  and  to 
design  still  other  tobacco  packaging,  labeling  and 
stamping  machinery. 

Today,  Wright  machines  are  used  by  a  steadily 
growing  number  of  industries  other  than  tobacco, 
but  the  company  maintains  a  prime  interest  in  to- 
bacco and  throughout  the  years  has  retained  its 
North  Carolina  flavor.  For  example,  the  president 
and  chairman  of  the  board  of  The  Sperry  Corpora- 
tion, of  which  Wright  Machinery  Co.  is  now  a  sub- 
sidiary, is  Thomas  A.  Morgan,  native  of  Henderson, 
N.  C. 

Wright's  pioneer  work  in  tobacco  equipment  has 
served  as  key  background  for  the  company's  ma- 
chines used  by  other  industries.  The  experience 
gained  in  developing  machines  for  tying  bags  of 


"Duke's  Mixture"  and  other  bagged  tobaccos  was 
invaluable  in  the  development  of  the  first  commercial 
tea  bag  machines.  Because  of  Wright's  experience 
in  developing  machines  which  applied  revenue 
stamps  to  tobacco  pouches  and  tins,  the  firm  was 
encouraged  to  build  machines  which  automatically 
apply  revenue  stamps  to  liquor  bottles. 

More  recently,  Wright  marketed  weighing  ma- 
chines which  incorporate  for  the  first  time  the  prin- 
ciple of  "positive  displacement"  and  permit  a  degree 
of  accuracy  at  high  speeds  superior  to  conventional 
beam  or  spring  scale  weighers.  These  new  type 
weighers  are  known  as  "Hy-Tra-Lec"  and  have  been 
hailed  by  packaging  experts  as  one  of  the  century's 
most  significant  advances  in  weighing  engineering. 
Hundreds  of  the  machines  are  now  used  throughout 
the  world.  Here  again,  Wright's  early  work  with 
the  tobacco  industry  provided  a  solid  background. 

Wright  has  repaid,  in  part  at  least,  the  debt  it 
owes  to  the  tobacco  industry  and  to  North  Carolina, 
by  helping  prove  to  the  nation  at  large  that  Southern 
workmen  are  capable  of  doing  high  precision  ma- 
chine work. 

This  came  about  during  World  War  II  when 
Wright  expanded  its  facilities  and  personnel  and 
converted  to  the  production  of  precision  instruments 
for  the  Armed  Services.  Wright's  outstanding  rec- 
ord indicated  that  work  of  this  nature  could  be  per- 
formed in  the  South  as  well  as  it  was  done  in  more 
established  industrial  Eastern  and  Middle  Western 
industrial  centers.  Since  that  time  other  precision 
manufacturing  plants  have  located  in  the  South, 
including  North  Carolina. 

Today,  Wright  is  again  turning  a  portion  of  its 
facilities  to  defense  production.  The  flavor  of  to- 
bacco, however,  still  remains  and  a  visitor  to  the 
company's  plants  in  Durham  is  impressed  with  the 
large  quantity  of  machines  now  being  produced 
there  for  one  of  the  major  tobacco  companies. 

President  John  B.  Wilson  commented,  "Wright 
and  tobacco  grew  up  together;  they  intend  to  stay 
closely  allied." 


Golden  Belt  Makes  Tobacco  Bags,  Print  Cloth  in  Durham 


Golden  Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  of  Durham  began 
its  corporative  existence  in  1899  but  its  actual  be- 
ginning dated  back  some  30  or  40  years  when  the 
smoking  tobacco  business  in  Durham  was  in  its 
infancy  although  tobacco  bag  making  had  been  an 
adjunct  of  the  tobacco  industry. 

From  its  beginning  it  developed  into  an  impor- 
tant phase  of  the  industry  in  the  late  1870s  and  early 
1880s  when  increasing  quantities  of  Bull  Durham 
Smoking  Tobacco  were  being  distributed  nation- 
wide and  beyond  by  W.  T.  Blackwell  &  Co.   Bags  in 


which  this  tobacco  was  packed  were  made  for  many 
years  in  extra  space  in  the  factory  and  for  many 
years  in  the  basement. 

Incidentally,  stringing  tobacco  bags  for  several 
years  before  and  after  the  organization  of  the  Gold- 
en Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  was  an  important  rural 
industry.  Tobacco  bags  in  sacks  of  hundreds  and 
thousands  were  distributed  through  a  dozen  or  more 
agencies  to  many  thousands  of  homes  in  central  and 
northwestern  North  Carolina,  covering  some  30  or 
40  counties.    Balls  of  yellow  twine  were  distributed 


PAGE  1  04 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


with  them  and  the  process  of  stringing  the  bags  was 
carried  on  by  members  of  many  thousands  of  North 
Carolina  families.  Although  the  pay  for  stringing 
bags  was  low,  it  actually  meant  the  difference  be- 
tween hunger  and  sufficiency  of  daily  food  and  prov- 
ed a  Godsend  to  many  thousands  of  rural  families. 
This  work  was  varied  later  by  the  looping  of  the 
little  cardboard  tag  in  the  string.  This  important 
rural  industry  finally  disappeared  less  than  two 
decades  ago  when  machinery  was  developed  and 
took  over  the  operations. 

Golden  Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  was  incorporated 
in  1899  by  the  late  General  Julian  S.  Carr,  important 
business  and  industrial  figure  in  Durham  for  many 
years  and  a  part  owner  at  the  time  of  W.  T.  Black- 
well  &  Co.  Thomas  B.  Fuller,  cousin  of  W.  W., 
Frank,  and  Jones  Fuller,  became  president  and  was 
actually  in  charge  of  the  business  until  he  resigned 
in  1920  and  died  three  years  later.  He  was  succeed- 
ed by  G.  W.  Hundley,  Sr.,  who  served  as  active  head 
of  the  business  until  his  death  in  1939.  He  was  a 
brother  of  J.  Camden  Hundley,  now  manager  of  the 
Durham  plant  of  Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co. 

J.  M.  McNutt,  who  started  with  the  Corporation 
in  1906  as  manager  of  the  stringing  agency  in  South 
Boston,  Va.,  later  joined  the  firm  in  Durham,  mov- 
ing up  through  the  ranks  and  becoming  president 
in  1939,  a  position  he  continues  to  hold.     Other  of- 


ficers, in  addition  to  President  McNutt,  are  G.  R. 
Parks,  vice-president,  H.  L.  Hilyard,  treasurer,  Jo'm 
W.  Hanlon,  secretary,  and  C.  M.  Davis,  assistant 
secretary  and  assistant  treasurer. 

After  its  incorporation,  the  Golden  Belt  Manufac- 
turing Co.  operated  for  two  years  in  rented  quar- 
ters while  its  plant  on  East  Main  Street  was  be'n  ? 
planned  and  constructed.  In  this  new  plant,  sin°~! 
enlarged,  the  manufacture  of  print  Cloth,  from  wh>h 
the  bags  are  made,  was  started  and  the  Textile  Plant 
has  continued  as  an  important  part  of  the  activities 
The  plant  now  supplies  the  tobacco  trade  the  smok- 
ing tobacco  bags  and  also  manufactures  parts  bags 
for  shipping  bolts,  nuts,  and  other  small  mechanical 
parts.  After  cigarettes  became  a  more  important 
tobacco  product,  Golden  Belt  began  printing  the 
cigarette  wrappers  and  now  supplies  The  American 
Tobacco  Co.  with  a  part  of  its  requirimenets  in 
which  cigarettes  are  wrapped.  The  plant  normally  j 
employs  about  600  workers  in  all  of  its  activities. 

After  W.  T.  Blackwell  &  Co.  was  acquired  around 
the  turn  of  the  century  by  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.,  the  Golden  Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  became  a 
subsidiary  of  the  American  Tobacco  Co.,  and  has 
continued  as  such,  although  it  supplies  smoking  to- 
bacco bags  to  the  tobacco  industry  generally.  Golden 
Belt  for  more  than  50  years  has  been  an  important 
adjunct  to  the  tobacco  industry  and  to  the  economy 
of  Durham  in  which  it  has  operated. 


Directory  Lists  295  N.  C.  Tobacco  Factories  in  1881-82 


North  Carolina  had  295  tobacco  factories  in  opera- 
tion in  1881-2,  according  to  a  directory  published  in 
the  United  States  Tobacco  Journal,  Oscar  Hammer- 
stein  editor.  In  her  book  "The  Bright-Tobacco  In- 
dustry, 1860-1927",  published  by  the  University  of 
North  Carolina  Press,  1948,  Annie  M.  Tilley  re- 
produces this  list,  placing  the  plants  in  their  re- 
spective counties.     The  list  follows: 

Forsyth  (27) — Winston-Salem  (18) — Bitting  &  Whita- 
ker,  Brown  &  Bro.,  Brown  Bros.,  Bynum,  Cotton  &  Jones, 
Martin  Grogan,  Hairston,  Grogan  &  Co.,  P.  H.  Hanes  & 
Co.,  D.  R.  Leak  &  Son,  Ogburn,  Hill  &  Co.,  R.  J.  Reynolds, 
W.  P.  Reynolds,  H.  Scales,  H.  Subbett,  Winston  Smoking 
Tobacco  Co.,  W.  W.  Wood,  Hairston  &  Pay,  E.  F.  Hall,  C. 
Hamlin  &  Co.;  Salem  Chapel  (Z) — G.  H.  Crews,  Reuben 
G.  Crews;  Kernersville  (2) — R.  B.  Kerner,  J.  L.  King; 
Bethania  (2) — O.  J.  Lehman,  C.  R.  Orrender;  B.  S.  Brown, 
Belew  Creek;  J.  F.  Fare,  White  Road;  N.  D.  Sullivan,  Wal- 
kertown. 

Durham  (12) — Durham  (11) — W.  T.  Blackwell  &  Co., 
J.  R.  Day  &  Bro.,  W.  Duke,  Sons  &  Co.,  Durham  Tobacco 
Co.,  R.  T.  Faucette  &  Co.,  Lucius  Green,  Hunt  &  Thomas, 
Isaac  N.  Lenk,  Z.  I.  Lyon  &  Co.,  R.  F.  Morris  &  Son,  W.  S. 
Roulhac  &  Co.;  William  Lunsford,  Flat  River. 

Rockingham  (27) — Reidsville  (10) — D.  Barnes,  J.  S.  Dal- 
ton,  A.  H.  Motley,  S.  C.  Penn,  R.  P.  Richardson,  Jr.,  H. 
Sampson,  R.  W.  Smith,  J.  N.  Watt,  T.  F.  Williamson  &  Co., 
Williamson  &  Vernon;  Leaksville  (6) — Dillard  &  Moir,  Dyer 
&  Millner,  C.  W.  Guerrant,  J.  B.  King,  L.  J.  Martin,  C.  A. 
Reynolds;  Madison  (5) — J.  Z.  Dalton,  G.  W.  Webster,  W. 
A.  Webster,  R.  D.  Williams,  and  S.  B.  Ziegler;  Wentworth 
(3) — J.  B.  Ellington,  L.  B.  Hall,  R.  A.  Ellington  &  Sons; 
Stoneville  (2) — W.  P.  Grogan,  R.  H.  Lewis;  Henry  Snow, 
Aspen  Grove. 

Iredell   (9) — Statesville   (3) — Julian  Allen,  Calvert  &  Mc- 


Kee,  John  F.  McKee;  Eagle  Mills  (3) — N.  T.  Cooper,  Dalton 
&  Kennedy,  Gaither  and  Colvert;  J.  L.  Calvert,  Williams- 
burg;  Peter  Claywell,  Snow  Creek;   Alf  Turner,  River  Hill. 

Davie  (29) — Mocksville  (7) — Booe  &  Payne,  George  M. 
Foster,  Gaines,  Davies  &  Sons,  T.  H.  Gaither,  H.  B.  How- 
ard &  Sons,  Robert  Jordan,  Kelly  &  Stewart;  Smith  Grove 
(5) — Bailey  &  Dulin,  Chaplin  &  Howard,  M.  Kimbraugh, 
John  Taylor,  William  M.  Taylor;  Fulton  (4) — William  T. 
Ellis,  John  H.  Peebles,  Robertson  &  Howard,  Robertson  & 
Taylor;  County  Line  (3) — D.  L.  Dyson,  John  M.  Foster, 
J.  H.  Tatem;  Calahaln  (2) — A.  A.  Anderson,  Charles  An- 
derson; Cana  (2) — Booe  &  Furchess,  Ebenezer  Frost;  Fork 
Church  (3) — Spencer  Chaplin,  James  M.  Hendricks,  As- 
bery  Howard;  Ellis  &  Ward,  Elbaville;  Farmington  (2)  — 
C.  A.  Hartman,  E.  Johnson. 

Yadkin  (16) — Yadkinville  (2) — J.  Conrad  Danthill 
(probably  Douthitt),  William  K.  (L.)  Kelly;  Huntsville 
(4) — G.  W.  Burwis  (probably  Burrus),  J.  D.  Hamlin,  Squire 
Boone  Harding,  T.  A.  Steelman;  Jonesville  (2) — J.  F.  Bryan, 
Gwyn,  Wood  &  Co.;  East  Bend  (4) — A.  Horn  (Home),  J. 
H.  Jenkins,  Martin  &  Glenn,  William  Y.  Poindexter;  Clay- 
well  &  Bros,  Richmond  Hill;  Abner  Davies  &  Co.,  Boone- 
ville;  Albert  Ireland,  Mt.  Nebo;  I.  L.  Reaves,  Hampton- 
ville. 

Vance  (25) — Kittrell  (15) — George  W.  Averill,  James 
Beckham,  E.  G.  Blacknall,  O.  W.  Blacknall,  William  H. 
Blacknall,  Wiatt  Bradford,  Capehart,  Davis  &  Co.,  Charles 
Cawthorne,  Hilliard  Cook,  D.  B.  Duke,  Carter  H.  Gay,  P.  F. 
Gordon,  Phil  B.  Key,  David  Pool,  Stephen  A.  White;  Hen- 
derson (9) — William  Daniel,  Isaiah  Fuller,  W.  E.  Gary  & 
Co.,  W.  H.  Hughes,  Jr.,  W.  L.  Meadows,  Perry  Bros.,  James 
E.  Pogue,  William  Richardson,  N.  G.  Whitfield;  H.  H.  Jenk- 
ins, Williamsboro. 

Granville  (22) — Oxford  (9) — C.  R.  Blackley,  Cooper  & 
Williams,  Alph  Dement,  Robert  E.  Elliott,  William  P.  Har- 
ris, C.  P.  Hester,  Alb  Hobgood,  J.  W.  Hobgood,  Daniel  Os- 
borne; Wilton  (9) — James  Fuller,  M.  W.  Jenkins,  Eveston 
Mitchell,  J.  W.  Mitchell,  James  L.  Mitchell,  William  A.  Mit- 


Summer-Fall,  1 95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  105 


chell,  Eugene  Morris,  John  E.  Purgason,  Lewis  Strothers; 
Tally  Ho  (2) — Alexander  H.  Bragg,  Sol  Mitchell;  W.  W. 
Cozart,  Dutchville;  James  B.  Elliott,  Young's  Cross  Roads. 

Surry  (25) — Mount  Airy  (12) — G.  W.  Ashby,  J.  L.  Ashby, 
Brower  &  Co.,  J.  H.  Pulton,  J.  R.  Gilmer,  R.  L.  Gwynn, 
William  Haines,  Robert  Hithes,  Jr.,  G.  M.  Mitchell,  W.  E. 
Patterson,  L.  F.  Smith,  B.  F.  Sparger;  Pilot  Mountain  (3)  — 
Virgil  Boyles,  E.  W.  Culler,  Daniel  Marion;  Rockford  (2)  — 
G.  M.  Burrus,  Harden  Holyfield;  Siloam  (2) — O.  E.  Marion, 
R.  E.  &  M.  C.  Reeves;  State  Road  (3) — R.  C.  Hanby,  J.  T. 
Murray,  James  H.  Maxwell;  John  H.  Dix,  Tom's  Creek  (loca- 
tion in  Surry  questioned);  W.  R.  &  R.  A.  Doss,  Copeland; 
R.  W.  Foard  &  Sons,  Elkin. 

Stokes  (22) — Germanton  (5) — Samuel  Blackburn,  W.  A. 
Chaffin,  G.  W.  Nichelson,  S.  F.  Slate,  N.  G.  Westmoreland; 
Walnut  Cove  (2) — W.  P.  Covington,  Spencer  Isom;  Wilson's 
Store  (4) — J.  T.  Green,  Daniel  Kiser,  James  H.  Leak,  J.  H. 
Vaughan;  Danbury  (3) — Asa  Neal,  John  Neal,  A.  M.  Simp- 
son; Francisco  (2) — Davis  Smith,  Milton  Smith;  D.  N. 
Dalton,  Dalton;  J.  A.  Fare,  Prestonville;  William  S.  Franz, 
Westfield;  D.  S.  R.  Martin,  Ayersville;  J.  W.  Preston,  Pres- 
tonville;  J.  S.  Rierson,  Sauratown. 

Orange  (7) — Hillsboro  (6) — L.  C.  H.  Brown  &  Co.,  H.  P. 
Jones  &  Co.,  L.  H.  Lambeth,  E.  H.  Pogue,.Webb  &  Co.,  J.  Y. 
Whitted;  J.  M.  Corbin,  Chapel  Hill. 

Person  (7) — Woodsdale  (2) — Larkin  Brooks,  R.  U. 
Brooks;  Mount  Tirzah  (2) — J.  I.  Cothran,  J.  H.  Gooch; 
Roxboro  (3) — J.  S.  Long,  William  C.  Satterfield,  W.  H. 
Winstead. 

Rowan  (6) — Salisbury  (4) — Booe,  Payne  &  Lunn,  Keene 
&  Kennedy,  James  B.  Lanier,  Payne,  Lynn  &  Co. ;  South 
River   (2) — J.  B.  Foard,  William  H.  Hobson. 

Wilkes  (5) — Newcastle  (2) — J.  S.  Green,  Green  Bros.; 
George  B.  Reeves,  Roaring  River;  William  H.  Reeves, 
Wilkesborough;  Isaac  Taylor,  Roaring  Gap   (River?). 

Catawba    (10) — Hickory    (9) — P.   H.   Abernethy,   Cobb   & 


Son,  Hall  &  Daniel,  George  C.  Lanier,  H.  C.  Latta,  A.  W. 
Marshall,  Nicholas  Martin,  Martin  &  Warren,  Tomlinson  & 
Harris;  L.  W.  Cochran,  Catawba. 

Buncombe  (7) — Asheville  (6) — M.  J.  Fagg,  H.  C.  France, 
Holmes  &  Cherbrough,  John  E.  Ray  &  Co.,  Ray,  Miller  & 
France,  Shelton,  Jordan  &  Worth;   C.  W.   Beale,  Arden. 

Caldwell  (3) — Lenoir  (2) — William  P.  Bell,  R.  M.  Tuttle; 
Little,  Coffee  &  Puett,  Collettsville  . 

Cleveland  (3) — Shelby  (2) — J.  W.  Gedney  &  Co.,  D.  D. 
Smith;  James  G.  Bland,  Mooresboro. 

Guilford  (6) — High  Point  (2) — O.  S.  Causey,  W.  P. 
Pickett;  Thomas  M.  Angel,  Bruce  Cross  Roads;  Jones  Bros., 
Greensboro;  Hubbard  Parrish,  Summerfleld;  R.  H.  Stanley, 
Battle  Ground. 

Caswell  (4) — Milton  (3) — Thomas  E.  Cobb,  Ottaway 
Hatcher,  R.  E.  Withers;  C.  D.  Vernon,  Yanceyville. 

Alamance  (4) — J.  D.  Corbin,  Company  Shops  (Burling- 
ton); J.  H.  &  T.  H.  Fowler,  Mebane  (sville);  J.  W.  Lea, 
Pleasant  Grove;  S.  G.  McLean,  Graham. 

Mecklenburg    (4) — Charlotte    (4) — James   Heineman, 
R.  Leak,  R.  M.  &  R.  E.  Miller,  Miller  &  Leak. 

Wake   (2) — A.  L.  Page,  Cary;   John  H.  Rogers,  Apex. 

Cumberland    (1) — Allen  &  Whitted,  Fayetteville. 

Franklin    (2) — Franklinton    (2) — Hy.    A.    Bobbitt,    R. 
Holmes. 

Robeson  (1) — James  Bodenhamer,  Shoe  Heel. 

New  Hanover   (1) — Cape  Fear  Tobacco  Co.,  Wilmington. 

Davidson  (1) — Dale  &  Jordan,  Yadkin  College. 

Randolph   (1) — Mc.  K.  Gray,  Bush  Hill. 

Halifax   (1) — Joseph  H.  Lawrence,  Scotland  Neck. 

Craven  (1) — Miller  &  Walker,  New  Bern. 

Hertford   (1) — David  A.  Owen,  Winton. 

Lenoir   (1) — Amos  Harvey,  Kinston. 

Greene  (1) — Yancey  T.  Ormond,  Ormondville. 

Rutherford   (1) — A.  Lynch,  Green  Hill. 


D. 


R. 


State  College  Helps  Tobacco  Growers  in  Principal  Crop 

By  R.  R.  Bennett  and  S.  N.  Hawks,  Extension  Tobacco  Specialists,  N.  C.  State  College 


Tobacco  is  the  foremost  cash  crop  in  North  Caro- 
lina. It  accounts  for  more  than  half  of  the  total 
cash  farm  income  for  the  farmers  of  the  state.  In 
1950  there  were  636,000  acres  planted  to  flue-cured 
tobacco,  9,540  acres  were  planted  to  Burley  tobacco, 
and  150  acres  were  planted  to  Aromatic  tobacco. 
This  acreage  of  tobacco  sold  for  about  $477,000,000. 
The  crop  has  a  far-reaching  effect  on  the  economy  of 
the  State. 

Tobacco  is  produced  by  about  135,000  land  owners 
in  North  Carolina.  There  are  in  addition  thousands 
of  families  who  depend  on  their  income  from  work 
in  the  tobacco  factories,  curer  manufacturing  plants, 
textile  plants  making  tobacco  twine  and  tobacco 
plant  bed  canvas,  insecticide  and  fungicide  plants, 
farm  equipment  plants,  producing  fuel  (coal  and 
oil)  for  curing,  manufacturing  fertilizers  for  the 
production  of  tobacco,  etc. 

From  the  grower's  standpoint,  the  soil  type  and 
weather  conditions  play  an  important  part  in  determ- 
ining whether  the  crop  will  be  a  partial  failure  or  a 
great  success — these  things  the  farmer  has  no  con- 
trol over.  On  the  second  hand,  there  are  many,  many 
things  that  the  farmer  must  know  and  do  if  he  hopes 
to  make  a  success  of  being  a  flue-cured  tobacco  pro- 
ducer. 

First  of  all,  the  farmer  must  know  which  variety 
of  tobacco  suits  his  conditions  best.  Generally  the 
broad  leaf  types  such  as  402,  400,  Yellow  Special, 


and  Bottom  Special  have  given  the  greatest  returns 
per  acre,  where  the  major  tobacco  diseases  are  not 
a  problem.  On  black  shank  and  Granville  wilt  soil 
Dixie  Bright  101  is  suggested.  After  the  variety 
has  been  chosen,  the  correct  time  to  sow  the  seed  in 
the  plant  beds  must  be  determined  so  that  the  plants 
will  be  ready  for  transplanting  in  the  field  at  the 
right  time.  If  the  plants  are  ready  to  go  in  the  field 
too  early  or  too  late,  the  acre  profit  will  be  reduced. 

As  soon  as  the  plants  come  up  in  the  bed,  the 
farmer  has  the  responsibility  of  protecting  them 
against  diseases,  insects,  and  drought.  All  of  these 
hazards  can  be  controlled.  Probably  two  of  the 
worst  plant  bed  hazards  are  drought  and  blue  mold. 
In  locating  the  plant  bed,  the  available  water  supply 
should  be  considered.  The  blue  mold  can  be  effect- 
ively controlled  by  using  Fermate,  Diathane  Z-78, 
Carbarn  Black,  or  Parzate. 

Fertilization  is  a  very  important  operation  because 
underfertilization  will  result  in  reduced  yield  and 
possibly  poor  quality,  while  overfertilization  will  re- 
sult in  heavy,  thick,  dark  tobacco  which  is  poor  in 
quality  so  far  as  cigarette  production  is  concerned. 
At  the  present  time,  3-9-6  is  the  most  commonly  used 
analysis  of  fertilizer  under  tobacco,  with  some  4-12-8 
and  3-9-9  being  used ;  however,  on  the  heavier,  more 
fertile  soils,  it  is  advisable  to  use  a  2-10-6  fertilizer, 
which  will  reduce  the  total  amount  of  nitrogen  ap- 
plied.    Excessive  amounts  of  nitrogen  is  the  thing 


PAGE  1 06 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  951 


that  is  quite  often  responsible  for  the  poor  quality 
tobacco. 

Fertilizer  placement  is  also  important.  If  the 
plant  roots  are  placed  in  the  fertilizer  and  the  soil 
becomes  dry  soon  after  transplanting,  severe  fertiliz- 
er burn  may  occur.  Fertilizer  burn  may  retard 
early  plant  growth  or  in  bad  cases,  it  may  result  in 
poor  stands.  The  best  method  of  applying  fertilizer 
is  to  place  it  in  the  soil  in  two  bands  about  six  to 
eight  inches  apart,  and  then  set  the  plants  between 
the  bands.  If  band  placing  equipment  is  not  avail- 
able, the  next  best  practice  is  to  mix  the  fertilizer 
with  the  soil  by  stirring  it  with  a  plow  before  ridg- 
ing the  land  for  transplanting.  Splitting  the  appli- 
cation will  also  help  reduce  root  injury  caused  by 
fertilizer  burn — put  on  two-thirds  of  the  fertilizer 
before  planting  and  the  other  one-third  as  a  topdress- 
ing  not  later  than  the  first  cultivation. 

At  the  present  time,  one  of  the  major  threats  to 
the  production  of  tobacco  in  North  Carolina  is  to- 
bacco diseases.  There  are  many  diseases  that  are 
causing  losses  in  the  State,  but  black  shank,  root 
knot,  and  Granville  wilt  are  three  of  the  worst.  Most 
of  the  losses  from  the  major  tobacco  diseases  can 
be  avoided  with  proper  crop  rotations  and  the  use 
of  resistant  varieties.  One  of  the  problems  in  con- 
trolling these  diseases  is  failure  to  have  the  disease 
properly  identified  when  it  first  appears  and  apply 
the  proper  control  measure  immediately  rather  than 
lose  a  sizable  portion  of  the  crop  before  attempting 
to  control  it.     County  Agents  in  the  counties  and 


Extension  Specialists  are  available  to  the  grower  to 
assist  with  the  identification  of  diseases. 

Again  in  the  curing  process  the  farmer  has  con- 
siderable control  over  the  results  he  gets.  Three 
things  are  necessary,  before  the  actual  curing  starts, 
to  make  it  possible  for  the  grower  to  obtain  good 
cures.  First,  the  barn  should  be  so  constructed 
that  an  excessive  amount  of  heat  is  not  lost  through 
the  wall  and  the  ventilators  should  be  built  so  that 
the  ventilation  is  under  control  at  all  times.  Second, 
the  heating  unit  should  be  under  control  at  all  times 
and  it  should  be  of  such  capacity  that  it  can  produce 
the  desired  heat  when  it  is  needed.  Third,  the  to- 
bacco should  be  uniformly  ripe  when  it  goes  into  the 
barn.  Green  tobacco  and  ripe  tobacco  cannot  be 
cured  in  the  same  barn  at  the  same  time  satisfac- 
torily. After  the  tobacco  is  uniformly  spaced  in  the 
barn,  the  actual  curing  process  will  vary  depending 
upon  the  kind  and  condition  of  the  tobacco.  Gen- 
erally, the  tobacco  should  be  yellowed  and  tne  leaf 
about  dried  with  the  top  ventilator  open  and  for  the 
remainder  of  the  cure  the  top  ventilator  should  be 
closed. 

The  flue-cured  tobacco  producer  must  be  well  vers- 
ed in  many  things  if  he  hopes  to  produce  top  yield 
of  high  quality  tobacco.  He  must  be  a  plant  patholo- 
gist, a  soil  chemist,  a  carpenter,  an  engineer,  and 
agronomist,  and  entomologist,  a  salesman,  and  many 
other  things.  Briefly  he  must  be  a  good  farmer — 
one  who  does  his  job  well  and  on  time. 


Marketing  Requires  Skill,  Experience;  Specialists  Aid 

By  J.  H.  Cyrus,  Tobacco  Marketing  Specialist,  N.  C.  Dept.  of  Agriculture 


North  Carolina's  largest  and  most  valuable  agri- 
cultural crop,  flue-cured  and  burley  tobacco,  is  very 
efficiently  and  systematically  moved  from  the  farm 
into  the  channels  of  trade  through  the  network  of 
about  310  tobacco  auction  warehouses  which  are  lo- 
cated on  47  markets  in  the  State,  with  17  million 
square  feet  of  floor  space  for  displaying  tobacco. 
During  the  1950-51  marketing  season  76  sets  of  buy- 
ers bidding  competitively  at  auction  sales  bought 
850,000,000  pounds  of  tobacco  from  flue-cured  and 
burley  producers  for  about  $475,000,000,  which  was 
the  largest  amount  of  money  ever  paid  North  Caro- 
lina growers  for  their  tobacco  crop. 

From  the  time  the  Border  Belt  opens  about  the 
first  of  August  until  the  Burley  Belt  closes  in  late 
January,  the  chants  of  the  tobacco  auctioneer  can 
be  heard  throughout  the  different  belts  in  North 
Carolina.  The  growers  of  this  valuable  crop  look 
forward  all  through  the  year  to  the  season  when 
they  can  place  their  tobacco  on  sale  at  their  favorite 
auction  market,  and  see  it  auctioned  off  to  the  high- 
est bidder,  who  is  generally  a  representative  of  one 
of  the  major  tobacco  companies  or  independent  deal- 
ers.   The  auction  system  has  proved  to  the  growers 


through  the  years  to  be  the  most  satisfactory  method 
in  sight  for  marketing  tobacco.  They  know  that 
through  competitive  bidding  they  are  able  to  get  the 
highest  possible  price  for  tobacco  properly  prepared 
for  market. 

Properly  handling  tobacco  for  market  requires 
more  experience  and  skill  than  any  other  agricul- 
tural crop  grown.  Therefore,  a  tobacco  project  was 
outlined  in  the  Division  of  Markets,  N.  C.  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture,  in  cooperation  with  the  U.  S. 
Department  of  Agriculture,  under  the  Research  and 
Marketing  Act,  to  help  the  growers  increase  their 
knowledge  and  skill  of  preparing  tobacco  for  mar- 
ket. The  object  of  the  project  is  to  conduct  a  service 
program  and  to  perform  such  services  and  activities 
as  will  facilitate  the  marketing  of  flue-cured  and 
burley  tobacco. 

The  methods  of  buying  and  the  standards  under 
which  tobacco  is  marketed  placed  a  great  responsi- 
bility on  the  growers  in  preparing  tobacco  for  mar- 
ket. Therefore,  growers  must  become  more  familiar 
with  their  deficiencies  if  they  expect  to  get  the  high- 
est price  for  their  crops.  At  the  present  a  long  range 
service  program  is  being  conducted  to  help  the  grow- 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  07 


ers  better  understand  what  their  problems  and  de- 
ficiencies are  in  marketing,  and  assist  them  in  mak- 
ing adjustments  to  meet  the  situation. 

Most  of  the  tobacco  grower's  trouble  in  preparing 
tobacco  for  market  can  be  traced  back  to  one  basic 
factor,  and  that  is  the  failure  of  many  growers  to 
recognize  the  Groups  of  tobacco  that  grow  on  their 
plants.  For  flue-cured  tobacco  those  groups  are :  the 
lug  group  with  its  sub-group  of  primings  or  plant 
bed  leaves,  the  cutter  group,  and  the  leaf  group  with 
its  sub-group  of  smoking  leaf  or  over-ripe  leaf  to- 
bacco. The  grouping  of  tobacco  is  the  basic  or  start- 
ing point  in  learning  to  do  a  better  job  in  preparing 
tobacco  for  market. 

The  Group,  which  is  the  first  element  in  a  U.  S. 
Standard  Grade,  is  the  first  thing  that  one  has  to 


know  in  order  to  put  a  Standard  Grade  on  any  lot  of 
tobacco.  Each  of  these  groups  has  definite  charac- 
teristics which  distinguish  one  from  the  other,  and 
when  a  grower  becomes  familiar  with  the  character- 
istics found  in  the  different  groups  and  is  able  to 
recognize  the  group,  then  he  will  have  a  basic  foun- 
dation to  which  he  can  apply  the  knowledge  gained 
through  experience  each  year  relative  to  qualities 
and  colors  within  the  groups.  Thus,  by  starting  at 
the  base  and  working  up,  many  growers  will  grad- 
ually increase  their  knowledge  and  skill  of  preparing 
tobacco  for  market  so  that  they  can  get  the  true 
market  price  for  their  entire  crop  of  tobacco. 

Many  other  services  are  rendered  to  the  tobacco 
growers,  warehousemen,  dealers  and  processors  in 
the  various  functions  of  marketing  tobacco  as  the 
situation  demands  from  year  to  year. 


Stabilization  Group  Holds  Prices  to  90%  of  Parity 

By  L.  T.  Weeks,  General  Manager,  Flue-Cured  Tobacco  Cooperative  Stabilization  Corporation,  Raleigh. 


The  Flue-Cured  Tobacco  Cooperative  Stabilization 
Corporation  was  organized  by  the  farm  organiza- 
tions (namely,  the  Farm  Bureau  and  the  Grange) 
in  1946  for  the  purpose  of  supporting  the  price  of 
flue-cured  tobacco  to  the  producer  at  90%  of  parity. 
This  is  accomplished  by  making  available  the  90% 
of  parity  support  price  as  provided  for  by  the  Com- 
modity Credit  Corporation.  This  is  the  only  pur- 
pose of  Stabilization  Corporation.  It  does  not  deal 
in  any  other  phase  of  the  tobacco  industry  other  than 
selling  such  tobacco  as  is  received  by  it  in  adminis- 
tering the  support  price  program. 

Stabilization  Corporation  was  incorporated  under 
the  Cooperative  Marketing  Act  of  North  Carolina 
and  domesticated  in  the  states  of  Virginia,  South 
Carolina,  Georgia  and  Florida,  thus  serving  the  en- 
tire flue-cured  tobacco  producing  area  of  the  United 
States. 

All  flue-cured  tobacco  growers  are  eligible  to  be- 
come members  of  Stabilization  Corporation  by  pur- 
chasing one  share  of  common  stock  with  a  par  value 
of  $5.00.  To  date,  there  are  more  than  390,000  to- 
bacco growers  who  have  become  members  of  Stabil- 
ization Corporation  and  who  are  common  stockhold- 
ers in  it.  Stabilization  Corporation  is  owned,  operat- 
ed and  controlled  by  its  common  stockholders. 

During  the  period  of  time  Stabilization  Corpora- 
tion has  been  in  operation,  it  has  handled  in  excess  of 
585  million  pounds  of  tobacco  which  was  offered  for 
sale  on  the  auction  warehouse  floor  and  which  failed 
to  bring  as  much  as  the  90%  of  parity  support  price 
to  the  members.  Today,  it  has  less  than  79  million 
pounds  of  this  tobacco  on  hand.  All  of  the  1946  and 
1947  crop  tobaccos  have  been  sold  and  a  distribution 
of  net  gains  in  the  amount  of  $3,779,654.19  has  been 
made  on  the  1947  crop  to  producers  who  delivered 
tobacco  to  Stabilization  Corporation  in  1947  for  the 
support  price.     It  appears  now  that  a  distribution 


will  be  made  on  both  the  1948  and  1949  crops  as  soon 
as  each  of  these  crops  is  sold.  No  distribution  of 
net  gains  can  be  made  until  all  of  any  given  crop 
is  sold. 

Contrary  to  the  opinion  expressed  by  many  peo- 
ple who  do  not  really  understand  the  principles  of 
Stabilization's  program,  it  has  not  cost  the  taxpay- 
ers one  cent;  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the  operations  of 
the  Stabilization  Corporation  has  netted  in  excess 
of  $2,500,000.00  to  Commodity  Credit  Corporation 
which  is  a  Federal  government  lending  agency.  This 
has  been  brought  about  due  to  the  fact  that  Stabil- 
ization Corporation  has  paid  3%  interest  on  all 
money  borrowed  from  Commodity  Credit  Corpora- 
tion, with  only  l1/4%  of  this  amount  being  actual 
interest  on  the  money  and  1%%  being  a  guaranty 
charge  made  by  Commodity  Credit  Corporation  for 
assuring  the  loan. 

The  policies  under  which  Stabilization  Corpora- 
tion operates  are  made  by  its  Board  of  Directors  who 
are  elected  at  the  Annual  Stockholders  meeting  held 
the  last  Friday  in  June  of  each  year  in  Raleigh,  N.  C. 
The  management  is  charged  with  the  responsibility 
of  carrying  out  the  policies  which  are  made  by  the 
Board  of  Directors. 

In  1949  the  Corporation  erected  its  own  building 
as  headquarters  at  522  Fayetteville  St.,  Raleigh. 
This  building  is  of  brick,  three  stories  high  and  is 
60  by  120  feet.  An  average  of  57  people  are  employ- 
ed in  its  staff,  members  of  which  cover  the  five  states 
in  which  flue-cured  tobacco  is  grown.  One-half,  or 
more,  of  its  activities  are  carried  on  in  North  Caro- 
lina, leading  flue-cured  tobacco  growing  state. 

Officers  and  members  of  the  Board  of  Directors  of 

the  Corporation  are:  Carl  T.  Hicks,  Walstonburg, 

president;    H.    G.    Blalock,    Bakersville,    Va.,    Joe 

Blount,  Loris,  S.  C„  and  D.  F.  Bruton,  Adele,  Ga., 

(Continued  on  page  118) 


PAGE  1 08 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


N.  C.  Man  Started  Acre  Allotments,  Marketing  Quotas 

By  G.  T.  Scott,  State  Director,  Production  and  Marketing  Administration,  U.  S.  Dept.  of  Agriculture 


The  tobacco  acreage  adjustment  program  was  in- 
stigated by  the  late  L.  V.  Morrell,  Jr.,  of  Snow  Hill, 
N.  C,  in  1933,  at  which  time  he  prevailed  upon  the 
Governor  of  North  Carolina  to  close  the  warehouses 
due  to  the  starvation  prices  which  were  being  re- 
ceived by  farmers  producing  tobacco.  As  a  result  of 
the  closing  of  the  warehouses,  Federal  legislation  was 
passed  putting  into  effect  for  the  first  time,  control 
over  the  production  of  tobacco. 

The  Production  and  Marketing  Administration,  a  division 
of  the  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  has  the 
responsibility  of  administering  the  acreage  allotments  and 
marketing  quotas  on  tobacco.  The  Secretary  administers 
the  tobacco  program  under  the  Agricultural  Adjustment  Act 
of  1938,  as  amended.  In  each  state  the  Secretary  of  Agri- 
culture has  a  committee  which  administers  the  Production 
and  Marketing  Administration  programs.  The  committee 
is  appointed  by  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture  and  is  known 
as  the  State  Production  and  Marketing  Administration  Com- 
mittee. The  Secretary,  in  selecting  his  committee  from 
each  state,  usually  appoints  a  good  farmer  engaged  in  the 
production  of  one  or  more  of  the  agricultural  commodities 
pertaining  to  the  PMA  programs. 

In  North  Carolina  the  State  PMA  Chairman  is  G.  T.  Scott, 
who  is  a  large  tobacco  and  cotton  producer  in  Johnston 
County,  Selma,  N.  C.  The  Vice-Chairman  is  W.  A.  Kitchin, 
who  operates  a  tobacco,  peanut,  cotton,  and  livestock  farm 
in  Halifax  County,  Scotland  Neck,  N.  C.  The  three  regular 
members  of  the  State  PMA  Committee  are  Eli  S.  Seawell, 
a  poultry  and  small  grain  farm  operator  from  Randolph 
County;  Boyce  Wilson,  a  tobacco,  cotton,  small  grain,  and 
dairy  farmer  from  Rutherford  County;  and  Bill  Hooks,  a 
large  tobacco  and  cotton  farmer  from  Columbus  County, 
Whiteville,  N.  C.  D.  S.  Weaver,  director  of  Agricultural 
Extension,  is  ex-officio  member.  James  H.  Potter  is  head 
of  the  Tobacco  Division  of  the  State  Production  and  Market- 
ing Administration  program.  Under  the  direction  of  the 
State  PMA  Committee,  Mr.  Potter  directs  County  PMA 
Committees  in  carrying  out  the  provisions  of  the  Agricul- 
tural Adjustment  Act  relating  to  the  tobacco  program.  Mr. 
Potter  is  a  tobacco  and  peanut  farmer  and  is  a  native  of 
Greene  County,  Snow  Hill,  N.  C.  The  tobacco  work  has 
been  under  the  direction  of  Mr.  Potter  on  the  state  level 
since  1942. 

COUNTY-COMMUNITY   GROUPS 

In  each  county  there  is  a  committee  known  as  the  County 
PMA  Committee  which  is  responsible  to  the  State  PMA  Com- 
mittee for  administering  the  Production  and  Marketing  Ad- 
ministration programs  at  the  county  level.  This  committee 
is  composed  of  a  chairman,  vice-chairman,  and  one  regular 
member.  Ecah  county  is  divided  into  communities  which 
have  three  community  PMA  committeemen  to  represent  the 
farmers  in  their  community.  These  community  committee- 
men are  elected  by  the  farmers  in  the  community  and  they, 
in  turn,  elect  a  delegate  to  a  county  convention  which  elects 
a  County  Committee.  With  this  type  of  committee  system, 
the  Secretary  of  Agriculture  can  reach  each  individual  farm 
by  contacts  through  the  State,  County,  and  Community 
Committees. 

Tobacco  farmers,  being  widely  scattered  throughout  the 
country,  are  not  in  position  to  organize  as  can  labor  and 
industry  through  unions  and  corporations  in  which  they 
receive  government  protection  and  sanction.  In  view  of  this, 
farmers  are  unable  to  control  effectively  the  production  and 
orderly  marketing  of  tobacco  without  Federal  assistance. 

REDUCE  ACRES — DOUBLE  PRICES 

Federal  assistance  in  the  form  of  tobacco  marketing 
quotas  was  put  into  effect  in  193  4  under  the  Kerr-Smith 
Tobacco  Act.  Supplies  at  that  time  far  over-shadowed  de- 
mand and  farmers  were  receiving  starvation  prices.  In 
1934,  the  first  year  of  the  Federal  tobacco  program,  produc- 
tion was  reduced  175  million  pounds  from  1933  but  returns 


increased  40  million  dollars,  at  an  average  price  almost 
double  that  of  1933.  Quotas  continued  through  the  1935 
marketing  year  but  the  Kerr-Smith  Tobacco  Act  was  declared 
unconstitutional  and  there  were  no  quotas  in  193  6  and' 
193  7.  Under  this  Act,  the  tobacco  adjustment  program  is 
a  farmers'  program.  It  provides  that  a  referendum  be  held 
and  that  two-thirds  of  the  tobacco  farmers  voting  must 
favor  acreage  allotments  and  marketing  quotas  before  they 
can  be  put  into  effect. 

Another  referendum  was  held  in  193  8  at  which  time 
farmers  did  not  favor  quotas.  As  a  result,  prices  slumped 
to  the  193  3  level.  Farmers  voted  in  another  referendum 
in  favor  of  quotas  for  1940  and  have  voted  more  than  90 
percent  in  favor  of  quotas  in  each  referendum  held  since 
that  time. 

After  the  beginning  of  the  marketing  year  and  prior  to 
December  1,  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture  is  required  to 
make  a  finding  of  the  relationship  between  the  total  actual 
supply  of  tobacco  and  the  reserve  supply  level  therefor 
(each  kind  of  tobacco  is  treated  separately  in  the  finding). 
If  it  is  found  that  the  actual  supply  of  tobacco  exceeds  the 
reserve  supply  level  computed  in  accordance  with  the  pro- 
visions of  the  Act,  a  national  marketing  quota  for  the  crop 
of  tobacco  produced  in  the  next  calendar  year  and  market- 
ed in  the  succeeding  marketing  year  is  proclaimed,  except 
that  "The  Secretary  shall  proclaim  a  national  marketing 
quota  for  each  marketing  year  for  each  kind  of  tobacco  for 
which  a  national  marketing  quota  was  proclaimed  for  the 
immediately  preceding  marketing  year,  and  beginning  on 
the  first  day  of  the  marketing  year  next  following  and  con- 
tinuing throughout  such  year,  a  national  marketing  quota 
shall  be  in  effect  for  the  tobacco  marketed  during  such  mar- 
keting year." 

PRO-RATA  APPORTIONMENT 

The  national  marketing  quota  is  apportioned  by  the  Sec- 
retary of  Agriculture  among  states  producing  such  tobacco 
on  the  basis  of  historical  production  and  the  volume  of  to- 
bacco so  apportioned  to  each  state  is  converted  to  a  state 
acreage  allotment  on  the  basis  of  average  yield. 

The  total  of  all  preliminary  acreages  for  farms  in  each 
state  is  adjusted  pro-rata  to  come  within  the  respective 
acreage  allotment  apportioned  such  state  by  the  Secretary. 
Under  certain  conditions,  farms  with  an  acreage  allotment 
which  will  produce  a  number  of  pounds  below  a  certain 
figure,  are  given  "a  small  farm  adjustment"  by  increasing 
the  acreage  allotment  by  a  certain  percentage,  depending 
upon  the  size  of  such  allotment.  The  maximum  increase 
amounts  to  20  percent.  In  some  instances,  a  minimum  acre- 
age allotment  must  be  established  for  any  eligible  farm 
regardless  of  the  size  of  the  computed  acreage  allotment. 

Shortly  after  planting  season,  the  County  and  Community 
Committeemen  determine  by  actual  measurement  the  acre- 
age of  tobacco  planted  on  every  farm  within  the  county. 
This  planted  acreage  is  compared  with  the  acreage  allotment 
previously  determined  for  the  respective  farm  to  establish 
whether  or  not  the  acreage  of  tobacco  grown  is  within  or 
exceeds  the  farm  acreage  allotment.  After  the  above  men- 
tioned performance  is  determined  and  prior  to  the  opening 
of  the  tobacco  markets,  marketing  cards  are  prepared  for 
each  farm  on  which  tobacco  is  being  grown  during  the  year. 
The  marketing  quota  for  a  farm  is  the  actual  production 
on  the  farm  acreage  allotment. 

OVER-PRODUCTION  PENALTIES 

Two  types  of  marketing  cards  are  prepared  (a)  a  Within 
Quota  Card  is  prepared  for  each  farm  on  which  the  acreage 
planted  to  tobacco  is  within  the  farm  acreage  allotment 
(b)  an  Excess  Card  is  prepared  for  those  farms  for  which 
it  is  determined  that  the  acreage  planted  to  tobacco  exceeds 
the  farm  acreage  allotment.  The  percentage  of  excess  on 
the  farm  is  recorded  upon  the  farm  marketing  card  so  that 
the  appropriate  amount  of  penalty  under  the  Act  may  be 
collected  at  the  time  the  producer  receives  proceeds  from 
the  sale  of  any  tobacco  produced  on  the  farm.  At  the  time 
the  tobacco  is  sold,  the  producer  presents  his  marketing 
card  to  the  auction  warehouse  or  the  individual  purchasing 


Summer-fall,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  09 


the  tobacco,  for  execution  of  a  memorandum  of  sale.  In 
the  event  penalty  is  due  by  the  producer  because  of  the 
sale  of  tobacco  produced  in  excess  of  the  allotment,  the 
penalty  is  collected  by  warehouseman  or  purchaser.  The 
purchaser  remits  periodically  such  penalties  collected  to 
designated  Department  of  Agriculture  offices,  which,  in 
turn,  forward  such  penalties  to  the  United  States  Treasury 
Department. 

The  penalties  collected  to  April  14,  19  50,  on  excess  flue- 
cured  tobacco  for  the  19  50  crop  in  North  Carolina  were 
$1,556,156.61,  and  the  penalties  collected  on  burley  were 
$37,027.37.  This  is  a  total  of  $1,593,183.98  penalty  col- 
lected in  North  Carolina  alone  on  excess  tobacco  and  re- 
turned to  the  U.  S.  Treasury  Department.  The  total  amount 
of  penalty  collected  in  North  Carolina  greatly  exceeded  the 
cost  of  the  operation  of  the  tobacco  marketing  quota  pro- 
gram in  the  state.  On  this  basis,  the  tobacco  program  does 
not  in  any  way  cost  the  taxpayers  any  extra  tax  for  its 
support. 


PROTECTION  VS.  PRICE   SLUMPS 

The  above  brief  description  covers  the  general  procedure 
which  has  been  used  in  the  administration  of  tobacco  acre- 
age allotments  and  marketing  quotas.  Over  the  years  cer- 
tain amendments  to  the  original  legislation  have  required 
modification  of  the  conditions  under  which  national  market- 
ing quotas  may  be  proclaimed  and  modification  of  the  pro- 
cedures for  establishing  farm  acreage  allotments.  However, 
the  above  described  mechanics  of  administering  marketing 
quotas,  after  the  proclamation  of  quotas  and  acreage  allot- 
ments, has  remained  fairly  constant. 

It  is  very  significant  from  all  available  figures  on  produc- 
tion and  price  that  the  Federal  tobacco  adjustment  pro- 
gram has  been  a  great  advantage  to  North  Carolina  tobacco 
farmers  since  all  records  show  a  continuous  yearly  increase 
in  average  prices  with  the  present  average  more  than  three 
times  what  it  was  at  the  time  quotas  were  first  put  into 
effect.  Also,  farmers  have  a  feeling  of  protection  against 
a  slump  in  prices  such  as  that  which  occurred  during  19  20, 
1933,  and  1939. 


Wider  Markets  Developed  by  Leaf  Tobacco  Exporters 

By  J.  C.  Lanier,  Executive  Secretary  Leaf  Tobacco  Exporters  Association,  Inc. 


The  Leaf  Tobacco  Exporters  Association,  Inc.,  is 
a  corporation  engaged  in  the  business  of  fostering 
and  promoting  the  sale,  distribution  and  consump- 
tion of  American  grown  leaf  tobacco  in  this  country 
and  in  foreign  countries. 

It  was  organized  in  the  Fall  of  1941,  and  its  mem- 
bership embraces  practically  every  firm  engaged  in 
the  exportation  of  flue  cured  and  burley  tobacco. 
Any  American  citizen,  firm  or  corporation  engaged 
in  the  leaf  tobacco  business  is  eligible  for  member- 
ship in  the  Association.  At  the  present  time  there 
are  89  member  firms  from  all  the  areas  where  to- 
bacco is  produced  and  sold  at  auction,  excepting  the 
cigar  type  areas. 

For  the  current  fiscal  year  officers  are  W.  C.  War- 
wick, Universal  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Richmond,  Va., 
president,  C.  A.  Carr,  Dibrell  Bros.,  Danville,  Va., 
vive-president,  and  J.  S.  Ficklen,  E.  B.  Ficklen  To- 
bacco Co.,  Greenville,  N.  C,  treasurer.  J.  Con  Lanier 
is  executive  secretary  and  general  counsel,  and  has 
held  these  positions  continuously  since  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  corporation.  The  executive  offices  are 
located  at  111  E.  Third  Street,  Greenville,  N.  C. 

The  business  of  the  Association  is  directed  by  an 
executive  committee  composed  of  nine  members  who 
hold  office  for  three  years  and  are  not  permitted  to 
succeed  themselves.  Members  of  this  committee  are 
H.  R.  Pettus,  chairman,  L.  L.  Strause  Co.,  Richmond, 
Va. ;  Leroy  Parker,  China  American  Tobacco  Co., 
Rocky  Mount ;  W.  C.  Paxton,  James  I.  Miller  Tobacco 
Co.,  Wilson;  A.  P.  Thorpe,  Jr.,  Thorpe  &  Ricks,  Inc., 
Rocky  Mount;  J.  E.  Covington,  Universal  Leaf  To- 
bacco Co.,  Richmond,  Va. ;  J.  B.  Rountree,  White- 
head &  Anderson,  Inc.,  Lumberton,  and  officers  War- 
rick, Carr,  and  Ficklen. 

For  many  years  the  leaf  tobacco  dealers  have  pro- 
moted the  sale  of  American  tobacco  in  almost  every 
country  of  the  world,  and  have  built  up  substantial 
markets  in  many  foreign  countries.  In  1941,  due  to 
the  Second  World  War,  practically  all  foreign  out- 


lets were  closed,  and  the  entire  industry  faced  a 
serious  financial  problem.  It  was  essential  that  the 
industry  be  preserved,  so  that,  when  peace  came,  the 
world  markets  for  American  tobacco  could  be  re- 
gained and  the  consumption  of  American  tobacco  re- 
sumed in  foreign  lands.  The  Association  was  form- 
ed for  this  purpose. 

During  the  war  days  the  Association  redried, 
packed  and  stored  approximately  100  million  pounds 
of  Lend-Lease  tobacco  yearly.  Since  the  war,  the 
members  of  the  Association  have  redried  and  packed 
the  purchases  of  Stabilization  Corporation. 

At  the  close  of  the  Second  World  War,  the  Asso- 
ciation again  turned  its  energies  towards  the  re- 
sumption of  trade  with  former  customers  abroad. 
It  has  worked  closely  with  Economic  Cooperation 
Administration  in  providing  tobacco  for  Marshall 
Plan  countries. 

The  members  of  this  Association  are  tobacco  mer- 
chants who  buy  and  sell  leaf  tobacco,  but  do  not  man- 
ufacture tobacco  products.  Some  purchases  are 
made  on  the  auctions  by  its  members  as  agents  for 
domestic  and  foreign  customers.  Other  purchases 
are  made  on  the  auctions  for  purposes  of  resale. 
Most  members  carry  stocks  of  leaf  tobacco  from 
which  prospective  purchasers  can  make  selections 
of  the  kind  and  quality  desired. 

In  the  calendar  year  1950  approximately  900  mil- 
lion pounds  of  flue  cured  tobacco  were  produced  in 
North  Carolina.  Of  this  amount  approximately  30% 
or  around  270  million  pounds  go  into  the  export 
channels. 

The  Association  has  never  had  a  resignation 
among  its  members,  and  each  year  the  membership 
has  increased.  It  is  the  medium  through  which  the 
entire  industry  works  for  the  expansion  of  world 
markets  for  U.  S.  leaf  tobacco. 

The  Association  works  closely  with  warehouse 
organizations,  farmer  organizations,  and  govern- 
mental agencies  in  improving  the  system  of  selling 
tobacco  at  auction. 


PAGE  1  1  0 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,  1951 


Tobacco  Associates  Expand  Flue-Cured  Weed  Markets 

By  M.  A.  Morgan,  Field  Representative,  Tobacco  Associates,  Inc. 


Tobacco  Associates,  Incorporated,  something  new 
in  a  commodity  program,  is  an  outstanding  example 
of  what  can  be  done  by  an  interested  group  of  farm- 
ers and  their  allied  interests  to  help  themselves  with- 
out running  up  to  Washington  to  ask  Congress  to 
do  something  for  them. 

Formed  four  years  ago  by  farmers  through  their 
farm  organizations,  together  with  warehousemen, 
export  leaf  dealers,  bankers,  fertilizer  manufactur- 
ers and  merchants,  Tobacco  Associates'  main  object- 
ive is  to  promote,  develop  and  expand  the  export 
market  of  flue-cured  tobacco,  upon  which  its  growers 
depend  for  the  sale  of  at  least  40  per  cent  of  each 

year's  crop. 

The  organization  has  met  with  so  much  success  that  today, 
agricultural  leaders  throughout  the  Nation  term  it  the  most 
outstanding  and  forward-looking  program  ever  developed 
for  any  commodity.  It  is  also  an  ideal  example  of  allied 
groups  cooperating  with  government  agencies  to  develop 
programs  that  will  assure  a  fair  return  to  those  who  pro- 
duce and  handle  the  Golden  Weed. 

At  its  fourth  annual  meeting  held  in  February  of  this 
year,  James  E.  Thigpen,  head  of  the  Tobacco  Branch  of  the 
United  States  Department  of  Agriculture's  Production  and 
Marketing  Administration,  pointed  out  that  "Tobacco  As- 
sociates has  given  the  whole  tobacco  industry  an  organiza- 
tion through  which  all  tobacco  interests  may  work  to  im- 
prove export  markets." 

"Government  agencies,"  Thigpen  said,  "while  vitally  in- 
terested in  tobacco  exports,  cannot  solve  all  the  problems 
facing  the  industry."  Citing  the  new  market  in  Germany 
as  an  example  of  the  objective  work  that  has  been  done  by 
the  organization  in  its  four  years  of  operation,  he  added, 
"we  have  found  Tobacco  Associates  an  organization  through 
which  we  in  government  and  all  other  segments  of  the  in- 
dustry can  work  together  to  remove  some  of  the  obstacles 
standing  in  the  way  of  the  movement  of  our  tobacco  into 
foreign  countries." 

NEED  FOR  ORGANIZATION 

Early  in  19  47  representatives  of  farm  organizations  met 
with  tobacco  dealers,  warehousemen,  and  business  leaders 
to  discuss  the  flue-cured  tobacco  problems.  With  an  all- 
time  high  in  domestic  consumption  of  flue-cured  tobacco, 
they  found  that  all  hopes  of  maintaining  or  expanding  pro- 
duction of  the  flue-cured  leaf  depended  largely  on  the  amount 
that  could  be  exported.  Prior  to  World  War  II,  England 
was  our  largest  export  market.  But  after  the  war,  due  to 
her  shortage  of  dollar-exchange,  she  was  buying  less  and 
less  of  American-grown  tobacco,  and  China,  our  second 
largest  user,  was  taking  practically  none.  In  fact,  the  war 
had  left  all  countries  that  were  users  of  American-grown 
tobacco  with  many  new  and  complex  trade  problems.  While 
total  consumption  of  tobacco  in  those  countries  was  in- 
creasing, and  the  people  preferred  the  United  States  grown 
flue-cured  leaf,  economic  trade  problems  were  causing  them 
to  look  to  other  countries  for  their  tobacco  requirements. 

The  Stabilization  program  which  was  undertaken  for  the 
1946  crop  of  flue-cured  tobacco  and  which  included  pro- 
visions for  keeping  production  adjusted  to  demand,  proved 
to  be  a  price-protection  lifesaver  for  the  tobacco  growers. 
And  though  growers  appreciated  fully  the  importance  of  the 
floor  price  at  90  percent  of  parity  provided  by  the  Stabiliza- 
tion program,  they  realized,  too,  that  a  good  market  was 
the  very  life  of  the  tobacco  business — "production  of  to- 
bacco without  a  market  is  futile,"  they  said. 

FINANCED  BY  ASSESSMENTS 

The  need  for  more  adequate  knowledge  of  world  condi- 
tions and  trends  in  the  uses  of  tobacco  became  the  important 
factor  and  reuslted  in  the  organization  of  Tobacco  Asso- 
ciates, Inc.,  to  promote,  develop  and  expand  the  export  mar- 
ket for  flue-cured  tobacco. 


OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS 

Officers  and  members  of  the  Board  of  Directors  of  Tobacco 
Associates,  Inc.,  for  the  year  1951  are  as  follows: 

J.  B.  Hutson,  president,  and  J.  C.  Frink,  assistant  to  the 
president,  Washington,  D.  C;  E.  Y.  Floyd,  Raleigh,  secre- 
tary; Mrs.  Irby  S.  Walker,  Greensboro,  treasurer;  M.  A. 
Morgan,  Raleigh,  director  of  field  services;  and  L.  A.  Mc- 
Innis,  Florence,  S.  C,  fleldman. 

Members    of    the    board    of    directors    include    J.    Henry 
Vaughan,     R-l,  Elm  City,  chairman;  J.  E.  Winslow,  Green- 
ville, N.  C;   P.  N.  Taylor,  White  Plains;   Thomas  W.  Allen 
Creedmoor;   Claude  T.  Hall,  Roxboro;   W.  S.  Adkisson,  Jr. 
Clover,  Va.;   Melville  Bennett,  Clio,  S.  C;  Abe  T.  Minchew 
Axon,  Ga. ;   W.  W.   Singletary,  Lake  City,   S.   C. ;    Claude  B 
Strickland,  Winston-Salem;  J.  S.  Ficklen,  Greenville,  N.  C. ; 
H.  W.  Jackson,  Jr.,  Richmond,  Va. ;  Gordon  C.  Hunter,  Rox- 
boro;   Tom    F.    Bridgers,    Wilson,    and    Judson    H.    Blount, 
Greenville,  N.  C. 


Tobacco  Associates  was  financed  at  its  beginning  by  vol- 
untary contributions  from  growers,  warehousemen,  leaf 
dealers,  bankers,  merchants,  and  fertilizer  manufacturers, 
who  fostered  its  organization.  In  North  Carolina  the  first 
year,  the  farmer's  part  was  raised  through  county  units  of 
the  Farm  Bureau  and  the  Grange.  Later  in  North  and 
South  Carolina  enabling  acts  were  passed  by  the  State  Legis- 
latures permitting  growers  to  vote  to  assess  themselves  10 
cents  per  acre  to  continue  their  support.  The  states  of 
Virginia  and  Georgia  have  since  passed  similar  acts. 

In  addition  to  helping  to  finance  the  operation  of  the 
organization,  warehousemen  perform  the  very  valuable  serv- 
ice of  collecting  from  the  growers  the  10  cents  per  acre 
assessment  when  the  tobacco  is  marketed. 

The  membership  of  Tobacco  Associates  is  made  up  of  rep- 
resentatives of  the  various  groups  responsible  for  its  organ- 
ization: Farm  organizations  (all  states)  200  members; 
warehousemen,  50;  export  leaf  dealers,  50;  bankers,  25; 
fertilizer  manufacturers,  25;  and  merchants,  25,  making  a 
total  of  3  75  delegated  members,  who  are  appointed  yearly 
by  the  respective  groups.  The  delegated  membership,  at 
their  annual  meetings  elect  a  15-member  Board  of  Directors. 
Each  supporting  group  is  entitled  to  one  board  member  for 
each  2  5  delegated  members. 

PRESIDENT  HUTSON 

Representatives  of  the  organization  felt  indeed  fortunate] 
in  being  able  to  obtain  the  services  of  J.  B.  Hutson,  Wash- 
ington D.  C,  a  former  Under  Secretary  of  Agriculture  and! 
a   man   thoroughly   experienced   with   tobacco   matters   both| 
here  at  home  and  abroad,  to  head  the  organization  as  presi- 
dent. 

The  Marshall  Plan  for  aid  to  European  countries  came[< 
about  shortly  after  the  formation  of  Tobacco  Associates! 
and  if  we  had  not  had  a  man  of  the  caliber  of  Mr.  Hutsonl 
at  the  head  of  the  organization,  our  efforts  to  have  tobacco! 
included  in  the  Marshall  Plan  shipments  to  foreign  coun-| 
tries  would  have  been  much  less  effective.  Through  him,| 
with  his  invaluable  contacts  among  governmental  and  to-I 
bacco  trade  agencies  in  the  United  States  and  abroad,  to-1 
bacco  was  given  a  definite  place  in  the  list  of  commodities! 
European  countries  were  allowed  to  import. 

WORK  OF  ORGANIZATION 

Tobacco  Associates  maintains  an  office  in  Washington^ 
through  which  periodic  studies  are  made  of  all  trade  policies 
and  legislation  that  affects  foreign  trade,  especially  tobacccH 
trade.  Surveys  are  also  constantly  made  in  foreign  counf 
tries  to  determine  problems  and  policies  that  affect  ouiS 
tobacco.  Representatives  of  the  organization  also  wort] 
with  foreign  manufacturers,  dealers,  merchants  and  otheifl 
agencies  to  keep  abreast  of  the  ever  changing  conditions. 

The  organization  cooperates  with  all  government  agenj 
cies  and  departments  charged  with  any  responsibility  foil 
developing,  handling  or  promoting  the  export  trade  of  th<| 
United   States,   and   in   particular  the   export   of   flue-curec] 


Summer-fall,  i  951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  1 


tobacco,  and  cooperates  with  responsible  heads  of  all  such 
departments  and  agencies  in  an  effort  to  expand  further 
and  more  fully  the  export  market  for  these  products.  In 
addition,  Tobacco  Associates  provides  a  medium  of  informa- 
tion for  tobacco  growers  and  the  tobacco  trade  generally 
as  to  developments  in  foreign  markets  as  affecting  the  export 
of  American  flue-cured  tobacco  and  examines  and  studies 
national  policies  at  the  time  they  are  being  formulated  and 
advises  tobacco  growers  and  the  tobacco  trade  as  to  the  prob- 
able effect  of  these  policies  on  foreign  trade  in  general  and 
on  tobacco  exports  in  particular. 

EXPORTS  TO  NEW  FIELDS 

A  look  at  the  total  exports  of  flue-cured  tobacco  from  the 
United  States  and  the  percentage  of  these  totals  that  Eng- 
land and  China — long  the  two  leading  users  of  United  States 
grown  flue-cured  tobacco — have  taken  as  compared  with 
all  other  countries  will  show  some  definite  results  of  the 
work  that  has  been  done  on  export  markets.  Prom  193  5 
to  193  9,  the  average  total  of  flue-cured  tobacco  exports 
from  the  United  States  was  359,196,000  pounds,  with  Eng- 
land taking  5  4  percent  of  the  total,  China  nine  percent,  and 
all  other  countries  37  percent. 

The  1940-46  average  was  353,431,000  pounds  with  Eng- 
land taking  60  percent;  China  five  percent,  and  all  other 
countries  35  percent.  In  1947  with  459,399,000  pounds 
exported,  England  took  4  2  percent,  China  six  percent,  and 
all  other  countries  52  percent.  In  1948  with  383,410,000 
pounds  exported,  England  again  took  4  2  percent,  China  only 
two  percent,  and  all  other  countries  5  6  percent.  In  1949 
with  436,138,000  pounds  exported,  England's  purchases 
dropped  to  37  percent,  China  to  .03  percent  with  62.07 
percent  going  to  other  countries. 

These  figures  clearly  indicate  that  even  though  England 
and  China  have  found  it  necessary  to  reduce  their  pur- 
chases of  American-grown  tobacco,  our  flue-cured  leaf  ex- 
ports have  increased.  This  has  been  due,  of  course,  to  the 
work  done  in  helping  other  countries  secure  our  tobacco 
to  meet  the  demands  of  the  people  in  those  countries  who 
desire  it. 

GERMANY  NOW  BIG  USER 

An  outstanding  example  of  this  work  can  be  seen  in  the 
purchases  of  our  tobacco  made  by  Germany.  Prior  to  1947, 
Germany  used  practically  no  United  States  flue-cured  to- 
bacco. Studies  of  trends  and  consumer  demands  in  Germany 
by  Tobacco  Associates  showed  a  strong  preference  for  our 
tobacco.  German  manufacturers  were  willing  to  change 
their  blends  to  meet  these  demands.  Tobacco  Associates 
brought  this  to  the  attention  of  the  proper  authorities  and 
was  able  to  help  work  out  a  program  whereby  flue-cured 
tobacco  was  shipped  to  Germany.  Now  Germany  is  the 
second  largest  user  of  our  leaf.  And  through  this  program 
the  Stabilization  Corporation  is  also  able  to  move  large 
quantities  of  its  takings. 

Through  the  development  of  new  markets  in  other  coun- 
tries, we  have  been  able  to  more  than  offset  Great  Britain's 
fewer  purchases.  This  means  that  our  export  market  is 
now  on  a  much  broader  base  and  that  we  are  no  longer  so 
dependent  upon  any  one  country  for  the  sale  of  our  tobacco. 

TRADE  BALANCE  IMPORTANT 

Promoting  and  developing  export  markets  for  our  flue- 
cured  tobacco  remains  a  continuous  job.  Foreign  taxation 
policies,  government  monopoly  practices  of  many  foreign 
countries,  and  difficulties  in  maintaining  satisfactory  trade 
relations  between  other  countries  and  the  United  States 
have  been  major  problems. 

Even  though  United  States  imports  of  all  merchandise 
still  is  not  as  much  as  our  exports,  the  improvement  in  the 
trade  balance  position  of  the  United  States  was  probably 
the  most  important  single  development  in  1950  affecting 
the  export  of  United  States  flue-cured  leaf.  The  dollar 
position  of  many  foreign  countries  has  improved  to  the  ex- 
tent that  they  are  no  longer  required  to  search  the  non- 
dollar areas  of  the  world  for  substitutes  for  the  commodities 
desired  and  normally  purchased  from  the  United  States. 

COMPETITION  FROM  ABROAD 

Another  factor  worthy  of  note  is  the  expansion  in  pro- 
duction of  flue-cured  tobacco  in  foreign  countries.  Southern 
Rhodesia,  which  before  World  War  II  produced  less  than 
25  million  pounds  of  flue-cured  tobacco  annually,  harvested 
104  million  pounds  in  19  50  and  has  an  expansion  program 
underway  to  reach  140  million  pounds  in  the  next  three  or 


four  years.  India  is  also  reported  to  be  increasing  the  pro- 
duction and  export  of  flue-cured  tobacco,  with  the  United 
Kingdom  the  major  importer  of  the  Indian  leaf. 

In  19  50  Canada  harvested  about  50  percent  more  flue- 
cured  leaf  than  in  prewar,  and  reports  indicate  that  a  sub- 
stantial increase  is  planned  in  1951.  Canada  now  produces 
practically  all  the  leaf  used  in  that  country  and,  for  several 
years,  has  been  exporting  from  15  to  20  million  pounds 
annually,  most  of  which  goes  to  the  United  Kingdom.  Leaf 
tobacco  from  Canada,  India  and  Southern  Rhodesia  is  ac- 
corded lower  rates  of  import  duties  by  the  United  Kingdom 
and  other  British  Commonwealth  countries  than  leaf  from 
the  United  States. 

In  Turkey,  production  is  now  nearly  double  that  of  pre- 
war years.  In  Greece,  production  is  approaching  that  of 
pre-war  years. 

OUR  BRIGHT  LEAF  PREFERRED 

Since  the  trend  in  consumption  is  toward  the  cigarette 
types,  however,  most  of  these  countries  are  experiencing 
difficulties  in  producing  desirable  types  of  tobacco,  and  are 
therefore  finding  it  difficult  to  satisfy  consumers  with  the 
domestically  produced  tobaccos  "as  they  prefer  the  Ameri- 
can-grown leaf.  But  in  addition  to  expanding  their  produc- 
tion, they  are  also  concentrating  on  quality  improvements 
in  the  tobacco  they  produce. 

Because  of  foreign  exchange  controls  and  tariff  barriers, 
we  do  not  have  equal  opportunities  in  some  markets.  There 
are  still  large  competitive  areas,  however,  and  very  little 
of  this  foreign  tobacco  could  be  sold  in  world  markets  in 
which  the  better  qualities  of  tobacco  grown  in  the  United 
States  are  available.  The  shift  from  other  tobacco  products 
to  cigarettes  is  continuing  throughout  the  world.  Tobacco 
of  lemon  color,  porous  texture,  light  body,  low  nicotine  and 
high  sugar  content,  and  good  burning  qualities  is  sought 
for  cigarettes.  The  market  for  other  qualities  of  flue-cured 
tobacco  is  gradually  disappearing.  There  is  no  doubt  that 
it  is  to  the  best  interest  of  United  States  producers  to  take 
advantage  of  all  available  information  and  every  opportunity 
to  increase  the  output  of  the  desirable  grades  and  decrease 
the  output  of  the  undesirable  grades,  thus  capitalizing  on 
our  natural  advantage  of  production,  flavor  and  aroma. 

STILL  EXPANDING  MARKETS 

The  effectiveness  of  Tobacco  Associates  work  has  been 
felt  in  all  phases  of  the  tobacco  industry — production,  mar- 
keting and  distribution  of  United  States-grown  tobacco 
have  profited  by  the  program.  The  organization  has  ac- 
complished much  in  its  four  years  of  operation,  but  there 
is  still  a  big  job  to  do  before  every  consumer  who  desires 
American-grown  tobacco  is  permitted  reasonably  free  access 
to  it. 

Each  year  farmers  have  voted  overwhelmingly  for  the 
assessment.  So,  for  the  small  cost  of  10  cents  per  acre  paid 
each  year  by  flue-cured  tobacco  farmers,  together  with 
yearly  contributions  by  tobacco  warehousemen,  dealers, 
merchants,  fertilizer  manufacturers  and  bankers,  Tobacco 
Associates,  Inc.  continues  to  serve  the  purpose  for  which  it 
was  organized — to  create  and  maintain  a  continued  market 
for  our  Golden  Weed  by  the  people  of  foreign  countries 
who  prefer  it  over  all  other  tobaccos. 


AMERICAN  MACHINE  PRODUCES  TOBACCO 

(Continued  from  page  102) 
mother,  Mrs.  Mary  Fries  Patterson.    His  brother, 
the  late  Dr.  Andrew  H.  Patterson,  was  dean  of  the 
University  of  North  Carolina. 

Morehead  Patterson,  now  chairman  of  the  board 
of  directors  and  president  of  American  Machine  and 
Foundry  Co.,  is  a  native  of  Durham. 


W.  Stanley  Whitaker,  who  joined  Liggett  &  Myers 
Tobacco  Co.  in  the  Leaf  Department  in  Danville, 
Va.,  in  1928  and  was  in  leaf  and  factory  operations 
in  Durham  and  Wilson,  has  been  made  general 
manager  of  the  western  territory  of  the  company, 
embracing  seven  states  and  with  headquarters  at 
San  Francisco,  Calif. 


PAGE  1  1  2 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  951 


Association  Regulates  Marketing  of  Flue-Cured  Tobacco 

By  Fred  S.  Royster,  Henderson,  President,  Bright  Belt  Warehouse  Association,  Inc. 


300  TOBACCO  AUCTION  WAREHOUSES 

North  Carolina,  growing  67.6  percent  of  the  na- 
tion's bright  flue-cured  leaf  tobacco  and  a  relatively 
small  amount  of  burley  in  the  mountain  area,  has 
in  47  of  her  communities  about  300  auction  sales 
tobacco  warehouses  with  17,000,000  square  feet  of 
sales  space.  Of  the  1950  crop  these  warehouses 
sold  850,000,000  pounds  of  tobacco  for  $475,000,- 
000.  List  of  the  warehouses,  by  belts  and  communi- 
ties, follows : 

OLD  BRIGHT   BELT 

Burlington — Cobles,   Farmers  and  Carolina. 

Greensboro — Greensboro  1   &   2  and  Guilford  County. 

Madison — Carolina,  New  Brick,  Big  Star,  Planters  and 
Sharpe  &  Smith. 

Mebane — Farmers,  Piedmont  and  Planters. 

Mt.  Airy — Simmons,  Va. -Carolina,  Nichols,  Liberty  and 
Planters  &  Jones. 

Reidsville — Brown's,  Farmers,  Leader,  Watts  and  Smoth- 
ers. 

Roxboro — Hyco,  Planters,  Pioneer,  Farmers  and  Win- 
stead. 

Stoneville — Brown's,  Farmers,  Slate  Bros.  1  &  2  and 
Piedmont. 

Winston-Salem — Glenn's  &  Banner,  Brown's,  Carolina, 
Planters,  Liberty,  Pepper's,  Piedmont,  Taylor's  1  &  2,  Dixie 
and  Farmers. 

MIDDLE  BRIGHT  BELT 

Aberdeen — Planters,  Aberdeen,  and  New  Aberdeen. 

Carthage — McConnell's  and  Smothers  Bros.  1  &  2. 

Durham — Liberty,  Planters,  Mangum's  1  &  2,  Star  Brick, 
Star  and  Roycroft's  1  &  2. 

Ellerbe — Richmond  Co.  and  Farmers. 

Fuquay  Springs — Varina  Brick  1  &  2,  Southside,  Central 
1  &  2,  Farmers,  Talley  Bros.,  Planters  and  New  Deal. 

Henderson — Banner,  High  Price,  Carolina-Cooper's,  Farm- 
ers, Planters  and  Liberty. 

Louisburg — Southside,  Planters  and  Union. 

Oxford — Banner,    Mitchell,    Farmers-Mangum,    Fleming's 

1  &  2,  Owen's  1  &  2,  Planters  and  Johnson's. 

Sanford — Wilkins,  Big  Sanford,  3-W  1  &  2  and  Farmers. 
Warrenton — Boyd's,  Centre,  Farmers  and  Currins. 

EASTERN  BRIGHT  BELT 

Ahoskie — Basnight  and  Farmers. 

Clinton — Bass,  Big  Sampson,  Carolina,  Centre,  Ross  No. 

2  and  Farmers. 

Dunn — Big  4-Country,  Farmers  and  Growers. 

Farmville — Bell's,  Monk's  1  &  2',  Planters,  Farmers  and 
Fountains. 

Goldsboro — Tin,  Victory,  Carolina  and  Farmers  1  &  2. 

Greenville — Cannon's,  Dixie,  Center  Brick,  Keel  Planters 
Cooperative  Inc.,  Smith  &  Sugg,  Gold  Leaf,  Star  1  &  2, 
Morton's,  Empire,  New  Carolina  1  &  2,  Victory,  Farmers, 
Growers,  Harris  Rogers  and  McGowan's. 

Kinston — Brooks,  Central,  Eagle,  New  Carolina,  Farmers, 
Sheppard's  1  &  2,  Knott's,  The  Star,  Knott's  New,  New  Dixie, 
Planters,  Inc.,  Tapp's  and  Kinston  Cooperative. 

Robersonville — Adkins  &  Bailey,  Planters  1  &  2  and  Red 
Front. 

Rocky  Mount — Cobb  &  Foxhall  1  &  2,  Farmers,  Fenner's, 
Inc.  1  &  2,  Mangum's  1  &  2,  Tobacco  Planters,  Inc.  1  &  2 
&  3,  Works,  Easley's  and  Smith's  1  &  2. 

Smithfield — Big  Planters,  Little  Dixie,  Gold  Leaf  1  &  2, 
Perkins  Riverside,  Wallace  1,  2  &  3,  Farmers  1  &  2  and 
Dixie  Growers. 

Tarboro — Clark's  1  &  2,  Victory  1  &  2,  and  Farmers  1 
&  2. 

Wallace — Hussey's  1  &  3  and  Blanchard  &  Farrior. 

Washington — Knott's,   Sermon's   1    &   2  and  Gravely's. 


The  Bright  Belt  Warehouse  Association,  Inc.,  was 
organized  April  12,  1945.  It  is  a  trade  association 
representing  all  flue-cured  tobacco  warehousemen 
in  the  States  of  Florida,  George,  South  Carolina, 
North  Carolina,  and  Virginia. 

The  Association  is  governed  by  a  Board  of  Gov- 
ernors consisting  of  36  members,  six  members  from 
each  of  the  flue-cured  tobacco  belts.  The  present 
officials  are:  president,  F.  S.  Royster,  Henderson; 
vice  president,  W.  Wesley  Singletary,  Lake  City, 
S.  C. ;  secretary  and  treasurer,  Guy  E.  Barnes,] 
Rocky  Mount,  N.  C. 

The  objectives  of  the  Association  are  to  promul- 
gate rules  and  regulations  for  the  orderly  market- 
ing of  the  flue-cured  tobacco  crop,  to  cooperate  with 
farm  organizations  and  other  groups  interested  in 
the  tobacco  industry  for  the  continuation  and  pro- 
tection of  the  present  flue-cured  tobacco  program 
upon  which  the  well  being  of  the  tobacco  industry 
is  dependent. 

Since  the  warehouseman  provides  the  marketing 
agency  for  all  flue-cured  tobacco,  the  maintenance 
of   marketing   conditions   fair   to   both   buyer   and 
seller  is  of  the  utmost  importance.    This  the  Bright  I 
Belt  Warehouse  Association  is  endeavoring  to  do. 

The  success  of  the  flue-cured  tobacco  program! 
and  the  healthy  condition  of  the  industry  during  re- 1 
cent  years  is  attributable  to  close  cooperation  be-i 
tween  the  component  parts  of  the  tobacco  industry]! 
The  Bright  Belt  Warehouse  Association,  realizini 
this  fully,  desires  to  make  its  contribution  towards| 
the  continued  success  of  the  tobacco  program. 

Nineteen  of  the  36  members  of  the  Board  of  Govjj 
ernors  of  the  Bright  Belt  Warehouse  Association 
Inc.,    are   residents   of   North    Carolina.      The   lisl 
follows:  T.  A.  Jones,  Mount  Airy;  H.  M.  Bouldin 
Winston— Salem ;  John  S.  Watkins,  Oxford;  A.  L 
Carver,  Durham;  Fred  S.  Royster,  Henderson;  G 
E.  Smith,  Reidsville;  C.  E.  Ford,  Louisburg;  W.  F| 
Wood,  Sanford;  A.  R.  Talley,  Fuquay  Springs;  W| 
B.  Falkner,  Rocky  Mount;  Dixon  Wallace,  Smith 
field;  J.  C.  Eagles,  Jr.,  Wilson;  Joseph  H.  Bryant] 
Clarkton ;    George   Knott,    Kinston ;   J.    C.    Carltonfi 
Farmville;  B.  B.  Sugg,  Greenville;  J.  E.  Johnsonj 
Lumberton;  Frank  Davis,  Fairmont;  and  R.  E.  Will 
kins,  Lumberton. 

Wendell — Farmers,  Northside,  Planters,  Producers  Co| 
operative  Assoc,   Inc.,   Star  and  Banner. 

Williamston — Farmers-Carolina  1  &  2,  Planters  and 
Roanoke  Dixie. 

Wilson — Big  Dixie  Sales  Co.,  Inc.,  Big  Star,  Carolina! 
Wainwright's,  Inc.,  Centre  1,  2  &  3,  Clark's,  New  Planter!] 
1  &  2,  Watson's  1  &  2,  Smith's  A,B,C,  Growers  Cooperaj 
tive  Inc.,  Banner  and  Farmers. 

Windsor — Farmers. 

BORDER  BRIGHT  BELT 

Chadbourn — New  Brick,  Carters  1  &  2  and  Myers. 
Clarkton — Banner,    Bright    Leaf,    Big    "L",    Brick,    Bi 
"5"  and  New  Bladen. 

(Continued  on  page  121) 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  3 


About  100  Leaf  Processing  Plants  in  N.  C.  Market  Towns 


North  Carolina,  dominate  in  two  important 
phases  of  tobacco  for  about  a  century — growing 
bright  leaf  tobacco  and  manufacturing  tobacco  prod- 
ucts— is  thus  active  in  all  phases  from  growing  to 
manufacturing.  Operation  of  tobacco  sales  ware- 
houses and  processing  plants,  involving  stemming 
and  redrying,  have  long  been  important  activities. 

Processing  plants  not  only  handle  leaf  tobacco 
for  domestic  companies  but  also  prepare  enormous 
quantities  for  the  export  trade.  R.  J.  Reynolds 
Tobacco  Co.  and  the  American  Suppliers,  represent- 
ing the  American  Tobacco  Co.,  buy  and  process  for 
their  own  firms.  Imperial  and  Export  Leaf  To- 
bacco Co.  purchase  leaf  for  export  to  England  and 
other  foreign  countries.  Numerous  other  buying 
and  processing  firms  handle  leaf  for  both  the  do- 
mestic and  the  export  trade.  Among  these  are 
Dibrell  Brothers,  Inc.,  Danville,  which  has  asso- 
ciate firms  on  most  of  North  Carolina's  leaf  tobacco 
market  cities,  the  Universal  Tobacco  Co.  of  Rich- 
mond, and  others. 

Firms  engaged  in  buying  and  processing  leaf  to- 
bacco on  the  various  markets  of  the  State  by  towns 
and  cities  include  the  following: 

OXFORD— W.  A.  Adams  Co.,  Inc.,  A.  S.  Ballou 
&  Co.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  Export  Leaf  To- 
bacco Co.,  The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  Ltd. 

DURHAM — American  Suppliers  Inc.,  Central 
Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  Flower  Brothers,  Liggett  & 
Myers  Tobacco  Co.,  W.  L.  Robinson  Co.,  Inc.,  The 
Venable  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco 
Co.,  The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  Ltd. 

WINSTON-SALEM— J.  E.  Bohannon  Co.,  Brown 
&  Williamson  Tobacco  Corp.,  Piedmont  Leaf  Tobacco 
Co.,  Inc.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  Taylor  Broth- 
ers, Inc.,  Winston  Leaf  Tobacco  &  Storage  Co.,  Inc., 
Export  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co., 
Ltd. 

SMITHFIELD— Bright  Leaf  &  Burley  Tobacco 
Co.,  Inc. 

FUQUAY  SPRINGS— Brown  Tobacco  Co.,  North 
State  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

REIDSVILLE— J.  H.  Burton  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Carolina 
Virginia  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  Reidsville  Tobacco  Co., 
Inc.,  American  Suppliers,  Inc. 

ROXBORO— Central  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
Reidsville  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

ROCKY  MOUNT— China-American  Tobacco  Co., 
G.  R.  Garrett  Co.,  Inc.,  W.  B.  Lea  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
Maus  &  Company,  Inc.,  Thorpe  &  Ricks,  Inc.,  R.  J. 
Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  Export  Leaf  Tobacco  Co., 
The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  Ltd. 

WILSON— W.  T.  Clark  &  Co.,  Jas.  I.  Miller  Tobac- 
co Co.,  Inc.,  Standard  Redryers,  Inc.,  R.  P.  Watson 
&  Co.,  Inc.,  Whitehead  &  Anderson,  Inc.,  Wilson  To- 
bacco Co.,  Inc.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  Export 
Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  Ltd. 


KINSTON— T.  H.  Covington,  Dealer  Leaf  Tob., 
V.  C.  Dickenson,  Dixie  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  L.  B. 
Jenkins  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  Kinston  Tobacco  Co.,  E. 
V.  Webb  &  Co.,  Inc.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  Ex- 
port Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co., 
Ltd. 

FARMVILLE— Farmville  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
A.  C.  Monk  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Scott  &  Bright  Tobacco  Co. 

GREENVILLE— E.  B.  Ficklen  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
Greenville  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco 
Co.,  Person-Garrett  Co.,  Inc.,  Export  Leaf  Tobacco 
Co.,  The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  Ltd. 

ROBERSONVILLE— The  Fields  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

RALEIGH — Flue-Cured  Tobacco  Cooperative  Sta- 
bilization Corp. 

GOLDSBORO— Goldsboro  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc.,  J. 
P.  Taylor  Co.,  Inc.,  Wallbrook  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

HENDERSON— The  Henderson  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.,  J.  P.  Taylor  Co.,  Inc. 

FAIRMONT — International  Planters  Corp.,  Per- 
son-Garrett Co.,  Inc.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co., 
The  Imperial  Tobacco  Co.,  Ltd. 

LUMBERTON— Interstate  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
Person-Garrett  Co.,  Inc.,  J.  B.  Rountree  &  Co.,  White- 
head &  Anderson,  Inc. 

WILLIAMSTON— King  Tobacco  Co.,  W.  I.  Skin- 
ner &  Co.,  Inc. 

NEW  BERN— A.  C.  Monk  &  Co.,  Inc. 

WENDELL— Monk-Henderson  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc., 
Renfro  Leaf  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

ASHEVILLE— Mountain  Burley  Tobacco  Co. 

FAYETTEVILLE— Reidsville  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

SANFORD— Sanford  Tobacco  Co. 

WASHINGTON— Washington  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

WHITEVILLE— Whiteville  Tobacco  Co.,  Inc. 

GREENSBORO— R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Co. 


ONE  SHARE  OF  BLACKWELL 

An  interesting  incident  in  connection  with  the 
sale  of  the  Blackwell  Tobacco  Co.,  maker  of  Bull 
Durham  smoking  tobacco,  to  the  Union  Tobacco 
Co.,  composed  largely  of  Wall  Street  financiers, 
and  the  sale  of  this  firm  soon  after  to  the  rela- 
tively new  American  Tobacco  Co.,  is  a  matter  of 
record.  A  North  Carolina  lawyer  owned  one  share 
of  the  Blackwell  stock,  par  value  of  $25,  market 
value  at  that  time  of  $16.50.  This  lawyer  let  it 
be  known  that  he  as  a  minority  stockholder  was 
ready  to  bring  suit  to  try  to  prevent  the  sale.  He 
was  visited  by  an  important  American  Tobacco 
Co.  official  and  after  a  long  conference,  his  one 
little  share  of  stock  was  sold  for  $5,000.  This  prob- 
ably prevented  an  injunction  and  receivership  and 
allowed  the  sale  to  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 


Page  1 1 4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


Amendments  in  1951  Increase  Benefits,  Reduce  Taxes 


By  W.  D.  Holoman,  Chief  Counsel,  ESC 


The  Employment  Security  Law  was  amended  in 
several  respects  by  the  1951  Legislature.  Most  of 
the  changes  were  recommended  by  the  State  Advis- 
ory Council  and  by  the  Employment  Security  Com- 
mission on  which  there  are  representatives  of  em- 
ployers, employees  and  the  general  public.  Some  of 
the  changes  were  material ;  others  were  of  an  ad- 
ministrative nature  which  will  enable  the  Commis- 
sion to  administer  the  law  better  and  were  brought 
about  through  experience  and  study. 

North  Carolina  employers  will  save  approximately 
three  and  one-half  million  dollars  during  the  calen- 
dar year  of  1951  and  unemployed  workers  will  enjoy 
additional  benefits  of  approximately  the  same  amount 
during  1951  as  a  result  of  the  recent  amendments. 
The  estimate,  in  respect  to  the  savings  by  employers, 
is  based  upon  payrolls  for  the  year  1950  and  the  esti- 
mate in  respect  to  increased  benefits  to  workers  is 
based  on  an  annual  benefit  payment  activity  in  the 
same  volume  as  prevailed  for  the  period  from  Octo- 
ber 1950  to  February  1951  which  is  approximately 
60%  of  the  payment  experience  for  the  calendar 
year  of  1950. 

These  savings  to  employers  will  result  from  a 
revision  of  the  experience  rating  formula  or  schedule 
by  providing  a  lower  rate  class  for  each  of  the  rate 
groups  with  the  exception  of  the  standard  rate  class 
of  2.7  per  cent  which  is  fixed  by  Federal  conformity 
requirements.  Rates  are  varied  with  relation  to 
the  past  employment  experience  of  each  eligible 
employer  over  a  period  of  three  years,  and  the  varia- 
tion of  an  employer's  tax  rate  by  these  methods  is 
known  as  "experience  rating."  The  avowed  objec- 
tives of  experience  rating  are  the  prevention  of 
unemployment  by  inducing  employers  to  stabilize 
their  operations  and  the  allocation  of  the  social  costs 
of  unemployment  to  the  individual  business  concerns 
responsible  for  those  costs. 

The  average  contribution  rate  effective  in  North 
Carolina  in  1950  was  1.55  per  cent.  Had  the  new 
formula  been  effective  in  1950,  the  average  rate 
would  have  been  approximately  1.22  per  cent,  thus 
placing  North  Carolina  in  a  better  relationship  as  to 
the  National  average  and  with  neighboring  states. 
It  appears  that  the  average  North  Carolina  rate  for 
1951  for  those  eligible  employers  will  be  approxi- 
mately 1.42  per  cent  which  is  somewhat  higher  than 
the  1.22  rate  derived  from  the  application  of  the 
revised  schedule  to  the  1950  computation  payroll 
data,  but  economic  factors  which  account  for  the  rise 
in  this  State  will  likely  alter  the  rate  pattern  equally 
as  much,  if  not  more,  in  each  of  the  other  states. 

During  1950,  the  North  Carolina  reserve  fund  had 
one  of  the  highest  degrees  of  solvency  of  any  state 
in  the  nation  in  relation  to  its  contingent  liability. 
The  State  Advisory  Council,  the  Employment  Secur- 
ity Commission  and  those  of  us  administering  the 


program  felt  that  we  could  safely  further  reduce  the 
rate  of  contributions  and  also  increase  benefits  to 
unemployed  workers  without  endangering  the  solv- 
ency of  the  fund.  The  savings  are  distributed  to 
approximately  8,172  employers  who  presently  enjoy 
a  rate  reduction. 

Eligible  unemployed  workers  will  be  entitled  to 
additional  benefits  because  of  the  revision  of  the 
benefit  schedule  or  formula,  the  elimination  of  the 
waiting  period  requirements  and  the  extension  of 
the  duration  of  benefits  for  those  workers  with  pro- 
longed unemployment.  Prior  to  the  recent  amend- 
ments, payments  to  totally  unemployed  individuals 
started  with  the  second  week  of  unemployment  or 
with  the  third  week  if  partially  unemployed.  In 
cases  of  total  unemployment,  the  payment  normally 
reached  the  claimant  sometime  during  the  third 
week  following  separation;  and  in  cases  of  partial 
unemployment,  during  the  fourth  week  following 
separation.  Under  the  law  as  now  amended,  no 
waiting  period  is  required  and  a  claimant  will  re- 
ceive payment  for  his  first  week  of  unemployment. 
Therefore,  the  completion  of  the  first  week  in  a  bene- 
fit year  for  which  an  eligible  claim  is  filed,  now  be- 
comes the  first  compensable  week. 

The  benefit  schedule  or  formula  was  revised  by  the 
amendments  to  provide  that  the  qualifying  wage 
during  the  base  period  was  raised  from  $200.00  to 
$250.00.  The  latter  figure  represents  the  minimum 
annual  earnings  necessary  during  the  base  period 
for  a  claimant  to  qualify  for  benefits.  The  minimum 
annual  qualifying  earnings  of  $250.00,  therefore, 
yields  a  $7.00  minimum  weekly  benefit  payment  in- 
stead of  a  $6.00  minimum  payment  which  existed 
prior  to  the  amendments.  Maximum  weekly  pay- 
ments are  increased  from  $25.00  to  $30.00  per  week 
for  individuals  earning  $3000.00  or  more  per  year. 

It  is  estimated  that  the  revised  formula  will  yield 
an  average  weekly  payment  of  $17.02  as  compared 
with  an  average  payment  of  $15.68  prior  to  the 
amendments.  As  a  result,  payments  to  North  Caro- 
lina's unemployed  will  bear  a  close  relationship  to 
the  Nation's  average  payment,  taking  into  account 
variations  in  wage  scales  prevailing.  The  maximum 
benefit  is  based  on  the  full  annual  taxable  wage  of 
$3000.00  instead  of  the  first  $2500.00  under  the  law 
prior  to  the  amendments. 

The  amendments  likewise  extended  the  duration 
of  benefits  from  20  to  26  weeks.  About  half  of  the 
states  now  provide  more  than  20  weeks  protection 
to  unemployed  workers  experiencing  prolonged  un- 
employment; more  than  a  fourth  offer  protection 
for  26  weeks.  During  1949,  a  year  of  more  than 
average  unemployment,  only  about  30  percent  of  the 
unemployed  workers  used  all  benefit  rights;  thus, 
it  is  estimated  that  this  provision  will  affect  less 
than  a  third  of  all  claimants. 


Summer-fall,  i  95 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   115 


The  fund,  even  with  these  changes,  will  remain 
adequately  solvent  to  take  care  of  any  and  all  con- 
tingencies. 

Another  amendment  was  adopted  in  which  em- 
ployers will  be  interested.  Under  the  law,  prior  to 
this  amendment,  an  employing  unit  which,  as  an 
example,  during  the  year  1946  worked  eight  or  more 
people  in  employment,  but  inadvertently  failed  to 
report  such  fact  to  the  Commission  and  who  was 
discovered  by  a  representative  of  the  commission 
during  the  year  1950,  would  become  liable  for  the 
years  1946,  1947,  1948,  1949  and  1950  even  though 
such  employing  unit  did  not  work  as  many  as  eight 
individuals  in  any  year  other  than  during  1946. 
This  worked  a  hardship  upon  some  small  employers 
who  unintentionally  and  unknowingly  failed  to  re- 
port their  coverage  and  who,  therefore,  did  not 
apply  for  termination  of  coverage  as  provided  for 
in  the  statutes. 

The  amendment  referred  to  expands  the  condi- 
tions under  which  an  employer  may  terminate  cov- 
erage and  is  designed  to  provide  a  means  of  pro- 
tection for  the  employer  who  inadvertently  fails 
to  report  his  coverage  to  the  Commission  or  who 
is  not  discovered  by  the  Commission  for  a  period 
of  several  years.  Under  the  provisions  of  the 
amendment  an  employer  who  became  subject  to 
the  Act,  as  an  example,  in  1946  and  who  has  not 
worked  as  many  as  eight  individuals  in  as  many 
as  20  weeks  in  any  year  since  that  date  and  who 
was  not  discovered  by  the  Commission  until  1951, 
may  terminate  coverage  effective  January  1,  1948 
by  filing  a  written  application  for  termination  of 
coverage  or  protest  within  90  days  from  the  date 
that  he  is  notified  of  his  liability.  In  such  case,  he 
would  not  be  compelled  to  pay  taxes  for  the  years 
1948,  1949  and  1950  but  could  be  relieved  and  only 
required  to  pay  for  two  years,  which  is  the  mini- 
mum years  of  coverage  provided  by  the  law.  This 
provision  does  not,  however,  apply  to  those  em- 
ployers who  willfully  and  intentionally  attempt 
to  evade  the  payment  of  contributions  under  the 
law. 

A  further  amendment  was  adopted  for  the  pur- 
pose of  eliminating  the  possibility  of  double  taxa- 
tion brought  about  by  reason  of  an  interpretation 
of  the  Federal  Unemployment  Tax  Act  which  was 
contrary  to  an  interpretation  of  the  State  Employ- 
ment Security  Law.  In  certain  instances,  the  Fed- 
eral Act  has  been  interpreted  so  that  an  "em- 
ployee" under  the  Employment  Security  Law  of 
this  State,  is  an  "independent  contractor"  under 
the  Federal  Unemployment  Tax  Act  and,  there- 
fore, an  "employer"  under  that  Act,  provided  such 
individual  or  contractor  had  the  requisite  number 
of  individuals  in  employment  for  the  requisite 
number  of  weeks  in  a  calendar  year. 

Under  such  circumstances,  the  Commission  is 
required  to  collect  contributions  on  the  wages  earn- 
3d  by  such  individual,  agent  or  employee  as  well  as 
;hose  individuals  employed  to  assist  him  in  the  per- 
formance of  the  work  for  the  principal ;  whereas,  the 


Federal  authorities  require  that  individual  or  con- 
tractor to  pay  taxes  under  the  Federal  Unemploy- 
ment Tax  Act  as  an  "employer"  on  the  remuneration 
received  by  those  individuals  assisting  him  in  per- 
forming the  services.  Therefore,  in  these  cases, 
there  was  actually  double  taxation  for  the  same 
services.  The  amendment  is  for  the  purpose  of  pre- 
venting the  assessment  and  collection  of  contribu- 
tions under  the  North  Carolina  Law  from  a  principal 
employing  unit,  provided  the  agent  or  employee  is 
an  "employer"  subject  to  the  provisions  of  the  Fed- 
eral Unemployment  Tax  Act  and  liable  for  contri- 
butions thereunder. 

Another  amendment  was  adopted  which  further 
liberalizes  the  law  by  extending  the  period  of  time 
in  which  an  employer  may  protest  his  contribution 
rate  and  request  a  recomputation  of  such  rate,  due 
to  erroneous  charges  or  other  reasons.  Under  the 
law  prior  to  the  amendment,  an  employer's  contribu- 
tion rate  became  final  unless  there  was  a  protest 
within  30  days  from  the  date  that  the  rate  became 
effective.  All  rates  are  effective  January  1  of  a 
calendar  year,  therefore,  an  employer's  rate  became 
final  unless  a  protest  was  made  by  January  31  of  a 
calendar  year.  The  amendment  provides  that  an 
employer  may  protest  his  rate  at  any  time  prior  to 
May  first  following  the  effective  day  of  such  rate. 

The  time  within  which  an  employer  make  make 
a  voluntary  contribution  has  been  extended.  Under 
the  law  an  employer  is  permitted  to  make  a  volun- 
tary contribution  for  the  purpose  of  affecting  his 
rate  during  the  next  calendar  year.  Prior  to  the 
amendments,  the  contribution  was  required  to  be 
made  within  10  days  after  the  Commission  mailed 
to  such  employer  the  statement  of  charges  for  the 
quarter  ending  July  31.  Under  such  circumstances, 
an  employer  did  not  have  a  composite  statement 
showing  the  balance  of  his  reserve  account,  state- 
ment of  credits  thereto,  charges  against  such  ac- 
count or  a  computation  of  his  rate  for  the  next  year. 

The  amendment  will  permit  an  employer  to  make 
a  voluntary  contribution  within  15  days  after  the 
mailing  of  the  notification  of  the  rate  for  the  follow- 
ing year  which  is  contained  in  a  statement  showing 
his  reserve  account  balance,  his  statement  of  credits, 
and  the  charges  to  his  reserve  account.  (The  em- 
ployer can  easily  determine  from  such  statement 
whether  a  voluntary  contribution  will  be  to  his 
advantage.)  The  employer  will  have  before  him 
all  of  the  necessary  information  upon  which  an 
accurate  computation  can  be  made  so  that  he  can 
determine  whether  a  voluntary  contribution  will 
be  to  his  best  interest,  and  if  so,  the  amount  of  such 
contribution  necessary  to  secure  a  lower  rate. 

A  further  amendment  which  was  adopted  pro- 
vides that  the  Commission  may,  within  its  discre- 
tion, withhold  the  issuance  of  an  execution  for  a 
period  not  exceeding  180  days  after  the  docketing 
of  a  judgment  against  an  employer.  Under  the  law 
as  it  existed  prior  to  the  amendment,  the  Commis- 
sion had  no  right  or  authority  to  extend  the  time 
of  payment  of  contributions  or  to  withhold  the  issu- 


PAGE  1  1 6 


THE  E.  S.  C  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,  1951 


ance  of  an  execution  after  a  judgment  had  been 
docketed.  This  was  found  to  have  caused  undue 
hardships  in  certain  cases,  and  although  the  Com- 
mission is  still  required  to  docket  a  judgment  when 
contributions  are  unpaid,  after  an  employer  has 
been  given  notice  of  the  delinquency,  it  would  not, 
under  the  amended  law,  be  mandatory  for  the  Com- 
mission to  issue  an  execution  immediately  on  such 
judgment. 

The  Commission  is  making  every  effort  possible 
to  combat  and  prevent  fraud  in  connection  with  the 
Employment  Security  Program  in  North  Carolina. 
A  special  Fraud  Detection  Unit  has  been  estab- 
lished within  the  framework  of  the  agency,  and 
claimants  who  are  detected  or  suspected  of  being 
guilty  of  fraud,  are  being  prosecuted.  An  amend- 
ment was  adopted  which  makes  it  a  misedemeanor 
for  an  individual,  who  is  filing  a  claim  for  bene- 
fits in  this  State  against  another  State,  to  make 
a  false  statement  or  representation  knowing  the 
same  to  be  false,  or  who  knowingly  fails  to  dis- 
close a  material  fact  to  obtain  benefits.  Hereto- 
fore, when  a  claimant  filed  a  claim  for  benefits  in 
this  State  against  another  State  and  made  false 
statements  or  misrepresentations  for  the  purpose 
of  drawing  benefits  against  such  other  state,  he 
could  not  be  prosecuted  in  either  this  State  or  the 
other  State. 

Under  the  amendment  referred  to,  such  claim- 
ant may  be  prosecuted  in  this  State  for  making 
false  statements  or  misrepresentations,  even 
though  he  is  filing  for  benefits  against  another 
State.  It  is  understood  that  many  of  the  other 
states  are  adopting  comparable  legislation  which 
will  permit  those  states  to  prosecute  a  claimant  in 
those  states  who  makes  a  false  statement  or  mis- 
representation for  the  purpose  of  drawing  bene- 
fits against  North  Carolina. 

The  law  was  also  amended  to  authorize  specific- 
ally an  adjustment  in  the  account  of  a  claimant 
who  filed  in  another  State  against  the  State  of 
North    Carolina    and    has    received    benefits    from 


the  North  Carolina  fund  by  reason  of  a  willful 
misrepresentation  or  a  failure  to  disclose  a  mate- 
rial fact  in  connection  with  his  eligibility  for  bene- 
fits, and  as  a  result,  has  received  benefits.  The  stat- 
ute was  also  amended  so  that  a  person  who  has  know- 
ingly made  a  false  statement  or  misrepresentation 
to  obtain  or  increase  any  benefit  under  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Law,  shall  not  be  entitled  to  receive 
benefits  for  the  remainder  of  any  benefit  year  during 
which  he  has  made  such  misrepresentation  or  false 
statement. 

That  section  of  the  law  which  provided  an  ap- 
propriation by  this  State  in  the  amount  of  $75,000.00 
annually  to  be  used  in  carrying  on  the  functions  of 
the  Employment  Service  Division  of  the  Commission 
was  repealed.  Such  section  was  originally  written 
into  the  Employment  Security  Law  in  accordance 
with  a  provision  of  the  Wagner-Peyser  Act  which 
required  the  various  states,  in  order  to  secure  grants 
for  the  maintenance  of  employment  offices,  to  match 
federal  funds  appropriated  for  that  purpose.  Such 
provision  in  the  Wagner-Peyser  Act  was  repealed 
on  September  8,  1950  and,  therefore,  since  the  re- 
peal of  the  section  of  the  North  Carolina  law  here- 
inabove referred  to,  the  Federal  Government  now 
bears  all  of  those  costs. 

Another  amendment  was  adopted  excluding  from 
the  definition  of  employment,  all  services  performed 
by  newsboys  selling  or  distributing  newspapers  or 
magazines  on  the  street  or  from  house  to  house,  re- 
gardless of  the  age  of  the  individuals  performing 
those  services.  Under  the  law  prior  to  the  amend-  j 
ment,  only  such  services  performed  by  individuals 
under  the  age  of  18  were  exempt. 

Certain  other  amendments  were  adopted,  however, 
they  were  technical  or  administrative. 

It  is  felt  that  the  amendments  liberalized  the  Act 
considerably  both  from  the  standpoint  of  employers 
and  employees.    It  is  also  felt  that  the  law  has  been 
considerably  clarified  and  has  been  made  much  more) 
equitable. 


Experience  Rating  Gives  Added  Saving  of  $3,500,000 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper,  Director,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


Unemployment  compensation  benefits  are  financed 
by  means  of  contributions  collected  on  taxable  wages 
of  covered  employers.  The  normal  or  standard  em- 
ployer tax  rate  is  2.7  percent  of  taxable  wages.  The 
Federal  Unemployment  Tax  Act,  however,  permits 
States  with  "pooled  funds"  to  vary  this  rate  for  in- 
dividual employers  if  such  variation  is  based  on  not 
less  than  three  years  of  experience  bearing  a  direct 
relation  to  unemployment  risk.  Rate  variation  pur- 
suant to  this  provision  of  the  Federal  Act  is  known 
as  experience  rating. 

There  are  a  great  variety  of  experience  rating 
provisions  among  the  States.    North  Carolina  along 


with  28  other  States  (in  1950)  uses  the  reserve  ratio 
plan.  With  this  type  formula,  an  employer's  unem- 
ployment experience  is  measured  by  the  ratio  of  his 
reserve — broadly  cumulative  contributions  less  bene- 
fit charges — to  taxable  payroll  for  a  base  period.  A| 
high  reserve  ratio  indicates  favorable  experience 
with  unemployment  and  qualifies  an  employer  for 
lower  contribution  rates.  The  rates  of  contribution 
in  North  Carolina  vary  from  .10  to  2.7  of  the  tax 
able  payroll. 

EXPERIENCE  RATING  STUDY 

The  unemployment  trust  fund  balance  as  of  MarcrL 
31,  1951,  was  $165,250,720.    In  the  two-year  periocf 


UMMER-FALL,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  7 


atween  April  1,  1949,  and  March  31,  1951,  there 
as  a  net  gain  of  more  than  $9,260,000  in  the  fund 
alance  as  the  result  of  contributions  collected  and 
iterest  earned  on  the  fund  exceeding  benefit  pay- 
lents.  During  this  same  two-year  period  benefit 
ayments  exceeded  $35,000,000. 

The  Fund  solvency  seemed  assured  with  the  fund 
l  excess  of  $165,000,000,  particularly  since  the 
ross  payments  in  the  13-year  period  (1938-1950) 
'ere  less  than  $80,000,000. 

As  an  outgrowth  of  the  study  of  the  financial  struc- 
lre  in  terms  of  contributions,  rates,  and  benefit  pay- 
tents,  changes  in  the  experience  rating  plan  and 
le  benefit  schedule  were  submitted  for  considera- 
on  by  the  1951  General  Assembly. 

This  study  of  the  experience  rating  reflects  the 
isult  of  legislative  changes  made  by  the  1951  Gen- 
ial Assembly  in  connection  with  rate  schedules  but 
le  changes  in  the  benefit  formula  do  not  enter  into 
lis  computation.  Had  no  legislative  action  been 
iken,  the  rates  assigned  would  have  been  appre- 
ably  higher  because  of  general  economic  factors, 
he  Employment  Security  Commission  and  its  State 
dvisory  Council  developed  and  proposed  to  the  1951 
eneral  Assembly  certain  amendments  which  modi- 
ed  the  formula  for  deriving  employer  contribution 
ites.  The  revised  schedule  was  constructed  so  as 
)  maintain  the  same  ratio  requirements  contained 
i  the  1949  amended  Act  but  permits  lower  rates 
)r  each  ratio  class  above  the  2.5  percent  qualifying 
itio  prescribed  by  Federal  standards. 

The  over-all  effect  of  the  revised  formula  is  to 
ive  lower  rates  while  maintaining  the  safeguard 
1  adequate  reserve  ratios.     The  decrease  in  rates, 

is  estimated,  will  more  than  offset  rate  increases 
lat  would  have  been  inevitable  because  of  the  opera- 
on  of  economic  factors. 

ATES  REFLECT  BENEFIT  CHARGES 
The  "recessionary"  period  in  mid-year  1949  and 
le  first  half  of  1950  had  a  measurable  effect  on  the 
sperience  rating  computation  made  for  1951.  The 
ivel  of  employment  dropped  from  an  average  month- 
'  total  of  651,000  in  the  third  quarter  of  1948  to 
92,000  in  the  second  quarter  of  1949.  Unemploy- 
lent  was  at  the  highest  level  since  the  1938-1940 
eriod.  Benefit  charges  made  against  accumulated 
sserves  entering  into  the  1950  computation  amount- 
I  to  about  $13,000,000  and  those  entering  into  the 
951  computation  exceeded  $19,500,000.  Even 
lough  it  is  beyond  the  scope  of  this  study,  it  is  well 
)  point  out  that  the  effect  of  the  heavy  charges, 
ithout  formula  modification,  would  have  produced 
n  average  contribution  rate  of  1.69  and  required 
bout  $3,500,000  more  in  contribution  payments 
'om  employers. 

The  estimated  average  contribution  rate  for  the 
dendar  year  1951  is  expected  to  be  1.42  percent, 
2.,  contributions  for  the  average  employer  will  be 
imputed  by  multiplying  the  taxable  portion  of  the 
lyroll  by  1.42  instead  of  the  1.55  rate  applicable  for 
)50.    Thus,  the  net  effect  of  the  revised  formula  is 


to  overcome  the  effect  of  the  larger  charges  against 
reserves  prior  to  computation  and  give  an  8.4  percent 
further  reduction  in  average  rate,  or  said  in  another 
way,  the  average  rate  in  1951  is  about  16  percent 
lower  than  it  would  have  been  had  the  formula  not 
been  changed. 

1951  SAVINGS  $16,500,000 

A  significant  measure  of  the  real  meaning  of  the 
plan  of  experience  rating  is  shown  by  the  fact  that 
for  the  8,172  employers  earning  a  rate  reduction,  the 
average  rate  is  .695  instead  of  the  over-all  State-wide 
average  of  1.42.  The  total  saving  through  experi- 
ence rating  to  the  8,172  employers  as  a  result  of  the 
application  of  experience  rating  plan  amounts  to 
almost  $16,500,000,  a  saving  through  reduced  rates 
averaging  $2,009  for  each  qualifying  employer. 

The  schedule  of  contribution  rates  applicable  to 
1951  payrolls  ranges  from  .10  percent  to  2.70  percent 
of  the  taxable  payroll. 

Under  the  amended  schedule,  three  times  as  many 
employers  (1667  employers)  qualified  for  the  lowest 
rate,  .10  percent,  as  did  in  the  1950  computation.  In 
1950  about  three-eighths  of  the  rated  accounts  were 
assigned  a  rate  of  less  than  one  percent;  in  this 
computation  five-eighths  qualified  for  a  rate  of  less 
than  one  percent. 

Despite  the  over-all  decline  in  average  rate,  it  is 
significant  to  note  that  1,213  firms  with  reduced 
rates  in  1950  had  higher  rates  assigned  for  1951. 
This  rise  in  some  rates  reflected  the  influence  in  some 
instances  of  benefit  charges,  and  in  other  cases,  of 
higher  payroll  levels  for  the  three  years  entering 
into  the  computation. 

The  unrated  accounts,  those  not  having  payroll 
experience  for  three  calendar  years — declined  from 
1,629  in  1950  to  1,571  in  the  computation  for  1951. 
In  addition,  the  2.7  standard  rate  was  assigned  to 
3,018  rated  accounts  which  failed  to  meet  the  reserve 
ratio  requirements  or  the  test  with  respect  to  reserve 
in  terms  of  multiples  of  benefit  charges.  Actually 
almost  36  percent  of  all  rated  accounts  retain  the 
2.7  rate  for  1951,  and  these  employers,  oddly  enough, 
have  36  percent  of  the  State's  taxable  payroll. 

There  were  3,018  accounts  that  were  rated  but 
because  of  benefit  charges  against  reserves,  delin- 
quency in  payment  of  contributions  and  similar  fac- 
tors, these  firms  failed  to  have  sufficient  reserve  bal- 
ance to  qualify  for  a  reduced  rate.  An  analysis 
made  of  these  accounts  indicates  that  size  of  firm 
is  not  a  controlling  factor  in  experience  rating ;  how- 
ever, the  1951  computation  shows  a  greater  propor- 
tion of  ineligible  accounts  in  the  $100,000  and  over 
payroll  class  than  is  found  in  any  previous  computa- 
tion. 

In  a  detailed  study  the  rated  accounts  are  classi- 
fied according  to  major  industry  and  rate  class.  The 
number  of  rated  accounts  increased  by  606  from  the 
1950  study.  The  gain  in  the  number  of  rated  ac- 
counts is  distributed  generally  among  the  major 
groups,  e.g.,  Construction,  8.6%  ;  Trade,  6.5%  ;  Serv- 


PAGE  1  1  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1.951 


ice,  6%  ;  Manufacturing,  3.4%  ;  and  Transportation, 
Communication  and  Utilities,  4.2%. 

The  tabular  arrangement  in  this  detailed  study 
shows  that  some  variations  are  found  in  the  rate 
pattern  in  different  major  industries. 

It  is  shown  that  in  every  principal  group,  the  num- 
ber of  accounts  assigned  the  minimum  rate  of  .10 
nearly  trebled  the  number  in  1950 ;  the  number  of 
accounts  with  a  rate  under  1.0  likewise  increased  by 


80  percent;  but  paradoxically,  the  number  of  rated 
accounts  failing  to  qualify  for  reduced  rates  increas- 
ed by  a  fourth.  The  new  schedule  had  the  effect  of 
giving  lower  rates  to  those  accounts  whose  reserve 
ratios  exceeded  2.5  percent  and  the  result  was  a  re- 
duction in  the  number  of  accounts  with  rates  be- 
tween 1.0  and  2.7  from  4,264  to  1,175,  a  reduction  of 
about  75  percent. 

Note:     The  more  detailed  study  is  available  on  request  to 
the  Commission. 


ESC  Seeks  Fill-in  Work  For  Seasonal  Tobacco  Workers 

By  Blanche  Lancaster,  Chief  Occujmtional  Analyst,  ES  Division,  ESC 


Full  utilization  of  seasonal  workers  has  long  been 
a  problem  of  the  Employment  Security  Commission. 
During  World  War  II,  at  the  request  of  Dr.  J.  S. 
Dorton,  State  War  Manpower  Director,  the  Occupa- 
tional Analysts  prepared  a  statewide  industry  study 
entitled  "Tobacco  in  North  Carolina,  Growing, 
Marketing,  and  Processing".  This  work  was  done 
to  determine  the  skills  of  workers  in  the  tobacco 
industry  and  to  discover  where  these  skills  could 
be  utilized  in  other  industries,  preferably  those 
which  would  demand  workers  in  the  off-season  of 
the  tobacco  industry.  Another  purpose  of  this  study 
was  to  furnish  local  E.  S.  offices  with  occupational 
information  on  one  of  the  major  industries  in  this 
State. 

Most  of  the  workers  in  this  industry  are  non- 
white  and  a  large  percentage  female.  The  men 
seem  to  be  more  able  to  pick  up  odd  jobs  in  the  off- 
season than  the  women.  About  the  only  job  oppor- 
tunities for  the  latter  are  in  domestic  jobs.  Few 
of  them  are  trained  for  this  type  of  work  and  rarely 
make  good  domestic  workers.  Most  of  them  would 
prefer  other  types  of  work,  if  it  were  available. 

Approximately  100  different  jobs  were  observed 
in  30  establishments  in  preparation  of  this  study  of 
the  tobacco  industry.  In  analyzing  the  skills  of  the 
workers  in  these  jobs  according  to  the  Dictionary 
of  Occupational  Titles,  86  %>  of  them  were  classed 
as  unskilled.  However,  further  analysis  showed 
that  most  of  the  jobs  in  the  processing  plants  called 
for  a  fairly  high  degree  of  manual  dexterity  and 
eye-hand  coordination.  Comparable  fields  of  work 
were  found  to  be  Simple  Visual  Inspecting,  Simple 
Machine  Operating  or  Tending,  Equipment  Serving, 
Miscellaneous  Food  Handling  or  Preparing,  or  any 
light  elementary  work. 

On  a  recent  visit  to  two  Eastern  North  Carolina 
towns  it  was  learned  that  around  700  and  2000  of 
these  workers,  respectively,  would  be  out  of  work 
from  six  to  eight  months  due  to  the  closing  down 
of  tobacco  processing  plants  for  the  season.  Some 
of  these  workers  would  not  be  re-employed  next 
season  due  to  technological  changes  or  labor  saving 
machinery  installed  in  the  meantime.  This  pool  of 
available  labor  could  be  used  by  an  industry  six  to 
eight  months  in  the  year.    Some  groups  in  Eastern 


North  Carolina  towns  have  hesitated  to  invite  or 
encourage  other  industries  to  develop  for  fear  of 
disturbing  the  labor  supply  of  the  tobacco  com- 
panies which  have  depended  upon  these  workers 
for  a  number  of  years.  And  in  turn,  the  workers 
seem  to  enjoy  this  type  of  work  and  prefer  it  to 
any  other.  It  pays  well  and  provides  a  congenial 
atmosphere  for  large  numbers  working  together 

This  situation  is  serious  enough  in  normal  times 
but  in  a  war-time  economy  all  available  manpowei 
is  needed.  Labor  market  figures  show  that  severa 
thousand  of  these  tobacco  processing  plant  workers 
are  out  of  work  approximately  50%  of  the  year 
It  would  seem  that  some  off-season  industry  coulc 
be  established  to  utilize  these  workers  without  up 
setting  the  already  established  tobacco  industry 

Some  industries  to  fit  into  this  off-season  patterr 
have  been  suggested — food  processing  such  as  can 
ning  or  freezing  early  vegetables,  further  process 
ing  of  peanuts,  soy  beans,  grains  or  feed  for  farn 
animals.  Others  might  be  found.  It  is  hoped  tha 
some  North  Carolinian  will  come  forward  with  th< 
necessary  plans  and  funds  to  take  up  this  lag  ii 
our  State's  economy .- 

'Tobacco  in  North  Carolina 
Processing",  has  proved  t 
be  of  major  interest  not  only  to  E.  S.  offices  n 
North  Carolina,  but  has  been  requested  by  30  othe 
States  and  three  foreign  countries ;  49  tobacco  com 
panies  have  requested  copies  for  use  of  their  per] 
sonnel,  as  well  as  23  libraries  outside  the  State.  Th 
number  of  copies  distributed  to  date  totals  1547 
A  limited  number  of  copies  still  may  be  obtaine 
from  the  Employment  Security  Commission  o 
North  Carolina. 


Note:    This  study, 
Growing,    Marketing, 


STABILIZATION  GROUP  HOLDS  PRICES 

(Continued  from  page  107) 

vice-presidents ;  L.  T.  Weeks,  Raleigh,  secretary  an 
treasurer  and  general  manager;  W.  T.  Joyner,  Ra 
eigh,  general  counsel;  E.  Y.  Floyd,  Raleigh,  publi 
director,  and  other  directors :  T.  W.  Allen,  Creec 
moor ;  George  Sockwell,  Elon  College ;  W.  W.  Eagle 
Macclesfield;  George  L.  Pate,  Rowland,  and  J.  1 
Winslow,  Greenville,  N.  C. 


,UMMER-FALL,  1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  9 


N.  C.  Has  Ample  Labor  Reserves  for  Industrial  Needs 

By  Mrs.  Edith  D.  Hutchins,  Sr.  Statistician,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


North  Carolina's  position  ivith  respect  to  man- 
ooiver  reserve  is  enviable  for  there  is  a  sizeable  labor 
"eserve  to  meet  further  expansion  needs.  Despite 
;h  increasing  absorption  of  the  labor  surplus  in  its 
ndustrialized  areas,  North  Carolina  continues  to 
"emain  an  area  of  supply,  not  only  for  its  own  de- 
nands  but  also  for  shortage  areas  in  other  States. 
Indicative  of  its  labor  resources  is  the  State's  marked 
ndustrial  growth  in  the  past  ten  years;  for  example, 
covered  employment  under  the  Employment  Security 
Lau)  is  now  almost  50  percent  higher  than  in  194-0. 
Vorth  Carolina  is  reducing  the  outflow  of  migrant 
vorkers  to  other  States  for  better  paying  jobs  be- 
cause of  increased  job  opportunities  at  home.  Fur- 
thermore, the  preparedness  program  is  augmenting 
he  State's  potential  labor  supply  which  is  currently 
estimated  to  be  in  excess  of  100,000  workers. 

It  is  readily  accepted  that  manpower  resources  set 
i  ceiling  on  employment  expansion ;  however,  this  is 
i  minor  consideration  in  North  Carolina  for  the  po- 
;ential  recruitable  labor  supply  is  not  only  quite  large 
)ut  is  subject  to  further  expansion  in  times  of  na- 
;ional  emergencies.  It  should  be  recognized,  how- 
ever, that  with  the  expansion  in  all  types  of  industry, 
Darticularly  the  rapid  expansion  in  our  defense,  es- 
sential civilian,  and  war-supporting  industries  (espe- 
cially textiles),  the  additional  labor  demands  made 
ipon  our  economy  may  cause  temporary  shortages, 
rhese  shortages,  whether  they  be  lack  of  materials, 
shortages  of  specific  occupational  skills,  inadequate 
;ransportation  facilities,  fuel,  etc.  may  slow  the  pace 
)f  industrial  expansion  but  are  not  likely  to  stop  it. 

Over  50,000  skilled  and  semi-skilled  workers  in 
;his  State  are  believed  to  be  currently  and  poten- 
;ially  available  for  employment  with  new  or  expand- 
ng  industries  which  pay  wages  and  offer  work  con- 
litions  equal  to  or  slightly  better  than  the  present 
ndustrial  pattern.  This  supply  includes  potentially 
available  workers  not  now  in  the  labor  force  and 
commuting  workers  as  well  as  workers  currently 
memployed  and  seeking  work  in  the  area.  About 
30  percent  of  these  workers  are  trained  in  the  follow- 
ing basic  trades :  (1)  mechanical,  (2)  textiles,  (3) 
furniture,  (4)  needle  trades,  and  (5)  construction. 
These  workers  are  the  best  immediate  source  of 
workers  for  essential  jobs  because  the  skills  and 
work  habits  of  its  members  are  superior  to  those  of 
the  bulk  of  the  persons,  who  can  in  an  emergency 
be  drawn  into  the  labor  force. 

In  addition  to  those  workers  with  recent  employ- 
ment background,  there  is  an  equal  supply  of  un- 
skilled recruitable  workers  who  are  under  45  years 
3f  age  and  deemed  trainable  for  jobs  requiring  skills. 
This  recruitable  labor  supply  consists  of:  (1)  high 
school  graduates  seeking  jobs;  (2)  housewives  who 
would  welcome  the  opportunity  of  supplementing 
;he  family  income  due  to  the  rising  cost  of  living; 


(3)  older  men  and  women  and  handicapped  workers 
who  had  experience  in  defense  industries  during 
World  War  II  and  who  are  anxious  to  become  a 
part  of  the  labor  force  again;  (4)  draft  exempt 
young  men  anxiously  searching  for  more  gainful 
employment;  and  (5)  agricultural  workers  who  are 
available  for  more  stable  employment  plus  other 
agricultural  workers  who  have  been  released  from 
the  farm  due  to  increasing  mechanization  in  agri- 
culture. 

Today  North  Carolina  is  better  off  from  the 
standpoint  of  the  available  skills  of  its  workers  than 
before  World  War  II  because  of  the  work  experi- 
ences acquired  in  military  service  and  in  war  in- 
dustries. It  is  estimated  that  around  250,000  North 
Carolinians  migrated  to  other  states  during  the 
War  and  acquired  many  skills  some  of  which  were 
and  are  still  foreign  to  North  Carolina  industry. 
Many  of  these  workers  returned  to  their  home  state 
bringing  with  them  new  skills  developed  elsewhere. 

Conversely,  approximately  115,000  workers  from 
other  states  migrated  to  North  Carolina  during  the 
same  period  and  local  labor  working  along  side  of 
them  in  war  plants  profited  through  on-the-job  as- 
sociation with  these  skilled  workers.  The  armed 
forces  during  the  war  period  claimed  over  300,000 
men  and  women  from  the  State  and  upon  their  re- 
turn, these  servicemen  and  women  brought  still 
more  skills  acquired  during  their  period  of  service. 

The  population  growth  of  North  Carolina  during 
the  decade  following  1940  was  accompanied  by  a 
quickened  expansion  in  the  labor  force.  The  State's 
population  was  3,571,623  in  1940,  a  rank  of  eleventh 
in  the  Nation  and  the  largest  southeastern  state. 
North  Carolina  ranked  tenth  among  all  states  in 
its  population  of  4,061,929  in  1950,  a  gain  of  13.7 
percent  for  the  decade.  Covered  employment  in- 
creased 44  percent  during  the  same  period  from  a 
monthly  average  of  469,204  in  the  third  quarter  of 
1940  to  675,555  in  the  comparable  period  of  1950. 

Contributing  factors  for  these  large  increases  in 
both  population  and  covered  employment  are  (1) 
the  State's  high  birth  rate  and  (2)  the  increase  in 
economic  opportunities  which  has  reduced  the  out- 
migration  from  the  State  and  increased  the  flow  of 
in-migrants,  although  it  is  believed  that  the  State 
still  has  a  net  migrant  loss.  A  definite  indication 
that  ample  manpower  reserves  for  production  ex- 
pansion are  still  available  is  the  slight  percentage 
gain  during  the  decade  in  that  portion  of  the  pop- 
ulation in  covered  employment.  Covered  employ- 
ment in  North  Carolina  during  1940  represented 
approximately  13  percent  of  the  total  population; 
whereas,  it  had  increased  only  to  about  17  percent 
in  1950. 

In  contrast,  covered  employment  in  comparable 
industrialized  states    (Michigan,  Indiana,  Missouri 


PAGE   120 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1951 


and  West  Virginia)2  comprises  between  19  and  24 
percent  of  their  1950  populations.  Thus,  North 
Carolina  could  very  readily  increase  its  working 
force  to  the  point  where  covered  employment  under 
the  Employment  Security  Law  would  rise  from  17 
to  22  or  23  percent  of  the  total  population.  A  rise  in 
covered  employment  to  22  percent  of  population 
would  alone  add  over  200,000  more  workers  than 
were  covered  in  the  third  quarter  of  1950. 

During  September  1940,  there  were  9,176  active 
employers  covered  under  the  Employment  Security 
Program.  By  the  comparable  period  of  1950  the 
number  of  covered  establishments  had  increased  by 
62  percent  to  14,886.  The  growth  of  the  manufac- 
turing portion  of  this  covered  employment  during 
the  decade  has  been  very  significant — increasing 
from  an  average  monthly  total  of  2,845  units  em- 


ploying 319,721  workers  in  1940  to  4,092  units  (44 
percent  gain)  employing  408,761  (28  percent  rise) 
in  the  third  quarter  of  1950. 1  Finally,  the  success 
of  the  State  in  attracting  new  manufacturing  indus- 
tries is  evidenced  by  the  fact  that  in  1950  alone 
31  major  new  manufacturing  establishments  with 
an  estimated  peak  employment  of  over  9,700  and 
annual  payroll  of  $24,700,000  were  located  within 
the  State's  boundaries. 

In  perspective,  North  Carolina's  labor  resources 
for  industrial  development  should  not  only  be  ample 
to  meet  the  foreseeable  demand  of  its  industries, 
but  they  should  also  be  sufficient  to  afford  a  very 
significant  further  rise  in  number  of  new  estab- 
lishments and  industries  in  the  State. 


latest  Employment  Security  data  available. 
^Selected  states  with  comparable  coverage  provisions. 


Female  Employment  Should  Continue  Gain  in  N.  C,  1951 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn,  Supervisor  of  Reports  and  Analysis,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


The  over-all  employment  level  in  North  Carolina 
is  expected  to  rise  during  the  year  1951  as  the  huge 
defense  appropriations  result  in  a  rapid  expansion 
in  the  production  of  a  wide  range  of  goods  that  are 
to  be  needed  in  a  war  economy.  The  question  then 
arises :  How  will  the  general  level  of  employment 
rise  to  meet  these  production  goals  when  we  know 
that  the  armed  forces  will  be  a  constant  drain  on 
the  male  labor  supply,  and  that  the  reservoir  of 
unemployed  workers  is  already  abnormally  low? 
The  most  creditable  answer,  and  possibly  the  only 
answer  other  than  a  great  increase  in  the  work- 
week of  all  workers,  is  the  expansion  of  the  female 
employed  labor  force. 

North  Carolina's  prospects,  and  national  pros- 
pects for  that  matter,  are  not  as  favorable  for  an 
employment  expansion  now  as  they  were  in  1940 
before  World  War  II.  At  that  time  unemployment 
was  far  above  the  present  level.  It  is  estimated 
that  now  the  number  of  unemployed  workers  in  the 
labor  force  in  North  Carolina  is  about  50,000  as 
compared  with  the  more  than  125,000  unemployed 
in  1940.  Fortunately,  the  source  for  obtaining 
additional  workers  is  not  confined  to  those  unem- 
ployed workers  already  in  the  labor  force,  for 
actually  the  greatest  potential  source  of  additional 
workers  is  the  supply  of  employable  women  not 
now  in  the  labor  force,  who  can  be  attracted  to 
jobs.  Here  again,  the  picture  is  not  as  bright  in 
1951  as  in  1940. 

Ten  years  ago  women  comprised  only  26  per- 
cent of  the  labor  force,  whereas  during  the  war 
women  workers  comprised  about  40  percent  of  the 
labor  force.  Since  that  time,  and  particularly  in 
1946  right  after  the  war,  a  number  of  women  re- 
tired from  the  labor  force,  but  the  proportion  of 
female  to  the  total  labor  force  has  not  dropped 
back  to  26  percent,  the  1940  level,  by  any  means. 


Today   it  is  believed  that  female   workers   consti- 
tute about  a  third  of  the  labor  force. 

The  following  charts  point  up  the  trend  of  wo- 
men  in   the   labor   force   during  the   period    1943- J 
1950  as  depicted  by  two  selected  local  office  activi- 
ties;   namely,    the    proportion    of    nonagricultural  i 
placements  of  female  to  total  placements,  and  the; 
proportion  of  female  applicants  to  all  active  appli- 
cants seeking  jobs: 

chart  I 

Percent    of    Female    Placements    to    Total    Nonagricultural  j 
Placements:    1943-1950 


1943—34.7% 
1944 — 37.8 
1945 — 37.7 
1946 — 30.4 
1947 — 33.7 
1948 — 35.5 

30    1949 — 43.9 
1950 — 41.1 

0 


rmsvmtfmm} 


143  144  145  146  147  14a  »49  150 

Chart  II  shows  the  rapid  rise  in  the  percent  of 
female  active  applicants  seeking  work  to  the  total 
of  all  applicants.  Following  the  last  war  female 
active  applications  dropped  to  6,354  or  to  only  22.5 
percent  of  total  applications  at  the  end  of  1945.  Dur- 
ing the  first  year  after  the  war  the  level  of  femak 
applications  was  comparatively  stable,  and  stood  a1 
7,000  or  23.8  percent  of  the  total  at  the  end  of  1946 
In  each  of  the  succeeding  years  the  female  propor- 
tion to  the  total  rose  steadily  as  follows:  Januarj 


)UMMER-FALL,    1951 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE    121 


CHART    II 

'ercent   of   Female   Applications   to   Total   Applications   on 

File:    Jan.    1,    1946-1951 

Percent  Percent 

50  | ===—150 


1946 — 22.5% 
1947 — 23.8 
1948 — 28.1 
1949 — 39.9 
1950 — 43.1 
1951 — 48.9 


40 


30 


i-  40 


30 


• 

• 

• 

•  • 
• 

•  • 

•  ■ 

•  • 
• 

•  • 
• 

•  • 
• 

•  • 

• 

>  • 
• 

• 

• 

•  • 
• 

• 

• 
• 
• 

• 

•  i 

• 

• 

•  i 

• 

•  < 

• 

• 

• 
• 

• 

•  < 

• 

.   •  _ 

• 

•  < 

• 
»  i 

• 

•  » 

• 

■ 

• 
t  t 

m 

•  4 

• 
»    4 

• 

• 
• 

• 

• 
• 

— 

—  •  1 

• 

■ 

• 
•  1 

« 

— .    • 

• 
• 
• 
• 

• 
• 
• 
• 

• 
• 
• 
• 

3 

• 
• 

• 
• 
• 

■  « 

• 

• 
»  • 

• 

• 

• 

• 
»  • 

•  • 

• 

•  • 

• 

• 
• 

• 

• 

• 
• 
• 

• 

•  i 

•  i 
• 

•  < 

• 

• 
• 

20  . 


10  _V- 


20 


•46     '47     »48     »4J     '50     ^1 

948,  28.1  percent;  1949,  39.9  percent;  1950,  43.1 
'ercent;  and  January  1,  1951,  48.9  percent. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  total  number  of 
ctive  applicants  seeking  jobs  on  January  1,  1951 — 
mounting  to  37,522 — was  only  8,099  more  than  the 
umber  seeking  work  at  the  end  of  December  1945 ; 
/hereas  11,363  more  women  were  seeking  job  in 
anuary  1951  than  in  January  1946  (18,363  as  com- 
pared with  7,000).  Obviously,  for  the  past  several 
ears,  as  revealed  by  the  second  chart  on  applica- 
ions,  women  have  not  fared  nearly  as  well  as  men 
n  obtaining  jobs  or  else  women  have  been  constantly 
owing  back  into  the  labor  market  and  thereby  swell- 
rig  the  labor  force. 

The  fact  that  for  the  two-year  period,  1949-50, 
emale  nonagricultural  placements  have  comprised 

much  greater  proportion  of  all  nonagricultural 
'lacements  than  ever  before  tends  to  support  the 
econd  premise;  i.e.,  women  have  been  flowing  back 
tito  the  labor  market  in  increasing  numbers.  The 
pparent  reason  for  this  trend  is  the  rising  cost  of 
iving  which  has  necessitated  an  increase  in  wage 
arners;  also,  many  women  have  already  responded 
o  the  recent  rise  and  expected  further  increase  in 
ttractive  job  opportunities  arising  from  the  pre- 
iaredness  program. 

North  Carolina  is  fortunate  to  be  a  big  labor  sup- 
>ly  area  which  will  permit  it  to  bear  a  greater  share 
f  the  total  defense  production.  A  survey,  just  re- 
ently  completed,  reveals  a  potential  supply  of  over 
5,000  females  a  large  portion  of  whom  are  not  now 
n  the  labor  force  but  who  are  available  for  expand- 
ng  employment  and  to  offset  the  steady  drain  of  men 
o  the  armed  forces. 

If  a  forecast  had  to  be  made  of  the  one  major 
conomic  development  for  the  year  1951 — other  than 

general  rise  in  employment  and  production  particul- 
arly in  defense  industries — it  would  be  "The  Great- 
r  Emphasis  Placed  on  Recruitment  of  Female  Work- 
rs  and  the  Steady  Rise  in  Female  Employment." 


BULL  DURHAM  PLANTS  CAPACITY 
EXCEEDS  400  MILLION  BAGS  A  YEAR 

Bull  Durham  smoking  tobacco,  made  from  bright  yellow 
Carolina  leaf,  made  its  appearance  some  85  years  ago  and 
soon  became  known  as  "the  makings  of  a  nation".  In  fact 
the  familiar  "bull"  on  the  package  carries  a  very  accurate 
outline  of  the  map  of  the  United  States  on  his  side. 

However,  Bull  Durham  was  soon  to  become  known  in  all 
areas  of  the  world  in  which  smoking  tobacco  was  used,  due 
to  the  nation-wide  and  world-wide  activities  of  J.  Gilmer 
Koerner  of  Kernersville  and  crews  of  workers  in  pasting 
a  picture  of  the  bull  on  every  available  space  and  even  plas- 
tering the  famous  bull  on  the  famous  Pyramids  of  Egypt. 

During  World  War  I  the  Durham  Sun  in  February,  1918, 
described  the  departure  of  the  first  train  load  of  Bull  Dur- 
ham smoking  tobacco  pulling  out  of  Durham  freight  yards 


Bull  Durham  plant  of  American  Tobacco  Co.  at  Durham. 

on  its  first  lap  of  the  long  trip  headed  for  the  doughboys 
"somewhere  in  France".  Mayor  M.  E.  (Gene)  Newsom  of 
Durham  delivered  a  patriotic  address  on  the  occasion  of  the 
departure  of  this  train  of  30  freight  cars,  describing  it  as 
containing  11,000,000  sacks  of  tobacco,  enough  tobacco  bags 
to  stretch  900  miles  and  enough  tobacco  to  make  a  cigarette 
that  would  reach  entirely  around  the  world.  The  shipment, 
it  was  stated,  was  a  supply  for  only  half  of  a  month,  indi- 
cating that  2'2,000,000  sacks  were  to  be  shipped  for  the  boys 
in  France  each  month. 

In  World  War  II  and  also  in  the  current  Korean  hostilities 
members  of  the  United  States  Armed  Forces  have  carried 
the  familiar  Bull  Durham  bags  to  many  places.  Today  Bull 
Durham  is  manufactured  in  the  modern  plant  in  Durham 
which  has  an  annual  capacity  of  more  than  400,000,000  bags. 

EDITOR'S  NOTE  : — In  May,  1951,  after  a  funeral  service  and  on  the  edge  of 
the  attendants  in  a  Raleigh  Cemetery,  I  saw  a  man  rolling  a  cigarette  and 
asked  him  what  kind  of  tobacco  he  used.  He  replied  :  "Bull  Durham — I've 
been  rolling  it  into  cigarettes  and  smoking  it  for  more  than  50  years."  He 
responded  to  a  query  that  he  probably  would  let  the  American  Tobacco  Co. 
know  about  his  record. 


300  TOBACCO  AUCTION  WAKEHOUSES 

(Continued  from  page  112) 

Fair  Bluff — Planters  1  &  2,  Dixie  and  Powell. 

Fairmont — Mitchell-Davis,  Davis,  Big  Brick,  Farmers, 
Big  "5",  Holiday's,  Dixie,  Frye's  1  &  2,  Peoples,  Robeson 
County,  Twin  State  1  &  2,  Star-Carolina  1  &  2,  Planters 
1  &  2  and  Square  Deal  1  &  2. 

Fayetteville — Big  Farmers   1   &   2  and  Wellons. 

Lumberton — Britt's,  Hedgepeth  No.  2,  Liberty,  Carolina 
1  &  2,  Dixie,  T.  J.  Smith's  No.  2  and  Planters  (new). 

Tabor  City — New  Farmers-Carolina,  Garrell's  and  Plant- 
ers. 

Whiteville — Brooks,     Motley's,     Crutchfield's,     Farmer's, 
Tuggles,  Lea's  No.  1,  Nelson's,  Moore's,  Planters  1  &  2  and 
Perkins  &  Newman  1  &  2\ 
BURLEY  BELT 

Asheville — Carolina,  Farmers,  Dixie  1  &  2,  Planters  1 
&  2,  Bernard-Walker  1  &  2  and  Haneys  &  Walker. 

Boone — Mountain  Burley  1   &  2  and  Farmers  Burley. 

West  Jefferson — Tri-State  Burley  and  Planters. 


PAGE  122 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  951 


DUKE  ENDOWMENT  MILLIONS  AID 
HEALTH,  EDUCATION,  RELIGION 

Most  North  Carolinians  are  familiar  with  the  ac- 
tion taken  by  James  B.  Duke  on  December  10,  1924, 
when  the  announcement  was  made  of  the  establish- 
ment of  the  Duke  Endowment.  This  Endowment 
provides  benefactions  amounting  to  many  millions 
of  dollars  to  numbers  of  organizations  and  individ- 
uals in  North  and  South  Carolina  through  the  years 
to  come.  Its  assets  of  $40,000,000  to  begin  with 
were  increased  through  Mr.  Duke's  will  and  ac- 
cruals to  $80,000,000  and  continues  to  increase  un- 
der the  terms  specified  under  its  provisions. 

The  name  of  Trinity  College  at  Durham  was 
changed  to  Duke  University,  honoring  his  father, 
Washington  Duke,  and  the  college  plant  was  greatly 
enlarged  and  heavily  endowed.  This  institution 
was  the  chief  benefactor.  Sizable  sums  were  to  be 
distributed  annually  to  Davidson  College  at  David- 
son, Johnson  C.  Smith  University  at  Charlotte  and 
Furman  University  at  Greenville,  S.  C. 

Other  provisions  devoted  extensive  funds  to  build- 
ing and  helping  support  new  and  established  hos- 
pitals and  in  providing  free  beds  at  hospitals  in  both 
North  and  South  Carolina;  construction  and  main- 
tenance of  Methodist  churches  and  in  the  care  and 
support  of  retired  ministers  of  Methodist  churches 
in  North  Carolina,  their  widows  and  orphans. 

The  board  of  directors  of  the  Duke  Endowment  is 
self  perpetuating  and  includes  about  fifteen  mem- 
bers, with  George  G.  Allen  as  chairman.  Other  pres- 
ent members  are  Mrs.  J.  B.  Duke,  their  daughter, 
Doris,  and  former  business  friends  and  associates  of 
Mr.  Duke,  largely  in  New  York  and  North  Carolina. 

Through  this  instrumentality  James  B.  Duke,  who 
accumulated  a  vast  fortune  by  his  own  unsurpassed 
ability  and  skill  in  developing  huge  tobacco  and  elec- 
tric power  corporations,  has  thus  provided  for  dis- 
tributing large  sums  of  money  through  the  years  for 
the  education,  health  and  comfort  of  thousands  of 
individuals  in  the  two  states  in  which  his  chief  activ- 
ities were  performed. 

ONE  FIRM  STILL  PRODUCES  SNUFF; 
STARTED  IN  STATE  80  YEARS  AGO 

Snuff  has  been  manufactured  in  North  Carolina  for  80 
years  or  more  but  usually  in  small  quantities  and  only  by  a 
few  firms.  The  present  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Cor- 
poration, Winston-Salem,  is  the  only  firm  now  producing 
snuff,  the  principal  brand  being  Tube  Rose.  Probably  the 
first  snuff  manufacturer  in  the  State  was  John  Ruffin  Green, 
Durham,  who  started  making  snuff  probably  around  1870. 
His  brand  was  Ladies'  Choice  Scotch  Snuff,  which  is  still 
being  manufactured  elsewhere  by  the  American  Tobacco 
Co.  Other  firms  in  the  State  have  manufactured  snuff  at 
various  times  and  for  varying  periods.  Mr.  Miller  started 
snuff  making  at  Brown  &  Williamson  Tobacco  Co.  in  1907. 

Snuff  is  a  powdered  form  of  tobacco,  produced  either  from 
tobacco  stems  or  from  stems  with  varying  amounts  of  leaf 
tobacco.  It  took  its  name  from  the  way  in  which  it  is  used 
by  the  sophisticated  elite  classes  in  England,  France  and 
other  European  countries.  From  the  gold  and  silver  snuff 
boxes  in  the  earlier  days  a  pinch  of  snuff  would  be  taken 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  held  to  the  nostrils  and 
snuffed  up  into  the  nose.  That  method,  in  vogue  more  than 
a  hundred  years  ago  has  probably  passed  out  entirely.  An- 
other method  of  use  was  to  pull  out  the  lower  lip  and  put 
a  pinch  of  snuff  between  it  and  the  gums. 


"Dipping"  has  for  many  years  been  the  most  popular  form 
of  use,  particularly  among  southern  and  western  farm 
and  factory  women  who  continue  as  the  principal  users.  The 
use  of  snuff,  although  supplanted  in  large  part  by  the  in- 
creasing use  of  cigarettes  among  women,  has  become  fairly 
well  stabilized  and  continues  to  be  a  minor  but  important 
adjunct  of  the  tobacco  industry. 

Manufacturing  snuff  involves  several  processes.  One  is 
that  the  stems  and  parts  of  the  leaf  used  in  its  manufacture 
are  allowed  to  mold  and  damage  in  order  to  give  the 
strength  and  base  demanded  in  the  production.  Piles  of 
stems  are  moistened  and  allowed  to  heat  in  the  damaging 
process.  These  piles  are  shifted,  moistened  and  allowed  to 
heat  two  or  three  times.  When  the  molding  process  has 
reached  the  proper  point,  the  stems  are  dried  thoroughly  and 
ground  and  bolted  into  a  fine  powder.  This  powder  is  then 
flavored  and  sweetened  to  suit  the  taste.  Some  of  the  brands 
are  strong  and  others  sweet  with  variations  between  these 
extremes.  The  snuff  is  then  packed  in  tin  boxes  or  in  paper 
"bales",  sometimes  referred  to  as  "bladders"  of  snuff  to  be 
sold  at  varying  prices  according  to  the  amount.  The  pack- 
aged snuff  is  then  stamped,  boxed  and  prepared  for  shipping 
to  wholesale  and  retail  outlets. 

Principal  implement  used  in  "dipping"  snuff  is  a  small 
limb  between  one-fourth  and  one-half  inch  in  diameter  and 
five  or  six  inches  long  usually  pulled  from  gum  and  other 
suitable  bushes.  The  big  end  torn  from  the  larger  limb  is 
usually  trimmed  and  chewed  until  it  becomes  a  sort  of 
small  mop.  This  mop  is  moistened,  dipped  into  the  snuff 
and  placed  in  the  mouth  where  it  is  kept  until  another  "dip" 
is  desired. 


CHANGES— ADDITIONS— CORRECTIONS 

from  and  to  preceding  issue  on 
NEWSPAPERS— PRINTING— PUBLISHING 

The  Duke  University  Dinners,  as  a  feature  of  the  annual 
Press  Institute  of  the  North  Carolina  Press  Association  at  | 
the  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill  in  January 
of  each  year,  were  inaugurated  in  1931,  instead  of  1933,  as 
indicated.  These  annual  Duke  events  were  worked  out  and 
arranged  by  Josh  L.  Home,  Rocky  Mount,  Duke  alumnus, 
while  he  was  president  of  the  North  Carolina  Press  Associa- 
tion, and  the  late  Henry  R.  Dwire,  vice-president  and  in 
charge  of  public  relations  for  Duke  University,  who  had 
charge  of  these  dinners  until  his  death  a  few  years  ago. 

Greensboro  Daily  News — Initials  of  William  T.  Polk,  as- 
sociate editor,  were  confused  with  those  of  his  distinguished 
kinsman,  President  James  K.  Polk. 

Elkin  Tribune — In  the  item  on  former  publishers  the 
names  of  two  brothers  were  reversed.  W.  E.  Nichols  has 
been  for  several  years  and  continues  with  the  Morganton 
News-Herald;  H.  G.  Nichols  was  with  the  North  Wilkesboro 
Journal-Patriot  for  many  years  until  his  death  a  few  years 
ago. 

Lincoln  County  News — The  name  of  the  late  J.  D.  Bivins 
was  used  as  a  former  publisher,  when  the  name  should  have 
been  John  T.  Perkins,  whose  son-in-law,  A.  B.  Claytor,  sue 
ceeded   him.      Mr.   and   Mrs.    Perkins,   now   enjoying   retire- 
ment and  roving,  are  regular  attendants  at  N.  C.  Press  As 
sociation  meetings. 

Miss  Nell  Battle  Lewis  has  conducted  a  folksy,  informa- 
tive and  intensely  interesting  column  "Incidentally"  in  the 
Raleigh  News  and  Obbserver  for  some  15  years,  with  a  brief 
period  out  for  a  stint  as  associate  editor  of  The  Raleigh 
Times. 

The  Raleigh  News  Bureau  of  the  N.  C.  Association  of 
Afternoon  Newspapers,  Inc.,  organized  about  25  years  ago, 
had  two  or  three  correspondents  for  a  year  or  two,  then  John 
C.  Baskervill  became  correspondent  and  manager,  remain- 
ing on  the  job  for  about  a  dozen  years.  Baskervill  was  sec- 
retary of  the  Lenoir  Chamber  of  Commerce  for  several 
years,  then  went  with  an  insurance  firm  in  Hickory.  Henry 
Averill  handled  the  bureau  for  about  four  years,  and  Robert 
L.  Thompson,  now  editor  of  the  High  Point  Enterprise,  han- 
dled the  job  for  some  months.  G.  Lynn  Nisbet  has  been  in 
charge  of  the  bureau  for  the  past  several  years. 

North  Carolina  Almanac  and  State  Industrial  Guide — 
This  is  a  new  almanac.  This  first  issue  appears  for  19  50-51. 
It  contains  652  pages,  largely  information  about  North  Caro- 
lina, its  industries,  agencies  and  activities.  It  is  published 
by  the  Almanac  Publishing  Co.,  Raleigh,  Mrs.  Carl  Goercb 
and  Mrs.  J.  C.  B.  Ehringhaus,  editors  and  publishers. 


Publications  of  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

(FORMERLY  "UNEMPLOYMENT  COMPENSATION  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA") 


Biennial  Report,  1936-1938. 

Biennial  Report,  1938-1940. 

Biennial  Report,  1940-1942. 

Biennial  Report,  1942-1944. 

Biennial  Report,  1944-1946. 

Biennial  Report,  1946-1948. 

Biennial  Report,  1948-1950. 

Annual  Report,  1937.  (Mimeographed.)  Out  of 
print. 

Annual  Report,  1938.  (Mimeographed.)  Out  of 
print. 

Annual  Report,  1939.     (Mimeographed.) 

Annual  Report,  1940.     (Mimeographed.) 

Annual  Report,  1941.  (Mimeographed.)  Out  of 
print. 

Employment  Security  Law  as  amended   (1951). 

Employment  Security  News  (mimeographed — 
weekly),  started  in  1936  by  the  North 
Carolina  State  Employment  Service.  Not 
issued  during  Calendar  year  1945. 

North  Carolina  Employment  Security  Informa- 
tion, Volume  I,  Numbers  1-12,  1941.  (Dis- 
continued.) 

The  U.  C.  C.  Quarterly 

Vol.  1,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1942-43) 
Vol.  2,  Nos.  1,2,3  (1944) 

(No.  4  not  issued) 
Index  to  Vols.  1  and  2  (1942-44) 
Vol.  3,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1945) 
Vol.  4,  Nos.  1-2,  3,  4  (1946) 
Index  to  Vols.  3  and  4  (1945-46) 
(Included  in  Vol.  5,  No.  2-3) 

The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly  (Name  changed  April  1, 
1947) 

Vol.  5,  Nos.  1,  2-3,  4  (1947) 
Vol.  6,  No.  1,  2-3,  4  (1948) 
Index  to  Vols.  5  and  6  (1947-48) 

(Included  in  Vol.  7,  No.  2) 
Vol.  7,  No.  1,  2,  3-4  (1949) 
Vol.  8,  No.  1-2  &  3-4  (1950) 
Index  to  Vols.  7  and  8  (1949-50) 
(Included  in  Vol.  9,  No.  1-2) 
Vol.  9,  No.  1-2,  3-4  (1951) 
Rules  and  Regulations,  amended  June  19,  1951. 
Index  and  Digest  of  Commission  Decisions  1-600. 


Circulars  and  folders: 

Benefit  Payments  for  Partial  Unemployment. 
Employer  Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina. 
Information  for  Workers  about   Unemployment 
Compensation. 


POSTERS: 

Employer's  Certificate  of  Coverage  and  Notice  to 

Workers. 
Notice  to  Workers — Partial  Benefits. 
Are  You  Protected? 


RELEASES  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  RESEARCH 

AND  STATISTICS 

Current  Series 

"Trends" — A  monthly  mimeographed  activity  re- 
port first  issued  in  June  1943.  Data  for  period 
1938-1943  found  in  other  series  now  out-of-print. 

"Employment  and  Wages  in  Covered  Employment 
by  County" — A  quarterly  mimeographed  release 
giving  employment  and  wage  data  in  covered  em- 
ployment for  each  county  for  five  broad  industry 
groups.    First  release  First  Quarter  of  1948. 

"Covered  Employment  and  Total  Wages  in  North 
Carolina" — An  annual  report  for  calendar  years, 
issued  in  two  parts  as  follows: 

1.  Summary  data  for  State  by  two-digit  industry 
and  employment  and  wages  by  counties, 

2.  County  data  by  three-digit  industry.  First  re- 
leased in  1943. 

"Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina" — An  annual 
study  of  the  experience  rating  plan  and  its  opera- 
tion. First  release  in  1946.  (1948  issue  out  of 
print. ) 

"Labor  Resources  in  North  Carolina  for  Industrial 
Development" — A  bimonthly  release  begun  in 
January  1951  showing  recruitable  labor  by  coun- 
ty. 

"Labor  Supply — Labor  Demand" — a  labor  market 
digest  released  in  February,  June,  and  October 
based  on  sample  employment  trends  in  over  700 
reporting  establishments  in  14  selected  areas. 
First  release  entitled  "Employment  Trend  in  Re- 
porting Establshments"  first  issued  in  1946.  Out- 
of-print  prior  to  1949. 

"Labor  Market  Digests" — An  employment  security 
office  release  showing  labor  market  conditions  in 
office  area.  Only  current  releases  available.  Re- 
leased as  follows: 

1.  Bi-monthly  for  Asheville,  Charlotte,  Durham, 
Greensboro,  High  Point,  Raleigh,  and  Winston- 
Salem,  and 

2.  In  October,  February  and  June  for  Burlington. 
Gastonia,  Morganton,  Reidsvile-Spray  and  Wil- 
mington. 

"Annual  Report  of  Employment  Service  Division" 
— A  mimeographed  release  dealing  primarily 
with  activity  summary  data  by  office,  presenting 
data  graphically  for  evaluating  purposes.  A  sim- 
ilar graphic  presentation  is  prepared  for  each 
January- June  period.  For  limited  distribution 
only. 

Special  Studies  (Limited  Number  Copies  Available) 

"Measurements  of  Industrialization  and  Employ- 
ment Stability"  (1945) 

"Trends  in  Covered  Employment  and  Wages  1942- 
1945." 

"Trends  in  Manufacture  1945-1946." 

"The  Course  of  Inflation"  (1948) 

"The  Influence  of  Industry  on  Population  Change" 
(1948) 

"Research  in  the  Employment  Security  Program" 
(1948) 

"Measurements  of  Employment  Instability"  (1948) 

"An  Analysis  of  Exhaustees — January-February 
1950" 

"North  Carolina  Employment  and  the  Labor  Force, 
1947" 


oh  ?  i  'd  '(i)  (d)  t-'se  -0?s) 

SS3U9N03    JO    J.DV    UBONH    UOJ 

aaiNnooDV  aovisod  saivis  a3iiNn 


•VO   'VINVUV 
AIIEH3AINA  AH0R3 
S'lVDiaciHSi-AHVHan 


sssNisng  ivioijjo 


3   N  'HOiaiva  '68S  x0 
NOISSIWVyOD    S  '3 


"«•  >.aiunna  orare  Liorary 


T&e  E.  S.  C.  (Quarterly 


VOLUME  10,  NO.  1-2 


WINTER-SPRING,-  1952 


S.  C.  Tops  All  States  in  Production  of  Bedroom,  Dining 
Room  Wooden  Furniture;  High  in  Living  Room,  Office 


Examples  of  fine  quality  dining  room  (top)  and  bedroom  (bottom)  furniture  manufactured  in  North  Carolina 

PUBLISHED  BY 

Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALEIGH,  N.  C. 


PAGE  2 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Tho.,E, ;'S.-,C.  Quarterly 

'  (Formerly  The  U.C.C.  Quarterly) 

Volume.-'lO'iNu'mbers  1-2-  Winter-Spring,  1952 

Issued  four  times  a  year  at  Raleigh,  N.  C,  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  W.  Benton  Pipkin, 
Reidsville;   C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;   Bruce  E.  Davis,  Charlotte. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Col.  A.  L.  Fletcher,  Raleigh,  chair- 
man; Mrs.  Gaston  A.  Johnson,  High  Point;  "W.  B.  Horton, 
Yanceyville;  C.  P.  Clark,  Wilson;  Dr.  Alphonso  Elder,  Dur- 
ham; Corbett  Scott,  Asheboro;  L.  L.  Ray,  Raleigh;  Joel  B. 
Leighton,  Rockingham;   J.  A.  Scoggins,  Charlotte. 

HENRY    E.    KENDALL Chairman 

BROOKS   PRICE Deputy   Commissioner 

R.   FULLER  MARTIN Director 

Unemployment  Compensation  Division 

ERNEST  C.  McCRACKEN Director 

North  Carolina  State  Employment  Service  Division 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Informational  Service  Representative 

Cover  illustrations  represent  typical  North  Carolina 
industries  or  business  activities  under  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Program. 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  5S9,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 

CONTENTS  Page 

N.   C.  Furniture  Manufacturing    (Editorial  Summary) 2 

Pipkin  New  Commissioner  ;  Hall  and  Fink  Reappointed 3 

Furniture,  Started  Early,  Among  State's  Leading  Industries 5 

N.  C,  With  42  Active  Counties,  Leads  in  Wooden  Furniture 7 

Sturdy  Pioneers  Started  Huge  Furniture  Industry  in   State 7 

Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Building  Permanent  Market 8 

State  Furniture  Progress  Due  to  Woods,  Labor,  Initiative 9 

By  H.  C.  Philpott 

.1.  T.  Ryan  Has  Devoted  40  Years  Promoting  Furniture  Industry 9 

Important  Industries  Develop  to  Supply  Furniture  Needs 10 

By  Fred  Flagler,  Jr. 

Furniture  South  Magazine  Has  Served  Industry  for  40  Years 10 

Furniture  Foundation  Aids  Instruction  at  State  College 11 

By  Henry  A.  Foscue 

Henry  Foscue  Again  President  of  Furniture  Foundation,  Inc 11 

State  College  Offers  Only  Four- Year  Course  in  Furniture 12 

By  E.  S.  Johnson 
High  Point  Known  as  Hub  of  Southern  Furniture  Industry.- 13 

(World's  Largest  Bureau) 

Sylvania  Acquires  High  Point  Plant  to  Produce  T/V  Cabinets 22 

Thomasville  Famous  as  World  Leader  in  Chair  Production. 22 

("The  Chair  of  Thomasville",  Page  23) 

Lexington,  Home  of  Large,  Small  Furniture,  Novelty  Plants.. 25 

Lenoir  Forging  Ahead  in  Quality-Variety  Furniture  Making 28 

Hickory-Newton-Conover    Important    Furniture    Producers 33 

(Claremont) 

Morganton-Drexel  Boast  of  High  Quality  Furniture  Plants 38 

Asheboro,  Nearby  Towns  Large  Furniture  Manufacturers 41 

(Ramseur) 

Siler  City-Liberty  Lead  in  School  Furniture  Production 42 

Statesville   Extensive   Furniture   Producer   for  50   Years 44 

(Troutman) 
Winston-Salem   Early   and  Important  Furniture   Producer 47 

(Rural  Hall— Mocksville) 

Mount  Airy  and  Elkin  Early  Northwestern  Furniture  Makers 50 

North  Wilkesboro  and  Ronda  Furniture  Producing  Area 52 

Charlotte  Adds  Furniture  Making  to  Her  Other  Activities 54 

Mebane  First  Site  of  Continuing  Furniture  Making  Plant 56 

Sandhills  Area  Has   Several  Progressive  Furniture  Firms 58 

(West  End — Sanford — Vass — Troy) 
Lincolnton,  Page  59 — Marion,  Page  60 

Thirty  Scattered  N.  C.  Counties  Have  Active  Furniture  Plants 61 

Community  Handicap   Shop,  Elizabeth  City,  Is  Acclaimed 62 

By  Norman  L.  Pendleton 
Manpower — Industrial  Characteristics  of  Major  N.  C.  Areas 63 

By  Mrs.  E.  DeKay  Johnson 
Employment  Office  Services  ;  Record  and  Outline  of  Work 65 

By  John  C.  Mullen 
Job  Study  Made  of  Processes  in  Furniture  Manufacturing 66 

By  Blanche  Lancaster 

Tobacco  Issue  Sparks  Move  for  Huge  Tobacco  Celebration 67 

Note  :  Articles  not  credited  with  By-Line  written  by  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  Editor 


N.  C.  FURNITURE  MANUFACTURING 

Furniture   manufacturing,    described    as    cabinet 
makers  shops,  was  one  of  the  nine  industries  listed 
for  North  Carolina  in  the  first  U.  S.  Census  in  1790.  [ 
The  1950  Census  Bureau  report  shows  that  furniture  j 
manufacturing  is  the  fourth  industry  in  importance 
in  the  State,  topped  only  by  textiles,  tobacco  and! 
lumber  and  timber  products.     The  value  added  to 
furniture  and  fixtures  in  1950  was  placed  at  $106,-1 
501,000.     Sales  of  furniture  in  1951  are  estimated; 
conservatively  at  $250,000,000. 

North  Carolina  probably  has  450  furniture  plants,! 
including  numerous  small  novelty  shops  in  homes 
and  schools.     The  Labor  Department  list  includes! 
more  than  350  plants.     Records  in  the  ESC  officel 
show  that  305  firms  are  covered  by  the  Employment! 
Security  Law;  that  is,  having  eight  or  more  em-j 
ployees,  although  two  or  more  plants  often  are  re-! 
ported  under  one  employing  firm.     The  ESC  figuresji 
for  1947  show  that  345  plants  were  covered  andjj 
operating,  indicating  reduction  in  number.     How- 
ever, average  monthly  employment  in  furniture  man-! 
ufacturing   in    1950   was    32,793,    which    is    12.5  % 
greater  than  the  figure  of  29,141  for  1947,  only  three  j 
years  before.   More  important,  the  1950  figures  show! 
that  furniture  factory  payrolls  in  the  State  aggre-ji 
gated  $78,685,816,  an  increase  of  40.9%  over  the  1947 
figure  of  $55,848,796. 

Furniture  manufacturing  is  not  the  most  stable  of 
North  Carolina's  industries.    Like  textiles,  it  reflects 
business  conditions.     In  good  times  the  sales  are! 
good.    Few  householders  buy  furniture  in  depressed; 
periods.    This  is  reflected  in  the  average  annual  con-  j 
tribution  rate  of  1.82  for  1950,  against  the  maximuir I 
of  2.7%  and  as  compared  with  the  State-wide  rate] 
of  1.59%  for  all  employing  firms.    The  past  year,  oij 
a  part  of  it,  was  a  hard  one  on  the  furniture  industry  I 
as  a  whole,  due  to  lack  of  orders.     However,  num I 
bers  of  well-established  firms  and  novelty  furniturqj 
producers  have  maintained  normal  full-time  opera 
tions  for  several  years,  some  of  these  even  operating 
on  over-time  bases. 

In  this  issue  an  effort  is  made  to  cover  the  furni 
ture  industry  as  completely  as  conditions  permit 
North  Carolina  has  approximately  140  furnitur< 
plants  that  employ  50  or  more  workers,  located  large 
ly  in  the  Piedmont  area.  The  Editor  has  visitec 
offices  or  officials  of  more  than  90%-  of  these  large: 
plants,  seeking  information  for  individual  article; 
on  these  plants.  As  a  result  120  articles  describ 
operations  of  as  many  individual  plants.  A  few  o: 
these  were  secured  through  correspondence  with  of 
ficials,  when  time  and  conditions  did  not  allow  visits 

Furniture  manufacturers  were  asked  to  furnisl 
only  such  information  as  they  were  willing  to  hav 
publicised,  but  were  requested  to  supply  enough  t< 
give  the  importance,  size  and  extent  of  their  opera 
tions.  Many  of  them  gave  full  information,  withou 
restraint.  Others  gave  such  as  they  desired.  Ii 
some  instances,  officials  promised  to  send  the  in 
formation,  but  failed  to  do  so.  In  rare  instances,  the; 
did  not  care  for  publicity.  In  one  case,  the  Edito 
visited  the  office  four  times  (conveniently  located 
and  wrote  four  letters — without  contacting  or  evei 
hearing  from  the  principal  official. 

This  statement  is  made  to  indicate  the  efforts  o 
the  Editor  to  make  this  a  complete  issue.  If  article 
are  missing  on  some  firms  which  should  be  included 
the  reason  is  with  officials  of  such  firms,  not  us. 


inter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


PAGE  3 


Pipkin  New  Commissioner;  Hall  and  Fink  Reappointed 


Willis  Benton  Pipkin,  Reidsville,  new  member,  and 
Dbert  Davidson  Hall,  Belmont,  and  Charles  Allison 
ink,  Salisbury,  each  completing  10  years  of  service, 
ere  appointed  last  fall  by  Governor  Scott  to  four 
>ar  terms  as  members  of  the  Employment  Security 
Dmmission  of  North  Carolina.  The  three  were  ad- 
inistered  the  oath  of  office  November  16,  1951,  in 
overnor  Scott's  office  by  Associate  Justice  Itimous 
alentine  of  the  North  Carolina  Supreme  Court. 
Mr.  Pipkin,  a  textile  executive,  succeeded  Marion 
I  Heiss,  Greensboro,  as  an  employer  representa- 
ve.  Mr.  Hall,  also  a  textile  executive,  is  the  other 
nployer  representative  on  the  Commission  and  Mr. 
ink,  president  of  the  State  Federation  of  Labor, 
FL,  is  an  employee  representative. 
The  other  four  members  have  appointments  which 
intinue  until  July  1,  1953.  They  are  Chairman 
enry  E.  Kendall;  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax, 
id  Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf,  Chapel  Hill,  both  represent- 
ig  the  general  public,  and  Bruce  E.  Davis,  Char- 
tte,  state  official  of  the  CIO,  representing  em- 
oyees. 

Biographical  sketches  of  the  one  appointed  and 
vo  reappointed  members  of  the  Commission  are 
iven  below.  Similar  sketches  of  the  other  four 
tembers  appear  in  earlier  issues  of  this  publication : 
hairman  Kendall  in  the  Summer,  1946,  issue;  Mrs. 
regory  and  Mr.  Davis  in  the  Summer,  1949,  issue, 
nd  Dr.  Wolf  in  July,  1941,  issue  (in  predecessor 
ublication). 

WILLIS  BENTON  PIPKIN 

Willis  Benton  Pipkin  was  born  in  Reidsville,  Feb- 
iary  6,  1905,  son  of  the  late  J.  B.  and  Mary  C.  Pip- 


embers  of  the  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina.  Left  to  right :  Bruce  E. 
avis,  Charlotte;  Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  Charles  A.  Fink,  Salisbury;  Mrs.  Quentin  Greg- 
~y,  Halifax;  Chairman  Henry  E.  Kendall,  Raleigh;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont ;  W.  Benton  Pipkin, 
eidsville,  new  member. 


kin.  He  graduated  from  the  Reidsville  High  School 
in  1922  and  received  his  B.S.  degree  in  Commerce  at 
the  University  of  North  Carolina  in  1926.  In  his 
senior  year  at  Carolina  he  was  president  of  the  Phi 
Beta  Kappa,  an  honor  attained  as  the  result  of  lead- 
ing his  class  in  scholarship  during  his  three  previous 
years  there.  In  1928  he  was  awarded  the  degree  of 
Master  of  Business  Administration  by  the  Business 
School  of  Harvard  University. 

After  a  year's  work  in  the  Credit  Department  of 
the  South  Carolina  National  Bank  at  Charleston,  S. 
C,  he  was  appointed  in  1929  as  a  teacher  of  Business 
and  Economics  in  the  College  of  Commerce  of  Tulane 
University,  New  Orleans,  La.,  becoming  professor 
of  Business  Finance.  In  1932  he  resigned  to  return 
to  Reidsville  and  join  his  father  in  the  operation  of 
the  Edna  Mills  Corporation,  serving  as  treasurer  un- 
til 1946.  At  present  he  is  manager  of  the  Eagle 
Fabrics  Co.,  and  vice-president  and  a  director  of  the 
Bank  of  Reidsville.  He  and  his  sister,  Miss  E.  Edith 
Pipkin,  are  owners  of  the  Belvedere  Hotel  in  Reids- 
ville. 

Mr.  Pipkin  is  a  past  president  of  the  Reidsville 
Rotary  Club,  a  trustee  of  the  Baptist  Church,  chair- 
man of  the  Industrial  Committee  of  the  Reidsville 
Chamber  of  Commerce,  a  former  member  of  the 
Penn  Memorial  Hospital  board  and  chairman  of  the 
committee  to  raise  $85,000  locally  for  a  new  hospital 
wing.  Last  year  he  was  county  chairman  of  the 
Crusade  for  Freedom,  has  been  a  member  of  the 
Reidsville  Community  Chest  and  at  present  is  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Board  of  Directors  of  the  North  Carolina 
Children's  Home  Society  of  Greensboro. 

On  September  19,  1931, 


Mr.  Pipkin  married  Miss 
Ruth  Petty  Pringle  of 
Charleston,  S.  C.  They 
have  two  sons,  John,  16, 
and  Pringle,  13. 

ROBERT  DAVIDSON 
HALL 

Robert  Davidson  (R. 
Dave)  Hall,  Belmont  tex- 
tile mill  executive,  was 
reappointed  to  a  four- 
year  term  as  a  member 
of  the  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission  by 
Governor  Scott,  after  he 
had  completed  ten  years 
of  service  on  this  com- 
mission by  appointments 
by  three  former  govern- 
ors. He  has  continued  as 
one  of  the  two  employer 
representatives  since  the 
present  type  of  commis- 
sion was  established  by 
the  1941  General  Assem- 
bly. 

Mr.  Hall  is  a  native  of 
Belmont,  born  July  3, 
1897,  son  of  M.  N.  and 
Annie  Denny  Hall.  He 
graduated  from  the  Bel- 


PAGE   4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


mont  High  School  in  1915  and  was  awarded  the  A.B. 
degree  in  1919  at  Davidson  College,  where  he  was  a 
member  of  the  Phi  Gamma  Delta  social  fraternity. 
During  World  War  I  he  served  as  a  Second  Lieuten- 
ant and  after  the  war  became  active  in  the  work  of 
the  American  Legion,  culminating  in  his  election 
and  distinguished  service  as  Commander  of  the  State 
Deportment  of  the  Legion  in  1940-41. 

Working  as  a  day  laborer  during  his  vacations 
from  his-h  school  and  college  in  textile  mills  in  Bel- 
mont, Mr.  Hall  took  his  first  full-time  job  as  book- 
keeper for  the  Climax  Spinning  Co.  and  the  Majestic 
Manufacturing  Co.  in  Belmont  in  1919.  Moving  up 
the  ladder,  he  is  now  secretary  and  treasurer  of  these 
two  mills,  secretary  and  assistant  treasurer  of  the 
Stowe  Thread  Co.,  assistant  secretary  and  treasurer 
of  the  Sterling  Spinning  Co.,  president  of  the  Bel- 
mont Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  and  president  of  the  Bel- 
mont Knitting  Co. 

In  affiliated  activities,  Mr.  Hall  served  two  terms 
as  president  of  the  Southern  Combed  Yarn  Sninners 
Association,  was  president  of  the  North  Carolina 
Cotton  Manufacturers  Association,  was  a  director  of 
the  American  Cotton  Manufacturers  Institute,  Inc.. 
was  spinner  delegate  to  the  National  Cotton  Council 
of  America  and  during  World  War  II  was  chairman 
of  the  Advisory  Committee  on  Combed  Yarns  for  the 
Office  of  Price  Administration. 

Other  present  activities  are  as  director  of  several 
companies,  including  the  Blue  Ridge  Insurance  Co., 
Shelby;  R.  S.  Dickson  &  Co.,  Charlotte;  Bank  of  Bel- 
mont and  Belmont  Building  and  Loan  Association. 
In  civic  affairs  Mr.  Hall  is  a  former  president  of  the 
Belmont  Rotary  Club,  a  past  master  of  the  Masonic 
Lodge,  a  former  member  of  the  Belmont  School 
Board,  a  member  of  the  Patriotic  Order,  Sons  of 
America,  and  a  member  of  the  First  Presbyterian 
Church  of  Belmont,  having  served  for  15  years  as 
superintendent  of  its  Sunday  School. 

In  1935  Mr.  Hall  married  Miss  Mary  Howe,  of 
Belmont.    They  have  one  son,  Robert  Davidson,  Jr. 

CHARLES  ALLISON  FINK 

Charles  Allison  Fink,  Spencer,  president  of  the 
State  Federation  of  Labor  and  an  original  member  of 
the  Employment  Security  Commission  (U.  C.  C.) 
as  it  was  formed  by  amendments  adopted  by  the  1941 
session  of  the  General  Assembly,  has  been  reappoint- 
ed to  a  new  four-year  term  by  Governor  Scott.  Prior 
to  his  ten  years  a  member  of  the  Commission  as  em- 
ployee representative,  Mr.  Fink  had  served  for  two 
years  as  a  member  of  its  State  Advisory  Council. 

This  perennial  president  of  the  State  Federation 
of  Labor  was  born  on  a  farm  in  Rowan  County  Aug- 
ust 7,  1889,  one  of  seven  children  of  Jacob  Caldwell 
and  Nettie  Fesperman  Fink.  He  attended  the  near- 
by log  cabin  school,  getting  little  more  formal  educa- 
tion than  the  three  Rs  afforded,  since  money  was 
scarce  in  the  family.  He  continued  work  on  his 
father's  farm  until  after  he  was  21  years  of  age. 
Then,  in  1911,  he  took  a  job  as  streetcar  motorman 
in  Salisbury-Spencer,  holding  that  post  for  less  than 
three  years. 

In  1913  Mr.  Fink  became  an  apprentice  in  the 
Electrical  Department  of  the  Southern  Railway's 
shops  at  Spencer,  and  moved  up  to  handling  head- 
light and  train  control  work.  He  continued  in  his 
job  through  several  years  as  president  of  the  State 


Federation  of  Labor,  until  1947,  when  his  labor  union 
duties  required  full  time.  He  still  has  his  railroad 
job,  but  each  year  his  leave  of  absence  is  extended 
another  year — when  he  is  reelected  as  head  of  the 
State  labor  organization. 

Electricians  in  the  Southern's  shop  organized  a 
labor  union  in  1917,  affiliating  with  the  International 
Brotherhood  of  Electrical  Workers.  Mr.  Fink  served 
as  treasurer  of  this  local  union  for  nine  years  and  in 
1931  was  elected  president  of  the  Salisbury-Spencer 
Central  Labor  Union,  a  position  he  held  for  six  years 

As  a  result  of  the  split  in  the  State  Federation  of 
Labor  in  1937,  Mr.  Fink  was  appointed  as  State  pres 
ident  to  fill  out  an  unexpired  term  and  at  the  annual 
convention  that  year  was  elected  president  for  one 
year.  In  the  14  years  since,  he  has  been  reelected 
president  at  every  State  convention,  usually  without 
opposition,  As  State  president,  Mr.  Fink  has  super 
vision  of  the  450  local  unions  making  up  the  State 
Federation,  which  handles  such  matters  as  labor  re- 
lations, education,  legislation  and  others  dealing  with 
members. 

Mr.  Fink  also  edits  the  official  organ  of  the  State 
Federation,  The  North  Carolina  Federationist,  a 
monthly  magazine.  He  attends  all  sessions  of  the 
General  Assembly,  looking  after  the  interests  of  his 
organization.  Much  of  his  time  is  spent  in  travel 
visiting  the  local  unions  and  Central  Labor  Unions  in 
the  various  cities  of  the  State.  Seldom  has  he  missed 
one  of  the  60-odd  meetings  of  the  ESC  in  his  ter 
years  as  a  member.  For  two  years  Mr.  Fink  alsc 
served  as  president  of  the  North  Carolina  Railroad] 
appointed  by  the  Governor. 

Mr.  Fink,  in  1913,  married  Miss  Dora  Wilhelm,  oi 
Salisbury.  They  have  two  sons:  Raymond,  35,  ar] 
M.A.  graduate  of  the  University  of  Michigan  ii) 
accounting,  a  CPA  now  back  in  the  Navy  after  serv- 
ing as  an  officer  in  World  War  II,  and  Clarence,  32 
graduate  of  the  University  of  North  Carolina,  now 
radio  and  household  appliance  salesman  in  Cali- 
fornia. 


N.  C.  FURNITURE  PRODUCTS 

North  Carolina's  furniture  industry  sales  in  1950  amount 
ed  to  $218,000,000,  an  increase  of  about  37%  over  1049,  th| 
Bureau  of  the  Census  reported  recently.  The  figures  shov 
that  North  Carolina  produced  10.17%  of  the  nation's  furni 
ture  sales  of  $2,144,000,000,  which  is  about  33%  more  thai 
in  1949. 

This  places  North  Carolina  in  second  rank  among  the  4! 
states,  Illinois  leading  with  $222,000,000  in  shipments 
Other  states  following  North  Carolina  are  Indiana,  third 
with  $211,000,000  in  sales;  New  York,  $205,000,000;  Cal 
ifornia,  $145,000,000;  Pennsylvania,  $137,000,000,  and  Vii 
ginia,  $120,000,000. 

Wooden  furniture  shipments  of  North  Carolina  factorie 
were  valued  at  $157,534,000  in  1950  and  $119,269,000  i 
1949;  upholstered  household  furniture  in  1950,  $52,063,00 
and  $34,587,000  in  1949;  bedding  products  in  1950,  $5,304 
000  and  $3,686,000  ill  1949. 

Total  figure  for  1950  used  elsewhere  in  this  issue  is  $210 
000,000. 


Exposition  Building  Officers 

Officers  of  the  Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Buildinj 
High  Point,  are:  Doak  Finch,  Thomasville,  president;  Henr 
A.  Foscue,  High  Point,  first  vice-president;  R.  B.  Terr; 
High  Point,  second  vice-president;  Paul  W.  Casey,  Hig 
Point,  secretary-treasurer  and  general  manager. 


T.  L.  Lingerfelt,  general  manager  of  the  Ramseur  Furn 
ture  Co.,  Ramseur,  was  elected  president  of  the  compai) 
recently.     He  will  continue  as  general  manager. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   5 


Furniture,  Started  Early,  Among  State's  Leading  Industries 


Furniture  manufacturing  in  North  Carolina,  mov- 
ing forward  from  colonial  days  through  the  home 
shop,  the  cabinet  shop,  the  furniture  factory  and  the 
huge  furniture  plant,  has  placed  this  state  at  the  top 
in  the  entire  United  States  in  the  production  of  cer- 
tain types  of  wooden  household  furniture.  Furniture 
manufacturing  is  now  North  Carolina's  fourth  rank- 
ing industry,  topped  only  by  textiles,  tobacco  and 
lumber  products.  The  1950  report  of  the  Bureau  of 
the  Census  shows  that  $106,501,000  were  added  dur- 
ing that  year  to  the  value  of  the  manufactured  furni- 
ture products.  Total  value  of  furniture  manufac- 
tured in  this  state  last  year  is  estimated  at  $250,- 
000,000. 

In  1950  North  Carolina's  sale  of  furniture  amount- 
ed to  $210,000,000  according  to  figures  compiled  by 
The  Blue  Book  of  Southern  Progress,  Manufacturer's 
Record,  Baltimore,  Md.  These  figures  were  broken 
down  to  show  that  the  value  of  home  furniture  was 
$195,000,000 ;  office  furniture,  $6,000,000  ;  public  and 
professional  furniture,  $3,000,000 ;  partitions  and 
fixtures,  $3,000,000 ;  additions  and  buildings,  screens, 
$1,000,000  and  miscellaneous  furniture,  $2,000,000. 
This  publication  shows  that  the  State  had  455  active 
furniture  establishments ;  employed  33,000 ;  value  of 
active  plants,  $25,000,000;  income  from  payroll  and 
profits  $90,000,000 ;  cost  of  materials  and  services, 
$120,000,000;  sales,  $218,000,000. 

North  Carolina,  according  to  this  Blue  Book,  pro- 
duced approximately  one-fourth  of  all  of  the  furni- 
ture manufactured  in  17  southern  states,  including 
the  District  of  Columbia  and  the  four  border  states 
of  Maryland,  West  Virginia,  Kentucky  and  Missouri. 
From  a  breakdown  of  these  figures  it  is  shown  that 
North  Carolina  had  49.4%  of  the  active  furniture 
establishments  and  28%  of  furniture  plant  employ- 
ment, both  figures  indicating  larger  furniture  plants 
in  North  Carolina;  26.6%  of  the  value  of  active 
plants,  almost  25%  of  the  income  from  payrolls  and 
profits;  24.3%  of  the  cost  of  materials  and  services 
and  supply  more  than  24%  of  the  gross  sales  of  these 
17  southern  states. 

Compilations  from  other  Blue  Book  figures  give 
the  relative  importance  of  the  furniture  industry  in 
North  Carolina  as  compared  with  that  of  all  other 


manufacturing  enterprises  of  both  durable  and  non- 
durable goods.  In  active  plants,  the  furniture  in- 
dustry operates  6.8%  of  the  state's  total  and  employs 
practically  8%  of  the  total  number  of  workers  in  all 
manufacturing  enterprises.  In  relation  to  the  total 
of  all  other  industries,  furniture  manufacturing 
operates  4%  of  the  value  of  active  plants;  has  an 
income  from  payrolls  and  profits  of  5.4%  of  the 
total ;  spends  as  costs  for  materials  and  services 
3.5%  of  the  total,  and  the  sales  of  its  products  amount 
to  4.2%.  of  the  total. 

James  T.  Ryan,  executive  vice-president  (former 
executive  secretary)  of  the  Southern  Furniture  Man- 
ufacturers Association,  estimates  that  North  Caro- 
lina's furniture  production  last  year  amounted  to 
$250,000,000.  Actual  figures  on  comparisons  are  not 
available  for  any  year  since  the  Bureau  of  the  Cen- 
sus report  of  1947.  At  that  time  North  Carolina  led 
the  nation  in  wooden  household  furniture  of  all  kinds 
except  upholstery,  accounting  for  15%  of  the  total 
production  and  was  second  in  the  production  of  up- 
holstered furniture,  which  amounted  to  9%  of  the 
total.  At  that  time  North  Carolina  stood  first  in  the 
production  of  bedroom  furniture  with  24%  and  first 
in  dining  room  furniture  with  28%. 

The  North  Carolina  figures  compiled  by  the  Em- 
ployment Security  Commission  show  that  in  1950  the 
state  had  305  furniture  firms  which  were  subject  to 
the  Employment  Security  Act  (employed  eight  or 
more  workers)  in  contrast  to  the  345  such  plants  in 
1947.  Further  figures  show  that  the  average  month- 
ly employment  in  1950  was  32,793,  an  increase  of 
12.5%  over  the  29,141  in  1947.  Payrolls  of  furniture 
firms  showed  an  even  greater  increase,  amounting  to 
40.9%  in  the  three  years.  In  1950  total  payrolls  in 
the  furniture  industry  amounted  to  $78,685,816  as 
against  $55,848,796  in  1947.  This  comparison  indi- 
cates a  splendid  development  in  the  furniture  indus- 
try in  this  three  year  period,  even  if  no  consideration 
is  given  to  an  advance  in  production  through  more 
modern  equipment  and  increased  skill  or  any  increase 
in  the  price  that  may  have  been  experienced  during 
this  period. 

Looking  backward,  it  is  interesting  to  recall  that 
the  furniture  industry  had  its  small  beginning  with 


£  CQ  C  ft  3> 

250-999 

50-249 

1-49 

itSl 4.000  s  UP 

Mm 

■  ,.„..,„, 

R*X:    ! -000 -2.4 99 

County  distribution  of  ESC  covered  employment  in  furniture.    Second  Quarter,  1951. 


PAGE  6 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


the  beginning  of  the  settlement  of  North  Carolina. 
Except  for  the  wealthier  citizens  who  were  able  to 
buy  furniture  from  distant  markets  and  ship  it  in, 
the  furniture  required  by  the  early  settlers  was  made 
with  crude  tools  by  the  householder.  As  size  of  com- 
munities increased,  the  methods  of  producing  furni- 
ture changed.  Small  cabinet  shops  sprang  up  espe- 
cially in  the  Piedmont  section  of  the  State. 

When  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  was 
adopted  in  1787,  North  Carolina  was  the  third  state 
in  wealth  and  population.  The  first  census  in  1790 
shows  that  industries  in  the  State  included  blast 
furnaces,  hollow  ware  factories,  cotton  mills,  foun- 
dries, potteries,  woolen  mills,  wagon  factories  and 
cabinet  makers'  shops.  The  settlers,  including  Eng- 
lish Quakers,  Scotch,  Irish,  Germans  and  other  na- 
tionalities, found  the  hardwoods  good,  water  power 
for  their  lathes  and  saws,  intelligent  labor  and  some 
prosperous  homes  to  demand  their  products.  In  the 
early  half  of  the  last  century  expert  craftsmen  would 
take  up  their  abode  in  the  homes  of  the  prosperous 
farmers  and  spend  several  weeks  or  months  produc- 
ing the  furniture  needed  in  the  home,  frequently 
with  the  help  of  slaves  or  members  of  the  family. 

Among  earlier  names  of  furniture  producers  are 
those  of  Peter  Thurston,  High  Point,  "Uncle  Billy" 
Pickard  and  Gus  Jones  of  the  former  Browntown, 
near  High  Point;  Henry  Payne,  who  operated  a 
furniture  factory  in  Caldwell  County  before  the  Rev- 
olutionary War  and  whose  descendants  are  still 
furniture  makers  in  Lenoir,  Hickory  and  Statesville. 
Abner  Payne  succeeded  his  father  and  produced 
many  fine  pieces  of  furniture  still  found  in  Caldwell 
and  Catawba  Counties.  Henry  Payne  had  served  an 
apprenticeship  in  Lincolnton  under  a  cabinet  maker 
named  Houser  who  had  learned  the  trade  in  South 
Germany.  Michael  Healen,  an  Irishman,  learned  the 
trade  in  England  and  settled  in  Stokes  County  in 
1792.  He  produced  many  fine  furniture  items,  still 
found  in  Stokes,  Surry  and  Forsyth  counties,  before 
his  death  in  Surry  County. 

Furniture  making  in  North  Carolina  continued 
primarily  in  the  cabinet  shop  stage  until  after  the 
War  Between  the  States.  Extensive  credit  is  given 
to  Captain  W.  H.  Snow,  of  the  Union  Army,  who 
settled  in  the  High  Point  community  and  provided 
the  vision  and  energy  which  gave  impetus  to  furni- 
ture making.  In  High  Point  the  High  Point  Furni- 
ture Co.  was  organized  in  1888 
by  T.  F.  Wrenn,  J.  H.  Tate  and 
E.  A.  Snow.  Prior  to  that  in  1881 
the  White  Furniture  Co.  had 
been  started  in  a  very  small  plant 
by  Will  and  Dave  White  in  an 
industry  that  continues  in  suc- 
cessful operation.  Although  cab- 
inet shops  had  operated  in  all  of 
these  places,  actual  factory  pro- 
duction was  begun  in  Lenoir  in 
1889,  in  Elkin  in  1894,  in  Mount 
Airy  in  1896,  in  North  Wilkes- 
boro  in  1901,  in  Morganton  in 
1904,  and  in  Statesville  in  1909. 
By  1890  six  small  factories  were 
manufacturing  furniture  in 
North  Carolina  and  by  1900 
forty-four  plants  were  in  opera- 


PERMANENT  FURNITURE  MARKETS 

Principal  furniture  markets  with  permanent  exhibit  spaces 
are:  American  Furniture  Mart,  Chicago;  New  York  Furni- 
ture Exchange,  New  York  City;  Southern  Furniture  Expo- 
sition Building,  High  Point;  Los  Angeles  Furniture  Ex- 
change, Los  Angeles;  and  in  Boston;  Kansas  City;  San  Fran- 
cisco, and  others.  Special  displays  are  made  in  these  mar- 
kets in  January  and  July. 

When  reference  is  made  in  this  issue  to  permanent  ex- 
hibits in  Chicago,  New  York,  High  Point  and  Los  Angeles, 
and  others,  it  means  generally  that  the  exhibit  spaces  are 
in  the  building  or  groups  of  buildings  making  up  the  markets 
in  these  cities.  Occasionally,  however,  the  manufacturer  will 
have  permanent  exhibit  space  in  a  building  close  to  the 
markets  listed.  In  addition,  furniture  manufacturers  in  the 
different  groups  have  what  is  termed  pre-season  or  off- 
season displays  usually  in  late  October  or  early  November, 
particularly  designed  to  allow  representatives  of  department 
stores  to  purchase  and  have  made  up  furniture  supplies  for 
their  January  sales. 

During  these  pre-season  showings  displays  are  held  in  the 
Community  Center  in  Hickory,  the  Southern  Furniture  Ex- 
change Building  at  High  Point,  and  also  in  the  show  rooms 
maintained  by  the  manufacturers  in  Lenoir,  Hickory,  Mor- 
ganton, High  Point,  Thomasville,  Lexington,  and  at  other 
central  points  in  the  State. 


tion,  one-fourth  of  them  in  High  Point. 

This,  sketchily,  is  the  beginning  of  the  huge  furni- 
ture industry  in  North  Carolina.  Additional  names 
are  included  in  an  article  listing  many  of  the  furni- 
ture pioneers  of  the  State. 


N.  C.  LEADS  IN  WOODEN  FURNITURE 

(Continued  from  page  7) 

tures;  (5)  window  and  door  screens,  shades  and 
Venetian  blinds;  and  (6)  miscellaneous  furniture  and 
fixtures  items.  Not  included  are  firms  engaged  in 
sawmilling,  millwork,  woodworking  on  individual  or- 
der and  reconditioning  and  repairing  furniture. 

Available  information  indicates  that  last  year 
North  Carolina's  employment  in  the  furniture  and 
fixture  industry  was  third  in  the  nation,  headed  by 
New  York  and  Illinois,  with  Indiana  as  poor  fourth. 
Naturally  these  figures  refer  to  metal  as  well  as 
wooden  furniture.  These  figures  indicate,  but  do  not 
show  definitely,  that  North  Carolina  leads  the  entire 
nation  in  the  production  of  wooden  furniture  and 
fixtures. 


Hy-Lan   Furniture   Co.    plant,   Hickory,   was   damaged   by 
fire  a  few  weeks  ago,  loss  estimated  at  more  than  $10,000. 


Furniture  employment,  rising  steadily,  is  now  50  percent  over  1939  (ESC  covered  employ- 
ment by  month:  Jan.,  1939,  through  June,  1951) 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  7 


N.  C,  With  42  Active  Counties,  Leads  in  Wooden  Furniture 

North  Carolina,  in  1950,  had  305  firms  engaged  in  = 

manufacturing  furniture  which  were  subject  to  the  cTiinrw    niAkirroc    CTAD-rrr\    unrc 

Employment  Security  Law,  which  means  that  they  bTURDY    PIONttKb   blAKItU    HUtjt 

employment  £%£^n?S3%%3£%%  FU  RN  ITU  RE  I N  DUSTRY  FOR  STATE 

mean  that  as  many  as  40,000  workers  were  employed  North  Carolina  lias  had  numbers  of  pioneers  in  the  (level- 
lull  time  or  part  time  in  these  plants.     The  total  an-  opment  of  the  important  furniture  industry  in  the  State 
i  „            11  •„  inrn              a>no  roe:  o-i/^  many    of    whom    have    already   passed    to    their   reward,    but 
nual  payroll  in  1950  was  $78,685,816.  numbers  of  whom   continue   their  earlier  activities.      Many 
Average  weekly  earnings  Of  furniture  workers  in  0f   these   pioneers   and    "greats"    of   the   furniture   industry 

North  Carolina,  covered  by  the  Employment  Security  started  in  very  modest  ways,  with  little  capital  and  few  work- 
program,  Was  $46.13,  as  Compared  with  $41.83  in  ers-  Numbers  of  them,  through  industry  and  native  ability, 
1Q4Q  an  inrrPa^P  of  10  3%  This  inrrpasp  is  ar-  developed  their  plants  into  large  industries,  making  nullion- 
IJ4J,    an   increase   01    W.6/c.       inis    increase    IS   ac-  aires  of  their  founders  or  executives. 

Counted  for  largely  by  wage  advances  and  by  a  longer  Among  those  who  may  be  classed  among  the  pioneers  and 

work  schedule.      The  Employment  Security  Commis-  who  are  still  active  in  their  further  development  of  the  furni- 

Sion  records  show  that  in  1950  the  average  COntribu-  ture   industry  are  J.    Sam   White,   long  head  of  the   White 

firm    rafp   naid    hv   fiirnitiirp    pmnlovprs   tn   thp    Com  Furniture  Co.,  Mebane;  A.  C.  Chaffee,  chairman  of  the  board 

tion  rate  paid  oy iurniture  employers  to  tne  com-  q±  Morganton  tyn.niUire  Co.,  Morganton;  t.  h.  Broyhiii,  of 

mission  was  1.82%  of  the  payrolls,  as  compared  With  the  Broyhill  Furniture  Factories,  Lenoir;  R.  L.  Prevost,  of 
the  base  rate  of  2.7%  and  with  an  average  rate  of  Unagusta  Manufacturing  Co.,  Waynesville;  J.  A.  Martin,  Lih- 
1.59%  for  all  covered  employment  in  the  State.  This  erty  Chair  Co.,  Liberty;  W.  T.  Powell,  Myrtle  Desk  Co., 
indieafps  that  prnnlnvrnpnt  in  fiirnitiirp  was  Ipss  High  Point;  C.  R.  Barrier,  Globe  Parlor  Furniture  Co.,  High 
maicates  tnat  employment  m  iurniture  was  less  po  Q  w  BoUck  southern  Furniture  Co.,  Conover; 
Stable  than  the  average  for  all  state  employment.  George  F.  Ivey,  Southern  Desk  Co.,  Hickory;  A.  B.  Johnston 
North  Carolina  had  14  counties  in  which  more  and  J.  R.  Hix,  American  Furniture  Co.,  North  Wilkesboro; 
than  500  workers  Were  employed  in  the  production  M.  K.  Bailey,  Elkin  Furniture  Co.,  Elkin;  K.  C.  Bobbins, 
Of  furniture.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  Davidson  Hibriten  Chair  Co.,  Hickory;  John  Sobotta,  National  Furni- 
-,  ,  ,  t  j.1  t  i  -ii  iii  ture  Co.,  Mount  Airy;  L.  S.  Gilliam,  Carolina  Parlor  Funu- 
County  topped  the  list  With  an  average  monthly  em-  ture  Co->  statesviUe;  Charles  L.  Creech,  Sr.,  Unique  Furni- 
ployment  in  excess  of  5,000.  Thomasville  and  Lex-  ture  Makers,  Winston-Salem;  John  1).  Stockton,  Fogle  Fur- 
ington  are  the  two  principal  furniture  cities.  Guil-  niture  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  J.  S.  Lynch,  B.  F.  Huntley  Fur- 
ford  ranked  second  in  furniture  employment,  even  niture  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Doak  Finch,  Thomasville  Chair 
,n           n      .,             ,     .          ,!                            i     -          •!               .j.         £  Co.,  Thomasville;  O.  E.  Kearns,  ot  former  Reams  Furniture 

though  it  contains  the  principal  furniture  city  of  Co '  mgh  I>oint    now  in  textile  illdustrv;  c.  c.  Cranford, 

High  Point.      Also  interesting  is  the  fact  that  Cald-  former  Randolph  Furniture  Co.,  Cranford  Furniture  Co.,  and 

well  County  had  average  employment  of  only  30  less  others,  Asheboro,  now  in  textiles. 

than    Guilford    County,    which   WOUld    seem   to    mean  Among  those  who  loomed  large  in  the  furniture  industry 

that  Lpnoir  tormpd  HiVh  Point  in  thp  avprao-p  nnmbpr  in  North  Caio,i,,a  an(1  accomplished  important  goals  in  the 

tnat  Lenoir  toppea  mgn  roint  in  tne  average s  numoer  state's  industrj — those  who  have  now  gone  to  their  final 

Of  employees  engaged  m  furniture  making.    Catawba  rewards— are:     Fred   N.   Tate   and   Roland   T.   Holton,   The 

County     with     the     Hickory-Newton-Conover-Clare-  Continental  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point;  S.  H.  and  C.  F.  Tom- 

mont  area  was  four  on  the  County  list  in  furniture  linson,   of   Tomlinsons   of   High   Point;    William   E.   White, 

pmnlnvmpnt  White  Furniture  Co.,  Mebane;  F.  H.  Coffey,  Kent-Coffey  Mfg. 

empiuymem.                              ..,**,                »         .,  Co.,  Lenoir;  George  O.  Graves  and  J.  C.  Siceloff,  Mount  Airy 

The   number   of   firms   in   the   14   larger   furniture  Mantel  &  Table  Co.;  B.  F.  Huntley,  B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture 

Counties,  the  average  monthly  employment  and  total  Co.,   Winston-Salem;    A.  E.   Smith,   National  Furniture  Co., 

payrolls  in  those  Counties  With  500  or  more  workers  Mount    Airy;    J.    R.    Finley,    Forest    Furniture    Co.,    North 

in  1  950  follow  '  Wilkesboro;  E.  H.  Koehtitzky,  C.  R.  Merritt  and  J.  A.  Yokley, 

Mount  Airy  Furniture  Co. 

No.  Of              Av.  Monthly               Total  Frank  Huffman,  Drexel  Furniture  Co.,  Morganton;  Frank 

TOTALS                           Firms               Employment              Payrolls  s-  Lambeth,  James  E.  and  Charles  Lambeth,  Standard  Chair 

Co.,  Thomasville;    G.  F.  Harper,  Harper  Furniture  Co.,  Le- 

State Total 305                    32,793            $78,685,816  noiv;    J.   M.   Earnhardt,   Barnhardt  Furniture   Co.,   Lenoir; 

T.   Garland  Shelton,   StatesviUe  Chair  Co.;    R.  A.   Williams, 

Davidson 27                       5,036                12,133,988  Williams  &  Brower,  Siler  City;  M.  A.  Biggs  and  A.  C.  Click, 

Guilford 75                       4,693                11,778,114  Elkin  Furniture  Co.;   J.  D.  Moore,  Home  Chair  Co.,  North 

Caldwell 18                       4,653                11,789,886  WTilkesboro  and  Ronda;   L.  E.  Rabb  and  J.  H.  Beard,  Cald- 

Catawba 48                       3,817                 9,084,096  well  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir;    T.  F.  and  M.  J.   Wrenn,   J.  H. 

Burke 5  2,409  6,084,265  Tate  and  E.  A.  Snow,  High  Point  Furniture  Co.;  J.  E.  Kirk- 
Randolph 13                       1,437                 2,638,803  man,  Giant  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point. 

Iredell... 19                       1,344                 2,994,663  T.  J.  and  C.  F.  Finch  and  T.  Austin  Finch,  Thomasville 

Forsyth 12                       1,056                 2,826,602  Chair  Co.;  Charles  Hackney,  Hackney  Chair  Co.,  Lexington; 

Surry 6                       1,155                 2,518,734  Henry  Eraser,   Myrtle  Desk  Co.,   High  Point;    J.   E.   Marsh, 

McDowell 1,024                 2,405,039  Marsh  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point;  J.  J.  Welch,  W.  S.  Pickett 

Wilkes r 10                          992                 1,901,630  and   J.    W.   Harris,    Welch   Furniture   Co.,   High   Point,    and 

Buncombe 4                              610                    1,683,276  Others. 

Alamance 7  585  1,682,404  

Mecklenburg 12  541  1,694,243  

Other  28 47  3,441  7,470,073 

ham,  Rowan,  Stanly,  Union,  Wake  and  Wayne. 
These  28  counties,  each  with  less  than  500  workers  Data  in  this  item  relate  to  the  major  industrial 
in  furniture  and  having  about  one-tenth  of  the  State's  group  specifically  designated  as  furniture  and  fix- 
furniture  employment,  are :  Ashe,  Alexander,  Beau-  tures  under  the  following  broad  types  of  production : 
fort,  Chatham,  Cleveland,  Cumberland,  Davie,  Dur-  (1)  household  furniture;  (2)  office  furniture;  (3) 
ham,  Edgecombe,  Franklin,  Gaston,  Haywood,  Lee,  public  building  and  professional  furniture ;  (4)  par- 
Lincoln,  Montgomery,  Moore,  Nash,  New  Hanover,  titions,  shelving,  lockers,  and  office  and  store  fix- 
Orange,  Pasquotank,  Richmond,  Robeson,  Rocking-  (Continued  on  preceding  page) 


PAGE  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Building  Permanent  Market 


The  Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Building,  lo- 
cated in  High  Point,  the  acknowledged  hub  of  the 
furniture  industry  in  the  South  and  a  natural  devel- 
opment of  one  of  the  state's  largest  industries,  was 
started  in  1920.  It  opened  in  1921  a  ten  story  build- 
ing containing  a  little  more  than  200,000  square  feet. 
This  furniture  building  or  furniture  mart  now  con- 
tains 463,890  square  feet  of  display  space,  making  it 
one  of  the  larger  furniture  exposition  buildings  in 
the  entire  nation. 

This  furniture  building  remains  open  during  the 
entire  year  and  is  filled  largely  with  exhibits  of  furni- 
ture and  rugs  produced  by  southern  furniture  and 
rug  manufacturers.  Twice  each  year  in  January  and 
July  the  furniture  mart  is  open  to  the  hordes  of  buy- 
ers for  furniture  and  department  stores  operating 
throughout  the  United  States  and  many  foreign 
countries. 

The  High  Point  furniture  market  was  developed 
by  furniture  manufacturers  throughout  the  South  as 
a  central  point  for  displaying  their  products  to  rep- 
resentatives of  purchasers.  In  1940,  after  18  years 
of  operation,  it  was  found  that  additional  space  was 
needed.  Four  additional  floors  were  constructed  on 
top  of  the  10-story  building,  giving  an  additional 
140,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  During  the  war 
period,  December,  1942,  to  April,  1946,  the  building 
was  leased  and  occupied  by  the  Demobilized  Records 
Branch  of  the  Adjutant  General's  Office.  After- 
wards the  building  was  reconverted  and  renovated 
and  in  1950,  when  additional  space  was  acquired,  an 
annex  was  constructed  containing  approximately 
124,000  square  feet. 

The  idea  of  erecting  the  Southern  Furniture  Expo- 
sition Building  was  conceived  by  Charles  F.  Long,  a 
successful  glass  manufacturer  and  furniture  sales- 
man. Its  erection  was  a  significant  service  to  the 
furniture  industry  of  the  South  and  to  national  trade. 


Paul  W.  Casey 
general  manager  and  secre- 
tary-treasurer of  the  South- 
ern   Furniture    Exposition 
Building. 


Twice  enlarged  Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Building  show- 
ing recent  ten-story  addition.     Permanent  furniture 
displays  with  special  shows  in  January  and  July 


The  building  stands  as  a 
monument  to  Mr.  Long's 
vision  and  foresight. 

A  few  figures  indicate  the 
importance  of  this  furni- 
ture mart.  In  the  first  spe- 
cial display  in  July,  1923, 
the  registration  was  only 
772.  In  July,  1939,  16 
years  later,  the  attendance 
had  reached  2,229.  In  the 
first  post-war  market  in 
January,  1947,  attendance 
had  climbed  to  5,147  and  in 
January,  1950,  the  registra- 
tion had  increased  to  6,379. 
A  breakdown  of  the  attend- 
ance in  1947  shows  that  the 

5,147  dealers  present  represented  3,543  stores  from 
956  towns  in  34  states  and  two  foreign  countries.  It 
is  expected  that  when  figures  for  the  January,  1952, 
display  are  compiled  they  will  show  that  all  previous 
records  have  been  broken. 

In  the  10-story  annex  completed  in  1950,  three  new 
automatic  passenger  elevators  were  installed,  in  addi- 
tion to  a  new  hydraulic  truck  elevator  12  feet  wide 
and  42  feet  long  with  a  capacity  of  35,000  pounds. 
This  elevator  is  capable  of  lowering  the  largest  truck 
vans  now  operated  from  the  street  level  to  the  base- 
ment unloading  area  and  is  one  of  the  largest  ever 
built.  The  basement  is  large  enough  so  that  six 
trucks  can  be  unloaded  at  the  same  time. 

It  is  significant  that  within  the  four  states  touched 
in  a  radius  of  150  miles  from  High  Point  is  concen- 
trated the  greatest  wooden  household  furniture  area 
in  the  entire  world.  In  this  area  is  produced  one- 
fifth  of  all  of  the  wooden  household  furniture  in  the 
entire  United  States  and  this  area  accounts  for  more 
than  40  %  of  all  bedroom  and  dining  room  furniture 
produced  in  the  nation. 

Stated  in  another  way  the  States  of  North  Caro- 
lina, Virginia,  Tennessee  and  South  Carolina  pro- 
duce 48.72%  of  all  bedroom  furniture  and  39.5%  of 
all  the  dining  room  furniture  manufactured  in  the 
United  States  and  produces  62%%  of  the  dollar  vol- 
ume of  all  household  furniture  manufactured  in  the 
South. 

The  Southern  Furniture  Mart  has  become  so  well 
attended  that  means  of  taking  care  of  the  visitors 
poses  a  real  problem.  The  splendid  hotels  in  High 
Point  and  nearby  Greensboro,  Winston-Salem  and 
Sedgefield  are  filled  to  capacity  during  the  two  weeks 
period  twice  a  year.  Overflow  crowds  frequently 
use  the  hotel  space  in  Lexington  and  Asheboro,  many 
of  them  going  as  far  as  Salisbury,  Burlington  and 
Reidsville. 

The  Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Building  in 
High  Point  has  developed  into  an  important  economic 
factor  for  the  furniture  industry  in  the  South  and 
especially  in  North  Carolina,  which  produces  ap- 
proximately one-fourth  of  all  the  furniture  produced 
in  17  southern  states,  counting  the  District  of  Colum- 
bia and  including  the  border  states  of  Maryland, 
West  Virginia,  Kentucky  and  Missouri  with  Okla- 
homa and  Texas  on  the  western  border. 


/VlNTER-SPRING,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  9 


State  Furniture  Progress  Due  to  Woods,  Labor,  Initiative 

By  H.  C.  Philpott,  High  Point,  Former  President,  now  Chairman  of  Board  of 
Southern  Furniture  Manufacturers'  Association 


H.  C.  Philpott 


In  reviewing  the  history 
)f  the  Southern  furniture 
ndustry,  the  question  aris- 
es as  to  why  furniture  fac- 
;ories  were  built  in  this  par- 
;icular  section  of  the  coun- 
ty. The  answer  lies,  I 
;hink,  in  the  fact  that  be- 
?ore  the  turn  of  the  century 
;here  were  in  most  areas  of 
;he  South  large  boundaries 
)f  timber,  making  lumber 
ivailable  at  low  prices,  and 
he  fact  that  there  was  also 
in  abundance  of  cheap  labor. 

A  generation  ago  it  was  not  an  uncommon  practice 
'or  large  trees  to  be  cut  down  and  stripped  of  their 
)ark  and  the  lumber,  itself,  left  to  rot  in  the  woods, 
rhere  was  a  market  for  bark  at  the  tanneries,  but 
sometimes  no  market  for  the  lumber.  In  some  areas 
t  was  a  common  practice  to  make  rail  fences  from 
valnut.  It  is  difficult  for  us  today  to  realize  that 
umber  was  so  plentiful  not  too  many  years  ago. 

EARLIER  N.  C.  PLANTS  SMALL 
When  the  first  plants  were  built,  furniture  pro- 
luced  in  the  South  was,  generally  speaking,  made 
vith  cheap  labor  and  materials,  and  was  consequently 
sold  at  a  very  low  price.  As  was  to  be  expected 
mder  such  conditions,  the  quality  of  the  product  did 
lot  compare  to  that  produced  by  factories  in  such 
)ld  established  areas  as  Jamestown,  New  York,  Rock- 
lord,  Illinois,  and  Grand  Rapids,  Michigan. 

In  many  instances  furniture  factories  were  a  nat- 
iral  outgrowth  of  a  timber  or  lumber  operation  in 
vhich  the  saw  mill  operators  eventually  became  man- 
ufacturers of  furniture  on  a  small  scale.  In  prac- 
tically every  instance,  these  factories  started  opera- 
ions  on  a  very  modest  scale,  without  access  to  out- 
side capital,  and  as  profits  were  earned,  these  were 
)lowed  back  into  the  business,  resulting  in  gradual 
mlargement  of  plants  and  facilities,  from  year  to 
fear.  Because  of  this  slow  but  steady  growth  and 
;he  lack  of  outside  financing,  the  industry  is  still,  by 
xmiparison,  made  up  of  small  units,  most  of  which 
ire  located  in  small  towns  and  rural  communities, 
ocally  owned.  Even  today  absentee  ownership  is 
;he  exception  rather  than  the  rule  throughout  the 
Southern  furniture  industry. 

By  virtue  of  the  rather  wide  dispersion  of  furni- 
;ure  plants  throughout  North  Carolina,  employment 
las  been  made  available  to  thousands  of  people  who 
night  otherwise  not  have  found  employment.  The 
ndustry  has  in  this  respect  played  an  important  role 
n  the  development  of  a  balanced  industrial  economy 
n  North  Carolina. 

GREATEST  EXPANSION  IN  1920s 
The  industry  experienced  its  period  of  greatest 
expansion  during  the  boom  era  of  the  1920's.  During 
;his  period  there  was  a  tremendous  demand  for  fur- 
liture,  due  to  the  home-building  program  after 
tVorld  War  I.     Many  new  plants  were  built  in  an 


James  T.  Ryan 


J.  T.  RYAN  HAS  DEVOTED  40  YEARS 
PROMOTING  FURNITURE  INDUSTRY 

James  Thomas  Ryan,  High 
Point,  executive  vice-president 
of  the  Southern  Furniture  Man- 
ufacturers' Association,  has  de- 
voted more  than  40  years  of  his 
eventful,  effective  and  interest- 
ing life  to  the  promotion  of  the 
interests  of  the  furniture  indus- 
try in  the  South.  In  addition  to 
the  many  forms  of  recognition 
of  his  services  to  the  industry 
where  two  or  more  furniture 
manufacturers  are  gathered  to- 
gether, a  permanent  honor  was 
bestowed  upon  him  about  three 
years  ago  when  the  "James  T. 
Ryan  Furniture  Professorship" 
was  established  in  the  School  of 

Furniture  Manufacturing  and  Management  at  State  College 
of  Agriculture  and  Engineering  in  Raleigh. 

Mr.  Ryan  became  secretary  of  the  Southern  Furniture 
Manufacturers'  Association  on  January  1,  1912,  following 
the  organization  of  this  association  in  August,  1911.  The 
Association  was  a  successor  to  the  North  Carolina  Casegoods 
Association  and  the  North  Carolina  Chair  Association,  both 
of  which  had  been  organized  around  1902.  When  the  South- 
ern group  was  organized,  it  was  little  more  than  a  railroad 
freight  bureau,  its  chief  interest  being  in  freight  rates, 
shipment  conditions  and  the  like.  Mr.  Ryan's  qualifications 
included  a  background  in  railroad  rates.  He  was  then  trav- 
eling freight  agent  at  Charlotte  for  the  Clinchfield  Railroad 
aivd  had  previously  been  in  the  Rate  Department  of  the 
Southern  Railway. 

When  Mr.  Ryan  began  his  furniture  duties  the  association 
was  composed  of  about  40  furniture  manufacturers,  largely 
in  North  Carolina,  a  few  in  Virginia.  As  the  furniture  in- 
dustry enlarged  and  expanded,  due  in  no  small  part  to  his 
activities,  Mr.  Ryan's  duties  increased.  In  1942  his  posi- 
tion was  changed  to  that  of  executive  vice-president.  His 
office,  with  its  picture  gallery  of  furniture  greats,  pioneers 
and  present,  is  located  on  the  first  floor  of  the  Southern 
Furniture  Exposition  Building  in  High  Point.  Here  his 
staff  of  helpers  hold  the  fort  when  it  is  necessary  for  him  to 
be  away  at  frequent  furniture  conventions,  exhibits  and 
conferences.  His  association  now  has  400  members  in  14 
southeastern  and  southwestern  states,  representing  90%  of 
the  furniture  production  in  the  South. 

The  first  secretary  of  the  Southern  Traffic  League,  Mr. 
Ryan  was  elected  president  of  that  rate  organization  of  ship- 
pers in  1922.  In  1929  he  was  awarded  the  privilege  of  a 
practitioner  before  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission, 
and  later  was  elected  vice-president  of  the  Association  of 
I.C.C.  Practitioners.  Recently  Mr.  Ryan  spent  much  time 
in  Washington  with  various  Government  agencies  working 
out  and  preparing  the  final  regulations  governing  the  furni- 
ture industry. 

Mr.  Ryan's  experience  and  industry  cause  the  furniture 
industry  to  lean  heavily  on  him  for  advice  and  counsel  and 
his  ability  and  integrity  are  well  and  favorably  known  to 
railroad  traffic  men,  Government  officials  and  others  who 
come  in  contact  with  him  in  any  of  his  varied  activities. 


effort  to  meet  the  demand  for  household  furniture. 

From  the  time  the  industry  was  started,  until  the 
late  '30's,  few  radical  changes  had  taken  place  in 
machinery  and  in  operating  techniques  throughout 
the  industry,  other  than  the  speeding  up  of  individual 
machines  and  changes  such  as  converting  from  a 

Worth  Carolina  State  Library 
Raleiah 


PAGE  1  0 


THE  E.   S.   C.   QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


belt  driven  to  a  motor  driven  operation.  Indeed,  a 
person  familiar  with  furniture  manufacturing  in  the 
early  1900's  would  still  have  known  his  way  around 
a  furniture  manufacturing  plant  in  the  early  1930's. 
During  the  late  '30's,  however,  it  became  apparent 
that  if  certain  intricate  and  complex  products,  such 
as  automobiles,  could  be  produced  on  a  mass  produc- 
tion basis,  there  was  no  reason  why  the  same  tech- 
niques might  not  also  be  applied  to  the  furniture 
manufacturing  process.  Great  strides  have  been 
made,  therefore,  within  the  past  fifteen  years  in  the 
design  of  woodworking  machinery,  in  furniture  fac- 
tory layout,  and  in  the  manufacturing  technique  it- 
self. 


MODERN  MACHINERY  TECHNIQUES 
For  example,  the  drying  of  lumber  was  in  former 
years  a  hit  or  miss  process,  sometimes  requiring 
weeks  and  often  resulting  in  waste  of  good  lumber 
because  of  improper  drying  methods.  Modern  dry 
kilns  have  now  reduced  drying  time  to  a  matter  of 
days  and  are  controlled  scientifically  and  automatic- 
ally so  that  the  lumber  is  not  only  dried  to  the  properj 
moisture  content,  but  waste  in  the  drying  process  has) 
been  practically  eliminated. 

The  discovery,  and  widespread  use,  of  waterproof 
resin  glues  have  also  had  an  important  impact  on 
the  furniture  manufacturing  process.    Gluing  opera- 
( Continued  on  page  61) 


Important  Industries  Develop  to  Supply  Furniture  Needs 

By  Fred  Flagler,  Jr.,  Associate  Editor,  Furniture  South,  High  Point 


Supplying  the  various  needs  of  the  furniture  in- 
dustry in  North  Carolina  involves  many,  diverse  en- 
terprises, from  logging,  lumbering,  box  and  con- 
tainer making  on  through  to  the  final  coat  of  wax  for 
the  gleam  that  brings  out  the  best  in  wooden  house- 
hold furniture. 

Textile  mills  in  North  Carolina  find  markets  for 
their  wares  in  the  furniture  factories.  Many  yards 
of  material  are  consumed  by  upholsterers.  Cotton 
batting  enters  the  picture  here  too  as  padding  is 
needed  for  upholstered  lines  of  furniture. 

LACQUERS,  PAINTS,  MACHINERY 

While  many  of  the  suppliers  have  factories  right 
here  in  North  Carolina  from  which  the  furniture 
plants  are  serviced,  there  is  still  a  great  segment  of 
the  supplies  that  come  to  North  Carolina  furniture 
plants  through  branch  warehouses  and  distributing 
points.  Sandpaper  and  abrasives,  finishing  mate- 
rials, such  as  stains,  lacquers  and  varnishers  are 
imported  from  out  of  state.  Many  lacquer  and  paint 
plants  have  located  in  North  Carolina,  however,  to 
service  the  furniture  industry.  And  in  the  High 
Point  area  in  particular  one  will  find  a  great  number 
of  manufacturing  and  servicing  establishments 
whose  primary  customers  are  the  furniture  manu- 
facturers. 

North  Carolina  of  course  purchases  much  of  its 
materials,  goods  and  services  from  other  sources. 
But  even  in  the  machinery  field,  one  might  be  sur- 
prised to  learn  that  machine  shops,  and  rather  large 
ones  at  that  have  grown  with  the  furniture  industry, 
designing  and  making  machinery  to  fill  the  bill  of 
faster,  more  economical  and  quality  furniture  pro- 
duction. 

HARDWARE,  MIRRORS,  SPRINGS 
Hardware  for  furniture  is  made  in  North  Caro- 
lina too,  although  not  on  a  large  scale.  Springs  for 
seating,  veneers  and  plywoods,  glues  and  resins, 
screws,  nails  and  shipping  tags  are  all  necessary  for 
the  modern  furniture  plant  to  produce.  In  fact  it  is 
hard  to  realize  that  one  suite  of  furniture  might  rep- 
resent mahogany  from  the  Gold  Coast,  core  stock 
from  the  native  lumber  stocks,  sandpaper  from  some 
northern  state,  screws  from  Ohio,  stains  and  lacquers 
from  North  Carolina. 

North  Carolina  produces  a  large  volume  of  mirrors 


FURNITURE  SOUTH  MAGAZINE  HAS 
SERVED  INDUSTRY  FOR  30  YEARS 

In  195  2,  Furniture  South  magazine,  with  executive  offices 
in  the  Exposition  Building  at  High  Point,  embarks  upon  its 
31st  year  of  publication.  Now  a  monthly  journal,  the  pub- 
lication is  devoted  to  the  Southern  furniture  industry.  First 
known  as  the  Southern  Furniture  Journal,  the  publication 
was  founded  to  serve  the  interests  of  furniture  manufactur- 
ers and  retailers  in  the  southeastern  states. 

Many  of  its  editors  have  gone  on  to  greater  heights,  in 
eluding  Al  Resch,  now  newspaper  publisher  in  Chatham 
County;  Harold  Bennett,  now  head  of  Bennett  Advertising 
Agency  in  High  Point,  and  C.  B.  Houck,  now  operating  his 
own  advertising  agency  in  Roanoke,  Va. 

Present  editor  is  Howard  B.  Easter  and  associate  editoi 
is  Fred  Flagler,  Jr.     Publisher  is  N.  I.  Bienenstock. 

The  magazine,  though  not  officially  connected,  works 
closely  with  the  Southern  Retail  Furniture  Association  and 
the  Southern  Furniture  Manufacturers  Association,  two  in 
dependent  trade  groups  whose  offices  are  also  situated  ir 
the  Exposition  Building.  John  H.  Tobin  is  executive  vice 
president  of  the  retail  group  and  J.  T.  Ryan,  prominent  fig 
ure  in  the  furniture  industry  for  many  years,  is  the  executive 
vice-president  of  the  manufacturers'  organization. — By  F' 
F.,  Jr. 


both  for  retail  consumption  and  use  by  manufactur 
ers  on  bedroom  furniture,  chifforobes,  vanities 
chests  and  other  similar  pieces  of  furniture  for  the 
home. 

Springs  alone  constitute  a  rather  healthy  busines; 
in  North  Carolina  too.  Steel  is  fabricated  by  spring 
plants  for  springs  in  bedding  and  upholstered  furni 
ture.  The  bedding  field  alone  is  no  small  operatioi 
with  several  native  plants  in  operation  making  mat 
tresses  and  bedsprings  with  branch  units  of  nationa 
companies  doing  the  same  thing. 

Take  away  the  allied  industries  related  to  the  proc 
esses  of  furniture  manufacturing  in  North  Carolina 
and  you  would  wipe  away  a  total  amount  of  energy 
and  activity  almost  equivalent  in  size  to  that  of  th< 
furniture  industry  itself.  It  takes  many  material 
to  process  wood  into  the  dining  room  suites,  bedroon 
groupings  and  chairs  that  literally  pour  out  of  Nortl 
Carolina  week  by  week.  And,  as  the  furniture  indus 
try  grows  in  the  North  Carolina  section,  bolstered  b: 
the  growing  prominence  of  the  Southern  Furniture 
Market,  new  industries  will  follow  to  serve  the  fur 
niture  making  plants. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1 


Furniture  Foundation  Aids  Instruction  at  State  College 

By  Henry  A.  FOSCUE,  President,  Furniture  Foundation,  Inc.;  Chairman,  Educational 
Committee,  Southern  Furniture  Manufacturers'  Associaltion 


Henry  A.  Fosctje 


An  Educational  Commit- 
tee was  appointed  by  the 
Southern  Furniture  Manu- 
facturers' Association  in 
the  late  summer  of  1945, 
with  Henry  A.  Foscue,  High 
Point,  as  chairman.  This 
committee  worked  to  the 
end  of  establishing  in  the 
South  an  educational  pro- 
gram with  a  two-fold  pur- 
pose: 

To  offer  young  men  who  have  a  desire  to  enter 
the  furniture  industry  and  who  have  the  apti- 
tude for  it  an  opportunity  to  prepare  them- 
selves better. 

To  furnish  a  reservoir  of  technically  trained 
and  educated  young  men  to  which  the  indus- 
try may  look  as  a  source  for  recruits  in  tech- 
nical and  managerial  fields. 

The  Committee  made  visits  to  all  interested  schools 
in  the  area,  and  after  careful  consideration  of  facili- 
ties and  other  factors,  decided  that  the  program 
should  head  up  at  North  Carolina  State  College.  The 
furniture  training  course  was  announced  on  October 
30,  1946,  and  became  operative  with  the  opening  of 
the  winter  quarter  at  State  College  in  January,  1947. 

While  North  Carolina  State  College  was  most  co- 
operative and  while  the  combined  facilities  of  all 
branches  at  the  University  at  Chapel  Hill,  Raleigh, 
and  Greensboro,  were  placed  at  the  disposal  of  the 
Educational  Program,  it  was  evident  from  the  begin- 
ning that  in  order  to  give  the  course  proper  leader- 
ship and  direction,  a  really  top  place,  full  time  man 
should  be  employed  to  head  up  the  program.  Such  a 
man  could  not  be  secured  at  the  prevailing  state  sal- 
ary schedule,  and  after  a  meeting  of  interested  per- 
sons, the  Educational  Committee  was  requested  to 
try  to  raise  funds  to  establish  a  Foundation  to  be 
known  as  the  "Furniture  Foundation,  Inc." 

The  Furniture  Foundation,  Inc.,  a  non-stock,  non- 
profit corporation,  was  formed  and  a  charter  was 
granted  in  December  of  1947.  In  April  of  1948  a 
meeting  was  held  in  High  Point  with  the  purpose  of 
accepting  the  charter,  adopting  by-laws,  and  the  elec- 
tion of  officers  and  directors.  The  following  officers 
were  elected  and  still  serve  in  their  respective  capaci- 
ties :  Henry  A.  Foscue,  president ;  S.  H.  Millender, 
vice-president;  H.  C.  Philpott,  secretary;  Tom  A. 
Finch,  treasurer. 

On  May  28  a  dinner  meeting  was  held  at  the  Sir 
Walter  Hotel  in  Raleigh  for  the  purpose  of  announc- 
ing formally  and  officially  the  program  at  North 
Carolina  State  College  and  as  a  testimonial  honoring 
the  Executive  Vice-President  of  the  Southern  Furni- 
ture Manufacturers'  Association,  for  whom  the 
James  T.  Ryan  Furniture  Professorship  is  named. 

In  announcing  the  James  T.  Ryan  Professorship, 
Mr.  Foscue  paid  Mr.  Ryan  the  following  tribute : 

The  James  T.  Ryan  Furniture  Professorship, 
supported  by  the  Furniture  Foundation,  Inc., 
is  fittingly  named  for  the  Executive  Vice- 
President  of  the  Southern  Furniture  Manu- 


HENRY  FOSCUE  AGAIN  PRESIDENT 
OF  FURNITURE  FOUNDATION,  INC. 

Henry  A.  Foscue,  president  of  Globe  Parlor  Furniture  Co. 
in  High  Point,  was  reelected  president  of  the  Furniture 
Foundation,  Inc.,  at  a  meeting  in  High  Point  recently. 

Other  officers  include  S.  H.  Millender,  White  Furniture 
Co.,  Mebane,  vice-president;  H.  C.  Philpott,  United  Furni- 
ture Co.,  Lexington,  secretary,  and  Tom  A.  Finch,  Thomas- 
ville  Chair  Co.,  Thomasville,  treasurer. 

Members  of  the  board  of  directors  include  F.  J.  Bolings, 
Siler  City;  T.  L.  Lingerfelt,  Ramseur;  J.  C.  Hooker,  Martins- 
ville, Va. ;  G.  Maurice  Hill,  Drexel;  J.  W.  McDowell,  Mem- 
phis, Tenn.;  D.  L.  Jordan,  Roanoke,  Va. ;  Hampton  Powell, 
Altavista,  Va.;  W.  A.  Tomlinson,  High  Point;  J.  S.  Lynch, 
Winston-Salem,  and  C.  T.  Bost,  Hickory. 

James  T.  Ryan,  executive  vice-president  of  the  Southern 
Furniture  Manufacturers'  Association,  has  been  honored  by 
the  Foundation  which  established  the  James  T.  Ryan  Pro- 
fessorship at  State  College  in  Raleigh,  which  gives  engi- 
neering training  in  the  furniture  manufacturing  industry. 

facturers'  Association,  who  for  the  past  37 
years  has  consecrated  his  time  and  talents  to 
the  progress  of  the  Furniture  Industry  in  the 
South. 

The  quality  of  the  things  he  has  clone  reveals 
the  character  of  the  doer.  His  careful  impar- 
tiality in  approaching  problems;  his  inex- 
haustive  patience  in  establishing  facts;  his 
open-minded  and  receptive  attitude  towards 
new  ideas;  his  courageous  and  consistent  ef- 
forts in  accomplishing  a  wisely  adopted  course 
of  action;  and  his  high  quality  of  character  as 
a  man,  shining  through  them  all,  have  moved 
us  to  honor  him  with  this  affectionate  tribute, 
richly  deserved. 

Mr.  E.  Sigurd  Johnson  was  awarded  the  James  T. 
Ryan  Professorship  and  appointed  to  head  up  the 
program  in  "Furniture  Manufacturing  and  Manage- 
ment." Mr.  Johnson  is  well  qualified  for  this  posi- 
tion, having  received  his  B.S.  degree  in  Wood  Util- 
ization at  Syracuse  University,  Syracuse,  N.  Y.  From 
1939  to  1942  he  was  plant  superintendent  of  the 
Thomasville  Chair  Co.  In  1942  he  became  Plant 
Superintendent  and  Production  Engineer  for  the  Air- 
craft Division  of  the  H.  J.  Heinz  Co.  of  Pittsburgh, 
where  he  developed  methods  of  production  for  ply- 
wood aircraft  frames.  In  1943,  at  the  request  of  the 
British  Air  Commission,  he  became  assistant  general 
manager  of  the  Commonwealth  Plywood  Co.,  Ltd., 
in  Quebec,  where  he  was  in  charge  of  production  of 
aircraft  plywood  and  sub-assemblies.  Since  that 
time  he  has  done  consulting  engineering  work  in 
woodworking  in  various  factories  in  the  Southern 
industry. 

The  program  in  Furniture  Manufacturing  and 
Management  at  North  Carolina  State  College  is  now 
in  its  fourth  year,  and  at  the  present  time  there  are 
60  students  enrolled.  The  first  graduating  class  in 
the  program  will  be  available  for  employment  in  the 
Furniture  Industry  in  June,  1952.  It  is  anticipated 
that  most  of  these  students  will  be  employed  by  fur- 
niture manufacturers,  but  there  is  an  apparent  de- 
mand for  them  by  the  furniture  supply  industries  as 
well  as  other  industries  seeking  men  with  general 
engineering  and  technical  knowledge. 


PAGE  1  2 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


State  College  Offers  Only  Four-Year  Course  in  Furniture 

By  E.  S.  Johnson,  Associate  Professor-in-Charge,  Furniture  Manufacturing  and  Management  Curricu- 
lum, Department  of  Industrial  Engineering,  N.  C.  State  College,  Raleigh. 


Complementing  North  Carolina's  status  as  the 
leader  in  the  production  of  furniture,  North  Caro- 
lina State  College  is  the  leader  in  educating  men  for 
the  furniture  manufacturing  industry.  State  Col- 
lege is  the  only  university  in  the  United  States  offer- 
ing a  four-year  course  leading  to  the  Bachelor  of 
Science  degree  in  Furniture  Manufacturing  and 
Management,  although  two  northern  universities  of- 
fer a  furniture  option  in  their  Wood  Technology  de- 
partments. State  College  also  offers  a  degree  in 
Wood  Technology,  conducts  extension  courses  for 
men  in  the  furniture  industry  and  conducts  research 
on  furniture  problems. 

The  furniture  manufacturing  program  at  State 
College  was  developed  through  the  cooperation  of  the 
Southern  Furniture  Manufacturing  Industry  and 
State  College.  The  present  day  leaders  of  this  former 
craft  industry  realize  that  recent  technological  ad- 
vances and  changing  labor  relations  have  created  an 
unusual  demand  for  trained  technicians  and  admin- 
istrative personnel. 

INDUSTRY— COLLEGE  COOPERATE 
Recognizing  the  need  for  an  educational  program 
to  furnish  such  trained  personnel,  the  members  of  the 
Southern  Furniture  Manufacturing  Industry  have 
established  on  a  voluntary  basis  the  Furniture  Foun- 
dation, Inc.  The  purpose  of  this  Foundation  is  to 
provide  educational  and  research  facilities  for  the 
Furniture  industry.  The  Foundation  is  now  support- 
ing the  James  T.  Ryan  Furniture  Professorship  at 
North  Carolina  State  College. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  the  four-year  curriculum  offer- 
ing the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Furniture 
Manufacturing  to  prepare  graduates  for  technical, 
supervisory  and  management  positions  in  the  furni- 
ture industry. 

The  program  of  study  is  arranged  so  as  to  empha- 
size the  basic  and  fundamental  principles  essential  to 
an  engineering  college  program,  yet  provide  broad- 
ening courses  in  the  humanities.  Graduates  of  this 
program  will  not  only  be  prepared  for  engineering 
responsibilities  and  positions  of  trust  in  the  furni- 
ture industry,  but  will  have  an  appreciation  and  con- 
sciousness of  human  problems  in  community  and  in- 
dustrial life. 

TEACHES  FURNITURE  FUNDAMENTALS 

Because  of  the  present  lack  of  trained  engineers  in 
the  furniture  industry  to  give  on-the-job  training  to 
the  newly  employed  graduates,  the  college  must  em- 
phasize strongly  the  application  of  engineering  prin- 
ciples to  the  problems  peculiar  to  the  furniture  in- 
dustry. Therefore,  the  entire  program  has  been 
especially  designed  to  teach  the  basic  fundamentals 
of  every  phase  of  furniture  manufacturing.  Al- 
though existing  courses  are  used  wherever  they  ful- 
fill the  requirements  of  this  program,  new  courses 
have  been  developed,  or  existing  courses  modified 
where  necessary,  to  give  the  students  the  education 
needed  in  furniture  manufacturing. 

The  program  is  administered  by  the  Industrial 
Engineering  Department  in  the  School  of  Engineer- 
ing.   A  number  of  courses  are  given  in  the  Industrial 


Engineering  Department,  while  others  are  given  by 
the  Mechanical  Engineering  Department,  the  Elec- 
trical Engineering  Department,  the  Division  of 
Forestry,  the  School  of  Textiles  and  the  Division  of 
Basic  Studies. 

The  first  year  students  take  the  regular  basic  cur- 
riculum required  of  all  freshman  engineering  stu- 
dents at  State  College.  The  second  year  students 
continue  their  study  of  the  basic  sciences,  and  begin 
their  training  in  the  fundamentals  of  woodworking 
and  industrial  engineering.  The  third  and  fourth 
year  students  continue  the  study  of  woodworking 
and  industrial  engineering  with  particular  emphasis 
on  the  application  of  these  subjects  to  the  furniture 
industry. 

LABOR,  ACCOUNTING,  MARKETING 
Labor  relations,  accounting,  marketing  and  other 
business  management  courses  complete  a  curriculum 
which  gives  the  graduate  a  sound  preparation  for  an 
engineering,  supervisory  or  management  position 
with  a  furniture  manufacturer. 

The  laboratory  facilities  at  North  Carolina  State 
College  are  particularly  well  suited  for  instruction  in 
furniture  manufacturing.  The  Industrial  Engineer- 
ing shops  teach  machine  shop  practice  and  saw  filing 
and  knife  grinding.  The  engineering  Motion  and 
Time  Studv  and  drafting  laboratories  are  well  eauip- 
ped  for  efficient  instruction.  The  Forestry  College 
has  a  modern  dry  kiln,  veneer  and  plvwood  and  fin- 
ishing equipment  for  instruction  in  these  processes. 
A  new  wood  shop  is  now  being  built  which  will  be 
iointlv  operated  bv  the  Industrial  Engineering  and 
Wood  Technology  departments. 

To  supplement  the  classroom  lectures  and  labora- 
tory work,  the  students  are  required  to  visit  furni- 
ture plants  to  see  how  the  theories  of  furniture  manu- 
facture are  carried  out  in  practice.  After  a  particu- 
lar subject  has  been  covered  in  class,  plants  are  vis- 
ited to  see  how  that  problem  is  handled  in  actual 
operation.  Upon  return  to  the  college,  the  subject 
is  reviewed  in  the  light  of  both  theory  and  practice. 

STUDENTS  WORK  IN  PLANTS 

In  addition  to  these  short  visits  to  plants,  students 
are  required  to  work  a  minimum  of  six  weeks  in  a 
furniture  plant  during  the  summer.  This  experience 
not  only  gives  practical  meaning  to  and  understand- 
ing for  the  classroom  work,  but  also  affords  the  stu- 
dent and  the  industry  opportunity  to  get  acquainted 
with  each  other. 

To  emphasize  the  practical  problems  of  furniture 
manufacture,  visiting  lecturers  are  brought  to  the 
college  at  periodic  intervals.  Recognized  authorities 
in  the  furniture  industry  lecture,  illustrate  and  dis- 
cuss such  subjects  as  furniture  design,  pricing,  mar- 
keting, plant  layout,  equipment,  production,  material 
procurement,  accounting,  safety,  wages,  training  and 
other  industrial  management  matters.  An  aware- 
ness of  these  existing  problems  enables  the  student 
better  to  understand  and  profit  by  the  courses  of 
study  dealing  with  these  subjects. 

Upon  completion  of  the  four  year  course,  gradu- 
ates are  prepared  to  go  into  a  furniture  factory  as  a 


VINTER-SPRING,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  3 


rainee  for  production  engineering  or  production 
upervision  or  to  become  a  sales  engineer  for  one  of 
he  companies  supplying  the  furniture  industry  with 
naterials  or  equipment. 

FIRST  GRADUATES  THIS  YEAR 

The  first  regular  class  graduates  in  June,  1952. 
/[anufacturers  have  indicated  so  much  interest  in 
hese  men  that  they  all  will  be  employed  in  the  f  urni- 
ure  industry  if  they  so  desire. 

In  addition  to  the  regular  four  year  course,  a  per- 
on  with  particular  interest  in  certain  subjects  can 
nter  the  furniture  program  as  a  special  student, 
^.ny  mature  person  whose  educational  needs  are  not 
net  by  prescribed  curricula  may  be  admitted  as  a 
pecial  student  to  pursue  courses  of  study  which  suit 
lis  purpose,  provided  the  purpose  is  serious  and  the 
tudent  can  supply  evidence  of  capacity  to  complete 
he  work  satisfactorily.  Courses  elected  by  special 
tudents  do  not  carry  credit  toward  a  degree  and 
nust  have  the  approval  of  the  Dean.  Special  stu- 
lents  are  on  probation  to  pass  all  their  work  each 
erm. 

The  Extension  Division  at  State  College,  in  coop- 
eration with  the  academic  departments,  offers  a 
variety  of  special  educational  services  for  those 
vhose  situation  does  not  permit  or  require  registra- 
ion  as  a  regular  student. 

These  services  include  on-campus  short  courses, 
nstitutes,  work  shops,  and  conferences  running  from 
t  few  days  to  several  weeks.  Short  courses  are  held 
>n  the  campus  when  use  of  regular  university  in- 
stallations is  necessary  for  successful  instruction. 
>uch  courses  are  especially  built  to  fit  particular 
leeds.  They  do  not  carry  college  credit,  and  they 
lave  their  own  schedule  of  expenses. 

EVENING  ON-THE-JOB  CLASSES 
Projects  are  worked  out  in  cooperation  with  the 
'urniture  industry.     Conferences  and  short  courses 
ire  planned  on  the  management  and  control  of  furni- 


ture manufacture.  Courses  given  have  included 
Methods-Time-Measurement,  Lumber  Grading,  Kiln 
Drying,  Gluing  and  Furniture  Finishing. 

In  addition  to  on-campus  short  courses,  the  Exten- 
sion Division  organizes  evening  classes  for  on-the- 
job  employees  when  the  demand  warrants  and  facili- 
ties permit.  Such  classes  are  usually  held  in  a  con- 
venient industrial  center — sometimes  in  public  build- 
ings, sometimes  in  an  industrial  plant. 

Finally,  the  Extension  Division  offers  industrial 
correspondence  instruction  in  a  limited  number  of 
fields.  Correspondence  courses  usually  carry  college 
credit  of  a  specified  amount. 

Graduate  students  in  engineering  and  forestry 
engage  in  directed  research  as  part  of  their  training. 
Many  scientific  findings  of  value  to  the  industry  can 
come  from  the  support  of  graduate  study. 

RESEARCH  AND  SCHOLARSHIPS 

Regular  faculty  members  and  special  investigators 
carry  on  advanced  research  projects  with  the  finan- 
cial assistance  of  industry.  The  Department  of  En- 
gineering Research  at  North  Carolina  State  College 
contracts  for  research  projects  with  industry.  The 
Southern  Furniture  Manufacturers'  Association 
sponsored  such  a  research  project  during  1950-1951. 
This  project  covered  cost  savings  possible  from  the 
accurate  machining  of  wood  parts  to  definite  toler- 
ances. Research  programs  of  this  type  should  pay 
long  term  dividends  to  the  furniture  industry. 

Throughout  this  report  on  the  educational  program 
at  North  Carolina  State  College  the  cooperation  of 
the  Furniture  Manufacturing  Industry  was  repeated- 
ly mentioned.  The  program  is  definitely  pointed  to- 
wards the  needs  of  industry  and  is  industry  sponsor- 
ed. In  addition  to  the  illustrations  already  mention- 
ed, the  furniture  industry  offers  several  scholarships 
to  young  men  going  into  this  program.  The  influx 
of  technically  trained  young  men  into  the  furniture 
industry  should  help  considerably  in  improving  the 
efficiency  of  furniture  manufacture. 


High  Point  Known  as  Hub  of  Southern  Furniture  Industry 


High  Point,  long  recognized  as  the  hub  or  the  cen- 
er  of  the  furniture  industry  in  North  Carolina  and 
he  South,  with  its  far  famed  Southern  Exposition 
Building,  was  once  known  as  the  "Grand  Rapids  of 
he  South".  Since  High  Point  has  far  surpassed 
ler  mid-western  namesake,  the  city  can  well  be  dub- 
)ed  the  "High  Point  of  the  United  States"  in  furni- 
ure  manuafcturing. 

High  Point  has  been  engaged  in  the  manufacture 
>f  furniture  since  1888.  Even  before  that  time  it 
seems  that  Peter  Thurston  and  two  nearby  neighbors 
)f  the  near  and  now  extinct  Browntown,  "Uncle 
Billy"  Pickford  and  Gus  Jones,  were  operating  cab- 
net  shops.  Local  citizens  interested  in  erecting  a 
'urniture  factory  in  High  Point  were  able  to  secure 
i  superintendent  from  a  plant  in  Charlotte  that  had 
'ailed  and  the  present  vast  furniture  industry  had 
ts  real  beginning.  Development  of  the  industry  has 
)een  rapid  and  substantial.  High  Point  now  pro- 
luces  a  complete  line  of  wooden  household  furniture 
is  well  as  office  and  institutional  furniture. 

Guilford  County  has  a  list  of  83  furniture  plants, 
f5  of  which  are  covered  by  the  Employment  Security 
^.ct,  which  means  that  they  have  eight  or  more  em- 


WORLD'S  LARGEST  BUREAU 

The  picture  shows  the  world's  largest  bureau,  a  symbol  of 

one  of  High  Point's  most 
important  industries. 
This  bureau  was  built  in 
1926  and  from  Septem- 
ber of  that  year  until 
January,  1951,  served  as 
the  office  of  the  High 
Point  Chamber  of  Com- 
merce. This  bureau  is 
32  feet  high,  including 
the  16  foot  high  mirror 
on  the  top,  is  27  feet 
wide  and  14  feet  deep. 
Due  to  action  of  wind 
and  rain  the  mirror 
broke  from  its  fasten- 
ings and  fell  on  top  of 
the  bureau  in  1949.  The 
High  Point  Chamber  of 
Commerce  moved  into  more  commodious  quarters  the  first  of 
last  year  and  last  August  the  bureau  was  presented  to  the 
High  Point  Junior  Chamber  of  Commerce.  It  was  loaded  on  a 
huge  truck  and  moved  five  blocks  to  Hamilton  Street  at  Howell 
Street.  The  mirror  has  been  more  permanently  attached  and 
the  bureau  is  now  being  used  as  both  State  and  local  offices  for 
the  Junior  Chamber  of  Commerce. 


PAGE  14 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Darby  group  in  nylon  fabric,  Furniture  by  Tomlinson 
of  High  Point. 

ployees.  Of  these  plants,  69  are  in  High  Point,  11  in 
Greensboro,  two  in  Pleasant  Garden  and  one  in 
Jamestown.  Records  show  that  24  of  these  plants 
had  from  50  to  100  employees ;  nine  had  from  101  to 
250  employees;  two  had  between  251  and  500  em- 
ployees and  one  plant  employed  more  than  500  work- 
ers. 

Payroll  figures  from  Employment  Security  Com- 
mission records  show  that  Guilford  County  in  1950 
had  an  average  monthly  employment  of  4,693  furni- 
ture workers  with  total  annual  payrolls  of  $11,778,- 
114.    Probably  90%  to  95%  of  this  is  in  High  Point. 

Even  with  its  reputation  as  a  furniture  center, 
High  Point  has  become  even  more  important  as  a 
hosiery  and  textile  city.  Only  around  one-third  to 
one-fourth  of  the  city's  manufacturing  employment 
is  engaged  in  furniture  production. 

TOMLINSON  OF  HIGH  POINT 

Tomlinson  of  High  Point,  Inc.,  nationally  famous 
furniture  firm,  had  its  beginning  in  1900  with  the 
organization  by  Sidney  Halstead  Tomlinson  of  the 
Tomlinson  Chair  Manufacturing  Co.  The  paid-in 
capital  was  $8,000,  operations  beginning  in  a  one- 
story  sheet  iron  building  containing  18,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space  and  employing  eight  workers.  The 


From  Master  Meter  Pattern,  24  exact  duplicates  can  be  made  by 
this  multiple  carving  machine,  Tomlinson  of  High  Point. 

first  year  the  volume  of  business  was  $48,000. 

In  1904  Sidney  H.  Tomlinson  persuaded  his  bro- 
ther, Charles  F.  Tomlinson,  to  join  him  as  secretary- 
treasurer.  This  started  a  partnership  which  lasted 
39  years  and  was  terminated  by  the  sudden  death 
of  C.  F.  Tomlinson  early  in  1943  while  he  was  pre- 
siding over  a  directors'  meeting  of  the  High  Point, 
Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad.  Sidney  H.  Tom- 
linson continued  to  head  the  company  until  his  death 
in  1949,  following  a  stroke  in  1944  while  on  a  busi- 
ness trip  to  Philadelphia. 

Assembling  and  finishing  chairs  was  the  principal 
activity  in  the  beginning.  During  its  successful 
operation  the  company  in  1911  bought  the  Globe- 
Home  Furniture  Co.,  then  the  largest  furniture  pro- 
ducing firm  in  the  South.  The  Tomlinson  plant,  then 
occupying  a  city  block,  was  completely  remodeled 
in  the  next  four  years.  In  1916  Tomlinson  began  to 
design  matched  period  suites  for  dining  room  and 
living  room,  one  of  the  leading  firms  to  sense  the 
broadened  American  tastes  leading  toward  that 
trend.  Finer  adaptations  of  18th  Century,  English, 
French  and  American  styles  were  developed,  thus 
preserving  the  American  traditions  and  transmitting 
it  into  modern  life. 

Tomlinson  developed  in  1918  the  idea  of  display 


mm  J&m 

Aerial  view  of  the  Tomlinson  of  High  Point  plant  containing  more  than  500,000  square  feet  of  production  space  in  producing  qualiti 

living  room,  dining  room  and  bedroom  furniture 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  15 


Modern  plant  of  53-year-old  firm,  Myrtle  Desk  Co.,  High  Point 

ng  this  fine  furniture  in  gallery  form,  thus  originat- 
ng  a  method  which  influenced  the  entire  furniture 
ndustry.  In  1927  the  present  exhibition  and  main 
•ffice  building  of  Tomlinson  on  High  Street,  High 
3oint,  was  completed,  making  it  one  of  the  furniture 
how  places  of  the  South.  In  1934  Tomlinson  be- 
ame  the  first  furniture  tenant  of  the  largest  display 
wilding  in  the  world,  the  Merchandise  Mart,  Chi- 
ago.  Tomlinson's  own  display  area  now  comprises 
!5,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  set  up  in  room 
cenes  in  living  room,  dining  room  and  bedroom  fur- 
liture  on  constant  display ;  of  this  more  than  10,000 
quare  feet  are  utilized  in  the  permanent  display  at 
he  Chicago  Merchandise  Mart. 

In  1946  Tomlinson  craftshops,  woodworking  and 
nachine  shops,  located  on  both  Hamilton  and  High 
Streets,  were  consolidated  into  one  operation  in  the 
nam  plant  on  High  Street.  In  following  years 
ground  $1,000,000  was  spent  for  improvements,  the 
)lant  now  being  considered  one  of  the  most  efficiently 
danned  in  the  furniture  industry.  All  phases  of  pro- 
luction,  from  receiving  raw  lumber  in  the  yards  to 
he  finished  creation  on  the  exhibit  floor,  are  per- 
ormed  in  light,  bright,  modern  craftshops. 

A  fine  spirit  of  enthusiasm  and  teamwork  exists 
;t  Tomlinson,  resulting  from  several  important  de- 
relopments  in  the  plant  relations  program.  Four 
ervice  groups  for  those  who  have  served  the  firm 
ontinuously  for  five  years  or  more  in  plant,  offices 
ind  sales  work  were  founded.  The  present  200  em- 
)loyees  in  these  groups  have  a  record  of  3,233  years 
if  continuous  service  with  the  firm.  Top  honor  group 
s  the  Diamond  Guard,  workers  with  record  of  serv- 
ce  for  30  years  or  more,  several  of  whom  have  been 
ontinuously  employed  for  40  years  or  more.  Tom- 
inson's  payroll  list  more  than  500  craftshop  em- 
)loyees. 

The  team  spirit,  existing  at  Tomlinson,  resulted  in 
vinning  the  National  Security  Award  and  made  pos- 
ible  a  National  Woodworking  Record  of  nearly  three 
nillion  man  hours  without  a  loss 
>f  time  accident.     Incentive  for 
hinking  on  the  job,  as  a  result 
>f  the  suggestion  system  in  oper- 

ition  for  many  years,  results  in  ^btjpppl 

food  idea  awards  ranging  from 
>5  to  as  much  as  $2,280.  Other 
>enefits  to  Tomlinson  employees 
nclude  a  plant  site  canteen 
»wned  by  the  employees,  vaca- 
ion  with  pay,  publication  of  the 
)lant      newspaper      "Tomlinson  Fluorgraphic  view  of  the  plant  of  the  Alma  Desk  Co.,  High  Point. 


News",  group  insurance  and  hos- 
pitalization at  an  extremely  low 
rate. 

All  furniture  by  Tomlinson  is 
fabricated  from  raw  lumber  to 
the  finished  product.  Base  woods 
include  Honduras  and  Philippine 
mahogany,  African  mahogany 
veneers,  cherry,  walnut,  oak, 
poplar,  maple  and  hackberry, 
with  veneers  of  Celtis,  Korina, 
cherry,  walnut  and  comb-grain. 

Present   leading   products    in 
Furniture  by  Tomlinson  include 
American    Informal    group    for 
living  room,  dining  room,  bed- 
room ;  Parkway  Terrace  groups  for  living  room,  din- 
ing room,  bedroom;  Standard  of  Value  sofas  and 
chairs;  Darby  group  sofas  and  chairs;  Canterbury 
group  sofas  and  chairs;  Modern  dining  room  and 
bedroom  groups;  Traditional  bedroom  groups;  the 
Gainsborough  chair ;  the  Cinderella  bedroom  group ; 
the  Essex  group  sofas  and  chairs. 

Tomlinson's  high  position  in  the  furniture  world 
has  been  obtained  through  substantial  and  steady 
growth  from  its  modest  beginning.  A  visit  through 
the  buildings,  including  the  impressive  offices,  the 
artistically  designed  display  rooms  and  galleries  and 
into  the  craftshops,  impresses  the  visitor  of  this 
wonderful  development. 

Among  Tomlinson  "firsts"  was  a  four-color  review 
of  the  Tomlinson  exhibit  in  the  Merchandise  Mart  by 
Fortune  magazine.  The  display  of  furniture  by 
Tomlinson  at  the  Merchandise  Mart  was  also  the 
scene  of  the  first  television  program  covered  on  fur- 
nishings and  furniture  at  the  International  Market 
in  January,  1948.  Many  leading  home  and  women's 
magazines  have  featured  Tomlinson  editorially  as 
examples  of  good  design  and  value  for  the  American 
way  of  life,  including  Life  magazine,  House  Beauti- 
ful, House  and  Garden,  Woman's  Home  Companion, 
Ladies'  Home  Journal,  Today's  Women  and  others. 

Furniture  by  Tomlinson  is  distributed  from  coast 
to  coast,  extending  also  into  Canada,  Puerto  Rico, 
the  West  Indies  and  Hawaii.  A  field  staff  of  more 
than  20  salesmen  cover  the  entire  area  in  contacting 
furniture  outlets. 

Present  officers  of  Tomlinson  of  High  Point  in- 
clude William  A.  Tomlinson,  who  has  been  a  member 
of  the  organization  since  1922  and  served  as  director, 
vice-president,  and  executive  vice-president  from  his 
father's  illness  in  1944  until  he  became  president  in 
1949 ;  Sidney  H.  Tomlinson,  Jr.,  member  of  the  or- 
ganization since  1924  and  director  and  vice-president 
since  1938 ;  P.  J.  Neal,  with  the  organization  since 
1930  and  secretary-treasurer  since  1947. 


PAGE  1  6 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


*£•'.. 


•*$$$$ 


5^w^ 


■  i&&MMMi&&4 


Widespread  plant  of  The  Continental  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point. 

Tomlinson  has  followed  the  precept  of  its  founder 
in  its  program  of  establishing  customer  confidence  in 
these  words : 

"He  who  builds  for  progress  builds  not  for 

himself  alone  but  for  posterity". 

(Data  from  Robert  Barr,  Advertising  Manager) 

MYRTLE  DESK  CO. 

Myrtle  Desk  Co.,  Inc.,  was  organized  in  1899  by 
Henry  W.  Fraser  as  Myrtle  Furniture  Co.  The  origi- 
nal plant  employing  less  than  50  workers  manufac- 
tured bedroom  suites,  oak  china  closets,  and  ladies' 
writing  desks.  In  about  a  year  the  firm  changed  its 
production  to  roll-top  and  flat-top  office  desks  of  the 
old  full  base  variety  then  in  vogue.  Five  years  after 
it  started,  Myrtle  Desk  Co.  products  took  first  prize 
at  the  St.  Louis  World's  Fair  in  1904. 

Present  stockholders  purchased  the  company  from 
Mr.  Fraser  in  March,  1923.  Since  that  time  opera- 
tion of  the  company  has  been  in  charge  of  W.  T. 
Powell  who  continues  as  secretary,  treasurer  and 
general  manager.  In  the  28  years  of  operation  Mr. 
Powell  has  built  up  a  strong  production  and  execu- 
tive organization.  In  the  staff  are  John  W.  Austin, 
Jr.,  general  superintendent  in  charge  of  production; 
E.  A.  Hatcher,  Jr.,  auditor,  in  charge  of  purchasing 
and  accounting  departments;  C.  T.  Latimer,  Jr.,  han- 
dling institutional  furniture  sales;  and  T.  R.  Pitts, 
sales  manager,  in  charge  of  office  furniture  sales. 

Myrtle  Desk  Co.  has  continued  to  expand  through 
the  years  until  it  has  a  thoroughly  modern  and  com- 
plete plant  occupying  250,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space.  In  1926  a  wing  increased  the  capacity  of  the 
machine  room  and  cabinet  room.  A  new  finishing 
and  shipping  building  with  60,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space  was  erected  in  1928.  In  1947  a  new 
brick  and  concrete  building  with  about  40,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space  was  erected  to  house  the  plywood 
department   which   was   equipped   with  thoroughly 


French  Provincial    bedroom  suite,   solid  magnolia,   fruitwood 
finish,  by  The  Continental  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point. 


modern  machinery.  A  new  pow- 
er plant  with  two  250  horse 
power  boilers  was  erected  in  the 
same  year.  In  fact  in  the  past 
five  years  the  company  has  spent 
one  half  a  million  dollars  in  mak- 
ing the  Myrtle  Desk  Co.  one  of 
the  most  complete  and  thorough- 
ly modern  plants  in  the  nation. 

Myrtle  Desk  Co.  manufactures 
a  complete  line  of  office  furniture 
ranging  from  square  leg  clerical 
desks  to  executive  suites  in  both 
Modern  and  Traditional  designs 
and     finishings.        Institutional 
furniture  of  various  types  also  is 
produced.     The  company  pioneered  in  developing  a 
cigarette  burn-proof  wooden  desk  top  and  used  it  ex- 
clusively in  all  items  in  the  Pacemaker  Series  until 
the  first  of  this  year  when  government  regulations 
prevented  the  use  of  aluminum  foil  in  manufacturing 
these  tops. 

Offices  of  the  company  are  models  in  modern  office 
furniture  and  its  show  rooms,  containing  2,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space,  illustrate  how  many  types 
of  offices  should  be  furnished. 

ALMA  DESK  CO. 

The  Alma  Desk  Co.,  Inc.,  of  High  Point,  located  on 
a  site  which  has  been  devoted  to  woodworking  since 
1881,  is  the  successor  of  the  Alma  Furniture  Co., 
which  was  purchased  by  the  late  Charles  E.  Hay- 
worth  in  1923.  Soon  thereafter,  the  name  was  chang- 
ed to  the  Alma  Desk  Co.  and  for  more  than  a  quarter 
century  has  been  recognized  for  its  leadership  in  the 
production  of  fine  wood  office  furniture,  living  up  to 
its  slogan  "Wise  Economy". 

Following  the  death  of  Charles  E.  Hayworth  in 
1928,  the  management  responsibilities  were  assumed 
by  his  wife,  Mrs.  Myrtle  Hayworth,  who  carried  out 
his  objectives  until  she  relinquished  them  to  the  four 
sons  of  the  late  Charles  E.  Hayworth. 

Officers  of  the  corporation  are  the  mother,  now 
Mrs.  Myrtle  H.  Barthmaier,  president,  and  her  four 
sons :  Charles  B.  Hayworth,  Jr.,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer; John  Richard  Hayworth,  vice-president;  Jos- 
eph A.  Hayworth,  assistant  general  manager ;  David 
Robert  Hayworth,  assistant  sales  manager. 

The  firm  has  expanded  and  extended  its  operations 
until  it  now  utilizes  about  125,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  and  employs  approximately  300  workers. 

The  Alma  Desk  Co.  manufactures  a  complete  line 
of  office  desks  with  companion  pieces,  principally  in 
oak,  walnut  and  mahogany  with  occasional  deviation 
as  the  market  demands.  Its  products  are  distributed 
throughout  the  United  States,  being  carried  as  stock 
items  by  practically  all  leading  office  furniture 
stores.  Permanent  displays  are  maintained  in  High 
Point. 

THE  CONTINENTAL  FURNITURE  CO. 

The  Continental  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point,  last 
year  celebrated  its  50th  anniversary,  having  been 
organized  and  incorporated  November  30,  1901.  The 
key  man  in  the  organization  and  a  civic  leader  for 
half  a  century  was  Fred  N.  Tate,  who  served  as  presi- 
dent, treasurer  and  general  manager  from  1901  to 
1945.  Mr.  Tate  interested  other  High  Point  citizens 
in  his  enterprise  which  had  an  original  authorized 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  7 


capital  of  $30,000,  of  which  $15,000  was  paid-in. 
The  first  order  of  "Continental  Superior  Quality" 
furniture  was  shipped  in  August,  1902.  Fire  de- 
stroyed the  main  building  six  months  after  business 
was  started.  Mr.  Tate  brought  in  additional  capital 
and  a  new  building  was  erected. 

After  successful  leadership  in  the  enterprise  and 
many  other  community  projects  for  45  years,  Mr. 
Tate  relinquished  leadership  in  1945  to  Roland  T. 
Holton.  Mr.  Holton  had  joined  the  firm  in  1916  as  a 
salesman  and  soon  after  became  assistant  general 
manager.  In  1920  he  was  elected  vice-president 
continuing  as  assistant  general  manager  and  later 
became  general  manager.  Following  Mr.  Tate's 
death  in  1946,  Mr.  Holton  was  elected  president  of 
the  company  and  continued  to  serve  as  general  man- 
ager until  his  death  in  1950. 

Continental's  third  president  is  Alan  W.  Detweiler, 
who  became  president  and  general  manager  January 
1, 1951,  following  Mr.  Holton's  death.  Mr.  Detweiler 
had  been  with  Continental  since  1947,  having  been 
the  firm's  eastern  representative  in  New  York.  Stock 
in  the  corporation  is  closely  held  primarily  by  mem- 
bers of  the  Tate  and  Holton  families.  Other  officers 
include  Mrs.  Kathryn  Tate  Mann  and  Mrs.  Roland 
T.  Holton,  vice-presidents,  and  Mrs.  Mary  A.  Dick- 
ens, secretary-treasurer. 

Continental  takes  just  pride  in  its  long  history  of 
successful  operation  and  in  the  large  number  of  em- 
ployees who  have  been  with  the  firm  through  many 
of  its  notable  years.  Last  November  30  a  dinner  was 
held  honoring  old  members,  chief  of  whom  was 
James  M.  Teague,  general  superintendent,  who  had 
been  with  the  firm  during  all  of  its  50  years  of  opera- 
tion. The  firm  boasts  of  13  father-and-son  combina- 
tions, some  of  whose  period  of  service  range  as  high 
as  80  years.  Among  individual  workers  five  have 
more  than  40  years  of  service ;  33  have  served  more 
than  20  years ;  55  have  service  records  exceeding  10 
years,  and  more  than  100  have  been  on  the  payroll  in 
excess  of  five  years. 

Continental  designs  and  manufactures  fine  bed- 
room furniture  exclusively  and  in  solid  woods  only. 
Products  include  18th  Century,  Early  American  and 
French  Provincial  styles,  produced  from  Honduras 
mahogany,  solid  cherry,  solid  maple  and  solid  mag- 
nolia. Continental  has  a  splendid  nation-wide  repu- 
tation for  quality  bedroom  furniture  at  moderate 
prices. 

Continental  furniture  is  sold  throughout  the  Unit- 
ed States,  22  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Permanent 
displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago  and  in  High  Point 
in  Continental's  show  rooms,  covering  3000  to  4000 
square  feet  of  space. 

It  is  noteworthy  that  the  Continental  Furniture 
Co.,  operating  on  the  same  site  on  which  it  started, 
has  been  operating  on  an  overtime  basis  of  50  hours 
a  week  for  the  last  eleven  or  twelve  years. 

GLOBE  PARLOR  FURNITURE  CO. 

Globe  Parlor  Furniture  Co.,  High  Point,  was  or- 
ganized and  incorporated  in  1906  by  Allen  Tomlin- 
son,  who  served  as  president  until  his  death  a  few 
years  later.  He  was  succeeded  by  A.  S.  Caldwell, 
who  continued  to  head  the  firm  until  his  death  in 
1935.  At  that  time  T.  V.  Rochelle,  who  had  served 
for  many  years  as  secretary,  was  elected  president, 
serving  as  such  for  15  years  until  his  death  in  1950. 


Pinehurst  Provincial  sofa,  by  Globe  Parlor  Furniture 
Co.,  High  Point. 

C.  R.  Barrier,  who  had  started  early  with  the  firm, 
became  secretary,  later  was  elected  treasurer  also, 
and  in  1935  became  vice-president,  a  position  he  still 
holds. 

Henry  A.  Foscue,  who  joined  Globe  Parlor  in  1926 
as  sales  manager  and  who  had  become  secretary  also 
in  1935,  was  elected  president  in  1950  to  succeed  Mr. 
Rochelle.  Mr.  Barrier  continues  as  vice-president 
and  treasurer  of  the  firm  and  Mrs.  C.  R.  Barrier  is 
secretary.  These  officers  with  Mrs.  Henry  A.  Foscue 
compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

Globe  Parlor  started  with  an  authorized  capital  of 
$100,000,  about  $25,000  of  which  was  paid  in  when 
the  plant  started  operation.  Today  capital  assets  are 
approximately  $350,000  while  annual  sales  have  now 
reached  in  excess  of  $2,000,000.  The  plant  occupies 
about  111,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs 
around  200  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  ap- 
proximately $750,000.00. 

Globe  Parlor's  important  line  of  "Colony  Court", 
living  room  furniture  is  produced  in  both  Traditional 
and  Modern,  and  is  largely  of  solid  Honduras  ma- 
hogany but  with  some  lines  in  gum  and  other  selected 
hardwoods. 

Globe  Parlor  products  are  sold  over  the  entire 
United  States,  20  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Per- 
manent displays  are  maintained  at  the  Southern  Fur- 
niture Exposition  Building  in  High  Point  and  in  the 
company's  own  show  rooms. 

Henry  A.  Foscue,  president  of  Globe  Parlor,  is 
also  president  of  the  Furniture  Foundation,  an  or- 
ganization of  Southern  furniture  manufacturers 
which  supports  and  promotes  the  furniture  courses 
conducted  at  North  Carolina  State  College,  Raleigh. 
Mr.  Foscue,  in  an  article  in  this  issue,  describes  the 
origin  and  organization  of  the  Furniture  Foundation. 

Colony  Tables,  Inc. 

Colony  Tables,  Inc.,  High  Point,  owned  and  con- 
trolled by  Globe  Parlor  Furniture  Co.,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1947  for  the  purpose  of  manu- 
facturing tables  for  the  parent  organization.  Colony 
Tables  manufactures  living  room  tables  only,  em- 
ploying about  40  workers  in  the  plant.    Officers  are 

D.  O.  Ward,  president  and  treasurer,  C.  R.  Barrier, 
vice-president,  and  Henry  A.  Foscue,  secretary. 

HERITAGE  FURNITURE  CO. 

Heritage  Furniture  Company,  Inc.,  was  organized 
in  1937  by  Elliott  S.  Wood,  and  operations  were  be- 
gun in  an  upstairs  rented  space  with  only  a  few  em- 
ployees. 


PAGE   18 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Living  room  suite  of  the  Heritage-Henredon  line  by  Heritage 
Furniture  Co.,  High  Point. 

The  firm  was  incorporated  in  1939  with  Mr.  Wood 
as  president  and  general  manager,  a  position  he  still 
retains.  Other  officers  are :  John  K.  Dwyer,  vice- 
president  and  sales  manager ;  Melvin  A.  Binney,  vice- 
president  in  charge  of  merchandising;  Tilman  B. 
Thomas,  secretary-treasurer;  and  Mrs.  Juanita  T. 
Barber,  assistant  secretary-treasurer. 

The  company's  main  offices  and  High  Point  show- 
room are  located  at  1690  English  Street  and  occupy 
approximately  7,000  square  feet.  The  upholstery 
plant  which  produces  upholstered  living  room  furni- 
ture is  located  at  911  Broad  Street  and  covers  ap- 
proximately 60,000  square  feet. 

The  table  plant,  which  was  originally  located  at 
the  English  Street  address  now  occupied  by  the 
offices  and  showroom,  moved  to  a  new  plant  in 
Mocksville  in  1947.  This  plant  was  designed  and 
built  to  provide  the  utmost  efficiency  and  is  said  to 
be  one  of  the  most  modern  manufacturing  plants  in 
the  South.  There,  a  complete  line  of  living  room  and 
occasional  tables  is  manufactured.  The  table  plant 
building  contains  approximately  85,000  square  feet 
of  floor  space. 

Heritage  Furniture  is  sold  nation-wide  to  Depart- 
ment and  Furniture  stores  and  has  its  own  sales 
staff.  In  addition  to  the  High  Point  showroom,  the 
firm  maintains  a  permanent  display  at  the  Merchan- 
dise Mart  in  Chicago. 

SILVER  CRAFT  FURNITURE  CO. 

Silver  Craft  Furniture  Co.,  914  Millis  St.,  High 
Point,  was  organized  in  1944  as  The  Craft  Shop,  en- 
gaged in  making  a  low  priced  line  of  chairs.  After 
about  a  year,  the  plant  was  purchased  by  Phillip  A. 
Silver  and  his  wife,  Mrs.  Sylvia  Silver,  and  in  1945 
the  plant  was  enlarged.  It  had  started  with  about  20 
employees.  In  1950  a  larger  plant  was  purchased 
and  the  next  year  the  firm  was  incorporated.  Officers 
include  P.  A.  Silver,  president  and  general  manager, 
Mrs.  Sylvia  Silver,  vice-president,  and  Norman  H. 

Silver,  a  son,  became  secre- 
tary-treasurer on  entering 
the  business  after  complet- 
ing his  college  course. 

Silver  Craft  has  an  au- 
thorized capital  of  $100,000 
with    $65,000    outstanding. 
The  plant  and  equipment  is 
valued   at  around   $75,000. 
Annual    sales    of   the   firm 
have    increased    until   they 
rincess  chair,  hand     approach  $1,000,000       The 
tufted  by  SilverCraft  Fur-      firm  occupies   about  27,000 
niture  Co.,  High  Point.        square  feet  of  floor  space 


and  employs  around 
100  workers,  the  an- 
nual payroll  ranging 
between  $150,000 
and  $160,000. 

Silver  Craft  pro- 
ducts are  made  in 
the  popular  and 
higher  priced  rang- 
es, including  chairs, 
sofas,  love  seats  and 
sectionals.  Products 
are  high  styled  in 
both  Traditional  and 
Modern  lines.  Oak 
used     for     the 


is 


Foam  rubber  club  chair  manufactur- 
ed by  Carson's,  Incorporated, 
frames    and    poplar  High  Point. 

and  maple  for  the  exposed  and  finished  parts.  Silver 
Craft  products  are  shipped  to  every  state  in  the 
Union  and  18  salesmen  cover  the  area.  About  75% 
of  the  distribution  is  through  department  stores  and 
25  %  through  the  high  type  furniture  stores.  Perma- 
nent displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago,  High  Point, 
and  San  Francisco. 

CARSON'S,  INCORPORATED 

Carson's,  Incorporated,  Prospect  Road,  High 
Point,  was  organized  in  1944  by  Carson  C.  Stout  as 
individual  owner,  after  10  years  as  superintendent  of 
a  plant  of  the  National  Upholstery  Co.,  owned  and 
operated  by  his  uncle,  R.  B.  Culler.  In  1946  Carson's 
was  incorporated  with  Carson  C.  Stout  as  president, 
Mrs.  Helen  M.  Stout,  his  wife,  as  vice-president,  and 
Walter  E.  Crissman  (inactive),  secretary. 

Carson's  has  an  authorized  capital  of  $100,000, 
owned  almost  entirely  by  the  Stout  family.  Annual 
sales  have  developed  until  they  are  now  close  to 
$1,000,000.  The  plant  employs  about  100  workers 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $170,000.  The  firm 
utilizes  45,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  including 
a  new  building  containing  12,000  square  feet  of 
space  which  was  completed  by  the  end  of  last  year. 

Living  room  furniture  is  produced  exclusively, 
largely  of  the  promotional  type,  by  means  of  which 
retailers  are  enabled  to  increase  their  volume  of 
sales.  Products  include  also  club  chairs,  love  seats 
and  odd  sofas. 

Carson's  covers  the  entire  United  States  in  its 
sales  direct  to  retailers  and  syndicated  retail  stores, 
15  salesmen  covering  the  area.  A  fleet  of  four  trucks 
delivers  practically  all  of  the  products.  Permanent 
displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago  and  New  York 
and  in  the  plant's  display  space  of  2,000  square  feet. 

DALLAS,  INCORPORATED 

Dallas,  Incorporated,  was  organized  in  1932  as  the 
Furniture  City  Upholstering  Co.  by  J.  Sanders  Dal- 
las. Mr.  Dallas,  who  had  started  with  the  Knox 
Furniture  Manufacturing  Co.  and  had  also  worked 
for  Williams-Norris  Corp.,  started  the  new  plant  in 
rented  space  with  about  a  dozen  employees.  The 
name  was  changed  in  1945  to  Dallas,  Incorporated. 
Present  officers  are  the  same  as  those  elected  under 
the  earlier  corporative  name,  including  J.  Sanders 
Dallas,  president  and  general  manager;  Mrs.  J.  S. 
Dallas,  vice-president,  and  J.  D.  McCrery,  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

The  firm  employs  140  workers.  The  plant  occu- 
pies 135,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E:  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  19 


Dallas  lays  claim  to  being  the 
largest  firm  in  the  southeastern 
area  devoted  exclusively  to  the 
manufacture  of  living  room  fur- 
niture. Products  of  the  firm  cov- 
er the  southeast  and  southwest 
while  sales  are  extending  rapid- 
ly into  the  mid-west  and  far 
west.  A  sales  force  of  18  covers 
the  area  of  distribution.  Perma- 
nent display  spaces  are  maintained  in  High  Pont 
and  in  the  firm's  own  show  rooms,  covering  about 
7,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 

Dallas  living  room  furniture  is  produced  in  18th 
Century,  Modern  and  Contemporary,  the  latter  an 
adaptation  of  Traditional  lines  to  present  day  uses. 
This  furniture  ranges  from  moderate  to  high  priced 
lines.  Products  are  made  from  selected  hardwoods, 
including  Honduras  mahogany,  oak  and  hackberry 
woods. 

MARSH  FURNITURE  CO. 

(Article  prepared;  omitted  at  request  of  manage- 
ment) . 

WELSH  FURNITURE  CO. 

Welsh  Furniture  Co.,  118  Mallory  St.,  High  Point, 
was  organized  in  1900  and  operated  for  about  35 
years  by  members  of  the  Welsh  family.  The  firm 
was  incorporated  a  year  after  its  organization.  In 
1935  the  firm  was  purchased  by  J.  S.  Pickett  and  is 
still  owned  by  his  estate  and  relatives.  Present  offi- 
cers include  Mrs.  Flossie  Shaw,  whose  husband  was 
a  stockholder  and  officer,  president ;  Mrs.  Pearl  West, 
widow  of  J.  S.  Pickett,  secretary-treasurer,  and  J.  B. 
Lovelace,  vice-president.  J.  L.  Beck,  formerly  with 
Tomlinsons  of  High  Point,  is  general  manager  of  the 
industry. 

Welsh  Furniture  Co.  has  an  authorized  capital 
stock  of  $100,000  with  about  $65,000  outstanding. 
Annual  production  is  around  $750,000.  The  firm  oc- 
cupies 68,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs 
from  115  to  120  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of 
approximately  $200,000. 

This  firm  produces  bedroom  furniture  only,  includ- 
ing 18th  Century,  Colonial  and  Borax,  among  them 
heavy  solid  wood  four  poster  beds.  Principal  wood 
used  is  tupelo  gum,  but  the  firm  has  also  developed 
a  popular  line  in  Western  Carolina  white  knotty  pine. 

Welsh  products  are  sold  largely  in  the  southeastern 
states,  12  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Permanent 
displays  are  maintained  in  High  Point  and  in  the 
plant's  own  show  rooms. 


Convertaicay  bed,  opening  into  full  size  bed  with,  inner  spring 
mattress,  by  Burton  Upholstery  Co.,  High  Point. 


Large  living  room  furniture  plant  of  Dallas,  Inc.,  High  Point. 

BURTON  UPHOLSTERY  CO. 

Burton  Upholstery  Co.,  Inc.,  High  Point,  was  or- 
ganized in  May,  1933,  with  R.  Allen  Burton  as  pres- 
ident and  general  manager ;  C.  L.  Burton,  his  brother, 
as  vice-president,  and  N.  W.  Bean  as  secretary.  When 
the  firm  started,  it  had  capital  of  less  than  $1,000, 
had  six  employees,  and  operated  in  a  building  30  x  75 
feet.  The  Burton  brothers  continue  as  principal  offi- 
cers and  L.  J.  Monroe,  who  joined  the  firm  soon  after 
it  started,  is  now  secretary  and  treasurer.  These 
three  officers  compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

The  Burton  firm  has  developed  until  its  annual 
sales  reach  approximately  $900,000.  The  firm  now 
occupies  about  27,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and 
the  plant  and  equipment  are  entirely  modern.  The 
firm  employs  an  average  of  75  workers  and  its  annual 
payroll  is  approximately  $140,000. 

Living  room  furniture  is  produced  exclusively,  in- 
cluding two  or  three  piece  suites  and  sofa  beds,  pro- 
duced from  solid  hardwoods,  largely  oak  with  some 
gum  and  poplar. 

Burton  Upholstery  Co.  sells  its  products  over  the 
southeastern  states,  eight  salesmen  covering  the  ter- 
ritory. Permanent  displays  are  maintained  in  High 
Point. 

President  R.  Allen  Burton  is  also  president  of  four 
other  firms,  two  of  which  furnish  supplies  for  Bur- 
ton and  other  plants.  These  are  Johnson  Frame  Co. 
and  Johnson  Hinge  Co.,  and  also  of  Bur-Mon  Uphol- 
stering Co.  and  Security  Upholstering  Co.,  all  located 
in  High  Point. 

UNIVERSAL  T/V  FURNITURE  MFG.  CO. 

Universal  T/V  Furniture  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc., 
409  Reed  Street,  High  Point,  was  organized  in  1946 
as  the  Universal  Co.  as  a  partnership  owned  by  Mur- 
ray J.  Abeles  and  C.  A.  Troutman.  It  is  a  successor 
to  Briggs  Manufacturing  Co.  and  is  using  the  rebuilt 
plant  occupied  by  this  firm.  In  April,  1950,  the  firm 
was  incorporated  with  Murray  J.  Abeles,  president, 
C.  A.  Troutman,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and  J.  E. 
Lyons,  vice-president.  These  officers  form  the  Board 
of  Directors. 

Universal  T/V,  said  to  be 
the  world's  largest  manu- 
facturer of  television  ta- 
bles, produces  tables  from 
mahogany  and  gum  and  Ap- 
palachian oak  with  lime  fin- 
ish and  television  bases  and 
cabinets  of  the  same  mate- 
rials. This  firm  produces 
television  furniture  for  all 
of  the  leading  television 
manufacturers,      including  mmmmmsmsmmm 

Philco.     Crosley      General     ^t^le^VvZ 
Electric,  Westinghouse,  CB  versai  T/v  Mfg.  Co., 

S,  Sylvania  and  Spartan,  as  High  Point. 


PAGE  20 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


well  as  to  all  authorized  distributors  for  these  firms. 
It  has  also  added  a  special  line  of  television  tables 
for  department  stores. 

Universal  T/V  distributes  its  products  nationwide, 
18  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Warehouses  are  op- 
erated in  Chicago,  Los  Angeles  and  San  Francisco, 
and  permanent  displays  are  maintained  at  television 
and  furniture  marts  in  Chicago,  New  York,  High 
Point  and  San  Francisco. 

CASARD  FURNITURE  MFG.  CORP. 

Casard  Furniture  Mfg.  Corp.,  507  E.  Russell  St., 
High  Point,  was  organized  and  incorporated  in  1948 
by  Arthur  Cassell,  who  is  secretary-treasurer,  and 

Herman  W.  Bernard,  who  is 
president.  The  name  comes 
from  the  first  part  of  Cas- 
sell's  and  the  latter  part  of 
Bernard's  names. 

The  Casard  plant  and 
equipment  has  a  valuation 
of  around  $100,000,  and  an- 
nual sales  approach  $1,000,- 
000.  The  firm  employs  from 
80  to  90  workers  and  the 
annual  payroll  is  in  the 
neighborhood  of  $250,000. 
This  firm  produces  tele- 
vision tables  and  accesso- 
ries but  no  cabinets.  It  pro- 
duces an  assortment  of  ta- 
bles for  television  sets  in- 
cluding the  swivel  type  in 
decorative  styles.  Also  produced  are  an  assortment  of 
occasional  tables,  including  coffee,  lamp,  end,  step, 
commode,  and  tea  carts,  telephone  benches  and  rec- 
ord album  cabinets.  Occasional  tables  are  made  from 
mahogany  veneers  and  gum  and  poplar  rails  and 
legs,  some  also  having  plastic  tops.  Similar  woods 
are  used  in  television  tables  and  accessories. 

Casard  products  are  sold  over  the  entire  United 
States  but  largely  in  the  southeast,  east  and  mid- 
west, fewer  shipments  going  to  the  far  west.  Twelve 
salesmen  cover  the  area  of  distribution.  Permanent 
exhibits  are  maintained  in  Chicago  and  High  Point. 

MOFFITT,  INCORPORATED 

Moffitt,  Incorporated,  300  Mallory  St.,  High  Point, 
was  organized  late  in  1945  and  operated  for  five 


Step  table,  mahogany  ve- 
neered, by  Casard  Furni- 
ture Mfg.  Co.,  High  Point. 


Drop  leaf  table  with  cork  inlaid  top  and  chairs  with  upholstered 
backs,  all  solid  ash  by  Moffitt,  Inc.,  High  Point. 


years  in  a  building  containing  12,000  square  feet  on 
the  Greensboro  Road,  outside  High  Point-  Early  last 
year  the  business  moved  into  its  present  quarters, 
formerly  occupied  by  Kearns  Furniture  Co.  Officers 
are  J.  S.  Moffitt,  president  and  sales  manager,  H.  A. 
Moffitt,  vice-president  and  treasurer,  and  J.  B.  Love- 
lace, secretary.  These  officers  with  Ed  Mendenhall 
and  M.  L.  Patrick  compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

The  present  Moffitt  plant  contains  65,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space.  The  firm  is  capitalized  at  $100,- 
000.  In  contrast  to  annual  sales  of  $92,000  in  its 
first  year,  five  or  six  years  ago,  the  firm  has  increased 
its  annual  business  to  approximately  $500,000,  last 
year's  increase  amounting  to  $100,000.  The  firm 
employs  75  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around 
$120,000. 

Moffitt  produces  a  correlated  dining  room  and  liv- 
ing room  group  in  addition  to  a  full  line  of  occasional 
tables,  all  in  Modern  types.  Solid  structural  parts 
are  made  from  American  white  ash  finished  in  ve- 
neered, leather  and  tile  cork  tops. 

Products  are  sold  throughout  the  48  states,  16 
salesmen  covering  the  area.  Permanent  displays  are 
maintained  in  High  Point  and  Chicago  and  seasonal 
shows  are  conducted  in  Boston  and  San  Francisco. 

NATIONAL  UPHOLSTERY  CO. 

National  Upholstery  Co.,  601  S.  Hamilton  St.,  High 
Point,  was  organized  in  1934  by  R.  B.  Culler  as  indi- 
vidual owner.  Mr.  Culler  started  with  five  employees 
in  a  rented  space  of  3,000  square  feet.  In  1937  Mr. 
Culler   purchased   a       .  Ns^ 

building    which    he  _ 

enlarged  ten  years 
later,  his  plant  now 
occupying  6  0,000 
square  feet  of  floor 
space. 

National  Uphols- 
tery Co.,  a  family 
owned  industry,  was 
incorporated  in  1946 
with  R.  B.  Culler  as 
president  and  treas- 
urer; R.  B.  Culler, 
Jr.,  vice-president 
and  now  general 
manager,  and  Mrs. 
R.  B.  Culler,  secretary.  It  has  an  authorized  capital 
stock  of  $110,000,  all  outstanding.  Annual  production 
has  developed  until  it  has  reached  approximately 
$750,000.  About  100  workers  are  employed  with  an 
annual  payroll  in  the  neighborhood  of  $175,000. 

National  produces  upholstered  living  room  furni- 
ture exclusively,  primarily  the  promotional  lines, 
which  are  used  in  retail  units  as  medium  priced  items 
to  attract  the  customers.  Semi-modern  designs  are 
produced  in  sofas  and  matching  chairs  and  sofa  beds. 

National  covers  the  Atlantic  Seaboard  with  its 
products  and  is  moving  into  middle, west  territory. 
Fifteen  salesmen  cover  the  area,  selling  to  unit  stores 
and  to  syndicates  of  unit  stores. 

CAROLINA  UPHOLSTERING  CO. 

Carolina  Upholstering  Co.,  Inc.,  High  Point,  was 
organized  and  incorporated  in  1940  by  Jay  Williard 
and  two  of  his  brothers.  The  officers  are  Jay  Wil- 
liard, president  and  treasurer;  Levi  Williard,  vice- 
president,  and  Coy  Williard,  secretary.     These  offi- 


Chair,  semi-modem  design,  by  Na- 
tional Upholstery  Co.,  High  Point. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  21 


King  Sleeper,  patented   hide-away   bed,  innerspring  mattress 
and  spring  seat,  by  Carolina  Upholstery  Co.,  High  Point. 

cers  compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

When  Carolina  Upholstering  Co.  started  in  busi- 
ness it  had  a  paid-in  capital  of  $1,650,  operating  with 
six  or  eight  employees  in  a  rented  building  containing 
about  3000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  At  present  the 
company  has  more  than  2000  accounts  with  annual 
sales  ranging  from  $650,000  to  $900,000  and  has  a 
floor  space  of  63,000  square  feet.  The  firm  employs 
60  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  approxi- 
mately $140,000. 

Carolina  Upholstering  Co.  produces  living  room 
furniture  in  all  types  and  at  popular  prices,  includ- 
ing sofa  beds,  hide-away  beds,  ottomans,  chairs  and 
platform  rockers,  produced  largely  from  oak,  mahog- 
any, gum  and  poplar.  From  earlier  production  of 
Borax  and  Period  types,  the  firm  has  been  shifting 
more  to  Modern  furniture,  the  bulk  of  its  products 
now  being  in  this  type. 

Carolina  Upholstering  Co.  distributes  its  products 
over  about  10  states,  largely  in  the  southeastern  area. 
The  firm  has  eight  salesmen  in  the  area  and  operates 
its  own  fleet  of  trucks  in  delivering  its  products.  Per- 
manent display  space  is  maintained  in  High  Point 
and  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

EELIABLE  MFG.  CO. 

Reliable  Manufacturing  Co.,  1917  Tate  Street, 
High  Point,  was  organized  in  1940  by  C.  J.  Lambeth 
as  individual  owner.  In  1947  the  company  was  in- 
corporated with  C.  J.  Lambeth  as  president,  Mrs. 
Annie  Lee  Lambeth,  his  wife,  as  secretary-treasurer, 
and  C.  S.  Lambeth,  his  son,  as  vice-president  and 
general  manager.  President  Lambeth  is  not  now 
active  in  the  firm  due  to  the  condition  of  his  health. 

Reliable  Manufacturing  Co.  has  an  authorized  cap- 
ital stock  of  $100,000.  Its  plant  equipment  and  sup- 
jplies  today  have  a  valuation  of  approximately  $275,- 


Regency  sofa  produced  by  Reliable  Manufacturing  Co., 
High  Point. 


OTHER  GUILFORD  FIRMS 

High  Point 

Carolina  Seating  Co.,  Vance  St. 

Englander  Co.,  Inc.,  The,  30  9  E.  Thomas  St. 

National  Springs  Corp.,  401  E.  Green  St. 

Talmar-Jamestown  Co.,  The,  S.  Main  St. 

American  Upholstery  Co.,  Inc.,  1517  S.  Main  St. 

Art  Chair,  Inc.,  123  W.  Chester  Dr. 

Auman  Mfg.  Co.,  527  S.  Hamilton  St. 

B.  &  B.  Upholstery  Co.,  Route  4 

B.  &  W.  Frame  Works,  Prospect  St. 

B.  &  W.  Upholstering,  Inc.,  311  E.  Green  St. 

Beauchamp,  Inc.,  2427  English  St. 

Biltrite  Upholstering  Co.,  Reed  St. 

Boulding  Upholstery  Co. 

Carolina  Master  Craftsman,  Inc.,  21 1  Roy  St. 

Carrick  Mfg.  Co.,  1309  Tryon  St. 

Central  Upholstery,  Inc.,  216  Wise  St. 

Colonial  Furn.  Co.,  5  28  S.  Hamilton  St. 

Davis  Upholstery  Co.,  115  E.  Davis  St. 

Dinette  Parts  Mfg.  Co.,  240  W.  Russell  St. 

Eastern  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Prospect  St.  Ext. 

Fagg  Upholstery  Co.,  812  Mangum  St. 

Frye  Mfg.  Co. 

Garner  Upholstery  Co.,  30  0  0  S.  Main  St.  Ext. 

Glenola  Frame  Works,  Inc.,  Asheboro  Highway,  Rt.  3 

Guilford  Parlor  Co.,  40  6  Tate  St. 

Hawks  Upholstery  Co.,  Centennial  Ave.  Ext. 

Henderson  &  Mooney  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  19  24  Kivett  Dr. 

High  Mfg.  Co.,  2  600  English  St. 

Hodgin  Turning  &  Carving  Works,  Hodgin  St. 

Holton  &  Son  Mfg.  Co.,  615  E.  Green  St. 

James  Mfg.  Co.,  Burton  St.  Ext. 

Johnson  Frame  Co.,  Inc.,  English  St.  Ext. 

Junior  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Hood  St. 

Kee  Mfg.  Co.,  13  28  Potts  St. 

Kirkman  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  70  9  W.  Green  St. 

McGhee  Upholstering  Co.,  Inc.,  English  St.  Ext. 

Modern  Upholstering  Co.,  Greensboro  Rd. 

Quality  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  503  W.  High  St. 

Rabhan  Mfg.  Co.,  410  E.  Russell  St. 

Security  Upholstering  Co.,  431  S.  Hamilton  St. 

Tar  Heel  Upholstery  Co.,  110  Springdale  Ave. 

Thomas  Furniture  Co. 

Triangle  Mfg.  Co.,  615  E.  Green  St. 

Triangle  Upholstery  Co.,  717  S.  Hamilton  St. 

Walker  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  307  W.  Green  St. 

White,  P.  E.  &  Son  Chair  Co.,  1036  Fairfield  Rd. 

Wright  Frame  Works,  R.  F.  D. 

Young's,  Inc.,  Kivett  Dr. 

Greensboro 
Allen  Cabinet  Works,  Inc.,  101  Dockery  St. 
Beaman's,  Inc.,  1060  Battleground  Ave. 
Benbow  Reproductions,  Inc.,  Friendly  Rd. 
Better  Built  Wood  Products  Co.,  1904  Sullivan  St. 
Builders  Products  Co.,  1648  Sullivan  St. 
Dixie  Bedding  Co.,  Inc.,  1931  Freeman  Mill  Rd. 
Greensboro  Mattress  Co.,  3201  Church  St. 
Guilford  Industries  for  the  Blind,  920  W.  Lee  St. 
Kelly  Furniture  Co. 

Southland  Wood  Products  Co.,  Inc.,  1707  Gatewood  Ave. 
Spence  Furniture  Co.,  Spring  Garden  &  Oakland  Sts. 
Westwarren  Mfg.  Co.,  22  3  2  Westbrook  St. 
Crouch  Mfg.  Co.,  Jamestown 
Old  Mill  Mfg.  Co.,  Pleasant  Garden 


000.  Annual  sales  have  developed  until  they  now 
reach  around  $1,250,000.  The  plant  occupies  65,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs  from  100  to 
110  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging  around 
$200,000. 

This  firm  produces  the  large  overstuffed  Borax  line 
in  three  piece  living  room  suites,  sofa  beds,  hide-away 
beds  and  occasional  chairs.  It  produces  promotional 
lines  of  products  at  medium  prices,  all  frames  of  solid 
oak  and  all  materials  used  are  bought  within  a  radius 
of  50  miles  of  the  plant. 

All  Reliable  products  are  distributed  through  unit 
and  chain  furniture  stores  in  the  East,  eight  sales- 


PAGE  22 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


SYLVAN IAACQU I RIES  HIGH  POINT 
PLANT  TO  PRODUCE  T/V  CABINETS 

Sylvania  Electric  Products,  Inc.,  with  probably  50  plants  in 
the  United  States  and  Canada  manufacturing  lighting  fixtures, 
fluorescent  tubes,  light  bulbs,  photo  lamps,  radio  tubes,  picture 
tubes,  electronic  products  and  radio  and  television  sets,  has 
purchased  the  former  Strickland  Furniture  Co.  plant  in  High 
Point  for  approximately  $450,000  and  expects  to  begin  the 
manufacture  of  television  cabinets  in  March. 

Information  from  R.  W.  Brooks,  Sylvania  personnel  super- 
visor, and  other  sources  indicate  that  the  plant  will  start 
operation  with  about  150  workers  and  will  build  up  the  plant 
gradually  as  demand  increases.  The  plant  contains  55,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space  on  a  10%  acre  site  with  private  rail- 
road side  track.  The  television  cabinets  to  be  produced  will 
be  shipped  to  Buffalo,  New  York,  headquarters  for  the  radio 
and  television  division,  where  television  sets  will  be  assembled. 
Intimations  are,  however,  that  in  the  future  the  firm  will 
transfer  this  assembly  operation  to  the  plant  purchased  in 
High  Point. 

Sylvania,  established  in  1901,  started  the  manufacture  of 
television  sets  about  three  years  ago,  sets  which  are  now  among 
the  most  popular  on  the  market.  Up  to  now  the  firm  has  pur- 
chased its  television  cabinets  from  other  manufacturers  but 
plans  to  produce  its  own  cabinets  in  the  High  Point  plant.  This 
will  be  the  only  plant  manufacturing  these  cabinets. 

If  in  the  future  Sylvania  Electric  Products  moves  its  entire 
television  assembly  operation  to  the  Hisch  Point  plant,  it  is 
expected  that  several  hundred  workers  will  be  employed  finally. 
When  the  firm  begins  its  production  of  cabinets,  expected  in 
March,  with  a  production  force  of  around  150,  this  will  give 
employment  to  practically  all  of  the  surplus  furniture  workers 
now  living  in  the  High  Point  area.  Officials  of  the  company 
were  in  High  Point  early  in  February  with  a  staff  of  workers 
cleaning  up  the  plant  and  installing  machinery  and  equipment. 
— Data  from  Ralph  E.  Miller,  Manager,  High  Point  Employ- 
ment Office. 

men  covering  the  territory.  The  firm  operates  a  fleet 
of  seven  trucks  in  delivering  its  products  to  purchas- 
ers. Permanent  displays  of  Reliable  products  are 
maintained  in  High  Point  and  New  York. 

FOUNDERS  FURNITURE 

(Pleasant  Garden) 
Founders  Furniture,  Pleasant  Garden,  almost  un- 
der the  shadow  of  the  huge  High  Point  furniture  in- 
dustry, was  organized  in  1943  as  the  P.  G.  Novelty 
Works  by  Elliott  S.  Wood  and  John  R.  Miller  as  a 
partnership.  In  1947  E.  K.  Thrower  bought  into 
the  industry  and  the  name  was  changed  to  the  pres- 
ent name.  In  June,  1951,  the  partnership  shifted 
and  since  then  the  three  partners  have  been  Mr. 


Thrower,  general  manager,  John  R.  Miller  (inact- 
ive), and  Wayne  Davis,  plant  superintendent. 

The  plant  has  been  completely  modernized  and  the 
size  doubled  in  1950,  giving  present  floor  space  of 
30,000  square  feet.  The  firm  employs  65  to  70  work- 
ers with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $125,000. 

Principal  production  of  Founders  Furniture  is 
tables,  but  it  has  recently  been  engaged  in  producing 
a  coordinated  bedroom  and  dining  room  group.  These 
quality  products  are  produced  largely  from  Appa- 
lachian white  oak  and  Philippine  mahogany.  Also 
a  recent  line  of  knotty  pine  case  goods  products  is 
proving  popular. 

Founders  Furniture  is  distributed  largely  to  de- 
partment stores,  14  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Per- 
manent displays  of  the  moderate  priced  tables  and 
chests  are  maintained  in  Chicago  and  High  Point. 

MONARCH  FURNITURE  CO. 

Monarch  Furniture  Co., 
Inc.,  311  E.  Green  St.,  High 
Point,  was  organized  in 
1946  by  Mose  Sammet  as 
individual  owner.  In  1949 
the  firm  was  incorporated 
with  Mose  Sammet,  presi- 
dent and  treasurer;  H.  M. 
Gutterman,  vice-president 
and  general  manager;  T.  O. 
Gray,  vice-president,  and 
Mrs.  Elsie  Sammet,  secre- 
tary. These  officers  com- 
pose the  Board  of  Directors. 

Monarch  Furniture  Co. 
has  an  authorized  capital 
stock  of  $100,000.  Annual 
sales  now  reach  approxi- 
mately $400,000  and  around 
50  workers  are  employed 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $125,000.  The 
firm  utilizes  27,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  This 
firm  produces  office  upholstered  chairs  and  home  up- 
holstered chairs  and  sofas.  It  makes  a  specialty  of 
top  grain  leather  coverings  but  also  uses  plastic  and 
cloth  coverings.  Products  are  sold  nationwide,  10 
salesmen  covering  the  area.  A  special  line  of  prod- 
ucts is  manufactured  and  is  handled  exclusively  by 
a  New  York  jobbing  firm.  Permanent  displays  are 
maintained  in  New  York  City. 


Genuine  top  grain  leather 

chair,   solid  mahogany   ex- 

posed  parts,  by  Monarch 

Furniture  Co.,  High  Point. 


Thomasville  Famous  as  World  Leader  in  Chair  Production 


Thomasville,  with  a  huge  chair  as  the  symbol  of 
its  principal  industry,  will  celebrate  this  fall  its 
100th  anniversary  as  a  community.  Even  though 
cabinet  shops  were  undoubtedly  in  operation  from 
the  early  days  of  the  town,  available  records  indicate 
that  the  first  chair  factory  was  actually  started  in 
1865.  The  founder  was  D.  S.  Westmoreland,  who 
came  from  Stokes  County  and  who  evidently  was 
influenced  probably  indirectly  by  the  activities  of 
Michael  Healen,  famous  furniture  producer  who  set- 
tled in  Stokes  County  in  1792. 

Mr.  Westmoreland  had  his  shop  in  his  yard  on 
Randolph  Street,  employing  10  or  12  workers  and 
making  two  or  three  dozen  chairs  daily.  In  1879 
Mr.  Westmoreland  built  a  larger  factory  on  the  pres- 


ent site  of  the  Wall  Box  Co.  In  this  plant  he  em 
ployed  about  25  workers  and  produced  oak  and  hick- 
ory rockers,  arm  chairs,  and  "ladies'  "  chairs,  all 
hand  turned.  After  his  death  in  1891,  his  sons  con 
tinued  to  operate  the  plant  until  it  burned  in  1897. 
(One  of  these  sons,  Emanuel  F.  Westmoreland,  90, 
died  in  Thomasville  February  2,  1952.)  In  1898  the 
Standard  Chair  Co.  was  started  by  Col.  Frank  S. 
Lambeth  and  continues  as  an  important  industry, 
now  operated  by  grandsons  of  the  founder. 

Within  the  next  few  years  several  furniture  plants 
were  in  operation  in  Thomasville.  Among  these  was 
the  Thomasville  Chair  Co.,  started  in  1904  by  G.  A.' 
Allison  and  bought  in  1907  by  T.  J.  and  C.  F.  Finch 
This  firm,  long  known  as  the  largest  chair  factor} 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  23 


ii 


THE  CHAIR  OF  THOMASVILLE 


11 


"The  Chair  of  Thomasville"  has  long  been  the  symbol  of 
the  principal  industry  in  the  City  of  Thomasville.  The  first 
chair,  located  in  the  center  of  the  community  between  the 
railroad  and  the  main  street,  was  erected  in  September,  1922. 

Because  of  deteriora- 
tion, this  chair  was  re- 
moved in  the  1935-36 
period  and  in  1949  the 
construction  of  a  larger 
and  a  more  permanent 
chair  was  begun  and  has 
been  completed. 

The  first  chair  con- 
tained enough  lumber  to 
manufacture  100  ordi- 
nary chairs.  It  was  13 
feet  high,  with  the  seat 
six  feet  above  the  foun- 
dation; front  legs  were 
six  feet  high,  six  feet 
apart  in  the  front  and 
six  and  one-half  feet 
apart  in  the  back.  Con- 
struction of  this  chair  required  three  men  working  10  hours 
a  day  for  one  week  in  the  plant  of  the  Thomasville  Chair  Co. 
Expense  of  making  this  chair  was  borne  by  Col.  Frank  S. 
Lambeth,  secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  Standard  Chair  Co., 
and  Charles  F.  Finch,  vice-president  and  manager  of  the  Thom- 
asville Chair  Co. 

The  new  chair  of  steel  and  concrete  is  an  exact  duplication 
of  the  original  Duncan  Phyfe  as  displayed  in  Washington  and 
is  built  six  times  as  large  as  the  original  in  all  proportions. 
The  back  legs  are  18  feet  high  and  the  front  legs  are  nine  feet 
high;  the  front  legs  are  9  3/4ths.  feet  apart  and  the  back  legs 
are  10  %  feet  apart.  The  chair  is  built  on  four  steel  and  con- 
crete pedestals  two  feet  by  four  feet  and  12  feet  from  the 
ground.  Around  these  pedestals  is  built  a  base  22  feet  square 
with  concave  corners;  16  inch  solid  brick  wall  veneered  with 
eight  inch  limestone  blocks,  with  carving  and  molding  and 
around  the  top  are  eight  carved  eagles,  one  in  the  center  of 
each  of  the  four  sides  and  one  in  the  center  of  each  of  the  con- 
cave corners. 

This  new  chair  was  built  by  a  local  commercial  artist  and 
one  full-time  and  one  part-time  helper.  It  is  hand  molded 
around  a  steel  frame  with  a  mixture  of  concrete  and  granite 
dust,  with  openings  to  fill  the  inside,  thus  making  a  solid 
structure.  The  time  required  for  construction  was  approxi- 
mately ten  months.  This  new  project,  supervised  by  the  Thom- 
asville Chamber  of  Commerce,  was  made  possible  by  the  coop- 
eration of  the  city,  industry,  local  business  firms  and  individual 
citizens. 

On  the  floor  of  the  base  is  a  bronze  plaque  bearing  the  fol- 
lowing inscription: 

"The  Chair"  of  Thomasville — The  Chair  is  an  exemplar 
and  an  inspiration  for  the  future  generations  to  emu- 
late and  perpetuate  the  achievements  of  our  time-hon- 
ored furniture  designers  and  craftsmen.  .  .  .  The  orig- 
inal chair  was  the  creation  of  the  famous  American 
designer,  Duncan  Phyfe. 

1950 
Thomas  Johnson,  Del. 
James  Harvey,  Sculp. 


David  S.  Westmoreland,  who  started  the  first  chair  plant  in 
Thomasville  in  1865,  built  the  factory  shown  above  on  Ran- 
dolph Street  in  1879.  His  sons  continued  this  plant  after  his 
death  in  1891  until  it  burned  in  1897.  Part  of  small  building 
shown  at  left  ivas  the  office  of  the  first  Thomasville  newspaper. 
The  Thomasville  Times,  started  in  1887  by  John  T.  Westmore- 
land, brother  of  David.  Picture  owned  by  Mrs.  Nan  Stone  of 
Thomasville,  daughter  of  John  Westmoreland. 

in  the  country,  purchased  many  of  the  Thomasville 
plants  in  the  succeeding  years  and  is  still  operated 
by  sons  and  grandsons  of  the  original  Finch  pur- 
chasers. Among  the  earlier  plants  bought  by  this 
firm  were  the  Bard  Lumber  Co.  plant,  the  Cramer 
plant  and  the  Williams-Nottis  plant.  Another  earlier 
plant  was  the  Thomasville  Furniture  Co.,  established 
in  1898. 

Thomasville,  a  listing  shows,  has  15  furniture 
plants,  12  of  which  have  eight  or  more  employees 
and  are  thus  subject  to  the  Employment  Security 
Law.  These  12,  the  Employment  Security  Commis- 
sion records  show,  had  in  1950  average  monthlv  em- 
ployment of  3,171  with  a  1950  payroll  of  $6,726,807. 
Incidentally,  Davivdson  County  had  a  larger  number 
of  employees  and  a  larger  payroll  than  did  Guilford 
County,  in  which  High  Point  is  located. 

THOMASVILLE  CHAIR  CO. 

A  visit  was  made  to  this  firm,  information  secured, 
an  article  written  and  submitted  for  approval ;  omit- 
ted at  the  request  of  the  management. 

STANDARD  CHAIR  CO. 

Standard  Chair  Co.,  Thomasville,  was  organized 
in  1898  by  Col.  Frank  Lambeth  and  has  remained  in 
the  Lambeth  family  during  the  53  years  of  its  opera- 
tion, now  continued  by  third  generation  Lambeths. 
Col.  Lambeth's  brother,  John  Lambeth,  was  a  part- 
ner in  the  business  for  a  short  time  after  its  organ- 
ization. In  1901  the  firm  was  incorporated  with  an 
authorized  capital  stock  of  $100,000  which  remains 
today  the  same  as  in  the  original  charter.  Col.  Lam- 
beth continued  to  operate  and  develop  this  small  in- 
dustry for  almost  30  years,  bringing  it  up  to  a  place 
of  importance  in  the  community.  He  retired  in  1927 
and  died  two  years  later. 


Composite  picture  of  the  far-flung  Thomasville  Chair  Co.  with  Sl1^  acres  under  roof. 


PAGE  24 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring, 


Following  Col.  Lambeth's  retirement  in  1927  his 
two  sons  took  over  and  operated  the  industry  for  20 
years.  Charles  Lambeth  succeeded  him  as  secretary- 
treasurer  of  the  firm,  handling  sales  and  correspond- 
ence. James  E.  Lambeth  became  president  and  han- 
dled the  plant  and  production.  Both  continued  in 
these  positions  until  their  deaths  in  1947.  At  that 
time  James  E.  Lambeth,  Jr.,  became  secretary-treas- 
urer and  has  since  served  in  the  capacity  as  general 
manager.  His  brother,  Frank  S.  Lambeth  became 
president,  but  has  been  relatively  inactive  in  this 
firm,  devoting  most  of  his  time  to  the  operation  of  his 
radio  station  WMFR  in  High  Point.  Other  members 
of  the  Lambeth  family  own  smaller  amounts  of  the 
stock  in  the  corporation. 

Even  with  its  continued  small  capitalization  Stan- 
dard Chair  Co.  now  has  sales  in  excess  of  $1,000,000 
a  year.  Recently  the  firm  has  installed  new  equip- 
ment costing  $125,000.  The  capacity  of  the  plant 
has  been  doubled  in  the  last  decade.  The  five  plants 
owned  by  the  firm  have  a  combined  floor  space  of 
130,000  square  feet.  The  firm  employs  approxi- 
mately 225  workers,  the  annual  payroll  amounting 
to  around  $360,000.  Probably  half  of  the  employees 
have  worked  for  the  firm  for  10  years  or  more,  while 
a  sizable  number  have  reached  or  exceeded  20  years 
of  service. 

The  company  has  a  comprehensive  insurance  pol- 
icy covering  life,  health,  accident,  hospital  and  surgi- 
cal costs ;  one  half  of  the  premium  for  it  is  paid  by 
the  employees. 

Regular  production  of  the  Standard  Chair  Co.  in- 
cludes cricket  chairs,  (boudoir)  upholstered  chairs, 
rockers,  platform  rockers  and  such  novelty  furniture 
as  end  tables,  side  tables  and  telephone  benches.  The 
firm  has  a  large  order  for  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment, including  desks,  tablet  arm  chairs  and  other 
items  which  embraces  approximately  50%  of  pres- 
ent production. 

The  Standard  Chair  Co.  covers  the  entire  nation 
in  its  sales  and  has  20  salesmen  covering  the  area. 
Permanent  displays  are  maintained  at  the  principal 
furniture  markets  in  the  nation. 

J.  E.  Lambeth,  Jr.,  who  operates  Standard  Chair 
Co.,  is  also  president  of  Erwin-Lambeth,  Inc.,  of 
which  his  wife,  Mrs.  Katherine  C.  Lambeth,  is  secre- 
tary-treasurer and  general  manager. 

THOMASVILLE  FURNITURE  CORP. 

Thomasville  Furniture  Corp.,  Thomasville,  is  one 
of  the  few  firms  in  the  southeast  which  devotes  prac- 
tically all  of  its  time  to  the  production  of  television 
cabinets.  This  firm  has  been  in  operation  for  close 
to  50  years  and  was  owned  until  about  five  years  ago 

by  Thomasville  people.  The 
new  firm  was  organized  and 
bought  the  plant  in  1946 
and  has  developed  the  in- 
dustry to  the  point  of  pro- 
ducing approximately  600 
radio  and  television  cabi- 
nets a  day. 

Thomasville    Furniture 
Corp.    is    a    subsidiary    of 
Capehart-Farnsworth  Tele- 
vision Corp.  and  Radio  and 
Brunswick  model  decorated      TpWi^irm    Tnr     whiVVi  nwnc 
television  cabinet  by  Thorn-      ^       l^i  in(T'  Y     S 
asville  Furniture  Corp.,         75%    01  the  stock.     The  re- 
Thomasviiie.  maining  25%  is  owned  by 


The  Pamanuse,  a  Chippen- 
dale model  television  cabi- 
net by  Thomasville  Furni- 
ture Corp.,  Thomasville. 


other  television  firms.  Cape- 
hart  quality  cabinets,  form- 
erly built  at  Fort  Wayne, 
Ind.,  have  been  built  in  the 
Thomasville  plant  since 
1947.  "Brunswick"  all  qual- 
ity cabinets  are  manufac- 
tured for  Radio  and  Tele- 
vision, Inc.,  and  all  have 
decorative  designs.  All  ra- 
dio combination  and  tele- 
vision cabinets  are  made  of 
mahogany  and  all  sizes  are 
produced. 

This  firm  employs  approx- 
imately 300  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  in 
the  neighborhood  of  $600,000.  The  plant  contains 
92,300  square  feet.  Employees  are  trained  in  this 
new  work  in  the  plant  and  half  of  those  employed 
have  been  in  furniture  for  20  years  or  more.  The 
firm  pays  all  of  the  cost  of  a  comprehensive  insurance 
policy,  covering  life,  health,  accident,  hospital  and 
medical  costs. 

In  addition  to  its  radio  combination  and  television 
cabinets  the  Thomasville  Furniture  Corp.  is  now  fill- 
ing a  government  contract  for  3,000  desks,  produc- 
ing approximately  100  of  these  desks  each  day.  Pre- 
viously this  firm  has  filled  government  contracts  for 
desks. 

R.  C.  Jenkins,  vice-president  and  general  manager 
of  the  organization  and  Ralph  Rains,  acting  comp- 
troller, are  the  only  two  Thomasville  officers.  Henry 
Roemer,  New  York,  its  president,  is  also  vice-presi- 
dent of  the  International  Telephone  and  Telegraph 
Co.  Most  of  the  other  officials  and  directors  live  in 
New  York  and  are  officials  of  other  large  communi- 
cations organizations. 

Mr.  Jenkins  was  manager  of  manufacture  for  the 
Capehart  organization  for  10  years  and  was  also 
manager  of  the  radio  division  of  the  General  Elec- 
tric Co.  for  10  years  prior  to  moving  to  Thomasville 
to  take  over  the  management  and  operation  of  the 
Thomasville  Furniture  Co.  when  it  was  reorganized 
in  1946. 

COMMERCIAL  CARVUYG  CO. 

Commercial  Carving  Co.,  Thomasville,  was  organ- 
ized by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  L.  L.  Rothrock  and  started 
business  in  1943  on  a  small  scale.  Meeting  with 
immediate  success  this  firm  was  incorporated  in  1947 
with  L.  L.  Rothrock  as  president  and  treasurer,  Mrs. 
Vonnie  C.  Rothrock,  his  wife,  vice-president  and  sec- 
retary, and  Mrs.  Blanche  Rothrock  Fritts,  his  sister, 
as  an  additional  member  of  the  Board  of  Directors. 
Authorized  capital  stock  is  $100,000. 

Principal  part  of  the  present  plant  was  erected  in 
1944-45  and  additions  have  brought  the  plant  equip- 
ment and  stock  to  a  valuation  of  approximately  $225,- 
000.  The  plant  contains  about  35,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space  and  approximately  110  workers  are  em- 
ployed with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $240,000. 

Commercial  Carving  Co.  won  distinction  two  or 
three  years  ago  by  winning  first  place  in  North  Caro- 
lina and  second  place  in  the  nation  in  percentage  of 
disabled  veterans  employed  in  the  plant.  The  firm 
still  employs  60  veterans,  30%  of  whom  are  dis- 
abled and  especially  screened  and  selected  to  handle 
jobs  in  which  their  disabilities  do  not  hinder  opera- 
tions.    The  firm  has  a  staff  of  Polish  hand  carvers 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  IS 


who  are  specialists  in  carving  models  for  the  decora- 
tions and  other  special  decorative  parts  of  all  types 
of  furniture. 

This  firm  manufactures  decorations  for  60%  of 
the  furniture  trade  in  the  South.  These  decorations 
include  specially  carved  chair  backs,  posts,  mirror 
crowns,  feet  for  living  room  and  parlor  furniture 
and  any  other  types  of  carving  needed  and  desired 
for  the  furniture  trade.  Most  of  the  woods  used  are 
mahogany,  gum  and  poplar,  with  smaller  quantities 
of  maple  and  walnut  and  any  other  types  of  woods 
that  the  trade  requires. 

All  carvings  are  done  by  hand  and  then  hand 
pieces  are  used  as  patterns  in  machine  set  up  and 
adjusted  for  multiple  carving,  a  dozen  or  more  pieces 
being  produced  at  the  same  time.  This  firm  supplies 
carvings  for  practically  all  furniture  plants  in  the 
South  which  do  not  have  their  own  carving  equip- 
ment. Products  of  the  plant  are  displayed  perma- 
nently in  High  Point. 

THOMASVILLE  UPHOLSTERING  CO. 

The  Thomasville  Upholstering  Co.,  Thomasville, 
was  started  as  a  result  of  the  desire  of  H.  C.  Edinger 
to  produce  wooden  furniture,  beginning  with  the 
lowly  footstool.  In  1932  Mr.  Edinger  started  the 
Furniture  Novelty  Co.  as  individual  owner,  produc- 
ing various  items  of  novelty  furniture  and  odd  chairs. 

In  1938  the  firm  was  reorganized  and  incorporated 
as  the  Thomasville  Upholstering  Co.,  with  members 
of  the  family  as  officers  and  directors.  Charles  C. 
Edinger,  son  of  the  founder,  is  president ;  H.  C.  Ed- 
inger, the  founder,  is  secretary-treasurer  and  gen- 
eral manager;  Mrs.  Kila  Edinger  Barnes,  daughter 
of  the  founder,  is  vice-president,  and  Mrs.  K.  C.  Reid 
and  Mrs.  H.  C.  Edinger,  daughter  and  wife  of  the 
founder,  respectively,  are  additional  directors.  The 
firm  has  an  authorized  capital  stock  of  $200,000.  In 
1945  a  new  and  completely  modern  plant  was  erected 
and  modern  machinery  was  installed.  The  plant  now 
covers  55,000  square  feet,  employs  about  65  workers 
and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $120,000. 
Annual  production  amounts  to  $800,000. 

Thomasville  Upholstering  Co.  manufactures  several 
types  of  upholstered  furniture  of  quality  and  medium 
grades.  Six  salesmen  represent  the  firm  in  about  10 
southeastern  states  over  which  the  bulk  of  the  firm's 
output  is  distributed. 

ERWIN-LAMBETH,  INC. 

Erwin-Lambeth,  Inc.,  Thomasville,  offers  definite 
proof  that  a  woman  can  have  both  a  career  and  a 
family.    This  firm  was  started  in  1946  as  a  partner- 


Recently  enlarged  plant  of  the  Thomasville 
Upholstering  Co.,  Thomasville. 

ship  entered  into  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  J.  E.  Lambeth,  Jr. 
Mrs.  Lambeth's  business  name  is  K.  C.  Lambeth. 

In  1947,  a  year  after  the  firm  started,  the  industry 
was  incorporated  (Erwin  is  Mr.  Lambeth's  middle 
name)  with  J.  E.  Lambeth,  Jr.,  as  president,  Mrs.  J. 
E.  Lambeth,  his  mother,  as  vice-president,  and  Mrs. 
K.  C.  Lambeth,  his  wife,  as  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager.  Mrs.  Lambeth,  the  former  Kath- 
erine  Covington,  daughter  of  the  late  Richard  D. 
Covington,  for  many  years  treasurer  of  the  Mills 
Home  at  Thomasville,  has  continued  to  operate  this 
industry  from  the  beginning  although  she  is  the 
mother  of  four  children,  three  sons  and  one  daugh- 
ter, one  of  which  was  born  since  the  business  started. 

The  Erwin-Lambeth  plant  is  one  of  the  most  mod- 
ern furniture  structures  in  the  nation,  a  one  story 
building  constructed  of  steel,  brick  and  concrete. 
The  original  building  erected  in  1946  was  80  x  400 
feet.  In  1950  a  200  foot  addition  was  constructed, 
making  the  plant  80  x  600  feet,  thus  giving  48,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space.  The  machinery  and  equip- 
ment are  thoroughly  modern  and  complete,  providing 
straight  line  mass  production. 

Production  of  the  Erwin-Lambeth  firm  exceeds 
$1,000,000  a  year.  It  employs  125  workers  with  an 
annual  payroll  of  approximately  $225,000.  Products 
include  the  top  grade  line  of  upholstered  chairs, 
sofas  and  novelty  tables  as  matching  pieces  for  the 
sofas  produced.  Products  are  distributed  nation 
wide. 

OTHER  THOMASVILLE  FIRMS 

Brookdale  Carving  Co.,  605  Hyde  St. 
Carolina  Seating  Co.,  Vance  St. 
Colonial  Mfg.  Co.,  829  Blair  St. 
Frank's  Novelty  Plant,  110  Moore  St. 
Glenda  Table  Co.,  Inc.,  18%  Peace  St. 
McMillan,  S.  F.,  &  Co.,  105  Julian  Ave. 
North  State  Mfg.  Co.,  90  0  Blair  St. 
Thomasville  Bedding  Co.,  201  Taylor  St. 
Thomasville  Cabinet  Works,  Julian  Ave.  Ext. 


Lexington,  Home  of  Large,  Small  Furniture,  Novelty  Plants 


Lexington,  through  the  years,  has  developed  into 
an  important  furniture  manufacturing  center,  con- 
taining a  list  of  18  plants  producing  both  regular  and 
novelty  lines  of  furniture.  Both  large  and  small 
plants  operate  in  this  progressive  Davidson  County 
seat. 

Employment  Security  Commission  records  show 
that  Lexington  has  14  plants  covered  by  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Law — with  eight  or  more  employees. 
In  the  covered  plants  a  monthly  average  of  1,775 
workers  were  employed  during  the  year  1950  and 


the  total  wages  of  all  these  firms  during  that  year 
amounted  to  $5,246,428,  which  is  only  about  $1,500,- 
000  less  than  the  payroll  of  its  neighbor,  Thomasville. 
These  figures  probably  mean  that  2000  or  more 
workers  are  employed  part  time  or  full  time  in  the 
Lexington  furniture  plants. 

DIXIE  FURNITURE  CO.,  INC. 
LINK-TAYLOR  FURNITURE  CO. 

Every  effort  was  made  to  secure  information  for 
articles  about  these  firms,  without  success. 


PAGE  26 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Modern  plant  of   United  Furniture  Corp.,  Lexington. 

UNITED  FURNITURE  CORP. 

United  Furniture  Corp.,  Lexington,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1936  by  B.  C.  Philpott,  an  expe- 
rienced furniture  man.  Mr.  Philpott  served  as  pres- 
ident of  the  firm  until  1947  when  he  became  chairman 
of  the  Board  of  Directors.  His  son,  H.  C.  Philpott, 
formerly  secretary-treasurer,  succeeded  him  as  pres- 
ident. Two  other  sons  are  officers,  J.  A.  Philpott, 
vice-president,  and  J.  R.  Philpott,  secretary-treas- 
urer. R.  L.  Myers  is  superintendent  of  manufacture. 
These  officers,  along  with  J.  V.  Moffitt,  Jr.,  C.  C. 
Wall  and  J.  A.  Messer,  Jr.,  form  the  Board  of  Direc- 
tors. 

United  produces  high  types  of  modern  bedroom 
furniture  and  ships  its  products  to  every  state  in  the 
nation.  Recently  this  firm  has  completed  a  thorough 
renovation  program,  installing  entirely  new  and 
modern  furniture  making  machinery.  A  splendid 
business  is  enjoyed  by  this  firm  which  employs  ap- 
proximately 400  workers.  (See  front  page  for  bed- 
room suite  finished  in  light  mahogany  color.) 

H.  C.  Philpott,  president  of  the  firm,  is  immediate 
past  president  of  the  Southern  Furniture  Manufac- 
turers Association  and  is  now  chairman  of  its  Board 
of  Directors.  He  has  written  an  article  on  the  fur- 
niture industry  in  North  Carolina  which  is  included 
in  this  issue. 

LEXINGTON  CHAIR  CO. 

Lexington  Chair  Co.,  Lexington,  changed  names 
several  times  before  it  reached  its  present  name  and 
new  ownership  in  1936.  The  plant  first  started  op- 
eration in  1895  as  the  Oneida  Chair  Co.  Later  it 
was  purchased  by  Charles  Hackney,  during  whose 
ownership  the  plant  burned  and  was  rebuilt,  reopen- 
ing and  operated  as  the  Hackney  Chair  Co.  until 
about  1930.  For  about  six  years  it  was  operated  by 
J.  T.  Hedrick  as  the  Lexington  Novelty  Co.  and  was 
purchased  in  1936  by  J.  0.  Burke  and  B.  H.  Thom- 
ason. 

The  plant  started  in  May,  1936,  under  the  corpora- 
tive name  of  Lexington  Chair  Co.  with  between  50 
and  60  employees.  At  present  an  average  of  from 
400  to  450  workers  are  employed  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll ranging  between  $1,000,000  and  $1,250,000. 
Present  officers  are  B.  H.  Thomason,  Sr.,  president; 
Mrs.  J.  O.  Burke,  vice-president,  and  J.  B.  Burke, 
secretary-treasurer  and  general  manager. 

Through  various  enlargements  and  expansions  the 
Lexington  Chair  Co.  buildings  now  contain  approxi- 
mately 175,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  including 
a  recently  completed  warehouse  containing  16,000 
square  feet.  Annual  sales  are  now  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  $4,000,000  and  the  firm's  products  are  sold 


Modern  blonde  gossip 
bench,  one  of  many  novelty 
items  produced  by  Lexing- 
ton Chair  Co.,  Lexington. 


throughout  the  United 
States  and  in  large  areas  in 
Canada,  a  sales  force  of 
about  50  covering  the  entire 
area. 

Lexington  Chair  Co.  has 
achieved  continuous  opera- 
tions with  practically  no 
loss  of  time  in  the  16  years. 
The  employer-employee  re- 
lationships in  the  plant 
have  been  unusually  fine 
and  cooperative.  One  rea- 
son for  this  is  that  the  firm 
operates  on  a  profit  shar- 
ing plan  agreement  by  which  the  plant's  employees 
receive  25%  of  the  gross  profits.  In  addition,  paid 
vacations  are  furnished  all  employees  with  the  re- 
quired length  of  service  of  one  week  at  Christmas 
and  one  week  during  the  summer.  Also  the  company 
pays  the  premiums  on  a  blanket  insurance  policy  for 
all  employees,  covering  life  and  hospitalization. 

Lexington  Chair  Co.  products  include  occasional 
chairs,  drop  leaf  and  console  extension,  occasional 
and  novelty  tables,  gossip  benches,  cocktail,  coffee 
and  lamp  tables  and  other  furniture  novelty  lines. 
Styles  include  18th  Century,  Provincial,  Modern  and 
casual  country  pine.  These  products  are  made  of 
veneers  and  selected  hardwoods,  materials  including 
mahogany,  cherry,  knotty  pine  and  oak  veneers. 

Lexington  Chair  Co.  maintains  a  New  York  office 
at  206  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York,  and  displays 
its  products  permanently  in  Chicago,  San  Francisco 
and  High  Point,  with  seasonal  shows  in  Boston,  and 
in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms  which  contain  between 
5,000  and  6,000  square  feet. 

HOOVER  CHAIR  CO. 

Hoover  Chair  Co.,  Lexington,  was  organized  in 
1903  as  the  Queen  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  in  Thomasville. 
The  organizers  were  Charles  M.  Hoover  and  his 
brother,  George  M.  Hoover.  The  firm  started  in  a 
small  plant  with  50  to  75  employees.  In  1915  the 
name  was  changed  to  Hoover  Chair  Co.  and  three 
years  later  the  Thomasville  plant  was  destroyed  by 
fire. 

Following  the  fire  the  Hoover  brothers  bought  its 


Junior  dining  room  furniture,  slightly  smaller  for  modern 
homes,  made  by  Hoover  Chair  Co.,  Lexington. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  17 


present  plant  from  the  Dixie  Furniture  Co.  in  Lex- 
ington in  1919  and  continued  the  manufacture  of 
mairs  exclusively  until  1928  when  dinette  furniture 
was  added.  Later  dining  room  furniture,  both  regu- 
ar  and  junior  (made  smaller  for  smaller  modern 
lomes)  was  added  and  gradually  became  important 
aarts  of  the  production.  Present  products  include 
Doth  regular  and  junior  dining  room  furniture  and 
mairs  and  dinette  suites.  In  1939  C.  M.  Hoover  and 
Charles  Hoover,  Jr.,  bought  the  G.  M.  Hoover  interest 
n  the  firm. 

Present  officers  are  Charles  Hoover,  in  the  firm 
since  1922,  who  became  president  following  his 
father's  death  in  1946 ;  James  B.  Hoover,  a  younger 
Drother  who  joined  the  firm  following  World  War  II, 
§3  secretary  and  treasurer;  Mrs.  Theresa  Hoover 
Harris,  a  sister,  is  vice-president  and  Charles  E.  Wil- 
iams  is  assistant  secretary  and  treasurer.  These 
Dfficers  are  also  the  directors  and  stockholders. 

Hoover  Chair  Co.  produces  both  period  furniture, 
including  18th  Century  mahogany  plywood  and  Mod- 
3rn  furniture  of  oak  and  mahogany,  both  solid  and 
veneer. 

Hoover  Chair  Co.  now  has  annual  sales  that  range 
oetween  $1,500,000  and  $2,000,000.  It  employs  from 
200  to  250  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  that 
ranges  between  $400,000  and  $500,000.  Present 
plant  space  is  120,000  square  feet,  approximately 
double,  by  enlargements  through  the  years,  since  the 
firm  began  its  operations  in  Lexington  in  1907. 

Hoover  products  are  sold  throughout  the  United 
States,  25  salesmen  covering  the  nation  and  selling 
to  chain,  department  and  unit  furniture  stores.  Per- 
manent displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago,  New 
York,  High  Point,  Los  Angeles  and  in  the  firm's  own 
factory  show  rooms. 

FRANKLIN  SHOCKEY  CO. 

Franklin  Shockey  Co.,  Lexington,  was  organized 
in  1941  by  Franklin  Shockey  and  George  H.  Ennis, 
the  latter  of  Rancho  Santa  Fe,  California,  as  a  part- 
nership. In  1941  the  company  was  reorganized  and 
incorporated  with  Franklin  Shockey  as  president 
and  general  manager  and  Mrs.  W.  P.  Shockey,  his 
mother,  as  vice-president.  The  authorized  capital 
stock  is  $100,000. 

Franklin  Shockey  Co.  has  developed  annual  sales 
in  excess  of  $1,000,000.  The  firm  has  floor  space  of 
ipproximately  48,000  square  feet,  employs  around 
140  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  about 
£250,000. 

The  firm  produces  correlated  groupings  of  bed- 
'oom,  dining  room  and  living  room  furniture,  pri- 
narily  of  the  rustic  types.  Sales  are  made  over  the 
mtire  United  States,  about  30  salesmen  covering  the 
lation. 

Permanent  displays  of  Franklin  Shockey  furniture 
ire  maintained  in  Chicago,  San  Francisco  and  High 
~oint  and  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

NOVELTY  FURNITURE  FIRMS 

Three  different  Lexington  men  rode  hobbies  until 
ach  developed  nice  small  remunerative  industries — 
manufacturing  novelty  furniture.  These  three  firms 
roduce  furniture  items  ranging  from  popular 
hrough  medium  and  quality  types  of  furniture  lines 
nd  all  have  become  successful  enterprises. 
Kirkman  Novelty  Furniture  Co. 

Kirkman  Novelty  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Lexington, 


Dining  room  suite,  including  Lazy  Susan  table,  sideboard  buf- 
fet, Captain's  chairs  and  China  hutch,  made  by 
Franklin  Shockey  Co.,  Lexington. 

was  organized  in  1941  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  T.  V.  Kirk- 
man, Sr.,  after  Mr.  Kirkman  had  been  with  the 
United  Furniture  Corporation  for  15  years  as  sup- 
erintendent and  part  of  the  time  as  secretary-treas- 
urer of  the  firm.  The  new  business  was  started  with 
six  employees. 

As  of  January  1,  1946,  this  firm  was  incorporated 
with  authorized  capital  stock  of  $100,000,  half  in 
preferred  and  half  in  common  stock.  The  three  fam- 
ily officers  of  the  corporation  are  T.  V.  Kirkman,  Sr., 
president;  Mrs.  T.  V.  Kirkman,  vice-president,  and 
T.  V.  Kirkman,  Jr.,  secretary-treasurer.  The  firm 
now  has  plant  and  equipment  valued  at  around  $258,- 
000,  has  40,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs 
55  workers. 

The  Kirkman  firm  produces  living  room  tables  of 
mahogany  and  plywood  in  the  medium  priced  field. 
Sales  are  made  all  over  the  United  States,  in  Alaska 
and  part  of  Canada.  For  some  time  the  Kirkmans 
have  been  producing  tables  for  hospitals,  nurses' 
homes  and  officials'  headquarters  for  the  United 
States  Government. 

Model  Furniture  Co. 

Before  the  Model  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Lexington, 
became  a  reality,  L.  M. 
Grimes,  Jr.,  followed  his 
hobby  in  his  home  wood- 
working shop  producing 
custom  made  furniture  of 
wood,  including  corner  cab- 
inets, cedar  chests  and  din- 
ing room  tables  and  side- 
boards. When  this  infant 
industry  got  out  of  hand  in 
1946,  Grimes  gave  it  a  name 
and  in  1950  incorporated  it 
as  the  Model  Furniture  Co. 

This,  too,  is  a  family  in- 
dustry with  L.  M.  Grimes, 
Sr.,  as  president,  John  G. 
Grimes,  vice-president,  and 
L.  M.  Grimes,  Jr.,  secre- 
tary-treasurer and  general 
manager.  The  firm  has  an 
authorized  capital  stock  of 

$100,000,  uses  34,000  square     THpU  Uer  taMe  made  by 
feet  of  floor  space,  employs         Model  Fumiture  Co., 
about  47  workers  and  has  Lexington. 


PAGE  28 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


annual  sales  that  approximate  $800,000. 

Model  now  produces  a  full  commercial  line  of  occa- 
sional tables,  novelties  and  dining  room  tables,  all 
of  mahogany  and  in  medium  and  high  priced  ranges. 
Permanent  exhibit  spaces  are  held  in  Chicago,  New 
York,  Los  Angeles  and  High  Point.  Furniture  is 
sold  in  all  48  states  and  in  Canada,  21  salesmen  cov- 
ering the  area,  one  of  them  in  Canada. 

Streetman  Novelty  Furniture  Co. 

Streetman  Novelty  Furniture  Co.,  Lexington,  was 
started  as  a  hobby  in  1943  by  J.  H.  Streetman,  who 
served  as  superintendent  for  the  Carolina  Panel  Co. 
for  17  years.  In  1945  Mr.  Streetman  left  this  com- 
pany to  devote  full  time  to  producing  furniture  nov- 
elties. He  now  employs  about  30  workers,  has  an 
annual  payroll  of  around  $55,000  and  has  an  annual 
business  of  approximately  $275,000.  His  plant  oc- 
cupies about  14,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 

Mr.  Streetman  produces  about  30  different  styles 
of  living  room  tables,  all  in  moderate  and  popular 


priced  ranges.     He  ships  his  products  to  all  of  the 
48  states. 

Peerless  Mattress  Co.,  S.  State  St.,  also  operates 
in  Lexington. 

DENTON 

Biltwell  Chair  and  Furniture  Co. 

Biltwell  Chair  and  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Denton, 
started  in  business  in  1925  with  Allen  L.  Penny  and 
M.  T.  Lambeth  as  the  principal  owners  and  opera- 
tors. In  1930  the  business  was  bought  by  new  own- 
ers who  compose  the  officers,  including  C.  L.  Kearns, 
president;  Mrs.  C.  L.  Kearns,  secretary-treasurer, 
and  H.  A.  Sexton,  vice-president,  with  M.  A.  Morris 
as  superintendent  of  the  plant.  Capital  and  reserve 
amount  to  approximately  $100,000. 

Plant  and  equipment  of  this  firm  have  a  valuation 
of  approximately  $50,000  and  from  85  to  100  work- 
ers are  employed.  The  equivalent  of  a  carload  of 
furniture  is  produced  each  working  day.  Principal 
products  of  the  firm  are  dinette  and  breakfast  suites 
(five  pieces)  and  other  chairs. 


Lenoir  Forging  Ahead  in  Quality- Variety  Furniture  Makin; 


Lenoir  has  been  a  furniture  manufacturing  center 
since  Colonial  days.  It  is  of  record  that  Henry  Payne 
operated  a  furniture  factory  in  Caldwell  County  at 
the  mouth  of  Little  River  before  the  Revolutionary 
War.  He  had  served  an  apprenticeship  in  Lincoln- 
ton  under  a  cabinet  maker  named  Houser  who  had 
learned  the  trade  in  South  Germany.  His  son,  Abner 
Payne,  later  produced  many  fine  pieces  of  furniture 
still  to  be  found  in  Caldwell  and  Catawba  Counties, 
and  descendants  are  still  among  leading  furniture 
producers  in  several  Piedmont  cities  and  towns. 

Through  the  years  the  furniture  industry  has  de- 
veloped and  increased  until  Lenoir,  including  several 
plants  built  around  the  municipality,  now  probably 
takes  first  place  in  furniture  manufacturing  in  North 
Carolina.  Employment  Security  Commission  rec- 
ords show  that  Caldwell  County  has  18  firms  which 
are  covered  by  the  Employment  Security  Law — hav- 
ing eight  or  more  employees.  These  firms  employed 
a  monthly  average  of  4,653  furniture  workers  in 
1950,  a  number  that  is  only  40  lower  than  is  shown 
for  Guilford  County  which  contains  several  small 
plants  in  Greensboro  and  other  towns  as  well  as  in 
High  Point.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  the  method 
of  reporting  includes  some  workers  in  other  counties 
employed  in  subsidiary  plants  of  Lenoir  firms. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  total  payrolls  of  cov- 
ered furniture  firms  in  Caldwell  County  in  1950 
amounted  to  $11,789,886,  which  is  $2,000  larger 
than  the  total  Guilford  County  furniture  payroll  for 
that  year.  Here,  too,  the  reporting  method  may 
make  a  difference  in  the  figures. 

Lenoir  started  and  other  far  western  North  Caro- 
lina towns  have  joined  with  holding  pre-season  mar- 
kets at  the  individual  furniture  plants.  These  sell- 
ing seasons  are  usually  held  in  late  October  or  early 
November  and  attract  hundreds  of  buyers  from 
many  of  the  larger  purchasing  units  throughout  the 
country. 

BROYHILL  FURNITURE  FACTORIES 

Broyhill  Furniture  Factories,  Lenoir,  is  the  man- 
agement and  sales  organization  marketing  the  output 


of  six  affiliated  Broyhill  furniture  manufacturing 
firms  and  as  many  subsidiary  and  supply  plants.  Tht 
six  furniture  factories  are  as  follows : 

Lenoir  Furniture  Corp.,  Lenoir,  manufacturers  o1 
bedroom  furniture  (occasionally  dining  room)  ;  Rich 
ard  Isaac,  general  superintendent. 

Lenoir  Chair  Co.  No.  1,  Lenoir,  makers  of  uphol 
stered  chairs  and  benches  for  bedroom  plants ;  R 
Maynard  Teague  and  R.  H.  Winkler,  superintendents 

Lenoir  Chair  Co.  No.  2,  Newton,  manufacturers  o: 
bedroom  furniture ;  Homer  Scruggs,  superintendent 
A.  F.  Clark,  general  superintendent. 

Otis  L.  Broyhill  Furniture  Co.,  Marion,  producer! 
of  bedroom  furniture ;  Frank  Jump,  superintendent 

Conover  Furniture  Co.,  Conover,  manufacturers  o 
dining  room  furniture  and  kneehole  desks ;  Clarena 
Canroberts,  Superintendent;  A.  F.  Clark,  gen.  supti 

Harper  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir,  producer  of  Tradi 
tional  bedroom  furniture  and  secretaries ;  Ray  Walk 
er,  superintendent;  Richard  Isaac,  general  supt. 

In  addition  to  these  furniture  plants,  the  subsid) 
iary  and  supply  plants  operated  by  the  Broyhill  orj 
ganization  include  Lenoir  Veneer  Co.,  Lenoir,  mak 
ing  rotary  veneers  and  crossbanding ;  National  Vej 
neer  Co.,  Lenoir  (part  interest) ,  making  rotary  vej 
neers  for  crossbanding;  United  Veneer  Co.,  Conovei 
matching  and  taping  veneer  faces  for  furniture  pre 
ducing  plants;  Lenoir  Furniture  Forwarding  Co 
Lenoir,    furniture    warehousing;    Allied    Furnitur! 
Co.,  Lenoir,  building  and  leasing;  Crating  Mill,  Le 
noir,  subsidiary  of  Lenoir  Furniture  Corp.,  makin! 
furniture  crating. 

These  six  furniture  plants  and  six  auxiliary  plant 
make  Broyhill  Furniture  Factories  one  of  the  larger 
furniture  manufacturing  organizations  in  the  Unite! 
States.  Sales  force  of  85  representatives  sells  fj 
more  than  15,000  stores  throughout  the  United  Stat* 
and  goods  are  also  shipped  to  Mexico  and  Hawaii. 

All  of  the  Broyhill  plants  are  equipped  with  mo( 
ern  buildings  and  machinery  for  high  speed  an 
quality  production.  Back  in  1935  Broyhill  plan' 
installed  overhead  chain  conveyors  to  speed  produ 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  29 


China  by  Broyhill. 


tion.  Other  equipment  includes  water-wash  spray 
booths,  hot  plate  presses,  automatic  steam  heated 
core  machines  and  other  high  speed  machinery.  Top 
quality  production  and  modern  equipment  permit  a 
line  range  of  furniture  from  low  to  medium  price. 

Each  plant  produces  sepa- 
rate lines  combining  to 
make  a  complete  furniture 
organization. 

T.  H.  Broyhill,  founder  of 
the  first  plant,  was  born  in 
rural  Wilkes  County  in 
1877.  With  limited  educa- 
tion he  engaged  in  farming, 
logging  and  merchandising. 
Acquiring  a  small  sawmill, 
he  cut  timbers  to  pay  his 
$2,000  share  of  the  original 
stock  of  the  Lenoir  Furni- 
ture Corp.  when  it  started 
in  1905.  In  1912  he  bought 
out  the  remaining  stock- 
holders and  started  this  ail- 
ing firm  on  its  successful 
career. 

Meanwhile,  J.  E.  Broyhill,  15  years  younger  than 
his  brother,  acquired  a  high  school  education  at 
Boone.  After  World  War  I  service,  he  became  an 
office  clerk  in  the  Lenoir  Furniture  Corp.,  later  mov- 
ing up  to  sales  manager.  In  1926  J.  E.  Broyhill 
started  a  period  of  expansion  equal  to  any  in  the 
furniture  industry  and  still  in  progress.  It  was  then 
that  he  began  making  3-piece  living  room  suites  in 
a  former  blacksmith  shop  in  Lenoir.  This  plant, 
today  Lenoir  Chair  Co.  No.  1,  produces  a  complete 
line  of  upholstered  lounges  and  occasional  chairs  and 
platform  rockers,  as  well  as  dining  room  chairs. 

These  brothers,  selling  their  lines  together,  bought 
controlling  interests  in  1929  in  Harper  Furniture 
Co.,  Lenoir,  one  of  the  oldest  furniture  organizations 
in  the  South.  This  plant,  started  in  1889,  still  pro- 
duces a  quality  line  of  mahogany  furniture,  including 
bedroom  groups,  secretaries  and  desks.  This  plant 
makes  the  top  quality  products  of  the  Broyhill  or- 
ganization in  the  medium  priced  field. 

Expansion  of  the  Broyhill  plants  continued.  The 
plant  at  Newton,  now  Lenoir  Chair  Co.  No.  2,  was 
purchased  in  1934  and  began  operation  in  1935.  In 
1941  the  Conover  Furniture  Co.,  Conover,  was  added 
to  the  list  and  in  the  same  year  the  McDowell  Furni- 
ture Co.,  Marion,  was  purchased  and  the  named 
changed  to  Otis  L.  Broyhill  Furniture  Co.  Veneer 
plants  and  other  auxiliary  units  were  added  as  the 
need  arose. 

Broyhill  has  put  up  new  and  enlarged  buildings 
for  all  of  the  plants  purchased  and  is  constantly  re- 
tooling and  reconditioning  to  bring  operations  up  to 
top  efficiency  and  quality.  Top  management  is  con- 
tinually adding  able  and  efficient  personnel  to  insure 
high  quality  production.  Aggressive  production  and 
sales  organizations  have  made  the  Broyhill  factories 
one  of  the  most  complete  and  thorough  furniture  or- 
ganizations in  the  entire  country. 

Harper  Furniture  Co. 

Harper  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir,  one  of  the  oldest 
furniture  firms  in  the  South,  became  a  part  of  the 
Broyhill  organization  in  1929.     The  original  firm 


was  a  partnership  organized  in  1889  by  G.  F.  Harper, 
J.  M.  Bernhardt  and  G.  L.  Bernhardt. 

This  firm  is  a  part  of  the  Broyhill  Furniture  Fac- 
tories, Lenoir,  with  T.  H.  Broyhill  as  president;  Vir- 
gil D.  Guire,  vice-president,  and  James  A.  Marshall, 
secretary  and  treasurer.  Ray  Walker  is  plant  super- 
intendent and  Richard  Isaac,  general  superintendent. 

Harper  Furniture  Co.  produces  quality  bedroom 
suites  and  secretaries.  The  plant  occupies  about 
200,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  including  condition- 
ing sheds  and  employs  about  345  workers.  Its  prod- 
ucts are  sold  nation-wide  through  Broyhill  Furn'ture 
Factories  and  are  displayed  at  several  of  the  lead^^ 
furniture  markets. 

Lenoir  Chair  Co. 

Lenoir  Chair  Co.,  Lenoir,  one  of  the  several  Broy- 
hill plants,  is  known  generally  as  Lenoir  Chair  No.  1. 
No.  2  is  located  in  Newton.  The  firm  employs  294 
workers  and  occupies  about  120,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space,  including  conditioning  sheds. 

J.  E.  Broyhill  is  president  and  treasurer  of  the 
firm ;  Sadie  L.  Broyhill,  vice-president,  and  E.  C.  Mc- 
Call,  secretary. 

The  plant  produces  a  complete  line  of  upholstered 
lounges  and  occasional  chairs  and  platform  rockers. 
Activities  are  divided  into  two  parts.  One  is  the 
plant  proper,  of  which  R.  H.  Winkler  is  superin- 
tendent, and  the  upholstering  department,  which  is 
under  the  supervision  of  R.  Maynard  Teague. 

Products  of  Lenoir  Chair  Co.  are  sold  on  a  nation- 
wide basis  through  the  sales  organization  of  Broyhill 
Furniture  Factories.  Displays  are  maintained  at 
several  of  the  leading  markets  in  the  nation. 

Lenoir  Furniture  Corp. 

Lenoir  Furniture  Corp.,  Lenoir,  was  approaching 
bankruptcy  in  1912  when  T.  H.  Broyhill  bought  out 
the  other  stockholders.  Today  it  is  one  of  the  largest 
producers  of  case  goods  in  the  country.  The  plant 
contains  523,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  em- 
ploys 511  workers. 

This  plant  produces  high  quality  Modern  bedroom 
groups.  It  is  equipped  with  modern  machinery  and 
methods,  including  cafeteria  service  for  employees. 

T.  H.  Broyhill  is  president  of  the  corporation. 
Other  officers  are  Otis  L.  Broyhill,  vice-president; 


Extensive  enlargement  of  Harper  Furniture  plant  in  Lenoir, 
one  of  the  Broyhill  units. 


page  30 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Lumber  going  through  the  cut-off  saws  in  the  Lenoir 
Furniture  Corp.  plant. 

J.  E.  Broyhill,  secretary;  R.  T.  Broyhill,  treasurer. 
Richard  Isaac  is  general  superintendent. 

KENT-COFFEY  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Kent-Coffey  Manufacturing  Co.  is  one  of  the  older, 
larger  and  more  successful  of  the  furniture  manu- 
facturing firms  in  Lenoir.  The  firm  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1907  by  F.  H.  Coffey  and  started 
on  the  site  of  an  old  veneer  plant.  Original  capital 
was  $33,800.  Original  officers  were  Dr.  A.  A.  Kent, 
president,  (inactive)  and  F.  H.  Coffey,  secretary- 
treasurer  and  general  manager.  In  1910  Mr.  Cof- 
fey was  elected  president,  serving  as  such  until  1943. 
He  represented  Caldwell  County  in  North  Carolina 
General  Assembly  at  one  time.  W.  L.  Minish  suc- 
ceeded Mr.  Coffey  in  1911  as  secretary-treasurer, 
serving  as  such  until  his  death  in  1937. 

Harold  F.  Coffey,  son  of  the  founder  who  had 
been  with  the  firm  since  1917,  was  elected  vice-presi- 
dent in  1918  and  was  elected  president  in  1943  to 
succeed  his  father,  still  serving  in  that  position.  D. 
Archie  Coffey,  another  son  who  joined  the  firm  in 
1923,  was  elected  vice-president  in  1925  and  has 
been  executive  vice-president  since  1943.  W.  Clyde 
Suddreth,  who  went  to  work  for  the  firm  in  1920, 
was  made  assistant  secretary-treasurer  in  1927  and 
became  secretary-treasurer  in  1937,  following  the 
death  of  Mr.  Minish.  W.  H.  Maynard,  also  an  old- 
timer  with  the  firm,  has  been  sales  manager  since 
1946. 

Kent-Coffey  manufactures  bedroom  furniture  of 
the  medium  to  better  grades  in  both  Modern  and 
Traditional  styles.  Annual  sales  are  in  excess  of 
$5,000,000,  products  going  to  every  one  of  the  48 
states  and  extensive  shipments  to  Canada,  Mexico 
and  Hawaii,  28  salesmen  covering  the  area. 

Kent-Coffey  plant  has  a  floor  space  of  8  81  acres. 
The  plant  has  been  rebuilt  and  modernized  and  mod- 
ern furniture  machinery  installed  during  the  past 
two  or  three  years.  In  this  process,  additions  were 
built,  giving  about  50,000  more  square  feet.  The 
plant  employs  over  500  workers  and  has  an  annual 
payroll  of  over  $1,500,000. 

In  addition  to  its  own  show  rooms  at  the  plant, 
Kent-Coffey  maintains  permanent  display  spaces  in 
Chicago,  New  York,  and  in  High  Point. 

SPAINHOUR  FURNITURE  CO. 

Spainhour  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  in  the  Joyceton 
community  near  Lenoir,  was  organized  in  1943  by 
W.  J.  Spainhour,  who,  as  individual  owner,  took  over 
the  patterns,  designs  and  other  equipment  formerly 
operated  by  the  Jennings  Furniture  Co.     The  firm 


was  incorporated  in  1945  with  W.  J.  Spainhour, 
president  and  general  manager;  A.  J.  Jones,  vice- 
president  (inactive),  and  B.  L.  Johnson,  secretary 
and  treasurer.  These  officers  and  W.  J.  Furbish, 
Atlanta,  Norman  Warner,  Asheville,  and  R.  W.  Buc- 
hanan, Selma,  Ala.,  form  the  Board  of  Directors. 

Spainhour  Furniture  Co.  has  an  authorized  capital 
stock  of  $200,000  with  $90,000  outstanding.  Annual 
sales  have  been  developed  to  around  $900,000.  The 
firm  occupies  a  floor  space  of  approximately  25,000 
square  feet  and  employs  130  workers  with  an  annual 
payroll  in  the  neighborhood  of  $260,000. 

Bedroom  and  dining  room  furniture  are  produced 
in  Early  American  and  Colonial  styles.  All  pieces 
are  of  solid  wood  made  largely  from  pine  and  maple. 

Spainhour  products  are  sold  over  the  entire  na- 
tion, 20  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Permanent  dis- 
plays are  maintained  in  Chicago. 

CALDWELL  FURNITURE  CO. 

Caldwell  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir,  was  organized  and 
incorporated  in  1909  by  a  group  of  a  dozen  or  more 
Lenoir  citizens  led  by  W.  J.  Lenoir.  Original  officers 
were  W.  J.  Lenoir,  president;  T.  H.  Broyhill,  vice- 
president,  and  L.  E.  Rabb,  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager,  a  position  he  held  until  his  death  in 
1929.  J.  H.  Beard,  who  had  started  early  with  the 
plant  and  came  up  through  the  ranks,  served  as  vice- 
president  and  general  manager  from  1936  to  1949. 

Present  officers  are  A.  L.  Moore,  president;  J.  M. 
Gossler,  vice-president  and  treasurer ;  J.  M.  Gossler, 
Jr.,  secretary  and  assistant  treasurer ;  John  R.  Beard, 
son  of  J.  H.  Beard,  general  manager  and  sales  man- 
ager, and  T.  H.  Shuford,  Jr.,  assistant  to  the  general 
manager. 

Caldwell  Furniture  Co.  manufactures  bedroom 
furniture  exclusively,  its  annual  sales  amounting  to 
$5,000,000.  The  firm  has  a  floor  space  of  400,000 
square  feet,  employs  approximately  500  workers  and 
has  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $1,500,000.  It  ope- 
rates its  own  veneer  mill  near  the  plant. 

Caldwell  Furniture  Co.  sells  its  products  through- 
out the  United  States,  20  salesmen  operating  in  the 
area.  It  maintains  permanent  show  rooms  in  New 
York,  Chicago  and  High  Point  and  in  its  own  show 
rooms  in  the  plant. 


Canopied  four-poster  bed,  by  Spainhour  Furniture  Co..  Lenoir. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  31 


Dining  room  suite  including  buffet,  table,  arm  chairs  and  side 
chairs,  produced  by  Bernhardt  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir. 

BERNHARDT  FURNITURE  CO. 

Bernhardt  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir,  was  organized  as 
the  Lenoir  Furniture  Factory  in  1889  by  J.  M.  Bern- 
hardt and  is  said  to  be  the  first  furniture  factory 
established  in  Lenoir,  the  second  west  of  High  Point 
and  the  third  started  in  the  entire  State.  Its  begin- 
ning was  very  modest,  the  plant  employing  only 
about  25  workers.  In  1909  the  plant  was  bought  and 
the  name  changed  to  Bernhardt  Manufacturing  Co., 
specializing  in  bedroom  furniture.  In  1925  the  plant 
divided  its  activities  beginning  the  production  of  din- 
ing room  furniture,  the  first  suites  of  which  were 
manufactured  on  chair  machinery.  The  plant  burn- 
ed in  1926  and  in  1927  a  thoroughly  modern  furni- 
ture plant  was  erected. 

The  firm  was  incorporated  in  1931  as  the  Bern- 
hardt Furniture  Co.,  with  J.  M.  Bernhardt  as  presi- 
dent; his  son,  George  H.  Bernhardt,  as  vice-presi- 
dent; another  son,  J.  C.  Bernhardt,  as  treasurer  and 
Henry  Wilson  who  married  a  daughter  of  the  presi- 
dent, as  secretary.  The  original  president  of  the 
firm,  J.  M.  Bernhardt,  died  in  1934  and  his  son,  G. 
H.  Bernhardt,  succeeded  him  as  president,  serving 
until  his  death  in  1947. 

J.  C.  Bernhardt,  former  treasurer  and  later  vice- 
president,  became  president  following  the  death  of 
his  brother  in  1947.  Other  officers  now  are  Mrs. 
George  H.  Bernhardt,  vice-president  and  assistant 
secretary  and  treasurer,  and  Mrs.  T.  Henry  Wilson, 
secretary  and  treasurer. 

Bernhardt  announces  that  it's  the  "Largest  Manu- 
facturer of  Dining  Room  Furniture  Exclusively  in 
the  World".  The  firm  produces  a  complete  line  of 
Eighteenth  Century,  Informal  Early  American  types 
and  a  modern  line  of  ranch  oak  groups  which  is  ad- 
vertised in  "Life  for  Young  Homemakers".  The  firm 
works  out  and  develops  its  own  designs. 

The  Bernhardt  plant,  entirely  modern  and  com- 
pletely conveyorized  for  mass  production,  is  a  large 
factory,  containing  about  325,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space,  and  employs  around  600  workers  with  an  an- 
nual payroll  of  approximately  $1,500,000.  Sales 
cover  the  entire  area  of  the  United  States,  parts  of 
Canada,  Mexico  and  Hawaii,  the  firm's  50  salesmen 
covering  the  entire  country. 

FAIRFIELD  CHAIR  CO. 

Fairfield  Chair  Co.,  located  in  the  Fairfield  sec- 
tion of  Lenoir,  was  organized  and  incorporated  in 


1921,  taking  over  the  plant  of  the  Ethel  Chair  Co., 
which  had  been  in  operation  since  1912.  J.  H.  Beall, 
Lenoir  bank  president,  is  president  of  the  company ; 
A.  G.  Foard  was  vice-president  until  his  death  in 
1943  when  he  was  succeeded  by  J.  A.  Marshall,  and 
G.  F.  Foard  continues  as  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager. 

Fairfield  produces  living  room  chairs,  lounges  and 
occasional  chairs,  its  products  having  a  wide  repu- 
tation in  all  of  the  48  states  and  in  Canada.  Perma- 
nent displays  are  maintained  in  New  York,  Chicago, 
High  Point,  and  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

Fairfield  Chair  Co.  has  capital  assets  of  well  over 
$500,000  and  its  annual  sales  range  between  $1,500,- 
000  and  $2,000,000.  Approximately  100,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space  is  utilized  and  the  firm  employs 
around  175  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  about 
$300,000. 

HAMMARY  MFG.  CORP. 

Hammary  Manufacturing  Corp.,  Joyceton,  on 
Hickory  Highway  No.  321,  four  miles  from  Lenoir, 
was  organized  in  November,  1942,  by  Hamilton  L. 
Bruce  and  started  operation  in  a  leased  building  on 
an  alley  off  Harper  Avenue  in  Lenoir.  Only  two 
men  were  employed  by  Mr.  Bruce  to  assist  him  in 
the  manufacture  of  lawn  chairs.  Within  three 
months  the  force  had  grown  to  12  workers  and  had 
reached  18  during  the  first  year  of  operation. 

Because  of  splendid  increase  in  sales  and  lack  of 
available  quarters  in  Lenoir,  Mr.  Bruce  purchased  a 
site  at  Joyceton  and  erected  a  new  plant  which  has 
since  been  tripled  in  size.  The  plant  continued  to 
manufacture  lawn  chairs  until  1946  after  which  a 
small  dinette  group  was  produced  for  about  two 
years.  In  1948  the  plant  started  producing  tables, 
including  mahogany  and  gum  tables  with  leather 
and  mahogany  tops,  shifting  the  next  year  to  leather 
tops  exclusively  with  all  genuine  Honduras  mahog- 
any. At  present  the  firm  produces  34  numbers  in 
tables. 

Hammary  Manufacturing  Corp.  lines  have  been  so 
well  accepted  that  last  year  the  firm  shipped  tables 
valued  at  approximately  $1,000,000.  The  plant  and 
equipment  are  valued  at  approximately  $300,000. 
The  firm  employs  around  125  workers  in  the  factory 
and  10  employees  in 
the  office  with  an 
annual  payroll  of 
around  $700,000.00. 
Mr.  Bruce  is  presi- 
dent and  general 
manager  and  direc- 
tors include  sales- 
men who  represent 
the  firm  in  key  sec- 
tions of  the  country. 

Hammary  prod- 
ucts are  sold  nation- 
wide, 20  salesmen 
covering  the  coun- 
try. Permanent  dis- 
plays are  maintain- 
ed in  the  firm's  own 
show  rooms  at  Le- 
noir and  in  Chicago 
and  Hiffh  Point  Oval  book  drum  table  of  Honduras 
■n      •  n  .-I      fi      '      mahogany,    with   swivel   mahogany 

rSUSiness  OI  tne  Urm      sides  and  front,  made  by  Hammary 
has  been  particular-  Manufacturing  Corp.,  Lenoir. 


Page  32 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Galvin  Furniture  Co.  plant  near  Lenoir.    (Galvin  Stables,  riding 
promenade  grounds  located  below  plant  sit 

ly  satisfactory  during  the  past  two  years  and  espe- 
cially on  the  recent  markets.  Distribution  is  on  a 
very  strict  quota  and  allotment  basis. 

GALVIN  FURNITURE  CO. 

Galvin  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  originally  organized  in 
1922  by  R.  C.  Robbins  as  the  Star  Furniture  Co.,  lo- 
cated near  Lenoir,  was  reorganized  and  incorporated 
in  1935  with  J.  B.  Galvin  as  president  and  general 
manager ;  Mrs.  J.  B.  Galvin,  vice-president  and  treas- 
urer; Miss  Joan  Houston,  second  vice-president,  and 
J.  B.  Houston,  Jr.,  secretary.  Mr.  Galvin  was  presi- 
dent of  the  Caldwell  Furniture  Co.  at  Lenoir  for 
seven  years  before  organizing  his  own  company. 

Galvin  Furniture  Co.  has  developed  annual  sales 
to  around  $2,000,000.  The  plant  contains  approx- 
imately 300,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  em- 
ploys about  235  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  in 
the  neighborhood  of  $400,000. 

This  firm  produces  bedroom  furniture  only,  largely 
in  Modern  and  Early  American  styles  in  the  medium 
priced  range.  Products  are  sold  all  over  the  United 
States  and  in  parts  of  Canada,  30  salesmen  covering 
the  area.  Permanent  displays  are  maintained  in 
Chicago  and  New  York  and  in  the  factory's  own 
show  rooms. 

As  an  interesting  sideline,  Mr.  Galvin  operates  the 
Galvin  Stables  of  fine  riding  horses. 

BLOWING  ROCK  FURNITURE  CO. 

Blowing  Rock  Furniture  Co.,  Lenoir,  was  organ- 
ized and  incorporated  in  1934  as  a  selling  organiza- 
tion for  the  Blowing  Rock  Chair  Co.,  Lenoir,  and  the 
Sherrill  Furniture  Co.,  Statesville.  Officers  are  R. 
B.  Triplett,  president,  D.  M.  Bower  and  Flake  Sher- 
rill, Statesville,  vice-presidents,  and  W.  Clyde  Sud- 
dreth. 

The  Blowing  Rock  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Lenoir,  was  in- 
corporated in  1945  with  D.  M.  Bower  as  president, 
R.  B.  Triplett,  vice-president,  and  R.  H.  Stevens,  sec- 
retary-treasurer. This  plant  is  one  of  the  most  mod- 
ern and  up-to-date  furniture  factories  in  the  coun- 


horses,  with  riding  ring, 

e). 


Air  view  of  plant  of  Blowing  Rock  Chair  Co.,  near  Lenoir. 


try,  constructed  entirely  of  steel, 
concrete  and  glass  and  equipped 
with  entirely  modern  conveyor 
system.  It  contains  about  70,- 
000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 
The  plant  manufactures  modern 
dining  room  furniture. 

The  authorized  capital  stock  is 
$1,000,000.  Annual  sales  reach 
approximately  $2,500,000.  The 
firm  employs  180  workers  and 
has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $500,000.  Blowing 
Rock  Chair  Co.  sells  its  products  through  the  Blowing 
Rock  Furniture  Co.  over  the  entire  United  States, 
employing  30  salesmen  to  cover  this  area.  Perma- 
nent displays  are  maintained  in  New  York,  Chicago, 
High  Point,  and  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

HIBRITEN  CHAIR  CO. 

Hibriten  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Lenoir,  was  organized  in 
1930  by  R.  C.  Robbins  as  individual  owner.  Since 
that  time  two  of  his  sons  have  joined  him,  Orin  R. 
Robbins  in  1935  and  George  C.  Robbins  in  the  early 
1940s.  In  1946  the  firm  was  incorporated  with  R.  C. 
Robbins  as  president  and  general  manager,  G.  C. 
Robbins  as  vice-president,  and  Orin  R.  Robbins  sec- 
retary and  treasurer.  These  officers  form  the  Board 
of  Directors. 

Hibriten  Chair  Co.,  named  for  the  nearby  Hibriten 
Mountain,  has  a  paid  in  capital  of  $151,000,  the  plant 
has  an  annual  output  of  approximately  $1,500,000, 
has  a  floor  space  of  about  90,000  square  feet  and  em- 
ploys about  200  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of 
around  $500,000. 

This  firm  produces  high  grade  living  room,  dining 
room  and  bedroom  chairs  which  are  sold  throughout 
the  entire  United  States.  Representatives  of  the 
firm  cover  this  entire  area.  Show  space  is  maintain- 
ed permanently  in  Chicago,  High  Point,  and  in  the 
plant's  own  show  rooms. 

Mr.  Robbins  had  developed  several  furniture 
plants  in  and  around  Lenoir.  In  1922  he  organized 
the  Star  Furniture  Co.,  which  is  now  the  Galvin  Fur- 
niture Co.  In  1924  he  organized  the  Hibriten  Fur- 
niture Co.  along  with  his  brother,  Dr.  C.  L.  Robbins, 
who  now  operates  this  firm.  Also,  he  organized  the 
Jennings  Furniture  Co.  with  associates,  now  the 
Hibriten  plant. 

KINCAID  FURNITURE  CO. 

Kincaid  Furniture  Co.,  at  Hudson,  a  few  miles 
south  of  Lenoir,  is  probably  the  only  furniture  plant 
in  North  Carolina  which  is  devoted  exclusively  to 
the  manufacture  of  cedar  furniture  and  only  a  few 
other  plants  in  the  State  produce  any  cedar  furniture. 
The  firm  was  organized  and  incorporated  in  August, 
1946,  with  authorized  capital  stock  of  $100,000.  The 
firm  is  a  family  industry  with  George  Kincaid, 
father,  as  president ;  J.  Wade  Kincaid,  son,  vice-pres- 
ident and  general  manager,  and  Mrs.  Ruth  K.  Rob- 
bins, daughter,  secretary-treasurer. 

Kincaid  Furniture  Co.  produces  nothing  except 
cedar  wardrobes  and  cedar  chests.  It  is  said  to  pro- 
duce the  largest  line  of  cedar  wardrobes  of  any  plant 
in  the  United  States  and  has  the  capacity  to  manu- 
facture from  800  to  1000  units  a  week.  The  plant 
is  entirely  modern  in  machinery  and  equipment  and 
operates  on  a  production  line  basis.  The  plant  has 
approximately  40,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  em- 


Winter-Spring,  1955 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  33 


ploys  85  workers  with  an  annual 
payroll  of  around  $210,000.  An- 
nual sales  range  around  $1,000,- 
000. 

Kincaid  sells  its  products  over 
the  entire  eastern  half  of  the 
United  States  and  has  about  15 
salesmen  covering  this  area. 

HIBRITEN  FURNITURE  CO. 

Hibriten  Furniture  Co.,  Le- 
noir, was  organized  in  1924  by 
Dr.  C.  L.  Robbins  and  his  broth- 
er, R.  C.  Robbins.  Later  R.  C. 
Robbins  organized  and  now  ope- 
rates the  Hibriten  Chair  Co.  Dr. 
Robbins  is  president,  treasurer 
and  general  manager  of  the  furniture  firm  with  O.  R. 
Robbins  as  vice-president  (inactive)  and  H.  B.  Jen- 
nings, secretary. 

Note :  Further  information  not  supplied. 

SOUTHEASTERN  CABINET  CO. 

Southeastern  Cabinet  Co.,  Inc.,  located  on  Highway 
#821,  eight  miles  south  of  Lenoir,  was  operated  for 
several  years  as  the  Period  Furniture  Co.,  but  was 
taken  over  by  the  RFC.  In  1950  the  Southeastern 
was  organized  and  incorporated,  purchasing  the 
plant  to  manufacture  wooden  television  cabinets.  The 
authorized  capital  stock  is  $200,000.  The  officers 
are  J.  J.  Hennessy,  president;  M.  P.  Hendrix,  sec- 
retary, and  M.  R.  Wasman,  Miami,  Fla.,  the  principal 
organizer,  treasurer. 


Plant  of  Kincaid  Furniture  Co.,  Hudson,  near  Lenoir.     One  of  few  cedar  wardrooe 

and  cedar  chest  makers  in  State. 

The  new  firm  manufactures  wooden  television  cab- 
inets entirely  of  wood  and  according  to  specifications, 
selling  its  products  to  Motorola,  Du  Mont,  Emerson, 
Olympic,  CBS,  Tele  King  and  other  television  manu- 
facturers. Both  solid  and  veneer  cabinets  are  pro- 
duced, usually  with  poplar  as  the  core  and  with  ma- 
hogany, fir,  poplar  and  gum  veneers. 

The  plant  contains  70,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  and  when  in  full  operation,  employs  as  many 
as  200  workers  with  an  approximate  payroll  of  $500,- 
000  annually.  Annual  sales  reach  as  high  as  $2,000,- 
000. 

OTHER   CALDWELL  FIRMS 

Lenoir  Cabinet  Works,  Wilkesboro   Rd.,   Lenoir 

Smith,  D.  A.,  Chair  Co.,  Lenoir. 

Johnston  Furn.  Mfg.  Co.,  Mill  St.,  Granite  Falls. 


Hickory-Newton-Conover  Important  Furniture  Producers 


Hickory,  even  from  the  days  it  was  known  as  Hick- 
ory Tavern,  was  making  furniture  out  of  the  abund- 
ant hardwood  in  the  area.  With  the  advent  of  the 
Western  North  Carolina  Railroad  passing  through 
the  then  small  town,  emphasis  was  given  to  making 
and  shipping  furniture  to  other  areas. 

Furniture  manufacturing  in  Catawba  County  has 
developed  until  Catawba  now  stands  fourth  among 
the  North  Carolina  counties  in  the  number  of  work- 
ers engaged  in  producing  furniture.  Hickory  has 
enlarged  and  expanded  its  furniture  industry  and 
several  other  smaller  communities  in  the  county  are 
large  furniture  producers.  Among  these  are  Con- 
over,  Newton,  Claremont  and  Maiden. 

Employment  Security  Commission  records  show 
that  Catawba  County  has  48  furniture  plants  which 
are  covered  by  the  Employment  Security  Law — that 
is,  they  have  eight  or  more  employees  each.  Of  these 
about  20  plants  have  50  or  more  employees.  Cataw- 
ba, therefore,  has  more  furniture  plants  than  any 
other  county  in  the  State  except  Guilford.  Average 
monthly  employment  in  the  48  Catawba  County 
plants  in  1950  was  3,817,  which  means  that  probably 
4,500  workers  are  employed  either  full  or  part  time 
in  Catawba  plants.  The  payroll  for  1950  was  $9,- 
084,096. 

SOUTHERN  DESK  CO. 

Southern  Desk  Co.,  Hickory,  was  organized  as  a 
partnership  in  1908  by  George  F.  Ivey  and  John  Hice. 
In  1913  Mr.  Ivey  bought  out  his  partner's  interest 
^nd  continued  operation  as  individual  owner  until 


1948.  He  and  members  of  his  family  continue  to  own 
controlling  stock  in  the  organization. 

Southern  Desk  Co.  was  incorporated  in  1948  and 
has  an  authorized  capital  of  $1,112,000  with  surplus 
of  around  $600,000.00.  Annual  production  runs 
around  $5,000,000.  The  firm  employs  approximately 
480  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  close  to  $1,500,- 
000.  Officers  of  the  Southern  Desk  Co.  are  George 
F.  Ivey,  president  and  general  manager ;  Mrs.  George 
F.  Ivey,  vice-president ;  Leon  S.  Ivey,  their  son,  treas- 
urer; and  A.  N.  Spencer,  secretary. 

During  its  period  of  operation  17  additions  have 
been  made  to  the  plant,  the  last  one  recently  finished 
being  a  bui!d,-1ig  16  x  120  feet.  The  plant  includes 
seven  acres  under  cover  in  two,  three,  and  four  story 
buildings. 

Southern  Desk  Co.,  manufactures  public  seating 
and  institutional  furniture  which  includes  seating 
for  schools,  churches  and  theaters,  also  chairs  and 
tables,  church  pulpits,  cabinets,  storage  cases,  display 
cases,  combination  tables,  study  tables  and  chairs 
and  other  types  of  furniture  for  public  and  institu- 
tional buildings.  Sales  are  made  direct  to  schools, 
churches  and  theaters.  The  firm  produces  furnish- 
ings for  an  average  of  nine  churches  a  week  and  re- 
cently completed  an  order  for  all  of  the  furnishings 
for  the  new  Baptist  church  in  Greensboro. 

Products  of  this  firm  are  distributed  throughout 
the  United  States,  but  principal  sales  are  made  in 
the  Southeastern  states  in  which  area  the  13  full 
time  salesmen  operate  largely.    Permanent  displays 


PAGE  34 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Huge  plant  of  the  Southern  Desk  Go.  with  seven  acres  of  floor  space  in  Hickory 


are  maintained  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

This  is  one  of  the  oldest,  largest  and  most  success- 
ful of  the  furniture  plants  in  North  Carolina. 

HICKORY  CHAIR  CO. 

Hickory  Chair  Co.,  Hickory,  was  first  established 
as  the  Surry  Chair  Co.  at  Elkin  soon  after  the  turn 
of  the  century  by  George  Bailey.  In  1911  Mr.  Bailey 
moved  his  business  to  Hickory  and  reorganized  as  a 
local  stock  company  under  the  name,  Hickory  Chair 
Manufacturing  Co.  Mr.  Bailey  continued  to  operate 
the  business  until  1944  when  he  retired.  During  this 
period,  1911  to  1944,  K.  C.  Menzies  served  as  presi- 
dent. 

In  1931  the  Hickory  Chair  Manufacturing  Co.  was 
merged  with  the  Hickory  Furniture  Company  and 
the  Martin  Furniture  Company  continuing  under 
the  name,  Hickory  Chair  Manufacturing  Co.  In  1944 
this  firm  split  into  two  new  firms,  this  division  be- 
coming the  Hickory  Chair  Company  with  an  author- 
ized capitalization  of  $300,000 ;  the  other  section  be- 
came the  Hickory  Manufacturing  Company.  W.  B. 
Shuford  served  as  president  from  1944  until  1950. 

E.  M.  Fennell,  who  had  been  with  the  firm  since 
1930  and  formerly  had  served  as  executive  vice-pres- 
ident and  general  manager,  succeeded  Mr.  Shuford 
as  president  and  general  manager.  Other  present 
officers  are  Ralph  L.  Bowman,  vice-president  and 
plant  manager ;  R.  Walker  Geitner,  secretary,  and 
A.  H.  Burgess,  treasurer.  These  officers,  with  B.  R. 
Merrick  of  Charlotte,  compose  the  Board  of  Direc- 
tors.   Mrs.  Jessie  L.  Shelby  is  assistant  treasurer. 

Approximately  half  of  the  Hickory  Chair  Co.  pro- 
duction is  in  dining  room  and  desk  chairs  and  the 


Air  view  of  the  home  of  the  Hickory  Chair  Co.,  Hickory.  (New 
building  added  since  picture  was  taken.) 


other  half  in  upholstered  living  room  furniture.  The 
entire  plant  has  been  modernized  and  in  1951  a  new 
building  was  added  containing  22,500  square  feet. 
This  gives  the  entire  plant  floor  space  of  approxi- 
mately 160,000  square  feet.  The  firm  employs  335 
workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  more  than 
$800,000. 

Products  of  the  Hickory  Chair  Co.  are  sold 
throughout  the  United  States  with  a  sales  force  of 
twenty  covering  the  area. 

Permanent  show  space  is  maintained  in  Chicago 
and  in  High  Point  and  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

HICKORY  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Hickory  Manufacturing  Co.,  Hickory,  was  formed 
in  1944  as  the  result  of  a  split  in  the  Hickory  Chair 
Manufacturing  Co.  Part  of  the  older  firm  was  sold 
and  was  incorporated  under  the  new  name  with  an: 
authorized  capital  of  $200,000. 

Walker  Lyerly  was  elected  president,  A.  Alex  Shu-i 
ford,  Jr.,  vice-president,  and  C.  T.  Bost,  treasurer! 
and  general  manager.  When  Mr.  Lyerly  died  in  J 
1947,  Mr.  Shuford  was  elected  president. 

The  Hickory  Manufacturing  Co.  produces  bedroom! 
and  dining  room  furniture  in  the  medium  priced! 
range,     all    period    furniture,    including    Georgian,- 
Early  Colonial,  and  Hepplewhite.    All  is  from  Afri-i 
can  mahogany,  both  solid  and  veneer  with  southern! 
hardwoods  as  the  cores  of  some  of  the  products.! 
Annual  production  is  around  $2,500,000.    The  Hick-j 
ory   Manufacturing   Co.   plant   and   equipment   are 
entirely  modern  and  the  plant  is  frequently  referred! 
to  as  a  "Model  of  Cleanliness".    Around  300  workers; 
are  employed  in  the  plant  and  the  annual  payroll  is 
about  three-fourths  of  a  million  dollars.    This  is  one 
of  the  few  furniture  plants  in  the  State  which  ope- 
rates on  a  profit-sharing  plan  for  all  employees  and 
pays  all  of  the  premiums  on  a  group  life  and  hospital 
ization  insurance  plan  for  all  of  the  workers.     Ap 
proximately  250,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  is 
provided. 

Annual  production  of  the  Hickory  Manufacturing 
Co.  is  around  $2,500,000  and  the  products  are  distrib- 
uted throughout  the  United  States,  a  sales  force  of 
20  covering  this  area.     Permanent  display  space  is 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  35 


maintained  at  Chicago  and  in  the  plant's  own  show 
rooms. 

HY-LAN  FURNITURE  CO. 

Hy-Lan  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Hickory,  started  the 
business  in  1922  as  the  Yeager  Manufacturing  Co. 
The  industry  was  purchased  in  1933  by  Walker  Lyer- 
ly,  Sr.,  and  incorporated  as  Hy-Lan  Furniture  Co., 
the  name  coming  from  Highland,  in  which  section 
the  plant  is  located.  Mr.  Lyerly  operated  the  busi- 
ness as  president  until  his  death  in  1947.  The  son, 
Walker  Lyerly,  Jr.,  who  was  treasurer  of  the  firm, 
died  in  June,  1951. 

Mrs.  Walker  Lyerly,  Sr.,  succeeded  her  husband  as 
president  of  the  firm.  Other  officers  are  Mrs.  C.  T. 
Bost  and  Mrs.  Walker  Lyerly,  Jr.,  vice-presidents, 
John  L.  Lyerly,  treasurer,  and  Mrs.  James  Aderholdt, 
secretary.  C.  C.  Bost,  Jr.,  is  general  manager  of  the 
plant.  These  officers  compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

When  Hy-Lan  Furniture  Co.  was  started  as  such 
in  1933,  it  employed  only  56  workers.  Now  350 
workers  are  employed  and  the  annual  payroll  is  about 
$765,000.  In  its  first  year  the  firm  produced  only 
$300,000  in  sales,  a  figure  that  has  increased  10-fold 
in  the  18  years  of  operation  to  around  $3,000,000  a 
year.  The  plant,  entirely  modern  with  a  complete 
conveyor  system,  contains  about  195,000  square  feet 
of  floor  space. 

Until  recently  this  firm  produced  only  18th  Cen- 
tury dining  room  furniture.  Now  production  of 
Modern  dining  room  furniture  is  being  expanded  as 
conditions  permit.  This  furniture  is  sold  in  every 
State  in  the  nation,  20  salesmen  covering  the  entire 
country.  Permanent  show  rooms  are  maintained  in 
Chicago,  New  York,  and  High  Point  and  in  the 
plant's  own  show  rooms.  Samples  are  also  sent  for 
the  annual  display  in  Boston. 

Hy-Lan  Furniture  Co.  provides  a  $500  life  insur- 
ance policy  for  all  of  its  350  employees. 

CENTURY  FURNITURE  CO. 

Century  Furniture  Co.,  Hickory,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1948  by  Harley  F.  Shuford,  prin- 
cipal owner.  The  building,  one  of  the  most  modern 
furniture  plants  in  the  entire  nation,  was  completed 
and  production  started  toward  the  end  of  that  year. 
The  plant  is  all  on  one  floor  with  a  complete  con- 
veyor system  and  all  of  the  most  modern  equipment. 
Because  of  the  type  of  structure  and  other  improve- 
ments, this  plant  earns  the  lowest  possible  insurance 
rate. 

Associated  with  Mr.  Shuford,  president,  are  the 
following  officers:  E.  L.  Woodard  and  L.  S.  Wal- 
worth, vice-presidents;  S.  M.  Hemphill,  treasurer; 
and  Young  M.  Smith,  secretary.  These  officers,  with 
A.  T.  Cashion,  Hickory,  form  the  Board  of  Directors. 
Phifer  M.  Smith  is  production  manager.  The  firm 
has  authorized  capital  of  $1,500,000. 

Century  produces  modern  and  traditional  living 
I  room,  dining  room,  and  bedroom  furniture  in  three 
clasifications.  Sales  amounting  to  approximately 
I  $4,000,000  a  year  in  volume  are  made  throughout 
the  entire  United  States,  the  firm's  sales  staff  cover- 
ing the  entire  area. 

Permanent  show  spaces  are  maintained  in  High 
Point,  Chicago,  San  Francisco,  Kansas  City,  and 
Jamestown,  New  York,  in  the  Hickory  Community 
Center  and  in  the  firm's  own  show  rooms. 


About  two  years  ago  Century  Furniture  Co.  pur- 
chased the  Longview  Furniture  Co.,  also  located  in 
Hickory,  completely  remodeled  and  enlarged  this 
plant,  tripling  its  production.  This  unit  does  up- 
holstering for  the  Century  plant  which  handles  case 
goods  production  and  upholstering.  W.  T.  Council, 
Jr.,  is  superintendent  of  the  Longview  plant.  Offi- 
cers of  both  corporations  are  the  same. 

Combined  floor  space  in  the  Century  and  Long- 
view  plants  is  approximately  150,000  square  feet. 
Combined  employment  is  between  400  and  500  work- 
ers and  the  annual  payroll  is  approximately  $800,000. 

WESTERN  CAROLINA  FURNITURE  CO. 

Western  Carolina  Furniture  Co.,  Hickory,  was  or- 
ganized in  1943  by  Charles  A.  White  and  four  other 
partners  and  was  reorganized  and  incorporated  in 
March,  1950,  with  an  authorized  capital  stock  of 
$200,000.  Officers  are  Charles  White,  president ;  R. 
O.  Dees,  Jr.,  treasurer,  and  Claude  T.  Davis,  vice- 
president,  these  men  forming  the  board  of  directors, 
and  Mrs.  Louise  Mosteller,  secretary. 

This  firm  has  reached  annual  production  of  ap- 
proximately $750,000,  utilizing  17,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space  in  its  operations.  It  employs  65  workers 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $150,000.  The  firm 
manufactures  upholstered  furniture  including  sofas, 
occasional  and  lounge  chairs,  and  love  seats  of  Tradi- 
tional and  18th  Century  styles,  produced  from  gum 
and  beech  woods  primarily.  Products  are  distributed 
over  40  states  and  a  sales  force  of  11  representatives 
cover  this  area.  Permanent  show  places  are  main- 
tained in  Chicago  and  High  Point. 

JONES  CHAIRS,  INC. 

Jones  Chairs,  Inc.,  Hickory,  was  organized  in  1946 
by  John  L.  Jones  as  individual  owner.  In  1951  the 
firm  was  incorporated  with  John  L.  Jones,  president ; 
Mrs.  Virgie  E.  Jones,  wife,  vice-president;  Mrs.  Lu- 
cille B.  Andrew,  secretary,  and  Terry  V.  Crouch, 
treasurer  and  general  manager.  These  officers,  with 
Emmett  Willis,  form  the  board  of  directors. 

Jones  Chairs  has  an  authorized  capital  of  $500,000 
and  annual  sales  approximate  that  figure.  About 
25,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  is  utilized. 

This  firm  produces  highly  styled  occasional  chairs 
of  many  types.  Sales  cover  the  entire  United  States 
and  parts  of  Mexico  and  25  salesmen  cover  the  area. 
Products  are  displayed  in  the  Hickory  Market. 

Jones  Chairs  operates  on  employer-employee  par- 
ticipation basis  through  an  annual  Christmas  bonus 
plan,  and  life  insurance  and  hospitalization  plans  are 
provided  for  all  employees,  also  financed  by  employ- 
er-employee participation. 


Upholstered  living  room  set,  chair,  sofa  and  wing  chair,  made 
oy  Western  Carolina  Furniture  Co.,  Hickory. 


PAGE  36 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


"Rockaway"     chair,     plat- 
form rocker  without  look, 
made  by  Maxwell-Royal 
Chair  Co.,  Hickory. 


MAXWELL  EOYAL  CHAIR  CO. 

Maxwell  Royal  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Hickory,  was  or- 
ganized and  incorporated  in  1945  by  D.  D.  Grainger, 
Joe  A.  Moretz  and  B.  E.  Correll  with  an  authorized 
capital  stock  of  $100,000.  Later  the  Correll  interest 
was  purchased  by  another  local  businessman. 

Maxwell  Royal  officers 
include  O.  Leonard  Moretz, 
President;  D.  D.  Grainger, 
vice-president,  and  Joe  A. 
Moretz,  secretary-treasur- 
er and  general  manager. 
These  officers,  with  Thom- 
as P.  Pruitt,  form  the 
Board  of  Directors.  In  the 
six  years  of  its  operation 
annual  sales  have  grown  to 
approximately  $600,000. 

The  firm  produces  uphol- 
stered furniture  in  popular 
priced  lines,  largely  club 
chairs,  "Royal  Rest"  and  platform  rockers,  produc- 
ing both  the  frame  and  the  upholstery.  One  of  the 
recent  and  popular  types  in  both  modern  and  colon- 
ial design  is  the  "Rock-a-Way"  in  seven  models  which 
is  a  platform  rocker,  but  without  the  platform  rocker 
look. 

Maxwell  Royal  covers  the  East  and  Middle  West 
with  its  products,  20  salesmen  covering  this  territory. 
Frequent  shipments  are  made  to  far  distant  places. 
The  plant  contains  about  25,000  square  feet  and 
about  75  workers  are  employed,  the  annual  payroll 
running  around  $160,000.  Permanent  display  spaces 
are  kept  in  Chicago  and  High  Point  and  in  the  mid- 
season  shows  in  the  Hickory  Community  Center. 

P  &  G  CHAIR  CO. 

P  &  G  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Hickory,  was  organized  and 
incorporated  July  1,  1950,  by  N.  A.  Pearson,  Char- 
lotte, and  M.  W.  Garrett,  Hickory,  the  name  coming 
from  the  initials  of  the  two  principal  owners.  Mr. 
Pearson  is  president  and  sales  manager,  Mr.  Garrett, 
secretary-treasurer  and  general  manager,  and  R.  L. 
McCraven  is  vice-president.  These  officers  are  the 
directors  of  the  company. 

The  P  &  G  Chair  Co.  has  an  authorized  capital  of 
$100,000.  Annual  production  during  the  first  year 
amounted  to  about  $600,000.  The  firm  has  approx- 
imately 20,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  employs  72 
workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately 
$180,000. 

Principal  products  are  platform  rockers  and  sofa 
beds  in  the  modern  priced  field.  Practically  all 
sales  are  in  North  Carolina  and  three  surrounding 
states.  Three  salesmen  cover  this  territory.  The 
firm  operates  its  own  fleet  of  three  delivery  trucks. 

The  P  &  G  Chair  Co.  is  affiliated  with  the  Queen 
City  Mattress  and  Upholstering  Co.,  Charlotte,  which 
is  owned  entirely  by  Mr.  Pearson. 

SHERRILL  UPHOLSTERING  CO. 

Sherrill  Upholstering  Co.,  Inc.,  Hickory,  was  or- 
ganized in  1944  as  Sherrill  &  Kaylor  and  the  next 
year  O.  T.  Sherrill  purchased  the  interest  of  his 
partner.  Four  years  later,  in  1948,  the  firm  was 
reorganized  and  incorporated  with  T.  F.  Cummings 
as  president  and  Eugene  Cloninger  as  vice-president, 
both  inactive,  and  Mr.  Sherrill  as  secretary-treasurer 
and  general  manager. 


The  firm  has  an  authorized  capital  of  $100,000  and 
annual  sales  reach  about  one-half  million  dollars  a 
year.  Payroll  for  its  60  workers  ranges  around 
$100,000  annually.  The  firm  produces  upholstered 
living  room  furniture  from  modern  to  high  priced, 
including  Lawson  sofas,  Duncan  Phyfe  Club  chairs, 
and  several  types  of  leather  and  fabric  coverings. 

Last  year  the  firm  added  a  new  building,  giving 
1200  additional  square  feet  of  floor  space,  total  floor 
space  now  amounting  to  16,000  square  feet.  Sales 
are  made  direct  to  large  department  stores  in  ap- 
proximately 25  states,  seven  salesmen  covering  this 
area. 

COX  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Cox  Manufacturing  Co.,  Hickory,  was  established 
in  the  1932-35  period  by  William  Cox,  individual 
owner  and  operator.  Sales  amount  to  approximately 
$380,000  a  year.  Mr.  Cox  employs  50  to  60  workers 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $95,000. 

Principal  products  are  boudoir  chairs,  platform 
rockers  and  chaise  longues  which  are  sold  all  over 
the  United  States,  primarily  to  large  department 
stores.  Twelve  salesmen  cover  the  area.  Perma- 
nent display  spaces  are  maintained  in  Chicago. 

CONOYER 
CONOVER  FURNITURE  CO. 

Conover  Furniture  Co.,  Conover,  now  a  unit  of  the 
large  Broyhill  Furniture  Factories  with  headquar- 
ters at  Lenoir,  was  owned  and  operated  in  the  early 
1900s  by  C.  R.  Brady  and  later  by  his  son-in-law, 
Mr.  Barker.  In  1941  it  was  purchased  by  the  Broy- 
hill interests  and  has  since  been  replaced  and  en- 
larged by  a  modern  building  and  modern  equipment. 

The  firm  was  incorporated  with  an  authorized 
capital  of  $500,000.  E.  C.  McCall  is  president;  J.  E. 
Broyhill,  secretary  and  treasurer;  C.  E.  Beach,  di- 
rector and  production  manager,  and  C.  A.  Holden, 
director  and  purchasing  agent.  The  plant  manufac- 
tures dining  room  furniture,  for  which  chairs  are 
produced  by  another  Broyhill  plant,  Lenoir  Chair 
Company  No.  1  at  Lenoir ;  desks,  kneehole  desks,  in 
the  low  priced  field,  and  chairs.  Approximately 
180,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  are  utilized  in  the 
plant. 

The  Broyhill  sales  force  of  67  men  sell  the  prod- 
ucts of  this  plant  along  with  those  of  the  other  five 
furniture  plants  in  the  organization.  Around  320 
workers  are  employed.  C.  W.  Canrobert  is  superin- 
tendent of  the  Conover  Furniture  Plant.  A.  F.  Clark 
is  general  superintendent  of  the  three  plants  operated 
in  the  Conover-Newton  area,  including  the  Lenoir 
Chair  Company  No.  2  at  Newton  and  the  United  Ve- 
neer Company  at  Conover,  which  produces  face  ve- 
neer of  walnut,  oak,  mahogany  and  korina  for  other 
Broyhill  furniture  plants.  Howard  Whisnant  is 
superintendent  of  the  veneer  plant. 

CONOVER 
SOUTHERN  FURNITURE  CO. 

The  Southern  Furniture  Co.  was  organized  in  1925 
by  O.  W.  Bolick,  Sr.,  as  individual  owner,  starting  in 
a  small  plant  60  x  150  feet  and  with  eight  employees. 
Business  of  this  firm  has  increased  35-fold  since  its 
earlier  years.  Mr.  Bolick  has  been  joined  by  two  of 
his  sons,  O.  W.  Bolick,  Jr.,  and  Norman  Bolick,  and 
a  third  son,  Jerome  Bolick,  expects  to  join  the  firm 
when  he  finishes  college. 


vVlNTER-SPRING,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  37 


Large  plant  and  part  of  lumber  yard  of  Southern 
Furniture  Co.,  Conover. 

Southern  Furniture  Co.  now  employs  275  workers 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $625,000.  Floor 
;pace  is  approximately  160,000  square  feet. 

The  firm  manufactures  upholstered  chairs  and 
sofas  and  boudoir  chairs,  all  produced  from  solid  oak, 
ish,  gum  and  birch.  This  large  and  prosperous  com- 
pany ships  its  products  into  all  of  the  48  states,  prob- 
ibly  90%  of  its  business  being  done  direct  with  many 
arge  department  stores.  The  firm  has  permanent 
?urniture  display  space  in  Chicago  and  also  in  its 
)wn  show  rooms  in  the  plant. 

CONOVER 
CONOVER  CHAIR  CO. 

Conover  Chair  Co.,  Conover,  was  organized  in  1927 
oy  A.  L.  Bolick  as  individual  owner  under  the  firm 
lame  of  Conover  Mattress  Co.  Later  the  firm  be- 
:ame  the  Conover  Upholstering  Co.,  and  in  1940  the 
name  was  changed  to  the  present  Conover  Chair  Co. 
In  1946,  due  to  the  condition  of  Mr.  Bolick's  health, 
Charles  C.  C.  Bost,  who  became  Mr.  Bolick's  son-in- 
law,  took  over  the  business  and  has  since  operated  it 
as  owner  and  general  manager.  W.  P.  Bost  is  assist- 
ant general  manager  and  designs  all  of  the  chairs 
produced.  James  J.  Martin  is  sales  manager  for  the 
firm. 

Conover  Chair  Co.  employs  about  60  workers  and 
has  an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of  $100,000.  The 
firm  specializes  in  occasional  chairs  in  the  moderate 
priced  bracket,  selling  direct  to  many  of  the  leading 
department  stores  throughout  the  entire  country, 
except  on  the  west  coast.  This  territory  is  covered 
by  18  salesmen.  The  plant  occupies  about  40,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space  and  between  15,000  and 
20,000  units  are  produced  each  year.  The  firm  main- 
tains permanent  display  space  in  New  York  and  also 
shows  its  products  in  Chicago. 

NEWTON 
LENOIR  CHAIR  CO.  NO.  2 

Lenoir  Chair  Company  No.  2,  Newton,  now  a  unit 
Df  the  extensive  Broyhill  Furniture  Factories  with 
headquarters  at  Lenoir,  was  organized  and  construct- 
sd  around  1924  and  operated  for  a  decade  as  the 
Newton  Furniture  Co.  by  J.  E.  Yount. 

The  Broyhill  interests  purchased  the  plant  in  1934 
and  has  rebuilt  the  plant  and  modernized  the  equip- 
ment since  that  time.  J.  E.  Broyhill  is  president  and 
;reasurer,  E.  C.  McCall  is  secretary  and  H.  E. 
Scruggs  is  plant  superintendent.  A.  F.  Clark  is  gen- 
eral superintendent  of  the  three  Broyhill  plants  in 
:he  Newton-Conover  area,  including  the  United  Ve- 


OTHER  CATAWBA  FIRMS 

Hickory 

Brown  Manufacturing  Co.  of  The  Carolinas,  Inc. 

Carolina  Industries,  Inc.,  Highway  70  East 

Comfort  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  1245  3rd  St.,  N.  E. 

Conner  Furniture  Co.,  Inc. 

Custom  Craft  Furniture,  Inc. 

Fulbright  Cabinet  Co.,  19  2'2  First  Ave.,  N.  W. 

Hickory  Bench  Co.,  Inc.,  Springs  St. 

Hickory  Cabinet  &  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Conover  Rd. 

Hickory-Fry  Furniture  Co.,  Hgw.  70-A 

Hickory  Furniture  Shop,  Inc.,  Longview 

Hickory  Tavern  Furn.,  Inc.,  Highland  Ave. 

Hickory  Upholstering  Co.,  Inc.,  Hgw.  70 

Keith  Mfg.  Co.,  S.  12th  St. 

Messick  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Valdese  Hgw.,  Route  4 

North  Hickory  Furn.  Co.,  509  11th  St.,  N.  W. 

Puritan  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.,  Hgw.  7  0-A 

Suggs  &  Hardin  Upholstering  Co.,  Inc.,  911  10th  Ave.,  N.  E. 

Terry  Crouch  Furn.  Shops,  Inc.,  Longview,  7  Center  St. 

Newton — Conover — Maiden 

Bolin  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  West  C  St.  Ext. 
Newton  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  North  College  Ave. 
Bolst  Parts,  Conover 
Catawba  Upholstering  Co.,  Claremont 
Maiden  Upholstering  Co.,  Maiden 
Pendleton's,  408  W.  Finger  St.,  Maiden 
Superior  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Maiden 


neer  Co. 

This  firm  produces  bedroom  furniture  which  is  sold 
throughout  the  United  States  by  the  large  Broyhill 
sales  force.  The  plant  occupies  about  132,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space  and  employs  around  245  workers. 

NEWTON 
HAUPT  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

The  Haupt  Manufacturing  Co.,  Newton,  was  or- 
ganized in  1946  by  Ed  Haupt  as  individual  owner, 
and  for  a  few  years  was  engaged  primarily  in  the 
production  of  plastic  furniture  for  hotels  and  odd 
chairs.  In  1950  the  firm  was  incorporated  and  shift- 
ed to  the  manufacture  of  high  grade  upholstered  liv- 
ing room  furniture,  including  sofas  and  chairs. 

When  reorganized  in  1950,  the  authorized  capital 
stock  was  $100,000.  Officers  include  Ed  Haupt,  pres- 
ident; Mrs.  Ed  Haupt,  vice-president;  J.  D.  Barnes, 
secretary  and  treasurer,  and  C.  M.  Sherrill  is  plant 
superintendent.  The  plant  equipment  and  supplies 
are  valued  at  around  $200,000  and  annual  production 
reaches  about  $750,000. 

The  Haupt  plant  employs  around  75  workers  with 
an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $150,000.  The 
plant  contains  about  35,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 
Twelve  salesmen  represent  the  firm,  distributing  the 
products  in  about  45  of  the  48  states.  The  firm  main- 
tains permanent  show  space  in  New  York  and  in  its 
own  show  rooms  in  the  plant. 

CLAREMONT 
SCALES  FURNITURE  CO. 

Scales  Furniture  Co.,  Claremont,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1946  by  Matthew  Scales,  A.  O. 
Hollar  and  M.  G.  Kindle.     In  the  next  year  H.  H. 


Furniture  plant  of  Haupt  Manufacturing  Co.,  Neivton. 


PAGE  38 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


WlNTERrSPRING,   1952 


Hollar,  brother  of  A.  0.  Hollar,  purchased  the  Scales 
interest,  and  in  1949,  M.  S.  Kiesler,  who  owned  and 
operated  an  upholstering  plant,  joined  the  corpora- 
tion, making  his  plant  one  of  the  units. 

Officers  of  the  company  are  M.  G.  Kindle,  presi- 
dent, M.  S.  Kiesler,  vice-president,  and  H.  H.  Hollar, 
secretary  and  treasurer,  with  A.  0.  Hollar  as  an  addi- 
tional director.  The  firm  has  an  authorized  capital 
of  $100,000  and  embraces  25,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space   with   its   three   units,    one   of   which   makes 


springs,    another   upholstering   furniture,    and   the 
third  handling  both  processes. 

Scales  Furniture  Co.  produces  upholstered  living 
room  furniture  entirely,  its  annual  production  of 
around  40,000  units,  bringing  it  approximately  $1,- 
000,000  a  year.  About  90  workers  are  employed, 
the  annual  payroll  ranging  around  $200,000  a  year. 
Its  force  of  12  salesmen  cover  a  large  part  of  thej 
country.  Permanent  show  rooms  are  maintained  in 
Chicago  and  New  York  and  also  in  the  plant. 


Morganton-Drexel  Boast  of  High  Quality  Furniture  Plants 


Morganton's  furniture  industry  has  developed  pri- 
marily during  the  last  half  century,  although  small 
cabinet  shops  and  a  few  small  factories  were  in 
operation  before  the  turn  of  the  century.  Small 
plants  at  Morganton  and  Drexel,  eight  miles  away, 
were  started  soon  after  the  turn  of  the  century  and 
have  developed  into  some  of  the  State's  largest  and 
most  important  furniture  firms. 

Drexel  Furniture  Co.,  with  plants  at  Drexel  and 
Morganton,  as  well  as  at  Marion,  has  expanded  into 
what  is  probably  the  largest  furniture  manufactur- 
ing firm  in  the  State.  Morganton  Furniture  Co.  is 
the  oldest  of  the  plants  in  Morganton.  The  Henredon 
Furniture  Industries,  organized  only  five  years  ago, 
has  developed  a  remarkable  reputation  for  fine  fur- 
niture. 

Employment  Security  Commission  figures  show 
only  six  firms  operating  in  Burke  County,  one  of  them 
embracing  three  or  four  plants.  Average  monthly 
employment  in  these  covered  plants — those  with 
eight  or  more  employees — in  1950  was  2,409,  which 
may  mean  that  fully  3,000  people  were  employed  in 
furniture  plants  either  full  or  part  time.  The  an- 
nual payroll  of  the  furniture  plants  in  Burke  County 
in  1950  was  $6,084,265. 

DREXEL  FURNITURE  CO. 

Drexel  Furniture  Co.,  now  recognized  as  the 
"World's  Largest  Manufacturer  of  Quality  Bedroom 
and  Dining  Room  Furniture",  with  several  plants 
at  Drexel,  Morganton  and  Marion,  had  its  beginning 
48  years  ago  at  what  was  then  little  more  than  a  pas- 
ture crossing  of  the  railroad  near  the  postoffice  of 
Drexel,  a  small  station  on  the  Western  North  Caro- 
lina Railroad.  The  Drexel  Furniture  Co.  was  organ- 
ized in  1903  by  Samuel  Huffman,  father  of  the  pres- 
ent president,  and  two  small  frame  buildings  con- 
nected by  a  tramway  comprised  the  original  plant. 
This  plant  operated  for  about  two  years  and  then 


Morganton  plant,  one  of  several  large  units  operated  by  Drexel  Furniture  Go 


burned  down.  Within  two  weeks  work  was  started 
to  replace  the  factory  and  part  of  this  plant  still 
stands. 

The  first  secretary,  treasurer,  and  general  man- 
ager of  Drexel  Furniture  Co.  was  J.  S.  Abernethy. 
who,  after  two  years  of  service,  resigned.  He  was 
succeeded  by  Frank  O.  Huffman,  eldest  son  of  Samuel 
Huffman,  who  served  as  secretary,  treasurer,  and 
general  manager  until  1932  when  he  was  elected 
president  and  general  manager  and  served  as  such 
until  his  death  in  1935.  Samuel  Huffman  served  as 
first  president  of  Drexel  until  1906  when  he  relin 
quished  his  office  and  became  vice-president,  serving 
as  such  until  his  death  in  1922. 

Others  serving  as  president  of  the  corporatior 
were  A.  M.  Kistler,  serving  from  1906  until  his  death 
in  1931,  and  Sterling  R.  Collett  who  succeeded  A.  M 
Kistler  and  served  until  his  death  in  1932.  Neithei 
Samuel  Huffman,  A.  M.  Kistler,  or  Sterling  R.  Colletl 
were  ever  actively  engaged  in  the  management  of  th< 
company.  When  Frank  O.  Huffman  died  in  1935 
Robert  O.  Huffman,  youngest  son  of  the  founder 
became  president,  which  office  he  now  holds. 

Other  present  officers  in  addition  to  Presiden 
R.  O.  Huffman  are  A.  L.  Harwood,  Jr.,  vice-presi 
dent;  Burton  R.  Tuxford,  vice-president  and  sale,1 
manager;  Virginia  S.  Moore,  secretary;  Robert  Li 
Connelly,  treasurer;  L.  D.  T.  Cox,  assistant  treas} 
urer,  and  G.  Maurice  Hill,  manager  of  production! 
Directors  include  R.  O.  Huffman,  A.  L.  Harwood,  Jr.j 
Burton  R.  Tuxford,  Virginia  S.  Moore,  Robert  L 
Connelly,  G.  Maurice  Hill  and  Leon  M.  Little. 

Drexel  Furniture  Co.,  with  its  modest  beginning! 
has  developed  through  the  years  until  it  has  becomj 
the  largest  furniture  manufacturing  plant  in  Nortli 
Carolina  and  one  of  the  larger  industries  of  the  na( 
tion,  with  an  authorized  capital  stock  of  $10,000,00'! 
of  which  slightly  more  than  55%   is  outstanding! 
Drexel  had  capital  assets  in  195; 
of     approximately     $10,654,09| 
excluding  its  Table  Rock  Furn: 
ture  Co.,  a  separate  corporatio 
which  was  purchased   in  Jam; 
ary,  1951.     Annual  sales  durin 
1951   exceeded   $18,300,000  an 
earned  a  net  profit  of  more  tha 
$1,871,000    for    its    more    tha| 
1,250  stockholders,  also  exclusiv 
of  the  Table  Rock  Furniture  C< 
operations.  Drexel  owns  appro? 
imately    160    acres    of    land    c 
which  26  acres  is  under  roof,  gr> 
ing  a  combined  floor  space  of  a 


vA/INTER-SPRING,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  39 


I  |,ji n ; ^ 

P-         ■*!^B 

1          B)  ;r>  ffflli 

1-    Hy 

-1   RfflHI    L 

L;H  kjJH&s   I^^^Pf  | 

71 .  -J^r3 

■1  iOy    ^ '    1 

PiS!.'™    &i£|| 

Bni^i 

jffifttiiillm       ^  fc" 

cji 

'Precedent"  living  room  suite  of  modern  silver  elm  in  natural 
finish  by  Drexel  Furniture  Co. 

most  1,140,000  square  feet.  Its  greatest  growth  has 
Dccurred  during  the  last  10  years  in  which  it  has  be- 
come one  of  the  acknowledged  leaders  in  its  field. 
During  the  past  five  years  Drexel's  total  net  sales 
volume  increased  from  $8,816,000  in  1946  to  consid- 
erably more  than  $18,000,000  in  1950. 

Drexel  now  employs  2600  people.  Splendid  em- 
ployer-employee relationships  are  traditional  with 
Drexel  due  in  large  part  to  the  concern  the  officials 
have  felt  and  exercised  in  the  welfare  of  the  em- 
ployees, resulting  in  extremely  high  employee  morale. 
For  a  number  of  years  Drexel  has  provided  a  year- 
end  bonus,  based  on  the  company's  earnings  and  vir- 
tually amounts  to  a  profit  sharing  plan.  In  1950  the 
amount  was  the  largest  in  the  history  of  the  company 
up  to  that  time.  Drexel  and  its  employees  share  in 
the  costs  of  a  group  life  insurance  program,  in  effect 
since  1919,  providing  $2500  in  case  of  non-occupa- 
tional accidental  death  as  well  as  sick  benefits,  and  a 
hospital  insurance  plan,  in  operation  since  1938, 
under  Blue  Cross  provisions. 

Since  1945  Drexel  has  provided  paid  vacations  for 
all  employees,  one  week  for  those  with  one  year  of 
continuous  service  and  two  weeks  for  those  with 
five  years  of  service.  Annual  service  award  ban- 
quets are  held  each  spring  and  service  pins  are  pre- 
sented to  all  employees  with  two  years  of  service  and 
at  five  year  intervals  from  five  to  forty  years  of 
service.  Gold  watches  are  awarded  to  all  employees 
with  25  years  of  service.  The  Pension  Plan  was 
adopted  in  1950  allowing  all  employees  with  25  years 
of  continuous  service  to  retire  at  age  65  on  one-half 
their  annual  basic  pay,  including  Social  Security 
benefits.  The  company  provides  first  aid  stations, 
trained  nurses  and  canteens  and  snack  bars  in  all 
of  the  plants.  The  morale  of  the  employees  of  the 
"Drexel  family"  is  traditionally  high. 

Drexel  with  its  up-to-date  plants,  latest  machinery, 
modern  methods,  and  skilled  craftsmen  produces  fine 
furniture  on  a  mass  production  basis.  The  average 
weekly  output  is  about  60  freight  cars  of  furniture 
or  approximately  260  cars  each  month — equivalent  to 
a  train  more  than  three  miles  long.  Drexel  Furni- 
ture products,  sold  only  to  retail  furniture  and  de- 
partment stores,  are  distributed  over  the  entire  Unit- 
ed States,  Canada  and  some  foreign  countries.  Per- 
manent show  rooms  are  maintained  in  Chicago,  High 
Point,  New  York,  San  Francisco  and  in  the  firm's 


plant  at  Drexel.  Payrolls  of  the  three  principal 
plants  at  Drexel,  Morganton  and  Marion  are  larger 
than  those  of  any  other  industry  located  in  those 
communities. 

The  Drexel  line  of  furniture  from  its  various 
plants  consists  of  from  10  to  12  groups  with  from  20 
to  90  pieces  of  bedroom,  dining  room  and  living  room 
in  each  of  the  groups.  Bedroom  and  dining  room 
suites  are  also  manufactured.  These  groups  or  suites 
are  produced  in  18th  Century,  Early  American, 
French  Provincial,  Casual  Modern  and  Modern.  Spe- 
cific individual  pieces  consist  of  dressers,  chests, 
vanities,  dressing  tables,  night  tables,  beds,  bedroom 
chairs,  kneehole  desks,  occasional  tables,  buffets,  va- 
rious china  cabinets,  dining  room  tables,  serving  ta- 
bles, dining  room  chairs  and  living  room  chairs  and 
sofas.  Principal  woods  used  in  Drexel  furniture  are 
beech,  gumwood,  chestnut,  poplar,  elm,  pine  and 
maple,  some  of  which  are  purchased  locally.  Mahog- 
any and  other  woods  of  its  nature  are  purchased 
from  Brazil,  Honduras,  Mexico,  Africa  and  Philip- 
pines. 

The  general  offices  of  the  corporation  are  located 
at  Drexel,  about  eight  miles  west  of  Morganton,  the 
name  of  the  town  and  of  the  industry  coming  from 
the  prominent  Drexel  family  in  Philadelphia,  mem- 
bers of  which  aided  in  building  the  Western  North 
Carolina  Railroad  on  which  the  town  of  Drexel  de- 
veloped. The  main  office  employs  approximate! v  121 
persons  and  in  addition  25  sales  representatives  cover 
the  area  of  distribution  of  the  company's  products. 
Manufacturing  plants  are  located  at  Drexel,  Morgan- 
ton  and  Marion,  including  the  Table  Rock  Furniture 
Co.  at  Morganton,  purchased  in  January,  1951.  Drex- 
el also  has  a  plant  at  Kingstree,  South  Carolina, 
which  supplies  the  other  plants  with  rotary  cut  ve- 
neers used  extensively  for  drawer  bottoms  and  cross 
paneling  and  other  basic  wood  requirements.  (See 
Drexel — Marion). 

Drexel  at  Drexel 

The  Drexel  plant  is  the  oldest  of  the  plants  operat- 
ed by  the  Drexel  Furniture  Co.  and  is  located  around 
the  point  where  the  original  factory  was  built  in 
1903.  It  consists  of  several  brick  buildings  with 
only  small  portion  of  the  wooden  buildings  built  fol- 


Traditional  mahogany  dining  room  suite  made  by  Drexel. 


PAGE  40 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


lowing  the  fire  in  1905.  The  wooden  building  is  to 
be  replaced  with  larger  and  more  modern  brick  struc- 
tures when  building  conditions  improve. 

The  Drexel  plant  contains  approximately  226,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs  around  415 
workers.  That  plant  manufactures  bedroom  furni- 
ture exclusively,  usually  of  18th  Century  or  French 
Provincial  design. 

Drexel  in  Morganton 

In  Morganton  the  Drexel  Furniture  Co.  operates 
three  distinct  plants  under  the  same  roof.  These 
three  plants  contain  floor  space  of  347,000  square 
feet  and  employ  approximately  870  persons.  These 
plants  are  referred  to  as  Plant  No.  3,  Plant  No.  5 
and  the  Sample  Plant. 

The  Morganton  Dining  Room  Plant  or  Plant  No. 
3  is  one  of  the  largest  of  the  Drexel  organizations 
and  at  this  plant  the  company's  highest  priced  line 
of  mahogany  dining  room  furniture  is  produced. 
This  plant  produces  the  remarkably  successful  Travis 
Court  dining  room  group. 

Morganton  Chair  Co.,  Plant  No.  5,  manufactures 
all  of  the  chairs  and  benches  to  go  with  the  furniture 
produced  in  the  other  plants.  It  is  regarded  as  one 
of  the  most  modern  and  up-to-date  plants  in  the  en- 
tire country  and  was  one  of  the  first  to  install  a 
change  conveyor  system  in  its  Finishing  Department. 

The  Sample  Plant  of  Drexel  is  relatively  small  but 
is  fully  equipped  with  all  machinery  necessary  to 
produce  all  samples  required  by  the  other  plants.  In 
conjunction  with  the  Sample  Plant  the  company 
operates  a  modern  machine  shop  which  makes  cut- 
ters, knives,  jigs,  templates  and  other  machinery 
used  by  the  other  plants  in  the  production  of  furni- 
ture pieces  after  they  have  been  worked  out  from 
the  designer's  drawings  by  the  Sample  Department. 

Table  Rock  Furniture  Co.,  Morganton,  is  the  most 
recent  addition  to  the  extensive  Drexel  organization, 
having  been  purchased  in  January,  1951.  Table  Rock 
is  wholly  owned  by  Drexel  but  is  operated  as  a  sep- 
arate corporation.  It  is  located  just  one  block  from 
and  in  sight  of  Drexel's  other  Morganton  plant.  This 
plant  contains  more  than  122,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  and  employs  approximately  290  workers. 

HENREDON  FURNITURE  INDUSTRIES 

Henredon  Furniture  Industries,  Inc.,  Morganton, 
using  the  "Heritage-Henredon"  trade-mark,  started 
in  1947  as  an  unusual  furniture  plant.  It  was  a 
dream  of  long  standing  come  true — an  ideal  that 
became  an  actuality.  A  new  modern  factory  was 
planned  for  the  manufacture  of  really  high  grade 


Novel  groupings  of  dining  room,  bedroom  furniture  icith  other 

units  of  the  Heritage-Henredon  lines,  made  by 

Henredon  Furniture  Industries,  Morganton. 

furniture  in  streamline  production.  Three  men  with 
plenty  of  know-how  initiated  an  enterprise,  selected 
a  rural  site  near  Morganton,  landscaped  the  area  andj 
transferred  their  vision  of  a  large  plant  to  this  site.j 
After  careful  study  the  plant,  covering  about  150,- 
000  square  feet,  all  on  one  floor  and  under  one  roof,> 
was  constructed  as  laid  out  in  a  "U"  shape.  At  one 
end  are  the  saws  and  machinery.  At  the  other  end 
is  the  packing  room  and  loading  platform.  Between 
these  are  the  various  processes  of  machining,  veneer- 
ing, sanding,  assembling  and  finishing  and  rubbing 

The  founders  and  present  officers  are  Henry  Wil- 
son, president  and  treasurer;  Ralph  Edwards,  vice- 
president  and  sales  manager ;  Donnell  VanNoppen 
vice-president ;  Sterling  Collett,  vice-president  anc 
assistant  treasurer,  and  C.  W.  Hoyle,  secretary.  Th( 
name  HENREDON  was  coined  by  taking  HEty 
from  Henry  Wilson's  name,  RE,  Ralph  Edwards 
initials,  and  DON  from  Donnell  VanNoppen.  This 
combination  is  intriguing  to  buyers  and  others  wh( 
had  known  Henry,  Ralph  and  Don  for  many  year; 
prior  to  the  erection  of  the  new  factory. 

Henredon  Furniture  Industries  was  incorporated  iij 
1945.  A  little  more  than  a  year  was  necessary  foj 
grading,  building  and  equipping  the  plant.  In  Aprili 
1947,  the  first  few  pieces  of  manufactured  furnitur<; 
were  shipped.  Today,  about  five  years  later,  annua; 
production  and  sales  amount  to  several  million  doll 
lars.  Approximately  300  workers  are  employed.  Thin 
plant  started  operations  on  the  "high  end"  rathe:j 
than  progressing  from  modest  origins  and  front 
cheaper  products  into  better  quality  furniture.  ThJ 
organization  prides  itself  on  using  the  best  material! 


Modern  new  one-floor  building  on  beautiful  rural  landscaped  site,  Henredon  Furniture  Industries,  Morganton 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  41 


and  the  finest  workmen  in  the  area.  Recognition  of 
the  best  quality  products  is  given  by  purchasing 
agencies  throughout  the  country. 

"Heritage-Henredon"  products  are  known  and 
handled  by  many  of  the  finest  stores  in  the  country. 
These  products  have  been  largely  18th  Century  and 
adaptations  of  all  pieces  with  the  flavor  of  Chippen- 
dale, Sheraton,  Hepplewhite  and  Duncan  Phyfe. 
More  recently,  with  the  increasing  popularity  of 
modern  styles,  the  Henredon  line  has  become  more 
diversified  and  now  includes  a  group  of  casual  mod- 
ern in  cherry  veneers.  The  plant  is  equipped  with 
the  most  modern  and  efficient  machinery.  Economy 
of  production  is  possible  not  only  because  of  the  mod- 
ern machinery  but  also  because  of  the  layout  and 
planning  requiring  less  handling  and  moving  of  the 
materials  in  processes  from  one  operation  to  another. 

Henredon  Furniture  Industries  and  Heritage  Fur- 
niture, Inc.,  High  Point,  employ  the  same  salesmen. 
Products  of  the  two  firms  are  merchandised  as  Heri- 
tage-Henredon fine  furniture,  a  name  that  is  be- 
coming more  popular  as  time  passes. 

MORGANTON  FURNITURE  CO. 

Morganton  Furniture  Co.,  Morganton,  organized 
in  1904,  is  said  to  be  the  oldest  manufacturing  plant 
at  Morganton  and  is  frequently  referred  to  locally  as 
"Old  Shop".  The  plant  was  founded  by  J.  Hall  and 
a  partner  and  was  operated  as  such  until  1914.  Then 
it  was  purchased  by  A.  C.  Chaffe  and  0.  W.  Slain, 
who  also  operated  the  plant  as  a  partnership  until 
Mr.  Slain  died  in  1931.  The  firm  was  then  incorpo- 
rated under  the  old  name  with  A.  C.  Chaffe  as  presi- 
dent and  general  manager,  H.  L.  Shuey  as  vice-presi- 
dent and  sales  manager  and  W.  H.  Hall,  a  brother  of 
the  founder,  as  secretary  and  treasurer. 

In  1941  most  of  the  stock  was  sold  and  Mr.  Chaffe 
retired,  becoming  chairman  of  the  Board.  Mr.  Shuey 
was  elected  president  and  general  manager ;  Fred 
Slain,  brother  of  one  of  the  earlier  partners,  became 


■*=- 'It"* 


Plant  of  Morganton  Furniture  Co.,  expanded  from  the  oldest 
manufacturing  plant  in  Morganton. 

vice-president  and  W.  H.  Hall  was  continued  as  secre- 
tary and  treasurer.    These  are  the  present  officers. 

The  Morganton  Furniture  Co.  manufactures  a 
quality  line  of  traditional  mahogany  bedroom  and 
dining  room  furniture,  nationally  known  and  adver- 
tised. Its  products  are  sold  in  every  State  in  the 
Union  and  in  Canada  and  Mexico.  Twenty  salesmen 
cover  the  nation  with  this  firm's  lines.  Recently  the 
plant  has  brought  out  open  stock  groups  of  bedroom 
and  dining  room  furniture  made  of  all  cherry  and 
cherry  veneer.  These  groups  are  advertised  nation- 
ally as  "Cherry  Ranch",  styled  especially  for  ranch 
type  homes  and  casual  living.  (See  front  page  for 
"Cherry  Ranch"  dining  room  suite.) 

In  the  past  20  years  annual  production  has  increas- 
ed from  half  a  million  dollars  to  well  over  four  mil- 
lion dollars.  The  plant,  with  185,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space,  is  modern  and  is  equipped  with  modern 
machinery.  It  employs  approximately  600  people 
with  an  annual  payroll  well  in  excess  of  $1,000,000. 
Permanent  displays  of  its  products  are  maintained 
in  Chicago  and  High  Point  and  in  the  factory's  own 
show  rooms. 


Asheboro,  Nearby  TownsfLarge  Furniture  Manufacturers 


Asheboro  has  been  a  furniture  manufacturing 
center  since  around  the  turn  of  the  century.  One  of 
the  earlier  plants  was  the  Randolph  Chair  Co.,  start- 
ed by  C.  C.  Cranford,  who  also  later  operated  the 
Cranford  Chair  Co.  His  son,  E.  D.  Cranford,  was 
also  a  furniture  manufacturer  operating  the  Clarence 
Chair  Co. 

Records  of  the  Employment  Security  Commission 
show  that  13  firms  were  engaged  in  furniture  manu- 
facturing in  Randolph  County  in  1950.  These  firms 
had  average  monthly  employment  of  1,437  and  the 
annual  payroll  for  1950  was  $2,638,803.  Nine  of 
these  plants  were  at  Asheboro,  three  were  at  Liberty 
and  one  was  at  Ramseur. 

Articles  on  three  firms  at  Liberty  are  included 
under  Siler  City-Liberty  head. 

LUCAS  NATIONAL,  INC. 

Lucas  National,  Inc.,  Asheboro,  formerly  National 
Chair  Mfg.  Corp.,  and  earlier  National  Chair  Co., 
was  started  in  1908  as  the  Randolph  Chair  Co.  by 
C.  C.  Cranford  and  engaged  in  chair  manufacturing. 
Mr.  Cranford,  an  important  figure  in  Asheboro's  fur- 
niture and  textile  industry,  also  organized  the  Cran- 
ford Chair  Co.  in  1923,  selling  this  industry  to  the 


Regal  Chair  Co.  in  1946.  He  was  also  interested  in 
the  Piedmont  Chair  Co.  which  was  leased  in  1939 
to  W.  C.  Lucas,  who  had  managed  National  Chair 
Co.,  Inc.,  for  Mr.  Cranford  since  1933.  Prior  to  that 
his  son,  E.  D.  Cranford,  had  operated  this  business 
as  the  Clarence  Chair  Co.,  which  was  organized  un- 
der the  name  National  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  in  1933. 

W.  C.  Lucas,  who  had  grown  up  in  the  furniture 
business,  thus  began  to  acquire  by  lease  and  purchase 
what  has  developed  into  one  of  the  important  fur- 
niture organizations  in  the  State.  He  now  operates 
what  is  known  as  Plant  No.  1  on  South  Fayetteville 
Street  and  Plant  No.  2  on  Academy  St.,  both  in 
Asheboro. 

In  1945  Mr.  Lucas  built  a  large  furniture  plant, 
known  as  the  Lucas  plant,  on  South  Fayetteville 
Street,  and  moved  into  this  new  plant  from  the  Cran- 
ford plant.  This  plant  has  been  operated  for  the  past 
two  or  three  years  under  lease  to  Imperial  of  Ashe- 
boro, Inc.,  manufacturing  high  quality  bedroom 
suites.  Late  in  1951  Mr.  Lucas  sold  this  building  to 
the  General  Electric  Co.,  which  planned  to  open  early 
in  the  new  year  and  begin  the  manufacture  of  elec- 
tric blankets. 


PAGE  42 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


WINTER-SPRING,   1952 


Lucas  National  continues  to  operate  plants  No.  1 
and  2  with  plans  for  greatly  enlarging  and  modern- 
izing Plant  No.  1  by  moving  machinery  and  equip- 
ment from  the  plant  recently  sold  into  Plant  No.  1. 

Officers  of  Lucas  National,  Inc.,  include  W.  C. 
Lucas,  president  and  general  manager;  A.  P.  Cox, 
vice-president;  Mrs.  Pearlie  M.  Lucas,  wife  of  the 
president,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and  Mrs.  Kath- 
leen Shaw,  assistant  secretary.  These  organizations 
combined,  have  authorized  capital  stock  of  more  than 
one-half  million  dollars  and  capital  assets  in  excess 
of  one-half  million  dollars. 

Lucas  National  Plant  No.  1  manufactures  living 
room,  dining  room  and  kitchen  furniture  and  tele- 
vision tables  and  plans  soon  to  begin  the  manufac- 
ture of  bedroom  furniture.  In  Plant  No.  2  the  same 
types  of  furniture  are  manufactured,  in  addition  to 
bedroom  furniture,  office  desks  and  television  tables 
and  cabinets.  The  firm  employs  between  200  and 
300  workers  in  both  plants  with  an  annual  payroll 
ranging  around  $750,000.  When  the  movement  of 
the  equipment  from  the  plant  sold  to  General  Elec- 
tric is  completed  and  installed  in  Plant  No.  1,  em- 
ployment will  be  given  to  probably  100  or  more  addi- 
tional workers  early  in  1952. 

Lucas  National  products  are  sold  throughout  the 
United  States,  largely  by  contract,  and  a  large  force 
of  salesmen  cover  the  entire  country.  Permanent 
displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago,  New  York,  High 
Point  and  in  the  firm's  own  show  rooms  in  Plant 
No.  1. 

Previously  Mr.  Lucas  and  his  organization  one- 
rated  a  plant  at  Coleridge  for  about  five  years.  This 
plant  is  now  idle.  Previously  plants  for  chair  manu- 
facturing, veneer  manufacturing  and  a  square  plant 
were  operated  for  about  10  years  at  Society  Hill,  S. 
C,  but  these  plants  were  sold  about  two  years  ago. 
P  &  P  CHAIR  CO. 

P  &  P  Chair  Co.,  Asheboro,  was  organized  and  in- 
corporated in  1926  with  a  paid-in  capital  stock  of 
$25,000  with  A.  E.  Presnell  and  W.  C.  Page  as  the 
principal  stockholders,  from  whose  initials  the  firm 
takes  its  name.  In  1940  Mr.  Page  purchased  the 
stock  owned  by  Mr.  Presnell. 

Present  officers  of  the  firm  are  W.  J.  Armfield,  Jr., 
president ;  J.  H.  Crutchfield,  vice-president ;  and  Wal- 
ter C.  Page,  secretary  and  treasurer  and  general 
manager.  His  son,  W.  C.  Page,  Jr.,  has  joined  him 
and  is  assuming  increased  responsibilities  in  the 
operation  of  the  plant  as  assistant  secretary  and 
treasurer. 

P  &  P  Chair  Co.  produces  solid  oak  chairs  from 
woods  secured  in  Piedmont  North  Carolina,  round 
post  cane  seat  chairs  and  rockers  and  sag  seat  chairs, 
ranging  from  adult  to  kindergarten  sizes.  The  plant, 
with  about  40,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  is  mod- 
ern and  new  equipment  has  been  added  as  needed. 
From  50  to  60  workers  are  employed  and  the  annual 
pavroll  ranges  around  $65,000. 

P  &  P  Chair  Co.  products  are  distributed  through- 


Sag  seat  rocker  by  P  &  P 
Chair  Co.,  Asheboro. 


the  United  States,  princi- 
pally in  the  South,  and  10 
salesmen  cover  the  area. 
Permanent  displays  are 
maintained  in  High  Point 
and  in  the  plant's  own  show 
rooms. 

RAMSEUR  FURNITURE 
CO. 

Ramseur  Furniture  Co., 
Inc.,  was  started  in  1905  by 
a  group  of  Ramseur  citizens 
with  E.  C.  Watkins  as  man- 
ager and  secretary-treasur- 
er o  fthe  firm  until  his  death 
in  1931.  T.  Ashley  Dent 
was  the  first  president, 
serving  until  1927  when  he 
was  succeeded  by  Henry  H. 
Simmen  of  New  York, 
who  continued  as  president 
until  the  firm  was  purchased  and  reorganized  in  1946. 

With  the  purchase  of  the  firm,  largely  by  New  York 
interests,  in  1946,  Ralph  Deutsch  of  New  York  be- 
came president  and  Herbert  Wallack  became  vice- 
president.  These  New  York  officials  organized  the 
Ramseur  Furniture  Co.  of  New  York  and  operate  it 
as  the  sales  organization  for  the  Ramseur  Furniture 
Co.  At  the  time  of  reorganization,  C.  E.  Brady,  who 
operates  the  Brady  Furniture  Co.  at  Rural  Hall,  be- 
came treasurer  and  E.  B.  Leonard,  Jr.,  Ramseur, 
became  secretary  and  assistant  manager.  T.  L.  Lin- 
gerfelt  came  to  the  Ramseur  plant  in  1949  as  general 
manager.  These  constitute  the  officers  and  princi- 
pal executives  of  the  firm.  (Mr.  Lingerfelt  was 
elected  president  recently). 

The  Ramseur  plant  and  equipment  has  a  valuation 
of  around  three-fourths  of  a  million  dollars  and  con- 
tains about  110,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  An- 
nual sales  range  around  $1,250,000  and  the  plant  em- 
ploys about  200  workers  with  an  annual  pavroll  of 
around  $340,000. 

Ramseur  Furniture  Co.  manufactures  bedroom 
furniture  exclusively,  including  beds,  dressers, 
chests,  vanities,  night  stands,  benches  and  chairs. 
Probably  three-fourths  of  the  firm's  products  are 
made  of  plywood,  consisting  primarily  of  native  pop- 
lar, Appalachian  oak  and  some  pine.  Distribution  is 
over  the  entire  United  States,  about  25  salesmen  cov- 
ering- the  area  and  making  sales  to  department  and 
furniture  stores.  The  products  are  displayed  in  per- 
manent show  rooms  in  New  York,  Chicago  and  High 
Point  and  in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms. 

Other  North  Carolina  firms  in  which  Paramount 
Furniture  Industries  have  interests  are  Bradv  Fur- 
niture Co..  Rural  Hall;  Alliene  Furniture  Corp.. 
Trov,  and  Lovelace  Johnston  Furniture  Corp.,  Wen- 
dell. 

OTHER  RANDOLPH  PLANTS 

Craven.  F.  M..  Chair  Co.,  N.  Park  St.,  Asheboro. 
Dreamland  Mattress  Co..  515  Fayetteville  St.,  Asheboro. 
Wright  Furniture  &  Cabinet  Works,  Rt.  1,  Asheboro. 
Marley,  A.  C,  Chair  Plant,  Staley. 


Siler  City-Liberty  Lead  in  School  Furniture  Production 


Siler  City  and  Liberty,  located  less  than  a  dozen 
miles  apart  and  within  a  few  miles  of  the  determined 
geographical  center  of  the  State  of  North  Carolina, 
claim  the  distinction  of  manufacturing  more  school 


furniture  than  any  other  section  in  the  State,  with 
one  exception,  and  the  same  statement  is  said  to  apply 
just  as  forcibly  to  the  entire  Southeastern  States. 
Production  in    this    classification    includes    school 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  43 


shairs,  desks  and  tables,  including  items  from  kin- 
dergarten to  adult  sizes.  Office  chairs  and  other 
furniture  items  also  are  produced. 

Moreover,  the  Siler  City-Liberty  products  are  not 
confined  to  these  items.  Parlor  pieces,  dinette  suites, 
as  well  as  chairs,  tables  and  other  items  for  hospitals, 
nurses'  homes  and  other  group  users  are  produced. 
Distribution  of  many  of  the  items  is  nation-wide  and 
advertising  is  on  a  national  basis.  Displays  are 
maintained  in  leading  regular  and  special  display 
markets  in  leading  centers. 

In  the  Siler  City  group  are  High  Point  Bending 
and  Chair  Co.  and  Williams  &  Brower,  Inc.,  while 
the  Liberty  group  includes  Gregson  Manufacturing 
Co.,  Liberty  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  and  Stout  Chair  Co.,  Inc. 

HIGH  POINT  BENDING  &  CHAIE  CO. 

High  Point  Bending  &  Chair  Co.,  Siler  City,  was 
started  in  1901  by  M.  J.  Boling,  engaged  in  bending 
chair  parts  for  other  chair  manufacturers.  About 
three  years  later  the  firm  started  manufacturing 
chairs  itself  and  was  said  to  have  been  the  first  bent- 
wood  chair  manufacturing  firm  in  the  South.  In  its 
earlier  days  the  firm  was  owned  in  part  by  High 
Point  interests  and  the  office  of  the  firm  was  located 
in  High  Point.  Its  incorporators  in  later  years  were 
M.  J.  Boling  and  J.  Wade  Siler  of  Siler  City  and  S. 
H.  Tomlinson  of  High  Point.  Mr.  Boling  was  presi- 
dent and  general  manager  of  the  firm  until  his  death 
and  was  succeeded  by  C.  B.  Thomas  as  president. 

F.  J.  Boling,  son  of  the  founder  and  former  presi- 
dent, was  elected  president  in  1931  and  later  also 
became  general  manager,  positions  he  still  holds. 
J.  K.  Boling  is  vice-president;  K.  G.  Clapp  is  treas- 
urer, and  H.  E.  Stout  is  secretary.  All  officers  are 
active  in  the  firm.  These  officers  and  Mrs.  R.  F. 
Paschal  compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

The  High  Point  Bending  &  Chair  Co.  employs 
around  250  workers.  In  1949  it  purchased  a  plant 
at  Azalea,  N.  C,  which  produces  the  dimension  stock 
for  the  chairs.  This  plant  employs  about  25  workers. 
Products  are  distributed  throughout  the  United 
States  and  about  15  salesmen  call  on  dealers  through- 
out the  nation. 

High  Point  Bending  &  Chair  Co.  manufactures 
chairs  exclusively  for  business,  homes,  schools,  or- 
phanages and  other  institutions.  All  of  its  products 
are  solid  hardwoods,  largely  of  oak  and  pecan.  Per- 
manent displays  are  maintained  in  High  Point  and 
in  the  plant's  own  show  rooms,  for  the  convenience 
of  dealers. 

WILLIAMS  &  BROWER 

Williams  &  Brower,  Inc.,  Siler  City,  was  organized 
in  1920  by  R.  A.  Williams  and  C.  L.  Brower  as  a 
partnership  and  was  engaged  in  producing  bent  fur- 
niture stock  for  other  furniture  manufacturers.  In 
1928  it  started  production  of  household  furniture  in 
its  own  name.  In  the  beginning,  the  plant  had  only 
6,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  was  employing 
only  45  workers  in  1930  when  the  firm  was  reorgan- 
ized and  incorporated. 

Prior  to  the  incorporation  and  reorganization  in 
1930,  Mr.  Williams  bought  out  the  interest  of  Mr. 
Brower  and  became  president  and  treasurer  of  the 
firm.  In  1942  Mr.  Williams  died  and  Mrs.  Williams 
became  president  of  the  corporation.  She  and  her 
j^wo  sons,  Russell  A.  Williams,  vice-president,  and 
R.  V.  Williams,  secretary-treasurer,  are  the  directors 


1 

Modern  desk  and  chair  produced  by 
Willia7ns  &  Brower,  Inc.,  Siler  City. 


and  principal  stock- 
holders. 

After  various  in- 
creases in  capacity 
during  the  years, 
the  firm  now  has 
100,000  square  feet 
of  floor  space  and 
employs  165  work- 
ers with  an  annual 
payroll  of  approxi- 
mately $250,000.00. 
The  firm  produces 
around  1200  pieces  daily. 

Production  includes  desks  and  chair  units  includ- 
ing kindergarten  and  adult  size  chairs,  tablet  armed 
chairs,  cafeteria  and  library  tables  and  kindergarten 
pocket  tables.  All  products  are  of  hardwood  lumber, 
principally  beech. 

Williams  &  Brower  sells  its  products  practically 
all  over  the  United  States  through  local  distributors, 
and  the  bulk  of  it  is  delivered  by  the  firm's  fleet  of 
four  trailer-trucks.  Williams  &  Brower  belongs  to 
the  Southern  Furniture  Manufacturers  Association 
and  to  the  National  School  Service  Institute  in  Chi- 
cago and  displays  its  products  at  this  institute's  an- 
nual shows  in  December.  It  also  maintains  perma- 
nent displays  in  its  own  show  rooms. 

OTHER  CHATHAM  PLANTS 

Chatham  Novelties  Co.,  Sanford  Hgw.,  Siler  City. 
Sears  Cedar  Chest  Co.,  Rt.   2,  Siler  City. 

GREGSON  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Gregson  Manufacturing  Co.,  Liberty,  was  organ- 
ized in  1925  by  B.  G.  Gregson  and  was  incorporated 
as  B.  G.  Gregson,  Inc.  The  firm  with  only  five  em- 
ployees started  out  in  a  small  plant  located  near  the 
present  site  of  the  company  and  manufactured  picker 
sticks  for  the  textile  industry.  After  two  or  three 
years,  the  plant  began  making  chairs  and  also  added 
tables,  expanding  until  it  was  making  a  fairly  com- 
plete line  of  office  and  school  chairs  and  tables. 

In  1938  the  business  was  taken  over  by  three  chil- 
dren of  the  organizer  and  became  a  partnership  own- 
ed by  J.  D.  Gregson,  J.  G.  Gregson  and  Mrs.  Anna 
Lee  Baldwin  and  the  name  was  changed  to  the  pres- 
ent name.  School  furniture  is  produced  in  the  orig- 
inal plant  and  office  furniture  is  manufactured  in  a 
new  unit  built  in  1946  to  take  care  of  the  increasing 
production  of  the  firm. 

Gregson  produces  furniture  now  to  the  extent  of 
approximately  $1,500,000  valuation  a  year.  Around 
200  workers  are  employed  and  the  annual  payroll 
is  around  $330,000.  Floor  space  is  approximately 
110,000  square  feet,  a  recent  addition  containing 
about  1400  square  feet. 

Office  and  school  chairs  and  tables  manufactured 
include  lines  of  Chippendale  chairs  with  a  large  vol- 
ume of  Modern  pieces.  Sales  cover  the  entire  coun- 
try, 14  salesmen  working  the  area.  Office  furniture 
is  distributed  through  retailers  and  distributors  han- 
dle the  school  furniture.  Permanent  displays  are 
maintained  in  Chicago,  New  York  and  Los  Angeles. 
LIBERTY  CHAIR  CO. 

Liberty  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Liberty,  was  organized  in 
1910  by  J.  A.  Martin  and  associates  as  the  Liberty 
Picker  Stick  and  Novelty  Co.  and  was  engaged  in 
manufacturing  supplies  for  the  cotton  mill  industry. 
In  1916  the  firm  shifted  to  chair  manufacturing  and 


PAGE  44 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


changed  its  name  to  Liberty  Chair 
Co.  From  the  beginning  Mr.  Mar- 
tin has  been  general  manager  and 
secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  firm. 
In  the  earlier  days  C.  R.  Curtis  was 
president  and  W.  P.  White,  a  sales- 
man, was  vice-president. 

Present  officers  of  Liberty  Chair 
Co.  are  J.  G.  Coward,  president  and 
superintendent,  M.  E.  Johnson, 
vice-president  (inactive),  J.  A. 
Martin,  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager.  Two  of  Mr.  Mar- 
tin's sons  are  taking  over  impor- 
tant position  in  the  organization, 
including  D.  W.  Martin,  assistant 
secretary-treasurer,  and  K.  A.  Martin,  cost  and  pro- 
duction manager.  The  officers  and  H.  P.  Coward, 
shipping  superintendent,  form  the  Board  of  Direc- 
tors. 

Since  Liberty  shifted  to  chair  making  in  1916,  it 
has  also  extended  its  activities  to  include  novelties 
and  dinettes.  Its  products  include  bedroom,  dining 
room  and  school  chairs,  odd  chairs  and  stools.  Prin- 
cipal woods  used  are  tupelo,  gum  and  oak. 


Hardwood  desk 

chair  made  by 

Liberty  Chair 

Co.,  Liberty. 


Liberty's  outstanding  capital  stock  is  $111,000 
and  annual  sales  are  in  the  neighborhood  of  $1,000,- 
000.  The  plant  embraces  about  40,000  square  feet 
and  150  workers  are  employed  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll of  around  $300,000. 

Sales  of  Liberty  products  cover  the  entire  United 
States,  22  salesmen  working  the  area.  Permanent 
show  places  are  maintained  in  New  York,  Chicago 
and  High  Point. 

STOUT  CHAIR  CO. 

Stout  Chair  Co.,  Liberty,  started  as  B.  G.  Gregson, 
Inc.,  was  bought  by  a  group  of  individuals  and  in- 
corporated in  1939  as  the  Stout  Chair  Co.  Officers 
are  F.  J.  Boling,  president,  J.  K.  Boling,  vice-presi- 
dent, K.  G.  Clapp,  treasurer,  and  H.  E.  Stout,  sec- 
retary. 

The  Stout  Chair  Co.  manufactures  chairs  for  of- 
fices, homes,  schools  and  institutions  and  sells  its 
products  throughout  the  United  States  direct  to  dis- 
tributors. Its  products  are  made  of  hardwoods, 
largely  oak.  The  firm  employs  more  than  100  work- 
ers. Its  products  are  displayed  in  its  own  show 
rooms  for  dealers  who  come  to  the  factory. 


Statesville  Extensive  Furniture  Producer  for  50  Years 


Furniture,  after  a  period  as  a  home  shop  and  cab- 
inet shop  activity,  had  its  beginning  as  an  industry 
around  the  turn  of  the  century.  The  first  furniture 
plant  evidently  was  operated  by  the  Statesville  Fur- 
niture Co.,  formed  by  a  group  of  local  citizens  headed 
by  J.  T.  Shelton.  This  firm  made  bedroom  furniture, 
but  was  burned  in  1903.  Also  in  1903  the  Imperial 
Furniture  Co.  was  formed  by  another  group  of  local 
citizens  headed  by  C.  E.  Keiger.  This  plant  is  now 
owned  by  Thonet  Industries,  Inc.  and  is  operated  as 
North  Carolina  Furniture,  Inc.  Following  these, 
among  the  early  furniture  and  woodworking  plants, 
were  Kincaid  Furniture  Co.  which  burned  in  1927 
on  the  present  site  of  the  Statesville  Plywood  and 
Veneer  Co. ;  the  Kennedy  Plywood  Co. ;  the  States- 
ville Safe  &  Table  Co.,  later  Diamond  Hill  Furniture 
Co.  and  now  the  Statesville  Chair  Co. ;  the  Stimpson 
Veneer  Co. ;  the  Carolina  Parlor  Furniture  Co.,  and 
the  Sherrill  Furniture  Co. 

The  furniture  industry  has  grown  in  Statesville 
to  the  extent  that  it  almost  equals  the  textile  indus- 
try. Furniture  and  its  allied  industries  employ  1800 
or  more  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  approach- 


T 
A 


Air  vieio  of  the  modern  plant  of  the  Statesville  Chair  Co. 


ing  $4,000,000.  Practically  all  types  of  wooden  fur-j 
niture  are  produced.  The  Employment  Security 
Commission  records  have  furniture  alone  show  that 
19  plants  were  in  operation  in  Iredell  County  in  1950 
all  but  one  of  them  in  Statesville,  with  average 
monthly  employment  of  1344  and  total  payrolls  of 
$2,994,663  in  1950. 

Among  the  pioneers  in  the  industries  were  J. 
Shelton,  P.  K.  Kennedy,  Clarence  Stimpson,  W. 
Thomas,  C.  E.  Keiger,  A.  E.  Welborn,  J.  C.  Steele 
L.  C.  Wagner,  W.  D.  Turner,  Lee  Kincaid  and  Toirj| 
McElwee. 

STATESVILLE  CHAIR  CO. 

Statesville  Chair  Co.,  Statesville,  was  organizec} 
and  incorporated  in  1919  with  T.  Garland  Shelton 
as  principal  organizer  for  the  purpose  of  making 
chairs  to  be  sold  primarily  to  the  two  furniture! 
plants  then  operating  at  Statesville  to  go  with  then 
furniture  suites.  Mr.  Shelton  served  as  secretary 
and  treasurer  and  general  manager  until  1940  when 
as  mayor  of  Statesville,  he  died  while  presiding  oveij] 
exercises  in  which  James  A.  Farley,  Postmaster  Genjj 
eral,  was  dedicating  Statesville'! 
new  Post  Office. 

When  the  Statesville  Chaii 
Co.  was  first  organized  it  wa; 
capitalized  at  $60,000  and  em! 
ployed  probably  30  workers  h 
the  early  days. 

Most  of  the  officers  of  thj 
Statesville  Chair  Co.,  except  Mffl 
Shelton,  were  inactive.  The  firsj 
president  was  T.  N.  McElwee; 
who  was  succeeded  following  hi 
death  by  his  brother,  Dr.  Rosi 
S.  McElwee,  who  served  until  hi! 
death  in  1948.  John  A.  Scot) 
then  became  president,  servin; 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  45 


Louis  V  design  chair  made 

by  Statesville  Chair  Co., 

Statesville. 


until  his  death  in  1950.  Na- 
than 0.  McElwee,  son  of 
Dr.  McElwee,  was  then 
elected  president,  still  hold- 
ing that  position. 

When  Mr.  Shelton  died  in 
1940,  G.  P.  Scott,  who  had 
started  with  the  firm  soon 
after  its  organization  in 
1921,  became  secretary  and 
treasurer,  positions  he  still 
holds.  Other  present  offi- 
cers include  Henry  R.  Long, 
first  vice-president  and 
plant  superintendent;  John 
S.  Raynal,  second  vice-pres- 
ident; H.  C.  Brett,  third 
vice-president ;  Julian  S. 
White,  assistant  secretary, 
and  Miss  Sadie  Alexander, 
assistant  treasurer. 
Present  authorized  capital  of  the  Statesville  Chair 
Co.  is  $1,000,000,  approximately  one-half  of  which 
is  outstanding.  Annual  sales  amount  to  approx- 
imately $2,500,000.  The  firm  has  about  150,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space,  employs  approximately 
300  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $500,- 
000. 

Spreading  out  from  its  original  operations  in  pro- 
ducing chairs  for  other  furniture  manufacturers, 
Statesville  Chair  Co.  now  produces  chairs  for  bed- 
room, dining  room  and  living  room,  including 
straight  chairs,  rocking  chairs  and  platform  rockers. 
Most  of  the  chairs  produced  are  Eighteenth  Century 
designs,  although  Modern  and  Provincial  types  are 
also  produced.  Materials  used  are  genuine  and  Phil- 
ippine mahogany,  gum  and  oak,  both  in  solid  woods 
and  plywoods. 

Statesville  Chair  Co.  sells  its  products  over  the  en- 
tire United  States,  25  salesmen  covering  this  area. 
Permanent  displays  are  maintained  in  New  York, 
Chicago,  High  Point,  and  in  its  own  show  rooms  in 
the  plant. 

NORTH  CAEOLEYA  FURNITURE,  INC. 

North  Carolina  Furniture,  Inc.,  Statesville,  a  sub- 
sidiary of  Thonet  Industries,  Inc.,  1  Park  Avenue, 
New  York,  was  established  around  1940.  When  this 
firm  purchased  the  local  plant,  formerly  operated  as 

the  Imperial  Furni- 
ture Co.,  it  moved 
out  most  of  the  old 
machinery  and 
equipped  the  plant 
with  the  most  mod- 
ern furniture  man- 
ufacturing machin- 
ery. 

The  parent  organ- 
ization, Thonet  In- 
dustries, Inc.,  estab- 
lished as  a  furni- 
ture manufacturing 
organization  in 
1830,     handles    the 

entire  production  of 
Modern  bent-ply  chair  made  by  +^      Q+ofocnn'llo    unit 

North  Carolina  Furniture,  Inc.,  ni        +  j      + 

Statesville,  subsidiary  of  Thonet        as   J- nonet  products. 

industries,  inc.  Additional     plants 


are  operated  in  this  country  at  Sheboygan,  Wis., 
and  York,  Penna.  Sales  offices  are  maintained 
in  New  York,  Chicago  and  Statesville.  Leopold  Pil- 
zer,  New  York,  president  of  the  Statesville  corpora- 
tion, is  also  president  of  Thonet  Industries,  Inc.,  New 
York.  Bruno  R.  Weill,  Mr.  Pilzer's  stepson,  of 
Statesville  and  York,  Penna.,  is  vice-president ;  E.  B. 
Halward  is  secretary  and  general  manager  of  the 
Statesville  plant;  R.  Delt  is  treasurer  and  production 
manager  and  Miss  Elizabeth  Holshouser  is  assistant 
treasurer. 

North  Carolina  Furniture  has  annual  sales  of  $1,- 
500,000  or  more,  all  to  and  through  Thonet  Industries 
and  under  the  Thonet  trademark.  The  Statesville 
plant  has  approximately  150,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space,  including  25,000  square  feet  added  in  a  build- 
ing completed  about  a  year  ago.  It  employs  around 
250  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  approxi- 
mately $600,000. 

Thonet  products,  manufactured  by  the  Statesville 
firm,  include  bentwood  chairs  for  hotels,  restaurants 
and  institutions,  such  as  schools,  hospitals  and  libra- 
ries. All  chairs  are  of  modern  type,  produced  from 
bentwood  or  electronic  moulded  plywood.  Principal 
woods  used  are  soft  elm,  soft  maple,  hard  maple  and 
birch.  Due  to  bent  features,  the  manufacturers 
claim  that  the  chairs  are  both  stronger  and  lighter. 
SHERRILL  FURNITURE  CO. 

Sherrill  Furniture  Co.,  Statesville,  was  organized 
in  1936  as  a  partnership  by  Flake  Sherrill  and  W. 
Clyde  Suddreth.  The  firm  was  incorporated  in  1947 
with  an  authorized     ,~ 


capital  stock  of 
$100,000.  At  that 
time  it  became  af- 
filiated with  the 
Blowing  Rock  Chair 
Co.  in  Lenoir  and 
both  firms  sell  their 
products  through 
the  Blowing  Rock 
Furniture  Co.,  Le- 
noir. Officers  are 
Flake  Sherrill,  pres- 
ident, W.  Clyde  Sud- 
dreth, vice-presi- 
dent, and  Joe  M. 
Sherrill,  secretary- 
treasurer. 

The  Sherrill  Fur- 
niture Co.  manufac- 
tures Traditional 
dining  room  furni- 
ture of  cherry,  ma- 
hogany,    and     pine 


Hi  i  >  O    1 

HI  W       m 

■■:■■■'•  .     i 

:■■'''■        ■  '  '    -:  ; 


■   ■  '■■:: 


Mahogany  breakfront  with  gold 

carving  used  as  china  cabinet  or 

living  room  piece,  by  Sherrill 

Furniture  Co.,  Statesville. 


and  of  veneer  and  plywood.  Its  products  aro  sold 
throughout  the  nation  and  30  salesmen,  these  also 
selling  Blowing  Rock  Chair  products,  cover  the 
entire  United  States.  Permanent  show  spaces  are 
maintained  in  New  York,  Chicago,  High  Point  and  in 
the  Blowing  Rock  Furniture  Co.  plant  at  Lenoir. 

This  firm  has  capital  stock  of  $50,000  and  annual 
production  reaches  approximately  $1,100,000.  The 
annual  payroll  for  the  150  employees  is  approximate- 
ly $330,000. 

CAROLINA  PARLOR  FURNITURE  CO. 

Carolina  Parlor  Furniture  Co.,  Statesville,  was  or- 
ganized and  incorporated  in  1909  by  L.  S.  Gilliam 


PAGE  46 


THE  E.  $.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Living  room  suite  of  Gilliam  furniture  made  by  Carolina  Parlor 
Furniture  Co.,  Statesville. 

and  associates,  with  an  authorized  capital  of  $200,- 
000.  The  plant  was  small,  starting  with  12  employ- 
ees, and  in  the  first  year  produced  and  shipped  parlor 
furniture  valued  at  $50,000.  In  its  processes  of  ex- 
pansion, this  firm  has  made  three  moves,  each  time 
into  larger  quarters. 

Officers  of  the  firm  are  L.  S.  Gilliam,  president  and 
general  manager ;  L.  S.  Gilliam,  Jr.,  assistant  general 
manager;  C.  E.  Keiger,  vice-president,  and  Miss 
Nancy  Gilliam,  niece  of  the  president,  secretary  and 
treasurer. 

Carolina  Parlor  Furniture  Co.  now  has  annual 
sales  ranging  from  $800,000  to  $900,000  of  its  prod- 
ucts under  the  trade  name  of  Gilliam  Distinctive 
Furniture.  The  plant  now  occupies  about  66,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space,  employs  around  150  work- 
ers and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $225,000. 
Products  are  distributed  largely  in  the  southeastern 
area  covering  12  or  15  states  and  13  salesmen  work 
this  area.  Two  nearby  plants  are  operated,  Plant 
No.  2  making  the  frames  and  Plant  No.  1  upholster- 
ing and  shipping  the  products. 

Products  are  exclusively  living  room  furniture  in- 
cluding 18th  Century,  Early  American,  French  Pro- 
vincial and  Modern  lines,  including  sofas,  wing 
chairs,  barrel  and  occasional  chairs,  love  seats,  rock- 
ers and  sofa  beds.  The  products  are  from  solid 
woods,  including  domestic  hardwoods  and  Honduras 
mahogany. 

Carolina  Parlor  Furniture  Co.  displays  its  prod- 
ucts in  the  High  Point  Mart. 

BYLO  FURNITURE  CO. 

Bylo  Furniture  Co.,  Statesville,  manufacturers  of 
baby  furniture,  taking  its  name  from  Bye-Low,  a 
lullaby  or  hush  tune,  was  organized  in  1925.  The 
plant  was  purchased  by  W.  H.  Allen  in  1933,  and 
under  his  management  the  company  has  enjoyed  a 
splendid  growth. 

Bylo  Furniture  Co.  was  incorporated  in  1946  with 
W.  H.  Allen  as  president,  treasurer  and  general  man- 
ager; C.  N.  Steele,  vice-president,  and  Mrs.  W.  H. 

Allen,  secretary. 
The  authorized  cap- 
ital stock  is  $100,- 
000.00. 

The  plant  after 
several  enlarge- 
ments now  contains 
approximately  55,- 
000  square  feet  of 
floor  space,  and  is 
filled  with  the  latest 
machinery    suitable 

.   .                        T>  ,  for  the  manufacture 

Baby    crib    of   tupelo   veneer,   Bylo  »    ,     ,         „         ., 

Furniture  Co.,  Statesville,  maker  °*     Daby     turniture. 

of  children's  furniture.  Annual  sales  are  in 


if 


the  neighborhood  of  $700,000.00.  The  firm  employs 
from  80  to  90  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of 
about  $135,000.00. 

Bylo-Line  of  juvenile  furniture  is  sold  primarily  in 
the  Southeastern  States,  but  sales  are  spreading  into 
the  Middle  West  and  East,  with  particularly  large 
shipments  to  Puerto  Rico.  The  territory  is  covered 
by  salesmen  calling  on  the  retail  furniture  trade.  The 
Bylo-Line  is  widely  known  and  is  outstanding  in  the 
territory  that  it  covers.  The  company  enjoys  the 
most  pleasant  relations  as  to  management  and  work- 
ers. It  joins  its  employees  in  paying  premiums  on 
group  insurance  covering  health,  accident  and  hos- 
pitalization, and  gives  vacation  with  pay  in  July  and 
December  each  year. 

The  Bylo  Furniture  Co.  is  recognized  as  the  largest 
manufacturer  of  juvenile  furniture  in  the  South,  pro- 
ducing such  items  as  screen  cribs,  cribs,  youth  beds, 
chests,  and  other  baby  furniture.  Permanent  dis- 
play is  maintained  in  High  Point. 

HOME  MADE  CHAIR  CO. 

Home  Made  Chair  Co.,  Statesville,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1935  by  Dr.  L.  O.  Gibson  and  F 
J.  Murdock.  Later  the  Mur- 
dock  stock  was  purchased  ^mm®^ 

by  Dr.  Gibson.  The  officers 
consist  of  Dr.  L.  O.  Gib- 
son, president;  Dr.  M.  W. 
Gibson,  his  brother,  vice- 
president  (both  inactive), 
and  M.  B.  Brosius,  secre- 
tary-treasurer and  general 
manager.  Guy  Allie  is 
foreman  of  the  finishing 
room. 

Home  Made  Chair  Co. 
utilizes  approximately  50,- 
000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  and  the  average  num- 
ber of  employees  is  around 
85.  The  products  are  sold 
over  the  United  States,  largely  in  the  North  Central 
states,  and  in  Cuba,  Hawaii  and  Canada.  Shipments 
are  made  largely  to  individual  stores. 

Home  Made  Chair  Co.  manufactures  dinette  drop 
leaf  tables  and  ladder-back  chairs  to  match  and  juv-t 
enile  chairs,  rockers  and  table  sets.  All  are  producedj 
from  local  hardwoods,  including  beech,  birch,  poplar) 
and  oak,  practically  all  in  solid  woods. 

Displays  of  the  products  of  this  firm  are  made  in 
the  New  York  Toy  Show. 

TROUTMAN 
TROUTMAN  CHAIR  CO. 

Troutman  Chair  Co.,  Troutman,  was  organized  and| 
incorporated  March  15,  1924,  with  H.  J.  Murdock  as| 
president ;  F.  J.  Murdock,  general  manager,  and  Her-i, 
man   Brown,   secretary   and  treasurer.     Later  the! 
majority  stock  in  the  company  was  acquired  by  Her-j 
man  Brown  and  his  father,  L.  N.  Brown,  was  electecj  | 
president  and  his  brother,  S.  A.  Brown,  vice-presi- 
dent.    Herman  Brown  continues  as  secretary  anc 
treasurer  and  became  general  manager  of  the  firm. 

The  two  units  of  the  plant  contain  about  30,00( 
square  feet  of  floor  space  and  the  firm  employ! 
around  64  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging 
around  $150,000.     The  firm  distributes  its  product: 


Sag    seat   rocker    of   May- 
flower line  finished  in 
Bradford  maple,   by  Home 
Made  Chair  Co.,  Statesville. 


i 


Winter-Spring,  1 952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  47 


over  six  or  eight  states  in  the  southeastern  area 
which  is  covered  by  three  salesmen. 

Troutman  Chair  Co.  produces  cane  seat  chairs  and 
porch  rockers,  all  produced  from  local  hardwoods 
and  selling  at  moderate  prices.  It  maintains  a  per- 
manent exhibit  at  High  Point. 


OTHER  STATESVILLE   PLANTS 

Builtwright  Chair  Co.,  Connor  St. 

Custom  Chair  Co. 

Dixie  Seating  Co. 

Jack  &  Jill  Furniture  Co.,  Armfield  St. 

Ross  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Shelton  Ave. 

Shaver,  A.  L.,  &  Sons,  Charlotte  Hgw.,  Rt.   1. 

Statesville  Upholstering  Co.,  129  Water  St. 


Winston-Salem  Early  and  Important  Furniture  Producer 


When  the  Moravians  first  settled  at  Bethabara 
(Old  Town)  in  the  1750s  and  began  a  decade  or  more 
later  the  foundation  for  Salem,  among  them  was  an 
artisan  designated  as  a  cabinet  maker.  He  and  his 
successors  made  many  pieces  of  furniture,  some  of 
which  are  still  in  use  in  the  modern  city  of  Winston- 
Salem.  This  furniture  was  made  of  solid  wood  and 
much  of  it  heavy  and  cumbersome,  numerous  items 
surviving  after  use  by  many  generations. 

The  oldest  continuing  firm  is  the  J.  C.  Spach  Wag- 
on Works  established  in  1854  and  continuing  in  the 
same  family  under  the  tradename  of  Unique  Furni- 
ture Makers.  More  than  30  years  ago  this  firm  shift- 
ed from  wagons  to  furniture  and  is  now  one  of  the 
modern  furniture  manufacturers  in  the  State.  In 
1871  Fogle  Bros.  Co.  was  started  as  a  lumber  firm. 
A  descendant  of  one  of  the  Fogle  brothers,  Fred  A. 
Fogle,  and  John  D.  Stockton  organized  Fogle  Furni- 
ture Co.  who  produced  hand  woven  fiber  furniture 
shifting  to  matched  living  room  furniture  in  1928. 

In  1898  Oakland  Furniture  Co.  began  operation 
and  later  was  taken  over  by  B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture 
Co.,  organized  in  1906,  and  now  one  of  the  largest 
furniture  plants  in  northwestern  North  Carolina. 
The  Mengel  Company,  Louisville,  Kentucky,  estab- 
lished a  plant  in  Winston  in  1913  to  manufacture 
wooden  tobacco  boxes  and  has  added  to  its  products 
fiber  containers,  store  fixtures,  wall  cabinets  and 
closets.  Furniture  plants  are  also  operating  at  Rural 
Hall  and  Kernersville,  also  in  Forsyth  County. 

In  addition  to  several  smaller  firms,  Forsyth  Coun- 
ty last  year  contained  12  furniture  plants  which  were 
subject  to  the  Employment  Security  Law,  thus  em- 
ploying eight  or  more  workers.  Average  monthly 
employment  in  these  plants  was  1,056  and  the  total 
payroll  in  1950  was  $2,826,602,  Employment  Security 
Commission  records  reveal. 

B.  F.  HUNTLEY  FURNITURE  CO. 

B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Patterson  Ave. 
&    East    12th    St.,  H 

Winston-Salem,  N. 
C.  is  one  of  the  older 
furniture  manufac- 
turing plants  in 
Northwestern  North 
Carolina,  having 
been  organized  and 
incorporated  as  the 
Oakland  Furniture 
Co.  in  1900.  The  or- 
ganizers were  the 
members  of  the  re- 
tail furniture  firm 
of  Huntley  -  Hill  - 
Stockton    Co.    with 

B      F      "Rhyi+Ipv     n«      Triple  dresser,  Modern,  in  American 
.     i  .     numiey     db      walnut  veneers,   by  B.   F.   Huntley 
president    and    gen-  Furniture  Co.,  Winston-Salem. 


eral  manager ;  W.  P. 
Hill  as  vice-presi- 
dent, and  M.  D. 
Stockton  as  secre- 
tary-treasurer. An- 
other important 
stockholder  was  R. 
J.  Reynolds  who  had 
come  to  know  the 
members  of  the  re- 
tail furniture  store 
through  his  purch- 
ases of  furniture 
items  offered  in  ex- 
change for  various 
numbers  of  tags 
from  the  Reynolds 
Tobacco  products. 
The  firm  was  capi- 
talized at  $25,000, 
each  of  the  founders 
purchasing  around 
$5,000  in  stock. 


Chest   on    chest,   French   Provincial 
dresser  in   cherry   veneers,   French 
light  walnut  finish,  made  by  B.  F. 
Huntley  Furniture  Co.,  Winston- 
Salem. 


The  first  plant  occupied  the  building  in  North  Win- 
ston now  owned  by  the  Mengel  Co.  and  used  as  its 
box  plant.  Meanwhile  the  Winston  Desk  Co.,  which 
had  failed,  was  bought  in  at  a  receiver's  sale  bv  B. 
F.  Huntley  and  consolidated.  Meanwhile  the  B.  F. 
Huntley  Furniture  Co.  was  organized  and  incorpo- 
rated and  absorbed  the  earlier  Oakland  Furniture 
Co.  The  authorized  capital  stock  was  increased  to 
$125,000. 

In  1916  J.  S.  Lynch  joined  the  firm  and  became 
assistant  to  President  B.  F.  Huntley.  Four  years 
later  he  became  a  director  and  vice-president.  The 
business  at  that  time  had  increased  to  around  $750,- 
000  a  year.  In  1920  the  B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture  Co. 
increased  its  authorized  capital  stock  to  $1,000,000 
and  bought  the  Forsyth  Furniture  Plant,  known  as 
Plant  No.  2,  which  burned  in  1934.  Again  in  1923 
the  authorized  capital  stock  was  increased  to  $2,500,- 
000,  with  $1,500,000  in  common  and  $1,000,000  in 
preferred  stock.  By  that  time  sales  had  increased 
to  $3,000,000  a  year. 

J.  S.  Lynch  was  elected  president  of  the  company 
in  1925,  following  the  death  of  Mr.  Huntley,  and 
also  became  general  manager  of  the  plant.  B.  F. 
Huntley,  Jr.,  was  elected  vice-president  and  Mr. 
Stockton  continued  as  secretary-treasurer.  Then  in 
1929  the  B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture  Co.  was  sold  to  the 
Simmons  Company  of  New  York  and  became  a  sub- 
sidiary of  that  company  without  any  change  in  name 
and  officers.  Mr.  Lynch  continued  as  president  and 
general  manager. 

J.  S.  Lynch  and  associates  in  1935  bought  the  in- 
dustry from  the  Simmons  Company,  Mr.  Lynch  con- 
tinuing as  president  and  general  manager.    Ralph 


PAGE  48 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


M.  Stockton,  son  of  one  of  the  founders,  became  vice- 
president  ;  Charles  L.  Creech,  Sr.,  treasurer,  and  Sam 
H.  Pinkston  became  secretary.  R.  J.  Reynolds,  son 
of  one  of  the  original  organizers  of  the  company  be- 
came a  director.  The  authorized  capital  stock  at 
present  is  $1,500,000  common  stock. 

B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture  Company's  production 
has  now  reached  $7,000,000  a  year.  The  plant  occu- 
pies between  seven  and  eight  acres  of  floor  space  and 
between  400  and  500  workers  are  employed  with  an 
annual  payroll  well  over  $1,000,000.  The  present  of- 
ficers of  the  company  are:  J.  S.  Lynch,  president; 
James  S.  Lynch,  Jr.,  executive  vice-president;  Ralph 
M.  Stockton,  vice-president  in  charge  of  manufactur- 
ing; E.  S.  Hutchison,  vice-president  in  charge  of 
sales;  S.  H.  Pinkston,  secretary,  and  H.  H.  Bur- 
roughs, treasurer. 

Prior  to  1941  this  firm  manufactured  dining  room 
furniture.  After  that  time  it  confined  its  production 
to  bedroom  furniture  exclusively,  divided  about  half 
and  half  between  18th  Century  and  Modern.  Prod- 
ucts are  of  walnut  and  mahogany  veneers,  with  solid 
hardwood  bases.  The  firm  operates  its  own  plywood 
plant. 

B.  F.  Huntley  Furniture  Co.  distributes  its  prod- 
uct all  over  the  United  States  and  has  extensive  ship- 
ments to  Mexico  and  Cuba.  A  sales  force  of  35  men 
cover  the  area.  Permanent  displays  are  maintained 
in  Chicago,  New  York  and  High  Point. 

UNIQUE  FURNITURE  MAKERS 
(J.  C.  SPACH  WAGON  WORKS) 

Unique  Furniture  Makers,  Stadium  Drive,  Win- 
ston-Salem, is  a  trade  name  for  J.  C.  Spach  Wagon 
Works,  Inc.,  which  has  been  in  continuous  operation 
in  Winston-Salem  for  almost  100  years.  The  firm 
was  established  by  members  of  the  Spach  family  in 
1854  and  manufactured  Spach  wagons  for  more  than 
65  years.  Spach  wagons  were  famous  throughout 
the  Southeastern  United  States.  Production  of  wag- 
ons was  continued  until  around  1920  when  the  motor 
truck  took  its  place  in  the  nation's  transportation 
system. 

More  than  25  years  ago  the  J.  C.  Spach  Wagon 
Works  shifted  to  the  manufacture  of  kitchen  and 
breakfast  room  furniture  which  continued  until  1935. 
About  that  time  the  plant  of  the  Winston-Salem 
Chair  Co.  was  acquired.  In  this  plant  the  firm  con- 
tinued the  production  of  bedroom  furniture.  After 
about  two  years  the  firm  eliminated  bedroom  furni- 
ture and  started  producing  breakfast  room  and  kit- 
chen, as  well  as  apartment  dining  room  furniture  in 
the  recently  acquired  plant.  Following  a  fire  in 
1945  extensive  additions  were  made  in  1946-47,  and 
in  1948  the  J.  C.  Spach  Wagon  Works  plant  was  aban- 
doned and  all  of  the  firm's  activities  were  consoli- 
dated into  one  large  plant. 

During  World  War  II  the  J.  C.  Spach  Wagon 
Works  manufactured  aircraft  parts  for  the  U.  S. 
Navy  and  after  the  War  in  1946  changed  its  lines  to 
open  stock  groups  of  dining  room  and  small  dining 
room  furniture.  In  1948  bedroom  pieces  were  added 
to  the  open  stock  group.  Meanwhile  kitchen  and 
breakfast  room  furniture  was  gradually  eliminated. 
The  firm  now  produces  bedroom  furniture,  including 
beds,  dressers,  chests,  vanities,  chairs  and  benches 
and  for  the  dining  room,  tables,  chairs,  chinas,  buf- 
fets, corner  cabinets  and  Welch  cupboards.  All  of 
the  Unique  Furniture  Makers'  products  are  sold  un- 


Action  picture  showing  conveyor  system  in  plant  of  Unique 
Furniture  Makers,  Winston-Salem. 

der  the  name  "Unique"  and  are  all  of  solid  woods, 
principally  mahogany,  ash  and  pine. 

The  J.  C.  Spach  Wagon  Works  was  incorporated 
in  1925  with  W.  M.  Spach,  son  of  J.  C.  Spach,  as 
president;  Mrs.  Charles  L.  Creech,  Sr.,  his  sister, 
vice-president;  and  Charles  L.  Creech,  Sr.,  secretary 
and  treasurer  and  general  manager.  In  1936,  fol 
lowing  his  mother's  death,  Charles  L.  Creech,  Jr. 
was  made  vice-president  and  in  1944  he  was  elected 
president  of  the  firm,  the  position  he  still  holds,  and 
John  S.  Creech  was  elected  secretary.  This  firm  has, 
during  all  of  its  years,  continued  as  a  family  owned 
organization. 

Unique  Furniture  Makers  now  occupies  125,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space  in  a  modern  brick  building 
largely  on  one  floor.  The  firm  employs  about  225 
workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of 
$600,000.  Annual  sales  are  in  the  neighborhood  of 
$2,000,000.  Unique  Furniture  Makers'  products  are 
distributed  throughout  the  United  States,  35  sales- 
men covering  the  Nation.  Permanent  exhibits  are 
displayed  in  Chicago,  New  York  and  High  Point. 

FOGLE  FURNITURE  CO. 

Fogle  Furniture  Co.,  Vargrave  St.,  Winston-Salem 
was  organized  in  1922  by  Fred  A.  Fogle  and  John  D 
Stockton,  starting  production  January  1,  1923.  Orig-j 
inal  officers  were  Mr.  Fogle,  president  and  general 
manager,  Vance  Fulp,  vice-president,  and  Mr.  Stock-! 
ton,  secretary  and  treasurer.  The  authorized  capital 
stock  was  $200,000  with  $135,000  outstanding.  The 
corporative  structure  remains  the  same. 


Victorian  sofa,  Honduras  mahogany,  solid  iveb  bottom, 
by  Fogle  Furniture  Co.,  Winston-Salem. 


mad< 


A/INTER-SPRING,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  49 


Mr.  Fogle  died  in  1940  after 
vhich  Mr.  Stockton,  majority 
tockholder,  was  elected  presi- 
lent  and  treasurer.  Mrs.  Lena 
V.  Tesh,  who  had  started  with 
he  company  in  1930,  was  then 
:lected  secretary  and  around 
.948  was  elected  vice-president 
is  well  as  secretary.  These  two 
•fficers  with  Robert  M.  Hanes, 
resident  of  the  Wachovia  Bank 
,nd  Trust  Co.,  form  the  Board 
>f  Directors. 

Fogle  Furniture  Co.  has  ex- 
>anded  through  the  years  until  it  has  approximately 
0,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  recently  com- 
peted a  new  brick  and  concrete  office  building  con- 
aining  4,500  square  feet.  The  plant  and  equipment 
las  an  evaluation  of  approximately  one-half  a  mil- 
ion  dollars,  employs  115  workers  and  has  an  annual 
>avroll  in  excess  of  $250,000. 

The  firm  produces  upholstered  living  room  furni- 
ure,  including  Victorian  and  18th  Century  chairs 
,nd  sofas  and  Colonial  rockers,  all  exposed  parts  of 
yhich  are  genuine  Honduras  mahogany  with  hard- 
wood frames  largely  of  oak,  elm  and  poplar.  Distri- 
•ution  is  made  throughout  the  United  States,  24 
alesmen  covering  the  area.  Permanent  displays  of 
hese  products  are  maintained  in  Chicago  and  High 
'oint. 

LOHMAN-GRIMES  CORP. 

Lohman-Grimes  Corp.,  2100  Glendale  Ave.,  Win- 
ton-Salem,  was  organized  in  1946  and  was  engaged 
or  about  five  years  in  the  manufacture  of  church 
»ews  and  accessories.  On  January  15,  1951,  this 
)lant  was  purchased  by  the  Cottonsmith  Furniture 
Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  of  Lincolnton,  and  turned 
nto  an  auxiliary  plant  for  the  manufacture  of  sew- 
ng  machine  cabinets. 

In  its  first  year  of  operation  as  a  sewing  machine 
abinet  plant  Lohman-Grimes  has  developed  until  it 
s  approximately  the  same  size  as  the  Lincolnton 
)lant.  It  also  employs  about  60  workers  with  an  an- 
lual  payroll  of  about  $120,000  and  has  a  production 
:apacity  of  approximately  25,000  cabinets  a  year 
vith  a  market  value  of  probably  more  than  $500,000. 
rhe  principal  lumber  is  core  plywood  with  faces  of 
nahogany,  walnut,  korina,  oak  and  maple. 

Sewing  machine  cabinets  similar  to  those  produced 
n  the  Lincolnton  plant  are  distributed  through  the 
irm's  New  York  warehouse  and  distribution  center, 
operating  as  Modern  Sewing  Machine  Co.,  through- 
ut  the  United  States  and  Canada.  Permanent  dis- 
lays  are  maintained  in  Brooklyn,  New  York. 

The  Cottonsmith  Furniture  Manufacturing  Co., 
nc,  the  parent  organization,  has  established  general 
ffices  at  888  Northwest  Boulevard,  Winston-Salem, 
ts  officers  include  Edward  A.  Cotton,  president,  Ned 
\  Harbin,  treasurer,  Clyde  A.  Johnson,  secretary, 
nd  William  Henderson  Smith,  general  manager,  as- 
isted  by  Max  Brinson  and  C.  G.  Whiteside,  plant 
uperintendents.  Mrs.  John  G.  Williamson  is  gen- 
ral  purchasing  agent  and  production  coordinator. 

See  Lincolnton — Cottonsmith  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.) 
BRADY  FURNITURE  CO.,  RURAL  HALL 

Brady  Furniture  Co.,  Rural  Hall,  was  organized  in 

939  as  Brady  &  Gregson,  Inc.    In  1942  Paramount 
'urniture  Industries  of  New  York  bought  a  one-third 


Nice  plant  of  Brady  Furniture  Co.,  Rural  Hall,  Forsyth  County. 

interest  in  the  company  and  the  name  was  changed 
to  the  present  name,  in  which  firm  C.  E.  Brady  and 
Dixon  Ahl  of  the  Marietta  Paint  Co.,  High  Point, 
own  the  remaining  two-thirds.  Officers  of  the  com- 
pany are  Ralph  Deutsch  of  Paramount  Furniture  In- 
dustries, New  York,  president,  Dixon  Ahl,  High 
Point,  vice-president,  and  C.  E.  Brady,  secretary- 
treasurer  and  general  manager. 

Mr.  Brady  has  continued  as  general  manager  of 
the  firm  through  its  entire  period  and  in  1946,  after 
the  Paramount  Furniture  Industries  purchased  the 
Ramseur  Furniture  Co.,  Ramseur,  he  also  became 
general  manager  of  this  firm  continuing  the  manage- 
ment of  both  plants  until  1949.  He  was  elected  in 
1946  as  treasurer  of  the  Ramseur  Furniture  Co.  and 
continues  as  such.  Other  North  Carolina  furniture 
plants  owned  in  part  by  the  Paramount  Furniture 
Industries  are  the  Alliene  Furniture  Corp.,  Troy,  and 
the  Lovelace-Johnston  Furniture  Corp.,  Wendell. 

Brady  Furniture  Co.  has  increased  its  production 
through  the  years  until  its  annual  sales  are  approxi- 
mately $650,000.  Floor  space  amounts  to  around 
52,000  square  feet.  The  firm  employs  an  average  of 
70  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately 
$120,000.  The  Brady  firm  produces  Colonial  and 
Modern  maple  and  knotty  pine  living  room  suites,  in- 
cluding sofas  and  sofa  beds  and  also  manufactures 
platform  rockers  and  occasional  tables.  Practically 
all  products  are  of  solid  wood  including  knotty  pine 
and  hackberry. 

Brady  products  are  sold  throughout  the  United 
States  in  addition  to  exports  to  Puerto  Rico,  The 
Netherlands  and  the  West  Indies.  The  Rural  Hall 
firm  handles  the  distribution  for  the  Southeastern 
states  while  Paramount  Furniture  Industries,  its  af- 
filiate, handles  the  business  in  the  remainder  of  the 
nation  and  for  the  export  trade.  A  sales  crew  of  35 
covers  the  area  of  operation.  Permanent  display 
spaces  are  maintained  in  High  Point,  New  York  and 
Chicago. 

OTHER  FORSYTH  PLANTS 

Bilt-Rite  Venetian  Blind  &  Awning  Co.,  510  S.  Marshall  St. 

Flynt,  R.  C,  &  Son,  Inc.,  Sprague  St.  Ext. 

Industries  For  The  Blind,  1010  N.  Liberty  St. 

Jordan  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  410  3  S.  Main  St. 

Steifel  Mattress  Co.,  Inc.,  15  27  N.  Liberty  St. 

Traditional  Furniture  Shops,  Inc.,   28  40  Waughtown  St. 

Winston  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  2108  Sunnyside  Ave.   (Also  Thomas- 

ville  plant). 
Holder  Brothers  Mfg.  Co.,  Kernersville 


MOCKSVILLE 
HANES  CHAIR  &  FURNITURE  CO. 

Hanes  Chair  &  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  was  organized 
in  1900  and  operated  for  a  number  of  years  as  Hanes 
Chair  &  Table  Co.     Jake  W.  Hanes  and  associates 


Page  50 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Modernly  equipped  plant  of  Hanes  Chair  d-  Furniture  Co.,  Mocksville 

continued  to  operate  as  Hanes  Chair  &  Table  Co. 
and  Hanes  Chair  &  Novelty  Co.  until  around  1935. 
Their  interest  was  purchased  by  J.  W.  Harris  and 
associates. 

In  1947,  D.  E.  Headen  bought  all  of  the  real  estate 
and  assets  of  the  corporation  from  J.  W.  Harris  and 
his  associates  and  incorporated  the  firm  as  Hanes 
Chair  &  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.  Mr.  Headen  is  president, 
treasurer  and  general  manager.  He  formerly  had 
been  associated  with  the  Myrtle  Desk  Co.  of  High 
Point  for  a  number  of  years. 

Originally  the  Hanes  Chair  &  Furniture  Co.  manu- 
factured chairs  exclusively.  Two  plants  are  now  in 
operation.  Plant  No.  1  manufactures  commercial 
office  furniture  and  institutional  furniture.  Plant 
No.  2  operates  exclusively  in  the  production  of  house- 
hold furniture  items,  including  living  room  pieces, 


namely:  drop  leaf  tables, 
lamp  tables,  coffee  tables, 
night  tables,  step  tables, 
and  other  table  items. 

Hanes    Chair    &    Furni- 
ture Co.  has  about  60,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space 
including    the    addition    of 
Plant  No.  2,  taken  over  in 
January,  1950.     The  plant 
is  entirely  modern  and  con- 
tains   modern    and    up-to- 
date  woodworking  machinery.    The  annual  sales  now 
are  about  four  times  larger  than  those  of  the  former 
operators.      The   firm    employs    approximately    175 
workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately 
$300,000. 

Products  of  the  plant  are  sold  throughout  the  Unit- 
ed States,  Canada  and  Mexico.  Approximately  12 
salesmen  represent  the  country  throughout  the  area 
of  distribution.  The  firm  maintains  a  permanent 
show  room  in  the  Southern  Furniture  Exposition 
Building  at  High  Point  and  also  sales  offices  in  New 
York. 

HERITAGE  FURNITURE,  INC. 
The  table  plant  of  Heritage  Furniture,  Inc.,  High 
Point,  North  Carolina  is  located  in  Mocksville  (see 
High  Point — Heritage  Furniture,  Inc.). 

Another  Mocksville  plant — Young  Novelty  Co. 


Mount  Airy  &  Elkin  Early  Northwestern  Furniture  Makers 


Mount  Airy  as  a  furniture  manufacturing  com- 
munity began  operations  before  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury or  soon  after  the  old  Cape  Fear  and  Yadkin 
River  Railroad  reached  that  town.  Even  before 
that  Michael  Healen,  a  famous  Irish  furniture  de- 
signer, had  operated  in  Stokes  County  and  probably 
also  in  Surry,  since  it  is  of  record  that  he  died  in 
Surry  County. 

Mount  Airy  Furniture  Co.,  still  operating,  was  or- 
ganized in  1896  by  J.  A.  Yokley,  C.  R.  Merritt  and 
E.  H.  Kochtitzky.  Five  years  later  the  National 
Furniture  Co.  was  started  by  E.  C.  Foy,  Charles 
Whitlock  and  J.  F.  Prather.  About  the  same  time 
the  Mount  Airy  Mantel  &  Table  Co.  was  started  by 
George  O.  Graves  and  continues  operation.  Other 
smaller  firms  have  since  been  added. 

At  Elkin  George  Bailey  started  the  Surry  Chair 
Co.  after  the  turn  of  the  century  and  in  1911  moved 
to  Hickory  and  organized  a  chair  company  which  is 
still  in  operation.  Previously,  in  1894,  the  Elkin 
Chair  Co.,  still  operating,  was  started  by  J.  F.  Cooke 
and  S.  M.  Arnold. 

The  Employment  Security  Commission  figures 
show  that  six  plants  were  operating  in  Surry  County 
in  1950  with  average  monthly  employment  of  1,155 
and  the  annual  payroll  for  that  year  was  $2,518,734. 

NATIONAL  FURNITURE  CO. 

National  Furniture  Co.,  Mount  Airy,  was  organ- 
ized and  incorporated  in  1901  by  E.  C.  Foy,  Charles 
Whitlock  and  J.  F.  Prather.  After  the  plant  had 
been  operated  for  about  three  years,  A.  E.  Smith 
bought  out  the  Foy  interest  and  John  Banner  bought 
an  interest  in  the  industry.  In  1906  John  Sobotta, 
who  had  joined  the  plant  in  1904,  as  general  superin- 


tendent, bought  an  interest.  Around  1912,  Mr.  Smitl 
and  Mr.  Sobotta  bought  out  the  other  interests,  Mr 
Smith  becoming  president  and  Mr.  Sobotta  vice-  pres 
ident. 

J.  Raymond  Smith  succeeded  his  father  as  presi 
dent  of  the  firm  in  1930,  Mr.  Sobotta  continuing  a; 
vice-president.  These  are  the  present  officers  alonj 
with  A.  H.  Collins,  who  joined  the  firm  in  1945  a; 
secretary.  Mr.  Sobotta  continues  his  duties  over  4'| 
years  as  general  superintendent  and  John  Geiger  i 
plant  superintendent. 

Bed  room  furniture  is  manufactured  exclusively 

National  Furniture  Co.  sells  its  products  on  a  na 

tion-wide  basis  with  salesmen  covering  the  territory 

Permanent  display  spaces  are  utilized  in  Chicago  an 

High  Point. 

MOUNT  AIRY  FURNITURE  CO. 

Mount  Airy  Furniture  Co.,  Mount  Airy,  was  oi 


Canopied   four-poster    18th   Century   bed,   all   mahogany,   wi 
night  stand  and  kidney  dressing  table,  made  by  Mount 
Airy  Furniture  Co.,  Mount  Airy. 


vVlNTER-SPRING,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  51 


ranized  in  1896  as  a  partnership  by  J.  A.  Yokley,  C. 
|.  Merritt,  and  E.  H.  Kochtitzky.  With  a  few 
changes  through  the  years,  five  partners  now  own 
;his  industry  which  has  proven  successful  over  a 
period  of  55  years.  Two  of  the  partners,  0.  H.  Yok- 
ey  and  R.  W.  Sparger,  are  in  active  charge  of  the 
)lant,  the  three  other  silent  partners  being  0.  K.  Mer- 
-itt,  C.  R.  Merritt  and  Mrs.  E.  H.  Kochtitzky. 

This  firm  manufactures  bedroom  furniture  in  the 
ipper  priced  ranges — Modern,  Traditional  and  18th 
Century.  Native  woods  are  used  largely,  including 
>ak,  poplar,  beech,  walnut  and  ash,  with  mahogany 
md  walnut  veneers.  The  plant  employs  about  225 
vorkers  and  has  a  floor  space  of  about  125,000  square 
'eet.  Sales  are  nation-wide,  from  15  to  20  salesmen 
:overing  the  area.  Display  space  is  maintained  in 
Chicago. 

MOUNT  AIRY  MANTEL  &  TABLE  CO. 

Mount  Airy  Mantel  &  Table  Co.,  Inc.,  Mount  Airy, 
vas  organized  in  March,  1902,  by  George  O.  Graves, 
)rincipal  owner  and  key  man  in  building  this  exten- 
live  and  successful  furniture  industry.  Associated 
vith  him  for  many  years  was  his  brother,  Calvin 
Graves,  who  died  in  1940. 

George  0.  Graves  continued  the  operation  of  this 
ndustry  for  48  years,  until  his  death  in  July,  1950. 
r.  C.  Siceloff  was  with  the  company  for  45  years, 
lerving  as  secretary-treasurer  until  his  death  in  Oc- 
ober,  1951.  W.  T.  Harkrader,  who  had  been  with 
he  firm  for  13  years,  first  as  secretary  and  then  for 
ive  or  six  years  as  executive  vice-president,  was 
:lected  president  in  1950.  Ben  K.  Graves,  son  of  the 
'ounder,  is  executive  vice-president.  A  successor  to 
tftr.  Siceloff,  as  secretary-treasurer,  was  to  be  elected 
ater. 

In  its  early  days  this  firm  manufactured  mantels 
md  tables  exclusively,  but  in  the  1910-12  period  din- 
ng  room  furniture  was  added  and  in  1925  the  firm 
>egan  producing  bedroom  furniture.  The  plant  em- 
traces  140,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  including 
l  modern  three-story  building,  conveyorized 
hroughout,  which  contains  54,000  square  feet  and 
vas  completed  two  or  three  years  ago.  Annual  ca- 
)acity  of  the  plant  is  approximately  $1,500,000  with 
in  average  employment  of  225  workers  and  an  an- 
mal  payroll  usually  in  excess  of  $300,000. 

Mount  Airy  Mantel  &  Table  Co.  manufactures 
ligh  medium-grade  bedroom,  dining  room,  and  din- 
ette furniture,  including  solid  maple  and  cherry  Pro- 
vincial bedroom  suites  as  well  as  Honduras  mahog- 
my  bedroom  and  dining  room  lines  and  Idaho  knotty 


lodern  dining  room  suite  of  oak  finish  including  buffet,  arm 
chair,  side  chair,  table  and  china,  made  by  Mount 
Airy  Mantel  &  Table  Co. 


Oak  dining  room  suite  with  tweed  oak  finish  made  by  Mount 
Airy  Chair  Co.,  Mount  Airy. 

pine  dining  room  and  dinette  lines.  All  of  the  lines, 
except  the  solid  maple  bedroom  suites,  are  veneered. 
Principal  types  are  Modern,  18th  Century,  Colonial 
and  Provincial,  the  firm  stressing  particularly  its 
Colonial  bedroom  and  18th  Century  dining  room  and 
bedroom  types.  This  firm  sells  its  products  on  a  na- 
tion-wide basis,  38  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Per- 
manent display  spaces  are  utilized  in  Chicago,  New 
York  and  High  Point. 

MOUNT  AIRY  CHAIR  CO. 

Mount  Airy  Chair  Co.,  Mount  Airy,  was  organized 
in  1921  as  a  partnership  by  three  brothers,  J.  F.,  O. 
H.,  and  J.  B.  Yokley,  and  continues  to  operate  as 
such.  J.  F.  Yokley  is  office  and  sales  manager  and 
J.  B.  Yokley  is  plant  manager.  O.  H.  Yokley,  the 
third  brother,  is  also  a  partner  in  the  Mount  Airy 
Furniture  Co.  and  spends  his  time  with  this  plant. 

This  firm  produces  high  quality  and  popular  priced 
dining  room  furniture,  specializing  in  Imperial 
styles.  Principal  woods  used  in  the  veneer  products 
are  mahogany,  walnut,  cherry  and  other  native 
woods.  The  firm  employs  about  275  workers  and  en- 
joys a  splendid  business  on  a  nation-wide  basis.  Per- 
manent display  space  is  maintained  in  Chicago. 

Standard  Manufacturing  Co.  is  another  furniture 
plant  in  Mount  Airy. 

ELKIN 
ELKIN  FURNITURE  CO. 

Elkin  Furniture  Co.,  Elkin,  one  of  the  oldest  furni- 
ture establishments  in  Northwestern  North  Carolina, 
was  started  in  1894  by  J.  F.  Cook  and  S.  M.  Arnold 
as  a  partnership,  with  Mr.  Cook  as  the  active  part- 
ner. After  10  years  of  such  operation,  the  firm  was 
incorporated  in  1904  with  Mr.  Cook  as  president, 
Mr.  Arnold,  vice-president,  and  W.  J.  Boyles,  secre- 
tary and  treasurer.  Mr.  Arnold  became  secretary- 
treasurer  in  1909  and  in  1911  W.  S.  Gough  became 
president,  succeeding  Mr.  Cook.  The  next  year  R.  L. 
Hubbard  was  elected  secretary  and  treasurer  and 
became  general  manager,  serving  as  such  until  his 
death  in  1931.  J.  H.  Greenwood,  who  had  been  secre- 
tary, was  elected  vice-president  in  1909. 

A.  J.  Click,  who  had  been  elected  vice-president 
in  1918,  was  elected  president  in  1922,  serving  as 
such  until  his  death  in  1932.  M.  A.  Biggs,  who  had 
been  elected  vice-president  in  1922,  later  moved  to 
Winston-Salem.     In  1931  he  returned  to  the  Elkin 


PAGE  52 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Modern  field  stone  office  building  of  Elkin  Furniture  Co.,  Elkin. 

Furniture  Co.  as  secretary-treasurer  and  general 
manager,  succeeding  Mr.  Hubbard.  In  1939  Mr. 
Biggs  was  made  executive  vice-president  and  general 
manager,  continuing  as  such  until  his  death  in  1942. 
Dr.  E.  G.  Click  succeeded  his  father  as  president  in 
1932,  serving  until  1948  when  he  became  chairman 
of  the  Board.  V.  V.  W.  Dillon,  who  had  been  acting 
secretary  since  1933,  became  secretary  in  1939. 

A.  G.  Biggs,  son  of  M.  A.  Biggs,  was  elected  treas- 
urer in  1939  and  also  became  general  manager  in 
1942.  He  was  elected  president  in  1948  when  Dr. 
Click  became  chairman  of  the  Board  and  continued 
as  general  manager  and  treasurer.  D.  D.  Busic  was 
elected  vice-president  at  the  same  time.    Present  of- 


ficers are  Mr.  Biggs,  president,  treasurer,  and  gen- 
eral manager;  Mr.  Busic,  vice-president,  and  Mr. 
Dillon,  secretary.  M.  R.  Bailey,  who  had  worked  for 
the  firm  for  a  few  years  previously,  returned  in  1911 
as  superintendent,  a  position  he  has  held  for  40  years. 
His  son,  G.  W.  Bailey,  is  assistant  superintendent. 

When  the  Elkin  Furniture  Co.  was  first  estab- 
lished, it  operated  in  a  plant  on  the  present  site  of 
Hotel  Elkin.  In  1907  the  plant  was  moved  to  its 
present  site,  about  one  mile  east  of  Elkin.  When  the 
partnership  became  a  corporation  in  1904,  it  had  a 
paid  in  capital  stock  of  $5,000.  The  plant  was  great- 
ly enlarged  in  1933  and  again  in  1939  and  the  next 
year  the  new  office  building  of  stone  was  erected. 

Prior  to  1932  the  Elkin  Furniture  Co.  had  pro- 
duced office  and  bedroom  furniture.  At  that  time 
the  plant  started  the  production  of  Borax  bedroom 
suites.  The  Borax  type  means  flashy  and  fancy  fin- 
ishing in  which  the  plant  is  now  engaged  almost 
100%.  Most  of  the  furniture  has  the  grainwork 
printed  on  the  wood.  All  lumber  is  produced  locally, 
consisting  largely  of  poplar,  gum  and  oak,  secured 
from  two  sawmills  operated  in  the  area  by  the  plant 
The  products  are  popular  priced. 

Annual  sales  are  around  $1,000,000,  the  furniture 
being  distributed  largely  in  North  Carolina,  but  alsc 
extending  to  the  southern  area  east  of  the  Missis- 
sippi River.  Eighteen  salesmen  cover  this  area.  Th( 
firm  has  an  average  of  175  workers  and  an  annua 
payroll  of  approximately  $325,000.  Permanent  ex- 
hibit spaces  are  maintained  in  Chicago  and  Higlj 
Point.  Products  are  sold  to  many  chain  and  indi 
vidually  operated  furniture  stores. 


North  Wilkesboro  and  Ronda  Furniture  Producing  Area 


North  Wilkesboro,  within  a  decade  after  the  rail- 
road line  from  Winston-Salem  had  ended  in  the  Yad- 
kin River  bottom,  was  having  growing  pains.  Both 
the  new  town  and  the  older  Wilkesboro,  across  Yad- 
kin River,  probably  had  cabinet  shops.  After  the 
railroad,  in  operation  around  1890,  opened  up  this 
fine  mountain  hardwood  area  local  citizens  began 
plans  for  making  and  shipping  furniture. 

Appropriately  enough,  the  Forest  Furniture  Co. 
was  organized  and  incorporated  in  1901  by  J.  K.  and 
J.  E.  Finley  and  Col.  G.  W.  Hinshaw,  the  latter  of 
Winston-Salem.  Two  years  later  the  Oak  Furni- 
ture Co.  was  organized  and  began  operation.  Twenty- 
five  years  later,  in  1928,  the  American  Furniture  Co. 
was  organized  by  A.  R.  Johnston.  Another  earlier 
plant  was  the  Home  Chair  Co.,  organized  by  J.  D. 
Moore  in  1909.  In  1940  this  plant  was  flooded  and 
then  burned.  The  company  moved  the  plant  to  a 
former  cotton  mill  building  at  Ronda,  about  20  miles 
distant,  where  it  continues  to  operate. 

All  four  of  these  plants  have  proved  very  success- 
ful enterprises.  Five  smaller  Wilkes  County  furni- 
ture plants  are  Greene  Bros.  Upholstery  Co.,  Hwy. 
421;  Key  City  Furniture  Co.,  510  B  Street;  Model 
Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Hwy.  18;  Sebastian  Upholstering 
Co.,  G  Street,  all  North  Wilkesboro;  Blue  Ridge 
Mfg.  Co.,  Wilkesboro. 

FOREST  FURNITURE  CO. 

Forest  Furniture  Co.,  North  Wilkesboro,  was  or- 
ganized and  incorporated  in  1901  by  J.  K.  Finley  and 


J.  E.  Finley  of  North  Wilkesboro  and  Col.  G.  W.  Hin 
shaw  and  his  son,  Miller  Hinshaw,  of  Winston-Salem 
J.  E.  Finley  was  the  first  president  and  was  succeed 
ed  by  Miller  Hinshaw.  Arthur  A.  Finley  succeedet 
him  and  served  until  his  death  at  which  time  N.  0 
Smoak,  who  had  been  with  the  firm  since  1904  an< 
vice-president  since  about  1925,  was  elected  presi 
dent.  Mr.  Smoak  was  also  named  general  manage 
in  1950. 

J.  R.  Finley  had  been  secretary-treasurer  of  th 
firm  from  the  beginning  until  his  death  in  1950.  A 
that  time  Mr.  Finley's  son-in-law,  W.  C.  Grier,  wa 


Bedroom   suite  including   double   dresser,   chest,   night 
bookcase  bed,  and  night  table  by  Forest  Furniture 
Co.,  North  Wilkesboro. 


Winter-spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  53 


Air  view  of  plant  and  lumber  yard  of  Oak  Furniture  Co., 
North  Wilkesboro. 

lamed  treasurer  and  his  daughter,  Mrs.  Eloise  Mit- 
chell, was  named  secretary.  Mrs.  D.  J.  Carter  is 
/ice-president.  These  four  officers  and  W.  G.  Tul- 
Dert  compose  the  Board  of  Directors. 

Forest  Furniture  Co.  was  capitalized  at  $25,000 
n  the  beginning.  Increases  through  the  years  have 
*aised  the  capital  assets  now  to  around  $500,000. 
Annual  production  ranges  between  $1,250,000  and 
^1,500,000.  The  firm  owns  an  entire  block  about 
100  x  300  feet,  a  part  of  which  is  devoted  to  lumber 
stacks.  About  200  workers  are  employed  and  the 
mnual  payroll  runs  around  $430,000. 

This  firm  produces  medium  and  better  grades  of 
solid  wood  bedroom  suites  principally  of  maple  and 
ilm.  Products  are  sold  over  the  entire  United  States, 
15  salesmen  covering  the  territory.  Products  are 
lisplayed  permanently  in  Chicago  and  High  Point. 

OAK  FURNITURE  CO. 

Oak  Furniture  Co.,  North  Wilkesboro,  was  organ- 
zed  and  incorporated  in  1903  and  is  thus  one  of  the 
Dlder  and  more  substantial  furniture  organizations 
in  the  Northwest.  J.  E.  Justice,  Jr.,  is  president  and 
general  manager;  O.  A.  Boren,  Greensboro,  is  vice- 
president,  and  J.  B.  Carter  is  secretary-treasurer. 
These  officers  and  their  wives  form  the  Board  of 
Directors. 

This  company  has  an  authorized  capital  of  $215,- 
000.  The  plant  occupies  70,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  and  is  now  in  the  process  of  complete  modern- 
ization, including  conveyor  system  from  the  lumber 
;o  the  finished  product.  The  latest  type  of  modern 
machinery  has  been  installed. 

The  plant  manufactures  bedroom  furniture  ex- 
clusively, all  of  the  Modern  type.  Native  lumbers, 
ncluding  oak,  poplar,  maple,  pine  and  beech  are  used 
and  veneers  are  of  domestic  and  imported  woods. 
Products  are  distributed  throughout  the  United 
States  and  Canada,  salesmen  covering  most  of  the 
tates.  The  furniture  is  displayed  permanently  in 
Chicago  and  High  Point. 

AMERICAN  FURNITURE  CO. 

American  Furniture  Co.,  North  Wilkesboro,  was 
)rganized  and  incorporated  in  1928  by  A.  B.  John- 
ston, who  became  president  and  still  occupies  that 
Dosition,  with  W.  B.  Carlton  as  vice-president;  J.  R. 
Six,  secretary,  and  R.  W.  Gwynn,  treasurer.  Since 
hat  time  R.  B.  Johnston  has  become  vice-president ; 
Mr.  Hix  is  treasurer  as  well  as  secretary,  and  R.  W. 
jwynn,  Jr.,  is  assistant  secretary. 


When  organized,  this  firm  had  an  authorized  cap- 
ital of  $20,000  and  started  business  in  a  small  way. 
Present  paid  in  capital  is  $500,000  and  plant  and 
equipment  are  entirely  modern.  The  firm  employs 
about  300  workers. 

American  Furniture  Co.  manufactures  bedroom 
furniture,  largely  of  native  woods  with  some  mahog- 
any veneer.  The  firm  has  a  special  and  particularly 
attractive  knotty  pine  suite  which  has  been  developed 
and  put  on  the  market  recently.  Products  are  sold 
nation-wide  and  14  salesmen  cover  the  area.  Per- 
manent displays  are  held  in  Chicago,  New  York  and 
High  Point. 

HOME  CHAIR  CO.,  RONDA 

Home  Chair  Co.,  Ronda,  was  organized  and  incor- 
porated in  1909  in  North  Wilkesboro  by  J.  D.  Moore, 
who  became  president,  and  several  associates,  includ- 
ing J.  R.  Hix,  R.  W.  Gwyn,  R.  G.  Finley,  Gordon 
Hackett,  T.  B.  Finley,  Oliver  Brewer,  John  Nichols, 
I.  H.  McNeil,  with  L.  H.  Stone  as  superintendent. 
H.  L.  Moore  has  been  president  since  1943,  when  his 
father,  J.  D.  Moore,  died.  J.  D.  Moore,  Jr.,  and  R.  I. 
Moore  are  vice-presidents,  and  Mrs.  J.  R.  Hix,  Jr., 
daughter  of  J.  D.  Moore,  is  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Home  Chair  Co.  started  out  with  a  small  capital 
and  authorized  capital  is  now  $200,000.  The  indus- 
try was  started  in  North  Wilkesboro  and  continued 
there  for  21  years.  In  1940  the  plant  was  flooded 
and  then  burned.  Finding  a  former  cotton  mill  build- 
ing at  Ronda,  about  20  miles  distant,  the  owners 
purchased  this  building  and  within  six  months  were 
shipping  furniture  again.  This  plant  has  been  ex- 
tensively enlarged  by  new  buildings  and  now  con- 
tains about  65,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  Around 
225  workers  are  employed  and  the  annual  payroll  is 
approximately  $375,000. 

Home  Chair  Co.  produces  dining  room,  living  room 
and  bedroom  chairs,  lounges  and  occasional  chairs 
and  maple  living  room  suites,  principally  in  Modern 
furniture,  although  other  types  of  furniture  are  also 
produced.    Annual  sales  are  well  over  $1,000,000. 

Home  Chair  Co.  products  are  sold  throughout  the 
United  States  and  26  salesmen  cover  the  nation.  Per- 
manent display  spaces  are  maintained  in  Chicago, 
New  York  and  High  Point. 


Modern  furniture  including  arm  chair,  left  settee,  comer  table, 

right  settee,  coffee  table,  step  table  and  armless 

chair  made  by  Home  Chair  Co.,  Ronda. 


PAGE  54 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Charlotte  Adds  Furniture  Making  to  Her  Other  Activities 


Charlotte,  with  all  of  her  other  industrial  and  busi- 
ness activities,  is  also  an  important  furniture  manu- 
facturing city,  a  few  of  its  firms  dating  back  for 
many  years.  Chief  of  these  is  Wade  Manufacturing 
Co.,  which  was  established  in  1898.  Others  are  of 
more  recent  origin. 

Mecklenburg  County,  records  of  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission  show,  had  12  furniture  plants 
that  were  covered  by  the  Employment  Security  Law 
in  1950,  which  means  they  had  eight  or  more  em- 
ployees. Average  monthly  employment  in  these 
plants  in  1950  was  541  and  total  payrolls  for  that 
year  amounted  to  $1,694,243. 

SHAW  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Shaw  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  moved  into  its  mod- 
ern new  home  on  the  beautifully  landscaped  site  of 
121/2  acres  at  4551  Pineville  Road,  south  of  Char- 
lotte, last  October  1.  This  new  building  is  of  mod- 
ernistic design  with  entirely  modern  furniture  and 
equipment  and  is  set  up  for  streamlined  mass  pro- 
duction, but  to  maintain  the  same  intricate,  careful 
attention  to  construction,  tailoring,  and  design.  The 
new  plant  contains  55,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 

Shaw  Manufacturing  Co.  was  a  brain  child  of 
Harry  P.  Shaw,  Sr.,  streaming  from  Mr.  Shaw's  keen 
desire  for  many  years  to  do  something  constructive 
in  the  industrial  world.  He  had  been  engaged  in  the 
distribution  of  household  appliances  for  several 
years.  In  early  1935  he  started  a  small  furniture 
plant  containing  about  500  square  feet  on  South  Col- 
lege Street  and  with  six  employees.  His  efforts  were 
fruitful  and  he  soon  moved  to  larger  quarters  on 
Central  Avenue.  Still  later,  as  business  expanded, 
he  moved  into  the  old  Made-In-Carolina  Exhibition 
Building  on  Kingston  Avenue.  Again  outgrowing 
its  space,  he  set  about  erecting  the  new  building  re- 
cently occupied. 

Mr.  Shaw  incorporated  his  firm  when  he  began 
business  in  1935,  and  continues  as  president  and 
treasurer  of  the  firm.  His  son,  Harry  P.  Shaw,  Jr., 
joined  the  organization  several  years  ago  and  grew 
up  with  it.  He  is  now  vice-president  and  general 
manager.  The  firm  has  an  authorized  capital  of 
$250,000  and  the  stock  is  owned  largely  in  the  family. 

Shaw  Manufacturing  Co.  has  developed  an  uphol- 
stered furniture  business,  annual  sales  of  which  are 
considerably  in  excess  of  $1,000,000.  The  new  plant 
employs  approximately  125  workers  with  an  annual 


Modern  new  home  in  rural  landscaped  setting  of  Shaw 
Manufacturing  Co.  near  Charlotte. 


Mecklenburg  group  chair  and  sofa  by  Shaw 
Manufacturing  Co.,  Charlotte. 

payroll  of  around  $300,000.  In  the  newly  occupied 
building,  production  is  expected  to  about  double  as 
time  allows.  The  bulk  of  the  business  is  done  with 
large  metropolitan  department  and  furniture  stores 
throughout  the  United  States  and  in  Canada  and 
Puerto  Rico,  16  sales  men  covering  the  area  of  dis- 
tribution. A  permanent  showroom  display  is  main- 
tained in  the  Chicago  Merchandise  Mart. 

This  firm  produces  upholstered  furniture  entirely, 
consisting  of  60  styles  of  chairs,  sofas  and  love  seats, 
including  Early  American  and  Pine  groupings, 
through  Traditional  and  Modern.  Special  orders  are 
filled  from  department  and  furniture  stores  for  high- 
ly styled,  medium  priced  furniture  items.  One  of  the 
most  popular  lines,  which  was  presented  at  the  Jan- 
uary 1950  market,  is  the  Mecklenburg  Group  in 
pine  finish  with  Early  American  documentary  prints, 
produced  in  commemoration  of  the  175th  anniver- 
sary of  the  signing  of  the  Mecklenburg  Declaration 
of  Independence  in  Charlotte  in  1775. 

The  makers  of  Shaw  furniture  produce  upholster- 
ed furniture  of  distinction  and  lasting  quality.  The 
frame  construction  is  from  all  solid  maple,  doweled, 
screwed,  glued  and  blocked  to  make  them  rigid.  Only 
super  sagless  solid  webbed  construction  is  used,  pre- 
venting sagging  under  the  seat.  Springs  are  hand 
tied  eight  ways  with  Italian  twine. 

The  same  consideration  and  attention  is  incorpo 
rated  into  the  outward  appearance  of  the  finished 
product  to  give  the  desired  eye  appeal. 

WADE  MANUFACTURING  CORP. 

Wade  Manufacturing  Corporation,  Charlotte 
North  Carolina,  had  its  beginning  as  the  Cochrane 
Showcase  Company  in  1898.  In  1905  H.  M.  Wade 
a  young  man  from  Columbus,  Georgia,  purchased 
this  firm  and  began  its  operation  in  temporary  quar 
ters  and  with  five  or  six  employees. 

After  a  few  years  of  operation  Mr.  Wade  bought  2 
cotton  patch  and  built  the  first  small  unit  in  1907  oi 
a  plant  that  was  to  develop  into  an  important  f  urni 
ture  industry.  In  1923  H.  M.  Wade  Manufacturing 
Company  was  incorporated  with  an  authorized  cap 
ital  stock  of  $250,000.00.  Again  in  1933  a  new  cor 
poration  was  formed,  Wade  Manufacturing  Corpora 
tion,  with  authorized  capital  stock  of  $250,000.00.  H 
M.  Wade,  principal  owner,  is  president  of  the  cor 
poration  and  general  manager  of  the  plant,  and  Mor 
gan  A.  Reynolds  is  secretary  and  treasurer. 

As  the  city  of  Charlotte  began  to  grow  around  an( 
soon  completely  encompassed  the  site  of  the  Wad 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  55 


plant,  the  plant  itself  continued  to  expand  over  the 
earlier  cotton  field.  The  Wade  plant  now  embraces 
about  100,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs 
an  average  of  150  workers  with  an  annual  payroll 
of  about  $650,000.00.  Annual  sales  have  increased 
until  they  are  in  the  neighborhood  of  $2,000,000.00. 

The  Wade  Manufacturing  Corp.  produces  "Wade 
fixtures"  for  banks,  stores,  and  offices.  The  fixtures 
are  especially  designed  and  custom  built  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  the  banks,  stores,  and  offices  to  be 
equipped. 

"Wade  fixtures"  are  distributed  all  over  the  south- 
ern states,  eight  salesmen  covering  the  territory. 

Mr.  Wade,  who  advertises  his  plant  as  "The  South- 
ern House  of  Quality  Since  1898",  is  a  public-spirited 
citizen  and  two  or  three  years  ago  served  as  presi- 
dent of  the  Citizen  Association  of  North  Carolina. 

KROEHLER  MFG.  CO. 

Kroehler  Mfg.  Co.  of  N.  C,  Inc.,  is  located  on  the 
Old  Monroe  Road  within  the  city  limits  of  Charlotte. 
It  is  credited  with  being  the  most  modern  uphol- 
stery plant  in  the  world  and  is  a  wholly  owned  sub- 
sidiary of  the  world's  largest  furniture  manufactur- 
ing firm,  Kroehler  Mfg.  Co.  The  Charlotte  plant  is 
built  of  modern  design  and  with  very  modern  ma- 
chinery and  equipment.  It  is  located  on  a  beautifully 
landscaped  site.  The  plant  began  production  in  Feb- 
ruary, 1951,  and  had  its  formal  opening  shortly 
after,  attended  by  hundreds  of  citizens  from  Char- 
lotte and  surrounding  area. 

The  Charlotte  Plant  is  a  wholly  owned  subsidiary 
of  the  Kroehler  Mfg.  Co.,  which  has  its  headquarters 
at  Naperville,  Illinois,  and  is  one  of  the  twelve  plants 
operated  by  this  firm  in  the  United  States  and  Can- 
ada. Officers  of  the  North  Carolina  corporation  are 
Mr.  D.  L.  Kroehler,  president;  Mr.  Kenneth  Kroeh- 
ler, executive  vice-president;  Mr.  W.  W.  Stegman, 
secretary,  all  of  Naperville,  Illinois,  and  Donald  Foll- 
mer,  vice-president  and  general  manager  of  the  Char- 
lotte Plant.  These  officers  compose  the  Board  of 
Directors.  Mr.  Follmer  was  sales  representative  for 
the  Company  with  headquarters  in  Charlotte  for  fif- 
teen years.  As  a  result  of  his  knowledge  of  the  fur- 
niture industry  in  the  southern  area,  the  decision 
was  reached  to  establish  this  new  plant  in  Charlotte 
to  supply  the  furniture  trade  within  the  southeastern 
states.  Other  plants  are  located,  three  in  Illinois, 
two  in  California,  two  in  Canada  and  one  each  in 
New  York,  Texas,  Ohio  and  Louisiana. 

Kroehler's  Charlotte  Plant  produces  living  room 
suites,  sofas,  chairs,  and  dual-purpose  sleeping  equip- 
ment— all  of  a  medium  price  and  designed  for  the 
mass  market.  All  furniture  items  are  produced  from 
hardwoods,  largely  gum,  which  is  shipped  as  dimen- 
sion stock  from  the  firm's  own  lumber  mills  at 
Shreveport,  La.    The  Charlotte  Plant  contains  80,000 


Sketch  of  new  and  modern  plant  of  Kroehler  Manufacturing  Co.  of  North  Carolina 
in  landscaped  setting,  Old  Monroe  Road,   Charlotte. 


Lawson  sofa,   "posture  built  furniture",   by  Queen  City  Mat- 
tress &  Upholstery  Co.,  Charlotte. 

square  feet  of  floor  space,  all  on  one  floor,  and  em- 
ploys currently  about  150  workers.  The  Plant  has 
a  production  capacity  of  2,000  pieces  of  upholstered 
furniture  per  week  and  is  now  approaching  produc- 
tion capacity. 

From  all  of  its  twelve  plants,  the  Kroehler  Mfg. 
Co.  maintains  permanent  show  rooms  in  Chicago, 
New  York,  Los  Angeles,  San  Francisco,  High  Point 
and  in  Stratford,  Ontario,  and  Montreal,  Quebec. 

QUEEN  CITY  MATTRESS  &  UPHOLSTERING  CO. 

Queen  City  Mattress  &  Upholstering  Co.,  118  East 
Kinston  Avenue,  Charlotte,  was  organized  and  start- 
ed operating  in  1923  by  A.  W.  Pearson  and  B.  W. 
Baker,  his  brother-in-law.  Mr.  Baker  in  1925  sold 
his  interest  to  Mr.  Pearson  who  operated  the  plant 
as  individual  owner  until  1932.  At  that  time  Mr. 
Pearson's  son,  N.  A.  Pearson,  joined  him  as  a  partner 
and  in  1938  bought  the  interest  of  his  father  and 
continues  to  operate  the  industry  as  sole  owner. 

The  Queen  City  Mattress  &  Upholstering  Co.  start- 
ed as  a  mattress  factory  in  1923  with  six  employees 
and  annual  sales  in  the  early  days  did  not  exceed 
$36,000.  In  1932  the  plant  started  making  living 
room  furniture  in  addition  to  its  innerspring  and 
cotton  felt  mattresses.  Both  of  these  groups  of  prod- 
ucts are  still  made  for  the  popular  priced  trade. 
Furniture  items  include  sofas,  sofa  beds,  love  seats 
and  chairs. 

The  firm's  plant  contains  modern  machinery  and 
equipment  and  has  expanded  until  it  embraces  ap- 
proximately 80,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  An- 
nual sales  have  grown  until  they  have  reached  about 
$1,500,000,  the  firm  employing  approximately  150 
workers  with  an  annual  payroll  in  the  neighborhood 
of  $350,000.  Mr.  Pearson  has  consistently  main- 
tained splendid  relationships  with  his  employees. 

Queen  City  Mattress  &  Upholstering  Co.  distrib- 
utes its  goods  over  the  entire  Eastern  Seaboard, 
keeping  five  salesmen  in  the  territory.  Its  fleet  of  10 
trucks  delivers  its  products  to 
unit  and  department  stores.  Per- 
manent display  of  its  furniture 
and  mattresses  is  maintained  in 
Hiarh  Point. 

In  1950  Mr.  Pearson  and  M. 
W.  Garrett,  his  college  roommate 
and  business  associate  in  the 
Charlotte  plant  for  several  years, 
organized  a  new  firm,  the  P  &  G 
Chair  Co.,  of  Hickory.  Mr.  Pear- 


L 


PAGE  56 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-spring,  1952 


son  is  president  and  sales  manager  and  Mr.  Garrett 
is  secretary-treasurer  and  general  manager.  The 
name  comes  from  the  initials  of  the  two  men  and 
the  company  produces  platform  rockers  and  sofa 
beds. 

OTHER  CHARLOTTE  PLANTS 

Carolina  Metal  Products,  Inc.,  2222  S.  Blvd. 
American  Bedding  Co.,  200  W.  Tremont  Ave. 


Breneman,  Charles  W.,  Co.,  The,  20  5  W.  Morehead  St. 
Carolina  Bedding  &  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  12  2*1  Central  Ave. 
Charlotte  Venetian  Blind  Mfg.  Co.,  20  4  N.  Davidson  St. 
Colonial  Fixtures  Mfg.  Co.,  2133  S.  Blvd. 
Elliott  Mfg.  Co.,  Morris  Field 

Morgan,  A.  B.,  Fixture  Co.,  307  W.  Worthington  Ave. 
Piedmont  Fixture  Co.,  Inc.,  Bldg.  #222,  Morris  Field 
W  M  P  Industries,  Inc.,  Bldg.  285,  Morris  Field 
McCall  Mfg.  Co.,  Davidson. 


Mebane  First  Site  of  Continuing  Furniture  Making  Plant 


Mebane,  a  small  rural  community,  beat  other  larg- 
er cities  and  towns  in  North  Carolina  to  the  draw  and 
established  the  first  furniture  plant  that  continues 
in  operation  in  the  State  today.  This  was  the  White 
Furniture  Co.,  started  by  Will  and  Dave  White  in 
1881.  Other  important  furniture  plants  have  devel- 
oped in  Mebane,  while  smaller  ones  also  operate  in 
some  Alamance  communities. 

Alamance  County  in  1950  had  seven  furniture 
plants  which  were  subject  to  the  Employment  Secur- 
ity Law.  These  plants  had  average  monthly  employ- 
ment of  585  and  the  total  payrolls  in  1950  amounted 
to  $1,682,404. 

WHITE  FURNITURE  CO. 

White  Furniture  Co.,  Mebane,  has  the  distinction 
of  being  the  oldest  furniture  plant  in  North  Carolina 
and  one  of  the  oldest  in  the  entire  southeast.  The 
firm  was  started  in  1881  more  than  70  years  ago  as 
a  partnership  by  two  brothers,  William  E.  White 
and  David  A.  White,  locally  known  as  Will  and  Dave 
White.  These  two  young  men  had  saved  $275  as 
telegraph  operators  and  borrowed  additional  money 
from  a  friend  of  the  family,  purchased  a  carload  of 
lumber  and  a  secondhand  planer,  and  began  manu- 
facturing wood  products. 

In  1896  the  firm  was  incorporated  with  W.  E. 
White  as  president  and  David  A.  White  as  general 
manager  in  charge  of  production.  At  that  time  J. 
Sam  White,  a  younger  brother,  after  his  graduation 
from  the  University  of  North  Carolina,  joined  the 
firm  as  a  day  laborer.  After  a  few  years  he  was 
elected  secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  firm.  Arthur 
White,  another  brother,  was  salesman  for  the  firm 
until  his  death  in  1927.  D.  A.  White,  general  man- 
ager, died  in  1916. 

J.  Sam  White  was  elected  president  of  the  firm  fol- 
lowing the  death  of  his  brother,  W.  E.  White,  in  1935 
and  continues  to  hold  that  position.  Additional  offi- 
cers are  S.  A.  White,  V,  who  started  with  the  firm  in 
1934,  vice-president  and  secretary;  S.  H.  Millender, 
who  joined  the  firm  in  1935,  vice-president  and  treas- 
urer, and  Phonse  Bean,  general  superintendent. 
These  four  officers,  with  J.  E.  White,  cousin  of  Presi- 
dent Sam  White,  for  many  years  general  superin- 
tendent and  now  retired,  compose  the  Board  of  Direc- 
tors. Approximately  85%  of  the  total  capital  stock 
is  owned  by  members  of  the  White  family. 

Soon  after  the  White  Furniture  Co.  began  opera- 
tion with  32  workers,  it  started  producing  solid  oak 
bedroom  suites  which  included  bed,  dresser  and  wash- 
stand,  sold  for  the  princely  sum  of  $9.  At  present  the 
firm's  floor  space  covers  an  area  of  more  than  five 
acres.  Its  annual  sales  range  between  $4,500,000  and 
$5,000,000  including  the  production  in  the  firm's 
Hillsboro  plant  which  was  purchased  in  1940  and  is 
operated  as  an  auxiliary  unit.    These  two  plants  now 


employ  approximately  400  employees  with  an  an- 
nual payroll  in  excess  of  $1,200,000.  During  the  War 
period  the  firm  added  some  new  machinery  and  dur- 
ing the  past  five  years  the  entire  plant  has  been  re- 
equipped  and  is  strictly  modern  in  all  respects. 

The  White  firm  produces  a  high  quality  of  furni- 
ture all  in  Traditional  types.  The  Mebane  plant  pro- 
duces bedroom  and  some  dining  room  furniture, 
while  the  Hillsboro  plant  produces  dining  room  fur- 
niture entirely.  All  products  are  veneered  mahogany 
faces  on  poplar  core.  Plywoods  for  the  Hillsboro 
plant  are  produced  in  the  Mebane  plant. 

In  December,  1923,  the  Mebane  plant  burned. 
Since  this  firm  was  the  first  in  this  area  to  use  lac 
quers,  produced  by  Du  Pont  organization  and  since 
the  Du  Pont's  were  anxious  to  get  the  plant  back  in 
operation,  it  offered  and  provided  emergency  assist 
ance  in  the  rebuilding  so  that  the  plant  was  back  in 
complete  operation  within  seven  and  one-half  months 
Two  other  major  additions  have  been  made  to  the 
plant,  one  in  1945  when  10,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  was  added  in  the  machine  department  and  an 
additional  3,500  square  feet  was  added  in  1951. 

White  quality  furniture  is  distributed  on  a  nation 
wide  basis,  25  salesmen  covering  the  area.  Perma- 
nent displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago,  New  York 
and  High  Point. 

The  White  Furniture  Co.   enjoys  splendid  rela 
tionships  with  its  employees  on  the  theory  that  good 
furniture  requires  good  workers  earning  good  pay 
During  the  past  two  years,  the  company  has  followed 
the  policy  of  giving  Christmas  bonuses  on  this  basis : 
5  %  of  wages  to  employees  with  less  than  5  years  oi 
service;  8%  to  those  with  5  to  10  years  of  service 
10%  to  those  with  more  than  10  years  of  service 
About  one-half  of  the  employees  fall  into  the  firs 
group  and  about  one-fourth  each  in  the  last  tw( 
groups.     The  company  also  matches  funds  for  hos 
pitalization  and  sick  benefits  both  for  employees  anc 
their  dependents  and  life  insurance  in  which  em 
ployees  participate  by  paying  a  small  percentage  o: 
the  premiums.     The  company  has  operated  a  credi 
union  for  several  years  with  the  loss  of  only  $1.    i5 
hard  luck  fund  is  provided  from  profits  from  th 
operation  of  a  drink  stand.    In  addition  to  a  week  o 
paid  vacation  in  the  summer  the  company  observe; 
three  annual  paid  holidays  and  observes  10  minute; 
rest  periods  morning  and  afternoon. 

Hillsboro  Plant — The  White  Furniture  Co.  plan 
at  Hillsboro  was  bought  in  1940.  Previously  it  ha< 
been  operated  by  Bivens  Brothers  as  the  Orange  Fur 
niture  Craftsmen.  This  name  and  the  manufactur 
of  cheaper  grades  of  furniture  were  continued  unti 
1947.  At  that  time  the  former  name  was  droppei] 
and  the  plant  changed  to  the  production  of  high  grad| 
tables,  later  expanding  its  production  to  dining  roor 


A/INTER-SPRING,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  57 


urniture  of  good  quality.  This  plant  has  been  en- 
arged  and  modernized  with  new  equipment.  When 
his  plant  was  purchased  by  the  White  firm,  it  em- 
•loyed  40  to  50  workers.  Approximately  125  work- 
rs  are  now  employed.  All  of  the  office  and  book 
/ork  for  this  plant  is  handled  in  the  office  at  Mebane. 

CRAFTIQUE,  INC. 

Craftique,  Inc.,  Mebane,  was  originated  in  1945, 
nd  gradually  acquired  the  assets  of  Mebane  Mills 

which  then  was 
owned  entirely  by  L. 
P.  Best  and  was 
started  in  1941.  In 
1947,  K.  C.  Royall, 
Jr.  acquired  an  in- 
terest and  was  later 
(elected  vice  -  presi- 
dent  of  the  firm, 
later  being  elected 
secretary  and  treas- 
urer. The  present 
officers  are  L.  P. 
Best,  president,  K. 
C.  Royall,  Jr.,  secre- 
tary and  treasurer, 
T.  K.  Wilkinson,  Sr., 
The  Board  of  Directors  is  the  same 


'unt  chest  reproduced  from  Hills- 
iro  piece  by  Craftique,  Inc.,  Mebane 


ice-president. 
s  the  officers  and  comprise  the  stockholders  in  the 
rm. 

The  authorized  capital  is  $100,000,  all  of  which 
?  now  outstanding,  with  L.  P.  Best  as  principal 
wner. 

Craftique,  Inc.  is  located  about  three  miles  west 
f  Mebane,  on  a  20  acre  tract  which  was  formerly 
sed  as  the  Mebane  Six-County  Fair  Grounds.  Sev- 
ral  new  concrete  block  buildings  have  been  added 
d  the  ones  which  stood  on  the  property  until  now 
lie  buildings  contain  approximately  42,000  square 
eet  of  floor  space. 
Craftique  has  accumulated  capital  assets  of  ap- 
roximately  285,000.  Its  annual  sales  are  three- 
uarters  of  a  million  dollars  with  distribution 
hroughout  the  United  States.  Permanent  displays 
re  maintained  at  High  Point  and  the  firm's  prod- 
cts  are  advertised  in  nationally  circulated  maga- 
zines. Ten  salesmen  cover  the  area, 
selling  direct  to  furniture  and  de- 
partment stores.  The  firm  employs 
85  highly  trained  craftsmen  and 
the  annual  payroll  is  approxim- 
ately $275,000. ' 

Craftique  produces  a  line  of  au- 
thentic antique  reproductions  based 
largelv  on  Hepplewhite  design  for 
the  dining  room  with  a  few  odd  liv- 
ing room  pieces.  The  firm's  crafts- 
men reproduce  the  antique  designs 
of  the  original  pieces  to  the  last  de- 
tail, although  quantity  production 
is  obtained  by  the  use  of  most  mod- 
ern machinery.  All  products  are 
available  in  antique  satin  mahog- 
any finish,  as  well  as  a  honey  tone 
light  Mellowax  finish.  Honduras 
mahogany  is  the  principal  material 
of  these  reproductions.  The  char- 
acter of  the  furniture  is  ideally 
suited  for  use  in  modern  day  homes. 


\lolid  mahogany 
"Hepplewhite" 
orner  cupboard 
i  Craftique,  Inc., 
ebane;  13  panes 
for  original 
13  states. 


Plant  of  The  Mebane  Company,  Mebane,  makers  of  furniture 
and  "Kingsdoion"  mattresses. 

THE  MEBANE  CO. 

The  Mebane  Company,  Mebane,  was  organized  in 
1904  as  The  Mebane  Bedding  Co.  by  W.  W.  Corbitt, 
G.  D.  Vincent,  and  A.  N.  Scott  with  a  combined 
capital  of  $3,300. 

Earlier  products  included  straw  and  cotton  mat- 
tresses selling  for  $1.25;  cotton  and  corn  husk  mat- 
tresses at  $1.75,  and  top  excelsior  and  cotton  mat- 
tresses at  $2.00. 

While  this  firm  is  engaged  primarily  in  producing 
mattresses  and  pillows,  it  also  produces  such  wood- 
en furniture  items  as  wooden  bases  for  box  springs, 
wooden  studio  couch  frames,  Hollywood  headboards, 
sofa  beds  and  other  wooden  frames.  This  justifies 
inclusion  of  this  firm  in  the  wooden  furniture  manu- 
facturing industry. 

In  1929  the  Royall-Borden  Manufacturing  Co.  of 
Goldsboro  was  consolidated  with  the  Mebane  firm. 
The  owners  then  purchased  the  Cottonbelt  Manufac- 
turing Co.  of  Rocky  Mount  and  later  operations  at 
both  Goldsboro  and  Rocky  Mount  plants  were  dis- 
continued as  The  Mebane-Royall  Co.,  its  name  then, 
increased  its  production  facilities  at  Mebane.  George 
C.  Royall,  Sr.,  of  Goldsboro  (father  of  Kenneth  C. 
Royall,  recent  Secretary  of  the  Army)  became  a  new 
partner,  remaining  in  the  firm  until  his  death.  His 
stock  was  purchased  in  1947.  He  was  on°  of  the 
founders  of  the  National  Association  of  Bedding 
Manufacturers. 

With  the  reorganization  in  1947  the  name  became 
The  Mebane  Company.  W.  W.  Corbitt,  one  of  the 
organizers,  is  still  president  of  the  company,  al- 
though not  very  active.  Ben  F.  Warren,  who  joined 
the  firm  in  1905,  the  year  following  its  organization, 
and  worked  up  through  the  ranks,  became  executive 
vice-president,  treasurer,  and  general  manager  in 
1945.  Since  that  time  the  company  has  more  than 
doubled  its  production  and  sales.  Mrs.  Myrtle  Pope 
is  secretary  and  the  most  recent  addition  to  the 
official  family  is  George  Ratterman,  sales  manager, 
who  joined  the  firm  in  1949. 

The  Mebane  Company  enlarged  its  operations  un- 
til it  now  contains  150,000  square  feet  of  floor  space 
in  its  modernly  equipped  plant  with  production  ca- 
pacity of  500  to  700  mattresses,  400  to  500  bed 
springs  and  cots,  24,000  pounds  of  felt  batting,  and 
other  items,  including  studio  beds,  bed  frames  and 
other  parts,  each  working  day.  The  plant  employs 
from  150  to  175  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  ex- 
ceeding $500,000.  Annual  sales  now  range  between 
$2,500,000  and  $3,000,000. 

The  Mebane  Company  products,  including  its 
famous  "Kingsdown"  mattresses  and  other  mat- 
tresses, juvenile  bedding,  coil  bed  springs,  folding 
and  roll-away  cots,  bed  frames,   Hollywood  head- 


PAGE  58 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


boards,  studio  beds  and  pillows,  are  distributed  over         prompt  delivery  of  all  Mebane  products.    Permanent 


North  Carolina  and  other  nearby  states. 

Nine  factory  representatives,  handling  Mebane 
products  only,  cover  the  area  and  account  for  prob- 
ably 85%  of  the  firm's  sales  volume.  The  firm  main- 
tains four  warehouses  strategically  located  in  the 
area  of  distribution  and  ten  company  vans  assure 


displays  are  maintained  in  High  Point  and  in  the 
company's  own  show  rooms. 


OTHER  ALAMANCE  PLANTS 

Modern  Venetian  Blind  Co.,  1402  S.  Church  St. 
Spoon,  J.  L.,  Route  2,  Snow  Camp. 
Webster  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.,  Graham. 


Burlington 


Sandhills  Area  Has  Several  Progressive  Furniture  Firms 


Several  important  furniture  plants  have  developed 
in  the  Sandhills  area  during  the  last  quarter  of  a 
century.  Among  these  are  the  Sandhill  Furniture 
Corp.,  West  End,  and  later  the  Sanford  Furniture 
Co.,  both  established  and  owned  by  members  of  the 
J.  B.  Von  Canon  family.  Other  plants  operate  at 
Vass  and  Trov  with  smaller  ones  in  other  Sandhill  i 
communities. 

SANDHILL  FURNITURE  CORP. 

Sandhill  Furniture  Corp.,  West  End,  was  organiz- 
ed in  1927  by  the  late  J.  B.  Von  Canon,  Sr.T  and  his 
son,  Fred  Von  Canon.  In  the  original  corporation  the 
late  J.  B.  Von  Canon,  Sr.,  was  president;  E.  L.  Sut- 
phin,  vice-president,  and  Fred  Von  Canon,  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

The  authorized  capital  in  the  beginning  was  $50,- 
000,  increased  several  times  since.  Originally  the 
firm  manufactured  only  odd  poster  beds  and  wooden 
beds  of  all  types.  It  continues  as  one  of  the  largest, 
if  not  the  largest,  producers  of  this  type  product  in 
the  nation.  In  1934  another  division  for  the  manu- 
facture of  bedroom  suites  was  added. 

An  interesting  fact  concerning  the  operation  of 
Sandhill  is  that  a  large  part  of  the  lumber  used  is 
manufactured  from  the  tree  in  the  sawing  and  proc- 
essing plants  it  operates  in  North  and  South  Caro- 
lina. 

The  floor  space  at  the  plant  has  doubled  and  re- 
doubled several  times  since  the  beginning  in  1927. 
The  large  plants  are  of  latest  type  construction  and 
the  equipment  is  up  to  date  and  modern  in  every  re- 
spect. 

Sandhill  makes  odd  beds  of  all  kinds — poster  beds, 
Jenny  Lind  beds,  spool  beds  and  Dolly  Madison  type 
beds.  Bedroom  suites  are  made  from  genuine  cherry, 
maple  and  mahogany  with  some  walnut  in  18th  Cen- 
tury, Colonial  and  Modern  designs. 

The  products  are  sold  throughout  the  nation  and 
Canada,  Cuba  and  Puerto  Rico.  A  crew  of  about  45 
salesmen  sell  the  merchandise.  The  firm  maintains 
permanent  offices  and  displays  in  New  York,  Chi- 
cago, 111.,  High  Point,  Los  Angeles  and  San  Francisco. 


Extensive  plant  of  Sandhill  Furniture  Corp.,  West  End,  Moore  County 


J.  B.  Von  Canon,  Sr.,  died  in  late  1940.  The  offi- 
cers of  the  firm  since  have  been  J.  B.  Von  Canon,  Jr. 
president ;  Fred  Von  Canon,  vice-president  and  chair- 
man of  the  Board ;  Paul  Von  Canon,  treasurer,  anc 
E.  P.  Hinson,  secretary. 

SANFORD  FURNITURE  CO. 

Sanford  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Sanford,  was  organ 
ized  by  Fred  Von  Canon  and  started  business  ii 
1938.  Mr.  Von  Canon  bought  the  former  Fitts 
Crabtree  Mfg.  Co.,  removed  the  old  machinery 
bought  and  installed  a  small  amount  of  entirely  nev 
machinery.  Enlargement  plans  were  halted  becaus 
of  World  War  II. 

During  the  war  period  Mr.  Von  Canon  devotei 
most  of  the  plant's  capacity  to  producing  material 
for  the  U.  S.  Navy.  He  purchased  an  additions 
building  and  in  it  became  the  Navy's  largest  produce 
of  ship  fenders,  the  second  largest  producer  of  carg 
nets  and  secretly  filled  an  order  for  rocket  launchers 
leading  all  other  firms  in  this  production.  The  plan 
received  the  Navy's  Certificate  of  Achievement  fo 
its  splendid  record.  The  plant  also  continued  to  fi 
small  orders  for  furniture  for  Army  and  Nav 
projects.  This  plant  is  now  used  for  producing  rm 
hogany  occasional  pieces  for  the  home. 

After  the  war  Mr.  Von  Canon  went  ahead  wit 
plans  and  constructed  a  modern  steel  and  masonr 
plant  and  installed  the  latest  and  most  effective  fui 
niture  machinery.  This  plant  now  produces  bedrooi 
furniture  at  low  and  medium  prices.  The  firm  h* 
also  produced  in  recent  years  a  line  of  popular  pr 
motional  suites.  Products  are  sold  nation-wide,  4 
salesmen  covering  the  entire  country.  Permanei 
displays  are  maintained  in  Chicago,  New  York,  Hig 
Point,  Los  Angeles  and  San  Francisco. 

Officers  of  the  firm  are  Fred  Von  Canon,  pres 

dent  and  general  manager ;  J.  B.  Jones,  vice-preside] 

and  superintendent;   J.   M.  Auman,  secretary  ar 

assistant  manager,  and  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Von  Cano 

wife  of  the  president,  treasurer.     The  bulk  of  tl 

stock  in  the  corporation  is  owned  by  Mr.  Von  Canoj 

Most  of  Sanford  Furniture  Co.  products  are 

genuine  solid  Honduras  maho 

any  and  mahogany  veneer.  Mai 

items  are  also  made  from  Ida] 

knotty  pine  and  solid  Pennsj 

vania  cherry.   In  1950  and  195 

Sanford  produced  several  lar 

lots  of  maple  furniture  for  t 

State  of  North  Carolina  insti 

tions.   All  of  the  merchandise 

sold  under  the  patented  tra 

mark,  "Sanford  Permacraft" 

In  1951,  Sanford  Furnitul 
Co.  introduced  a  new  process  f  I 
making  a  bow  front  or  serpen 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  59 


tine  front  dresser,  chest  or  other  household  furni- 
ture item.  This  is  entirely  new  and  patent  has  been 
applied  for.  The  front  is  produced  with  the  use  of 
what  is  known  as  impregnated  honeycomb  paper 
core  and  plywood.  The  firm  announces  that  it  is 
strong,  is  not  affected  by  weather  and  the  drawer 
fronts  do  not  shrink  or  swell.  They  have  been  soak- 
ed in  water  for  hours  without  apparent  effect.  Many 
magazine  articles  have  appeared  regarding  this  new 
process  in  recent  months. 

While  Mr.  Von  Canon  was  employed  in  the  Furni- 
ture Department  of  R.  H.  Macy  &  Co.,  New  York, 
he  developed  a  light  built  into  the  head  of  a  bed, 
known  nationally  as  the  "Dee  Lite".  He  returned  to 
North  Carolina  in  1927  and  with  his  father,  the  late 
J.  B.  Von  Canon,  Sr.,  founded  the  Sandhill  Furniture 
Corp.  at  West  End.  This  was  their  first  venture  in 
furniture  manufacturing. 

Mr.  Von  Canon  is  now  vice-president  and  chairman 
of  the  board  of  Sandhill  Furniture  Corp.  and  his 
brothers,  J.  B.  Von  Canon,  Jr.,  and  Paul  Von  Canon, 
are  president  and  treasurer,  respectively,  of  the 
Sandhill  concern. 

Fred  Von  Canon  also  owns  and  operates  the  Edin- 
burg  Hardwood  Lumber  Co.,  Washington,  N.  C. 

VASS  INDUSTRIES,  INC. 

Vass  Industries,  Inc.,  Vass,  has  been  in  operation 
as  a  woodworking  plant  for  probably  20  years,  most 
of  the  time  manufacturing  bedroom  furniture.  In 
1940  the  firm  was  reorganized  and  incorporated  with 
William  A.  Levick  of  Philadelphia  as  president  and 
Wilson  Russ  as  vice-president  and  general  manager. 
Mr.  Levick  also  handles  sales  for  the  Vass  firm  and 
is  one  of  the  chief  operators  of  a  furniture  display 
building  in  Philadelphia. 

The  firm  occupies  a  building  which  was  formerly 
a  community  building  and  still  earlier  had  been  a  to- 
bacco warehouse.  It  contains  approximately  56,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space  all  on  one  floor.  The  firm 
employs  an  average  of  130  workers  with  an  annual 
payroll  of  around  $200,000.  Annual  sales  are  in  the 
neighborhood  of  $700,000. 

In  1945  the  firm  shifted  from  bedroom  furniture 
and  began  making  cedar  wardrobes.  In  1950  the 
firm  began  the  production  of  television  cabinets  on 
a  large  scale  and  organized  the  Tee-Cee  Co.  to  handle 
this  part  of  the  production.  Last  year,  however,  this 
new  firm  was  allowed  to  lapse,  although  Vass  In- 
dustries continues  to  manufacture  television  cabi- 
nets. Last  year  the  firm  went  more  into  manufac- 
turing home  kneehole  desks,  produced  in  Colonial, 

Traditional  and 
Modern  types, 
manufactured  from 
plywoods  of  such 
hardwoods  as  ma- 
hogany, gum  and 
walnut. 

Vass  Industries 
has  recently  com- 
pleted modernizing 
the  plant  and  in- 
stalling ney  equip- 
ment. Its  products 
are  sold  nationwide 

'^Mahogany  kneehole  desk  made   by      "Y  a  f°rc6  Of  about 
Vass  industries,  Vass.  15  salesmen  handled 


through  the  Philadelphia  office.  Permanent  displays 
are  maintained  in  High  Point  and  Philadelphia,  and 
season  exhibits  are  made  at  Chicago  and  New  York. 

ALLIENE  FURNITURE  CORP. 

Alliene  Furniture  Corp.,  Troy,  known  and  operated 
for  several  years  as  the  Circle  Chair  Co.,  was  reor- 
ganized and  incorporated  under  its  present  name  in 
1950  as  one  of  the  several  units  in  North  Carolina 
owned  in  part  by  the  Paramount  Furniture  Indus- 
tries of  New  York  City  and  in  part  by  local  interests. 
Other  firms  in  which  the  New  York  interests  are 
part  owners  include  Ramseur  Furniture  Co.,  Ram- 
seur ;  Brady  Furniture  Co.,  Rural  Hall,  and  Lovelace- 
Johnson  Furniture  Corp.,  Wendell. 

Officers  of  Alliene  Furniture  Corp.  are  Ralph 
Deutsch,  New  York  City,  president,  and  Herbert 
Wallack  of  New  York  City,  vice-president,  both  offi- 
cers of  the  Paramount  Furniture  Industries ;  F.  L. 
Taylor,  secretary-treasurer,  and  D.  L.  Simmons,  gen- 
eral manager,  who  operate  the  Troy  plant.  The  affil- 
iated firm  in  New  York  handles  sales  and  display 
spaces  for  the  Troy  firm. 

In  its  first  year  of  operation  the  Alliene  firm  had 
annual  sales  of  approximately  $500,000  in  spite  of 
the  fact  that  many  of  the  workers  were  new  and  in- 
experienced in  this  type  of  production.  The  firm 
employs  from  75  to  80  workers  and  has  an  annual 
payroll  of  approximately  $100,000.  The  operations 
are  carried  on  in  about  45,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space.  The  firm  produces  upholstered  chairs,  occa- 
sional lounge  chairs,  and  some  love  seats.  Most  of 
the  products  have  been  in  Traditional  types  but  re- 
cently more  Modern  furniture  types  are  being  added. 
Local  hardwoods,  including  oak,  gum  and  poplar,  are 
used  in  these  products. 

Alliene  Furniture  Corp.  products,  sold  through  the 
New  York  office,  are  distributed  largely  in  the  East 
and  Middle  West  and  sold  to  department  and  furni- 
ture stores.  Four  trucks  are  operated  in  the  distri- 
bution of  its  products.  Permanent  display  spaces 
are  maintained  in  Chicago,  New  York  and  High 
Point. 

Montgomery  Furniture  Corp.,  Biscoe,  is  another 
Montgomery  County  plant. 


LINCOLNTON 

Lincolnton  was  famous  as  a  furniture  making  cen- 
ter in  Colonial  days.  Its  chief  fame  lies  in  the  fact 
that  a  man  named  Houser  operated  a  cabinet  shop 
there  and  had  as  his  apprentice  Henry  Payne  who, 
with  his  son  and  later  descendants,  were  expert  fur- 
niture makers.  Lincoln  County  now  has  four  large 
furniture  plants  and  two  smaller  ones. 

IDEAL  CHAIR  CO. 

Ideal  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  Lincolnton,  was  organized 
around  1915  as  the  Lincolnton  Furniture  Mfg.  Co. 
by  several  citizens,  including  T.  H.  Cansler,  H.  S. 
Robinson  and  D.  E.  Rhyne.  About  two  years  later 
the  plant  was  sold  to  the  Carolina  Furniture  Co. 
which  later  went  into  receivership  and  the  plant  was 
closed  for  about  a  year. 

In  1922  the  plant  was  purchased  by  three  brothers 
from  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  Nathan,  Mark  and  Arthur 
Zimtbaum,  and  the  name  was  changed  to  Ideal  Chair 
Co.  Since  that  time  two  of  the  brothers,  Nathan  and 
Mark  Zimtbaum,  have  died  and  the  third,  Arthur 
Zimtbaum,  is  no  longer  connected  with  the  company. 


PAGE  60 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Air  view  of  the  large  furniture  plant  of  Ideal  Chair  Co.,  Lincolnton. 

Two  sons  of  Nathan  Zimtbaum  now  own  and  ope- 
rate the  business.  They  are  Howard  Zimtbaum, 
president  and  treasurer,  and  Randolph  Zimtbaum, 
vice-president,  secretary  and  manager.  The  com- 
pany has  an  authorized  capital  of  $250,000. 

In  the  30  years  of  operation  by  the  Zimtbaum 
family,  Ideal  Chair  Co.  has  prospered  and  expanded 
until  the  firm  now  employs  an  average  of  around  160 
workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately 
$275,000.  Annual  sales  now  range  between  $1,000,- 
000  and  $1,250,000. 

Ideal  Chair  Co.  manufactures  dinettes,  bedroom 
suites  and  odd  beds,  including  four-poster  beds. 
Products  are  made  in  solid  maple  and  in  maple,  wal- 
nut and  mahogany  finish. 

The  firm  has  a  salesroom  and  warehouse  in  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y.  Products  are  distributed  in  about  25 
states,  largely  in  the  eastern  and  southern  area,  about 
18  salesmen  covering  the  area,  usually  12  in  the 
Southern  states  and  six  from  the  Brooklyn  ware- 
house. 

COTTONSMITH  FURN.  MFG.  CO.,  INC. 

Cottonsmith  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Lincolnton, 
was  organized  in  February,  1946,  by  Edward  A. 
Cotton,  president,  and  William  Henderson  Smith, 
general  manager,  who  decided  on  this  type  of  indus- 
try while  serving  in  the  Army  together  for  three 
years  during  World  War  II.  The  idea  of  the  present 
organization  was  conceived  during  their  service  in 
the  Philippine  Campaign  and  was  developed  through 
construction  of  a  small  pilot  plant  to  manufacture 
specialized  types  of  furniture — sewing  machine  cab- 
inets. 

During  the  year  1946  the  plant  was  constructed 
and  production  started  in  1947  when  the  first  sewing 
machine  cabinet  was  produced.  The  original  ma- 
chine room  covered  2,400  square  feet  of  floor  space 
and  proved  so  successful  that  the  present  Lincolnton 
plant  covers  around  60,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 
In  1951  this  firm  found  that  its  expanded  market 
required  additional  facilities  and  it  purchased  the 
entire  corporate  interest  in  Lohman-Grimes  Corp.  in 
Winston-Salem  which  has  since  been  operated  as  an 
auxiliary  plant.  (See  Winston-Salem — Lohman- 
Grimes  Corp.) 

The  Lincolnton  plant  today  has  a  production  ca- 
pacity of  approximately  25,000  cabinets  a  year  with 
a  market  value  in  excess  of  $500,000.  The  plant 
employs  about  60  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll 
of  around  $120,000. 

The  Cottonsmith  firm  has  concentrated  on  rede- 
signing sewing  machine  cabinets  and  has  devoted  its 
efforts  to  making  sewing  machines  a  dual  furniture 
item  of  sufficient  lines  and  attractiveness  to  take  its 
place  in  the  home  as  a  piece  of  furniture,  rather  than 


a  simple  auxiliary  unit.  The  firm 
has  developed  15  different  types 
of  cabinets  ranging  from  the 
double  driver  disc  to  the  spinnet 
console  models.  In  addition  to 
purchasing  the  Winston-Salem 
plant,  the  firm  has  developed  its 
own  dry  kiln  and  core  manufac- 
turing facilities.  At  present  it 
is  credited  with  being  the  larg- 
est independent  sewing  machine 
cabinet  company  in  the  United 
States,  producing  plywood  with  mahogany,  walnut, 
korina,  oak  and  maple  faces. 

Through  its  New  York  warehouse  and  distribution 
center,  operating  as  Modern  Sewing  Machine  Co.,  the 
products  are  distributed  throughout  the  United 
States  and  Central  America.  Permanent  displays 
are  maintained  in  Brooklyn,  New  York.  The  princi- 
pal office  of  the  firm  is  now  located  at  888  Northwest 
Boulevard,  Winston-Salem. 

Officers  of  the  Cottonsmith  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.  in 
Lincolnton,  as  well  as  of  the  Lohman-Grimes  Corp. 
in  Winston-Salem,  are  Edward  A.  Cotton,  president, 
Ned  F.  Harbin,  treasurer,  and  Clyde  A.  Johnson,  sec- 
retary. William  Henderson  Smith  is  general  man- 
ager of  both  firms,  assisted  by  Max  Brinson  and  C. 
G.  Whiteside  as  plant  superintendents.  Mrs.  John  G. 
Williamson  is  general  purchasing  agent  and  produc- 
tion coordinator. 

OTHER  LINCOLNTON  FIRMS 

Burris  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  422  N.  Aspen  St.    (two  letters  sought 

data;  no  response). 
Cochrane  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,   (two  letters;  no  response). 
Lincolnton  Cabinet  Co.,  Inc.,  W.  Childs  St. 
Novelty  Chair  Co.,  Inc.,  E.  Church  St. 
Fidelity  Chair  Co. 


MARION 

Marion  has  been  an  important  furniture  manu- 
facturing community  since  around  the  turn  of  the 
century.  In  recent  years  two  large  furniture  manu- 
facturing organizations,  Drexel  and  Broyhill,  have} 
purchased  and  now  operate  the  several  Marion 
plants.  Employment  Security  Commission  records 
show  that  these  plants  had  average  monthly  employ- 
ment of  1,024  in  1950  and  in  that  year  total  payrolls 
for  these  firms  amounted  to  $2,405,039. 

DREXEL  FURNITURE  CO. 

The  Marion  group  is  the  second  largest  in  the 
Drexel  Furniture  Co.  organization,  consisting  of 
three  plants,  one  of  which  is  engaged  in  the  manu 
f acture  of  bedroom  furniture,  another  in  the  manu 
facture  of  dining  room  furniture  and  the  third, 
known  as  the  Panel  Plant,  forms  panel  veneer  for  the 
other  two  plants.  Total  floor  space  covered  by  the 
Marion  units  is  397,000  square  feet  and  approximate 
ly  750  persons  are  employed  in  their  operation. 

The  Marion  Bedroom  Plant,  known  as  Plant  No.  2 
in  the  Drexel  group,  is  of  brick  construction  and  was 
completed  in  1941.  This  plant  replaced  an  old  fac 
tory  which  stood  on  the  same  site  and  is  regarded  as 
one  of  the  most  modern  of  any  in  the  organizatior 
from  the  production  standpoint. 

The  Marion  Dining  Room  Plant,  referred  to  as 
Plant  No.  4,  is  one  of  the  oldest  operated  by  th( 
Drexel  Co.  Most  of  the  plant  constructed  of  wooc 
was  purchased  in  1932.    Since  that  time  an  enlarge 


VlNTER-SPRING,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  61 


lent  program  has  resulted  in  adding  about  30%  to 
he  original  space. 

The  Marion  plants  produce  the  popular  priced 
lodern  and  Early  American  furnitures. 

The  Marion  Panel  Plant,  known  as  Plant  No.  6  in 
he  Drexel  group,  is  of  brick  construction.  About 
0%  of  the  present  building  was  erected  in  1931, 
bout  40%  was  added  in  1937,  and  the  remaining 
0%  was  built  in  1941.  This  is  a  service  plant  for 
he  dining  room  and  bedroom  plants,  furnishing  them 
nth  paneling  and  veneer  for  their  products.  (For 
ther  Drexel  information  see  Drexel  and  Drexel- 
lorganton.) 

OTIS  L.  BROYHILL  TURN.  CO. 

The  Otis  L.  Broyhill  Furniture  Co.,  Marion,  orig- 
lally  the  McDowell  Furniture  Co.,  was  purchased 
y  the  Broyhill  interest  in  1941.  Otis  L.  Broyhill  is 
resident;  R.  T.  Broyhill,  vice-president;  C.  A.  Hold- 
n,  secretary,  and  R.  J.  Stevens,  treasurer.  Frank 
ump  is  plant  superintendent. 

New  machinery  and  warehousing  facilities  have 
een  installed  in  the  326,498  square  feet  of  floor  space 
ccupied  by  the  plant  and  310  workers  are  employed. 

Modern  and  Borax  Waterfall  furniture  is  now  pro- 
uced  in  the  Marion  plant,  designed  and  manufac- 
ared  to  sell  in  the  medium  priced  ranges. 

The  Otis  L.  Broyhill  Furniture  Co.  sells  its  prod- 
cts  throughout  the  country  through  the  Broyhill 
'urniture  Factories,  sales  and  management  organ- 
nation,  Lenoir,  and  displays  are  maintained  at  sev- 
ral  of  the  leading  furniture  markets. 


"HIRTY  SCATTERED  N.  C.  COUNTIES 
JAVE  ACTIVE  FURNITURE  PLANTS 

In  addition  to  the  14  North  Carolina  counties  which  have 
trge  furniture  manufacturing  centers,  with  county  employ- 
lent  in  excess  of  500  workers,  the  State  has  another  group  of 
bout  30  counties  in  which  furniture  manufacturing  is  carried 
a,  some  of  them  with  large  plants.  Most  of  these  plants, 
owever,  have  less  than  50  employees. 

Efforts  were  made  to  secure  additional  information  on  all 
lants  that  have  50  or  more  employees  for  special  articles  for 
lis  issue.  Some  of  these  larger  plants  are  included  in  this 
st.  At  least  two  letters  were  written  them,  indicated  in  the 
st  by  asterisks  (*),  but  no  responses  were  received.  These 
mattered  firms,  most  of  them  small  but  successful  enterprises, 
y  counties,  follow: 

Alexander — Murdock  Chair  Mfg.  Co.,  Hiddenite. 

Ashe — *Phenix  Chair  Co.,  West  Jefferson;  Home  Furniture 
o.,  West  Jefferson. 

Buncombe — *  Morgan  Furniture  Co.,  Asheville  (Woodfin) ; 
sheville  Bedding  Co.,  182  Clingman  Ave.,  Asheville;  Robert, 
avid,  Co.,  Inc.,  The,  Hgw.  #7,  West,  Black  Mountain. 

Burke — Beach  Mfg.  Co.,  Morganton. 

Cabarrus — Hickory  Manufacturers,  28  Todd  Ave.,  Charlotte 

gw.,  Concord. 

Cleveland — Best  Upholstering  Co.,  Inc.,  113  N.  Lafayette  St.; 

cSwain  Venetian  Blind  Co.,  816  W.  Warren  St.;  Moser  Furni- 
ire  Co.,  123  W.  Marion  St.,  all  Shelby. 

Cumberland — Jackson  Mattress  Co.,  Inc.,  525  S.  Cool  Spring 
..;   Novelty  Furniture  Co.;    Riverside  Mattress  Co.,  all  Fay- 

teville. 

Duplin — Smith  Cabinet  Works,  Magnolia. 

Durham — Carolina  Venetian  Blind  Co.,  404  McMannen  St.; 

urham  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Hillsboro  Rd.;   Durham  Mattress 

).;   Lions  Club  Work  Shop  for  the  Blind,  104  S.  Maple  St.; 

ontsinger's,    Inc.,    Hillsboro    Rd.;    Shaw's    Venetian    Blinds, 

uess  Rd.  and  Buchanan  Blvd.;   Whitehall   Furniture,  Inc., 

)3  Walker  St. ;  Y  &  J  Upholstering  Co.,  1612  E.  Geer  St.,  all 

urham. 

Franklin — Sure  Rest  Mattress  Co.,  Youngsville. 

Gaston — Bessemer  City  Upholstering  Co.,   609   E.   Maryland 

re.,  Bessemer  City;  Underwood  Mattress  Co.,  Gastonia. 

Halifax — Weldon  Mattress  Co.,  Roanoke  Rapids  Hgw.,  Wel- 

n. 


Harnett — Black  River  Mattress  Co.,  W.  Broad  St.,  Dunn. 

Haywood — *Unagusta  Mfg.  Corp.,  Hazelwood. 

Lenoir — Jackson  Mattress  Co.,  Kinston. 

Nash-Edgecombe— *  Wood  Products  Mfg.  Co.,  U.  S.  301  N.; 
Caro-Craft,  Inc.;  Nash  Mfg.  Co.,  all  Rocky  Mount;  Cotton  Belt 
Mattress  Co.,  Pinetops. 

New  Hanover — *Ventilated  Awning  &  Millwork  Co.,  902  S. 
Third  St.,  and  Strickland  Venetian  Blind,  both  Wilmington. 

Pasquotank — Houtz  &  Barwick,  W.  Church  St.  Ext.,  Elizabeth 
City. 

Richmond — Pinecroft  Industries,  Inc.,  McDonald  Ave.,  Ham- 
let; Royston  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.,  Hgw.  1,  Marston. 

Rockingham — *Home  Novelty  Co.,  Inc.,  Draper;  *Stoneville 
Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  Stoneville. 

Rowan — Carolina  Ventilated  Awning  Co.,  218  W.  Cemetery 
St.;  Carter  Bros.  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.,  118  E.  Fisher  St.;  Taylor 
Mattress  Co.,  1039  S.  Main  St.,  all  Salisbury. 

Stanly — *  Young  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Norwood;  Page  Cabinet  Co., 
1204  Monroe  St.,  Albemarle,  and  Smith  Novelty  Co.,  Albemarle. 

Swain — *Carolina  Wood  Turning  Co.,  Bryson  City. 

Union — Carricker,  C.  A.,  &  Sons,  Rt.  2,  Monroe. 

Wake — Lovelace  Johnston  Mfg.  Co.,  Wendell;  Matthews 
Shade  Co.,  104  Glenwood  Ave.,  and  Rich's  Furniture,  Inc., 
Louisburg  Rd.,  both  Raleigh. 

Wayne — *Kemp  Specialty  Furniture  Co.,  S.  Center  St.,  and 
McLamb  &  Lamb  Woodworks,  Mount  Olive  Hgw.,  both  Golds- 
boro. 

Wilson — Wilson  Bedding  Co.,  1105  Downing  St.,  Wilson. 


DUE  TO  WOODS,  LABOK,  INITIATIVE 

(Continued  from  page  10) 

tions  which  formerly  required  days  have  now  been 
reduced  to  a  matter  of  minutes  and  have  made  pos- 
sible a  product  highly  resistant  to  severe  climatic 
conditions,  at  a  very  low  cost. 

The  furniture  finishing  process  which  formerly 
required  days  and  weeks  has  now  been  reduced  to  a 
matter  of  hours  as  result  of  the  use  of  quick-drying 
materials  and  the  application  of  heat  to  speed  the 
drying  process. 

Whereas,  formerly,  furniture  parts  in  production 
were  normally  moved  by  hand,  or  pushed  from  one 
operation  to  another,  conveyors  are  now  used  exten- 
sively throughout  the  entire  manufacturing  process. 
These  conveyors  have  not  only  made  possible  a  sav- 
ings in  labor,  but  have  also  resulted  in  a  much  supe- 
rior product. 

PRODUCTS  EQUAL  NATION'S  BEST 
Cheap  labor  and  low  cost  materials  long  ago  ceased 
to  be  a  factor  in  the  ability  of  the  Southern  furniture 
industry  to  compete  with  plants  in  other  sections  of 
the  country.  The  success  of  industry  in  the  South 
has,  I  believe,  been  due  in  recent  years  to  aggressive 
management,  intelligent  and  skilled  labor  and  to  the 
plant  modernization  program  which  has  been  follow- 
ed during  the  past  fifteen  years. 

As  a  result  of  the  developments  mentioned  above, 
North  Carolina  furniture  factories  now  produce  a 
product  second  to  none  as  to  quality,  design  and  con- 
sumer acceptance,  at  prices  which  the  consumer  can 
well  afford  to  pay.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that 
North  Carolina  is  now  the  No.  1  state  in  production 
of  wood  household  furniture. 

In  most  instances,  the  local  supply  of  lumber  is 
diminishing  each  year  and  factories  are  finding  it 
necessary  to  have  lumber  and  veneers  shipped  from 
greater  distances.  If  the  wood  furniture  industry 
in  the  South  and  throughout  the  country,  for  that 
matter,  is  to  survive,  it  will  be  necessary  in  the  years 
ahead  to  put  back  into  hardwood  growth  through 
reforestation  an  acreage  amount  in  proportion  to 
that  cut  each  year. 


PAGE  62 


THE  E.   S.   C.   QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Community  Handicap  Shop,  Elizabeth  City,  Is  Acclaimed 

By  Norman  L.  Pendleton,  Veterans'  Employment  Representative,  ESC,  Elizabeth  City 

Nearly  two  years  have  elapsed  since  the  local  news- 
paper carried  huge  headlines  that  the  local  Lions 
Club  was  sponsoring  an  industry  in  Elizabeth  City 
whereby  all  handicapped  persons  might  become  em- 
ployed in  a  useful  occupation.  Today,  this  Club  is 
recognized  nationally  for  the  important  role  it  played 
in  developing  this  industry  into  such  an  outstanding 
achievement  for  Elizabeth  City.  As  a  direct  result 
of  this  project,  aid  to  the  handicapped  has  become  an 
integral  part  of  the  various  programs  being  conduct- 
ed by  Lions  Clubs  all  over  the  Nation. 

During  "National  Employ  the  Physically  Handicap- 
ped Week"  of  1949  a  survey  of  the  local  Employment 
Office  files  revealed  a  number  of  upholsterers,  car- 
penters, cabinetmakers,  and  furniture  repairmen 
who  had  physical  disabilities  and  were  denied  the 
opportunity  of  accepting  full  time  jobs  in  private 
industries.  Many  of  this  handicap  group  were  re- 
ceiving financial  assistance  from  charitable  and  wel- 
fare organizations,  but  even  then,  they  were  unable 
to  support  their  families. 

All  efforts  by  the  local  Employment  Service  per- 
sonnel to  place  these  persons  in  private  jobs  were  in 
vain,  but  this  thought  occurred — Why  were  there  no 
civic  organizations  sponsoring  a  workshop  where 
each  handicapped  person  could  work  at  his  trade  at 
certain  hours  and  days  which  would  not  be  detri- 
mental to  his  health?  It  seemed  that  such  a  plan 
could  be  made  feasible  as  the  proceeds  from  the  sale 
of  the  finished  products  would  certainly  take  such 
workers  off  the  welfare  or  relief  rolls. 

The  plan  was  introduced  to  the  Lions  Club  at  the 
next  weekly  dinner  meeting.  The  Lions  Club  direc- 
tors studied  the  proposed  plan  and  immediately  ac- 
cepted it  as  being  the  most  important  project  for  the 
oncoming  year.  Unanimous  approval  was  given  by 
137  individual  Lions  who  pledged  their  wholehearted 
support  toward  this  endeavor.  A  committee  compos- 
ed of  lawyers,  doctors,  professional,  and  business 
men  were  appointed  to  head  the  drive. 

The  writer  was  designated  Co-Chairman  of  the 
group  since  the  success  of  the  program  centered 
around  the  recruiting,  counseling,  selecting  and  re- 
ferring of  disabled  persons  to  the  job.  The  plan  was 
very  simple  at  first  for  it  was  understood  that  only 
a  small  group  of  handicapped  workers  would  be  sup- 
plied with  the  necessary  tools  and  placed  in  a  work- 
shop where  they  could  build  and  repair  old  furniture. 
The  Lions  Club  would  then  hold  a  weekly  auction, 
sell  the  furniture  and  return  the  money  to  the  work- 
ers. 


PENDLETON  SPARKS  HANDICAP  SHOP 
Norman  L.  Pendleton,  veterans  employment  representative  in  the  Elizabeth 
City  local  employment  office,  is  extremely  modest  in  describing  his  activities 
in  connection  with  The  Community  Handicap  Shop.  His  groundwork  sparked 
the  Lions  Club  and  other  civic  organizations  and  individuals  in  its  develop- 
ment. This  article  was  written  in  August,  1950.  Soon  afterwards,  September 
5,  1950,  he  was  recalled  to  the  service  as  First  Lieutenant  in  the  Army  Air 
Corps,  serving  in  the  Pacific  area  until  given  reserve  status  in  June,    1951. 

Meanwhile,  the  Community  Handicap  Shop  project  with  him  away  and  the 
need  reduced,  slowed  down,  but  had  picked  up  again  recently.  For  a  few 
months  Mr.  Pendleton  has  been  on  detached  service  at  Camp  Lejeune  as 
counselor  and  advisor  of  Marines  on  their  employment  problems  as  they  are 
discharged  from  the  service. 

This  article  was  sent  to  Perry  Faulkner,  chief  of  the  Veterans'  Employment 
Service,  U.  S.  Department  of  Labor.  He  was  so  impressed  with  it  that  he 
had  it  reproduced,  sending  copies  to  VERs  in  all  states.  Letters  of  com- 
mendation have  been  received  from  practically  all  states  and  projects  of  a 
similar  type  have  been  promoted  in  several  states. 


The  results  were  quite  different — the  radio  and 
newspaper  discovered  the  plan  and  immediately 
started  a  publicity  campaign.  Spot  announcements, 
editorials,  and  feature  stories  aroused  the  commun- 
ity. Soon  other  civic  clubs,  veteran  organizations 
and  the  Junior  Chamber  of  Commerce  joined  th* 
drive  to  make  this  beginning  industry  an  outstand 
ing  success.  Contributions  started  pouring  in — lum- 
ber and  veneer  mills  supplied  materials  withoui 
charge. 

A  World  War  I  disabled  veteran  suggested  we  us« 
a  large  two-story  building  he  had  recently  construct 
ed.  He  had  planned  to  open  a  grocery  store  but  hiij 
health  was  failing  and  his  plans  did  not  materialize1 
Instead,  he  wanted  to  work  with  the  other  handicap 
ped  persons  in  the  shop.  Hardware  stores  f urnishe 
the  workshop  with  hand  tools,  electric  motors,  paints 
varnishes,  nails,  glue,  and  paint  brushes. 

A  deceased  physician's  widow  donated  all  of  he 
late  husband's  workshop  equipment,  including  jig 
saws,  band-saw,  rip  saws,  joiners,  lathes,  sandin 
machines,  and  paint  spraying  equipment  in  addition 
to  eight  electric  motors  ranging  from  one-half  t 
one  horsepower  each.  One  insurance  firm  contribut 
ed  a  fire  insurance  policy  for  the  building  and  all  it 
equipment.  The  Public  Utilities  Commission  pre 
vided  free  water  and  lights.  An  electrical  firm  wire 
the  motors  and  building  without  charge.  There  werj 
hundreds  of  other  small  donations  too  numerous  t 
mention.  The  Employment  Service  was  kept  bus' 
selecting  the  workers  and  replacing  others  who  wer 
leaving  town  or  accepting  other  jobs. 

The  Community  Handicap  Shop  was  now  a  realitj 
and  an  overwhelming  success.     It  was  expanding  a 
rapidly  that  a  manager  and  shop  instructor  weij 
hired  to  train  the  unskilled  handicapped  workers  fc 
specific  jobs.     The  Vocational  Rehabilitation  Con 
mission  became  interested  in  the  project.    The  Lior 
Club  joined  the  Commission  in  its  rehabilitation  pn 
gram.     Training  was  provided  in  the  shop  for  di 
abled  persons.  Enthusiasm  continued  to  mount.  Tl 
County  Commissioners  decided  that  a  $2500  donatic 
for  further  expansion  of  the  project  was  less  e: 
pensive  than  the  total  amount  of  the  checks  beir 
mailed  to  those  on  the  relief  rolls.     Preference  w«*| 
given  to  those  indigent  cases  who  were  disabled  ar 
desired  employment  in  the  workshop. 

There  just  didn't  seem  to  be  an  end  to  public 
thusiasm,  cooperation,  and  participation.  One  hu: 
dred  and  thirty-seven  Lions  constantly  solicited  o 
ders  for  lawn  furniture,  tables,  book  ends,  bii 
houses,  what-nots,  and  many  other  items  built  by  tl 
handicapped  workers.  Sixty-five  members  of  tl 
Lions  Auxiliary  canvassed  their  neighboring  stree 
for  prospective  sales.  Others  stood  at  key  spo 
throughout  the  city  displaying  and  taking  orders  f 
articles  of  furniture.  Local  department  store  ma 
agers  reserved  space  in  their  show  windows  for  di 
play  and  sale  of  baby  clothes  made  by  elderly  hanc 
capped  women  who  had  no  other  means  of  livelihoc 

Job  orders,  specifying  handicapped  workers,  we 
flooding  the  Employment  Service  Office.  Represent 
fives  from  several  large  firms  had  visited  the  ham 
cap  shop  and  saw  what  was  being  done  by  these  d 


VlNTER-SPRING,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  63 


bled  persons  and  immediately  placed  orders  with  handicapped  workers  is  unemployed  today.     Those 

he  ES  Office  for  handicapped  persons.     It  was  no  who  are  still  living  are  now  active  members  of  the 

Dnger  necessary  to  sell  the  employers  on  hiring  dis-  American  team  and  are  pulling  their  own  weight  in 

bled  workers — they  were  already  sold  on  the  idea.  their  country's  program  of  defense  mobilization. 

During  the  six  months  period  following  the  open-  It  must  be  emphasized  that  no  one  individual  or 
Qg  of  the  Community  Handicap  Shop,  156  job  orders  small  group  of  persons  could  have  made  the  Com- 
pere received  in  the  local  ES  Office  for  handicapped  munity  Handicap  Shop  such  a  success.  Several  hun- 
/orkers.  All  orders  were  promptly  filled.  Then  dred  persons  played  an  important  role  in  bringing 
ame  the  Korean  war — the  writer  was  recalled  to  this  handicap  program  to  a  successful  climax.  Any 
ctive  duty,  the  shop  foreman  and  instructor  accept-  doubting  Thomas  has  but  to  visit  Elizabeth  City  and 
d  a  defense  job,  the  handicapped  workers  were  re-  ask  the  first  person  he  meets  on  the  street  "Just  what 
lacing  other  persons  entering  the  Armed  Forces  and  is  being  done  for  the  handicapped  people  of  Eliza- 
efense  industries.    Not  one  of  the  original  group  of  beth  City?" 

•• ■ 

Manpower-Industrial  Characteristics  of  Major  N.  C.  Areas 

By  Mrs.  E.  DeKay  Johnson,  Labor  Market  Analyst,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 

As  the  defense  program  continues  to  gather  mo-  skilled.  Of  these  unskilled,  some  63  percent  are 
lentum  and  the  nation  expands  its  civilian  produc-  trainable  and  under  45  years  of  age.  Although  sub- 
ion  to  provide  for  a  "bullets  and  butter"  economy,  ject  to  seasonal  fluctuations  and  "more-than-season- 
hortages  are  certain  to  develop.  Many  of  these  al"  slumps  due  to  heavy  inventories  and  light  orders 
hortages  can  be  minimized  by  substitute  or  syn-  in  our  textile  and  furniture  manufacturing  establish- 
hetic  materials,  mechanical  and  technological  im-  ments,  over-all  employment  in  1951  rose  to  a  Sep- 
rovements  and  discoveries.  Even  manpower  short-  tember  peak  and  is  expected  to  continue  its  upward 
ges,  serious  as  they  may  become,  can  be  minimized  trend  in  1952  following  a  seasonal  winter  slump  due 
y  more  complete  utilization  of  persons  currently  in  primarily  to  tobacco  processing  layoffs.  Despite  this 
he  labor  force  and  by  increased  use  of  the  large  po-  amazing  industrial  growth,  North  Carolina  is  still 
sntial  supply  not  now  actively  seeking  work.  basically  an  agricultural  State  and  over  62  percent 

With  the  expanding  defense  program  plus  civilian  of  its  population  live  on  tracts  of  land  of  three  or 

lanpower  requirements,  total  national  employment  more  acres. 

as  risen  steadily  and,  though  showing  the  expected  STATE'S  SIX  'METROPOLITAN  AREAS' 
easonal  fluctuations,  it  reached  an  all  time  peak  of  T„  +,  „  k„u+.  „-e  „„^„r-^  _  ,,  ■, 
1,580,000  as  of  September  1951.  Even  wfth  this  J^^^^^^f^^S^^^ 
igh  employment  and  with  63,186,000  persons  m  the  of  increasing  importance.  Employment  changes  and 
™°Lfn°rCe  aS  °f  ^at  date'  thfre  remal,n<rd  some  45,-  prospects,  extent  of  unemployment,  worker  sur- 
70,000  persons  14  years  and  over  not  in  the  labor  pluses  and  shortages,  occupational  prospects,  etc.,  are 
orce.  An  appreciable  percentage  of  these  individ-  0f  vital  significance  both  to  national  economy  and  to 
als  constitute  our  potential  supply  and  it  is  from  local  and  national  planning.  In  order  to  present  such 
hem  that  our  additional  manpower  needs  must  be  data  in  a  uniform,  comprehensive  and  concise  man- 
let.  It  is  expected  that  the  combined  needs  of  de-  ner  the  U.  S.  Department  of  Labor,  through  the 
ense  industries,  government,  trade  and  services,  affiliated  Employment  Security  Agencies  of  the  sev- 
griculture,  and  civilian  production  will  push  em-  eral  states,  has  developed  a  program  of  regular  labor 
'loyment  to  63,400,000  in  1952.  Considering  the  fact  market  reports  which  analyze  the  employment  con- 
hat  42  percent  of  our  population  14  years  of  age  ditions  in  major  metropolitan  and  industrial  areas 
nd  over  are  not  now  in  the  labor  force,  it  anp^ars  of  the  Nation.  Some  175  such  areas  have  been  de- 
hat  our  potential  supply  is  adequate  and  that  in  fined  as  "Standard  Metropolitan  Areas"  on  the  basis 
ver-all  terms  manpower  needs  can  be  met  without  of  population,  industrial  employment,  and  economic 
ndue  hardship  on  the  nation's  economy.  Specific  umty.  Slx  of  these  areas  are  located  in  North  Caro- 
•roblems  and  shortages,  however,  can  be  expected  to  hna>  namely :  Asheville,  Charlotte,  Durham,  Greens- 
rise  in  areas  where  defense  production  is  concen-  boro-High  Point,  Raleigh,  and  Winston-Salem.  Each 
rated,  in  selected  industries,  and  in  an  increasing  of  these  six  areas  presents  a  different  industrial  and 
umber  of  occupations  employment  picture  and  together  they  tend  to  point 
at  r  t  \T>nv>  qtjt?t>ttjq  ctm  t^  up  the  industrial  diversification  in  the  nonagricul- 
N.  C.  LABOR  SURPLUS  SI  Alt  tural  economy  of  the  State.     These  areas  though 

North    Carolina    is   in    a   most   favorable    labor-  having  only  about  22  percent  of  the  population  of  the 

emand-supply  situation  for  this  period,  having  long  State  have  over  one-third  of  the  UC  covered  employ- 

een  a  labor  supply  or  surplus  State  and  having,  in  ment.    The  following  tables  indicate  the  trends  and 

ddition  to  a  large  labor  force,  a  substantial  potential  employment  characteristic  of  these  areas.     All  fig- 

upply  of  workers.    During  the  period  1940  to  1950  ures,  except  population,  are  as  of  September  1951 : 
rtiile  the  population  of  this  State  increased  13.7  per-  . ,    .„    „,  , ..     n  ,      n   „  p    „  . . ,      ...  „ 

•      •,•-,,.  t      -,  -,  .-I,  Asheville    Chariot' e      Durham    Gr.-H.  P.     Raleigh         W.-S. 

ent,  its  industries  expanded  much  more  rapidly  as 

;  reflected  bv  a  39  nercent  risp  in  cnvprpd  pmnlnv-  Population  (1950) 124,400    197, cso    100,650    190,150    136,450    ne,i4o 

1  enecieu  uy  a  ay  percent  rise  m  covered  employ-  Total  civilian  Labor  Force.  _   47,450     99,500     46, 500     92,200     59,800     66,300 

lent  which  went  to  an  average  monthly  employment  unemployed.. 3,000      2,400      1,300      2,900      2,300      3,500 

f  some  661,400  in  1950  and  then  climbed  to  686,000  Employed 44  450     97,100     45,200     89,300     57,500     62,800 

3r  the  second  quarter  of  1951  Non-Agrinuiturai 40,000     92,600     43,200     83,500     48,300     59,000 

Tl->^  v^4-^4-,-«l   „,,^^KT  ~    4-*™    4- 1       4-   in  a  aaa  Wage— Salary  Wr-rkers    33,000        80,600        38,200        73,900        40,200        51,500 

the  potential  supply  estimated  at  124,000  persons  A110thers 7  000     12  000      5000      9;600      8 100      7>600 

s  ot   September   1951   included   about   76,000   un-  Agriculture 4,450      4,500      2,000      5,800      9,200      3,800 


PAGE  64 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


Save  for  normal  seasonal  fluctuations,  stable  or 
slightly  increasing  employment  is  anticipated  in  1952 
by  most  establishments  now  operating  in  these  areas. 
The  latter  assumption  is,  of  course,  based  on  such 
circumstances  as  expected  increase  in  orders,  avail- 
ability of  materials,  and  continued  general  economic 
prosperity. 

A  brief  summary  of  the  industrial  pattern  of  each 
of  the  areas  "points  up"  their  differences  and  reflects 
the  diversified  non-agricultural  economy  of  the  State. 

Asheville,  Buncombe  County 

This  area  has  the  smallest  percent  of  its  popula- 
tion employed  of  the  six  metropolitan  areas,  for  it  has 
only  about  38  percent  of  its  population  in  the  labor 
force.  Job  opportunities  are  relatively  few  and  out- 
migration  to  defense  and  more  highly  industrialized 
regions  has  resulted  in  a  steady  though  gradual  de- 
cline in  the  labor  force  during  the  past  year.  It  is 
a  mountainous  area  whose  tourist  business  accounts 
for  much  of  its  employment.  Over  two-thirds  of  the 
non-agricultural  wage  and  salaried  workers  are  in 
non-manufacturing  establishments  with  63  percent 
of  these  being  in  service  and  trade.  Manufacturing, 
which  employs  only  some  11,000  persons,  is  centered 
in  textile  mill  products  and  chemical  and  related 
products,  which  hire  two-thirds  of  the  total  engaged 
in  manufacturing. 

The  unemployed  group,  as  of  September  1951,  con- 
sisted of  some  1,200  males,  1,800  females  (400  vet- 
erans and  about  400  nonwhites).  In  addition  to 
these  there  is  a  large  potential  supply  of  workers.  It 
is  expected  that  the  number  of  unemployed  will  rise 
to  over  3,700  during  the  first  months  of  1952.  The 
plans  of  the  Oerlikon  Tool  and  Arms  Corporation, 
however,  to  construct  and  staff  a  large  plant  in  this 
area  will  change  the  employment  picture  and  trends 
materially  and  when  construction  begins  shortages 
in  certain  occupations  may  well  develop. 

Charlotte,  Mecklenburg  County 

This,  the  State's  most  populous  area  has  a  labor 
force  which  is  slightly  over  half  of  its  total  popula- 
tion. This  is  partially  due  to  the  fact  that  numbers 
of  these  workers  incommute  from  adjacent  counties 
which  are  less  highly  industrialized.  Charlotte, 
though  considered  by  many  to  be  a  manufacturing 
area,  is  predominantly  a  trade  center  for  the  south- 
western part  of  the  State  with  employment  in  trade 
outnumbering  total  employment  of  all  manufactur- 
ing establishments  and  with  three-fourths  of  its 
wage  and  salaried  workers  in  non-manufacturing 
industries.  Services  Cexcept  domestic)  rank  high  in 
employment,  hiring  about  a  fourth  of  the  total  non- 
manufacturing  workers  and  transportation,  com- 
munication and  public  utilities  about  16  percent.  The 
chief  manufacturing  industry  of  the  area  is  textiles 
which  employs  about  40  percent  of  the  manufactur- 
ing total ;  next  comes  food  and  kindred  products  with 
17  percent ;  and,  machinery  with  9  per  cent. 

The  unemployed  group,  as  of  September  1951,  con- 
sisted of  some  1100  males  and  1300  females.  In 
addition  to  these  there  is  a  large  supply  of  potential 
workers,  primarily  white  females,  who  would  be 
available  for  suitable  local  employment.  It  has  been 
noticed  that  more  men  and  women  over  50  years  of 
age  are  seeking  work  due  to  the  economic  pressure 
caused  by  increased  living  costs  and  taxes.  No  ap- 
preciable change  in  the  labor  supply  picture  is  expect- 


ed in  the  near  future  and  the  area  forecast  is  for 
relative  balance  in  labor-demand-supply,  gradual 
employment  increases  being  balanced  by  an  increase 
in  the  labor  force  through  new  entrants  and  re- 
entrants. 

Durham,  Durham  County 

This  area,  known  for  its  tobacco  processing  indus- 
try, experiences  the  employment  fluctuations  whicr 
may  be  expected  where  almost  10  percent  of  th< 
wage  and  salaried  workers  are  employed  for  a  perioc 
of  less  than  six  months  duration.  Initial  seasona 
hires  usually  begin  in  July,  layoffs  start  in  Octobei 
and  by  April  or  May  the  industry  is  back  at  its  non 
seasonal  level  of  some  5,500  workers.  Important  ajj 
tobacco  processing  is  to  the  economy  of  the  ares 
(about  24  percent  of  the  wage  and  salaried  workers) 
trade  is  almost  as  important,  employing  some  22  per 
cent.  The  manufacture  of  textiles  comes  next  witl 
about  11  percent. 

Despite  seasonal  fluctuations,  the  employmen 
trend  of  the  area  was  slightly  upward  during  195 
with  increases  in  tobacco  processing,  manufactur 
of  electrical  machinery  and  trade  overbalancing  rela 
tive  stability  or  slight  losses  in  other  industries  an 
resulting  in  an  over-all  increase  of  some  2  percenl I 
No  important  new  or  expanding  industries  or  firm  I 
are  expected  to  increase  employment  of  the  area  bu 
more  employers  are  optimistic  and  look  for  bette 
economic  and  employment  conditions. 

Unemployment,  as  of  September  1951  was  at 
low  ebb  (total  1,300 — females  1,000).    To  these  cal 
be  expected  to  be  added  many  of  the  laid-off  tobacc 
processing  workers  and  by  March  the  number  ca  ] 
be  expected  to  rise  to  between  3,600  and  3,700. 

Greensboro-High  Point,  Guilford  County 

This  area  has  a  labor  force  equal  to  almost  half  c  | 
its  population  due  in  great  part  to  incommuting  froi 
nearby  Davidson  and  Randolph  counties  to  the  ii 
dustrialized  High  Point  area.  Manufacturing  is  ver 
important  and  about  47  percent  of  the  wage  an 
salaried  workers  are  so  employed.  Of  those  engage 
in  manufacturing  57  percent  are  in  textiles,  11  pei 
cent  in  furniture,  9  percent  in  apparel  and  4  percei 
in  food  and  kindred  products.  The  cities  of  Green; 
boro  and  High  Point,  with  a  combined  population  ( 
114,400,  are  important  trade  centers  and  account  f( 
the  fact  that  over  18,000  persons  (one-fourth  ( 
the  wage  and  salaried  workers)  are  engaged  in  retaj 
and  wholesale  trade. 

Seasonal,  and  "more  than  seasonal"  employmei! 
fluctuations,  layoffs,  short  work  weeks  and  alternaf 
ing  work  weeks  resulted  in  uncertainty  and  emplo;j 
ment  declines  in  most  manufacturing  industries  :[■ 
1951  with  furniture  suffering  heaviest  losses.  No:[ 
manufacturing,  on  the  other  hand,  increased  slight! 
despite  construction  declines.  Though  some  uncej 
tainty  is  still  felt  in  the  principal  manufacturing  i: 
dustries  it  is  believed  that  1952  will  see  a  graduj 
increase  in  employment  and  greater  economic  stj 
bility. 

Unemployment  which  fluctuates  according  to  tl 
season,  ranged  from  a  high  of  some  5000  in  July  19' 
to  a  low  of  2,900  in  September.  The  seasonal  pattei 
of  employment  and  unemployment  can  be  expect* 
to  be  followed  next  year  but  may  level  off  due 
greater  economic  stability  and  increasing  emplo 
ment  in  the  major  industries. 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  65 


Raleigh,  Wake  County 

The  employment  picture  of  the  area  is  dominated 
by  non-manufacturing  industries  of  Raleigh,  the  cap- 
ital city,  whose  population  represents  almost  half 
of  that  of  the  entire  county.  Employment  is  heavy 
with  some  44  percent  of  the  population  being  in  the 
labor  force.  Non-manufacturing  is  most  important, 
representing  about  84  percent  of  the  wage  and  sal- 
aried workers.  Of  these,  trade  accounts  for  29  per- 
cent, services  26  per  cent,  and  government  18  per- 
cent. Manufacturing,  employing  some  6,500  to  6,700 
persons,  is  primarily  that  of  food,  textiles,  and  lum- 
ber, these  three  accounting  for  two-thirds  of  such 
employment.  Agricultural  employment  is  more  im- 
portant than  in  any  of  the  other  metropolitan  areas 
and  15  percent  of  the  total  labor  force  is  so  engaged. 

All  industrial  groups  experienced  rising  employ- 
ment during  1951  with  the  number  of  wage  and  sal- 
aried workers  increasing  almost  10  percent.  Seasonal 
reductions  are  expected  during  the  first  four  months 
of  1952,  but  after  that  new  and  expanding  firms  plus 
rising  employment  in  most  existing  industries  should 
further  expand  the  labor  force. 

Unemployment,  which  fluctuated  from  a  January 
1951  high  of  3,600  to  a  Jury  low  of  2,000  was  esti- 
mated at  2,300  in  September  (900  males — 1400  fe- 
males). Following  the  expected  seasonal  gain  in 
unemployment  during  the  first  months  of  the  year 
it  can  be  expected  that  unemployment  of  the  area 
will  be  very  low  in  1952  and  that  there  will  be  an 
increasing  number  of  women  and  older  persons  re- 
entering the  labor  market  for  available  jobs. 
Winston-Salem,  Forsyth  County 

This  area,  also  known  for  its  tobacco  processing 


industry,  experiences  the  employment  fluctuations 
which  may  be  expected  where  over  5  percent  of  the 
wage  and  salaried  workers  are  employed  for  a  period 
of  less  than  six  months.  During  the  November  peak 
some  13,300  persons  work  in  this  industry  and  the 
non-seasonal  level  of  10,600  is  reached  about  May. 
Trade  and  services  fluctuate  with  these  seasons  and 
the  resulting  changes  in  purchasing  power  of  the 
area.  Manufacturing  employment  is  60  percent  of 
the  wage  and  salaried  workers  with  tobacco  account- 
ing for  42  percent,  textiles  26  percent  and  machinery 
15  percent.  Wholesale  and  retail  trade  hire  about 
half  as  many  persons  as  are  engaged  in  tobacco  proc- 
essing, while  service,  government  and  transportation 
employ  another  10,500. 

Despite  seasonal  fluctuations,  the  employment 
trend  of  the  area  was  upward  during  1951  with  all 
industries  showing  stable  or  increasing  employment 
except  furniture  and  fabricated  metals  which  drop- 
ped slightly  due  to  uncertainty  of  orders  and  short- 
age of  materials.  Substantial  gains  were  made  in 
manufacture  of  machinery  and  in  transportation. 
Normal  seasonal  decreases  in  employment  are  expect- 
ed through  March  but  then  the  influence  of  expand- 
ing machinery  manufacture,  transportation  and 
communication  should  be  felt  and  reverse  the  trend. 

Unemployment,  which  fluctuates  according  to  the 
tobacco  season,  reached  a  maximum  of  some  6,400  in 
March  and  by  September  was  down  to  3,500,  the  low 
for  1951.  The  number  of  unemployed  persons  can  be 
expected  to  increase  through  early  spring,  then  the 
trend  will  be  reversed.  Usually  from  60  to  65  per- 
cent of  the  unemployed  are  females  and  over  half 
are  non-whites. 


Employment  Office  Services;  Record  and  Outline  of  Work 

By  John  C.  Mullen,  Supervisor,  Employment  Office  Services,  ES  Division,  ESC 


Since  the  beginning  of  the  operation  of  a  Public 
Employment  Service  in  North  Carolina,  the  local 
offices  have  operated  independently  in  filling  employ- 
er orders,  except  for  such  job  openings  as  were 
cleared  under  formal  clearance  procedures.  In  a 
labor  market,  such  as  existed  in  1938  and  1939,  this 
method  of  operation  was  successful  and  adequate 
from  the  standpoint  of  supplying  demand.  Early  in 
1940,  this  system  was  revised  and  preparations  were 
made  to  serve  the  war  preparedness  program  more 
effectively. 

Recruitment  of  workers  by  North  Carolina  local 
offices  began  on  a  large  scale  during  July  and  August, 
1940,  with  the  beginning  of  construction  work  in  the 
enlargement  of  Fort  Bragg.  This  recruitment  was 
conducted  at  first  in  the  Eastern  part  of  the  State  but 
finally  extended  through  all  offices.  Recruitment  for 
this  project  continued  during  1941,  1942,  and  1943. 
The  peak  employment  of  construction  workers  reach- 
ed a  total  of  66,000.  The  first  branch  office  in  the 
State  was  established  on  this  post  with  personnel 
there  devoting  full  time  to  the  recruitment  and  place- 
ment of  workers  for  the  project. 

Camp  Davis  was  the  next  project  to  demand  re- 
cruitment on  a  large  scale,  beginning  in  December, 
1940.  This  project  at  first  was  supplied  construction 
workers  by  adjacent  offices,  with  some  of  these 
offices  supplying  as  many  as  5,000  workers  in  a  90- 


day  period.  The  recruitment  for  the  project  con- 
tinued during  1941  and  1942  with  the  peak  employ- 
ment of  construction  workers  reaching  approximate- 
ly 33,000. 

Recruitment  for  Camp  Lejeune  began  in  April, 
1942,  and  continued  through  1944.  The  peak  em- 
ployment reached  a  total  of  100,000  construction 
workers.  Cherry  Point  Air  Base  was  the  last  con- 
struction project  which  required  a  large  number  of 
construction  workers.  From  August,  1942,  through 
1944,  with  a  recruitment  being  conducted  on  a  State- 
wide basis,  approximately  43,000  construction  work- 
ers were  recruited  to  staff  this  project. 

During  the  period  that  State-wide  recruitment  was 
conducted  for  the  above  mentioned  projects,  smaller 
construction  projects  were  opening  over  the  State 
and  made  heavy  demands  for  workers.  Recruitment 
during  1940,  1941,  and  1942  was  mainly  confined  to 
recruiting  construction  workers  for  military  bases, 
airfields,  war  plants  and  war  housing  projects.  In 
addition  to  filling  the  demands  of  employers  in  North 
Carolina,  a  great  amount  of  recruiting  was  conducted 
during  1943,  1944,  and  1945  for  out-of-State  employ- 
ers. These  employers  were  hiring  war  workers  to 
work  in  the  states  of  Virginia,  Maryland,  Tennessee, 
Ohio,  New  York,  New  Jersey,  Connecticut,  Michigan, 
Delaware,  Washington,  Oregon  and  many  others. 
During  1943  the  clearance  system  for  recruitment 


PAGE  66 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1952 


of  labor  was  changed  in  many  ways.  The  require- 
ment that  an  employer  subscribe  to  the  Ten  Points 
precedent  to  clearance  of  an  employer  order  was 
made  effective.  This  requirement  greatly  improved 
recruitment  in  that  housing  and  transportation  were 
guaranteed  upon  being  hired. 

In  July,  1943,  an  agreement  was  made  between  the 
War  Manpower  Commission  and  the  Civil  Service 
Commission  which  coordinated  recruitment  activities 
of  the  two  agencies.  This  agreement  resulted  in  a 
better  understanding  of  labor  needs  and  greatly  im- 
proved recruitment  results. 

Due  to  the  fast  changing  labor  market  conditions 
during  1943,  local  Employment  Service  offices  needed 
to  be  currently  informed  of  job  openings  in  the  entire 
State.  As  a  consequence,  a  system  was  developed 
whereby  these  job  opportunities  could  be  brought 
together  and  utilized  by  all  local  offices  without  delay. 
This  system  was  known  as  N.C.  C-10,  Weekly  List  of 
Job  Openings.  The  issuance  of  the  C-10  started  on 
November  13,  1943,  in  a  few  selected  offices  and  bv 
January,  1944,  it  was  operating  on  a  daily  basis  in 
all  offices  in  the  State. 

Intensified  recruitment  in  all  local  offices  to  fill 
orders  for  war  construction  projects  and  war  pro- 
duction plants  required  practically  full  time  person- 
nel. Through  the  use  of  Manpower  Recruiting  offi- 
cers and  employer-paid  advertisements,  sufficient 
labor  was  recruited  to  meet  the  demand  for  war 
workers.  During  the  period  from  January,  1944,  to 
August,  1945,  a  total  of  13,463  intra-state  placements 
were  made  through  the  use  of  State-wide  clearance 
of  employer  orders. 

The  Tennessee  Valley  Authority  project,  located 
at  Fontana  Dam,  was  accepted  by  North  Carolina  for 
staffing  purposes  from  Region  VII.  States  in  Region 
VII  were  experiencing  difficulty  in  meeting  labor 
demands  for  this  important  project.  A  branch  office 
was  established  at  the  job  site  and  through  the  use 
of  Manpower  Recruiting  officers  and  State-wide  re- 
cruitment, this  project  was  fully  staffed  and  com- 
pleted on  due  date. 

In  addition  to  meeting  demands  within  the  State, 
other  states  in  Region  IV  (Virginia,  Maryland,  West 
Virginia  and  District  of  Columbia)  were  given  as- 
sistance in  supplying  their  labor  demand.  From 
January  1,  1944,  through  August,  1945,  a  total  of 
13,802  workers  from  North  Carolina  were  placed  in 
the  above  states  on  war  jobs  having  high  manpower 
priority  ratings.  Some  of  these  plants  included 
Glenn  L.  Martin,  Maryland  Shipyards,  Norfolk  Navy 


Yard,  Naval  Operating  Base,  Langley  Field,  New- 
port News  Port  of  Embarkation,  Radford  Ordnance 
Works,  Newport  News  Shipbuilding  and  Dry  Dock 
Company  and  various  governmental  agencies. 

During  this  same  period,  6,296  workers  were  plac- 
ed in  industries  essential  to  the  war  effort  outside 
Region  IV.  These  included  Kaiser  Company,  Ten- 
nessee Eastman  Corporation,  Carnegie-Illinois,  H.  J. 
Heinz,  E.  I.  du  Pont,  Bell  Aircraft  Corporation,  West 
Coast  Ship  Repair  Yards,  California  Shipbuilding, 
Seiberling  Tire  and  Rubber  Company,  Ohio  and 
Michigan  Light  Alloys  and  many  others. 

Company  hiring  representatives  for  all  out-of- 
state  employers  were  stationed  in  local  offices 
throughout  the  State.  Workers  were  hired  before 
leaving  North  Carolina.  Transportation  was  paid 
by  employer  to  the  job  site  and  housing  was  avail- 
able for  workers.  Itineraries  were  arranged  by  the 
Clearance  Section  for  the  company  representatives 
who  conducted  pooled  interviews  in  practically  all 
offices  in  the  State.  A  summary  sheet  was  issued 
weekly  to  all  offices  indicating  itineraries  of  the  rep- 
resentatives. 

With  the  advent  of  V-J  Day  and  the  cancellation 
of  many  war  contracts,  out-of-state  recruitment  au- 
tomatically came  to  an  end. 

In  order  to  assist  skilled  and  professional  veterans 
and  war  workers  in  obtaining  peacetime  employment 
in  North  Carolina,  a  system  of  applicant  clearance 
was  developed  in  December,  1944,  and  was  known  as 
the  N.C.  C-15,  Weekly  List  of  Job  Applicants  in 
Selected  Occupations.  The  C-15  procedure  was  re- 
placed approximately  three  years  ago  by  the  use  of 
individual  Available  Applicant  forms  which  are  cur- 
rently being  used.  The  former  C-10,  used  by  this 
State,  was  replaced  by  the  State  Inventory  of  Job 
Openings  now  issued  bi-weekly  by  all  states. 

Recruitment  of  workers  between  local  offices  and 
adjoining  states  immediately  took  on  new  life  at  the 
beginning  of  the  Korean  conflict  and  today  out-of- 
state  employers  are  recruiting  workers  for  essential 
employment  in  eight  or  ten  different  states.  The 
out-of-state  recruitment  of  workers  is  for  employ- 
ment in  airplane  manufacturing  plants,  munitions 
and  ordnance  plants  and  ship  yards.  Approximately 
2300  qualified  applicants  have  been  recruited  for 
out-of-state  employment  in  the  past  eight  months. 

It  is  always  the  purpose  of  the  Clearance  Section, 
whether  in  war  or  peacetime,  to  promote  the  clear 
ance  of  surplus  applicants  into  areas  where  suitable 
job-openings  exist. 


Job  Study  Made  of  Processes  in  Furniture  Manufacturin: 

By  Blanche  Lancaster,  Chief  Occupational  Analyst,  ES  Division,  ESC 


The  Employment  Service  prepared  in  1947  a  Sta'^- 
wide  industry  study  of  furniture  manufacturing  in 
North  Carolina.  This  study  covered  276  different 
job  classifications  in  the  making  of  wooden  household 
and  office  furniture.  This  information  was  needed 
by  local  Employment  Service  offices  in  order  to  mako 
better  selection  of  applicants  for  referrals  to  job 
openings  in  one  of  the  largest  industries  of  the  State. 

In  preparation  of  the  study  the  occupational  anal- 
ysts visited  24  furniture  factories  and  three  trade 
associations  in  the  leading  furniture  manufacturing 
centers.    A  pilot  study  was  made  in  one  large  furni- 


ture plant  employing  around  600  workers.  Jobs 
were  observed  and  workers  and  plant  officials  inter- 
viewed in  gathering  first-hand  information  as  to 
what  the  worker  actually  did  on  the  job,  the  skills 
and  knowledges  necessary  for  job  performance,  and 
the  training  time  necessary  to  learn  the  job.  This 
information  was  then  checked  in  other  furniture  fac- 
tories in  16  different  localities  in  the  State  and  41 
photographs  taken  showing  the  worker  at  his  ma- 
chine or  job  station. 

The  contents  of  this  publication  covered  the  geo- 
graphical and  historical  background  of  the  industry 


/VlNTER-SPRING,    1952 


THE  E.   S.  C.   QUARTERLY 


PAGE  67 


n  the  State;  process  descriptions  by  departments, 
aking  the  rough  lumber  as  it  is  received  on  the  yard 
hrough  the  seasoning,  cutting,  shaping,  assembling, 
inishing,  upholstering,  packing,  and  shipping;  brief 
summaries  of  the  276  jobs;  a  typical  staffing  sched- 
de,  showing  the  distribution  of  jobs  by  departments 
md  by  levels  of  skill,  number  of  workers  on  each  job, 
raining  time,  and  suitability  of  jobs  for    women. 

Analysis  of  these  staffing  patterns  showed  that  the 
argest  segment  of  the  workers  in  the  furniture  in- 
lustry  (58%)  were  in  the  semi-skilled  group,  engag- 
ed in  mass  production  under  the  supervision  of  a 
smaller  group  of  highly  skilled  craftsmen. 

The  proper  selection  of  trainees  for  this  largest 
rroup  of  workers  had  been  a  problem  both  for  the 
employer  and  the  Employment  Service.  The  infor- 
nation  contained  in  this  furniture  industry  study 
vas  used  as  the  first  step  in  developing  aptitude 
;ests  to  aid  in  the  selection  of  such  trainees.  Approx- 
imately 150  experienced  workers  were  given  a  gen- 


eral aptitude  test  battery  and  preliminary  tests  were 
developed  for  Assemblers,  Upholsterers,  and  Saw 
Operators.  These  tests  are  now  being  used  in  a 
number  of  Employment  Service  offices. 

The  initial  distribution  of  this  publication  "Fur- 
niture Manufacturing  in  North  Carolina"  was  to  300 
or  more  furniture  factories  in  the  State  through  the 
local  Employment  Service  offices  to  firms  in  their 
areas,  to  the  public  libraries,  schools  and  colleges  of 
the  State. 

In  addition  to  this  initial  distribution,  around 
1000  request  copies  have  been  distributed  within  and 
outside  the  State.  These  copies  have  been  supplied 
to  33  of  the  48  State  Employment  Services,  15  libra- 
ries and  20  furniture  companies  outside  the  State, 
and  to  three  foreign  companies. 

North  Carolina  State  College  has  since  used  this 
publication  as  one  of  the  texts  in  its  course  in  Furni- 
ture Manufacturing  and  Management. 


Tobacco  Issue  Sparks  Move  for  Huge  Tobacco  Celebration 


The  "Tobacco  Issue"  of  "The  E.S.C.  Quarterly", 
Dublished  last  fall,  set  the  spark  which  has  caught 
ip  and  may  result  in  a  nation-wide  celebration  pay- 
ng  tribute  to  that  commodity  in  which  North  Caro- 
ina  stands  first  in  production,  processing,  warehous- 
ng  and  marketing — Tobacco. 

When  Dr.  I.  O.  Schaub,  former  dean,  now  retired, 
3ut  still  consultant  of  the  School  of  Agriculture  of 
Cf.  C.  State  College,  read  in  that  issue  that  the  acci- 
dent which  led  to  the  bright  leaf  process  of  curing 
;obacco  occurred  around  1856,  it  slapped  him  in  the 
face — the  thought  that  a  Centennial  Celebration 
should  be  held.  He  called  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  editor, 
and  was  given  additional  references.  He  read  more, 
then  contacted  others.  Dr.  Schaub,  W.  P.  Hedrick, 
tobacco  marketing  specialist,  N.  C.  Department  of 
Agriculture,  and  others,  presented  their  thoughts  to 
Governor  W.  Kerr  Scott. 

While  Governor  Scott  was  Commissioner  of  Agri- 
culture, he  had  proposed  and  promoted  what  became 
The  North  Carolina  Tobacco  Advisory  Council,  com- 
posed of  representatives  of  all  groups  interested  in 
tobacco,  from  seed  to  smokes.  In  1945,  Governor 
Cherry  set  it  up.  Governor  Scott  referred  the  matter 
to  this  Council  at  a  December  meeting. 

This  group  held  a  called  meeting  at  the  Sir  Walter 
Hotel,  Raleigh,  at  6:30  on  January  11.    Ralph  W. 
Oummings,  State  College,  ex-officio  chairman,  pre- 
sided.   Carl  T.  Hicks,  president,  the  Flue-Cured  To- 
Dacco  Cooperative  Stabilization  Corporation,  is  vice- 
chairman,  and  W.  P.  Hedrick,  executive  secretary. 
Additional  members  present  were  E.  Y.  Floyd,  Dr. 
F.  H.  Hilton,  L.  Y.  Ballentine,  Fred  S.  Royster,  J.  Con 
Lanier  and  L.  T.  Weeks ;  and  advisory :  Charles  Park- 
er, M.  R.  Dunnagan,  D.  S.  Weaver,  John  Fox,  Will 
dodgers,  I.  O.  Schaub,  Frank  Jeter,  F.  M.  Parkinson, 
r.  S.  Dorton,  W.  E.  Colwell  and  Robert  W.  Shoffner. 
John  Fox,  as  committee  chairman,  outlined  a  sug- 
gested plan  for  holding  a  more  extensive  celebration 
>r  exposition  in  Raleigh.  After  discussion,  it  was  de- 
cided to  name  a  committee  to  contact  all  tobacco  in- 
erests  and  allied  industries  in  the  State  and  arrange 
or  a  later  meeting  of  all  such  interests  to  consider 
urther  a  celebration  or  exposition.    Dr.  Schaub  ap- 
)roved  the  expansion  of  his  original  plan. 


Named  by  Dr.  Cummings  to  this  committee  were : 
J.  Con  Lanier,  chairman;  Fred  S.  Royster,  E.  Y. 
Floyd,  L.  T.  Weeks,  L.  Y.  Ballentine,  W.  P.  Hedrick, 
Arch  B.  Taylor  and  I.  O.  Schaub. 

These  letters  to  M.  R.  Dunnagan  are  apropos : 

From  I.  O.  Schaub,  former  dean,  now  consultant, 
School  of  Agriculture,  N.  C.  State  College : 

"I  wish  to  express  my  appreciation  and  to  commend 
you  for  the  Tobacco  Issue  of  'The  E.S.C.  Quarterly'. 
I  read  this  with  a  great  deal  of  interest  for  it  brought 
together  much  information  regarding  the  tobacco  in- 
dustry that  had  not  come  to  my  attention. 

"In  the  section  regarding  bright  leaf  tobacco  pro- 
duction you  mentioned  the  fact  that  the  process  was 
really  developed  about  1856.  The  thought  occurred 
to  me  that  within  two  or  three  years  we  should  cele- 
brate in  some  form  the  centennial  of  that  important 
development.  Accordingly,  I  wrote  to  Governor  Scott 
calling  his  attention  to  that  event  with  a  suggestion 
that  there  might  be  some  form  of  celebration.  The 
Governor  in  turn  referred  it  to  several  other  people 
and  I  am  glad  to  advise  that  a  number  of  people  are 
giving  the  matter  consideration  and  in  all  likelihood 
there  will  be  some  special  form  of  recognition  of 
this  centennial. 

"You  brought  out  many  other  facts  of  real  interest 
to  anyone  interested  in  tobacco  and  I  just  wanted  to 
express  my  appreciation.  I  hope  that  you  will  in  the 
future  give  us  similar  issues  of  your  publication  deal- 
ing with  other  commodities". 

From  W.  P.  Hedrick,  tobacco  marketing  specialist, 
N.  C.  Department  of  Agriculture,  and  executive  sec- 
retary, North  Carolina  Tobacco  Advisory  Council: 

"I  wish  to  take  this  opportunity  of  complimenting 
you  on  a  real  contribution  to  the  tobacco  industry  of 
North  Carolina.  The  Summer-Fall  issue  of  'The  E.S. 
C.  Quarterly',  1951,  devoted  to  tobacco,  contains  more 
enlightening  information  on  the  development,  growth 
and  importance  of  the  industry  to  the  State  than  any 
similar  publication  ever  assembled. 

"The  various  articles  contained  in  the  issue  clearly 
point  to  why  the  economic  stability  of  our  State  is  so 
dependent  upon  the  availability  of  skilled  labor  to 
maintain  our  place  as  first  in  tobacco  production, 
processing,  warehousing  and  marketing". 


ca  ?  i  d  '(i)  (d)  free  -08s) 

SS3U9N0D    dO    10V    HBCINin    UOd 

aainnoDDV  asvisod  sbivis  aaiiNn 
niVW  All>inD3S  ±N3WA01dW3 


•0  'N  'Hoiaiva 

AHvnan  aixvxs 

KCIHCnCHa    al  3IHHV0  Hit 


Ol 


ss3Nisng  lvnudo 


'D   N  'HOiaivy  '68S  xoa 
NOISSIWWOD    S  '3 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 


VOLUME  10,  NO.  3-4 


SUMMER-FALL,  1952 


Vorth  Carolina  Leads  All  States  In  Textile  Production; 
Due  to  Huge  Recent  Increase  in  Finer  Yarns  and  Fabrics 


hvo  North  Carolina  Firsts — Early  Schenck  &  Warlick  Mill,  Lincoln  County  (above)  and  Battle  Mill,  now 
Rocky  Mount  Mills,  longest  continuous  operation  at  one  site  and  in  one  family  (see  pages  73  and  92) 


PUBLISHED  BY 


Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALLlGH.  N.  C.  BKffir  DIVERSITY"  LIBRARY 


PAGE  70 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195: 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 

(Formerly  The  U.C.C.  Quarterly) 

Volume  10,  Numbers  3-4  Summer-Fall,  1952 

Issued  four  times  a  year  at  Raleigh,  N.  C,  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 

NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  W.  Benton  Pipkin, 
Reidsville;   C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;   Bruce  E.  Davis,  Charlotte. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Col.  A.  L.  Fletcher,  Raleigh,  chair- 
man; Mrs.  Gaston  A.  Johnson,  High  Point;  W.  B.  Horton, 
Yancey ville;  C.  P.  Clark,  Wilson;  Dr.  Alphonso  Elder,  Dur- 
ham; Corbett  Scott,  Asheboro;  T ..  T ,.  |  P^y,  Raleigh ;  Joel  B. 
Leighton,  Rockingham;  J.  A.  §£«|SfjW!  IMf  ilf^^rW 

HENRY    E.    KENDALL       .     f^lmimm    "     '     ^V^tan 
BROOKS   PRICE     .     .     .     .    f.     .     .m^^Jmpm^^i^fiissW^er 

R.   FULLER  MARTIN      .     .  V     .    V%Q.     .1 .    f  QM9irect\r 
Unemployment  Comj^^ation  Dimsion&iJm;         m 

ERNEST  C.  McCRACKEN     .      ^^fr*  QHlfM|  g     &&&or 
North  Carolina  State  EmployineWf^^^S^l^i^^r 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Public  Information  Officer 

Cover  illustrations  represent  typical  North  Carolina 
industries  or  business  activities  under  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Program. 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  589,  Raleigh.  N.  C. 

CONTENTS  ~~p~a~ge 

Textiles   in   North    Carolina 70 

A  Few  Yarns,  Fabrics,  with  End  Products,  Made  in  State 71 

Textiles  Employ  Over  One-Third  of  N.  C.  Covered  Workers 72 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper 
N.  C.  Increases  Lead  as  Nation's  Premiere  Textile  State 73 

By  Henry  Lesesne 
Textile   Industry   Aids   State's   Sociological  Development 76 

By  Mrs.  Mildred  Barnwell  Andrews 
N.   C.   State  School  of  Textiles  Largest  in  the  Nation 80 

By  Dr.  Malcolm  E.  Campbell 
N.   C.   Vocational  Textile   School  in  Center  of  Industry 82 

By  J.  Warren  Smith 
Gaston   Technical   Institute   to    Help    in    Textile    Training 83 

By  Dr.  J.  H.   Lampe 

N.    C.    Cotton    (Textile)    Mfgrs.    Association   Active    46    Years 84 

Textile  Mills,  Alphabetical  by  Towns,  Operating  in  State 83 

A  Few  of  the  Pioneer  Textile  Manufacturers  of  N.   C 86 

Erwin  Mills  Group  in  Picture   48  Years   Old ;   Three  Dukes 89 

Huge  Post-War  Growth  of  N.   C.  Textiles  ;  Many  New  Plants 90 

By  Paul  Kelly 

Rocky  Mount  Oldest   Continuing   Mill,   One  Family,   One   Site 92 

Cannon  Mills,  Kannapolis,  World's  Largest  Towel  Producer 93 

Burlington   Mills   Is   Largest   Synthetic   Textile   Producer 95 

Cone  Mills   Operates   World's   Largest   Flannel,   Denim   Plants 99 

Erwin   Mills   One   of   State's   Foremost   Textile   Manufacturers 103 

Bobbins    Mills,    Producing    Synthetic    Fabrics,    Expanding 105 

Textiles-Incorporated     Nation's     Top     Combed     Yarn     Producer 108 

Johnston  Mills  Effectively  Operates  Yarn  and  Cloth  Plants Ill 

Roanoke,  Rosemary,  Patterson  Mills  Large  Fabric  Producers 112 

American  &  Efird  Mills  Big  Combed-Carded  Yarn  Producer 114 

.1.  P.  Stevens  Large -Diversified  Manufacturer  of  Fine  Fabrics 116 

N.  C.  Finishing  One  of  World's  Largest  Commission  Finishers 118 

Firestone  One  of  World's  Largest  Unit  Textile  Plants 119 

Erlanger  Produces  Fine  Dress,  Suit  Fabrics  from  New  Fibers... 120 

Chatham,  World's  Largest  Unit  Woolen  Mill,  Blanket  Leader 121 

Leaksville   Oldest   Continuous   Woolen  Mill   in   Entire   South 123 

Fieldcrest  Mills  Produce  Quality  Rugs,  Blankets,  Spreads 125 

Collins  &  Aikman  Large  Weaver  Upholstery,  Worsted  Wear 128 

Hatch  Mill,   Modern,   and   Excelsior   Make   Woolen   Blends 129 

Beacon  Manufacturing  Co.  Makes  Cotton-Rayon  Blended  Blankets 130 

American  Enka  One  of  Largest  Rayon  Unit  Plants  in  Earth 131 

Valhalla  Hand  Weavers  Making  High  Quality  Woolen  Fabrics..^, 133 

Blue  Bell  World's  Largest  Work  Clothing  Producer L 134 

Biltmore  Industries  World's  Largest-Finest  in  Homespun r."!i.     137 

N.  C.  Textile  Firsts,  and  Notes;  Association  Officers 1"39 

Note  :  Articles  not  credited  with  By-Line  written  by  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  Editor, 

some  in  cooperation  with  representatives  of  firms  involved. 


TEXTILES  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA 

North  Carolina  has  forged  ahead  of  all  other  state; 
in  the  nation  in  the  manufacture  of  textiles.  Durinj 
the  first  quarter  of  this  century  the  emphasis  was  oi 
building  new  spinning  and  weaving  mills  and  in 
stalling  more  spindles  and  looms.  In  the  second 
quarter  of  the  present  century  spindles  and  loom:! 
have  actually  decreased  in  number.  The  emphasi 
has  been  on  installing  finer  types  of  machinery  anq 
expanding  operations  in  developing  finer  yarns  and 
fabrics  and  in  dyeing  and  finishing  the  fabrics  pro 
duced,  instead  of  shipping  goods  to  other  areas  foj 
the  higher  skilled  processing. 

Important  in  the  movement  for  producing  and  fin 
ishing  higher  quality  textiles  is  the  rapid  expansioij 
in  the  manufacture  of  hosiery.  The  original  plai 
for  this  issue  was  to  include  hosiery  along  with  tex 
tiles.  Due,  however,  to  the  important  developmen 
of  the  hosiery  manufacturing  industry  in  Nortl 
Carolina,  it  was  decided  that  textiles,  in  the  limite* 
sense,  is  so  important  that  it  furnishes  plenty  o 
material  for  an  issue.  And,  it  was  realized,  hosier- 
merits  an  issue  devoted  to  that  industry  alone.  Thai 
is  the  plan  for  the  next  issue. 

Textiles  have  moved  a  long  way  since  the  days  o 
the  Schenck  &  Warlick  Cotton  Mill  in  Lincoln  Count; 
and  the  Battle  Mill  at  Rocky  Mount.  They  were  fore 
runners  of  the  cotton  and  woolen  mills  at  Spray,  th 
cotton  and  then  the  woolen  mill  at  Elkin,  the  mills  a 
Salem  and  Roanoke  Rapids  and  in  Gaston  Count} 
all  along  streams  for  water  power.  Development  o 
steam  power  allowed  mills  to  move  to  higher  grounc 
Now  electricity  is  the  motive  power.  The  next  ste 
may  be  to  atom  power. 

North  Carolina  developed  her  textile  industr 
gradually,  but  with  increasing  momentum  in  thi 
century.  Profits  from  the  cheaper  fabrics  of  th 
early  days  were  ploughed  right  back  into  the  indus 
try,  for  newer  and  better  equipment.  Now  this  Stat 
contains  some  of  the  most  modern  plants  and  mos 
up-to-date  machinery  in  the  nation  and  the  work 
Today  North  Carolina  has  more  superlatives — til 
most  of  this  or  the  greatest  of  that — than  any  othejj 
state.  Textile  mills  provide  more  employment  tha :' 
all  other  activities  in  the  State  combined — thosl 
activities  subject  to  the  Employment  Security  Law.l 

The  days  of  long  working  hours  and  poor  pay  havl 
long  since  passed.    Employees  of  textile  mills  in  thij 
State  are  well  paid  for  their  labors,  work  in  pleasar 
plants  and  live  in  comfortable  homes.     Employei 
realize  the  value  and  importance  of  these  condition 
to  the  well-being  of  their  employees  and  to  the  su< 
cess  of  their  enterprises.     Safe  working  condition: 
pleasant  surroundings,  provisions  for  hospitalizatio 
and   retirement,   paid   vacations,   cafeteria   servic 
recreational  facilities  for  workers  and  their  familk 
and  other  benefits  are  the  rule  today. 

Historical,  statistical  and  sociological  (see  pag 
76)  articles  appear  in  this  issue.  Leaders  in  varioi 
textile  activities  contribute  valuable  articles.  A  li: 
of  the  textile  plants  (exclusive  of  hosiery)  is  ca: 
ried.  Articles  are  carried  on  about  25  of  the  largt 
plants.  These  started  small,  all  of  them,  and  ha^ 
reached  their  importance  today  by  application 
brain  and  brawn,  usually  with  little  capital.  Mar 
others  should  be  included  in  these  pages — it  is  a  ma 
ter  of  regret  that  all  could  not  be  given  detailed  a 
tention. 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  71 


4  Few  Yarns,  Fabrics,  with  End  Products, 

\  Manufactured  in  State's  Textile  Plants 


Efforts  were  made  to  get  pictures  of  many  of  the 
irns,  fabrics  and  end  products  produced  in  North 
arolina  textile  plants.  Many  of  the  mills  respond- 
l  and  these  items  are  shown  in  the  picture  on  this 
ige.  Items  in  the  picture  were  produced  (with 
veral  end  products)  by  North  Carolina  mills  as 
)llows:     Erwin    Mills,    Inc.,    Durham;    American 


Photo  by  Robert  M.  du   Bruyne 

Enka  Corp.,  Enka;  Fieldcrest  Mills,  Leaksville- 
Spray-Draper ;  Cone  Mills,  Inc.,  Greensboro;  Fire- 
stone Textiles,  Gastonia;  Threads-Incorporated, 
Gastonia;  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Greensboro;  Collins 
&  Aikman  Corp.,  Ca-Vel  (Roxboro)  ;  Robbins  Mills, 
Inc.,  Aberdeen. 


PAGE  72 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195: 


Textiles  Employ  Over  One-Third  of  N.  C.  Covered  Workers 

HUGH  M.  Raper.  Director,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


The  economic  well-being  of  the  textile  industry 
in  North  Carolina  is  of  vital  concern  to  those  ad- 
ministering the  Employment  Security  Program  in 
the  State.  This  is  true  because  the  covered  employ- 
ment for  the  textile  group  constitutes  more  than 
one-third  of  all  employment  covered  under  the  pro- 
gram, and  it  accounts  for  more  than  55  percent  of 
all  manufacturing  employment  covered  by  the  pro- 
gram. Textile  employment  in  the  State  is  a  weighty 
indicator  used  for  measuring  the  trends  in  the  econ- 
omy of  North  Carolina. 

These  data  relate  to  the  major  industrial  group 
specifically  defined  as  the  Textile  Mill  Products  and 
includes  establishments  engaged  in  performing  any 
of  the  following  operations  without  regard  to  type 
of  fiber  used:  (1)  Manufacture  of  yarn,  thread, 
cordage,  twine;  (2)  manufacture  of  woven  fabric, 
carpet  and  rugs,  laces,  knit  garments  (including 
hosiery) ,  knit  fabrics  and  other  products  from  yarn ; 
(3)  dyeing  and  finishing  fibers,  yarns  and  fabrics; 
and,  (4)  coating,  waterproofing  and  otherwise  treat- 
ing fabric.  It  excludes  jobbers  and  converters  who 
do  no  manufacturing  and  also  excludes  plants  engag- 
ed in  rubberizing  fabrics. 

The  employment  and  wages  for  the  various  com- 
ponent segments  of  the  textile  group  are  shown  be- 
low. It  should  be  noted  that  some  establishments, 
such  as  rug  makers,  perform  all  operations  such  as 
scouring,  combing,  yarn  making,  etc.  and  in  such 
instances  the  one  assigned  code  for  such  firm  usually 
is  that  process  employing  the  greatest  number  of 
people  rather  than  the  end  product. 

No.  of  Av.  Monthly  Total  Wages 

Industry                          Type  Reporting  Employment  in  1951 

Code                         Production  Units  in  1951 

221  Scouring  and  Combing  5  85  $        178,425 

222  Yarn  and  Thread  Mills  791  60,525  148,945,050 

223  Broad-woven  Fabric  Mills  663  105,175  283,218,700 

224  Narrow  Fabrics  76  1.305  3.375,300 

225  Knitting  Mills  (Incl.  Hosiery)  1.814  57,060  137.059,100 

226  Dyeing  and  Finishing  102  5,905  16.706,600 

227  Carpets,  Rugs,  Lieoleum,  etc.  36  315  527,350 
229  Misc.  Textile  Goods  117  2,205  5,510,625 


In  1951  there  was  some  textile  employment  in  71 
of  the  100  counties.  In  nine  counties  the  textile  in 
dustry  had  less  than  100  covered  workers. 

The  county  distribution  according  to  average  num 
ber  of  workers  in  employment  in  the  year  1951  fol 
lows : 


No.  of  Cowitie 
4 


No.  of  Workers 

More  than  10,000 

5,000  to  9,999 12 

2,500  to  4,999 9 

1,000  to  2,499 19 

500  to      999 ...  7 

100  to      499 12 

1  to        99 9 

Wage  and  employment  data  for  the  22  countie 
having  2,500  or  more  workers  are  shown  below : 


State  Total 
And  County 

Gaston 

Cabarrus 

Guilford 

Alamance 

Catawba 

Forsyth 

Randolph 

Cleveland 

Rowan 

Rockingham 

Rutherford 

Surry 

Davidson 

Iredell 

Stanly 

Richmond.. 

Burke 

Halifax 

Buncombe 

Durham 

McDowell 

Lincoln 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 


No.  of 

Average 

Total 

Reporting 

Monthly 

Payrolls 

Firms 

Employment 

in  1951 

83 

27,677 

$69,641,300 

22 

22,804 

57,440.598 

59 

19,939 

57.801,576 

77 

13,641 

36,784,705 

97 

9,540 

21,467,963 

20 

7,779 

19,580,824 

46 

7,608 

20,776,299 

30 

6,843 

16,602,298 

16 

6,514 

15,653,947 

11 

6.321 

16,768.451 

14 

6,246 

16,498,437 

50 

5,723 

14,984,032 

32 

5,551 

12,935,343 

17 

5,514 

14,756,426 

11 

5,299 

12,359,4861 

10 

4,297 

11,704,8581 

31 

4,270 

10,416,761 

4 

3,864 

9,499,07C| 

20 

3,771 

9,993,184 

11 

3,574 

10,828,57* 

19 

3,033 

7,877,302 

17 

3.011 

6,785,568 

3,6( 

County  Distributio 


All  of  the  28  counties  reporting  no  covered  texti 
employment  in  1951  are  found  in  either  the  coast; 
or  the  mountain  area.  All  Piedmont  counties  ha^ 
some  textile  production. 

In  terms  of  employment  North  Carolina  leads  tl 


t--"V' 


)UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  73 


Nation  in  the  manufacture  of  textile  mill  products. 
)ata  for  the  first  quarter  of  1951  for  the  Nation  and 
elected  states  having  50,000  or  more  engaged  in 
extile  employment  follows : 

%  of  Nation's 
Employment*  Employment  Gross  Wages 

STATE  in  March  1951  in  Textiles  First  Quarter 

nitedStates 1,317,960           $978,850,000 

orth  Carolina 243,610  18.5  159,246,000 

ennsylvania 152,268  11.6  114,007,000 

auth  Carolina 140,385  10.7  98,148,000 

eorgia 115,042  8.7  75,347,000 

[assachusetts.. 110,983  8.4  93.382,000 

ewYork 92,580  7.0  77,917,000 

hode  Island ,  57,478  4.4  47,099,000 

ewJersey 57,317  4.3  57,062,000 

labama 56,032  4.3  38,192,000 

*Data  from  Department  of  Labor  release  "Employment  and  Wages,"  November  1951 


Since  textile  employment  makes  up  more  than  a 
third  of  the  covered  employment,  when  conditions 
are  not  good  in  textiles  unemployment  costs  reflect 
this  situation.  The  table  which  follows  shows  some- 
thing of  the  cost  influences  produced  in  recent  years. 


Rate  Computation 
for  Calendar  Year 


1950 
1951 

1952 


Benefit  Charges  as  percent  of  Taxable  Payrolls 


All  Industries 


Textile  Industry 


1.54 
1.48 
0.73 


1.71 
2.08 
0.97 


The  influence  of  the  1949  recession  which  hit  tex- 
tiles hard  is  reflected  in  the  cost  pattern  of  recent 
years  and  accounts  for  the  concern  of  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Program  in  the  part  textiles  play  in 
the  State's  economy. 


N.  C.  Increases  Lead  as  Nation's  Premiere  Textile  State 

By  Henry  Lesesne,  Roving  Editor,  Textile  Information  Service 


As  textiles  go,  so  goes  North  Carolina.  There  is 
10  other  state  in  the  nation  to  which  textiles  are  so 
mportant  to  the  economy  than  North  Carolina.  Two 
>ut  of  every  three  industrial  employees  in  the  state 
s  a  textile  operative.  The  Tar  Heel  state  is  the  larg- 
st  textile  manufacturing  state  in  America,  and  tex- 
iles  constitute  by  far  its  biggest  industry.  This  de- 
pite  the  fact  that  North  Carolina,  the  leading  manu- 
acturing  state  in  the  Southeast,  has  large  tobacco 
,nd  furniture  manufacturing  industries.  North 
Carolina's  principal  city,  Charlotte,  is  regarded  as 
he  "capital"  of  the  textile  industry. 

The  American  Cotton  Manufacturers  Institute, 
nc,  which  represents  over  85  percent  of  the  spindle- 
ige  of  the  American  industry,  both  Southern  and 
^ew  England,  has  its  main  offices  in  Charlotte.  In 
act,  there  is  such  a  great  concentration  of  the  in- 
lustry  in  and  around  Charlotte  and  Gastonia  that 
mly  two  other  areas  in  the  world  can  even  compare 
vith  it  on  a  textile  poundage  basis — Lancashire, 
England  and  Osaka,  Japan.  Within  a  50-mile  radius 
if  Charlotte  there  are  more  spindles — the  industry's 
neasure  of  productive  capacity — than  there  are  in 


1 


n  old  steam  engine  used  in  cotton  mill  at  Spray  around  J 905. 


all  the  New  England  states  put  together.  North 
Carolina  leads  the  country  in  number  of  spindles  in 
place  with  6.1  million,  and  its  sister  state,  South 
Carolina,  is  second  with  5.9  million. 

N.  C.  AND  TEXTILES  GROW  UP 
It  has  been  remarked  that  North  Carolina,  which 
is  generally  regarded  as  the  South's  most  progres- 
sive state,  and  textiles  have  sort  of  grown  up  to- 
gether. Textiles  were  North  Carolina's  first  manu- 
facturing industry.  Textiles  played  the  pioneer  role 
in  transforming  the  state's  purely  agricultural  econ- 
omy into  one  of  balanced  agriculture  and  industry. 
It  is  interesting  to  note  that  in  1900  the  value  of  the 
state's  farm  crops  just  about  balanced  the  value  of 
its  manufactured  products.  The  value  of  its  manu- 
factured products  today  is  over  seven  times  greater 
than  the  value  of  its  agricultural  commodities. 

Perhaps  there  is  no  industry  in  America  which 
better  exemplifies  the  American  philosophy  of  free 
enterprise  than  textiles.  Of  the  big  industries  it  is 
the  most  competitive.  It  is,  of  course,  Big  Business 
when  measured  by  its  half  million  employees,  its  six 
billion  dollar  annual  output,  its  annual  payroll  of 
well  over  a  billion  dollars.  But  actually  the  industry 
is  a  collection  of  small  businesses.  Its  great  magni- 
tude does  not  imply  giant  corporations,  but  a  number 
of  relatively  small  units,  a  thousand  or  more,  no  one 
of  which  makes  up  more  than  four  percent  of  the 
total.  The  average  unit  accounts  for  only  a  minor 
fraction  of  one  percent  of  the  industry's  business. 

FIRST  COTTON  MILLS  BUILT 
What  was  the  beginning  of  the  industry  in  North 
Carolina?  It  depends  on  what  we  mean  by  "begin- 
ning". As  early  as  1775  the  Safety  Committee  of 
Chowan  county  had  raised  a  fund  of  80  pounds  sterl- 
ing to  encourage  a  British  textile  mechanic  to  come 
here  and  start  a  cotton  manufacturing  business,  but 
the  Revolutionary  War  interfered  with  this  project. 
Then,  in  1789,  the  North  Carolina  Legislature  au- 
thorized Christopher  Taylor  to  raise  by  lottery  $5,000 
a  year  for  seven  years  to  establish  a  factory  that 
would  spin,  weave  and  dye  cotton.  But  the  mill  was 
never  built — perhaps  because  the  North  Carolinians 


PAGE  74 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1 952 


Reproduction  of  original  engraving  (1760)  of  old  velvet  loom,, 

predecessor  of  modern  Jacquard  loom,  developed  by 

Jaseph  Jacquard  in  France. 

of  that  day  did  not  fully  approve  of  the  method  of 
raising  capital. 

Nevertheless,  the  thrifty  people  of  the  state  were 
turning  out  textiles  through  home  industries  and  in 
1810  North  Carolina  families  produced  nearly  $3 
million  worth  of  handicraft  textiles,  even  surpassing 
Massachusetts  by  many  hundreds  of  thousands  of 
dollars.  One  of  the  first — maybe  the  first — success- 
ful cotton  mills  in  the  South  was  built  in  North 
Carolina  in  1813  by  Michael  Schenck  and  Absalom 
Warlick — the  Lincoln  Cotton  Factory,  near  Lincoln- 
ton.  But  it  was  to  be  a  long  time — indeed,  until  well 
after  the  Civil  War — that  North  Carolina  would  as- 
sume a  place  of  real  importance  in  cotton  manufac- 
turing. 

There  were  few  cotton  mills  in  North  Carolina 
even  in  the  so-called  Golden  Age  of  the  South — the 
era  about  which  the  romanticists  still  rhapsodize 
and  probably  always  will.  That  was  the  day  when 
the  new  monarch,  King  Cotton,  was  coming  into  all 
his  glory  with  the  invention  of  the  cotton  gin.  There 
might  have  been  some  hope  even  then  that  the  seeds 
of  a  manufacturing  empire  would  take  root  in  the 
South,  but  the  fact  that  cotton  growing  was  an  easy 
road  to  wealth  inhibited  the  idea  of  large  scale  manu- 
facturing. The  "white  gold"  has  been  grown  exten- 
sively before ;  but  now  the  cost  of  cotton  growing  was 
so  reduced  that  the  market  for  it  expanded  with 
amazing  rapidity.  The  land  and  climate  of  tho  South 
were  suited  to  growing  cotton  and  the  world  was 
clamoring  for  it.  The  slave  population  increased  by 
leaps  and  bounds  and  the  great  plantations  of  the 
South  grew  greater.  What  was  the  need  for  indus- 
trialization? 

BATTLE  MILL  CONTINUES 

The  idea  was  abhorrent  to  the  easy-going  land  of 
cotton.  Skilled  immigrants  from  Europe  were  flock- 
ing to  the  New  World  and  to  freedom  and  oppor- 
tunity. But  they  shunned  the  South.  They  knew 
better  than  to  try  to  compete  with  the  slave  labor  of 
the  South  and  there  was  no  place  in  the  Southern 
economy  for  the  artisan  or  the  man  with  a  mechan- 
ical skill.  Yet  in  every  age  there  are  pioneers  and 
trail-blazers — men  ahead  of  their  time — and  even 


then  there  were  a  few  men  with  great  vision,  stou 
heart,  imagination  and  courage. 

It  was  in  such  a  lush  age  and  in  an  era  and  plac< 
not  altogether  sympathetic  with  manufacturing  enj 
terprise  that  Michael  Schenck,  a  native  of  Lancaste]{ 
county,  Pennsylvania,  who  had  come  to  North  Carol 
lina  about  15  years  earlier,  established  his  factor! 
at  Lincolnton.  At  the  same  time  Joel  Battle,  a  larg<| 
plantation  owner  in  Eastern  North  Carolina  neaj 
Rocky  Mount,  was  dreaming  of  a  cotton  factory.  Hi 
and  his  brother-in-law,  Peter  Evans,  and  Henry  A 
Donaldson,  a  man  who  had  had  some  cotton  mill  ex 
perience  and  whom  they  persuaded  to  come  to  Nort'j 
Carolina  and  enter  a  partnership,  founded  a  cotto:j 
mill  at  the  shoals  of  the  Tar  River  near  Rocky  Mounlj 
That  mill  continues  in  operation  today  under  th 
management  of  the  same  family.  It  is  the  oldes 
mill  in  the  South  still  in  operation,  and  through  a 
those  years  the  Rocky  Mount  Mills  has  stood  out  aj 
one  of  the  most  modern  and  efficient  units  of  th 
cotton  spinning  industry. 

HOLT  DEVELOPS  DYEING 

One  of  the  most  successful  of  the  early  mills  in  th 
state  was  built  soon  after  1830  by  E.  M.  Holt  o 
Alamance  Creek  in  Alamance  County.  Holt  bega 
to  find  it  difficult  to  dispose  of  his  yarn  and  he  bega 
the  manufacture  of  a  coarse  cloth  known  as  "Ah 
mance  plaids"  and  the  product  became  known  fa 
and  wide.  In  fact,  it  was  so  popular  that  even  toda 
in  the  central  part  of  the  state  people  occasionall 
use  the  term  "Alamance"  as  a  synonym  for  coars 
ginghams. 

It  was  due  to  chance  that  Mr.  Holt  solved  h 


Intricate  patterns  are  woven  on  this  modern  Jacquard  loc 
many  of  which  operate  in  North  Carolina  plants. 


Summer-fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  75 


initial  problem  of  how  to  dye  cotton.  He  met  a  trav- 
eling Frenchman,  whose  name  is  unknown,  who  for 
f>100  agreed  to  show  him  how  to  dye  materials.  Their 
irst  operation  was  done  in  an  80-gallon  copper  boiler 
:hat  had  been  used  to  cook  turnips  for  livestock.  The 
*esults  were  so  successful  that  Mr.  Holt  installed 
)etter  equipment,  including  four  box  looms,  thereby 
jecoming  the  first  manufacturer  in  the  South  of  box 
oom  fabrics. 

CONES  COME  TO  CAROLINA 
In  1830  the  textile  industry  came  to  Greensboro 
vhen  Henry  Humphreys  built  the  Mt.  Hecla  mills, 
;he  first  in  the  South  to  employ  steam  power.  For 
VTt.  Hecla  the  machinery  was  shipped  from  Phila- 
lelphia  to  Wilmington,  then  up  the  Cape  Fear  River 
;o  Fayetteville,  and  was  hauled  overland  by  wagon 
;o  Greensboro.  Just  15  years  later  there  was  a  fuel 
shortage  and  Humphreys'  son-in-law  who  had  bought 
;he  mill  moved  the  entire  plant  to  a  water-power  site 
m  the  Catawba  River  in  Gaston  county.  It  was 
nany  years  before  another  mill  came  to  Greensboro, 
which  today  is  one  of  North  Carolina's — and  one  of 
;he  world's — largest  textile  manufacturing  centers. 

But  it  was  a  significant  and  happy  day  for  North 
Carolina  when,  in  1894,  the  two  Cone  brothers,  Moses 
ind  Caesar,  put  all  they  had  and  all  they  could  bor- 
row into  the  building  of  a  new  mill  in  Greensboro, 
rhey  named  it  Proximity  because  of  its  nearness  to 
;he  cotton  fields.  It  was  a  good-sized  plant  for 
^orth  Carolina  then,  for  it  could  boast  250  looms. 
!^ine  years  later  the  Cones  took  another  terrific  gam- 
Die  ;  they  mortgaged  Proximity  and  built  White  Oak, 
md  for  years  the  earnings  were  ploughed  back  into 
improvements,  with  the  stockholders  waiting  many 
fears  to  collect  a  dividend.  It  was  in  these  years, 
just  before  the  turn  of  the  century  and  as  the  South 
was  trying  to  shake  off  the  aftermath  of  the  war, 
;hat  the  industry  experienced  its  first  substantial 
growth  in  North  Carolina. 

Before  the  Civil  War  there  were  few  mills.  In 
1840,  for  instance,  there  were  about  25  mills  operat- 
ing in  the  state  and  the  total  number  of  spindles  was 
mly  17,000.  Many  of  the  pre-Civil  War  mills  were 
ourned  or  destroyed  by  the  Union  Armies.  Those 
which  did  survive  came  out  of  the  war  in  poor  con- 
dition, mechanically  and  financially.  It  was  not  until 
the  1880's  that  North  Carolina  and  the  South  began 
to  rebuild.  Then  cotton  mills  began  springing  up  in 
towns  with  water  sites — towns  where  not  even  the 
leading  citizens  were  even  moderately  wealthy  by  the 
standards  of  the  day.  Often  the  doctor,  the  planter, 
the  merchant  and  some  of  the  operatives  bought  a 
few  shares  of  stock  in  the  community  enterprise, 
paying  for  them  on  the  weekly  installment  plan.  The 


enter  of  recreational  life  in  textile  town  of  Kannapalos  is  this 
YMCA  with  membership  of  10,000.  Its  Williamsburg  Colon- 
ial architecture  extends  into  the  shopping  district. 


Modern  cafeterias  are  supplanting  the  lunch  pail  in  North 
Carolina  textile  mills. 

object  was  to  provide  employment  for  the  people,  to 
throw  off  the  economic  inertia  of  the  war's  after- 
math. Some  of  the  early  mills  failed ;  others  suc- 
ceeded. 

DYNEL  COMING  TO  DRAPER 
An  obscure  little  incident — or  accident — happened 
along  about  this  time  which  was  to  have  great  eco- 
nomic bearing  upon  the  state  some  60  years  later — 
in  1952,  in  fact.  Back  just  before  the  turn  of  the 
century  a  worker  in  Spray — one  of  the  State's  early 
textile  manufacturing  centers — threw  a  piece  of  coke 
into  the  canal  in  the  little  town.  Peculiar  bubbles 
later  were  noticed  in  the  water.  This  chance  incident 
led  a  small  group  of  experimenters  at  Spray  to  dis- 
covering a  process  for  making  calcium  carbide,  the 
first  commercial  source  of  acetylene,  which  was  used 
on  our  first  commercial  automobiles  and  for  numer- 
ous other  lighting  purposes. 

This  incident  was  actually  the  beginning  of  what 
is  known  today  as  the  Union  Carbide  and  Carbon 
Corporation,  one  of  the  ten  largest  manufacturing 
corporations  in  the  country.  But  the  chemical  in- 
dustry passed  up  North  Carolina  until  recently.  In 
the  last  few  years  a  subsidiary  of  Union  Carbide  and 
Carbon  has  developed  one  of  the  new  acrylic  syn- 
thetic fibers  known  as  Dynel  and  which  has  many 
of  the  characteristics  of  wool.  This  "wonder"  fiber 
is  now  made  in  limited  quantities  at  a  plant  in  South 
Charleston,  W.  Va.  Recently  Union  Carbide  began 
looking  about  the  country  for  a  site  to  build  a  plant 
to  make  Dynel. 

After  considering  hundreds  of  sites,  it  chose  one — 
a  site  near  Spray,  a  stone's  throw  from  the  canal 
where  calcium  carbide  was  accidentally  discovered. 
Here  the  chemical  company  is  building  a  $33  million 
plant  to  manufacture  Dynel.  Although  large  in- 
stallations for  synthetic  fiber  manufacturing  have 
or  are  going  up  in  other  Southern  states,  notably 
South  Carolina  and  Alabama,  this  will  make  North 
Carolina  a  big  center  of  the  new  chemical  fiber  in- 
dustry, for  at  Kinston,  in  the  eastern  part  of  the 
state,  the  E.  I.  du  Pont  de  Nemours  &  Company  is 
building  a  giant  plant  costing  well  in  excess  of  $30 
million  to  make  Dacron,  another  synthetic  fiber  now 
made  only  in  pilot  plant  quantities. 

DIVERSITY  IN  DEVELOPMENT 
In  recent  years  there  have  been  two  significant 
trends  in  the  development  of  the  textile  industry  in 


PAGE  76 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195 


North  Carolina.  The  first  mills  had  to  locate  along 
swift  streams  for  their  water-power  and  the  Pied- 
mont was  where  the  cotton  mills  clustered.  But  as 
new  mills  have  sprung  up  in  the  postwar  period  many 
of  them  are  being  situated  throughout  the  state,  in 
the  mountainous  west  and  in  the  hitherto  purely  agri- 
cultural or  predominantly  agricultural  east. 

The  other  trend  is  toward  a  great  diversification 
of  the  textile  industry.  There  was  a  time  when  mills 
in  North  Carolina  made  goods  and  sent  them  else- 
where to  be  finished.  In  modern  times  the  state  has 
come  to  see  many  finishing  plants  within  its  borders. 
And  whereas  the  textile  industry  in  North  Carolina 
once  consisted  almost  altogether  of  cotton,  recent 
years  have  seen  a  great  increase  in  the  mills  turning 
out  the  rayons,  the  newer  synthetics,  and  wool. 

The  postwar  years  have  seen  scores  of  multi-mil- 
lion dollar,  one-story,  air-conditioned  textile  plants 
built.  This  might  lead  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
productive  capacity  or  spindleage  of  the  industry  is 
growing  by  leaps  and  bounds.  But  such  is  not  the 
case.  In  fact,  spindleage  in  the  cotton  textile  indus- 
try has  been  declining  for  the  last  two  decades.  Cot- 
ton mills  wear  out.  Only  a  few  complete  or  inte- 
grated cotton  mills  have  been  built  in  the  South  in 
recent  years,  and  none  in  North  Carolina. 

How  then  to  explain  the  "growth"  of  the  textile 
industry  in  North  Carolina  and  the  South?  Twenty- 
eight  years  ago  the  South  had  17  million  active  spin- 
dles and  New  England  had  the  same  number.  Today 
the  South  still  has  17  million  spindles.  The  all-time 
peak  of  active  Southern  spindles  was  reached  in  1930 
when  18,586,000  spindles  were  active  at  some  time 
during  the  year.  Thereafter  the  number  steadily 
declined  to  the  present  level,  and  in  a  few  years  fell 


below  it.  From  1930  to  1950  the  construction  of  new 
spinning  and  weaving  cotton  mills  was  just  aboul 
non-existent. 

GROWTH  IN  FINISHING— HOSIERY 
The  construction  from  1946  to  1949  was  confinec 
almost  altogether  to  finishing  plants  and  hosierj 
mills.  The  beginning  of  1950  saw  a  resumption  o? 
the  building  of  spinning  and  weaving  mills  but  this 
was  primarily  or  almost  altogether  for  expandini 
operations  in  synthetics.  But  during  the  postwai 
period  the  mills  have  seen  a  revolutionary  trend  to 
ward  the  modernization  of  plant  and  equipment 
Since  World  War  II  the  industry  has  installed  nev 
equipment  as  rapidly  as  it  could  be  delivered.  Bu 
even  so,  the  industry  could  not  be  re-equipped  in  \ 
few  years.  The  process  is  still  going  on.  A  part  o 
this  picture  is  new  machinery  lay-outs  and  air-con 
ditioning.  Research  of  the  engineer  and  the  scientis 
have  brought  greater  efficiency  in  production  an< 
also  improved  quality  and  a  greater  variety  o 
products. 

Today  there  are  over  220,000  persons  employed  ii 
textile  and  knitting  mills  in  North  Carolina.  It  i 
figured  that  to  set  up  a  textile  job  today  requires  ai 
initial  capital  investment  of  $16,150  per  employe 
for  the  necessary  buildings,  machinery,  raw  materia 
and  working  capital.  This  figure  was  reached  in  ai 
analysis  made  by  the  Ralph  E.  Loper  Company  whicj 
specializes  in  textile  cost  service.  This  is  267  perceni 
the  cost  of  setting  up  one  textile  job  in  1936.  Multi 
ply  the  figure  of  $16,150  by  the  number  of  textilt 
employees  in  North  Carolina  and  you  realize  wha[ 
the  industry  means  to  the  state. 


Textile  Industry  Aids  State's  Sociological  Development 

By  Mrs.  Mildred  Barnwell  Andrews 


The  textile  industry  of  North  Carolina,  well  rec- 
ognized as  the  most  important  economic  factor  in 
the  growth  and  development  of  the  state,  has  con- 
tributed vastly  to  its  social  development  as  well.  The 
tourist  passing  through  on  Highway  29,  No.  1,  or 
any  of  the  collateral  systems,  is  over  awed  by  the 
great  textile  mills,  representing  almost  half  of  the 
entire  industry  in  the  United  States,  but  he  is  sel- 
dom fully  aware  of  the  human  factors,  the  tangible 
benefits  which  have  accompanied  the  growth  of  the 
industry,  and  which,  within  the  past  15  years,  have 
brought  an  entirely  new  way  of  life  to  the  more  than 
200,000  textile  mill  employees  and  their  families. 
Best  outward  evidence  of  this  phase  of  development 
are  the  improved  mill  village  communities  and  vari- 

WRITING    TEXTILE    HISTORY 

Mrs.  Mildred  Barnwell  Andrews,  who  gained  much  of  her  textile  experi- 
ence in  North  Carolina  circles,  has  written  about  and  lectured  on  the 
progress  of  the  textile  industry  for  many  years.  From  1935  to  1945,  she 
was  Executive  Secretary  of  the  Southern  Combed  Yarn  Spinners  Associa- 
tion, with  headquarters  in  Gastonia.  In  the  next  six  succeeding  years,  she 
was  affiliated  with  a  New  York  public  relations  program  which  handled  the 
textile  industry's  public  relations  program. 

Mrs.  Andrews  served  her  industry,  and  her  country,  with  distinction 
during  World  War  II  as  special  consultant  on  textiles  in  the  Office  of  the 
Quartermaster-General,  and  on  War  Production  Board's  Industrial  Salvage 
Committee. 

During  her  more  than  twenty  years  of  work  with  the  industry,  Mrs. 
Andrews  has  had  as  her  avocation  collection  of  data  for  a  voluminous 
history  on  textiles,  and  from  her  familiarity  with  North  Carolina  and  its 
chief  industry  has  written  this  article  on  the  industry's  contribution  to  the 
state's  sociological  development.  Her  present  address  is  Old  Chain  Bridge 
Road,  R.  F.  D.  4,  Vienna,  Va. 


ous  programs  sponsored  by  textile  companies  for  th 
benefit  of  the  employees  and  their  families. 

In  the  past  decade,  a  more  accelerated  effort  fo 
better  community  living  has  become  a  planned  bus 
ness  with  almost  every  textile  mill,  and  according  t| 
each  mill's  geographic  location,  and  other  factor:; 
includes  some  of  all  of  these  phases:  better  home,' 
recreation  facilities,  cultural  advancement,  healt 
programs,  educational  advantages.  A  few  years  agj 
the  word  "paternalism"  was  often  heard  in  connei; 
tion  with  the  early  efforts  of  textile  management  f 
offer  better  living  opportunities  to  the  workers.  T<j 
day,  the  public  begins  to  realize  paternalism  is  tl! 
wrong  word.  Mills  invest  money  in  building  betttj 
communities.  People  who  live  in  better  commun| 
ties  make  better  citizens.  Better  citizens  make  be]' 
ter  business.  Plans  for  better  community  living  ail 
now  a  vital,  integral  part  of  the  general  economy  <: 
the  textile  industry,  and  many  leading,  as  well  i 
typical,  examples  of  this  trend  are  found  in  Norl 
Carolina. 

PLEASANT  HOME  CONDITIONS 

One  of  the  major  factors  in  better  citizenship  ar 

greater  work  potential  is  having  a  good  and  pleasai 

ihome,  in  surroundings  worthy  of  choice  and  sui 

liable  to  one's  best  economic  ability.     In  the  texti 


Summer-fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  77 


T^jtfiHt  1  \  *  .,1  ;irn 


-ifeS-iSasS.    ■■." 


-v     ■■■»", 


general  view  of  camp  site  at   Camp  Firestone,  Lake  James, 
operated  for  its  employees  by  Firestone  Textiles,  Gastonia. 

industry  today,  such  a  home  may  be  found  in  the 
nill  community  or  in  outlying  farm  areas  populated 
3y  mill  employees.  Today  the  mill  village,  if  bor- 
dering on  a  town,  is  a  welcome  adjunct  to  the  cor- 
porate community.  Its  well  kept  streets  and  homes 
jive  an  additional  appearance  of  prosperity  to  a 
;own.  If  the  mill  and  its  village  are  somewhat  iso- 
ated,  one  often  finds  the  community  a  place  of  real 
marm  and  usually  of  substantial  appearance. 

Mill  villages  were  never  planned  as  a  source  of 
revenue  to  a  mill.  They  were  simply  an  outgrowth 
)f  the  mill's  location  which,  in  the  early  days,  had 
:o  be  near  water  power.  In  order  to  obtain  power, 
mills  were  often  built  in  remote  places.  Transporta- 
;ion  was  a  grave  problem,  and  companies  had  to 
louse  workers  or  have  none.  Today,  with  excellent 
roads,  high  wages,  and  prevalent  use  and  ownership 
)f  automobiles,  textile  mill  villages  are  not  the  neces- 
sity they  once  were  and  at  least  50  percent  of  textile 
workers  live  outside  the  villages,  25  percent  in  their 
)wn  homes  either  in  village  houses  bought  by  them 
from  the  company,  or  away  from  the  mill  in  other 
;owns  or  on  farms.  Now,  it  is  the  workers  choice, 
lot  the  mill's  necessity,  which  populate  the  mill  vil- 
ages. 

"I've  been  driving  South  for  years  and  never  real- 
zed  that  many  attractive  towns  through  which  I 
Irove  were  cotton  mill  towns,"  said  a  tourist  a  couple 
)f  years  ago.  He  spoke  of  the  flower  gardens,  clip- 
ped hedges,  lawns  and  shady  trees  that  go  toward 
naking  the  pretty  streets.  "And  I  notice  the  houses 
ook  better  than  in  many  other  sections  of  the  coun- 
ty," he  added. 

KANNAPOLIS— CRAMERTON 
One  would  have  to  travel  far  to  find  a  prettier, 
Dusier  community  to  live  in  than  the  mill  village  of 
Kannapolis,  built  around  the  great  Cannon  towel 
nills.  There,  the  business  section  of  the  town  is 
gradually  being  remodeled  along  lines  of  Williams- 
burg colonial  architecture,  and  could  easily  be  mis- 

Zection  of  Main  Street  in  Kannapolis  oivned  by  Cannon  Mills 

Co.,   showing   development   of   Williamsburg 

Colonial  architecture. 


View  of  reading  room  and  library  at  plant  of  American 
Enka  Corp.  at  Enka. 

taken  for  a  city  suburb  of  the  better  type. 

At  Tuxedo,  high  in  the  mountains,  the  combina- 
tion of  village  and  apple  orchard  reminds  one  of  a 
quaint  old  English  settlement.  Many  of  the  em- 
ployees of  the  Green  River  Mills,  Inc.  there  live  on 
their  own  property  held  for  generations  by  patent 
from  George  III,  pre-Revolutionary  King  of  England. 

Cramerton,  when  it  was  first  founded  by  Stuart  W. 
Cramer,  Sr.,  became  known  as  the  model  mill  village. 
Today  the  mill  is  part  of  Burlington  Mills  Corpora- 
tion, and  homes  of  Cramerton  are  now  owned  by  the 
mill  workers.  It  is  found  that  such  real  pride  in 
ownership  exists  that  there  is  good,  natural  and 
neighborly  rivalry  in  keeping  up  the  appearance  of 
lawns  and  houses.  It  is  still  a  model  village  as  Stuart 
Cramer  planned  it. 

Many  textile  workers  prefer  to  own  houses  in 
town  or  country,  to  have  gardens,  or  to  own  small 
farms  within  commuting  distance  of  the  mill,  and 
there  they  may  undertake  normal  farm  activities 
such  as  having  cows,  or  raising  chickens,  or  turkeys, 
or  engaging  in  truck  farming,  in  addition  to  their 
mill  job. 

WORKERS  GOOD  CITIZENS 
Such  things  as  owning  homes,  paying  taxes,  vot- 
ing on  bond  issues  and  in  city,  state  and  national 
elections,  and  in  general  improving  the  community 
bespeak  the  fact  that  people  who  work  for  textile 
mills  today  are  not  mill  workers  in  the  old  sense  of 
the  word.  They  are  substantial  citizens  leading  act- 
ive and  responsible  lives.  Rental  tenants  in  mill 
owned  houses  have  gained  a  comparable  sense  of  re- 
sponsibility. In  many  textile  towns  which  are  in- 
corporated, it  is  not  unusual  to  find  mill  workers  of 
today  serving  on  city  councils,  working  on  various 
community  drives,  and  participating  in  all  normal 


PAGE  78 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


activities  of  a  townsman.  This 
would  have  been  unheard  of 
three,  even  two,  decades  ago. 
The  trend  today  of  greatest  so- 
cial significance  in  textile  manu- 
facturing towns  and  cities  is  the 
disappearance  of  the  old  line  of 
demarcation  between  mill  work- 
ers and  other  members  of  the 
community.  It  is  a  gradual  de- 
velopment which  is  accepted  and 
welcomed  by  all. 

In  many  instances  today,  com- 
munity recreation  projects  are 
joint  investments  on  the  part  of 
mill  interests  and  the  town.  Mill 
workers  and  everyone  else  living 
in  the  community  share  in  the 
benefits  and  enjoyment  of  the 
health  and  recreation  program. 

ORGANIZED  RECREATION 

North  Carolina  is  the  only  textile  manufacturing 
state  which  has  a  state  recreation  commission.  Set 
up  by  legislative  action  in  1946  it  has  worked  suc- 
cessfully in  its  years  of  operation  and  may  set  the 
pattern  for  other  textile  states.  The  commission  is  a 
service  department  and  acts  as  guide  and  counsellor 
to  communities  and  mills  sponsoring  recreation  proj- 
ects. One  of  the  joint  recreation  projects  engineered 
by  the  N.  C.  Recreation  Commission  is  found  in 
Mooresville,  where  the  Mooresville  Cotton  Mills  built 
a  swimming  pool,  a  golf  course,  and  a  small  club- 
house. The  town  of  Mooresville,  as  a  war  memorial, 
built  a  baseball  field,  a  large  auditorium,  and  play- 
ground. The  result  is  a  beautiful  recreation  center 
for  the  entire  community  which  cost  the  mill  and 
the  town  about  $300,000  each.  Everyone  uses  it  and 
enjoys  it,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  recreation 
center  is  financed  by  money  from  the  town's  parking 
meters. 

In  Hickory,  the  community  recreation  project  was 
worked  out  somewhat  differently.  The  Shuf ord  Mills 
matched  dollar  for  dollar  the  amount  raised  by  the 
town  until  approximately  $800,000  was  available. 
Architects  and  engineers  of  the  N.  C.  Recreation 
Commission  planned  the  recreation  center,  and  it  was 
built  as  one  unit  from  the  combined  resources. 


The  Moses  H.  Cone  Memorial  Hospital,  Greensboro,  left  by  the\\ 
late  Mrs.  Moses  Cone  in  memory  of  her  husband,  co-founder  of\ 
Cone  Mills,  and  other  members  of  the  Cone  textile  family.    It 
will  open  for  patients  in  January,  1953. 

In  these  towns,  regardless  of  whether  the  bread- 
winner is  a  cotton  mill  worker,  a  drug  store  clerk,  a 
doctor,  lawyer  or  a  railroad  man,  every  family  en- 
joys the  beautiful  parks  and  the  recreational  facil- 
ities. In  other  localities,  it  may  not  be  feasible  to 
have  joint  programs.  What  works  advantageously 
in  one  community  may  not  be  satisfactory  in  another. 
Sometimes  it  is  much  more  workable  to  confine  the 
recreation  project  to  the  mill  community  because  of 
numbers  of  people  involved,  location  of  mill  and  scope 
of  program.  But  recreation  programs  sponsored  by  I 
textile  mills  throughout  the  entire  N.  C.  industry  fori 
their  workers  and  families  take  many  forms  and  may 
include  athletic  activities,  all  kinds  of  club  work  as  I 
well  as  cultural  education. 

Y.M.C.A.— COMMUNITY  BUILDINGS 
One  of  the  largest  Y.  M.  C.  A.  memberships  in  the! 
United  States  (per  town  population)  is  that  at  Kan- 
napolis,  N.  C.  where  Cannon  Mills  Company  built  ai 
most  beautiful  community  Y.  M.  C.  A.  building  with| 
a  wide  variety  of  facilities,  including  swimming  pool) 
and  gymnasium,  which  is  enjoyed  by  all  residents  of' 
the  town  as  well  as  groups  from  all  over  the  state 
during  tournament  time.  Two  of  the  newest  Y's  inl 
the  state's  textile  areas  are  in  Albemarle  and  North  | 
Charlotte.  The  former  was  built  by  the  Wiscassett; 
Mills  as  a  memorial  to  its  employees ;  and  the  latter; 
was  built  by  the  North  Charlotte  Foundation  as  ai 


?;)!v'Vv*!*^^ 


Gilvin  Roth  YMCA  given  to  its  employees  and  townspeople  by 
Chatham  Mfg.  Co.  at  Elkin. 


One  of  the  Little  League  baseball  teams  composed  largely  o, 

sons  of  employees  sponsored  this  year  by 

Textiles-Incorporated,  Gastonia. 


SUMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  79 


» 


Part  of  spacious  swimming  pool  at  Cannon  Memorial 
YMCA  at  Kannapolis. 

memorial  to  the  late  Horace  Johnston.  Both  build- 
ngs  are  complete  in  every  recreational  detail,  and 
>oth  are  fully  enjoyed  by  the  entire  citizenry  of  the 
ommunity. 

Three  years  ago,  textile  mills  of  Shelby,  N.  C. 
istablished  a  Foundation  and  $200,000  to  build  a 
■ommunity  center,  and,  at  the  same  time,  the  city 
mdertook  a  park  project  with  an  equal  amount  of 
noney  involved,  so  the  two  recreational  efforts  were 
nade  one.  A  fine  swimming  pool,  a  nine-hole  golf 
:ourse,  and  the  community  center,  which  is  complete 
vith  bowling  alleys,  gymnasium,  and  auditorium, 
:ombine  to  make  one  of  the  best  recreational  set-ups 
n  the  state  for  the  people  of  Shelby  and  Cleveland 
:ounty.  The  nearby  town  of  Spindalc  received  a  gift 
>f  $120,000  from  five  local  textile  mills  to  be  used  to 
•emodel,  enlarge  and  improve  the  city's  Recreation 
Center. 

Many  times,  mills  shoulder  the  entire  recreation 
)rogram  budget  for  their  little  community.  It  would 
>e  a  rare  thing  today  to  find  a  textile  mill  without  a 
)lanned  recreation  program.  They  vary  according 
o  the  locale  of  the  mill,  size  of  the  employment  group, 
tnd  scope  of  the  recreation  budget.  Such  budgets 
lave  been  increasing  annually,  however,  and  many 
nills'  trained  recreation  directors  are  included  in 
;he  companies  high  executive  salary  brackets.  The 
:ombination  of  sports  and  cultural  recreation  proj- 
icts  has  brought  to  this  generation  of  N.  C.  textile 
vorkers  a  type  of  background  formerly  thought  ac- 
cessible only  to  the  very  wealthy. 

COLLEGE  AND  SCHOOLS 
Many  examples  could  be  given  of  the  splendid  co- 
deration  between  state  supported  schools  and  the 
;extile  industry's  active  and  constructive  endowment 


Types  of  well-built  homes  built  by  English  Construction  Co.  and 

sold  primarily  to  employees  of  Cone  Mills.    Others  are 

owned  by  the  mill  organization. 


North  Charlotte  YMCA  built  by  North  Charlotte  Foundation, 

established  to  honor  the  memory  of  R.  Horace  Johnston, 

late  president  of  Johnston  Mills  Co.,  Charlotte. 

in  all  lines  of  formal  education.  Today  with  the 
cultural  opportunities  and  college  advantages  offered 
to  employees  of  textile  mills,  or  members  of  their 
families,  the  entire  educational  structure  of  textile 
workers  has  been  raised  to  levels  comparable  to  or 
better  than  other  walks  of  life.  This  is  outstandingly 
true  in  N.  C,  where  the  N.  C.  State  College  School  of 
Textiles  is  now  the  largest  textile  college  in  the  world. 
In  the  past  ten  years,  it  has  tripled  its  enrollment 
due  to  advantages  made  possible  by  the  N.  C.  Textile 
Foundation  of  more  than  $1,000,000  contributed  by 
mills  of  the  state.  This  foundation  is  solely  to  sup- 
plement salaries  of  professors  or  to  provide  profes- 
sorships. 

Not  all  textile  education  is  on  the  college  campus, 
however.  Among  the  schools  on  the  vocational  level, 
and  servicing  a  wide  area,  are  N.  C.  Vocational 
School  located  at  Belmont,  which  is  state  supported, 
and  the  Gaston  County  Technical  Institute,  commun- 
ity planned  for  its  textile  needs,  and  built  with  pub- 
lic subscription  funds.  It  will  be  staffed  with 
teachers  supplied  by  N.  C.  State  College,  and  its 
tuition  fees  will  pay  for  the  school's  operation.  All 
this  ties  in  with  the  trend  within  the  textile  industry, 
now  evidenced  over  several  years,  of  plowing  back  a 
large  portion  of  its  earnings  toward  educational 
opportunities  for  its  younger  generation. 

MODERN  HEALTH  PROGRAMS 
If  an  industry-wide  health  survey  is  ever  made  of 
the  workers  in  the  textile  industry  the  good  health 
of  textile  mill  employees  and  their  families  will  make 
a  creditable  showing  which  twenty  or  thirty  years 
ago  would  have  been  unbelievable.  Today  it  will  be 
accepted  as  a  matter  of  course.  Much  of  this  prog- 
ress in  health  is  due  to  the  revised  living  and  work- 
ing standards  of  the  last  two  decades.  Other  con- 
tributing factors  are  the  health  insurance  and  hos- 
pitalization plans  common  in  the  industry  today. 
Almost  every  mill  has  group  health  insurance  cover- 
ing sickness  and  hospitalization  at  a  cost  from  35 
cents  to  one  dollar  a  week.  Many  have  plans  which 
may  include  nutrition  programs  and  clinics  ranging 
literally  from  head  to  foot,  with  treatment  for  all 
the  ills  known  to  man.  Many  textile  mills  have  their 
own  specialty  clinics,  and  many  go  in  on  community 
cooperative  health  plans.  In  many  large  and  small 
textile  areas,  large  postwar  hospital  projects  are 
under  construction  or  recently  completed. 

COMMUNITY  HOSPITALS 
Many  years  ago,  textile  mills  and  one  or  two  other 
industries  around  Roanoke  Rapids,  N.  C.  cooperated 


PAGE  80 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1952 


to  build  their  own  hospital  and  set  up  a  hospitaliza- 
tion plan  for  the  community  that  attracted  such 
widespread  interest  that  observers  have  come  from 
all  parts  of  the  world  to  study  its  operation.  In 
Cabarrus  County  an  expansion  program  was  re- 
cently completed  for  the  Cabarrus  County  Hospital, 
originally  built  in  1937  with  funds  from  a  county 
bond  issue  and  from  the  Duke  Endowment.  The 
expansion  was  carried  out  under  the  Hill-Burton 
Act  and  was  financed  by  $600,000  of  federal  aid, 
$250,000  state  aid,  and  the  balance  of  $1,250,000 
from  local  industry,  largely  the  Cannon  Mills  inter- 
ests. It  is  one  of  the  few  N.  C.  hospitals  whose 
nurses  are  awarded  a  B.  S.  Degree  upon  graduation. 
But  the  biggest  hospital  venture  in  N.  C.  in  many 
years,  and  certainly  the  largest  financed  by  textile 
interests  for  the  benefit  of  the  entire  community,  is 
in  Greensboro.  It  carries  a  heart  warming  story 
which  enhances  its  benefit  to  that  thriving  textile 
city.  When  the  two  Cone  brothers,  Moses  and  Cae- 
sar, built  the  Proximity  Manufacturing  Company  at 
Greensboro,  N.  C,  they  put  into  it  all  they  had  and 


all  they  could  borrow  from  other  members  of  the 
family.  Now  Greensboro  has  one  of  the  most  im- 
pressive gifts  ever  presented  to  any  community :  the 
300  bed  Cone  Memorial  Hospital  which,  with  the  land 
on  which  it  stands,  represents  the  entire  estate  of 
Moses  Cone  and  an  unmarried  sister,  approximately 
16  million  dollars! 

FREEDOM— HIGH  MORALE 

Thus  we  see  in  North  Carolina,  with  the  invest- 
ment of  much  of  the  textile  industry's  profits  in  com- 
munity programs  directed  toward  the  better  living 
of  the  industry's  employees,  a  true  example  of  the 
philosophy  of  the  American  system  of  business,  free 
enterprise  which  enables  those  who  work  for  the 
success  of  an  industry  to  gain  from  it  the  things  that 
money  cannot  buy:  the  high  morale  which  comes 
with  freedom  from  fear,  and  the  gain  in  health  and 
wisdom.  It  represents  not  a  new  type  of  social  de- 
velopment, but  the  kind  that  prosperity  enables  the 
industry  to  sponsor.  North  Carolina  is  fortunate  to 
have  such  an  industry  as  its  economic  backbone. 


N.  C.  State  School  of  Textiles  Largest  in  the  Nation 

By  Dr.  Malcolm  E.  Campbell,  Dean,  School  of  Textiles,  N.  C.  State  College,  Raleigh 

The  great  diversity  of  function  in  the  textile  in- 
dustry, with  the  rapid  growth  of  its  many  activities, 
has  necessitated  the  appearance  of  the  man  who  is 
thoroughly  trained  in  the  skills  and  techniques  of 
today.  The  School  of  Textiles  at  North  Carolina 
State  College,  since  its  inception,  has  recognized  the 
need  for  close  contact  between  the  industry  and  the 
institution  which  prepares  men  for  it.  Its  develop- 
ment through  the  years  to  its  present  position  as  the 
largest  and  one  of  the  best  equipped  textile  schools 
in  the  country  is  proof  of  the  soundness  of  this 
attitude. 

The  School  of  Textiles  was  established  in  1899 
with  an  enrollment  of  eight  students,  and  equipment 
consisting  of  one  roving  reel,  one  yarn  reel,  a  pair  of 
scales,  and  a  set  of  cotton  samples  donated  by  a  local 
cotton  mill.  Today  there  is  an  enrollment  of  500 
students,  and  a  complete  line  of  equipment  and  raa- 


Entrance    to    large    modern    four-story    building    housing    them 

School  of  Textiles,  N.  C.  State  College,  Raleigh, 

called  ''The  Mill"  by  students. 

chinery  for  the  four  major  departments  in  the  school! 
— yarn,  knitting,  weaving  and  designing,  and  tex-ll 
tile  chemistry  and  dyeing. 

TEXTILE  BUILDING— "THE  MILL" 

The  Textile  Building  itself  is  a  large,  modern,  four-I 
story  structure,  which  is  known  to  its  students  asl 
"the  mill".    This  is  a  partially  accurate  label.  Under!] 
one  roof  are  combined,  on  a  small  scale,  nearly  all  the: 
operations  that  take  place  in  yarn  manufacturing! 
plants,   knitting   mills,   cotton   and   rayon   weaving! 
mills,  and  dyeing  and  finishing  plants.    The  student! 
is  exposed  to  the  latest  methods  and  equipment  of! 
these  many  aspects  of  the  new  textile  industry  in  a] 
manner,  which  if  not  exactly  duplicated  in-any  indi-  J 
vidual  mill,  is  patterned  after  industrial  practices.; 
The  resemblance  stops,  however,  with  the  realiza-j 


Students  studying  in  yarn  manufacturing   laboratory  of  the 
School  of  Textiles,  N.  C.  State  College. 


y 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  81 


Studying  tricot  knitting  in  the  School  of  Textiles, 
N.  C.  State  College. 

on  that  the  mechanical  set-up  comprises  only  one 
art  of  the  training  of  students.  The  basic  academic 
iucation,  which  supplements  the  practical  experi- 
tices  of  the  students,  presents  a  picture  that  can  be 
)und  only  in  a  college. 

From  a  beginning  as  a  small  department  in  the 
allege  which  taught  the  manufacturing  of  cotton, 
le  School  of  Textiles  has  become  one  of  the  larger 
:hools  on  the  campus,  and  offers  instruction  not 
nly  in  the  processing  of  cotton,  but  also  in  textile 
aemistry,  in  the  study  of  modern  laboratory  tech- 
iques,  and  in  individual  courses  covering  almost 
yery  phase  of  textiles.  The  School  offers  two  main 
nrricula — Textiles  and  Textile  Chemistry.  The  lat- 
ir  gives  the  student  a  basic  knowledge  of  textiles 
nd  concentrates  on  the  chemical  composition  of 
bers,  with  emphasis  placed  on  the  man-made  fibers, 
'he  curriculum  in  Textiles  is  organized  so  that  all 
tudents  take  the  same  work  for  three  years,  which 
lcludes  courses  in  yarn  manufacture,  weaving  and 
esigning,  knitting,  and  textile  chemistry  and 
yeing. 

In  the  senior  year  a  student  may  elect  to  specialize 
i  any  of  the  following  options :  General  Textiles, 
ynthetics,  Weaving  and  Designing,  Yarn  Manufac- 
aring,  Textile  Management,  or  Knitting.  This  sys- 
3m  enables  the  School  to  turn  out  men  who  have  a 
oundation  of  general  knowledge  plus  more  specific 
raining  in  a  special  field — the  type  of  man  for  whom 
here  is  a  great  need  today,  as  is  proven  by  the  high 
ercentage  of  graduates  who  are  placed  every  year. 

COMPLETE  RESEARCH  PROGRAM 
As  evidence  of  a  close  liaison  between  school  and 
idustry,  the  School  of  Textiles  has  established  a 
horough  and  completely  equipped  research  program, 
rtiich  not  only  makes  latest  developments  in  testing 
lethods  and  machines  available  to  the  students,  but 
enders  an  actual  service  to  textile  organizations  by 
)erforming  tests  and  giving  information  which 
light  otherwise  be  difficult  for  them  to  obtain. 
The  rapid  growth  of  the  School  of  Textiles  to  the 
osition  of  prominence  it  now  holds  in  the  academic 
eld  is  due  in  a  large  part  to  the  far-sightedness  and 
enerosity  of  North  Carolina  manufacturers.     In 


December  1942,  the  North  Carolina  Textile  Founda- 
tion was  incorporated  "to  aid  and  promote  by  finan- 
cial assistance  and  otherwise,  all  types  of  textile  edu- 
cation and  research  at  North  Carolina  State  College." 
Thus  did  the  idea  of  a  small  group  of  textile  execu- 
tives, including  W.  J.  Carter,  David  Clark,  Herman 
Cone,  and  J.  Spencer  Love,  become  a  reality. 

The  Textile  Foundation  has  more  than  lived  up 
to  its  original  purpose  by  raising  over  $1,200,000 
with  contributions  from  private  industry.  These 
funds  have  made  it  possible  to  attract  men  of  high 
caliber  in  experience  and  achievement  to  the  staff  of 
the  School,  by  supplementing  their  regular  salaries. 
The  Foundation  has  also  contributed  substantially 
toward  the  many  improvements  and  additions  that 
have  been  made  in  the  physical  plant.  This  has  taken 
the  form  of  contributions  of  machinery  and  equip- 
ment; donations  for  the  establishment  of  student 
recreation  facilities ;  and  more  important,  aid  in  de- 
veloping the  most  complete  and  extensive  textile 
library  in  the  United  States. 

GRADUATES  FIND  READY  JOBS 

The  reputation  of  the  School  of  Textiles  has  spread 
far  beyond  the  boundaries  of  the  State  of  North 
Carolina.  In  the  student  enrollment  for  the  scholas- 
tic year  1951-52,  22  states  and  23  foreign  countries 
are  represented,  among  which  are  Canada,  several 
South  American  countries,  China,  India,  England, 
Switzerland ;  and  a  cross-section  of  the  United  States. 
The  time  was  when  the  problem  of  the  South,  aca- 
demically speaking,  lay  in  the  fact  that  the  individual 
states  were  put  to  the  expense  of  educating  their 
students,  who  upon  graduation  promptly  went  North, 
where  the  opportunities  and  money  were.  That  sit- 
uation today  is  just  about  reversed.  The  majority 
of  out-of-state  students  in  the  School  of  Textiles  are 
residents  of  Northern  states,  and  a  great  number  of 
these  boys  remain  in  the  South  working  in  southern 
mills  and  organizations,  after  they  have  received 
their  degrees. 

There  are  few  Textile  Schools  anywhere  which 
can  compete  with  North  Carolina  State  College  On 
the  basis  of  technical  and  academic  preparation. 
Realizing  this,  textile  men  translate  their  under- 
standing into  action  by  absorbing  our  graduates  al- 
most as  fast  as  they  are  available. 


Student  in  physical  testing  laboratory.  School  of  Textiles, 
N.  C.  State  College. 


PAGE  82 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1951 


N.  C.  Vocational  Textile  School  in  Center  of  Industry 

By  J.  Warren  Smith,  State  Director  of  Vocational  Education, 
North  Carolina  State  Department  of  Public  Instruction 

On  the  Wilkinson  Boulevard  between  Charlotte 
and  Gastonia  and  in  the  center  of  the  most  highly 
concentrated  group  of  textile  mills  in  the  State,  at 
Belmont,  is  located  the  North  Carolina  Vocational 
Textile  School.  This  school  is  a  State  institution, 
planned  specifically  to  serve  the  textile  industry.  The 
school  is  the  only  State  operated  vocational  textile 
school  and  the  only  vocational-technical  school  being 
operated  by  the  State.  It  is  unique  by  being  the  only 
one  of  its  type  in  the  entire  country.  This  school  is 
a  special  feature  of  the  State's  program  of  Vocational 
Education  of  the  State  Department  of  Public  In- 
struction. 

The  students  are  taught  how  to  perform  all  of  the 
manipulative  skills  and  the  related  technical  infor- 
mation necessary  to  become  well-rounded  skilled 
textile  operators.  The  training  is  geared  to  develop 
the  skilled  mechanic  level  of  textile  employee.  Those 
who  are  trained  advance  rapidly  to  the  supervisory 
level.  Five  different  courses  are  offered.  They  are : 
yarn  manufacturing,  weaving  and  designing,  knit- 
ting, mill  maintenance,  and  tailoring.  Each  of  the 
courses  require  1150  hours  of  instruction,  which 
may  be  completed  in  one  year's  time. 

The  school  is  in  operation  eleven  months  during 
the  year.  A  student  may  take  as  many  of  the  courses 
as  he  desires.  There  is  not  any  tuition  charge  to 
residents  of  the  State.  There  is  a  tuition  of  $35.00 
per  month  for  out-of-state  students. 

In  the  yarn  manufacturing  course,  the  students 
study  all  of  the  processes  from  the  opening  room 
through  the  spinning  process.  They  acquire  all  of 
the  skills  necessary  to  operate  each  of  the  machines 
and  the  necessary  technical  information. 

The  weaving  and  design  students  learn  all  about 
the  yarn  numbering  systems  of  all  kinds  of  yarn,  the 
many  weave  room  calculations,  and  cloth  analysis. 
They  are  taught  how  to  design  plain  and  fancy  pat- 
terns. 

KNITTING  AND  TAILORING 

In  the  knitting  department,  the  students  learn  the 
principles  and  mechanics  of  knitting.  They  are 
taught  the  knitting  calculations  and  fixing  of  all 
types  of  knitting  machines. 

In  mill  maintenance,  the  students  are  taught  how 


jma*»** 


W>  ■  i  ftttif         ^&fi'  ^Hj  W/Kr%& 


View  of  weave  room  of  N.  C.  Vocational  Textile 
School  at  Belmont. 


N.  C.  Vocational  Textile  School  at  Belmont  between 
Charlotte  and  Gastonia. 

to  operate  all  of  the  machine  shop  equipment  usual! 
found  in  a  fully-equipped  mill  maintenance  shop,  alt 
the  related  mathematics,  theory,  and  blueprint  rea< 
ing  which  is  necessary  to  a  well-rounded  maintei 
ance  mechanic. 

Students  in  tailoring  learn  to  make  all  kinds  < 
men's  clothing,  especially  men's  suits.  They  a: 
taught  all  of  the  processes  needed  in  the  tailorir 
trade  from  basic  stitches  to  pattern  drafting. 

OTHER  SPECIAL  COURSES 
In  addition  to  the  five  main  courses  described,  tl 
school  operates  during  the  year  special  short  ter 
institutes  for  such  subjects  as  cotton  classing,  te 
tile  lubrication,  painting  and  lighting,  supervisio 
and  demonstrations  of  new  processes  or  new  typj 
of  equipment. 

Then  too,  the  school  will  organize  evening  extej' 
sion  classes  for  small  groups  of  employed  workei 
who  desire  to  improve  their  skill  or  knowledge  h 
portant  to  their  present  job  or  for  possible  advanc 
ment  to  a  higher  level  of  employment. 

FOR  WHOM  TRAINING  IS  AVAILABLE 
Training  is  available  for  three  groups:    (1)   Tl 
high  school  student  who  wishes  to  prepare  hims(!:" 
for  textile  employment.     High  school  students  wl 
receive  appropriate  credit  toward  graduation  frcji 
their  own  high  school.    Naturally,  this  group  of  st- 
dents  is  small,  since  only  those  students  who  ap 
near  the  school  are  able  to  make  proper  arrange- 
ments.    (2)    Out-of-school  youth  who  have  or  ha 
not  finished  high  school  are  eligible  to  training  leg 
ing  to  textile  employment.    While  high  school  gr£ 
uation  is  desirable,  it  is  not  an  entrance  requireme; 
The  student  must  be  at  least  sixteen  years  of  ae 
and  have  intelligence  and  ability  sufficient  to  prct 
from  the  training.     (3)    This  group  includes  perse 
already  employed  who  wish  to  continue  their  tra 
ing  or  enroll  for  new  courses,  either  a  major  or  s] 
cial  short  course. 

ENROLLMENT  INCLUDES  VETERANS 
The  school  is  now  beginning  its  tenth  year 
operation.    Each  year  since  its  beginning  there  | 


f 


iUMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  83 


bathes  and  ?nilling  machine  in  N.  C.  Vocational  Textile  School. 

)een  a  steady  growth  of  its  enrollment.  During  the 
rear  1950-51  the  school  had  its  peak  enrollment, 
vhich  was  676.  During  1951-52  there  were  475 
students  enrolled.  Among  this  group  there  were  25 
ligh  school  students,  328  veterans,  and  122  non- 
/eterans.  Nearly  all  of  the  students  were  employed 
workers  who  came  to  the  school  from  seven  counties 
md  represented  66  different  textile  companies.  The 
)fficials  of  the  industry  value  highly  the  training 
;heir  employees  receive,  have  respect  for  the  school, 
md  encourage  promising  young  employees  to  attend, 
rhere  is  an  excellent  spirit  of  cooperation  between 
nill  and  school  officials,  which  is  vital  to  the  success- 
ful operation  of  the  school.  This  school  provided 
excellent  training  for  World  War  II  veterans. 

TRAINED  SCHOOL  FACULTY 

Martin  L.  Rhodes  is  the  school's  superintendent. 

3hris  E.  Folk  is  the  principal.    They  have  a  faculty 

)f  eleven  men  who  are  well-equipped  by  experience 

and  training.     Each  instructor  is  an  expert  in  his 


particular  phase  of  instruction.  Every  instructor 
was  recruited  from  the  industry  he  represents  and 
selected  because  of  his  special  fitness  for  the  teaching 
job. 

The  school  is  operated  by  a  board  of  trustees,  con- 
sisting of  seven  men  who  are  appointed  by  the  gov- 
ernor. 0.  M.  Mull  of  Shelby  is  chairman  of  this 
board.  In  addition  to  the  trustees,  there  is  an  ad- 
visory council  elected  by  the  trustees,  which  is  com- 
posed of  twelve  men  representing  the  different 
phases  of  textiles  and  education.  J.  Harold  Line- 
berger  of  Belmont  is  chairman  of  this  council.  These 
men  keep  in  close  contact  with  the  school  officials 
and  give  advice  on  school  policies  and  procedures. 

EXCELLENT  EQUIPMENT 

As  evidenced  by  the  photographs  which  accompany 
this  article,  this  school  has  excellent  physical  facili- 
ties. The  very  attractive  well-constructed  building 
is  located  on  a  beautiful  tract  of  twenty  acres.  Each 
of  the  shop  laboratories  is  fully  provided  with  ade- 
quate and  up-to-date  equipment. 

This  school  was  established  by  an  act  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  of  1941.  The  original  bill  made  avail- 
able an  appropriation  of  $50,000.  To  this  amount, 
the  managers  of  the  textile  industry  of  Gaston 
County  and  others  added  another  $50,000  and  twenty 
acres  of  land.  The  1943  General  Assembly  appro- 
priated $75,000  for  the  purchasing  of  equipment. 
Each  succeeding  legislative  assembly  has  provided 
some  additional  money  for  equipment  and  improve- 
ment of  the  plant.  Some  of  the  equipment  was  pro- 
vided by  the  Federal  government  for  war  training 
and  a  few  pieces  were  secured  from  surplus  property. 

This  school,  by  its  excellent  performance,  has  es- 
tablished a  place  for  itself  as  an  important  feature  of 
North  Carolina's  educational  program.  Its  benefits 
are  most  helpful  to  the  industry  it  has  served.  The 
founders  who  conceived  the  idea  can  feel  proud  of 
their  action. 


Gaston  Technical  Institute  to  Help  in  Textile  Training 

By  Dr.  J.  H.  Lampe,  Dean  of  Engineering,  North  Carolina  State  College 


The  Gaston  Technical  Institute,  located  in  Gas- 
tonia,  opened  its  doors  to  student  enrollment  on 
September  22  of  this  year,  providing  the  first  oppor- 
tunity of  its  type  in  central  North  Carolina  for  tech- 
nical training  programs. 

The  Institute  has  been  established  and  will  be 
Dperated  by  the  School  of  Engineering  and  the  Col- 
lege Extension  Division  of  North  Carolina  State 
College  in  response  to  the  needs  of  the  Gastonia  com- 
munity and  the  surrounding  area.  It  will  offer 
courses  of  a  year's  duration  in  a  variety  of  technical 
fields.  With  a  flexible  program,  adaptable  to  the 
^hanging  requirements  of  its  students  and  the  spon- 
soring industries,  the  Institute  holds  promise  of  be- 
poming  a  vital  force  in  the  industrial  progress  of  the 
region. 

The  establishment  of  the  Institute  is  in  accord  with 
the  purposes  and  general  philosophy  of  the  School 
3f  Engineering  and  the  College  Extension  Division 
3f  N.  C.  State  College :  to  provide  wherever  possible 
;echnical  training  and  technical  services  as  they  are 


needed  throughout  the  State  of  North  Carolina.  Its 
creation  is  the  fulfillment  of  a  long-time  ambition 
and  the  fruition  of  several  years  of  planning  and 
hard  work  on  the  part  of  E.  W.  Ruggles,  Director  of 
College  Extension. 


Central  building  of  new  Gaston  Technical  Institute,  operating 

under  School  of  Engineering  of  State  College, 

former  F.  C.  Todd  residence. 


PAGE  84 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


This  Institute  will  be  the  only  one  in  operation  in 
North  Carolina,  and  one  of  the  very  few  in  the  entire 
South,  when  its  first  registration  rolls  around  this 
fall.  Its  director  will  be  James  I.  Mason,  former 
director  of  the  Morehead  City  Technical  Institute, 
which  ceased  operation  early  this  month.  A  local 
advisory  board  is  composed  of  sixteen  business  or 
professional  men  in  the  community  who  were  instru- 
mental in  the  Institute's  establishment. 

CURRICULA  AND  FACILITIES 
The  curricula  of  the  School  will  comprise  one  year 
terminal  technical  courses,  of  which  the  character 
is  well-defined  by  the  Technical  Institute  of  the  Engi- 
neers' Council  for  Professional  Development : 

"Technical  Institute  programs  are  intermediate  between 
the  high  school  and  vocational  school  on  one  hand  and 
the  engineering  college  on  the  other  .  .  .  The  purpose 
is  to  prepare  individuals  for  positions  auxiliary  to  but 
not  in  the  field  of  professional  engineering.  Curricula 
are  essentially  technological  in  nature,  based  upon 
principles  of  science,  require  the  use  of  mathematics 
beyond  high  school  and  emphasize  rational  processes 
rather  than  rules  of  practice.  Curricula  are  briefer, 
more  intensive,  and  more  specific  in  purpose  than  col- 
legiate engineering  curricula,  though  they  lie  in  the 
same  general  fields  of  industry  and  engineering.  Their 
aim  is  to  prepare  individuals  for  specific  technical  posi- 
tions or  lines  of  activity  rather  than  broad  sectors  of 
engineering  practice." 

For  its  first  year  the  Institute  offers  curricula  in 
Building  Construction  Technology,  Electrical  Tech- 
nology, Internal  Combustion  Engines,  and  Textile 
Technology.  These  courses  will  be  modified  and  new 
courses  added  as  necessary  to  meet  the  needs  of  the 
region. 

Administrative  offices,  classrooms,  and  the  library 
will  be  located  in  the  former  F.  C.  Todd  residence 
on  West  Airline  Avenue  in  downtown  Gastonia.  The 
residence  has  been  completely  reconditioned  to  suit 
its  new  purposes.  A  student  book  store  and  snack 
bar  will  also  be  located  in  this  building. 

On  the  same  lot  new  buildings  have  been  construct- 
ed to  house  the  various  shops  and  laboratories — the 
machine  shop,  sheet  metal  shop,  welding  shop,  wood- 
working shop,  electrical  laboratory,  and  internal 
combustion  engines  shop  and  laboratory. 

No  dormitory  or  dining  room  facilities  will  be 
provided,  but  the  Chamber  of  Commerce  of  Gastonia 
will  assist  in  placing  out-of-town  students  in  desir- 
able homes  in  the  community. 

STEPS  IN  STARTING  SCHOOL 
The  establishment  of  this  Institute  in  Gastonia 
evidences  growing  recognition  of  the  importance  of 
trained  technicians  in  any  scene  of  industrial  activ- 
ity. This  modern  age  of  complexity  is  based  upon 
technology ;  the  lack  of  technically  trained  personnel 
is  a  limiting  factor  in  the  growth  of  any  industry. 
Far-sighted  leaders  in  Gastonia,  aware  of  this  factor 


and  wanting  to  insure  the  continued  prosperity  of 
their  community,  have  substantially  aided  in  the 
establishment  of  this  Institute. 

The  one  man  most  responsible  for  the  success  oi 
its  establishment  is  C.  C.  Dawson,  a  retired  business; 
executive  who  aroused  the  interest  of  the  rest  of  th(f 
community  in  this  project.  He  headed  a  fund-raising 
drive  among  local  business  firms  which  raised  monej 
to  provide  for  the  physical  plant  of  the  Institute 
(The  administrative  officers  and  faculty  are  pro 
vided  by  the  School  of  Engineering.) 

The  enthusiasm  and  the  capabilities  of  Mr.  Dawsoi 
and  over  a  dozen  of  his  associates  quickly  dispatchec 
each  difficulty  that  arose  in  the  School's  establish 
ment.  Frequent  meetings  with  this  group  were  ver| 
impressive  to  Director  Ruggles  of  the  Extensioi 
Division  and  to  myself.  It  is  not  only  a  pleasure 
but  truly  an  enlivening  experience  to  be  associate* 
with  such  a  spirit — a  spirit  which  insured  achieve 
ment  at  the  very  outset  of  the  undertaking. 

FOUNDERS  AND  ADVISORS 

Along  with  my  mention  of  Mr.  Dawson,  I  shoul< 
like  to  cite  A.  G.  Bell  and  Brice  T.  Dickson,  respect 
ively,  president  and  manager  of  the  Gastonia  Cham 
ber  of  Commerce,  whose  interest  and  activity  oi 
behalf  of  the  Institute  were  most  essential  and  mos 
gratifying. 

They  and  the  other  gentlemen  who  were  so  instru 
mental  in  the  founding  of  the  Institute  have  a. 
agreed  to  serve  on  its  Advisory  Board,  giving  us  th 
continued  benefit  of  their  advice.  These  other  ger 
tlemen  are :  Charles  K.  Bryant,  Hubert  Craig,  How 
ard  Houser,  Hunter  Huss,  Joe  Lineberger,  Don  Mad 
dox,  Harold  Mercer,  E.  R.  Morgan,  Coit  M.  Robinsor 
Sam  M.  Stewart,  Fred  M.  Waters,  A.  K.  Winget,  Jr 
Frank  A.  Young,  and  Charles  B.  Zeigler.  C.  C.  Dav\ 
son  will  serve  as  Chairman  of  the  Board. 

Several  months  after  the  plans  were  underway  fo 
the  Institute  in  Gastonia,  it  became  obvious  that  th 
Morehead  City  Technical  Institute  (which  had  bee 
operated  on  the  same  basis  from  1947  until  thi 
year)  was  no  longer  needed  in  its  present  locatioi! 
The  tide  of  former  G.  I.'s  had  passed,  there  was  littjf 
demand  from  local  industry  in  the  region  for  peop] 
with  such  training,  and  the  bulk  of  the  students  wer 
coming  from  the  western  areas  of  the  State — a 
unnecessarily  long  distance. 

It  was  therefore  decided  to  consolidate  the  facilj 
ties  and  the  staff  of  the  Morehead  Institute  with  tr 
one  at  Gastonia,  to  serve  more  effectively  the  peop 
of  the  State.  The  present  location  of  the  Institut 
in  the  heart  of  Gaston  County,  is  more  easily  acces 
ible  to  the  industrial  regions  of  North  Carolin 
Through  its  establishment  we  hope  to  fill  most  effec 
ively  our  State's  need  for  well-trained  techniciai 
for  many  important  positions  in  our  industrial  ecoi 
omy. 


N.  C.  Cotton  (Textile)  Mfgrs.  Association  Active  46  Year 


(SEE  ARTICLE  ON   NEW  OFFICE 

The  North  Carolina  Cotton  Manufacturers'  Asso- 
ciation was  organized  in  Charlotte,  October  30,  1906, 
as  a  means  of  bringing  together  textile  mill  officials 
in  North  Carolina  to  consider  matters  of  a  mutual 
interest,  to  dissolve  mutual  problems  and  to  provide 
factual  data  for  the  benefit  of  the  industry.     Prior 


RS,   NAME  CHANGE,   PAGE    139) 

to  this  meeting  a  group  of  about  65  cotton  mill  off 
cials  met  in  Charlotte  and  adopted  a  resolution  ca] 
ing  for  the  organization  meeting  two  weeks  late 
The  temporary  committee  to  call  the  meetjng  w; 
composed  of  R.  M.  Miljer,  Jr.,  named  chairman;  ar 
J.  P.  Wilson,  flamed  secretary ;  S.  P.  Tanner,  Jam- 


;ummer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  85 


V.  Cannon,  R.  S.  Reinhardt,  S.  Bryant  (probably  S. 
3.  Sargeant),  John  W.  Fries,  D.  Y.  Cooper  and  W. 
I  Ruffin. 

In  the  organization  meeting  October  30,  1906,  in 
he  absence  of  J.  P.  Wilson,  David  Clark  was  named 
cmporary  secretary.  The  group  adopted  the  Con- 
titution  and  elected  officers  as  follows :  R.  M.  Miller, 
r.,  President;  S.  B.  Sargeant,  first  vice-president; 
Charles  Iceman,  second  vice-president ;  S.  F.  Patter- 
on,  third  vice-president;  W.  L.  Myrick,  secretary 
nd  treasurer.  Charlotte  was  selected  as  the  site  of 
he  principal  office  of  the  Association.  In  1932, 
ixteen  years  later,  the  Association  decided  to  incor- 
iorate  and  the  incorporators  were  Charles  A.  Can- 
on, Kannapolis;  Thomas  H.  Webb,  Concord,  and 
.  M.  Gamewell,  Lexington. 

Annual  meetings  of  the  Association  were  held  dur- 
ng  the  summer  months  until  1931,  nine  of  them  in 
Charlotte,  nine  in  Asheville,  two  each  in  Greensboro, 
Vinston-Salem  and  Wrightsville  Beach,  and  one 
ach  in  Blowing  Rock  and  Sedgefield  Inn.  Since  that 
ime  most  of  the  meetings  have  been  held  in  Pine- 
iurst  in  the  fall,  fourteen  having  been  held  in  that 
esort  city.  During  World  War  II  four  meetings 
pere  held  in  Charlotte  and  one  each  in  Winston- 
ialem  and  Asheville.  Semi-annual  meetings  were 
eld  at  Pinehurst  in  the  1921-31  period. 

Hunter  Marshall,  Charlotte  attorney,  was  elected 
ecretary-treasurer  in  August,  1918,  and  has  served 
n  that  capacity  during  the  34  years  that  followed, 
le  maintains  the  chief  office  of  the  organization  in 
he  Independence  Building,  Charlotte.  W.  L.  Myrick, 
he  first  secretary,  served  two  years  followed  by  T.  L. 
Slack  who  served  eight  years  and  Hudson  C.  Miller 
/ho  served  two  years  preceding  Mr.  Marshall's  elec- 
ion. 

The  Association,  through  its  secretary,  keeps  its 
lembership  fully  informed  on  national  and  State 
iws,  rules  and  regulations  in  which  they  are  inter- 
sted.  It  handles  intrastate  problems  dealing  with 
he  textile  industry  and  maintains  contacts  with  the 
aw-making  bodies  of  the  State  and  in  gathering  and 
isseminating  information  of  interest  to  the  textile 
tidustry.  It  interprets  the  tax  and  other  laws  relat- 
ag  to  the  industry,  maintains  a  traffic  department 
nd  seeks  to  develop  a  sympathetic  public  interest  in 
he  problems  of  the  textile  industry. 

An  amendment  to  the  Constitution  of  the  North 
Carolina  Cotton  Manufacturers'  Association  is  now 
nder  consideration  looking  toward  the  change  in 
he  name  to  make  it  the  North  Carolina  Textile 
lanufacturers'  Association  to  bring  it  in  line  with 


present  day  memberships.  Producers  of  man-made 
fibers,  such  as  rayon,  nylon  and  the  others,  have 
affiliated  with  the  Association  since  beginning  opera- 
tions. 

Present  officers  are  Carl  R.  Harris,  Erwin  Mills, 
Inc.,  Durham,  president;  H.  K.  Hallett,  Kendall  Mills, 
Charlotte,  first  vice-president;  E.  N.  Brower,  Rock- 
fish-Mebane  Yarn  Mills,  Inc.,  Hope  Mills,  second  vice- 
president;  Hunter  Marshall,  attorney-at-law,  Char- 
lotte, secretary-treasurer;  L.  0.  Kimberly,  Jr.,  At- 
lanta, Georgia,  traffic  manager. 

Directors  of  the  Association  include  the  three  offi- 
cers— Mr.  Harris,  Mr.  Hallett  and  Mr.  Brower — and 
18  directors  in  three  groups  of  staggered  three-year 
terms :  J.  A.  Cooper,  Eugene  Cross,  Jr.,  G.  V.  Garth, 
D.  A.  Long,  Harold  Mercer,  W.  H.  Suttenfield;  C.  C. 
Dawson,  Marion  W.  Heiss,  H.  M.  Jones,  Paul  M. 
Neisler,  J.  C.  Roberts,  Ben  R.  Rudisill;  Harry  C. 
Carter,  John  W.  Harden,  B.  Everett  Jordan,  D.  R. 
LaFar,  Jr.,  Albert  S.  Orr  and  Harold  W.  Whitcomb. 
Past  presidents  who  are  ex  officio  directors  are  A. 
M.  Dixon,  A.  H.  Bahnson,  Bernard  M.  Cone,  E.  C. 
Dwelle,  C.  A.  Cannon,  Harvey  W.  Moore,  Herman 
Cone,  A.  K.  Winget,  A.  G.  Myers,  W.  H.  Entwistle, 
William  H.  Ruffin,  Ellison  A.  Smyth,  R.  A.  Spaugh, 
Jr.,  R.  L.  Harris,  R.  D.  Hall,  Hearne  Swink,  Karl 
Bishopric,  Frank  C.  Williams  and  Julian  Robertson. 

Following  the  organization  R.  M.  Miller,  Jr.,  con- 
tinued to  serve  as  president  for  five  years.  He  was 
succeeded  by  C.  E.  Hutchinson  who  served  three 
years.  Robert  R.  Ray  served  one  year  and  A.  A. 
Thompson  served  two  years.  After  his  two  terms, 
1915-16,  presidents  were  elected  for  one  term  only. 
All  presidents  who  served  prior  to  1920  are  now 
deceased.  Presidents  since  1916  were  W.  C.  Ruffin*, 
1917;  John  L.  Patterson*,  1918;  Arthur  J.  Draper*, 
1919;  Arthur  M.  Dixon,  1920;  T.  C.  Leak*,  1921;  A. 
H.  Bahnson,  1922;  J.  H.  Webb*,  1923;  Bernard  M. 
Cone,  1924;  F.  C.  Dwelle,  1925;  S.  F.  Patterson*, 
1926;  J.  M.  Gamewell*,  1927;  C.  G.  Hill*,  1928;  T. 
H.  Webb*,  1929 ;  J.  H.  Separk*,  1930 ;  W.  D.  Briggs*, 
1931 ;  K.  P.  Lewis*,  1932 ;  C.  A.  Cannon,  1933 ;  A.  M. 
Fairley*,  1934 ;  J.  A.  Long*,  1935 ;  Harvey  W.  Moore, 
1936;  Herman  Cone,  1937;  A.  K.  Winget,  1938;  J. 
Harvey  White*,  1939;  A.  G.  Myers,  1940;  W.  H. 
Entwistle,  1941 ;  William  H.  Ruffin,  1942;  Ellison  A. 
Smyth,  III,  1943;  R.  Arthur  Spaugh,  Jr.,  1944;  J.  A. 
Moore*,  1945;  R.  L.  Harris,  1946;  R.  D.  Hall,  1947; 
Hearne  Swink,  1948;  Karl  Bishopric,  1949;  Frank 
C.  Williams,  1950,  and  Julian  Robertson,  1951. 


♦Deceased. 


rextile  Mills,  Alphabetical  by  Towns,  Operating  in  State 


(Exclusive  of  Hosiery  Mills) 


Aberdeen — Robbins  Mills,  Inc.  (plants  also  at  Robbins, 
laeford,  Red  Springs,  N.  C,  and  Clarksville,  Va. ) 

Albemarle — Efird  Mfg.  Co.  (merged  with  American  Yarn 
:  Processing  Co.,  Mt.  Holly) 

Arden — L.  C.  Langston  &  Sons 

Asheboro — Asheboro  Braid  Co.;  Klopman  Mills,  Inc. 
plants  also  at  Siler  City  and  Covington,  Va. )  ;  Standard 
'ytape  Co.;  Stedman  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.;  E.  H.  Steere  &  Co.,  Inc. 

Asheville — Biltmore  Industries,  Inc. ;  Biltmore  Spinning 
!o.;  Cone  Mills  Corp.  (branch  of  Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greens- 
oro);  Martel  Mills  Corp.  (plants  also  at  Batesburg,  S.  C, 
.exington,  S.  C,  and  Spartanburg,  S.  C.) 


Avondale — Cone  Mills  Corp.  (branch  of  Cone  Mills  Corp., 
Greensboro) 

Balfour — Berkeley  Mills,  Inc. 

Belmont — Aberfoyle  Mfg.  Co.  (branch  of  Chester,  Pa.); 
Acme  Spinning  Co.;  Beltex  Corp.;  Belmont  Throwing  Corp.; 
Chronicle  Mills;  Climax  Spinning  Co.;  Commercial  Gassing 
Co.;  Cornucopia  Corp.;  Crescent  Spinning  Co.;  Eagle  Yarn 
Mills,  Inc.;  Linford  Mills,  Inc.;  Majestic  Mfg.  Co.;  National 
Yarn  Mills,  Inc.;  Perfection  Spinning  Co.;  Piedmont  Process- 
ing Co.;  Southern  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.;  South  Fork  Mfg. 
Co.;  Sterling  Spinning  Co.;  Stowe  Spinning  Co.;  Stowe 
Thread  Co. 


PAGE  86 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


A  Few  of  the  Pioneer  Textile  Manufacturers  of  North  Carolina 


James  W.  Cannon,  founder  of  the  ex-  Moses  H.  Cone,  co-founder  of  large  Ceasar  Cone,  co-founder  with  his  Alexander  Chatham,  founder  and  loni 
tensive  Cannon  Mills,  centered  in  Kan-  Cone  Mills  Corp.  and  Cone  Mills  Inc.,  brother,  Moses  H.  Cone,  of  Cone  Mills  head  of  the  large  Chatham  Manufac 
napolis   and   Concord.  spreading  out  from  Greensboro.  Corp.  and  Cone  Mills  Inc.,  Greensboro,    turing   Co.   at  Elkin. 


W.  A.  Erwin,  first  general  manager  and 
for  many  years  president  of  Erwin  Cot- 
ton Mills,  Durham,  now  Erwin  Mills, 
Inc. 


C.  W  Johnston,  organizer  and  for 
many  years  head  of  the  large  group  in 
the  Johnston  Mills  Co.  originating  in 
Charlotte. 


Bessemer  City — Algodon  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.;  Frank  Mills  Co.; 
Gambrill  &  Melville  Mills  Co.;  Osage  Mfg.  Co.  (subsidiary 
of  Reeves  Bros.,  Inc.,  N.  Y.  C. ) 

Biltmore — Sayles  Biltmore  Bleacheries,  Inc.  (subsidiary 
of  Sayles  Finishing  Plants,  Inc.,  Saylesville,  R.  I.) 

Biscoe — Aileen  Mills  Co. 

Bladenboro — Bladenboro  Cotton  Mills,  Inc. 

Boiling  Springs — Marion  Yarn  Mill,  Inc. 

Boonville — Beaver  Creek  Weaving  Co.,  Inc. 

Brevard — Pisgah  Mills,  Inc. 

Brookford — Brookford  Mills  (Div.  of  A.  D.  Julliard  &  Co., 
Inc.,  N.  Y.  C.) 

Buffalo — Dover  Yarn  Mills,  Inc. 

Burlington — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (branch  of  Burlington 
Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro)  ;  Celanese  Lanese  Corp.  (subsidiary 
of  Celanese  Corp.  of  America)  ;  Copland  Converting  &  Fin- 
ishing Co.;  Copland  Fabrics,  Inc.;  Copland-Fowler  Industries, 
Inc.;  Frissell  Fabrics,  Inc.;  Glencoe  Mills;  National  Process- 
ing Co.;  U.  S.  Rubber  Co.  (branch  of  1230  Sixth  Ave.,  N.  Y. 
C.)  (plants  also  at  Gastonia,  Hogansville,  Ga.,  Shelbyville, 
Tenn.;  Winnsboro,  S.  C,  and  Scottsville,  Va. )  ;  Webco  Mills, 
Inc. 

Burnsville — The  Duplan  Corp.  (branch  of  Hazelton,  Pa.) 
(plants  also  at  Winston-Salem,  Lincolnton,  Grottoes,  Va., 
and  Cleveland,  Tenn);  Glen  Raven  Silk  Mills,  Inc.  (branch 
of  Glen  Raven) 

Butner — Mt.  Hope  Finishing  Co.,  Inc. 

Bynum — J.  M.  Odell  Mfg.  Co. 

Caroleen — Henrietta  Mills  (plants  also  at  Henrietta  and 
Cherokee  Falls,  S.  C.) 

Carrboro — Carrboro  Mills  (Div.  of  Pacific  Mills,  Boston, 
Mass.)  (plants  also  at  Columbia,  S.  C,  Lyman,  S.  C,  Rhod- 
hiss,  N.  C,  Halifax,  Va.,  Drakes  Branch,  Va.,  and  Brookneal, 
Va.) 


William  H.  Battle,  son  of  Founder  Joel  Stuart    W.    Cramer,    founder    and    fo 

Battle,   for  some  twenty  years   head   of  many     years     president     of     Cramertoi 

Battle    Mill,    now    Rocky    Mount    Mills,  Mills,  Cramerton,  now  part  of  Burling] 

was  a  Justice  of  N.  C.  Supreme  Court,  ton   Mills. 

Carthage — Carthage  Fabrics  Corp. 

Cedar  Falls — Jordan  Spinning*  Co. ;  Sapona  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc 

Central  Falls — Burlington  Mills,»Corp.  (branch  of  Greens 
boro ) 

Charlotte — Barber'Mfg.  'Co. ;    Calvine   Cotton   Mills,   Inc] 
(subsidiary  of  Leading  Embroidery  Co.,  North  Bergen,  N.  J. 
(see   also   The   Smitherman   Cotton    Mills,   Troy)  ;    Carolin: 
Processing   Co.;    Chadwick  Mills;    Crescent  Narrow   Fabric 
Corp.;   Highland  Park  Mfg.  Co.    (nos.   1  and  3);   Industriaj 
Dyeing   Corp.   of  N.   C. ;    Johnston   Mfg.   Co.;    Kendall   Mill! 
(plant  also  at  Paw  Creek);   Lawrence  Knitting  Mills,  Inc 
Leno-Tex  Mills,  Inc.;  Moore  Textile  Co.;  Piedmont  Mop  Go. 
Inc. ;    Scandinavia     Belting     Co. ;     Southern    Asbestos     Cq 
Southern  Friction  Materials  Co.;   Southern  Knitwear  Mill 
Inc.;  Spatex  Corp.;  Stowe  Mfg.  Co.;  Superior  Knitters,  Inc 
Textron  Southern, Inc. 

Cherryville — Carlton  Yarn  Mills,  Inc.;  Dora  Yarn  Mil 
Co.;  Howell  Mfg.  Co.;  Nuway  Spinning  Co.,  Inc.;  Rhyne 
Houser  Mfg.  Co. 

China  Grove — Cannon  Mills  (plant  No.  8)  (branch  !> 
Kannapolis,  N.  C.)  ;  China  Grove  Cotton  Mills  Co. 

Claremont — C.  D.  Jessup  &  Co. 

Clayton — Bartex  Spinning  Co.  (affiliate  of  Norwich  Knitj 
ting  Co.,  Norwich,  N.  Y.);  Clayton  Spinning  Co. ;  Norwic j 
Knitting  Co.   (branch  of  Norwich,  N.  Y.) 

Cliffside — Cone  Mills  Corp.  (branch  of  Cone  Mills  Corp 
Greensboro)  ,      } 

Coleridge — Enterprise  Mfg.  Co. 

Columbus — Hatch  Mill  Corp.;  Southern  Woven  Label  Co 
Inc.  (subsidiary  of  Alkahn  Silk  Label  Co.,  N.Y.C.);  Unio 
Processing  Co. 

Concord — Brown  Mfg.  Co.;  Cannon  Mills  Co.  (plants  No; 
2,  5,  6,  9,  10)  (branches  of  Kannapolis,  N.  C);  Guntei, 
Ashmore    Mfg.    Co.,    Inc.;    Oscar    Heineman    Corp.    (div.    c 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  87 


etna  Industrial  Corp.)  ;  Kerr  Bleaching  &  Finishing  Works, 
ic. ;  Linn  Mills  Co.  (branch  of  Landis,  N.  C. )  ;  Locke  Cotton 
[ills  Co.;  Roberta  Mfg.  Co.;  The  Stead  &  Miller  Co.  (branch 
f  Philadelphia,  Pa.);  Universal  Mills  Corp. 

Connelly  Springs — Francis  Fabrics,  Inc. 

Cooleemee — Erwin  Mills,  Inc.  (Mill  No.  3)  (branch  of 
urham,  N.  C.) 

Cornelius — Gem  Yarn  Mill,  Inc.;  Sheraton  Mills  Corp. 
subsidiary  of  Frank  Ix  &  Sons,  Englewood,  N.  J.)  (plants 
t  Lexington  and  Charlottesville,  Va. ) 

Cramerton — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (branch  of  Burling- 
>n  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro) 

Cumberland — Rockflsh-Mebane  Yarn  Mills,  Inc.  (branch 
t  Hope  Mills),  (plant  also  at  Mebane) 

Dallas — Dallas  Mills,  Inc.;  Morowebb  Cotton  Mill  Co. 
Div.  of  Macanal  Textile  Corp.);   Robinson  Mills,  Inc. 

Davidson — Carolina  Asbestos  Co.;  McCanless  Mills,  Inc. 
plant  No.  5)    (branch  of  Salisbury) 

Double  Shoals — Double  Shoals  Mills,  Inc. 

Draper — Fieldcrest  Mills   (branch  of  Spray) 

Durham — Erwin  Mills,  Inc.  (Nos.  1,  4  and  6)  (plants  also 
,  Erwin,  Cooleemee,  Neuse  and  Stonewall,  Miss.);  Golden 
elt  Mfg.  Co. 

East  Monbo — Superior  Yarn  Mills  (branch  of  Mount 
oily) 

Edenton — Edenton   Cotton   Mills 

Elkin — Chatham  Mfg.  Co. 

Ellenboro — Neisler  Mills,  Inc.  (branch  of  Kings  Mountain) 

Enka — American  Enka  Corp.  (plant  also  at  Lowland,  near 
orristown,  Tenn.) 

Erwin — Erwin  Mills,  Inc.  (Mills  Nos.  2  and  5)  (branch  of 
urham,  N.  C.) 

Fayetteville — Burlington  Mills  Corp.;  Holt-Williamson 
fg.  Co.;  Tolar,  Hart  &  Holt  Mills,  Inc. 

Fletcher — Cranston  Print  Works  Co.  (branch  of  Cran- 
on,  R.  I.) 

Forest  City — Alexander  Mill  (Div.  of  North  Carolina  Fin- 
ning Co.,  Salisbury)  ;  Florence  Mills  (subsidiary  of  Cone 
ills  Corp.,  Greensboro);  Henry  F.  Thomas,  Inc. 

Franklinton — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (branch  of  Greens- 
aro)  ;  Sterling  Cotton  Mills,  Inc. 

Franklinville — Randolph  Mills,  Inc. 

Gastonia — American  &  Efird  Mills,  Inc.  (Dixon  Plant) 
branch  of  American  &  Efird  Mills,  Inc.,  Mt.  Holly);  Asso- 
ated  Spinners,  Inc.  (see  Delaine  Worsted  Mills,  Inc.,  Div.); 
ernside  Mills,  Inc.;  Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Modena  and 
lint  No.  1  and  No.  2  Plants)  (branch  of  Greensboro)  ;  Cen- 
tal Yarn  &  Dyeing  Co.,  Inc.;  Delaine  Worsted  Mills,  Inc. 
Div.  of  Asosciated  Spinners);  Firestone  Textiles  (Div.  of 
he  Firestone  Tire  &  Rubber  Co.,  Akron,  Ohio)  ;  Gastonia 
ombed  Yarn  Corp.;  Gastonia  Weaving  Co.;  Gray  Mills,  Inc.; 
roves  Thread  Co.,  Inc.;  Jewel  Cotton  Mills,  Inc.  (Process- 
ig  Div.  and  Thread  Div.)  (branch  of  Thomasville)  ;  LaFar 
hain  (plants  are  Farmac  Mills,  Inc.,  Rock  Hill,  S.  C; 
arden  Mfg.  Co.,  Hardins,  N.  C;  Clayton  (N.  C.)  Spinning 
o. ;  Bowling  Green  (S.  C.)  Spinning  Co.;  Peck  Mfg.  Co., 
farrenton,  N.  C;  Tolar,  Hart  &  Holt  Mill,  Fayetteville, 
.  C;  Waxhaw  (N.  C.)  Mfg.  Co.);  Parkdale  Mills,  Inc.;  Pied- 
ont  Fabrics;  Piedmont  Mill,  Inc.;  Textile  Laboratories; 
extiles,  Inc.;  Threads,  Inc.;  Todd-Smith  Banding  Co.,  Inc.; 
renton  Cotton  Mills;  U.  S.  Rubber  Co.  (plants  also  at  Ho- 
insville,  Ga.,  Winnsboro,  S.  C,  Burlington,  N.  C,  Shelby- 
lie,  Tenn.,  and  Scottsville,  Va. );  Waverly  Braid  Mills. 

Gibsonville — Liberty  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. ;  Cone  Mills  Corp. 
Minneola  Plant)   (branch  of  Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro) 

Glen  Raven — Glen  Raven  Cotton  Mills,  Inc.  (Mill  No.  1, 
ill  No.  2  at  Kinston) 

Goldsboro — Borden  Mfg.  Co. 

Goldston — The  Goldtex  Development  &  Mfg.  Corp. 

Graham — Travora  Textiles,  Inc.  (plant  also  at  Haw  River) 

Granite  Falls — Falls  Mfg.  Co.;  Shuford  Mills,  Inc.  (Gran- 
e  Falls,  Granite  Cordage  and  Dudley  Shoals  Plants) 
branch  of  Hickory) 

Greensboro — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Greensboro  Weav- 
Lg  Plant)  (branch  of  Burlington  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro); 
urlington  Mills  Corp.  (Hosiery  Finishing  Plant)  (see  Bur- 
ngton  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro)  ;  Cone  Finishing  Co.  (print 
orks)  (subsidiary  of  Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro);  Cone 
ills  Corp.;  Guilford  Mills,  Inc.;  High-Speed  Threads,  Inc.; 
suthern  Webbing  Mills,  Inc.;  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Car- 
sr  Fabrics  Div.)  (Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.,  350  Fifth 
ve.,  N.  Y.  C.)  ;  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Purchasing  Dept.) 
Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.);  Greenville  Mills,  Inc. 
subsidiary  of  Art  Loom  Carpet  Co.,  Philadelphia,  Pa.) 

Grover — Minette  Mills,  Inc. 


Hanes — P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting  Co.  (branch  of  Winston- 
Salem) 

Hardins — Harden  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc. 

Haw  River — Cone  Finishing  Co.  (subsidiary  of  Cone  Mills 
Corp.,  Greensboro);  Cone  Mills  Corp.  (Tabardy  Plant) 
(branch  of  Greensboro);  Travora  Textiles,  Inc.  (branch  of 
Graham ) 

Hazelwood — Royle  &  Pilkington,  Inc. 

Henderson — Harriet  Cotton  Mills;  Henderson  Cotton  Mills 

Hendersonville — Advance  Thread  Corp. ;  Belding  Corti- 
celli;  Blue  Ridge  Cord  Co.;  Colonial  Spin-Braid  Co.;  R.  &  S. 
Hosiery  Mill 

Henrietta — Henrietta  Mills  (Henrietta  Mill)  (branch  of 
Caroleen) 

Henry  River — Henry  River  Mills  Co. 

Hickory — Bedington  Hosiery  Mill;  C.  &  D.  Hosiery  Mill; 
Carolina  Fine  Fabrics,  Inc.;  Hickory  Dyeing  &  Winding  Co., 
Inc. ;  Hickory  Shoe  Lace  Mfg.  Co. ;  Hickory  Spinners,  Inc. ; 
Hickory  Throwing  Co.;  Ivey  Weavers,  Inc.;  Nelly  Bee  Prod- 
ucts; Shuford  Mills,  Inc.  (Highland  Cordage  and  A.  A.  Shu- 
ford Plants) 

High  Falls — Currie  Mill,  Inc.  (branch  of  knitting  mill  at 
Carthage) 

High  Point — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Hillcrest  Throwing 
and  High  Point  Weaving  Plants)  (branch  of  Greensboro); 
Cloverdale  Dye  Works,  Inc.;  Highland  Cotton  Mills,  Inc.; 
Pickett  Cotton  Mills,  Inc.;  Tex  Elastic  Corp. 

High  Shoals — Carolinian  Mills,  Inc. 

Hildebran — Quaker  Meadows  Mills,  Inc. 

Hillsboro — Belle  Vue  Mfg.  Co.;  Cone  Mills  Corp.  (Eno 
Plant)    (branch  of  Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro) 

Homestead — The  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.  (Mill  No. 
2)    (plant  also  at  Spray) 

Hope  Mills — Brower  Mills,  Inc. 

Hudson — Caldwell  Cotton  Mill  Co.;  Hudson  Cotton  Mfg. 
Co. 

Huntersville — Carolina  Mills,  Inc.  (Plant  No.  5)  (Branch 
of  Maiden) 

Icard — Icard  Cordage  Mfg.  Co. 

Jamestown — Jamestown  Mills,  Inc. ;  Oakdale  Cotton  Mills 

Kalmia — Kalmia  Braids,  Inc. 

Kannapolis — Cannon  Mills  (Plants  Nos. 
also  at  Concord,  China  Grove,  Rockwell 
Franjean  Mills,  Inc.;  Greenway's  Weaving 

Kernersville — Southern  Silk  Mills,  Inc. 

Kings  Mountain — Bonnie  Cotton  Mill;  Burlington  Mills 
Corp.  (Phenix  Plant)  (branch  of  Burlington  Mills  Corp., 
Greensboro);  Craftspun  Yarns,  Inc.  (Div.  of  Scranton  Lace 
Co.,  Scranton,  Pa.);  Frieda  Mfg.  Co.  (subsidiary  of  Beaunit 
Mills,  Inc.,  N.  Y.  C. )  ;  Kings  Mountain  Mfg.  Co.;  Lambeth 
Rope  Corp.  (Kings  Mountain  branch)  (branch  of  New  Bed- 
ford, Mass.);  Mauncey  Mills,  Inc.;  Neisler  Mills,  Inc.  (plant 
also  at  Ellenboro)  ;  Park  Yarn  Mills  Co.;  Sadie  Cotton  Mills 
Co.,  Inc.;  Slater  Pile  Fabric  Corp.;  The  Loom-Tex  Corp. 
(Kings  Mountain  Div.) 

Kinston — E.  I.  du  Pont  de  Nemours  &  Co.;  Glen  Raven 
Cotton  Mills,  Inc.   (Mill  No.  2)    (branch  of  Glen  Raven) 

Landis — Corriher  Mills  Co.;  Linn  Mills  Co.;  Tower  Weav- 
ing Corp. 

Laurel  Hill — Morgan  Cotton  Mills,  Inc. 

Laurinburg — Morgan  Cotton  Mills,  Inc.  (branch  of  Laurel 
Hill);  Scotland  Mills,  Inc.;  Waverly  Mills,  Inc. 

Lawndale — Cleveland  Mills  Co. 

Leaksville — Fieldcrest  Mills,  Inc. 

Lenoir — Caldwell  Cotton  Mills;  Hayes  Cotton  Mfg.  Co.; 
Moore  Cotton  Mill  Co. 

Lexington — Barbet  Mills,  Inc.;  Burlington  Mills  Corp. 
(Lexington  Rayon  Plant)  (branch  of  Greensboro);  Dacotah 
Cotton  Mills,  Inc.;  Erlanger  Mills,  Inc.;  Lexington  Corp. 
(subsidiary  of  Frank  Ix  &  Sons,  Englewood,  N.  J.,  and  plants 
at  Cornelius  and  Charlottesville,  Va. );  Wennonah  Cotton 
Mills  Co. 

Lincolnton — Balston  Yarn  Mills,  Inc.;  Boger  &  Crawford 
Spinning  Mill;  Carolina  Hosiery  Sales  Co.,  Inc.;  Crown  Con- 
verting Co.;  The  Duplan  Corp.  (Lincolnton  Div.)  (plants 
also  at  Winston-Salem,  Burnsville,  Cleveland,  Tenn.,  Grot- 
toes, Va.);  Globe  Mills  Co.  (Lincolnton  Plant)  (branch  of 
Mt.  Holly);  Indian  Creek  Mfg.  Co.;  Massapoag  Mills  Corp.; 
Rhodes-Rhyne  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.;  D.  E.  Rhyne  Mills,  Inc.  (Lab- 
oratory Cotton  Mills)  (plant  also  at  Southside)  ;  Rudisill- 
Smith  Co.;  Rudisill  Spinning  Mills,  Inc.;  Smith  Mills,  Inc.; 
Southern  Spinners,  Inc.;  Tait  Yarn  Co.,  Inc. 

Longhurst — Longhurst  Mill  of  Roxboro  Cotton  Mills 

Long  Island — Superior  Yarn  Mills   (branch  of  Mt.  Holly) 

Long  Shoals — Long  Shoals  Cotton  Mills 


1  and  4)    (plants 
and    Salisbury)  ; 


PAGE  88 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1952 


Lowell — Beaunit  Mills,  Inc.  (plants  also  at  Rockingham, 
Statesville  and  Childersburg)  ;  Lowell  Weavers,  Inc.;  National 
Weaving  Co.,  Inc.  (subsidiary  of  Beaunit  Mills,  Inc.,  N.  Y. 
C);  Peerless  Spinning  Corp;   United  Spinners  Corp. 

Lumberton — Caledonia  Mills,  Inc.;  Dennis  Mills,  Inc. 

Madison — Madison  Throwing  Co. 

Maiden — American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  (Union  Plant) 
(branch  of  Mt.  Holly  and  plants  also  at  Gastonia  and  Whit- 
nel);  Carolina  Mills,  Inc.  (plants  also  at  Newton  and  Hunt- 
ersville);  J.  &  J.  Spinning  Mills;  Macanal  Mills  No.  2,  Inc. 
(branch  of  Salisbury);  Maiden  Spinning  Mills,  Inc. 

Marion — Clinchfleld  Mfg.  Co.;  Conley  Knitting  Co.;  Cross 
Cotton  Mills  Co.;  Marion  Mfg.  Co. 

Marshville — Union  Asbestos  &  Rubber  Co.  (branch  of 
Chicago,  111.) 

Matthews — Longleaf  Mills,  Inc. 

Mayodan — Washington  Mills  Co.  (Mayodan  Plant) 
(branch  of  Fries,  Va. ) 

McAdenville — Pharr  Worsted  Mills,  Inc.;  Stowe  Mills,  Inc. 

Mebane — Rockfish-Mebane  Yarn  Mills,  Inc. 

Monroe — Branson  Co.;  Manetta  Mills  (Monroe  Mill) 
(branch  of  Lando,  S.  C. )  ;  Monroe  Mills  Co.;  Union  Mills 
Co.;  Williams  Banding  Co. 

Mooresville — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Cascade  Rayon 
Plant)  (branch  of  Greensboro);  Mooresville  Mills  (plant 
also  at  Statesville) 

Morganton — Duff  Looms,  Inc.;  Morganton  Weaving  Co.; 
Ross  Fabrics,  Inc.;   Speir  Textiles,  Inc. 

Mount  Airy — Allendale  Mills,  Inc.;  Mount  Airy  Knitting 
Co.;  Pine  State  Knitwear  Co.;  Quality  Mills,  Inc.;  Ridgewood 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Mount  Holly — American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  (plants 
also  at  Maiden,  Gastonia,  Whittnel);  Fibre  Products,  Inc. 
(subsidiary  of  American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.,  Mt.  Holly)  ; 
Guild  Mills  Corp.  (subsidiary  of  American  Yarn  &  Process- 
ing Co.,  Mt.  Holly);  Globe  Mills  Co.  (plant  also  at  Lincoln- 
ton);  Holly-Knit,  Inc.  (subsidiary  of  American  Yarn  & 
Processing  Co.);  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.  (Branch  of 
Homestead);  Superior  Yarn  Mills  (plants  also  at  East  Mon- 
bo  and  Long  Island) 

Mount  Pleasant — Kindley  Cotton  Mills;  Tuscarora  Cotton 
Mill 

Murphy — City  Hosiery  Mill;  The  Duffy  Silk  Co. 

Neuse — Erwin  Mills,  Inc.  (Mill  No.  7)  (branch  of  Dur- 
ham) 

Newton — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Newton  Rayon  Plant) 
(branch  of  Greensboro);  Carolina  Mills,  Inc.  (Mills  Nos.  2, 
3,  and  4)  (branch  of  Maiden);  Clyde  Fabrics;  Inc.;  Fiber 
Mfg.  Co. 

North  Wilkesboro — Grier  Mills;  Knitcraft  Corp. 

Norwood — Collins  &  Aikman  Corp.  (branch  of  Philadel- 
phia, Pa.)    (plant  also  at  Roxboro) 

Oakboro — Oakboro  Cotton  Mills  Co. 

Old  Fort- — Clearwater  Finishing  Co.;  United  Rayon  Mills 
(Old  Fort  Div. )  (subsidiary  of  United  Merchants  and  Man- 
ufacturers, Inc.,  1407  Broadway,  N.  Y.  C.)  (plant  also  at 
Elberton,  Ga. ) 

Ossipee — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Ossipee  Weaving  Plant) 
(branch  of  Greensboro) 

Oxford — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Oxford  Plant)  (branch 
of  Greensboro) 

Patterson — Valley  Mills,  Inc. 

Paw  Creek — Kendall  Mills  (Thrift  Plant)  (plants  also  at 
Charlotte,  N.  C,  Camden,  S.  C,  Newberry,  S.  C,  Edgefield, 
S.  C,  and  Pelzer,  S.  C.)  ;  Southern  Textile  Banding  Mill 

Pilot  Mountain — Armtex,  Inc.;  Pilot  Throwing,  Inc. 

Pineville — Cone  Mills  Corp.  (Pineville  Plant)  (branch  of 
Greensboro) 

Pisgah  Forest — Endless  Belt  Corp.  (In  plant  of  Ecusta 
Paper  Corp. ) 

Pittsboro — Chatham  Mills,  Inc. 

Raeford — Para  Thread  Co.  of  N.  C,  Inc.,  (subsidiary  of 
American  Wringer  Co.,  Woonsocket,  R.  I.);  Robbins  Mills 
(N.  C),  Inc.  (Raeford  Throwing  Div.  and  Raeford  Weaving 
Div.)  (branch  of  Aberdeen)  (plants  also  at  Red  Springs  and 
Robbins) 

Ragan — J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Ragan  Spinning  Co. 
Div.)  (Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.,  350  Fifth  Ave., 
N.  Y.  C.) 

Raleigh — Pilot  Mills  Co.;  American  Woolen  Co.,  Inc.  (Ral- 
eigh Mills) 

Ramseur — Columbia  Mfg.  Co.;  Ramseur  Inter-Lock  Knit- 
ting Co.;  Ramseur  Mills,  Inc.  (subsidiary  of  Guerin  Mills, 
Inc.,  Woonsocket,  R.  I.) 

Randleman — Cone  Mills  Corp.   (Randleman  Plant) 


Ranlo — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Ranlo  Plant)  (branch  oi 
Greensboro);  Rex  Mills,  Inc.;  A.  M.  Smyre  Mfg.  Co.;  Spen 
cer  Mountain  Mills. 

Red  Springs — Robbins  Mills  (N.C.)  Inc.  (Red  Springs 
Div.)  (branch  of  Aberdeen)  plants  also  at  Robbins  anc 
Raeford) 

Reidsville — Cone  Mills  Corp.  (Edna  Plant)  (branch  o: 
Greensboro) 

Rhodhiss — Pacific  Mills  (Rhodhiss  Div.) 

Rich  Square — Northampton  Mills 

Roanoke  Rapids — Patterson  Mills  Co.;  Roanoke  Milli 
Co.;  Rosemary  Mfg.  Co. 

Roaring  River — Gordon  Spinning  Co. 

Robbins — Robbins  Mills  (N.C),  Inc.  (Robbins  Div.  I 
(branch  of  Aberdeen)  (plants  also  at  Red  Springs  and  Rae| 
ford ) 

Rockingham — Aleo  Mfg.  Co.;  Beaunit  Mills,  Inc.;  Bur 
lington  Mills  Corp.  (Steele  Plant)  (branch  of  Greensboro)! 
Hannah  Pickett  Worsted  Mills  (Div.  of  M.  T.  Stevens  Southf 
ern,  Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  N.Y.C.)  ;  Ledbetter  Mfg.  Co.j 
Pee  Dee  Textile  Co.,  Inc.;  Safie  Mfg.  Co. 

Rockwell — Cannon  Mills  Co.  (Plant  No.  11)  (branch  oj 
Kannapolis,  N.  C.) 

Rocky  Mount — Rocky  Mount  Cord  Co. ;  Rocky  Mount  Fin 
ishing  Co.;  Rocky  Mount  Mills;  Rocky  Mount  Rayon  Mills! 
A.  Schottland,  Inc.;  Sidney  Blumenthal  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Cara} 
mount  Div. ) 

Roseboro — Hill  Spinning  Co. 

Roxboro — Collins  &  Aikman  Corp.  (branch  of  New  Yor] 
City)  (plant  also  at  Norwood)  ;  Roxboro  Cotton  Mills  (plan 
at  Longhurst)  ;  Somerset  Mills,  Inc. 

Rutherfordton — Excelsior  Mills   (branch  of  Union,  S.  C. 
(plants  also  at  Clemson  College,  S.  C,  and  Pendleton,  S.  C.)j 
Grace  Cotton  Mill  Co.  (subsidiary  of  Reeves  Bros.,  Inc.,  Ne\ 
York  City);  Laurel  Mills,  Inc.;   Special  Yarns  Co.,  Inc. 

Salisbury — Cannon  Mills  Co.  (Mill  No.  7)  (branch  of  Kan 
napolis);  Carlton  Yarn  Mills,  Inc.  (Cartex  Div.)  (branch  o 
Cherryville)  ;  Cone  Mills  Corp.  (Salisbury  Plant)  (branch  o 
Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro);  Macanal  Mills,  Inc.  (plan 
also  at  Maiden)  ;  McCanless  Mills,  Inc.  (plant  also  at  David 
son);  North  Carolina  Finishing  Co.  (plant  also  at  Fores 
City)  ;  Rowan  Cotton  Mills  Co. 

Sanford — Father  George  Mills,  Inc. 

Saxapahaw — Sellers  Dyeing  Co. ;  Sellers  Mfg.  Co. 

Selma — Eastern  Mfg.  Co.;  Selma  Cotton  Mills  Unit  o 
Interchemical  Corp.  (Coated  Products  Div.)  (branch  of  Nei 
York  City) 

Sevier — American  Thread  Co.  (plants  also  at  Dalton,  Ga 
Newnan,  Ga.,  Tallapoosa,  Ga.,  Clover,  S.  O,  Troutman,  N.  C 
and  Bristol,  Tenn.) 

Shelby — Belmont  Cotton  Mills  Co.;  Consolidated  Textil 
Co.,  Inc.  (Ella  Div.)  (plant  also  at  Lynchburg,  Va. );  Dove 
Mill  Co.;  Esther  Mill  Corp.;  Lily  Mills  Co.;  Ora  Mill  Co. 
Shelby  Cotton  Mills;  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Clevelan 
Cloth  Mills  Div.)  (Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.,  350  Fift 
Ave.,  N.Y.C.) 

Siler  City — Hadley  Peoples  Mfg.  Co.;  Klopman  Mills,  In< 

Smithfieid — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Smithfield  Plant 
(branch  of  Greensboro) 

Southern  Pines — Dale  Dwyer,  Inc. 

Southside — D.  E.  Rhyne  Mills,  Inc.  (Lincoln  Cotton  Mills 
(branch  of  Lincolnton) 

Spencer  Mountain — Spencer  Mountain  Mills  (see  Ranlo) 

Spindale — The  Elmore  Corp.;  Spindale  Mills,  Inc.;  Spir 
ners  Processing  Co.;  Stonecutter  Mills  Corp. 

Spray — Fieldcrest  Mills  (div.  of  Marshall  Field  &  Co.  c 
Chicago,  111.)  (plants  also  at  Leaksville,  Draper,  Fieldal 
Va.,  and  Zion,  111.);  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.  (Mill  N 
1)  (branch  of  Homestead);  Morehead  Cotton  Mills  Co 
Spray  Cotton  Mills. 

Stanley — J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Stanley  Mills  Div 
Plants  1  and  2)   (Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  N.  Y.  C.) 

Statesville — Beaunit  Mills,  Inc.  (Phoenix  Div.)  (planlj 
also  at  Lowell,  Rockingham  and  Childersburg,  Ala.);  Enj 
pire  Mfg.  Corp.;  Iredell  Knitting  Mills;  Mooresville  Mill! 
(Plant  No.  7)  (branch  of  Mooresville);  Paola  Cotton  Mill: 
Inc.;  Seminole  Mills  (branch  of  Clearwater);  Statesvillj 
Narrow  Fabric  Co.;  Statesville  Throwing  Mill 

Stoneville — Baxter,  Kelly  &  Faust,  Inc.  (branch  of  Phils 
delphia,  Pa.)  | 

Stony  Point — Killingly  Worsted  Mill;  Worth  Spinning  C< 

St.  Pauls — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Roberson  Textiles  an 
St.  Pauls  Rayon  Plants)   (branch  of  Greensboro) 

Swannanoa — Beacon  Mfg.  Co.  (plants  also  at  Westminste 
S.  C,  and  Winder,  Ga. ) 


JMMER-FALL,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  89 


Swepsonville — Virginia  Mills,  Inc. 
Tarboro — Hart  Cotton  Mills,  Inc. 

Taylorsville — Brookwood    Mills,    Inc.;    Irene    Mills,    Inc.; 
hodes-Whitener  Mills,  Inc.;  Schneider  Mills 
Thomasville — Amazon  Cotton  Mills;   Jewel   Cotton   Mills, 
c 

Troutman — American  Thread  Co.  (Troutman  Div. )  (plants 
so  at  CloArer,  S.  C,  Dalton,  Ga.,  and  Tallapoosa,  Ga.,  New- 
m,  Ga.,  Bristol,  Tenn.,  and  Sevier,  N.  C.)  ;  Pine  State  Yarn 
ills,  Inc. 

Troy — A.  Leon  Capel;  The  Smitherman  Cotton  Mills. 
Tryon — Moss-Poy  Textile  Co.;    Kilburn  Mills    (branch  of 
8W  Bedford,  Mass.)  ;  Southern  Mercerizing  Co.,  Inc.;  Tryon 
"ocessing  Co. 

Turnersburg — Rocky  Creek  Mills,  Inc. 
Tuxedo — Green  River  Mills,  Inc. 

Valdese — Burkyarns,  Inc.;  Valdese  Mfg.  Co.;  Valdese 
'eavers,  Inc. 

Vass — Angus  Mills,  Inc.;   Textron  Southern,  Inc.   (branch 
Anderson,  S.  C.) 

Wadesboro — Hornwood  Warp  Knitting  Corp. ;  Little  Cot- 
n  Mfg.  Co.;  Wade  Mfg.  Co.;  West  Knitting  Corp. 
Wake  Forest — Burlington   Mills   Corp.    (Wake   Finishing 
lant)    (branch  of  Greensboro)  ;   Royal  Cotton  Mill  Co. 
Wallace — J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.   (Carter  Fabrics  Div.) 
Div.  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.,  N.  Y.  C.) 
Warrenton — Peck  Mfg.  Co.  of  N.  C,  Inc. 
Waxhavv — Waxhaw  Mfg.  Co. 

Waynesville — Royle  &  Pilkington,  Inc.  (see  Hazelwood) 
Whitnel — American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  (Nelson  Plant) 
jranch  of  Mt.  Holly)  (plants  also  at  Gastonia  and  Maiden)  ; 
)un  Fibers,  Inc.  (subsidiary  of  American  Yarn  &  Process- 
g  Co.,  Mt.  Holly) 

Wilmington — Spofford  Mills,  Inc.;  Timme  Corp.;  Wil- 
ington  Warp  Knitting  Co. 

Wilson — Sidney  Blumenthal  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Wilson  Div.) 
jranch  of  Rocky  Mount) 

Winston-Salem — Arista  Mills  Co.;  Carolina  Insulating 
arn  Co.;  Carolina  Narrow  Fabric  Co.;  The  Duplan  Corp. 
jranch  of  Hazelton,  Pa.)  (plants  also  at  Burnsville,  Lin- 
)lnton,  Cleveland,  Tenn.,  and  Grottoes,  Va.);  Hanes  Dye 
Finishing  Co.;  P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting  Co.;  Indera  Mills 
o. ;  Washington  Mills  Co. 
Worthville — Leward  Cotton  Mills,  Inc. 


RWIN  MILLS  GROUP  IN  PICTURE 

48  YEARS  OLD;  THREE  OF  DUKES 

An  intensely  interesting  old  group  picture  (below)  taken 
sarly  50  years  ago  and  showing  14  prominent  individuals 
mnected  in  various  ways  with  the  early  development  of  the 
rwin  Cotton  Mills,  now  Ervvin  Mills,  Inc.,  has  been  made 
mailable  by  Erwin  Mill  officials. 

This  picture  is  intriguing  in  part  because  it  shows  Washing- 
>n  Duke  and  his  two  sons,  Benjamin  N.  Duke  and  James  B. 
uke,  whose  chief  fame  was  acquired  through  tobacco  manu- 


facturing. However,  they  were  the  founders  and  the  principal 
owners  of  Erwin  Mills.  The  picture  was  made  at  Duke,  now 
Erwin.  Information  indicates  that  it  was  taken  in  the  summer 
of  1904  when  the  Erwin  Mill  at  Duke  had  been  completed  and 
was  about  ready  to  start  operation  and  not  in  the  fall  of  1902 
as  a  notation  on  the  back  of  the  picture  seemed  to  indicate.  At 
that  time  the  Cape  Fear  and  Northern  Railroad  Co.  line — 
now  Durham  and  Southern — extended  from  Apex  to  Angier 
only.  W.  A.  Erwin,  then  secretary-treasurer  and  general 
manager  of  the  Erwin  Mills,  wanted  the  line  extended  to  Duke 
in  order  to  serve  the  new  mill,  and  later  Captain  Lemon,  shown 
in  the  picture,  had  charge  of  the  construction  of  this  extension. 
Others  shown  in  the  picture  were  interested  either  in  the  mill, 
the  railroad  or  were  associated  with  the  Duke  interests  in 
various  ways. 

This  group  made  the  trip  to  Duke  to  inspect  the  mill  and 
also  to  inspect  the  5,000  acres  of  very  beautiful  farm  and 
timber  land  owned  by  the  mill  company.  Proposal  for  the 
extension  of  this  railroad  from  Angier  to  Duke  was  probably 
also  a  matter  considered  on  the  trip. 

At  the  time  the  Erwin  Cotton  Mills  was  founded  in  1892  by 
J.  B.  Duke  and  associates  for  the  purpose  of  making  tobacco 
cloth  for  smoking  tobacco  bags,  the  officers  were  B.  N.  Duke, 
president;  George  W.  Watts,  vice-president;  W.  A.  Erwin, 
secretary-treasurer  and  general  manager,  and  W.  W.  Fuller, 
counselor.  The  directors  were  Washington  Duke,  George  W. 
Watts,  W.  A.  Erwin  and  B.  N.  Duke.  They  were  also  probably 
the  officers  at  the  time  the  picture  was  made. 

Included  in  the  picture,  seated  left  to  right,  are  Benjamin  N. 
Duke;  Washington  Duke;  James  B.  Duke;  Thomas  Walker,  a 
tobacco  buyer  for  the  Duke  interests;  Colonel  Carrington,  to- 
bacco buyer  for  the  Dukes  (one  list  gave  his  name  as  Thomas 
P.  Moore);  James  S.  Cobb,  leaf  tobacco  dealer,  and  Colonel  J. 
C.  Angier,  manager  of  the  present  Durham  and  Southern 
Railroad  and  of  the  Cary  Lumber  Co.,  who  married  a  distant 
cousin  of  B.  N.  Duke  and  whose  sister  married  B.  N.  Duke. 

Second  row,  left  to  right:  Dr.  A.  G.  Carr,  brother  of  the  late 
General  Julian  S.  Carr  and  father  of  William  F.  Carr,  for  many 
years  mayor  of  Durham,  who  accompanied  Washington  Duke 
as  a  personal  physician;  W.  A.  Erwin,  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager  of  the  mill;  J.  E.  Stagg,  private  secretary  to 
B.  N.  Duke,  who  married  a  niece  of  Washington  Duke;  Frank 
P.  Tate,  civil  engineer  in  charge  of  construction  of  the  mill 
at  Duke;  E.  S.  Yarbrough,  assistant  to  Mr.  Tate;  Captain 
Lemon,  C.E.,  of  the  present  Durham  and  Southern  Railroad, 
who  was  in  charge  of  construction  of  the  extension  from  Angier 
to  Duke;  Frank  L.  Fuller,  one  of  the  attorneys  for  the  Duke 
interests. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  E.  S.  Yarbrough,  youngest 
looking  man  in  the  group,  is  the  only  member  surviving  today. 
Mr.  Yarbrough  furnished  much  of  the  information  included 
in  this  article  and  relates  many  human  interest  stories  con- 
nected with  individuals  in  the  picture  who  took  the  trip  to 
Duke.  Mr.  Frank  L.  Fuller,  84,  died  September  10,  1952,  at 
his  home  in  New  York  City,  after  a  short  illness.  He  was  at- 
torney for  Liggett  &  Myers  Tobacco  Co.  for  30  years,  1911  until 
1941,  when  he  retired. 


Page  90 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  195' 


Huge  Post-war  Growth  of  N.  C.  Textiles;  Many  New  Plant! 

By  Paul  Kelly,  Head,  Division  of  Commerce  and  Industry 
N.  C.  State  Dept.  of  Conservation  &  Development 


In  the  period  from  the  close  of  World  War  II 
until  late  1951,  North  Carolina's  great  textile  indus- 
try has  enjoyed  a  period  of  unprecedented  growth. 
In  1951,  the  Blue  Book  of  Southern  Progress  showed 
1,047  textile  plants  in  North  Carolina  (13  percent 
of  all  plants),  230,000  workers  (54  percent  of  all 
workers),  with  sales  amounting  to  $2,688,000,000, 
or  44  percent  of  all  sales  of  manufactured  products 
in  North  Carolina. 

In  1939,  there  were  only  695  plants,  181,246  work- 
ers and  value  of  products  amounted  to  $549,741,388, 
which  was  39  percent  of  total  value  of  products.  The 
latest  figures  compiled  by  the  North  Carolina  De- 
partment of  Labor  show  240,000  persons,  or  2  out 
of  every  3  of  our  industrial  workers,  engaged  in  the 
manufacture  of  textiles. 

This  great  North  Carolina  industry,  however,  does 
not  live  to  itself  alone.  Between  it  and  scores  of 
other  industries  there  exists  an  interdependence  of 
the  utmost  importance  in  keeping  the  State  economy 
on  an  even  keel.  The  textile  industry  buys  and  sells 
to  and  from  virtually  every  other  major  industry  in 
the  State. 

Government  figures  show,  in  a  single  postwar  year, 
on  a  national  scale,  the  textile  industry  paid  out 
$2,079,000,000  in  purchase  of  agricultural  supplies, 
bought  $800,000,000  worth  of  chemicals  and  $438,- 
000,000  worth  of  goods  from  miscellaneous  small 
industries.  The  industry  spent  millions  more  for 
fuel  and  energy  and  transportation  and  paid  out  still 
more  millions  in  taxes  and  numerous  other  payments, 
of  which  North  Carolina  has  received  her  share. 
What  benefits  textiles  benefits  American  business 
generally. 

Until  comparatively  recent  years,  the  primary  tex- 
tile development  in  the  State  was  cotton  spinning, 
largely  the  coarser  yarns,  with  only  a  limited  amount 
of  weaving  and  little  dyeing  and  finishing.  Today, 
we  are  witnessing  the  almost  unbelievable  growth  of 
the  manufacture  of  man-made  fibers — synthetics — 
in  our  State. 

DuPont  is  erecting  a  $30  million  plant,  the  first 
of  its  kind  in  the  world,  near  Kinston,  to  produce 
Dacron.  Its  impact  is  already  felt  in  Eastern  Caro- 
lina towns.  Allied  industries  are  now  under  con- 
sideration in  several  near-by  towns  to  handle  the 
product  from  the  Dacron  plant  when  operation  be- 
gins in  1953. 

Dacron — a  condensation  polymer — is  classified  as 
one  of  the  miracle  textiles  and  takes  its  place  along- 
side Nylon  and  Orion.  When  the  plant  is  completed, 
it  is  estimated  that  the  payroll  will  be  around  $4,000,- 
000  a  year  and  employ  1400  persons.  It  will  have  an 
annual  capacity  of  10  million  pounds  of  continuous 
filament  yarn  and  25  million  pounds  of  staple  and 
tow. 

Carbon  and  Carbide  Chemicals  Corporation,  a  di- 
vision of  Union  Carbide  and  Carbon  Company,  ex- 
pects to  start  soon  on  a  $30  million  plant  at  Spray — 
the  home  of  the  discovery  of  calcium  carbide — to 
produce  Dynel  staple,  a  synthetic  fiber,  at  the  rate 
of  20  million  pounds  per  year.     It  is  expected  that 


whicl 
3  du  I 
1,0C 


employment  will  be  between  300  and  500  person: 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  more  than  $1  million. 

The  new  fiber,  Dynel,  is  now  being  used  in  blanl 
ets,  men's  socks,  apparel  blends,  doll  wigs,  industri; 
uniforms,  and  in  other  applications  where  the  cha 
acteristics  of  the  material  are  far  superior  to  thos 
of  wool. 

J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.  has  recently  completed  a  ne 
synthetics  weaving  mill  at  Wallace,  costing  $2  mi 
lion,  which  will  employ  around  300  persons  with  a 
estimated  weekly  payroll  of  over  $20,000. 

Duffy  Silk  Co.  has  erected  a  $400,000  nylon  throv 
ing  plant  at  Murphy,  which  will  employ  about  IE 
people.  In  addition  to  the  plant  construction,  tr 
equipment  represents  an  investment  of  several  hui 
dred  thousand  dollars  more.  Production  is  just  ge 
ting  underway  in  this  plant. 

American  Thread  Co.  is  constructing  a  new  mult 
million  dollar  plant  at  Sevier,  near  Marion,  whi 
is  scheduled  to  begin  operation  on  a  small  scale 
ing  the  year.  This  plant  will  employ  800  to 
persons  when  it  reaches  full  capacity.  Operatior 
at  this  plant  will  be  set  up  in  two  divisions — the  fir 
will  involve  the  finishing  of  weaving  and  knittir 
yarns,  while  the  second  will  include  the  finishing  < 
such  domestic  products  as  small  spools,  skeins  ar 
balls  of  thread.  Plans  call  for  three  main  un 
buildings,  one  of  which  is  to  have  around  300, 0( 
sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  The  entire  plant  will  have  ov< 
600,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  when  completed. 

Robbins  Mills  (N.  C),  Inc.,  has  recently  complete 
a  $4  million  synthetic  processing  plant  at  Robbii 
and  a  $12  million  spun  rayon  plant  in  Raeford.  Tl 
Raeford  plant  will  employ  around  900  persons.  (St 
pictures,  pages  105-107). 

Klopman  Mills,  Inc.,  synthetic  weavers,  recent 
began  production  in  their  new  Siler  City  plant  whi< 
contains  150,000  sq.  ft.  and  employs  400  persons  wii 
a  weekly  payroll  of  around  $25,000.  The  Ashebo: 
plant,  which  employs  1,000  people,  is  still  beir 
expanded.  ! 

Frank  Ix  and  Sons  are  operating  a  $1  millio 
broad-woven  fabric  mill  in  Lexington,  which  wj| 
completed  in  1950.  They  employ  around  250  wor 
ers. 

Mount  Hope  Finishing  Co.  has  recently  establish 
a  plant  at  Butner  which  is  engaged  in  job  finishii 
of  synthetic  yarn  fabrics  and  expects  to  employ  mo 
than  300  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  of  aroui 
$750,000.  Mount  Hope  has  also  purchased  19  acr 
of  land  adjoining  its  present  location. 

Burlington  Mills  Corp.,  World's  largest  fabricato 
of  man-made  fibers,  has  recently  started  constru 
tion  on  an  addition  that  will  add  10,000  sq.  ft. 
floor  space  to  its  Cetwiok  plant  in  Asheboro.  Tr 
plant  was  purchased  by  Burlington  Mills  in  1939  ai 
has  been  expanded  jthree  times  since  then.  The  pla 
processes  nylon  yarn  and  employs  approximately  m 
persons.  j 

The  Reidsville  Throwing  Plant  of  Burlington  Mi! 
is  being  converted  into  a  regional  warehousing  aii 
shipping  operation. 


Summer-fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  91 


The  Oxford  Spinning  Plant  of  Burlington  Mills 
has  recently  been  expanded  to  approximately  double 
its  size. 

In  1950,  Burlington  Mills  bought  a  plant  site  at 
Lillington  for  the  erection  of  a  large  finishing  plant 
which  will  be  a  part  of  the  Company's  future  expan- 
sion program.  In  1951,  Burlington  Mills  also  bought 
a  site  at  Sanford  for  the  erection  of  a  synthetic  weav- 
ing plant,  which  will  also  be  a  part  of  their  future 
expansion  program. 

Belding  Hemingway  Co.,  Inc.,  completed  its  $2 
million  Hendersonville  Belding  Corticelli  plant  in  late 
'51.  This  is  the  only  plant  in  the  Nation  devoted  ex- 
clusively to  the  production  of  Monocord  thread,  a 
new  development  in  the  field  of  synthetics.  The 
product  has  been  described  as  the  outstanding  new 
development  in  the  manufacture  of  sewing  thread. 
The  plant  is  on  a  15-acre  site,  has  a  floor  space  of 
approximately  50,000  sq.  ft.  and  expects  to  employ 
400  persons. 

Kilburn  Mills  is  completing  a  $2  million  plant  at 
Tryon.  This  is  a  finishing  establishment  for  sewing 
threads  for  industrial  purposes  and  supplying  sew- 
ing thread  to  other  mills.  About  150  persons  will  be 
employed.  This  modern  building  has  60,000  sq.  ft. 
of  floor  space  and  is  one  of  the  few  buildings  of  its 
kind  to  be  erected  in  recent  years  entirely  without 
the  use  of  steel  for  frame  work. 

The  Oscar  Heineman  Corp.  has  recently  announc- 
ed that  it  will  have  an  immediate  investment  of  ap- 
proximately $300,000  in  equipment  in  the  40,000  sq. 
ft.  plant  they  have  just  purchased  in  Concord  from 
Hoover  Hosiery  Company.  They  will  employ  125 
persons  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately 
$400,000.  This  is  a  nylon  throwing  plant  for  the 
textile  industry. 

The  Duplan  Corporation  has  started  production  in 
its  new  million  dollar  rayon  and  nylon  manufacturing 
plant  at  Burnsville  and  plans  to  employ  up  to  500 
persons. 

Cranston  Print  Works,  textile  finishers  and  dyers, 
is  in  full  operation  in  its  $3,500,000  plant  in  Fletcher, 
which  was  started  in  1948.  This  concern  employs 
approximately  400  persons. 

The  woolen  and  worsted  industry  is  also  following 
the  trend  of  Southern  plant  location.  North  Caro- 
lina is  exceedingly  proud  of  the  mills  which  have 
located  within  its  boundaries. 

The  $2  million  Hatch  Mill,  owned  by  Deering-Mil- 
liken,  at  Columbus,  has  recently  begun  operation. 
This  plant  manufactures  raw  stock  dyed  woolens, 
primarily  for  dress  and  sportswear  trades.  Around 
250  persons  are  employed.    (See  picture,  page  129.) 

Wyandotte  Worsted  Mills  have  purchased  a  site  at 
Lakeview,  Moore  County,  and  plan  to  erect  a  modern 

Duplan  Corp.,  new  and  modern  million  dollar  plant  at  Burns- 
ville, manufacturing  rayon  and  nylon  textiles. 


plant  soon  which  will  employ  between  400  and  500 
persons.  \ 

Woonsocket  Falls  Mills  at  Wilmington  is  in  opera- 
tion now  in  its  $3,500,000  plant,  employing  approxi- 
mately 700  persons.  They  manufacture  pile  fabrics 
of  various  types. 

Greenville  Mills,  Inc.,  a  subsidiary  of  Artloom 
Carpet  Co.,  Inc.,  woolen  yarn  mill  of  Greenville,  is 
in  full  production,  including  wool  blending,  washing, 
dyeing,  spinning  and  twisting,  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll of  between  $350,000  and  $400,000  and  employing 
around  150  persons. 

Ramseur  Worsted  Mills,  Inc.,  a  subsidiary  of  Gue- 
rin  Mills,  has  recently  completed  the  construction  of 
a  worsted  spinning  mill  in  Ramseur. 

American  Woolen  Co.  is  in  production  in  Raleigh 
in  the  old  Premier  Worsted  plant.  With  an  estimat- 
ed plant  investment  of  $1,750,000  and  around  250 
employees  engaged  in  making  worsted  cloth,  it  is 
expected  that  employment  will  increase  steadily, 
probably  to  900. 

The  growing  importance  of  North  Carolina  as  a 
center  of  the  textile  industry  has  been  re-emphasized 
recently  in  the  announcements  of  the  Duplan  Cor- 
poration and  the  Celanese  Corporation  that  they  are 
moving  their  offices  and  operations  centers  to  Char- 
lotte. 

Duplan's  office  controls  the  operations  of  nine 
weaving  and  throwing  plants  in  the  United  States 
and  acts  in  an  advisory  capacity  to  the  Company's 
two  plants  in  Canada.  No  estimate  has  been  given 
as  yet  to  the  amount  of  money  to  be  invested  in  the 
new  headquarters.  The  move  is  being  made  because 
Charlotte  offers  an  ideal  center  for  handling  the 
operations  of  the  Company's  various  plants. 

Construction  has  already  begun  on  the  $5  million 
Celanese  headquarters  building,  which  will  have 
250,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  Around  700  persons 
will  be  employed  in  these  offices,  which,  when  com- 
pleted in  1954  will  compose  the  largest  office  build- 
ing in  North  Carolina.  Here  will  be  concentrated 
the  engineering,  research,  quality  control  and  other 
central  office  functions  of  this  large  synthetic  fiber 
manufacturer. 

With  the  constant  increase  of  textile  plants  in 
North  Carolina  comes  the  demand  for  trained  tech- 
nologists and  other  specialized  personnel.  The 
School  of  Textiles  at  North  Carolina  State  College, 
one  of  the  foremost  textile  schools  in  the  world,  is 
constantly  adding  new  courses  to  its  curriculum  in 
order  to  keep  its  students  trained  in  the  newest 
textile  developments. 

Plans  have  been  announced  for  setting  up  a  train- 
ing program  for  loom  fixers  at  Erwin  and  Coolee- 
mee  through  the  assistance  of  Erwin  Mills,  Inc.  by 
the  State  Department  of  Public  Instruction.     The 


PAGE  92 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1952 


im 


Recently  erected  $3,500,000  plant  of  Woonsocket  Falls  Mills  at 

Wilmington,  employing  about  700  workers  and  making 

varied  types  of  pile  fabrics. 

first  class  has  been  completed  in  the  Durham  school, 
which  was  set  up  by  them. 

Gaston  County  opened  its  Gaston  Technical  In- 
stitute in  Gastonia  this  fall  to  train  maintenance 
men  in  the  mechanics  of  all  phases  of  textile  ma- 
chinery and  equipment. 

The  North  Carolina  Vocational  Textile  School, 
built  in  1943,  near  Belmont,  is  the  only  institution 
of  its  kind  in  the  United  States,  offering  courses  in 
every  phase  of  textile  work  from  the  cleaning  of 
cotton  to  the  tailoring  of  suits.  Students  receive 
diplomas  at  the  end  of  a  two-year  course.     Class 


..:-.""..... 


:ifl!i^fil!!!t^ 


hours  are  arranged  so  that  persons  working  in 
near-by  mills  can  attend  the  school  without  inter- 
rupting their  employment  schedule. 

The  New  York  Alumni  group  of  the  School  of 
Textiles  at  State  College  has  recently  recommended 
that  several  courses  in  textile  marketing  and  mer- 
chandizing be  established  in  the  School  of  Textiles, 
This  group  expressed  the  belief  that  these  courses 
would  be  beneficial  to  the  people  of  the  State,  inas 
much  as  North  Carolina  has  more  mills  than  any 
other  State  and  that  44  percent  of  the  State's  indus- 
trial income  is  derived  from  the  textile  industry. 

North  Carolina  may  well  be  proud  of  its  leading; 
industry ! ! 


Rocky  Mount  Oldest  Continuing  Mill,  One  Family,  One  Site 


Rocky  Mount  Mills,  Rocky  Mount,  is  possibly  the  oldest 
mill  organization  in  North  Carolina.  Certainly  it  is  the  oldest 
mill  that  has  operated  continuously  on  the  same  site  except 
for  periods  for  rebuilding  the  burned  plant  and  continuously 
operated  by  one  family — the  Battles.  The  mill  was  established 
in  1818  at  the  Falls  of  Tar  River  where  a  granite  ledge  formed 
a  natural  dam  which  supplied  water  power  for  the  plant  and 
is  now  operated  under  the  direction  of  the  fifth  generation  of 
Battles. 

The  founders  were  Joel  Battle,  Peter  Evans  and  Henry 
Donaldson.  The  original  building,  erected  in  1818  on  a  solid 
rock  foundation,  was  four  stories  high  although  only  30  feet 
wide  by  76  feet  long.  By  1825  Joel  Battle  had  become  the  sole 
owner  and  operated  the  mill  until  his  death  in  1829.  During 
all  this  period  and  until  1852  the  mill  was  operated  by  slave 
labor  and  was  strictly  a  community  enterprise.  Local  growers 
brought  the  raw  cotton  and  exchanged  it  for  yarn  and  cloth. 
Yarns  also  were  exchanged  for  meat,  grain  and  other  farm 
products. 

When  Joel  Battle  died,  his  estate  was  divided  among  his 
children  and  the  mill  was  operated  as  Battle  &  Bros,  under  the 
direction  of  the  oldest  son,  William  H.  Battle,  who  later  became 
a  Justice  of  the  North  Carolina  Supreme  Court.  Another  of 
Joel's  sons,  Benjamin  G.  Battle,  built  as  a  residence  in  1835, 
the  present  main  office.  Joel's  sons  operated  the  mill  until 
1847  when  it  was  sold  to  a  cousin,  James  S.  Battle,  and  his  son, 
William  S.  Battle.  In  this  period  the  tracks  of  the  Wilmington 
&  Weldon  Railroad  (now  Atlantic  Coast  Line)  were  laid  within 
a  mile  of  the  mill.  Then  it  passed  out  of  its  earlier  classifica- 
tion as  purely  a  local  enterprise.  In  1857  when  James  S.  Battle 
died,  the  mill  passed  to  the  third  generation.  William  S. 
Battle  took  over  and  with  his  son,  James  S.  Battle,  operated 
the  plant  as  Battle  &  Sons  until  1878. 

Soon  after  the  outbreak  of  the  Civil  War,  the  mill  engaged 
in  producing  cloth  for  the  Confederate  Government.  The  plant 
thus  became  a  natural  target  and  on  July  20,  1863,  a  Union 
Cavalry  burned  it  down.  The  superintendent  at  that  time,  a 
northerner  and  a  Mason,  persuaded  the  Cavalry  officer  to 
spare  the  residence,  now  the  plant's  main  office.  The  mill  was 
rebuilt  in  1865  but  was  burned  again  by  an  incendiary  on 
November  10,  1869.  It  was  rebuilt  at  once.  The  reconstruction 
period  proved  too  strenuous  for  private  ownership  and  in  1878 
a  charter  of  incorporation  was  secured  and  a  new  organization 
formed.  New  capital,  expected  in  the  reorganization,  did  not 
materialize  sufficiently  and  on  September  2,  1883,  William  S. 
Battle  assigned  the  stock  to  his  trustees,  thus  losing  control. 

The  company  was  reorganized  in  1885  and  the  trustees  elect- 
ed as  secretary  and  financial  head  of  the  company  Thomas  H. 
Battle,  great-grandson  of  the  founder.  At  that  time  James 
H.  Ruffin  was  elected  superintendent  continuing  as  such  until 
he  retired  in  1898.     Then  Thomas  H.  Battle  took  his  place  as 


superintendent.  Under  his  direction  the  mill  expanded  anc 
improving  working  conditions.  Among  industrial  firsts  Rockj 
Mount  Mills  established  automatic  sprinklers  and  electric  lights 
in  1889;  automatic  humidifiers  in  1899;  steam  turbines  in  1911; 
long  draft  roving  and  spinning  machines  in  1932. 

Thomas  H.  Battle  continued  as  head  of  the  mill  until  h< 
retired  in  1933  when  his  son,  Hyman  L.  Battle,  fifth  generation 
assumed  charge.  Present  officers  are  Paul  C.  Collins,  presi 
dent;  Kemp  D.  Battle,  vice-president;  Hyman  L.  Battle,  treas 
urer  and  manager;  Ronald  E.  Stevens,  assistant  treasurer: 
W.  J.  Laughridge,  general  superintendent,  and  Welford  Price 
secretary. 

Rocky  Mount  Mills  has  been  developed  into  a  very  efficien 
cotton  spinning  mill  and  has  established  an  enviable  recon 
in  employee  relations  with  John  M.  Scott,  Jr.,  as  personne 
director.  The  plant  operates  normally  on  three  eight-hou; 
shifts,  granting  its  employees  six  recognized  holidays  and  om 
week  of  vacation  with  pay.  It  employs  about  625  workers  iij 
normal  operations. 

The  modern  Rocky  Mount  Mills  now  operates  about  39,00<i 
spindles    producing    carded    cotton    yarns    ranging    from    4:1 
through  20s  which  go  into  a  variety  of  products.    Among  thes<{ 
are  automobile  upholstery,  lace  curtains,  tablecloths,  electricaj  J 
insulation  and  tape  and  webbing  of  any  kinds.     Its  only  fin[ 
ished  product  is  Riverside  tobacco  twine. 

So,  with  its  134  years  of  operation  on  one  site  and  largel;] 
by  one  family,  the  Rocky  Mount  Mills  is  now  one  of  the  splendi<| 
and  larger  cotton  spinning  plants  in  North  Carolina. 


N.  C.  TEXTILE  FOUNDATION  ADDED 
OVER  $1,000,000   FOR  TEACH  I  Ni 

Formation  of  the  Nqrth  Carolina  Textile  Foundation  ii 
December,  1942,  provided  "the  greatest  stimulus  for  textil 
education  in  the  United  States",  Dean  Malcolm  E.  Campbell 
of  the  Textile  School  of  North  Carolina  State  College,  told  : 
meeting  of  State  Coljege's  Development  Council  October  1. 

Dean  Campbell  said  the  establishment  of  the  Textile  Four 
dation  was  a  boon  to  textile  education,  not  only  in  the  Unitei 
States,  but  in  qther  countries  of  the  world. 

Since  its  creation,  the  Foundation  has  received  contribu 
tions  in  excess  of  $1,000,000.  The  Textile  Foundation  has  use< 
income  from  the  contributions  to  supplement  the  State  salar; 
scale  in  retaining  and  attracting  top-ranking  authorities  fo 
research  and  teaching  duties  in  the  State  College  School  o 
Textiles,  Dean  Campbell  said. 


Summer-fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  93 


COTTON  TEXTILES,  LONG  IMPORTANT,  JOINED  BY  MAN-MADE  FIBERS: 

Cannon  Mills,  Kannapolis,  World's  Largest  Towel  Producer 


Cannon  Mills  Co.,  Kannapolis,  largest  towel  manu- 
facturer in  the  world  and  largest  employer  of  labor 
in  North  Carolina,  lays  claims  to  numbers  of  unique 
features.  Among  them  the  town  of  Kannapolis  is 
the  largest  unincorporated  town  in  the  world  and 
is  located  on  property  owned  by  the  mill.  Kannapolis 
(Greek  for  "loom  city")  boasts  of  one  of  the  finest 
school  systems  in  the  State,  contains  an  attractive 
ake  near  its  center  and  contains  all  the  modern 
conveniences  of  a  city  without  the  imposition  of  a 
city  tax. 

North  Carolina's  largest  industry  had  its  begin- 
ling  in  1887  when  James  W.  Cannon  started  a  small 
3lant  in  Concord  producing  cotton  yarns.  A  short 
;ime  afterwards  he  also  began  weaving  a  grade  of 
cloth  known  as  Cannon  cloth  which  became  a  house- 
lold  word  and  was  used  extensively  throughout  the 
South  in  making  women's  and  children's  clothing. 
Although  Cannon  cloth  was  extensively  used,  the 
leld  was  limited  and  Mr.  Cannon  worked  out  an  idea 
ind  began  the  production  of  cotton  hand  towels  in 
L898.  This  was  the  first  towel  plant  in  the  South 
ind  the  demand  grew  for  this  popular  household 
irticle  until  the  Cannon  towel  took  its  place  along 
side  the  Cannon  cloth  in  popularity. 

Then  in  1905  Mr.  Cannon  bought  a  600  acre  tract 
)f  land  seven  miles  north  of  his  original  plant  at 
Concord  in  the  northern  end  of  Cabarrus  County  and 
lear  the  Rowan  County  line.  Here  Mr.  Cannon  set 
ibout  building  the  first  unit  of  widespread  Cannon 
Mills  in  Kannapolis.  While  the  mill  was  being  con- 
structed, he  also  built  several  comfortable  homes  to 
)e  used  by  employees  when  the  mill  was  completed. 
Within  a  few  months,  the  first  unit  of  the  world's 
argest  towel  mill  was  in  operation  and  the  town  of 
kannapolis  was  started.  Many  of  the  workers  em- 
ployed in  the  construction  of  the  mill  remained  after 

Principal  plants  of  Cannon  Mills   Co.  at  Kannapolis,   largest 

employer  of  labor  in  North  Carolina  with  part  of  the 

model  village  in  front  and  rural  homes  in  rear. 


it  was  completed  to  work  in  it.  In  his  relations  with 
his  employees  Mr.  Cannon  believed  that  good  treat- 
ment resulted  in  good  products.  He  gave  sites  and 
frequently  contributed  funds  for  the  erection  of 
school  and  church  buildings  needed  in  the  commun- 
ity. He  also  built  and  gave  to  the  community  a 
YMCA  building  now  known  as  Cannon  Memorial 
which  now  has  a  membership  of  10,000,  the  largest 
in  the  South  and  one  of  the  largest  in  the  nation. 

James  W.  Cannon  was  a  firm  believer  in  advertis- 
ing and  felt  that  all  Cannon  goods  should  bear  the 
Cannon  name  so  his  products  would  become  well- 
known  and  demanded  by  the  consumers.  Immediate- 
ly after  World  War  I  Mr.  Cannon  planned  one  of  the 
most  extensive  programs  of  advertising,  merchan- 
dising and  research  that  had  ever  been  undertaken 
in  the  South.  Before  this  program  was  well  under- 
way, Mr.  Cannon  died  in  1921. 

Charles  A.  Cannon,  his  son,  then  only  19  years  of 
age,  became  head  of  the  organization  and  on  his 
shoulders  was  placed  the  responsibility  of  carrying 
out  the  program  his  father  had  planned.  This  he 
did  with  such  force  and  effectiveness  that  it  brought 
results  far  beyond  those  his  father  had  ever  dreamed 
of.  Young  Charles  Cannon  developed  a  method  of 
sewing  Cannon  labels  on  every  towel  produced,  thus 
making  the  Cannon  name  and  Cannon  products 
known  throughout  the  nation.  It  was  young  Charles 
Cannon  who  first  developed  towel  styling  and  to  meet 
the  modern  tendencies  for  brighter  homes,  Mr.  Can- 
non developed  towels  in  pastel  shades.  In  1928  he 
introduced  "towel  ensembles" ;  that  is,  matching  sets, 
including  bath  and  face  towels,  bath  mats  and  wash 
cloths,  and  in  the  next  year  he  held  the  first  towel 
style  show  ever  conducted.  In  1934  Mr.  Cannon 
startled  the  retail  trade  as  well  as  housekeepers  by 
introducing  Cannon  sheets  wrapped  in  cellophane  to 
keep  them  laundry  fresh,  and  since  that  time  Cannon 
sheets  have  been  taking  their  place  along  side  the 
already  widely  accepted  Cannon  towels. 

In  all  Cannon  products  may  be 
found  the  highest  grade  of  cotton 
with  the  longest  fibers.  In  each 
step  from  cotton  to  cloth  the  pro- 
cesses are  carried  on  by  highly 
trained  workers  and  through  the 
most  modern  machinery.  Simply 
stated  these  processes  include 
the  operations  of  cotton  picking, 
carding,  drawing,  roving,  spin- 
ning, weaving,  bleaching,  cut- 
ting and  hemming,  inspecting, 
folding,  packing,  wrapping  and 
shipping.  In  the  production  of 
towels  a  special  type  of  weaving 
is  followed  to  produce  the  desir- 
ed thickness  and  fluff  for  the 
water  thirsty  fabrics. 

In  the  production  of  percale 
sheets  the  cotton  fiber  is  blended 
600  times  and  processed  through 
combers  to  eliminate  short  fibers 


PAGE  94 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


and  impurities.  Weaving  is  done  on  wide  looms  and 
after  thorough  inspection  and  bleaching,  the  fabric  is 
torn  for  proper  lengths.  The  sheets  are  then  carried 
through  the  hemming  and  labeling  process,  then 
ironed,  folded  and  wrapped  for  packing  and  ship- 
ping. In  addition  to  Cannon  towels  and  Cannon 
sheets,  both  percale  and  muslin,  Cannon  blankets 
and  Cannon  stockings  have  been  added  to  the  other 
popular  Cannon  products. 

Cannon  Mills  Co.  seems  just  as  interested  in  pro- 
viding modern  conveniences  and  attractive  surround- 
ings for  its  employees  as  it  is  in  producing  quality 
products.  The  corporation  in  1937  launched  a  vast 
construction  program  in  the  business  district  of  Kan- 
napolis  which  is  still  in  progress.  Millions  of  dollars 
are  being  spent  in  producing  a  town  in  which  all 
buildings  in  the  business  district  follow  one  general 
architectural  theme  in  Williamsburg  Colonial.  Sev- 
eral of  its  streets  are  130  feet  wide,  allowing  parking 
oh  both  sides  and  in  the  center  area.  Homes  for 
members  of  the  Cannon  industrial  family  are  en- 
tirely modern,  convenient  and  attractive. 

The  public  school  system  of  Kannapolis,  operated 
by  a  school  board,  is  one  of  the  most  progressing  in 
the  entire  State.  Sites  for  many  of  the  buildings 
were  donated  by  the  Cannon  Mills  Co.  and  heavy  con- 
tributions have  been  made  by  Mr.  Cannon  for  build- 
ings, supplementary  salaries  and  other  educational 
requirements.  In  addition  to  the  J.  W.  Cannon  High 
School,  the  system  next  year  will  have  what  will  be 
known  as  the  A.  L.  Brown  High  School  and  seven 
elementary  schools  for  white  children  in  addition  to 
the  George  W.  Carver  High  and  Elementary  School 
for  Negro  children.  This  fall  the  system  will  have 
three  principals,  one  supervisor,  40  high  school  teach- 
ers and  112  elementary  teachers.  Enrollment  last 
year  was  3,984  elementary  students,  1,415  high  school 
students. 

The  Cabarrus  County  General  Hospital,  highly 
endowed  by  members  of  the  Cannon  family,  estab- 
lished a  nursing  school  in  1942  and  new  school  quar- 
ters were  completed  in  1946  including  dormitories, 
classrooms,  laboratory  and  other  hospital  require- 
ments. This  is  one  of  the  few  hospitals  in  North 
Carolina  which  awards  the  BS  degree  in  nursing. 
As  noted  the  Cannon  Memorial  YMCA  building, 
erected  by  James  W.  Cannon  and  with  10,000  mem- 


One  large  weave  room  of  Cannon  Mills  Go.  in  which  extra 
wide  sheeting  is  woven. 


Yarn  is  wound  in  strands  running  parallel  on  large  cylinders 
known  as  warp  beam  at  Cannon  Mills  Co. 

bers  now,  is  the  home  of  50  organized  clubs.  Its 
features  include  a  gymnasium,  tennis  courts,  bowling 
alleys,  club  rooms,  health  club,  library,  swimming 
pool,  several  kitchens,  snack  bar,  boys'  department, 
physical  department,  and  women's  department. 
Several  playgrounds  in  the  community  are  supervis- 
ed by  YMCA  personnel.  The  Mary  Elian  Hall,  built 
during  World  War  I  as  a  home  for  women  workers, 
was  named  in  honor  of  the  wife  of  the  fdtmder  of 
the  Cannon  Mills  Co. 

Charles  A.  Cannon  is  very  proud  of  the  many  years 
of  service  of  many  employees  in  the  organization. 
Each  year  he  gives  a  loyalty  banquet  honoring  em- 
ployees who  have  been  with  the  Cannon  Mills  for  as 
long  as  25  years.  Approximately  10%  of  the  19,000 
employees  in  Kannapolis  attend  this  annual  event. 

Cannon  Mills  Co.  and  subsidiaries  have  a  capital 
and  surplus  of  almost  $102,000,000,  of  which  slightly 
less  than  $52,000,000,  about  equally  divided  between 
common  and  Class  B  stock,  is  paid-in  capital.  Total 
earned  and  capital  surplus,  including  almost  $34,- 
000,000  reserved  for  working  capital,  exceeds  $51,- 
000,000.  Plant  valuation,  shown  at  cost  and  before 
depreciation,  is  almost  $50,000,000.  Net  sales  in 
1951,  as  shown  in  the  Annual  Report,  approached 
$189,000,000  from  which  gross  profits  were  in  excess 
of  $33,000,000.  Net  income  after  Federal  and  State 
income  taxes  of  more  than  $15,000,000  had  been  paid 
amounted  to  more  than  $13,000,000.  Dividends  de- 
clared at  the  rate  of  $3.00  a  share  exceeded  $6,222,- 
000. 

Officers  serving  with  President  Charles  A.  Cannon 
include  A.  Luther  Brown,  William  C.  Cannon,  Arthur 
W.  Fisher,  Julian  C.  Harmon,  Don  S.  Holt,  Hearne 
Swink  and  Frederic  A.  Williams,  vice-presidents ;  E. 
Gray  Bost,  treasurer ;  Hearne  Swink,  secretary ;  Ed- 
ward Sauvain  and  George  A.  Batte,  Jr.,  assistant 
treasurers;  E.  Gray  Bost,  Joseph  J.  Boyle  and  Wil- 
liam C.  Cannon,  assistant  secretaries.  Directors  of 
the  corporation  are  John  J.  Earnhardt,  E.  Gray  Bost, 
A.  Luther  Brown,  Charles  A.  Cannon,  Martin  L. 
Cannon,  William  C.  Cannon,  Arthur  W.  Fisher,  Jul- 
ian C.  Harmon,  Alexander  R.  Howard,  Ellison  S. 
McKissick  and  Hearne  Swink. 

Cannon  products  include  towels,  sheets,  pillow- 
cases, bed  spreads,   draperies,   sheeting  and  yarn, 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  95 


lanufactured  largely  in  the  principal  Cannon  plants 
t  Kannapolis.  These  and  other  Cannon  products 
re  manufactured  at  a  dozen  or  more  plants  located 
,rgely  in  Concord  and  China  Grove,  but  hosiery 
id  other  textile  products  are  produced  in  some  of 
le  associated  companies. 

Following  the  organization  of  the  Cannon  Manu- 
icturing  Co.  in  Concord  in  1897  by  James  W.  Can- 
3n  and  another  building  erected  soon  after,  which 
jcame  plants  No.  1  and  2,  Cannon  Mills  acquired 
ambers  of  other  textile  plants  already  in  operation 
id  built  still  other  plants.  Among  these  were  Ca- 
irrus  Cotton  Mills,  started  in  Concord  in  1892, 
hich  became  plants  No.  4  and  5 ;  Gibson  Manuf ac- 
iring  Co.,  started  in  1899  in  Concord,  which  became 
ant  No.  6;  Kesler  Manufacturing  Co.,  started  in 
alisbury  in  1895,  which  became  plant  No.  7 ;  Patter- 
>n  Manufacturing  Co.,  started  in  China  Grove  in 
$93,  which  became  plant  No.  8 ;  Franklin  Cotton 
ill,  organized  in  Concord  in  1918,  which  became 
ant  No.  9 ;  Norcott  Mills,  the  predecessor  company 
>r  plant  No.  10,  started  in  Concord  in  1915;  Bar- 
nger  Cotton  Mill,  started  in  Rockwell  in  1907,  now 
ant  No.  11. 

Mr.  Cannon  is  also  president  of  Wiscassett  Mills 
o.,  Albemarle,  with  a  capitalization  of  $5,000,000 
id  operating  more  than  92,000  spindles  and  89  f  ull- 
ishioned  knitting  machines  in  the  production  of 


Roving   -frame   where   roving   is   drawn   out  and   ticisted  into 
smaller  size  ready  for  spinning  at  Cannon  Mills  Co. 

carded  and  combed  yarns  and  ladies  full-fashioned 
hosiery.  A.  L.  Brown,  vice-president  of  Cannon 
Mills  Co.,  is  also  president  of  China  Grove  Cotton 
Mills  Co.,  capitalized  at  $1,500,000  and  operating 
more  than  67,000  spindles  in  the  production  of  comb- 
ed yarns.  Mr.  Cannon  and  other  officials  of  the  Can- 
non Mills  are  officers  and  directors  of  several  other 
textile  mills  operated  in  North  Carolina. 


Burlington  Mills  is  Largest  Synthetic  Textile  Producer 


Burlington  Mills,  Inc.,  with  executive  offices  in 
reensboro,  started  in  Burlington  in  1923  under  the 
adership  of  J.  Spencer  Love  as  a  very  small  textile 
ant,  has  expanded  until  it  is  now  the  largest  manu- 
,cturer  of  synthetic  textiles  in  the  world  and  pro- 
icing  some  of  the  finest  fabrics  made  in  America 
ith  73  plants  in  44  communities  in  eight  states  and 
air  foreign  countries,  employing  approximately 
.,000  workers  and  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around 
13,000,000. 

The  first  Burlington  Mills  plant  employed  about 
)0  workers  and  its  products  were  low-priced  items 
eluding  fabrics  for  railroad  flags  and  stiffening 
aterial  for  lining  women's  hats.  Even  in  1927,  five 
;ars  after  the  plant  was  started,  its  entire  produc- 
3n  for  one  day  could  be  hauled  to  the  freight  depot 
|  one  man  with  a  one-horse  wagon.  In  the  25  years 
nee  that  time  Burlington  Mills  has  expanded  grad- 
illy  until  it  is  one  of  the  largest  textile  organiza- 
)ns  in  North  Carolina  in  addition  to  the  numerous 
ants  outside  this  state.  Most  of  the  expansion  of 
urlington  Mills  has  been  through  the  purchase  of 
ants,  large  and  small,  in  this  and  other  states. 

eensboro  Finishing  Plant,  left,  and  Development  Finishing 
Plant  of  Burlington  Mills  Co.,  Greensboro. 


*  Www  hi  I  in  bsh  kra  m?m  ms& 

l  ■  .11  fill®.  «i  Hf  p,iii  lit 


Usually  when  a  plant  was  added  to  the  corporation  it 
was  necessary  to  modernize  it  completely  and  install 
new  equipment. 

In  addition  to  nine  hosiery  mills  in  six  communi- 
ties and  eight  auxiliary  services  in  or  near  commun- 
ities in  which  plants  are  located,  Burlington  Mills 
has  36  textile  plants  in  21  North  Carolina  communi- 
ties. These  36  textile  plants  are  located  in  Burling- 
ton, Greensboro,  High  Point,  Gastonia,  Kings  Moun- 
tain, Smithfield,  Cramerton,  Central  Falls,  Asheboro, 
Lexington,  Ossipee,  Wake  Forest,  Randleman,  Fay- 
etteville,  Oxford,  St.  Pauls,  Mooresville,  Reidsville, 
Newton,  Cordova,  Franklinton  and  Kernersville. 

Employment  in  this  State  in  all  Burlington  Mills 
units  averages  between  16,000  and  17,000  workers. 
Although  it  operates  in  several  of  the  larger  textile 
communities,  Burlington  has  most  of  its  plants  in 
small  towns  where  its  payroll  constitutes  a  major 
source  of  income  for  such  communities.  As  evidence 
of  the  rapid  increase  in  production  the  sales  in  1932 
amounted  to  only  about  $15,000,000  annually.  Pres- 
ent sales,  only  20  years  later,  amount  to  approxi- 
mately $300,000,000  annually. 

J.  Spencer  Love,  founder  of  this  great  textile  em- 
pire, was  actually  born  in  Cambridge,  Mass.,  while 


.Hit: 


m    v 


•      m-yjzm,  I «  ft  'mm  \  ci 


"",      IE     •       ■  !         ':..  : 


4h« 


PAGE  96 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


In  World 


his  father  was  a  professor  at 
Harvard  University.  However, 
both  of  his  parents  originally 
were  from  Gastonia  and  his 
father  had  been  a  teacher  at  the 
University  of  North  Carolina 
which  institution  his  grand- 
mother, Cornelia  Phillips  Spen- 
cer, is  credited  with  reopening 
after  the  Civil  War.  He  graduated 
from  Harvard  in  1917  and  later 
spent  a  year  there  in  the  Gradu- 
ate School  of  Business  Administration. 
War  I  he  was  commissioned  as  First  Lieutenant  in 
Infantry  at  Plattsburg  in  1917  and  went  to  France 
the  next  year  with  the  Headquarters  Staff  of  the  78th 
Division.  He  was  commended  by  General  Pershing. 
After  the  war  young  Love  took  a  job  as  payroll 
clerk  in  a  Gastonia  textile  mill  at  $120  a  month.  A 
short  time  later  he  started  his  textile  career  by  pur- 
chasing, largely  with  borrowed  money,  the  Gastonia 
Cotton  Manufacturing  Co.,  selling  it  soon  afterward. 

A  short  time  later  Mr.  Love  started  Burlington 
Mills  in  1923  with  the  help  of  local  businessmen  in 
Burlington  who  put  up  most  of  the  necessary  capital. 
The  enormous  expansion  of  this  company  has  been 
achieved  in  the  last  quarter  of  a  century.  Mr.  Love 
sensed  the  importance  of  synthetic  fibers  and  was  a 
pioneer  in  weaving  and  knitting  these  man-made 
fibers  alone  and  in  combination  with  cotton,  wool, 
silk  and  other  natural  fibers.  To  this  may  be  attrib- 
uted in  large  part  the  success  of  Burlington  Mills. 

When  Mr.  Love  was  made  chairman  of  the  Board 
of  Directors  in  1947,  he  was  succeeded  as  president 
by  John  C.  Cowan,  Jr.,  son  of  a  Rutherfordton  mer- 
chant and  a  graduate  of  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  in  1921.  Mr.  Cowan  joined  Burlington 
Mills  in  1931  as  superintendent  of  the  Ossipee  Weav- 
ing Plant  near  Burlington.  Because  of  the  fine  exec- 
utive ability  he  displayed,  he  was  transferred  to  the 
executive  offices  of  the  company  in  Greensboro  in 
1935.  In  1937  he  became  vice-president  and  soon 
afterward  was  put  in  charge  of  all  manufacturing 
operations.  He  became  general  manager  of  all  op- 
erations in  1945  and  was  elected  president  of  Bur- 
lington Mills  two  years  later. 

Other  officers  include  ten  vice-presidents,  Kenneth 
R.  Fox,  James  L.  Frink,  Jay  E.  Garvin,  Robert  A. 
Gilliam,  Walter  E.  Greer,  Jr.,  David  A.  Gryder,  John 
W,  Harden,  A.  L.  McArthur,  Jr.,  Charles  F.  Myers, 
Jr.,  W.  Bailey  Sellars;  Stephen  L.  Upson,  secretary; 
C.  Eugene  Rowe,  treasurer;  and  Henry  E.  Rauch, 
controller. 

Directors,  with  J.  Spencer  Love  as  chairman  of  the 
board,  include  the  following:  Graham  H.  Anthony, 
Graham  B.  Blaine,  Kenneth  Collins,  William  S.  Coul- 
ter, John  C.  Cowan,  Jr.,  John  Clifford  Folger,  Ber- 
nard F.  Gimbel,  Albert  H.  Gordon,  Walter  E.  Greer, 

Fayetteville  Plant  for  spun  weaving  of  Burlington  Mills  Corp. 


i 


Franklinton  Plant  for  spun  weaving  of  Burlington  Mills  Corpll 

Jr.,  Howard  Holderness,  D.  Edward  Hudgins,  Robert 
L.  Huffines,  Jr.,  and  Herbert  M.  Kaiser. 

Burlington  Mills  Corp.  of  New  York,  a  wholly  own-' 
ed  merchandising  subsidiary  of  the  parent  company 
has  its  executive  offices  in  the  Empire  State  Building 
New  York.  Officers  of  this  corporation  include  Rob 
ert  L.  Huffines,  Jr.,  president;  Kenneth  Collins  ancj 
Herbert  M.  Kaiser,  executive  vice-presidents ;  Morris 
Gardner,  Walter  S.  Home,  Charles  L.  Myers,  Jr.,  J 
S.  Spears,  Charles  L.  Gerli,  Frederick  A.  Jenckes 
W.  G.  Lord,  Joseph  H.  Wright,  vice-presidents;  Ste 
phen  L.  Upson,  secretary ;  Ervin  A.  Schutz,  treasur| 
er,  and  Raymond  J.  Austin,  controller. 

Burlington  Mills  recently  completed  a  three-yeai 
postwar  expansion  and  improvement  program  at 
cost  of  approximately  $50,000,000  in  order  to  keej 
its  manufacturing  facilities  in  step  with  present  daj 
needs  and  trends.  Many  plants  in  the  various  divi 
sions  have  been  enlarged  and  improved,  including 
face-lifting  for  older  plants,  modernistic  new  wing 
and  installation  of  the  latest  and  most  efficient  ma 
chinery.  In  many  plants  new  flooring,  new  fluores 
cent  lighting  and  new  humidifying  systems  hav! 
been  installed.  Power  plants  and  auxiliary  service! 
have  been  replaced  and  extended  in  a  number  of  thJ 
plants.  The  program  has  resulted  in  the  best  equipj 
ped  mills,  excellent  working  conditions  and  some  o 
the  finest  plants  in  the  textile  industry. 

Burlington  Mills  products,  bearing  the  slogail 
"Woven  Into  the  Life  of  America",  include  a  widj 
variety.  Among  them  are  fabrics  for  women'l 
dresses,  suits,  coats,  sportswear,  blouses  and  inti  I 
mate  apparel;  men's  wear  fabrics  for  suits,  sports 
wear,  outerwear  and  shirts;  decorative  fabrics  foi 
bedspreads,  draperies,  chair  seat  covers;  industrial 
and  transportation  fabrics  for  automobile  seat  coverl 
and  seat  covers  for  passenger  and  sleeping  cars| 
steamship  lines  and  others ;  also  ribbons,  cotton  piec 
goods  and  yarns.  These  are  in  addition  to  men' 
and  women's  hosiery,  not  treated  in  this  issue. 

The  sales  organization  for  Burlington  Mills,  a  sep 
arate  corporation,  maintains  headquarters  in  th 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City,  and  has  1 
branch  sales  offices  in  the  larger  key  cities  througr' 
out  the  nation.  The  company  sells  its  widely  divera 
ified  products  through  17  salej 
divisions  each  handling  separat 
groups  of  the  manufacture 
items. 

Net  sales  of  Burlington  Mill 
Corp.  in  1951  exceeded  $310 
100,000,  an  increase  of  mor 
than  1000%  over  the  $27,300,00 
in  sales  15  years  ago,  in  193r 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  97 


Various  governmental  units  took  $13,400,000  in  dif- 
ferent kinds  of  taxes  or  almost  half  of  the  $27,100,- 
000  earned  last  year  before  taxes,  thus  leaving  net 
earnings  of  $13,700,000.  Burlington  Mills  at  the  end 
of  its  fiscal  year  (in  September,  1951)  had  a  capital 
account  in  excess  of  $171,000,000  consisting  of  a 
little  less  than  $40,000,000  in  outstanding  preferred 
and  common  stock;  capital  surplus  of  slightly  more 
than  $50,000,000  and  an  earned  surplus  in  excess  of 
$81,500,000. 

Burlington  Mills  has  a  splendid  record  in  its  rela- 
tionship with  its  31,000  employees.  The  company 
pays  the  premiums  on  group  life,  accident,  sickness, 
hospitalization  and  surgical  insurance  for  all  its  em- 
ployees and  employees  may  get  additional  hospital 
and  surgical  benefits  for  their  dependents  and  addi- 
tional life,  accident  and  sickness  coverage  for  them- 
selves at  low  cost.  The  James  Lee  Love  Educational 
Loan  Fund  provides  interest-free  loans  to  eligible 
employees  and  their  children  for  higher  education. 
The  company  maintains  aprpenticeship  and  job 
training  so  employees  can  qualify  for  higher  posi- 
tions in  the  organization.  Cash  bonuses  are  paid 
when  business  conditions  permit  at  vacation  and 
Christmas  periods  in  addition  to  wage  incentive  and 
production  bonuses.  Accident  prevention  is  stressed 
in  all  plants  and  first-aid  services  are  provided.  Rec- 
reational programs  are  carried  out  effectively  and 
commissaries  are  operated  for  employees  on  a  non- 
profit basis. 

COTTON   SPINNING  DIVISION 
Flint  No.  2  Plant,  Gastonia — This  spinning  plant,  built  in 
1923  by  Flint  Manufacturing  Co.  of  East  Gastonia,  was  pur- 


A  slashing  operation  at  one  of  Burlington  Mills  Co, 
plants  in  State. 


Quilling  or  copping  operation  at  a  Burlington  Mills 
Corp.  weaving  plant. 

chased  from  Textiles-Incorporated  in  1946.  Among  earlier 
officers  were  L.  L.  Jenkins,  president,  and  S.  N.  Boyst,  vice- 
president.  Burlington  renovated  and  modernized  this  plant 
extensively  and  it  now  employs  about  280  workers  in  pro- 
ducing cotton  yarns. 

Phenix  Plant,  Kings  Mountain — This  plant,  built  around 
1886  and  operated  by  Dillon  Mills  Co.  for  about  50  years, 
became  the  property  of  A.  G.  Myers  and  the  Dillon  family 
and  later  Earl  A.  Hamrick  owned  controlling  interest  until 
1946.  Burlington  then  acquired  the  plant  and  completely 
renovated  and  modernized  all  buildings.  Production  is  cot- 
ton yarns,  the  plant  employing  about.  300  workers. 

Smithfield  Plant — Built  by  local  owners  and  operated  as 
Smithfleld  Cotton  Mills,  this  plant  was  purchased  in  1941 
and  thoroughly  modernized.  It  employs  about  200  workers 
and  produces  cotton  yarn. 

CRAMERTON  DIVISION 

Mayflower  and  Mays  Plants,  Cramerton — Cramerton,  one 
of  the  first  combed  yarn  mills  in  the  South,  was  organized 
in  190  6  as  Mays  Manufacturing  Co.  The  plant  was  built  on 
the  banks  of  South  Fork  River,  the  site  of  the  old  Holland 
family,  a  show  place  before  the  turn  of  the  century.  Stuart 
W.  Cramer,  Sr.,  a  pioneer  textile  man,  was  one  of  the  orig- 
inal incorporators.  He  and  members  of  his  family  acquired 
the  property  in  1915  and  later  changed  the  name  to  Cramer- 
ton Mills,  Inc.,  with  a  capital  structure  of  $3,000,000.  These 
plants,  originally  operating  6,000  spindles,  were  purchased 
by  Burlington  Mills  in  1946.  The  plants  have  been  expanded 
into  a  completely  integrated  manufacturing  operation  of 
more  than  60,000  spindles,  more  than  1,000  looms  and  a  new 
finishing  operation,  recently  installed.  Cramerton  produces 
fine  cotton  fabrics  and  has  approximately  2,000  employees. 

DECORATIVE  FABRICS  DIVISION 

Decorative  Fabrics  Finishing  Plants,  Burlington — This 
plant  began  as  Alamance  Novelty  Company,  was  acquired  by 
Burlington  in  1931  and  has  been  devoted  to  finishing  deco- 
rative fabrics.     It  has  about  400  employees. 

Piedmont  Weaving  Plant,  Burlington — This  plant,  the  re- 
sult of  the  consolidation  of  two  mills,  contains  the  floor 
space  of  the  plant  originally  built  by  Holt,  Love  and  Smith 
in  19  23.  Undergoing  several  expansions  and  moderniza- 
tions, it  employs  about  60  0  workers  in  producing  fabrics  for 
draperies,  upholstering  and  bedspreads. 

FILAMENT  THROWING  AND  WEAVING  DIVISION 

Belleniont  Weaving  Plant,  Burlington — This  plant  was 
originally  built  in  1888  by  L.  Banks  Holt  who  operated  it 
until  1933.  It  then  became  the  E.  M.  Holt  Plaid  Mill,  ope- 
rating until  1939.  Burlington  acquired  it  at  that  time  and 
with  about  125  employees  produces  broad  woven  filament 
fabrics. 

Central  Falls  Weaving  Plant — Started  in  1881  by  E.  M. 
Diffie,  this  plant  changed  hands  several  times  until  Burling- 
ton purchased  it  in  1932  from  Pennsylvania  Cotton  Mills. 
After  renovation  and  modernization  the  plant  began  produc- 


Page  98 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


tion   of   broad   woven   filament   fabrics   and   has   about    500 
employees. 

Cetwick  Plant,  Asheboro — This  plant  began  in  19  28  as  the 
Cetwick  Silk  Mill,  engaged  in  processing  silk  for  hosiery. 
Following  its  acquisition  in  1938  by  Burlington,  it  started 
processing  yarn  for  full-fashioned  and  seamless  hosiery  and 
produced  essential  yarn  for  government  work  during  the 
war  period.  The  plant,  employing  about  150  workers,  now 
throws  nylon  and  rayon  yarn  for  the  company's  Tricot  op- 
erations. 

Greensboro  Weaving  Plant — Burlington  Mills  built  this 
plant  in  1934  as  a  part  of  the  filament  weaving  division. 
Expanded  several  times  and  recently  modernized,  it  now 
produces  rayon,  acetate,  and  nylon  fabrics.  This  plant  em- 
ploys about  250  workers. 

High  Point  Weaving  Plant — This  plant  began  in  190  2  as 
an  operation  of  the  Emil  J.  Stehli  Co.  which  operated  it 
until  1935.  Then  Burlington  acquired  the  plant  and  began 
operating  it  as  part  of  the  filament  throwing  and  weaving 
division.  It  has  been  expanded  several  times  and  employs 
about  500  workers. 

Hillcrest  Throwing  Plant,  High  Point — This  plant  was 
built  and  started  by  Joseph  DeBarr  of  New  York  as  hillcrest 
Silk  Mills.  In  1933  Marshall  Field  Co.  bought  it  and  chang- 
ed the  name  to  Carolina  Cotton  and  Woolen  Mills.  A  local 
group  of  businessmen,  including  R.  B.  Terry,  J.  P.  Rawley 
and  Earle  Phillips,  later  bought  the  plant,  changed  the  name 
to  Premier  Silk  Mills  and  operated  it  until  1937.  The  plant 
closed  and  in  1938  Burlington  Mills  bought  the  plant  and 
scrapped  or  sold  the  old  machinery  and  completely  mod- 
ernized the  plant.  It  employs  about  10  5  workers  and  pre- 
pares yarn  for  weaving  in  the  filament  division. 

Lexington  Rayon  Plant — The  original  plant  was  built  in 
192'8  and  operated  as  Grimes  Fabrics,  later  changing  hands 
three  times.  Burlington  Mills  purchased  it  in  1933,  improv- 
ing and  gradually  enlarging  the  plant.  It  is  one  of  the 
company's  finest  filament  weaving  plants  employing  about 
315  workers. 

Whitehead  Plant,  Burlington — This  plant,  one  of  the  three 
oldest  textile  plants  in  Burlington,  was  built  in  1887  and 
was  known  as  the  Empire  Cotton  Mill.  It  operated  about 
20  looms  with  10  employees.  Burlington  took  over  the 
property  in  19  28  and  transformed  it  into  a  modern  filament 
throwing  plant  producing  filament  yarns.  Today  it  throws 
yarn  for  the  tricot  knitting  operation.  Approximately  60 
workers  are  employed. 

Ossipee  Plant — The  Ossipee  Cotton  Mills  was  organized 
and  started  in  1881  by  Captain  James  N.  Williamson.  Manu- 
facturing cotton  plaids,  it  had  about  50  looms  and  employed 
4  6  people.  Consolidated  Textile  Corp.  purchased  the  plant 
in  1918,  made  extensive  machinery  changes  in  1924  and 
continued  operations  until  1930.  Burlington  Mills  bought 
the  closed  plant  in  1931  and  completely  modernized  it  into 
an  efficient  filament  weaving  plant.  It  employs  about  3  50 
workers. 

Plaid  Mills  Plant,  Burlington — Beginning  in  1883  as  the 
E.  M.  Holt  Plaid  Mills,  this  plant  produced  cotton  plaid 
material.  Burlington  acquired  it  in  1939  and  expanded  and 
modernized  the  plant.  It  produces  filament  woven  fabrics, 
employing  around  650  workers. 

Mayfair  Knitting  and  Finishing  Plants,  Burlington — The 
original  plant  dates  back  to  1882  when  it  was  constructed 
by  the  Holt  family  of  Burlington.  Tricot  knitting  began  in 
1944  and  dyeing  and  finishing  operations  were  installed  in 
1946.  This  is  now  a  modern  tricot  knitting  and  finishing 
operation  with  about  225  workers' 

FINISHING  DIVISION 

Development  Fnishing  Plant,  Greensboro — This  new  and 
modern  plant,  completed  in  1951  to  assist  the  finishing  di- 
vision in  development  and  research  work,  adjoins  the  Greens- 
boro Finishing  Plant.     It  employs  150  workers. 

Greensboro  Finishing  Plant — This  plant  was  built  in  1937 
by  Armco  Finishing  Corp.  with  financial  backing  from  Britt 
M.  Armfield,  Caesar  Cone  II,  Benjamin  Cone,  Herman  Cone 
and  Mrs.  James  H.  Armfield.  It  was  purchased  by  Burling- 
ton in  1941  and  is  a  complete  dyeing  and  finishing  plant 
employing  225  workers. 

Wake  Finishing  Plant,  Wake  Forest — This  plant,  built  in 
1948  by  Burlington  Mills  for  dyeing  and  finishing  spun  fab- 
rics, is  one  of  the  most  modern  and  complete  finishing  plants 
in  the  South.     It  employs  around  600  persons. 
RIBBON  DIVISION 

Reidsville  Plant — This  building  was  erected  in  1923  by 
the  Reidsville  Tobacco  Association  and  was  operated  about 
three  years  as  a  tobacco  warehouse.   Klots  Silk  Co.  purchased 


the  building  then  and  operated  it  as  a  silk  mill  for  about 
three  years  before  closing  down.  The  plant  stood  idle  for 
some  time  before  Burlington  Mills  acquired  the  building  in 
1933.  A  new  two-story  addition  was  erected  and  a  weaving 
operation  begun.  Some  five  years  later  the  plant  was  con- 
verted into  throwing  yarns  for  filament  weaving  plants. 
Today  the  plant  employs  approximately  100  people. 
SPUN  RAYON  SPINNING  DIVISION 

Flint  No.  1  Plant,  Gastonia — Laban  Groves  built  this  orig- 
inal plant  in  1906  and  operated  it  until  1919.  From  that 
time  until  193  2  Labe  Jenkins  and  wife  owned  controlling 
interest  and  then  Textiles-Incorporated  leased  it  from  Mrs. 
Jenkins  for  five  years.  Textiles-Incorporated  owned  the  plant 
from  1937  to  1946  when  it  was  purchased  by  Burlington.  It 
has  been  modernized  several  times  and  produces  spun  rayon 
yarn.     It  employs  about  300  workers. 

Lakedale  Plant,  Fayetteville — This  plant  was  built  by  lo 
cal  capital  and  began  operations  in  1937  as  Victory  Manu 
facturing  Co.  with  H.  W.  Lily  as  first  president.     Originally 
it  was  a  cotton  weaving  plant  producing  print  cloth.     Robert 
Lassiter,  Charlotte,  acquired  controlling  interest  shortly  be- 
fore World  War  I  and  operated  the  plant  until   1930.      In 

1933  R.  L.  Huffines,  Jr.,  secured  control  and  converted  it 
into  a  spinning  plant,  changing  the  name  to  Faytex  Mills, 
Inc.  In  1941  Burlington  Mills  bought  the  plant.  Many  im 
provements  were  made  to  make  it  a  modern  and  productive 
spinning  plant,  employing  about  475  people. 

Modena  Plant,  Gastonia — This  plant  was  built  in  1895  by 
John  D.  Moore  and  associates  who  operated  it  until  1920 
when  it  became  the  property  of  Ranlo  Manufacturing  Co. 
Burlington  Mills  bought  the  plant  in  1941  making  many 
changes  and  modernizing  the  mill.  It  is  now  a  clean  and 
modern  spinning  mill  producing  yarns  for  the  spun  weaving 
division.     It  employs  about  300  people. 

Oxford  Plant — John  G.  Hall,  Dr.  Ed  White  and  other  local 
citizens  organized  the  Oxford  Cotton  Mill  in  1900.  Erwin 
Cotton  Mills  bought  the  plant  in  1903,  operating  it  until 
1946  when  it  was  bought  by  Burlingtton.  It  was  converted 
from  a  cotton  spinning  plant  into  a  modern  rayon  and 
blended  yarns  spinning  plant,  employing  around  200  work- 
ers. 

Ranlo  Plant,  Gastonia — Ranlo  Manufacturing  Co.,  with 
W.  T.  Love  and  John  C.  Rankin  as  principal  stockholders, 
built  this  plant  in  1917.  For  many  years  it  was  a  successful 
producer  of  tire  cord  yarns  and  in  19  20  Ranlo  was  considered! 
the  best  equipped  tire  cording  mill  in  America.  When  rub- 
ber companies  began  operating  their  own  tire  cord  plants 
Ranlo  shifted  to  other  fields  and  began  making  cardedj 
knitting  yarns,  novelty  yarns  and  yarns  for  jacquard  up 
holstery  and  draperies,  later  expanding  into  spun  rayon  and 
blended  yarns.  In  1940  Burlington  acquired  the  plant,  en- 
larging and  improving  it  extensively.  About  325  peoplf 
are  employed. 

Robeson  Plant,  St.  Pauls — Local  citizens,  including  Dr.  J 
M.  Pate,  Devin  Williams  and  T.  J.  Smith,  built  this  plant  ir 
1939  and  operated  it  until  1943.  Burlington  then  acquirec 
the  plant  and  completely  rebuilt  and  renovated  it,  making 
it  a  modern  and  productive  unit  of  the  spun  rayon  spinning 
division.     It  employs  about  3  50  workers. 

St.  Pauls  Rayon  Plant — This  plant,  named  the  St.  Pauls 
Cotton  Mills,  was  built  in  1908  by  local  citizens  under  th< 
leadership  of  Locke  Shaw  and  A.  R.  McEachern.  It  was 
operated  as  such  until  1920  when  a  new  corporation  was 
formed  and  the  plant  set-up  reorganized.  Burlington  bough 
the  plant  in  1940,  completely  renovating  the  building  an( 
equipment.     Around  175  workers  are  employed. 

Cascade  Plant,  Mooresville — In  1906  a  group  of  Moores 
ville  men,  including  E.  W.  Brawley,  Cam  Brawley,  Join 
Cooke  and  Dr.  A.  E.  Bell,  organized  the  Dixie  Cotton  Spin 
ning  Mill  Co.  and  began  operation  in  1908.  First  products  wen 
yarns,  sold  largely  to  hosiery  mills.  In  1923  the  firm  wa 
reorganized  and  refinanced  by  Hunter  Commission  Compan? 
and  local  stockholders,  becoming  Cascade  Cotton  Mills,  Inc 
At  that  time  the  plant  was  expanded  with  a  large  weav< 
shed  designed  to  produce  shirting  And  pajama  cloth.  It  wa: 
closed  during  the  depression  years,  19  2*9-3  3,  at  the  end  o 
which  it  was  purchased  by  Burlington  Mills.     Reopening  ii 

1934  after  changes  and  improvements,  this  plant  is  now  i 
modern  unit  producing  spun  rayopt  and  blended  fabrics.  I 
employs  about  700  workers.  h 

Fayetteville  Plant — This  plant  was  organized  in  the  lat> 
1880s  as  Holt  Morgan  Mills  with  Walter  Holt  and  W.  M 
Morgan  as  principal  stockholders.  It  was  not  until  189! 
that  the  company  began  manufacturing  spun  cotton  yarns 
ginghams  and  suitings,  continuing  until  1935.     It  then  be 


SUMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  99 


came  bankrupt  and  was  taken  over  by  the  newly  organized 
Aspen  Cotton  Mills..  It  was  reorganized  around  1907,  be- 
coming Puritan  Mills  Co.,  which  also  became  bankrupt  in 
1926.  Burlington  Mills  bought  the  idle  plant  in  1929,  im- 
proving and  expanding  it  into  one  of  the  most  modern  spun 
weaving  plants  in  the  South  today.  The  plant  employs 
about  500  workers. 

Newton  Rayon  Plant — This  plant  was  built  in  1924  and 
began  operations  as  the  Warlick  Manufacturing  Co.,  then 
considered  an  extremely  modern  plant.  Due  to  the  depres- 
sion, the  plant  was  sold  in  the  late  1920s  and  was  operated 
as  the  Colonial  Mills  for  about  eight  years.  In  1939  Bur- 
lington bought  the  plant,  making  many  improvements  so 
that  it  is  now  a  modern  and  productive  spun  rayon  weaving 
plant.     It  employs  about  400  workers. 

Steele  Plant,  Cordova — Built  by  the  Steele  family  in  1895, 
this  plant  was  operated  as  a  corporation  until  purchased  by 
Burlington  in  1945.  J.  W.  Porter,  who  joined  the  former 
Steele  firm  in  1911,  was  president  and  treasurer  for  many 
years.      Burlington  made  many  changes  and  improvements 


and  this  plant  is  now  a  large  integrated  spun  weaving  opera- 
tion employing  about  700  people. 

Franklinton  Plant — The  old  Vamoco  Plant  was  originally 
built  in  1918  on  land  purchased  from  R.  D.  Collins  and  be- 
gan operation  as  a  men's  hosiery  plant.  In  1927  A.  H.  Vann 
and  John  H.  Moore  bought  the  plant,  built  a  weave  room 
addition  and  added  a  village  of  27  homes.  Production  shift- 
ed from  socks  to  Turkish  towels,  the  plant  continuing  until 
1941  when  it  was  closed  down.  Burlington  purchased  the 
property  this  next  year,  making  many  repairs  and  improve- 
ments. By  1943  the  plant  was  in  steady  production,  em- 
ploying about  2  7  5.  Burlington  began  extensive  expansion 
and  improvements  immediately  after  the  war  and  about  550 
workers  are  now  employed. 

Kernersville  Plant— This  recent  addition  to  the  Burling- 
ton Mills  plant  family  was  formerly  the  Southern  Silk  Mills, 
Inc.  Burlington  acquired  all  the  stock  in  June,  1952,  after 
the  mill  had  been  closed  for  some  months.  A  filament  weav- 
ing plant,  the  Kernersville  unit  has  about  200  looms  and 
60  employees. 


Cone  Mills  Operates  World's  Largest  Flannel,  Denim  Plants 


Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro,  had  its  beginning  on 
the  proverbial  shoe  string  with  organization  in  1901 
of  the  Cone  Export  &  Commission  Co.  in  New  York. 
And  from  that  start  developed  through  the  years  into 
a  huge  textile  empire,  embracing  21  textile  mills, 
largely  in  North  Carolina,  and  containing  two  su- 
perlatives— the  largest  flannel  plant  in  the  world 
and  the  largest  denim  mill  in  the  world,  both  in 
Greensboro. 

The  Cone  interests  in  textiles  even  antedates  the 
beginning  of  the  Cone  Export  &  Commission  Co., 
Inc.,  now  Cone  Mills    Inc.     Two  Cone  brothers  had 

Several  Cone  Mills  in  Greensboro  with  White  Oak  Plant,  world's 
largest  denim  mill,  in  foreground;  Print  Works  Plant,  at  left; 
Revolution  Division  Flannel  Plant  and  Rayon  Plant  at  right 
center,  and  Proximity  Plant,  oldest  Gone  plant  in  Greensboro  in 
near  background.    Greensboro 's  skyline  seen  in  distance. 


been  made  partners  in  the  wholesale  grocery  firm  of 
their  father,  Herman  Cone,  an  emigrant  from  Bava- 
ria, and  operated  as  Herman  Cone  &  Sons  in  Balti- 
more— Moses  and  Ceasar  Cone.  These  two  Cone 
sons  visited  North  Carolina  and  other  southern  states 
in  connection  with  the  grocery  business.  One  of 
their  customers  and  friends,  C.  E.  Graham,  induced 
them  in  1887  to  invest  in  a  cotton  mill  in  Asheville 
which  began  operation  as  the  C.  E.  Graham  Manu- 
facturing Co.  Five  years  later,  in  1892,  the  Cone 
brothers  took  over  this  unsuccessful  plant  and  re- 
organized it  as  the  Asheville  Cotton  Mills.  This  be- 
came the  first  Cone  mill. 

Meanwhile,  having  observed  the  poor  sales  meth- 
ods of  southern  textile  mills,  Moses  and  Ceasar  Cone 
conceived  the  idea  of  organizing  a  sales  agency  with 
headquarters  in  New  York.    In  the  fall  of  1889  Moses 


Page  1 00 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


Cone  visited  50  mills  in  the  south  and  secured  assur- 
ances from  90%  of  them  that  they  would  cooperate 
in  a  selling  organization  under  his  management. 
Principal  products  of  these  mills  at  that  time  were 
cotton  plaids.  Two  years  later  the  Cone  Export  & 
Commission  Co.,  Inc.,  although  discouraged  by  other 
cotton  goods  selling  agencies,  obtained  a  New  York 
office  in  an  out-of-the-way  place.  Today  this  com- 
pany, now  Cone  Mills  Inc.,  is  one  of  the  most  suc- 
cessful textile  selling  organizations  in  the  world, 
owning  its  own  handsome  building,  modernly  equip- 
ped and  located  in  the  very  heart  of  New  York's  cot- 
ton goods  district,  Worth  and  Church  Streets. 

Among  Moses  Cone's  staunchest  friends  and  sup- 
porters were  the  sons  of  Edwin  M.  Holt  who  had 
started  the  manufacture  of  cotton  plaids  before  the 
War  Between  the  States.  Mr.  Holt's  sons  continued 
their  textile  interests  and  became  before  the  turn  of 
the  century  the  largest  manufacturers  of  cotton 
plaids  in  the  country.  The  Cones,  realizing  that 
cotton  plaids  were  being  overproduced,  encouraged 
the  mills  they  represented  to  produce  other  kinds  of 
textile  fabrics.  After  some  of  the  mills  began  to 
diversify  and  became  prosperous,  they  left  the  Cone 
organization  and  went  to  other  commission  outlets. 

After  their  purchase  in  1892  of  the  Asheville  Cot- 
ton Mill,  the  Cones  in  1893  moved  their  Commission 
headquarters  to  Greensboro  but  continued  their  sales 
organization  in  New  York.  In  1923  they  organized 
the  Southern  Finishing  &  Warehouse  Co.  in  Greens- 
boro and  also  bought  controlling  interest  in  Minneola 
Manufacturing  Co.  at  nearby  Gibsonville.  At  that 
time  also  they  decided  to  build  two  mills  in  Greens- 
boro, one  to  make  denims  and  the  other  to  make  Can- 
ton flannels,  then  a  very  popular  fabric.  Because 
of  the  panic  at  that  time,  they  waited  two  years  to 
build  the  first  of  these  mills. 

Then  Proximity  Manufacturing  Co.  was  organized 
and  began  the  manufacture  of  the  famous  combed 
denims.  The  mill  was  named  Proximity  because  of 
its  close  proximity  to  the  cotton  fields.  The  mill  was 
organized  with  a  capital  of  $200,000  and  the  largest 
stockholders  outside  of  the  Cone  family  were  the 
Dukes  of  Durham  who  subscribed  to  $20,000  in  com- 
mon stock.  The  mill  was  located  on  a  1500  acre  tract 
bought  near  the  city  of  Greensboro  and  started  with 
250  looms. 

Emanuel  and  Herman  Sternberger,  merchants, 
old  customers  of  H.  Cone  &  Sons  and  friends  of 
Moses  and  Ceasar  Cone,  were  planning  the  erection 


Weave  room  of  White  Oak  Plant,  Cone  Mills,  producing  300,000 
yards  of  denim  each  working  day. 


Warper  creels  in  Rayon  Plant,  Revolution  Division, 
Gone  Mills,  Greensboro. 

of  a  sheeting  mill  at  Clio,  S.  C.  They  contacted 
Ceasar  Cone  for  advice.  He  suggested  that  they 
produce  less  competitive  goods  and  proposed  that  if 
they  would  locate  in  Greensboro,  he  would  assist  them 
and  raise  half  the  capital.  The  Sternbergers  accept- 
ed the  proposition  and  in  1899  a  flannel  mill  with 
300  looms  and  15,000  spindles  was  built  a  short  dis- 
tance from  Proximity  Manufacturing  Co.  The  mill 
was  named  Revolution  Cotton  Mills  because  it  was 
so  modern  that  it  was  expected  to  revolutionize  the 
manufacture  of  cotton  goods  in  the  south.  This  is 
now  Revolution  Flannel  Plant  of  the  Cone  Mills  Corp. 
and  the  largest  flannel  plant  in  the  world. 

The  next  important  expansion  step  was  taken  inj 
1902  when  the  White  Oak  Cotton  Mill,  now  the  White! 
Oak  Plant  of  Cone  Mills  Corp.,  was  erected  near  the 
Proximity  Plant.  Its  name  came  from  a  large  white 
oak  tree  from  which  the  surveyors  started.  This  was 
to  become  the  largest  denim  mill  in  the  world.  Dur-j 
ing  the  next  half  century  the  Cone  organization  con-j 
tinued  its  expansion  program  with  little  let-up  except 
during  periods  of  depression  which  the  organization 
was  able  to  weather  and  in  war  periods  when  all 
efforts  were  bent  toward  producing  textile  needs  of 
the  nation.  All  profits  from  operation,  except  the] 
barest  needs,  were  turned  back  to  build,  buy,  enlarge 
plants  or  purchase  equipment.  One  example  is  that) 
the  first  dividend  paid  to  stockholders  of  Proximity 
Mfg.  Co.,  started  in  1896,  were  not  paid  until  1914. 

Among  important  enlargements  during  the  follow-j 
ing  years  were  these :  Proximity  increased  its  loome 
from  250  to  1,000  in  1902;  Moses  and  Ceasar  Com 
became  stockholders  in  Cliffside  Mills,  now  Haynet 
Plant  and  Cliffside  Plant ;  enlargement  of  Revolutior 
Plant  to  install  550  looms  in  1904-05 ;  looms  at  Whitt 
Oak  increased  to  1,500  in  1907,  increased  to  2,000  ill 
1913 ;  Cones  acquired  Print  Works  Plant  in  Greens] 
boro  in  1913;  Revolution's  looms  reached  2,048  irj 
1916,  now  replaced  by  1,920  wide  looms;  White  OaV 
looms  reached  3,000  in  1912,  and  went  to  3,151  ir 
1929 ;  American  Spinning  Division  of  Florence  Mills 
Greenville,  S.  C,  purchased  by  Cqne  Mills  in  1941 
Cones  acquired  Pineville  Plant,  tfren  316  looms,  nov 
630  looms;  Cone  Mills  added  Tabardrey  Mfg.  Co. 


Summer-fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  101 


Haw  River,  and  acquired  Eno  Cotton  Mills,  near 
Hillsboro;  Edna  Mills  of  Reidsville  was  purchased, 
all  in  1946. 

In  1947  the  Revolution  Rayon  Plant  was  erected 
and  was  called  "The  Queen  Mill  of  the  South,"  and 
in  the  same  year  the  Cones  bought  the  Randleman 
Plant,  making  synthetic  yarns.  In  1948  the  name 
of  Proximity  Mfg.  Co.  was  changed  to  Cone  Mills 
Corp.  and  during  the  year  the  Cliffside  Mills,  includ- 
ing Haynes  Plant  at  Avondale  and  the  Cliffside  Plant 
at  Cliffside,  as  well  as  the  Revolution  Plant  at  Greens- 
boro, were  merged  with  the  Cone  Mills  Corp.  In  1951 
Cone  Mills  purchased  the  Dwight  Division  in  Ala- 
bama City,  Alabama,  and  built  the  Guilford  Products 
Co.,  a  diaper  plant  in  Greensboro. 

Since  the  first  of  this  year  Cone  Mills  has  pur- 
chased the  Union  Bleachery  in  Greenville,  S.  C. ; 
erected  a  new  building  at  Proximity  into  which  the 
Cone  Mills  Laboratory  and  the  Sample  and  Printing 
Department  of  Cone  Mills  Inc.,  were  moved.  Also 
moving  into  this  new  building  was  the  Textorian, 
the  company's  weekly  newspaper,  founded  in  1927 
by  Marion  W.  Heiss,  now  a  company  vice-president. 
On  June  2,  this  year,  the  corporative  name  of  Cone 
Export  &  Commission  Co.,  Inc.,  was  changed  to  Cone 
Mills  Inc. 

Meanwhile  Moses  Cone,  one  of  the  co-founders, 
died  in  1908,  leaving  actual  direction  of  the  organ- 
ization to  Ceasar  Cone,  who  continued  to  direct  the 
destinies  of  the  Cone  interests  until  his  death  in 
1917.  During  the  years  other  brothers  of  the  found- 
ers had  been  developing  in  the  Cone  organizations. 
Bernard  M.  Cone,  a  brother,  became  president,  con- 
tinuing as  such  until  1938  when  he  was  succeeded  by 
Herman  Cone,  his  nephew  and  son  of  Co-founder 
Ceasar  Cone. 

Serving  with  President  Herman  Cone  are  eight 


Lighted  inspection  machine  at  Revolution  Flannel 
Plant,  Cone  Mills. 


vice-presidents,  each  having  direct  charge  of  groups 
of  the  Cone  plants.  These  officers  and  the  plants 
they  supervise  follow :  Clarence  N.  Cone — White 
Oak  and  Proximity  Plants,  Greensboro ;  Edna  Plant, 
Reidsville ;  Pineville  Plant,  Pineville ;  Minneola  Plant, 
Gibsonville ;  Dwight  Plant,  Alabama  City,  Alabama ; 
all  producing  denims  or  greige  goods;  Sydney  M. 
Cone,  Jr. — Cone  Finishing  Company's  dyeing,  finish- 
ing and  printing  plants ;  Print  Works  Plant,  Greens- 
boro ;  Granite  Plant,  Haw  River,  and  Union  Bleach- 
ery, Greenville,  S.  C. ;  Saul  F.  Dribben,  senior  exec- 
utive officer  in  charge  of  merchandising  and  distri- 
bution and  president  of  Cone  Mills  Inc.,  selling- 
agent;  Marion  W.  Heiss — Revolution  Division  Flan- 
nel Plant,  Revolution  Rayon  Plant,  and  Guilford 
Products  Co.,  a  subsidiary  producing  diapers,  all  in 
Greensboro;  Asheville  Plant,  Asheville  (yarns); 
Randleman  Plant,  Randleman  (synthetic  yarns)  ; 
producing  flannels  and  synthetic  yarns  and  fabrics ; 
Claude  S.  Morris — Salisbury  Plant,  Salisbury,  pro- 
ducing coverts  and  suitings;  Henry  G.  Nichols — re- 
sponsible for  coordinating,  converting  operations; 
Earle  R.  Stall — American  Spinning  Division,  Green- 
ville, S.  C,  print  cloths,  and  Florence  Plant,  Forest 
City,  subsidiaries,  producing  towels  and  wash  cloths, 
and  Cliffside  Plant  and  Haynes  Plant,  Avondale, 
producing  greige  corduroys;  James  Webb — Eno 
Plant,  Hillsboro,  combed  yarn  fabrics  and  greige 
corduroys,  and  Tabardrey  Plant,  Haw  River,  greige 
corduroys. 

Other  officers  include  Ceasar  Cone,  II,  treasurer; 
Harold  Smith,  secretary  and  comptroller;  Sidney 
Bluhm  and  Lewis  Heflin,  assistant  treasurers ;  J.  W. 
Walters  and  Lewis  Morris,  assistant  secretaries.  The 
directors  are  Herman  Cone,  Benjamin  Cone,  Ceasar 
Cone,  Sydney  M.  Cone,  Jr.,  Saul  F.  Dribben,  Charles 
H.  Haynes,  Lewis  M.  Heflin,  Marion  W.  Heiss,  Claude 
S.  Morris,  Henry  G.  Nichols,  Jansen  Noyes,  Harold 
Smith,  Earle  R.  Stall,  and  James  Webb. 

Cone  Mills  Corp.  employs  approximately  16,000 
workers  in  its  21  plants  and  subsidiaries.  Among 
these,  800  employees  have  been  with  the  company 
for  25  years  or  more.  In  its  desire  to  recognize  merit, 
the  company  follows  a  policy  of  training  its  em- 
ployees and  of  promotion  within  the  organization. 
Practically  all  supervisors  have  come  up  through  the 
ranks.  Fair  treatment,  security,  competent  wages 
and  good  working  conditions  are  basic  personnel 
policies.  Cone  Mills  provides  life  insurance,  acci- 
dent and  sickness  benefits,  hospital  and  surgical  ex- 
penses to  its  hourly  and  piece  work  employees  with 
specified  benefits  to  all  salaried  employees.  The  com- 
pany built  and  has  maintained  for  about  30  years 
YMCA  branches,  with  a  smaller  branch  for  Negro 
employees,  as  centers  of  civic  and  social  life  in  the 
plant  communities,  organized  social  and  physical 
activities  and  publishes  a  weekly  newspaper,  The 
Textorian,  carrying  news  and  pictures  of  its  em- 
ployees. 

Cone  Mills  Corp.  is  primarily  noted  as  the  largest 
organization  in  the  country  manufacturing  blue 
denims  for  work  and  sport  cloths.  Its  deeptone 
denim  is  advertised  as  "America's  Favorite  Fabric 
for  Work  and  Play,"  produced  in  the  White  Oak 
Plant,  largest  denim  mill  in  the  world.  The  Revo- 
lution Flannel  Plant  has  the  distinction  of  being  the 
largest  flannel  plant  manufacturing  plain  and  fancy 


PAGE  1  02 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


flannels.  Corduroys  are  also  high  on  the  list  of 
cotton  products  as  are  suiting  fabrics.  The  Cones 
were  the  first  in  the  South  to  install  machinery  for 
printed  fabrics  and  also  produced  heavy  cotton  piece 
goods,  combed  and  carded,  and  synthetic  fibers.  Only 
towels,  wash  cloths  and  diapers  are  made  as  consum- 
er products. 

Brief  items  on  the  individual  Cone  plants  and  sub- 
sidiary organizations  follow : 

Cone  Mills  Inc. — As  noted,  this  became  the  corporative 
name  of  Cone  Export  &  Commission  Co.,  Inc.,  June  2,  195  2. 
Reviewing  briefly,  this  textile  distributing  agency  was  form- 
ed in  1891  in  New  York  City  by  Moses  and  Ceasar  Cone  to 
sell  southern-made  goods.  To  maintain  closer  contacts  with 
mill  companies,  this  company  moved  to  Greensboro  in  1896 
but  in  19  41  the  offices  moved  back  to  New  York  and  located 
at  Worth  and  Church  Streets.  Saul  F.  Dribben,  who  started 
as  an  office  boy  at  the  age  of  15  and  is  now  in  his  5  7  th  year 
with  the  company,  is  president  and  also  vice-president  of 
Cone  Mills  Corp.  Cone  Mills  Inc.  operates  sales  offices 
in  Atlanta,  Baltimore,  Boston,  Chicago,  Dallas,  Greensboro, 
Los  Angeles,  Nashville,  Philadelphia,  San  Franciso  and  St. 
Louis.  All  of  the  products  handled  by  the  selling  organiza- 
tion are  Cone-made  except  for  Alexander  sheets  and  Hous- 
ton blankets. 

Asheville  Plant — This  was  the  first  Cone  mill,  started  by 
C.  E.  Graham  in  188  7  with  Ceasar  and  Moses  Cone  as  stock- 
holders, acquired  by  the  Cones  in  18  92  and  operated  as 
Asheville  Cotton  Mills  for  many  years.  This  plant  employs 
200  people  and  produces  2,000,000  pounds  of  synthetic  yarn 
annually.  Horace  Kiser  is  general  manager  and  Leander 
Holmes  is  superintendent. 

Minneola  Plant — This  plant  at  Gibsonville  was  incorpo- 
rated in  1888  by  Barry  and  J.  A.  Davidson  and  was  bought 
by  the  Cones  in  1893.  The  650  employees  produce  14,000,- 
00  0  yards  of  fancy  flannels  and  sport  denims  annually.  Alan 
W.  Cone  is  plant  manager  and  Paul  C.  Walker  is  superin- 
tendent. 

Proximity  Plant — -This  was  the  first  Cone  mill  built  in 
Greensboro  in  1896  and  produced  the  first  Cone  denim.  This 
plant,  with  1,500  workers  and  with  61,632  spindles  and 
2',085  looms,  produced  49,000,000  yards  of  denim  in  1951. 
Clarence  N.  Cone  is  vice-president  in  charge  and  general 
manager  with  John  Scott  as  superintendent. 

Revolution  Flannel  Plant  of  Revolution  Division — Started 
in  1899  by  the  Sternbergers  and  the  Cones,  it  is  now  the 
largest  flannel  mill  in  the  world,  producing  71,000,000  yards 
of  flannel  annually.  In  the  beginning  it  produced  brown 
Canton  flannels  only.  Its  first  bleachery  was  built  in  190  9 
and  dyeing  equipment  was  installed.  This  Greensboro  plant 
did  as  its  name  predicted — revolutionized  the  cotton  indus- 
try in  the  South.  Marion  W.  Heiss  is  vice-president  and 
general  manager  with  Coley  Phillips  as  superintendent. 

White  Oak  Plant — This  Greensboro  plant  was  built  in 
190  2  and  started  as  a  part  of  Proximity  Mfg.  Co.  and  has 
become  the  largest  denim  mill  in  the  world,  producing  ap- 
proximately 81,000,00  0  yards  of  denim  in  1951.  Clarence 
N.  Cone  is  vice-president  in  charge  and  general  manager 
with  Sherman  Basinger  as  superintendent. 

Print  Works  Plant — Subsidiary  in  Greensboro,  it  is  one 
of  two  plants  of  Cone  Finishing  Co.  It  was  purchased  in 
1913  from  the  Vandeventer  Carpet  Co.,  the  printing  and 
finishing  having  been  installed  by  H.  A.  Barnes.  With  743 
employees,  the  plant  produces  100,000,000  yards  of  dyed 
and  printed  fabrics  annually.  Marshall  Gardner  is  manager 
and  J.  Gordie  Boyd  is  superintendent. 

Salisbury  Plant — Known  as  Salisbury  Cotton  Mills,  the 
first  cotton  mill  in  Salisbury,  this  plant  was  started  by  Sal- 
isbury citizens  in  18  87  and  was  taken  over  by  Cone  Mills  in 
1919.  Cone  Mills  Inc.,  and  its  predecessor  handled  its 
products  for  more  than  5  0  years.  Claude  S.  Morris,  a  Cone 
vice-president,  was  president  of  the  Salisbury  plant  for  the 
1910-47  period.  Mr.  Morris  is  general  manager  with  David 
Smiley  as  superintendent.  The  plant  employs  650  persons 
and  produces  20,000,000  yards  of  coverts  and  play  denims 
a  year. 

Granite  Plant — This  Haw  River  subsidiary,  a  part  of  Cone 
Finishing  Co.,  was  the  first  complete  corduroy  finishing 
plant  in  North  Carolina  and  in  the  South,  producing  a  full 
line  of  corduroy. 

Revolution  Rayon  Plant  of  Revolution  Division — This 
Cone  mill  in  Greensboro  was  known  as  "The  Queen  Mill  of 


the  South"  when  it  was  built  in  1947.  It  employs  336  peo- 
ple and  produces  9,000,000  yards  of  synthetic  fabrics  an- 
nually. Horace  Kiser  is  general  manager  and  Luther  D. 
Smith  is  superintendent. 

Florence  Plant — This  Forest  City  subsidiary,  part  of  the 
Florence  Mills,  was  started  by  R.  R.  Haynes  and  acquired 
in  1941  by  Cone  Mills.  It  employs  400  workers  and  pro- 
duces 17,500,000  yards  of  flannel  annually.  Earie  R.  Stall, 
president  of  The  Florence  Mills,  is  general  manager  and 
Harold  A.  Deal  is  superintendent. 

Another  Florence  Mills  unit  is  the  American  Spinning  Di- 
vision, Greenville,  S.  C,  employing  760  people  and  producing 
41,150,000  yards  of  print  cloths  annually.  It  was  started  by 
James  H.  Morgan  of  Greenville.  Mr.  Stall  is  general  man- 
ager and  W.  W.  Rodgers  is  superintendent. 

Pineville  Plant — This  is  the  old  Chadwick-Hoskins  Mill 
at  Pineville,  starting  as  a  yarn  mill  and  later  sold  to  Tex- 
tron. It  was  a  weaving  mill  when  purchased  by  the  Cones 
in  1946.  It  has  since  been  enlarged  and  has  630  looms. 
W.  H.  White  is  general  manager  and  V.  R.  Revels  is  super- 
intendent. 

Tabardrey  Plant — This  Haw  River  plant  was  started  by 
Sidney  F.  Payne  and  Herman  Cone  in  1928  when  the  prop- 
erty of  the  old  Holt-Granite  Mfg.  Co.  was  acquired.  It  be- 
came a  part  of  the  corporation  in  19  46.  Arthur  Makin  is 
general  manager  and  R.  M.  Mitchell,  Jr.,  is  superintendent. 

Eno  Plant — This  plant  near  Hillsboro  was  founded  in 
189  6  by  A.  J.  Ruffin  and  James  Webb  and  was  known  as 
Eno  Cotton  Mills.  It  was  acquired  by  the  Cones  in  1926 
and  made  part  of  the  corporation  in  1946.  Sydney  Green  is 
general  manager  and  J.  T.  Hughes  is  superintendent. 

Edna  Plant — This  Reidsville  Plant  was  started  in  18  90 
by  Col.  Byrd  as  Reidsville  Mfg.  Co.,  later  known  as  Hermi- 
tage Cotton  Mills.  In  1896  it  was  bought  by  a  group  of 
Richmond  men  and  the  name  changed  to  Edna.  It  was 
owned  and  operated  as  the  Martel  Co.  for  several  years  until 
1931  when  it  was  acquired  bv  J.  E.  Pipkin  and  his  son,  W. 
Benton  Pipkin.  The  Cone  Mills  bought  the  plant  from 
W.  B.  Pipkin  in  1946.  The  plant  employs  more  than  300 
workers  and  turns  out  8,000,000  yards  of  drills  and  twills 
annually.  W.  H.  White  is  local  manager;  Clarence  Jolly  is 
superintendent. 

Randleman  Plant — This  plant  was  bought  from  Randle- 
man  Mills,  Inc.,  in  19  47.  It  produces  2,500,000  pounds  of 
synthetic  yarns  annually.  Horace  Kiser  is  general  manager 
and  John  Rice  is  superintendent. 

Cliffside  Plant — This  mill  was  built  at  Cliffside  in  1887  by 
R.  R.  Haynes,  and  Moses  and  Ceasar  Cone  had  been  stock- 
holders since  1903.  The  Cliffside  Mills  Co.  was  organized 
in  1902  and  by  1908  this  was  known  as  the  largest  gingham 
mill  in  the  South.  Its  fine  grade  ginghams  were  sold  for 
many  years  by  Cone  Export.  The  last  ginghams  were  made 
late  in  1930,  and  the  plant  was  devoted  entirely  to  weaving 
terry  towels  and  wash  cloths.  The  plant  was  acquired  by 
the  Cones  in  1948  and  last  year  produced  5,357,000  pounds 
of  Cone  towels  and  wash  cloths  (Turkish).  It  employs  900 
workers.  M.  A.  Bearden  is  general  manager  and  H.  Paul 
Bridges  is  superintendent. 

Haynes  Plant — This  plant  and  the  town  of  Avondale  in 
Rutherford  County  were  started  in  1916  by  R.  R.  Haynes 
and  the  mill  was  completed  after  his  death  in  1917  by  his 
son,  Charles  H.  Haynes.  The  property  was  merged  with 
Cone  Mills  in  1948.  The  plant  employs  350  people  and 
produced  3,830,000  pounds  of  corduroys  and  suitings  last 
year.  M.  A.  Bearden  is  general  manager  and  H.  Paul  Bridges 
is  superintendent. 

Guilford  Products  Co. — This  small  subsidiary  in  Greens- 
boro was  built  last  year  and  averaged  850,000  dozen  diapers 
during  the  year.  It  employs  15  people — a  white  supervisor, 
12  Negro  women  and  two  Negro  men.  Stokes  Rawlins  is 
general  manager  and  Rawley  Meadows  is  superintendent. 

Alabama-South  Carolina  Plants — Dwight  Division  of  Cone 
Mills,  Alabama  City,  Alabama,  was  built  in  1895  and  was 
purchased  from  Dwight  Mfg.  Co.  in  1951.  It  employs  2,65  7 
workers  and  produces  drills  and  twills.  Union  Bleachery, 
Greenville,  S.  C,  Cone's  newest  acquisition,  purchased  in 
March  this  year,  secured  license  No.  1  for  sanforizing  in 
this  country.  This  plant  was  started  in  190  2  by  James  B. 
Duke,  B.  N.  Duke  and  Thomas  Fortune  Ryan  Interests. 
Union  Bleachery  employs  900  people  and  produces  100,000,- 
000  yards  of  high  quality  finishing  of  heavy  cotton  piece 
goods,  combed  and  carded,  as  well  as  synthetic  fabrics. 
Thomas  Cousins  is  general  manager  of  Dwight  and  Charles 
Moody,  superintendent;  P.  C.  Gregory  is  general  manager 
of  Union  Bleachery  and  E.  S.  Tillinghast,  superintendent. 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  103 


Erwin  Mills  One  of  State's  Foremost  Textile  Manufacturers 


Erwin  Mills,  Inc.,  Durham,  organized  in  1892  by 
James  B.  Duke  and  associates  and  operated  for  many 
years  by  W.  A.  Erwin,  was  started  early  in  1893  as 
the  Erwin  Cotton  Mills  Co.  to  manufacture  muslin 
or  tobacco  cloth  for  smoking  tobacco  bags.  It  has  so 
far  outgrown  its  modest  beginning  that  it  is  now  a 
corporation  with  a  net  worth  of  close  to  $30,000,000 
and  produces  plain,  sport  and  decorative  denim, 
sheets  and  pillowcases,  twills,  sateens,  flannels,  drills, 
cotton  and  synthetic  fiber  gabardines  and  suitings 
which  have  an  annual  net  sales  value  of  around  $65,- 
000,000  and  is  one  of  North  Carolina's  outstanding 
textile  organizations. 

With  the  organization  Mr.  Duke  employed  W.  A. 
Erwin,  native  of  Burke  County,  then  with  the  E.  M. 
Holt  Plaid  Mills  in  Alamance  County,  as  general 
manager  of  the  small  5,000  spindle  plant.  Officers 
and  directors  of  the  new  corporation,  with  B.  N. 
Duke,  president,  were  George  W.  Watts,  vice-presi- 
dent; W.  A.  Erwin,  secretary-treasurer  and  general 
manager ;  Washington  Duke  and  W.  W.  Fuller. 

Starting  with  tobacco  cloth  the  plant  soon  moved 
into  muslins,  sheetings,  chambreys  and  drapery 
cloth.  Since  there  were  no  dyeing  and  finishing 
plants  in  the  South,  this  company  manufactured 
greige  goods  staples  only.  In  1896  the  capacity  of 
what  became  Plant  No.  1  was  doubled  and  at  that 
time  Erwin  created  a  sensation  by  the  announcement 
that  it  would  produce  denims.  A  separate  plant  for 
this  fabric  was  later  erected  at  Duke,  a  name  later 
changed  to  Erwin,  and  began  producing  blue  denims 
in  1903.  This  became  Plant  No.  2.  The  No.  1  plant 
in  Durham  continued  to  make  denim  until  1925, 
shifting  then  to  wide  sheeting. 

In  1906,  Erwin  bought  and  incorporated  into  the 
organization  the  Cooleemee  Cotton  Mills  which  had 
been  built  by  J.  B.  Duke  and  associates  in  1901.  This 
became  Plant  No.  3  and  later  dyeing,  bleaching  and 
finishing  facilities  were  added.  In  1910  another 
plant  was  erected  at  Durham,  Plant  No.  4,  for  manu- 
facturing sheets  and  pillowcases  with  bleaching, 
finishing  and  sewing  facilities. 

At  Erwin  in  1926  the  second  plant  was  built,  Plant 
No.  5,  and  in  these  two  Erwin  plants  the  company 
consolidated  all  of  its  denim  production.    At  the  same 

Mills  1  &  /h  Bleachery  and  Finishing  Plant  of  Erwin 
Mills  at  Durham. 


Mills  2  &  5  of  Erwin  Mills  at  Erwin. 

time  the  Durham  plants  were  shifting  to  the  produc- 
tion of  wide  sheetings  exclusively.  In  1932  Erwin 
purchased  Pearl  Cotton  Mill  in  Durham  and  devoted 
it  to  the  production  of  sheetings.  It  is  Plant  No.  6. 
The  Diana  Cotton  Mills  at  Falls  of  Neuse,  Wake 
County,  then  in  receivership,  was  purchased  in  1948. 
It  manufactures  synthetic  fibers,  gabardines  and 
suitings.  This  is  Plant  No.  7.  In  that  year,  also, 
Erwin  purchased  the  80-year  old  Stonewall  Cotton 
Mills  at  Stonewall,  Mississippi,  completely  overhaul- 
ed the  plant  and  installed  new  machinery  for  produc- 
ing denims. 

These  expansions  and  extensions  have  made  Erwin 
Mills,  Inc.,  one  of  the  larger  textile  organizations  in 
North  Carolina.  The  various  plants  employ  approx- 
imately 6,660  workers  and  have  an  annual  payroll 
which  approaches  $20,000,000.  It  operates  222,356 
spindles,  6,065  looms  and  produces  around  180,000,- 
000  square  yards  of  woven  fabrics  each  year. 

In  the  earlier  days  Erwin  Mills  built  homes  for  its 
workers  in  order  to  provide  living  accommodations 
near  the  plants.  At  Durham,  where  442  homes  were 
built  and  owned  by  the  company,  136  were  sold  to 
employees  in  1945.  During  the  past  year  674  homes 
were  sold  to  employees  of  the  Erwin  Mills  at  Erwin, 
N.  C,  the  company  now  having  71  houses  left  there. 
Erwin  Mills  was  the  first  North  Carolina  organ- 
ization to  use  the  sanforizing  process  in  the  produc- 
tion of  denims  in  the  early  1930s.  This  process  of 
shrinking  woven  materials  by  machinery  was  devel- 
oped by  Sanford  L.  Cluett  from  whom  it  took  its 
name.  This  process  revolutionized  the  textile  in- 
dustry and  practically  eliminat- 
ed the  ''stretch"  and  "shrink"  in 
woven  fabrics. 

Erwin  denims  have  progress- 
ed far  beyond  the  blue  jean  over- 
all stage.  One  product  is  "Blu- 
serge"  for  work  clothes  such  as 
overalls,  dungarees,  work  caps, 
work  aprons,  shop  coats,  jackets 
and  coveralls.  Lighter  weights, 
sanforized,  are  used  for  chil- 
dren's overalls,  men's  and  wo- 
men's wear  in  pastel  colors,  in 
stripes  for  jackets,  slacks,  dress- 
es and  playsuits.  "Bluserf  Sport- 
denim"  is  produced  in  six  plain 


PAGE  1  04 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


shades  and  six  striped  patterns  for  women's  sports- 
wear and  aprons,  children's  dresses,  sunsuits,  slacks, 
shorts  and  evening  dresses,  and  men's  sport  shirts 
and  beach  jackets. 

"Salute  Sportdenim"  is  a  slightly  heavier  fabric 
now  produced  in  a  soft  blue  and  a  dozen  other  colors 
and  stripes.  "Salute  Sportdenim"  has  been  styled  in 
the  most  fashionable  dresses  for  sportswear,  street 
wear  and  evening  wear.  It  is  tremendously  popular 
for  use  in  home  decoration — as  slipcovers,  draperies, 
bedspreads,  etc.  Erwin  is  also  making  fitted  sheets 
which  fit  the  mattress  to  keep  them  smooth.  Sheets 
are  produced  in  pastel  colors,  now  swinging  into 
high  popularity.  Another  big  Erwin  product  is  the 
combed  yarn  percale  sheet  which  also  is  gaining 
popularity. 

During  the  war  period  Erwin  Mills  was  operating 
a  high  percentage  of  its  facilities  on  defense  produc- 
tions. These  included  denims,  ducks,  twills,  and 
sheetings  for  the  armed  forces  and  for  defense  uses. 
Uniforms  for  both  men  and  women  in  the  war  units 
and  in  the  working  forces  were  made  from  these 
products. 

Erwin  Mills  is  proud  of  the  long  service  of  many 
of  its  employees.  In  the  nearly  60  years  of  operation 
the  company  now  has  about  20  workers  in  its  50-year 
group.  At  its  three  principal  plant  locations  it  has 
25-year  groups  with  672  members  with  services  of 
25  years  or  more,  including  228  at  Durham,  277  at 
Erwin  and  157  at  Cooleemee.  The  company  maintains 
group  life  insurance,  hospitalization  and  accident  and 
health  insurance  for  its  6500  employees  in  North 
Carolina.  The  Erwin  Auditorium  was  erected  in 
1922  and  now  contains  a  cafeteria,  library,  swimming 
pool  and  showers,  and  motion  pictures.  The  Com- 
munity Building  at  Cooleemee  contains  game  rooms, 
a  library,  swimming  pool,  showers,  snack  bar  and 
tennis  courts.  Erwin  and  Stonewall  likewise  have 
their  swimming  pools  and  recreation  programs. 

B.  N.  Duke  continued  as  president  of  the  Erwin 
organization  until  he  retired  in  1927.  At  that  time 
W.  A.  Erwin,  who  had  been  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager,  was  elected  president,  continuing 
to  head  the  organization  until  his  death  in  1932. 
Kemp  Plummer  Lewis,  native  of  Raleigh,  joined  the 
Erwin  organization  soon  after  his  graduation  from 
Carolina  in  1900.  He  worked  at  various  jobs  until 
he  became  Mr.  Erwin's  secretary.  Mr.  Lewis  moved 
up  through  various  jobs,   becoming  secretary   and 


Mill  No.  .i  and  Finishing  Plant  of  Erwin  Mills  at  Cooleemee. 


treasurer  in  1927  and  was  named  president  following 
Mr.  Erwin's  death  in  1932.  In  1948  he  was  named 
chairman  of  the  Board,  serving  as  such  until  his 
death  early  this  year.  Both  Mr.  Erwin  and  Mr. 
Lewis  had  served  as  president  of  the  North  Carolina 
Cotton  Manufacturers'  Association. 

William  H.  Ruffin  was  elected  president  in  1948. 
He  started  vacation  work  in  1919  and  after  his  grad- 
uation from  the  University  of  North  Carolina  in  1921 
he  became  a  regular  employee.  He  worked  at  vari- 
ous jobs  in  the  mill  for  two  years  and  then  became 
assistant  overseer  of  spinning.  Through  various  jobs 
he  worked  up  to  his  present  position  of  head  of  the 
organization  and  is  also  treasurer  of  the  company. 
He  is  past  president  of  the  North  Carolina  Cotton 
Manufacturers'  Association  and  of  the  North  Caro- 
lina Industrial  Conference.  Last  year  he  served  as 
president  of  the  National  Association  of  Manufactur- 
ers and  is  now  chairman  of  the  Board  of  the  NAM, 
the  first  native  Southerner  to  head  that  organization. 

Carl  R.  Harris,  vice-president  and  assistant  treas- 
urer, is  a  graduate  of  N.  C.  State  College.  An  ex- 
perienced man  in  textiles,  he  is  now  president  of  the 
North  Carolina  Cotton  Manufacturers'  Association. 
E.  M.  Holt,  general  manager  for  the  company,  is  a 
Durham  County  native  and  descendant  of  the  promi- 
nent Holt  textile  family  in  Alamance  County.  He 
joined  Erwin  in  the  early  1920s.  Dr.  Frank  T.  de 
Vyver,  vice-president  in  charge  of  personnel  and  la- 
bor relations,  came  to  Erwin  Mills  from  the  faculty 
of  Duke  University  where  he  still  teaches  some 
classes  in  the  Economics  Department.  E.  W.  Dunham 
was  named  secretary  of  the  Erwin  Mills  in  1947  suc- 


Erioin  Mills  plant  at  Falls  of  Neuse  in  Wake  County. 


Sanforizing  process  in  Cooleemee  Plant  of  Erwin  Mills. 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  105 


ceeding  E.  G.  Mclver.  He  is  a  Rowan  County  native 
and  his  field  is  accounting  and  finance.  He  joined  the 
company  in  1919  at  Durham.  N.  A.  Gregory,  joining 
the  firm  in  1932,  and  L.  C.  Thomas,  joining  in  1921, 
are  assistant  secretaries. 

Directors  of  Erwin  Mills  are  A.  F.  Bonsai,  Free- 
man J.  Daniels  and  B.  W.  Stiles  of  New  York;  Carl 
R.  Harris,  vice-president ;  George  Watts  Hill,  grand- 
son, and  John  Sprunt  Hill,  son-in-law,  of  the  original 
vice-president,  George  W.  Watts;  J.  Harper  Erwin 
of  Durham ;  LeRoy  Martin  of  the  Wachovia  Bank  & 
Trust  Co.,  Raleigh,  and  William  H.  Ruffin,  president. 

President  Ruffin  recently  announced  the  plan  of 
spending  $2,650,000  in  further  modernizing  machin- 
ery and  equipment  in  the  Durham,  Erwin  and  Cool- 
eemee  groups  of  mills. 

West  Durham — Plant  No.  1  was  started  in  1893  and  the 
capacity  doubled  in  1896.  Plant  No.  4  was  built  in  1910 
to  manufacture  sheets  and  pillowcases  along  with  a  bleach- 
ing, sewing  and  finishing  plant.  These  plants  shifted  to 
wide  sheeting  exclusively  in  1926.  No.  6,  the  former  Pearl 
Cotton  Mill,  was  bought  in  1932  and  devoted  to  producing 
sheetings.  Officials  of  these  four  plants  are  W.  V.  Byers, 
manager;  R.  B.  Cooke,  J.  M.  Heldman,  T.  C.  Pegram,  and 
A.  M.  Moore,  Jr.,  superintendents;  Fred  Langford,  assistant 
superintendent.  These  plants  employ  about  2,050  workers 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $7,000,000. 

Erwin — Plant  No.  2  was  built  in  a  rural  section  of  Harnett 
County  in  1903  to  make  blue  denims.  Erwin  decided  to  con- 
solidate its  denim  production  at  Erwin  and  erected  Plant  No. 
5  in  19  26.  These  two  plants  employ  about  2,2  20  workers 
with  a  payroll  of  about  $6,500,000   a  year.      E.   H.  Bost  is 


mm  or  California 

BRINGS  IN  ITS  K0RMEWM 
BY  PtANE  ROM 

EMfflt  WLLS.HK. 

COOLEEMEE. H.C. 


m 


Ball  warping  process  in  Durham  Plant  of  Erwin  Mills. 

manager;  W.  H.  Muse,  assistant  manager;  W.  H.  Miley,  Jr., 
general  superintendent,  and  J.  K.  Bruton  and  A.  R.  Marley, 
superintendents. 

Cooleemee — The  Cooleemee  Cotton  Mills,  organized  and 
started  in  1901  by  J.  B.  Duke  and  associates,  was  incorpo- 
rated into  the  Erwin  group  in  190  6  as  Plant  No.  3.  This 
plant  was  a  completely  intergraded  textile  manufacturing 
center  with  facilities  for  almost  any  kind  of  cotton  fabric. 
A  few  years  later  a  bleaching,  dyeing  and  finishing  plant 
was  added.  In  193  9  ultra-modern  vat-dyeing  facilities  were 
installed  for  vat  drills  and  jeans.  This  plant  produces  sport- 
denims,  flannels,  sheetings  and  cantons.  The  two  plants 
employ  about  1,500  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  about 
$4,400,000.  J.  L.  James  is  manager,  C.  W.  Howell  and  W. 
R.  Wands,  superintendents;  M.  A.  Carpenter  and  E.  P.  La- 
voie,  assistant  superintendents,  and  J.  O.  Moody,  office  man- 
ager. 

Falls  of  Neuse — This  Wake  County  cotton  spinning  plant, 
formerly  Diana  Cotton  Mills,  was  in  receivership  when  it 
was  purchased  by  Erwin  in  1948.  The  plant  has  been  com- 
pletely modernized  and  new  equipment  installed  to  weave 
synthetic  yarns,  principally  gabardines  and  suitings.  This 
plant,  No.  7,  employs  about  130  workers  and  has  an  annual 
payroll  of  about  $340,000.  L.  E.  Gatlin,  Jr.,  is  manager 
and  superintendent. 

Stonewall,  Miss. — The  80-year  old  Stonewall  Cotton  Mills, 
purchased  by  Erwin  in  19  48,  was  completely  overhauled  and 
modernized  and  the  newest  machinery  installed.  It  pro- 
duces denims,  employing  about  7  60  workers  with  an  annual 
payroll  of  about  $1,640,000.  M.  R.  Harden  is  manager;  C. 
O'Neal  Walker,  superintendent;  John  C.  King,  assistant 
superintendent,  and  J.  E.  Moon,  office  manager. 


Robbins  Mills,  Producing  Synthetic  Fabrics,  Expanding 


Robbins  Mills  (N.C.),  Inc.,  with  headquarters  at 
Aberdeen,  only  an  idea  in  the  head  of  a  fabrics  mer- 
chant some  22  years  ago  and  starting  with  a  small 
plant  purchased  at  Robbins  (then  Hemp),  is  devel- 
oping rapidly  into  one  of  North 
Carolina's  largest  and  most  im- 
portant textile  firms  producing 
synthetic  fibers  entirely.  In  fact 
two  of  the  Robbins  plants,  suc- 
cessively, have  been  classed  at 
the  time  they  were  completed  as 
the  "largest  spun  synthetic 
weaving  mill  under  one  roof  in 
the  world."  "Robbins  Fabrics," 
consisting  of  men's  and  women's 
suitings,  women's  and  children's 
garment  fabrics  and  other  gen- 


eral use  fabrics,  have  become  widely  and  favorably 
known  throughout  the  country. 

Robbins  Mills,  with  all  production  operations  lo- 
cated in  North  Carolina  except  a  dyeing  and  finishing 


Robbins  Plant  of  Robbins  Mills. 


PAGE  1 06 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i$52 


Plant  in  Virginia  now  operates 
2,390  production  looms,  60,000 
spinning  spindles,  34,000  twist- 
ing spindles  for  spun  yarns,  also 
107,000  filament  throwing  spin- 
dles with  all  of  the  additional 
machinery  required  in  modern 
spinning  and  weaving  plants. 
The  combined  plants  now  have 
floor  space  in  excess  of  1,500,000 
square  feet  and  employ  more 
than  4,000  workers. 

Karl  Robbins,  founder  and  de- 
veloper of  this  extensive  syn- 
thetic textile  organization,  began 
his  career  as  a  fabric  merchant 
in  New  York  City  in  1912  buy- 
ing all  types  of  fabrics  from 
weaving  mills  in  the  East  and 
selling  them  to  clothing  manu- 
facturers largely  in  the  New 
York  area.  Mr.  Robbins  sensed 
the  importance  of  the  newly  developed  synthetic 
fibers  in  the  nation's  economy  and  decided  after  18 
years  as  a  fabric  merchant  to  enter  the  production 
field  and  develop  exclusive  fabrics  not  then  produced 
by  his  regular  suppliers.  His  first  venture  was  the 
purchase  in  1930  of  the  Edgar  Weaving  Co.,  a  small 
plant  at  New  Bedford,  Mass.  It  was  there  that  he 
began  the  production  of  the  now  widely  used  "Rob- 
bins  Fabric." 

Another  fact  realized  by  Mr.  Robbins  was  that  the 
South  offered  better  opportunities  for  translating 
his  ideas  about  synthetic  fabrics  into  action.  He 
found  at  Hemp  (now  Robbins)  the  Pinehurst  Silk 
Mills  and  bought  the  plant.  This  industry  was  or- 
ganized and  started  in  1924  by  Col.  Cowgill  and  asso- 
ciates but  operations  were  discontinued  in  1928. 
Soon  after  it  was  reorganized  and  purchased  about 
18  months  later  in  1930  from  the  Bank  of  Pinehurst, 
becoming  the  second  "Robbins  Fabrics"  mill.  A 
short  time  later  Mr.  Robbins  sold  an  interest  in  the 
mill  to  J.  Spencer  Love  and  associates  of  the  Burling- 
ton Mills.  This  plant  originally  contained  about 
50,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  operated  96 
hand  looms,  one  V-warper,  one  small  slasher,  100 
spindles  of  copping  and  other  required  equipment. 
The  plant  operated  120  hours  a  week  employing 
about  100  workers.  Soon  afterward  the  new  owners 
doubled  the  amount  of  floor  space  and  added  5,000 
throwing  spindles.    All  products,  including  synthetic 

Aberdeen  Plant  of  Robbins  Mills  in  which  is  located  general 
offices  of  the  company. 


Kaeford  Weaving  Plant  of  Robbins  Mills  (N.C.),  Inc.,  largest 

spun  synthetic  weaving  mill  on  one  floor  tinder 

one  roof  in  the  world. 


ROBBINS  BUYS  ROCKY  MOUNT  MILLS 

Karl  Robbins,  chairman  of  the  board  of  Robbins  Mills, 
Inc.,  announced  recently  the  purchase  of  Hego  Fabrics,  Inc., 
of  Rocky  Mount,  as  a  result  of  which  officials  said  the  com- 
pany will  have  a  potential  volume  of  $75,000,000  a  year  and 
will  rank  among  the  first  five  sellers  of  better  priced  syn- 
thetic yarns. 

While  Hego  Fabrics  will  become  a  Robbins  division,  it 
will  continue  to  operate  as  an  independent  unit.  Herman 
Goodman,  former  head  of  Hego  Fabrics  has  been  named  a 
director  and  vice-president  of  Robbins  Mills,  a  position 
formerly  held  by  William  P.  Saunders,  who  became  president 
of  Robbins  Mills  last  May.  Before  starting  with  Hego 
Fabrics  in  1933  Mr.  Goodman  was  vice-president  of  Colonial 
Mills,  Inc.,  predecessor  of  Robbins  Mills,  Inc. 

The  Rocky  Mount  plant  thus  joins  the  plants  at  Aberdeen, 
Raeford,  Red  Springs  and  Robbins  in  North  Carolina  and 
the  finishing  plant  at  Clarksville,  Va.,  as  a  division  of  Rob- 
bins Mills. 


filament  yarn  flat  goods  for  use  by  the  dress  goods 
trade,  were  sold  through  Colonials  Mills,  Inc.,  New 
York  City,  owned  by  Mr.  Robbins. 

After  three  years  of  such  operation  in  1934  Mr. 
Robbins  bought  back  the  interest  he  had  sold  to  Mr. 
Love  and  associates  and  organized  the  Robbins  Cloth 
Mills,  Inc.  Officers  at  that  time  were  Karl  Robbins, 
president;  William  P.  Saunders,  vice-president  and 
manager ;  and  E.  A.  Werner,  secretary  and  treasurer. 
In  1932  the  Colonial  Mills,  owned  by  Mr.  Robbins, 
bought  the  Mid-State  Cloth  Mills,  Newton,  which 
added  50,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space  and  288  looms.  This  plant 
in  1939  was  sold  and  a  small 
weaving  mill  at  Red  Springs  was 
purchased. 

Citizens  of  Hemp  were  so  ap- 
preciative of  the  activities  of  Mr. 
Robbins  in  bringing  a  larger 
prosperity  to  their  community 
and  because  of  the  extensive  as- 
sistance he  gave  in  all  commun-| 
ity  projects  that  they  decided  tc 
honor  their  benefactor.  By  pop- 
ular vote  in  1943  they  changed 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  107 


;he  name  of  Hemp  to  Robbins.  Previously,  in  1940, 
Mr.  Robbins  sold  the  Edgar  Weaving  Co.  in  New 
Bedford,  Mass.  ,in  order  to  enlarge  and  consolidate 
lis  activities  in  the  South.  In  1945  the  Robbins 
irm  purchased  the  Hannah-Pickett  Mills,  Inc.,  in 
Rockingham,  a  cotton  weaving  mill  employing  about 
750  workers.  This  plant  was  sold  in  1947.  In  1946 
;he  company  decided  to  build  a  dyeing  and  finish- 
ng  plant  and  a  site  near  Clarksville,  Virginia,  on 
;he  Roanoke  River  was  selected.  Production  start- 
ed in  1947.  Also  in  1947  the  general  bookkeep- 
ing activities  were  moved  from  Robbins  to  the 
Clarksville  plant. 

The  Robbins  firm  started  a  Tricot  Division  in  the 
bobbins  plant  in  1946  with  six  Tricot  machines  and 
me  warper,  producing  about  18,000  pounds  of  knif- 
ed fabric  a  week.  This  activity  was  discontinued 
n  1948  but  was  resumed  on  a  larger  scale  in  1950. 

Robbins  Mills  in  1947  started  a  new  spun  synthetic 
)lant  near  Aberdeen.  The  general  offices  were  mov- 
id  to  enlarged  office  space  in  this  plant  in  1948.  The 
lext  year  the  parent  company,  Colonial  Mills,  Inc., 
ind  the  Robbins  Cloth  Mills,  Inc.,  were  consolidated 
nto  Robbins  Mills,  Inc.,  and  the  State  initials  of  the 
corporations  within  the  State  became  a  part  of  the 
lame  of  Robbins  Mills,  Inc.,  and  each  division  plant 
carries  the  name  of  the  town  in  which  it  is  located, 
is  Aberdeen  Division.  This  plant  was  then  known 
is  the  largest  spun  synthetic  weaving  mill  on  one 
loor  under  one  roof  in  the  world.  Then  in  1950  the 
company  bought  an  empty  mill  at  Raeford  and  in- 
stalled winding  and  spinning  spindles  to  supply  needs 
)f  the  other  Robbins  Mills.  In  the  next  year  the  com- 
3any  started  a  plant  on  an  adjoining  site  to  bring  to 
i  climax  all  Robbins  Mills  construction  to  date.  This 
Dlant  then  became  the  largest  spun  synthetic  weav- 
ng  mill  on  one  floor  under  one  roof  in  the  world.  The 
Dlant  was  completed  early  this  year  and  has  now 
cached  complete  operation  in  producing  fabrics  for 
suitings  and  general  use. 

Robbins  Mills,  Inc.,  in  New  York,  occupies  the  en- 
ire  20th  floor  of  the  building  at  1407  Broadway, 
rhe  plants  at  Robbins  and  Red  Springs  specialize  in 
weaving  fabrics  from  filament  synthetic  yarns,  while 
;he  Aberdeen  and  Raeford  plants  weave  fabrics  from 
cut  spun  synthetic  fibers. 

In  the  early  days  of  Robbins  operations,  materials 
were  brought  to  the  plants  and  manufactured  goods 
were  hauled  from  the  mills  by  trucks  under  contract 
)r  lease.  In  1944  Robbins  bought  out  a  truck  line  of 
:our  trucks  and  began  making  its  own  deliveries.  At 
3resent  the  firm  operates  its  own  large  fleet  of  gas 
md  diesel  tractors  and  trailers. 

In  his  development  of  this  extensive  industry  Mr. 

Red  Springs  Plant  of  Robbins  Mills. 


Robbins  has  gathered  about  him  a  large  number  of 
able  and  progressive  men.  Chief  of  these  was  Wil- 
liam P.  Saunders,  a  young  and  progressive  mill  man 
who  joined  the  firm  at  Hemp,  and  early  in  1931  was 
made  manager  of  operations.  Mr.  Saunders  proved 
so  efficient  that  he  became  an  associate  in  the  busi- 
ness and  was  elected  vice-president  of  the  North 
Carolina  firm  in  1933.  As  the  Robbins  Mills  expand- 
ed, his  duties  increased  proportionately  and  in  1950 
he  became  president  of  the  North  Carolina  corpora- 
tions. This  year  Mr.  Robbins  decided  to  ease  up  in  his 
activities  and  became  chairman  of  the  board  of  the 
parent  company.  Mr.  Saunders  was  elected  presi- 
dent to  succeed  him  in  the  parent  company  and  con- 
tinues as  president  of  the  North  Carolina  corpora- 
tions and  general  manager  of  all  the  Robbins  Mills. 

A.  H.  Grant,  who  began  work  in  the  throwing  and 
preparation  department  at  Hemp  in  1933,  later  was 
promoted  to  office  manager.  Soon  after  his  return 
from  service  with  the  United  States  Navy,  1942-46, 
he  was  promoted  to  plant  manager  of  Red  Springs 
plant.  Mr.  Grant  is  now  vice-president  of  the  North 
Carolina  operations. 

Edward  Schenker  is  treasurer  of  the  combined  cor- 
porations. Each  division  plant  is  staffed  with  out- 
standing specialists  in  synthetic  fabric  production. 

Robbins  Division  Plant — This  first  Robbins  plant  at  Hemp, 
started  as  Moore  County  Mills  and  later  Pinehurst  Silk  Mills, 
was  bought  in  1930  and  as  noted  had  about  100  employees 
and  produced  about  3  5,000  yards  of  fabrics  a  week.  Several 
extensive  expansions  have  resulted  in  present  floor  space 
exceeding  290,000  square  feet.  Operating  32,248  throwing 
spindles  and  660  looms,  the  plant  now  employs  about  800 
workers.     Tricot  Division  is  also  operated  in  this  plant. 

Red  Springs  Division — This  small  weaving  mill  was  bought 
in  193  9  and  contained  5  5,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  It 
operated  116  C&K  hand  looms,  one  slasher  and  a  few  quill- 
ing machines.  Soon  after  its  purchase  the  plant  was  en- 
larged and  57  6  new  looms  replaced  the  116  old  looms.  This 
plant  has  been  enlarged  until  it  now  covers  seven  acres  of 
floor  space  and  employs  about  9  25  workers.  The  plant  now 
operates  48,256  throwing  spindles  and  1,152  looms. 

Aberdeen  Division  Plant — This  plant  was  built  new  in 
1947.  When  finished,  it  was  described  as  the  largest  plant 
in  the  world  devoted  entirely  to  production  of  spun  syn- 
thetic fibers.  The  plant  is  fully  air-conditioned  for  the  ben- 
efit of  the  workers  and  as  an  aid  in  production  of  quality 
fabrics.  The  plant  operates  today  20,000  spinning  spindles, 
10,400  twisting  spindles  and  289  looms,  employing  about 
650  workers.  The  general  offices  of  Robbins  Mills  were 
transferred  to  this  plant  in  1948. 

Raeford  Division  Plant — A  small  empty  plant  was  pur- 
chased at  Raeford  in  1950  and  was  started  with  2,000  wind- 
ing spindles  and  27,000  throwing  spindles,  to  supplement 
the  throwing  operations  at  Robbins  and  Red  Springs.  In 
1951  adjacent  to  this  throwing  plant,  Robbins  Mills  started 
a  plant  which  climaxed  all  previous  expansions  made  by 
Robbins.  The  mill  was  placed  in  full  operation  this  year, 
taking  its  place  as  the  largest  spun  synthetic  weaving  mill 
on  one  floor  under  one  roof  in  the  world.  The  plant,  fully 
equipped  with  the  most  modern  spinning  and  weaving  ma- 
chines, embraces  nine  acres  of  operating  space  and  is  thor- 
oughly air-conditioned.  It  produces  woven  fabrics  for  suit- 
ings and  industrial  uses.  The  plant 
operates  40,3  20  spinning  spindles, 
24,000  twisting  spindles  and  289 
looms,  employing  about  8  50  workers. 
Clarksville,  Va.,  Plant — In  1946 
Robbins  Mills  decided  to  build  a  dye- 
ing and  finishing  plant,  selecting  a 
site  near  Clarksville,  Va.  The  plant 
started  small.  Expansions  resulted 
in  223,567  sq.  ft.  of  production  space, 
with  1,000  workers.  This  plant  dyes 
and  finishes  all  N.  C.  production.- — 
Data  supplied  by  L.  Lewie  Hallman, 
Methods  Manager,  Robbins  Mills,  Inc. 


PAGE  1  08 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,    1952 


Textiles-Incorporated  Nation's  Top  Combed  Yarn  Producer 


Textiles-Incorporated,  organized  in  1931,  born  of 
desperation  in  the  middle  of  this  nation's  worst 
panic,  spent  eight  of  its  first  ten  years  in  receiver- 
ship in  which  its  barnacles  were  sluffed  off,  its  body 
streamlined  and  its  sails  trimmed  so  that  it  emerged 
into  another  decade  of  successful  and  prosperous 
operations  to  become  the  nation's  leading  organiza- 
tion in  the  production  of  fine  combed  yarns  in  Gas- 
tonia,  recognized  as  the  country's  capital  of  the  fine 
combed  yarn  industry. 

In  fact  Textiles-Incorporated,  in  its  component 
parts,  represents  the  early  days  of  the  textile  indus- 
try in  Gastonia.  This  organization  gathered  togeth- 
er numbers  of  the  finest  combed  yarn  mills  and  weld- 
ed them  into  one  corporation  which  has  become  one 
of  the  largest  and  most  successful  enterprises  in  the 
State. 

The  development  of  the  textile  industry  in  Gas- 
tonia is  an  intensely  interesting  and  at  times  a  very 
depressing  story.  In  1888  this  village  of  less  than 
500  people  contained  forward-looking  citizens  who 
wanted  to  invest  their  earnings  in  industry  and  to 
absorb  the  small  surplus  of  labor.  Their  thoughts 
turned  toward  using  the  cotton  grown  in  the  sur- 
rounding area  through  development  of  a  cotton  mill. 
In  their  consideration  of  this  project  they  found  a 
man  with  both  the  information  and  ability  to  build 
and  operate  a  cotton  mill.  This  was  George  A.  Gray 
who  had  been  superintendent  of  the  McAden  Mill  at 
McAdenville,  a  few  miles  away. 

Leading  citizens  of  Gastonia,  including  R.  C.  G. 
Love,  grandfather  of  Spencer  Love  of  Burlington 
Mills ;  John  H.  Craig,  J.  D.  Moore,  L.  L.  Jenkins,  T. 
W.  Wilson  and  Robert  H.  Adams  subscribed  approx- 
imately $100,000  and  employed  Mr.  Gray  to  build 
and  operate  Gastonia's  first  textile  mill.  Within  the 
next  20  years,  it  may  be  classified  as  the  pioneering 
age,  about  10  additional  mills  were  erected.  In  1893 
George  W.  Ragan  organized  the  Trenton  Mill ;  in 
1896  George  A.  Gray  and  John  F.  Love  built  the  Avon 
Mill;  in  1896  R.  P.  Rankin  built  the  Ozark;  in  1900 
Mr.  Ragan  built  the  Arlington  and  George  A.  Gray 
and  John  F.  Love  built  the  Loray  Mill  (now  Fire- 
stone) ;  the  Gray  Mill  was  built  in  1905.  In  1907  two 
dynamic  and  aggressive  men,  Charles  B.  Armstrong 

Tioo  big  plants  of  Textiles-Incorporated  in  Gastonia.    Left  fore- 
ground is  plant  of  subsidiary,   Threads-Incorporated,  and 
the  Arkray  Plant  in  center  behind  water  tank. 


Aerial  vieiv  of  Arlington  Plant  of  Textiles-Incorporated  show 
ing  mill  village  in  background. 

and  L.  F.  Groves,  entered  the  textile  field.  Again 
with  the  experienced  George  A.  Gray,  Mr.  Arm- 
strong built  the  Clara  Mill  and  Mr.  Groves  built  the 
Flint  Mill.  These  mills  were  in  successful  opera 
tion  as  the  pioneering  era  ended  in  1909. 

By  1910  the  tempo  of  cotton  mill  development  ir. 
Gastonia  had  reached  a  high  point  and  constructior 
and  operation  continued  at  fever  pitch  during  the 
next  decade.  At  that  time  Albert  G.  Myers,  a  young 
banker  and  executive  head  of  the  Citizens'  Nationa 
Bank,  joined  forces  with  both  the  Armstrong  anc 
the  Rankin  groups  in  an  extensive  expansion  of  the 
textile  industry.  Mr.  Myers  assisted  the  sons  oi 
R.  P.  Rankin  who  had  died  in  1910,  including  R 
Grady,  Henry,  Lawrence  and  Pinkney  Rankin,  Jr. 
supported  the  extensive  expansion  of  Col.  C.  B.  Arm- 
strong and  entered  the  textile  industry  directly  him-j 
self.  The  Gray  family,  with  help  from  L.  L.  Jenkins 
of  the  First  National  Bank,  continued  their  activities) 
and  W.  T.  Rankin,  insurance  and  real  estate  manj 
built  the  Osceola  and  Hanover  Mills. 

With  the  advent  of  World  War  I  and  the  need  o: 
supplies  from  the  United  States  activity  increaseej 
and  six  mills  were  built  by  these  groups  in  the  perioe 
from  1915  to  1917.  After  the  War  ended  late  ij 
1918,  the  inflation  that  swept  the  country  did  no 
miss  Gastonia.  In  a  12-month  period  of  1919-20  th<| 
Armstrong,  Winget,  Myers,  Rankin  and  Gray  group 
built  16  fine  combed  spinning  mills.  Stocks  were  subj 
scribed  and  over-subscribed  from  every  type  of  citi 


Bummer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Rage  1 09 


sen  from  soda  jerker  to  bank  president.  All  wanted 
stock  and  stocks  of  mills  already  in  operation  sold 
is  high  as  6  for  1.  Then  in  the  summer  of  1920  defla- 
;ion  struck,  followed  by  cut-throat  competition  and 
stocking  goods  when  there  were  few  sales.  Plans 
!or  mergers  were  proposed  and  discussed  but  not 
idopted.    Neither  group  wanted  to  lose  its  identity. 

Finally,  two  years  after  the  great  depression 
struck  in  1929  in  pure  self-defense  and  in  order  to 
salvage  as  much  as  possible  from  the  impending 
vreck,  heads  of  the  several  large  cotton  mill  groups 
n  Gastonia  got  together  and  worked  out  a  consolida- 
;ion.  Included  were  the  Gray-Separk  group  with 
^rkray,  Arlington,  Gray,  Myrtle,  Priscilla  and  Flint 
VEills ;  the  Myers  group  with  Cora,  Myers,  Elizabeth 
ind  Merco  Mills;  the  Rankin  group  with  Osceola, 
Mountain  View  and  Ridge  Mills ;  Armstrong- Winget 
?roup  with  Seminole,  Winget,  Victory,  Mutual,  Wy- 
nojo,  Lockmore,  Helen  and  Monarch. 

Textiles-Incorporated  thus  became  the  greatest 
combination  of  fine  modern  spinning  mills  in  the  his- 
;ory  of  the  textile  industry  in  the  United  States.  In 
iddition  to  these  mills  Textiles  also  owns  a  subsid- 
ary,  Threads-Incorporated,  formerly  an  adjunct  of 
;he  Gray-Separk  group,  which  became  one  of  Tex- 
;ile's  greatest  assets,  since  it  consumed  the  produc- 
;ion  of  its  largest  spinning  units  and  developed  sales 
is  high  as  $14,000,000  annually.  Textiles  also  had  a 
working  arrangement  with  Hampton  Textiles-In- 
corporated, a  branch  plant  in  Gastonia  of  a  Massa- 
chusetts firm,  to  consume  all  of  Textiles'  mercerizing 
/arns  going  into  the  fine  weaving  and  hosiery  trades, 
rhus,  Textiles  with  fine  manufacturing  and  distribut- 
ng  arrangements  was  ready  for  a  successful  career. 

The  22  mills  consolidated  under  Textiles  contain 
275,000  spindles,  all  producing  fine  combed  yarns. 
Approximately  4,000  workers  were  employed  at  the 
plants  and  all  lived  in  the  villages  owned  by  the  mills. 
Nearly  10,000  people  living  in  these  villages  were 
lirectly  dependent  upon  the  operation  of  these  plants 
for  their  livelihood.  Capitalization  of  Textiles  at 
;hat  time  amounted  to  $8,425,500,  included  in  $5,- 
544,000  in  common  stock;  $695,000  in  Class  A  and 
£2,186,000  in  Class  B  preferred  stock. 

A.  G.  Myers,  successful  banker  and  textile  man, 
was  elected  president  of  the  new  corporation ;  J.  H. 
3epark  was  elected  vice-president  in  charge  of  sales ; 
A.  K.  Winget  became  secretary  and  R.  Grady  Rankin, 
treasurer.     J.  Lander  Gray,  elected  vice-president, 


Portion  of  the  spinning  department  in  the  Mutual  Plant 
of  Textiles-Incorporated. 


Section  of  the  card  room  of  the  Winget  Plant  of 
Textiles-Incorporated. 

and  Henry  A.  Rankin,  both  efficient  in  directing  the 
spinning  of  quality  yarns,  were  placed  in  charge  of 
manufacturing.  J.  C.  Roberts,  coming  from  Ernst 
&  Ernst,  was  elected  controller  and  auditor:  C.  C. 
Armstrong,  elected  vice-president,  and  Charles  D. 
Gray,  both  with  wide  experience,  were  placed  in 
charge  of  buying  raw  cotton  for  the  corporation. 

Textiles  continued  the  valiant  fight  against  ever 
receding  markets  and  ever  increasing  inventories. 
As  banks  were  closing  throughout  the  nation,  Tex- 
tiles drew  in  its  belt.  Mills  had  to  close  or  run  on 
part  time  to  try  to  hold  the  organizations  together. 
Cotton  continued  to  decline  until  it  reached  5'/2^  a 
pound.  Officers  cut  their  own  salaries  in  half  and 
inaugurated  all  economies  possible.  Marginal  land 
in  the  mill  villages  were  turned  into  gardens  and 
canning  plants  were  set  up  to  help  tide  the  workers 
over  the  distressing  period. 

Textiles  fought  this  great  depression  with  its  back 
to  the  wall  for  two  years.  Finally  in  the  spring  of 
1933  after  the  Hoover  Administration  had  ended  and 
the  Roosevelt  Administration  closed  every  bank  in 
the  country,  officers  and  directors  of  Textiles  asked 
for  a  Federal  receivership.  A.  G.  Myers  and  R. 
Grady  Rankin  were  made  co-receivers  subject  to 
jurisdiction  of  Judge  E.  Yates  Webb's  court.  These 
receivers  laid  a  new  foundation  for  operations.  They 
made  mutual  agreements  with  banks  to  hold  old  loans 
in  abeyance  and  obtained  new  operating  loans  on 
receiver's  certificates  of  indebtedness.  In  1934  Mr. 
Rankin  resigned  as  co-receiver  to  go  with  Duke  Pow- 
er Company,  leaving  Mr.  Myers  as  sole  receiver. 

Applying  his  splendid  financial  and  executive  abil- 
ity Mr.  Myers  continued  his  recovery  program.  He 
sold  several  of  the  fringe  plants  which  were  consid- 
ered obsolete  and  applied  the  proceeds  toward  the 
old  indebtedness.  As  recovery  from  the  depression 
continued  sales  volume  increased.  As  profits  started 
showing  up  they  were  applied  to  liquidation  of  the 
indebtedness.  As  conditions  improved,  Mr.  Myers 
seized  every  opportunity  to  improve  the  position  of 
Textiles-Incorporated.  At  his  request  he  accepted 
for  his  work  a  nominal  monthly  drawing  account 
authorized  by  the  court,  which  was  much  less  than  is 
ordinarily  paid  top  executives  of  a  corporation  of 
this  size.  Other  than  this  modest  drawing  account, 
no  receivership  fees  were  paid  in  winding  up  the  re- 
ceivership.   This  was  one  of  few  instances  of  a  cor- 


PAGE  1  1  0 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


poration  passing  through  receivership  in  which  large 
fees  were  not  paid.  It  meant  a  considerable  saving 
to  the  stockholders. 

Remaining  with  Mr.  Myers  through  the  receiver- 
ship was  John  C.  Roberts,  an  able  advisor  on  costs 
and  tax  matters.  Also  working  with  Mr.  Myers  as 
manufacturing  executive  of  the  12  remaining  plants 
was  Henry  Rankin.  A.  W.  Latta,  as  sales  manager, 
and  P.  H.  Thompson,  of  the  home  office,  rendered 
valuable  aid  in  popularizing  the  products  and  ex- 
tending the  markets. 

So,  after  eight  years  of  diligent  effort  and  success- 
ful operations,  Mr.  Myers  was  able  to  bring  Textiles- 
Incorporated  out  of  the  receivership  and  turn  it  back 
to  the  stockholders  on  September  30,  1941.  Mean- 
time he  had  paid  off  all  of  the  firm's  indebtedness, 
including  $1,322,000  of  old  bank  loans  and  $650,000 
of  mortgaged  bonds  and  turned  over  to  the  stock- 
holders a  nice  cash  dividend,  the  first  since  the  merg- 
er in  1931.  Cash  dividends  for  both  classes  of  stock 
have  been  paid  each  quarter  since  1941. 

Mr.  Myers,  in  recognition  of  his  unusually  success- 
ful operation,  was  again  elected  president  of  Textiles- 
Incorporated  and  has  since  continued  to  hold  that 
position.  During  the  1941-51  ten-year  period  the 
company  earned  $32,000,000  and  paid  $7,500,000  in 
dividends  to  its  common  and  preferred  stockholders. 
This  is  an  average  of  $1,141/2  per  share  per  year  on 
the  $1.00  par  value  common  stock,  the  dividends 
ranging  from  40^-  per  share  at  the  beginning  up  to 
$2.50  per  share  in  some  recent  years.  During  this 
decade  Textiles  had  paid  $18,000,000  to  Federal  and 
state  governments  in  income  taxes  and  has  paid 
$59,000,000  to  its  3,000  employees,  probably  the 
highest  wage  rates  in  the  history  of  the  industry.  In 
addition  it  has  spent  $4,800,000  in  completely  mod- 
ernizing 11  of  its  remaining  12  plants. 

Textiles-Incorporated  has  paid  off  all  of  its  bonds 
and  all  of  its  preferred  Class  A  stock  plus  accrued 
dividends.  It  has  issued  three  shares  of  preferred 
stock  of  $25  par  value  in  retirement  of  the  Class  B 
$50  par  value  stock  and  accrued  dividends  and  has 
reduced  the  par  value  of  the  common  stock  from  $10 
to  $1  per  share,  leaving  the  present  capitalization  of 
$554,000  in  common  stock  and  $2,375,000  in  prefer- 
red stock,  with  a  surplus  of  $9,068,300.  The  com- 
pany now  has  a  7  to  1  current  position,  which  enables 
it  to  operate  in  normal  times  without  borrowing  from 
banks.    Sales  for  1951  amounted  to  $30,233,876. 

Textiles-Incorporated  operates  11  spinning  plants 
with  a  total  of  160,124  producing  spindles  and  one 
thread  finishing  plant,  Threads-Incorporated,  which 
is  a  totally  owned  subsidiary  of  Textiles,  all  in  Gas- 
tonia  and  its  environs.  These  mills  enable  Gastonia 
to  live  up  to  its  appellation  as  "The  Combed  Yarn 
Center  of  America".  However,  one  of  these  mills, 
the  Pinkney  Plant,  includes  three  units  for  larger 
production  and  economical  operation.  The  Pinkney 
Plant  does  all  of  the  spinning ;  the  Hanover  unit  does 
all  of  the  carding  and  the  Rankin  unit  does  all  of  the 
finishing — a  series  of  streamlined  processes. 

Consolidation  and  streamlining  has  enabled  Tex- 
tiles to  inaugurate  important  economies  in  the  10 
other  spinning  plants.  These  plants  produce  comb- 
ed yarns  of  counts  from  14s  to  120s,  single  and  ply, 
and  in  all  put-ups  required  by  the  trade.  This  per- 
mits each  plant  to  produce  1,  2  and  3  counts  in  con- 


A  row  of  carding  machines  in  a  card  room  of  Arkray  Plant  o\ 
Textiles-Incorporated. 

trast  to  producing  8  or  10  different  counts  if  th< 
plants  were  owned  individually.  Reducing  the  num 
ber  of  counts  in  each  plant  results  in  considerably 
savings  in  operations.  These  10  additional  spinning 
plants  are  Arkray  with  12,576  spindles,  Arlingtoi 
with  25,332  spindles,  Mutual  with  7,056  spindles 
Myers  with  13,248  spindles,  Myrtle  with  12,672  spin 
dies,  Osceola  with  13,104  spindles,  Ridge  with  9,93( 
spindles,  Seminole  with  11,968  spindles,  Victory  witl 
21,216  spindles  and  Winget  with  8,280  spindles,  ii 
addition  to  the  Pinkney  Group  with  24,736  spindles 

Threads-Incorporated  furnishes  from  150,000  t< 
200,000  pounds  of  yarn  weekly  for  the  sewing  threa( 
and  other  convertors  of  dyed  yarns.  This  plant  rate, 
third  in  volume  in  the  thread  finishing  industry. 

Textiles-Incorporated  enjoys  splendid  employer 
employee  relations  and  offers  extensive  benefits  t< 
all  its  employees.  The  corporation  makes  availabl 
group  life  insurance,  health  and  accident  insurance 
and  hospitalization  for  all  employees  at  small  indi 
vidual  costs.  One  full  week  of  vacation  with  pay  i 
given  those  with  as  much  as  one  year  of  service.  Th 
company  furnishes  playgrounds,  uniforms  and  equip 
ment  for  baseball,  soft  ball  and  other  recreational 
activities  for  employees  in  all  plants.  An  attractiv 
semi-monthly  paper  is  issued  and  distributed  to  a] 
employees  contributing  much  to  friendly  relations 
Every  plant  has  a  modern  snack  bar  for  exclusive  us 
of  its  employees,  making  available  sandwiches,  coffee 
soft  drinks  and  knick-knacks.  The  company  operate 
normally  on  an  eight-hour,  five-day,  40-hour  wor 
week,  thus  allowing  Saturdays  and  Sundays  for  resl 

Textiles  maintains  sales  offices  in  New  York,  Chi 
cago,  Philadelphia,  Reading  and  Chattanooga. 

Officers  serving  with  President  Myers  are  A.  W 
Latta  and  Henry  Rankin,  vice-presidents;  John  C 
Roberts,  vice-president  and  treasurer;  George  I 
Mason,  secretary ;  Arthur  Fuller,  Haddon  S.  Macki( 
Don  Maddox,  Albert  G.  Myers,  Jr.,  and  Percy  F 
Thompson,  assistant  vice-presidents ;  and  William  J 
Terry  and  William  L.  Wetzell,  assistant  secretarie 
and  assistant  treasurers.  The  Board  of  Director 
includes  J.  W.  Abernethy,  W.  L.  Brooks,  R.  S.  Did- 
son,  C.  D.  Gray,  A.  W.  Latta,  George  B.  Mason,  A.  C 
Myers,  A.  G.  Myers,  Jr.,  Henry  Rankin,  J.  C.  Rot 
erts,  Allen  H.  Sims  and  A.  K.  Winget. — Data  for  thi 
article  supplied  by  Charles  D.  Gray,  Sr.,  a  director  c 
Textiles-Incorporated. 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  1 


Johnston  Mills  Effectively  Operates  Yarn  and  Cloth  Plants 


Johnston  Mills  Co.,  Charlotte, 
is  the  selling  agent  and  one  of 
the  10  corporations  that  go  to 
make  up  what  is  known  as  the 
Johnston  Mills  Corporation. 
These  include  six  yarn  spinning 
mills,  a  mercerizing  plant,  a 
group  of  three  mills  manufactur- 
ing textiles  and  cloth  and  the  cor- 
poration owning  two  office  build- 
ings in  Charlotte,  the  Johnston 
Building,  a  modern  17-story  building,  and  the  Pied- 
mont Building,  a  nearby  four-story  office  building, 
an  earlier  home  and  headquarters  for  the  Johnston 
Mill  activities. 

Foundation  for  the  extensive  Johnston  Mills  activ- 
ities was  laid  in  1895  when  Charles  W.  Johnston 
came  to  Charlotte  to  serve  as  secretary  and  treasurer 
of  Highland  Park  Mfg.  Co.,  in  Charlotte.  Mr.  John- 
ston, a  farseeing  and  able  mill  executive,  through 
successful  operation,  continued  to  expand  the  John- 
ston holding  by  building  new  plants  and  purchasing 
plants  already  in  operation.  Johnston  Mills  became 
one  of  the  larger  textile  groups  in  the  State  during 
his  direction  of  their  affairs  which  ended  with  his 
death  in  1941.  His  son,  R.  Horace  Johnston,  suc- 
ceeded him  as  head  of  the  organization  with  success- 
ful operation  until  he  died,  a  relatively  young  man, 
in  1949.  David  R.  Johnston,  grandson  of  the  found- 
er, has  headed  several  of  the  Johnston  corporations 
since  his  father's  death. 

Six  yarn  spinning  mills  in  the  Johnston  Corp.  in- 
clude Johnston  Mfg.  Co.,  Charlotte ;  Union  Mills  Co., 
Monroe ;  Eastern  Mfg.  Co.,  Selma ;  Park  Yarn  Mills 
Co.,  Kings  Mountain;  Worth  Spinning  Co.,  Stony 
Point;  and  Monroe  Mills  Co.,  Monroe.  The  mercer- 
izing plant,  processing  the  yarns  from  these  six  mills, 
is  the  Spinners  Processing  Co.,  Spindale.  Another 
large  unit  is  the  Highland  Park  Mfg.  Co.,  engaged 
in  both  spinning  yarns  and  weaving  cloth,  with  two 
units,  Plants  Nos.  1  and  3,  in  Charlotte  and  Plant  No. 
2  in  Rock  Hill,  S.  C.  These  plants  contain  approxi- 
mately 129,000  active  spindles  and  almost  1,400 
looms  and  employ  around  3,500  workers.  Johnston 
Mills  Corp.  combined  the  various  activities  into  four 
separate  and  distinct  phases,  including :  manufactur- 
ing and  processing  cotton  yarns;  sales  of  cotton 
yarns;  manufacturing  and  finishing  cotton  fabrics, 
and  operating  two  office  buildings.  The  manufac- 
ture of  cotton  yarns  in  the  six  yarn  mills  is  directed 
by  Louis  R.  Briggs  who  is  general  superintendent 
and  who  also  has  charge  of  operation  of  the  Quality 
Control  Program  and  the  laboratory  maintained  by 
the  mills  to  assure  uniform  high  quality  in  the  yarn 


Large  plant  of  Johnston  Mfg.  Co.,  a  subsidiary  of  Johnston 
Mills  Co.,  located  in  Charlotte. 

produced.  The  Spinners  Processing  Co.,  Spindale, 
is  equipped  for  warp  mercerizing,  gassing,  chain 
dyeing  and  bleaching  and  also  has  a  modern,  well 
equipped  package  dye  house.  This  plant,  handling 
the  mercerizing,  dyeing  and  bleaching  of  yarns  for 
the  other  six  yarn  mills,  is  directly  supervised  by 
David  Lindsay.  Officers  of  this  corporation  are  R. 
W.  Stokes,  Jr.,  president;  Donald  R.  Jonas,  vice- 
president,  and  David  Lindsay,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer. 

Highland  Park  Mfg.  Co.,  with  its  main  office  and 
Plants  Nos.  1  and  3  in  North  Charlotte  and  Plant 
No.  2  in  Rock  Hill,  S.  C,  produces  staple  and  fancy 
ginghams,  rayons  and  shirtings  and  combed  broad- 
cloth. The  plant  operates  58,800  spindles  and  1,396 
looms  in  addition  to  operating  a  dye  house  and  fin- 
ishing plant  equipped  to  sanforize,  mercerize,  dye, 
bleach  and  finish  its  fabrics.  The  three  units  employ 
approximately  1,600  workers.  Officers  of  this  cor- 
poration are  David  R.  Johnston,  president;  T.  W. 
Church,  Jr.,  executive  vice-president  and  treasurer; 
Harvey  W.  Moore,  vice-president ;  Charles  J.  Stokes, 
secretary,  with  Arthur  S.  Jarrett  as  general  super- 
intendent. J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.  is  the  sole  selling 
agent  for  Highland  Park.  Among  the  recreational 
facilities  for  this  largest  unit  of  the  Johnston  Corp. 
are  a  modern  lighted  baseball  park  and  a  major 
interest  in  the  $500,000  North  Charlotte  YMCA 
Building,  erected  by  the  North  Charlotte  Foundation 
in  memory  of  the  late  Richard  Horace  Johnston  who 
founded  the  North  Charlotte  Foundation. 

Johnston  Mfg.  Co.,  Charlotte,  operates  20,184  spin- 
dles in  manufacturing  10s  to  40s,  single  and  ply, 
combed  peeler  yarns  on  cones,  tubes,  ball  warps  and 
beams.  This  plant  also  operates  the  modern  cotton 
classing  room  and  Quality  Control  Laboratory,  which 
serves  all  of  the  mills  in  the  corporation.  Approxi- 
mately 425  workers  are  employed.  Officers  of  this 
corporation  are  David  R.  Johnston,  president;  R.  W. 
Stokes,  Jr.,  vice-president  and  treasurer,  and  Charles 
J.  Stokes,  secretary. 


Eastern  Mfg.  Co.  Plant  at  Selma  affiliated  with 
Johnston  Mills  Co. 


Spinners  Processing  Co.,  Spindale,  one  of  Johnston 
Mills  Co.  plants. 


PAGE  1  1  2 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall, 


Park  Yarn  Mills  of  Kings  Mountain,  part  of  Johnston  Mills  Co. 

Union  Mills  Co.,  Monroe,  employs  275  workers  and 
operates  13,572  spindles  in  manufacturing  20s  to 
40s  combed  peeler  yarn,  single  and  ply,  on  cones, 
tubes  and  warps.  Officers  are  Albert  S.  Orr,  presi- 
dent and  treasurer;  David  R.  Johnston,  vice-presi- 
dent, and  Donald  R.  Jonas,  secretary. 

Eastern  Mfg.  Co.,  Selma,  employs  225  workers  and 
operates  12,972  spindles  in  the  production  of  26s  and 
40s  carded  yarns.  Officers  are  R.  W.  Stokes,  Jr., 
president ;  G.  W.  Grier,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and 
G.  W.  Grier,  Jr.,  assistant  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Park  Yarn  Mills  Co.,  Kings  Mountain,  produces  50s 
to  80s  combed  peeler  yarns,  single  and  ply,  on  cones, 
tubes  and  warps.  It  operates  22,368  spindles  and 
employs  275  workers.  Officers  are  David  R.  John- 
ston, president;  Harvey  W.  Moore,  vice-president; 
G.  F.  Lattimore,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Worth  Spinning  Co.,  Stony  Point,  operates  12,0C6 
spindles  in  the  production  of  36s  to  60s  combed  peeler 
yarns  on  cones,  tubes  and  warps.  It  employs  250 
workers.  Charles  J.  Stokes  is  president ;  David  Lind- 
say, vice-president,  and  John  G.  Stratford,  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

Monroe  Mills  Co.,  Monroe,  produces  on  9,000  spin- 
dles 30s  to  40s  combed  peeler  yarns,  single  and  ply, 
on  cones,  tubes,  and  warps.  The  plant  employs  160 
workers.  Officers  are  Albert  S.  Orr,  president;  R. 
A.  Morrow,  vice-president;  David  R.  Johnston,  sec- 
retary. 


Union  Mills  Co.,  Monroe,  one  of  the  plants  of  Johnston  Mills  Co. 

Anchor  Mills  Co.,  Charlotte,  owns  and  operates  the 
17-story  Johnston  Building  near  the  center  of  the 
business  district  in  Charlotte,  erected  in  1924  and 
considered  one  of  the  finest  office  buildings  in  the 
South.  It  also  owns  the  Piedmont  Building,  a  4- 
story  office  building  adjoining  the  Johnston  Build- 
ing and  a  former  headquarters  for  the  Johnston 
Mills  Corp.  R.  W.  Stokes,  Jr.,  is  president  and  treas- 
urer of  this  corporation;  Charles  J.  Stokes  is  vice- 
president,  and  William  B.  Phelps,  secretary,  with 
Cecil  F.  Harris  as  building  manager. 

Johnston  Mills  Co.,  Charlotte,  is  sole  sales  agent 
for  the  six  yarn  mills  and  the  mercerizing  plant  in 
the  Johnston  Corp.  This  corporation  has  its  princi- 
pal office  in  the  Johnston  Building,  Charlotte,  and 
operates  branch  offices  in  New  York,  Philadelphia, 
Reading,  Chattanooga  and  Winston-Salem.  Officers 
are  David  R.  Johnston,  president;  R.  W.  Stokes,  vice- 
president  and  treasurer;  Donald  R.  Jonas,  executive 
vice-president,  and  John  D.  Stratford,  secretary. 
Under  the  management  of  Mr.  Jonas,  other  repre- 
sentatives of  the  corporation  and  their  locations  fol- 
low: W.  J.  Yates,  Charlotte;  E.  E.  Jones,  Jr.,  Win- 
ston-Salem; F.  N.  Belk,  Chattanooga;  Jack  Fergu- 
son, Philadelphia ;  W.  J.  Crummer,  Philadelphia ;  Ray 
Bechtel,  Reading,  and  W.  P.  Phelps,  New  York.  The 
Johnson  Mills  Company  also  has  a  large  export  de- 
partment operating  under  the  supervision  of  P.  R. 
Petersen. 


Worth  Spinning  Co.  Plant  of  Johnston  Mills  Co.  at  Stony  Point.  Monroe  Mills  Co.,  Monroe,  subsidiary  of  Johnston  Mills  Co. 


Roanoke,  Rosemary,  Patterson  Mills  Large  Fabric  Producers 


Roanoke  Mills  Co.,  Rosemary  Mfg.  Co.  and  Patter- 
son Mills  Co.,  all  of  Roanoke  Rapids,  were  organized, 
incorporated  and  started  business  just  before,  around 
and  a  decade  after  the  turn  of  the  century.  This 
group  of  mills  made  of  Roanoke  Rapids  one  of  the 
oldest  and  largest  centers  of  textile  manufacturers 
in  the  State  outside  of  the  Piedmont  area.  About  the 
time  the  first  mill  was  organized,  Roanoke  Rapids 
was  called  Great  Falls  because  of  the  rapids  of  the 
Roanoke  River  at  this  point.  Just  about  the  time  the 
first  mill  was  started,  the  community  was  incorpo- 
rated as  Roanoke  Rapids  and  this  part  of  it  close  to 
the  Roanoke  River  is  still  referred  to  as  Old  Town. 
In  recent  years  the  city  limits  were  extended  to  in- 


clude the  Rosemary  community,  thus  forming  a  long 
and  narrow  municipality. 

Principal  figure  in  organizing  all  three  of  the 
Roanoke  Rapids  mill  groups  was  Samuel  F.  Patter- 
son, who  came  from  Winston-Salem  to  serve  as  treas- 
urer and  general  manager  of  the  Roanoke  Mills  Co., 
which  was  incorporated  in  1895  and  started  opera- 
tion in  1897.  With  Mr.  Patterson  in  organizing  this 
first  mill  were  W.  S.  Parker  from  Henderson,  who 
served  as  president  from  the  beginning  until  1929, 
and  Major  Thomas  L.  Emry  of  Weldon,  a  prominent 
and  wealthy  farmer  and  industrial  leader  who  also 
headed  the  organization  which  dug  the  canal  and 
built  a  dam  near  Roanoke  Rapids,  which  was  the 


Summer-Fall,  i$52 


The  e.  s.  c.  OuarTerLy 


page  1  1  3 


beginning  of  the  water  power  and  hydro-electric 
power  in  this  area. 

Meanwhile,  in  1900,  Mr.  Patterson,  along  with  his 
brother,  John  L.  Patterson,  and  three  Richmond,  Vir- 
ginia, men,  organized  the  Rosemary  Mfg.  Co.  Mr. 
Patterson  was  treasurer  from  1901  to  1919  and  from 
1919  to  1926  president  and  general  manager  of  this 
mill.  His  brother  served  as  vice-president  and  man- 
ager until  1919.  Then  in  1909  Mr.  Patterson  and 
four  Richmond  men  organized  the  Patterson  Mills 
Co.  which  started  operation  in  1910.  Mr.  Patterson 
was  general  manager  of  this  mill  from  its  organiza- 
tion to  1914  as  well  as  officer  of  the  other  two  mills 
until  his  death  in  1926. 

An  interesting  note  in  connection  with  the  Roanoke 
Mills  Co.  is  that  the  architect  and  probably  the  con- 
tractor was  Stanford  White,  whose  name  became 
known  nationally  later  when  he  was  murdered  by 
Harry  K.  Thaw.  Architect  White  had  previously 
drawn  plans  for  the  first  industry  at  Roanoke  Rapids 
operated  by  the  United  Industrial  Co.,  later  used  as 
part  of  the  Roanoke  Mills  Co.  plant  and  now  occu- 
pied by  the  Manchester  Board  &  Paper  Co.  Brick 
for  the  first  and  probably  both  of  these  original 
plants  were  made  in  Weldon  and  transported  to 
Roanoke  Rapids  in  mule-drawn  barges  over  the  old 
canal  constructed  by  Roanoke  Navigation  Company. 

At  times  during  their  operation  these  mills  passed 
through  rough  periods.  During  the  year  1928  the 
Roanoke  and  Rosemary  plants  were  purchased  by  the 
Simmons  Company,  bed  and  mattress  manufacturer 
with  executive  offices  at  230  Park  Avenue,  New 
York.  During  the  next  year  the  Simmons  Company 
also  purchased  Patterson  Mills  Co.  and  owns  the 
three  mills  entirely.  Products  of  the  mills  supply  the 
Simmons  Company  with  sheetings,  upholstery  and 
ticking  materials  and  also  produce  for  the  general 
trade. 

After  extensive  renovations  and  enlargements, 
these  three  mill  properties  are  entirely  modern  and 
up-to-date.  They  produce  highest  quality  flannels, 
tickings,  damasks,  sheetings  and  grey  goods.  Annual 
consumption  of  cotton  ranges  from  70,000  to  75,000 
bales.  The  four  mills,  including  the  No.  2  Roanoke 
Mills  Co.  plant,  contain  approximately  34  acres  of 
manufacturing  area  and  the  combined  capitalization 
is  slightly  over  $6,000,000.  Annual  production  is  in 
the  neighborhood  of  75,000,000  yards  of  fabrics.  The 
three  mills  employ  around  3300  workers  and  dis- 
tribute an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of  $7,000,000. 
Operating  in  the  three  plants  are  538  cards,  132,768 
spindles  and  3,204  looms.  Selling  agent  for  the  mills 
is  Simtex  Mills,  40  Worth  Street,  New  York,  also 
owned  by  the  Simmons  Company. 

All  of  these  mills  have  splendid  employer-employee 
relationships.  During  the  years  parents,  children 
and  grandchildren  have  been  among  the  employees. 
In  fact  the  average  length  of  employment  in  these 
mills  ranges  from  15  to  18  years.  The  company  pro- 
vides group  participation  accident,  health  and  life 
insuraunce  policies  for  all  employees  with  minimum 
length  of  service.  The  company  also  has  a  retire- 
ment plan  for  all  employees  and  a  medical  and  hos- 
pitalization plan  for  all  employees  and  dependents 
at  a  small  weekly  cost.  Cafeterias  are  operated  in  all 
plants  by  an  association  of  the  employees. 

Frank  C.  Williams  is  now  president,  treasurer  and 


general  manager  of  the  three  corporations  in  Roan- 
oke Rapids  as  well  as  vice-president  and  a  director 
of  the  Simmons  Company,  the  owning  corporation. 
Mr.  Williams  began  his  industrial  career  with  Roan- 
oke Mills  Co.  No.  2  on  January  19,  1919,  as  an  appren- 
tice at  $18.00  a  week.  He  was  then  24  years  old. 
After  proving  his  worth,  he  moved  up  through  the 
ranks  as  assistant  superintendent,  general  superin- 
tendent, assistant  manager  and  in  1934  was  elected 
vice-president  of  the  Roanoke  Mills  Co.,  the  title  of 
manager  was  added  in  1935  and  in  1947  he  became 
president,  treasurer  and  manager.  At  the  same  time 
he  was  elected  to  the  same  positions  with  the  Patter- 
son Mills  Co.  In  1949  he  was  elected  president  of  the 
Rosemary  Mfg.  Co.  and  in  1951  the  title  of  treasurer 
was  added.  In  1949,  also,  he  was  elected  vice-presi- 
dent and  a  director  of  the  parent  Simmons  Company. 
Alfred  Terrell,  New  York,  general  manager  of  the 
Simmons  Company,  was  president  of  Roanoke  Mills 
and  Patterson  Mills  and  vice-president  of  Rosemary 
Mills  for  a  12-year  period  from  1935  to  1947. 

Roanoke  Mills  Co. 

Roanoke  Mills  Co.,  incorporated  in  1895,  completed 
mill  No.  1  in  1897.  The  plant  employed  about  225 
workers  and  operated  12,096  spindles  and  320  looms. 
Original  production  was  towels  and  flannels.  Towel 
making  was  discontinued  after  a  few  years  and  the 
mill  produced  fancy  outing  flannels  and  shirting  flan- 
nels. In  1949  the  plant  began  producing  ticking 
materials.  Plant  No.  2  was  built  in  1917-18  and 
equipped  with  25,200  spindles,  producing  yarns  for 
automobile  fabrics.  In  1920,  700  looms  were  install- 
ed to  produce  fancy  flannels.  In  1929-30  Plant  No.  2 
converted  its  equipment  for  the  production  of  tick- 
ings and  upholstery  fabrics  for  the  Simmons  Com- 
pany and  the  general  trade.  These  plants  now  dye, 
bleach,  finish  and  sanforize  outing  flannels,  shirting 
flannels,  upholstery  fabrics  and  tickings. 

During  the  first  30  years  of  its  operation  Roanoke 
Mills  No.  1  utilized  the  swift  running  water  of  Roan- 
oke River  for  power.  In  1927  because  water  failed 
frequently,  electric  equipment  was  installed.  Several 
floods  wrought  considerable  damage  to  this  plant. 
In  1912  water  was  18  inches  deep  on  the  floor  and 
parts  of  the  plant  were  rebuilt.  In  the  disastrous 
flood  which  reached  its  crest  August  18,  1940,  water 
was  11  feet  above  the  first  floor.  Through  hectic 
work  as  the  waters  rose  2,758,000  yards  of  cloth  were 
saved  and  many  yards  went  down  the  river.  The 
four-story  building  then  settled  four  feet.  By  valiant 
work  the  building  was  jacked  up  to  its  original  level, 
the  first  floor  rebuilt  and  work  was  resumed  within 
six  weeks.  Damage  to  the  plant  alone  amounted  to 
$275,000.  Recent  completion  of  the  John  H.  Kerr 
dam  at  Buggs  Island  has  eliminated  the  dread  of 
high  water. 

Through  various  expansions  and  extensions  the 
Roanoke  Mills  now  contain  517,000  square  feet  of 
factory  space.  The  plant  employs  about  1525  work- 
ers and  annual  plant  wages  amount  to  around  $3,- 
120,000.  During  the  past  12  years  the  company  has 
spent  $4,300,000  in  installing  new  and  modern  equip- 
ment making  this  one  of  the  up-to-date  textile  plants. 
The  corporation  is  capitalized  at  $2,603,000,  $1,800,- 
000  in  common  and  $803,000  in  preferred  stock. 

Founders  of  Roanoke  Mills  Co.   included  W.   S. 


PAGE  1  1  4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1952 


Parker,  Henderson,  who  continued  as  president  un- 
til 1929 ;  Thomas  L.  Emry,  Weldon,  vice-president, 
and  S.  F.  Patterson,  treasurer  and  general  manager 
until  his  death  in  1926. 

Present  officers  in  addition  to  Mr.  Williams,  pres- 
ident, treasurer  and  manager,  are  G.  A.  Berkstresser, 
vice-president ;  W.  L.  Medlin,  secretary  and  assistant 
to  the  president ;  J.  W.  Sears  and  D.  E.  Bennett,  as- 
sistant managers;  A.  E.  Akers,  division  controller, 
and  W.  G.  Collier,  assistant  secretary. 

Rosemary  Manufacturing  Co. 

Rosemary  Manufacturing  Co.,  incorporated  in 
1900  by  S.  F.  Patterson  and  others,  was  headed  by 
W.  L.  Manning  from  Henderson  as  president  and 
general  manager  from  1926  until  he  retired  in  1949. 
This  mill  produces  damasks,  napkins,  upholsteries 
and  tickings,  performing  the  dyeing,  bleaching  and 
finishing  processes.  The  second  unit  of  the  mill  was 
erected  in  1901  and  the  third  in  1913.  These  plants 
produce  Jacquard  table  damasks,  fancy  tickings  and 
screen  printed  damasks. 

In  fact  this  plant  is  credited  with  being  the  largest 
Jacquard  mill  in  the  world.  The  combined  units  have 
factory  space  of  585,000  square  feet  and  produces 
8,500,000  yards  of  fabrics  annually,  using  11,000 
bales  of  cotton.  The  plant  employs  about  1175  work- 
ers and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $2,453,000. 
Capital  stock  is  $1,295,000. 


Officers  serving  with  Mr.  Williams,  president  and 
treasurer,  are  G.  A.  Berkstresser,  vice-president  and 
manager;  J.  E.  McGee,  vice-president  and  assistant 
manager;  W.  L.  Medlin,  secretary  and  assistant  to 
the  president;  Russell  Buxton,  assistant  secretary, 
and  A.  E.  Akers,  division  controller. 

Patterson  Mills  Co. 

Patterson  Mills  Co.,  incorporated  in  1909  and  com- 
pleted in  1910,  was  organized  by  S.  F.  Patterson  and 
associates  and  started  production  with  about  275 
workers.  It  is  now  engaged  in  manufacturing  sheet- 
ing and  dobby  grey  goods  and  produces  annually 
about  31,000,000  yards  of  these  fabrics.  The  plant 
now  employs  approximately  600  workers,  has  an 
annual  payroll  of  about  $1,500,000  and  has  factory 
space  of  235,000  square  feet. 

During  the  1947-48  period  approximately  $2,200,- 
000  was  spent  in  enlarging,  modernizing  and  con- 
verting the  plant  into  a  grey  goods  mill.  This  is  one 
of  the  most  modern  plants  in  the  State.  J.  A.  Moore 
was  president  and  general  manager  for  19  years  or 
until  1929.     Present  capitalization  is  $2,030,000. 

Present  officers  along  with  Mr.  Williams,  presi- 
dent, treasurer  and  manager,  are  G.  A.  Berkstresser, 
vice-president ;  W.  L.  Medlin,.  secretary  and  assist- 
ant to  the  president ;  A.  E.  Akers,  division  controller, 
and  G.  E.  Nethercutt,  assistant  secretary. 


American  &  Efird  Mills  Bi£  Combed-Carded  Yarn  Producer 


American  &  Efird  Mills,  Inc.,  Mount  Holly,  is  an 
infant  monster  brought  into  existence  a  few  months 
ago  through  a  merger  of  two  older  and  larger  cor- 
porations, American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  of  Mount 
Holly  and  Efird  Manufacturing  Co.  of  Albemarle. 
This  merger,  completed  May  30,  this  year,  resulted 
in  a  $13,000,000  corporation,  operating  144,000  spin- 
dles, thus  making  it  one  of  the  largest  producers  of 
combed  and  carded  yarns  in  the  entire  nation.  Pre- 
decessors in  the  new  organization  had  their  begin- 
ning before  the  turn  of  the  century  and  products  of 
the  American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.,  largely  in  Gas- 
ton County,  help  to  make  its  county  seat,  Gastonia, 

American  Processing  Plant  of  American  d  Efird  Mills, 
Mount  Holly. 


"the  capital  of  the  combed  yarn  industry  in  Amer- 
ica." 

However,  the  merger  itself  was  the  culmination 
of  a  movement  started  in  1947  when  American  Yarn 
acquired  controlling  interest  in  the  Efird  Mfg.  Co. 
Since  that  time  production  of  all  American  Yarn  and 
most  of  its  subsidiaries,  including  Efird,  has  been 
sold  by  the  American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  sales 
organization  which  maintains  sales  offices  in  New 
York,  Chicago,  Philadelphia,  Providence,  Chatta- 
nooga and  High  Point.  Plans  for  the  merger  were 
made  several  months  ago  by  the  directors  of  both 
of  the  component  parts  of  the  new  corporation. 
Stockholders  of  the  organizations  met  and  adopted 
the  proposal,  Efird  stockholders  in  Albemarle  May 
26  and  American  Yarn  stock- 
holders in  Mount  Holly  May  28. 
A.  K.  Winget,  president  of  the 
Efird  organization,  became 
chairman  of  the  board  of  the 
new  corporation  and  R.  S.  Dick- 
son, president  and  chairman  of 
the  board  of  American  Yarn, 
became  president  of  the  new 
corporation.  Directors  of  both 
the  earlier  corporations  became 
directors  of  the  new  organiza- 
tion and  officers  of  both  groups 
will  continue  until  the  next  an- 
nual meeting. 

Through  this  merger  Ameri- 
can &  Efird  Mills,  Inc.,  becomes 
the  owner  and  operator  of  14 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  5 


One  of  the  modern  spinning  rooms  of  American  &  Efird 
Mills,  Mount  Holly. 

spinning  mills,  including  subsidiaries,  and  a  mer- 
:ernizing  plant,  all  of  which,  except  two,  are  located 
n  Mount  Holly  or  Gaston  County.  These  mills 
lave  combined  employment  of  approximately  3,000 
vorkers.  Spinning  capacity  alone  of  merged  plants 
s  approximately  30,000,000  pounds  annually  of 
ligh  quality  combed  and  carded  yarns  made  from 
:otton,  wool  and  synthetics  with  combinations  of 
hese  materials. 

American  &  Efird  Mills  has  a  combined  capital  and 
lurplus  of  $13,000,000  with  an  annual  sales  volume 
)f  between  $40,000,000  and  $50,000,000.  All  plants 
>f  the  company  are  classed  as  modern  and  efficient 
md  manufacture  a  range  in  counts  of  all  types  of 
rarns  from  7s  to  100s,  both  single  and  ply,  in  addition 
o  mercerized  yarns. 

The  annual  report  for  1951,  excluding  minority 
nterests,  shows  that  the  combined  plants  produced 
•evenues  reaching  approximately  $40,000,000  from 
ill  products.  The  company  spent  some  more  than 
533,000,000  for  goods  and  services  in  producing  this 
•evenue.  Federal  and  state  income  taxes  amounted 
o  $1,645,000,  leaving  net  earnings  for  the  year  of 
lightly  more  than  $1,463,000.  Dividends  on  prefer- 
'ed  stock  amounted  to  $60,000  and  earnings  per  share 
ifter  preferred  dividends  amounted  to  $3.51.  Divi- 
lends  paid  on  common  shares  reached  $399,887  while 
larnings  retained  for  debt  retirement  and  used  in 
msiness  amounted  to  $1,003,256. 

Among  the  yarns  produced  by  this  company  from 
:otton  are  combed  and  carded,  thread  and  Durene 
md  from  synthetics,  nylon,  rayon,  orlon  and  dacron. 
Jses  of  fabrics  produced  from  these  yarns  include 
he  following:  parachute  cord 
md  uniform  fabrics;  industrial 
sewing  threads,  both  cotton  and 
synthetic ;  material  for  Armed 
^orces  uniforms ;  fabrics  for 
sport  shirts  and  blouses;  wor- 
steds and  cottons  for  sweaters 
md  knit  goods;  Durene  for 
mderwear  and  other  garments 
md  for  fancy  hosiery. 

Efird  Mfg.  Co.,  Albemarle, 
vas  founded  and  incorporated 
n  1896  by  John  S.  Efird  and  was 
"egarded  as  one  of  the  pioneer 


cotton  mills  in  that  area.  Starting  with  only  3,000 
spindles  the  company  has  expanded  through  the 
years  and  now  embraces  five  mills  operating  54,000 
spindles  engaged  in  the  manufacture  and  sale  of 
combed  yarns,  ranging  in  counts  from  7s  to  50s  and 
carded  yarns  from  7s  to  30s.  Controlling  interests 
in  the  Efird  firm  was  acquired  by  American  Yarn 
in  1947. 

American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.,  larger  of  the 
units  in  the  merger,  was  founded  in  1920  by  C.  E. 
Hutchinson  and  I.  C.  Lowe  as  a  result  of  a  consolida- 
tion of  Nims  Manufacturing  Co,,  Woodlawn  Manu- 
facturing Co.,  Adrian  Manufacturing  Co.,  Alsace 
Manufacturing  Co.,  and  American  Processing  Co.,  all 
of  Mount  Holly,  and  Union  Cotton  Mills  of  Maiden. 
The  Nims  Mfg.  Co.  was  one  of  the  oldest  cotton  mills 
in  Gaston  County,  having  been  organized  in  1891.  It 
is  now  the  completely  remodeled  and  re-equipped 
"Rush  Plant"  of  the  organization. 

Rush  S.  Dickson  and  associates  purchased  control 
of  American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  from  the  Hut- 
chinson-Lowe  interests  in  September,  1942,  and  im- 
mediately began  an  expansion  and  diversification  of 
products  as  well  as  a  program  of  modernizing  and 
enlargement.  At  that  time  the  organization  was  22 
years  old  but  some  of  the  predecessor  firms  and 
plants  dated  back  to  and  beyond  the  turn  of  the 
century. 

Included  in  the  expansion  program  was  the  pur- 
chase in  1943  of  the  outstanding  capital  stock  of 
Dean  &  Sherk  Co.,  Inc.,  a  plant  in  Lawrenceburg, 
Kentucky,  which  manufactures  and  finishes  commer- 
cial thread ;  purchase  of  the  Nelson  plants  at  Lenoir 
in  1944,  and  the  Dixon  plant  at  Gastonia  in  1945. 
Also  late  in  1945  Holly-Knit,  Inc.,  was  organized  in 
Mount  Holly  and  modern  tricot,  as  well  as  circular 
knitting  machines,  were  purchased  and  placed  in 
operation.  In  the  next  year  the  dyeing  and  finishing 
plant  of  Holly-Knit,  Inc.,  was  open.  This  division 
was  of  sufficient  size  to  accommodate  not  only  the 
production  of  the  knitting  plant  but  also  serves  as  a 
commercial  dyeing  and  finishing  operation  for  the 
production  from  various  tricot  and  circular  plants 
throughout  the  southeastern  territory. 

Spun  Fibers,  Inc.,  Lenoir,  was  organized  and  new 
modern  machinery  was  installed  in  1946  for  the  man- 
ufacture of  worsted  and  synthetic  yarns  for  the 
knitting  and  weaving  trade.  This  subsidiary  is  well 
established  and  has  its  own  independent  sales  organ- 
ization with  headquarters  in  New  York  City.  Al- 
though comparatively  new  at  the  time  for  the  south- 

Adrian  Plant,  Mount  Holly,  of  American  &  Efird  Mills. 


PAGE  1  1  6 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,    1952 


eastern  area,  this  operation  had  proven  eminently 
successful  under  the  management  of  executives,  some 
of  whom  are  also  officials  in  American  Yarn  &  Proc- 
essing Co. 

American  Yarn  in  1944  established  a  personnel  de- 
partment in  Mount  Holly  which  now  serves  the  eight 
plants  located  there  and  also  extends  to  the  other 
units  with  safety,  industrial  first  aid,  foremen's 
training,  and  employee  and  community  relations, 
including  the  publication  of  the  employees'  own  pa- 
per, "News  and  Views".  During  the  past  year  the 
hospitalization  and  insurance  program  has  been  im- 
proved and  expanded  entirely  at  the  expense  of  the 
company.  In  the  last  four  years  the  company  has 
added  a  quality  control  testing  laboratory,  Industrial 
Engineering  Department,  Methods  and  Standards 
Department  and  a  Waste  Control  Department,  all 
with  the  aim  of  extending  quality  control  over  all 
production. 

The  merger  recently  completed,  brought  about  in 
the  interests  of  stockholders,  employees  and  the 
trade,  was  designed  to  take  advantage  of  mass  pro- 
duction and  a  division  of  processes  to  allow  stream- 
lining of  operations.  It  was  designed  to  permit  ope- 
ration economies,  extension  of  quality  control  and 
standards,  to  cover  all  plants  and  to  provide  more 
extensive  inter-plant  use  of  manufactured  products. 

In  addition  to  the  original  plants  at  Mount  Holly, 
including  Adrian,  Madora,  Woodlawn  and  Rush 
plants  and  the  Union  plant  at  Maiden,  all  spinning 
plants,  and  the  American  Mercerizing  plant  at  Mount 
Holly,  the  merger  includes  the  five  Efird  plants  at 


Albemarle  and  these  subsidiaries:  Dean  &  Sherk 
Co.,  Inc.,  Lawrenceburg,  Kentucky,  manufacturers 
and  finishers  of  commercial  sewing  threads,  both  cot- 
ton and  synthetic;  Holly-Knit,  Inc.,  Mt.  Holly,  knit- 
ting, dyeing  and  finishing  of  warp  and  circular  knit- 
ted fabrics;  Spun  Fibers,  Inc.,  Lenoir,  spinners  of 
quality  worsted  yarns;  Fiber  Products,  Inc.,  Mount 
Holly,  spinning  and  weaving  worsted  and  synthetic 
yarns;  Guild  Mills  Corp.,  Mount  Holly,  converting 
woven  fabrics,  worsteds  and  synthetics,  and  the 
Wilson  Sales  Corp.,  cotton  shippers  and  merchants. 

When  the  American  Yarn  &  Processing  Co.  was 
purchased  in  1942  by  R.  S.  Dickson  and  associates, 
Mr.  Dickson  was  elected  president  and  has  since! 
directed  the  operations  of  this  large  textile  organiza- 
tion. He  was  also  named  a  chairman  of  the  board. 
With  the  completion  of  the  merger  A.  K.  Winget, 
Albemarle,  who  had  headed  the  Efird  corporation  forj 
many  years,  was  elected  chairman  of  the  board  of 
the  new  American  &  Efird  Mills,  Inc.,  and  Mr.  Dick- 
son was  elected  president  of  the  new  firm. 

Other  officers  of  the  merged  firm  include  W.  H. 
Suttenfield,  Charlotte,  vice-president  and  sales  man- 
ager; A.  W.  Bell,  Mount  Holly,  vice-president  and 
general  manager  of  manufacturing;  William  S. 
Montgomery,  Philadelphia,  and  T.  Jackson  Davis,i 
Mount  Holly,  assistant  vice-presidents  and  sales  rep- 
resentatives;  Lewis  E.  Chittum,  Mount  Holly,  treas 
urer;  Frank  H.  McKinney,  secretary  and  assistant 
treasurer ;  Miss  E.  Rozella  Abernethy,  Mount  Holly, 
and  D.  A.  Bruton,  Albemarle,  assistant  secretaries 
and  assistant  treasurers,  and  James  H.  Martin,  Jr., 
general  superintendent. 


J.  P.  Stevens  Large-Diversified  Manufacturer  of  Fine  Fabrics! 


J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.,  with  executive  and  sales 
offices,  Broadway  at  41st  Street,  New  York  City, 
and  with  regional  administrative  offices  in  Greens- 
boro, Greenville,  S.  C,  North  Andover,  Massachu- 
setts, Milledgeville,  Georgia,  and  Philadelphia,  Penn- 
sylvania, is  one  of  the  largest  and  most  diversified 
manufacturers  of  textiles  in  the  United  States.  In 
its  38  textile  plants  in  seven  states,  including  seven 
in  North  Carolina,  the  Stevens  firm  today  produces 
a  wide  variety  of  wool,  cotton,  rayon,  and  other  syn- 
thetic fabrics  including  cotton  goods  for  clothing  of 
all  kinds — shirts,  dresses,  work  clothes  and  special 
fabrics  for  the  upholstery  and  industrial  trades; 
woolens  and  worsteds,  ranging  from  lightweight 
fancy  suitings  to  heavy  overcoatings,  rayon  and  wool 
blended  fabrics  for  sportswear  and  popular  priced 
garments,  and  materials  for  automobile  upholstery; 
filament  and  spun  rayon,  Nylon  and  Orion  woven  into 
fabrics  for  women's  dresses,  underwear,  men's  and 
women's  suitings  and  a  variety  of  industrial  uses. 

Recently  constructed  and  thoroughly  modern  plant  of  Carter 
Fabrics  Division  of  J.  P.  Stevens  at  Wallace. 


Ultra-modern  office  and  laboratory  building  of  J.  P.  Stevens  d\ 

Co.,  Carter  Fabrics  Division,  on  landscaped  site  just 

within  city  limits  of  Greensboro. 


The 
Nylon, 
others 


introduction  of  the  newer  synthetic  fibers,: 
Orion,  Dacron,  Acrilan  and  Fiberglas  andj  | 
has  presented  a  challenge  to  technical  andj  I 
styling    ingenuity.      There    are!  i 
possibilities   yet   unrealized   fori  | 
blending  different  types  of  fibers 
and    creating    new    fabrics    for 
new  uses. 

The  products  of  the  Company 
are  distributed  through  its  sales 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Rage  1 1  7 


offices  in  New  York  City  and 
branch  sales  offices  throughout 
the  country  to  more  than  7,000 
customers,  including  garment 
manufacturers  of  all  kinds,  in- 
dustrial companies,  converters, 
jobbers,  mail  order  houses,  chain 
stores,  retailers  and  the  United 
States  Government.  Foreign 
markets  in  40  countries  are 
reached  through  the  Export  De- 
partment. 

The  North  Carolina  plants,  under  the  administra- 
tion of  the  Carter  Operating  Group,  consist  of  plants 
in  the  following  North  Carolina  cities :  Carter  Fab- 
rics Division,  Greensboro;  Cleveland  Cloth  Mills 
Division,  Shelby;  Stanley  Mills  Division — Plants 
No.  1  and  No.  2,  Stanley;  Ragan  Spinning  Division 
at  Gastonia,  and  Stevens'  new  plant,  the  Carter  Fab- 
rics Division,  Wallace.  Principal  administrative  of- 
fices of  the  Carter  Operating  Group,  which  manages 
11  mills  in  this  and  adjoining  states,  are  located  in 
Greensboro.  Other  plants  managed  by  the  Carter 
Group  for  the  Stevens  organization  include  the  Car- 
ter Fabrics  Division  at  South  Boston,  Va.,  the  Slater 
Manufacturing  Co.  Division  at  Slater,  S.  C,  and  the 
Republic  Cotton  Mills  Division — Plants  No.  1,  No.  2, 
and  No.  3  at  Great  Falls,  S.  C. 

The  North  Carolina  plants  produce  rayon  fabrics, 
rayon  and  nylon  fabrics,  rayon  and  wool  yarns.  Han- 
nah-Pickett  Worsted  Mills  at  Rockingham,  manufac- 
turing worsted  fabrics,  is  operated  by  the  Company's 
M.  T.  Stevens  Southern  Division.  The  seven  plants 
in  North  Carolina  employ  approximately  3,000  work- 
ers. All  of  these  seven  plants  were  acquired  by  pur- 
chase or  through  consolidation,  except  the  new,  thor- 
oughly modern  plant  constructed  at  Wallace,  which 
started  production  late  in  1951. 

In  addition  the  Stevens  Company  acts  as  agent  for 
the  selling  of  textiles  for  a  number  of  independent 
mills  including  the  following  North  Carolina  com- 
panies: Brown  Manufacturing  Co.,  Concord;  High- 
land Park  Manufacturing  Co.,  Charlotte;  Marion 
Manufacturing  Co.,  Marion,  and  Gambrill  &  Melville 
Mills  Co.,  Bessemer  City. 

The  Carter  Fabrics  Operating  Group  executive 
offices  are  located  in  one  of  the  newest  textile  mill 
offices  in  the  South,  and  was  opened  by  J.  P.  Stevens 
&  Co.,  Inc.  in  February,  1951.  It  is  located  in  the 
city  limits  of  Greensboro  on  U.  S.  Highway  421, 
three  miles  west  of  the  business  district.    The  struc- 


Plants  No.  1  &  2  of  Stanley  Mills  Division  of  J.  P.  Stevens 
&  Co.  at  Stanley,  Gaston  County. 

ture  is  a  gem  of  modern  windowless  building  design. 
The  exterior  is  cream  colored  pressed  brick  trimmed 
with  Mo-sai  stone  and  Crab  Orchard  Tennessee  na- 
tive stone.  Housed  in  the  new  building  are  offices 
of  W.  J.  Carter,  executive  vice-president  and  director 
of  purchases  of  synthetic  yarns  and  supplies  for  the 
Stevens  firm ;  and  executive  offices  of  the  Operating 
Group  which  bears  his  name  and  manages  11  Stevens 
mills.  In  addition,  the  building  contains  the  manu- 
facturing control  laboratory  for  the  Group  purchas- 
ing department  for  supplies  used  by  all  Southern 
mills  in  the  Stevens  chain,  group  accounting  depart- 
ment, synthetic  yarn  purchasing  department  for  all 
Stevens  mills ;  dye  testing  laboratory  for  Stevens ; 
manufacturing  control  offices,  cost  department,  engi- 
neering office,  public  and  industrial  relations,  and 
communications. 

The  building  is  situated  on  a  wooded  site  of  21 
acres  overlooking  the  country  side  and  the  famous 
Starmount  Country  Club  Golf  Course.  A  visitor  has 
the  feeling  of  approaching  a  busy  country  estate 
when  driving  up  the  side  road  leading  to  the  en- 
trance. 

While  many  mills  of  Stevens  are  windowless,  this 
is  the  first  completely  windowless  office  building. 
The  absence  of  windows  affords  a  perfectly  flexible 
interior  partition  arrangement. 

The  air  conditioning  and  heating  system  is  unique. 
There  is  no  boiler  and  no  smoke  stack.  Heat  in  the 
winter  is  provided  by  a  heat  pump  system  whereby 
heat  is  taken  from  water  from  deep  wells  in  a  re- 
verse refrigeration  cycle.  In  the  summer  the  cool- 
ing is  provided  from  the  same  wells;  the  water  is 
returned  to  the  earth  so  as  to  insure  a  steady  de- 
pendable supply. 

The  layout,  the  design,  and  the  selection  of  mate- 


Qarter  Fabrics  Division  Plant  of  J.  P.  Stevens  in  Greensboro. 


Cleveland  Cloth  Mill  Division  of  J.  P.  Stevens  at  Shelby. 


PAGE  1  1  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195: 


rials  have  combined  to  give  Stevens  a  very  efficient 
place  in  which  to  carry  on  administrative  operations 
in  connection  with  the  Carter  Operating  Group  of  the 
company. 

Principal  officers  of  J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  in- 
clude Robert  T.  Stevens,  chairman  of  the  board,  and 
John  P.  Stevens,  Jr.,  president,  both  of  South  Plain- 
field,  New  Jersey.  Wilbert  J.  Carter,  Greensboro, 
N.  C,  founder  and  former  head  of  the  earlier  Carter 
Fabrics  Corporation,  is  executive  vice-president  and 
director  of  purchases  of  all  synthetic  yarns  and  fibers 
for  the  entire  Stevens  organization,  and  directs  op- 
erations of  the  11  plants  comprising  the  Carter  Ope- 
rating Group.  His  brother,  Harry  C.  Carter,  is  also 
a  director  and  a  vice-president  of  the  Stevens  Com- 
pany, and  general  manager  of  the  Carter  Operating 
Group.  Norman  A.  Cocke,  Charlotte,  is  a  director 
of  the  corporation. 

Ragan  Spinning  Division  of  J.  P.  Stevens  in  Gastonia. 


Associated  with  the  Carter  brothers  in  the  Greens- 
boro administrative  headquarters,  and  residents  of 
Greensboro,  are  J.  A.  Lybrand,  Jr.,  a  vice-president 
and  manager  of  the  purchasing  department  for  syn- 
thetic yarns  and  fibers ;  and  J.  A.  White,  a  vice-presi- 
dent and  assistant  general  manager  of  the  Cartel 
Operating  Group. 

Thousands  of  North  Carolinians  are  offered  fre- 
quent opportunities  at  scheduled  "Open  House"  pro- 
grams to  visit  the  mills  of  the  company.  At  such 
visitations  one  becomes  acquainted  with  not  only  the 
Stevens  manufacturing  processes  done  by  its  em- 
ployees who  have  the  best  working  tools  and  pleasanl 
working  conditions,  but  one  is  impressed  by  the  com- 
pany's practice  of  sound  human  relations.  Stevens 
officials  and  management  are  proud  in  saying,  "Oui 
organization  is  a  living  testimonial  to  the  more  thar 
27,000  men  and  women  who  operate  its  plants,  ma 
chines,  and  offices,  thus  contributing  to  the  progress 
of  America." 

On  its  record,  North  Carolin 
ians  may  look  with  pride  foi 
Stevens  to  strive  by  means  o: 
deeds  to  continue  to  be  a  textil* 
business  operating  in  Nortl 
Carolina  as  an  organization  0 
character  which  serves  the  pub 
lie  interest. 


N.C.  Finishing  One  of  World's  Large  Commission  Finished 


North  Carolina  Finishing  Co.,  Salisbury,  was  or- 
ganized in  1916  as  the  Yadkin  Finishing  Co.  The 
controlling  interest  was  purchased  in  1920  by  the 
Erlanger  family  who  planned  to  use  its  limited  facil- 
ities for  bleaching  pa  jama  checks  for  the  then  very 
popular  BVD  union  suits.  The  name  was  changed 
in  1921  to  North  Carolina  Finishing  Co.  Today  the 
company  has  no  affiliation  with  any  garment  manu- 
facturing company.  It  has  become  one  of  the  largest 
commission  finishing  plants  in  the  world. 

The  finishing  plant  is  located  on  a  235  acre  tract  of 
land  six  miles  north  of  Salisbury  on  Highway  29  and 
the  Yadkin  River.  The  initial  employment  of  less 
than  100  workers  has  increased  to  more  than  1100 
with  an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of  $3,500,000.  The 
plant  consists  of  approximately  400,000  square  feet 
of  floor  space  or  the  equivalent 
of  about  9  acres.  It  is  the  largest 
manufacturing  plant  in  Rowan 
County  in  size  and  number  of 
employees. 

North  Carolina  Finishing  Co. 
bleaches,  dyes,  and  finishes  cot- 
ton and  man-made  fiber  fabrics 
for  converters,  distributors  and 
manufacturers.  Approximately 
15,000  dozen  sheets  and  pillow 
cases  are  manufactured  weekly. 
Annual  production  is  approxi- 
mately 125  million  yards  of  cloth. 
The  products  are  shipped  to  all 
sections  of  this  country  and 
many  foreign  countries.  A  wide 
variety  of  fabrics  are  processed, 


8illl|fcil 


■I 


mm 

wgM§ssm 


.ytv 


#sfe*. 


including  broadcloths,  balloon  cloths,  drills,  twills 
jeans,  oxfords,  gabardines,  sheetings,  lawns,  ging 
hams,  print  cloths,  poplins,  chambrays,  satins 
sateens  and  crepes  used  by  all  types  of  garment  man 
ufacturers,  over-the-counter  and  mail  order  trade 
The  company  was  the  first  organization  in  Rowai 
County  to  receive  the  Army-Navy  "E"  award  durinj 
World  War  II  and  now  processes  large  quantities  o 
goods  on  Government  contracts  for  the  armed  forces 

Sales  offices  are  located  in  New  York  at  93  Wortl 
Street,  Gordon  Coles,  agent  cottons  and  1450  Broad 
way,  George  L.  Marshall,  agent  rayons. 

Officers  of  North  Carolina  Finishing  Co.  are  Jul 
ian  Robertson,   president;   Jack  C.   Childers,   vice! 

North,   Carolina  Finishing    Co.   plant   in    beautiful   setting   o| 
banks  of  Yadkin  River,  a  few  miles  from  Salisbury. 

■Her 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  9 


president;  James  H.  Riddle,  vice-president  and  gen- 
eral manager;  Edward  T.  Taylor,  secretary  and 
treasurer. 

Alexander  Mills  Division,  Forest  City,  was  estab- 
lished in  1917  as  Alexander  Manufacturing  Co.  It 
was  merged  with  North  Carolina  Finishing  Co.  in 
1950.  The  mill  produces  wide  sheetings  for  manu- 
facture into  sheets  and  pillow  cases  at  the  finishing 
plant.  Alexander  Mills  Division  employs  over  350 
people  with  an  annual  payroll  of  aprpoximately 
$1,000,000.      Alexander    sheets    and    pillow    cases, 


bleached,  dyed,  flat  and  fitted  are  sold  by  Cone  Mills, 
Inc.,  New  York. 

North  Carolina  Finishing  Co.  is  constantly  devel- 
oping new  and  improved  processes  for  dyeing  and 
finishing  cloth  made  of  cotton  and  the  newer  man- 
made  fibers.  Fabrics  containing  dacron,  dynel,  fiber 
V,  Fortisan,  nylon  and  orlon  are  being  successfully 
finished  and  a  substantial  part  of  the  current  produc- 
tion consists  of  goods  in  the  latest  crease  resistant, 
embossed,  spot  repellant  and  stabilized  finishes. 


Firestone  One  of  World's  Largest  Unit  Textile  Plants 


Firestone  Textiles,  Gastonia,  a  division  of  the  Fire- 
stone Tire  &  Rubber  Co.,  Akron,  Ohio,  one  of  the 
largest  textile  plants  under  one  roof  in  the  world, 
was  acquired  April  2,  1935,  from  Manville-Jenckes 
Co.  After  completing  the  rearrangement  of  machin- 
ery to  improve  product  flow,  production  was  begun 
in  June,  1935.  During  the  period  ending  October  31, 
1935,  production  totaled  3,159,368  pounds.  This  is 
about  three  weeks'  production  today.  Clock  em- 
ployees enrolled  as  of  October  31,  1935,  number  1361. 

In  1938  Firestone  Textiles  started  producing  rayon 
fabrics  experimentally  and  by  1941  rayon  tires  were 
being  produced  by  the  tire  industry  on  a  large  scale. 
Effects  of  World  War  II  and  the  result  of  critical 
shortage  of  rubber,  required  a  reduction  in  the  pro- 
duction of  tire  fabrics.  At  that  time  Firestone  Tex- 
tiles began  the  production  of  yarns  and  during  the 
year  1942  sold  5,000,000  pounds  of  yarn  for  Army 
tent  duck,  producing  about  500,000  pounds  of  fabric 
for  the  Army.  As  a  result  of  Firestone  activities, 
the  firm  was  awarded  the  first  of  several  "E"  awards 
for  efficiency  in  the  production  of  Army  and  Navy 
materials.  Because  of  the  shift  to  rayon  and  other 
synthetic  fabrics,  the  name  Firestone  Cotton  Mills, 
Inc.,  was  changed  to  Firestone  Textiles,  Inc.,  in  1944 
to  reflect  more  accurately  the  products  of  the  plant. 
In  1950  the  corporate  name  was  discontinued  and 
Firestone  Textiles,  a  division  of  the  parent  company, 
was  adopted. 

After  the  war  ended,  the  plant  carried  through  a 
large  program  of  improvement,  enlargement  and  in- 
stallation of  new  equipment,  making  Firestone  Tex- 
tiles one  of  the  most  complete  and  modern  textile 
plants  in  the  nation. 

Home  of  Firestone  Textiles  in  Gastonia,  one  of  the  largest 
textile  plants  under  one  roof  in  the  world. 


Important  among  post-war  improvements  was  the 
installation  of  fluorescent  lighting  throughout  the 
plant  at  a  cost  of  $200,000.  The  4,525  fluorescent 
units  installed  boosted  average  lighting  from  six 
foot-candle  to  22  foot-candle  in  all  departments  ex- 
cept weaving  where  the  average  is  34  foot-candle. 
By  providing  employees  with  better  lighting  to  do 
their  jobs,  the  company  improved  its  products,  re- 
duced accidents  and  increased  production.  Equally 
important  is  the  improvement  in  the  health  of  em- 
ployees resulting  from  the  elimination  of  all  eye 
strain. 

Another  important  post-war  change  was  the  in- 
stallation of  controlled  conditioning  equipment  in  the 
Rayon  Weaving  Department.  With  this  equipment 
it  is  possible  to  maintain  atmospheric  conditions  and 
room  temperature  within  very  close  tolerances.  This 
conditioning  is  necessary  for  the  best  processing  of 
rayon  and  is  beneficial  to  the  workers  in  that  de- 
partment as  well. 

Recently  the  company  completed  an  office  exten- 
sion which  increased  working  space  by  75  per  cent. 

The  plant  is  engaged  in  carding,  spinning,  spool- 
ing, twisting  and  weaving  cotton,  rayon  and  nylon 
tire  cord  for  the  parent  Firestone  organization  and 
also  produces  carded  yarns  and  woven  fabrics  for 
the  general  trade.  Firestone  Textiles  employs  ap- 
proximately 2250  workers  who  operate  the  123,076 
spinning  and  twisting  spindles  and  349  looms  in  the 
plant.    The  annual  payroll  is  in  excess  of  $6,500,000. 

W.  A.  Karl,  Akron,  Ohio,  is  president  of  Firestone 
Textiles  and  has  charge  of  all  textile  operations  for 
The  Firestone  Tire  and  Rubber  Company  and  Har- 
old Mercer,  Gastonia,  is  general  manager  of  the  plant. 

Firestone  Textiles  maintains  splendid  employee 
relationships  through  its  many  benefits  and  recrea- 


Page  120 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


tional  activities.  In  1940  the  first  Firestone  village 
houses  were  sold  to  the  employees.  This  step  was 
halted  during  the  war  period  but  was  resumed  in 
1949  and  practically  completed  in  1950. 

Safety  of  the  individual  employee  is  and  has  always  been 
a  prime  consideration  at  all  Firestone  plants.  The  Gastonia 
plant  holds  numerous  safety  recognitions  dating  from  1941,  in 
which  year  Firestone  Textiles  established  a  world  record  in 
the  textile  industry  for  having  operated  9.217,145  manhours 
without  a  lost  time  accident.  The  plant  has  received  the 
Certificate  of  Achievement  in  Safety  from  the  North  Carolina 
Department  of  Labor  for  five  consecutive  years.  Moreover 
this  plant  shares  with  the  entire  Firestone  Organization  the 
"Award  of  Honor"  of  the  National  Safety  Council  won  this 
year  for  the  sixth  time  in  seven  years. 

The  plan  of  providing  vacation  with  pay  for  employees  was 
inaugurated  in  1942.  Under  this  plan  each  clock  employee 
receives  vacations  and  benefits  as  follows:  After  working  one 
year,  he  is  granted  one  vacation  week  each  year  with  vacation 
pay  amounting  to  two  per  cent  of  his  gross  earnings  for  the 
preceding  year.  After  working  five  years  the  vacation  is  two 
weeks  each  year  with  four  per  cent  of  gross  earnings  of  each 
preceding  year  going  into  the  vacation  pay  envelope,  and  after 
15  years  he  is  granted  the  maximum  of  three  weeks  vacation 
with  six  per  cent  of  gross  yearly  earnings  for  vacation  pay. 

Generous  policies  for  complete  group  insurance  coverage 
have  been  developed  at  low  cost  to  the  employee.  These  include 
life  insurance,  accidental  death  and  dismemberment  insurance, 
accident  and  sickness  weekly  benefits,  hospitalization  and  sur- 
gical expense  benefits.  As  an  example  of  how  the  insurance 
program  works:  If  an  employee  earning  $2625.00  per  annum 
is  prevented  from  working  because  of  non-occupational  acci- 
dent or  illness,  he  will  be  paid  (assuming  he  subscribes  to  this 
insurance  program)  $2  6.60  per  week  up  to  2"6  weeks  should 
the  disability  continue  that  long.  The  employee,  in  the  exam- 
ple cited,  would  also  be  insured  for  $3500.00  life  insurance 
and  $3500.00  accidental  death  and  dismemberment  insurance. 
The  life  insurance  benefit  would  be  paid  even  if  death  resulted 


from  the  hazards  of  his  employment.  In  addition,  this  insur- 
ance program  provides  scheduled  surgical  expense  benefits  up 
to  a  maximum  of  $200.00  for  any  one  surgical  procedure.  Hos- 
pital expense  benefits,  except  for  maternity  cases,  are  also 
provided  up  to  a  maximum  of  $10.00  per  day  for  hospital  room 
and  board  plus  $100.00  for  other  special  hospital  charges.  The 
total  benefits  paid  for  any  one  confinement  would  be  $410.00. 
Hospital  maternity  benefits  are  limited  to  $10.00  per  day  for 
room  and  board  for  14  days  plus  $50.00  for  special  charges. 
The  hospital  and  surgical  expense  benefits  are  also  available 
to  eligible  dependents  of  employees. 

From  this  description  of  the  group  insurance  program,  it 
will  be  seen  that  the  group  insurance  plan  was  designed  to 
provide  continuous  protection  for  employees.  Workmen's  com- 
pensation insurance  protects  employees  from  the  hazards  of 
their  employment  and  the  group  insurance  program  protects 
them  from  hazards  not  related  to  their  employment.  It  should 
be  noted,  however,  that  the  life  insurance  benefit  is  payable 
regardless  of  whether  death  occurs  from  occupational  or  non- 
occupational causes. 

The  Non-Contributory  Pension  Plan  is  the  most  recent  em- 
ployee benefit  adopted  by  the  Company.  Under  this  program 
all  employees  retire  at  the  age  of  65.  Those  having  worked 
25  years  or  more  are  entitled  to  a  minimum  of  $100.00  a  month 
including  Social  Security  payments. 

Organized  recreation  is  carried  on  extensively,  Firestone 
Textiles  having  developed  many  local  and  sectional  winners  in 
baseball,  basketball,  Softball,  bowling  and  other  sports.  In  the 
year  1951  it  is  estimated  that  more  than  50%  of  Firestone 
employees  participated  in  some  form  of  company  sponsored 
recreation.  An  annual  All-Sports  Banquet  has  been  held  each 
year  since  1936  in  recognition  of  outstanding  employees  in  this 
program.  These  banquets  are  the  high  light  of  the  recreation 
year.  They  are  well  attended,  well  publicized,  and  are  the 
occasions  for  bringing  to  Firestone  many  nationally  known 
coaches  and  public  speakers. 

Boy  scouts  are  organized  among  the  sons  of  the  employees 
and  the  company  operates  Camp  Firestone  with  a  lake  and 
cottages  for  its  workers.  "Firestone  News,"  a  twice  monthly 
publication,  was  started  this  year. — Rewritten  by  Firestone 
Public  Relations  Dept. 


ERLANGER  PRODUCES  FINE  DRESS, 

SUIT  FABRICS  FROM  NEW  FIBERS 

Erlanger  Mills,  Inc.,  Lexington,  was  established 
in  1914  by  Charles  and  Abraham  Erlanger  as  the 
Erlanger  Cotton  Mills  Co.  for  the  purpose  of  manu- 
facturing cotton  cloth  for  B.V.D.  underwear.  The 
shift  from  B.V.D.  materials  started  in  the  middle 
1920s  to  keep  pace  with  a  distinct  change  in  the 
styling  of  men's  underwear. 

Erlanger  gradually  shifted  to  production  of  fancy 
cotton  fabrics  designed  principally  for  shirting  and 
dress  materials.  In  1935  the  management  sensed  the 
possibilities  of  synthetic  fibers  and  started  experi- 
mental production  with  these  new  fibers.  By  1940 
the  production  of  synthetics  had  grown  to  such  an 
extent  that  the  name  was  changed  to  Erlanger  Mills, 
Inc.,  in  order  that  the  name  would  more  clearly  indi- 


Vieiv  of  Erlanger  Mills,  Lexington,  showing  attractive  homes  of  the  mill  village 


cate  the  diversification  of  products.  The  company 
now  produces  a  wide  variety  of  highly  styled  fabrics 
from  rayon,  acetate,  nylon,  orlon,  and  dacron.  Ex- 
periments are  being  conducted  with  still  more  new 
fibers  which  are  expected  to  produce  revolutionary 
effects  in  garments  of  the  future. 

Annual  production  of  Erlanger's  30,000,000  yards 
of  fabrics  goes  into  suits,  dresses  and  underwear  for 
women  as  well  as  suits,  slacks,  sport  jackets  and 
sport  shirts  for  men.  These  fabrics  are  sold  to  lead- 
ing fabric  convertors  who  use  quality  merchandise 
in  extra  style  appeal  by  J.  W.  Valentine  Co.,  Inc.,  at 
40  Worth  Street,  New  York. 

Approximately  1,000  people  are  employed  at  Er- 
langer which  has  an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of  $2,- 
500,000.  The  plant  occupies  more  than  325,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space,  is  air-conditioned  and  is 
equipped  with  the  latest  modern  machinery  for  the 
production  of  quality  fabrics.  Er- 
langer Village  contains  321  neat,  com- 
fortable residences  for  employees. 

The  company  operates  a  well-round- 
ed recreational  program  for  employ- 
ees, including  a  recreational  building, 
kindergarten,  swimming  pool  and  a 
large,  well-equipped  playground.  Er- 
langer officers  and  employees  are  act- 
ive in  all  civic,  religious,  educational 
and  cultural  affairs  of  Lexington. 

Erlanger  officers  include  Julian 
Robertson,  president;  Smith  Crow, 
vice-president  in  charge  of  manufac- 
turing; E.  P.  Cofield,  vice-president  in 
charge  of  sales ;  Jack  Childers,  treas- 
urer ;  G.  S.  Hartzog,  secretary. 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  121 


WOOLENS,  ANCIENT  FABRICS,  INCREASING  RAPIDLY  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA: 

Chatham,  World's  Largest  Unit  Woolen  Mill,  Blanket  Leader 

Chatham  Manufacturing  Co.,  Elkin,  now  consid- 
ered the  largest  single  woolen  mill  in  one  unit,  had 
its  beginning  with  the  installation  of  one  carding 
machine  in  a  little  grist  mill  to  prepare  wool  for  the 
spinning  wheel  a  few  years  after  the  War  Between 
the  States.  However,  this  beginning  was  closely 
related  to  what  became  known  as  the  old  pre-war 
Elkin  Cotton  Mill,  a  part  of  which  still  stands  on  the 
bank  of  the  Big  Elkin  Creek  and  in  which  uniform 
cloth  was  made  for  Confederate  soldiers.  This  mill 
was  operated  by  Richard  Gwyn. 

Alexander  Chatham,  native  of  Wilkes  County  and 
former  officer  in  the  Confederate  Army,  went  to 
Elkin  soon  after  the  war  ended  and  was  employed 
as  a  clerk  and  assistant  in  the  Elkin  Cotton  Mill.  A 
year  or  two  later  Mr.  Chatham  married  Mr.  Gwyn's 
daughter  and  he  and  his  brother-in-law,  Thomas  Le- 
noir Gwyn,  erected  a  small  store  and  grist  mill  on 
the  same  creek  about  a  mile  north  of  the  old  cotton 
mill  site.  Since  most  of  the  clothing  in  this  area 
was  carded,  spun  and  woven  on  hand  operated  ma- 
chines, these  two  young  men  decided  to  install  a 
carding  machine  in  their  little  mill.  Later  they 
installed  a  small  power  driven  spinning  machine  and 
still  later  put  in  a  few  looms  for  weaving  the  cloth. 
Phis  was  the  beginning  of  the  Elkin  Woolen  Mill. 
Most  of  the  work  done  in  the  beginning  was  custom 
weaving  and  on  a  toll  basis.  After  a  few  years  two 
sons  of  one  of  the  owners,  Hugh  Gwyn  Chatham  and 
Richard  M.  Chatham,  would  haul  wagon  loads  of 
blankets  into  the  mountain  area  surrounding  Elkin 
and  trade  them  to  the  farmers  for  wool. 

As  this  infant  industry  prospered  the  owners  erect- 
ed a  larger  building  adjoining  the  grist  mill  and  more 
machinery  was  purchased.    The  nearest  railroad  at 


Plant  of  the  Chatham  Mfg.  Co.,  Elkin,  famous  for  blankets, 
largest  one  unit  icoolen  mill  in  the  ivorld. 


the  time  was  the  North  Carolina  Railroad  at  Salis- 
bury and  it  was  necessary  to  haul  the  machinery 
as  well  as  other  supplies  and  materials  from  this 
point  by  wagon  train.  To  install  this  machinery  in 
the  new  plant  and  to  instruct  the  workers  in  its 
operation  Gilvin  T.  Roth,  a  young  mechanical  engi- 
neer with  one  of  the  machinery  builders,  was  sent 
down  from  Philadelphia.  Mr.  Roth  proved  so  effi- 
cient that  he  was  employed  as  superintendent  of  the 
factory.  Later  he  became  vice-president  of  the  com- 
pany, continuing  as  such  until  his  death  in  1927.  The 
Gilvin  Roth  YMCA,  erected  on  the  present  Chatham 
Mfg.  Co.  site,  was  named  in  his  honor. 

Following  the  completion  of  the  railroad  to  Elkin 
from  Winston-Salem  to  North  Wilkesboro  in  1890, 
the  Elkin  Woolen  Mills  erected  a  new  and  larger 
plant  along  side  the  railroad  and  near  the  Chatham 
home  place.  New  machinery  was  purchased  and  in- 
stalled in  the  new  modern  brick  buildings.  About 
this  time  the  interest  of  Thomas  L.  Gwyn  was  pur- 
chased by  members  of  the  Chatham  family  and  the 
name  of  the  firm  was  changed  to  Chatham  Manufac- 
turing Co.  Hugh  G.  Chatham,  eldest  son  of  Alexan- 
der Chatham,  then  became  president. 

During  the  years  this  firm  had  been  manufacturing 
blankets,  flannels,  cassimeres,  jeans,  knitting  yarns 
and  other  items.  Several  of  these  woolen  fabrics 
were  continued,  but  a  line  of  fine  woolen  blankets 
became  the  principal  product.  Within  a  few  years, 
under  the  splendid  management  of  Hugh  Chatham, 
the  company  was  finding  new  outlets  and  was  ship- 
ping blankets  to  all  parts  of  the  country.  A  serious 
flood  along  the  Yadkin  River  in  1898  damaged  the 
building  and  machinery  extensively  but  repairs  were 
soon  made  and  production  was  resumed.  A  branch 
factory  was  erected  in  Winston-Salem  in  1907.  After 
several  years  of  operation,  this  plant  was  converted 


Page  i  22 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,    1  $52 


into  a  finishing  plant  for  the  Elkin  mill.  In  1940  the 
two  plants  were  consolidated  at  Elkin  where  large 
buildings  were  erected  to  accommodate  the  manufac- 
turing and  finishing  machinery  along  with  new  of- 
fices and  large  warehouses  for  storage. 

Meanwhile  in  1916  another  and  more  serious  flood 
in  the  Yadkin  Valley  almost  destroyed  the  plant  in 
the  lowland.  The  plant  was  closed  for  several  weeks 
while  the  buildings  and  machinery  were  being  re- 
paired. Still  another  flood  in  1940  practically  de- 
molished the  old  plant  near  the  river  which  was  then 
being  used  as  a  storage  warehouse  and  scouring 
plant.  The  main  building  of  that  plant  was  destroy- 
ed by  fire  a  few  weeks  later. 

Meanwhile  in  1917  the  original  buildings  at  the 
present  site  were  erected  and  the  machinery  moved 
to  this  higher  location.  Much  new  machinery  was 
added  and  the  business  continued  to  expand. 

Hugh  Chatham,  who  had  ably  directed  the  busi- 
ness for  more  than  30  years  through  its  expansion 
period,  retired  from  active  management  in  the  mid- 
19208  and  exercised  only  supervisory  direction  until 
his  death  in  1929.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  son, 
Thurmond  Chatham,  whose  energy  and  ability  re- 
sulted in  greater  expansion  in  both  the  capacity  and 
variety  of  products.  He  enlarged  the  sales  force 
and  established  the  main  sales  office  in  New  York 
City  with  branches  in  Chicago,  Boston,  San  Fran- 
cisco, Dallas  and  Atlanta.  In  1944  Thurmond  Chat- 
ham became  chairman  of  the  Board  of  Directors 
and  was  succeeded  as  president  by  Albert  L.  Butler, 
who  had  been  with  Chatham  Mfg.  Co.  since  1914  and 
had  been  executive  vice-president  for  several  years. 
Recently  Mr.  Chatham  was  renominated  for  a  third 
term  as  a  Member  of  Congress  from  the  Fifth  North 
Carolina  District.  He  served  in  World  War  I  as  an 
Ensign  on  the  Battleship  Mississippi  and  in  World 
War  II  he  was  Lieutenant  Commander  on  the  Cruiser 
Phoenix,  later  promoted  to  Commander.  His  two 
sons,  Hugh  G.  Chatham,  II,  and  Richard  Thurmond 
Chatham,  Jr.,  are  fourth  generation  members  of  the 
firm. 

During  World  War  II  Chatham  Mfg.  Co.  received 
one  of  the  very  first  Army-Navy  Awards  for  excel- 
lence in  military  production.  In  the  war  period  the 
company  received  five  separate  awards  for  its  per- 
formance under  government  contracts.  Also  during 
the  World  War  II  period  the  company  produced  more 


Card  room  of  Chatham  Mfg.  Co. 

than  10,000,000  blankets  for  the  Army,  Navy  and 
Marine  Corps.  At  present  part  of  the  Chatham  plant 
is  engaged  in  government  production  making  blank- 
ets, woolen  shirting  and  lining  materials.  Back  dur- 
ing World  War  I  Chatham  produced  hundreds  of 
thousands  of  olive  drab  blankets  for  the  U.  S.  Army 
and  large  numbers  for  the  French  Army. 

As  a  partial  basis  for  its  recognition  as  the  largest 
unit  woolen  manufacturing  plant  in  the  world,  Chat- 
ham products  have  an  annual  dollar  value  ranging 
between  $35,000,000  and  $40,000,000.  Chatham  em- 
ploys from  2500  to  3000  workers  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll ranging  around  $8,000,000.  In  recent  years  it  has 
awarded  a  sizable  bonus  to  its  employees  at  Christ- 
mas time  and  July  4.  A  majority  of  employees  come 
from  Elkin  and  within  the  radius  of  about  15  miles, 
largely  from  Surry,  Yadkin  and  Wilkes  Counties. 
Buses  operate  on  regular  schedules  hauling  workers 
from  home  to  the  plant  and  back.  For  15  years  the 
plant  has  operated  on  a  three  shift  basis  and  has  been 
on  a  six-day  work  schedule.  During  the  war,  this 
schedule  was  increased  to  seven  days. 

Chatham  has  enjoyed  through  the  years  an  un- 
usually fine  employer-employee  relationship  and  is 
generous  in  the  benefits  provided  the  employees. 
Notably,  the  company  built,  equipped  and  turned  over 
to  the  people  of  Elkin  and  surrounding  area  the  Gil- 
vin  Roth  YMCA,  one  of  the  finest  and  best  equipped 
such  buildings  in  the  South — named  for  the  long  time 
general  superintendent  and  vice-president  of  the 
company.  This  building,  located  on  the  mill  site, 
contains  a  splendid  gymnasium  equipped  with  bas- 
ketball courts,  skating  rink,  stage,  motion  picture 
machines,  folding  bleachers  for  spectators  at  games, 
dances  and  other  events;  swimming  pool,  bowling 
alleys,  locker  rooms,  showers,  sandwich  shop  and 
grill,  rooms  for  civic  and  other  club  meetings,  Youth 


El---'  :   I       :■'■■. ■••  v 


* ' ' '  M  * 


llill 


Wflfl 


Weave  room  of  Chatham  Mfg.  Co. 


Rewinding  process  in  plant  of  Chatham  Mfg.  Co. 


ummer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  $.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  23 


>nter,  manual  training  shop — all  directed  and  han- 
iled  by  experts. 

The  company  provides  group  life  insurance,  em- 
)loyees  paying  a  small  premium ;  health  and  accident 
nsurance ;  a  Chatham  Pension  Trust,  established  by 
he  company  for  retirement  at  65  or  in  case  of  dis- 
ibility;  a  hospitalization  insurance  plan;  a  credit 
inion  for  employees  and  their  families;  "The  Lucy 
lanes  Chatham  Club"  for  girls  and  young  women ; 
'The  Fellowship  Club"  for  retired  women  employees ; 
'The  Thurmond  Chatham  Unity  Club"  for  young 
nen,  and  other  group  organizations.  The  company 
jublishes  an  eight-page  twice-a-month  newspaper, 
'The  Chatham  Blanketeer",  devoted  to  news  of  and 
or  the  employees. 

Chatham  operates  an  effective  safety  program  un- 
ler  a  capable  director.  For  the  fourth  consecutive 
rear  the  company  has  qualified  for  and  received  the 
tnnual  "Award  of  Honor  for  Distinguished  Service 
n  Safety"  presented  by  the  National  Safety  Council, 
is  well  as  safety  awards  from  the  United  States  and 
>Torth  Carolina  Departments  of  Labor. 

Blankets,  both  wool  and  blended,  are  the  chief 
Chatham  products.  In  addition  to  the  high  class  of 
rade  in  regular  blankets  the  firm  produces  many 
tlankets  for  hotels,  steamship  lines,  hospitals  and 
>ther  institutions  with  attractive  monograms,  ini- 
ials  or  names.    Especially  popular  are  baby  blankets 


in  plain  and  Jacquard  patterns  in  pastel  shades.  Other 
popular  woolen  and  blended  items  include  automobile 
upholstery,  woolen  suitings,  including  sportswear, 
and  other  woolen  apparel  fabrics.  Chatham  pur- 
chases its  wool  from  New  Zealand,  Australia,  South 
America  and  South  Africa  in  addition  to  large  quan- 
tities of  domestic  wool  fibers.  In  addition  it  imports 
large  quantities  of  cotton  from  India  and  is  one  of 
the  largest  users  of  synthetic  fibers,  including  nylon, 
rayon,  orlon,  dacron  and  dynel. 

Chatham  Mfg.  Co.  officers  includes  R.  Thurmond 
Chatham,  chairman  of  the  board;  Albert  L.  Butler, 
president;  Hugh  G.  Chatham,  II,  executive  vice- 
president  ;  J.  Harrison  Lassiter,  T.  J.  Sheehe,  Eleanor 
S.  Taylor,  J.  W.  L.  Benson  and  R.  W.  Harris,  vice- 
presidents;  W.  R.  Hartness,  Jr.,  treasurer;  J.  A. 
Booher,  secretary ;  N.  J.  Blackwood,  assistant  treas- 
urer ;  C.  F.  Dixon,  assistant  secretary ;  F.  L.  Neaves, 
general  superintendent;  R.  H.  Lankford,  assistant 
to  general  superintendent ;  E.  H.  Hodel,  superintend- 
ent ;  T.  M.  Roth,  assistant  superintendent. 

Directors  are  Thurmond  Chatham,  A.  L.  Butler, 
H.  G.  Chatham,  II,  Richard  T.  Chatham,  Jr.,  William 
L.  Butler,  J.  Harrison  Lassiter,  T.  J.  Sheehe,  J.  W.  L. 
Benson,  W.  A.  Neaves,  R.  W.  Harris,  F.  L.  Neaves, 
R.  G.  Chatham,  T.  M.  Roth,  E.  M.  Hodel,  John  D. 
Eller,  C.  W.  Poor,  Robert  M.  Hanes,  and  Ralph  P. 
Hanes. 


Leaksville  Oldest  Continuous  Woolen  Mill  in  Entire  South 


The  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.,  with  plants  near 
"harlotte  (Homestead  Station)  and  at  Spray,  is  be- 
ieved  to  be  the  oldest  woolen  mill  in  continuous  serv- 
ce  in  the  entire  South.  A  few  pieces  of  woolen  raa- 
hinery  installed  in  a  commissary  building  near  the 
jeaksville  Cotton  Mills,  started  operation  "prior  to 
853". 

Background  interest  in  the  site  of  the  first  woolen 
nill  dates  gack  to  Colonel  William  Byrd  who  sur- 
eyed  the  Virginia-North  Carolina  line,  named  the 
ection  near  the  confluence  of  the  Dan  and  Smith 
livers  the  "Land  of  Eden",  and  claimed  20,000  acres 
,s  his  pay  as  surveyor.  On  this  land  are  now  lo- 
afed the  Tri-Cities  of  Leaksville-Spray-Draper,  all 
mportant  textile  centers.  By  1750  settlers  were  en- 
ering  the  Valley  of  the  Dan  and  occupying  this  area, 
ohn  Leak  owned  the  farm  on  which  Leaksville  now 
tands.  A  Mr.  Barnett  cut  a  canal  from  Smith  River 
lear  the  Leak  farm  which  fed  the  water  downhill  to 
i  grist  mill  he  had  erected  on  the  bank.  Water  tuni- 
ng the  big  wheel  churned  up  white  foam  as  it  landed 
>elow.  Barnett's  place  came  to  be  known  as 
'Splashy",  a  name  later  changed  to  Spray.  John 
forehead,  father  of  Governor  Morehead,  purchased 
his  mill,  the  dam  and  the  canal. 

After  the  death  of  John  Morehead,  two  of  his  sons, 
rohn  Motley  Morehead,  (governor)  and  Samuel 
forehead,  started  to  develop  the  canal,  land  and  grist 
nill  which  had  been  purchased  by  their  father.  They 
idded  a  cotton  gin,  oil  mill,  blacksmith  shop  and  a 
general  store  and,  in  1835,  started  the  erection  of  a 
otton  mill.  This  cotton  mill  was  in  process  of  con- 
duction until  1839,  in  which  year  it  began  the  man- 
ifacture  of  cotton  goods. 


John  Motley  Morehead,  though  elected  Governor 
of  North  Carolina  (1840-44),  continued  to  manage 
the  Rockingham  enterprises  and  several  years  prior 
to  1853  he  installed  some  woolen  machinery  in  the 
loft  of  the  commissary  of  the  Old  Rock  Mill.  This 
machinery  supplanted  the  old  method  of  hand  card- 
ing and  spinning  of  the  wool  grown  on  the  Morehead 
and  adjacent  farms.  The  plant  operated  on  a  barter 
and  exchange  system  which  was  simply  the  taking 
as  toll  some  of  the  wool  brought  in  by  farmers  to 
cover  the  cost  of  spinning  the  yarns.  This  toll  wool 
was  then  spun  into  yarns  and  prior  to  1853  some  of 
these  yarns  were  woven  into  blankets  and  other  fab- 
rics on  the  cotton  looms  operating  in  the  Old  Rock 
Mill. 

Two  or  three  years  later,  about  1856  or  '57,  looms 
and  finishing  machinery  were  added  to  the  wool  card- 
ing and  spinning  machinery;  the  commissary  was 
moved  to  another  location  and  the  wool  mill  became 
known  as  "The  Little  Factory"  and  was  a  complete 
plant.  This  plant  made  blankets  and  uniform  fabrics 
for  the  Confederate  Army  and,  while  its  operations 
were  interrupted  by  the  War  Between  the  States,  it 
resumed  operations  immediately  thereafter. 

Governor  Morehead  died  in  1866  and,  after  his 
death,  two  of  his  sons,  Major  James  Turner  More- 
head  of  Rockingham  County  and  John  Lindsay  More- 
head  of  Charlotte,  took  over  the  Rockingham  County 
properties  and  operated  them  as  a  partnership  known 
as  "J.  Turner  Morehead  and  Co."  until  about  1893. 

In  1881  the  Little  Factory  (or  Woolen  Mill)  was 
divorced  from  the  partnership  and  became  a  separate 
corporation.  This  was  done  in  order  to  furnish  cap- 
ital with  which  to  enlarge  the  plant  and,  from  1881, 


PAGE  1 24 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1952 


-}"  ■ 


•  .  „4- 


«„*«■.  •• 


^^Sli!!! 


'■:*m^:. 


Picture  taken  prior  to  1885  in  Leaksville,  showing:  at  left, 
commissary,  in  the  loft  of  which  a  modest  start  was  made  re- 
sulting in  present  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills;  two  main  central 
buildings,  center  building  in  background  were  part  of  the  Leaks- 
ville Cotton  Mill;  at  right  is  the  old  grist  mill;  the  old  office 
building,  extreme  right  with  part  of  roof  showing;  in  back- 
ground, left  of  center,  is  a  residence. 

this  Corporation  manufactured  a  complete  line  of 
blankets  and  woolen  fabrics.  The  stock  was  owned 
by  J.  Turner  Morehead,  John  Lindsay  Morehead  and 
their  sister,  Mrs.  Letitia  Morehead  Walker. 

The  high  quality  of  blankets  and  woolen  fabrics 
produced  by  this  mill  as  early  as  1884  was  noted  pub- 
licly. In  1885  the  Dan  Valley  Echo,  a  newspaper 
published  in  Leaksville,  carried  a  mill  advertisement 
which  said :  "At  the  North  Carolina  State  Exposi- 
tion in  1884  we  were  awarded  a  Grand  Gold  Medal, 
the  highest  premium  of  all  competition  for  the  varie- 
ty, excellency  and  beauty  of  finish  of  our  manufac- 
tured goods.  We  shall  spare  no  pains  to  continue  to 
sustain  our  reputation  for  making  neat  and  durable 
pure  woolen  goods." 

The  partnership  of  J.  Turner  Morehead  and  Co. 
continued  to  operate  the  Old  Rock  Mill  (which  was 
the  cotton  mill)  among  other  properties.  In  1893- 
94  this  partnership  was  dissolved  and  the  cotton  mill 
and  some  of  the  properties  owned  by  it,  as  well  as 
extensive  land  holdings,  were  sold  to  the  Spray  Water 
Power  &  Land  Company.  This  corporation  was  form- 
ed by  B.  Frank  Mebane  who  had  married  Miss  Lily 
Morehead,  daughter  of  James  Turner  Morehead.  The 
woolen  mill  continued  to  function  as  a  separate  cor- 
poration and  was  not  involved  in  this  dissolution. 

Major  James  Turner  Morehead  retained  an  inter- 
est in  some  of  the  properties,  most  notably  the  Wilson 
Aluminum  Co.,  which  he  owned  and  operated.  At 
that  time  the  Wilson  Aluminum  Co.  had  the  largest 
electrical  furnace  in  the  world  and,  as  the  name  im- 
plies, was  formed  for  the  purpose  of  making  alumi- 
num. This  purpose  was  not  accomplished  by  Major 
Morehead,  but  his  son,  John  Motley  Morehead,  III, 
did  discover  a  practical  and  economical  process  for 
the  manufacture  of  calcium  carbide.  This  resulted 
later  in  the  formation  of  the  Union  Carbide  &  Car- 
bon Corporation,  one  of  the  industrial  giants  of 
America,  with  which  corporation  Mr.  John  Motley 
Morehead,  III,  presently  of  Rye,  New  York,  has  been 
identified  since  its  inception. 

John  Motley  Morehead,  II,  son  of  John  Lindsay 
Morehead  and  a  member  of  the  partnership  of  J. 


Turner  Morehead  &  Co.,  became  the  chief  executive 
officer  of  the  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills  and  continued 
to  operate  this  company  until  his  death  in  1923.  In 
1898  he  doubled  the  capacity  of  the  mill  by  adding 
additional  buildings  and  machinery.  He  lived  in 
Spray  until  1913,  when  he  moved  to  the  home  of  his 
father  in  Charlotte. 

In  1919  he  built  an  additional  plant  of  the  Leaks- 
ville Wollen  Mills  at  Homestead  Station  in  Mecklen- 
burg County,  some  seven  miles  west  of  Charlotte 
This  plant  had  a  little  more  than  twice  the  capacity 
of  the  parent  plant  in  Spray  and  today  is  the  main 
office  of  The  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.  John  Lind- 
say Morehead,  II,  son  of  John  Motley  Morehead,  II 
is  now  the  president  of  the  corporation. 

In  1929  The  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.,  acquired 
by  purchase,  the  Leaksville  Cotton  Mills,  which  mill 
had  been  erected  on  the  site  of  the  Old  Rock  Mill, 
long  since  destroyed  by  fire.  By  this  acquisition  the 
properties  of  the  original  Leaksville  Mills  were  merg-| 
ed  and  woolen  machinery  was  installed  in  the  cotton 
mill  building,  again  increasing  the  production  of  the 
Spray  plant. 

At  this  time  Mr.  John  Motley  Morehead,  III,  son  oi 
James  Turner  Morehead,  became  Chairman  of  the 
Board  of  The  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.,  which 
position  he  occupies  today. 

Thus  the  principal  officers  of  the  Leaksville  Woolen 
Mills  have  been  the  following  in  the  order  named: 

John  Motley  Morehead  (governor)— 1853-1866. 
James  Turner  Morehead— 1866-1893. 
John  Motley  Morehead,  11—1893-1923. 
John  Lindsay  Morehead,  11—1923- 

Other  officers  presently  serving  with  John  Motley 
Morehead,  chairman  of  the  board,  and  John  Lindsay 
Morehead,  president,  are:  James  P.  Wilson,  execu- 
tive vice-president;  Horace  F.  Hill,  vice-president 
Duncan  MacDonald,  secretary  and  treasurer ;  Thomj | 
as  H.  Hoover,  assistant  treasurer. 

It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  all  of  the  stock  of  Th( 
Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  Inc.,  with  the  exception  oi 
a  few  shares  sold  to  employees,  has  always  been  helc| 
by  the  direct  descendants  of  Governor  Morehead  J 
founder  of  this  business. 

The  plant  at  Spray  now  occupies  approximate^ 
144,000  square  feet  of  mill  buildings  which  contairi 

(Continued  on  Page  130) 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  125 


Fieldcrest  Mills  Produce  Quality  Rugs,  Blankets,  Spreads 


Fieldcrest  Mills,  a  division  of  Marshall  Field  & 
Company  with  nine  plants  in  the  Tri-Cities  of  Leaks- 
ville,  Spray  and  Draper  and  two  in  Fielddale,  just 
across  the  state  line  in  Virginia,  is  engaged  in  the 
production  of  high  quality  textiles,  including  bed- 
spreads, blankets,  sheets,  electric  blankets,  rugs  and 
rayon  dress  goods.  These  quality  products  are  made 
from  wool  and  cotton  and  the  modern  man-made 
fibers  of  rayon,  nylon,  and  dynel  and  others  sepa- 
rately and  in  combinations.  Fieldcrest  products  are 
nationally  advertised  and  distributed  through  high 
class  department  stores  throughout  the  nation. 

The  Fieldcrest  Mills  use  about  55  acres  of  floor 
space  or  approximately  2,500,000  square  feet.  Em- 
ploying approximately  5,000  workers  and  with 
monthly  payrolls  of  over  $1,000,000,  these  plants 
form  the  economic  backbone  of  the  large  industrial 
area  embraced  in  the  Tri-Cities.  Fieldcrest  products 
in  addition  to  their  nationwide  distribution  are  sold 
also  through  department  stores  in  Canada,  Bermuda 
and  Hawaii. 

Fieldcrest  sales  offices  are  located  at  88  Worth 
Street,  New  York,  with  branch  sales  offices  in  Chi- 
cago and  Los  Angeles.  The  Karastan  Rug  Mill  of 
Fieldcrest  maintains  separate  sales  offices  at  295 
Fifth  Avenue,  New  York,  with  branches  in  Chicago 
and  San  Francisco.  Fieldcrest  rayons  are  handled 
through  sales  offices  at  350  Fifth  Avenue.  Fieldcrest 
products  are  marketed  in  leading  department  stores 
in  large  cities  throughout  the  nation  under  a  fran- 
chise system.  Distributors  handle  the  sales  to  stores 
in  smaller  cities  and  towns,  giving  complete  national 
distribution,  in  addition  to  quantities  of  merchandise 
shipped  to  foreign  countries. 

The  mills  forming  the  nucleus  of  the  Fieldcrest 
group  were  built  around  1900  by  the  B.  Frank  Meb- 
ane  interests  and  in  the  neighborhood  of  pre-Civil 
War  cotton  and  woolen  mills.  These  plants  were 
acquired  by  Marshall  Field  &  Company  between  1905 
and  1912.    The  original  mills  were  greatly  expanded 

Section  of  Fieldcrest  Mills,  Spray,  showing  Bleachery,  Finish- 
ing Mill,  Electric  Blanket  Mill  and  Central  Warehouse. 


Two  Fieldcrest  mills  at  Draper,  Sheeting  Mill,  left,  and 
Blanket  Mill,  right. 

and  improved  and  several  new  plants  were  built. 
For  several  years  the  North  Carolina  mills,  in  addi- 
tion to  others  in  the  United  States  and  foreign  coun- 
tries, 29  in  all,  were  operated  as  an  adjunct  to  Mar- 
shall Field  &  Company  by  its  Wholesale  Division 
which  distributed  practically  the  entire  output.  In 
1935  the  Wholesale  Division  was  discontinued  and 
the  foreign  mills  and  those  making  unrelated  prod- 
ucts were  sold.  The  mills  in  North  Carolina  and  Vir- 
ginia and  the  lace  curtain  mill  at  Zion,  111.,  were  set 
up  as  the  Manufacturing  Division  of  Marshall  Field 
&  Company.  At  that  time  sales  departments  were 
organized  to  distribute  the  products  on  a  national 
basis  to  retail,  wholesale  and  chain  organizations. 

In  1947  the  name  was  changed  to  Fieldcrest  Mills 
in  order  to  identify  completely  the  Fieldcrest  brand 
name  on  the  products  produced  by  the  organization. 
Contrary  to  the  general  belief  Fieldcrest  has  never 
manufactured  products  solely  for  Marshall  Field  & 
Company  department  stores.  Only  a  small  percent- 
age of  its  products  is  retailed  through  the  company's 
stores  and  Fieldcrest  competes  strongly  with  other 
textile  manufacturers  for  the  Marshall  Field  &  Com- 
pany business.  Just  as  strenuously  it  contends  to 
place  its  products  on  the  open  market  with  other 
wholesale  and  retail  outlets. 

Milton  C.  Mumford,  vice-president  of  Marshall 
Field  &  Company,  is  general  manager  of  Fieldcrest 


PAGE  126 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


Mills  Division  with  headquarters  at  88  Worth  Street, 
New  York.  Harold  W.  Whitcomb,  assistant  general 
manager,  is  in  charge  of  the  North  Carolina  and  Vir- 
ginia mills;  E.  W.  Medbery  is  production  manager; 
E.  L.  Brown  is  comptroller  and  Ben  C.  Trotter  is 
counsel.  Macon  P.  Miller  is  director  of  industrial 
and  public  relations. 

The  Fieldcrest  operations  in  the  Tri-Cities  area 
include  the  Rayon  Mill,  the  Bleachery,  the  Finishing 
Mill,  the  Electric  Blanket  Mill  and  the  Central  Ware- 
house in  Spray ;  the  Bedspread  Mill  and  the  Karastan 
Rug  Mill  at  Leaksville,  and  the  Blanket  Mill  and 
Sheeting  Mill  at  Draper.  Just  across  the  state  line 
from  the  Tri-Cities  at  Fieldale,  Va.,  are  a  towel  mill 
and  a  hosiery  mill.  These  Fieldcrest  Mills  begin 
operations  with  raw  cotton  and  wool  and  the  syn- 
thetic fibers,  including  rayon,  nylon,  dynel  and 
others,  and  carries  them  through  the  entire  manu- 
facturing process  to  finished  packaged  products 
ready  for  the  retail  market. 

Fieldcrest  maintains  Research  and  Quality  Con- 
trol laboratories  which  are  among  the  most  complete 
and  best  equipped  in  the  textile  industry.  All  mate- 
rials are  tested  scientifically  many  times  all  along 
the  line  to  maintain  uniform  quality  fabrics.  Experts 
are  studying  and  working  constantly  to  improve  the 
methods,  to  develop  new  materials  and  to  produce 
machinery  improvements  and  refinements.  All  of 
this  care  and  continuous  study  is  for  the  purpose  of 
turning  out  better  products  to  keep  the  business  go- 
ing successfully  and,  admittedly,  to  keep  ahead  of 
competition. 

Fieldcrest  mills  has  maintained  excellent  indus- 
trial relations  throughout  its  history.  It  was  one  of 
the  first  textile  companies  to  give  employees  paid 
vacations,  adopting  this  plan  in  1940.  Also  Field- 
crest started  one  of  the  first  pension  plans  in  the  in- 
dustry. The  Marshall  Field  &  Company  pension 
plan,  inaugurated  in  1943,  continues  as  one  of  the 
few  funded  plans.  The  company  pays  the  entire  cost 
and  the  pension  fund,  now  valued  at  approximately 
$23,000,000,  is  held  in  trust  by  a  Chicago  bank.  This 
trust  is  irrevocable  and  is  for  the  sole  benefit  of 
eligible  employees.  A  comprehensive  group  health, 
life  and  accident  insurance  program  has  been  in 
effect  for  nearly  20  years,  the  company  and  the  em- 
ployees sharing  the  premiums.  A  mutual  aid  hos- 
pitalization insurance  program  protects  employees 
and  all  of  their  dependents,  practically  100%  of  the 
employees  belonging  to  the  voluntary  association. 

Some  12  years  ago  the  Fieldcrest  management  sold 
the  formerly  company-owned  houses  in  the  mill  corn- 
Two  of  the  Fieldcrest  Mills  at  Leaksville,  Bedspread  Mill,  left, 
and  Karastan  Rug  Mill,  right. 


ttssllil 


Part  of  looms  in  weave  room  of  Fieldcrest  Rayon  Mill,  Spray.\ 

munity  to  its  employees  at  exceedingly  reasonable 
prices.  As  a  result  of  this  and  encouragement  to- 
ward home  ownership,  Fieldcrest  employees  have 
one  of  the  highest  percentages  of  home  ownership  in 
the  textile  industry.  The  employees  have  since  re- 
modeled and  enlarged  their  homes  and  large  numbers 
have  constructed  new  homes. 

Enviable  safety  records  have  been  maintained  in 
Fieldcrest  Mills  throughout  the  years.  In  addition 
the  company  provides  other  advantages  looking  to- 
ward the  health  and  welfare  of  its  employees.  A  full 
time  medical  director  is  in  charge  of  a  well-equipped 
Medical  Department.  A  registered  nurse  is  on  duty 
here  constantly  to  administer  first-aid  and  to  treat 
minor  injuries  and  illnesses.  Each  mill  has  a  first 
aid  dispensary  with  a  registered  nurse  or  first-aid 
attendant  on  duty.  The  Medical  Department  provides 
free  complete  physical  examinations  annually  to  em- 
ployees requesting  them. 

The  company's  policy  of  promoting  employees 
within  the  organization  has  resulted  in  a  high  per- 
centage of  supervisors  promoted  from  production 
jobs.  Several  forms  of  training  are  provided  to  help 
employees  qualify  for  better  jobs.  The  Personnel 
Research  and  Training  Department  conducts  testing 
programs  designed  to  measure  the  ability  and  thus, 
place  employees  in  congenial  jobs.  Officials  assist  in 
on-the-job  training  and  give  special  study  courses  on 
a  variety  of  subjects.  Cooperating  with  the  public 
schools  Fieldcrest  Mills  employees  have  access  tc 
training  on  many  technical  subjects  at  the  Leaksville 
Township  Vocational  School.  Courses  here  include 
loom  fixing,  blue  printing,  textile  manufacturing 
weaving  and  designing,  machine  shop  practices  and 
others. 

Fieldcrest  Blanket  Mill,  Draper — This  is  one  of  the 
largest  blanket  operations  in  the  nation.  The  mil' 
operates  complete  carding  and  spinning  equipmenlj 
for  both  wool  and  cotton  systems  and  has  three  types' 
of  looms — plain,  dobby  and  jacquard — and  a  large) 
modern  dyeing  plant.  This  plant  produces  nearly 
all  types  of  blankets  in  fancy  jacquard  patterns 
plains  and  plaids.     Fieldcrest  electric  blankets  are 


J 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  127 


woven  on  this  mill's  jacquard  looms.  The  plant  pro- 
duces all-wool  blankets  and  a  variety  of  blends  and 
cotton  blankets.  Recently  the  plant  began  produc- 
tion of  the  new  dynel  blanket,  the  first  to  produce  in 
full  bed  size.  This  blanket  is  100%  dynel,  the  new 
wonder  chemical  fiber  produced  by  Union  Carbide 
&  Chemical  Corp.  The  blanket  mill  operates  363 
looms  and  23,000  spindles,  employing  about  900 
workers.  The  mill  and  warehouse  contain  more  than 
333,000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 

Bedspread  Mill,  Leaksville — This  mill  is  equipped 
with  jacquard  box  looms,  capable  of  weaving  spreads 
in  four-color  patterns.  Draperies  to  match  are  wov- 
en on  the  same  machines.  One  of  the  popular  prod- 
ucts is  a  Colonial  type  bedspread  known  as  "Con- 
cord", an  extra  heavy  looped  pile  fabric.  Another 
line  of  spreads  is  made,  by  using  decorative,  metallic 
yarns.  The  mill  is  now  weaving  authentic  cotton 
plaid  material  for  bedspreads,  draperies,  pillow 
cases,  cafe  curtains  and  couch  throws.  Some  of  the 
looms  produce  piece-dyed  light-weight  cotton  blank- 
ets. Normal  output  is  1,000,000  spreads  a  year.  In 
addition  to  woven  products  the  Bedspread  Mill  pro- 
duces the  cotton  yarns  used  at  the  Karastan  Rug 
Mill.  Other  carpet  yarns  and  wire  insulating  yarns 
are  made  for  the  open  market.  The  plant  operates 
184  looms  and  17,000  spindles,  employing  400  work- 
ers. The  plant  embraces  about  177,000  square  feet 
of  floor  space. 

Rayon  Mill,  Spray — This  is  an  ultra-modern  syn- 
thetic fibers  plant  and  a  showplace.  It  is  said  to  be 
the  most  modern  U.  S.  rayon  mill.  It  is  completely 
air-conditioned  summer  and  winter  and  has  fluores- 
cent lighting  throughout.  The  color  scheme  of  silk 
green,  rose  and  yellow  in  pastel  shades  designed  by 
Faber  Birren,  nationally  known  color  authority, 
produces  a  pleasing  and  attractive  appearance.  The 
Rayon  Mill  is  devoted  to  the  production  of  highly 
styled  materials  for  tea  gowns  and  evening  gowns. 
These  fabrics  are  sold  to  convertors,  mostly  in  the 
New  York  area.  Some  of  the  goods  woven  in  this 
mill  are  sold  right  off  the  loom  and  require  no  finish- 
ing before  being  converted  into  garments.  Among 
the  Mill's  products  are  jacquard  brocades  and  taf- 
fetas, materials  made  with  "Lurex"  metallic  fiber 
and  fine  sheer  nylon  fabrics  for  party  dresses,  blouses 
and  trimmings.  The  mill  experiments  continuously 
with  new  fabrics  and  can  adapt  itself  to  any  style 
changes  in  fashion  trends. 

A  popular  product  for  many  years  has  been  the 
Cel-O-Sheen  tablecloth,  the  original  acetate  damask 
fabric  made  in  America  and  developed  at  the  Field- 
crest  Rayon  Mill  in  1940.  "Orchid",  the  first  design 
created,  continues  in  the  present  line  of  tablecloths. 
During  most  of  the  time  in  the  past  12  years  the 
plant  has  operated  on  a  full  six-day  week,  three-shift 
schedule.  It  operates  404  looms  and  normally  em- 
ploys more  than  300  persons  with  an  annual  payroll 
of  more  than  $1,000,000. 

Karastan  Rug  Mill,  Leaksville — Karastan  rugs, 
challenging  the  exotic  beauty  and  fine  workmanship 
of  Persian  originals,  are  known  throughout  the  na- 
tion for  their  beautiful  patterns,  subtle  colors  and 
wearing  qualities.  They  are  sold  in  America's  lead- 
ing stores.  Due  to  exclusive  equipment  developed 
right  in  the  mill  these  fine  quality  Oriental  pattern 


Rayon  Mill  of  Fieldcrest  Mills  at  Spray. 

rugs  can  be  made  in  a  great  many  color  combinations 
with  a  thick  luxurious  pile  and  richness  unexcelled 
in  the  domestic  market.  Plain  wool  broadloom,  cot- 
ton broadloom  and  cotton  pattern  rugs  also  are  pro- 
duced. The  mill  has  44  huge  rug  looms  most  of  which 
were  developed  and  built  at  the  plant.  Some  of  the 
newer  looms  were  manufactured  for  Karastan  by 
Crompton  &  Knowles  Loom  Works.  The  mill  some 
times  produces  as  many  as  158,000  finished  rugs  in 
one  year,  the  sizes  ranging  from  22  x  36  inches  to 
12  x  22  feet. 

Beginning  in  1924  and  after  extensive  experiments 
Karastan  constructed  the  first  machine  made  rug 
with  the  pile  woven  through  the  back  and  reproduc- 
ing the  Oriental  pattern  and  finish  so  faithfully  that 
only  a  rug  expert  could  tell  the  difference  between 
the  original  Oriental  rug  and  the  machine  made 
Karastan.  In  1928  the  first  Karastan  rug,  as  known 
today,  was  produced  by  Fieldcrest  Mills.  Since  then 
the  growth  and  expansion  have  been  steady.  The 
mill  handles  the  entire  process  of  rug  manufacture 
beginning  with  woolen  and  worsted  skeins.  The 
process  includes  designing  the  rugs,  dyeing  the 
yarns,  setting  the  pattern,  weaving  and  finishing  and 
shipping  the  finished  rug  to  the  retailers.  The  mill 
maintains  its  own  Design  Department,  keeping 
Karastan  rugs  up  to  date  with  new  developments  in 
styling,  color,  designing  and  construction.  Native 
labor  employed  in  the  Karastan  Mill  has  become  high- 
ly skilled  in  the  intricate  operations  used  in  the  man- 
ufacture of  this  famous  product. 

Fieldcrest  Sheeting  Mill,  Draper — Two  nationally 
known  grades  of  Fieldcrest  sheets  are  made  on  the 
modern  high-speed  machinery  of  this  mill.  They  are 
"Wearwell",  the  128-count  budget  muslin,  long  rec- 
ognized as  a  long  wearing,  above  standard  grade  of 
muslin  sheets,  and  "Duracale",  the  180-count  high 
grade  carded  percale,  developed  in  recent  years, 
which  is  recognized  as  one  of  the  most  durable  and 
beautiful  sheets  on  the  market.  Both  of  these  types 
of  sheets  are  sold  in  white  and  in  beautiful  pastel 
colors.  Recently  Fieldcrest  has  "developed  a  line  of 
fitted  sheets  in  both  "Duracale"  and  "Wearwell" 
grades,  both  white  and  pastels.  The  Sheeting  Mill 
now  operates  a  large  number  of  looms  on  materials 
for  fitted  sheets.  The  mill  employs  about  650  work- 
ers in  operating  its  800  looms  and  40,000  spindles, 
producing  around  9,000,000  yards  a  year.    The  plant 


PAGE   128 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1952 


embraces  219,000  square  feet.  This  plant  has  long 
enjoyed  full  operation,  five  or  more  days  a  week, 
three  shifts. 

Electric  Blanket  Mill,  Spray — This  modern  plant  is 
credited  with  producing  more  than  one-third  of  all 
the  electric  blankets  made  in  the  United  States.  The 
mill  produces  electric  blankets  for  several  of  the 
major  electrical  and  textile  outlets  in  the  country. 
They  are  shipped  throughout  the  nation  and  foreign 
countries.  Great  strides  have  been  made  at  Field- 
crest  in  processing  and  precise  testing  of  electric 
blankets.  Fieldcrest  is  the  only  organization  in  the 
world  which  does  the  complete  operation  of  weaving, 
wiring  and  marketing  the  finished  electric  blanket. 
The  mill  maintains  a  complete  air-conditioned  labora- 
tory in  which  facilities  are  available  to  simulate 
sleeping  conditions  at  various  temperatures  so  that 
electric  blankets  can  be  produced  to  take  care  of 
weather  conditions  in  any  part  of  the  world  in  which 
they  are  used.  Acceptance  of  electric  blankets  gen- 
erally has  been  greatly  enhanced  by  the  confidence 
with  which  the  American  people  use  the  Fieldcrest 
product.  Constant  testing  and  development  reveal 
the  advantages  of  blended  synthetic  fibers  such  as 


dynel,  orlon,  dacron  and  rayon  with  wool  in  electric 
blankets.  Fieldcrest  electric  blankets  are  made  in 
twin  bed  and  regular  bed  sizes  with  single  or  dual 
control.  All  standard  colors  as  well  as  new  decorator 
colors  are  used. 

Bleachery,  Finishing  Mill,  Central  Warehouse, 
Spray — These  Fieldcrest  operations  are  located  close 
together.  In  the  modern  and  completely  equipped 
finishing  plants  goods  from  the  Blanket,  Bedspread 
and  Sheeting  mills  are  converted  into  the  finished 
state  ready  for  the  customer.  Blankets  are  napped 
and  sheets  are  bleached,  dyed  and  calendared  on  their 
way  to  the  sewing  room  where  they  are  hemmed  or 
scalloped.  Fieldcrest  woven  bedspreads  also  are 
finished  and  sewn  here  and  Fieldcrest  colored  sheets 
are  vat-dyed  in  a  modern  Piece-Dyeing  Department. 
Fitted  sheets,  both  top  and  bottom,  colored  and  white, 
are  manufactured  in  a  modern  new  unit  provided  for 
this  relatively  new  product.  After  packaging  and 
packing,  the  products  are  moved  by  modern  conveyor 
system  to  the  warehouse  for  storage  and  shipping. 
The  Bleachery,  Finishing  Mill  and  Central  Ware- 
house employ  700  persons  and  have  a  combined  floor 
space  exceeding  half  a  million  square  feet. 


Collins  &  Aikman  Large  Weaver  Upholstery,  Worsted  Wear 


Collins  &  Aikman  Corp.,  with  executive  offices  in 
New  York  and  important  plants  at  Ca-Vel  (near 
Roxboro),  at  Norwood  and  in  Concord  and  other 
plants  in  Canada,  Rhode  Island  and  Pennsylvania, 
has  come  to  be  known  as  "America's  Largest  Weav- 
ers of  Upholstery  Fabrics".  The  corporation's  larg- 
est weaving  plant  is  located  near  Roxboro  and  the 
plant  at  Norwood  is  the  only  spinning  plant  in  the 
world  devoted  exclusively  to  the  now  famous  "Bird 
System"  of  spinning. 

Albert  R.  Jube,  New  York,  is  president  and  W.  F. 
Bird,  New  York,  is  vice-president  and  chief  admin- 
istrative officer.  The  corporation  maintains  sales 
offices  and  show  rooms  for  the  convenience  of  its 
customers  in  New  York,  Chicago  and  Los  Angeles. 

Collins  &  Aikman  Corp.  began  its  expansion  in  the 
South  in  1927,  selecting  North  Carolina  as  the  most 
progressive  of  the  southern  states  in  textile  pro- 
duction. The  A.  T.  Baker  Co.,  near  Roxboro,  was 
incorporated  into  the  firm  25  years  ago  and  has 
since  been  developed  into  an  entirely  modern  plant, 

Partial  vieio  of  Collins  d-  Aikman's  largest  weaving  plant, 
located  near  Roxboro  in  Person  County. 


the  largest  weaving  mill  in  the  organization.  In 
1943  Collins  &  Aikman  acquired  the  Norwood  Spin- 
ning Mill  at  Norwood,  modernized  the  plant  and  in- 
stalled there  what  has  come  to  be  known  as  the  "Bird 
System"  of  spinning,  widely  acclaimed  as  the  first 
major  improvement  in  spinning  in  100  years.  This 
system,  developed  in  the  company's  own  research 
and  technical  control  division,  is  named  for  its  in- 
ventor, W.  F.  Bird,  then  director  of  research,  now 
vice-president  of  the  firm.  This  system  makes  pos- 
sible the  spinning  of  any  fiber  or  combination  of 
fibers  in  lengths  of  one-fourth  inch  to  nine  inches. 
It  eliminates  cumbersome  machinery  changes  which 
gives  the  company  a  flexibility  of  operation  that  per- 
mits it  to  gear  its  production  almost  over  night  to 
meet  the  changing  demands.  Only  last  April  the 
company  acquired  the  Stead  &  Miller  plant  in  Con 
cord,  not  yet  integrated  into  the  frame  work  and 
policies  of  the  organization. 

Recognized  as  a  leader  in  the  upholstery  fabric 
industry,  Collins  &  Aikman  manufactures  fabrics 
under  the  well-known  and  nationally  advertised 
tradename,  "Candalon",  fabrics  used  extensively  in 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  129 


utomobiles,  furniture  and  transportation  industries 
nd  for  the  armed  forces.     Last  year  the  company, 

firm  believer  in  diversity  of  products,  supplemented 
I  upholstery  line  with  a  fine  variety  of  men's  and 
'omen's  worsted  wear.  One  of  the  most  popular 
nes  developed  is  a  richly  colored  cotton  fabric  sold 
irect  to  manufacturers  in  New  York  City  who  pro- 
uce  a  highly  tailored  line  of  theater  and  night  club 
3ats  for  women. 

Growth  of  the  firm  has  been  gradual  but  steady 
Dr  several  years,  resulting  last  year  in  a  net  sales 
gure  of  $58,000,000 — the  highest  in  the  company's 
istory.  Its  North  Carolina  plants,  employing  about 
,800  workers  and  with  a  weekly  payroll  exceeding 
100,000,  produces  10,000,000  pounds  of  yarn  and 
msiderably  more  than  5,000,000  yards  of  fine  fab- 
les annually. 

Roxboro — This  plant,  modern  and  up-to-date,  is 
le  company's  largest  weave  plant  and  the  center  of 
s  furniture  upholstery  operations.  It  also  pro- 
aces  fabrics  for  the  automotive  industry  and  for  the 
rmed  forces.  This  plant  weaves  the  intricate  de- 
gns  and  patterns  which  are  in  great  demand  today. 
Dhn  M.  Dempsey  is  resident  manager  of  this  plant, 
aown  as  Plant  E,  and  John  J.  Reilly  is  assistant 
isident  manager.  This  plant  also  has  facilities  for 
yeing  and  finishing  the  fabrics  produced.  Its  pro- 
action  last  year  exceeded  5,000,000  yards  of  fabrics, 
he  plant  employs  950  workers  and  has  a  weekly 
ayroll  of  $60,000. 

Norwood — This  plant,  formerly  Norwood  Spinning 
ill,  was  acquired  in  1943  and  has  been  completely 


Spinning  Plant  of  Collins  &  Aikman  at  Norioood. 

modernized.  As  stated,  it  is  the  only  spinning  plant 
in  the  world  devoted  exclusively  to  the  "Bird  Sys- 
tem" of  spinning.  This  plant  supplies  the  company's 
weave  plants  with  approximately  200,000  pounds  of 
yarn  a  week.  It  employs  600  workers  and  its  weekly 
payroll  is  around  $35,000.  Harry  J.  Blanchard  is 
resident  manager,  assisted  by  Luther  K.  Huyett. 

Concord — This  plant,  still  operating  under  the 
name  of  Stead  &  Miller,  was  acquired  by  Collins  & 
Aikman  in  April  of  this  year.  It  is  known  as  one  of 
the  largest  producers  of  fine  upholstery  flat  fabrics, 
including  matelasses  (ornamental  quilling  fabrics 
with  depressed  lines  and  raised  squares),  brocatelles 
(rich  heavy  figured  fabrics  with  raised  designs  used 
in  upholstery),  tapestries,  damasks  and  novelty 
weaves.  This  plant  is  capable  of  producing  30,000 
yards  of  fabrics  each  week.  It  employs  250  workers 
and  has  a  weekly  payroll  of  $9,800.  T.  M.  Schramm 
is  manager  of  the  plant,  with  Howard  Whittle  his 
assistant. 


Hatch  Mill,  Modern,  and  Excelsior  Make  Woolen  Blends 


Deering-Milliken  &  Co.,  Inc.,  with  headquarters  in 
ew  York  City  and  operating  29  textile  mills,  largely 
i  the  South,  came  to  North  Carolina  in  1945  and 
)ught  what  is  now  Excelsior  Mills  in  Rutherfordton. 
n  July  3,  1951,  the  Hatch  Mill  on  the  edge  of  Co- 
mbus,  one  of  the  most  modern  buildings  in  the 
itire  State  and  the  nation,  began  operation.  The 
eering-Milliken  firm  was  organized  in  Portland, 
laine,  in  1865.  About  20  years  later,  around  1885, 
'r.  Deering  sold  his  interest  to  Mr.  Milliken  and 
itablished  what  later  became  the  International  Har- 
jster  Co.,  producing  Deering  farm  machinery.  Mr. 
alliken  continued  the  operation  of  a  textile  selling 

Thoroughly  modern  Hatch  Mill  at  Columbus,  shoioing  pool 
and  spray,  right  front. 


house  which  ultimately  bought  and  built  textile 
plants  which  now  forms  a  large  group  of  mills 
processing  wool,  cotton,  rayon,  nylon,  orlon  and  other 
natural  and  synthetic  fibers. 

Roger  Milliken  of  New  York  is  now  president  of 
the  corporation  and  W.  B.  D.  Stroud,  Spartanburg, 
S.  C,  is  general  manager  of  the  North  Carolina 
plants  as  well  as  several  South  Carolina  plants. 
Three  plants  operated  by  the  firm  are  in  Maine,  one 
is  in  New  York,  20  are  located  in  South  Carolina, 
three  in  Georgia,  and  the  two  plants  mentioned  in 
North  Carolina. 

These  two  North  Carolina  plants  are  the  first  to 
use  the  new  du  Pont  synthetic  fiber  known  as  Orion, 
a  washable  woolen  with  pleat  retention  properties. 


PAGE  1  30 


¥H£  E.  §.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  195H 


Wearing  apparel  such  as  pleated  skirts  made  of  this 
material  combined  with  wool  may  be  thrown  into 
the  washing  machine  and  washed,  taken  out  and 
dried  and  the  original  pleats  are  as  definite  and  as 
clearly  defined  as  before  the  garment  was  washed. 
Trade  name  of  women's  dresses,  skirts  and  suits 
made  of  orlon  and  wool  by  Milliken  is  "Lorette". 

Excelsior  Mills,  Rutherfordton,  occupy  mill  build- 
ings which  were  erected  before  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury by  Mr.  Littman  and  operated  as  the  Cleghorn 
Mill  in  cotton  spinning.  The  plant  had  been  sold 
several  times  and  was  once  operated  by  K.  S.  Tanner 
of  the  Stonecutter  Mills  and  later  by  the  Spindale 
Mills.  Following  its  purchase  in  1945  by  Deering- 
Milliken  &  Co.  and  designated  as  Excelsior  Mills  No. 
3,  it  was  operated  for  a  few  months  as  a  hemp  drap- 
ery mill.  In  1946  the  firm  installed  thoroughly  mod- 
ern woolen  mill  equipment  and  began  a  production 
of  high  quality  woolen  materials  for  women's  wear. 
Recently  this  plant  has  also  started  producing  fabrics 
containing  orlon. 

The  mill  property  includes  substantial  brick  build- 
ings that  have  been  thoroughly  modernized  and 
equipped.  It  contains  around  30,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space.  Approximately  100  workers  are  em- 
ployed in  three  shifts  operating  24  hours  a  day.  The 
annual  payroll  ranges  around  $375,000  and  annual 
production  is  about  1,250,000  yards  of  60  inch  woolen 
fabrics,  much  of  it  now  mixed  with  orlon. 

Robert  H.  Jones  is  superintendent  of  the  Excelsior 
Plant,  having  come  to  Rutherfordton  a  few  months 
ago  from  another  plant  of  the  Deering-Milliken  &  Co. 

Hatch  Mill,  Columbus,  one  of  the  newest  plants 
of  Deering-Milliken  &  Co.,  opened  July  3,  1951,  is 
considered  one  of  the  most  modern  and  complete 
textile  plants  in  the  entire  world.  Officials  of  this 
firm,  now  operating  29  plants,  made  tours  of  Europe 
and  the  entire  United  States  to  secure  information 
on  the  very  latest  types  of  textile  buildings  and  equip- 
ment. All  of  the  ideas  secured  were  sifted  and  trans- 
lated into  plans  by  which  the  Hatch  Mill  was  laid  out 
and  constructed. 

Officials  of  Deering-Milliken  &  Co.  secured  a  140 
acre  site  just  outside  the  corporate  limits  of  Colum- 
bus. A  three  acre  plot  was  converted  into  the  mill 
site.  About  20  acres  of  the  plot  was  planted  in 
year-round  grass  and  35,000  white  pines  were  plant- 
ed on  the  remaining  cleared  area.  A  blanket  of 
green  will  eventually  cover  the  whole  acreage  except 
for  the  area  covered  by  the  mill,  the  driveways  and 
parking  lots  and  a  beautiful  spray  pond  30  x  70  feet, 
between  the  mill  building  and  N.  C.  Highway  No. 
108  from  Rutherfordton  to  Columbus.  The  building 
is  modernistic  in  type,  constructed  of  steel,  concrete 
and  grey  brick.  It  is  one  story  high  except  for  a 
natural  basement  and  a  mezzanine  floor  and  contains 
204,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  A  novel  feature 
is  that  the  plant  is  operated  by  outside  weather  proof 
boilers  which  are  entirely  automatic,  one  of  the  few 
such  arrangements  in  the  nation.  About  half  of  the 
electrical  power  consumed  is  used  in  air-conditioning 
the  building.  The  equipment  is  the  most  modern  to 
be  found  in  the  manufacture  of  combined  woolen  and 
orlon  fabrics. 

More  than  $2,500,000  has  been  expended  for  site, 
building,  equipment  and  in  landscaping  and  beauti- 
fying the  area.     The  plant  operates  continuously 


with  three  shifts  employing  approximately  275  work 
ers.     The  annual  payroll  is  about  $1,250,000. 

Orion,  the  new  du  Pont  acrylic  fiber,  is  combinec 
with  wool  to  produce  "Lorette",  the  trade  name  usee 
by  Milliken  for  the  material  for  women's  dresses 
skirts  and  suits  produced  by  the  mill. 

Hatch  Mill  operates  a  thoroughly  modern  cafeteria 
for  the  benefit  of  its  employees. 

S.  J.   Craig,  Jr.,  formerly  with  another  of  th< 
Deering-Milliken  &  Co.  plants  in  South  Carolina, 
the  superintendent  of  this  new  and  modern  plant. 


LEAKSVILLE  ANCIENT  WOOLEN  MILL 

(Continued  from  Page  124) 

five  sets  of  woolen  cards  and  complementary  ma 
chinery. 

The  Homestead  Plant  has  approximately  the  sam< 
area  of  buildings  but  contains  ten  sets  of  wool  cards 
as  well  as  complete  complementary  machinery  for  th< 
manufacture  of  all  wool  and  part  wool  blankets. 

Extent  of  the  development  and  present  important 
of  The  Leaksville  Woolen  Mills  to  the  State's  econonr 
is  revealed  by  a  few  figures.  When  the  first  cardinj 
and  spinning  machines  were  installed  in  the  com 
missary  plant  adjoining  the  Leaksville  Cotton  Mill; 
"prior  to  1853",  only  two  workers  were  employee 
and  the  only  product  was  woolen  yarns.  After  th< 
second  enlargement  of  the  plant  in  1881,  records  re 
veal  that  72,000  blankets  were  being  produced  an 
nually.  By  1900  production  had  increased  to  140,001 
blankets  annually.  During  this  year  The  Leaksvill 
Woolen  Mills,  Inc.  will  produce  approximately  1,500, 
000  blankets.  Fine  wools  are  now  purchased  fron 
wool  growing  countries  throughout  the  world  in  con 
trast  to  its  earlier  consumption  of  locally  grow] 
wool.  Woolen  blankets  of  the  highest  quality  an 
now  distributed  throughout  the  nation,  and  at  pres 
ent  these  plants  employ  approximately  600  people. 


BEACON  MANUFACTURING  CO.  MAKE! 
COTTON-RAYON  BLENDED  BLANKET! 

Beacon  Manufacturing  Company,  Swannanoa,  wa 
organized  in  New  Bedford,  Mass.,  in  1904,  and  buil 
its  first  mill  in  the  Swannanoa  Valley  near  Ashevill 
in  1925.  Its  movement  from  New  England  to  Swan 
nanoa  was  completed  in  1933.  The  firm  manufac 
tures  cotton  and  rayon  blended  blankets. 

Beacon  Manufacturing  Company  is  capitalized  a 
$1,143,500.  Stephen  C.  Owen  is  president  and  Henr; 
L.  Taylor,  secretary.  Charles  D.  Owen,  Jr.,  is  treas 
urer  of  the  corporation  and  general  manager  of  th 
Swannanoa  plant.  A.  F.  Burgess  is  plant  manage 
and  W.  Vernon  McCrary  is  superintendent.  Affil 
iated  plants  are  located  in  Westminster,  S.  C,  an 
Winder,  Ga.  Beacon  Manufacturing  Co.  is  private!, 
owned ;  no  further  information  available. 


David  Clark,  founder  and  for  more  than  40  year 
publisher  and  editor  of  The  Textile  Bulletin,  form 
erly  the  Southern  Textile  Bulletin,  Charlotte,  is  th 
only  man  living  who  attended  the  organization  meet 
ing  of  the  North  Carolina  Cotton  (Textile)  Mann 
facturers  Association  in  Charlotte  October  30,  190( 
Mr.  Clark  was  acting  secretary  at  this  meeting. 


JMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  t  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  131 


lODERN  PLANT  FURNISHES  YARN  FOR  MANY  N.  C.  TEXTILE  MILLS: 

American  Enka  One  of  Largest  Rayon  Unit  Plants  on  Earth 


American  Enka  Corporation's  plant,  located  at 
nka,  just  west  of  Asheville,  is  one  of  the  largest 
ngle  rayon  units  in  the  entire  world.  It  was  the 
:st  rayon  plant  to  be  established  in  North  Carolina 
id  has  developed  into  one  of  the  State's  largest 
dustries,  its  roofed  surface  now  covering  35  acres 
:'  the  2,000  acre  tract  utilized  by  and  for  the  plant, 
he  name  Enka  is  derived  from  the  sounds  of  the 
*st  letters  in  the  two  names  of  the  original  firm  in 
olland. 

American  Enka  was  organized  in  1928  by  a  group 
representatives  of  Nederlandsch  Kunstzij-defab- 
ek  (Netherlands  Artificial  Silk  Mills  of  Arnheim, 
olland)  who  came  to  this  country  to  seek  to  estab- 
ih  a  counterpart  of  the  mill  operated  in  Holland. 
hey  were  joined  by  financiers  and  businessmen  in 
lis  country  and  began  the  search  for  a  site.  After 
vestigating  50  sites  in  the  United  States,  they  de- 
ded  that  the  ideal  place  was  in  Hominy  Valley,  a 
w  miles  west  of  Asheville.  Among  the  reasons 
Ivanced  for  the  superiority  of  this  site  was  the 
:cessibility  of  raw  materials  and  markets,  ideal 
imate,  abundance  of  pure  water  and  ample  sup- 
y  of  capable  labor.  After  the  2,000  acre  tract  was 
irchased,  work  was  started  on  the  first  production 
lit  which  was  finished  in  July,  1929,  and  reached 
ill  production  about  the  middle  of  1930. 
During  its  first  part-year  of  operation  American 
nka  Corp.  employed  1,919  workers  with  a  payroll 
:  slightly  more  than  $2,000,000  and  during  the  re- 
ainder  of  that  year  produced  viscose  rayon  yarn, 
it  sales  of  which  reached  $3,716,000.  Although 
arted  in  the  midst  of  this  nation's  worst  depression, 
le  new  firm  survived  the  ordeal  and  came  through 
s  a  successful  and  vigorous  organization.  The  de- 
and  for  rayon,  the  first  and  one  of  the  most  im- 
)rtant  of  the  man-made  fibers,  increased  as  the  pro- 
iction  of  fabrics  from  it  became  better  known.  The 

Aerial  view  of  American  Enka  Corp.  plant  at  Enka 
near  Asheville. 


result  was  that  American  Enka  continued  its  expan- 
sion to  meet  the  ever  increasing  demand.  By  1940 
the  plant  employed  approximately  3,000  workers  who 
were  paid  wages  amounting  to  $4,500,000  annually 
and  the  sale  of  its  products  had  increased  many  fold, 
reaching  $13,700,000  in  1940. 

Because  of  the  need  for  widening  the  base  for 
greater  production,  American  Enka  Corp.  bought  a 
site  near  Morristown,  Tenn.,  and  established  a  new 
plant  in  the  new  town  of  Lowland,  the  first  unit  of 
which  began  operation  early  in  1948.  This  plant  is 
some  90-odd  miles  from  the  plant  near  Asheville. 
The  continued  expansion  increased  the  size  and  activ- 
ities of  the  two  Enka  plants  to  such  an  extent  that  by 
last  year  net  sales  reached  $52,770,000,  while  work- 
ers had  increased  to  approximately  4,500  and  the  an- 
nual payroll  had  reached  approximately  $16,300,000. 
Further  evidence  of  the  extent  and  importance  of 
operations  in  the  plant  at  Enka  covering  35  acres  is 
that  it  consumes  daily  20,000,000  gallons  of  water, 
enough  to  supply  a  city  of  90,000  population.  To  in- 
sure a  constant  supply  a  lake  containing  300,000,000 
gallons  of  water  was  created  near  the  plant  and  a 
pipeline  five  miles  long  to  the  French  Broad  River 
was  installed  to  make  sure  the  supply  would  meet 
all  needs.  The  plant  also  generates  its  own  electric 
power  in  a  steam  plant  capable  of  producing  420,000 
kw  hours  daily,  a  quantity  sufficient  to  serve  50,000 
average  homes.  Eight  carloads  of  coal  are  consum- 
ed daily.  This  plant  operates  24  hours  a  day,  365 
days  in  the  year. 

Of  the  4,500  workers  employed  at  Enka's  two 
plants,  approximately  30%  are  women.  For  the  con- 
venience and  benefit  of  its  employees  American  Enka 
maintains  or  sponsors  more  than  100  homes  for  key 
officials;  operates  three  cafeterias,  serving  approxi- 
mately 4,500  meals  a  day ;  operates  a  hospital  with  a 
full-time  physician  and  registered  nurses ;  maintains 
a  library  with  more  than  5,000  books ;  provides  two 
weeks  of  vacation  with  pay  as  well  as  observes  six 


PAGE  132 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  195S 


legal  holidays  with  pay ;  operates  a  gymnasium  with 
athletic  directors  and  coaches  for  baseball,  Softball, 
basketball  and  other  athletic  sports  with  suitable 
grounds ;  operates  a  Safety  Department  with  all 
modern  methods  for  safe  operation ;  maintains  a  re- 
tirement plan  for  all  employees  with  required  period 
of  service;  provides  group  life,  health  and  accident 
insurance,  including  insurance  against  death  and 
dismemberment,  as  well  as  hospitalization  insurance. 
The  company  operates  fire  and  police  departments 
and  provides  directors  for  organized  sports  and  play 
for  400  children  of  employees  on  a  year-round  basis. 
"The  Enka  Voice",  a  monthly  magazine,  is  published 
for  the  benefit  of  Enka  employees. 

American  Enka  Corp.  produces  rayon  filament 
yarns  by  the  viscose  process.  These  yarns  are  dif- 
ferent sizes  measured  in  deniers.  The  finer  high 
quality  yarns  range  in  size  from  75  to  300  deniers. 
These  yarns  are  used  in  the  knitting  and  weaving 
trades.  Enka  also  produces  a  high  tensile  strength 
yarn  known  as  Tempra  in  two  sizes,  1,100  and  1,650 
deniers,  for  industrial  and  other  fabrics  requiring 
greater  strength  and  durability.  Most  important 
use  of  these  stronger  rayon  yarns  is  in  the  production 
of  automobile  and  airplane  tire  fabrics,  which  repre- 
sents a  major  proportion  of  Enka's  business.  Rayon 
yarns  by  Enka  are  also  produced  in  three  lustres 
known  as  Briglo,  a  bright  yarn ;  Perlglo,  a  semi-dull 
yarn,  and  Englo,  a  dull  yarn,  chalky  in  appearance. 

Enka  rayons,  of  a  high  quality  in  fine  deniers  and 
multi-filaments,  are  used  in  top  quality  weaving  and 
knitting  mills  throughout  America,  including  many 
of   North    Carolina's   weaving   and   knitting   mills. 


Testing  tensile  strength  of  rayon  yarn  produced  at 
American  Enka  plant. 


Wm 


mmttm^ 


"SST 


"S^tt 


Mil 


Experimental  warping  in  Textile  Research  Department  of 
American  Enka  plant. 

These  fibers  go  into  fabrics  for  fashionable  women' 
clothes  such  as  dresses,  underwear,  hats,  hose,  sho 
tops  and  linings,  suit  and  coat  linings,  robes,  rib 
bons,  gloves,  sweaters  and  other  such  items.  Chi] 
dren's  and  men's  garments  produced  from  these  ray 
on  fibers  include  hose,  anklets,  underwear,  suits 
slacks,  neckties,  shirts,  suit  and  coat  linings,  loung 
ing  robes,  hat  bands  and  others.  Home  items  pre 
duced  include  draperies,  upholstering  lamp  shades 
bedspreads,  bindings  and  tapes.  Sportswear  item 
include  tops  for  sport  shoes,  bathing  suits,  jackets 
baseball  and  soft  ball  uniforms,  shirts,  slacks  an 
hats.  Industrial  uses  to  which  rayon  fibers  are  de 
voted  include  tire  casings,  seat  coverings,  upholsterj 
wire  and  cable  coverings,  laminated  plastics;  far 
conveyor  and  transmission  belts;  hose,  rope,  rain 
coats,  overshoes  and  other  such  uses. 

During  the  World  War  II  period  American  Enk 
geared  itself  to  the  production  of  yarn  for  item 
needed  for  war  uses.  Among  these  were  airplan] 
landing  tires  and  tires  for  trucks,  automobiles,  guj 
carriages ;  for  airplanes,  self-sealing  gas  tanks,  gaj 
hose,  tow  targets,  wing  coverings ;  parachute  shrou! 
lines,  flares,  fragmentation  bombs,  cargo  and  aeriil 
delivery  parachutes,  mosquito  netting,  uniforniij 
Navy  flotation  suits,  flying  suits,  uniform  lining: 
braids  and  insignia,  flags,  blood  plasma  filters,  woun 
dressing  covers,  precision  glove  linings.  Other  mis 
cellaneous  uses  are  for  wrapping,  suit  linings,  cos 
tumes,  casket  linings,  stage  screens  and  curtain: 
decorations  and  knitting  and  crochet  yarns. 

Enka  rayon  produced  by  the  viscose  method 
made  by  treating  cellulose,  derived  from  wood  pul 
and  cotton  linters  with  chemicals  which  convert 
into  a  liquid  (viscose)  and  then  back  into  a  solid  i 
the  form  of  yarn.  Briefly  and  in  lay  language  tr 
process,  with  due  regard  to  temperature  and  aginj 
is  somewhat  as  follows :  the  cellulose  sheets,  lookin 


■UMMER-FALL,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  133 


lomewhat  like  desk  blotters,  are  soaked  in  caustic 
loda  and  run  through  presses  to  eliminate  most  of 
he  moisture.  These  sheets  are  then  shredded  into 
luffy  "white  crumbs".  They  are  then  treated  with 
:arbon  bisulfide  becoming  "orange  crumbs".  These 
:rumbs  are  dissolved  in  dilute  caustic  soda,  becoming 
golden  brown  viscose  liquid  somewhat  like  honey  or 
nolasses.  After  filtering  and  vacuum  treatment  to 
■emove  bubbles,  this  viscose  is  forced  through  a 
himble-like  metal  cup  called  a  spinneret.  This  vis- 
ose  comes  out  through  minute  holes  in  the  spinneret 
>assing  to  a  bath  solution  of  dilute  sulphuric  acid 
md  salts  which  turns  it  back  into  a  solid  thread — 
he  yarn.  This  yarn  is  spun  onto  spools  or  into  a 
■evolving  pot  making  it  into  a  hollow  cylindrical 
>ackage  known  as  a  cake. 

The  spool  spun  threads  are  then  washed,  dried, 
wisted  and  finally  wound  on  cones  or  beams  or  into 
lanks  of  yarns. 

In  the  production  of  high  tenacity  yarn  very  much 
he  same  process  is  used  except  that  these  yarns  pass 
hrough  stretching  and  drying  processes  which  in- 
xease  the  tensile  strength  and  are  then  wound  on 
(earns. 

Enka  rayon  is  used  alone  in  making  many  dif- 
erent  kinds  of  fabrics.  Also  it  is  used  mixed  with 
vool,  cotton,  silk,  nylon,  dacron  and  other  man-made 
^ams  in  the  production  of  many  types  of  fabrics, 
imka  specialists  are  studying,  not  only  the  future  of 
•ayon,  but  of  other  fibres  as  well.  Its  Research  De- 
>artment  is  studying  the  entire  field  of  synthetic 
ibers,  conducting  tests  and  experiments,  studying 
lew  products  and  comparing  various  products  with 
ithers  in  order  to  keep  fully  abreast  in  the  develop- 
nent  of  synthetic  fibers.  At  present  divisions  of  this 
lepartment  include  Chemical,  Physical,  Textile  and 
-'olymer  Research,  Research  Engineering  and  Pilot 
5lant.  These  activities  require  70  chemists,  physic- 
Its,  engineers  and  technically  trained  personnel, 
ilnka  maintains  chemical,  microscopical  and  textile 
aboratories  in  each  plant. 

While  most  of  the  officers  and  directors  of  Ameri- 
:an  Enka  Corp.  are  Americans,  three  of  the  impor- 
ant  directors  live  in  Arnheim,  Holland,  and  four 


Vieiv  of  spinning  room  of  American  Enka  Corp. 

others  live  in  New  York  City,  while  three  are  North 
Carolina  residents,  and  the  other  six  live  in  other 
states.  Franklin  D'Olier  of  Basking  Ridge,  New 
Jersey,  is  chairman  of  the  board  and  J.  E.  Bassill, 
New  York  City,  is  president.  Other  officers  are 
Gaylord  Davis,  Asheville,  vice-president,  treasurer 
and  general  counselor;  Martin  Wadewitz,  Asheville, 
technical  vice-president;  H.  H.  Anning,  New  York, 
vice-president  in  charge  of  sales ;  Gordon  V.  Hager, 
Asheville,  assistant  treasurer,  and  Maurice  Winger, 
Jr.,  Asheville,  secretary.  The  three  North  Carolina 
directors  are  Claiborne  McD.  Carr,  a  native  of  Dur- 
ham and  for  many  years  vice-president  of  American 
Enka  Corp.,  now  retired  and  living  in  Biltmore  For- 
est, Asheville;  J.  Gerald  Cowan,  senior  vice-presi- 
dent at  the  Asheville  Branch  of  Wachovia  Bank  & 
Trust  Co.,  and  T.  Holt  Haywood,  industrialist,  Win- 
ston-Salem. Another  director,  A.  J.  L.  Moritz,  a 
North  Carolinian  and  the  man  who  ran  the  Enka 
plant  for  20  years  as  technical  vice-president,  is  now 
retired  and  resides  in  Jensen,  Fla. 

Executive  and  sales  offices  of  American  Enka 
Corp.  are  at  206  Madison  Avenue,  New  York  City. 
Sales  offices  are  maintained  in  Providence,  R.  I., 
Greensboro  and  Chattanooga,  Tenn.,  all  key  points 
in  the  textile  industry. 


/ALHALLA  HAND  WEAVERS  MAKING 
HIGH  QUALITY  WOOLEN  FABRICS 

Valhalla  Hand  Weavers,  Tryon,  is  a  craft  industry 
started  May  1, 1941,  with  two  hand  looms  by  Ralph  B. 
Lawrence  and  has  since  been  operated  by  Mr.  and 
VIrs.  Lawrence.  Mr.  Lawrence  has  been  engaged  in 
;he  weaving  craft  for  about  30  years.  The  plant  is 
ocated  about  three  miles  north  of  Tryon  on  the 
rryon-Hendersonville  Highway  and  in  the  Valhalla 
community,  a  Biblical  name  meaning  place  of  rest 
)r  refuge. 

The  plant  started  producing  hand  woven  rugs  dur- 
ng  World  War  II  and  has  continued  to  add  to  its 
products  various  items  including  homespun  fabrics 
for  men's  and  women's  suits  and  all  wool  baby  blank- 
ets. Recently  the  plant  has  added  nylon  hand  woven 
Irawstring  hand  bags  which  now  constitute  one  of 
the  larger  items.  Hand  woven  wool  ties  have  long 
been  a  popular  line.  Basic  products  are  two  grades 
Df  men's  and  women's  woolen  suiting  materials, 
sight  ounce  and  ten  ounce.  Much  of  the  thread  is 
secured  from  Helton  Woolen  Mills  in  Ashe  County. 


Valhalla  Hand  Weavers  have  had  four  expansions 
during  the  eight  years,  increasing  their  hand  looms 
from  two  to  12  and  have  added  the  gift  shop,  in 
(Continued  on  Page  138) 


Gift  shop  and  part  of  plant  of  Valhalla  Hand  Weavers 
near  Tryon. 


Page  1 34 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  195: 


NOW  MOVING  TOWARD  THAT  TITLE  FOR  PLAY  CLOTHES  TOO: 

Blue  Bell  Long  World's  Largest  Work  Clothing  Produce! 

Blue  Bell,  Inc.,  Greensboro,  long  recognized  as  the 
"world's  largest  producer  of  work  clothes",  is  now 
marching  forward  rapidly  in  the  quest  of  a  new 
slogan  as  "undisputed  first  in  the  manufacture  of 
work  and  play  clothing  for  men,  women  and  chil- 
dren". In  approximately  50  years,  through  pur- 
chase, mergers  and  consolidations,  it  resembles  a 
smaller  edition  of  United  States  Steel  in  the  work 
and  play  clothing  industry  with  its  24  manufactur- 
ing plants  and  15  warehouses  in  seven  states,  with 
approximately  5,300  production  employees. 

Blue  Bell  had  its  beginning  in  North  Carolina 
when  in  1904  C.  C.  Hudson  started  an  overall  busi- 
ness in  Greensboro  as  Hudson  Overall  Co.  Later  this 
company  was  dissolved  and  Mr.  Hudson  bought  the 
interests  of  his  partners  and  continued  to  operate 
under  the  Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  name.  First  opera- 
tions were  over  a  grocery  store  at  513  South  Elm 
Street ;  later  in  an  old  abandoned  church  building  on 
Arlington  Street.  Later  the  industry  moved  into  a 
three-story  building  at  South  Elm  and  West  Lee 
Streets.  In  1919  Mr.  Hudson  moved  his  plant  into 
a  new  factory  at  626  South  Elm  Street  in  which  a 
modern  cafeteria  was  operated  for  the  225  workers. 
In  1923  a  large  addition  was  erected  and  the  firm 
then  increased  its  employment  to  825. 

Meanwhile  around  the  turn  of  the  century  the 
Jellico  Clothing  Mfg.  Co.,  at  Jellico,  Tenn.,  began 
operations  with  12  machines  as  a  subsidiary  of  Jellico 
Grocery  Co.,  which  sold  most  of  its  products.  In  1915 
Robert  W.  Baker  joined  this  firm  as  secretary  and  in 
1916  became  vice-president  and  general  manager. 
In  that  year  this  company  had  35  sewing  machines 
turning  out  bib  overalls  with  a  sales  volume  of 
$30,000  a  year.  In  1918  the  firm  erected  a  large 
modern  building  in  Middleboro,  Ky.,  and  in  that  year 
the  name  was  changed  to  Big  Ben  Mfg.  Co. 

Meantime  Mr.  Baker,  in  Jellico,  and  Mr.  Hudson, 
in  Greensboro,  became  friends  and  worked  out  a  big 
deal  late  in  1926.  As  of  the  first  of  1927  Mr.  Baker's 
firm,  Big  Ben  Mfg.  Co.,  bought  out  Mr.  Hudson's 
Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  in  what  was  described  as  a 
wedding  with  a  million  dollar  dowry.  Blue  Bell  at 
that  time  was  the  largest  single  company  making 
overalls  exclusively  for  the  wholesale  trade.  In  that 
year,  also,  the  firm  opened  up  sales  offices  in  New 
York  City,  followed  by  offices  in  Chicago,  Nashville, 
Dallas  and  Los  Angeles. 

In  the  few  years  that  followed,  Mr.  Baker  brought 
into  the  firm  several  young  men  who  were  to  become 
important  figures  in  the  organization  and  are  still 
members  of  the  official  family.     E.  A.  Morris,  who 

West  Lee  Street  plant  of  Blue  Bell. 


Blue  Bell,  world's  largest  producer  of  work   clothing,  makeif 
overalls  for  icorld's  largest  boy,  Robert  E.  Hughes  of  Barr\ 
III.,  weight,  about  800  pounds,  6  ft.,  2  in.  tall,  and  chest  11  i  it 
Pair  contains  9  yards  of  blue  denim. 

has  been  president  since  1948,  joined  the  firm  a 
consulting  engineer  and  in  1937  joined  Blue  Bell  a 
plant  manager  at  Abingdon,  111.  E.  W.  Weant,  no\ 
vice-president  and  general  manager  of  manufactui 
ing,  joined  the  company  in  1932  as  resident  industris 
engineer.  J.  C.  Fox,  who  had  been  with  his  fathe 
in  the  overall  business  in  Atchison,  Kansas,  and  late 
was  buyer  for  J.  C.  Penney  Co.,  joined  the  firm  an 
became  president  in  1936,  serving  as  such  until  1948 
Later  in  1936  Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  bought  th 
Globe  Superior  Corp.  and  the  name  of  the  consoli 
dated  firm  became  Blue  Bell-Globe  Mfg.  Co.  Th 
Globe  Superior  firm  was  under  management  of  Lloy 
Mosser  and  Charles  Snyder,  the  result  from  a  merge 
in  1920  of  Globe  Shirt  and  Overall  Co.,  Abingdor 
111.,  and  Superior  Garment  Co.,  organized  in  1907  a 
Columbia  City,  Indiana.  This  firm,  with  plants  i: 
Abingdon  and  Canton,  111.,  and  Columbia  City,  Ind 
purchased  in  1929  the  Commerce  National  Mfg.  Cc 
of  Commerce,  Ga.  When  Blue  Bell  and  Globe  Supe 
rior  merged  in  1936,  officials  then  and  still  wit] 
Blue  Bell  include  Roger  Lematty,  H.  F.  Mosher,  Eu 


UMMER-FALL,   1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  35 


^<1 


W^-msmms:' 


liwm   aiuii 


HlirWS  £££  ssnssr  ss: 


:iB%W»W«^5W' 


'«•  ssiea  a&psi  m  sun?  n 

Be  ss  •  ••      mm  m 

'  *  jS  www  * 
South  Elm  Street  plant  of  Blue  Bell,  Inc.,  Greensboro. 

ene  Stanley,  T.  F.  Harden,  W.  C.  Alderfer  and  A.  L. 
iomax. 

An  important  announcement  about  this  time,  in 
936,  was  that  the  fabrics  used  in  the  company's 
roducts  were  100%  sanforized.  It  developed  that 
Uobe  Superior  Corp.  began  the  sanforizing  process 
i  1934  as  developed  by  Sanford  Cluett  from  whom 
he  process  took  its  name  and  who  had  the  full  co- 
peration  of  the  Blue  Bell  management.  The  first 
anforized  denim  was  made  by  Erwin  Mills,  Inc., 
nd  the  first  sanforized  garments  were  produced  at 
!lue  Bell's  Abingdon,  111.,  plant.  Another  important 
tep  was  then  introduced — the  "proportional  fit"  of 
>lue  Bell  and  Big  Ben  overalls  with  scientific  size 
rrangements,  including  four  leg  and  four  bib 
3ngths  for  every  waist  size. 

Early  in  World  War  II  years,  Blue  Bell  began  an 
xpansion  program  to  meet  heavy  requirements  of 
he  United  States  Government.  In  mid-1940  the 
ompany  opened  a  plant  on  Greene  Street  and  a  few 
lonths  later  bought  the  Greensboro  Full-Fashioned 
losiery  plant  on  West  Lee  Street,  converting  it  into 

coverall  factory.  Before  the  end  of  that  year  the 
ilant  at  Middlesboro,  Ky.,  was  closed  and  a  new 
ilant  bought  at  Natchez,  Miss.,  thus  adding  produc- 
ion  of  semi-dress  shirts  and  pants  to  Blue  Bell  prod- 
cts. 

In  the  war  period  work  clothes  became  war  clothes 
nd  under  the  government's  admonition  to  "make  it 
nappy"  Blue  Bell  produced  21,670,000  garments  for 
rmy,  navy,  air  corps  and  marines.  For  the  army  it 
iroduced  jungle  suits,  one-piece  suits,  denim  pants, 
oats,  olive  drab,  herringbone  jackets,  trousers,  khaki 
Iress  pants  and  shirts,  and  fly  bars  and  barracks 
>ags ;  for  the  air  corps,  flying  suits,  and  for  the  navy, 
lenim  and  white  trousers,  herringbone  jackets  and 
hirts.    Blue  Bell  during  the  war  period  made  many 


improvements  and  changes  as  well  as  additions  to 
its  lines  of  production,  thus  preparing  it  for  more 
effective  operation  and  better  production  of  Blue  Bell 
products  in  the  postwar  period. 

As  the  Blue  Bell  trade  name  became  more  important 
the  Globe  name  was  used  less,  and  in  1943  the  firm 
name  was  changed  to  Blue  Bell,  Inc.  In  that  same 
year  Blue  Bell  absorbed  the  Casey  Jones  interest,  a 
firm  that  had  been  in  operation  for  31  years  with 
headquarters  in  Baltimore.  This  gave  Blue  Bell 
that  firm's  one  plant  in  Maryland  and  five  plants  in 
the  vicinity  of  Luray,  Virginia.  Early  in  1944  Blue 
Bell,  in  order  to  increase  its  output,  leased  a  large 
plant  in  Lenoir  and  converted  it  to  the  manufacture 
of  Blue  Bell  products. 

Due  to  the  rigorous  standard  maintained  by  Blue 
Bell,  in  1944  the  company  won  the  right  to  display 
on  Blue  Bell,  Big  Ben  and  Casey  Jones  work  clothes, 
the  coveted  Good  Housekeeping  Guaranty  Seal.  Thus 
Blue  Bell,  with  this  stamp  of  approval,  was  rapidly 
becoming  known  internationally  as  well  as  nation- 
ally. Later  that  year  the  Blue  Bell  executive  offices 
were  moved  to  93  Worth  Street,  New  York  City,  and 
the  sales  offices,  formerly  at  40  Worth  Street,  were 
moved  to  the  executive  office  address. 

In  1945  Blue  Bell  introduced  Qualitag  Labeling, 
a  label  attached  to  every  garment  giving  full  and 
complete  information  about  the  garment  for  buyers 
and  users.  Along  with  this  went  the  firm's  complete 
guarantee  of  each  garment.  This  innovation  helped 
to  win  for  the  firm  the  complete  confidence  and  ac- 
ceptance of  the  buying  public  and  paved  the  way  for 
ready  sales  of  Blue  Bell's  added  lines  embraced  in 


Sewing  overalls  in  Greensboro  plant  of  Blue  Bell. 


Button  Machine  in  Blue  Bell  overall  plant  in  Greensboro. 


PAGE  136 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195: 


the  slogan — work  and  play  clothing  for  women,  girls 
and  children. 

Blue  Bell  has  long  been  a  leader  in  the  work  cloth- 
ing field  in  paying  splendid  wages  to  its  employees. 
It  was  among  the  first  to  offer  employee  services.  In 
1945  it  established  a  group  insurance  plan  for  its 
employees  and  hospitalization  and  surgery  plans  for 
its  employees  and  members  of  their  families  at  a 
nominal  premium  generously  subsidized  by  the  com- 
pany. It  also  established  vacation  with  pay  for  one 
and  two  weeks,  based  on  length  of  service  and  annual 
pay.  Employees  have  advantage  of  modern  cafe- 
terias with  food  below  cost  and  music  during  working 
hours.  Four  of  the  Blue  Bell  plants  have  monthly  or 
twice-a-month  newspapers.  In  Greensboro  the  pub- 
lication is  called  "The  Bell  Ringer"  and  in  Lenoir  it 
is  "The  Needle  Threader." 

In  its  expansion  program  Blue  Bell  built  and  open- 
ed up  a  new  plant  in  Oneonta,  Ala.,  early  in  1947 
and  a  month  later  purchased  the  Mid-South  Manu- 
facturing Co.  of  Tupelo,  Miss.,  with  five  plants  and 
more  than  1,000  employees.  Purchase  of  this  firm, 
organized  in  1939  by  William  B.  Fields  and  Rex  Reed, 
gave  the  added  lines  of  chambray  and  covert  work 
shirts  to  Blue  Bell  products.  Previously  in  1946  the 
company  had  purchased  a  plant  at  Madison,  Virginia. 

In  order  to  continue  improvement,  enlargement 
and  expansion  of  its  facilities,  Blue  Bell,  in  July, 
1947,  negotiated  a  term  loan  of  $2,500,000  and  sold 
$2,000,000  in  preferred  stock.  Since  that  time  it  has 
built  five  new  plants :  one  at  Arab,  Alabama,  in  1948 ; 
one  at  Belmont,  Mississippi,  in  1949 ;  one  each  at 
Nappanee  and  North  Webster,  Indiana,  in  1951 ; 
erected  a  new  building  at  Fulton,  Miss.,  and  bought 
another  at  Bushnell,  111.,  earlier  this  year.  Also  in 
July,  1952,  the  firm  opened  a  new  sales  warehouse  at 
Fresno,  California. 

Blue  Bell  is  a  splendid  customer  of  many  other 
North  Carolina  industries.  It  purchases  large  quan- 
tities of  plain  and  fancy  denims  from  North  Carolina 
mills,  particularly  Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro,  and 
Erwin  Mills,  Inc.,  Durham,  and  threads  from 
Threads-Incorporated,  Gastonia,  and  other  produc- 
ers, both  for  its  plants  in  North  Carolina  and  those 
outside  the  State.  Additional  purchases  from  North 
Carolina  firms  include  labels,  elastics,  buttons,  web- 
bing, buckles,  zippers,  cardboard  containers,  wooden 
shipping  cases  and  other  items  which  go  into  work 
and  play  clothes  manufacturing. 

Overall  plant  of  Blue  Bell  at  Lenoir. 


Group  clad  entirely  in  Blue  Bell  products  at  Caldwell 
County  Fair  last  year. 

Working  capital  was  increased  from  $1,368,001 
in  1939  to  approximately  $7,000,000  as  of  Novembe 
30,  1951.  Sales,  starting  in  the  early  days  at  arounc 
$30,000  a  year,  increased  to  above  $20,000,000  h 
1942  to  $37,493,000  in  1949,  and  to  an  all-time  higl 
of  $46,630,000  in  1950  from  all  of  the  24  plants 
Employing  5,300  workers  in  all  of  its  plants,  th 
annual  payroll  is  approximately  $7,000,000.  Eacl 
year  these  plants  turn  out  around  27,600,000  indi 
vidual  garments. 

With  its  24  producing  plants,  to  several  of  whicl 
additions  have  been  made,  and  15  warehouses  locate( 
in  communities  in  which  plants  operate,  Blue  Bell  i 
continuing  its  steady  program  of  enlargement  an( 
expansion  and  is  headed  toward  the  goal  of  first  ii 
manufacture  of  work  and  play  clothing  for  men 
women  and  children.  The  company  moved  its  execu 
tive  offices  and  Accounting  Department  from  Nev 
York  to  Greensboro  in  1949,  the  former  in  the  Jef 
ferson  Building  with  a  staff  of  23,  and  the  latter  ii 
the  Dixie  Building  with  personnel  of  106. 

Blue  Bell  directors  in  1948  re-organized  its  kej 
personnel  with  officers  as  follows :  R.  W.  Baker,  hon 
orary  chairman  of  the  Board ;  J.  C.  Fox,  chairman  o: 
the  Board  and  treasurer;  E.  A.  Morris,  president 
E.  W.  Weant,  vice-president  in  charge  of  manufac 
turing;  R.  S.  LeMatty,  vice-president  in  charge  o: 
sales;  J.  B.  Allin,  vice-president  in  charge  of  mer 
chandise  procurement  and  secretary.    These  officer; 

(Continued  on  Page  138) 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   137 


Weave  she 


Biltmore  Industries. 


IAND  WEAVING,  ANCIENT  AND  HONORED  MOUNTAIN  CRAFT: 

biltmore  Industries  World's  Largest-Finest  in  Homespun 

Biltmore  Industries,  Inc.,  Grove  Park,  Asheville, 
le  largest  handwoven  homespun  industry  in  the 
rorld,  had  its  beginning  in  1901  in  a  small  craft 
mool  established  on  the  famous  Biltmore  Estate 
ear  Asheville  by  Mrs.  George  W.  Vanderbilt.  As  a 
evelopment  from  this  little  industrial  school,  Bilt- 
lore  homespuns  have  established  a  reputation  for 
igh  quality  woolen  fabrics  for  men's  and  women's 
aits  and  coats  that  extends  beyond  the  boundaries 
f  the  United  States. 

Mrs.  Vanderbilt  established  this  little  school  in 
rder  to  teach  rural  boys  and  girls  the  fundamentals 
l  hand  weaving,  hand  carving,  needlecraft  and  other 
seful  household  articles.  The  mountain  people  had 
een  hand  weavers  for  generations,  using  crude 
lethods.  They  carded  and  spun  their  wool  entirely 
y  hand  and  did  their  weaving  on  the  simplest  form 
f  hand  looms.  They  dyed  their  cloth  in  colors  ob- 
lined  from  roots  and  herbs,  including  yellow  hickory 
ark,  black  walnut  roots  and  other  such  native  prod- 
cts.     Their  work  was  slow  and  tedious. 

Mrs.  Vanderbilt,  with  two  capable  assistants, 
;arted  out  to  find  improvements  in  these  conditions, 
oys  in  the  woodcarving  shop  worked  out  improve- 
lents  on  the  looms.  Carding  and  spinning  machines 
fere  purchased  and  proper  dyeing  methods  adopted, 
he  school  would  take  in  crude  wool,  wash  and  dye 

by  hand  in  fast  colors,  card  and  spin  it  and  make 

into  warps.  These  warps  went  into  mountain 
omes  where  the  handweaving  was  done.  The  cloth 
ms  produced  would  come  back  to  the  school  where 
;  was  scoured  and  finished  and  placed  on  tenter- 
ook  fences  in  the  sun  to  dry  and  shrink.  Tourists 
isiting  mountain  resort  areas  and  visiting  the  school 
rould  buy  the  cloth,  the  money  going  to  the  weavers. 

The  demand  for  these  handwoven  fabrics  increas- 
3  so  rapidly  that  the  school  was  not  able  to  keep 
ace.  Finally  Mrs.  Vanderbilt,  in  1917,  engaged  in 
all  time  war  work,  sold  the  equipment  and  the  hand 
10ms  to  the  late  Fred  L.  Seely,  who  built  and  for 
lany  years  operated  Grove  Park  Inn,  classed  as  the 
nest  resort  hotel  in  the  world.     As  the  industry 

Id  English  style  vine-covered  building  housing  Biltmore  In- 
dustries,  largest  homespun   producer  in  the  world. 


continued  to  grow,  Mr.  Seely  built  large  English 
type  stone  buildings,  soon  covered  with  ivy,  in  which 
to  produce  these  homespuns.  Samples  were  displayed 
in  Grove  Park  Inn  and  the  many  wealthy  visitors 
ordered  material.  Largely  by  word  of  mouth  the 
qualities  of  Biltmore  homespuns  became  extensively 
known  among  a  select  clientele.  Business  bv  sam- 
ples and  mail  orders  continued  to  increase  and  addi- 
tional buildings  were  erected  to  take  care  of  the  in- 
creased demand. 

Biltmore  homespuns,  though  rugged  and  strong, 
are  not  rough  and  shaggy  but  as  beautiful  and  refin- 
ed as  only  hand  work  can  make  them.  They  are 
made  in  many  colors  and  shades  and  of  several 
weights.  The  clean  white  wool  from  which  they  are 
produced  is  dyed  by  hand  with  the  very  finest  im- 
ported dyes.  The  colors  are  pure,  clean  and  distinc- 
tive. Pure  mountain  water  from  Mount  Mitchell  is 
used  for  scouring  and  cleaning  the  wool.  After 
blending  the  various  colors  the  wool  is  spun  and 
woven,  then  scoured  in  hot  soap  suds  an  entire  day, 
then  hung  on  tenter-hooks  all  day  in  the  sun  to  dry 
and  shrink.  The  cloth  is  woven  entirely  by  hand 
by  native  men  and  on  looms  built  by  hand  in  the 
shops  which  form  a  part  of  the  Biltmore  Industries 
group  of  buildings.  Biltmore  homespuns  are  the 
result  of  the  finest  wools,  the  fastest  dyes  and  expert 
craftsmanship. 

Biltmore  homespuns  are  woven  in  weights  that 
range  from  414  to  8  ounces  to 
the  yard,  in  which  the  range  is 
from  heavy  overcoats  to  light 
summer  weight  materials.  Some 
of  the  important  types  of  hand 
woven  fabrics  include  "Regu- 
lar", a  substantial  closely  woven 
cloth  with  hard  twist  weighing 
about  7Vo  to  8  ounces  to  the  yard 
in  both  diagonal  and  basket 
weave ;  women's  lamb  wool  in 
plain  (basket)  weave,  very  soft 
and  suitable  for  women's  suits 
and  light  coats,  made  in  50  col- 
ors ;  coat  weights  for  men  and 
women,  a  reinforced  fabric  of 
splendid  texture;  "Scotch  Black- 
ace",  containing  genuine  Scotch 


PAGE  138 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195:: 


range  from  41/2  to  8  ounces  to  the  yard,  in  which  the 
range  is  from  heavy  overcoats  to  light  summer 
weight  materials.  Some  of  the  important  types  of 
hand  woven  fabrics  include  "Regular",  a  substantial 
closely  woven  cloth  with  hard  twist  weighing  about 
71/2  to  8  ounces  to  the  yard  in  both  diagonal  and  bas- 
ket weave;  women's  lamb  wool  in  plain  (basket) 
weave,  very  soft  and  suitable  for  women's  suits  and 
light  coats,  made  in  50  colors ;  coat  weights  for  men 
and  women,  a  reinforced  fabric  of  splendid  texture ; 
"Scotch  Blackface",  containing  genuine  Scotch 
Blackface  wool,  splendid  for  men's  golf  suits,  busi- 
ness suits  and  women's  coats;  "Shetland"  wool  from 
the  Shetland  Island,  about  25  %  heavier  than  regular 
men's  suitings,  for  men's  suits  and  spring  coats  and 
women's  coats ;  "Tweed",  a  coarse  shaggy  weave  for 
men's  suits  and  women's  and  men's  sports  coats; 
"Hound  Tooth",  a  fine  check  in  beautiful  shades  in 
regular  weight ;  Summer  Weight,  the  lightest  weight 
made  by  Biltmore  Industries,  weighing  about  41/0 
ounces  to  the  yard  but  strong  and  serviceable. 

Following  Mr.  Seely's  death  in  1942,  Biltmore  In- 
dustries was  taken  over  by  his  son,  Fred  L.  Seely, 
Jr.,  who  continues  production  along  plans  established 
by  his  father.  In  a  recent  reorganization,  Alex  M. 
Gover  became  president  of  the  organization  and  gen- 
eral manager  of  the  homespun  activities.  The  organ- 
ization is  continuing  the  record  it  has  established 
over  more  than  50  years  of  operation,  during  which 
business  has  been  carried  on  in  practically  every  city 
and  town  in  the  United  States  and  every  country  in 
the  world.  Many  friends  visit  the  Biltmore  home- 
spun shops  and  guides  carry  them  through  and  ex- 
plain the  various  operations.  They  linger  to  purchase 
homespun  fabrics  and  gift  antiques,  including  hand 
carved  woodwork. 

Recently  Biltmore  Industries  has  established  a 
custom  tailoring  division  by  means  of  which  visitors 
may  have  suits  and  coats  made  to  their  individual 
measurements  out  of  Biltmore  homespuns  right  in 
the  plant  or  send  measurements  and  designate  mate- 
rials from  which  suits  and  coats  may  be  made  and 
forwarded  to  their  residences. 


VALHALLA  HAND  WEAVERS 

(Continued  from  page  133) 

which  their  own  products  and  other  items  are  sold 
at  retail.  Six  of  the  looms  are  operated  in  the  plant 
and  six  are  distributed  in  homes  in  the  surrounding 
area.  This  permits  families  to  increase  their  income 
through  work  of  older  or  otherwise  disabled  em- 
ployees. The  weaving  is  done  on  a  purchase  basis. 
In  these  seasonal  operations  about  30  workers  are 
employed. 

In  addition  to  the  retail  trade  which  supplies  sum- 
mer and  winter  seasonal  visits  to  the  Isothermal  area 
in  which  Tryon  is  located,  the  Valhalla  Hand  Weav- 
ers enjoys  a  splendid  mail  order  business,  supplying 
suitings,  rugs,  baby  blankets  and  other  items  by  dis- 
tributing samples  to  prospective  purchasers.  The 
woolen  products  are  made  from  wool  produced  by 
North  Carolina  grown  sheep.  The  necktie  woolens 
in  plaids,  stripes  and  solid  and  combination  colors 
are  produced  from  wool  purchased  in  Ohio. 


BLUE  BELL  WORK-PLAY  CLOTHES 

(Continued  from  Page  136) 

and  Sherrod  Salsbury,  Morganton,  compose  th< 
board  of  directors. 

Blue  Bell  has  several  plant-wide  operations  ii 
Greensboro.  In  the  executive  offices  in  the  Jeffersoi 
Building  in  addition  to  offices  of  the  principal  officer,1 
and  executives  are  located  the  trucking  division  witl 
D.  D.  Schiltz  in  charge;  C.  M.  Andrew,  purchasing 
agent;  John  Rail,  assistant  purchasing  agent;  E.  F 
Lucas  and  Laurence  Wilson,  salesmen ;  H.  F.  Mosher 
head  of  quality  control,  and  J.  J.  Mclver,  head  0] 
planning.  In  the  accounting  department  in  the  Dixi< 
Building  are  W.  F.  Dewey,  comptroller;  Frank  In 
gram,  accountant;  A.  R.  Davant,  statistician;  Bol 
Stumpf,  order  writing;  Harold  Silkworth,  custome] 
relations;  W.  R.  Windham,  cost. 

Across  the  street  from  the  plant  at  626  South  Eln 
Street  is  the  designing  department  with  Foster  Tus 
sey  in  charge.  This  building  contains  6,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space  and  10  employees  provide  patterns 
for  all  plant  sewing  operations.  In  a  separate  build 
ing  at  736  South  Elm  Street  is  located  the  company's 
printing  department  with  5,600  square  feet  of  flooi 
space  and  15  employees  under  supervision  of  Normal 
Reynolds.  In  the  plant  at  626  South  Elm  Street  are 
located  the  research  department  under  Eugene  Stan- 
ley ;  machine  maintenance  under  H.  T.  Shaw ;  build 
ing  and  electrical  maintenance  under  W.  C.  Wheeler 
and  the  sample  department  under  W.  I.  Smallwood 
In  this  building  also  are  L.  K.  Mann,  engineer,  anc 
Charles  T.  McNary,  personnel  director.  All  of  these 
departments  have  a  company-wide  relationship  t( 
all  plants. 

Greensboro  plants — The  two  plants,  located  01 
South  Elm  Street  and  West  Lee  Street,  were  buili 
during  earlier  days  of  the  firm's  operation.  These 
plants  have  been  considerably  enlarged,  thoroughly 
modernized  and  equipped  with  up-to-date  machinery 
They  employ  about  730  workers  at  a  weeklv  payrol 
of  about  $30,000  or  about  $1,560,000  annually.  These 
are  in  addition  to  about  130  in  the  staffs  of  the  execu 
tive  and  accounting  departments.  The  two  plants 
produce  about  30,000  individual  garments  daily.  The 
Elm  Street  building  covers  96,800  square  feet  of  floo] 
space  and  the  Lee  Street  plant  contains  21,000  square 
feet  of  floor  space,  in  addition  to  the  separate  cafe- 
teria building  which  has  2,400  square  feet  of  space 
Fred  Birdsong  is  plant  manager  for  both  plants  anc 
Setzer  Weston  and  E.  J.  Bauman  are  industrial  engij 
neers.  C.  L.  Gentry  is  superintendent  of  the  Eln 
Street  plant  and  R.  D.  Fields  is  superintendent  of  the; 
Lee  Street  plant. 

Lenoir  plant — This  plant,  operated  as  a  cotton  mill 
by  Bernhardt  and  Nelson  interests  for  several  years1! 
was  bought  in  1943  by  Blue  Bell.     After  thorougl 
renovation  and  installation  of  suitable  machinery, 
the  plant  started  production  early  in  1944.    Produce 
tion  is  from  6,500  to  7,000  dozen  garments  a  week! ! 
The  plant  employs  almost  400  workers  and  contains  i 
more  than  50,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.    A.  Lj 
Lomax  is  plant  manager,  Robert  S.  Hines,  industrial 
engineer,    and    R.    W.    Greeson,    superintendent.— I 
Data  supplied  by  Charles  T.  McNary,  personnel  dil 
rector,  Blue  Bell,  Inc. 


UMMER-FALL,    1952 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  39 


N.  C.  TEXTILE  FIRSTS 

North  Carolina  State  College  has  the  largest  and 
3st  equipped  School  of  Textiles  in  the  United  States. 


The  Schenck  and  Warlick  Mill  in  Lincoln  County, 
ith  a  reported  starting  date  in  1813,  is  credited 
ith  being  the  first  successful  cotton  mill  started  in 
orth  Carolina.  However,  some  evidence  seems  to 
idicate  that  the  Battle  Mill,  now  Rocky  Mount  Mills, 
3ginning  in  1818,  was  the  first. 


Leaksville  Woolen  Mills,  with  main  plant  now  near 
harlotte,  started  at  Spray  "prior  to  1853",  is  said 
»  be  the  oldest  woolen  mill  in  the  entire  south. 


Cannon  Mills  Co.,  Kannapolis,  is  the  largest  towel 
manufacturing  firm  in  the  world. 


Burlington  Mills,  Greensboro,  is  the  largest  manu- 
icturer  of  fine  quality  synthetic  textiles  in  the  world. 


Cone  Mills  Corp.,  Greensboro,  operates  the  largest 
annel  mill  and  the  largest  denim  mill  in  the  world. 


Erwin  Mills  was  the  first  North  Carolina  firm  to 
se  the  sanforizing  process  in  the  production  of 
snims,  early  1930s. 

Textiles-Incorporated,  Gastonia,  leads  the  nation 
i  the  production  of  fine  combed  yarns. 

American  &  Efird  Mills,  Munt  Holly,  is  one  of  the 
Tgest  producers  of  combed  and  carded  yarns  in  the 
ation. 

The  Granite  Plant  at  Haw  River,  now  a  unit  of 
one  Mills,  was  the  first  complete  corduroy  finishing 
lant  in  the  South. 

N.  C.  Finishing  Co.,  on  the  Yadkin  River  near 
alisbury,  is  one  of  the  largest  commission  finishing 
lants  in  the  world. 

Chatham  Manufacturing  Co.,  Elkin,  blankets,  is 
le  largest  single  woolen  mill  in  one  unit  in  the  world. 

The  Hatch  Mill,  Columbus,  of  the  Deering-Milliken 
roup,  is  one  of  the  most  modern  and  complete  tex- 
le  plants  in  the  nation. 

American  Enka  Corp.'s  plant  at  Enka  is  one  of  the 
irgest  single  rayon  plants  in  the  world. 

Blue  Bell,  Greensboro,  has  long  been  the  "World's 
largest  Producer  of  Work  Clothes"  and  is  headed 
Dward  making  that  claim  for  play  clothes. 

Biltmore  Industries,  Asheville,  is  by  far  the  world's 
irgest  hand  woven  homespun  industry. 

The  Cliffside  Mill,  now  a  unit  of  Cone  Mills,  was 
nown  early  in  this  century  as  the  largest  gingham 
lant  in  the  South. 

The  Fieldcrest  Mills'  electric  blanket  plant  at 
ipray  produces  more  than  one-third  of  all  electric 
dankets  manufactured  in  the  United  States. 

North  Carolina  is  the  only  textile  manufacturing 
tate  which  has  a  State  Recreation  Commission,  es- 
ablished  by  the  General  Assembly  in  1946. 


ASSOCIATION  CHANGES  'COTTON'  TO 
TEXTILE7— HALLETT  IS  PRESIDENT 

The  North  Carolina  Cotton  Manufacturers  Asso- 
ciation, in  annual  meeting  at  Pinehurst,  October  16- 
17,  changed  its  name  to  North  Carolina  Textile  Man- 
ufacturers Association.  The  change  was  made  in 
order  to  embrace  manufacturers  of  the  various  man- 
made  fibers  and  synthetic  fabrics. 

H.  K.  Hallett,  vice-president  and  general  manager 
of  Kendall  Mills,  Charlotte,  was  elected  president, 
succeeding  Carl  R.  Harris,  Erwin  Mills,  Durham.  E. 
N.  Bower,  Rockfish-Mebane  Yarn  Mills,  Hope  Mills, 
moved  up  from  second  to  first  vice-president.  Hunter 
Marshall,  Charlotte,  secretary-treasurer  of  the  asso- 
ciation for  34  years,  was  reelected  to  this  executive 
position. 

Directors  elected  for  three-year  terms  are  Gordon 
A.  Burkstresser,  Roanoke  Mills,  Roanoke  Rapids; 
J.  C.  Childers,  Erlanger  Mills,  Lexington;  N.  A. 
Gregory,  Erwin  Mills,  Durham  ;  Don  S.  Holt,  Travora 
Textiles,  Inc.,  Graham;  James  A.  Long,  Jr.,  Roxboro 
Cotton  Mills,  Roxboro;  Frank  Willingham,  Indera 
Mills  Co.,  Winston-Salem. 

Governor-nominate  William  B.  Umstead,  Durham, 
addressed  the  convention. 


N.C  TEXTILE  NOTES 

The  architect  who  drew  the  plans  for  the  Roanoke 
Mills  Co.  and  other  buildings  at  Roanoke  Rapids  was 
Stanford  White,  whose  name  became  known  nation- 
ally later  when  he  was  murdered  by  Harry  K.  Thaw 
over  the  latter's  wife,  Evelyn  Nesbit  Thaw. 
• 

Fieldcrest  Mills,  Leaksville-Spray-Draper,  in  its 
Karastan  Rug  Mill,  Leaksville,  produces  rugs  so 
faithfully  that  only  experts  can  tell  them  from  Ori- 
ental rugs. 


Collins  &  Aikman  Corp.,  with  its  largest  weaving 
plant  near  Roxboro  and  two  other  plants  in  the  State, 
has  come  to  be  known  as  "America's  Largest  Weav- 
ers of  Upholstery  Fabrics." 

• 

Union  Carbide  &  Carbon  Corp.,  through  a  subsid- 
iary, has  made  plans  to  build  a  huge  $30,000,000 
plant  to  manufacture  dynel  at  Draper,  near  Spray, 
where  the  process  of  manufacturing  calcium  carbide 
was  discovered  many  years  ago. 

Robbins  Mills'  Raeford  Plant  is  the  largest  spun 
synthetic  weaving  mill  on  one  floor  under  one  roof 
in  the  world.  This  distinction  belonged  earlier  to 
Robbins  Mills'  Aberdeen  Plant. 


Firestone  Textiles'  plant  in  Gastonia,  formerly 
Loray  Mill,  is  the  largest  textile  plant  under  one  roof 
in  the  world. 

Fieldcrest  Mills,  Spray,  is  the  only  organization  in 
the  world  which  performs  the  complete  operation  of 
weaving,  wiring  and  marketing  the  finished  electric 
blanket. 


Gastonia  is  known  as  the  capital  of  the  fine  combed 
yarn  spinning  industry  since  more  combed  yarn 
plants  are  located  in  and  around  Gastonia  than  in 
any  other  similar  area  in  the  world. 


< 


»«s 


it,        ^  ! 


'5        Hi 


H 


bo£ 


--.Ph 


:p5         w 


«i 


1^3       ^  ™ 


: £ r    to    « • 


S^i 


H-S 

73  ■§ 

h  o 

n)  3  t; 

3pR 
Wco 

t3 

.§2 

if  PQ 

CD  <u 

fs 

=  w  a 

iS 

O)  cu  2 

E;   W   03 

-Ph 


T3  l=i  *^    O 

PQ-f  U 


eW  SW 


o     a:- 


-±j         ogS 


c» 


sSpq 


-     —       o 


H  » 


,Ph 


ho  to 
C  3 


h     cs; 


M 

co 

„ 

t-i 

■ZJ 

t- 

>—*. 

> 

< 

> 

o 
Ph 

c 

o 

> 

E>> 

cu 
,5 

u 

tS 

■CH 

- 

crt 

C 

K* 

CO 

oPh 


bo  o%< 
■a  m 


=  HW 


££ 


2<3  W    OTO  « 


copH 


pq: 


~^*M  ^   to 


Pm« 


pq  3 


§£ 


CO 


A3    ^1 


7  ^c 

a.  cd  rt 
«>th|-= 


2W<! 


H? 


E  h 


r  m    a 


5Ph 


fc  y 


w        s 


H    "" 


^fo 

T3  cd 

■3^ 

S-.    G 

cqpq 

£.3 

3  to 

pq  £ 

1  t» 
,<5S 

CO 

TD 

^    w 

3  *  s 

«» 

o  o 

^  ^ 

1   to  0 

o»+* 

CCtO 
O    £ 

o  2  a> 

=  7} 

=  SCh 

=  «j:s 

w  a 


-a  2 

to  £5  -" 


ho  co 

— 

.   CD 

.s 

■o  a 

-*->    CD 

S  a" 

S5 

S2 

§ 

fl   CS 

,  -W 

CD  t> 

r-, 

'A 
m 

C3pH 

Ht» 

02 

C/2 

_.. 

CD    t- 

^     . 

«8  S 

J3 

O    CD 

be  cp 

CTJ 

^3   fcx 

02 

rfl 

ss 

«3 

2S 

CO 

m 

pq  . 

co  eg 

cy  *5 

c   - 

o 

a> 
ho 

C 

re  cb 

Hi 

i    co 

CO 

t»ii 

St! 

a 

CO 

Bo 
1   ^ 

<-7i 

io 

.—   ■ 

re 

>> 

o 

<<-, 

■  £ 

cu 

Chl 

o  w 

CO 

a> 

?c 

o1^ 

sepq 
5-„  a 

3  2 

<3    CD 

ii>  S'3 

M 

pq^^- 

|5 

■a    . 

le — Smith 
Bonny    C. 
e,    Savoy   H 
Black  Moun 

?    CO"   J 

IS 

■-Ph 

oPH;S 

cos 

2     .. 

gS  « 

■=03 

■S<;op4 

>>02Ph 

BS 


^ 


Ph  -":        °  rrt 


3     a 


5    •i'r 


rf.2     80  Z 


hO     -*J 

C-902 


pq»: 


oEh 


^      ^_ 


■^^3     O  bo 


gPH 


5^    ?2    J|    ^^^    ?! 
|pq    2>^m    =« 

o       o  o 


;pq   -2£o 


ca  ■»  n  "d  '(i)  (d)  tss  -08s) 

SS3U9NOD    dO    1DV    H30Nn    UOd 

aaiNnoDDV  asvisod  S3ivis  aaiiNn 
1IVW  AimODlS  ±N3WAO!dW3 


AlISH3AINn  AHOKH 

_o±~~ 

SS3NI8HQ    1VI3IJJQ 


'D   N  4H9i3iv^|  '68S  xofl 
NOISSIWWOD    S  *3 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 


OLUME  11,  NO.  1-2 


WINTER  SPRING,  1953 


■r.rr^T 


Jorth  Carolina  Produces  40  Percent  of  Nation's  Hosiery, 
Leading  All  Other  States;  Other  Knit  Products  Expanding 


r  sheer  beauty 


PHOTO  BY  ROBERT  M.  DU  BRUYNE 


Samples  of  quality  ivomen's  and  men's  hosiery  produced  in  North  Carolina.  (See  page  53,  top,  right) 

PUBLISHED  BY 

Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALEIGH.  N.  C. 


PAGE  2 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  i  9; 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 

.\      r,  t      .  ''   (Fontie-rly  The  U.C.C.Qnarte/'.y) 

Volume  LVN  umbers  1-2  t  ^Winter-Spring,  1953 

;  .-    '    /  •'I'tssyibd  at  Raleigh;.  N1.  G,  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 

NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  W.  Benton  Pipkin, 
Reidsville;   C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;   Bruce  E.  Davis,  Charlotte. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Col.  A.  L.  Fletcher,  Raleigh,  chair- 
man; Mrs.  Gaston  A.  Johnson,  High  Point;  W.  B.  Horton, 
Yanceyville;  C.  P.  Clark,  Wilson;  Dr.  Alphonso  Elder,  Dur- 
ham; Corbett  Scott,  Asheboro;  L.  L.  Ray,  Raleigh;  Joel  B. 
Leighton,  Rockingham;   J.  A.  Scoggins,  Charlotte. 

HENRY   E.    KENDALL Chairman 

BROOKS   PRICE Deputy   Commissioner 

R.   FULLER   MARTIN Director 

Unemploymen  t  In s u ran  re  Division 

ERNEST  C.  McCRACKEN Director 

Nortli  Carolina  State  Employment  Service  Division 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Public  Information  Officer 

Cover  illustrations  represent  typical  North  Carolina 
industries  or  business  activities  under  the  Employ- 
ment  Security  Program. 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 

CONTENTS  Page 

North   Carolina   Hosiery   Leader 2 

North  Carolina  Produces  40  Percent  of  Nation's  Hosiery ...  3 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn 

State  Has  56  Counties  Producing  Hosiery— Knit  Goods 5 

Historic   Highlights   in   Development   of  Hosiery-Knitting ...  6 

By  Mildred  Barnwell  Andrews 
Steady  Growth  in   Stale's  Hosiery  Industry  Since  War 8 

By  Paul  Kelly 
Southern  Hosiery   Manufacturers'   Association  Aids   Industry 9 

By  Taylor  R.  Durham 

Pioneers  and  Leaders  in  North  Carolina  Hosiery  Industry Ill 

Effective  Knitting,  Hosiery  Instruction  at  State  College 12 

By  W.  E.  Shinn 

High  Point  High,  Guilford  Leader,  in  Hosiery  Industry —14 

Adams-Millis,   One  of  Nation's  Largest  Hosiery  Producers 1-1 

Melrose  Develops  into  Important  High  Point  Hosiery  Firm... .—16 

Mojud  One  of  Three  Largest  F.  F.  Hosiery  Firms  in  World 17 

Burlington  Mills  Has  17  Men's,  Women's  Hosiery  Plants 19 

Burlington,  Alamance  Long   State  Hosiery  Producing  Center 22 

Standard  Produces   High   Quality   Men's.   Women's   Hosiery 

Hickory  and  Catawba  Co.  Big  Producers  of  Men's  Hosiery -.23 

Elliott  and  Lyerly  Large  Men's,  Women's  Hosiery  Makers   —20 

Acme-McCrary  Leading  Firm  in  State's  Hosiery  Industry 28 

Waldensian,   Pilot   and  Valdese   Develop   Successful  Plants 31 

Drexel,  Morganton  and  Huffman  Successful  Hosiery  Group 35 

Chadhourn  a  Modern,   New,   Expanding   Hosiery  Producer 37 

Hudson  Hosiery   Co.,   Famous  for   Silk,   Now  Nylon   Producer —3!) 

Hanes  Hosiery  Nation's  Largest  Fine   Seamless   Producer 40 

[lagan   and   Maurice   Group   Manufactures   Men's   Fine   Hosiery 42 

Surry  County,  Mount  Airy  Producers  of  Men's  Hosiery 43 

Durham  Hosiery  Mills  Early  and  Historic   State  Industry 44 

Hoover  of  Concord  Big  Producer  of  Fine  Women's  Hosiery 45 

Hugh   Grey  Expanding  Production  of  Women's  Fine  Hosiery 46 

Wiscassett  Mills  Produce   Cannon's   Fine   Quality   Hosiery 47 

Gaston  County  Big  Textile  Producer,  Including  Hosiery 48 

(Counties   Producing   Some   Hosiery — Limited   Operations) 49 

Knitting,  Other  Than  Hosiery,  Developing  Rapidly  in  State 51 

Highlights  of   High  Point's   Industry   and  Employment 54 

By  E.  DeKay  Johnson 
Study  of  Economy-Cost  of  Employment    Security   Program 55 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper 
INDEX  to  Volumes  9  and    10,    1951-1952 57-62 

Note  :  Articles  not  otherwise  credited,  written  by  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  Editor. 


RY  LEADE 

North  Carolina  not  only  leads  all  states  in  the  r 
tion  in  the  manufacture  of  hosiery  but  produces  mol:| 
than  40  percent  of  all  hosiery  manufactured  in  t 
entire  nation.  Moreover,  North  Carolina  manufg 
turers  add  more  to  the  value  of  hosiery  throuj 
manufacture  than  any  other  state,  a  margin  that 
increasing  due  to  the  steady  advance  in  the  produ 
tion  of  higher  quality,  higher  type  and  higher  pri 
of  the  State's  hosiery  products. 

Half  a  century  ago  North  Carolina  had  only 
handful  of  hosiery  mills.  Most  of  these  were  produ 
ing  not  more  than  one  or  two  colors,  one  or  two  siz 
and  one  or  two  types  of  cheap  cotton  stockings  ai 
socks.  Silk  stockings  was  being  produced  in  t| 
small  plants  in  North  Carolina  30  years  ago,  but 
small  quantities,  and  experimentally.  Practically  i 
of  the  progress  and  expansion  in  hosiery  product™ 
in  the  State  has  been  made  in  the  past  25  years.   I 

Today  North  Carolina  has  fully  425  hosiery  planu 
employing  more  than  50,000  workers  and  producing 
much  of  the  finest  women's  and  men's,  misses'  arl 
boys'  and  infants'  hosiery  to  be  found  anywhere  I 
the  nation.     Employment  Security  Commission  re 
ords  show  that  in  the  second  quarter  of  1952,  tl 
State  had  377  hosiery  mills  in  operation  and  cover  J 
by  the  Employment  Security  Law ;  that  is,  with  eiglj 
or  more  employees,  and  that  these  firms  employes 
49,065  workers.    Of  these  firms,  256  produced  searl 
less  hosiery,  employing  26,048  workers,  and  121  wen 
classed   as   full-fashioned   hosiery   mills,   employir. 
23,017  workers.     Numbers  of  these  were  producir 
both  full  fashioned  and  seamless  hosiery.     Anothti 
57  firms  employing  11,223  workers  were  producir 
other  knit  goods,  such  as  underwear,  outerwear  ar.| 
knit  specialties. 

However,  these  are  not  definite  figures.  The  ES 
records  show  70  or  more  other  firms  which  had  bee 
in  operation  and  some  of  them  still  are.  Some  ha 
consolidated  with  or  been  absorbed  by  other  firm 
Some  may  have  been  in  suspension  temporaril; 
Estimates  are  that  probably  more  than  50  firms  di 
not  have  as  many  as  eight  employees  and  were  thi 
not  subject  to  the  ES  Law.  Numbers  of  fully  en 
ployed  mill  workers  have  bought  one,  two,  or  a  fe" 
small  machines  when  the  employing  firm  was  suj 
planting  them  with  more  modern  machines,  set  thei 
up  in  a  garage,  a  shed  or  in  one  room  of  the  home  an 
thus  became  hosiery  manufacturers.  Many  of  th 
State's  successful  and  substantial  firms  started  i 
some  such  manner. 

North  Carolina  hosiery  manufacturers  seem  t 
have  a  mania  for  turning  most  of  their  profits  bad 
into  the  plants — building  new  mills,  buying  the  ver 
latest  in  machinery  and  equipment.  This  means,  to; 
in  case  of  full  fashioned  hosiery,  that  the  machine 
are  much  larger — with  more  sections — and  thus  ir 
crease  production.  Seamless  hosiery  no  longer  cor| 
notes  the  cheap  cotton  stockings  of  50  years  agd 
Among  them  are  the  high  quality  nylon  hosier 
worn  by  fashionable  women  today.  Seamless  hos 
also  include  the  fine  grades  of  men's  half  hose  am 
anklets,  misses',  boys'  and  infants'  hose,  plain,  fane, 
and  high-styled. 

The  hosiery  industry  has  its  ups  and  downs,  i 
sensitive  to  economic  conditions.  Last  year  goo- 
gains  were  made  in  production,  but  prices  wer 
down,  tending  to  balance  income  of  the  industry 
But  the  industry  is  growing  up  and  is  becoming  ai 
important  feature  of  the  North  Carolina  economy. 


/INTER-SPRING,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  3 


^orth  Carolina  Produces  40  Percent  of  Nation's  Hosiery. 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn,  Supervisor  of  Reports  and  Analysis,  Bureau  o/  Res'sarth  and  Statistics,  E' SO  ' 


"Hosiery  Comes  to  North  Carolina"  is  no  exagge- 
ation  for  during  the  past  30  years  North  Carolina 
as  been  rising  rapidly  in  importance  in  the  hosiery 
ldustry,  and  has  out-gained  all  other  states.  More 
osiery  employment,  production,  value  of  product, 
ft,  are  now  found  in  North  Carolina  than  in  any 
ther  state.  Over  one-third  (and  some  statistics 
apport  a  figure  of  40  percent)  of  ALL  hosiery  is 
lade  in  this  State,  the  closest  state  being  Pennsyl- 
ania,  which  accounts  for  slightly  over  one-fifth  of 
le  national  total.  Following  Pennsylvania  is  Ten- 
essee,  with  about  12  percent. 

Today,  North  Carolina  has  an  employment  of 
bout  50,000  engaged  in  hosiery  production  and 
bout  60,000  workers  employed  in  the  entire  knit 


Table  I- 


-Hosieby  Plant  Facilities  and  Production 
N.  C,  South  and  U.  S.,  1951. 


YPE  OF  HOSIERY 
AND  AREA 

PRODUCTION 

No.  of 

No.  of 

Millions 

Percent  of 

Percent  of 

Mills 

Machines 

of  Pairs 

South 

Nation 

AMLESS 

North  Carolina     . 

255 

38,395 

576.0 

58.3 

46.3 

Southern  States  

370 

69,400 

987.6 

79.4 

United  States     . 

604 

1,243.2 

ill  Fashioned 

North  Carolina. 

126 

2,400 

210.0 

60.0 

34.4 

Southern  States..   ._ 

203 

4,175 

292.8 

57.4 

United  States  _ 

767 

10.945 

614.4 

ji  Hosiery 

North  Carolina 

381 
1,371 

7S6.0 
1,857.6 

42.3 

•uree:  Data  from  Taylor  Durham,  president  and  secretary,  Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers' 
isociation,  Liberty  Life  Building,  Charlotte,  N.  C. 

oods  industry.  (Second  quarter,  1952,  employment 
nder  the  Employment  Security  Program  amounted 
3  approximately  49,000  in  hosiery  and  over  11,000 
i  the  other  branches  of  the  knit  goods  industry.) 
'he  significance  of  these  figures  is  evident  when  one 
ealizes  that  total  national  employment  in  hosiery 
7as  only  126,491  in  1947  (see  Table  III).  In  the 
947  Census  of  Manufactures  1,355  firms  were  re- 


EMPLOYMtNT    IN,    J#E*  KijtfTTINjS    IN.DjJbTK X,      i    .   .    :    <      '» 
COVERED    BY    EMPLOYMEKf   SECURITY    COMMISSION    Of'  NOhTH    CAROLINA 


ported  as  being  engaged  in  hosiery  production  as 
compared  with  411  located  in  North  Carolina. 

This  State's  leading  hosiery  producing  counties 
(with  approximate  covered  employment  in  second 
quarter,  1952,  in  parentheses)  are:  Guilford  (8,250)  ; 
Alamance  (6,150)  ;  Catawba  and  Randolph  (4,250 
each)  ;  Burke  (3,250)  ;  Mecklenburg  (2,600)  ;  For- 
syth (2,875)  ;  and  Surry  (2,400).  Fifty-six  out  of 
the  100  counties  in  North  Carolina  report  some  cov- 
ered employment  in  hosiery,  with  38  of  these  coun- 
ties having  hosiery  employment  of  over  100. 

The  accompanying  tables  depict  the  relative  im- 
portance of  North  Carolina  as  a  hosiery  producing 
state  and  its  position  among  other  leading  states  in 
the  United  States. 

In  1899  North  Carolina  had  less  than  2  percent  of 


TABLE  II— LEADING  STATES  IN  HOSIERY  MANUFACTURING  IN  1947   (Dollar  Amounts  in 

Thousands) 

Total  Hosier 

V 

Full  Fashioned 

Seamless 

No. 

of 
Est. 

Value  Added 
By  Mfg. 

Value  of 
Prod.  Shipped 

Value  Added 
By  Mfg. 

Value  of 
Prod.Shipped 

Value  Added 
by  Mfg. 

Value  of 
Prod.  Shipped 

State 

Amount 

Percent 

Amount 

Percent 

Amount 

Percent 

Amount 

Percent 

Amount 

Percent 

Amount 

Percent 

nited  States 

1.355 
411 
428 
97 
60 
18 
77 
16 
32 
10 
35 

$483,174 
141.547 
141.482 
40,846 
24,765 
17,045 
15.888 
15,790 
14,932 
11.470 
10,076 

100.00 
29.30 
29.28 
8.45 
5.13 
3.53 
3.29 
3.27 
3.09 
2.37 
2.09 

$  858,279 
261,293 
228,500 
74 . 372 
42,561 
25,131 
25,460 
39,010 
26.447 
28,788 
22.705 

100.00 

30.44 
26.62 
8.67 
4.96 
2.93 
2.97 
4.55 
3.08 
3.35 
2.65 

$  319,369 

71,511 

124,024 

18.124 

8.841 

13,712 

15.101 

11.470 

11,940 

11.470 

5,814 

100.00 

22.39 
38.83 
5.67 
2.77 
4.29 
4.73 
3.59 
3.74 
3.59 
1.82 

$  531,519 

122,741 
194,315 
29,587 
13,684 
18,910 
23,596 
28,788 
19,704 
28,788 
14.918 

100.00 
23.09 
36.56 
5.57 
2.57 
3.5G 
4.44 
5.42 
3.71 
5.42 
2.81 

$  163.805 

70,036 

17,458 

22.722 

15,924 

3,333 

787 

4,320 

2,992 

* 

4,262 

100.00 

42.76 
10.66 
13.87 
9.72 
2.03 
0.48 
2.64 
1.83 

2.60 

S  326,760 

138,552 

34,185 

44,785 

28,877 

6.221 

1.864 

10,222 

6,743 

7,787 

100.00 

orth  Carolina       

42.40 

ensylvania.     -.  . 

10.46 

ennessee     .     

eorgia.   .              _   _     _   _ 

13.71 
8.84 

"isconsin  _ 
ew  Jersey, 

1.90 
.57 

linois 

3.12 

irginia 

2.06 

idiana     . 

ew  York_. 

2.38 

Mot  reported,  but  amount  is  relatively  small  (two  establishments). 
OURCE:  U.  S.  Census  of  Manufactures— 1947— (Latest  Available) 


PAGE  4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  l  95 


Table    III — Production    Employment    in    Hosiery    and    Knit 
Goodsc  in  United  States  and  North  Carolina — -1947  and  1939 


■"',  ::  ■■ ;  , .)  *«J 

.UNITED,  STATE* 

:    I  Vr 

toETfif  Carolina 

IndVist'hy'Qiioj??     - ' 

!  h^i 

.'    1936 1 

\'  /'     6?94"'/f' 

1939 

«    t  » 

Number' 

Vu.  s. 

\  Mint kt 

%  U.  S. 

Total  Knitting 

212,962 

236,628 

46,692 

21.93 

46,157 

19.51 

Hosiery       -       - 

126,491 

159.052 

41,178 

32.55 

42,664 

26.82 

Full  Fashioned  . 

65,148 

97,200 

15,669 

24.05 

20, 347 

20.93 

Seamless.    ...._. 

61,343 

61,852 

25,509 

41.58 

22,317 

36.08 

30,596 

23,437 

Underwear  ._     . 

37,546 

37,478 

3.998 

10.65 

3,102 

8.28 

4,955 

5,574 

" 

Fabric 

12,502 

9,548 

1,516 

12.13 

391 

4.10 

Other 

872 

1 , 5391 

SOURCE:  U.  S.  Census  of  Manufactures— 1947— {Latest  Available) 

the  national  employment  engaged  in  the  entire  knit- 
ting goods  industry  (it  was  1929  before  a  more  de- 
tailed industrial  breakdown  of  this  industry  readily 
permitted  specific  hosiery  employment) .  At  that 
early  elate  (1899)  New  York  led  all  states  with  knit 
goods  employment  of  about  one-third — the  position 
North  Carolina  holds  today  in  the  hosiery  segment 
of  the  knit  goods  industry.  Following  New  York 
was  Pennsylvania  with  about  one-fourth  of  the  in- 
dustry's employment. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  at  this  point  that  of  the 
two  leading  knit  goods  states  in  1899,  New  York  and 
Pennsylvania,  only  the  latter  has  continued  to  main- 
tain a  fairly  constant  share  of  the  industry.  Actual- 
ly, Pennsylvania  gained  moderately  for  a  while,  for 
in  1929  Pennsylvania  accounted  for  about  30  percent 
of  the  national  knit  goods  employment  and  about  38 
percent  of  the  national  hosiery  employment.  There- 
after, that  state  suffered  a  decline  in  hosiery  employ- 
ment, having  only  23  percent  in  1947  and  today 
probably  one-fifth  of  all  hosiery  employment  in 
the  United  States.  In  contrast,  New  York  started 
with  31.8  percent  of  knit  goods  employment  in  1899 
which  figure  had  declined  to  15  percent  by  1929; 
furthermore,  in  1929,  that  State  had  only  3.6  per- 
cent of  the  country's  hosiery  employment,  and  today 
probably  less  than  2  percent  (see  Table  II) . 

Nothing  could  depict  better  the  rapid  rise  that 
North  Carolina  has  enjoyed  during  recent  years  in 
the  hosiery  industry  than  the  accompanying  charts 
which  show  this  steady  and  spectacular  growth. 

From  1899  to  1919  North  Carolina's  proportion  of 
national  knit  goods  employment  rose  from  1.79  per- 
cent to  5.92  percent,  a  treble  growth.  Within  the 
next  ten  years  to  1929  this  proportion  nearly  dou- 
bled, rising  from  5.92  to  11.0  percent.  In  that  year 
(1929),  specific  hosiery  employment  figures  became 
readily  available,  the  data  showing  that  North  Caro- 
lina comprised  15.18  percent  of  national  hosiery  em- 
ployment. Within  the  next  ten  years  from  1929  to 
1939,  the  State's  percent  of  the  national  hosiery  em- 
ployment practically  doubled  again,  rising  from 
15.18  to  28.03  percent.  The  last  eight  years  shown 
in  the  table,  1939-1947,  North  Carolina  increased  its 
share  only  moderately — from  28.03  to  32.55  percent. 
Since  1947,  North  Carolina  has  continued  to  gain 
and  now  accounts  for  about  40  percent  of  the  na- 


State 
Seal  e 
Thousands 
75  r 


60  - 


EMPLOYMENT    TRENDS    for    U.S.     and    LEADING    STATES 
Knit   Goods   (1899-1929);    Hosiery   (1929-1947) 


45  - 


30 


I  5 


1899   1904   1909   1914   1919 

< Knit      Goods  - 


1929        1929  1939  194 

->  < — Hosiery    Only  — 


' 


tional  production.  Despite  this  lion's  share  of  thl 
industry,  hosiery  plants  continue  to  spring  up  in  thi 
State. 

Despite  this  exceedingly  favorable  employmen 
trend  and  despite  the  distinction  of  being  the  leadinj 
hosiery  producing  State  in  the  nation,  it  would  b 
amiss  not  to  point  up  the  considerable  instability  o 
employment  in  this  industry.  Hosiery  in  Nortl 
Carolina  is  not  only  prominent  from  a  national  view- 
point, but  it  is  of  equal  significance  locally  in  its  im 
pact  on  the  unemployed  groups. 

Few  industries  in  North  Carolina,  excluding  th 
obviously  seasonal  industries  such  as  tobacco  process 
ing,  fertilizer,  etc.,  have  more  erratic  gyrations  h 
employment  than  this  segment  of  the  textile  indus 
try.  This  point  may  be  illustrated  by  a  monthl 
employment  curve,  which  is  found  on  page  3,  and  h] 
comparing  the  average  contribution  rate  paid  by  em 
ployers  on  taxable  wages  for  the  unemployment  com 
pensation  trust  fund  with  the  rates  paid  by  selectee 
industries  and  all  industries.1 

Whereas  the  average  contribution  rate  for  all  in- 
dustries in  1951  was  1.49  percent  of  taxable  wages 
1.42  for  tobacco,  1.81  for  construction,  and  1.87  foi 
the  entire  textile  industry  (which  was  depressed 
generally  during  the  period),  the  rate  was  1.75  foi 
the  knit  goods  industry  in  North  Carolina  (of  whicl 
hosiery  comprised  88  percent  of  employment  ir 
1947) .  This  contribution  rate  of  1.75  compares  witf 
0.76  for  the  entire  Finance,  Insurance,  and  Real  Es 
tate  Group  and  with  0.91  for  the  Transportation] 
Communication,  and  Utilities  Group,  both  of  whicr 
are  examples  of  relatively  stable  industries. 

The  trend  of  covered  employment  in  the  knit  goods 

(Continued  on  Page  53  ) 


1  The  average  contribution  rate  is  believed  to  be  a  good  indication  of  the 
relative  stability  of  employment  among  industries  because,  as  a  rule,  the  mors 
stable  an  industry's  employment  is,  the  lower  the  contribution  rate  it  has  tc 
pay  ;  that  is,  the  smaller  the  unemployment  in  the  industry,  the  smaller  th« 
contribution    required   for   unemployment   compensation. 


1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  5 


State  Has  56  Counties  Producing  Hosiery  and  Other  Knit  Goods 


North  Carolina  has  56  counties  which  contain  hos- 
ry  and  other  knitwear  products  plants,  38  of  them 
iving  hosiery  employment  in  excess  of  100  workers, 
mployment  Security  Commission  figures  show  that 
34  hosiery  and  other  knitting-  plants  were  in  opera- 
pn  in  the  second  quarter  of  1952,  employing  60,288 
orkers.  This  is  not  the  complete  picture,  for  some 
[ants  were  not  operating  during  that  period,  and 
robably  50  small  plants  (with  less  than  eight  em- 


ployees) are  not  covered  by  the  Employment  Secur- 
ity Law.  Of  these  56  counties,  35  contained  seamless 
hosiery  plants  and  37  had  full  fashioned  hosiery 
plants,  numbers  of  them  producing  both  types.  And, 
24  counties  had  plants  producing  knit  products  other 
than  hosiery.  These  counties,  with  types  of  plants, 
numbers  of  plants  and  numbers  of  employees,  in  the 
second  quarter  of  1952,  follow : 


All  Knitting 


Counties 


No.  of 
Firms 


Employ- 
ment 


HOSIERY 


Seamless 


No.  of 
Firms 


Employ- 
ment 


Full  Fashioned 


ALL  OTHER  KNITTING 


No.  of 
Firms 


Employ- 
ment 


No.  of 
Firms 


Employ- 
ment 


434 


60,288 


256 


26,048 


121 


23,017 


57 


11,223 


54 

7258 

27 

1562 

20 

4606 

7 

1090 

3 

179 

2 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

3 

391 

0 

0 

1 

* 

2 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

4 

424 

2 

* 

2 

* 

0 

0 

22 

3281 

12 

1780 

8 

1471 

2 

* 

7 

1083 

2 

* 

4 

721 

1 

* 

4 

227 

3 

107 

1 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

75 

5637 

68 

4094 

3 

148 

4 

1395 

2 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

22 

2306 

20 

2073 

1 

24 

1 

209 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

7 

1201 

4 

226 

3 

975 

0 

0 

2 

* 

2 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

9 

6457 

7 

2851 

1 

13 

1 

3593 

14 

1597 

3 

536 

5 

716 

6 

345 

2 

* 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

39 

8327 

26 

4441 

10 

3826 

3 

60 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

7 

395 

3 

234 

4 

161 

0 

0 

5 

769 

1 

* 

1 

* 

3 

566 

2 

105 

0 

0 

2 

105 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

14 

537 

12 

457 

1 

* 

1 

* 

16 

2786 

0 

0 

12 

2629 

4 

157 

3 

370 

3 

370 

0 

0 

0 

0 

8 

574 

8 

574 

0 

0 

0 

0 

4 

230 

2 

* 

1 

* 

1 

* 

2 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

* 

2 

** 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

2 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

2 

* 

0 

0 

35 

4457 

17 

1447 

15 

2800 

3 

210 

2 

* 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

3 

115 

0 

0 

0 

0 

3 

115 

3 

1360 

0 

0 

2 

* 

1 

* 

3 

55 

2 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

7 

1337 

2 

* 

5 

1200 

0 

0 

19 

3309 

12 

2200 

1 

* 

6 

893 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

1 

* 

0 

0 

3 

105 

3 

105 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

* 

2 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

* 

1 

* 

0 

0 

0 

0 

)  When  less  than  three  Arms  are  shown,  employment  Is  not  given  to  prevent  disclosing  Employment  Security  Commission  figures  on  employment  of  individual 
firms,    Omitted  figures  are  included  In  totals. 


PAGE  6 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195 


Historic  Highlights  in  Development  of  Hosiery -Knittinj 

By  Mildred  Barnwell  Andrews 


One  article  of  apparel  which  every  person  wears, 
regardless  of  age,  sex  or  station  in  life,  is  hosiery. 
Women  wear  full-fashioned  or  circular  knit  hosiery ; 
men  wear  half-hose;  children  of  today  wear  either 
ankle  sox,  bobby  sox,  or  knee  length,  depending  upon 
the  seasonal  fashion ;  even  the  new  born  infant  wears 
a  bootee.  Each  of  these  styles  is  a  product  of  the 
knitting  machine,  the  basic  machine  which  has  made 
possible  the  vast  hosiery  industry  of  the  United 
States,  and  one  of  the  greatest  industrial  develop- 
ments of  North  Carolina. 

Compared  to  weaving,  any  historical  reference  to 
the  art  of  knitting  is  relatively  recent.  Knitting  is 
supposed  to  have  originated  in  Scotland,  but  by  the 
fifteenth  century  the  art  had  spread  to  England  and 
the  Continent. 

Elastic  characteristics  of  knitted  garments,  which 
could  be  fashioned  to  fit,  challenged  knitters'  design- 
ing talent.  Underwear,  shirts,  warm  jackets,  as  well 
as  hosiery,  were  a  natural  development  in  knitted 
apparel.  Every  female  was  taught  to  knit  as  soon 
as  she  was  old  enough  to  control  the  needles,  and 
cottage  knitting  became  a  trade.  In  1488,  during 
the  reign  of  Henry  VII,  and  as  one  of  the  sovereign's 
attempts  to  encourage  commerce  and  industry,  Eng- 
land fixed  the  price  of  knitted  headgear  or  caps. 

Knitted  stockings  had  rapidly  supplanted  the  un- 
gainly and  uncomfortable  cloth  stockings  which 
wound  about  the  leg  like  spiral  puttees.  For  court- 
iers and  noblemen,  silk  hose  then  replaced  the  ordi- 
nary woolen,  and  there  is  record  of  a  fine  pair  of 
knitted  silk  stockings  sent  from  Spain  to  Henry 
VIII  (circa  1509-47).  Knitting,  like  weaving,  be- 
came a  craft,  and  in  1527  a  Hosiery  Knitters'  Guild 
was  formed  in  France. 

In  1589,  William  Lee,  of  Nottingham,  England, 
invented  the  first  knitting  machine.  Lee,  a  young 
curate  of  St.  John's  College,  had  broken  a  rule  of  the 
college  against  curates  marrying  and,  consequently, 
had  lost  his  position.  His  wife,  a  skilled  and  speedy 
knitter,  went  to  work  with  her  knitting  to  help  sup- 
port the  family  while  Lee  was  unsuccessfully  trying 
to  get  another  job.  During  this  period,  watching  his 
Cecily's  busy  needles,  Lee  began  experimenting  with 
a  machine  for  knitting  stockings.    Upon  its  comple- 


The  author — Mildred  Barnwell  Andrews,  who  is  a  previous  contributor  to 
The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly,  gained  much  of  her  textile  experience  in  North  Caro- 
lina. She  has  written  and  lectured  on  the  textile  industry,  its  achievements, 
its  problems,  and  its  great  sociological  influence  for  many  years.  Once  when 
being  introduced  to  an  audience  it  was  said  "She  is  not  a  person,  she  is  a 
tradition." 

She  was  Executive  Secretary  of  the  Southern  Combed  Yarn  Spinners  Asso- 
ciation, in  Gastonia,  for  about  16  years,  and  during  her  stewardship  the 
organization  grew  into  national  prominence.  She  was  active  in  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  textile  mills  industrywide  public  relations  program,  serving  as 
Committee  Representative  of  the  Textile  Committee  on  Public  Relations,  of 
which  Mr.  C.  A.  Cannon  is  chairman.  During  World  War  II  she  was  special 
consultant  on  textiles  in  the  Office  of  the  Quartermaster  General,  and  was 
a  member  of  the  War  Production   Board's  Industrial  Salvage  Committee. 

Mrs.  Andrews  has  recently  been  appointed  public  relations  director  for 
the  American  Textile  Machinery  Exhibition  to  be  held  in  1954,  under  the 
sponsorship  of  the  American  Textile  Machinery  Association,  of  which  Fred- 
erick W.   Howe,  Jr.,  of  Crompton   &   Knowles   Loom  Works   is  president. 


tion  he  applied  for  a  patent,  but  Queen  Elizabet 
refused  the  grant  on  the  basis  that  the  machir 
would  throw  hand  knitters  out  of  employment,  hi 
took  his  stocking  machine  to  France.  Althoug 
later  Queen  Elizabeth  marveled  at  the  fine  silk  hos 
of  France's  Henry  II,  and  although  the  export  c 
French  knitted  stockings  grew  amazingly,  it  was  n 
during  Lee's  lifetime  that  the  great  importance  c 
his  invention  was  recognized. 

In  France,  however,  the  great  Richelieu  (aboi 
1640)  encouraged  the  knitters,  and,  at  Chartres 
men,  women,  and  children  spent  every  moment  whe 
they  were  not  at  work  on  their  farms  knitting  woole 
stockings.  A  good  knitter  could  knit  three  stocking 
a  day.  Knitting  of  stockings  became  such  a  consurc 
ing  industry  in  the  little  town  of  Tricot  (near  Beau 
vais,  in  France)  that  tricoter  became  the  verb  fo 
knitting,  and  from  it  today  the  tricot  machine  i 
identified. 

In  the  young  American  colonies  interest  in  knit 
ting  was  spurred  along  when  the  Governor  of  th 
Colony  of  Virginia  offered,  in  1662,  a  premium  o 
ten  pounds  of  tobacco  (commonly  accepted  as  lega 
tender)  for  every  dozen  pairs  of  woolen  or  worste* 
stockings ;  and  in  Pennsylvania  knitters  of  coars 
yarn  stockings  are  said  to  have  received  one  hal 
crown  a  pair  in  1698. 

The  principle  of  hand  knitting  is  that  a  require* 
number  of  loops  of  yarn  are  cast  onto  a  straight  lonj 
needle.     With  another  similar  needle,  the  knitte 
wraps  a  loop  of  yarn  around  the  needle  and  pull 
the  fresh  loop  of  yarn  through  the  nearest  loop  oi 
the  first  needle,  transferring  the  loop  from  the  firs 
to  the  second  needle  in  the  process.    Each  complet 
transfer  of  all  the  loops  from  one  needle  to  anothe 
in  this  method  makes  a  row,  and  adds  to  the  lengt! 
of  the  finished  material  by  the  width  of  the  loop 
Continuous  repetition  of  this  process  back  and  fortl 
eventually  results  in  a  knitted  fabric.  In  his  machin 
the  Reverend   Lee  kept  this  principle  of  forming 
fabric  through  continuous  looping  of  yarn,  but  in] 
stead  of  the  straight  needle  which  is  employed  iij 
hand  knitting,  he  developed  a  small  needle  with  i\ 
hook  in  the  end  which  pulled  the  loops  through  on<j 
another. 

Lee's  machine,  a  stocking  frame  of  a  flat  bed  type 
with  his  spring-beard  needles,  was  a  crude  thing 
Bobbins  of  yarn  were  placed  on  the  floor  and  yari 
was  laid  across  the  needles  by  hand.  Jacks,  acting 
in  conjunction  with  sinkers,  allocated  the  yarn  foil 
each  loop.  The  little  machine  knitted  eight  loops  tc 
the  inch.  Today  machines  are  capable  of  knitting  4| 
loops  to  the  inch. 

Stockings  were  first  knitted  by  machinery  ii 
America  at  Chester,  Pennsylvania,  in  1723.  Th< 
frames  were  brought  over  by  German  settlers  as  th< 
English  government  had  placed  strict  regulation; 


/inter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  7 


gainst  exportation  of  stocking  frames  to  the  col- 
nies. 

England  maintained  a  strong  position  in  machine 
evelopments  and  closely  guarded  each  newly  in- 
ented  process.     In  1758  Jedidiah  Strutt,  who  later 

as  in  partnership  with  Richard  Arkwright,  invent- 

1  a  machine  for  "making  turned  ribbed  stockings 
nd  other  goods".  And  in  1775  a  Mr.  Crane  of 
Idmonton,  England,  succeeded  in  applying  warp  to 
le  stocking  frame,  receiving  the  first  patent  for  a 
warp  knit  machine". 

1  Restrictions  on  imports  of  machinery  and  the  in- 
reasing  need  for  a  stocking  industry  led  to  various 
l^pes  of  incentive  offers  for  inventions  of  machines 
nd  establishment  of  factories  in  America.  In  1766 
hhe  Society  of  Arts  of  New  York  offered  a  prize  of 
en  pounds  for  the  first  three  stocking  looms  of  iron, 
'here  is  no  record  that  the  prize  was  ever  awarded, 
"en  years  later,  when  the  Declaration  of  Independ- 
nce  was  newly  signed  (1776),  one  of  the  first  ap- 
iropriations  made  by  the  Committee  of  Safety  of 
Maryland  was  300  pounds  to  Mr.  Coxendefer,  of 
"rederick  County,  for  the  purpose  of  establishing 

stocking  factory. 

The  next  development  of  importance  in  knitting 
lachines  was  the  tricoteur,  a  circular  knitting  ma- 
hine,  which  was  invented  in  1816  by  M.  I.  Brunei, 
ut  not  until  1847,  when  the  latch  needle  was  in- 
ented  was  there  any  change  in  the  springbeard 
ype  needle  developed  by  William  Lee  nearly  300 
ears  before.  Several  claims  exist  as  to  the  inventor 
f  the  latch  needle :  Some  say  that  Matthew  Town- 
end  of  England  invented  it ;  France  claims  that  the 
lachine  was  invented  there,  and  in  America  it  is 
aid  that  the  machine  was  developed  by  a  Mr.  Aiken 
f  New  Hampshire. 

The  latch  needle  is  generally  used  today  and  is 
istrumental  in  speeding  up  machine  operation.  It 
3  a  small  steel  needle  with  a  latch,  like  a  door  latch, 
n  it,  permitting  the  eye  which  holds  the  yarn  to 
lose  as  it  pulls  the  yarn  through  the  loop,  and  to 
pen  and  release  the  yarn  as  the  new  loop  is  made, 
'he  simple  principle  of  creating  fabric  through  the 
lethod  of  pulling  yarn  through  a  series  of  loops 
olds  true  on  the  highly  complicated  and  brilliantly 
erforming  knitting  machines  of  today,  which, 
hrough  their  mass  production,  have  made  the  knit 
oods  industry  such  an  important  one. 

Despite  continued  drastic  English  restrictions 
gainst  export  of  machinery,  knitting  machines  for 
onerican  use  were  smuggled  into  the  country  from 
England  during  our  Industrial  Revolution.  Town- 
end  left  England  and  settled  in  America  and  doubt- 
iss  contributed  something  to  the  growth  of  the 
nitting  industry  in  this  country.  At  any  rate,  the 
imerican  industry  had  quickly  expanded.  In  1831 
'imothy  Baily  of  Albany,  New  York,  succeeded  in 
pplying  water  power  to  the  old  stocking  frame  of 
he  Reverend  Lee ;  and  a  year  later  Baily  &  Co.  began 
peration  of  their  factory,  employing  water  power 
r  steam  for  the  first  time  in  the  manufacture  of 
nitwear,  in  Cohoes,  New  York. 


KNITTING  ARTS  EXHIBITION 

ATLANTIC  CITY,  APRIL-MAY 

North  Carolina  hosiery  and  knit  goods  manufac- 
turers are  interested  in  the  hiennnal  Knitting  Arts 
Exhibition  scheduled  for  April  27-May  1  this  year 
at  Atlantic  City,  N.  J.,  and  sponsored  jointly  by  the 
National  Association  of  Hosiery  Manufacturers,  the 
National  Knitted  Outerwear  Association  and  the 
Underwear  Institute. 

At  this  exhibition  all  new  machinery  develop- 
ments, new  processes,  mechanical  features  and  yarn 
improvements  are  on  practical  display.  For  the 
period  of  the  show  the  auditorium  is  transformed 
into  the  largest  knitting  mill  ever  put  in  operation, 
as  knitters  and  spinners  and  manufacturers  of  ma- 
chinery and  supplies  swap  trade  notes  on  progress, 
and  see  knit  goods  history  in  the  making. 


U.  S.  patents  on  circular  knitting  machines  were 
granted  in  1840,  and  in  1858  a  spring  needle  machine 
for  making  finer  ribbed  underwear  was  patented  by 
Cooper  &  Tiffany. 

In  1863,  when  the  United  States  was  racked  by 
civil  war,  an  American  clergyman,  Q.  U.  Lamb,  in- 
vented the  first  flat  bed  knitting  machine  for  manu- 
facturing wide,  flat  fabrics.  Having  two  horizontal, 
flat  beds,  it  was  capable  of  producing  flat  fabric 
with  selvage  edge  or  tubular  fabric. 

With  the  impetus  of  machine  development  in  the 
knit  goods  field  it  was  inevitable  that  a  factory  for 
manufacture  of  knitting  machines  would  spring  up. 
In  1865  Joseph  Heginbothom,  an  Englishman  who 
had  emigrated  to  the  United  States  in  1863,  started 
a  small  machine  shop  in  Philadelphia.  He  named 
the  little  shop  The  Fidelity  Machine  Works,  and  by 
1870  was  turning  out  circular  knitting  machines  at 
a  rate  of  approximately  six  circular  machines  per 
month.  By  1882  The  Fidelity  Machine  Works  em- 
ployed a  force  of  150  men,  and  was  manufacturing 
thirty  to  forty  rib  underwear  machines  a  month. 
The  shop  was  sold  in  1888  to  Robert  W.  Scott  and 
Louis  N.  D.  Williams  who  changed  the  name  of  the 
company  to  Scott  &  Williams.  That  company  is  still 
in  operation  today,  and  is  recognized  as  the  oldest 
manufacturing  company  in  the  United  States  pro- 
ducing knit  goods  machinery. 

In  England,  in  1863,  William  Cotton  had  patented 
a  hosiery  knitting  machine  which  could  shape  gar- 
ments as  they  were  being  knitted.  This  machine  and 
Henry  J.  Griswold's  invention  in  America  in  1870 
of  the  automatic,  circular  knitting  machine  revolu- 
tionized the  knitting  industry. 

American  genius  has  in  the  last  half  century  im- 
proved all  the  basic  machines  and  component  parts ; 
and  the  development  of  special  types  for  knitting 
hosiery,  garments,  and  various  designs  and  types  of 
fabric  has  placed  the  knitting  industry  as  one  of 
the  most  progressive  groups  in  the  manufacturing 
industry. 


The  Golden  Crown  Hosiery  Mill  was  operating  success- 
fully in  the  manufacture  of  hosiery  in  Charlotte  in  1898 
under  the  management  of  R.  M.  Oates,  Jr.  His  father  at 
that  time  was  president  of  the  First  National  Bank  of 
Charlotte. 


PAGE  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  19.' 


ii 


Steady  Growth  in  State's  Hosiery  Industry  Since  War 


By  Paul  Kelly,  Head,  Division 

N.  C.  State  Dept.  of  Consei 

The  hosiery  industry,  not  unlike  the  synthetic  and 
woolen  and  worsted  industries,  has  shown  accelerat- 
ed growth  in  North  Carolina  in  recent  years.  Ac- 
cording to  the  latest  published  directory  (1951), 
there  are  in  operation  in  the  State  255  hosiery  mills 
manufacturing  seamless  goods  (men's,  children's 
and  women's  circular  knit  hosiery)  and  126  full 
fashioned  mills  manufacturing  ladies'  expensive  type 
of  hosiery.  According  to  the  latest  figures  compiled 
by  the  N.  C.  Department  of  Labor,  well  over  50,000 
people  are  employed  in  the  hosiery  mills  of  North 
Carolina  with  average  weekly  earnings  of  $59.86  in 
the  full  fashioned  mills  and  $43.84  in  the  seamless 
hosiery  plants. 

There  is  produced  in  the  State  of  North  Carolina 
more  than  50%  of  all  the  hosiery  currently  being 
produced  in  the  entire  South.  The  South  produces 
approximately  55%  of  all  full  fashioned  hosiery  and 
almost  80%  of  the  seamless  hosiery. 

During  1951  North  Carolina  produced  48,000,000 
dozens  of  pairs  of  seamless  hosiery  out  of  a  total  of 
103,500,000  dozens  of  pairs  of  this  type  of  hose.  It 
produced  17,600,000  dozens  of  pairs  of  full  fashioned 
hosiery  out  of  a  total  of  51,000,000  dozens  of  pairs 
produced  throughout  the  country.  The  total  produc- 
tion of  all  hosiery  in  the  United  States  for  1951 
amounted  to  154,750,000  dozens  of  pairs.  Thus,  it 
will  be  noted  from  the  above  figures  that  North 
Carolina  produced  slightly  above  40%'  of  the  total 
for  the  whole  country  and  more  than  any  other  state 
in  the  Union. 

There  were,  during  1951,  750  multiple  section  full 
fashioned  machines  installed  in  the  industry  through- 
out the  United  States  and  about  35%,  or  approxi- 
mately 260,  of  these  machines  were  installed  in  the 
State  of  North  Carolina.  Incidentally,  these  ma- 
chines installed  cost  between  $35,000  and  $40,000 
each. 

The  hosiery  directory  mentioned  above  indicates 
that  between  May  1950  and  May  1951  there  was  an 
increase  of  approximately  25  full  fashioned  mills  in 
the  State,  but  the  number  of  seamless  mills  remained 
about  the  same.  While  the  new  hosiery  directory 
for  1952  is  not  off  the  press,  it  is  estimated  that 
around  16  new  hosiery  mills  either  located  or  an- 
nounced plans  for  location  in  the  State  during  the 
year.  This  means  an  investment  of  well  over  $1.5 
million  and  new  jobs  for  approximately  1,000  work- 
ers. 

In  Alamance  County  alone,  almost  a  dozen  hosiery 
mills  have  begun  operation  in  the  last  five  years.  In 
this  same  period,  at  least  six  mills  have  gone  into 
operation  in  Randolph  County,  10  in  Guilford  Coun- 
ty, at  least  3  in  Forsyth  and  Gaston  and  9  in  Meck- 
lenburg. 

NOTE — Data  on  hosiery  mills,  machines  and  production  in  N.  C,  South 
and  Nation  in  1951,  latest  available,  supplied  by  Taylor  R.  Durham,  presi- 
dent and  treasurer.  Southern   Hosiery  Manufacturers  Association,   Charlotte. 


of  Commerce  and  Industry 
"vation  &  Development 

Berkshire  Mills,  the  nation's  largest  manufacture 
of  full  fashioned  hosiery  for  women,  has  complet< 
its  $3  million  hosiery  plant  near  Andrews,  contai 
ing  62,000  sq.  ft.,  and  will  employ  some  325  person 

An  $80,000  hosiery  mill  is  under  construction  ; 
Bethel,  in  Pitt  County.  This  plant  will  contain  al 
proximately  10,000  sq.  ft.  and  will  employ  arour 
60  persons  with  a  weekly  payroll  of  about  $4,00 
The  total  investment  is  estimated  to  be  around  $47C 
000. 

Barringer  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Mill  and  Teagi 
Hosiery  Mills  have  gone  into  production  in  Catawfc 
County  within  the  last  two  years. 

The  Henfine  Hosiery  Mill  of  Butner  began  open 


ii 


tion  during  1950. 

Thompson  Hosiery  Mill  of  Kinston  went  int 
operation  last  year  with  approximately  270  doze 
pairs  of  60-gauge  hose  being  produced  daily. 

Siler  City  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  started  constructio 
on  their  $75,000  finishing  plant  in  1950  with  abou 
300  persons  as  anticipated  employment. 

Announcement  has  just  been  made  of  the  erectio 
of  a  new  hosiery  mill  in  Statesville  for  the  Skylan 
Textile  Company,  which  will  initially  employ  abou 
75  workers  and  with  plans  for  additional  worker 
later.  Also,  Skyland  Textile  Company  is  setting  u 
a  new  plant  in  West  Jefferson  and  one  in  Forest  Cit} 

R.  &  S.  Hosiery  Company,  which  will  make  nylo. 
hose,  has  recently  announced  plans  for  a  new  plan 
in  Hendersonville,  and  Harrill  Hosiery  Mills  wil 
locate  in  Rutherfordton.  Also  recently  announcet 
is  Anne  Hosiery  Company  of  Concord,  Crusade 
Hosiery  Mills  of  Mt.  Airy,  Line-Made  Hosiery  Mill 
of  Taylorsville,  Fairview  Hosiery  Mills  of  Hickory 
and  Wright  Knit  Hosiery  Mills  of  Spruce  Pine. 

Hoover  Hosiery  Company  of  Concord,  pioneer  hos 
iery  manufacturers  in  the  South,  built  a  modern  ai: 
conditioned  building  in  1948  and  is  now  constructing 
a  new  addition  which  will  provide  20,000  sq.  ft.  o 
additional  floor  space.  The  total  cost  is  expected  t( 
be  about  $300,000.  This  new  addition  will  increasi 
the  number  of  employees  by  more  than  twice  the  tota 
now  employed. 

Phil  Cord  Corporation  of  Monroe,  manufacturers 
of  60-gauge  hosiery  for  women,  founded  in  1948,  has 
just  completed  a  half-million  dollar  expansion  pro- 
gram. 

Standard  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  of  Burlington  haf 
added  a  building  8,000  sq.  ft.  at  a  cost  of  over  $50, 
000. 

Liberty  Hosiery  Mills,  Gibsonville   (Gem  Plant) 
has  added  10,000  sq.  ft.  to  its  plant,  costing  around! 
$25,000. 

Port  City  Hosiery  Company,  Inc.,  Wilmington,  a 
subsidiary  of  Mojud,  is  adding  a  building  for  warp- 
ing. 

Barber  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  of  Mt.  Airy  is  con-i 
structing  a  new  building  next  to  its  present  plant 


winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  9 


it  a  cost  of  around  $75,000,  which  will  increase  em- 
loyees  by  50. 
With  the  above  mentioned  new  plants  and  expan- 


sions, North  Carolina  is  keeping  herself  in  position 
to  maintain  her  record  as  the  leading  hosiery  manu- 
facturer in  the  South. 


Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers' Association  Aids  Industry 

By  Taylor  R.  Durham,  Charlotte,  President  and  Secretary 
Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers'  Association 


The  Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers'  Associa- 
ion,  like  the  Southern  Railroad,  also  serves  the 
louth.  Its  activities  embrace  all  of  the  Southeastern 
tates  from  Virginia  to  Texas,  as  well  as  Arkansas, 
rennessee  and  Kentucky.  It  serves  both  branches  of 
he  industry  and  now  represents  approximately  90 
>er  cent  of  the  productive  capacity  of  full  fashioned 
nills  and  approximately  80  per  cent  of  the  seamless 
nills. 

The  origin  of  the  Association  dates  back  to  the 
;arly  1930s  when  various  hosiery  manufacturers 
liscussed  among  themselves  the  desirability  of  form- 
ng  an  Association  in  the  South,  although  there  was 
hen  in  existence  as  now  an  association  serving  the 
;ntire  country.  These  men  felt  that  there  were  many 
)roblems  arising  in  the  South  which  were  somewhat 
listinct  because  of  its  geographical  location,  climatic 
:onditions  and  the  predominance  of  Anglo-Saxon 
)opulation.  After  holding  some  meetings  for  full 
liscussion,  the  Association  was  finally  organized  on 
ranuary  1,  1934.  Its  functions  may  be  well  describ- 
ed by  quoting  from  its  charter,  the  first  paragraph 
>f  which  reads : 

The  purpose  for  which  this  corporation  is  form- 
ed is  to  mutually  benefit,  protect,  foster  and  pro- 
mote the  economic  welfare  and  interests  of  its 
members  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  hosiery. 

The  first  president  of  the  Association  was  R.  O. 
luffman,  Morganton,  and  since  his  tenure  of  office, 
ive  other  hosiery  manufacturers  from  North  Caro- 
ina  have  served  either  as  president  or  chairman  of 
;he  Board  of  Directors.  They  are  P.  W.  Eshelman, 
l^orth  Wilkesboro;  J.  H.  McEwen,  Burlington  (de- 
ceased) ;  R.  T.  Amos,  High  Point;  Carl  V.  Cline, 
rlildebran;  and  the  current  chairman,  W.  W.  Couch, 
Ir.,  executive  vice  president,  Durham  Hosiery  Mills. 

Two  of  the  other  principal  offices  are  currently 
illed  by  North  Carolina  manufacturers.  They  are 
I!lyde  W.  Gordon,  vice  president  of  the  Association, 
vho  is  also  executive  vice  president  of  the  Standard 
hosiery  Mills,  Burlington;  and  Fritz  Seifert,  presi- 
lent  of  Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Charlotte,  is  the  treas- 
urer. The  Board  of  Directors  is  representative  of 
;he  entire  industry  in  the  South  and  is  selected  on 
i  basis  of  geographical  location,  size  of  mills  and 
;ype  of  goods  manufactured.  Because  of  the  fact 
;hat  more  than  half  of  the  hosiery  produced  in  the 
South  is  manufactured  by  mills  located  in  the  State 
)f  North  Carolina,  the  majority  of  the  personnel  of 
;he  various  boards  throughout  the  years  has  been 
nade  up  of  North  Carolina  manufacturers,    For  the 


OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS,  SOUTHERN 

HOSIERY  MANUFACTURERS'  ASSOCIATION 

Officers,  -directors  and  advisory  committee  of  the  Southern 
Hosiery  Manufacturers'  Association,  with  headquarters  at  1213 
Liberty  Life  Building,  Charlotte,  are  as  follows: 

Officers  are:  W.  W.  Couch,  Jr.,  Durham,  chairman  of  the 
Board;  Taylor  R.  Durham,  Charlotte,  president  and  secretary; 
Clyde  W.  Gordon,  Burlington,  vice-president  and  chairman, 
Full  Fashioned  Division;  R.  P.  Shapard,  Jr.,  Griffin,  Ga.,  vice- 
president  and  chairman,  Seamless  Division;  Fritz  Seifert, 
Charlotte,  treasurer. 

Directors:  N.  W.  Ashe,  Knoxville,  Tenn.;  N.  M.  Ayers,  High 
Point;  J.  E.  Baker,  Burlington;  G.  C.  Furr,  Greensboro;  R.  E. 
Kell,  Bristol,  Va.;  E.  L.  McLelland,  New  Orleans,  La.;  H.  L. 
Merritt,  Mount  Airy;  William  Nebel,  Charlotte;  R.  R.  Rice, 
Pulaski,  Va.;  A.  L.  Shuford,  Jr.,  Conover;  M.  L.  Thompson, 
Kinston. 

Advisory  Committee  (former  presidents  and  Board  chair- 
men): R.  T.  Amos,  High  Point;  H.  T.  Bryan,  Chattanooga, 
Tenn.;  C.  V.  Cline,  Hildebran;  P.  W.  Eshelman,  North  Wilkes- 
boro; R.  O.  Huffman,  Morganton;  C.  S.  Kincaid,  Clinton,  Tenn.; 
J.  L.  Turbidy,  Rome,  Ga. 

Data  for  accompanying  article  furnished  by  Taylor  R.  Dur- 
ham, Charlotte,  president  and  secretary,  Southern  Hosiery 
Manufacturers'  Association. 

same  reason  the  office  of  the  Association  is  located 
in  that  state. 

The  organization  committee  selected  Taylor  R. 
Durham,  an  attorney  and  former  banker  of  Chatta- 
nooga, Tenn.,  to  administer  the  affairs  of  the  Asso- 
ciation when  it  was  organized.  He  was  given  the 
title  of  executive  secretary  and  some  years  later  was 
promoted  to  the  office  of  president  which  he  still 
occupies. 

The  functions  of  the  Association  are  many  and 
varied.  It  serves  as  a  clearing  house  of  information 
with  respect  to  all  kinds  of  problems  which  arise  in 
the  manufacture  of  hosiery.  It  keeps  its  members 
informed  in  regard  to  all  Federal  laws  and  regula- 
tions which  affect  their  business,  and  assists  when- 
ever possible  in  the  promulgation  of  and  amendments 
to  such  regulations.  During  critical  periods  it  re- 
quires frequent  trips  to  Washington  in  the  interest 
of  the  membership.  The  Association  makes  surveys 
of  various  types  for  the  purpose  of  collecting  infor- 
mation which  is  disseminated  to  its  members.  It 
advises  on  sound  employee  relations  and  has  always 
advocated  the  highest  wages  and  the  best  working 
conditions  that  can  be  supported  by  market  condi- 
tions. 

The  Association  sponsors  a  statewide  safety  con- 
test which  is  conducted  by  the  North  Carolina  In- 
dustrial Commission  which  has  had  much  to  do  in 
the  improvement  of  safety  conditions  in  this  State. 
It  is  affiliated  with  the  North  Carolina  Industrial 
Council  which  serves  in  many  respects  as  a  state 
manufacturers'  association. 


PAGE  10 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


Pioneers  and  Leaders  in  North  Carolina  Hosiery  Industry 


PHOTO    BY   ROBERT   SHOAF 


'inter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1 


PHOTOS    COURTESY    HOWARD    WHITE,     BURLINGTON    TIMES-NEWS 


First  Page,  top  row,  left  to  right — John   H.  Adams  and  James  H.   Millis,  founders,    and    J.    Ed    Millis,    long-time    president,    now    chairman    of   the    board,    of 
dams-Millis  Corp.,   High   Point;   Charles  A.  Cannon,   president  of  Wiscassatt   Mills,  Albemarle,  Cannon  hosiery  producer. 


F.   Garrou,  Sr.,  founders  of  Waldensian,  Pilot  and  Valdese  mills  at  Valdese,  and  Albert 


Second   row,   I.   to   r. — Francis   Garrou,   Sr.,   Antoine   Grill   and   John 
.  Garrou,  Sr.,  present  head  of  these  organizations. 

Third  row,  I.  to  r. — J.  B.  McCrary,  founder  and  for  many  years  president  of  Acme  and  McCrary  mills,  Asheboro;  his  sons,  Charles  W.  McCrary  and  J.  Frank 
cCrary,  principal  officers  of  this  mill  group;   Hugh   M.   Grey,  founder  and  president,  Hugh  Grey  Hosiery  Co.,  Concord. 

Bottom  row,  I.  to  r. — John  Wesley  Hanes,  founder,  Shamrock  Hosiery  Mill,  now  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills,  Winston-Salem,  and  his  son,  James  G.  Hanes,  long- 
me  president,  now  chairman  of  the  board;  John  Shoffner,  founder  of  what  is  now  Standard  Hosiery  Mills,  Burlington,  and  Clyde  W.  Gordon,  executive  vice- 
esident  and  general   manager  of  Standard. 

Second  page,  top  row,  I.  to  r. — General  Julian  S.  Carr,  founder,  his  son,  Julian  S.  Carr,  Jr.,  long-time  president,  and  William  F.  Carr,  his  nephew,  long  and 
ill  vice-president  and   secretary,   Durham    Hosiery   Mills,    Durham;   John    K.   Voehringer,  Jr.,  founder  and  president,   Mock,  Judson,  Voehringer  Co.,   Greensboro. 

Second  row,  I.  to  r. — Charles  L.  Amos,  president,  Melrose  Hosiery  Mills,  High  Point;  J.  Chadbourn  Bolles,  founder  and  president,  Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills, 
harlotte;  Herbert  Kaiser,  founder  of  Kaiser  Hosiery  Co.,  later  part  of  May- McEwen- Kaiser,  now  part  of  Burlington  Mills,  which  he  represents  in  New  York; 
enry  A.   Lineberger,   principal  officer,  three   Knit   Products  Corp.  firms   and   Outlook  Mfg.  Co.,  Belmont. 

Third  row,  I.  to  r. — Samuel  Huffman,  founder,  Drexel  Knitting  Mills,  Drexel,  and  his  son,  Robert  0.  Huffman,  founder  of  Morganton  and  Huffman  mills, 
organton,  and  president  of  all  three;  Ban  V.  May,  deceased,  and  Will  H.  May,  retired,  founders  of  May  Hosiery  Mill,  later  part  of  May-McEwen-Kaiser,  now 
lerated  by  Burlington   Mills. 

..Efforts  were  made,  unsuccessfully,  to  get  other  pictures  for  this  panel,  including  A.  L.  Hoover,  Sr.  and  Jr.,  Hoover  of  Concord;  J.  E.  Baker,  Baker-Cammack, 
urlington-Mebane;  Eubert  and  George  L.  Lyerly,  Sr.,  Elliott  and  Lyerly  group,  Hickory;  Ernest  E.  Whisnant,  Whisnant  Hosiery  Mills,  Hickory:  Robert  R. 
agan.  High  Point,  and  N.  C.  English,  Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  Thomasville;  Fritz  Seifarl,  Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Charlotte,  and  others  belonging  properly  in  this 
•oup. 


PAGE  12 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195 


Effective  Knitting,  Hosiery  Instruction  at  State  College 

By  W.  E.  Shinn,  Head  of  Knitting  Department,  School  of  Textiles,  N.  C.  State  College 


Instruction  in  knitting-,  as  a  part  of  the  work  of- 
fered at  the  North  Carolina  State  College  School  of 
Textiles,  Raleigh,  was  started  more  than  25  years 
ago.  From  a  modest  beginning  in  a  small  room  locat- 
ed in  the  second  floor  of  Tompkins  Hall,  to  a  larger 
laboratory  in  the  old  part  of  the  present  building 
and  to  its  present  location  in  the  new  extension  of 
the  School  of  Textiles,  the  Knitting  Department  has 
grown  rapidly  until  its  modern  machinery  layout, 
and  variety  of  course  work  offered,  has  made  it  one 
of  the  leading  departments  in  the  school. 

The  Knitting  Department  was  started  with  one 
hosiery  ribber,  two  circular  hosiery  machines,  and  a 
looper.  The  equipment  today  consists  of  over  100 
units  worth  many  thousands  of  dollars,  and  it  is  be- 
lieved to  be  the  most  varied  assemblage  of  knitting 
equipment  to  be  found  anywhere.  Much  of  the 
equipment  has  been  donated  or  loaned  by  the  ma- 
chinery manufacturers.  A  portion  of  it  has  been 
purchased  with  state  funds. 

Expansion  of  the  knitting  department  was  one  of 
the  projects  undertaken  under  the  leadership  of 
Dean  Malcolm  E.  Campbell  in  1943.  With  the  en- 
couragement of  a  group  of  leaders  from  the  North 
Carolina  Textile  Foundation,  and  others  represent- 
ing the  knitting  industry  of  the  State,  the  late  Gov- 
ernor J.  Melville  Broughton  made  available  the  sum 
of  $25,000  for  the  purchase  of  equipment  needed  to 
modernize  the  laboratories.  This  and  subsequent 
funds  made  available  for  permanent  improvement 
have  enabled  the  department  to  install  the  equipment 
now  in  its  several  laboratories. 

The  laboratories  of  the  Knitting  Department  are 
organized  and  grouped  for  instruction  in  varied 
phases  of  knitting  technology  as  follows : 

Seamless  Hosiery  Section — The  equipment  for  in- 
struction in  seamless  hosiery  design  and  production 
includes  representative  types  of  machines  arranged 


Student  operates  full  fashioned   hosiery  machine,  Knittinc 
Department,  School  of  Textiles,  N.  C.  State  College. 

in  two  groups.  The  more  elementary  types,  incluc 
ing  ribbers  and  plain  hosiery  machines  with  the  el< 
mentary  attachments  such  as  stripers,  reverse  pla' 
ing  attachments,  rubber  top  attachments,  are  a] 
ranged  together  for  beginning  students.  The  moi 
advanced  types  are  grouped  together  for  use  by  th 
more  advanced  student.  This  line  includes  mor 
advanced  hosiery  rib  type  machines,  Komets,  Bar 
ner  Wrap  Reverse,  Float  Stitch,  HH-PW  and  othe 
machines  for  the  manufacture  of  patterned  hosier; 
Nylon  Hosiery  Section — This  section  is  equippe 
with  three  full-fashioned  hosiery  machines  of  moc 
ern  types  in  45-gauge,  51-gauge,  and  54-gauge,  r( 
spectively.  There  is  provided  also  a  400-needle  w( 
men's  nylon  hosiery  machine  of  the  circular  typi 
This  equipment  forms  the  base  for  instruction  in  th 
general  course  in  hosiery  manufacture,  and  for  mor 
advanced  training  in  full  fashioned  hosiery  produc 
tion.  Equipment  for  the  looping  and  seaming  c 
fine  hosiery  for  preboarding,  and  dyeing  and  finisr: 
ing  is  provided  in  laboratories  adjacent  to  the  knil 
ting  room. 


Student  working  tcith  warp  knitter,  Hosiery  Department, 
School  of  Textiles,  N.  C.  State  College. 


Advanced  men's  hosiery  machines  at  Stale  College's 
Hosiery  Department. 


[/INTER-SPRING,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  3 


W.  E.  Shinn,  head  of  State  College's  Hosiery  Department, 
instructs  advanced  students. 

Circular  Knitwear  Section — A  wide  assortment  of 
irge  diameter  fabric  knitting  machines  is  provided 
or  demonstration  and  instruction  in  the  production 
f  cloth  for  both  underwear  and  outerwear.  In  se- 
ating the  equipment,  an  effort  has  been  made  to 
ring  together  representative  types  of  machines  em- 
odying  as  many  of  the  commercially  important 
ystems  of  knitted  fabric  production  as  possible.  The 
ollection  includes  plain  rib  knitting  machines,  one 
nit  for  making  Swiss  rib  fabric,  circular  interlock, 
pring  needle  loop  wheel  machines  in  fine  and  coarse 
auge,  spring  needle  sinker  top  machines,  plain  jer- 
ey  machines  with  multiple  feeds,  an  open  top  pat- 
srn  wheel  machine,  and  a  jersey  machine  with  pat- 
srn  wheels  and  automatic  striping  for  polo  shirt 
abric.  This  unit  contains  also  a  28-inch  jacquard 
weater  machine  with  the  equipment  for  card  cut- 
ing  and  automatic  duplicating  equipment  for  the 
reparation  of  pattern  cards.  Emphasis  has  been 
laced  on  flexibility  and  design  possibilities  and 
reative  effort  on  the  part  of  the  student  is  encour- 
ged. 

Garment  Cutting  and  Seaming — Adjacent 
:>  the  knitting  laboratories  is  a  laboratory  in 
'hich  more  than  20  industrial  sewing  ma- 
hines  have  been  installed  for  performing 
arious  operations  in  the  manufacture  of 
nitted  outerwear  and  underwear.  This 
quipment  includes  various  types  of  power 
utters,  a  cutting  table,  equipment  for  pat- 
2rn  making,  seamers,  hemmers,  collarette 
lachines,  split  tube  border  attaching  ma- 
hines,  cuff  attachers,  a  button  hole  facing 
nd  a  button  facing  machine,  a  flatlock  ma- 
rine, several  lockstitch  machines,  two  auto- 
matic button  hole  machines,  and  a  press  for 
pplying  grippers.  This  work  is  supplement- 
d  by  equipment  for  finishing  knitted  tub- 
lg  located  in  the  hosiery  and  knitgoods  fin- 
shing  section. 


Modern   knitting   machine   in   Hosiery  Department, 
N.  C.  State  College. 

Warp  Knitting,  Flat  Knitting — In  recognition  of 
the  growth  in  the  number  of  textile  plants  manufac- 
turing tricot  and  other  warp  knitted  fabrics,  the 
department  installed  two  tricot  machines,  a  raschel 
knitter,  and  several  other  latch  needle  warp  knitters. 
These  machines  form  a  foundation  for  instruction  in 
the  design,  analysis,  and  production  of  a  wide  range 
of  warp  knitted  fabrics.  A  collection  of  warp  knit- 
ted fabric  is  being  added  to  regularly.  Winding  and 
warping  equipment  for  processing  warps  from  a 
variety  of  yarns  and  fibers  is  in  place.  The  flat  knit- 
ting section  contains  also  a  number  of  both  hand  and 
power- operated  types  of  V-bed  and  links-and-links 
machines  for  producing  sweater  fabric,  scarfs,  hosi- 
ery and  border  materials. 

Courses  of  Study — A  total  of  41  term  credit  hours 
of  instruction  are  offered  in  the  Department  of  Knit- 
ting. This  includes  two  courses:  Knitting  1  and 
Hosiery  Manufacture,  which  are  required  of  all  stu- 
dents in  textile  manufacturing,  nine  credits  in  re- 
search for  graduate  students,  and  27  term  credit 
hours  in  specialized  knitting  courses  which  make  up 
the  knitting  major.  These  courses  may  be  taken 
by  a  student  in  his  senior  year  if  he  desires  to  com- 

( Continued  on  Page  53) 


Group  of  hosiery  students  at  State  College  visiting  one  of  leading 
hosiery  mills  in  the  State. 


PAGE  14 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  I9i 


High  Point  High,  Guilford  Leader,  in  Hosiery  Productioi 


High  Point,  long  recognized  as  the  center  and  a 
leader  in  the  furniture  industry,  has  now  moved  up 
with  Burlington  and  is  at  least  one  of  the  two  largest 
producers  of  hosiery  in  the  State,  based  on  employ- 
ment in  the  hosiery  industry. 

Figures  supplied  by  Frank  Sizemore  of  the  High 
Point  Chamber  of  Commerce  indicate  that  approxi- 
mately 16,800  workers  are  employed  in  manufacture 
in  High  Point.  Of  these,  approximately  7,000  are 
engaged  in  manufacturing  hosiery,  considerably 
more  than  the  4,500  employed  in  furniture  manufac- 
turing. Other  textiles  employ  approximately  2,000 
workers  while  around  2,500  are  engaged  in  other 
manufacturing  enterprises,  largely  those  which  con- 
tribute to  and  are  affiliated  with  the  hosiery,  furni- 
ture and  other  textile  manufacture.  Employment 
Security  Commission  figures  are  in  substantial 
agreement.  High  Point  has  within  her  boundaries 
29  hosiery  firms  which  operate  8,352  seamless  or 
circular  knit  machines  and  240  full  fashioned  knit- 
ting machines  with  a  daily  production  capacity  of 
50,000  dozen  pairs  of  hose. 

The  first  hosiery  plant  established  in  High  Point 
was  the  High  Point  Hosiery  Mill  started  in  1905  by 
John  Hampton  Adams  and  James  Henry  Millis  as  a 
side  industry  to  their  already  operating  overall  plant. 
They  brought  in  C.  C.  Robbins  who  had  been  engag- 
ed in  hosiery  production  at  Randleman  to  superin- 
tend construction  and  operation  of  the  mill. 

A  group  of  about  a  dozen  men,  largely  from  High 


Point,  composed  the  original  stockholders  who  su 
scribed  $23,000  to  start  this  mill.    These  included, 
addition  to  the  principal  founders,  E.  M.  Armfiel 
H.  A.  Millis,  J.  E.  Millis,  Dr.  W.  J.  McAnally,  W. 
Newby,  G.  L.  Robbins,  G.  A.  Matton,  A.  G.  Kirkmf 
of  Greensboro,  W.  E.  Frazier  and  R.  H.  Wheeler. 

At  the  start  this  plant  produced  only  one  gra< 
of  hosiery,  all  dyed  black,  in  five  sizes  from  five 
nine.  In  the  years  that  followed  these  original  owj 
ers  and  others  organized  several  other  hosiery  plan 
and  operations  all  of  which  finally  became  Hig 
Point's  principal  industry — Adams-Millis  Co. 
was  this  firm  and  the  Diamond  Full  Fashioned  Mi 
which  inaugurated  the  first  full  fashioned  knittir 
in  1929. 

Greensboro,  Employment  Security  Commissic 
records  show,  has  eight  hosiery  mills,  some  of  thei 
very  large  plants,  all  employing  about  1500  worker 
and  also  has  three  plants  producing  knit  produd 
other  than  hosiery,  all  three  employing  less  than  1C 
workers. 

Guilford,  with  these  two  principal  hosiery  center 
has  become  the  largest  manufacturer  of  hosiery  c 
any  county  in  the  State.  Employment  Securit 
Commission  records  show  that  Guilford  County  h 
26  plants  engaged  in  manufacturing  seamless  hot 
iery,  employing  about  4,440  workers,  and  has  10  fu 
fashioned  plants,  employing  about  3,825  workers, 
addition  to  the  three  plants  producing  other  knitte 
products  and  employing  less  than  100  workers. 


Adams-Millis,  One  of  Nation's  Largest  Hosiery  Producer? 


Adams-Millis  Corp.,  High  Point's 
leading  industry  and  one  of  the  largest 
hosiery  producing  firms  in  the  nation, 
had  its  beginning  in  1904  as  an  adjunct 
to  an  overall  manufacturing  plant  ope- 
rated by  John  Hampton  Adams  and 
James  Henry  Millis.  Products  of  the 
firm  include  the  nationally  advertised 
"Dolly  Madison"  and  "Mile  Master" 
brands. 

The  two  founders,  associates  in  the 
overall  plant,  decided  to  start  a  small 
hosiery  mill  nearby  and  erected  a  two- 
story  brick  building  on  English  Street. 
The  firm  started  as  the  High  Point  Hos- 
iery Mills,  Inc.,  and  installed  40  knit- 
ting machines  at  a  cost  of  $5,000.  Only 
one  grade  of  hosiery,  all  black,  was  pro- 
duced, the  average  output  for  the  first 
year  amounting  to  200  dozen  pairs  daily. 
During  that  first  year  the  average  em- 
ployment was  around  125.  J.  H.  Millis 
became  president,  J.  H.  Adams,  secre- 
tary-treasurer and  general  manager, 
and  Charles  C.  Robbins,  who  had  expe- 


Air  view  of  Adams-Millis  Corp.  plants  on  English  Street,  High  Point. 


VlNTER-SPRlNG,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Page  i  5 


Tryon  plant  of  Adams-Millis  Corp.,  High  Point. 


ience  in  operating  a  small  hosiery  mill  at  Randle- 
aan,  was  brought  in  as  superintendent  of  the  new 
)lant.  Fourteen  citizens  became  interested  financial- 
y  in  the  venture  and  six  of  them  were  elected  di- 
ectors. 

The  mill  prospered  and  a  few  years  later  Mr. 
k.dams,  Mr.  Millis  and  associates  organized  the  Pied- 
nant  Hosiery  Mill,  erecting  a  large  new  building 
,nd  installing  modern  machines.  Mr.  Adams  was 
lected  president  of  the  new  company.  Still  later 
>ther  mills  were  organized:  Kernersville  Knitting 
]o.,  Kernersville;  Pointer  Hosiery  Co.,  High  Point; 
tnd  a  small  branch  plant  was  established  in  the 
4"egro  section  of  High  Point.  Still  later,  the  High- 
and  Cotton  Mill  was  organized  and  then  the  Clover- 
lale  Dye  Works,  the  latter,  with  H.  F.  Hunsucker  as 
ecretary,  to  supply  knitting  yarns  for  the  hosiery 
ndustry. 

J.  Henry  Millis,  president  of  the  parent  company, 
lied  in  mid-1913  and  J.  Hampton  Adams  became 
)resident  and  active  head  of  all  of  the  associated 
ndustries.  In  1928  Mr.  Adams  and  his  associates 
irranged  for  a  merger  of  all  of  the  hosiery  interests 
mder  one  charter,  resulting  in  Adams-Millis  Corp. 
VTr.  Adams  became  president  and  J.  Ed  Millis,  son 
)f  the  co-founder  and  one  of  the  original  stockhold- 
;rs,  became  secretary  and  treasurer. 

About  that  time  the  organization  decided  to  enter 
;he  full  fashioned  field  and  erected  a  large  five-story 
steel  and  concrete  building  at  English  and  Pine 
Street  in  High  Point  for  the  full  fashioned  opera- 
ions.    Later  another  full  fashioned  plant  was  built 


at  Tryon,  N.  C.  The  most 
modern  equipment  for  a 
hosiery  mill  to  be  found  in 
the  entire  country  was  in- 
stalled in  this  new  plant. 
Skilled  operators  were 
brought  in  to  train  the 
workers  in  full  fashioned 
operations.  The  new  plant 
developed  and  produced 
quality  products  largely 
from  silk  until  Pearl  Har- 
bor and  sold  them  through- 
out the  entire  country.  The 
mill  then  shifted  to  rayon 
and  refined  cotton  yarns, 
continuing  in  their  use  un- 
til the  advent  of  nylon.  As 
this  new  man-made  fiber 
became  available,  Adams- 
Millis  shifted  to  nylon 
which  has  since  been  the 
principal  fiber  used  in  the 
production  of  high  quality 
full  fashioned  hosiery. 

J.  H.  Adams  died  in  1935 
and  James  Edward  Millis 
(J.  Ed)  was  promoted  from  secretary-treasurer  to 
president  of  the  corporation.  H.  D.  Jobe,  who  had 
been  in  charge  of  the  sales  department  for  many 
years,  was  transferred  from  the  New  York  office  and 
was  named  vice-president  and  general  sales  man- 
ager. T.  C.  Langley  became  secretary  and  treasurer 
and  R.  M.  Bundy  was  named  second  vice-president 
and  assistant  sales  manager.  Directors  at  that  time 
were  Mrs.  J.  H.  Adams,  widow  of  one  of  the  found- 
ers ;  J.  Ed  Millis,  son  of  another  founder ;  R.  0.  Lind- 
say; W.  D.  Carmichael,  Jr.;  and  F.  A.  Yard. 

During  World  War  II,  Adams-Millis  manufactur- 
ed 37,000,000  pairs  of  socks  for  the  Armed  Forces, 
the  largest  number  produced  by  any  firm  in  the 
nation.  Also  during  that  war  more  than  300  Adams- 
Millis  employees  entered  the  Armed  Forces  or  were 
transferred  into  vital  defense  work. 

Through  the  years  splendid  employer-employee  re- 
lations have  existed  at  Adams-Millis.  At  the  present 
time  the  firm  has  18  employees  who  have  been  em- 


Seamless  knitting  machine 

of  Adams-Millis  Corp., 

High  Point. 


A  full  fashioned  hoarder  of  Adams-Millis  Corp.,  High  Point. 


Boxing  men's  hose  at  Adams-Millis  Corp. 


PAGE   16 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


ployed  for  40  years  or  more,  185  have  seen  25  years 
of  service,  192  have  service  for  20  years  and  429 
have  been  on  the  payroll  for  10  years  or  more.  The 
company  operates  an  employee  benefit  Profit  Sharing 
Plan  in  which  cash  and  securities  amounted  to  $1,- 
644,824.86  on  December  31,  1952.  Life  insurance 
policies  for  the  benefit  of  participating  employees 
amount  to  $4,041,865.00.  Of  2,435  employees  of  the 
company,  almost  half,  or  1,205,  are  eligible  for  par- 
ticipation in  the  plan  by  reason  of  age  and  length  of 
service.  Only  41  participating  employees  left  the 
service  voluntarily  in  1952. 

The  combined  plants  produce  more  than  4,000,000 
dozen  pairs  of  seamless  hose,  men's  and  children's, 
and  750,000  dozen  pairs  of  ladies'  full  fashioned 
hosiery.  These  are  distributed  through  the  com- 
pany's sales  offices  located  at  400  English  Street, 
High  Point;  2816  Empire  State  Building,  New  York; 
the  Chicago  office  at  222  W.  Adams  Street;  and  the 
Pacific  Coast  representative,  Sidney  Muller,  at  552 
Mission  Street,  San  Francisco. 

The  products  include  women's  full  fashioned  hos- 
iery, men's  half  hose  and  slack  socks,  women's  and 
misses'  anklets  and  boys'  crew  socks. 

Adams-Millis  plants  embrace  a  combined  floor 
space  of  approximately  372,000  square  feet.  Of  the 
four  High  Point  plants,  three  produce  seamless  hose 
and  one  manufactures  full  fashioned  hosiery.  These 
plants  employ  approximately  1,600  workers.  The 
Kernersville  plant,  with  about  550  employees,  pro- 
duces seamless  hose.  The  Tryon  plant,  with  about 
250  workers,  manufactures  ladies'  full  fashioned 
hosiery,  and  also  processes  nylon  yarn. 

The  high  regard  in  which  Adams-Millis  is  held 
nationwide  is  indicated  in  part  by  the  fact  that  the 
company  has  2,061  shareholders  in  47  of  the  48 
states,  as  well  as  territories,  and  in  the  District  of 
Columbia  and  Canada.  These  shareholders  own 
156,000  shares,  or  an  average  of  75  shares  for  each 
shareholder.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  only  13 
shareholders  own  1,000  shares  or  more  and  that 
1,519  own  less  than  100  shares.  The  Corporation's 
net  worth  is  approximately  $8,500,000. 

J.  H.  Adams,  one  of  the  founders,  was  a  native  of 
South  Carolina  and  attended  Oak  Ridge  Military  In- 
stitute. His  first  job  was  as  a  worker  for  the  Eagle 
Furniture  Co.  at  $40.00  a  month.  Soon  his  business 
ability  became  apparent  and  he  joined  J.  H.  Millis 
in  the  operation  of  an  overall  plant,  the  first  in  High 
Point.  His  activities  in  the  organization  of  firms 
which  led  to  the  consolidation  resulting  in  Adams- 
Millis  Corp.  are  noted  above.  His  former  home  on 
North  Main  Street  is  now  the  High  Point  YWCA 
Building,  given  by  Mrs.  Adams  and  her  two  daugh- 


ters. He  was  an  important  figure  in  other  busines 
and  civic  organizations,  including  that  of  director  o 
the  Wachovia  Bank  &  Trust  Co.  His  death  came  i: 
1935  at  age  59. 

J.  H.  Millis,  the  other  co-founder  of  Adams-Millis 
was  a  native  of  the  present  Sedgefield  Section.  H 
began  his  work  as  a  clerk  in  a  Greensboro  store  an 
later  assisted  in  organizing  Ragan-Millis  &  Co.,  , 
mercantile  firm.  He  and  Mr.  Adams  were  partner 
in  the  overall  plant  and  then  formed  some  of  ttol 
firms  which  later  became  parts  of  Adams-Millis.  Hij 
death  at  age  64  came  in  1913  when  the  firms  he  hat 
helped  organize  were  in  their  infancy. 

James  Edward  Millis,  who  was  one  of  the  origina 
stockholders  of  the  High  Point  Hosiery  Mill  and  whi 
had  been  associated  with  the  firm  from  its  beginning 
attending  Bingham  Military  Institute  at  AshevilL 
and  the  State  University.  When  the  various  Adams 
Millis  plants  were  consolidated  in  1928,  he  was  elect 
ed  secretary-treasurer  at  the  merger.  After  th< 
death  of  Mr.  Adams  in  1935,  J.  E.  Millis  was  electee 
president  of  Adams-Millis  Corp.  and  Highland  Cot 
ton  Mills.  He  served  as  president  of  Adams-Millii 
Corp.  from  1935  until  he  became  chairman  of  th( 
board  last  year.  He  serves  as  president  of  the  Higl 
Point,  Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad,  as  a  direc 
tor  of  the  Wachovia  Bank  &  Trust  Co.,  and  is  ex] 
chairman  of  the  Guilford  County  Board  of  Commis- 
sioners. He  has  served  as  chairman  of  the  Board  oi 
the  National  Association  of  Hosiery  Manufacturers 
He  is  a  steward  in  Wesley  Memorial  Methodisl 
Church.  He  has  also  served  in  many  other  business 
civic  and  religious  capacities. 

James  H.  Millis,  grandson  of  one  of  the  founders 
and  son  of  J.  Ed  Millis,  was  elected  president  oi 
Adams-Millis  Corp.  last  year  when  his  father  became 
chairman  of  the  board.  He  attended  Davidson  Col 
lege  and  the  State  University  and  during  World  War 
II  was  a  fighter  pilot  with  the  Army  Air  Force.  He 
worked  at  many  different  jobs  in  the  organization 
and  became  vice-president  in  1951,  later  taking  the 
added  position  of  assistant  treasurer.  He  is  a  mem 
ber  of  the  American  Business  Club,  a  member  of  the 
Associate  Board  of  Stewards  of  Wesley  Memorial 
Methodist  Church,  president  of  the  Area  Boy  Scout 
Council,  a  director  of  the  YMCA  and  a  member  of 
the  local  Board  of  Managers  of  the  Wachovia  Bank 
&  Trust  Co. 

Present  officers  of  the  Adams-Millis  Corp.  are  J 
Ed  Millis,  chairman  of  the  board ;  J.  H.  Millis,  presi- 
dent; R.  M.  Bundy,  T.  L.  Smith  and  L.  B.  Heilig, 
vice-presidents;  T.  C.  Langley,  secretary  and  treas 
urer ;  and  H.  O.  Williams,  assistant  secretary. 


Melrose  Develops  Into  Important  High  Point  Hosiery  Firm 


Melrose  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  High  Point,  was  estab- 
lished in  1922  by  Charles  L.  Amos  and  his  older 
brother  as  a  part  of  the  partnership  of  these  brothers 
in  a  hosiery  mill  previously  established.  When  these 
brothers  dissolved  their  partnership  in  1924,  the  old- 


er brother  continued  the  older  firm  and  Charles  L. 
Amos  took  over  the  Melrose  Hosiery  Mills  part  of  the 
industry.  This  plant  has  developed  into  one  of  the 
larger  hosiery  producing  plants  in  High  Point. 
The  Melrose  plant  started  in  a  former  furniture 


VlNTER-SPRING,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   1  7 


Seaming   department  in   full   fashioned  plant   of  Melrose 
Hosiery  Mills,  High  Point. 

warehouse  with  50  second-hand  G-machines  which 
iroduced  about  300  dozen  pairs  of  men's  cotton  half 
lose  daily.  The  plant  produced  but  did  not  finish 
ts  products.  Around  25  workers  were  employed  and 
nnual  sales  did  not  exceed  $300,000. 

Melrose  continued  as  an  individually-owned  plant 
aitil  1936,  when  it  was  incorporated.  When  the 
)lant  was  taken  over  by  Charles  L.  Amos  in  1924,  its 
>roducts  were  sold  in  the  greige  to  other  dyeing  and 
inishing  plants.  Soon  afterward  a  dye-house  was 
milt  and  several  K-machines  were  added.  Gradually 
he  business  was  developed  from  its  profits.  In  1938 
he  company  built  a  full  fashioned  plant  and  install- 
;d  eighteen  45-gauge  machines  with  26  sections. 
jater  eight  51-gauge  machines  with  30  sections  were 
idded. 

In  1940  the  Glenn  Hosiery  Co.  was  organized  and 
ncorporated  and  began  the  manufacture  of  infants' 
lose.  Last  year  this  corporation  was  merged  with 
Melrose  Hosiery  Mills  into  one  corporation. 

Now  the  Melrose  Hosiery  Mills  has  expanded  into 
i  well-equipped  organization.  It  produces  men's 
lalf  hose,  ladies'  and  misses'  anklets,  children's  and 


infants'  hose  and  ladies'  full  fashioned  hosiery.  An- 
nual sales  amount  to  approximately  $6,000,000.  The 
annual  payroll  for  the  average  of  1,000  workers  is 
around  $2,000,000.  The  plants  have  approximately 
131,220  square  feet  of  floor  space. 

Melrose  operates  its  own  sales  office  in  the  Empire 
State  Building,  New  York  City,  with  another  sales 
office  in  Los  Angeles,  California.  Its  own  sales 
force  covers  the  entire  United  States,  selling  to  job- 
bers and  national  chain  stores.  Its  products  are  sold 
under  its  own  name  or  under  customers'  brands. 

Officers  of  Melrose  are  Charles  L.  Amos,  presi- 
dent; Charles  L.  Amos,  Jr.,  R.  K.  Amos,  W.  E.  Mitch- 
ell and  A.  Glenn  Smith,  vice-presidents,  and  J.  W. 
Hiatt,  secretary-treasurer.  These  officers  also  con- 
stitute the  Board  of  Directors. 

Charles  L.  Amos,  head  of  the  organization,  has  be- 
come one  of  the  important  industrial  leaders  of  High 
Point.  A  native  of  Rockingham  County,  he  came  to 
High  Point  in  1906  and  started  work  at  one  dollar  a 
day.  Later  he  joined  his  older  brother  in  operating 
a  retail  furniture  business.  They  started  a  hosiery 
firm  in  1914,  C.  L.  Amos  meanwhile  continuing  the 
furniture  business  until  1920.  For  the  next  two 
years  he  was  engaged  in  the  furniture  jobbing  busi- 
ness. In  1916  the  brothers  bought  out  the  stockhold- 
ers of  the  hosiery  mill,  reorganized  the  industry  as  a 
partnership  and  continued  its  operation  until  the 
brothers  divided  the  industry  in  1924.  C.  L.  Amos 
has  continued  the  operation  of  Melrose  very  success- 
fully. His  sons  have  joined  the  organization  as  they 
completed  their  education.  Mr.  Amos  served  for 
several  years  as  a  director  of  the  Southern  Hosiery 
Manufacturers'  Association  and  was  its  vice-presi- 
dent last  year. 


Mojud  One  of  Three  Largest  F.F.  Hosiery  Firms  in  World 


Mock,  Judson,  Voehringer  Co.,  whose  manufactur- 
ng  plant  is  located  in  Greensboro  with  extensive  op- 
srations  in  Wilmington,  began  development  of  the 
jreensboro  plant  in  1926.  With  this  and  the  other 
)lants  operated  in  this  and  other  states  this  com- 
)any  has  now  developed  into  one  of  the  three  largest 
nanufacturers  of  women's  full  fashioned  hosiery  in 


the  entire  world.  Its  principal  products,  "Mojud" 
hosiery  and  lingerie,  are  extensively  advertised  and 
sold  throughout  the  nation. 

John  K.  Voehringer,  Jr.,  president  and  chief  or- 
ganizer of  Mojud  Hosiery  Co.  and  its  affiliated  cor- 
porations, started  as  an  office  boy  in  1912  for  Henry 
Lehmuth  Co.  in  Philadelphia  and  by  1919  was  active 


Plant  of  Mock,  Judson,  Voehringer  Co.  of  North  Carolina  at  Greenshoro. 


PAGE  1  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195 


in  the  management  of  this  firm.  Mr.  Voehringer 
attended  Evening  School  at  Temple  University  and 
the  Wharton  School  of  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. He  and  Oscar  Nebel,  superintendent,  with- 
drew from  the  firm  in  1919  and  organized  their  own 
firm  as  Oscar  Nebel  Co.  and  with  86  machine  ope- 
rated successfully  until  1925  when  the  plant  was 
sold.  Mr.  Voehringer  then  became  associated  with 
the  men  later  to  become  his  associates  in  the  present 
organization.  They  were  Bernard  Mock  and  Na- 
thaniel Judson,  operating  Mock  and  Judson  Co.,  job- 
bers of  women's  hosiery.  This  group  bought  the 
Henry  Lehmuth  Co.  and  operated  it  successfully  for 
about  18  months.  In  1925  the  Mojud  Dyeworks  was 
established  at  Long  Island  City,  New  York,  with  Mr. 
Voehringer  as  one  of  the  principals. 

The  Mock,  Judson,  Voehringer  Co.  began  the  erec- 
tion of  its  first  Greensboro  plant  in  1926  with  these 
three  men  and  A.  E.  Margerison  as  principal  stock- 
holders. In  1928  the  principal  owners  decided  to 
consolidate  all  companies  and  to  invite  public  financ- 
ing by  issuing  $1,000,000  in  $100  shares  of  preferred 
stock  and  100,000  shares  of  common  stock  at  no  par 
value.  With  this  additional  capital  the  company  was 
able  to  expand  as  business  demanded  and  most  of  the 
expansion  was  in  Greensboro.  The  original  building 
was  100  x  100  feet  and  two  stories  high.  Additions 
were  built  in  1928,  1930  and  1936.  A  throwing  plant 
was  installed  in  1930  to  control  all  raw  materials 
going  into  all  manufacturing  units.  The  Greensboro 
plant  with  these  additions  provides  an  overall  build- 
ing 105  x  652  feet,  two  stories  high.  All  plants  are 
air-conditioned  throughout  and  two  complete  testing 
laboratories  are  operated — one  to  test  the  physical 
properties  of  yarn  and  hosiery,  the  others  a  chemical 
laboratory  to  test  and  investigate  sizes,  oils  and  other 
materials  used  in  the  manufacture. 

The  first  plant  operated  by  Mr.  Voehringer  in 
Philadelphia  in  1919  was  in  a  small  building  with 
only  14  employees  and  a  payroll  of  $30,000  the  first 
year.  The  organization  now  employs  about  1,000 
workers  in  Greensboro  alone  and  has  an  annual  pay- 
roll in  excess  of  $3,250,000.  Since  1927  the  organ- 
ization has  paid  approximately  $40,000,000  in  wages 
to  employees  in  and  around  Greensboro. 


'"--: :■■-- ■■;>;■■  ..  ■'■■■ .  '  '  ■    ^^^WWitotaft-*.'' '''"'**■'«  ■■'■       '    '  ''■  ■>■     i     *  ■  '  '""     .'S^*^"^ — Sw    i,  . 

■■'■:        jjJ&jjM&jy.  "    ■**■     ;        '"■    «       :::       £": :    ;i:.     3S;:::'  ^j?'"    ''         a 


Machinery  for  processing  yarn  in  Mock,  Judson,  Voehringer 
plant,  Greensboro. 


Port  City  Hosiery  Co.,  Wilmington,  affiliate  of  Mock,  Judson 
Voehringer  Co.,  Greensboro. 

The  Mojud  organization,  producing  fine  nylon  ho; 
iery  at  the  rate  of  about  19,200,000  pairs  a  year,  ha 
never  closed  the  Greensboro  plant  except  for  a  fe1 
days  due  to  a  yarn  shortage  and  NRA  directives.  Th 
plant  continued  through  the  depression  beginning  i 
1929  and  has  continued  operation  through  good  an 
bad  years.  The  organization  which  operated  i 
20,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  in  1927  now  ha 
more  than  175,000  square  feet  of  operating  space 

Mojud  now  has  five  additional  plants  located  a 
Decatur,  Ala. ;  Wilmington,  N.  C,  and  Long  Islan 
City,  N.  Y.  In  the  1928-32  period  the  firm  bought  th 
Alabama  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Decatur,  Ala.,  as  a  gc 
ing  concern ;  Northwood  Hosiery  Co.  and  Induranc 
Knitting  Co.,  both  in  Philadelphia;  and  in  1938  th 
Siler  City  Hosiery  Co.  plant  was  erected  to  manu 
facture  men's  full  fashioned  hosiery.  These  Phila 
delphia  and  Siler  City  plants  were  operated  for  sev 
eral  years  and  then  sold. 

The  Mojud  organization  organized  and  began  op 
erating  the  Port  City  Hosiery  Mills  at  Wilmington  ii 
February,  1948.  In  this  plant  was  located  the  lates 
underwear  division  producing  popular  styles  of  ny 
Ion  and  rayon  ladies'  under  garments  and  pajamas 
This  plant  is  a  modern  brick  building  completely  air 
conditioned.  At  the  peak  more  than  400  workers  ar 
employed.  A  registered  nurse  is  on  duty  during  al 
working  hours  and  a  fully  equipped  dispensary  i 
operated  for  casualty  and  emergency  use  of  the  em 
ployees. 

Then  in  November,  1950,  Mojud  Hosiery  Co.  be 
gan  the  operation  of  a  tricot  knitting  plant  nea: 
Wilmington  to  supply  fine  quality  nylon  and  rayoi 
tricot  cloth  and  knit  fabric  is  produced  for  the  Por 
City  Hosiery  Mills  in  the  manufacture  of  Mojud  lin 
gerie.  In  April,  1952,  construction  was  started  on  < 
plant  to  house  Atlantic  Throwing  Co.  which  process 
es  yarn  for  use  in  the  tricot  knitting  plant. 


Processing  yarns  in  hosiery  plant  of  Mock,  Judson,  Voehringe 
Co.  in  Greensboro. 


Winter-spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  9 


Mojud  Hosiery  Co.  is  the  parent  organization 
:ormed  in  1927.  Mr.  Voehringer,  who  lives  in 
jreensboro,  is  president  of  this  and  the  other  affil- 
ated  corporations.  Other  officers  are  Nathaniel 
Fudson,  New  York,  treasurer;  Richard  C.  Remmey, 
jreensboro,  vice-president;  Sidney  Brode,  New 
Fork,  vice-president,  and  Bernard  Judson,  New 
fork,  secretary.  Directors  are  Nathaniel  Judson, 
ihairman  of  the  board ;  John  K.  Voehringer,  Jr. ; 
Sidney  Brode,  A.  Ernest  Margerison,  Bernard  Jud- 
son and  Richard  C.  Remmey. 

The  Mojud  Hosiery  Co.  operates  stock  and  sales 
)ffices  at  385  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York;  927  Mer- 
chandise Mart,  Chicago,  and  at  Los  Angeles.  The 
products  under  the  tradename  Mojud  are  distributed 
lirectly  to  approximately  10,000  customers.  Through 
ts  60  salesmen  the  organization  keeps  in  close  touch 
with  customer  reaction,  senses  style  changes  and 
shifts  its  production  to  meet  requirements  for  highly 
styled  full  fashioned  nylon  hosiery  as  the  trade  de- 
nands.    Methods  and  machines  are  kept  abreast  of 


the  needs  and  operatives  are  highly  trained  to  pro- 
duce fine  quality  hosiery.  Mojud  was  the  first  firm 
in  the  South  to  knit  chiffon  hosiery,  the  first  to  in- 
stall picot  top  and  pointex  heel  attachments  and  was 
a  large  producer  of  mesh  hosiery  while  that  type  of 
hosiery  was  in  vogue. 

Splendid  employer-employee  relations  are  main- 
tained in  all  of  the  Mojud  plants.  The  company  ope- 
rates a  group  insurance  plan  which  covers  life,  dis- 
memberment, accident  and  sickness  and  provides 
hospital  and  surgical  benefits.  It  also  provides  for  a 
retirement  plant  at  age  65  and  for  earlier  retire- 
ment after  25  years  of  service  at  age  55  on  an  ad- 
justed income  basis  fitting  in  with  Federal  Old  Age 
and  Survivors  Insurance,  the  two  insuring  a  mini- 
mum of  $100  a  month  after  30  years  of  service  with 
the  organization. 

Indicating  the  growth  of  the  company  production 
has  increased  from  342,341  dozen  pairs  of  full  fash- 
ioned silk  hosiery  in  1929  to  19,200,000  pairs  of  nylon 
hosiery  in  1952. 


Burlington  Mills  Has  17  Men's,  Women's  Hosiery  Plants 


NOTE:  This  article  deals  primarily  with  the  hosiery  activities  of  Bur- 
ington  Mills,  Inc.  Information  on  this  organization's  far  flung  activities  in 
pinning  and  weaving  fine  synthetic  fabrics  in  this  and  other  states  and 
ou ntries  as  well  as  on  the  officers,  directors  and  other  officials  in  fabric 
iroduction  is  given  in  detail  in  the  Textiles  Issue  of  "The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly", 
/olume  (0,  No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1952. 

Burlington  Mills,  Inc.,  with  headquarters  in 
Greensboro  and  extensive  operations  in  this  State 
md  elsewhere  in  producing  fine  synthetic  fabrics, 
mtered  the  hosiery  field  cautiously  in  1938  through 
;he  purchase  of  one  small  plant.  Today  Burlington 
Mills  is  the  largest  producer  of  women's  fine  hosiery 
n  the  entire  world  and  one  of  the  leaders  in  men's 
losiery. 

Burlington  Mills,  organized  in  1923  by  J.  Spencer 
Love,  started  modestly  in  Burlington.  This  firm  has 
expanded  largely  through  purchase  of  plants  built 
Dy  other  firms  until  now  it  operates  75  different 
Dlants  in  46  communities  in  eight  states  and  in  four 
?oreign  countries.  It  employs  approximately  34,000 
workers,  has  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $96,000,000 
md  its  sales  exceed  $300,000,000  a  year.  A  few  years 
igo  J.  Spencer  Love,  president  and  organizer,  be- 
came chairman  of  the  board  and  John  C.  Cowan,  Jr., 
succeeded  him  as  president.  The  firm  has  10  vice- 
Jresidents  and  14  directors.    Burlington  Mills  Corp. 


Randleman  hosiery  plant  of  Burlington  Mills. 


of  New  York  is  the  wholly  owned  merchandising  sub- 
sidiary of  the  corporation  with  executive  offices  in 
the  Empire  State  Building  in  New  York  with  14 
branch  sales  offices  in  key  cities  throughout  the 
country. 

When  Burlington  Mills  purchased  its  first  hosiery 
mill  in  1938,  employing  about  150  workers,  nylon 
hosiery  was  still  a  novelty.  Women  for  many  decades 
had  worn  silk  hose  made  from  materials  secured 
from  Japan.  About  that  time  occurred  the  big  swing 
from  silk  to  nylon  and  later  to  other  man-made  fibers. 
Burlington  Mills  now  operates  17  modern  plants  in 
the  production  of  hosiery,  employing  more  than  6,000 
persons  and  producing  many  million  dozen  pairs  of 
fine  finished  hosiery  annually.  Burlington's  largest 
single  expansion  in  hosiery  production  came  in  1948 
through  the  purchase  of  the  May-McEwen-Kaiser 
Group  of  hosiery 
mills  in  and  around 
Burlington. 

Of  Burlington's  17 
hosiery  plants  nine 
are  full  fashioned, 
one  is  seamless,  one 
is  a  throwing  plant, 
three  are  finishing 
plants  and  three  are 
engaged  in  the  man- 
ufacture of  men's 
hosiery.  Four  of  the 
full  fashioned  mills 
are  located  in  North 
Carolina,  three  in 
Virginia,  one  in  Ala- 
bama and  one  in  Testing  machines  used  in  checking 
r*        j        mi.  j:  Cameo  and  Ballet  brands  of  Bur- 

Canada,    lhese   lull  Ungton  Mills  hosiery, 


PAGE  20 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195: 


fashioned  plants  are  located  in  Randleman,  Wades- 
boro  and  two  in  Burlington  and  in  Salem,  Marion, 
Chilhowie,  Virginia,  in  Dothan,  Alabama,  and 
in  Montreal,  Canada.  Men's  hosiery  plants,  the  pro- 
duction of  which  has  more  than  doubled  since  1947, 
are  located  in  Kernersville  and  finishing  at  the  Mc- 
Laurin  Plant  at  Asheboro.  Last  year  Burlington  ac- 
quired the  Sarfert  Plant  in  Philadelphia  by  pur- 
chasing the  Sarfert  Hosiery  Co.  Seamless  hosiery 
is  produced  at  the  big  Harriman,  Tenn.,  plant  pur- 
chased by  Burlington  in  1944.  By  the  addition  of 
a  throwing  department  in  1947  this  became  one  of 
the  world's  largest  plants  producing  finished  stock- 
ings from  raw  yarn.  A  throwing  plant  at  Graham 
supplies  processed  nylon  to  all  the  domestic  knitting 
plants  and  two  dyeing  and  finishing  plants  are  ope- 
rated, one  in  Greensboro  and  one  at  Burlington. 
Recently,  to  round  out  its  hosiery  production,  Bur- 
lington acquired  a  new  and  completely  modern  hos- 
iery plant  in  Montreal,  Canada,  and  established  a 
dyeing  and  finishing  plant  in  Los  Angeles,  Califor- 
nia. 

Manufacturing  management  in  hosiery  is  headed 
jointly  by  C.  C.  Furr,  manager  of  full  fashioned, 
throwing  and  "no-seam"  operations;  J.  P.  Kelly,  who 
directs  all  full  fashioned  finishing,  production  plan- 
ning and  quality  control,  and  C.  E.  Crutchfield,  who 
directs  all  half  hose  production.  Herbert  Kaiser 
heads  Burlington's  merchandising  operations  from 
the  Empire  State  Building  in  New  York.  Here  a 
fashion  bureau  is  maintained  with  widespread  con- 
trols in  the  United  States  and  Paris  to  assure  that 
Bur-Mil  Cameo  stockings  will  be  just  right  in  color 
and  style  to  match  the  latest  fashions.  Full  time 
fashion  coordinators  travel  from  store  to  store 
throughout  the  country  illustrating  the  fashion  im- 
portance of  hosiery  as  related  to  suits,  dresses,  hats 
and  accessories. 

Burlington's  Cameo  and  Ballet  brands  of  high 
quality  women's  hosiery  are  nationally  advertised 
and  are  to  be  found  in  leading  department  stores 


Carefully    checking    each   /mZZ   fasl 

ioned    stocking   at   Wadesboro 

Plant,  Burlington  Mills. 


throughout  the  na- 
tion. Men's  fine 
half  hose,  started  in 
1942,  are  to  be 
found  in  all  leading 
men's  stores. 

Through  its  qual- 
ity control  labora- 
tory in  Burlington 
the  company  keeps 
constant  check  on 
all  products.  The 
scientific  laboratory, 
equipped  with  the 
latest  testing  and 
research  machinery, 
is  constantly  test- 
ing and  examining 
all  products  to  in- 
sure uniform  high 
quality. 

Grabur  Plant,  Burlington,  was  a  small  mill  buil 
in  April,  1935,  as  the  Grabur  Silk  Throwing  Co.  I 
operated  under  the  ownership  of  W.  H.  May,  B.  V| 
May  and  J.  H.  McEwen  until  mid-1948.  At  that  tim< 
Burlington  Mills  acquired  the  plant  and  has  put  ii 
many  improvements.  The  Grabur  Plant  produce 
yarn  for  the  hosiery  division  and  employs  around  15( 
workers. 

Greensboro  Hosiery  Finishing  Plant — This  plan 
was  built  in  1931  by  J.  H.  Adams  and  was  operatec 
by  Vogle-Watkins  as  a  half  hose  plant  until  194,' 
when  Burlington  acquired  it  and  converted  it  into  < 
hosiery  finishing  operation.  It  employs  around  35< 
workers. 

May  Finishing  Plant,  Burlington,  was  originally 
built  in  1918  for  the  National  Dyeworks  which  ope 
rated  it  until  1947  when  it  was  purchased  by  Ma: 
Hosiery  Co.  In  1940  the  plant  became  a  part  of  May 
McEwen-Kaiser  Co.  which  operated  it  until  1948 
At  that  time  Burlington  Mills  acquired  the  May 
McEwen-Kaiser  Co.  and  all  of  its  properties.  Mam 
improvements  have  been  made  in  this  plant  whicl 
dyes  and  finishes  full  fashioned  hosiery,  employing 
about  500  workers. 


A  fete  of  the  modem  multi-section  full  -fashioned  hosiery 
machines  of  Burlington  Mills. 


Folding  and  boxing  hose  in  the  May  Finishing  Plant  of 
Burlington  Mills. 


VlNTER-SPRING,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  21 


May  Hosiery  Plant,  Burlington — This  plant  also 
vas  a  part  of  May  Hosiery  Mills  and  later  the  May- 
VTcEwen-Kaiser  Co.  It  was  built  in  1928  and  pro- 
luces  full  fashioned  hosiery,  employing  about  350 
workers.  This  plant  has  been  improved  several 
;imes. 

McEwen  Knitting  Plant,  Burlington — This  plant 
vas  built  in  1925  by  the  McEwen  Knitting  Co.  and 
)ecame  a  part  of  the  May-McEwen-Kaiser  organiza- 
;ion  in  1940.  It  was  acquired  by  Burlington  Mills  by 
nerger  in  1948.  Employing  about  375  workers,  this 
)lant  produces  full  fashioned  hosiery. 

McLaurin  Hosiery  Plant,  Asheboro,  was  built  in 
L931  by  a  Mr.  De  Moss  who  operated  it  for  two  years. 
tl  1933  N.  M.  Cranford  purchased  the  plant  and 
jperated  it  until  1942.  Burlington  Mills  acquired  the 
)lant  early  in  1942  and  operates  it  as  a  half  hose  and 
nisses'  anklets  plant.  About  200  workers  are  em- 
ployed. 

Randleman  Hosiery  Plant — This  unit  was  built  in 
L938  as  Randleman  Industries  and  was  acquired  in 
;he  same  year  by  Burlington  Mills.  It  produces  full 
iashioned  hosiery  and  is  a  modern  productive  hos- 
ery  knitting  mill  with  approximately  200  workers. 

Vance  Hosiery  Plant,  Kernersville — This  plant  be- 
?an  operations  in  1920  as  the  Vance  Knitting  Co. 
May-McEwen-Kaiser  purchased  half  of  the  stock  in 
L935  but  the  plant  continued  operation  under  the 
V'ance  name  until  1948.  It  was  acquired  the  next 
/ear  by  Burlington  Mills  and  now  produces  men's 
md  women's  half  hose  and  stockings.  About  350 
vorkers  are  employed. 

Wadesboro  Hosiery  Plant  was  a  joint  project  be- 
tween Burlington  Mills  and  a  group  of  Wadesboro 
dtizens.  It  was  organized  late  in  1938,  half  of  the 
stock  having  been  subscribed  by  Burlington  Mills 
md  the  other  by  a  group  of  local  citizens,  including 
W.  Bryan  Moore,  Hal  W.  Little,  L.  D.  Rivers,  Dr.  and 
Mrs.  F.  Y.  Sorrell  and  others.  The  building  was 
eased  from  the  Wadesboro  Industrial  Corp.  and  ac- 
;ual  operations  started  early  in  1939.  The  building 
vas  purchased  by  Burlington  in  1941  and  in  1947 
3urlington  acquired  all  of  the  stock  in  the  company 
md  made  the  plant  a  part  of  its  hosiery  division, 
rhis  plant,  now  employing  about  250  workers,  is  a 
nodern  and  productive  knitting  plant  producing  full 
?ashioned  hosiery. 


HIGH  POINT  HAS  MANY  MEDIUM  AND 

SUCCESSFUL  HOSIERY  ORGANIZATIONS 

Information  on  others  of  the  larger  hosiery  mills  in  High 
5oint  (one  or  more  omitted  by  request),  in  alphabetical  order, 
s  given  below: 

CROWN  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Crown  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  a  capital  stock  of  $250,000, 
iperates  630  circular  knitting  machines  producing  children's, 
nisses'  and  ladies'  anklets,  ladies'  seamless  hose  and  men's 
ancy  half  hose.  The  principal  brand  is  "ARK"  hosiery.  The 
*Jew  York  sales  office  is  located  at  2708  Empire  State  Building 
md  products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  G.  H.  Kearns 
s  president,  J.  Allen  Austen,  Jr.,  vice-president  in  charge  of 
Jersonnel  and  production;  Charles  L.  Kearns,  vice-president 
md  assistant  treasurer,  and  Amos  R.  Kearns,  secretary  and 
reasurer. 


DIAMOND  HOSIERY  CORP. 

Diamond  Hosiery  Corp.,  capitalized  at  $300,000,  operates  40 
full  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery,  principal 
brands  of  which  are  "Fruit  of  the  Loom"  and  "Diamond". 
Products  are  sold  to  department  stores,  chain  stores  and  re- 
tailers through  the  firm's  New  York  office  at  1818  Empire 
State  Building.  A.  Phillip  Goldsmith,  New  York  City,  is  presi- 
dent and  treasurer;  William  Schumann  and  A.  Donald  Brinton, 
vice-presidents,  and  S.  P.  Goldsmith,  secretary. 

GUILFORD  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Guilford  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  stock  of  $120,000, 
operates  450  circular  knitting  machines  producing  rayon 
wraps,  anklets  and  half  hose  and  work  socks.  Principal  brands 
are  "Lindale",  "Capsall"  and  "First  Call".  The  New  York 
office  is  located  in  the  Empire  State  Building  with  J.  E.  Mc- 
Kierman  as  manager.  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores.  John  W.  Lindsay,  Jr.,  is  president;  Julia  M.  Liles, 
secretary;  David  M.  Lindsay,  treasurer,  and  R.  H.  Bain,  sup- 
erintendent. 

HALTOM  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Haltom  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  350  circular  knitting 
machines  producing  crew  socks  and  half  hose  which  are  sold 
direct  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  G.  C.  Haltom  is  president 
and  treasurer  and  P.  R.  Haltom  is  secretary. 

HARRISS  &  COVINGTON  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Harriss  &  Covington  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  is  capitalized  at 
$250,000.  The  plant  operates  840  circular  knitting  machines  pro- 
ducing men's  half  hose  and  anklets  in  all  types  of  yarn.  The 
products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  J.  Welch  Harriss 
is  president;  H.  P.  Morrison  and  Jack  H.  Thomas,  vice-presi- 
dents; J.  Harriss  Covington,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and  F. 
C.  Morehead,  superintendent. 

PLYMOUTH  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Plymouth  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $23,500,  operates 
116  circular  knit  machines  producing  misses'  and  children's 
anklets,  infants'  anklets  and  men's  plain  cotton  slacks.  Prin- 
cipal brands  are  "Ancestor"  and  "Twinkle  Toes"  and  products 
are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  department  stores  and  retail- 
ers. C.  S.  McKenzie  is  president  and  treasurer  and  R.  M. 
Jensen,  secretary. 

SILVER-KNIT  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Silver-Knit  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  5,000  shares 
of  stock,  operates  600  circular  knitting  machines  producing 
men's  half  hose  and  anklets  in  rayon,  silk,  wool  and  cotton. 
The  products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  the 
New  York  office  at  1008  Empire  State  Building,  New  York. 
Milton  Silver  is  president  and  Robert  M.  Silver  is  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

SLANE  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Slane  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $400,000,  operates 
704  circular  knitting  machines  producing  boys'  and  men's 
fancy  hose  and  wash  socks,  the  principal  brand  "Sparks".  The 
New  York  office  is  located  at  2705  Empire  State  Building,  with 
Henry  M.  Baker  as  manager.  The  products  are  sold  to  jobbers 
and  chain  stores.  Mrs.  M.  C.  Slane  is  president;  John  C.  Slane, 
vice-president,  and  W.  H.  Slane,  Jr.,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

TERRY  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Terry  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capital  of  $30,000,  operates  146 
circular  knit  machines  in  two  plants  producing  children's, 
misses'  and  women's  anklets,  men's  slacks  and  athletic  socks. 
Principal  brands  are  "Terry  Tex",  "Testex",  "Kiddie  Sox"  and 
"Fashion  Deb".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores. 
L.  R.  Terry  is  president  and  superintendent  and  M.  B.  Terry, 
secretary. 

TRIANGLE  HOSIERY  CO. 

Triangle  Hosiery  Co.  operates  720  circular  knitting  machines 
in  the  production  of  men's  half  hose  and  boys'  hose.  Products 
are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  N.  M.  Ayers  is  presi- 
dent and  treasurer;  H.  P.  Hardin,  vice-president;  F.  H.  Gray, 
secretary,  and  J.  P.  Williamson,  superintendent. 

OTHER  HIGH  POINT  FIRMS 

Other  High  Point  hosiery  firms  follow: 

Seamless — A.  &  L.  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  wool 
crew  socks;  Allen  Jay  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  and  boys'  half  hose; 
Davidson  Hosiery  Mills  Co.;  Deep  River  Hosiery  Co.,  Inc., 
men's  and  boys  ingrain  and  cushion  sole,  misses'  anklets; 
Glenn  Hosiery  Co.,  infants',  children's,  misses'  and  ladies'  mer- 
cerized anklets,  infants'  rayon  anklets  and  ladies'  cotton  ank- 
lets; O.  E.  Kearns  &  Sons,  Inc.,  ladies'  and  men's  hosiery  in 
cotton,  wool,  rayon  and  silk  constructions,  men's  slacks;  Kid- 
die Tot  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.,  misses',  children's  and  infants' 
hosiery;    Kitty   Knit   Hosiery   Mill,   men's,   boys'   and   misses' 


PAGE  22 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195: 


socks;  McLean  Co.,  Inc.,  half  hose;  Singer  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
men's  ingrain  and  fancy  hose;  Smart-Sox,  Inc.,  ladies'  and 
misses'  anklets,  men's  and  boys'  crew  socks;  State  Hosiery 
Mill,  Inc.,  men's  rayon  wraps  and  sport  socks,  misses'  anklets; 
Full  Fashioned — Acclaim  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Colonial  Hos- 
iery, Inc.;  Jerome  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.;   Randy  Hosiery  Co.,  Inc. 


OTHER  GREENSBORO  FIRMS 

Seamless — Ardmore  Hosiery  Co.,  Inc.,  men's  rubber  top  slacl 
socks;  Juvenile  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  slack  sock 
and  boys'  golf  hose;   Milton  Hosiery  Co. 

Full  Fashioned — Southland  Hosiery  Mills;  Troxler  Hosier1 
Co. 


»i 


Burlington,  Alamance  Long  State  Hosiery  Producing  Center 


Note — Large  Burlington  Mills  hosiery  operations  included  under  Greensboro 
and  Guilford  County. 

Burlington  long  considered  the  hosiery  center  of 
North  Carolina,  has  allowed  High  Point  to  pull  up 
alongside  and  Alamance  County  has  given  place  to 
Guilford  County  in  numbers  of  workers  employed 
in  the  hosiery  industry.  Both  Burlington  and  Ala- 
mance County  continue  to  hold  high  positions  in  the 
State  on  this  basis.  Records  in  the  Employment 
Security  Commission  office  show  that  54  plants,  em- 
ploying 7,250  workers,  were  engaged  in  the  knitting 
industry  in  the  second  quarter  of  1952.  Of  this  num- 
ber, 27  plants,  employing  1,562  workers,  were  pro- 
ducing seamless  hosiery ;  20  plants,  employing  more 
than  4,600  workers,  were  making  full  fashioned  hos- 
iery, while  seven  plants,  with  nearly  1,100  workers, 
produced  other  knit  products. 

Burlington,  these  reports  show,  has  32  plants  en- 
gaged in  manufacturing  hosiery  and  employing  about 
5,800  workers.  In  addition  five  plants,  producing 
other  knit  products  employ  several  hundred  workers. 
Graham  has  nine  plants,  employing  about  450  work- 
ers, engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  hosiery,  in  addi- 
tion to  one  small  plant  producing  other  knit  prod- 
ucts. Mebane  has  three  plants,  employing  about 
200  workers,  including  one  small  plant  making  knit- 
ted products  other  than  hosiery.  Glen  Raven  has 
one  large  hosiery  plant  and  two  small  hosiery  plants 
are  located  at  Haw  River.  Gibsonville  has  one  small 
hosiery  plant  which  is  reported  as  being  in  Ala- 
mance County. 

While  there  have  been  some  changes  in  the  overall  in- 
dustrial picture  in  Burlington  and  Alamance  County  in  the 
past  several  years,  hosiery  from  the  area  continues  to  com- 
mand a  respected  and  prominent  place  in  the  nation's  mar- 
ket. 


Pioneer  citizens  of  Alamance  County  were  among  tin 
pioneer  manufacturers  of  hosiery  in  the  South.  Hosiery  anc 
textiles  combined  make  the  county  one  of  heavy  industrial 
ization. 

The  first  sustaining  operation  in  hosiery  to  move  intd 
national  and  international  prominence  began  in  Burlingtoj 
in  1906  when  Will  H.  May  and  Ben  V.  May  joined  a  smal 
operation  called  Daisy  Hosiery  Mills.  From  a  small  begin, 
ning,  and  through  savings,  the  brothers  were  able  to  bujj 
the  business  in  1911.  They  started  a  finishing  plant  in 
1917  and  then  saw  their  May  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  become  onej 
of  the  outstanding  operations  in  the  South. 

Their  firm  merged  with  the  interests  of  J.  H.  McEwen, 
of  McEwen  Hosiery  Mills  and  Herbert  M.  Kaiser,  of  New! 
York,  in  1940  to  become  May-McEwen-Kaiser,  and  then 
merged  with  Burlington  Mills  in  1948.  The  "Cameo" 
brand  is  known  throughout  the  nation.  Mr.  McEwen  died 
in  1946. 

There  was  another  comparatively  small  operation  to  start 
near  the  site  of  the  famed  Alamance  Battleground  in  1917 
that  also  has  reached  in  prominence  the  national  level. 

John  Shoffner  and  his  brother-in-law,  John  Black,  began 
their  half-hose  business  that  year  and  in  1926  purchased! 
property  in  the  village  of  Alamance  in  an  expansion  project. 

Standard  Hosiery  Mills  has  continued  to  grow  to  the  point 
that  its  operations  cover  many  areas  and  its  merchandise  in] 
"Schiaparelli"  full  fashioned  hosiery  and  "Esquire"  men's 
hosiery  are  among  the  more  prominent  brands  on  the  mar- 
ket. Chester  H.  Roth  of  New  York  City,  heading  the  sales 
organization,  is  president  of  the  organization,  and  Clyde  W. 
Gordon  of  Burlington  is  executive  vice-president  and  gen- 
eral manager. 

While  these,  with  Tower  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  headed  by 
Keid  A.  Maynard,  are  the  larger  operations,  there  are  small- 
er ones  that  have  developed  on  a  smaller  scale. 

Altogether,  according  to  Chamber  of  Commerce  figures, 
there  are  56  hosiery  plants  in  Burlington  today  employing 
8)000  people  and  making  125,000  dozen  men's  and  75,000 
dozen  women's  hosiery  weekly. — By  Howard  White,  Times- 
News,  Burlington. 

Note — Difference  in  Burlington  Chamber  of  Commerce  and  Employment 
Security  Commission  figures  may  be  explained.  C.  of  C.  figures  may  in- 
clude auxiliary  plants  and  plants  outside  and  near  Burlington,  and  a  few 
small  plants  not  covered  by  ES  Law.  This  would  add  to  the  number  of 
plants  and  add  employees  not  strictly  production  and  office  workers  in  hosiery 
mills.  Too,  ESC  figures  are  those  for  the  second  quarter  of  1952,  when  some 
plants  may  have  been  closed  down  temporarily  and  others  operating  with 
reduced  employment. 


Standard  Produces  High  Quality  Men's,  Women's  Hosiery 


Standard  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Burlington,  with 
half  a  dozen  modern  plants  in  Burlington,  Alamance, 
Pittsboro  and  Fayetteville,  producing  such  widely 
known  brands  as  "Esquire"  socks  for  men  and 
"Schiaparelli"  high  styled  hosiery  for  women,  had  a 
very  modest  beginning  in  the  small  community  of 
Alamance,  five  miles  south  of  Burlington  near  the 
Alamance  Battleground  in  1917.  In  that  year  a 
small  wooden  building  with  24  half  hose  knitting 
machines,  John  Shoffner  and  his  brother-in-law, 
John  T.  Black,  started  knitting  men's  half  hose.  This 
modest  beginning  with  later  enlargements,  additions 
and  acquisitions  resulted  in  the  development  of  one 
of  the  larger  hosiery  manufacturing  organizations 
in  North  Carolina — Standard  Hosiery  Mills. 

Mr.  Shoffner,  principal  organizer,  gained  textile 


experience  as  a  boy  working  for  $9.00  a  week  in  the 
Alamance  Cotton  Mills.  He  added  to  his  income  by 
odd  time  work  in  a  garage  and  as  village  barber.  Mr. 
Black,  Graham  grocer  for  several  years,  invested  his 
savings  in  the  partnership. 

This  small  industry  prospered  and  soon  a  large 
brick  building  replaced  the  original  wooden  struc- 
ture. Several  additions  were  erected,  including  the 
present  Seamless  Plant  and  Office  Building.  This 
firm  pioneered  in  fancy  knit  socks  for  men  and  was 
the  second  plant  in  the  South  to  affix  attachments  to 
its  knitting  machines  to  make  fancy  patterns.  Today 
the  fancy  knit  socks  accounts  for  an  estimated  80% 
of  the  total  production  of  men's  hosiery. 

In  1926  this  firm  purchased  from  the  Holt  interests 
the  historical  "Old  Alamance  Mill"  property  on  Ala- 


/inter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  23 


jiance  Creek  consisting  of  the  Mill  Building  and  a 
jillage  of  about  50  acres  and  40  dwellings.  This 
ilamance  Cotton  Mill  was  converted  into  a  hosiery 
hishing  plant  with  a  capacity  of  30,000  dozen  men's 
alf  hose  weekly.  The  village  houses  were  remodel- 
d  and  repainted.  A  hard  surfaced  road  and  side- 
walks were  installed  and  a  modern  water  system  was 
rovided  to  filter  water  for  the  plant  and  the  village 
nd  for  fire  protection. 

This  firm  was  incorporated  January  1,  1928,  as  the 
tandard  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.  First  officers  were 
ohn  Shoffner,  president;  John  T.  Black,  vice-presi- 
ent;  Clarence  E.  Fogleman,  treasurer,  and  Clyde 
V.  Gordon,  secretary.  These  officers,  with  E.  C. 
anders,  superintendent;  George  H.  Fowler,  mana- 
er  of  the  Finishing  Department,  and  Claude  Shoff- 
er,  department  foreman,  composed  the  Board  of 
)irectors.  The  Chester  H.  Roth  Co;,  Inc.,  was  sales 
epresentative  for  both  ladies'  and  men's  hose. 

By  1929  demand  for  a  new  plant  to  make  ladies' 
nil  fashioned  hosiery  was  met  by  the  erection  of  a 
lodern  fire  proof  brick  building.  The  company  in- 
tailed  20  new  late  model  leggers  and  11  footers  with 
ecessary  seamers  and  loopers.  Equipment  was  in- 
tailed  in  the  dyeing  and  finishing  departments  to 
andle  a  capacity  of  10,000  dozen  full  fashioned  hose 
weekly.  From  this  time  production  began  to  expand, 
'oday  the  full  fashioned  plant  has  60,000  square  feet 
f  floor  space  and  is  equipped  with  64  full-fashioned 
nitting  machines.  Fluorescent  lights  were  installed 
nd  recently  a  new  type  of  plastic  flooring  was  laid 
i  the  inspecting  seaming  departments  and  air  con- 
itioning  with  year  round  temperature  and  humidity 
ontrol  was  installed. 

More  than  600  men  and  women  are  employed  in 
le  Alamance  plants.  Many  of  these  formerly  work- 
d  in  the  Cotton  Mill,  others  having  come  into  the 
illage  recently.  Numbers  live  on  farms,  commuting 
s  much  as  40  miles  daily,  and  others  live  in  Burling- 
m.  The  corporation,  vitally  interested  in  the  wel- 
are  of  its  employees,  contributed  substantially  to 
emodeling  St.  Pauls  Lutheran  Church,  to  the  con- 
duction of  the  Sunday  School  addition  and  erection 
f  the  modern  brick  parsonage.  A  modern  14-unit 
ooming  house  and  a  7-unit  apartment  house  are 
laintained  for  employees.  A  club  house  is  the  cen- 
ir  for  community  gatherings.  A  Scout  Hut  is  used 
y  boy  scout  and  girl  scout  troops.  A  modern  school 
us  is  operated  by  the  corporation  to  transport  the 
hildren  of  the  village  to  the  E.  M.  Holt  School.  This 
:hool  has  the  John  Shoffner  Memorial  Library,  said 
)  be  the  best  library  in  any  consolidated  rural  school 
i  the  South.  Summer  recreation  is  provided  at  the 
ohn  Shoffner  Memorial  Playground  with  games  for 
oung  and  old  and  swings  and  wading  pools  for  chil- 
ren.  Swimming  instructions  and  life-saving  dem- 
nstrations  are  conducted  in  nearby  Alamance  Creek. 

In  1938  Clyde  W.  Gordon,  who  had  been  with  Stan- 
ard  Hosiery  Mills  for  11  years,  and  William  C. 
lull,  formerly  with  Standard  Hosiery  and  later  sup- 
rintendent  of  Baker-Cammack  Mills,  became  active 


managers  of  Century  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  located  on 
Webb  Avenue  in  Burlington.  This  modern  plant  had 
a  floor  space  of  26,000  square  feet  and  was  used  for 
dyeing  and  finishing  half  hose.  Installation  of  latest 
machinery  gave  an  initial  capacity  of  10,000  dozen 
half  hose  weekly,  later  substantially  increased. 

The  Thompson  Hosiery  Mill  was  acquired  in  1943 
by  the  Century  Corporation  stockholders  and  was 
operated  as  the  Webb  Hosiery  Co.  This  plant  is 
equipped  with  seamless  knitting  machines  to  make 
men's  hosiery  and  has  some  of  the  latest  type  equip- 
ment to  produce  sport  socks.  Part  of  the  Aurora 
Mill  property,  extending  1000  feet  on  the  north  side 
of  Webb  Avenue,  was  acquired  two  years  later.  This 
property  includes  the  present  Standard  Finishing 
Plant  and  Century  in  one  building  and  the  Webb  divi- 
sion is  in  an  adjacent  modern  wooden  structure. 

After  John  Shoffner's  death  in  1944,  Chester  H. 
Roth  of  New  York  City  joined  Standard  Hosiery 
Mills  as  president,  in  charge  of  sales.  Duncan  A. 
MacKenzie  was  made  production  manager  and  Her- 
bert W.  Wade  was  secretary  and  treasurer. 

The  Finishing  Plant  at  Alamance  was  moved  in 
1946  to  Webb  Avenue  in  Burlington.    The  full  fash- 


Air  vieiv  of  two  principal  plants  of  Standard  Hosiery  Mills 
Co.,  Burlington.  Front  is  Finishing  Division  for  ladies'  hose; 
next  is  Century  Division,  finishing  men's  hose,  and  back  build- 
ing is  Webb  Division,  knitting  men's  hose. 


PAGE  24 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


ioned  finishing  was  handled  in  the  eastern  end  of  the 
old  Aurora  Building  and  half  hose  were  finished  at 
Century  under  a  lease  arrangement  with  Century 
Corp.  Standard  has  added  packaged  dyeing  in  re- 
cent years  in  order  to  have  a  better  control  over  the 
ingrain  yarns  used  in  the  knitting  departments. 
Yarns  dyed  in  excess  of  the  firm's  needs  are  sold  to 
other  half  hose  mills. 

Standard  started  a  half  hose  greige  processing- 
plant  in  Pittsboro  in  1947  to  take  care  of  the  overflow 
of  men's  hose  knitted  in  Burlington.  Inspecting, 
sewing,  looping  and  other  greige  processing  are  per- 
formed in  this  plant.  In  March  1947  the  Century 
Corp.  merged  with  Standard  Hosiery. 

Clyde  W.  Gordon  at  that  time  became  executive 
vice-president  and  general  manager  of  Standard 
Hosiery  Mills,  the  position  he  still  holds.  He  is  also 
vice-president  of  Chester  H.  Roth  Co.,  Inc.,  New 
York ;  executive  vice-president  and  general  manager 
of  Fayetteville  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  and  vice-presi- 
dent of  Macon  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Macon,  Ga.  Re- 
cently he  was  named  vice-president  of  the  Southern 
Hosiery  Manufacturers'  Association  and  chairman 
of  its  full  fashioned  hosiery  division ;  member  of  the 
Southern  Division  Advisory  Committee  of  the  Na- 
tional Association  of  Manufacturers;  a  director  of 
the  N.  C.  Textile  Foundation,  Inc.,  and  a  director  of 
the  National  Bank  of  Burlington.  Mr.  Gordon  is  a 
member  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  Elon  College  and 
of  the  Christian  Orphanage  at  Elon  as  well  as  secre- 
tary-treasurer of  the  Elon  College  Foundation,  Inc. 
He  is  a  deacon  and  a  member  of  the  Board  of  Trus- 
tees of  the  First  Congregational  Christian  Church, 
Burlington.  He  is  a  member  and  past  president  of 
the  Burlington  Chamber  of  Commerce  and  the  Bur- 
lington Rotary  Club.  In  addition  he  is  a  member  of 
the  committee  on  State  Governmental  Economics,  the 
N.  C.  Small  Business  Committee  and  of  the  Regional 
Advisory  Board,  small  defense  administration.  It  is, 
therefore,  no  surprise  that  he  was  selected  by  the 
Burlington  Kiwanis  Club  as  Alamance  County's  citi- 
zen of  the  year  for  1951. 

Standard  Hosiery  operations  have  increased  to  the 


Standard  Hosiery  Mills'  plants  at  Alamance,  five  miles  from 
Burlington;  in  foreground,  Seamless  Division,  knitting  men's 
hose,  and  in  rear  is  Full  Fashioned  Division. 


extent  that  it  now  has  a  total  of  1,450  employees 
approximately  600  at  the  Alamance  plants,  750  wit! 
Century,  Webb  and  Standard  Finishing  Division  ii 
Burlington,  100  at  the  Pittsboro  plant  and  50  in  th 
Fayetteville  plant. 

Standard  Hosiery  Mills  and  Chester  H.  Roth  Cc 
moved  into  the  new  office  building  on  Maple  Avenue 
Burlington,  in  June  1947.  This  building  is  entirelj 
modern  with  air  conditioning  and  fluorescent  light' 
ing.  It  has  approximately  13,000  square  feet  of  floo 
space  utilized  in  consolidated  payroll,  billing,  per 
sonnel,  bookkeeping,  accounting,  purchasing  organ 
ization  and  executive  offices. 

The  Fayetteville  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  Fayetteville 
was  acquired  by  Standard  Hosiery  January  1,  1948 
This  plant  knits  ladies'  hose  which  are  finished  iij 
the  Burlington  plant.  This  plant  produces  approx 
imately  2,000  dozen  pairs  of  full  fashioned  hosiery 
a  week.  Present  machines  produce  51  gauge  stock 
ings,  supplementary  machinery  producing  the  lates 
design  in  seaming. 

"Esquire"  brand,  a  completely  new  line  of  men's 
hosiery,  was  introduced  in  January,  1947,  and  an  ex- 
tensive advertising  program  is  conducted  in  such 
magazines  as  Life,  Look,  Saturday  Evening  Post  anc 
trade  journals.  Early  in  1948  Standard  Hosiery 
called  in  Madam  Elsa  Schiaparelli,  Parisian  stylist 
famous  for  her  costume  accessories,  perfumes  anc 
cosmetics  and  requested  that  she  design  full  fash- 
ioned hosiery  for  the  company.  An  aggressive  cam- 
paign has  since  been  conducted  in  the  promotion  of 
these  newly  styled  hose  under  the  brand  name  of 
"Schiaparelli"  stockings.  These  stockings,  portray- 
ing creative  and  color  sense,  are  found  only  in  the 
most  exclusive  stores. 

Standard  Hosiery  Mills  now  produce  approximate- 
ly 20,000  dozen  pairs  of  ladies'  hose  and  25,000  dozen 
pairs  of  men's  half  hose  each  week  for  a  select  and 
exclusive  clientele. 

BURLINGTON 

BAKER-CAMMACK  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Baker-Cammack  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Burlington,  capitalized;! 
at  $800,000,  operates  293  circular  knit  machines  producing 
men's  plain,  fancy  and  novelty  hosiery-  Principal  brands  are 
"Fadcrat't"  and  "Ascot"  and  customers'  brands.  The  firm  sells 
to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores  through  its  New 
York  sales  office  at  2807  Empire  State  Building  and  in  charge 
of  R.  E.  Cammack,  vice-president  and  sales  manager.  J.  E. 
Baker  is  president  and  treasurer;  C.  A.  Mclver,  vice-presi- 
dent and  production  manager;  C.  L.  Cammack,  vice-president 
and  C.  H.  Shoffner,  secretary. 

Baker-Mebane  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $93,480  and 
located  at  Mebane,  is  a  subsidiary  of  Baker-Cammack  Hosiery 
Mills,  Burlington.  The  plant  operates  176  circular  knit  ma- 
chines producing  men's  hosiery  which  is  finished  at  Baker- 
Cammack  Hosiery  Mills.  Goods  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain 
stores  and  department  stores  through  the  Burlington  and  New 
York  offices  of  Baker-Cammack  Hosiery  Mills.  J.  E.  Baker, 
Burlington,  is  president  and  treasurer;  C.  L.  Cammack,  vice- 
president,  and  Clive  Shoffner,  secretary. 

ELDER  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Elder  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $35,000,  operated 
140  circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  wrap  anklets, 
work  socks  and  cushion  soles.  The  plant  does  not  dye  or  finish. 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  department  stores.  W.  Clifton 
Elder  is  president  and  Mrs.  Elizabeth  C.  Elder  is  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

GRACE  HOSIERY  MILLS 

Grace   Hosiery   Mills,   with   capital   of   $35,000,   operates   135 


'VlNTER-SPRlNG,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  25 


ircular  knit  machines  producing  men's  half  hose  in  mercer- 
zed  cotton  and  rayon,  and  misses'  anklets  (finished  at  Long 
inishing  Mills,  Burlington).  The  firm  sells  to  jobbers  and 
hain  stores  through  its  selling  agency,  Murphy,  Brill  &  Sahn- 
r,  Inc.,  358  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City.  G.  D.  Moore  is 
resident;  Reid  A.  Maynard,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and  E. 
I.  Scott,  vice-president  and  superintendent. 

GRIFFIN  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 
Griffin  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  $100,000  capital,  operate  150 
ircular  knit  machines  in  the  production  of  men's  plain  and 
an^y  anklets,  children's  crew  socks  and  anklets  in  cotton  and 
aercerized  cotton  and  men's  cushion  sole  socks.  The  principal 
rand  is  "Wisgee".  William  S.  Griffin  is  president  and  treas- 
irer  and  T.  B.  Griffin  is  secretary. 

PICKETT  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 
Pickett  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $90,000,  operates 
40  circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  fancy  half  hose 
.finished  at  Long  Finishing  Mills,  Burlington).  Products  are 
!old  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Murphy,  Brill  & 
Sahner,  Inc.,  358  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City.  George  C. 
Sharpe  is  president  and  treasurer. 

SELLERS  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Sellers  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $1,000,000,  operates 
24  full  fashioned  machines  in  producing  ladies'  hosiery.  Prod- 
id^  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores 
:hrough  Hess-Taylor  Co.,  Inc.,  Empire  State  Building,  New 
Fork  City.  W.  W.  Sellers  is  president  and  treasurer  and  Mrs. 
Hazel  Crowson  Sellers  is  secretary. 

TOWER  HOSIERY   MILLS,   INC. 

Tower  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  $125,000,  operates 
36  full  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery,  finished 
it  Long  Finishing  Mills,  Burlington.  Products  are  sold  through 
Hess-Taylor  Co.,  Inc.,  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City, 
:o  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores.  E.  H.  Moore 
is  president  and  Reid  A.  Maynard,  secretary  and  treasurer. 
OTHER  BURLINGTON  MILLS 

Other  Burlington  hosiery  mills  follow: 

Full  Fashioned — B.  L.  Hosiery;  Burcon  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (McEwen  Hosiery  Plant  and  May  Hos- 
iery Finishing  Plant)  (branch  of  Greensboro);  Chadbourn 
Hosiery  Mills  (Plant  No.  1)  (branch  of  Charlotte);  Foster 
Hosiery  Mill;  Hazel  Knitting  Mill,  Inc.;  Holt  Hosiery  Mills, 
Inc.;  Long  Finishing  Mills;  Minmar  Hosiery  Co. 

Seamless — Brown's  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.,  infants'  and  chil- 
dren's anklets,  boys'  and  men's  slacks;    Coble  Hosiery  Mills; 


Dura-Thread  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  men's  argyle  hose,  men's  fancy 
wraps;  East  End  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  half  hose;  Elizabeth- 
Meade  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.,  half  hose;  Full-Knit  Hosiery  Mill, 
Inc.  (subsidiary  of  Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills,  Charlotte);  Gar- 
rison Hosiery;  Glenover  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  half  hose;  Koury 
Hosiery  Mills;  Lindy  Hosiery;  Lorimer  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
men's  wraps  and  novelty  ingrains;  Major  Dye  Works,  Inc.; 
Monarch  Hosiery  Mills;  Sanders  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  half  hose 
in  wraps  and  argyles;  Shadowbrook  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  ladies' 
seamless  hosiery;  Sykes  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  fancy  half 
hose. 

OSSIPEE 

ALTAMAHAW  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Altamahaw  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  $90,900,  ope- 
rates 135  circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  half  hose  and 
anklets  and  ladies  mercerized  cotton  and  rayon  hosiery.  Prod- 
ucts are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  Dr.  H.  H.  Simpson 
is  president;  Marion  Shaw,  treasurer  and  manager,  and  T.  J. 
Blalock,  secretary. 

GLEN  RAVEN 

GLEN  RAVEN  KNITTING  MILLS,   INC. 

Glen  Raven  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  75  circular  knit 
machines  and  eight  flat  knitting  tricot  machines  producing 
ladies'  seamless  hosiery  and  tricot  goods.  In  addition,  the 
company  has  a  plant  located  at  Altamahaw  operating  56  full 
fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery.  Principal 
brand  is  "Glen  Raven".  The  firm  sells  to  chain  stores,  depart- 
ment stores  and  retailers  through  its  New  York  office  at  265 
Madison  Avenue,  Raymond  E.  Holstead,  manager.  Officers 
are  Allen  Erwin  Gant,  president,  and  A.  H.  Rogers,  vice-presi- 
dent. 

OTHER  ALAMANCE  FIRMS 

Other  Alamance  County  hosiery  firms  are: 

Graham — Full  Fashioned — Atsco  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Erwin 
Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.;  Graham  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Isley  Hosiery 
Mill;  Jarosz  Hosiery  Mill;  Leath  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.;  Nu-Vogue 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Sharpe  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Seamless — 
Durable  Hosiery  Mill,  half  hose;  Ray  Hosiery  Mills. 

Alamance — Full  Fashioned  and  Seamless — Standard  Hosiery 
Mill  (branch  of  Burlington). 

Haiv  River — Seamless — Childrey  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  half 
hose;  Swink  Knitting;  Haw  Hosiery  Mill,  half  hose,  plain  nad 
fancy. 


Hickory  and  Catawba  Co.  Big  Producers  of  Men's  Hosiery 


Hickory  has  become  one  of  the  four  most  impor- 
tant centers  in  North  Carolina,  along  with  Burling- 
ton, High  Point  and  Asheboro  in  the  manufacture 
of  hosiery.  As  is  characteristic  of  the  hosiery  in- 
dustry in  North  Carolina,  with  only  a  few  outstand- 
ing exceptions,  the  hosiery  industry  in  and  around 
Hickory  is  made  up  primarily  of  numerous  small 
plants.  Approximately  55  plants  are  now  engaged 
in  hosiery  manufacturing  in  Hickory  while  numbers 
of  other  plants  are  in  successful  operation  in  the  im- 
mediate area.  Many  other  plants,  such  as  cotton 
spinning,  dyeing  and  finishing,  dye  manufacturing, 
paper  box  plants  and  numbers  of  other  related  indus- 
tries have  developed  in  Hickory  to  supply  materials 
and  equipment  used  in  the  hosiery  industry. 

Two  of  Hickory's  long-time  bankers,  K.  C.  Menzies 
and  J.  L.  Cilley,  officers  of  the  First  National  Bank 
of  Catawba  County,  and  L.  C.  Guilford,  publisher  of 
the  Hickory  Record,  got  their  heads  together  and 
came  up  with  the  information  that  between  six  and 
seven  million  dollars  is  invested  in  plants  engaged  in 
hosiery  manufacture  in  the  City  of  Hickory. 

They  recall  that  J.  A.  Cline  established  the  first 
hosiery  mill  in  Hickory  in  1906,  producing  men's 


cotton  hose.  The  firm  J.  A.  Cline  &  Son  is  now  locat- 
ed at  nearby  Hildebran.  C.  S.  Grove  located  in  Hick- 
ory from  Maryland  and  started  the  second  hosiery 
mill.  Elliott  Knitting  Mill  was  organized  in  1910 
by  Eubert  Lyerly  and  started  operation  with  a  few 
machines  in  unused  space  in  an  ice  and  coal  building. 

Hickory's  hosiery  industry  has  developed  almost 
entirely  within  the  past  25  years.  In  1925  only  four 
plants  were  in  operation.  Today  the  approximately 
55  hosiery  plants  in  that  city  have  a  capacity  for 
producing  an  estimated  150,000,000  pairs  of  hose  in 
a  year.  In  the  seamless  hose  field  Hickory  ranks 
among  the  leading  centers  in  the  country  and  full 
fashioned  hosiery  is  now  produced  in  large  quanti- 
ties. Hosiery  mills  now  employ  as  many  workers  as 
are  employed  in  other  textiles  and  furniture  com- 
bined. Approximately  4,000  workers,  Max  R.  Steel- 
man,  executive  secretary  of  the  Hickory  Chamber  of 
Commerce,  estimates  are  engaged  in  hosiery  manu- 
facturing, as  compared  with  about  2,000  in  other 
textiles  and  about  2,000  in  furniture  manufacturing. 
Probably  more  than  $16,000,000  is  distributed  an- 
nually among  the  workers  in  Hickory's  hosiery  mills. 

Catawba  County,  which  is  almost  in  exact  tie  for 


PAGE  26 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


third  place  in  the  State  with  Randolph  County  in  the 
number  of  workers  employed  in  the  hosiery  industry, 
is  noted  for  the  numerous  small  hosiery  plants,  most 
of  them  in  Hickory,  but  with  others  in  Newton, 
Claremont,  Conover,  Catawba  and  Maiden. 

Catawba  County,  Employment  Security  Commis- 
sion records  show,  contains  75  plants  engaged  in 
manufacturing  hosiery  and  other  knit  products  and 
employing  approximately  5,640  workers.  Of  these 
plants  68,  employing  about  4,100  workers,  are  en- 
gaged in  manufacturing  seamless  hosiery  while  three 
plants  employing  about  150  workers,  manufacture 


full  fashioned  hosiery.  In  addition  four  plants,  em 
ploying  nearly  1,400  workers,  are  engaged  in  mat 
ing  other  knit  products. 

Hickory  has  55  hosiery  plants  employing  3,30' 
workers.  Newton  has  11  hosiery  plants  with  em 
ployment  of  about  700  in  addition  to  two  large  plant 
producing  other  knit  products.  Catawba  has  twi 
small  hosiery  plants,  Conover  has  one,  and  one  i 
located  at  Maiden,  a  branch  plant  of  Whisnant  Hos 
iery  Mills  at  Hickory.  Claremont  has  three  smal 
plants  and  another  small  one  is  located  near  Vak 
inside  the  Catawba  County  line. 


Elliott  and  Lyerly  Large  Men's,  Women's  Hosiery  Makers 


Elliott  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  Hickory,  was  started 
in  1910  by  Eubert  Lyerly  and  associates  in  Hickory, 
the  most  important  of  whom  was  J.  D.  Elliott,  a 
prominent  and  substantial  citizen  of  Hickory.  For 
many  years  he  served  as  president  of  the  company 
soon  after  it  was  started.  Lyerly  Full  Fashioned 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  was  also  started  by  Eubert  Lyerly 
and  others  in  1928.  The  two  organizations  with 
branch  plants  have  developed  into  an  important  and 
leading  industry  in  Hickory. 

Elliott  Knitting  Mills  began  operation  in  an  old 
roller  mill  building  with  a  few  machines  and  a  few 
employees.  In  1916  Eubert,  Walker  and  George 
Lyerly,  brothers,  bought  out  the  interests  of  J.  D. 
Elliott,  president,  and  other  stockholders  and  reor- 
ganized the  company.  George  Lyerly  was  named 
president ;  Walker  Lyerly  vice-president,  and  Eubert 
Lyerly  continued  as  secretary-treasurer  and  general 
manager  until  1938.  At  that  time  his  brother, 
George  Lyerly,  became  secretary-treasurer  and  Mrs. 
J.  B.  Lyerly,  widow  of  Eubert  Lyerly,  was  elected 
president  and  continues  to  hold  that  position.  George 
L.  Lyerly  continued  as  secretary-treasurer  as  well  as 
general  manager  of  the  industry  until  a  few  years 
before  his  death  on  November  20,  1952.  During  the 
past  three  or  four  years  John  L.   Lyerly,   son  of 


Walker  Lyerly,  has  served  as  general  manager  o 
the  corporation. 

Present  officers  of  Elliott  are  Mrs.  J.  B.  Lyerlyj 
president;  C.  L.  Morgan,  secretary,  and  George  L 
Lyerly,  Jr.,  treasurer. 

Elliott  Knitting  Mills  in  1923  built  a  branch  plan 
at  Catawba  about  eight  miles  away  and  operated  i 
in  the  manufacture  of  men's  hosiery  until  it  was 
closed  down  last  year.  This  plant  employed  abou 
300  workers  and  was  considered  one  of  the  mos 
complete  men's  hosiery  plants  in  the  entire  South 
This  property  was  bought  by  John  L.  Lyerly  in  Feb 
ruary,  1953.  In  1947  the  company  started  a  looping 
plant  at  Cleveland,  Iredell  County.  This  plant,  em 
ploying  about  35  workers,  is  engaged  in  looping 
(sewing  up  the  toe)  of  hosiery  produced  by  tht 
Elliott  Knitting  Mills. 

Elliott  Knitting  Mills  operates  500  circular  knit 
ting  machines  in  production  of  men's  and  women's 
plain  and  fancy  seamless  hosiery,  fine  grade  men's 
hosiery,  largely  of  Nylon,  but  some  with  mercerizec 
cotton  and  Rayon.  Sales  are  made  through  Lyerlj 
Sales,  Inc.,  with  offices  in  the  Empire  State  Building 
and  at  Chicago  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores,  both  un 
der  the  Elliott  brands,  including  such  nationally  ad 
vertised  brands  as  "Elliott",  "Servewell"  and  "Shur 


Air  view  of  'plants  of  Elliott  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  right,  and  Lyerly  Full  Fashioned  Mills,  Inc.,  on  left,  Hickory. 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  17 


fit",  as  well  as  under  the  customers'  own  brands. 
George  Bogal  is  manager  of  the  New  York  office, 
Harry  W.  Finnell  is  manager  of  the  Chicago  office 
and  C.  L.  Morgan  has  charge  of  sales  from  the  Hick- 
ory office. 

LYERLY  FULL  FASHIONED  MILLS 

Lyerly  Full  Fashioned  Mills,  Inc.,  Hickory,  a  sepa- 
rate corporation  but  closely  allied  with  Elliott  Knit- 
ting Mills,  was  started  in  1928  by  Eubert  Lyerly, 
George  Lyerly  and  R.  L.  Bothwell.  The  company 
built  a  large  modern  plant,  containing  20,300  square 
feet  of  floor  space.  In  1935-36  an  addition  was  built, 
doubling  the  space  to  41,600  square  feet. 

Lyerly  produces  high  grade  Rayon,  Lisle,  Nylon 
and  Silk  hosiery  on  46  full  fashioned  machines,  45 
and  51  gauge.  It  employs  around  175  workers  and 
has  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $325,000. 
Sales  are  handled  through  the  Lyerly  Sales,  Inc., 
and  are  handled  by  the  same  officials  as  those  han- 
dling Elliott  Knitting  Mills'  sales. 

George  L.  Lyerly  was  secretary-treasurer  and  gen- 
eral manager  of  the  corporation  from  the  time  it  was 
formed  until  1947,  five  years  before  his  death  last 
fall.  Since  that  time  his  son,  George  L.  Lyerly,  Jr., 
upon  his  return  from  service  in  World  War  II,  has 
served  as  general  manager  of  the  industry.  Mrs. 
J.  B.  Lyerly,  widow  of  Eubert  Lyerly,  was  elected 
president,  following  the  death  of  her  husband  in 
1938. 

Present  officers  of  Lyerly  are  Mrs.  J.  B.  Lyerly, 
president;  C.  L.  Morgan,  secretary,  and  George  L. 
Lyerly,  Jr.,  treasurer. 

The  Lyerly  brothers,  Eubert,  Walker  and  George, 
were  all  prominent  and  important  citizens  of  Hick- 
ory, taking  active  interest  in  all  civic,  educational, 
church  and  other  affairs.  All  three  served  as  mayor 
of  the  City  of  Hickory.  Walker  Lyerly,  Sr.,  operated 
the  Hy-Lan  Furniture  Co.  for  many  years  until  his 
death  in  1947  and  Mrs.  Lyerly  has  since  been  presi- 
dent of  this  firm. 

Lyerly -Morgan  Co.,  an  affiliated  organization,  ope- 
rates 32  full  fashioned  54  gauge  machines,  manufac- 
turing, dyeing  and  finishing  women's  hosiery.  Prod- 
ucts are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  department 
stores  and  retailers.  George  L.  Lyerly,  Jr.,  is  presi- 
dent and  C.  L.  Morgan,  secretary-treasurer. 

John  L.  Lyerly  &  Sons,  Inc.,  Catawba,  was  organiz- 
ed and  chartered  in  February,  1953,  with  an  author- 
ized capital  of  $200,000  for  the  purpose  of  operating 
a  hosiery  mill  and  performing  other  usual  activities 
of  such  corporations,  the  Secretary  of  State's  Office 
announced.  Announcement  was  made  that  John  L. 
Lyerly,  general  manager  of  Elliott  Knitting  Mills, 
Inc.,  Hickory,  had  resigned  and  purchased  the  Ca- 
tawba plant  of  the  Elliott  firm  to  develop  a  new  knit- 
ting mill.  Since  1939  this  Catawba  plant  had  pro- 
duced men's  undyed  half  hose  and  anklets.  Mr. 
Lyerly  announced  that  he  would  dispose  of  much  of 
the  machinery  and  install  new  equipment  to  manu- 
facture finished  hose. 

Among  the  other  large  hosiery  mills  in  Hickory,  listed 
alphabetically,  are  those  shown  below: 

BROWN  BROS.  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Brown  Bros.  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  200  circular  knit- 


WHISNANT  HOSIERY  MILLS 

Whisnant  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Hickory,  did  not  re- 
turn corrected  and  approved  copy  of  an  article  pre- 
pared on  this  firm  after  the  Editor  had  visited  the 
plant  and  secured  information  for  the  article  from 
proper  officials.  After  copy  of  the  article  was  sent 
to  Ernest  E.  Whisnant,  president  and  manager,  and 
another  letter  written  to  him  requesting  the  return 
of  an  approved  copy,  Mr.  Whisnant  responded  that 
he  had  not  received  copy.  Another  copy  was  sent 
but  was  not  returned  in  time  for  use  in  this  issue. 

Without  approved  copy  it  was  felt  that  only  such 
information  as  had  been  given  out  officially  on  the 
firm  should  be  used.  This  was  found  in  the  1952 
issue  of  "Buyers'  Guide  to  Southern  Hosiery  and 
Knitwear  Manufacturers",  issued  by  Clark  Publish- 
ing Co.,  Charlotte.     This  information  follows: 

Whisnant  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  stock 
of  $600,000,  with  a  branch  mill  at  Maiden,  operates 
612  circular  knitting  machines  manufacturing,  dye- 
ing and  finishing  men's  fine  half  hose  and  slacks, 
Komets  and  wraps.  Selling  agency  is  Hanes  Hos- 
iery, Inc.,  2401  Empire  State  Building,  New  York 
City,  and  products  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores 
and  department  stores.  Ernest  E.  Whisnant  is  pres- 
ident and  manager;  Harry  J.  Williams,  vice-presi- 
dent ;  Mary  Edith  Councill,  secretary,  and  Mrs.  Lou- 
ella  Whisnant,  treasurer. 


ting  machines  in  the  production  of  men's  half  hose,  mercerized, 
single  and  double  sole,  cotton  and  rayon  fancies,  cotton  and 
acetate  fancies,  combination  goods  with  stems,  arrow  clocks, 
goods  with  mock  wraps,  cotton  numbers  and  mercerized  goods 
with  rayon  and  celanese.  Principal  brands  are  "BB",  "Jay 
Walk"  and  "Verified".  The  New  York  office  is  located  at  4003 
Empire  State  Building  with  George  W.  Wagner  as  manager. 
Sales  offices  are  also  located  in  Indianapolis  and  San  Fran- 
cisco. Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  Z.  W. 
Brown  is  president  and  superintendent. 

ELLIS  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Ellis  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $363,500,  operates  250 
circular  knitting  machines  producing  men's  half  hose,  wraps 
and  komets.  Goods  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  The 
New  York  office  is  at  2825  Empire  State  Building  with  Howard 
L.  Broer  as  manager.  Ellis  Mills  is  president  and  treasurer 
and  Ella  Lee  Shuford  is  assistant  secretary  and  assistant 
treasurer. 

HAFER  HOSIERY  MILLS 

Hafer  Hosiery  Mills,  individually  owned,  operates   200  cir- 
cular knitting  machines  making  men's  half  hose  and  slacks 
which  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores. 
R.  G.  Hafer  is  proprietor  and  Henry  Beam  is  superintendent. 
HOLLAR  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Hollar  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $200,000,  operates 
134  circular  knit  machines  in  the  production  of  seamless  hos- 
iery. Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through 
Iselin-Jefferson  Co.,  3003  Empire  State  Building,  New  York 
City.  Mrs.  O.  L.  Hollar  is  president;  W.  L.  Hollar,  treasurer, 
and  Zack  Hollar,  secretary. 

KNIT-SOX  KNITTING  MILLS,  INC. 

Knit-Sox  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  203  circular  knitting 
machines  in  manufacturing  misses'  and  children's  anklets. 
Sales  are  made  through  Knit-Sox  Sales  Co.,  1212  Empire  State 
Building,  New  York  City„  Alex  Seefried,  manager.  Products 
are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores.  Louis 
Lavitt  is  president,  Sam  Lavitt,  secretary  and  treasurer,  Foy 
Hefner,  superintendent  of  knitting,  and  F.  W.  Stedman,  super- 
intendent of  finishing. 

PIEDMONT  HOSIERY  MILLS 

Piedmont  Hosiery  Mills,  capitalized  at  $100,000,  operates  131 
circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  half  hose  which  are 
finished  at  Newton  Knitting  Mills,  Newton.    Products  are  sold 


PAGE  28 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Iselin-Jefferson  Co.,  3003 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City.  F.  K.  Stevens  is  presi- 
dent and  treasurer  and  G.  H.  Standard,  superintendent. 
SHXTFORD  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 
Shut'ord  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $100,000,  operates 
222  circular  knitting  machines  in  manufacturing  men's  half 
hose  in  plain  and  embroidered  clocks,  Banner  split  foot  and 
special  fancies  in  rayon  combination,  mercerized.  Sales  agency 
is  Murphy,  Brill  &  Shammer,  358  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City, 
and  products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  department  stores.    Wert 

B.  Rhyne  of  Cherryville  is  president,  E.  P.  Rhyne,  vice-presi- 
dent and  treasurer,  Mildred  Rhyne,  secretary,  and  A.  E.  Lutz, 
superintendent. 

WALTON   KNITTING   MILLS,   INC. 

Walton  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  123  circular  knit  ma- 
chines making  men's  split  foot  half  hose,  anklets  in  mercerized 
rayon  and  nylon  and  men's  rib  goods.  Principal  brands  are 
"Hi-Tone"  and  "Townsman".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and 
chain  stores.  E.  W.  Walton  is  president  and  treasurer  and 
E.  W.  Walton,  Jr.,  secretary. 

WHITING  HOSIERY  MILLS,  INC. 

Whiting  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $75,000,  operates 
154  circular  knit  machines  in  manufacturing  work  socks.  Prod- 
ucts are  sold  in  grey  to  J.  A.  Cline  &  Son,  Hildebran.  Carl  V. 
Cline,  Jr.,  is  president  and  A.  W.  Shuford,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer. 

Other  Hickory  hosiery  mills  follow: 

Seamless — Bedington  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  wrap  socks  and 
boys'  anklets;  Belk  Hosiery  Mill,  half  hose  and  slacks;  Brooks 
Hosiery  Mill,  misses'  hand  transferred  anklets  and  crew  socks; 

C.  &  D.  Hosiery  Mill;  Cape  Hickory  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  half 
hose;  Crest  Hosiery  Mill;  Duke  Hosiery  Corp.,  men's  hose  and 
rubber  top  slacks;  Early  Bird  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  anklets  and 
half  hose,  misses'  and  children's  anklets;  Eighth  Street  Knit- 
ting Mill;  Ford  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  genuine 
wraps,  sport  hose  and  fancy  and  staple  hosiery;  G.  &  H.  Hosiery 
Co.,  Inc.,  men's  acetate  and  rayon  plaited  and  cotton  plaited, 
lisle  and  plain  cotton  half  hose,  anklets  and  men's  seamless 
hose  and  long  and  short  wraps; 

Gilbert  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  half  hose;  Roy  L.  Good  Hosiery 
Mill,  men's  and  boys'  ingrain  sport  socks;  Hughes  Affiliated 
Mills;  James  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  plain  longs,  men's 
anklets  and  reverse  plaits;  Johnson  Hosiery  Mill,  rayon  and 
vat  dyed  wraps;  Ken  worth  Hosiery  Mills,  boys'  and  men's  half 
hose  and  genuine  wrap  anklets;  Boyd  Lee  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
men's  and  boys'  anklets,  men's  and  misses'  crew  socks,  men's 
argyle  wraps  and  boys'  blazer  and  reverse  plait;  Line-Made 
Hosiery  Mills,  children's  and  misses'  anklets:  Longview  Hos- 
iery Mill,  rayon  wrap  anklets:  Lutz  Hosiery  Co.,  misses'  and 
men's  anklets;  Marlowe  Hosiery  Mills.  Inc.,  men's  mercerized 
and  combed  cotton  half  hose  and  anklets;  McKinney  Hosiery 
Mills,  infants'  hose;  Meadowbrook  Hosiery  Mills,  argyle  anklets 
and  long  wraps; 

Menzies  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  argyle  anklets;  Midway  Hosiery 
Mills,  Inc.,  Banner  wraps  and  boys'  slacks;  C.  D.  Newton  Hos- 
iery Mill,   men's  slacks;    Red   Hill   Hosiery   Mill,   Inc.;    Ruby 


Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.,  men's  and  children's  hosiery;  Setz-Right 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  heavy  mercerized  rib  sport  anklets  in 
color  anklets  and  half  hose  wraps,  PW  and  spiral  fancies; 
Simmons  Hosiery  Mill;  Southern  Hosiery  Mills,  half  hose; 
Sterling  Knitters,  Inc.,  70  gauge  infants'  and  children's  picot 
top  anklets;  Stirewalt  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  half  hose  and  wrap 
anklets;  Teague  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  half  hose;  Test 
Hosiery  Mills,  men's  ingrain  wrap  anklets;  Viewmont  Hosiery 
Mills,  men's  and  boys'  anklets  and  slacks;  Mrs.  K.  T.  Williams; 
Windy  City  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  half  hose,  men's  and  misses' 
anklets. 

NEWTON 

Among  the  larger  Newton  plants  are  the  following: 
BOTHWELL  MILLS,  INC. 

Bothwell  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  $200,000,  operates  150 
circular  knit  machines  manufacturing  men's  fancy  half  hose. 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department 
stores.  R.  L.  Bothwell  is  president  and  treasurer  and  R.  J. 
Parker,  Jr.,  is  secretary  and  assistant  treasurer. 

NEWTON  KNITTING  MILLS,  INC. 

Newton  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  $275,000,  operates 
155  circular  knit  machines  producing  cotton  anklets  and  longs. 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department 
stores.  P.  W.  Herman  is  trustee  and  Mack  J.  King,  Jr.,  man- 
ager. 

RIDGEVIEW  HOSIERY  MILLS  CO. 

Ridgeview  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  with  capital  of  $308,400,  ope- 
rates 201  circular  knit  machines  in  manufacturing  ladies'  seam- 
less hosiery.  This  firm  also  operates  22  full  fashioned  ma- 
chines producing  ladies'  hosiery.  Products  are  sold  to  job- 
bers and  chain  stores  through  S.  C.  Arrowwood  &  Co.,  2701 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City.  J.  R.  Gaither  is  presi- 
dent and  treasurer  and  Cowles  Gaither  is  vice-president  and 
secretary. 

NEWTON   AND   CATAWBA  MILLS 

Other  Newton  hosiery  mills  follow:  Seamless — Catawba  Val- 
ley Finishing  Co.,  misses'  and  boys'  half  hose  and  anklets, 
men's  spirals;  Cilley  Hosiery  Mills,  half  hose;  Quality  Hosiery 
Mills;  Spencer  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  anklets; 
Whenball  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  half  hose  in  celanese  and 
cotton  transfer,  rayon  Merrow  stem,  men's  fancy  celanese  and 
rayon  automatic  duplex  top,  celanese  and  rayon  and  plain  rayon 
numbers  with  or  without  Merrow  stem;  Whitener  Hosiery 
Mills,  Inc.,  men's  ingrain  anklets;  Yount  Hosiery  Mills,  men's 
fancy  half  hose  and  anklets;  Full  Fashioned — Barringer  Hos- 
iery Mills. 

Other  Catawba  County  hosiery  mills  follow:  Seamless — 
Conover  Knitting  Co.,  Conover,  Banner  wrap  and  reverse  solid 
color  patterns  and  links  and  links;  C.  D.  Jessup  &  Co.,  Clare- 
mont;  Little  Hosiery  Mills,  Claremont,  men's  half  hose  and 
misses'  anklets;  Wear  Rite  Hosiery  Co.,  Inc.,  Claremont; 
Catawba  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Catawba,  infants',  children's, 
misses'  and  boys'  anklets;  Robinson  Hosiery  Mill,  Catawba, 
men's  half  hose  and  anklets;  Cookville  Hosiery  Mill,  Vale, 
men's  half  hose,  men's  and  misses'  anklets. 


Acme-McCrary  Leading  Firm  in  State's  Hosiery  Industry 


Acme  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  its  younger  but 
equally  vigorous  brother,  McCrary  Hosiery  Mills, 
Inc.,  both  located  in  the  industrial  city  of  Asheboro 
and  near  the  geographical  center  of  the  State,  start- 
ed in  a  very  modest  way  43  years  ago,  has  developed 
into  one  of  the  very  successful  hosiery  mill  groups  in 
North  Carolina.  Acme,  producing  seamless  hosiery, 
and  McCrary,  manufacturing  fine  gauge  full  fash- 
ioned hosiery,  have  developed  the  industry  to  the 
extent  that  annual  net  sales  exceed  $7,500,000,  dem- 
onstrating that  ability,  industry  and  integrity  are 
basic  qualities  for  success  in  this  nation  of  free  en- 
terprise. 

In  1909  D.  B.  McCrary  and  T.  H.  Redding,  his 
partner  since  1897  in  a  hardware  and  farm  machin- 
ery store,  purchased  a  small  struggling  hosiery  plant 
in  Asheboro.     This  plant  was  a  two-story  building 


60  x  100  feet  with  a  one-story  dye  house  40  feet 
square.  Starting  in  mid-July  that  year  with  80 
Mayo  machines  and  a  plant  lighted  by  carbon  fila- 
ment lamps,  Acme  operated  11  hours  a  day  in  pro- 
ducing seamless  cotton  stockings,  dyed  in  kettle  dye 
machine.  Only  two  colors,  black  and  cordovan,  were 
available. 

In  1915  a  two-story  addition,  100  x  60  feet,  was 
built  south  of  the  original  Acme  plant.  Even  before 
this  addition  was  completed,  plans  were  underway 
for  a  second  identical  addition.  By  1917  this  second 
addition  had  been  equipped  and  was  in  operation. 
Production  then  went  to  3,500  dozen  pairs  of  hosiery 
daily. 

Meanwhile  in  1916  Acme  officers  purchased  Sa- 
pona  Cotton  Mills  at  Cedar  Falls,  five  miles  away,  to 
supply  yarns  for  the  hosiery  produced.     With  the 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  29 


approach  of  World  War  I  and  since  fast  dyes  were 
available  from  Germany  only,  D.  B.  McCrary,  with 
characteristic  forethought,  purchased  a  solid  carload 
of  dyestuff  which  lasted  until  American  dyestuffs 
ivvere  perfected.  After  World  War  I  a  large  new 
building  was  added  for  increased  production  of  cot- 
ton yarns,  and  later  the  weaving  plant  was  converted 
into  a  throwing  plant — the  first  completely  "large 
package"  silk  throwing  mill  in  the  nation. 

Meanwhile,  on  the  eve  of  Acme's  expansion,  in 
(1918,  Mr.  McCrary's  partner,  T.  H.  Redding,  died. 
Later  his  son,  T.  Henry  Redding,  took  over  and  be- 
came an  official  in  Acme. 

Rayon,  which  became  available  in  1920,  was  adopt- 
ed as  a  material  by  Mr.  McCrary.  The  first  rayon 
products  were  "boot"  stockings  with  cotton  feet  and 
tops,  giving  a  dressy  appearance  with  the  "new 
look"  skirts  of  that  period.  In  1924  during  the  post- 
war depression  Acme  built  a  new  three-story  addi- 
tion and  started  making  silk  stockings  on  260-  and 
300-needle  circular  machines.  By  1928  Charles  W. 
McCrary,  son  of  the  founder  and  a  Davidson  College 
graduate,  envisioned  the  bright  future  of  full  fash- 
ioned production  in  the  south  and  started  operations 
in  a  new  building  erected  adjacent  to  Acme.  In  this 
building  thirty  42-gauge  full  fashioned  knitting  ma- 
chines were  producing  silk  stockings.  The  firm  was 
showing  rapid  growth  during  that  period.  Also  in 
1928  J.  Frank  McCrary,  younger  son  and  also  a 
Davidson  graduate,  joined  the  firm. 

Despite  the  depression  in  1932  the  nearby  Parks 
Hosiery  Mill  was  acquired  to  increase  the  produc- 
tion of  full  fashioned  hosiery. 

Previous  sales  of  products  had  been  made  from 
the  McCrary  and  Acme  offices  but  in  1932  Mr.  Mc- 
Crary established  a  New  York  sales  office  with  W. 
Howard  Redding,  a  Carolina  graduate,  as  salesman. 
Today  he  is  president  of  the  Acme-McCrary  Sales 
Corp.,  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City. 

The  Ramseur  Hosiery  Mill,  located  at  Ramseur,  10 


ASHEBORO,  RANDOLPH  CO.  DEVELOPED 

INTO  LSASLRS  m  HOSSERY  INDUSTRY 

Asheboro  arid  Randolph  County  are  forging  ahead  in 
hosiery  manufacturing  to  the  extent  that  Randolph  County 
is  just  about  tied  with  Catawba,  based  on  the  number  of 
workers  employed  in  the  hosiery  industry.  Records  in  the 
Employment  Security  Commission  office  show  that  35  Ran- 
dolph County  plants,  employing  about  4,460  workers,  are 
engaged  in  the  knitting  industry.  Of  these  plants  17, 
employing  about  1,450  workers,  are  engaged  in  the  pro- 
duction of  seamless  hosiery  while  15  plants,  employing 
2,800  workers,  are  producing  full  fashioned  hosiery.  Three 
other  plants,  employing  more  than  200  workers,  are  en- 
gaged in  making  other  knit  products. 

Asheboro  contains  by  far  the  most  of  these  hosiery  plants. 
In  that  city  are  located  12  full  fashioned  hosiery  mills, 
employing  2,360  workers,  and  16  hosiery  mills,  employing 
about  1,460  workers.  In  addition  three  smaller  plants, 
making  other  knit  products,  employ  about  225  workers. 
This  gives  a  total  of  more  than  3,800  workers  engaged  in 
producing  hosiery.  Randleman,  out  in  the  county,  is  the 
home  of  a  large  full  fashioned  plant  operated  by  Burling- 
ton Mills  and  another  small  seamless  plant.  Liberty  has  a 
nice  full  fashioned  plant  and  a  seamless  hosiery  plant. 
Ramseur  contains  the  Ramseur  Division  of  the  McCrary 
Hosiery  Mills  of  Asheboro.  Trinity  has  a  small  seamless 
plant  while  Sapona  Mfg.  Co.,  a  large  throwing  plant,  pro- 
ducing supplies  for  McCrary  Hosiery  Mills,  is  located  at 
Cedar  Falls. 


miles  away,  was  organized  in  1938.  Full  fashioned 
hosiery  in  51  and  60-gauge  is  produced  in  this  plant. 
In  1948  it  was  merged  with  McCrary  and  has  since 
been  designated  as  the  Ramseur  Division. 

When  nylon  became  available,  Mr.  McCrary  and 
his  sons  were  convinced  that  it  was  the  fiber  for  the 
finer  hosiery  of  the  future.  McCrary  was  one  of  the 
32  original  plants  in  the  United  States  which  were 
placed  on  the  allocation  list  by  du  Pont,  the  producer. 
War  exigencies  halted  plans  then,  but  since  the  war 
a  large  number  of  51-  and  60-gauge  machines  have 
been  installed  in  the  McCrary  mill.  Fine  gauge 
seamless  equipment  was  installed  in  the  Acme  mill. 

McCrary  "Seam-Reminder"  is  a  brand  of  full  fash- 
ioned hosiery  sold  to  department  stores.  This  brand 
features   an   arrow  knitted   into  the   shadow  welt 


Composite  picture  of  Acme-McCrary  group  of  mills  at  Asheboro,  with  Sapona  Plant  at  Cedar  Falls  shown  at  top  left  and  the 

Acme-McCrary  Recreational  Building,  at  lower  left. 


PAGE  30 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


directly  opposite  the  seam  as  a  guide  to  keep  the  seam 
straights  *  McCrary  cooperates  with  retailers  in  ad- 
vertising and  promotion  of  "this  brand.  Acme  un- 
branded  seamless  hosiery  is  sold  to  chain  and  mail 
order  houses  and  to  wholesalers  under  the  customer's 
packing. 

D.  B.  McCrary,  founder,  was  active  throughout  his 
life  in  church,  civic,  local  and  State  affairs.  He  was 
twice  mayor  of  Asheboro  and  twice  chairman  of  the 
North  Carolina  Highway  and  Public  Works  Commis- 
sion. His  hobby  was  the  Randolph  Hospital  and  he 
was  chairman  of  the  hospital  corporation  from  its 
start.  He  spent  much  time  in  managing  this  hospital 
and  in  recognition  of  his  splendid  service  a  memorial, 
known  as  the  D.  B.  McCrary  Memorial  Addition,  has 
been  erected. 

W.  J.  Armfield,  Jr.,  president  of  the  Bank  of  Ran- 
dolph, was  associated  with  Mr.  McCrary  in  various 
enterprises  and  was  connected  with  Acme-McCrary 
from  the  beginning  as  officer  and  director.  Kemp 
Alexander,  long  an  officer  and  for  nearly  40  years 
superintendent  of  Acme,  retired  in  1948.  He  is  still 
represented  by  his  son,  John  Alexander,  who  is  in 
charge  of  quality  control  of  the  seamless  operations. 

Both  of  Mr.  McCrary's  sons  have  continued  their 
father's  interest  not  only  in  the  hosiery  organization 
but  in  local  and  civic  activities.  Charles  W.  and 
J.  Frank  McCrary  are  both  Methodist  stewards,  are 
both  past  presidents  of  the  Asheboro  Rotary  Club 
and  are  directors  of  the  Bank  of  Randolph.  C.  W. 
McCrary  succeeded  his  father  as  president  of  Ran- 
dolph Hospital,  Inc.,  and  is  chairman  of  the  Asheboro 
City  School  Board.  He  supervised  the  erection  of  the 
modern  high  school  building  on  a  14-acre  tract  do- 
nated by  Acme  and  McCrary.  He  is  also  president 
of  the  North  Carolina  School  Board  Association.  J. 
F.  McCrary  has  been  a  member  of  the  City  Council 
for  eight  years  and  mayor  of  the  City  of  Asheboro 
for  nearly  four  years.  He  is  active  in  Boy  Scout 
work  and  formerly  was  president  of  the  General 
Greene  Council  embracing  the  counties  of  Randolph 
and  Guilford.  He  is  also  vice  chairman  of  the  Na- 
tional Association  of  Hosiery  Manufacturers. 

The  Acme-McCrary  group  of  mills  are  embraced 
in  three  corporations,  McCrary  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
Acme  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  and  Sapona  Manufactur- 
ing Co.,  Inc.,  in  addition  to  the  Acme-McCrary  Sales 
Corp.  in  New  York.  C.  W.  McCrary  is  president  of 
McCrary,  secretary  of  Acme  and  secretary  of  Sapona. 
J.  F.  McCrary  is  president  of  Sapona,  treasurer  of 
Acme  and  treasurer  of  McCrary.  W.  H.  Redding  is 
president  of  Acme-McCrary  Sales  Corp.  and  vice- 
president  of  McCrary.  T.  Henry  Redding  is  secre- 
tary of  McCrary  and  vice-president  of  Acme  and 
Sapona.  Kemp  Alexander  is  vice-president  of  Acme. 
The  board  of  directors  includes  C.  W.  McCrary,  J.  F. 
McCrary,  W.  H.  Redding,  T.  H.  Redding,  Kemp  Alex- 
ander, W.  J.  Armfield,  Jr.,  I.  F.  Craven  and  W.  A. 
Underwood,  Jr. 

Acme  and  McCrary  have  enjoyed  splendid  em- 
ployer-employee relations  from  the  beginning.     In 


fact,  employees  and  management  grew  up  together, 
attended  school  together  and  have  always  maintained 
friendly  relations.  Mr.  McCrary's  aim  throughout 
his  industrial  career  was  toward  more  and  better 
stockings  made  by  good  citizens  in  a  good  commun- 
ity. His  sons  are  continuing  that  policy  successfully. 
In  the  plants  are  22  employees  who  have  served  for 
30  years  or  more,  86  who  have  served  for  20  years, 
and  133  who  have  service  records  of  15  years. 

From  the  beginning  the  organization  has  sought 
to  provide  steady  employment  at  good  wages  and 
under  working  conditions  which  are  not  surpassed 
in  the  industry.  For  many  years  McCrary  and  Acme 
employees  have  been  covered  by  life  and  hospitaliza- 
tion insurance  at  no  cost.  These  splendid  conditions 
have  brought  about  a  feeling  of  pride  among  the 
employees  in  being  a  part  of  an  organization  in 
which  every  member  is  respected  as  a  personality 
and  feels  that  he  is  a  vital  part  of  the  organization. 

As  a  keystone  in  cementing  their  industrial  rela- 
tions program  Acme  and  McCrary  completed  about 
three  years  ago  a  new  half-million  dollar  recreational 
building  just  across  the  street  from  the  mill  offices. 
This  building  includes  a  large  gymnasium  seating 
more  than  1200  people,  a  modern  cafeteria,  a  large 
swimming  pool,  four  bowling  alleys,  a  soda  shop, 
dressing  rooms,  reading  rooms  and  a  stage.  These 
facilities  are  available  for  employees  from  all  of  the 
mills  and  their  families.  This  recreation  center  is 
the  home  of  the  famous  McCrary  "Eagles"  athletic 
teams  which  have  won  State  and  national  recognition 
in  semi-pro  baseball  and  basketball  circles  for  almost 
25  years.  The  baseball  team  has  won  the  State 
Semi-pro  Championship  and  has  been  runner-up  in 
these  contests  for  several  years  and  has  placed  high 
in  the  National  Semi-pro  Championship  games.  The 
basketball  team  has  played  in  the  Carolina  Textile 
League  and  has  won  and  been  runner-up  several 
times  in  the  Southern  Basketball  Tournament.  A 
schedule  of  30  games  is  played  each  year  including 
contests  with  leading  college  teams  in  North  Caro- 
lina. 

Other  larger  Asheboro  hosiery  mills: 

Asheboro  Hosiery  Mills 

Asheboro  Hosiery  Mills,  capitalized  at  $63,000,  operates  150 
circular  knit  machines,  producing  ladies'  rayon  and  cotton 
anklets.  In  addition,  this  firm  operates  50  full  fashioned  hos- 
iery machines  producing  the  Cranford  brand  of  ladies'  hosiery. 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores,  the  New  York 
selling  agency  being  J.  P.  Doyle  Co.,  Inc.,  2704  Empire  State 
Building,  New  York  City.  C.  C.  Cranford  is  president  and  S. 
D.  Cranford,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Bossong  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Bossong  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  $250,000,  ope- 
rates 60  full  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery 
under  brands  of  "Patricia",  "Argus"  and  "Merrie  Maid".  Prod- 
ucts are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  J.  C.  Bossong 
&  Co.,  271  Church  Street,  New  York  City.  Charles  G.  Bossong, 
New  York  City,  is  president  and  L.  Cook  is  secretary  and 
treasurer. 

Tip-Top  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Tip-Top  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  167  circular  knit  ma- 
chines, producing  Genuine  wrap,  English  ribs,  argyles  and 
cushion  soles.  Principal  brands  are  "Tip-Top",  "Lucky  Buy" 
and  "Arthur  Ross".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores  through  J.  B.  Whitlock  &  Co.,  Empire  State  Building, 
New  York  City.  Arthur  Ross,  Jr.,  is  president,  G.  Edgar  Miller, 
secretary,  and  James  I.  Crisman,  treasurer. 


/inter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  31 


RANDLEMAN 

Commonwealth  Hosiery  Mills 

Commonwealth  Hosiery  Mills,  capitalized  at  $250,000  ( in- 
uding  branch  mill  at  Ellerbe),  operates  820  circular  knit  ma- 
rines producing  misses'  and  ladies'  seamless  hose  in  combed 
ercerized,  nylon  and  rayon.  Principal  brands  are  "Common- 
ealth",  "Randale"  and  "Green  Seal".  Products  are  sold  to 
hbers  and  chain  stores  through  the  firm's  New  York  office, 
)5  Empire  State  Building,  Jack  Bryne,  manager.  Mrs.  E.  W. 
reeze,  High  Point,  is  president  and  E.  W.  Freeze,  Jr.,  is  secre- 
cy and  treasurer. 

Laughlin  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Laughlin  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  30 
ill  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery.  Products 
•e  sold  to  jobbers,  department  stores  and  retailers  through 
iberty  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  J.  M.  Millikin,  manager,  350  Fifth 
venue,  New  York  City.  T.  L.  Laughlin  is  president  and  treas- 
rer  and  C.  C.  Redding  is  secretary. 

LIBERTY 
Liberty  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Liberty  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  46  full  fashioned  ma- 
rines producing  ladies'  hosiery  which  is  dyed  and  finished  at 
ibsonville.  Brands  are  "Veil  of  Beauty",  "Fairlane"  and 
/illane".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  depart- 
ent  stores  and  retailers  through  the  firm's  New  York  office 
;  2710  Empire  State  Building,  J.  M.  Wilkin,  manager.  J. 
arold  Smith  is  president  and  treasurer. 

Dependable  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Dependable  Hosiery  Mills,   Inc.,  capitalized  at  $35,000   ope- 


rates 205  circular  knit  machines  producing  ladies'  and  misses' 
seamless  hose  in  mercerized  cotton  and  rayon  construction, 
misses'  anklets  in  rayon  and  cotton  constructions  and  ladies' 
nylon  hose.  Principal  brands  are  "Dependable"  and  "Lady 
Wallis".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through 
Century  Hosiery  Co.,  93  Worth  St.,  New  York  City,  J.  M.  Lynch 
&  Bros.,  110  S.  7th  St.,  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  Edgar  C.  Robbins 
Co.,  Chemical  Bldg.,  St.  Louis,  Mo.  Thomas  A.  Johnson  is 
president  and  T.  Phil  Johnson,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Other  Randolph  County  Finns 

Full  Fashioned — Asheboro:  Brown-York  Hosiery  Mill;  Bunt- 
ing Full  Fashioned  Hosiery,  Inc.;  Charmeuse  Hosiery  Indus- 
tries, Inc.;  Richard  Grey  Hosiery  Co.;  Hammond-Cagle  Hos- 
iery Co.;  Hinshaw  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Vuncannon  Hosiery 
Mills,  Inc.;  Liberty:  Allsheer  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Randleman: 
Buriington  Mills  Corp.  (Randleman  Hosiery  Plant)  (branch 
of  Greensboro)  ;  McCrary  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.  (branch  of  Ashe- 
boro), Ramseur. 

Seamless — Asheboro:  Auman  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  infants' 
anklets;  Burlington  Mills  Corp  (McLaurin  Hosiery  Plant) 
(branch  of  Greensboro);  Burke  Hosiery  Mill;  Fairground 
Hosiery  Mill,  children's  and  ladies'  anklets;  Handcraft  Hosiery 
Co.,  men's  argyles;  Kennedy  Hosiery'  Mill,  misses'  anklets; 
Augusta  H.  Luck  Hosiery  Mill,  misses'  and  children's  anklets; 
Martha  Mills,  Inc.,  infants',  children's  and  misses'  hand  trans- 
ferred anklets  and  half  socks;  Wilshire  Hosiery  Mills,  ladies' 
nylon  stockings;  Randleman:  Wee-Sox  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  in- 
fants' anklets;  Staley  Hosiery  Mill  Co.,  children's  cotton  hose, 
anklets,  5/8  length  hose  and  crew  socks,  Staley;  Trinity  Hos- 
iery Co.,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  slacks,  Trinity. 


iValdensian,  Pilot  and  Valdese  Develop  Successful  Plants 


Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Valdese,  with  its 
ffsprings  and  closely  related  industries,  Pilot  Full 
'ashion  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  and  Valdese  Manufac- 
iring  Co.,  may  well  be  termed  a  Horatio  Alger  of 
ldustry.  These  industries,  starting  in  a  small  tin- 
Dvered  plant  by  a  sturdy  and  frugal  group  of  Wal- 
ensians  with  aid  from  friends  and  well-wishers, 
ow  bring  in  millions  of  dollars  annually  to  the  de- 
2endants  of  three  partners  who  at  the  start  received 
5  a  month  each  for  their  labors. 

The  Waldensians,  taking  their  name  from  Peter 
7a\do,  suffered  from  religious  persecution  in  their 
ative  Cottian  Alps  in  Northwestern  Italy.  Their 
eligion  was  closely  related  to  that  of  the  Presbyte- 
ian  Church  and  leaders  of  that  denomination  sought 
)  relieve  some  of  them  from  persecution  by  estab- 
shing  a  colony  in  the  United  States.  A  committee 
f  Waldensians  was  brought  to  this  country  by  Pres- 
yterian  leaders  and  visited  several  sites  in  the  Unit- 
d  States,  seeking  a  place  for  a  colony.  The  selection 
^as  what  is  now  the  thriving  town  of  Valdese  in 
lurke  County.  While  the  site  looked  promising  for 
arming  the  committee  did  not  realize  how  close  to 


BURKE  COUNTY,  EARLY  AND  LEADING 

MAKER  OF  FINE  HOSIERY  PRODUCTS 

Burke  County  is  one  of  the  important  hosiery  manufac- 
turing centers  in  the  State.  The  county  contains  20  hos- 
iery mills  covered  by  the  Employment  Security  Law  and 
employing  an  average  of  about  3,300  workers.  Of  these 
12  are  seamless  hosiery  mills,  employing  an  average  of 
nearly  1,800  workers,  and  eight  full  fashioned  hosiery  mills, 
employing  about  1,500  workers.  In  addition  the  county  has 
two  small  plants  producing  other  types  of  knit  products. 

Valdese  leads  the  county  with  11  hosiery  plants,  employ- 
ing about  1,700  workers.  Morgan  ton  operates  three  hosiery 
and  knit  products  plants,  employing  around  700  workers. 
Hildebran  contains  six  hosiery  plants,  employing  an  aver- 
age of  about  550  workers.  Drexel  contains  one  large  seam- 
less hosiery  plant  while  another  small  seamless  hosiery 
plant  is  located  in  the  edge  of  the  county  on  a  rural  route 
from  Hickory. 

the  surface  the  rocky  base  was.  Allotted  space,  the 
18  families,  embracing  about  40  persons,  settled  on 
the  acres  in  1893  and  began  trying  to  scratch  a  living 
out  of  the  rocky  soil. 

Discouraged,  they  sought  other  means  of  liveli- 
hood. A  year  later,  under  contract  with  the  civic 
body,  Valdese  Corporation,  John  Meir  started  a  small 
hosiery  plant  which  lasted  less  than  10  months.  Meir 


-fit 


irst  plant  with  sheet  iron  walls  of  the  now  famous  Waldensian 
Hosiery  Mills  at  Valdese. 


Units  of  present  plants  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills,  Valdese. 


PAGE  32 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


Lenoir  Plant  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills. 

moved  his  few  knitting  machines  to  Newton  and  soon 
thereafter  to  Manning,  S.  C.  There  John  and  Francis 
Garrou  joined  his  and  soon  after  John  Garrou  was 
put  in  charge  of  the  little  mill  while  Francis  Garrou 
was  a  machine  fixer.  Antoine  Grill  joined  thern  in 
1898  and  soon  after  John  Lewis  and  Henry  F.  Gar- 
rou, John's  sons,  joined  them  to  learn  the  industry. 
The  next  year,  hoping  to  start  another  mill  at  Val- 
dese,  John  "Bobo"  Garrou  returned  home  to  work 
out  plans. 

In  1900  the  others  returned  home  and  by  placing 
mortgages  on  their  farms  John  Garrou  and  Antoine 
Grill  secured  a  loan  of  $1,500  to  buy  machinery. 
They  cut  timber  from  their  farms,  hewed  it,  moved 
it  to  the  site  and  erected  the  frame  for  a  small  cotton 
plant,  50  x  80  feet,  and  covered  it  with  sheet  iron. 
The  few  machines  were  installed  and  about  15  work- 
ers, men,  women  and  children,  were  employed  at  the 
mill.  Stockings  were  produced  in  the  greige  and 
sold  to  a  Newton  mill  for  dyeing  and  finishing  for  a 
year  or  more.  This  proved  unsatisfactory  and  a 
small  dyeing  and  finishing  plant  was  built  near  the 
mill.  In  1905  Antoine  Grill  and  Francis  Garrou  had 
to  sell  their  interests,  Grill  going  to  High  Point  and 
Garrou  to  Spartanburg,  S.  C.,  to  work  in  hosiery 
mills.  In  a  few  months  Francis  Garrou  returned 
bringing  10  Acme  knitting  machines  and  got  back 
into  the  mill.  John  Lewis  Garrou  was  sent  to  New 
Hampshire  to  study  knitting,  returning  after  a  year 
or  two  and  paid  off  the  mortgage  on  his  father's 
farm.  In  the  1907-09  period  he  was  superintendent 
of  the  mill.  He  was  then  put  in  charge  of  Walden- 
sian  Hosiery  Mills'  operations. 

In  1910  John  Garrou  retired,  selling  his  interest 
to  his  three  sons,  John  Louis,  Henry  F.  and  Albert 
F.  Garrou,  and  Frank  Perrou. 


Another  plant  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills. 

John  Louis  Garrou  was  successful  in  his  opera 
tions.  He  decided  that  cotton  yarns  for  hosier 
should  be  spun  in  Valdese.  As  a  result  in  1913  h 
secured  the  interest  and  assistance  of  A.  M.  Kistle 
and  other  Morganton  men  in  organizing  the  Valdes< 
Manufacturing  Co.  This  plant,  owned  by  Morgantoi 
friends  and  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills,  began  opera 
tion  December  12,  1913. 

Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills  was  incorporated  ir 
1914  and  Francis  Garrou  was  elected  president  wit! 
John  Louis  Garrou  as  secretary-treasurer  and  also 
general  manager  of  Valdese  Mfg.  Co.  He  directec 
the  affairs  of  both  organizations  until  his  death  latt 
in  1918.  Francis  Garrou  then  became  general  man- 
ager of  Valdese  Mfg.  Co.  and  Albert  F.  Garrou  was 
made  general  manager  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills 

Valdese  operations  continued  to  expand.  During 
World  War  I,  because  of  labor  shortages  and  pooi 
transportation,  branch  plants  were  started  at  Higl 
Peak,  Morganton,  Collettsville,  Hildebran  and  Ma- 
rion. With  highway  improvements  soon  afterward 
these  plants  were  suspended.  Pauline  Knitting  Mil 
was  organized  early  in  1920  with  Ben  Pons  as  super- 
intendent and  A.  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  as  secretary-treas- 
urer. In  1928  this  mill  was  merged  with  Waldensian 
Hosiery  Mills,  the  machinery  transferred  and  con- 
tinued as  the  seamless  knitting  department  of  Wal- 
densian. In  1926  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills  began 
making  women's  full  fashioned  hosiery,  continuing 
on  a  small  scale  until  1928. 

A  new  corporation,  Pilot  Full  Fashion  Mills,  Inc 
was  formed  by  Waldensian  and  Jacob  &  Schey,  Inc 
a  New  York  selling  agent.  Pilot  absorbed  the  full 
fashioned  facilities  of  Waldensian.  Later  Walden- 
sian purchased  new  equipment  and  organized  a  new 
full  fashioned  department.  This  department,  known 
as  the  Pineburr  Plant,  was  sold  October  1,  1952,  to 
Pilot,  which  absorbed  the  Pineburr  Plant  along  with 
its  finishing  department. 

In  1935  another  Waldensian  unit  was  formed  and 
owned  jointly  with  George  Blankstein,  the  Black 


East  view  of  Pilot  Full  Fashion  Mills  at  Valdese. 


Pineburr  Division  of  Pilot  Full  Fashion  Mills,  Valdese. 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  33 


stone  Hosiery  Mills,  which  took  over  the  former 
Pauline  Mill  Building  and  operated  it  until  1948 
when  the  Waldensian  sold  its  interests  and  the  equip- 
ment was  moved  away. 

Francis  Garrou,  Sr.,  who  directed  operations  of 
both  Waldensian  Hosiery  and  Valdese  Mfg.  Co.  for 
a  number  of  years,  was  an  active  leader  in  the  Val- 
dese community.  He  served  for  a  number  of  years 
as  mayor  of  Valdese  and  was  elected  as  representa- 
tive of  Burke  County  to  the  North  Carolina  General 
Assembly.  He  died  of  a  heart  attack  early  in  1937. 
Henry  F.  Garrou,  a  nephew,  was  named  president 
of  Waldensian,  serving  until  1948  when  he  became 
chairman  of  the  Board.  At  that  time  Albert  F. 
Garrou,  Sr.,  another  nephew,  became  president,  and 
Louis  W.  Garrou  was  elected  secretary  and  treasurer. 
Henry  Grill  continued  as  first  vice-president.  Albert 
F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  started  as  a  mill  hand  and  moved  up 
through  the  ranks  for  about  40  years.  He  was  a 
veteran  of  World  War  I  and  has  been  engaged 
through  the  years  in  many  important  civic  activities. 

Since  World  War  II  Waldensian  has  expended  ap- 
proximately $2,000,000  for  capital  equipment  and 
modernization  of  its  plant,  developing  its  facilities 
until  there  are  few  plants  its  equal  in  the  hosiery 
industry.  In  1946  Waldensian  opened  a  seamless 
hosiery  sales  office  in  the  Empire  State  Building, 
New  York  City.  Through  this  office,  in  charge  of 
John  M.  Grant,  formerly  of  Valdese,  the  firm  sells 
to  wholesalers  and  chain  stores  under  its  own  and 
under  customers'  brands.  In  1947  the  seamless  de- 
partment doubled  its  capacity  by  installing  the  most 
modern  equipment.  In  1948  the  full  fashioned  de- 
partment was  greatly  enlarged.  (This  was  sold  late 
in  1952  to  Pilot.)  Air  conditioning  equipment  was 
installed  throughout  the  plant. 

Waldensian  in  1948  built  a  modern  brick  and  steel 
building  at  Lenoir  as  a  branch  seamless  plant.  This 
building  contains  5,800  square  feet  of  floor  space  and 
employs  about  70  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  in 
the  neighborhood  of  $130,000. 

In  1950  the  Finishing  Department  was  completely 
renovated,  old  buildings  removed  and  new  and  mod- 
ern buildings  erected.  The  latest  machinery  was  in- 
stalled and  operations  were  reorganized  for  the 
greatest  possible  efficiency  in  all  processes.  In 
process  of  erection  is  a  modern  one-story  brick,  steel 


Partial  view  of  Knitting  Department,  Pilot  Full  Fashion  Mills. 


Air  view  of  plants  of  Valdese  Manufacturing  Co.,  Valdese. 

and  glass  building  100  x  185  feet  to  serve  as  the  box 
factory  for  producing  boxes  for  shipping  hosiery. 
The  space  occupied  by  the  present  box  plant,  which 
was  started  in  1916,  will  be  used  for  storage  space 
when  the  new  plant  is  completed. 

Waldensian's  three  main  buildings  at  Valdese  con- 
tain about  57,200  square  feet  of  floor  space  in  addi- 
tion to  the  18,500  square  feet  in  the  new  box  plant. 
Approximately  585  workers  are  employed  in  the 
plants  at  Valdese,  which  have  an  annual  payroll  of 
approximately  $1,335,000.  One  hundred-sixty-five 
thousand  dozen  pairs  of  full  fashioned  hosiery  were 
produced  in  the  Pineburr  plant  in  nine  months  of 
operation  in  1952.  Sales  of  full  fashioned  hosiery  in 
that  period  amounted  to  $1,795,000.  This  plant  em- 
ployed about  155  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of 
about  $414,000. 

Waldensian,  since  the  sale  of  its  full  fashioned 
department  to  Pilot,  produces  men's  half  hose  and 
anklets.  In  1952  more  than  1,000,000  dozen  pairs 
were  sold  for  approximately  $3,812,000. 

Waldensian  has  always  prided  itself  on  the  fine 
and  cordial  relations  with  its  employees.  A  person- 
nel department,  headed  by  C.  C.  Long,  personnel 
director,  aids  the  employees  in  all  of  their  problems. 
The  company  provides  annual  vacations  with  pay  in 
summer  and  at  Christmastime  distributes  a  bonus 
based  on  earnings  and  length  of  service.  Hospital- 
ization and  life  insurance  policies  are  provided  for 
employees  adapted  to  present  day  needs.  A  pension 
plan  is  in  operation  for  the  benefit  of  all  personnel. 
The  "Hose  Voice",  a  monthly  publication  edited  by 
Mr.  Long,  is  issued  for  the  benefit  of  the  employees. 
Waldensian  was  a  pioneer  in  organized  recreational 
activities. 

The  Francis  Garrou  Memorial  Hall  was  built  in 
1938  by  the  Waldensian  interests  to  honor  the  mem- 
ory of  one  of  its  founders  and  community  leaders. 
This  hall  contains  a  gymnasium  for  games  and  danc- 
ing, library,  basketball  courts,  bowling  alleys,  swim- 
ming pools,  showers  and  other  facilities  for  the  use 
of  the  employees  of  the  companies. 

Present  officers  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills  are 
A.  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  president;  Henry  Grill,  vice-presi- 
dent, and  Louis  W.  Garrou,  secretary-treasurer. 
Members  of  the  Board  of  Directors  are  H.  F.  Garrou, 


PAGE  34 


THE  E.  S.  C  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


chairman;  A.  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  Louis  W.  Garrou,  P.  H. 
Garrou,  Henry  Grill,  A.  Leslie  Harwood,  Jr.,  of 
Boston,  and  Ben  Pons. 

PILOT  FULL  FASHION  MILLS,  INC. 

Pilot  Full  Fashion  Mills,  Inc.  was  incorporated 
June  20,  1928.  Ira  M.  Schey,  Sr.,  was  elected  presi- 
dent and  A.  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager.  As  stated,  the  new  company  was 
formed  by  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills  and  Jacob  & 
Schey,  Inc.,  selling  agents  of  New  York  City.  Wal- 
densian had  started  making  full  fashioned  hosiery  in 
the  summer  of  1927  in  a  new  building  50  x  100  feet, 
producing  42  gauge,  7  thread  silk  legs  with  mercer- 
ized cotton  welt  and  foot.  The  first  shipment  of  30 
dozen  pairs  was  made  to  a  Plymouth,  Mass.,  firm 
July  1,  1928. 

Pilot  has  been  eminently  successful  in  the  produc- 
tion of  fine  women's  nylon  hosiery.  It  produces 
stockings  51  to  66  gauge.  "Alba"  is  the  principal 
brand  of  full  fashioned  nylon  hosiery.  This  brand 
is  nationally  advertised  and  is  sold  through  Jacob 
&  Schey,  Inc.,  New  York,  direct  to  the  retail  trade 
throughout  the  nation. 

The  pilot  plant  is  modern,  80%  air  conditioned  at 
82  degrees  and  humidity  is  kept  at  54,  both  valuable 
for  the  employees  and  in  keeping  the  nylon  in  proper 
working  condition.  The  plant,  containing  approxi- 
mately 182,000  square  feet  of  floor  space,  has  all 
new  machinery  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging 
around  $2,500,000  covering  about  800  employees  of 
whom  500  are  women.  As  noted  above,  Pilot,  as  of 
October  1,  1952,  purchased  the  full  fashioned  hos- 
iery department  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
including  the  Pineburr  Plant  and  its  finishing  de- 
partment. The  200  workers  were  taken  over  and 
operations  were  continued  with  all  of  the  conditions 
which  existed  when  this  plant  was  operated  by  Wal- 
densian. 

Splendid  relations  have  always  existed  between 
employer  and  employees  at  Pilot.  Group  life  and 
hospitalization  insurance  are  provided  in  which  the 
company  pays  60%  of  the  premiums.  A  pension 
plan  is  tied  in  with  and  supplements  Federal  Old  Age 
and  Survivors  Insurance,  starting  after  15  years  of 
service  and  providing  a  minimum  income  of  $100  a 
month  after  25  years  of  service.  The  company  has 
plans  at  present  for  turning  this  pension  plan  into  a 
profit-sharing  pension  plan.  All  employees  receive 
one  week  of  vacation  with  pay  after  one  year  of  serv- 
ice and  two  weeks  after  five  years  of  service.  Pilot 
features  the  operation  of  a  modern  plant  cafeteria 
serving  around  300  meals  a  day  at  cost  to  the  em- 
ployees. This  provides  in-plant  feeding  with  hot 
meals  for  employees  on  non-stop  machines.  "The 
Pilot  Piper",  Virginia  Lane,  editor,  is  published 
monthly  for  the  benefit  of  the  employees. 

Present  officers  are  Ira  M.  Schey,  Chairman  of 
the  Board;  Albert  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  president  and 
treasurer;  A.  Leslie  Harwood,  Jr.,  first  vice-presi- 
dent; J.  L.  Jacobs,  second  vice-president  and  secre- 
tary; George  W.  Williams,  Jr.,  assistant  secretary- 
treasurer,  and  Ben  Pons,  plant  superintendent.    Di- 


Francis  Garrou  Memorial,  the  Valdese  Community  Center  for 
employees  of  Waldensian,  Pilot  and  Valdese  Mills. 

rectors  are:  Ira  M.  Schey,  A.  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  J.  L. 
Jacobs,  Louis  W.  Garrou  and  A.  Leslie  Harwood,  Jr., 
Boston,  Mass.    The  company  has  434  stockholders. 

VALDESE  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Valdese  Manufacturing  Co.  as  noted  above,  was 
organized  in  1913  by  officials  of  the  Waldensian  Hos- 
iery Mills  and  A.  M.  Keisler  and  other  friends  in 
nearby  Morganton.  At  first  officers  were  A.  M. 
Keisler,  president;  J.  L.  Garrou,  vice-president; 
Francis  Garrou,  Sr.,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and  S. 
V.  Upchurch,  superintendent  and  general  manager. 

The  company  was  organized  for  the  purpose  of 
supplying  soft  twist  corded  yarns  for  the  Waldensian 
Hosiery  Mills  which  had  started  12  years  before.  At 
first  the  plant  had  5,000  cotton  yarn  spindles.  Dur- 
ing the  first  year  the  new  firm  made  no  profit  and 
Mr.  Upchurch  resigned.  He  was  succeeded  by  J.  L. 
Garrou  who  took  over  active  management  of  the 
plant  in  1915.  Late  in  1918  J.  L.  Garrou  died  in  the 
influenza  epidemic  and  Francis  Garrou,  Sr.,  then 
manager  of  Waldensian,  also  became  manager  of  the 
Valdese  Mfg.  Co.  He  continued  these  dual  activities 
until  1920  when  his  nephew,  Albert  F.  Garrou,  and 
brother  of  J.  L.  Garrou,  returned  from  service  in 
World  War  I  and  took  charge  of  Waldensian  opera- 
tions. Francis  Garrou  then  devoted  full  time  to  the 
Valdese  spinning  mill  until  his  death  in  1937.  The 
mill  had  more  than  tripled  its  capacity. 

Earl  N.  Spencer,  son  of  C.  A.  Spencer,  one  of  the 
original  backers  and  a  former  president  of  Valdese, 
became  secretary-treasurer  and  active  executive 
manager  following  the  death  of  Francis  Garrou  in 
1937.  He  was  a  graduate  of  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  in  1921  and  had  studied  business  adminis- 
tration in  Columbia  University.  For  14  years  Mr. 
Spencer  was  engaged  in  selling  knitting  yarns  in 
Pennsylvania  and  New  York.  His  selection  was  a 
fortunate  one  and  the  mill  has  been  eminently  suc- 
cessful under  his  direction. 

Albert  F.  Garrou,  Sr.,  is  president  of  Valdese  Mfg. 
Co.  as  well  as  president  of  Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills ; 
Louis  Bounous,  who  was  an  original  stockholder  and 
who  started  work  in  the  card  room  at  50^  a  day,  is 
vice-president;  Mr.  Spencer  continues  as  secretary- 
treasurer  and  general  manager;  L.  P.  Guigou  is  as- 
sistant secretary-treasurer.  Frank  Paschal  is  plant 
engineer  and  W.  C.  Loudermilk  is  assistant  superin- 


VlNTER-SPRING,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  35 


endent  and  personnel  manager.  The  Board  of  Direc- 
ors  include  these  officers  and  E.  D.  Alexander,  A.  L. 
larwood,  Jr.,  and  A.  N.  Spencer.  John  "Bobo"  Gar- 
ou,  father  of  President  A.  F.  Garrou,  was  a  director 
intil  his  death  some  two  years  ago. 

Valdese  Mfg.  Co.  operates  two  departments,  a  fine 
nill  and  a  coarse  mill,  both  producing  single  ply  soft 
wist  knitting  yarns.  The  firm  recently  completed 
retaliation  of  a  thoroughly  modern  million  dollar 
>ack  yarn  dye  house,  one  of  the  largest  in  the  nation. 
?his  addition  more  than  doubles  the  capacity  for  all 
ypes  of  dyeing  suitable  to  all  colors  and  shades  de- 
igned. The  plant  has  a  modern  laboratory  in  charge 
if  M.  Thomas  B.  Boyd,  a  skilled  dye  chemist,  and 
Jeorge  Rector  is  head  dyer.    More  than  1,000  shades 


are  carried  by  Valdese  of  which  more  than  half  are 
on  the  active  list.  The  dye  plant  is  well  balanced 
and  does  a  good  job  in  commercial  dyeing  for  the 
knitting  trade.  The  capacity  is  about  125,000  pounds 
per  week  in  any  shades  desired  and  put  up  on  knit- 
ting cones. 

Valdese  Mfg.  Co.,  as  noted,  was  organized  and 
started  to  supply  yarn  for  the  Waldensian  Hosiery 
Mills.  Now,  however,  approximately  4,000,000 
pounds  are  produced  each  year,  all  of  which  is  sold 
on  the  open  market.  Annual  sales  amount  to  approx- 
imately $6,000,000.  The  plant  uses  about  100,000 
square  feet  of  floor  space.  It  employs  about  350 
workers  and  its  annual  payroll  reaches  approximate- 
ly $900,000. 


Drexel,  Morganton  and  Huffman,  Successful  Hosiery  Group 


Drexel  Knitting  Mills  Co.,  Drexel,  started  in  1910 
>y  Samuel  Huffman  with  only  20  machines  making 
lalf  hose  of  one  size  and  two  colors  along  with  its 
arge  offsprings,  Huffman  Full  Fashioned  Mills,  Inc., 
,nd  Morganton  Full  Fashioned  Co.,  has  developed 
nto  one  of  North  Carolina's  larger  and  more  success- 
ul  groups  of  hosiery  manufacturers. 

When  the  Drexel  Knitting  Mills  Co.  was  organized 
,nd  started  at  Drexel,  about  six  miles  east  of  Mor- 
anton,  it  was  a  companion  industry  to  the  Drexel 
furniture  Co.  which  Mr.  Huffman  had  started  in 
903  and  which  now,  with  plants  at  Drexel,  Morgan- 
on  and  Marion,  constitutes  what  is  now  recognized 
,s  "The  World's  Largest  Manufacturer  of  Quality 
Jedroom  and  Dining  Room  Furniture."  The  hos- 
ery  development  in  the  past  40  years  has  kept  pace 
rith  the  50  year  old  furniture  activities,  both  of 
yhich  have  been  headed  for  a  number  of  years  by 
tobert  O.  Huffman,  son  of  the  founder. 

From  its  beginning  in  a  small  wooden  building  and 
iroducing  one  size  and  two  color  socks  Drexel  Knif- 
ing Mills  Co.  has  enlarged  and  expanded  until  it  is 
ne  of  the  most  modern  hosiery  plants  to  be  found 
n  the  nation.  Not  many  years  ago  all  operations 
vere  carried  on  in  33,000  square  feet  of  floor  space, 
^oday  the  plant  has  floor  space  of  approximately 
8,000  square  feet. 

A  new  and  modern  concrete  cinder  block  building 
yith  foam  glass  blocks  on  inside  wall  and  ceiling 


B«S#2' 


'lant  of  Morganton  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Mill,  Morganton. 


Huffman  Full  Fashioned  plant  at  Morganton. 

was  erected  in  1947.  This  building  contains  no  win- 
dows, is  air  conditioned  throughout  and  is  equipped 
with  fluorescent  lighting.  The  walls  are  finished  in 
two  shades  of  green.  A  new  communication  system 
was  installed  as  well  as  an  automatic  sprinkler  sys- 
tem. Also  in  1947  the  dyehouse  was  expanded  and 
modernized  and  a  new  dye  laboratory  was  added 
facilitating  further  development  in  efficiency  and 
modernization. 

Drexel  Knitting  Mills  Co.  now  operates  435  circu- 
lar knitting  machines  producing  men's  Genuine 
wrap,  English  rib  and  argyle  half  hose.  Several 
Swiss  clocking  machines  were  added  to  give  a  wider 
pattern  range  to  the  line.  The  company  has  about 
70  different  patterns  and  styles  of  men's  hose  and 
produces  approximately  3,600  dozen  pairs  of  men's 
hose  daily.  Drexel  consumes  60,000  pounds  of  yarns, 
including  wool,  cotton,  rayon  and  nylon,  each  month. 

Drexel  takes  pride  in  its  friendly  relations  with 
the  approximately  460  workers  employed,  70%  of 
them  women.  Employees  have  insurance  policies 
premiums  of  which  are  paid  by  the  company,  includ- 
ing sick  benefits,  two-thirds  of  the  cost  of  hospital- 
ization, and  operates  a  first  aid  station  in  the  plant. 
The  company  operates  a  non-profit  cafeteria  for  its 
employees  and  the  employees  operate  concessions  in 
the  plant. 

Drexel  Foundation,  established  by  Drexel  Knitting 
Mills  Co.  and  Drexel  Furniture  Co.,  provides  a  mod- 
ern and  fully  equipped  recreational  center  on  the 
edge  of  the  Drexel  community  for  the  benefit  of  the 
employees  of  both  plants.     This  recreational  center 


PAGE  36 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195j 


has  been  described  as  the  most  modern  and  best 
equipped  in  the  entire  State. 

Drexel  manufactures,  dyes  and  finishes  men's  high- 
ly stylized  half  hose  and  anklets  with  the  nationally 
advertised  brand  "Socks  from  Drexel".  Sales  are 
handled  through  Vick  &  Weyde,  sales  agents,  3109 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City,  and  are  dis- 
tributed to  the  retail  trade  through  jobbers,  chain 
stores,  men's  stores  and  department  stores  through- 
out the  nation. 

Officers  are  Robert  0.  Huffman,  president  and 
general  manager;  Frank  L.  Bowers,  vice-president 
and  treasurer;  Pearle  Hollar  Propst,  secretary,  and 
Robert  D.  Walker,  superintendent. 

Mr.  Huffman,  president  of  Drexel,  is  also  presi- 
dent of  Morganton  and  Huffman  Full  Fashioned  or- 
ganizations in  Morganton  as  well  as  president  of  the 
extensive  Drexel  Furniture  Co.  A  native  of  Mor- 
ganton he  worked  in  the  Drexel  Knitting  Mill  dur- 
ing vacations  as  he  grew  up.  After  graduating  from 
the  University  of  North  Carolina  he  became  manager 
of  the  plant  in  1913.  He  was  named  as  president  and 
general  manager  succeeding  his  father,  Samuel  Huff- 
man, who  died  in  1922.  Mr.  Huffman  is  a  past  presi- 
dent of  the  Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers'  Asso- 
ciation, past  director  of  the  National  Association  of 
Hosiery  Manufacturers  and  serves  on  the  Advisory 
Board  of  the  Women's  Full  Fashioned  Division  of  the 
National  Association  of  Hosiery  Manufacturers. 
Starting  in  1943  Mr.  Huffman  was  in  Washington 
for  more  than  a  year,  serving  first  as  hosiery  con- 
sultant with  WPB  for  a  few  months,  then  was  trans- 
ferred to  OPA,  serving  first  as  hosiery  consultant 
and  later  as  price  executive  of  the  Apparel  Branch. 
Again  he  was  called  to  Washington  in  1951  to  serve 
with  the  OPS  as  assistant  director  of  the  Consumer 
Goods  Division  for  several  months.  Recently  he  was 
named  as  one  of  the  three  North  Carolina  directors 
for  the  National  Association  of  Manufacturers. 

In  local  and  State  affairs  Mr.  Huffman  is  a  member 
of  the  executive  committee  of  the  Jefferson  Standard 
Life  Ins.  Co.,  Greensboro;  president  of  the  Burke 
Farmers'  Co-op  Dairies;  immediate  past  president 
of  the  Business  Foundation  of  the  University  of 
North  Carolina,  serving  as  such  in  the  1950-52  pe- 
riod ;  members  of  the  North  Carolina  board  of  direc- 
tors of  Liberty  Mutual  Life  Ins.  Co.,  and  a  member 


Garrou  plant  oj  the  Huffman  group  of  hosiery  mills,  Morganton. 


Full  fashioned  hosiery  machine  in  the  Huffman  Hosiery 
Mills,  Morganton. 

of  the  board  of  directors  of  the  First  National  Bank 
Morganton;  Charlotte  branch  of  Wachovia  Bank  & 
Trust  Co.  and  Grace  Hospital,  Morganton. 

MORGANTON  AND  HUFFMAN 

Morganton  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Co.,  with  cap- 
ital of  $1,266,000,  actually  had  its  beginning  soor 
after  the  turn  of  the  century  with  the  organizatior 
of  the  Vaudios  Company,  which  in  turn  was  taker 
over  in  1917  by  the  Garrou  Knitting  Mills. 

Garrou  Knitting  Mills,  actually  the  forerunner  ol 
the  hosiery  industry  in  Morganton,  was  organized  by 
the  late  John  Garrou,  Ed  Alexander,  the  late  Francis 
Garrou  and  others  in  1922.  A  group  composed  of  the 
Waldensian  Hosiery  Mills,  Drexel  Knitting  Mills  and 
their  associates  assumed  control  of  the  Garrou  mill 
and  guaranteed  preferred  stock  dividends.  At  that 
time  Robert  O.  Huffman  became  president  and  gen- 
eral manager.  Under  his  management  the  entire 
equipment  of  the  Garrou  mill  was  sold  and  modern 
equipment  installed.  This  included  220  needle  K 
knitting  machines  producing  women's  seamless  hose. 
Later  these  were  disposed  of  and  half  hose  machines, 
176  needle  reversed  plaits  and  240  needle  spirals, 
were  installed.  In  the  years  1928-29  the  mill  pur-f 
chased  full  fashioned  footers,  thus  venturing  intoj 
full  fashioned  half  hose.  Soon  afterward  the  Garrouf 
mill  installed  several  45-gauge  leggers  and  footersj 
and  in  1936-37  the  company  installed  16  single  unit 
45-gauge  knitting  machines  for  making  women's] 
stockings.  These  were  the  most  modern  machines 
that  had  been  developed  up  to  that  time.  During  this 
period  all  half  hose  equipment  was  disposed  of  and 
Garrou  became  100%  a  full  fashioned  mill  during 
the  years  1928  to  1939.  The  old  building  was  com- 
pletely torn  down  and  a  new  structure  erected. 

Morganton  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Co.  was  or- 
ganized in  1927  by  Mr.  Huffman  and  his  associates. 
First  installation  of  full  fashioned  machines  consist- 
ed of  six  42-gauge,  20  section  leggers  and  four  42- 
gauge,  24  section,  footers.  By  the  end  of  1930  this 
company  had  installed  42,  45,  and  48  gauge  machines: 
— 46  leggers  and  20  footers.  All  of  this  equipment  j 
has  since  been  sold  or  otherwise  disposed  of. 

Huffman  Full  Fashioned  Mills,  Inc.,  was  organiz-l 
ed  in  1938  and  installed  12  single  unit  45-gauge  ma-j 
chines.    These  were  of  the  latest  design  at  that  time. ' 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  37 


In  1941  Morganton  Full  Fashioned  acquired  com- 
Dlete  ownership  of  the  Huffman  mill.  Since  that 
;ime  all  knitting,  with  the  exception  of  fourteen  51- 
jauge  machines  in  the  Morganton  plant,  has  been 
one  at  the  Huffman  mill.  The  expansion  in  knitting 
was  carried  out  at  the  Huffman  mill  because  the 
auilding  was  of  sufficient  width  to  accommodate  the 
modern  32  section  long  machines.  At  present,  a 
sizeable  battery  of  51,  60  and  66  gauge  machines  is 
in  operation. 

Morganton  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Co.  acquired 
complete  ownership  of  Garrou  Knitting  Mills  in 
1947.  A  few  years  after  Morganton  Full  Fashioned 
Hosiery  Co.  was  organized  in  1927,  a  throwing  plant 
vas  installed  with  a  capacity  sufficient  to  care 
for  all  needs.  In  the  Finishing  Department  a  con- 
/eyor  system  is  used  for  boxing  goods — unique  in 
;he  hosiery  industry.  This  system  has  proved  to  be 
/ery  efficient. 

All  of  these  mills  are  under  supervision  of  Mr. 
Huffman,  president  and  general  manager,  and  have 
i  production  of  approximately  3,000  dozen  hose  daily. 
Much  of  the  production  is  sold  under  the  brand  "Flat- 
;emit"  to  retailers  in  practically  every  state  in  the 
Union. 

Since  taking  over  the  old  Garrou  Knitting  Mill  in 
L922  Mr.  Huffman  has  directed  this  program  of  ex- 
3ansion.  Other  officers  of  the  company  are  C.  E. 
tValker,  vice-president  and  assistant  general  man- 
iger ;  P.  V.  Watlington,  treasurer,  and  Frank  C.  Pat- 
;on,  secretary. 

Morganton  Full  Fashioned  products  are  sold 
;hrough  Vick  &  Weyde,  3109  Empire  State  Building, 
New  York  City. 

The  three  combined  plants  in  Morganton  give  em- 
ployment to  approximately  700  workers  to  whom 
approximately  $1,700,000  are  distributed  in  wages 
mnually.  These  three  plants  have  a  combined  floor 
space  of  approximately  150,000  square  feet.    Annual 


sales  from  these  plants  have  reached  approximately 
$4,100,000  annually. 

VALDESE 

Martinat  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Martinat  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  255  circular  knit  ma- 
chines producing  men's  half  hose  in  Banner  split  foot,  in  nylon, 
rayon  and  nylon  combinations,  all  rayon  and  full  mercerized. 
Principal  brand  is  "Mart-Crest".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers 
and  through  commission  agents.  Henry  F.  Martinat  is  presi- 
dent; Bertha  S.  Martinat,  secretary,  and  Don  H.  Martinat,  as- 
sistant secretary  and  manager. 

Francis-Louise  Full  Fashion  Mills,   Inc. 

Francis-Louise  Full  Fashion  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $422,- 
000,  operates  14  full  fashioned  machines  making  ladies'  hosiery 
which  is  finished  at  Carol-May  Finishing  Co.,  Concord.  The 
firm  operates  its  own  office  at  910  Empire  State  Building,  New 
York  City,  with  Stanley  S.  Friedman  as  manager,  selling  to 
jobbers,  chain  stores,  department  stores  and  retailers.  Henry 
Grill  is  president  and  Benjamin  Grill  is  secretary  and  treas- 
urer. 

Albert  F.  Garrou  &  Sons,  Inc. 

Albert  F.  Garrou  &  Sons,  Inc.,  operates  11  full  fashioned  66- 
gauge  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery  which  is  finished  at 
Pilot  Full  Fashioned  Mills,  Inc.,  Valdese.  Products  are  sold 
to  chain  stores,  department  stores  and  retailers.  Albert  F. 
Garrou  is  president,  Louis  W.  Garrou,  secretary  and  treasurer, 
and  J.  C.  Johnson,  vice-president  and  superintendent. 
HILDEBRAN 
J.  A.  Cline  &  Co.,  Inc. 

J.  A.  Cline  &  Co.,  Inc.,  operates  350  circular  knit  machines 
producing  men's  fancy  half  hose  and  anklets.  Plant  also  fin- 
ishes for  other  mills.  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores  through  Cline  &  Star,  1508  Empire  State  Building,  New 
York  City.  Carl  V.  Cline  is  president  and  Carl  V.  Cline,  Jr., 
secretary  and  treasurer. 

Hildebran  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Hildebran  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  capital  of  $30,000,  ope- 
rates 110  circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  half  hose 
including  "High  Stepper"  and  "B-29".  Products  are  sold  to 
jobbers  and  chain  stores.  F.  L.  Elliott  is  president  and  super- 
intendent and  Mrs.  Frances  Holloway,  secretary  and  treasurer. 
OTHER  BURKE  COUNTY  FIRMS 

Full  Fashioned — Valdese:  Lovelady  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Pil- 
grim Full  Fashion  Hosiery  Mills;  Pons  Full  Fashion  Mills, 
Inc. 

Seamless — Hildebran:  Burke  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  seamless 
hose;  Childers  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  and  boys'  half  hose  and 
anklets  of  cotton,  rayon  and  acetate ;Longwear  Hosiery  Mill, 
Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  ingrain  wraps;  Van  Horn  Hosiery  Mill, 
wrap  anklets;  Valdese:  Dolly  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  infants'  and 
children's  rayon  and  cotton  anklets;  John  Massey  Hosiery  Co., 
misses'  and  children's  anklets. 


Chadbourn  A  Modern,  New,  Expanding  Hosiery  Producer 


Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  with  general  offices 
n  Charlotte  and  seven  plants  in  three  states,  began 
>perations  only  17  years  ago  in  rented  quarters  and 
Adth  a  few  knitting  machines.  The  organization  has 
low  developed  into  one  of  the  larger  producers  of 
ine  hosiery  in  North  Carolina  and  sells  its  "Lark- 
vood"  and  "Larkette"  nationally  advertised  brands 
n  the  finer  stores  and  specialty  shops  throughout 
;he  nation.  The  company  also  produces  a  fine  line 
)f  men's  and  boys'  hose  which  have  a  wide  distribu- 
;ion. 


Chadbourn  had  its  beginning  in  1936  in  Burling- 
ton as  Rufus  D.  Wilson,  Inc.,  with  nine  42  gauge 
legging  machines  and  three  footers.  The  greige  hos- 
iery was  finished  by  commercial  finishers  and  sold 
to  chain  stores  and  jobbers.  In  1938  J.  Chadbourn 
Bolles,  assistant  trust  officer  of  the  American  Trust 
Co.  in  Charlotte,  became  president  and  in  1944  the 
company  name  was  changed  to  Chadbourn  Hosiery 
Mills,  Inc.  During  the  next  three  years,  dyeing  and 
finishing  facilities  were  added  and  additional  knit- 


Main  office  and  Finishing  Plant  of  Chadbourn  Hosiery 
Mills,  Charlotte. 


One  of  the  two  Burlington  plants  of  Chadbourn  Hosiery 
Mills,  Charlotte. 


PAGE  38 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-spring,  195: 


Siler  City  plant  of  Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills. 

ting  machines  installed  to  triple  the  productive  ca- 
pacity of  the  organization. 

The  success  of  this  enterprise  led  to  a  program  of 
enlargement  and  expansion  which  is  still  in  progress. 
In  1943  a  knitting  plant  at  Shenandoah,  Va.,  was 
purchased  and  in  1944  the  company  acquired  a  build- 
ing at  Siler  City  which  was  entirely  renovated  and 
became  a  beautiful  and  modern  knitting  plant.  In 
the  same  year,  a  sales  organization  was  created  with 
headquarters  in  New  York  City  to  handle  the  promo- 
tion and  sale  of  the  company's  production. 

Larkwood  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  was  purchased  in 
1945  and  the  Chadbourn  offices  were  then  moved 
from  Burlington  to  this  Charlotte  plant.  Later  in 
1945  Chadbourn  entered  the  men's  hosiery  field 
through  the  purchase  of  Full  Knit  Hosiery  Mills, 
Inc.,  in  Burlington.  In  the  year  that  followed,  Chad- 
bourn acquired  the  assets  of  Best  Manufacturing 
Co.  in  Gainesville,  Ga.,  and  established  a  throwing 
plant  there.  The  most  recent  addition  was  the  Owen- 
Osborne  plant  at  Gainesville,  Ga.  Since  acquisition 
of  this  plant,  productive  capacity  has  been  doubled 
and  this  plant  is  one  of  the  most  attractive  and  mod- 
ern in  the  South. 

Through  the  Chadbourn  Sales  Corp.,  located  at 
4219  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City,  Chad- 
bourn's  "Larkwood"  and  "Larkette"  branded  hosiery 
and  also  the  men's  hosiery  line  are  distributed  to 
leading  stores  throughout  the  United  States.  Frank 
T.  Hayes,  vice-president  of  Chadbourn,  is  president 
of  the  Chadbourn  Sales  Corp.  and  has  charge  of  the 
distribution  of  the  firm's  products.  Net  sales  in  1951 
amounted  to  $11,571,000  and  the  1952  sales  grew 
to  $11,906,000. 

Chadbourn  has  1,025  employees  in  its  North  Caro- 
lina plants  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately 


W^3Uku^f~    *fc  ' 


CHARLOTTE  AND  MECKLENBURG  HAVE 

MANY  SUCCESSFUL  HOSIERY  FIRM! 

Mecklenburg  County,  important  in  textiles,  generally 
lias  developed  into  a  relatively  strong  position  in  the  maim 
facture  of  hosiery.  Operating  in  the  county,  according  t< 
Employment  Security  Commission  records,  are  12  full  fash 
ioned  hosiery  plants,  employing  an  average  of  around  2,65< 
workers,  in  addition  to  four  relatively  small  plants  produc 
ing  other  knit  products. 

Charlotte  contains  nine  full  fashioned  hosiery  plants 
employing  an  average  of  about  2,560  workers,  some  of  then 
large  plants,  and  four  other  knit  products  plants  employing 
about  160  workers.  At  Mint  Hill  are  located  two  smal 
full  fashioned  plants  and  a  small  full  fashioned  plant  is  lo 
cated  at  Paw  Creek,  where  another  suspended  operation; 
last  year. 

Names  of  five  other  hosiery  mills  in  Charlotte  and  on< 
at  Mint  Hill  and  names  of  four  other  knit  product  plant: 
in  Charlotte  are  carried  in  some  lists,  but  are  not  shown  ii 
Employment  Security  Commission  records  as  employers  cov 
ered  by  the  Employment  Security  Law. 
Nebel  Knitting  Co.,  Inc. 

Nebel  Knitting  Co.,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $2,000,000,  operate: 
50  full  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery  unde 
brands  of  "Nebel",  "Real  Chic",  "Tar  Heelia"  and  "Billie  Doo" 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  department  store: 
and  large  retailers  through  the  firm's  own  New  York  office  a 
1701  Empire  State  Building,  Steve  Gill,  manager.  Mrs.  Mariar 
Nebel  is  president;  R.  S.  Hulse,  vice-president;  W.  R.  Caudle 
secretary,  and  William  Nebel,  treasurer. 

Other  Mecklenburg  County  Firms 

Full  Fashioned — Charlotte:  Belvedere  Hosiery  Co.;  Carolyi 
Hosiery,  Inc.;  Creston  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Finer  Full  Fashion  Hosiery  Co.;  Huntley  Hosiery  Co.,  Inc. 
Kenrich  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.;  Wanco  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.;  Min 
Hill:  Doyle  Hosiery,  Inc.;  Kingcraft  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Helton  Hosiery  Co.,  Paw  Creek. 


Hosiery  Bar  in  the,   Charlotte  plant  from  which  all  men  and 

women  employees  may  buy  hosiery  produced  by 

Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills. 


$3,650,000.  Floor  space  in  the  North  Carolina  plant; 
adds  up  to  about  200,000  square  feet.  Total  employ 
ment,  including  plants  in  Georgia  and  Virginia,  if 
approximately  1,685. 

Garland  E.  Bennett  is  plant  manager  of  the  Bur 
lington  full  fashion  plant,  which  employs  about  14( 
people.  The  Siler  City  plant  also  employs  about  14( 
workers  and  E.  V.  Wood  is  plant  manager.  The  hal 
hose  plant,  located  in  Burlington,  is  the  only  one  ol 
the  Chadbourn  group  knitting  and  finishing  men'; 
and  boys'  half  hose  and  anklets.  This  plant  employ;: 
about  225  people  with  I.  B.  Grainger,  Jr.,  as  plani 
manager.  All  full  fashion  dyeing  and  finishing  ope 
rations  of  the  company  are  performed  at  the  Char- 
lotte plant.  A.  T.  Glenn  is  plant  manager  of  this 
plant  which  has  approximately  355  employees.  Tht 
modern  and  spacious  general  offices  of  the  companj 
are  also  at  Charlotte. 

The  management  of  Chadbourn  takes  much  pridt 
in  the  friendly  relations  that  have  always  existec 
with  its  employees.  Along  with  the  physical  growtf 
of  the  company,  an  employee  relations  program  has 
been  developed  which  has  never  lost  sight  of  tht 
company's  human  resources.  For  several  years  th( 
company  has  paid  an  annual  bonus  of  2%  of  indi- 
vidual gross  earnings  to  its  employees  and  has  pro 
v'ided  paid  vacations  annually.  Group  hospital  anc 
life  insurance  policies  are  provided  for  all  employee!- 
with  premiums  paid  entirely  by  the  company.  Ai 
the  Charlotte  plant  and  general  offices,  Chadbourr 
operates  a  modern  cafeteria  serving  all  employees 
with  meals  at  cost.     Throughout  the  organization 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  39 


employees  enjoy  the  privilege  of  purchasing  the  com- 
pany's products  at  reduced  prices  through  an  intern- 
al distribution  system. 

Officers  and  executive  staff  of  the  organization  are 
J.  Chadbourn  Bolles,  president  and  treasurer;  Wil- 
liam J.  Leath,  vice-president,  in  charge  of  manufac- 
turing; Frank  T.  Hayes,  president  of  Chadbourn 
Sales  Corp. ;  Guy  E.  Tysor,  vice-president  and  assist- 
ant treasurer;  S.  L.  Black,  vice-president  and  pur- 
chasing agent ;  E.  M.  Hatch,  secretary ;  E.  M.  Hicks, 
assistant  secretary  and  assistant  treasurer;  F.  J. 
Boynton,  manager,  Full  Fashion  Division ;  Ruf us  K. 
Smith,  manager,  Finishing  Division;  and  Harry  S. 
Willis,  director  of  Industrial  Relations. 

Mr.  Bolles  is  a  splendid  example  of  a  man  who  in- 
terrupted a  successful  career,  entered  an  entirely 
new  industry  and  made  a  notable  success  in  that  in- 
dustry. A  native  of  Southport,  he  graduated  from 
Culver  Military  Academy  in  1925  and  received  his 
B.S.  degree  at  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  in 


Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills  plant  at  Midland,  Cabarrus  County. 

1929.  Mr.  Bolles  was  assistant  trust  officer  of  the 
North  Carolina  Bank  and  Trust  Co.,  Greensboro, 
1930-31,  and  from  1932  to  1938  was  associate  trust 
officer  of  the  American  Trust  Co.  in  Charlotte.  He 
entered  the  hosiery  industry  in  1938  as  president  of 
Rufus  D.  Wilson,  Inc.,  Burlington,  and  has  since  been 
president  and  chairman  of  the  board  of  its  successor, 
Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.  The  name  of  his  or- 
ganization comes  from  his  name  and  his  mother's 
family  name. 


Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Famous  for  Silk,  Now  Nylon  Producer 


Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Charlotte,  one  of  the  larger 
and  better  full  fashioned  hosiery  organizations  in 
North  Carolina  with  plants  in  Charlotte,  Oakhurst 
and  Shelby,  had  a  very  modest  beginning  in  Union 
Hill,  Hudson  County,  New  Jersey,  (from  which  came 
the  name)  in  1925.  The  firm  was  organized  and 
started  by  Fritz  Seifart  and  M.  E.  Pierson  in  a  small 
plant  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  full  fashioned 
silk  hosiery  entirely.  After  a  little  more  than  a  year 
of  operation  in  Union  Hill,  the  owners  moved  their 
plant  to  Charlotte  and  occupied  the  loft  over  a  whole- 
sale paper  firm.  There  they  operated  about  20  ma- 
chines and  employed  approximately  100  workers. 

After  successful  operation  there  for  three  or  four 
years,  the  firm  purchased  a  site  and  erected  a  new 
building,  occupied  in  1929  at  712  North  Brevard 
Street.  New  machines  were  installed  over  the  next 
few  years  until  about  40  were  in  operation.  As  the 
business  prospered,  new  sections  were  added  to  the 
plant,  one  in  1933  and  another  in  1935.  In  1938  an- 
other section  was  added  for  a  box  shop  and  in  1949 
this  original  plant  was  overhauled,  the  front  becom- 
ing the  general  offices  of  the  company  with  the  fin- 
ishing and  shipping  departments  and  the  box  plant 
in  the  other  sections.  Before  this  renovation  the 
company  had  begun  operation  of  its  Oakhurst  plant 
located  on  the  Old  Monroe  Road  outside  the  Charlotte 
city  limits  and  later  purchased  its  Shelby  plant.  All 
of  the  hosiery  manufacturing  is  done  in  these  two 
plants  and  the  finishing  is  all  done  at  the  712  North 
Brevard  Street  site  in  Charlotte. 

Originally  the  firm  name  was,.Hudson  Silk  Hosiery 
Co.,  but  gradually  after  the  advent  of  nylon  and  be- 
cause of  the  shortage  of  silk,  following  the  War  with 
Japan,  the  firm  shifted  to  nylon  almost  entirely  and 
in  1944  the  firm  name  was  changed  to  Hudson  Hos- 
iery Co.  Only  a  small  percentage  of  present  produc- 
tion is  silk  hosiery.  Capital  stock  of  this  firm  has 
been  increased  over  the  years  until  it  now  stands  at 
$5,500,000.    Fritz  Seifart,  one  of  the  founders,  has 


been  through  the  years  president  and  general  man- 
ager. His  original  partner,  M.  E.  Pierson,  was  vice- 
president  and  secretary  from  the  beginning  until  a 
few  years  ago  when  he  went  into  semi  retirement. 
He  continues  as  vice-president.  About  two  years  ago 
H.  A.  Kirkpatrick,  who  had  been  with  the  firm  for 
many  years,  became  treasurer. 

Hudson  Hosiery  Co.  employs  about  1,800  workers 
in  its  three  plants  and  in  the  general  offices.  The 
firm  manufactures  approximately  30,000  dozen  pairs 
of  women's  fine  full  fashioned  hose  each  week,  large- 
ly nylon  but  using  a  small  percentage  of  silk.  The 
plant  at  712  North  Brevard  Street  contains  about 
60,000  square  feet  of  floor  space  and  employs  about 
400  workers. 

The  Oakhurst  plant,  near  the  Charlotte  city  limits, 
contains  about  150,000  square  feet  of  floor  space 
where  about  1,000  employees  are  engaged  in  operat- 
ing the  116  knitting  machines  and  the  throwing 
plant.  Weekly  production  at  this  plant  is  approxi- 
mately 19,000  dozen  pairs  of  full  fashioned  hose.  At 
the  Shelby  plant  which  turns  out  around  11,000 
dozen  pairs  of  full  fashioned  hose  each  week  about 
400  workers  are  employed.  Forty  knitting  machines 
are  operated  in  this  plant  which  contains  about  30,- 
000  square  feet  of  floor  space. 

Hudson  Hosiery  Co.  maintains  a  sales  office  in 
New  York  in  addition  to  a  number  of  traveling  sales- 
men. 

Hudson  Hosiery  Co.  pays  the  premiums  on  group 
life  insurance  industrial  policies  for  each  employee 
to  the  extent  of  $1,000  with  the  privilege  to  employ- 
ees of  increasing  the  amount  by  another  $1,000.  The 
company  allows  up  to  $4.00  a  day  to  cover  hospital 
room  and  board  charges  and  surgical  costs  up  to 
$112.50  for  its  employees  with  the  privilege  of  in- 
creasing to  $8.00  a  day  to  cover  hospital  room  and 
board  charges  and  surgical  costs  up  to  $150.00.  In  all 
of  its  plants  it  operates  cafeterias  in  which  meals  are 
served  to  all  employees  at  cost. 


PAGE  40 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


WINSTON-SALEM,  KERNERSYILLE  IN 

FORSYTH  ACTIVE  HOSIERY  MAKERS 

Winston-Salem,  with  the  largest  nylon  seamless  hosiery 
plant  in  the  nation,  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills,  and  the  largest 
knit  underwear  plant  in  the  nation,  P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting 
Co.,  supplemented  by  several  nice  hosiery  plants  in  Ker- 
nersville,  has  brought  Forsyth  County  forward  in  the  hos- 
iery and  knit  products  industry  to  sixth  place  in  hosiery 
manufacturing  among  the  counties  of  North  Carolina.  For- 
syth County  has  only  eight  hosiery  mills  but  employment 
reaches  approximately  2,870.  All  of  these  are  seamless 
plants  except  one  small  full  fashioned  plant  located  at 
Clemmons.  Six  of  the  hosiery  plants  are  located  at  Kerners- 
ville,  giving  employment  to  about  1,150  workers.  Included 
in  these  are  large  plants  of  Adams-Millis  Corp.  and  Bur- 
lington Mills.  (See  Adams-Millis,  High  Point,  and  Burling- 
ton Mills,  Greensboro.) 

Winston-Salem,  itself,  has  only  one  large  hosiery  mill  and 
one  large  men's  and  boys'  knit  underwear  mill  with  sev- 
eral plants,  headed  by  Hanes  cousins. 


Hanes  Hosiery  Nation's  Largest  Fine  Seamless  Producer 

Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  Winston-Salem,  was 
organized  in  1900  as  the  Shamrock  Mills  by  John 
Wesley  Hanes  with  about  50  knitting  machines  and 
60  employees  and  producing  women's  cotton  stock- 
ings. Today  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  with  2,200 
knitting  machines,  is  the  largest  manufacturer  of 
seamless,  or  as  the  firm  calls  its  product  "no-seam", 
women's  fine  nylon  hosiery  in  the  entire  nation. 

The  founder  of  what  has  developed  into  one  of 
North  Carolina's  leading  industries  had  previously 
been  a  member,  with  his  brother,  P.  H.  Hanes,  of  P. 
H.  Hanes  &  Co.,  manufacturers  of  tobacco.  At  one 
time  in  the  early  1890s  P.  H.  Hanes  &  Co.  was  the 
largest  tobacco  manufacturing  firm  in  Winston- 
Salem,  topping  in  production  at  that  time  the  R.  J. 
Reynolds  Tobacco  Co.  Just  before  the  turn  of  the 
century  the  Hanes  firm  was  sold  to  the  Reynolds  in- 
terests. The  two  Hanes  brothers  in  this  firm  then 
decided  to  establish  textile  firms  with  a  view  of  estab- 
lishing industries  which  their  sons  could  carry  on. 
P.  H.  Hanes  established  the  P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting 
Co.,  now  the  largest  men's  and  boys'  underwear  knit- 
ting plant  in  the  country.  John  W.  Hanes,  his  young- 
er brother,  established  the  Shamrock  Mills  which  a 
few  years  later  became  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

The  first  Hanes  Hosiery  Mill  was  started  in  1900 
in  a  former  tobacco  factory  on  Marshall  Street,  a 
brick  building  30  x  60  feet  and  three  stories  high. 
The  tobacco  plant  had  been  operated  by  Hodgins 
Bros.  &  Lunn.  The  Hodgins  brothers  were  brothers 
of  Mrs.  John  W.  Hanes.  The  plant  produced  about 
1500  dozen  pairs  a  week  of  women's  cotton  stockings 
in  three  colors,  black,  white  and  cordovan  (brown). 

Meanwhile  in  1903  about  three  years  after  the 
plant  was  started,  John  W.  Hanes,  the  founder,  died. 
His  eldest  son,  Alex  M.  Hanes,  who  had  become  a 
member  of  the  firm  when  it  started,  took  over  the 
plant  and  operated  the  industry  until  1914  when  he 
resigned  to  establish  a  new  industry.  In  1911  a  new 
building  was  erected  near  the  old  building.  This 
new  structure  was  90  x  100  feet  and  two  stories  high. 
The  machinery  was  moved  from  the  old  building  and 
additional  machinery   was   installed.      It   was   then 


that  the  plant  began  the  production  of  men's  socks. 
The  plant  then  was  employing  about  100  people.  In 
1914  the  name  was  changed  from  Shamrock  Mills  to 
Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co.  in  1926  began  extensive 
enlargements  and  expansions.  In  that  year  a  new 
building  was  erected  between  Thirteenth  and  Four- 
teenth Streets  on  the  Norfolk  and  Western  Railway 
and  the  firm  moved  from  its  more  crowded  quarters 
located  near  the  center  of  Winston-Salem.  This  first 
plant  was  500  x  130  feet  and  contained  three  stories. 
Five  years  later  the  first  addition  to  this  plant  was 
erected  to  allow  additional  space  for  machinery  and 
in  1936  another  building  80  x  120  feet  and  three 
stories  high  to  house  the  boarding  department  was 
erected.  Three  years  later,  in  1939,  the  finishing 
mill  was  built  at  Thirteenth  and  Ivy  Avenue  across 
the  street  from  the  other  plants.  This  mill  is  250 
x  250  feet,  three  stories  high,  and  is  connected  with 
the  former  plant  by  an  overhead  runway.  Again  in 
1946  the  company  erected  a  pre-boarding  building 
190  x  120  feet  and  two  stories  high.  The  entire  plant, 
all  of  brick  and  concrete,  fireproof  construction,  now 
contains  approximately  375,000  square  feet  of  floor 
space. 


ssnn»» 


Compact  group  of  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  plants,  Winston-Salem,  largest  nylon  seamless  hosiery  mill  in  the  nation. 


A/INTER-SPRING,    1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  41 


James  Gordon  Hanes,  second  son  of  the  founder, 
who  had  attended  Woodbury  Forest  School  and  grad- 
uated from  the  University  of  North  Carolina  in  1909, 
ioined  the  firm  in  September  of  that  year  and  be- 
came an  official.  When  his  brother,  Alex  Hanes, 
withdrew  from  the  firm  in  1914,  James  G.  Hanes  be- 
came president  and  general  manager.  In  1938  he 
jecame  chairman  of  the  board  of  directors.  Mr. 
ETanes,  in  addition  to  his  duties  as  mill  executive, 
las  been  a  leader  in  Winston-Salem  in  practically 
ill  civic  activities  for  many  years.  He  was  mayor 
)f  Winston-Salem  from  1921  to  1925  and  for  22 
ears,  1927  to  1949,  he  was  chairman  of  the  Board 
)f  County  Commissioners  of  Forsyth  County.  In  ad- 
lition  to  his  other  interests  Mr.  Hanes  is  an  active 
iotarian,  is  chairman  of  the  board  of  trustees  of 
jreensboro  College  and  is  a  director  of  the  Wachovia 
Bank  and  Trust  Co.  and  the  Norfolk  and  Western 
Railway  Co. 

James  N.  Weeks,  who  joined  the  Hanes  Hosiery 
Mills  Co.  in  1915,  served  several  years  as  vice-presi- 
lent  and  later  executive  vice-president  until  he  was 
elected  president  in  1936  when  Mr.  Hanes  became 
chairman  of  the  board.  James  Gordon  Hanes,  Jr., 
mly  son  of  the  head  of  the  organization,  started  with 
;he  firm  in  1938  following  his  graduation  from  Yale 
University.  During  World  War  II  he  served  with 
^aval  Ordnance.  After  the  war  he  returned  to  the 
nill  and  in  1947  was  elected  vice-president  and  di- 
rector. Robert  B.  Crawford,  who  joined  the  firm  in 
L922,  was  elected  secretary  in  1930  and  became  vice- 
Dresident  in  1936. 

Frederick  E.  Sturmer,  another  vice-president,  is 
n  charge  of  Hanes  Hosiery,  Inc.,  sales  organization 
:or  the  company,  with  offices  on  the  24th  floor  of 
;he  Empire  State  Building,  New  York.  Robert  D. 
Byerly,  who  has  been  with  the  Hanes  organization 
since  1920,  has  been  treasurer  of  the  company  since 
L931.  Clifford  W.  Perry,  who  joined  Hanes  in  1937, 
las  been  secretary  since  1948.  Four  superintend- 
ents of  Hanes  Hosiery  are  William  F.  Deuschle,  knif- 
ing; Curtis  H.  Edwards,  boarding;  Phillip  S.  Baker, 
lyeing;  I.  Lindsay  Waggoner,  finishing,  and  Claude 
Frederick  is  personnel  director.  These  officials  are 
ill  directors  of  the  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co.  is  now  capitalized  at 
£3,413,000  of  which  $3,125,700  is  in  common  stock 
md  $287,300  is  in  preferred  stock. 

As  stated,  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills  Co.  is  the  largest 
)rganization  in  the  United  States  making  fine  quality 
ill  nylon  seamless  women's  stockings.  This  firm  was 
i  pioneer  in  developing  the  fine  seamless  stocking. 
For  a  number  of  years,  particularly  since  the  de- 
velopment of  nylon,  Hanes  has  been  making  fine 
seamless  hosiery.  This  type  of  stocking  has  caught 
;he  popular  fancy  and  has  made  remarkable  gains 
luring  the  past  few  years.  Sales  people  report  that 
probably  close  to  25%  of  hosiery  sales  in  the  finer 
iepartment  stores  are  now  seamless  stockings. 
While  pioneering  in  the  production  of  seamless  hos- 
iery Hanes  has  also  been  a  pioneer  in  advertising  and 
merchandising  the   seamless   variety   of   stockings. 


Part  of  Finishing  Department  of  Hanes  Hosiery  Mills, 
Winston-Salem. 

Much  of  the  important  increase  in  seamless  hosiery 
is  credited  to  the  Hanes  organization  because  of  its 
advertising  and  merchandising,  improvement  in 
style,  quality  and  appearance  included  in  the  Hanes 
products. 

Hanes  Hosiery  Mill,  with  its  2,200  knitting  ma- 
chines, now  employs  approximately  2,000  workers. 
The  organization  has  been  built  up  to  its  present  size 
by  plowing  the  bulk  of  its  earnings  back  into  the  in- 
dustry. The  company  has  had  its  own  sales  organ- 
ization in  New  York  since  1931  and  Frederick  E. 
Sturmer  has  been  in  charge  of  the  sales  organization 
since  June,  1952.  Hanes  products  are  distributed 
nation-wide  through  distributors,  wholesalers,  chain 
stores  and  mail  order  houses. 

Hanes  Hosiery  enjoys  particularly  fine  relations 
with  its  large  family  of  employees.  No  small  part  of 
the  friendly  and  effective  spirit  of  the  organization 
is  due  to  the  maintenance  of  the  Hanes  basketball 
girls  clubs.  Hanes  girls  have  been  contenders  with 
schools  and  colleges  throughout  the  country  and  for 
the  past  two  years  have  won  the  National  AAU 
Championships.  Under  the  leadership  of  Virgil  Yow, 
athletic  director,  the  company  maintains  a  large- 
gymnasium  with  areas  for  basketball,  softball  and 
other  sports.  Important  in  the  life  of  the  organiza- 
tion are  the  inter-departmental  teams  in  softball  and 
the  result,  hearty  competition.  Dances,  parties  and 
other  types  of  gatherings  are  held  in  the  gymnasium. 

Hanes  Hosiery  underwrites  a  pension  plan  for  re- 
tired employees,  supplementing  Old  Age  and  Surviv- 
ors Insurance.  The  company  also  supplies  without 
charge  hospitalization  insurance  with  surgery,  group 
insurance,  including  life  insurance  and  weekly  bene- 
fits, to  all  employees  in  the  organization.  Another 
important  unit  is  the  credit  union  operated  by  em- 
ployees entirely  and  under  State  supervision  which 
has  assets  of  around  $415,000.  The  credit  union  ope- 
rates Christmas  savings  funds  each  year. 

James  G.  Hanes  is  a  member  of  the  prominent 
Winston-Salem  Hanes  family.  Among  his  brothers 
are  the  late  Alex  M.  Hanes,  former  chairman  of  the 


PAGE  42 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


State  Highway  Commission;  the  late  Dr.  Fred  M. 
Hanes,  Dean  of  Medicine  of  Duke  Medical  School; 
Robert  M.  Hanes,  president  of  Wachovia  Bank  and 
Trust  Co. ;  John  W.  Hanes,  president  of  Ecusta  Paper 
Corp.,  and  Ralph  P.  Hanes,  also  a  textile  man  who 
established  around  1925  and  operates  the  Hanes  Dye- 
ing and  Finishing  Co.,  Winston-Salem,  a  large  com- 
mission dyeing  and  finishing  plant  for  piece  goods. 
A  cousin,  P.  Huber  Hanes,  is  president  and  chair- 
man of  the  board  of  the  P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting  Co., 
largest  men's  and  boys'  underwear  manufacturing 
firm  in  the  nation. 


KEIINERSVILLE 
Vance  &  King,  Inc. 

Vance  &  Ring,  Inc.,  operates  120  circular  knit  machines 
manufacturing  boys'  and  men's  blazers  and  prep  socks, 
principal  brand  is  "Sharpies"  and  products  are  sold  to 
jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Shreve  &  Adams,  2800 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City.  Sam  F.  Vance,  Jr., 
is  president  and  Clay  V.  Ring  is  secretary-treasurer. 
OTHER  FORSYTH  COUNTY  FIRMS 

Full  Fashioned — Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Vance  Plant) 
(branch  of  Greensboro),  Kernersville;  Snyder  Hosiery  Co., 
Clemmons.  Seamless — Kernersville:  Adams-Millis  Co.  (branch 
of  High  Point) ;  Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Vance  Plant)  (branch 
of  Greensboro);  Crawford  Hosiery  Corp.,  sport  hosiery  and 
anklets;  Randolph  Knitting  Mills,  men's,  boys'  and  misses' 
sport  hosiery;  Vance-Coltrane  Hosiery  Mill,  wool  and  cotton 
half  hose. 


Ragan  and  Maurice  Group  Manufactures  Men's  Fine  Hosiery 


Ragan-Maurice  Mills,  Inc.,  Thomasville,  is  the 
selling  agent,  owned  and  operated  by  the  owners  of 
the  Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  Inc.,  Thomasville,  and  the 
Maurice  Mills  Co.,  Thomasville,  operating  the  distri- 
bution office  in  the  Empire  State  Building  in  New 
York  City.  M.  L.  Bales,  president  of  Maurice  Mills, 
is  president  and  N.  C.  English,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer and  general  manager  of  Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  is 
secretary-treasurer  of  the  selling  agency.  Products 
are  sold  to  jobbers  and  national  chain  stores.  Ragan- 
Maurice  is  also  selling  agent  for  several  other  hos- 
iery manufacturers  in  this  and  other  states. 

Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  Inc. 

Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  Inc.,  Thomasville,  was  organ- 
ized in  1918  with  J.  H.  Adams,  M.  C.  Bales,  Robert 
R.  Ragan  and  A.  H.  Ragan  as  principal  stockholders 
and  officers.  The  firm  started  with  a  few  knitting 
machines  in  the  old  Thomasville  Female  Academy. 
By  1925  the  firm  was  employing  130  workers  and 
producing  1,500  dozen  pairs  of  hosiery  daily. 

Through  various  additions  and  expansions  the 
plant  now  occupies  around  210,000  square  feet  of 
floor  space.  Within  the  past  12  years  the  firm  has 
spent  approximately  $400,000  in  new  buildings,  new 
equipment  and  improvements  in  machinery  and 
equipment.  The  firm  employs  about  500  workers 
and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $1,000,000. 
During  the  past  five  years  Ragan  has  produced  an 
average  of  one  million  dozen  pairs  of  hosiery  each 
year,  the  sales  amounting  to  approximately  $3,000,- 
000  annually. 

Ragan  was  about  the  first  mill  in  the  South  to  pro- 
duce men's  fancy  hose.  Present  production  includes 
both  plain  and  fancy  men's  half  hose  and  slack  socks 
or  anklets.  Principal  brands  are  "Mendproof"  and 
"Nonclare". 

Splendid  employer-employee  relations  have  been 
the  pride  of  the  organization  and  representatives  of 
the  employees  have  participated  in  all  major  and 
minor  policies.  Ragan  has  at  least  40  employees  who 
have  been  with  the  organization  for  25  years  or  more. 
The  plant  carries  insurance  on  all  key  personnel, 
payable  to  the  estates  of  the  insured.  Premiums  are 
paid  in  full  on  group  hospital  and  surgical  insurance. 
One  week  of  paid  vacation  is  granted  each  year  and 


THOMASVILLE,  LEXINGTON.  DENTON 

IN  DAVIDSON,  MEN'S  HOSE  PRODUCERS 

Thomasville,  in  addition  to  its  prominence  as  a  furniture 
manufacturing  city,  is  developing  rapidly  as  a  men's  hosiery 
manufacturing  center.  Along  with  Lexington  and  Denton, 
Thomasville  has  brought  Davidson  County  forward  in  the 
hosiery  industry.  Records  in  the  Employment  Security 
Commission  office  show  that  Davidson  County  contains  21 
hosiery  mills,  employing  about  2,350  workers.  Of  these 
20  are  producing  seamless  hosiery  and  employing  2,075 
workers  while  one  relatively  large  plant  is  engaged  in  man- 
ufacturing other  knit  goods  products.  Thomasville  con- 
tains 12  seamless  hosiery  plants  employing  about  1,725. 
In  Lexington  are  five  seamless  hosiery  plants  and  one  knit 
products  plant,  all  employing  about  425  workers.  Denton 
boasts  of  four  small  hosiery  plants,  three  producing  seam- 
less hosiery  and  one  making  full  fashioned  hosiery,  all 
employing  around  200  workers. 

employees  are  paid  time  and  a  half  for  all  holidays 
on  which  they  work. 

Robert  R.  Ragan  of  High  Point  has  been  president 
of  the  firm  which  carries  his  name  from  the  begin- 
ning although  he  has  never  been  active  in  the  firm. 
Mr.  Ragan,  82  years  old,  is  an  active  hardware  mer- 
chant in  High  Point  and  has  frequently  been  refer- 
red to  as  High  Point's  No.  1  citizen.  His  brother,  A. 
H.  Ragan,  was  vice-president  and  active  in  the  firm 
until  his  death  in  1936.  His  widow,  Mrs.  Grace  H. 
Ragan,  has  been  vice-president  since  his  death,  but 
is  not  active.  T.  J.  Johnson  is  mill  superintendent. 
Amos  Ragan  is  an  officer  and  sales  manager. 

N.  C.  English  has  been  key  man  in  the  organiza- 
tion since  1938.  He  joined  Ragan  in  1928  and  did 
many  jobs  in  the  plant.  His  ability  brought  him  up 
through  the  ranks  and  placed  him  at  the  head  of 
the  organization.  He  was  also  one  of  the  three  or- 
ganizers and  owners  of  the  Carolina  Underwear  Co. 
in  1930  and  has  since  become  president  and  treas- 
urer of  this  firm  which  employs  about  150  people  in 
manufacturing  ladies'  and  men's  broadcloth  paja- 
mas. He  is  president  of  the  English  Motor  Co.,  and 
the  Auto  Finance  Co.  He  is  now  president  of  Asso- 
ciated Industries,  Inc.,  an  organization  of  90  indus- 
trial leaders  in  High  Point,  Jamestown  and  Thomas- 
ville. At  various  times  he  has  served  as  chairman 
of  the  Thomasville  school  board,  president  of  the 
Chamber  of  Commerce,  president  of  the  Rotary  Club 
and  as  Mayor  of  Thomasville. 


A/INTER-SPRING,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  43 


Maurice  Mills  Co. 

Maurice  Mills  Co.,  Thomasville,  was  organized  in 
L925  by  T.  E.  Jennings  and  Maurice  L.  Bales  and  for 
;wo  years  occupied  the  old  Duke  Power  Building  in 
[oroducing  women's  seamless  hose. 

Two  years  later,  in  1927,  the  firm  erected  a  new 
Duilding  at  117  Taylor  Street  and  installed  some  of 
;he  latest  men's  half  hose  machines.  Through  vari- 
ous expansions  and  enlargements  the  firm  shifted  to 
nen's  hose  exclusively  after  a  period  in  which  chil- 
dren's hosiery  was  manufactured.  The  firm  now 
produces  men's  plain  and  fancy  half  hose  and  ank- 
ets. 

The  firm  now  operates  more  than  300  of  the  latest 
ype  men's  hose  machines,  employing  approximately 
500  workers  and  with  an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of 
j>500,000.  Annual  sales  amount  to  approximately 
[>1,500,000.  Sales  are  made  to  many  larger  chain 
stores  and  leading  jobbers  through  the  Ragan-Maur- 
ce  Mills,  sales  agent  in  New  York. 

T.  E.  Jennings  who  had  been  active  previously  in 
;he  Cramer  Furniture  Co.,  the  People's  B  &  L  Asso- 
dation  and  as  secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  former 
rennings  Manufacturing  Co.,  served  as  president  of 
VTaurice  Mills  until  his  retirement  in  1940.  M.  L. 
Bales  has  since  served  as  president  and  assistant 
reasurer.  Joseph  W.  Bales  is  treasurer  and  T.  A. 
larrison  is  secretary.  Charles  Cline  is  plant  super- 
ntendent.    Maurice  Mills  is  capitalized  at  $170,000. 

Other  large  Thomasville  plants  follow: 
Fremont  and  Dogwood 

Fremont  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  organized  in  1934  and  start- 
d  as  a  small  plant,  is  now  capitalized  at  $400,000,  and 
iroduces  children's  and  misses'  anklets,  5/8ths  and  crew 
ocks.  It  operates  130  circular  knit  machines.  Its  princi- 
ial  brands  are  "Coquette"  and  "Musketeer".  E.  F.  Men- 
ienhall  is  president  and  Delk  F.  Mendenhall  is  vice-presi- 
.ent  and  superintendent.  The  firm  employs  about  180 
workers  and  produces  about  50,000  dozen  pairs  of  hose  a 
nonth.  Fremont  also  purchases  all  products  of  Dogwood 
losiery  Co.,  Inc.,  Thomasville,  which  produces  in  finish- 
d  form  only  boys'  novelty  and  blazer  half  socks.  A.  A. 
rimm  is  president  of  Dogwood  and  R.  W.  Primm  is  vice- 
resident  and  general  manager.  Its  own  sales  agency  is 
iullock  Hosiery,  Inc.,  New  York  City. 
Hill  Hosiery  Mill 

Hill  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.,  Thomasville,  operates  150  circular 
nit  machines,  produces,  dyes  and  finishes  misses'  and  chil- 
ren's  anklets  and  boys'  slack  socks.  C.  C.  Hill  is  presi- 
ent  and  J.  H.  Yokley  is  treasurer  and  superintendent, 
'roducts  are  sold  through  Ragan-Maurice  Mills,  Inc.,  New 
ork  City. 

Thomasville  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Thomasville  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $350,000, 
perates  165  circular  knit  machines  and  produces,  dyes  and 
dishes  misses',  boys'  and  children's  anklets  and  men's 
rraps  and  reverse  hose.  A  related  firm  is  Blackstone  Hos- 
?ry  Mills,  Inc.,  operating  243  circular  knit  machines  and 
roducing  men's  plain  and  wrap  half  hose  in  cotton,  rayon 
ad  silk  and  boys'  anklets.  Its  principal  brands  are  "Black- 
:one"  and  "Vacuum  Grip"  and  the  products  are  finished 
y  the  Thomasville  Hosiery  Mills.  Both  firms  are  headed 
y  George  Blankstein,  Greensboro,  with  A.  G.  Greenburg 
5  an  official  in  both  firms.  Selling  agent  for  both  firms 
i  George  Blankstein  Co.,  Inc.,  330  Fifth  Avenue,  New 
ork,  and  products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores. 
Wrenn  Hosiery  Co. 

Wrenn  Hosiery  Co.,  with  290  circular  knit  machines,  pro- 
uces,  dyes  and  finishes  men's  and  boys'  slacks,  children's 
lklets,  ladies'  and  misses'  anklets  and  crew  socks.  Seborn 
erry  is  president  and  G.  W.  Campbell  is  treasurer.  Wrenn- 
utting  Co.,  New  York  City,  is  sales  agency. 

DENTON 
Bisher  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Bisher  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  240  circular  knit 
lachines  in  the  production  of  men's  and  boys'  hose.  Prod- 
cts  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Bert  P. 


Crawford  Co.,  2826  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City. 
C.  Bisher  is  president  and  treasurer  and  Mamie  M.  Bisher  is 
secretary. 

Thornton  Knitting  Co. 

Thornton  Knitting  Co.,  capitalized  at  $100,000,  operates 
200  circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  novelty  half 
hose  and  ankle  socks  (finished  at  Maurice  Mills,  Thomas- 
ville). Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  to  special  num- 
bers of  chain  stores  through  Ragan-Maurice  Mills,  Inc.,  27  23 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City.  N.  C.  English, 
Thomasville,  is  president,  and  S.  W.  Burton  is  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

LEXINGTON 
Monntcastle  Knitting  Co. 

Mountcastle  Knitting  Co.,  capitalized  at  $100,000,  ope- 
rates 150  circular  knit  machines  producing  children's  hos- 
iery and  boys'  slack  socks,  principal  brands  of  which  are 
"Mountcastle"  and  "School  Pals".  Products  are  sold  to 
jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  P.  T.  Cuthbert  &  Co.,  271 
Church  St.,  New  York  City.  Kenneth  F.  Mountcastle  and 
W.  Clifford  Greer  are  partners. 

Other  Davidson  County  Firms 

Full  Fashioned — Hoburt  Hosiery,  Denton. 

Seamless — Morris  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  Banner  wraps  and 
reverse  half  hose,  Denton;  Lexington:  Altar  Hosiery  Mill; 
Irving  Knitting  Mills,  infants'  hosiery;  Koonts  Hosiery  Mill, 
men's  ribbed  socks;  Yarborough  Hosiery  Mill,  boys'  ingrain 
slack  socks;  Thomasville:  Swaim-McLain  Hosiery  Mills, 
Inc.;  Van  B.  Strickland;  Variety  Knitting  Co.;  Surratt  Hos- 
iery Mills,  boys'  slacks,  ingrain  knit,  Newsom. 


SURRY  COUNTY  AND  MOUNT  AIRY  ARE 

LARGE  PRODUCERS  OF  MEN'S  HOSIERY 

Surry  County  contains  13  hosiery  mills  employing 
more  than  3,300  workers,  including  12  seamless  hos- 
iery mills  and  one  full  fashioned  hosiery  mill.  In 
addition,  six  plants  are  engaged  in  producing  other 
knit  products.  Mount  Airy  is  the  largest  hosiery 
center  in  the  county,  containing  11  plants,  employing 
about  2,220  workers,  in  addition  to  five  plants  pro- 
ducing other  knit  products  and  employing  about  835 
workers. 

Pilot  Mountain  contains  one  large  full  fashioned 
hosiery  plant  affiliated  with  a  High  Point  firm,  one 
seamless  plant  and  one  knit  products  plant. 

MOUNT  AIRY 

Barber  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Barber  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  operates  2'23  circular  knit  ma- 
chines producing  infants',  children's  and  misses'  anklets. 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through 
Heathcote  Hosiery  Co.,  Inc.,  4416  Empire  State  Building, 
New  York  City.  D.  C.  Lewis  is  president  and  treasurer  and 
H.  A.  Hair,  secretary. 

Granite  Hosiery  Mills 

Granite  Hosiery  Mills  operates  42  5  circular  knit  ma- 
chines producing  men's  and  boys'  argyle  wraps  and  blazer 
stripes.  Products  are  sold  through  S.  D.  Arrowwood  &  Co., 
Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City,  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores.  O.  B.  Ashburn  is  partner  and  general  manager  and 
W.  T.  Brown  is  office  manager. 

Renfro  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Renfro  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  with  capital  of  $707,200,  ope- 
rates 540  circular  knit  machines  producing  children's  and 
infants'  hosiery  and  misses'  anklets.  Products  are  sold  to 
jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  S.  D.  Arrowwood  &  Co., 
2701  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City.  O.  K.  Merritt 
is  president;  W.  E.  Merritt,  treasurer,  and  H.  L.  Merritt  is 
secretary  and  superintendent. 

Other  Surry  County  Firms 

Full  Fashioned — Pilot  Mountain:  Amos-Smith  Hosiery 
Co. 

Seamless — Mount  Airy:  Ashburn  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  and 
boys'  slack  socks  and  argyles;  Barber-Allen  Hosiery  Mills, 
boys'  and  men's  blazer  stripes  and  plaits;  Carter  Hosiery 
Mills,  Inc.,  children's  and  misses'  crew  solid  color,  boys' 
and  men's  stripes  and  reverse  plait;  Dowdy  Hosiery  Mills; 
Franklin  Hosiery  Mills;  Lynne  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  anklets 
and  half  socks,  mercerized  infants'  goods  with  wrap  top 
decorations  and  stripes  with  colored  picot  edge;  Ridgewood 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  boys'  fancy  ingrain  slack  socks;  Trio 
Knitting  Mills;  Pilot  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Pilot  Mountain. 


PAGE  44 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195: 


Durham  Hosiery  Mills  Early  and  Historic  State  Industry 


Durham  Hosiery  Mills,  Durham,  established  in 
1898  by  General  Julian  S.  Carr,  important  industrial 
and  financial  leader,  has  at  least  three  important 
claims  to  fame.  In  the  decade  following  the  turn  of 
the  century,  it  was  credited  with  being  the  largest 
hosiery  mill  in  the  world.  It  established  what  was 
said  to  be  the  first  full  fashioned  hosiery  mill  in  the 
South  in  1922.  The  third  claim  is  that  it  operates  the 
only  hosiery  mill  in  the  nation  which  has  been  man- 
ned entirely  by  Negro  women  (some  men)  except 
supervisory  personnel  since  it  was  established  in 
1904. 

General  Carr,  who  established  and  was  principal 
owner  of  numerous  Durham  industrial  and  financial 
organizations  before  and  after  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury, established  a  hosiery  and  yarn  mill  in  the  Edge- 
mont  section  of  Durham,  off  East  Main  St.,  as  a  rela- 
tively large  enterprise  in  that  day.  Additions  were 
made  to  this  plant  during  the  next  few  years,  direct- 
ed by  Julian  S.  Carr,  Jr.,  active  head  of  the  organiza- 
tion. In  its  earlier  years  the  Durham  Hosiery  Mills 
was  engaged  in  producing  seamless  hosiery.  With 
the  advent  of  silk  hosiery  in  the  early  twenties,  much 
of  the  machinery  and  equipment  owned  by  this  or- 
ganization became  obsolete. 

Meanwhile  around  1912  Mr.  Carr  built  another 
^hosiery  mill  in  High  Point  which  was  engaged  for 
several  years  in  the  manufacture  of  men's  half  hose. 
This  is  now  an  overall  plant.  In  1916  he  erected 
another  plant  in  Goldsboro  which  produced  chil- 
dren's hose.  Later  this  became  a  Ford  agency  head- 
quarters. In  1920  the  firm  purchased  two  mills  in 
a  suburb  of  Chapel  Hill,  now  named  Carrboro  in 
General  Carr's  honor,  from  Tom  Lloyd,  noted  as  a 


DURHAM  COUNTY 
Durham  County  contains  seven  hosiery  mills  employing 
more  than  1,200  workers,  Employment  Security  Commission 
records  show.  Of  these  tour  mills  are  engaged  in  the  mami- 
facture  of  seamless  hosiery  and  three,  including  the  large 
Durham  Hosiery  Mills,  produce  full  fashioned  hosiery,  em- 
ploying an  average  of  nearly  1,000  workers. 


"iiilBlMi 


Durham  Hosiery  Mills'  Full  Fashioned  Plant  in  Durham,  thoroughly,  remodeled  recently. 


mill  owner  who  could  neither  read  nor  write.  These 
are  now  the  Carrboro  Woolen  Mills  operating  as  a 
division  of  Pacific  Mills,  Boston,  Mass. 

During  the  1920-21  period,  Durham  Hosiery  Milk 
erected  the  first  full  fashioned  hosiery  mill  in  the 
South  at  109  South  Corcoran  Street  in  the  heart  oi 
Durham.  This  plant,  said  to  be  one  of  the  most  mod- 
ern mill  buildings  in  the  South  at  that  time,  begar 
operation  in  1922.  Durham  Hosiery  Mills  has  re- 
cently completed  a  thorough  modernization  of  this 
women's  nylon  hosiery  plant  throughout  its  five 
floors.  This  reconstruction  includes  bricking  up  all 
of  the  large  windows  in  the  entire  building  except 
for  small  thermopane  windows  which  serve  the  psy 
chological  effect  of  permitting  the  workers  to  see 
outside.  Part  of  the  renovation  included  the  installa- 
tion of  air  conditioning  and  installing  a  complete  sys- 
tem of  fluorescent  lighting.  Also  included  was  the 
installation  of  entirely  new  full  fashioned  51  and  60 
gauge  knitting  machines.  A  loud  speaker  system 
used  for  musical  programs  during  four  half-hour  pe- 
riods each  day  and  for  paging  key  personnel  and 
other  announcements  was  installed. 

General  Carr  continued  general  supervision  of  his 
knitting  mill  as  well  as  his  other  industrial  and  finan- 
cial activities  until  a  few  years  before  his  death  in 
1924.  However,  Julian  S.  Carr,  Jr.,  his  eldest  son 
who  joined  the  firm  at  the  time 
/  y  it  started  in  1898,  handled  the 
y'^y  details  of  the  mill's  operations. 
yy      y'y"y  It  was  this  son  who  was  the  real 

/      y^y  manager  of  the  knitting  activi- 

■yyf  ties.     Many  years  ahead  of  his 

time  he  inaugurated  industrial 
democracy  in  the  plant,  based  on 
sharing  the  profits  with  the  em- 
ployees. This  plan  worked  well 
when  there  were  profits  to  share, 
but  a  method  of  keeping  employ- 
ees satisfied  when  there  were  no 
profits  presented  many  prob- 
lems. Young  Julian  Carr  con- 
tinued to  manage  the  hosiery 
mill  and  served  as  president  of 
the  company  for  22  years  prior 
to  his  death  in  1922.  Another 
son,  A.  Marvin  Carr,  joined  the 
firm  around  1900  and  became 
sales  manager  in  New  York.  He 
died  about  1920.  Claiborn  Carr, 
another  son,  joined  the  firm  in 
1905  and  remained  with  it  until 
1928,  serving  as  president  from 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  45 


Sectional  inew  of  30-section  full  fashioned   knitting  machine 
in  Durham  Hosiery  Mills,  Durham. 

1922  to  1928.  At  that  time  he  joined  the  American 
;Enka  Corp.  in  its  New  York  offices  and  later  became 
vice-president  of  that  corporation.  He  retired  in 
1950  and  now  lives  in  Biltmore  Forest. 

Will  F.  Carr,  a  double  first  cousin  of  General 
Carr's  children  and  for  many  years  Mayor  of  Dur- 
ham, went  with  the  Durham  Hosiery  Mill  as  a  young- 
man  in  1903.  Working  up  through  the  ranks  he  was 
elected  vice-president  and  secretary  in  1932,  jobs  he 
still  holds.  During  the  reorganization  period  in 
which  the  plants  in  Carrboro,  High  Point  and  Golds- 
boro  were  sold  off,  D.  P.  Carey  served  as  president 
for  several  years.  Austin  H.  Carr,  younger  son  of 
General  Carr,  who  had  joined  the  organization 
around  1918,  remained  with  the  firm  for  almost  a 
quarter  of  a  century,  serving  as  president  for  six  or 
eight  years  until  his  death  in  February,  1942. 

Meanwhile,  around  1925,  John  Sprunt  Hill,  im- 
portant Durham  financier  and  philanthropist,  pur- 
chased a  large  interest  in  the  Durham  Hosiery  Mill. 
Following  Austin  Carr's  death  in  1942,  William  W. 
Sledge  was  elected  president,  a  position  he  continues 
to  hold.  Present  officers,  in  addition  to  President 
Sledge,  are  W.  W.  Couch,  Jr.,  vice-president,  elected 
in  1942 ;  W.  F.  Carr,  vice-president  and  secretary, 
elected  in  1932;  E.  M.  Hunter,  Jr.,  assistant  treasur- 
er, and  W.  J.  O'Connor,  Jr.,  assistant  secretary  and 
assistant  treasurer.  Directors,  all  except  one  living 
in  Durham,  include  F.  D.  Bozarth,  W.  F.  Carr,  W.  W. 
Couch,  Jr.,  Claude  Currie,  0.  W.  Dowd  of  Raleigh, 


D.  St.  Pierre  Du  Bose,  John  Sprunt  Hill  and  William 
W.  Sledge. 

Durham  Hosiery  Mills  now  consist  of  two  plants 
with  four  divisions,  all  in  Durham.  Approximately 
700  people  are  employed  including  executives  and 
supervisory  staff  and  the  production  payroll  ranges 
between  $25,000  and  $30,000  a  week.  In  the  109 
South  Corcoran  plant  about  380  workers  are  em- 
ployed in  producing  "Durham  Durable"  full  fash- 
ioned nylon  hosiery  and  in  making  boxes  and  con- 
tainers for  packing  and  shipping  this  hosiery.  At 
the  Edgemont  plant  the  yarn  mill  employs  about  115 
workers  in  producing  the  threads  for  the  hosiery. 
In  the  same  building  is  located  the  plant  for  manu- 
facturing men's  work  socks  employing  about  115 
Negro  women.  This  innovation,  employing  Negro 
women,  officials  declare,  has  continued  entirely  sat- 
isfactorily since  its  inauguration  almost  50  years 
ago. 

The  report  for  1951  to  the  stockholders  by  Presi- 
dent Sledge  shows  satisfactory  operation  despite  the 
trouble  in  purchasing  in  the  last  half  of  the  year  fol- 
lowing the  "scare  buying"  in  the  first  half  of  the 
year.  This  report  shows  that  sales  in  1951  included 
358,000  dozen  pairs  of  women's  hosiery  for  $2,767,- 
000,  410,000  dozen  pairs  of  men's  work  socks  for 
$840,000  and  638,000  pounds  of  synthetic  and  cotton 
yarns  for  $1,569,000.  The  report  also  shows  that 
profits  before  taxes  on  income  in  1951  amounted  to 
$623,000  and  $307,000  after  income  taxes  were  paid. 
Normal  production  schedules  were  maintained  in  the 
hosiery  plant  with  only  a  small  increase  in  invento- 
ries of  finished  goods  at  the  end  of  the  year,  Presi- 
dent Sledge  reports. 

Ganii  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Gann  Hosiery  Mills  Co.  operates  160  circular  knit  ma- 
chines in  the  production  of  girls'  and  boys'  crew  socks,  re- 
verse plait,  sport  socks,  wraps,  rib  wraps,  links  and  links 
and  men's  work  socks.  Principal  brands  are  "Gay",  "Gann" 
and  "Frontline",  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  depart- 
ment stores  through  Iselin-Jefferson  Co.,  Inc.,  3003  Empire 
State  Building,  New  York  City.  J.  R.  Gann  is  president. 
Louise  Knitting  Mills  Co. 

Louise  Knitting  Mills  Co.,  capitalized  at  $180,000,  ope- 
rates three  circular  knit  machines  in  producing  Genuine 
wrap,  half  hose  and  tru-rib  slack  socks,  celanese,  rayon, 
lisle  and  crepetone,  both  regular  lengths  and  slack  socks 
on  spirals  and  boys'  half  hose.  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers 
and  chain  stores.  T.  H.  Allison  is  president  and  K.  C. 
Stone,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Other  Durham   County  Firms 

Full  Fashioned — Durham:  Hillcrest  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.; 
Hamilton  Hosiery  Finishers,  Inc. 

Seamless — Durham:  Better  Knit  Hosiery  Mills,  men's 
half  hose;  J.  E.  Chappel  Hosiery  Mill. 


Hoover  of  Concord  Big  Producer  of  Fine  Women's  Hosiery 


Hoover  of  Concord  Hosiery  Co.  had  its  beginning 
in  1915  when  the  late  A.  R.  Hoover,  Sr.,  a  hosiery 
pioneer  in  North  Carolina  and  the  South,  founded 
the  G-H-Y  Hosiery  Co.  and  began  operations  in  a 
small  building  with  a  few  women's  seamless  hosiery 
machines  and  a  handful  of  employees.  Today  this 
million  dollar  corporation  produces  the  popular  and 
stylish  full  fashioned  "Townwear — Stockings  of 
Matchless  Beauty"  for  distribution  from  leading  de- 


partment stores  and  high  class  retail  stores  through- 
out the  nation.  This  firm  was  a  North  Carolina  pio- 
neer in  the  production  of  full  fashioned  hosiery  both 
in  the  earlier  silk  stockings  and  later  in  nylon  hos- 
iery. 

The  original  G-H-Y  Hosiery  Co.  in  1918  became 
the  Concord  Knitting  Co.  producing  women's  seam- 
less hosiery.  This  building,  purchased  several  years 
later,  was  used  by  another  corporation  until  1946. 


PAGE  46 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195: 


Modern  and  recently  enlarged  plant  of  Hoover  Hosiery  Co.,  Concord. 


In  1920  Mr.  Hoover  built  a  new  building  at  Depot 
and  Crowell  Streets  in  Concord  to  begin  the  manu- 
facture of  full  fashioned  hosiery.  The  42-gauge  full 
fashioned  machines  with  which  the  building  was 
equipped  were  the  first  in  the  South  and  the  finest 
gauge  machines  that  could  be  obtained  at  the  time. 
Operations  proved  entirely  successful  from  the  be- 
ginning. 

Mr.  Hoover  in  1933  expanded  operations  by  build- 
ing a  new  plant  on  Kerr  Street  which  he  equipped 
with  51-gauge  Hilscher  machines  imported  from 
Germany.  These  were  among  the  first  of  this  gauge 
installed  in  the  South.  This  marked  the  beginning 
of  the  manufacture  of  very  sheer  2-  and  3-thread 
silk  hosiery  styles  which  were  distributed  under  the 
registered  brand  name  "Townwear"  to  department 
stores  and  specialty  shops  throughout  the  United 
States. 

Two  years  later  in  1935  construction  was  started 
to  double  the  capacity  of  the  Kerr  Street  plant.  Mr. 
Hoover  died  in  1936  before  the  expanded  facilities 
of  the  new  plant  were  completed.  His  son,  A.  R. 
Hoover,  Jr.,  took  over  the  active  management  of  the 
business  at  that  time  and  has  since  been  in  charge. 
This  Kerr  Street  plant,  when  completed,  was  modern 
in  every  detail  with  latest  equipment  in  the  new  dye 
house,  finishing  and  boarding  departments.  Mean- 
while the  plant  at  Depot  and  Crowell  Streets  was  sold 
in  1937  to  Penn-Carol  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  and  this 
plant  is  now  operated  as  the  Carol-May  Finishing  Co. 

When  the  du  Pont  Company  first  produced  nylon 
yarn  in  1938,  it  selected  ten  of  the  leading  hosiery 
companies  in  the  country  to  experiment  with  this 
new  fiber  in  making  hosiery.  Significantly  Hoover 
Hosiery  Co.  was  one  of  this  group  of  ten  manufac- 
turers selected. 

A.  R.  Hoover,  Jr.,  in  1947  began  the  construction 
of  a  new  plant  on  Highway  29A,  just  outside  the  city 
limits  of  Concord,  completing  it  in  1948.  This  plant 
is  completely  air  conditioned  with  a  constant  temper- 
ature and  relative  humidity  remains  constant.     The 


CABARRUS  COUNTY 
Cabarrus  County,  long  an  important  textile  center,  als< 
contains  several  important  hosiery  mills.  Employment  Se 
curity  Commission  records  show  that  seven  mills,  includ 
ing  a  large  knit  products  plant,  employ  an  average  of  al 
most  1,100  workers.  Four  full  fashioned  hosiery  mill 
employ  about  725  workers  and  two  other  plants  produc 
seamless  hosiery.  Concord  operates  five  plants,  four  hos 
iery  and  one  knit  products  mill,  employing  almost  1,00| 
workers.  At  Midland  is  located  a  branch  plant  of  Chad 
bourn  Hosiery  Mills,  Charlotte. 


building  was  designed  for  a  total  of  40  knitting  ma 
chines  and  has  all  permanent  walls  of  glazed  til 
throughout  the  production  area.  The  concrete  floor 
are  covered  with  walkways  of  maple  flooring  betweei 
the  knitting  machines  to  prevent  excessive  employe 
fatigue. 

The  new  plant  on  Highway  29A  contains  floo 
space  of  35,000  square  feet.  Within  five  years  it  be 
came  evident  that  this  plant  was  not  sufficient  tj 
supply  the  increasing  demand  for  "Townwear"  hos 
iery  and  at  present  an  addition  similar  in  design  ant 
construction  to  the  original  plant  is  under  construe 
tion.  When  completed,  this  will  increase  the  floo 
space  of  the  plant  to  55,000  square  feet.  The  Ker 
Street  plant,  which  had  been  in  use  since  1936,  wa 
sold  in  March,  1952,  to  Oscar  Heineman  Corp. 

The  Hoover  Hosiery  Co.,  now  operated  by  the  secj 
ond  generation  members  of  the  Hoover  family, 
capitalized  at  $1,000,000.  A.  R.  Hoover,  Jr.,  is  sec 
retary  and  treasurer  and  in  charge  of  operations 
Mrs.  A.  R.  Hoover,  Sr.,  is  president,  and  L.  M.  Cald 
well  is  vice-president  and  sales  manager.  B.  Y.  Fag 
gart  is  plant  manager. 

The  Hoover  organization  maintains  its  own  sale 
offices  in  New  York  and  Chicago  and  its  sales  force 
cover  the  entire  nation  with  headquarters  located  a 
central  points  throughout  the  country.  The  New  Yorl 
sales  offices  are  located  at  2819  Empire  State  Build 
ing,  New  York  City,  with  F.  X.  Heep,  manager,  an< 
Sydney  Chait  is  manager  of  the  Chicago  office  local 
ed  at  1512  South  State  Court. 


Hugh  Grey  Expanding  Production  of  Women's  Fine  Hosiery 


Hugh  Grey  Hosiery  Co.,  Concord,  actually  had  its 
beginning  in  1931  when  A.  R.  Hoover  and  Hugh  M. 
Grey  organized  the  Concord  Knitting  Co.  and  estab- 
lished a  small  plant  at  266  Ann  Street.  The  plant, 
40  x  80  feet,  with  two  floors  and  a  small  dye  house 
nearby,  operated  about  60  seamless  knitting  ma- 


chines and  employed  about  50  workers.  This  plan 
was  taken  over  by  Hugh  Grey  Hosiery  Co.  later  ani 
the  operations  ended  at  this  site  in  1946. 

Hugh  Grey  Hosiery  Co.  was  organized  in  1937  b; 
Hugh  M.  Grey  and  associates  with  Hugh  M.  Gre; 
as  secretary  and  treasurer  and  general  manager.  Hi 


A/INTER-SPRING,    1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  47 


irst  plant  was  erected  at  the  present  site  at  Smith 
md  Spring  Street.  The  new  plant  began  the  produc- 
;ion  of  full  fashioned  hosiery,  using  silk  for  three 
)r  four  years,  until  it  became  too  scarce  due  to  the 
;rouble  with  Japan.  The  plant  then  shifted  to  Rayon 
)y  allotment  and  as  Nylon  became  available,  shifted 
;o  that  filament  around  1945-46.  Seamless  hose  were 
)roduced  at  the  Concord  Knitting  Co.  plant  until  that 
)lant  was  liquidated  in  1946. 

Through  addition  of  a  new  building  at  the  Smith 
md  Spring  Street  site  the  plant  now  has  floor  space 
)f  approximately  110,000  feet.  The  firm  employs 
ipproximately  500  workers  and  has  a  payroll  well 
>ver  $1,300,000  a  year.  The  plant  produces  about 
100,000  dozen  pairs  of  high  grade  full  fashioned  hos- 
ery  each  year,  the  annual  sales  amounting  to  around 
53,000,000.  Products  are  packed  under  customer's 
)rands  and  are  sold  to  chain  and  large  department 
stores  throughout  the  country.  S.  D.  Arrowwood  & 
1o.,  2701  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City,  is 
jelling  agent. 

Hugh  Grey  Hosiery  Co.  has  capital  assets  of  ap- 
proximately $2,000,000.  Hugh  M.  Grey  is  president 
md  treasurer.  John  P.  Reader  is  vice-president  and 
production  manager;  W.  B.  Cochran  is  vice-presi- 
lent  and  general  superintendent  and  W.  W.  Flowe, 
Jr.,  is  secretary.  J.  C.  Cobert  is  knitting  superin- 
;endent  and  D.  L.  Copenhauer  is  finishing  superin- 
;endent. 

Mr.  Grey,  founder  and  principal  operator  of  the 
company,  is  a  native  of  Davidson  and  an  A.B.  grad- 
uate of  Davidson  College  and  did  post  graduate  work 
it  the  University  of  Chicago.    He  was  a  former  di- 


Recently  constructed  modern  plant  of  Hugh  Grey  Hosiery 
Co.,  Concord. 

rector  of  the  National  Association  of  Hosiery  Manu- 
facturers and  during  the  war  period  was  chief  of  the 
Hosiery  Section  of  the  War  Production  Board.  Act- 
ive in  civic  affairs  he  is  a  member  of  the  Board  of 
Light  and  Water  Commissioners  of  Concord  and  was 
formerly  president  of  the  Cabarrus  County  ( ?)  Club. 

Willis  Hosiery  Mills 

Willis  Hosiery  Mills,  capitalized  at  $36,000,  operates  330 
circular  knit  machines  producing  ladies'  seamless  rayon, 
mercerized  cotton  plaited  and  nylon  hosiery.  Principal 
brands  are  "Silver  Cloud"  and  "Silver  Seal".  Products  are 
sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Ragan-Maurice 
Mills,  Inc.,  350  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City.  C.  H.  Willis  is 
president;  Martin  Laffarty  and  E.  C.  Cook,  vice-presidents,  and 
E.  K.  Willis,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Other  Cabarrus  County  Firms 

Full  Fashioned — Concord:  Blaine  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.; 
Shoaf  Hosiery  Mills. 


Wiscassett  Mills  Produce  Cannon's  FinejQuality  Hosiery 


Wiscassett  Mills  Co.,  full  fashioned  hosiery  divi- 
sion, Albemarle,  began  operation  in  1903  when  the 
company  purchased  the  Windemere  Knitting  Mill  at 
i  cost  of  $33,200  and  incorporated  the  knitting  opera- 
;ion  into  the  already  operating  cotton  yarn  plant.  In 
L921  a  separate  full  fashioned  hosiery  plant  was 
Brected  some  distance  from  the  spinning  mill. 

Wiscassett  Mills  Company's  spinning  operations 
oegan  when  the  company  was  organized  in  1898  by 
James  W.  Cannon,  founder  and  for  many  years  head 
3f  the  Cannon  Mills  Co.,  whose  principal  plants  are 
located  in  Kannapolis  and  Concord.     The  company 


Hosiery  plant  (rear  view)  of  Wiscassett  Mills,  Albemarle, 
where  Cannon  hosiery  is  made. 


was  incorporated  in  July,  1898,  with  authorized  cap- 
ital of  $250,000.  Present  capitalization  is  $3,600,000 
and  both  the  spinning  and  hosiery  operations  are  in- 
cluded under  the  one  corporation.  Most  of  the  in- 
crease has  been  through  stock  dividends  and  the 
company  has  not  failed  to  pay  dividends  since  1900, 
two  years  after  the  plant  started. 

James  W.  Cannon  was  president  of  Wiscassett  for 
a  number  of  years  and  J.  C.  Leslie  was  secretary- 
treasurer  and  general  manager  for  a  long  period. 
Joseph  F.  Cannon  succeeded  his  father  as  president, 
serving  until  1922  when  he  was  succeeded  by  Charles 
A.  Cannon,  president  of  Cannon  Mills  Co.  T.  M. 
Denning  has  been  general  superintendent  from  the 
beginning  and  his  son,  W.  F.  Denning  is  now  vice- 
president  in  charge  of  manufacture.  C.  W.  Gaddy 
was  general  manager  of  the  hosiery  division  for 
many  years  until  his  death.  He  was  succeeded  by 
E.  M.  Henning  who  died  in  1952  and  was  succeeded 
by  William  Fitzgerald,  present  general  manager. 

Hearne  Swink,  a  vice-president  of  Cannon  Mills, 
has  been  vice-president  and  secretary  of  Wiscassett 
for  about  a  decade.  R.  L.  Holbrook  is  treasurer;  W. 
A.  Lyon,  assistant  secretary ;  R.  L.  Sells  and  W.  C. 
Cannon,  son  of  Charles  A.  Cannon,  are  assistant 
treasurers. 

The  hosiery  division  of  Wiscassett  now  operates 
approximately  100  knitting  machines  and  probably 


PAGE   48 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


20%  of  the  company's  operations  are  devoted  to  the 
production  of  hosiery.  The  combined  operations  em- 
ploy 3,000  or  more  workers  and  approximately  25% 
of  the  employees  are  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of 
hosiery-  Since  the  hosiery  division  has  been  pro- 
ducing fine  quality  nylon  hosiery.  Cannon  hosiery  is 
beginning  to  take  its  place  with  the  very  early  Can- 
non cloth  and  with  the  present  popular  Cannon  tow- 
els and  Cannon  sheets.  Sales  are  handled  through 
Cannon   Mills,   Inc.,   70  Worth   Street,   New   York. 

Wiscassett  Mills  has  a  splendid  record  of  employer- 
employee  relations.  The  plant  has  a  hospitalization 
plan,  all  costs  paid  by  the  company,  and  another  hos- 
pitalization plan  with  surgical  benefits  and  group  life 
insurance  paid  by  both  employees  and  employer.  Wis- 
cassett gives  its  employees  one  week  of  vacation  with 
pay. 

In  1948  the  mill  organization  built  a  modern  YM 
CA  Building  with  food  service  department,  library, 
gymnasium,  showers  and  club  rooms  for  men,  wo- 
men, boys  and  girls,  all  available  to  all  citizens  of 
Albemarle  and  community.  The  YMCA  operates 
commissaries  in  the  two  plants  for  the  convenience 
of  the  employees.  Wiscassett  Park,  covering  one  city 
block  with  plenty  of  trees  and  grass  and  equipped 
with  a  pavilion,  tennis  courts,  swings  and  see-saws, 
is  located  across  the  street  from  the  YMCA.  The 
mill  provides  an  athletic  park  lighted  for  night  games 
and  the  employees  conduct  organized  baseball  and 
basketball  contests  under  athletic  directors. 

Lillian    Knitting'   Mills 

Lillian  Knitting  Mills,  capitalized  at  $300,0  00,  operates 
28  full  fashioned  machines  in  the  production  of  ladies' 
hosiery.  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores 
through  Shreve  &  Adams,  Inc.,  2800  Empire  State  Building, 


STANLY  COUNTY  HOSIERY 

Stanly  County  contains  seven  hosiery  mills  employing 
about  1,340  workers,  including  two  small  seamless  hosierj 
plants  and  Ave  full  fashioned  hosiery  plants.  Most  impor- 
tant of  these  are  the  full  fashioned  division  of  Wiscassett 
Mills  at  Albemarle  with  three  other  full  fashioned  plants 
and  one  seamless  plant.  One  full  fashioned  plant  is  located 
at  Oakboro  and  a  seamless  plant  is  operated  at  Stanfleld. 


New  York   City.      H.   C.   Patterson  is   president,   A.   L.   Pat- 
terson, Jr.,  secretary,  and  A.  L.  Patterson,  treasurer. 
Other  Stanly  County  Plants 

Full  Fashioned — Albemarle:  Austin  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.; 
Dixie  Knitting  Mills;   Oakboro:   Stanly  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 

Seamless — Albemarle:  Albemarle  Mills  Co.,  men's  and 
boys'  reverse  plait  and  wraps;  Stanfield:  Crystal  Hosier} 
Mills,   infants'   anklets. 


Wiscassett  Memorial  YMCA.  which,  with  a  playground  covering 
one  block,  is  used  by  the  citizens  of  Albemarle. 


Gaston  County  Big  Textile  Producer,  Including  Hosiery 


Gaston  County,  North  Carolina's  leading  textile 
county  and  recognized  as  the  "World  Capital  of 
Combed  Yarn  Products",  also  occupies  an  important 
position  in  the  manufacture  of  hosiery  and  other  knit 
products.  The  county  contains  eight  hosiery  mills 
employing  about  1,300  workers,  including  three 
seamless  hosiery  mills  and  five  full  fashioned  mills, 
in  addition  to  six  mills  producing  other  knit  prod- 
ucts. 

Belmont  is  the  principal  hosiery  producing  center 
in  Gaston  County,  Employment  Security  Commission 
records  showing  that  Belmont  has  seven  hosiery  and 
knitting  plants,  employing  nearly  1,100  workers,  in- 
cluding four  full  fashioned  mills,  one  large  seamless 
hosiery  mill  and  two  small  knit  products  plants. 
Gastonia  contains  three  relatively  small  hosiery 
mills.  At  Mount  Holly  are  located  one  small  and  one 
large  plant  producing  other  knit  fabrics  while  at 
Lowell  another  small  plant  produces  knit  specialties. 

BELMONT 
Belmont  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Belmont  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $600,1)00,  ope- 
rates 300  circular  knit  machines  producing  men's  plain  and 
fancy  half  hose  and  misses'  anklets.  The  products  are  sold 
to   jobbers   and   chain   stores.      The   New    York   office   is   at 


2  617    Empire   State   Building,   New   York   City,   with   R.    E. 
Heinl  as  manager.     R.  Dave  Hall  is  president;   C.  J.  Deitz, 
secretary,  and  S.   P.   Stowe,  Jr.,  treasurer. 
Knit  Products  Corp. 

Knit  Products  Corp.  with  capital  of  $3  50,00  0  operates  3  8 
full  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery.  Princi- 
pal brands  are  "Excel  Sheer",  "De-Moda",  "Vision"  and 
"Tide  of  Fashion".  Products  are  sold  to  department  stores 
and  retailers  through  the  Arm's  selling  agency,  Knit  prod- 
ucts Sales  Co.,  15  24  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City. 
J.  Harold  Lineberger  is  president  and  Henry  A.  Lineberger 
is  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Knit   Products  Corp.  No.  2 

Knit  Products  Corp.  No.  2  is  capitalized  at  $1,000,000 
and  operates  16  full  fashioned  hosiery  machines  producing 
ladies'  hosiery,  the  brand,  "Vision".  The  Knit  Products 
Rales  Co.,  15  24  Empire  State  Building,  is  selling  agency, 
products  going  to  department  stores  and  retailers.  Henry 
A.  Lineberger  is  chairman  of  the  board;  Joe  W.  Lineberger, 
president;  Maloy  Davis,  vice-president  and  sales  manager, 
and  Frank  P.  Hall,  secretary  and  treasurer. 
Knit  Products  Corp.  No.  3 

Knit  Products  Corp.  No.  3,  formerly  Hatch  Full  Fashioned 
Hosiery  Co.,  capitalized  at  $212,000,  operates  2'4  full  fash- 
ioned machines  producing  ladies'  nylon  hosiery,  the  princi- 
pal   brand    being    "Vision".       Products    are    sold    to    chainji 
stores,   department  stores  and  retailers  through   the  firm's! 
selling  agency,  Knit  Products  Sales  Co.,  15  24  Empire  Statel 
Building,  New   York   City,   T.   D.   Martin,   manager.      Henry: 
A.  Lineberger  is  chairman  of  the  board;  Joe  W.  Lineberger. f 
president;   R.  L.  Stowe,  vice-president,  and  Frank  P.   Hall, 
Jr.,  secretary  and  treasurer. 


VlNTER-SPRING,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  49 


Outlook  Manufacturing  Co. 

Outlook  Manufacturing  Co.,  capitalized  at  $102,000,  ope- 
ates  10  0  circular  knit  machines  producing  ladies'  seamless 
ylon  hosiery,  principal  brand  of  which  is  "Vision".  Prod- 
cts  are  sold  to  department  stores  and  retailers  by  the 
Srm's  own  selling  agency,  Knit  Products  Sales  Co.,  1524 
mpire  State  Building,  New  York  City.  Joseph  W.  Line- 
erger  is  president;  Frank  P.  Hall,  secretary,  and  Henry  A. 
ineberger,  treasurer  and  manager. 

Other  Gaston  County  Firms 

Full  Fashioned — Sumner  Hosiery  Mill;   Wisteria  Hosiery 
Tills,  Inc.,  Gastonia. 

Seamless — Belmont  Knitting  Co.,  Belmont. 


Mcdowell  county  contains  dozen 


WILKES  COUNTY 

Wilkes  County  contains  two  relatively  large  seam- 
ess  hosiery  plants,  both  located  at  North  Wilkes- 
ioro. 

Skyland  Textile  Co. 

Skyland  Textile  Co.,  with  $100,000  capital,  operates  276 
ircular  knit  machines  producing  anklets.  Products  are 
old  in  grey.  C.  H.  Whittle  is  president;  Forrest  E.  Tug- 
nan  is  vice-president  and  manager  and  J.  E.  Sunderland  is 
reasurer. 

Wilkes  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Wilkes  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  capitalized  at  $412,500,  ope- 
ates  450  circular  knit  machines  in  manufacturing  men's 
alf  hose  in  Genuine  wrap.  Brands  are  "Sir  Wilkes",  "Mo- 
ul"  and  "Sir  Bruce".  Goods  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
tores  through  Hanes  Hosiery,  Inc.,  2401  Empire  State 
iuilding,  New  York  City.  P.  Ward  Eshelman  is  president 
nd  treasurer;  T.  G.  McLaughlin,  vice-president,  and  Rus- 
ell  G.  Hodges,  secretary. 


MONTGOMERY  COUNTY 

Montgomery  County  contains  eight  seamless  hos- 
3ry  plants,  most  of  them  small  and  all  employing 
ome  less  than  600  workers,  Employment  Security 
Commission  records  show.  Six  of  these  plants  are 
)cated  at  Mount  Gilead,  while  small  plants  are  lo- 
afed at  Star  and  Candor. 

Clayson  Knitting  Co. 

Clayson  Knitting  Co.,  Star,  operates  117  circular  knit 
lachines  in  the  production  of  men's  and  boys'  blazer  stripes 
nd  reverse  plaits.  Principal  brands  are  "Bronk",  "Soc 
ling"  and  "Rancheose".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers, 
hain  stores  and  retailers  through  Rudin  &  Roth,  1225 
iroadway,  New  York  City.  C.  B.  Richardson  is  proprietor 
nd  manager  and  C.  R.  Lassiter  is  secretary. 
Russell  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Russell  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Star,  capital  $300,000,  ope- 
ates  240  circular  knit  machines  producing  children's, 
lisses'  and  boys'  anklets  and  short  hose,  both  in  firey 
oods.  Principal  brand  is  "Laundry  Locked".  Products  are 
Did  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores  through 
le  firm's  New  York  office,  3  50  Fifth  Avenue,  Roy  Steen, 
lanager.  Paul  Russell  is  president;  A.  G.  Russell,  secre- 
iry,  and  Blanch  C.  Russell,  treasurer. 

Sox,  Inc. 

Sox,  Inc.,  Mount  Gilead,  capitalized  at  $250,000,  operates 
00  circular  knit  machines  manufacturing  boys'  blazers  and 
ten's  reverse  plaited  socks.  Brands  are  "Jaunty"  and 
Dix-E-Nit".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and 
epartment  stores.  Lee  Johnson  is  president  and  superin- 
sndent  and  D.  A.  Bruton  is  secretary  and  treasurer. 
Other  Montgomery  Plants 

Seamless — Candor:  Candor  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  and  boys' 
igrain  knit  blazers;  Mount  Gilead:  Russell-Harvelle  Hos- 
jfy  Mills,  children's  and  misses'  anklets,  boys'  ingrain  half 
)cks;  Star:  Newsom  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  elastic  top  cotton 
iklets;  Pine  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  boys'  and  misses'  ingrain 
nklets  and  3/4  socks;   Montgomery  Hosiery  Mill. 


SEAMLESS  MILLS,  ONE  FULL  FASHION 

McDowell  is  another  area  in  which  numbers  of 
small  hosiery  plants  are  located.  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission  records  show  that  the  county  con- 
tains 13  hosiery  mills,  employing  about  550  workers. 
Twelve  of  these  are  engaged  in  the  production  of 
seamless  hosiery  and  one  small  full  fashioned  hosiery 
mill.  Another  small  plant  produces  other  knit  prod- 
ucts. Marion  contains  ten  seamless  hosiery  mills  and 
one  full  fashioned  hosiery  plant.  Old  Fort  contains 
one  small  seamless  hosiery  plant  and  a  nice  special- 
ties plant  and  a  small  half  hose  and  anklet  plant  is 
located  at  Sevier. 

MARION 
Josephine  Mills,  Inc. 

Josephine  Mills,  Inc.,  capitalized  at  $50,000,  operates  175 
circular  knit  machines  in  the  manufacture  of  men's  half 
hose  in  celanese,  rayon  and  cotton.  Principal  brand  is 
-"Nominee"  and  products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores  through  Burgio  Bros.,  3  50  Fifth  Ave.,  New  York 
City.  C.  F.  Smith  is  president  and  superintendent  and 
Carter  Hudgens,  secretary  and  treasurer. 
Marion  Hosiery  Mills 

Marion  Hosiery  Mills,  capital  $13,000,  operates  150  cir- 
cular knit  machines  producing  men's  half  hose  and  slacks 
in  celanese  and  rayon,  acetate  and  cotton,  men's  long  socks 
and  slacks  in  plain,  combed,  mock  twist  and  random.  Prod- 
ucts are  sold  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  department  stores  and 
retailers  through  Chester  A.  Roth  Co.,  Inc.,  38  9  Fifth  Ave- 
nue, New  York  City,  and  300  West  Adams  St.,  Chicago,  111. 
Grayson  Neal  is  president. 

Elizabeth  James  Mills 

Elizabeth  James  Mills,  capitalized  at  $250,000,  operates 
15  full  fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery,  chief 
brand  of  which  is  "Lady  Elizabeth".  The  firm  sells  to  job- 
bers, chain  stores,  department  stores  and  retailers  through 
its  New  York  office,  93  Worth  Street,  J.  A.  Sacks,  manager. 
C.  Jack  James  is  manager  and  treasurer  and  Pearl  H.  Queen 
is  secretary. 

Other  McDowell  County  Firms 

Seamless — Marion:  Barnesline  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  half 
hose  in  100%  full  mercerized,  rayon  with  stem  clocks,  cel- 
anese and  rayons  with  patterns,  elastic  top  anklets  and 
half  hose;  Hawkins  Hosiery  Mill,  anklets;  Hensley  Hosiery 
Mill;  Hewitt  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  ingrain  boys'  and  men's 
sport  hose,  argyles  and  cushion  sole;  R.  L.  James  &  Sons 
Hosiery  Mill,  half  hose;  McCall  Hosiery  Mills,  men's  cotton 
anklets  and  rayon  wraps;  McPar  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.,  men's 
plain  and  fancy  half  hose;  Overlook  Knitting  Mills,  Inc., 
half  hose;  Old  Fort:  Parker  Hosiery  Mills,  anklets;  Sevier: 
Sarah  Good  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  half  hose  and  anklets. 

lotte,  located  at  Shelby  (See  Hudson  Hosiery  Co., 
Charlotte).  The  other  is  the  Mauney  Hosiery  Mills, 
Inc.,  at  Kings  Mountain. 

Mauney  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Mauney  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Kings  Mountain,  capitalized 
at  $250,000,  operates  112  circular  knit  machines  in  the 
production  of  komet  link  and  link,  Banner  wrap  reverse 
plaits  and  solid  colors.  Principal  brands  are  "KingCraft" 
and  "Winner".  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores.  W.  K.  Mauney,  Jr.,  is  president  and  Carl  F.  Mau- 
ney, secretary  and  treasurer. 


CLEVELAND  COUNTY 

Cleveland  County  boasts  of  two  nice  hosiery  mills 
i  addition  to  its  other  numerous  textile  plants.  One 
f  these  is  a  branch  of  Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Char- 


EDGECOMBE  COUNTY 

Edgecombe  County  contains  two  fairly  large  seam- 
less hosiery  mills,  both  located  at  Tarboro. 

Runnymede  Mills,  Inc. 

Rnnnymede  Mills,  Inc.,  Tarboro,  with  capital  of  $80,000, 
operates  159  circular  knit  machines,  producing  "Runny- 
mede" brands  of  misses'  and  children's  crew  socks,  ank- 
lets and  half  socks.  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain 
stores  through  Shreve  &  Adams,  Inc.,  2  80  0  Empire  State 
Building,  New  York  City.     Rawls  Howard  is  president  and 


PAGE  50 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195 


treasurer;     Robert    Howard,    vice-president    and    Vera    B. 
Smith,  secretary. 

Another  Tarboro  plant,  Mayo  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  pro- 
duces misses',  children's  and  infants'  anklets  and  crew 
socks.  

HALIFAX  COUNTY 

Halifax  County  contains  one  relatively  large  seam- 
less hosiery  plant. 

Halifax  County  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Halifax  County  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Scotland  Neck,  with 
capital  of  $600,000,  operates  3  50  circular  knit  machines 
manufacturing  men's  and  children's  anklets,  principal 
brands,  "Halifax"  and  "Scottie".  Products  are  sold  to 
jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Burgio  Bros.,  Inc.,  3  50 
Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City.  F.  H.  Gregory  is  president 
and  Ennis  Bryan  is  secretary  and  treasurer. 

HENDERSON  COUNTY 

Henderson  County  contains  seven  hosiery  mills, 
employing  an  average  of  about  400  workers,  accord- 
ing to  the  records  of  the  Employment  Security 
Commission.  These  include  three  seamless  hosiery 
mills  and  four  full  fashioned  hosiery  mills.  Hen- 
dersonville  contains  three  relatively  small  full  fash- 
ioned hosiery  operations  while  three  seamless  hos- 
iery plants  are  in  operation  at  East  Flat  Rock. 

Chipman  LaOoss  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Chipman  LaCrosse  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  East  Flat  Rock, 
with  $500,000  capital,  operates  340  circular  knit  machines 
in  producing  men's  mercerized  rayon  half  hose  and  slacks. 
Products  are  sold  to  jobbers  and  chain  stores  through  Chas. 
Chipman's  Sons  Co.,  Inc.,  801  Empire  State  Building,  New 
York  City.  Harry  E.  Katzenmoyer  is  president  and  Kenneth 
H.  Burns,  secretary. 

Full  Fashioned — Hendersonville:  Grey  Hosiery  Mills, 
Inc.;  Higdon  Knitting  Mill,  Inc.;  R.  &  S.  Hosiery  Mill; 
Rogers  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc.;  Seamless — East  Flat  Rock:  Brit- 
tain  Hosiery  Mill,  men's  and  boys'  anklets;  East  Flat  Rock 
Knitting  Mill.  

IREDELL  COUNTY 

Iredell  County  contains  two  hosiery  mills,  one 
seamless,  the  other  full  fashioned,  and  three  knit 
products,  one  very  large,  records  of  the  Employment 
Security  Commission  show.  These  plants,  including 
one  relatively  large  full  fashioned  hosiery  mill  and 
one  small  seamless  hosiery  plant,  are  located  at 
Statesville. 

Stimpson  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Stimpson  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Statesville,  operates  2*9  full 
fashioned  machines  producing  ladies'  hosiery.  Products 
are  sold  through  Hollywood  House,  Inc.,  358  Fifth  Avenue, 
New  York  City,  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  department  stores 
and  retailers.  C.  Stimpson,  Jr.,  is  president  and  R.  E. 
Turnipseed  is  secretary. 

Another  Statesville  plant,  Walton  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
produces  men's  half  hose  and  work  socks  and  misses'  ank- 
lets. 

MITCHELL  COUNTY 

Mitchell  County,  in  Western  North  Carolina  hills 
and  more  famous  for  its  mica,  contains  three  hosiery 
plants  employing  about  375  workers.  All  of  these, 
including  one  large,  one  medium  and  one  small  plant, 
are  located  in  Spruce  Pine,  all  producing  seamless 
hosiery. 

Robbins  Knitting  Co. 

Robbins  Knitting  Co.,  Spruce  Pine,  with  capital  of  $60,- 
000,  operates  424  circular  knit  machines  manufacturing 
men's  wraps,  half  hose  and  anklets,  men's  and  boys'  ingrain 
anklets  and  ladies'  seamless  hose.  Principal  brands  are 
"Robbins",  "Chavalier"  and  "Qualified"  and  products  are 
sold  to  jobbers   and   chain  stores  through   the   firm's  New 


York  office,  3  50  Fifth  Avenue,  Charles  G.  Chamberlai 
manager.  F.  H.  Robbins,  president  and  treasurer,  and  J.  ' 
Whitesell,  secretary. 

The  Vaughan  Corp. 

The  Vaughan  Corp.,  Spruce  Pine,  (branch  of  the  Vaugha 
Knitting  Co.,  Pottstown,  Pa.)  operates  140  circular  kn 
machines  producing  men's,  misses'  and  children's  hosier 
Products  are  sold  to  chain  stores  and  department  store 
A.  E.  Vaughan,  Jr.,  is  president  and  treasurer  and  S. 
Henry,  secretary,  both  of  Pottstown,  Pa.,  with  B.  R.  Wrigl 
as  manager  and  superintendent. 

Another  Spruce  Pine  plant,  Cline  Hosiery  Mills,  product 
half  hose. 

PASQUOTANK  COUNTY 

Pasquotank  County  contains  two  hosiery  plant 
both  at  Elizabeth  City.  One  is  the  large  Robinso 
Manufacturing  Co.  (Hosiery  Division) ,  making  bot 
seamless  and  full  fashioned  hosiery,  and  the  Pasqu( 
tank  Hosiery  Co.,  a  small  seamless  hosiery  plant. 

Robinson  Manufacturing  Co. 

Robinson  Manufacturing  Co.,  Hosiery  Division,  Elizabet 
City,     capitalized     at     $600,000,     operates     234     circular     kn 
machines  producing  ladies'  nylon  and  rayon  seamless  hos 
iery.   Principal  brands  are  "Peach  Bloom",  "Avalon",  "Carolin 
Belle"   and   "Robinson".    (Operates   11,600-spindle  yarn  mill 
This  plant  also  operates  26  full  fashioned  hosiery  machines  pr< 
ducing    ladies'    hosiery.      Principal    brands    are    "Carolin 
Maid",    "Betsy's    Best",    "Lady-Nee-Hi"    and    "Robinson 
Products  are  sold  direct  to  jobbers,  chain  stores,  departmenl 
stores  and  retail  stores.     Officers  are  C.  O.  Robinson,  presi 
dent;   C.   O.   Robinson,  Jr.,  and  C.   H.   Robinson,  vice-presi 
dents,  and  W.   B.  Robinson,  treasurer. 


LIMITED  HOSIERY  OPERATIONS 

North  Carolina  has  27  counties  with  limited  operations  ii 
the  production  of  hosiery.     These,  alphabetically,  follow: 

Alexander  County  has  two  small  seamless  hosiery  plant 
and  one  large  knit  products  plant,  all  of  which  are  locatec 
at  Taylorsville,  the  county  seat.  Plants  operating  ar 
Alexander  Knitting  Co.  and  Miller-White  Hosiery  Mills 
The  knit  products  plant  is  Brookwood  Mills,  Inc.. 

Anson  County  has  three  plants  in  the  hosiery  and  knit 
ting  industry  which  employ  approximately  400  workers 
The  largest  of  these  is  a  full  fashioned  hosiery  plant  ope 
rated  by  Burlington  Mills,  Inc.,  and  employing  about  25( 
workers  (See  Burlington  Mills,  Greensboro). 

Buncombe  County  contains  four  hosiery  mills  which  em 
ploy  an  average  of  about  425  workers.  Two  of  these  are 
relatively  large  full  fashioned  hosiery  mills  located  in  Ashe 
ville,  the  Asheville  Hosiery  Co.  and  the  Skyland  Hosier} 
Mills,  Inc.  A  seamless  hosiery  plant,  Broadway  Hosier} 
Mills,  is  located  in  Asheville  and  another  seamless  plant 
Black  Mountain  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  is  located  at  Black 
Mountain. 

Caldwell  County  contains  four  hosiery  mills  employing 
about  250  workers,  Employment  Security  Commission  rec- 
ords show.  Three  of  these  are  small  seamless  mills  and 
one  produces  full  fashioned  hosiery.  The  full  fashioned 
hosiery  plant  is  located  at  Lenoir  and  three  small  seamless 
hosiery  mills  operate  at  Granite  Falls.  They  are:  Full 
Fashioned — Lenoir:  Lenoir  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.;  Seamless — 
Granite  Falls:  Caldwell  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  half  hose, 
with  rubber  tops,  and  men's  and  boys'  half  hose  and  ank- 
lets, plain  and  fancy,  in  mercerized  cotton,  rayon  and  celan- 
ese  with  spun  silk  and  dyed  celanese  stripes  and  plaids; 
Huffman  Finishing. 

Caswell  County  is  the  location  of  two  small  but  nice  full 
fashioned  hosiery  mills,  both  located  at  Yanceyville.  They 
are  Atwater  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  and  Caswell  Knitting  Mills, 
Inc. 

Chatham  County  contains  three  hosiery  mills  employing 
several  hundred  workers.  These  are  a  branch  in  Siler  City 
of  Chadbourn  Hosiery  Mills,  Charlotte;  the  Siler  City  Mfg 
Co.,  Siler  City,  and  a  branch  at  Pittsboro  of  Standard  Hos- 
iery Mills,  Inc.,  Burlington. 

Cherokee  County  contains  one  nice  full  fashioned  hosiery 
mill,  the  Berkshire  Knitting  Mills  at  Andrews. 

Cumberland  County — Fayetteville:  Fayetteville  Knitting 
Mills,  Inc.  (owned  by  Standard  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Burling- 
ton). 


A'INTER-SPRING,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  5 1 


Davie  County — Mocksville:  Imperial  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
rayon,  acetate  and  mercerized  half  hose  and  anklets. 

Granville  County  contains  two  hosiery  mills,  both  rela- 
tively small,  Henfine  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  at  Butner,  produc- 
ing full  fashioned  hosiery,  and  Vogue  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
Oxford,  manufacturing  men's  and  boys'  English  ribs  and 
links  and  links. 

Lee  County  contains  two  small  but  nice  full  fashioned 
hosiery  plants,  both  located  at  Sanford.  They  are  Sanford 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  and  Wyatt  Knitting  Co.,  Inc. 

Lenoir  County — Kinston:  Thompson  Hosiery  Mills,  full 
fashioned. 

Lincoln  County — Lincolnton:  Glenn  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  half 
tiose. 

Moore  County  contains  three  hosiery  mills,  two  seamless 
and  one  full  fashioned,  and  one  small  knit  products  plant, 
rwo  small  seamless  hosiery  plants  are  at  Carthage  and 
one  nice  full  fashioned  plant  and  a  small  knit  products 
plant  are  located  at  Aberdeen.  They  are:  Full  Fashioned — 
Aberdeen:  Aberdeen  Hosiery  Mills  Co.,  Inc.;  Seamless — 
Carthage:  Currie  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  half  hose  and  slacks  in 
;otton,  rayon,  and  acetate;  Phillips-Russell  Hosiery  Mill, 
Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  slack  socks. 

Orange  County  contains  two  small  full  fashioned  hosiery 
plants,  Efland  Knitting  Co.  and  Orange  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc., 
both  located  at  Efland. 

Pitt  County — Full  Fashioned — Greenville  Full  Fashioned 
Hosiery  Mills,  Greenville. 

Polk  County  contains  two  nice  full  fashioned  hosiery 
plants.  One  of  these  is  a  branch  at  Tryon  of  Adams-Millis 
Corp.  (See  Adams-Millis  Corp.,  High  Point)  and  the  other 
is  the  R  &  J  Hosiery  Co.,  located  at  Saluda. 

Richmond  County  has  two  hosiery  mills,  one  the  full 
fashioned  plant  of  Sandhurst  Mills,  Inc.,  at  Rockingham, 
and  the  other  the  Commonwealth  Hosiery  Mills  at  Ellerbe, 
producing  seamless  hosiery  and  a  branch  of  Randleman. 

Rockingham  County  contains  three  knitting  plants  em- 
ploying about  1,3  60  workers,  two  small  full  fashioned 
plants,  one  at  Madison  and  the  other  at  Reidsville,  and  the 


large  knit  products  plant  of  Washington  Mills  Co.  at  Mayo- 
dan.  They  are  Atwater-Waynick  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Reids- 
ville, and  Sharnay  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Madison. 

Rowan  County  contains  three  small  knitting  plants,  two 
of  them  producing  seamless  hosiery  and  the  other  producing 
other  knit  products.  One  seamless  and  full  fashioned  hos- 
iery plant  and  one  small  knit  products  plants  are  located  in 
Salisbury  and  a  seamless  hosiery  plant  is  at  Rockwell. 
Summers  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Salisbury  produces  ladies' 
seamless  and  full  fashioned  hosiery.  Heist-McCain  Hosiery 
Corp.,  Rockwell,  produces  children's  and  misses'  anklets. 

Rutherford  County  has  only  one  hosiery  mill,  Sterling- 
Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  located  at  Spindale.  This  mill,  capital- 
ized at  $445,545,  operates  16  full  fashioned  machines  pro- 
ducing ladies'  hosiery.  Products  are  sold  to  jobbers.  T. 
Max  Watson  is  president  and  treasurer  and  Allen  H.  Painter 
is  secretary. 

Stokes  County — Wee-Sox  Hosiery  Mills,  Walnut  Cove 
(Branch  of  Randleman). 

Swain  County — Van  Raalte  Co.,  Inc.,  (Branch  of  417 
Fifth  Ave.,  N.Y.C.),  Bryson  City. 

Transylvania  County  has  only  one  hosiery  mill,  A.  W. 
Wheeler  &  Son,  Inc.,  located  at  Brevard.  This  mill  operates 
7  2  full  fashioned  hosiery  machines  producing  ladies'  hos- 
iery, chief  brand  of  which  is  "Wheeler".  Products  are  sold 
to  jobbers,  chain  stores  and  department  stores  through  Sol 
&  De  Han,  22  2  West  Adams  Street,  Chicago,  111.  George  W. 
Wheeler  is  president  and  treasurer  and  G.  W.  Douglas  is 
secretary. 

Vance  County  contains  three  relatively  small  seamless 
hosiery  mills,  all  employing  more  than  100  workers  and  all 
located  at  Henderson.  They  are  Continental  Hosiery  Co., 
boys'  crew  socks,  children's  5/8  stockings  and  children's 
anklets;  Soft  Spun  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys' 
hosiery;  Acca  Hosiery  Mills. 

Wake  County — J.  S.  M.  Hosiery,  men's  and  ladies'  cotton 
hosiery  and  inner  baseball  hose,   Raleigh. 

Yancey  County — Burnsville  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc.,  Burns- 
ville,  cotton  work  socks. 


Knitting,  Other  Than  Hosiery,  Developing  Rapidly  in  State 


North  Carolina  is  making  extensive  progress  in 
the  development  and  expansion  of  the  knitting  in- 
dustry, exclusive  of  hosiery.  In  addition  to  the  more 
basic  production  of  knit  underwear  and  outerwear, 
knit  specialties  and  novelties  are  now  being  produc- 
ed in  greater  quantities.  Plants  in  this  State  have 
developed  high  quality  knit  items  and  are  expanding 
these  operations  more  rapidly,  relatively,  than  the 
expansion  of  hosiery. 

Records  in  the  Employment  Security  Commission 
office  show  that  in  24  counties  of  the  100  in  the  State 
are  knitting  plants,  other  than  hosiery.  Also  it  is 
shown  that  57  firms  covered  by  the  Employment 
Security  Law  are  in  operation,  employing  an  average 
of  approximately  11,225  workers.  Figures  here  are 
those  for  the  second  quarter  of  1952  and  may  not 
show  a  complete  picture  of  the  extent  of  the  opera- 
tions, since  it  is  possible  that  some  of  the  plants  nor- 
mally in  operation  may  not  have  been  operating  at 
that  time,  or  may  not  have  had  in  employment  as 
many  workers  as  usual. 

Forsyth  County  has  by  far  the  largest  employ- 
ment in  knitting,  Catawba  County  ranks  second,  fol- 
lowed by  Rockingham.  Other  counties  in  order  of 
employment  are  Alamance,  Surry,  Iredell,  Gaston, 
Duplin,  New  Hanover,  Cabarrus,  Randolph,  David- 
son, Alexander,  Mecklenburg,  Cleveland,  Robeson, 
Guilford,  Person,  McDowell,  Moore,  Burke,  Ashe  and 
Rowan. 


Clark's  1952  Buyers'  Guide  to  Southern  Hosiery 
and  Knitwear  Manufacturers  divides  the  knitting 
industry,  exclusive  of  hosiery,  into  two  sections,  Knit 
Underwear  and  Outerwear  and  Knit  Specialties 
Manufacturers.  Lists  of  these,  with  types  of  prod- 
ucts, are  given  below. 

OUTERWEAR — UNDERWEAR 

Asheboro — Stedman  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  tee  shirts 
and  briefs,  men's  athletic  underwear,  men's  knit  and  woven 
shorts.  Brands,  "Stedman  Athletic",  "Stedman  Brief"  and 
"Stedman  Tailored  T".  S.  B.  Stedman,  president;  W.  D. 
Stedman,  vice-president  and  treasurer. 

Belmont — Beltex  Corporation,  interlock  fabric  and  T-shirts 
for  men.  I.  E.  Howe,  president;  George  M.  Howe,  secretary; 
Harold  R.  Howe,  treasurer. 

Charlotte — Southern  Knitwear  Mills,  Inc.,  children's  and  in- 
fants' knitwear.  Brand,  "Sterntex".  Fred  Stern,  president; 
E.  T.  Stern,  secretary. 

Gastonia — Piedmont  Fabrics,  men's  T-shirts.  Brand,  "Pied- 
mont", Sam  R.  Planer,  president;  Max  Planer,  secretary  and 
treasurer. 

Mayodan — Washington  Mills  Co.  (Mayodan  Plant)  Office 
Winston-Salem,  men's  and  boys'  heavy  weight  underwear, 
men's  and  boys'  athletic  shirts,  tee  shirts,  polo  shirts  and  briefs. 
Brand,  "Mayo".  Operates  24,296  spindle  yarn  mill.  R.  A. 
Spaugh,  Jr.,  Winston-Salem,  president;  W.  H.  Bollin,  vice-presi- 
dent; C.  H.  Reid,  secretary  and  vice-president;  E.  F.  Tulloch, 
treasurer  and  vice-president. 

Mount  Airy — Allendale  Mills,  Inc.,  men's,  ladies'  and  chil- 
dren's sport  shirts,  sweaters  and  pajamas.  Brand,  "Allendale". 
Fred  A.  Preddy,  president;  J.  H.  Blalock,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer. 

Mount  Airy  Knitting  Co. — complete  infants'  and  children's 
underwear,  all  weights,  birth  to  12  years.  F.  L.  Hatcher,  presi- 
dent and  treasurer;  J.  H.  Crossingham,  secretary  and  super- 
intendent. 

Pine  State  Knitwear  Co.,  men's,  ladies'  and  boys'  sweaters 


PAGE  52 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


and  polo  coats.     John  Springthorpe,  president;    Lindsay  Hol- 
comb,  secretary,  treasurer  and  superintendent. 

Quality  Mills,  Inc.,  men's  and  boys'  athletic  shirts,  T-shirts 
and  polo  shirts  and  briefs  and  children's  training  panties  and 
pajamas  and  infants'  shirts.  H.  0.  Woltz,  president;  G.  C. 
Woltz,  secretary  and  treasurer;  James  Mayberry,  vice-presi- 
dent and  superintendent. 

Statesville — Empire  Mfg.  Corp- — polo  shirts  and  T-shirts. 
Brand,  "Empire".  Wm,  I.  Smith,  president;  F.  R.  Messinger, 
secretary  and  treasurer. 

Iredell  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  infants'  and  children's  polo  shirts, 
creepers  and  cardigans.  Brand,  "Iredell".  Robert  Kahlman, 
N.  Y.  City,  president;   Marjorie  Schell,  secretary-manager. 

Wadesboro — West  Knitting  Corp.,  men's  and  boys'  winter 
union  suits,  athletic  shirts  and  T-shirts.  F.  A.  Huntley,  presi- 
dent; F.  S.  Tillman,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Winston-Salem — P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting  Co.,  men's  and  boys' 
winter  and  summer  knit  underwear  and  sportswear,  men's  and 
boys'  woven  shorts  and  union  suits,  children's  knitted  sleeping 
garments  and  sportswear.  Brand,  "Hanes".  Operates  44,748- 
spindle  cotton  yarn  mill.  P.  Huber  Hanes,  chairman  of  board; 
P.  H.  Hanes,  Jr.,  president;  T.  O.  Moore,  vice-president  and 
general  counsel;  R.  A.  Lambertson,  secretary  and  treasurer. 
(Started  operation  in  1902;  said  to  be  largest  men's  and  boys' 
underwear  manufacturer  in  the  world). 

Indera  Mills  Co.,  petticoats,  knitted  and  woven,  knitted  knee 
warmers.  Brand,  Indera  Figurlit.  Mrs.  E.  F.  Willingham, 
president;  E.  F.  Willingham,  vice-president;  J.  Lee  Keiger, 
secretary  and  treasurer. 

KNIT  SPECIALTIES 

Belmont — Cornucopia  Corporation,  knitted  fabrics  for  under- 
wear and  outerwear.  C.  G.  Wilson,  president  and  treasurer; 
C.  G.  Wilson,  Jr.,  secretary. 

Southern  Yarn  and  Processing  Co.,  circular  knit  fabrics. 
Henry  G.  Stowe,  president;  B.  M.  Stowe,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer. 

Burlington — Burlington  Mills  Corp.   (Tricot  Plant). 

Webco  Mills,  Inc.,  tricot  jersey  and  net  fabrics.  Reid  A. 
Maynard,  president;  Webb  Durham,  secretary,  treasurer  and 
general  manager. 

Charlotte — Lawrence  Knitting  Co.,  polo  shirt  fabrics  and 
novelty  fabrics,  Lawrence  Levy,  president  and  treasurer:  Leola 
Fischman,  secretary. 

Maru  Corporation,  circular  knit,  flat  knit  and  ribbed,  E.  E. 
Suttle,  president;   S.  W.  Hall,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Stowe  Mfg.  Co.,  cotton  ribbing  and  jersey  for  outerwear  and 
underwear  trade,  stockingette  and  industrial  tubings.  Lester 
H.  Stowe,  Jr.,  proprietor. 

Not  operating  May,  1952 — Superior  Knitters,  Inc.,  jersey  fab- 
rics. L.  D.  Black,  president;  S.  R.  Mauney,  secretary,  treasurer 
and  superintendent. 

Connelly  Springs — Francis  Fabrics,  Inc.,  polo  shirts  and 
training  pants.  Brand,  "Francis  Fabrics".  Francis  Verrault, 
Valdese,  president;  J.  A.  Verrault,  Jr.,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Fayetteville — Holt-Williamson  Mfg.  Co.,  knit  tubing  and 
wristing  for  gloves.  Operate  4,536-spindle  cotton  mills  and  34 
looms.  W.  Varwell  Williamson,  president;  A.  A.  McEachern, 
secretary  and  treasurer. 

Gastonia — Textile  Laboratories,  knit  dye  tubing.  R.  P.  Siler, 
president. 

Graham — Southland  Fabrics,  Inc.,  tricot  fabrics.  Manny 
Kay,  president;  Seymour  Topping,  treasurer. 

Greensboro — Guilford  Mills,  Inc.,  tricot  fabrics,  James  M. 
Hornaday,  president;  F.  L.  Proctor,  secretary  and  superin- 
tendent. 

Lexington — Barbet  Mills,  Inc.,  underwear  and  outerwear  of 
cotton,  nylon  fiberfoyle  and  blends.  Brands,  "Barbet",  "Ross- 
spun"  and  "Superspun".  Operates  15,296-spindle  mill.  Clarence 
A.  Ross,  president. 

Lowell — Beaunit  Mills,  Inc.,  tricot  knit  fabrics,  rayon,  for 
dresses  and  underwear.  Brand,  "Beaunit".  I.  Rogosin,  presi- 
dent; Lionel  Rogosin,  vice-president,  both  N.  Y.  City. 

Lumberton — Dennis  Mills,  Inc.,  circular  knit  tubular  cloth. 
Operates  15,000-spindle  cotton  yarn  mill.  M.  S.  Dayan,  presi- 
dent; E.  S.  Dayan,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Marion — Conley  Knitting  Co.,  cotton  circular  knit  jersey 
and  ribbed  cloth  from  18-1  to  30-1  double  carded  and  combed 
yarn  in  bleached  and  pastel  shades  and  stripes.  H.  T.  Conley 
and  W.  T.  Conley,  Partners. 

Morganton — Speir  Textiles,  Inc.,  tricot  fabrics.  Brand, 
"Speir".  E.  G.  Speir,  president  and  treasurer;  Martha  G. 
Speir,  secretary. 

Mount  Holly — Holly  Knit,  Inc.,  Subsidiary  of  American  & 
Efird  Mills,  Inc.,  circular  and  tricot  knit  fabrics.  R.  S.  Dick- 
son, Charlotte,  president;  W.  H.  Suttenfleld,  vice-president; 
Lewis  E.  Chittum,  secretary  and  treasurer. 


Newton — Carolina  Mills,  Inc.,  branch  of  Maiden,  N.  C,  tow- 
el and  wash  sets,  infants'  undershirts  and  crib  sheets.  Yarn 
mills  at  Maiden  and  Newton.  Julius  W.  Abernathy,  president; 
O.  Leonard  Moretz,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Clyde  Fabrics,  Inc.,  knit  jersey  cloth  and  tubing  for  glove 
trade  and  high  grade  carded  knitting  yarns.  Operate  17,964- 
spindle  cotton  mill.  G.  I.  Davenport,  N.  Y.  City,  president; 
R.  C.  Reinhardt,  assistant  treasurer  and  manager. 

North  State  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  jersey  cloth.  T.  Manly 
Whitener,  president  and  treasurer;  H.  H.  Boshmaer,  vice- 
president. 

Not  in  operation  April,  '52 — North  Wilkesboro — Knit  Craft] 
Corp.,  cotton  jersey  cloth.  W.  C.  Marlow,  secretary  and  treas- 
urer. 

Old  Fort — United  Rayon  Mills,  subsidiary  of  United  Mer- 
chants and  Manufacturers,  Inc.,  N.  Y.  City,  tricot  knit  fabrics] 
of  nylon  and  acetate  for  underwear  and  outerwear.  Brand, 
"Cohama".  Jacob  Schwab,  president;  M.  R.  Haskel,  vice-presi- 
dent; M.  H.  Deutsch,  secretary,  all  N.  Y.  City. 

Pilot  Mountain — Armtex,  Inc.,  office  in  Greensboro,  cotton 
and  synthetic  interlock  flat  knit  and  rib  knit  fabrics.  Brand, 
"Armtex".  E.  Armfleld,  Greensboro,  president;  J.  C.  McKenzie, 
secretary  and  treasurer. 

Ramseur — Ramseur  Inter-Lock  Knitting  Co.,  knit  fabrics. 
Sam  A.  Rankin,  president,  treasurer  and  superintendent;  C.  L. 
Rankin,  secretary. 

Rich  Square — Northampton  Mills,  lightweight  knitted  cloth. 
M.  P.  Cooke,  proprietor. 

Taylorsville — Brookwood  Mills,  Inc.,  underwear,  outerwear 
and  tubular  cotton  knitted  fabrics.  Operates  8,216-spindle  cot- 
ton mill.  C.  A.  Ross,  president;  J.  Will  Long,  Lexington,  vice- 
president. 

Vass — Angus  Mills,  Inc.,  household  knitted  utilities  cloth, 
knitted  piece  goods  and  underwear.  Brand,  "Angus".  Richard 
E.  Forrest,  president;  Maxwell  R.  Forrest,  secretary. 

Wadesboro — Hornwood  Warp  Knitting  Corp.,  jersey  and 
specialty  fabrics.  Brand,  "Hornwood  Fabrics".  W.  Bryan 
Moore,  president;  Hal  W.  Little,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Wallace — J.  P.  Stevens  &  Co.,  Inc.  (Carter  Fabrics  Division), 
tricot  fabrics.     W.  J.  Carter,  Greensboro,  executive  officer. 

Wilmington — Wilmington  Warp  Knitting  Co.,  subsidiary  of 
Mojud  Hosiery  Co.,  N.  Y.  City,  tricot  fabrics.  John  K.  Voeh- 
ringer,  Jr.,  Greensboro,  president;  David  L.  Judson,  secretary. 

DYEING  AND  FINISHING 

Other  plants  having  operations  connected  with  and  relating 
to  the  knitting  and  hosiery  industries  are  operating  in  the 
State.  Most  of  these  are  engaged  in  dyeing  and  finishing  hos- 
iery or  other  knit  products  for  numbers  of  smaller  plants. 
Among  these  are  the  following: 

Johnson  Hosiery  Mill,  Hickory;  N.  C.  Dyeing  &  Finishing 
Co.,  Greensboro;  High  Point  Finishing  Co.,  High  Point;  Bur- 
lington; Puritan  Finishing,  Decorative  Fabrics  Finishing  Plant 
(Burlington  Mills),  Graham  Finishing  Plant;  Southerland 
Dyeing  Mills,  Mebane;  Knox  Knitting  Co.,  Creston;  Carol  May 
Finishing  Co.,  Concord;  Huffman  Finishing,  Granite  Falls; 
Iredell  Finishing  Mills,  Inc.,  Statesville;  Charlotte:  Kelly  Dye- 
ing &  Finishing  Co.,  Inc.;  Charlotte  Finishing  Co.;  Carolina 
Sewing  Co.,  Asheboro;  Lumberton:  Swiss  Knit  Products  Co., 
Lumberton  Bleaching  &  Dyeworks;  Carolina  Knit  Craft  Corp., 
Salisbury;   Surry  Knitting  Mills,  Mount  Airy. 


SPECIAL  ARTICLES  ON  HOSIERY 

FIRMS;  REASONS  SOME  OMITTED 

When  decision  was  reached  to  devote  this  issue  primarily 
to  the  hosiery  industry  in  North  Carolina,  it  was  felt  that 
special  articles  should  be  carried  on  some  of  the  larger  or 
otherwise  important  hosiery  firms.  It  was  Anally  decided 
that  about  25  hosiery  Arms  could  be  given  special  articles 
in  the  issue. 

A  few  of  the  Arms  selected  failed,  for  some  reason,  to 
supply  the  requested  and  desired  information  for  special 
articles.  Since  it  was  desired  to  make  this  issue  on  hosiery 
as  complete  as  possible,  it  is  with  regret  that  special  articles 
had  to  be  omitted  relative  to  a  few  Arms  which  would  have 
been  included. 


Two  North  Carolina  plants  began  the  production  of  full 
fashioned  hosiery  in  1922.  These  were  Durham  Hosiery 
Mills,  Durham,  and  Hoover  Hosiery  Co.,  Concord.  A.  R. 
Hoover  had  been  experimenting  with  seamless  silk  hosiery 
previously  and  it  is  likely  that  Durham  Hosiery  Mills  was 
trying  out  silk  before  full  fashioned  machines  were  in- 
stalled. 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  53 


N.  C.  PRODUCES  40%  OF  HOSIERY 

(Continued  from  Page  4) 

industry  during  most  of  the  history  of  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Commission  is  shown  in  the  chart 
(page  3).  The  industrial  classification  system  used 
by  the  Agency  does  not  permit  a  hosiery  breakdown 
of  covered  employment  (that  is,  only  employment  in 
the  knit  goods  industry  as  a  whole  is  available) ,  but 
it  is  believed  that  the  employment  fluctuations  for 
hosiery  employment  alone  would  be  little  different 
from  the  trend  shown  since  it  comprises  such  a  large 
portion  of  the  knit  goods  group. 

During  the  8-year  period  from  1939  to  1947  there 
was  a  significant  decline  in  national  hosiery  employ- 
ment. The  total  number  of  production  workers  in 
hosiery  in  the  United  States  in  1947  was  only  126,491 
as  compared  with  159,052  in  1939 ;  this  was  a  decline 
of  20.5  percent.  In  the  same  period,  hosiery  em- 
ployment in  North  Carolina  declined  from  42,664  to 
41,178  or  only  3.5  percent.  It  is  significant  to  note 
at  this  point  that  hosiery  employment  fared  worse 
than  total  knit  goods  employment  for  hosiery  de- 
clined 20.5  percent  as  compared  with  only  10  percent 
for  all  knit  goods  during  the  1939-1947  period  na- 
tionally; during  the  same  period  in  North  Carolina 
hosiery  declined  3.5  percent  as  compared  with  a  rise 
of  1.2  percent  for  all  knit  goods. 

Thus,  there  are  certain  other  segments  of  the  knit 
^oods  industry  that  are  growing  much  more  rapidly 
now  than  hosiery;  or,  it  might  be  said,  growing 
while  national  hosiery  employment  is  remaining 
more  static.  A  glance  at  the  table  (page  4)  will  show 
that  the  "Outerwear"  and  "Fabric"  groups  have 
been  the  principal  gainers  during  the  1939-1947  pe- 
riod. Outerwear  (such  as  knitted  sweaters,  bathing 
suits,  dresses,  suits,  etc.)  has  grown  increasingly 
more  popular  in  recent  years. 

The  statistics  bear  this  out  for  between  1939  and 
1947  employment  in  Outerwear  in  the  United  States 
jumped  from  23,437  to  30,596  or  a  rise  of  30.5  per- 
cent. No  employment  was  shown  for  the  "Outer- 
wear" group  in  North  Carolina  either  in  1947  or 
1939,  although  this  type  of  production  could  have 
been  done  by  a  knit  goods  establishment  classified 
in  the  "Underwear"  group.  Nevertheless,  if  Outer- 
wear was  produced  in  North  Carolina  in  1947  or  at 
present,  the  number  employed  in  this  activity  is  be- 
lieved to  be  relatively  small. 

The  "Fabric"  group  gained  30.9  percent  in  the 
employment  of  production  workers  between  1939  and 
1947  for  the  nation  as  a  whole;  i.e.,  from  9,548  to 
12,502.  During  the  same  period,  employment  in  this 
group  in  North  Carolina  jumped  sharply  percentage- 
wise, though  small  in  actual  numbers:  from  391  to 
1,539  production  workers,  or  a  rise  of  almost  300 
percent. 

With  the  "Outerwear"  and  "Fabric"  groups  in  the 
knit  goods  industry  forging  to  the  front,  while  na- 
tional hosiery  employment  is  remaining  fairly  static, 
it  is  obvious  that  North  Carolina,  with  approximate- 
ly one-fifth  of  the  national  knit  goods  employment, 
must  attract  an  increasing  number  of  "Outerwear" 


REGRETS — Some  of  pictures  of  hosiery  products  in  State 
collected  for  composite  picture  reflected  light,  causing 
blazes — white  areas — making  it  unsatisfactory  for  use.  Our 
regrets. 

and  "Fabric"  knit  mills  to  maintain  its  prominent 
position  in  the  national  knit  goods  industry.  An  in- 
dication that  the  State  may  be  doing  this  is  the  rev- 
elation that  second  quarter,  1952,  covered  employ- 
ment included  about  11,225  in  non-hosiery  knit  goods 
as  compared  with  only  5,5-14  employment  reported 
by  Census  of  Manufacturers  for  this  group  in  1947. 


HOSIERY  INSTRUCTION,  STATE  COLLEGE 

(Continued  from  Page   13) 

plete  the  work  required  for  the  degree  of  B.S.  in 
textiles  with  major  in  knitting. 

The  courses  offered  are :  Knitting  I,  Hosiery  Man- 
ufacture, Flat  Knitting,  Knitting  Mechanics,  Knit- 
ted Garment  Manufacture,  Full-fashioned  Hosiery 
Manufacture,  Knitted  Fabric  Design,  Hosiery  De- 
sign, Knitting  Laboratory  II  and  Knitting  Labora- 
tory III,  and  Knitting  Research.  Students  in  op- 
tions other  than  knitting  may  elect  one  or  more  of 
these  courses  if  the  prerequisite  courses  have  been 
completed. 

The  curriculum  in  knitting  is  patterned  after  the 
other  curricula  in  the  N.  C.  State  College  School  of 
Textiles  and  contains  the  same  requirements  in  the 
basic  sciences,  English,  mathematics,  economics, 
psychology,  accounting  and  personnel  management. 
The  student  in  knitting  is  required  to  complete  a  full 
year  of  general  chemistry  and  one  year  in  the  appli- 
cation of  dyestuffs.  Thorough  study  of  the  natural 
and  synthetic  fibers  and  their  utilization  in  yarns 
and  knitted  fabrics  is  provided. 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  laboratory  instruction. 
Students  learn  by  doing.  Summer  work  in  textile 
plants  is  encouraged  and  the  school  welcomes  young 
men  from  the  knitting  mills  in  preparation  for  great- 
er service  to  the  industry.  The  option  in  knitting  has 
been  in  operation  since  1944  and  a  high  percentage 
of  the  graduates  have  gone  into  the  knitting  mills  or 
into  work  closely  related  to  knitgoods  production. 
The  reports  which  have  been  received  from  the  grad- 
uates is  a  source  of  encouragement  to  the  school. 

Almost  a  third  of  the  South's  more  than  2,000  tex- 
tile plants  are  devoted  to  the  manufacture  of  hos- 
iery, and  emphasis  on  this  phase  of  the  school's  work 
has  been  made  in  recognition  of  the  great  importance 
that  knitting  and  the  needle  arts  play  in  the  indus- 
trial life  of  this  section.  The  primary  objective  is  to 
make  available  to  this  branch  of  the  textile  industry 
the  type  of  personnel  which  has  wielded  such  an  in- 
fluence in  the  development  of  the  other  branches  of 
the  textile  industry. 


You  may  not  know  that:  Many  North  Carolina  hosiery 
mills,  producing  full  fashioned  or  sheer  hosiery,  have  mani- 
curists on  duty  regularly  to  smooth  broken  nails  and  hang 
nails  on  hands  of  men  and  women  operatives  to  prevent 
catching  and  pulling  fine  hosiery  threads. 


PAGE  54 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  1953 


Highlights  of  High  Point's  Industry  and  Employment 

By  Mrs.  E.  DeKay  Johnson,  State  Labor  Market  Analyst,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


This  is  the  first  of  what  is  planned  as  a  series  of  articles  discussing 
employment  conditions  in  leading  North  Carolina  cities.  Since  High  Point 
leads  in  employment  in  hosiery  manufacturing  this  is  considered  appro- 
priate for  this  issue.  Similar  articles  dealing  with  other  cities  are  plan- 
ned  for  later  issues. 


High  Point,  with  its  population  of  more  than 
40,000,  is  favorably  located  in  the  Piedmont  section 
of  the  State.  It  is  part  of  a  triangle  of  large  cities 
with  Winston-Salem  only  20  miles  distant  and 
Greensboro  17  miles.  Located  in  the  southwestern 
portion  of  Guilford  County  and  adjacent  to  Forsyth, 
Davidson,  and  Randolph,  about  half  a  million  people 
reside  within  a  25  to  30  mile  radius.  Though  this  is 
the  usual  radius  for  labor  recruitment  in  the  State, 
the  industrial  and  commuting  pattern  of  this  section 
indicates  that  workers  often  come  from  even  greater 
distances. 

From  the  standpoint  of  population  growth  in  the 
last  decade,  the  area  has  had  considerable  progress. 
Though  the  city  of  High  Point  has  had  only  a  3.8 
percent  population  increase,  the  township  shows  a 
12.1  percent  increase.  Guilford  County  experienced 
a  remarkable  over-all  rise  of  24.1  percent,  Davidson 
16.6  and  Randolph  14  percent.  Thus  it  can  be  as- 
sumed that  the  potential  labor  supply  within  the  im- 
mediate recruiting  area  of  High  Point  has  increased 
considerably  above  that  of  the  State  which  showed 
an  average  increase  of  13.7  percent. 

High  Point  firms  employ  about  44  percent  of  the 
persons  engaged  in  manufacturing  in  Guilford  Coun- 
ty (some  16,500  to  17,000)  and  21  percent  of  those  in 
non-manufacturing  (from  8,500  to  9,500) .  The  num- 
ber of  wage  and  salaried  workers  ranges  from  about 
25,000  to  over  26,000  persons  depending  on  the  sea- 
son, while  total  employment  is  from  28,000  to  29,000 
persons. 

For  some  years  High  Point  has  been  known  as  a 
leader  in  the  furniture  industry ;  manufacturing,  dis- 
play and  sales.  Its  semi-annual  markets  rank  third 
in  the  nation — below  only  the  New  York  and  Chicago 
markets — in  number  of  buyers,  in  attendance  and  in 
exhibitors  showing.  From  the  standpoint  of  num- 
bers employed  and  total  wages  paid  to  local  employ- 
ees, however,  the  hosiery  industry  overshadows  the 
more  dramatic  and  widely  publicized  furniture  in- 
dustry. Other  manufacturing  vital  to  High  Point's 
economy  include :  yarn  and  thread  mills ;  finished 
garments,  such  as  work  clothing  and  ladies'  under- 
wear ;  veneer,  plywood  and  millwork ;  paper  contain- 
ers and  boxes ;  paints,  lacquers  and  varnishes ; 
springs,  mattresses,  furniture,  padding  and  mirrors ; 
and  dyes  and  other  chemicals. 

High  Point's  26  hosiery  mills  employ  from  6,500 
to  7,000  persons.  Of  these,  more  than  half  work  in 
the  20  plants  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  seam- 
less hose,  such  as  men's  half  hose,  misses'  and  chil- 
dren's anklets.  Several  of  these  mills  also  make 
ladies'  lisle  hose,  much  of  which  is  for  export.    Full- 


fashioned  and  seamless  hose  are  made  by  six  firms 
which  employ  about  42  percent  of  the  hosiery  work 
ers.  Those  hosiery  mills  which  engage  only  in  knit- 
ting, looping  and  inspecting  have  the  gray  hose  dyed 
and  finished  elsewhere.  There  are  five  firms  which 
do  this  work,  limiting  their  operations  to  dyeing,  fin-| 
ishing  and  packaging.  Closely  allied  with  hosiery 
manufacture  are  eight  establishments  engaged  in 
printing  labels,  tags,  and  dry  transfers  of  traclej 
marks  and  other  identifying  information  for  hose, 
half  hose,  and  anklets. 

Other  textile  mills  include  two  yarn  mills  and  three 
weaving  and  throwing  plants.  Their  combined  em- 
ployment is  some  1,700  persons.  The  textile  indus- 
try as  a  whole — including  all  yarn  and  thread  mills,) 
broad  woven  fabric  mills,  knitting  mills,  dyeing  and 
finishing  plants,  and  miscellaneous  textile  goods — is 
made  up  of  some  45  firms  employing  roughly  9,000 
persons. 

High  Point  is  the  hub-of-an-area  which,  within  a 
150  mile  radius  of  that  city,  contains  the  greatest 
concentration  of  manufacturers  of  wooden  household! 
furniture  in  the  world.  The  city  itself  has  62  furni- 
ture and  fixture  manufacturing  plants,  employing 
from  4,000  to  4,500  persons.  With  the  exception  of 
a  small  amount  of  chrome  breakfast  units,  the  furni- 
ture is  wooden.  Upholstered  household  furniture 
dominates,  but  office  furniture,  television  cabinets, 
kitchen  cabinets  and  core  stock  are  also  important 
items.  Fifteen  plywood  and  veneer  mills  are  located 
nearby.  These  conduct  a  variety  of  activities,  such 
as :  slicing,  grading  and  taping  veneer ;  making  pan- 
els; and  producing  veneer  cores. 

Contributory  and  accessory  products  for  use  by 
the  furniture  plants  are  made  by  four  firms  manu- 
facturing decorative  glass  and  plate  glass  mirrors; 
six  firms  making  springs,  hinges  and  metal  parts; 
and  five  making  wood  turnings  such  as  knobs,  wood 
carvings  and  other  special  turnings.  To  serve  both 
furniture  and  textile  manufacturers  are  eleven  firms 
producing  a  variety  of  paints,  varnishes  and  finishes, 
soaps,  detergents,  bleaches  and  oils.  Also  six  plants 
make  containers,  paper  bags,  packing  materials  and 
a  variety  of  special  sized  bags  for  packaging  and 
shipping. 

Other  manufacturing  industries  which  tend  fur- 
ther to  balance  High  Point's  economy  include:  toys, 
transportation  equipment,  food  and  kindred  products 
and  small  machine  shops  which  work  with  furniture 
and  textile  machinery.  These  firms,  though  small, 
have  a  combined  employment  of  about  900  persons. 

Non-manufacturing  wage  and  salaried  workers 
number  from  8,500  to  9,500.  Of  these,  about  40  per- 
cent are  engaged  in  trade.  The  ratio  of  retail  trade 
to  wholesaling  is  two  to  one.  While  there  are  a  few 
large  stores,  sales  activities  are,  for  the  most  part, 
conducted  by  many  small  establishments. 
(Continued  on  Page  56) 


VlNTER-SPRING,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  55 


kudy  of  Economy-Cost  of  Employment  Security  Program 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper,  Director,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


Note:  Amendments  embracing  changes  described  in  this  article  were 
jopted  by  the  N.  C.   General  Assembly,   ratified   March  27,   1953. 

In  1952  for  the  first  time  a  thorough-going  study 
/as  made  of  the  North  Carolina  economy  and  of  the 
mg  range  cost  outlook  for  unemployment  insurance. 
Virile  it  is  true  that  the  North  Carolina  Employment 
■ecurity  Program's  financial  condition  is  extremely 
avorable  in  terms  of  all  the  usual  actuarial  meas- 
res,  one  cannot  conclude  lightly  that  we  have  been 
lways  right  for  the  right  reasons.  At  times  we 
lay  have  been  right  for  the  wrong  reasons.  Any- 
/ay,  we  are  fortunate  now  in  being  able  to  deal  with 
he  subject  of  balanced  program  financing  instead  of 
ireventing  insolvency  or  deficits. 

PURPOSES  OF  STUDY 

The  study  and  planning  that  has  been  done  has  as 
ts  primary  purpose  the  achievement  of  a  close  rela- 
ionship  between  benefit  expenditures,  cost  (tax) 
ates,  and  fund  reserve  levels.  The  problem  was  to 
evelop  a  financial  policy  based  on  the  best  possible 
stimates  of  probable  benefit  outlays  determined 
hrough  a  careful  analysis  of  the  North  Carolina 
conomy  so  as  to  establish  an  actuarially  sound  finan- 
ial  structure  characterized  by  a  rational  relation- 
hip  between  benefit  disbursements,  the  level  of  rev- 
nues,  and  the  size  of  the  reserve. 
In  unemployment  insurance,  the  unemployment  risk 
s  governed  by  economic  factors  which  are  not  nearly 
,s  stable  or  predictable  as  the  factors  relied  upon  in 
ither  forms  of  insurance,  e.g.,  mortality  tables  used 
n  life  insurance.  The  incidence,  severity,  timing, 
md  duration  of  unemployment  vary  with  business 
onditions  which  are  notably  subject  to  instability 
rom  year  to  year. 

The  approach  was  by  a  study  of  probable  trends 
n  the  next  eight  to  ten  years  in  economic  develop- 
nent  and  in  the  labor  force  composition  in  the  State 
md  then  to  estimate  actuarialy  the  impact  of  such 
levelopments  on  benefit  costs.  With  this  base,  the 
ormulation  of  sound  financial  policy  can  be  ap- 
troached  in  a  more  intelligent  manner. 

7.N.C.  BUSINESS  SCHOOL  STUDY 

Late  in  1951  the  ESC  entered  into  an  arrangement 
vith  the  School  of  Business  Administration  of  the 
Jniversity  of  North  Carolina  for  the  purpose  of 
naking  a  thorough-going  study  of  the  North  Caro- 
ina  economy,  particularly  delving  into  those  areas 
>f  the  State's  economy  that  contribute  either  to  em- 
)loyment  stability  or  to  that  other  part  that  gene- 
rates unemployment.  We  were  extremely  fortunate 
n  having  assigned  to  us  for  the  work  Dr.  Lowell  D. 
Vshby  who  had  earlier  done  much  work  on  a  study 
>f  the  North  Carolina  economy  in  terms  of  the  per- 
gonal incomes  of  the  people  in  each  of  the  hundred 
:ounties.  The  actuarial  work  was  done  in  Bureau  of 
Employment  Security  of  the  Federal  Department  of 


Labor  in  Washington  from  the  material  developed 
by  the  Agency  and  by  Dr.  Ashby  and  his  staff. 

LEGISLA  TI VE  RE  COMMEND  A  TIONS 

The  findings  and  conclusions  of  the  study  served 
as  a  valuable  guide  in  preparing  proposed  legislation 
making  changes  in  the  program's  financial  structure. 
Several  factors  pointed  to  the  need  for  a  thorough- 
going revamping  of  the  whole  plan  of  experience 
rating.  Among  the  more  important  were  the  fol- 
lowing : 

1.  The  type  of  plan  in  use  in  North  Carolina  and  one 
other  State  was  far  more  severe  in  terms  of  conformity 
requirements  than  was  true  in  some  30-odd  states  with 
the  more  usual  type  of  reserve  ratio  plan.  The  plan  in 
these  two  states  required  a  ratio  between  the  reserve 
balance  and  the  three-year  payroll  of  2.5%  to  qualify 
for  reduced  rate.  In  addition,  the  employer's  reserve 
balance  must  exceed  five  times  the  largest  benefit  out- 
lay in  the  three  prior  years.  With  this  type  plan  more 
than  a  third  of  the  payrolls  automatically  were  subject 
to  the  2.7  percent  rate,  and  the  rate  pattern  for  the 
other  accounts  lacked  proper  balance. 

2.  In  the  five  fiscal  year  period,  1947-1952,  the  benefit  ex- 
penditures were  about  1.1  percent  of  the  taxable  payroll 
while  the  rate  ranged  from  1.20  in  1952  to  1.65  percent 
of  the  taxable  payroll  in  1948.  The  relationship  be- 
tween costs  and  benefit  expenditures  was  such  that  the 
fund  continued  to  grow  larger  each  year.  With  the 
schedule  unchanged  the  likely  contribution  income  in 
1953  would  have  been  at  the  rate  of  1.4  percent  of  the 
taxable  payroll. 

3.  Lesser  influences  such  as  biennial  adjustment  of  form- 
ula through  legislative  action,  abrupt  changes  up  and 
down  in  contribution  rate  by  reason  of  too  few  rate 
classes  and  too  drastic  steps,  e.g.,  2.7  rate  to  1.8  rate 
to  0.9  rate,  etc.  pointed  to  the  need  for  schedule  modifi- 
cation. 

An  outgrowth  of  a  consideration  of  these  factors 
was  the  development  of  legislative  recommendations 
for  consideration  by  the  Employment  Security  Ad- 
visory Council  and  by  the  Commission.  The  formula 
presented  to  the  legislature  contained  six  different 
schedules  or  rate  patterns.  The  multiple  rate  pat- 
terns are  designed  to  vary  the  income  in  terms  of 
the  condition  of  the  Fund  with  the  sole  determinant 
being  the  ratio  between  the  amount  in  the  Trust 
Fund  and  the  taxable  payroll  of  all  subject  employ- 
ment in  the  prior  fiscal  year.  A  comparison  of  the 
next-to-the-most  favorable  schedule,  "E,"  which  is 
to  be  used  in  the  recomputation  of  the  1953  with  the 
old  schedule  used  prior  to  the  legislative  change  will 
illustrate  the  change  brought  about  when  the  next 
to  most  liberal  rate  pattern  is  effective. 

The  average  estimated  rate  will  decline  from  1.40 
percent  to  about  1.05  percent  of  the  taxable  payroll. 

In  dollar  terms,  the  estimated  yield  is  $16,262,000 
in  contributions,  some  $5,235,000  reduction  from  the 
yield  of  $21,497,000  estimated  under  the  1953  origi- 
nal computation.  (1952  payroll  data  used  for  esti- 
mate.) 

The  taxable  payroll  qualifying  for  some  reduction 
in  rate  advances  from  63.4%  to  90.7%. 

The  percentage  of  accounts  paying  at  the  standard 
(Continued  on  Page  56) 


PAGE  56 


THE  E,  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Winter-Spring,  195; 


N.  C.  HOSIERY  MEN  USE  PROFITS 

FOR  NEW,  EFFICIENT  EQUIPMENT 

North  Carolina  hosiery  manufacturers  have  ex- 
panded and  increased  production  to  such  an  extent 
in  the  past  25  years  that  they  have  gone  far  ahead  of 
any  other  state  in  the  Union  in  hosiery  production. 
Characteristically,  they,  and  the  same  applies  to 
some  extent  to  hosiery  manufacturing  in  the  South, 
generally,  have  been  constant  in  putting  the  bulk  of 
their  earnings  back  into  the  industry  in  the  form  of 
new  and  enlarged  plants,  in  the  newest  and  most 
efficient  machinery  and  in  laboratory  equipment  to 
improve  the  quality  of  their  products. 

One  result  of  this  is  that  North  Carolina  hosiery 
manufacturers  are  using  much  larger  machines  in 
full  fashioned  production  than  are  used  generally 
throughout  the  country.  These  newer  and  more  effi- 
cient machines  are  built  in  30-,  32-  and  34-sections. 
Most  North  Carolina  producers  operate  these  larger 
machines — much  larger  than  the  average  for  the 
United  States  as  a  whole.  This  naturally  gives  them 
greater  production  per  machine  than  the  nation's 
average. 

Two  developments  have  been  achieved  in  hosiery 
styles.  Thirty  years  ago  North  Carolina  producers 
were  using  36-gauge  machines  and  with  much  coars- 
er yarns  than  are  used  today.  Much  of  the  yarn 
used  in  the  production  of  finer  and  sheerer  hosiery 
is  15-denier  and  most  of  the  finer  stockings  are  made 
in  three  gauges,  the  finest  going  up  to  66-gauge.  This 
means  that  there  are  66  loops  or  stitches  to  each  IT/2 
inches  of  the  knit  goods. 

But  much  more  of  North  Carolina's  hosiery  is 
seamless.  Producers  in  this  State  are  now  placing 
on  the  market  a  large  quantity  of  fine  highly  styled 
seamless  nylon  hosiery.  Pioneer  and  largest  pro- 
ducer of  this  type  of  fashionable  hosiery  is  Hanes 
Hosiery  Mills  Co.  in  Winston-Salem.  Several  other 
North  Carolina  firms  are  also  producing  the  higher 
type  seamless  hosiery. 

Also  included  in  seamless  hosiery  are  men's  half 
hose  and  anklets,  men's  sport  hose  and  men's  work 
socks  as  well  as  misses',  boys',  children's,  and  in- 
fants' hose  and  anklets. 

North  Carolina's  manufacturers  produce  immense 
quantities  of  men's  half  hose  and  anklets.  Many  of 
them  produce  highly  styled  men's  socks  and  anklets 
of  nylon,  dacron,  rayon  and  other  man-made  fibers 
as  well  as  lisle,  mercerized  cotton  and  other  fibers. 
Many  of  them  are  clocked  fancy  and  plain  which  go 
through  high  style  men's  stores  to  the  most  fastidi- 
ous dressers. 

Formerly  half  hose  and  anklets  were  made  on  two 
machines,  one  machine  producing  the  top  and  an- 
other the  body.  Now  fully  95%  of  the  socks  made  in 
this  State  are  produced  on  one  machine  which  is 
fully  automatic.  As  many  as  seven  or  eight  different 
types  of  yarn  may  be  used  in  producing  one  sock  in 
which  may  be  found  as  many  as  three  types  of  knit- 
ting. . 

Many  of  North  Carolina's  hosiery  producers  have 


reached  the  point  of  being  able  to  make  the  fines 
types  of  hosiery  for  the  entire  family  and  man;| 
others  are  rapidly  working  their  way  up  to  tha 
point. 


HIGHLIGHTS  OF  HIGH  POINT 

(Continued  from  Page  54) 

Service  industries,  such  as  hotels,  laundries,  bar 
ber  and  beauty  shops,  business  services,  auto  an< 
other  repair  services  and  amusements  regularly  em 
ploy  some  1,700  persons.  Transportation,  communi| 
cation,  and  public  utilities  employ  another  1,000 
Construction,  government,  finance,  insurance,  rea 
estate  and  other  industries  account  for  about  3,001 
workers. 

Though  subject  to  seasonal  fluctuations,  the  em 
ployment  trend  has  been  upward  since  fall  of  1951 
This  was  due  to  increases  in  textiles  and  furnitun 
which  over-balanced  a  state  of  general  stability  a: 
small  losses  and  gains  in  other  manufacturing  an( 
non-manufacturing  industries  tended  to  equalizt 
each  other.  As  of  February  1,  1953  the  outlook  wai 
for  a  continued  gradual  increase  in  employment,  witl 
most  industries  reflecting  an  air  of  mild  optimism. 


STUDY  OF  ECONOMY— COST  OF  E.  S. 

(Continued  from  Page  55) 

2.7  rate  declines  from  36.6  percent  to  17.2  percent 
or  numerically  from  4,487  to  2,422.  Of  the  2,422 
some  1,700  had  insufficient  years  of  qualifying  expe 
rience  for  rating  purposes  and  almost  400  were 
overdrawn. 

In  the  recomputation  the  lowest  rate,  0.1  (giving 
a  96  percent  saving)  will  be  assigned  to  505  mor( 
employers,  making  2,482  eligible  for  this  rate  witr 
a  recomputation  under  the  new  formula. 

Some  rate  reduction  is  given  to  999  of  the  l,70f 
employers  originally  assigned  the  2.7  rate,  largelj 
because  of  the  change  in  qualifying  tests. 


Ratio  of  Employer's  Employer's 

Reserve  Balance  To  Rate  Under 

3-Year   Taxable    Payroll  Old  Schedule 

Under  1.4% —    

1.4%   to  1.8%   - 2.7% 

1.8%  to  2.2%   , : 2.7      

2.2%   to  2.4% 2.7      

2.4%   to  2.5%     2.7      

2.5%  to  2.6% 1.8      

2.6%  to  2.8%  - 1-8      — 

2.8%    to  3.1%    .-. 0.9 

(Ratios  and  rates  not  changed  below  this  point) 


Employer's 

Rate  Under 

New  Seheduli 

-2.7  % 

2.5 

.....2.3 

.......2.0 

..-.1.7 

..1.7 

.......1.4 

0.9 


HOSIERY  MILL  LIST  SOURCES 

Lists  of  hosiery  mills  used  in  this  issue  were  secured 
from  three  different  sources:  Clark's  1952  Buyers'  Guide 
to  Southern  Hosiery  and  Knitwear  Manufacturers,  North 
Carolina  Directory  of  Manufacturing  Firms,  1952,  published 
by  the  N.  C.  Department  of  Labor;  and  the  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission  records. 

Even  with  these  sources,  the  lists  are  not  expected  to  be 
entirely  complete  or  accurate.  Some  mills  have  suspended 
operations  since  the  lists  were  compiled;  others  may  have 
been  suspended  temporarily  when  the  lists  were  made,  and 
others  have  started  operations  since  the  lists  were  closed. 
Also,  numbers  of  plants  are  small  and  may  have  been 
missed  in  compiling  the  lists.  Information  on  types  of 
products  of  a  few  firms  was  not  available,  so  is  omitted. 


SUPPLEMENT  TO  UTHE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY",  VOL.  1 1 ,  NO.  1  -2,  WINTER-SPRING,  1  953 


Index  to  Volumes  9  and  10,  1951-1952 

THE  E.  S.  Q  QUARTERLY 

Compiled  by  Mrs.  Elizabeth  M.  Ford,  Secretary,  Office  of  Informational  Service 

Published  by 
EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 


(Issues  from  Vol.  1,  No.  1,  Summer, 
Quarterly".  When  the  name  of  the 
:hanged.) 

Vol.  No.         Page 

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT 9  3-4  67 

The  Bright-Tobacco  Industry 

History  of  Durham 

The  Story  of  Tobacco  in  America 

Tobacco  Tycoon — The  Story  of  James 
Buchanan  Duke 

The  Tobacco  Kingdom 

Reynolds  Feature  Articles 

Edwin  Gill 
iNDREWS,  MRS.  MILDRED  BARNWELL: 
Textile  Industry  Aids  State's  Sociological 

Development 10  3-4  76 

Pleasant  Home  Conditions 

Kannapolis-Cramerton 

Workers  Good  Citizens 

Organized  Recreation 

Y.  M.  C.  A.— Community  Buildings 

Colleges  and  Schools 

Modern  Health  Programs 

Community  Hospitals 

Freedom-High  Morale 

Writing  Textile  History - 10  3-4  76 

ASSOCIATIONS: 
See  Press  Association 
See  Associated  Press 
Afternoon  Dailies  Association  Maintains 

Raleigh  News  Bureau 9 

Association  Regulates  Marketing  of  Flue- 
Cured  Tobacco 9 

The  Bright  Belt  Warehouse  Association,  Inc. 
Associated  Press  Club  Includes  AP  State 

Members,  N.  C. 9 

N.  C.  Cotton  (Textile)  Mfgrs.  Association 

Active  46  Years 10 

Association  Changes  'Cotton'  to  'Textile' — 

Hallett  is  President 10 

.MENDMENTS: 

See  M.  D.  Dewberry 

See  W.  D.  Holoman 
WARDS: 

Savory  Loving  Cup  Award  Won  by  13  N.  C. 

Weekly  Newspapers 9  1-2  14 

iEASLEY,  ROLAND  F.: 
Personalities  of  Past  Among  North  Carolina 

Editors 9  1-2  36 

G.  M.  Beasley 

Joseph  P.  Caldwell 

Joe  Reece 

Harp  Elam 

William  H.  Bonitz 

T.  B.  Kingsbury 

Josh  James 

H.  E.  C.  Bryant 
LUM'S  AND  TURNER'S  ALMANACS 
STILL  PRINTED  AND  SOLD  IN  N.  C 9  1-2  36 

RYANT,  H.  E.  C.  (RED  BUCK): 
See  Journalism 

AMPBELL,  DR.  MALCOLM  E.: 
N.  C.  State  School  of  Textiles  Largest 

in  the  Nation 10  3-4  SO 

Textile  Building— "The  Mill" 

Complete  Research  Program 

Graduates  Find  Ready  Jobs 

HANGES-ADDITIONS-CORRECTIONS 
FROM  AND  TO  PRECEDING  ISSUE  ON 
NEWSPAPERS-PRINTING-PUBLISHING..      9  3-4  122 


1942,  through  Vol.  4,  No.  4,  Fall,  1946,  were  designated  as  "The  U.  C.  C. 
agency  was  changed  April  1,  1947,  the  name  of  this  magazine  also  was 


Vol.  No.         Page 
CIGAR  PRODUCTION  LIMITED  IN  STATE- 
GREENSBORO  LEADS 9  3-4  92 

Raleigh  Boasted  Three  Plants 
Durham  With  Four  Plants 
One  Small  One  in  Durham 
El  Moro  Cigar  Co.,  Greensboro 
Guilford  Cigar  Co.,  Greensboro 
Former  Greensboro  Plants 
Dixie  Cigar  Co. 
Foster  Cigar  Co. 
Clegg  Cigar  Co. 
Richlands 

COFFIN,  DR.  OSCAR  J.: 

Yesteryear  Editors  More  Vigorous  than 

Today's  Crop 9  1-2  12 

Earlier  Editors  and  Reporters 
Hand  to  Mouth  Publishers 
Reporting  More  Objective 

COMMISSIONERS: 

Pipkin  New  Commissioner;  Hall  and  Fink 

Reappointed 10  1-2  3 

Willis  Benton  Pipkin 
Robert  Davidson  Hall 
Charles  Allison  Fink 

CYRUS,  J.  H: 

Marketing  Requires  Skill,  Experience; 

Specialists  Aid 9  3-4  106 

DANIELS,  JOSEPHUS,  EDITOR,  WAS 
DISTINGUISHED  STATE  CITIZEN.. 9  1-2  15 

DEWBERY,  M.  D.: 

Amendments  Extend  Coverage  of  Social 

Security  Act 9  1-2  51 

Entered  Upon  New  and  Greatly  Broadened 

Phase  of  Service 
Pattern  of  Life  Changed  With  Surge  of 

Industry 
Lessen  Threat  of  Penury-Lighten  Burden 

of  Charity 
Provides  Wage  Credits  for  Veterans 

DUKE  ENDOWMENT  MILLIONS  AID 
HEALTH,  EDUCATION,  RELIGION 9  3-4  122 

DUNN,  E.  STANHOPE: 
Analysis  of  Unemployed  Workers  Who 

Exhaust  Benefits 9  1-2  53 

Highlights  From  Study 
Aging  Exhaust  First 
Employment  Security  Compared;  11  Months 

1949  &  1950... 9  1-2  54 

Testing  Activities 
Unemployed  Exhausting  Benefits 
Unemployment  Compensation  Fund 
Female  Employment  Should  Continue  Gain 

in  N.  C,  1951.: 9  3-4  120 

Overall  Employment  Level  Expected  to 

Rise 
Comparison  of  1951  to  1940 
Charts — 

Percent  of  Female  Placements  to  Total 
Non-Agricultural  Placements:  1943-1950 

Percent  of  Female  Applications  to  Total 
Applications  on  File  Jan.  1,  1946-1951 
N.  C.  A  Large  Labor  Supply  Area 


1-2 

5 

3-4 

112 

1-2 

10 

3-4 

84 

3-4 

139 

PAGE  2 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  9  AND  10,   1951-1952 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


[PAGE  5£ 


Vol.  No.         Page 

DUNN  AG  AN,  M.  R.: 

Description  of  State  Newspapers  Written 

28  Years  Ago 9  1-2  13 

Population  Scattered — Clannish 
Papers  Local  in  Type 
Weekly  Papers  Sufficient 
Daily  Papers  Developing 
Three  Leading  Dailies 
The  Observer  Conservative 
Effective  Advertising 

See  Article  on  Rich,  J.  Hampton 

An  Incident  Relating  to  Press  Institute, 

Carolina  and  Duke 9  1-2  48 

Accident  Started  N.  C.  on  Road  to  Tobacco 

Supremacy 9  3-4  68 

Bright  Leaf  Beginning 
Consolidation— Dissolution 
Taylor  Bros.  Survives 

Period  of  "The  Trust" — Duke  and  Group 

Form  American— 1890-1911 9  3-4  71 

Duke's  Modest  Beginning 
Starts  Making  Cigarettes 
Acquires  Bull  Durham  Plant 
R.  J.  Reynolds  'Undigested' 
Duke  Enters  Retail  Field 
Duke  Forms  British-American 
American  Dominates  Industry 
Protests  Against  'The  Trust' 
American  Ordered  Dissolved 
Duke  'Unscrambles'  American 
Starts  Power  Development 

Reynolds  Leads  in  Tobacco  Production  in 

North  Carolina 9  3-4  75 

First  Plant  Tennis  Court  Size 
Smoking  Tobacco  Started 
Absorbed  by  American 
Reynolds  Again  Independent 
Prince  Albert  Big  Success 
"The  Camels  are  Coming" 
Cavaliers  Hit  The  Market 
Headed  Firm  for  43  Years 
Gray  and  Whitaker  Chiefs 
Directors  all  Employees 
U.  S.  Taxes  Million  a  Day 
Visitors  are  Welcomed 
Sales  1950  Exceed  2750,000,000 
Tribute  by  C.  of  C.  ofU.  S. 

How  The  Camel  Got  on  The  Pack 9  3-4  79 

Tobacco  Caused  Rebellion 9  3-4  81 

American  Has  Large  Tobacco  Plants  in  Two 

N.  C.  Cities _ _.      9  3-4  82 

Duke  Great  Tobacco  Genius 
Hahn  Present  President 
Ogsbury  Manufacturing  Chief 
Strickland  Heads  Suppliers 
Durham-Reidsville  Plants 
Korner  Spreads  the  Bull 
Makes  Leading  Cigar  Brand 
Operating  Profits  £86, 617, 000 
Employee  Benefit  Plans 

Liggett  &  Myers  Has  Ultra  Modern  Durham 

Tobacco  Plant...... 9  3-4  86 

Resists,  But  Joins  American 
Dula  of  Lenoir  President 
B.  F.  Few  New  President 
N.  C.  Officers  and  Directors 
Former  Tar  Heel  Officers 
Sales  Exceeded  £305,000,000 
Chesterfields-Fatimas  Popular 

Brown  &  Williamson  Produces  Chewing  and 

Snuff  in  State _ 9  3-4  89 

Beginning  and  Incorporation 
Formation  of  First  Partnership 
Head  Office  in  Louisville,  Ky. 
J.  H.  White  Manager 
Charles  R.  Frost  Now  Manager 
R.  J.  Parrish  Director 
Workers  in  Winston-Salem  Plant  for  More 
Than  20  Years 


Vol. 
DUNNAGAN,  M.  R. :    (Continued) 

Taylor  Brothers  State's  only  Chewing 

Plant  Exclusively 9 

Successful  and  Fairly  Stabilized  Producer 

W.  B.  Taylor  Principal  Founder 

Present  Officers 

Principal  Chewing  Tobacco  Brands 

Close  Alliance  Between  Owner  and  Employees 

Religious  Devotional  Time  Held  Each  Day 

Earlier  Tobacco  Manufacturing  in  N.  C. 

Communities 9 

Durham 

'Renouned  the  World  Around' 

Bull  Durham  Appears 

First  Tobacco  Warehouse 

Starts  Snuff  Making 

W.  Duke  and  Two  Sons  Start 

Duke  Starts  Cigarettes 

Install  Cigarette  Machines 

Duke  Forms  American 
Winston-Salem 

Had  37  Plants  in  1894 

Buying  and  Exporting  Firms 
Walkertown 
Bethania 
Reidsville 

Home  of  Lucky  Strike  Cigarette  Plant 

First  Warehouse  Opened  in  1872 
Stoneville 
Madison 
Yanceyville 
Milton 
Greensboro 

Changes  Around  Turn  of  Century 

First  Tobacco  Manufacturers 
Statesville 

Beginning  Tobacco  Manufacturing 
Around  1870 

J.  H.  McElwee 

L.  Ash 

Adams-Powell  Co. 

Irvin  &  Poston 

Iredell  Tobacco  Co. 
Mocksville 

Brown  Bros. 

Bailey  Bros. 
Wilson 

Largest  Tobacco  Market  in  the  State 

Wells-Whitehead  Tobacco  Co. 

Purchased  by  The  American  Tobacco  Co. 
Chief  Promoter-Frank  D.  Ware 

One  of  The  Largest  Centers  of  Sales 
Warehouses 

Percival  Smith  Hill 

"The  Greatest  Tobacco  Market  in  the 
World" 
Rocky  Mount 

Stone  Tobacco  Co. 
Raleigh 

Three  Manufacturers  in  1880s 

Became  Tobacco  Market  Sept.  26,  1884 

All  Sales  and  Processing  of  Leaf  Finally 
Disappeared 
Kittrell 

Once  Had  15  Different  Tobacco  Factories 
Yadkin  County 

More  Than  20  Factories 

Yadkinville 

Jonesville 

East  Bend  ./ 

Boonville 
Stokes  County 

22  Factories  in  1881-82 
Surry  County 

Boasted  25  Factories  in  1881-82 

Tobaccoland  U.  S.  A 9 

Artistic  Publication 

One  Share  of  Blackwell 9 

N.  C.  Furniture  Manufacturing 10 

J.  T.  Ryan  Has  Devoted  40  Years  Promoting 
Furniture  Industry 10 


No.        Pa, 


3-4 


3-4 


3-4 

3-4 
1-2 

1-2 


9 

11 


;PAGE  59) 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  9  AND  10,   1951-1952 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  3 


Vol. 


No. 


)UNNAGAN,  M.  R. :    (Continued) 

High  Point  Known  as  Hub  of  Southern 

Furniture  Industry 10  1-2 

Tomlinson  of  High  Point 

Myrtle  Desk  Co. 

Alma  Desk  Co. 

The  Continental  Furniture  Co. 

Globe  Parlor  Furniture  Co. 

Colony  Tables,  Inc. 
Heritage  Furniture  Co. 
Silver  Craft  Furniture  Co. 
Carson's  Incorporated 
Dallas,  Incorporated 
Marsh  Furniture  Co. 
Welsh  Furniture  Co. 
Burton  Furniture  Co. 
Universal  T-V  Furniture  Mfg.  Co. 
Casard  Furniture  Mfg.  Co. 
Moffit,  Incorporated 
National  Upholstering  Co. 
Carolina  Upholstering  Co. 
Reliable  Mfg.  Co. 

Founders  Furniture  (Pleasant  Garden) 
Monarch  Furniture  Co. 
Other  Guilford  Firms 
Sylvania  Acquires  High  Point  Plant  to 

Produce  T-V  Cabinets 10  1-2 

Thornasville  Famous  As  World  Leader  In 

Chair  Production 10  1-2 

Thornasville  Chair  Co. 
Standard  Chair  Co. 
Thornasville  Furniture  Co. 
Commercial  Carving  Co. 
Thornasville  Upholstering  Co. 
Erwin-Lambeth,  Inc. 
Other  Thornasville  Firms 
Lexington  Home  of  Large,  Small  Furniture, 

Novelty  Plants... 10  1-2 

Dixie  Furniture  Co.,  Inc.  &  Link-Taylor 

Furniture  Co. 
United  Furniture  Corp. 
Lexington  Chair  Co. 
Hoover  Chair  Co. 
Franklin  Shockey  Co. 
Novelty  Furnituie  Firms 

Kirkman  Novelty  Furniture  Co. 

Model  Furniture  Co. 

Streetman  Novelty  Furniture  Co. 
Biltwell  Chair  and  Furniture  Co.,  (Denton) 
Lenoir  Forging  Ahead  in  Quality-Variety 

Furniture  Making 10  1-2 

Broyhill  Furniture  Factories 

Harper  Furniture  Co. 

Lenoir  Chair  Co. 

Lenoir  Furniture  Corp. 
Kent-Coffey  Mfg.  Co. 
Spainhour  Furniture  Co. 
Caldwell  Furniture  Co.  ■  ,  .. 

Fairfield  Chair  Co. 
Hammary  Mfg.  Corp. 
Galvin  Furniture  Co 
Blowing  Rock  Furniture  Co. 
Hibriten  Chair  Co. 
Kincaid  Furniture  Co. 
Hibriten  Furniture  Co. 
Southeastern  Cabinet  Co. 
Other  Caldwell  Firms 
Hickory-Newton-Conover  Important  Furniture 

Producers 10  1-2 

Southern  Desk  Co. 

Hickory  Chair  Co. 

Hickory  Mfg.  Co. 

Hy-Lan  Furniture  Co. 

Century  Furniture  Co. 

Western  Carolina  Furniture  Co 

Jones  Chairs,  Inc. 

Maxwell  Royal  Chair  Co. 

P  &  G  Chair  Co. 

Sherrill  Upholstering  Co. 

Cox  Mfg.  Co. 

Conover  Furniture  Co.  (Conover) 

Southern  Furniture  Co.  (Conover) 

Conover  Chair  Co.  (Conover) 


Page 


13 


22 
22* 


25 


28 


33 


DUNNAGAN,  M.  R.:    (Continued) 

Lenoir  Chair  Co.  No.  2  (Newton) 
Haupt  Mfg.  Co.  (Newton) 
Scales  Furniture  Co  (Claremont) 
Other  Catawba  Firms 
Morganton-Drexel  Boast  of  High  Quality 

Furniture  Plants 

Drexel  Furniture  Co. 

Drexel  at  Drexel 

Drexel  at  Morganton 
Henredon  Furniture  Industries 
Morganton  Furniture  Co. 

Asheboro,  Nearby  Towns  Large  Furniture 

Manufacturers _ 

Lucas  National,  Inc. 

P  &  P  Chair  Co. 

Ramseur  Furniture  Co. 

Other  Randolph  Plants 
Siler  City-Liberty  Lead  in  School  Furniture 

Production 

High  Point  Bending  &  Chair  Co. 

Williams  &  Brower 

Other  Chatham  Plants 

Gregson  Mfg.  Co 

Liberty  Chair  Co. 

Stout  Chair  Co. 
Statesville  Extensive  Furniture  Producer 

For  50  Years 

Statesville  Chair  Co. 

N  C.  Furniture,  Inc. 

Sherrill  Furniture  Co. 

Carolina  Parlor  Furniture  Co. 

Bylo  Furniture  Co. 

Home  Made  Chair  Co. 

Troutman  Chair  Co.  (Troutman) 

Other  Statesville  Plants 
Winston-Salem  Early  and  Important 

Furniture  Producer :..... 

B.  F.  Huntley  Furn.  Co. 

Unique  Furniture  Makers  (J.  C.  Spach 
Wagon  Works) 

Fogle  Furniture  Co. 

Lohman-Grimes  Corp. 

Brady  Furniture  Co.,  Rural  Hall 

Other  Forsyth  Plants 
Mocks  ville 

Hanes  Chair  &  Furniture  Co. 

Heritage  Furniture,  Inc. 
Mount  Airy  &  Elkin  Early  Northwestern 

Furniture  Makers 

National  Furniture  Co. 

Mount  Airy  Furniture  Co. 

Mount  Airy  Mantel  and  Table  Co. 

Mount  Airy  Chair  Co. 

Elkin  Furniture  Co.,  Elkin 

North  Wilkesboro  and  Ronda  Furniture 

Producing  Area 

Forest  Furniture  Co. 
Oak  Furniture  Co. 
American  Furniture  Co. 
Home  Chair  Co.,  Ronda 

Charlotte  Adds  Furniture  Making  to  Her 

Other  Activities 

Shaw  Mfg.  Co. 

Wade  Mfg.  Co. 

Kroehler  Mfg.  Co. 

Queen  City  Mattress  Upholstering  Co. 

Other  Charlotte  Plants 

Mebane  First  Site  of  Continuing  Furniture 
Making  Plant 

White  Furniture  Co. 
Craftique,  Inc. 
The  Mebane  Co. 
Other  Alamance  Plants 

Sandhills  Area  Has  Several  Progressive 

Furniture  Firms 

Sandhill  Furniture  Corp. 
Sanford  Furniture  Co. 
Vass  Industries,  Inc.S| 
Alliene  Furniture  Corp. 


Vol. 


No.         Page 


10 


1-2  38 


10 


10 


1-2  41 


1-2  42 


10 


1-2  44 


10 


1-2 


47 


10 


10 


1-2 


1-2 


49 


50 


10 


1-2 


52 


10 


1-2 


54 


10 


1-2 


10 


1-2 


56 


58 


PAGE  4 


I NDEX  TO  VOLUMES  9  AND  10,   1  95  1  - 1  952 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


(PAGE  60 


1-2 

67 

3-4 

89 

3-4 

92 

3-4 

93 

3-4 

93 

3-4 

95 

Vol.  No.         Page 

DUNNAGAN,  M.  R. :    (Continued) 

Lincolnton 10  1-2  59 

Ideal  Chair  Co. 

Cottonsmith  Furniture  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc. 

Other  Lincolnton  Firms 

Marion 10  1-2  60 

Drexel  Furniture  Co. 

Otis  L.  Broyhill  Furniture  Co. 
Tobacco  Issue  Sparks  Move  tor  Huge 

Tobacco  Celebration 10 

Erwin  Mills  Group  in  Picture  48  Years  Old; 
Three  of  Duke 10 

Rocky  Mount  Oldest  Continuing  Mill,  One 

Family,  One  Site..... 10 

Cotton  Textiles,  Long  Important,  Joined 

by  Man-Made  Fibers 10 

Cannon  Mills,  Kannapohs,  World's  Largest 

Towel    Producer 10 

Burlington  Mills  is  Largest  Synthetic 

Textile  Producer 10 

Cotton  Spinning  Division 

Cramerton  Division 

Decorative  Fabrics  Division 

Filament  Throwing  and  Weaving  Division 

Finishing  Division 

Ribbon  Division 

Spun  Rayon  Spinning  Division 

Cone  Mills  Operates  World's  Largest 

Flannel,  Denim  Plant 10  3-4  99 

Brief  Items  on  Individual  Plants  and 
Subsidiary  Organizations 
Erwin  Mills  One  of  State's  Foremost 

Textile  Manufacturers 10  3-4  103 

Brief  Items  on  Individual  Plants 
Robbins  Mills,  Producing  Synthetic 

Fabrics,  Expanding 10 

Brief  Items  on  Individual  Plants 

Robbins  Buys  Rocky  Mount  Mills 10 

Textiles-Incorporated  Nation's  Top  Combed 

Yarn  Producer..-. 10 

Johnston  Mills  Effectively  Operates  Yarn 

and  Cloth  Plants 10 

Highland  Park  Mfg.  Co. 

lohnston  Mfg.  Co. 

Union  Mills  Co. 

Eastern  Mfg.  Co. 

Park  Yarn  Mills  Co. 

Worth  Spinning  Co. 

Monroe  Mills  Co. 

Anchor  Mills  Co. 

Johnston  Mills  Co. 
Roanoke,  Rosemary,  Patterson  Mills  Large 

Fabric  Producers 10  3-4  112 

Roanoke  Mills  Co. 

Rosemary  Mfg.  Co. 

Patterson  Mills  Co. 
American  &  Efird  Mills  Big  Combed-Carded 

Yarn  Producer 10 

J.  P.  Stevens  Large-Diversified  Manufacturer 

of  Fine  Fabrics 10 

N.  C.  Finishing  One  of  World's  Large 

Commission  Finishers 10 

Firestone  One  of  World's  Largest  Unit 

Textile  Plants 10 

Erlanger  Produces  Fine  Dress,  Suit  Fabrics 

From  New  Fibers 10 

Woolens,  Ancient  Fabrics,  Increasing  Rapidly 

in  North  Carolina 10 

Chatham,  World's  Largest  Unit  Woolen 

Mill,  Blanket  Leader 10 

Leaksville  Oldest  Continuous  Woolen  Mill  in 

Entire  South 10 

Fieldcrest  Mills  Produce  Quality  Rugs, 

Blankets,  Spreads 10 

Brief  Items  on  Individual  Plants 
Collins  &  Aikman  Large  Weaver  Upholstery, 

Worsted  Wear ...  10  3-4  128 

Brief  Items  on  Individual  Plants 


3-4 

105 

3-4 

106 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

111 

3-4 

114 

3-4 

116 

3-4 

118 

3-4 

119 

3-4 

120 

3-4 

121 

3-4 

121 

3-4 

123 

3-4 

125 

Vol.         No. 
DUNNAGAN,  M.  R. :    (Continued) 

Hatch  Mill,  Modern,  and  Excelsior  Make 

Woolen  Blends 10  3-4 

Beacon  Manufacturing  Co.  Makes  Cotton- 
Rayon  Blended  Blankets 10  3-4 

Modern  Plant  Furnishes  Yarn  for  Many 

N.  C.  Textile  Mills 10  3-4 

American  Enka  One  of  Largest  Rayon  Unit 

Plants  on  Earth 10  3-4 

Valhalla  Hand  Weavers  Making  High  Quality 

Woolen  Fabrics 10  3-4 

Now  Moving  Toward  That  Title  for  Plav 

Clothes  Too: 10  3-4 

Blue  Bell  Long  World's  Largest  Work 

Clothing  Producer 10  3-4 

Brief  Items  on  Individual  Plants 
Hand  Weaving,  Ancient  and  Honored 

Mountain  Craft 10  3-4 

Biltmore  Industries  World's  Largest-Finest 

in  Homespun 10  3-4 

ECUSTA  PAPER  CORP.  PRODUCES  95% 
OF  U.  S.  CIGARETTE  PAPERS 9  3-4 

EMPLOYMENT: 
See  Raper,  Hugh  M. 

EMPLOYMENT,  FEMALE: 
See  Dunn,  E.  Stanhope 

EQUIPMENT: 

See  Machinery,  Equipment  and  Supplies 

EXPERIENCE  RATING: 
See  Raper,  Hugh  M. 

FACTORIES: 

Directory  Lists  295  N.  C.  Tobacco  Factories 
in  1881-82 9  3-4 

FLAGLER,  FRED,  JR.: 

Important  Industries  Develop  to  Supply 

Furniture  Needs 10  1-2 

Lacquers,  Paints,  Machinery 

Hardware,  Mirrors,  Springs 
Furniture  South  Magazine  Has  Served 

Industry  for  30  Years 10  1-2 

FOSCUE,  HENRY  A.; 

Furniture  Foundation  Aids  Instruction  At 

State  College 10  1-2 

Formation 

Purpose 

First  Graduating  Class  June,  1952 

FURNITURE  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA 
Furniture,  Started  Early,  Among  State's 

Leading  Industries 10  1-2 

Fourth  Ranking  Industry  in  N.  C. 

In  1947  N.  C.  First  in  Production  of 
Bedroom  Furniture 

N.  C.  Furniture  Products 10  1-2 

N.  C,  With  42  Active  Counties,  Leads  in 

Wooden  Furniture 10  1-2 

Thirty  Scattered  N.  C.  Counties  Have  Active 

Furniture  Plants 10  1-2 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R.,  for  Articles  on 

Individual  Furniture  Firms 

FURNITURE  MARKETS: 

Permanent  Furniture  Markets 10  1-2 

Southern  Furniture  Exposition  Building 

Permanent  Market 10  1-2 

Located  in  High  Point 

Developments  and  Expansions 

GOLD,  JOHN  D.,  LONG  PUBLISHER  OF 
WILSON  TIMES  AND  ZION'S 
LANDMARK - 9         1-2 


3AGE  61 


I  NDEX  TO  VOLUMES  9  AND  10,   1  95  1  -  1  952 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  5 


114 


Vol.         No. 
OLOMAN,  W.  D.:_ 
Amendments  in  1951  Increase  Benefits, 

Reduce  Taxes 9  3-4 

Result  of  Recent  Amendments 
Revision  of  the  Experience  Rating  Formula 
Extended  Duration  of  Benefits  to  26  Weeks 
Expands  Conditions  Under  Which  an 

Employer  May  Terminate  Coverage 
Amendment  Adopted  Eliminating  Possi-  , 

bility  of  Double  Taxation 
Time  Extended  for  Employer  Protest  of 

Contribution  Rate 
Voluntary  Contributions — Time  Extended 
Amendment  Adopted — Issuance  of  Execution 

UTCHENS,  MRS.  EDITH  D.: 

N.  C.  Has  Ample  Labor  Reserves  for 

Industrial  Needs.. 9  3-4  119 

Expansion  Causes  Shortage 

Classification  of  Workers 

Population  Growth  Brings  Expansion  in 
Labor  Force 

<JDEX  TO  VOLUMES  7  AND  8,  1949-50 9  1-2      57-62 

)HNSON,  MRS.  E.  DeKAY: 
Manpower-Industrial  Characteristics  of 

Major  N.  C.  Areas... 10  1-2  63 

)HNSON,  E.  S.; 

State  College  Offers  Only  Four  Year  Course 
in  Furniture _ 10  1-2  12 

)URNALISM: 

Journalism  Foundation,  UNC,  Aids  School 

in  Training ■_ 9  1-2  6 

Tribute  to  News-People 

Officers  and  Directors 

Better  Trained  Journalists 
Chartering  Members  of  The  UNC  Journalism 

Foundation 9  1-2  6 

Personal  Journalism,  Editor  Feuds,  Half 

Century  Ago....... 9  1-2  7 

Papers  Must  Win  on  Merit 

Free  Railroad  Passes 

Many  Editorial  Conflicts 

Reams  of  Copy  Thrown  Away 

Great  Talker-Poor  Writer 

Asked  Twice  to  Color  News 

ELLY,  PAUL: 

Huge  Post-War  Growth  of  N.  C.  Textiles: 

Many  New  Plants..... 10  3-4  90 

ABOR: 

Study  Labor  Resources  for  N.  C.  Industrial 

Expansion.. 9  1-2  50 

Collection,  Preparation  and  Dissemination 
of  Labor  Market  Information  Basic 
Responsibility 

Study  of  Recruitable  Labor  Includes  House- 
wives, Youths  Who  Would  Be  Drawn 
Into  Employment,  Older  Employables,  Etc. 

Monthly  Report  of  Findings 

See  Hutchens,  Mrs.  Edith  D. 

AMPE,  DR.  J.  H.: 
Gaston  Technical  Institute  to  Help  In 

Textile  Training 10  3-4 

ANCASTER, , BLANCHE: 
ESC  Seeks  Fill-in  Work  for  Seasonal 

Tobacco  Workers 9  3-4 

Purpose  of  Statewide  Industry  Stud}' 

100  Different  Jobs  Observed 

Off-Season  Industry 
Job  Study  of  Processes  in  Furniture  Mfg.. 10  1-2 

ANIER,  J.  C: 
Wider  Markets  Developed  by  Leaf  Tobacco 

Exporters 9  3-4 

EGISLATIVE  CHANGES: 
See  Holoman,  W.  D. 

■ESESNE,  HENRY: 
N.  C.  Increases  Lead  As  Nation's  Premiere 

Textile  State..... 10  3-4 


83 


118 


66 


109 


73 


3-4 

101 

3-4 

103 

3-4 

103 

Vol.  No.         Page 
MACHINERY,  EQUIPMENT,  AND  SUPPLIES: 
N.  C.  Developed  Tobacco  Machinery,  Equip- 
ment, Supplies.. 9           3-4  100 

Chief  Among  Corporations — American 

Machine  and  Foundry  Co. 
Wright  Machinery  Co. 
Other  North  Carolina  Inventors  of 

Tobacco  Machinery 
New  Curing  Methods 
New  Growing  Steps 
Production  of  Tobacco  Bags 
American  Machine  Produces  Tobacco  Indus- 
try Equipment 9 

Wright  Machinery  Co.  Makes  Tobacco  Indus- 
try Machinery 9 

Golden  Belt  Makes  Tobacco  Bags,  Print 

Cloth  in  Durham 9 

MARKETING: 

See  Cyrus,  J.  H.;  Weeks,  L.  T.;  Scott,  G.  T.; 
Lanier,  J.  C;  Morgan,  M.  A.;  Royster, 
Fred  S. 

MORGAN,  M.  A.: 

Tobacco  Associates  Expand  Flu-Cured  Weed 

Markets 9  3-4  1 10 

Need  for  Organization 
Financed  by  Assessments 
President  Hutson 
Work  of  Organization 
Export  to  New  Fields 
Germany  New  Big  User 
Trade  Balance  Important 
Competition  From  Abroad 
Our  Bright  Leaf  Preferred 
Still  Expanding  Markets 

NEWSPAPERS: 

N.  C.  Has  41  Daily  Newspapers;  7  Morning; 

34  Afternoon..... 9 

Several  Papers  Failed  to  Give  Data 

Requested  After  Third  Plea..... 9 

Thirty-Three  Semi-Weekly  Papers  Published 

in  State 9 

Only  One  Tri-Weekly  Newspaper  is  Published 

in  North  Carolina 9 

North  Carolina  is  Well  Supplied  With  133 

Weekly  Papers.. 9 

N.  C.  Newspapers  Fine  Training  Schools  for 

^  High  Posts... 9 

Several  Newspapers  Suspended  Operations 

During  Recent  Years 9 

PAPERS  OF  THE  PAST  AND  TODAY, 

BEAUFORT-MOREHEAD  CITY  NEWS 9 

The  Beaufort  Look  Out 
The  Morehead  City  Coaster 

PENDLETON,  NORMAN  L.: 

Community  Handicap  Shop,  Elizabeth  City 

Is  Acclaimed... _. 10 

Pendleton  Sparks  Handicap  Shop 10 

PERSONALITIES  OF  PAST  AMONG  NORTH 
CAROLINA  EDITORS: 
See  Roland  F.  Beasley 

PHILPOT,  H.  C: 

State  Furniture  Progress  Due  to  Woods, 

Labor,  Initiative 10  1-2  9 

PIONEERS: 

Sturdy  Pioneers  Started  Huge  Furniture 

Industry  for  State 10  1-2  7 

PLANTS,  PROCESSING 

About  100  Leaf  Processing  Plants  in  N.  C. 

Market  Towns 9  3-4  113 

PRESS  ASSOCIATION: 

Active  in  Promoting  State  Papers. 9  1-2  3 

The  press  Institute  Held  Annually 

Big  Project  Before  the  Association  Now 
Organization  and  Early  Days 9  1-2  4 

Resolution  on  Advertising  Rates 

Censures  General  Assembly 

First  Western  Convention 

Two  Records  of  Early  Acts 9  1-2  4 

Officers,  Meeting  Places  and  Time 9  1-2  49 


1-2 

22 

1-2 

23 

1-2 

29 

1-2 

29 

1-2 

33 

1-2 

47 

1-2 

47 

1-2 


1-2 
1-2 


56 


62 
62 


PAGE  6 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  9  AND  10,   1951-1952 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


(PAGE  62 


Vol. 
PRESS  ASSOCIATION:     (Continued) 

Eastern  N.  C.  Association  Holds  Semi-Annual 

Meetings 9 

Western  N.  C.  Newspaper  Group  Meets 

Monthly  in  Asheville.. : 9 

Mid-Western  N.  C.  Newspaper  Association 

Meets  Monthly...... 9 

N.  C.  Press  Association  Holds  Sessions 

For  Dailies-Weeklies 9 

PRESS  NOTES:  INTERESTING  ITEMS  OF 

PEOPLE  AND  PAPERS 9 

Lee  Weathers 
Williamston  Manning 
Aged  Wilmington  Star 
Beasley-Bryant-Noell 
Honors  Negro  Printer 
Sharpes  of  Lumberton 
Trains  Ad.  Executives 
New  Mountain  Rattler 
Charlotte  Observer  Largest 
Prominent  People  on  N  &  O 
Shelby  Star  Stars 
That  Lassicer  Family 
Noell  Editor  64  Years 
Wherever  The  Sun  Shines 
Golf  World  Goes  Places 
News  For  Waldensians 
Our  "Mother  of  The  Year" 
Big  Boys  on  The  Dispatch 
Louis  Graves  and  Weekly 
Southern  Medicine  and  Surgery 
Ed  Anderson  Papers 
Leaksville  News  Carriers 
Petticoat  Publishers 
Charles  H.  Mebane  Versatile 
Nine  Association  Secretaries 
Association  Presidents 
Three  Kitchin  Congressmen 
New  Dunn  Daily  Record 
Observer  Employees  Beneficiaries 

More  Press  Notes 9 

Scooped-And  Almost  Fired 
No  Wedding;  So,  No  News 
Eddie  Would  Get  Even 

PRINTING  INDUSTRY: 

Printing  Industry  of  The  Carolinas,  Effective 
Group 9 

History  of  The  Association 
Officers  Since  1932 
Officers  and  Directors  of  The  Printing 

Industry  of  Carolinas 9 

PUBLICATIONS: 

Progressive  Farmer,  1,150,000  Subscribers, 

Notable  Magazine 9 

Monthly  Agricultural  Magazine 

Founded  in  Winston,  Feb.  10,  1886,  by 
Col.  Leonidas  L.  Polk 

Clarence  Poe,  Editor 
Heavy  Articles,  Wit  and  Humor  in  College 

Publications 9 

Publications  in  N.  C.  On  Which  Little  Data 

Secured;  Reference   9 

North  Carolina  Publications 9 

Carolinian,  Woman's  College,  Trains  Many 

Leading  Writers 9 

Religious,  Professional,  Trade  and  Special 

Publications 9 

RAPER,  HUGH  M.: 

Experience  Rating  Gives  Added  Saving  of 

33,500,000 .....       9 

Experience  Rating  Study 
Rates  Reflect  Benefit  Charges 
1951  Savings  216,500,000 
Textiles  Employ  Over  One-Third  of  N.  C. 

Covered  Workers 10 

Employment  Chart 

RICH  I.  HAMPTON,  EDITOR,  ADEPT 
PROMOTER  AND  INK  HOUND 9 

ROYSTER,  FREDS.: 

See  Association  Regulates  Marketing  of 
Flu-Cured  Tobacco 


No. 

Page 

1-2 

7 

1-2 

8 

1-2 

8 

1-2 

9 

1-2 

17 

1-2 


1-2 


3-4 


3-4 


1-2 


56 


1-2  16 


1-2  16 


1-2  49 


41 


1-2 
1-2 

35 
2 

1-2 

42 

1-2 

44 

116 


72 


48 


Vol.  No.        Pat 

SCOTT,  G.  T.: 

N.  C.  Man  Started  Acre  Allotments, 

Marketing  Quotas. 9  3-4  10 

County  Community  Groups 
Reduce  Acres  Double  Prices 
Pro-Rata  Apportionment 
Over-production  Penalties 
Protection  vs.  Price  Slumps 

SMITH,  J.  WARREN: 

N.  C.  Vocational  Textile  School  in  Center  of 

Industry 10  3-4 

Knitting  and  Tailoring 

Other  Special  Courses 

For  Whom  Training  is  Available 

Enrollment  Includes  Veterans 

Trained  School  Faculty 

Excellent  Equipment 

SNUFF: 

One  Firm  Still  Produces  Snuff;  Started  In 

State  80  Years  Ago .., 9  3-4 

Principal  Brand — Tube  Rose 
Popular  Form  of  Use — "Dipping" 
Manufacturing  Process 
Instructions  for  "Dipping" 

SOCIAL  SECURITY: 

Social  Security  Offices  Located  in  13  North 

Carolina  Communities 9  1-2 

STATE  COLLEGE: 

State  College  Helps  Tobacco  Growers  in 

Principal  Crop 9  3-4 

SUPPLIES: 

See  Machinery,  Equipment  and  Supplies 

TABLES: 

Employment  Security  Program  Activity  High- 
lights, January-November,  1950... 9  1-2 

Other  Activity  Measures  bv  Quarter  for 

Eleven  Months  of  1949  and  1950 9  1-2 

Unemployment  Compensation 9  1-2 

Testing  Activities.... 9  1-2 

Recruitable  Labor  for  Industrial  Development 

by  County. 9  1-2 

TEXTILES: 

Textiles  in  North  Carolina    10  3-4 

Textile  Mills,  Alphabetical  by  Towns, 

Operating  in  State 10  3-4 

Textile  Schools 

See  Campell,  Dr.  Malcolm  E. 

See  Smith,  J.  Warren 

See  Lampe,  Dr.  J.  H. 

N.  C.  Textile  Firsts 10  5-4 

N.  C.  Textile  Notes 10  3-4 

TOBACCO: 

N.  C.  Tobacco  Priority 9  3-4 

Produces  34.8  Percent  of  Nation's  Tobacco 
Products 

Grows  67.6  Percent 

N.  C.  Tobacco  Products  Top  Total  of  All 
Other  States 

Cigarettes  Principal  Item 
Start  From  Scratch  1910 

Factory  Payrolls  256,000, 000;  Low  Contri- 
bution Rates 9 

N.  C.  Takes  Tobacco  Growing  and  Manu- 
facturing Lead — 1850-1950 9 

Crude  Plants — Wagon  Sales 

Forges  Ahead  of  Virginia 

Plants  Increase — Decrease 

WAREHOUSES: 

300  Tobacco  Auction  Warehouses 9 

Old  Bright  Belt 
Middle  Bright  Belt 
Eastern  Bright  Belt 
Border  Bright  Belt 
Burley  Belt 

WEEKS,  L.T.: 

Stabilization  Group  Holds  Prices  to  90%  of 

Parity 9  3-4 

WHITAKER,  W.  STANLEY 9  3-4 


3-4 
3-4 


3-4 


ublications  of  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

(FORMERLY  "UNEMPLOYMENT  COMPENSATION  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA") 


ol.  5 


ol 


ol.  7- 


lennial  Reports,  1936-1938;  1938-1940;  1940-1942; 
1942-1944;  1944-1946;  1946-1948;  1948-1950; 
1950-1952 

nnual  Reports  (Mimeographed)  1937*,  1938*,  1939, 
1940,  1941*— :;:Out  of  Print 

mplovment  Security  News  (mimeographed — week- 
ly), started  in  1936  by  the  North  Carolina  State 
Employment  Service.  Not  issued  during  Calendar 
year  1945. 

orth  Carolina  Employment  Security  Information, 
Volume  I,  Numbers  1-12,  1941.  (Discontinued.) 
he  U.  C.  C.  Quarterly 
Vol.  1,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1942-43) 
Vol.  2,  Nos.  1,  2,  3  (1944)   (No.  4  not  issued) 
Index  to  Vols.  1  and  2  (1942-44) 
Vol.  3,  Nos.  1,2,3,4  (1945) 
Vol.  4,  Nos.  1-2,  3,  4  (1946) 
Index  to  Vols.  3  and  4  (1945-46) 

(Included  in  Vol.  5,  No.  2-3) 
he  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly  (Name  changed  April  1,  1947) 

No.  1,  Winter,  1947— Granite,  Marble,  Stone 

No.  2-3,  Spring-Summer,  1947— Brick,  Tile, 
Pipe,  Pottery 

No.  4,  Fall,  1947 — Rural  Industries 
6_No.    1.   Winter,    1948— Pulp,    Paper,    Paper 
Products 

No.  2-3,  Spring-Summer,  1948 — Dairy  Prod- 
ucts 

No.  4.  Fall,  1948 — Insurance 

Index  to  Vols.  5  and  6.  1947-48,  in  Vol.  7.  No.  2 

No.  1 ,  Winter,  1949 — Banking 

No.  2,  Spring,  1949 — Fertilizer  Manufactur- 
ing 

No.  3-4.  Summer-Fall,  1949— Trade,  Whole- 
sale-Retail 
ol.  8— No.  1-2,  Winter-Spring,  1950— Hotels,  Res- 
tj-i  n  t*3  n  t  ^ 

No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1950— Milling:  Flour, 
Feed,  Meal 

Index  to  Vols.  7  and  8,  1949-50,  in  Vol.  9,  No.  1-2 

ol.  9 — No.  1-2,  Winter-Spring,  1951— Newspapers, 
Printing 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1951— Tobacco  Man- 
ufacturing 
ol.  10— No.    1-2,   Winter-Spring,    1952— Furniture 
Manufacturing 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1952— Textile  Manu- 
facturing 

Index  to  Vols.  9  and  10.  1951-52,  in  Vol.  11,  No.  1-2 
ol.  11 — No.     1-2,     Winter-Spring,     1953 — Hosiery 

Manufacturing 

e 

mployment  Security  Law  as  amended  (1951). 

ules  and  Regulations,  amended  June  19,  1951. 

IRCULARS  AND  FOLDERS: 

'mployer  Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina, 
^formation  for  Workers  about  Unemployment  Com- 
pensation. 

{formation  for  Interstate  Claimants. 
Unemployment  Compensation  for  Veterans. 
« ■ 

OSTERS: 

'mployer' s  Certificate  of  Coverage  and  Notice  to 
Workers. 

'otice  to  Workers  as  to  Benefit  Rights  While  on  Va- 
cation. 


RELEASES  OE  THE  BUREAU  OF  RESEARCH 

AND  STATISTICS 
Current  Series 

"Trends" — A  monthly  mimeographed  activity  re- 
port first  issued  in  June  1943.  Data  for  period 
1938-1943  found  in  other  series  now  out-of-print. 

"Employment  and  Wages  in  Covered  Employment 
by  County" — A  quarterly  mimeographed  release 
giving  employment  and  wage  data  in  covered  em- 
ployment for  each  county  for  five  broad  industry 
groups.    First  release  First  Quarter  of  1948. 

"Covered  Employment  and  Total  Wages  in  North 
Carolina" — An  annual  report  for  calendar  years, 
issued  in  two  parts  as  follows: 

1.  Summary  data  for  State  by  two-digit  industry 
and  employment  and  wages  by  county. 

2.  County  data  by  three-digit  industry.  First  re- 
leased in  1943. 

"Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina" — An  annual 
study  of  the  experience  rating  plan  and  its  opera- 
tion. First  release  in  1946.  (1948  issue  out  of 
print. ) 

"Labor  Resources  in  North  Carolina  for  Industrial 
Development" — A  bimonthly  release  begun  in 
January  1951  showing  recruitable  labor  by  coun- 
ty. 

"Labor  Supply — Labor  Demand" — a  labor  market 
digest  released  in  February,  June,  and  October 
oased  on  sample  employment  trends  in  over  800 
reporting  establishments  in  14  selected  areas. 
First  release  entitled  "Employment  Trend  in  Re- 
porting Establishments"  first  issued  in  1946.  Out- 
of-print  prior  to  1949. 

"Labor  Market  Digests" — An  employment  security 
office  release  showing  labor  market  conditions  in 
office  area.  Only  current  releases  available.  Re- 
leased as  follows: 

1.  Bi-montiiiy  for  Aslieviile,  Ciiarlotte,  Durham, 
Greensboro,  High  Point,  Kaieign,  and  Winston- 
Salem,  and 

2.  In  October,  February  and  June  for  Burlington. 
Gastonia,  Morganton,  Keidsville-Spray  and  Wil- 
mington. 

"Annual  Report  of  Employment  Service  Division" 
— A  mimeographed  release  dealing  primarily 
with  activity  summary  data  by  office,  presenting 
data  graphically  for  evaluating  purposes.  A  sim- 
ilar graphic  presentation  is  prepared  for  each 
January-June  period.  For  limited  distribution 
only. 

Special  Reports  and  Studies 

"Trends  in  Covered  Employment  and  Wages  1942- 
1945." 

"Trends  in  Manufacture  1945-1946." 

"The  Influence  of  Industry  on  Population  Change" 
(1948) 

"Research  in  the  Emplovment  Security  Program" 
(1948) 

"North  Carolina  Emplovment  and  the  Labor  Force, 
1947" 

"Unemployment  Insurance  Financing" — a  digest  of 
the  Cost  of  Unemployment  Insurance  in  North 
Carolina,  and  a  Study  of  Long-Range  Unemploy- 
ment Benefit  Financing  and  Fund  Solvency. 

"A  Study  of  Claimants  Exhausting  Benefits  Under 
the  Unemployment  Insurance  Program  During 
May  and  June  1951." 


ca  •»  ~i  "d  '(i)  (d)  tec  -ass) 

SS3HSN0D    JO    13V    a3<3Nn    UOJ 

a3inno33v  aovisod  sbivis  aaiiNn 
1IYW  A±IHf03S  lN3WAO!dW3 


AHvnan  axvxs 


KOXHCnOHH    *1  3IHHVD   S3IJI 


Ol 


ss3Nisng  ivioijjo 


D  "N  'HOiaivy  '68S  xog 
NOISSIWVOD    S  *3 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 


VOLUME  11,  NO.  3-4 


SUMMERS  ALU  1953 


Vorth  Carolina  Was  A  Pioneer  in  Railroad  Building;  Is  A 
National  Leader  in  Trucking;  Excellent  Bus  and  Air  Lines 


jMMflflil 


^^^^^^^^^^^R^^^^^W 


££P         f  ?  <  III         ■**-*'*• 

-'^  lbs      --t^^.t^^^'^:': 


— Most  of  photos  by  N.  C.  Dept.  of  Archives  and  History 

Methods  of  travel  and  transportation  of  yesteryear  in  North  Carolina 

(Descriptive  lines  Page  66) 

PUBLISHED  BY 

Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALEIGH.  N.  C. 


PAGE  66 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195; 


Ther  E.  S*  C.  Quarterly 

'  , '  '.Formerly  The  U.v\C\  Quarterly) 


Volume  -lLfN  urr.be  os  3'-4 


Summer-Fall,  1953 


.     '     -     '        Issued  at  Raleigh,  N.  C.  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  W.  Benton  Pipkin, 
Reidsville;  C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;  Crayon  C.  Efird,  Albemarle. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Public  representatives:  James  A.  Brid- 
ger,  Bladenboro;  James  A.  Gray,  Robersonville;  W.  B.  Hor- 
ton,  Yanceyville;  Mrs.  R.  C.  Lewellyn,  Dobson,  and  Dr.  J. 
W.  Seabrook,  Fayetteville;  Employer  representatives:  A.  L. 
Tait,  Lincolnton,  and  W.  A.  Egerton,  Enka;  Employee  repre- 
sentatives: Melvin  Ward,  Spencer,  AFL,  and  H.  D.  Lisk, 
Charlotte,  CIO. 


HENRY   E.   KENDALL Chairman 

R.  FULLER  MARTIN Director 

Unemployment  Insurance  Division 

ERNEST  C.  McCRACKEN Director 

North  Carolina  State  Employment  Service  Division 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Public  Information  Officer 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 

CONTENTS  Page 

North    Carolina    Transportation 66 

Kendall  Again  Chairman  ;  Gregory,  Wolf  Renamed  ;  Efird  New 67 

'Tweetsie',  in  Song  and  Story,  at  Boone,  Now  in  Virginia 68 

Transport  Workers  Double  in  Decade  ;  Bulk  in  Ten  Counties 69 

By  Mrs.  Grace  Z.  Moen 

Early  Trails,  Trading  Baths;  State  Breaks  Traffic  Limits 70 

Blank  Roads  Hailed  as  'Farmer  Railroads';  Lasted  a  Decade 72 

N.  C.  Early  Leader  in  Railroad  Building  ;  Many  Short  Lines 73 

State  Develops  Modern  67,000  Mile  Toll-Free  Road   System 75 

By  Margaret  Burk 

Intracoastal  Waterway  Pleasure  Craft,  Freight  Boat  Artery 78 

Blue  Ridge  Parkway,  One  of  World's  Remarkable  Scenicways 80 

By  R.  Getty  Browning 

Wilmington,  Morehead  Ports  Improved  to  Increase  Shipping 81 

Public  Transportation  Systems  Regulated  by  State  62  Years 83 

By  Fred  C.  Hunter 

Motor  Carriers  Develop  Rapidly  Into  Vital  State  Industry 84 

By  Jeff  B.  Wilson 

Officers  and  Directors,  N.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Association 85 

McLean  Becomes  Largest  Trucking  Firm  in  Southeast  States 87 

By  George  E.  Spaulding 

Akers  Motor  Lines  Becomes  State's  Second  Largest  Carrier 89 

Associated  Transport  Absorbed  N.   C.  Units,  Nation's  Largest 90 

Trucking  Firms:  Central  Motor  Lines,  Pilot  Freight  Carriers,  Great  South- 
ern, Overnite  Transportation,  Miller  Motor  Express,  Thurston  Motor 
Lines,  Johnson  Motor  Lines,  Fredrickson  Motor  Express,  Hennis  Freight 
Lines,  Turner  Transfer,  Youngblood  Truck  Lines,  Kilgo  Motor  Freight, 
Lewis  &  Holmes  Motor  Freight,  Harris  Express,  S.  &  W.  Motor  Lines, 
New  Dixie  Lines,  W.  R.  Candler  Transfer,  Jocie  Motor  Lines,  Colonial 
Motor  Freight,  Dickson  Transfer,  C.  S.  Henry  Transfer,  Neal  Hawkins 
Transfer,  Blue  Ridge  Trucking,  D.  &  L.  Motor  Lines,  Edmae  Trucking; 
Associated  Petroleum  Carriers,  Rojster  Transport,  May  belle  Transport, 
Quality  Oil  Transport,  Petroleum  Transportation,  Waccamaw  Oil 
Transport,    H.    W.    Miller    Trucking,    Barnes    Truck    Line,    North    State 

Motor    Lines 92-109 

Newspapers,  Picture  Films,  Dated  Items  Need  Quick  Delivery 109 

Observer  Transportation  Co.,  Citizens  Express,  Carolina  Delivery  Service 

Utilities  Commission  Regulates  455  Truck  Common  Carriers Ill 

Piedmont,  Only  N.  C.  Airline,  'Best  Little  Carrier'  in  Nation 112 

N.   C,  Base  of  First  Flight,   Becoming  Air-Minded ...113 

Luxury  Busses  Carry  Passengers  Locally  and  Nation-Wide 115 

Carolina  Coach,  Atlantic  Greyhound,  Queen  City  Coach,  Smoky  Moun- 
tain Stages,  Seashore  Transportation,  Southern  Coach,  Smoky  Moun- 
tain Tours — City  Busses 

State  Licenses,  Regulates  130  Bassenger  Motor  Bus  Lines 123 

Plantation  Pipe  Line  Brings  Petroleum  Products  to  State ....124 

Transcontinental  Pipes  Natural  Gas  Distributed  in  State ..126 

Public  Service  Co.  of  N.  C. 

Several  'Firsts'  and  Little  Known  Facts  About  Railroads 128 

By  James  M.  White   (N.  C.  Railroad  Association) 

Four  N.  C.  Counties  Never  Had  Rail  Lines 129 

Southern  Largest  Railroad  Operating  in  North  Carolina 130 

(Carolina  &  Northwestern) 

Col.  A.  B.  Andrews — N.  C.  Railroad  Classifications 133 

Atlantic  Coast  Line  Operates  Large  Rail  System  from  N.  C 134 

President    Davis,    Old    Bell,    Rockingham    Railroad,    Va.    and    Carolina 
Southern,    East   Carolina    Railroad,    Black    Mountain    Bailroad.    Clinch- 
field  Railroad 
Seaboard  Air  Line's  System  Started  with  Short  N.  C.  Lines  138 

By  C.  E.  Bell 

Norfolk  Southern  Has  90%  of  Operations  in  North  Carolina 140 

Norfolk  and  Western  Operates  Three  Lines  into  N.  Carolina  ...  ...142 

Winston -Salem   Southbound 

Many  Independent  Short  Line  Railroads  in  North  Carolina 144 

Atlantic  &  East  Carolina,  Piedmont  &  Northern,  Durham  &  Southern, 
High   Point,   Thomasville    &    Denton,   Aberdeen   &    Rocklish,    Alexander 


NORTH  CAROLINA  TRANSPORTATION 

Transportation  in  North  Carolina  was  difficulj 
during  the  settlement  and  colonization  period  an! 
on  up  past  the  turn  of  the  century-  Banks  along  th{ 
coast  interfered  with  shipping  and  shallow  sound 
hindered  any  but  small  boats.  Rivers  and  othe 
streams  had  to  be  forded,  ferried  or  bridged.  Moun 
tains  in  the  west  could  be  scaled  only  at  gaps. 

North  Carolina  passed  through  the  trail  and  trad 
ing  path  periods  and  the  period  of  poorly  improve) 
and  maintained  roads,  noted  for  their  ruts  and  roots) 
Plank  roads  were  hailed  as  the  "farmers'  railroads'" 
but  their  span  of  existence  was  brief.  This  Stat 
went  into  the  lead  in  construction  of  railroads  dur 
ing  the  quarter  of  a  century  before  the  War  Betweei 
the  States,  and  again  marched  forward  during  th 
last  quarter  of  the  last  century.  During  the  past  3i 
years  the  State  has  again  forged  forward  in  the  con 
struction  of  a  State-wide,  county-wide  system  of  all 
weather  highways. 

In  the  past  25  years  North  Carolina  has  developet 
bus  and  truck  systems  which  are  second  to  none  ii 
the  country,  extending  to  every  county  in  the  Stat 
and  reaching  areas  not  formerly  reached  and  servec 
by  railroads.  Shipping  by  water  is  being  expande( 
through  development  of  modern  port  facilities  at  tw< 
coastal  cities.  One  important  air  transportatioi 
company  has  been  expanding  its  services  from  thi; 
to  other  states,  in  addition  to  numbers  of  other  com 
panies  that  have  established  routes  in  North  Caro 
lina.  Two  large  pipe  lines,  one  for  petroleum  prod 
ucts,  the  other  for  natural  gas,  have  been  built  int< 
or  through  the  State. 

North  Carolina  has  an  estimated  46,000  individ 
uals  engaged  in  transportation  industries,  20,00(! 
of  them  covered  by  the  Employment  Security 
Law,  approximately  18,000  subject  to  the  Railroad 
Retirement  Board,  with  probably  8,000  not  covereq 
by  either  agency.  Salaries  and  wages  of  these  workj 
ers  probably  reach  $135,000,000  a  year.  The  20,00( 
workers  covered  by  the  Employment  Security  Lav 
drew  wages  and  salaries  of  $65,826,000  and  consti 
tuted  2.8  percent  of  the  covered  workers  in  the  Stat< 
in  1952.  Transportation  is  the  life  line  of  Nortl 
Carolina  industry  and  an  important  and  growing  in 
dustry  within  itself. 


FRONT   PAGE   PICTURES 

First  row,  I.  to  r. — The  Ad-Vance,  blockade  runner  during  the  War  Betweei 
the  States,  named  for  Governor  Vance's  wife;  The  Raleigh,  one  of  the  firs 
locomotives  to  operate  on  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  Railroad,  completed  in    1840 

Second  row,  I.  to  r. — Covered  wagons  on  wagon  lot  around  turn  of  century 
on  what  is  now  Pack  Square,  looking  down  Patton  Avenue,  Asheville;  Th 
first  airplane  flight  at  Kitty  Hawk,  Orville  Wright  at  controls  and  Wilbu 
Wright  alongside;  Rubber-tired  buggy  of  some  50  years  ago,  occupant  late 
became  Mrs.  R.  Getty  Browning,  wife  of  chief  locating  engineer,  N.  C.  High 
way   Department. 

Third  row,  I.  to  r. — "Tobacco  Road",  yoke  of  oxen  pulling  tobacco  hogs 
head,  provided  by  H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.  for  American  Tobacco  Co.,  usei 
in  Durham  Centennial  parade;  Solid  rubber  tired  1920  Auto-Car,  two-toi 
truck,  owned  by  A.  H.  Candler  Transfer  Co.,  Asheville. 

Fourth  row,  I.  to  r. — Coach  of  50-150  years  ago  with  two  white  horses 
used  in  Raleigh  parade  in  1940;  A  ferry  boat,  typical  of  hundreds  used  ove 
streams,  the  current  providing  the  power;  Car  of  government  agent  stuck  ii 
mud  some  40  years  ago  in  Johnston  County. 

(Airplane,  locomotive,  ship,  wagon  lot,  ferry,  coach  and  stuck  car  photo 
N.  C.   Dept.  of  Archives  and   History). 

Railroad,  Laurinbirrg  &  Southern,  Atlantic  <fc  Western,  Carolina  South- 
ern, Clirt'side  Railroad,  Cape  Fear  Railways,  Warrenton  Rail  Road, 
Tallrrlah  Falls  Railway,  Beaufort  &  Morehead,  Graham  County  Railroad 

Many  N.  C.  Railroads  Abandoned  in  Past  Half  Centrrry 15: 

First  'Diesel',   Lawndale-Shelby,  Carthage,  Locomotive   Left 

Highlights  of  Winston-Salem's  Industry  and  Employment 1511 

By  Mrs.  E.  DeKay  Johnson 

N.  C.  Licensed  Over  11-3  Million  Motor  Vehicles  in   1953 15<| 

Raleigh-Norfolk  Rail  Traffic  Opened  in   1853 15; 

Railroad  Notes  and  Folks 


Summer-fall,  1  953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  67 


Kendall  Again  Chairman;  Gregory,  Wolf  Renamed;  Efird  New 


Henry  E.  Kendall  was  reappointed  to  another 
four-year  term  as  chairman  of  the  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission  by  Governor  William  B.  Umstead 
last  July  after  serving  seven  years  in  this  position, 
the  longest  period  of  any  chairman  since  the  Com- 
mission was  formed  near  the  end  of  1936.  At  the 
same  time  Crayon  C.  Efird,  Albemarle,  was  appoint- 
ed a  member  of  the  Commission,  succeeding  Bruce 
E.  Davis,  Charlotte,  and  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Hali- 
fax, and  Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf,  Chapel  Hill,  were  re- 
appointed to  four-year  terms. 

Chairman  Kendall,  Mrs.  Gregory,  Dr.  Wolf  and 
Mr.  Efird  were  administered  the  oath  of  office  by 
Associate  Justice  Jeff  D.  Johnson  in  the  Governor's 
Office  July  14. 

Since  Governor  Umstead  could  not  attend  this 
swearing-in  ceremony,  the  members  of  the  Commis- 
sion met  with  him  in  his  office  during  their  meeting 
in  Raleigh  September  10,  1953.  He  extended  greet- 
ings and  talked  with  them  briefly.  R.  Dave  Hall, 
Belmont;  Charles  A.  Fink,  Spencer,  and  W.  Benton 
Pipkin,  Reidsville,  are  holdover  members  with  two 
more  years  to  serve. 

Chairman  Kendall,  at  the  17th  annual  convention 
held  September  28-October  1,  1953,  at  Wentworth- 
by-the-Sea,  New  Castle,  New  Hampshire,  was  elected 
president  of  the  Interstate  Conference  of  Employ- 
ment Security  Agencies  for  the  ensuing  year.  This 
is  an  organization  of  the  Employment  Security  Agen- 
cies of  the  48  states  and  four  other  units.  During 
the  previous  year  he  had  served  as  chairman  of  the 
Legislative  Committee  and  two  years  before  that  he 
had  been  Regional  Vice-President  of  Region  IV,  em- 
bracing North  Carolina,  Virginia,  West  Virginia, 
Maryland  and  the  District  of  Columbia. 

At  its  annual  meeting  in  Wilmington  in  August 
the  State  Federation  of  Labor  elected  Mr.  Fink  to 
his  17th  term  as  president  of  the  organization. 

In  July  Mrs.  Gregory  was  selected  as 
1953  "North  Carolina  Mother  of  the 
Year"  by  the  National  Golden  Rule 
Foundation. 

Biographical  sketches  of  Chairman 
Kendall,  Mrs.  Gregory,  Mr.  Hali,  Mr. 
Fink  and  Mr.  Pipkin  have  been  carried 
in  this  publication  in  recent  years. 
Sketches  are  now  presented  on  Mr. 
Efird,  the  new  member,  and  Dr.  Wolf, 
reappointed,  about  whom  a  sketch  ap- 
peared twelve  years  ago. 


ciate  professor  of  Economics  in  1928,  continuing  as 
such  until  1936  when  he  became  a  full  professor  of 
Economics,  the  position  he  still  holds.  Since  1946 
he  has  been  director  of  the  Institute  of  Industrial 
Relations  in  Chapel  Hill.  In  1935  he  was  regional 
labor  advisor  of  WPA  and  in  1943  he  was  associate 
member  of  the  National  War  Labor  Board,  serving 
as  public  member  of  the  Fouth  Regional  War  Labor 
Board,  1943-45.  During  World  War  I,  Dr.  Wolf  saw 
overseas  service  as  private  in  the  United  States  Ma- 
rines, 1917-1919. 

When  a  special  Unemployment  Compensation  com- 
mittee was  provided  by  legislative  action  and  ap- 
pointed by  Governor  Ehringhaus  in  1934,  Dr.  Wolf, 
a  member,  was  made  executive  secretary  of  this  com- 
mittee, made  the  study  and  drafted  the  report  made 
to  the  governor  as  the  result  of  extensive  studies 
conducted.  In  1941  he  was  appointed  a  member  of 
the  Employment  Security  Commission  by  Governor 
Broughton  and  has  been  reappointed  by  each  suc- 
ce  i  m>  g<  vernor  to  4-year  terms  on  the  Commission. 

Dr.  Wolf  is  a  member  of  the  American  Economics 
Association,  the  American  Academy  of  Arbitrators, 
the  Industrial  Relations  Research  Association  and 
the  American  Association  of  University  Professors. 
He  is  also  a  member  of  three  professional  and  schol- 
astic societies,  Pi  Kappa  Delta,  Kappa  Delta  Pi  and 
Delta  Sigma  Pi.  In  addition  to  serving  as  associate 
editor  of  the  Southern  Economics  Journal  since  1939, 
Dr.  Wolf  has  written  several  important  treatises  on 
economics  and  labor  conditions,  including  the  Rail- 
road Labor  Board,  1927,  and  Collective  Bargaining 
on    the    Railroads    in    How    Collective    Bargaining 

Members  of  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Caro- 
lina. Front  row,  left  to  right.  Crayon  C.  Efird.  Albemarle,  new 
member;  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Colonel  Henry  E. 
Kendall,  Raleigh,  Chairman;  Second  row,  I.  to  r.,  W.  Benton 
Pipkin,  Reidsville;  Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  C.  A.  Fink, 
Spencer;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont. 


DR.  HARRY  D.  WOLF 

Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf,  Chapel  Hill,  was 
born  in  Sheldon,  Illinois,  March  14, 
1895.  He  received  his  B.S.  degree  at 
Kansas  City  State  Teachers'  College  in 
1922 ;  his  M.A.  degree  at  the  University 
of  Chicago  in  1923,  and  his  Ph.D.  degres 
from  the  University -of  Chicago  in  1926. 
He  was  associate  professor  of  Social 
Science  at  Illinois  College,  Jacksonville, 
111.,  in  1923-24,  and  professor  of  Sac  al 
Science  at  the  same  institution  in  1926- 
28. 

Dr.  Wolf  joined  the  faculty  of  the 
University  of  North  Carolina  as  asso- 


PAGE  68 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195; 


Works,  Twentieth  Century  Fund,  1942. 

In  1926  Dr.  Wolf  married  Miss  Edna  Gilmore. 
They  have  two  sons,  William  Thomas  and  Charles 
Parker  Wolf.     He  is  a  Presbyterian. 


CRAYON  C.  EFIRD 

Crayon  C.  Efird,  Albemarle,  was  born  in  Stanly 
County,  September  28,  1904,  the  son  of  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Henry  P.  Efird.  He  graduated  from  the  Albemarle 
High  School  and  attended  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  for  two  years.  He  then  joined  his  father 
in  the  firm  of  H.  P.  Efird  Co.,  Inc.,  dealer  in  Inter- 
national Harvester  farm  equipment.  He  is  now 
treasurer  of  this  organization. 

In  1933  Mr.  Efird  represented  the  19th  Senatorial 
District  in  the  N.  C.  General  Assembly  and  repre- 
sented Stanly  County  in  the  House  of  Representa- 
tives in  1939.  For  several  years  Mr.  Efird  was 
chairman  of  the  Stanly  County  Democratic  Execu- 
tive Committee.  He  served  as  a  member  of  the  N.  C. 
National  Guard  in  1926-27.  During  Governor 
Broughton's  administration  he  served  as  assistant 
director  of  the  North  Carolina  Division  of  Purchase 
and  Contract,  his  term  extending  from  September 
1,  1941,  to  February  1,  1946. 

Mr.  Efird  is  a  member  of  the  First  Presbvterian 
Church  in  Albemarle  and  is  president  of  the  Jim 
Harris  Bible  Class  of  this  church.  He  is  a  Scottish 
Rite  Mason  and  a  former  president  of  the  Stanly 
County  Shrine  Club.  In  addition  to  being  treasurer 
of  H.  P.  Efird  Co.,  he  has  extensive  farm  interests 
and  is  president  of  the  Albemarle  Oil  Co.,  president 
of  the  Power  City  Bus  Line  and  president  of  Lake 
View,  Inc.,  real  estate  holding  company. 

In  1940  Mr.  Efird  married  Miss  Annabel  Vester 
of  Soring  Hope.  They  have  two  children,  Crayon 
C.  Efird,  Jr.,  11,  and  Sally  Efird,  6. 


TWEETSIE',  HERALDED  !N  SONG  AND_ 
STORY  AT  BOONE,  NOW  IN  VIRGINIA 

"Tweetsie"  is  the  pet  name  applied  to  several  small  wood- 
burning  engines,  with  or  without  the  trains  they  pulled  ope- 
rating for  many  years  on  the  East  Tennesee  and  Western 
North  Carolina  Railroad,  a  narrow  gaua;e  railroad  6G  miles 
long  between  Boone,  N.  C,  and  Johnson  City,  Tenn.  "Tweetsie" 
has  been  applied  to  several  of  these  locomotives  running  in 
numbers  from  one  to  fourteen  (but  minus  13),  but  number 
eleven  is  probably  the  most  famous  in  the  group  since  this 
"Tweetsie"  is  now  pulling  passengers  on  a  one  mile  scenic 
and  fun  railroad  near  Harrisonburg,  Va.,  week  ends  and  holi- 
days. 

The  first  unit  of  the  East  Tennessee  and  Western  North 
Carolina  Railroad  was  built  from  Johnson  City.  Tennessee,  to 
Cranberry  in  Avery  County,  two  or  three  miles  across  the 
North  Carolina  line,  a  distance  of  34  miles,  around  1884.  Iron 
mines  were  being  developed  at  Cranberry  and  a  smelter  was 
established  there  to  extract  the  iron  and  produce  pig  iron. 
Later  the  smelter  was  moved  to  Johnson  City  and  the  ore 
hauled  there  from  the  mine.  Later  the  road  was  extended  to 
Pineola,  a  distance  of  12  miles,  where  the  Whiting  Lumber 
Co.  operated  a  sawmill.  Still  later,  around  1918,  a  branch 
road,  19  miles  long,  was  built  to  Shull's  Mill,  also  a  lumber 
plant.  In  1921  Watauga  County  issued  $27,000  in  bonds  to 
extend  the  road  five  miles  further  northward  to  Boone.  In 
the  early  days  the  road  from  Cranberry  to  Boone  was  operated 
as  the  Linville  River  Railway  Co. 

Floods  in  1940  damaged  the  roadbed  and  caused  abandon- 
ment of  the  line  from  Boone  to  Cranberry,  a  distance  of  34 
miles.  Around  that  time  passenger  service  was  abandoned 
on  the  remainder  of  the  line  from  Cranberry  to  Johnson  City. 
During  World  War  I  iron  ore  again  became  important  and 
the  Cranberry  Mills  were  again  in  operation.  About  three 
years  ago  the  few  miles  in  North  Carolina  and  part  of  the  main 
line  in  Tennessee  were  abandoned. 

Several  years  ago  "Tweetsie"  No.  14  was  sold  to  an  Alaskan 
lumber  firm  and  later  reports  were  that  it  had  been  destroyed 
in  a  forest  fire.     "Tweetsie"  number  11  was  sold  to  a  Vir- 


ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 

Many  sources  have  been  tapped  for  information  for  thi 
issue  on  transportation.  Oral,  written  and  printed  mate 
rials  have  been  assembled  in  an  effort  to  present  a  fairl; 
complete  picture  of  the  development  of  transportation 
methods  in  North  Carolina.  Thanks  are  extended  to  all  wh< 
contributed  to  the  information  herein  enclosed.  Specia 
thanks  are  extended  to  some  of  these  sources. 

Clarence  H.  Noah,  Parks  M.  Low,  railroads;  M.  Broadu 
Glover,  trucks;  Eugene  A.  Hughes,  Jr.,  busses,  and  V.  L 
Choate,  accounting,  of  the  N.  C.  Utilities  Commission. 

John  H.  Andrews,  former  traffic  schedule  expert  of  tin 
Southern  Railway  and  son  of  Col.  A.  B.  Andrews. 

L.  Polk  Denmark,  N.  C.  Highway  Dept.,  railroad  map. 

Articles  on  railroads  and  plank  roads  in  a  special  issue  o 
the  Sanford  Herald,  1953. 

Article  on  plank  roads  by  Robert  B.  Starling  in  N.  C.  His 
torical  Review,  Vol.  XVI. 

Chester  S.  Davis,  special  articles  in  Winston-Salem  Jour 
nal  and  Sentinel. 

Annual  reports  of  N.  C.  Utilities  (Corporation,  Railroad] 
Commission. 

"The  Story  of  Durham,"  by  Dr.  W.  K.  Boyd.  Duke  Uni 
versity  Press,  1925. 

"A  State  Movement  in  Railroad  Development"  by  Dri 
Cecil  Kenneth  BroAvn,  UNO  Press,  1928. 

"Ante-Bellum  North  Carolina"  bv  Guion  Griffis  Johnson 
UNC  Press,  1937. 

"N.  C.  Roads  and  Their  Builders"  by  Capus  Waynick,  pub 
lished  by  Superior  Stone  Co.,  Raleigh;  Edwards  and  Brough 
ton,  printers.  1952. 


ginian  who  secured  the  mile  of  track  and  laid  it  about  five 
miles  east  of  Harrisonburg,  Va.,  at  Penn  Laird.  This  locomo 
tive  is  now  pulling  three  or  four  coaches  on  a  scenic  and  fur 
run  a  mile  long.  The  round  trip  is  50<?  and  reports  are  thai 
the  railroad  with  the  imposing  name,  The  Shenandoah  Centra 
Railroad,  is  earning  money  and  furnishing  fun  in  the  Shenan 
doah  Valley.  A  ticket  on  the  road  is  almost  as  long  as  the 
line  (actually  17  inches  long)  and  contains  a  dozen  notices 
such  as  "Confederate  veterans  ride  free";  "Carpetbaggers  paj 
double  fare";  "Political  arguments  not  permitted  in  cars; 
Bryan  and  McKinley  are  both  good  men"  and  "No  elephants 
checked  as  baggage;  this  is  no  trunk  line".  The  track  is  three 
feet  wide  and  the  "Tweetsie"  has  ten  wheels,  the  driver's  about 
three  feet  high. 

"Tweetsie"  is  possibly  the  best  advertised  locomotive  in  the 
country.  In  the  January  issue  of  "Trains— A  Popular  Maga- 
zine of  Railroading",  "Tweetsie's"  picture  appears  on  the  front 
and  inside  is  a  feature  story  on  "Tweetsie's  Last  Trip",  filling 
three  pages  and  with  six  pictures  of  "Tweetsie"  coming  from 
a  tunnel,  crossing  a  trestle,  puffing  at  Elk  Park  and  in  other 
poses.  Thousands  of  visitors  have  made  excursion  trips 
through  the  mountains  of  Tennessee  and  North  Carolina  on 
trains  pulled  by  "Tweetsie"  and  many  columns  have  been  writ- 
ten about  the  operation  of  this  railroad. 

James  E.  Miller,  Boone,  was  an  engineer  on  this  road  for  25 
or  30  years. 


"Tweetsie",  famous  nation-wide  on  the  mountain  railroad  in 
Avery  and  Watauga  counties,  and  her  longtime  fireman-engi- 
neer, James  E.  Miller,  Boone.  This  locomotive  now  serves 
the  scenic  railway  in  Virginia. 


UMMER-FALL,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  69 


[Yansport  Workers  Double  in  Decade;  Bulk  in  Ten  Counties 

By  Grace  Z.  Moen,  Research  Analyst,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 


Transportation  industries  covered  by  the  Employ- 
lent  Security  Law  in  North  Carolina  include  enter- 
rises  engaged  in  passenger  and  freight  transporta- 
on  by  highway,  water,  or  air,  and  those  which  fur- 
ish  services  related  to  transportation.  Many  of 
lese  industries  are  semipublic  in  nature  in  that,  to 

certain  degree,  they  are  regulated  by  some  form 
f  public  authority  as  to  rates  or  prices  they  may 
large  and  the  services  they  may  render.  Employ- 
lent  in  railway  transportation  is  not  considered 
ere,  because  it  is  exempt  from  coverage  by  this  par- 
cular  law.  However,  based  on  the  1950  census, 
lere  are  approximately  18,000  workers  in  railroad 
rid  railway  express  service. 

During  1952  an  average  of  about  20,000  workers 
rere  employed  in  covered  transportation  industries 
l  the  State,  constituting  2.8  percent  of  the  708,496 
)tal  covered  employment  in  that  year.  These  work- 
rs  received  around  $65,826,000  or  about  3.4  percent 
f  total  earnings  paid  to  eovered  workers  in  North 
arolina.  In  addition  to  these,  other  transportation 
rorkers  were  covered  in  the  utilities  group.  A  fair 
stimate  of  all  transportation  workers  in  the  State 
rould  be  around  46,000,  including  covered  and  non- 
Dvered  employment. 

Both  covered  employment  and  wages  in  the  trans- 
ortation  industry  have  made  rapid  strides  over  the 
ast  eleven-year  period.  Specifically,  in  January 
942  covered  employment  of  the  group  was  just  un- 
er  10,000  in  approximately  350  employer  units.  By 
lovember  1952,  however,  employment  in  covered 
ransportation  establishments  had  more  than  dou- 
led,  having  reached  a  peak  of  21,100  workers  in 
bout  500  firms.  Earnings  of  transportation  work- 
rs  advanced  by  even  a  greater  proportion,  for  by 
952  the  payroll  had  more  than  trebled  that  of  1942. 
t  is  true  that  hourly  wage  scales  have  advanced 
onsiderably  over  the  past  decade,  but  the  volume  of 
ransportation,  passenger  and  freight,  has  been  re- 
ponsible  for  longer  workweek  schedules  as  well  as 
icreased  employment. 

This  general  upward  trend  of  covered  employment 
i  the  transportation  group  of  industries  over  the 
leven-year  period  (1942-1952)  may  be  seen  in  the 
ccompanying  chart.  From  an  irregular  trend  in 
942,  employment  went  through  its  seasonal  changes 
nth  slight  variation  until  1946,  when  it  began  to 
limb ;  and  with  reasonably  uniform  pattern,  contin- 
ously  pushed  upward  to  higher  levels. 

The  greater  portion  of  the  industry  is  concerned 
/ith  the  handling  of  heavy  and  bulky  merchandise, 
ousehold  furniture,  farm  produce,  and  other  com- 


mercial goods.  The  employment  trend  in  the  truck- 
ing and  warehousing  group  therefore,  largely  de- 
termines the  employment  trend  of  the  total  covered 
transportation  group  (railroad  workers  excluded), 
because  it  constitutes  more  than  70  percent  of  the 
industry's  total  covered  employment,  which  amount- 
ed to  13  to  15  thousand  workers  in  1952. 

At  the  beginning  of  each  year,  employment  in 
trucking  and  warehousing  usually  experiences  a  re- 
duction after  the  holiday  traffic;  then  it  levels  off 
until  May  or  June  when  fruit,  vegetables,  and  other 
farm  produce  are  ready  to  be  transported.  The  trend 
then  rises  sharply  through  the  remainder  of  the  year 
to  meet  increased  trucking  operations.  For  example, 
furniture  manufacturers  ship  more  than  60  percent 
of  the  year's  production  in  the  five-month  period 
after  the  July  furniture  markets.  Likewise,  a  heav- 
ier volume  of  other  merchandise  is  hauled  for  fall 
and  winter  delivery  to  trade  establishments.  Also 
hauling  and  storage  of  leaf  tobacco  begins  in  early 
August;  then  cotton,  grain,  vegetables,  livestock, 
and  other  products  in  September  and  October. 

Closely  allied  to  the  trucking  industry  is  freight 
forwarding  and  furnishing  services  to  water  trans- 
portation companies  such  as  dock  operations,  steve- 
doring, and  operating  waterfront  terminals.  Cover- 
ed employment  in  this  industry  group  fluctuates  ac- 
cording to  the  schedule  of  loading  and  unloading  at 
the  waterfront.  Normally  operations  move  along 
slowly  until  enough  volume  is  accumulated  to  make 
a  load,  or  a  ship  comes  in  with  a  load.  Fortunately 
the  ups  and  downs  are  not  simultaneous  in  all  of  the 
divisions  of  this  particular  industry  group.  Thus 
employment  often  shifts  from  one  to  the  other  with 
a  balancing  tendency,  resulting  in  only  two  or  three 
months  out  of  the  year  with  greatly  lowered  employ- 
ment in  the  group  of  industry  services  allied  to  trans- 
portation. (Employment  in  25  firms  ranged  from 
875  to  1400  during  1952.) 

Employment  in  passenger  transportation  has  had 
varied  trends  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  activ- 
ity. For  instance,  there  has  been  little  change  in  the 
employment  trend  in  local  bus  line  transportation 
since  1946.  The  average  number  of  covered  workers 
in  31  reporting  local  bus  establishments  was  790  in 
1946  and  793  in  1952.  Covered  employment  in  taxi 
transportation  declined  about  6  percent;  and  em- 
ployment in  highway  bus  passenger  service  dropped 
around  36  percent.  These  industries  were  at  their 
peak  in  1946  and  1947.  Since  then  the  employment 
trend  has  been  downward.  The  growth  of  these 
phases  of  transportation,  no  doubt,  has  been  stifled 
by  the  ever  increasing  use  of  privately  owned  auto- 
mobiles. On  the  other  hand,  covered  employment  in 
air  transportation  has  lunged  forward  since  1946. 
There  are  now  six  commercial  airlines  with  14  major 
airports  serving  North  Carolina.  One  of  these  is  a 
North  Carolina  corporation  enjoying  rapid  expan- 
sion. Employment  in  its  home  offices  contributes 
strongly  to  total  employment  in  air  transportation 
industries  in  the  State. 

An  idea  of  the  employment  spread  among  various 
phases  of  transportation  activities  may  be  gained 


PAGE  70 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


from  the  table  below  which  shows  the  percentage 
distribution  of  monthly  average  covered  employment 
in  1952  and  the  range  in  each  group. 

Avg.  Mo.  Covered  Em- 
ployment in  Transportation      Employment  Rarge 
Activity  Incl.  1952  1952 

Percent  to  Total    Number  High  Low 

All  Covered  Transportation 100.0  20,176  21,109  19.173 

Local  Bus  Lines 3.9  790  820  766 

Trucking  and  Warehousing  for  Hire 69.7  14,056  15.022  13,077 

Other  Transportation  Except  Water* 20.5  4,144  4.333  4,062 

Water  Transportation .4  82  105  60 

Services  Allied  to  Transports,  ion  N.  E.  C-  5.5  1,104  1,429  878 

"Includes  non-local  bus  lines,  taxicabs,  common  carrier  air  lines,  and  pipe-line  rai  spor  a  icn 
(except  natural  gas). 

As  evidenced,  transportation  industries  have  made 
great  progress  since  1942,  with  phenomenal  employ- 
ment gains  in  the  past  four  years  (1949-1952)  — 
recording  an  increase  of  nearly  35  percent.  This  is 
significant  when  compared  with  only  a  16  percent 
increase  in  total  covered  employment  in  all  indus- 
tries, 14  percent  in  manufacturing,  and  14  percent 
in  trade  in  the  State. 

An  employment  increase  such  as  that  experienced 
by  the  transportation  industry  in  North  Carolina  is 
understandable,  because  segments  of  the  industry 
such  as  air-freight  and  passenger  service,  ■  o, 
freight,  and  waterfront  activities  are  still  in  their 
infancy.  It  is  believed  that  these  phases  of  the  trans- 
portation industry  really  have  just  begun  to  scratch 
the  surface.  With  enlarged  landing  fields,  improved 
highways  and  seaport  terminals,  and  continued  in- 
dustrial development  in  North  Carolina,  the  trans- 
portation industry  should  continue  to  expand  its 
employment  in  the  State. 

STATEWIDE 

North  Carolina  has  come  into  its  share  of  the  de- 
velopment of  freight  and  passenger  transportation 
services.  The  transportation  industries  have  ex- 
panded their  systems  in  the  State  to  provide  East- 
West  and  North-South  transportation.  These  facili- 
ties have  enabled  North  Carolina  industries  to  com- 
pete in  markets  near  and  distant.  The  demand  for 
truck  service  has  promoted  its  rapid  growth.  It  has 
been  said  that  virtually  all  commodities,  whether 
eaten,  worn,  or  used  in  home  or  industry,  sometime 
between  the  raw  material  state  and  the  finished  prod- 
uct, are  moved  and  handled  by  motor  truck  services. 
The  favorable  highway  and  road  system  in  North 
Carolina  has  given  impetus  to  advancement  of  high- 
way transportation,  not  only  to  the  motor  freight 


business,  but  also  to  passenger  service.  Likewise  the 
development  of  seaports,  with  ample  rail  and  high- 
way connections,  has  provided  increased  facilities 
for  export  trade,  especially  tobacco.  The  North- 
South  inland  waterway  along  the  Atlantic  Coast  has} 
benefited  large  commercial  users  and  many  small 
craft  owners  as  well. 

Although  still  in  an  early  developmental  stage, 
commercial  airlines  within  North  Carolina  have 
crossed  the  mountain  barrier  in  the  Western  section 
of  the  State,  thus  connecting  a  convenient  network 
of  airlines  within  the  state  of  North  Carolina  with 
the  Ohio  river  valley.  Today  there  are  six  scheduled 
air  carriers  offering  convenient  connections  to  North j. 
Carolinians  to  all  sections  of  the  nation. 

Every  county  in  North  Carolina  is  now  being  serv- 
ed by  some  means  of  public  transportation.  Not  all 
counties,  however,  have  transportation  establish- 
ments of  sufficient  size  to  be  covered  by  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Law.  About  one-third  of  the  100 
counties  in  the  State  have  no  covered  workers  in  the 
transportation  industry,  not  even  on  a  voluntary 
basis  extended  to  establishments  employing  fewer 
than  eight  workers.  On  the  other  hand,  nearly  two- 
thirds  of  the  20.000  covered  workers  in  transporta- 
tion establishments  are  concentrated  in  ten  counties. 
Examination  of  the  occompanying  table  will  further 
reveal  that  more  than  half  of  the  covered  workers 
in  the  industry  are  reported  from  only  five  counties ; 
viz.,  Mecklenburg,  Forsyth,  Gaston,  Guilford,  and 
Wake  counties. 

Covered  Workers  and  Earnings  in  Ten  Counties  Having 
Heaviest  Transportation  Employment  1952 

Covered  Employrrert  Earnings 

County  Monthly  Avg.  1952  Year  1952 


Mecklenburg— 

Forsyth 

Gaston 

Guilford 

Wake 

New  Hanover- 
Cabarrus 

Buncombe 

Wilson 

Alamance 


3.285 

2,923 

1,618 

1 ,  480 

1,089 

727 

611 

540 

455 

358 


11,087.553 
10,936.773 
6.256,868 
4.538.615 
3.279,409 
1.945,737 
2,145,696 
1.483.624 
1  207.068 
1.123,719 


Total  of  Ten  High  Counties 

All  Covered  Transportation 

%  High  Counties  to  All  Covered  Transpor  a  ion. 


13,059 
20.176 
64.7% 


44,005.062 

65.826,246 

66.8% 


All  Covered  Industries 

%  Covered  Transportation  to  all  Covered  Inf. 


708,496 

2.8% 


.911,675,821 
3.4% 


Earnings  of  the  20,000  covered  transportation 
workers  amounted  to  more  than  $65,826,000  in  1952 
or  3.4  percent  of  earnings  of  covered  workers  in  all 
industries  in  North  Carolina. 


Early  Trails,  Trading  Paths;  State  Breaks  Traffic  Limits 


Transportation,  the  movement  of  people  and  things 
between  places,  was  for  many  years  a  deterrent  to 
colonizing  and  developing  the  area  now  known  as 
North  Carolina.  The  sand  banks  along  the  coast, 
the  marshy  lands  further  in,  numerous  streams  in 
the  center  and  Piedmont  areas  and  the  mountains  in 
the  west  all  proved  effective  barriers  in  preventing 
normal  traffic  into  and  within  this  area.  Most  of  the 
settlement  of  the  State  came  from  Virginia  and 
South  Carolina. 

Early  settlers  in  the  northeastern  or  Albemarle 
area  came  from  Virginia  and  settled  along  sounds 
and  rivers  with  ready  access  to  water  transportation. 
These  water  courses  were  their  main  highways  for 


about  50  years.  Around  1700  settlers  began  pushing 
westward  and  others  came  from  northern  areas. 
Their  only  routes  were  trails,  most  of  them  estab- 
lished by  Indians  and  little  road  work  was  done  for 
many  years. 

Trading  paths,  mere  trails,  had  been  established, 
most  of  them  in  the  Albemarle  area.  By  1733  only 
one  trail  went  into  the  western  section  of  the  State, 
passing  from  Virginia  by  the  Weldon  area  on  Roan- 
oke River  through  Hillsboro  and  on  into  the  moun- 
tain country.  Seven  trails  were  marked  on  the  maps 
of  that  day  from  Virginia  into  the  Albemarle  area. 
Four  of  these  became  short  toward  the  Eclenton 
area  and  another  went  to  the  Elizabeth  City  area. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  71 


Current  propelled  ferry  over  the  Yadkin  River  in  Davie  County 
some  30-odd  years  ago.    H.  K.  Witherspoon  photo. 

From  the  Edenton  and  Plymouth  area  one  trail 
went  westward  to  the  Roanoke  River  in  the  Weldon 
area,  on  northwestward  with  the  river  to  the  North- 
ampton County  area.  Another  started  from  the  Ply- 
mouth area  and  went  southward  toward  the  Wash- 
ington area.  Another  one  extended  from  the  Pamlico 
River,  also  in  the  Plymouth  area,  to  Washington  and 
New  Bern  and  on  southward,  one  prong  north  of  the 
Trent  River  area  and  the  other  south  of  the  river. 
This  trail  extended  on  to  Wilmington  and  into  South 
Carolina. 

Intercourse  between  small  scattered  communities 
was  tedious  and  rare.  When  some  form  of  govern- 
ment was  established  in  a  community  the  magistrate 
named  overseers  and  required  all  males  within  cer- 
tain ages,  usually  about  15  to  60,  to  spend  so  many 
days  a  year,  usually  six,  in  helping  to  improve  com- 
munity roads.  Usually  a  man  could  send  a  substi- 
tute or  a  horse  and  plow  to  take  his  place.  This 
method  of  improving  highways,  very  inadequate, 
continued  until  people  now  living  can  remember 
making  their  contribution  thus  to  road  betterment. 
By  1790,  the  first  census,  North  Carolina  had  a  popu- 
lation of  392,000,  fourth  in  size  in  the  United  States. 
Yet  many  of  them  seldom  got  outside  their  own  com- 
munities. 

Several  post  roads  had  been  established  in  North 
Carolina  by  1796,  roads  over  which  the  United  States 
mails  were  carried.  Four  principal  roads  came  into 
this  State  from  Virginia  and  two  of  them  continued 
into  South  Carolina.  One  of  these  came  from  Suf- 
folk to  Edenton  by  way  of  Plymouth,  Washington 
and  New  Bern  to  Wilmington.  Another  came  into 
Northampton  County  to  Tarboro.  A  third  branching 
from  this  road  above  the  Virginia  line  touched  War- 
renton,  Louisburg,  the  Raleigh  area,  Fayetteville, 
Lumberton  and  to  Cheraw,  S.  C.  The  fourth  came 
from  Martinsville  to  Salem.  Numbers  of  other  post 
roads  branched  off,  crossed  and  wound  around  to 
various  centers  of  population. 

One  from  the  Suffolk-Edenton  road  went  westward 
by  the  Weldon  area  to  Warrenton,  Oxford,  Hillsboro, 
the  Greensboro  area,  Salem,  Wilkesboro  and  to  Mor- 
ganton.  From  there  the  road  headed  backward  to 
Lincolnton  and  then  south  to  York,  S.  C,  another 
branch  going  to  Charlotte  and  into  South  Carolina. 
From  Charlotte  a  road  went  northward  to  the  States- 
ville  area  and  to  Salisbury,  while  another  road  went 
from  Charlotte  via  Concord  to  Salisbury.  From 
Salisbury  two  roads  led  to  Fayetteville,  one  via  Mont- 
gomery and  Rockingham  counties  and  the  other  ap- 
parently by  Asheboro  and  the  Sanford  area,  while 


another  short  line  went  from  Salisbury  to  the  Lex- 
ington area. 

A  post  road  led  from  the  Hillsboro  road  north  to 
the  Roxboro  area  and  westward  to  Yanceyville  and 
Rockingham  County  to  the  Martnsville-Salem  road. 
One  road  went  from  Plymouth  to  Windsor,  while 
another  went  from  Plymouth  via  Washington  and 
from  Halifax  to  Warrenton.  A  post  road  extended 
from  Washington  via  Tarboro  to  Louisburg.  An- 
other road  went  from  New  Bern  via  Kinston,  Smith- 
field,  Raleigh  area,  Chapel  Hill  to  Hillsboro.  Two 
Wilmington  roads  led  to  Fayetteville,  one  via  the 
Duplin  County  and  Clinton  area,  the  other  via  Eliza- 
bethtown  on  the  south  side  of  the  Cape  Fear  River. 

Internal  improvements,  particularly  turnpikes, 
canals  and  other  arteries,  along  with  improved  water 
transportation,  were  stressed  for  many  years  with 
only  limited  results.  During  the  1800-50  period 
many  movements  were  made  to  build  canals,  water- 
ways, turnpikes  and  to  make  other  tyDes  of  trans- 
portation improvements  as  is  shown  by  the  numerous 
charters  granted  by  the  general  assembly.  Only  a 
few  of  these  projects  were  ever  completed.  In  the 
last  15  years  of  this  period  scores  of  railroads  were 
chartered  but  only  a  few  were  built.  Even  so,  in 
the  1837-61  period  North  Carolina  forged  ahead  and 
led  the  nation  in  railroad  building. 

During  the  decade,  1850-60,  charters  were  granted 
to  84  companies  for  building  plank  roads  in  the  State, 
resulting  in  about  15  roads  with  total  length  of  about 
500  miles.  Plank  roads  and  railroads  are  treated 
more  fully  elsewhere. 

Turnpikes  continued  as  the  Drinfipal  artevies  of 
travel  for  a  number  of  years  although  they  were  not 
too  satisfactory  and  the  number  was  limited.  One 
famous  road  was  the  Asheville  Turnpike  which  came 
across  South  Carolina  from  Charleston.  One  of  its 
important  contributions  was  handling  the  movement 
of  wealthy  Charlestonians  to  the  Henderson  County 
area  where  many  summer  homes  were  established. 
This  road  later  extended  via  Hot  (Warm)  Springs, 
through  Tennessee  and  into  Kentucky.  Droves  of 
hogs,  cattle,  sheep  and  other  animals  moved  over  this 
turnpike  from  Kentucky  and  Tennessee  to  the 
Charleston  market. 

Streams,  especially  larger  rivers,  offered  obstacles 
to  free  movement  of  wagons,  buggies,  coaches.  Fords 
were  established  when  waters  were  not  too  deep. 
Hundreds  of  ferries  were  chartered  and  established 
throughout  the  State.  Many  of  these  ferry  boats, 
carrying  wagons,  buggies  and  other  vehicles,  were 
propelled  by  the  use  of  poles  when  streams  were  not 
too  swift.  Others  were  pulled  across  streams  with 
heavy  ropes  attached  to  the  ends  and  connected  with 
windlasses  on  the  bank.  The  more  popular  ferries 
utilized  the  force  of  the  stream  to  propel  the  ferry 
boats  across.  This  was  accomplished  by  stretching 
heavy  wires  across  the  stream  attached  to  trees  or 
heavy  posts.  On  these  wires  were  two  pulley  frames 
with  ropes  connecting  one  to  each  end  of  the  ferry 
boat.  The  front  rope  would  be  shortened  and  the 
rear  rope  lengthened  so  the  front  of  the  boat  would 
be  headed  at  an  angle  upstream.  The  force  of  the  cur- 
rent against  the  side  of  the  boat  would  push  it  across. 
In  making  the  return  trip  the  process  would  be  re- 
versed— the  front  ropes  shortened  and  the  rear  rope 
lengthened.  This  process  was  slow  but  sure.  Prac- 
tically all  of  these  ferries  have  disappeared — bridges 


PAGE  72 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


taking  their  places. 

Before  the  turn  of  the  century  rural  free  delivery 
mail  roads  were  established  in  North  Carolina,  as 
elsewhere.  These  roads,  traveled  daily,  had  to  be 
improved  to  allow  the  mail  to  go  by.  Still  there  was 
no  surfacing  in  the  rural  areas  and  most  roads  con- 
sisted of  throwing  earth  to  the  center  with  ditches 
along  the  sides  for  drainage.  Around  this  time  the 
Macadam  type  of  road  made  its  appearance  in  this 
State.  This  provided  a  surface  of  rock  with  gravel 
filler.  Mecklenburg  County  pioneered  in  this  type 
of  construction,  building  several  roads  toward  near- 
by towns.  Guilford  County  followed  with  several 
Macadam  highways. 

The  automobile  began  to  make  its  appearance  in 
North  Carolina  around  the  turn  of  the  century.  As 
the  number  of  automobiles  increased  so  did  the  de- 
mand for  highways  over  which  to  operate  them. 
North  Carolina  still  had  the  community  road  system 
with  inadequate  inter-community  roads.  But  the 
desire  for  improved  traffic  conditions  began  to  take 
form.  A  distinct  impetus  was  given  in  1916  by  the 
provision  for  Federal  Aid  to  strategic  roads  within 
the  State.  Several  good  road  movements  had  been 
started  and  their  activities  continued. 

The  general  assembly  of  1921,  as  a  result  of  a  pop- 
ular demand,  authorized  $50,000,000  in  bonds  for 
the  allowed  purpose  of  connecting  every  county  seat 
and  principal  town  in  the  State  with  dependable  all- 
weather  highways.  In  the  years  that  followed  North 
Carolina  again  took  the  lead  in  building  highways 
resulting  in  the  splendid  system  of  today.  This  ii 
described  elsewhere  in  this  issue. 

The    improved    highways    resulted    in    increased 


traffic  and  travel.  Individually  owned  automobiles 
increased  rapidly  and  public  busses  and  trucks  made 
their  appearance. 

Schedules  were  established  and  travel  promoted. 
A  natural  step  was  handling  freight.  By  1920  one 
and  two-ton  trucks  had  begun  operation,  first  with 
solid  rubber  tires.  Later  pneumatic  tires  were  sub- 
stituted and  as  roads  were  made  more  substantial 
truck  sizes  increased.  And  North  Carolina  again 
took  the  lead  in  truck  transportation.  This  State 
now  has  two  of  the  largest  trucking  firms  in  the  na- 
tion. They  and  many  others  have  developed  to  the 
extent  that  North  Carolina  is  probably  the  leading 
trucking  State  in  the  nation.  Details  of  truck  and 
bus  operations  appear  elsewhere  in  this  issue. 

Just  50  years  ago  the  Wright  brothers  constructed 
and  flew  the  first  heavier-than-air  plane  from  Kill 
Devil  Hill  in  Dare  County.  In  the  50-year  period 
since  that  day,  December  17,  1903,  airplanes  have  de- 
veloped into  important  and  speedy  methods  of  travel 
and  traffic.  Numbers  of  airplane  routes  serve  North 
Carolina  with  many  schedules  daily.  Moreover,  this 
State  has  developed  one  of  the  important  and  grow- 
ing airplane  companies  now  serving  the  nation.  This 
also  is  given  in  more  detail  elsewhere  in  this  issue. 

The  people  of  North  Carolina  have  thus  overcome 
a  very  heavy  handicap  and  have  established  remark- 
ably safe,  speedy  and  economical  systems,  supple- 
menting the  boats  on  the  coast  and  in  inland  water- 
ways, the  railroads  with  their  network  of  lines,  the 
trucks  and  busses  operating  over  the  State's  splen- 
did highway  systems  and  pipe  lines  which  bring  into 
the  State  petroleum  products  and  natural  gases.  The 
transportation  handicap  has  thus  been  surmounted. 


Plank  Roads  Hailed  as  'Farmer  Railroads';  Lasted  a  Decade 


Plank  roads  in  the  decade  prior  to  the  War  Be- 
tween the  States  were  looked  upon  by  many  North 
Carolinians  as  the  method,  of  solving  the  State's 
serious  transportation  problem.  Railroads  had  start- 
ed in  the  State  more  than  a  decade  earlier,  but  the 
high  cost  of  construction  and  limited  lines  added 
impetus  to  building  plank  roads,  known  as  the  "farm- 
er railroads".  During  the  period  from  1849  to  1860, 
the  General  Asspmblv  granted  84  charters  for  p]anv 
roads,  two  in  1849  and  one  in  1860.  But  only  a  small 
percentage  of  these  roads  were  finally  constructed. 

Approximately  500  miles  of  plank  roads  were  built 
in  this  period  at  a  cost  of  nearly  $1,000,000.  These 
included  13  stretches  of  road  completed  and  four 
roads  partially  built.  Fayetteville  was  the  most 
plank  road  conscious,  located  at  the  end  of  naviga- 
tion on  Cape  Fear  River  and  with  poor  prospect  of 
railroad  connection.  The  people  of  that  communitv 
built  plank  roads  radiating  in  five  different  direc- 
tions. The  longest,  the  Fayetteville  and  Western 
road,  went  through  Salem  to  Bethania,  headed  to- 
ward Mount  Airv  and  the  Virginia  coal  fields.  This 
road,  120  miles  loner,  was  chartered  on  the  same  dav 
as  the  North  Carolina  Railroad,  but  was  being  com- 
pleted while  the  road  was  being  started.  Among  the 
last  records  of  plank  road  operation  in  the  1864 
period,  stretches  of  road  were  taken  over  for  mili- 
tary purposes. 

Most  of  the  plank  roads  followed  a  general  pat- 
tern with  local  subscriptions  frequently  supplement- 


ed by  State  aid.  Toll  houses,  costing  around  $300, 
were  erected  on  right-of-way  sites  each  10  or  12 
miles  and  toll  collectors  were  paid  around  $150  a 
year.  Many  travelers  devised  methods  of  free  travel 
by  constructing  cutoffs  around  the  toll  houses.  Most 
of  the  roads  paid  well  in  the  earlier  years,  some  of 
them  declaring  dividends  up  to  10  or  12  percent. 
Occasional  repairs  and  rebuilding  stretches  of  road 
were  undertaken  but  many  of  the  roads  were  allowed 
to  wear  out  with  little  thought  of  repairs.  Usually 
when  roads  were  abandoned  in  the  early  1860's,  the 
General  Assembly  would  provide  that  they  be  taken 
over  by  county  commissioners  and  made  free  of  tolls. 

As  noted,  the  Fayetteville  and  Western  road  was 
the  most  important  built.  More  details  are  given 
below. 

Two  interstate  roads  were  constructed,  one  from 
Yanceyville  to  the  Virginia  line  to  meet  the  road 
from  Danville;  th^  other  from  Rocky  River,  near 
Center,  via  Wadesboro  to  the  South  Carolina  line 
where  it  joined  the  Cheraw  road.  Another  interstate 
road,  from  Asheville  to  Greenville,  S.  C,  was  par- 
tially constructed  and  became  a  military  road  in 
1864. 

Other  plank  roads  constructed  in  the  State  were 
as  follows:  The  Greenville  and  Raleigh  road,  com- 
pleted to  Wilson  in  1853  but  not  extended  to  Raleigh ; 
the  Wilmington  and  Topsail  road,  20  miles,  from 
Wilmington  northeastward  to  near  the  New  Han- 
over-Onslow County  line;  the  Western  Plank  road 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  73 


rom  Charlotte  to  Lincolnton,  completed  in  1853 ;  the 
ayetteville  and  Southern  road,  15^2  miles,  to  Lum- 
>er  Bridge,  open  to  traffic  in  1852,  entering  Fayette- 
ille  on  two  streets,  Gillespie  and  WhHow;  Fnvette- 
rille  and  Center  road,  from  Fayetteville  to  the  Pee 
Dee  River  (Yadkin),  completed  around  1853;  Fay- 
etteville and  Northern  road,  intended  to  reach  Ral- 
igh,  built  about  10  miles  to  Kingbury  and  not 
Extended  to  Raleigh;  Charlotte  and  Taylorsville 
i'oad,  opened  in  1853-54  to  a  point  a  little  beyond 
Davidson,  not  completed;  Salisbury  to  Statesville 
•oad,  built  eight  or  ten  miles  in  1852  and  not  com- 
peted ;  Clinton  to  Warsaw  road,  opened  in  1862. 

The  Washington  and  Tarboro  and  the  Haywood 
md  Pittsboro  roads,  chartered  in  1852,  were  built 
!or  only  a  few  miles. — Data  largely  from  article  by 
lobert  B.  Starling  in  North  Carolina  Historical  Re- 
new, Vol.  XVI,  No.  1  and  2. 

FAYETTEVILLE  &  WESTERN 

The  Fayetteville  &  Western  plank  road,  built  between  1844 
,nd  1854,  extended  to  Bethania,  a  few  miles  west  of  Salem,  to 
lecome  what  was  regarded  as  the  longest  plank  road  in  the 
i-orld — 129  miles  long.  This  plank  road  became  briefly  a  very 
mportant  artery  of  transportation  to  the  western  part  of  the 
!tate.     Its  dominance  and  prosperity  were  short-lived. 

A  three-day  public  meeting  began  in  Fayetteville  April  11, 
849,  for  the  purpose  of  providing  transportation  into  the 
torthwestern  section  of  the  State.  The  organization  decided 
o  build  a  plank  road  by  way  of  Murchison's  Factory  (Man- 
hester)  to  Deep  River,  Carthage,  Asheboro  and  on  into  west- 
rn  North  Carolina.  Later  the  decision  was  reached  to  build 
he  road  to  Salem,  with  Mount  Airy  as  a  future  point.  The 
.ope  was  entertained  to  extend  it  on  into  Virginia  and  the 
oal  fields.  By  legislative  act  the  State  was  to  subscribe  to 
120,000  of  stock.     Private  subscriptions  soon  reached  $80,000. 

The  first  section  was  built  largely  by  contract  and  slaves 
rere  frequently  used  by  contract.  Major  Dougald  MacDougald 
ad  the  contract  to  build  the  road  through  the  Cameron  com- 
lunity  and  used  his  neighbors'  slaves.  Incidentally,  an  epi- 
emic  of  typhoid  fever  struck  and  many  slaves  died,  resulting 
n  heavy  financial  loss.  Duncan  Murchison's  crew  of  15  laid 
,000  feet  a  day  near  Spout  Springs  in  Harnett  County.  Start- 
tig  at  the  Market  House  in  Fayetteville  in  1849,  the  plank 
oad  was  finished  to  Little  River  early  in  1850  and  was  put 
n  operation  in  April  of  that  year.  Duncan  Murchison  built 
lie  next  six  miles  and  Col.  Alexander  Murchison  built  22.5 
pies  to  Carthage.  Five  steam  sawmills  were  built  by  the 
ompany  and  operated  day  and  night  by  the  contractors  in 
reparing  timber  for  the  road. 

In  the  process  the  bed  was  prepared  and  graded  with  an 
levated  center  and  ditches  were  dug  along  the  side  for 
rainage.     Four  sills  were  laid,  five  or  six  by  eight  inches, 


hewed  from  small  pines.  Planks,  eight  feet  long  and  three 
or  four  by  eight  inches  wide,  were  laid  at  right  angles  to  these 
sills.  Oak  sills  were  used  as  the  road  progressed.  No  nails 
were  needed  to  hold  the  planks  in  place.  Toll  houses  and 
gates  were  erected  about  11  miles  apart.  The  first  one  was 
about  lVc  miles  from  Fayetteville.  Charges  were  y2tf  a  mile 
for  rider  and  horse;  1^  for  horse  and  wagon;  2$  for  a  two- 
horse  team  and  4^  for  a  six-horse  team.  Joy  riding  was  de- 
lightful and  frequent  over  this  mudless  plank  road. 

A  report  in  1854  showed  that  20,000  wagons  passed  over  this 
plank  road  in  a  year.  The  trip  from  one  end  to  the  other 
took  about  two  weeks  and  extra  horses  were  carried  along  for 
spelling  purposes  and  trading.  Other  stock  was  transported 
over  the  road.  Products  hauled  included  hay  from  Forsyth 
County;  tobacco,  apples  and  other  farm  products,  such  as 
cotton,  cabbages  and  flour.  Tobacco  was  transported  in  hogs- 
heads with  large  hoops  as  runners  and  poles  through  the 
center  to  which  gear  was  attached  for  hitching  the  horses. 
This,  too,  was  "Tobacco  Road".  Stage  coaches  used  this  plank 
road  for  carrying  passengers,  packages  and  mail.  Their  ap- 
proach was  announced  by  tallyho  buglers  and  was  the  occasion 
tor  the  gathering  of  large  crowds  at  the  stopping  points. 

The  plank  road  was  finished  to  a  point  near  Salem  in  Jan- 
uary, 1852,  and  was  extended  seven  miles  beyond  to  Bethania 
and  toward  Mount  Airy  in  1854.  In  January,  1853,  prepara- 
tions were  made  for  a  branch  road  from  a  point  near  Cameron 
to  Gulf  and  from  Gulf  a  spur  to  Evans  Mills,  now  Carbonton. 
At  Gulf  the  road  connected  later  with  a  separate  plank  road 
from  Graham  to  Gulf.  These  lines  were  built  with  the  expecta- 
tion of  hauling  coal  from  the  mines  in  the  vicinity. 

This  plank  road  was  prosperous  and  paid  dividends  during 
the  two  years  1854-55.  Because  of  their  success  much  more 
was  expected  as  a  result  of  its  operation.  Great  public  interest 
was  aroused.  New  homes  and  business  places  were  built  along 
the  line  and  property  values  increased  extensively.  In  1854 
income  amounted  to  $27,420  and  in  1855  the  amount  was  about 
$26,820.  From  that  period  revenues  began  to  decline.  Poor 
crop  years  and  the  panic  of  1857  played  havoc  with  the  road. 
The  North  Carolina  Railroad  was  completed  about  this  time, 
offering  quicker  transportation  and  cheaper  rates  to  commun- 
ities in  the  western  section.  It  was  not  necessary  then  to  make 
the  trips  to  Fayetteville  for  supplies.  Receipts  decreased  grad- 
ually until  they  were  exceeded  by  upkeep  and  repairs.  The 
road  began  to  lose  money  and  repairs  were  not  kept  up. 
Approach  of  the  War  Between  the  States  caused  further  loss  of 
interest  in  this  type  of  transportation.  In  1862  the  charter 
was  amended  to  allow  the  counties  through  which  the  plank 
road  passed  to  abandon  any  part  or  parts  to  public  use,  pro- 
vided no  tolls  were  charged. 

The  last  act  of  the  General  Assembly  relating  to  the  Fayette- 
ville-Salem  plank  road  came  in  April,  1869,  by  which  the 
county  commisisoners  of  the  counties  of  Forsyth,  Davidson 
and  Guilford  were  to  take  charge  of  the  road  in  their  respective 
counties,  to  appoint  overseers  and  to  keep  it  repaired  for  toll- 
free  use.  Only  in  isolated  places  today  is  there  evidence  that 
such  a  road  ever  operated. — Data  from  the  Progress  Edition  of 
"The  Sanford  Herald",  Sanford,  N.  C,  1953. 


f.  C.  Early  Leader  in  Railroad  Building;  Many  Short  Lines 


North  Carolina  did  not  wait  long  after  the  first  13  miles 
f  railroad  was  built  in  the  United  States  in  1828  to  start  the 
evelopment  of  railroad  transportation  in  the  State.  With  a 
lodest  beginning  in  1833  North  Carolina  carried  out  a  road 
uilding  program  in  the  25-year  period  from  1835  to  1860 
rhich  was  not  equaled  anywhere  in  the  country.  Before  the 
Var  Between  the  States  started,  North  Carolina  had  built  close 
o  700  miles  of  railroad  line,  of  which  352  miles  were  included 
a  the  east-west  line  from  Morehead  City  to  a  point  near  Mor- 
anton  and  236  miles  in  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  and 
Sleigh  and  Gaston  Railroad.     The  longest  railroad  built  up 

EXPERIMENTAL    RAILROAD 

North  Carolina's  first  railroad,  actually,  was  what  has  become  known  as 
ie  "Experimental  Railroad",  a  l'/4  mile  line  from  the  State  Capitol  to  what 
(known  as  the  "Rock  Quarry"  on  the  edge  of  Raleigh,  a  line  constructed  in 
831-32  for  the  purpose  of  hauling  ?t-ne  to  rebuild  the  burned  Capitol.  This 
pad  cost  $2,700  to  build.  It  had  wooden  rails  covered  with  iron  strips  one- 
ixth  of  an  inch  thick.     Horses  were  used  to  draw  the  cars. 

This  road  was  not  supposed  to  make  profits,  but  it  did.  In  the  first  nine 
lonths,  a  10%  dividend  was  earned  and  in  the  next  six  months  the  road 
arned  25%.  In  addition  to  hauling  stone,  the  road  was  used  to  haul  outing 
arties  on  Sundays  and  holidays.  It  developed  into  a  social  attraction.  At 
ie  time,  this  was  the  only  railroad  in   North  Carolina. 


to  1840  was  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Railroad,  161  miles 
with  48  miles  of  straight  track,  now  part  of  the  Atlantic  Coast 
Line  system. 

North  Carolina  leaders  were  extremely  sensitive  in  the  early 
days  of  railroad  building  over  the  dominance  of  Virginia  and 
South  Carolina  in  trade  and  traffic  and  sought  to  construct 
east-west  lines  which  would  divert  trade  to  North  Carolina 
ports  to  be  handled  through  the  State  and  on  into  the  west. 
It  was  particularly  irritating  that  the  first  line  of  railroad 
came  into  the  State  from  Virginia  and  that  practically  all  rail- 
roads built  in  the  early  days  were  turned  into  feeders  for  both 
Virginia  and  South  Carolina. 

The  first  mile  of  railroad  built  in  this  State  was  constructed 
by  the  Petersburg  Railroad  Co.  from  Petersburg,  Va.,  to  Blake- 
ly,  a  point  on  the  north  bank  of  the  Roanoke  River,  opposite 
Weldon,  and  near  Garysburg.  About  seven  miles  of  this  line, 
built  in  1831-33,  were  in  this  State.  The  Petersburg  road  was 
built  to  take  into  Virginia  farm  and  forest  products  produced 
in  the  Roanoke  River  area  and  to  divert  this  trade  which 
would  pass  down  the  Roanoke  River,  much  of  it  finding  its 
way  to  Norfolk  by  water. 


PAGE  74 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1952 


The  Petersburg  Railroad  gave  the  proper  impetus  to  road 
building  in  North  Carolina.  The  "Wilmington  and  Raleigh 
Railroad,  chartered  in  1833,  was  built  in  sections  from  Wil- 
mington. As  construction  progressed,  Raleigh  people  were  not 
sufficiently  interested  to  subscribe  to  stock  to  complete  the 
road  to  the  Capital  City  and  from  Faison  the  line  swerved  to 
a  more  northerly  course  and  continued  to  Weldon  where  a 
ferry  connection  was  made  in  1840  with  the  Petersburg  Rail- 
road and  also  with  the  Seaboard  and  Roanoke  Railroad  from 
Portsmouth  to  the  northern  bank  of  the  Roanoke  River. 

In  1835,  two  years  after  the  Wilmington  and  Raleigh  Rail- 
road, later  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Railroad,  had  been 
chartered,  a  charter  was  secured  for  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston 
Railroad.  In  1844  this  line  was  opened  to  Gaston  and  eight 
years  later  the  line  was  extended  a  few  miles  from  Gaston  to 
Weldon  where  it  connected  with  the  other  three  railroads 
already  built  to  Weldon.  By  1843  a  bridge  had  been  construct- 
ed across  the  Roanoke  River  to  Weldon  which  was  used  jointly 
by  the  Petersburg  Railroad  and  the  Seaboard  and  Roanoke 
Railroad  to  Portsmouth.  Thus,  Weldon  became  the  first  and 
for  a  number  of  years  the  most  important  railroad  center  in 
North  Carolina. 

Meanwhile  the  sentiment  for  east-west  transportation  con- 
tinued and  movements  were  started  to  build  a  railroad  from 
Beaufort  Harbor  across  the  State  and  to  extend  into  Tennessee. 
The  North  Carolina  Railroad  was  chartered  in  1849  and  by 
1856  the  road  had  been  completed  from  Goldsboro  via  Selma, 
Raleigh,  Durham,  Hillsboro,  Burlington,  Greensboro,  High 
Point,  Lexington,  Salisbury,  Kannapolis  and  Concord  to  Char- 
lotte, a  distance  of  223  miles,  three-fourths  of  which  was  owned 
by  the  State.  The  Atlantic  and  North  Carolina  Railroad,  char- 
tered in  1S52,  was  completed  and  opened  in  1858  from  Morehead 
Citv  through  New  Bern  and  Kinston  to  Goldsboro.  Also  in 
1852,  the  Western  North  Carolina  Railroad  was  chartered  to 
extend  from  Salisbury  westward  to  the  Tennessee  line  at  Paint 
Rock  and  to  Murphy.  This  line  was  completed  to  within  13 
miles  of  Morganton  by  1861  when  the  war  halted  activities. 
During  the  war  about  10  miles  more  were  constructed. 

The  Carolina  Central  Railroad,  succeeding  the  Wilmington. 
Charlotte  and  Rutherford  Railroad,  chartered  in  1855,  started 
construction  westward  from  two  points  along  this  line  from 
Navassa,  near  Wilmington.  The  construction  was  completed 
for  112  miles  to  Rockingham  and  from  Charlotte  31  miles  were 
completed  to  Lincolnton  early  in  1861. 

The  Chatham  Railroad  constructed  a  line  about  30  miles 
long  from  Raleigh  to  Haw  River,  near  Moncure,  into  the 
Chatham-Moore  coal  field  area. 

Before  the  war  several  other  short  stretches  of  road  were 
constructed.  This  included  the  Atlantic,  Tennessee  and  Ohio 
railroad,  chartered  in  1855,  which  completed  a  line  from 
Charlotte  to  Statesville  in  1860.  During  the  War  the  rails  used 
on  this  line  were  taken  up  and  used  in  1863  in  building  the 
Piedmont  Railroad  from  Greensboro  to  Danville  as  a  war 
measure. 

The  Wilmington  and  Manchester  Railroad,  chartered  in  1847, 
had  built  only  about  15  miles  of  road  near  Wilmington  by  1851 
and  probably  did  not  extend  the  line  into  South  Carolina  until 
after  the  war.  The  Charlotte  and  South  Carolina  Railroad. 
chartered  in  1846,  opened  a  line  into  South  Carolina  in  1852, 
11  miles  of  which  were  in  North  Carolina.  Apparently,  too, 
the  Kings  Mountain  Railroad,  chartered  in  1849,  had  built  a 
line  from  Chester  to  Kings  Mountain,  completed  in  1852. 

The  Cape  Fear,  Yadkin  and  Pee  Dee  Railroad,  chartered  in 
1833,  broke  ground  for  building  this  road  but  work  was  aban- 
doned. The  Western  Railroad  Co.,  chartered  in  1852,  built  a 
43  mile  stretch  of  road  from  Fayetteville  to  Egypt  in  1860. 
This  later  became  a  section  of  the  Cape  Fear  and  Yadkin  Val- 
ley Railroad,  built  after  the  war  from  Wilmington  to  Mount 
Airy. 

As  noted,  the  Piedmont  Railroad,  chartered  in  1862,  was 
built  in  1862-63  from  Greensboro  via  Reidsville  to  Danville, 
Va.  Otherwise,  the  war  halted  railroad  building  and  it  was 
several  years  before  construction  was  started  again. 

During  the  war  the  railroads  already  constructed  were  al- 
lowed to  deteriorate  for  lack  of  attention  and  numbers  of 
bridges,  stations,  warehouses  and  other  properties  were  de- 
stroyed by  the  armed  forces.  Very  little  improvement  and 
new  railroad  building  was  done  during  the  decade  following 
the  close  of  the  war.  The  State's  economy  continued  at  a  low 
ebb  and  money  was  not  available  for  improving  and  extending 
the  railroad  system.  Finally  construction  was  resumed  grad- 
ually and  the  25-year  period,  1875  to  1900,  proved  to  be  a  heavy 
railroad  construction  era. 

The  North-Western  North  Carolina  Railroad,  chartered  in 


1868,  completed  a  line  from  near  Greensboro  on  the  Nortt 
Carolina  Railroad  to  Salem  in  1873  and  reached  North  Wilkes 
boro  in  1890.  The  Yadkin  Railroad,  chartered  in  1871,  was 
completed  in  1891  from  Salisbury  to  Norwood  with  a  brand 
extending  later  from  Hall's  Ferry  Junction  to  Whitney  anc 
later  on  to  Badin.  The  State  University  Railroad,  charterec 
in  1873,  was  built  from  University  Station  to  Chapel  Hill 
(Carrboro),  10  miles,  in  1881. 

The  Cape  Fear  and  Yadkin  Valley  Railroad,  248  miles  long 
from  Wilmington  to  Mount  Airy  with  about  90  miles  of  branch 
roads  included  the  43  miles  from  Fayetteville  to  Egypt,  buill 
before  the  war.  In  1S79  the  road  was  extended  for  four  milfj 
from  Egypt  to  Gulf.  By  1884  it  had  reached  Greensboro,  and 
by  1888  it  had  been  built  to  Mount  Airy  a  d  graded  for  ■  m 
further  with  a  plan  to  connect  with  the  Norfolk  and  Western 
Railroad.  A  branch  was  extended  from  Factory  Junction  tc 
Millsboro  and  another  to  Madison.  Also  in  1884  a  line  was 
built  from  Fayetteville  to  Maxton,  about  40  miles.  Then  in  1 
1890  the  road  was  built  between  Fayetteville  and  Wilmington. 
82  miles.  The  Cheraw  and  Salisbury  Railroad,  chartered  in 
1857,  opened  a  line  from  Cheraw  to  Wadesboro,  15  miles  in 
North  Carolina,  in  1880. 

The  Western  North  Carolina  Railroad  which  had  reached  a 
point  near  Morganton  before  the  war  met  many  difficulties. 
It  had  reached  Old  Fort  in  1S69,  Swannanoa  in  1879  and 
Asheville  in  1880.  In  that  year  this  line,  starting  in  Salisbury, 
was  sold  to  W.  J.  Best  and  associates  and  soon  taken  over  by 
the  Richmond  and  Danville  Railroad  (Southern)  which  as- 
sumed the  indebtedness  and  agreed  to  complete  the  lines  ac- 
cordingly. The  road  from  Asheville  to  Paint  Rock  on  the  Ten-i 
nessee  line,  185  miles  from  Salisbury,  was  completed  in  1882. 
In  1891  the  line  was  completed  from  Murphy  Junction  neari 
Asheville  to  Murphy,  a  distance  of  124  miles. 

The  Chatham  Railroad,  with  a  line  from  Raleigh  to  Moncure, 
became  the  Raleigh  and  Augusta  Air  Line  in  1871  and  by  1877 
the  line  had  been  extended  to  Gibson,  total  length  107.27  miles. 
The  Pittsboro  Railroad  in  1886  built  a  12-mile  connecting  line 
from  Moncure  to  Pittsboro. 

The  Charlotte,  Columbia  and  Augusta  Railroad  took  over 
the  Charlotte  and  South  Carolina  Railroad  which  had  built  a 
line  into  Charlotte  in  1852.  This  road  leased  the  lines  built 
by  the  Chester  and  Lenoir  Railroad  and  the  Atlantic,  Tennessee 
and  Ohio  Railroad.  The  Chester  and  Lenoir  Railroad,  char- 
tered in  1873,  a  narrow  gauge  road,  consolidated  with  the  Kings 
Mountain  Railroad  and  built  an  extension  of  the  Kings  Moun- 
tain Railroad  to  Lincolnton,  63  miles,  in  1880.  In  1884,  the 
Chester  and  Lenoir  Railroad  opened  up  a  line  from  Chester  to 
Newton  and  from  Hickory  to  Warrior,  a  few  miles  northwest 
of  Lenoir.  From  Newton  to  Hickory  this  narrow  gauge  road 
used  the  Western  North  Carolina  Railroad's  standard  gauge 
road  for  this  10  mile  link.  On  the  track  in  this  link  a  third 
rail  was  laid  to  accommodate  the  narrower  Chester  and  Lenoir 
equipment.  This  62  miles  of  road  (with  the  10  mile  link) 
became  a  subsidiary  of  the  Southern  Railway. 

The  Atlantic,  Tennessee  and  Ohio  Railroad  completed  in 
1860  from  Charlotte  to  Statesville,  45  miles,  whose  rails  were 
removed  in  1863  for  use  on  the  Piedmont  Railroad,  was  relaid 
in  1871.  The  lease  to  the  Charlotte,  Columbia  and  Augusta 
Railroad  was  assigned  to  the  Richmond  and  Danville  Rail- 
road (Southern). 

The  Asheville  and  Spartanburg  Railroad,  formerly  the  Green- 
ville and  French  Broad  Railroad,  combined  with  a  South  Caro- 
lina railroad  in  1874  and  in  1879  opened  the  road  from  Spar- 
tanburg to  Hendersonville.  This  line  was  completed  to  Ashe- 
ville in  1886  by  the  Richmond  and  Danville  Railroad  ( South- 
ern). 

Carolina  Central  Railroad,  chartered  in  1873,  which  had 
taken  over  the  Wilmington,  Charlotte  and  Rutherford  Railroad, 
completed  the  line  built  from  Meare's  Bluff,  near  Wilmington, 
via  Lumberton,  Maxton,  Laurinburg,  Hamlet  and  Rockingham, 
extending  it  via  Wadesboro  and  Monroe  to  Charlotte  and  ex- 
tended the  road  already  built  from  Charlotte  to  Lincolnton  via 
Shelby  and  Bostic  to  Rutherfordton.  This  road  also  became 
half  owner  of  the  Wilmington  Railroad  Bridge  Co.  which  con- 
structed 2.4  miles  of  line,  largely  on  bridges,  to  connect  Meare's 
Bluff  with  Wilmington.  This  line,  265  miles  long,  later  became 
a  part  of  the  Seaboard. 

The  Norfolk  Southern  Railway  Co.,  started  as  the  Elizabeth 
City  and  Norfolk  Railroad,  chartered  in  1870,  built  the  line 
from  Norfolk  to  Elizabeth  City  and  on  to  Edenton  in  1881.  It 
became  the  Norfolk  and  Southern  in  1883  and  was  reorganized 
in  1891  under  its  present  name  and  consolidated  with  the  Albe- 
marle and  Pantego  Railroad  from  Mackie's  Ferry  to  Pantego 
(Belhaven).     This  road  expanded  to  641  miles  to  become  one 


UMMER-FALL,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  75 


f  the  "Big  Four"  in  North  Carolina. 

The  Roanoke  and  Southern  Railroad,  organized  by  Winston- 
ialem  and  Martinsville  and  Roanoke,  Va.,  leaders,  chartered 
n  1887,  built  the  line  from  Martinsville  through  Mayodan, 
ladison  and  Walnut  Cove  to  Winston-Salem,  completed  and 
pened  in  1881.  This  line,  60  miles  long,  46  miles  in  North 
larolina,  became  part  of  the  Norfolk  a^d  Western. 

The  Lynchburg  and  Durham  Railroad,  chartered  ii  1887  and 
iromoted  largely  by  Durham  tobacco  interests,  43  miles  in 
forth  Carolina.  Later  the  road,  29  miles  long,  was  built  from 
izen  Creek  Junction  in  the  edge  of  Virginia  to  West  Jefferson, 
"hese  three  lines  are  owned  or  leased  and  operated  by  the 
forfolk  and  Western  Railway. 

The  High  Point,  Randleman,  Asheboro  and  Southern  Rail- 
oad,  chartered  in  1887,  27  miles,  built  this  road  and  opened 
t  in  1889.     It  is  operated  by  the  Southern. 

Among  the  other  lines  constructed  during  the  period  prior 
o  1900  are  the  following: 

Aberdeen  and  Rockfish,  the  "Blue  Road",  started  at  Aber- 
.een  in  1892  as  a  lumber  road,  extended  finally  to  Payetteville. 

Aberdeen  and  West  End  Railroad,  the  "Page  Road",  was 
pened  in  1890  from  Aberdeen  to  West  End,  later  extended  to 
Candor,  Star,  Biscoe  and  Asheboro.     Norfolk  Southern. 

Atlantic  and  Danville  Railroad,  26%  miles,  in  Person,  Cas- 
rell  and  Granville  counties,  along  the  North  Carolina-Virginia 
ine.    Part  of  Southern. 

Carthage  Railroad,  built  in  1888,  from  Carthage  to  Cameron, 
perated  by  W.  C.  Petty,  later  hotel  operator.     Seabr^rd. 

Danville  and  Western  Railroad,  opened  in  1882  from  Cas- 
ade  Junction,  Va.,  to  Leaksville,  eight  miles  in  North  Caro- 
ina. 

Durham  and  Northern,  42  miles,  opened  in  1889  from  Dur- 
lam  to  Henderson.     Seaboard. 

East  Tennessee  and  Western  North  Carolina  Railroad,  built 
rom  Johnson  City,  Tennessee,  to  Cranberry,  three  miles  in 
forth  Carolina,  in  1891.    Extended  to  Boone  later.   Abandoned. 

Georgia,  Carolina  and  Northern  Railway,  15  miles  in  North 
Carolina,  Monroe  to  Lawrenceville,  Ga.     Seaboard. 

Palmetto  Railroad,  opened  in  1887,  Cheraw  to  Hamlet,  seven 
niles  in  North  Carolina.     Seaboard. 

Statesviile  and  Western  Railroad,  chartered  and  opened  in 
887,  Statesviile  to  Taylorsville,  20  miles,  now  Alexander  Rail- 
oad. 

Warrenton  Railroad,  three  miles,  Warrenton  to  Warren 
5lains,  organized  1876. 

Wilmington,  Chadbourn  and  Conway,  organized  1883,  28 
niles  in  North  Carolina,  operating  to  Hub,  N.  C,  and  Conway, 
5.  C.    ACL. 

Wilmington,  Onslow  and  East  Carolina,  chartered  in  1885, 
Vilmington  to  Jacksonville  and  extended  to  New  Bern,  76 
niles.    ACL. 


Wilmington  Sea  Coast,  organized  and  completed  1888,  Wil- 
mington to  Ocean. 

Jamesville  and  Washington  Railroad  Co.,  chartered  in  1869, 
opened  1877,  Jamesville  to  Washington,  22.57  miles. 

Although  more  miles  of  railroad  line  have  been  abandoned 
than  have  been  built  since  1900,  several  important  lines  have 
been  constructed. 

Probably  the  longest  and  one  of  the  most  important  of  these 
was  the  Charleston,  Cincinnati  and  Chicago  Railroad,  operated 
as  the  Clinchfield  Railroad  by  the  ACL.  This  road  passes 
through  the  State  from  Charleston,  S.  C,  via  Forest  City, 
Marion,  Little  Switzerland,  Spruce  Pine  and  Kona  to  Erwin, 
Tennessee,  with  64%  miles  in  North  Carolina,  completed  in 
1910. 

Graham  County  Railroad  Co.,  Robbinsville,  organized  in  1924, 
built  railroad  from  Topton  to  Robbinsville. 

Beaufort  and  Morehead  Railway  Co.,  Beaufort,  organized  in 
1935  to  take  over  3.17  miles  of  road  between  Beaufort  and  More- 
head  City,  built  by  Norfolk  Southern  Railway. 

Piedmont  and  Northern  Railway,  Charlotte,  opened  in  1912 
between  Charlotte  and  Gastonia. 

Durham  and  Southern  Railway,  organized  in  1904,  extended 
a  former  road  giving  line  from  Durham  to  Dunn  and  Erwin. 

Tallulah  Falls  Railway  Co.,  Cornelia,  Ga.,  then  owned  by 
Southern  Railway,  extended  line  from  Georgia  to  Franklin  in 
1907,  16  miles  in  North  Carolina. 

Cliffside  Railroad  Co.,  Cliffside,  built  road  from  Cliffside  to 
the  Seaboard,  three  miles,  in  1905  and  a  branch  to  Avondale,  .7 
miles,  in  1916. 

The  Norfolk  Southern  built  several  links,  among  them  in 
1911-12,  Varina  to  Colon,  23  miles,  and  Mount  Gilead  to  Char- 
lotte, 51  miles. 

The  Winston-Salem  Southbound,  95  miles,  from  Winston- 
Salem  to  Wadesboro,  was  built  in  1911,  owned  jointly  by  ACL 
and  Norfolk  and  Western. 

The  High  Point,  Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad  is  another 
important  local  line.  The  company  was  organized  in  1923  to 
take  over  and  operate  an  old  line  and  has  been  successfully 
operated. 

The  Virginia  and  Carolina  Southern,  Lumberton  to  Hope 
Mills,  organized  in  1903  is  owned  by  the  ACL. 

The  Rockingham  Railroad,  Rockingham  to  Gibson,  was  com- 
pleted in  1911  and  is  owned  by  the  ACL. 

Laurinburg  and  Southern,  organized  in  1909  the  "McNair 
Road",  operates  from  Raeford  to  Johns,  via  Wagram  and  Laur- 
inburg. 

Cape  Fear  Railways,  organized  in  1926,  operates  lines  con- 
necting with  other  roads  from  the  Fort  Bragg  Reservation. 

Several  other  short  lines  have  been  built  in  the  last  50  years 
but  some  of  them  have  also  been  abandoned. 


State  Develops  Modern  67,000  Mile  Toll-Free  Road  System 

By  Margaret  Burk,  Public  Relations,  N.  C.  State  Highway  and  Public  Works  Commission 

From  a  meagre  beginning,  North  Car- 
ina has  built,  or  become  custodian  of  a 
57,000  -  mile  toll  -  free  road  system, 
stretching  from  the  mountains  to  the 
;ea. 

As  recently  as  35  years  ago,  North 
Carolina  was  still  "languishing  in  mud 
md  despair" ;  her  roads  were  alternately 
lust  and  mud  beds.  The  story  of  Tar 
Heel  roads  shows  the  workings  of  many 
lands  and  the  reality  of  many  dreams. 

In  the  late  19th  century,  the  road  system  compris- 
ed a  few  earth  and  plank  roads,  as  well  as  part-earth 
and  part-topsoil  roads.  The  establishing  of  Rural 
Free  Mail  Delivery  by  the  Federal  Government  at 
the  turn  of  the  century  gave  impetus  to  a  Good 
Roads  Association  in  North  Carolina.  In  1901„>  na- 
tional promoters  took  a  Good  Roads  Train  on  a  tour 
3f  the  nation;  it  made  stops  in  Winston,  Asheville 
and  Raleigh,  building  strips  of  road  and  propagan- 
dizing as  it  made  its  journey. 


— Photos  supplied  by  N.  C.  Highway  Dept.  and  State  News  Bureau. 
N.  C.  Highway  Commission  7)iembers.  Front  row,  left  to  right, 
J.  F.  Snipes,  Marion;  Harry  Buchanan,  Hendersonville ;  Chair- 
man A.  H.  Graham,  Hillsboro;  H.  Maynard  Hicks,  Snow  Hill; 
M.  E.  Robinson,  Goldsboro;  J.  Emmett  Winsloio,  Hertford. 
Second  row,  I.  to  r.,  James  A.  Gray,  Winston-Salem;  James  A. 
Hardison,  Wadesboro ;  Forrest  Lockey,  Aberdeen;  John  (Jack) 
Van  Lindley,  Greensboro ;  Ralph  W.  Winkler,  Boone;  June  F. 
Scarborough,  Statesviile ;  C.  A.  Hasty,  Maxton;  Dennie  A. 
Sorrell,  Durham;  C.  Heide  Trask,  Wilmington. 

By  1915,  the  counties  participated  in  roadbuilding 
to  a  limited  degree.    That  year,  the  General  Assem- 


PAGE  76 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


bly  authorized  an  appropriation  of  $10,000  and  the 
appointment  of  a  six-member  State  Highway  Com- 
mission. Most  of  the  appropriation  went  for  educa- 
tional and  promotional  activities. 

In  1917,  the  General  Assembly  gave  the  Commis- 
sion the  proceeds  from  motor  vehicle  registrations. 
Meanwhile,  Congress  passed  the  first  Federal  Aid 
highway  law.  Two  years  later,  the  General  Assem- 
bly enacted  the  State's  first  highway  act.  It  created 
a  Highway  Commission  composed  of  a  fulltime  chair- 
man and  three  commissioners  and  provided  that  all 
motor  vehicle  registration  fees  collected  in  the  State 
be  used  for  the  construction  and  maintenance  of 
roads. 

Passage  of  the  Doughton-Connor-Bowie  Act  in 
1921  created  a  nine-member  Highway  Commission 
headed  by  a  full-time  chairman  and  served  by  a  full- 
time  state  highway  engineer  to  supervise  all  road- 
building  work  by  the  State.  It  gave  the  new  Com- 
mission direct  jurisdiction  over  5,500  miles  of  roads 
and  provided  for  a  serial  bond  issue  of  $50,000,000, 
the  proceeds  to  be  applied  to  road  construction.  The 
Legislature  also  levied  a  tax  of  one  cent  per  gallon 
on  gasoline  and  gave  the  Commission  broad  powers 
of  determining  which  roads  should  comprise  the 
highway  system.  It  also  instructed  the  Commission 
to  build  a  system  of  roads  connecting  all  the  county 
seats  and  principal  towns  in  the  State.  Roadbuild- 
ing  was  stimulated;  the  new  Commission  employed 
more  than  3,000  men  and  bought  one  million  dollars 
worth  of  equipment. 

The  1923  Legislature  voted  to  float  an  additional 
bond  issue  of  $15,000,000  and  upped  the  gas  tax  from 
one  to  three  cents  a  gallon.  In  1925,  the  General  As- 
sembly floated  a  third  serial  bond  issue  of  $20,000,- 
000  and  added  another  cent  to  the  gas  tax.  In  1927, 
it  issued  $30,000,000  more  bonds,  raising  the  total 
outstanding  to  $115,000,000. 

By  the  end  of  the  Twenties,  under  the  inspired 
and  courageous  leadership  of  Highway  Chairman 
Frank  Page,  the  new  construction  had  spread  across 
primary  arteries  of  traffic  so  swiftly  (using  bond 
and  gas  tax  money)  that  North  Carolina's  roads  be- 
came nationally  known.  Governors  of  five  states 
plus  200  highway  engineers  and  administrative  offi- 
cials from  55  nations  toured  North  Carolina  to  see 
her  roads.     Tar  Heels  dubbed  the  travelcade  con- 


Handsome    new    Morehead    City-Atlantic    Beach    bridge    over 

Bogue  Bound  and  Intracoastal  Waterivay,  opened  last 

September,  cost  $1,500,000. 


Modern    underpass   on  Lexington    bypass 


and   7( 


ducted   for  the  visitors,   "Frank   Page's   Traveling 
Road  Show." 

After  1927,  the  State  reverted  to  a  "pay-as-you-go' 
policy  for  highway  financing.  No  more  bond  issue; 
were  passed  until  Tar  Heel  voters  in  1949  in  a  specia 
election  approved  a  $200,000,000  secondary  roa( 
bond  issue  designed  to  help  hard-surface  12,001 
miles  and  improve  by  stabilization  another  35,00( 
miles  of  rural  roads. 

The  1929  Legislature  raised  the  gas  tax  from  fou: 
to  five  cents  per  gallon  and  set  aside  the  extra  reve 
nue  from  the  additional  one  cent  tax  as  a  county  roa( 
fund. 

During  the  depression  crisis,  the  State  stepped  ou 
ahead  of  the  nation  by  placing  the  entire  county  roa( 
system — 45,000  miles — under  the  exclusive  jurisdic 
tion  of  the  Highway  Commission.  Financial  inabil 
ity  of  the  counties  to  fulfill  road  obligations  anc 
general  sentiment  favoring  more  centralized  contro 
of  county  roadbuilding  influenced  the  change.  Ii 
1931,  the  Legislature  authorized  the  use  of  count? 
prisoners  on  the  road  system  and  raised  the  gasolim 
tax  from  five  to  six  cents.  The  fifth  cent  tax  whicl 
had  been  allocated  to  county  government  reverted  t< 
the  Highway  Commission. 

In  1933,  the  Legislature  placed  the  State  Prisoi 
System  under  control  of  the  Highway  Commissioi 
and  gave  it  authority  to  use  the  labor  of  the  prisonerij 
on  the  roads.  Thus,  North  Carolina  became  one  o: 
the  very  few  states  in  which  the  prison  system  i: 
directly  linked  with  the  road  system. 

Economic  conditions  limited  activities  of  the  Com 
mission  from  1931  to  1935.  During  the  years  1934 
1937,  the  Legislature  diverted  $4,000,000  from  the! 
Highway  Fund  to  the  General  Fund  to  help  the  stati 


,■-.■■.  ■ 


I   ■■   .  ■  ■  ■ 


mmmiS^m 


New  bridge  over  Northeast  Cape  Fear  River  and  straightenei 
highway,  Routes  Jt2t  and  111  to  Wilmington. 


Summer-fall,  i  953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  77 


through  an  economic  crisis.  In  1947,  the  Legislature 
banned  any  further  diversions  of  that  nature. 

The  decade  from  1931  through  the  beginning  of 
World  War  II  saw  the  State's  highway  system  stead- 
ily expanding  as  increased  use  of  roads  brought  more 
gasoline  tax  income.  The  war  years  slowed  highway 
construction  to  a  virtual  standstill  with  shortages 
of  manpower  and  steel  for  bridges.  Highway  main- 
tenance was  meager,  weather  took  no  holiday,  and 
truck  weights  were  increased. 

An  ambitious  farm-to-market  road  program  was 
launched  just  after  the  war  ended.  With  the  guid- 
ance of  Highway  Chairman  Sandy  Graham  and  the 
late  Vance  Baise,  then  chief  engineer,  more  than 
5,000  miles  of  secondary  roads  were  paved  from  1945 
to  1949.  Although  highway  revenue  continued  to 
rise  as  motor  vehicle  use  increased,  costs  of  road- 
building  soared  even  higher. 

The  1949  General  Assembly  passed  a  bill  author- 
izing the  $200,000,000  secondary  road  bond  issue  if 
the  people  approved,  and  also  raised  ihe  State's  six- 
cent  gas  tax  to  seven  cents  in  January,  1950,  and  di- 
rected that  proceeds  from  the  extra  cent  pay  interest 
on  the  money  borrowed. 

By  approving  the  secondary  road  bond  issue,  Tar 
Heel  voters  charged  Dr.  Henry  Jordan  as  Highway 
Chairman  and  W.  H.  Rogers,  Jr.,  as  chief  engineer 
with  a  vast  responsibility.  Under  their  direction 
the  State  Highway  Commission  from  January  1, 
1949,  to  June  30, 1953,  had  hardsurfaced  14,550  miles 
of  secondary  roads  and  stabilized  another  19,600 
miles  of  roads  for  all-weather  use.  Of  the  $200,- 
000,000,  only  $1,777,787  now  remains  for  allocation 
to  rural  road  projects. 

With  the  conclusion  of  the  current  secondary  road 
bond  program,  North  Carolina  will  have  issued  some 
$316,000,000  in  highway  construction  bonds  over  a 
35  year  period  and  spent  untold  millions  in  current 
revenue  on  roads. 

During  the  1953  session,  the  Legislature  empow- 
ered the  Governor  to  appoint  a  five-member  study 
group  to  decide  if  and  how  the  organization  of  the 
State  Highway  Commission  should  be  revised.  As  a 
result,  the  committee  and  the  Governor  recommended 
that  the  State's  100  counties  be  regrouped  from  ten 
geographic  divisions  into  fourteen  divisions.  Since 
the  middle  thirties,  the  State  had  been  divided  into 
ten  highway  divisions. 

When  Governor  Umstead  created  the  14-member 
State  Highway  Commission  in  May,  1953,  he  ap- 
pointed A.  H.  (Sandy)  Graham,  chairman.  The  Gov- 
ernor appointed  a  prominent  group  of  businessmen 


Modern  uouuie-iatie  mgnwuy  on  nouie  04  eusi  uj  n-aizign. 

to  serve  as  Highway  Commissioners  for  the  next  four 
years. 

W.  H.  Rogers,  Jr.,  is  State  Highway  Engineer,  a 
post  he  has  held  since  1949.  Many  of  the  State's 
top  engineers — department  heads  and  division  engi- 
neers— have  more  than  25  years  experience  in  road- 
building  and  are  therefore  well  qualified  to  direct 
their  phase  of  highway  activity. 

Graham  returns  to  his  highway  post  after  the 
busiest  four  years  in  rural  roadbuilding  in  the  State's 
history.  He  and  his  Commission  have  the  task  of 
keeping  these  lately  improved  secondary  roads  in 
good  condition,  maintaining  all  other  portions  of  the 
State's  67,000-mile  systems,  and  at  the  same  time, 
vigorously  pushing  ahead  the  expanded  primary 
highway  improvement  program. 

A  recent  survey  showTed  that  over  $365,000,000 
was  needed  to  modernize  the  State's  rural  primary 
highways  and  make  them  adequate  for  present  traf- 
fic needs.  There  has  been  a  phenomenal  increase  in 
total  traffic  volumes  and  weights  that  call  for  wider 
highways  and  thicker  pavements. 

However,  during  the  last  decade  the  State  has  built 
by-passes  for  through  car  and  truck  traffic  around 
West  Asheville,  Lexington,  Thomasville,  the  north 
side  of  Durham,  Siler  City,  Hickory,  Wendell,  Ply- 
mouth, Shelby,  Pembroke,  Waynesville,  Concord, 
Asheboro,  Chapel  Hill,  Henderson,  Fayetteville,  Wil- 
son, Weldon,  Clinton,  Burgaw,  Golclsboro  and  Lenoir. 

By-passes  are  now  under  construction  on  US  29 
and  70  around  High  Point,  Greensboro,  Burlington, 
Graham  and  Mebane ;  on  US  64  around  Statesville 
and  Asheboro ;  on  US  74  and  601  around  Monroe ; 
and  on  US  15  and  NC  158  around  Oxford.  Recently 
the  relocation  of  US  1  by-passing  Wake  Forest, 
Franklinton  and  Youngsville  was  completed. 

The  cost  of  primary  highways  now  ranges  from 
$35,000  to  $60,000  a  mile  for  a  two-lane  road.  This 
figure  does  not  include  the  costs  of  right-of-way, 


Grading  on  the  new  four-lane  super  highway  between  Old  Fort 

and  Ridgecrest.   Relocation  of  6.15  miles  on  U.  8. 

10  will  cost  about  $3,225,000. 


'The  Governor  Umstead",  a  converted  Navy  landing  craft,  now 
a  22-car  ferryboat,  operating  around  Oregon  Inlet. 


PAGE  78 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


grading,  bridges  or  any  items  other  than  paving. 
The  cost  of  paving  varies  according  to  types,  terrain, 
and  other  factors.  In  mountainous  areas,  roadbuild- 
ing  is  necessarily  slower  and  costlier  while  long 
bridges  and  swamps  add  to  the  cost  of  coastal  road- 
building. 

Of  necessity,  major  improvements  on  the  primary 
system  must  be  made  in  short  sections  for  three  rea- 
sons: traffic  need,  availability  of  funds,  and  avoid- 
ance of  serious  traffic  disruption. 


Spurred  on  by  a  road-conscious  Governor  and  an 
experienced  chairman,  the  State  Highway  Commis- 
sion is  striving  to  modernize  its  primary  highway 
system.  Much  more  planning  and  effort  must  yet 
be  made  to  bring  today's  highways — many  tnat  were 
built  in  the  Twenties  for  lighter  and  slower-moving 
vehicles — up  to  the  standards  required.  As  funds 
become  available,  the  Commission  plans  to  rebuild 
more  miles  of  the  State's  overburdened,  and  in  many 
cases,  outmoded  primary  routes. 


Intracoastal  Waterway  Pleasure  Craft,  Freight  Boat  Artery 


North  Carolina  contains  within  her  eastern  bor- 
ders 308  miles  of  the  Atlantic  Intracoastal  Walk- 
way, an  important  sea  level  artery  of  water  traffic 
extending  from  a  point  23  miles  northeast  of  Boston, 
a  few  miles  inland  from  the  ocean  along  the  Atlantic 
Coast,  to  the  beginning  of  the  Florida  Peninsula  and 
thence  southward  to  Key  West,  Florida. 

A  connection  link  across  Florida  beginning  with 
the  St.  Johns  River  and  reaching  to  Brownsville, 
Texas,  was  authorized  by  Congress  in  1942.  Both 
routes  are  portions  of  some  28,000  miles  of  navigable 
inland  waterways  in  the  Continental  United  States. 

The  Atlantic  Intracoastal  Waterway,  formerly 
known  as  the  Inland  Waterway,  has  become  a  valua- 
ble channel  of  trade,  especially  vital  during  the  war 
periods  while  submarines  infested  the  water  along 
the  Seaboard.  In  addition  to  carrying  a  large  and 
increasing  amount  of  freight  traffic  it  is  also  ideal 
for  the  thousands  of  small  pleasure  craft  which  use 
its  facilities  each  year.  Its  channel  has  been  devel- 
oped by  the  U.  S.  Army's  Corps  of  Engineers  over 
a  long  period  of  years  and  is  available  without  coll 
charges  for  commerce  and  pleasure  to  any  individual 
or  firm  in  the  U.  S.  desiring  to  make  use  of  its  ad- 
vantages. 

Sections  of  the  inland  waterway  have  been  devel- 
oped almost  since  the  beginning  of  the  republic  and 
the  entire  project,  as  such,  is  still  not  complete.  It 
is  recalled  that  George  Washington  made  a  survey 
for  a  Dismal  Swamp  canal  in  Virginia  in  1755. 
Opened  in  1820,  this  canal  branches  off  southeast- 
ward from  the  Elizabeth  River  through  Deep  Creek 
to  the  Dismal  Swamp  Canal  then  into  the  Pasquotank 
River  by  Elizabeth  City  into  Albemarle  Sound.  The 
two  routes  intersect  at  a  point  70  miles  south  of  Nor- 
folk and  just  west  of  the  highway  bridge  across  Cur- 
rituck Sound. 

The  first  work  done  by  the  Federal  Government 


— All  photos  by  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  Army 
Pleasure  craft  and  charter  boats  anchored  on  the  Intracoastal 
Waterway  at  Morehead  City. 


~+Y    N[W    *V- 

/        V^ovW'     Map  showing  principal  routes  of  Intracoastal 

f~  \    #       Waterway  through  sounds,  rivers   and  land 

cuts  along  eastern  North  Carolina  Seaboard. 


was  in  1828  and  in  1837  a  survey  was  authorized 
between  the  southern  end  of  the  Dismal  Swamp  canal 
in  North  Carolina  and  Winyah  Bay  in  South  Caro- 
lina. The  Albemarle  and  Chesapeake  Canal,  con- 
necting those  sounds  from  the  vicinity  of  Norfolk 
southward,  cutting  through  Elizabeth  River,  Deep 
Creek,  the  Virginia  Cut  and  into  Currituck  Sound 
and  through  North  River  to  Albemarle  Sound,  was 
begun  in  1856  as  a  private  enterprise. 

Then  in  1873  the  Federal  Government  began  a 
consistent  movement  toward  a  comprehensive  and 
connected  waterway.  In  the  years  which  followed, 
the  Federal  Government  began  the  adoption  of 
waterway  improvement  projects  which  continue 
through  the  years.  Many  of  these  were  at  first  local 
and  not  related.  Records  show  that  in  the  decade 
1880-89  a  dozen  projects  were  adopted.  In  later 
decades  additional  projects  were  adopted  as  follows: 
13  in  1890-99 ;  7  in  1900-09 ;  16  in  1910-19 ;  6  in  1920- 
29 ;  23  in  1930-39 ;  31  in  1940-49.  Additional  projects 
have  been  approved  since  this  last  report. 

Although  inland  waterways  were  developed  from 
the  Boston  vicinity  through  to  New  York  and  other 
points  south,  the  Atlantic  Intracoastal  Waterway 
actually  starts  at  Trenton,  N.  J.,  running  the  Dela- 
ware River  to  Philadelphia,  Wilmington  and  Salem, 
crosses  by  canal  at  Chesapeake  Bay,  runs  through 


'iUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  79 


ihis  bay  to  Hampton  Roads ;  then  as  stated  by  way 
If  Norfolk  into  Currituck  and  later  Albemarle 
jjound. 

[  This  is  the  principal  route,  but  the  old  Dismal 
JSwamp  Canal  route  may  also  be  used  from  Norfolk 
nto  the  Pasquotank  River  by  way  of  Elizabeth  City, 
md  thence  into  Albemarle  Sound.  Continuing  in 
^orth  Carolina  it  enters  Alligator  River,  then 
hrough  the  Alligator-Pungo  Canal,  22  miles  long, 
nto  Pungo  River,  across  Pamlico  River  and  by  way 
>f  natural  streams  and  land  cuts  to  Beaufort  Harbor. 
?rom  there  it  goes  by  sounds,  marshes  and  cuts 
hrough  Bogue  Sound,  Topsail  Sound,  by  way  of 
Wrightsville  and  through  a  land  cut,  13  miles  below 
Wilmington,  into  the  Cape  Fear  River.  A  branch 
ingles  off  to  Wilmington  while  the  main  channel 
:ontinues  to  Southport  and  westwardly  to  Little  Riv- 
;r  at  the  South  Carolina  line,  ending  as  stated  at  Key 
West,  Florida. 

From  the  Intracoastal  Waterway  in  North  Caro- 
ina  several  branches  and  water  connections  are 
ivailable  and  maintained  to  various  points  along  the 
Seaboard.  Points  connected  by  waterway  include 
^denton,  Plymouth,  Elizabeth  City,  Winton,  Mur- 
xeesboro,  Windsor,  Hamilton,  Columbia,  Washing- 
on  and  on  to  a  point  near  Greenville;  New  Bern, 
Mental,  Jacksonville,  Swansboro  and  from  Wil- 
nington  to  Fayetteville,  up  the  Cape  Fear  River  in 
vhich  three  locks  are  used.  Numbers  of  other  points 
ilso  have  access  to  the  Intracoastal  Waterway. 

The  Intracoastal  Waterway  has  been  constructed 
md  is  maintained  by  the  Corps  of  Engineers.  The 
otal  cost  of  new  construction  in  North  Carolina,  as 
ihown  in  a  recent  report,  is  $9,401,800  and  the  esti- 
nated  annual  maintenance  is  some  less  than  $400,000 
i  year.  Width  of  the  canal  is  90  feet  in  land  cuts  and 
ip  to  300  feet  in  open  water.  A  twelve-foot  channel 
s  maintained  normally  but  only  a  ten-foot  depth 
las  been  maintained,  because  of  economy  reasons, 
imce  the  Korean  war  began. 

Reports  indicate  that  probably  more  than  50  miles 
)f  the  channel  in  North  Carolina  has  been  cut 
hrough  land.  Principal  among  these  are  the  cut 
)etween  the  Virginia  line  and  the  North  River  Bar, 
;ix  miles;  Alligator-Pungo  land  cut,  22.5  miles; 
joose  Creek-Bay  River  land  cut,  3.8  miles,  and 
\dams  Creek-Core  Creek  land  cut,  6.3  miles;  Core 
>eek  land  cut,  2.2  miles.  Several  short  land  cuts 
ire  not  listed.  In  addition,  the  Corps  of  Engineers 
nust  dredge  many  miles  in  sound,  rivers  and  marshes 
;o  provide  controlling  depth.     In  other  places  dams 


Mr  vieiv  of  bridge  over  Intracoastal  Waterway  at  Coinjock, 

Currituck  County.   Bulkheads  anchored  to  shore 

to  protect  structure. 


Tug  pushing  barge  over  Intracoastal  Waterway  near  Coinjock. 

Wheel  house  jutting  upward  allows  pilot  to 

see  above  deck  of  barge. 

are  built  to  retain  water  at  the  required  level.  Some 
parts  of  the  waterway  in  North  Carolina  are  affected 
by  lunar  tides  which  cause  a  variation  in  depth  as 
high  as  6  to  7  feet  in  some  portions  passing  through 
open  water. 

Historically,  the  portion  of  the  waterway  between 
the  Virginia  line  and  Beaufort  was  commenced  in 
August,  1923,  and  completed  in  February,  1930 ;  the 
channel  between  Beaufort  and  the  Cape  Fear  River 
was  commenced  in  March,  1927,  and  completed  in 
December,  1932 ;  an  eight  by  75-foot  channel  from 
Cape  Fear  to  Little  River,  S.  C.,  was  dredged  between 
1932  and  1939  and  enlarged  to  12  feet  by  90  feet 
between  1939  and  1940.  Feeder  channels  were  pro- 
vided during  this  period  to  several  points  near  the 
waterway.  As  provided,  under  local  cooperation, 
North  Carolina  was  required  to  acquire  right-of-way, 
including  land  for  the  land  cuts,  and  turn  it  over  to 
the  Federal  Government  without  cost.  The  lone  ex- 
ception was  Snow's  cut  between  Wilmington  and 
Carolina  Beach.  Land  for  this  cut  was  acquired  by 
the  State  and  deeded  to  the  Federal  Government. 
Other  conditions,  such  as  building  and  operating 
draw  bridges  of  the  waterway  after  it  was  establish- 
ed, must  be  met. 

Fourteen  bridges  cross  the  waterway  in  North 
Carolina.  Five  of  these  were  in  operation  before 
the  waterway  was  established,  all  of  them  north  of 
Beaufort.  The  Federal  Government  built  and  main- 
tains five  of  the  bridges,  including  the  bridges  at 
Coinjock;  Fairfield:  the  Wilkerson  Creek  Bridge 
near  Belhaven ;  the  Hobucken  Bridge  and  Core  Creek 
Bridges  north  of  Beaufort.  The  Beaufort  and  More- 
head  City  Railway  Co.,  owns,  operates  and  maintains 
the  railroad  bridge  on  its  line.  Bridges  built  since 
the  waterway  was  established  and  operated  by  North 
Carolina  are  the  Morehead  City  Bridge,  the  Atlantic 
Beach  Bridge,  the  Sears  Landing  Bridge  near  Holly 
Ridge,  the  Wrightsville  Beach  Bridge,  the  Carolina 
Beach  Bridge  (built  by  the  Federal  Government  and 
given  to  the  State) ,  the  Long  Beach  Bridge  near 
Southport  and  the  Holden  Beach  Bridge,  the  latter 
now  being  constructed.  Another  bridge,  the  Hurst 
Beach  Bridge,  now  under  construction,  is  owned  and 
operated  by  the  Marine  Corps  for  Camp  Lejeune. 

Freight  and  passenger  traffic  over  the  waterway 
have  shown  large  and  consistent  increases  in  recent 
years.  The  average  annual  commerce  handled  over 
the  North  Carolina  section,  designated  the  Wilming- 
ton District,  was  1,201,080  short  tons.     Partially 


PAGE  80 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


broken  down  this  commerce  amounted  to  873,063  tons 
in  1947;  1,073,718  tons  in  1948,  and  1,325,029  tons 
in  1949.  The  1951  figures  show  commerce  of  1.478,- 
500  tons,  the  last  figures  readily  available.  Figures 
for  1952  and  1953  are  expected  to  show  continued 
increases.  Passenger  traffic  reached  2,200  in  1947, 
dropped  to  2,000  in  1948,  and  in  1949  increased  to 
2,500.  Later  years  are  expected  to  show  even  great- 
er increases. 

Figures  for  1949  show  that  73  steamers,  7,744 
motor  vessels,  1,801  barges,  and  771  other  types  of 


craft,  making  a  total  of  10,389  vessels,  made  trips 
through  the  waterway.  Approximately  4,600  of 
these  were  pleasure  craft  drawing  less  than  four  feet 
of  water.  The  balance,  approximately  5,800  vessels, 
drawing  from  five  to  twelve  feet  of  water,  were  pre- 
sumed to  be  freight  carriers.  These  figures  give  some 
indication  of  the  importance  of  this  waterway  not 
only  within  the  boundaries  of  North  Carolina  but  for 
its  entire  length  along  the  Atlantic  Coast. — Revised 
by  H.  E.  Hicks,  Chief  Technical  Liaison  Branch, 
Corps  of  Engineers  U.S.  Army,  Wilmington  District 


/  \JPm7      L 


Blue  Ridge  Parkway,  One  of  World's  Remarkable  Scenicways 

By  R.  Getty  Browning,  Chief  Locating  Engineer,  N.  C.  Highway  Department 

The  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  is  one  of  the  most  re- 
markable highways  in  the  United  States  or  in  the 
world  for  that  matter. 

The  plan  to  build  this  Parkway  originated  from  a 
consideration  of  the  best  means  that  could  be  pro- 
vided to  drive  from  the  Shenandoah  National  Park 
in  Virginia  to  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains  National 
Park  in  North  Carolina  and  Tennessee.  The  con- 
clusion was  finally  reached  that  a  Parkway  from 
which  commercial  traffic  could  be  excluded  would 
offer  a  far  better  means  of  visiting  these  parts  of 
the  country  than  would  the  ordinary  highways  which 
carry  such  a  heavy  volume  of  mixed  vehicles  that 
they  cannot  be  considered  recreational  highways  in 
any  sense. 

In  projecting  the  highway  through  Virginia  and 
North  Carolina,  the  Interior  Department  requested 
that  the  Highway  Departments  in  these  states  sug- 
gest a  route  which  they  thought  would  be  suitable 
for  such  a  Parkway  and  that  they  donate  the  desired 
right-of-way  width  to  the  Government  without  cost. 


f  V 


1   GHAHAW         / 


J — -£r_jh. L< — •* 


Note:  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  is  really  Mr.  Browning's  "baby".  In  1934 
Mr.  Browning  mapped  the  route  for  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  based  on 
information  obtained  by  actually  walking  over  it.  Even  though  this  was  done 
before  any  surveys  were  begun,  the  finished  parkway  follows  the  route  almost 
exactly.  The  committee,  appointed  by  Secretary  lo'ies  to  recommend  to  him 
the  most  suitable  route  for  the  parkway,  approved  a  route  extending  from 
Blowing  Rock,  N.  C,  to  Gatlinburg,  Tenn.  This  decision  appeared  so  unfair 
to  North  Carolina  because  of  the  great  superiority  of  the  scenery  and  the 
much  higher  elevations  on  the  North  Carolina  route  that  Mr.  Browning  made 
a  personal  appeal  to  Secretary  Ickes,  which,  with  the  detailed  information 
offered,   proved   so   effective  that  the   North    Carolina    route  was   adopted. 


Map  shows  course  of  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  through  Norih  Caro- 
lina. Solid  lines  shoto  completed  highiuays;  dotted  lines  show 
incomplete  but  passable  on  other  roads,  and  parallel  lines  unim- 
proved stretches  not  yet  opened.  Dotted  oval  outlines  Great 
Smoky  Mountains  National  Park. 

North  Carolina  met  this  request  by  plotting  a  map 
through  the  most  outstanding  mountainous  scenery 
in  the  State,  and  agreed  to  furnish  at  least  125  acres 
of  land  per  mile  for  the  right-of-way  and  also  to  make 
all  the  necessary  surveys  and  to  carry  out  all  negotia- 
tions for  the  right-of-way  without  charge.  Since 
there  is  more  than  250  miles  of  the  Parkway  in  North 
Carolina,  it  is  readily  seen  that  the  State  was  assum- 
ing quite  an  obligation  and  in  so  doing  officials  dem- 
onstrated their  belief  that  the  immense  value  of  the 
Parkway  to  the  State  as  a  whole  would  be  justified. 
It  was  felt  that  by  the  construction  of  this  beautiful 
drive  between  the  parks  many  visitors  would  be  at- 
tracted to  the  State  from  all  parts  of  the  country. 


I 


artWF- 


5,::-:;. 


— Photos  by  State  News  Bureau. 
Skimming  mountain  crests  near  Grandfather  Mountain  on  the 
Blue  Ridge  Parkway  in  North  Carolina. 


Mount  Mitchell,  highest  peak,  in  Eastern  America,  is  seen  above 
the  clouds  from  the  Blue  Ridge  Parkway. 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  81 


The  total  length  of  the  Parkway  is  477  miles.  It 
ias  a  twenty-foot  pavement  with  five-foot  shoulders 
hi  each  side,  guard  rails  where  necessary,  and  it  is 
andscaped  by  utilizing  the  indigenous  shrubs  and 
lowers  to  the  best  advantage. 

The  boundaries  of  the  right-of-way  are  so  flexible 
;hat  they  were  expanded  where  desired  to  take  in 
some  beautiful  area  or  to  protect  a  crossroad  from 
;he  possibility  of  unsightly  buildings,  and  in  some 
nstances  it  was  reduced  in  width  to  a  minimum  of 
200  feet  to  reduce  the  right-of-way  damages  which 
)therwise  would  have  been  excessive. 

Along  the  route  of  the  Parkway  there  are  consid- 
'vabiy  more  than  100  varieties  of  trees  and  over  100') 
iifferent  kinds  of  shrubs  and  wild  flowers.  The  ele- 
ction ranges  from  about  2700  feet  to  over  6000  feet 
ibove  sealevel,  and  since  it  passes  through  the  most 
nagnificent  scenery  to  be  found  anywhere  in  the 
country,  it  has  become  a  most  popular  automobile 
;our. 

In  the  spring  when  the  flowers  are  coming  in  bloom 
it  different  times  on  different  levels,  and  in  the  fall 
when  the  foliage  is  changing  in  the  same  fashion, 
sooner  in  the  low  ground,  and  then  moving  upward 
n  the  higher  mountains,  the  traveler  is  amazed  and 


LuUimn  view  of  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  near  Doughton  Park  in 
Wilkes  County. 


Tunnel  on  the  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  near  Asheville. 

delighted  to  view  the  vast  areas  of  beautiful  coloring 
which  is  to  be  seen  on  every  side. 

Frequent  overlooks  are  provided  where  one  may 
park  and  view  the  scenery,  take  pictures,  or  enjoy 
a  picnic  lunch  without  being  hurried  or  disturbed 
in  any  way.  There  is  probably  no  similar  Parkway 
in  existence  where  one  may  enjoy  so  much  freedom, 
security  and  entertainment  as  on  this  one.  In  sum- 
mer the  climate  is  delightfully  cool,  frequently  being 
fifteen  or  twenty  degrees  cooler  than  in  the  nearby 
valleys,  and  since  one  may  drive  as  slowly  as  he  de- 
sires and  stop  as  frequently  as  he  wishes,  it  makes  a 
very  delightful  place  to  spend  a  vacation. 

During  last  year  more  than  five  million  people  en- 
joyed the  Parkway  and  since  there  are  at  least  one 
hundred  million  persons  living  within  less  than  one 
thousand  miles  of  it,  which  is  only  a  three-day  drive, 
it  is  obvious  that  as  the  Parkway  becomes  better 
known,  it  will  attract  more  and  more  visitors  each 
year. 

4,000,000  VISITORS  IN    1953 

Almost  4,000,000  visitors  to  the  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  had  been  recorded 
by  the  end  of  October,  an  increase  of  16.4  percent  over  the  number  at  the 
same  date  last  year,  and  Parkway  officials  estimated  that  between  300,000 
and  500,000   more  people  would  visit  the  scenic  drive   before  the  year  closed. 

Records  show  that  visitors  came  from  almost  every  state  and  from  nearly 
two  dozen  foreign  countries  in  1953.  North  Carolina  led  all  states,  with  one- 
third  of  the  total,  while  North  Carolina  and  Virginia  furnished  considerably 
more  than  half  of  the  visitors.  States  along  the  eastern  Seaboard  sent  most 
of  the  visitors,  as  usual,  but  Ohio  and  Illinois  were  not  far  behind. 


Wilmington,  Morehead  Ports  Improved  to  Increase  Shippin; 


N.  C.  State  Ports  Authority,  created  in  1945  to 
develop  shipping  facilities  at  Wilmington  and  More- 
head  City  primarily,  made  preparations  during  the 
four  years  until  1949  when  the  General  Assembly 
authorized  the  issuance  of  $7,500,000  in  bonds.  Since 
that  time  port  facilities  second  to  none  on  the  Atlan- 
tic Coast,  have  been  constructed  and  have  made  ex- 
tensive progress  in  handling  outgoing  and  incoming 
products  produced  by  and  needed  by  North  Caro- 
lina's important  industrial  firms. 

North  Carolina  had  long  been  handicapped  by  lack 
of  adequate  port  facilities  and  many  steps  have  been 
taken  seeking  to  improve  the  few  ports  along  the 
Eastern  Seaboard  which  were  available  for  develop- 
ment. Sandbars  along  the  coast  served  as  a  barrier 
to  prevent  development  of  shipping  facilities.     Two 


major  exceptions  are  found  at  Wilmington  and  More- 
head  City  but  these  ports  needed  extensive  develop- 
ment before  they  could  be  brought  into  profitable 
use. 

Governor  Morrison,  during  his  administration 
(1921-24) ,  sought  to  improve  the  ports  by  a  proposed 
bond  is?ue  but  the  proposal  failed.  In  1933  the  Caoe 
Fear  River  Association  was  formed  and  in  1935  the 
Wilmington  Ports  Commission  was  created  by  the 
General  Assembly.  Ten  years  later  that  body  au- 
thorized the  State  Ports  Authority,  but  it  was  four 
years  later  before  the  $7,500,000  bond  issue  provided 
funds  for  port  development.  Many  other  movements 
had  proven  inadequate  and  unsuccessful. 

Development  of  the  Port  of  Wilmington  started 
January  1,  1948,  when  the  State  Ports  Authority  se- 


PAGE  82 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


cured  a  fifty-year  lease  from  the  United  States  Ma- 
rine Corps  for  about  50  acres  of  waterfront  on  the 
northern  end  of  the  shipyard  at  Wilmington.  Since 
that  time  approximately  29  acres  costing  around 
$30,000,  have  been  secured,  adjoining  the  leased  site. 
This  area  is  located  at  Wilmington,  30  miles  up  the 
Cape  Fear  River  from  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  The  chan- 
nel is  wide  and  the  depth  is  32  feet  at  mean  low  wa- 
ter. Built  on  3,000  concrete  piles,  43  feet  deep,  is  a 
wharf  1,510  feet  long  and  200  feet  wide,  with  space 
for  three  ships  at  a  time. 

Two  railroad  tracks  and  gantry  cranes  are  located 
on  shipside  and  two  transit  sheds,  each  containing 
79,000  square  feet  are  adjacent  to  the  berths.  Behind 
these  sheds  is  a  storage  warehouse  containing  98,000 
square  feet.  All  of  these  are  of  fireproof  construc- 
tion, all  brick,  steel  and  concrete.  A  fumigating 
plant  was  added  recently  with  four  vacuum  chambers 
6x9  feet  for  fumigating  tobacco,  cotton  or  other 
products  requiring  this  treatment.  A  scale  house, 
fitted  with  motor  tread  scales,  and  railway  track 
scales,  was  constructed.  An  existing  building  was 
remodeled  to  provide  office  space  and  maintenance 
shops.  A  water  system,  for  fire  protection,  ships' 
water  and  other  uses,  includes  a  200,000  gallon  ele- 
vated tank.  Most  of  the  $5,000,000  earmarked  for 
this  development  has  been  expended. 

Ocean  Terminal  at  Morehead  City  was  allotted  $2,- 
500,000  of  the  bond  proceeds.  Here  some  port  facili- 
ties had  already  been  developed  and  the  State  Ports 
Authority  purchased  the  site  and  buildings  from  the 
Morehead  City  Port  Commission  for  $201,800.  The 
general  contract  for  construction  of  new  facilities 
amounted  to  $2,002,555.  Construction  included  a 
steel  sheet  pile  bulkhead  and  timber  relieving  plat- 
form or  dock  1,200  feet  long.  A  large  fireproof  tran- 
sit shed,  containing  60,000  square  feet  and  two  stor- 
age warehouses  of  35,640  and  51,840  square  feet. 
Work  also  included  dredging  in  front  of  the  docks, 
paving,  landscaping  and  other  development.  More- 
head  City  already  had  a  dock  1,350  feet  long  and  one 
transit  shed.  This  wharf  has  been  reconstructed 
and  the  transit  shed  repaired.  Two  Morehead  ware- 
houses are  leased  to  the  U.  S.  Navy  and  three  other 
firms  rent  space,  bringing  in  satisfactory  revenues. 

The  revenues  from  operation  of  the  two  ports  bv 
the  end  of  May,  1953,  reached  $151,180.  The  first 
ship  to  dock  at  Wilmington  was  the  steamship  South- 
port  in  May,  1952.  Within  one  year,  to  May  22, 1953, 
25  additional  ships  had  docked  with  varying  cargoes. 
Two  ships  had  gone  out  of  the  port  loaded  with  3,867 
hogsheads  of  tobacco,  destined  for  foreign  ports. 
More  recent  figures  show  that  225  ships  had  docked 


Wilmington  terminal  of  State  Ports  Authority  showing  ship- 
side  storage  and  rail  and  truck  approaches  to  warehouses. 

and  about  150  ships  including  military  vessels,  had 
sailed  up  to  Nov.  1. 

The  State  Ports  Authority  is  seeking  to  establish 
as  many  regular  sailings  from  the  Wilmington  and 
Morehead  City  ports  as  possible,  and  by  so  doing,  use 
the  splendid  terminal  facilities  to  greater  advantage. 
Heavy  exports  of  tobacco,  cotton  and  other  products 
of  farms  and  factories  are  expected  to  develop. 
Among  the  exports  the  ports  hope  to  develop  are  long 
staple  cotton,  mahogany  logs  and  veneers,  foodstuffs, 
bauxite,  fertilizer,  chemicals  and  numerous  other 
products.  The  ports  are  expected  to  develop  into 
important  feeders  for  inland  ports,  particularly  those 
available  to  the  Intracoastal  Waterway,  such  as  Fay- 
etteville,  Edenton,  Greenville  and  others. 

In  accordance  with  legislative  act  of  1945  Govern- 
or Cherry  appointed  a  seven-member  board  (the 
board  elects  its  officers)  including  R.  B.  Page,  Wil- 
mington (chairman)  ;  A.  G.  Myers,  Gastonia  (vice- 
chairman)  ;  W.  O.  Huske,  Fayetteville  (secretary- 
treasurer)  ;  J.  H.  White,  Winston-Salem;  H.  S. 
Gibbs,  Morehead  City;  S.  B.  Frink,  Southport;  T. 
Henry  Wilson,  Morganton.  A  nine-member  board 
was  provided  in  1949  and  Governor  Scott  named  to 
this  board  Mr.  Myers  (chairman)  ;  Nello  L.  Teer, 
Durham  (vice-chairman)  ;  Mr.  Huske  (secretary- 
treasurer — replaced  soon  afterward  by  Staley  Cooke, 
Burlington)  ;  George  Ross  Pou,  state  auditor,  ex  offi- 
cio ;  Mr.  White ;  David  Q.  Holton,  Edenton ;  W.  Avery 
Thompson,  Hallsboro ;  Henry  Vann,  Clinton,  and  W. 
J.  Bason,  North  Wilkesboro. 

Again  in  1953  the  General  Assembly  reduced  the 
number  of  members  from  nine  to  seven  and  Governor 


N.  C.  State  Ports  Authority  terminal  at  Morehead   City  can 
accommodate  five  ships  at  berth. 


The  S.S.  August  Bolten,  Hamburg,  unloads  bulk  fertilizer  ma- 
terials at  Morehead  City  State  Ports  terminal. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  83 


Umstead  named  to  four-year  terms  A.  G.  Myers,  Gas- 
tonia  (chairman)  ;  Edwin  Pate,  Laurinburg  (vice- 
chairman)  ;  W.  Avery  Thompson,  Hallsboro  (secre- 
tary-treasurer) ;  Harvey  W.  Moore,  Charlotte;  J. 
Harvey  White,  Winston-Salem,  and  Raymond  Bryan, 
Goldsboro. 

Mr.  Myers,  leading  Gastonia  banker  and  textile 
executive  for  many  years,  resigned  as  chairman  and 
member  of  the  board  due  to  his  health  after  71/2 
years  as  a  member  and  4^  years  as  chairman.  Ed- 
win Pate,  vice-chairman,  was  appointed  chairman  to 
succeed  him  at  a  meeting  on  October  20,  and  Ray- 
mond Brown,  Goldsboro,  was  named  vice-chairman. 

Col.  George  W.  Gillette,  native  of  Onslow  County 
and  for  many  years  a  colonel  in  the  Army  of  Engi- 
neers, located  much  of  the  time  in  the  Wilmington 
area,  was  elected  executive  director  of  the  Ports 
Authority  and  set  up  his  office  in  the  Trust  Building, 
Wilmington,  January  1,  1948.  During  the  first  half 
of  the  five  years  he  has  been  executive  director,  Col- 
onel Gillette  devoted  much  of  his  attention  to  sur- 
veys and  plans  and  publicizing  the  value  of  using 
this  State's  ports.  Much  of  the  last  half  of  the  period 
has  been  devoted  to  construction  of  facilities  at  the 
two  ports  and  in  beginning  operations  in  handling 
incoming  and  outgoing  cargoes.     Colonel  Gillette  re- 


NJ 


/      i  /  ■  ....   .     . 

Large    Argentine    Transport    -freighter    recently    loaded    with 

$15,000,000  worth  of  tobaeco  from  Wilmington  docks 

for  an  English  tobacco  company. 

signed  as  executive  director  at  the  October  20  meet- 
ing, his  resignation  becoming  effective  December  31. 

Note — Col.  Richard  Searl  Marr,  52,  recently  retired  after 
30  years  in  the  U.S.  Army,  Infantry,  was  named  director  of 
the  State  Ports  Authority  to  succeed  Col.  Gillette  at  a  meet- 
ing of  the  board  Dec.  31,  1953. 


Public  Transportation  Systems  Regulated  by  State  62  Years 

By  Fred  C.  Hunter,  Commissioner,  N.  C.  Utilities  Commission 


The  transportation  of  property  and  people  has  been  a  matter 
of  public  concern  and  of  some  degree  of  governmental  regu- 
lation for  centuries.  Law-making  bodies  were  trying  to  find 
ways  and  means  of  assuring  the  public  of  adequate  transpor- 
tation long  before  the  coming  of  airplanes,  motor  vehicles,  or 
railroads.  Regulation  of  transportation  was  the  subject  of 
legislation  in  England  long  before  we  became  a  nation.  It 
was  a  matter  of  such  public  concern  as  to  require  legislation 
and  regulation  in  the  days  of  the  Roman  Empire,  and  it  is  a 
matter  of  deepest  public  concern  now  in  this  country  and  in 
every  country.  Without  it  great  cities  could  never  have  been 
built  in  any  age,  and  without  an  adequate  system  of  trans- 
portation they  certainly  could  not  survive  under  conditions 
existing  today.  Factories  could  not  produce  goods;  markets 
could  not  be  maintained;  and  commerce  and  trade  as  we  know 
it  now  could  not  exist.  Without  an  adequate  working  system 
of  transportation  we  would  soon  be  in  want  and  in  distress. 

Through  preference  and  discrimination  transportation  has 
the  power  to  make  or  destroy  individuals  and  communities. 
It  has  made  millionaires  and  it  has  made  paupers.  It  has 
made  cities  grow  and  prosper,  and  has  consigned  them  to 
decay.  It  has  the  power  to  fix  the  status  of  one  area  of  the 
nation  as  a  producer  of  raw  materials  and  to  make  cities  in 
other  areas  great  manufacturing  centers.  By  a  difference  in 
service  and  in  rates  all  these  things  have  been  done. 

The  public  cannot  exercise  its  choice  in  selecting  its  trans- 
portation service  as  it  may  do  in  selecting  its  lawyer,  its  doc- 
tor, or  its  merchant.  If  the  merchant  on  the  corner  does  not 
conduct  his  business  as  you  think  he  should,  you  may  refuse 
to  trade  with  him.  If  his  services  are  not  satisfactory,  or  his 
prices  are  too  high,  you  may  walk  across  the  street  and  trade 
with  another.  But,  if  you  want  to  ride  a  train  to  a  certain 
point,  or  ship  goods  to  a  certain  point,  your  public  transporta- 
tion service  is  limited.  Perhaps  only  one  railroad  or  one  motor 
carrier  service  is  available.  Schedules  are  fixed,  charges  are 
fixed,  and  your  only  choice  is  to  take  the  service  as  offered  or 
provide  your  own  means  of  transportation. 

Because  of  the  vast  potentialities  of  transportation,  its  effect 
upon  individuals  and  communities,  and  its  power  to  make  or 
destroy  other  business  enterprises,  it  has  been  classed  as  a 
business  "affected  with  the  public  interest"  and  has  been 
placed  under  some  governmental  supervision  and  control.  Pub- 
lic carriers  operate  under  franchise  rights  which  give  them 
certain  privileges  not  given  to  the  public  in  general.     They 


N.  C.  UTILITIES  COMMISSION 

The  five  members  of  the  N.  C.  Utilities  Commission,  regula- 
tors of  utilities,  including  public  transportation,  are:  Stanley 
Winborne,  chairman;  Fred  C.  Hunter,  Edward  H.  McMahan, 
Harry  T.  Wescott  and  Sam  O.  Worthington.  John  Hill  Paylor, 
Assistant  Attorney  General,  is  assigned  to  the  Commission, 
and  Mrs.  Mary  Laurens  Richardson  is  chief  clerk. 

Other  key  officials  are  Dorothy  Austell,  budget  and  personnel 
officer;  Vern  W.  Chase,  telephone  engineer;  Virl  L.  Choate, 
director  of  accounts;  M.  Broadus  Glover,  director,  Motor 
Freight  Transportation;  Eugene  A.  Hughes,  Jr.,  director,  Motor 
Passenger  Transportation;  LeRoy  M.  Keever,  electrical  engi- 
neer; C.  H.  Noah,  director,  Traffic;  Edgar  Womble,  consultant, 
Water,  Gas  and  Telegraph  Service. 


have  the  right  of  eminent  domain  and  to  some  extent  are  pro- 
tected from  competition  by  other  carriers  seeking  to  enter  the 
field. 

A  merchant,  a  farmer,  or  a  manufacturer  will  not  be  heard 
to  complain  about  competition,  but  rail  carriers  and  motor 
carriers  have  a  legal  basis  for  objecting  to  competition.  They 
have  a  legal  right  to  require  others  seeking  to  enter  the  trans- 
portation field  to  show  that  a  public  demand  and  need  exists 
for  the  proposed  service  in  addition  to  like  services  presently 
being  rendered.  An  ordinary  private  enterprise  would  have 
no  standing  in  any  court  on  a  plea  that  another  like  business  is 
not  needed  in  the  community  and  would  be  injurious  to  existing 
business  of  the  same  kind,  but  a  common  carrier  will  be  heard 
on  such  a  plea  and  his  business  protected  from  destructive 
competition. 

These  special  privileges  carry  with  them  corresponding  obli- 
gations and  duties  to  the  public.  Railroads  and  motor  car- 
riers that  operate  under  franchise  rights  must  continue  to 
operate.  They  are  not  at  liberty  to  discontinue  business  and 
wait  for  better  times,  and  they  are  not  at  liberty  to  choose 
their  patrons.  They  are  required  to  provide  reasonably  ade- 
quate transportation  service  at  reasonable  rates  for  all  who 
come,  and  they  are  required  to  serve  all  alike  without  favor, 
preference,  or  discrimination.  Their  rates  and  charges  must 
be  approved  before  they  are  placed  into  effect,  and  these  rates 
and  charges  cannot  be  increased  nor  their  services  curtailed 
without  the  consent  of  the  governmental  agency  by  which  they 


PAGE  84 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


are  regulated  and  controlled. 

Transportation  has  been  described  as  the  blood  streams  of 
the  nation.  Those  who  enter  this  field  as  common  carriers  are 
clothed  with  a  part  of  the  sovereign  power  of  the  State,  in 
order  that  these  blood  streams  may  continue  to  flow.  They  are 
entrusted  with  the  duty  of  moving  the  products  of  the  soil,  of 
the  mines,  and  of  the  factories,  and  if  they  fail  in  this  duty 
the  battles  on  all  the  fronts  will  have  been  lost. 

The  development  of  transportation  is  one  of  the  very  inter- 
esting chapters  in  the  history  of  the  progress  of  mankind.  It 
is  interesting  to  us  because  it  is  predominantly  one  of  Amer- 
ica's contributions  to  the  world.  Within  about  one  hundred 
years  America  has  developed  transportation  from  where  it  was 
when  the  Pyramids  were  built  to  where  it  is  today.  Through 
all  the  centuries,  from  Jehu  to  Paul  Revere,  man  never  trav- 
eled over  the  earth  any  faster  than  a  horse  can  run.  Railroads 
are  only  a  little  more  than  a  hundred  years  old,  and  they  have 
developed  to  their  greatest  efficiency  in  this  country  and 
within  the  memory  of  people  now  living.  Trains  are  now  being 
operated  approximately  900,000,000  miles  per  year  in  this 
country;  carrying  about  600,000,000  passengers  and  about  3,000,- 
000,000  tons  of  freight. 

The  gross  revenue  of  the  railroads  of  the  United  States  from 
freight  traffic  in  1950,  the  latest  complete  figures  available, 
was  $7,933,764,000.  If  North  Carolina  paid  freight  bills  in  the 
ratio  of  its  population  to  the  population  of  the  United  States, 
it  paid  $213,814,000  in  1950  for  railroad  freight  service.  During 
the  same  year  the  citizens  of  this  State  paid  $91,476,700  for 
electric  power  and  light  service  and  $43,540,300  for  telephone 
service.  Freight  transportation  charges  begin  with  the  trans- 
portation of  the  raw  products  of  the  fields,  the  forests,  and 
the  mines,  and  include  every  movement  from  the  producer  and 
manufacturer  to  the  consumer. 

A  freight  charge  is  included  in  every  electric  light  bill  and 
in  every  telephone  bill,  and  in  the  price  of  every  box  of  matches 
and  in  the  price  of  every  tube  of  dental  cream.  Every  business 
and  every  individual  make  a  contribution  to  the  payment  of 
railroad  freight  charges.  That  contribution  in  1950  amounted 
to  $52.63  for  every  man,  woman,  and  child  in  North  Carolina. 
To  this  we  may  add  that  approximately  54,000,000  motor  vehi- 
cles are  now  in  use  in  the  United  States,  and  they  are  operating 
more  than  a  billion  miles  over  the  streets  and  highways  of  this 
country  every  day.  Of  this  total,  more  than  1,300,000  motor 
vehicles  are  now  licensed  in  North  Carolina  and  they  operate 
approximately  30,000,000  miles  in  this  State  every  day. 

The  airplane  adds  yet  another  chapter  to  America's  con- 
tribution to  transportation.  Since  the  airplane  made  its  first 
flight  in  North  Carolina  fifty  years  ago,  travel  by  air  has  be- 
come commonplace  and  at  an  increasing  speed  that  approaches 
the  speed  of  sound.  The  railroad,  the  motor  vehicle,  and  the 
airplane  are  all  largely  American  contributions  to  transporta- 
tion.    They  are  the  products  of  the  inventive  genius  and  or- 


ganization of  the  American  people  and  have  made  this  country 
the  wonder  of  wonderlands  and  the  envied  people  of  the  earth. 

America  has  made  another  significant  contribution  to  trans- 
portation in  the  field  of  regulation.  Regulation  of  transporta- 
tion by  a  commission  created  by  statute  for  this  purpose  had 
its  inception  in  this  country,  and  it  is  peculiarly  an  American 
system  of  regulating  carrier  and  other  public  service  agencies. 
North  Carolina  is  one  of  the  pioneers  in  providing  for  regula- 
tion of  carriers  of  property  and  passengers  by  a  commission. 

Sixty-two  years  ago  the  North  Carolina  Farmers  Alliance 
gained  control  of  the  General  Assembly  in  this  State  to  the 
extent  that  the  General  Assembly  of  1891  is  known  to  this  day 
as  the  "Farmers  Legislature."  It  created  the  Board  of  Railroad 
Commisisoners  now  designated  as  the  North  Carolina  Utilities 
Commission,  and  gave  it  full  power  and  authority  (1)  to  pre- 
scribe just  and  reasonable  rates  and  charges  to  be  observed  by 
all  railroads  operating  in  this  State,  ( 2 )  to  make  rules  and 
regulations  necessary  to  prevent  injurious  discrimination  in 
the  transportation  of  freight  nad  passengers,  and  (3)  to  make 
rules  and  regulations  to  "prevent  the  giving,  paying,  or  receiv-j 
ing  of  any  rebate  or  bonus,  directly  or  indirectly,  and  from] 
misleading  or  deceiving  the  public  in  any  manner  as  to  the 
real  rates  charged  for  freight  and  passengers." 

This  "Farmers  Legislature"  of  1891  also  provided  by  a  later 
Act  at  the  same  session  "that  the  railroad  commissioners 
elected  at  this  session  of  the  General  Assembly  and  (their) 
successors  in  office  be  and  they  are  hereby  created  and  consti- 
tuted a  court  of  record  inferior  to  the  Supreme  Court  .  .  .  and, 
as  such,  shall  have  all  the  powers  and  jurisdiction  of  the  court 
of  general  jurisdiction  as  to  all  subjects  embraced  in  the  Act 
creating  such  railroad  commission  heretofore  passed."  Under 
this  Act  and  subsequent  acts  of  the  Legislature,  the  North 
Carolina  Utilities  Commission  now  has  under  its  jurisdiction,1 
and  subject  to  its  regulations  with  respect  to  service  and  rates, 
34  railroads  which  operate  a  total  of  4,554  miles  within  the: 
State,  454  motor  carriers  of  property,  and  139  motor  carriers 
of  passengers. 

This  commission  system  of  regulation  has  been  established 
in  every  State  in  the  United  States  and  is  a  system  of  regu- 
lation of  carriers  and  public  utilities  that  has  no  parallel  in 
any  other  country.  Under  this  system  billions  have  been  in- 
vested in  transportation  facilities,  and  we  have  the  finest 
service  and  the  soundest  investment  in  freight  transportation 
to  be  found  anywhere  in  the  world.  While  this  great  success 
story  in  the  development  of  transportation  was  being  written 
in  North  Carolina  and  throughout  the  nation,  the  railroads 
have  been  nationalized  or  taken  over  by  the  government  in 
nearly  every  other  country  in  the  world.  As  vital  to  the  pub- 
lic as  transportation  is,  we  still  hold  to  the  idea  in  this 
country  that  transportation  under  our  system  of  regulation 
provides  better  service  to  more  people  than  is  possible  under 
any  system  of  government  ownership. 


Motor  Carriers  Develop  Rapidly  Into  Vital  State  Industry 

By  Jeff  B.  Wilson,  AT.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Association 


The  North  Carolina  trucking 
industry  has  banished  the  "eco- 
nomic isolation"  of  many  smaller 
places.  In  fact  more  than  1800 
Tar  Heel  cities,  towns  and  com- 
munities depend  entirely  on 
truck  transportation  for  every- 
thing they  eat,  wear  and  use. 

North  Carolina  is  a  state  of 
small  farms  and  small  cities  and 
towns.  It  ranks  10th  in  the 
United  States  in  population,  but 
has  only  one  city  of  more  than  100,000  population- 
Charlotte.  Yet  the  Tar  Heel  factories  are  within 
over-night  truck  delivery  distance  of  great  Eastern 
and  Southern  markets.  And,  built  arond  this  flexi- 
ble door-to-door  truck  service,  Charlotte  itself  has 
become  a  great  metropolis,  supplying  the  many  needs 
of  the  South. 

Immediately  following  World  War  I,  with  the  ad- 


New  officers  of  N.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Association,  Inc.,  1.  to  r., 
./.  T.  Outlaw,  executive  vice-president,  Raleigh;  J.  K.  Glenn, 
second  vice-president,  Winston-Salem ;  W.  W.  Miller,  Jr.,  first 
vice-president,  Charlotte;  C.  Grier  Beam,  president,  Cherryville, 
being  congratulated  by  M.  Webster  Henry,  Rocky  Mount,  re- 
tiring president. 

vent  of  more  and  better  highways,  a  type  of  trans- 
portation was  born  which  could  and  did  give  to  the 
American  public  a  quicker  and  better  freight  service 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  85 


is  well  as  passenger  service  at  less  cost ;  this  was 
mown  as  the  truck  and  bus  industry.  North  Carolina 
:ame  in  very  definitely  for  its  share  of  the  develop- 
nent  of  this  new  industry  to  its  fullest  extent. 

The  first  World  War,  with  all  its  tragedy  and 
leartaches,  gave  to  this  nation  the  internal  combus- 
;ion  engine  and  rubber  tires.  Automobiles,  though 
;carce  to  a  great  degree  prior  to  the  War,  became  a 
node  of  transportation  for  most  of  the  American 
public. 

Immediately  on  its  heels,  through  further  use  of 
:he  internal  combustion  engine  and  rubber  tires,  was 
30m  the  trucking  industry.  Its  first  development 
iame  through  the  changing  from  the  horse  and  wag- 
>n  days  to  small  capacity  motor  trucks,  confined  vir- 
;ually  to  intra-city  use.  In  the  early  20's  the  rubber 
ndustry  developed  pneumatic  tires  that  could  carry 
i  fairly  heavy  load  with  no  damage  to  the  highways, 
md  with  this  development,  through  the  manufacture 
)f  trucks,  came  an  engine  capable  of  maintaining  a 
.airly  high  speed — approximately  thirty  miles  per 
lour — and  the  Hotchkiss  Drive  to  replace  the  old 
nodel  chain  drive.  These  two  developments  in  the 
:ire  and  motor  industries  opened  up  new  avenues 
for  the  movement  of  freight  over  great  distances. 
With  this  change  our  present  Motor  Carrier  indus- 
;ry  first  came  into  its  own. 

Every  development  in  this  country  that  has  given 
;o  the  public  a  better  service  for  less  money  has  had 
ts  ups  and  downs  and  the  Motor  Transportation 
industry  is  no  exception  to  this  rule. 

Starting  with  a  very  humble  beginning  it  had  ob- 
stacle after  obstacle  to  surmount.  In  the  late  20's 
motor  truck  people  banded  together  into  an  associa- 
;ion  for  their  own  interests.  This  Association  was 
formed  in  1928  with  H.  D.  (Buddy)  Horton,  Char- 
otte,  as  its  first  president. 

About  1926,  the  textile  industry  in  our  state  was 

NEW  OFFICERS  AND  DIRECTORS  OF 
N.  C.  MOTOR  CARRIERS  ASSOCIATION 

C.  Grier  Beam,  president,  Carolina  Freight  Carriers  Corp., 
Dherryville,  was  elected  president  of  the  North  Carolina  Motor 
Harriers  Association,  Inc.,  at  the  Association's  22nd  annual 
convention  at  the  Carolina  Hotel,  Pinehurst,  October  6.  He 
succeeds  M.  Webster  Henry  who  is  secretary  and  treasurer  of 
3.  S.  Henry  Transfer,  Inc.,  Rocky  Mount.  Edwin  Gill,  State 
Treasurer,  installed  the  new  officers.  About  400  delegates  at- 
tended. 

Other  officers  include  W.  W.  Miller,  Jr.,  president,  Miller 
Motor  Express,  Inc.,  Charlotte,  first  vice-president;  J.  K.  Glenn, 
Quality  Oil  Transport,  Winston-Salem,  second  vice-president; 
I.  T.  Outlaw,  Raleigh,  executive  vice-president,  and  John  M. 
.\kers,  executive  vice-president  of  Akers  Motor  Lines,  Inc., 
Grastonia,  State  vice-president  of  the  American  Trucking  Asso- 
ciation; H.  L.  Netly,  chairman,  accounting  council;  E.  W. 
Fredrickson,  chairman,  council  safety  supervisors;  R.  H.  Booe, 
Ir.,  chairman,  customer  relation  council,  all  of  Charlotte. 

Directors  elected  for  the  ensuing  year  include  W.  C.  Honey- 
Jutt,  Black  Mountain;  John  M.  Akers  and  W.  W.  Akers,  Jr., 
Grastonia;  J.  A.  Barnwell,  Burlington;  R.  L.  Brinson,  Jr.,  David 
Piske  and  W.  D.  Lewis,  High  Point;  R.  L.  Burns,  Sanford; 
A  D.  Burton,  Albemarle;  C.  S.  Burton,  Reidsville;  Harwood 
Cochrane,  Richmond,  Va.;  G.  W.  Dehart,  Hickory;  B.  J.  Forbes 
and  D.  J.  Thurston,  Jr.,  Wilson;  George  H.  Hall,  III,  and  W.  E. 
Sisson,  Wilmington;  M.  W.  Henry,  Rocky  Mount;  J.  W.  Jones, 
Fairmont;  E.  W.  McLeod,  Jr.,  Henderson;  G.  D.  Thompson. 
Greensboro;  J.  F.  Boone,  A.  E.  Clontz,  H.  R.  Dowd,  Pat  Haral- 
son, L.  Worth  Harris,  H.  D.  Horton,  P.  H.  Johansen,  J.  D. 
Kluttz,  Leo  J.  Molloy,  Emory  Morris,  W.  E.  Wilkinson,  Tom 
Peacock  and  Fred  Mayer,  all  of  Charlotte;  William  R.  Davis, 
E.  G.  Lackey,  S.  H.  Mitchell,  J.  P.  McLean,  M.  P.  McLean,  R.  Y. 
Sharpe  and  George  Lentz,  all  of  Winston-Salem. 


N.  C.  WINS  TROPHY  FOURTH  TIME 

Around  100  officials  and  members  of  the  N.  C.  Motor  Car- 
riers A  scciaaon,   Inc.,  and  prominent  guests  gathered  for  a 
dinner  in  the  Robert  E.  Lee  Hotel  in  Winston-Salem  on  Thurs- 
,,  day  evening,   November  19,  for  the  presenta- 

tion to  this  organization  of  the  National  Truck- 
ing Safety  Trophy  for  the  fourth  time  since 
it  was  inaugurated  in  1946. 

The  first  trophy  was  to  be  awarded  perma- 
nently to  the  State  Association  winning  it  for 
the  third  time.  North  Cai-olina  won  that  tro- 
phy three  different  years  and  has  it  in  perma- 
nent possession.  This  year,  the  eighth  year  of 
presentation,  North  Carolina  won  the  new 
trophy  for  the  first  year,  starting  on  the  road 
to  permanent  possession. 

The  presentation  was  made  by  James  F. 
Pinkney,  general  counsel,  American  Trucking 
Association,  Inc.,  Washington,  D.  C,  and  the 
award  was  received  by  C.  Grier  Beam,  Cherry- 
ville,  president  of  the  North  Carolina  group, 
who  presided  as  toastmaster.  Mr.  Pinkney 
was  introduced  by  James  K.  McLean,  Winston- 
Scheidt,  Commissioner  of  Department  of  Motor 
Vehicles,  Raleigh,  spoke  on  the  State  Safety  Program,  com- 
mending the  Motor  Carriers  Association  for  the  splendid  record 
achieved.  He  was  presented  by  M.  Webster  Henry,  Rocky 
Mount,  immediate  past  president,  NCMCA. 


baiem. 


fast  coming  into  its  own,  as  well  as  tobacco  produc- 
tion and  cigarette  manufacture.  To  these  industries, 
the  Motor  Transportation  industry  began  to  give  out- 
lets to  the  eastern  markets  for  the  raw  materials  pro- 
duced and  grown  in  North  Carolina,  such  as  they  had 
never  had  before.  Prior  to  this  time,  East-West 
transportation  in  North  Carolina  was  a  matter  of 
five  to  ten  days'  duration. 

The  amount  of  money,  being  required  by  the  man- 
ufacturers and  the  producers  to  carry  inventories 
sufficient  to  justify  a  five  to  ten  day  transportation 
loss,  was  so  great  that  during  the  early  30's,  when 
our  country  was  going  through  an  economic  chaos, 
it  was  necessary  that  some  type  of  transportation 
be  afforded  them  to  cut  down  this  tremendous  outlay 
of  money. 

The  trucking  industry  proved  its  worth  in  its  store- 
door  delivery  and  overnight  transportation  to  almost 
any  point  in  the  state.  Great  industries,  such  as 
chain  groceries,  chain  cotton  mill  manufacturers, 
lumber  and  tobacco  manufacturers,  immediately  saw 
the  possibilities  in  the  trucking  industry  and  gobbled 
up  their  services.  The  little  businesses  took  on  new 
life,  and  life  was  made  more  modern  for  each  indi- 
vidual. It  could  almost  be  said  that  the  Motor  Car- 
rier industry  was  cradled  in  the  lap  of  the  depression 
and  its  worth  was  proved  during  a  period  of  eco- 
nomic chaos. 

It  grew  further  and  faster  from  1930  to  1935, 
probably,  than  any  other  industry  in  America.  In 
fact  the  growth  was  sufficiently  great  that  in  1935 
the  industry  saw  that  its  services  could  be  better 
given  to  the  public  through  the  supervision  of  the 
Federal  Government  and  in  1935  the  Motor  Carrier 
Act  of  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  became 
a  reality. 

This  Act,  which  was  patterned  after  its  predeces- 
so,  the  Rail  Act,  has  served  to  police  the  industry  in 
the  same  way.  Certificates  were  issued  on  the  basis  of 
convenience  and  necessity  and  allowed  certain  terri- 
tories and  certain  commodities  to  be  handled  by  the 
carrier  as  stipulated  in  his  certificate.  The  first  of 
these  certificates  was  issued  to  Mr.  John  L.  Wilker- 
son  of  Carolina  Transfer  and  Storage  Co.,  Charlotte, 


PAGE  86 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


and  from  this  beginning,  has  spread  to  a  net-work 
of  inter-  and  intra-state  operations  covering  virtually 
every  nook  and  corner  of  the  state. 

With  the  development  of  the  Motor  Carrier  indus- 
try, the  North  Carolina  highway  fund  tax  collections 
mounted.  With  each  four  to  ten  miles  traveled  by 
each  vehicle,  six  cents  tax  on  another  gallon  of  gaso- 
line went  into  the  State  Treasury.  License  fees  for 
motor  carriers  were  increased.  A  six  per  cent  gross 
receipts  tax  on  revenue  earned  by  common  carriers 
soon  followed.  In  1935  the  commercial  motor  vehi- 
cle carriers  paid  license  and  gross  receipts  tax  of 
$2,156,828.00,  exclusive  of  gasoline  tax.  For  the 
year  1948,  the  commercial  vehicles'  license  and  gross 
receipts  tax  had  increased  to  $9,726,891.00,  still  ex- 
clusive of  gasoline  tax. 

Three  special  taxes  paid  by  the  motor  carrier  in- 
dustry for  the  year  1948,  including  gasoline  tax  (bas- 
ed on  a  low  estimate) ,  license  tax  and  gross  receipts 
tax  was  $21,820,284.00.  This  amount  was  enough  to 
pay  for  all  maintenance  of  state  primary  highways 
for  1948  (not  including  country  roads)  and  in  addi- 
tion enough  to  pay  for  more  than  one-half  of  new 
road  construction  on  state  highways  for  the  year, 
notwithstanding  the  fact  that  hundreds  of  miles  are 
restricted  and  prohibited  from  use  by  the  heavier 
motor  vehicles.  The  counties  were  similarly  bene- 
fitted. An  investigation  of  taxes  paid  to  the  counties 
by  the  railroads  and  by  the  owners  of  commercial 
vehicles  indicate  that  the  amounts  are  comparable. 

During  the  entire  year  of  1952,  North  Carolina's 
227,669  trucks  were  owned  by  businessmen  of  all 
kinds.  Farmers  owned  more  than  19,782  of  them. 
For-hire  operators,  ranging  from  the  men  who  ope- 
rate just  one  or  two  small  trucks  in  local  general- 
delivery  service  to  the  larger  fleets  operating  in  inter- 
state commerce,  owned  13,438  of  them.  The  remain- 
ing 194,549  were  operated  by  dairies,  meat  packers, 
breweries,  service  industries  such  as  telephone  and 
electric  light  companies,  manufacturers  and  others 
in  businesses  where  the  operation  of  trucks  is  inci- 
dental to  their  principal  business.  During  the  first 
six  months  of  1953,  the  farm  truck  registration  of 
19,440  units  nearly  equalled  the  total  twelve  months 
1952  figure  of  19,782.  There  were  1,951  common 
carrier  passenger  busses  registered  during  1952,  in- 
cluding 204  other  for-hire  busses. 

When  World  War  II  began,  the  industry  was  just 

"DRIVER  OF  THE  YEAR" 

Cullen  H.  Newsom,  Winston-Salem,  tractor  and  semi-trailer 
driver  for  McLean  Trucking  Co.  between  Winston-Salem  and 
Boston,  was  named  the  "Driver  of  the  Year"  last  July  for  his 
Heroism  in  saving  the  life  of  a  young  woman  motorist. 

The  incident  happened  December  21,  1952,  along  the  Shirley 
Highway  near  Alexandria,  Va.  Mrs.  Jacqueline  Black,  30,  of 
Falls  Church,  Va.,  was  thrown  some  25  feet  into  a  stream 
after  her  car  plunged  down  a  60-foot  embankment.  Newsom, 
first  to  arrive,  found  her  face  down  in  the  water  and  uncon- 
scious. He  rescued  her  and  administered  artificial  respira- 
tion for  20  minutes  until  she  was  breathing  freely  again.  He 
also  took  control  of  the  highway  situation  which  developed  and 
handled  it  until  the  State  Police  arrived.  He  was  highly 
commended  for  his  alert  and  decisive  action  in  a  time  of  crisis. 

One  month  later,  January  25,  1953,  Newsome  was  driving  on 
U.  S.  No.  1,  near  Fredericksburg,  Va.,  when  a  woman  waved 
him  down.  He  discovered  nearby  a  smoking  wrecked  car  and 
used  his  truck  fire  extinguisher  to  put  out  the  fire.  He  and 
arriving  State  Highway  Patrolmen  pried  open  the  car  door 
and  released  two  people  trapped  in  the  smoking  car.  He  cov- 
ered two  other  accident  victims  with  blankets  pending  the 
arrival  of  an  ambulance.  He  was  highly  commended  for  his 
action  in  this  emergency  also. 


REID  WINS  NATIONAL  HONORS 

Perry  H.  Reid,  33,  Winston-Salem,  Route  3,  truck  driver  for 
Pilot  Freight  Carriers,  Winston-Salem,  won  for  the  second  time 
the  national  straight  truck  driver  championship  in  the  Na- 
tional Roadeo,  conducted  by  the  American  Trucking  Associa- 
tion in  St.  Paul,  Minn.,  last  October.  Reid  scored  386  out  of 
a  possible  400  points,  improving  his  1952  title  record  by  18 
points.  He  was  pitted  against  the  best  drivers  in  the  nation, 
the  test  including  written  examinations  and  driving  over  an 
obstacle  course.  The  national  trophy  was  presented  Reid  by 
John  V.  Lawrence,  managing  director  of  the  American  Truck- 
ing Association.  Reid  operates  daily  between  Winston-Salem 
and  Statesville  and  has  driven  about  200,000  accident-free 
miles  in  three  and  one-half  years. 

National  Roadeo  finalists  included  four  place  winner,  straight 
truck  champion  Charles  M.  Collins,  High  Point,  driver  for 
Johnson  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Charlotte;  Malvern  H.  Morgan, 
Jr.,  Hendersonville,  Youngblood  Truck  Lines,  Inc.,  Fletcher, 
the  State's  champion  in  the  tandem  axle  class,  was  in  the 
semi-finals  but  missed  the  championship  in  the  final  contest. 
Aivin  S.  Massey,  Central  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Charlotte,  is  the 
champion  in  the  single  axle  semi-trailer  class,  was  in  the 
semi-finals  but  was  lost  out  in  the  finals. 


about  ready  to  enter  a  new  era  of  regulated  stability 
and  expansion,  but  the  war  temporarily  retarded  this 
development.  It  was  not  until  1947  that  the  State 
Legislature  passed  the  Truck  Act  regulating  for-hire 
trucks  in  North  Carolina. 

The  development  of  fleets  of  trucks  and  trailers  in 
North  Carolina  has  enabled  us,  as  a  State,  to  com- 
pete in  markets  that  prior  to  the  advent  of  the  in- 
dustry were  completely  shut  off.  The  farmers  in 
North  Carolina  today  can  have  their  products  on  the 
New  York  market  the  second  morning.  Our  straw- 
berry, lettuce,  and  peach  industries  have  been  able 
to  compete  with  those  of  any  other  part  of  the  coun- 
try through  means  of  the  motor  trucks.  Motor  fuel 
of  every  description  can  be  put  into  every  nook  and 
corner  of  every  county  in  this  state  by  motor  truck. 
The  development  has  been  to  such  a  great  extent, 
that  we  have  more  than  1,800  communities  within 
our  state  that  are  without  any  other  type  of  trans- 
portation than  that  furnished  by  the  motor  vehicle. 

This  vigorous  growth  didn't  just  happen.  It  is 
based  on  the  performance  of  motor  transports,  their 
economy,  dependability,  convenience  and  safety. 
Without  demand  for  truck  service  there  would  have 
been  no  growth.  Everything  that  is  vital  to  every- 
day life — every  piece  of  clothing,  every  bit  of  food, 
every  article  used  in  home  and  industry;  in  fact  99 
percent  of  all  commodities  either  eaten,  worn  or  used 
in  this  country  are  moved  and  handled  by  motor 
truck  sometime  between  the  time  they  are  raw  ma- 
terials and  become  finished  products.  Possibly  no 
other  industry  is  as  vital  to  the  welfare  of  the  people 
of  North  Carolina  as  is  the  Motor  Trucking  Industry. 
The  claim :  "If  You've  Got  It  a  Truck  Brought  It". 


"SMOKY  JOE" — FISHERMAN 

They  tell  in  on  Joel  W.  Wright,  familiarly  known  as  "Uncle 
Joe"  and  "Smoky  Joe",  president  of  Smoky  Mountain  Stages, 
Asheville,  and  vice-president  of  Queen  City  Coach  Co.,  Char- 
lotte: 

"Uncle  Joe"  had  done  a  bit  of  bragging  about  fishing.  He  and 
some  of  his  friends  had  been  fishing  in  streams  in  Smoky 
Mountain  Park  with  little  success.  Disgruntled,  they  were 
eating  lunch,  part  of  which  was  a  jar  of  honey.  As  the  breezes 
wafted  the  odor  of  the  honey  into  surrounding  woods,  an 
affable  black  bear  lumbered  out  and  with  Mr.  Wright's  help 
lapped  up  the  honey  to  the  last  drop  and  waddled  away.  Some 
time  later  the  bear  came  back  with  two  trout  in  his  mouth. 
Ceremoniously,  he  deposited  the  trout  at  Mr.  Wright's  side, 
licked  his  chops  and  ambled  off  again  into  the  forest. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  87 


McLean  Becomes  Largest  Trucking  Firm  in  Southeast  States 

By  George  E.  Spaulding,  Sales  Promotion  Manager,  McLean  Trucking  Co.,  Winston-Salem 

McLean  Trucking  Co.,  617  Waughtown  Street, 
Winston-Salem,  founded  in  Red  Springs  in  1934  by 
jMalcolm  P.  McLean,  has  developed  into  one  of  the  top 
'ten  in  the  American  Trucking  Industry.  McLean  is 
the  largest  motor  freight  common  carrier  with  head- 
quarters in  the  South,  the  second  largest  on  the  East- 
ern Seaboard  and  the  ninth  largest  in  the  entire 
United  States.  Typical  of  the  trucking  industry  as 
a  whole,  McLean,  in  its  19  years  of  operation,  has 
expanded  to  its  present  size  of  more  than  2,100  em- 
ployees and  37  terminals  in  11  states  from  Atlanta 
to  Boston. 

McLean  terminals  are  located  in  the  following 
states  and  cities :  Connecticut :  Bridgeport  and  Nor- 
wich; Georgia:  Atlanta  and  Augusta;  Maryland: 
Baltimore;  Massachusetts:  Boston,  Springfield  and 
Worcester ;  New  Jersey :  Hawthorne,  Jersey  City  and 
New  Brunswick;  New  York:  Albany,  Brooklyn  and 
New  York  City ;  North  Carolina :  Asheville,  Burling- 
ton, Charlotte,  Durham,  Fayetteville,  Greensboro, 
Hickory,  Kinston,  Rocky  Mount,  Salisbury,  Shelby 
and  Winston-Salem;  Pennsylvania:  Philadelphia; 
Rhode  Island:  Providence;  South  Carolina:  Ander- 
son, Charleston,  Columbia,  Greenville,  Hartsville  and 
Spartanburg;  Virginia:  Danville,  Lynchburg  and 
Richmond. 

In  1953  new  terminals  were  opened  in  Kinston, 
N.  C. ;  in  the  Boroughs  of  Brooklyn  and  Manhattan  in 
New  York  City;  Albany,  N.  Y. ;  Hawthorne,  N.  J., 
and  Norwich,  Conn.  Better  terminal  facilities  also 
were  obtained  this  year  in  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  and 
Lynchburg,  Va.  In  addition,  the  world's  largest  in- 
dependently owned  motor  freight  terminal  was  open- 
ed by  McLean  in  Winston-Salem  on  August  17,  1953. 

Designed  to  handle  3,000,000  pounds  of  freight 
every  24  hours,  the  new  terminal  was  built  to  expe- 
dite the  movement  of  freight  requiring  reloading  at 
Winston-Salem,  as  well  as  direct  shipments  to  and 
from  this  area. 

Faster  handling  of  cargo  is  possible  in  the  new 
terminal  primarily  because  of  an  ingenious  floor- 
type  dragline  called  the  "towveyor". 

The  "towveyor"  consists  of  an  endless  chain  flush 
with  the  floor,  which  moves  around  the  dock  area. 
Freight  is  loaded  on  four-wheel  carts  and  hooked  to 


Interior  view  of  McLean  "Ton-a- minute"  terminal  in  Winston- 
Salem.   Freight  is  handled  on  carts  hooked  to 
endless  chain  "toioveyor". 


New  McLean  terminal,  650  x  ISO  feet,  world's  largest  independ- 
ently-owned motor  freight  terminal. 

the  moving  dragline.  The  "towveyor"  pulls  these 
carts  around  the  terminal.  When  a  cart  reaches  a 
designated  track  number,  it  is  unhooked  from  the 
line  and  moved  to  a  waiting  trailer,  where  the  freight 
is  loaded  for  point  of  destination. 

Both  empty  and  loaded  trailers  are  moved  to  and 
from  the  new  terminal  tracks  by  radio-equipped 
"switcher"  tractors.  The  docks  will  accommodate 
118  trailers  at  one  time.  Any  combination  of  in- 
bound and  outbound  freight  can  be  handled  simul- 
taneously with  maximum  safety  and  speed. 

For  accurate  control  of  all  shipments,  a  two-tube, 
1200  foot  pneumatic  tube  system — the  first  of  its 
kind  in  a  motor  freight  terminal — transports  freight 
bills,  bills  of  lading,  loading  diagrams  and  weight 
cards  between  the  terminal  office  at  the  western  end 
of  the  structure  and  28  sub-stations  conveniently  lo- 
cated around  the  dock  area. 

The  new  McLean  terminal  is  located  for  quick  ac- 
cess to  four  major  highways  serving  the  area:  U.  S. 
52,  158,  311  and  421.  It  is  situated  on  a  22.1  acre 
site  near  the  McLean  general  office  and  maintenance 
buildings.  Its  over-all  dimensions  are  130  feel  wide 
by  650  feet  long.  It  is  of  reinforced  concrete  and 
steel  construction. 

Dock  area  in  the  new  terminal  is  79,100  square 
feet,  and  the  terminal  office  has  an  area  of  5,400 
square  feet. 

"This  new  structure  embodies  the  most  advanced 
design  and  latest  equipment  available  from  modern 
science  and  industry,"  according  to  M.  P.  McLean, 
president  of  the  firm. 

"We  erected  this  functional  terminal,"  continued 
Mr.  McLean,  "so  that  our  customers  along  the  East- 
ern Seaboard  could  continue  to  receive  the  service  so 
essential  to  modern  distribution  and  marketing  meth- 
ods." 

The  building  design  and  operating  plan  were  con- 
ceived by  Drake,  Startzman,  Sheahan,  and  Barclay, 
Materials  Handling  Consultants  of  New  York,  in 
cooperation  with  the  McLean  engineering  and  ope- 
rating departments.  The  "towveyor"  and  pneumatic 
tube  system  were  designed  and  installed  by  the  Jervis 
B.  Webb  Company  and  the  Grover  Company,  respect- 
ively, both  of  Detroit.  Structural  steel  design  was 
by  Salem  Steel  Company,  Winston-Salem,  and  Frank 
L.  Blum  and  Company  of  Winston-Salem  was  Build- 
ing Contractor. 

Neck  and  neck  with  the  McLean  company-wide 


PAGE  88 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


attitude  of  service  is  the  company-wide  attitude  of 
safety.  Drivers  are  carefully  selected  and  screened. 
Successful  completion  of  the  thorough  course  of  in- 
struction in  the  McLean  Driver  Training  School  is  a 
"must"  for  every  driver,  regardless  of  previous  ex- 
perience. The  company's  Director  of  Safety  won 
the  coveted  national  Dow  Memorial  Award  and  the 
North  Carolina  State  Safety  Award  for  his  achieve- 
ments during  1952  in  the  field  of  motor  transporta- 
tion engineering. 

The  excellent  McLean  record  for  reducing  the  vol- 
ume of  freight  loss  and  damage  has  won  high  na- 
tional honors  for  the  Claims  Department.  In  the 
past  three  years,  McLean  has  won  a  trophy  each  year 
awarded  by  the  Claims  Council  of  the  American 
Trucking  Associations,  Inc.  for  the  greatest  improve- 
ment in  freight  loss  and  damage  prevention.  The 
only  motor  transportation  company  to  be  awarded  a 
trophy  each  year  since  the  contest  was  initiated  in 
1950,  McLean  received  the  first  place  trophy  in  1950 
and  the  third  place  trophy  in  1951  and  again  in  1952. 

A  complete  printing  plant  is  operated  at  McLean 
general  headquarters  in  Winston-Salem.  One  of  the 
largest  of  its  kind  in  the  Trucking  Industry,  it  pro- 
duces more  printed  matter  than  many  commercial 
printers.  Ninety-five  percent  of  the  company's  print- 
ed matter  is  produced  in  this  shop.  Approximately 
35,000,000  impressions  were  made  in  the  past  year, 
and  included  189  basic  forms,  over  100  home  office 
and  inter-departmental  forms,  as  well  as  brochures, 
posters,  booklets,  directories,  and  other  types  of  sales 
promotion  and  advertising  material. 

McLean  Trucking  Company  also  publishes  a  24- 
page  house  organ,  TREK.  This  magazine  is  publish- 
ed monthly,  and  is  sent  to  all  employees  and  a  limited 
number  of  customers. 

Since  February  18,  1952,  McLean  Trucking  Com- 
pany has  been  managing  the  business  and  operations 
of  Carolina  Motor  Express  Lines,  Inc.,  pending  an 
application  with  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commis- 
sion to  reorganize  and  purchase  "CMX".  While 
awaiting  final  authority,  McLean  has  applied  modern 
principles  of  management  to  "CMX",  with  marked 
improvement  in  "CMX"  service  and  reduction  of 
freight  loss  and  claims. 

According  to  the  company's  Annual  Report  for  the 
year  ended  June  30,  1953,  McLean  Trucking  Com- 
pany in  this  fiscal  year  handled  1,126,024  shipments 
weighing  1,262,735,085  pounds.  The  average  weight 
per  shipment  was  1,121  pounds,  and  39,484,957  inter- 
city miles  were  traveled.  The  gross  operating  reve- 
nue of  McLean  in  this  fiscal  year  was  $19,327,640. 
The  revenue  dollar  was  divided  as  follows : 

Dividends  to  stockholders $0,003 

Reinvested  for  expansion 0.014 

Income  taxes __  0.022 

Interest  and  other  deductions 0.047 

Operating  taxes  and  licenses 0.055 

Depreciation  0.080 

Operation  and  Maintenance 0.286 

Wages  and  Salaries 0.493 

Total . $1,000 

More  than  1800  North  Carolina  communities,  in- 
cluding some  counties,  are  served  only  by  trucks,  ac- 
cording to  the  North  Carolina  Motor  Carriers  Asso- 
ciation.   In  North  Carolina  alone,  McLean  Trucking 


McLean  driver  changes  tire  for  woman  driver  on  open  highivay. 

Company  employs  more  than  1500  people  and  the 
payroll  in  this  state  is  almost  $5,500,000. 

Textiles  and  tobacco  products  make  up  a  substan- 
tial part  of  the  Northbound  freight  moved  by  Mc- 
Lean, while  shipments  to  the  South  include  machin- 
ery, food  products,  clothing,  chemicals,  batteries  and 
many  other  items. 

Following  are  the  principal  officers  and  executives 
of  McLean  Trucking  Co. :  M.  P.  McLean,  president ; 
J.  K.  McLean,  executive  vice-president ;  Clara  L.  Mc- 
Lean, secretary;  W.  K.  Davis,  treasurer;  David  G. 
Macdonald,  general  counsel  and  assistant  secretary ; 
L.  F.  Owen,  assistant  to  the  president;  M.  C.  Benton, 
Jr.,  vice-president  and  comptroller;  Paul  P.  Davis, 
vice-president,  Sales;  B.  L.  Frazier,  vice-president, 
Traffic;  Judson  McCarter,  vice-president,  National 
Accounts ;  L.  T.  Bretherton,  vice-president,  Eastern 
Division ;  G.  B.  Kempton,  vice-president,  Real  Prop- 
erties; Claude  H.  Wells,  Jr.,  vice-president,  Opera- 
tions ;  G.  Carlton  Alexander,  director  of  safety ;  Max 
Cooke,  freight  claim  agent ;  H.  D.  Ward,  purchasing- 
agent;  J.  D.  Watts,  general  traffic  manager;  L.  G. 
Gordon,  traffic  manager;  C.  G.  Egger,  director  of 
maintenance ;  H.  O.  Morris,  Southern  sales  manager ; 
E.  J.  McCabe,  Eastern  sales  manager;  E.  F.  Martin, 
sales  manager,  Carolina  Motor  Express  Lines,  Inc., 
and  George  E.  Spaulding,  sales  promotion  manager. 

The  McLean  family  of  employees  is  a  hard-hitting, 
progressive  group  with  an  excellent  spirit  of  team- 
work and  an  intentness  of  purpose  unique  in  an  or- 
ganization of  its  size.  Some  of  the  factors  that  lead 
to  such  loyalty  are  the  company's  hospitalization  and 
life  insurance  plans,  satisfactory  compensation  plus 
profit-sharing  and  bonus  incentives,  pleasant  work- 
ing conditions  and  good  hours.  Many  McLean  em- 
ployees hold  important  positions  in  State  and  Na- 
tional trucking  organizations,  as  well  as  in  many 
civic  associations  and  clubs. 

McLean  Trucking  Co.,  like  the  American  Trucking 
Industry,  has  indeed  come  of  age.  To  more  and  more 
value-wise  shippers,  "McLean"  and  "Service"  have 
become  synonymous.  This  is  because  McLean  offers 
industry  motor  freight  transportation  service  geared 
to  the  needs  of  modern  marketing  and  distributing 
methods. 


The  first  public  meeting  to  promote  railroads  in  North  Caro- 
lina is  said  to  have  been  held  August  1,  1828,  at  the  home  of 
William  Albright,  which  stood  four  miles  southeast  from  a 
point  on  U.  S.  Route  62  in  Alamance  County,  about  four  miles 
northeast  of  Liberty. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  89 


Akers  Motor  Lines  Becomes  State's  Second  Largest  Carrier 


Akers  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  New  Hope  Road,  Gas- 
tonia,  organized  in  the  midst  of  the  depression  and 
without  funds  to  buy  the  trucks  it  operated,  has  de- 
veloped into  an  organization  which  takes  second  place 
among  the  trucking  firms  in  North  Carolina,  20th 
largest  in  the  United  States  and  has  reached  approx- 
imately $13,000,000  a  year  in  gross  receipts. 

The  firm  was  started  in  1932  by  William  W.  Akers, 
Jr.,  as  Akers  and  Hudson  Motor  Lines  with  two 
trucks  in  operation.  In  fact,  it  was  several  months 
before  the  firm  was  able  to  purchase  a  few  more 
trucks,  and  then  one  at  the  time  as  receipts  per- 
mitted. 

In  the  early  days,  while  the  depression  was  in  full 
force,  the  Akers  organization  went  through  trying 
experiences.  During  the  bank  closing  period  Akers' 
trucks  were  stranded  in  New  York  and  other  north- 
ern points  for  lack  of  funds  to  get  home.  By  hard 
work  and  long  hours  the  firm  was  able  to  barely  exist 
until  the  depression  period  was  over  and  conditions 
began  to  improve. 

In  1934,  C.  Scott  Akers,  a  brother  of  the  founder, 
started  a  transfer  firm,  Gaston  Drayage  Co.  After 
operating  about  a  year,  he  merged  this  firm  with 
Akers  and  Hudson  and  joined  the  firm  as  sales  man- 
ager. 

In  1935  the  firm  was  incorporated  under  the  name 
Akers  and  Hudson  Motor  Lines,  Inc.  and  in  1938 
changed  to  Akers  Motor  Lines,  Inc.  The  next  year, 
in  1936,  Akers  moved  from  Airline  Avenue  to  a  30- 
acre  site  purchased  on  New  Hope  Road,  just  off  Wil- 
kinson Boulevard,  where  a  small  office  building  and 
a  100  foot  warehouse  were  built.  In  1937,  John  M. 
Akers,  another  brother,  joined  the  firm. 

Although  troubles  were  many  and  frequent,  the 
Akers  firm  continued  to  expand.  Since  1937  it  has 
about  doubled  its  operations  each  two  years  except 

Recently  completed  modern  terminal  in  Atlanta,  typical  of 
Akers  Motor  Lines  terminals. 


.:■■:■■      '....■.       .... 


during  the  war  period.  Expansion  during  the  years 
has  been  consistent  and  rapid,  including  the  exten- 
sions of  lines  operated,  expansion  of  home  office  and 
terminal  facilities,  additions  of  large  quantities  of 
rolling  stock  and  increasing  number  of  employees. 
During  the  past  two  years  Akers  has  spent  approxi- 
mately $3,500,000  in  its  expansion  program.  Includ- 
ed in  this  program  are:  a  modern  general  office 
building  in  Gastonia,  a  new  terminal  building  in  Gas- 
tonia,  a  new  garage  in  Atlanta,  Ga.,  a  new  terminal 
building  in  Savannah  and  Albany,  Ga,,  over  200  new 
trailers  and  over  125  new  tractors  and  pick-up 
trucks. 

In  addition  to  the  group  of  buildings,  including  a 
modern  office  building,  the  enlarged  and  efficient 
terminal  building  and  plenty  of  parking  space  for 
trucks  and  cars  on  the  30  acre  tract  on  the  edge  of 
Gastonia,  Akers  operates  44  terminals  and  call  sta- 
tions all  along  the  Atlantic  Seaboard  from  Boston  to 
Atlanta  and  Albany,  Georgia. 

Terminals  are  operated  at  Boston,  Springfield  and 
Worcester,  Mass. ;  Orange,  Conn. ;  Providence,  R.  I. ; 
New  York  City ;  Secaucus,  New  Jersey ;  Chester  and 
Philadelphia,  Pa.;  Charlotte,  Gastonia,  Shelby,  Sal- 
isbury, N.  C. ;  Columbia,  Greenville  and  Spartanburg, 
S.  C. ;  Albany,  Atlanta,  Augusta,  Columbus,  Griffin, 
LaGrange,  Macon  and  Savannah,  Ga. ;  with  agency 
points  at  Paterson,  N.  J.,  Jewett  City,  Conn.,  Allen- 
town,  Harrisburg  and  Reading,  Pa.,  High  Point,  N. 
C,.  Anderson  and  Gaffney,  S.  C.,  Athens  and  East- 
man, Ga.,  and  with  call  stations  at  Fall  River,  New 
Bedford  and  Pittsfield,  Mass.,  Trenton,  N.  J.,  Albe- 
marle, Concord,  Hickory,  Lincolnton  and  Statesville, 
N.  C,  and  Rock  Hill,  S.  C. 

Akers  Motor  Lines,  with  gross  receipts  which  are 
expected  to  exceed  $13,000,000  this  year,  operates 
approximately  1200  pieces  of  rolling  stock  and  em- 
ploys around  1500  workers  with  an  annual  payroll 
of  just  about  $6,000,000,  approximately  $3,500,000  of 
which  is  distributed  in  Gastonia.  Capital 
and  surplus  amount  to  around  $2,000,- 
000  while  plant  and  equipment,  includ- 
ing terminals  and  rolling  stock ,  are 
worth  in  the  neighborhood  of  $6,000,- 
000.  Both  the  gross  revenue  and  the 
tonnage  of  shipments  during  the  first 
six  months  of  1953  were  approximately 
25%  ahead  of  the  same  period  in  1952. 

Akers  established  a  pension  fund  for 
its  employees  effective  January  1,  1952, 
and  in  addition  to  social  security  bene- 
fits, the  company  provides  life,  health 
and  accdent  and  sick  benefits  for  its  em- 
ployees and  hospitalization  for  the  em- 
ployees and  their  dependents.  The 
Akers  Drivers'  Club  and  the  Akers  Me- 
chanics' Club  include  all  of  the  em- 
ployees in  these  two  divisions,  while  the 
wives  of  these  two  groups  also  have 
their  clubs.  The  company  provides  a 
breakfast  each  Saturday  for  all  drivers 
in  the  home  terminal  and  each  two 
months  a  dinner  is  given  to  the  drivers, 
some  of  which  are  attended  by  the  wives 
who  receive  door  prizes.     Akers  main- 


PAGE  90 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Alters  truck  on  highway  with  Stone  Mountain,  Georgia 
in  background . 

tains  a  softball  team  which  competes  with  mill  and 
other  teams  in  the  Gastonia  area.  Alters'  bowling- 
teams,  four  for  women  and  seven  for  men,  are  pro- 
vided facilities  by  the  company. 

The  four  Akers  brothers  are  sons  of  a  Presbyterian 
minister,  Rev.  W.  W.  Akers,  who  held  pastorates  in 
various  states  including  one  in  Memphis,  Tenn., 
where  W.  W.  Akers,  Jr.,  was  born ;  one  in  Maysville, 
Ky.,  where  John  M.  Akers  was  born;  one  in  Louis- 
ville, Ky.,  where  C.  Scott  Akers  was  born;  and  one 
in  Blackshear,  Ga.,  where  Charles  W.  Akers  was 
born.  Later,  he  held  pastorates  in  Lincolnton,  N.  C., 
and  West  Avenue  Presbyterian  Church  in  Charlotte. 

Officers  and  key  personnel  of  Akers  Motor  Lines 
include  W.  W.  Akers,  Jr.,  president;  John  M.  Akers, 
vice-president  and  general  manager ;  C.  Scott  Akers, 
vice-president  and  general  sales  manager;  Robert 
Wren,  secretary  and  treasurer;  Charles  W.  Akers, 
assistant  general  sales  manager ;  Cecil  H.  Davis,  traf- 
fic manager;  J.  L.  Hopkins,  general  freight  claim 
agent;  Claude  Schlagenhauf,  director  of  safety  and 
driver  personnel ;  J.  H.  Lyons,  superintendent  of 
transportation,  and  U.  J.  Parham,  superintendent 
of  maintenance. 

W.  W.  Akers,  Jr.,  after  attending  Bowling  Green 
Business  University,  worked  for  the  Carolina  and 
Northwestern  Railroad  at  Lincolnton,  later  as  gen- 


eral agent  for  railroads  in  other  states  and  in  1932 
became  district  sales  manager  for  Roadway  Express 
Co.  in  Gastonia.  It  was  here  that  he  saw  the  need 
for  additional  transportation  facilities  which  caused 
him  to  get  into  the  trucking  business  soon  afterward. 
He  has  been  an  officer  and  director  of  State  and 
national  truckers  organizations.  During  World  Wall 
II  he  was  one  of  seven  consultants  in  the  office  of 
Defense  Transportation.  He,  as  well  as  his  brothers, 
is  active  in  church,  educational,  civic  and  other  com- 
munity and  State  affairs.  Mr.  Akers  has  been  a 
colonel  on  the  staff  of  three  South  Carolina  governors 
and  is  now  lieutenant  colonel  and  aide  de  campe  to 
Governor  Talmadge  of  Georgia.  He  is  one  of  the  few 
heads  of  large  trucking  firms  who  did  not  start  by 
driving  a  truck  himself.  He  now  resides  at  Clover, 
S.  C,  where  he  has  other  important  business  con- 
nections. 

C.  Scott  Akers,  who  consolidated  his  Gastonia 
Drayage  Co.  with  his  brother's  firm  in  1934  and 
became  sales  manager,  now  resides  in  Atlanta.  He| 
attended  Oak  Ridge  Military  Institute.  Davidson  Col- 
lege and  Kings  Business  College.  Before  joining  his 
brothers,  he  had  worked  for  the  former  Adams 
Transfer  Co. 

John  M.  Akers,  now  vice-president  and  general 
manager,  joined  the  firm  in  1937.  He  attended  Lin- 
colnton High  School,  graduated  from  Davidson  Col- 
lege, received  his  M.A.  in  Economics  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  North  Carolina  and  studied  for  his  Ph.D.  at 
Princeton  and  Duke  Universities.  He  had  taught  at 
Piedmont  Junior  High  School  in  Charlotte  for  sev- 
eral years  then  became  a  tax  consultant  for  the  Coun- 
cil of  State  Governments.  He  has  served  as  officer 
and  director  in  various  local,  state  and  national  or- 
ganizations, and  when  he  joined  the  Akers  firm,  he 
was  assistant  director  of  WPA  in  Washington.  He 
resides  in  Gastonia. 

Robert  Wren  joined  the  infant  Akers  organization 
on  a  part-time  basis  as  bookkeeper  in  1934.  Soon  he 
became  a  full-time  employee  and  two  years  later  was 
made  secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  corporation.  He 
is  very  active  in  Gastonia  in  religious  and  civic  af- 
fairs and  has  other  important  business  connections. 


Associated  Transport  Absorbed  N.  C.  Units,  Nation's  Largest 


Associated  Transport,  Inc.,  with  heardquarters  at 
1775  Broadway,  New  York  City,  but  with  important 
connections  in  North  Carolina,  was  organized  in  mid- 
1941  and  began  operations  early  in  1942  to  become 
the  largest  trucking  organization  in  the  United 
States,  with  annual  gross  income  for  1953  that  is 
estimated  at  $45,000,000.  Seven  large  trucking  or- 
ganizations with  subsidiary  firms  were  consolidated 
to  form  Associated  Transport.  Two  of  these,  consti- 
tuting a  sizable  portion  of  the  organization  were 
North  Carolina  firms,  Horton  Motor  Lines,  Inc., 
Charlotte,  and  Barnwell  Brothers,  Inc.,  Burlington. 
And  H.  D.  "Buddy"  Horton,  head  of  Horton  Motor 
Lines  was  named  and  continues  as  chairman  of  the 
board  of  directors  of  Associated  Transport. 

In  addition  to  these  two  North  Carolina  trucking 
firms  the  other  five  principal  corporations  included 
in  the  consolidation  were  Consolidated  Motor  Lines, 
Inc.,  Hartford,  Conn. ;  McCarthy  Freight  System, 
Inc.,  Taunton,    Mass. ;    M.    Moran    Transportation 


Lines,  Inc.,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. ;  Southeastern  Motor 
Lines,  Inc.,  Bristol,  Va.,  and  Transportation,  Inc., 
Atlanta,  Ga.  The  new  firm,  Associated  Transport, 
was  incorporated  under  the  Delaware  laws,  applied 
for  and  was  granted  permission  by  the  Interstate 
Commerce  Commission  to  acquire  control  through 
purchase  of  the  capital  stock  of  these  seven  corpora- 
tions. 

Associated  has  an  authorized  capital  of  100,000 
shares  of  preferred  6%  cumulative  stock,  par  value 
$100,  and  one  million  shares  of  common  stock  with 
no  par  value.  The  annual  report  as  of  the  end  of 
1952  showed  40,065  shares  of  preferred  stock  out- 
standing owned  by  507  stockholders  in  28  states.  The 
same  report  showed  648,762  shares  of  common  stock 
outstanding  owned  by  1,287  stockholders  distributed 
over  43  states  and  the  Dominion  of  Canada. 

Annual  gross  income  of  Associated  Transport  in 
1952  reached  the  high  mark  of  $40,378,252  with  out- 
standing capital  of  $4,006,500  in  preferred  stock  and 


UMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  91 


!1, 325, 303  in  common  stock  and  with  an  earned  sur- 
)lus  of  $4,502,223,  the  corporation  showed  a  net 
vorth  of  $9,834,027.  The  company  operates  a  total 
•f  3,950  units  of  rolling  stock,  including  2,000  line- 
iaul  trailers,  1,100  tractors  and  850  pieces  of  local 
jquipment.  Recently  the  company  announced  a 
nulti-million  dollar  purchase  of  new  tractors  and 
railers,  including  500  International  tractors  and  600 
^ruehauf  trailers.  When  this  order  is  completed, 
he  new  equipment  will  represent  approximately  one- 
hird  of  the  company's  fleet  of  trailers  and  about 
>5%  of  its  tractors.  Last  year  the  company's  trucks 
tnd  trailers  handled  the  remarkable  total  of  1,413,- 
100  tons  of  freight.  The  company  employs  around 
L500  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $17,- 
•00,000.  Of  this  employment  about  768  workers  are 
>mployed  in  or  travel  out  of  North  Carolina,  receiv- 
ng  annual  remuneration  of  around  $3,050,000. 

Associated  Transport  operates  in  14  Atlantic  Sea- 
ward states  from  Atlanta  to  Boston  and  extending 
vestward  to  Nashville,  Tenn.,  and  Cleveland,  Ohio. 
li  this  area  there  are  65  terminals  and  sub-terminals 
vith  25  relay  stations  and  call  stations.  The  13 
"forth  Carolina  terminals  and  sub-terminals  are  lo- 
oted in  Burlington,  Durham,  Raleigh,  Fayetteville, 
Rockingham,  Charlotte,  Winston-Salem,  High  Point, 
lickory,  Concord,  Gastonia,  Asheville  and  Shelby, 
n  addition,  eight  call  stations  are  located  at  Belmont, 
^exington,  Lincolnton,  Marion,  Newton,  Salisbury, 
spindale  and  Thomasville. 

With  two  terminals  in  New  York  City,  Associated 
rransport  has  additional  terminals  and  sub-termi- 
lals  in  Albany,  Binghamton,  Buffalo,  Rochester, 
Syracuse  and  Utica,  with  call  stations  at  Homer  and 
Little  Falls  in  New  York  State.  Other  terminals  and 
sub-terminals  are  located  in  Boston,  Pittsfield, 
Springfield,  Worcester,  Lawrence  and  New  Bedford, 
vith  call  stations  in  Brockton,  Fall  River,  Ware  and 
iVestfield,  all  in  Mass. ;  Bridgeport,  Hartford,  Water- 
)ury  and  Jewett  City  in  Conn. ;  Providence,  R.  I. ; 
\venel,  Linden  and  Paterson,  N.  J.;  Erie,  Philadel- 
phia, Pittsburgh,  Wilkes-Barre  and  Allentown,  with 
rail  stations  at  Meadville  and  Scranton  and  relay  sta- 
tions at  New  Cumberland  and  Tannersville,  Penna. ; 
Baltimore,  Md. ;  Cincinnati,  Cleveland  and  Columbus, 
3hio;  Bristol,  Norfolk,  Richmond,  Roanoke,  Lynch- 
jurg  and  Martinsville,  with  a  call  station  at  Danville 
md  a  relay  station  at  Winchester,  Va. ;  Chattanooga, 
Knoxville,  Nashville  and  Kingsport,  Tenn. ;  Charles- 
;on,  Greenville,  Spartanburg,  Wallace,  Anderson 
md  Rock  Hill,  S.  C. ;  Atlanta  and  Rome,  Ga. 


Interior  view  of  efficient  handling  of  freight  in  Associated 
Transport  terminal. 


Assootaied  Transport  trucic  winds  through   mountains  of 
western  North  Carolina. 

The  two  principal  North  Carolina  firms  included 
in  the  Associated  Transport  merger,  both  large  and 
progressive  trucking  organizations,  were  Horton 
Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Charlotte,  and  Barnwell  Brothers, 
Inc.,  Burlington.  Horton  Motor  Lines  had  been  or- 
ganized in  1928  by  H.  D.  Horton  who  had  taken  over 
a  struggling  motor  line  at  the  request  of  its  creditors. 
Within  three  years  this  firm,  operating  14  trucks, 
had  been  straightened  out  to  debt  paid  and  the  busi- 
ness was  on  a  paying  basis.  It  was  then  that  Horton 
Motor  Lines  was  organized  to  become  the  largest 
individually  owned  trucking  company  in  America. 
Horton  had  expanded  until  it  had  500  trucks  travel- 
ing more  than  one  and  one-half  million  miles  a  month 
with  20  terminals  in  10  states  serving  more  than 
6,000  communities.  Horton  covered  the  area  be- 
tween Atlanta  and  Pittsburgh  and  Scranton  and  New 
York  City  and  was  a  remarkably  successful  firm 
when  it  was  included  in  the  Associated  Transport 
merger. 

Barnwell  Brothers,  organized  in  1930  by  James  A. 
Barnwell  and  his  brother,  Robert  W.  Barnwell,  had 
also  become  a  large  and  successful  trucking  opera- 
tion when  it  joined  Associated  Transport.  This  firm 
operated  in  Western  and  Central  North  Carolina  in 
an  area  bounded  generally  by  Asheville,  Charlotte, 
Fayetteville,  Raleigh,  Norlina  and  Winston-Salem, 
with  routes  to  Scranton,  Penna.,  and  New  York  City 
to  the  north  and  to  Great  Falls,  S.  C,  on  the  south, 
with  two  franchises  covering  intrastate  operations 
in  Virginia. 

Transportation,  Inc.,  Atlanta,  which  was  organiz- 
ed in  1939  and  started  operations  early  in  1940,  also 
had  a  North  Carolina  connection.  One  of  the  two 
principal  firms  it  took  over  was  Transportation,  Inc., 
Gastonia,  then  in  receivership.  Its  operations  were 
largely  in  East  Tennessee,  Western  North  Carolina 
and  Northwestern  South  Carolina,  with  routes  to 
New  Orleans,  La. ;  Pensacola,  Fla. ;  Montgomery  and 
Mobile,  Ala.  Southeastern  Motor  Lines  also  had  a 
North  Carolina  connection.  It  operated  regular 
routes  between  Nashville  and  Winston-Salem  and 
northern  points  and  had  intrastate  rights  in  North 
Carolina.  The  three  other  northern  firms  included 
in  the  merger  were  Consolidated  Motor  Lines  with 
rights  in  New  England  states  and  in  New  York; 
McCarthy  Freight  System,  with  additional  rights  in 
New  England  and  New  York,  and  M.  Moran  Trans- 
portation Lines,  with  rights  in  New  York  and  mid- 
Atlantic  states  and  extending  westward  to  Cleveland, 
Ohio. 

Associated  Transport  has  always  .  maintained 
splendid  employer-employee  relations.  The  company 
sponsors  a  comprehensive  group  insurance  plan,  pro- 
viding coverage  to  eligible  employees  of  group  life, 
accidental  death  and  hospital  medical  and  surgical 
benefits.    A-T  Employee  Social  Clubs,  started  in  1951 


PAGE  92 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  953} 


have  resulted  in  better  relations  and  have  contribut- 
ed much  to  the  morale  of  all  employees.  Practical 
training  projects  are  conducted  at  all  levels  of  em- 
ployees, aiding  the  workers  in  securing  promotions 
to  better  jobs.  Comprehensive  programs  based  on 
analyses  of  training  needs,  providing  methods  of 
up-grading  workers,  based  on  job  performance. 
Safety  and  recreational  activities  have  been  signifi- 
cant factors  in  strengthening  relations  in  the  A-T 
family.  Valuable  assets  in  the  organization  have 
resulted  from  various  contests  and  awards  and 
through  publication  of  the  company  magazine,  "The 
A-Ter". 

H.  D.  Horton  was  conducting  a  small  but  success- 
ful tire  and  battery  shop  in  Charlotte  in  the  early 
1920s  when  a  group  of  friends,  creditors  of  a  small 
bankrupt  firm,  persuaded  him  to  take  over.  His 
success  brought  him  rapidly  to  the  front  in  the  truck- 
ing industry  in  North  Carolina.  When  his  firm  be- 
came one  of  the  units  in  the  Associated  Transport 
merger,  he  was  named  chairman  of  the  Board  of 
Directors.  This  position,  as  is  so  often  the  case,  did 
not  mean  that  "Buddy"  Horton  would  rest  on  his 
laurels.  He  continues  a  definite  and  direct  interest 
in  directing  the  affairs  of  the  larger  corporation.  In 
1951  he  was  elected  president  of  the  American 
Trucking  Association  and  thus  became  spokesman 
for  six  million  men  and  women  engaged  in  the  truck- 
ing business  in  the  United  States.  He  is  described 
as  a  man  of  vision  and  a  problem  solver  and  the  man 
to  set  the  right  pace  for  the  continuously  expanding 
trucking  industry  in  the  United  States.  Even  with 
his  enlarged  and  continuing  business  connections  he 
finds  time  for  other  community  activities  and  takes 
a  great  delight  in  socializing  with  his  friends  and 
neighbors. 

B.  M.  Seymour,  New  York  City,  is  president  of 
Associated  Transport.  Other  officials  are  located  in 
New  York  and  in  other  areas  in  which  Associated 
Transport  operates.  In  addition  to  Mr.  Horton, 
North  Carolina  has  its  share  of  important  officials 
and  key  personnel  in  the  organization.  Among  these 
are  W.  P.  Davis,  Burlington,  vice-president-director 
of  the  Southern  Division ;  B.  H.  Merritt,  Burlington, 
assistant  vice-president  and  regional  manager,  Sou- 
thern Division;  James  A.  Barnwell,  Burlington,  R. 
A.  Biggers  and  B.  S.  Horton,  Charlotte,  directors; 
Ruth  Gail  Conger,  Charlotte,  director  of  Market  Re- 
search, and  O.  P.  Roberson,  Charlotte,  general  sales 
manager,  Southern  Division. 


CENTRAL  MOTOR  LINES 

Charlotte 

Central  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Charlotte,  with  office 
at  1026  South  Boulevard  and  terminal  and  garage  at 
2600  North  Tryon  Street,  was  organized  in  1936  in 
Concord  by  J.  H.  Wiseman  and  L.  T.  Barringer  for 
the  purpose  of  taking  over  and  buying  the  rights  of 
several  transfer  firms,  including  D.  C.  Hawkins,  of 
Madison,  N.  C,  and  Keller  Transfer  Co.  of  Hickory. 
After  these  firms  had  been  acquired,  the  company 
had  eight  pieces  of  equipment  and  about  a  dozen 
employees.  The  authorized  and  paid  in  capital  was 
$100,000.  In  1938  the  stock  in  the  firm  was  taken 
over  by  Robert  G.  Hayes  who  operated  it  until  1948, 
except  for  a  period  of  service  in  World  War  II. 

In  its  first  few  years  the  company  acquired  other 
transfer  companies  and  their  hauling  rights.   These 


included  Buck's  Transfer,  Lexington,  in  1938 ;  G.  O 
Evans,  Parkersburg,  W.  Va.,  and  B.  &  B.  Cartage 
Chicago,  in  1940.  In  addition,  the  firm  secured  from 
the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  an  extension  oJ 
rights  to  haul  products  between  Philadelphia,  Pa., 
New  Jersey  and  points  in  North  and  South  Carolina. 

In  1946  Central  Motor  Lines  moved  its  home  office.! 
terminal  and  garage  from  Kannapolis  to  Charlotte 

In  addition  to  the  home  office,  which  it  leased,  and] 
the  terminal  and  garage  in  Charlotte,  Central  Motor 
Lines  operates  terminals  in  Greensboro  (also  a  ga-1 
rage) ,  Raleigh,  Durham,  Winston-Salem,  Hickory, 
and  Asheville  in  this  State;  in  Greenville,  Spartan- 
burg and  Columbia,  S.  C. ;  Augusta,  Ga. ;  Clifton, 
New  Jersey ;  Philadelphia  and  Chicago,  and  in  addi- 
tion, 18  call  stations  in  the  area.  The  company  re- 
cently completed  a  new  terminal  building  at  3435 
South  Cicero  Avenue,  Chicago,  centered  upon  six 
acres  of  paved  surface  and  at  a  cost  of  approximately! 
$500,000. 

Central  Motor  Lines  has  developed  in  recent  years 
into  one  of  the  larger  North  Carolina  Transfer  com- 
panies operating  extensively  into  Chicago  and  the 
New  York  metropolitan  area.  Value  of  plant  and 
equipment,  largely  operating  equipment,  now  stands! 
at  $1,829,397.  The  capital  stock  is  $500,000,  au- 
thorized and  paid  in.  The  550  pieces  of  rolling  equip- 
ment haul  around  220,000  tons  of  freight  annually,] 
traveling  about  14,400,000  miles.  The  firm  employs 
an  average  of  640  workers  with  an  annual  payroll 
of  around  $2,150,000. 

Central  Motor  Lines  conducts  an  extensive  safety 
program.  This  year  it  won  a  Certificate  of  Merit  in  a 
National  Claim  Prevention  contest  conducted  by  the 
American  Trucking  Association.  Terminal  Manag- 
ers share  in  the  profits  from  the  program  for  reduc- 
tion in  damage.  Local  drivers  share  in  cash  awards 
that  are  based  upon  production. 

In  1948  Paul  H.  Johansen  assumed  charge  of  Cen- 
tral Motor  Lines.  Native  of  South  Dakota,  Mr. 
Johansen  had  been  engaged  in  transportation  since 
1923,  including  a  tour  of  service  in  the  U.  S.  Army 
from  which  he  was  discharged  in  1922  at  Fort  Bragg. 
For  several  years  he  had  been  engaged  in  public  and 
industrial  transfer  work  for  the  public  and  Central! 
Motor  Lines  was  one  of  his  clients.  During  World) 
War  II  he  served  as  head  of  transportation  in  the 
Textile,  Clothing  and  Leather  Division  of  the  War 
Production  Board.  His  operation  of  Central  Motor! 
Lines  since  1948  has  been  conspicuously  successful. 

In  addition  to  Mr.  Johansen,  president,  other  offi-j 
cers,  directors  and  key  personnel  of  Central  Motor 
Lines  are  Howard  Nelson  and  Joe  K.  Hall,  vice-presi- 
dents; C.  M.  Misenheimer,  treasurer,  and  E.  T.  Bost, 
Jr.,  secretary.  Directors  are  Mr.  Johansen,  Mr.  Bost,j 
Robert  G.  Hayes  and  M.  C.  Hayes.     Alex  M.  John-j 
son  is  traffic  manager;  Jerry  E.  Reid,  director  of 
safety  and  claims  agent;  Jesse  W.  Cole,  director  of 
maintenance,  and  John  W.  Martin,  director  of  ope- 
rations. 


PILOT  FREIGHT  CARRIERS,  INC. 
Winston-Salem 

Pilot  Freight  Carriers,  Inc.,  Cherry  Street  at  Polo 
Road,  Winston-Salem,  was  organized  in  November, 
1941,  by  R.  Y.  Sharpe,  Joseph  H.  Gwyn  and  E.  G. 
"Red"  Lackey  in  a  Winston-Salem  restaurant  over 
"hot  dogs"  and  coffee.     It  was  then  and  there  that 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  93 


these  three  men  decided  to  go  ahead  with  their  plans 
to  operate  a  freight  carrier  firm.  They  began  opera- 
tions with  three  trucks  on  December  1,  1941.  From 
this  modest  beginning  less  than  12  years  ago  this 
firm  has  developed  its  business  until  it  had  gross 
revenue  last  year  of  more  than  $6,000,000. 

After  about  seven  months  of  operation  these  three 
partners  incorporated  under  the  North  Carolina  laws 
in  June,  1942,  with  an  authorized  capital  of  $100,000 
and  paid  in  capital  at  that  time  of  $20,000.  Officers 
of  the  company  are  R.  Y.  Sharpe,  president  and  gen- 
eral manager;  J.  H.  Gwyn  and  H.  C.  Sharpe,  vice- 
presidents;  E.  G.  "Red"  Lackey,  secretary-treasurer 
and  general  sales  manager ;  J.  A.  Kirkman,  vice-pres- 
ident— traffic;  and  J.  H.  Thomas,  vice-president — 
operations.  The  board  of  directors  includes  R.  Y. 
Sharpe,  H.  C.  Sharpe,  J.  H.  Gwyn,  J.  H.  Gwyn,  Jr., 
Judge  Allen  H.  Gwyn  and  E.  G.  Lackey.  Mr.  Lackey 
is  a  past  president  of  the  N.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Asso- 
ciation and  is  still  a  director. 

Pilot  Freight  Carriers  operate  over  an  eight  state 
area  from  Georgia  to  the  Canadian  border.  The 
states  included  are  Georgia,  South  Carolina,  North 
Carolina,  Maryland,  Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey  and 
New  York.  Terminal  cities  serving  the  area  are 
Amsterdam,  Buffalo,  Rochester,  Syracuse  and  Utica, 
N.  Y. ;  Asheville,  Charlotte,  Durham,  Rocky  Mount 
and  Winston-Salem  in  North  Carolina;  Atlanta  and 
Augusta,  Ga. ;  Baltimore,  Md. ;  Greenville  and  Spar- 
tanburg, S.  C. ;  Hoboken,  New  Brunswick,  Paterson 
and  Trenton,  N.  J. ;  and  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

From  its  small  beginning  of  three  men  and  three 
trucks,  Pilot  Freight  Carriers  has  grown  into  a  fam- 
ily of  nearly  800  employees  with  an  annual  payroll 
last  year  in  excess  of  $3,000,000.  It  has  developed 
plant  and  equipment  valued  at  approximately  $2,- 
857,600.  The  firm  operates  about  700  pieces  of  equip- 
ment including  tractors,  trailers,  pick-up  and  deliv- 
ery trucks.  These  figures,  with  its  gross  revenue  this 
year  that  will  reach  approximately  $9,000,000,  give 
some  idea  of  the  wonderful  expansion  in  less  than 
12  years  of  operation. 

Although  Pilot  Freight  Carriers  has  operated  a 
training  program  for  its  truck  drivers  for  several 
years,  recently  the  firm  decided  to  extend  driver 
training  to  cover  its  non-driving  personnel.  The  plan 
has  already  been  made  effective  for  about  150  non- 
driving  employees  in  the  Winston-Salem  area  and  is 
being  extended  to  another  150  workers  outside  the 
home  area.  Edward  Scheidt,  North  Carolina  Motor 
Vehicles  Commissioner,  commended  the  movement, 
stating  that  this  pioneering  practice  will  be  followed 
closely  by  his  office  and  that  it  will  be  used  as  a  sort 
of  laboratory  in  developing  personnel  training. 

Mr.  Scheidt  went  to  Winston-Salem  to  bestow  a 
driving  award  on  Perry  H.  Reid,  Winston-Salem, 
Route  3,  who  won  the  straight  truck  driver  cham- 

Fleet  of  trucks  operated  by  Pilot  Freight  Carriers, 
Winston-Salem. 


*^"7r 


IPIIiiiitfc 


pionship  in  the  National  Roadeo  for  the  second  time 
in  St.  Paul,  Minn.,  last  September.  Reid  drives  a 
truck  for  Pilot  Freight  Carriers  between  Winston- 
Salem  and  Statesville. 

Pilot  employees  are  insured  by  the  company  and 
the  premiums  are  paid  by  the  company.  They  are 
also  given  hospitalization  and  sick  benefits.  If  em- 
ployees wish  to  include  their  families  a  nominal 
charge  is  made  for  the  family  participation.  Family 
picnics  and  parties  are  enjoyed  throughout  the  year, 
both  at  the  home  office  and  in  the  terminal  cities. 

Pilot  also  has  adopted  an  ambitious  plan  to  award 
college  scholarships  to  high  school  seniors  each  year, 
taking  the  place  of  the  former  plan  of  giving  Christ- 
mas gifts  to  customers.  Under  the  new  plan  Pilot 
will  award  $500  scholarships  to  each  winner  in  an 
annual  essay  contest  on  the  value  of  motor  transpor- 
tation. Winners  will  come  from  the  seven  states  in 
which  Pilot  maintains  terminals:  Georgia,  South 
Carolina,  North  Carolina,  Maryland,  Pennsylvania, 
New  Jersey  and  New  York.  An  additional  $500 
grant-in-aid  will  be  awarded  to  the  school  the  winner 
selects.  A  new  brochure  for  the  1953-54  school  year 
has  been  mailed  and  entries  are  required  by  January 
15. 

Mr.  Lackey  announces  that  several  hundred  letters 
have  been  received  expressing  satisfaction  with  the 
scholarship  award  plan  and  congratulating  the  com- 
pany on  its  inauguration. 


GREAT  SOUTHERN  TRUCKING  CO. 

Jacksonville,  Fla. — Charlotte 

The  Great  Southern  Trucking  Co.,  with  headquar- 
ters in  Jacksonville,  Fla.,  and  with  extensive  activi- 
ties in  North  Carolina,  was  organized  in  1936  by  L. 
A.  Raulerson  by  a  consolidation  of  several  smaller 
trucking  firms  owned  and  purchased  by  Mr.  Rauler- 
son. With  a  modest  beginning  Great  Southern  has 
developed  into  the  13th  trucking  firm  in  size  in  the 
nation  with  gross  revenues  approaching  $13,000,000. 

In  Charlotte  in  1930  Mr.  Raulerson  was  operating 
the  National  Convoy  and  Trucking  Co.,  now  National 
Trucking  Co.,  in  hauling  Ford  cars  for  dealers  served 
by  the  Charlotte  assembly  plant.  When  this  assem- 
bly plant  closed  in  1932,  Mr.  Raulerson  converted  his 
trucks  for  hauling  freight,  the  first  loads  having 
been  the  machinery  from  the  assembly  plant  hauled 
to  Norfolk.  The  firm  purchased  the  H  &  L  Line  in 
Charlotte,  largely  old  equipment,  and  started  a  sched- 
ule from  Charlotte  to  Birmingham  and  Atlanta. 

In  1933  the  Atlanta  and  Florida  Motor  Lines  began 
operation  with  two  semi-trailers  doing  business  in 
the  first  nine  months  of  less  than  $6,000.  Three 
years  later  this  firm  and  other  Raulerson  firms  were 
consolidated  into  the  Great  Southern.  In  1938  this 
firm  was  the  first  of  any  truck  line  to  receive  an  RFC 
loan,  used  for  expanding  the  Jacksonville  shops,  gen- 
eral offices  and  warehouses. 

Great  Southern  operates  in  Florida,  Georgia,  Ala- 


*m  .  r. 


^M 


PAGE  94 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Modern    new    terminal,    recently    completed    in    Charlotte    by 
Great  Southern   Trucking   Co.,  Jacksonville,  Fla. 

bama,  North  and  South  Carolina  and  Tennessee,  in 
which  states  it  has  63  terminals  and  agencies.  Six- 
teen of  these  are  located  in  North  Carolina  with 
terminals  in  Asheville,  Charlotte,  Durham,  Greens- 
boro, High  Point,  Raleigh  and  Winston-Salem  and 
agencies  in  Asheboro,  Burlington,  Concord,  Forest 
City,  Gastonia,  Reidsville,  Salisbury,  Shelby  and 
Statesville.  The  firm  hauled  more  than  40,000  tons 
of  freight  in  North  Carolina  last  year,  traveling 
more  than  one  and  one-third  million  miles  in  the 
State. 

Great  Southern  had  gross  income  last  year  of  be- 
tween twelve  and  thirteen  million  dollars,  about 
$900,000  of  which  was  received  in  North  Carolina. 
The  firm  operates  a  fleet  of  1,240  tractors  and  trail- 
ers, about  20%,  or  250  units  of  which  are  operated 
in  North  Carolina.  Principal  commodities  hauled 
are  dyes,  tobacco,  textiles  and  structural  steel.  About 
1,600  persons  are  employed,  225  of  them  in  North 
Carolina  receiving  salaries  and  wages  of  around 
$681,800  a  year. 

In  Charlotte  the  firm  owns  property  valued  at 
about  $15,000  in  the  State,  exclusive  of  furniture  and 
fixtures,  even  though  most  of  the  terminals  in  North 
Carolina  are  rented  or  leased.  The  firm  has  been 
located  at  1325  Statesville  Avenue  for  several  years. 
Recently  it  purchased  an  eight-acre  tract  at  3500 
Hutchinson  Avenue  and  has  just  completed  a  modern 
new  terminal  on  this  site. 

J.  A.  Ryder  is  president  of  Great  Southern.  He 
and  other  principal  officials  are  located  in  the  general 
offices  of  the  company  in  Jacksonville,  Fla.  Emory 
Morris,  an  important  official  of  the  company  for 
many  years,  is  district  manager  in  Charlotte  and  W. 
C.  Sutton  is  district  manager  in  Greensboro. 


OVERNITE  TRANSPORTATION  CO. 
Richmond,  Va. 

Overnite  Transportation  Co.,  with  headquarters  in 
Richmond,  Va.,  but  with  more  than  half  of  its  busi- 
ness handled  and  more  than  half  of  its  payroll  dis- 
tributed in  North  Carolina,  was  started  early  in  1935 
by  James  Harwood  Cochrane,  proprietor,  who  had 
previously  operated  a  transfer  business  under  his 
own  name  for  several  years.  Mr.  Cochrane  started 
business  with  one  tractor  and  one  trailer.  Now  his 
firm  operates  a  fleet  of  433  units  of  equipment  and 
will  have  an  established  gross  revenue  in  1953  of 
approximately  $5,000,000. 

Overnite  Transportation  Co.  in  its  earlier  opera- 
tions, with  home  and  general  offices  and  terminal  in 
Richmond,  secured  its  first  rights  under  the  Grand- 
father Clause  to  operate  between  Richmond  and 
High  Point  and  Richmond  and  Winston-Salem.  In 
1938  it  had  only  two  terminals,  at  Richmond  and 
High  Point.    Greensboro  was  added  in  1939,  Durham 


AKERS  WINS  N.  C.  SAFETY  TROPHY 

Awards  were  presented  to  eight  North  Carolina  Trucking 
firms  in  their  respective  classes  for  excellent  highway  safety 
records  achieved  in  1953  at  the  meeting  of  the  Council  of 
Safety  Supervisors  of  the  N.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Association  in 
Charlotte  December  14.  Selections  of  winners  were  made  by 
A.  H.  Graham,  chairman,  N.  C.  Highway  Commission:  Edward 
Scheidt,  Motor  Vehicles  commissioner,  and  Stanley  Winborne,  j 
Utilities  Commission  chairman. 

Akers  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Gastonia,  won  the  State-wide  fleet 
safety  trophy,  as  the  "North  Carolina  motor  carrier  fleet  ac- 
complishing the  best  over-all  highway  safety  job,  both  within 
the  State  and  with  the  driving  public  during  the  past  year". 

Also  presented  plaques  in  their  respective  classifications 
were: 

General  Commodities  Division — Akers  Motor  Lines,  Inc., 
Gastonia;  Frederickson  Motor  Express,  Charlotte;  Silver  Fleet 
Motor  Express,  Inc.,  Asheville. 

Newspaper  and  Film  Division — Carolina  Delivery  Service 
Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte;  Citizen  Express,  Inc.,  Asheville. 

Private  Carrier  Division — College  View  Cleaners  &  Laundry, 
Greensboro. 

Petroleum  Division — Maybelle  Transport  Co.,  Lexington; 
Shamrock  Transport  Co.,  Winston-Salem. 


in  1940  and  Charlotte  in  1941.  After  Pearl  Harbor 
facilities  were  expanded  and  terminals  established  in 
Winston-Salem,  Raleigh,  Wilmington  and  Hender- 
son. After  the  war  ended  terminals  were  set  up  at 
Atlanta  and  Greenville,  S.  C. 

During  its  earlier  years  of  operation  Overnite  pur- 
chased additional  lines,  thus  adding  to  its  area  of 
activities  and  equipment.  Operating  firms  purchas- 
ed included  McLeod  Transportation  Co.,  Southern 
Consolidated  Co.,  Piedmont  Mountains  Freight  Lines 
(in  part),  Winchester  Trucking  Co.,  T  &  H  Motor 
Lines  and  Brooks  Transportation  Co.  (Va.,  in  part). 
After  its  incorporation  in  1947,  Overnite  acquired 
additional  rights  from  Henderson  Motor  Express, 
Fleming  Transfer  (Va.,  in  part),  Lipe  Motor  Lines 
and  Bush  Transfer. 

When  Overnite  Transportation  Co.  was  incorpo- 
rated in  1947,  it  operated  136  units  of  equipment. 
Officers  and  directors  named  were  J.  Harwood  Coch- 
rane, president;  W.  P.  Hackettt,  vice-president  and 
treasurer;  J.  L.  Amrhein,  auditor;  L.  B.  Cochrane, 
secretary;  W.  H.  Young,  asistant  secretary.  These 
are  the  officers  today  except  that  Granville  B.  Cole- 
man was  added  as  director  and  elected  vice-president 
in  charge  of  sales  and  traffic  in  1952.  Mr.  Cochrane 
is  the  sole  owner  of  the  stock  in  the  corporation. 

Overnite  serves  daily  more  than  220  points  in 
North  Carolina  spread  over  more  than  1925  miles  of 
highway.  A.  M.  Price,  Charlotte,  is  district  agent 
for  North  Carolina.  Terminals  and  agents  are  lo- 
cated in  North  Carolina  cities  as  follows :  Durham, 
R.  L.  Fortune ;  Greensboro,  W.  M.  McNeil ;  Charlotte, 
O.  E.  Stoner;  Winston-Salem,  H.  H.  Blaine;  Raleigh, 
Clark  Webb;  Hickory,  J.  A.  Holcombe;  Asheville,  D. 
R.  Woods;  Wilmington,  R.  E.  Corbett;  Henderson, 
Eldern  D.  South;  Roanoke  Rapids,  D.  O.  Burns,  and 
Shelby,  E.  W.  Haulk. 

Overnite,  when  it  started  as  a  corporation  in  1947, 
had  paid  in  capital  of  $125,000  representing  assets 
accumulated  by  Mr.  Cochrane  during  his  operation 
as  proprietor.  Today  capital  and  surplus  of  the  cor- 
poration exceed  $900,000.  Plant  and  equipment,  in- 
cluding terminals  and  shops  and  the  fleet  of  433 
pieces  of  rolling  equipment,  are  valued  at  $1,600,000. 
Last  year  gross  revenue  was  $4,358,000  while  gross 
revenue  during  the  first  six  months  of  1953  showed  a 
splendid  increase  reaching  $2,440,000.    Overnite  has 


Summer-Fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  95 


657  employees  with  an  annual  payroll  of  $1,992,158. 
Of  these  workers,  400  are  employed  in  North  Caro- 
lina, receiving  $1,032,970  in  wages  and  salaries,  or 
more  than  half  of  the  entire  payroll.  Overnite  ope- 
rates shops  as  well  as  terminals  in  Richmond  and 
Danville,  Va. ;  Durham,  Greensboro,  Charlotte,  Win- 
ston-Salem, Raleigh  and  Asheville,  N.  C,  and  in  At- 
lanta, Ga. 

The  company  sponsors  a  group  insurance  plan 
with  life,  and  hospitalization  coverage  and  sick  leave 
payments.  All  employees  receive  a  liberal  bonus  at 
the  end  of  each  year.  Driving  personnel  participates 
in  a  special  safety  program  which  provides  annual 
bonus  payments  based  on  each  employee's  safety 
record. 

Mr.  Cochrane,  founder  and  owner  of  Overnite,  is  a 
native  of  Virginia  and  has  been  in  the  trucking  busi- 
ness all  of  his  mature  life  except  for  a  brief  early  pe- 
riod with  the  Virginia  Dairy  Co.  He  is  a  Baptist  and 
a  member  of  the  Richmond  Optimist  Club.  In  truck- 
ing activities  Mr.  Cochrane  is  Virginia  vice-president 
of  the  American  Trucking  Association ;  is  vice-presi- 
dent and  director  of  the  Virginia  Highway  Users  As- 
sociation and  is  a  director  (recently  re-elected)  of 
the  North  Carolina  Motor  Carriers  Association. 


MILLER  MOTOR  EXPRESS,  INC. 
Charlotte 

Miller  Motor  Express,  Inc.,  2209  Dowd  Road, 
Charlotte,  was  established  early  in  1930  by  W.  W. 
Miller,  Jr.,  as  individual  owner  by  purchase  of  G  &  W 
Motor  Express  with  franchise  of  two  short  lines  and 
equipment  of  three  used  trucks.  After  23  years  of 
successful  operation  Miller  Motor  Express  now  ope- 
rates 476  units  from  Atlanta  to  New  York  and  will 
have  an  estimated  income  this  year  of  $5,000,000. 

When  Mr.  Miller  took  over  G  &  W  Motor  Express, 
he  acquired  franchise  rights  to  operate  from  Char- 
lotte to  Hamlet,  N.  C,  and  from  Charlotte  to  Ches- 
ter, S.  C.  Soon  afterward  he  added  to  his  three  used 
trucks  a  tractor  semi-trailer  unit  which  the  North 
Carolina  Utilities  Commission  reported  as  the  first 
unit  of  this  type  ever  operated  by  a  motor  express 
line  in  North  Carolina. 

In  1931  a  line  was  inaugurated  from  Rock  Hill, 
S.  C,  to  Winder,  Ga.,  and  a  few  months  later  the  line 
was  extended  from  Winder  to  Atlanta,  which  was 
the  first  line  ever  to  operate  between  North  Carolina 
and  Georgia.  Also  in  1931  the  company  secured 
rights  to  extend  its  line  from  Hamlet  to  Wilmington, 
embracing  a  triangle  from  Laurinburg  to  Fayette- 
ville  to  Lumberton  and  from  Lumberton  to  Wilming- 
ton via  two  routes,  one  by  Bladenboro  and  Clarkton 
and  the  other  by  Whiteville  and  Chadbourn. 

Miller  Motor  Express  began  expanding  its  lines 
eastward  and  northward  in  1932.  It  inaugurated  a 
Charlotte  to  Norfolk  line  and  a  few  months  later  ex- 
tended that  line  from  Norfolk  to  Philadelphia.  Soon 
another  line  was  inaugurated  from  Charlotte  to  Phil- 
adelphia via  Richmond  and  Baltimore.  For  several 
years  the  company  continued  its  expansion  to  cover 
the  Piedmont  areas  of  North  and  South  Carolina  and 
from  Georgia  to  Pennsylvania.  And  in  1939  Miller 
began  an  intensive  program  of  promotion  through 
adoption  of  a  policy  of  "Specialized  Service".  In 
1940  the  firm  acquired  the  Wright  Line  from  Norfolk 
to  Philadelphia  and  New  York  City  and  environs.  The 
next  year  it  bought  the  equipment  and  franchise  of 


P  &  F  Motor  Express  from  Charlotte  to  Wilmington 
and  intermediate  points.  This  was  the  firm's  only 
competitor  to  Wilmington  at  that  time. 

Continuing  to  operate  the  P  &  F  Motor  Express 
line  to  Wilmington  from  the  Clarkson  Street  ware- 
house, Miller  Motor  Express  acquired  a  modern  ga- 
rage on  Dowd  Road  at  Wilkinson  Boulevard.  Be- 
cause of  rapid  expansion  of  business  handled,  it  be- 
came necessary  to  build  a  modern  terminal  adjoining 
the  garage  site  with  a  warehouse  large  enough  to 
handle  the  expanding  business  and  with  modern 
office  space. 

Miller  Motor  Express  was  incorporated  in  1948 
with  an  authorized  capital  of  $250,000.  At  that  time 
about  240  units  of  equipment  were  in  operation ;  the 
company  had  about  250  employees  and  the  gross  an- 
nual income  then  was  around  $2,500,000. 

Authority  is  granted  Miller  to  transport  general 
equipment  except  merchandise  of  unusual  value  and 
explosives  and  the  firm  is  duly  qualified  to  handle 
in-bond  shipments.  The  company  has  operating 
rights  over  regular  and  irregular  routes  along  the 
Atlantic  Seaboard  from  Atlanta  to  New  York  and  in 
the  states  of  Georgia,  the  Carolinas,  Virginia,  Mary- 
land, Delaware,  Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey  and  New 
York.  Intrastate  rights  are  held  in  North  and  South 
Carolina.  Terminals  are  operated  in  Atlanta,  Ga. : 
Anderson,  Greenville,  Spartanburg,  Columbia  and 
Rock  Hill,  S.  C. ;  Charlotte,  Rockingham,  Fayetteville 
and  Lumberton,  N.  C. ;  Norfolk,  Va. ;  Farnhurst 
(Wilmington),  Del.;  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  and  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y. ;  with  agencies  in  Chester,  S.  C. ;  Wilming- 
ton, N.  C,  and  Baltimore,  Md. 

Miller  Motor  Express  has  expanded  its  business 
until  the  estimated  gross  income  for  1953  will  be  ap- 
proximately $5,000,000.  Capital  and  surplus  have 
been  expanded  to  reach  around  $1,500,000  and  de- 
preciated value  of  plant  and  equipment  is  about 
$1,250,000.  The  firm  now  emplovs  625  workers  and 
the  estimated  payroll  for  1953  is  $2,250,000. 

Officers  and  directors  of  Miller  Motor  Express  are 
W.  W.  Miller,  Jr.,  president  and  treasurer;  E.  T. 
Kramer,  vice-president  and  general  manager,  and  W. 
C.  DeLany,  secretary  and  chief  accountant.  Other 
key  personnel  includes  J.  S.  Hinton,  assistant  gen- 
eral manager;  H.  R.  Brown,  sales  manager;  H.  L. 
Vaughn,  traffic  manager;  F.  W.  Ward,  director  of 
safety;  E.  L.  Roberson,  claim  agent;  D.  L.  Powers, 
northern  division  manager;  W.  C.  Bradley,  eastern 
North  Carolina  division  manager,  and  W.  J.  Zane, 


WHY  SOME  FIRMS  OMITTED 

Names  of  trucking  firms  to  be  represented  in  this  issue  by 
special  articles  were  selected  by  various  officials  and  indi- 
viduals, since  it  was  manifestly  impossible  to  carry  items  on 
all  trucking  firms  and  other  transportation  organizations. 
Efforts  were  made  to  get  information  on  all  included  in  the 
list,  but  because  of  conditions  along  the  line,  some  are  omitted, 
through  no  fault  of  The  Editor.  Among  those  omitted  which 
were  due  to  be  used  are  the  following: 

CAROLINA    FREIGHT    CARRIERS    CORP. 

Cherryville 

P.   T.   HUFFMAN   TRANSFER,   INC. 

Greensboro 

BOTTOMS-FISKE  TRUCK  LINES,  INC. 

High  Point 

MILLER  MOTOR  LINE   OF  N.  C,   INC. 

Greensboro 

CHILDRESS  TRANSPORTATION  CO. 

Sanford 


PAGE  96 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


South  Carolina  division  manager. 

Mr.  Miller,  founder  and  president  of  Miller  Motor 
Express,  is  a  native  of  Rock  Hill,  S.  C,  and  a  grad- 
uate of  the  University  of  South  Carolina.  He  is  a 
Presbyterian,  a  Mason  and  a  Shriner.  At  present  he 
is  first  vice-president  of  the  North  Carolina  Motor 
Carriers  Association. 

Miller  Motor  Express  several  years  ago  inaugu- 
rated a  safety  award  program  for  its  drivers. 
Through  this  medium  and  the  careful  selection  of 
personnel,  the  company  has  been  able  to  maintain  a 
good  record  in  this  field.  This  year  Miller  Motor 
Express  was  presented  a  plaque  by  its  insurance 
carrier  as  evidence  of  the  accomplishments  in  this 
respect. 

• 

(Thurston  Motor  Lines,  due  along  here,  on  Page  154) 


JOHNSON  MOTOR  LINES,  INC. 
Charlotte 

Johnson  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  2426  Hutchinson  Ave., 
Charlotte,  previously  organized  and  incorporated  to 
take  over  operations  of  Davis  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  be- 
gan operations  January  1,  1946,  organized  by  four 
men  experienced  and  expert  in  modern  transporta- 
tion and  headed  by  J.  N.  Johnson.  This  organization 
has  expanded  and  developed  to  such  an  extent  in 
seven  years  that  its  gross  annual  revenue  in  1952 
exceeded  $9,000,000,  placing  it  sixth  in  size  on  the 
Eastern  Seaboard  and  36th  in  size  in  the  entire 
United  States.  In  its  brief  existence  its  record  is  one 
of  efficient  operation  and  remarkable  expansion. 

The  predecessor  company,  Davis  Motor  Lines,  Inc., 
was  formed  late  in  1944  and  obtained  franchise  rights 
through  purchase  of  other  company  rights.  Primary 
business  was  handling  army  and  navy  traffic  during 
the  war  with  limited  commercial  accounts.  In  1945 
gross  revenue  was  around  $400,000  and  the  firm  em- 
ployed 41  workers  and  operated  31  pieces  of  equip- 
ment. General  office  and  terminal  were  located  in 
Charlotte  with  a  New  York  City  terminal  and  three 
agencies.  Due  to  the  loss  of  Army  and  Navy  traffic 
as  World  War  II  ended,  this  company,  with  little  ex- 
tensive outside  business,  continued  to  lose  revenue 
and  faced  a  serious  condition. 

At  that  time  four  experienced  motor  transporta- 
tion men,  J.  N.  Johnson,  J.  D.  Kluttz,  F.  O.  Beatty 
and  L.  A.  Murray,  all  former  key  officials  with  Hor- 
ton  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  and  later  with  Associated 
Transport,  Inc.,  decided  to  organize  a  new  corpora- 
tion and  take  over  the  Davis  Motor  Lines'  rights, 
franchises  and  business.  These  principal  stockhold- 
ers formed  the  original  board  of  directors  and  offi- 
cers with  J.  N.  Johnson,  president;  J.  D.  Kluttz, 
executive  vice-president ;  F.  O.  Beatty,  secretary,  and 


Power  aplenty  in  this  unit  of  Johnson  Motor  Lines,  Charlotte. 


L.  A.  Murray,  treasurer.  These  officers,  with  W.  A. 
Johnson,  brother  of  J.  N.  Johnson,  as  vice-president 
in  charge  of  operation,  and  R.  P.  Cunningham,  elect- 
ed assistant  secretary  and  assistant  treasurer  in 
1949,  constitute  the  present  executive  staff. 

These  progressive  officials  from  long  experience 
knew  modern  traffic  conditions  in  the  area  of  opera- 
tion, J.  N.  Johnson  had  been  vice-president  of  ope- 
rations of  Horton  Motor  Lines  and  later  was  director 
of  operations  of  Associated  Transport.  J.  D.  Kluttz 
had  been  vice-president  of  sales  and  traffic  for  Hor- 
ton and  director  of  sales  for  Associated  Transport. 
L.  A.  Murray  and  F.  O.  Beatty  had  been  associated 
in  the  general  office  set-up  with  Mr.  Johnson  and 
Mr.  Kluttz  in  their  former  capacities. 

In  addition  to  establishing  the  home  office,  termi- 
nal and  garage  in  Charlotte,  Johnson  Motor  Lines 
took  over  the  terminals  and  call  stations  formerly 
operated  by  Davis  Motor  Lines,  expanded  their  facil- 
ities and  established  new  terminals  and  call  stations 
along  the  Atlantic  Seaboard  from  Boston  to  Atlanta. 
The  19  principal  terminals  are  now  located  in  Atlan- 
ta, Clearwater,  Columbia,  Greenville,  Spartanburg, 
Wallace  and  Charleston,  S.  C. ;  Charlotte,  High  Point 
and  Marion,  N.  C. ;  Baltimore,  Philadelphia,  Avenel 
and  Hawthorne,  N.  J. ;  New  York  City,  Stratford 
(Bridgeport),  Conn.;  Pawtucket,  R.  I.;  Medford 
(Boston)  and  Lawrence,  Mass.,  with  recent  call  sta- 
tions established  at  Trenton,  N.  J.,  and  Morrisville, 
Pa. 

Johnson  Motor  Lines  last  year  had  gross  revenue 
of  $9,051,000  with  indications  that  a  sizable  increase 
will  be  shown  this  year.  The  value  of  its  plant  and 
equipment  has  increased  to  $3,210,000  and  the  cap- 
ital and  surplus  is  now  $1,225,000.  This  year  the 
company  employs  850  workers  and  has  an  annual 
payroll  of  $4,000,000,  approximately  37V2%  ($1,J 
500,000)  of  which  is  distributed  in  North  Carolina. 
Last  year's  656  units  of  rolling  stock  (now  725) 
handled  more  than  577,000,000  pounds  of  freight 
hauled  over  more  than  20,000,000  miles  of  its  routes. 

Johnson  provides  a  group  insurance  plan,  partially 
paid  by  the  company,  including  life,  sickness  and 
hospitalization  with  surgical  and  medical  provisions. 
The  company  has  established  a  profit  sharing  plan 
by  which  all  profits  above  a  certain  amount  are  set 
aside  in  an  employee  retirement  fund  in  which  the 
employees  are  eligible  after  90  days  of  service.  Cer- 
tificates are  distributed  to  employees  annually  indi- 
cating the  amount  in  this  plan.  During  the  past  two 
years  certificates  for  $250,000  have  been  distributed 
to  all  eligible  employees. 

The  Johnsoneers'  Club  is  a  social  organization  of 
employees  sponsoring  four  social  functions  annually 
and  the  Flower  Club  provides  flowers  for  employees 
in  the  hospital,  gifts  to  employees  upon  marriage 
and  on  other  occasions.  Employees  pay  small  month- 
ly dues  and  fees  to  maintain  these  clubs.  Clerical 
employees  who  are  paid  on  an  hourly  basis  are  grant- 
ed six  days  a  year  of  sick  leave.  Employees  with 
the  company  on  January  1  are  granted  one  week's 
vacation  each  year  extended  to  two  weeks  for  those 
who  have  been  employed  for  four  years. 

Johnson  Motor  Lines  officials  are  justly  proud  of 
the  company's  safety  program  handled  by  W.  W. 
Carter,  director  of  safety  and  personnel.  Its  pur- 
poses are  to  prevent  vehicular  and  personal  accidents 
and  injuries.     The  company  maintains  an  effective 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  97 


Modern  general  offices,  terminal  and  warehotise  of  Johnson 
Motor  Lines,  Charlotte. 

system  of  screening  applicants  for  positions  through 
a  complete  check  of  their  background  and  determines 
their  efficiency  through  various  psychophysical  tests, 
including  visual,  hearing,  eye-foot  and  eye-finger 
reactions,  distance  judgment,  steadiness,  night  vision 
and  others  which  reveal  deficiencies  which  might 
prove  dangerous.  Strict  medical  examination  pre- 
scribed by  the  Federal  Government  is  given  and  dem- 
onstrations of  ability  in  vehicle  inspection,  starting 
and  driving  under  experts  are  required.  Instruments 
for  administering  these  tests  are  installed  in  a  "Mo- 
bile Safety  and  Personnel  Clinic"  which  travels 
through  the  11  states  and  to  the  19  terminals  to  ad- 
minister the  tests. 

Five  full-time  fleet  safety  engineers,  former  driv- 
ers, are  employed  to  inspect  vehicular  equipment  and 
terminals,  road  testing  for  drivers  and  observe 
drivers  in  action.  They  hold  periodic  safety  meet- 
ings with  the  drivers  stressing  various  preventive 
methods.  Late  in  1952  Johnson  Motor  Lines  insti- 
tuted a  program  in  prevention  of  personal  injuries 
which  so  impressed  the  compensation  insurance  car- 
rier, that  the  program  was  distributed  to  all  of  the 
branch  officers  of  the  insurance  carrier  as  an  exam- 
ple of  personal  injury  prevention  in  the  transporta- 
tion industry.  Safety  awards  are  given  annually  to 
freight  handlers  and  drivers  not  in  personal  injuries 
during  the  year.  The  company  adds  points  for  each 
non-accident  month  which  are  redeemable  for  elec- 
tric clocks,  luggage,  sporting  goods  and  other  mer- 
chandise. 

Johnson  Motor  Lines  points  with  pride  to  a  reduc- 
tion in  accident  frequency  in  1952  by  25%  of  the 
1951  record.  Since  inaugurating  this  program  the 
company  has  achieved  a  35%  reduction  in  the  num- 
ber of  compensable  Workmen's  Compensation  cases. 

J.  N.  Johnson,  president,  is  a  member  of  the  So- 
ciety of  Automotive  Engineers  of  America,  a  member 
of  the  National  Defense  Transportation  Association 
and  was  one  of  five  civilian  experts  on  Transporta- 
tion for  the  Federal  Government  during  World  War 
II.  He  is  a  Baptist,  Elk,  enjoys  hunting  and  fishing 
and  makes  a  hobby  of  collecting  old  vases  and  old 
coins. 

W.  A.  Johnson,  a  brother,  vice-president  of  opera- 
tions, is  a  member  of  the  Operations  Council  Ameri- 
can Trucking  Association.  He  is  a  Baptist,  Moose 
and  an  Elk,  enjoys  fishing  and  hunting  and  is  an 
expert  in  his  hobby  of  making  miniature  trucks. 

J.  D.  Kluttz,  executive  vice-president,  a  native  of 
Salisbury,  was  for  18  years  with  the  operating  de- 


partment of  the  Southern  Railway.  Later  he  ran  a 
direct  mail  advertising  service,  and  developed  sys- 
tematic controls  in  business  now  used  by  Johnson 
Motor  Lines.  His  official  duties  with  Horton  Motor 
Lines  rounded  out  his  experience  for  his  present  po- 
sition. He  is  a  member  of  the  Board  of  Governors 
of  Common  Carriers  Conference  and  Committee  of 
100  (composed  of  100  of  the  largest  motor  carriers 
in  the  nation)  of  American  Trucking  Association 
and  on  the  Board  of  Directors  of  the  North  Carolina 
Motor  Carriers  Association.  Mr.  Kluttz  belongs  to 
numbers  of  civic,  business  and  traffic  clubs,  is  a 
Presbyterian,  a  Mason  and  a  Shriner  and  finds  diver- 
sion in  golf. 


FREDRICKSON  MOTOR  EXPRESS  CORP. 
Charlotte 

Fredrickson  Motor  Express  Corp.,  3400  Hutchinson 
Ave.,  Charlotte,  organized  in  1919,  was  the  first  mo- 
tor carrier  to  operate  in  North  Carolina.  The  late 
Charles  H.  Fredrickson,  organizer,  began  by  driving 
one  truck  to  and  from  Statesville.  Now  the  firm  he 
started  is  the  largest  operating  entirely  within  the 
State  and  has  more  trucks  on  the  State's  highways 
than  any  other  North  Carolina  firm.  His  first  site 
was  located  on  East  11th  Street  and  two  or  three 
other  sites  were  used  before  the  home  office,  termi- 
nal and  garage  were  located  on  a  15-acre  site  on  the 
edge  of  Charlotte,  June  1,  1949. 

Gradually  Fredrickson  Motor  Express  extended 
its  lines  to  Greensboro,  Winston-Salem  and  Salis- 
bury. The  firm  was  incorporated  in  1926  with  an 
authorized  capital  of  $50,000.  At  that  time  the  firm 
operated  12  trucks  and  had  about  20  employees. 
Then  and  for  several  years  the  officers  were  Charles 
H.  Fredrickson,  president;  Mrs.  Carolyn  G.  Fred- 
rickson, vice-president,  and  W.  E.  Price,  secretary- 
treasurer. 

Fredrickson  Motor  Express  is  a  regular  route 
common  carrier  and  was  issued  North  Carolina 
Certificate  C-l,  the  first  issued  after  the  motor  car- 
riers' act  was  passed  in  1947  by  the  North  Carolina 
General  Assembly.  The  company  operates  to  about 
250  points  daily  within  the  State,  outlined  generally 
by  the  cities  of  Charlotte,  Hendersonville,  Asheville, 
Mount  Airy,  Burlington  area  and  Greensboro,  its 
lines  covering  most  of  the  Piedmont  and  mountain 
areas. 

Mr.  Fredrickson  died  in  1947  and  was  succeeded 
as  president  by  Mrs.  Fredrickson  (inactive).  Other 
officers  and  key  personnel  include  A.  Earl  Clontz, 
executive  vice-president  and  general  manager ;  W.  E. 


One  of  the  hefty  units  operated  by  Fredrickson  Motor 
Express  Corp.,  Charlotte. 


PAGE  98 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Price,  secretary-treasurer  (inactive)  ;  H.  L.  Neely, 
assistant  vice-president  and  assistant  secretary;  E. 
W.  Fredrickson,  son  of  the  founder,  assistant  treas- 
urer and  director  of  safety ;  R.  A.  Stephens,  traffic 
manager:  H.  B.  Smith,  sales  manager;  C.  E.  Med- 
ford,  claims  agent;  H.  L.  Carter,  superintendent  of 
transportation;  R.  W.  Brown,  superintendent  of 
maintenance,  and  J.  W.  Carpenter,  Charlotte  termi- 
nal manager. 

In  addition  to  the  Charlotte  headquarters,  includ- 
ing an  office  building  50  x  100  feet,  a  garage  50  x  200 
feet  and  the  terminal  60  x  250  feet,  Fredrickson 
maintains  terminals  in  Asheville,  Concord,  Gastonia, 
Greensboro,  Hendersonville,  Hickory,  High  Point, 
Lexington,  Marion,  Mount  Airy,  Salisbury,  Shelby, 
Statesville  and  Winston-Salem. 

Fredrickson  has  developed  its  within-the-State 
business  to  the  extent  that  the  gross  annual  income 
is  approximately  $2,250,000.  Its  plant  and  equip- 
ment, including  terminals  and  260  units,  embraced 
in  100  semi-trailers,  70  tractors  and  90  straight 
trucks,  are  valued  at  around  $750,000.  The  firm's 
capital  and  surplus  have  been  increased  to  $600,000. 
The  firm  has  an  average  of  325  employees  with  an 
annual  payroll  of  around  $1,200,000.  The  260  units 
travel  annually  approximately  four  million  miles  and 
haul  each  year  around  300,000,000  pounds  of  freight. 

Fredrickson's  Division  of  Safety  maintains  special 
safety  equipment  for  testing  drivers  before  they  take 
the  road  as  to  accuracy,  vision,  reflexes  and  other 
qualities  necessary  for  safe  driving.  Gifts  are  pre- 
sented annually  for  safe  driving  and  awards  are 
made  and  certificates  presented  for  outstanding  rec- 
ords in  motor  carrier  loss  prevention.  Last  April 
the  firm  was  presented  an  insurance  award  and  cer- 
tificate of  commendation  for  its  record  in  highway 
safety.  Annual  meetings  of  the  personnel  are  held 
in  the  various  terminals  at  which  safety  plans  and 
other  policies  of  the  company  are  outlined  by  Mr. 
Clontz,  executive  vice-president  and  general  man- 
ager. 

Fredrickson  has  built  its  extensive  business  on  the 
basis  of  broad  policies  established  by  "Charlie"  Fred- 
rickson, including  safe,  speedy  and  dependable  serv- 
ice, policies  which  have  been  maintained  and  con- 
tinued by  Mr.  Clontz. 


HENNIS  FREIGHT  LINES,  INC. 
Winston-Salem 

Hennis  Freight  Lines,  Inc.,  Box  612,  Winston- 
Salem,  had  its  beginning  in  Mount  Airy  in  1933  when 
two  brothers,  S.  A.  Hennis  and  H.  L.  Hennis,  formed 
a  partnership  and  started  hauling  freight  in  a  very 
small  way.  These  brothers  hauled  principally  man- 
ufactured  tobacco   products   and   furniture,   north- 


Power  and  space  mark  this   heavy  unit  operated   by   Hennis 
Freight  Lines,  Winston-Salem. 


bound,  with  return  movements  of  certain  specified 
commodities,  southbound.  The  original  operating 
rights  of  the  firm  were  acquired  under  the  Grand- 
father Clause  of  the  Motor  Carriers  Act,  administer- 
ed by  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission. 

S.  H.  Mitchell,  early  in  1945,  purchased  Hennib 
Freight  Lines,  incorporated  the  firm  under  its  origi- 
nal name,  moved  the  headquarters  to  Winston-Salem 
and  acquired  the  operating  rights  from  four  other 
companies.  At  the  time  of  the  purchase  the  equip- 
ment consisted  of  five  tractors  and  11  trailers. 
Through  acquiring  operating  privileges  of  these  four 
companies  the  scope  of  operations  has  been  expanded 
to  include  general  commodities  from  the  States  of 
North  Carolina,  South  Carolina  and  Virginia  to  Ohio, 
Indiana,  Michigan  and  the  Chicago  Commercial 
Zone  and  return,  and  to  haul  general  commodities  on 
the  East  Coast  between  North  and  South  Carolina 
points  and  Baltimore  and  Philadelphia. 

Under  Mr.  Mitchell's  leadership  this  company  has 
moved  forward  rapidly.  In  the  eight  years  of  his 
ownership  equipment  has  been  steadily  increased 
and  modernized,  new  buildings  have  been  erected 
and  new  terminals  established.  Beginning  with  less 
than  25  employees,  the  firm  now  employs  in  excess 
of  500  people  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around 
$3,000,000.  In  addition  to  the  home  office  and  term- 
inal in  Winston-Salem  the  firm  now  operates  15 
terminals,  located  in  Greenville,  S.  C. ;  Charlotte  and 
Greensboro,  N.  C. ;  Richmond  and  Norfolk,  Va. ;  Cin- 
cinnati, Columbus,  Toledo  and  Akron,  Ohio ;  Detroit, 
Chicago,  Indianapolis,  Baltimore  and  Philadelphia. 

Business  of  the  firm  has  expanded  to  such  an  ex- 
tent that  the  dollar  volume  now  runs  from  $6,500,000 
to  $7,000,000  a  year. 

Due  to  the  mountainous  terrain  which  is  traveled 
by  the  company  fleet,  the  equipment  necessarily  must 
be  extremely  heavy.  Present  equipment  is  of  the 
cab-over-diesel  type  with  sleeper  cabs  and  allows  two- 
man  operations.  Hennis  Freight  Lines  now  operates 
55  pick-ups  and  service  trucks,  154  tractors  and  310 
trailers.  Because  of  the  use  of  two-man  operations 
the  company  is  able  to  offer  a  transit  time  to  a  dis- 
tant point,  such  as  Chicago,  in  28  hours. 

Through  these  years  Mr.  Mitchell  has  always 
sought  to  perfect  new  operations  to  keep  modern 
and  thoroughly  up-to-date  and  to  add  departments 
and  systems  necessary  in  carrying  through  this  pro- 
gram. New  safety  measures  and  methods  are  being 
put  into  effect  constantly  by  the  Safety  and  Person- 
nel Department.  The  Accounting  Department  re- 
cently has  instituted  IBM  equipment  which  has  prov- 
ed a  valuable  aid.  Materials  dealing  with  rate  struc- 
tures and  decisions  involving  the  flow  of  traffic,  as 
well  as  ICC  hearings,  are  handled  by  the  Traffic  De- 
partment. The  Sales  Department  constantly  seeks 
to  keep  all  customers  informed  of  the  advantages  of 
Hennis  service  and  to  increase  that  service. 

All  phases  of  operation  of  the  many  terminals  is 
handled  by  the  Operating  Department.  Maintenance 
of  the  large  fleet  presents  many  problems  and  new 
methods  are  being  sought  constantly  and  are  being 
used  in  that  department  to  keep  the  equipment  roll- 
ing through  all  kinds  of  weather  and  all  types  of 
conditions.  Each  of  these  departments  plays  a  vital 
role  in  the  continued  growth  and  expansion  of  the 
firm. 

Officers  and  principal  management  personnel  of 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  99 


Hennis  Freight  Lines  include  S.  H.  Mitchell,  presi- 
jdent;  W.  R.  Moore,  vice-president;  C.  L.  Packard, 
secretary-treasurer;  Frank  C.  Philips,  traffic  man- 
lager  ;  Newell  G.  Colley,  general  sales  manager ;  W.  L. 
Frigon,  director  of  Industrial  Relations;  A.  C.  Vacca, 
operations  manager,  and  D.  L.  Ferguson,  mainten- 
ance sunerintendent. 


Heavy  Machinery 

TURNER  TRANSFER,  INC. 
Greensboro 

Turner  Transfer,  Inc.,  moving  engineers,  High 
Point  Road,  Greensboro,  was  started  in  1926  by  Guy 
M.  Turner  as  individual  owner,  thus  becoming  the 
oldest  interstate  operator  in  North  Carolina.  Al- 
though starting  modestly,  this  firm  has  developed  into 
the  largest  heavy  machinery  mover  in  the  State  and 
one  of  the  largest  in  the  nation,  operating  in  31  states 
in  the  nation,  in  Canada  and  Mexico  and  handling 
many  large  orders  to  foreign  nations  throughout  the 
world. 

When  Mr.  Turner  started  operation  with  equip- 
ment valued  at  $10,000  to  $12,000,  his  firm  was  then 
the  best  and  largest  of  its  kind  in  the  State.  During 
the  27  years  of  operation  Turner  Transfer  has  con- 
tinued to  maintain  this  position  of  leadership.  In 
1945  Mr.  Turner  opened  an  office  and  built  a  termi- 
nal at  Lorane,  five  miles  from  Reading,  Pa.  This 
site  has  been  developed  until  it  compares  favorably 
with  the  modern  terminal  and  storage  group  of  build- 
ings just  outside  the  city  limits  of  Greensboro. 

Prior  to  1948  the  firm's  name  was  Turner's  Trans- 
fer. In  that  year  the  firm  was  chartered  as  Turner 
Transfer,  Inc.,  with  1,000  shares  of  stock  at  no  par 
value.  Officers  are  Guy  M.  Turner,  president  and 
treasurer;  F.  D.  Turner,  his  brother,  vice-president, 
and  W.  C.  Collard,  secretary.  The  two  Turner 
brothers  and  W.  C.  Collard,  Greensboro,  form  the 
board  of  directors. 

At  present  Turner  Transfer  owns  the  two  plants 
and  equipment  valued  at  approximately  $1,000,000. 
The  firm  employs  approximately  125  workers,  about 
half  in  North  Carolina  and  the  other  half  at  the 
northern  headquarters  near  Reading,  Pa.  The  an- 
nual payroll  at  both  places  is  approximately  $365,- 
000.  Group  health  accident  insurance  is  carried  on 
all  employees  and  salaries  are  paid  continuously  while 
workers  are  out  due  to  sickness  or  injury.  A  48- 
hour  work  week  is  observed. 

Turner  Transfer  has  established  a  splendid  repu- 
tation for  efficient,  speedy  and  satisfactory  opera- 
tions. While  it  handles  all  types  of  machinery,  the 
reputation  has  been  developed  through  handling 
large  and  heavy  machines.  On  numerous  occasions 
this   firm   has   moved   30-section   hosiery   machines 


Heavy  machine.  5Jt  feet  long,  weighing  21  tons,  crated  for  ship- 
ment to  Germany  by  Turner  Transfer,  Greensboro. 


DC-d,  sans  wings  and  landing  gear,  loaded  on  tractor  and  semi- 
trailer of  Turner  Transfer,  Greensboro. 

weighing  21  tons  and  with  dimensions  of  54  feet 
long,  six  feet  high  and  4  3/10  feet  wide.  One  of  its 
recent  feats  was  moving  a  tie  knitting  machine 
weighing  14  tons  from  the  ninth  floor  of  a  building 
just  off  Fifth  Avenue  in  the  heart  of  New  York  City 
and  transporting  it  to  a  new  site  on  Long  Island. 
Another  recent  achievement  was  placing  six  dryer 
and  mixer  rotary  tanks  weighing  40  tons  and  40  feet 
long  by  11  feet  in  diameter  on  the  second  and  third 
floors  of  a  new  building.  Hosiery  machines  have 
been  moved  through  the  years  for  Mock,  Judson, 
Voehringer  Co.,  Greensboro;  the  Celanese  Corpora- 
tion of  America,  New  York  City;  Julius  Keyser  & 
Co.,  Quebec;  Phenix  Hosiery  Co.,  Milwaukee,  Wis- 
consin; Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Charlotte,  and  numer- 
ous others. 

Among  its  activities  Turner  Transfer  has  cocoon- 
ed,  crated  and  transported  heavy  machinery  and  de- 
livered it  to  ports  of  debarkation  to  such  faraway 
places  as  South  Africa,  Venezuela,  Puerto  Rico,  Mex- 
ico, Ireland,  England,  France,  Germany  and  other 
foreign  countries.  Usually  a  representative  of  a 
firm  follows  the  shipments  to  foreign  countries  to 
make  sure  they  are  handled  properly  and  reach  their 
destinations  in  splendid  conditions.  In  the  Greens- 
boro and  Reading  shops  are  carpenters,  experienced 
in  wrapping  these  heavy  machines  in  cocoon, 
a  moisture  resistant 
plastic,  and  build- 
ing around  the  ma- 
chines wooden 
crates  to  prevent 
outside   damage. 

Turner  Transfer 
owns  and  operates 
six  Tandem  trac- 
tors with  40  feet 
semi-trailers  opera- 
ting on  18  wheels 
with  10.00  by  22 
tires.  These  tractors 
can  handle  72,000 
pounds  without  ov- 
erloading. In  addi- 
tion, the  firm  op- 
erates 40  tractors 
and  50  t  r  a  i  1  e  r  s  . 
Most  of  the  tractors 
and  trailers  used  by 

Turne.r  Transfer     Turnpr  Tra)lf.fn.  10'lcerinf/iJ,-ton  ma- 
are    equipped  _  With        chinej  ^  feet  iongt  from  seventh 
Gardner  engines  floor  in  Mihvaulcee,  Wis. 


sscBb- 


PAGE  1 00 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


built  in  England.  In  its  machine  shops  the  firm 
builds  its  own  bodies  in  addition  to  overhauling  and 
repairing  its  rolling  stock.  The  company  has  devel- 
oped numbers  of  improvements  on  its  equipment, 
several  of  which  have  been  copyrighted. 

Guy  M.  Turner  is  the  moving  force  behind  the  de- 
velopment and  expansion  of  Turner  Transfer.  A 
native  of  Clifton  Forge,  Virginia,  he  was  a  locomo- 
tive engineer  on  the  C  &  0  Railroad  running  from 
Cincinnati  to  Chicago  for  a  few  years.  Later  he 
started  trucking  in  Peru,  Indiana,  and  then  moved 
to  more  open  territory,  locating  in  Greensboro  in 
1926. 


YOUNGBLOOD  TRUCK  LINES,  INC. 
Fletcher 

Youngblood  Truck  Lines,  Inc.,  Fletcher,  had  its 
beginning  in  1933  when  J.  N.  Youngblood,  who  had 
operated  a  garage  at  Fletcher  for  several  years,  be- 
gan operating  one  truck  for  hire  which  he  drove  him- 
self. His  principal  activity  was  hauling  paper  from 
Canton  to  points  in  Ohio  and  bringing  back  any  kind 
of  freight  he  could  secure.  He  also  hauled  general 
commodities  between  points  in  the  Carolinas,  Geor- 
gia, Tennessee  and  Ohio.  Today  this  firm  has  a  gross 
income  of  approximately  $2,500,000  annually. 

In  1935  when  the  Motor  Carriers  Act  was  passed, 
Mr.  Youngblood  was  certified  to  haul  general  com- 
modities in  the  six  states  listed  above.  By  1937  he 
had  five  trucks  in  operation  and  opened  up  the  term- 
inal at  Fletcher.  His  business  continued  to  prosper 
and  by  1940  he  had  approximately  20  units  and  about 
20  employees.  Here  he  erected  a  larger  terminal  and 
established  his  own  garage  and  tire-capping  plant. 
In  the  next  few  years  he  added  additional  equipment 
and  opened  up  additional  terminals  at  Cincinnati, 
Spartanburg  and  Greenville,  S.  C,  and  Charlotte. 
Still  later  terminals  were  opened  at  Louisville,  Ky. ; 
Akron,  Ohio;  Columbia  and  Charleston,  S.  C,  and 
at  Hickory. 

Operating  the  business  as  private  owner  under  the 
name  of  J.  N.  Youngblood  Truck  Lines,  the  firm  was 
incorporated  under  its  present  name  July  1,  1948. 
J.  N.  Youngblood  is  president  and  general  manager; 
J.  C.  Youngblood,  vice-president  and  assistant  gen- 
eral manager ;  O.  G.  Tandy,  secretary-treasurer  and 
sales  manager.  These  are  the  directors  of  the  cor- 
poration. Other  executives  are  W.  H.  Youngblood, 
operations  manager;  S.  N.  Youngblood,  Western 
Carolina  salesman;  H.  B.  Sinclair,  traffic  manager; 
P.  D.  Kiser,  office  manager,  and  R.  H.  Marshall, 
auditor. 

Youngblood  Truck  Lines  has  a  gross  income  of 
approximately  $2,500,000,  with  capital  and  surplus 
of  $320,000  and  plant  and  equipment,  including  the 
ten  terminals  and  rolling  stock,  are  valued  around 
$1,000,000.  The  firm  now  operates  265  units,  em- 
ploying around  250  workers  with  an  annual  payroll 
of  $800,000.  Of  these,  about  185  workers  operate  in 
and  out  of  North  Carolina,  drawing  salaries  and 
wages  of  about  $550,000.  The  company  owns  a  ten- 
acre  site  for  the  home  office,  garage,  terminal  and 
capping  plant  at  Fletcher. 

The  company  established  a  safety  department 
about  two  years  ago.  In  conjunction  with  contribu- 
tions from  the  employees,  the  company  maintains 
group,  life,  health,  accident  and  hospitalization  in- 
surance for  the  employees. 


Modern  trucks  at  home  terminal  of  Helms  Motor  Express 
in  Albemarle. 

HELMS  MOTOR  EXPRESS,  INC. 
Albemarle 

Helms  Motor  Express,  Inc.,  Albemarle,  was  organ- 
ized by  Carl  L.  Helms,  Sr.,  in  April,  i929,  with  three 
Chevrolet  units  used  in  hauling  mercnandise  between 
Albemarle  and  Charlotte.  This  firm  has  developed 
over  the  years  into  one  of  the  important  trucking- 
companies  in  North  Carolina  operating  entirely 
within  the  State.     Mr.  Helms  died  in  1931. 

Helms  Motor  Express  was  incorporated  Septem- 
ber 1,  1951,  with  $75,000  of  paid-in  capital  held  by 
Mrs.  A.  D.  Burton,  his  widow ;  A.  D.  Burton  and  C.  L. 
Helms,  Jr.  Officers  at  that  time  were  A.  D.  Burton, 
president  and  general  manager;  Carl  L.  Helms,  Jr., 
vice-president,  and  Mrs.  A.  D.  Burton,  secretary  and 
treasurer.  As  of  May  1,  1953,  the  stock  interests  of 
Mrs.  A.  D.  Burton  and  Carl  Helms,  Jr.,  were  pur- 
chased by  T.  F.  Morgan,  J.  R.  Helderrnan,  F.  L. 
Priester  and  R.  L.  Brown.  Present  officers  of  the 
company  are  T.  F.  Morgan,  president ;  J.  R.  Helder- 
rnan, vice-president;  F.  L.  Priester,  secretary  and 
treasurer;  R.  L.  Brown,  Jr.,  general  counsel,  and  A. 
D.  Burton,  general  manager.  E.  J.  Pondo  is  assist- 
ant treasurer  and  controller. 

Helms  Motor  Express  holds  franchises  as  a  com- 
mon carrier  of  general  commodities,  some  of  the 
principal  items  of  which  are  rugs,  yarn,  hosiery, 
canned  goods,  auto  parts,  confections,  electrical  ap- 
pliances, tires  and  tubes.  The  firm,  operating  en- 
tirely in  North  Carolina,  serves  areas  in  the  vicini- 
ties of  its  principal  terminals  of  Albemarle,  Ashe- 
boro,  Charlotte,  Durham,  Fayetteville,  Goldsboro, 
Greensboro,  Greenville,  Raleigh,  Sanford  and  Troy, 
with  call  stations  in  Burlington,  High  Point,  Salis- 
bury and  Dunn. 

Helms  Motor  Express  has  developed  its  business 
until  it  has  an  annual  gross  revenue  of  approximate- 
ly $800,000.  The  firm  operates  150  transportation 
units  and  has  an  average  of  175  employees  with  an 
annual  payroll  of  approximately  $342,000.  In  addi- 
tion to  the  home  office  and  terminal  the  firm  operates 
a  garage  at  the  Albemarle  site. 


KILGO  MOTOR  FREIGHT,  INC. 
Charlotte 

Kilgo  Motor  Freight,  Inc.,  2041-9  South  Tryon 
Street,  Charlotte,  one  of  the  oldest  motor  freight 
carriers  in  the  South,  now  operates  from  Charleston, 
S.  C,  to  New  York  City  and  produces  an  annual  gross 
income  in  excess  of  one  and  one-third  million  dollars. 

When  John  C.  Kilgo,  a  young  man  with  $450,  set- 
tled in  Charlotte  in  1920,  he  bought  one  truck  with 
open  cab,  carbide  lights,  no  windshield,  a  straight 
body  and  solid  tires,  and  began  moving,  storage  and 
trucking  operations.  One  of  Mr.  Kilgo's  principal 
activities  was  hauling  dynamite  for  blasting  pur- 
poses over  routes  without  roads  and  to  points  which 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  101 


later  became  places.  Long  trips  were  rare  as  were 
good  roads  in  those  days.  In  1923  Mr.  Kilgo  pur- 
chased another  truck  and  added  a  driver,  mechanic 
and  one  other  helper. 

In  1926  Kilgo  Transfer  Co.  was  incorporated  with 
an  authorized  capital  of  $50,000  and  with  $5,000  paid 
in.  At  that  time  gross  receipts  amounted  to  around 
$50,000,  the  company  operating  four  pieces  of  equip- 
ment and  having  seven  employees.  John  C.  Kilgo 
was  president;  Mrs.  Rutli  R.  Kilgo,  his  wife,  was 
vice-president,  secretary  and  stenographer,  and  H. 
M.  White  was  treasurer.  These  officers  were  direc- 
tors of  the  new  corporation. 

By  1940  the  firm  had  20  employees  and  operated 
21  pieces  of  equipment.  Gross  annual  receipts  had 
reached  $109,000.  Six  years  later  tne  gross  receipts 
were  $285,000.  Fifty  workers  were  employed  and 
31  pieces  of  equipment  were  in  operation. 

In  1950  the  firm  amended  its  charter,  changing  the 
name  from  Kilgo  Transfer  Co.,  Inc.,  to  Kilgo  Motor 
Freight,  Inc. 

Last  year  Kilgo  Motor  Freight  had  gross  receipts 
of  approximately  $1,390,000,  operated  75  pieces 
of  equipment  with  a  valuation  of  around  $155,000. 
Mr.  Kilgo  individually  owns  the  office  building,  ga- 
rage and  terminals.  Capital  and  surplus  is  placed  at 
$65,000  and  the  hrm  now  employs  147  workers  with 
an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $500,000. 

Kilgo  Motor  Freight  is  authorized  to  haul  general 
commodities,  one  important  item  of  which  is  all 
classes  of  high  explosives.  Other  important  items 
handled  are  textiles,  paints,  machinery,  finished 
rugs,  floor  coverings  and  clothing.  In  spite  of  the 
danger  involved  in  handling  high  explosives  no  deaths 
have  been  caused  to  the  public  as  a  result  of  the 
operation  of  Kilgo  trucks  in  the  33  years  of  opera- 
tion and  only  one  driver  has  been  killed  while  on 
duty. 

In  addition  to  the  general  office,  garage  and  termi- 
nal in  Charlotte,  Kilgo  maintains  sales  offices  in  New 
York  and  Charlotte.  Terminals  are  operated  in  New 
York  City,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. ;  Philadelphia,  Pa. ; 
Baltimore,  Md. ;  Raleigh  and  Hickory,  N.  C. ;  Colum- 
bia, Charleston,  Darlington  and  Greenville,  S.  C, 
and  receiving  stations  are  located  in  New  York  City 
and  Long  Island  City,  N.  Y. 

Kilgo  operates  a  profit  sharing  bonus  plan  by 
means  of  which  20%  of  the  gross  earnings  of  the 
company  are  distributed  to  the  employees  on  an  equal 
basis.  For  this  purpose  the  fiscal  year  ends  Novem- 
ber 30. 

Kilgo  holds  quarterly  sales,  operations  and  safety 
conferences  for  terminal  managers,  traffic  represent- 
atives  and  drivers.  Each  year  an  annual  banquet  is 
held  around  Christmastime  for  white  and  colored  em- 
ployees, separately,  at  which  safety  awards  and  other 
prizes  are  presented. 

The  company  provides  group  life  insurance  and 
hospitalization  with  surgery  for  all  of  its  employees. 
Paid  vacations  are  provided  for  all  employees  who 
meet  the  length  of  service  requirements. 

Mr.  Kilgo  owns  a  rustic  lodge  on  Lake  Hickory, 
near  Hickory,  to  which  all  white  employees  have  ac- 
cess. He  also  makes  accessible  to  his  employees  a 
lake  on  his  farm  near  Mint  Hill  in  Mecklenburg 
County. 

Present  officers  of  Kilgo  Motor  Freight  include 
John  C.  Kilgo,  president;  R.  E.  Hall,  his  son-in-law, 


Fleet  of  trucks  operated   by  Kilgo  Motor  Freight,   Charlotte. 

executive  vice-president  and  general  manager;  J.  L. 
Kendrick,  vice-president  and  general  traffic  man- 
ager ;  T.  C.  Brown,  secretary  and  controller,  and  Mrs. 
Ruth  K.  Hall,  daughter  of  the  president  and  wife  of 
the  executive  vice-president,  is  treasurer  of  the  com- 
pany. Other  department  heads  are  T.  C.  Mcllhenny, 
assistant  general  traffic  manager;  J.  W.  Brooks, 
operations  manager;  J.  F.  Howell,  sales  manager; 
W.  F.  Rothwell,  maintenance  supervisor,  and  J.  D. 
Willis,  office  manager. 

John  C.  Kilgo,  founder  of  the  firm,  is  a  native  of 
Durham  and  the  son  of  Bishop  John  C.  Kilgo  of  the 
Methodist  Church,  who  was  for  a  number  of  years 
president  of  Trinity  College  (now  Duke  University) . 
Mr.  Kilgo  was  in  the  U.  S.  Army  in  World  War  I  and 
was  discharged  in  1919.  In  the  next  year  he  located 
in  Charlotte,  purchased  a  truck,  paying  $450  down, 
and  began  trucking,  warehousing  and  moving  opera- 
tions. He  did  all  the  work  himself  for  about  two 
years.  Then  he  was  able  to  add  his  second  truck  and 
hire  a  driver.  By  hard  work  and  close  application 
he  has  developed  his  trucking  business  into  a  very 
successful  and  satisfactory  enterprise.  Although  di- 
recting the  freight  line,  he  has  turned  over  many  of 
the  details  of  the  operations  to  his  son-in-law,  R.  E. 
Hall,  who  has  become  executive  vice-president  and 
general  manager. 


LEWIS  &  HOLMES  MOTOR  FREIGHT  CORP. 
High  Point 

Lewis  &  Holmes  Motor  Freight  Corp.,  North  Main 
Street,  High  Point,  was  started  in  1930  when  D.  M. 
Lewis  and  N.  P.  Holmes  purchased  a  Ford  one  and 
one-half  ton  truck  and  started  hauling  new  furniture, 
desks  and  caskets  from  High  Point  to  points  in  North 
Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Georgia,  Florida,  Alabama 
and  Tennessee.  This  firm  thus  became  the  second 
oldest  freight  operator  from  the  Carolinas  to  At- 
lanta. 

In  1933  the  business  was  incorporated  with  author- 
ized capital  of  $100,000.  D.  M.  Lewis  is  president, 
N.  P.  Holmes,  vice-president ;  William  D.  Lewis,  sec- 
retary-treasurer and  general  manager,  and  Robert 
B.  Stanley  is  traffic  manager.  The  three  principal 
officers  compose  the  board  of  directors. 

Lewis  &  Holmes  operates  its  trucks  over  1,500,000 
miles  of  routes  annually.  Its  plant  and  equipment, 
including  three  additional  terminals  in  North  Caro- 
lina, are  now  valued  at  approximately  $500,000.  The 
firm  employs  approximately  100  workers  and  has  an 
annual  payroll  of  approximately  $300,000. 

Its  North  Carolina  terminals,  in  addition  to  the 
headquarters  at  High  Point,  are  located  at  Winston- 
Salem,  Greensboro  and  Charlotte,  while  terminals 
are  also  operated  in  Spartanburg,  Greenville  and  Co- 


PAGE  1  02 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


lumbia,  South  Carolina,  and  Atlanta  and  Augusta, 
Georgia.  A  new  terminal  building  was  recently  com- 
pleted at  Atlanta.  Authority  is  granted  for  regular 
routes  throughout  North  Carolina,  west  of  Highway 
301  or  west  of  a  Weldon  to  Rowland  line.  The  firm 
also  operates  routes  throughout  South  Carolina  and 
in  Georgia  north  of  Highway  80,  roughly  a  line  from 
Columbus  to  Savannah.  Forty  tractors  and  semi- 
trailers and  30  straight  trucks  are  operated  in  the 
three  states — a  far  cry  from  the  one  small  truck 
with  which  this  firm  started  23  years  ago. 


HARRIS  EXPRESS, 

Charlotte 


INC. 


Harris  Express,  Inc.,  1425  North  Tryon  St.,  Char- 
lotte, established  by  L.  Worth  Harris  and  his  brother, 
C.  D.  Harris,  as  Harris  Brothers  and  later  Harris 
Brothers  Transfer  Co.,  emerged  from  the  horse  and 
wagon  days  and  in  1928  was  among  the  first  to  mod- 
ernize local  drayage  in  Charlotte  and  enter  into  long 
distance  moving  of  household  furniture.  The  firm 
now  operates  more  than  200  units  in  hauling  com- 
modities from  the  two  Carolinas  to  New  York  City 
and  intermediate  points. 

In  the  early  1930s  L.  Worth  Harris  visualized  the 
need  for  speedier  transportation  of  general  commod- 
ities to  eliminate  warehousing  and  cut  down  inven- 
tories, established  his  firm's  first  long  distance  ope- 
rations, placing  five  units  in  operation  in  1933  to 
Baltimore,  Philadelphia  and  New  York  City.  In  ear- 
ly 1937  the  firm  purchased  Glosson-Hancock,  which 
was  operating  ten  pieces  of  equipment  in  the  same 
territory,  but  which  had  broader  operations  author- 
ity over  Philadelphia  and  New  York  State,  thus  al- 
lowing the  company  to  expand  its  operations.  In 
1943  Harris  Express  purchased  the  Hemings  Ex- 
press operating  authority  which  gave  it  additional 
territory  in  New  Jersey.  In  1948  the  company  was 
incorporated  under  its  present  name.  At  that  time 
it  had  66  units  of  rolling  equipment  and  employed 
about  75  workers. 

Harris  Express  today  operates  regular  service  be- 
tween Greenville,  Spartanburg  and  Rock  Hill,  S.  C, 
and  Charlotte,  Burlington  and  Greensboro,  to  points 
in  Delaware,  District  of  Columbia,  Maryland,  Penn- 
sylvania, New  Jersey  and  New  York  with  irregular 
routes  into  various  other  points  in  North  and  South 
Carolina.     Dependable  connecting  carriers  provide 


through  service  to  the  company's  lines  in  the  east 
and  in  the  south.  Terminals  are  maintained  in  New 
York,  Paterson  and  New  Brunswick,  New  Jersey; 
Philadelphia,  Pa. ;  Baltimore,  Md.,  and  in  Burlington, 
Greensboro  and  Charlotte,  N.  C,  and  Spartanburg 
and  Greenville,  S.  C.  Warehouses  and  contents  at 
these  points  are  fully  protected  from  loss  or  damage 
by  fire  or  water.  Cargo  insurance  covers  the  con- 
tents of  all  these  units. 

Harris  Express  has  developed  to  such  an  extent 
that  its  gross  annual  income  ranges  around  $2,500,- 
000.  The  firm  now  operates  205  units  of  rolling 
equipment  and  employs  an  average  of  260  workers 
with  an  annual  payroll  in  the  neighborhood  of 
$800,000. 

Early  in  1952  the  company  inaugurated  an  expan- 
sion program  and  all  terminals  were  enlarged  and 
modernized  and  all  cf  the  offices,  including  those  at 
terminals,  are  fully  air-conditioned.  Harris  Express 
is  now  in  the  process  of  changing  its  entire  fleet  of 
tractors  to  cab-over-engine  equipment,  a  move  which 
will  increase  trailer  length  by  two  feet,  which  pro- 
vides for  the  addition  of  an  extra  tier  of  textile  cases, 
substantially  improving  the  load  factor. 

Harris  Express  takes  just  pride  in  being  the  first 
motor  carrier  in  the  nation  to  achieve  the  distinction 
of  winning  a  grand  slam  award  for  safety — the  Lib- 
erty Mutual  Life  Insurance  Co.  outstanding  achieve- 
ment award  in  all  three  fields  of  loss  prevention,  ve- 
hicle accident,  employee  injuries  and  cargo  loss  and 
damage  prevention.  This  unusual  record  includes 
150,812  miles  per  vehicle  accident,  375,856  man  hours 
without  loss  of  time  for  accident  of  operating  per- 
sonnel and  cargo  loss  and  damage  of  34/100  of  one 
percent  of  gross  revenue.  In  achieving  this  remark- 
able record  Harris  Express  takes  great  pride  in  the 
men  who  drive  the  Harris  fleet  and  other  personnel 
making  the  record  possible. 

Officers  and  directors  of  Harris  Express  are  L. 
Worth  Harris,  president  and  treasurer ;  C.  D.  Harris, 
executive  vice-president;  S.  H.  Roddey,  vice-presi- 
dent— in  charge  of  traffic;  R.  H.  Booe,  Jr.,  vice- 
president — in  charge  of  sales ;  J.  P.  Carpenter,  vice- 
president — in  charge  of  operations,  and  Miss  Mary 
Mears,  secretary. 


Modern  home  office  building  of  Harris  Express  at 
Charlotte  terminal. 


S.  &  W.  MOTOR  LINES,  INC. 
Greensboro 

S.  &  W.  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  High  Point  Road, 
Greensboro,  was  started  in  1931  as  the  partnership 
composed  of  George  H.  Sharp  and  C.  E.  Williams, 
both  of  whom  operated  the  two  trucks  owned  by  the 
partnership.  Since  that  time  the  firm  has  expanded 
to  such  an  extent  that  gross  income  from  the  busi- 
ness for  this  year  will  approach  $1,000,000. 

After  the  partners  operated  the  two  trucks  for 
about  two  years,  Mr.  Sharp  purchased  the  interest 
of  Mr.  Williams  and  operated  the  firm  as  individual 
owner  until  April,  1950,  when  the  business  was  in- 
corporated. Mr.  Sharp  became  president  and  treas- 
urer, Mrs.  G.  H.  Sharp  and  J.  R.  Brown,  Jr.,  vice- 
presidents,  and  Boyd  C.  Royal  became  secretary  and 
general  manager.  These  four  officers  are  the  direc- 
tors of  the  company.  The  authorized  capital  was 
$100,000  of  which  $75,000  was  paid  in. 

S.  &  W.  Motor  Lines  is  engaged  primarily  in  the 
transportation  south  of  rayon  yarn  to  the  textile 
mills  in  North  and  South  Carolina  and  the  north- 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  03 


Attractive  and  modern  home  office  of  8  <&  W  Motor  Lines, 
Greensboro. 

bound  movement  is  principally  cigarettes  and  new 
furniture  from  points  in  North  Carolina  to  points  in 
Ohio,  Pennsylvania  and  West  Virginia.  Starting 
with  only  two  trucks  22  years  ago  the  firm  now  ope- 
rates a  fleet  of  55  tractors  and  78  trailers.  The  an- 
nual payroll  for  the  average  of  55  employees  is  ap- 
proximately $200,000. 

Due  to  remarkable  increase  in  the  business  han- 
dled, S.  &  W.  Motor  Lines  in  1949  built  a  modern 
new  office,  a  warehouse  and  terminal  located  on  the 
High  Point  Road  just  south  of  Greensboro.  The 
office  is  of  brick  construction  and  two  stories  high. 
The  warehouse  has  24  loading  doors  and  thus  can 
accommodate  24  units  at  one  time.  The  modern  and 
complete  garage  keeps  the  rolling  stock  in  going 
condition. 

Mr.  Sharp,  president  and  founder  of  the  firm,  has 
been  engaged  in  the  trucking  business  since  reaching 
early  manhood.  Mr.  Royal,  secretary  and  general 
manager,  an  employee  of  the  Southern  Railroad  for 
15  years,  has  been  associated  with  S.  &  W.  Motor 
Lines  for  the  past  seven  years.  J.  R.  Brown,  vice- 
president,  has  been  in  the  trucking  business  prac- 
tically all  of  his  life  and  with  the  S.  &  W.  Motor  Lines 
for  the  past  seven  years,  also  serving  as  traffic  man- 
ager and  in  charge  of  solicitation. 


THE  NEW  DIXIE  LINES,  INC. 
Richmond,  Va. 

The  New  Dixie  Lines,  Inc.,  with  home  offices  in 
Richmond,  Va.,  has  established  five  terminals  in 
principal  North  Carolina  cities  during  the  past  eight 
years  ,  handling  general  commodities  and  serving 
almost  all  of  North  Carolina  on  and  east  of  Route  29. 

This  firm  was  organized  early  in  1942  and  all  capi- 
tal stock  was  purchased  by  J.  D.  Brothers,  president, 
and  W.  F.  Grinels,  vice-president  and  treasurer,  on 
September  23,  1945,  at  which  time  the  firm  began 
its  expansion  from  Virginia  into  North  Carolina  and 
South  Carolina.  The  first  terminal  was  established 
in  Greensboro  shortly  after  control  was  secured  by 
Mr.  Brothers  and  Mr.  Grinels  and  as  the  company 
expanded  additional  terminals  were  opened  at  Rocky 
Mount  and  Charlotte. 

In  September,  1952,  the  company  purchased  the 
operating  authority  and  certain  rolling  stock  and 
real  estate  from  the  Gibbs  Wood  Transport  Co.  of 
Raleigh.  With  this  authority,  New  Dixie  inaugurated 
an  intrastate  common  carrier  service  supplement- 
ing the  interstate  service  which  they  had  been  ren- 
dering from  Richmond.  Following  the  acquisition 
of  this  additional  authority,  additional  terminals 
were  opened  at  Raleigh,  Kinston  and  Wilmington. 

In  July,  1953,  New  Dixie  acquired  the  franchise 
formerly  held  by  Cruse  Transfer  Co.,  of  Concord, 
which  authorized  service  en  general  commodities  be- 
tween all  points  in  Cabarrus  County  and  between 
Cabarrus  County  and  all  points  within  75  miles  of 


Concord.  The  franchise  also  authorized  transporta- 
tion of  household  goods,  textile  goods  and  supplies 
between  all  points  in  the  State. 

On  October  14,  1953,  New  Dixie  acquired  all  of  the 
Virginia  authority  of  the  Jocie  Motor  Lines.  This 
additional  authority  will  enable  New  Dixie  to  render 
a  general  commodity  service  from  all  points  within 
a  35  mile  radius  of  Clover,  S.  C,  to  all  points  in  Vir- 
ginia with  the  exception  of  seven  counties  in  the 
Norfolk  area. 

The  North  Carolina  division  managers  include  D. 
W.  Holmes  at  Greensboro,  P.  M.  Berry  at  Charlotte, 
M.  P.  Wood  at  Raleigh,  L.  M.  McLean  at  Rocky 
Mount,  C.  W.  Bright  at  Kinston  and  L.  E.  Jones  at 
Wilmington. 

New  Dixie  operates  approximately  200  units  con- 
sisting of  62  tractors,  82  trailers,  57  pickups  and 
service  trucks  and  automobiles.  The  firm  employs 
approximately  300  persons  with  an  annual  payroll 
in  excess  of  $825,000. 


W.  R.  CANDLER  TRANSFER  CO. 

Asheville 

W.  R.  Candler  Transfer  Co.,  400  Swannanoa 
Road,  Asheville,  was  established  in  1919  by  W.  R. 
Candler,  a  western  North  Carolina  pioneer  in  the 
transfer  business.  Solid  tire  trucks,  the  type  of  that 
era,  were  used  by  Mr.  Candler  in  his  initial  opera- 
tions. He  now  operates  35  large  trucks,  tractors 
and  trailers  over  the  western  section  of  North  Caro- 
lina and  to  Baltimore,  Philadelphia  and  New  York. 

Actually  Mr.  Candler  started  his  hauling  with  a 
wagon  and  team  in  1906,  working  for  others.  One 
of  his  early  important  assignments  was  hauling  stone 
and  other  material  used  in  the  construction  of  Grove 
Park  Inn  in  1911-1912  for  Mr.  E.  W.  Grove,  the  own- 
er. The  first  trucks  with  solid  tires  were  acquired 
in  1912.  Mr.  Candler  never  drove  a  truck  himself. 
He  continued  working  for  others  until  1919  when  he 
started  in  business  for  himself  with  three  small  one 
and  one-half  ton  trucks  and  four  or  five  employees. 
During  that  time  most  of  the  hauling  was  done  in 
Asheville  with  occasional  outside  trips. 

When  the  Motor  Truck  Act  was  passed  in  1935  and 
operation  put  under  direction  of  the  Interstate  Com- 
merce Commission,  Mr.  Candler  was  issued  certifi- 
cates under  the  Grandfather  Clause.  By  that  time 
he  had  begun  operations  to  Washington,  Baltimore 
and  New  York.  He  then  owned  two  or  three  large 
trucks  and  two  or  three  smaller  trucks.  He  was  also 
given  rights  for  intrastate  operation  in  about  20 
counties  in  western  North  Carolina.  He  also  secured 
general  commodity  carrier  rights  for  hauling  house- 
hold goods  in  12  states,  covering  the  southeast  from 
the  state  of  Florida,  into  Ohio  and  Pennsylvania. 
These  operating  rights  cover  about  2,000  miles  of 
highway  routes. 

Late  last  year  the  office,  garage  and  terminal  on 


Recently  completed  general  offices  and  terminal  of  W.  R. 
Candler  Transfer  Co.,  Asheville. 


PAGE  1 04 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Clingman  Avenue  in  Asheville  was  burned.  During 
the  first  half  of  this  year  Mr.  Candler  built  an  entire- 
ly new  and  modern  office  building,,  terminal  and 
garage  at  400  Swannanoa  Rd.  and  moved  into  these 
new  quarters  about  the  middle  of  3953. 

Business  of  W.  R.  Candler  Transfer  Co.  has  de- 
veloped until  the  firm  now  has  gross  income  of  ap- 
proximately $500,000  and  plant  and  equipment  have 
a  valuation  of  around  $275,000.  The  firm  now  ope- 
rates 35  large  trucks,  tractors  and  trailers  handling 
about  16,958  tons  of  freight  annually  and  traveling 
over  1,000,000  miles  during  a  year.  It  has  an  aver- 
age of  65  employees  with  an  annual  pavroll  of  around 
$195,000. 

Mr.  Candler  continues  as  sole  owner  of  the  busi- 
ness which  has  never  been  incorporated.  His  prin- 
cipal assistants  are  Homer  S.  Robinson,  general 
manager,  who  started  as  a  truck  driver  with  the  firm 
20  years  ago,  and  J.  B.  Sorrels,  traffic  manager  with 
the  firm  for  five  years.  Mr.  Candler  is  a  native  of 
Madison  County,  but  when  he  was  15  years  old,  his 
father  died  and  he  moved  to  Asheville  and  started  to 
work.  Most  of  his  life  has  been  spent  in  the  transfer 
business  with  either  team  and  wagon  in  the  earlier 
years  or  with  motor  equipment. 


based  on  earnings  of  the  company  and  incomes  of  the 
individuals.  Safe  driving  is  one  of  the  important 
points  stressed  by  the  company. 


JOCIE  MOTOR  LINES.  INC. 
Charlotte 

Jocie  Motor  Lines,  2115  North  Tryon  St.,  Char- 
lotte, was  organized  in  1931  as  Josie  Transfer  Co.  by 
Joe  C.  Barefoot  and  his  son,  J.  W.  Barefoot.  Form- 
erly his  father,  Jocie  C,  from  which  comes  "Jocie", 
with  help  from  his  son,  had  operated  a  small  local 
transfer  company.  When  the  firm  started,  it  had 
only  two  pieces  of  rolling  equipment  and  operated  as 
an  irregular  common  carrier. 

In  1941  J.  C.  Barefoot  retired  and  S.  S.  McNinch, 
Jr.,  son  and  nephew  of  two  former  mayors  of  Char- 
lotte, and  V.  J.  Guthrie,  Jr.,  son  of  the  real  estate 
dealer  and  apartment  house  operator,  bought  inter- 
ests in  the  firm  with  J.  W.  Barefoot.  At  that  time 
the  firm  was  incorporated  as  Jocie  Motor  Lines  with 
Mr.  Guthrie  as  president ;  Mr.  McNinch  as  vice-presi- 
dent, and  J.  W.  Barefoot  as  secretary  and  general 
manager.  In  the  fall  of  1952  Mr.  Guthrie  sold  his 
interest  to  Mr.  Barefoot  and  Mr.  iVIcNinch.  Present 
officers  are  J.  W.  Barefoot,  president  and  general 
manager;  S.  S.  McNinch,  vice-president  and  treas- 
urer, and  R.  E.  Wilson,  secretary. 

Jocie  Motor  Lines  now  operates  within  the  states  of 
North  and  South  Carolina  and  Georgia.  In  addition 
to  the  home  office,  terminal  and  garage  in  Charlotte, 
terminals  are  operated  in  Greenville,  S.  C. ;  Atlanta, 
Ga. ;  Greensboro,  N.  C,  with  agencies  in  Savannah, 
Ga..  Columbia,  S.  C,  and  Wilmington,  N.  C. 

From  its  small  beginning  Jocie  Motor  Lines  have 
developed  the  business  until  the  annual  gross  income 
is  around  $900,000.  Plant  and  equipment,  including 
115  pieces  of  rolling  stock  operated,  are  valued  at 
approximately  $435,000,  while  capital  and  surplus 
amount  to  around  $85,000.  The  firm  now  employs 
95  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  close  to  $335,- 
000.  Annually,  the  firm's  trucks  travel  about  2,000.- 
000  road  miles  and  handle  each  year  about  70,000 
tons  of  freight. 

Jocie  Motor  Lines  handles  for  its  employees,  who 
pay  the  premiums,  life  and  hospitalization  insurance 
coverage.    An  annual  bonus  is  given  to  all  employees 


COLONIAL  MOTOR  FREIGHT  LINE,  INC. 
High  Point 

Colonial  Motor  Freight  Line,  Inc.,  High  Point, 
was  organized  in  1930  by  R.  L.  Honbarrier  and  G.  K. 
Loftin  as  a  partnership.  At  the  start,  these  two  part- 
ners owned  two  trucks  and  both  of  them  were  truck 
drivers.  Soon  after  the  firm  started  Mr.  Honbarrier 
bought  Mr.  Loftin's  interest  and  continued  as  indi- 
vidual owner  for  several  years. 

Colonial  Motor  Freight  Line  was  incorporated  in 
1941  with  an  authorized  capital  of  $60,000  and  with 
$300  paid  in.  At  that  time  the  firm  was  operating 
about  30  pieces  of  equipment.  R.  L.  Honbarrier  be- 
came president  and  general  manager ;  A.  L.  Honbar- 
rier, vice-president,  and  Roxie  H.  Workman,  secre- 
tary-treasurer. These  three  officers  compose  the 
board  of  directors.  U.  Aldridge  is  traffic  manager 
and  D.  V.  Ozment  is  office  manager. 

Colonial  Motor  Freight  Line,  in  addition  to  its 
office,  terminal  and  garage  in  High  Point,  also  ope- 
rates terminals  in  Baltimore,  Md.,  and  Richmond, 
Va.  The  firm  operates  lines  from  Baltimore  to  Char- 
lotte and  with  regular  routes  covers  the  area  of  Hick- 
ory and  Lenoir  in  the  west  and  to  Raleigh,  Fayette- 


Moclern  truck  operated   by   Colonial  Motor  Freight   Line, 
High  Point. 

ville  and  New  Bern  in  the  east.  Irregular  routes 
cover  most  of  the  area  of  North  Carolina.  The  mod- 
ern office  building,  with  warehouse  and  garage,  were 
built  on  the  present  site  in  1946. 

Colonial  Motor  Freight  Line  has  developed  its 
business  to  the  point  at  which  gross  income  is  ap- 
proximately $800,000  annually.  The  plant  and  equip- 
ment are  valued  at  around  $250,000.  The  firm  now 
operates  64  units,  including  17  tractors,  34  trailers, 
11  straight  trucks  and  two  small  service  trucks. 
Approximately  50  office  and  terminal  workers  and 
drivers  are  employed,  the  annual  payroll  reaching 
around  $215,000.  The  firm  is  proud  of  its  safety 
program  and  makes  cash  awards  on  good  safety  rec- 
ords and  proper  handling  of  cargo.  Hospitalization 
and  accident  insurance  are  carried  on  all  employees 
with  joint  payment  of  premiums. 


DICKSON  TRANSFER  CO.,  INC. 
Salisbury 

Dickson  Transfer  Co.,  Inc.,  Salisbury,  was  started 
in  1935  by  J.  H.  Dickson,  owner  of  one  truck  which 
he  himself  drove.  His  first  business  was  hauling 
general   commodities   from   Salisbury   to   Winston- 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  05 


1  Salem.  In  two  years  he  had  accumulated  three  trucks 
and  three  drivers.  He  experienced  gradual  growth, 
;  expanding  operations  and  increasing  routes  in  the 
I  State  on  an  irregular  basis. 

In  1941  Dickson  Transfer  Co.  was  incorporated 
!  with  an  authorized  capital  of  $100,000  and  approxi- 
mately $15,000  paid  in.  J.  H.  Dickson  became  presi- 
dent and  treasurer ;  Mrs.  Sallie  C.  Dickson,  his  wife, 
secretary,  and  M.  S.  Dickson,  his  brother,  vice-presi- 
dent. At  that  time  he  operated  five  pieces  of  equip- 
ment. Terminals  in  addition  to  the  home  office,  ter- 
minal and  garage  in  Salisbury  have  been  established 
in  Charlotte,  Winston-Salem,  Greensboro  and  High 
Point  and  call  stations  are  located  in  Fayetteville, 
Albemarle,  Mount  Airy,  Mocksville,  Lexington,  Nor- 
wood, Siler  City,  Burlington,  Madison,  Asheboro, 
Pinehurst,  Red  Springs,  Raeford,  Leaksville,  Reids- 
ville  and  intermediate  points.  Routes  are  made  daily 
to  these  points.  Many  of  the  rights  were  secured 
under  the  Grandfather  Clause  and  others  have  been 
added  after  hearings.  In  1952  this  firm  bought  the 
L.  F.  Green  Transfer  Co.  of  Greensboro,  securing  its 
franchise  and  adding  some  routes. 

Dickson  Transfer  Co.  has  increased  its  business 
until  its  gross  annual  income  is  approximately  $300,- 
000.  Its  plant  and  equipment  are  valued  about  $80,- 
000.  It  operates  58  units,  including  18  trailers,  12 
tractors  and  28  trucks.  The  firm  employs  55  workers 
and  has  tin  annual  payroll  of  around  $150,000.  all  of 
which  is  included  in  North  Carolina. 


C.  S.  HENRY  TRANSFER,  INC. 
Rocky  Mount 

C,  S.  Henry  Transfer,  Inc.,  Route  301,  two  miles 
north  of  Rocky  Mount,  recently  occupied  its  new 
office  building,  transfer  building  and  warehouse  on 
its  new  site.  This  transfer  firm,  starting  with  one 
straight  truck,  now  operates  one  of  the  nicest  trans- 
fer businesses  in  Eastern  North  Carolina. 

In  1932  C.  S.  Henry,  individual  owner,  started  the 
C.  S.  Henry  Transfer  with  one  straight  truck  and 
hauling  anything  from  points  in  rvlaine  to  Florida. 
Two  years  later  Mr.  Henry  built  one  of  the  first 
trailers  ever  made  in  North  Carolina  and  started 
hauling  commodities,  largely  farm  products,  from 
North  Carolina  to  New  York  and  Philadelphia.  Con- 
tinuing its  growth  the  firm  went  into  hauling  seed, 
fertilizer  and  other  farm  equipment  and  supplies. 
Around  1935  Mr.  Henry  started  hauling  products  for 
the  bottling  industry,  including  sugar  and  syrup  and 
also  beer.  Continuing  his  expansion,  he  added  tex- 
tile hauling  to  eastern  markets,  loading  with  general 
commodities  on  return  trips. 

C.  S.  Henry  Transfer  was  incorporated  in  1952 
with  an  authorized  capital  of  $500,000  and  $50,000 
paid  in.  It  is  a  family  corporation  with  C.  S.  Henry, 
president;  Mrs.  C.  S.  Henry,  vice-president,  and  M. 
Webster  Henry,  their  son,  secretary-treasurer  and 
general  manager.    Young  Mr.  Henry  grew  up  with 


the  transfer  business  and  during  World  War  II  serv- 
ed four*  .Vea^s  as  &  motor  transport  officer  in  the  Ma- 
rine Corps!  He  i,s  &,  reserve  ,,-major,  in  the  Marine 
Corps.;  Also/, young  Mr.  K^nry  is  ^immediate  past 
president  of  the?  North  Carolina  Motor' Carriers'  As- 
sociation, and  continues  aiOa;  directq:-;.'.  ," 

As  evidence  of  continued  expansion  from  one  truck 
at  the  start,  C.  S.  Henry  Transfer  now  operates  32 
pieces  of  equipment,  including  15  tractors,  16  trailers 
and  one  straight  truck.  The  firm  has  a  property 
valuation  of  approximately  $200,000.  It  employs  25 
people  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $125,000. 
In  1951  the  firm  opened  a  terminal  at  Baltimore,  Md., 
and  has  call  stations  in  New  York,  Philadelphia, 
Richmond  and  Norfolk.  The  firm  operates  primarily 
from  North  Carolina  to  Virginia,  Maryland,  Dela- 
ware, Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey,  New  York,  South 
Carolina,  Georgia  and  Florida. 


NEAL  HAWKINS  TRANSFER  CO.,  INC. 

Gastonia 

Neal  Hawkins  Transfer  Co.,  East  Franklin  Ave., 
Gastonia,  is  one  of  the  few  transfer  companies  now 
in  operation  in  North  Carolina  in  which  the  principal 
figure  in  the  organization  did  not  start  driving  a 
truck.  In  fact,  Neal  Hawkins,  organizer  and  prin- 
cipal owner,  started  his  transfer  activities  in  1911 
with  one  one-horse  wagon  hauling  sand,  gravel,  lum- 
ber and  other  such  products.  Mr.  Hawkins  now 
heads  three  firms — Neal  Hawkins  Transfer  Co.,  Pe- 
troleum Transportation,  Inc.,  and  Neal  Hawkins 
Construction  Co.,  the  latter  an  unincorporated  and 
individually  owned  firm.  This  latter  firm  and  his 
transfer  activities  grew  up  together  with  interchang- 
ing activities,  while  the  petroleum  hauling  activities 
started  later.  The  construction  and  transportation 
activities  had  grown  to  the  point  m  the  early  1920s 
that  Mr.  Hawkins  owned  and  operated  about  50  wag- 
ons with  approximately  100  head  of  horses  and 
mules. 

With  improved  highways  and  the  advent  of  trucks 
in  the  early  1920s  Mr.  Hawkins  shifted  gradually  to 
motor  vehicles.  The  Neal  Hawkins  Transfer  Co. 
was  incorporated  in  1935  with  a  small  capital  and 
has  since  grown  into  a  sizable  and  successful  opera- 
tion. The  first  officers  were  Neal  Hawkins,  presi- 
dent and  general  manager ;  Mrs.  Neal  Hawkins,  vice- 
president,  and  W.  H.  Wilson,  secretary-treasurer.  In 
1944  Kathleen  Hawkins,  daughter  of  the  founder, 
was  brought  into  the  business,  becoming  secretary- 
treasurer  and  general  manager  and  continues  to  di- 
rect the  affairs  of  the  organization. 


fe&fe. 


Neiv  and  modern  office  building,  terminal  and  garage  of  C.  8. 
Henry  Transfer  Co.,  Rocky  Mount. 


Hefty  motor  carrier  supplants  team  and  wagon   used  earlier 
by  Neal  Haivkins  Transfer,  Gastonia. 


PAGE  1  06 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Neal  Hawkins  Transfer  Co.  has  general  commod- 
ity rights  in  North  and  South  Carc-li-ia.  !  fos  principal 
commodities  are  those  used,  by  .and  produced  by  the 
textile  mills  and' cotton'  yarn  brokers  in/the  Piedmont 
areas  of  the  two- C^rolinas.:  These  commodities  con- 
stitute probaMy  30fp  of.'the  business  transacted. 

The  firm  has  :&n  annual  gross  income  ranging 
around  $210,000.  It  operates  21  tractor-trailers, 
employs  about  45  employees  and  has  an  annual  pay- 
roll in  the  neighborhood  of  $75,000.  The  home  office, 
terminal  and  garage  are  located  in  Gastonia. 


BLUE  RIDGE  TRUCKING  CO. 

Asheville 

Blue  Ridge  Trucking  Co.,  Koon  Development,  Bilt- 
more  Station,  was  established  in  1940  as  a  partner- 
ship by  Nemiah  Goldstein  and  Bernard  Goldstein, 
brothers,  who  took  over  an  old  established  firm  at 
Hendersonville  and  moved  headquarters  to  Asheville. 
At  that  time  the  firm  had  only  two  pieces  of  rolling 
stock  and  operated  between  Hendersonville  and  Bre- 
vard. Rights  to  operate  to  Lake  Toxaway  were  soon 
acquired. 

During  the  13  years  of  operation  Blue  Ridge 
Trucking  Co.,  hauling  general  commodities,  has  con- 
tinued to  expand,  adding  additional  equipment  as 
additional  territory  was  acquired.  In  1946  the  com- 
pany acquired  operating  rights  from  Asheville  to 
Bryson  City,  Franklin  and  intermediate  points,  fol- 
lowing a  public  hearing  on  convenience  and  necessity. 
In  1951  additional  operating  authority  was  secured 
in  like  manner  from  Bryson  City  to  Murphy,  Rob- 
binsville,  Haynesville  and  intermediate  points.  In 
1952  after  a  public  hearing  before  the  North  Caro- 
lina Utilities  Commission,  rights  were  granted  to 
cover  the  territory  from  Lake  Toxaway  to  Franklin 
and  from  Sylva  to  Cashiers  and  intermediate  points. 
The  firm  now  serves  the  entire  western  portion  of 
the  State  and  has  interchange  arrangements  in  Ashe- 
ville with    21  other  trucking  firms. 

Beginning  with  only  two  trucks  the  firm  now  has 
38  pieces  of  equipment,  including  six  trucks,  14  trac- 
tors and  18  trailers.  It  employs  30  workers  and  has 
an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $100,000.  An- 
nual gross  revenues  are  in  the  neighborhood  of 
$260,000  and  assets  are  around  $140,000.  Terminals 
and  equipment  are  valued  at  approximately  $70,000. 
In  addition  to  the  home  office,  terminal  and  ware- 
house in  the  Asheville  vicinity,  Blue  Ridge  Trucking 
Co.  has  a  terminal  at  Murphy  and  six  call  stations. 


The  firm  has  continued  to  operate  very  satisfac- 
torily as  a  partnership  with  Nemiah  Goldstein  as  ad- 
ministrative head  and  Bernard  Goldstein  as  head  of 
operations.  Before  organizing  the  partnership  Ne- 
miah Goldstein  was  employed  with  Smith  Transfer 
Co.  for  a  few  years,  securing  experience  for  estab- 
lishing his  own  firm.  Bernard  Goldstein  is  the  only 
one  of  the  two  brothers  who  has  actually  driven 
trucks,  for  the  experience.  He  was  in  the  armed 
forces  during  the  World  War  II  period.  Alan  B. 
Ray,  who  has  a  background  of  23  years  in  the  trans- 
portation field,  is  traffic  manager,  and  J.  E.  Smith 
is  freight  claim  agent. 


D,  &  L,  MOTOR  LINES 
Greensboro 

D.  &  L.  Motor  Lines,  2209  Ashe  Street,  Greens- 
boro, was  started  as  a  partnership  by  Fred  R.  Dick 
and  W.  L.  Lambeth  in  1935  with  the  operation  of  only 
one  truck.  Another  similar  truck  was  added  a  year 
or  two  later.  In  1937  Mr.  Dick  bought  out  his  part- 
ner and  has  since  operated  the  firm  as  individual 
owner. 

Business  of  this  motor  carrier  has  shown  a  splen- 
did increase  each  year  since  its  organization.  The 
firm,  a  general  commodities  carrier,  now  operates 
18  units  and  handles  an  average  ranging  between 
5,000  and  7,000  tons  of  cargo  annually.  It  employs 
an  average  of  15  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll 
of  approximately  $45,000. 

D.  &  L.  Motor  Lines  operates  over  about  25  mid- 
state  counties,  over  eight  to  twelve  regular  routes 
daily,  in  addition  to  irregular  routes.  Points  visited 
include  Winston-Salem,  High  Point,  Lexington, 
Thomasville,  Asheboro,  Siler  City,  Sanford,  Fayette- 
ville,  Burlington,  Hillsboro,  Durham,  Chapel  Hill, 
Raleigh  and  other  nearby  points.  This  firm  acts  as 
agent  and  has  interchange  arrangements  with  Harris 
Express,  Inc.,  and  Kilgo  Motor  Freight  Lines,  Inc., 
Charlotte ;  Mason  &  Dixon  Lines,  Kingsport,  Tenn. ; 
Youngblood  Truck  Line,  Fletcher;  Central  Motor 
Lines,  Charlotte,  and  other  large  freight  carriers. 


EDMAC  TRUCKING  CO..  INC. 

Fayetteville 

Edmac  Trucking  Co.,  Inc.,  Fayetteville,  was  organ- 
ized and  incorporated  in  1943  by  Edward  W.  McLeod 
as  an  individually  owned  transfer  firm.  It  was  in- 
corporated in  1946  and  soon  developed  into  large  ac- 
tivities, operating  as  many  as  25  trucks. 

Much  of  the  business  of  the  Edmac  firm  was  for 
the  Federal  Government,  handling  general  commodi- 
ties in  the  Fort  Bragg-Fayetteville  area  and  as  a  con- 
tract hauler  out  of  Charlotte.  During  the  past  year 
this  firm  has  suspended  most  of  its  trucking  opera- 
tions and  now  has  a  fleet  of  six  active  trucks.  It 
continues  to  hold  a  much  larger  fleet,  now  much  of  it 
inactive,  but  it  is  possible  that  more  extensive  opera- 
tions will  be  resumed  in  the  near  future. 

Operated  in  conjunction  with  the  trucking  busi- 
ness is  the  Edmac  Truck  Sales  &  Service,  Inc.,  which 
handles  CMC  trucks  and  Dorsey  trailers.  Edward 
W.  McLeod  is  president  of  both  firms  and  C.  W. 
Pearson  is  secretary  and  treasurer. 


Big  rolling   unit  and   driver  of  Blue  Ridge   Trucking   Co. 
Koon  Development,  Asheville. 


in 


The  first  regularly  scheduled  year-round  air  line  in  the 
United  States  was  started  August  21,  1926,  between  Detroit  and 
Grand  Rapids,  Mich.,  by  the  Scout  Air  Serve. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  07 


Gasoline,  Liquids 


ASSOCIATED  PETROLEUM   CARRIERS,   INC. 

Spartanburg,  S.  C. 

Royster  Transport  Co.  is  affiliated  with  Associated  Petroleum 
Carriers,  Inc.,  with  headquarters  in  Spartanburg,  S.  C.  This 
firm  operates  in  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Georgia,  intra- 
state, and  has  interstate  rights  in  these  three  states  and  to 
points  in  Florida.  This  larger  organization  operates  325  tank 
trucks  with  an  average  of  600  employees.  The  annual  gross 
income  ranges  between  $3,000,000  and  $4,000,000.  Officials  of 
Associated  Petroleum  Carriers  are  R.  E.  Littlejohn,  Spartan- 
burg, president;  D.  W.  Royster,  Shelby,  vice-president,  and  W. 
C.  Hamrick,  Jr.,  Gaffney,  S.  C,  secretary  and  treasurer. 


ROYSTER  TRANSPORT  CO.,  INC. 
Shelby 

Royster  Transport  Co.,  Inc.,  Shelby,  was  organized  in  1934 
by  Stephen  S.  Royster,  now  deceased,  and  D.  W.  Royster,  one 
of  the  three  original  petroleum  products  carriers  in  North 
Carolina. 

Starting  in  a  modest  way,  this  firm  now  operates  30  trans- 
porters hauling  petroleum  products  from  Wilmington,  Fayette- 
ville,  Charlotte,  Greensboro,  Salisbury,  Spartanburg,  Charles- 
ton, Savannah  and  some  points  in  Florida.  In  addition  to  the 
home  office,  terminal  and  garage,  operated  in  Shelby,  another 
terminal  is  located  in  Wilmington.  The  firm  employs  an  aver- 
age of  about  65  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around 
$175,000.  Present  officers  are  D.  W.  Royster,  president  and 
general  manager;  H.  R.  Royster,  vice-president;  Stephen  S. 
Royster,  II,  secretary,  and  D.  W.  Royster,  Jr.,  treasurer. 


MAYBELLE  TRANSPORT  CO.,  INC. 
Lexington 

Maybelle  Transport  Co.,  Inc.,  Lexington,  was  or- 
ganized and  incorporated  October  12,  1944,  by  B.  C. 
Young,  Jr.,  who  owned  one  truck  and  operated  it  in 
hauling  petroleum  products  from  Wilmington  and 
Fayetteville  to  the  Lexington  area.  The  firm  now 
hauls  numbers  of  other  liquid  products,  including 
asphalt,  liquid  sugar,  milk  and  others. 

At  the  time  of  the  incorporation  Mr.  Young  was 
president;  Mrs.  Isobel  Young,  his  wife,  treasurer, 
and  Frank  P.  Buck,  Salisbury,  was  secretary.  Pres- 
ent officers  are  Mr.  Young,  president  and  general 
manager;  Mrs.  Isobel  Young,  secretary-treasurer, 
and  Robert  H.  Greer,  vice-president.  The  firm  has 
an  authorized  capital  of  $100,000  and  paid  in  capital 
of  $50,000. 

As  business  of  Maybelle  Transport  Co.  increased, 
the  firm  bought  additional  equipment  and  expanded 
the  business,  a  large  part  of  which  was  hauling  pe- 
troleum products  from  Wilmington  and  Fayetteville 
to  Lexington  and  other  points.  At  the  present  time 
the  company  has  the  right  to  haul  petroleum  prod- 
ucts between  any  points  in  the  State.  In  addition, 
the  firm  now  hauls  petroleum  products  from  Char- 
lotte, Salisbury  and  Greensboro. 


Ini  1951. -Maybelle  Transport  Co.  started  hauling 
asphalt  which  has  now  developed  into  more  than  half 
of  the  company's  'business,  -  •  Asphalt  'has  -been  han- 
dled prjmari'ly  -from  Wilmington  an d:  Salisbury  to 
various  points'  m  the  ;St^e'  in"  whteh  road  building 
has  been  and  is  still  in  progress.  Ill'  April  the  firm 
purchased  ten  new  asphalt  trucks  to  add  to  its  fleet 
and  now  has  secured  rights  to  haul  asphalt  in  South 
Carolina  also. 

Recently  Maybelle  secured  rights  to  haul  liquid 
sugar  from  Charlotte  to  points  in  South  Carolina, 
Georgia,  Tennessee,  Virginia  and  intrastate  rights 
within  North  Carolina.  This  business  of  hauling 
liquid  sweetenings  for  making  syrups  for  use  in  pro- 
ducing various  kinds  of  candies  and  other  products 
is  expected  to  develop  extensively  in  the  years 
ahead. 

Maybelle  Transport  Co.  has  developed  its  business 
until  its  annual  gross  income  now  exceeds  half  a  mil- 
lion dollars.  Plant  and  equipment  are  valued  at 
approximately  $200,000.  Embraced  in  the  equipment 
are  60  units  of  rolling  stock  all  of  the  tank  variety, 
including  22  tractors  and  36  trailers.  The  firm  em- 
ploys around  45  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll 
of  about  $175,000. 

Maybelle  is  proud  of  the  splendid  safety  records 
it  has  established.  In  1951  it  received  the  award 
from  the  American  Trucking  Association  for  the 
best  safety  record  in  the  1,000,000  to  2,000,000  mile 
class.  The  firm  has  group  life  insurance  for  which 
it  pays  all  of  the  premiums  and  a  hospitalization  plan 
in  which  it  pays  part  of  the  premiums.  The  com- 
pany has  established  an  annual  Christmas  party  for 
all  employees  at  which  a  5%  bonus,  based  on  safety 
records  and  annual  earnings,  is  paid  to  drivers.  The 
firm's  drivers  each  year  elect  three  of  their  members 
as  a  drivers'  committee  which  serves  as  liaison  be- 
tween the  owners  and  the  drivers.  These  committee 
members  receive  $10  each  in  extra  pay  monthly. 


Gasoline  Truck  of  Maybelle  Transport,  Lexington,  hauling 
asphalt,  syrup,  milk  and  other  liquids. 


QUALITY  OIL  TRANSPORT 
Winston-Salem 

Quality  Oil  Transport,  Winston-Salem,  is  an  orig- 
inal and  continuing  partnership  organized  early  in 
1934  by  Bert  L.  Bennett,  Sr.,  and  Archer  B.  Glenn, 
both  deceased,  and  Joe  H.  Glenn,  Jr.  Starting  with 
two  tractors  and  two  trailers,  this  organization  has 
developed  a  business  which  produces  approximately 
one-half  million  dollars  in  annual  revenue. 

Quality  Oil  Transport  was  started  to  haul  petro- 
leum products  for  the  organization's  stations  operat- 
ed in  and  around  Winston-Salem.  It  gradually  ex- 
panded its  hauling  for  other  distributors  and  adding 
to  its  equipment  until  it  operated  13  units  at  the 
close  of  World  War  II.  The  firm  now  operates  12 
units  with  two  spare  tractors.  Original  hauling 
rights  were  confined  to  North  Carolina,  but  in  1942 
the  organization  secured  ICC  rights  to  make  deliv- 
eries in  the  eastern  section  of  Virginia.  Later  rights 
included  pick-up  and  delivery  service  to  and  from 
any  points  in  North  Carolina.  Chief  operations  are 
in  the  east,  central  and  northwestern  sections  of 
North  Carolina.  The  home  office  is  in  Winston- 
Salem  and  garages  are  maintained  in  Winston-Salem 
and  Wilmington.  Aviation  gasoline  as  well  as  regu- 
lar gasoline,  kerosene  and  fuel  oil  are  handled. 

Quality  Oil  Transport  has  a  present  partnership 
capital  of  $200,000.    Its  annual  gross  revenue  ranges 


PAGE  1  OQ 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


between  $450,000  and  $500,000. 


Or 


rage  Valuation 


is  around  $30,000  while  operating  and  other"  equip- 
ment have  a  value' ranging  between  ,$150,000  and 
$200,000.;;  T!he  $xm  employs  from  2j5  to  25  Workers 
and  has  an  annual. payroll  of  approximately  $85,000. 
In  addition  to  Joe  JT.  (rlenri,  Jr.,  one  of  the  original 
partners,  the' present  partners  are  James  K.  Glenn, 
L.  G.  Glenn,  V.  E.  Bennett  and  C.  J.  Bennett. 


PETROLEUM  TRANSPORTATION,  INC. 
Gastonia 

Petroleum  Transportation,  Inc.,  was  organized  and 
incorporated  in  1942  for  the  purpose  of  hauling  pe- 
troleum products  in  the  Carolinas,  originating  in 
Wilmington,  Fayetteville,  Charlotte,  Salisbury, 
Greensboro  and  Spartanburg,  S.  C.  Its  intrastate 
rights  in  North  Carolina  are  State-wide  and  inter- 
state rights  permit  hauling  in  Spartanburg  and  Bee- 
ton,  S.  C. 

Petroleum  Transportation  does  a  gross  business 
annually  of  approximately  $275,000.  The  firm  owns 
14  tanks,  employs  an  average  of  30  wTorkers  and  has 
an  annual  payroll  ranging  from  $75,000  to  $80,000. 
Neal  Hawkins  is  president;  Neal  Hawkins,  Jr.,  is 


Garonne  truck,,  operated  by  Petroleum  Transportation,  a  Neal 
Hawkins  unit,  Gastonia. 

vice-president,  handling  the  business  of  the  Western 
Division,  with  headquarters  in  Hendersonville,  and 
Howard  Hawkins,  secretary-treasurer  and  manager 
of  the  Eastern  Division  of  the  company,  with  head- 
quarters in  Gastonia. 

Neal  Hawkins,  formerly  a  mule -skinner  type  of 
man  in  his  earlier  hauling  and  construction  days,  has 
developed  into  a  milder  mannered  man  who  devotes 
most  of  his  time  to  his  construction  activities.  Al- 
though keeping  an  eye  on  the  two  transportation 
firms  of  which  he  is  the  principal  owner,  his  daugh- 
ter, Kathleen,  handles  the  general  commodities  trans- 
portation and  his  two  sons,  Neal,  Jr.,  and  Howard 
handle  all  details  of  the  Petroleum  Transportation 
activities. 


WACCAMAW  OIL  TRANSPORT  CO. 
Wilmington 

Waccamaw  Oil  Transport  Co.,  Wilmington,  had 
its  beginning  in  Elizabethtown  in  1941  when  three 
Pure  Oil  Co.  jobbers,  H.  M.  Clark  and  M.  L.  Fisher 
of  Elizabethtown,  and  H.  S.  Kimrey,  Clinton,  formed 
a  partnership  to  transport  petroleum  products  for 
themselves  and  their  customers.  The  beginning  was 
made  with  one  unit,  a  3,500  gallon  transport  tank 
trailer.  M.  L.  Fisher  was  elected  to  manage  the 
transport  end  of  the  business,  besides  his  duties  as 
manager  of  the  Elizabethtown  bulk  plant. 

In  1947  Waccamaw  Oil  Transport  Co.  moved  from 
Elizabethtown  to  a  small  office  building  and  garage 
at  1006  South  Front  Street,  Wilmington,  and  George 
H.  Hall  was  selected  to  manage  the  business.  These 
quarters  have  been  outgrown  and  the  company  has 
plans  for  erecting  a  new  building  which  should  be 


Fleet  of  gasoline  trucks,  operated  by  Waccamaw  Oil 
Transport.  Wilmington. 

completed  by  the  end  of  the  first  quarter  of  the  year. 
These  plans  call  for  a  cinder  block  building,  60  x  80 
feet,  of  which  20  x  60  feet  will  be  used  as  office 
space  and  spare  parts  storage  and  the  remainder  for 
garage  activities,  probably  in  the  1100  block  of  South 
Second  Street,  Wilmington.  Expenditures  for  the 
new  site  will  reach  approximately  $30,000. 

Waccamaw  Oil  Transport  Co.  has  state-wide  com- 
mon carrier  rights  over  irregular  routes,  operating 
six  units  with  5,700  gallon  capacity  and  one  unit 
holding  6,000  gallons  with  an  extra  tractor.  The 
firm  employs  10  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll 
of  around  $42,000.  Hauling  is  done  for  two  to  four 
of  the  major  oil  companies,  five  major  oil  company 
jobbers,  three  independent  resellers  and  the  firm  also 
handles  bulk  plant  commercial  accounts  and  filling 
station  accounts. 

In  1952  this  firm  moved  18,750,000  gallons  of  pe- 
troleum products  565,935  miles  for  gross  freight 
income  of  $157,500. 

When  the  new  building  is  completed,  the  firm  will 
have  assets  of  approximately  $150,000.  The  firm 
continues  to  operate  as  a  partnership  and  Mr.  Hall 
continues  as  manager  of  the  transport  activities. 


Tobacco  Principally — 


H.  W.  MILLER  TRUCKING  CO. 
Durham 

H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.,  Highway  70,  just  west  of  Durham, 
was  started  in  1935  by  H.  W.  Miller  with  one  truck  and  trailer 
which  he  secured  by  borrowing  $600  and  mortgaging  this 
equipment  for  the  balance.  He  was  engaged  in  hauling  to- 
bacco in  hogsheads  from  markets  to  redrying  plants  in  North 
Carolina,  South  Carolina  and  Virginia.  He  wrecked  this  truck 
and  had  to  finance  another  and  by  the  end  of  two  years  pur- 
chased a  second  truck,  buying  two  more  trucks  the  third  year 
of  operation. 

H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.  actually  began  its  important  ex- 
pansion in  1940-41  when  it  secured  a  contract  for  hauling  to- 
bacco for  the  American  Tobacco  Co.  About  the  same  time  the 
construction  of  Camp  Butner  began  and  Mr.  Miller  secured  a 
large  amount  of  hauling  while  the  camp  was  being  built. 

In  1948  the  H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.  was  incorporated  with 


H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.,  Durham,  handles  many  thousands 
of  tobacco  hogsheads  during  season. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  09 


a  relatively  low  capitalization.  Officers  include  H.  W.  Miller, 
president  and  general  manager;  E.  S.  Miller,  Jr.,  a  brother, 
vice-president;  W.  R.  Miller,  another  brother,  treasurer,  and 
E.  C.  Brooks,  Jr.,  secretary  and  general  counsel.  H.  W.  Miller, 
Mrs.  Myrtle  Moore  Miller,  his  wife,  and  E.  C.  Brooks,  Jr.,  form 
the  board  of  directors. 

H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.  owns  buildings  and  equipment 
valued  at  approximately  $75,000.  Included  in  this  are  22  trac- 
tors and  trailers  and  one  truck,  in  addition  to  packing  houses 
in  Fayetteville,  Tabor  City  and  Lumberton.  Also  in  Lumberton 
the  firm  owns  a  building  containing  the  firm's  office  and  three 
apartments,  one  of  which  is  retained  for  the  firm's  own  use. 

H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co.  has  developed  its  business  until 
it  has  a  gross  income  of  approximately  $275,000  a  year.  It 
employs  about  25  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  approx- 
imately $60,000.  Since  the  firm's  business  is  largely  seasonal, 
Mr.  Miller  is  required  to  lay  off  employees  during  the  slack 
seasons  but  has  been  fortunate  in  securing  suitable  jobs  for 
the  workers  during  periods  when  they  are  not  needed.  Not  one 
of  his  drivers,  as  he  recalls,  has  ever  filed  claims  for  Unem- 
ployment Insurance.  In  addition  to  privileges  of  hauling  to- 
bacco between  points  in  the  three  principal  tobacco  growing- 
states  from  markets  to  redrying  plants  and  from  redrying 
plants  to  manufacturing  plants  the  firm  also  has  rights  to  haul 
general  commodities  to  Baltimore,  Richmond  and  Norfolk. 

Mr.  Miller,  a  native  of  Orange  County,  began  his  business 
activities  by  operating  a  grocery  store  in  Durham  and  then 
shifted  to  service  station  operation.  It  was  from  these  activi- 
ties that  he  entered  the  trucking  business. 


BARNES  TRUCK  LINE,  INC. 
Wilson 

Barnes  Truck  Line,  Inc.,  Wilson,  on  Herring  Ave- 
nue since  1945  and  recently  occupying  its  new  head- 
quarters at  506  Mayo  Street,  was  started  in  Nash- 
ville in  1932  by  Roy  L.  Barnes,  who  operated  one 
truck  along  with  farming  activities.  Mr.  Barnes,  on 
January  1,  1940,  bought  the  Evans  Truck  Line  of 
Nashville  and  at  that  time  took  in  his  brother,  Eddie 
L.  Barnes,  as  a  partner.  At  that  time  they  operated 
four  trucks  and  trailers. 

In  February,  1945,  the  Barnes  brothers  bought 
Smith's,  Inc.,  a  transfer  line,  took  over  the  equipment 
and  franchise  and  moved  the  office  of  the  firm  from 
Nashville  to  Wilson.  About  four  years  ago  the  firm 
was  incorporated  and  since  then  the  authorized  cap- 
ital stock  has  been  increased  to  $300,000,  with  $130,- 
000  paid  in. 

Officers  of  the  company  are  Roy  L.  Barnes,  presi- 
dent and  general  manager;  Eddie  L.  Barnes,  secre- 


tary-treasurer, and  Henry  C.  Barnes,  Jr.,  vice-presi- 
dent. These  officers  compose  the  board  of  directors. 
The  new  office,  terminal  and  warehouse  buildings  re- 
cently occupied  on  a  2.7  acre  site  cost  approximately 
$100,000,  while  rolling  stock  and  other  equipment 
are  valued  at  about  $200,000.  The  firm  employs 
about  30  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approxi- 
mately $120,000. 

Barnes  Truck  Line  has  authority  to  haul  tobacco 
between  markets  in  the  states  of  Florida,  Georgia, 
South  Carolina,  North  Carolina  and  Virginia,  as 
well  as  materials  and  supplies  used  in  shipping  to- 
bacco. It  also  has  general  commodities  rights 
throughout  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina  and  Vir- 
ginia and  lumber  rights  from  North  Carolina  and 
South  Carolina  to  the  District  of  Columbia,  Mary- 
land, Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey  and  Delaware. 
Through  connections  with  Safety  Transportation 
and  Carolina-Southern  Motor  Express,  it  handles 
commodities  through  Florida,  Georgia,  South  Caro- 
lina, Tennessee,  West  Virginia,  North  Carolina,  Vir- 
ginia, District  of  Columbia,  Maryland,  Pennsylvania, 
New  Jersey,  on  and  east  of  Highway  7  of  New  York, 
Connecticut,  Rhode  Island  and  Massachusetts. 


NORTH  STATE  MOTOR  LINES.  INC. 
Rocky  Mount 

North  State  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Rocky  Mount,  start- 
ed business  in  July,  1945,  when  the  Martin  County 
Transfer  Co.,  an  old  firm  at  Robersonville,  was  pur- 
chased by  Hadley  Bryan.  At  that  time  the  charter 
was  revised  and  the  name  was  changed.  In  1946 
this  firm  had  authorized  capital  of  $50,000  with 
$26,100  paid  in.  The  paid  in  capital  has  since  been 
increased  to  $28,100. 

North  State  Motor  Lines,  started  with  six  complete 
units,  now  owns  19  complete  units  and  during  the  to- 
bacco selling  season  leases  125  additional  units.  Prin- 
cipal activity  is  hauling  leaf  tobacco  and  corn  as  well 
as  general  commodities  between  Norfolk  and  points 
in  North  Carolina.  Tobacco  operations  are  carried 
on  throughout  the  tobacco  growing  states  during 
season  while  at  other  times  the  trucks  roll  into  Flor- 
ida and  points  south,  loaded  with  corn.  Returning, 
the  trucks  are  loaded  with  citrus  fruits  and  vegeta- 
bles. 

Hadley  Bryan  is  president  and  general  manager; 
P.  S.  Jones,  vice-president,  and  J.  L.  Parker,  secre- 
tary-treasurer. 


Newspapers,  Picture  Films,  Dated  Items  Need  Quick  Delivery 


Daily  newspapers  and  motion  picture  films  are 
"dated"  commodities.  This  means  that  they  must 
be  delivered  from  point  of  origin  to  point  of  use 
with  certainty  and  with  speed.  Daily  newspapers 
must  reach  subscribers  as  early  as  possible  after  they 
come  from  the  presses  and  early  on  the  dated  day  to 
be  of  value  to  the  readers.  Likewise,  motion  picture 
films  must  leave  their  point  of  origin  or  point  of  last 
showing  and  must  reach  the  picture  houses  to  show 
them  next  promptly  and  as  scheduled.  These  con- 
ditions demand  a  special  type  of  transportation 
service. 

In  the  early  1920s  Charlotte  was  selected  as  the 
distribution  center  for  the  two   Carolinas  by  the 


motion  picture  industry  of  the  nation.  All  of  the 
principal  motion  picture  producers  and  distributors 
have  for  several  years  had  branch  offices  in  Char- 
lotte. These  branches  form  a  pool  from  which  pic- 
tures from  all  producers  may  be  distributed  through- 
out the  Carolinas  in  orderly  and  efficient  manner. 
After  haphazard  deliveries  in  the  beginning  years, 
a  distribution  system  was  acquired  and  established. 

For  years  leading  newspapers  in  the  Carolinas  us- 
ed trains,  then  busses  and  the  regular  mail  to  dis- 
tribute their  papers.  Often  schedules  were  not  suf- 
ficient to  meet  the  needs  of  newspaper  publishers. 
Some  of  them  began  to  establish  their  own  routes 
in  their  circulation  areas  and  deliver  papers  on  reg- 


PAGE  1  1  0 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


ular  schedules.  Interstate  Commerce  Commission 
regulations  in  the  mid-1 930s  required  that  newspa- 
pers handling  commodities  other  than  their  news- 
papers as  a  convenience  to  shippers  to  organize 
separate  agencies  to  handle  such  shipments.  It  de- 
veloped as  a  natural  consequence  that  newspaper  and 
picture  film  distribution  should  become  a  related  and 
cooperative  activity. 

Four  organizations  now  deliver  newspapers  and 
motion  picture  films  throughout  most  of  the  counties 
in  North  and  South  Carolina.  These  are  the  Ob- 
server Transportation  Co.,  which  delivers  the  Char- 
lotte Observer,  primarily,  and  motion  picture  films ; 
The  Citizen  Express,  which  delivers  the  Asheville 
Citizen  and  the  Asheville  Times,  primarily,  and  also 
picture  films,  and  the  Carolina  Delivery  Service  Co., 
Charlotte,  which  delivers  motion  picture  films,  pri- 
marily, and  also  newspapers  in  the  two  states.  Mid- 
State  Delivery  Service,  Burlington,  delivers  the 
Greensboro  Daily  News  and  Greensboro  Record  (de- 
tails not  furnished).  These  firms  maintain  inter- 
change relations  and  cooperative  services. 


THE  OBSERVER  TRANSPORTATION  CO..  INC. 
Charlotte 

The  Observer  Transportation  Co.,  Charlotte,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1935  as  a  subsidiary  of  The  Observer  Co., 
publisher  of  The  Charlotte  Observer.  Officers  of  the  organiza- 
tion were  Curtis  B.  Johnson,  president;  H.  A.  Allen,  secretary- 
treasurer,  and  J.  G.  Ward,  manager.  Mrs.  Curtis  B.  Johnson 
has  succeeded  her  husband  as  president  of  the  corporation  and 
J.  G.  Ward,  manager  from  the  beginning,  was  made  vice-presi- 
dent and  general  manager  in  1951.  Gordon  Cassidy  was  traffic 
manager  until  1941  when  he  was  succeeded  by  J.  E.  White. 
F.  H.  Trull  is  assistant  secretary-treasurer. 

The  Observer  Transportation  Co.  has  delivery  rights  in 
North  and  South  Carolina,  primarily  in  the  circulation  area 
of  The  Charlotte  Observer.  In  North  Carolina  its  service  ex- 
tends to  Wilmington,  Fayetteville,  Raleigh  (newspapers  only), 
Lexington,  Elkin,  Boone,  Morganton,  Rutherfordton  and  inter- 
mediate points.  At  Morganton  and  Rutherfordton  it  has  ex- 
change arrangements  with  the  Citizen  Express,  Asheville.  In 
South  Carolina  its  routes  include  Gaffney,  Chester.  Columbia, 
Beaufort  and  nearby  points  and  maintains  exchange  service 
with  the  Packat  Delivery  Co.,  operated  by  the  Charleston  News 
and  Courier. 

In  addition  to  newspapers  this  company  handles  motion  pic- 
ture films  and  numerous  other  small  rush  commodities,  averag- 
ing not  more  than  50  pounds  in  weight.  This  firm  handles 
approximately  60,000,000  pounds  of  freight  annually.  It  owns 
and  operates  32  units  and  leases  an  additional  22  units  and 
employs  about  100  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approx- 
imately $190,000. 

The  Observer  Co.,  the  parent  organization,  owns  the  real 
estate  and  provides  terminal  space  in  the  Observer  Building. 
The  rolling  stock  and  other  equipment  is  valued  at  approxi- 
mately $100,000.  The  transportation  company  has  an  annual 
gross  income  of  around  $700,000  and  operates  its  equipment 
about  2,500,000  miles  a  year.  Operating  taxes  in  North  Caro- 
lina amount  to  approximately  $30,000  annually.  The  firm 
operates  its  trucks  over  regular  routes  and  stresses  quick  and 
safe  deliveries. 


CITIZEN  EXPRESS,  INC. 

Asheville 

Citizen  Express,  Inc.,  Asheville,  was  started  in  the  early 
1930s  by  the  Asheville  Citizen  and  the  Asheville  Times  pub- 
lishers as  a  means  of  making  early  morning  and  afternoon 
newspaper  deliveries  throughout  the  20  counties  in  western 
North  Carolina,  forming  a  circulation  area  of  these  papers. 
Regular  routes  were  established  and  because  of  the  need  for 
quick  delivery  of  motion  picture  films,  magazines  and  other 
rush  commodities,  these  and  other  products  were  added  to  the 
items  delivered  by  these  newspaper  trucks.  For  several  years 
this  business  was  operated  by  the  newspapers  as  an  auxiliary 
activity. 

In  1940  Citizen  Express  was  incorporated  under  its  present 
name  with  an  authorized  capital  stock  of  $50,000.     Officers  at 


Citizen  Express  delivers  Asheville  Citizen  and   Times, 
films  and  "dated"  items. 

that  time  were  Charles  A.  Webb,  president;  Don  S.  Elias,  vice- 
president;  D.  Hiden  Ramsey,  secretary;  W.  Randall  Harris, 
treasurer;  Ben  B.  Humphries,  assistant  secretary,  and  J.  R. 
Marks,  assistant  treasurer  and  manager.  Following  Mr.  Webb's 
death  in  1949  Mr.  Elias  became  president;  Mr.  Ramsey  became 
vice-president;  Ben  B.  Humphries  became  secretary  and  man- 
ager, and  W.  K.  Dalton  succeeded  Mr.  Harris  as  treasurer. 

Citizen  Express  now  operates  18  units  of  van  type  trucks. 
It  employs  about  30  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of 
around  $60,000.  Plant  and  equipment  have  a  valuation  of 
around  $100,000,  including  a  new  terminal  which  was  erected 
in  1951  at  a  cost  of  about  $75,000,  with  a  garage  which  main- 
tains all  rolling  equipment.  Gross  income  runs  around  $150,000. 
The  firm  hauls  an  average  of  12,000,000  pounds  of  products  a 
year,  covering  annually  500,000  truck  miles. 

Citizen  Express  continues  to  handle  newspapers  for  the 
Citizen  and  the  Times  in  bundle  deliveries  in  addition  to  mo- 
tion picture  films,  bakery  products  and  general  commodities 
as  long  as  they  fit  into  schedule  and  equipment.  Regular 
schedules  are  maintained  in  all  of  the  20  counties  including 
and  west  of  Watauga,  Burke  and  Rutherford  and  interchange 
arrangements  are  maintained  with  the  Observer  Transporta- 
tion Co.,  operated  by  the  Charlotte  Observer  at  Rutherfordton 
and  Morganton.  The  firm  stresses  fast  service  due  to  the 
nature  of  the  products  handled  and  maintains  regular  sched- 
ules and  regular  pick-ups  in  Asheville  and  points  throughout 
the  area.  It  stresses  the  safety  program  promoted  by  the 
American  Trucking  Association. 


CAROLINA  DELIVERY  SERVICE  CO.,  INC. 
Charlotte 

Carolina  Delivery  Service  Co.,  301  South  Polar  Street,  Char- 
lotte, was  organized  in  mid-1925  as  the  Griffith  Delivery  Serv- 
ice, later  becoming  the  Horlacher  Delivery  Service.  In  1929 
John  H.  Vickers  purchased  the  company  and  incorporated  it 
under  its  present  name.  In  1931  the  Carolina  Delivery  Service 
Co.  sold  part  of  its  territory  to  The  Observer  Transportation 
Co.  and  these  two  companies,  with  the  Citizen  Express,  Ashe- 
ville, cooperate  in  the  distribution  of  newspapers  and  picture 
films  throughout  most  of  the  two  Carolinas,  also  cooperating 
with  the  Packat  Delivery  Co.  of  the  Charleston  News  and 
Courier  in  South  Carolina.    - 

Carolina  Delivery  Service  Co.  operates  daily  overnight  sched- 
ules for  the  delivery  of  films  and  newspapers  and  other  dated 
and  emergency  commodities.  This  is  one  of  the  few  companies 
which  carries  keys  to  motion  picture  houses  throughout  its 
area  to  enable  it  to  deliver  films  when  the  theaters  are  closed. 
In  general,  this  firm  serves  the  area  north  and  east  of  Char- 
lotte in  North  Carolina,  except  for  a  few  counties  in  north- 
eastern North  Carolina,  and  the  area  west  of  Columbia  in 
South  Carolina.  One  of  its  contracts  is  to  deliver  the  entire 
circulation  of  the  Greenville  News  to  points  outside  of  Green- 
ville. 

Carolina  Delivery  Service  Co.,  with  a  capital  and  surplus  of 
around  $300,000  produces  a  gross  annual  income  of  about 
$600,000.  It  leases  its  home  office,  garage  and  terminal  space 
in  Charlotte  as  well  as  its  Raleigh  terminal  and  garage  and  its 
Greenville  terminal.  Its  45  pieces  of  equipment,  largely  rolling 
stock,  are  valued  at  about  $250,000.  The  oompany  employs  an 
average  of  80  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  about 
$275,000.  The  company  operates  over  approximately  1,250,000 
miles  annually.  Due  to  the  type  of  business,  due  to  the  time 
of  deliveries,  no  receipts  are  given  indicating  the  high  plane 
of  service  and  cooperation  with  theater  operators. 

Officers  and  key  personnel  of  the  company  are  John  H. 
(Continued  on  page  154) 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  1 


Utilities  Commission  Regulates  455  Truck  Common  Carriers 


North  Carolina  has  455  truck  firms  licensed  to 
haul  specific  commodities  over  specified  routes  and 
which  are  regulated  by  the  N.  C.  Utilities  Com- 
mission. In  addition,  9,200  motor  carriers  are  ex- 
empt from  regulation,  since  they  are  not  classed  as 
public  carriers  and  are  largely  farm  to  market 
trucks.  However,  the  Utilities  Commission  keeps  a 
weather  eye  on  these  trucks  to  make  sure  they  do 
not  overstep  the  line  and  haul  freight  they  are  not 
due  to  haul  on  routes  they  are  not  eligible  to  travel. 
M.  Broadus  Glover,  director,  Motor  Freight  Trans- 
portation, handles  this  activity  for  the  Commission. 

A  list  of  the  licensed  carriers,  other  than  those 
handled  in  more  detail,  follows : 

Abernethy  Transfer  &  Storage  Co.,  Hickory;  Adkins,  G.  S., 
Burlington;  Alexander  Trucking  Co.,  Davidson;  Allen  Ashe- 
ville  Transfer  &  Storage  Co.,  Asheville;  Allen's  Transfer  Co., 
Louisburg;  Amarr  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  American  Furniture 
Carrier,  High  Point;  Anderson  Transfer  Co.,  Asheville;  Ander- 
son Truck  Line,  Lenoir;  Apex  Motor  Line,  Apex;  Asphalt  and 
Petroleum  Co.,  Kinston;  Atkins,  Harold,  Cary;  Autry  Brothers 
Service  Station,  Stedman;  Aycock,  Vernon  S.,  Fremont;  Ayscue 
Truck  Line,  Louisburg; 

B.  &  C.  Trucking  Co.,  Inc.,  Lenoir;  B.  &  L.  Trucking  Co., 
Albemarle;  B.  &  M.  Transportation  Co.,  Lenoir;  B.  &  P.  Motor 
Lines,  Hazelwood;  Baker,  Byron  L.,  Pineville;  Bankett,  John 
C,  Salisbury;  Barker's  Transfer,  Reidsville;  Barnes  Food  Ex- 
press, Charlotte;  Bartholemew  Oil  Transportation  Co.,  Louis- 
burg; Batts,  Earnest,  Beulaville;  Batts  Transfer,  Greensboro; 
Baxley  Transfer,  Rockingham;  Beachum's  Transfer,  Wades- 
boro;  Beard-Laney,  Inc.,  Camden;  Beaver  Transfer  Co.,  Lenoir; 
Bell  Truck  Line,  Jackson;  Bell  Truck  Line,  Wilson;  Best 
Transfer,  Whiteville;  Berry  and  Decker  Transfer,  Hildebran: 
Billings  Trucking  Corp.,  North  Wilkesboro;  Billings  Transfer 
Corp.,  Inc.,  Lexington;  Biltmore  Transfer  Co.,  Asheville;  Bis- 
sell  Oil  Co.,  Lumberton;  Black's  Motor  Express,  Wilmington; 
Blair  Transit  Co.,  Richmond,  Va.;  Bodenheimer,  F.  N.,  Park- 
ton;  Boone,  The  A.  G.,  Co.,  Charlotte;  Boone,  D.  L.,  Jackson; 
Bottoms,  J.  B.,  Transfer  Co.,  High  Point;  Bounous,  Miss  Gius- 
tina,  Connelly  Springs;  Bracey,  R.  W.,  Rowland;  Branch's 
Transfer,  Lumberton;  Brewer,  Selby,  Wilson;  Bridgers  Trans- 
fer, Rowland;  Bridges  Trucking  Co.,  Shelby;  Bright  Belt  Mo- 
tor Lines,  Grifton;  Britt,  Lacy  D.,  Lumberton;  Britt  &  Martin, 
Milwaukee;  Britt  Transportation  Co.,  Rocky  Mount;  Brown 
Transit  Co.,  Conover;  Brown,  Charles  T.,  Truck  Lines,  Greens- 
boro; Bryan,  D.  L.,  Charlotte;  Buckner  Transfer  Co.,  Ashe- 
ville; Bull  City  Oil  Co.,  Inc.,  Durham;  Burlington  Truckers, 
Inc.,  Burlington;  Burke  Transit  Co.,  Morganton;  Burns,  Bobby, 
Inc.,  Sanford;  Burton  Lines,  Inc.,  Reidsville;  Busic,  Rodney, 
Sparta;  Butler,  W.  L.,  Transfer,  Elizabethtown;  Byrd  Motor 
Line,  Lexington; 

C.  &  S.  Motor  Express  Co.,  North  Wilkesboro;  C.  &  S.  Trans- 
port, Wilmington;  Callahan  Transfer,  Forest  City;  Capps,  H. 
J.,  Burlington;  Carolina  Haulers,  Inc.,  New  Bern;  Carolina 
Milk  Transportation  Co.,  Statesville;  Carolina  Storage  &  Dis- 
tributing Co,.  Raleigh;  Carolina  Tank  Lines,  Inc.,  Wilmington; 
Carolina  Transfer,  Concord;  Carpenter  Trucking  Co.,  Char- 
lotte; Carroll's  Transfer,  Dublin;  Carter,  J.  C,  Goldsboro;  Car- 
ter, Robahlee,  Reidsville;  Carter  Trucking  Co.,  Sanford;  Car- 
thage Transportation  Co.,  Carthage;  Case  Trucking  Co.,  Char- 
lotte; Caustic  Soda  Transportation  Co.,  Asheville;  Central 
Transport,  Inc.,  High  Point;  Chafin  Transfer  Co.,  High  Point; 
Champion  Storage  and  Trucking  Co.,  Inc.,  Greensboro;  Chil- 
dress Transportation  Co.,  Sanford;  City  Coal  and  Tire  Co., 
New  Bern;  City  Transfer  &  Storage  Co.,  High  Point;  Clay's 
Transfer  Co.,  Rocky  Mount;  Coastal  Freight  Lines,  Inc.,  Eliza- 
beth City;  Coastal  Plains  Distributing  Co.,  Kinston;  Coastal 
Transport,  Inc.,  Goldsboro;  Cochran,  W.  Floyd,  Charlotte; 
Cole,  M.  C,  Candor;  Collins  Transfer  Co.,  Lumberton;  Collins, 
Zollie  A.,  Truck  Line,  Kinston;  Colonial  Transport,  Inc.,  Wil- 
mington; Coltrain,  Tilmon  R.,  Williamston;  Commins,  J.  R., 
Rocky  Mount;  Comer,  A.  F.,  Transport  Service,  Rocky  Mount; 
Commercial  Delivery  Co.,  High  Point;  Cook,  W.  M.,  Durham; 
Cooke,  S.  C,  Murfreesboro;  Cope  Trucking  Co.,  Bryson  City; 
Craft,  R.  W.,  Winston-Salem;  Crane  &  Truck  Service,  Inc., 
Bryson  City;  Cromartie  Transport  Co.,  Wilmington;  Cruse 
Transfer  Co.,  Concord. 


Davenport  Motor  Express,  Battleboro;  Davenport  Transfer, 
Inc.,  Ingalls;  Davenport  Brothers,  Tarboro;  Davis  Transpor- 
tation Co.,  New  Bern;  Dedmon,  A.  V.,  Trucking  Co.,  Shelby; 
DeHart  Brothers  Trucking  Co.,  Hickory;  Disher  Transfer  and 
Storage  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Dixie  Storage  &  Distributing 
Co.,  Inc.,  Rocky  Mount;  Dove's  Tranter,  Bladenboro;  Dowless, 
T.  C,  Transfer,  Bladenboro;  Dumas-Giddens  Oil  Co.,  Inc., 
Goldsboro;  Duncan  Ulysses,  Hamlet;  Dunn,  J.  H,  Jr.,  Scotland 
Neck;  Dupree,  A.  R.,  Transfer,  Tai-boro;  Durham  Transfer  & 
Storage,  Inc.,  Durham. 

Eastern  Oil  Transport,  Wilmington;  Eastern  Transit  Storage 
Co.,  Charlotte;  Eaves  Transfer  Co.,  Charlotte;  Eggleston  Oil 
Transport  Co.,  Reidsville;  Ellis,  C.  P.,  Mount  Olive;  Erwin  Oil 
Co.,  Inc.,  Durham;  Everett  Express,  Inc.,  Tarboro;  Everett 
Motor  Line,  Conetoe;  Everette,  W.,  Truck  Line,  Washington; 
Everette  Trucking  Co.,  Battleboro;  Federal  Motor  Express, 
Mount  Airy;  Fisher's  Transfer,  Charlotte;  Fishel,  William 
Austin,  Winston-Salem;  Fleming-Shaw  Transfer  Co.,  Greens- 
boro; Flippin,  Coy,  Pilot  Mountain;  Forbes  Transfer  Co.,  The, 
Wilson;  Forsyth  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Winston-Salem;  Foust 
Brothers,  Lexington;  Fowler,  M.  M.,  Inc.,  Durham;  Fowler, 
R.  D.,  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  High  Point;  Fox  Transfer  Co.,  Gas- 
tonia;  Fraley's  Motor  Express,  Greensboro;  Fred's  Truck  Line, 
Winfall;  Freeman,  George  V.,  Washington;  Frigid-Way  Trans- 
portation Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte. 

G.  &  H.  Transit  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte;  Garner,  James  O.,  South- 
port;  Gaskey  Transfer  Co.,  Salisbury;  Gilbert  &  Martin  Trans- 
fer Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Goldston  Motor  Express,  Inc.,  Spray; 
Goldston  Transfer,  Leaksville;  Greene  Transport  Service,  Inc., 
Fayetteville;  Gresham,  Sam  T.,  Jr.,  Wilmington;  Griffin  and 
Grist  Transfer  Co.,  Charlotte;  Grimes,  Alton  E.,  Robersonville; 
Grubb  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Lexington;  Guignard  Brothers, 
Charlotte. 

H.  &  L.  Transportation,  Greensboro;  Hall,  Everett,  and  Sons, 
Ahoskie;  Hampton,  Fred,  Sparta;  Harrell,  J.  J.,  Transfer, 
Burlington;  Harrell  Truck  Line,  Burgaw;  Harvey's  Transfer, 
Guilford;  Hatcher,  E.  H.,  Laurinburg;  Hearn,  T.  H.,  New  Hill; 
Henderson  Bonded  Lines,  Henderson;  Henley,  Carl,  Landis; 
Herlocker  Oil  Co.,  Asheboro;  Herron,  Martin  F.,  Asheville; 
Hester's  Transfer,  Bladenboro;  Hickory  Delivery  Service,  Hick- 
ory; Hickory  Transfer  Co.,  Inc.,  Hickory;  Hill's  Truck  Line, 
Murfreesboro;  Hill's  Trucking  Service,  Colerain;  Hinson 
Transport  Co.,  Wilmington;  Hobby's  Transfer  and  Storage 
Co.,  Inc.,  Raleigh;  Hodges,  Ed  F.,  Fairmont;  Hoffler,  J.  W., 
Wallace;  Holland  Transfer  Co.,  Statesville;  Holland  Trucking 
Co.,  New  Hill;  Holt,  W.  T.,  Inc.,  Richmond,  Va.;  Home  Dis- 
tributing Co.,  Ayden;  Honeycutt,  J.  B.,  Co.,  Inc.,  Lucama; 
Honeycutt,  J.  W.,  Wadesboro;  Hopper  Brothers,  Leaksville; 
Howell  Transfer  Co.,  Shelby;  Humphrey,  Lloyd,  Kinston;  Hun- 
sucker,  L.  L.,  &  Son,  Newton;  Hutchens,  Charlie  F.,  Boonville; 
Hyder,  Clay,  Trucking  Line,  Hendersonville. 

J.  &  L.  Transport  Co.,  Wilmington;  Jackson,  J.  J.,  Transfer 
Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Jackson  Truck  Lines,  Inc.,  Jackson; 
James,  Vernon  G.,  Elizabeth  City;  Jaspers  Transfer  &  Storage 
Co.,  Inc.,  New  Bern;  Jenkins,  J.  W.,  Inc.,  Henderson;  Jenrette 
Transport  Co.,  Raleigh;  Johnson,  Bruce,  Trucking  Co.,  Inc., 
Charlotte;  Johnson,  Frank  M.,  Conway;  Johnson,  J.  L.,  Eliza- 
bethtown; Johnson  &  Sons,  Fuquay  Springs;  Johnson's  Motor 
Service,  Hamlet;  Jones,  Henderson,  Jr.,  Hillsboro;  Jones 
Transfer,  Fairmont;  Jourdan  Transfer,  Inc.,  Durham;  Joyner 
Trucking  Co.,  Woodland;  Jurgensen  Motor  Transfer,  Wilming- 
ton. 

K.  &  Y.  Motor  Lines,  Fletcher;  Kearney,  Walter  H.,  Warren- 
ton;  Keith,  J.  L.,  Wake  Forest;  Keith  Motor  Lines,  Inc., 
Greensboi-o;  Kenan  Transport  Co.,  Durham;  Kimrey,  Claud 
R.,  Albemarle;  Kindley  Brothers,  Bryson  City;  Kirkman,  Lee, 
Mount  Airy;  Kittrell,  J.  B.,  and  Co.,  Inc.,  Greenville. 

Lancaster,  G.  F.,  Clayton;  Lancaster,  Charlie  H.,  Goldsboro; 
Lassiter  Trucking  Co.,  Laurinburg;  Lawndale  Railway  &  In- 
dustrial Co.,  Lawndale;  Leary  Brothers  Storage  Co.,  Edenton; 
Lemonds,  Walter  L.,  Biscoe;  Lenoir  Transfer  Co.,  Lenoir; 
Lewis  &  Thompson  Transfer,  Bladenboro;  Lineberger-Burgin, 
Inc.,  Lincolnton;  Lockridge  Transfer,  Kings  Mountain;  Loftin, 
F.  T.,  Troutman;  Lorbacher,  J.  L.,  Durham;  Lowther  Trucking 
Co.,  Charlotte. 

McCotter  Truck  Line,  New  Bern;  McCotter,  J.  D.,  Inc.,  Wash- 
ington; McCoy's  Transfer,  Durham;  McGugan,  J.  G.,  Jr.,  Red 
Springs;  McKenzie,  Decoster,  Salemburg;  M.  &  S.  Transport, 
Raleigh;  Macon,  Joseph  L.,  Raleigh;  Mann,  LeRoy,  Gastonia; 
Marion  Freight  Lines,  Marion;   Marley  Brothers,  Burlington; 


PAGE  1  1 1 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Marrow,  Arthaniel,  Henderson;  Marsji  Trucking  Co.,  Wilson; 
Martin,  W.  M.,  Charlotte;  Martin,  J.  E..  &  Son  Transfer  Co., 
Charlotte;  Martin  Motor  Lines,  Winston-Salem;  Mauney  Cot- 
ton Co.,  Cherryville;  Merchant's  Delivery,  Greensboro;  Mid- 
State  Delivery  Service,  Burlington;  Moore,  R.  N.,  Cleveland; 
Morgan  Transportation  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte;  Moss  Trucking 
Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte:  Mouchet  Trucking  Co.,  Charlotte;  Mullis 
Trucking  Co.,  Monroe;  Murray,  L.  W.,  Transport  Service, 
Spring  Hope;  Murray's  Transfer  Co.,  Wilmington;  Murrow's 
Transfer,  Inc.,  High  Point. 

Nance,  C.  L.,  Transfer,  Whiteville;  Naylor,  Cleadous,  Dunn; 
Neuse  Oil  Co.,  Srnithfleld:  Neece,  E.  R.,  Climax;  Newman,  Troy 
S.,  Leaksville;  Nixon  Brothers  Transfer,  Smithfield;  Nolen 
Trucking  Service,  Gastonia;  Nordan  Transportation  Co.,  Ral- 
eigh;  North  South  Lines,  Charlotte. 

Oakley  Transfer  Service,  Tarboro;  Odell  Truck  Lines,  Spray: 
Overcash  Transfer,  Charlotte. 

Pait's  Transfer,  Bladenboro;  Parker,  A.  B.,  Raleigh;  Parker, 
B.  S.,  Raleigh;  Parks,  Charles,  Transfer  Co.,  Greensboro;  Par- 
menter  Transport  Co.,  Wilmington;  Parnell  Transfer,  Inc., 
Parkton;  Parrish  Oil  Co.,  Inc.,  Benson;  Partin  Brothers,  Ral- 
eigh; Pate  Transfer,  Clinton;  Pee  Dee  Oil  Co.,  Inc.,  Wades- 
boro;  Peele,  P.  L.,  Hatteras;  Perry's  Transfer  Co.,  Raleigh: 
Petroleum  Carrier  Corp  of  N.  C,  Jacksonville,  Fla;  Petroleum 
Transit  Co.,  Lumberton;  Petroleum  Transport  Co.,  Mount  Airy; 
Piedmont  Mountain  Freight  Lines,  Inc.,  North  Wilkesboro; 
Pinnell,  J.  K.,  Warrenton;  Pitt  County  Transportation  Co.,  Inc., 
Farmville;  Pitt-Young  Trucking  Co.,  Inc.,  Enfield;  Poteat, 
Woodrow  W.,  Hickory;   Public  Oil  Co.,  Statesville. 

R.  &  J.  Transport,  Winston-Salem;  Raeford  Trucking  Co., 
Raeford;  Raleigh  Bonded  Warehouse,  Inc.,  Raleigh;  Railway 
Express  Agency,  Inc.,  Atlanta,  Ga. ;  Ratliff  &  Ratliff,  Inc., 
Wadesboro;  Ray,  W.  G.,  &  Son,  Inc.,  Burlington;  Raynor,  J.  D., 
Wilmington;  Read's  Truck  Line,  Norlina;  Reaves,  W.  T.,  Fay- 
etteville;  Reliable  Transport,  Inc.,  Raleigh;  Renfro  Transport 
Co.,  Wendell;  Rick's  Motor  Lines,  Selma;  Rogers  Oil  Co.,  Ral- 
eigh; Roger's  Transfer,  Inc.,  Gastonia;  Roney,  W.  C,  Burling- 
ton; Rose,  T.  W.,  Transfer  Co.,  Elkin;  Rowland  Trucking  Co., 
Rowland;  Rudisill,  G.  W.,  Greensboro;  Russell  Transfer  Co., 
Charlotte;   Russell,  J.  W.,  Raleigh. 

S.  &  L.  Transfer  Co.,  Kinston;  Samuel,  Fred,  Mount  Airy; 
Sellers  Transfer,  Rowland;  Service  Distributing  Co.,  Inc.,  Al- 
bemarle; Service  Transportation  Corp.,  Salisbury;  Shamrock 
Transport  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Shaw  Transfer  Co.,  Inc.,  Salis- 
bury; Shelton,  C.  E.  &  C.  T.,  Madison;  Smith,  Charles  Lee, 
Grandy;  Smith,  J.  P.  Whiteville;  Smith,  S.  B.,  Rocky  Mount; 
Smith  Transfer,  Wilson;    Smith,  O.  A.,  Jr.,  Reidsville;    Sneed, 


Archie,  Jr.,  Candor;  South  Atlantic  Bonded  Warehouse  Corp., 
Greensboro;  Southeast  Transport,  Reidsville;  Southern  Cotton 
Storage,  Inc.,  Monroe;  Southern  Motor  Express,  Inc.,  Gastonia; 
Southern  Spindle  &  Flyer  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte;  Southern  Stor- 
age and  Distribution  Co.,  Durham;  Southern  Transfer  Co., 
Asheville;  Southland  Express,  Charlotte;  Spencer,  Carley  I., 
Columbia;  Spruill,  W.  C,  Washington;  Standard  Paper  Deliv- 
ery Co.,  Asheville;  State  Trucking  Co.,  Greensboro;  Stegall 
Milling  Co.,  Marshville;  Stevens,  I.  J..  &  Sons,  Wilmington; 
Strickland  Transfer,  Clinton;  Sugg,  S.  William,  Snow  Hill; 
Sumner's  Truck  Line,  Elizabeth  City;  Sutton,  B.  C,  Kinston; 
Sutton,  T.  O.,  Mann's  Harbor;    Swann,  A.  D.,  Yanceyville. 

Tallant  Transfer  Co.,  Inc.,  Hickory;  Tanner's  Transfer  Co., 
Rocky  Mount;  Tapwell  Transportation  Co.,  Clinton;  Tatum- 
Dalton  Transfer  Co.,  Inc.,  Greensboro;  Tayloe  &  Evans,  Inc., 
Ahoskie;  Taylor  Transfer,  Greenville;  Tennessee-Carolina 
Transportation,  Inc.,  Nashville,  Tenn.;  Terminal  City  Trans- 
port, Inc.,  Wilmington;  Terminal  Trucking  Co.,  Concord;  Tex- 
tile Motor  Freight,  Laurinburg;  Thigpenn,  T.  L.,  Fayetteville; 
Thomas,  S.  J.,  Transfer,  Burlington;  Tidewater  Transit  Co., 
Inc.,  Kinston;  Torrence,  C.  W.,  Davidson;  Transport  Corp., 
The,  Blackstone,  Va. 

Union  Coach  Co.,  Monroe;  Union  Transfer  Co.,  Asheville; 
Upchurch,  George  Robert,  Laurel  Springs;  Utley,  J.  L.,  Apex. 

Van  Gorp  Van  Service,  Louisville,  Ky. ;  Vance  Trucking  Co., 
Inc.,  Henderson;  Vaughan,  B.  B.,  Vick's  Truck  Line,  Woodland. 

W.  &  J.  Transit  Co.,  Thomasville;  Wall,  Wade  F.,  Trucking 
Co.,  Greensboro;  Walker's  Transfer,  Roxboro:  Walters,  B.  H., 
Marshville;  Warren  Brothers,  Inc.,  Raleigh;  Warren,  W.  B., 
Transfer  Co.,  Dunn;  Washburn  Oil  Co.,  Inc.,  High  Point; 
Wayne  Trucking  Co.,  Goldsboro;  Weathers  Brothers  Transfer 
Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte;  West  Brothers  Transfer  and  Storage,  Inc., 
Raleigh;  West  Transfer  Co.,  Asheville:  Wetherington,  L.  H., 
New  Bern;  Whaley,  Kirby,  Beulaville;  Whichard,  W.  S.,  Thom- 
asville; White  Transfer  Co.,  Biltmore;  White  Transport  Co., 
Spindale;  Whitley,  M.  C,  Asheboro;  Whitmore,  M.  E.,  Inc., 
Henderson;  Whittenton's  Transfer,  Dunn;  Wicker,  W.  K, 
Pickup  and  Delivery,  Burlington;  Widenhouse,  A.  C,  Concord; 
Wilder,  J.  W.,  Transfer  Co.,  Greensboro;  Wilkinson,  Elmer  N., 
Transfer,  Mebane;  Williams,  Howard  M.,  Laurinburg;  Wil- 
liams, R.  H.,  Richlands;  Williams'  Transportation,  Greensboro; 
Wilson,  Henry  Clay,  Vanceboro;  Wilson  Transfer  Co.,  Inc., 
Gastonia;  Winecoff  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Concord;  Winecoff 
Transfer  Co.,  Concord;  Winston-Elkin  Motor  Express,  Elkin; 
Womble,  Julius,  Sparta;  Wright  Motor  Lines,  Asheville. 

Yarbrough  Transfer  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Young,  J.  W., 
Transfer,  Charlotte;  Young  and  Smith,  Marion;  Yount  Trans- 
fer, Inc.,  Hickory. 


Piedmont,  Only  N.C.  Airline, 'Best  Little  Carrier'  In  Nation 


Piedmont  Aviation,  Inc.,  Winston-Salem,  started 
as  an  airplane  sales  and  service  organization,  less 
than  six  years  ago  became  a  local  service  carrier 
and  in  that  time  has  developed  into  probably  the 
best  little  local  service  carrier  in  the  United  States. 
That  is  the  verdict  of  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board 
which  in  1952  granted  this  organization  the  privi- 
lege of  operating  for  seven  years  when  three  years 
is  the  usual  period.  In  fact  a  CAB  investigator  rec- 
ommended that  the  flying  privilege  be  extended  for 
10  years. 

Piedmont  Aviation  was  formerly  Camel  City  Fly- 
ing Service,  engaged  in  selling  and  servicing  air- 
planes. In  1939  Thomas  Henry  Davis,  then  20  years 
old,  joined  this  organization  as  sales  manager.  In 
1940  Camel  City  was  reorganized  as  Piedmont  Avia- 
tion and  Davis,  who  had  invested  $14,000  in  the  com- 
pany, was  elected  vice-president.  Three  years  later 
he  was  elected  president.  In  1944,  when  the  United 
States  Government  began  to  cut  back  in  its  training 
program,  Piedmont  Aviation  pushed  still  further  in 
its  sales  of  airplanes.  Business  increased  during  the 
first  postwar  years.  The  company  sold  163  planes 
in  the  Carolinas  and  Virginia  in  1946  while  conduct- 
ing GI  flight  training  for  veterans. 


Map  showing  routes  of  Piedmont  Air  Lines. 

In  1944  Piedmont  Aviation,  with  a  small  base  and 
a  small  staff,  had  shown  operation  profits  of  $60,000 
in  five  years  and  had  access  to  ample  capital.  On 
June  2  of  that  year  young  Mr.  Davis  filed  an  appli- 
cation with  the  Civil  Aeronautic  Board  for  permis- 
sion to  operate  a  scheduled  passenger,  mail,  express 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  3 


Pacemaker  of  Piedmont  Air  Lines  above  the  clouds  ov 
mountains  to  the  west. 


the 


and  freight  air  service  on  nine  southeastern  routes 
to  give  an  east-west  service  from  the  Carolinas  and 
Virginia  to  the  mid-west.  Previously  little  or  no 
airplane  service  had  been  given  across  the  mountain 
ranges  and  passengers  were  required  to  fly  either 
to  Washington  or  to  Atlanta  to  reach  airplane  service 
to  the  mid-west. 

Piedmont  Aviation  was  one  of  40  organizations 
applying  for  air  routes  to  the  southeast.  The  CAB 
lumped  these  applications  together  and  began  hearing 
arguments  in  June,  1945.  A  decision,  April  4,  1947, 
granted  Piedmont  Air  Lines,  one  of  two  new  routes 
over  which  to  operate.  The  decision  granted  Pied- 
mont Air  Lines  privileges  of  operating  from  the 
coastal  cities  of  Norfolk,  Morehead  City  and  Wil- 
mington to  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  Cincinnati.  Routes 
which  rendered  a  valuable  service  to  all  major  cities 
in  North  Carolina  and  most  of  the  large  cities  in 
Virginia.  Two  established  lines,  Eastern  and  Delta, 
and  one  new  firm,  State  Air  Lines  of  Charlotte,  chal- 
lenged CAB  action  in  granting  routes  to  Piedmont 
Air  Lines,  the  appeal  going  all  the  way  to  the  U.  S. 
Supreme  Court. 

Meanwhile  in  the  three  years  before  the  court 
opinion  was  handed  down,  President  Davis  went 
ahead  with  his  plans  to  provide  service  over  the  lines 
designated.  He  raised  about  $1,000,000  of  which 
$700,000  was  in  stock  in  the  company  and  $300,000 
was  in  a  bank  loan.  The  first  flight  was  made  from 
Wilmington  to  Louisville  February  20,  1948,  and 
within  a  matter  of  weeks  Piedmont  Air  Lines  had 
planes  operating  over  all  four  legs  of  the  flight,  a 
total  of  1,748  miles.  At  that  time  Piedmont  Air 
Lines  had  five  planes  in  the  air  and  63  employees. 

Piedmont  Air  Lines,  classed  as  a  local  service  air 
line,  actually  a  feeder  for  other  lines,  in  its  first  year 
of  operation,  was  classified  as  the  No.  3  company  of 
the  18  lines  established  since  1938.  In  its  first  four 
years  of  operation,  1948-51,  the  company  realized 
net  earnings  of  about  $300,000  and  in  five  years  the 
net  earnings  had  reached  $340,000.  No  dividends 
have  been  declared,  officials  plowing  all  profits  back 
into  the  expansion  and  improvements  of  its  service. 
In  five  years  of  operation  Piedmont  Air  Lines  in- 
creased its  passengers  by  470  percent,  its  air  mail 
tonnage  by  357  percent  and  its  air  express  and 
freight  by  608  percent.  In  1948  the  gross  income 
reached  $1,500,000.  In  1952  it  had  increased  to  $5,- 
300,000.  Today  Piedmont  Air  Lines  is  classed  as  the 
nation's  leading  local  service  line.  Only  17  air  lines 
in  the  United  States  carry  more  passengers  than  it 
does. 

When  it  started  operation,  Piedmont  Air  Lines 


N.  C,  BASE  OF  FIRST  AIR  FLIGHT, 
FINALLY  IS  BECOMING  AIR-MINDED 

North  Carolina,  in  which  the  first  heavier-than-air  plane 
flew  fifty  years  ago— at  Kitty  Hawk  on  December  17,  1903, 
built  and  operated  by  Wilbur  and  Orville  Wright — has  not  been 
particularly  air-minded.  However,  with  the  development  of: 
Piedmont  Air  Lines,  Winston-Salem,  and  air  traffic  of  five 
other  commercial  airlines  serving  the  State,  she  is  rapidly 
taking  to  the  air,  as  the  rate  of  enplaning  passengers  in  1951 
showed  an  increase  of  35  percent  over  the  number  in  1950 — 
and  the  1952  and  1953  figures  are  expected  to  show  continuing 
sizable  increases. 

In  1951  North  Carolina  was  27th  among  the  states  in  the 
number  of  enplaning  passengers,  but  was  10th  in  the  increase 
that  year  over  1950.  In  1950  the  enplaning  passengers  reached 
368,157,  giving  the  45  percent  increase  over  1950.  North  Caro- 
lina had  136  airfields  in  1951,  which  is  2.18  percent  of  the  total 
of  6,237  airfields  in  the  United  States.  Of  the  136  N.  C.  air- 
fields, 82  were  classified  as  Class  I  or  Sub  I,  meaning  they  can 
handle  only  small  privately  owned  planes. 

Charlotte  has  the  largest  air  business,  with  186,191  enplan- 
ing passengers  and  520.8  tons  of  mail  business.  In  fact,  Char- 
lotte handled  slightly  more  than  50  percent  of  passengers  and 
air  mail  tonnage  in  the  State  in  1951.  Four  of  the  six  air- 
plane lines  serving  the  State  serve  Charlotte.  These  are  Cap- 
ital, Eastern,  Piedmont  and  Southern.  The  other  two  are 
Delta  and  National. 

Enplaning  passengers  in  the  other  13  cities  with  commercial 
lines  in  1951  were,  in  rank,  as  follows:  Raleigh-Durham, 
62,691;  Greensboro-High  Point,  38,388;  Asheville,  20,294;  Win- 
ston-Salem, 18,313;  Wilmington,  14,930;  Fayetteville,  14,872; 
New  Bern,  7,126;  Elizabeth  City,  1,388;  Rocky  Mount,  1,146; 
Goldsboro,  961;  Pi.nehurst-Southern  Pines-Aberdeen,  684;  Hick- 
ory, 596;   Morehead  City,  577. 

Greensboro-High  Point  is  next  to  Charlotte  in  air  mail  ton- 
nage, with  162.9  tons  in  1951,  followed  by  Raleigh-Durham, 
145.5  tons;  Fayetteville,  45.9  tons;  New  Bern,  44.4  tons,  and 
Winston-Salem,  42.1  tons. 

Plans  are  being  developed  for  another  commercial  airport 
to  serve  Edgecombe,  Nash,  Pitt  and  Wilson  counties,  and  the 
cities  of  Greenville,  Rocky  Mount,  Tarboro  and  Wilson. — Data 
from  North  Carolina  Facts,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 


was  granted  a  permit  for  only  three  years.  The  com- 
pany asked  for  an  extension  of  its  life  for  seven 
years.  Late  in  1951  CAB  Examiner  Ferdinand  D. 
Moran,  after  a  careful  study,  recommended  that  the 
life  of  the  organization  be  extended  for  ten  years, 
stating  in  his  report,  "There  has  been  greater  public 
acceptance  of  Piedmont's  service  than  any  other  local 
service  carrier  in  its  initial  three-year  experimental 
period".  Up  to  that  time  no  local  service  carrier 
had  received  an  extension  of  more  than  five  years 
and  most  of  them  had  been  given  three  years.  CAB, 
in  its  decision,  stated,  "The  record  achieved  by  Pied- 
mont is  so  outstanding  among  local  service  carriers 
using  DC-3  equipment  as  to  merit  such  recognition". 
CAB  gave  this  such  recognition  in  the  form  of  ex- 
tending its  certificate  for  seven  years  as  "an  incen- 
tive to  other  local  service  carriers  to  strive  for  com- 
parable results". 

In  the  same  decision  CAB  extended  Piedmont's 
routes  by  1,000  miles,  giving  it  a  total  of  2,888  miles, 
adding  Knoxville,  Tenn.,  and  several  other  smaller 
cities,  including  Hickory  and  Kinston  in  this  State, 
to  its  routes.  Thus  given  a  more  permanent  basis, 
Piedmont  Air  Lines  realized  the  need  of  more  ex- 
tensive operating  facilities.  Business  had  been  con- 
ducted from  a  tar  paper  shack  at  Smith  Reynolds 
Airport  in  Winston-Salem.  A  survey  revealed  the 
urgent  need  for  92,000  more  square  feet  of  office 
and  hangar  space.  Louisville,  Ky.,  and  the  tri-cities 
of  Johnson  City,  Bristol  and  Kingsport,  Tenn.,  both 
wanted  Piedmont  Air  Lines  to  establish  headquarters 


Page  1 1 4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


there  and  offered  to  provide  all  space  necessary.  The 
appeal  to  locate  headquarters  in  Louisville  was  logic- 
al as  this  was  the  area  of  the  heaviest  traffic.  Across 
the  Ohio  River  from  Louisville  was  Cincinnati,  the 
greatest  producer  of  traffic  for  the  line.  The  Tri- 
cities  came  second  in  this  respect. 

But  President  Davis  was  a  Winston-Salem  man 
and  the  home  ties  were  strong.  The  decision  was 
reached  to  stay  in  Winston-Salem  after  Forsyth 
County  agreed  to  erect  a  larger  office  building  and 
to  provide  increased  hangar  space,  in  accordance 
with  Piedmont's  specifications,  on  the  old  County 
Home  property  just  across  the  highway  from  Smith 
Reynolds  Airport.  It  meant  about  $500,000  was  to 
be  raised  by  revenue  bonds.  Davis  agreed  to  lease 
this  property  for  20  years  with  an  option  to  buy  at 
the  end  of  ten  years.  Forsyth  County  stands  to  make 
a  reasonable  profit  of  about  $100,000  over  the  20- 
year  period.  The  proposal  has  been  taken  to  the 
courts  to  assure  legality  of  the  action. 

Forsyth  County  and  Winston-Salem  did  not  want 
to  lose  Piedmont  Air  Lines.  The  company's  payroll, 
with  its  725  skilled  operatives,  amounts  to  about 
$2,300,000  annually.  Of  this  amount  about  $1,500,- 
000  was  paid  to  workers  living  in  or  with  headquar- 
ters in  Winston-Salem.  So  the  headquarters  will  re- 
main there. 

Local  service  carriers  such  as  Piedmont  must  make 
many  stops  with  its  short  lines  and  short  hops  and 
stops  are  costly.  The  problem  of  equalizing  loads  pre- 
sents many  difficulties.  In  certain  sections  of  a  flight, 
traffic  may  be  heavy  while  on  others  the  loads  may 
be  light,  not  utilizing  space  at  its  maximum.  In  addi- 
tion, large  staffs  of  ground  personnel  are  required 
for  the  frequent  stops  and  this,  too,  is  expensive. 
However,  Piedmont  has  brought  the  average  cost 
per  mile  down  to  84^-92^',  which  is  the  lowest  cost 
in  the  business.  The  next  lowest  is  $1.25.  Piedmont 
manages  to  keep  its  planes  in  action  an  average  of 
nine  hours  daily,  which  is  a  splendid  record.  The 
planes,  even  over  the  difficult  mountain  routes,  have 
completed  98%  of  their  flights  and  have  had  only 
two  minor  accidents.  The  planes  have  flown  more 
than  150,000,000  miles  without  a  fatality  or  com- 
pensable injury. 

President  Davis  maintains  that  the  DC-3,  known 
as  the  Air  Force  "work  horse",  is  the  best  available 
plane   for   Piedmont   activities   at   this   time,   even 


Quick  landing,  unloading,  loading  and  take-off  of  passengers, 
mail,  express  and  freight  by  Piedmont  Air  Lines. 


Young  and  husky  crew  of  a  Piedmont  Air  Lines  Pacemaker. 

though  it  is  not  ideal  for  short  hauls.  It  has  a  low 
loading  capacity  and  is  costly  to  operate.  President 
Davis  is  making  a  study  of  planes  working  toward 
development  of  a  new  type  which  will  cut  operating 
costs  by  lO^4  per  plane  mile,  which  will  carry  24  pas- 
sengers, will  cruise  at  200  miles  per  hour,  with  an 
operating  range  of  350  miles,  with  a  maximum  load 
and  with  allowance  for  five  stops.  He  feels  that 
such  a  plane  can  and  will  soon  be  developed. 

President  Davis  has  set  as  a  goal  of  revenue  in- 
come so  that  no  air  mail  subsidy  will  be  needed.  In 
1952  air  mail  subsidy  accounted  for  28%  of  Pied- 
mont's revenue ;  without  it  it  would  have  been  in  the 
red.  A  65%  load  factor — that  is,  65%  of  all  revenue 
space  filled  on  all  trips — is  needed  for  successful 
operation.  In  1948  Piedmont  had  only  a  28%  load 
factor  but  had  increased  it  to  48%  in  1952  and  the 
percentage  is  continuing  to  increase.  In  June,  1953, 
Piedmont  carried  24,442  passengers  more  than  5,- 
000,000  passenger  miles,  a  Piedmont  record  and 
probably  a  record  for  any  local  service  carrier.  Pied- 
mont has  become  the  top  local  service  air  line  in  the 
United  States. 

Through  its  efficiency  efforts  Piedmont  has  re- 
duced its  "deadwood"  flights  to  a  minimum.  CAB 
Examiner  Moran  said:  "Since  the  beginning  of  its 
operations  Piedmont  has  had  an  outstanding  record 
of  declining  costs  and  rising  revenues".  Spencer  V. 
Rice,  sales  manager  for  American  Air  Lines,  Rich- 
mond, after  watching  a  Piedmont  plane  land,  un- 
load, load  and  take  off  in  less  than  five  minutes,  said : 
"That's  Piedmont  for  you.  They  come  in  and  get 
out  of  an  airport  faster  than  any  other  air  line  I 
know." 

Piedmont  has  three  principal  east  and  west  air 
lines  with  many  connecting  and  cross  lines.  These 
principal  lines  are: 

Norfolk  via  Newport  News,  Richmond,  Lynch- 
burg, Roanoke  and  Beckley,  where  one  line  bears 
northward  to  Charleston,  Asheland-Huntington  and 
Cincinnati;  the  other  to  Lexington  and  Louisville, 
Ky. 

Morehead  City-Beaufort  via  New  Bern,  Kinston, 
Raleigh-Durham,  Greensboro-High  Point  and  Win- 
ston-Salem to  the  Tri-Cities  of  Bristol-Johnson  City- 
Kingsport,  Tenn.,  Lexington,  Ky.,  and  Cincinnati. 

Wilmington  via  Fayetteville,  Pinehurst,  Charlotte, 
one  prong  going  from  there  to  Hickory  and  the  Tri- 
Cities  and  the  other  prong  via  Asheville-Henderson- 
ville  to  the  Tri-Cities. 


Summer-fall,  i  953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  5 


The  connecting  and  cross  lines  include  three  lines 
leaving  Roanoke,  Va.,  one  to  Danville  and  Greens- 
boro, another  to  Winston-Salem  and  the  third  to  the 
Tri-Cities  and  Knoxville,  Tenn. ;  a  short  line  connects 
Winston-Salem  and  Hickory.  A  line  extends  from 
Morehead  City  via  Wilmington  to  Myrtle  Beach, 
S.  C,  and  another  line  from  Myrtle  Beach  via  Fay- 
etteville  to  Raleigh-Durham. 

Piedmont's  east-west  lines  are  really  breaking  new 
ground.  About  15%  of  the  passengers  are  taking 
their  first  flight.  The  line  serves  cities  with  a  com- 
bined population  of  about  6,000,000.  They  are  im- 
portant from  a  national  defense  view  point,  having 
along  the  line  several  army  camps,  Pickett,  Eustice, 
Lee  and  Bragg,  and  two  marine  bases,  Lejeune  and 
Cherry  Point.  It  also  serves  the  Atlantic  beaches, 
including  Virginia  Beach,  Morehead  City,  the  Wil- 
mington beaches  and  Myrtle  Beach,  at  the  same  time 
appealing  to  winter  golfers  in  the  Sandhills  and 
summer  visitors  in  the  mountains.  In  fact,  about 
18%  of  the  summer  passengers  are  vacationists.  It 
is  interesting  to  note  that  Baptist  Hospital  in  Win- 
ston-Salem generates  more  passenger  business  than 
all  other  Winston-Salem  businesses  combined.  Pied- 
mont looks  forward  to  developing  increased  business 
from  the  important  industrial  and  commercial  cen- 
ters which  it  taps. 

Thomas  Henry  Davis,  born  in  Winston-Salem  in 
1919,  has  had  a  flair  for  the  air  from  his  youth.  Be- 
fore he  was  ten  years  of  age  he  was  building  model 
airplanes  and  flying  them  in  his  back  yard.  At  the 
age  of  15,  after  taking  flying  lessons  for  21/-)  hours 
at  the  old  Miller  Airport  in  Winston-Salem,  he  took 
off  on  his  first  solo  flight.  After  finishing  high  school, 
he  agreed  to  study  medicine  and  took  a  four-year 
pre-medical  course  at  the  University  of  Arizona  be- 


cause he  was  troubled  with  asthma  but  primarily 
because  there  he  had  year-around  flying  weather.  He 
finished  the  medical  course  but  also  became  a  licensed 
commercial  pilot.  When  he  became  president  of 
Piedmont  Aviation  in  1943,  Mr.  Davis  began  plans 
for  inaugurating  a  flying  service  in  addition  to  the 
firm's  sales  and  service  activities  and  training  GI 
students  to  fly. 

President  Davis  has  built  an  efficient  and  progres- 
sive organization,  composed  largely  of  able  young 
men.  From  Eastern  Air  Lines  he  recruited  several 
assistants,  including  R.  D.  Hager,  vice-president  and 
right-hand  man ;  L.  W.  Golson,  traffic  manager ;  Gor- 
don Brown,  administrative  assistant;  R.  E.  Turbe- 
ville,  in  charge  of  stations,  and  L.  A.  Watson,  in 
charge  of  communications.  From  his  older  organ- 
ization he  has  continued  H.  K.  "Zeke"  Saunders,  fly- 
ing and  maintenance,  and  Milton  Fare,  accounting. 

Officers  of  Piedmont,  in  addition  to  President 
Davis,  are  R.  D.  Hager  and  R.  S.  Northington,  vice- 
presidents  ;  H.  K.  Saunders,  vice-president,  opera- 
tions ;  and  M.  F.  Fare,  secretary.  The  Board  of  Di- 
rectors is  composed  of  Mr.  Davis,  Mr.  Hager,  R.  S. 
Northington,  M.  F.  Fare,  E.  L.  Davis,  Sr.,  E.  L. 
Davis,  Jr.,  Thurmond  Chatham,  C.  E.  Norfleet,  Glen 
E.  Anderson,  and  Frank  Dowd. 

Piedmont  Air  Lines  has  capital  asets  of  $2,295,- 
000,  including  capital  of  $1,140,500  and  surplus  of 
$342,000.  Although  the  corporation  has  never  de- 
clared a  dividend,  it  has  continued  to  invest  its  earn- 
ings in  expansion  of  plant,  equipment  and  personnel, 
its  physical  properties  now  having  a  valuation  of  ap- 
proximately $1,500,000.  Barring  unforeseen  diffi- 
culties, Piedmont's  earnings  in  1953  are  expected 
to  reach  $100,000.  It  is  well  on  its  way  toward  suc- 
cessful and  remunerative  operations. 


Luxury  Busses  Carry  Passengers  Locally  and  Nation- Wide 


CAROLINA  COACH  CO. 
Raleigh 

By  John  D.  Minter,  /.  Walter  Thompson  Co. 

On  a  Tuesday  afternoon  in  this  past  September  a 
young  mother  and  her  little  girl  boarded  a  Carolina 
Trailways  bus  at  Raleigh  for  a  trip  to  Charlotte.  The 
little  girl  was  upset  and  was  crying,  but  a  resource- 
ful bus  driver  pulled  from  his  pocket  a  stick  of  chew- 
ing gum  and  soon  she  was  all  smiles  and  happy  again. 
The  young  mother  was  happy  too,  since  she  remem- 
bered that  this  same  bus  driver  had  given  her  chew- 
ing gum  when  she,  too,  was  a  little  girl — some  20 
years  ago,  when  she  was  taking  a  bus  trip  with  her 
mother. 

The  point  of  this  little  story  is  that  Carolina  Trail- 
ways  is  now  serving  its  third  generation  of  North 
Carolinians.  Driver  Torrence  Ingold — the  lovable 
chewing  gum  dispenser,  has  been  operating  buses 
between  Charlotte,  Greensboro  and  Raleigh  since 
1922;  and  since  1929  for  Carolina  Coach  Co.  He 
holds  his  company's  highest  safety  award  for  having 
driven  18  years  without  a  chargeable  accident. 

Carolina  Coach  Co.  was  organized  in  1925  when  it 
purchased  the  bus  lines  then  operating  between  Ral- 
eigh and  Greensboro  and  between  Raleigh  and  Rocky 
Mount.  The  Raleigh-Greensboro  line  was  purchased 
from  two  brothers — Al  and  Mike  Kramer,  who  are 


N.  C.  BUS  ASSOCIATION  EXPANDS 

TO  INCLUDE  ALL  LARGE  CARRIERS 

The  North  Carolina  Bus  Association  was  organized  about  a 
decade  ago,  made  up  of  short  line  operators.  Marshall  C. 
Kurfees,  now  mayor  of  Winston-Salem,  was  one  of  the  prime 
movers  in  the  organization  and  served  as  the  executive  secre- 
tary and  treasurer  for  several  years. 

The  original  plan  of  members  operating  bus  lines  of  not 
more  than  100  miles  was  changed  a  year  or  so  ago  and  the 
large  bus  operators  also  became  members.  At  its  annual  meet- 
ing in  Charlotte  last  June  the  association  decided  to  employ  a 
full-time  secretary. 

C.  D.  Hardin,  manager  of  the  Gastonia  Transit  Co.,  Gastonia, 
was  elected  president,  succeeding  Louis  M.  Wade,  operator  of 
the  Southern  Coach  Co.,  Durham  and  Raleigh;  G.  L.  Winders, 
Sanford,  was  elected  vice-president,  and  V.  A.  Hasty,  Fayette- 
ville,  secretary-treasurer. 

credited  with  bringing  the  first  "sedan"  type  bus 
to  North  Carolina.  In  1926  it  bought  from  the  Gres- 
ham  interests  a  line  operating  between  Raleigh  and 
Fayetteville,  and  also  was  granted  permission  to 
extend  its  Raleigh-Rocky  Mount  line  eastward  to 
Washington,  N.  C. 

Driver  J.  A.  "Red"  Waters,  another  old  timer, 
began  his  daily  run  between  Raleigh  and  Washing- 
ton, N.  C.  in  1926  and  still  has  it  today.  "Red" 
Waters,  like  Torrence  Ingold,  can  pick  up  passen- 
gers at  Zebulon,  Middlesex  or  other  communities 


PAGE  1  1  6 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


along  his  Raleigh-Washington  route  and  discuss 
grandma's  health,  Aunt  Susie's  new  job  in  New  York, 
or  any  number  of  personal  subjects  resulting  from 
being  a  neighbor  to  the  people  along  90  miles  of  high- 
way for  27  years. 

Such  drivers  as  Torrence  Ingold  and  "Red"  Wa- 
ters— and  there  are  many  others,  prove  the  stability 
and  "neighborliness"  of  Carolina  Coach  Co.  over  the 
years.  Its  officials  realized  early  that  its  future  was 
dependent  on  convenient,  dependable  and  neighborly 
service  rendered  to  the  people  and  the  industries  of 
the  state;  and  only  with  them  could  it  grow  and 
prosper. 

In  1923  the  company,  through  purchase,  obtained 
routes  between  Rocky  Mount  and  Norfolk,  via  Win- 
ton  and  by  Rich  Square.  Early  the  next  year  it  pur- 
chased the  franchise  between  Greensboro  and  Char- 
lotte from  the  Southern  Coach  Co.  and  the  route  from 
Rocky  Mount  to  Richmond  from  the  Virginia  South- 
ern Coach  Co. 

In  1939  its  lines  were  extended  southward  from 
Rocky  Mount  to  Jacksonville,  N.  C.  by  purchasing 
the  operating  rights  of  Safety  Transit  Lines  which 
had  served  this  area  for  six  years.  George  Springle, 
a  partner  in  the  Safety  Transit  Company  joined 
Carolina  Coach  Co.  when  his  company  was  purchased 
and  today  handles  Carolina  Coach's  insurance  and 
tax  matters.  The  Rocky-Mount-Jacksonville  pur- 
chase came  at  a  fortunate  time  as  the  government 
later  built  Camp  Lejeune  at  Jacksonville.  The  com- 
pany became  a  vital  transportation  link  for  the 
thousands  of  marines,  who  have  been  and  still  are 
being  trained  in  that  large  marine  base. 

In  1948  the  company  received  permission  to  ope- 
rate from  Jacksonville  into  Wilmington,  thus  pro- 
viding routes  from  the  lower  coastal  area  of  North 
Carolina  to  Norfolk  and  to  Richmond — the  gateway 
to  the  larger  cities  of  the  east. 

In  July,  1952,  Carolina  Coach  Co.  purchased  Red 
Star  Bus  lines  and  its  wholly  owned  subsidiary — 
Eastern  Shore  Transit  Lines  of  Salisbury,  Md.  These 
companies  had  served  for  years  the  Del-Mar-Va  pen- 
insula, with  service  from  it  to  Philadelphia,  Balti- 
more, Washington  and  Norfolk.  With  this  purchase 
Carolina  Coach  expanded  its  service  from  two  states 
to  five,  adding  Maryland,  Delaware  and  Pennsyl- 
vania. 


Carolina  Coach  bus  operators  are  tested  and  retested  for  eye- 
hand,  coordination,  reflexes,  nerves  and  vision. 


Modern    Trailways   coach   of   Carolina   Coach   Co.   delivers 
passengers  all  over  nation. 

Early  in  1953  Carolina  Coach  Co.  entered  into  a 
contract  with  Norfolk  Southern  Bus  Corp.,  a  subsid- 
iary of  the  railroad  of  the  same  name,  to  purchase 
its  bus  rights  in  Virginia  and  North  Carolina,  its 
equipment  and  garage  facilities — subject  to  the  ap- 
proval of  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission,  the 
North  Carolina  Utilities  Commission  and  the  Vir- 
ginia Corporation  Commission.  While  this  purchase 
has  already  been  approved  by  the  N.  C.  Utilities 
Commission  and  the  Virginia  Corporation  Commis- 
sion, it  has  not  yet  been  approved  by  the  Interstate 
Commerce  Commission  which  is  necessary  before 
consummation  of  purchase  can  take  place. 

(Sale  approved  by  ICC  first  week  in  January,    1954  ) 

Based  on  its  required  reports  to  the  Interstate 
Commerce  Commission  and  the  North  Carolina  Util- 
ities Commission ;  Carolina  Coach  Co.  in  1952  trans- 
ported over  six  million  passengers  on  all  its  routes 
and  over  4  million  in  this  State.  The  company  ope- 
rates 221  buses  of  which  185  are  licensed  for  service 
in  North  Carolina. 

In  1938  Carolina  Coach  Co.  became  an  associate 
member  company  of  National  Trailways  Bus  System 
— an  association  of  independently  owned  bus  lines 
doing  business  in  all  sections  of  the  United  States. 
This  association  is  now  serving  over  60,000  miles  of 
the  nation's  highways.  Carolina  Coach  Co.  therefore 
uses  "Carolina  Trailways"  as  its  trade-name  and  is 
most  generally  referred  to  this  way.  As  a  Trailways 
associate  company  it  cooperates  with  other  Trailways 
companies  in  providing  through  bus  service  over 
great  distances.  The  Norfolk-Fayetteville,  Norfolk- 
Charlotte,  and  Norfolk-Salisbury,  N.  C,  routes  of  the 
company  have  become  integral  "legs"  of  three  im- 
portant coast-to-coast  routes  where  a  passenger  may 
travel  from  east  to  west  coast  on  the  newest  type 
buses  with  a  change  required  only  at  Dallas,  Texas. 
The  Fayetteville-Richmond  and  the  Charlotte-Dan- 
ville routes  are  vital  links  in  Trailways  routes  be- 
tween New  York  and  Florida  and  other  deep  south 
points.  The  north-south  bus  schedules  maintain  con- 
nections at  Carolina  terminals,  with  the  coast  to  coast 
routes  already  mentioned. 

Other  North  Carolina  Trailways  carriers  repre- 
sented in  the  vast  through  operations  are  Queen  City 
Trailways,  of  Charlotte;  Smoky  Mountain  Trail- 
ways,  of  Asheville ;  and  Virginia  Trailways,  of  Char- 
lottesville, Va.,  whose  routes  junction  with  Carolina 
Trailways  in  this  State  at  Burlington  and  Durham, 
and  at  Richmond  and  Danville,  Va. 

The  same  stability  as  represented  by  its  driver 
corps  is  also  reflected  in  the  Carolina  Coach  Co.  man- 
agement. In  its  28  year  history,  its  top  management 
has  changed  only  three  times.  H.  H.  Patterson  was 
the  company's  first  president,  serving  from  1925 
through  1927.    H.  H.  Hearn,  who  had  served  under 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  7 


Patterson  as  general  manager,  continued  as  head  of 
the  company  with  this  same  title  until  1938  when 
his  health  failed.  R.  C.  Hoffman,  Jr.,  was  elected 
president  in  1933,  although  he  continued  to  serve  as 
head  of  other  utilities  at  the  same  time,  with  head- 
quarters in  Roanoke,  Va.  In  1940,  due  to  Mr. 
Hearn's  retirement  and  the  vast  growth  of  Carolina 
Coach's  routes  and  revenue,  Mr.  Hoffman  relinquish- 
ed all  other  management  duties  and  moved  his  resi- 
dence to  Raleigh  where  he  devotes  his  full  time  to 
this  company's  management. 

R.  B.  Small,  Carolina  Coach  Co.  secretary  and 
treasurer,  joined  the  company  in  1941,  following 
utility  administration  work  in  Wisconsin,  Texas  and 
New  York. 

John  H.  Thomas,  manager  of  operation  for  the 
company  since  1948,  came  to  Carolina  Coach  Co. 
from  the  Lynchburg  Transit  Co.  where  he  had  been 
associated  with  Mr.  Hoffman  in  the  management  of 
that  company.     ' 

W.  Glenn  Humphrey  is  the  company's  sales  and 
terminal  director.  He  joined  the  company  in  1929 
and  was  soon  thereafter  elevated  to  traffic  manager 
— the  title  he  now  holds. 


ATLANTIC  GREYHOUND  LINES 
Charleston.  W.  Va. 

Atlantic  Greyhound  Lines,  with  headquarters  in 
Charleston,  W.  Va.,  and  a  unit  of  the  National  Grey- 
hound system,  was  organized  28  years  ago  in  Charles- 
ton, W.  Va.,  as  the  Midland  Trail  Transit  Co.,  headed 
by  Arthur  M.  Hill,  now  chairman  of  the  board  of 
Atlantic  Greyhound  lines  and  president  of  the  Na- 
tional Association  of  Motor  Bus  Operators.  The  first 
line  started  was  from  Charleston  to  Huntington  and 
Gauley  Bridge.  Within  five  years  operations  had 
spread  over  six  states  surrounding  West  Virginia. 

New  lines  were  acquired  through  purchase  and 
merger  and  extending  into  new  territory.  The  Blue 
and  Grey  lines  which  had  acquired  other  lines  and 
the  Camel  City  Coach's  lines,  Winston-Salem,  ope- 
rating in  the  Carolinas  and  Georgia,  were  merged  in 
1931.  This  combination  merged  with  the  Atlantic 
Greyhound  lines  extending  the  coverage  to  11  south- 
eastern states.  John  L.  Gilmer,  Winston-Salem,  had 
started  the  Camel  City  lines  and  had  developed  ex- 
tensive operations  in  the  three  states.  With  the 
merger  he  had  become  vice-president  and  sales  man- 
ager of  Atlantic  Greyhound  lines,  continuing  in  those 
positions  until  his  death  in  1947.  Mr.  Gilmer  had 
also  been  a  key  man  in  organizing  the  Queen  City 


A  modern  GMC  coach  placed  in  operation  in  19o2  by  Atlantic 
Greyhound  Corp. 


Coach  Co.,  Charlotte,  serving  as  its  president  for 
several  years. 

Atlantic  Greyhound  Lines  now  operates  about  500 
coaches  with  700  drivers  and  has  about  2,000  em- 
ployees with  an  estimated  payroll  for  1953  of  $8,000.- 
000.  The  Atlantic  unit  operates  over  8,000  miles  of 
routes  in  Pa.,  W.  Va.,  Ohio  and  Ky.,  and  seven  other 
states  south  and  east  of  these.  In  combination  with 
the  National  Greyhound  system  Atlantic  Greyhound 
furnishes  passenger  service  to  all  parts  of  the  United 
States  and  into  Canada  with  a  minimum  of  change 
en  route. 

In  North  Carolina  Atlantic  Greyhound  operates 
over  1,777  miles  of  routes.  General  franchise  rights 
in  this  State  include  the  following:  Raleigh,  Golds- 
boro,  Wilmington  to  Charleston,  S.  C. ;  Raleigh,  Hen- 
derson, Norlina  to  Richmond  and  Norfolk,  Va. ;  Ral- 
eigh, Fayetteville,  Laurinburg  to  Charleston  and  Co- 
lumbia, S.  C. ;  Raleigh,  Asheboro,  Lexington  to  Win- 
ston-Salem; Winston-Salem,  Greensboro,  Reidsville 
to  Richmond  and  Norfolk,  Va. ;  Winston-Salem,  El- 
kin,  North  Wilkesboro,  Boone  to  Bristol,  Va. ;  Win- 
ston-Salem, Statesville  to  Charlotte. 

Atlantic  Greyhound  maintains  garages  in  Ashe- 
ville,  Charlotte,  Raleigh  and  Winston-Salem  and 
operates  into  Union  terminals  in  the  principal  cities 
of  Asheville,  Charlotte,  Greensboro,  Raleigh  and 
Winston-Salem. 

In  addition  to  its  general  franchise  routes  Atlan- 
tic Greyhound  offers  limited  and  express  schedules, 
charter  busses  for  special  groups,  charter  tours,  pre- 
planned trips  and  package  express  service. 

Benefits  are  provided  for  all  Atlantic  Greyhound 
employees  including  health  and  accident,  groups 
plan,  pension  plan  and  employees  welfare  fund. 

Atlantic  Greyhound  has  been  a  pioneer  in  improv- 
ing its  coaches  to  provide  the  maximum  of  comfort 
to  its  passengers.  Its  busses  are  provided  with  rad- 
iant heating  and  cooling  systems,  better  visibility 
with  deeper  and  softer  cushions  and  more  room  for 
its  passengers.  Hydraulic  power  is  used  in  braking 
and  steering  its  busses.  Its  drivers  are  given  exten- 
sive and  intensive  training.  New  drivers  are  accom- 
panied by  more  experienced  men  on  several  trips  be- 
fore they  are  placed  in  charge  of  busses. 

In  the  23  years  since  Bus  Transportation  Magazine 
inaugurated  its  Maintenance  Efficiency  Award  At- 
lantic Greyhound  has  won  this  award  five  years  con- 
secutively and  five  other  times,  making  a  total  of  ten 
annual  awards  out  of  23. 

Arthur  M.  Hill,  chairman  of  the  board ;  George  S. 
Engle,  president,  and  most  of  the  other  officers  are 
located  at  Atlantic  Greyhound  headquarters  in 
Charleston,  W.  Va.  One  general  officer,  Clarence  T. 
Leinbach,  treasurer,  is  located  in  this  State,  along 
with  J.  W.  Alspaugh,  director,  both  of  Winston-Sa- 
lem.    Other  key  personnel  in  this  State  include  L. 

C.  Myers,    division   manager,    Winston-Salem,    and 

D.  D.  McAfee,  division  manager,  Raleigh,  and  four 
supervisors:  Ben  Aldridge.  Winston-Salem;  E.  V. 
Garren,  Asheville;  J.  B.  Hatcher,  Raleigh,  and  F.  H. 
Titlow,  Charlotte. 

The  Greyhound  Corporation,  the  nationwide  or- 
ganization, had  its  beginning  in  Hibbing,  Minn.,  in 
1914,  when  the  first  embryonic  Greyhound  was  a  sin- 
gle livery  auto  that  chugged  over  a  rutted  two-mile 
route  between  the  communities  of  Hibbing  and  Alice. 
Carl   Eric   Wickman   operated   this   Hupmobile   on 


PAGE  1  1  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Greyhound  new  scenicruiser  to  be  placed  in  operation  in  1954, 
in  front  of  Winston-Salem  Mis  terminal. 

hourly  schedules  at  15^  one  way  or  25<j-  for  a  round 
trip. 

Ralph  Bogan  started  service  over  the  same  route 
and  a  fare-cutting  battle  followed.  Finally  they  de- 
cided to  combine  operations.  The  success  of  their 
venture  was  the  basis  upon  which  the  present  day 
Greyhound  system  was  developed.  A  little  later  Or- 
ville  Caesar,  operating  a  bus  line  out  of  Superior. 
Wis.,  joined  the  two  and  these  three  formed  the 
nucleus  around  which  Greyhound  was  built. 

Greyhound,  the  now  familiar  name,  was  not  adopt- 
ed until  1926.  One  of  the  companies  which  affiliated 
with  the  Motor  Transit  Co.,  as  it  was  then  known, 
used  a  racing  greyhound  dog  as  its  trademark.  Pa- 
trons began  to  refer  to  this  as  "The  Greyhound 
lines"  and  the  grey  busses  became  known  as  "Grey- 
hounds". This  then  became  the  name  of  the  organ- 
ization which  operates  inter-city  busses  throughout 
the  United  States  and  into  Canada. 

Today  the  nationwide  Greyhound  system  operates 
6,600  highway  cruisers  over  nearly  97,000  miles  of 
routes  through  all  48  states  and  Canada.  Greyhound 
busses  travel  more  than  one  and  one-half  million 
miles  a  day  and  carry  more  than  200,000,000  pas- 
sengers annually.  In  the  25  years,  1927-51,  Grey- 
hound's gross  operating  revenues  have  risen  from 
$2,536,000  to  more  than  $226,597,000.  In  1927  the 
company  had  269  stockholders — the  number  is  now 
more  than  59,000. 

One  of  the  high  spots  in  Greyhound  operations 
came  during  the  great  depression.  Chicago's  "Cen- 
tury of  Progress"  exposition  was  held  in  this  period. 
Greyhound  contracted  to  operate  60  special  busses 
on  the  fairgrounds.  The  company  leased  blocks  of 
rooms  in  the  Chicago  hotels  and  organized  tours  from 
every  state  in  the  Union.  These  tours  form  the  basis 
for  the  wide  variety  of  expense-paid  tours  Grey- 
hound now  operates  into  every  section  of  this  coun- 
try, Canada  and  Mexico. 


QUEEN  CITY  COACH  COMPANY 

Charlotte 

When  Queen  City  Coach  Co.,  Charlotte,  was  or- 
ganized, slightly  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  century 
ago,  it  took  over  one  franchise  and  operated  18  busses 
over  240  miles  of  road.  Today  this  company  operates 
250  busses  with  4,500  miles  of  franchise  in  six  states 


and  last  year  hauled  more  than  five  and  a  quartet 
million  passengers.  Although  North  Carolina  own- 
ed from  the  beginning,  it  provides  through  traffic 
from  several  points  in  the  State  to  distant  points 
throughout  the  country  by  means  of  its  association 
with  other  bus  lines. 

The  moving  spirit  in  the  organization  of  this  ex- 
tensive passenger  carrier  in  North  Carolina  and 
other  states  was  L.  A.  Love,  Sr.,  now  vice-president 
and  general  manager  of  Queen  City  Coach.  Mr.  Love, 
of  Concord,  and  J.  F.  Lowder,  of  Mount  Pleasant,  had 
secured  charter  rights  to  operate  a  bus  line  from 
Charlotte  to  Wilmington  and  with  a  shuttle  bus  from 
Lumberton  to  Fayetteville,  operating  as  Eastern 
Carolina  Coach  Co.,  Inc.  The  new  corporation,  form- 
ed in  1928,  took  over  this  bus  line  with  all  of  its  rights 
and  equipment  and  continued  operation  with  Mr. 
Love  as  manager.  It  was  not  long,  however,  until  the 
new  company  began  its  process  of  expansion  and  ex 
tension,  which  continues  until  today  and  with  pros- 
pects for  further  expansion  in  future  years. 

Original  organizers  of  the  corporation  included 
many  well-known  and  substantial  citizens  in  severa 
sections  of  the  Piedmont  area  of  the  State.  In  addi- 
tion to  Mr.  Love,  these  included  the  original  officers, 
the  late  John  L.  Gilmer,  Winston-Salem,  president; 
W.  Erskine  Smith,  Albemarle,  vice-president;  R.  G. 
Holder,  Winston-Salem,  secretary;  the  late  Powell 
Gilmer,  Winston-Salem,  treasurer,  and  Mr.  Love 
general  manager.  Other  original  stockholders  were 
the  late  Grover  C.  McManus,  Albemarle;  the  late 
Sheriff  James  Flake  Martin,  Wadesboro ;  the  late  A. 
D.  Caudle,  Albemarle ;  D.  J.  Hatley,  Albemarle,  and 
Herman  H.  Hardison,  Wadesboro. 

The  organization  had  no  par  stock  with  $230,000 
paid  in.  The  home  office  during  the  first  few  years 
was  in  Winston-Salem,  later  moving  to  Charlotte.  It 
operated  the  Charlotte-Wilmington  line  with  shuttle 
bus  from  Lumberton  to  Fayetteville  with  13  busses 
and  about  15  employees.  Mr.  Gilmer,  who  then  ope- 
rated the  Camel  City  Lines,  Winston-Salem,  suggest- 
ed the  name,  Queen  City  Coach  in  honor  of  Charlotte, 
an  established  designation. 

Queen  City  Coach  the  next  year  started  its  expan- 
sion program.  First  it  took  over  the  T.  J.  Roberts 
Line  from  Shelby  to  Asheville  and  purchased  the  line 
operated  by  "Smoky  Joe"  Wright,  still  head  of  the 
Smoky  Mountain  Stages,  Inc.,  Asheville,  which  ope- 
rated from  Shelby  to  Charlotte.  In  1930,  the  next) 
year,  Queen  City  Coach  took  over  the  B  &  H  Coach 
Line  from  Charlotte  via  Hickory  to  Asheville.  About 
the  same  time  it  purchased  from  Mr.  Wright  the 
Charlotte  to  Greenville,  S.  C,  line  (sold  in  1935  to 
Old  South  Lines) .  The  next  year  it  bought  from  Mr. 
Wright  the  Greenville,  S.  C,  to  Atlanta  line.  In  1934- 
35  it  established  the  line  from  Charlotte  to  Myrtle 
Beach  by  securing  a  certificate  of  convenience  and) 
necessity  from  North  and  South  Carolina  regulatoryj 
bodies. 

John  L.  Gilmer  and  his  brother,  Powell  Gilmer, 
sold  their  interest  in  Queen  City  Coach  Co.  in  1934. 
Mr.  Gilmer  meanwhile  had  merged  his  Camel  Cityj 
Lines  with  Atlantic  Greyhound  lines  of  Charleston, 
W.  Va.,  and  became  vice-president  of  the  latter  or- 
ganization. At  the  same  time  he  purchased  the  Char- 
lotte-Atlanta line  for  Atlantic  Greyhound  lines. 
When  Mr.  Gilmer  sold  his  interest  in  Queen  City 
Coach,  he  resigned  as  president  and  W.   Erskine 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  9 


Smith,  Albemarle,  prominent  attorney  and  State  leg- 
islator, was  elected  president  of  Queen  City  Coach 
Co. 

Continuing  its  expansion,  Queen  City  Coach  pur- 
chased in  1934-35  the  Greensboro-Fayetteville  bus 
line,  inaugurated  the  line  from  Greensboro  to  Fay- 
etteville,  via  Siler  City  and  Sanford ;  the  Winston- 
Salem  line,  via  High  Point  and  Asheboro  to  Fayette- 
ville;  Greensboro-Charleston,  S.  C  line  via  Rock- 
ingham and  Florence  and  the  Durham  and  Chapel 
Hill  line  to  Rockingham  via  Pinehurst  and  Southern 
Pines.  After  a  temporary  letup  in  expansion,  Queen 
City  Coach  in  1938  purchased  from  the  East  Tennes- 
see and  Eastern  North  Carolina  Transportation  Co. 
of  Johnson  City,  Tenn.,  the  line  from  Hickory  to 
Johnson  City  and  Bristol,  Tenn. 

After  a  longer  interval  Queen  City  Coach  in  1943 
acquired  Georgia-Florida  coaches  operating  from 
Augusta,  Ga.,  to  Lake  City,  Fla.,  via  Dublin  and 
Douglas,  Ga.  More  recently  in  1952-53  Queen  City 
Coach  acquired  the  franchise  from  Smoky  Mountain 
Stages  to  operate  between  Charlotte  and  Augusta 
and  from  Charlotte  to  Greenville  and  Anderson,  S.  C. 

Since  North  Carolina  laws  require  a  central  or 
union  bus  station  for  all  bus  lines  operating  into  and 
out  of  cities  and  towns  within  the  State,  Queen  City 
Coach  has  built  and  owns  numbers  of  terminals  in 
North  Carolina.  Here  and  elsewhere  it  has  arrange- 
ments with  other  bus  companies  owning  some  sta- 
tions, owning  others  jointly  with  other  bus  lines  and 
leasing  privileges  of  using  stations  belonging  to  other 
lines.  Cost  of  using  stations  belonging  to  other  lines 
are  pro-rated  on  the  basis  of  revenues  received  from 
such  stations. 

Always  owned  and  operated  by  North  Carolinians, 
Queen  City  Coach  has  expanded  its  13  busses  and  240 
miles  of  franchise  into  its  present  ownership  of  250 
busses  and  4,500  miles  of  franchise.  From  around 
25  employees  at  the  beginning,  receiving  annual  sal- 
aries and  wages  of  $32,000,  Queen  City  Coach  now 
has  525  employees  with  an  annual  payroll  of  $1,782,- 
000.  Although  its  busses  operate  in  North  and  South 
Carolina,  Georgia,  Florida,  Tennessee  and  Virginia, 
approximately  two-thirds  of  the  payroll  is  distribut- 
ed in  North  Carolina.  This  means  that  approximate- 
ly $1,188,000  is  paid  out  each  year  to  workers  who 
either  live  or  have  their  headquarters  in  this  State. 

Queen  City  Coach  has  expanded  its  operations  un- 
til its  gross  revenue  is  approximately  $5,000,000  a 
year.  The  value  of  its  plant  and  equipment  is  now 
$2,683,493,  while  the  capital  and  surplus  is  shown  at 
$2,747,994.  In  1952  Queen  City  Coach  hauled  5,228,- 
000  passengers  and  traveled  13,125,000  vehicle  miles. 

Queen  City  Coach  is  a  member  of  National  Trail- 
ways,  an  association  of  52  independent  bus  companies 
which  advertise  jointly  and  cooperate  fully  in  ths 
handling  of  passenger  traffic.  Through  this  associa- 
tion arrangements  are  made  by  which  passenger-; 
may  board  busses  and  ride  to  points  throughout  the 
country  with  no  changes  or  possibly  one  or  two 
changes.  The  network  of  these  busses  is  nationwide 
and  provides  continuous  travel  with  a  minimur"1  of 
changes.  This  proves  a  very  definite  and  complete 
service  to  the  traveling  public.  For  example,  a  pas- 
senger may  board  a  bus  at  Raleigh  or  Charlotte  an  I 
travel  to  the  West  Coast  with  only  one  change,  a ; 
Memphis  or  Dallas.  Other  through  busses  are  from 
Raleigh  to  Dallas,  Charlotte  to  Chicago,  Fayetteville 


to  Memphis  and  Dallas,  Raleigh  and  Fayetteville  to 
Miami ;  Charlotte  and  Greensboro  to  Tampa  and 
numerous  others. 

Queen  City  Coach  provides  with  small  cost  to  its 
employees  insurance  plans  for  life,  health  and  acci- 
dent, hospitalization  with  surgery  benefits.  The  com- 
pany also  operates  a  bonus  plan  based  on  percentage 
of  earnings  and  has  established  a  Pension  Trust  Plan 
for  all  employees  and  is  building  up  a  fund  which  is 
handled  by  the  Wachovia  Bank  &  Trust  Co.  as  trus- 
tee. This  is  in  addition  to  Social  Security  benefits. 
Annual  vacations  are  provided  for  employees  rang- 
ing up  to  two  weeks  based  on  length  of  service.  Mr. 
Love  takes  a  great  interest  in  the  welfare  of  his 
employees  and  their  families.  He  encourages  home 
ownership  and  both  he  and  Queen  City  Coach  aid 
employees  in  securing  satisfactory  and  comfortable 
homes. 

Principal  officers  and  directors  of  Queen  City 
Coach  Co.,  some  of  whom  are  not  active  in  company 
affairs,  are  H.  H.  Hardison,  Wadesboro,  chairman 
of  the  board ;  W.  Erskine  Smith,  Albemarle,  presi- 
dent; L.  A.  Love,  Sr.,  vice-president,  general  man- 
ager and  active  head  of  the  organization ;  Joe  W. 
Wright,  Asheville,  and  Guy  D.  Carpenter,  Asheville, 
vice-presidents,  and  J.  D.  Love,  Charlotte,  son  of  the 
general  manager,  assistant  secretary;  with  these 
additional  directors  :  James  F.  Martin,  Charlotte,  and 
C.  H.  Bost,  Newton.  Additional  officers  are  J.  H. 
Quattlebaum,  vice-president — traffic;  Hal  J.  Love, 
Wilmington,  vice-president;  Shearon  Harris,  Albe- 
marle, secretary;  James  A.  Hardison,  Wadesboro, 
treasurer ;  S.  J.  Little,  Wingate,  assistant  treasurer, 
and  R.  G.  Holder,  comptroller. 

L.  A.  Love,  Sr.,  directing  head  of  this  extensive  or- 
ganization, is  a  native  of  Stanly  County  and  owns  the 
Old  Love  homeplace  a  few  miles  off  the  Charlotte- 
Albemarle  Highway.  He  began  his  passenger  trans- 
portation career  by  operating  a  taxi  in  Concord  in 
1917.  Transportation  by  motor  was  not  regulated  in 
those  days.  Gradually  he  extended  his  lines  to  Mon- 
roe, to  Wadesboro  and  to  other  points  in  and  around 
Charlotte  in  the  1920-21  period.  Soon  afterward  he 
and  J.  Frank  Lowder  organized  the  Eastern  Carolina 
Coach  Co.,  Inc.,  and  operated  the  line  from  Charlotte 
to  Wilmington,  which  in  1928  became  the  first  link 
of  Queen  City  Coach  Co.  For  several  years  he  has 
been  a  director  of  National  Trailways  and  of  the  Na- 
tional Association  of  Motor  Bus  Operators.  He  con- 
tinues his  interest  in  his  native  community  and  espe- 
cially in  Love's  Chapel,  a  Methodist  Church  started 
by  his  ancestors.  In  recent  years  he  has  provided 
most  of  the  funds  for  erecting  a  new  church  building 
and  for  the  more  recent  completion  of  a  Sunday 
school  addition.  He  owns  a  250-acre  estate  on  Law- 
yers Road  a  short  distance  outside  the  Charlotte  cit r 
limits  and  delights  in  raising  cattle  and  mules,  and 
has  a  stable  of  fine  Tennessee  walking  horses. 


SMOKY  MOUNTAIN  STAGES,  INC. 
Asheville 

Smoky  Mountain  Stages,  Inc.,  25-31  Spruce  Street. 
Asheville,  the  fourth  bus  organization  to  be  licensed 
to  operate  in  North  Carolina,  was  incorporated  in 
1934  by  Joel  W.  Wright.  Previously  Smoky  Moun- 
tain Stages  had  operated  as  a  part  of  Queen  City 
Coach  Co.  with  Mr.  Wright  as  general  manager  of 
the  western  end  of  the  business,  ranging  from  Ashe- 


PAGE  1 20 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


ville  westward.  The  new  corporation  took  over  this 
western  end  of  the  business  from  Queen  City  Coach 
Co.  These  two  organizations  continue  to  cooperate 
fully  in  their  operations.  In  fact,  Mr.  Wright  is  the 
largest  stockholder  and  continues  as  a  vice-president 
and  director  of  Queen  City  Coach  Co. 

Smoky  Mountain  Stages,  frequently  referred  to  as 
Smoky  Mountain  Trailways,  was  the  first  North 
Carolina  bus  company  to  join  and  continues  as  a 
member  of  National  Trailways  Bus  Association. 
When  organized,  it  had  authorized  capital  stock  of 
1,000  shares  with  no  par  value.  At  that  time  it  ope- 
rated four  busses,  two  white  and  two  yellow  coaches, 
and  operated  lines  from  Asheville  to  Cornelia,  Ga., 
and  Asheville  to  Murphy.  First  officers  were  Joel  W. 
Wright,  president  and  general  manager ;  Wayne 
Wright,  vice-president,  and  J.  R.  Lewis,  secretary 
and  treasurer. 

Smoky  Mountain  Stages  in  1935  secured  a  permit 
to  operate  from  Murphy  to  Chattanooga,  Tenn.,  and 
in  the  same  year  a  line  was  purchased  operating 
from  Murphy  to  Atlanta.  About  the  same  time  a 
line  was  established  from  Asheville  to  Brevard,  then 
extended  to  Pickens,  S.  C,  and  from  Pickens  to 
Anderson,  S.  C.  Later  this  line  was  extended  still 
further  to  Augusta,  Ga. 

In  1936  the  company  secured  a  permit  to  operate 
a  line  from  Asheville  to  Gatlinburg,  Tenn.,  through 
the  great  Smoky  Mountains  National  Park.  The  In- 
terstate Commerce  Commission  in  1942  permitted 
Smoky  Mountain  Stages  to  establish  a  line  from  An- 
derson to  Lavonia,  S.  C,  and  the  company  bought 
a  line  from  Toccoa,  Ga.,  to  Augusta.  The  next  year 
a  permit  was  secured  to  operate  from  Lavonia  to 
Commerce,  Ga.  Smoky  Mountain  Trailways  later 
established  a  through  route  from  Charlotte  to  At- 
lanta. Recently  part  of  the  route  was  sold  to  Queen 
City  Coach  Co.,  and  today  the  route  is  known  as 
"The  Rebel  Route"  and  Trailways'  busses  operate 
from  New  York  to  Dallas  over  part  of  the  route 
owned  by  Smoky  Mountain  Stages. 

Smoky  Mountain  Trailways  operates  over  1,500 
miles  of  routes  in  North  Carolina,  Tennessee,  South 
Carolina  and  Georgia  with  ten  principal  stations  and 
100  other  agency  stations.  The  company  owns  and 
operates  75  passenger  busses  with  capacities  of  33, 
37  and  41  passengers.  These  coaches  are  cliesel  and 
regular  gasoline  motors  manufactured  by  General 
Motors,  ACF-Brill  and  Aerocoach.  Terminals  are 
owned  jointly  with  other  companies  or  leased  for  bus 
station  stops.    The  home  office  is  located  in  Asheville 


Neiv  GMG  coach  operated  by  Smoky  Mountain  Stages, 
a  Trailways  associate. 


:\iodcrn  AFC-Brill  coach  operated  by  Smoky  Mountain 
Stages,  Asheville. 

with  shops  and  garages  in  Asheville,  Knoxville,  Mur- 
phy and  Atlanta. 

Gross  annual  income  of  Smoky  Mountain  Stages 
formerly  exceeded  $2,000,000,  but  earlier  this  year 
the  company  sold  part  of  its  lines,  including  those 
from  Charlotte  to  Augusta  and  from  Charlotte  to 
Greenville  and  Anderson,  S.  C,  to  Queen  City  Coach, 
thus  reducing  income.  As  a  result,  this  year's  gross 
income  is  expected  to  be  in  excess  of  $1,250,000. 
Capital  has  increased  from  1,000  shares  of  no  par 
value  to  5,000  shares.  Practically  all  of  the  outstand- 
ing stock  is  owned  by  Mr.  Wright  and  members  of 
his  family.  Smoky  Mountain  Stages  employs  about 
135  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $500,- 
000. 

As  a  result  of  its  membership  in  the  National 
Trailways  Association,  Smoky  Mountain  Stages  is 
enabled  to  provide  through  bus  service  from  points 
on  its  lines  to  other  points  throughout  the  United 
States  with  only  an  occasional  change  in  busses.  This 
proves  a  very  satisfactory  arrangement  since  it  in- 
volves maximum  service  with  minimum  inconven- 
ience to  passengers  going  to  points  throughout  the 
nation. 

During  the  past  four  summer  seasons  Smoky 
Mountain  Stages  has  operated  special  busses  on  reg- 
ular schedules  to  the  Cherokee  Indian  Village  for  the 
performance  six  evenings  a  week  of  "Unto  These 
Hills".  These  special  busses  originate  in  Asheville, 
Waynesville,  Knoxville  and  Gatlinburg,  Tenn.  Also 
it  has  operated  special  busses  from  Asheville  to  a 
point  ten  miles  away  for  showing  of  "Thunderland", 
another  outdoor  drama,  during  the  past  two  summer 
seasons.  These  special  operations  have  proved  val- 
uable income  producers,  in  addition  to  providing  de- 
sirable means  of  attending  these  two  outdoor  dra- 
matic performances. 

Present  officers  and  directors  of  Smoky  Mountain 
Stages  are  Joel  W.  Wright,  president;  Wayne  E. 
Wright,  his  son,  vice-president  and  general  manager, 
and  C.  W.  Morgan,  his  son-in-law,  secretary-treasur- 
er. Additional  key  personnel  include  Joel  W.  Wright, 
Jr.,  superintendent  of  maintenance ;  Lewis  C.  Wright, 
another  son,  assistant  to  the  president,  and  J.  R. 
Lewis,  operations  manager,  who  has  been  with  the 
firm  from  its  beginning. 

Joel  W.  Wright,  familiarly  known  as  "Uncle  Joe" 
because  of  his  friendly  and  folksy  disposition,  trav- 
eled an  interesting  route  to  his  position  as  head  of 
Smoky  Mountain  Stages.  Back  in  1920  in  Gaston 
County  he  was  looking  for  a  satisfactory  school  for 
his  young  children.  He  found  one  in  an  adjoining- 
district.  He  persuaded  the  community  to  close  the 
local  unsatisfactory  school  and  offered  to  transport 
his  and  other  children  to  the  better  school.  He  put 
together  a  homemade  bus  containing  sufficient  room 
for  the  community  children  and  hauled  them  each 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  121 


day  to  the  better  school.  This  was  the  first  school 
bus  known  to  operate  in  Gaston  County. 

On  his  trips  he  noticed  the  heavy  automobile  traf- 
fic between  Cherryville  and  Gastonia.  As  a  result 
he  began  operating  a  regular  passenger  bus  over  this 
road.  His  success  in  less  than  a  year  caused  him  to 
add  a  line  between  Gastonia  and  Shelby  and  also  one 
between  Gastonia  and  Lincolnton.  Thus  Mr.  Wright 
established  in  1921  one  of  the  first  known  public  bus 
systems  in  the  State.  By  1923  Mr.  Wright  had  or- 
ganized as  Inter-Carolinas  Motor  Bus  Co.  with  regu- 
lar operations,  serving  Shelby,  Charlotte,  Cherry- 
ville, Gastonia  and  Rock  Hill,  York  and  Fort  Mill,  S. 
C.  Later  he  instituted  bus  service  between  Spar- 
tanburg, Greenville  and  Atlanta. 

With  the  organization  of  the  Queen  City  Coach 
Co.  in  1928,  Mr.  Wright  sold  part  of  his  lines  to  this 
company,  continuing  his  remaining  routes  until 
1932.  At  that  time  Queen  City  Coach  leased  Mr. 
Wright's  lines  and  made  him  general  manager  of  the 
western  part  of  the  system.  The  next  year  Old 
South  Lines  bought  part  of  Queen  City  Coach  lines 
and  then  Mr.  Wright  bought  Queen  City  Coach's 
lines  west  of  Asheville  and  organized  Smoky  Moun- 
tain Stages.  From  his  school  bus  line  Mr.  Wright 
has  thus  developed  a  streamlined  fleet  of  cream  and 
crimson  busses  covering  thousands  of  miles  each 
day  in  four  states,  including  some  of  the  most  pic- 
turesque drives  in  the  nation — through  the  heart  of 
the  Great  Smoky  Mountains  National  Park. 

As  a  pioneer  bus  operative,  Mr.  Wright,  in  his  32 
years,  has  founded  and  started  more  than  4,000  miles 
of  bus  line. 


SEASHORE  TRANSPORTATION  CO. 
New  Bern 

Seashore  Transportation  Co.,  with  its  principal 
offices  at  New  Bern,  was  organized  28  years  ago  in 
Kinston,  headed  by  James  M.  West,  who  operated 
the  company  as  its  president  and  manager.  The  first 
line  started  between  Goldsboro  and  Morehead  City 
in  June,  1925,  and  by  its  operation  from  and  to  the 
sea  was  named  the  Seashore  Transportation  Co. 

About  one  year  later  the  company  purchased  the 
franchise  between  Washington,  N.  C,  and  Wilming- 
ton from  the  Horton  brothers,  Jack,  Vance  and 
Charles.  Jack  and  Vance  remained  with  the  com- 
pany as  drivers.  Vance  retired  on  the  company's 
pension  plan  in  1947.  Jack  Horton  is  still  driving 
for  the  company  over  the  original  route  from  Wash- 
ington to  Wilmington  and  has  a  perfect  safety  rec- 
ord; that  is,  he  has  not  been  charged  with  a  single 
accident  since  the  beginning  of  the  company's  opera- 
tion between  Washington  and  Wilmington  in  1927. 

The  Morehead-Goldsboro  route  was  extended  to 
Rocky  Mount  and  four  years  later  from  Morehead  to 
Atlantic.  In  1936  the  company  started  operating 
between  Morehead  City  and  Jacksonville.  In  1940 
the  franchise  was  obtained  between  Vanceboro  and 
Greenville  over  Highway  43  and  in  1943  this  line  was 
extended  from  Greenville  into  Norlina.  In  1946 
Seashore  purchased  the  Washington  Oriental  Bus 
Co.,  which  operated  between  these  two  towns  via 
Aurora. 

Due  to  its  rapid  growth  the  company  found  an  in- 
creasing demand  for  service  from  the  coast  to  points 
further  inland  and  in  1947  extended  its  service  from 
Goldsboro  to  Raleigh  and  began  operating  through 


"no  change"  service  between  Beaufort,  on  the  sea, 
to  Raleigh.  The  Beaufort-Raleigh  route  has  since 
been  extended  to  Greensboro,  and  that  same  year  by 
lease  agreement  with  the  Norfolk  Southern  Bus 
Corp.,  started  operating  through  coaches  from  Wil- 
mington through  Washington  to  Norfolk,  Va. 

In  August,  1952,  through  agreement  with  connect- 
ing carriers  a  through  service  was  inaugurated  from 
Beaufort  through  New  Bern,  Greenville  and  Rocky 
Mount  to  New  York  City  and  in  December,  1953,  by 
a  similar  arrangement  the  service  from  Wilmington 
to  Norfolk  was  extended  into  New  York  City  by  way 
of  the  eastern  shore  of  Virginia  and  Maryland 
through  Salisbury,  Md.,  and  Philadelphia. 

Seashore  has  purchased  GMC  diesel  coaches  con- 
taining all  of  the  latest  improvements  for  passenger 
comfort  and  safety  for  use  in  this  through  service. 
The  company  is  reported  to  be  one  of  the  largest,  if 
not  the  largest,  closed  bus  corporation  operating  in 
the  United  States  and  has  also  operated  longer  under 
original  charter  than  any  company  in  the  United 
States.  Two  of  the  largest  Marine  Corps  bases  in 
the  world  are  located  along  its  franchise  routes. 
Cherry  Point,  Air  Base  at  Havelock,  and  Camp  Le- 
jeune,  Marine  Base  at  Jacksonville.  During  its  peak 
in  1947,  the  company  operated  125  busses  and  had  a 
payroll  that  year  of  $504,400  with  209  employees. 
With  the  reduction  in  forces  at  the  bases  tiie  com- 
pany has  been  able  to  reduce  the  number  of  busses 
operated  to  65  and  is  operating  with  130  employees 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $313,000. 
Seashore  now  operates  over  804  franchise  miles  an  i 
drives  its  busses  over  a  total  of  21/2  million  miles  each 
year  serving  eastern  North  Carolina.  This  does  not 
include  the  miles  accrued  on  the  leased  operac  ons 
into  New  York  City. 

James  M.  West,  company  president,  died  in  Janu- 
ary, 1946,  leaving  the  company  in  trust,  the  trustee 
being  named  the  First  Citizens  Bank  and  Trust  Co. 
R.  P.  Holding,  president  of  the  bank,  was  named 
president  of  the  Seashore  company  and  C.  H.  Hall, 
Jr.,  who  was  assistant  to  Mr.  West,  was  named  vice- 
president  and  general  manager  and  has  served  in 
that  capacity  ever  since. 

In  the  peak  of  travel  during  the  years  of  World 
War  II  Mr.  West  was  very  active  in  promoting  the 
progress  of  present  day  busses.  He  had  an  inventive 
mind  and  was  experimenting  with  steam  operated 
busses  at  his  death.  He  was,  in  fact,  driving  a  steam 
operated  automobile  that  would  perform  with  auto- 
mobiles of  the  time  at  a  great  saving  in  cost  of  opera- 
tions. 

The  company's  main  garage  at  New  Bern  has  one 
of  the  most  complete  machine  shops  in  eastern  North 
Carolina  and  is  also  operating  branch  shops  at  Beau- 
fort and  Jacksonville.  The  main  shop  in  an  emerg- 
ency is  capable  of  building  a  bus  from  the  ground  up, 
exclusive,  of  course,  of  tires,  wheels,  windows,  etc. 
In  addition  to  regular  service  the  Seashore  company 
offers  limited  schedules,  charter  busses  for  individual 
groups  and  excursions  whenever  necessary. 

The  Seashore  company  at  present  has  one  of  the 
best  safety  records  of  any  certificated  motor  passen- 
ger carrier  in  North  Carolina.  Over  70%  of  its 
drivers  have  perfect  safety  records,  which  means 
continuous  service  without  a  chargeable  accident. 
New  drivers  are  trained  by  the  older  more  experi- 
enced drivers  by  riding  the  busses  as  an  observer  and 


PAGE  1 22 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


trainee  over  all  of  the  company's  routes  before  being 
placed  in  charge  of  a  passenger  carrying  bus. 

The  key  personnel  in  the  Seashore  Transportation 
Co.  are  R.  P.  Holding,  president;  C.  H.  Hall,  Jr.,  vice- 
president  and  general  manager ;  Mrs.  J.  M.  West,  sec- 
retary and  treasurer ;  D.  L.  Ward,  director ;  R.  C. 
O'Bryan,  traffic  manager;  R.  L.  Ward,  general  audi- 
tor; H.  W.  Robinson,  superintendent  of  transporta- 
tion, and  D.  P.  Dixon,  superintendent  of  mainten- 
ance, all  located  at  the  general  offices  at  New  Bern. 

It  has  been  the  policy  of  the  company  from  its  be- 
ginning to  place  all  of  the  profits  back  into  the  opera- 
tion, thereby  insuring  its  growth  and  progress  in  the 
years  to  come. 


SOUTHERN  COACH  CO. 
Durham 

Southern  Coach  Co.,  Durham,  was  organized  in  1942  as  the 
Durham-Dunn  Bus  Co.  by  Stacey  W.  Wade  and  his  son,  Louis 
M.  Wade,  as  partners.  In  its  early  days  this  line  operated  two 
21-passenger  busses  of  the  school  type  between  Durham  and 
Dunn,  61  miles. 

In  1948  Southern  Coach  secured  a  franchise  to  operate  into 
Raleigh,  and  the  next  year,  through  purchase  of  the  Pullen  Bus 
Line,  secm-ed  rights  to  operate  into  Wilmington  and  from  Wil- 
mington to  Burgaw  and  Jacksonville.  The  name  was  then 
changed  and  Southern  Coach  now  operates  from  Durham  via 
Apex,  Fuquay-Varina,  Angier,  Coats,  Erwin,  Dunn,  Clinton 
and  Burgaw  to  Wilmington.  Another  line  originating  in  Ral- 
eigh goes  via  Holly  Springs  and  Fuquay  and  on  to  Wilmington 
on  the  same  route.  Three  trips  are  made  daily  over  these 
routes.  In  addition  the  company  operates  charter  coach  serv- 
ice. 

Southern  Coach  now  operates  10  busses,  ranging  from  25  to 
37  passengers,  employs  18  people  and  has  an  annual  payroll 
of  about  $45,000.  In  1952  the  line  hauled  238,000  passengers 
operating  over  615,000  miles  of  routes.  General  offices  and 
garage  are  located  in  Durham.  Southern  Coach  uses  Union 
bus  stations  as  is  required  by  law  in  North  Carolina. 

Last  year  Southern  Coach  paid  $40,000  in  taxes,  including 
$11,000  in  gasoline  tax,  $11,000  in  license  tax,  $14,000  in  Fed- 
eral transportation  tax  and  $44,000  in  other  miscellaneous 
taxes. 

Stacey  W.  Wade,  senior  partner,  served  for  several  years 
as  North  Carolina  Insurance  Commissioner  and  as  Secretary 
of  State,  later  serving  as  representative  in  North  Carolina  for 
the  Social  Security  Board.  Louis  M.  Wade,  his  son,  attended 
Raleigh  schools  and  spent  four  years  in  study  at  Duke  Uni- 
versity. For  about  10  years  he  operated  motion  picture  thea- 
ters in  Fuquay,  Varina  and  Apex,  leasing  them  when  he  en- 
tered the  bus  transportation  business.  Both  father  and  son 
live  in  Raleigh.  Louis  M.  Wade  served  as  president  of  the 
North  Carolina  Bus  Association  last  year. 


SCENIC  ALL  THE  WAY- 
SMOKY  MOUNTAIN  TOURS  CO. 
Asheville 

Smoky  Mountain  Tours  Co.,  George  VanderDilt 
Hotel,  Asheville,  operating  seasonally  from  April 
through  October,  was  started  in  1926  by  W.  F.  Brid- 
gers  as  individual  owner  of  Red  Top  Cab  Co.  In  1935 
Mr.  Bridgers  incorporated  under  the  present  name 
and  continued  the  use  of  cabs.  Now  the  firm  operates 
between  200,000  and  225,000  miles  during  the  seven 
months  of  operation  with  special  and  regular  sight- 
seeing tours  in  the  mountain  sections  of  North  Caro- 
lina, Tennessee  and  Virginia. 

Gradually  Mr.  Bridgers  expanded  his  business  first 


General  office  and  garage  building  of  Southern  Coach 
in  Durham 

by  using  open  top  cabs,  then  started  the  limousine 
type  of  vehicle  and  later  enlarged  to  16  passenger 
vehicles  with  an  extra  axle.  In  May,  1941,  Mr.  Brid- 
gers was  killed  in  an  automobile  accident  and  his 
widow  and  son  continued  operations  for  the  remain- 
der of  the  season.  J.  H.  Priedeman,  in  December, 
1941,  purchased  the  Smoky  Mountain  Tours  from 
Mr.  Bridgers'  widow  and  resumed  operations  in 
April,  1942.  In  the  summer  of  that  year,  early  in 
the  World  War  II  period,  the  tours  were  classified  as 
non-essential  and  the  business  was  suspended  until 
September,  1945. 

During  the  past  eight  years  Mr.  Priedeman  has 
enlarged  operations  until  he  now  has  17  roll  or  glass 
top  sightseeing  buses,  including  eight  10  passenger 
buses,  two  13  passenger  buses,  two  17  passenger 
buses  of  roll  tops,  two  33  passenger  buses,  two  37 
passenger  buses  and  one  41  passenger  bus,  all  with 
glass  tops.  His  plan  for  the  next  season  is  to  add 
three  21  passenger  glass  top  buses. 

Smoky  Mountain  tours  operate  daily  locals  from 
Asheville  and  Knoxville  and  special  all  expense, 
sightseeing  tours,  lasting  from  three  to  six  days  from 
Asheville  and  Knoxville  with  a  seven-day  tour  from 
Roanoke.  These  conducted,  all  expense  tours  are 
routed  through  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains  National 
Park,  and  the  entire  Smoky  Mountains  and  Blue 
Ridge  Parkway  regions.  Depending  on  the  types  of 
seasons,  Smoky  Mountain  Tours  produces  gross  rev- 
enue ranging  from  $100,000  to  $125,000  in  the  warm 
half  of  the  year,  the  peak  coming  in  July  and  August. 
During  this  period  Mr.  Priedeman  employs  an  aver- 
age of  around  25  workers,  most  of  them  experienced 
drivers  and  tour  conductors. 

Among  the  tours  from  Asheville  of  one  day  or  less 
are  visits  to  Soco  Gap,  Cherokee  Indian  Reservation, 
Clingmans  Dome,  Gatlinburg;  Chimney  Rock  and 
Lake  Lure ;  Mount  Mitchell,  Blue  Ridge  Parkway  and 
Mountain  Handicrafts ;  Land  of  Waterfalls,  Pisgah 
and  Nantahala,  National  Forest;  Biltmore  House 
and  Gardens,  Handicrafts  Shopping  Tour,  with 
three-day  tours  of  Chimney  Rock,  Lake  Lure,  Ashe- 
ville and  suburbs ;  Lake  Junaluska,  Nantahala  Gorge, 


Modern  glass  top,  sight-seeing  bus  operated  by  Smoky 
Mountain  Tours,  Asheville. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  23 


Fontana  Dam  and  Lake  Deal's  Gap,  Santeetlah  Cal- 
derwood  Lakes  and  Knoxville;  Little  River  Gorge, 
the  Smokies,  Clingmans  Dome,  Indian  Reservation, 
Soco  Gap;  Mount  Mitchell,  Blue  Ridge  Parkway, 
Handicraft  Shopping;  Mount  Pisgah,  Pisgah  Na- 
tional Forest,  Wagon  Road  Gap,  Biltmore  House  and 
Gardens;  Balsam  Gap,  Cowee  Mountains,  Land  of 
Waterfalls ;  Sapphire  Valley,  Pisgah  Forest ;  Blue 
Ridge  Parkway  to  Roanoke,  return  via  Mount  Mit- 
chell. These  and  other  tours  ranging  from  three  to 
nine  days  leave  Asheville,  Knoxville  and  Roanoke 
frequently  during  the  summer  months. 

Officers  of  the  Smoky  Mountain  Tours  Co.  are  J. 
H.  Priedeman,  president;  Wilson  E.  Dvorak,  vice- 
president,  and  Mrs.  J.  H.  Priedeman,  secretary-treas- 
urer. Mr.  Priedeman  and  one  or  two  assistants 
handle  most  of  the  office  work  in  connection  with 
these  tours.  He  is  a  native  of  Minnesota  and  was 
with  the  Greyhound  Lines  from  1929  until  1941  when 
he  purchased  Smoky  Mountain  Tours. 


CITY  BUSSES  OPERATED  !N  37  N.  C. 

COMMUNITIES  BY  31  COMPANIES 

City  busses   are  operated   in   37   North   Carolina  cities   and 
towns  by  31  operating  companies.     These  companies  operate 


about  735  pieces  of  equipment  (busses)  and  employ  approxi- 
mately 1200  workers  in  connection  with  the  bus  operations. 
In  only  two  cases  do  companies  operate  busses  in  more  than 
one  city  or  town  in  the  State.  These  are  Duke  Power  Co., 
operating  in  cix  cities,  and  White  Transportation  Co.,  operating 
in  two  cities.  Three  companies  operate  bus  suystems  in  Win- 
ston-Salem, three  in  High  Point  and  two  in  Durham.  In  all 
other  cities  and  towns  one  bus  company  handles  the  business. 

A  list  of  the  bus  companies  operating  in  the  State  and  the 
cities  and  towns  in  which  they  operate  follows: 

Asheboro  Coach  Co.,  Asheboro;  Burke  Transit  Co.,  Morgan- 
ton;  Canton  City  Bus  Line,  Canton;  Catawba  Transit  Co.,  Inc., 
Hickory;  Central  Bus  Co.,  Lincolnton;  Chapel  Hill  Transit 
Lines,  Inc..  Durham;  City  Bus  Line,  Lexington;  City  Bus  Lines, 
Waynesville;  City  Transit  Co.,  High  Point;  City  Transit  Co., 
Inc.,  New  Bern;  Columbus  Transit  Co.,  Inc.,  Whiteville;  Con- 
cord Coach  Co.,  Inc..  Asheville;  Duke  Power  Co..  Charlotte,  Win- 
ston-Salem, Salisbury,  Greensboro,  High  Point,  Durham;  Eliza- 
beth City  Bus  Line,  Elizabeth  City;  Gastonia  Transit  Co.,  Gas- 
tonia;  Goldsboro  Transportation  Co.,  Inc.,  Goldsboro;  Intra- 
City  Transit  Co.,  High  Point. 

Kannapolis  Transit  Co.,  Kannapolis:  Kinston  Transit  Co., 
Kinston;  Lumberton  Coach  Co.,  Lumberton;  M  &  B  Transit 
Lines,  Inc.,  Burlington;  Safe  Bus,  Inc.,  Winston-Salem:  Safety 
Transit  Co.,  Rocky  Mount;  Safeway  Suburban  Lines,  Inc.,  San- 
ford;  Safeway  Transit  Co.,  Wilmington;  Shelby  Transit  Co., 
Shelby;  Statesville  Motor  Coach  Co.,  Statesville;  Taylor  Bus 
Line,  Hillsboro;  Twin  City  Lines,  Inc.,  Winston-Salem;  White 
Transportation  Co.,  Asheville,  Raleigh;  WTilson  Transit  Co., 
Wilson. 


State  Licenses,  Regulates  130  Passenger  Motor  Bus  Lines 


In  North  Carolina  130  bus  lines  operate,  hauling 
passengers,  licensed  and  regulated  in  types  and  loca- 
tions of  routes  by  the  N.  C.  Utilities  Commission. 
These  include  85  classed  as  common  carriers,  10  as 
lessees  (operators),  and  35  as  contract  carriers. 
Under  direct  supervision  of  Eugene  A.  Hunter,  Jr., 
director,  Motor  Passenger  Transportation,  a  list  of 
these  passenger  carriers,  except  those  handled  else- 
where, follows : 

James  Whedby  Alfred,  Alliance;  Asheboro  Coach  Co.,  Ashe- 
boro; Asheville-Elk  Mountain  Bus  Line,  Asheville. 

B.  &  M.  Bus  Lines,  Burnsville;  Barnardsville  Bus  line,  Bar- 
nardsville;  Beatty's  Ford  Bus  Line  Co.,  Inc.,  Davidson;  Mrs. 
Alice  C.  Blount,  Kinston;  Brevard  Bus  Co.,  Brevard;  Willie 
Bryant,  Pollocksville;  Jack  Bryson,  Asheville;  Burke  Transit 
Co.,  Morganton. 

Lonnie  H.  Caldwell  and  Raymond  H.  Caldwell,  Turkey; 
Carolina  Scenic  Stages,  Spartanburg,  S.  C;  Carolina-Tennessee 
Coach  Co.,  North  Wilkesboro;  Carolina  Transit  Lines,  Char- 
lotte; Central  Bus  Co.,  Inc.,  Lincolnton;  Cherokee  Strip  Bus 
Line,  Fairmont;  City  Coach  Co.,  Inc.,  Gastonia;  City  Rapid 
Transit  Co.,  Fayetteville;  City  Transit  Co.,  High  Point;  City 
Transit  Co.,  Elkin;  Columbus  Transit  Co.,  Inc.,  Lumberton; 
Concord  Coach  Co.,  Inc.,  Concord;  Conover-Newton  Bus  Line, 
Newton;  M.  L.  Cranford,  Asheboro;  Ralph  Taylor  Croom,  Bur- 
gaw. 

Geneva  Dew,  Wilson;  John  T.  Dillahunt,  New  Bern;  Norris 
Dillahunt,  New  Bern. 

Elizabeth  City  Bus  Lines,  Elizabeth  City;  Emma  Bus  Line, 
West  Asheville;  Engelhard-Washington  Bus  Company,  Engel- 
hard; Ecusta  Bus  Lines,  Rosman. 

Robert  E.  Farr,  Granite  Falls;  Mrs.  Essie  Mae  Fisher,  New 
Bern;  Flemming  Bus  Co.,  Greenville;  Forsyth  Transit  Lines, 
Inc.,  Winston-Salem;  Fort  Bragg  Coach  Co.,  Fayetteville;  Eu- 
gene Fortner,  Chimney  Rock. 

Gabriel  Bus  Co.,  Winston-Salem;  Mrs.  Salona  Garrison,  Bay- 
boro;  Gastonia  Transit  Co.,  Gastonia;  Gate  City  Transit  Lines, 
Inc.,  Gastonia;  Alonza  Glasper,  New  Bern;  Goldsboro  Trans- 
portation Co.,  Inc.,  Goldsboro;  Government  Services,  Inc.,  Fon- 
tana Dam. 

Hammack  Bus  Lines,  Inc.,  Gasburg,  Va. ;  Hastings  Bus  Lines, 
Inc.,  Durham;  Hatteras-Manteo  Bus  Line,  Hatteras;  Henderson 
Bus  Lines,  Inc.,  Henderson;  Hendersonville  Bus  Line,  Ashe- 
ville; Hackney  High,  Oak  City;  Floyd  Hill,  New  Bern;  Hunt's 


Bus  Line,  Lawndale. 

John  R.  Ingram,  Wallace;   Matthew  Eli  Ingram,  Willard. 

Jackson  Homes  Bus  Line,  Charlotte;  Johnson  Bus  Line,  Kan- 
napolis. 

Kannapolis  Transit  Co.,  Kannapolis;  Kinston  Transit  Co., 
Kinston. 

Leicester  Bus  Line,  West  Asheville;  Lenoir  Motor  Coach  Co., 
Inc.,  Lenoir;  Lewis  &  Green  Bus  Service,  Comfort;  Lincolnton 
Bus  Co.,  Asheville;  Linwood  Park  Bus  Line,  Biltmore;  Lum- 
berton Coach  Co.,  Lumberton. 

James  G.  McDaniel,  Roanoke  Rapids;  Willie  McPhatter, 
Laurinburg;  M.  &  B.  Transit  Lines,  Inc.,  Burlington;  Marion 
Transportation  Co.,  Marion;  Mars  Hill-Weaverville  Bus  Line, 
Inc.,  Weaverville;  Mecklenburg  Bus  Lines,  Inc..  Charlotte; 
Mint  Hill  Bus  Line,  Charlotte;  Montford's  Cove  Bus  Line, 
Marion;  Elva  Morton,  Sr.,  Pollocksville;  Mount  Airy  Transpor- 
tation Co.,  Inc.,  Mount  Airy;  Murphy-Franklin  Bus  Lines, 
Hayesville. 

Norfolk  Southern  Bus  Corp.,  Norfolk,  Va. 

Richard  M.  Ollison,  Mesic;  Orchard  Gap  Transportation  Co., 
Mount  Airy;   Oteen  Bus  Co.,  Asheville. 

Person  Transit  Lines,  Roxboro;  Piedmont  Bus  Lines,  Char- 
lotte; Porter  Bus  Line,  Ahoskie;  Power  City  Bus  Lines,  Inc., 
Albemarle. 

Ricks  Tours  and/or  Ricks  Bus  Line,  Greenville;  Rouse 
Transportation  Co.,  LaGrange;  Rockingham  Suburban  Bus 
Line,  Rockingham;  Rutherford  County  Transit  Co.,  Ruther- 
fordton. 

Safeway  Suburban  Bus  Line,  Inc.,  Reidsville;  Safeway  Sub- 
urban Lines  of  Sanford,  Inc.,  Sanford:  Safeway  Transit  Co., 
Wilmington;  Safety  Transit  Lines,  Danville;  Saxapahaw-Bur- 
lington  Coach  Co.,  Graham;  Sharon  Coach  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte; 
Shawtown  Bus  Lines,  Lillington;  Shelby  Transit  Co.,  Inc., 
Shelby;  Hugh  Cofleld  Simmons.  Bayboro;  Henry  Singleton, 
New  Bern;  W.  W.  Smith,  Lenoir;  Bill  Snow  Bus  Line,  Bilt- 
more; Simon  J.  Squires,  Maribel;  Charlie  H.  Stanley,  Kin- 
ston; Statesville  Motor  Coach  Co.,  Statesville;  Suburban  Bus 
Line,  High  Point;  Swains  Friendly  Bus  Service,  Windsor. 

Tri-City  Transportation  Co.,  Leaksville;  Twin  City  Lines, 
Inc.,  Winston-Salem. 

David  Vann,  Warsaw;  Virginia  Dare  Transportation  Co.,  Inc., 
Manteo;  Virginia  Stage  Lines,  Inc.,  Charlottesville,  Va. 

W.  B.  &  S.  Bus  Lines,  Inc.,  Southport;  Watson  Bus  Lines, 
Fayetteville;  L.  H.  Wetherington,  New  Bern;  White  Trans- 
portation Co.,  Asheville;  Wilkes  Transportation  Co.,  Inc.,  North 
Wilkesboro;  J.  W.  Williams,  Chinquapin. 


PAGE  1 24 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Plantation  Pipe  Line  Brings  Petroleum  Products  to  State 


...JSP 

Mlllf.. 
"HiiESP 


Plantation  Pipe  Line,  Inc., 
with  headquarters  in  Atlanta, 
Ga.,  and  starting  in  Baton 
Rouge,  La.,  delivered  more  than 
twelve  million  barrels,  about 
523,500,000  gallons  of  petroleum 
products  to  its  three  terminals 
at  Charlotte,  Salisbury  and 
Greensboro  in  the  first  six 
months  of  1953.  This  multi-mil- 
lion dollar  corporation,  with  an 
investment  of  $9,000,000  in 
North  Carolina,  is  sparked  by 
its  dynamic  president,  a  North 
Carolinian,  Charles  R.  Younts, 
native  of  rural  Pineville  near 
Charlotte. 

Activities  of  Plantation  Pipe  Line  Co.  began  on 
January  1,  1941,  when  it  secured  its  first  right-of- 
way  for  a  pipe  line.  One  year  later  a  12-inch  sec- 
tion, 450  miles  long,  from  Baton  Rouge  to  Bremen, 
Ga.,  and  a  10-inch  section,  356  miles  long,  from  Bre- 
men to  Greensboro,  had  been  completed — three  weeks 
after  Pearl  Harbor — 1,261  miles  of  pipe  line,  includ- 
ing smaller  lateral  lines  to  points  in  Alabama,  Geor- 
gia and  Tennessee.  Included  along  the  line  were  14 
pumping  stations  which  gave  a  daily  capacity  of 
60,000  barrels  of  42  gallons  each. 

Soon  after  Pearl  Harbor  the  Federal  Government 
requested  Plantation  Pipe  Line  to  expand  its  facili- 
ties and  by  January,  1943,  14  additional  pumping 
stations  had  been  installed  which  gave  a  daily  capac- 
ity of  93,000  barrels  at  a  time  when  enemy  subma- 
rines were  infesting  the  waters  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
and  the  Atlantic  Seaboard.  After  the  war  ended  in 
1945,  the  14  new  pumping  stations  were  closed  and 
placed  on  a  standby  basis — but  not  for  long.  They 
were  reactivated  in  May,  1947.  It  was  not  long  be- 
fore the  facilities  were  not  sufficient  to  meet  the  de- 
mands. In  1950  the  company  began  laying  an  addi- 
tional 18-inch  parallel  line  from  Baton  Rouge  to  Bre- 
men and  an  additional  14-inch  parallel  line  from 
Bremen  to  Charlotte.  This  gave  an  initial  capacity 
of  167,000  barrels  a  day  and  a  possible  capacity  of 
325,000  barrels  a  day.    For  this  expansion  program 

Paw  Creek  terminal  of  Plantation  Pipe  Lines  delivering 
petroleum,  products  in  Charlotte  area. 


"Gasoline    Alley' 
Greensboro 


',    Plantation     Pipe 

and  Winston-Xalem. 


Line    terminal    between 
Ten  oil  marketing 


companies  are  served  by  this  terminal. 

$52,000,000  was  provided.  Ten  more  55,000  barrel 
tanks  were  erected  in  the  tank  farm  at  Baton  Rouge 
and  eight  more  55,000  barrel  tanks  were  erected  at 
Bremen. 

The  historic  city  of  Baton  Rouge  is  the  center  of 
three  principal  petroleum  products  activities.  Crude 
petroleum  is  unloaded  from  tankers  at  Baton  Rouge. 
There  it  is  converted  into  refined  petroleum  products. 
There,  also,  it  starts  on  its  1,200  mile  journey  toward 
North  Carolina.  In  the  tanks  along  the  routes  and 
in  the  pipe  lines  Plantation  can  take  care  of  from 
$2,500,000  to  3,000,000  barrels  of  petroleum  prod- 
ucts, of  which  1,500,000  barrels  can  be  contained  in 
the  pipe  lines.  Petroleum  products  move  approxi- 
mately at  the  rate  of  four  miles  an  hour  through  the 
pipe  line  and  can  be  delivered  from  Baton  Rouge  to 
Charlotte  in  about  9  1/3  days.  Different  types  of 
petroleum  products  handled,  including  premium  gas- 
oline, regular  fuel  oil,  for  the  various  oil  companies, 
can  be  pumped  through  the  lines  with  no  artificial 
separation,  not  even  water,  and  with  a  negligible 
amount  of  mixture.  Operators  know  at  any  given 
time  where  any  section  of  product  is  and  each  term- 
inal knows  just  when  to  prepare  for  a  shipment.  The 
company  pays  an  electric  bill  of  over  two  million 
dollars  a  year  to  operate  its  machinery,  principally 

pumping  stations. 

Normally  Plantation  s  lines 
are  24  inches  under  the  surface 
and  pass  under  streams,  high- 
ways, railroads  and  other  sur- 
face obstructions  in  a  straight 
line  except  to  reach  terminals. 
Airplanes  patrol  the  entire  line, 
flying  at  250  feet  altitude.  Chem- 
icals are  used  to  prevent  interior 
corrosion  and  to  remove  foreign 
elements.  Scrapers  with  brushes 
and  blades  are  pushed  along  by 
pressure  to  remove  rust  and 
scale. 

Plantation  has  18  delivery 
points  in  six  states  touched, 
three  of  them  in  North  Carolina. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  25 


At  each  of  these  delivery  points  the  various  oil  com- 
panies have  erected  tanks  that  cover  several  acres  for 
storing  their  respective  petroleum  products  until 
transported  to  other  storage  places  or  delivered  direct 
to  oil  jobbers  and  filling  stations.  In  North  Carolina 
eleven  oil  companies  ship  their  petroleum  products 
through  the  Plantation's  system.  They  are  ESSO 
Standard  Oil  Co.,  Shell  Oil  Co.,  The  American  Oil 
Co.,  Arkansas  Fuel  Oil  Corp.,  Sinclair  Refining  Co., 
The  Atlantic  Refining  Co.,  Crown  Central  Petroleum 
Corp.,  Gulf  Oil  Corp.,  The  Pure  Oil  Co.,  The  Texas 
Co.  and  Kenco  Terminals,  Inc.  Just  as  in  the  case  of 
other  common  carriers  Plantation  is  regulated  by  the 
Interstate  Commerce  Commission  with  which  tariffs 
and  other  information  are  filed  for  approval. 

Plantation  is  a  folksy  sort  of  organization,  wel- 
comes the  public  to  its  pump  stations  and  terminals, 
enters  into  student  training  programs,  trains  engi- 
neers and  other  technicians  for  the  U.  S.,  and  a  dozen 
other  countries,  participates  in  student  exchange 
programs  and  other  activities.  More  than  500  work- 
ers are  employed  in  this  system  and  all  follow  the 
"good  citizen"  policy  in  their  respective  communi- 
ties. In  a  joint  arrangement  with  its  employees  it 
provides  annuities,  sick  and  health  benefits,  group 
life  insurance,  savings  plan,  military  leave  and  other 
employee  benefits.  It  gives  on-the-job  training  and 
promotes  worthy  employees  within  the  ranks.  Plan- 
tation spends  over  50^  an  hour  per  employee  for  his 
health  and  welfare  in  excess  of  regular  wages  and 
salaries. 

Including  laterals  and  parallel  main  lines  Planta- 
tion now  has  1,967  miles  of  pipe.  Of  this  83  miles 
of  10-inch  pipe  run  from  Charlotte  to  Greensboro. 
Under  construction  and  to  be  completed  by  the  end 
of  the  year  between  these  two  cities  is  a  parallel  14- 
inch  line.  As  stated,  almost  12,500,000  barrels,  or 
more  than  523,500,000  gallons,  of  petroleum  prod- 
ucts, including  gasolines,  kerosenes  and  fuel  were 
delivered  to  oil  companies'  terminals  located  at  Char- 
lotte, Salisbury  and  Greensboro  during  the  first  six 
months  of  this  year.  This  is  the  equivalent  of  a  100- 
acre  lake,  16  feet  deep.  Approximately  two-thirds 
of  the  petroleum  products  delivered  at  these  three 
terminals,  or  more  than  8,141,000  barrels  (342,000,- 
000  gallons)  was  gasoline.  It  is  interesting  to  note 
the  increase  in  motor  fuel  consumption  in  North 
Carolina  during  the  first  nine  years  of  Plantation 
Pipe  Line  operation.  In  1940  this  State  consumed 
449,409,000  gallons  of  gasoline.  In  1950  the  con- 
sumption had  considerably  more  than  doubled  the 
amount  of  1,013,242,000  gallons  (from  1952  edition 


GREENSBORO 

THOMASVILLE^ 


CHARLOTTE 
LOWELL 


HUNTERSVILLE 


Plantation  Pipe  Line  supplies! 
petroleum  products  to 
North  Carolina  dealers. 


Typical  delivery  facilities  of  Plantation  Pipe  Lines'  terminals 
in  six  southeastern  states. 


of  "Petroleum  Facts 
and  Figures",  pub- 
lished by  the  Amer- 
ican Petroleum  In- 
stitute). Also  inter- 
esting is  the  fact 
that  in  the  first  six 
months  of  this  year 
Plantation  delivered 
approximately  three 
fourths  as  much 
gasoline  as  was  con- 
sumed in  North  Car- 
olina during  the  en- 
tire year  of  1940. 

Plantation  has  three  principal  divisions.  The  East- 
ern Division  headquarters  is  located  in  Gastonia  and 
covers  part  of  Georgia  and  all  of  South  Carolina  and 
North  Carolina.  At  the  end  of  1952  Plantation's  in- 
vestment in  plant  and  equipment  in  this  State  was 
approximately  $4,500,000.  By  the  end  of  1953,  when 
the  parallel  pipe  line  from  Charlotte  to  Greensboro 
is  completed  and  other  improvements  made  the  in- 
vestment in  North  Carolina  will  be  close  to  $9,000,- 
000.  Of  the  company's  almost  600  employees,  85  are 
located  at  the  three  terminals  and  along  the  pipe 
line  in  North  Carolina  and  the  annual  payroll  for 
these  workers  is  approximately  $425,000. 

Principal  Division  headquarters  supervisory  per- 
sonnel at  Gastonia,  North  Carolina,  includes  E.  A. 
Birge,  division  superintendent;  R.  N.  Goethe,  divi- 
sion engineer;  L.  J.  Bernard,  line  foreman;  J.  A. 
Norris,  electrical  foreman,  and  J.  A.  Winkler,  me- 
chanical foreman.  Four  other  supervisors  in  charge 
are  C.  E.  Cheatham,  Lowell  Pump  Station,  Gastonia ; 
L.  C.  Bassett,  Charlotte  Terminal,  Paw  Creek;  F.  B. 
Edwards,  Salisbury  Pump  Station,  and  J.  C.  Shirley, 
Greensboro  Terminal. 

Officers  of  the  company,  located  in  the  principal 
office  in  Atlanta,  are  Charles  R.  Younts,  president; 
M.  E.  Grant,  executive  vice-president ;  W.  G.  Horst- 
man,  vice-president — operations,  and  S.  V.  Kane, 
secretary-treasurer. 

Charles  R.  Younts,  native  of  Pineville,  near  Char- 
lotte, attended  the  Charlotte  schools,  Bethany  (S.  C.) 
Preparatory  School  and  Baird's  University  School, 
Charlotte.  He  moved  up  from  Private  to  First  Ser- 
geant in  the  Artillery  Corps,  30th  Division,  during 
World  War  I.  Starting  his  business  career  as  office 
boy  at  age  of  17  in  the  Standard  Oil  Co.  office  in 
Charlotte,  he  continued  with  this  company  except 
for  a  year  with  Aluminum  Co.  of  America  at  Badin 
and  moved  up  through  numbers  of  positions  in  vari- 
ous divisions  until  he  became  assistant  division  man- 
ager of  the  New  Jersey  Division  at  Newark.  In  1941 
he  became  president  of  Plantation  Pipe  Line  Co.,  of 
which  Standard  Oil  Co.  was  one  of  the  principal 
owners.  At  that  time  he  moved  to  Atlanta  and  has 
been  an  important  figure  in  church,  fraternity,  club 
and  other  organizational  activities.  He  is  a  Mason, 
a  Shriner,  a  member  of  Sons  of  the  American  Revo- 
lution, president  of  Atlanta  Churches'  Home  for 
Girls,  past  president  of  Atlanta  YMCA,  member  of 
the  Advisory  Committee  of  Georgia  Tech.  Research 
Institute,  vice-president  of  Blue  Ridge  (N.  C.)  As- 
sembly, director  of  Southern  Industrial  Relations 
Conference  and  active  in  numbers  of  other  such  or- 
ganizations. 


PAGE  1 26 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Transcontinental  Pipes  Natural  Gas  Distributed  in  State 


Transcontinental  Gas  Pipe  Line  Corp.,  Houston, 
Texas,  which  has  a  natural  gas  pipe  line  from  the 
Rio  Grande  River  to  New  York  City,  a  main-line  dis- 
tance of  1,832  miles,  operates  140  miles  of  this  line 
through  the  industrial  Piedmont  Area  of  the  State 
of  North  Carolina.  The  30-inch  steel  line  enters  the 
State  about  10  miles  southeast  of  Shelby  and  crosses 
the  border  into  Virginia  about  13  miles  north  of 
Reidsville. 

Connected  with  this  140-mile  Transcontinental 
line  are  three  customer  companies  which  distribute 
natural  gas  into  the  homes  and  factories  in  14  Pied- 
mont cities  and  towns.  North  Carolina  Gas  Corp. 
serves  Reidsville ;  Public  Service  of  N.  C.  serves  Gas- 
tonia,  Mooresville,  Davidson,  Glen  Haven,  States- 
ville,  Kannapolis,  Durham,  Chapel  Hill,  and  Raleigh ; 
Piedmont  Natural  Gas  Corp.,  Inc.,  serves  Charlotte, 
Salisbury,  Winston-Salem  and  Greensboro.  Two  of 
these,  Public  Service  and  Piedmont  Natural  Gas, 
have  plans  for  extending  their  operations  to  bring 
natural  gas  to  several  other  North  Carolina  cities 
and  towns. 

Transcontinental  has  invested  more  than  $18,000,- 
000  in  construction  of  pipe  lines  and  compressor 
stations  in  North  Carolina,  in  which  are  located  two 
of  these  stations.  Both  are  model  modern  installa- 
tions with  company  villages  adjoining.  In  the  Dav- 
idson-Mooresville  section  is  Transcontinental  Station 
No.  15  under  the  direction  of  Superintendent  W.  L. 
Aycock,  a  Davidson  College  alumnus.  Assisting  him 
are  26  engineers.  Transcontinental^  practice  in  its 
compressor  stations  is  to  provide  furnished  homes 
for  its  top  engineers  on  a  site  adjoining  the  stations. 

Transcontinental  Station  No.  16  is  located  near 
Reidsville  with  F.  M.  Wright  as  superintendent.  His 
station  carries  the  normal  component  of  27  engi- 
neers. In  addition,  Reidsville  is  the  headquarters  for 
Transcontinental  Pipe  Line  District  7.  Superin- 
tendent A.  L.  Barnett  is  in  charge  of  the  mainten- 
ance of  the  Transcontinental  line  through  North 
Carolina  and  has  24  pipe  liners  working  under  his 
supervision.  Transcontinental,  for  maintenance  and 
emergency  use,  maintains  heavy  pipe  lining  equip- 


ment such  as  side-boom  tractors,  drag  lines,  bull- 
dozers, mounted  welding  machines  and  other  required 
equipment  in  North  Carolina.  Seventy-seven  people 
are  employed  in  this  State,  receiving  around  $300,- 
000  annually. 

Transcontinental's  line  was  built  to  transport  Gulf 
Coast  natural  gas  to  the  Eastern  Seaboard.  The 
main  line,  1,832  miles  in  length,  originates  near  Mer- 
cedes by  the  Rio  Grande  River  in  Texas.  Natural  gas 
is  purchased  from  150  oil  and  gas  producers  in  more 
than  60  fields  in  the  Texas-Louisiana  Gulf  Coast 
area.  Under  high  pressure  Transcontinental  moves 
more  than  one-half  billion  cubic  feet  of  natural  gas 
every  24  hours.  Most  of  this  goes  to  New  York  City, 
Philadelphia  and  northern  New  Jersey. 

The  line  crosses  the  Mississippi  River  near  Baton 
Rouge,  La.,  goes  through  the  lower  part  of  the  State 
of  Mississippi,  crosses  Alabama,  through  Georgia 
near  Atlanta  and  Athens,  then  through  South  Caro- 
lina, North  Carolina  and  Virginia  Piedmont  through 
Maryland  near  Baltimore,  through  Pennsylvania 
near  Philadelphia,  and  on  into  New  Jersey.  The 
main  line  goes  under  the  Hudson  River  and  termi- 
nates at  a  measurement  station  at  134th  Street  on 
Manhattan  Island.  A  "Y"  crosses  Staten  Island 
and  passes  under  the  Narrows  to  Brooklyn.  Trans- 
continental's  19  compressor  stations,  about  80  miles 
apart,  move  the  natural  gas  from  Texas  to  New  York 
in  about  six  days. 

Construction  of  this  system  began  May  23,  1949, 
when  ground  was  broken  near  Laurel,  Miss.  The 
first  delivery  of  natural  gas  through  the  line  was 
made  to  Danville,  Va.,  December  5,  1950,  and  Reids- 
ville was  not  far  behind.  The  Transcontinental  line 
went  into  partial  operation  with  the  formal  turning- 
on  ceremony  in  New  York  City  January  16,  1951. 

Transcontinental  has  established  a  splendid  safety 
record  since  it  began  operation,  having  caused  no 
damage  to  public  property  or  to  individuals.  Much 
of  this  record  is  due  to  use  of  a  new  type  of  high 
tensile  strength  steel  pipe  developed  since  the  war. 
Also,  Transcontinental  has  pioneered  in  the  use  of 
safety  devices  for  shutting  down  the  line  in  case  of 


CASW  i^= 


RALEIGH 
transcontinental  Gas  Pipe  Liiu 
nasses  through  North  Carolina,  serv- 
ing several  customer  distributors  o) 
mtural  gas.  Among  them  are  Public 
Service  of  N.  C,  serving  a  closer 
communities  from  Asheville  to  Ral 
?igh;  Piedmont  Natural  Gas  Corp. 
serving  Charlotte,  Salisbury,  Win- 
<iton-Salem,  Greensboro ;  North  Can 
olina  Gas  Corp.,  Reidsville,  serving 
several  communities. 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY. 


PAGE  127 


a  leak,  corrosion  control  and  the  like.  The  company 
has  been  awarded  many  state  and  national  awards 
for  its  safety  record. 

Officers  of  Transcontinental  are  Tom  P.  Walker, 
president  and  member  of  the  Board  of  Directors; 
John  F.  Burton,  vice-president  and  treasurer;  E. 
Clyde  McGraw,  vice-president  in  charge  of  opera- 
tions; James  B.  Henderson,  vice-president  and  gen- 
eral counsel;  R.  Stewart  Bruns,  vice-president  in 
charge  of  the  Eastern  Division;  Luke  V.  Patrick, 
controller,  and  Tom  Wheat,  corporate  secretary. 
Walter  H.  Davidson  is  general  superintendent.  Head- 
quarters are  at  the  Transcontinental  Building  in 
Houston.  Major  Division  offices  are  located  in  Cor- 
pus Christi,  Texas ;  Baton  Rouge,  La. ;  Decatur,  Ga. ; 
Culpeper,  Va.,  and  Newark.  N.  J. 

Transcontinental  has  the  longest  privately  owned 
micro-wave  communication  system  in  the  country. 
There  are  58  radio  towers  within  sight  of  each  other 
and  the  system  is  capable  of  handling  12  separate 
channels. — Data  supplied  by  Ken  B.  Harper,  direc- 
tor of  publications,  Transcontinental  Gas  Pipe  Line 
Corp.,  Houston,  Texas. 


PUBLIC  SERVICE  CO.  OF  N.  C,  INC. 
Gastonia 

Public  Service  Co.  of  N.  C,  Inc.,  Gastonia,  one  of  the  three 
major  customers  of  Transcontinental  Pipe  Line  Co.,  starting 
in  1936  as  an  artificial  gas  distributing  organization,  has  ex- 
panded and  extended  operations  until  it  now  supplies  natural 
gas  over  sections  of  the  State  which  extend  from  Raleigh  to 
Asheville. 

This  natural  gas  distribution  system  actually  had  its  begin- 
ning in  1917  as  the  Gastonia  and  Suburban  Gas  Co.,  changed 
to  the  present  name  in  1938.  Until  September  30,  1951,  this 
company  manufactured  and  distributed  artificial  gas  in  Gas- 
tonia and  other  communities  which  had  been  added  through 
the  years. 

Charles  Branson  Zeigler,  a  native  of  Chillicothe  and  a  public 
service  man  in  Dayton,  Ohio,  and  New  York  City  for  several 
years,  moved  to  Gastonia  in  1935,  bought  the  local  gas  com- 
pany and  began  purchasing  other  local  gas  distributing  agen- 
cies in  that  section  of  the  State.  About  two  years  ago  Mr. 
Zeigler  began  connecting  his  distributing  systems  with  the 
Transcontinental  line  which  was  under  construction  north- 
eastwardly across  the  State.  At  first  the  connection  supplied 
Gastonia,  Statesville  and  Kannapolis.  Lines  were  extended  to 
Concord  and  Dallas.  Last  July  pipe  lines  were  completed  to 
Durham,  Chapel  Hill  and  Raleigh  and  in  August  the  company 
began  laying  lines  westward  from  the  vicinity  of  Kings  Moun- 
tain toward  Asheville.  This  line  has  been  completed  to  the 
Forest  City  area  and  is  expected  to  reach  Asheville  by  early 
spring.  When  completed,  the  lines  will  distribute  natural 
gas  to  34  North  Carolina  communities,  supplying  about  50,000 
residential,  commercial  and  industrial  users. 


mm        '**$?    ■ 


i 


'Big  inch"  natural  gas  pipe  line  enters  Station  15  near  David- 
son.   Transcontinental  lines  pass  through  Piedmont 
North  Carolina. 


Compressor  exhaust  stacks  of  Transcontinental  Gas  Pipe  Line. 

Public  Service  Co.  will  then  have  six  lateral  pipe  lines, 
covering  167  map  miles  and  about  184  actual  miles  of  pipe 
lines,  ranging  in  size  from  3%  to  10%  inches.  Including  right- 
of-way,  construction  of  lines,  office  buildings,  storage  tanks  and 
other  facilities,  the  entire  program,  including  distributive 
systems,  is  expected  to  cost  approximately  $12,000,000,  all  of 
which  is  due  to  be  completed  within  the  next  three  years. 

In  its  local  distribution  systems  Public  Service  Co.  has  about 
76  miles  of  gas  lines  in  the  Asheville  area,  44  miles  in  the 
Gastonia-Dallas  section,  36  miles  in  Concord  and  Kannapolis, 
119  miles  in  the  Durham-Chapel  Hill  area  and  89  miles  in 
Raleigh.  Its  franchises  generally  extend  for  a  period  of  fifty 
years  and  in  most  of  the  places  the  franchises  call  for  service 
until  the  year  2001.  In  addition  to  a  recent  completed  gen- 
eral office  building,  the  firm  has  an  operations  and  engineer- 
ing office  and  warehouse  in  Gastonia  and  office  buildings  in 
Concord,  Mooresville,  Chapel  Hill  and  Durham. 

Public  Service  Co.  has  authorized  capital  stock  of  200,000 
shares  of  preferred  stock,  par  value  $25  per  share;  96,000 
shares  of  5.6  percent  preferred  stock,  none  of  which  had  been 
issued  at  the  end  of  1952  and  1,000,000  shares  of  common  stock, 
par  value  $5,  of  which  358,392,  valued  at  $1,791,000,  had  been 
issued  at  the  end  of  1952.  Slightly  over  half  of  this  stock  is 
owned  by  members  of  the  Zeigler  family  and  Jefferson  Stan- 
dard Life  Insurance  Co.  owns  about  28%. 

Officers  of  Public  Service  Co.  are  C.  B.  Zeigler,  president; 

B.  E.  Zeigler,  executive  vice-president;  A.  T.  Carper,  vice-presi- 
dent, in  charge  of  engineering  and  construction;  H.  G.  Rich- 
mond, Durham,  vice-president  of  operations,  Eastern  Division; 

C.  E.  Zeigler,  vice-president;  William  C.  Rogers,  secretary  and 
treasurer;  K.  R.  Hoffman,  assistant  secretary  and  assistant 
treasurer,  and  R.  Gregg  Cherry,  general  counsel.  The  Board 
of  Directors  is  composed  of  these  officers  and  William  L. 
Canady,  New  York  City,  and  James  T.  Comer  and  S.  M.  Stew- 
art, Gastonia. 

Mr.  Zeigler,  a  live  wire  operator,  is  accused  of  being  the  man 
who  put  "gas  in  Gastonia"  and  bought  up  numbers  of  local 
gas  distribution  systems  in  anticipation  of  the  arrival  of  nat- 
ural gas  in  this  State.  He  was  one  of  the  developers  and 
president  of  the  Gastonia  Industrial  Realty  Corp.,  is  a  past 
president  of  both  the  Gastonia  Chamber  of  Commerce  and  the 
Gastonia  Merchants'  Association,  and  is  immediate  past  presi- 
dent of  the  Gastonia  Executives'  Club  and  the  Gastonia  Rotary 
Club.  He  is  also  a  director  of  the  North  Carolina  Merchants' 
Association  and  is  active  in  numbers  of  other  civic,  business 
and  church  organizations. 

Note — Letters  were  sent  to  other  natural  gas  firms  asking 
for  information  on  their  operations.  The  others  did  not  re- 
spond. However,  Piedmont  Natural  Gas  Co.,  of  Charlotte, 
connects  with  Transcontinental's  line  at  several  places,  serv- 
ing Greensboro,  Burlington  and  Graham,  Winston-Salem  and 
High  Point,  Salisbury,  Spencer  and  East  Spencer,  Charlotte 
and  Spartanburg,  Greenville  and  Anderson,  S.  C;  N.  C.  Gas 
Corp.  serves  Reidsville,  Leaksville,  Spray  and  Draper  and 
Thomasville  and  Lexington;  Piedmont  Gas  Co.  serves  Lincoln- 
ton,  Newton,  Conover,  Hickory,  Granite  Falls  and  Lenoir; 
Carolina  Central  Gas  Co.  serves  Hendersonville. 


PAGE  128 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Several  'Firsts'  and  Little  Known  Facts  About  Railroads 

By  James  M.  White,  Executive  Secretary,  N.  C.  Railroad  Association 


Of  all  the  forms  of  transportation  which  have  been 
developed  during  man's  onward  march,  the  one 
which  has  contributed  most  to  the  spread  of  civiliza- 
tion, the  creation  and  diffusion  of  wealth,  the  expan- 
sion of  industries,  and  improvements  in  the  stan- 
dard of  living,  is  the  railroad. 

As  railroads  were  built  they  spread  across  the  na- 
tion. Vast  changes  occurred.  In  many  parts  of  the 
country  railroads  were  the  pioneers,  opening  im- 
mense regions  to  farming,  mining,  lumbering  and 
manufacturing.  In  older  parts  of  the  country  com- 
munities took  on  new  life  and  a  new  outlook  with  the 
coming  of  the  railroads. 

From  the  time  when  the  first  common  carrier  rail- 
roads were  opened  in  1830  until  the  present  time, 
there  have  been  many  "firsts"  and  "little  known 
facts"  in  the  growth  and  history  of  the  railroads  in 
the  one  hundred  and  twenty  odd  year  period. 

The  first  locomotive  to  run  on  a  standard  railroad 
in  the  United  States  was  the  British  built  "Stour- 
bridge Lion."  On  August  8,  1829,  the  "Lion",  ope- 
rated by  Horatio  Allen,  a  young  civil  engineer,  was 
tried  out  on  the  tracks  of  the  Delaware  &  Hudson 
Canal  Company.  In  September  of  that  year,  the 
"Tom  Thumb",  an  experimental  locomotive  built  by 
Peter  Cooper  of  New  York,  was  given  a  trial  run  on 
the  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad.  This  little  engine, 
weighing  about  one  ton,  was  the  first  American-built 
locomotive  to  run  on  a  common  carrier  railroad  in 
this  country.  During  one  of  its  trial  runs  it  was 
matched  with  a  horse  for  speed.  The  horse  won. 

Meanwhile,  the  pioneer  railroad  of  the  South — the 
South  Carolina  Railroad — was  getting  underway  at 
Charleston.  On  Christmas  Day  of  1830,  the  first 
scheduled  steam  railroad  passenger  service  in  Amer- 
ica was  started  on  this  railroad.  This  first  train  was 
pulled  by  the  three  and  one-half  ton  locomotive  "Best 
Friend  of  Charleston".  It  was  built  by  the  West 
Point  Foundry  in  New  York  City  and  shipped  to 
Charleston  by  sailing  vessel.  This  first  locomotive 
was  the  first  to  pull  a  train  of  cars  on  an  American 
Railroad. 

This  pioneer  railroad  in  the  South  has  several 
other  "firsts"  to  its  credit.  It  was  the  first  railroad 
to  transport  the  United  States  Mail.  The  exact  date 
is  in  doubt  but  it  did  occur  in  November  1831.  The 
same  Horatio  Allen  who  operated  the  "Stourbridge 


"Best  Friend"1  of  Charleston,  8.  C,  first  locomotive  built  in 
America  for  railroad  service.  This  wood-burner  made  its  first 
run  December  25,  1830,  over  line  now  part  of  Southern  Railway. 


NORTH  CAROLINA  RAILROAD  ASSOCIATION 

The  North  Carolina  Railroad  Association,  organized  January 
1,  1952,  has  a  membership  of  25  railroads  operating  in  North 
Carolina.  This  organization  succeeded  the  Short  Line  Railroad 
Association  which  was  started  in  October,  1949,  after  about 
two  years  of  operation.  As  such  the  group  decided  to  expand 
its  membership  to  include  the  larger  railroads  as  well  as  the 
short  line  railroads  in  the  State. 

The  North  Carolina  Railroad  Association  has  two  commit- 
tees, one  an  Executive  Committee  of  seven  members,  and  the 
other  a  General  Committee  with  a  larger  representation.  Mem- 
bers of  the  Executive  Committee  are  A.  L.  Faulconer,  Greens- 
boro, chairman,  assistant  to  the  vice-president,  Southern  Rail- 
way; 0.  Arthur  Kirkman,  High  Point,  vice-chairman,  executive 
vice-president,  secretary  and  treasurer  and  general  manager 
of  the  High  Point,  Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad  Co.; 
0.  L.  Henry,  Lumberton,  Seaboard  (Virginia  and  Carolina 
Southern) ;  Sidney  F.  Small,  vice-president,  Norfolk  and  West- 
ern, Roanoke,  Va.;  R.  N.  Simms,  Jr.,  Raleigh,  general  counsel, 
Norfolk  Southern;  Charles  Cook  Howell,  Wilmington,  vice- 
president  and  general  counsel,  Atlantic  Coast  Line;  'W.  R. 
Strickland,  Warrenton,  president,  Warrenton  Railroad  Co. 

The  General  Committee  is  headed  by  Charles  Cook  Howell 
with  James  M.  White  as  executive  secretary.  Mr.  White,  who 
was  also  executive  secretary  while  the  organization  went  by 
the  name  of  the  Short  Line  Railroad  Association,  maintains  a 
full  time  office  at  214  Security  Bank  Building,  Raleigh.  Mr. 
White  was  with  the  Norfolk  Southern  Railway  Co.  for  33  years, 
the  last  decade  of  which  was  devoted  primarily  to  public  rela- 
tions. His  work  in  that  capacity  served  as  a  training  course 
for  the  position  he  now  holds. 

Lion"  became  Chief  Engineer  of  the  South  Carolina 
Railroad  and,  in  such  capacity,  was  the  first  man  to 
place  a  headlight  on  the  front  end  of  a  locomotive. 
The  first  headlights  were  oversize  candles,  housed  in 
a  glass  house  with  a  reflector  back  of  the  candle 
flame. 

The  first  common  carrier  railroad  in  North  Caro- 
lina started  operation  in  1833.  The  railroad  was 
started  at  Petersburg,  Virginia,  in  1832,  and  was 
completed  in  1833  to  a  point  on  the  Roanoke  River 
near  what  is  now  Weldon. 

Some  of  the  railroad  "firsts"  among  the  Presidents 
of  the  United  States  are  interesting: 

Andrew  Jackson  was  the  first  President  of  the 
United  States  to  mention  railroads  in  a  message  to 
the  Congress.  He  was  also  the  first  President  to  ride 
on  a  railroad  train.  This  event  took  place  on  June 
6,  1833,  on  the  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad  between 
Ellicott's  Mill  and  Baltimore,  a  distance  of  13  miles. 

William  Henry  Harrison  was  the  first  President 
for  whom  a  funeral  train  was  used.  It  was  in  April 
1841. 

Zachary  Taylor  was  the  first  President  of  the 
United  States  to  advocate  the  construction  of  a  rail- 
road to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  This  was  in  his  first  an- 
nual message  to  the  Congress  in  December  1849. 

Andrew  Johnson  was  the  first  President  of  the 
United  States  to  make  a  tour  of  the  States  by  rail- 
road— the  original  "Swing  Around  the  Circle".  It 
was  in  1866. 

Rutherford  B.  Hayes  was  the  only  President  of  the 
United  States  who  received  news  of  his  election 
while  riding  on  a  train.  This  occurred  March  2,  1877, 
while  he  was  en  route  to  Washington,  D.  C. 

The  first  "cowcatcher"  on  a  locomotive  was  an  in- 
vention by  necessity.  So  many  cows  trespassed  upon 
the  tracks  of  the  Camden  &  Amboy  Railroad,  in  New 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  129 


R  O   L  /   N 

This  new  railroad  map  of  North  Carolina  shoivs  all  lines  now 
in  operation  without  names  of  railroads  or  cities  and  towns. 
Made  for  this  issue  by  L.  Polk  Denmark,  N.  C.  Highway  Dept., 
Raleigh. 

Jersey,  that  Isaac  Dreps,  a  mechanical  engineer,  bent 
a  cross-bar  into  the  familiar  V-shape  and  attached  it 
to  the  front  end  of  a  locomotive  to  "fend  off"  the 
cows. 

The  first  locomotive  to  be  equipped  with  a  "cab" 
to  house  the  engineer  appeared  in  1836.  It  was  built 
onto  the  locomotive  "Samuel  D.  Ingham"  on  the  Bea- 
ver Meadow  Railroad  in  Pennsylvania. 

The  first  locomotive  to  be  equipped  with  a  whistle 
had  the  name  of  "Sandusky".  This  was  in  1836  on 
a  railroad  between  Paterson  and  New  Brunswick, 
New  Jersey.  The  record  reads  "a  steam  whistle,  to 
give  notice  of  its  approach  to  any  point."  This  same 
locomotive  has  another  "first"  to  its  credit.  It  was 
the  first  locomotive  to  maintain  a  speed  of  more  than 
30  miles  per  hour. 

The  early  railroads  invented  the  familiar  expres- 
sion "C.  O.  D."  In  1841  a  shipper  requested  a  rail- 
road to  collect  payment  for  the  goods  from  the  con- 
signee at  the  time  of  delivery.  The  railroad  agent 
forwarding  the  shipment  used  the  initials  "C.  0.  D.", 
meaning  "collect  on  delivery". 

The  current  extensive  use  of  the  telegraph,  tele- 
phone, radio,  as  communications  by  the  railroads  is 
well  known.  Very  few  probably  know  of  the  first 
use  of  the  telegraph  by  the  railroads.  It  was  in  1851. 
a  train  on  the  New  York  &  Erie  Railroad  arrived  at 
Hammond,  New  York,  where  it  was  to  meet  a  train 
from  the  opposite  direction.  After  a  reasonable  time 
the  opposing  train  had  not  arrived.  A  commercial 
telegraph  line  was  in  operation  between  Hammond 
and  Goshen,  13  miles  distant.  A  telegram  was  sent 
to  Goshen  asking  about  the  opposing  train.  The 
answer  came  back  the  train  had  not  arrived  at 
Goshen.  The  train  crew  at  Hammond  then  sent  a 
telegram  addressed  to  the  other  train  at  Goshen 
instructing  it  to  remain  at  Goshen  until  the  train 
from  Hammond  had  arrived.  Thus  was  born  "train 
dispatching"  by  telegraph. 

The  first  locomotives  used  wood  as  a  fuel.  It  was 
not  until  1854  that  a  locomotive  was  built  that  suc- 
cessfully used  coal  exclusively  as  its  fuel. 

Between  1837  and  1859,  some  eight  or  ten  experi- 
mental sleeping  cars  were  adapted  to  use  by  passen- 
gers. It  was  not  until  1859,  however,  when  George 
M.  Pullman  converted  two  coaches  to  sleeping  cars 
for  use  on  the  Chicago  &  Alton  Railroad,  that  prac- 
tical sleeping  cars  were  in  actual  use.  In  1864,  Mr. 
Pullman  started  to  build  the  first  Pullman  Sleeping 
Car  from  the  ground  up.    It  was  completed  in  1865, 


RAILROAD 

MAP  OF 

NORTH    CAROLINA 

FOUR  N.  C.  COUNTIES  NEVER  HAD  RA!L 
LINES;  EIGHT  WITHOUT  LINES  NOW 

Two  North  Carolina  counties,  Alleghany  and  Yadkin,  have 
never  had  even  one  mile  of  railroads  within  their  borders,  and 
two  others,  Dare  and  Hyde,  have  never  had  anything  more 
than  short  lumber  or  farm  railroads.  Eight  counties  in  the 
State  do  not  now  have  railroads  of  any  kind,  due  to  abandon- 
ment of  railroad  lines  within  their  borders.  They  are  Alle- 
ghany, Avery,  Clay  and  Watauga  in  the  mountains,  Yadkin  in 
the  Piedmont,  and  Dare,  Hyde  and  Tyrrell  in  the  east. 

At  present  27  county  seats  do  not  have  railroad  connections. 
They  are  Bakersville,  Boone,  Carthage,  Columbia,  Columbus, 
Currituck,  Danbury,  Dobson,  Gatesville,  Graham,  Hayesville, 
Jackson,  Jefferson,  Kenansville,  Manteo,  Murfreesboro,  New- 
land,  Snow  Hill,  Southport,  Sparta,  Swan  Quarter,  Trenton, 
Wentworth,  Wilkesboro,  Wintc.n,  Yadkinvilie  and  Yanceyville. 

However,  even  with  these  towns  without  railroad  facilities, 
just  two  of  them,  Murfreesboro  and  Boone,  are  the  only 
towns  with  a  population  of  2,000  or  more,  U.  S.  Census,  1950, 
that  are  not  approached  by  a  railroad.  That  means  that  130 
North  Carolina  communities  with  2,000  or  more  population 
have  railroad  connections,  in  addition  to  hundreds  of  smaller 
communities. 

Of  the  eight  counties  without  railroad  service,  the  three  in 
the  east,  Dare,  Hyde  and  Tyrrell,  all  have  always  had  access 
to  water  transportation.  Tyrrell  had  a  railroad  from  Mackeys, 
now  abandoned.  Dare  once  had  a  mile  or  two  of  road  in  the 
East  Lake  area,  a  logging  line  operated  by  Dare  Lumber  Co., 
operations  in  which  Duval  Bros,  was  interested,  then  and  later. 
Hyde  County  had  a  few  miles  of  railroad  operated  in  connection 
with  the  New  Holland  development  of  the  Lake  Mattamuskeet 
area. 

Clay  County  formerly  contained  a  line  operated  from  An- 
drews to  Hayesville,  abandoned  in  1951.  Avery  and  Watauga 
formerly  contained  parts  of  the  Eastern  Tennessee  and  West- 
ern North  Carolina  railroad  operating  from  Johnson  City,  Tenn. 
— the  line  of  "Tweetsie"  fame,  abandoned  from  Cranberry  to 
Boone  several  years  ago,  and  the  two  or  three  miles  in  North 
Carolina  to  Cranberry  were  abandoned  a  few  years  ago. 

Alleghany  County  had  hopes  for  a  railroad  when  the  Elkin 
&  Alleghany  started  in  Elkin  in  1911  and  reached  a  few  miles 
up  the  mountainside  beyond  Doughton.  It  was  due  to  go  to 
Sparta  and  on  westward,  but  crossing  the  mountain  was  not 
feasible  and  the  entire  16-mile  line  was  abandoned  around 
1927.  Plans  for  the  Northwestern  North  Carolina  Railroad 
were  to  go  from  Winston-Salem,  via  Yadkinvilie  to  Wilkesboro, 
but  Yadkin  County  commissioners  objected — scare  horses  and 
cattle  and  bring  hoboes  and  bums — so  the  line  went  north  of 
the  Yadkin  River,  thus  developing  two  new  towns,  North 
Wilkesboro  and  Elkin,  and  others. — Data  largely  from  L.  Polk 
Denmark,  N.  C.  Highway  Dept.,  and  Parks  Low,  N.  C.  Utilities 
Commission. 

named  the  "Pioneer"  and  placed  in  operation. 
The  first  railway  dining  car  for  the  use  of  pas- 


PAGE  1  30 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


sengers  was  operated  on  the  Philadelphia,  Baltimore 
and  Washington  Railway,  between  Philadelphia  and 
Baltimore  in  1864.  They  were  converted  coaches, 
50  feet  in  length,  each  fitted  with  "an  eating  bar, 
steam  box,  and  other  fixtures  usually  found  in  a 
first-class  restaurant".  The  food,  however,  was  pre- 
pared at  the  terminals,  placed  in  the  "steam  box" 
and  served  therefrom  during  the  journey. 

The  growth  and  expansion  of  the  railroads  con- 
tinued with  other  interesting  "firsts"  and  "little 
known  facts"  until  every  State  and  nearly  every 
county  and  every  important  city  in  the  United  States 
was  served  by  one  or  more  railroads.  No  other  in- 
dustry so  fully  enters  the  every  day  life  of  the  Ameri- 
can people. 

The  railroads  have  been  tremendously  important 
from  the  broader  standpoint  of  national  develop- 
ment. Until  the  advent  of  railroads,  the  nation's 
inland  commerce  moved  principally  upon  canals, 
lakes  and  navigable  rivers  when  ice,  low  water  or 
floods  did  not  interfere.  On  land,  people  were  de- 
pendent upon  the  stagecoach  for  long  journeys  and 


the  Conestoga  wagon  for  freight  haulage.  Travel 
and  communications  were  slow,  and  the  cost  of  trans- 
porting freight  long  distance  by  land  was  often  pro- 
hibitive. Lack  of  efficient  land  transportation  re- 
tarded agricultural  and  industrial  development  and 
confined  trade  to  small  areas. 

To  realize  how  true  this  is  we  have  only  to  con- 
sider the  important  part  which  railway  transporta- 
tion plays  in  assembling  the  materials  which  go  into 
the  production  of  our  homes,  the  furniture  and  fur- 
nishings with  which  our  homes  are  fitted,  the  food  we 
eat,  the  clothing  we  wear,  and  the  many  other  things 
we  use  and  see  about  us.  Many  of  these  articles 
have  been  brought  to  us  by  rail — sometimes  for 
thousands  of  miles — and  if  we  should  trace  them 
back  still  farther,  we  could  find  that  railway  trans- 
portation played  an  important  part  in  assembling  the 
raw  materials  from  which  most  of  them  were  made. 
So  we  see  there  is  a  close  relationship  between  rail- 
way transportation  and  the  comforts  and  advantages 
which  we  enjoy  every  day  and  every  hour  of  the  day. 


Southern  Largest  Railroad  Operating  in  North  Carolina 


The  Southern  Railway  System  serves  that  part  of 
the  United  States  which  is  known  historically  as  the 
Old  South  and  in  more  modern  terminology  as  the 
Southeast.  It  operates  a  network  of  lines,  extending 
from  the  Potomac  and  Ohio  rivers  on  the  north  to 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico  on  the  South,  and  from  the  At- 
lantic Ocean  on  the  East  to  the  Mississippi  River  on 
the  West. 

The  road  mileage  of  the  Southern  Railway  System 
totals  approximately  8,000  miles,  including  South- 
ern Railway  Co.  6,410  miles;  The  Cincinnati,  New 
Orleans  and  Texas  Pacific  Railway  Co.,  337;  The 
Alabama,  Great  Southern  Railroad  Co.,  316;  New 
Orleans  and  Northeastern  Railroad  Co.,  204 ;  Georgia 
Southern  and  Florida  Railway  Co.,  397 ;  and  several 
short  lines  running  to  more  than  300  miles  of  line. 

Southern  Railway  Co.  was  chartered  in  1894  to 
acquire  the  properties  of  the  Richmond  and  Danville 
and  the  East  Tennessee,  Virginia  and  Georgia  Sys- 


A  Southern  Railway  tonnage  train  on  Saluda  Mountain  round- 
ing a  curve  on  the  grade  leading  to  Melrose. 


terns.  The  R&D  and  ETV&G  Systems,  at  that  time, 
included  a  total  of  105  separate  railroads  spreading 
web-like  over  a  13-state  territory.  The  state  having 
the  greatest  miles  of  road  then,  as  now,  is  North 
Carolina  which  noses  out  Alabama  for  this  honor  by 
some  40-odd  miles. 

North  Carolina's  1,287  miles  of  road  and  2,090 
miles  of  all  track  was  originally  divided  among  the 
properties  of  18  individual  lines.  As  operated  today 
709  miles  are  owned  by  the  Southern,  456  miles  leas- 
ed and  122  miles  operated  under  trackage  rights. 
In  addition  the  railway  operates  235  miles  of  second 
and  other  main  track  and  568  miles  of  industrial, 
yard  and  side-tracks. 

Principal  Southern  Railway  lines  in  North  Caro- 
lina include:  the  double  track  line  extending  from 
just  south  of  Danville,  Va.,  to  Grover,  just  south  of 
Kings  Mountain;  the  line  from  Salisbury  through 
Asheville  to  the  Tennessee  State  Line ;  the  line  from 
Asheville  to  Murphy ;  the  line  from  Asheville  to  the 
South  Carolina  State  Line  in  the  direction  of  Spar- 
tanburg; the  line  from  Goldsboro  to  Greensboro, 
from  Greensboro  to  North  Wilkesboro  via  Winston- 
Salem  ;  and  from  Winston-Salem  to  Charlotte. 

The  Goldsboro-Greensboro-Charlotte  line  was  com- 
pleted by  the  North  Carolina  Railroad  Co.  (largely 
controlled  by  the  State  of  North  Carolina)  in  Jan- 
uary, 1856.  Almost  wrecked  during  the  War  Be- 
tween the  States,  the  line  was  rebuilt,  and  leased  to 
the  Richmond  &  Danville  Railroad  Co.  (a  Southern 
predecessor)  in  1871  for  a  period  of  30  years.  In 
1895,  the  newly  organized  Southern  Railway  Co.  ob- 
tained a  99-year  lease. 

A  stirring  political  sidelight  on  the  chartering  of 
the  North  Carolina  Railroad  is  told  in  a  recent  arti- 
cle by  Christopher  Crittenden,  director  of  the  North 
Carolina  Department  of  Archives  and  History.  Dr. 
Crittenden  wrote: 

"Matters  reached  a  climax  with  the  session  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  in  1848-49.  In  that  body  the  Whigs,  who 
favored  the  construction  of  railroads  with  State  aid,  and 
the   Democrats,   who    opposed    such   action,   were   almost 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  131 


evenly  divided.  In  the  House  there  were  60  "Whigs  and 
59  Democrats,  and  in  the  Senate  25  Whigs  and  25  Demo- 
crats. Any  effort  to  charter  a  new  railroad,  to  be  built 
in  part  with  State  funds,  was  bound  to  be  hotly  contested. 

"After  a  great  deal  of  political  maneuvering,  a  bill  was 
introduced  to  charter  the  North  Carolina  Railroad  Com- 
pany with  a  capital  stock  of  $3,000,000,  of  which  the  State 
was  to  subscribe  two-thirds.  The  bill  passed  the  House 
by  a  vote  of  60  to  52,  but  everyone  knew  that  the  contest 
in  the  Senate  would  be  very  close.  As  the  showdown 
approached,  it  became  evident  that  Speaker  Calvin  Graves 
of  Caswell  County,  a  Democrat,  was  rhe  key  man.  Though 
his  party  as  a  group  opposed  the  charter,  Graves  had  given 
no  indication  how  he  would  vote.  The  entire  State  await- 
ed the  outcome  with  interest  at  a  high  pitch. 

"The  bill  passed  two  readings  in  the  Senate,  and  when 
the  time  came  for  the  critical  third  and  final  reading, 
the  galleries  and  lobbies  were  crowded  with  excited  spec- 
tators. The  roll  was  called,  with  one  Senator  after  an- 
other voting  for  or  against  the  bill,  and  the  result  was  a 
tie  vote.  That  left  it  up  to  the  Speaker  to  cast  the  decid- 
ing ballot.  Thereupon  Graves,  leaning  slightly  forward, 
gavel  in  hand,  spoke.  'The  vote  on  the  Bill  being  equal,' 
he  said,  'twenty-two  ayes  and  twenty-two  nays,  the  Chair 
votes  Yea.  The  Bill  has  passed  its  third  and  last  read- 
ing.' 

"  'I  have  seen  and  read  of  many  memorable  and  famous 
contests,  and  have  witnessed  many  outbreaks  of  popular 
applause,'  later  wrote  Rufus  Barringer  of  Charlotte,  an 
eye-witness  to  the  scene,  'but  never  anything  like  that  then 
following.  Even  the  granite  Capitol  seemed  to  shake  for 
joy.  But  this  was  not  all.  There  was  then  no  electric 
telegraph  in  North  Carolina;  no  express  lines;  no  mail 
delivery;  but  immediately,  every  man  and  woman,  every 
boy,  girl,  became  a  sort  of  message  bearer.  News  was 
hastened  in  every  possible  way  to  every  nook  and  corner 
of  the  Old  Commonwealth,  and  the  one  phrase  was  'Speaker 
Graves  has  saved  the  State — the  Railroad  bill  has  pass- 
ed.' " 

"Graves'  action,  taken  contrary  to  the  stated  position  of 
his  party,  was  indeed  courageous  for  it  cost  him  his  po- 
litical career.  The  Democrats  never  forgave  him  and 
he  was  never  again  elected  to  public  office.  In  memory 
of  this  public-spirited  citizen,  on  April  15,  1950,  a  bronze 
tablet  was  unveiled  at  the  new  Southern  Railway  station 
in  Raleigh  with  Governor  W.  Kerr  Scott,  prominent  offi- 
cials of  the  Southern,  and  members  of  the  Graves  family 
participating." 

Born  of  military  necessity,  the  line  from  Danville 
to  Greensboro  was  built  by  the  Confederate  States 
as  the  Piedmont  Railroad  and  completed  in  1864.  It 
became  a  part  of  the  Richmond  and  Danville  System 
in  1866  and  with  the  company's  properties  passed 
to  the  Southern  Railway  Co.  in  1894. 

Both  the  line  that  extends  from  Salisbury  through 
Asheville  to  the  Tennessee  State  Line  (opened  1882) 
and  the  Murphy  Branch  (opened  1890)  were  con- 
structed by  the  Western  North  Carolina  Railroad 
against  almost  impossible  odds  of  rugged  terrain 
and  crude  equipment.  Both  became  part  of  the  Rich- 
mond and  Danville  system  and  later  part  of  the 


'The  Crescent" .  streamlined  deluxe,  all-room  train  of  Southern. 

Railway  from  New  York  to  Neiv  Orleans,  -passes  through 

Greensboro  and  Charlotte  daily. 


Southern. 

Another  pick-and-shovel  saga  of  mountain  rail- 
road-building may  be  found  in  the  story  of  the  line 
from  the  South  Carolina  State  Line  to  Asheville. 
That  line  still  contains,  between  Melrose  and  Saluda, 
the  steepest  main  line  grade  of  any  railroad  in  the 
country.  Built  by  the  Asheville  and  Spartanburg 
Railroad  Co.  and  opened  in  1886,  the  line  became  part 
of  the  Richmond  &  Danville  system,  later  part  of  the 
Southern. 

The  present  line  from  Greensboro  to  North  Wilkes- 
boro  via  Winston-Salem  was  built  by  the  Northwest- 
ern Railroad  Co.,  opened  to  Salem  in  1873  and  from 
Salem  to  Wilkesboro  in  1890.  This  company  was 
under  the  control  of  the  Richmond  and  Danville  and 
went  with  it  into  the  Southern  Railway. 

In  North  Carolina  the  Southern  provides  employ- 
ment for  more  than  5,000  men  and  women.  On  the 
basis  of  four  to  a  family,  this  means  that  approxi- 
mately 20,000  persons  draw  their  support  from  the 
railway. 

Taxes  paid  in  the  State  amounted  to  $2,342,728.76 
(exclusive  of  Federal  taxes)  for  the  year  1952.  These 
taxes  go  toward  the  support  of  the  schools,  public 
health  and  safety,  and  other  state  and  local  govern- 
mental activities  and  services. 

To  North  Carolina  freight  shippers  and  receivers, 
the  Southern  provides  fast  merchandise  freight  serv- 
ice to  and  from  the  Ohio,  Mississippi  and  Potomac 
River  gateways.  One  of  the  railway's  principal  mer- 
chandise freight  transfer  points  is  located  at  Spen- 
cer, N.  C.  Hundreds  of  freight  trains,  like  the 
"Eastern  Rocket"  and  the  "Southern  Flash"  provide 
a  daily  service  through  North  Carolina  to  other  sec- 
tions of  the  nation — a  service  which  accounted  for 
2,666,702,879  ton-miles  of  freight  service  in  North 
Carolina  in  1952. 

Passenger-wise  the  Southern  Railway  operates  a 
fleet  of  38  local  or  through  trains  in  North  Carolina, 
led  by  such  named-train  mainliners  as  "The  Cres- 
cent", "The  Southerner"  and  the  "Piedmont  Limit- 
ed." In  1952  the  Southern  performed  a  total  of  134,- 
293,932  passenger-miles  in  the  State  of  North  Caro- 
lina. 

The  roots  of  the  Southern  Railway  are  deeply  im- 
bedded in  the  soil  of  North  Carolina.  But  confining 
the  story  of  its  operations  to  one  state  is  like  trying 
to  bake  a  slice  of  pie — a  much  better  job  can  be  done 
when  working  with  the  whole  thing. 

The  real  beginning  of  railroad  transportation  in 
America  took  place  in  the  year  1830  when  the  United 
States  was  a  fledgling  country  of  only  thirteen  mil- 
lion people.  At  that  early  date  only  23  miles  of  rail- 
road existed ;  however,  six  of  the  miles  were  the 
property  of  a  Southern  Railway  System  predecessor 
line,  the  South  Carolina  Canal  and  Rail  Road  Co.  It 
was  on  this  railroad  that  the  locomotive  "Best  Friend 
of  Charleston,"  first  locomotive  built  in  America  for 
regular  service  on  a  railroad,  pulled  the  first  train  of 
cars  in  regular  scheduled  service,  on  Christmas  Day 
in  1830.  The  same  rail  line  was  the  first  to  carry 
United  States  mail  and  the  first  to  experiment  with 
a  crude  form  of  headlight  for  night  operation.  At 
the  time  of  its  completion  from  Charleston  to  Ham- 
burg, S.  C,  in  1833,  its  136-mile  length  made  it  the 
longest  railway  in  the  world. 

From  this  early  beginning  the  Southern  Railway 
System  through  the  joining  of  its  many  predecessor 


PAGE  1  32 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


lines  has  grown  to  become  the  third  largest  railroad 
east  of  the  Mississippi  River.  Lending  emphasis  to 
its  size  are  thousands  of  cars  and  its  fleet  of  pow- 
erful diesel  locomotives.  There  are  hundreds  of 
freight  and  passenger  stations,  storehouses  to  handle 
the  75,000  different  things  the  Southern  needs  and 
uses  in  its  daily  operations ;  tunnels  and  bridges ; 
offices  and  other  buildings  of  every  size  and  descrip- 
tion; signaling  and  communications  systems — the 
list  is  almost  endless. 

Completely  equipped  with  diesel  locomotives,  and 
extensively  modernized  at  a  cost  of  approximately 
$250  million  since  the  end  of  World  War  II,  the 
Southern  has  earned  a  place  among  the  country's 
most  progressive  railways  by  its  advances  in  yard 
and  terminal  operation,  in  shop  practices,  in  road- 
way and  track  maintenance  and  in  signaling. 

Some  of  the  material  yardsticks  of  the  railway's 
progress  in  recent  years  are  complete  dieselization 
with  a  fleet  of  880  diesel  locomotive  units  costing  ap- 
proximately $12314  million;  purchase  of  $10  million 
worth  of  new  streamlined  passenger  cars  and  more 
than  13,000  new  freight  cars  since  the  end  of  World 
War  II;  and  a  $34  million  yard  and  terminal  im- 
provement program  that  is  providing  modern,  re- 
tarder-type  freight  yards  at  many  strategic  points 
on  the  railway. 

The  dieselization  program  has  brought  about  a 
vast  change  in  the  railway's  shop  facilities.  Major 
changes  have  been  made  at  Spencer,  N.  C,  Birming- 
ham, Ala.,  Atlanta,  Ga.,  and  at  Chattanooga,  Tenn. 

Over  the  entire  system  crews  are  constantly  at 
work  laying  new  and  heavier  rail  and  replacing 
crossties.  Line  changes,  to  eliminate  curves  and 
trestles,  are  being  carried  out.  New  and  heavier- 
capacity  bridges  have  been  constructed. 

As  one  of  the  South's  largest  employers,  the  South- 
ern offers  a  great  variety  of  job  opportunities.  It 
would  be  difficult  to  name  a  trade,  profession  or 
vocation  that  is  not  represented  on  the  Southern's 
payroll.  There  are  employees  of  all  kinds  doing  work 
peculiar  to  railroads.  But,  in  addition,  the  Southern 
employs  doctors,  lawyers,  draftsmen,  geologists, 
chemists,  civil  and  electrical  engineers,  policemen 
and  detectives,  research  and  mechanical  engineers, 
statisticians,  accountants,  architects,  telephone  ope- 


rators, nurses,  eooks,  laundry  workers,  carpenters, 
clerks,  stenographers,  and  many  others. 

For  more  than  a  century  the  men  and  women  of 
the  Southern  Railway  System  and  its  predecessor 
lines  have  been  supplying  efficient,  dependable,  eco- 
nomical mass  transportation  service  in  North  Caro- 
lina and  throughout  a  13-state  area.  And  toward 
the  next  century — they  look  with  courage  and  in- 
spiration— from  the  Potomac  to  the  Gulf  and  from 
the  Atlantic  to  the  Mississippi. — Prepared  by  Public 
Relations  Department,  Southern  Railway  System. 


Southern    Raihcay's    diesel-powered    passenger    train    No.    86 
glides  through  the  raihvay's  classification  yards  at  Spencer. 


CAROLINA  AND  NORTHWESTERN  RAILWAY  CO. 

Carolina  and  Northwestern  Railway  Co.,  with  headquarters 
in  Charlotte,  a  subsidiary  of  the  Southern  Railway,  operates 
283.36  miles  of  railroad  in  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina  and 
Virginia,  consisting  of  five  divisions  and  five  separate  railroad 
lines,  three  of  which  are  located  entirely  within  the  State  of 
North  Carolina.  Of  the  total  mileage  more  than  half,  or  154.55 
miles  is  located  in  this  State. 

The  Carolina  and  Northwestern  embraces  all  of  the  railroad 
lines  subsidiary  to  the  Southern  Railway  and  operated  in 
North  Carolina  except  the  lines  actually  owned  or  leased  by 
the  Southern.  The  five  divisions  are  the  Anderson  Division, 
formerly  the  Blue  Ridge  Railway,  entirely  in  South  Carolina; 
the  Martinsville  Division,  formerly  the  Danville  and  Western 
Railway,  extending  from  Virginia  to  Leaksville,  9.16  miles; 
the  Asheboro  Division,  formerly  the  High  Point,  Randleman, 
Asheboro  and  Southern  Railroad,  28.2  miles;  the  Albemarle 
Division,  formerly  the  Yadkin  Railroad,  from  Salisbury  to 
Badin  and  Albemarle,  43.11  miles;  and  the  Lenoir  Division, 
the  original  Carolina  and  Northwestern  Railway  and  formerly 
the  Chester  (S.  C.)  and  Lenoir  Railroad,  75.43  miles.  These 
five  lines  became  parts  of  the  Carolina  and  Northwestern  Rail- 
way Co.  through  negotiation  of  a  lease  effective  July  1,  1951. 

The  Lenoir  Division,  the  original  Carolina  and  Northwestern 
Railway,  operates  from  Chester,  S.  C,  via  Gastonia,  Lincoln- 
ton,  Newton,  Hickory  and  Granite  Palls  to  Lenoir.  This  road 
actually  had  its  beginning  in  1848  when  the  Kings  Mountain 
Railroad  was  chartered  and  a  line  was  completed  from  Chester 
to  York,  S.  C,  in  1852.  This  road  was  consolidated  with  the 
Chester  and  Lenoir  Railroad,  chartered  in  1873.  The  Chester 
and  Lenoir  Railroad  completed  a  link  from  York,  S.  C,  to  Lin- 
colnton,  41  miles,  in  1880.  In  1884  the  road  was  completed  to 
Newton  and  another  line  built  from  Hickory  to  Lenoir.  This 
was  a  narrow  gauge  road  and  the  ten  miles  between  Newton 
and  Hickory  was  negotiated  over  ten  miles  of  track  of  the 
Western  Carolina  Railroad  Co.  by  means  of  adding  a  third  rail 
to  this  standard  gauge  road  to  accommodate  the  narrow  gauge 
equipment  of  the  Chester  and  Lenoir  Railroad.  Meantime, 
this  road  was  leased  to  the  Charlotte,  Columbia  and  Augusta 
Railroad,  and  this  lease  was  assigned  to  the  Richmond  and 
Danville  Railroad  (Southern).  The  Chester  and  Lenoir  Rail- 
road was  made  standard  gauge  in  1902. 

The  Albemarle  Division,  formerly  the  Yadkin  Railroad, 
serves  the  communities  of  Salisbury,  Albemarle,  Badin,  Granite 
Quarry,  Rockwell  and  Richfield.  The  Yadkin  Railroad  was 
chartered  in  1871  and  the  line  completed  from  Salisbury  to 
Norwood  in  1891.  Later  a  branch  from  Halls  Perry  Junction 
was  extended  to  Whitney  and  still  later  to  Badin  where  the 
Aluminum  Company  of  America  has  extensive  aluminum 
operations. 

The  Asheboro  Division,  formerly  the  High  Point,  Randleman, 
Asheboro  and  Southern  Railroad,  was  chartered  in  1887  and 
opened  for  traffic  in  1889. 

The  Martinsville  Division,  operating  from  Danville  and  Mar- 
tinsville, Va.,  serving  the  industrial  Tri-Cities  of  Leaksville- 
Spray-Draper,  was  open  for  business  in  1882.  This  originally 
was  a  narow  gauge  railroad,  later  changed  to  standard 
gauge. 

All  of  these  four  divisions  in  North  Carolina  connect  with 
and  are  supplemental  and  feeder  lines  of  the  Southern  Rail- 
way. The  Lenoir  Division  connects  at  Hickory,  Newton  and 
Gastonia;  the  Asheboro  Division  connects  at  High  Point;  tne 
Albemarle  Division  connects  at  Salisbury  and  the  Martinsville 
Division  connects  with  the  Southern  at  Danville,  Va.  All  of 
these  four  North  Carolina  lines  are  located  in  important  and 
growing  industrial  areas  with  splendid  prospects  for  continued 
expansion  and  growth. 

The  Carolina  and  Northwestern  Railway  Co.  is  capitalized 
at  approximately  $1,403,000  and  controls  right-of-way,  rolling 
stock,  equipment  and  other  facilities  valued  at  around  $5,000,- 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  133 


000.  The  railroad  operates  ten  diesel  electric  locomotives  and 
owns  no  freight  cars  but  uses  equipment  of  the  Southern  and 
other  railroads  with  which  it  has  exchange  arrangements. 
Annually  the  railroad  handles  approximately  75,000  carloads 
of  freight.  In  this  State  it  employs  about  250  workers  and  has 
an  annual  payroll  in  the  neighborhood  of  $1,200,000. 

Harry  A.  DeButts,  president  of  the  Southern  Railway,  is 
president  of  the  Carolina  and  Northwestern.  Several  of  the 
principal  officers  live  in  Washington  and  in  towns  in  other 
states  in  which  the  lines  operate.  In  North  Carolina  the 
principal  officers  are  M.  H.  Ramsey,  Charlotte,  vice-president 
in  charge  of  operations;  S.  H.  Percival,  Charlotte,  assistant 
vice-president  in  charge  of  maintenance;  Chester  Quinn,  Hick- 
ory, auditor;  H.  E.  Johnson,  superintendent,  Hickory,  and  R. 
A.  Cathey,  superintendent,  Salisbury. 


COL  A.  B.  ANDREWS,  N.  C.  NATIVE, 
WAS  LEADING  RAILROAD  DEVELOPER 

Col.  Alexander  Boyd  Andrews  (1841-1913)  was  the  most  out- 
standing figure  in  the  development  of  North  Carolina  railroads 
and  the  greatest  railroadman  the  State  has  produced  and  kept 
within  its  borders.  Serving  for  about  40  years  as  vice-president 
of  the  Southern  Railway,  twice  he  declined  the  presidency  of 
this  great  railroad  system  primarily  because  he  would  have 
to  move  from  Raleigh  to  Washington.  For 
years  it  was  claimed  that  he  had  the  North 
Carolina  General  Assembly  in  his  pocket. 
The  extent  to  which  this  was  true  was 
undoubtedly  due  to  the  confidence  placed  in 
him  by  the  lawmakers  and  the  people  of  the 
State. 

Col.  Andrews  was  born  near  Franklinton 
and  with  eight  other  children  became  an 
orphan  when  he  was  11  years  old.  His 
youth  later  was  spent  near  Henderson  with 
his  grandfather,  Col.  John  D.  Hawkins. 
When  18  years  of  age,  he  joined  an  uncle  in  the  construction  of 
the  Blue  Ridge  Railroad  in  South  Carolina.  Two  years  later 
he  volunteered  early  in  the  Confederate  Cavalry  and  soon  re- 
ceived promotions  to  lientenant  and  captain.  He  was  shot 
through  the  left  lung  and  almost  died,  but.  later  sought  twice 
to  rejoin  his  organization.  He  surrendered  with  Gen.  Joseph 
E.  Johnson  at  the  Bennett  House  near  Durham  in  the  Spring 
of  1865. 

Within  a  few  months  Col.  Andrews  went  to  Weldon  and  de- 
vised a  plan  of  ferrying  passengers  across  the  Roanoke  River 
for   the   Petersburg  Railroad   while   the   railroad   bridge,   de- 
stroyed during  the  war,  was  being  rebuilt.     The  success  of  his 
ferrying  operations  caused  him  after  about  two  years  to  be 
made  superintendent  of  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  Railroad  in 
1867.     Eight  years  later,  in  1875,  he  resigned  to  become  super- 
intendent of  the  North  Carolina  Railroad,  then  controlled  by 
the  Richmond  and  Danville  Railroad,  which  later  became  the 
nucleus  around  which  the   Southern   Railway  was  built.     In 
1880  he  was  made  president  of  the  West- 
ern North  Carolina  Railroad,  also  held  by 
the  Richmond   and   Danville.     He  had  a 
consuming  passion  to  complete  this  road 
through  the  mountain  area  of  the  State. 
By  1882,  with  James  W.  Wilson  of  Mor- 
ganton  as  chief  engineer,  he  had  complet- 
ed one  of  the  greatest  feats  in   railroad 
construction  ever  performed,  carrying  this 
road    through   to   the   Tennessee   line   at 
Paint  Rock  where  it  connected  with  the 
Tennessee  road.    A  few  years  later  he  had 
supervised  the  construction  of  a  road  from 
Asheville  to  Murphy. 

Meanwhile  Col.  Andrews  had  superin- 
tended the  operation  of  numbers  of  other 
North  Carolina  railroads,  including  the 
North  Carolina  Railroad,  Atlantic  and  N. 
C.  Railroad,  and  the  Raleigh  and  Augusta 
Railroad,  completing  60  miles  of  construc- 
tion on  this  latter  line.  The  1910  report  of 
the  Corporation  (Utilities  Commission) 
showed  that  he  was  president  of  11  roads 
subsidiary  to  the  Southern  Railway  in  ad- 
dition to  being  vice-president  of  that  road 
and  a  director  of  the  Asheville  and  Craggy 
Mountain  Railway.    At  that  time  he  was 


president  of  the  Asheville  Southern,  the  Atlantic  and  Yadkin, 
the  Carolina  and  Southern,  the  Danville  and  Western,  the 
High  Point,  Randleman,  Asheboro  and  Southern,  the  North 
Carolina  Midland,  the  North  and  South  Carolina  Railroad,  the 
Southern  Railway  (Carolina  Division),  the  State  University 
Railroad,  the  Tallulah  Palls  Railroad  and  the  Yadkin  Railroad. 

On  the  Western  North  Carolina  Railroad,  several  miles  up 
the  mountain  beyond  Old  Fort,  a  hotel  had  been  built  on 
Round  Knob  and  operated  for  several  years  during  the  con- 
struction and  later  operations  of  the  railroad.  A  fountain  had 
been  constructed  near  this  hotel  and  was  fed  from  a  dirt  res- 
ervoir further  up  the  mountain  which  in  turn  was  filled  by 
several  small  streams. 

After  the  hotel  burned,  George  F.  Baker,  one  of  the  directors 
of  the  railroad  and  president  of  the  First  National  Bank  of 
New  York,  who  had  come  to  know  Col.  Andrews  during  the 
construction  of  the  road,  decided  to  honor  him  with  an  unusual 
and  permanent  monument.  Up  on  the  mountainside  he  turned 
the  mud  hole  into  a  basin  with  concrete  at  the  two  ends  and 
on  the  lower  side,  into  which  several  small  streams  empty.  He 
piped  this  water  to  Round  Knob  and  there  constructed  a  geyser 
from  which  the  water  spurts  upward  constantly  to  a  height 
of  more  than  100  feet  high.  This  landscaped  beauty  spot  he 
named  Andrews'  Geyser.  The  Southern  Railway  agreed  to  keep 
the  entire  structure  in  operation  and  in  good  repair. 

The  Southern  Railway  line,  in  its  tortuous  ascent  of  the 
Blue  Ridge,  twists  and  winds  to  such  an  extent  that  Andrews' 
Geyser  may  be  seen  by  passengers  five  or  six  times  and  from 
both  sides  of  the  train — a  vivid  monument  to  Col.  A.  B. 
Andrews. 


Andrews  Geyser. 
part  of  Southern 
Railway  freiyM 
train  behind  gey- 
ser. 


FIVE  CLASS  I.  TEN  CLASS  II  AND  13 
CLASS  III  RAILROADS  IN  THIS  STATE 

Railroads  are  divided  into  three  classes:  Class  I — those 
which  earn  more  than  one  million  dollars  annually;  Class  II — 
those  earning  between  $100,000  and  $1,000,000,  and  Class  III— 
those  earning  less  than  $100,000  annually.  North  Carolina  has 
some  of  all  of  these. 

In  Class  I  North  Carolina  contains  parts  of  five  railroads 
which  earn  more  than  $1,000,000  a  year.  These  are  the  South- 
ern Railway,  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railway,  the  Atlantic 
Coast  Line  Railway,  the  Norfolk  Southern  Railway  and  the 
Norfolk  and  Western  Railway.  While  the  latter  owns  only 
three  pieces  of  road  in  North  Carolina  and  half  interest  in 
another  road,  the  other  four  are  made  up  of  scores  of  small 
short  line  railroads  connected  and  hooked  up  together  as 
large  railroad  systems. 

North  Carolina  has  23  railroads  which  are  classed  as  short 
line  roads,  generally  those  having  less  than  100  miles  of  track, 
larger  than  the  number  in  any  other  State  except  Pennsylvania 
which  has  28  short  lines.  The  three  "baby"  lines  in  the  State 
are  the  Warrenton  Railroad,  3  miles;  the  Beaufort  and  More- 
head  Railroad,  3.17  miles,  and  the  Cliffside  Railroad,  3.7  miles. 

In  Class  II  North  Carolina  has  10  railroads,  some  of  which 
are  independent  corporations  but  some  are  subsidiaries  of 
larger  roads.  These  are  Aberdeen  &  Rockfish  Railroad,  Atlan- 
tic &  East  Carolina  Railway,  Danville  &  Western  Railway 
(Southern) ;  Durham  &  Southern  Railway;  High  Point,  Randle- 
man, Asheboro  and  Southern  Railway  (Southern)  ;  High  Point, 
Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad;  Tallulah  Falls  Railways 
( Southern (?)) ;  Virginia  and  Carolina  Southern  Railroad, 
(ACL) ;  Winston-Salem  Southbound  Railway  (ACL  and  N  & 
W),  and  Yadkin  Railroad  (Carolina  &  Northwestern — sub. 
Southern). 

Class  III  railroads  include  Alexander  Railroad,  Atlantic  & 
Western  Railway,  Beaufort  &  Morehead  Railroad,  Black  Moun- 
tain Railway  (Clinchfield) ,  Cape  Fear  Railways,  Inc.,  Carolina 
Southern  Railroad,  Cliffside  Railroad,  East  Carolina  Railway 
(ACL),  Graham  County  Railroad,  Laurinburg  and  Southern 
Railroad,  Rockingham  Railroad  (ACL),  State  University  Rail- 
road (Southern)  and  Warrenton  Railroad. 

Of  these  short  line  railroads  in  North  Carolina  21  operate 
entirely  within  the  State  and  two,  the  Danville  &  Western 
Railway  (Virginia)  and  the  Tallulah  Falls  Railway  (Georgia), 
cross  the  State  line.  None  of  these  short  line  railroads  now 
haul  passengers.  All  haul  freight  and  express  and  most  of 
them  handle  mails.  Some  are  extremely  profitable.  Most  of 
them  make  a  fair  rate  and  a  few  operate  without  net  profit. 
Most  of  them,  however,  are  actually  life  lines  in  the  communi- 
ties and  rural  areas  through  which  they  operate. — Largely  ICC 
data,  supplied  by  C.  E.  Huntley,  secretary-treasurer,  American 
Short  Line  Railroad  Association. 


PAGE  1  34 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


Atlantic  Coast  Line  Operates  Large  Rail  System  From  N.  C. 


Atlantic  Coast  Line  Railroad  Co.,  with  headquar- 
ters at  Wilmington,  is  the  only  one  of  the  four  major 
railroad  systems  in  this  State  which  is  essentially  a 
North  Carolina  railroad.  A  part  of  the  first  con- 
stituent line  was  built  in  North  Carolina;  the  prin- 
cipal constituent  line  was  a  North  Carolina  railroad ; 
its  headquarters  are  in  North  Carolina ;  its  president 
is  a  native  and  resident  of  North  Carolina;  about 
one-fifth  of  its  trackage,  including  a  double-track 
line  crossing  the  State,  is  located  in  North  Carolina. 
This  railroad  has  had  from  the  beginning  and  con- 
tinues to  have  a  definite  and  distinct  North  Carolina 
flavor. 

Atlantic  Coast  Line  (ACL)  owns  and  operates 
5,367  miles  of  railroad  (1,448.82  miles  of  all  types 
of  track  in  North  Carolina)  in  the  six  states  of  Vir- 
ginia, North  and  South  Carolina,  Georgia,  Alabama 
and  Florida,  in  addition  to  7,233  miles  of  road  ope- 
rated by  affiliated  companies  owned  in  part  or  en- 
tirely or  leased  by  the  ACL.  Organized  under  its 
present  name  in  1900,  this  railroad  is  made  up  of 
more  than  100  short  lines,  many  of  which  were  built 
and  operated  in  North  Carolina.  Its  lines  and  affili- 
ated lines  reach  a  total  of  12,600  miles  and  its  double 
track  and  thoroughly  modern  line  extends  through 
North  Carolina  from  Richmond  to  Jacksonville. 

In  addition  to  its  own  5,367  miles  of  track,  ACL 
owns  100%  of  the  stock  of  the  East  Carolina  Rail- 
way, 26  miles  from  its  line  at  Tarboro  to  Farmville ; 
the  Rockingham  Railroad,  20%  miles  from  Rocking- 

General  offices  building  of  Atlantic  Coast  Line  Railroad 
in  Wilmington. 

— Photo 


C.  MCD.  DAVIS,  PRESIDENT  OF  ACL, 
GENERAL  OFFICES  IN  WILMINGTON 

Champion  McDowell  Davis  is  the  only  president  of  a  Class  I 
railroad  in  North  Carolina  who  is  a  native  and  almost  con- 
tinuous resident  of  the  State  and  lives  in  Wilmington  where 
he  directs  the  activities  of  the  ACL  from  its  general  offices. 
Mr.  Davis  was  born  near  Hickory  and  started  his  railroad 
career  at  the  age  of  14  as  a  messenger  boy  for  the  Wilmington 
Mr.  Davis  was  born  near  Hickory  and 
started  his  railroad  career  at  the  age  of 
14  as  a  messenger  boy  for  the  Wilmington 
and  Weldon.  In  the  60  years  since  his 
first  job  he  has  moved  up  through  the 
ranks  until  he  became  president  in  1942. 
In  addition,  he  is  an  officer  and  director 
of  numerous  other  railroad  and  affiliated 
corporations,  including  the  presidency  of 
the  Winston-Salem  Southbound  since  1949. 
He  is  a  former  director  of  the  U.  S.  Cham- 
ber of  Commerce,  a  member  of  the  govern- 
ing board  of  Nation's  Business,  member  of 
executive  committee  of  Association  of  American  Railroads  and 
other  national  organizations.  He  is  an  active  churchman,  being 
a  former  member  of  the  National  Council,  Protestant  Episcopal 
Church;  director  of  the  Episcopal  Church  Foundation  and  Trus- 
tee of  the  Protestant  Episcopal  Theological  Seminary  in  Vir- 
ginia. Mr.  Davis  is  a  member  of  numerous  clubs  in  New 
York  and  Wilmington  and  a  member  of  the  Society  of  the 
Cincinnati,  the  Newcomer  Society  and  non-resident  vice-presi- 
dent of  the  New  York  Southern  Society. 


ham  to  the  ACL  line  at  Gibson,  and  the  Virginia  and 
Carolina  Southern  Railroad,  53  miles  from  Hope 
Mills  on  the  ACL  line  via  St.  Pauls  to  Lumberton 
with  a  branch  from  St.  Paul  to  Elizabethtown. 
ACL  owns  about  80  %  of  the  stock  of  the  Columbia, 
Newberry  and  Laurens  Railroad;  owns 
50  %  of  the  stock  of  the  Winston-Salem 
Southbound  Railroad,  88  miles  from 
Winston-Salem  to  Wadesboro  (see  Nor- 


•lirach 


Of„ 


folk  and  Western,  page  143)  ;  owns  35 
of  the  stock  of  the  Louisville  and  Nash- 
ville Railroad,  which  in  turn  owns  ap- 
proximately 75%  of  the  stock  of  Nash- 
ville, Chattanooga  and  St.  Louis  Rail- 
road; leases  jointly  with  the  Louisville 
and  Nashville  Railroad  the  properties 
of  the  Carolina,  Clinchfield  and  Ohio 
Railway  (which  is  operated  as  the 
Clinchfield  Railroad — see  page  138) 
from  Erwin,  Tenn.,  to  Spartanburg, 
S.  C,  with  116.6  miles  in  this  State, 
passing  through  Toecane,  Kona,  Spruce 
Pine,  Marion,  Bostic  and  Forest  City; 
and  also  leases  jointly  with  the  Louis- 
ville and  Nashville  properties  of  the 
Georgia  Railroad  and  Banking  Company 
which  include,  in  addition  to  the  railroad 
property  operated  as  Georgia  Railroad, 
the  majority  stock  control  of  the  West- 
ern Railway  of  Alabama  and  the  Atlan- 
tic and  West  Point  Railroad. 

The  first  line  of  railroad  built  which 
now  forms  a  part  of  the  ACL  system 
was  the  Petersburg  Railroad,  chartered 
in  Virginia  in  1830  and  in  North  Caro- 
lina in  1831  and  completed  and  opened 
in  1833  from  Petersburg,  Va.,  to  Blakely 
on  the  north  side  of  the  Roanoke  River, 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  135 


opposite  the  present  site  of  Weldon.  This,  too,  was 
the  first  mile  of  railroad  constructed  in  North  Caro- 
lina. This  line  was  built  to  give  transportation  to 
many  North  Carolina  products  which  were  finding 
their  way  to  Norfolk  by  water  routes.  Connections 
across  the  Roanoke  River  were  made  by  ferries  until 
1843  when  a  bridge  was  completed  crossing  the  river 
to  Weldon. 

Meanwhile  the  Wilmington  and  Raleigh  Railroad 
was  chartered  in  1834  to  provide  transportation  from 
Wilmington,  the  State's  principal  port  and  largest 
city,  to  Raleigh,  the  State's  capital.  As  the  construc- 
tion of  this  road  progressed,  it  developed  that  Ral- 
eigh was  not  sufficiently  interested  to  subscribe  to 
stock  of  the  road.  When  the  line  reached  Faison,  it 
curved  northward  through  Goldsboro  and  headed  for 
Weldon  to  connect  with  the  lines  from  Virginia.  This 
Railroad  was  completed  in  1840,  161  miles  long,  the 
longest  continuous  line  of  railroad  in  the  world  at 
that  time.  The  name  was  changed  to  Wilmington 
and  Weldon  Railroad  in  1855,  years  after  it  had 
reached  Weldon.  The  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Rail- 
road was  perhaps  the  most  significant  of  the  con- 
stituent units  of  the  Coast  Line  system  and  what 
may  be  termed  the  parent  predecessor  of  the  system 
in  that  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  was  the  unit  used 
as  the  vehicle  for  initiating  community  of  manage- 
ment. 

The  three  principal  units  in  and  connected  with 
North  Carolina  which  formed  the  bulk  of  the  ACL 
trackage  in  this  State,  when  the  ACL  was  formed  in 
1900,  were  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Railroad 
which  had  built  and  acquired  numbers  of  other  short 
lines  in  North  Carolina;  the  ACL  Railroad  Co.  of 
Virginia,  organized  in  1898,  which  included  the 
former  Petersburg  Railroad  and  one  or  two  other 
lines,  and  the  ACL  Railroad  Co.  of  S.  C,  organized  in 
1898,  which  owned  a  few  lines  extending  from  South 
Carolina  into  this  State. 

The  main  line  of  the  ACL,  which  was  later  dou- 
ble-tracked through  this  State,  193  miles,  and  form- 
ing a  part  of  the  Richmond  to  Jacksonville  double- 
track,  includes  several  earlier  short  stretches  of  road. 
Entering  the  State  from  Virginia  was  the  Peters- 
burg and  Weldon  line,  finished  in  1833 ;  the  Weldon 
to  Halifax  line,  started  by  the  Weldon  and  Halifax 
Railroad  and  finished  by  the  Wilmington  and  Raleigh 
Railroad  Co.,  name  of  which  was  subsequently  chang- 
ed to  Wilmington  and  Weldon,  along  with  the  Hali- 
fax to  Enfield  and  the  Enfield  to  Contentnea,  all  built 
in  the  1837-40  period.  The  line  from  Contentnea 
(near  Wilson)    to  Fayetteville  and  on  into  South 


Fast  pullman  train  operated  through  North   Carolina  by 
Atlantic  Coast  Line. 


OLD  WILMINGTON  BELL 

The  Old  Bell,  mounted  on  top  of  the  Wilmington  station  of 
the  ACL  Railroad,  has  announced  the  departure  of  trains  from 
the  station  for  almost  a  century.  Five  minutes  before  the 
passenger  train  leaves,  the  Eell  sounds  to  warn  passengers  of 
its  departure.  Again  the  Bell  rings  as 
the  train  is  ready  to  pull  out  of  the  sta- 
tion. Thus,  it  has  given  Wilmington  Liie 
distinction  of  being  the  only  place  known 
to  world  travelers  where  such  a  service  is 
rendered  by  a  railroad. 

The  Old  Bell  was  cast  in  1855  within 
the  shadow  of  the  Liberty  Bell  in  Phila- 
delphia by  J.  Bernhardt  and  Co.  In  1856 
the  Bell  was  purchased  at  a  cost  of  $286.75 
by  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Railroad 
and  erected  in  the  Wilmington  passenger 
station  the  same  year.  In  the  early  days  travelers  all  over  Wil- 
mington could  hear  the  Bell's  tones  and  rush  from  their  homes 
to  the  station  in  time  to  catch  the  leaving  train.  It  has  come 
to  be  an  institution  and  a  landmark  in  a  city  containing  many 
institutions  and  landmarks. 

Carolina,  was  built  partly  by  the  Wilmington  and 
Raleigh  and  partly  by  its  successor,  the  Wilmington 
and  Weldon,  the  stretch  from  Contentnea  to  Fayette- 
ville, 70  miles,  built  in  1885-86,  and  from  Fayette- 
ville to  Rowland,  43  miles,  built  in  1890-92,  while  the 
line  from  Rowland  to  the  South  Carolina  line,  three 
miles,  and  on  to  Dillon,  S.  C,  had  been  built  in  1887- 
88. 

Two  principal  ACL  lines  extend,  one  from  Rocky 
Mount  to  Norfolk  and  the  other  from  Contentnea 
(near  Wilson)  almost  directly  south  to  Wilmington, 
the  road's  general  headquarters.  Numbers  of  isnor, 
lines  connect  with  other  important  centers  in  the 
State. 

Capital  stock  of  the  ACL  includes  1,554  shares  of 
5%  non-cumulative  preferred  stock  with  par  value 
of  $100  and  823,427  shares  of  common  stock,  no  par 
value.  The  railroad  has  a  long  time  debt  of  $109,- 
284,900  and  conditional  sales  agreements  for  the  pur- 
chase of  additional  equipment  of  $66,792,038.  These 
figures  apply  as  of  December  31,  1952. 

Broken  clown,  the  mileage  in  North  Carolina  in- 
cludes 995.75  miles  of  single  track  of  which  182.48 
miles  have  a  second  or  double  track.  Industrial 
spurs  reach  28.8  miles  while  yardage  and  sidings 
amount  to  an  additional  241.79  miles.  This  gives  a 
total  of  1,448.82  miles. 

During  the  year  1952  the  ACL  employed  an  aver- 
age of  19,761  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of 
$83,070,667.  Of  these  totals  4,466  workers  were 
employed  in  North  Carolina,  receiving  in  salaries 
and  wages  approximately  $19,106,253. 

An  important  expansion  and  improvement  period 
for  ACL  was  in  the  mid-1920s.  As  the  main  line  was 
being  double-tracked,  automatic  block  signals  were 
installed  along  the  line,  heavier  rails  were  laid  and 
rock  ballast  was  placed  along  the  tracks  along  with 
extensive  new  timbering.  During  that  period,  which 
was  also  the  period  of  the  real  estate  boom  in  Florida, 
the  railroad  added  extensively  to  its  motive  power 
and  equipment.  Following  the  collapse  of  that  boom 
and  the  depression  of  the  1930s  the  railroad  followed 
a  curtailment  program,  which  curtailment  was  made 
practicable  by  the  large  expenditures  in  the  1920s 
which  had  placed  the  property  in  good  condition  for 
then-existing  operating  requirements. 

Again  in  1939  a  comprehensive  program  of  re- 
habilitation and  modernization  was  undertaken  and 
has  since  been  carried  forward.    Included  were  two 


PAGE  136 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


important  items:  diesel  power  was  instituted  for 
coal-burning  steam  power  and  131-lb.  (later  132-lb.) 
rails  were  substituted  for  100-lb.  rails  on  the  prin- 
cipal main  lines.  This  modernization  has  been  de- 
scribed as  the  most  extensive  in  the  nation.  Since 
1939  ACL  has  acquired  or  has  on  order:  564  units  of 
diesel  motive  power,  including  locomotives  for 
freight,  passenger,  general  purpose  and  for  switch- 
ing purposes;  145  light-weight  passenger  cars  and 
18,563  freight  cars. 

The  tracks  from  Richmond  to  Jacksonville  have 
been  surfaced  on  crushed  stone  ballast  and  much 
of  the  road  has  been  retimbered  with  nine-foot  cross- 
ties.  Signaling  has  been  and  is  being  extended  to 
other  lines  of  the  road.  From  Richmond  through 
Jacksonville  to  Orlando  the  signal  system  is  being 
replaced  by  modern  searchlight  signals,  actuated  by 
coded  track  circuits,  along  with  centralized  traffic 
control — a  system  of  remotely  controlled  switches 
and  signals  permitting  operation  of  trains  without 
train  orders — installed  on  heavy  traffic  density  seg- 
ments which  might  otherwise  prove  bottlenecks.  The 
president  of  the  railroad  has  stated:  "There  is  no 
better  track  or  roadbed  in  the  United  States". 

The  double-track  main  line  in  North  Carolina 
passes  through  Garysburg,  Weldon,  Halifax,  En- 
field, Whitakers,  Rocky  Mount,  Wilson,  Selma,  Smith- 
field,  Benson,  Dunn,  Fayetteville,  Pembroke,  Elrod 
and  Rowland.  This  includes  part  of  the  former  Pe- 
tersburg Railroad,  part  of  the  Wilmington  and  Wel- 
don Railroad  and  the  line  from  near  Wilson  to  Fay- 
etteville and  into  South  Carolina,  built  by  the  Wil- 
mington and  Weldon  Railroad.  ACL  has  two  other 
principal  main  lines  in  North  Carolina.  One  of  these 
leaves  the  main  line  a  few  miles  south  of  Wilson  and 
passes  through  Goldsboro,  Mount  Olive,  Faison,  War- 
saw, Magnolia,  Burgaw  and  to  Wilmington,  where 
the  general  headquarters  is  located.  This  is  the 
former  Wilmington  and  Weldon  road.  The  other 
principal  line  leaves  the  double-track  line  at  Rocky 
Mount,  passing  through  Tarboro,  Hobgood,  Kelford, 
Aulander,  Ahoskie,  Gates,  and  to  Norfolk,  Va.  This 
road,  started  in  1859-60,  was  operated  most  of  the 
time  by  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  until  it  was  con- 
solidated in  1900  to  form  part  of  the  ACL  of  Va. 

Other  important  east  and  west  lines  are  operated. 
One  extends  westward  from  Plymouth  through  Wil- 
liamston,  Robersonville  and  Parmele  to  Tarboro. 
Another  extends  from  Rocky  Mount  through  Nash- 
ville and  Spring  Hope  to  Lassiter,  in  the  Rolesville 
area  of  Wake  County.  The  Rocky  Mount-Spring 
Hope  section  of  this  road  was  built  by  the  Wilming- 


Modern  and  swift  diesel  locomotive  handling  ACL  passenger 
trains  through  North  Carolina. 

ton  and  Weldon  and  extended  to  Lassiter  by  lumber 
and  granite  quarry  interests. 

Another  east-west  line  extends  from  Wilmington 
through  Fayetteville  to  Sanford.  This  is  part  of  the 
former  Cape  Fear  and  Yadkin  Valley  Railroad  from 
Wilmington  to  Mount  Airy. 

Other  important  lines  and  links  of  the  ACL  fol- 
low :  Pender,  near  Halifax,  to  Kinston  through  Scot- 
land Neck,  Parmele,  Greenville  to  Kinston,  85  miles, 
built  by  the  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Railroad  in  the 
1881-90  period. 

Parmele  to  Washington,  25  miles,  built  bv  the  Wil- 
mington and  Weldon  in  1891-92.  An  extension  of 
this  line,  from  Washington  to  Vandemere,  about  40 
miles,  built  in  1907-08,  was  abandoned  and  the  track 
removed  in  1952. 

The  Warsaw  and  Clinton  line,  13V->  miles,  started 
by  another  road,  was  finished  in  1886-87  by  the  Wil- 
mington and  Weldon. 

miles,  in- 


The  Wilmington  to  New  Bern  line,  85 


Powerful  diesel  locomotive  which  pulls  fast  freight  trains  over 
Atlantic  Coast  Line  roads. 


eludes  two  sections:  Wilmington  to  Jacksonville, 
built  in  1889-91,  and  Jacksonville  to  New  Bern,  built 
in  1890-93  by  two  different  railroad  companies.  The 
line  was  acquired  by  Wilmington  and  Weldon  in 
1897. 

The  Wilmington  Railway  Bridge  Co.,  organized  in 
1886,  built  a  bridge  and  2i/2  miles  of  track  from  Hil- 
ton (Wilmington)  to  Navassa  to  establish  connec- 
tions at  Wilmington  between  the  Wilmington  and 
Weldon,  the  Wilmington  and  Manchester  and  the 
Wilmington,  Charlotte  and  Rutherfordton  Railroad. 
Stock  in  the  Wilmington  Railway  Bridge  Co.  is  own- 
ed in  equal  proportions  by  the  ACL  and  the  Seaboard. 

Navassa  via  Whiteville,  Chadbourn  and  P'air  Bluff 
and  to  Mullins  and  Kingsville,  S.  C,  built  by  Wil- 
mington and  Manchester  Railroad,  63  miles  in  North 
Carolina. 

Chadbourn  via  Tabor  City,  Conwav  to  Myrtle 
Beach,  S.  C,  13  miles  in  North  Carolina,  built  in 
1884-85,  acquired  by  Wilmington,  Columbia  and  Au- 
gusta Railroad  and  consolidated  with  others  to  form 
ACL  of  S.  C. 

Elrod  to  Chadbourn,  33  miles,  built  in  sections, 
1897-1900,  Elrod  to  Ashepole  (Fairmont),  Ashepole 
to  Boardman  and  Boardman  to  Chadbourn.  The  sec- 
tion from  Boardman  to  Chadbourn,  constructed  by 
Wilmington,  Chadbourn  and  Conway  Railroad  Co., 
was  acquired  in  1895  and  reorganized  into  Wilming- 
ton and  Weldon.  Fairmont  to  Chadbourn  line  aban- 
doned in  1950. 

Parkton  to  Hasty  and  to  Bennettsville,  S.  C,  built 
1875-84  from  Fayetteville,  46  miles,  connected  with 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  37 


Wilmington  and  Weldon  by  a  two-mile  line,  Parkton 
to  McNatts,  around  1900,  and  McNatts  to  Fayette- 
ville  section  abandoned. 

Gibson  to  Bennettsville,  S.  C,  11  miles,  a  mile  or 
so  in  North  Carolina,  opened  in  1892,  became  a  unit 
in  1898  of  ACL  of  S.  C. 

Cheraw,  S.  C,  to  Wadesboro,  25  miles,  Florence 
to  Wadesboro  line,  10  miles  in  North  Carolina,  built 
and  opened  1880,  became  a  unit  in  1898  of  ACL  of 
S.  C. 

(ACL  owned  and  partially  owned  roads  outlined 
at  end.    Winston-Salem  Southbound,  page  143). 

Officers  and  key  personnel  of  the  ACL  include 
Champion  McDowell  Davis,  president ;  L.  S.  Jeffords, 
vice-president — operations;  Lewis  F.  Ormond,  vice- 
president — accounts ;  C.  C.  Howell,  vice-president  and 
general  counsel,  and  J.  M.  Fields,  vice-president — 
traffic. 

ACL  is  vitally  interested  in  the  development  of 
new  industries  and  expansion  of  established  indus- 
tries along  its  lines  and  encourages  and  assists  in 
such  development.  In  1952,  154  new  industries  were 
established  and  37  industries  materially  expanded  in 
communities  served  by  this  railroad.  These  indus- 
tries and  expansions  are  expected  to  produce  more 
than  80,000  additional  carloads  of  freight  traffic  an- 
nually for  the  road.  Among  the  new  industries  are 
plants  producing  pulp  and  paper  products,  lumber 
and  other  wood  products,  chemicals,  frozen  citrus 
juice  concentrates,  animal  and  poultry  food,  textiles 
and  synthetic  fibers,  superphosphates,  fuller's  earth, 
limerock,  structural  steel  and  steel  fabricating 
plants,  boiler  manufacturing  plants,  creosoting  and 
wood-treating  plants,  sand,  gravel  and  crushed  stone 
operations,  electric  generating  plants  and  storage 
warehouses  of  sundry  character. 

Larger  industrial  developments  in  North  Carolina, 
located  along  ACL  lines,  include:  Acme  (near  Wil- 
mington), the  $16,400,000  pulp  mill  of  Reigel-Caro- 
line  Corp.,  with  daily  capacity  of  200  tons  of  bleach- 
ed pulp;  Graingers,  new  Dacron  fiber  plant  of  E.  I. 
duPont  cle  Nemours  &  Co.,  costing  approximately 
$40,000,000;  Sunny  Point,  U.  S.  Army  ammunition 
outloading  depot  under  construction  between  Wil- 
mington and  Southport  to  cost  more  than  $22,000,- 
000  with  loading  piers  and  about  18.5  miles  of  rail- 
road to  connect  with  ACL  near  Leland ;  Wilmington, 
completion  of  construction  of  new  port  facilities, 
costing  about  $5,000,000;  purchase  of  153-acre  site 
by  Babcock  &  Wilcox  Co.  for  new  plant  to  cost  more 
than  $2,000,000  to  produce  boiler  equipment,  giving 
this  company  a  second  plant  in  Wilmington;  con- 
struction of  new  steam  electric  generating  plant  near 
Wilmington  by  Carolina  Power  and  Light  Co.  at  an 
estimated  cost  of  $30,000,000 ;  new  plant  of  Timme 
Corporation,  costing  $3,500,000  with  planned  expan- 
sion, and  numerous  other  smaller  plants  which  fur- 
nish many  additional  tons  of  products  for  railroad 
hauling. 

ROCKINGHAM  RAILROAD  CO. 

Rockingham 

Rockingham  Railroad  Co.,  Rockingham,  was  incorporated 
in  1910  with  a  capital  of  $150,000,  its  charter  providing  for  it 
"to  continue  for  500  years".  The  purpose  was  to  build  a  20.79 
mile  line  from  Rockingham  to  Gibson,  in  Scotland  County,  to 
connect  with  the  Atlantic  Coast  Line  Railroad  and  thus  offer 
competition  to  the  Seaboard  Air  Line,  which  passed  through 
Rockingham. 

Principal  promoters  of  the  road  were  individuals  interested 


in  the  mills  which  were  developing  in  Rockingham. 

The  original  stockholders  were  Pee  Dee  Mills;  Leak,  Wall 
and  McRae;  J.  P.  Leak,  M.  L.  Hinson,  W.  C.  Leak,  William 
Entwistle,  Settle  Dockery,  H.  C.  Dockery,  J.  LeGrand  Everett 
and  Entwistle,  Steels  and  Ledbetter  Mills.  No  time  was  lost 
in  getting  construction  under  way.  Grading  was  started  in 
1910  and  the  first  train  left  Rockingham  October  7,  1911,  the 
occasion  of  a  great  celebration.  First  officers  were  T.  C.  Leak, 
president,  later  succeeded  by  Henry  C.  Wall;  William  Entwis- 
tle, vice-president,  and  J.  L.  Hawley,  general  superintendent, 
succeeded  by  W.  H.  Newell,  Jr. 

ACL  was  interested  in  the  construction  of  this  road  from  the 
beginning  and  later  acquired  the  entire  stock  issue  and  bond 
issue  in  the  separate  corporation.  Present  officers  include 
W.  H.  Entwistle,  Rockingham,  president;  W.  A.  L.  Sibley, 
vice-president;  S.  D.  Hurst,  Jr.,  secretary;  P.  Nichols,  treas- 
urer, the  latter  three  of  Wilmington  and  of  the  ACL,  and  S.  E. 
Jones,  Lumberton,  general  manager.  The  Rockingham  Rail- 
road has  trackage  rights  of  the  ACL  from  Gibson  to  B;nnetts- 
ville,  S.  C.    (Mr.  Hurst,  secretary,  died  Dec.  21,  1953). 


VIRGINIA  AND  CAROLINA  SOUTHERN  RAILWAY  CO. 

Lumberton 

Virginia  and  Carolina  Southern  Railway  Co.,  Lumberton, 
now  owned  by  the  Atlantic  Coast  Line,  was  chartered  in  1903 
to  build  a  railroad  from  Lumberton  to  Hope  Mills  where  it 
makes  connections  with  the  ACL.  Preliminary  steps  for  this 
railroad  were  made  by  the  Atlantic  Improvement  Co.,  which 
was  incorporated  by  Angus  W.  McLean,  later  governor  of  the 
State;  J.  F.  L.  Armfleld,  John  Blue,  C.  N.  Blue  and  other  indi- 
viduals in  the  community.     The  line  was  built  in  1907-09. 

A  branch  line  was  built  in  1911  from  St.  Paul  to  Elizabeth- 
town,  giving  the  road  a  total  of  55  miles  of  track.  Early  offi- 
cers were  A.  W.  McLean,  Lumberton.  president;  J.  F.  L.  Arm- 
field,  Fayetteville,  general  manager  and  superintendent;  H.  B. 
Jennings,  secretary;  A.  T.  McLean,  treasurer,  and  J.  F.  Head, 
traffic  manager.  F.  P.  Gray,  Lumberton,  and  Hector  McLean, 
Maxton,  were  additional  directors. 

In  1910  the  railroad  was  capitalized  at  $141,030  and  carried 
a  list  of  45  employees.  Mr.  McLean  resigned  as  president  of 
the  road  around  1924  and  A.  T.  McLean,  earlier  treasurer,  was 
elected  president  to  succeed  him,  continuing  in  that  office. 
The  road  was  acquired  by  the  ACL  and  made  a  part  of  its 
system,  although  continuing  as  a  separate  corporation.  H.  B. 
Jennings  is  now  vice-president,  as  well  as  secretary,  and  S.  E. 
Jones,  Lumberton,  is  general  manager. 


EAST  CAROLINA  RAILWAY 
Tarboro 

East  Carolina  Railway,  incorporated  in  1898  to  build  a  rail- 
road from  Tarboro  to  Farmville,  27  miles,  built  this  line  in  the 
1898-1901  period,  leasing  the  road  in  1899  to  Henry  Clark  Brid- 
gers  who  operated  it  under  lease  until  1935.  The  line  was 
extended  11  miles  from  Farmville  to  Hookerton  in  1906-07. 
This  newer  part  of  the  line  was  abandoned  in  1933. 

The  1910  report  of  the  Utilities  Commission  showed  Henry 
Clark  Bridgers  as  president  and  general  manager  as  well  as 
secretary  and  treasurer  of  the  road.  H.  P.  Foxhall  was  shown 
as  acting  superintendent.  The  directors  included  these  two 
officers  and  John  L.  Bridgers,  James  Pender  and  W.  E.  Shearin, 
all  of  Tarboro,  and  W.  J.  Turnage  of  Farmville.  The  capital 
was  shown  as  $55,000  and  the  road  had  cost  $270,000.  Includ- 
ing the  officers,  68  persons  were  employed  in  the  operation  of 
the  railroad.  In  that  year  operating  expenses  exceeded  ope- 
rating revenue. 

During  this  time  the  road  had  been  acquired  through  owner- 
ship of  stock  issue  and  bond  issue  by  the  Atlantic  Coast  Line 
which  owns  the  road  entirely.  C.  McD.  Davis,  president  of 
the  ACL,  is  president  of  East  Carolina  Railway  and  other  ACL 
officials  in  Wilmington  who  are  officials  of  this  short  line  are 
C.  G.  Sibley,  vice-president;  P.  Nichols,  treasurer;  L.  F.  Or- 
mond, comptroller,  and  J.  M.  Fields,  traffic  manager.  S.  E. 
Jones,  Lumberton,  who  is  general  manager  of  other  ACL-owned 
short  lines,  is  general  manager  of  the  East  Carolina  Railway. 


BLACK  MOUNTAIN  RAILROAD 

Erwin,  Tenn. 

The  Black  Mountain  Railroad  operates  10.7  miles  of  line  in 
Mitchell  and  Yancey  Counties  from  Kona  to  Burnsville  with 
a  2.11  mile  branch  between  Micaville  and  Bowditch.  This  road 
was  started  in  1910  and  opened  from  Kona  to  Bowditch  in 
July,  1911,  and  completed  in  1913.     Until  1927  a  line  extended 


PAGE  1  38 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


beyond  Burnsville  to  Eskota,  eight  or  ten  miles. 

Black  Mountain  Railroad  operates  in  an  area  which  pro- 
duces approximately  45%  of  all  the  Feldspar,  important  in 
defense,  mined  in  the  United  States.  This  is  produced  in  the 
Bowditch  area.  At  Kona  it  connects  with  the  Clinchfield  Rail- 
road, which  is  owned  and  controlled  by  the  Atlantic  Coast 
Line  and  the  Louisville  and  Nashville. 

Recently  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  denied  a  peti- 
tion of  the  Clinchfield  Railroad  to  abandon  this  line,  holding 
that  feldspar  and  other  mineral  products  in  the  area  were 
essential.  The  railroad  showed  that  the  line  was  losing  money 
and  that  because  of  the  condition  of  the  roadbed  trains  cannot 
operate  safely  more  than  ten  miles  an  hour  or  more  than  five 
miles  an  hour  across  the  Kona  Bridge.  The  road  as  junk  would 
be  worth  about  $40,500. 


CLINCHFIELD  RAILROAD  CO. 
Erwin,  Tenn. 

Clinchfield  Railroad  Co.,  Erwin,  Tenn.,  operating  116  miles 
through  four  North  Carolina  counties,  extends  from  Elkhorn 
City,  Ky.,  to  Spartanburg,  S.  C,  is  said  to  be  one  of  the  best 
constructed  railroads  in  North  Carolina  even  chough  teams 
and  wagons  hauled  most  of  the  dirt  and  rock  from  cuts  into 
fills  in  its  winding  and  tortuous  courses  over  mountain  streams 
and  through  tunnels. 


Ownership  and  operation  of  this  railroad  is  almost  as  com 
plicated  as  the  rugged  terrain  through  which  it  passes.  Orig 
inally  the  companies  were  the  Clinchfield  Railroad  of  Kentucky 
the  Carolina  and  Clinchfield  Railroad  of  South  Carolina  and 
the  Carolina,  Clinchfield  and  Ohio  Railroad  Co.,  which  owns 
all  of  the  mileage  in  North  Carolina.  These  three  firms  ope 
rate  under  the  name  of  Carolina,  Clinchfield  and  Ohio  Railroad 
and  the  line  is  leased  to  the  Clinchfield  Railroad  Co.,  which  is 
owned  jointly  by  the  Louisville  and  Nashville  Railroad  and 
the  Atlantic  Coast  Line  Railroad. 

The  road  was  started  in  1905  at  Spruce  Pine,  the  first  trains 
were  operated  to  Marion  in  1908  and  the  first  through  trains 
to  Spartanburg  in  1910.  In  the  20  miles  from  Spruce  Pine 
to  Marion  trains  pass  through  17  tunnels  from  a  few  hundred 
feet  to  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  length.  In  this  20  miles 
the  road  descends  more  than  1,000  feet.  In  this  area,  one 
stretch  of  the  road  cost  as  much  as  $1,000,000  a  mile  and  iv. 
parts  of  the  construction  more  than  3,000  laborers  and  20C 
mules  were  at  work  at  one  time.  Construction  crews  werej 
made  up  of  several  different  nationalities,  including  Italians.; 
Germans,  Russians  and  Negroes.  Clashes  among  these  ele- 
ments were  frequent  and  furious. 

A  recent  report  showed  51  steam  and  27  diesel  locomotives 
with  6,950  freight  cars.  Operations  almost  entirely  are  in  han- 
dling freight  although  one  passenger  train  completes  a  round 
trip  in  two  days — down  one  day  and  back  the  next. 


Seaboard  Air  Line's  System  Started  With  Short  N.  C.  Lines 

By  C.  E.  Bell,  Vice-President  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railrood  Co. 

North  Carolina  was  the  goal  of  the  very  first  line 
of  railroad  constructed  by  what  is  today  the  Sea- 
board Air  Line  Railroad  Co.  The  first  steam  railroad 
on  the  North  American  continent  had  scarcely  got- 
ten into  regular  operation  when  a  group  of  men  be- 
gan to  lay  plans  for  a  rail  line  to  reach  from  Weldon, 
on  the  Roanoke  River,  to  Portsmouth,  Virginia. 
Those  plans  culminated  in  the  incorporation  in  1832 
of  The  Portsmouth  and  Roanoke  Railroad  Co.,  whose 
79-mile  line  would  provide  a  new  outlet  for  the  pro- 
duction of  the  rich  Roanoke  River  Valley  and  give 
that  area  a  direct  connection  with  the  Hampton 
Roads  ports. 

That  line  was  the  forerunner  and  the  first  segment 
of  the  Seaboard  system  which  today  spreads  its 
4,080-mile  network  throughout  the  Carolinas,  Vir- 
ginia, Georgia,  Florida  and  Alabama.  Eighteen 
miles  of  that  earliest  line  lay  within  North  Carolina, 
but  today  the  Seaboard  counts  630  miles  of  main 
line  in  the  Old  North  State,  with  a  north-south  line 
reaching  through  Raleigh  and  an  east-west  line 
stretching  from  Wilmington,  on  the  Atlantic  Ocean, 
to  Rutherfordton,  in  the  Blue  Ridge  Mountains. 

Almost  simultaneously  with  the  completion  of  the 
line  into  Weldon,  in  1836,  another  was  being  under- 
taken. Starting  at  the  now  abandoned  town  of  Gas- 
ton, surveyors  projected  a  route  to  Raleigh,  and  it 
was  that  railroad — the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  Railroad 
Co. — which  brought  the  first  locomotive  to  the  capi- 
tal. That  event  occurred  on  March  21,  1840,  and  the 
Raleigh  newspapers  of  that  day  carried  vivid  ac- 
counts of  the  jubilation  which  marked  the  occasion. 

Railroading  was  now  definitely  established  in 
North  Carolina  and  the  benefits  which  that  new  form 
of  transportation  brought  to  the  areas  it  touched 
served  as  a  stimulus  for  still  more  construction.  In 
1846  The  Portsmouth  and  Roanoke  Railroad  Co.  be- 
came The  Seaboard  and  Roanoke  Railroad  Co.  and 
by  1853  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  had  built  a  12-mile 
line  from  Gaston  to  Weldon.  Connecting  with  the 
Seaboard  and  Roanoke  at  Weldon,  there  was  now  for 


The  first  centralised  traffic  controlled  system  in  North  Caro 
Una  was  installed  by  the  Seabord.  All  trains  in  controlled  area 
are  spotted  on  lighted  track  outline.  The  dispatcher  flips  a 
finger  throioing  a  switch  miles  away  and  two  trams  jjass  in 
safety. 

the  first  time  unbroken  rail  transportation  from  Ral- 
eigh to  the  Tidewater  ports  of  Virginia. 

Meanwhile,  the  citizens  of  lower  eastern  North 
Carolina  were  bestirring  themselves  to  get  a  railroad 
built  from  Wilmington  to  the  western  part  of  the 
state.  From  their  efforts  came  the  incorporation  in 
1855  of  the  Wilmington,  Charlotte  and  Rutherford 
Railroad  Co.  Getting  to  work  in  earnest,  construc- 
tion was  begun  at  both  Charlotte  and  Navassa,  each 
unit  building  to  the  west.  In  early  1861  the  Char- 
lotte segment  had  reached  Lincolnton,  31  miles  away, 
while  the  crews  working  from  Navassa  had  built  112 
miles  of  railroad  all  the  way  to  Rockingham.  The 
coming  of  war  halted  further  construction,  but  nei- 
ther before  nor  since  that  time  has  a  longer  stretch 
of  straight  track  been  built  in  this  country.  Between 
Wilmington  and  Hamlet  there  is  a  tangent,  78.6  miles 
in  length,  which  is  the  longest  stretch  of  straight 
track  in  America. 

In  1873  the  Legislature  of  North  Carolina  incor- 
porated The  Carolina  Central  Railway  Co.  (later  to 
become  the  Carolina  Central  Railroad  Co.),  grant- 
ing it  authority  to  purchase  the  property  and  fran- 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  139 


ihises  of  the  Wilmington,  Charlotte  and  Rutherford 
Railroad  Co.  as  well  as  authority  to  complete  the 
:onstruction  of  that  railroad  between  Wilmington 
md  Rutherfordton.  With  the  building  of  two  and 
i  half  miles  of  railroad  over  the  two  branches  of 
he  Cape  Fear  River  by  The  Wilmington  Railway 
bridge  Co.  during  1867-1869,  which  connected  Hil- 
on  and  Navassa,  the  Carolina  Central  completed  the 
Vilmington-Rutherford  line  in  1887.  A  five  mile 
ine  from  Ellenboro  to  Caroleen  was  built  in  1895. 

Development  of  the  Chatham  County  coal  fields 
et  in  motion  plans  for  a  railroad  to  reach  that  area 
md,  in  1861,  the  Chatham  Railroad  Company  was 
»rganized.  Some  grading  was  done  by  that  com- 
>any  during  1862-1864,  but  because  of  war  stresses 
onstruction  was  badly  delayed  and  it  was  not  until 
.871  that  a  line  was  completed  from  Raleigh  to  the 
law  River.  In  that  year  the  Chatham  Railroad  be- 
anie the  Raleigh  and  Augusta  Air  Line  Railroad 
]o.,  the  latter  company  taking  over  the  work  then  in 
irogress  by  the  Chatham  and  extending  the  line  on 
outh  to  Hamlet  by  1877.  The  Raleigh  and  Augusta 
,lso  built  from  Hamlet  to  Gibson  in  1884. 

The  pattern  of  the  Seaboard  system  in  North  Caro- 
int  was  now  pretty  well  established  and  there  came  a 
teriod  of  building  extensions  from  the  existing  lines 
nto  nearby  communities  and  areas. 

First  of  these  was  the  line  from  Franklinton  to 
jouisburg,  which  was  built  in  1884-1885  by  The 
xmisburg  Railroad  Co.  and  leased  to  The  Raleigh 
,nd  Gaston  Railroad  Co.  for  a  period  of  99  years. 

Next  was  the  line  from  Moncure  to  Pittsboro,  built 
>y  the  Pittsboro  Railroad  Co.  in  1885-1887  and  leased 
o  the  Raleigh  and  Augusta  Air  Line  Railroad  Co. 
or  a  period  of  99  years. 

Then  came  construction  in  1887-1888  by  the  Roan- 
ke  and  Tar  River  Railroad  from  Lewiston  to  the 
Virginia  State  Line,  where  connection  was  made 
yith  an  extension  of  the  Seaboard  and  Roanoke.  The 
toanoke  and  Tar  River  Railroad  was  operated  by 
he  Seaboard  and  Roanoke  under  lease. 

This  was  followed  by  the  building  from  Hender- 
on  to  Durham  of  the  Durham  and  Northern  Rail- 
way in  1887-1889.  From  Dickerson,  on  the  Durham 
nd  Northern,  the  Oxford  and  Coast  Line  Railroad 
Kilt  to  Oxford  in  1901-1902. 

Reaching  westward,  The  Georgia,  Carolina  and 
Northern  Railway  Co.  in  1887-1888  built  from  a  con- 
lection  with  the  Carolina  Central  at  Monroe  to  the 
>outh  Carolina  State  Line  and  continued  on  through 
o  Atlanta,   completing   construction   to   the   latter 


The  Silver  Meteor",  crack  Seaboard  train,  the  first  stream- 
liner to  serve  North  Carolina. 


Seaboard's   two  fast  through  freights,   the  Marketer  and  the 
Merchandiser,  pass  near  Hamlet. 

point  in  1892.  That  road  was  leased  in  perpetuity 
to  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  and  the  Seaboard  and 
Roanoke. 

This  was  an  era  of  unprecedented  railroad  expan- 
sion and  the  decade  from  1880  to  1890  witnessed  the 
most  rapid  railroad  expansion  in  the  history  of  this 
country.  It  was  but  natural  that  this  tremendous 
growth  should  stimulate  interest  in  the  consolidation 
of  the  many  small  roads  into  larger  coordinated  units 
for  the  purpose  of  achieving  greater  efficiency  with 
consequent  improved  service  to  the  public. 

On  August  1,  1893,  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  associa- 
tion commenced  the  consolidated  operation  of  five 
companies :  The  Carolina  Central  Railroad  Co.,  The 
Seaboard  and  Roanoke  Railroad  Co.,  The  Raleigh 
and  Gaston  Railroad  Co.,  the  Raleigh  and  Augusta 
Air  Line  Railroad  Co.  and  the  Durham  and  Northern 
Railway  Co.,  including  the  lines  leased  by  those  rail- 
roads. The  properties  brought  together  through  the 
association  comprised  principally  the  lines  from 
Portsmouth  to  Atlanta  and  from  Wilmington  to 
Rutherfordton.  This  was  purely  an  operating  asso- 
ciation and  the  independent  legal  status  of  the  com- 
panies associated  with  it  was  not  affected. 

Then  in  1900,  under  the  direction  of  John  Skelton 
Williams,  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railway  was  formed 
as  a  corporate  entity.  In  addition  to  the  North  Caro- 
lina properties  already  mentioned,  2,000  additional 
miles  of  railroad  in  Virginia,  South  Carolina,  Geor- 
gia, Alabama  and  Florida  were  affiliated  with  the 
Seaboard  and  a  new  major  railroad  system  had  come 
into  being  in  the  South.  Effective  July  1,  1900,  the 
North  Carolina  lines  were  operated  by  the  Seaboard 
by  virtue  of  stock  ownership  and  in  the  course  of  the 
next  few  years  were  merged  into  the  Seaboard  Air 
Line  Railway. 

Still  further  growth  was  in  store  for  the  new  2,600- 
mile  system  and  the  ensuing  years  saw  the  Seaboard 
expand  into  an  ever  larger  network,  eventually  total- 
ing the  4,080  miles  operated  by  the  present-day  Sea- 
board Air  Line  Railroad  Company.  The  same  pio- 
neering spirit  which  marked  the  building  of  the  early 
lines  continued  to  characterize  the  growing  company. 

Evidence  of  the  benefits  of  that  spirit  are  found  in 
the  introduction  by  the  Seaboard  in  its  territory  of 
such  innovations  as  the  first  electric  lighted  passen- 
ger cars,  the  first  air-conditioning  on  passenger 
trains,  the  first  diesel-electric  locomotives  and  the 
first  streamliner. 

Recognizing  from  the  outset  that  its  welfare  and 
that  of  the  territory  it  served  were  closely  bound  to- 
gether, the  Seaboard  became  one  of  the  early  leaders 


PAGE  140 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUKAMER-FALL,   1953 


in  working  for  the  development  of  the  Southeast. 
Through  its  two  specialized  departments — one  for 
agriculture  and  one  for  industry — the  railroad  has 
been  able  to  make  important  contributions  to  the  eco- 
nomic growth  of  the  region.  Working  closely  with 
agricultural  interests,  new  crops  have  been  intro- 
duced and  new  markets  have  been  found  for  estab- 
lished crops,  with  a  resulting  increase  in  farm  in- 
come. At  the  same  time,  hundreds  of  new  industries 
have  been  located  in  communities  along  the  railroad's 
lines  to  utilize  local  products  and  raw  materials,  and 
the  economy  of  the  section  has  been  further  strength- 
ened as  fresh  payrolls  and  greater  purchasing  power 
have  been  added. 

The  freight  carried  by  the  Seaboard  into  and  out 
of  North  Carolina,  as  well  as  between  points  within 
the  state,  is  as  varied  as  the  production  and  consump- 
tion of  the  state  itself.  In  1952,  for  example,  Sea- 
board trains  hauled  about  90,000  carloads  of  freight 
which  had  either  origin  or  destination,  or  sometimes 
both,  in  North  Carolina — in  addition  to  other  thou- 
sands of  cars  which  passed  through  the  state  enroute 
to  other  destinations. 

The  Silver  Meteor,  first  streamliner  to  serve  North 
Carolina  and  now  grown  from  seven  cars  to  a  seven- 
teen-car  train,  still  flashes  daily  through  the  Caro- 
lina countryside.  Two  sister  trains,  The  Silver 
Comet  and  The  Silver  Star,  have  been  added  to  the 


Seaboard's  streamliner  fleet  and  these,  with  such 
trains  as  The  Palmland,  The  Sunland  and  local  trains, 
provide  swift,  economical  and  reliable  passenger 
transportation. 

To  man  the  Seaboard's  operations  in  North  Caro- 
lina, representing  an  apportioned  valuation  of  $37,- 
500,000,  some  3,250  employees  are  stationed  through- 
out the  state,  which  is  almost  one-fifth  of  the  total 
number  of  Seaboard  employees.  Approximately 
$14,000,000  is  paid  annually  to  those  North  Carolina 
employees. 

The  largest  terminal  on  the  Seaboard  is  located  at 
Hamlet,  where  five  principal  lines  converge.  Every 
24  hours  about  3,000  freight  cars  and  600  passenger 
cars  are  handled  through  this  terminal.  At  this 
moment  work  is  under  way  at  Hamlet  on  the  con- 
struction of  new  yard  and  shop  facilities  which  will 
involve  an  expenditure  of  $8,000,000  when  com- 
pleted. 

During  an  association  that  has  lasted  well  over  a 
century,  North  Carolina  and  the  Seaboard  Air  Line 
Railroad  have  grown  together,  expanding  and  gain 
ing  added  strength  as  the  years  passed.  With  the 
same  spirit  of  cooperation  and  mutual  undertaking 
which  has  characterized  that  association,  the  future 
is  bright  with  promise  of  still  greater  achievements 
for  both  the  Old  North  State  and  the  Seaboard. 


Norfolk  Southern  Has  90%  of  Operations  in  North  Carolina 


The  present  Norfolk  Southern  Railway  Co.  was 
originally  chartered  about  the  year  1870  as  the  Eliz- 
abeth City  and  Norfolk  Railroad  Co.  to  build  a  45- 
mile  line  between  those  two  cities.  Since  that  time 
the  road  has  pushed  its  main  line  south westwardly 
through  Washington,  Wilson,  Raleigh  and  on  to 
Charlotte  to  become  one  of  the  "Big  4"  railroads  in 
North  Carolina,  operating  641  miles  of  track  through 
the  rich  agricultural  section  of  northeastern  North 
Carolina  and  through  the  highly  industrialized  Pied- 
mont section  of  the  State. 

The  Norfolk  Southern,  now  a  freight  carrier  ex- 
clusively, has  had  its  ups  and  downs  through  the  80- 
odd  years  of  its  existence,  including  five  or  six  re- 
ceiverships. The  last  receivership  ended  in  1945 
and  since  that  time  this  railroad  has  been  operating 
very  successfully.  In  1947  the  road  started  dieseliz- 
ing  and  by  early  this  year  will  be  completely  diesel- 
ized.  The  last  diesel  engines  are  now  on  order  and 
soon  will  take  the  place  of  all  of  the  steam  engines. 
Freight  equipment  includes  approximately  1,600  cars 
of  which  about  1,000  are  box  cars,  the  others  being 
gondolas,  hoppers,  pulpwood,  flat  and  miscellaneous 
types. 

Although  general  headquarters  of  the  road  are 
located  in  Norfolk,  approximately  90%  of  its  mileage 
is  in  North  Carolina.  Its  total  capitalization  is  about 
$23,000,000.  The  road  has  approximately  1,350  em- 
ployees of  whom  about  80%  are  in  North  Carolina 
and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $4,000,000, 
probably  75%  of  which  is  paid  to  workers  in  this 
State.  Norfolk  Southern  owns  all  of  its  right-of-way 
and  trackage  except  for  41  miles  of  leased  road  from 
Duncan  in  Harnett  County  to  Durham  which  was 
formerly  known  as  the  Durham  and  South  Carolina 
Railroad  Co.     Last  year  the  Norfolk  Southern  had 


Norfolk  Southern  Railway  office  building  in  Raleigh. 

railway  operating  revenues  of  almost  $11,700,000.00. 
Net  income  from  this  gross  amounted  last  year  to 
about  $525,400.00.  The  stock  is  widely  owned.  The 
State  of  North  Carolina  assessed  the  542  miles  sub- 
ject to  taxation  in  this  State  at  a  taxable  value  of 
$7,565,350  in  1952,  or  an  average  of  $13,700.45  for 
each  mile. 

Notable  is  the  fact  that  about  250  miles  of  the 
road's  total  mileage  consists  of  branch  lines,  fingers 
running  out  into  numerous  prosperous  communities 
to  feed  traffic  to  the  main  line  and  to  other  routes. 
At  Norfolk  the  road  has  direct  connections  with 
numerous  railroads  as  well  as  domestic  and  foreign 
ship  lines,  while  at  the  other  end  of  the  line  at  Char- 
lotte connections  are  made  with  other  rail  lines  run- 
ning south  and  west.  In  the  eastern  half  of  the  State 
the  Norfolk  Southern  handles  large  quantities  of 
agricultural  products,  crushed  stone  and  forest  prod- 
ucts.   One  of  the  largest  paper  plants  in  the  country 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  141 


is  located  on  its  tracks  at  Plymouth.  As  the  line 
approaches  Charlotte  it  picks  up  much  of  the  indus- 
trial production  of  the  Piedmont  area. 

The  Carolina  Solite  Co.,  a  subsidiary  of  Southern 
Lightweight  Aggregate  Corp.  of  Richmond,  Va.,  has 
recently  acquired  about  200  acres  of  land  adjoining 
the  Norfolk  Southern  at  Acquadale  in  Stanly  County 
and  constructed  a  multi-mililon  dollar  plant  to  manu- 
facture aggregates  for  building  blocks  known  as 
"Solite".  This  aggregate  is  made  from  "Monroe" 
slate.  It  is  reported  that  this  firm  has  available  on 
its  present  land  holdings  more  than  200  million  cubic 
yards  of  "Monroe"  slate.  The  slate  is  first  crushed 
and  then  heated  at  2200  degrees  at  which  point  it 
swells  and  pops  open  somewhat  like  pop  corn.  It  is 
shipped  in  railroad  "hopper"  cars  in  that  state  to 
manufacturers  of  building  blocks  and  takes  the  place 
of  cinders,  sand,  stone  and  other  aggregates.  It  is 
estimated  that  this  firm  will  eventually  have  a  daily 
output  of  about  40  car  loads  a  day.  This  new  indus- 
try may  turn  out  to  be  only  the  beginning.  The 
whole  area  traversed  by  the  main  line  of  the  Norfolk 
Southern  west  of  Raleigh  is  rich  in  undeveloped  min- 
eral deposits  and  bids  fair  to  become  a  highly  indus- 
trialized section  of  the  State.  This  territory  has  a 
number  of  large  rivers  and  unlimited  electric  power. 

After  the  original  company  was  chartered  the  first 
45  miles  of  track  from  Norfolk  to  Elizabeth  City  was 
placed  in  operation  about  the  year  1881.  Later  that 
^ear  the  track  was  extended  from  Elizabeth  City  to 
Edenton  and  about  the  year  1891  the  road  was  con- 
solidated with  the  Albemarle  and  Pantego  Railroad 
Co.  and  the  name  changed  to  the  Norfolk  &  Southern 
Railroad  Co.  In  that  year  the  road  was  operating 
from  Norfolk  to  Edenton,  73.05  miles,  of  which  50.92 
miles  were  in  North  Carolina.  At  that  time  also  the 
road  was  operating  about  half  a  dozen  steamship 
lines. 

Beginning  about  1882  the  Norfolk  Southern  adopt- 
ed the  policy  of  acquiring  all  of  the  branch  and  main 
line  trackage  over  which  it  operated.  Since  that  time 
it  has  discontinued  a  few  branch  lines  which  did  not 
prove  profitable.  In  1905  the  Norfolk  Southern 
leased  for  99  years  the  Atlantic  and  North  Carolina 
Railroad  extending  from  Goldsboro  to  Morehead 
City,  about  96  miles  long.  Two  or  three  years  later 
the  Norfolk  Southern  built  a  line  from  Morehead 
City  across  Newport  River  to  Beaufort,  a  distance  of 
3.17  miles,  about  half  of  which  consists  of  the  bridge 
across  the  river.  The  purpose  of  this  line  was  to 
reach  the  town  of  Beaufort  and  deep  water  east  of 
Beaufort.  Surveys  were  made  and  right-of-way  ac- 
quired but  abandoned  because  of  financial  reasons. 

In  1935  the  lease  of  the  Atlantic  and  North  Caro- 
lina Railroad  to  the  Norfolk  Southern  was  termi- 
nated. For  about  two  years  thereafter  the  Norfolk 
Southern  operated  the  short  line  between  Beaufort 


M 


■,m* 


SOUTHS M n 


NS  Railioay  through  freight  train  No.  6//  passing  over  Western 
Boulevard  in  Raleigh. 


and  Morehead  City  and  because  it  was  separated 
from  the  rest  of  its  system  application  was  made  to 
the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  for  permission 
to  abandon  this  line.  Beaufort  citizens  organized  the 
Beaufort  and  Morehead  Railroad  Co.  and  purchased 
the  right-of-way,  buildings  and  other  property  for  an 
amount  reported  to  be  around  $12,000.  This  short 
line  had  cost  many  times  the  purchase  price. 

After  the  consolidation  in  1883,  which  formed  a 
nucleus  of  the  present  Norfolk  Southern,  this  rail- 
road acquired  the  Norfolk,  Virginia  Beach  &  South- 
ern Railroad  Co. ;  the  Chesapeake  &  Carolina  Rail- 
road Co.,  and  the  Virginia  &  Carolina  Coast  Railroad 
Co.  In  North  Carolina  it  acquired  the  Washington 
&  Plymouth  Railroad  Co.,  operating  from  Plymouth 
to  Pinetown,  in  1894;  the  Pamlico,  Oriental  &  West- 
ern Railroad  Co.,  14  miles  from  New  Bern  to  Bay- 
boro,  built  in  1896,  and  later  extended  the  line  11 
miles  to  Oriental ;  The  Durham  &  Charlotte  Railroad 
Company,  built  in  1897,  52  miles  long,  extending 
from  Colon  to  Troy;  the  Raleigh  &  Pamlico  Sound 
Railroad  Co.,  extending  from  Chocowinity  to  New 
Bern,  built  in  1898 ;  the  Raleigh  &  Southport  Rail- 
road Co.,  extending  from  Raleigh  to  Fayetteville,  64 
miles  long,  built  by  stages  in  1899,  1902  and  1907; 
the  Sanford  and  Troy  Railroad  Co.,  9  miles  long  from 
Biscoe  to  Troy,  built  in  1902 ;  the  Aberdeen  &  Ashe- 
boro  Railroad  Co.,  58  miles  long  from  Aberdeen  to 
Asheboro,  and  built  from  1896  to  1903. 

Last  year  21  miles  of  this  road,  from  Asheboro  to 
Star,  was  abandoned;  (The  Aberdeen  and  West  End 
Railroad  Co.,  26  miles  long,  was  a  part  of  the  Aber- 
deen and  Asheboro  line.)  The  Carthage  &  Pinehurst 
Railroad  Co.,  11  miles  long,  built  around  1898,  was 
acquired  and  operated  until  1920,  when  it  was  aban- 
doned. A  petition  has  been  presented  to  the  Inter- 
state Commerce  Commission  to  abandon  the  line 
from  Candor  southward  to  Ellerbe.  Under  the  cor- 
porate name  of  Raleigh,  Charlotte  &  Southern  Rail- 
road Co.,  connecting  links  were  built  from  Varina 
to  Colon  and  from  Mt.  Gilead  to  Charlotte  in  1911 
and  1912  and  the  present  through  line  from  Raleigh 
to  Charlotte  began  operations  in  1913.  At  one  time 
this  railroad  formulated  plans  to  acquire  other  rail- 
roads and  build  the  necessary  connecting  links  to 
reach  Florida  but  the  plan  was  not  carried  out  be- 
cause of  financial  reasons.  This  road  has  an  aggres- 
sive management  and  some  of  its  early  dreams  may 
yet  come  true. 

The  main  line  of  the  Norfolk  Southern  entering 
North  Carolina  from  Norfolk,  passes  through  Moy- 
ock,  Snowden,  Camden,  Elizabeth  City,  Hertford, 
Edenton,  across  the  Albemarle  Sound  to  Mackeys, 
Plymouth,  Pinetown,  Washington,  Marsden,  Green- 
ville, Farmville,  Wilson,  Wendell,  Raleigh,  Fuquay- 
Varina,  Duncan,  Colon,  Gulf,  Star,  Mount  Gilead, 
Norwood,  Acquadale,  Oakboro,  Stanfield,  Midland 
and  into  Charlotte.  Branch  lines  are  as  follows : 
From  Pinetown  to  Belhaven ;  from  Marsden  to  New 
Bern  and  from  New  Bern  to  Bayboro ;  from  Fuquay- 
Varina  to  Fayetteville ;  from  Duncan  to  Durham ; 
from  Star  to  Aberdeen,  and  from  Candor  to  Ellerbe. 

For  many  years  the  Norfolk  Southern  had  trouble 
crossing  Albemarle  Sound.  Cars  were  ferried  across 
this  wide  expanse  of  water  from  the  beginning  of  the 
line  toward  Washington  until  1910.  Then  a  railroad 
bridge  five  miles  long  was  completed  at  Mackeys 
Ferry  over  Albemarle  Sound,  said  at  that  time  to 


PAGE  1  42 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,   1  953 


have  been  the  longest  railroad  bridge  over  navigable 
water  in  the  world. 

Norfolk  Southern,  February  1,  1948,  abandoned  all 
passenger  traffic  over  its  line  and  has  since  been  a 
freight  line  entirely.  In  1926  the  Norfolk  Southern 
Bus  Corp.,  a  wholly  owned  subsidiary,  was  organized 
and  started  handling  passengers  from  Norfolk  to 
Virginia  Beach  by  way  of  Cape  Henry.  In  1934  the 
Norfolk  Southern  Bus  Corp.  acquired  the  Virginia 
Beach  Bus  Line  and  the  Coastal  Coach  Lines,  start- 
ing bus  service  to  Eastern  North  Carolina  by  way  of 
Elizabeth  City  and  Edenton.  This  line  operated  over 
463  route  miles ;  had  a  fleet  of  65  vehicles  and  em- 
ployed about  200  drivers  and  other  employees.  Its 
southern  terminal  was  in  Washington,  N.  C.  Busses 
were  run  into  NewT  Bern  and  Wilmington  by  an 
agreement  with  the  Seashore  Transportation  Co. 

The  Carolina  Coach  Co.,  with  headquarters  in  Ral- 
eigh, recently  offered  to  purchase  the  entire  opera- 
tions of  the  Norfolk  Southern  Bus  Corp.  for  a  price 
reported  to  be  approximately  $395,000.  If  the  deal 
goes  through  Carolina  Coach  plans  to  absorb  the 
Norfolk  Southern  bus  line  and  make  readjustments 
to  fit  in  with  its  present  far-flung  operations.  The 
Norfolk  Southern  Railway  Co.  has  thus  discontinued 
handling  passengers  and  is  devoting  all  of  its  activi- 
ties to  handling  freight. 

(Sale  approved  by  ICC  first  week  in  January,    1954.) 

L.  P.  Kennedy,  recently  promoted  from  general 
superintendent  to  resident  vice-president  of  the  Nor- 
folk Southern,  is  the  principal  officer  of  the  company 


having  headquarters  in  North  Carolina.  J.  C.  Poe, 
native  of  Chatham  County,  was  promoted  to  general 
superintendent  to  succeed  Mr.  Kennedy.  The  Raleigh 
vice-president,  who  is  also  a  member  of  the  Board  of 
Directors,  has  been  in  railroad  work  for  almost  45 
years.  He  is  a  native  of  Sampson  County  and  his 
first  job  with  Norfolk  Southern  was  as  agent  at  Fu- 
quay  Springs.  Later  Mr.  Kennedy  served  as  agent 
at  Lillington,  then  became  chief  clerk  to  the  Superin- 
tendent in  Raleigh.  He  then  moved  up  to  train  dis- 
patcher, chief  dispatcher,  trainmaster,  division  sup- 
erintendent for  11  years  and  then  served  as  general 
superintendent  for  18  years,  until  his  promotion  to 
vice-president  last  year. 

Cecil  M.  Self,  of  Norfolk,  a  railroad  man  with  wide 
experience  in  railroad  management  and  formerly 
executive  vice-president  of  the  Norfolk  Southern 
was  elected  president  of  the  railroad  in  March  last 
year.  Other  principal  officers  besides  Mr.  Self,  all 
located  in  Norfolk,  are  J.  C.  Wroton,  vice-president ; 
J.  R.  Pritchard,  vice-president-secretary;  G.  C.  Rev- 
eille, comptroller;  J.  F.  George,  treasurer;  C.  H. 
Ware,  general  traffic  manager ;  M.  C.  Jennette,  chief 
engineer;  and  A.  J.  Winder,  general  solicitor.  E.  E. 
McClure,  Baltimore,  is  chairman  of  the  Board  of 
Directors  and  P.  N.  Selheimer  of  Philadelphia  is 
chairman  of  the  Executive  Committee.  Henry  Oet- 
jen,  New  York,  is  vice-president.  All  of  the  com- 
pany's directors  and  principal  officers  are  also  stock- 
holders. 


Norfolk  and  Western  Operates  Three  Lines  Into  N.Carolina 


The  Norfolk  and  Western  Railway  Co.,  with  head- 
quarters in  Roanoke,  Va.,  operates  three  lines  from 
Virginia  into  North  Carolina,  two  of  them  important 
northern  gateways  and  the  third  unique  among  east- 
ern railroads.  Although  one  of  the  five  Class  I  rail- 
roads operating  in  North  Carolina,  the  Norfolk  and 
Western  has  total  mileage  of  only  111.5  with  157.6 
total  trackage  in  the  State.  However,  it  also  owns 
one-half  interest  with  the  ACL  in  the  Winston-Salem 
Southbound  Railroad. 

The  Norfolk  and  Western  operates  also  in  Virginia, 
West  Virginia,  Ohio,  Maryland  and  Kentucky  and  is 
an  important  artery  in  the  distribution  of  coal  from 
the  important  coal  fields  in  Virginia,  West  Virginia 
and  Kentucky  to  other  sections  of  the  nation.  Its 
entire  road  mileage  in  the  six  states  in  which  it 
operates  is  2,135.    Its  first  predecessor  was  organized 

The  Norfolk  and  Western   engine  terminal  and  yards  in 
Whtsto)i-Kalem . 


in  1836.     The  road  now  has  a  total  investment  in 
transportation  property  of  $475,532,841. 

Back  in  1890  the  N  &  W  was  building  the  last  link 
through  southern  West  Virginia  and  its  completion 
in  1893  made  it  a  major  eastern  East-West  carrier 
with  a  main  line  from  Norfolk  to  Columbus,  Ohio. 
At  the  same  time  this  road  had  acquired  controlling 
interests  in  the  Shenandoah  Valley  Railroad,  giving 
it  a  northern  outlet  at  Hagerstown,  Md.  But  the  road 
still  had  need  for  more  balanced  service  north  and  i 
south.  It  had  no  southern  terminus  except  at  Bristol 
in  the  far  west  of  Virginia.  Within  less  than  a  year 
it  acquired  two  such  outlets  by  leasing  the  Lynchburg 
and  Durham  Railroad  and  the  Roanoke  and  Southern 
Railroad  from  Roanoke  to  Winston-Salem. 

The  Lynchburg  and  Durham  had  been  organized 
in  1887  as  a  successor  to  three  other  never-built 
roads:  the  Lynchburg,  Halifax  and  North  Carolina 
Railroad,  a  projected  narrow  gauge  line  which 
made  surveys;  the  Durham  and  Rox- 
boro  Railroad  and  the  Roxboro  Railroad, 
neither  of  which  even  made  surveys. 
Work  was  started  on  the  line  later  in 
1887  and  completed  three  vears  later  to 
the  day,  September  12,  1890.  The  first 
link  from  Lynchburg  to  Rustburg  was 
completed  in  1888,  the  second  to  South 
Boston  in  1889  and  the  road  reached 
Durham  the  next  year.  As  of  March  1, 
1893,  this  road  was  leased  for  a  period 
of  999  years  by  the  N  &  W  which  also 
acquired  about  21/2  miles  of  Belt  Line 
in  Durham  which  had  been  constructed 


3UMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  143 


;o  various  industrial  plants  by  Broadie  L.  Duke.  This 
-oad  was  built  largely  by  Durham  and  Lynchburg  in- 
lustrial  leaders.  The  entire  line  is  114  miles  long 
with  about  43  V-j  miles  in  North  Carolina. 

Records  reveal  that  in  1891  the  road  was  capital- 
zed  at  $1,933,400  and  had  outstanding  bonds  slightly 
n  excess  of  $2,000,000.  The  railroad  and  necessary 
equipment  cost  almost  $4,000,000.  The  first  full  year 
)f  operation  in  1891  showed  a  deficit  of  about  $8,500. 
\t  that  time  W.  C.  Houston,  Jr.,  Philadelphia,  was 
resident  with  Peter  J.  Otey,  Lynchburg,  and  Julian 
3.  Carr,  Durham,  vice-presidents.  Other  officials 
ived  in  Philadelphia  and  Lynchburg.  Among  the 
lirectors  five  were  in  Philadelphia,  seven  in  Lynch- 
mrg  and  two  in  South  Boston.  The  Durham  direc- 
;ors  were  Julian  S.  Carr,  George  W.  Watts,  L.  A 
y£LYY  and  J.  A.  Long  of  Roxboro. 

The  Roanoke  and  Southern  Railroad  of  Virginia 
was  organized  in  1886  and  the  Roanoke  and  South- 
ern of  North  Carolina  was  organized  early  in  1887. 
ji  June  of  that  year  they  were  consolidated  but  very 
ittle  work  was  done  that  year  in  either  state.  Am- 
ritious  plans  were  to  build  a  road  from  Roanoke 
;hrough  13  North  Carolina  counties  and  into  South 
Carolina.  The  road  was  built  and  equipped  by  the 
Virginia  and  North  Carolina  Construction  Co. 

The  line  was  opened  from  Winston-Salem  to  Mar- 
insville  in  May,  1891,  and  was  extended  on  to  Roan- 
)ke  in  1892.  It  operated  only  a  few  weeks  when  it 
was  leased  March  16,  1892,  to  N  &  W  for  999  years. 
\  report  in  1891  showed  that  the  road,  then  con- 
structed from  Martinsville  to  Winston-Salem  with 
16  miles  in  North  Carolina  and  14  miles  in  Virginia, 
was  capitalized  at  $2,376,450,  that  part  of  the  road 
jost  $924,924  and  mortgage  bonds  at  that  time 
amounted  to  $871,000.  The  operating  surplus  for 
:he  year  ending  June  30,  1891,  was  about  $25,000. 

Officials  of  the  Roanoke  and  Southern  at  that  time 
included  H.  S.  Trout,  Roanoke,  president;  J.  W. 
Fries,  first  vice-president;  C.  H.  Fogle,  treasurer; 
Et.  D.  Lankford,  auditor;  F.  H.  Fries,  general  man- 
ager; A.  Onderdunk,  chief  engineer,  and  George  W. 
Maslin,  general  superintendent,  freight  and  passen- 
ger agent.  All  of  these  officers,  except  the  president, 
lived  in  Winston  and  Salem  (the  towns  not  then  con- 
solidated). The  directors  included  four  in  Roanoke, 
four  in  Martinsville  and  J.  O.  Coan,  Ridgeway,  N.  C. ; 
F.  J.  Stone,  Stoneville,  and  C.  H.  Fogle,  James  A. 
Gray,  J.  E.  Gilmer,  George  W.  Hinshaw  and  J.  W. 
Alspaugh,  all  of  Winston-Salem. 

The  Virginia-Carolina  Railway,  the  third  N  &  W 
line  into  North  Carolina,  winds  from  Abingdon,  Va., 
56  miles  to  Wrest  Jefferson  through  some  of  the  wild- 
est and  most  picturesque  country  to  be  seen  in  the 


Powerful   locomotive  pulls  N   &   W  passenger  train    into   the 
station  at  Winston-Salem. 


Heavy  Norfolk  and  Western  freight  trains  operate  into  three 
North  Carolina  communities. 

eastern  United  States.  The  daily  mixed  train  at 
White  Top,  Va.,  a  mile  or  so  from  the  Carolina  line, 
reaches  the  highest  point  attained  by  any  passenger 
train  east  of  the  Rockies.  The  altitude  at  Track  Side 
is  3,565  feet  and  the  slopes  rise  up  to  peaks  well  over 
a  mile  high  just  north  of  White  Top.  About  22  miles 
of  the  line  is  in  North  Carolina  making  its  way  down 
a  deep  gorge.  When  construction  funds  gave  out, 
the  line  was  still  a  few  miles  short  of  Jefferson,  the 
Ashe  County  seat.  At  the  end  of  the  line  West  Jef- 
ferson grew  up,  now  a  thriving  mountain  commun- 
ity. 

Originally,  this  road  was  organized  as  the  Abing- 
don Coal  and  Iron  Co.  in  the  early  1890s  also  with 
extensive  plans,  most  of  which  never  materialized. 
Reorganized  as  the  Virginia  and  Carolina  Railway, 
it  reached  Damascus,  Va.,  early  in  1900  and  hauled 
heavy  loads  of  virgin  timber  and  extracts.  The  line 
was  gradually  extended  as  lumber  operations  ex- 
panded. It  now  serves  the  small  industrial  towns 
of  Damascus,  Lansing,  Warrensville  and  West  Jef- 
ferson with  daily  freight,  passenger,  mail  and  ex- 
press service.  The  line  actually  came  under  control 
of  N  &  W  late  in  1905  but  continued  to  operate  as  the 
Virginia-Carolina  Railway  until  mid-1919. 

WINSTON-SALEM  SOUTHBOUND 
The   Winston-Salem    Southbound,    owned   jointly 
and  equally  by  the  N  &  W  and  ACL,  was  chartered 
early  in  1905  and  the  line  was  completed  from  Win- 
ston-Salem to  Wadesboro,  95  miles,  in  1911. 

The  company  was  organized  by  a  group  of  Win- 
ston-Salem industrial  and  commercial  leaders  and 
bankers  and  Col.  Francis  H.  Fries  was  its  first  presi- 
dent, serving  until  1907.  His  brother,  Henry  E. 
Fries,  was  elected  president  and  general  manager  at 
that  time  and  served  continuously  until  his  death, 
March  3,  1949,  while  sitting  at  his  desk  in  the  rail- 
road office  in  the  Reynolds  Building,  Winston-Salem. 
Mr.  Fries  was  91  years  old  when  he  died.  C.  McD. 
Davis,  president  of  the  ACL,  was  elected  president 
of  the  road  following  Mr.  Fries'  death.  R.  L.  Smith, 
Roanoke,  Va.,  is  vice-president  and  S.  D.  Hurst,  Jr., 
Wilmington,  is  secretary.  Most  of  the  other  officers 
live  in  Wilmington  except  three  who  are  stationed 
in  Winston-Salem.  They  are  G.  A.  Heinz,  assistant 
secretary;  C.  W.  Russell,  general  superintendent, 
and  J.  H.  Swaim,  traffic  manager.  Craige  &  Craige, 
Winston-Salem,  are  general  attorneys. 

In  addition  to  serving  as  a  connecting  north  and 
south  link  between  the  N  &  W,  in  Winston-Salem  and 


PAGE  144 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195 


the  ACL  at  Wadesboro,  this  road  passes  through  a 
fine  agricultural  and  industrial  section,  tobacco  prod- 
ucts being  one  of  its  principal  commodities.  The 
road  also  has  a  connection  with  Badin  where  a  large 
plant  of  the  Aluminum  Co.  of  America  is  located.  It 
connects  with  the  High  Point,  Thomasville  and  Den- 
ton Railroad  at  High  Rock,  in  addition  to  crossing 
the  Southern  at  Lexington,  connecting  with  the  Yad- 
kin Railroad  at  Whitney,  Albemarle  and  Norwood, 


where  it  also  crosses  the  Southern  and  crosses  th 
Seaboard  Air  Line  at  Wadesboro. 

The  road  is  capitalized  at  $3,000,000  with  $1,245 
000  issued.  It  had  outstanding  mortgage  debt  at  th 
end  of  1952  of  $5,000,000  in  first  mortgage  four  pei 
cent  bonds.  The  unappropriated  earned  surplus  a 
the  end  of  1952  exceeded  $265,000  while  net  revenu 
from  railway  operations  at  the  end  of  that  year  ex 
ceeded  $290,000.  (Mr.  Hurst,  sec,  died  Dec.  21,  1953. 


Many  Independent  Short  Line  Railroads  in  North  Carolina 


ATLANTIC  &  EAST  CAROLINA  RAILWAY  CO. 

Kinston 

Atlantic  &  East  Carolina  Railway  Co.,  Kinston,  is  a  corpora- 
tion which  on  September  1,  1939,  leased  the  old  Atlantic  & 
North  Carolina  Railroad  line  of  95  miles  from  Goldsboro  to 
Morehead  City.  This  line  completed  and  opened  in  1858  and 
known  as  the  "Mullet  Line"  has  had  many  ups  and  downs, 
hut  under  the  new  administration  and  designated  as  the 
"Tobacco  Belt  Route,"  it  has  been  operated  satisfactorily  and 
successfully  during  the  past  14  years. 

The  Atlantic  &  North  Carolina  Railroad  Co.  was  chartered 
in  1853  by  the  same  General  Assembly  which  chartered  the 
North  Carolina  Railroad,  Goldsboro  to  Charlotte,  and  the 
Western  North  Carolina  Railroad  from  Salisbury  to  Asheville 
and  on  to  the  Tennessee  line  with  a  branch  from  Asheville  to 
Murphy.  The  purpose  was  to  connect,  the  Atlantic  Ocean  at 
Beaufort  Harbor  with  lines  at  the  Tennessee  State  line,  with 
roads  pushing  on  westward  from  that  point.  The  A  &  NC 
Road  was  to  go  from  Beaufort  Harbor  to  Goldsboro  by  way  of 
New  Bern  and  Kinston  to  connect  with  the  North  Carolina 
Railroad.  Tapping  the  earlier  Wilmington  and  Weldon  Rail- 
road at  Goldsboro,  it  was  opened  for  the  entire  line  in  1858. 
Cost  of  construction  and  equipment  was  more  than  $2,000,000. 
The  company  was  capitalized  at  $900,000. 

For  many  years  the  A  &  NC  road  operated,  losing  money  more 
of  the  time  than  it  earned  dividends.  After  operation  by  vari- 
ous individuals  and  agencies  the  road  was  leased  to  the  Nor- 
folk Southern  Railway  Co.  in  1905  for  a  period  of  99  years. 
About  two  years  later  the  Norfolk  Southern  built  the  3.17 
mile  track,  about  half  of  it  on  a  bridge  across  the  Newport 
River,  to  Beaufort.  In  1935  Governor  Ehringhaus  arranged 
for  cancellation  of  this  lease  after  30  years  of  operation  by  the 
Norfolk  Southern  on  the  ground  that  the  roadbed,  equipment, 
buildings  and  other  properties  were  not  being  maintained  and 
kept  in  good  condition  as  was  required  in  the  lease. 

The  State  took  over  the  road  and  arranged  for  H.  P.  Crowell 
a  railroad  man  from  Maine,  to  head  the  organization  as  presi- 
dent and  general  manager.  Offices  were  established  at  More 
head  City  with  the  idea  that  port  development  would  help 
increase  traffic  on  the  road.  Still  the  A  &  NC  was  not  making 
money.  Four  years  later  Governor  Hoey  was  seeking  to  lease 
the  road  to  other  railroads  or  to  individual  operators. 

Harry  P.  Edwards,  native  of  Sanford,  who  in  the  younger 
days  was  superintendent  and  later  succeeded  his  father,  W.  J. 
Edwards,  as  general  manager  of  the  Atlantic  &  Western  Rail- 
way Co.,  Sanford,  later  operating  a  railroad  in  Florida,  and 
his  brother-in-law,  Ed  R.  Buchan,  native  of  Manley,  in  Moore 
County,  and  for  20  years  a  banker  in  Sanford,  decided  to  organ- 
ize a  company  and  seek  the  lease.  They  formed  the  Atlantic 
&  East  Carolina  Railway  Co.  and  the  lease  was  arranged. 

The  new  company  agreed  to  pay  a  minimum  of  $G0,500  a 
year  and  additional  amounts  based  on  a  percentage  of  the  road's 
earnings.  When  the  road  was  taken  over,  the  roadbed,  rolling 
stock,  stations  and  other  equipment  were  in  a  deplorable  con- 
dition. Crossties  were  rotten  and  loose  spikes  had  been  pulled 
out  along  the  road.  War  had  broken  out  in  Europe  and  con- 
ditions generally  for  successful  operation  were  poor  indeed. 
The  two  chief  operators  admit  that  between  them  they  had 
practically  no  money.  They  raised  $25,000  to  put  up  as  a  bond. 
Rent  was  due  quarterly.  They  borrowed  money  sufficient  to 
pay  the  quarterly  installment  due.  When  the  third  quarter's 
rent  became  due,  they  were  again  forced  to  raise  $10,000  to 
provide  sufficient  funds  for  this  installment. 

On  top  of  this,  in  the  fall  of  1940,  the  warehouses  in  North 
Carolina  were  ordered  closed  because  of  the  low  prices  being 
paid  for  the  crops — and  tobacco  was  the  chief  commodity  by 
this  road.     When  the  tobacco  markets  were  open  again,  the 


business   from   this   commodity   proved   sufficient   to   tide   th 
road  over  temporarily,  but  conditions  were  still  gloomy. 

By  1941  the  defense  program  was  getting  well  under  wa; 
Camp  Lejeune  was  started  soon  after  and  this  improved  bus 
ness  somewhat.  Soon  afterward  work  began  at  Cherry  Poin 
August  1,  1941.  That  was  the  shot  in  the  arm  that  the  roa 
needed  and  has  since  pumped  much  life  blood  into  its  systen 

During  the  war  period  the  new  operators  continued  passei 
ger  services  with  five  trains  at  times  out  of  Cherry  Point  daib 
In  this  period  special  trains  were  operated  over  the  week-end 
to  haul  Marines  in  and  out  of  Cherry  Point.  This  continue 
for  five  or  six  months  and  since  it  was  not  a  paying  propositioi 
as  only  25  to  50  passengers  were  hauled  daily,  this  specia 
service  was  suspended.  Passenger  service,  with  one  roun 
trip  daily  from  Goldsboro  to  Morehead  City,  was  continue 
until  the  end  of  1949.  At  that  time,  too,  the  Post  Office  D( 
partment  took  away  contracts  for  hauling  the  mails  by  nun 
bers  of  small  short  lines,  among  them  this  road.  No  passenge 
trains  have  been  operated  over  the  road  since  the  end  of  194f 

Because  of  the  deplorable  condition  of  the  roadbed  and  othe 
equipment,  the  State  of  North  Carolina,  owning  72%  of  th 
stock  of  the  railroad,  through  the  directors  of  the  A  &  NC,  pu 
up  $200,000  in  1941  to  buy  crossties  and  as  construction  a 
Cherry  Point  got  underway,  heavier  rails  were  laid.  Becaus 
still  more  funds  were  needed  the  State  provided  another  $200 
000  and  the  Navy  supplied  $440,000  for  the  Marine  Corps 
while  the  railroad  itself  supplied  about  $160,000  for  rebuildin; 
the  road  entirely  in  1943-44.  Thus  a  total  of  approximate^ 
$1,000,000  was  spent  in  putting  the  road  into  good  shape.  Ii 
1949  the  railroad  company  repaid  the  State  the  $400,000  it  ha< 
advanced  and  recently  the  balance  of  the  $440,000  advance) 
by  the  Navy  was  repaid. 

Further  indication  of  the  successful  operation  of  the  road  ii 
shown  in  the  fact  that  the  railroad  company  not  only  paid  tin 
minimum  of  $60,500  to  the  directors  of  the  A  &  NC,  but  the  per 
centage  has  been  sufficient  to  produce  a  gross  income  of  more 
than  $500,000  since  the  operating  company  started  in  1939.  Ii 
spite  of  the  bad  year  or  two  at  the  beginning  the  operator! 
paid  the  A  &  NC  $170,000  in  one  big  year.  As  a  result  o 
bonds,  interests,  rent  and  other  expenditures  had  been  paid  anc 
the  State  had  wiped  out  its  indebtedness  from  the  railroac 
operation. 

When  the  State  Port  Bill  Bond  Issue  of  $7,500,000  was  au 
thorized  by  the  General  Assembly  in  1951,  that  same  Genera 
Assembly  provided  $500,000  to  finish  laying  heavy  rails  or 
part  of  the  A.  &  N.C.  track,  to  buy  two  diesel  engines  and  tc 
reconstruct  a  river  bridge.  Since  that  time  the  operators  hav< 
repaid  $200,000  of  this  amount  to  the  State,  still  owing  $300,000 
Thus,  the  railroad  operators  have  spent  a  gross  of  $1,500,00( 
in  improving  the  road.  Because  of  increased  business  as 
result  of  port  operations  along  with  other  traffic,  the  operators 
hope  to  wipe  out  this  $300,000  indebtedness  by  the  end  of  this 
calendar  year. 

The  A  &  EC  Railway  was  the  first  road  in  the  United  States 
to  become  completely  dieselized.  The  first  diesel  was  pur 
chased  in  1940  and  later  two  small  diesel  electrics  were  pur 
chased.  Still  later  two  big  road  diesels  were  purchased,  the 
road  now  owning  four  road  diesei  engines,  each  capable  oi 
handling  100  cars  on  the  level  tracks  of  the  road.  The  old  coal 
burning  engines,  which  had  been  operated  day  and  night 
hauling  sand,  gravel  and  other  heavy  products,  were  sold  as 
scrap.  In  addition  the  railroad  owns  four  switchers  and  25  to 
30  boxcars  and  gondolas.  Since  tobacco  is  one  of  the  main 
products,  freight  cars  for  this  and  other  commodities  are  fur- 
nished by  the  larger  railroads  on  to  whose  tracks  the  cars  are 
shifted  to  go  to  their  destinations.  Exchanges  of  cars  are 
made  with  the  Southern,  the  ACL  and  the  Norfolk  Southern 


Summer-fall,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  145 


railroads. 

The  A  &  EC  Railway  Co.  has  an  authorized  capital  of  $100,- 
000  with  $30,000  paid  in.  Principal  officers  of  the  firm  are 
H.  P.  Edwards,  New  Bern,  chairman  of  the  board;  Ed.  R. 
Buchan,  Kinston,  president,  and  Mrs.  Patty  C.  Buchan,  his 
wife,  secretary.  Cecil  Moore  is  traffic  manager,  L.  O.  Todd, 
general  auditor  and  treasurer,  and  R.  F.  Maxwell,  Sr.,  is 
general  freight  agent. 

Principal  officers  of  the  operating  company  laugh  with  their 
friends  as  they  recount  their  beginning  in  railroad  operation 
in  1939  on  the  proverbial  shoestring.  They  are  happy  that  the 
day  and  night  work  they  and  their  associates  have  performed 
along  with  the  fine  cooperation  given  them  by  the  State  of 
North  Carolina,  the  Navy  and  the  people  of  Kinston,  where  the 
headquarters  is  located,  have  resulted  in  a  very  successful  ven- 
ture. Mr.  Buchan  gives  credit  to  Mr.  Edwards  as  the  railroad 
man  while  he,  as  a  banker  until  1924  and  interested  in  coal 
mining,  lumbering  and  other  projects  since,  knew  nothing  but 
has  learned  much  about  railroading  in  the  past  14  years. 

The  Marine  Corps  is  now  engaged  in  building  a  30-mile  rail- 
road line  from  Cherry  Point  to  Camp  Lejeune.  This,  the 
officers  feel,  will  be  of  additional  help  to  the  A  &  EC  Railway 
Co.  It  is  possible  that  when  the  line  is  finished  it  will  be 
leased  to  and  operated  by  the  A  &  EC  Railway  Co. 

Note — Recent  negotiations  indicate  the  possibility  that 
the  Southern  Railway  may  acquire  a  lease  on  the  Goldsboro 
to  Morehead  City  line,  owned  by  the  Atlantic  and  North 
Carolina  Railroad  Co.  and  operated  under  lease  by  the  At- 
lantic and  East  Carolina  Railway  Co. 


PIEDMONT  AND  NORTHERN  RAILWAY 

Charlotte 

The  Piedmont  and  Northern  Railway,  Charlotte,  had  its  be- 
ginning in  1910  in  the  organization  by  J.  B.  Duke  and  asso- 
ciates of  the  Piedmont  Traction  Co.,  formed  to  build  an  inter- 
urban  electric  railroad  line  between  Charlotte  and  Gastonia  to 
tie  in  with  the  street  railway  systems  of  the  two  cities.  Con- 
struction began  in  1911  and  the  first  electric  train  was  operated 
between  the  two  cities  in  April,  1912.  Passenger  service  was 
inaugurated  July  4,  1912.  A  branch  line  was  extended  from 
Belmont  Junction  to  Belmont,  a  distance  of  3.19  miles  in  1916, 
giving  total  tracks  of  26.9  miles. 

Also  in  1910  a  charter  was  secured  for  the  Greenville,  Spar- 
tanburg and  Anderson  Railway  in  South  Carolina.  An  electric 
line  from  Belton  to  Anderson,  already  in  operation,  was  pur- 
chased. The  section  of  road  from  Greenville  to  Greenwood 
was  finished  in  1912  and  the  Greenville  to  Spartanburg  section 
was  completed  in  1914,  making  a  total  of  101  miles  in  South 
Carolina.  The  two  separate  sections  in  the  two  states  were 
consolidated  in  1914  into  the  Piedmont  and  Northern. 

At  the  end  of  1953  Piedmont  and  Northern  had  $10,000,000 
in  capital  stock  issued,  with  $8,584,500  outstanding  and  had  a 
corporate  surplus  of  $8,110,000  with  a  credit  balance  of  $7,894,- 
000.  The  company  has  900  stockholders  and  employs  620 
workers,  about  400  of  whom  are  located  in  North  Carolina.  In 
1952  this  short  line  handled  106,000  carloads  of  freight. 

As  indicated,  the  Piedmont  and  Northern  is  a  particularly 
successful  short  line  railroad,  a  condition  which  has  existed 
since  its  beginning.  It  maintains  valuable  exchange  arrange- 
ments with  other  railroads  entering  Charlotte  and  Gastonia 
with  a  very  favorable  short,  haul  division  of  freight  revenue. 


Not  content  with  the  business  that  existed,  officials  of  this 
railroad  have  been  very  active  in  promoting  industries  along 
its  line.  Particularly  successful  have  been  the  efforts  to  de- 
velop a  section  of  121  acres  on  the  Thrift  and  Tuckaseegee 
roads  near  Charlotte.  This  has  been  a  well-ordered  develop- 
ment with  railroad  tracks,  streets,  water,  sewage  and  building 
alignments.  It  now  contains  45  manufacturing  and  distribu- 
tion firms.  With  the  West  Morehead  Street  development  this 
has  become  one  of  the  most  concentrated  business  and  indus- 
try sections  in  the  State.  Naturally  Piedmont  and  Northern 
realizes  splendid  business  in  hauling  for  these  industries. 

Piedmont  and  Northern  has  the  distinction  of  being  the  only 
electric  powered  full-sized  railroad  in  North  Carolina.  It  has 
used  electric  current  supplied  by  Duke  Power  Co.  from  the 
beginning;  however,  the  South  Carolina  Division  has  already 
shifted  to  diesel  locomotives  and  plans  are  to  shift  from  elec- 
tric to  diesel  power  on  the  North  Carolina  Division  in  1954. 
Passenger  service  was  discontinued  in  1951.  The  last  electric 
street  railway  service  disappeared  in  North  Carolina  in  1949, 
when  Gastonia  abandoned  street  car  services. 

Piedmont  and  Northern's  general  offices  are  located  in  the 
Power  Building,  Charlotte,  and  the  downtown  freight  station 
and  terminal  building  is  located  on  Mint  Street.  Principal 
products  handled  are  grain  and  grain  products,  packing  house 
products,  fruits  and  vegetables,  coal  and  coke,  building  mate- 
rial, cotton  and  waste,  textile  products,  sand  and  stone,  auto- 
mobiles, gasoline  and  oil,  fertilizer,  machinery  and  merchan- 
dise. 

Officers  of  the  corporation  are  W.  I.  Rankin,  president; 
George  G.  Allen,  N.  Y.,  and  Norman  A.  Cocke,  vice-presidents; 
L.  R.  Lawson,  vice-president  and  traffic  manager;  J.  C.  Mc- 
Gowan,  secretary;  C.  L.  Taylor,  treasurer  and  general  auditor; 
W.  C.  Parker  and  R.  S.  Hutchison,  assistant  secretaries.  Mem- 
bers of  the  board  of  directors  are  J.  W.  Arrington,  Jr.,  William 
H.  Beattie,  P.  J.  Blythe,  Norman  A.  Cocke,  Frank  Dowd,  R.  G. 
Emery,  A.  G.  Furman,  Jr.,  Ben  E.  Geer,  L.  O.  Hammett,  C.  E. 
Hatch,  C.  B.  Hayes,  R.  E.  Henry,  Allen  F.  Johnson,  W.  P.  Ligon, 
W.  S.  Montgomery,  A.  G.  Myers,  C.  B.  Nichols,  Roger  C.  Peace, 
C.  C.  Pearce,  Jr.,  W.  I.  Rankin,  W.  S.  O'B.  Rcbinson,  Jr.,  J.  C. 
Self,  J.  C.  Self,  Jr.,  H.  R.  Stephenson  and  T.  Frank  Watkins. 


DURHAM  AND   SOUTHERN   RAILWAY 

Durham 

The  Durham  and  Southern  Railway  was  organized  in  1904 
by  Benjamin  N.  Duke,  James  B.  Duke  and  associates.  The 
next  year  this  road  purchased  the  Cape  Fear  and  Northern 
Railroad,  about  36  miles  long,  already  operating  from  Apex 
to  Dunn  via  Varina,  largely  as  a  lumber  road. 

Two  additions  were  made  to  this  line.  A  20-mile  section 
was  built  from  Durham  to  Apex  and  a  two-mile  extension  was 
built  from  Wye,  near  Dunn,  to  Erwin  where  Mr.  Duke  erected 
a  large  plant  of  the  Erwin  Mills  of  Durham.  The  roadbed 
of  the  original  line  was  greatly  improved  and  new  equipment 
added. 

Early  locomotives  were  wood-burners,  the  road  shifting  on 
to  coal-burners,  and  now  diesel  power  will  soon  be  substituted. 


Piedmont  and  Northern  icas  the  only  railroad  operated  in  N.  C. 
by  electric  locomotive.  This  locomotive,  ivith  Duke  Power  Co. 
generator  near  Mount  Holly  in  background,  gave  way  to  a 
diesel  as  W53  ended. 


This  is  a  freight  train  operated  between  Durham  and  Dunn- 
Erwin  by  the  Durham,  and  Southern. 


PAGE  1  46 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195j 


In  its  early  days  this  road  handled  large  quantities  of  tobacco, 
cotton  and  lumber  products.  It  continues  to  handle  large 
quantities  of  tobacco  as  well  as  lumber,  coal  and  coke,  farm 
products  and  sand,  gravel  and  stones  for  which  Wake  and  parts 
of  Harnett  County  are  famous.  Last  year  Durham  and  South- 
ern handled  26,254  carloads  of  freight.  In  Durham  the  road 
connects  with  the  Seaboard,  Norfolk  and  Western  and  South- 
ern; at  Apex  it  connects  again  with  the  Seaboard:  at  Varina 
it  crosses  the  Norfolk  Southern  and  at  Dunn  it  connects  with 
the  ACL. 

Recently  Nello  L.  Teer,  Durham,  head  of  a  large  highway 
construction  firm,  and  Charles  S.  Jones,  president  of  the  First 
Securities  Corporation  of  Durham,  bought  the  majority  of 
the  stock  of  the  Durham  and  Southern  from  members  of  the 
Duke  family. 

Durham  and  Southern  has  issued  capital  stock  of  $1  ."50,000. 
At  the  end  of  1952  it  had  a  corporate  surplus  of  $1,484,800, 
with  total  assets  of  $3,260,500.  At  the  same  time  it  had  total 
property  investment  of  $2,360,800.  Gross  operating  revenues 
in  1952  amounted  to  $867,889,  resulting  in  net  income,  after 
expenses,  of  $95,605.     An  average  of  54  workers  is  employed. 

Under  joint  management  with  the  Piedmont  and  Northern, 
the  Durham  and  Southern  has  some  of  the  same  officials,  most 
of  them  in  Charlotte.  W.  I.  Rankin  is  president;  Charles  F. 
Jones,  vice-president  and  secretary;  L.  R.  Lawson,  vice-presi- 
dent and  traffic  manager;  C.  L.  Taylor,  treasurer  and  general 
auditor,  and  E.  J.  Funderburk,  asistant  secretary.  Directors 
are  H.  S.  Boyce,  M.  A.  Briggs,  J.  F.  Burnham,  F.  J.  Daniels, 
George  Watts  Hill,  J.  C.  Hundley,  Charles  F.  Jones,  W.  C. 
Parker,  William  H.  Ruffin,  Nello  L.  Teer,  Jr.,  C.  W.  Tilson 
and  W.  I.  Rankin. 


; 


HIGH  POINT,  THOMASVILLE  &  DENTON  RAILROAD  CO. 

High  Point 

High  Point,  Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad  Co.,  High 
Point,  was  organized  in  1923  for  three  specific  purposes:  to 
take  over  a  bankrupt  railroad  operating  from  High  Point  to 
High  Rock,  to  give  industry  along  this  line  a  satisfactory 
transportation  service  and  to  provide  competition  for  the 
Southern  Railway.  With  a  Kirkman  at  the  helm  for  the  30 
years  since  this  railroad,  only  34  miles  long,  has  achieved  its 
three  aims  and  developed  into  one  of  the  most  succesful  short 
line  roads  in  the  State,  with  an  annual  gross  income  exceeding 
half  a  million  dollars. 

This  railroad  actually  had  its  beginning  before  the  turn  of 
the  century  when  Captain  Milt  Jones,  Thomasville,  established 
a  two  mile  line  to  haul  ore  from  his  mine  at  Glenn  Anna  to 
Thomasville.  The  first  rails  were  said  to  have  been  split 
saplings.  This  road  operated  as  the  Thomasville  and  Glenn 
Anna  Railroad  for  a  few  years  and  was  further  developed  by 
the  North  Carolina  Mining  and  Development  Co.,  chartered 
in  1903,  and  its  name  changed  to  the  Carolina,  Glenn  Anna  and 
Pee  Dee  Railway  and  Development  Co.  in  1905.  In  1907  Dee 
Allen  and  associates  bought  Captain  Jones'  railroad  which  had 
been  extended  from  Thomasville  to  Denton,  21  miles.  This 
new  company,  reorganized  as  the  Carolina  Valley  Railway  Co.. 
took  over  the  railroad  in  1909.  For  a  short  time  the  road  was 
also  owned  by  the  Piedmont  Railway  Co. 

The  Carolina  and  Yadkin  River  Railway  Co.  was  organized 
in  1912  and  purchased  the  road.  This  company  built  the 
section  from  Denton  to  High  Rock  where  it  connected  with 
the  Winston-Salem  Southbound  Railway  and  the  Thomasville 
to  High  Point  section.  The  cost  was  around  $800,000.  The 
line  was  completed  with  through  service  from  High  Point  to 
High  Rock  in  1914  although  the  Thomasville-Denton  stretch  of 
road  was  not  in  good  condition.  This  company  operated  the 
road  until  1922  when  a  receiver  was  appointed  and  the  road 
was  ordered  sold  in  1923. 

At  that  time  O.  A.  Kirkman,  Sr.,  became  interested  in  pre- 
serving and  operating  this  railroad  to  the  extent  of  investing 
$10,000  in  its  stocks.  He  secured  the  backing  of  J~.  Ed  Millis. 
M.  J.  Wrenn  and  other  leaders  living  in  the  area  the  road 
served.  A  meeting  was  held  and  the  High  Point,  Thomasville 
and  Denton  Railroad  Co.  was  organized.  Mr.  Kirkma  i  was 
named  secretary-treasurer  and  become  general  marager  of 
the  road.  Other  officers  elected  were  C.  F.  Tomlinson,  High 
Point,  President;  R.  B.  Terry,  High  Point,  vice-president,  and 
additional  directors  were  J.  Ed  Millis,  High  Point;  B.  I.  Har- 
rison, Denton;  T.  J.  Finch,  Thomasville,  later  succeeded  by 
his  son,  T.  Austin  Finch,  and  also  later  J.  C.  Siceloff  was  added 
to  the  board.  Still  later  Charles  F.  Lambeth,  Thomasville, 
became  a  director. 

The  railroad  was  purchased  at  the  receiver  sale  for  $125,000. 


Indicating  the  interest  of  the  people  along  the  road,  200  sut 
scribed  to  stock  in  the  new  organization. 

Mr.  Kirkman,  with  unusual  ability  and  energy,  set  abau 
rehabilitating  the  road  and  soon  had  it  operating  on  a  payin; 
basis.  He  gathered  around  him  an  able  staff  which  include! 
J.  F.  Cannon,  controller;  I.  Bunn  Dunn  and  Fred  J.  Flagler 
traffic,  and  W.  B.  Varner,  general  superintendent  and  genera 
mechanic.  Mr.  Kirkman  continued  operation  of  the  road  uit'. 
his  death  as  the  result  of  an  automobile  accident  in  1930  whei 
his  son,  O.  Arthur  Kirkman  succeeded  him.  C.  F.  Tomlin^or 
continued  as  president  until  1943  when  he  died  while  presiding 
over  a  meeting  of  the  board  of  directors  of  this  railroad.  H 
was  succeeded  as  president  by  J.  Ed  Millis,  who  had  bson  i 
member  of  the  board  of  directors  from  the  beginning. 

In  the  rehabilitation  process  Mr.  Kirkman  leased  locomotiva; 
from  the  Norfolk  &  Western  Railroad  and  then  purchased  s  c 
ondhand  locomotives.  In  1929  he  purchased  the  first  new  stea1' 
locomotive  owned  by  the  road  and  25  new  boxcars.  Then  ir 
1938  the  road  purchased  two  large  steam  locomotives.  Thcso 
with  two  steam  switchers,  handled  the  business  of  the  r-a: 
until  1944  when  a  44-ton  diesel  was  purchased  for  switchinl 
purposes.  In  1948  the  road  became  completely  dieselized  v/itj 
the  purchase  of  three  70-ton  diesel  units. 

Soon  after  the  High  Point,  Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad 
Co.  was  organized,  in  1924,  only  eight  industries  were  in  opera 
tion  along  this  line.  A  big  industrial  development  started  soor 
afterward  and  by  1946  industries  served  had  reached  96.  A1 
present  the  railroad  serves  136  industries,  many  of  them  large 
including  furniture,  hosiery,  textiles  and  a  variety  of  other 
activities.  The  railroad  now  handles  an  average  of  10,350  cars 
or  an  average  of  around  335,000  tons  of  freight  annually 
Among  the  incoming  products  are  wheat,  corn,  oats  and  other 
grains  for  mills  along  the  line,  baled  cotton,  fruits  and  pro 
duce,  packing  house  products,  coal,  sand,  gravel,  cement,  stone 
and  other  building  materials;  veneer  logs,  veneers  and  lurn 
ber;  petroleum,  liquid  gases  and  chemicals.  Outgoing  the 
road  hauls  furniture,  crating,  veneer  and  plywood,  brick,  paper 
products,  scrap  paper  and  rags,  textiles,  including  hosiery 
trucks  and  bodies,  scrap  iron,  wooden  and  fiber  containers 
and  numerous  other  items  produced  along  its  line. 

High  Point,  Thomasville  and  Denton  Railroad  Co.  is  cap 
italized  at  $218,000  and  is  one  of  the  few  railroads  that  has 
no  indebtedness.  It  employs  about  100  workers  and  has  ai 
annual  payroll  of  around  $275,000.  During  most  of  the  30 
years  it  has  paid  satisfactory  dividends  to  its  numerous  stock- 
holders. During  most  of  this  period  its  fortunes  have  followed 
very  closely  the  national  index  of  financial  conditions.  Through 
its  efforts  to  maintain  competition  for  the  Southern  Railway 
it  has  direct  connection  with  the  Winston-Salem  Southbound 
Railway  at  High  Rock  and  through  it  to  the  Atlantic  Coast 
Line,  Norfolk  and  Western  and  Seaboard  railroads.  It  also 
maintains  interchange  arrangements  with  the  Southern  Rail 
way. 

Present  officers  of  this  railroad  are  J.  Ed  Millis.  High  Point, 
president;  Doak  Finch,  Thomasville,  vice-president;  O.  Arthur 
Kirkman,  executive  vice-president,  secretary-treasurer  and  gen- 
eral manager  since  1930;  J.  B.  Lovelace,  assistant  secretary 
and  general  counsel;  R.  G.  Calicutt,  comptroller  and  purchas- 
ing agent,  and  L.  B.  Dutton,  general  superintendent.  Present 
directors,  in  addition  to  Mr.  Millis,  Mr.  Finch  and  Mr.  Kirk- 
man, are  J.  C.  Siceloff,  W.  T.  Powell  and  Baxter  Carter. 

Mr.  Kirkman  did  not  start  in  the  footsteps  of  his  father. 
He  had  traveled  extensively,  had  studied  law  and  had  begun 
practice  in  High  Point.  When  his  lather  died,  he  was  induced 
to  take  up  where  his  father  had  left  off  and  the  confidence  i  \ 
him  has  been  amply  justified.  He  has  represented  hi^  county 
in  the  general  assembly  twice  and  is  now  its  State  Senator 
He  is  a  member  of  the  board  of  the  American  Short  Line  Rail- 
road Association  and  has  served  as  an  industry  membsr  of  th? 
Government  Railroad  Advisory  Board  during  and  since  World 
War  II.  During  that  recent  conflict  he  was  sent  to  Puerto 
Rico  to  direct  and  revise  an  important  railroad  in  that  island. 
Previously  he  was  vice-chairman  of  the  Short  Line  Railroad 
Association  in  North  Carolina  and  when  that  body  was  re- 
organized as  the  North  Carolina  Railroad  Association,  January 
1,  1952,  he  became  and  continues  as  vice-chairman  of  its  exec- 
utive committee.  Mr.  Kirkman  continues  as  an  active  member 
and  official  of  numbers  of  civic,  welfare,  religious,  educational 
and  other  local  and  state-wide  organizations. 


ABERDEEN  &  ROCKFISH  RAILROAD  CO. 

Aberdeen 

The  Aberdeen  &  Rockfish  Railroad  Co.,  operating  a  line  45 
miles  long  from  Aberdeen  (formerly  Blue's  Crossing)  to  Fay- 


SUMMER-FALL,  1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  147 


stteville,  is  probably  the  most  publicized  railroad  in  the  entire 
jpuntry;  at  least  to  the  extent  that  the  Interstate  Commerce 
Commission  can  publicize  a  railroad.  Because  it  is  No.  1  in 
he  alphabetical  list  of  railroads  in  the  United  States,  all  ICC 
irders,  rules,  regulations,  letters  or  other  mail  addressed  to 
ill  of  the  railroads  start  out  with  "Aberdeen  &  Rockfish  Rail- 
road Co.,  et  al". 

This  railroad  was  organized  aid  incorporated  in  3  892  by 
fohn  Blue  of  Aberdeen  as  a  lumbar  road,  built  fr-m  Aberdeen 
Line  miles  southeastward  to  a  lumber  camp.  A  the  timber 
.round  the  end  of  the  line  was  rut  down  and  Irvilsrl  awav, 
he  road  would  be  extended  further  into  the  woods  for  n"w 
amber.  The  road  passed  what  is  the  present  site  of  Ras'lori 
;nd  was  extended  on  to  Rockfish  from  which  it  gets  its  name. 
Irom  Rockfish  it  was  extended  to  Oak  Mills  where  it  connect?;! 
vith  ACL.  In  1912  the  road  was  extended  the  few  miles  from 
tockfish  to  Payetteville,  thus  changing  it  from  private  lumber 
oad  to  a  common  carrier.  About  this  time  the  part  of  the 
ine  from  Rockfish  to  Hope  Mills  was  abandoned.  Also,  about 
his  time  the  road  was  changed  from  a  narrow  gauge  to  a 
tandard  gauge  railroad.  Later  the  road  was  extended  two 
niles  further  to  the  Gulf  Oil  Terminal  in  Payetteville. 

At  the  beginning,  Aberdeen  &  Rockfish  used  wood-burner 
ocomotives.  A  few  years  later  the  road  started  using  coal 
lurners.  Aberdeen  &  Rockfish,  in  1931,  bought  motor  trucks 
,nd  collected  and  delivered  freight  to  and  from  business 
ilaces,  a  pioneer  in  this  activity.  The  road  now  has  three 
liesel  engines,  the  first  of  which  was  purchased  in  1947.  The 
ast  diesel  added  in  1951  replaced  six  coal  burning  locomotives, 
tegular  passenger  service  was  abandoned  in  1949,  except  for 
landling  special  troop  trains  in  and  out  of  Port  Bragg.  At 
Ikibo  the  road  connects  with  the  Cape  Pear  Railways  which 
perates  within  and  for  a  few  miles  outside  of  the  Fort  Bragg 
eservation.  The  freight  business,  provided  as  a  result  of  the 
perations  at  Fort  Bragg,  adds  measurably  to  the  income  of 
his  railroad. 

Plus  its  three  diesels,  Aberdeen  &  Rockfish  owns  two  ca- 
ooses,  one  flat  car  and  one  tank  car.  In  addition  to  its  con- 
lection  with  the  Cape  Pear  Railway,  it  has  connections  with 
he  Seaboard  Air  Line  and  the  Norfolk  Southern  at  Aberdeen, 
he  Laurinburg  &  Southern  at  Raeford,  and  the  Atlantic  Coast 
nne  and  Norfolk  Southern  at  Fayetteville.  Most  of  the  freight 
3  handled  in  cars  belonging  to  these  and  other  railroads, 
formally  the  train  makes  one  round  trip  daily,  with  extras 
whenever  conditions  require.  It  hauls  tobacco,  gasoline,  feed, 
ement,  slag,  rayon,  coal,  sand,  pulpwood  and  other  items, 
auch  of  it  heading  to  or  coming  from  Port  Bragg.  In  addition 
o  the  45  miles  between  Aberdeen  and  Payetteville,  the  road 
:as  eight  or  ten  miles  in  yard  trackage  and  sidings. 

Aberdeen  and  Rockfish  road  and  equipment  have  a  valuation 
a  the  neighborhood  of  $1,000,000.  The  general  offices  and 
ompany  shops  are  located  at  Aberdeen.  Location  of  the  road 
nd  the  prompt  and  efficient  service  established  by  the  per- 
onnel  is  responsible  for  the  splendid  success  in  operations. 

John  Blue,  founder  of  the  road,  was  succeeded  as  president 
round  1925  by  his  son,  William  A.  Blue,  who  had  been  secre- 
ary  of  the  road  for  many  years.  Henry  Blue  is  vice-president 
nd  general  manager  and  Miss  Louise  Blue  is  secretary.  All  of 
hese  are  children  of  John  Blue,  the  founder.  J.  A.  Bryant 
3  vice-president  and  treasurer;  Forrest  Lockey  is  vice-presi- 
ent  and  assistant  to  the  president;  G.  F.  Dempsey  of  Payette- 
ille,  is  vice-president  in  charge  of  traffic  and  J.  H.  Bishop  of 
Aberdeen,  is  auditor  and  freight  claim  agent.  Mr.  Lockey,  as 
th  District  commissioner,  is  a  member  of  the  N.  C.  State 
lighway  and  Public  Works  Commission. 


ALEXANDER  RAILROAD   COMPANY 

Taylorsville 

Alexander  Railroad  Co.,  Taylorsville,  operates  18.59  miles  of 
oad  from  Taylorsville  to  Statesville — a  line  formerly  owned 
nd  operated  by  the  Southern  Railway  but  now  belonging  to 
0  stockholders,  practically  all  of  Alexander  County.  Formerly 
:nown  as  "The  June  Bug  Line"  the  train  now  is  designated  as 
The  Apple  Blossom  Special",  going  south,  but  on  the  return 
rip  north  it  is  called  "The  Apple  Brandy  Special" — line  forms 
o  the  right. 

This  railroad  line  was  built  in  1876  as  the  Statesville  & 
Vestern  Railroad.  It  was  promoted  by  Statesville  and  Tay- 
orsville  residents,  among  whom  was  Romulus  Z.  Linney, 
'aylorsville,  known  around  the  turn  of  the  century  as  "The 
5ull  of  the  Brushies".  Prior  to  that  period  two  men,  Hidden 
nd  Knight,  had  discovered  a  precious  stone  of  the  emerald 
ype  which  they  named  "Hiddenite"  and  mined  for  a  number 


This  diesel  electric  hauls  the  freight  trains  on  the  Alexander 
Railroad  oetioeen  Statesville  and   Taylorsville. 

of  years.  These  operations  were  in  the  vicinity  of  the  present 
town  of  Hiddenite.  Judge  Linney  is  credited  with  remarking 
while  promoting  the  building  of  the  railroad  that  a  June  bug 
could  carry  away  enough  dust  on  its  wings  from  the  precious 
hiddenite  to  build  the  railroad.  That  is  how  it  became  "The 
June  Bug  Line".  After  operation  for  about  12  years  the  road 
was  leased  in  1888  to  the  Richmond  &  Danville  Railroad  which 
became  the  nucleus  of  the  Southern  Railway.  The  Southern 
took  over  the  lease  in  1894  and  purchased  the  road  in  1895. 

"The  June  Bug  Line"  began  losing  money  a^d  the  Souther  i 
petitioned  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  in  1945  for 
permission  to  abandon  the  road.  It  was  then  that  the  Alex- 
ander County  citizens  bestirred  themselves,  organized  the  com- 
pany and  raised  $50,350,  the  junk  price  of  the  equipment,  and 
purchased  the  road.  The  ICC  extended  the  time  30  days  to 
enable  the  local  people  to  raise  sufficient  funds  to  make  the 
purchase. 

In  its  earlier  days  "The  June  Bug  Line"  made  two  round 
trips  daily  between  Taylorsville  and  Statesville  with  both 
freight  and  passenger  trains.  Passenger  service  was  abandoned 
about  the  time  the  Southern  sought  to  abandon  the  line.  A 
colorful  figure  during  the  period  of  Southern  Railway  opera- 
tion was  Capt.  Hugh  Lindsay,  station  agent  at  Taylorsville  for 
20  years  or  more  until  the  time  of  his  last  illness. 

Local  citizens  had  a  hard  time  raising  sufficient  funds  to 
purchase  this  road  even  at  junk  prices.  They  recall  that  J.  W. 
Abernethy,  of  Newton,  a  stock  and  bond  broker,  had  made 
money  out  of  Taylorsville  and  Alexander  County  people 
through  handling  local  bonds.  They  appealed  to  him.  He  not 
only  subscribed  to  $10,000  worth  of  stock,  but  also  secured  ad- 
ditional stock  subscriptions  from  his  industrial  friends,  thus 
supplying  the  required  amount.  They  honored  Mr.  Abernethy 
by  electing  him  president  of  the  Alexander  Railroad  Co. 

But  more  money  was  needed  to  buy  rolling  stock  and  other 
equipment  and  to  improve  the  roadbed.  The  company  raised 
$50,000  for  this  purpose.  For  a  time  the  company  rented  a 
locomotive  from  the  Southern  Railway  and  opened  up  for  ope- 
ration again  in  February,  1946.  The  road  then  purchased  a 
45-ton  diesel  locomotive  from  a  shipyard  in  Washington  for 
$13,000.  This  was  not  satisfactory,  so  in  July  of  that  year 
officials  purchased  a  new  44-ton  diesel  locomotive  which  i  i 
still  in  use.  The  caboose  has  been  fixed  up  for  hauling  express 
and  formerly  mail  from  the  start  of  operations  in  1946  until 
about  two  years  ago  when  the  mail  contract  was  lost.  The 
train  now  making  one  trip  daily  is  made  up  of  the  locomotive, 
the  caboose  and  five  to  ten  freight  cars  belonging  to  larger 
connecting  railroads.  The  Southern  Railway  takes  over  and 
delivers  freight  shipments  at  Empire,  near  the  edge  of  the 
Statesville  city  limits. 

Headquarters  for  the  Alexander  Railroad  Co.  are  located  in 
the  formerly  combined  freight  and  passenger  station  at  Tay- 
lorsville. The  road  has  three  other  stations  located  at  Hid- 
denite, Stony  Point  and  Empire. 

At  Empire  the  railroad  had  an  interesting  experience.  It 
leased  a  site  on  which  the  Empire  Mills  built  a  plant  and 
created  the  Station  of  Empire.  Every  time  the  Alexander 
Railroad  hauls  a  car  from  Empire  to  the  Southern's  track,  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  away,  or  takes  over  and  hauls  a  car  to  this 
mill,  the  little  railroad  receives  a  road  haul  fee  to  this  desig- 
nated Empire  Station. 

When  the  Alexander  Railroad  Co.  was  organized  and  pur- 
chased the  road,  one  important  problem  was  to  find  someone 
to  operate  the  line.  Finally  Lawrence  P.  Zachary  was  selected. 
Mr.  Zachary,  native  of  Durham  and  reared  in  Cooleemee,  N.  C, 
where   his  father  was   general  manager   of  the   Erwin   Mills, 


PAGE  148 


THE  E.  $.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


had  become  a  traveling  salesman  for  a  publishing  firm  at 
Chicago.  He  had  developed  a  splendid  business  and  hesitated 
to  give  up  a  much  larger  income  to  take  the  $5,000  salary  the 
road  could  pay.  He  not  only  took  the  job  as  secretary  and 
treasurer  and  general  manager  but  invested  more  than  §13,000 
of  his  own  money  in  the  enterprise.  He  now  owns  13%  of  the 
stock.  He  had  trouble  recruiting  a  staff  of  helpers,  most  of 
whom  were  like  him — knew  nothing  about  the  operation  of  a 
railroad. 

Finally,  however,  a  train  crew,  a  section  crew  and  agents 
were  trained  and  have  since  operated  the  road  satisfactorily. 
Mr.  Zachary  can  perform  any  function  required  on  his  rail- 
road from  engineer  to  freight  handler.  About  three  years  ago 
his  son,  Samuel  J.  Zachary,  trained  as  an  electrical  engineer, 
was  brought  into  the  firm  and  made  a  railroad  engineer  with 
the  additional  title  of  assistant  secretary-treasurer. 

The  Alexander  Railroad  Co.  employs  normally  11  people 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $30,000.  The  value  of  plant 
and  equipment  is  placed  at  approximately  $125,000.  The  rail- 
road now  has  a  gross  income  of  $60,000  to  $70,000  annually. 
During  the  seven  years  of  operation  the  road  has  paid  divi- 
dends ranging  from  3  %  to  4  %  annually — a  very  satisfactory 
rate  on  the  investment. 

Last  year  the  road  had  its  worst  accident.  Engineer  Sam 
Zachary  was  operating  the  train  on  Mai'ch  27,  1952,  when  he 
ran  into  a  switch  that  apparently  had  been  tampered  with 
The  engine  turned  over  and  was  badly  damaged,  in  addition  to 
damaging  a  sizeable  section  of  the  roadbed.  The  Southern 
Raliway,  which  has  served  as  the  big  brother  to  the  little  line, 
sent  a  wrecking  crew,  carried  the  damaged  engine  to  its  repair 
shop  and  rented  a  locomotive  to  the  short  line  while  repairs 
were  being  made.  The  damage  amounted  to  $21,000,  a  large 
part  of  which  was  covered  by  insurance. 

Officers  elected  by  the  directors  who  had  been  elected  by  the 
80  stockholders  were  and  are  J.  W.  Abernethy,  Newton,  presi- 
dent; C.  K.  Sherrill.  Scott  Stamey  and  Hugh  G.  Mitcheli,  vice- 
presidents;  L.  P.  Zachary,  secretary-treasurer  and  general  man 
ager.  Three  years  ago  S.  J.  Zachary  was  added  as  engin  ,-ev 
and  assistant  secretary-treasurer. 


LAURINBURG  AND  SOUTHERN  RAILROAD  CO. 

Laurinbui'g 

Laurinburg  and  Southern  Railroad  Co.,  operating  from  Johns 
via  Laurinburg  and  Wagram  to  Raeford,  known  as  the  McNair 
Railroad,  was  organized  in  March  1909  by  John  F.  McNair. 
James  A.  Jones,  John  Blue,  and  A.  A.  James.  Mr.  McNair 
served  as  president  until  his  death  and  Mr.  Jones  was  the 
first  secretary. 

The  first  line  built  by  this  company  was  from  Wagram  tT 
Johns,  a  distance  of  18  miles.  N.  G.  Wade  built  the  road  an:l 
D.  M.  Flynn  was  an  early  official.  The  Blues  of  the  Aberde?n 
and  Rockfish  Railroad  had  built  the  road  from  Raeford  to 
Wagram  previously.  Around  November,  1921,  they  sold  this 
road  to  the  Laurinburg  &  Southern  giving  a  total  of  30  miles  of 
line  with  six  or  seven  miles  of  sidings. 

When  the  Laurinburg  and  Southern  line  had  been  completed, 
it  had  paid-in  capital  of  $50,000  and  borrowed  $119,000  by  the 
sale  of  bonds  to  handle  the  finances  of  the  organization.  The 
first  locomotive  was  a  second-hand  steam  locomotive  purchased 
from  the  Atlantic  Coast  Line.  At  one  time  the  road  owned 
four  steam  locomotives.  July  4,  1946  a  44-ton  diesel  locomo- 
tive was  put  in  service.  Now  the  road  owns  two  70-ton  diesels, 
a  caboose,  and  a  flat  car  for  local  use  only.  Freight  cars  han- 
dled are  those  of  connecting  and  outside  railroads.  For  a  time 
the  railroad  operated  passenger  coaches  and  then  operated  a 


mixed  train  with  one  passenger  coach. 

November,  1923,  a  combination  passenger,  mail  and  express 
motor  car  was  purchased.  This  was  operated  on  the  railroad 
until  July  3,  1928,  when  a  bus  was  placed  in  operation  on  the 
highway  to  perform  the  same  services.  Under  N.  C.  State  Law 
a  bus  on  the  highway  must  have  liability  insurance  on  the 
passengers.  The  premiums  on  this  insurance  exceeded  the 
fares  collected,  so  in  1932  the  passenger  service  was  discon- 
tinued, the  bus  was  sold  and  the  mail  and  express  carried  by 
truck.  This  has  now  been  discontinued  and  the  road  is  ope- 
rated in  freight  service  only.  The  road  handles  about  350  to 
400  cars  a  month. 

The  Laurinburg  and  Southern  has  been  on  an  annual  divi- 
dend basis  from  the  beginning,  probably  paying  an  average  of 
6%  or  more  through  its  period  of  operation.  For  several  years 
it  has  had  no  bonded  indebtedness.  The  road  has  about  25 
employees  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $70,000  a 
year.  Among  the  principal  commodities  handled  are  farm 
products,  cotton,  cotton  seed,  melons,  lumber,  fertilizer  and  tex- 
tile products. 

James  L.  McNair  became  president  of  the  road  about  25  years 
ago,  following  the  death  of  his  father,  John  F.  McNair.  C.  E. 
Beman  is  secretary  and  treasurer.  The  board  of  directors  is 
composed  of  these  officials  and  Edwin  Pate.  Halbert  McN.  Jones, 
John  F.  McNair,  Jr.,  and  E.  H.  Evans. 

Old  timers  report  that  in  the  early  days  of  operation  the 
Laurinburg  and  Southern  handled  up  to  50  carloads  of  melons 
a  day,  largely  cantaloupes,  but  with  a  few  cars  of  watermelons. 
During  the  season  the  road  would  handle  as  many  as  1,800 
cars  of  melons. 


ATLANTIC  &  WESTERN  RAILWAY 

Sanford 


CO. 


One  of  the  two  diesel  locomotives  operated  by  the  Laurinburg 
and  Sotithern  Railway. 


Atlantic  &  Western  Railway  Co.  was  organized  in  July  1903, 
by  several  Sanford  citizens  of  whom  W.  J.  Edwards  was  chief 
promoter.  Its  name  at  that  time  was  Atlantic  &  Western 
Railroad  Co.  and  Mr.  Edwards  was  president  and  general  man- 
ager. His  son,  Harry  P.  Edwards,  now  chairman  of  the  board 
and  general  manager  of  the  Atlantic  &  East  Carolina  Railroad 
Co.,  was  superintendent,  later  becoming  general  manager  and 
traffic  manager.     L.  P.  Hatch  was  treasurer. 

The  line  now  extends  from  Sanford  to  Lillington,  a  distance 
of  24  miles,  and  is  owned  almost  entirely  by  Emery  T.  Ussery, 
general  manager  and  secretary,  and  Warren  R.  Williams,  vice- 
president  and  general  counsel. 

One  of  the  first  steps  of  the  company  was  to  issue  $15,000 
in  common  stock  and  $20,000  in  first  mortgage  bonds,  proceeds 
of  which  were  used  to  build  two  miles  of  track  from  Sanford 
to  Jonesboro,  now  the  Jonesboro  Heights  section  of  Sanford. 
This  short  line  was  finished  and  put  in  operation  in  1903.  Two 
years  later  the  common  stock  was  increased  to  $53,400  and 
$100,000  in  first  mortgage  bonds  were  issued  and  sold  to  extend 
the  line  to  Broadway,  a  distance  of  6.18  miles.  This  section 
was  completed  and  put  in  operation  with  additional  equipment 
in  July,  1905.  Soon  afterward  John  Winder,  Raleigh,  was 
elected  president;  H.  P.  Edwards  was  general  manager  and 
traffic  manager,  and  F.  C.  Hatton  of  Roanoke,  Va.,  was  secre 
tary  and  treasurer. 

A  change  in  the  ownership  and  management  came  in  April, 
1912,  when  the  majority  of  the  stocks  and  bonds  were  bought 
by  H.  C.  Huffer,  Jr.,  and  a  Mr.  Middendorf  of  Middendorf,  Wil- 
liams &  Co.,  of  Baltimore,  Md.,  and  new  officers  and  directors 
were  elected.  These  included  H.  C.  Huffer,  Jr.,  son  of  a  promi- 
nent Paris,  France,  banker  (an  American),  president;  B.  W. 
Duer,  vice-president,  and  William  C.  Cooke,  secretary,  both  of 
Baltimore. 

Soon  afterward  the  company  issued  $300,000  in  common 
stock  and  $300,000  in  first  mortgage  bonds  to  complete  and 
extend  the  road  from  Broadway  to  Lillington,  a  distance  of  16 
miles.  This  section  was  completed  and  put  in  operation 
with  additional  equipment,  making  the  entire  line  24  miles 
long,  as  it  is  today.  These  officers  continued  for  several  years 
and  in  1919  N.  A.  Campbell,  New  York,  succeeded  Mr.  Duer, 
deceased,  as  vice-president.  Later  L.  P.  Wilkins  bought  sora? 
of  the  securities  and  also  became  a  vice-president.  W.  R- 
Sullivan  of  New  York  succeeded  Mr.  Cooke  as  secretary  in 
1920.     Mr.  Huffer  continued  as  president  until  in  the  1940s. 

Meanwhile  Emery  T.  Ussery,  native  of  Montgomery  County, 
N.  C,  had  become  station  agent  at  Broadway  in  1912  and  was 
transferred  to  Lillington  as  agent  in  1917.  For  two  years  he 
was  with  the  ACL  and  other  roads,  returning  to  Sanford  in 
1919  as  auditor  of  the  A  &  W  Railway  Co.  and  in  1922  was 
made  assistant  general  manager  to  H.  P.  Edwards.     In  1926-27 


- 


JMMER-FALL,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  149 


esel  locomotive  of  Atlantic  and  Western  swings  freight  cars 
by  lumber  yards  between  Sanford  and  Lillington. 

i  railroad  was  sold  under  a  deed  of  trust  and  the  company 
,s  reorganized.  In  the  years  that  followed  Mr.  Ussery  and 
irren  R.  Williams  acquired  more  and  more  of  the  stock  and 
w  own  control.  They,  with  A.  H.  Mclver,  form  the  board  of 
•ectors. 

Since  1927  the  road  has  made  splendid  progress.  New  in- 
stries  have  developed  along  the  line,  aiding  the  road's  busi- 
ss  and  satisfactory  profits  have  been  realized.  Up  until  1950 
3  road  operated  coal-burning  locomotives.  At  that  time  a 
w  diesel  locomotive  costing  $75,000,  was  purchased  and  three 
am  locomotives  are  to  be  sold  for  scrap.  The  road  has  no 
iight  cars,  using  those  of  other  railroads.  At  Sanford  the 
e  connects  with  the  Seaboard,  Southern  and  ACL:  at  Jones- 
ro  with  the  ACL,  and  at  Lillington  with  the  Norfolk  South- 
l.  This  road  has  played  an  important  part  in  the  develop- 
»nt  of  both  Sanford  and  Lillington  as  well  as  the  fine  farm- 
l  area  through  which  it  passes.  Plans  are  being  made  to 
rchase  another  diesel  locomotive  this  year. 
Passenger  service  was  discontinued  in  1950  and  the  road  now 
ndles  freight  exclusively.  The  Atlantic  &  Western  Railway 
.  properties  are  valued  at  about  $250,000,  principal  items  of 
lich  are  $156,000  in  roadbed  and  $90,000  in  equipment.  In 
dition  to  its  24  miles  it  has  six  miles  of  sidetrack.  The  road 
s  from  25  to  30  employees  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around 
0,000,  practically  all  of  which  goes  to  workers  in  Sanford  and 
llington  and  points  between. 


CAROLINA  SOUTHERN  RAILWAY   CO. 
Windsor 

Carolina  Southern  Railway  Co.,  operating  a  22-mile  road 
)m  Windsor  to  Ahoskie,  is  the  last  of  the  several  names  by 
lich  this  road  has  been  known  since  it  was  first  established 
years  ago.  The  road  has  been  operated  over  different  routes, 
s  had  various  owners  and  even  though  the  terrain  is  level 
d  low,  many  ups  and  downs  have  been  experienced. 
This  railroad  had  its  beginning  in  1887  as  the  Cashie  and 
•anoke  River  Railroad,  built  as  a  logging  road  by  Church, 
ikman  and  Reives.  It  was  then  30  miles  long  with  narrow 
uge  (3  foot)  tracks.  It  then  ran  from  the  County  Home  area 
i  Drew's  Station  to  Lewiston.  Soon  afterward  the  line  was 
rchased  by  the  Branning  Lumber  Co.  and  the  road  was  re- 
ilt  from  Wellington  to  Powellsville  via  Merry  Hill  and 
rrytown.  In  1899  the  capital  was  $90,000  and  the  officers 
;re  J.  W.  Branning,  Edenton,  president;  W.  D.  Pruden,  Eden- 
a,  attorney;    C.   E.   Branning,  Ahoskie,   superintendent,   and 

C.  Henshaw,  Windsor,  freight  agent. 
Before  the  turn  of  the  century  a  new  line  was  built  from 
indsor  to  Ahoskie.     The  company  at  that  time  also  operated 
3oat  line  from  Windsor  to  Plymouth  for  about  20  years.   The 
layflower"  was  burned  around  1920  and  the  line  discontinued. 

1910  much  of  the  stock  was  owned  by  northern  capitalists. 

that  time  Horton  Corwin.  Jr.,  Edenton,  was  president;   W. 

Corwin,  Ahoskie,  superintendent;  W.  D.  Pruden,  Edenton, 
jretary,  and  S.  H.  Halton,  Windsor,  passenger  and  freight 
ent. 

Passenger   service   had   been   inaugurated   in   1898   with   ap- 
opriate     ceremonies,     at     which     the     late     Judge     Francis 

Winston  in  Prince  Albert  and  bow-tie,  officiated.  He  ex- 
sssed  doubt  that  the  shiny,  wood-burning  locomotive  puffing 
'ay  would  make  the  grade.  Later  the  Wellington  and  Pow- 
sville  road  became  by  popular  acclaim  the  "walk  and  push" 
id  because  prankish  boys  frequently  greased  the  tracks.  In 
)se  days  the  road  listed  43  employees. 
En  the  middle   1920s   the   Wellington   and   Powellsville   was 

periencing  serious  difficulties.     The  road  was  placed  in  re- 


ceivership. In  1927  the  present  Carolina  Southern  Railway 
Co.  was  organized  and  incorporated  to  purchase  the  railroad. 
Principal  citizens  interested  in  this  new  company  were  C.  H. 
Pruden,  J.  T.  Stokes  and  others,  as  well  as  Windsor  Town- 
ship. Among  the  officers  then  were  J.  T.  Stokes,  president, 
and  C.  H.  Pruden,  secretary  and  general  manager.  Passenger 
service  had  been  abandoned  in  1926  and  the  road  devoted  its 
energies  to  handling  freight,  consisting  largely  of  peanuts, 
cotton,  tobacco  and  timber,  outgoing,  and  fertilizer  and  various 
farm  equipment  and  supplies,  incoming. 

From  its  early  days  a  Pruden  has  been  connected  with  this 
road,  usually  as  manager.  Soon  after  it  started  operation, 
W.  D.  Pruden  was  attorney  and  later  secretary.  C.  H.  Pruden 
was  active  as  general  manager  until  his  death  about  seven 
years  ago.  His  son,  C.  H.  Pruden,  Jr.,  is  now  active  manager. 
J.  T.  Stokes  is  still  president;  J.  A.  Pritchett,  Windsor  attor- 
ney, vice-president,  and  C.  H.  Pruden,  Jr.,  secretary-treasurer 
and  general  manager.  These  officers  and  Maggie  Pruden,  W. 
R.  Lawrence  and  O.  W.  Hale  form  the  Board  of  Directors.  The 
present  capitalization  is  $49,000  preferred  stock,  held  by  Wind- 
sor Township,  and  $50,000  in  common  stock.  Present,  esti- 
mated value  of  roadbed  and  buildings  is  $50,000.  Annual  gross 
revenue  is  approximately  $125,000  and  no  dividends  have  been 
paid  in  recent  years. 

The  Carolina  Southern  in  1951  purchased  a  70-ton  GE  diesel 
locomotive,  thus  becoming  a  completely  dieselized  road.  How- 
ever, it  still  owns  the  "Mogul",  a  steam  locomotive,  kept  only 
for  standby  needs.  The  roadbed  was  widened  to  standard  gauge 
in  1927  but  kept  a  third  rail  for  a  number  of  years  to  accom- 
modate the  narrow  gauge  equipment.  The  road  continues  to 
operate  one  round  trip  daily,  hauling  in  and  out  the  heavier 
products  needed  and  produced  in  the  area — filling  a  country- 
side need  but  without  the  usual  profits  to  the  owners. 


CLIFFSIDE  RAILROAD   CO. 

Cliffside 

Cliffside  Railroad  Co.,  Cliffside,  operates  a  railroad  built 
from  Cliffside  to  Cliffside  Junction,  a  distance  of  three  miles, 
and  another  line  from  Cliffside  Junction  to  Avondale,  .7  of  a 
mile  long,  both  constructed  for  a  single  purpose — to  get  sup- 
plies in  to  the  two  towns  and  the  two  mills  and  to  get  out  prod- 
ucts of  the  two  mills.  The  company  was  organized  in  1905, 
built  the  road  and  put  it  in  operation  during  that  year. 

The  idea  for  the  Cliffside  Railroad  came  from  B.  D.  Heath, 
prominent  Charlotte  industrialist  and  president  of  Cliffside 
Mills,  who  was  interested  in  a  similar  short  feeder  line  in 
South  Carolina.  The  Cliffside  Mills,  and  the  Town  of  Cliffside 
had  been  founded  and  built  by  R.  R.  Haynes,  starting  in  1899 
in  the  southern  part  of  Rutherford  County.  The  nearest  point 
to  a  railroad  was  three  miles  distant  where  the  Seaboard  Air 
Line  Railroad  passed  through  Rutherford  County.  By  1903 
steps  were  being  taken  to  build  this  road  and  some  preliminary 
work  had  been  done  by  the  Rutherford  Power  Co. 

The  road  was  chartered  in  1905  and  the  stockholders  elected 
B.  D.  Heath,  R.  R.  Haynes,  T.  B.  Lovelace  and  W.  C.  Heath  as 
directors.  These  directors  elected  officers  as  follows:  B.  D. 
Heath,  president;  R.  R.  Haynes,  vice-president  and  treasurer; 
Charles  H.  Haynes,  secretary;  W.  C.  Heath,  general  manager 
and  passenger  agent,  and  the  general  freight  ageit  was  John 
M.  Scott  who  later  was  to  become  president  of  the  Charlotte 
National  Bank,  now  a  branch  of  Wachovia  Bank  &  Trust  Co. 
and  founder  and  president  of  the  wholesale  firm,  Scott  Drug 
Co. 

The  new  company  took  over  the  assets  of  the  Rutherford 
Power  Co.  Arrangements  had  been  made  with  the  Seaboard 
for  enough  rails  to  build  the  three  mile  road  and  for  sidings. 
The  company  purchased  three  coffee-pot  type  locomotives  frcm 
a  secondhand  railroad  equipment  dealer  in  New  York  City. 
These  locomotives  were  built  by  the  Manhattan  Railway  Co. 
and  had  been  used  on  elevated  trains  in  the  early  1890s.  They 
weighed  only  12  to  15  tons.  Three  secondhand  passenger  cars 
were  bought  and  passenger  service  was  started  from  Cliffside 
to  the  Junction  with  the  Seaboard  at  Cliffside  Junction.  Pas- 
senger traffic  in  the  early  days  was  heavy.  Train  crews  were 
recruited  locally  and  due  to  inexperience,  wrecks  and  smash- 
ups  were  frequent  until  the  crews  had  gained  experience. 

In  1916  work  was  started  on  the  Haynes  Mill  at  Avondale  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  Seaboard.  The  Cliffside  Railroad  built 
a  new  line  to  this  mill  and  town  less  than  a  mile  away.  By 
1926  good  roads  and  the  automobile  had  absorbed  most  of  the 
passenger  traffic  and  pasenger  service  was  discontinued.  The 
railroad  now  handles  freight  and  express  only.  Today  this 
railroad  has  two  steam  engines,  one  Baldwin  and  one  Vulcan, 


PAGE  150 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195. 


"Cliffside  Fast  Mail",  operated  by  the  Cliffside  Railroad  around 
the  turn  of  the  century,  picture  dated  1907. 

and  one  freight  car  and  a  caboose  and  express  car  combined, 
formerly  the  baggage  car.  One  round  trip  is  made  daily  on 
both  of  these  short  lines. 

Each  year  Cliffside  Railroad  handles  from  40,000  to  50,000 
tons  of  freight.  Products  received  include  from  175  to  200 
cars  of  coal,  cotton,  starch,  dyestuffs,  machines,  petroleum  prod- 
ucts and  miscellaneous  goods.  Outgoing  freight  consists  pri- 
marily of  products  manufactured  in  the  two  mills,  operated 
since  1952  as  the  Cliffside  Plant  and  the  Haynes  Plant  of  Cone 
Mills  Corp.  These  include  Turkish  towels  and  wash  cloths 
and  corduroys  and  suitings. 

Cliffside  Railroad,  organized  in  1905,  purchased  the  assets 
of  the  Rutherford  Power  Co.  in  the  same  year,  and  began 
operation  with  a  capital  of  $16,000.  A  majority  of  the  stock 
was  bought  by  R.  R.  Haynes  and  family  in  1909.  A  stock 
dividend  of  400  per  cent  was  declared  in  1923  increasing  the 
capital  to  the  present  figure  of  $80,000. 

During  the  year  1931  Cliffside  Mills  purchased  controlling 
interest  in  the  road  from  Charles  H.  Haynes  and  others,  and  in 
the  merger  in  1952  of  Cliffside  Mills  with  Cone  Mills  Corpora- 
tion, the  latter  Corporation  acquired  74  per  cent  of  the  stock 
of  Cliffside  Railroad.  Since  1907  the  company  lias  paid  divi- 
dends each  year  ranging  from  21/2%  to  10%.  The  road  em- 
ploys only  10  people — three  in  the  train  crew,  four  section  men 
and  an  office  force  of  three. 

In  1910  R.  R.  Haynes,  who  supervised  construction  of  the 
railroad  and  who  had  been  vice-president  and  treasurer,  was 
elected  president.  As  such  he  continued  its  operation  until 
his  death  in  1917.  Charles  H.  Haynes,  his  son,  who  had  been 
secretary  since  the  organization,  was  elected  president  to  suc- 
ceed his  father  in  1917,  continuing  until  he  retired  in  1945, 
when  he  was  elected  chairman  of  the  board.  In  1945  M.  Hen- 
drick,  secretary  since  1933,  was  elected  president.  He  served 
until  his  retirement  in  1951.  Present  officers  are  Charles  H. 
Haynes,  chairman  of  the  board;  Earl  R.  Stall,  president;  Ben- 
jamin Cone,  Greensboro,  vice-president,  and  H.  M.  Owens, 
secretary-treasurer. 

Mr.  Owens  joined  the  organization  in  1921  as  agent  at  Cliff- 
side. In  1933  he  was  elected  treasurer  of  the  railroad  and  has 
continued  to  operate  the  line  since  that  time.  In  1953  he  was 
elected  secretary  and  treasurer.  His  principal  assistant  is  R. 
S.  Biggerstaff,  chief  clerk  and  general  utility  man. 


CAPE  FEAR  RAILWAYS,  INC. 

Fort  Bragg 

Cape  Fear  Railways,  Inc.,  is  a  street  car  line  grown  up  into 
a  railroad.  Soon  after  Fort  (Camp)  Bragg  was  established  in 
1918  to  train  soldiers  for  World  War  I,  a  street  car  line  was 
extended  from  Fayetteville  to  Fort  Bragg.  Its  chief  activity 
was  hauling  construction  workers  and  later  military  personnel 
between  Fayetteville  and  the  camp.  This  activity  continued 
until  mid-1926. 

Cape  Fear  Railways  was  organized  and  incorporated  early 
in  1926  and  was  granted  a  Certificate  of  Public  Convenience 
and  Necessity  to  begin  operation  June  30.  A  new  line  was 
built  from  Cain's  Station,  a  point  about  mid-way  between 
Fayetteville  and  Fort  Bragg,  to  Skibo,  a  station  on  the  Aber- 
deen and  Rocklish  Railroad.  The  part  of  the  line  between 
Cain's  Station  and  Fayetteville  was  abandoned  and  junked. 

Early  in  1930  the  U.  S.  military  authorities  leased  all  of 
the  railroad  tracks,  equipment  and  other  holdings  to  the  Cape 


Fear  Railways,  which  took  over  all  of  the  railroad  equipmei 
located  within  the  reservation  of  Fort  Bragg  and  began  oper I 
tion.  Another  Certificate  of  Public  Convenience  and  Necessitl 
was  granted  for  operation  of  that  part  of  the  government  I 
tracks  between  Fort  Bragg,  proper,  and  Fort  Bragg  Junctioil 
the  connection  of  the  government's  li  le  with  the  Atlait I 
Coast  Line  Railroad.  Operation  of  this  line  began  in  Januarl 
1931. 

Main  line  of  the  Cape  Fear  Railways  extends  from  Skibo,  | 
station  on  the  Aberdeen  and  Rockfish  Railroad  to  Fort  BraaJ 
Junction,  a  station  on  the  Atlantic  Coast  Line  Railroad.  Till 
line  handles  all  railroad  freight  coming  out  of  and  going  inll 
Fort  Bragg  from  the  Atlantic  Coast  Luia  aid  the  Ab?rdee 
and  Rockfish  railroads  and  their  connections.  Troop  trair 
in  and  out  are  handled  in  like  manner. 

Cape  Fear  Railways  has  had  its  ups  and  down  in  the  S 
years  of  its  operation.  During  war  times,  when  the  movemei 
of  freight  and  troops  was  heavy,  the  road  prospered  accor< 
ingly;  however,  in  peace  time,  with  limited  freight  and  troc 
movement,  it  has  experienced  extensive  periods  of  low  incom 
In  fact,  for  about  a  year,  during  1937-38,  the  road  was  operate 
by  a  receiver.  In  April,  1938,  the  receivership  was  terminate 
and  the  company  reverted  to  its  former  status.  Under  preset 
conditions  its  operations  are  reasonably  successful. 

Henry  A.  Page,  Jr.,  organized  Cape  Fear  Railways  and  h 
Mrs.  Page  and  their  daughter  owned  practically  all  of  the  stoc: 
Since  Mr.  Page's  death,  the  principal  ownership  is  in  tr 
hands  of  Mrs.  Page  and  daughter,  Mrs.  John  C.  Ostrom.  Mr 
H.  A.  Page,  Jr.,  is  chairman  of  the  board  and  other  princip; 
officers  are  John  C.  Ostrom,  president;  E.  L.  Massei,  Jr.,  vie 
president — operations;  O.  L.  Henry,  vice-president  and  gener; 
counsel;  H.  S.  Jones,  vice-president,  and  C.  Stanley  Major,  se 
retary-treasurer  and  general  auditor. 


WARRENTON  RAIL  ROAD  CO. 
Warrenton 

Warrenton  Rail  Road  Co.,  Warrenton,  is  unique.  It  is  tlm 
miles  long.  It  is  owned  (75%)  by  the  Town  of  Warrento: 
It  connects  the  Town  of  Warrenton  with  the  Seaboard  A 
Line  Railroad  at  Warren  Plains.  It  is  said  to  have  been  at  or 
time  the  greatest  revenue  producer  per  miie  of  any  railroa 
in  the  world. 

The  Warrenton  Rail  Road  Co.  was  chartered  in  1875  but 
was  nine  years  later  before  it  had  been  organized  and  starte 
in  1884.  At  that  time  the  paid  in  capital  was  $13,200,  whic 
included  the  proceeds  from  bonds  issued  by  the  Town  of  Wa 
renton  in  the  sum  of  $9,900  which  represented  75%  of  tr 
capital.  The  remaining  25%  of  the  capital,  $3,300,  was  su 
scribed  by  the  citizens  of  Warrenton.  The  paid-in  capit; 
represented  the  cost  of  construction,  buildings  and  equipmei 
of  the  road.  It  was  built  to  what  was  known  as  Warrento 
Station,  but  because  of  the  confusion  with  Warrenton,  tl 
junction  point  name  was  changed  to  Warren  Plains. 

When  the  Warrenton  Rail  Road  was  first  constructed,  tl: 
tracks  extended  to  within  two  blocks  of  the  courthouse.  Late 
the  company  purchased  six  acres  on  the  edge  of  town  on  whic 
a  station  was  built  in  1907.  That  station  is  still  in  use  bt 
additional  sidings  and  warehouses  were  added  later. 

In  its  earlier  days  the  Warrenton  Rail  Road  handled  man 
passengers,  making  three  round  trips  daily,  early  mornin 
noon  and  evening,  and  frequently  made  special  trips  whenevt 
the  traffic  justified  a  special  run.  Passenger  service  was  late 
cut  to  one  round  trip  daily  at  noon  and  in  1921,  due  to  reduce 
traffic,  pasenger  service  was  suspended  entirely. 

As  now,  the  Warrenton  Rail  Road  has  had  only  one  steal 
engine  which  handled  all  freight  and  passenger  business.  Ui 
til  passenger  service  was  discontinued,  the  road  operated  or 
coach,  one  baggage,  mail  and  express  car.  It  has  never  owne 
freight  cars.  All  of  the  freight  shipped  into  Warrenton  cam 
in  cars  of  other  railroads  and  all  products  shipped  from  Wa 
renton  were  loaded  on  cars  of  other  railroads.  This  road  he 
been  the  economic  lifeline  of  Warrenton  throughout  the  near! 
70  years  of  its  operation.  All  commodities  needed  from  ou 
side  in  building  the  hotel,  business  and  school  property  cam 
in  by  this  line,  as  well  as  all  home  nad  farm  supplies.  Cros 
ties  (the  road  paid  5<f  each  for  the  first  ties  it  used)  wei 
shipped  out  as  well  as  other  products  of  forest  and  farn 
Lumber  shipment  developed  later.  Pulpwood  and  veneer  blocl* 
also  continue  as  important  outgoing  freight.  The  road  hai 
dies  approximately  200  carloads  of  tobacco  in  hogsheads  ai 
nually.  Additional  items  shipped  in  are  fertilizer,  buildiD 
supplies,  coal,  cotton,  farm  machinery,  asphalt  and  stone  an 
various  other  items. 


SUMMER-FALL,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  151 


One  scheduled  round-trip  daily  is  made  in  the  morning  and 
isually  an  extra  trip  is  made  in  the  afternoon. 

Warrenton  Rail  Road  has  had  its  downs  as  well  as  its  ups. 
t  was  not  a  big-  moneymaker  during  its  first  few  years  of 
iperation.  Its  first  engine  was  a  wood  burner;  then  a  coal 
>urner  was  used  for  many  years.  In  1946  the  road  purchased 
i  diesel  electric  45-ton  locomotive  and  can  claim,  with  many 
if  the  larger  railroads,  that  it  is  now  completely  dieseli^?d. 
k.s  "Warrenton  developed  business  increased.  During  several 
'ears  of  the  1910-20  period  the  railroad  paid  100%  dividends 
m  the  original  investment.  Then  in  1920  the  road  dec'ared  a 
00%  stock  dividend — issuing  four  shares  of  stock  to  all  hold- 
rs  of  one  share.  This  increased  the  paid-in  capital  from 
13,200  to  $^6,000  and  has  paid  dividends  of  6%  or  more  since 
hat  time,  with  few  exceptions. 

The  group  which  really  put  the  Warrenton  Rail  Road  in 
iperation  in  1884  was  composed  of  W.  J.  White,  president; 
I  A.  Cook,  Jere  Draper,  W.  J.  Norwood,  J.  C.  McCraw  and  T 
L  Casserly.  directors,  with  Dr.  Joel  G.  King  as  secretary-trca^- 
irer.  Dr.  King  soon  went  on  the  board  of  directors  and  in 
885  J.  M.  Gardner  was  made  secretary-treasurer,  which  po- 
rtion he  held  for  20  years.  He  was  made  president  in  1905 
nd  held  this  position  for  35  years,  resigning  in  1940.  H.  A. 
/loseley,  vice-president,  has  held  this  position  for  about  20 
ears.  J.  Howard  Daniel,  secretary-treasurer,  and  R.  S.  Rod- 
yell,  superintendent  and  agent,  have  held  those  positions 
ince  1940. 

W.  R.  Strickland  is  president  and  general  manager.  He  be- 
anie a  director  in  1940  and  four  years  later  was  promoted  to 
lis  present  position.  Mr.  Strickland  is  a  former  railroadman, 
laving  been  a  fireman  on  the  Norfolk  &  Western  for  several 
ears.  For  many  years  he  was  a  successful  plumbing  and 
teating  contractor  in  Warrenton,  but  has  devoted  most  of  his 
ime  to  handling  the  affairs  of  the  railroad  since  he  became 
iresident  and  general  manager  about  nine  years  ago. 


N  RECEIVERSHIP  30  YEARS — 

TALLULAH  FALLS  RAILWAY  CO. 

Cornelia,  Ga. 

Tallulah  Falls  Railway  Co.,  operating  from  Cornelia,  Ga.,  to 
""ranklin,  N.  C,  has  been  on  paper  for  about  110  years,  during 
idiich  time  it  has  had  numbers  of  names,  numbers  n'-  ovtit  : 
,nd  numbers  of  starts  before  and  since  the  line  was  com- 
ileted  to  Franklin  in  1907. 

First  plans  for  what  has  come  to  be  Tallulah  Falls  Railway 
]o.  were  made  in  1884  when  the  Blue  Ridge  Railroad,  also 
mown  as  the  Blue  Ridge  and  Atlantic  Railway  Co.,  made 
ilans  for  a  direct  route  between  the  Atlantic  Seaboard  and  the 
)hio  River.  Definite  action  began  in  1851  to  build  this  road 
o  connect  the  Greenville  and  Columbia  Railroad  at  Anderson. 
',.  C,  via  Walhalla,  S.  C,  Clayton,  Ga.,  and  Franklin,  N.  C,  to 
Cnoxville,  Tenn.  The  road  was  completed  from  Anderson  to 
Valhalla  during  the  next  few  years  and  the  right-of-way  had 
ieen  secured  and  a  contract  made  to  extend  this  road  to  tb.3 
forth  Carolina  line.  Bridge  abutments,  tunnels  and  grades 
tad  been  80%  completed.  Beginning  of  the  War  Between  thv 
itates  prevented  further  construction. 

Richmond  Terminal  Co.,  soon  after  its  organization  in  1881, 
riade  plans  for  extending  the  Richmond  and  Danville  system 
nd  connecting  up  links  into  Georgia  and  east  Tennessee.  In 
882  it  completed  an  extension  from  Cornelia  via  Clarksville 
o  Tallulah  Falls,  using  the  tracks  of  the  Atlantic  and  Char- 
otte  Air  Line  to  fill  in  a  gap.  After  various  plans,  reversals 
,nd  withdrawal  of  the  Richmond  and  Danville  system  from 
tart  of  the  area,  the  Blue  Ridge  and  Atlantic  Railroad,  operator 
if  the  line,  went  into  receivership. 

Tallulah  Falls  Railway  Co.  was  organized  in  1898,  actually 
,  reorganization  of  the  Blue  Ridge  Railroad.  Efforts  were 
nade  to  build  a  line  from  Franklin,  down  the  Tennessee  Val- 
ey  into  Tennessee,  in  1922.  A  line  was  built,  about  14  miles 
rom  Bushnell  to  Fontana,  completed  in  1908.  The  Southern 
tailway  Co.  acquired  the  stock  in  the  Tallulah  Falls  Railway 
k>.  in  1905  and  extended  the  line  37  miles  to  Franklin,  com- 
pleting it  in  1917.  It  was  operated  as  part  of  the  Southern 
lailway  System  until  1923  when  it  went  into  the  hands  of  a 
eceiver  and  has  operated  under  receivership  during  the  past 
0  years. 

Tallulah  Falls  Railway  has  passed  through  three  cycles,  the 
vood-burner,  the  coal-burner  and  the  diesel  electric,  since  it 
vas  formed  in  1898.  A  brisk  tourist  trade  was  enjoyed  in  the 
arly  1900s  consisting  of  people  traveling  over  the  line  to  see 
rhe  Tallulah  Gorge  and  the  beauties  along  the  line  to  Franklin 
*fow  only  freight  service  is  maintained,  the  principal  commod- 


ity consisting  of  mica  from  the  North  Carolina  mountains,  lum- 
ber, crossties,  pulpwood  and  products  of  industries  along  the 
line.  In  the  58  miles  of  the  road,  14  in  North  Carolina,  are 
43  trestles,  the  highest  of  which  is  96  feet,  giving  evidence  of 
the  ruggedness  of  the  country  through  which  the  railroad 
passes.  General  offices  are  located  in  Cornelia,  Ga.,  and  the 
road  is  operated  by  Mr.  H.  L.  Brewer,  receiver  and  general 
manager,  with  Miss  Clyde  M.  Ellard,  auditor.  The  road  had 
operating  revenue  through  June,  1953,  of  about  $154,000.  Two 
diesel  electric  freight  locomotives  are  operated  and  an  average 
of  85  workers  is  employed. 


BEAUFORT  &  MOREHEAD  RAILROAD   CO. 
Beaufort 

Beaufort  &  Morehead  Railroad  Co.,  Beaufort,  "The  Menhaden 
Line",  one  of  the  shortest  railroads  in  the  State,  has  had  and 
continues  to  have  a  very  colorful  existence  since  the  line  was 
built  in  the  1907-08  period  from  Morehead  to  Beaufort,  a  dis- 
tance of  3.17  miles,  about  half  of  it  on  a  bridge  across  the  New- 
port River.  It  also  has  seven  miles  of  side  tracks  and  spurs, 
serving  fifteen  industries. 

This  road  was  built  by  the  Norfolk  Southern  Railway  Co.  two 
or  three  years  after  it  secured  a  99-year  lease  on  the  Atlantic 
&  North  Carolina  Railroad  from  Goldsboro  to  Morehead  City 
in  1905.  The  extension  of  this  line  gave  needed  railroad  service 
to  the  Town  of  Beaufort  and  surrounding  area.  In  1935  Gov- 
ernor Ehringhaus  broke  the  lease  on  the  Atlantic  &  North 
Carolina  Railroad  on  the  ground  that  the  Norfolk  Southern 
was  not  keeping  the  road  in  proper  repair.  Soon  the  Norfolk 
Southern  petitioned  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  for 
permission  to  abandon  this  short  dangling  line. 

Beaufort  citizens  determined  to  maintain  railroad  communi- 
cation, organized  the  Beaufort  &  Morehead  Railroad  Co.  and 
purchased  this  3.17  miles  from  the  Norfolk  Southern.  These 
citizens,  including  officers  elected,  were  Stanley  Woodland, 
president;  W.  B.  V.  Potter,  vice-president;  C.  R.  Wheatley,  sec- 
retary-treasurer; J.  F.  Duncan,  general  counsel,  and  R.  W. 
Safrit,  superintendent. 

Soon  after  acquiring  the  road,  the  officers  employed  A.  T. 
Leary  as  general  manager.  Mr.  Leary,  a  native  of  the  Albe- 
marle section,  had  railroad  experience  with  the  Norfolk  South- 
ern and  the  Atlantic  &  East  Carolina  Railway  in  all  of  the 
various  departments.  In  1947  Mr.  Leary  leased  the  road  at  a 
basic  rental  of  $3,000  a  year  plus  10%  of  the  gross  revenue 
exceeding  $60,000  a  year.  Mr.  Leary  has  as  other  officials  Miss 
Peggie  Leary,  executive  secretary;  A.  T.  Leary,  Jr.,  auditor 
and  treasurer;  Stanly  Woodland,  traffic  manager,  and  A.  B. 
Vick,  Jr.,  general  agent. 

Indicating  the  success  of  the  operation  of  this  road  is  the 
fact  that  in  1952  gross  earnings  amounted  to  about  $85,000.  In 
the  six  years  since  Mr.  Leary  leased  the  road  the  indebtedness 
involved  in  the  purchase  price  of  $12,000  has  been  paid  off. 
Within  the  last  year  or  two  the  railroad  in  connection  with 
the  Federal  Government  built  a  new  90-foot  span  drawbridge 
over  the  Inland  Waterway.  The  railroad  paid  a  prorata  part 
of  the  $335,000  expended  on  this  drawbridge  and  it  was  turned 
to  the  railroad  for  operation,  the  installation  being  for  the 
benefit  of  inland  water  navigation. 

The  outstanding  stock  of  the  corporation,  most  of  it  repre- 
senting the  original  cost,  is  $15,850. 

Mr.  Leary  and  the  other  officers  of  the  operating  company 
have  about  half  a  dozen  assistants  in  the  operation  of  the  rail- 
road, including  train  crew,  operators  of  feeder  trucks,  main- 
tenance crew  and  other  workers.  He  maintains  splendid 
operational  contacts  with  the  Atlantic  &  East  Carolina  Railroad 
operators  who  give  him  immediate  outside  connectio  i  and 
with  other  railroads  for  which  his  line  is  a  feeder.  Both  Mr. 
Leary  and  his  son  are  experienced  in  all  of  the  jobs  connected 
with  operating  the  railroad  and  either  of  them  may  be  found 
anywhere  as  engineer,  fireman  or  doing  any  other  work  that 
has  to  be  done. 

The  Beaufort  and  Morehead  Railroad  has  one  diesel  engine, 
a  railroad  pile  driver  and  work  cars  and  other  necessary  main- 
tenance equipment,  including  power  tools.  The  road  has  no 
freight  cars,  using  cars  of  other  railroads. 


GRAHAM   COUNTY   RAILROAD    CO. 

Robbinsville 
Topton  on  Southern  Railway  to  Robbinsville,  12  miles; 
principal  products  hauled:  lumber  and  lumber  products,  pulp 
wood,  tanbark,  etc.;  built  in  1924-25,  in  mountainous  terrain, 
John  B.  Veach,  president.  (Special  article  prepared,  not  re- 
turned approved  in  time  for  use.) 


PAGE  1 52 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1953 


MANY  NORTH  CAROLINA  RAILROADS 
ABANDONED  IN  PAST  HALF  CENTURY 

Railroads  in  North  Carolina  have  abandoned  more  than  700 
miles  of  track  since  the  turn  of  the  century,  considerably  more 
miles  than  new  lines  built  in  that  period,  probably  about  500 
miles.  Numbers  of  them  were  logging,  lumber  and  pulpwood 
roads — timber  cleared  out.  Others  were  abandoned  after  good 
roads  were  developed  and  allowed  operation  of  trucks  which 
handled  much  of  the  business.  Petitions  are  now  before  the 
Interstate  Commerce  Commission,  in  a  few  cases,  to  permit 
abandoning  short  lines.  Double  tracking  by  several  larger 
railroads  more  than  make  up  the  difference  between  abandoned 
and  new  mileage,  however. 

Most  of  the  abandoned  railroads,  their  locations  and  approx- 
imate mileage  follow: 

Alma  Railway  Co.,  Alma  to  Rowland,  Robeson  County,  16 
miles. 

Appalachian  Railway  Co.,  Ela  to  Ravensford,  Cherokee 
County,  6.2  miles. 

Asheville  and  East  Tennessee  Railroad,  Newbridge  to  Weav 
erville,  Buncombe  County,  iy2  miles. 

Atlantic  and  Carolina,  Warsaw  to  Kenansville  and  Chinqua- 
pin, Duplin  County,  23  miles. 

Atlantic  Coast  Line,  Fairmont  to  Chadbourn,  Robeson  and 
Columbus  Counties,  22  miles;  Washington  to  Vandemere, 
Beaufort  County,  42  miles;  Goldsboro  to  Smithfield,  Wayne  and 
Johnston  Counties,  30  miles. 

Bonlee  and  Western,  Bonlee  to  Bennett,  Chatham  County,  12 
miles. 

Caldwell  and  Northern,  Warrior  to  Edgemont,  Caldwell 
County,  21  miles. 

Carolina  Railroad,  Kinston  to  Snow  Hill,  Lenoir  and  Greene 
Counties,  14  miles. 

Carolina  and  Northeastern,  Gumberry  to  Jackson  and  Lasker, 
Northampton  County,  16  miles. 

Carolina  and  Northwestern,  Albemarle  to  Norwood,  6  miles. 

Carolina  and  Tennessee  Southern,  Bushnell  to  Fontana, 
Swain  County,  14  miles. 

Carthage  and  Pinehurst,  Carthage  to  Pinehurst,  Moore 
County,  11  miles. 

Cashie  and  Chowan,  log  road.  Bertie  County,  5  miles. 

Dover  and  Southbound,  Dover  to  Richlands,  Jones  and  On- 
slow Counties,  24.4  miles. 

East  Carolina  Railway,  Farmville  to  Hookerton,  Pitt  and 
Greene  Counties,  12  miles. 

East  Tennessee  and  Western  N.  C.  Railroad,  Johnson  City, 
Tenn.,  to  Cranberry  and  Pineola,  Avery  County,  38  N.  C.  miles. 

Elkin  and  Alleghany,  Elkin  to  Doughton,  Surry  and  Wilkes 
Counties,  16  miles. 

French  Broad  Railroad,  Runion  to  Belva  (Little  Laurel), 
Madison  County,  8  miles. 

Kinston  Carolina  Railroad,  Kinston  to  Pink  Hill,  Lenoir 
County,  16  miles. 

Linville  River  Railroad,  Pineola  to  Boone,  Avery  and  Wa- 
tauga Counties,  17  miles. 

Lawndale  Railway,  Lawndale  to  Shelby,  12  miles. 

Moore  Central,  Carthage  to  McConnell,  13  miles,  and  Car- 
thage to  Cameron,  10  miles,  Moore  County. 

New  Hanover  Transit,  Harper's  Pier  on  Cape  Fear  River  to 
Carolina  Beach  (seasonal  commuter  line),  3.5  miles,  New  Han- 
over County. 

Norfolk  Southern,  Edenton  to  Suffolk,  Va.,  40  miles;  Mack- 
ey's  to  Columbia,  23  miles;  Bayboro  to  Oriental,  10  miles; 
Elizabeth  City  to  Beckford  Junction,  25  miles;  Asheboro  to 
Star,  21  miles. 

Ocona  Lufty  Railroad,  Ravenford  to  Beach  Flats,  Cherokee 
County,  10  miles. 

New  Holland,  Higginsport  and  Mount  Vernon  Railroad,  New 
Holland  to  Wenona,  35  miles,  Hyde  and  Washington  Counties. 

Raleigh  and  Charleston,  Lumberton  to  Marion,  S.  C,  20 
miles  in  N.  C. 

Roanoke  Railway,  Thelma  to  Vulture,  Halifax  County,  4 
miles. 

Smoky  Mountain  Railway,  Ritter  to  Bone  Valley,  Swain 
County,  9  miles. 

Southern  Railway,  relocation  of  Murphy  Line  from  Bryson 
City  to  Wesser,  a  few  miles  south  of  former  line  by  Bushnell, 
now  covered  by  Fontana  Lake.  Cost  borne  by  Federal  Govern- 
ment. Line  shorter  by  about  11  miles;  Rosman  to  Lake  Tox- 
away,  Transylvania  County,  9  miles;  Stokesdale  to  Madison, 
Old  CF  &  YV  branch,  Guilford  and  Rockingham  Counties,  12 
miles. 


Tennessee   and   North   Carolina,   Newport,    Tenn.,   to   Crest 
mont,  Haywood  County,  4  miles  in  N.  C. 

Townsville    Railroad,    Manson    to    Townsville,    Warren    and 
Vance  Counties,  10  miles. 

Tuckaseegee  and  Southeastern  Railway,  Sylva  to  East  La  II 
port,  Jackson  County,  10  miles. 

Watauga  and  Yadkin  River  Railroad,  North  Wilkesboro  tell 
Grandin  and  Darby,  Wilkes  and  Caldwell  Counties,  30  miles. 

Wilmington,  Brunswick  and  Southern  (locally  called  Willi 
Be  Some  Day),  Navassa  to  Southport,  Brunswick  County,  35J| 
miles.  !  l 


FIRST  "DIESEL"  LOCOMOTIVE? 

The  Elkin  and  Alleghany  Railroad,  formerly  operated  fronJ 
Elkin  to  Doughton  and  a  few  miles  beyond  up  the  side  of  thejl 
mountain,  was  probably  the  first  railroad  in  the  United  Statesl 
to  use  a  gasoline  powered  locomotive. 

This  railroad,  only  about  16  miles  long,  was  built  in  19111 
with  the  object  of  going  from  Elkin  to  Sparta  and  on  into! 
Virginia.  Chief  promoters  were  Hugh  G.  and  Richard  Mi 
Chatham,  Rufus  A.  and  Robert  L.  Doughton  and  other  promi- 
nent citizens  of  the  two  communities.  John  A.  Mills,  promi- 
nent railroadman  of  Raleigh,  was  elected  president  of  the  road, 
which  was  abandoned  around  1927. 

During  the  period  of  operation  Joseph  S.  Correll,  Raleigh, 
was  general  manager  for  a  few  years.  In  that  period  he  and! 
other  railroad  officials  took  a  Ford  chassis,  used  the  small 
pony  front  wheels  from  a  large  engine  as  the  drive  wheels,! 
rigged  up  a  truck  and  built  a  body  large  enough  to  accommo- 
date 24  passengers,  mail  and  express.  This  was  used  lor  pas-J 
senger  service  instead  of  the  steam  locomotive.  It  made  thel 
trip  at  a  cost  of  about  $2.50,  whereas  the  cost  of  operating  the 
steam  locomotive  on  a  trip  was  about  $75.  This  contraption 
operated  until  passenger  service  was  abandoned.  Incident- 
ally, this  truck  was  built  in  a  shed  used  as  a  repair  shop  and 
was  too  large  to  get  out  the  door.  So  the  front  of  the  shed 
was  torn  out  to  remove  it. 


LAWNDALE-SHELBY  RAILROAD 

Lawndale  Railway  and  Industrial  Co.  was  organized  around  I 
1900  by  John  Schenck  and  Major  F.  A.  Schenck  to  build  and 
operate  a  12  mile  line  of  railroad  from  Lawndale  to  Shelby,  to 
move  products  to  and  from  the  Cleveland  Mills  Co.  at  Lawn- 
dale, owned  and  operated  by  the  Schencks. 

This  was  an  important  short  line  railway  for  30  years  or 
more,  hauling  both  passengers  and  freight.  Because  of  in- 
creased truck  operation  on  good  roads,  business  of  the  road 
declined.  Passenger  service  was  suspended  first  and  then 
around  1933-34  the  line  was  abandoned,  the  tracks  taken  up 
and  the  right-of-way  reverted  to  original  owners.  In  its  place 
the  company  inaugurated  the  use  of  trucks  on  the  highway 
between  these  two  points.  As  of  January  1,  1950,  the  assets 
of  the  truck  line  were  purchased  by  D.  W.  Royster  who  con- 
tinues this  operation. 


CARTHAGE  RAILROAD 

The  Carthage  Railroad,  10  miles,  and  Carthage  to  McConnell, 
13  miles,  abandoned  several  years  ago,  was  organized  in  1886 
and  the  road  was  built  in  1888.  It  was  leased  that  year  to  thejj 
Raleigh  and  Augusta  Air  Line  and  in  1890  the  lease  was  trans-| 
ferred  to  W.  C.  Petty,  of  Manly,  later  a  hotel  operator.  Officers 
in  1890  were  J.  C.  Black,  president;  W.  J.  Adams  (later  Asso- 
ciate Justice,  N.  C.  Supreme  Court),  secretary;  L.  P.  Tyson, 
treasurer;  W.  C.  Petty,  general  manager,  and  Black  and  Adams, 
general  counsel,  all  of  Carthage.  Black,  Tyson,  George  C. 
Graves,  James  D.  Mclver.  A.  H.  McNeill  and  C.  J.  Shaw,  were 
directors. 


LOCOMOTIVE  LEFT  HIGH  AND  DRY 

The  Watauga  and  Yadkin  River  Railroad  Co.,  organized  in 
1911  by  North  Wilkesboro  citizens  and  the  Grandin  Lumbers 
Co.,  operators  in  the  edge  of  Caldwell  County,  and  other  citi-j 
zens  along  the  line,  built  a  road  from  North  Wilkesboro  up 
the  Yadkin  River  for  30-odd  miles  to  Darby  and  Grandin,  with 
a  short  branch  line,  largely  for  the  purpose  of  hauling  lumber 
from  the  mountain  area. 

The  road  operated  until  July,  1916,  when  the  flood  on  the 
Yadkin  River  washed  out  bridges  over  streams  entering  the 
river  and  otherwise  damaged  the  track.  Soon  afterward  the 
damage  was  repaired  and  the  road  resumed  operations.  In 
1918  one  of  the  bridges  collapsed  and  operation  was  abandoned 
definitely.  One  of  the  locomotives  was  left  on  the  tracks  a 
few  miles  west  of  North  Wilkesboro  for  a  year  or  two  before 
it  was  dismantled  and  removed. 


.UMMER-FALL,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  153 


This  is  the  second  in  the  series  of  articles  discussing  employment  con- 
ditions in  leading  North  Carolina  cities.  Winston-Salem  was  selected 
for  this  issue  because  it  is  the  home  of  the  largest  trucking  firm  in  the 
South  and  of  the  only  North  Carolina  aviation  company  granted  the 
right  by  CAB  for  scheduled  passenger,   mail,  express  and  freight  service. 


Highlights  of  Winston-Salem's  Industry  and  Employment 

By  Mrs.  E.  DeKay  Johnson,  State  Labor  Market  Analyst,  Bureau  of  Research  and  Statistics,  ESC 

manufacture  of  tobacco,  textiles,  and  machinery — 
other  manufacturing  is  important  in  the  economy  of 
the  area.  Included  among  these  are:  manufacture 
of  furniture  and  fixtures;  sawmills  and  planing 
plants,  veneer  mills,  and  box  factories ;  food  process- 
ing such  as  bakeries,  dairies,  meat  products,  bever- 
ages, and  grain  mills;  finished  textile  products  such 
as  canvas,  awnings  and  tents,  men's  and  youth's 
overalls  and  dungarees;  gummed  paper,  and  paper- 
board  boxes ;  chemicals  such  as  fertilizer,  glue,  paints, 
pharmaceutical  products  and  toilet  preparations; 
brick,  concrete  products,  and  glass  products ;  pri- 
mary metal  industries;  fabricated  metal  products; 
non-electrical  machinery;  orthopedic  appliances  and 
opthalmic  goods. 

Winston-Salem's  four  largest  firms — representing 
manufacture  of  tobacco,  knit  underwear,  seamless 
hosiery,  telephone  and  telegraph  equipment — ac- 
count for  more  than  half  (16,000-18,500)  of  the 
wage  and  salaried  workers  engaged  in  manufactur- 
ing. In  addition  to  these  there  are  16  firms  which 
employ  from  100  to  500  persons,  112  with  from  50 
to  100,  100  hiring  from  8  to  50,  and  about  100  with 
a  normal  staff  of  not  more  than  7  persons  each. 

Winston-Salem's  nine  tobacco  manufacturers  em- 
ploy from  10,700  to  13,200  depending  on  the  season, 
a  major  portion  being  engaged  in  the  manufacture 
of  cigarettes.  One  firm  though  best  known  as  a  cig- 
arette manufacturer  also  makes  smoking  and  chew- 
ing tobacco,  two  firms  are  primarily  engaged  in  the 
manufacture  of  chewing  and  smoking  tobacco  and 
snuff,  and  six  are  stemming  and  redrying  plants. 
There  are  also  ten  tobacco  auction  warehouses  which 
operate  during  the  time  assigned  to  the  "Old  Bright 
Belt"  (Mid-September— January).  The  18  textile 
mills  hire  from  8,500  to  9,000  persons  of  whom  about 
five-sixths  are  in  the  12  knitting  mills.  There  is 
also  a  yarn  mill,  one  making  narrow  fabrics,  and  two 
engaged  in  dyeing  and  finishing  operations.  Twelve 
firms  manufacturing  machinery  and  electrical  prod- 
ucts employ  from  6,100  to  6,200  persons,  electrical 
goods  accounts  for  the  majority  of  this  employment. 
Non-electrical  machinery  includes  air  conditioning 
equipment,  aluminum  products,  agricultural  machin- 
ery, conveying  systems,  woodworking  and  other  spe- 
cial industrial  machinery.  There  are  also  12  manu- 
facturers of  furniture  hiring  about  1,200  persons. 
Most  of  these  are  producers  of  wood  household  furni- 
ture. Other  manufacturing  industries  which  tend  to 
balance  Winston-Salem's  economy  employ  about 
4,300  persons. 

The  importance  of  non-manufacturing  must  not  be 
overlooked.  Actually  almost  half  of  the  wage  and 
salaried  workers  of  the  Winston-Salem  area  are  so 
engaged  (from  27,800  to  28,900).  Of  these,  about 
28  percent  are  engaged  in  trade.  The  ratio  of  retail 
trade  to  wholesale  is  slightly  in  excess  of  two  to  one. 
While  there  are  a  few  large  stores,  sales  activities 
for  the  most  part  are  conducted  by  small  establish- 
ments. Service  industries  such  as  hotels,  laundries, 
barber  and  beauty  shops,  business  services,  auto  and 
repair  services,  educational  services,  hospitals  and 
other  health  services  regularly  employ  some  7,100 


Winston-Salem,  second  largest  city  in  North  Caro- 
ina,  is  favorably  located  in  the  Piedmont  section  of 
;he  State.  It  forms  the  western  point  of  a  triangle 
}f  large  cities  with  Greensboro  due  east  some  25 
miles  and  High  Point  20  miles  southeast.  About  half 
a  million  people  reside  within  a  25  to  30  mile  radius 
)f  this  city  which  is  centrally  located  in  Forsyth 
3ounty  and  adjacent  to  Stokes,  Guilford,  Davidson, 
Davie,  and  Yadkin  counties. 

From  the  standpoint  of  population  growth  in  the 
1st  decade,  the  recruiting  area  of  Winston-Salem 
las  exceeded  the  rate  of  the  State  and  Nation.  While 
;he  city  itself  had  only  a  10  percent  increase,  For- 
syth County  showed  a  15.5  percent  rise  and  the  ad- 
jacent counties  of  Guilford  and  Davidson  experi- 
enced 24.1  and  16.6  percent  respectively.  It  can  be 
assumed,  therefore,  that  the  potential  labor  supply 
within  the  immediate  recruiting  area  of  Winston- 
Salem  (25  to  30  miles)  has  increased  at  a  greater 
rate  than  that  of  the  State  which  showed  an  average 
population  rise  of  13.7  percent. 

Winston-Salem  firms  employ  well  over  90  percent 
}f  the  persons  engaged  in  nonagricultural  activities 
in  Forsyth  County.  It  is  the  only  city  in  the  county, 
and  persons  of  nearby  towns  find  most  of  their  job 
opportunities  there.  Therefore,  manpower  and  em- 
ployment data  relate  to  the  Standard  Metropolitan 
Area  of  Winston-Salem  which  is  defined  as  the  city 
)f  Winston-Salem  and  Forsyth  County. 

The  number  of  wage  and  salaried  workers  in  the 
area  ranges  from  some  58,800  to  over  62,000  depend- 
ing on  the  season,  while  total  employment  is  from 
39,700  to  73,000.  Time  and  magnitude  of  the  sea- 
sonal changes  are  dictated  by  the  tobacco  industry. 
Seasonal  employment  begins  to  climb  in  July,  reach- 
ing its  peak  in  November  when  some  2,500  additional 
workers  are  employed  in  tobacco  processing.  It  then 
gradually  declines  and  draws  to  a  close  in  the  early 
part  of  the  following  year.  At  the  same  time,  trade 
employment  rises  under  the  combined  impetus  of 
larger  local  payrolls  and  the  oncoming  Christmas 
season.  Its  decline  paralleling  that  of  seasonal  to- 
bacco employment. 

Winston-Salem  is  recognized  as  the  leader  in  to- 
bacco manufacturing.  It  is  advantageously  located 
in  the  State  which  manufactures  over  half  of  the 
Nation's  total  tobacco  products  and  grows  more  than 
two-thirds  of  the  bright  leaf  grown  in  the  United 
States.  Other  industries,  however,  have  become  in- 
creasingly important  in  this  city,  and  now  we  find 
Winston-Salem  ranking  first  in  the  State  in  the  man- 
ufacture of  electrical  equipment,  and  fifth  in  textile 
manufacturing.  Further,  Winston-Salem  ranks  first 
in  two  important  transportation  fields.  It  is  the 
liome  of  the  largest  trucking  firm  in  the  South.  It 
is  also  the  home  of  the  only  North  Carolina  aviation 
company  granted  the  right  by  CAB  for  scheduled 
passenger,  mail,  express  and  freight  service. 

Though  small  when  compared  to  the  "big  three" — 


PAGE  154 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  95 


to  7,300  persons.  Construction,  government,  finance, 
insurance,  and  real  escate  account  for  about  8,500 
workers.  Transportation,  communication,  and  pub- 
lic utilities  hire  another  4,300  to  4,500  persons. 

In  the  last  decade  Winston-Salem  has  seen  the 
dramatic  rise  of  two  firms  engaged  in  transportation 
— one  a  trucking  firm,  the  other  an  air  line.  The 
trucking  firm,  which  moved  to  Winston-Salem  from 
Fayetteville  in  1943  started  in  Red  Springs  with  one 
truck,  one  employee  and  one  terminal,  now  it  has 
2,100  people  employed,  a  nine  million  dollar  payroll 
owns  1,480  pieces  of  equipment,  and  operates  37 
terminals  in  11  States  and  the  District  of  Columbia. 
Its  employment  in  Winston-Salem  is  between  900  and 
1,000  persons — and  it  is  still  growing.  It  has  the 
distinction  of  being  the  largest  motor  freight  com- 
pany with  headquarters  in  tne  South. 

The  air  line,  which  operated  its  first  scheduled  pas- 
senger flight  in  1948  from  Wilmington  to  Louisville, 
had  65  employees  at  that  time  and  owned  five  planes. 
Today  it  has  some  700-750  employees,  payroll  of  $J,- 
300,000.  It  serves  41  communities  in  seven  states, 
and  in  May  of  this  year  it  carried  over  24,400  pas- 
sengers more  than  five  million  passenger  miles.  It 
has  been  called  the  Nation's  leading  local  service  air- 
line, with  only  17  airlines  in  the  United  States  car- 
rying more  passengers.  It  employs  in  Winston- 
Salem  some  400  persons — and  it  is  still  growing. 

Less  dramatic,  but  vital  to  the  economic  life  of 
Winston-Salem,  are  the  railroads  and  bus  line^  wh:c  i 
link  the  city  with  other  parts  of  the  State  and  Nation. 
Five  sets  of'  railroad  tracks  radiate  from  the  city  and 
local  railroad  and  express  employees  number  from 
600  to  700  persons.  About  100  scheduled  passenger 
buses  leave  Winston-Salem's  terminal  every  24  hours. 
Here  is  located  the  Southern  Division  Manager's  of- 
fice and  maintenance  garage  of  one  of  the  large  inter- 
state bus  companies.  Over  250  local  employees  are 
engaged  in  this  phase  of  transportation. 

Though  subject  to  seasonal  fluctuations,  the  em- 
ployment trend  has  been  upward.  On  the  basis  of 
employment  in  establishments  covered  by  the  Unem- 
ployment Insurance,  the  five  year  period,  mid-sum- 
mer 1948  to  mid-summer  1953,  has  seen  an  increase 
of  over  16  percent.  While  relative  stability  was 
shown  in  a  few  industries  during  this  period  most 
manufacturing  and  non-manufacturing  participated 
in  the  upward  swing  which  was  sparked  by  the  man- 
ufacture of  electrical  products. 

Excluding  seasonal  tobacco  and  trade  fluctuations, 
the  employment  outlook  for  the  remainder  of  1953  is 
for  relative  stability  in  both  manufacturing  and  non- 
manufacturing  industries.  Though  slight  increases 
are  forecast  in  some  establishments  no  long-range 
expansion  of  any  significance  is  expected. 


CAROLINA  DELIVERY  SERVICE 
(Continued  from  Page  110) 

Vickers,  chairman  of  the  board;  John  Harmon  Vickers,  his 
son,  president;  E.  S.  Mulwee,  who  joined  the  firm  from  Horton 
Motor  Lines,  vice-president  and  treasurer;  R.  H.  Jackson, 
secretary;  E.  R.  Henderson,  with  the  firm  since  1936,  super- 
intendent of  transportation,  and  Thomas  H.  Duckett,  Raleigh 
manager.  Mr.  Vickers,  who  now  leaves  most  of  the  details  of 
the  operations  to  his  son,  is  a  native  of  Georgia.  In  his  earlier 
days  he  was  a  theatrical  engineer  and  traveled  over  most  of 
the  southern  states.  He  knew  most  of  the  theater  operators 
and  this  influenced  his  decision  to  purchase  the  delivery  service 
and  thus  continue  his  contacts  with  those  in  the  two  Carolinas. 


N.  C.  LICENSED  OVER  MILLION  AND 
A  THIRD  MOTOR  VEHICLES  IN  195 

Licenses  were  issued  for  1,358,799  motor  vehicles  in  Norl 
Carolina  up  to  November  30,  1953,  a  figure  subject  to  only  slig; 
increase  for  the  month  of  December. 

Passenger  cars  granted  licenses  reached  986,904;  truck 
241,308;  trailers,  83,478,  and  miscellaneous  motor  vehicle 
47,109,  as  shown  by  the  report  of  the  Department  of  Moti 
Vehicles. 

Of  the  trucks  and  trailers  licensed  thousands  are  operati 
by  the  455  firms  licensed  to  haul  commodities  as  common  cafl 
riers  by  the  N.  C.  Utilities  Commission  while  9,200  firms  a 
exempt  from  regulation  because  of  limited  operations.  Tl 
North  Carolina  Highway  Department  operates  about  4,li 
trucks  while  highway  contractors  operate  probably  anoth 
3,000  trucks.  Also  hundreds  of  passenger  busses  are  operati 
by  the  133  licensed  common  carriers  of  passengers. 

Thousands  of  trucks  and  trailers  are  operated  by  farmei 
manufacturers,  wholesalers  and  retailers  in  the  State,  inclu 
ing  textile,  tobacco  and  furniture  manufacturers  and  dealei 
bakery,  beer,  bottled  drinks,  dairy  and  other  operators. 

North   Carolina  and   its  city  and   county  units   operate   all 
proximately  7,120  school  busses  hauling  about  441,000  pupif 
for  a  total  mileage  of  48,000.000  annually,  the  State  Board 
Education  reports.     North  Carolina  continues  to  lead  all  oth| 
states  in  the  number  of  busses  operated  and  the  number 
pupils  transported. 


(Received  too  late  for  use  in  Trucking  Section) 

THURSTON  MOTOR  LINES,  INC. 
Wilson 

Thurston  Motor  Lines,  Inc.,  Wilson,  started 
1932  by  D.  J.  Thurston,  Jr.,  with  one  helper  and  tv 
trucks,  has  developed  into  one  of  the  larger  transf* 
firms  in  the  State,  now  operating  252  units.  Tl 
name,  Thurston  Motor  Lines,  was  adopted  in  191 
and  the  next  year  the  firm  moved  to  Wilson. 

Thurston  Motor  Lines  was  incorporated  in  194 
with  authorized  capital  stock  of  $260,000  and  $20C 
000  has  been  paid  in.  All  of  the  officers  and  dire 
tors  are  employees  of  the  company.'    They  inclu( 

D.  J.  Thurston,  Jr.,  president  and  general  manage: 
J.  E.  Bullock,  vice-president  and  traffic  manager;  < 
H.  Baker,  secretary-treasurer  and  in  charge  of  tl 
accounting  office ;  C.  M.  Thomas,  assistant  secretar; 

E.  W.  Mountcastle,  purchasing  agent,  and  E.  1 
Hatcher,  sales  manager.  The  directors  are  M 
Thurston,  Mr.  Bullock,  Mr.  Baker,  Mr.  Mountcast 
and  Mr.  Hatcher. 

Plant  and  equipment  of  Thurston  Motor  Lines  a 
valued  at  approximately  $635,000,  including  roll! 
stock  with  a  value  of  about  $400,000,  14  termina 
worth  around  $150,000  and  $85,000  in  garages,  o 
fices,  furniture  and  miscellaneous  items.  Stead 
year-round  work  is  provided  for  approximately  3( 
employees  of  the  firm  which  has  an  annual  payroll 
about  $900,000,  90%  of  which  is  distributed  in  Norl 
Carolina.  The  252  units  include  56  trucks,  72  tra 
tors,  111  trailers  and  13  cars  and  service  trucks, 

Terminals  are  maintained  in  14  North  Carolii 
and  Virginia  cities,  including  Wilson,  Goldsbor 
Greensboro,  Raleigh,  Durham,  Fayetteville,  W: 
mington,  Edenton,  Charlotte  and  Weldon  in  Norl 
Carolina,  and  Richmond,  Norfolk,  Suffolk  and  Pe 
ersburg  in  Virginia.  Generally,  Thurston  Mot: 
Lines  operates  from  Charlotte  eastward  in  Non 
Carolina  and  in  southeastern  Virginia  in  the  Ric 
mond  to  Norfolk  areas.  Intrastate  and  intersta 
franchises  cover  North  Carolina,  and  exchange  a 
rangements  are  in  effect  with  connecting  carrie: 
which  cover  practically  all  of  the  nation. 


UMMER-FALL,   1953 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  155 


:ALEIGH-NORFOLK  RAIL  TRAFFIC 
OPENED  WITH  EXCURSION  IN  1853 

One  hundred  years  ago  a  four-day  celebration  observed  the 
mievement  of  through  passenger  and  freight  train  service 
3tween  Raleigh  and  Portsmouth.  The  occasion  celebrated  the 
mipletion  of  the  11-mile  link  of  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  Rail- 
ed from  Gaston  to  Weldon  at  a  cost  of  $175,000  shared  by 
le  Raleigh  and  Gaston  and  the  Seaboard  and  Roanoke  rail- 
>ads. 

It  was  on  April  19,  1853,  that  about  200  Portsmouth  and 
orfolk  people  boarded  an  excursion  train  and  were  welcomed 
ine  miles  out  of  Raleigh  by  a  delegation  of  Raleigh  citizens, 
rriving  about  five  o'clock  they  gathered  at  the  Yarborough 
otel  and  were  assigned  rooms  there  and  at  other  Raleigh 
otels.    They  had  been  welcomed  by  Mayor  Haywood. 

That  evening  at  8  o'clock  they  assembled  for  dinner  in  the 
arborough  with  former  Governor  Charles  Manley  as  toast- 
laster.  Many  toasts  were  given.  Former  President  John 
yler  responded,  ending  his  toast  with  "North  Carolina,  glo- 
ous  in  her  simplicity,  glorious  in  her  principles". 

The  next  day  two  excursion  trains  left  Raleigh,  headed  by 
.  O'B.  Branch,  president  of  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston.  About 
)0  boarded  the  trains  in  Raleigh  and  along  the  way.  Spending 
le  night  at  Portsmouth,  the  visitors  boarded  a  steamer  the 
ext  day  and  visited  places  of  interest,  including  a  short  trip 
ito  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  Dinner  was  served  in  Norfolk,  start- 
lg  at  4  o'clock.  The  next  day  the  visitors  returned  to  Raleigh 
l  their  special  trains. 

This  linking  of  two  railroads  formed  the  nucleus  of  what 
nally  developed  into  the  far-flung  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railway. 


RAILROAD  NOTES  AND  FOLKS 

N.  C.  "BIG  4"  RAILROAD 

Southern  Railway  was  organized  in  1894  to  take  over  the 
ichmond  and  Danville  Railroad  then  in  receivership. 

The  Atlantic  Coast  Line  Railroad  was  organized  in  1900, 
iking  over  the  ACL  of  Va.,  the  ACL  of  S.  C.  and  several  North 
arolina  lines. 

The  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad  was  organized  in  1900  fol- 
>wing  operation  of  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Association  of 
lailroads,  started  in  1893. 

Norfolk  Southern  Railway  was  organized  in  1S83  with  reor- 
anizations  in  1906  and  1910,  90%  of  its  trackage  being  in 
rorth  Carolina. 

STREET  RAILWAYS 

Salem,  now  a  part  of  Winston-Salem,  is  said  to  have  been  the 
scond  community  in  the  United  States  to  have  electric  street 
ailway  service,  Baltimore  having  been  the  first.  This  type  of 
itra-urban  passenger  transportation  was  in  vogue  in  most  of 
ae  larger  communities  in  North  Carolina  for  many  years  until 
asoline  motor  vehicles  gradually  developed  and  took  its  place. 
]vidences  are  still  to  be  seen  in  some  communities  where 
treet  car  tracks  have  been  allowed  to  remain.  Generally  these 
racks  were  taken  up  but  some  were  even  covered  by  concrete 
d  level  city  streets. 

Gastonia  was  the  last  city  in  the  State  to  maintain  street 
ailway  service.  This  form  of  transportation  was  abandoned 
here  in  1949,  marking  the  end  of  electric  street  railway  service 
a  North  Carolina.  Greensboro  operates  its  city  transportation 
ystem  electrically,  busses  running  on  city  streets  and  not  on 
racks. 

RAILROAD  SHOPS  AND  CENTERS 

The  ACL  is  the  only  railroad  in  North  Carolina  which  has 
ts  general  headquarters  within  the  State — in  Wilmington.  Its 
ompany  shop  has  been  located  in  Rocky  Mount  for  many 
ears,  presumably  shifting  there  from  Weldon. 

The  Southern  Railway  maintains  its  principal  shops  and 
hifting  center  at  Spencer,  a  town  developed  in  the  suburbs 
f  Salisbury  and  named  for  the  first  president  of  the  Southern 
tailway,  Samuel  Spencer. 

The  Seaboard  Air  Line  maintains  its  principal  shops  at  Ham- 
et  where  an  extensive  program  of  expansion  and  modernization 
s  now  in  process. 

The  Aberdeen  and  Asheboro  Railroad,  earlier  the  Aberdeen 
nd  West  End  Railroad,  was  built  by  A.  F.  Page,  starting  in 
896.  The  road,  primarily  for  hauling  timber,  was  extended 
everal  times  to  Candor,  Star  and  on  to  Asheboro.  It  then  be- 
ame  a  commercial  road.  It  was  completed  in  1903.  Mr.  Page's 
ons  sold  it  to  the  Norfolk  Southern  in  1912. 


RAILROAD  VIOLENCE 

Tempers  have  flared  and  violence  resulted  many  times  in 
railroad  building  in  North  Carolina.  A  few  of  these  are  worthy 
of  mention. 

One  of  these  was  in  Durham  when  the  Durham  and  Northern 
Railroad  sought  to  cross  the  right-of-way  of  the  Richmond  and 
Danville  (Southern)  to  which  the  latter  road  objected.  Con- 
struction crews  would  lay  ties  and  tracks  at  night  aiong  Pea- 
body  Street  and  the  next  day  Richmond  and  Danville  workmen 
would  tear  up  the  track.  Court  orders  were  issued  restraining 
this  destruction  and  indictments  were  brought  for  trespassing. 
After  controversy  and  bitterness  a  compromise  was  met.  In 
Goldsboro  after  tracks  were  relocated  to  take  the  main  line  of 
the  ACL  from  Center  Street,  the  main  street  in  Goldsboro,  the 
line  in  the  center  of  the  street  became  a.  branch  track  that 
served  only  one  or  two  wholesale  houses.  Citizens  of  the  town 
tore  up  this  track  in  the  middle  of  Center  Street  and  later 
made  a  broad  thoroughfare. 

In  Burlington  an  old  railroad  building  stood  at  a  point  which 
prevented  expansion  and  widening  of  a  principal  street.  Ef- 
forts were  made  by  city  authorities  to  induce  the  Southern 
Railway  to  remove  this  building.  Finally,  after  several  at- 
tempts had  failed,  the  building  went  up  in  smoke  one  night, 
some  20  years  ago.  It  was  even  intimated  that  some  of  the  city 
officials  started  the  fire. 

In  1908  when  the  Carolina,  Clinchfield  and  Ohio  Railroad, 
now  operated  by  the  Clinchfield  Railroad,  was  being  construct- 
ed through  the  State  via  Little  Switzerland,  Marion,  Ruther- 
fordton,  and  Forest  City,  numbers  of  foreigners  and  Negroes 
were  employed.  As  in  all  railroads  built  before  that  time 
teams  and  wagons  were  used  largely  for  moving  dirt.  In  this 
rugged  mountainous  area  and  with  several  races  employed 
violence  flared  up  frequently  and  some  deaths  resulted. 

In  1912  the  Aberdeen  and  Rockfish  Railroad  wanted  to  cross 
the  ACL  just  outside  the  Fayetteville  city  limits  to  enter  Fay- 
etteville.  The  ACL  officials  refused  to  consider  the  request 
after  several  efforts.  The  Aberdeen  and  Rockfish  had  laid 
rails  to  both  sides  of  the  ACL  tracks.  One  night  Aberdeen  and 
Rockfish  President  John  Blue,  mad  as  a  hornet,  assembled  his 
entire  crew,  moved  in  to  the  site  after  dark  and  by  morning 
had  laid  tracks  crossing  those  of  the  ACL.  And  there  thai 
crossing  is  today. 

CLIFFSIDE'S  BANTAM  BROOD 

A  Negro  fireman  on  the  Cliffside  Railroad,  operating  three 
miles  from  Cliffside  to  Cliffside  Junction  on  the  Seaboard  in 
Rutherford  County,  some  years  ago  discovered  a  Bantam  hen 
sitting  on  a  nest  of  eggs  near  the  track  on  the  right-of-way. 
He  watched  until  the  chickens  hatched  then  placed  a  nest  on 
his  tender  and  placed  the  chickens  and  the  hen  on  this  nest. 
The  chickens  grew  up  on  the  tender  riding  the  train  with  him 
daily.  As  they  developed,  they  would  hop  down  when  the 
train  stopped  and  indulge  their  natural  vent  of  scratching  on 
the  ground  around  the  engine.  When  the  train  was  ready  to 
move,  the  engineer  would  blow  his  whistle  and  there  would  be 
a  commotion  of  fluttering  wings  and  cackling  as  the  chicks 
scrambled  back  to  their  nest  on  the  tender.  They  had  learned 
that  the  whistle  meant  it  was  time  to  move. 


WELDON  RAILROAD  CENTER 

Weldon  was  the  first  and  for  several  years  the  principal  rail- 
road center  in  North  Carolina.  The  Petersburg  Railroad,  from 
Petersburg,  Va.,  to  Blakely,  across  the  Roanoke  River  from 
Weldon,  was  completed  in  1833.  In  1840  the  Wilmington  and 
Weldon  was  completed  to  Weldon.  Meanwhile  the  Seaboard 
and  Roanoke  Railroad  was  built  from  Portsmouth  to  Blakely 
and  in  1853  the  Raleigh  and  Gaston  Railroad  was  extended 
from  Gaston  to  Weldon.  For  a  few  years  merchandise  and 
passengers  were  ferried  across  the  Roanoke  River  for  exchange 
between  these  railroads  until  a  railroad  bridge  was  built  across 
the  river  in  1813.  Four  passenger  trains  Ir.m  thess  railroad? 
would  meet  in  Weldon  at  one  time,  creating  busy  scenes.  These 
lines  later  became  parts  of  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  and  Atlantic 
Coast  Line. 


WOULDN'T  RISK  DUCKING 

Before  the  Wilmington,  Beaufort  and  Southport  road  from 
Navassa  to  Southport  was  abandoned  around  1940,  the  long 
trestle  became  so  dilapidated  that  the  engineer  would  have  the 
fireman  walk  across  to  the  other  side,  set  the  throttle  and 
step  off  as  the  train  started  over  the  trestle.  The  fireman 
would  swing  onto  the  train  after  it  had  crossed  the  trestle  and 
stop  it,  waiting  for  the  engineer  to  walk  across.  They  thus 
avoided  a  dunking  in  case  the  trestle  should  collapse. 


PRINTED    BY    OWEN    G.     DUNN    CO.,     NEW     BERN,     N.     C. 


ca  v  "i  "d  '(i)  (d)  fee  -oes) 

S63HS.NOD    JO    J.DV    H30H(\    UOJ 

aaiNnooov  aovisod  saivis  aaiiNin 
1IVW  AilM^DIS  lN3WA01dW3 


AHvnan 

NCISIAIC 

«M    'KCX3WE 
21V1S    •O    fll 
1V0IG0IH3<3 

SSHNISnfl    1VI3IJJO 


'D  'N  'hoihivh  '68S  xog 
NOISSIWVOD  'S  *3 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 


/GLUME  12,  NO.  3-4 


SUMMER-FALL,  1954 


Past  Decade  Shows  Big  Increase  in  Garment  Manufacturing 
[n  North  Carolina;  Many  New  and  Enlarged  Plants  Last  Year 


Pictured  above  are  some  of  the  many  items  produced  by  some  200  apparel  plants  operating  in  this  State 


PUBLISHED   BY 

Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

RALEIGH,  N.  C 


PAGE  70 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195. 


The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly 

(Formerly  The  U.C.C.  Quarterly) 

Volume  12,  Numbers  3-4 Summer-Fall,  1954 

Issued  at  Raleigh,  N.  C.  by  the 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 

Commissioners:  Mrs.  Quentin  Gregory,  Halifax;  Dr.  Harry  D. 
Wolf,  Chapel  Hill;  R.  Dave  Hall,  Belmont;  "VV.  Benton  Pipkin, 
Reidsville;  C.  A.  Fink,  Spencer;  Crayon  C.  Efird,  Albemarle. 

State  Advisory  Council:  Public  representatives:  James  A.  Brid- 
ger,  Bladenboro,  Chairman;  Sherwood  Roberson,  Roberson- 
ville;  W.  B.  Horton,  Yanceyville;  Mrs.  R.  C.  Lewellyn,  Dob- 
son,  and  Dr.  J.  W.  Seabrook,  Fayetteville;  Employer  repre- 
sentatives: A.  L.  Tait,  Lincolnton.  and  W.  A.  Egerton,  Enka; 
Employee  representatives:  Melvin  Ward,  Spencer,  AFL,  and 
H.  D.  Lisk,  Charlotte,  CIO. 

HENRY   E.   KENDALL Chairman 

R.   FULLER  MARTIN Director 

Unemployment  Insurance  Division 

JOSEPH  W.  BEACH         Director 

North  Carolina  State  Employment  Service  Division 

M.  R.  DUNNAGAN Editor 

Public  Information  Officer 

Sent  free  upon  request  to  responsible  individuals,  agencies, 
organizations  and  libraries.  Address:  E.  S.  C.  Informational 
Service,  P.  0.  Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  C. 

CONTENTS  Page 

N.  C.  Garment  Manufacturing 70 

North  Carolina  Apparel  Production  Shows  Big  Expansion. .  71 
By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn 

New  Garment  Firms  Started  and  to  Start  Soon  in  This  State  73 

Many  Medium,  Small  Sized  Plants  Manufacturing  Apparel....  74 

Articles  on  Several  Firms  not  Included;  No  Data 75 

Highlights  of  Greensboro's  Industry  and  Employment 76 

By  Elizabeth  DeKay  Johnson 

Shirt  Manufacturing  Making  Rapid  Strides  in  This  State...  77 
Samsons,   Inc.,    Southland   Mfg.    Co.,    Troutraan    Shirt   Co.,   Morehead 
City  Garment  Co.,  McNeer  Dillon  Co.,  Garver  Mfg.  Corp.,  The  Man- 
hattan Shirt  Co.,  Vanderbilt  Shirt  Co.,  Kinoca  Shirt  Co. 

State  a  Leader  in  Work  Clothing,  Play  Clothing  Increasing     83 
Blue  Bell,  Inc.,  Anvil  Brand,  Inc.,  Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.,  Siceloff  Mfg. 
Co.,   W.   Koury  Co.,   Devil-Dog  Mfg.    Co.,   Whiteville   Mfg.    Co.    (Blue 
Jeans),  Smart  Styles.     (The  Salem  Co.,  Page  118.) 

Underwear,  Men,  Women,  Children,  Important  N.C.  Industry  91 
United  Mills  Corp.,  I.  Schneierson  &  Sons,  Shadowline,  Inc.,  Stedman 
Mfg.  Co.,  Carolina  Underwear  Co.,  Quality  Mills,  Woltz  Textile 
Products,  Beauty  Maid  Mills,  Indera  Mills  Co.,  Pinehurst  Textiles, 
L.  &  L.  Mfg.,  Co.,  Dixie  Belle  Textiles,  Bien  Jolie  Foundation  Gar- 
ments,  Glendale   Mfg.   Corp. 

State's  1954  Total  Payroll  Just  Under  Two  Billion  Dollars....l00 

Big  Expansion  of  Outerwear  Production  in  State  in  Decade  .100 
Southern    Knitwear    Mills,    Soderberg    &    Stern,    Carolina    Industrial 
Mfg.  Corp.,  The  Hadley  Corp.,  Iredell  Knitting  Mills,  Kar-Lvn  Corp., 
Martin  Mfg.  Co.,  Hadley  Mfg.  Corp.,  Charlotte  Blouse  Co.,  Goklbloom's 
Highland  Garment  Co. 

Millions  of  Work  Gloves  Made  in  Newton-Conover  Area 105 

Warlong  Glove  Mfg.   Co.,  Carolina  Glove  Co.,  Newton  Glove  Mfg.   Co. 

Numerous  Miscellaneous  Apparel  Items  Produced  in  State. ...108 
Empire  Mfg.   Co.,   Gem-Dandy,   Inc.,   Burlington   Mills   Corp.,   France 
Neckwear   Mfg.    Corp.,    Panda    Curtain    Co.,    Chase    Bag    Co.,    Golden 
Belt  Mfg.  Co.,  R.  W.  Eldridge  Co.,  Brady  Mfg.  Co.,  Tiedright  Tie  Co. 

Charlotte  Workshop  for  Blind  Trains  Many .115 

Eligible  Unemployed  Federal  Workers  May  Draw  Benefits  .116 

Benefit  Charges  to  Industry  Groups  in  Fiscal  Year  1954 117 

By  Hugh  M.  Raper 

ESC  State  Advisory  Council  Headed  by  J.  A.  Bridger 118 

Garment  Plants  in  Rural  Areas 118 

Note:  Articles  in  this  issue,  unless  otherwise  credited,  were 
written  by  M.  R.  Dunnagan,  Editor,  some  revised  and  all 
approved  by  firm  executives. 


N.  C.  GARMENT  MANUFACTURING 

North  Carolina  has  been  engaged  in  garment,  o 
apparel,  manufacturing  since  early  colonial  days,  bu 
in  the  original  sense  of  that  word — hand-making 
Carding,  spinning,  weaving  and  making  clothes  con 
tinued  in  the  home  for  many  years.  Many  of  th 
older  generation  can  still  remember  the  "home 
made"  clothes  generally  worn. 

Garment  making  as  an  industry  probably  had  it 
start  in  the  State  around  75  years  ago  in  a  smal 
way.  It  was  close  to  the  end  of  the  century  befor* 
it  really  got  under  way.  Then  it  was  overalls,  pri 
marily,  but  also  work  shirts  and  work  pants.  Higl 
Point  and  Greensboro  began  to  build  industries  som< 
50  years  ago  that  have  continued  successfully. 

As  overalls  and  work  shirts  were  improved,  work™ 
ers  became  more  skilled  and  shirts  were  added,  theiM 
underwear  and  some  outerwear,  largely  of  the  cheap! 
er  grades.    Improvement  continued  and  better  qual 
ity    clothing   followed.      Overall    firms    added    plaj| 
clothes.     Now  North  Carolina  manufacturers  make 
all  qualities  of  garments,  including  those  in  the  high 
est  price  ranges. 

Many  of  the  State's  larger  garment  firms  have 
been  established  for  years,  increasing  their  qualitjl 
and  output  as  time  passed.  Several  firms  from  out- 
side came  in  20  to  30  years  ago  and  have  built  large 
industries.  In  recent  years  numbers  of  others  have 
moved  into  the  State  and  experienced  successful 
operations.  Probably  25  garment  firms  have  come 
to  the  State,  or  started  in  the  State,  or  announced 
definite  plans  for  operations  in  the  State  in  1954. 

Shirt  production,  both  dress  (regular)  and  sports] 
shirts,  has  increased  many-fold  in  the  past  decade. 
Overalls  are  going  strong  and  play  clothes  have  been 
added,  some  of  the  finest.  Underwear  is  not  only 
increasing,  but  much  of  the  finest  and  sheerest  in 
the  country  is  now  being  made  in  this  State.  Other 
outer  wear,  men's,  women's,  children's  and  infants', 
is  being  made  in  high  quality  and  in  quantity.  Num- 
erous miscellaneous  items,  including  gloves,  now 
bear  the  trademark  of  North  Carolina  manufactur- 
ers. Many  garment  lines  carry  labels  of  the  depart 
ment,  chain  and  other  retail  firms. 

North  Carolina  garment  manufacturing  has  in- 
creased 225%  since  pre-war  days,  in  about  12  years 
Employment  increased  9%  from  the  first  quarter  of 
1953  to  the  first  quarter  of  1954.  Early  in  1954 
employment  had  increased  to  about  18,000,  employ- 
ed by  about  150  firms  covered  at  that  time.  That 
number  has  now  increased  to  about  175  firms  and 
employment  unquestionably  exceeds  20,000.  Another 
year,  with  recent  starts  and  enlargements,  and  pros- 
pective new  firms,  should  increase  the  firms  to  200, 
with  employment  approaching  25,000. 

Salaries  and  wages  in  the  State's  garment  plants 
in  1953  amounted  to  $35,460,000,  a  gain  of  17%  over 
1952  payrolls.  Conservative  estimates  increase  this 
figure  to  around  $42,000,000  for  1954.  Average 
weekly  wages  in  garment  manufacturing  of  $39.58 
in  1953  were  considerably  lower  than  the  $53.94  fig- 
ure for  all  covered  industries  in  the  State.  Two  con- 
ditions contribute  to  this  showing;  the  somewhat 
seasonal  nature  of  garment  making,  resulting  in  lay- 
offs and  reduced  average  earnings,  and  many  of  the 
workers  in  new  and  enlarging  plants  are  learners, 
working  at  learners'  wages. 


.UMMER-FALL,    1  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  71 


^orth  Carolina  Apparel  Production  Shows  Big  Expansion 

By  E.  Stanhope  Dunn,  Supervisor,  Reports  and  Analysis,  Bureau  of  R  &  S,  ESC 


Immediately  after  World  War  II  a  pronounced 
mployment  rise  in  apparel  manufacturing  set  in 
yhich  continues  unabated.  Whereas  apparel  era- 
iloyment  fluctuated  between  six  and  eight  thousand 
workers  and  employer  coverage  totaled  under  40 
irms  at  times  during  the  19391-1945  period,  by  1954 
.pparel  employment  had  risen  to  about  18,000  and 
©proximately  150  firms  are  now  covered. 

While  apparel  employment  is  now  over  two  and 
ne-quarter  times  that  of  the  pre-war  level,  the  rise 
n  total  textile  employment  has  been  only  17%  and 
otal  manufacturing  only  39%.  Of  course,  there  are 
ither  manufacturing  industries  that  have  made  sub- 
tantial  post-war  employment  gains  in  North  Caro- 
ina,  particularly  the  big  spurt  in  electrical  machin- 
iry  in  the  past  four  years2 ;  nevertheless,  the  post- 
war growth  in  apparel  has  been  consistently  steady 
rom  year  to  year  and  sufficient  to  place  apparel 
tmong  the  present  fast-growing  industries  in  North 
Carolina.  See  the  accompanying  chart  depicting  ap- 
>arel  and  textile  employment  from  1939  through  the 
irst  quarter  of  1954. 

Prior  to  World  War  II  apparel  employment  consti- 
uted  approximately  2%  of  total  covered  manufac- 
uring  employment.  Today  its  proportion  is  over 
■°/c  (see  accompanying  Table  I).  During  the  same 
>eriod  textile  employment  has  declined  from  about 
15  to  54  %  of  total  manufacturing  employment. 

ABUNDANT  FEMALE  LABOR 

No  doubt  there  are  many  reasons  for  this  migra- 
ion  of  apparel  employers  to  North  Carolina.  Per- 
laps  the  most  important  of  these  are  the  State's 
.bundant  female  labor  supply  and  the  general  labor 
ftitude    prevailing    among    its    potential    apparel 


APPAREL  AND  TEXTILE  EMPLOYMENT  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA 
1939-1954 


APPAREL   SCALE 
TllousanJs   of   Work 


L939  was  first  year  in  which  employment  data  are  available 
under  the  Employment  Security  Program. 
See  Winter-Spring,  1954  (Machinery  Issue)  of  the  E.S.C.  Quar- 
terly. 
Monthly  average  employment. 


workers.  The  lower  wage  level,  as  compared  with 
that  prevailing  in  big  northern  apparel  centers,  has 
also  been  a  significant  factor  in  this  growth ;  apparel 
manufacturers  have  been  squeezed  to  cut  cost  in 
order  to  hold  prices  down.  This  movement  is  borne 
out  by  the  growth  of  apparel  in  other  southern  and 
western  states  as  well  as  in  North  Carolina  during 
the  past  few  years.  Still  other  factors  are  the  near- 
ness to  the  source  of  textile  fabrics,  and  the  adapt- 
ability of  many  textile  to  apparel-making  skills. 

Some  idea  of  the  importance  of  this  industry  to 
the  State  may  be  had  from  the  size  of  its  payroll 
and  the  wide  area  distribution  of  its  employment. 

$35  MILLION  INDUSTRY  IN  1953 
During  1953  the  17,228'!  apparel  workers  received 
wages  totalling  $35,460,000,  a  gain  of  17  7'  over  the 
1952  payrolls.  This  substantial  payroll  figure  was 
attained  despite  the  fact  that  the  average  weekly 
earnings  per  apparel  worker  in  1953  was  only  $39.58, 
which  was  somewhat  below  the  State  average  of 
$53.94  for  all  covered  industries.     This  lower  aver- 


DlSTRiBUTlON    OF    STATE'S    APPAREL    EMPLOYMENT    BY    COUNTY 

(First    Quarter    1954    Employment) 


PAGE  72 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,    195 


age  is  no  doubt  due  to  two  principal  factors,  namely : 
(1)  the  seasonal  nature  of  the  industry  (i.e.,  em- 
ployment only  in  season)  ;  and  (2)  the  newness  of 
the  industry  which  has  a  number  of  new  firms  that 
must  train  large  numbers  of  learners  (at  learners' 
wage  rates)  to  become  proficient  production  work- 
ers (who  command  wage  rates  commensurate  with 
their  skills).  These  two  factors  (seasonal  employ- 
ment and  new  industry)  are  borne  out  by  the  fact 
that  the  apparel  industry  as  a  whole  paid  an  average 
contribution  rate  on  taxable  wages  of  1.99%  in  1953 
as  compared  with  an  all-industry  rate  of  only  1.13; 
because  more  seasonal  unemployment  in  an  industry 
is  conducive  to  a  higher  contribution  rate,  and  new 
employers  have  to  pay  the  maximum  2.7  contribution 
rate  until  they  have  been  operating  long  enough  to 
be  eligible  for  a  reduced  rate.  To  illustrate  the  im- 
portance new  establishments  play  in  any  analysis  of 
the  apparel  industry  in  North  Carolina  just  consider 
the  growth  in  the  industry  during  the  latest  year: 
from  the  first  quarter  of  1953  to  the  corresponding 
period  in  1954  apparel  employment  spurted  from 
16,445  to  17,923 — a  rise  of  9%  which  is  a  tremen- 
dous growth  for  any  industry  in  one  year. 

CONCENTRATED  IN  PIEDMONT  AREA 

Forty-nine  or  about  half  of  the  counties  in  North 
Carolina  have  some  covered  apparel  employment  as 
can  be  seen  in  the  accompanying  map  of  the  State. 
Despite  this  seemingly  scattered  employment,  there 
is  a  definite  concentration  of  employment  in  an  ap- 
parel belt  in  the  middle-western  counties  bounded 
by  Rockingham  County  on  the  northeast,  Montgom- 
ery on  the  Southeast,  Mecklenburg  and  Catawba  on 
the  southwest,  and  Surry  on  the  northwest.  Within 
this  16-county  area  (including  Stanly,  Stokes,  and 
Yadkin  which  had  no  covered  apparel  employment  in 
first  quarter  1954  and  Cabarrus  with  very  little  ap- 
parel employment)  will  be  found  over  10,000  work- 
ers or  58%  of  total  apparel  employment  in  the  State. 
The  other  important  counties  in  which  a  concentra- 
tion of  apparel  firms  will  be  found  (400  or  more 
workers)  are  Buncombe  and  Caldwell  counties  in  the 
Mountain  Region  and  New  Hanover,  Lenoir  and 
Wilson  counties  in  the  Coastal  Region. 

Guilford  County  leads  the  State  as  an  apparel 
center;  in  fact,  its  apparel  employment  (about  3,000) 

TABLE  I 

APPAREL  INDUSTRY  IS  GROWING  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA 

(Trend  of  Covered  Employment  in  Apparel,  Textile  and 

Manufacturing)  1939-1954 


Covered  Employment  in: 

Percent  of  Total 
Mfg.  Employment 

Year 

Apparel 

Textile 

All 
Mfg. 

Apparel 

Textile 

1939. . 

6,240 
6.136 
7,451 
8,138 
7.905 
7,833 
7,873 
9,239 
10,699 
10,665 
12,097 
13,001 
13.919 
14,644 
17,139 
17,923 

194,067 
205,666 
230,802 
236,800 
232,229 
216.157 
203,661 
222,597 
227,022 
234,748 
210.501 
229,415 
233,217 
232,885 
237,648 
226,877 

303,830 
317,487 
361,184 
383.541 
396.719 
381,517 
352,649 
372,914 
388,286 
399,365 
373,173 
401,917 
422,814 
425,997 
440,220 
421,621 

2.1 
1.9 
2.1 
2.1 
2.0 
2.1 
2.2 
2.5 
2.8 
2.7 
3.2 
3.2 
3.3 
3.4 
3.9 
4.3 

63  9 

1940....  .. 

64.8 
63.9 
61  7 

1941....    . 

1942 

1943 . 

58.5 
56.7 
57.8 
59  7 

1944...     . 

1945  ... 

1946 

1947..  

58  5 

1948  ... 

58.8 
58  0 

1949... 

1950. 

57  1 

1951 

55  2 

1952..-. 

54  7 

1953 

54  0 

1954  flstqtr.) 

53  8 

TABLE  II 

COMPARATIVE  GROWTH  BY  APPAREL  SUBDIVISIONS 

FIRST  QUARTER  1954  VERSUS  1945 


Apparel  Subdivisions 


All  Apparel 

Suits,  Coats,  Overcoats,  Males 

Furnishings,  Work  Clothing,  Males- 
Women's  &  Misses'  Outerwear 

Undergarments,  Women,  Children 

Children's  &  Infants'  Outerwear 

Misc.  Apparel  &  Accessories. 

Misc.  Fabricated  Textile  Products 


Industry 
Code 


23 
231 

232 
233 
234 
236 
238 
239 


1st  Quarter  Apparel  Employmen 


1954 


Number 


17,923 
265 
8,801 
1,399 
4,158 
762 
1,358 
1,178 


%of 
Total 


100.0 
1.5 

49.1 
7.8 

23.2 
4.2 
7.6 


1945 


Number 


8,100 

6 

4,260 

283 

630 

71 

982 

1,868 


Tots 


100 

0. 

52 

3. 

7. 

0. 
12. 
23. 


is  almost  three  times  its  nearest  rivals,  New  Hanovc 
and  Catawba  counties,  both  of  which  have  over  1,00 
apparel  workers.  Fifteen  counties  accounted  fc 
13,671  or  76  percent  of  the  17,923  covered  appar< 
workers  in  the  first  quarter  1954.  They  are  as  fo 
lows  (average  1st  quarter  1954  emplovment  an 
1953  total  wages)  :  Guilford,  3006— $6,986,055 
New  Hanover,  1204— $2,681,102;  Catawba,  1191- 
$2,472,996;  Mecklenburg,  995— $1,938,445;  Monl 
gomery,  981— $2,401,496 ;  Davidson,  903— $1,792 
294;  Randolph,  844— $1,829,320;  Lenoir,  802— $1 
256,417;  Buncombe,  656— $1,400,758;  Rockinghan 
585— $1,480,536;  Iredell,  584— $985,717;  Wilsor 
566— $885,346;  Surry,  530— $767,944 ;  Caldwel 
420— $703,811 ;  and  Rowan,  404— $692,450. 

The  next  group,  comprised  of  17  counties  wit 
from  100  to  400  workers,  accounted  for  3,450  of  th 
first  quarter  1954  total  apparel  employment.  Ap 
parel  employers  in  these  counties  paid  $6,129,210  i: 
total  wages  in  1953.  These  17  counties,  with  firs 
quarter  1954  employment,  are:  Lee,  355;  Carterel 
340;  Craven,  250;  Union,  236;  Burke,  236;  Colum 
bus,  230 ;  Alamance,  221 ;  Johnston,  202 ;  Forsyth 
195;  Wake,  193;  Davie,  172;  Duplin,  168;  Chatham 
165;  Martin,  137;  Alleghany,  129;  Wilkes,  112,  am 
Cumberland,  109. 

Seventeen  other  counties  had  from  one  to  100  ap 
parel  workers  in  the  first  quarter,  or  a  total  of  onl; 
805  for  the  group.  Thus  it  can  be  seen  that  the  51 
counties  in  the  State  with  no  covered  apparel  em 
ployment  (as  compared  with  25  with  no  textile  em 
ployment)  plus  the  17  with  very  little  employment 
makes  a  total  of  68  or  over  two-thirds  of  all  countie; 
with  little  or  no  apparel  employment.  It  is  obvious 
therefore,  that  considerable  room  still  remains  foi 
expansion  of  the  apparel  industry  in  North  Carolim 
— particularly  in  the  counties  with  little  or  no  cur 
rent  apparel  employment  but  with  an  abundance  o: 
female  labor. 

FURNISHINGS— WORK  CLOTHING  CENTER 
The  apparel  industry  has  many  subdivisions,  foi 
example,  Suits,  Coats,  and  Overcoats  for  Males,  sc 
it  will  be  of  interest  to  note  the  particular  subdi 
visions  in  which  the  greatest  growth  has  taken  place 
A  comparison  of  employment  for  the  first  quartei 
of  1954  with  1945  by  industry  subdivision  may  b( 
had  from  Table  II.  The  largest  subdivision,  witi 
respect  to  employment,  is  the  Furnishings  and  Worl 
Clothing  for  Males  (Industry  Code  232),  for  almosi 
9,000  workers  are  currently  employed  in  this  activ 
(Continued  on  page  75) 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  73 


New  Garment  Firms  Started  and  to  Start  Soon  in  This  State 


Midland  Mills  of  North  Carolina,  at  Midland  in 
Cabarrus  County,  is  a  new  firm  organized  to  take 
over  the  old  Champion  Hosiery  Mill  building  and 
convert  it  into  a  plant  to  manufacture  cotton  knitted 
garments,  both  outerwear  and  underwear. 

Philip  Gesoff,  president  of  the  new  firm,  sold  his 
interest  in  the  General  Knitting  Mills  at  Monroe  to 
head  the  new  industry.  He  and  his  family  live  on 
Park  Rd.,  Charlotte.  Leon  Senanoff,  from  Allen- 
town,  Penna.,  has  moved  to  Charlotte  as  secretary 
and  treasurer  of  Midland  Mills  and  has  charge  of 
production.    Mr.  Gesoff  will  handle  sales. 

Machinery  was  being  installed  in  the  converted 
plant  and  work  was  started  with  about  25  learners, 
When  the  plant  reaches  capacity  to  employ  about  100 
workers,  the  firm  plans  to  purchase  fabrics  for  the 
production  of  its  knitwear  lines,  some  of  it  to  be  pro- 
duced on  contract  for  other  firms. 


The  Jerold  Corporation  of  Pittsburgh,  Penna.,  has 
announced  through  its  vice-president  and  general 
manager,  S.  Gerald  Isley,  that  it  would  begin  train- 
ing a  staff  late  in  1954  to  manufacture  outerwear, 
jackets  and  sportswear  for  women  and  children. 

The  old  bagging  company  building  behind  Jones 
Brothers'  Furniture  Store  on  Highway  301  was  re- 
conditioned to  serve  as  a  pilot  plant  for  training 
workers.  Later  the  company  will  occupy  a  new  air- 
conditioned  building  containing  20,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor 
space  which  will  be  constructed  by  Smithfield  Indus- 
tries, Inc.  on  a  19-acre  site,  located  on  the  east  side 
of  Highway  301  just  south  of  the  Smithfield  corpo- 
rate limits.  When  completed  the  new  plant  is  ex- 
pected to  employ  about  150  persons,  largely  women. 

Catawba  Garment  Co.  at  Catawba,  manufacturing 
women's  blouses,  has  been  sold  by  its  owner,  Charles 
Cornerbert  of  New  York  City,  to  the  Elmo  Blouse 
Co.  and  Joseph  Addonisio  and  M.  Manera,  and  exten- 
sive expansion  of  the  operation  is  in  process. 

The  former  firm,  established  in  1950,  employed 
about  80  persons,  but  the  new  firm  is  expanding  its 
activities  and  expects  to  have  as  many  as  200  em- 
ployees early  in  1955.  New  machines  have  been  in- 
stalled and  a  training  school  for  new  workers  has 
been  in  process  through  cooperation  from  the  Ca- 
tawba Lions  Club. 

The  building  owned  by  Dorsey  Realty  Co.  of  New 
York  Citv  was  not  included  in  the  transaction. 


The  Ahoskie  Industrial  Development  Co.,  Inc., 
through  its  chairman,  J.  C.  Sessoms,  announces  that 
plans  are  underway  for  incorporating  the  Ahoskie 
Manufacturing  Corp.  with  authorized  capital  of 
$540,000  for  the  purpose  of  manufacturing  children's 
clothing.  The  name  of  the  firm  which  is  to  take  ex- 
tensive stock  in  the  new  corporation  had  not  been 
announced,  nor  had  disclosure  been  made  of  the  name 
of  the  firm  which  is  to  operate  the  plant. 

Mr.  Sessoms  announced  plans  for  a  $285,000  air- 
conditioned  plant,  masonry  constructed,  and  contain- 
ing 55,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space,  to  be  built  on  a  5.2 
acre  site  on  Sunset  and  Peachtree  Sts.,  opposite  the 
Armory.  The  Ahoskie  Town  Council  has  agreed  to 
extend  an  eight-inch  water  main  to  the  site. 


Mylecraft  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  was  organized 
in  1953  and  began  equipping  a  plant  and  training 
employees  at  Rich  Square  in  the  manufacture  of 
ladies'  pajamas.  Operations  actually  started  in  Aug- 
ust, 1953.  This  firm,  with  Miss  L.  V.  Myles  as  presi- 
dent and  owner,  is  a  contract  plant  to  manufacture 
pajamas  for  L.  V.  Myles,  Inc.,  149  Madison  Ave., 
New  York  City,  of  which  Miss  Myles  also  has  con- 
trolling stock  interest. 

Miss  Myles  also  is  president  and  owner  of  Carolina 
Contracting  Co.,  also  manufacturing  paiamas  on  a 
contract  basis  for  L.  V.  Myles,  Inc.  This  firm  is 
employing  Negro  women  workers  exclusively.  Pilot 
plant  operations  have  started  and  20  or  more  Negro 
women  workers  were  being  trained  in  the  operations. 


Supak  and  Sons,  manufacturing  children's  winter 
clothes  in  Minneapolis.  Minn.,  since  1933,  will  move 
its  entire  facilities  to  Elizabeth  City  and  begin  opera- 
tions earlv  in  1955.  Nathan  Supak,  president,  noti- 
fied Ben  E.  Douglas,  director,  N.  C.  Dept.  of  Conser- 
vation and  Development,  of  completion  of  negotia- 
tions for  this  transfer.  Heman  Odt  is  vice-president 
of  the  company. 

Supak  and  Sons  will  occupy  a  building  now  being 
erected  by  Albemarle  Industries,  Inc.,  Elizabeth  City, 
at  a  cost  of  $175,000.  The  building  will  contain 
42,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  The  firm  expects  to 
employ  between  250  and  300  workers  when  the  plant 
is  completely  staffed. 

President  Supak  expressed  appreciation  of  his  or- 
ganization for  assistance  given  by  the  Elizabeth  City 
Chamber  of  Commerce,  Albemarle  Industries,  Inc., 
and  C  &  D  for  their  cooperation  and  assistance  in 
finding  and  providing  "such  a  fine  location  for  our 
manufacturing  facilities  as  the  one  in  Elizabeth 
City."  

Nash  Garment  Co.,  Nashville,  a  home  owned  in- 
dustry, plans  to  bee-in  the  manufacture  of  children's 
dresses  earlv  in  1955.  Officers  of  the  new  firm  are 
J.  P.  Alford,  Whitakers,  president:  Mrs.  Nellie  W. 
Alford,  his  wife,  secretary-treasurer;  Mrs.  Bonnie 
Johnson,  his  sister,  vice-president,  and  the  latter's 
husband,  V.  B.  Johnson,  production  manager. 

This  new  firm  will  employ  about  50  women  and 
will  occupy  the  old  Evans  Lumber  Co.  Building  as 
temporary  quarters.  This  building  is  being  reno- 
vated for  the  new  industry  by  John  Evans,  owner, 
and  will  be  occupied  at  a  nominal  rent.  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Johnson  have  had  extensive  experience  in  dress  man- 
ufacturing as  managers  of  a  plant  in  Newport  News, 
Va. 

Credited  with  assistance  in  making  this  new  in- 
dustry possible  are  the  Nashville  Chamber  of  Com- 
merce, the  Nashville  Industrial  Development  Corp., 
the  N.  C.  Department  of  Conservation  and  Develop- 
ment, Carolina  Power  and  Light  Co.,  and  the  Rocky 
Mount  office  of  the  Employment  Security  Commis- 
sion. 

A  new  industry  in  Monroe  for  the  manufacture  of 
quilted  products,  such  as  quilted  bedspreads  and 
other  such  products,  was  to  be  opened  early  in  1955 
by  Manuel  Fisher,  manager  of  the  Carolina  Manu- 


PAGE   74 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195- 


facturing  Co.,  Monroe,  manufacturing  bedspreads 
and  other  such  items. 

Announcement  of  the  new  industry  was  made  by 
Director  Ben  E.  Douglas  of  C  &  D  late  in  December. 
Fisher,  he  said,  had  leased  6,250  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space 
in  Monroe  to  produce  quilted  products  on  a  contract 
basis  for  large  outlets.  Plans  call  for  employmen; 
of  about  50  persons,  20  of  them  women,  with  addi- 
tional employees  as  production  increases. 

Carolina  Manufacturing  Co.  has  been  in  opsration 
for  more  than  two  years  and  its  employment  has  in- 
creased to  more  than  150.  The  Arm  produces  such 
household  domestic  items  as  bedspreads,  pillow  cases 
and  table  cloths.  

Dixie  Knitwear  Co.,  Charlotte,  has  begun  produc- 
tion of  polo  shirts  and  knitted  sportswear  at  1117 
Belmont  Avenue.  Partners  are  L.  S.  Freemer  and 
A.  Chanton,  both  formerly  of  Philadelphia.  The 
plant  is  being  equipped  with  the  latest  type  knitting 
machines  which  will  eventually  number  75  and  em- 
ploy 50  workers. 

Rowan  Manufacturing  Co.,  Salisbury,  makers  of 
"Durable"  swim  wear  products,  has  leased  a  10,000 


sq.  ft.  building,  with  25  to  40  employees  present!; 
and  ultimately  100. 

Cumberland  Manufacturing  Co.,  making  blu 
jeans,  ladies'  shorts  and  play  clothes,  planned  to  em 
ploy  100  to  150  workers  in  a  16,000  sq.  ft.  building 
operations  starting  in  December,  1954,  Milton  H 
Zauber,  Jr.,  president,  announced  to  Winston-Salen 
Journal  November  16,  1954. 

Hamlet  Products  Co.,  Hamlet.  All  information  oi 
this  firm  is  marked  "confidential"  and  cannot  be  re 
leased. 

The  Granville  Manufacturing  Co.,  Oxford,  begai 
manufacture  of  women's  cotton  house  dresses  ii 
June,  1954,  with  35  trainees,  ultimately  to  employ 
100,  mostly  women. 

Knitmacle  Mills,  Inc.,  Newton,  began  operation  ir 
July,  1954,  and  will  employ  125  workers  in  produc 
ing  infants'  knitted  accessories. 

Note  :  Most  of  information  in  this  article  was  sup- 
plied by  the  office  of  Paul  Kelly,  director,  Research 
and  Statistics  Section,  Division  of  Commerce  and  In- 
dustry, N.  C.  Department  of  Conservation  and  Devel- 
opment. 


Many  Medium,  Small  Sized  Plants  Manufacturing  Apparel 


North  Carolina  contains  approximately  200  ap- 
parel or  garment  manufacturing  plants  operated  by 
about  175  firms,  with  about  25  branch  subsidiary 
or  contract  plants  operating  generally  in  cities  or 
communities  outside  the  localities  in  which  the  main 
plants  are  located.  This  overall  number  does  not 
include  any  plants — and  probably  a  goodly  number 
are  in  operation — which  are  not  covered  by  the  Em- 
ployment Security  Law ;  that  is,  those  with  less  than 
eight  employees. 

This  number  also  includes  probably  more  than  35 
plants  which  are  classed  as  needle  trade  plants  but 
which,  strictly  speaking,  are  not  actually  engaged  in 
apparel  or  garment  manufacturing  in  the  usually 
accepted  sense  of  the  term.  These  include  firms 
making  tarpaulins,  tents,  awnings,  carpets,  drug- 
gets, rugs,  bags,  mops,  ribbons,  work  and  profes- 
sional aprons,  stage  decorations  and  supplies  and 
various  other  coverings  for  many  articles,  made  of 
canvas,  rubberized,  coated  other  materials  or  com- 
binations of  materials. 

The  bulk  of  the  North  Carolina  produced  articles 
of  clothing  are  shirts,  work  and  play  clothes,  under- 
wear, outerwear,  gloves,  neckwear,  handkerchiefs, 
garters,  belts — many  of  which  include  garments  for 
men,  women,  boys,  girls  and  infants. 

Special  articles  appear  in  this  issue  on  about  65 
of  the  larger  firms.  In  addition,  about  100  other 
firms,  numbers  of  them  prosperous  and  going  indus- 
tries, are  operating  in  many  communities  in  the 
State.  About  25  new  firms  have  started  making 
garments  in  North  Carolina  during  the  year  1954, 
or  have  announced  plans  for  beginning  operations 
early  in  1955.  Some  are  not  yet  covered  by  the  Em- 
ployment Security  Law  because  they  have  not  been 
operating  long  enough  to  be  subiect  to  the  law. 

Listed  below  are  firms  about  which  special  articles 
do  not  appear,  but  which,  according  to  recent  rec- 
ords, are  in  operation,  although  in  a  few  cases  they 


may  have  been  absorbed  by  or   included   in  othe 
operations,  or  one  now  and  then  may  have  suspended 
operations.     The  list,  as  nearly  accurate  as  can  be 
ascertained,  follows : 

Men's,  youths',  and  boys'  furnishings,  work  cloth- 
ing, and  allied  garments : 

Polkton  Manufacturing  Co.,  Polkton 

Highway  Manufacturing  Co.,  Morganton 

Hickory  Overall  Co.,  Hickory 

Eureka  Knitwear  Mill,  Hickory 

Stonewall  Overall  Co.,  Lexington 

Lexington  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Lexington 

B  &  F  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Mocksville 

Fletcher  Bros.  Co.,  Winston-Salem 

Big  Winston  Garment  Co.,  WTinston-Salem 

Sherrod  Shirt  Co.,  High  Point   (bought  by  Anvi 
Brand) 

Era's,,  Incorporated,  Mooresville 

Allen  Overall  Co.,  Charlotte  and  Monroe 

H.  J.  Withers  Mfg.  Co.,  Charlotte 

B  &  C  Knit  &  Sports,  Huntersville 

Armored  Garments,  Inc.,  Spruce  Pine 

Kaley  Shirts,  Inc.,  Biscoe 

Don  Juan  Mfg.  Co.,  Hertford 

Asheboro  Tie  Co.,  Asheboro 

Ann  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Granite  Quarry 

D  and  W  Shirt  Co.,  Mount  Airy 

Defiance  Mfg.  Co.,  Lowgap 

Women's  and  Misses'  Outerwear: 

Claremont  Blouse  Co.,  Inc.,  Claremont 

Elmo  Blouse  Co.,  Inc.,  Catawba 

Donna  Shops,  New  Bern 

Jay  Apparel  Co.,  New  Bern 

Florence  Fashions,  Youngsville 

Ginet,  Inc.,  Charlotte 

Jefferson  Mfg.  Co.,  Charlotte 

Carolina  Maid  Products,  Inc.,  Granite  Quarry 

Doncaster  Collar  &  Shirt  Co.,  Rutherfordton 


UMMER-FALL,    1  95- 


'HE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  75 


Vomen's.   Misses',   Children's,   and   Infants'   Under 
larments : 

Hemlock  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Granite  Falls 
Brumby  Forsyth  Textile  Mill,  Murphy 
Hovv'arcl  Knit  Products,  Lie.  Bessemer  City 
Piedmont  Blouse  Co.,  Greensboro 
Walter  J.  Munro,  Statesville 
W.  W.  Wall  Co.,  Marion 
Stately  Lady  Nitewear,  Inc..  Charlotte 
Walter  &  Michael,  Inc.,  Chariotte 
Archdale  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  High  Point 
Berkeley  Mfg.  Co.,  Asheboro 
Lloyds  Lingerie,  Inc.,  Madison 
Carole  Industries,  Inc.,  Thomasville 
Haynes  Textile  Co.,  Mount  Airy 
Partridge  Textiles,  Inc.,  Mount  Airy 
Carolina  Bloomer  Co.,  Elkin 
Parkway  Textile  Co.,  Inc.,  N.  Wilkesboro 

Children's  and  Infants'  Outerwear : 
The  Betsy  Ross  Co.,  Inc.,  Washington 
Guilford  Products  Co.,  Greensboro 
Ruth  Originals,  Inc.,  Hendersonville 
Mountain  Top  Co.,  Hendersonville 
Eanes  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Stoneville 
Lingle  &  McCombs  Mfg.  Co..  Granite  Quarry 

Miscellaneous  Apparel  and  Accessories : 

Carolina  Handkerchief  Co.,  West  End 

L.  C.  Langston  &  Sons,  Arden 

Kannapolis  Mfg.  Co.,  Kannapolis 

Dize    Awning    Tent    Mfgs.,    Winston-Salem    and 

Greensboro 
Kearns  Tent  &  Awning  Co.,  High  Point 
The  Candlewick  Corp.,  High  Point 
D.  W.  Norvell  Tent  Mfg.,  Greensboro 
Greensboro  Bag  Co.,  Inc.,  Greensboro 
Stage  Decoration  &  Supplies,  Greensboro 
Beacon  Hill  of  N.  C,  Fletcher 
Piedmont  Mop  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte 
Charlotte  Tent  Awning  Co.,  Chariotte 
Dixie  Bag  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte 
Novelty  Curtain  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Chariotte 
Harper  &  Crawford  Bag  Co.,  Inc.,  Charlotte 
Carolina  Awning  &  Tent  Mfg.  Co.,  Rocky  Mount 
Wertheimer  Bag  Co.,  Wilmington 
Pacific  Mills  (Person  Mill  Div.),  Roxboro 
Reidsville  Distributing  Co.,  Reidsville 
Carolina  Manufacturing  Co.,  Monroe 
Wake  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Fuquay  Springs 
Union  Craft  Co.,  Wingate 
Wilson  Mfg.  Co.,  Wilson 

Miscellaneous  and  New  Firms : 
Hunter  Brothers  Co.,  Inc.,  Statesville 
Edith  Lynn  Mfg.  Co.,  Asheville 
Carolina  Canvas  Co.,  Wilmington 
Alamance  Awnings,  Burlington 
Albemarle  Awning,  Elizabeth  City 
Diamond  Brand  Canvas  Product  Co.,  Naples 
Durham  Awning  Co.,  Durham 
Gittlin  Charlotte  Bag  Co.,  Charlotte 
Thomas  Williams  &  Son,  Raleigh 


ARTICLES  ON  SEVERAL  FIRMS  NOT 
INCLUDED;  NO  DATA  OR  APPROVAL 

In  preparing  material  for  this  issue  the  editor  has  contacted 
officials  of  70  larger  garment  manufacturing  firms,  66  by  per- 
sonal visits  and  four  by  letters.  These  firms  operate  22  branch, 
subsidiary  or  contract  plants  in  21  communities  in  North 
Carolina,  exclusive  of  the  headquarters  plants. 

As  a  result  of  these  contacts,  articles  appear  in  this  issue 
describing  operations  of  65  firms.  In  a  few  instances  officials 
declined  the  opportunity  of  having  articles  carried  on  their 
firms  for  reasons  satisfactory  to  themselves;  in  some  others 
articles  were  prepared  and  for  various  reasons  were  not  re- 
turned with  approval  in  time  to  be  included  in  this  issue. 
Among  the  firms  contacted  and  about  which  articles  are  not 
carried  are  the  following: 

P.  H.  Hanes  Knitting  Co.,  Winston-Salem   (Knitting) 

Washington  Mills  Co.,  Mayodan  (Knitting) 

Mount  Airy  Knitting  Mills  Co.,  Mount  Airy  (Knitting) 

Biltmore  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Biltmore-Asheville 

Southern  Glove  Mfg.  Co.,  Conover 

Greensboro  Mfg.  Corp.,  Greensboro 

Bates  Nitewear  Co.,  Greensboro 

Tuftwick  Corporation.  Greensboro 

Columbus  Mfg.  Co.,  Tabor  City 

Monleigh  Garment  Co.,  Inc.,  Mocksville 

Rickman  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Salisbury 

Monroe  Crafters,  Inc.,  Monroe 

Port  City  Hosiery  Mills  (Lingerie),  Wilmington 

Warsaw  Mfg.  Co.,  Warsaw 

Fairmont  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  Fairmont 

Perry  Mfg.  Co.,  Mount  Airy 

Mills  Mfg.  Co.,  Woodfin,  Asheville 

Leisure  Lads,  Inc.,  Salisbury 

Win-Ann  Mfg.  Co.,  Monroe 

Apparel,  Inc.,  Mebane 

Fayetteville  Shirt  Corp.,  Fayetteville 

Frederick  Tailoring  Co.,  New  Bern 

Sherayne  Blouse  Co.,  Wilson 


N. 


C.  APPAREL  PRODUCTION  EXPANDS 

(Continued  from  page  72) 


ity.  North  Carolina  has  been  long  famous  as  a  man- 
ufacturing center  for  men's  work  clothing.  Never- 
theless, employment  even  in  this  group  has  doubled 
since  1945. 

Another  group  that  has  shown  an  even  more  phe- 
nomenal growth  during  the  past  ten  years,  although 
now  comprising  only  about  half  the  number  of  work- 
ers found  in  the  first  group  above,  is  Undergarments 
for  Women,  Misses,  Children  and  Infants.  Over 
4,000  workers  are  now  employed  in  this  segment  of 
the  industry  as  compared  with  less  than  a  thousand 
in  1945. 

The  next  significant  growing  group  is  Women's 
and  Misses'  Outerwear  which  has  grown  from  less 
than  300  in  1945  to  about  1,400  currently.  The  group 
Children's  and  Infants'  Outerwear  has  also  enjoyed 
a  considerable  percentage  growth,  rising  from  less 
than  100  workers  in  1945  to  almost  800  currently. 
Although  it  is  admittedly  conjectural,  it  would  not 
be  surprising  to  see  the  greater  portion  of  the  indus- 
try's employment  expansion  taking  place  within 
these  last  two  groups  in  the  next  few  years.  But  the 
growth  possibilities  in  the  entire  apparel  industry 
appear  quite  good  for,  if  anything,  the  expansion  of 
this  industry  in  North  Carolina  has  increased  in 
tempo  in  the  past  few  years. 


In  1954  more  than  175,000  of  the  million  insured 
North  Carolina  workers  drew  at  least  one  unemploy- 
ment insurance  payment.  Roughly,  an  average  of 
2.5  payments  averaging  about  $17.00  each,  went  to 
insured  workers. 


PAGE  76 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  195 


Highlights  of  Greensboro's  Industry  and  Employment 

By  Elizabeth  DeKay  Johnson,  State  Labor  Market  Analyst,  Bureau  of  R  &  S,  Employ.  Sec.  Com. 


This  is  the  fourth  of  a  series  of  articles  discussing  employment  condi- 
tions in  leading  North  Carolina  cities.  Grcensboio  was  selected  for  this 
issue  since  it  leads  in  employment  in   apparel   manufacturing. 

Greensboro,  centrally  located  in  Guilford  County 
in  the  Piedmont  section  of  North  Carolina,  has  a 
population  of  over  75,000.  It  is  the  hub  of  a  munici- 
pal wheel  with  five  cities  and  numerous  towns  and 
villages  within  a  25  to  30  mile  radius.  Within  this 
radius  reside  almost  half  a  million  persons,  about 
equally  divided  between  rural  and  urban  areas. 
Readily  accessible  by  rail,  air,  and  highway,  Greens- 
boro is  most  favorably  situated  from  the  standpoint 
of  commuting  for  employment  and  for  trade,  and 
for  the  movement  of  material  to  more  distantly  lo- 
cated places. 

Though  this  city  has  experienced  a  steady,  healthy 
growth  during  the  years,  the  past  decade  saw  a 
more-than-substantial  population  increase  of  25.4%. 
Guilford  County  had  a  24.1%  population  gain;  ad- 
jacent Alamance,  24%;  Davidson,  16.6%;  Forsyth, 
15.5%;  Randolph,  14%;  and  Rockingham,  a  11.9% 
gain.  Thus,  it  can  be  assumed  that  the  potential 
labor  supply  within  a  commuting  range  of  Greens- 
boro has  increased  at  a  rate  in  excess  of  that  of  the 
State  as  a  whole  which  had  an  average  gain  of  13.7 
percent. 

Greensboro  firms  employ  well  over  half  (21,500 
to  22,500)  of  the  persons  engaged  in  manufacturing 
in  Guilford  County  and  almost  three-fourths  (28,000 
to  29,000)  of  those  in  nonmanufacturing.  The  num- 
ber of  wage  and  salaried  workers  ranges  from  50,000 
to  over  51,500  depending  on  the  season  of  the  year, 
while  total  employment  is  from  59,500  to  over  61,000. 

Textile  manufacturing  dominates  the  employment 
picture  in  Greensboro,  accounting  for  12,500  work- 
ers. Over  half  of  these  are  in  mills  producing  broad- 
woven  fabrics,  most  important  of  which  are  denim, 
flannel,  and  cotton  dress  fabrics,  rayon,  acetate, 
nylon,  and  fabrics  combining  these  synthetic  mate- 
rials. More  than  1,000  are  employed  in  yarn  and 
thread  mills;  1,200  to  1,500  are  in  knitting  mills, 
manufacturing  such  products  as  ladies  hosiery, 
men's  elastic  top  and  slack  socks,  boys'  golf  hose; 
tricot  fabrics;  and,  lingerie.  Another  1,200  to  1,500 
are  engaged  in  dyeing  and  finishing  of  textiles  and 
hosiery. 

More  people  are  employed  in  the  manufacture  of 
apparel  in  Greensboro  than  in  any  other  city  of 
the  State,  and  two  of  the  three  largest  plants  in  the 
State  (employment  from  600  to  1000)  are  located 
there.  Total  employment  of  the  seven  major  firms 
and  numerous  smaller  establishments  engaged  in  the 
manufacture  of  apparel  and  other  finished  products 
from  fabrics  is  about  2,250  persons. 

Greensboro  is  the  location  of  some  of  the  nation's 
largest  producers  of  denim  work  clothes  and  over- 
alls. Within  the  past  few  years  this  material  has 
found  great  acceptance  in  sportswear,  and  now  these 
firms  also  make  children's  boxer  shorts  and  longies, 
men's  and  women's  slacks  and  sport  shirts  and  shorts 
of  denim.  Other  apparel  manufactured  by  Greens- 
boro firms  include  cotton  pajamas  and  nightwear  for 
ladies  and  children,  tricot  nightwear  and  lingerie 


for  ladies,  and  children's  dresses.  One  firm,  whicj 
manufactures  canvas  tents  and  awnings,  specializej 
in  outdoor  canopies  for  use  in  cemeteries. 

There  are  15  firms  manufacturing  non-electrical 
machinery  and  parts,  and  one  manufacturing  elecfl 
trical  machinery  in  Greensboro — total  employmeni 
about  2,000  persons.  Electrical  products  includl 
defense  connected  radar,  electronic  control  and  firinjl 
systems,  and  special  communication  equipment! 
Though,  employment-wise,  electronics  manufacturl 
ing  dominates  this  industry,  the  manufacturers  ol 
metalworking  machinery  and  special  industrial  mall 
chinery  are  very  important  from  the  standpoint  ol 
the  economic  and  industrial  life  of  the  city  and  statel 

Among  the  products  of  these  firms  are:  ripsawsl 
blower-fans,  knife-setting  and  grinding  machines! 
power  shears,  automatic  hydraulic  stroke  sandersu 
machine  tools,  woodworking  machinery,  planers  an<l 
matchers,  wooden  and  metal  ribbed  reeds,  reeJ 
brushing  machines,  expansion  combs  for  slashersu 
and  machines  according  to  special  design  and  specifl 
fications.  One  Arm  engineers,  manufactures  and  in 
stalls  electric  freight  and  passenger  elevators,  dumbB 
waiters  and  oil  hydraulic  elevators,  others  specializl 
in  small  parts  for  textile  machinery. 

In  addition  to  the  "big  three"'  of  manufacturing— I 
textiles,  apparel,  and  machinery — food  and  chemj 
icals  rank  high  with  some  1,500  and  800  respectively! 
Firms  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of  food  and  kin  I 
dred  products  include:  bakeries,  soft  drink  bottlinj 
plants,  grain  and  feed  mills,  and  meat  processing! 
establishments.  Chemical  manufacturers  include  } 
fertilizer,  pharmaceutical  preparations,  paint,  indusi 
trial  chemicals,  animal  fats  and  oils,  and  fuel  foil 
jet  engines. 

Other  manufacturing,  with  employment  of  fronj 
3,000  to  3,500,  depending  on  the  season,  includes  I 
tobacco  processing,  the  manufacture  of  cigars,  furnil 
ture,  paper  bags,  concrete  blocks,  ceramic  pipe,  anci 
bricks.  There  are  also  foundries  and  producers  o:l 
hand  tools,  heating  apparatus,  fabricated  structural 
metal  products  and  a  wide  variety  of  miscellaneous1! 
articles  produced  in  smaller  quantities. 

The  importance  of  non-manufacturing  industries 
is  shown  by  the  fact  that  of  nonagricultural  wage  ancj 
salaried  workers,  almost  56%  (28,000  to  29,000)  arc] 
so  engaged.     Greensboro  is  an  important  distribu 
tive  center,  topped  only  by  Charlotte,  and  from  11,' 
500  to  over  12,000  persons  are  engaged  in  wholesale 
and  retail  trade.    Service  accounts  for  7000  person- 
of  whom  almost  40%  are  in  education.  Other  service 
industries    include:    hotels,    laundries,    barber    anc 
beauty  shops,  medical   and  sanitary  services,   anc 
auto  and  other  repair  services. 

Transportation,  communication,  and  other  public 
utilities  employ  another  2,800  workers.  Government 
(excluding  education)  accounts  for  over  1,700.  In- 
surance employs  some  1,600  persons,  almost  70  %  oi 
whom  work  for  two  large  companies  having  home 
offices  in  Greensboro.  Finance  and  insurance  hire 
700  persons.  Construction,  though  subject  to  great 
(Continued  on  page  83) 


UMMER-FALL,    1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   77 


Shirt  Manufacturing  Making  Rapid  Strides  in  This  State 


Shirt  manufacturing  actually  started  as  an  indus- 
ry  in  North  Carolina  some  35  or  40  years  ago,  but 
he  greatest  growth  has  been  reached  in  the  past 
ecade.  New  plants  and  enlarging  plants  indicate 
hat  expansion  may  be  expected  to  mushroom  in  the 
ext  few  years.  Increases  during  the  year  1955  may 
each  as  high  as  one-fourth  or  even  one-third  above 
he  1954  banner  production. 

North  Carolina  shirt  makers  produced  close  to 
5,000,000  shirts  last  year,  an  unofficial  estimate 
adicates.  These  shirts,  at  manufacturers'  prices, 
•robably  sold  for  close  to  $40,000,000.  Some  5,000 
/orkers  were  employed  in  the  shirt  factories  in  the 
itate,  receiving  around  $8,000,000  in  wages  and 
alaries  last  year.  This  is  definitely  a  growing  and 
n  important  section  of  apparel  manufacturing  in 
he  State. 

Sports  shirts,  increasing  in  popularity  in  the  past 
ew  years,  constitute  the  bulk  of  the  shirt  production 
i  North  Carolina.  Probably  more  than  two-thirds 
f  the  shirts  made  in  the  State  are  in  the  sports 
lassification.  These  range  from  popular  to  high 
riced  garments.  Regular  or  business  shirts,  often 
eferred  to  as  dress  shirts,  in  contrast  to  sports 
hirts,  form  a  good  portion  of  the  production,  many 
f  these  of  high  type  and  for  the  better  class  trade. 
Vork  shirts  form  a  smaller  but  important  part  of 
he  shirt  production. 

In  the  next  decade  marked  expansion  in  shirt  man- 
facturing  and  in  manufacturing  finer  shirts  may 
rell  be  expected. 

SAMSONS,  INCORPORATED 
Kinston,  N.  C. 

Samsons,  Incorporated,  E.  Caswell  St.,  Kinston, 
^as  organized  in  1946  by  Sam  Fuchs,  his  son,  David 
'uchs,  and  his  son-in-law,  Sol  Schechter,  as  a  parent 
rm,  operating  two  older  contract  plants  in  Kinston 
nd  later  two  subsidiary  plants  in  Wilson  and  Wash- 
lgton,  N.  C.  The  firm  has  expanded  until  it  now 
lanufactures  considerably  more  than  5,000,000 
hirts  a  vear  and  has  gross  annual  sales  of  approxi- 
lately  $7,000,000. 

Present  officers  of  Samsons,  Incorporated,  are 
am  Fuchs,  chairman  of  the  board;  Sol  Schechter, 
resident;  Max  Chused,  vice-president,  and  David 
'uchs,  secretary-treasurer.  This  firm  has  developed 
apital  assets  or  net  worth  of  approximately  $500,- 
00,  including  plants,  equipment  and  other  assets, 
'he  four  plants  employ  more  than  1100  workers  and 
ave  an  annual  payroll  of  approximately  $1,750,000. 
'he  plants  contain  approximately  167,000  sq.  ft.  of 
oor  space,  contain  almost  800  sewing  machines,  and 
roduce  annually  around  5,400,000  shirts. 

Samsons  produces  two  brincipal  brands,  "Sam- 
Dn"  and  "Lenoir",  in  both  dress  and  sports  shirts, 
s  well  as  producing  shirts  under  the  brand  names 
f  chain  and  department  store  customers.  These 
hirts  retail  from  $1.98  to  $5.98  each.  Principal  ma- 
trials  are  cotton,  rayon,  nylon  and  other  synthetic 
bers  and  combinations  of  fibers.  More  than  half 
f  the  materials  used — about  250,000  j^ards  of  piece 
oods  weekly — are  bought  from  North  Carolina 
rms  including  Cone  Mills,  N.  C.  Finishing  Co., 
'ranston  Print  Works  at  Fletcher,  and  Old  Fort  Fin- 


Shirts,  three  sports  and  one  regular,  made  by  Samsons,  Inc., 
Kinston,  and  its  affiliated  firms. 

ishing  Co.  The  firm  operates  a  sales  office  in  New 
York  City  and  has  a  force  of  40  salesmen  covering 
the  entire  United  States  and  Puerto  Rico. 

Samsons  was  organized  to  handle  operations  of 
the  two  principal  plants  in  Kinston,  Kinston  Shirt 
Co.  and  Lenoir  Shirt  Co.  The  firm  then  began  opera- 
tion of  a  branch  plant  in  Wilson  and  later  established 
the  plant  in  Washington.  The  name  is  derived  by 
a  combination  of  the  word  "Sam"  (Fuchs)  and  his 
"sons",  including  sons-in-law. 

Kinston  Shirt  Co.,  under  contract  to  manufacture 
goods  for  Samsons,  was  organized  in  1938  by  Sam 
Fuchs.  This  plant,  manufacturing  sports  shirts,  has 
developed  over  the  years  until  the  plant  now  contains 
90,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  and  operates  400  ma- 
chines. It  has  approximately  500  employees,  with 
an  annual  payroll  of  about  $750,000.  This  plant  pro- 
duces around  1,800,000  sports  shirts  annually. 

Lenoir  Shirt  Co.,  also  a  contract  manufacturer  for 
Samsons,  was  organized  in  1941  by  Sol  Schechter, 
who  bought  a  shirt  plant  that  had  been  in  operation 
in  Kinston  for  about  15  years.  This  plant  contains 
45,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  in  which  the  Shipping 
Department  and  storage  space  are  located.  The  plant 
contains  120  machines  and  employs  around  200 
workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $250,000. 
Production  at  this  plant  ranges  around  1,200,000 
sports  shirts  annually. 

The  Wilson  plant  was  started  in  1 946  as  a  branch 
of  Samsons.  This  plant  manufactures  dress  shirts 
exclusively,  producing  about  1,200,000  annually.  It 
contains  17,500  sq.  ft.,  operates  130  machines  and 
employs  around  275  workers,  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll of  about  $500,000.  Lester  Shadle  is  superin- 
tendent of  this  plant.  The  firm  has  purchased  a  lot 
and  plans  to  build  a  larger  building  in  the  near  fu- 
ture which  will  double  the  capacity  and  the  number 
of  employees. 

The  Washington  plant  was  completed  in  August, 
1953,  having  been  built  with  the  cooperation  of  the 
Washington  Industrial  Development  Corp.  and  the 


PAGE  78 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  9^ 


Washington  Chamber  of  Commerce.  This  plant  pro- 
duces sports  shirts  exclusively,  approximately  1,200,- 
000  annually.  The  building-  contains  15,000  sq.  ft. 
of  floor  space  and  130  machines.  About  175  workers 
are  employed  and  the  annual  payroll  ranges  around 
$250,000. 

Sam  Fuchs,  founder  of  the  business,  has  been  a 
shirt  manufacturer  for  45  years.  He  operated  in 
New  York  and  Pennsylvania  before  coming  to  Kin- 
ston  in  1938.  Gradually  and  painstakingly  he  built 
up  his  own  firm,  Kinston  Shire  Co.,  until  he  and  his 
sons  organized  Samsons  in  1946.  He  continues  act- 
ive, largely  in  an  advisory  capacity,  but  spends  much 
of  his  time  in  Florida. 

Sol  Schechter,  now  president;  of  Samsons  and  son- 
in-law  of  Mr.  Fuchs,  has  been  m  ihe  shirt  business 
for  19  years,  six  years  in  New  iork  and  13  years  as 
owner  of  Lenoir  Shirt  Co.  in  Kinston.  He  is  a  grad- 
uate in  Business  Administration  in  the  College  of  the 
City  of  New  York.  His  duties  are  administrative 
and  he  is  sales  manager.  David  Fuchs  is  a  graduate 
in  Textile  Engineering  at  N.  C.  State  College  and  has 
been  active  with  the  firm  since  he  graduated  in  1946. 
He  is  production  manager  tor  all  of  the  plants. 

Max  Chused,  another  son-in-law  of  Mr.  Fuchs,  was 
engaged  in  other  activities  for  several  years,  joining 
Samsons  in  1947.  He  has  cnarge  of  quality  control 
and  is  supervisor  of  the  Washington  plant.  Lester 
Shadle,  manager  at  Wilson,  has  been  with  the  firm 
for  16  years  and  opened  and  has  since  managed  the 
Wilson  plant.  He  is  a  Rotanan  and  last  year  was 
president  of  the  Wilson  Rotary  Club. 


SOUTHLAND  MANUFACTURING  CO. 
Wilmington  and  Benson,  N.  C, 

Southland  Manufacturing  Co.,  with  offices  and 
plant  at  Third  and  Willard  Sts.,  Wilmington,  and 
with  a  branch  plant  in  Benson,  manufacturers  of 
"Sir  William"  dress  shirts  and  "blocks"  sportswear, 
was  organized  and  started  business  in  1922  by  Wil- 
liam Block  and  his  sons.  This  became  the  first  of  the 
large  shirt  manufacturers  in  the  South  and  has  de- 
veloped into  one  of  the  largest  shirt  manufacturers 
in  this  area. 

William  Block,  the  founder,  operated  a  shirt  fac- 
tory in  Baltimore,  Md.,  for  eight  years,  and  he  and 
his  sons  founded  the  Southland  plant  to  become  a 
pioneer  in  shirt  manufacturing  in  the  South.  The 
first  plant  contained  about  100  machines  and  em- 
ployed about  125  workers.  Two  of  his  sons,  Charles 
M.  Block  and  Nathan  E.  Block,  were  associated  with 
him  in  this  operation.  Joseph  M.  Block,  who  had 
worked  in  the  plant,  joined  the  firm  when  he  finished 
college.  A  son-in-law,  M.  Guld,  also  joined  the  firm 
in  1935. 

Since  World  War  II  Southland  has  experienced  its 
greatest  expansion,  increasing  in  size  and  production 
four-fold  as  Mr.  Block's  sons  took  over  more  and 
more  of  the  responsibility  in  operation.  The  Wil- 
mington plant  now  contains  80,000  sq.  ft.  of  opera- 
tion space  in  entirely  modern  air-conditioned  build- 
ings and  with  thoroughly  up-to-date  machinery  and 
equipment.  This  firm  employs  an  average  of  more 
than  500  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging 
around  $1,000,000. 

As  a  part  of  the  expansion  program,  the  Southland 
opened  an  entirely  modern  plant  in  Benson  in  1946 


designated  as  Block's.  This  plant  contains  30, 0( 
sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  and  employs  around  250  worl 
ers,  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging  around  one-thii 
of  a  million  dollars.  M.  Guid  directs  the  operatioi 
at  this  plant. 

Principal  brands  of  shirts  produced  are  "Sir  Wi 
liam"  dress  shirts  and  "Blocks"  sports  shirts  mac 
of  both  woven  and  knitted  materials.  Materials  I 
elude  cotton  and  synthetics,  and  a  complete  line  < 
shirts  in  the  popular  priced  range  is  produce' 
Southland  uses  probably  7,500,000  yards  of  pie< 
goods  annually,  purchased  at  a  cost  of  around  $2 
000,000.  Probably  half  of  the  piece  goods  purchase 
are  produced  by  North  Carolina  manufacturing  ar 
finishing  firms. 

Southland  shirts  are  manufactured  and  distribute 
nation-wide  by  a  staff  of  salesmen  covering  the  ei 
tire  country.  Brands  are  also  produced  under  tl 
names  of  many  of  the  best  department  stores,  men 
shops  and  chain  stores.  The  firm  has  around  5,0C 
accounts  and  distributes  approximately  3,600,0C 
shirts  annually.  The  New  York  sales  office  is  loca 
ed  m  the  Empire  State  Building. 

Southland  and  its  employees  have  always  mail 
tained  friendly  relations.  By  custom,  the  firm  give 
each  employee  21/->7C'  of  his  or  her  wages,  making  tf 
distributions  twice  a  year  in  mid-summer  and 
Uhristmas  time.  The  company  also  provides  grou 
life  insurance,  hospitalization  and  sick  benefits  fc 
all  employees  with  the  provision  that  employees  ma 
bring  their  dependents  under  the  group  coverage  fc 
the  policy  rates.  Coffee  breaks  are  observed  twic 
daily. 

Officers  of  Southland  are  Charles  M.  Block,  pre! 
dent,  in  charge  of  the  Credit  Department ;  Joseph  IV 
Biock,  vice-president,  in  charge  of  sales;  M.  Guk 
vice-president,  in  charge  of  production  and  directin 
the  Benson  plant  operations,  and  Nathan  E.  Bloc! 
secretary  and  treasurer,  with  additional  admini; 
trative  and  managerial  duties. 

William  Block,  founder,  came  to  the  United  State 
from  Europe  at  the  age  of  14  and  was  interested  i 
the  garment  production  for  around  half  a  centun 
He  operated  his  own  plant  in  Baltimore  and  was  hea 
of  the  Wilmington  operations  for  about  32  year 
He,  with  the  aid  of  his  sons,  built  a  sound  and  sal 
business  on  which  his  sons  have  greatly  enlarge 
operations.  For  several  years  he  was  chairman 
the  board  until  his  death  at  the  age  of  80  years  i 
August,  1954. 

Charles  W.  and  Nathan  E.  Block  practically  gre^ 
up  in  the  shirt  industry  and  for  a  number  of  yeai 
assumed  more  and  more  of  the  details  of  operatio 
and  management.  They  were  active  in  Wilmingto 
operations  from  the  beginning,  almost  a  third  of 
century  ago.  Joseph  M.  Block  became  an  activ 
member  of  the  firm  in  1930.  Mr.  Guld,  a  native  o 
Portsmouth,  Va.,  joined  the  firm  of  his  father-in-la"\ 
in  1935,  and  also  became  an  officer  of  the  firm.  Mi 
Guld  opened  the  Benson  plant  in  1946,  directing  it 
operations  since  that  time. 


TROUTMAN  SHIRT  CO.,  INC. 
Troutman,  N.  C. 

Troutman  Shirt  Co.,  Inc.,  Troutman,  with  branc. 
plants  in  Mooresville  and  Sparta,  was  organize 
and  incorporated  in  March,  1920,  by  L.  A.  Brow: 


■  UMMER-FALL,    1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  79 


tad  his  father,  A.  G.  Brown,  with  meager  facilities. 
its  gross  annual  sales  have  increased  in  the  32  years 
tf  stable  operations  until  they  now  approach  $4,500,- 
*00. 

|  The  firm  started  with  12  machines  and  15  em- 
)loyees  in  making  work  shirts,  production  of  which 
Ivas  from  50  to  60  dozen  a  week.  Operations  started 
n  a  former  knitting  mill  containing  about  5,000  sq. 
t.  L.  A.  Brown  and  his  father  were  principal  offi- 
cers. 

In  1937  A.  G.  Brown  died  and  L.  A.  Brown  con- 
inued  to  head  the  firm  as  president  and  treasurer. 
)ther  present  officers  are  H.  T.  Brown,  vice-presi- 
lent  and  assistant  secretary,  and  Mrs.  L.  A.  Brown, 
iecretary  and  assistant  treasurer.  These  officers 
md  owners  of  all  of  the  stock  form  the  board  of 
lirectors. 

Originally  with  an  authorized  capital  of  $100,000 
md  only  $5,000  in  paid  in  capital,  the  capital  stock 
las  been  increased  several  times  until  it  is  now 
!500,000,  all  still  owned  by  members  of  the  Brown 
'amily.  Capital  assets  of  the  corporation  now  reach 
5700,000  while  the  value  of  plant  and  equipment  has 
ncreased  to  approximately  $200,000. 

Troutman  Shirt  Co.  moved  along  satisfactorily  in 
ts  operations,  doubling  its  production  space.  Then 
n  1941  it  actually  began  its  expansion  by  adding  a 
.5,000  sq.  ft.  brick  building.  Again  in  1952,  20,000 
q.  ft.  of  production  space  were  added.  The  Troutman 
•perations  now  are  carried  on  in  45,000  sq.  ft.  of  pro- 
luction  and  storage  space. 

In  1946  the  Troutman  firm  rented  a  building  in 
Mooresville  in  which  60  machines  are  now  operated 
>y  66  employees.  In  1952  the  company  erected  a 
nodern  new  building  of  brick,  steel  and  concrete, 
:ontaining  20,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  on  a  two-acre 
,ite.  The  plant  now  employs  about  100  workers. 
Dhe  firm  has  plans  to  erect  another  addition  next 
■pring  containing  40,000  sq.  ft.  of  space,  thus  giving 
10,000  sq.  ft.  of  space  in  the  Mooresville  plant.  The 
lew  plant,  as  planned,  will  give  employment  to  about 
!00  workers  and  will  treble  the  Mooresville  payroll. 

Again  in  1948  Troutman  rented  a  building  in 
5parta  and  started  operations  under  the  firm  name 
if  Atwood,  Inc.  in  the  production  of  men's  work 
)ants. 

Troutman  Shirt  Co.  employs  a  total  of  more  than 
i00  workers  in  the  three  plants,  with  an  annual  pay- 
'oll  of  approximately  $815,000.  When  the  planned 
idditions  have  been  completed  next  year  and  full 
•perations  are  reached,  the  total  payroll  should  be 
iround  $1,250,000.  The  Troutman  plant  now  em- 
)loys  about  200  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  of 
iround  $375,000.  The  Mooresville  plant  has  170 
vorkers,  with  a  payroll  of  about  $240,000,  and  the 
Sparta  plant  now  employs  135  workers,  with  a  pay- 
oll  ranging  around  $200,000. 


Home  plant  and  office  of  Troutman  Hhirt  Co.,  Troutman 

The  Troutman  firm's  gross  annual  sales  range 
between  $4,250,000  and  $4,500,000.  Included  in  the 
annual  sales  are  approximately  3,000,000  work 
shirts,  retail  prices  ranging  from  98^  to  $3.98;  al- 
most 1,000,000  sports  shirts  with  retail  prices  rang- 
ing from  98r  to  $3.98,  and  approximately  1,000,000 
pairs  of  work  pants,  retailing  at  $2.00  to  $3.98. 

In  its  production,  Troutman  work  shirts  are  made 
of  chambrav,  jeans,  twills  and  coverts.  Work  pants 
are  made  of  twills  and  chambray,  and  sports  shirts 
are  made  from  cottons  and  nylons.  A  good  percent- 
age of  the  piece  goods  used  in  the  manufacture  of 
these  products  is  bought  from  North  Carolina  fin- 
ishing plants.  Work  shirts  and  sports  shirts  are 
produced  in  Troutman.  The  Mooresville  plant  pro- 
duces work  shirts  only,  and  in  the  Sparta  plant  men's 
work  pants  are  produced.  The  production  of  sports 
shirts  was  started  by  the  firm  in  1952  in  the  Trout- 
man plant,  where  work  shirts  are  also  produced. 

Principal  brand  names  are  ''Troutman"  work 
shirts  and  pants,  "Red  Ram"  work  shirts  and  pants, 
"Morewear"  work  shirts  and  "Atwood"  sports  shirts. 
Troutman  products  are  distributed  nationwide 
through  chain  and  department  stores  and  wholesal- 
ers, in  addition  to  a  very  good  export  trade,  especially 
in  South  American  countries.  During  World  War  II 
Troutman  filled  large  contracts  for  chambray  shirts 
for  the  Navy. 

L.  A.  Brown,  head  of  the  firm  during  its  32  years 
of  oneration,  a  native  of  Troutman,  is  a  graduate  of 
Rrskine  College  and  attended  Princeton  University 
Graduate  School,  and  also  spent  part  of  a  year  in 
study  st  Oxford  University  in  England.  He  taught 
school  in  Troutman  for  one  year,  and  then  without 
prior  experience  organized  and  started  the  shirt  fac- 
tory, the  success  of  which  is  apparent.  H.  T.  Brown, 
vice-president,  is  also  a  native  of  Troutman  and  at- 
tended Duke  University.  For  eight  years  he  was 
with  the  Standard  Oil  Co.  in  Charlotte,  and  in  1937 
ioinecl  his  brother  in  the  shirt  factory.  John  Simpson 
is  plant  manager  at  Mooresville,  and  W.  C.  Barker 
is  the  Sparta  plant  manager. 


lodern  Mooresville  plant  of  Troutman  Shirt  Co.,  Troutman 


MOREHEAD  CITY  GARMENT  CO.,  INC. 
Morehead  City,  N.  C. 

The  Morehead  City  Garment  Co.,  Inc.,  1504-08 
Bridges  St.,  Morehead  City,  has  been  one  of  that  re- 
sort city's  principal  industries  for  more  than  18 
years.  Starting  modestly,  it  has  expanded  extensive- 
ly and  increased  its  production  until  it  now  makes 
more  than  a  million  sports  shirts  annually  and  has 
recently  completed   a  branch  plant  at   Lillington, 


PAGE   80 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  19,5 


which  will  produce  probably  more  than  half  as  many 
more  shirts. 

The  Morehead  City  Garment  Co.  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  1936  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  J.  W.  Jack- 
son as  a  firm  to  produce  shirts  on  a  contract  basis  for 
the  Beaver  Shirt  Co.  in  New  York  City,  continuing 
this  type  of  operation  for  about  three  years.  At  that 
time  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Jackson  acquired  half  interest  in 
the  Beaver  Shirt  Co.  and  J.  Peters,  president  of  the 
Beaver  Shirt  Co.  acquired  half  interest  in  the  More- 
head  City  Garment  Co. 

When  the  Morehead  City  Garment  Co.  was  first 
organized,  it  leased  a  building  containing  18,000  sq. 
ft.  from  the  City  of  Morehead  City.  As  business  in- 
creased the  company  erected  additions  from  time  to 
time  until  three  separate  wings  had  been  erected, 
containing  30,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space,  giving  the 
plant  48,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space.  The  firm 
now  employs  from  350  to  400  workers,  90%  of  whom 
are  women,  with  an  annual  pavroll  ranging  around 
$800,000. 

The  Morehead  City  Garment  Co.  produces  sports 
shirts  exclusively.  Its  production  ranges  around 
90,000  dozen  or  1,080,000  shirts  annually.  In  bulk 
these  shirts  make  up  about  four  carloads  a  week  or  a 
little  less  than  a  full  carload  daily. 

The  Lillington  Garment  Co.,  totally  owned  by  the 
owners  of  the  Morehead  City  Garment  Co.,  started 
operations  in  temporary  quarters  in  Lillington  last 
summer,  pending  the  erection  of  a  modern  factory 
building  by  the  Industrial  Development  Corp.,  com- 
posed of  Lillington  citizens.  This  building  of  brick, 
steel  and  concrete  is  due  to  be  completed  by  the  time 
this  item  appears.  It  contains  31,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor 
space,  all  on  one  floor,  and  is  air-conditioned.  The 
building  is  so  constructed  that  it  can  be  conveniently 
enlarged.  The  cost  was  approximately  $160,000. 
When  completely  staffed  this  plant  will  employ  about 
250  people  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging  around 
$600,000.  This  is  Lillington's  largest  industry,  and 
will  be  about  two-thirds  the  size  of  the  Morehead 
City  plant. 

Employees  of  the  Morehead  City  Garment  Co.  are 
provided  the  hospital  insurance  plan  paid  for  by  the 
company,  and  after  two  years  of  employment  an  em- 
ployee may  bring  members  of  his  family  under  the 
plan.  The  company  also  makes  available  for  its  em- 
ployees group  life  and  group  health  insurance  plans. 
The  company  provides  one  week  of  paid  vacation  at 
Christmas  time  and  another  week  around  July  1  for 
eligible  employees. 

An  interesting  feature  is  that  during  the  past 
three  years  religious  services  have  been  conducted 
at  the  plant  each  Wednesday  at  9 :00  A.M.,  continu- 
ing for  30  minutes.  The  Carteret  County  Ministerial 
Association  arranges  and  conducts  the  service,  one 
of  its  members  having  charge  each  week. 

Present  officers  of  the  Morehead  City  Garment  Co. 
are  Mrs.  J.  W.  Jackson,  president;  J.  Peters,  New 
York  City,  vice-president;  Abe  Silverman,  New 
York  City,  secretary;  Truman  D.  Kemp,  treasurer 
and  general  manager,  and  C.  V.  Hooper,  coming  from 
Alamance  County,  is  office  manager  and  assistant 
secretary. 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Jackson,  from  Lykens,  Penna.,  had 
operated  their  own  shirt  plant  there  before  coming 
to  Morehead  City  to  organize  and  start  the  plant  here 


Group  of  roll  collar  sports  shirts  made  by  Morehead 
City  Garment  Co. 

in  1936.  Their  operations  in  garment  manufactui 
ing  cover  a  period  of  28  years.  Following  Mr.  Jacl 
son's  death  in  1947,  Mrs.  Jackson  took  complet 
charge  of  the  firm  and  has  since  operated  it  very  su( 
cessfully.  She  and  Mr.  Kemp  handled  the  plans  fo 
the  new  plant  at  Lillington.  Mr.  Kemp,  general  mar 
ager,  has  been  engaged  in  shirt  manufacturing  fo 
25  years  in  Pennsylvania,  Alabama  and  Tennessee 
Mr.  Kemp  came  to  Morehead  City  in  1949  as  produc 
tion  manager.  Early  in  1951  Mr.  Kemp  assumed  th 
full  duties  of  general  manager.  In  June  of  195£ 
Mr.  Kemp  and  Mr.  Silverman  became  partners  i: 
the  business.  Mr.  Hooper,  office  manager,  becam 
a  partner  in  June  of  1954. 

Mr.  Silverman  was  transferred  from  the  Beave 
Shirt  Co.,  which  is  the  sales  organization,  in  193' 
as  superintendent  of  finishing  and  shipping.  He  ha 
had  continuous  service  with  the  company  since  tha 
time  with  the  exception  of  SYo  years  in  the  servic 
of  the  U.  S.  Army,  Quartermasters  Division,  havin; 
overseas  duty.  

McNEER  DILLON  CO. 

Statesville,  N.  C. 

McNeer  Dillon  Co.,  550  S.  Center  St.,  Statesville 
had  its  beginning  in  High  Point  in  August,  1919 
when  P.  McNeer  Dillon  established  the  Dillon  Kearm 
Underwear  Co.,  later  becoming  Dillon-Vitt  Under 
wear  Co.  Operating  through  several  ups  and  downs 
the  firm  now  produces  approximately  1,200,00( 
dress  and  sports  shirts  annually  and  its  annual  gros; 
sales  exceeded  $2,000,000. 

The  earlier  underwear  firm  moved  from  Higl 
Point  to  Statesville  in  1924,  continuing  operations 
until  fire  destroyed  the  plant  in  1933.  At  that  tim( 
the  firm  purchased  the  Moffett  Underwear  Co.  ir 
High  Point,  moved  back  to  that  city  and  was  ir 
operation  again  within  four  weeks.  In  1935  the  firn 
took  a  huge  government  contract  for  C.C.C.  camps 
Because  of  refused  shake-down  attempts  the  largej 
shipment  was  turned  down  causing  the  firm  to  gcj 
into  bankruptcy. 

Later  in  1935  P.  McNeer  Dillon  organized  the  Mc- 
Neer Dillon  Co.  as  individual  owner.  Starting  with 
30  employees  he  now  employs  from  250  to  350  work-! 
ers,  operating  in  four  plants  with  floor  space  close] 
to  40,000  sq.  feet.  Mr.  Dillon  owns  two  of  the  build- 
ings and  leases  two  others.  His  annual  payroll  is 
around  $500,000,  and  the  value  of  his  plant  and 
equipment  is  approximately  $250,000.  He  has  pur- 
chased equipment  for  the  fourth  plant,  and  when  it 
is  completely  installed  and  operations  begin  he  ex-( 
pects  to  employ  from  125  to  150  more  workers. 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  81 


McNeer  Dillon  manufactures  men's  and  boys' 
sports  shirts,  and  this  year  started  the  production  of 
a  line  of  ladies'  man-tailored  shirts,  which  has  de- 
veloped rapidly  and  is  expected  to  reach  a  point 
where  it  will  be  20%  of  production.  Approximately 
100,000  dozen  shirts  are  produced  annually,  and  the 
plant's  capacity  is  expected  to  reach  170,000  dozen 
shirts  a  year.  Retail  prices  range  from  $1.35  to 
$3.95  each.  Materials  include  cotton,  broadcloth, 
prints,  some  rayon,  and  the  firm  is  planning  to  pro- 
duce shirts  from  dacron  in  the  near  future.  McNeer 
Dillon  produces  shirts  under  its  own  brand  and  un- 
der brands  of  other  firms,  distributing  its  products 
nation-wide  by  its  own  sales  force  to  department  and 
chain  stores. 

McNeer  Dillon  Co.  is  not  incorporated  and  Mr. 
Dillon  is  the  sole  owner.  He  is  a  native  of  Lynch- 
burg, Va.,  his  family  moving  to  Greensboro  in  his 
youth.  He  worked  in  a  bank  in  Greensboro  before 
starting  his  first  underwear  plant  in  1919  and  has 
thus  been  in  the  garment  making  business  for  about 
35  years.  His  son,  P.  McNeer  Dillon,  Jr.,  who  was 
released  during  the  summer  as  a  Lt.  Jr.  grade  from 
the  U.  S.  Navy  after  three  years  service,  has  joined 
the  firm  and  is  learning  the  industry  in  order  to  take 
over  the  firm  when  his  father  retires. 

McNeer  Dillon  operates  more  than  300  sewing 
machines  and  has  been  assisted  for  a  number  of 
years  by  the  Statesville  office  of  the  Employment 
Security  Commission  in  testing  and  referring  sewing- 
machine  operators. 


GARVER  MANUFACTURING  CORP. 

Wilmington,  N.  C. 

Garver  Manufacturing  Corp.,  1213  S.  13th  Street, 
Wilmington,  was  organized  and  incorporated  in  Sep- 
tember, 1946,  by  Robert  Kallman,  P.  E.  Garver  and 
Harry  Kanter  and  started  operations  in  a  downtown 
building  on  Princess  Street,  with  about  25  employees 
and  limited  equipment.  This  firm  has  developed  into 
one  of  Wilmington's  important  industries  with  an 
annual  payroll  exceeding  $600,000. 

Garver  Manufacturing  Corp.  was  established  in 
Wilmington  through  the  efforts  of  Industrial  Prop- 
erties, Inc.,  an  organization  of  Wilmington  business 


Up-to-date  office  and  plant  building  of  Garver  Mfg. 
Co.,  Wilmington 

and  professional  men  to  promote  the  development  of 
industries  in  Wilmington.  This  local  corporation 
assisted  the  Garver  firm  in  financing  the  building  and 
assumed  the  mortgage,  which  has  since  been  paid  off. 
Among  the  local  citizens  interested  in  this  movement 
were  the  late  Harris  Newman,  Howard  Penton,  R. 
J.  Thornton  and  others. 

The  present  modern  one-story,  brick  and  steel 
building  was  started  soon  after  the  company  was 
organized  and  was  occupied  a  year  later  in  1947. 
This  building,  containing  30,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space, 
cost  approximately  $250,000  and  is  completely  air- 
conditioned.  The  plant  is  equipped  with  about  200 
modern  Singer  sewing  machines  of  various  types. 
The  Wilmington  office  of  the  Employment  Security 
Commission  assisted  the  firm  in  staffing  the  plant  by 
administering  aptitudes  tests  to  applicants  and  refer- 
ring workers  considered  suitable  for  the  sewing  and 
other  plant  operations. 

Sports  shirts  exclusively  with  long  and  short 
sleeves  and  semi-dress  are  produced  by  Garver.  The 
firm  manufactures  more  than  a  million  shirts  an- 
nually, making  some  of  them  under  their  own  brand, 
but  most  of  them  bearing  the  brands  of  chain  stores 
supplied.  The  sports  shirts  produced  have  a  retail 
price  of  $2.95,  $3.95  and  $4.95  each  and  are  distrib- 
uted nation-wide.  Probably  more  than  50%  of  the 
piece  goods  used  in  making  shirts,  largely  of  syn- 
thetic materials,  are  purchased  from  North  Carolina 
manufacturing  and  finishing  plants. 

Garver  Manufacturing  Corp.  operates  50  weeks  in 
the  year  and  basically  on  a  40-hour  week.  The  plant 
has  never  had  a  shut-down  in  its  several  years  of 
operation  and  has  had  only  one  slow-down  to  three 
days  of  work  a  week  for  six  weeks  to  change  styles. 
About  95%  of  the  workers  are  women.  A  cafeteria 
is  operated  for  the  benefit  of  the  employees  and 
supervised  recreation  includes  basketball  and  bowl- 
ing teams.  The  company  employs  around  300  em- 
ployees, with  an  annual  payroll  exceeding  $600,000. 

First  officers  of  the  Garver  firm  were  Harry  Kan- 
ter, chairman  of  the  board ;  P.  E.  Garver,  president ; 
Robert  Kallman,  vice-president;  and  Harriss  New- 
man, secretary  and  treasurer.  Mr.  Kanter  is  still 
chairman  of  the  board ;  Robert  Kallman  is  now  presi- 
dent; J.  E.  Mowbray,  vice-president;  H.  R.  Blake- 
man,  secretary  and  treasurer.  J.  E.  Cushing  is  plant 
superintendent. 


Preparing  piece  goods  for  cutting  out  shirts,  front,  and  sewing 
room  of  Garver  Mfg.  Co.,  Wilmington 


THE  MANHATTAN  SHIRT  CO. 
Lexington,  N.  C. 

The  Manhattan  Shirt  Co.,  Lexington,  located  on 
East  Second  Ave.  and  the  Route  29  By-Pass,  is  one 
of  the  eight  plants  operated  by  the  firm  of  this  name, 
which  had  its  beginning  almost  a  century  ago  in  Pat- 


PAGE   82 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  195- 


Hi 


iiii  «  ..  , 

Recently  constructed  and  thoroughly  modern  pla>it  of  nation- 
ally-known Manhattan  Shirt  Co.  at  Lexington 

erson,  N.  J.  Manhattan  shirts,  nationally-known, 
have  come  to  be  considered  a  standard  of  excellence 
throughout  the  nation  and  in  many  foreign  countries. 

The  Manhattan  Shirt  Co.  first  came  to  Lexington 
and  established  a  leased  plant  March  1,  1947.  Em- 
ployment reached  about  120  in  the  temporary  quar- 
ters in  which  training  of  workers  was  conducted. 
The  Lexington  office  of  the  Employment  Security 
Commission  assisted  in  staffing  the  plant  by  inter- 
viewing, testing  and  referring  suitable  workers  for 
the  plant's  operations. 

After  satisfactory  operation  for  more  than  six 
years,  the  firm  decided  Lexington  was  a  suitable  loca- 
tion for  a  permanent  Manhattan  plant.  A  site  was 
purchased  containing  about  seven  acres  on  the  out- 
skirts of  Lexington,  and  one  of  the  most  modern  in- 
dustrial plants  in  the  nation  was  erected  on  this  site. 
The  building  is  thoroughly  air-conditioned,  is  one- 
story  high,  built  of  concrete,  brick  and  steel,  and 
contains  40,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space.  The 
building  is  so  constructed  that  it  may  be  doubled  in 
space  by  an  addition  with  little  preliminary  prepara- 
tion. With  up-to-date  facilities,  this  plant  is  equip- 
ped with  the  most  modern  machinery  available.  Pro- 
duction was  started  at  the  new  site  early  in  1954. 
The  firm  now  employs  more  than  200  workers. 

The  Lexington  plant  manufactures  men's  shirts, 
sports  shirts  and  ladies'  man-tailored  shirts  from 
materials,  much  of  which  is  woven  and  finished  in 
North  Carolina  mills.  Manhattan  shirts  may  be 
found  in  all  men's  and  women's  stores,  and  depart- 
ment stores  throughout  the  country.  The  New  York 
Sales  Office  is  located  at  444  Madison  Ave. 

Brooks  Hursey  is  manager  of  the  Lexington  plant, 
and  Robert  J.  Mills  is  assistant  manager,  with  A.  C. 


M*"*w»«»(i«»i£ 


Brown  as  Cutting  Room  fore 
man ;  Mozelle  Brown,  Stitchinj 
Room  supervisor,  and  Zella  Sow 
ers,  Laundry  supervisor.  Mr 
Hursey,  a  native  of  Society  Hill 
S.  C,  is  a  1938  graduate  fron 
Georgia  Tech.  He  moved  to  Lex 
ington  in  1947  as  manager  fo: 
Manhattan's  operation.  He  anc 
his  wife,  Mary,  have  two  children,  Hugh  and  Man 
Ann. 

The  Manhattan  Shirt  Co.  was  founded  in  1857  ii 
Paterson,  N.  J.,  as  Levy-Wechsler.  The  name  of  th< 
firm  was  changed  to  Manhattan  several  years  later 
The  principal  plant  and  headquarters  of  the  companj 
are  still  located  at  Paterson,  but  the  firm  has  expand 
ed  its  operations  until  it  operates  production  plant! 
in  Middletown,  N.  Y. ;  Americus,  Ga. ;  N.  Charleston 
S.  C. ;  Salisbury,  Md.;  Scranton,  Penna.,  and  King 
ston,  N.  Y.,  in  addition  to  the  Lexington  plant.  Prod- 
ucts made  by  these  plants  and  sold  under  the  "Man- 
hattan" brand  include  shirts,  neckwear,  handker 
chiefs,  sports  shirts,  sport  knits,  pajamas,  beach- 
wear,  underwear,  "Lady  Manhattan"  shirts,  ano 
sleepwear  for  men  and  women. 

Present  principal  officers  of  The  Manhattan  Shirl 
Co.  are  Robert  L.  Leeds,  president ;  Sylvan  Geismar. 
executive  vice-president ;  Arthur  Oppenheimer. 
Louis  Stengel,  Jr.,  and  Harvey  R.  Sugel,  vice-presi- 
dents ;  Edmund  L.  Kenyon,  treasurer ;  Howard  Zim- 
merman, secretary,  and  Bert  Sanders,  assistant  sec- 
retary. 


Cutting  operations,  front,  and  seioing  in  Manhattan 
Shirt  Co.  at  Lexington 


VANDERBILT  SHIRT  CO. 

Asheville,  N.  C. 

Vanderbilt  Shirt  Co.,  29V2  Broadway,  Asheville, 
was  organized  in  1946  to  manufacture  shirts  on  con- 
tract for  other  manufacturers  who  furnish  the  ma- 
terials. Annual  production  of  shirts  and  blouses 
now  reaches  around  600,000  garments  with  a  retail 
value  ranging  between  $2,000,000  and  $3,000,000. 

Vanderbilt  Shirt  Co.  has  an  authorized  capital 
stock  of  $100,000.  The  incorporators  and  officers 
are  Herman  Silver,  president ;  Milton  Lurey,  vice- 
president,  and  Herbert  Wadopain,  secretary-treas- 
urer. The  firm  leases  the  building  in  the  heart  of 
Asheville  and  operates  about  150  sewing  machines, 
which  with  other  equipment  has  a  valuation  of 
around  $75,000.  Employment  ranges  from  125  to 
175  workers,  and  the  annual  pavroll  exceeds  $300,- 
000. 

This  firm  produces  shirts  and  blouses  for  men, 
women,  boys  and  girls,  including  dress  and  sports 
shirts  and  western  shirts  for  men  and  boys,  and  a 
small  percentage  of  the  production  is  blouses  for 
women  and  girls.  Shirts  are  made  principally  from 
rayon  from  Old  Fort  Bleacheries  and  woolen  and 
cotton  materials  from  Pacific  Mills.  Retail  prices 
of  these  garments  range  from  $2.98  to  $13.98. 

Annual  production  is  around  50,000  dozen  shirts 
and  blouses,  with  shipments  daily  of  about  one  truck 
load  of  200  dozen  shirts.  The  firm  operates  in  about 
25,000  sq.  ft.  of  leased  floor  space  at  two  places  in 
Asheville. 

North  Carolina  firms  are  called  upon  for  supplies. 
In  addition  to  other  materials,  Etta  Paper  Box  Co., 
Marion,  supplies  boxes ;  Old  Dominion  Box  Co.,  Char- 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  83 


otte,  furnishing  shipping  cartons,  and  tissue  paper 
"or  wrapping  shirts  is  secured  from  Piedmont  Paper 
Zo.,  Asheville. 

The  company  provides  hospitalization  and  life  in- 
surance for  its  employees,  operates  a  loan  fund  for 
naking  loans  to  employees  without  interest,  gives 
;hree  paid  holidays  each  year  and  one  week  of  paid 
vacation  annually. 

Herman  Silver,  president  of  the  company,  is  a 
native  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  and  started  shirt  manu- 
facturing in  1917.  He  came  South  in  1933  and  ope- 
rated in  South  Carolina  until  1946  when  he  and  his 
associates  organized  and  started  the  Asheville  Shirt 
Co.  Mr.  Wadopain,  native  of  Toledo,  Ohio,  moved 
to  Asheville  as  a  youth  with  his  family.  He  was  in 
the  tire  recapping  business  in  Asheville  until  the 
shirt  company  was  organized.  Mr.  Lurey,  a  native 
Df  Greenville,  S.  C,  who  married  a  sister  of  Mr. 
Wadopain,  moved  to  Asheville  about  15  years  ago 
and  served  as  chain  store  manager  until  this  shirt 
company  was  organized. 


another  unit  of  Negro  employees.  The  firm  employs 
an  average  of  around  175  workers,  about  evenly  di- 
vided between  whites  and  Negroes,  and  has  an  an- 
nual payroll  of  around  $300,000.  The  firm  operates 
about  125  sewing  machines  of  various  types  in  leased 
floor  space  of  about  18,000  square  feet. 

In  addition  to  regular  dress  and  sports  shirts,  the 
firm  produces  semi-dress  shirts  which  may  be  worn 
as  dress  shirts,  buttoned  collar,  or  as  sports  shirts 
with  open  collar  and  with  both  long  and  short  sleeves. 
Retail  prices  range  from  $2.95  to  $3.95.  Kinoca 
Shirt  Co.  produces  approximately  55,000  dozen  or 
660,000  shirts  annually. 

Berry  Rouse,  a  native  of  Kinston,  has  been  plant 
superintendent  since  1947,  handling  operations  for 
the  former  organization,  and  since  the  organization 
of  the  Kinoca  Shirt  Co.  in  1952. 


KINOCA  SHIRT  CO.,  INC. 

Kinston,  N.  C. 

Kinoca  Shirt  Co.,  Inc.,  Wall  St.,  Kinston,  was  or- 
ganized and  incorporated  in  1952  as  a  contracting 
firm  to  produce  dress  and  sports  shirts  for  Barry 
Morrell  and  the  Madison  Shirt  Corp.  of  New  York 
City  and  other  firms.  When  this  firm  was  organized 
it  took  over  shirt  manufacturing  operations  which 
had  been  conducted  in  Kinston  for  several  years. 

Kinoca  Shirt  Co.  manufactures  both  dress  and 
sports  shirts.  Dress  shirts  are  produced  by  a  unit 
of  white  employees,  and  sports  shirts  are  made  by 


CxREENSBORO  INDUSTRY  AND  EMPLOYMENT 

(Continued  from  page  76) 

fluctuations,  usually  employs  in  excess  of  2,500  per- 
sons. 

Greensboro  can  boast  a  balanced  economy  with  a 
degree  of  industrial  diversity  found  in  few  other 
cities  of  similar  size.  Though  subject  to  seasonal 
fluctuations  and  despite  relative  stability  due  to  a 
variety  of  circumstances  during  the  past  year,  the 
general  employment  trend  has  been  upward  since 
fall  of  1951.  As  of  November  1954,  the  outlook  is 
for  continued  gradual  increase  in  employment  as  the 
mild  optimism  of  most  employers  is  augmented  by 
the  construction  and  opening  of  a  large  cigarette 
manufacturing  plant. 


State  A  Leader  in  Work  Clothing,  Play  Clothing  Increasin; 


Work  clothes  have  been  manufactured  commercial- 
ly in  North  Carolina  for  about  60  years.  Plants  for 
making  work  clothes  followed  clothesmaking  in  the 
home  from  early  Colonial  days,  which  developed  the 
seamster  and  seamstress  who  would  live  in  the  home 
to  make  clothes  for  members  of  the  family  and  the 
tailor  who  set  up  shops  in  the  community  to  make 
both  regular  and  work  clothes. 

Only  one  of  the  larger  overall  plants  now  in  opera- 
tion started  before  the  turn  of  the  century.  Anvil 
Brand,  Incorporated,  High  Point,  had  its  beginning 
in  1899.  Also  John  Hampton  Adams  and  James 
Henry  Millis,  High  Point,  were  operating  an  overall 
plant  around,  or  possibly  before,  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury and  began  making  hosiery  as  an  adjunct  to  this 
activity.  Adams-Millis  Corporation  is  the  result  of 
the  side-line  activity.  In  1904  Blue  Bell  had  its  be- 
ginning in  Greensboro  and  Siceloff  Manufacturing 
Co.  started  operations  in  1909.  Years  later  in  1934 
Blue  Gem  and  W.  Koury  started  overall  manufactur- 
ing in  Greensboro,  the  latter  moving  to  Sanford. 
Three  or  four  large  firms  and  several  smaller  ones 
have  been  added  during  the  past  few  years. 

In  recent  years,  also,  play  clothes  have  become  an 
important  part  of  North  Carolina's  garment  produc- 
tion. Work  clothes  producers  have  broadened  their 
base  and  are  now  the  principal  play  clothes  produc- 
ers.   Several  firms  in  recent  years  have  been  estab- 


lished in  the  State  for  making  play  clothes  exclus- 
ively. 

North  Carolina  is  one  of  the  leaders  in  the  nation 
in  the  production  of  work  and  play  clothes.  Annual 
sales  of  about  10  large  firms  and  a  number  of  smaller 
ones  amount  to  approximately  $45,000,000,  while 
probably  40,000,000  garments  are  made  annually  by 
these  same  firms.  Approximately  5,000  workers  in 
the  State  are  engaged  in  making  work  and  play 
clothes,  the  annual  payroll  for  which  is  close  to  $10,- 
000,000. 


BLUE  BELL,  INC. 

Greensboro,  N.  C. 

Blue  Bell,  Inc.,  Greensboro,  originally  and  con- 
tinuing the  manufacture  of  coveralls,  has  long  been 
recognized  as  the  "World's  Largest  Producer  of 
Work  Clothes"  and  now  one  of  the  top  producers  of 
play  clothes,  was  organized  and  began  operation  in 
Greensboro  in  1904.  Through  consolidations,  merg- 
ers, purchases  and  expansions,  it  has  long  been  class- 
ed as  the  largest  such  firm  in  the  nation. 

Blue  Bell  operates  some  28  plants  and  15  ware- 
houses in  seven  states,  employing  considerably  more 
than  6,000  workers.  These  produce  around  32,400,- 
000  garments  annually.  In  Greensboro  its  two  pro- 
duction units  employ  some  700  workers,  with  a  pay- 
roll of  about  $1,300,000  a  year,  in  addition  to  its 


PAGE  84 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195^ 


executive  and  accounting  staffs  of  about  130  em- 
ployees. These  plants  produce  24,000  garments 
daily.  Another  North  Carolina  plant  is  located  at 
Lenoir,  employing  about  400  workers  and  with  a 
payroll  ranging  around  $800,000. 

Only  this  short  reference  is  made  to  Blue  Bell  since 
a  comprehensive  article  was  published  on  this  firm 
in  the  Textile  issue  of  "The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly,"  Vol. 
10,  No.  3-4,  the  Summer-Fall,  1952,  issue. 


ANVIL  BRAND,  INCORPORATED 
High  Point,  N.  C. 

By  K.  M.  POINDEXTER 

Anvil  Brand,  Incorporated,  High  Point,  was  estab- 
lished in  1899  as  the  High  Point  Overall  Co.  It  was 
a  small  organization  in  the  small  town  of  6,000  popu- 
lation. Today  Anvil  Brand  employs  approximately 
1,000  workers,  has  an  annual  payroll  of  more  than 
$1,000,000,  the  gross  annual  sales  exceed  $7,000,000, 
and  its  workwear,  playwear  and  sportswear  are  dis- 
tributed on  a  nation-wide  basis,  a  goodly  portion  go- 
ing into  export  trade. 

The  founders  and  original  owners  were  J.  H.  Mil- 
lis,  J.  H.  Adams,  George  A.  Matton  and  Dr.  J.  A. 
Turner.  The  company  advanced  deliberately  through 
the  early  years,  and  was  acquired  in  1909  from  the 
founders  by  H.  F.  Hunsucker  and  associates.  They 
later  sold  the  business  to  A.  J.  Owen,  who,  in  turn, 
sold  it  in  1913  to  B.  S.  Cummings. 

By  1920  the  company,  which  had  adopted  the 
trade-name  Anvil  Brand  during  Mr.  Hunsucker's 
ownership,  occupied  only  3,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space, 
operating  only  18  machines  with  a  work  force  of  15 
persons.  In  that  year  all  assets  were  sold  to  H.  T. 
Hudson  and  C.  C.  Garrett  who  proceeded  to  expand 
operations  and  extend  the  territory  in  which  com- 
pany salesmen  sold  only  direct  to  independent  mer- 
chants. 

The  Hudson-Garrett  operation  was  broken  with 
the  death  of  Mr.  Garrett  in  1946,  and  the  next  year 
Mr.  Hudson  sold  the  company  to  Kirchofer  &  Arnold, 
investment  bankers  of  Raleigh.  Under  the  direction 
of  R.  C.  Kirchofer,  president,  Anvil  Brand  has  grown 
into  a  position  of  advanced  leadership  among  the 
nation's  utility  garment  and  sportswear  manufac- 
turers. 

Because  of  the  prominence  which  the  trade-name 
Anvil  Brand  had  gained  through  advertising  and 

One  of  nine  modern  buildings  of  Anvil  Brand,  Inc..  High  Point, 
used  in  manufacture  of  work  and  play  clothes  and  shirts 


it 
Hi 


li 


through  its  wide  distribution,  and  because  the  name 
"Overall  Company"  no  longer  represented  the  variec 
production  of  the  company,  the  name  was  changec 
to  Anvil  Brand,  Incorporated,  in  1948. 

As  contrasted  to  the  small  operation  in  1920,  Anvi 
Brand  today  produces  a  varied  classification  of  gar- 
ments, including  overalls,  dungarees,  work  trousers 
work  shirts,  sport  slacks,  sport  shirts  for  men  and 
boys ;  ladies'  shorts,  shirts,  sportswear  and  "blut 
jeans,"  and  children's  staple  and  sports-style  gar 
ments. 

Its  major  lines  are  identified  by  the  trade-marks 
of  "Anvil  Brand"  for  utility  wear;  "Tom  Long' 
sportswear  for  casual  garments ;  "J'nettes"  for  wo 
men,  misses  and  girls,  and  "State  Fair"  for  garments 
of  popular  priced  classification  in  the  workwear 
field. 

The  company  has  based  its  expansion  program  on 
intensive  research,  product  and  plant  engineering 
and  planned  marketing  methods  until  today  it  pro- 
duces some  350,000  dozens  of  garments  annually 
with  annual  sales  in  excess  of  $7,000,000.  The  com- 
bined plants  in  High  Point  and  in  Independence,  Va., 
provide  working  space  of  more  than  150,000  sq.  ft. 
with  sewing  equipment  exceeding  800  machines. 
The  company  estimates  the  value  of  its  buildings, 
real  estate,  machinery  and  equipment  at  $1,125,000, 
and  the  approximately  1,000  employes  of  the  cor- 
poration draw  an  annual  payroll  well  beyond  two 
and  a  quarter  million  dollars. 

It  has  been  in  the  past  four  years  that  Anvil  Brand 
has  seen  its  greatest  expansion.  Originally  operat- 
ing from  a  single  large  building  on  South  Hamilton 
Street  in  High  Point,  the  company  first  purchased  a 
modern  structure  originally  built  for  hosiery  manu- 
facture on  Willowbrook  Street.  At  this  time  the 
Hamilton  Street  plant  became  known  as  the  Hudson 
Division  and  the  new  building  as  the  White  Division. 
At  the  same  time,  the  company  remodeled  a  smaller 
building  near  its  White  Division  which  is  occupied 
as  sales  headquarters. 

In  1953  Anvil  Brand  acquired  all  capital  stock  of 
the  27-year-old  Sherrod  Shirt  Company  of  High 
Point  which  operated  an  auxiliary  factory  at  Inde- 
pendence, Va.  These  became  known  as  the  Sherrod 
Division  and  the  Independence  Division. 

Mr.  Kirchofer  and  his  associates  set  about  to  re- 
style  the  Tractor  Brand  lines  of  men's  work  shirts 
produced  at  the  Sherrod  Division  as  well  as  the  line 
of  men's  pants  produced  at  Independence.  The  physi- 
cal plants  also  were  made  the  subject  of  detailed 
engineering  studies  which  re- 
sulted in  extensive  renovation 
and  modernization. 

During  the  coordinating  of 
production  facilities  of  Sherrod 
and  Anvil  Brand,  market  distri- 
bution was  continued  under  their 
respective  trade-marks.  Detail- 
ed market  studies,  however,  con- 
vinced officers  of  Anvil  Brand, 
Inc.,  that  dealer  and  consumer 
acquaintanceship  with  the  Trac- 
tor name  warranted  its  continu- 
ance on  an  expanded  scale.  As 
an  outgrowth  of  their  analysis  a 
diversified  line  of  apparel  was 


,UMMER-FALL,    1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  85 


leveloped  under  the  general  "Tractor  Brand"  identi- 
ication.  Denim  work  clothes  for  men  and  boys  in 
hat  line  are  now  identified  by  the  "Tractor  Brand" 
rade-mark,  with  supplementary  names  of  "Shera- 
on"  for  men's  and  boys'  sportswear,  "Dotty  Kay" 
or  utility  and  sports  garments  for  women,  misses 
nd  girls,  and  "Sedgefield"  to  designate  a  popular 
>riced  group  of  utility  garments.  All  apparel  bear- 
ng  the  Tractor  and  the  above  supplementary  brands 
s  distributed  through  a  selling'  organization  wholly 
listinct  from  that  of  Anvil  Brand,  salesmen  offering 
he  new  Tractor  line  in  retail  channels  for  the  first 
ime  in  August  1954. 

Currently  Anvil  Brand  enjoys  nationwide  distri- 
>ution  among  some  12,000  independent  retail  stores, 
)perating  its  own  sales  organization  of  30  to  35  rep- 
•esentatives  in  addition  to  commission  jobbers  on 
;he  west  coast.  Its  distribution  also  reaches  into 
3uerto  Rico,  and  the  company  maintains  a  constant 
study  toward  possible  future  expansion  into  South 
md  Central  America. 

The  company  purchases  over  75  %  of  its  cloth  from 
;he  southeastern  states,  with  most  of  its  denim  coni- 
ng from  North  Carolina  cloth  producers. 

During  World  War  II,  Anvil  Brand  produced  fa- 
;igue  uniforms  for  the  Navy. 

Anvil  Brand  has  long  maintained  an  outstanding 
'ecord  of  labor  relations  and  cites  the  large  number 
)f  long-time  employes  and  the  number  of  mother- 
laughter  and  mother-son  combinations  among  its 
ndustrial  family.  A  total  of  42  employes  are  mem- 
)ers  of  the  company's  25-year  club. 

To  maintain  its  excellent  relations,  the  company 
)ffers  its  employees  an  outstanding  group  accident 
md  health  insurance  program.  Employees  get  one- 
veek  paid  vacations  after  being  with  the  company 
:'or  one  year  and  two-week  paid  vacations  after  five 
/ears  of  service. 

An  annual  picnic  which  last  year  drew  an  attend- 
mce  of  some  1,900  employees  and  members  of  their 
iamilies,  is  held  to  honor  new  members  of  the  25- 
rear  club  and  to  provide  entertainment  and  relaxa- 
;ion. 

The  employe  publication  "Sew  It  Seams"  is  de- 
/oted  to  pictures  and  stories  about  the  plant  person- 
lel  and  is  published  monthly. 

The  company  president,  Mr.  Kirchofer,  who  main- 
;ains  offices  in  High  Point  and  in  Raleigh,  is  also 


One  of  Anvil  Brand's  fully  equipped  sewing  rooms 

chairman  of  the  board  of  Harris  Foundry  and  Ma- 
chine Company  in  Cordele,  Ga. ;  is  president  of  Kir- 
chofer and  Arnold,  Raleigh  investment  bankers,  and 
is  president  of  the  Morehead  City  Shipbuilding  Cor- 
poration. 

With  Mr.  Kirchofer  as  president  and  chairman  of 
the  board  of  directors,  other  Anvil  Brand  officers 
are  F.  D.  Mehan,  executive  vice-president;  H.  M. 
Webster,  Jr.,  and  W.  J.  Rives,  vice-presidents;  G.  K. 
Hammes,  secretary-treasurer ;  H.  T.  Short,  assistant 
vice-president;  M.  H.  Gupton,  assistant  treasurer, 
and  R.  N.  Morgan,  E.  H.  McCall  and  Helen  D. 
Hughes,  assistant  secretaries.  The  board  of  direc- 
tors is  composed  of  R.  C.  Kirchofer,  chairman;  F.  D. 
Mehan,  H.  M.  Webster,  Jr.,  S.  S.  Stevenson,  G.  E. 
Anderson,  G.  W.  Williams  and  G.  K.  Hammes. 


Ine  of  three  Anvil  Brand  cutting  rooms,  capacity  more  than 
\      50,000  yds.  of  various  fabrics  daily 


BLUE  GEM  MFG.  CO. 
Greensboro,  N.  C. 

Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.,  1301  Carolina  Street,  Greens- 
boro, is  the  successor  to  the  former  Greensboro  Over- 
all Co.  The  original  charter  was  issued  to  the 
Greensboro  Overall  Co.  in  1934,  and  the  original 
officers  were  Milton  H.  Zauber,  Sr.,  Milton  Weinstein 
and  Herbert  S.  Falk.  The  company  was  incorpo- 
rated with  a  paid  in  capital  of  $100,000.  Its  capital 
structure  has  been  expanded  until  its  capital  assets 
now  exceed  $1,000,000. 

The  present  officers  of  this  company  are  Milton 
H.  Zauber,  Sr.,  president  and  treasurer ;  Al  W.  Proc- 
tor, executive  vice-president  and  sales  manager; 
Milton  Weinstein,  vice-president  in  charge  of  Man- 
ufacturing; John  A.  Huffines,  secretary;  Tom  H. 
Proctor,  vice-president,  and  Herbert  S.  Falk,  gen- 
eral counsel.  The  officers  constitute  the  board  of 
directors. 

The  company  utilized  the  major  part  of  1934  in 
setting  up  its  organization  in  getting  production 
under  way.  The  total  volume  of  business  in  1934 
was  a  very  nominal  amount.  In  1935  the  company 
produced  and  sold  a  substantial  volume,  and  found  it 
necessary  to  expand  its  facilities  in  1936.  Sales  con- 
tinued to  expand  right  along  and  the  company  found 
it  necessary  to  increase  production  during  that  pe- 
riod. In  1940  it  was  necessary  to  add  additional 
space  by  constructing  a  substantial  addition  to  the 
facilities  in  Greensboro. 

Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.  continued  to  make  progress 
all  through  the  war  years.  A  great  portion  of  the 
production  was  utilized  in  working  for  Army  and 


PAGE  86 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195 


-\ 


• 


One  of  the  large  and  modern  industrial  buildings  operated  by 
Blue  Gem,  Inc.,  Greensboro,  in  producing  work  and  play  clothes 

Navy  cotton  garment  requirements,  and  also  in  the 
production  of  pup  tents  in  good  sized  quantities. 

In  1949  Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.  purchased  from  Bur- 
lington Mills  a  modern  industrial  building  in  Ashe- 
boro  containing  40,000  sq.  ft.  of  space.  This  branch 
plant  is  actively  engaged  in  producing  denim  gar- 
ments. Approximately  225  people  are  gainfully  em- 
ployed in  the  Asheboro  plant. 

The  main  unit  in  Greensboro  manufactures  a  com- 
plete line  of  all  cotton  items  that  are  utilized  in  this 
type  of  manufacturing,  consisting  of  juvenile  gar- 
ments from  size  1  to  6,  children's  garments  from  7 
to  14,  and  a  complete  line  of  ladies'  jeans,  and  also 
a  complete  line  of  boys'  and  men's  overalls. 

An  interesting  fact  entering  into  the  changes  that 
have  taken  place  in  this  business  is  that  at  the  be- 
ginning of  this  operation  in  1934  the  firm  manufac- 
tured 100%  men's  and  boys'  denim 
overalls  and  jackets,  and  today  the 
overall  percentage  of  the  produc- 
tion has  been  decreased  to  approx- 
imately 20  % .  The  balance  of  80  % 
of  the  production  is  now  distribut- 
ed in  garments  made  out  of  denim 
and  cotton  twills  in  various  colors 
in  juvenile,  girls'  and  ladies'  gar- 
ments, and  men's  and  boys'  dun- 
garees. 

Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.  employs  ap- 
proximately 600  people,  with  an 
annual  payroll  in  excess  of  $1,- 
000,000.  Its  gross  sales  now  range 
between  five  and  six  million  dollars 
annually. 

The  three  principal  officers  of 
Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.  were  officially 
connected  with  Blue  Bell,  Inc.  un- 
til 1933.  In  December  1933,  Mil- 
ton H.  Zauber,  Sr.,  sold  his  interest 
in  Blue  Bell,  Inc.  and  resigned  the 

One  of  many  lines         „,.  „      .   '  .  ,       .        ° 

of  Blue  Gem  work,     office  of  vice-president. 

and  play  clothes  Mr.  Zauber,  a  native  of  Philadel- 


phia, started  in  the  overall  business  in  1917  in  Jellicc 
Tennessee.  In  1920  Mr.  Zauber  moved  to  Middles 
boro,  Kentucky,  where  he  took  charge  of  productioi 
with  the  Big  Ben  Mfg.  Co.,  the  concern  which  bough 
out  Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  in  1925.  In  1926  he  move< 
to  Greensboro,  assuming  the  office  of  first  vice-presi 
dent  of  Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  in  charge  of  production 
which  position  he  held  until  1933.  At  that  time  hi 
resigned  for  the  purpose  of  starting  the  Blue  Gen 
Mfg.  Co. 

Mr.  Weinstein,  a  native  of  Middlesboro,  Kentucky 
became  affiliated  with  Big  Ben  Overall  organizatioi 
and  subsequently  moved  to  Greensboro,  N.  C,  as 
suming  a  position  with  Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  in  1929 
He  remained  in  charge  of  Plant  No.  2  for  Blue  Bel 
until  he  joined  Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co.  in  li)34. 

Mr.  Al  W.  Proctor,  a  native  of  Tennessee,  was 
formerly  connected  with  Goodyear  Kubber  Co.  ii 
charge  of  its  New  Orleans  office,  lie  became  affiliat- 
ed with  Blue  Bell  Overall  Co.  in  1928  in  the  Sales  De- 
partment and  remained  with  this  firm  until  October 
1934,  at  which  time  he  became  associated  with  Mr 
Zauber  and  Mr.  Weinstein  in  the  Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co 

Blue  Gem  looks  forward  to  continued  progress. 


o: 


SICELOFF  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  INC. 
Lexington,  N.  C. 

Siceloff  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  Pugh  Street. 
Lexington,  was  organized  in  1909  by  David  Sim 
Siceloff,  Sr.,  to  manufacture  work  pants  and  over- 
alls. This  firm,  starting  modestly,  now  produces 
approximately  4,700,000  units  a  year,  and  its  gross 
annual  sales  have  increased  to  approximately  $7, 
000,000. 

Mr.  Siceloff  purchased  at  a  bankruptcy  sale  the 
assets  of  the  Eureka  Trouser  Co.,  which  had  been 
started  in  1900  by  John  W.  Noell,  for  many  years 
editor  and  publisher  of  the  Roxboro  Courier,  now  the 
Roxboro  Courier-Times.  Mr.  Siceloff  continue  to  ope- 
rate the  plant,  as  sole  owner,  making  several  addi 
tions  during  the  years,  until  the  firm  was  incorporat- 
ed June  30,  1935.  He  continued  as  president  and 
treasurer  of  the  corporation  until  his  death  in  1938. 
The  firm  is  still  owned  by  members  of  the  Siceloff 
family. 

Siceloff  continued  to  make  work  clothes  and  added 
play  clothes  for  the  entire  family,  for  men,  women, 


A  bicycle  beauty  with  a  background  display  of  work  and  play 
clothes  made  by  Siceloff  Mfg.  Co.,  Lexington 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  87 


Doys  and  girls,  consisting  of  matched  pants  and 
shirts,  dungarees,  overalls,  western  jeans,  girls'  and 
ladies'  jeans,  kiddies'  overalls,  dunagrees  and  boxers, 
sports  shirts  for  men  and  boys,  jackets,  lined  and 
anlined,  for  men  and  boys,  work  shirts  and  sports 
shirts. 

Siceloff  has  developed  several  trade-names  for  its 
products  which  are  nationally  advertised  and  sold 
;hroughout  the  nation.  These  include  "Big-Dad" 
men's  pants  and  matching  shirts,  named  for  the 
founder  of  the  firm;  "Happy  Jim"  dungarees  and 
overalls  for  men  and  boys,  named  for  James  L.  Sice- 
off  before  his  death  in  1946;  "Lil-Dad"  overalls, 
dungarees,  and  pants  for  boys;  "Cowhide"  western 
jeans  for  men  and  boys ;  "Silver  Springs"  sports 
shirts  for  men  and  boys,  and  "Jolly  Jeans"  for  girls 
and  ladies. 

Siceloff  produces  approximately  7,000  dozen  gar- 
ments of  all  numbers  weekly,  with  annual  gross  sales 
of  approximately  $7,000,000.  The  Lexington  plant 
contains  approximately  250,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space, 
all  in  one  large  and  modern  building,  equipped  with 
bhe  most  modern  machinery.  The  building  is  fur- 
nished in  restful  colors  and  music  is  produced  over  a 
loud  speaker  system  15  minutes  of  each  hour. 

In  the  Lexington  plant  approximately  500  work- 
ers are  employed,  with  an  annual  payroll  that  ranges 
around  $950,000.  The  firm  operates  a  cafeteria  seat- 
ing about  500,  for  lunch,  operated  on  a  cost  basis. 
All  employees  are  covered  by  hospital  and  surgical 
insurance  in  a  joint  program,  the  company  paying 
about  60  °/c  of  the  premiums.  All  employees  look  for- 
ward to  the  annual  Christmas  dinner  at  which  all  are 
presented  gifts  from  the  firm.  Gifts  have  been  given 
each  year  for  over  30  years. 

In,  1951  the  Siceloff  firm  acquired  a  branch  plant 
in  Starke,  Fla.,  which  contains  about  40,000  sq.  ft. 
|f  floor  space  and  employs  around  150  workers,  with 
an  annual  payroll  in  the  neighborhood  of  $250,000. 
Recently  Siceloff  has  established  a  large  warehouse 
to  take  care  of  its  extensive  business  on  the  West 
Coast.  This  operation,  under  the  name  of  Big-Dad 
Sales  Corp.,  is  located  in  Los  Angeles,  Calif. 

Siceloff  products  are  sold  under  the  company's 
well-established  brands  by  its  own  sales  force  of  30 
salesmen  who  cover  the  entire  United  States  and 
some  foreign  countries.  The  New  York  office  is 
ocated  at  1006  Empire  State  Building.  Siceloff 
products  are  sold  to  wholesalers,  retailers,  depart- 
ment and  chain  stores. 

Denims,  sports  denims  and  other  materials  used 
in  the  manufacture  of  Siceloff  products  are  purchas- 
ed largely  from  such  North  Carolina  manufacturers 
as  Cone  Mills,  Erwin  Mills,  Dacotah  Cotton  Mills, 
Lexington,  and  others.    Thread  comes  from  Spindale 

One  of  modern  work  and  play  clothes  plants  operated  by 
Siceloff  Mfg.  Co.,  Lexington 


Big-Dad  work  clothes  plant  of  Siceloff  Mfg.  Co.,  Lexington 

and  Lincolnton,  and  shipping  containers  and  boxes 
are  purchased  from  Container  Corp.  of  America, 
Greensboro;  Highland  Container  Co.,  Jamestown; 
National  Container  Co.,  Salisbury;  and  Durham  Con- 
tainer Co.  Piece  goods  are  hauled  to  the  Lexington 
plant  from  the  mills  in  two  big  company  trucks. 

D.  S.  Siceloff,  Sr.  founded  the  company  and  con- 
tinued to  head  the  firm  until  his  health  began  to  fail 
in  1936,  earlier  as  sole  owner,  and  after  1935  as  pres- 
ident and  treasurer  until  his  death  in  1938.  His  son, 
D.  S.  Siceloff,  Jr.,  then  only  23  years  old,  succeeded 
him  in  1938  as  president,  treasurer,  and  general  man- 
ager. In  fact,  all  of  his  five  sons,  four  now  living, 
became  officers  of  the  firm.  E.  A.  Siceloff  became 
vice-president  in  1936  and  James  L.  Siceloff  was 
made  secretary.  In  1946,  when  James  L.  Siceloff 
died,  several  changes  were  made  in  the  officers.  D. 
S.  Siceloff,  Jr.,  continued  as  president,  treasurer,  and 
general  manager,  and  E.  A.  Siceloff  continued  as 
first  vice-president.  E.  J.  Meiere,  Jr.,  entered  the 
business  as  industrial  engineer  and  was  named  sec- 
ond vice-president.  Mrs.  D.  S.  Siceloff,  Jr.,  became 
third  vice-president,  and  L.  P.  Siceloff  was  named 
fourth  vice-president.  At  that  time,  too,  Fred  L. 
Siceloff  was  made  secretary. 

D.  S.  Siceloff,  Sr.,  founder,  a  native  of  Midway 
Township,  Davidson  County,  a  farm  boy,  attended 
Yadkin  College  and  was  a  graduate  of  Oak  Ridge 
Institute.  After  taking  a  business  course  he  went 
to  work  in  1904  for  the  Eureka  Trouser  Co.,  the  firm 
he  purchased  five  years  later  at  a  foreclosure  sale. 
For  12  years  he  was  chairman  of  the  board  of  Dav- 
idson County  Commissioners,  treasurer  of  the  First 
Methodist  Church  for  more  than  20  years  and  mem- 
ber of  its  Board  of  Stewards  until  his  death.  He  was 
also  a  bank  president  and  was  a 
member  of  the  Lexington  Board 
of  City  Commissioners  for  sev- 
eral years. 

D.  S.  Siceloff,  Jr.,  his  succes- 
sor, still  president  of  the  com- 
pany, attended  Duke  and  Caro- 
lina, one  year  each,  then  had  to 
return  home  to  handle  the  busi- 
ness   at    the    plant    during    his 


Page  88 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195- 


father's  illness.  When  23  years  old,  he  succeeded 
his  father  as  president  and  treasurer  of  the  firm.  He 
has  served  as  chairman  of  the  Board  of  Stewards  of 
the  First  Methodist  Church  for  several  years,  chair- 
man of  the  Board  of  County  Commissioners  for  four 
years,  director  of  the  Commercial  Bank  of  Lexing- 
ton and  of  the  Mutual  Building  and  Loan  Associa- 
tion, Lexington.  The  three  surviving  brothers,  E. 
A.,  Fred  L.,  and  L.  P.  Siceloff,  officers  in  the  firm, 
are  also  active  in  civic  affairs. 

W.  KOURY  COMPANY,  INC. 

Sanford,  N.  C. 

W.  Koury  Company,  Inc.,  Sanford,  manufacturer 
of  trousers,  shirts  and  riding  breeches,  was  organ- 
ized and  incorporated  in  December,  1934,  in  Greens- 
boro and  started  operations  in  a  small  way.  The 
firm  is  now  one  of  the  large  and  successful  garment 
manufacturing  firms  in  the  State,  with  gross  annual 
sales  extending  into  millions  of  dollars. 

The  firm  was  organized  by  W.  Koury,  who  is  pres- 
ident and  treasurer,  and  his  brother,  Fred  Koury, 
vice-president,  with  R.  M.  Varnon  as  secretary.  The 
firm  then  had  about  50  employees  operating  in  a 
space  60  x  150  feet  in  the  old  Daily  News  Record 
Building,  back  of  the  O'Henry  Hotel.  For  several 
years  the  plant  manufactured  trousers  only.  In  1940 
the  firm  moved  into  a  building  erected  as  a  shirt  fac- 
tory on  South  Elm  Street.  This  rented  building- 
more  than  doubled  the  original  space.  About  that 
time  the  firm  began  the  manufacture  of  shirts  also. 

In  1947  the  firm  built  a  branch  plant  in  Sanford, 
in  which  to  make  shirts  only,  and  in  1949  an  addi- 
tion was  built  in  Sanford  and  the  Greensboro  head- 
quarters and  office  moved  into  this  space,  consolidat- 
ing all  activities  in  Sanford.  In  1950  still  another 
addition  was  built,  giving  the  plant  now  approxi- 
mately 60,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space.  The  firm 
has  indefinite  plans  for  further  expansion  in  the 
future  and  for  air-conditioning  the  entire  plant. 

Men's  work  pants  are  still  the  largest  item  in 
production,  although  the  firm  also  produces  men's 
work  shirts  and  sports  shirts  and  boys'  sportswear. 
Principal  material  used  is  cotton,  with  some  rayon, 
largely  from  North  Carolina  mills,  including  Cone, 
Burlington  Mills  and  others.  Men's  work  pants  are 
made  to  retail  from  $2.98  to  $5.98.  Men's  work 
shirts  and  sports  shirts  retail  from  $1.98  to  $3.98, 
while  men's  and  boys'  sportswear  have  retail  prices 
ranging  from  $1.49  to  $4.98.  The  Koury  firm  manu- 
factures two  well-known  and  widely  distributed 
clothing  items,  "O.  Henry"  for  work  clothes  and 
"William  Tell"  for  sportswear  and  boys'  wear.  These 
items  are  also  produced  under  private  brands  of 
numbers  of  the  larger  customers. 

Production  has  now  reached  2,000,000  trousers 

Extensive  plant  and  headquarters  office  of  W.  Koury  Co., 
Sanford,  manufacturing  work  and  play  clothes 


One  of  many  items  of  work 

and  play  clothes  made  oy 

W.  Kourv  Co. 


and  shirts  annually.  Distri 
bution  is  principally  in  th< 
southeastern  states,  al 
though  some  sales  are  madi 
throughout  the  nation 
Sales  are  made  to  depart 
ment  and  chain  stores  anc 
unit  stores.  All  sales  an 
handled  through  the  firm'! 
headquarters  office  in  San 
ford. 

In  1938  Fred  Koury  sole 
his  interest  in  the  organiza 
tion  to  the  campany,  anc 
about  the  same  time  Barrj 
Beard  joined  the  firm  as  as- 
sistant to  the  president 
Present  officers  are  W. 
Koury,  chairman  of  the 
board;  Joseph  D.  Koury, 
his  son,  president  and  treas- 
urer; Barry  Beard,  vice- 
president,  and  Robin  Kou- 
ry, another  son,  is  assistant 
secretary.  W.  N.  Crowder  is  plant  superintendent.' 
The  Koury  firm  now  employs  approximately  350 
workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $700,- 
000.  As  noted,  the  gross  sales  now  run  into  the  mil- 
lions. 

W.  Koury,  founder  of  the  industry,  is  a  native  of 
Greensboro,  whose  parents  were  Syrians.  He  and 
his  brother,  Fred,  were  dry  goods  jobbers  in  Greens- 
boro several  years  before  he  decided  to  establish  his 
own  plant.  Mrs.  Koury  is  a  Roundtree  from  Kin- 
ston.  J.  D.  Koury,  also  a  native  of  Greensboro,  grew 
up  in  the  business.  He  attended  The  Citadel  at 
Charleston,  S.  C,  and  is  a  graduate  of  the  Univer- 
sity of  North  Carolina.  He  was  a  fighter  pilot  dur- 
ing World  War  II.  Robin  Koury  attended  State 
College  and  joined  the  firm  in  1951. 

Mr.  Beard,  a  native  of  Iredell  County,  was  in  the 
wholesale  dry  goods  business  in  Winston-Salem  for 
several  years  until  1929.  He  was  with  the  Bankers 
Trust  Co.  in  New  York  City  for  five  years  and  for 
two  years  was  an  accountant  with  The  A.  M.  Pullen 
Co.  He  has  been  with  the  Koury  firm  since  1938  and 
was  elected  vice-president  several  years  ago. 


DEVIL-DOG  MFG.  CO.,  INC. 
Zebulon,  Wendell,  Spring  Hope,  N.  C. 

Devil-Dog  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc.,  a  division  of  General 
Sportswear  Co.,  Inc.,  Ellenville,  N.  Y.,  has  establish- 
ed three  plants  in  North  Carolina  to  manufacture 
denim  dungarees  and  various  types  of  women's  and 
children's  sportswear  at  Wendell,  Spring  Hope  and 
Zebulon.  Headquarters  for  the  three  North  Caro- 
lina plants  has  been  established  at  the  Zebulon  plant. 

The  Wendell  plant  was  opened 
July  1,  1952  in  the  building  con- 
structed by  the  town  of  Wendell 
and  leased  to  the  firm  for  a  pe- 
riod of  years.  This  building 
contains  15,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor 
space,  and  the  plant  employs 
around  125  workers,  with  maxi- 
mum employment  of  180  work- 
ers.   The  Wendell  plant  manu- 


Summer-fall,  195^ 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  89 


f& 


factures    dungarees    and    chil- 
dren's boxer  longies,  or  slacks. 

The  Spring  Hope  plant  was 
opened  in  September,  1953,  and 
is  engaged  in  making  children's 
shirts  and  jackets  of  the  western 
type,  flannel  lined.  Denim  and 
isimilar  materials  are  used.  This 
plant  also  is  leased  for  a  term  of 
years,  contains  8,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  and  em- 
ploys about  90  workers,  with  a  maximum  of  100 
workers. 

The  Zebulon  plant,  recently  completed,  is  owned 
by  the  Devil-Dog  firm.  This  is  a  modern,  one-story, 
brick  and  concrete  building,  containing  35,000  sq.  ft. 
of  floor  space.  In  addition  to  providing  headquar- 
ters' office  space,  it  now  houses  the  Cutting  Depart- 
ment for  the  other  two  plants  and  the  Shipping  De- 
partment. Provision  is  made  at  this  plant  to  pro- 
duce some  lines  of  the  company's  products,  although 
plans  for  production  are  not  complete.  Finally,  prob- 
ably 200  workers  will  be  employed  in  this  plant. 

The  three  plants  at  Wendell,  Spring  Hope  and  Zeb- 
ulon form  a  complete  unit  from  which  the  finished 
garments  will  be  produced.  Their  operations  involve 
many  steps,  the  principal  ones  being  cutting,  sewing, 
finishing,  processing,  inspecting  and  shipping  the 
finished  products  by  train  or  truck. 

General  Sportswear  Co.  of  Ellenville,  N.  Y.,  was 
organized  in  1912  by  Hyman  Rosenstock,  who  con- 
tinued as  individual  owner  for  several  years.  The 
company  was  incorporated  and  after  his  retirement 
in  1930,  his  son  Louis  Rosenstock,  who  had  started 
work  in  the  plant  at  15  years  of  age,  became  presi- 
dent. Stanley  Rosenstock  is  vice-president  and  Je- 
rome Rosenstock  is  secretary.  It  is  still  a  family 
owned  organization. 

Elliot  Rieger  and  Lee  Doliner,  sons-in-law  of  Pres- 
ident Louis  Rosenstock,  are  in  charge  of  operations 
of  the  southern  division,  which  includes  the  three 
plants  in  this  State.  Both  now  reside  in  Raleigh. 
Mr.  Rieger,  a  native  of  New  York  State,  was  dis- 
charged from  military  service  in  1945  and  started 
work  for  the  company  in  1946.  He  moved  to  Raleigh 
in  June,  1952,  to  handle  operations  at  the  Wendell 
plant  and  later  at  the  Spring  Hope  plant.  Mr.  Dol- 
iner, also  a  New  York  State  native,  and  in  military 
service  during  World  War  II,  also  started  work  for 
the  company  in  1946.  Last  summer  he  also  moved 
his  residence  to  Raleigh,  and  he  and  Mr.  Rieger  are 
handling  operations  in  the  three  nearby  plants. 

Products  of  the  Devil-Dog  Mfg.  Co.  and  the  parent 
organization,  General  Sportswear  Co.,  are  sold  na- 
tionally and  for  export  under  several  well-known 
brand  names,  such  as  "Devil-Dog  Dungarees", 
"Rompovers",  "Ulster,  Jr.",  and  "Top-Kick."  The 
company  also  operates  four  plants  in  Ellenville,  N. 
Y.,  and  vicinity,  manufacturing  garments  similar  to 
those  produced  in  this  State. 


WHITEVILLE  MFG.  CO. 

(Blue  Jeans) 

Whiteville,  N.  C. 

Whiteville  Mfg.  Co.,  Wilmington  Rd.,  Whiteville, 
a  subsidiary  of  Blue  Jeans  Corporation,  New  York 
City,  was  organized  June  1,  1952,  to  manufacture 
from  denim  boys'  and  girls'  play  suits,  including 


Baldwin  Studio,  Whiteville,  N.  C. 

Whiteville  Mfg.  Co.  plant  of  Blue  Jeans  Corp.,  Whiteville,  mak- 
ing Indian,  Cowboy  and  Western  suits  for  boys  and,  girls 

trousers,  jackets  and  shirts.  This  firm  has  been  so 
successful  that  two  additions  have  been  made  to  the 
plant  in  two  years  and  the  operations  are  again 
bursting  as  the  seeds.  The  company  is  a  licensed 
producer  of  "Lone  Ranger",  "Disneyland",  "Wild 
Bill  Hickok"  garments,  and  "Plainsman"  sets. 

The  new  one-story  air-conditioned  building  of 
steel,  concrete  and  brick  was  erected  by  a  group  of 
Whiteville  citizens  organized  as  the  Columbus  Build- 
ing Co.  in  order  to  provide  space  for  the  Blue  Jeans 
Corporation.  It  was  leased  by  the  Whiteville  Mfg. 
Co.  for  a  term  of  years  with  option  to  purchase.  Last 
spring  this  holding  company  made  arrangements  to 
purchase  the  building.  The  plant  cost  approximate- 
ly $200,000.  The  site  contains  eight  acres,  giving 
plenty  of  space  for  expected  future  expansion.  The 
additions  were  made  in  1953  and  1954,  giving  a  total 
of  30,000  sq.  ft.  of  space. 

The  Whiteville  Mfg.  Co.  is  utilizing  all  available 
space  and  at  times  production  work  is  carried  on  in 
the  limited  office  space.  For  months  the  plant  has 
operated  over-time  daily  and  Saturdays  with  time 
and  a  half  pay  for  its  employees.  The  firm  employs 
about  210  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  of  approx- 
imately half  a  million  dollars.  In  addition,  this  firm 
has  under  contract  for  Blue  Jeans  three  garment 
producing  firms,  taking  the  complete  output  of  the 
Commerce  Manufacturing  Co.,  Commerce,  Ga.,  the 
Cornelia  Manufacturing  Co..  Cornelia,  Ga.  and  the 
DeLuxe  Wash  Suit  Co.,  Madison,  Ga. 

Gross  annual  sales  of  the  WTiiteville  firm  have 
reached  approximately  $2,500,000  and  production 
is  now  at  the  rate  of  about  1,250,000  units  annually 
of  the  name  brands  "Lone  Ranger",  "Disneyland", 
and  "Wild  Bill  Hickok"  dungarees  and  "Plainsman" 
sets.  They  are  sold  nation-wide  and  garments  in 
export  trade  are  shipped  to  Canada,  Hawaii,  South 
America  and  Europe  and  are  sold  to  the  United 
States    Army    for    distribution    through    Post    Ex- 


Baldwin  Studio,  Whiteville,  N.  C. 

Seiving  room  in  Whiteville  plant  of  Blue  Jeans  Corp, 


PAGE  90 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  195- 


Play  clothes  made  by  Blue 
Jeans  at  Whiteville  plant 


changes  to  the  families  of 
American  officials  wher- 
ever located  throughout  the 
world.  These  boys' and  girls' 
play  suits  are  distributed 
through  department  stores, 
specialty  stores  and  some 
chain  stores  such  as  Macy's, 
Montgomery  Ward,  Mar- 
shall Field,  Best  &  Co.  and 
many  others. 

These  play  suits  are  made 
from  denim,  quills,  sport 
denims,  seersucker  and  oth- 
er light  materials.  Retail 
prices  of  dungarees  range 
from  $1.98  to  $3.98;  shirts  retail  for  $2.98  and  up 
and  the  range  of  sets  is  from  $4.98  up.  Practically 
all  of  the  piece  goods  used  at  Whiteville  and  much  of 
the  materials  used  at  other  Blue  Jeans'  plants  are 
manufactured  in  North  Carolina  by  Cone,  Erwin, 
J.  P.  Stevens  and  other  firms.  Sales  are  handled 
through  the  Blue  Jeans  Corporation  sales  office  at 
230  Fifth  Ave.,  New  York  City  by  a  sales  force  which 
practically  covers  the  nation. 

The  Blue  Jeans  firm  at  Whiteville  enjoys  splendid 
employer-employee  relations.  All  workers  are  em- 
ployed and  trained  locally.  The  firm  was  staffed  with 
the  assistance  of  the  Lumberton  Employment  Office, 
which  administered  aptitude  tests  and  selected  and 
referred  workers  to  the  plant.  The  firm  provides 
life  insurance  for  all  employees.  Each  July  a  week's 
vacation  is  given  and  employees  are  paid  two  per 
cent  of  their  annual  salary  at  that  time,  with  the 
annual  picnic  July  4.  They  are  given  three  or  four 
paid  holidays  during  the  year.  An  annual  Christmas 
party  is  held  and  gifts  are  presented  to  all  employees. 
Free  coffee  is  served  at  coffee  periods  daily,  and 
each  employee  is  presented  a  birthday  cake  on  his  or 
her  natal  day. 

Principal  officers  of  the  Whiteville  firm,  who  are 
also  principal  officers  of  the  Blue  Jeans  Corporation, 
are  Joel  Levitt,  president  and  treasurer,  Mrs.  Joel 
Levitt,  secretary,  both  of  New  York  City,  and 
Charles  S.  Pastor,  vice-president  and  general  man- 
ager. Junius  K.  Powell  is  local  attorney  for  the  cor- 
poration. 

Mr.  Pastor,  vice-president  and  general  manager, 
a  native  of  New  York  City,  has  been  in  the  garment 
business  for  40  years.  When  10  years  old,  he  started 
work  in  his  father's  plant  during  vacation  period 
and  not  many  years  later  became  a  full-time  worker. 
He  has  been  with  the  Blue  Jeans  Corporation  for  five 
years  and  moved  to  Whiteville  to  open  and  start  the 
plant  there  in  1952.  He  is  now  a  full  fledged  resi- 
dent and  takes  an  active  part  in  civic  affairs.  His 
son,  Alan  Pastor,  also  in  garment  production  from 
his  youth,  is  assistant  manager  of  the  Whiteville 
plant. 


SMART  STYLE,  INC. 

Asheboro,  N.  C. 

Smart  Style,  Inc.,  Country  Club  Road,  Asheboro, 
was  organized  and  incorporated  in  February,  1954, 
and  in  less  than  a  year  of  operation  has  more  than 
doubled  production  space  for  the  manufacture  of 
cowboy  and  Indian  play  suits  for  boys  and  girls. 


Indian  suits,  left,  and  Texas  Cowboy  outfits  made  by 
Smart  Style,  Inc.,  Asheboro 

Moreover,  plans  are  being  made  to  expand  produc 
tion  space  by  one-third  in  1955. 

Smart  Style  is  owned  and  operated  by  Lawrence 
G.  Schwarz,  who  was  induced  to  come  to  North  Caro- 
lina by  the  State  Department  of  Conservation  and 
Development.  The  Asheboro  office  of  the  Employ- 
ment Security  Commission  assisted  in  staffing  the 
plant  by  testing  and  referring  suitable  workers. 

The  firm  purchased  a  three-acre  site  which  in- 
cluded the  former  Harvel  Hosiery  plant,  containing 
10,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  This  building  was  re 
conditioned  and  equipped  with  modern  machines.  In 
May,  1954,  an  addition  was  built  containing  15,000 
sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  The  plant  and  equipment  have 
a  valuation  of  around  $150,000.  Sufficient  space  is 
provided  for  extensive  expansion  including  the  ad- 
dition in  1955  of  about  12,000  sq.  ft.  more  of  pro- 
duction space.  The  firm  now  employs  about  160 
workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging  around 
$200,000. 

Smart  Style  produces  western  play  suits  (cowboy 
and  Indian)  for  boys  and  girls,  and  leather  gun  and 
holster  pistol  sets.  Ages  range  from  three  to  10 
vears,  and  retail  prices  of  suits  extend  from  $2.00  to 
$10.00.  Trade  names  are  "Betty  Leach"  and  "Smart 
Styles."  All  styling  and  designing  are  done  by  Betty 
Leach,  whose  name  has  become  a  trademark  for  the 
company's  popular  brand.  Principal  materials  for 
these  suits  are  cotton  and  rubberized  suede,  much  of 
the  materials  coming  from  Cone  Mills  and  Sidney 
Blumenthal  Co.,  Rocky  Mount. 

Smart  Style  products  are  distributed  nation-wide, 
with  some  export  business.  They  are  handled 
through  chain  stores,  jobbers  and  mail  order  firms. 
Gross  annual  sales  for  the  first  short  year  will  prob- 
ably range  around  $1,000,000. 

Mr.  Schwarz,  a  native  of  New  York  City,  is  a 
graduate  of  Lafayette  College,  Easton,  Penna.,  and 
took  post-graduate  work  at  Columbia  and  in  Europe. 
He  has  been  in  garment  manufacturing  for  21  years, 
and  for  17  years  operated  a  garment  plant  in  Ridge- 
field,  N.  J.  During  the  last  three  years  of  that  opera- 
tion he  manufactured  cowboy  and  Indian  suits.  Mr. 
Schwarz  is  president,  treasurer  and  general  manager 
of  the  firm,  and  Betty  Leach  is  vice-president  and  sec- 
retary ;  Lawrence  Hammond,  Asheboro  attorney  for 
the  firm,  is  a  third  member  of  the  board  of  directors. 
These  also  are  the  officers  of  Betty  Leach,  Inc.,  an 
affiliated  firm. 

Note — Article  on  The  Salem  Company,   Inc.,   received  too  late  for  this  sec- 
tion, is  on   Pane   1 18. 


: 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  91 


Underwear,  Men,  Women,  Children,  Important  N.C.  Industry 


Underwear  manufacturing  has  been  carried  on  in 
North  Carolina  from  early  Colonial  days,  but  it  was 
not  until  around  the  turn  of  the  century  that  plants 
were  established  on  a  commercial  basis.  Two  of  the 
early  plants  producing  underwear,  P.  H.  Hanes  Knit- 
ting Co.,  Winston-Salem,  admittedly  the  largest  in 
the  world,  starting  soon  after  the  turn  of  the  cen- 
tury, and  Washington  Mills,  Mayodan,  along  with 
other  firms  in  this  category,  are  not  included  in  ap- 
parel manufacturing  but  in  knitting  since  their  prin- 
cipal activities  are  knitting  fabrics  from  which  they 
make  their  garments. 

Oldest  of  the  larger  underwear  plants  now  in  ope- 
ration is  Indera  Mills  Co.,  which  started  in  Winston- 
Salem  in  1914.  Carolina  Underwear  Co.,  second  of 
the  larger  firms,  was  established  in  Thomasville  in 
1928.  The  next  of  the  larger  mills,  Quality  Mills, 
Mount  Airy,  was  started  in  1934,  and  North  Caro- 
lina's largest  underwear  firm  (exclusive  of  knitting) , 
United  Mills  Corp.,  was  established  in  Mount  Gilead 
in  1939.  Numbers  of  smaller  plants  were  established 
during  this  earlier  period  and  many  of  them  still  are 
in  operation.  Several  important  plants  have  been 
established  in  the  past  decade  including  I.  Schneier- 
son  &  Sons,  Inc.,  Randleman,  Siler  City  and  Sanford ; 
Stedman  Manuafcturing  Co.,  Asheboro,  in  1945 ; 
Pinehurst  Textiles,  Inc.,  Asheboro,  Shadowline,  Mor- 
ganton,  and  Dixie  Belle  Textiles,  Inc.,  Greensboro, 
in  1946.  Large  firms  established  in  the  past  two  or 
three  years  are  Bien  Jolie,  Dunn,  L.  &  L.  Manufac- 
turing Co.,  North  Wilkesboro,  Glendale  Manufactur- 
ing Corp.,  Biltmore,  Win-Ann  Manufacturing  Corp,, 
Monroe,  and  several  other  firms. 

Indicating  importance  of  the  underwear  industry 
in  North  Carolina  gross  sales  last  year  (exclusive  of 
knitting)  amounted  to  around  .$42,000,000,  while 
something  like  45,000,000  underwear  garments  were 
manufactured.  Close  to  5,000  workers  are  employed 
in  this  division  of  the  industry  and  the  payroll  is 
around  $12,000,000. 

UNITED  MILLS  CORP. 
Mount  Gilead,  N.  C. 

United  Mills  Corp.,  with  headquarters  and  plants 
at  Mount  Gilead,  and  with  plants  at  Candor  and 
Charlotte,  was  started  by  Mount  Gilead  citizens  in 
order  to  give  needed  industrial  employment  in  this 
rural  area.  The  industry  has  been  so  successful  that 
the  firm  now  produces  around  10,000,000  garments 
a  year  and  gross  annual  sales  range  between  $10,- 
000,000  and  $12,000,000. 

United  Mills  Corp.  was  organized  in  1939  by  Moses 


Three  of  many  lines  of  slips  made 
by  United  Mills  Corp. 


Front  of  office  and  plant  of  United  Mills  Corp.,  Mount  Gilead 


Richter,  Dr.  P.  R. 
Rankin,  Sr.,  Law- 
rence Myers,  W.  R. 
Harris  and  other  lo- 
cal citizens,  and 
started  in  an  old 
remodeled  cotton 
warehouse  contain- 
ing 5,000  sq.  ft,  of 
floor  space.  The  firm 
employed  about  20 
workers  and  began 
production  of  linge- 
rie, which  has  con- 
tinued throughout 
the  years. 

Four  of  the  origi- 
nal founders  are 
still  principal  offi- 
cers, including  Mos- 
es Richter,  for  many 
years  general  man- 
ager, now  president;  Lawrence  Myers,  executive 
vice-president,  treasurer  and  general  manager; 
Dr.  P.  R.  Rankin,  Sr.,  secretary  and  assistant 
treasurer  (inactive),  and  W.  R.  Harris,  vice-presi- 
dent. Other  present  officers  added  during  the  years 
include  Harvey  Brightman,  vice-president  in  charge 
of  the  Brassiere  Division;  Leo  Rose,  vice-president 
in  charge  of  Production ;  Bernard  Richter,  son  of  the 
president,  vice-president  in  charge  of  the  Wholesale 
Division;  Horace  Richter,  another  son,  vice-presi- 
dent in  charge  of  the  New  York  Sales  Office  at  180 
Madison  Ave.,  and  Howard  Dorsett,  assistant  secre- 
tary in  charge  of  all  office  operations.  These  officers 
and  six  other  individuals  form  the  board  of  directors. 

Most  of  the  expansion  of 
United  Mills  Corp.  has  been 
made  during  the  past  eight 
years.  The  first  move  was 
the  addition  of  the  new 
plant  in  Charlotte,  and  in 
1950  the  second  Charlotte 
plant  was  put  in  operation. 
In  1949  a  new  building,  con- 
taining 55,000  sq.  ft.  of 
floor  space,  was  erected  at 
Mount  Gilead,  and  in  the 
same  year  the  firm  bought 
the  Mount  Gilead  Hard- 
ware Building,  turning  it 
into  a  plant  for  designing 
and  for  accessories  produc- 
tion. In  addition,  the  firm 
rents  two  other  Mount  Gil- 
ead buildings  for  produc- 
tion and  service,  and  still 
other  warehouse  buildings 
for  storage.  The  Candor 
plant  was  opened  in  1952. 

United  Mills  now  ope- 
rates in  a  total  of  180,000 
sq.  ft.  of  floor  space,  includ- 
ing 110,000  sq.  ft.   in  the 


Slip,  can  be  used  as  short 
formal,  made  by  United 
Mills  Corp.,  Mount  Gilead 


PAGE  92 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


Mount  Gilead  operations,  25,000  sq.  ft.  at  Candor, 
and  35,000  sq.  ft.  in  the  two  Charlotte  plants,  with 
10,000  sq.  ft.  of  storage  space.  In  the  three  groups 
of  plants,  normal  employment  reaches  about  1300, 
although  the  industry  is  slightly  seasonal,  employ- 
ment at  times  dropping  toward  1,000.  The  annual 
payroll  for  all  plants  ranges  from  $2,750,000  to  $3,- 
000,000.  Normal  employment  at  the  Mount  Gilead 
plant  is  approximately  800  workers,  at  Candor  250 
workers,  and  in  Charlotte  250  workers. 

United  Mills  products  are  distributed  throughout 
the  United  States,  and  the  company's  sales  force  of 
40  representatives  cover  the  entire  nation.  Some  of 
the  business  goes  into  export  trade,  primarily  to 
Central  and  South  America. 

United  Mills  produces  low,  medium  and  high  pric- 
ed undergarments.  Its  ladies'  slips  range  from  $2 
to  $10  in  retail  price.  Brassieres  sell  from  $1  to  $5, 
and  gowns  from  $2.50  to  $10.  The  firm  also  pro- 
duces children's  slips,  teen-age  slips  and  brassieres, 
petticoats  and  sleepwear.  Principal  brands  are 
"Gilead"  and  "Real  Craft"  slips  and  "Jubilee"  bras- 
sieres. The  firm  also  produces  a  "Garcrest"  line  for 
jobbers.  United  Mills  products  are  sold  to  200  whole- 
salers or  jobbers  and  from  10,000  to  15,000  depart- 
ment and  retail  stores  and  specialty  shops.  All  of 
the  synthetic  materials  as  well  as  cotton,  are  used 
in  producing  these  garments,  much  of  the  materials 
coming  from  several  North  Carolina  mills. 

Approximately  90f/o  of  the  United  Mills  employees 
are  women.  Among  the  employee  benefits  are  5% 
of  wages,  distributed  twice  a  year,  and  hospitaliza- 
tion with  surgical  benefits  for  all  employees,  for 
which  premiums  are  paid  entirely  by  the  company. 

Key  personnel  in  United  Mills  operations  include 
David  Lobl,  division  manager  of  the  Mount  Gilead 
and  Candor  plants;  Graham  Smith,  plant  manager 
and  Erling  Jordan,  manager  of  plant  No.  5  at  Mount 
Gileacl ;  Harold  Cranf ord,  plant  manager  at  Candor, 
and  Harry  Galloway,  plant  manager  at  Charlotte. 
Robert  Lavin  is  production  engineer  for  all  of  the 
plants. 


I.  SCHNEIERSON  &  SONS,  INC. 
Randleman — Siler  City — Sanford,  N.  C. 

I.  Schneierson  &  Sons,  Inc.,  with  headquarters 
and  sales  offices  at  389  Fifth  Ave.,  New  York  City, 
for  more  than  50  years  manufacturers  of  the  famous 
nationally-known  "Loomcraft"  brand  of  lingerie  and 
other  garments,  operates  three  important  plants  lo- 
cated in  North  Carolina  at  Randleman,  Siler  City  and 
Sanford.  These  plants  produce  from  4,000,000  to 
5,000,000  garments  annually  and  result  in  multi- 
million  dollars  gross  annual  sales. 


One  of  two  Randleman  plants  of  I.  Schneierson  &  Sons,  pro- 
ducing fine  xmder  garments  in  three  N.  O.  plants 


Other  Randleman  plant  of  I.  Schneierson  &  Sons 

The  first  Schneierson  plant  was  established  at 
Randleman  in  1944.  The  plant  earlier  was  operated 
as  the  Deep  River  Mills,  which  started  early  in  the 
1920's.  The  plant  was  owned  for  several  years  by 
W.  J.  Armfield  III,  of  Asheboro,  who  sold  it  to  Bur- 
lington Mills,  who  operated  it  for  several  years.  It 
was  known  for  several  years  as  Randolph  Under- 
wear Co.  The  Schneierson  firm  purchased  it  in  1944 
and  adapted  it  to  the  manufacture  of  ladies'  slips. 

The  Randleman  plant  consists  of  two  units,  with 
70,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space.  It  employs  about 
425  workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  in  excess  of 
$600,000. 

The  Siler  City  plant  was  established  in  1945,  the 
firm  leasing  the  building  and  equipping  it  with  prop- 
er machines.  The  building  contained  10,500  sq.  ft. 
of  floor  space.  A  year  later,  an  addition  was  built 
and  in  1950  a  second  addition  was  erected,  giving 
this  plant  28,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space.  Form- 
erly this  plant  only  performed  the  sewing  operation, 
but  recently  other  processes  were  added,  including 
cutting  the  patterns  and  shipping  products  direct 
from  the  Siler  City  plant.  This  firm  now  employs 
about  150  workers  with  an  annual  payroll  substan- 
tially in  excess  of  $250,000. 

The  Sanford  plant  was  started  in  1946  in  an  old 
automobile  garage  building,  operating  there  with 
50  or  60  employees  until 
1951.  A  new  building  in 
Jonesboro  Heights  was 
erected  to  company  specifi- 
cations by  several  Sanford 
citizens.  The  firm  now  em- 
ploys about  100  workers, 
with  an  annual  payroll 
close  to  $250,000.  This  is 
a  sewing  plant  only,  the  cut- 
ting being  carried  on  at 
the  Randleman  plant.  The 
building  contains  approxi- 
mately 12,000  sq.  ft  of  floor 
space. 

The  Schneierson  firm  at 
its  three  North  Carolina 
plants  employs  approxi- 
mately 675  workers,  with 
an  annual  payroll  in  excess 
of  $1,000,000.  Practically 
all  of  the  employees  are  na- 
tives of  their  respective 
communities.  Hospitaliza- 
tion and  life  insurance  pol- 
icies are  carried  on  all  em- 
ployees after  a  short  wait- 


One  of  many  lines  of  fine 
slips  made  by  Schneierson 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  93 


Fine  quality  half-slip  made 

by  Schneierson's  Ran- 

clleman  plant 


ing  period,  the  company 
Ipaying  all  premiums.  All 
employees  are  given  one 
week  of  paid  vacation,  and 
those  with  five  years  of 
service  are  given  two  weeks 
of  paid  vacation.  In  addi- 
tion, six  paid  holidays  are 
observed  during  the  year. 
The  firm  has  established  a 
reputation  for  splendid 
treatment  and  good  pay  for 
its  employees  in  all  three  of 
the  plants. 

J.  F.  Parrish  is  general 
manager  of  all  North  Caro- 
lina operations  of  the 
Schneierson  firm,  having 
succeeded  Howard  Sprague 
who  returned  to  Texas  af- 
ter handling  the  firm's  af- 
fairs for  six  years.  His  headquarters  are  at  Ran- 
dleman.  Mr.  Parrish,  a  native  of  Louisburg  and 
graduate  of  Wake  Forest  College,  with  the  B.S. 
Degree  in  Education  in  1935,  taught  in  the  Wash- 
ington High  School  for  two  years.  He  then  took  a 
graduate  course  in  Accounting  at  Carolina  and 
was  bookkeeper  for  Burlington  Mills.  He  also 
was  associated  with  an  ornamental  iron  firm 
in  Greensboro  before  joining  the  predecessor  of  the 
Schneierson  firm  as  office  manager  in  1940.  In  1948 
he  became  manager  of  the  Randleman  operations.  In 
1950  he  was  made  general  manager  of  the  plants  in 
Randleman,  Siler  City  and  Sanford.  Sam  Levine, 
the  assistant  general  manager  of  the  Schneierson 
North  Carolina  plants,  has  been  with  the  organiza- 
tion for  a  score  of  years,  the  last  five  in  his  present 
capacity.  Mr.  Levine  has  had  considerable  training 
in  advertising,  packaging  and  efficiency  studies. 

Gilbert  Christenberry  is  production  manager  of 
the  three  North  Carolina  plants.  James  Patterson 
is  general  manager  and  Mrs.  Margaret  Kirkman  is 
sewing  supervisor  of  the  Siler  City  plant.  Frank 
Foushee  and  Mrs.  Mae  Shinault  are  joint  managers 
of  the  plant  in  Sanford. 

The  three  North  Carolina  plants  are  engaged  in 
the  manufacture  of  ladies'  slips  exclusively,  produc- 
ing all  types,  kinds  and  sizes  in  the  medium  priced 
field.  These  garments  retail  at  prices  ranging  from 
$1  to  $5.  Materials  used  are  cotton,  crepe,  nylon, 
rayon  and  dacron,  from  piece  goods,  quite  a  bit  of 
which  is  made  by  North  Carolina  mills.  Distribu- 
tion is  nation-wide,  some  of  the  products  going  into 
the  export  trade.  The  firm  has  a  large  sales  staff, 
but  in  addition  its  goods  are  distributed  by  wholesale 
firms.  Customers  include  na- 
tional chain,  department  and 
specialty  stores  and  mail  order 
houses.  Much  of  the  garment 
production  in  North  Carolina  is 
distributed  under  the  well  estab- 
lished "Loomcraft"  brand,  but 
national  chain  stores  distribute 
its  products  under  their  own 
brand  names. 

The    well-known    firm    of    I. 
Schneierson   &   Sons,    Iuc.    was 


&*% 


established  in  New  York  City  in 
1900  by  Isaac  Schneierson.  The 
firm  operations  are  now  carried  on 
by  his  sons,  with  Samuel  Schneier- 
son as  chairman  of  the  board;  A. 
J.  Schneierson,  as  president,  and 
David  S.  Schneierson,  as  executive 
vice-president  and  secretary.  These 
sons  are  the  sole  owners  and  form 
the  board  of  directors.  The  firm 
operates  several  other  plants,  in- 
cluding a  children's  dress  plant  in 
Pottstown,  Penna.  The  firm's  prin- 
cipal products  are  slips,  ladies'  lin- 
gerie, gowns  and  pajamas.  Pro- 
ducing the  "Loomcraft"  brand 
since  the  company  was  established 
54  years  ago,  this  firm  is  reputedly 
the  largest  manufacturer  of  wo- 
men's   underwear    in    the    United 

o,    ,  Slip  of  high  qual- 

ouut;h-  ity  made  by  Shad- 

owline,  Morganton 

SHADOWLINE,  INC. 

Morganton,  N.  C. 

Shadowline,  Inc.,  Lenoir  Rd.,  Morganton,  formerly 
Lingerie,  Inc.,  was  organized  in  September,  1946,  by 
Sherrod  Salsbury  and  started  business  in  rented 
quarters  and  with  limited  equipment.  The  business 
has  been  so  successful  that  a  new  plant  has  been  built 
and  two  additions  made,  giving  the  firm  43,000  sq. 
ft.  of  production  space. 

In  1949  the  firm  bought  a  site  on  Lenoir  Rd.  and 
erected  a  modern,  brick  and  steel,  one-story  build- 
ing, containing  18,000  sq.  ft.,  and  moved  into  this 
plant  from  the  rented  quarters  on  College  Street.  In 
1951  an  addition,  containing  9,000  sq.  ft.,  was  built, 
and  two  years  later  another  addition,  containing 
16,000  sq.  ft.,  was  erected. 

Shadowline  produces  a  full  line  of  lingerie  made 
from  knit  fabrics  of  nylon  and  acetate  and  also  pro- 
duces a  line  of  embossed  cotton  batiste.  Products 
include  slips,  gowns,  petti-skirts,  panties,  pajamas, 
bed  jackets  and  peignoirs  (coats) .  Prices  range  from 
medium  to  high  for  fine  quality  garments  made  up 
in  probably  a  hundred  different  styles.  Sales  are 
made  direct  to  department  stores  and  specialty  shops 
by  the  firm's  own  sales  representatives  who  cover  the 
entire  United  States.  Sales  offices  are  in  the  Empire 
State  Building,  New  York  City. 

Shadowline  employs  now  approximately  260  work- 
ers and  has  plans  for  increasing  the  number  of  em- 
ployees by  about  50%,  which  should  bring  the  num- 
ber of  employees  close  to  400. 

New  and  modern  plant  of  Shadowline,  Inc.,  formerly  Lingerie, 
Inc..  making  fine  quality  lingerie  in  Morganton 


PAGE  94 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


SUMMER-FALL,    1954 


Officers  of  Shadowline  are  Sherrod  Salsbury,  pres- 
ident and  treasurer;  R.  W.  Baker,  Greensboro,  hon- 
orary chairman  of  the  board  of  Blue  Bell,  Inc.,  vice- 
president,  and  T.  Henry  Wilson,  president  of  Hen- 
redon  Furniture  Co.,  Morganton,  secretary. 

Mr.  Salsbury,  head  of  the  organization,  is  a  native 
of  High  Point  and  a  commerce  graduate  of  The  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina  in  1936.  He  started  gar- 
ment manufacturing  activities  with  Vanity  Fail- 
Mills,  working  in  plants  in  Alabama  and  Pennsyl- 
vania. He  had  been  in  this  type  of  industry  for 
seven  years  when  he  established  this  lingerie  plan, 
at  Morganton. 


STEDMAN  MANUFACTURING  CO. 

Asheboro,  N.  C. 

Stedman  Manufacturing  Co.,  Asheboro,  actually 
started  on  its  successful  career  as  an  underwear 
manufacturer  in  1945  when  S.  B.  Stedman,  head  of 
the  firm,  secured  a  Navy  contract  to  make  20,000 
dozen  T-shirts  at  31^  each,  with  no  building,  no 
machinery,  no  know-how,  but  with  a  super  abund- 
ance of  salesmanship. 

S.  B.  Stedman,  who  developed  this  important 
North  Carolina  industry,  is  still  regarded  as  a  super 
salesman.  A  native  of  Montgomery  County,  he  mov- 
ed with  his  parents  to  Asheboro  in  his  youth  in  1899. 
He  attended  Eastman  Business  College  in  Pough- 
keepsie,  N.  Y.  He  entered  retail  business  with  his 
father,  later  expanding  it  into  a  wholesale  grocery 
firm.  This  was  liquidated  in  1929,  just  before  the 
depression.  In  1930  Mr.  Stedman  started  manufac- 
turing handkerchiefs  in  a  small  way  and  developed 
that  industry  to  such  an  extent  that 
it  was  producing  75,000  dozen 
handkerchiefs  a  week. 

Due  to  Japanese  competition,  the 
tariff  situation,  and  Mr.  Stedman's 
refusal  to  purchase  Japanese  piece 
goods,  he  liquidated  his  plant  in 
1939  and  retired.  Restless  and  dis- 
satisfied, he  could  not  stay  retired. 
After  the  Japanese  struck  at  Pearl 
Harbor,  late  in  1941,  he  decided  to 
open  up  again,  and  in  1942  he  re- 
sumed handkerchief  manufactur- 
ing, continuing  their  production, 
but  on  a  descending  scale  after 
1945,  until  it  ended  in  1948. 

Meanwhile  in  1945  Mr.  Stedman 
secured  his  T-shirt  contract  with 
the  U.  S.  Navy.  He  rented  a  build- 
ing, purchased  some  sewing  ma- 
chines, bought  a  few  knitting  ma- 
chines, assembled  and  trained  25 
or  30  employees  and  began  produc- 
tion. The  T-Shirts  were  knitted 
in  Asheboro,  shipped  to  Pennsyl- 
vania for  bleaching  and  finishing, 
and  returned  to  Asheboro  for  cut- 
ting, sewing,  packaging  and  ship- 
ping. When  that  contract  expired, 
he  secured  contracts  for  other  mili- 
tary requirements,  basically  T- 
shirts.  Both  yarn  and  trained 
workers  were  short  during  that  pe-  0fWstldm2n's  uri 
riod,  and  because  of  Government      derwear  for  men 


One  of  Stedman  'Salesmaker'  mer- 
chandising display  cabinets 
for  underwear 


work  he  secured 
priority  for  both. 
He  continued  mak- 
ing T-shirts  for  the 
Government  until 
1947.  It  was  then 
that  Mr.  Stedman 
began  production  of 
T-shirts  for  the  civ- 
ilian market. 

A  year  later,  Mr. 
Stedman  added 
shorts  to  the  T-shirt 
line,  and  in  Janu- 
ary, 1950,  added 
athletic  undershirts. 
Later  in  that  year, 
men's  briefs  were 
started.  For  a  pe- 
riod Mr.  Stedman 
bought  men's  woven 
shorts  from  another 
manufacturer,  but 
in  1952  started  producing  them  himself.  By  that 
time  the  firm  had  rounded  out  its  line  of  men's  and 
boys'  light  underwear. 

Stedman  Manufacturing  Co.  now  produces  cotton 
knit  T-shirts,  athletic  undershirts  and  briefs  and 
woven  broadcloth  shorts,  all  in  the  upper  medium 
price  range.  Retail  prices  of  men's  T-shirts  are  from 
89^'  to  $1.00 ;  men's  undershirts  from  65^-  to  75^ ; 
men's  briefs  75^  to  85f ,  and  men's  broadcloth  shirts 
from  89^  to  $1.00.  In  the  boys'  line  the  retail  prices 
range  from  59^  to  79^  a  garment. 

Stedman  products  are  made  from  fully  combed, 
light  cotton  for  knit-wear,  and  cotton  broadcloth, 
also  light-weight  and  fine  quality.  The  firm  buys 
greige  gray  yarn,  knits  the  garments,  bleaches  and 
finishes  the  cloth,  cuts,  sews,  packages  and  ships  the 
garments.  All  of  the  cotton  yarn  used  in  Stedman 
underwear  is  bought  in  the  Carolinas.  A  good  per- 
centage of  the  garments  are  attractively  wrapped  in 
colorful  cellophane  packages. 

A  Stedman  innovation  recently  has  served  as  an 
effective  stimulus  to  the  sale  of  its  garments.  This 
is  called  the  Stedman  "Salesmaker"  Merchandising 
Plan.  This  is  a  compact  Display  Bar,  in  the  top  of 
which  cellophane  packaged  garments  are  displayed 
in  ascending  rows.  The  bottom  part  contains  draw- 
ers for  storing  duplicates.  This  has  proved  very 
effective  in  increasing  sales.  Stedman  garments  are 
distributed  in  every  State  in  the  union  and  virtually 
all  over  the  world.  Sales  are  handled  through  the 
New  York  office,  which  is  located  at  551  Fifth  Ave- 
nue. 

Starting  in  a  small  building,  the  Stedman  plant 
has  expanded  in  less  than  a  decade  by  the  addition 
of  four  entirely  modern  brick,  steel  and  concrete 
buildings,  all  joined. 

Officers  of  the  company  are  S.  B.  Stedman,  presi- 
dent ;  W.  D.  Stedman,  his  son,  vice-president ;  Marion 
Stedman,  a  daughter,  secretary ;  W.  W.  Thomas, 
treasurer,  and  D.  E.  Francis  is  vice-president  and 
sales  manager  in  charge  of  the  New  York  sales  office. 
The  three  Stedman  officers  and  Mrs.  S.  B.  Stedman 
form  the  board  of  directors  of  this  family  owned  or- 
ganization. 

S.  B.  Stedman,  as  noted,  has  been  the  principal 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  95 


figure  in  developing  the  organization.  His  son  has 
been  taking  over  gradually  more  of  the  details  on 
operations.  W.  D.  Stedman,  vice-president,  is  a  na- 
tive of  Asheboro,  a  Duke  University  graduate  and  a 
Harvard  University  School  of  Business  Administra- 
tion graduate  in  Industrial  Administration.  He  join- 
ed his  father's  firm  in  1944.  Wilbur  W.  Thomas,  a 
native  of  Rocky  Mount,  N.  C,  and  a  graduate  of  the 
University  of  North  Carolina,  joined  the  Stedman 
firm  in  July,  1949.  Previously  he  had  been  with  the 
Golden  Belt  Manufacturing  Co.  and  Hillcrest  Hos- 
ierv  Mills,  both  in  Durham. 


CAROLINA  UNDERWEAR  CO.,  INC. 

Thomasville,  N.  C. 

Carolina  Underwear  Co.,  Inc.,  W.  Guilford  St., 
Thomasville,  was  organized  in  1928  and  passed 
through  a  period  of  ups  and  downs  and  change  of 
ownership  before  it  became  a  successful  underwear 
manufacturing  firm.  Today  this  firm  employs  about 
200  workers,  and  has  gross  annual  sales  of  approxi- 
mately $2,000,000. 

The  firm  was  started  by  A.  H.  Ragan  and  W.  H. 
Peace,  as  a  partnership,  beginning  operations  with 
six  employees  operating  four  or  five  machines  in 
rented  loft  space  of  2,000  sq.  ft.  In  1930  this  small 
industry  was  reorganized  and  incorporated  by  three 
men,  headed  by  N.  C.  English  and  the  two  founders. 
The  authorized  capital  was  $50,000,  with  $7,500  paid 
in  at  that  time. 

In  1933  the  company  purchased  a  building  42  x 
80  feet  at  the  present  site.  Mr.  Ragan  died  in  1936, 
and  Mr.  English  purchased  his  one-third  of  the  stock. 
Mr.  Peace  retired  in  1946  and  later  sold  his  interest. 
Joe  B.  Johnson,  who  had  been  manager  at  Tip-Top 
Hosiery  Co.,  Asheboro,  bought  an  interest  in  the 
firm  about  that  time  and  became  secretary  and  plaiu 
manager.  Finley  Atkinson,  who  had  bought  stock- 
in  the  firm  and  became  vice-president  and  sales  man- 
ager, sold  his  interest  in  1950  and  moved  to  Okla- 
homa. H.  A.  Carpenter,  Jr..  later  bought  stock  and 
was  made  vice-president  and  sales  manager.  Mr. 
English,  president  and  treasurer  of  the  company,  Mr. 
Carpenter  and  Mr.  Johnson  constitute  the  board  of 
directors. 

Carolina  Underwear  Co.  now  has  authorized  cap- 
ital of  $300,000,  all  paid  in.  Since  the  original  small 
building  was  purchased,  nine  additions  have  been 
made,  and  when  an  addition  now  under  construction 
is  completed  the  firm  will  contain  55,000  sq.  ft.  of 
production  space.  The  firm  now  employs  approxi- 
mately 200  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging 
between  $600,000  and  $700,000.  The  Thomasville 
office  of  the  Employment  Security  Commission  co- 
operates with  the  firm  in 
testing  and  referring  suit- 
able workers. 

In  April,  1953,  Carolina 
Underwear  Co.  leased  one 
floor  of  the  Doncaster  Col- 
lar and  Shirt  Co.  plant  at 
Rutherfordton,  along  with 
the  machinery  and  equip- 
ment in  the  plant.     This  is 

operated  as  Carole   Indus- 
Quahty  men's  shorts  made      ,    .  ,  _,         , 

by  Carolina  Underwear       tries,  a  separate  ana  sud- 
Co.,  Thomasville  sidiary  corporation.    In  the 


Fine  ladies'  panties  made 
by  Carolina  Underwear  Co. 


10,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space 
leased,  the  firm  operates  its 
ladies'  .Pajama  Division. 
Approximately  60  workers 
are  employed  here,  the  an- 
nual payroll  ranging  be- 
tween $200,000  and  $250,- 
000. 

In  the  Thomasville  plant 
Carolina  Underwear  Co.  has 
three  principal  divisions, 
each  occupying  about  one- 
third  of  the  space.  These 
are  the  Panty  Division,  men's  and  boys'  Shorts  Di- 
vision, and  men's  and  boys'  Pajama  Division.  The 
two  principal  brands  are  "Carole"  and  "Olina",  both 
coming  from  the  word  Carolina.  Women's  panties 
and  pajamas  are  sold  under  the  "Carole"  brand,  and 
men's  and  boys'  shorts  and  pajamas  under  the 
"Olina"  brand.  Part  of  the  production  is  put  up 
under  chain  store  nationally-advertised  brands. 
The  company  has  its  own  sales  force,  covering  the 
southern  and  mid-western  states,  but  distribution  is 
nation-wide  through  better  department  stores  and 
chain  stores.  Materials  include  nylon,  rayon  and 
celanese,  broadcloth,  plisse,  outings,  and  other  popu- 
lar materials. 

N.  C.  English,  president  and  treasurer  of  the  firm, 
has  been  active  in  numerous  civic,  social,  educational 
and  industry  groups  in  Thomasville.  He  had  been 
chief  executive  officer  of  Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  Inc., 
for  many  years  and  is  president  of  the  English  Mo- 
tor Co.  and  the  Auto  Finance  Co.,  and  has  been  pres- 
ident of  Associated  Industries,  Inc.,  an  organization 
of  90  industrial  leaders  in  High  Point,  Jamestown 
and  Thomasville.  At  various  times  he  has  served  as 
representative  in  the  General  Assembly,  mayor  of 
Thomasville,  chairman  of  its  school  board,  and  presi- 
dent of  the  Chamber  of  Commerce  and  Rotary  Club. 
Joe  B.  Johnson,  secretary  and  general  manager,  is 
a  native  of  Thomasville,  having  been  with  Kagan 
Knitting  Co.  and  later  with  Tip  Top  Hosiery  Co.  of 
Asheboro  before  joining  Carolina  as  chief  produc- 
tion officer  in  1946.  H.  A.  Carpenter,  Jr.,  a  Newton 
native,  held  several  important  merchandising  posi- 
tions before  becoming  sales  manager  and  vice-presi- 
dent of  Carolina  Underwear  in  1950. 


QUALITY  MILLS,  INC. 
Mount  Airy,  N.  C. 

Quality  Mills,  Inc.,  Franklin  St.,  South,  and  Pine 
St.,  Mount  Airy,  was  organized  and  incorporated  in 
1934  to  produce  a  full  line  of  men's  knit  underwear. 
Children's,  boys'  and  infants'  knit  underwear  have 
been  added  and  production  expanded  on  a  nation- 
wide basis  until  gross  annual  sales  now  reach  $1,250,- 
000  to  $1,500,000  after  only  two  decades  of  opera- 
tion. 

Quality  Mills  was  started  as  a  Woltz  family  owned 
industry  in  an  old  plant  containing  6,000  sq.  ft.  of 
floor  space,  with  28  employees.  Officers  of  the  com- 
pany are  H.  O.  Woltz,  president;  John  E.  Woltz, 
executive  vice-president  and  general  manager ;  How- 
ard O.  Woltz,  Jr.,  vice-president;  Greer  C.  Woltz, 
treasurer ;  W.  M.  Beamer,  secretary,  and  Mrs.  Louise 
E.  Woltz  is  an  additional  member  of  the  board  of 
directors. 


PAGE  96 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


':U#&lrt 


prHiJii 


*%:. 


m 


:V?4i 


:::•:» 


Knitting  forms  for  children's  underwear  at  Quality 
Mills,  Mount  Airy 

The  old  plant,  remodeled  and  equipped,  has  ex- 
panded through  several  additions  of  buildings  until 
the  firm  now  has  66,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  The 
firm  employs  about  175  workers,  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll ranging  between  $275,000  and  $325,000. 

Quality  Mills  produces  a  full  line  of  infants'  knit 
underwear  for  ages  up  to  three  years,  including 
shirts,  binders,  bibs,  sweaters,  gowns,  panties,  and 
layette  sets,  all  sold  under  the  widely  known  "Cozy- 
Dozy"  brand.  Also  produced  are  children's  under- 
wear and  pajamas  for  ages  two  to  eight  years,  boys' 
underwear  from  eight  to  16  years,  and  men's  under- 
wear, including  athletic  shirts,  T-shirts,  and  briefs. 
In  addition  to  its  Cozy-Dozy  brand,  the  firm  also  pro- 
duces these  various  underwear  items  for  national 
chain  and  department  stores  under  their  own  brands. 

Quality  Mills'  products  are  distributed  on  a  na- 
tion-wide basis  through  the  firm's  general  sales  office 
in  the  Empire  State  Building,  New  York  City,  with 
branch  sales  offices  in  Chicago  and  Los  Angeles,  and 
with  The  Max  H.  Kessler  Co.,  Atlanta,  as  southern 
sales  representatives.  These  products  are  found  in 
chain  and  department  stores,  infants',  children's, 
boys'  and  men's  shops. 

During  World  War  II,  Quality  Mills  operated  two 
plants  on  war  contracts  in  producing  fragmentation 
bomb  parachutes  and  gas  protected  underwear. 
However,  this  underwear  was  treated  for  protection 
against  gas  by  the  U.  S.  Government. 


Jacket,  panties  and  boys'  underwear  produced  by  Quality  Mills 

Last  year  the  company  started  a  profit  sharing 
plan  for  its  employees  by  which  the  company  pays 
10%  of  its  earnings  before  taxes  into  a  fund  for  a 
retirement  plan  with  U.  S.  Treasurer  approval.  The 
company  also  operates  a  Christmas  bonus  plan  and 
a  group  life  insurance  and  hospitalization  plan  in 
which  the  employees  and  the  company  join  in  paying 
the  premiums. 

Woltz  Textile  Products,  Inc. 

Woltz  Textile  Products,  Inc.,  was  organized  and 
incorporated  in  1953  for  the  purpose  of  producing 
chambray  work  shirts  on  a  contract  basis  for  another 
large  shirt  manufacturer.  These  operations  were 
actually  started  in  1946  as  a  division  of  Quality  Mills. 
Operations  expanded  until  a  separate  organization 
was  formed,  occupying  an  addition  to  Quality  Mills, 
containing  5,000  sq.  ft.  This  firm  started  with  20 
employees,  now  increased  to  60,  and  has  plans  for 
still  further  expansion.  About  800  dozen  work  shirts 
are  produced  each  week. 

Officers  of  this  corporation  are  Howard  O.  Woltz, 
Jr.,  president ;  Mrs.  Pat  Gwyn  Woltz,  vice-president, 
and  John  E.  Woltz,  secretary  and  treasurer. 


Sewing  room  for  knit  and  woven  underwear  at  Quality  Mills 


BEAUTY  MAID  MILLS,  INC. 

Statesville,  N.  C. 

Beauty  Maid  Mills,  Inc.,  Statesville,  was  organized 
and  incorporated  in  March,  1954  and  leased  space 
from  Beaunit  Mills,  Inc.,  taking  over  the  Phoenix 
Division  of  Beaunit  Mills  for  the  manufacture  of 
panties.  This  firm  has  plans  for  extensive  expansion 
in  the  near  future  to  meet  the  demands  for  the  gar- 
ments produced. 

Soon  after  Beauty  Maid  Mills  was  organized  and 
took  over  the  space  in  which  the  Phoenix  Division 
of  Beaunit  had  been  making  T-shirts  and  polo  shirts, 
it  began  calling  in  the  former  employees  of  this  di- 
vision. By  September  the  firm  was  employing  more 
than  100  workers  with  a  payroll  of  around  $3,000 
a  week,  and  by  the  end  of  the  year  expects  to  have 
about  150  workers  with  a  $5,000  a  week  payroll. 
Plans  are  in  the  making  for  a  modern  air-conditioned 
building  which  will  give  33,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  97 


and  expand  the  employment  to  around  400.  The  local 
office  of  the  Employment  Security  Commission  as- 
sisted the  firm  in  recruiting  workers. 

Beauty  Maid  Mills,  producing  panties  only,  uses 
nylon,  acetate  tricot  and  rayon  circular  knit  mate- 
rials for  its  products.  These  panties  are  sold  on  a 
nation-wide  basis  through  chain  stores,  specialty 
shops  and  retail  stores.  The  retail  price  ranges  from 
39^  to  75ff.  In  its  expansion  plans  the  firm  will  pos- 
sibly begin  the  production  of  gowns  and  slips. 

Officers  of  Beauty  Maid  Mills  include  Mary  Glick, 
president  and  treasurer,  New  York  City;  Theresa 
Ruddy,  secretary,  and  Dallas  D.  Cline,  vice-president 
and  general  manager.  Mr.  Cline,  a  native  of  Win- 
ston-Salem and  graduate  of  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  in  Production  and  Personnel  Management, 
was  formerly  in  the  Accounting  Department  of  The 
Bahnson  Co.,  Winston-Salem,  for  a  few  years  and 
was  a  Sergeant  in  the  Air  Corps  for  three  years  dur- 
ing World  War  II.  For  four  years  he  was  superin- 
tendent of  the  Garment  Division  of  Beaunit  Mills 
and  became  a  member  of  the  new  firm  which  took 
over  this  division.  Mrs.  Cleo  Pope,  forelady  with 
the  new  firm,  was  with  the  Garment  Division  of 
Beaunit  Mills  for  19  years. 

The  Phoenix  Mills  began  operation  around  1929, 
producing  woolen  sweaters.  When  it  was  taken  over 
as  a  division  of  Beaunit  Mills  in  1942  it  began  mak- 
ing baby  bibs,  bloomers  and  T-shirts  and  Army 
drawers.  It  filled  several  contracts  for  the  U.  S.  Gov- 
ernment. The  present  firm  shifted  to  panties  and 
proposes  to  add  gowns  and  slips  as  it  expands  ope- 
rations. 


INDERA  MILLS  COMPANY 
Winston-Salem,  N.  C. 

Indera  Mills  Company,  S.  Marshall  St.,  Winston- 
Salem,  was  organized  in  1914  by  Col.  Francis  H. 
Fries  and  W.  L.  Seiwers  to  manufacture  knitted 
slips  and  petticoats.  Starting  in  a  small  way,  the 
firm  now  occupies  70,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  in  the 
production  of  the  original  lines,  and  other  items  of 
women's  underwear,  which  are  sold  nation-wide  un- 
der the  nationally-known  brand  of  "Indera  Figur- 
fit." 

Interest  is  raised  in  the  romantic  name  of  Indera. 
In  1906  Col.  Fries,  for  many  years  president  of  Wa- 
chovia Bank  and  Trust  Co.,  and  members  of  his  fam- 
ily made  a  visit  to  Europe  and  crossed  the  Mediter- 
ranean to  Egypt.  Spending  some  time  on  the  banks 
of  the  Nile,  Col.  Fries  and  his  family  met  the  family 
of  the  Rajah  of  Baroda,  India,  including  his  daugh- 
ter, Princess  Indera.  Col.  Fries  was  intrigued  by  the 
Princess  and  her  name.  WThen  he  came  to  know  her 
well,  he  asked  her  if  he  might  use  her  name  for  an 
industrial  firm  in  America  at  some  later  time.  She 
gladly  consented,  and  eight  years  later  Indera  Mills 
Company  was  formed. 

When  Indera  started  it  had  only  three  employees 
working  in  a  corner  of  the  Maline  Mills,  in  400  sq.  ft. 
of  floor  space.  As  Indera  operations  expanded,  re- 
quiring more  space,  those  of  the  Maline  Mills  de- 
clined, and  finally  Indera  took  over  the  Maline  Mills' 
property.  Mr.  Seiwers  had  charge  of  the  operations 
until  1922  when  he  left  the  firm.  At  that  time  the 
company  was  incorporated  and  Col.  Fries  became 
president;  Hugh  G.  Chatham,  vice-president;  J.  Lee 


High  quality  sli2)  and  half-slip  made  by  Indera  Mills, 
Winston-Salem 

Keiger,  secretary-treasurer,  with  H.  S.  Foy,  Jr.,  as 
sales  manager,  and  C.  Lewis  Martin  as  plant  super- 
intendent. When  Col.  Fries  died  in  1931,  his  daugh- 
ter, Mrs.  Richard  F.  Willingham  succeeded  him  as 
president;  Robert  M.  Hanes,  then  and  now  president 
of  the  Wachovia  Bank  and  Trust  Co.,  became  vice- 
president  ;  Mr.  Keiger  continuing  as  secretary-treas- 
urer. 

Mrs.  Willingham  retired  in  1953  and  died  in  Jan- 
uary, 1954.  Following  her  retirement,  her  son, 
Francis  Fries  Willingham  became  president;  Mr. 
Keiger  was  named  chairman  of  the  board  and  treas- 
urer; Mrs.  Susie  S.  Batting  was  named  secretary; 
George  W.  Sheek,  Jr.  became  vice-president  in  charge 
of  sales,  with  Charles  F.  Mickey  as  plant  superin- 
tendent. 

Indera  Mills  has  expanded  during  the  years  to  meet 
the  increasing  demands  for  its  products.  The  70,000 
sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  are  embraced  in  four  connected 
buildings.  The  firm  has  an  authorized  capital  of 
$500,000.  The  plant  employs  around  100  workers 
and  has  its  own  sales  force  of  eight  representatives, 
who  cover  the  United  States.  Its  products  are  sold 
under  the  "Indera  Figurfit"  brand,  largely  to  depart- 
ment stores,  chain  stores,  and  women's  specialty 
shops. 

Indera  continues  its  original  lines  of  princess  slips 
and  petticoats,  and  has  added  others.  It  produces 
knitted  heavy  winter-weight  slips  of  cotton,  wool, 
nylon,  orlon,  and  cotton  and  wool  combinations ;  knee 
warmers  of  wool  and  nylon,  and  woven  cotton  slips 
and  petticoats  for  spring  and  summer  wear,  which 
were  started  in  1950  and  have  developed  rapidly 
until  they  now  amount  to  a  substantial  portion  of 
the  firm's  production.  Knitted  winter  garments 
range  in  price  from  98(4  to  $10.00,  and  lighter  woven 
garments  from  $1.98  to  $2.98. 

Mr.  Willingham,  president,  a  native  of  Macon,  Ga., 
moved  to  Winston-Salem  with  his  family  in  1920. 
He  spent  two  years  in  Virginia  Military  Institute 
and  transferred  to  Carolina,  where  he  received  his 
B.S.  degree  in  Commerce.  He  had  started  working 
in  the  plant  during  vacation  periods  and  then  became 
a  full-time  employee,  working  in  all  departments  of 
the  mill.  He  was  a  salesman  for  three  years,  then 
bookkeeper  and  production  manager.  During  World 
War  II,  he  served  about  four  years  in  the  Navy, 
reaching  the  rank  of  Lieutenant.  He  was  made  sec- 
retary of  Indera  in  1946,  vice-president  in  1949,  and 
became  president  in  1953. 


PAGE  98 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


PINEHURST  TEXTILES,  INC. 
Asheboro,  N.  C. 

Pinehurst   Textiles,    Inc.,    120   E.    Pritchard   St., 

Asheboro,  was  organized  and  incorporated  in  Jan- 
uary, 1946  by  two  textile  graduates  of  N.  C.  State 
College  and  returned  servicemen,  who  started  pro- 
ducing lingerie  with  limited  means  and  equipment. 
They  have  developed  a  still  modest  firm  which  has, 
in  about  nine  years  of  operation,  established  the 
well-known  and  popular  "Pinehurst"  brand  of  wo- 
men's high  quality  underwear. 

Pinehurst  Textiles  started  operations  with  only 
eight  employees  down-town  in  an  upstairs  location, 
containing  only  3,600  sq.  ft.  Two  years  later  it  ac- 
quired about  one-half  of  a  city  block  in  space  and 
erected  an  entirely  modern,  one-story,  building  of 
brick,  steel  and  concrete.  This  building  contained 
13,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space.  Outgrowing  this 
space,  the  firm  built  an  addition  in  1951  containing 
7,000  sq.  ft.  of  space.  All  of  the  20,000  sq.  ft.  is  now 
fully  utilized. 

Pinehurst  garments  are  produced  primarily  from 
nylon  fabrics,  with  some  cotton,  cotton  batiste,  cotton 
plisse,  and  acetate  rayon.  Products  are  ladies'  slips, 
which  retail  from  $3.98  to  $8.98 ;  gowns  from  $5.98 
to  $14.98;  pajamas  from  $3.98  to  $9.98;  bed  jackets 
from  $3.98  to  $7.98 ;  panties  from  49^  to  $3.98,  and 
negligees  from  $12.98  to  $14.98. 

Pinehurst  products  are  distributed  nation-wide 
through  the  firm's  own  sales  organization.  They  are 
sold  through  department  stores  and  specialty  shops. 
The  firm  knits  most  of  its  fabrics,  but  supplants  its 
own  production  from  outside  producers  whenever  it 
is  necessary  to  keep  up  with  the  demands  for  its 
products. 

The  two  founders  of  Pinehurst  Textiles  are  John 
F.  Redding,  president,  and  Abner  D.  Potter,  secre- 
tary and  treasurer,  with  Clyde  Graves  as  plant  sup- 
erintendent, and  M.  W.  Hall  as  superintendent  of 
knitting.  Mr.  Redding,  a  native  of  Asheboro,  and 
Mr.  Potter,  a  native  of  Lenoir  County,  were  class- 
mates in  the  Textile  School  of  State  College.  Before 
World  War  II,  Mr.  Redding  was  with  Adams  Millis 
in  High  Point,  and  during  the  war  was  in  the  Quar- 
termaster Corps  for  about  five  years.  Mr.  Potter 
was  with  the  Hosiery  Division  of  Burlington  Mills. 
Greensboro,  for  about  a  year,  and  spent  about  four 
years  during  the  war  in  the  Ordnance  Department, 
assigned  to  the  Air  Corps.  Their  native  ability, 
training  and  experience  have  served  them  well  in  the 
development  of  a  nice  growing  industry. 


L.  &  L.  MANUFACTURING  CO. 
North  Wilkesboro,  N.  C. 

L.  &  L.  Manufacturing  Co.,  215  Ninth  St.,  North 
Wilkesboro,  started  operations  November  10,  1953, 
when  11  sewing  machines  were  installed  in  the  Mo- 
tor Market  Building,  with  a  few  employees. 

By  late  summer  the  firm  had  installed  75  machines 
in  the  Motor  Market  Building  and  had  also  estab- 
lished another  unit  in  the  Winters  Building,  on  High- 
way 115  inside  the  city  limits.  These  two  units  pro- 
vide a  total  of  13,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space. 
The  firm  now  employs  125  workers,  and  the  weekly 
payroll  ranges  around  $5,000.  The  town  of  North 
Wilkesboro  has  cooperated  fully  with  this  new  in- 
dustry. Also  the  local  Employment  Security  Office 
has  given  aptitude  tests  and  referred  the  workers 
employed  by  the  organization.  Officials  announced 
that  workers  in  the  area  are  easily  trained  and  that 
90  c/o  of  those  employed  have  reached  the  point  of 
becoming  95%  efficient  in  the  operations. 

L.  &  L.  Manufacturing  Co.  produces  women's  cot- 
ton briefs  exclusively  in  10  colors  and  in  16  sizes, 
the  sizes  ranging  from  size  2 — children's  to  women's 
8.  These  garments  are  made  for  sale  to  wholesalers. 
Quality  goods  are  produced  and  sold  in  the  higher 
cotton  ranges. 

Most  of  the  quality  cotton  goods  used  in  the  pro- 
duction of  these  briefs  are  secured  from  North  Caro- 
lina mills,  principally  the  Rowan  Mills  in  Salisbury. 
Boxes  for  packing  and  shipping  the  garments  are 
purchased  from  the  Catawba  Paper  Box  Co.,  Hick- 
ory. 

Nicholas  Wehrmann,  general  manager  of  the 
plant,  is  a  native  of  Michigan  and  received  his  B.S. 
degree  in  Industrial  Mechanical  Engineering  at  the 
University  of  Michigan.  For  four  years  he  was  em- 
ployed at  the  garment  plant  of  Modern  Globe,  Inc., 
in  Grand  Rapids,  Mich.,  before  becoming  general 
manager  of  the  North  Wilkesboro  plant.  Marvin 
Lott  Mayberry,  a  native  of  Jonesville,  an  A.B.  grad- 
uate of  Appalachian  State  Teachers  College  at  Boone, 
is  assistant  general  manager. 


Bed  jackets  by  Pinehurst  Textiles,  Asheboro,  maker 
of  fine  underwear 


DIXIE  BELLE  TEXTILES,  INC. 
Greensboro — Gibsonville,  N.  C. 

Dixie  Belle  Textiles,  Inc.,  was  organized  in  Aug- 
ust, 1946,  by  D.  H.  Cashwell  and  started  production 
of  "Dixie  Belle"  lingerie.  The  firm  has  now  ex- 
panded its  operations  in  its  Gibsonville  plant  and  in 
a  leased  plant  in  Greensboro  until  it  now  produces 
approximately  2,400,000  garments  annually. 

When  Dixie  Belle  Textiles  was  first  organized  Mr. 
Cashwell  was  president,  treasurer  and  general  man- 
ager, and  N.  D.  McNairy,  attorney,  was  secretary 
(inactive).  Soon  after  the  company  was  formed, 
V.  F.  Westmoreland  joined  the  firm  and  in  a  short 
time  became  vice-president,  the  position  he  still 
holds.  The  firm  owns  its  building  in  Gibsonville,  an 
office  building  and  warehouse  at  322  South  Davie 
St.,  and  leases  production  space  at  321  S.  Davie  St., 
Greensboro. 

Plans  are  now  being  developed  by  Dixie  Belle  Tex- 
tiles for  extensive  expansion.  In  August,  because  of 
need  for  greater  production,  the  Gibsonville  plant 
added  a  second  shift.  This  firm  then  had  about  60 
employees.  The  annual  payroll  for  these  and  the 
office   staff   is   around  $165,000.     The   Greensboro 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  99 


Slips,  half-slips  and 


plant,  with  45  employees,  has  an 
annual  payroll  of  around  $90,- 
000.  The  Gibsonville  plant  con- 
tains about  12,000  sq.  ft.  of  pro- 
duction space  and  about  9,000 
sq.  ft.  of  production  space  is 
leased  in  Greensboro.  With  the 
general  office  and  warehouse 
space,  the  company  occupies  a 
total  of  about  50,000  sq.  ft. 

Officials  of  the  company  give 
credit  to  the  Burlington  and 
Greensboro  offices  of  the  Em- 
ployment Security  Commission 
for  extensive  assistance  in  staff- 
ing the  plants,  particularly  by 
testing  the  applicants  and  refer- 
ring suitable  workers  to  the  jobs. 

Dixie  Belle  lingerie  is  sold  na- 
tion-wide through  the  Greens- 
boro office  to  chain  and  retail 
stores  by  14  traveling  salesmen 
operating  throughout  the  coun- 
try. Materials  used  are  cotton 
broadcloth,   batiste,   soft   cotton 


panties  are  made  by    plisse,  rayon  tricot,  nylon  tricot, 
Dixie  Belle  ancj  nyion  parchment.    Lingerie 

ranges  from  popular  to  high  prices.  Slips  range  in 
retail  price  from  $1.59  to  $5.95;  ladies'  panties  from 
59^  to  $1.98;  children's  panties  from  39^  to  98c1,  and 
half  slips,  from  98^  to  $3.95.  Products  include  wo- 
men's and  children's  slips,  women's  and  children's 
panties,  and  women's  and  children's  half  slips,  of 
which  about  200,000  dozen  garments  are  produced 
annually. 

Mr.  Cashwell,  founder  and  head  of  the  industry. 
a  native  of  Dunn,  has  been  engaged  in  textile  and 
garment  work  practically  all  of  his  life,  bringing 
extensive  experience  in  the  industry  he  organized 
about  eight  years  ago.  Mr.  Westmoreland,  vice-pres- 
ident, is  a  native  of  Stokes  County  but  grew  up  in 
Madison.  He  has  a  B.S.  degree  in  business  adminis- 
tration and  joined  Dixie  Belle  Textiles  as  office  man- 
ager in  1948.  He  was  elected  vice-president  in  1951. 
H.  H.  Pressley  is  general  superintendent  of  both  the 
Greensboro  and  Gibsonville  mills,  and  J.  Howard 
Lee  is  plant  manager  at  Gibsonville. 


BIEN  JOLIE  FOUNDATION  GARMENTS 
Dunn,  N.  C. 

Bien  Jolie  Foundation  Garments,  413  South  Clin- 
ton Ave.,  Dunn,  a  subsidiary  of  Benjamin  &  Johnes, 
Inc.,  Newark,  N.  J.,  operating  since  May,  1953  in 
temporary  quarters  in  the  old  Bear  Building,  will 
soon  have  a  thoroughly  modern  $150,000  building 
to  house  the  operations  at  Dunn. 

The  new  building,  containing  20,000  sq.  ft.  of  pro- 
duction space,  all  on  one  floor,  completely  air-condi- 
tioned and  constructed  on  entirely  modern  lines,  is 
being  erected  by  the  Dunn  Industrial  Development 
Corp.,  composed  of  a  group  of  business  and  profes- 
sional men  in  Dunn.  Construction  is  being  handled 
by  O.  W.  Godwin,  Dunn  contractor,  on  plans  drawn 
by  his  engineers.  The  building  site  is  a  five-acre 
tract,  purchased  from  G.  W.  Henry  in  the  northwest- 
ern section  of  Dunn,  and  bounded  by  Vance  and  Har- 
nett Streets,  the  Durham  and  Southern  Railroad. 


and  the  old  Coats  road.  All  but  one  acre  is  located 
inside  the  Dunn  city  limits.  The  building  will  be 
leased  to  the  garment  firm,  with  privilege  to  pur- 
chase. 

Bien  Jolie  Foundation  Garments,  in  operation  for 
more  than  a  year,  has  been  employing  workers  test- 
ed, selected  and  referred  by  the  Fayetteville  office 
of  the  Employment  Security  Commission,  since  the 
middle  of  1953.  During  this  period  about  75 
workers  have  been  trained,  and  the  plant  has  been 
in  expanding  operations.  Only  the  sewing  operation 
has  been  carried  on  at  the  plant.  Cutting  and  other 
operations  have  been  handled  by  other  plants  of  the 
parent  company.  With  the  completion  of  the  new 
building,  the  firm  plans  to  increase  employment  to 
around  350  workers,  and  the  payroll  is  expected  to 
range  between  $500,000  and  $600,000  annually. 

Benjamin  and  Johnes,  Inc.,  with  headquarters  in 
Newark,  is  a  well  established  firm,  producing  the 
nationally  advertised  and  well-known  "Bien  Jolie" 
line  of  ladies'  foundation  garments,  from  which  the 
Dunn  firm  takes  its  name.  Sam  Yafee  is  president 
of  the  parent  organization ;  Myles  Friedman  is  vice- 
president,  and  Sam  Lazzara  is  production  superin- 
tendent. 

Announcement  of  the  decision  to  build  the  new 
Dunn  plant  was  made  in  October  by  Al  Wullenwaber, 
chairman  of  the  Industrial  Committee  of  the  Dunn 
Chamber  of  Commerce,  after  a  conference  with  the 
three  principal  officers  of  the  parent  organization. 
Since  that  time  work  has  progressed  and  construc- 
tion is  well  underway. 

Henry  (Harry)  Fisher,  who  has  been  with  Ben- 
jamin and  Johnes  since  January,  1930,  moved  to 
Dunn  May  4,  1953  to  open  up  the  Dunn  operation^ 
and  has  since  been  general  manager  of  the  plant. 
Mr.  Fisher  is  a  native  of  Cumberland,  England,  and 
is  a  graduate  machinist  of  Whitehaven  College.  He 
worked  as  a  machinist  in  England  for  four  years  and 
came  to  America  in  1929,  joining  the  parent  organ- 
ization the  next  year.  He  held  positions  in  the  other 
three  plants  before  coming  to  Dunn. 


GLENDALE  MFG.  CORP. 

Biltmore — Asheville,  N.  C. 

Glendale  Mfg.  Corp.,  Koon  Development,  Biltmore. 
Asheville,  was  organized  and  incorporated  under 
North  Carolina  laws  in  December,  1953  and  started 
business  in  January,  1954  in  the  manufacture  of 
ladies'  pajamas,  gowns  and  slips,  and  the  industry 
has  started  very  satisfactorily. 

The  firm  produces  cotton  plisse.  cotton  and  ravon 
slips,  gowns  and  pajamas  and  also  produces  a  line 
of  flannel  pajamas.  The  garments  are  in  the  popular 
price  range,  the  usual  prices  being  $2.98  for  gowns, 
$1.25  for  slips  and  $3.98  for  pajamas.  The  firm  now 
produces  around  19,000  garments  a  week  and  plans 
expansion  as  sales  increase.  Garments  are  sold 
through  the  firm's  selling  agency  to  chain  and  de- 
partment stores  on  a  nation-wide  basis. 

The  Glendale  firm  decided  to  move  to  North  Caro- 
lina in  large  part  through  the  efforts  of  Frank  Coxe, 
who  owns  the  building  in  which  the  plant  is  located. 
It  is  under  lease  for  several  years.  The  firm  owns 
equipment  valued  at  approximated  $50,000,  includ- 
ing 90  sewing  machines  which  will  be  increased  by 
(Continued  on  page  116) 


PAGE  1  00 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


State's  1954  Total  Payroll  Just  Under  Two  Billion  Dollars 


North  Carolina's  total  payroll  for  1954  for  firms 
covered  by  the  N.  C.  Employment  Security  Law 
amounted  to  approximately  $1,990,000,000,  or  about 
2.6  percent  less  than  the  1953  total  payroll  of  $2,044,- 
000,000.  In  the  same  period  the  Employment  Secur- 
ity Commission  paid  out  slightly  more  than  $37,500,- 
000  in  unemployment  insurance  benefits  to  compen- 
sate for  an  estimated  2,400,000  weeks  unemployment 
for  eligible  unemployed  workers,  which  is  an  in- 
crease of  about  75  percent  over  the  unemployment 
in  1953. 

These  figures,  announced  by  ESC  Chairman  Henry 
E.  Kendall,  represent  actual  reports  for  part  of  the 
year  and  estimates  on  the  balance,  made  by  Hugh 
M.  Raper,  director  of  the  Bureau  of  Research  and 
Statistics.  They  apply  only  to  firms  covered  by  the 
Employment  Security  Law. 

The  drop  of  about  2.6  percent  in  payrolls  last  year 
reflects  the  increased  unemployment  as  well  as  the 
decline  in  average  weekly  working  hours.  Chairman 
Kendall  points  out  that  a  look  at  the  1950-54  period 
suggests  that  the  1954  setback  actually  does  not  rep- 
resent a  serious  downtrend.  In  1950  average  month- 
ly employment  was  658,000  and  wage  payments  to 
insured  workers  reached  $1.6  billion  dollars.  This 
level,  when  compared  with  the  estimated  average 
monthly  employment  of  715,000  and  $1,990,000,000 
wage  payments  in  1954  indicates  the  economic  prog- 
ress which  has  taken  place  since  the  start  of  1950. 
The  net  rise  is  about  60,000  more  workers  and  $390,- 
000,000  more  in  payrolls. 

The  decline  in  employment  and  in  scheduled  work 
days  accounts  for  the  drop  in  payrolls  and  also  for 
the  75  percent  increase  in  weeks  of  unemployment, 
from  1,360,000  in  1953  to  an  estimated  2,400^000  in 
1954.  This  resulted  in  payment  of  unemployment 
insurance  benefits  of  an  estimated  $37,500,000  in 
1954,  which.  Chairman  Kendall  points  out,  provided 
buying  power  and  thus  tended  to  soften  the  economic 
lack  of  balance  in  1954. 


Although  average  monthly  employment  was  about 
715,000  workers  in  1954,  nearly  a  million  workers 
had  earnings  in  covered  employment.  In  that  year 
a  minimum  of  175,000  different  workers  drew  one 
or  more  weekly  payments  for  unemployment.  The 
reach  of  unemployment  was  deeper  in  the  worker 
groups  in  1954  than  in  any  postwar  year,  the  nearest 
prior  record  having  been  in  1951,  when  140,000  dif- 
ferent workers  drew  one  or  more  weekly  payments. 

The  trust  fund  from  which  unemployment  insur- 
ance payments  are  made  is  just  under  $171,000,000, 
or  about  $10,000,000  less  than  at  the  beginning  of 
1954.  The  relatively  favorable  fund  condition,  how- 
ever, will  enable  the  Commission  to  retain  in  1955 
Schedule  "D"  of  the  Experience  Rating  Formula, 
which  is  the  same  as  applied  in  1954. 

In  looking  toward  1955,  Chairman  Kendall  points 
out  that  recent  gains  in  employment  levels  in  the 
State's  predominant  industries  suggest  that  unem- 
ployment-wise the  year  should  be  somewhat  better 
than  1954.  In  terms  of  average  monthly  employ- 
ment, 1955  is  expected  to  exceed  the  peak  1953  level 
of  728,000  and  in  terms  of  payrolls  of  insured  em- 
ployers the  1953  level  of  $2,044,000,000  is  likely  to 
be  exceeded. 

The  more  favorable  outlook,  Chairman  Kendall 
explains,  takes  into  account  the  end-of-the-year  up- 
trend in  non-seasonal  industries,  the  expansion  tak- 
ing place  in  long-established  firms  and  the  influence 
of  the  newer  industries,  some  just  starting  and 
others  now  completing  their  staffing  patterns. 


An  effective  Employment  Security  operation  in 
any  community  can  best  be  had  when  the  employe]1 
of  the  community  makes  his  needs  for  workers  known 
to  the  Employment  Office.  This  enables  the  office 
to  serve  its  clients,  whether  they  are  job  seekers  or 
claimants,  more  efficiently. 


Big  Expansion  of  Outerwear  Production  in  State  in  Decade 


Practically  all  of  the  outerwear  manufacturing 
firms  operating  in  the  State  have  been  established 
within  the  last  decade  and  most  of  them  since  1950. 

Oldest  of  these  firms  is  Goldbloom's  Highland  Gar- 
ment Co.,  Asheville,  established  in  1936,  followed  in 
1941  by  Southern  Knitwear  Mills,  Inc.,  Charlotte; 
Apparel,  Inc.,  Mebane,  in  1946,  and  Iredell  Knitting- 
Mills,  Inc.,  Statesville,  in  1947.  Among  the  later 
plants  established  are  Frederick  Tailoring  Co.,  New 
Bern,  in  1950 ;  Martin  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  Rob- 
ersonville  ;  Hadley  Manufacturing  Corp.,  Burlington, 
and  Sherayne  Blouse  Co.,  Wilson,  in  1952,  and  Char- 
lotte Blouse  Co.,  Charlotte,  The  Hadley  Corporation, 
Weaverville,  Carolina  Industrial  Mfg.  Corp.,  Greens- 
boro, and  Kar-Lyn  Corporation,  Asheville,  all  in 
1953. 

Employment  in  outerwear  firms  in  the  State  in 
1954  reached  around  2,500,  with  an  annual  pavroll 
of  about  $4,000,000.  Probably  25,000,000  outerwear 
garments  were  manufactured  in  1954,  sales  prob- 
ably exceeding  $22,000,000. 


SOUTHERN  KNITWEAR  MILLS,  INC. 

Charlotte,  N.  C. 

Southern  Knitwear  Mills,  Inc.,  424-26  West  Third 
St.,  Charlotte,  was  started  in  1941  in  the  home  of 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Fred  Stern,  1813  High  St.,  with  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Stern  composing  the  working  force  in  mak- 
ing by  hand  such  infants'  wear  as  bootees,  caps  and 
sweaters.  This  firm,  headed  by  a  refugee  from  Ger- 
many, has  expanded  until  it  and  its  affiliates  pro- 
duce enough  children's  wear  each  year  to  bring  in 
several  million  dollars. 

Fred  Stern,  founder  of  this  and  affiliated  organ- 
izations, is  a  native  of  Germany,  where  he  took  tex- 
tile engineering  courses.  For  about  10  years  he  was 
engaged  in  textile  sales  in  Germany,  and  during  the 
war  was  placed  in  a  Hitler  concentration  camp.  He 
was  able  to  get  away  after  about  three  months  and 
made  his  way  to  the  United  States.  Arriving  in 
1938,  he  settled  in  Richmond,  Va.,  and  worked  in  a 
garage  until  he  was  able  to  get  a  job  traveling  and 
selling  children's  wear,  starting  in  Baltimore  and 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  101 


working  out  of  Charlotte.  After  about  three  years 
of  travel  he  and  his  wife  started  the  home  produc- 
tion of  infants'  wear  in  1941. 

In  the  next  year,  Mr.  Stern  occupied  a  small  build- 
ing, containing  2,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space,  at  724 
North  Brevard  St.  Here  he  had  12  employees,  ope- 
rating three  knitting  machines  and  six  sewing  ma- 
chines. In  1945  he  moved  his  plant  to  219  North 
Graham  St.,  where  he  had  6,000  sq.  ft.  of  space  and 
employed  from  30  to  40  workers.  This  plant  is  still 
occupied  by  a  subsidiary  firm  under  the  name  of 
Soderberg  and  Stern,  Inc.,  which  does  contract  work 
for  the  Southern  Knitwear  Mills. 

By  1949  Southern  Knitwear  Mills  had  outgrown 
its  space  and  moved  the  office  and  shipping  depart- 
ment to  424  West  Third  St.,  where  these  activities 
are  still  carried  on.  In  the  same  year  this  firm  ac- 
quired control  of  the  Penry  Manufacturing  Co.,  a 
sewing  plant  in  Galax,  Va.,  which  was  expanded  and 
now  contains  21,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  In  this 
plant  100  machines  are  operated  by  100  to  110  em- 
ployees. 

Southern  Knitwear  Mills  in  1953  started  opera- 
tions in  its  own  building  at  622  E.  28th  St.,  Char- 
lotte, to  manufacture  sweaters  only  on  fine  gauge 
machines.  The  plant  at  219  N.  Graham  St.  moved 
into  this  new  building,  which  now  employs  from  100 
to  110  persons.  An  addition  of  21,000  sq.  ft.  was 
made  to  this  plant  during  1953. 

All  told,  Southern  Knitwear  Mills  now  employs 
approximately  350  workers  in  its  Charlotte  and  Ga- 
lax plants.  In  North  Carolina  the  firm  employs 
about  250  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  of  around 
$750,000. 

Fred  Stern,  head  of  the  firm,  continues  as  his  own 
sales  manager,  directing  activities  of  his  own  sales 
force  of  14  representatives,  located  in  all  sections  of 
the  country.  Recently  the  firm  opened  its  New  York 
sales  office  in  the  Empire  State  Building,  with  Mur- 
ray Schwartz  in  charge. 

In  reaching  gross  annual  sales  that  go  into  the 
millions  of  dollars,  Southern  Knitwear  Mills  pro- 
duces children's  and  infants'  sweaters,  creepers,  dia- 
per sets,  polo  shirts,  cardigans  and  sports  shirts  for 
boys,  girls  and  infants  up  to  size  14.  Production  now 
reaches  around  7,250,000  units  annually,  a  small  per- 
centage of  the  production  going  into  export  trade. 
These  garments  are  popular  priced,  ranging  from 
59^  to  98c1  and  on  up  to  $1.98  and  $2.98.  Sales  are 
made  through  chain  and  department  stores  and 
speciality  shops  on  a  nation-wide  basis.  Brand 
names  now  becoming  popular  are  "Sterntex"  and 
"Tog-About",  and  the  firm  also  makes  products  un- 
der the  brands  of  its  customers. 

Recently  erected  and  thoroughly  modern  plant  of  Southern 
Knitwear  Mills,  Inc.,  Charlotte 


After  operating  for  a  short  time  as  a  partnership, 
owned  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stern,  the  company  was  in- 
corporated. Present  officers  are  Fred  Stern,  presi- 
dent ;  Mrs.  E.  T.  Stern,  secretary  and  treasurer,  and 
Eric  Sternberg,  vice-president.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stern 
own  about  92  %  of  the  stock.  Ralph  J.  Stern,  their 
son,  is  a  freshman  in  textile  engineering  at  N.  C. 
State  College.  Robert  Fred  Stern,  another  son,  11, 
attends  the  Charlotte  school. 

Soderberg  and  Stern,  Inc. 

Soderberg  and  Stern,  Inc.,  219  N.  Graham  St., 
Charlotte,  was  incorporated  in  February,  1949,  as  a 
contract  firm  producing  children's  outerwear  for 
Southern  Knitwear  Mills.  The  officers  are  Marvin 
E.  Soderberg,  president  and  general  manager;  Fred 
Stern,  vice-president  and  sales  manager,  and  Mrs. 
Ena  Stern,  secretary  and  treasurer. 

Starting  with  3,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  and  with 
12  or  15  machines,  operated  by  about  20  employees, 
Soderberg  and  Stern  secured  additional  space  to  give 
7,500  sq.  ft.  of  operation  space  and  gradually  added 
machines  until  about  60  are  now  in  operation.  This 
firm  produces  about  100,000  dozen  garments  annual- 
ly, includng  polo  shirts,  cardigan  coats,  creepers  and 
nylon  sports  shirts.  All  of  these  garments  are  knit 
woven  fabrics  of  cotton,  rayon,  nylon  and  orlon,  and 
all  are  in  the  range  for  children  from  six  months  to 
14  years  old.  They  are  all  in  the  medium  price  range. 
This  firm  employed  about  75  workers  during  the 
summer,  but  expected  to  increase  the  number  to 
around  100  by  the  end  of  1954.  The  annual  pay- 
roll ranges  around  $165,000. 

Marvin  E.  Soderberg,  president  and  general  man- 
ager of  the  firm,  is  a  native  of  Minneapolis  and  start- 
ed garment  manufacturing  35  years  ago.  For  25 
years  he  was  in  the  industry  in  Minneapolis,  for  five 
years  was  in  other  southern  plants,  and  joined  with 
Fred  Stern  in  the  organization  of  this  contract  firm 
five  years  ago  in  Charlotte. 

Sterntex,  Inc. 

Sterntex,  Inc.,  424  W.  Third  St.,  Charlotte,  was 
organized  sometime  ago  as  sales  agency  for  South- 
ern Knitwear  Mills,  Inc.  and  its  affiliated  firm,  Sod- 
erberg and  Stern,  Inc.  Sales  are  made  to  the  whole- 
sale trade  and  to  national  chain  stores.  Fred  Stern 
is  president,  and  Mrs.  E.  T.  Stern  is  secretary-treas- 
urer. 


CAROLINA  INDUSTRIAL  MFG.  CORP. 

Greensboro,  N.  C. 

Carolina  Industrial  Mfg.  Corp.,  364  Ashe  St.  at 
Walker  Ave.,  Greensboro,  was  organized  and  incor- 
porated in  May,  1953,  to  manufacture  the  nationally- 
advertised  and  popular  "Mary  Jane"  dresses  for 
girls.  This  firm,  gradually  building  its  production 
force,  expects  in  a  few  months 
to  have  300  workers  making  in- 
fants' and  children's  dresses  un- 
der contract  for  Mary  Jane,  Inc., 
in  New  York  City. 

This  firm  started  a  pilot  plant 
September  2,  1953,  and  by  Aug- 
ust, 1954,  had  increased  its  staff 
to  220  workers.  Soon  it  expects 
to  be  operating  at  full  capacity 
with  300  workers  and  a  weekly 


PAGE  102 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


came  vice-president  of  the  parent  organization  in 
1949  and  came  to  North  Carolina  to  head  the 
Greensboro  firm  November  1.  He  planned  to  move 
his  family  to  Greensboro  the  first  of  the  year.  Mr. 
Marino  succeeds  Verne  Brewer,  who  came  to  Greens- 
boro, organized  and  started  the  firm  in  1953. 


Producing  Mary  Jane  dresses  in  sewing  room  of  Carolina 
Industrial  Mfg.  Corp.,   Greensboro 

payroll  of  around  $7,000.  The  space  was  formerly 
number  308  Walker  Ave.  and  was  occupied  for  sev- 
eral years  by  the  Carolina  Manufacturing  Corp., 
which  built  a  new  plant  on  E.  Bessemer  Ave.  The 
three-story  building,  containing  60,000  sq.  ft.  of 
floor  space,  was  reconditioned  for  making  dresses 
and  is  leased  for  a  number  of  years. 

Carolina  Industrial  Mfg.  Corp.  makes  infants'  and 
children's  dresses  in  15  sizes  and  for  ages  from  nine 
months  to  12  years.  Garments  are  made  for  the  four 
seasons  and  approximately  1,000  different  styles  are 
produced  each  year.  In  August  the  firm  was  pro- 
ducing 1500  dozen  dresses  a  week,  a  number  that  is 
due  to  be  increased  extensively  in  the  coming  months. 
Based  on  sizes  and  materials,  retail  prices  of  these 
dresses  range  from  $2.98  to  $14.98.  The  "Mary 
Jane"  label  is  used  on  all  products,  made  under  con- 
tract for  Mary  Jane,  Inc.,  and  dresses  made  for  other 
customers  bear  the  labels  of  these  customers.  Mary 
Jane  dresses  are  distributed  nation-wide  and  are 
shipped  extensively  to  Hawaii,  Japan  and  other  army 
post  exchanges. 

An  interesting  development  in  the  firm's  products 
was  the  inauguration  of  a  department  manufactur- 
ing walking  dolls  and  doll  dresses.  In  this  produc- 
tion the  firm  uses  dolls  with  soft  plastic  heads  and 
rigid  plastic  bodies,  with  plastic  life-like  hair  and 
closing  eyes.  These  walking  dolls  when  fully  dress- 
ed retail  for  $10.95.  This  has  proved  a  profitable 
innovation  and  has  already  devel- 
oped into  about  10%  of  the  firm's 
production.  Plans  are  to  further 
expand  this  part  of  the  industry, 
including  probable  change  in  the 
line  of  dolls,  with  lower  retail 
prices.  Albert  Reice  is  head  of 
this  department. 

Edward  Marino  is  president  of 
the  Carolina  Industrial  Mfg.  Corp. 
and  general  manager  of  the 
Greensboro  plant.  A  native  of  New 
York  City,  he  has  had  20  years  of 
experience  in  garment  manufac- 
turing with  the  parent  organiza- 
tion, G.  H.  &  E.  Freydberg,  Inc., 

1359   Broadway,   New  York  City. 

tut       hit      •         •  •  i    •        \i       Mary  Jane  dresses 

Mr.   Marino  is  experienced  m  all      made  in  Greens. 

phases  of  garment  work.     He  be-  boro 


THE  HADLEY  CORPORATION 
Weaverville,  N.  C. 

The  Hadley  Corporation  of  Weaverville,  North 
Carolina,  is  a  wholly  owned  subsidiary  of  The  Cash- 
mere Corporation  of  America  of  Cleveland,  Ohio.  It 
was  organized  in  1953  and  during  the  latter  part  of 
that  year  commenced  making  full-fashioned  ladies' 
lamb's  wool  cardigan  and  pullover  sweaters.  One 
addition  to  the  plant  has  already  been  made,  and 
further  expansion  is  planned  for  the  not-too-distant 
future.  The  Haclley  plant  in  Weaverville  is  a  one- 
story,  brick,  steel  and  concrete  building  of  nearly 
20,000  sq.  ft.  It  is  situated  in  the  midst  of  the  Great 
Smokies  on  a  beautiful  35  acre  site,  and  is  regarded 
by  those  who  have  seen  it  as  a  gem  of  industrial 
achievement. 

Sweaters  are  knitted  from  a  super  fine  quality  of 
imported  lamb's  wool,  the  yarn  being  spun  by  the 
Erie  Dyeing  &  Processing  Co.,  also  a  subsidiary  of 
The  Cashmere  Corporation  of  America.  These  three 
companies  are  completely  integrated  and  are  the  only 
organization  in  the  world  to  conduct  a  completely  ver- 
tical operation.  The  lamb's  wool  sweaters,  made  in 
the  Weaverville  plant,  are  sold  through  the  better 
department  and  specialty  stores  throughout  the  U. 
S.  A.  They  retail  at  prices  ranging  from  $9.95  to 
$12.95.  The  Hadley  plant  is  the  only  one  of  its  type 
in  North  Carolina. 

The  Erie  Dyeing  &  Processing  Co.,  which  special- 
izes in  scouring,  bleaching,  dyeing,  and  spinning, 
was  founded  40  years  ago  by  the  Habers,  a  promi- 
nent Cleveland  family.  This  firm  pioneered  the  re- 
search and  modernization  of  the  cashmere  industry 
in  this  country.  Here  experts  have  perfected  num- 
erous complicated  techniques  for  removing  the  resi- 
due and  coarse  outer  hairs  from  the  delicate  down. 
Special  systems  have  been  developed  for  scouring, 
dyeing,  blending,  mixing,  picking,  carding,  and  spin- 
ning. 

The  three  corporations  named — Cashmere,  Erie, 
and  Hadley  of  Weaverville — are  owned  and  managed 
by  the  same  group  of  stockholders  who  are  also  the 
officers  of  the  company.  Sales  of  the  three  com- 
panies are  managed  exclusively  by  Strauss  &  Frisk, 
580  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City.  A  competent 
selling  force  covers  the  entire  country  with  the  prod- 
ucts of  the  three  companies.  Lawrence  M.  Strauss, 
who  resides  in  Connecticut,  is  chairman  of  the  board. 
Richard  L.  Haber,  who  is  president,  lives  in  Cleve- 
land. Wallace  Adler,  vice-president  in  charge  of 
production,  also  resides  in  Cleveland.  Alfred  G. 
Frisk,  vice-president  in  charge  of  sales  and  advertis- 
ing, makes  his  office  in  New  York. 

Richard  M.  Taylor,  manager  of  the  Weaverville 
plant,  is  a  native  of  Asheville  and  a  son  of  the  late 
W.  Granville  Taylor,  prominent  lumber  dealer.  Mr. 
Taylor  attended  Sewanee  Military  Academy  and  is 
a  graduate  of  the  University  of  Virginia  in  1940. 
For  five  and  a  half  years  during  World  War  II  he 
was  in  the  Field  Artillery  and  was  discharged  in  194G 
as  a  Major.    He  was  engaged  in  lumbering  in  Rock 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   103 


Hill,  S.  C,  for  several  years  and  joined  The  Hadley 
Corporation  in  December,  1953,  as  manager  of  the 
plant  at  Weaverville.  Warren  Kilpatrick,  a  native 
of  Newportville,  Penna.,  is  supervisor  of  knitting-, 
and  Miss  Dorothy  Gladwell,  a  native  of  Dover,  Eng- 
land, is  supervisor  of  finishing. 

The  company,  which  is  privately  owned  by  the 
aforementioned  group  and  their  families,  does  not 
publish  a  financial  statement.  However,  the  com- 
bined sales  run  into  a  number  of  millions  of  dollars. 


IREDELL  KNITTING  MILLS,  INC. 

Statesville,  N.  C. 

Iredell  Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  Statesville,  was  organ- 
ized and  incorporated  in  1947  by  Robert  Kalman,  a 
native  of  Vienna,  Austria,  to  manufacture  children's 
garments.  Success  of  this  enterprise  is  indicated  by 
the  fact  that  three  separate  buildings  in  a  nearby 
group  have  been  constructed  in  the  seven  years  of 
operation,  and  plant  no.  3  is  now  being  enlarged. 

Iredell  Knitting  Mills  started  tubular  knitting 
from  which  are  made  creepers,  polo  shirts  and  boys' 
cardigans.  Since  the  plant  was  started,  additions  to 
the  line  of  goods  produced  include  diaper  sets,  boys' 
sports  shirts  and  other  children's  wear. 

The  first  plant  of  this  firm  was  erected  in  1947. 
and  in  1951  plants  no.  2  and  3  were  added.  The  addi- 
tion now  being  erected  and  due  to  be  finished  by  the 
end  of  1954  is  completely  air-conditioned.  This  will 
give  the  group  of  Statesville  plants  approximately 
38,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space. 

Iredell  Knitting  Mills  products  are  sold  nation- 
wide through  jobbers  and  chain  stores.  Most  of  the 
products  carry  the  "Iredell"  brand  over  a  four-leaf 
clover  background,  although  some  of  the  products 
carry  the  label  of  the  firms  for  which  they  are  made. 
The  sales  office  is  located  at  366  West  15th  St.,  New 
York  City. 

The  plant  is  equipped  with  approximately  175  sew- 
ing machines,  25  knitting  machines,  cutting  and 
other  machines.  The  plant  now  employs  about  200 
workers  and  has  an  annual  payroll  of  around  $300,- 
000.  When  the  present  addition  is  completed  em- 
ployment will  be  increased  to  about  250  workers, 
with  an  annual  payroll  of  about  $380,000. 

Mr.  Kalman  was  engaged  in  knit  goods  manufac- 
turing in  both  Vienna  and  Paris,  France,  before  com- 
ing to  the  United  States  in  1939.  In  the  15  years 
since  coming  to  this  country  he  has  been  the  founder, 
an  officer  and  operator  of 
other  firms  including  the 
Amconit  Corp.  in  New  York 
City  and  the  Coatesville 
Knitting  Mills,  Inc.,  Coates- 
ville, Penna.  He  now  di- 
vides most  of  his  time  be- 
tween the  Statesville  plant 
and  the  sales  office  in  New 
York  City.  He  is  presi- 
dent and  treasurer  of  the 
firm,  and  Miss  Marjorie 
Schell  is  secretary.  Theo- 
dore Sohn,  general  man- 
ager of  the  Iredell  Knitting 

Mills,  is  a  native  of  New 

v     i  '  n.,  ■.   ,         u    a    i  a  Creepers  are  among  items 

1  orK  Ulty  and  nas  naa   lb  made  by  Iredell  Knitting 
years  of  experience  in  gar-  Mills,  statesville 


merit  manufacturing.  He  started  as  a  garment  cut- 
ter, moved  up  to  pattern  maker,  and  to  designer  and 
production  manager,  lie  operated  his  own  business 
as  a  garment  manufacturer  for  seven  years.  In  Sep- 
tember, 1953,  he  came  to  Statesville  as  general  man- 
ager of  the  Iredell  Knitting  Mills. 

KAR-LYN  CORPORATION 

Asheville,  N.  C. 

Kar-Lyn  Corporation,  162  Coxe  Ave.,  Asheville, 
was  organized  in  mid-lt>5ti  by  members  of  the  Tuck- 
er family  in  New  York  City  to  manufacture  "Wee- 
Viiiie"  garments. 

Kar-Lyn  Corporation  is  engaged  in  making  "Wee- 
Wiliie"  garments,  including  western  snirts  for  boys 
from  one  to  seven  years  of  age,  Cabana  sets  (shorts 
and  shirts)  and  bathrobes  for  children  from  one  to 
seven  years  of  age.  The  firm  planned  to  open  an 
addition  by  the  end  of  1954  for  making  dungarees 
and  slacks  for  children  ages  one  to  seven. 

Products  are  sold  through  the  sales  oifice  in  New 
York  City  by  salesmen  throughout  the  country.  Gar- 
ments range  in  wholesale  prices  from  $9.00  to  $45.00. 
'the  firm  uses  its  own  laoels  and  sells  to  chain  and 
department  stores,  including  such  firms  as  Celks, 
i_>on  Marche  and  numerous  otners  and  ships  its  prod- 
ucts extensively  to  Government  Post  Exchanges  in 
Alaska,  Germany,  Japan  and  other  foreign  countries. 

Materials  used  inciude  cotton,  rayon,  nylon,  dac- 
ron,  rlannel  and  corduroy.  Most  of  uie  materials  and 
supplies  are  bought  from  North  Carolina  firms,  in- 
cluding materials  from  the  Cranston  Print  Works  at 
Fletcher;  tnread  from  Elmore  Thread  Co.,  Spindale; 
cartons  from  the  Old  Dominion  Box  Co.,  Charlotte, 
and  boxes  from  the  Etta  Paper  Cox  Co.,  at  Marion. 

Kar-Lyn  had  about  100  employees  by  late  summer 
and  planned  to  increase  the  number  to  albout  IV  5  by 
the  end  of  1954.  The  annual  payroll  now  ranges 
around  $140,000.  The  company  provides  accident  in- 
surance for  its  employees,  gives  one  week  paid  vaca- 
tion and  has  frequent  picnic  parties  for  its  employees. 

Officers  of  the  Kar-Lyn  Corporation  are  Arthur 
Tucker,  president;  William  Tucker,  his  father,  vice- 
president  ;  and  Mrs.  Pauline  Tucker,  his  wife,  secre- 
tary and  treasurer. 

Joseph  Greenberg  is  manager  of  the  Asheville 
plant  and  Mrs.  Gladys  Deweese  is  superintendent. 
Mr.  Greenberg  is  a  native  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  and 
worked  for  the  parent  company  before  coming  to 
Asheville  three  years  ago.  He  was  superintendent  of 
the  Asheville  Shirt  Co.  and  was  appointed  by  the 
court  as  receiver  and  liquidator  of  that  firm.  Mrs. 
Deweese  was  with  Beacon  Manufacturing  Co., 
Sayles-Biltmore  Bleacheries  and  Asheville  Shirt  Co. 
before  joining  the  Kar-Lyn  Corporation. 

MARTIN  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  INC. 
Robersonville,  N.  C. 

Martin  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  Robersonville, 
was  established  and  began  operation  in  the  summer 
of  1952,  as  a  result  of  the  activities  of  Robersonville 
citizens  and  the  N.  C.  Department  of  Conservation 
and  Development.  The  firm  now  manufactures  and 
ships  approximately  half  a  million  house  dresses  an- 
nually. 

Martin  Manufacturing  Co.  started  in  a  two-story 
brick  building  containing  8,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space, 
erected  by  local  citizens.  Operations  were  so  suc- 
cessful that  a  year  later  a  larger  cinder  block  build- 


PAGE   104 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall 


ing,  all  on  one  floor,  was  erected,  giving  the  plant  a 
total  of  12,000  sq.  ft.  Operations  are  somewhat  sea- 
sonal, the  firm  employing  from  125  to  150  workers, 
and  the  payroll  ranges  between  $200,000  and  $250,- 
000  annually.  The  firm's  plant  of  operating  one  sec- 
tion for  white  workers  and  another  for  Negro  work- 
ers is  developing  satisfactorily. 

Martin  Manufacturing  Co.  produces  women's 
house  dresses  primarily,  with  extensive  production 
of  quilted  and  flowered  robes.  The  dresses  and  robes 
have  a  nation-wide  distribution  and  are  sold  largely 
through  chain  and  mail  order  firms.  They  are  ship- 
ped direct  to  the  individual  stores  from  the  Rober- 
sonville  plant.  Retail  prices  of  dresses  range  from 
$2.98  to  $3.98,  and  the  robes  range  from  $4.98  to 
$6.98  each  in  retail  price. 

H.  J.  (Hank)  Menhard  joined  the  iirm  early  this 
year  as  manager  of  the  Robersonville  operations,  suc- 
ceeding Martin  Steinberg,  who  opened  the  plant  and 
was  manager  for  about  a  year  and  a  half.  Mr.  Men- 
hard,  a  native  of  New  York  City,  has  been  in  the  gar- 
ment industry  for  a  number  of  years.  He  was  with 
the  Textile  Division  of  the  War  Production  Board  in 
the  1943-46  period,  and  from  that  time  until  1954  he 
was  engaged  in  apparel  advertising  and  export  work. 

Robersonville,  a  rural  community,  not  only  assist- 
ed this  industry  in  its  new  location.  The  community 
showed  its  appreciation  of  and  interest  in  the  new 
industry  by  staging  an  extensive  celebration  last 
August  on  the  occasion  of  the  second  anniversary  of 
the  firm's  location  at  Robersonville. 


HADLEY  MANUFACTURING  CORP. 

Burlington,  N.  C. 

Hadley  Manufacturing  Corp.,  1709  North  Church 
St.,  Burlington,  a  North  Carolina  corporation,  organ- 
ized and  started  manufacturing  women's  and  chil- 
dren's pajamas  exclusively  as  a  subsidiary  firm  and 
to  do  contract  work  for  Croyden  Manufacturing  Co., 
Staunton,  Va.,  and  now  produces  enough  "Tommies" 
to  extend  the  gross  annual  sales  to  around  three 
quarters  of  a  million  dollars. 

The  Hadley  firm  leases  its  plant,  containing  about 
15,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  from  Stratford  Hosiery 
Co.  All  cutting,  sewing,  packaging  and  shipping  is 
clone  in  the  plant.  In  operation  are  65  sewing  ma- 
chines, and  the  firm  employs  about  100  workers  with 

an   annual   payroll   of   ap- 
proximately $175,000. 

Women's  and  children's 
pajamas  are  produced  al- 
most exclusively  for  all  ages 
from  junior  sizes  on  up, 
and  including  longs  and 
shorts.  Probably  10%  of 
the  production  is  in  gowns. 
More  than  200  different 
styles  are  produced,  all  un- 
der the  firm's  well-known 
brand  name,  "Tommies." 
Production  has  now  reach- 
ed 300,000  garments  an- 
nuallv,  retail  prices  ranging 
from  $3.95  to  $9.95.  Gross 
■Tommies-  pajamas  made  sales  range  around  $750,- 
in  Burlington  plant  000.     Machines  and  equip- 


ment are  valued  at  around 
$65,000. 

Distribution  of  "Tom- 
mies" is  nation-wide.  The 
Burlington  firm  is  under 
contract  to  produce  goods 
for  the  Virginia  firm  but 
ships  its  products  direct  to 
the  customers  from  the 
plant. 

The  Hadley  firm  started 
in  a  small  building  with 
25  employees  and  15  ma- 
chines. The  Burlington  of- 
fice of  the  Employment  Se- 
curity Commission  has  as- 
sisted in  staffing  the  plant 
by  testing  workers  and  re- 
ferring those  considered 
qualified  for  training  in 
garment  making.  The  man- 
ager expressed  appreciation 
for  the  services  rendered 
from  the  time  the  firm 
started. 

The  Hadley  Company 
pays  for  a  comprehensive  life  insurance  and  hospit- 
alization plan  for  all  of  its  employees,  with  disability 
benefits.  A  high  wage  scale  is  maintained,  and  em- 
ployees are  granted  one  week  of  paid  vacation  after 
one  year  of  service  and  two  weeks  of  paid  vacation 
after  five  years  of  service.  Three  paid  holidays  are 
also  observed. 

James  H.  Meyer,  New  York  City,  is  president  of 
the  corporation  and  Thomas  Hassett,  Staunton,  Va., 
is  vice-president  and  general  manager;  LeRoy  Mor- 
row is  plant  manager.  Mr.  Morrow,  a  native  of 
Winder,  Ga.,  entered  the  garment  making  industry 
early  and  has  been  active  in  this  industry  for  26 
years,  all  of  it  in  North  Carolina.  He  was  with  Blue 
Bell  in  Greensboro  for  15  years  and  was  plant  man- 
ager for  three  years  of  the  W.  Koury  Company  in 
Sanford.  He  moved  to  Burlington  September  1, 
1952,  to  open  and  manage  the  new  Hadley  firm. 


^Tommies'  short  pajamas 
produced  by  Hadley 


CHARLOTTE  BLOUSE  CO. 

Charlotte,  N.  C. 

Charlotte  Blouse  Co.,  314  E.  Sixth  St.,  Charlotte, 
was  organized  and  incorporated  in  December,  1953, 
and  began  operation  in  the  Wade  Loft  Building  in 
the  manufacture  of  ladies'  blouses. 

In  less  than  a  year  of  operation  this  firm  has  reach- 
ed production  ranging  from  600  to  700  dozen  blouses 
a  week  under  contract  for  other  garment  manufac- 
turers. The  firm  employs  an  average  ranging  be- 
tween 80  to  120  employees  and  has  an  annual  pay- 
roll from  $200,000  to  $225,000. 

Charlotte  Blouse  Co.  now  operates  in  about  9,000 
sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  and  had  plans  for  securing  an- 
other floor  in  the  Wade  Loft  Building  by  the  first  of 
1955,  giving  total  floor  space  of  about  20,000  sq. 
ft.  By  this  expansion,  the  firm  would  increase  its 
employees  to  around  140.  The  Charlotte  office  of 
the  Employment  Security  Commission  has  cooperat- 
ed with  this  firm  in  selecting,  testing  and  referring 
workers  to  the  plant. 

Charlotte  Blouse  produces  popular  priced  blouses 
of  cotton,  jersey  and  nylon  tricot.     These  garments 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  105 


range  in  retail  price  from  $2.98  to  $4.98.  They  are 
manufactured  under  the  brand  name  of  the  manu- 
facturers who  take  the  entire  output  under  contract. 
They  are  distributed  nation-wide  through  specialty 
shops  and  department  stores. 

Robert  M.  Green  came  to  Charlotte  in  May,  1954, 
as  general  manager  of  the  plant.  He  is  a  native  of 
New  York  City  and  has  had  extensive  experience  in 
garment  manufacturing  during  the  past  15  years. 
Formerly  his  work  was  in  New  York  State,  but  dur- 
ing the  five-year  period  before  coming  to  Charlotte 
he  was  with  the  Palm  Beach  Corp.  at  St.  Paul,  Va. 


GOLDBLOOM'S  HIGHLAND  GARMENT  CO. 

Asheville,  N.  C. 

Goldbloom's  Highland  Garment  Co.,  217  Coxe 
Ave.,  Asheville,  was  organized  and  began  business 
in  1936  as  the  Smokey  Mount  Industries.  In  1940  the 
business  was  purchased  by  Harold  Goldbloom,  and  in 
1945  the  name  was  changed  to  the  present  name. 
This  firm  manufactures  women's  coats  and  suits,  as 
well  as  dresses  and  skirts  for  both  wholesale  and 
retail  distribution. 

Principal  products  are  women's  coats  and  suits, 
usually  made  to  order,  produced  from  rayon,  wool 
and  some  nylon.  The  principal  line  is  suits  made  to 
retail  at  prices  ranging  from  $10.95  to  $40.00  and 
coats  ranging  from  $12.95  to  $50.00.  Some  dresses 
are  manufactured,  ranging  in  retail  price  from  $3.95 
to  $8.95,  and  skirts  retailing  from  $1.95  to  $8.95. 

Retail  outlets  are  operated  at  the  plant  in  Ashe- 
ville and  in  Spartanburg,  S.  C,  a  new  retail  unit 
having  been  started  in  September  in  Greenville,  S. 
C.  The  Retail  Department  is  under  supervision  of 
Mrs.  Paris  Cooper.  Probably  15%  of  the  production 
is  distributed  through  the  Retail  Department,  the 


One  of  three  retail  outlets,  faclory-to-user,  of  Goldbloom's  High- 
land Garment  Co.,  Asheville,  viaker  of  stylish 
coats,  suits  and  dresses 

remainder  of  the  production  going  to  jobbers  and  dis- 
tributors only. 

Goldbloom's  Highland  Garment  Co.  has  an  author- 
ized capital  of  $100,000  with  $40,000  paid  in.  The 
annual  production  ranges  around  $800,000.  The  firm 
employs  an  average  of  around  75  workers  with  an 
annual  payroll  of  about  $150,000.  The  firm  leases 
the  manufacturing  and  retail  space  and  has  machin- 
ery and  equipment,  largely  sewing  machines,  valued 
at  $50,000  to  $60,000.  Production  space  includes 
11,000  square  feet. 

Goldbloom's  Highland  Garment  Co.  is  family  own- 
ed. Harold  Goldbloom  is  president ;  Mrs.  Ruth  Gold- 
bloom,  his  wife,  is  vice-president  and  treasurer,  and 
Miss  Ann  Goldbloom,  his  daughter,  is  secretary  of 
the  corporation.  Mrs.  Millie  Youngblood  is  stylist, 
superintendent  of  the  plant  and  in  charge  of  produc- 
tion. Mr.  Goldbloom,  head  of  the  firm,  is  a  native  of 
St.  Paul,  Minn.,  moved  to  California  in  1922  and 
came  to  Asheville  in  1940.  He  has  been  in  the  ready- 
to-wear  business  practically  all  of  his  life. 


Millions  of  Work  Gloves  Made  in  Newton-Conover  Area 


Sixty-five  million  work  gloves  a  year! 

That's  a  lot  of  gloves — the  equivalent  of  about  one 
for  every  individual  in  the  national  labor  force — but 
approximately  that  number  of  gloves  is  manufactur- 
ed annually  in  two  adjoining  towns  in  Catawba 
County — Conover  and  Newton — the  exclusive  cen- 
ter of  the  work  glove  industry  in  North  Carolina, 
with  the  exception  that  one  of  the  plants  in  this 
area  has  a  branch  plant  some  16  miles  away  at  Tay- 
lorsville  in  Alexander  County. 

As  the  four  manufacturers  in  Newton-Conover 
express  it,  they  manufactured  about  2,700,000  dozen 
pairs  of  gloves  last  year  which  they  sold  throughout 
the  United  States  for  approximately  $5,500,000. 
These  four  plants  operate  in  about  260,000  sq.  ft.  of 
floor  space,  employ  around  1200  workers,  and  pay 
wages  and  salaries  each  year  amounting  to  about 
$2,500,000. 

The  work  glove  industry  had  its  beginning  in  Ca- 
tawba County  more  than  40  years  ago,  and  Conover 
and  Newton  are  the  exclusive  producers  of  gloves  in 
North  Carolina,  with  the  noted  exception.  The  pio- 
neer in  this  industry  was  Perry  Hefner,  who  started 
the  first  glove  factory  in  1913  in  the  Banoak  school 
section  of  Catawba  County  and  operated  until  1940. 
Two  years  later  in  1915,  Adolphus  Herman  and  Sons 


opened  a  small  plant  in  Newton  and  operated  for 
more  than  10  years.  An  earlier  Carolina  Glove  Co. 
was  started  in  1918  by  John  Clarence  Yount,  brother 
of  Herbert  M.  Yount,  who  started  the  Newton  Glove 
Manufacturing  Co.  John  Young  died  in  1924  and  the 
company  later  was  sold  to  Eddie  Smith  and  his 
father,  E.  A.  Smith,  of  Charlotte.  This  Carolina 
Glove  Co.  was  operated  for  a  few  years  and  was 
then  liquidated. 

Two  of  the  five  original  plants  are  now  large  and 
successful  operators.  Warlong  Glove  Manufacturing 
Co.,  organized  in  1917  by  George  A.  Warlick,  Luther 
F.  Long  and  Robert  B.  Knox,  is  now  operated  by  A. 
L.  Shuford.  Newton  Glove  Manufacturing  Co.  was 
started  less  than  a  year  later  by  H.  M.  Yount,  who 
still  heads  the  firm.  These  are  two  of  the  nation's 
largest,  oldest  and  best-known  of  the  work  glove 
companies. 

The  newer  Carolina  Glove  Co.,  one  of  the  larger 
firms  and  not  connected  with  the  earlier  firm  of  the 
same  name,  was  organized  in  1946  by  J.  W.  Aber- 
nethy  and  J.  W.  Abernethy,  Jr.,  and  the  firm's  Tay- 
lorsville  branch  was  started  in  1947.  The  Southern 
Glove  Manufacturing  Co.  was  organized  in  1942  by 
A.  C.  Little,  owner,  and  is  now  operating  in  a  new 
building. — Historical  data  by  H.  M.  Yount. 


PAGE   106 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


WARLONG  GLOVE  MFG.  CO. 
Conover,  N.  C. 

Warlong  Glove  Mfg.  Co.,  Conover,  was  organized 
in  1916  and  thus  is  the  oldest  of  a  group  of  work 
glove  manufacturers  located  in  Newton  and  Conover, 
the  center  of  the  glove  industry  in  North  Carolina. 
It  is  affiliated  with  and  owned  by  the  same  people 
who  own  the  Conover  Knitting  Company,  which 
manufactures  men's  hosiery — thus  producing  cov- 
ering for  both  the  hands  and  the  feet. 

Warlong  Glove  was  organized  by  George  A.  War- 
lick  and  Luther  F.  Long,  from  whose  names  the  name 
of  the  firm  is  derived,  and  Robert  B.  Knox.  Opera- 
tions were  started  in  Newton,  but  during  the  first 
year  C.  R.  Brady  and  Adrian  L.  Shuford  purchased 
controlling  stock  and  moved  the  plant  into  a  wooden 
building  in  Conover.  Conover  Knitting  was  started 
as  a  department  of  Warlong  Glove  in  1928  and  con- 
tinued as  such  until  1932  when  it  was  chartered  as 
a  separate  firm.  Members  of  the  Shuford  family 
now  own  practically  all  of  the  stock.  The  two  indus- 
tries are  under  the  same  roof,  but  are  operated  as 
separate  corporations. 

Originally,  Warlong  Glove  made  clute  pattern  can- 
ton flannel  gloves.  The  line  has  been  expanded  to 
include  reversibles,  double  palms,  chore  gloves,  ex- 
tended patch  palm  hot  mill  gloves,  jerseys  and  leath- 
er palm  gloves.  Materials  used  include  canton  flan- 
nel, 8-10-12  oz.  weights  (based  on  34  in.  width),  jer- 
seys in  9  and  10  V2  oz.  weights,  knitted  cotton  tubing 
for  wrists  and  top  grade  side  and  shoulder  split 
leather  for  leather  palm  gloves.  Products  are  sold  to 
wholesalers  and  large  industries,  and  factory  prices 
range  from  $2.00  a  dozen  to  $14.00  a  dozen,  vary- 
ing extensively  due  to  material  changes. 

The  modern  Warlong  Glove  plant,  all  on  one  floor, 
contains  approximately  90,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space. 
It  employs  around  450  workers,  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll of  approximately  $1,000,000.  Annual  produc- 
tion exceeds  1,000,000  dozen  pairs  of  gloves  in  about 
500  styles  and  many  sizes,  including  men's,  women's 
and  extra  sizes. 

Business  of  Warlong  Glove  is  nation-wide,  with 
some  export  trade.  Sales  offices  are  maintained  not 
only  at  the  main  office  in  Conover,  but  also  in  the 
Empire  State  Building  in  New  York  City  and  in 
Chicago  and  Los  Angeles. 

Early  in  1954  the  company  made  extensive  expan- 
sions, doubling  the  warehouse  space  and  adding  ma- 
terially to  shipping  space  and  to  the  Leather  Palm 
Manufacturing  Division  space. 

Warlong  Glove  provides  a  group  combination  life 
and  hospitalization  insurance  policy  which  covers  all 
employees  after  a  six  months'  probationary  period, 
in  addition  to  Old  Age  and  Sur- 
vivors Insurance,  Unemployment 
Insurance  and  Workmen's  Com- 
pensation. The  company  also 
operates  a  cafeteria  on  a  cost 
basis,  and  some  of  the  civic  clubs 
hold  their  periodic  meetings  in 
the  attractive  dining  room.  This 
cafeteria  is  a  gathering  place  for 
all  employees. 

Present  officers  of  the  com- 
pany are  A.  L.  Shuford,  presi- 
dent; W.  Terrell  Webster,  Jr., 
vice-president — sales;  C.L.  Tarr, 


Ms,    !  !-S  2.(  J0 

Work  (/lores  in  many  styles  made  by  Warlong  Glove,  Conover 

vice-president — Leather  Palm  Division ;  C.  L.  Hur- 
ley, vice-president — sales,  New  York  office,  and  A. 
L.  Shuford,  Jr.,  secretary. 

A.  L.  Shuford,  Sr.,  head  of  the  firm,  has  main- 
taned  cordial  relations  with  employees  in  the  War- 
long  Glove  plant,  as  well  as  its  younger  affiliate, 
Conover  Knitting  Co.,  of  which  he  is  treasurer.  He 
is  affectionately  known  as  "Pop"  Shuford.  A.  L. 
Shuford,  Jr.,  as  head  of  the  knitting  firm,  is  now 
chairman  of  the  board  of  The  National  Hosiery 
Manufacturers  Association. 

Last  August  19  employees  of  both  Warlong  Glove 
and  Conover  Knitting  staged  a  "strike"  for  half  an 
hour,  as  has  been  the  custom  for  many  years,  to  help 
their  boss,  A.  L.  Shuford,  celebrate  his  birth  anni- 
versary, on  that  occasion  his  70th.  He  was  called 
into  the  glove  sewing  room  and  presented  a  bouquet 
of  70  roses.  Returning  to  his  office  he  found  a  three- 
tiered  birthday  cake  with  the  inscription  "Seventy 
Years",  a  gift  from  the  glove  plant  workers.  The 
knitting  mill  employees  gave  him  a  dish  garden  of 
flowers. 


CAROLINA  GLOVE  CO. 
Newton,  N.  C. 

Carolina  Glove  Co.,  Newton,  was  organized  in  1946 
by  J.  W.  Abernethy  and  his  son,  J.  W.  Abernethy, 
Jr.,  for  the  production  of  work  gloves.  Through 
several  additions  to  the  first  small  unit  the  company 
has  expanded  to  the  extent  that  it  now  produces 
around  1,000,000  dozen  pairs  of  gloves  annually  and 
has  developed  gross  annual  sales  of  more  than  $2,- 
000,000. 

The  original  glove  plant  was  in  the  Balls  Creek 
area  of  Catawba  County,  eight  miles  southeast  of 

Large  and  complete  work  glove  plant  of  Warlong  Glove 
Mfg.  Co.  at  Conover 


Summer-Fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


107 


Work  gloves  of  many  kinds  and  for  many  uses  made  by 
Carolina  Qlove  Co.,  Neivton 

Newton.  This  plant,  formerly  a  school  building,  was 
purchased  from  Catawba  County  in  1945,  remodeled 
and  adapted  to  the  manufacture  of  gloves.  The  sec- 
ond plant  was  opened  in  Taylorsville  in  1947  and 
now  has  about  85  employees.  The  building  contains 
4,000  square  feet  of  floor  space.  The  third  unit  was 
opened  in  1948  containing  storage  and  shipping  units 
and  the  sales  office.  The  fourth  unit  was  opened  in 
1950  on  Highway  10  at  the  edge  of  Newton.  This 
unit  is  used  as  the  Cutting  Department,  containing 
about  15,000  sq.  ft.  of  space  and  employing  nine 
workers. 

Recently  Carolina  Glove  Co.  bought  a  building  in 
Taylorsville  formerly  occupied  by  the  Brookwood 
Mills  Co.  The  cotton  mill  machinery  has  been  sold, 
the  building  is  being  renovated  and  early  in  1955 
it  was  expected  to  start  the  manufacture  of  gloves. 
In  this  building  the  firm  will  add  a  Leather  Gloves 
Department  and  will  move  the  present  Taylorsville 
plant  into  this  building.  When  completed  and  in 
full  operation  the  plant  will  employ  from  280  to  320 
workers  and  will  have  an  annual  pavroll  in  excess  of 
$500,000. 

When  the  Taylorsville  plant  is  in  full  operation, 
Carolina  Glove  Co.  is  expected  to  have  more  than  500 
employees  at  its  several  plants,  and  the  payroll  will 
be  approximately  doubled.  All  of  the  units  of  the 
company  will  have  approximately  90,000  sq.  ft.  of 
production  space. 

Carolina  Glove  Co.  now  pro- 
duces a  line  of  canton  flannel 
and  jersey  gloves.  With  the 
opening  of  the  Taylosville  plant, 
leather  and  leather  palm  gloves 
will  be  added.  Probably  95% 
of  the  materials  used  are  pur- 
chased from  North  Carolina  tex- 
tile manufacturers.  The  prod- 
ucts are  sold  on  a  nation-wide 
basis  to  industrial  plants  and 
through  jobbers  and  wholesal- 
ers. The  gloves  produced  range 
in  price  from  $1.95  to  $6.00  a 
dozen. 

When  the  firm  was  first  or- 
ganized J.  W.  Abernethy  was 
president;  J.  W.  Abernethy,  Jr., 
vice-president  and  general  man- 
ager, and  Paul  B.  Smyre  was 
secretary  and  treasurer.  J.  W. 
Abernetthy  is  still  president;  J. 
W.  Abernethy,  Jr.,  is  executive 


vice-president  and  general  manager ;  P.  P.  Herman  is 
vice-president  and  secretary,  and  P.  B.  Smyre  is 
still  treasurer.  Thomas  P.  Pruitt  has  been  added  to 
the  executive  staff,  and  C.  A.  Smyre  has  been  super- 
intendent of  the  plant  since  the  organization  was 
formed.    The  authorized  capital  stock  is  $500,000. 

J.  W.  Abernethy,  Jr.,  executive  head  of  the  firm, 
is  a  native  of  Newton  and  attended  N.  C.  State  Col- 
lege. He  was  in  the  Army  Air  Force  for  more  than 
three  years  during  World  War  I  and  was  discharged 
as  a  Sergeant.  His  father  was  a  pioneer  and  is  still 
one  of  the  leaders  in  the  textile  industry  in  western 
North  Carolina. 

NEWTON  GLOVE  MFG.  CO, 
Newton,  N.  C. 

Newton  Glove  Mfg.  Co.,  Newton,  was  organized 
by  H.  M.  Yount  in  1917,  only  a  few  weeks  after  the 
first  glove  firm  was  organized  in  the  Newton-Con- 
over  area.  The  firm  now  produces  more  than  half  a 
million  dozen  pairs  of  work  gloves  annually,  distrib- 
uted on  a  nation-wide  basis. 

When  Mr.  Yount  started  his  glove  plant  it  was  lo- 
cated in  a  frame  building  30  x  100  feet  and  he  em- 
ployed 10  workers.  Today  he  employs  approximate- 
ly 200  workers,  has  an  annual  payroll  of  $400,000 
and  occupies  one  of  the  most  modern  industrial 
buildings  to  be  found  in  the  State. 

Newton  Glove  produces  gloves  made  of  canton 
flannel  cloth,  cotton  plastic  cloth,  jersey  cloth  and 
knitted  tubing  cloth,  all  from  high  grade  combed 
yarn  for  service.  From  40%  to  50%  of  the  mate- 
rials used  are  purchased  in  North  Carolina.  These 
cotton  work  gloves  are  made  to  retail  from  $.25  to 
$1.00.  Of  the  90  different  styles  and  sizes,  Newton 
Glove  distributes  more  than  half  a  million  dozen 
pairs  each  year. 

Newton  Glove  was  operated  for  several  years  as 
an  individually  owned  firm,  then  in  1940  became  a 
partnership  with  his  son,  R.  M.  Yount,  as  a  partner. 
In  1945  it  was  incorporated  with  an  authorized  cap- 

Recently  completed  modern  office  building  (top)  and  up-to-date 
plant  (bottom)  of  Neivton  Glove  Mfg.  Co. 


ii<  i 


■j^^j^^M^.- 


PAGE   108 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1954 


ital  of  $700,000.  The  mod- 
ern one-story  manufactur- 
ing building  is  540  feet  long 
and  contains  more  than 
50,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space. 
Entirely  modern  equipment 
has  been  installed.  Part  of 
the  building  is  air-condi- 
tioned. Recently  the  firm 
completed  a  fine  office 
building  located  on  a  large 
lot  near  the  plant.  This  of- 
fice building  is  40  x  120  feet 
and  modern  in  all  respects. 


Work  gloves  have  been  pro- 
duced  for   many   years    by 
Newton  Glove 


Mr.  Yount  is  proud  of  the  18  present  employees 
who  started  work  with  the  firm  prior  to  1918.  Em- 
ployees of  the  firm  receive  a  Christmas  bonus  each 
year  ranging  from  four  to  eight  percent  of  their  an- 
nual wages.  They  have  one  week  of  paid  vacation 
each  year,  and  the  firm  provides  a  hospitalization 
and  welfare  plan  for  all  employees  who  meet  basic 
requirements. 

Officers  of  Newton  Glove  Co.  are  H.  M.  Yount, 
president;  R.  M.  Yount,  his  son,  vice-president  and 
treasurer,  and  Mrs.  R.  M.  Yount,  his  daughter-in- 
law,  is  secretary.  Walter  Dellinger  has  been  super- 
intendent of  the  plant  for  12  years  and  J.  P.  Keever 
has  been  office  manager  for  30  years. 


Numerous  Miscellaneous  Apparel  Items  Produced  in  State 


North  Carolina  contains  probably  a  dozen  large 
manufacturing  firms  engaged  in  the  production  of 
items  classified  as  Apparel.  Some  of  these  strictly 
are  not  wearing  apparel  or  garments  in  the  usual 
sense  of  the  word.  However,  these  industries,  all 
embracing  needlecraft,  are  so  classed.  These  in- 
clude such  items  as  hunting  garments,  awnings,  tar- 
paulins, packing  or  shipping  bags,  curtains,  neck- 
wear, handkerchiefs,  garters,  belts  and  other  such 
items. 

The  oldest  of  these  is  Gem-Dandy,  Inc.,  Madison, 
manufacturer  of  garters,  suspenders,  belts  and  other 
items  since  1914.  Panda  Curtain  Co.,  Charlotte,  was 
organized  in  1954,  but  succeeded  Powdrell  and  Alex- 
ander which  began  operations  in  1918.  R.  W.  El- 
dridge  Co.  started  making  handkerchiefs  in  Char- 
lotte in  1925.  Chase  Bag  Co.,  Reidsville,  in  1931 
took  over  a  Reidsville  firm  that  had  produced  tobacco 
bags  for  many  years.  In  1932  Burlington  Mills  be- 
gan ribbon  production  in  Reidsville,  and  Tiedright 
Tie  Co.,  Asheboro,  began  operation  in  1934.  The 
Charlotte  Workshop  for  the  Blind,  Charlotte,  opened 
in  1936.  In  1942  Empire  Manufacturing  Corp. 
started  making  hunting  coats  and  equipment,  awn- 
ings and  tarpaulins  in  Statesville.  France  Neckwear 
Mfg.  Corp.,  Wilmington,  started  in  1945,  and  in  1948 
Brady  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  Ramseur,  started 
making  handkerchiefs. 

In  this  miscellaneous  group  in  North  Carolina 
some  2,000  workers  are  employed,  with  an  annual 
payroll  of  about  $3,500,000.  Something  like  35,000,- 
000  units  or  garments  in  this  division  were  produced 
in  1954  when  gross  sales  probablv  reached  $25,000,- 
000. 

Air  view  of  large  plant  of  Empire  Mfg.  Corp..  Statesville 
making  hunting  garments,  tents  and  tarpaulins 


EMPIRE  MANUFACTURING  CORP. 

Statesville,  N.  C. 

Empire  Manufacturing  Corp.,  Empire  area, 
Statesville,  is  a  wholly  owned  subsidiary  of  the  Het- 
trick  Manufacturing  Co.,  Toledo,  Ohio,  known  as 
"America's  largest  manufacturer  of  canvas  prod- 
ucts," also  manufacturing  furniture,  while  its 
Statesville  firm  is  engaged  in  the  manufacture  of 
hunting  garments  and  awnings. 

The  Statesville  unit 
has  been  in  operation 
for  about  12  years. 
About  four  years  ago 
the  company  pur- 
chased a  12-acre  site 
from  the  North  Caro- 
lina Experimental 
Farm,  and  the  G.  L. 
Wilson  Construction 
Co.  of  Statesville 
erected  an  entirely 
modern  brick,  steel 
and  concrete  building, 
containing  150,000  sq. 


Roy 


Rogers  and  'Trigger' 
made  by  Empire 


tent 


ft.  of  iioor  space.  The  pro- 
duction space  is  all  one  story,  while  the  finishing  di- 
vision is  two  stories  high. 

The  largest  percentage  of  the  production  of  Em- 
pire is  in  hunting  coats,  hunting  pants  and  accesso- 
ries, including  vests,  shell  belts,  gun  cases,  game 
bags  and  other  hunting  equipment  sold  primarily 
under  the  "American  Field"  trade  mark.  Awnings, 
tents,  and  tarpaulins  make  up  the  balance  of  the  pro- 
duction. The  firm's  fabric  finishing  division  does 
water  proofing,  fire  proofing,  plastic  coating  and 
striping. 

The  hunting  garments,  awnings,  tents  and  tarpau- 
lins produced  in  Statesville  are  distributed  through 
the  Hettrick  Manufacturing  Co. 
to  all  of  the  48  states,  with  a 
small  export  trade  to  foreign 
countries.  The  "American  Field" 
line  and  other  Empire  products 
are  distributed  through  sporting 
goods  stores,  department  stores, 
chain  stores,  and  mail  order 
houses. 

Empire  employs  an  average  of 
around  350  workers  with  an  an- 
nual  payroll   of   approximately 


SUMMER-FALL,    1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   109 


Huge  seicing  room  for  hunting  garments  at  Empire  Mfg. 
Corp.,  Statesville 

$500,000.  Employment  at  times  of  heavy  contracts 
has  reached  as  high  as  500.  The  firm  operates  a 
cafeteria  seating  200  people  at  a  time,  all  profits  go- 
ing to  a  special  fund  and  to  take  care  of  needy  cases, 
flowers  for  the  sick  and  Christmas  presents  for  all 
employees.  The  Blue  Cross  Plan  is  available  to  all 
employees,  who  receive  two  weeks  of  paid  vacation 
after  five  years  of  service  and  one  week  for  those  of 
shorter  service.  Employees  are  offered  group  life, 
health,  and  accident  insurance  of  which  part  of  the 
cost  is  borne  by  the  company. 

Officers  of  Empire  Manufacturing  Corp.  are  W.  I. 
Smith,  president ;  Glenn  Chandler,  vice-president  and 
general  manager;  Arthur  Rodriguez,  vice-president 
and  superintendent;  David  Quinn,  vice-president  in 
charge  of  finishing ;  James  W.  Smith,  son  of  the  pres- 
ident, sales  manager.  Judge  C.  B.  Winberry,  States- 
ville attorney,  is  a  member  of  the  board  of  directors 
with  President  Smith. 

The  Hettrick  Manufacturing  Co.  was  established 

in  1893  by  William  E.  Het- 
trick to  manufacture  can- 
vas products.  The  firm  was 
reorganized  in  1927  by  I.  P. 
Smith  and  Roland  Wilbur, 
Mr.  Smith  soon  afterwards 
becoming  president.  Later 
he  became  chairman  of  the 
board  and  in  1954  retired, 
although  he  continues  act- 
ive as  an  adviser.  While  I. 
P.  Smith  was  active  head  of 
the  firm  it  expanded  by  or- 
ganizing the  Huntington 
Manufacturing  Corp.,  of 
Huntington,  Ind.,  which 
makes  canvas  products  and 
furniture,  with  a  plant  at 
Andrews,  Ind.,  producing 
furniture  and  recently  ex- 
panding its  operations.  The 
Hettrick  firm  also  operates 
two  furniture  and  veloci- 
Hunting  coat  and  pants  Pede  plants  in  Goshen,  Ind. 
made  by  Empire  Later   the   firm   purchased 


the  Empire  Knitting  Mills,  an  old  firm  in  Philadel- 
phia which  had  moved  to  Statesville.  This  plant 
was  purchased  in  1943,  the  name  changed  to  Empire 
Manufacturing  Corp.,  and  during  the  past  12  years 
has  been  making  hunting  garments  and  awnings. 

During  World  War  II,  Empire  shifted  into  the 
manufacture  of  dungarees,  pants  and  tents  for  the 
U.  S.  Army  and  has  engaged  in  extensive  work  in 
treating  and  weather-proofing  Army  materials.  The 
Statesville  local  office  of  the  Employment  Security 
Commission  cooperated  in  testing  and  referring 
workers  during  the  periods  when  additional  workers 
were  employed  to  expedite  operations,  especially  in 
the  production  for  the  war  effort. 

The  Smith  family  operations  of  the  Hettrick  firm 
and  its  affiliated  and  subsidiary  firms,  including 
Empire  Manufacturing  Corp.,  is  now  in  its  third 
generation.  W.  I.  Smith,  son  of  I.  P.  Smith,  had 
been  associated  with  his  father  from  his  earlier 
years.  For  several  years  he  was  executive  vice-pres- 
ident and  in  1948  succeeded  his  father  as  president 
when  the  elder  Smith  became  chairman  of  the  board. 
James  W.  Smith,  grandson  of  the  elder  Smith,  joined 
the  firm  some  years  ago  and  is  now  sales  manager 
for  the  organization.    He  resides  in  Statesville. 

Glenn  Chandler,  vice-president  and  general  man- 
ager, a  native  of  Ohio,  is  a  graduate  of  the  Unversity 
of  Toledo  in  Business  Administration.  He  was  with 
the  firm  in  the  Accounting  Department  in  Toledo  for 
six  or  eight  years  and  has  been  manager  of  the 
Statesville  operation  for  12  years.  He  is  a  former 
president  of  the  United  Fund,  a  past  president  of  the 
Statesville  Kiwanis  Club  and  of  the  Iredell  County 
Fair  for  several  years.  He  also  was  a  member  of 
the  Statesville  Recreation  Commission  and  continues 
active  in  civic  affairs. 


GEM-DANDY,  INC. 
Madison,  N.  C. 

Gem-Dandy,  Inc.,  Madison,  is  an  outgrowth  of 
Penn  Brothers  Suspender  Co.  which  was  organized 
in  1914  by  Harry,  George  and  Howard  Penn,  natives 
of  Patrick  County,  Virginia.  The  original  products 
were  hook  and  eye  suspenders  and  garters. 

Caught  with  an  inflated  inventory  at  the  end  of 
World  War  I,  the  firm  was  in  financial  difficulties 
and  in  1920,  Harry  and  George  Penn  and  Harry's 
son,  Green  Penn,  bought  the  assets  at  a  receiver's 
sale. 

Green  Penn,  who  was  forced  to  withdraw  from 


Slip,  bra,  panties  and  girdle  made  by  Gem-Dandy,  Madison 


PAGE    1  1  0 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-Fall,  1954 


Davidson  College  because  of  his  health,  invented 
and  obtained  a  patent  on  a  ladies'  adjustable  garter. 
When  shown  the  advantages  of  the  new  garter, 
Green's  Uncle  George  proclaimed  it  a  "Gem-Dandy", 
and  thus  the  name  was  born. 

Incorporated  in  1921  as  Gem-Dandy  Garter  Co., 
with  Green  Penn  as  president,  the  firm  found  a  ready 
acceptance  for  its  improved  garter  in  the  top  flight 
department  stores  and  variety  chains  throughout 
the  country.  Shirred  ribbon  and  children's  socklet 
garters  were  added  to  the  line  and  about  1926,  the 
manufacture  of  men's  pad  garters  was  begun  in  a 
small  way.  Men's  elastic  suspenders  was  the  next 
product  included  in  the  Gem-Dandy  family. 

Engaged  in  the  tobacco  business,  neither  Harry 
nor  George  Penn  was  active  in  the  management  of 
Gem-Dandy.  As  the  business  grew  and  Green  Penn's 
heart  condition  became  a  matter  of  increasing  con- 
cern, the  directors  in  the  spring  of  1928  employed 
George  C.  Mason,  of  Memphis,  Tenn.,  as  his  assist- 
ant. In  the  fall  of  1928,  Vaughn  Penn,  younger 
brother  of  Green,  was  employed  and  sent  to  New 
York  to  open  a  sales  office  which  has  since  been 
maintained  in  that  city.  In  1930  Green  Penn  died 
and  George  Mason  was  elected  president  of  the  firm. 

In  1929  the  manufacture  of  men's  and  boys'  leath- 
er belts  was  begun  and  since  that  time  that  depart- 
ment has  consistently  grown  until  now  it  accounts 
for  approximately  30%  of  the  company's  total  busi- 
ness. In  1931  the  company  commenced  the  manufac- 
ture of  brassieres,  garter  belts  and  girdles  and  this 
department  now  accounts  for  about  17%  of  the  com- 
pany's total  business.  In  1939  the  addition  of  neck- 
ties completed  the  list  of  products  for  men. 

In  view  of  the  diversified  lines,  the  firm  name  was 
changed  in  1941  from  Gem-Dandy  Garter  Co.  to 
Gem-Dandy,  Inc. 

The  most  recent  expansion  was  in  the  ladies'  field 
when,  in  1952,  production  of  panties  and  slips  was 
started.  Sold  under  the  brand  name  "Merrymaid", 
the  demand  for  these  products  has  called  for  con- 
stantly increasing  production  and  resulted  in  the 
addition  of  a  line  for  children,  under  the  name 
"Merry-Tot". 


'Plenty  Mad'  but  both  are  wearing  Gem-Dandy  baby  pants 

Gem-Dandv  products  under  the  brand  names 
"Gem-Dandy",  "Gemco",  "New  York",  "Allura", 
"Merrymaid",  "Pin-up  Girl"  and  "Merry-Tot",  are 
distributed  nation-wide  by  the  firm's  own  sales  force 
of  18  salesmen,  probably  60r/f  going  to  chain  stores, 
the  remainder  handled  through  retail  and  depart- 
ment stores  and  specialty  shops.  Gross  annual  sales 
are  in  excess  of  $2,000,000.  The  New  York  sales 
office  is  located  at  432  Fourth  Ave. 

During  the  past  25  years  Gem-Dandy  has  contin- 
ued to  expand  its  facilities  to  meet  the  increasing 
demands  for  its  products.  Four  buildings,  contain- 
ing approximately  35,000  sq.  ft.  of  production  space 
are  now  occupied.  Work  on  the  conversion  of  a  brick 
warehouse  to  manufacturing  purposes  is  now  in 
progress  and  when  completed  in  the  early  spring 
will  add  an  additional  20,000  sq.  ft.  of  production 
space.  The  Brassiere  and  Underwear  Departments 
will  be  combined  in  this  space  as  soon  as  the  building 
is  completed. 

Gem-Dandy  employs  approximately  250  persons, 
all  of  whom  are  covered  by  a  group  life  insurance 
plan.  A  non-contributory  pension  plan  providing 
insurance  benefits  and  retirement  income  is  main- 
tained by  the  firm.  The  employees  have  their  own 
hospitalization  plans,  which  are  handled  for  them  by 
the  company.    Annual  paid  vacations  are  provided. 

Officers  of  the  company  are :  George  C.  Mason, 
president  and  treasurer ;  J.  Vaughn  Penn,  vice-pres- 
ident in  charge  of  sales  in  the  New  York  office ;  Ed- 
gar V.  Penn,  vice-president ;  A.  Earl  Weatherly,  vice- 
president  and  retail  sales  manager;  T.  R.  Rorrer, 
vice-president,  and  Green  Penn  II,  secretary.  Other 
key  staff  members  are  Paul  Rierson,  Garter  and 
Suspender  superintendent;  E.  V.  Swann,  Belt  De- 
partment superintendent;  Lloyd  Milks,  Brassiere 
and  Underwear  superintendent  and  Jim  Thomson, 
necktie  superintendent. 


Gem-Dandy  belts,   braces,  supporters,  and  neckties 
made  at  Madison 


BURLINGTON  MILLS  CORPORATION 
Ribbon  Division 
Reidsville,  N.  C. 

Burlington  Mills'  Reidsville  plant  is  one  of  many 
plants  of  Burlington  Mills  textile  organization  and 
one  of  four  plants  producing  ribbon.  Ribbon  pro- 
duced at  this  plant  is  used  primarily  for  holiday  and 
everyday  gift  tying.  These  products  are  distributed 
throughout  the  domestic  and  foreign  trade,  and  in 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   1  1  ] 


addition  to  the  gift  tying  line  include  manufacturers' 
items  such  as  blanket  binding  and  specialized  ribbon 
for  the  florist  trade. 

The  first  unit  of  the  Reidsvilie  plant  was  erected  in 
1923  and  operated  as  a  tobacco  warehouse  for  abou. 
three  years.  It  was  then  purchased  by  the  Klots 
Silk  Company  and  converted  into  a  silk  mill,  which 
was  closed  down  around  1929.  After  remaining  idle 
for  a  few  years,  Burlington  Mills  purchased  the 
property  in  1932,  built  a  two-story  addition  contain- 
ing 20,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  and  installed  modern 
equipment  and  machinery  and  started  weaving  ope- 
rations in  1933.  In  1938,  the  plant  was  converted 
into  a  throwing  plant  producing  thrown  yarns  for 
filament  weaving  plants.  In  1952  the  entire  plant 
was  remodeled  and  another  addition  containing  20,- 
000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space  was  erected  and  again  mod- 
ern machinery  installed. 

The  Reidsvilie  plant  produces  gift  tying  ribbon 
largely  of  two  types.  In  one,  narrow  ribbon  is  pro- 
duced, starting  with  broad  woven  fabrics  which  are 
cut  into  narrow  widths  and  edges  are  sealed.  The 
other  is  a  laminated  ribbon  in  which  colored  yarns 
to  produce  the  patterns  are  combined  with  a  cello- 
phane base.  The  Reidsvilie  plant  produces  enough 
ribbon  in  one  week  to  connect  Reidsvilie  with  the 
Pacific  Ocean. 

Gift  tying  ribbon  manufacture  is  highly  seasonal. 
Operations  begin  to  pick  up  in  early  spring  months, 
starting  around  February,  and  reach  a  mid-summer 
peak,  dwindling  again  to  low  production  around  No- 
vember ;  this  is  in  preparation  for  the  heavy  gift 
tying  of  Christmas,  Easter,  Mother's  Day,  and  like 
gift-giving  occasions.  For  this  reason,  employment 
in  the  Reidsvilie  plant  varies  from  around  150  work- 
ers in  the  winter  months  to  around  275  workers  in 
the  summer.  The  average  employment  is  around 
200,  and  the  annual  payroll  ranges  close  to  half  a 
million  dollars.  Numbers  of  high  school  students 
spend  their  vacation  periods  working  in  the  Reids- 
vilie Ribbon  plant. 

Reidsvilie  has  been  designated  as  Burlington's 
Ribbon  Division  Headquarters.  Additional  ribbon 
plants  are  located  at  South  Hill,  Va.,  White  Sulphur 
Springs,  W.  Va.,  and  in  Canada.  These  ribbon  plants 


„::;:..  ;iitiift»ii: 

ISP 


Large  Reidsrille  Rihhon  Plant  of  Burlington  Mills  Corp. 


;:^SJ!^5:if 


Embossing  narrow  ribbon  strips  cut  from  broad  woven  fabrics 
at  Burlington's  Reidsvilie  Ribbon  Plant 

produce  more  than  2,700  different  items  ranging 
from  tape  of  10,000  pounds  breaking  strength  to 
baby  blue  and  pink  ribbon.  These  plants  produce 
shoulder  straps,  seam  binding,  blanket  binding,  twili 
tape,  zipper  tape,  and  ribbon  of  all  uses.  These 
operations  make  Burlington  Mills  one  of  the  world's 
largest  producers  of  narrow  fabrics  with  Sales  Head- 
quarters located  at  26  West  40th  St.,  New  York  City. 

J.  A.  Boland,  Jr.,  division  manager  with  offices  at 
Reidsvilie,  is  assisted  by  Joseph  G.  Hamrick,  admin- 
istrative manager  for  the  division.  Mr.  Boland,  a 
N.  C.  State  College  graduate,  has  been  with  Burling- 
ton Mills  for  a  number  of  years  and  has  served  as 
division  manager  for  Ribbon  and  other  operating 
Divisions  as  well  as  held  other  important  executive 
positions.    He  is  a  native  of  Burlington. 

Hamrick,  a  native  of  Rutherforclton,  a  graduate 
of  Wake  Forest  College  and  a  post-graduate  from 
Duke  University,  has  been  with  Burlington  Mills 
about  eight  years  working  in  other  plants  before 
coming  to  Reidsvilie.  Branch  Whitehurst,  plant 
superintendent,  is  a  1943  textile  school  graduate  of 
N.  C.  State  College  and  has  been  with  Burlington 
Mills  about  10  years,  having  spent  several  of  those 
years  in  Canadian  operations  before  coming  to 
Reidsvilie. 

J.  Spencer  Love,  organizer  in  1923,  and  since  head 
of  Burlington  Mills,  has  expanded  operations  until 
the  firm  now  has  73  plants  in  44  communities  in 
seven  states  and  three  foreign  countries.  The  com- 
pany operates  30-odd  textile  mills,  about  10  hosiery 
mills,  and  other  auxiliary  firms  in  North  Carolina. 
Total  employment  in  all  Burlington  Mills  plants  is 
approximately  32,000  and  the  annual  payroll  is  in 
the  neighborhood  of  $100,000,000. 

Note  :  More  complete  details  of  the  operations  of 
Burlington  Mills  are  given  in  articles  which  appear- 
ed in  the  Textile  issue,  Summer-Fall,  1952,  and  the 
Hosiery  issue,  Winter-Spring,  1953,  of  The  E.  S.  C. 
Quarterly. 


PAGE  1  1  2 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  954  i 


FRANCE  NECKWEAR  MFG.  CORP. 

Wilmington,  N.  C. 

France  Neckwear  Mfg.  Corp.,  1217  South  13th  St., 
Wilmington,  was  organized  and  incorporated  in 
1945.  The  firm  has  developed  into  one  of  the 
important  industrial  organizations  in  Wilmington. 

Operations  started  in  a  small  rented  space  and 
limited  equipment  with  25  to  50  employees.  Workers 
were  being  trained  and  equipment  accumulated  while 
the  present  entirely  modern  building  was  being 
erected.  This  building,  completed  in  August,  1946, 
is  one-story  high,  air-conditioned,  built  of  brick, 
steel  and  concrete  with  no  center  posts,  and  contain- 
ing 22,000  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  In  1953  an  addition 
wah  built  containing  6,000  sq.  ft.,  giving  the  present 
plant  28,000  sq.  ft.  Approximately  100  of  the  most 
modern  machines  available  are  in  operation  and  the 
potential  production  of  the  plant  is  virtually  un- 
limited. 

Industrial  Properties,  Inc.,  an  organization  of  Wil- 
mington citizens,  designed  to  promote  the  location 
of  industries  in  that  city,  assisted  the  company  in 
financing  the  plant. 

France  Neckwear  Mfg.  Corp.  produces  four-in- 
hand  and  bow  neckties  for  all  occasions.  Most  of 
them  are  distributed  through  chain  stores  on  a  na- 
tion-wide basis,  usually  under  the  trade-name  of  the 
distributing  store.  Materials  used  are  silks  and  syn- 
thetic fibers  and  the  ties  are  popular  priced,  ranging 
at  retail  from  $1.00  to  $2.50.  The  plant  recently 
started  a  Tie  Hand  Painting  Department  which  is 
expected  to  develop  into  a  large  operation. 

The  firm  operates  a  cafeteria  for  the  benefit  of  its 
employees.  Organized  athletics  include  basket- 
ball and  bowling  teams,  and  the  employees  look  for- 
ward to  the  annual  summer  picnic. 

Officers  of  the  company  are  Robert  Kallam,  presi- 
dent; Harry  Kantor,  vice-president,  and  S.  Kallman, 
secretary  and  treasurer.  F.  W.  Oppenheimer  has 
been  plant  manager  since  the  plant  started. 


PANDA  CURTAIN  CO. 

Charlotte,  N.  C. 

Panda  Curtain  Co.,  314  E.  6th  St.,  Charlotte,  a 
new  firm,  was  organized  and  incorporated  July  1, 
1954,  and  purchased  the  entire  equipment  of  the  old 
and  well  established  firm  of  Powdrell  and  Alexander, 
which  started  in  1918  and  developed  into  the  largest 
curtain  manufacturing  firm  in  the  nation,  operating 
as  many  as  14  different  plants.  The  new  firm  is  a 
subsidiary  of  Bartman  and  Bixer,  Inc.,  of  New  York 


Production  line  ivhere  thousands  of  elegant  Panda 
curtains  are  made 


Home  of  large  Panda  Curtain  Co.  in  Charlotte 

City,  manufacturers  of  the  finest  curtains  produced 
in  the  United  States. 

The  Panda  Curtain  Co.  derived  its  name  from  the 
first  initials,  "P"  and  "A"  of  the  Powdrell  and  Alex- 
ander firm,  with  the  connecting  "and,"  principally 
because  the  older  firm  had  used  the  trade  name 
"PandA,"  which  had  become  well  established.  Dur- 
ing the  older  firm's  operations,  employment  had 
ranged  from  30  to  125.  First  operations  were  on 
S.  Church  St.,  and  the  firm  had  moved  into  its  pres- 
ent space  in  the  Wade  Loft  Building,  314  East  6th 
St.,  in  1938. 

Panda  Curtain  Co.,  making  popular  priced  cur- 
tains, uses  more  organdy  than  any  other  fabric,  but 
also  uses  large  quantities  of  the  modern  synthetic 
fabrics,  including  nylon,  orlon,  dacron  and  rayon, 
most  of  the  piece  goods  coming  from  North  Carolina 
firms.    Unit  retail  prices  range  from  $1.98  to  $19.98. 

Taking  over  the  Powdrell  and  Alexander  equip- 
ment, Panda  Curtain  Co.  had  built  up  the  force  to 
about  70  workers  in  September  and  by  the  end  of  the 
year  expected  to  have  about  130  employees.  When 
the  plant  is  in  full  operation,  the  annual  payroll  is 
expected  to  reach  about  $250,000.  When  running  at 
capacity,  this  plant  will  produce  approximately 
2,000,000  units  annually.  About  32,000  sq.  ft.  in  the 
Wade  Loft  Building  will  be  utilized  when  the  plant 
is  completely  staffed.  The  Charlotte  office  of  the 
Employment  Security  Commission  is  cooperating 
with  the  firm  by  testing  and  referring  workers  to 
build  a  full  force. 

Panda  curtains  are  distributed  nation-wide,  six 
salesmen  covering  the  area.  Sales  are  made  through 
the  Charlotte  sales  office,  also  by  the  parent  organ- 
ization, Bartman  and  Bixer,  Inc.,  located  at  339 
Fifth  Ave.,  New  York  City. 

Bartman  and  Bixer  is  an  old  and  well  established 
firm  and  from  its  headquarters  in  New  York  City 
operates  other  plants  at  Clifton,  N.  J.,  Springfield 
and  Fall  River,  Mass.,  Seattle,  Wash.,  and  Los  An- 
geles, Calif. 

The  Panda  Curtain  Co.  is  a  North  Carolina  cor- 


Summer-fall,  1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  1  1  3 


poration,  with  an 
authorized  capital 
stock  of  $100,000. 
Principal  officers 
are  Walter  A.  Friese, 
president  and  gen- 
eral manager,  and 
Irving  White,  treas- 
urer. Key  members 
of  the  staff  include 
Carl  Martin,  sales 
manager,  Robert 
Talbert,  plant  super- 
intendent, and  Mrs. 
Juanita  Kirby,  of- 
fice manager. 

Mr.  Friese,  head 
of  the  firm,  is  a  na- 
tive of  Connecticut 
and  has  been  engag- 
ed in  curtain  manu- 
facturing for  about 
25  years.  He  joined  the  earlier  Powdrell  and  Alex- 
ander firm  in  1929  and  has  been  manager  of  the 
plant  since  1945.  He  was  one  of  the  organizers  of 
the  new  Panda  Curtain  Co.  and  was  elected  presi- 
dent, continuing  as  general  manager. 


Lavishly  ruffled  curtains   made   by 
Panda  in  Charlotte 


CHASE  BAG  COMPANY 
Reidsville,  N.  C. 

Chase  Bag  Company,  Harris  and  Morehead 
Streets,  Reidsville,  is  one  of  15  manufacturing 
branches  of  the  century  old  and  well-known  Chase 
Bag  Company,  with  headquarters  in  New  York  City. 
The  Reidsville  plant  became  a  unit  of  the  Chase  or- 
ganization in  1931,  when  the  Reidsville  Bag  Com- 
pany, formerly  engaged  in  making  tobacco  bags, 
was  purchased,  and  has  now  developed  into  one  of 
the  important  units  of  the  Chase  organization. 

The  original  company  was  operated  for  many 
years  by  W.  B.  Richardson,  Jr.  and  associates.  When 
the  business  was  sold  to  Chase  Bag  Company  in  1931, 
Mr.  Richardson  continued  as  manager  of  the  plant 
until  he  retired  December  31,  1953.  Originally,  only 
a  very  few  workers  were  employed.  Employment 
now  ranges  between  150  and  200,  with  an  annual 
payroll  of  approximately  $400,000.  The  plant  covers 
an  entire  block  and  contains  some  60,000  sq.  ft.  of 
floor  space.  The  buildings  are  locally  owned  and 
leased  for  a  long  term  of  years. 

The  Reidsville  plant  manufactures  flour  and  feed 
bags  of  cotton  and  paper  for  the  milling  industry, 
and  specialty  packaging  items  for  industry  in  gen- 
eral. Annual  production  runs  into  millions  of  bags. 
During  World  War  II,  this  firm  produced  many 
thousands  of  war  items  for  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment and  her  Allies. 

The  Reidsville  plant  has  one  of  the  best  safety 
records  in  this  section,  having  had  only  one  minor 
accident  in  the  past  eight  years  of  operation.  This 
branch  tops  all  other  Chase  plants  in  its  achievement 
of  this  outstanding  safety  record,  and  has  been  pre- 
sented many  special  awards. 

J.  A.  White,  Jr.,  Manager  of  the  Reidsville  plant, 
is  also  sales  manager  of  the  Richmond,  Virginia  Sales 
Office  which  covers  the  territory  of  Virginia  and  the 
Carolinas.     R.  F.  Marcus,  Jr.  is  the  resident  office 


manager,  and  I.  W.  Hall  is  superintendent. 

Chase  Bag  Company  was  organized  in  1847  in 
Boston  by  Harry  and  Lewis  Chase,  and  is  now  the 
oldest  and  one  of  the  largest  bag  manuafcturing 
firms  in  the  United  States.  In  addition  to  the  Reids- 
ville branch,  plants  are  located  in  Buffalo,  New  York ; 
Chagrin  Falls,  Ohio;  Crossett,  Ark.:  Dallas,  Tex.; 
Goshen,  Ind. ;  Kansas  City,  Mo. ;  Los  Angeles,  Calif. ; 
Milwaukee,  Wise. ;  Minneapolis,  Minn. ;  New  Or- 
leans, La. ;  Philadelphia,  Penna. ;  St.  Louis,  Mo. ; 
Toledo,  Ohio  and  Portland,  Oregon. 

The  executive  offices  of  Chase  Bag  Company  are 
located  in  New  York  City,  and  the  General  Sales  De- 
partment in  Chicago.  Principal  officers  of  the  par- 
ent organization  are  E.  K.  Ludington,  chairman  of 
the  board;  F.  H.  Ludington,  Sr.,  president;  R.  N. 
Conners,  executive  vice-president,  and  C.  S.  Sheldon, 
vice-president  and  treasurer. 


GOLDEN  BELT  MFG.  CO. 
Durham,  N.  C. 

Golden  Belt  Mfg.  Co.,  Durham,  incorporated  in 
1899  after  operating  as  an  adjunct  to  the  smoking 
tobacco  manufacturing  industry  in  Durham  for  a 
number  of  years,  has  been  engaged  throughout  its 
existence  in  the  manufacture  of  small  bags  in  which 
smoking  tobacco  is  packed  and  distributed.  It  also 
produces  the  print  cloth  from  which  these  bags  are 
made.  Bags  for  shipping  nuts,  bolts  and  other  small 
metal  parts  are  also  produced.  This  company  also 
prints  many  of  the  paper  wrappers  used  in  packag- 
ing cigarettes  for  some  of  the  larger  cigarette  manu- 
facturing firms  in  the  nation. 

A  more  complete  article  on  this  firm  was  published 
in  the  Tobacco  issue  of  The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly,  Vol.  9, 
No.  3-4,  the  Summer-Fall,  1951  issue  (now  exhaust- 
ed). 


R.  W.  ELDRIDGE  CO. 

Charlotte,  N.  C. 

R.  W.  Eldridge  Co.,  #314  East  Sixth  St.,  Charlotte, 
was  organized  in  Orleans,  Vermont,  by  R.  W.  El- 
dridge, moved  to  Charlotte  in  1925,  and  in  the  past 
29  years,  has  expanded  operations  until  its  hand- 
kerchief sales  now  range  between  half  a  million  and 
a  million  dollars. 

When  Mr.  Eldridge  started  the  firm  in  1912,  he 
used  handkerchiefs  as  premiums  for  the  sale  of  jew- 


Millions  of  handkerchiefs  are  made  in  this  sewing  room  of 
R.  W.  Eldridge  Co.,  Charlotte 


PAGE    1  1  4 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


Wmm 


Display  of  Four  Leaf  Clover  hand- 
kerchiefs made  by  Eldridge 


elry,  and  advertised 
in  country  weeklies 
throughout  the  Unit- 
ed States. 

The  handkerchief 
end  of  it  soon  be- 
came the  main  vol- 
ume of  business  and 
a  company  was  in- 
corporated in  1915 
for  the  manufac- 
ture of  handker- 
chiefs. The  business 
continued  to  expand, 
but  Mr.  Eldridge's 
health,  due  to  rheu- 
matic fever  when  12 
years  of  age,  handicapped  him  to  such  an  extent  that 
doctors  advised  him  to  move  South. 

He  and  his  brother,  Lynn  Eldridge,  made  a  tour 
of  several  southern  states,  and  finally  selected  Char- 
lotte as  being  most  ideally  located.  It  was  the  first 
handkerchief  industry  to  be  established  in  the  South, 
and  several  Charlotte  business  men  readily  subscrib- 
ed for  preferred  stock  so  that  the  firm  could  expand 
operations,  as  the  product  manufactured  was  in  good 
demand. 

The  expansion  continued  through  1930  and  held 
up  fairly  well  through  the  first  years  of  the  1929 
depression.  However  in  1933,  business  dropped  off, 
prices  went  down,  and  Mr.  Eldridge's  health  began 
to  fail.  In  May,  1934,  he  passed  on  leaving  the  firm 
with  a  heavy  stock  of  merchandise,  heavy  financial 
obligations,  and  cloth  commitment  way  beyond  the 
possibility  of  consuming  within  a  reasonable  period. 

The  result  of  this  situation  was  the  debtors  asked 
for  a  creditors  committee  to  supervise  the  business 
until  they  were  paid  off.  With  considerable  sacrifice 
in  working  capital,  this  was  accomplished  in  about 
eight  months,  and  all  creditors  were  paid  in  full  after 
L.  E.  Elliott  was  called  in  on  December  1,  1934. 

On  January  1,  1935,  L.  E.  Elliott  was  elected  vice- 
president  and  general  manager,  and  although  condi- 
tions were  below  normal  and  competition  had  in- 
creased, he  was  able  to  carry  on  with  depleted  work- 
ing capital  and  has  succeeded  in  paying  off  all  of  the 
original  preferred  and  common  stock  holders,  and 
today  Eldridge  Company  is  doing  an  annual  volume 
of  business  between  $500,000  and  $1,000,000  a  vear, 
with  a  local  payroll  ranging  from  $125,000  to  $200,- 
000  a  year. 

At  the  present  time  the  firm  manufactures  white 
staple  handkerchiefs  only,  made  from  print  cloths, 
carded  cotton  satin  border,  and  combed  lawn  which 
is  all  woven  in  North  Carolina  and  South  Carolina 
mills — bleached  and  finished  to  specifications,  and 
then  converted  into  the  finished  handkerchief.  The 
product  is  sold  through  the  jobbers  and  national- 
chain  organizations,  both  in  bulk  and  individual 
packages.  Some  of  the  brands  that  Eldridge  special- 
izes on  are  "Four  Leaf  Clover",  "Dandv",  "Blue 
Bird",  and  "Tak-A-Hanky",  most  of  which  are  dis- 
tributed through  the  wholesale  grocers,  candy,  and 
tobacco  jobbers. 

All  employees  of  the  Eldridge  firm  are  covered 
under  the  Blue  Cross  Hospitalization  Plan,  the  firm 
paying  the  premium  and  with  provisions  that  em- 


ployees may  include  members  of  their  families  by 
paying  the  additional  premiums.  For  the  employees, 
the  company  pays  an  average  of  70^  of  the  cost  of 
$1,000  life  insurance  policies.  Employees  with  five 
years  of  service  receive  two  weeks  of  paid  vacation, 
and  those  with  service  up  to  two  years  receive  one 
week,  in  addition  to  five  paid  holidays  each  year. 
Employees  also  have  a  daily  coffee  break. 

The  present  officers  of  the  company  are  L.  E.  El- 
liott, president  and  treasurer ;  Elizabeth  Elliott,  vice- 
president,  and  J.  V,  Rumfelt,  secretary.  Two  key 
members  of  the  firm  are  G.  F.  Shrum,  director,  and 
Mary  E.  Heller,  private  secretary,  both  having  been 
with  the  company  for  more  than  25  years. 


BRADY  MANUFACTURING  CO.,  INC. 
Ramseur,  N.  C. 

Brady  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.,  Ramseur,  was  or- 
ganized in  1948  by  H.  F.  Brady  and  his  son,  C.  Julian 
Brady,  and  began  in  a  very  modest  way  to  manufac- 
ture men's  handkerchiefs.  In  the  six  years  of  opera- 
tion this  plant  has  expanded  until  its  gross  annual 
sales  now  reach  approximately  half  a  million  dollars. 

This  firm  started  operation  with  five  employees 
and  10  machines,  operated  in  about  2,000  sq.  ft  of 
space  in  a  building  owned  by  the  firm.  In  1950,  as 
the  result  of  increased  sales,  an  addition  was  built, 
giving  the  firm  5,500  sq.  ft.  of  floor  space.  Recently 
the  firm  has  bought  additional  area,  giving  it  about 
an  acre  of  space  on  which  it  plans  to  erect  another 
building  and  add  4,000  sq.  ft.  of  space.  The  present 
building  of  brick,  steel  and  concrete  is  entirely  mod- 
ern, as  will  be  the  addition  to  be  erected.  The  firm 
now  employs  about  80  workers,  with  an  annual  pay- 
roll of  around  $125,000,  but  when  the  planned  build- 
ing is  completed  about  125  workers  will  be  em- 
ployed. 

The  Brady  firm  manufactures  men's  handkerchiefs 
exclusively,  in  plain  white,  satin-stripe  and  colored 
borders.  The  retail  prices  range  from  10c  to  50o, 
and  products  are  sold  through  wholesale  drygoods 
firms,  chain  stores,  wholesale  grocery  stores  and 
specialty  shops.  The  company's  principal  brands  are 
"Brady",  "Neet-Hank",  and  "Red  Bird",  and  hand- 
kerchiefs are  also  made  under  customer  brands. 
Cotton  print  cloth,  in  varying  qualities,  is  purchased 
from  North  Carolina  manufacturers.  Packing  boxes 
and  containers  are  purchased  from  Carolina  Con- 
tainer Corp.,  High  Point;  cellophane  from  Lassiter 
Corporation,  Greensboro,  and  paper  from  Dillard 
Paper  Co. 

Original  authorized  capital  of  the  firm  was  $40,- 
000,  which  was  increased  in  1952  to  $75,000.  Mrs. 
H.  F.  Brady  was  elected  president  of  the  new  firm ; 
C.  Julian  Brady,  vice-president  and  secretary,  as  well 
as  general  manager,  and  H.  F.  Brad}r,  treasurer.  In 
January,  1953,  C.  Julian  Brady  bought  the  entire 
stock  of  the  company,  and  Mrs.  C.  Julian  Brady  be- 
came president ;  C.  Julian  Brady,  secretary-treas- 
urer, and  continues  as  general  manager,  and  Mary 
J.  Brady,  their  daughter,  vice-president. 

C.  Julian  Brady,  head  of  the  firm,  is  a  native  of 
Ramseur.  For  25  years  he  was  with  the  Brady  Fu- 
neral Home  with  his  father,  and  for  12  years  was 
manager.  In  January,  1954  he  sold  his  Funeral  Home 
interests  to  devote  full-time  to  his  other  activities. 
In  addition  to  operating  the  Brady  Manufacturing 


5UMMER-FALL,    1954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE    1  1  5 


Four-in-Jiands.   bows  and 

ready-tied   ties   made    by 

Tiedright,  Asheboro 


Co.,  he  is  also  general  manager  of  the  Ramseur 
Furniture  Co.  Mr.  Brady  served  on  the  Ramseur 
Board  of  Town  Commissioners  for  three  years,  re- 
signing recently. 

TIEDRIGHT  TIE  COMPANY 

Asheboro,  N.  C. 

Tiedright  Tie  Company,  413  E.  Wainman  Ave., 
Asheboro,  was  organized  in  1934  by  Earl  R.  Shaw, 
as  individual  owner,  and  began  the  production  of 
men's  ready-tied  ties.  The  plant  has  expanded,  pro- 
duction now  exceeding  300  dozen  neckties  daily. 

When  Mr.  Shaw  started 
operations  he  had  six  em- 
ployees operating  in  a  build- 
ing 20  x  48  feet  in  size. 
Three  additions  have  been 
made  to  the  plant,  giving 
5,500  square  feet  of  floor 
space.  The  present  modern 
brick  and  steel  building  is 
now  inadequate  to  handle 
the  production,  and  Mr, 
3haw  has  indefinite  plans  for  expansion  in  the  near 
future.  His  present  plant  and  equipment  are  valued 
at  around  $25,000.  Present  employment  ranges  from 
50  to  75  workers,  with  an  annual  payroll  ranging 
between  $90,000  and  $100,000. 

Tiedright  produces  men's  and  boys'  four-in-hand 
and  ready-tied  ties  and  men's  and  boys'  clip-on  bows. 
These  bows  and  the  ready-tied  ties  retail  at  506  and 
51.00,  while  the  four-in-hands  range  from  $1.00  to 
jl. 50.  Rayon,  both  the  regular  woven  and  tricot 
knit,  is  the  principal  material  used,  although  some 
ay  Ion  and  wool  mixtures  are  utilized,  and  rayon  is 
the  basic  material  for  most  of  the  bow  ties. 

Probably  75%  of  the  production  is  in  the  com- 
pany's own  brands,  "Tiedright",  "Earle"  and  "Cita- 
tion", the  remainder  being  produced  under  custom- 
er brands.  Distribution  is  throughout  the  eastern 
and  central  sections  of  the  United  States.  A  group 
t>f  salesmen  cover  several  states,  and  sales  are  made 
through  New  York  buying  offices.  During  the  war 
period,  Tiedright  had  two  important  Army  contracts 
;o  produce  and  deliver  200,000  ties  in  each  of  two 
vears,  1944  and  1945. 

Mr.  Shaw,  owner  of  the  industry,  is  a  native  of 
Randolph  County  and  was  a  shoe  salesman,  and  later 
was  a  wholesale  dealer  in  hosiery  and  notions.  In 
1931  he  started  making  suspenders  and  garters,  con- 
tinuing this  type  of  production  for  three  years,  then 
shifted  into  tie  manufacturing.  Mr.  Shaw  is  a  Ki- 
vanian  and  is  active  in  civic  affairs. 


CHARLOTTE  WORKSHOP  FOR  BLIND 
TRAINS  MANY  FOR  NORMAL  LIVES 

Charlotte  Workshop  for  the  Blind,  1702  N.  Bre- 
/ard  St.,  Charlotte,  was  started  around  1936  as  a 
Droject  promoted  by  the  Charlotte  Dions  Club,  has 
Deen  training  blind  persons  in  the  making  of  various 
types  of  garments,  and  has  thus  prepared  numbers 
:>f  otherwise  dependent  persons  to  make  their  own 
ivings  in  several  occupations. 

This  project  was  started  in  one  room  on  Elizabeth 
Ave.,  with  J.  L.  Parker  as  superintendent.  The  Char- 
otte  Lions  Club  purchased  a  lot  at  the  present  site, 
the  State,  through  the  State  Commission  for  the 


Blind,  furnished  the  materials,  and  the  WPA  put 
up  the  building  in  1937.  The  original  building  con- 
tained 7,600  sq.  ft.,  and  in  1951  an  addition  was 
built  containing  3,500  sq.  ft.,  thus  giving  the  present 
plant  a  total  of  11,100  sq.  ft.  The  plant  is  equipped 
with  30  sewing  machines  and  one  cutting  machine. 

This  Workshop  gives  from  six  to  10  weeks  of 
training  for  about  30  trainees  and  employed  workers 
at  one  time.  The  trainees  are  paid  by  the  State  and 
at  the  end  of  the  training  period  go  on  the  payroll  as 
wage  earners  at  wages  set  by  the  Federal  Govern- 
ment. Superintendent  Parker  assists  the  trainees 
in  getting  better  jobs  outside  as  they  become  avail- 
able. Occasionally  a  blind  person  will  begin  training 
and  it  is  found  that  he  or  she  is  not  trainable.  These 
are  turned  back  to  the  State  Commission  for  the 
Blind.  The  Workshop  is  financed  primarily  through 
sales,  many  of  them  under  contract  with  the  Federal 
Government.  One  seeing  person  is  provided  for  each 
three  blind  persons,  and  sighted  workers  are  em- 
ployed as  inspectors  of  all  work,  supervisors,  cutters 
and  truck  drivers. 

The  Charlotte  Workshop  for  the  Blind  has  pro- 
duced many  types  of  products,  usually  those  requir- 
ing simple  operations.  These  include  pillow  cases, 
sheets,  surgical  masks,  operation  sheets,  drapes, 
mailing  bags,  shoe  bags,  clothespin  bags,  handker- 
chiefs, while  reseating  chairs  with  cane  and  split 
bottoms  has  been  carried  on  through  the  years,  pro- 
viding probably  five  percent  of  the  work  done. 

Probably  95%  of  the  Workshop  production  in  the 
past  12  years  has  been  for  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment. At  present  the  Workshop  is  about  to  complete 
a  government  contract  in  which  more  than  100,000 
aprons  are  to  be  produced.  These  aprons  are  used 
primarily  for  cooks  and  foodhandlers  for  the  Air 
Force.  During  World  War  I,  the  Workshop  pro- 
duced around  8,500,000  pillow  cases  for  the  Gov- 
ernment, producing  as  many  as  4,000  a  dav  when 
the  work  got  underway.  During  that  period  five 
carloads  of  mopheads  used  in  mopping  floors,  were 
produced  under  a  Government  contract. 

The  Charlotte  Workshop  is  justly  proud  of  the  out- 
standing safety  record  it  has  achieved.  During  the 
past  15  years  not  one  hour  of  work  has  been  lost  as 
the  result  of  an  accident.  The  N.  C.  Department  of 
Labor  has  frequentlv  used  this  record  made  by  blind 
workers  as  an  object  lesson  to  industry  in  the  State. 

In  addition  to  being  emploved  as  regular  workers 
in  the  Workshop  or  in  other  plants,  some  of  the  work- 
ers have  gone  out  from  the  shop  and  established  their 
own  small  industries.  Needless  to  say,  many  of  those 
who  entered  the  shop  for  training  were  down  and  out 
and  in  urgent  need  of  assistance  in  making  their  own 
way.  Men  are  used  for  packing,  carrying  and  other 
heavy  work,  but  most  of  the  trainees  are  women, 
some  of  them  Negro  women. 

While  the  Charlotte  Lions  Club  elects  officers  to 
take  the  responsibility  of  this  operation  and  is  join- 
ed by  the  State  Commission  for  the  Blind  in  sponsor- 
ing the  project,  the  work  of  handling  the  plant  is 
left  almost  entirely  to  Mr.  Parker.  Superintendent 
Parker  had  no  experience  in  this  type  of  operation 
before  he  started  in  1936.  A  native  of  Lexington 
and  a  N.  C.  State  College  graduate,  he  was  manager 
of  the  March  Hotel  in  Lexington  when  he  took  over 
operation  of  the  Charlotte  Workshop  for  the  Blind, 
handling  it  efficiently  and  satisfactorily. 


PAGE   1  1  6 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  1954 


Eligible  Unemployed  Federal  Workers  May  Draw  Benefits 


Federal  civilian  employees  who  are  unemployed 
are  entitled  to  file  claims  for  unemployment  com- 
pensation as  the  result  of  an  amendment  to  the  So- 
cial Security  Act  by  the  83rd  Congress,  effective 
Jan.  1,  1955.  Chairman  Henry  E.  Kendall  of  the 
Employment  Security  Commission  advises  that  ad- 
ministration of  this  program  has  been  delegated  to 
this  and  similar  agencies  in  the  48  states,  District  of 
Columbia,  Alaska  and  Hawaii  by  agreement  between 
these  units  and  the  Secretary  of  the  U.  S.  Depart- 
ment of  Labor. 

Payments  of  unemployment  benefits  are  being 
made  from  funds  appropriated  by  the  Congress.  The 
Federal  employees  filing  claims  under  this  program 
are  subject  to  the  requirements  of  the  laws  of  the 
various  states  and  units  paying  the  benefits. 

Chairman  Kendall  states  that  the  necessary  organ- 
ization and  methods  for  processing  and  payment  of 
these  claims  were  formulated  late  in  1954  and  his 
agency  started  taking  applications  or  initial  claims 
for  unemployment  compensation  for  Federal  em- 
ployees on  Monday,  Januarv  3,  the  first  work  day  in 
1955. 

Before  the  claim  of  an  unemployed  Federal  em- 
ployee can  be  processed,  Kendall  points  out,  the 
claimant  must  have  or  obtain  a  Social  Security  ac- 
count number  issued  by  the  Social  Security  Admin- 
istration through  one  of  its  13  district  offices  located 
in  the  larger  cities  in  North  Carolina.  The  employee 
files  his  claim  in  the  state  in  which  he  is  living,  re- 
gardless of  whether  he  was  employed  in  that  state, 
another  state  or  abroad,  and  is  not  eligible  to  receive 
benefits  for  any  period  covered  by  terminal  leave 
pay  from  the  Federal  agency. 

If  the  unemployed  Federal  employee  lives  in  North 
Carolina  the  claim  may  be  filed  in  the  nearest  local 
Employment  Security  office,  of  which  66  are  located 
in  larger  towns  and  cities.  When  reporting  to  file  a 
claim  the  Federal  employee  should  have  his  Social 
Security  card,  Form  No.  8,  Notice  of  Separated  Fed- 
eral Employee  (Unemployment  Compensation  Pro- 
gram), and  Form  50,  Notification  of  Personnel  Ac- 
tion, which  is  given  to  the  employee  by  the  Federal 
agency  by  which  he  was  employed.  These  documents 
are  presented  to  the  interviewer  in  the  local  office 
taking  the  claim. 

After  the  claim  has  been  taken  and  the  necessary 
wage  information  obtained  from  the  Federal  agency, 
the  amount  of  the  weekly  payment  is  determined. 
This  amount  ranges  from  $7  to  $30  a  week,  depend- 
ing on  the  total  amount  of  wages  earned  in  the  base 
period,  which,  for  claims  filed  from  January  1,  1955 
to  March  31,  1955,  inclusive,  will  be  the  last  six 
months  of  1953  and  the  first  six  months  of  1954. 
The  Federal  employee  may  be  paid  as  manv  as  26 
weeks  in  the  12-month  period  following  the  filing  of 
the  initial  claim. 

To  be  eligible  to  receive  these  payments  the  Fed- 
eral employee  is  subject  to  the  eligibility  require- 
ments and  penalties  set  forth  in  the  State  law  for 
other  unemployed  workers,  which  are : 

1.  Be  unemployed. 

2.  Register  for  work  at  the  local  Employment  Se- 
curity office. 


3.  Be  physically  able  to  work. 

4.  Be  available  for  work,  which  means  that  the 
individual  must  be  willing  to  take  a  suitable  job, 
have  no  home  restrictions  or  lack  of  transportation 
that  would  prevent  acceptance  of  the  job,  be  inter- 
ested in  obtaining  work  by  making  an  earnest  effort 
to  find  work  on  his  own  initiative  each  week;  and 
female  claimants  are  not  considered  available  for 
the  3-months  periods  prior  to  and  after  the  birth  of 
a  child. 

5.  Be  subject  to  a  disqualification  of  from  4  to  12 
weeks  with  the  maximum  benefit  amount  reduced 
by  the  number  of  penalty  weeks  multiplied  by  the 
weekly  benefit  amount,  if  it  is  found  that  the  em- 
ployee voluntarily  quit  his  last  employe]"  without 
good  cause  attributable  to  that  employer,  was  dis 
charged  by  his  last  employer  because  of  misconduct 
in  connection  with  his  work,  or  refused  to  apply  for 
or  accept  suitable  work  when  offered,  either  through 
the  local  Employment  Security  office  or  by  an  em- 
ployer. 

6.  Be  subject  to  prosecution  for  any  false  state- 
ment, misrepresentation  or  withholding  facts  in  or- 
der to  obtain  benefits,  and,  if  convicted,  be  imprison- 
ed or  fined. 

Federal  employees  desiring  any  additional  in- 
formation concerning  this  program  may  obtain  it 
from  any  of  the  local  Employment  Security  offices, 
Chairman  Kendall  advises. 


GLENDALE  MFG.  CORP. 

(Continued  from  page  99) 

the  end  of  the  year  to  probably  125  machines.  With- 
in the  next  few  years  the  firm  has  plans  for  increas- 
ing its  equipment  to  300  machines.  Use  is  now  be- 
ing made  of  24,000  sq.  ft.  out  of  the  33,000  sq.  ft.  of 
space  available. 

Glendale  now  employs  close  to  100  workers  which 
will  probably  be  increased  to  about  125  by  the  end 
of  the  year.  Its  plans  for  the  next  few  years  include 
expansion  to  the  extent  that  it  will  employ  400  to 
500  workers.  The  firm  employs  all  of  its  workers 
after  they  have  been  tested  and  referred  by  the  Ashe- 
ville  office  of  the  Employment  Security  Commission. 

Ira  Rosenstock  is  president  and  general  manager 
of  the  firm.  He  is  a  native  of  New  York  City  and 
worked  in  a  garment  plant  in  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y., 
for  several  years,  having  started  in  the  garment  in- 
dustry in  1931.  In  fact,  he  is  a  third  generation 
garment  producer,  his  grandfather  having  started 
in  the  apparel  business  many  years  ago.  He  moved 
to  Asheville  to  handle  operations  of  Glendale  Mfg. 
Corp.  in  January  of  this  year. 


At  the  end  of  1954,  the  Employment  Service  offices 
reported  more  than  57,000  job  applicants  seeking 
employment  in  the  65  offices  serving  workers  and 
employers.  At  the  year  end,  these  offices  had  only 
2,350  job  openings  from  employers  to  offer  this  un- 
employed group. 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE   1  1  7 


Benefit  Charges  to  Iudustry  Groups  in  Fiscal  Year  1954 

By  HUGH  M.  Raper,  Director,  Bureau  of  Research  a?id  Statistics,  ESC 

In  any  discussion  of  experience  rates  a  number  of  fiscal   1953-1954,   the   600   Finance,    Insurance   and 

questions  are  asked.     Among  these  questions  inevit-  Real  Estate  accounts  had  3.2  percent  of  the  taxable 

ably  is  this  one :     "Did  the  industry  in  which  I  am  payrolls  but  unemployment  insurance  payments  to 

engaged  pay  its  way  toward  financing  the  unem-  unemployed  workers  from  this  group  accounted  for 

ployment  insurance  program?"  only  .4  of  one  percent  of  the  payments.    Data  taken 

This  question  arises  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  from  the  past  two  experience  rate  computations  is 

with  only  a  few  exceptions,  benefit  payments  to  the  S'lven  in  the  accompanying  table.     This  is  done  not 

unemployed  from  an  industry  are  charged  to  some  s<>  much  to  show  the  variations  from  year-to-year, 

employer  in  that  industry  but  to  show  the  consistency  in  the  relationships.     It 

In  fiscal  year  1953-1954'the  gross  amount  charged  ^ould  be  noted  that  the  rise  in  amount  charged  from 

for  benefits  paid  was  a  little  more  than  $23,560,000.  ? 8'6  ™}hon  £  f21'}  ml l}1™  d°llars  ^  explained  by 

The  charges  for  the  purpose  of  this  analysis  fall  in  legislation  which  altered  the  timing  of  the  charges 

three  categories,  as  follows:  s°  a\to  temporarily  delay  the  charges  m  the  year 

t>        i,!     co-i  nco  Ann            i,          -     nno,      i.-  the  change  m  method  was  first  effective.     This  rise 

Roughly  $21,068  000  was  charged  to  11,736  active  does  not  suggest  the  degree  of  rise  in  the  compen- 

employer  accounts  for  which  1955  contribution  rates  sated  unemployment 

were  computed.     These  charges  are  distributed  by  " % 

industry  in  the  analysis  which  follows. 

Almost  $1,750,000  of  the   1953-1954   fiscal  year  The  incidence  of  unemployment  among  insured 

benefit  expenditure  was  not  charged  to  the  individual  workers  in  North  Carolina  is  currently  very  close  to 

employer  accounts,  because  the  employer  complied  the  national  average.  In  mid-November  3.9  of  each 

with  the  requirements  of  the  non-charging  section  hundred  covered  North  Carolina  workers  were  un- 

of  the  law  which  reads  as  follows :  employed  as  compared  with  a  4.1  average  in  the 

Any  benefits  paid  to  any  claimant  under  a  claim  natio,n0    ForT  mid-December  the  ratios  were  higher 

filed  for  a  period  occurring  after  the  date  of  such  Le"  4-8  m  North  Carolina  and  4.7  for  the  national 

separations  as  are  set  forth  in  this  subparagraph  average, 

and  based  on  wages  earned  prior  to  the  date  of  (a)  * 

the  voluntary  leaving  of  work  by  the  claimant  with-  In  1954,  more  than  $37,500,000  in  benefit  payments 

out  good  cause  attributable  to  the  employer,  or  (b)  went  to  the  North   Carolina   unemployed.     In   six 

the  discharge  of  claimant  for  misconduct  in  connec-  months  of  the  year,  payments  to  the  unemployed  ex- 

tion  with  his  work  shall  not  be  charged  to  the  ac-  ceeded  $3,500,000  and  in  May  exceeded  $4,000,000. 

count  of  the  employer  by  whom  the  claimant  was  Expressed  in  terms  of  support  to  the  business  econ- 

employed  at  the  time  of  such  separation ;  provided,  0my  of  the  communities,  these  payments  roughly 

however,  said  employer  promptly  furnishes  the  Com-  gave  spendable  dollars  equivalent  to  an  employer  in 

mission  with  such  notices  regarding  the  separation  every  North  Carolina  county  giving  employment  to 

of  the  individual  from  work  as  are  or  may  be  re-  188  people  at  $40.00  per  week.    Employment  is  more 

quired  by  the  regulations  of  the  Commission.  desired,  but  the  level  of  business,  particularly  Trade 

The  remaining  benefit  payments  in  the  fiscal  pe-  and  Service,  was  greatly  supported  by  these  pay- 

riod    amounting   to    roughly   three-quarter   million  ments. 
dollars  were  charged  to  inactive 

accounts,  i.e.,  represented  bene-       Payroll  Variations  1954  and  1955  Computation  and  Relationship 
fits  paid  to  workers  of  employ-         Between  Payrolls  and  Benefit  Charges  for  Selected  Industries 

ers  who  no  longer  are  operating.  „    .    „       .  ..     rnnn,  (              D                       .,    .  » 

°  i-iei  Payrolls    in    Computation    (000's)  Benefit   Charqes   as    %    of   Payroll 

These  accounts  are  charged  fol-  %~ol  %~o7~ 

lOWing    the     Cessation     Of    Opera-  "   US  ry  (Fiscal        Taxable        (Fiscal        Taxable  Year  Total  Year  Total 

tions    Since   Should   a   resumption  1952-53)       Payroll       1953-54)       Payroll  I954i  change  I955-"  Change 

of  operations  take  place,  the  ac-  State  Total....   ....$1,679,316  IOO.O  $1,637,484  lOO.O  $8,649,723  100.0  $21,068,391  100.0 

COUnt     then     WOUld     reflect     the  Construction               lll.OSl  6.6  102,896  6.3  464,185  5.4  1,556,642  7.4 

Whole    experience    of    SUCh    em-  Manufacturing  ._  1,022,785  60.9  971,049  59.3  6,801,729  78.6  16,534,106  78.5 

P  °yer'  .                                     .     ,                      Tobacco   73,830  4.4  75,430  4.6  1,164,492  13.5  2,541,289  12.1 

Turning  now  to  an  industry 
analysis  of  this  extent  to  which        Textile  ■  560'863     334        511'527     312     4'422'839      5L1      10'201'587      48-4 

each  industry  Contributes  to  the  Apparel    .  29,258         1.7  31,066         1.9  202,816         2.3  431,943         2.1 

COSt  of  unemployment  insurance,  Lumber    59,739         3.6  55,591         3.4  246,638         2.9  748,367         3.6 

a  comparison  is  made  of  the  pay-  Furniture    ______        80,002         4.7  76,862         4.7  270,575         3.1         1,003,708         4.8 

roll  distribution  and  the  benefit     Trade  311,253     18.5        319,770     19.5        986,700     11.4       1,464,920       7.0 

charge  distribution.     This  rela- 
tionship suggests  the  high  cost  Finance>  Ins-  & 
industries  in  the  unemployment  Real  Estate          48'879       29         52'988       3-2         36'040       °"4           84'476       0A 

insurance    program    as    Well    as       Service  58,634         3.5  58,653         3.6  137,120         1.6  851,409         4.0 

those    industries    where    unem-  ,  1  Au<r  195.._31  July  1953 

ployment  costs  are  low;  e.g.,  in  2  1  Au7  1953—31  July  1954 


PAGE   1  1  8 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


Summer-fall,  i  954 


ESC  STATE  ADVISORY  COUNCIL 

HEADED  BY  JAMES  A.  BRIDGES* 

James  A.  Bridger,  Bladenboro,  was  appointed 
chairman  of  the  State  Advisory  Council  of  the  Em- 
ployment Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 
by  Governor  Luther  Hodges  just  before  the  Christ- 
mas holidays.  Mr.  Bridger  was  already  a  member 
of  the  Advisory  Council  and  was  named  to  take  the 
place  left  vacant  by  the  resignation  of  James  A. 
Gray,  Robersonville,  both  as  chairman  and  as  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Council.  Governor  Hodges  named  Sher- 
wood Roberson,  also  of  Robersonville,  to  take  Mr. 
Bridger's  place  on  the  Council. 

Chairman  Bridger  and  Mr.  Roberson  are  both 
representatives  of  the  general  public,  along  with  W. 
B.  Horton,  Yanceyville ;  Dr.  J.  W.  Seabrook,  Fayette- 
ville,  and  Mrs.  R.  C.  Lewellyn,  Dobson.  Employer 
representatives  are  L.  L.  Tait,  Lincolnton,  and  W.  A. 
Egerton,  Enka,  and  the  employee  representatives 
are  Melvin  Ward,  Spencer,  AFL,  and  H.  D.  Lisk, 
Charlotte,  CIO. 

The  State  Advisory  Council,  as  now  constituted, 
held  its  first  meeting  in  the  office  of  ESC  Chairman 
Henry  E.  Kendall  January  4,  at  the  call  of  Chairman 
Bridger.  The  meeting  was  primarily  for  the  pur- 
pose of  placing  before  the  members  the  changes  pro- 
posed in  the  Employment  Security  Law  by  Chair- 
man Kendall  and  the  ESC  staff.  These  changes, 
largely  to  facilitate  administration  of  the  law,  were 
approved  by  the  Council.  Also,  they  were  approved 
by  the  members  of  the  Employment  Security  Com- 
mission, meeting  January  11,  in  final  form. 

At  the  Advisory  Council  meeting  the  new  film, 
"Employment  Security  in  North  Carolina",  was 
shown  to  give  the  new  members  an  overall  picture 
of  the  operations  of  the  Commission.  Chairman 
Kendall  and  members  of  his  staff  explained  the  pro- 
posed changes  in  the  Law  and  reasons  for  the 
changes. 


GARMENT  PLANTS  IN  RURAL  AREAS 

Numbers  of  garment  manufacturing  plants  which 
have  started  operations  in  North  Carolina  in  the 
past  few  years  have  located  in  small  communities 
and  rural  areas — thus  providing  work  for  numbers 
of  workers  either  not  employed  or  not  fully  employ- 
ed. Payrolls  in  these  rural  communities  have  an  im- 
portant economic  bearing  on  such  communities. 

While  payrolls  in  the  apparel  industries  are  not 
as  high  as  those  in  some  other  industries,  as  is 
shown  in  other  articles  in  this  issue,  two  principal 
reasons  are  that  they  are  somewhat  seasonal  and 
that  many  of  the  workers  in  such  plants  are  learners 
and  start  at  learner  wages.  As  work  continues,  the 
plants  tend  toward  reducing  the  seasonal  operations 
and  the  learners  become  full-fledged  workers.  Then 
they  draw  higher  wages,  based  on  the  extent  of  the 
skills  they  have  acquired. 


Received  too   late  to   appear   in   proper  section 

THE  SALEM  COMPANY,  INC. 
Winston-Salem,  N.  C. 

The  Salem  Company,  Inc.,  Winston-Salem,  manu- 
facturer of  dungarees  and  sportswear,  has  recently 
announced  new  officers :  Richard  Steele,  president, 
and  treasurer;  Arthur  Bluethenthal,  vice-presideni, 
and  secretary,  and  Dan  Willetts,  Jr.,  vice-president, 
with  Harvey  H.  Pressley  as  plant  superintendent. 
Operation  of  the  company  is  at  Junia  Avenue  and 
Lomond  Street  in  a  building  containing  about  15,000 
sq.  ft.  which  is  under  lease  to  the  firm. 

The  progress  of  this  manufacturing  concern  has 
been  steady  since  its  inception  eight  and  one-half 
years  ago.  While  the  principal  products  are  still 
dungarees,  including  styles  for  the  whole  family — 
men's,  boys',  juveniles'  and  flannel  lined  jeans — the 
trend  toward  more  highly  styled  garments  in  the 
women's  wear  field  has  been  accepted  and  promoted 
with  success. 

Ladies'  and  girls'  shorts,  both  of  the  standard  and 
Bermuda  variety,  and  pedal  pushers  in  exciting, 
fashion  bright  colors  have  given  The  Salem  Company 
a  more  fully  rounded  line.  And  to  cater  to  the  pop- 
ular and  ever  growing  children's  field,  matching 
flannel  shorts  are  coordinated  with  the  flannel  lined 
child's  dungarees  to  make  an  attractive  set  for  win- 
ter buying. 

Proud  of  its  growth  in  the  industry,  The  Salem 
Company  also  has  a  keen  local  pride,  shown  not  only 
in  the  companj^'s  firm  name,  but  also  in  the  close  tie- 
in  of  its  trade-marks  and  brand  names  with  the  city 
and  surrounding  areas.  The  trade  name  "Old  Salem" 
synthesizes  the  craft  heritage  of  the  old  Moravian 
settlement  with  the  modern  industry  of  the  Twin 
Cities. 

Another  label,  "Four  Scythes",  is  a  derivative  of 
Forsyth  County,  illustrating  the  tobacco  and  agri- 
cultural interests  of  this  section.  And  to  keep  up 
with  the  western  trends  which  have  swept  the  coun- 
try are  the  "Ranchaps"  and  "Ranchettes"  tickets  for 
little  cowboy  and  cowgirl  dungarees.  The  "Circle 
T"  and  "Town  Marshal"  copyrighted  labels  are  de- 
signed especially  for  the  tough  men's  and  boys'  west- 
ern jeans ;  and  finally  there  is  the  smashing  first  of 
The  Salem  Company's  "Man-O-Might"  ticket  which 
well  might  be  the  symbol  of  the  strength  and  dura- 
bility of  this  whole  denim  line. 

Salem  Company  products  are  distributed  nation- 
wide, but  especially  in  the  southeastern  states, 
through  department,  chain  stores  and  specialty 
shops.  With  two  full-time  salesmen  on  the  road, 
approximately  150  employees,  a  large  percentage  of 
whom  have  been  with  the  company  over  five  years, 
the  Salem  Company  has  thus  become  another  strong 
link  in  the  diversified  industrialization  of  Winston- 
Salem  and  North  Carolina. 


In  1054,  the  Employment  Service  Division  made 
about  138,250  placements  of  workers  in  non-agricul- 
tural jobs.  This  was  25,000  fewer  placements  than 
for  the  year  1953.  This  decline  is  explained  by  the 
downturn  in  employment  that  plagued  our  industries 
for  the  greater  part  of  1954. 


Publications  of  Employment  Security  Commission  of  North  Carolina 

(FORMERLY  "UNEMPLOYMENT  COMPENSATION  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA") 


Biennial  Reports,  1936-1938;  1938-1940;  1940-1942; 
1942-1944;  1944-1946;  1946-1948;  1948-1950; 
1950-1952;  1952-1954 

Employment  Security  News  (mimeographed — week- 
ly), started  in  1936  by  the  North  Carolina  State 
Employment  Service.  Not  issued  during  Calendar 
year  1945. 

North  Carolina  Employment  Security  Information, 
Volume  I,  Numbers  1-12,  1941.  (Discontinued.) 

The  U.  C.  C.  Quarterly 

Vol.  1,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1942-43) 
Vol.  2,  Nos.  1,  2,  3  (1944)  (No.  4  not  issued) 
Index  to  Vols.  1  and  2  (1942-44) 
Vol.  3,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  (1945) 
Vol.  4,  Nos.  1-2,  3,  4  (1946) 
Index  to  Vols.  3  and  4  (1945-46) 
(Included  in  Vol.  5,  No.  2-3) 
The  E.  S.  C.  Quarterly  (Name  changed  April  1, 1947) 
Vol.  5— No.  1,  Winter,  1947— Granite,  Marble,  Stone 
No.  2-3,  Spring-Summer,  1947— Brick,  Tile, 

Pipe,  Pottery 
No.  4,  Fall,  1947— Rural  Industries 
Vol.  6— No.   1,   Winter,   1948— Pulp,   Paper,   Paper 
Products 
No.  2-3,  Spring-Summer,  1948— Dairy  Prod- 
ucts 
No.  4,  Fall,  1948 — Insurance 

Index  to  Vols.  5  and  6,  1947-48,  in  Vol.  7,  No.  2 

Vol.  7— No.  1,  Winter,  1949— Banking 

No.  2,  Spring,  1949— Fertilizer  Manufactur- 
ing 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1949— Trade,  Whole- 
sale-Retail 
Vol.  8— No.  1-2,  Winter-Spring,  1950— Hotels,  Res- 

No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1950— Milling:  Flour, 
Feed,  Meal 

Index  to  Vols.  7  and  8,  1949-50,  in  Vol.  9,  No.  1-2 

Vol.  9— No.  1-2,  Winter-Spring,  1951— Newspapers, 
Printing 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1951— Tobacco  Man- 
ufacturing 
Vol.  10— No.   1-2,   Winter-Spring,   1952— Furniture 
Manufacturing 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1952— Textile  Manu- 
facturing 

Index  to  Vols.  9  and  10,  1951-52,  in  Vol.  11,  No.  1-2 

Vol.  11— No.     1-2,    Winter-Spring,     1953— Hosiery 
Manufacturing 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1953 — Transporta- 
tion. 
Vol.  12 — No.  1-2,  Winter-Spring,  1954 — Machinery 
Manufacturing. 
No.  3-4,  Summer-Fall,  1954 — Apparel  Man- 
ufacturing. 

• 

Employment  Security  Law  as  amended  (1953). 
Rules  and  Regulations,  amended  1953. 


POSTERS: 

Employer's  Certificate  of  Coverage  and  Notice  to 
Workers. 

Notice  to  Workers  as  to  Benefit  Rights  While  on  Va- 
cation. 


RELEASES  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  RESEARCH 
AND  STATISTICS 

Current  Series 

"Trends" — A  monthly  mimeographed  activity  re- 
port first  issued  in  June  1943.  Data  for  period 
1938-1943  found  in  other  series  now  out-of-print. 

"Employment  and  Wages  in  Covered  Employment 
by  County" — A  quarterly  mimeographed  release 
giving  employment  and  wage  data  in  covered  em- 
ployment for  each  county  for  five  broad  industry 
groups.    First  release  First  Quarter  of  1948. 

"Covered  Employment  and  Total  Wages  in  North 
Carolina" — An  annual  report  for  calendar  years, 
issued  in  two  parts  as  follows: 

1.  Summary  data  for  State  by  two-digit  industry 
and  employment  and  wages  by  county. 

2.  County  data  by  three-digit  industry.  First  re- 
leased in  1943. 

"Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina" — An  annual 
study  of  the  experience  rating  plan  and  its  opera- 
tion. First  release  in  1946.  (1948  issue  out  of 
print.) 

"Labor  Resources  in  North  Carolina  for  Industrial 
Development" — A  bimonthly  release  begun  in 
January  1951  showing  recruitable  labor  by  coun- 
ty. 

"Labor  Supply — Labor  Demand" — a  labor  market 
digest  released  in  February,  June,  and  October 
based  on  sample  employment  trends  in  over  800 
reporting  establishments  in  14  selected  areas. 
First  release  entitled  "Employment  Trend  in  Re- 
porting Establishments"  first  issued  in  1946.  Out- 
of-print  prior  to  1949. 

"Labor  Market  Digests" — An  employment  security 
office  release  showing  labor  market  conditions  in 
office  area.  Only  current  releases  available.  Re- 
leased as  follows: 

1.  Bi-monthly  for  Asheville,  Charlotte,  Durham, 
Greensboro,  High  Point,  Raleigh,  and  Winston- 
Salem,  and  Fayetteville. 

2.  In  October,  February  and  June  for  Burlington, 
Gastonia,  Morganton,  Reidsville-Spray  and  Wil- 
mington. 

"Annual  Report  of  Employment  Service  Division" 
— A  mimeographed  release  dealing  primarily 
with  activity  summary  data  by  office,  presenting 
data  graphically  for  evaluating  purposes.  A  sim- 
ilar graphic  presentation  is  prepared  for  each 
January-June  period.  For  limited  distribution 
only. 

Special  Reports  and  Studies 

"Research  in  the  Employment  Security  Program" 
(1948) 

"Unemployment  Insurance  Financing" — a  digest  of 
the  Cost  of  Unemployment  Insurance  in  North 
Carolina,  and  a  Study  of  Long-Range  Unemploy- 
ment Benefit  Financing  and  Fund  Solvency. 

"A  Study  of  Claimants  Exhausting  Benefits  Under 
the  Unemployment  Insurance  Program  During 
May  and  June  1951." 

• 

CIRCULARS  AND  FOLDERS: 

Employer  Experience  Rating  in  North  Carolina. 
Information  for  Workers  and  Identification  Booklet. 
Information  for  Interstate  Claimants. 
Unemployment  Insurance  in  North  Carolina. 


on  *  "i  "d  '(i)  (d)  frse  obs) 

SSIM9N03   JO   1DV   H3dNn    dOJ 

aamno33V  asvisod  saxvis  aaimn 
1IVW  AJ.HMD3S  INSWAOldWg 


•o*n  noianva 

AHvnen  aivxs 

KoisiAia  ivoraotH3d 


stamina  lvnijjo 


*D  'N   HOiaivy  '68S  xog 
NOISSIWWOD  'S  '3 


>l'£ 


II  + 


VlNTER-SPRING,  1956 


THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE  65 


rtiole  grew  by  13.7  percent.  This  rapid  growth  far 
xceeds  the  rate  of  industrial  expansion  and  indi- 
ates  that  the  local  labor  supply  is  more  than  ample. 

Fayetteville  firms  employ  over  80  percent  of  the 
arsons  engaged  in  nonagricultural  activities  in 
Cumberland  County,  excluding  civilian  employees  at 
^ort  Bragg  and  Pope  Air  Base.  It  is  the  only  city 
n  the  county  and  except  for  work  at  the  military 
retaliations,  most  of  the  job  opportunities  are  found 
here.  Cumberland  County,  with  the  city  of  Fayette- 
ille  at  about  its  geographical  center  and  Fort  Bragg 
nd  Pope  Air  Base  in  the  northwest  portion,  is  a 
ohesive  labor  market  area.  All  manpower  and  em- 
ployment data  relate  to  this  labor  market  area. 

The  civilian  labor  force  of  this  area,  though  sub- 
ect  to  mild  seasonal  fluctuations  and  substantial 
hanges  due  to  activities  at  the  military  installations, 
tas  trended  upward  since  1950.  By  March  1956  it 
pproximated  33,600.  Of  these,  70  percent  are  non- 
gricultural  wage  and  salaried  workers,  12  percent 
re  engaged  in  agriculture,  the  balance  are  self-em- 
tloyed,  domestics,  unpaid  family  workers,  and  un- 
mployed  workers.  The  heavy  impact  of  civilian 
nanpower  needs  at  Fort  Bragg,  Pope  Air  Base,  and 
he  Veterans  Hospital  on  the  economy  and  labor 
orce  of  the  area  is  indicated  in  the  fact  that  from 
!0  to  25  percent  of  nonagricultural  wage  and  salaried 
vorkers  are  employed  at  these  installations  (from 
!,500  to  3,200  civil  service ;  up  to  500  at  the  post  ex- 
hange ;  from  1,000  to  2,000  in  contract  construction ; 
iver  400  at  the  Veteran's  Hospital.) 

The  growth  of  nonmilitary  connected  industry  in 
he  Fayetteville  area  is  shown  by  a  comparison  of 
irms  and  employees  covered  by  unemployment  in- 
urance.  In  1950  the  monthly  average  of  insured 
mployment  was  10,007;  in  1954  the  number  had 
isen  to  11,006 ;  the  first  three  quarters  of  1955  aver- 
iged  11,881.  The  number  of  covered  firms  has  risen 
rom  340  in  1950  to  well  over  400.  Since  1950,  each 
'ear  has  seen  a  gradual  rise  in  employment  from  the 
irst  through  the  fourth  quarter  then  a  drop  from  the 
ast  quarter  of  one  year  to  the  first  quarter  of  the 
ollowing  year.  This  first-of-the-year  employment 
•eduction  has  tended  to  be  less  significant  during  the 
>ast  five  years  and  is  now  well  below  the  rate  of 
lecline  for  the  State  as  a  whole. 

Trade  accounts  for  about  one-fourth  of  the  23,000 
lonagricultural  wage  and  salaried  employment 
lervice,  including  education  and  hospitals,  one-fifth ; 
md  government,  including  civil  service  employees  at 
^ort  Bragg  and  Pope  Air  Base,  about  one-seventh. 
Manufacturing,  never  heavy,  has  been  gradually 
tlimbing  and  now  represents  about  one-fifth. 

Though  manufacturing  accounts  for  only  one- 
ifth  of  nonfarm  salaried  employment,  some  4,500 
)ersons  are  so  engaged  and  receive  wages  in  the 
leighborhood  of  $2,770,000  each  quarter.  About  half 
>f  these  workers  are  in  the  six  textile  mills  of  the 
irea  whose  products  are  principally  cotton  and  syn- 
hetic  yarns,  broad  woven  fabrics  and  hosiery.  Next 
n  importance  are  producers  of  lumber  and  wood 


products;  such  firms  regularly  offer  employment  to 
more  than  1,000  workers.  While  most  of  the  saw- 
mills and  planing  mills  are  relatively  small,  four  ply- 
wood and  millwork  plants  hire  in  the  neighborhood 
of  600  persons.  Food  processing  plants,  with  some 
600  on  their  payrolls,  include:  poultry  processing, 
frozen  foods,  bakery  goods,  grain-mills  and  soft 
drink  bottling.  Adding  balance  to  the  manufactur- 
ing segment  of  the  local  economy  is  a  firm  making 
electrical  fans;  a  manufacturer  of  wood  household 
furniture ;  a  foundry ;  mattress  companies ;  publish- 
ing firms;  and  fertilizer  plants.  Other  firms  pro- 
duce: cotton  seed  oil  and  byproducts;  glue;  brick; 
cement  blocks ;  and  toy  novelty  items,  primarily  fur 
kittens. 

Fayetteville's  dominant  industry  is  trade.  Its  im- 
portance as  a  trade  center  is  borne  out  by  dollar 
value  and  employment  in  that  industry.  According 
to  figures  made  available  by  the  North  Carolina  De- 
partment of  Revenue,  total  county  retail  sales  for 
fiscal  1955  amounted  to  $89,451,000.  This  represent- 
ed a  10.9  percent  increase  over  the  preceding  year. 
The  number  of  merchants  exceeded  1,370.  "Sales 
Management"  estimated  that  of  the  total  county  re- 
tail sales  volume,  the  City  of  Fayetteville  accounted 
for  over  90  percent.  The  "Blue  Book  of  Southern 
Progress,"  1955,  lists  total  trade  as  $135,000,000  or 
56  percent  of  total  business  volume  for  1954.  Trade 
employment  accounts  for  25  percent  of  nonfarm 
wage   earners  and  usually  approximates  6,300. 

In  the  service  industries  are  some  4,700  employees. 
Personal  service  such  as:  laundries,  cleaning  and 
dyeing  firms,  beauty  and  barber  shops  employ  about 
26  percent  of  the  service  workers.  Educational  em- 
ployment is  almost  24  percent,  hospitals  (including 
the  Veterans  Administration  Hospital),  medical  and 
sanitary  services  22  percent.  Hotels  and  lodging 
places,  and  amusement  and  recreational  enterprises, 
about  8  percent  each. 

Construction,  always  at  a  relatively  high  level  in 
the  Fayetteville  area,  usually  accounts  for  from  10 
to  13  percent  of  the  total  wage  earners.  In  1955 
according  to  the  "Office  of  the  Building  Inspector, 
City  of  Fayetteville",  building  permits  issued  for  that 
year  amounted  to  $5,133,018.  All  permits  were  for 
commercial  and  residential  building  inside  the  city 
limits.  Military  authorities  at  Fort  Bragg  and  Pope 
Air  Base  state  that  construction  authorized  for  1955 
amounted  to  $4,039,076.  However,  contract  con- 
struction currently  in  progress  is  estimated  to  be  in 
excess  of  $15,000,000 ;  and  during  1955  contract  con- 
struction in  progress  was  in  excess  of  $30,000,000. 

Fayetteville  has  much  to  offer  existing  or  pros- 
pective firms  or  industries :  ample  and  varied  trans- 
portation facilities ;  proximity  to  a  substantial  buy- 
ing population  both  in  the  adjacent  rural  areas  and 
nearby  military  installations  and  a  more  than  ample 
labor  supply,  most  of  whom  are  within  the  age  range 
most  desired  by  employers.  It  is  a  growing  commun- 
ity offering  excellent  opportunities  for  growing  firms 
and  industries. 


SUPPLEMENT  TO  "THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY",  VOL.  1  4,  NO.  1  -2,  WINTER-SPRING,  1 956 

Index  to  Volumes  11  and  12,  1953-1954 

THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 

Compiled  by  Mrs.  Edith  M.  Hinton,  Former  Secretary,  Office  of  Informational  Serviec 

Published  by 

EMPLOYMENT  SECURITY  COMMISSION  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 

(Issues  from  Vol.  1,  No.  1,  Summer,  1942,  through  Vol.  4,  No.  4,  Fall,  1946,  were  designated  as  "The  U.  C.  j 

Quarterly".  When  the  name  of  the  agency  was  changed  April  1,  1947,  the  name  of  this  magazine  also  w< 

changed.) 


Vol.       No. 


AIRLINES: 

Piedmont,  only  N.  C.  Airline,  (Best  Little 

Carrier  in  the  Nation)....- 11 

AKERS  WINS  N.  C.  SAFETY  TROPHY.... ....     11 

ANDREWS,  COL.  A.  B.,  N.  C.  NATIVE, 

WAS  LEADING  RAILROAD  DEVELOPER     11 
ANDREWS,  MRS.  MILDRED  BARNWELL: 

Textile  Experience 11 

Historic  Highlights  in  Development  of 

Hosiery-Knitting 11 

Improving  Textile  Machinery  Vital  to 

State's  Industry 12 

APPAREL  PRODUCTION 

See  Garment  Manufacturing 
ASSOCIATIONS  (OFFICERS  AND 
DIRECTORS): 
Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers  Association         11 

N.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Association 11 

N.  C.  Bus  Association 11 

N.  C.  Railroad  Association 11 

Members  of  Executive  and  General  Com- 
mittees 
BABCOCK,  JAMES  A.: 
Westinghouse  Starts  Large  Electronics 

Plant  in  Raleigh 12 

Westinghouse  Pledge 
See  Electronics  Plants 
BELL,  C.  E.: 

Seaboard  Air  Line's  System  Started  with 

Short  N.  C.  Lines 11 

See  Railroads 
BIOGRAPHICAL  SKETCHES: 

Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf 1 1 

Crayon  C.  Efird...... 11 

Frank  J.  Sprague 12 

BLUE  RIDGE  PARKWAY 

See  Browning,  R.  Getty 
BROWNING,  R.  GETTY: 

Blue  Ridge  Parkway,  One  of  World's 

Remarkable  Scenicwavs 1 1 

4,000,000  Visitors  in  1953 
BURK,  MARGARET: 
State  Develops  Modern  67,000  Mile  Toil- 
Free  Road  System 11 

CHARLOTTE'S  INDUSTRY  AND 
EMPLOYMENT 
See  Johnson,  Mrs.  E.  DeKay 
COMMISSIONERS: 

Kendall  Again  Chairman;  Wolf  Renamed; 

Efird  New 1 1 

Henry  E.  Kendall 
Dr.  Harry  D.  Wolf 
Crayon  C.  Efird 
DAVIS,  C.  McD.,  PRESIDENT  OF  ACL 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 
DUNN,  E.  STANHOPE: 


North  Carolina  Produces  40  Percent  of 
Nation's  Hosiery 

Table  I — Hosiery  Plant  Facilities  and 
Production  N.  C,  South  and  U.  S.,  1951 

Table  II — Leading  States  in  Hosiery 
Manufacturing  in  1947 

Table  III — Production  Employment  in 
Hosiery  and  Knit  Goods  in  United  States 
and  North  Carolina— 1947  and  1939 

Chart — Employment  in  the  Knitting  In- 
dustry Covered  by  Employment  Security 
Commission  of  North  Carolina  1942-1952 


11 


1-2 


3-4 


3-4 


3-4 


3-4 


1-2 


Page 


3-4 

112 

3-4 

94 

5-4 

133 

1-2 

6 

1-2 

6 

1-2 

22 

1-2 

9 

3-4 

84 

3-4 

115 

3-4 

128 

138 


3-4 

67 

3-4 

68 

1-2 

14 

80 


75 


67 


Vol.       No. 
Chart — Employment  Trends  for  U.  S.  and 

Leading  States  Knit  Goods  (1899-1929); 

Hosiery  (1929-1947) 
North  Carolina  Apparel  Production  Shows 

Big  Expansion 12         5-4 

5535  Million  Industry  in  1953 

Concentrated  in  Piedmont  Area 

Furnishings — Work  Clothing  Center 
Chart — Apparel  and  Textile  Employment 

in  North  Carolina  1939-1954 
Map — Distribution  of  State's  Apparel 

Employment  by  County  (First  Quarter 

1954  Employment) 
Table  1 — Apparel  Industry  is  Growing 

in  North  Carolina  1939-1954 
Table  II— Comparative  Growth  by  Apparel 

Subdivisions  First  Quarter  1954  Versus  1945 
DUNNAGAN,  M.  R. 

North  Carolina  Hosiery  Leader 11  1-2 

State  Has  56  Counties  Producing  Hosiery 

and  Other  Knit  Goods 11  1-2 

Knitting  Arts  Exhibition  Atlantic  City, 

April-May,  1953......... 11         1-2 

High  Point  High,  Guilford  Leader,  in 

Hosiery  Production 11  1-2 

Adams-Millis,  One  of  Nation's  Largest 

Hosiery  Producers 11  1-2 

Melrose  Develops  Into  Important  High 

Point  Hosiery  Firm 11  1-2 

Mojud  One  of  Three  Largest  F.  F.  Hosiery 

Firms  in  World 11  1-2 

Burlington  Mills  Has  17  Men's,  Women's 

Hosiery  Plants 11  1-2 

Grabur  Plant,  Burlington 

Greensboro  Hosiery  Finishing  Plant 

May  Finishing  Plant,  Burlington 

May  Hosiery  Plant,  Burlington 

McEwen  Knitting  Plant,  Burlington 

McLaurin  Hosiery  Plant,  Asheboro 

Randleman  Hosiery  Plant 

Vance  Hosiery  Plant,  Kernersville 

Wadesboro  Hosiery  Plant 

(See  Textile  Issue  of  "The  E.  S.  C. 
Quarterly",  Vol.  10,  No.  5-4) 
High  Point  Has  Many  Medium  and 

Successful  Hosiery  Organizations 11  1-2 

Crown  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Diamond  Hosiery  Corp. 

Guilford  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Haltom  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Harriss  &  Covington  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Plymouth  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Silver-Knit  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Slane  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Terry  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Triangle  Hosiery  Co 

Other  High  Point  Firms 

•  Other  Greensboro  Firms 
Burlington,  Alamance  Long  State  Hosiery 

Producing  Center 11  1-2 

Standard  Produces  High  Quality  Men's, 

Women's  Hosiery , .:..-...: , 11  1-2 

Burlington 

Baker-Camack  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Elder  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Grace  Hosiery  Mills 

Griffin  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Pickett  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Sellers  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Tower  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Other-Burlington  Mills 


PAGE  2 


NDEXTO  VOLUMES  1  1  AND  12,  1953-1  954 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


(PAGE  67) 


1-2 

25 

1-2 

26 

1-2 

27 

1-2 


1-2 

1-2 
1-2 


Vol.        No.  Page 

DUNNAGAN,  M.  R.:  (Continued) 
Ossipee 

Altamahaw  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Glen  Raven 

Glenraven  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 
Other  Alamance  Firms 

Graham 

Alamance 

Haw  River 
Hickory  and  Catawba  Co.  Producers  ot 

Men's  Hosiery 1 1 

Elliott  and  Lyerly  Large  Men's,  Women's 

Hosiery  Makers 1 1 

Lyerly  Full  Fashioned  Mills 
Other  Large  Hosiery  Mills  in  Hickory 11 

Brown  Bros.  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Ellis  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Hafer  Hosiery  Mills 

Hollar  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Knit-So\  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 

Piedmont  Hosiery  Mills 

Shuford  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Walton  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 

Whiting  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Whisnant  Hosiery  Mills 
Larger  Newton  Plants — 11 

Bothwell  Mills,  Inc. 

Newton  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 

Ridgeview  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Newton  and  Catawba  Mills 
Acme-McCrary  Leading  Firm  in  State's 

Hosiery  Industry 1 1 

Asheboro,  Randolph  Co.  Developed  Into 

Leaders  in  Hosiery  Industry — 11 

Other  Larger  Asheboro  Hosiery  Mills 11 

Asheboro  Hosiery  Mill 

Bossong  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Tip-Top  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Randleman 

Commonwealth  Hosiery  Mills 

Laughlin  Full  Fashioned  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Liberty 

Liberty  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Dependable  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Other  Randolph  County  Firms 
Waldensian,  Pilot  and  Valdese  Develop 

Successful  Plants 11 

Burke  County,  Early  and  Leading  Maker 
of  Fine  Hosiery  Products 

Pilot  Full  Fashion  Mills,  Inc. 

Valdese  Manufacturing  Co. 
Drexel,  Morganton  and  Huffman,  Successlul 

Hosiery  Group 11 

Morganton  and  Huffman 
Valdese 

Martinat  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Francis-Louise  Full  Fashioned  Mills,  Inc. 

Albert  F.  Garrou  &  Sons,  Inc. 
Hildebran 

J.  A.  Cline  &  Co.,  Inc. 

Hildebran  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Other  Burke  County  Firms 
Chadbourn  A  Modern,  New,  Expanding 

Hosiery  Producer 11 

Charlotte  and  Mecklenburg  Have  Many 

Successful  Hosiery  Firms. 11 

Hudson  Hosiery  Co.,  Famous  for  Silk,  Now 

Nylon  Producer 1 1 

Hanes  Hosiery  Nation's  Largest  Fine 

Seamless  Producer. 1 1 

Winston-Salem,  Kernersville  in  Forsyth 

Active  Hosiery  Makers 
Kernersville  42 

Vance  &  Ring,  Inc. 
Other  Forsyth  County  Firms 
Ragan  and  Maurice  Group  Manufactures 

Men's  Fine  Hosiery.- 11         1-2  42 

Thomasville,  Lexington,  Denton  in  David- 
., ,  ,     son,  Men's  Hose  Producers 
Thomasville 

Ragan  Knitting  Co.,  Inc. 

Maurice  Mills  Co.    '  43 

Fremont  and  Dogwood 

Hill  Hosiery  Mill 

Thomasville  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Wrenn  Hosiery  Co. 


1-2 


1-2 


28 


28 

29 
30 


31 

31 

31 
31 


35 
36 
37 


1-2 

37 

1-2 

38 

1-2 

39 

1-2 

40 

Vol.        No.  Page 

Denton 

Bisher  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Thornton  Knitting  Co. 
Lexington 

Mountcastle  Knitting  Co. 
Other  Davidson  County  Firms 
Surry  County  and  Mount  Airy  Are  Large 

Producers  of  Men's  Hosiery.. 11  1-2  43 

Barber  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Granite  Hosiery  Mills 

Renfro  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Other  Surry  County  Firms 
Durham  Hosiery  Mills  Early  and  Historic- 
State  Industry 11  1-2  44 

Durham  Hosiery  Mills 

Gann  Hosiery  Mills  Co.  45 

Louise  Knitting  Mills  Co. 

Other  Durham  County  Firms 
Hoover  ol  Concord  Big  Producer  of  Fine 

Women's  Hosiery 1 1         1-2  45 

Hugh  Grey  Expanding  Production  of 

Women's  Fine  Hosiery 11  1-2  46 

Hugh  Grey  Hosiery  Co. 

Willis  Hosiery  Mills 

Other  Cabarrus  County  Firms 
Wiscassett  Mills  Produce  Cannon's  Fine 

Quality  Hosiery 11         1-2  47 

Lillian  Knitting  Mills 

Other  Stanly  County  Plants 
Gaston  County  Big  Textile  Producer. 

Including  Hosiery 11         1-2  48 

Belmont 

Belmont  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Knit  Products  Corp. 

Knit  Products  Corp.  No.  2 

Knit  Products  Corp.  No.  3 

Outlook  Manufacturing  Co. 

Other  Gaston  County  Firms 
Wilkes  County 

Skyland  Textile  Co. 

Wilkes  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 
Montgomery  County 

Clayson  Knitting  Co. 

Russell  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Sox,  Inc. 

Other  Montgomery  Plants 
Cleveland  County 

LIudson  Hosiery  Co. 

Mauney  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
McDowell  County  Contains  Dozen  Seamless 

Mills,  One  Full"  Fashion... 11         1-2  49 

Marion 

Josephine  Mills,  Inc. 

Marion  Hosiery  Mills 

Elizabeth  James  Mills 

Other  McDowell  County  Firms 
Edgecombe  County 

Runnymede  Mills,  Inc. 

Mayo  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 
Halifax  County  50 

Halifax  County  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Henderson  County 

Chipman  LaCross  Hosiery  Mills  Co. 

Grey  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Higdon  Knitting  Mill,  Inc. 

R.  &.  S.  Hosiery  Mill 

Rogers  Hosiery  Mill,  Inc. 

Brittain  Hosiery  Mill 

East  Flat  Rock  Knitting  Mill 
Iredell  County 

Stimpson  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 

Walton  Hosiery  Mills,  Inc. 
Mitchell  County 

Robbins  Knitting  Co. 

The  Vaughan  Corp. 
Pasquotank  County 

Robinson  Manufacturing  Co. 
Limited  Hosiery  Operations 

(Listed  alphabetically  by  counties) 
Knitting  Other  Than  Hosiery,  Developing 

Rapidly  in  State 11  1-2  51 

Outerwear — Underwear 

Knit  Specialties 

Dyeing  and  Finishing 


:page  68) 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  1  1  AND  12,  1953-1954 THEE.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE 


Vol.        No.  Page 

DUNNAGAN,  M.  R.:  (Continued) 

Special  Articles  on  Hosiery  Firms:  Reasons 

Some  Omitted 11         1-2  52 

N.  C.  Hosiery  Men  Use  Profits  for  New, 

Efficient  Equipment 11         1-2  56 

Hosiery  Mill  List  Sources 11         1-2  56 

North  Carolina  Transportation 1 1         3-4  66 

Kendall  Again  Chairman;  Gregory,  Wolf 

Renamed;  Efird  New. 11         3-4  67 

'Tweetsie'  Heralded  in  Song  and  Story  at 

Boone,  Now  in  Virginia 1 1         3-4  68 

Early  Trails,  Trading  Paths;  State  Breaks 

Traffic  Limits 11         3-4  7 J 

Plank  Roads  Hailed  as  'Farmer  Railroads'; 

Lasted  a  Decade 11         3-4  71 

Fayetteville  and  Western  N.  C.  Early  Leader 

in  Railroad  Building;  Many  Short  Lines. 11         3-4  73 

Experimental  Railroad — North  Carolina's 

First  Railroad 
Intracoastal  Waterway  Pleasure  Craft, 

Freight  Boat  Artery 11         3-4  78 

Wilmington,  Morehead  Ports  Improved  to 

Increase  Shipping 1 1 

N.  C.  Wins  Trophy  Fourth  Time 1 1 

National  Trucking  Safety  Trophy 

"Driver  of  the  Year" 1 1 

Reid  Wins  National  Honors. 11 

Akers  Motor  Lines  Becomes  State's  Second 

Largest  Carrier..... 11 

Associated  Transport  Absorbed  N.  C.  Units, 

Nation's  Largest 1 1 

Central  Motor  Lines 11 

Pilot  Freight  Carriers,  Inc 11 

Great  Southern  Trucking  Co 11 

Overnite  Transportation  Co 11 

Miller  Motor  Express,  Inc 11 

Thurston  Motor  Lines  due  here  (see  Page  154) 

Johnson  Motor  Lines 11 

Fredrickson  Motor  Express  Corp 11 

Hennis  Freight  Lines,  Inc.. 11 

Heavy  Machinery 

Turner  Transfer,  Inc. 11 

Youngblood  Truck  Lines,  Inc. 11 

Helms  Motor  Express,  Inc 11 

Kilgo  Motor  Freight,  Inc 11 

Lewis  &  Holmes  Motor  Freight  Corp 11 

Harris  Express,  Inc 11 

S.  &.  W.  Motor  Lines,  Inc 11 

The  New  Dixie  Lines,  Inc — .     11 

W.  R.  Candler  Transfer  Co 1 1 

Jocie  Motor  Lines,  Inc 11 

Colonial  Motor  Freight  Line,  Inc 11 

Dickson  Transfer  Co.,  Inc 11 

C.  S.  Transfer,  Inc 11 

Neal  Hawkins  Transfer  Co.,  Inc... 11 

Blue  Ridge  Trucking  Co 11 

D.  &.  L.  Motor  Lines 11 

Edmac  Trucking  Co.,  Inc.  11 

Maybelle  Transport  Co.,  Inc 11 

Quality  Oil  Transport 11 

Petroleum  Transportation,  Inc. 11 

Waccamaw  Oil  Transport  Co 11 

Barnes  Truck  Line  Inc 11 

North  State  Motor  Lines,  Inc 11 

Gasoline,  Liquids 1 1 

Associated  Petroleum  Carriers,  Inc. 

Royster  Transport  Co.,  Inc. 

Tobacco  Principally 11  3-4  108 

H.  W.  Miller  Trucking  Co. 
Newspapers,  Picture  Films,  Dated  Items 

Need  Quick  Delivery 11         3-4  109 

The  Observer  Transportation  Co.,  Inc.  11         3-4  110 

The  Charlotte  (N.  C.)  Observer 

News  and  Courier  (Charleston,  S.  C.) 
Citizen  Express,  Inc 11         3-4  110 

Asheville  Citizen 

Times 
Carolina  Delivery  Service  Co.,  Inc 11         3-4  110 

News  and  Courier  (Charleston,  S.  C.) 

Greenville  (N.  C.)  News 
Utilities  Commission  Regulates  455  Truck 

Common  Carriers 11         3-4  111 

Piedmont,  Only  N.  C.  Airline,  'Best  Little 

Carrier' In  Nation 11         3-4  112 


Vol. 


No. 
3-4 
3-4 


3-4 

81 

3-4 

85 

3-4 

86 

3-4 

86 

3-4 

89 

3-4 

90 

3-4 

92 

3-4 

92 

3-4 

93 

3-4 

94 

3-4 

95 

3-4 

96 

3-4 

97 

3-4 

98 

3-4 

99 

3-4 

100 

3-4 

100 

3-4 

100 

3-4 

100 

3-4 

102 

3-4 

102 

3-4 

103 

3-4 

103 

3-4 

104 

3-4 

104 

3-4 

104 

3-4 

105 

3-4 

105 

3-4 

106 

3-4 

106 

3-4 

106 

3-4 

107 

3-4 

107 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

108 

3-4 

109 

3-4 

109 

3-4 

107 

N.  C,  Base  of  First  Air  Flight,  Finally  is 

Becoming  Air-Minded 11 

Luxury  Busses  Carry  Passengers  Locally 

and  Nationwide 11 

Atlantic  Greyhound  Lines 

Queen  City  Coach  Co. 

Smoky  Mountain  Stages,  Inc. 

Southern  Coach  Co. 

See  Minter,  John  D.,  and  O'Bryan,  R.  C. 
N.  C.  Bus  Association  Expands  to  Include 

All  Large  Carriers 11         3-4 

Scenic  All  the  Way — Smoky  Mountain  Tours 

Co v 1 1        3-4 

City  Busses  Operated  in  37  N.  C. 

Communities  by  31  Companies 11         3-4 

State  Licenses,  Regulates  130  Passenger 

Motor  Bus  Lines 11         3-4 

Plantation  Pipe  Line  Brings  Petroleum 

Products  to  State..._ 11         3-4 

Transcontinental  Pipes  Natural  Gas  Distri- 
buted in  State 11         3-4 

Public  Service  Co.,  of  N.  C,  Inc 11        3-4 

North  Carolina  Railroad  Association    11         3-4 

Four  N.  C.  Counties  Never  Had  Rail  Lines; 

Eight  Without  Lines  Now 11         3-4 

Southern  Largest  Railroad  Operation  in  North 

Carolina 1 1         3-4 

Carolina  and  Northwestern  Railway  Co 11         3-4 

Col.  A.  B.  Andrews,  N.  C.  Native,  Was  Lead- 
ing Railroad  Developer 11         3-4 

Five  Class  I,  Ten  Class  II  and  13  Class  III 

Railroads  in  This  State 11         3-4 

Atlantic  Coast  Line  Operates  Large  Rail 

System  From  N.  C. 11         3-4 

Davis  C.  McD.,  General  Offices  in 

Wilmington 

Old  Wilmington  Bell 

Rockingham  Railroad  Co. 

Virginia  and  Carolina  Southern  Railway  Co. 

East  Carolina  Railway 

Black  Mountain  Railroad 

Clinchfield  Railroad  Co. 
Norfolk  Southern  Has  90%  of  Operations  in 

North  Carolina 11         3-4 

Norfolk  and  Western  Operates  Three  Lines 

Into  North  Carolina 11         3-4 

Lynchburg  and  Durham 

Roanoke  and  Southern 

Virginia-Carolina 

Winston-Salem  Southbound 
Owned  jointly  by  N  &  W  and  ACL 
Many  Independent  Short  Line  Railroads  in 

North  Carolina „ 11         3-4 

Piedmont  and  Northern  Railway 

Durham  and  Southern  Railway 

High  Point  Thomasville  &  Denton  Railroad 
Co. 

Aberdeen  &  Rockfish  Railroad  Co. 

Alexander  Railroad  Company 

Laurinburg  and  Southern  Railroad  Co. 

Atlantic  &  Western  Railway  Co. 

Carolina  Southern  Railway  Co. 

Cliffside  Railroad  Co. 

Cape  Fear  Railways,  Inc. 

Warrenton  Rail  Road  Co. 
In  Receivership  30  Years — 

Tallulah  Falls  Railway  Co. 
Beaufort  &  Morehead  City  Railroad  Co. 
Graham  Co.  Railroad  Co. 
Many  North  Carolina  Railroads  Abandoned 

in  Past  Half  Century 11         3-4 

First  "Diesel"  Locomotive? 

Lawndale-Shelby  Railroad 

Carthage  Railroad 

Locomotive  Left  High  and  Dry 
N.  C.  Licensed  Over  Million  and  a  Third 

Motor  Vehicles  in  1953.__ 11         3-4 

Thurston  Motor  Lines 11         3-4 

Raleigh-Norfolk  Rail  Traffic  Opened  With 

Excursion  in  1853 11         3-4 

Railroad  Notes  and  Folks 11         3-4 

N.  C.  "Big  4"  Railroad 

Street  Railways 

Railroad  Shops'and  Centers 


AGE  4 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  1  1  AND  12,  1953-1954 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


IPAGE  69) 


UNNAGAN,  M.  R.:  (Continued) 

Railroad  Violence 

ClifFsides'  Bantam  Brood 

Weldon  Railroad  Center 

Wouldn't  Risk  Ducking 

N.  C.  Machinery  Manufacturing 12 

Firms  Failed  to  Supply  Data  or  Approve 

Prepared  Articles 12 

American  Machine  and  Foundry  Co 12 

Western  Electric  Large  Electronics  Plants 

in  Three  Cities 12 

Electronics 

Plant  Space 

Sales 

Payroll 

Benefits 

Thrift 

Community  Activities 

Recreation 

Safety 
Cornell-Duhilier  Electronics  Plants, 

Sanford  and  Fuquay 12 

Fuquay  Springs  Division 

Sanford  Division 

Cornell-Dubilier 
Pyramid  Electric  Starts  Capacitors  Plant  in 

Gastonia 12 

Sprague  Electric  Establishes  Capacitors 

Plant  in  Ashe 12 

Frank  J.  Sprague  Built  First  Street  Railway; 
Sons  Head  Ashe  Firm 
General  Electric  Has  Carolina  Welds  Plant 

in  Goldsboro 12 

Several  Other  Big  Electric  Firms  Plan  Large 

Plants  in  North  Carolina 12 

Didn't  Know  What  He  Made  12 

List  of  Important  But  Small  Machinery 

Making  N.  C.  Plants.. 1  3 

Agricultural  Machinery 

Metal  Working  Machinery 

Special  Industry  Machinery 

General  Industrial  Machinery  and 
Equipment 

Service  Industry  and  Household  Machines 

Miscellaneous  Machinery 

Electrical  Generating,  Transmission,  Dis- 
tribution and  Industrial  Apparatus 12 

Electrical  Appliances 
Three  National  Carbon  Flashlight-Battery 

Plants  in  State 12 

Great  Lakes  Carbon's  Large  Electrode  Plant 

at  Morganton._ 12 

John  M.  Morehead,  Carbon  Developer,  Bene- 
factor of  State  and  Alma  Matei 12 

Globe-Union  Makes  Auto  Batteries  at  Reids- 

ville  Branch.. 12 

N.  C.  Textile  Machinery  Men  Active  in 

National  Group  and  Exhibitions _ 12 

Cocker  Machine  and  Foundry  Co. 12 

Saco-Lowell  Shops.. 12 

Whitin  Machine  Works 12 

A.  B.  Carter,  Inc. 1 2 

Precision  Gear  &  Machine  Co 12 

Gaston  County  Dyeing  Machine  Co.... 12 

Ideal  Machine  Shops,  Inc. 

Ideal  Industries,  Inc. 12 

Norlander-Young  Machine  Co 12 

Dependable  Machine  Co.,  Inc 12 

Ferguson  Gear 12 

Burlington  Engineering  Co.,  Inc. 12 

Engineered  Plastics,  Incorporated 12 

Mooresville  Iron  Works... 12 

H.  E.  Crawford  Co.,  Inc.... 12 

Greensboro  Loom  Reed  Co.,  Inc 12 

Jenkins  Metal  Shops,  Inc. 12 

Gastonia  Roller,  Flyer  and  Spindle  Co.,  Inc 12 

Charlotte  Manufacturing  Co 12 

Dennison  Machine  Tool  Co.,  Inc 12 

Carolina  Loom  Reed  Co.. 12 

E.  F.  Rose  &  Co. 12 

Lincoln  Machine  &  Foundry,  Inc 12 

Excel  Textile  Supply 12 

Two  Large  Firms  Produce  Air-Conditioning 

Equipment 12 

The  Bahnson  Company 

Parks-Cramer  Company 


Vol.       No. 


Page 


1-2 

1-2 
1-2 

1-2 


1-2 

1-2 
1-2 


1-2 
1-2 

1-2 


1-2 


1-2 

1-2 

1-2 

1-2 

1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 

1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 
1-2 

1-2 


12 
14 

16 

17 
17 

17 


17 


IS 

19 

19 

21 

23 
23 
24 
25 
28 
29 
29 

30 
31 

32 
33 
33 
34 
35 
35 
36 
37 
37 
38 
38 
38 
39 
39 
39 

40 


50 


53 


Vol.        No.  Page 

Farm  Machinery  Making  Old-Important 

State  Industry 12         1-2  42 

Long  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc. 

Turner  Manufacturing  Co. 

Elardy  &  Newsome,  Inc. 

The  Cole  Manufacturing  Co. 

Harrington  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc. 

Florence-Mayo  Nuway  Co. 

Henry  Vann  Industries,  Inc 

Brown  Machine  Co. 
Wayne  Agricultural  Works,  Inc. 

John  A.  McKay  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc. 

Smith's  Heating,  Inc. 

Lynch  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc. 

Powell  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc 
Wide  Variety  Special  Machinery  Produced  in 

North  Carolina 12         1-2 

Wysong  &  Miles  Co.,  Inc. 

Newman  Machine  Company,  Inc. 

J.  C.  Steele  &  Sons,  Inc. 

Perfecting  Service  Company 

Monarch  Elevator  &  Machine  Co.,  Inc. 

J.  A.  Vance  Company 

Robotyper  Corporation 

Meadows  Mill  Company 

Miller  Equipment  Co.,  Inc. 

Wilmington  Iron  Works,  Inc. 

Standard  Designers,  Inc. 
Fishburne  Machinery  Co. 

Sanders  Company,  Inc. 

Standard  Crankshaft  &  Hydraulic  Co.,  Inc. 

Pres-On  Switch  Co. 

Powers  Wire  Products  Co.,  Inc. 

"Tweetsie" 12 

Salem  Iron  W'orks 12 

J.  A.  Tharrington  &  Sons 12 

State  Employment  a  Million.. 12 

N.  C.  Garment  Manufacturing 12 

New  Garment  firms  Started  and  to  Start 

Soon  in  This  State. 12 

Manx  Medium,  Small  Sized  Plants  Manu- 
facturing Apparel 12 

Articles  on  Several  Firms  Not  Included;  No 

Data  or  Approval 12 

Shirt  Manufacturing  Making  Rapid  Strides  in 

This  State.. 12 

Samsons,  Incorporated 

Southland  Manufacturing  Co. 

Troutman  Shirt  Co.,  Inc. 

Morehead  City  Garment  Co.,  Inc. 

McNeer  Dillon  Co. 

Garver  Manufacturing  Corp. 

The  Manhattan  Shirt  Co. 

Vanderbilt  Shirt  Co. 

Kinoca  Shirt  Co.,  Inc. 
State  A  Leader  in  Work  Clothing,  Play 

Clothing  Increasing.^ 12         3-4  83 

Blue  Bell,  Inc. 

Blue  Gem  Mfg.  Co. 

SiceloffMfg.  Co.,  Inc. 

W.  Koury  Company,  Inc. 

Devil-Dog  Mfg.  Co.,  Inc. 

Whiteville  Mfg.  Co.  (Blue  Jeans) 

Smart  Style,  Inc. 
(See  The  Salem  Co.,  Inc.,  Page  118-received 
too  late  tor  this  section) 

See  Poindexter,  K.  M.,  for  article  on 
Anvil  Brand,  Inc. 
Underwear,  Men,  Women,  Children,  Im- 
portant N.  C.  Industry 12         3-4  91 

United  Mills  Corp. 
I.  Schneierson  &  Sons,  Inc. 

Shadowline,  Inc. 

Stedman  Manufacturing  Co. 

Carolina  Underwear  Co.,  Inc. 

Quality  Mills,  Inc. 

Wolt/.  Textile  Products 

Beauty  Maid  Mills,  Inc. 

Indera  Mills  Company 

Pinehurst  Textiles,  Inc. 

L.  &.  L.  Manufacturing  Co. 

Dixie  Belle  Textiles,  Inc. 

Bien  Jolie  Foundation  Garments 

Glendale  Mfg.  Corp. 
State's  1954  Total  Payroll  Just  Under  Two 

Billion  Dollars 12         3-4  100 


1-2 

67 

1-2 

67 

1-2 

67 

1-2 

67 

3-4 

70 

3-4 

73 

3-4 

74 

3-4 

73 

3-4 

77 

(PAGE  70) 


I NDEX  TO  VOLUMES  1  1  AND  1  2,  1  953- 1  954 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


PAGE 


3-4 


3-4 


105 


10S 


3-4 

115 

3-4 

116 

3-4 
3-4 
3-4 

US 
118 
US 

Vol.        No.  Pa^e 

DUNNAGAN,  M.  R.:  (Continued) 

Big  Expansion  of  Outerwear  Production  in 

State  in  Decade . 12         3-4  100 

Southern  Knitwear  Mills,  Inc. 

Soderberg  and  Stern,  Inc. 

Sterntex,  Inc. 

Carolina  Industrial  Mfg.  Corp. 

The  Hadley  Corporation 

Iredell  Knitting  Mills,  Inc. 

Kar-Lyn  Corporation 

Martin  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc. 

Hadley  Manufacturing  Corp. 

Charlotte  Blouse  Co. 

Goldbloom's  Highland  Garment  Co. 
Millions  of  Work  Gioves  Made  in  Newton- 

Conover  Area 12 

Warlong  Glove  Mfg.  Co. 

Carolina  Glove  Co. 

Newton  Glove  Mfg.  Co. 
Numerous  Miscellaneous  Apparel  Items 

Produced  in  State 12 

Empire  Manufacturing  Corp. 

Gem-Dandy,  Inc. 

Burlington  Mills  Corp.  (Ribbon  Div.) 

France  Neckwear  Mfg.  Corp. 

Panda  Curtain  Co. 

Chase  Bag  Co. 

Golden  Belt  Mfg.  Co. 

R.  W.  Eldridge  Co. 

Brady  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc. 

Tiedright  Tie  Company 
Charlotte  Workshop  for  Blind  Trains  Many 

for  Normal  Lives 12 

Eligible  Unemployed  Federal  Workers  May 

Draw  Benefits .". 12 

ESC  State  Advisory  Council  Headed  by 

J.  A.  Bridger.___ 12 

Garment  Plants  in  Rural  Areas.. 12 

The  Salem  Co.,  Inc 12 

DURHAM,  TAYLOR  R.: 

Southern  Hosiery  Manufacturers'  Asso- 
ciation Aids  Industry... 11  1-2 

ELECTRONICS  PLANTS: 

Western  Electric  Large  Electronics  Plants 

in  Three  Cities.. 12 

Westinghouse  Starts  Large  Electronics 

Plant  in  Raleigh. 12 

Cornell-Dubilier  Electronics  Plants, 

Sanford  and  Fuquay... 12 

International  Resistance  Plants  at  Asheville 

and  Boone 12 

Pyramid  Electric  Starts  Capacitors  Plant  in 

Gastonia 12 

Sprague  Electric  Establishes  Capacitors 

Plant  in  Ashe 12 

General  Electric  Has  Carolina  Welds  Plant 

in  Goldsboro.,. 12 

Several  Other  Big  Electronics  Firms  Plan 

Large  Plants  in  North  Carolina 12 

Great  Lakes  Carbon's  Large  Electrode 

Plant  at  Morganton 12 

EMPLOYMENT 

State  Employment  a  Million.... 12 

See  lohnson,  Mrs   DeKay 
See  Raper,  Hugh  M. 

'FIRSTS'  IN  TRANSPORTATION: 

North  Carolina's  First  Railroad — "Experi- 
mental Railroad" 1 1  3-4 

First  Public  Meeting  to  Promote  Railroads 11         3-4  88 

First  Regularlv  Scheduled  Year-round  Airline 

in  U.  S.  Started  Aug.  21,  1926.. 11         3-4  106 

N.  C.  Base  of  First  Air  Flight..., 11         3-4  113 

Several  Firsts   and  Little  Known  Facts 

About  Railroads 11         3-4  128 

First  "Diesel"  Locomotive. 11         3-4  152 

First  Street  Railway  Built  by  Frank  J. 

Sprague 12         1-2  14 

FLASHLIGHT  AND  AUTO  BATTERY  PLANTS: 
Three  National  Carbon  Flashlight-Battery 

Plants  in  State 12         1-2  18 

Globe-Union  Makes  Auto  Batteries  at 

Reidsville  Branch 12         1-2  21 


1-2 

5 

1-2 

7 

1-2 

9 

1-2 

11 

1-2 

12 

1-2 

14 

1-2 

16 

1-2 

1  7 
1 

1-2 

19 

1-2 

67 

Vol.        No. 
FRONT  COVER  PICTURES: 

Samples  of  Quality  Women's  and  Men's 

Hosiery  Produced  in  North  Carolina. 11  1-2 

Methods  of  Travel  and  Transportation  of 

Yesteryear  in  North  Carolina 11  3-4 

Western  Electric  Plant  at  Winston-Salem 

and  Westinghouse  Electric  Plant,  Raleigh...     12  1-2 

Some  of  the  many  items  produced  by 

some  200  apparel  plants  operating  in 

this  State.... 12         3-4 

GARMENT  MANUFACTURING: 

N.  C.  Garment  Manufacturing 12         3-4 

North  Carolina  Apparel  Production  Shows 

Big  Expansion 12         3-4 

New  Garment  Firms  Started  and  to  Start 

Soon  in  This  State..._ 12         3-4 

Many  Medium,  Small  Sized  Plants  manu- 
facturing Apparel _ 12         3-4 

Articles  on  Several  Firms  Not  Included:  No 

Data  or  Approval 12         3-4 

Highlights  of  Greenboro's  Industry  and 

Employment..., 12         3-1 

Shirr  Manufacturing  Making  Rapid  Strides 

in  This  State 12         3-4 

State  A  Leader  in  Work  Clothing,  Play 

Clothing  Increasing.,. 12         3-4 

Underwear,  Men,  Women,  Children,  Impor- 
tant N.  C.  Industry 12         3-4 

Big  Expansion  of  Outerwear  Production  in 

State  in  Decade 12         5-4 

Millions  of  W7ork  Gloves  Made  in  Newton- 

Conover  Area 12         3-4 

Numerous  Miscellaneous  Apparel  Items 

Produced  in  State 12         3-4 

Charlotte  Workshop  for  Blind  Trains  Many 

for  Normal  Lives '..... 12         3-4 

Garment  Plants  in  Rural  Areas,, 12         3-4 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R.,  for  articles  on 
individual  garment  manufacturing  firms 
GREENSBORO'S  INDUSTRY  AND  EMPLOYMENT 

See  lohnson,  Mrs.  E.  DeKav 
HIGH  POINT'S  INDUSTRY 
See  lohnson,  Mrs.  E.  DeKav 
HOSIERY 

See  Andrews,  Mrs.  Mildred  Barnwell; 

Dunn,  E.  Stanhope;  Dunnagan,  M.  R.; 

Durham,  Tavlor  R.;  Johnson,  Mrs.  E. 

DeKay;  Kelly,  Paul;  Raper,  Hugh  M.; 

Shinn,  W.  E. 
HUNTER,  FRED  C. 

Public  Transportation  Systems  Regulated 

by  State  62  Years,,. 11         3-4 

INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  9  AND  10,  1951-1952       11        1-2 
JOHNSON,  MRS.  E.  DeKAY: 

Highlights  of  High  Point's  Industry 11  1-2 

Highlights  of  Winston-Salem's  Industry 

and  Employment 11  3-4 

Highlights  of  Charlotte's  Industry  and 

Employment,., 12         1-2 

Highlights  of  Greenboro's  Industry  and 

Employment 12         3-4 

KELLY,  PAUL: 

Steady  Growth  in  State's  Hosiery  Industry 

Since  War 11  1-2 

KNITTING  ARTS  EXHIBITION 
ATLANTIC  CITY,  APRIL-MAY,  1953 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 
KNITTING  OTHER  THAN  HOSIERY, 

DEVELOPING  RAPIDLY  IN   STATE 11        1-2 

MACHINERY  MANUFACTURING: 
Improving  Textile  Machinery  Vital  to 

State's  Industry,, 12         1-2 

Farm  Machinery  Making  Old-Important 

State  Industry 12         1-2 

Wide  Variety  Special  Machinery  Produced 

in  North  Carolina 12         1-2 

List  of  Important  Small  Machinery  Making 

N.  C.  Plants 12         1-2 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R.,  for  articles  on  in- 
dividual machinery  manufacturing  firms 
McCAULLY,  H.  J.,  JR..: 

International  Resistance  Plants  at  Asheville 

and  Boone 12         1-2 

See  Electronics  Plants 


\GE  6 


INDEX  TO  VOLUMES  1  1  AND  12,  1953-1954 THE  E.  S.  C.  QUARTERLY 


(PAGE  71) 


INTER,  JOHN  D.: 

arolina  Coach  Co 

See  Moror  Passenger  Lines 

1SCELLANEOUS: 

Tweetsie',  Heralded  in  Song  and  Story  at 

Boone,  Now  in  Virginia 

'Smoky  Joe" — Fisherman 

"Driver  of  the  Year" 

Reid  Wins  National  Honors 

)ld  Wilmington  Bell 

Railroad  Notes  and  Folks 

More  Than  £22,000,000  in  Benefits 


Vol. 
11 


No. 
5-4 


Page 


115 


5-4 

68 

5-4 

86 

5-4 

86 

5-4 

86 

5-4 

155 

5-4 

155 

12 

1-2 

55 

OEN,  MRS.  GRACE  Z.: 

Transport  Workers  Double  in  Decade;  Bulk 

in  Ten  Counties.. .       11 

Chart- 
Trend  of  Covered  Employment  in  N.  C. 
Transportation  Industries  1942-1952 
Tables — 

Average  Monthly  Covered  Employment  in 

Transportation  Industry  1952 
Covered  Workers  and  Earnings  in  Ten 
Counties  Elaving  Heaviest  Transportation 
Employment  1952 
Electrical  Industry  Sparks  Huge  Machinery 

Making  Growth.. 12 

Charts — 

Trend  of  Covered  Employment  in  N.  C. 
Machinery  Manufacturing  1947-1955 
Covered  Employment  in  Manufacturing 
of  Electrical  Machinery,  Equipment  and 
Supplies — Communications  and  Other 
1944-1955 
Table- 
Covered  Workers  and  Earnings  in  Eight 
Counties  Having  Heaviest  Machinery 
Manufacturing  Employment  Fourth 
Quarter  1955 


11 


5-4 


1-2 


3-4 


69 


87 


1 

5-4 

89 

1 

5-4 

90 

1 

5-4 

92-109 

11 
11 

5-4 
5-4 

115 
115-125 

11 

5-4 

125 

11 

5-4 

125 

OTOR  FREIGHT  LINES: 

McLean  Becomes  Largest  Trucking  Firm  in 

Southeast  States 

Akers  Motor  Lines  State's  Second  Largest 

Carrier... 

Associated  Transport.  Nation's  Largest... 

Articles  on  Motor  Lines  in  the  State 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

See  Utilities  Commission 

OTOR  PASSENGER  LINES: 

Luxuiy  Busses  Carry  Passengers  Locally 
and  Nation-wide 

Articles  on  Busses  in  the  State 

City  Busses  Operated  in  57  N.  C.  Communi- 
ties by  51  Companies 

State  Licenses,  Regulates  150  Passenger 

Motor  Bus  Lines 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R.;  Minter,  John  D. 
See  Utilities  Commission 

.  C.  WINS  NATIONAL  TRUCKING 
SAFETY  TROPHY  FOR  FOURTH  TIME 
See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

EWSOM,  CULLEN  H.,  "DRIVER  OF 

THE  YEAR"... 11        5-4  86 

BRYAN,  R.  C: 

Seashore  Transportation  Co. 11  3-4  121 

See  Transportation 

EDMONT,  ONLY  N.  C.  AIRLINE,  'BEST 
LITTLE  CARRIER'  IN  NATION 

See  Airlines  112 

PE  LINES: 

Plantation  Pipe  Line  Brings  Petroleum 

Products  to  State._. 11         3-4  124 

Transcontinental  Pipes  Natural  Gas 

Distributed  in  State 11         3-4  126 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R. 

DINDEXTER,  K.  M.: 

Anvil  Brand,  Inc...._ 12         5-4  84 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R.,  for  other  firms 
producing  work  and  play  clothes 


1-2 

10-11 

1-2 

15 

5-4 
5-4 
5-4 

67 

75 

84 

5-4 
5-4 

155 
154 

3-4 


1-2 


55 

5 
117 


86 


12 


Vol.       No.  Page 

PHOTOGRAPHS  OF  IMPORTANT 
FIGURES  IN  NORTH  CAROLINA: 
Pioneers  and  Leaders  in  North  Carolina 

Hosiery  Industry 11 

W.  E.  Shinn,  Head  of  State  College's 

Hosiery  Dept 1 1 

Members  of  Emplovment  Security  Commission 

of  North  Carolina 1 1 

N.  C.  Highway  Commission  Members 11 

N.  C.  Motor  Carriers  Association  Officers 11 

Col.  A.  B.  Andrews,  Leading  Railroad 

Developer ............  11 

C.  McD.  Davis,  President  of  ACL._ 11 

RAILROADS: 

See  Dunnagan,  M.  R.;  Bell,  C.  E.; 
White,  James  M.;  Davis,  C.  McD. 

RAPER,  HUGH  M.: 

Study  of  Economy-Cost  of  Employment 

Security  Program 1 1  1-2 

Purposes  of  Study 
U.  N.  C.  Business  School  Study 
Legislative  Recommendations 
Electrical  Products  Manufacture  Growing 

Rapidly  in  State..., .     12         1-2 

Benefit  Charges  to  Industry  Groups  in 

Fiscal  Year  1954 12         3-4 

Table- 
Payroll  Variations  1954  and  1955  Compu- 
tation and  Relationship  Between  Payrolls 
and  Benefit  Charges  for  Selected  Industries 

REID  PERRY  H.,  WINS  NATIONAL 
HONORS.. 11 

SHINN,  W.  E.: 

Effective  Knitting,  Hosiery  Instruction  at 

State  College 1 1 

Seamless  Hosiery  Section 
Nylon  Hosiery  Section 
Circular  Knitwear  Section 
Garment  Cutting  and  Seaming 
Warp  Knitting,  Flat  Knitting 
Courses  of  Study 

SPAULDING,  GEORGE  E.: 

McLean  Becomes  Largest  Trucking  Firm  in 

Southeast  States 11         3-4 

STATE  COLLEGE: 

Effective  Knitting,  Hosiery  Instruction  at 

State  College 
See  Shinn,  W.  E. 

TRANSPORTATION: 

North  Carolina  Transportation 11 

Transport  Workers  Double  in  Decade;  Bulk 

in  Ten  Counties.. 11 

Early  Trails,  Trading  Paths;  State  Breaks 

Traffic  Limit 11 

Public  Transportation  Regulated  bv  State 

62  Years 11 

See  Railroads;  Freight  Motor  Lines;  Pas- 
senger Motor  Lines;  Airlines;  Pipe  Lines; 

Waterways 

UTILITIES  COMMISSION: 

Members  and  Key  Officials 11 

Public  Transportation  Regulated  bv  State 

62  Years..... : 11 

Regulates  455  Truck  Common  Carriers 11 

List  of  Licensed  Carriers 

WATERWAYS: 

Intracoastal  Waterway  Pleasure  Craft, 

Freight  Boat  Artery 11 

Wilmington,  Morehead  Ports  Improved  to 

Increase  Shipping 11 

WHITE,  JAMES  M.: 

Several  'Firsts'  and  Little  Known  Facts 

About  Railroads 11         5-4 

WILSON,  JEFF  B.: 

Motor  Carriers  Develop  Rapidly  Into  Vital 

State  Industry — 11         3-4 

WINSTON-SALEM'S  INDUSTRY  AND 
EMPLOYMENT 

See  Johnson,  Mrs.  E.  DeKay 


87 


3-4 

66 

La 

3-4 

69 

5-4 

70 

1!j 

5-4 

83 

_0> 
% 

Co 

(0 

c 

5-4 

83 

"o 

m 

5-4 

83 

U 

5-4 

111 

i_ 

o 

Z 

5-4 

78 

3-4 

81 

128 


84 


E.  Si  COMMISSION 
Box  589,  Raleigh,  N.  C 


p  a 

F| 

si 


cd  t* 


Official  Business 


_TO_. 

MISS   CARRIE  L. 
STATE  LIBgAflY 
RALEIGH  V«C."  • 


BROUGHTOM 


Employment  Security  Ma 


I 


UNITED    STATES    POSTAGE    ACCOUNT! 
FOR    UNDER   ACT   OF    CONGRESS 


2gg   g*    m5   aog? 


*  M  °"       n- 


6  o 


»        X  W  £  ' 


2.    2  p     ~  p  3      :r:3  - 


A  o 
I-  »  -i 

tea.  9 


g^ 


»?s;   2 


3 
p  i 

3  I* 

3   00 

p 

\-t       TO 

5    ;a 


=.    3  „  r«  »     Si »     y  5"  S      21  2 


3^ 

cc 

La 


3  w 


23     as 


Is  2  W 


<T  ^       »  o>    ^  r 


CO 

f       or 

BT 
o  o 

2      a* 
c      »»2.   = 


63" 

ft) 

o  » 


P  TO 


TO      S' 


(5  o 

CD    3." 


a" 

2  a 


r*  CD 


tdo 


s^ 


S3     — 

n  2. 


&         3 


m  P  3/ 


o 
g-g'    5 

■    ^  cc  m 

3  o  CO 

O  c 

sil 

3 
C^TO 

hd  pa 

7X  3  W 

TO  *. 

^    CD 


P  i-i2 

cc'  3 


CB  o 

a. 


72 

f 


g 
o 


g 

3 


=?&] 


•"§  I 

^TO    ~ 

3  r= 
a    3 

3  O' 

•w  S3 

O  e* 

o" 

3jO 
tf*  CD 

2  ° 

-  w 


S  o 


33 

pa   o 


a  2, 

'      CD 

w  " 
o  a 

3  3 
CD   El 


CD 

'•<  3"  cc 

•730 


*s 


0>         gB 


oo  B 


3 

P    h- 

TO  to 


a  1 
*  a 


?W 


h^H 


55° 


;o> 

3j  <    CD 

g"  CD   < 


-teg  I 

733  3 

■   "<a  g. 

!>    a 

si's 

•     B  ~ 

3g 
09  p 
'      D 

S"  a 

S02 
0  :r"-3 
c  2. 
3  » 

S"  5'a 

5.  B  P 


>■  CD 


CD   U* 

►-j  c^ 
S^ 

p    CL 

B  P 


COp 
CD   CD 


•S>    S) 


o-a 


p 

3  cc 
p  a 

to  a. 

15  CTQ 


M  to 
CC 

W 

Eg 
D  E. 

B 

»  00 


p 

132  = 
B  g  ? 
n  3  -, 
cc  P  a. 

•    IPS     I 

3r» «« 

B        W 

s     * 

B-M 

C  JfO 

3  ■  P 

"1  OrC 


M    "J 


-1  a 
g™ 
£  E 

TO  TO 


p  o 

Q,  CD 


S 

-    3" 
3    CD 

CD    P 

?    °- 
31? 


hjM 


^B- 
p"W 


O  w 


ho! 


-3  ^x 

-CD  ^T  — 

-    O  ^-3 

^  "  -  to 


*2 


p.  c 

c  a 


CD  J,         CD 


O 
o 

C 

a 
p 
< 

E 


5  o  < 
P  ffa 
a  V 
wi  P 
P  ?  5 

ggw 

o  p  — 
3  a  o- 
p*  p  to 

•    TO  ^ 


5  w 

<    CD 

5'  B 

TO  3* 


=  u 

m  S. 


►n0 


a' 

CD   CO 

S  J 

o  6 


^=7 

P  cc    I 

Lr^a 

S°  w  a> 

ag 

•    o 
P 

q  w 

P  c 

""  & 
t-iS' 


X 

X 

X 

GO    ^ 
g    "0 

TC  2. 

2  = 

So 

P   >< 

TO    | 
CD 

r1  *- 

2SS 

coS  "   2p 

r*  55  w    -  =■ 


a    a 


o  •-.  - 
S  2E 


<6 


1    CO 


a 


cdO- 
CJC0 


g_    as.3 


^Ss 


to  2! 


ac 


esp      m^ 


p'O. 
C   3 


Oco 

M>   O 

<!    00 

Sag 

o| 

3=3 


3     3  ^ 

cc       "^3^ 
S      t»2 


p 
<  CO  — 


3} 


»f 


aw 

or, 
a  o 

3? 


■  a 

tag 


3 

P  cs 
p  -• 

TO  3 
CD  TO 


P    Q. 

£  o 


—  —  CO 

3    P    fD 
TO  ?    * 

O   m 

'  to  r. 

CD     I 

a^i 
?■*■    4* 

Qco 

p  S!^ 


o  a  3 

'    3-e 


1  X  *9  P      S  =• 
n '  m  =      ■     S- 

-  3   2.      „  < 


3    P^' 


to  a      ch' 


30 

»  •     P  — 

sr      3« 
a>       P  3^ 

c?^P« 


-•>?    - 


CD 


3 

a-5 


~         —SO 


2  > 

CD    g 


M  /.• : 


<-±u>  P 

CD    E=-V 
3    —2 
0.3   g 


3.     ,  CT      —  ^ 


o  2.^ 
3  3  p 


.  —         eSC     ~  „o 


M  cc 


CVy-j 


OS. 
C*3 


mto 

P  o 

e  b 


1-      a      ►-■ 


S  10 


W     2. 


f72CD_: 


;d    as      -5 

!5"  ■  -  oE  - 

:  p    o     3|cd  ^ 

rr  hrt  3*  — 


p  a  Sfg   m 

^-  CD       o         3- 


p    ^)C5   m 
Vi   3    CD   Cg 

°    3 


3     . 


'S    S 


o  a 

tfB 
CC   CD 


Wo 

c?r 


3  B 

n  a 

CD   t-, 


g3l 


CO   H 


CO 

3hMm 

52s." 

2.S-3P 

D.3  P  < 

■      -1   «1  CD 

TO  --B 


-—  —.  a 

=->    J? 

£2 

CD  p  td 

»  p  E 
r1  5 

TO 


3:P 


•"a 
gS. 
S  S 


as 

P  o 


<2t»» 
c=  s  a 


S2  = 

3cD    " 

2  o 
2;g  3 

O""     o 
CD         3 

00 


B   * 

(t       1-1 

g  a^ 

■<J  cc  . 

55"" 


- '  CI 


CO  M  00  — * 

r-    O  -•  O  = 

*j    GO  1    Oi  3 

"2.     ffios 

<T-    ea    W    g 

«^2  I 

3  2«M 
R  3J      3 

MCD  !     3. 

3«  3:3 
Fog" 

a      73 

wgwg 


as?  3 


*   CD 

Cdo 

2  Bf 


£  O 

-  3 


<<»      -1  t=-=      <■«      mS 
r^^      3:"™c      ^p      o  — 


2    a « 


*    a 


p  ^     v-  ^    r 


a  cd 
>   1=    2, 


BjB 


E  3  ' 

TO  "JJi 

-••Si 

g=a 
wn    3- 

O   r*  c>  D« 


,5  ?H 


-a 

3  • 


a 

-       TO 


&3     h-t 

TO 

B 

3| 


3  B! 

P  3 
TO  TO 


3  a 

CD    O 


I  2.= 

3l>j 

I? 

TO    ., 

5  a 

CC   ^ 

B^ 

CD    Q 


a 

3  O 


3  a 

P  3 


MO 

p  o 
vi  3 

O    CD 

D. 

b  a 


3T 

al 


•  a 

chE 


STATE  LIBRARY  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA 
3  3091  007481096